2011 Consulting Application Guide Contents Eaton

Electrical Sector
15th Edition June 2012
Consulting Application Guide
September 2011
Sheet 00001
2011 Consulting Application Guide Contents
i ii
Technical Discussion
Introduction Alphabetical Index Power Distribution Systems Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring Advanced & Electronic Metering Protective & Predictive Relays
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
22
Low Voltage Distribution Equipment
Panelboards Lighting Control Systems Pow-R-Command BuswayPow-R-Way III Low Voltage Transfer Switches Power Circuit Breakers & Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Switching Devices Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Low Voltage Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Low Voltage Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays & Pilot Devices Uninterruptible Power Supplies Surge Protection (SPD) & Power Conditioning Products Power Factor Capacitors & Harmonic Filters Resistance Grounding Systems Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment Coordinated Electrical Houses Solar (PV) Systems Interconnect Cat Generator Paralleling Switchgear Power System Studies & Field Services
23 24 25 26
1 2
Power Management Products Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide
3 4 5 6 7
Circuit Breakers & Safety Switches
27 28 29
Medium Voltage Equipment
8 9 10 11
Control Products
30 31 32 33
FusesMedium Voltage Motor Starters (AMPGARD) Medium Voltage BuswayMedium Voltage Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Secondary Unit Substations Secondary Below 1000V Unitized Power Centers Substation Transformers Pad-Mounted Transformers Spot Network Equipment Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage SwitchboardsLow Voltage
Power Quality
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide
12 13 14 15
Unit Substations & Transformers
16 17 18 19
Low Voltage Distribution Equipment

CA08104001E
20 21
For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
2011 Consulting Application Guide Copyright
September 2011
Sheet 00 002
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes . Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
ANSI Voltage Classications

Please note that in the text of the Consulting Application Guide the term low voltage generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and lower. The term medium voltage generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and up to 38 kV.
Terms and Conditions

Individual product list prices are published in Eatons Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Selling Policy SP03000001E.
Technical and Descriptive Publications

This publication contains technical data for the proper selection of many products and systems. It may not cover all product details and/or application considerations. Additional information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Field Salesperson or Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our Web site at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Products are sold by Eaton Corporation as commercial grade product not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certication will be required for use of the product in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
Installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Mass. CAT, Caterpillar, its respective logos and Caterpillar Yellow, as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufciently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Ofce. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eatons electrical business unit. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton Corporation. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
Copyright 2011, Eaton Corporation.
CA08104001E
Introduction
September 2011
Sheet i 001
i-1
Welcome
Welcome to the 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide. This document is designed to assist an electrical consultant or a power system design engineer in the layout and specication of equipment. In this expanded edition, you will nd complete details on our extensive line of distribution, control and power quality products and services. Please be sure to browse the various sections to gain a sense of Eatons overall capabilities. The 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide is available in printed hardcopy version, electronically at www.eaton.com/consultants and on CD, as well as in iBook format. We created this guide to make it easy for you to do business with us, and continue to offer it to you in multiple formats to meet your various needs.
New Features of the Consulting Application Guide15th Edition

The 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide contains many new products, services and applicationspecic information. The Power Distribution Systems tab has been updated, and the entire book has been organized to make it easy to locate items. It is a reference guide that should be on your bookshelf so that as questions arise, you can quickly locate the data and pass it on to your customers or clients. We have included two brand new sections in this edition, one for solar (PV) systems and another dedicated to electrical vehicle supply equipment. Detailing Eatons offering in these areas, these new sections show how Eaton is innovating new products to meet the new power and infrastructure demands of the world.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton Corporation is a Global Leader in Power Distribution, Power Quality, Control and Automation, and Monitoring Products
At Eaton, we believe that a reliable, efcient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know whats important to you.
Contents Page
Similar to the 14th Edition, we have grouped the contents page to allow you to easily nd products that share similar electrical characteristics and/or applications. These groupings include:

Power management products Medium voltage equipment Unit substations and transformers Low voltage distribution equipment Circuit breakers and safety switches Control products Power quality products
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all that we do: Reliabilitymaintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime Efciencyminimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact Safetyidentify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most Our new guide shows the breadth of our combined power distribution, control, quality and management product offerings. Also included are tabs dedicated to our engineering services operation. You may select with condence from the products for residential, commercial and industrial power distribution and control. While Eaton celebrates its 100th year, our heritage is rich with more than 200 years of innovation and leadership from acquisitions and legendary brands. This experience has resulted in many innovations in distribution and industrial control productseach incorporating leading-edge technology to provide the highest value to our customers. Our engineers and scientists are recognized throughout the industry and around the world as experts in a wide range of disciplines including: photoelectric optical technology, arc interruption, vacuum technology, digital and analog electronics, communications technology and the application of power semiconductors.
You may also notice that we have elected to make a few of the sections dealing with more specialized products available as electronic only. These sections are included in their entirety on the CD, iBook and Web versions of the resource, but by removing them from the printed version, we are able to dedicate more pages to products that we believe are of a broader interest to electrical system designers.
CD and Product Specications

In addition to containing sections that were not printed in the book, the CD version also contains a complete set of product specications in PDF and MS Word format, as well as breaker trip curves. This CD can be ordered by lling out a form on www.eaton.com/consultants. To aid you in nding the proper Typical Specication Guide les, a straightforward and intuitive navigation system has been developed. You have the option of navigating through the traditional Table of Contents or Alphabetical Index contained in the guide. We have built an interactive navigation system with submenus and links that will guide you to the correct product specications, permitting you to build a complete set of specications with relative ease.
CA08104001E
i-2
Introduction
September 2011
Sheet i 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Updated Information
We continue to print this publication because we have received feedback that users love the quick access to this valuable reference publication. However, the most up-to-date information and specs are always available on our Web site at www.eaton.com/consultants. Also on this page, users will nd product spotlights, hot topic coverage, technical papers, listings of Launch and Learn presentations, newsletters and training materials. Please visit this Consultant Resource Page and bookmark it in your browser. Refer back to this page to stay current on Eatons electrical business.
Eaton Corporation
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efcient and safe power is available when its needed most. With unparalleled knowledge of electrical power management across industries, experts at Eaton deliver customized, integrated solutions to solve our customers most critical challenges. Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the application. But, decision makers demand more than just innovative products. They turn to Eaton for an unwavering commitment to personal support that makes customer success a top priority. For more information, visit www.eaton.com/electrical.
Delivering the Promise of Power Through the Power of Information

Theres no doubt about it: Accurate product and application information makes for better decisions, better systems and satised customers. Thats why weve completely revised and updated the 15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide. This volume is your point-of-entry, your touchstone and your guide to the most innovative products and support services in the business. Comments? E-mail: marketingsupportEG@eaton.com Or write: Eaton Corporation 1000 Cherrington Parkway Moon Township, PA 15108-4312 Attn: Catalog Department
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 001
ii-1
A
AC Drive Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 AC Drive Acceleration and Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 AC Drive Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 AC Drive Compatibility Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 AC Drive Input Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5 AC Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Accessories Adjustable Frequency Drives M-Max Series AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-3 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-17 C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-8 Active Harmonic Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7 Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42 Addressable Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-26 Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 31.5-18 CFX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-1 31.3-24 CPX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 31.2-18 H-Max Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-2 H-Max Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-1 31.5-18 IntelliDisconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-11 IntelliPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-11 HVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-1 31.3-24 M-Max Series AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-1 31.1-5 MVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-1 31.1-5 SVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4-1 31.4-20 Adjustment Factors for Calculating Total AC Drive System Efficiency Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 Advanced and Electronic Metering Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-13 IQ Flange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.4-1 Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3 Sub-Network Master Local Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-2 IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-13 AEGIS Powerline Filters Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20 AFD Output Harmonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Air Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-7, 18.0-9, 21.0-2, 21.0-9 21.0-11, 26.1-6 26.1-26 Alternative Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-35 AMPGARD Medium Voltage Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.1-40 AMPGARD SC9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1, 10.2-1 10.2-16 ANSI Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6 BuswayMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2 AR Series Low Voltage Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-8 Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI). . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-3, 27.2-13
Arc Flash Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3-1 Arc Flash Safety Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3-1 41.3-6 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-13, 20.1-10, 22.0-5 Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1, 5.2-1 5.2-5, 5.5-19 5.5-40 Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5, 5.5-19 5.5-40 Low Voltage Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-6 27 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-30 5.5-33 38 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-34 5.5-38 5 and 15 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-19 5.5-29 ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.4-1 25.4-16 Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . 7.3-3, 8.0-1, 12.0-1 Automatic Transfer Switches Medium VoltageVacuum Breaker. . . . . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13 Autotransformer Starters (LV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2 Auxiliary Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B
Batteries Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-5, 40.2-2, 40.2-3, 40.2-9, 40.3-2, 40.3-3, 40.3-11, 40.4-14 UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-1 33.2-11, 33.2-21 Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-6 Bearing and DV/DT Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 BIOTEMP Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-7, 13.0-8, 14.0-12, 16.0-2 16.0-5, 16.0-13 Boric Acid FusesMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11 Braking, Regeneration Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-24 Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27 Breaker-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.2-1 25.2-11 Bridge Joint Power Takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44 Building Automation Systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 Building Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 Building Information Model (BIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1 Bushing Box Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-17 Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51 Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-1 24.0-52 Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24 Busway Joint Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51 Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7
C
Cable Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-16, 24.0-44 Calculating Total AC Drive System Efficiency Table, Adjustment Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
CA08104001E
ii-2 Alphabetical Index

May 2012
Sheet ii 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Capacitor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1, 27.3-6, 35.0-3, 35.0-4 Capacitor Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-2, 35.0-9 Capacitor Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1, 5.4-4, 5.4-5, 35.0-3, 35.0-4 Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-1 35.6-7 AUTOVAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2-1 35.2-11 Cast Coil Transformers Primary Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16 Cast Coil Transformers Secondary Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-18, 14.0-19, 14.0-37, 14.0-38 Caterpillar Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5 Closed-Transition Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.3-1 Closed-Transition Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-4 Engine Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-3, 40.3-3 Generator Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5 Load Shed/Load Add . . . . 40.0-4, 40.1-4, 40.2-1 40.2-3, 40.2-9, 40.2-11, 40.2-12, 40.3-1, 40.3-2, 40.3-11 40.3-13, 40.4-4, 40.4-5, 40.4-9, 40.4-15, 40.5-4, 40.5-5 Modbus Network . . . . . . . . 40.2-2, 40.2-3, 40.3-2, 40.3-3 Paralleling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-5, 40.1-5 Soft Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-1, 40.5-4, 40.5-5 Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-2, 40.0-4, 40.0-5, 40.2-1, 40.2-2, 40.3-1, 40.3-2 Circuit Breaker Cable Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-5 Circuit Breaker DataSwitchboards . . . . . . . . 21.0-14 21.0-16 Circuit Breaker Retrofit and Replacement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-1 41.5-4 Circuit Breaker Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-2, 27.4-8 Circuit Breaker Wire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-8 Circuit Breakers Air Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 18.0-7, 18.0-9, 21.0-2, 21.0-9 21.0-11, 26.1-6 26.1-26 Insulated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12 26.1-14 Molded Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-1 27.4-54 Circuit Breakers Molded Case Interrupting Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-6 Circuit BreakersMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40 Circuit BreakersMolded Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-3 27.4-54 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-7, 27.1-8, 27.4-33, 27.4-34 Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37 Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37 Cable Selection/Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-8 Capacitor Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-6 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . 27.2-3, 27.4-4, 27.4-45 27.4-47 DC Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-14
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8 27.4-9 Digitrip RMS Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8, 27.4-9 Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8, 27.4-9 Earth Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-12 Engine Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-19 Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-4, 27.4-5, 27.4-11, 27.4-12 Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-20 Molded Case Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1 Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . 27.2-2, 27.3-2, 27.3-5 Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . 27.2-1, 27.2-2, 27.3-5, 27.4-38 27.4-40 QUICKLAG Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 27.4-54 Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-8 27.2-11 Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-9 Transformer Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-6, 27.3-7 TRI-PAC (Fused) Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 27.4-46, 27.4-47 Welding Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-26, 27.2-20 100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-5 27.2-7 400415 Hertz Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-16 Circuit BreakersMolded-Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12 Cable Selection/Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-5 Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12 Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 1.3-12 Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8 Series Combination Tables . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-12 22.0-20 Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-10 22.0-20 Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3 Circuit BreakersNRX (Series) Compact Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13 Circuit Breakers, Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-48 27.4-54 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42 Earth Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42 8002500 Amperes (R-Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-32 Circuit Breakers, Power Magnum DS Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1 26.1-26 Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 27.4-54 Clean Power Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 31.2-18 CM52 Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39 Codes and Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6 Cogeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 Combination Starter Bus Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42 Combiner Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.3-1, 39.3-2 Commercial Metering Switchboards . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11 Commissioning of Electrical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-1 Communication Modules BACnet CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 CANopen (Slave) CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 DeviceNet CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays. . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3 C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-8 CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 003
ii-3
Ethernet/IP CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 Johnson Controls Metasys N2 CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 LonWorks CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 Modbus CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3 C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-8 Modbus/TCP CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 PROFIBUS CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3 C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-9 Communication Network Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-1 2.1-26, 18.0-30 Communications H-Max Series Drives (IntelliDisconnect) Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-14 H-Max Series Drives (IntelliPass) Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-14 H-Max Series Drives (Open) Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6 Compatibility AC Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Conductor Ampacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16 1.5-18 Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14 1.5-16 Constant Horsepower Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 Constant Horsepower Load Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 Constant Torque Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 Constant Torque Load Figure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 Construction Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-50 Contactor-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.1-1 25.1-15 Transfer Switches Bypass Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7 Contactors, Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 30.2-11 Control Centers, Motorsee Motor Control Centers Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1 Cooling Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 Coordinated Electrical Houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5 Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3 1.4-6 CPX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 31.2-18, 31.5-1 31.5-18 CSL-3 High-Efficiency Transformers . . . . . . . . . 19.1-4, 19.1-17, 19.1-28, 19.1-33 Cubed Exponential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Current Limiting Breakers FCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-45 LCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-45 Magnum MDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-5, 26.1-6, 26.1-10 CA08104001E
Magnum SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1, 26.1-5, 26.1-6, 26.1-12 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-3, 27.4-4, 27.4-45 27.4-47 Current Limiting Fuses Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12, 9.0-1 9.0-11 Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-3 Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-17 3.2-20 Current Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-6 3.2-7 Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8 3.4-13 D64 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2-2 CVX050/100 Surge Protective Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-18 34.1-19 C306 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-1 4.2-4 C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-5 4.2-10
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
D
DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-14 DC Quick Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.2-1, 37.2-2 Derating Factors (Molded Case Circuit Breakers) Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37 Derating Factors (Molded-Case Circuit Breakers) Interrupting Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12 Device Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4 DeviceNet Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1, 29.1-45 Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1 4.3-5 Digital Panel Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-7 Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-8 27.4-9 Digitrip OPTIM Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-43 Digitrip Retrofit Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-5 41.5-8 Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-5 Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-8 4.1-10 DIM Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25 Distributed Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1 1.5-24 Distribution Transformers, Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37 Double Conversion UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.6-1 DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.5-1 DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-3 4.3-5 DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-3, 4.3-5 DP-300 Differential Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-3, 4.3-5

May 2012
Sheet ii 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Drawout Case Option Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-8 4.1-10 Drawout Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-6 Drive Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 Drive Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 Drives, Variable Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-36 Dry-Type Transformers Distribution Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37 TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-4 4.4-6 Unit Substation Type. . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-14, 14.0-15 Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-6 4.1-7 Duplex Receptacle Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-19 Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 DV/DT Protection, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Elevator Control Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-9 Elevator Control Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7 Emergency Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 1.4-34 EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-22 4.2-28 EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-29 4.2-36 Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-48 27.4-54 NEMA 1 Flush Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-51 Surface Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-51 NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-52 NEMA 3R Rainproof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-52 Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3 3.4-7 Enclosed Starters . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-5, 30.6-1 30.6-3 Enclosed Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27 Enclosure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13 End Cable Tap Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-16 Energy Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-32 Energy Sentinel (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26 Engineering Services and Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1, 1.4-23 EnviroLine Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-10 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 Ester-Based Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-5, 17.0-5 Ethernet Communications Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-8 ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-6 4.3-11 Expertise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-2 Expulsion Fuses Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11, 14.0-41 Extended Warranty Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-3 EZ Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-3, 22.1-2, 22.2-2, 22.3-6 E3 Type Energy-Efficient Transformers (CSL-3 Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-4, 19.1-17, 19.1-28, 19.1-33
E
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42 Eaton Distribution Relay EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30 Eaton SP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21 34.1-22 EDR-3000 Eaton Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30 EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-31 4.1-37 EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-38 4.1-44 EES (Essential Electrical System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-17 Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 EGP Generator Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.3-1 40.3-13 EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-12 4.3-21 ELC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-39 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 37.0-1 37.2-2 DC Quick Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.2-1, 37.2-2 Pow-R-Station Level 2 AC Electric Vehicle Charging Station. . . . . . 37.1-1 37.1-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 Electromechanical Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1 Electronic Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1 3.1-18, 27.4-8 Electronic Power Meters IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 IQ 250 and IQ 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31 Electronic Self-Enclosed Meters IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-3, 27.4-8 Electronic Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-27 34.1-28
F
Facility-Wide Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-1 Factors Affecting Service Deviation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Fault Current Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.3-3 1.3-10 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44 Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7 Final Field Fit Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-52 Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8 CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 005
ii-5
Fixed Vacuum Breaker Switchgear (MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8 Flywheel Converter (Rotary Converter). . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27 Foreseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20 2.4-24 Foreseer Software and Engineering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20 2.4-24 Formulas and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-19 FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-11 4.1-15 FP-5000 Advanced Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-16 4.1-20 FP-6000 Advanced Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-21 4.1-26 Freedom FlashGard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-58 Freedom Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-1 29.1-58 Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-1 4.2-10 Freedom Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.0-1, 30.3-1 30.3-10 Freedom 2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-56 Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-52 Freedom 2100 Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-58 Frequency, Output Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Fused Current Limiting Breakers TRI-PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-4 Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-19 Fused Switches, Low Voltage Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39 Distribution Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-13, 21.2-12, 21.3-2, 22.4-1, 22.4-3, 22.4-7 22.4-9 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27 Fused Switches, Medium Voltage (MVS) . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14 Fuses AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2 Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11 MVS Load Interrupter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12, 9.0-2 Power and Distribution Class . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11 Transformer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2, 9.0-7, 9.0-8, 14.0-42 Fusible Panelboard PRL1aF, PRL-2aF, PRL-4F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1, 22.7-1, 22.7-7
3.87 kW Grid-Tied Solar Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.1-7 39.1-11 Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42 Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . 1.4-6, 1.4-11 1.4-13, 32.0-1 Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-7 1.4-11 Grounding Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13 Grounding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-7 1.4-14, 36.0-1 36.2-6 Group Control (Multi-Pak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
H
Harmonic Considerations Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-7 Harmonic Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18, 1.4-21 1.4-24, 29.1-20, 29.1-48 Harmonic Correction Units (Active Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7 Harmonic Mitigating Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-1, 19.1-12 19.1-15 Harmonic Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21 Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18, 1.4-21 1.4-24, 29.1-48 K-Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-2 Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 27.4-8 Waveform Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1, 27.4-8 Harmonics, AFD Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Harmonics, Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5 Health Care Facility Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-14 1.1-19 Heat Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-35 High Resistance Grounding Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.0-1 High Resistance Pulsing Grounding Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.0-1 High Temperature Hydrocarbon Fluid (HTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-4, 17.0-4 High Voltage Equipmentsee Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide Page 5.0-A Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 Load Interrupter Switchgear (WLI) . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14 Metal-Clad Switchgear (VCP-W) . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40 Metal-Enclosed Front-Access Vacuum Breaker Switchgear (MEF) . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40 Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear (MEB) . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear (MSB) . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8 HLE Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.0-1, 9.0-2, 9.0-7, 9.0-8 Human Machine Interface (HMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-4
G
Generator Controlssee Caterpillar Switchgear Generator Parallelingsee Caterpillar Switchgear Generator Quick Connect Switchboards . . . . . . . 21.7-1 21.7-2 Generator System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-2 Grid-Tied Solar Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1 39.1-11 S-Max 250 kW Solar Grid-Tied Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1 39.1-6
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet ii 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I
IBC (International Building Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20 IEEE 519-1992. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-23 IEEE Designations for Suffix Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-5 IEEE Device/Relay Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4 IFS (Integrated Facility Switchboards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9 Impedance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11 1.5-15 Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14 Distribution Transformers, Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11 Power Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11 Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15 In-Phase Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-16 Input Harmonics, AC Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5 Installation Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 Cooling Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4 Installation Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51 Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.11-1 Insulated Case Breaker Type SB . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12, 26.1-13 InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3, 6.0-15, 7.3-4 7.3-5, 8.0-9 8.0-10 InsulGard Predictive Maintenance . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.5-1 4.5-10 InsulGard Predictive Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-11 Integrated Facility Switchboards (IFS). . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9 Integrated Panelboard SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-4 Integrated Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5 Integrated Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-3 IPAIntegrated Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5 IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-13 IQ Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9 IQ Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8 IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4 IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 3.2-26 IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16 3.2-20 IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 3.2-26 IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3.1-37 IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 3.1-34 IR Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
C441 Overload Relays Type 3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-12 H-Max Series Drives (Open) Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6 Option Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
L
Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 30.2-11 Lighting Control Circuit Breakers (Panelboards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 Lighting Control System Pow-R-Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.6-2 Lightning and Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-21 Linear Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-4, 6.0-26 Liquid Filled Substation Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-2 Liquid Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 18.0-5, 18.0-16 18.0-17 Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers. . . . . . . 14.0-12, 14.0-13 Load Interrupter Switchgear, Medium Voltage (MVS/WLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14 Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.1-1 Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34 1.4-35, 40.0-4, 40.2-11 Locations Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-3 U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-3 Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13 Low Resistance Grounding Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13 Low Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 31.5-18 Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-10 41.5-11 Low Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-1 24.0-52 Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12 Low Voltage Distribution Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-36 Low Voltage Distribution Switchboards . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2 Commercial Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11 Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3 Low Voltage Fused Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27 Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39 Distribution Panelboards (FDP) . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-1 22.0-3 Distribution Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27 Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21, 20.0-1 20.1-47, 26.0-1, 26.1-1 26.1-26 (Magnum DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21, 20.1-1 20.1-45 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers. . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-58 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11 1.3-12 Low Voltage Starters and Contactors. . . . . . . . . . 30.0-1 30.7-2
K
Kits CFX9000 Series Drives CFX9000 Series Option Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-10 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-17
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 007
ii-7
Low Voltage Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2 Low Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13, 18.0-9, 20.1-1 Low Voltage System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.2-1 36.2-6
Medium Voltage Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-1 12.0-13 Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches . . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13 Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 13.0-B Metal-Clad Switchgear Medium Voltage Arc-Resistant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5, 5.5-19 5.5-40 Metal-Clad Switchgear (VacClad-W)Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40 Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear Medium Voltage (MSB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8 Metal-Enclosed Drawout Switchgear Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.0-1 20.1-47 Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-47 Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25 Metering Devices Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27 Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1 IQ Additional Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1 IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 IQ Analyzer 6000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1 IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4 IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.0-6, 3.2-21 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-6, 3.2-16 IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 IQ 150S/250S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4 IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.1-32 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series and PXM 2000 Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1 Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31 Power Xpert 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-20 3.1-30 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-1 3.1-18 Sub-Network Master Local Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1 Metering Devices, Protective Relays and Communications Protective Relays DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3 4.3-5 VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 4.4-3 Metering SwitchboardsCommercial . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11 Metering, Protection and Control Devices Addressable Relay II (ARII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-26 Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-24 Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27 Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-1 4.1-5 Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-8 4.1-10 Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-6 4.1-7 EDR-3000 Eaton Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-27 4.1-30 EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-31 4.1-37
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
M
Magnetic Motor Starters, Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10 Magnetic Motor Starters, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.5-17 Electromagnetic Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4 Solid-State Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17 Magnum DS Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1 26.1-26 Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-45 Magnum MDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-10 Magnum MDSX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-9 Magnum Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-27 26.1-30 Magnum SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12 Magnum SB Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-13 Magnum-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.3-1 25.3-14 Manual Motor Starters, Individual Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2 Matching the AFD to the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-1, 4.3-2 MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-1, 4.3-2 MEB Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear (Drawout Mounted Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5 Medium Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24 Medium Voltage Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-1 35.5-7 Medium Voltage Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 9.0-1 9.0-11 Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear (MVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14 Medium Voltage ME Front-Access Vacuum Breaker Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40 Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Switchgear (VacClad-W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Bus . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB/MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.0-1 7.3-5 MEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40 MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed (MEF Front-Access Vacuum Breaker Switchgear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40 Medium Voltage Starters (AMPGARD) . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.1-40 Medium Voltage Switches (MVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14 Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-A
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet ii 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-38 4.1-44 EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-12 4.3-21 ETR-4000 Generator Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-6 4.3-11 ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-6 4.3-11 Feeder Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44 FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-11 4.1-15 FP-5000 Advanced Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-16 4.1-20 FP-6000 Advanced Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-21 4.1-26 InsulGard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.5-1 4.5-10 IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9, 3.4-1 IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4 IQ Energy Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-16 3.2-20 IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26 IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3.1-37 IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 3.2-15 IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4 IQ 250/260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 3.1-34 IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1 3.2-10 I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-25 MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1, 4.3-2 Modbus Master INCOM Network Translator (mMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-1 4.2-38 MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-11 4.2-16 MP-4000 Motor Protection with Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-17 4.2-21 Power Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1 3.1-7 Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1, 2.1-6 Power Xpert 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.1-20 3.1-30 Product Operated Network Interface (PONI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23 PROFIBUS Master INCOM Network Translator (PMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4 Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37, 4.2-38 VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-1 4.4-3 Meters, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15 26.1-22, 27.4-8 27.4-9 Microprocessor-Based Metering Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8 MOC Mechanism Operated Cell Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-24 Modbus MINT (mMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
Molded Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1 Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1 Monitoring Systems (Power Xpert) . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.4-1 2.4-12 Motor Application and Performance (Drives). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Motor Circuit Protection Selection Guide . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8 Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1, 27.4-38 Motor Control Centers Medium Voltage (AMPGARD) . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-16 Motor Control, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7 10.1-9, 30.4-1 30.5-17 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-1 4.3-2 Motor Load Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant Horsepower Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant Torque Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Torque Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 31.0-6 31.0-6 31.0-6
Motor Load Types and Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8, 27.2-2, 27.4-38 27.4-40 Overload Relays C440/XT Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4 C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10 Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10 Motor Protection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 1.5-8 Motor Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-1 4.2-38 Motor Starters (AMPGARD) Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-16 Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-20 1.3-21 Motor/Generator/Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27 MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-11 4.2-16 MSB Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear (Fixed Mounted Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8 Multi-Pak Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1, 30.7-2 Multiple Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Multipoint Energy Submeter II (IQ) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16 3.2-20 Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3 MVS Medium Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25
N
NEMA Enclosure Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13 NEMA Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6 NEMA TP-1 Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-16 Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-1 2.1-26 Network Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-32 Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12, 18.0-1 18.0-39 CM52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-20 18.0-23 MPCV Network Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25 18.0-28 CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 009
ii-9
Spot Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12, 18.0-2 18.0-15 Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12, 18.0-2 18.0-15 Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-6, 18.0-10 18.0-12, 18.0-16 18.0-19 Network Transition Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-33 Nonlinear Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21 1.4-23, 22.0-6, 29.1-20, 29.1-48 Nonlinear LoadsTransformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-11 Non-Segregated Phase Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2, 11.0-7 NRX Breaker Communications Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-5 NRX (Series) Compact Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13
Paralleling Equipmentsee Caterpillar Switchgear Partial Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-1 4.5-10, 6.0-15, 7.3-4, 7.3-5, 8.0-9 8.0-10, 11.0-2 Partial Discharge Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3 Passive Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-8 PDUsee Power Distribution Units Peak Shaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36 Performance, Motor Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Photovoltaic String Disconnect Switch Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2-4 39.2-6 Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1 32.1-3 Plug-in Cable Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44 Plug-in Device Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46 Plug-in Device Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39 Plug-in Device Physical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-48 PONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23, 2.5-1 Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5 Power Breakers, Trip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-10 Power Center, Unitized Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-1 15.0-3 Power Circuit Breakers (DSII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8 27.4-9 Power Circuit Breakers (Magnum) . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-31, 26.1-1 26.1-26 Power Conditioning Sag Ride Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-23 34.1-26 Power Conditioning Products . . . . . . . 34.0-1, 34.1-23 34.1-28 Power Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1 1.5-24 Power Equipment Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13 Power Factor Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-2 Power Factor CorrectionCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-9 Power Factor, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5 Power Fusessee FusesMedium Voltage Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18 1.4-24 Power Sentinel (IQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.2-21 3.2-26 Power System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 1.1-19 Power System Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-1 GearGard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-2 41.4-8 Instant Response Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-1 Power System Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-9 Partial Discharge Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-9 Power Takeoff Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44 Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31 Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1, 2.1-6 Power Xpert Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-2, 3.1-1 3.1-7 Power Xpert 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.1-20 3.1-30 Power Xpert 2000 Series Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-22 Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-1 3.1-18 PowerLynx Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.1-5
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
O
Oil Type Liquid Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2, 16.0-9 OPTIM Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-8 27.4-9 OPTIMizer Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-10 Options CFX9000 Series Drives Enclosed Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-13 Option Board Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-10 H-Max Series Drives (Open) Option Board Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6 Other Third-Party Integration Products . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.5-1 2.5-4 Output Current, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Output Harmonics, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Output Voltage and Frequency, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 Overcurrent Protection and Coordination. . . . . . . . 1.4-3 1.4-5 Overcurrent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.2-21 DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-10 EDR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-31 4.1-37 EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-38 4.1-44 FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-11 4.1-15 FP-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-16 4.1-20 FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-21 4.1-26 MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1, 4.3-2 MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-11 4.2-16 MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-17 4.2-21 Overload Relays C440/XT Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4 C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10 Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-2
P
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-1 17.0-13 Panel Meters Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-7 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-1 22.7-11 CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet ii 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PowerNet Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1 2.5-4 Addressable Relay II (ARII). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-26 Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-24 C306 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-25 Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-5 Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . 4.1-8 4.1-10 FP-5000 Advanced Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-16 4.1-20 FP-6000 Advanced Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-21 4.1-26 Integral Protective Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-12 IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-13 IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9 IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.4-1 IQ Energy Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-21 3.2-26 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-16 3.2-20 IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 3.2-26 IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4 MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-11 4.2-16 MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-17 4.2-21 Product Operated Network Interface (PONI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23 Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10 Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-22, 4.2-30, 4.2-37, 4.2-38 PowerPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16, 4.1-12, 4.1-14, 4.1-19, 4.1-24, 4.1-27, 4.1-36, 4.1-43, 4.2-13, 4.2-20, 4.2-22, 4.2-24, 4.2-26, 4.2-33, 4.2-35 Pow-R-Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.6-2 Pow-R-Command Lighting Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.6-2 Pow-R-Command 100 Panelboard . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.5-1 23.5-2 Pow-R-Command 1000 Panelboard . . . . 23.0-1, 23.3-1 23.3-2 Pow-R-Command 2000 Panelboard . . . . 23.0-1, 23.2-1 23.2-2 Pow-R-Command 25 Panelboard . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.6-1 23.6-2 Pow-R-Command 5000 Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.1-1 Pow-R-Command 750 Panelboard . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.4-1 23.4-2 Pow-R-Flex Low Ampere Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-1 Pow-R-Line C Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-9 21.0-10 Pow-R-Line Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-1 22.6-5 Pow-R-Line i Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-11 21.0-13 Pow-R-Line 1a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-1 22.1-3, 22.7-5 22.7-6 Pow-R-Line 1aF Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1, 22.7-2 Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1 22.7-2 Pow-R-Line 2a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2-1, 22.2-2
Pow-R-Line 2aF Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-7 22.7-8 Pow-R-Line 2R Retrofit Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-3 22.7-4 Pow-R-Line 3a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-1 22.3-4 Pow-R-Line 3E Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-5 22.3-6 Pow-R-Line 4 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1 22.4-9 Pow-R-Line 5P Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5-1 22.5-3 Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2 Predictive Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2 Predictive Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10 Primary Selective System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6 1.1-10 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16 PROFIBUS Master INCOM Network Translator (PMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4 Protective and Predictive Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10 Protective Relay Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-5, 4.1-14, 4.1-19, 4.1-24, 4.2-14, 4.3-2, 5.4-26 5.4-28, 5.5-9, 5.5-10 Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4, 4.0-1 4.5-10 DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-3 4.3-5 DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-10 EDR-3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30 EDR-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-31 4.1-37 EDR-5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-38 4.1-44 EGR-4000. . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-12 4.3-21 EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-22 4.2-28 EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-29 4.2-36 ETR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-6 4.3-11 FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-11 4.1-15 FP-5000 . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-16 4.1-20, 7.1-2, 7.2-3 FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-21 4.1-26 MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-1, 4.3-2 MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-11 4.2-16 MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-17 4.2-21 VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.4-1 4.4-3 Protective Relays IEEE Device Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4 Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CompactSquare PushbuttonsE30 . . . . . . . . . . . C22 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E30 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E34 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HT800 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M22 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square PushbuttonsE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10250T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1 32.1-2 32.1-1 32.1-2 32.1-2 32.1-2 32.1-1 32.1-2 32.1-1
PV System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34
Q
Quad Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-20, 24.1-21 Quick Connection Assembly Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1 21.7-2
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 011
ii-11
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 27.4-3, 27.4-11, 27.4-12 Solenoid-Operated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15 Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13 27.4-16
Sag Ride Through Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-23 34.1-26 Secondary Selective System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-9 Secondary Unit Substations Secondary Less than 1000V see Unit Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1 14.0-47 Secondary Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-31 1.4-32 Seismic Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20 1.5-25 Selection Considerations for Drives Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i ii 1 2
R
Radial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6 1.1-9, 1.1-12, 1.3-7 Receptacle Plug-in Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45 Reduced Voltage Solid State Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-8 Reduced Voltage Motor Starters DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26 Reduced Voltage, Medium Voltage Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7 Reduced Voltage, Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-9 Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.5-1 Regeneration Limit and Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Relays Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1 Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1 4.3-5 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44 Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1, 32.2-1 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-1 4.2-38 Overload C440/XT Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4 C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10 Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10 Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-2, 32.3-1, 32.3-2, 32.3-3, 32.3-4, 32.4-5, 32.5-7 Voltage Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-1, 32.3-2, 32.3-3, 32.3-4 Remote Operated Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2 RESIBLOC Cast Resin Transformers . . . . . . . . . 14.0-16, 14.0-17 Resistance Grounding Equipment . . . . . 36.0-1, 36.1-1 36.1-5, 36.2-1 36.2-6 Resistance, Neutral Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.0-1 ResonanceCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-7 Retrofit Panelboards PRL-1R, PRL-2R . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1, 22.7-4 Roll-up Generator Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1, 21.8-2 Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes (RUGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1 Rotary UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27
31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Selection Guides Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.0-2, 27.0-2 Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-A Transformer Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 13.0-B Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters IQ 150S/250S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-35 Series NRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1 26.2-8 Series Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-10 22.0-20, 27.2-8 27.2-11 Component Ratings (Breaker-Breaker and Fuse-Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-8 27.2-11 Panelboard Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . 22.0-10 22.0-20 Series Surge Protector (AEGIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.0-1 Service Contract Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-3 41.1-5 Service Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Service Deviation Table, Factors Affecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Short-Circuit Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1 1.3-5, 1.3-13 1.3-19 Short-Circuit Currents, Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-9 1.5-10 Silicone Type Liquid Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2, 16.0-9 Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3 3.4-7 Single Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-19 Soft Start Controllers DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26 Soft Start Reduced Voltage Soft Starters Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-13 Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-15 Solar Combiner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.3-1, 39.3-2 Solar DC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.2-1 39.2-7
S
Safety Switches Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-30 28.0-31 Flex Centersee Factory Modifications Safety Switches (600V and Below) . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-31
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet ii 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Solar (PV) Systems Interconnect Combiner Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.3-1, 39.3-2 Solar DC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2-1 39.2-7 Solenoid Operated, Remote Controlled Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2 Solenoid-Operated, QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15 Sound Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36 1.4-37, 13.0-13, 14.0-46, 16.0-8 Sparing Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-10 1.1-11 SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-8 SPD Series Sidemount Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-6 34.1-13 SPD (Surge Protective Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-48 SPDsSurge Protection Products . . . . . . . . . . . 34.0-1 34.1-22 Speed Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3, 31.0-7 Speed Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3, 31.0-7 Spot Network Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39 Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . 18.0-5, 18.0-9, 18.0-18, 18.0-34, 18.0-38, 18.0-39 Liquid-Type Network Transformers . . . . . 18.0-9, 18.0-16, 18.0-37 Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39 Network Relaying Type MPCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-21, 18.0-25 18.0-28 Low Voltage NEMA Rated Freedom. . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7 Magnetic, Electromechanical Full VoltageNEMA . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7 Magnetic, Electromechanical Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4 Manual, Individual Enclosed . . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2 NEMA, Magnetic Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4 Reduced Voltage, Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17 Solid-State Reduced Voltage . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17 Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25, 18.0-27 Spot Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11 1.1-12, 18.0-2 18.0-15 SPV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-16 34.1-17 SP1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21 34.1-22 Standard and Optional Features . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.5-1 25.5-19 Standards BuswayMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2 Standby UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-29 1.4-30 Starters AMPGARD Medium Voltage Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-26 Autotransformer Starters (LV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2 Enclosure Types and Box Sizes . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1 30.6-3 Freedom Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7 Magnetic Motor Starters Full Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10 Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Manual Motor Starters, Individual Enclosed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2 Multi-Pak Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1, 30.7-2 NEMA Motor Starters Electromechanical Full Voltage Enclosure Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-8 30.3-10 Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7 NEMA Motor Starters Microprocessor-based Electromechanical Full Voltage . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10 Reduced Voltage DS6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26 Reduced Voltage Magnetic, Electromechanical . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-5 Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-1 Static Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30 Static Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27 Static Power Factor Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4-1 Static Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30 Static Switching Power Factorsee Capacitors Static UPSUninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30 Static Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30 Static Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26 1.4-27 Studies Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substation Study and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2-1 41.2-1 41.2-1 41.2-1 41.2-1
Sub-Feed Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-2, 22.2-2 Substation TransformersPrimary . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16, 16.0-1 16.0-8 Surge Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-7 Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-1 34.1-22 Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-19 1.4-21, 22.0-6 Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-17, 5.4-17 5.4-19, 7.3-2, 8.0-14 Surge Protection (SPD) & Power Conditioning Products . . . . . 34.0-1 34.1-28 Surge Protective Device (SPD) Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-48 Surge Protective Device (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-4, 24.1-18 Surge Protective Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-48 AEGIS Powerline Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20 AEGIS Series Type for Critical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20 CVX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-18 34.1-19 SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-6, 34.1-1 34.1-15 SPV Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-16 34.1-17 SP1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21 34.1-22 Surge Protective Devices in Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-20 1.4-21 CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 013
ii-13
Surge Protective Devices (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-17 Surge Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-14 1.4-17, 29.1-48 SVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4-1 31.4-20 Switchboards Commerical Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.10-1 21.10-11 General and Summary Info (Including Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.0-5 Generator Quick Connect Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1 21.7-2 IFS (Integrated Facility Systems) . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9 Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.11-1 Magnum SB, Drawout Insulated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1 21.5-11 Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3 Outdoor Enclosures for Pow-R-Line C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1, 21.4-2 Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.0-10 Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes (RUGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1 SwitchboardsLow Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22 Switchgear Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13, 18.0-9, 20.1-1 Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Arc-Resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5, 5.5-19 5.5-40 Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Communications and Supplemental Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-4 Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Drawout Vacuum Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1 5.1-13, 5.4-1 5.5-18 Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Partial Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3 Medium Voltage Metal-Clad (VCP-W Drawout Vacuum Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 5.0-1 5.1-13, 5.4-1 5.5-18, 13.0-4, 13.0-10, 14.0-23 14.0-24, 14.0-26 14.0-27 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed (MEB Drawout Vacuum Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 7.0-1, 7.1-2 7.1-5, 13.0-4, 13.0-10 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed (MEF Front-Access Vacuum Breaker Switchgear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed (MSB Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 7.0-1, 7.2-1 7.2-8, 13.0-4, 13.0-10, 14.0-23 14.0-24, 14.0-26 14.0-27 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed (MVS Fusible Interrupter Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 8.0-1 8.0-14, 13.0-4, 13.0-10, 14.0-23 14.0-27
Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage (DSII) . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21, 20.0-1 Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage (Magnum DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21, 14.0-25 14.0-27, 14.0-39, 20.0-1, 20.1-1 20.1-45 Synchronous Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-10 Synchronous Motor Starters, Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1, 10.1-10 System Analysis, Power Distribution . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.3-1 1.3-24 System Application Considerations . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-1 1.4-37 System Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.1-1 1.1-19, 1.3-1 1.3-24, 1.4-1 1.4-37, 35.0-3 35.0-14 System Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-25
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
T
TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-4 4.4-6 Temperature Protection RTD Monitoring of Motors and Associated Equipment . . . . . 4.2-22, 4.2-29, 4.2-37 Transformer Fan Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-44 Tenant SubmeteringMultipoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-1 41.1-2 Through-Feed Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-5 Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-9 Timers Elapsed Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1, 32.5-2, 32.5-3 Timer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1, 32.5-4, 32.5-5, 32.5-6, 32.5-7 TOC Truck Operated Cell Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-24 Torque Indicating Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51 Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5, 31.0-7 Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-2 41.1-3 Transfer Switch Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1 25.0-8 Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1 25.5-19 ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-1 25.4-16 Automatic Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2 Breaker-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1 25.2-11 Bypass Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7 Contactor-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-1 25.1-15 Magnum-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-1 25.3-14 Service Entrance Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-4 Standard and Optional Features . . . . . . . . 25.5-1 25.5-19 Transfer Switch Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2 25.0-7 Transfer Switches, Medium Voltage, Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-1 12.0-13 Transformer Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-13 1.3-15, 1.3-19, 1.5-11, 18.0-6 Transformer Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . 41.4-10 41.4-12
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet ii 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-2, 9.0-2, 9.0-7 9.0-11, 14.0-41 14.0-43, 17.0-6, 27.3-6, 27.3-7 Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 TC-100 for Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . 4.4-4 4.4-6 Transformers Dry-Type Primary Unit Substation . . . . . . 13.0-9 13.0-12 Dry-Type Secondary Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-14, 14.0-15, 14.0-26, 14.0-27, 14.0-35, 14.0-37, 14.0-38 Dry-Type, Distribution Type (DT-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37 Efficiency Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-32 IFS Mounted Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9 Liquid-Type Primary Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-2 13.0-8 Liquid-Type Secondary Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-12, 14.0-13, 14.0-23, 14.0-24, 14.0-31, 14.0-43, 14.0-46 Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13 Motor Drive Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-18 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-6, 18.0-8 18.0-12 Pad Mounted (Liquid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-1 17.0-13 Short-Circuit Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-9 1.5-10 Sparing Transformer System . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-10 1.1-11 Three-Phase Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-22 Transformer Losses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12 Winding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5 Transient-Free Statically Switched Capacitor Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4-1 Trip Units Digitrip 1150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-20, 26.2-4 Trip Units Medium Voltage Digitrip 520V, 520MCV, 1150V . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-11 6.0-12 Trip Units (Low Voltage) Microprocessor . . . . . . . 27.1-2, 27.4-8 Trip Units, Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15 26.1-21 Digitrip 1150+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-19 Digitrip 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-18, 26.1-20, 26.2-4 Digitrip 520M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-18, 26.1-20, 26.2-4 Digitrip 520MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 26.1-18, 26.1-20 TRI-PAC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-4, 27.4-4, 27.4-46, 27.4-47 TVSSsee SPDsSurge Protection Products Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-10, 22.7-11
U
UBC (Uniform Building Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20
Uninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.0-1 33.6-1 Eaton Software and Connectivity . . . . . . . 33.4-1 33.4-11 ConnectUPS Web/SNMP Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-7 33.4-8 Eaton Extensions for IBM Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-4 Eaton LanSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-2 33.4-3 Eaton Modbus Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-10 Eaton Modbus Profiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-5 Eaton Multiview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-4 Eaton Netwatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-5 Expansion Chasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-11 Forseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-1 Intelligent Power Software Suite. . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-5 Multi-Server Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-9 Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-6 Power Xpert Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-1 Relay Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-8 33.4-9 Serial Protocol Products. . . . . . . . . . 33.4-9 33.4-11 General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 33.1-3 Data Center and Facility UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 Eaton BladeUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 Eaton Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 Eaton EX RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 Eaton Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-3 Eaton 5110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 Eaton 9130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 Eaton 9390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 ePDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 Network and Server UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 PC/Workstation and Home A/V UPS . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 Software and Connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-3 Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2 Glossary of Power Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.6-1 Large Three-Phase Units Eaton 9395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-1 33.3-27 Automatic Hot-Tie System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-4 Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-5 ENERSYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-6 Static Auto-Tie System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-4 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.5-1 33.5-39 Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.5-3 Remote Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.5-40 33.5-48 Three-Phase Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-1 33.2-49 Eaton 9355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-1 33.2-10 Eaton 9390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-11 33.2-49 Eaton 9390 IAC-SB or IAT-ST. . . . . 33.2-44 33.2-47 Eaton 9390 Integrated Accessory Cabinet (IAC-B and IAT-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-44 Eaton 9390 Integrated Accessory Cabinet-Distribution (IAC-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-39 33.2-43 Eaton 9390 Integrated Accessory Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-38 Eaton 9390 UPS Integrated Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-21 33.2-28 Eaton 9390 UPS Integrated Distribution Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-29 33.2-37 UNIPAK600V Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1-4
CA08104001E
Alphabetical Index
May 2012
Sheet ii 015
ii-15
UNIPUMPCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1-1 UNIPUMPsee Capacitors Unit Substations Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above. . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16 Secondary Unit Substations Secondary Less than 1000V . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1 14.0-47 Unitized Power Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-1 15.0-3 UNIVAR 15 kV Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-6 UNIVAR 5 kV Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-1 Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-11, 4.2-37, 4.2-38 UPSUninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 1.4-25 1.4-30 URTD (Universal RTD Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-11, 4.2-37, 4.2-38
Voltage Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-4 Voltage (Nominal System Voltages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4 VPR Voltage Protection Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-14 34.1-15 VR Series MV Vacuum Replacement Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-12 41.5-17 VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 4.4-3 VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.4-1 4.4-3
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
W
Watt Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13 Waveform Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.1-1 3.1-30, 3.3-1, 3.3-2, 27.4-8 Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.0-4, 3.0-5, 3.0-6, 3.1-1 3.1-30, 3.3-1, 3.3-2 Web-Enabled Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-2, 3.1-1 3.1-30 Wire Ampacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16 1.5-18 Wiring Zone Selective Interlocking . . . . . . . . 4.1-4, 4.1-11, 4.1-16 WLIsee MVS
V
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40 Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch (VCP-W) 5 Cycle, Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13 Vacuum Breakers (MEB or MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5, 7.2-1 7.2-8 Vacuum Breakers (VCP-W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1, 5.1-3 Variable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 31.2-14, 31.5-1 31.5-18 VCP-T/VCP-TL MV Vacuum Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-2 6.0-4 Voltage Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4 Voltage Drop Busway Voltage Drop Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46 Cable Voltage Drop Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-22 1.3-24 Voltage Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 Voltage Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
X
XLM Generator Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-1 40.2-12
Z
Zone Interlocking Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-22, 27.1-6 Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-4, 4.1-11, 4.1-16 Zone Selective Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-7
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet ii 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
This page intentionally left blank.
CA08104001E
Power Distribution Systems

September 2011
Sheet 01 001
1.0-1
Contents
Power Distribution Systems System Design Basic Principles. . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 Modern Electric Power Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 Goals of System Design . . . 1.1-2 Voltage Classications; BILs Basic Impulse Levels . . . . . 1.1-4 Three-Phase Transformer Winding Connections . . . . 1.1-5 Types of SystemsRadial, Loop, Selective, Two-Source, Sparing Transformer, Spot Network, Distribution . . . . 1.1-6 Health Care Facility Design Considerations . . . 1.1-14 Generator Systems . . . . . . 1.1-17 Generator System Design Types of Generators . . . . . . . 1.2-1 Generator Systems . . . . . . . 1.2-2 Generator Grounding. . . . . . 1.2-3 Generator Controls. . . . . . . . 1.2-4 Generator Short-Circuit Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-4 Generator Protection . . . . . . 1.2-5 System Analysis Systems Analysis . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1 Short-Circuit Currents . . . . . 1.3-2 Fault Current Waveform Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3 Fault Current Calculations and Methods Index . . . . . . 1.3-4 Determine X and R from Transformer Loss Data . . . 1.3-19 Voltage Drop Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-20 System Application Considerations Capacitors and Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1 Overcurrent Protection and Coordination . . . . . . . . 1.4-3 Protection of Conductors . . . 1.4-5 Circuit Breaker Cable Temperature Ratings . . . . . 1.4-5 Zone Selective Interlocking . 1.4-5 Ground Fault Protection . . . 1.4-6 Suggested Ground Fault Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-6 Grounding/Ground Fault Protection GroundingEquipment, System, MV System, LV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-9 Ground Fault Protection . . . . 1.4-11 Lightning and Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 Grounding Electrodes. . . . . . 1.4-14 MV Equipment Surge Protection Considerations . 1.4-14 Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 Types of Surge Protection Devices . . . . . . . 1.4-15 Power Quality Terms, Technical Overview . . 1.4-18 SPD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-19 Harmonics and Nonlinear Loads . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21 UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-25 Other Application Considerations Secondary Voltage . . . . . . . . 1.4-31 Energy Conservation . . . . . . 1.4-32 Building Control Systems . . 1.4-33 Distributed Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 Cogeneration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 PV System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34 Emergency Power. . . . . . . . . 1.4-35 Peak Shaving. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36 Sound Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36 Reference Data IEEE Protective Relay Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 Codes and Standards . . . . . . 1.5-6 Motor Protective Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7 Chart of Short-Circuit Currents for Transformers . . 1.5-9 Transformer Full Load Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-10 Impedances Data . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11 Transformer Losses, TP-1 Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12 Power Equipment Losses . . . 1.5-13 NEMA Enclosure Denitions . . 1.5-13 Cable R, X, Z Data . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14 Conductor Ampacities . . . . . 1.5-16 Conductor Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16 Formulas and Terms . . . . . . . 1.5-19 Seismic Requirements . . . . . 1.5-20
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Designing a Distribution System
21
CA08104001E
1.0-2

September 2011
Sheet 01 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 003
Power Distribution Systems System Design
1.1-1
Basic Principles
The best distribution system is one that will, cost-effectively and safely, supply adequate electric service to both present and future probable loadsthis section is included to aid in selecting, designing and installing such a system. The function of the electric power distribution system in a building or an installation site is to receive power at one or more supply points and to deliver it to the individual lamps, motors and all other electrically operated devices. The importance of the distribution system to the function of a building makes it almost imperative that the best system be designed and installed. In order to design the best distribution system, the system design engineer must have information concerning the loads and a knowledge of the various types of distribution systems that are applicable. The various categories of buildings have many specic design challenges, but certain basic principles are common to all. Such principles, if followed, will provide a soundly executed design.
The basic principles or factors requiring consideration during design of the power distribution system include:

Modern Electric Power Technologies

Several new factors to consider in modern power distribution systems result from two relatively recent changes. The rst recent change is utility deregulation. The traditional dependence on the utility for problem analysis, energy conservation measurements and techniques, and a simplied cost structure for electricity has changed. The second change is less obvious to the designer yet will have an impact on the types of equipment and systems being designed. It is the diminishing quantity of qualied building electrical operators, maintenance departments and facility engineers. Modern electric power technologies may be of use to the designer and building owner in addressing these new challenges. The advent of microprocessor devices (smart devices) into power distribution equipment has expanded facility owners options and capabilities, allowing for automated communication of vital power system information (both energy data and system operation information) and electrical equipment control. These technologies may be grouped as:

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Functions of structure, present and future Life and exibility of structure Locations of service entrance and distribution equipment, locations and characteristics of loads, locations of unit substations Demand and diversity factors of loads Sources of power; including normal, standby and emergency (see Tab 40) Continuity and quality of power available and required (see Tab 33) Energy efciency and management Distribution and utilization voltages Bus and/or cable feeders Distribution equipment and motor control Power and lighting panelboards and motor control centers Types of lighting systems Installation methods Power monitoring systems Electric utility requirements
Power monitoring and control Building management systems interfaces Lighting control Automated energy management Predictive diagnostics
Various sections of this guide cover the application and selection of such systems and components that may be incorporated into the power equipment being designed. See Tabs 2, 3, 4, 23 and 41.
CA08104001E
1.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 01 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Goals of System Design

When considering the design of an electrical distribution system for a given customer and facility, the electrical engineer must consider alternate design approaches that best t the following overall goals. 1. Safety: The No. 1 goal is to design a power system that will not present any electrical hazard to the people who use the facility, and/or the utilization equipment fed from the electrical system. It is also important to design a system that is inherently safe for the people who are responsible for electrical equipment maintenance and upkeep. The National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E, as well as local electrical codes, provide minimum standards and requirements in the area of wiring design and protection, wiring methods and materials, as well as equipment for general use with the overall goal of providing safe electrical distribution systems and equipment. The NEC also covers minimum requirements for special occupancies including hazardous locations and special use type facilities such as health care facilities, places of assembly, theaters and the like, and the equipment and systems located in these facilities. Special equipment and special conditions such as emergency systems, standby systems and communication systems are also covered in the code. It is the responsibility of the design engineer to be familiar with the NFPA and NEC code requirements as well as the customers facility, process and operating procedures; to design a system that protects personnel from live electrical conductors and uses adequate circuit protective devices that will selectively isolate overloaded or faulted circuits or equipment as quickly as possible.
2. Minimum Initial Investment: The owners overall budget for rst cost purchase and installation of the electrical distribution system and electrical utilization equipment will be a key factor in determining which of various alternate system designs are to be selected. When trying to minimize initial investment for electrical equipment, consideration should be given to the cost of installation, oor space requirements and possible extra cooling requirements as well as the initial purchase price. 3. Maximum Service Continuity: The degree of service continuity and reliability needed will vary depending on the type and use of the facility as well as the loads or processes being supplied by the electrical distribution system. For example, for a smaller commercial ofce building, a power outage of considerable time, say several hours, may be acceptable, whereas in a larger commercial building or industrial plant only a few minutes may be acceptable. In other facilities such as hospitals, many critical loads permit a maximum of 10 seconds outage and certain loads, such as real-time computers, cannot tolerate a loss of power for even a few cycles. Typically, service continuity and reliability can be increased by: A. Supplying multiple utility power sources or services. B. Supplying multiple connection paths to the loads served. C. Using short-time rated power circuit breakers. D. Providing alternate customerowned power sources such as generators or batteries supplying uninterruptable power supplies. E. Selecting the highest quality electrical equipment and conductors. F. Using the best installation methods. G. Designing appropriate system alarms, monitoring and diagnostics. H. Selecting preventative maintenance systems or equipment to alarm before an outage occurs.
4. Maximum Flexibility and Expendability: In many industrial manufacturing plants, electrical utilization loads are periodically relocated or changed requiring changes in the electrical distribution system. Consideration of the layout and design of the electrical distribution system to accommodate these changes must be considered. For example, providing many smaller transformers or loadcenters associated with a given area or specic groups of machinery may lend more exibility for future changes than one large transformer; the use of plug-in busways to feed selected equipment in lieu of conduit and wire may facilitate future revised equipment layouts. In addition, consideration must be given to future building expansion, and/or increased load requirements due to added utilization equipment when designing the electrical distribution system. In many cases considering transformers with increased capacity or fan cooling to serve unexpected loads as well as including spare additional protective devices and/ or provision for future addition of these devices may be desirable. Also to be considered is increasing appropriate circuit capacities or quantities for future growth. Power monitoring communication systems connected to electronic metering can provide the trending and historical data necessary for future capacity growth.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 005
1.1-3
5. Maximum Electrical Efciency (Minimum Operating Costs): Electrical efciency can generally be maximized by designing systems that minimize the losses in conductors, transformers and utilization equipment. Proper voltage level selection plays a key factor in this area and will be discussed later. Selecting equipment, such as transformers, with lower operating losses, generally means higher rst cost and increased oor space requirements; thus, there is a balance to be considered between the owners utility energy change for the losses in the transformer or other equipment versus the owners rst cost budget and cost of money. 6. Minimum Maintenance Cost: Usually the simpler the electrical system design and the simpler the electrical equipment, the less the associated maintenance costs and operator errors. As electrical systems and equipment become more complicated to provide greater service continuity or exibility, the maintenance costs and chance for operator error increases. The systems should be designed with an alternate power circuit to take electrical equipment (requiring periodic maintenance) out of service without dropping essential loads. Use of drawout type protective devices such as breakers and combination starters can also minimize maintenance cost and out-of-service time.
7. Maximum Power Quality: The power input requirements of all utilization equipment has to be considered including the acceptable operating range of the equipment and the electrical distribution system has to be designed to meet these needs. For example, what is the required input voltage, current, power factor requirement? Consideration to whether the loads are affected by harmonics (multiples of the basic 60 Hz sine wave) or generate harmonics must be taken into account as well as transient voltage phenomena. The above goals are interrelated and in some ways contradictory. As more redundancy is added to the electrical system design along with the best quality equipment to maximize service continuity, exibility and expandability, and power quality, the more initial investment and maintenance are increased. Thus, the designer must weigh each factor based on the type of facility, the loads to be served, the owners past experience and criteria.
Summary
It is to be expected that the engineer will never have complete load information available when the system is designed. The engineer will have to expand the information made available to him on the basis of experience with similar problems. Of course, it is desirable that the engineer has as much denite information as possible concerning the function, requirements, and characteristics of the utilization devices. The engineer should know whether certain loads function separately or together as a unit, the magnitude of the demand of the loads viewed separately and as units, the rated voltage and frequency of the devices, their physical location with respect to each other and with respect to the source and the probability and possibility of the relocation of load devices and addition of loads in the future. Coupled with this information, a knowledge of the major types of electric power distribution systems equips the engineers to arrive at the best system design for the particular building. It is beyond the scope of this guide to present a detailed discussion of loads that might be found in each of several types of buildings. Assuming that the design engineer has assembled the necessary load data, the following pages discuss some of the various types of electrical distribution systems that can be used. The description of types of systems, and the diagrams used to explain the types of systems on the following pages omits the location of utility revenue metering equipment for clarity. A discussion of short-circuit calculations, coordination, voltage selection, voltage drop, ground fault protection, motor protection and other specic equipment protection is also presented.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
1.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 01 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Voltage Classications
ANSI and IEEE standards dene various voltage classications for single-phase and three-phase systems. The terminology used divides voltage classes into:

Table 1.1-2. Metal-Clad Switchgear Voltage and Insulation Levels (From ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999)
Rated Maximum Voltage (kV rms) 4.76 8.25 15.0 27.0 38.0 Impulse Withstand (kV) 60 95 95 125 150
Table 1.1-5. Dry-Type Transformers Voltage and Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Levels (BIL)From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01-1998)
Nominal System Voltage (kV rms) 1.2 2.5 5.0 8.7 15.0 25.0 34.5
BIL (kV Crest)
Low voltage Medium voltage High voltage Extra-high voltage Ultra-high voltage
95
10 20 30 45 60 110 125
20 30 45 60 95 125 150
30 45 60 95 110 150 200
Table 1.1-3. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Voltage and Insulation Levels (From ANSI C37.20.3-1987)
Rated Maximum Voltage (kV rms) 4.76 8.25 15.0 15.5 25.8 38.0 Impulse Withstand (kV) 60 75 95 110 125 150
Table 1.1-1 presents the nominal system voltages for these classications. Table 1.1-1. Standard Nominal System Voltages and Voltage Ranges (From IEEE Standard 141-1993)
Voltage Class Low voltage Nominal System Voltage Three-Wire Four-Wire 240/120 240 480 600 2400 4160 4800 6900 13,200 13,800 23,000 34,500 46,000 69,000 115,000 138,000 161,000 230,000 345,000 500,000 765,000 1,100,000 208Y/120 240/120 480Y/277 4160Y/2400 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13800Y/7970 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920
BIL values in bold typeface are listed as standard. Others listed are in common use. Optional higher levels used where exposure to overvoltage occurs and higher protection margins are required. Lower levels where surge arrester protective devices can be applied with lower spark-over levels.
Medium voltage
Table 1.1-4. Liquid-Immersed Transformers Voltage and Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Levels (BIL) (From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00-2000)
Application Nominal BIL System (kV Crest) Voltage (kV rms) 1.2 2.5 5.0 8.7 15.0 25.0 34.5 46.0 69.0 Power 1.2 2.5 5.0 8.7 15.0 25.0 34.5 46.0 69.0 115.0 138.0 161.0 230.0 345.0 500.0 765.0
Voltage Recommendations by Motor Horsepower

Some factors affecting the selection of motor operating voltage include:

Distribution
30 45 60 75 95 150 200 250 350 45 60 75 95 110 150 200 250 350 550 650 750
High voltage
125
Motor, motor starter and cable rst cost Motor, motor starter and cable installation cost Motor and cable losses Motor availability Voltage drop Qualications of the building operating staff; and many more
Extra-high voltage Ultra-high voltage
150 125 200 250 30 45 60 75 95 200 250 450 550 650
The following table is based in part on the above factors and experience. Because all the factors affecting the selection are rarely known, it is only an approximate guideline. Table 1.1-6. Selection of Motor Horsepower Ratings as a Function of System Voltage
Motor Voltage Motor (Volts) hp Range 460 2300 4000 4600 13,200 up to 500 250 to 2000 250 to 3000 250 to 3000 above 2000 System Voltage 480 2400 4160 4800 13,800
BILBasic Impulse Levels

ANSI standards dene recommended and required BIL levels for: Metal-clad switchgear (typically vacuum breakers) Metal-enclosed switchgear (typically load interrupters, switches) Liquid immersed transformers Dry-type transformers
350 450 550
900 825 750 650 1175 1050 900 1675 1550 1425 1300 2050 1925 1800
Table 1.1-2 through Table 1.1-5 contain those values.
BIL values in bold typeface are listed as standard. Others listed are in common use.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 007
1.1-5
Table 1.1-7. Three-Phase Transformer Winding Connections

Phasor Diagram
DELTA-DELTA Connection Phasor Diagram: H2 X2
Notes 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. 2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
i ii 1
H1
H3
X1
X3
2
1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. 2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire grounded service with XO grounded. 3. With XO grounded, the transformer acts as a ground source for the secondary system. 4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary lines supplied by the transformer do not ow in the primary lines. Instead the zero sequence currents circulate in the closed delta primary windings. 5. When supplied from an effectively grounded primary system does not see load unbalances and ground faults in the secondary system. 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. 2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire delta service with a mid-tap ground. 3. Grounding the primary neutral of this connection would create a ground source for the primary system. This could subject the transformer to severe overloading during a primary system disturbance or load unbalance. 4. Frequently installed with mid-tap ground on one leg when supplying combination three-phase and single-phase load where the three-phase load is much larger than single-phase load. 5. When used in 25 kV and 35 kV three-phase four-wire primary systems, ferroresonance can occur when energizing or de-energizing the transformer using single-pole switches located at the primary terminals. With smaller kVA transformers the probability of ferroresonance is higher. 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. 2. Suitable for a three-wire service only, even if XO is grounded. 3. This connection is incapable of furnishing a stabilized neutral and its use may result in phase-to-neutral overvoltage (neutral shift) as a result of unbalanced phase-to-neutral load. 4. If a three-phase unit is built on a three-legged core, the neutral point of the primary windings is practically locked at ground potential.
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 0 DELTA-WYE Connection Phasor Diagram: H2 X2 X1 H1 H3 X0 X3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 30 WYE-DELTA Connection Phasor Diagram: H2 X2
X1 H1 H3 X3
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 30
WYE-WYE Connection Phasor Diagram: H2 X2
X0 H1 H3 X1 X3

GROUNDED WYE-WYE Connection Phasor Diagram: H2 X2
H0 H1 H3 X1
X0 X3
1. Suitable for four-wire effectively grounded source only. 2. Suitable for a three-wire service or for four-wire grounded service with XO grounded. 3. Three-phase transformers with this connection may experience stray ux tank heating during certain external system unbalances unless the core conguration (four or ve legged) used provides a return path for the ux. 4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary lines supplied by the transformer also ow in the primary lines (and primary neutral conductor). 5. Ground relay for the primary system may see load unbalances and ground faults in the secondary system. This must be considered when coordinating overcurrent protective devices. 6. Three-phase transformers with the neutral points of the high voltage and low voltage windings connected together internally and brought out through an HOXO bushing should not be operated with the HOXO bushing ungrounded (oating). To do so can result in very high voltages in the secondary systems. 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. 2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground. 3. When using the tap for single-phase circuits, the single-phase load kVA should not exceed 5% of the three-phase kVA rating of the transformer. The three-phase rating of the transformer is also substantially reduced.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DELTA-DELTA Connection with Tap Phasor Diagram: H2 X4 X2
H1
H3
X1
X3
21
CA08104001E
1.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 01 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Types of Systems
In many cases, power is supplied by the utility to a building at the utilization voltage. In these cases, the distribution of power within the building is achieved through the use of a simple radial distribution system. In cases where the utility service voltage is at some voltage higher than the utilization voltage within the building, the system design engineer has a choice of a number of types of systems that may be used. This discussion covers several major types of distribution systems and practical modications of them. 1. Simple radial 2. Loop-primary system radial secondary system 3. Primary selective system secondary radial system 4. Two-source primary secondary selective system 5. Sparing transformer system 6. Simple spot network 7. Medium voltage distribution system design
Low voltage feeder circuits run from the switchgear or switchboard assemblies to panelboards that are located closer to their respective loads as shown in Figure 1.1-1. Each feeder is connected to the switchgear or switchboard bus through a circuit breaker or other overcurrent protective device. A relatively small number of circuits are used to distribute power to the loads from the switchgear or switchboard assemblies and panelboards. Because the entire load is served from a single source, full advantage can be taken of the diversity among the loads. This makes it possible to minimize the installed transformer capacity. However, the voltage regulation and efciency of this system may be poor because of the low voltage feeders and single source. The cost of the low voltagefeeder circuits and their associated circuit breakers are high when the feeders are long and the peak demand is above 1000 kVA.
A fault on the secondary low voltage bus or in the source transformer will interrupt service to all loads. Service cannot be restored until the necessary repairs have been made. A low voltage feeder circuit fault will interrupt service to all loads supplied over that feeder. A modern and improved form of the conventional simple radial system distributes power at a primary voltage. The voltage is stepped down to utilization level in the several load areas within the building typically through secondary unit substation transformers. The transformers are usually connected to their associated load bus through a circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 1.1-2. Each secondary unit substation is an assembled unit consisting of a three-phase, liquidlled or air-cooled transformer, an integrally connected primary fused switch, and low voltage switchgear or switchboard with circuit breakers or fused switches. Circuits are run to the loads from these low voltage protective devices.
Primary Fused Switch Transformer 600V Class Switchboard
1. Simple Radial System

The conventional simple radial system receives power at the utility supply voltage at a single substation and steps the voltage down to the utilization level. In those cases where the customer receives his supply from the primary system and owns the primary switch and transformer along with the secondary low voltage switchboard or switchgear, the equipment may take the form of a separate primary switch, separate transformer, and separate low voltage switchgear or switchboard. This equipment may be combined in the form of an outdoor pad-mounted transformer with internal primary fused switch and secondary main breaker feeding an indoor switchboard. Another alternative would be a secondary unit substation where the primary fused switch, transformer and secondary switchgear or switchboard are designed and installed as a close-coupled single assembly. In those cases where the utility owns the primary equipment and transformer, the supply to the customer is at the utilization voltage, and the service equipment then becomes low voltage main distribution switchgear or a switchboard.
Distribution Dry-Type Transformer Distribution Panel MCC Distribution Panel Lighting Panelboard
Figure 1.1-1. Simple Radial System
52 Primary Main Breaker
52 52 52 52 52 52 Primary Feeder Breakers
Primary Cables
Secondary Unit Substation
Figure 1.1-2. Primary and Secondary Simple Radial System

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 009
1.1-7
Because each transformer is located within a specic load area, it must have sufcient capacity to carry the peak load of that area. Consequently, if any diversity exists among the load area, this modied primary radial system requires more transformer capacity than the basic form of the simple radial system. However, because power is distributed to the load areas at a primary voltage, losses are reduced, voltage regulation is improved, feeder circuit costs are reduced substantially, and large low voltage feeder circuit breakers are eliminated. In many cases the interrupting duty imposed on the load circuit breakers is reduced. This modern form of the simple radial system will usually be lower in initial investment than most other types of primary distribution systems for buildings in which the peak load is above 1000 kVA. A fault on a primary feeder circuit or in one transformer will cause an outage to only those secondary loads served by that feeder or transformer. In the case of a primary main bus fault or a utility service outage, service is interrupted to all loads until the trouble is eliminated. Reducing the number of transformers per primary feeder by adding more primary feeder circuits will improve the exibility and service continuity of this system; the ultimate being one secondary unit substation per primary feeder circuit. This of course increases the investment in the system but minimizes the extent of an outage resulting from a transformer or primary feeder fault.
In addition, if only one primary fuse on a circuit opens, the secondary loads are then single phased, causing damage to low voltage motors. Another approach to reducing costs is to eliminate the primary feeder breakers completely, and use a single primary main breaker or fused switch for protection of a single primary feeder circuit with all secondary unit substations supplied from this circuit. Although this system results in less initial equipment cost, system reliability is reduced drastically because a single fault in any part of the primary conductor would cause an outage to all loads within the facility.
break switches with load side bus connection) sectionalizing switches and primary load break fused switch as shown in Figure 1.1-4. When pad-mounted compartmentalized transformers are used, they are furnished with loop-feed oil-immersed gang-operated load break sectionalizing switches and drawout current limiting fuses in dry wells as shown in Figure 1.1-5. By operating the appropriate sectionalizing switches, it is possible to disconnect any section of the loop conductors from the rest of the system. In addition, by opening the transformer primary switch (or removing the load break drawout fuses in the pad-mounted transformer) it is possible to disconnect any transformer from the loop. A key interlocking scheme is normally recommended to prevent closing all sectionalizing devices in the loop. Each primary loop sectionalizing switch and the feeder breakers to the loop are interlocked such that to be closed they require a key (which is held captive until the switch or breaker is opened) and one less key than the number of key interlock cylinders is furnished. An extra key is provided to defeat the interlock under qualied supervision.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2. Loop Primary System Radial Secondary System

This system consists of one or more PRIMARY LOOPS with two or more transformers connected on the loop. This system is typically most effective when two services are available from the utility as shown in Figure 1.1-3. Each primary loop is operated such that one of the loop sectionalizing switches is kept open to prevent parallel operation of the sources. When secondary unit substations are used, each transformer has its own duplex (2-load
Primary Main Breaker 1 52

52
52 Primary Main Breaker 2
11 12
52
52
Tie Breaker
52
52
Loop Feeder Breaker
Loop A Loop B
13
NO
NC
Primary connections from one secondary unit substation to the next secondary unit substation can be made with double lugs on the unit substation primary switch as shown, or with separable connectors made in manholes or other locations.
Depending on the load kVA connected to each primary circuit and if no ground fault protection is desired for either the primary feeder conductors and transformers connected to that feeder or the main bus, the primary main and/or feeder breakers may be changed to primary fused switches. This will signicantly reduce the rst cost, but also decrease the level of conductor and equipment protection. Thus, should a fault or overload condition occur, downtime increases signicantly and higher costs associated with increased damage levels and the need for fuse replacement is typically encountered.
CA08104001E
NC
NC
Fault Sensors
14 15 16
NC
NC
NO
NC
NC
NC
17 18 19
Secondary Unit Substations Consisting of: Duplex Primary Switches/Fused Primary Switches/ Transformer and Secondary Main Feeder Breakers
20 21
Figure 1.1-3. Loop PrimaryRadial Secondary System

1.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 01 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Loop Feeder
Loop Feeder Load Break Loop Switches
Fused Disconnect Switch
Figure 1.1-4. Secondary Unit Substation Loop Switching

Loop Feeder Loop Feeder Load Break Loop Switches
When a primary feeder conductor fault occurs, the associated loop feeder breaker opens and interrupts service to all loads up to the normally open primary loop load break switch (typically half of the loads). Once it is determined which section of primary cable has been faulted, the loop sectionalizing switches on each side of the faulted conductor can be opened, the loop sectionalizing switch that had been previously left open then closed and service restored to all secondary unit substations while the faulted conductor is replaced. If the fault should occur in a conductor directly on the load side of one of the loop feeder breakers, the loop feeder breaker is kept open after tripping and the next load side loop sectionalizing switch manually opened so that the faulted conductor can be sectionalized and replaced.
Note: Under this condition, all secondary unit substations are supplied through the other loop feeder circuit breaker, and thus all conductors around the loop should be sized to carry the entire load connected to the loop. Increasing the number of primary loops (two loops shown in Figure 1.1-6) will reduce the extent of the outage from a conductor fault, but will also increase the system investment.
52
Loop A
Loop A
In cases where only one primary line is available, the use of a single primary breaker provides the loop connections to the loads as shown here.
Figure 1.1-6. Single Primary Feeder Loop System A basic primary loop system that uses a single primary feeder breaker connected directly to two loop feeder switches which in turn then feed the loop is shown in Figure 1.1-6. In this basic system, the loop may be normally operated with one of the loop sectionalizing switches open as described above or with all loop sectionalizing switches closed. If a fault occurs in the basic primary loop system, the single loop feeder breaker trips, and secondary loads are lost until the faulted conductor is found and eliminated from the loop by opening the appropriate loop sectionalizing switches and then reclosing the breaker.
Load Break Drawout Fuses
Figure 1.1-5. Pad-Mounted Transformer Loop Switching In addition, the two primary main breakers, which are normally closed, and primary tie breaker, which is normally open, are either mechanically or electrically interlocked to prevent paralleling the incoming source lines. For slightly added cost, an automatic throw-over scheme can be added between the two main breakers and tie breaker. During the more common event of a utility outage, the automatic transfer scheme provides signicantly reduced power outage time. The system in Figure 1.1-3 has higher costs than in Figure 1.1-2, but offers increased reliability and quick restoration of service when 1) a utility outage occurs, 2) a primary feeder conductor fault occurs, or 3) a transformer fault or overload occurs. Should a utility outage occur on one of the incoming lines, the associated primary main breaker is opened and the tie breaker closed either manually or through an automatic transfer scheme.
When a transformer fault or overload occurs, the transformer primary fuses open, and the transformer primary switch manually opened, disconnecting the transformer from the loop, and leaving all other secondary unit substation loads unaffected.
Primary Metal-Clad Switchgear Lineup Bus A
52
52
52
3. Primary Selective System Secondary Radial System

The primary selectivesecondary radial system, as shown in Figure 1.1-7, differs from those previously described in that it employs at least two primary feeder circuits in each load area. It is
52
Primary Main Breaker Bus B
52
52
52
Primary Feeder Breaker
Feeder A1
Feeder B1
Feeder B2 Feeder A2
To Other Substations
NO
NC
NO
NC NO
Typical Secondary Unit Substation Duplex Primary Switch/Fuses Transformer/600V Class Secondary Switchgear
NC
Figure 1.1-7. Basic Primary SelectiveRadial Secondary System

September 2011
Sheet 01 011
1.1-9
designed so that when one primary circuit is out of service, the remaining feeder or feeders have sufcient capacity to carry the total load. Half of the transformers are normally connected to each of the two feeders. When a fault occurs on one of the primary feeders, only half of the load in the building is dropped. Duplex fused switches as shown in Figure 1.1-7 and detailed in Figure 1.1-8 are the normal choice for this type of system. Each duplex fused switch consists of two (2) load break threepole switches each in their own separate structure, connected together by bus bars on the load side. Typically, the load break switch closest to the transformer includes a fuse assembly with fuses. Mechanical and/or key interlocking is furnished such that both switches cannot be closed at the same time (to prevent parallel operation) and interlocking such that access to either switch or fuse assembly cannot be obtained unless both switches are opened.
Primary Feeders
Primary Feeders
Non-Load Break Selector Switches

Interlock Load Break Disconnect
or most of the loads, may more than offset the greater cost. Having two sources allows for either manual or automatic transfer of the two primary main breakers and tie breaker should one of the sources become unavailable. The primary selective-secondary radial system, however, may be less costly or more costly than a primary loop secondary radial system of Figure 1.1-3 depending on the physical location of the transformers while offering comparable downtime and reliability. The cost of conductors for the two types of systems may vary greatly depending on the location of the transformers and loads within the facility and greatly override primary switching equipment cost differences between the two systems.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fuses
Figure 1.1-9. Fused Selector Switch in One Structure This means limited cable space especially if double lugs are furnished for each line as shown in Figure 1.1-7 and should a faulted primary conductor have to be changed, both lines would have to be de-energized for safe changing of the faulted conductors. In Figure 1.1-7 when a primary feeder fault occurs, the associated feeder breaker opens and the transformers normally supplied from the faulted feeder are out of service. Then manually, each primary switch connected to the faulted line must be opened and then the alternate line primary switch can be closed connecting the transformer to the live feeder, thus restoring service to all loads. Note that each of the primary circuit conductors for Feeder A1 and B1 must be sized to handle the sum of the loads normally connected to both A1 and B1. Similar sizing of Feeders A2 and B2, etc., is required. If a fault occurs in one transformer, the associated primary fuses blow and interrupt the service to just the load served by that transformer. Service cannot be restored to the loads normally served by the faulted transformer until the transformer is repaired or replaced. Cost of the primary selective secondary radial system is greater than that of the simple primary radial system of Figure 1.1-1 because of the additional primary main breakers, tie breaker, two-sources, increased number of feeder breakers, the use of primaryduplex or selector switches, and the greater amount of primary feeder cable required. The benets from the reduction in the amount of load lost when a primary feeder is faulted, plus the quick restoration of service to all
4. Two-Source Primary Secondary Selective System

This system uses the same principle of duplicate sources from the power supply point using two primary main breakers and a primary tie breaker. The two primary main breakers and primary tie breaker being either manually or electrically interlocked to prevent closing all three at the same time and paralleling the sources. Upon loss of voltage on one source, a manual or automatic transfer to the alternate source line may be used to restore power to all primary loads. Each transformer secondary is arranged in a typical double-ended unit substation arrangement as shown in Figure 1.1-10. The two secondary main breakers and secondary tie breaker of each unit substation are again either mechanically or electrically interlocked to prevent parallel operation. Upon loss of secondary source voltage on one side, manual or automatic transfer may be used to transfer the loads to the other side, thus restoring power to all secondary loads. This arrangement permits quick restoration of service to all loads when a primary feeder or transformer fault occurs by opening the associated secondary main and closing the secondary tie breaker. If the loss of secondary voltage has occurred because of a primary feeder fault with the associated primary feeder breaker opening, then all secondary loads normally served by the faulted feeder would have to be transferred to the opposite primary feeder. This means each primary feeder conductor must be sized to carry the load on both sides of all the secondary buses it is
Load Break Switches
Fuses
Figure 1.1-8. Duplex Fused Switch in Two Structures As an alternate to the duplex switch arrangement, a non-load break selector switch mechanically interlocked with a load break fused switch can be used as shown in Figure 1.1-9. The non-load break selector switch is physically located in the rear of the load break fused switch, thus only requiring one structure and a lower cost and oor space savings over the duplex arrangement. The non-load break switch is mechanically interlocked to prevent its operation unless the load break switch is opened. The main disadvantage of the selector switch is that conductors from both circuits are terminated in the same structure.
CA08104001E
1.1-10 Power Distribution Systems System Design
September 2011
Sheet 01 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
serving under secondary emergency transfer. If the loss of voltage was due to a failure of one of the transformers in the double-ended unit substation, then the associated primary fuses would open taking only the failed transformer out of service, and then only the secondary loads normally served by the faulted transformer would have to be transferred to the opposite transformer. In either of the above
emergency conditions, the in-service transformer of a double-ended unit substation would have to have the capability of serving the loads on both sides of the tie breaker. For this reason, transformers used in this application have equal kVA rating on each side of the double-ended unit substation and the normal operating maximum load on each transformer is typically about 2/3 base nameplate kVA rating. Typically these
transformers are furnished with fan-cooling and/or lower than normal temperature rise such that under emergency conditions they can carry on a continuous basis the maximum load on both sides of the secondary tie breaker. Because of this spare transformer capacity, the voltage regulation provided by the double-ended unit substation system under normal conditions is better than that of the systems previously discussed. The double-ended unit substation arrangement can be used in conjunction with any of the previous systems discussed, which involve two primary sources. Although not recommended, if allowed by the utility, momentary re-transfer of loads to the restored source may be made closed transition (anti-parallel interlock schemes would have to be defeated) for either the primary or secondary systems. Under this condition, all equipment interrupting and momentary ratings should be suitable for the fault current available from both sources. For double-ended unit substations equipped with ground fault systems special consideration to transformer neutral grounding and equipment operation should be madesee Grounding and Ground Fault Protection in Section 1.4. Where two single-ended unit substations are connected together by external tie conductors, it is recommended that a tie breaker be furnished at each end of the tie conductors.
52 52 52 52 52
52
Primary Main Breakers
52
Primary Feeder Breakers
To Other Substations Typical Double-Ended Unit Substation
To Other Substations
Primary Fused Switch
Transformer
Tie Breaker
Secondary Main Breaker
11 12 13
Figure 1.1-10. Two-Source PrimarySecondary Selective System
5. Sparing Transformer System

K K K
14 15
Sparing Transformer
16
K K
The sparing transformer system concept came into use as an alternative to the capital cost intensive double-ended secondary unit substation distribution system (see Two-Source Primary Secondary Selective System). It essentially replaces double-ended substations with single-ended substations and one or more sparing transformer substations all interconnected on a common secondary bus (see Figure 1.1-11).
Generally no more than three to ve single-ended substations are on a sparing loop.
17 18 19
K K Typical Single-Ended Substation Typical Secondary Busway Loop
20 21
Figure 1.1-11. Sparing Transformer System
The essence of this design philosophy is that conservatively designed and loaded transformers are highly reliable electrical devices and rarely fail. Therefore, this design provides a single common backup transformer for a group of transformers in lieu of a backup transformer for each and every transformer. This system design still maintains a high degree of continuity of service.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 013
1.1-11
Referring to Figure 1.1-11, it is apparent that the sparing concept backs up primary switch and primary cable failure as well. Restoration of lost or failed utility power is accomplished similarly to primary selective scheme previously discussed. It is therefore important to use an automatic throwover system in a two source lineup of primary switchgear to restore utility power as discussed in the Two-Source Primary schemesee Figure 1.1-10. A major advantage of the sparing transformer system is the typically lower total base kVA of transformation. In a double-ended substation design, each transformer must be rated to carry the sum of the loads of two busses and usually requires the addition of cooling fans to accomplish this rating. In the sparing concept, each transformer carries only its own load, which is typically not a fan-cooled rating. Major space savings is also a benet of this system in addition to rst cost savings. The sparing transformer system operates as follows: All main breakers, including the sparing main breaker, are normally closed; the tie breakers are normally open Once a transformer (or primary cable or primary switch/fuse) fails, the associated secondary main breaker is opened. The associated tie breaker is then closed, which restores power to the single-ended substation bus Schemes that require the main to be opened before the tie is closed (open transition), and that allow any tie to be closed before the substation main is opened, (closed transition) are possible
In facilities without qualied electrical power operators, an open transition with key interlocking is often a prudent design.
Note: Each pair of main breaker/tie breaker key cylinders should be uniquely keyed to prevent any paralleled source operations.
Careful sizing of these transformers as well as careful specication of the transformers is required for reliability. Low temperature rise specied with continuous overload capacity or upgraded types of transformers should be considered. One disadvantage to this system is the external secondary tie system, see Figure 1.1-11. As shown, all singleended substations are tied together on the secondary with a tie busway or cable system. Location of substations is therefore limited because of voltage drop and cost considerations. Routing of busway, if used, must be carefully layed out. It should also be noted, that a tie busway or cable fault will essentially prevent the use of the sparing transformer until it is repaired. Commonly, the single-ended substations and the sparing transformer must be clustered. This can also be an advantage, as more kVA can be supported from a more compact space layout.
The major advantage of the secondary network system is continuity of service. No single fault anywhere on the primary system will interrupt service to any of the systems loads. Most faults will be cleared without interrupting service to any load. Another outstanding advantage that the network system offers is its exibility to meet changing and growing load conditions at minimum cost and minimum interruption in service to other loads on the network. In addition to exibility and service reliability, the secondary network system provides exceptionally uniform and good voltage regulation, and its high efciency materially reduces the costs of system losses. Three major differences between the network system and the simple radial system account for the outstanding advantages of the network. First, a network protector is connected in the secondary leads of each network transformer in place of, or in addition to, the secondary main breaker, as shown in Figure 1.1-12. Also, the secondaries of each transformer in a given location (spot) are connected together by a switchgear or ring bus from which the loads are served over short radial feeder circuits. Finally, the primary supply has sufcient capacity to carry the entire building load without overloading when any one primary feeder is out of service. A network protector is a specially designed heavy-duty air power breaker, spring close with electrical motor-charged mechanism, with a network relay to control the status of the protector (tripped or closed). The network relay is usually a solid-state microprocessorbased component integrated
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
6. Simple Spot Network Systems

The AC secondary network system is the system that has been used for many years to distribute electric power in the high-density, downtown areas of cities, usually in the form of utility grids. Modications of this type of system make it applicable to serve loads within buildings.
With a closed transition scheme, it is common to add a timer function that opens the tie breaker unless either main breaker is opened within a time interval. This closed transition allows power to be transferred to the sparing transformer without interruption, such as for routine maintenance, and then back to the substation. This closed transition transfer has an advantage in some facilities; however, appropriate interrupting capacities and bus bracing must be specied suitable for the momentary parallel operation.
Typical Feeder Primary Circuit Network Transformer Network Protector Fuses Optional Main, 50/51 Relaying and/or Network Disconnect To Other Networks
Tie NC
Tie NC Drawout Low Voltage Switchgear
18 19
LV Feeder
Customer Loads
Customer Loads
Customer Loads
20 21
Figure 1.1-12. Three-Source Spot Network
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
into the protector enclosure that functions to automatically close the protector only when the voltage conditions are such that its associated transformer will supply power to the secondary network loads, and to automatically open the protector when power ows from the secondary to the network transformer. The purpose of the network protector is to protect the integrity of the network bus voltage and the loads served from it against transformer and primary feeder faults by quickly disconnecting the defective feeder-transformer pair from the network when backfeed occurs. The simple spot network system resembles the secondary-selective radial system in that each load area is supplied over two or more primary feeders through two or more transformers. In network systems, the transformers are connected through network protectors to a common bus, as shown in Figure 1.1-12, from which loads are served. Because the transformers are connected in parallel, a primary feeder or transformer fault does not cause any service interruption to the loads. The paralleled transformers supplying each load bus will normally carry equal load currents, whereas equal loading of the two separate transformers supplying a substation in the secondaryselective radial system is difcult to obtain. The interrupting duty imposed on the outgoing feeder breakers in the network will be greater with the spot network system. The optimum size and number of primary feeders can be used in the spot network system because the loss of any primary feeder and its associated transformers does not result in the loss of any load even for an instant. In spite of the spare capacity usually supplied in network systems, savings in primary switchgear and secondary switchgear costs often result when compared to a radial system design with similar spare capacity. This occurs in many radial systems because more and smaller feeders are often used in order to minimize the extent of any outage when a primary fault event occurs. In spot networks, when a fault occurs on a primary feeder or in a transformer, the fault is isolated from the system through the automatic tripping of the primary feeder circuit breaker and all of the network protectors associated
with that feeder circuit. This operation does not interrupt service to any loads. After the necessary repairs have been made, the system can be restored to normal operating conditions by closing the primary feeder breaker. All network protectors associated with that feeder will close automatically. The chief purpose of the network bus normally closed ties is to provide for the sharing of loads and a balancing of load currents for each primary service and transformer regardless of the condition of the primary services. Also, the ties provide a means for isolating and sectionalizing ground fault events within the switchgear network bus, thereby saving a portion of the loads from service interruptions, yet isolating the faulted portion for corrective action. The use of spot network systems provides users with several important advantages. First, they save transformer capacity. Spot networks permit equal loading of transformers under all conditions. Also, networks yield lower system losses and greatly improve voltage conditions. The voltage regulation on a network system is such that both lights and power can be fed from the same load bus. Much larger motors can be started across-the-line than on a simple radial system. This can result in simplied motor control and permits the use of relatively large low voltage motors with their less expensive control. Finally, network systems provide a greater degree of exibility in adding future loads; they can be connected to the closest spot network bus. Spot network systems are economical for buildings that have heavy concentrations of loads covering small areas, with considerable distance between areas, and light loads within the distances separating the concentrated loads. They are commonly used in hospitals, high rise ofce buildings, and institutional buildings where a high degree of service reliability is required from the utility sources. Spot network systems are especially economical where three or more primary feeders are available. Principally, this is due to supplying each load bus through three or more transformers and the reduction in spare cable and transformer capacity required.
They are also economical when compared to two transformer doubleended substations with normally opened tie breakers. Emergency power should be connected to network loads downstream from the network, or upstream at primary voltage, not at the network bus itself.
7. Medium Voltage Distribution System Design

A. Single Bus, Figure 1.1-13
The sources (utility and/or generator(s)) are connected to a single bus. All feeders are connected to the same bus.
Utility G
52 Main Bus
52
52
One of Several Feeders
Figure 1.1-13. Single Bus This conguration is the simplest system; however, outage of the utility results in total outage. Normally the generator does not have adequate capacity for the entire load. A properly relayed system equipped with load shedding, automatic voltage/ frequency control may be able to maintain partial system operation. Any future addition of breaker sections to the bus will require a shutdown of the bus, because there is no tie breaker.
B. Single Bus with Two Sources from the Utility, Figure 1.1-14
Same as the single bus, except that two utility sources are available. This system is operated normally with the main breaker to one source open. Upon loss of the normal service, the transfer to the standby normally open (NO) breaker can be automatic or manual. Automatic transfer is preferred for rapid service restoration especially in unattended stations.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 015
1.1-13
Utility #1
Utility #2
Normal
Standby
Again, the closing of the tie breaker can be manual or automatic. The statements made for the retransfer of scheme B apply to this scheme also.
Utility #1 Utility #2
The third tie breaker allows any bus to be fed from any utility source. Caution for Figures 1.1-14, 1.1-15 and 1.1-16: If continuous paralleling of sources is planned, reverse current, reverse power and other appropriate relaying protection should be added. When both sources are paralleled for any amount of time, the fault current available on the load side of the main device is the sum of the available fault current from each source plus the motor fault contribution. It is required that bus bracing, feeder breakers and all load side equipment is rated for the increased available fault current.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
52 NC
52 NO 52 NC Loads Bus #1 NO 52 Bus #2 52 NC
Figure 1.1-14. Single Bus with Two-Sources Retransfer to the Normal can be closed transition subject to the approval of the utility. Closed transition momentarily (510 cycles) parallels both utility sources. Caution: when both sources are paralleled, the fault current available on the load side of the main device is the sum of the available fault current from each source plus the motor fault contribution. It is recommended that the short-circuit ratings of the bus, feeder breakers and all load side equipment are rated for the increased available fault current. If the utility requires open transfer, the disconnection of motors from the bus must be ensured by means of suitable time delay on reclosing as well as supervision of the bus voltage and its phase with respect to the incoming source voltage. This busing scheme does not preclude the use of cogeneration, but requires the use of sophisticated automatic synchronizing and synchronism checking controls, in addition to the previously mentioned load shedding, automatic frequency and voltage controls. This conguration is more expensive than the scheme shown in Figure 1.1-13, but service restoration is quicker. Again, a utility outage results in total outage to the load until transfer occurs. Extension of the bus or adding breakers requires a shutdown of the bus. If paralleling sources, reverse current, reverse power and other appropriate relaying protection should be added as requested by the utility.
52 52
Summary
The medium voltage system congurations shown are based on using metalclad drawout switchgear. The service continuity required from electrical systems makes the use of single-source systems impractical. In the design of a modern medium voltage system, the engineer should: 1. Design a system as simple as possible. 2. Limit an outage to as small a portion of the system as possible. 3. Provide means for expanding the system without major shutdowns. 4. Relay the system so that only the faulted part is removed from service, and damage to it is minimized consistent with selectivity. 5. Specify and apply all equipment within its published ratings and national standards pertaining to the equipment and its installation.
Load
Load
Figure 1.1-15. Two-Source Utility with Tie Breaker If looped or primary selective distribution system for the loads is used, the buses can be extended without a shutdown by closing the tie breaker and transferring the loads to the other bus. This conguration is more expensive than B. The system is not limited to two buses only. Another advantage is that the design may incorporate momentary paralleling of buses on retransfer after the failed line has been restored to prevent another outage. See the Caution for Figures 1.1-14, 1.1-15 and 1.1-16. In Figure 1.1-16, closing of the tie breaker following the opening of a main breaker can be manual or automatic. However, because a bus can be fed through two tie breakers, the control scheme should be designed to make the selection.
Utility #1
Utility #2
Utility #3
16 17
52 NC NO 52 52 NC NO 52 52 NC
18 19
C. Multiple Sources with Tie Breaker, Figure 1.1-15 and Figure 1.1-16
This conguration is similar to conguration B. It differs signicantly in that both utility sources normally carry the loads and also by the incorporation of a normally open tie breaker. The outage to the system load for a utility outage is limited to half of the system.
CA08104001E
Bus #1
Bus #2
Bus #3
52 NO 52 Typical Feeder Tie Busway
52
52
52 NO
20 21
Figure 1.1-16. Triple-Ended Arrangement

September 2011
Sheet 01 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Health Care Facilities

Health care facilities are dened by NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency) as Buildings or portions of buildings in which medical, dental, psychiatric, nursing, obstetrical, or surgical care are provided. Due to the critical nature of the care being provided at these facilities and their increasing dependence on electrical equipment for preservation of life, health care facilities have special requirements for the design of their electrical distribution systems. These requirements are typically much more stringent than commercial or industrial facilities. The following section summarizes some of the unique requirements of health care facility design. There are several agencies and organizations that develop requirements for health care electrical distribution system design. The following is a listing of some of the specic NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency) standards that affect health care facility design and implementation: NFPA 37-2010Standard for Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines NFPA 70-2011National Electrical Code NFPA 99-2005Health Care Facilities
NFPA 101-2009Life Safety Code NFPA 110-2010Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems NFPA 111-2010Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems

These NFPA guidelines represent the most industry recognized standard requirements for health care electrical design. However, the electrical design engineer should consult with the authorities having jurisdiction over the local region for specic electrical distribution requirements.
The electrical system requirements for the essential electrical system (EES) vary according to the type of health care facility. Health care facilities are categorized by NFPA 99 as Type 1, Type 2 or Type 3 facilities. Some example health care facilities, classied by type, are summarized in the following Table 1.1-8. Table 1.1-8. Health Care Facilities
Description Denition EES Type Hospitals NFPA 99 Chap. 13 Type 1 Nursing homes NFPA 99 Chap. 17 Type 2 Limited care facilities NFPA 99 Chap. 18 Type 2 Ambulatory surgical facilities Other health care facilities
Health Care Electrical System Requirements

Health care electrical systems usually consist of two parts: 1. Non-essential or normal electrical system. 2. Essential electrical system. All electrical power in a health care facility is important, though some loads are not critical to the safe operation of the facility. These non-essential or normal loads include things such as general lighting, general lab equipment, non-critical service equipment, patient care areas, etc. These loads are not required to be fed from an alternate source of power.
NFPA 99 Chap. 14 Type 3 NFPA 99 Chap. 14 Type 3
If electrical life support or critical care areas are present, then facility is classied as Type 1.
Type 1 Essential Electrical Systems (EES)

Type 1 essential electrical systems (EES) have the most stringent requirements for providing continuity of electrical service and will, therefore, be the focus of this section. Type 1 EES requirements meet or exceed the requirements for Type 2 and Type 3 facilities.
Normal Source
Normal Source
Normal Source
Emergency Power Supply G
12 13 14 15 16
Non-Essential Loads Non-Essential Loads
17 18 19 20 21
Manual Transfer Switch Delayed Automatic Transfer Switch Automatic (Non-Delaying) Transfer Switch Equipment System Life Safety Critical Branch Branch Emergency System Essential Electrical System
Figure 1.1-17. Typical Large Hospital Electrical SystemType 1 Facility
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 017
1.1-15
Sources: Type 1 systems are required to have a minimum of two independent sources of electrical powera normal source that generally supplies the entire facility and one or more alternate sources that supply power when the normal source is interrupted. The alternate source(s) must be an on-site generator driven by a prime mover unless a generator(s) exists as the normal power source. In the case where a generator(s) is used as the normal source, it is permissible for the alternate source to be a utility feed. Alternate source generators must be classied as Type 10, Class X, Level 1 gensets per NFPA 110 Tables 4.1(a) and 4.2(b) that are capable of providing power to the load in a maximum of 10 seconds. Typically, the alternate sources of power are supplied to the loads through a series of automatic and/or manual transfer switches (see Tab 25). The transfer switches can be non-delayed automatic, delayed automatic or manual transfer depending on the requirements of the specic branch of the EES that they are feeding. It is permissible to feed multiple branches or systems of the EES from a single automatic transfer switch provided that the maximum demand on the EES does not exceed 150 kVA. This conguration is typically seen in smaller health care facilities that must meet Type 1 EES requirements (see Figure 1.1-18).
Normal Source
Alternate Source
Table 1.1-9. Type 1 EES Applicable Codes

Description Design Sources Uses Emergency Power Supply Classication Distribution Standard NFPA 99 NFPA 99 NFPA 99 Section 4.4.1.1.1 4.4.1.1.4 thru 4.4.4.1.1.7.2 4.4.1.1.8 (1-3)
NFPA 110 NFPA 99 NEC
4 4.4.2 517.30
Systems and Branches of Service: The Type 1 EES consists of two separate power systems capable of supplying power considered essential for life safety and effective facility operation during an interruption of the normal power source. They are the emergency system and the equipment system. 1. Emergency systemconsists of circuits essential to life safety and critical patient care. The emergency system is an electrical sub-system that must be fed from an automatic transfer switch or series of automatic transfer switches. This emergency system consists of two mandatory branches that provide power to systems and functions essential to life safety and critical patient care. A. Life safety branchsupplies power for lighting, receptacles and equipment to perform the following functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Illumination of means of egress. Exit signs and exit direction signs. Alarms and alerting systems. Emergency communications systems. 5. Task illumination, battery chargers for battery powered lighting, and select receptacles at the generator. 6. Elevator lighting control, communication and signal systems. 7. Automatic doors used for egress. These are the only functions permitted to be on the life safety branch. Life safety branch equipment and wiring must be entirely independent of all other loads and branches of service. This includes separation of raceways, boxes or cabinets. Power must be supplied to the life safety branch from a non-delayed automatic transfer switch.
B. Critical branchsupplies power for task illumination, xed equipment, selected receptacles and selected power circuits for areas related to patient care. The purpose of the critical branch is to provide power to a limited number of receptacles and locations to reduce load and minimize the chances of fault conditions. The transfer switch(es) feeding the critical branch must be automatic type. They are permitted to have appropriate time delays that will follow the restoration of the life safety branch, but should have power restored within 10 seconds of normal source power loss. The critical branch provides power to circuits serving the following areas and functions: 1. Critical care areas. 2. Isolated power systems in special environments. 3. Task illumination and selected receptacles in the following patient care areas: infant nurseries, medication prep areas, pharmacy, selected acute nursing areas, psychiatric bed areas, ward treatment rooms, nurses stations. 4. Specialized patient care task illumination, where needed. 5. Nurse call systems. 6. Blood, bone and tissue banks. 7. Telephone equipment rooms and closets. 8. Task illumination, selected receptacles and selected power circuits for the following: general care beds (at least one duplex receptacle), angiographic labs, cardiac catheterization labs, coronary care units, hemodialysis rooms, selected emergency room treatment areas, human physiology labs, intensive care units, selected postoperative recovery rooms. 9. Additional circuits and singlephase fraction motors as needed for effective facility operation.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Non-Essential Loads
Entire Essential Electric System (150 kVA or Less)
Figure 1.1-18. Small Hospital Electrical SystemSingle EES Transfer Switch
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Table 1.1-10. Type 1Emergency System Applicable Codes

Description General Life safety branch Critical branch Wiring Standard NFPA 99 NEC NFPA 99 NEC NFPA 99 NEC NFPA 99 NEC Section 4.4.2.2.2 517.31 4.4.2.2.2.2 517.32 4.4.2.2.2.3 517.33 4.4.2.2.4 517.30(C)
The following equipment must be arranged for delayed automatic or manual transfer to the emergency power supply: 1. Select heating equipment. 2. Select elevators. 3. Supply, return and exhaust ventilating systems for surgical, obstetrical, intensive care, coronary care, nurseries and emergency treatment areas. 4. Supply, return and exhaust ventilating systems for airborne infectious/isolation rooms, labs and medical areas where hazardous materials are used. 5. Hyperbaric facilities. 6. Hypobaric facilities. 7. Autoclaving equipment. 8. Controls for equipment listed above. 9. Other selected equipment in kitchens, laundries, radiology rooms and central refrigeration as selected. Table 1.1-11. Type 1Equipment System Applicable Codes
Description General Equipment Standard NFPA 99 NEC NFPA 99 NEC Section 4.4.2.2.3 517.34 4.4.2.2.3 (3-5) 517.34(A)-(B)
and must be shed in the event the generator enters an overload condition. Ground fault protectionper NFPA 70 NEC Article 230.95, ground fault protection is required on any feeder or service disconnect 1000A or larger on systems with line to ground voltages of 150V or greater and phase-to-phase voltages of 600V or less. For health care facilities (of any type), a second level of ground fault protection is required to be on the next level of feeder downstream. This second level of ground fault is only required for feeders that serve patient care areas and equipment intended to support life. 100% selective coordination of the two levels of ground fault protection must be achieved with a minimum six-cycle separation between the upstream and downstream device. New in the 2011 NEC, ground fault protection is now allowed between the generator(s) and the EES transfer switch(es). However, NEC 517.17(B) prohibits the installation of ground fault protection on the load side of a transfer switch feeding EES circuits (see Figure 1.1-19additional level of ground fault). Careful consideration should be used in applying ground fault protection on the essential electrical system to prevent a ground fault that causes a trip of the normal source to also cause a trip on the emergency source. Such an event could result in complete power loss of both normal and emergency power sources and could not be recovered until the source of the ground fault was located and isolated from the system. To prevent this condition, NEC 700.26 removes the ground fault protection requirement for the
2. Equipment systemconsists of major electrical equipment necessary for patient care and Type 1 operation. The equipment system is a subsystem of the EES that consists of large electrical equipment loads needed for patient care and basic hospital operation. Loads on the equipment system that are essential to generator operation are required to be fed by a non-delayed automatic transfer switch. The following equipment must be arranged for delayed automatic transfer to the emergency power supply: 1. Central suction systems for medical and surgical functions. 2. Sump pumps and other equipment required for the safe operation of a major apparatus. 3. Compressed air systems for medical and surgical functions. 4. Smoke control and stair pressurization systems. 5. Kitchen hood supply and exhaust systems, if required to operate during a re.
Any loads served by the generator that are not approved as outlined above as part of the essential electrical system must be connected through a separate transfer switch. These transfer switches must be congured such that the loads will not cause the generator to overload
Normal Source(s)
Normal Source
G 480/277V 1000 A Service GF or Larger Entrance 480/277V 1000 A Service GF or Larger Entrance 480/277 V 1000 A Service GF or Larger Entrance Generator Breakers are Supplied with Ground Fault Alarm Only. (NEC 700.26) Ground Fault is Permitted GF GF GF GF GF Additional Level of Ground Fault Protection GF GF GF GF GF GF and EES Transfer Switches. (NEC 517.17(B))
Non-Essential Loads
Non-Essential Loads
GF = Ground Fault Protection Required
20 21
Figure 1.1-19. Additional Level of Ground Fault Protection
Essential Electrical System
Additional Level of Ground Fault is not Transfer Switches. (NEC 517.17a(2))
Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects 1000A and larger or systems with less than 600V phase-to-phase and greater than 150V to ground per NEC 230.95.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 019
1.1-17
emergency system source. Typically, the emergency system generator(s) are equipped with ground fault alarms that do not automatically disconnect power during a ground fault. Table 1.1-12. Ground Fault Protection Applicable Codes
Description Services Feeders Additional level Alternate source Standard NEC NEC NEC NFPA 99 NEC NEC Section 230.95 215.10 517.17 4.3.2.5 700.26 701.26
Maintenance and Testing

Regular maintenance and testing of the electrical distribution system in a health care facility is necessary to ensure proper operation in an emergency and, in some cases, to maintain government accreditation. Any health care facility receiving Medicare or Medicaid reimbursement from the government must be accredited by the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Health Care Organizations (JCAHO). JCAHO has established a group of standards called the Environment of Care, which must be met for health care facility accreditation. Included in these standards is the regular testing of the emergency (alternate) power system(s). Diesel-powered EPS installations must be tested monthly in accordance with NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. Generators must be tested for a minimum of 30 minutes under the criteria dened in NFPA 110. One method to automate the task of monthly generator tests is through the use of Power Xpert communications. With the Power Xpert integrated metering, monitoring and control system, a facility maintenance director can initiate a generator test, control/monitor loads, meter/monitor generator test points and create a JCAHO compliant report automatically from a central PC. The report contains all metered values, test results, date/time information, etc. necessary to satisfy JCAHO requirements. This automated generator testing procedure reduces the labor, training and inaccuracies that occur during manual emergency power system tests. (See Power Monitoring Tab 2.) Table 1.1-14. Maintenance and Testing Applicable Codes
Description Grounding Emergency power system Generator Transfer switches Breakers Standard NFPA 99 NFPA 99 JCAHO NFPA 110 NFPA 110 NFPA 99 NFPA 110 Section 4.3.3.1 4.4.4.1.1 EC.2.14(d) 8.4 8.3.5, 8.4.6 4.4.4.1.2 8.4.7
trained in development and execution of annual preventative maintenance procedures of health care facility electrical distribution systems.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Paralleling Emergency Generators

Without Utility Paralleling
In many health care facilities (and other large facilities with critical loads), the demand for standby emergency power is large enough to require multiple generator sets to power all of the required essential electrical system (EES) loads. In many cases, it becomes more exible and easier to operate the required multiple generators from a single location using generator paralleling switchgear. Figure 1.1-20 on Page 1.1-18 shows an example of a typical one-line for a paralleling switchgear lineup feeding the EES. A typical abbreviated sequence of operation for a multiple emergency generator and ATS system follows. Note that other modes of operation such as generator demand priority and automated testing modes are available but are not included below. (Reference Tab 41 for complete detailed sequences of operation.) 1. Entering emergency mode a. Upon loss of normal source, automatic transfer switches send generator control system a run request. b. All available generators are started. The rst generator up to voltage and frequency is closed to the bus. c. Unsheddable loads and load shed Priority 1 loads are powered in less than 10 seconds. d. The remaining generators are synchronized and paralleled to the bus as they come up to voltage and frequency. e. As additional generators are paralleled to the emergency bus, load shed priority levels are added, powering their associated loads. f. The system is now in emergency mode. 2. Exit from emergency mode a. Automatic transfer switches sense the utility source is within acceptable operational tolerances for a time duration set at the automatic transfer switch.
Wet procedure locationsA wet procedure location in a health care facility is any patient care area that is normally subject to wet conditions while patients are present. Typical wet procedure locations can include operating rooms, anesthetizing locations, dialysis locations, etc. (Patient beds, toilets and sinks are not considered wet locations.) These wet procedure locations require special protection to guard against electric shock. The ground fault current in these areas must be limited to not exceed 6 mA. In areas where the interruption of power is permissible, ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI) can be employed. GFCIs will interrupt a circuit when ground fault current exceeds 5 mA (1 mA). In areas where the interruption of power cannot be tolerated, protection from ground fault currents is accomplished through the use of an isolated power system. Isolated power systems provide power to an area that is isolated from ground (or ungrounded). This type of system limits the amount of current that ows to ground in the event of a single line-to-ground fault and maintains circuit continuity. Electronic line isolation monitors (LIM) are used to monitor and display leakage currents to ground. When leakage current thresholds are exceeded, visible and/or audible alarms are initiated to alert occupants of a possible hazardous condition. This alarm occurs without interrupting power to allow for the safe conclusion of critical procedures. Table 1.1-13. Wet Procedure Location Applicable Codes
Description General Isolated power systems Standard NFPA 99 NEC NFPA 99 NEC Section 4.3.2.2.9 517.20 4.3.2.6 517.160
Routine maintenance should be performed on circuit breakers, transfer switches, switchgear, generator equipment, etc. by trained professionals to ensure the most reliable electrical system possible. See Tab 41 for Eatons Electrical Services & Systems (EESS), which provides engineers,
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
b. As each automatic transfer switch transfers back to utility power, it removes its run request from the generator plant. c. When the last automatic transfer switch has retransferred to the utility and all run requests have been removed from the generator plant, all generator circuit breakers are opened. d. The generators are allowed to run for their programmed cool-down period. e. The system is now back in automatic/standby mode.
With Utility Paralleling

Today, many utilities are offering their customers excellent nancial incentives to use their on-site generation capacity to remove load from the utility grid. These incentives are sometimes referred to as limited interruptible rates (LIP). Under these incentives, utilities will greatly reduce or eliminate kWhr or kW demand charges to their customers with on-site generation capabilities. In exchange, during times of peak loading of the utility grid, the utility can ask their LIP rate customers to drop load from the grid by using their on-site generation capabilities. Health care facilities are ideally suited to take advantage of these programs because they already have signicant on-site generation capabilities due to the code requirements described.
Many health care facilities are taking advantage of these utility incentives by adding generator capacity over and above the NFPA requirements. Figure 1.1-21 on Page 1.1-19 shows an example one-line of a health care facility with complete generator backup and utility interconnect. NFPA 110 requirements state that the normal and emergency sources must be separated by a re-rated wall. The intent of this requirement is so that a re in one location cannot take out both sources of power. To meet this requirement, the paralleling switchgear must be split into separate sections with a tie bus through a re-rated wall. For more information on generator paralleling switchgear, see Tab 40.
Utility Transformer
Generators X = Number of Units Utility Metering Typical Generator Breaker G1 G2 Gx
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Non-Essential Loads
Service Main
Normal Bus Optional Electrically Operated Stored Energy Breakers
Emergency Bus Optional Electrically Operated Stored Energy Breakers F1 F2 Fx EF1 EF2 EFx
Equipment ATS # 1
Life Safety ATS # 2
Critical ATS # X
Load Shed/Load Add ATS Units
EP1
EP2
Typical Panelboards
EPX
Optional Closed Transition Paralleling of Generators and Utility
Figure 1.1-20. Typical One-Line for a Paralleling Switchgear Lineup Feeding the Essential Electrical System (EES)
18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 01 021
1.1-19
Utility Transformer
Fire-Rated Wall or Separation Barrier Generators X = Number of Units
i ii 1 2 3
Emergency Bus
Utility Metering Utility Protective Relay Service Main Normal Bus Closed Transition Paralleling of Generators and Utility, Plus Soft Loading/ Unloading TIE Optional Electrically Operated Stored Energy Breakers Typical Generator Breaker
G1
G2
Gx
Optional TIE Electrically Operated Stored Energy Breakers EF1 EF2 EFx
4 5 6
F1
F2
Fx
Field Installed Cable or Busway
Non-Essential Loads EP1
Equipment ATS # 1
Life Safety ATS # 2
Critical ATS # X
Load Shed/ Load Add ATS Units
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EP2
EPX
Typical Panelboards
Figure 1.1-21. Typical One-Line Health Care Facility with Complete Generator Backup and Utility Interconnect
CA08104001E
1.1-20 Power Distribution Systems

September 2011
Sheet 01 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 023
Power Distribution Systems Generator System Design
1.2-1
Generators and Generator Systems
a supply-side bonding jumper to be installed from the source of a separately derived system to the rst disconnecting means in accordance with 250.30(A)(2). Another new requirement, 250.30(C)Outdoor Sourcehas been added, and requires a grounding electrode connection at the source location when the separately derived system is located outside of the building or the structure being supplied. Article 445.19Generators Supplying Multiple Loadshas been revised to require that the generator have overcurrent protection per 240.15(A) when using individual enclosures tapped from a single feeder. Article 517.17(B)Feeder GFP (Health Care Facilities)now allows, but does not require, multiple levels of GFPE upstream of the transfer switch when the choice is made to provide GFPE on the alternate power source (i.e., generator). Article 701.6(D)Signals (Legally Required Standby Systems)now requires ground fault indication for legally required standby systems of more than 150V to ground and OCPDs rated 1000A or more.
Types of Generators
Generators can be either synchronous or asynchronous. Asynchronous generators are also referred to as induction generators. The construction is essentially the same as an induction motor. It has a squirrel-cage rotor and wound stator. An induction generator is a motor driven above its designed synchronous speed thus generating power. It will operate as a motor if it is running below synchronous speed. The induction generator does not have an exciter and must operate in parallel with the utility or another source. The induction generator requires VARs from an external source for it to generate power. The induction generator operates at a slip frequency so its output frequency is automatically locked in with the utility's frequency. An induction generator is a popular choice for use when designing cogeneration systems, where it will operate in parallel with the utility. This type of generator offers certain advantages over a synchronous generator. For example, voltage and frequency are controlled by the utility; thus voltage and frequency regulators are not required. In addition, the generator construction offers high reliability and little maintenance. Also, a minimum of protective relays and controls are required. Its major disadvantages are that it requires VARs from the system and it normally cannot operate as a standby/ emergency generator. Synchronous generators, however, are the most common. Their output is determined by their eld and governor controls. Varying the current in the DC eld windings controls the voltage output. The frequency is controlled by the speed of rotation. The torque applied to the generator shaft by the driving engine controls the power output. In this manner, the synchronous generator offers precise control over the power it can generate. In cogeneration applications, it can be used to improve the power factor of the system.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Diesel GensetCaterpillar
Introduction
The selection and application of generators into the electrical distribution system will depend on the particular application. There are many factors to consider, including code requirements, environmental constraints, fuel sources, control complexity, utility requirements and load requirements. The health care requirements for legally required emergency standby generation systems are described starting on Page 1.1-14. Systems described in this section are applicable to health care requirements, as well as other facilities that may require a high degree of reliability. The electrical supply for data centers, nancial institutions, telecommunications, government and public utilities also require high reliability. Threats of disaster or terror attacks have prompted many facilities to require complete self-sufciency for continuous operation.
Types of Engines
Many generator sets are relatively small in size, typically ranging from several kilowatts to several megawatts. These units are often required to come online and operate quickly. They need to have the capacity to run for an extended period of time. The internal combustion engine is an excellent choice as the prime mover for the majority of these applications. Turbines may also be used. Diesel-fueled engines are the most common, but other fuels used include natural gas, digester gas, landll gas, propane, biodiesel, crude oil, steam and others. Some campuses and industrial facilities use and produce steam for heating and other processes. These facilities may nd it economically feasible to produce electricity as a byproduct of the steam production. These installations would typically be classied as a cogeneration facility producing a fairly constant power output and operating in parallel with the electric utility system.
2011 NEC Changes Related to Generator Systems

Article 250.30Grounding Separately Derived AC Systemshas been completely rewritten for clarity and for usability. Most notably, the term equipment bonding jumper was changed to supply-side bonding jumper (see 250.30(A)(2)). This was necessary to ensure proper identication and installation of bonding conductors within or on the supply side of service equipment and between the source of a separately derived system and the rst disconnecting means. The other requirements for grounded systems were renumbered to accommodate the 250.30(A)(2) change. 250.30(B)(3) Ungrounded Systemshas been added, and this language requires
CA08104001E
1.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 01 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Generator Systems
Emergency Standby Generator System
There are primarily three types of generator systems. The rst and simplest type is a single generator that operates independently from the electric utility power grid. This is typically referred to as an emergency standby generator system. Figure 1.2-1 shows a single standby generator, utility source and a transfer switch. In this case, the load is either supplied from the utility or the generator. The generator and the utility are never continuously connected together. This simple radial system has few requirements for protection and control. It also has the least impact on the complete electric power distribution system. It should be noted that this type of generator system improves overall electrical reliability but does not provide the redundancy that some facilities require if the generator fails to start or is out for maintenance.
Utility
Multiple Isolated Standby Generators

The second type of generator system is a multiple isolated set of standby generators. Figure 1.2-2 shows multiple generators connected to a paralleling bus feeding multiple transfer switches. The utility is the normal source for the transfer switches. The generators and the utility are never continuously connected together in this scheme. Multiple generators may be required to meet the load requirements (N system). Generators may be applied in an N+1 or a 2N system for improved system reliability.
Utility G1 G2
Multiple generator systems have a more complex control and protection requirement as the units have to be synchronized and paralleled together. The generators are required to share the load proportionally without swings or prolonged hunting in voltage or frequency for load sharing. They may also require multiple levels of load shedding and/or load restoration schemes to match generation capacity.
Multiple Generators Operating in Parallel with Utility System

The third type of system is either one with a single or multiple generators that operate in parallel with the utility system. Figure 1.2-3 shows two generators and a utility source feeding a switchgear lineup feeding multiple loads. This system typically requires generator capacity sufcient to carry the entire load or sophisticated load shedding schemes. This system will require a complete and complex protection and control scheme. The electric utility may have very stringent and costly protection requirements for the system. IEEE standard 1547 describes the interconnection requirements for paralleling to the utility.
Utility G1 G2
Switchgear
ATS-1
ATS-2
Load 1
Load 2
9 10 11
ATS
G1
Figure 1.2-2. Multiple Isolated Set of Standby Generators In an N system, where N is the number of generators required to carry the load; if a generator fails or is out for maintenance, then the load may be dropped. This is unacceptable for most critical 24/7 operations. In an N + 1 system, N is the number of generators needed to carry the load and 1 is an extra generator for redundancy. If one generator fails to start or is out for maintenance, it will not affect the load. In a 2N system, there is complete 100% redundancy in the standby generation system such that the failure of one complete set of generators will not affect the load.
Switchgear
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Load
Load 1
Load 2
Load 3
Figure 1.2-1. Emergency Standby Generator System
Figure 1.2-3. Multiple Generators Operating in Parallel with Utility System
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 025
1.2-3
Generator Fundamentals
A generator consists of two primary components, a prime mover and an alternator. The prime mover is the energy source used to turn the rotor of the alternator. It is typically a diesel combustion engine for most emergency or standby systems. In cogeneration applications, the prime mover may come from a steam driven turbine or other source. On diesel units, a governor and voltage regulator are used to control the speed and power output. The alternator is typically a synchronous machine driven by the prime mover. A voltage regulator controls its voltage output by adjusting the eld. The output of a single generator or multiple paralleled generator sets is controlled by these two inputs. The alternator is designed to operate at a specied speed for the required output frequency, typically 60 or 50 Hz. The voltage regulator and engine governor along with other systems dene the generators response to dynamic load changes and motor starting characteristics. Generators are rated in power and voltage output. Most generators are designed to operate at a 0.8 power factor. For example, a 2000 kW generator at 277/480V would have a kVA rating of 2500 kVA (2000 kW/ 08 pf) and a continuous current rating of 3007A ( 2500 kVA 480V 3 ) . Typical synchronous generators for industrial and commercial power systems range in size from 1003000 kVA and from 208V13,800V. Other ratings are available and these discussions are applicable to those ratings as well. Generators must be considered in the short-circuit and coordination study as they may greatly impact the rating of the electrical distribution system. This is especially common on large installations with multiple generators and systems that parallel with the utility source. Short-circuit current contribution from a generator typically ranges from 8 to 12 times full load amperes.
The application of generators requires special protection requirements. The size, voltage class, importance and dollar investment will inuence the protection scheme associated with the generator(s). Mode of operation will inuence the utility companys interface protection requirements. Paralleling with the electric utility is the most complicated of the utility inter-tie requirements. IEEE ANSI 1547 provides recommended practices.
derived system and a four-pole transfer switch is required or ground fault relays could misoperate and unbalanced neutral current may be carried on ground conductors. An IEEE working group has studied the practice of low resistance grounding of medium voltage generators within the general industry. This working group found that, for internal generator ground faults, the vast majority of the damage is done after the generator breaker is tripped ofine, and the eld and turbine are tripped. This is due to the stored energy in the generator ux that takes several seconds to dissipate after the generator is tripped ofine. It is during this time that the low resistance ground allows signicant amounts of fault current to ow into the ground fault. Because the large fault currents can damage the generators winding, application of an alternate protection method is desirable during this time period. One of the solutions set forth by this working group is a hybrid high resistance grounding (HHRG) scheme as shown in Figure 1.2-4. In the HHRG scheme, the low resistance ground (LRG) is quickly tripped ofine when the generator protection senses the ground fault. The LRG is cleared at the same time that the generator breaker clears, leaving the high resistance ground portion connected to control the transient overvoltages during the coast-down phase of the generator, thereby all but eliminating generator damage.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Generator Grounding and Bonding (Ref. NEC 2011, Article 250.30(A)(1) and (2))
Generator grounding methods need to be considered and may affect the distribution equipment and ratings. Generators may be connected in delta or wye, but wye is the most typical connection. A wye-connected generator can be solidly grounded, low impedance grounded, high impedance grounded or ungrounded. Section 1.4 discusses general grounding schemes, benets of each and protection considerations. A solidly grounded generator may have a lower zero sequence impedance than its positive sequence impedance. In this case, the equipment will need to be rated for the larger available ground fault current. The generators neutral may be connected to the system-neutral; if it is, the generator is not a separately derived system and a three-pole transfer switch is used. If the generators neutral is bonded to ground separate from the system-neutral, it is a separately
HRG 51G Gen Phase Relays 87GN 86 R R LRG 59G
14 15 16 17
Figure 1.2-4. Hybrid High Resistance Grounding Scheme
18 19 20 21
CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
1.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 01 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Generator Controls
The engine generator set has controls to maintain the output frequency (speed) and voltage. These controls consist of a governor and voltage regulator. As loads change on the system, the frequency and voltage will change. The speed control will then adjust the governor to correct for the load (kW) change. The voltage regulator will change the eld current to adjust the voltage to the desired voltage value. These are the basic controls found on all synchronous generators. Multiple generator systems require more sophisticated controls. Generators are paralleled in a multigenerator system and they must share the load. These systems often have a load shed scheme, which adds to the complexity. Multiple generator schemes need a master controller to prevent units from being connected out-of-phase. The sequence of operation is to send a start signal to all generators simultaneously. The rst unit up to frequency and voltage will be permitted to close its respective breaker and energize the paralleling bus. Breakers for the other generators are held open, not permitted to close, until certain conditions are met. Once the paralleling bus is energized, the remaining generators must be synchronized to it before the generators can be paralleled. Synchronization compares the voltage phasors angle and magnitude. Both generators must be operating at the same frequency and phase-matched within typically 5 to 10 degrees with each other. The voltage magnitude typically must be within 20 to 24%.
A synch-scope is typically supplied on paralleling gear. The synch-scope displays the relative relationship between voltage phasors on the generator to be paralleled and the bus. If the generator is running slower than the bus (less than 60 Hz) then the needle on the scope will spin in the counterclockwise direction. If it is running faster, then it will rotate in the clockwise direction. The greater the frequency difference, the faster is the rotation. It is important that the generators are in phase before they are paralleled. Severe damage will occur if generators are paralleled out-of-phase.
The subtransient reactance Xd will range from a minimum of approximately 9% for a two-pole, wound-rotor machine to approximately 32% for a low-speed, salient-pole, hydro-generator. The initial symmetrical fault current can be as much as 12 times full load current. Depending on the generator type, the zero sequence impedance may be less than the subtransient reactance and the ground fault current substantially higher than the three-phase short-circuit current. For example, a 2500 kVA, 480/277V, four-pole, 2/3 pitch standby generator has a 0.1411 per unit subtransient reactance Xd and a 0.033 per unit zero sequence X o reactance. The ground current is approximately a third larger than the three-phase fault current. The ground fault current can be reduced to the three-phase level by simply adding a small reactance between the generator neutral and ground while still being considered solidly grounded. The electric power system analysis must be performed based on the worstcase operating conditions. Typically this is when all sources are paralleled. If the system can operate with both the utility supply and generators in parallel, then the equipment must be rated for the combined fault current plus motor contribution. If the generator and utility will not be paralleled, then both cases will need to be looked at independently and the worst case used for selecting the equipment ratings.
Generator Short-Circuit Characteristics

If a short circuit is applied directly to the output terminals of a synchronous generator, it will produce an extremely high current initially, gradually decaying to a steady-state value. This change is represented by a varying reactive impedance. Three specic reactances are used for short-circuit fault currents. They are: Subtransient reactance Xd, which is used to determine the fault current during the rst 1 to 5 cycles Transient reactance Xd, which is used to determine the fault current during the next 5 to 200 cycles Synchronous reactance Xd, which is used to determine the steadystate fault current
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 027
1.2-5
Generator Protection
Generator protection will vary and depend on the size of the generator, type of system and importance of the generator. Generator sizes are dened as: small1000 kVA maximum up to 600V (500 kVA maximum when above 600V); medium over 1000 kVA to 12,500 kVA maximum regardless of voltage; largefrom 12,500 50,000 kVA. The simplest is a single generator system used to feed emergency and/or standby loads. In this case, the generator is the only source available when it is operating and it must keep operating until the normal source returns. Figure 1.2-5 Part (A) shows minimum recommended protection for a single generator used as an emergency or standby system. Phase and ground time overcurrent protection (Device 51 and 51G) will provide protection for external faults. For medium voltage generators, a voltage controlled time overcurrent relay (Device 51V) is recommended for the phase protection as it can be set more sensitive than standard overcurrent relays and is less likely to false operate on normal overloads. This scheme may not provide adequate protection for internal generator faults when no other power source exists. Local generator controllers may offer additional protection for voltage and frequency conditions outside the generators capabilities. Figure 1.2-5 Part (B) shows the recommended protection for multiple, isolated, medium voltage, small generators. Additional protection may be desired and could include generator differential, reverse power, and loss of eld protection. Differential protection (Device 87) can be accomplished with either a self-balancing set of CTs as in Figure 1.2-6 or with a percentage differential scheme as in Figure 1.2-7 on Page 1.2-6. The percentage differential scheme offers the advantage of reducing the possibility for false tripping due to CT saturation. The self-balancing scheme offers the advantages of increased sensitivity, needing three current transformers in lieu of six, and the elimination of current transformer external wiring from the generator location to the generator switchgear location.
Generator Protection ANSI/IEEE Std 242-1986
i ii
1 51 Alternate Location
1 51V
1 32
1 40
1 2
1 Gen 1 51 Preferred Location Gen 51G
3 87
3 4 5
1 51G
(A)
(A) Single Isolated Generator on Low Voltage System (B) Multiple Isolated Generator on Medium Voltage System
(B)
6 7 8
Figure 1.2-5. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Small Generators
9
50/5A 87-1
10 11 12 13
50/5A
87-2
50/5A
87-3
Gen
14 15 16
Figure 1.2-6. Self-Balancing Generator Differential Relay Scheme
17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
1.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 01 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Reverse power protection (Device 32) is used to prevent the generator from being motored. Motoring could damage (with other hazards) the prime mover. A steam turbine could overheat and fail. A diesel or gas engine could either catch re or explode. A steam turbine can typically withstand approximately 3% reverse power where a diesel engine can withstand up to 25% reverse power. Loss of eld protection (Device 40) is needed when generators are operating in parallel with one another or the power grid. When a synchronous generator loses its eld, it will continue to generate power as an induction generator obtaining its excitation from the other machines on the system. During this condition, the rotor will quickly overheat due to the slip frequency currents induced in it. Loss of excitation in one machine could jeopardize the operation of the other machines beyond their capability and the entire system.
Grounding Resistor 51G
87 01 PC R1 R1 02 Gen OC R2 03 87G R3 R3 R2
52
To Main Bus
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
OC = Operating coil PC = Permissive coil
Figure 1.2-7. Generator Percentage Differential Relay (Phase Scheme) and Ground Differential Scheme Using a Directional Relay
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 029
1.2-7
Typical protection for larger generators is shown in Figure 1.2-8. It adds phase unbalance and eld ground fault protection. Phase unbalance (Device 46) or negative sequence overcurrent protection prevents the generators rotor from overheating damage. Unbalanced loads, fault conditions or open phasing will produce a negative sequence current to ow. The unbalanced currents induce double system frequency currents in the rotor, which quickly causes rotor overheating. Serious damage will occur to the generator if the unbalance is allowed to persist.
3 1 87
i
3 87B 81U/O
ii 1
27/59
2
3 51V 1 40 1 32 1 46
3 4
Other protection functions such as under/overvoltage (Device 27/59) could be applied to any size generator. The voltage regulator typically maintains the output voltage within its desired output range. This protection can provide backup protection in case the voltage regulator fails. Under/over frequency protection (Device 81U/81O) could be used for backup protection for the speed control. Sync check relays (Device 25) are typically applied as a breaker permissive close function where generators are paralleled. Many modern protective relays are microprocessor-based and provide a full complement of generator protection functions in a single package. The cost per protection function has been drastically reduced such that it is feasible to provide more complete protection even to smaller generators. IEEE ANSI 1547 provides recommended practices for utility inter-tie protection. If the system has closedtransition or paralleling capability, additional protection may be required by the utility. Typically, no additional protection is required if the generator is paralleled to the utility for a maximum of 100 msec or less. Systems that offer soft transfer, peak shaving or co-generation will require additional utility inter-tie protection. The protection could include directional overcurrent and power relays and even transfer trip schemes. Please consult your local utility for specic requirements.
87G
60 Voltage Regulator and Metering Circuits 1 1 49 64
5 6 7
Gen E
8
51G
9 10 11
Figure 1.2-8. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Large Generator
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
1.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 01 030
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Generator Set Sizing and Ratings

Many factors must be considered when determining the proper size or electrical rating of an electrical power generator set. The engine or prime mover is sized to provide the actual or real power in kW, as well as speed (frequency) control through the use of an engine governor. The generator is sized to supply the kVA needed at startup and during normal running operation and it also provides voltage control using a brushless exciter and voltage regulator. Together the engine and generator provide the energy necessary to supply electrical loads in many different applications encountered in todays society. The generator set must be able to supply the starting and running electrical load. It must be able to pick up and start all motor loads and low power factor loads, and recover without excessive voltage dip or extended recovery time. Nonlinear loads like variable frequency drives, uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systems and switching power supplies also require attention because the SCR switching causes voltage and current waveform distortion and harmonics. The harmonics generate additional heat in the generator windings, and the generator may need to be upsized to accommodate this. The type of fuel (diesel, natural gas, propane, etc.) used is important as it is a factor in determining generator set transient response. It is also necessary to determine the load factor or average power consumption of the generator set. This is typically dened as the load (kW) x time (hrs. while under that particular load) / total running time. When this load factor or average power is taken into consideration with peak demand requirements and the other operating parameters mentioned above, the overall electrical rating of the genset can be determined. Other items to consider include the unique installation, ambient, and site requirements of the project. These will help to determine the physical conguration of the overall system.
Typical rating denitions for diesel gensets are: standby, prime plus 10, continuous and load management (paralleled with or isolated from utility). Any diesel genset can have several electrical ratings depending on the number of hours of operation per year and the ratio of electrical load/genset rating when in operation. The same diesel genset can have a standby rating of 2000 kW at 0.8 power factor (pf) and a continuous rating of 1825 kW at 0.8 pf. The lower continuous rating is due to the additional hours of operation and higher load that the continuous genset must carry. These additional requirements put more stress on the engine and generator and therefore the rating is decreased to maintain longevity of the equipment. Different generator set manufacturers use basically the same diesel genset electrical rating denitions and these are based on international diesel fuel stop power standards from organizations like ISO, DIN and others. A standby diesel genset rating is typically dened as supplying varying electrical loads for the duration of a power outage with the load normally connected to utility, genset operating <100 hours per year and no overload capability. A prime plus 10 rating is typically dened as supplying varying electrical loads for the duration of a power outage with the load normally connected to utility, genset operating 500 hours per year and overload capability of 10% above its rating for 1 hour out of 12. A continuous rating is typically dened as supplying unvarying electrical loads (i.e., base loaded) for an unlimited time. The load management ratings apply to gensets in parallel operation with the utility or isolated/islanded from utility and these ratings vary in usability from <200 hours per year to unlimited usage. Refer to generator set manufacturers for further denitions on load management ratings, load factor or average power consumption, peak demand and how these ratings are typically applied. Even though there is some standardization of these ratings across the manufacturers, there also exists some uniqueness with regard to how each manufacturer applies their generator sets.
Electrical rating denitions for natural gas powered gensets are typically dened as standby or continuous with denitions similar to those mentioned above for diesels. Natural gas gensets recover more slowly than diesel gensets when subjected to block loads. Diesel engines have a much more direct path from the engine governor and fuel delivery system to the combustion chamber and this results in a very responsive engine-generator. A natural gas engine is challenged with air-fuel ow dynamics and a much more indirect path from the engine governor (throttle actuator) and fuel delivery system (natural gas pressure regulator, fuel valve and actuator, carburetor mixer, aftercooler, intake manifold) to the combustion chamber and this results in a less responsive engine-generator. Diesel gensets recover about twice as fast as natural gas gensets. For the actual calculations involved for sizing a genset, there are readily accessible computer software programs that are available on the genset manufacturers Internet sites or from the manufacturers dealers or distributors. These programs are used to quickly and accurately size generator sets for their application. The programs take into consideration the many different parameters discussed above, including the size and type of the electrical loads (resistive, inductive, SCR, etc.), reduced voltage soft starting devices (RVSS), motor types, voltage, fuel type, site conditions, ambient conditions and other variables. The software will optimize the starting sequences of the motors for the least amount of voltage dip and determine the starting kVA needed from the genset. It also provides transient response data, including voltage dip magnitude and recovery duration. If the transient response is unacceptable, then design changes can be considered, including oversizing the generator to handle the additional kVAR load, adding RVSS devices to reduce the inrush current, improving system power factor and other methods. The computer software programs are quite exible in that they allow changes to the many different variables and parameters to achieve an optimum design. The software allows, for example, minimizing voltage dips or using paralleled gensets vs. a single genset.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 031
1.2-9
Genset Sizing Guidelines

Some conservative rules of thumb for genset sizing include: 1. Oversize genset 2025% for reserve capacity and for motor starting. 2. Oversize gensets for unbalanced loading or low power factor running loads. 3. Use 1/2 hp per kW for motor loads. 4. For variable frequency drives, oversize the genset by at least 40%. 5. For UPS systems, oversize the genset by 40% for 6 pulse and 15% for 6 pulse with input lters or 12 pulse. 6. Always start the largest motor rst when stepping loads. For basic sizing of a generator system, the following example could be used:
Generator Set Installation and Site Considerations

There are many different installation parameters and site conditions that must be considered to have a successful generator set installation. The following is a partial list of areas to consider when conducting this design. Some of these installation parameters include:
Step 1: Calculate Running Amperes

Motor loads: 200 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156A 100 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78A 60 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48A Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68A Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . . 95A Running amperes . . . . . . . . . . . 445A
Foundation type (crushed rock, concrete, dirt, wood, separate concrete inertia pad, etc.) Foundation to genset vibration dampening (spring type, cork and rubber, etc.) Noise attenuation (radiator fan mechanical noise, exhaust noise, air intake noise) Combustion and cooling air requirements Exhaust backpressure requirements Emissions permitting Delivery and rigging requirements Genset derating due to high altitudes or excessive ambient temperatures
Hazardous waste considerations for fuel, antifreeze, engine oil Meeting local building and electrical codes Genset exposure (coastal conditions, dust, chemicals, etc.) Properly sized starting systems (compressed air, batteries and charger) Allowing adequate space for installation of the genset and for maintenance (i.e., air lter removal, oil changing, general genset inspection, etc) Flex connections on all systems that are attached to the genset and a rigid structure (fuel piping, foundation vibration isolators, exhaust, air intake, control wiring, power cables, radiator anges/duct work, etc.) Diesel fuel day tank systems (pumps, return piping) Fuel storage tank (double walled, re codes) and other parameters
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Please see the generator set manufacturers application and installation guidelines for proper application and operation of their equipment.
Step 2: Calculating Starting Amperes Using 1.25 Multiplier

Motor loads: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60A Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68A Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . . 95A Starting amperes . . . . . . . . . . . 516A
Step 3: Selecting kVA of Generator

Running kVA = (445A x 480V x 1.732)/ 1000 = 370 kVA Starting kVA = (516A x 480V x 1.732)/ 1000 = 428 kVA
Solution
Generator must have a minimum starting capability of 428 kVA and minimum running capability of 370 kVA. Also, please see section Factors Governing Voltage Drop on Page 1.3-21 for further discussion on generator loading and reduced voltage starting techniques for motors. Figure 1.2-9. Typical Genset Installation
Note: Courtesy of Caterpillar, Inc.
19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 01 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 033
Power Distribution Systems System Analysis
1.3-1
Systems Analysis
A major consideration in the design of a distribution system is to ensure that it provides the required quality of service to the various loads. This includes serving each load under normal conditions and, under abnormal conditions, providing the desired protection to service and system apparatus so that interruptions of service are minimized consistent with good economic and mechanical design. Under normal conditions, the important technical factors include voltage prole, losses, load ow, effects of motor starting, service continuity and reliability. The prime considerations under faulted conditions are apparatus protection, fault isolation and service continuity. During the system preliminary planning stage, before selection of the distribution apparatus, several distribution systems should be analyzed and evaluated, including both economic and technical factors. During this stage, if system size or complexity warrant, it may be appropriate to provide a thorough review of each system under both normal and abnormal conditions.
The principal types of computer programs used to provide system studies include:
Short circuitidentify three-phase and line-to-ground fault currents and system impedances Arc ashcalculates arc ash energy levels, which leads to the selection of personal protective equipment (PPE) Circuit breaker dutyidentify asymmetrical fault current based on X/R ratio Protective device coordination determine characteristics and settings of medium voltage protective relays and fuses, and entire low voltage circuit breaker and fuse coordination Load owsimulate normal load conditions of system voltages, power factor, line and transformer loadings Motor startingidentify system voltages, motor terminal voltage, motor accelerating torque, and motor accelerating time when starting large motors
Short-circuit calculations dene momentary and steady-state fault currents for LV and MV breaker and fuse duty and bus bracings at any selected location in the system, and also determine the effect on the system after removal of utility power due to breaker operation or scheduled power outages. Computer software programs can identify the fault current at any bus, in every line or source connected to the faulted bus, or to it and every adjacent bus, or to it and every bus that is one and two buses away, or currents in every line or source in the system. The results of these calculations permit optimizing service to the loads while properly applying distribution apparatus within their intended limits. The following additional studies should be considered depending upon the type and complexity of the distribution system, the type of facility and the type of loads to be connected to the system:

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Harmonic analysis Transient stability Insulation coordination Grounding study Switching transient
Eatons Electrical Services & Systems division can provide the studies enumerated above.
CA08104001E
1.3-2
September 2011
Sheet 01 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Short-Circuit Currents General

The amount of current available in a short-circuit fault is determined by the capacity of the system voltage sources and the impedances of the system, including the fault. Voltage sources include the power supply (utility or on-site generation) plus all rotating machines connected to the system at the time of the fault. A fault may be either an arcing or bolted fault. In an arcing fault, part of the circuit voltage is consumed across the fault and the total fault current is somewhat smaller than for a bolted fault, so the latter is the worst condition, and therefore is the value sought in the fault calculations. Basically, the short-circuit current is determined by applying Ohms Law to an equivalent circuit consisting of a constant voltage source and a timevarying impedance. A time-varying impedance is used in order to account for the changes in the effective voltages of the rotating machines during the fault. In an AC system, the resulting short-circuit current starts out higher in magnitude than the nal steadystate value and asymmetrical (due to the DC offset) about the X-axis. The current then decays toward a lower symmetrical steady-state value. The time-varying characteristic of the impedance accounts for the symmetrical decay in current. The ratio of the reactive and resistive components (X/R ratio) accounts for the DC decay, see Figure 1.3-1. The fault current consists of an exponentially decreasing directcurrent component superimposed upon a decaying alternating-current. The rate of decay of both the DC and AC components depends upon the ratio of reactance to resistance (X/R) of the circuit. The greater this ratio, the longer the current remains higher than the steady-state value that it would eventually reach. The total fault current is not symmetrical with respect to the time-axis because of the direct-current component, hence it is called asymmetrical current. The DC component depends on the point on the voltage wave at which the fault is initiated. See Table 1.3-2 for multiplying factors that relate the rms asymmetrical value of total current to the rms symmetrical value, and the peak asymmetrical value of total current to the rms symmetrical value.
The AC component is not constant if rotating machines are connected to the system because the impedance of this apparatus is not constant. The rapid variation of motor and generator impedance is due to these factors: Subtransient reactance (x d " ), determines fault current during the rst cycle, and after about 6 cycles this value increases to the transient reactance. It is used for the calculation of the momentary interrupting and/or momentary withstand duties of equipment and/or system. Transient reactance (x d ' ), which determines fault current after about 6 cycles and this value in 1/2 to 2 seconds increases to the value of the synchronous reactance. It is used in the setting of the phase OC relays of generators and medium voltage circuit breakers. Synchronous reactance (xd ), which determines fault current after steadystate condition is reached. It has no effect as far as short-circuit calculations are concerned, but is useful in the determination of relay settings. Transformer impedance, in percent, is dened as that percent of rated primary voltage that must be applied to the transformer to produce rated current owing in the secondary, with secondary shorted through zero resistance. Therefore, assuming the primary voltage can be sustained (generally referred to as an innite or unlimited supply), the maximum current a transformer can deliver to a fault condition is the quantity of (100 divided by percent impedance) times the transformer
rated secondary current. Limiting the power source fault capacity will thereby reduce the maximum fault current from the transformer. The electric network that determines the short-circuit current consists of an AC driving voltage equal to the pre-fault system voltage and an impedance corresponding to that observed when looking back into the system from the fault location. In medium and high voltage work, it is generally satisfactory to regard reactance as the entire impedance; resistance may be neglected. However, this is normally permissible only if the X/R ratio of the medium voltage system is equal to or more than 25. In low voltage (1000V and below) calculations, it is usually worthwhile to attempt greater accuracy by including resistance with reactance in dealing with impedance. It is for this reason, plus ease of manipulating the various impedances of cables and buses and transformers of the low voltage circuits, that computer studies are recommended before nal selection of apparatus and system arrangements. When evaluating the adequacy of short-circuit ratings of medium voltage circuit breakers and fuses, both the rms symmetrical value and asymmetrical value of the short-circuit current should be determined. For low voltage circuit breakers and fuses, the rms symmetrical value should be determined along with either: the X/R ratio of the fault at the device or the asymmetrical short- circuit current.
Total CurrentA Wholly Offset Asymmetrical Alternating Wave 3.0 2.5 2.0 Scale of Curent Values 1.5 1.0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 Direct ComponentThe Axis Time in Cycles of of Symmetrical Wave a 60 Hz Wave 2 3 4 rms Value of Total Current Alternating Component Symmetrical Wave rms Value of Alternating Component
Figure 1.3-1. Structure of an Asymmetrical Current Wave

September 2011
Sheet 01 035
1.3-3
Fault Current Waveform Relationships

The following Figure 1.3-2 describes the relationship between fault current peak values, rms symmetrical values and rms asymmetrical values depending on the calculated X/R ratio. The table is based on the following general formulas:
t ----------- 1 + e X R 2 t -------------XR
i
2 60 --------------120 --------------- 1 + e X R = ---------
Based on a 60 Hz system and t = 1/2 cycle (ANSI/IEEE C37.13.1990/10.1.4) Ip ----- = 2 I 2 1+e

XR
ii
Peak multiplication factor =
1
2 ----------XR
1.
Ip = I 2
rms multiplication factor = Example for X/R =15 Peak mf = 2 1+ e

------ 15
I rms asym ----------------------------- = 1 + 2e I
( 2 ) ( 2 60 ) -----------------------------120 -----------------------------XR
2 3 4
1 + 2e
2. I rms asym = I 1 + 2e Where:
2.5612
I = Symmetrical rms current Ip = Peak current e = 2.718 =2f f = Frequency in Hz t = Time in seconds rms mf = 1 + 2e
2 ---------15
5
1.5217
6 7 8 9
2.8 PEAK MAXIMUM ASYMMETRICAL 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.3 2.2 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 Based Upon: rms Asym = DC 2 + rms Sym2 with DC Value Taken at Current Peak RMS MAXIMUM ASYMMETRICAL
10
RMS SYMMETRICAL
RMS SYMMETRICAL
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PEAK MULTIPLICATION FACTOR =
CA TI
2.1 2.0 1.9
FA CT
1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4
M MS
L TIP UL
TI ICA
ON
OR CT FA
1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1
1.5
2.5
8 9 10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60 70 80 90 100
CIRCUIT X/R RATIO (TAN PHASE)
Figure 1.3-2. Relation of X/R Ratio to Multiplication Factor
RMS MULTIPLICATION FACTOR =
PE
AK
LT IP
LI
21
1.3-4
September 2011
Sheet 01 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fault Current Calculations

The calculation of asymmetrical currents is a laborious procedure since the degree of asymmetry is not the same on all three phases. It is common practice for medium voltage systems, to calculate the rms symmetrical fault current, with the assumption being made that the DC component has decayed to zero, and then apply a multiplying factor to obtain the rst half-cycle rms asymmetrical current, which is called the momentary current. For medium voltage systems (dened by IEEE as greater than 1000V up to 69,000V) the multiplying factor is established by NEMA and ANSI standards depending upon the operating speed of the breaker. For low voltage systems, short-circuit study software usually calculates the symmetrical fault current and the faulted system X/R ratio using ANSI guidelines. If the X/R ratio is within the standard, and the breaker interrupting current is under the symmetrical fault value, the breaker is properly rated. If the X/R ratio is higher than ANSI standards, the study applies a multiplying factor to the symmetrical calculated value (based on the X/R value of the system fault) and compares that value to the breaker symmetrical value to assess if it is properly rated. In the past, especially using manual calculations, a multiplying factor of 1.17 (based on the use of an X/R ratio of 6.6 representing a source short-circuit power factor of 15%) was used to calculate the asymmetrical current. These values take into account that medium voltage breakers are rated on maximum asymmetry and low voltage breakers are rated average asymmetry. To determine the motor contribution during the rst half-cycle fault current, when individual motor horsepower load is known, the subtransient reactances found in the IEEE Red Book should be used in the calculations. When the system motor load is unknown, the following assumptions generally are made: Induction motorsuse 4.0 times motor full load current (impedance value of 25%).
Note: For motors fed through adjustable frequency drives or solid-state soft starters, there is no contribution to fault current, unless 1) they have an internal run contactor or 2) they have a bypass contactor.
Synchronous motorsuse 5.0 times motor full load current (impedance value of 20%). When the motor load is not known, the following assumptions generally are made:
Medium Voltage Motors

If known, use actual values otherwise use the values indicated for the same type of motor.
Calculation Methods
The following pages describe various methods of calculating short-circuit currents for both medium and low voltage systems. A summary of the types of methods and types of calculations is as follows:
208Y/120V Systems
Assume 50% lighting and 50% motor load or
Assume motor feedback contribution of twice full load current of transformer or
240/480/600V Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Four-Wire Systems
Assume 100% motor load or
Assume motors 25% synchronous and 75% induction or
Assume motor feedback contribution of four times full load current of transformer Assume 50% induction motor load or
480Y/277V Systems in Commercial Buildings
Assume motor feedback contribution of two times full load current of transformer or source
Medium voltage switchgearexact method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-5 Medium voltage switchgearquick check table . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-7 Medium voltage switchgear Example 1verify ratings of breakers . . . . . Page 1.3-8 Medium voltage switchgear Example 2verify ratings of breakers with rotating loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-9 Medium voltage switchgear Example 3 verify ratings of breakers with generators . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-10 Medium voltage fusesexact method . . . Page 1.3-11 Power breakers asymmetry derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-11 Molded-case breakersasymmetry derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-12 Short-circuit calculations short cut method for a system . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-13 Short-circuit calculationsshort cut method for end of cable . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-15 Short-circuit calculations short cut method for end of cable chart method . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-16 Short-circuit currents chart of transformers 3003750 kVA . . . . . . . . . Page 1.5-9
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 037
1.3-5
Fault Current Calculations for Specic Equipment Exact Method

The purpose of the fault current calculations is to determine the fault current at the location of a circuit breaker, fuse or other fault interrupting device in order to select a device adequate for the calculated fault current or to check the thermal and momentary ratings of noninterrupting devices. When the devices to be used are ANSI-rated devices, the fault current must be calculated and the device selected as per ANSI standards. The calculation of available fault current and system X/R rating is also used to verify adequate bus bar bracing and momentary withstand ratings of devices such as contactors.
a voltage = maximum rated voltage divided by K (for example, 4.76/1.24 = 3.85). If this breaker is applied in a system rated at 2.4 kV, the calculated fault current must be less than 36 kA.
current of 20,000A, the breaker is acceptable (assumes the breakers momentary and fault close rating is also acceptable).
Note: If the system available fault current were 22,000A symmetrical, this breaker could not be used even though the Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Capability is greater than 22,000 because Test 1 calculation is not satised.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
For example, consider the following case:

Assume a 12.47 kV system with 20,000A symmetrical available. In order to determine if an Eaton Type 150 VCP-W 500 vacuum breaker is suitable for this application, check the following: From Table 5.4-1B in Tab 5, Section 5.4 under column Rated Maximum Voltage V = 15 kV, under column Rated short-circuit Current I = 18 kA, Rated Voltage Range Factor K = 1.3. Test 1 for V/Vo x I or 15 kV/12.47 kV x 18 kA = 21.65; also check K x I (which is shown in the column headed Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Capability) or 1.3 x 18 kA = 23.4 kA. Because both of these numbers are greater than the available system fault Table 1.3-1. Reactance X
System Component
Medium Voltage VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear

The applicable ANSI Standards, C37 is the latest applicable edition. The following is a review of the meaning of the ratings. (See Tab 5, Section 5.4.)
For approximate calculations, Table 1.3-1 provides typical values of % reactance (X) and X/R values for various rotating equipment and transformers. For simplication purposes, the transformer impedance (Z) has been assumed to be primarily reactance (X). In addition, the resistance (R) for these simplied calculations has been ignored. For detailed calculations, the values from the IEEE Red Book Standard 141, for rotating machines, and ANSI C57 and/or C37 for transformers should be used.
Reactance X Used for
The Rated Maximum Voltage

This designates the upper limit of design and operation of a circuit breaker. For example, a circuit breaker with a 4.76 kV rated maximum voltage cannot be used in a 4.8 kV system.
Two-pole turbo generator Four-pole turbo generator Hydro generator with damper wedges and synchronous condensers Hydro generator without damper windings All synchronous motors Induction motors above 1000 hp, 1800 rpm and above 250 hp, 3600 rpm Induction motors below 50 hp and all single-phase motors Distribution system from remote transformers Current limiting reactors
Typical Values and Range Short-Circuit Close and Latch on Component Base Duty (Momentary) % Reactance X/R Ratio X X X 0.75X 1.5X 1.5X X X X 0.75X 1.0X 1.0X 1.2X Neglect X X 9 (714) 15 (1217) 20 (1332) 16 (1650) 20 (1335) 17 (1525) 17 (1525) As specied or calculated As specied or calculated 8.0 8.0 to 10.5 Depends on primary windings BIL rating 80 (40120) 80 (40120) 30 (1060) 30 (1060) 30 (1060) 30 (1540) 15 (240) 15 (515) 80 (40120)
K-Rated Voltage Factor

The rated voltage divided by this factor determines the system kV a breaker can be applied up to the short-circuit kVA rating calculated by the formula
3 Rated SC Current Rated Max. Voltage
All other induction motors 50 hp and above 3.0X Neglect X X
Note: Interrupting capabilities of some of todays vacuum breakers may have K = 1, whereby the interrupting current is constant across its entire operating range.
Transformers
OA to 10 MVA, 69 kV OA to 10 MVA, above 69 kV FOA 1230 MVA FOA 40100 MVA X X X X X X X X 18 (724) 18 (724) 20 (730) 38 (3244)
Rated Short-Circuit Current

This is the symmetrical rms value of current that the breaker can interrupt at rated maximum voltage. It should be noted that the product 3 x 4.76 x 29,000 = 239,092 kVA is less than the nominal 250,000 kVA listed. This rating (29,000A) is also the base quantity that all the related capabilities are referred to.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 1.3-2. Typical System X/R Ratio Range (for Estimating Purposes)
Type of Circuit Remote generation through other types of circuits such as transformers rated 10 MVA or smaller for each three-phase bank, transmission lines, distribution feeders, etc. Remote generation connected through transformer rated 10 MVA to 100 MVA for each three-phase bank, where the transformers provide 90% or more of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point Remote generation connected through transformers rated 100 MVA or larger for each three-phase bank where the transformers provide 90% or more of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 25100 MVA for each three-phase bank Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 100 MVA and larger Synchronous machines connected directly to the bus or through reactors X/R Range 15 or less 1540
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Capability

This is expressed in rms symmetrical amperes or kiloamperes and is K x I rated; 29,000 x 1.24 = 35,960 rounded to 36 kA. This is the rms symmetrical current that the breaker can interrupt down to
CA08104001E
3050
3050 4060 40120
1.3-6
September 2011
Sheet 01 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
The Close and Latch Capability

This is also a related quantity expressed in rms asymmetrical amperes by 1.6 x maximum symmetrical interrupting capability. For example, 1.6 x 36 = 57.6 or 58 kA, or 1.6 K x rated short-circuit current. Another way of expressing the close and latch rating is in terms of the peak current, which is the instantaneous value of the current at the crest. ANSI Standard C37.09 indicates that the ratio of the peak to rms asymmetrical value for any asymmetry of 100% to 20% (percent asymmetry is dened as the ratio of DC component of the fault in per unit to 2 ) varies not more than 2% from a ratio of 1.69. Therefore, the close and latch current expressed in terms of the peak amperes is = 1.6 x 1.69 x K x rated short-circuit current. In the calculation of faults for the purposes of breaker selection, the rotating machine impedances specied in ANSI Standard C37.010 Article 5.4.1 should be used. The value of the impedances and their X/R ratios should be obtained from the equipment manufacturer. At initial short-circuit studies, data from manufacturers is not available. Typical values of impedances and their X/R ratios are given in Table 1.3-1.
130 120 110 100 90 80
The ANSI Standard C37.010 allows the use of the X values only in determining the E/X value of a fault current. The R values are used to determine the X/R ratio, in order to apply the proper multiplying factor, to account for the total fault clearing time, asymmetry, and decrement of the fault current. The steps in the calculation of fault currents and breaker selection are described hereinafter: Step 1: Collect the X and R data of the circuit elements. Convert to a common kVA and voltage base. If the reactances and resistances are given either in ohms or per unit on a different voltage or kVA base, all should be changed to the same kVA and voltage base. This caution does not apply where the base voltages are the same as the transformation ratio. Step 2: Construct the sequence networks and connect properly for the type of fault under consideration. Use the X values required by ANSI Standard C37.010 for the interrupting duty value of the short-circuit current.
Step 3: Reduce the reactance network to an equivalent reactance. Call this reactance XI. Step 4: Set up the same network for resistance values. Step 5: Reduce the resistance network to an equivalent resistance. Call this resistance RI. The above calculations of XI and RI may be calculated by several computer programs. Step 6: Calculate the E/XI value, where E is the prefault value of the voltage at the point of fault nominally assumed 1.0 pu. X Step 7: Determine X/R = ------I as RI previously calculated. Step 8: Go to the proper curve for the type of fault under consideration (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phaseto-ground), type of breaker at the location (2, 3, 5 or 8 cycles), and contact parting time to determine the multiplier to the calculated E/XI. See Figures 1.3-3, 1.3-4 and 1.3-5 for 5-cycle breaker multiplying factors. Use Figure 1.3-5 if the short circuit is fed predominantly from generators removed from the fault by two or more
130 120
130 120
8 7
110
5
110
12
10
90 80
80
Ratio X/R
70 60 50 40 30
70 60 50 40 30
Ratio X/R
Ratio X/R
TIME
70 60 50 40 30 20 10
PAR TIN G
NT AC T
16 17 18 19 20 21
CO
5-CYCLE BREAKER
20 10
5-CYCLE BREAKER
20 10
5-CYCLE BREAKER
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.0
1.1
CO
1.2
NT AC T
PA RT IN
1.3 1.4
15
Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes
Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes
Figure 1.3-3. Three-phase Fault Multiplying Factors that Include Effects of AC and DC Decrement
Figure 1.3-4. Line-to-Ground Fault Multiplying Factors that Include Effects of AC and DC Decrement
Figure 1.3-5. Three-phase and Line-to-Ground Fault Multiplying Factors that Include Effects of DC Decrement Only
CA08104001E
GT IME
90
100
100
September 2011
Sheet 01 039
1.3-7
transformations or the per unit reactance external to the generation is 1.5 times or more than the subtransient reactance of the generation on a common base. Also use Figure 1.3-5 where the fault is supplied by a utility only. Step 9: Interrupting duty short-circuit current = E/XI x MFx = E/X2. Step 10: Construct the sequence (positive, negative and zero) networks properly connected for the type of fault under consideration. Use the X values required by ANSI Standard C37.010 for the Close and Latch duty value of the short-circuit current. Step 11: Reduce the network to an equivalent reactance. Call the reactance X. Calculate E/X x 1.6 if the breaker close and latch capability is given in rms amperes or E/X x 2.7 if the breaker close and latch capability is given in peak or crest amperes. Step 12: Select a breaker whose: a. Maximum voltage rating exceeds the operating voltage of the system: b.
V max E ------ I ------------- KI Vo X2
The ANSI standards do not require the inclusion of resistances in the calculation of the required interrupting and close and latch capabilities. Thus the calculated values are conservative. However, when the capabilities of existing switchgears are investigated, the resistances should be included. For single line-to-ground faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability is 1.15 x the symmetrical interrupting capability at any operating voltage, but not to exceed the maximum symmetrical capability of the breaker. Section 5 of ANSI C37 provides further guidance for medium voltage breaker application.
Application Quick Check Table

For application of circuit breakers in a radial system supplied from a single source transformer. Short-circuit duty was determined using E/X amperes and 1.0 multiplying factor for X/R ratio of 15 or less and 1.25 multiplying factor for X/R ratios in the range of 15 to 40.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Application Above 3,300 ft (1,000m)

The rated one-minute power frequency withstand voltage, the impulse withstand voltage, the continuous current rating, and the maximum voltage rating must be multiplied by the appropriate correction factors below to obtain modied ratings that must equal or exceed the application requirements.
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
Reclosing Duty
ANSI Standard C37.010 indicates the reduction factors to use when circuit breakers are used as reclosers. Eaton VCP-W breakers are listed at 100% rating factor for reclosing.
Table 1.3-3. Altitude Derating

Altitude in Feet (Meters) 3300 (1006) (and below) 5000 (1524) 10,000 (3048) Correction Factor Current 1.00 0.99 0.96 Voltage 1.00 0.95 0.80
Table 1.3-4. Application Quick Check Table

Source Transformer MVA Rating Motor Load 100% 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.75 5 7.5 10 10 12 15 20 0% 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.75 5 7.5 10 10 12 15 20 20 25 30 50
See Table 6.0-1, Tab 6. Where: I = Rated short-circuit current Vmax = Rated maximum voltage of the breaker VD KI = Actual system voltage = Maximum symmetrical interrupting capacity
Operating Voltage kV 2.4 4.16 6.6 12 13.8
11
50 VCP-W 250 12 kA 50 VCP-W 250 10.1 kA 150 VCP-W 500 23 kA 150 VCP-W 500 22.5 kA 150 VCP-W 500 19.6 kA
12 13
c. E/X x 1.6 rms closing and latching capability of the breaker and/or E/X x 2.7 Crest closing and latching capability of the breaker.
50 VCP-W 250 36 kA 50 VCP-W 350 49 kA
50 VCP-W 250 33.2 kA
14
50 VCP-W 350 46.9 kA 75 VCP-W 500 41.3 kA 150 VCP-W 750 35 kA 150 VCP-W 1000 46.3 kA 150 VCP-W 750 30.4 kA 150 VCP-W 1000 40.2 kA
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Breaker Type and symmetrical interrupting capacity at the operating voltage
Transformer impedance 6.5% or more, all other transformer impedances are 5.5% or more.
CA08104001E
1.3-8
September 2011
Sheet 01 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Application on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis

Example 1Fault Calculations
Given a circuit breaker interrupting and momentary rating in the table below, verify the adequacy of the ratings for a system without motor loads, as shown. Table 1.3-5. Short-Circuit Duty
Type Breaker 50VCPW250 V Max. Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability at V Max. 4.76 kV 29 kA Max. KI 36 kA at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage Close and Latch or Momentary 58 kA I3
For Three-Phase Fault

E I 3-Phase = ---X where X is ohms per phase and E is the highest typical line-to-neutral operating voltage or IB I 3-Phase = ---X where X is per unit reactance IB is base current 3.75 MVA = 0.52kA Base current I B = 3 ( 4.16 kV ) I1 0.52 - = ---------------------- = 8.6 kA Sym. I 3-Phase = ---X 0.0604 System X = 9 (is less than 15) R would use 1.0 multiplying factor for short-circuit duty, therefore, shortcircuit duty is 8.6 kA sym. for threephase fault I1 and momentary duty is 8.6 x 1.6 = 13.7 kA I3.
4.76 ---------- (29) = 33.2 kA I1 4.16 LG symmetrical interrupting capability 36 kA 1.15 (33.2) = 38.2 kA I2
Note: Interrupting capabilities I1 and I2 at operating voltage must not exceed maximum symmetrical interrupting capability Kl.
Check capabilities I1, I2 and I3 on the following utility system where there is no motor contribution to short circuit.
On 13.8 kV System, 3.75 MVA Base
13.8 kV X R 375 MVA V A Available
3.75 MVA Z = -------------------------------- = 0.01 pu or 1% 375 MVA

2 2 2 2 2X - + 1 Z = X + R = R ------2 R
= 15
For Line-to-Ground Fault

3I B 3E - = -------------------------I LG = -------------------------2X 1 + X 0 2X 1 + X 0 For this system, X0 is the zero sequence reactance of the transformer, which is equal to the transformer positive sequence reactance and X1 is the positive sequence reactance of the system. Therefore, 3(0.52) = 9.1 kA Sym. I LG = 2(0.0604) + 0.0505 Using 1.0 multiplying factor (see Table 1.3-6), short-circuit duty = 9.1 kA Sym. LG (I2)
Z - = --------------1 - = ----------------1 - = 0.066% R = ---------------------2 15.03 266 X -------+1

13.8 kV 3750 kVA V
X X = ---- ( R ) = 15 (0.066) = .99% R Transformer Standard 5.5% Impedance has a 7.5% Manufacturing Tolerance
4.16 kV
50VPC-W250
5.50 Standard Impedance 0.41 (7.5% Tolerance) Transformer Z = 5.09%
Answer
Figure 1.3-6. Example 1One-Line Diagram The 50VCP-W250 breaker capabilities exceed the duty requirements and may be applied. With this application, shortcuts could have been taken for a quicker check of the application. If we assume unlimited short circuit available at 13.8 kV and that Trans. Z = X I B 0.52 - = ------------------ = 9.5 kA Sym. Then I 3-Phase = ---X 0.055 X/R ratio 15 or less multiplying factor is 1.0 for short-circuit duty. The short-circuit duty is then 9.5 kA Sym. (I1, I2) and momentary duty is 9.5 x 1.6 kA = 15.2 kA (I3).
From transformer losses per unit or percent R is calculated

31,000 Watts Full Load 6,800 Watts No Load 24,200 Watts Load Losses Transformer X = Z R
2 2 2 2
24.2 kW - = 0.0065 pu or 0.65% R = ------------------------------3750 kVA
(5.09) (0.65) =
25.91 0.42 =
25.48
X = 5.05% X 13.8 kV System 0.99% Transformer 5.05% System Total 6.04% or 0.0604 pu R X/R 0.066% 15 0.65% 8 0.716% 9 0.00716 pu
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 041
1.3-9

Given the system shown with motor loads, calculate the fault currents and determine proper circuit breaker selection. All calculations on per unit basis. 7.5 MVA base 7.5 MVA- = 0.628 kA Base Current I B = -----------------------------3 6.9 kV
X R X/R 13.8 kV System 13.8 kV 7500 kVA 21 kA Sym. Available X = 5.5% R = 0.55% X = 15 R X = 10 R
i ii 1 2 3
Z = 5.53%
6.9 kV 1
13.8 kV System
X = 0.628 (6.9) = 0.015 0.015 21 (13.8) 0.001 0.0055 15 10 2 X = 25 R 197A FL X'' d = 20% X = 35 R 173A FL X'' d = 25%
Transformer
0.055
4 5 6 7
Total Source Transformer 0.070 pu 0.0065 pu 11
3000 hp Synchronous Motor
X = 0.20 (0.628) = 0.638 pu at 7.5 MVA Base 0.197

2500 hp Ind. Motor
3000 hp 1.0 PF Syn.
2500 hp Ind.
X = 0.25 (0.628) = 0.908 pu at 7.5 MVA Base 0.173

IB E - = ---- where X on per unit base I 3-Ph = ---X X Table 1.3-6. Multiplying Factor for E/X Amperes (ANSI C37.010, 1979, Figures 1.1-8, 1.1-9 and 1.1-10)
System X/R Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Rated Interrupting Time, 5-Cycle Type of Fault Ratio ThreePhase Local 1 15 20 25 30 36 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 100 120 130
Figure 1.3-7. Example 2One-Line Diagram

Source of Short-Circuit Current I3 Source Transformer I1 3000 hp Syn. Motor I1 2500 hp Syn. Motor Interrupting E/X Amperes 0.628 0.070 = 8.971 Momentary E/X Amperes 0.628 = 8.971 0.070 0.628 = 0.984 0.638 0.628 = 0.691 0.908 X R 11 25 35 X (1) R (X) 11 0.070 25 0.638 35 0.908 1 R = 157 = 39 = 39
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0.628 = 0.656 (1.5) 0.638 0.628 = 0.461 (1.5) 0.908 I3F = or 10.088 10.1 kA
LG
Three-Phase and LG Remote
10.647 Total 1/R = 235 x 1.6 17.0 kA Momentary Duty
Source of Short Circuit
I B = 0.628 = 0.062 Total X = -----------------------I 3F 10.1

---- = 0.062 (235) = 14.5 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.0 from Table 1.3-6 System X R
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.16 1.17 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.24 1.24
1.00 1.00 1.02 1.06 1.10 1.14 1.16 1.19 1.22 1.25 1.26 1.28 1.29 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.33 1.34 1.35 1.35
1.00 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.13 1.17 1.22 1.25 1.27 1.30 1.32 1.33 1.35 1.36 1.37 1.38 1.39 1.40 1.41 1.42 1.43 1.43
Table 1.3-7. Short-Circuit Duty = 10.1 kA

Breaker Type 75VCP-W500 150VCP-W500 V Max. Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability at V Max. Max. KI 41 kA 23 kA at 6.9 kV Oper. Voltage 8.25 6.9 (33) = 39.5 kA Close and Latch or Momentary 66 kA 37 kA
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
8.25 kV 33 kA 15 kV 18 kA
15 (18) (39.1) = 23 kA 6.9 (But not to exceed KI)
Answer
Either breaker could be properly applied, but price will make the type 150VCP-W500 the more economical selection.
Where system X/R ratio is 15 or less, the multiplying factor is 1.0.
CA08104001E
1.3-10 Power Distribution Systems System Analysis
September 2011
Sheet 01 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Check breaker application or generator bus for the system of generators shown. Each generator is 7.5 MVA, 4.16 kV 1040A full load, IB = 1.04 kA Sub transient reactance Xd = 11% or, X = 0.11 pu X Gen ---- ratio is 30 R 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 and = = + + + + = = RS R R R R X X X X XS XS = X R X ---- = Gen ---or X S = X ---- and R S = ---- Therefore, System -------- = 30 R RS 3 3 R Since generator neutral grounding reactors are used to limit the I LG to I3-phase or below, we need only check the I3 short-circuit duty. I B I B I B 31 B 3(1.04) - = ---------------------- = 28.4 kA Symmetrical E/X amperes I B Phase = ---- + ---- + ---- + ---------0.11 X X X X
---- of 30 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.04 from Table 1.3-6. System X R
Answer
The 50VCP-W250 breaker could be applied.
G1
G2
G3
4.16 kV
Short-circuit duty is 28.4 (1.04) = 29.5 kA Symmetrical

Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Breaker Type V Max. 4.76 kV at V Max. 29 kA Max. KI 36 kA at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage 4.76 (29) = 33.2 kA 4.16 50VCP-W250
Figure 1.3-8. Example 3One-Line Diagram
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 043
1.3-11
Medium Voltage Fuses Fault Calculations

There are two basic types of medium voltage fuses. The following denitions are taken from ANSI Standard C37.40.
Step 4Construct the sequence networks using resistances and connect properly for the type of fault under consideration and reduce to a single equivalent resistance. Step 5Calculate the E/XI value, where E is the prefault value of the voltage at the point of fault normally assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase faults E/XI is the fault current to be used in determining the required interrupting capability of the fuse.
Note: It is not necessary to calculate a single phase-to-phase fault current. This current is very nearly 3 /2 x three-phase fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed the three-phase fault for fuses located in generating stations with solidly grounded neutral generators, or in delta-wye transformers with the wye solidly grounded, where the sum of the positive and negative sequence impedances on the high voltage side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of the transformer.
Expulsion Fuse (Unit)

A vented fuse (unit) in which the expulsion effect of the gases produced by internal arcing, either alone or aided by other mechanisms, results in current interruption.
Current-Limiting Fuse (Unit)

A fuse unit that, when its currentresponsive element is melted by a current within the fuses specied current-limiting range, abruptly introduces a high resistance to reduce current magnitude and duration, resulting in subsequent current interruption. There are two classes of fuses; power and distribution. They are distinguished from each other by the current ratings and minimum melting type characteristics. The current-limiting ability of a current-limiting fuse is specied by its threshold ratio, peak let-through current and I2t characteristics.
includes induction and synchronous motor loads. The assumption is made that in 208Y/120V systems the contribution from motors is two times the full load current of step-down transformer. This corresponds to an assumed 50% motor aggregate impedance on a kVA base equal to the transformer kVA rating or 50% motor load. For 480V, 480Y/277V and 600V systems, the assumption is made that the contribution from the motors is four times the full load current of the step-down transformer, which corresponds to an assumed 25% aggregate motor impedance on a kVA base equal to the transformer kVA rating or 100% motor load. In low voltage systems that contain generators, the subtransient reactance should be used. If the X/R to the point of fault is greater than 6.6, a derating multiplying factor (MF) must be applied. The X/R ratio is calculated in the same manner as that for medium voltage circuit breakers. Calculated symmetrical amperes x MF breaker interrupting rating. The multiplying factor MF can be calculated by the formula: ( ) ( X/R ) ] 2 [ 1 + 2.718 MF = 2.29 If the X/R of system feeding the breaker is not known, use X/R = 15. For fused breakers by the formula: 1 + 2 ( 2.718 ) MF = 1.25
( 2 ) ( X/R )
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
For single line-to-ground fault: X I = X I (+) + X I () + X I (0) E 3 I f = -----XI Step 6Select a fuse whose published interrupting rating exceeds the calculated fault current. Figure 1.3-2 should be used where older fuses asymmetrically rated are involved. The voltage rating of power fuses used on three-phase systems should equal or exceed the maximum line-to-line voltage rating of the system. Current limiting fuses for three-phase systems should be so applied that the fuse voltage rating is equal to or less than 1.41 x nominal system voltage.
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses

Modern fuses are rated in amperes rms symmetrical. They also have a listed asymmetrical rms rating that is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating. Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse interrupting duty guidelines.
Calculation of the Fuse Required Interrupting Rating:

Step 1Convert the fault from the utility to percent or per unit on a convenient voltage and kVA base. Step 2Collect the X and R data of all the other circuit elements and convert to a percent or per unit on a convenient kVA and voltage base same as that used in Step 1. Use the substransient X and R for all generators and motors. Step 3Construct the sequence networks using reactances and connect properly for the type of fault under consideration and reduce to a single equivalent reactance.
If the X/R of the system feeding the breaker is not known, use X/R = 20. Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard ranges of X/R and power factors used in testing and rating low voltage breakers. Refer to Table 1.3-9 for the circuit breaker interrupting rating multiplying factors to be used when the calculated X/R ratio or power factor at the point the breaker is to be applied in the power distribution system falls outside of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power factors used in testing and rating the circuit breakers. MF is always greater than 1.0.
Low Voltage Power Circuit BreakersFault Calculations

The steps for calculating the fault current for the selection of a low voltage power circuit breaker are the same as those used for medium voltage circuit breakers except that where the connected loads to the low voltage bus
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Molded-Case Breakers and Insulated Case Circuit BreakersFault Calculations

The method of fault calculation is the same as that for low voltage power circuit breakers. Again, the calculated fault current x MF breaker interrupting capacity. Because molded case breakers are tested at lower X/R ratios, the MFs are different than those for low voltage power circuit breakers.
X 2 R 2 1 + 2.718
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Derating Factors

Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard ranges of X/R and power factors used in testing and rating low voltage breakers. Refer to Table 1.3-9 for the circuit breaker interrupting rating de-rating factors to be used when the calculated X/R ratio or power factor at the point the breaker is to be applied in the power distribution system falls outside of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power factors used in testing and rating the circuit breakers. Normally the short-circuit power factor or X/R ratio of a distribution system need not be considered in applying low voltage circuit breakers. This is because the ratings established in the applicable standard are based on power factor values that amply cover most applications. Established standard values include the following: Table 1.3-8. Standard Test Power Factors
Interrupting Rating in kA 10 or Less Over 10 to 20 Over 20 All Power Factor Test Range 0.450.50 0.250.030 0.150.20 X/R Test Range 1.981.73 3.873.18 6.64.9
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

0.15 Maximum 6.6 Minimum
MF = --------------------------------------------------X 1 R 1 1 + 2.718
X1 R1 = test X/R value X2 R2 = X/R at point where breaker is applied
For distribution systems where the calculated short-circuit current X/R ratio differs from the standard values given in the above table, circuit breaker interrupting rating derating factors from Table 1.3-9 table should be applied.
Table 1.3-9. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating Derating Factors

% P.F. X/R Interrupting Rating Molded Case or Insulated Case < / = 10 kA 50 30 25 20 15 12 10 8.5 7 5 1.73 3.18 3.87 4.90 6.59 8.27 9.95 11.72 14.25 19.97 1.000 0.847 0.805 0.762 0.718 0.691 0.673 0.659 0.645 0.627 >10 kA < / = 20 kA 1.000 1.000 0.950 0.899 0.847 0.815 0.794 0.778 0.761 0.740 >20 kA 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.942 0.907 0.883 0.865 0.847 0.823 Power Circuit Breaker Unfused 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.962 0.937 0.918 0.899 0.874 Fused 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.939 0.898 0.870 0.849 0.827 0.797
Note: These are derating factors applied to the breaker and are the inverse of MF.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 045
1.3-13
Short-Circuit CalculationsShortcut Method

Determination of Short-Circuit Current
Note 1: Transformer impedance generally relates to self-ventilated rating (e.g., with OA/FA/FOA transformer use OA base). Note 2: kV refers to line-to-line voltage in kilovolts. Note 3: Z refers to line-to-neutral impedance of system to fault where R + jX = Z. Note 4: When totaling the components of system Z, arithmetic combining of impedances as ohms Z. per unit Z. etc., is considered a shortcut or approximate method; proper combining of impedances (e.g., source, cables transformers, conductors, etc.). should use individual R and X components. This Total Z = Total R + j Total X (see IEEE Red Book Standard No. 141).
1. 2. Select convenient kVA base for system to be studied. Change per unit, or percent, impedance from one kVA base to another: (a) Per unit = pu impedance kVA base 2 = (b) Percent = % impedance kVA base 2 = kVA base 2 kVA base 1 kVA base 1
i ii 1 2
(pu impedance on kVA base 1)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kVA base 2 (% impedance on kVA base 1)
3.
Change ohms, or percent or per unit, etc.:
impedance) (kVA base) percent impedance = (ohms (a) Per unit impedance = pu Z = ( kV ) 2 ( 1000 ) 100 (b) % impedance = % Z = (c) Ohms impedance = (ohms impedance) (kVA base) ( kV ) 2 ( 10 ) ( kV )2
(% impedance) (10) kVA base
4.
Change power-source impedance to per unit or percent impedance on kVA base as selected for this study:
(a) if utility fault capacity given in kVA kVA base in study Per-unit impedance = pu Z = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------power-source kVA fault capacity (b) if utility fault capacity given in rms symmetrical short circuit amperes kVA base in study Per-unit impedance = pu Z = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(short-circuit current) ( 3 ) (kV of source)
5.
Change motor rating to kVA:
(a) (b) (c) (d)
motor kVA ( 3 ) (kV) (I) where I = motor nameplate full-load amperes if 1.0 power factor synchronous motor kVA = (0.8) (hp) if 0.8 power factor synchronous motor kVA = (1.0) (hp) if induction motor kVA = (1.0) (hp) Three-phase kVA Single-phase kVA or ( 3 ) ( kV ) kV line-to-neutral
6.
Determine symmetrical short-circuit current:
(a) Base current = I Base = 1.0 (b) Per unit I SC = puZ
(c) rms Symmetrical current = ISC = (pu ISC) (IBase Amperes) Three-phase KVA base kVA base - or Single-phase ---------------------------------------------------------------(d) rms Symmetrical current = Amperes = --------------------------------------------------------------( puZ ) ( kV ) ( puZ ) ( 3 ) ( kV ) (e) (g) (Three-phase kVA base) (100) Single-phase kVA base (100) - or ------------------------------------------------------------------------------= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------(%Z) ( kV ) (%Z) ( 3 ) ( kV ) (kV) (1000) = ---------------------------------3 (ohms Z)
7.
Determine symmetrical short-circuit kVA:
base = (kVA base) (100) = ( kV )2 ( 1000 ) (a) Symmetrical short-circuit kVA = kVA ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( puZ ) ohms Z %Z (b) 3(line-to-neutral kV) 2 ( 1000 ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------(ohms Z)
8.
Determine line-to-line short-circuit current:
(a) from three-phase transformerapprox. 86% of three-phase current (b) three single-phase transformers (e.g., 75 kVA, Z = 2%) calculate same as one three-phase unit (i.e., 3 x 75 kVA = 225 kVA, Z = 2%). (c) from single-phase transformersee Page 1.3-15. (a) synchronous motor5 times motor full load current (impedance 20%) See IEEE Standard No. 141 (b) induction motor4 times motor full-load current (impedance 25%) (c) motor loads not individually identied, use contribution from group of motors as follows: on 208Y/120V systems2.0 times transformer full-load current on 240-480-600V three-phase, three-wire systems4.0 times transformer full-load current on 480Y/277V three-phase, four-wire systems In commercial buildings, 2.0 times transformers full-load current (50% motor load) In industrial plants, 4.0 times transformer full-load current (100% motor load)
9.
Determine motor contribution (or feedback) as source of fault current:
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 046
i ii 1
Example Number 1
How to Calculate Short-Circuit Currents at Ends of Conductors
A. System Diagram B. Impedance Diagram (Using Short Cut Method for Combining Impedances and Sources).
A B C 500 MVA Utility Major Contribution
Utility Source
2
Transformer Cables Switchboard Fault 1000 kV A 5.75% 480V Cable
3 4
Cables Fault
Switchboard Fault
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2 4(a)
A B C 100 ft (30m) 3350 kcmil Cable in Steel Conduit
0.002 pu
1.00 pu
1.00 pu
1.00 pu
0.0575 pu
0.027 pu Switchboard Fault
0.027 pu
0.027 pu
Mixed LoadMotors and Lighting Each Feeder100 ft (30m) of 3350 kcmil Cable in Steel Conduit Feeding Lighting and 250 kVA of Motors Cable Fault
0.027 pu Cable Fault

Combining Series Impedances: ZTOTAL = Z1 + Z2 + ... +Zn
C. Conductor impedance from Table 1.5-16, Page 1.5-14. Conductors: 3350 kcmil copper, single conductors Circuit length: 100 ft (30m), in steel (magnetic) conduit Impedance Z = 0.00619 ohms/100 ft (30m). ZTOT = 0.00619 ohms (100 circuit feet) D. Fault current calculations (combining impedances arithmetically, using approximate Short Cut methodsee Note 4, Page 1.3-13)
Step 1 Equation (See)
Combining Parallel Impedances:
1 = ZTOTAL
1 + 1 + ... 1 Z1 Z2 Zn
0.0595 pu
0.342 pu
0.0507 pu E 0.0777 pu
0.027 pu
0.027 pu
Calculation Select 1000 kVA as most convenient base, since all data except utility source is on secondary of 1000 kVA transformer. kVA base 1000 = 0.002 pu Utility per unit impedance = Z pu = ------------------------------------------ = -------------------utility fault kVA 500.000 %Z = 5.75 = 0.0575 pu Transformer per unit impedance = Z pu = -----------------100 100 kVA base 1000 = 1.00 pu Motor contribution per unit impedance = Z pu = --------------------------------------- = ------------------4 x motor kVA 4 x 250 Cable impedance in ohms (see above) = 0.00619 ohms (ohms)(kVA base) = (0.00619)(1000) = 0.027pu Cable impedance per unit = Z pu = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 2 (kV) (1000) (0.480) (1000)
15 16 17 18
3(a)
4(a) and 9(c) 3(a)
6(d)
Total impedance to switchboard fault = 0.0507 pu (see diagram above) 1000 kVA base = Symmetrical short circuit current at switchboard fault = 3-phase = 23,720 amperes rms ( Z pu ) ( 3 ) ( kV ) ( 0.0507 ) ( 3 ) ( 0.480 )
19 20 21
7 6(d)
Total impedance to cable fault = 0.0777 pu (see diagram above) kVA base = 1000 Symmetrical short circuit current at cable fault = 3-phase = 15, 480 amperes rms ( Z pu ) ( 3 ) ( kV ) ( 0.0777 ) ( 3 ) ( 0.480 )
Figure 1.3-9. Example Number 1

September 2011
Sheet 01 047
1.3-15
Example Number 2
Fault CalculationSecondary Side of Single-Phase Transformer
A. System Diagram
480V Three-Phase Switchboard Bus at 50,000A Symmetrical, X/R = 6.6 = 0.1498 Z {R X = 0.9887 Z
i
Deriving Transformer R and X: X = 6.6 R Z=
2
ii 1
X = 6.6 R
2
X +R = Z
( 6.6R ) + R = 43.56R + R = R = 0.1498Z X = 0.9887Z
44.56R = 6.6753R
100 Ft. Two #2/0 Copper Conductors, Magnetic Conduit R = 0.0104 Ohms X = 0.0051 Ohms
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
= 0.00054 pu = 0.00356 pu = 0.00677 pu
R=
75 kVA Single-Phase 480-120/240V; Z = 2.8%, R = 1.64%, X = 2.27%
6.6753
X = 6.6R
120V F2 240V F1
Half-winding of Transformer Full-winding of Transformer
% R by 1.5 { Multiply Multiply % X by 1.2 } Reference: IEEE Standard No. 141
B. Impedance DiagramFault F1
RSyst = 0.00054 RCond = 0.00677 RTfmr = 0.0164 RTotal = 0.02371 F1 F1 RSyst = 0.00356 RCond = 0.00332 RTfmr = 0.0227 RTotal = 0.02958
C. Impedance DiagramFault F2
RSyst = 0.00054 RCond = 0.00677 RTfmr = 0.0246 RTotal = 0.03191 F2 F2 XSyst = 0.00356 XCond = 0.00332 XTfmr = 0.0272 XTotal = 0.03408
D. Impedance and Fault Current Calculations75 kVA Base

Note: To account for the outgoing and return paths of single-phase circuits (conductors, systems, etc.) use twice the three-phase values of R and X.
ZSyst =
= 0.0018 pu 3 0.480 50,000

ohms
75
(From Page 1.3-13 Formula 4(b) )
RSyst = 2 (0.1498 x Z) XSyst = 2 (0.9887 x Z) 0.0104 75 RCond = 2 0.48 2 1000 0.0051 75 XCond = 2 ( 0.48 ) 2 1000 1.64 RTfmr = 100 XTfmr = 2.27 100
10 11
kVA Base ZCond = 2 ( kV ) 1000
(From Page 1.3-13 Formula 3(a) )
= 0.00332 pu = 0.0164 pu = 0.0277 pu = 0.0246 pu
Full-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
12 13 14
Half-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
1.64 ) RTfmr = 1.5 ( 100 XTfmr = 1.2
( 2.27 )
100
2 2
= 0.0272 pu
2 2
Impedance to Fault F1Full Winding Impedance to Fault F2Half Winding Short circuit current F1 = 75 (0.03791 x 0.240 kV) = 8,243A Symmetrical Short circuit current F2 = 75 (0.04669 x 0.120 kV) = 13,386A Symmetrical
Z= Z=
( 0.02371 ) + ( 0.02958 ) ( 0.03191 ) + ( 0.03408 )
= 0.03791 pu = 0.04669 pu
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 1.3-10. Example Number 2
Method 1: Shortcut Methods End of Cable

This method uses the approximation of adding Zs instead of the accurate method of Rs and Xs. For Example: For a 480/277V system with 30,000A symmetrical available at the line side of a conductor run of 100 ft (30m) of 2500 kcmil per phase and neutral, the approximate fault current
at the load side end of the conductors can be calculated as follows. 277V/30,000A = 0.00923 ohms (source impedance)
Add source and conductor impedance or 0.00923 + 0.00273 = 0.01196 total ohms
Next, 277V/0.01196 ohms = 23,160A rms at load side of conductors X 30,000A available 100 ft (30m) 2500 kcmil per phase X If = 23,160A
Conductor ohms for 500 kcmil conductor from reference data in this section in magnetic conduit is 0.00551 ohms per 100 ft (30m). For 100 ft (30m) and two conductors per phase we have:
0.00551/2 = 0.00273 ohms (conductor impedance)
Figure 1.3-11. Short-Circuit Diagram
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Method 2: Chart Approximate Method

The chart method is based on the following:
Step Five
Enter the chart along the bottom horizontal scale with the distance (in feet) from the transformer to the fault point. Draw a vertical line up the chart to the point where it intersects the selected curve. Then draw a horizontal line to the left from this point to the scale along the left side of the chart.
Motor Contribution
For system voltages of 120/208V, it is reasonable to assume that the connected load consists of 50% motor load, and that the motors will contribute four times their full load current into a fault. For system voltages of 240 and 480V, it is reasonable to assume that the connected load consists of 100% motor load, and that the motors will contribute four times their full load current into a fault. These motor contributions have been factored into each curve as if all motors were connected to the transformer terminals.
Step Six
The value obtained from the left-hand vertical scale is the fault current (in thousands of amperes) available at the fault point. For a more exact determination, see the formula method. It should be noted that even the most exact methods for calculating fault energy use some approximations and some assumptions. Therefore, it is appropriate to select a method which is sufciently accurate for the purpose, but not more burdensome than is justied. The charts that follow make use of simplications that are reasonable under most circumstances and will almost certainly yield answers that are on the safe side. This may, in some cases, lead to application of circuit breakers having interrupting ratings higher than necessary, but should eliminate the possibility of applying units which will not be safe for the possible fault duty.
Feeder Conductors
The conductor sizes most commonly used for feeders from molded case circuit breakers are shown. For conductor sizes not shown, the following table has been included for conversion to equivalent arrangements. In some cases it may be necessary to interpolate for unusual feeder ratings. Table 1.3-10 is based on using copper conductor. Table 1.3-10. Conductor Conversion (Based on Using Copper Conductor)
If Your Conductor is: 3No. 4/0 cables 4No. 2/0 cables 32000 kcmil cables 5400 kcmil cables 6300 kcmil cables 800A busway 1000A busway 1600A busway Use Equivalent Arrangement 2500 kcmil 2500 kcmil 4750 kcmil 4750 kcmil 4750 kcmil 2500 kcmil 2500 kcmil 4750 kcmil
UTILITY KVA V
12.5
10.0 250 kcmil W WG W WG
Short-Circuit Current Readout

The readout obtained from the charts is the rms symmetrical amperes available at the given distance from the transformer. The circuit breaker should have an interrupting capacity at least as large as this value.
7.5
5.0
How to Use the Short-Circuit Charts

Step One
Obtain the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. System voltage Transformer kVA rating (from transformer nameplate) Transformer impedance (from transformer nameplate) Primary source fault energy available in kVA (from electric utility or distribution system engineers)
2.5
5 10 20 50 Distance in Feet from T
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
Figure 1.3-12. 225 kVA Transformer/4.5% Impedance/208V
KV Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) 30 kcmil 25 #4 A 20 B F 15 F 50,000
Step Two
Select the applicable chart from the following pages. The charts are grouped by secondary system voltage, which is listed with each transformer. Within each group, the chart for the lowest kVA transformer is shown rst, followed in ascending order to the highest rated transformer.
Step Three
Select the family of curves that is closest to the available source kVA. The black line family of curves is for a source of 500,000 kVA. The lower value line (in red) family of curves is for a source of 50,000 kVA. You may interpolate between curves if necessary, but for values above 100,000 kVA it is appropriate to use the 500,000 kVA curves.
10
Step Four
Select the specic curve for the conductor size being used. If your conductor size is something other than the sizes shown on the chart, refer to the conductor conversion Table 1.3-10.
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 049
1.3-17
B KV Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) 30 F 25 100 W WG 20 80 B F 50,000 120 A
i ii 1 2 3
#4 AWG A
15 4 2 10
60
40
20
4
0 0 2 5 10 20 50 Distance in Feet from T 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 0 0 2 5 10 20 50 Distance in Feet from T 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
5 6
A Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) 60 50 W WG 40 B F 30 60 F 50,000 80 F 100 120 B W WG F
7 8 9 10 11
50,000
20 4 10 kcmil
40
20
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
12 13
Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.)
60 B 50
kcmil kcmil
A 12
14 15
10 B 8 F 50,000
F 40 F
50,000
16
4 2
30
17 18
20
W WG
10
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
19
0 2 5 10 20 50 Distance in Feet from T 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 050
i
A Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) A Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) 60
ii 1 2 3 4
30
25 F 20 15 B #1/0 AWG A #4 A AWG 50,000
50
kcmil F 50,000
40
#4 AWG A B
30
10
20
750 kcmil
10
5 6
Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) 30
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A 60 4 kcmil
25
750 500 F 50,000
50
W WG F 50,000
20
B F
40 F 30
15
10
kcmil
20
#4 A 5
10
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
A Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) 30 W WG B 25 F 20 F 50,000
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
15 4 750 kcmil 2 10
100
200
500
1000 2000
5000
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 051
1.3-19
Determining X and R Values from Transformer Loss Data

Method 1:
Given a 500 kVA, 5.5% Z transformer with 9000W total loss; 1700W no-load loss; 7300W load loss and primary voltage of 480V. 500 3 R = 7300W 3 0.480 %R = 0.0067 ohms 0.0067 500 = 1.46% %R = 2 10 0.48 %X = 5.5 1.46 = 5.30%
2 2 2
How to Estimate Short-Circuit Currents at Transformer Secondaries:

Method 1:
To obtain three-phase rms symmetrical short-circuit current available at transformer secondary terminals, use the formula: I SC 100 = I FLC ----------%Z
Method 2:
Refer to Page 1.5-9 in the Reference section, and use appropriate row of data based on transformer kVA and primary short-circuit current available. This will yield more accurate results and allow for including motor shortcircuit contribution.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
where %Z is the transformer impedance in percent, from Tables 1.5-6 through 1.5-10, Page 1.5-11. This is the maximum three-phase symmetrical bolted-fault current, assuming sustained primary voltage during fault, i.e., an innite or unlimited primary power source (zero source impedance). Because the power source must always have some impedance, this is a conservative value; actual fault current will be somewhat less.
Note: This will not include motor shortcircuit contribution.
Method 2:
Using same values above. I R Losses %R = 10 kVA 7300 = 1.46 10 500 %X = 5.5 1.46 = 5.30%
2 2 2
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 052
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Voltage Drop Considerations

The rst consideration for voltage drop is that under the steady-state conditions of normal load, the voltage at the utilization equipment must be adequate. Fine-print notes in the NEC recommend sizing feeders and branch circuits so that the maximum voltage drop in either does not exceed 3%, with the total voltage drop for feeders and branch circuits not to exceed 5%, for efciency of operation. (Fine print notes in the NEC are not mandatory.) In addition to steady-state conditions, voltage drop under transient conditions, with sudden high-current, shorttime loads, must be considered. The most common loads of this type are motor inrush currents during starting. These loads cause a voltage dip on the system as a result of the voltage drop in conductors, transformers and generators under the high current. This voltage dip can have numerous adverse effects on equipment in the system, and equipment and conductors must be designed and sized to minimize these problems. In many cases, reduced-voltage starting of motors to reduce inrush current will be necessary.
Computer Equipment: With the proliferation of data-processing and computer- or microprocessor-controlled manufacturing, the sensitivity of computers to voltage has become an important consideration. Severe dips of short duration can cause a computer to crashshut down completely, and other voltage transients caused by starting and stopping motors can cause data-processing errors. While voltage drops must be held to a minimum, in many cases computers will require special power-conditioning equipment to operate properly. Industrial Plants: Where large motors exist, and unit substation transformers are relatively limited in size, voltage dips of as much as 20% may be permissible in some cases, if they do not occur too frequently. Lighting is often supplied from separate transformers, and is minimally affected by voltage dips in the power systems. However, it is usually best to limit dips to between 5 and 10% at most. One critical consideration is that a large voltage dip can cause a dropout (opening) of magnetic motor contactors and control relays. The actual dropout voltage varies considerably among starters of different manufacturers. The only standard that exists is that of NEMA, which states that a starter must not drop out at 85% of its nominal coil voltage, allowing only a 15% dip. While most starters will tolerate considerably more voltage dip before dropping out, limiting dip to 15% is the only way to ensure continuity of operation in all cases. X-Ray Equipment: Medical x-ray and similar diagnostic equipment, such as CAT-scanners, are extremely sensitive to low voltage. They present a small, steady load to the system until the instant the x-ray tube is red. This presents a brief but extremely high instantaneous momentary load. In some modern x-ray equipment, the ring is repeated rapidly to create multiple images. The voltage regulation must be maintained within the manufacturers limits, usually 2 to 3%, under these momentary loads, to ensure proper x-ray exposure.
Motor Starting
Motor inrush on starting must be limited to minimize voltage dips. Table 1.3-11 on the next page will help select the proper type of motor starter for various motors, and to select generators of adequate size to limit voltage dip. See Tab 29 for additional data on reduced voltage motor starting.
Utility Systems
Where the power is supplied by a utility network, the motor inrush can be assumed to be small compared to the system capacity, and voltage at the source can be assumed to be constant during motor starting. Voltage dip resulting from motor starting can be calculated on the basis of the voltage drop in the conductors between the power source and the motor resulting from the inrush current. Where the utility system is limited, the utility will often specify the maximum permissible inrush current or the maximum hp motor they will permit to be started across-the-line.
Transformer Considerations
If the power source is a transformer, and the inrush kVA or current of the motor being started is small compared to the full-rated kVA or current of the transformer, the transformer voltage dip will be small and may be ignored. As the motor inrush becomes a signicant percentage of the transformer full-load rating, an estimate of the transformer voltage drop must be added to the conductor voltage drop to obtain the total voltage drop to the motor. Accurate voltage drop calculation would be complex and depend upon transformer and conductor resistance, reactance and impedance, as well as motor inrush current and power factor. However, an approximation can be made on the basis of the low power-factor motor inrush current (3040%) and impedance of the transformer. For example, if a 480V transformer has an impedance of 5%, and the motor inrush current is 25% of the transformer full-load current (FLC), then the worst case voltage drop will be 0.25 x 5%, or 1.25%. The allowable motor inrush current is determined by the total permissible voltage drop in transformer and conductors.
Recommended Limits of Voltage Variation

General Illumination: Flicker in incandescent lighting from voltage dip can be severe; lumen output drops about three times as much as the voltage dips. That is, a 10% drop in voltage will result in a 30% drop in light output. While the lumen output drop in uorescent lamps is roughly proportional to voltage drop, if the voltage dips about 25%, the lamp will go out momentarily and then restrike. For high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps such as mercury vapor, highpressure sodium or metal halide, if the lamp goes out because of an excessive voltage dip, it will not restrike until it has cooled. This will require several minutes. These lighting icker effects can be annoying, and in the case of HID lamps, sometimes serious. In areas where close work is being done, such as drafting rooms, precision assembly plants, and the like, even a slight variation, if repeated, can be very annoying, and reduce efciency. Voltage variation in such areas should be held to 2 or 3% under motor-starting or other transient conditions.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 053
1.3-21
Table 1.3-11. Factors Governing Voltage Drop

Type of Motor Starting Starting How Torque Current Started Starting Starting Torque per Unit of Current Full Load Torque % Full-Load Motor Rpm 1750 Design A Normal Normal Across-the-line resistance autotransformer Across-the-line resistance autotransformer Across-the-line resistance autotransformer Secondary controller 600700 480560 375450 500600 400480 320400 500600 400480 320400 100% current for 100% torque 300 450550 288350 1.5 0.96 0.96 1.5 0.96 0.96 1150 1.35 0.87 0.87 1.35 0.87 0.87 0.2 to 2.5 1.28 to 1.6 1.28 to 1.6 850 1.25 0.80 0.80 1.25 0.80 0.80 Full-Load Amperes per kVA Generator Capacity for Each 1% Voltage Drop 0.0109.00936 0.0136.0117 0.0170.0146 0.0131.0109 0.0164.01365 0.0205.0170 0.0131.0109 0.0164.01365 0.0205.0170 0.0655 0.0218 0.0145.0118 0.0228.0197
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Design B
Normal
Low
Design C
High
Low
Wound Rotor
High
Low
Synchronous (for compressors) Low Synchronous (for centrifugal pumps) Low

Across-the-line Across-the-line Autotransformer
40% Starting, 40% Pull-In 60% Starting, 110% Pull-In 38% Starting, 110% Pull-In
Consult NEMA MG-1 sections 1 and 12 for the exact denition of the design letter. In each case, a solid-state reduced voltage starter can be adjusted and controlled to provide the required inrush current and torque characteristics. Where accuracy is important, request the code letter of the the motor and starting and breakdown torques from the motor vendor. Using 80% taps.
Engine Generator Systems

With an engine generator as the source of power, the type of starter that will limit the inrush depends on the characteristics of the generator. Although automatic voltage regulators are usually used with all AC enginegenerators, the initial dip in voltage is caused by the inherent regulation of the generator and occurs too rapidly for the voltage regulator to respond. It will occur whether or not a regulator is installed. Consequently, the percent of initial voltage drop depends on the ratio of the starting kVA taken by the motor to the generator capacity, the inherent regulation of the generator, the power-factor of the load thrown on the generator, and the percentage load carried by the generator. A standard 80% power-factor enginetype generator (which would be used where power is to be supplied to motor loads) has an inherent regulation of approximately 40% from no-load to full-load. This means that a 50% variation in load would cause approximately 20% variation in voltage (50% x 40% = 20%). Assume that a 100 kVA, 80% PF engine-type generator is supplying the power and that the voltage drop should not exceed 10%. Can a 7-1/2 hp, 220V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrelcage motor be started without exceeding this voltage drop? Starting ratio = Percent voltage drop gen. kVA 1000 F.L. amperes volts 3 reg. of gen.
From the nameplate data on the motor, the full-load amperes of a 7-1/2 hp. 220V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrelcage motor is 19.0A. Therefore: Starting current (%F.L.) = 10 100 1000 = 3.45 or 345%. 19.0 220 3 0.40 From Table 1.3-11, a NEMA design C or NEMA design D motor with an autotransformer starter gives approximately this starting ratio. It could also be obtained from a properly set solid-state adjustable reduced voltage starter. The choice will depend upon the torque requirements of the load since the use of an autotransformer starter reduces the starting torque in direct proportion to the reduction in starting current. In other words, a NEMA design C motor with an autotransformer would have a starting torque of approximately full-load (see Table 1.3-11) whereas the NEMA design D motor under the same conditions would have a starting torque of approximately 1-1/2 times full-load.
Note: If a resistance starter were used for the same motor terminal voltage, the starting torque would be the same as that obtained with autotransformer type, but the starting current would be higher, as shown.
Example:
Assuming a project having a 1000 kVA generator, where the voltage variation must not exceed 10%. Can a 75 hp, 1750 rpm, 220V, three-phase, squirrel-cage motor be started without objectionable lamp icker (or 10% voltage drop)? From tables in the circuit protective devices reference section, the full-load amperes of this size and type of motor is 158A. To convert to same basis as column 7, 158A must be divided by the generator capacity and % voltage drop, or: 158 = 0.0158A per kVA 1000 x 10 per 1% voltage drop Checking against the table, 0.0158 falls within the 0.01700.0146 range. This indicates that a general-purpose motor with autotransformer starting can be used.
Note: Designers may obtain calculated information from engine generator manufacturers.
Shortcut Method
Column 7 in Table 1.3-11 has been worked out to simplify checking. The gures were obtained by using the formula above and assuming 1 kVA generator capacity and 1% voltage drop.
The calculation results in conservative results. The engineer should provide to the engine-generator vendor the starting kVA of all motors connected to the generator and their starting sequence. The engineer should also specify the maximum allowable drop. The engineer should request that the engine-generator vendor consider the proper generator size when closed-transition autotransformer reduced voltage starters, and soft-start solid-state starter are used; so the most economical method of installation is obtained.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 054
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Voltage Drop Formulas

Approximate Method
Voltage Drop E VD = IR cos + IX sin where abbreviations are same as below Exact Method.
If the receiving end voltage, load current and power factor (PF) are known. E VD = ( E R cos + I R ) + ( E R sin + I X ) E R ER is the receiving end voltage. Exact Method 2If receiving or sending mVA and its power factor are known at a known sending or receiving voltage.
2 2 ( ZMVA R ) E S = E R + --------------------------------- + 2ZMVA R cos ( R ) 2 ER 2 2 2 2
Exact Methods
Voltage drop Exact Method 1If sending end voltage and load PF are known. E VD = E S + IR cos + IX sin E S ( IX cos IR sin ) where: EVD = Voltage drop, line-to-neutral, volts ES I R X = Source voltage, line-to-neutral, volts = Line (Load) current, amperes = Circuit (branch, feeder) resistance, ohms = Circuit (branch, feeder) reactance, ohms
2
or
2 2 2 ( ZMVA R ) E R = E S + --------------------------------- 2ZMVA S cos ( S ) 2 ES
where: ER ES = Receiving line-line voltage in kV = Sending line-line voltage in kV
MVAR = Receiving three-phase mVA MVAS = Sending three-phase mVA Z R S = Impedance between and receiving ends = The angle of impedance Z = Receiving end PF = Sending end PF, positive when lagging
cos = Power factor of load, decimal sin = Reactive factor of load, decimal
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 055
1.3-23
Voltage Drop
Voltage Drop Tables
Note: Busway voltage drop tables are shown in Tab 24 of this catalog.
Table 1.3-12. Temperature Correction Factors for Voltage Drop

Conductor Size Percent Correction Power Factors % 100 No. 14 to No. 4 No. 2 to 3/0 4/0 to 500 kcmil 600 to 1000 kcmil 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 90 4.7 4.2 3.1 2.6 80 4.7 3.7 2.6 2.1 70 4.6 3.5 2.3 1.5 60 4.6 3.2 1.9 1.3
To select minimum conductor size:

1. Determine maximum desired voltage drop, in volts. 2. Divide voltage drop by (amperes x circuit feet). 3. Multiply by 100. 4. Find nearest lower voltage drop value in tables, in correct column for type of conductor, conduit and power factor. Read conductor size for that value. 5. Where this results in an oversized cable, verify cable lug sizes for molded case breakers and fusible switches. Where lug size available is exceeded, go to next higher rating.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Tables for calculating voltage drop for copper and aluminum conductors, in either magnetic (steel) or nonmagnetic (aluminum or non-metallic) conduit, appear on Page 1.3-24. These tables give voltage drop per ampere per 100 ft (30m) of circuit length. The circuit length is from the beginning point to the end point of the circuit regardless of the number of conductors.
Calculations
To calculate voltage drop:
1. Multiply current in amperes by the length of the circuit in feet to get ampere-feet. Circuit length is the distance from the point of origin to the load end of the circuit. 2. Divide by 100. 3. Multiply by proper voltage drop value in tables. Result is voltage drop.
Tables are based on the following conditions:

1. Three or four single conductors in a conduit, random lay. For threeconductor cable, actual voltage drop will be approximately the same for small conductor sizes and high power factors. Actual voltage drop will be from 10 to 15% lower for larger conductor sizes and lower power factors. 2. Voltage drops are phase-to-phase, for three-phase, three-wire or three-phase, four-wire 60 Hz circuits. For other circuits, multiply voltage drop given in the tables by the following correction factors: Three-phase, four-wire, phase-to-neutral Single-phase, two-wire Single-phase, three-wire, phase-to-phase Single-phase, three-wire, phase-to-neutral x 0.577 x 1.155 x 1.155 x 0.577
Example:
A three-phase, four-wire lighting feeder on a 208V circuit is 250 ft (76.2m) long. The load is 175A at 90% PF. It is desired to use aluminum conductors in aluminum conduit. What size conductor is required to limit the voltage drop to 2% phase-to-phase? 2 208 = 4.16V 1. VD = 100 2. 3. 4.16 = 0.0000951 175 250 0.0000951 100 = 0.00951
Example:
A 460V, 100 hp motor, running at 80% PF, draws 124A full-load current. It is fed by three 2/0 copper conductors in steel conduit. The feeder length is 150 ft (46m). What is the voltage drop in the feeder? What is the percentage voltage drop? 1. 124A x 150 ft (46m) = 18,600A-ft 2. Divided by 100 = 186 3. Table: 2/0 copper, magnetic conduit, 80% PF = 0.0187 186 x 0.0187 = 3.48V drop 3.48 x 100 = 0.76% drop 460 4. Conclusion: 0.76% voltage drop is very acceptable. (See NEC 2005 Article 215, which suggests that a voltage drop of 3% or less on a feeder is acceptable.)
4. In table, under aluminum conductors, nonmagnetic conduit, 90% PF, the nearest lower value is 0.0091. Conductor required is 500 kcmil. (Size 4/0 THW would have adequate ampacity, but the voltage drop would be excessive.)
3. Voltage drops are for a conductor temperature of 75C. They may be used for conductor temperatures between 60C and 90C with reasonable accuracy (within 5%). However, correction factors in Table 1.3-12 can be applied if desired. The values in the table are in percent of total voltage drop. For conductor temperature of 60C SUBTRACT the percentage from Table 1.3-12. For conductor temperature of 90C ADD the percentage from Table 1.3-12.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 056
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 1.3-13. Voltage DropVolts per Ampere per 100 Feet (30 m); Three-Phase, Phase-to-Phase
Conductor Size AWG or kcmil Magnetic Conduit (Steel) Load Power Factor, % 60 0.3390 0.2170 0.1390 0.0905 0.0595 0.0399 0.0275 0.0233 0.0198 0.0171 0.0148 0.0130 0.0122 0.0111 0.0104 0.0100 0.0088 0.0084 0.0080 0.3296 0.2133 0.1305 0.0898 0.0595 0.0403 0.0332 0.0286 0.0234 0.0209 0.0172 0.0158 0.0137 0.0130 0.0112 0.0101 0.0095 0.0085 70 0.3910 0.2490 0.1590 0.1030 0.0670 0.0443 0.0300 0.0251 0.0211 0.0180 0.0154 0.0134 0.0124 0.0112 0.0104 0.0091 0.0086 0.0081 0.0077 0.3811 0.2429 0.1552 0.1018 0.0660 0.0443 0.0357 0.0305 0.0246 0.0220 0.0174 0.0163 0.0139 0.0133 0.0111 0.0106 0.0094 0.0082 80 0.4430 0.2810 0.1790 0.1150 0.0742 0.0485 0.0323 0.0267 0.0222 0.0187 0.0158 0.0136 0.0124 0.0111 0.0102 0.0087 0.0082 0.0077 0.0072 0.4349 0.2741 0.1758 0.1142 0.0747 0.0483 0.0396 0.0334 0.0275 0.0231 0.0179 0.0162 0.0143 0.0128 0.0114 0.0097 0.0090 0.0078 90 0.4940 0.3130 0.1980 0.1260 0.0809 0.0522 0.0342 0.0279 0.0229 0.0190 0.0158 0.0133 0.0120 0.0106 0.0096 0.0080 0.0074 0.0069 0.0063 0.4848 0.3180 0.1951 0.1254 0.0809 0.0523 0.0423 0.0350 0.0284 0.0241 0.0177 0.0159 0.0144 0.0131 0.0099 0.0090 0.0084 0.0071 100 0.5410 0.3410 0.2150 0.1350 0.0850 0.0534 0.0336 0.0267 0.0213 0.0170 0.0136 0.0109 0.0094 0.0080 0.0069 0.0053 0.0046 0.0040 0.0035 0.5330 0.3363 0.2106 0.1349 0.0862 0.0535 0.0428 0.0341 0.0274 0.0217 0.0170 0.0145 0.0122 0.0100 0.0076 0.0063 0.0056 0.0043 Nonmagnetic Conduit (Aluminum or Nonmetallic) Load Power Factor, % 60 0.3370 0.2150 0.1370 0.0888 0.0579 0.0384 0.0260 0.0218 0.0183 0.0156 0.0134 0.0116 0.0107 0.0097 0.0090 0.0078 0.0074 0.0069 0.0064 0.3312 0.2090 0.1286 0.0887 0.0583 0.0389 0.0318 0.0263 0.0227 0.0160 0.0152 0.0138 0.0126 0.0122 0.0093 0.0084 0.0081 0.0069 70 0.3900 0.2480 0.1580 0.1010 0.0656 0.0430 0.0287 0.0238 0.0198 0.0167 0.0141 0.0121 0.0111 0.0099 0.0091 0.0077 0.0072 0.0067 0.0062 0.3802 0.2410 0.1534 0.1011 0.0654 0.0435 0.0349 0.0287 0.0244 0.0171 0.0159 0.0144 0.0128 0.0123 0.0094 0.0085 0.0080 0.0068 80 0.4410 0.2800 0.1780 0.1140 0.0730 0.0473 0.0312 0.0256 0.0211 0.0176 0.0147 0.0124 0.0112 0.0099 0.0091 0.0075 0.0070 0.0064 0.0058 0.4328 0.2740 0.1745 0.1127 0.0719 0.0473 0.0391 0.0322 0.0264 0.0218 0.0171 0.0147 0.0133 0.0119 0.0094 0.0085 0.0078 0.0065 90 0.4930 0.3120 0.1970 0.1250 0.0800 0.0513 0.0333 0.0270 0.0220 0.0181 0.0149 0.0124 0.0110 0.0096 0.0087 0.0070 0.0064 0.0058 0.0052 0.4848 0.3052 0.1933 0.1249 0.0800 0.0514 0.0411 0.0337 0.0274 0.0233 0.0179 0.0155 0.0132 0.0120 0.0091 0.0081 0.0072 0.0058 100 0.5410 0.3410 0.2150 0.1350 0.0849 0.0533 0.0335 0.0266 0.0211 0.0169 0.0134 0.0107 0.0091 0.0077 0.0066 0.0049 0.0042 0.0035 0.0029 0.5331 0.3363 0.2115 0.1361 0.0849 0.0544 0.0428 0.0339 0.0273 0.0222 0.0172 0.0138 0.0125 0.0101 0.0072 0.0060 0.0051 0.0038
Copper Conductors
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 500 600 750 1000
Aluminum Conductors
12 10 8 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 500 600 750 1000
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 057
Power Distribution Systems System Application Considerations

Capacitors
1.4-1
Capacitors and Power Factor

Capacitor General Application Considerations
Additional application information is available in Tab 35 regarding capacitors and harmonic lters as follows:

Capacitor selection Where to install capacitors in a plant distribution system Locating capacitors on reduced voltage and multi-speed starters Harmonic considerations Eliminating harmonic problems National Electrical Code requirements
ANSI Standard C37.06 (indoor oilless circuit breakers) indicates the preferred ratings of Eatons Type VCP-W vacuum breaker. For capacitor switching, careful attention should be paid to the notes accompanying the table. The denition of the terms are in ANSI Standard C37.04 Article 5.13 (for the latest edition). The application guide ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.012 covers the method of calculation of the quantities covered by C37.06 Standard. Note that the denitions in C37.04 make the switching of two capacitors banks in close proximity to the switchgear bus a back-to-back mode of switching. This classication requires a denite purpose circuit breaker (breakers specically designed for capacitance switching). We recommend that such application be referred to Eaton. A breaker specied for capacitor switching should include as applicable: 1. Rated maximum voltage. 2. Rated frequency. 3. Rated open wire line charging switching current. 4. Rated isolated cable charging and shunt capacitor switching current. 5. Rated back-to-back cable charging and back-to-back capacitor switching current. 6. Rated transient overvoltage factor. 7. Rated transient inrush current and its frequency. 8. Rated interrupting time. 9. Rated capacitive current switching life. 10. Grounding of system and capacitor bank. Load break interrupter switches are permitted by ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.30 to switch capacitance, but they must have tested ratings for the purpose. Refer to Eaton Type MVS ratings.
Low Voltage Capacitor Switching

Circuit breakers and switches for use with a capacitor must have a current rating in excess of rated capacitor current to provide for overcurrent from overvoltages at fundamental frequency and harmonic currents. The following percent of the capacitor-rated current should be used as a general guideline: Fused and unfused switches. . . . 165% Molded case breaker or equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% DSII power circuit breakers. . . . . 135% Magnum DS power circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135% Contactors: Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135% Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% The NEC, Section 460.8(C), requires the disconnecting means to be rated not less than 135% of the rated capacitor current (for 600V and below). See Tab 35 for switching device ampere ratings. They are based on percentage of capacitor-rated current as indicated (above). The interrupting rating of the switch must be selected to match the system fault current available at the point of capacitor application. Whenever a capacitor bank is purchased with less than the ultimate kVAR capacity of the rack or enclosure, the switch rating should be selected based on the ultimate kVAR capacitynot the initial installed capacity. Refer to Tab 35 for recommended selection of capacitor switching devices; recommended maximum capacitor ratings for various motor types and voltages; and for required multipliers to determine capacitor kVARs required for power factor correction.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Medium Voltage Capacitor Switching

Capacitance switching constitutes severe operating duty for a circuit breaker. At the time the breaker opens at near current zero, the capacitor is fully charged. After interruption, when the alternating voltage on the source side of the breaker reaches its opposite maximum, the voltage that appears across the contacts of the open breaker is at least twice the normal peak lineto-neutral voltage of the circuit. If a breakdown occurs across the open contact, the arc is re-established. Due to the circuit constants on the supply side of the breaker, the voltage across the open contact can reach three times the normal line-to-neutral voltage. After it is interrupted and with subsequent alternation of the supply side voltage, the voltage across the open contact is even higher.
CA08104001E
1.4-2

Capacitors
September 2011
Sheet 01 058
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Motor Power Factor Correction

See Tab 35 containing suggested maximum capacitor ratings for induction motors switched with the capacitor. The data is general in nature and representative of general purpose induction motors of standard design. The preferable means to select capacitor ratings is based on the maximum recommended kVAR information available from the motor manufacturer. If this is not possible or feasible, the tables can be used. An important point to remember is that if the capacitor used with the motor is too large, self-excitation may cause a motor-damaging overvoltage when the motor and capacitor combination is disconnected from the line. In addition, high transient torques capable of damaging the motor shaft or coupling can occur if the motor is reconnected to the line while rotating and still generating a voltage of self-excitation.
% ARpercent reduction in line current due to the capacitor. A capacitor located on the motor side of the overload relay reduces line current through the relay. Therefore, a different overload relay and/or setting may be necessary. The reduction in line current may be determined by measuring line current with and without the capacitor or by calculation as follows: (Original PF) % AR = 100 100 (Improved PF) If a capacitor is used with a lower kVAR rating than listed in tables, the % AR can be calculated as follows: Actual kVAR % AR = Listed % AR kVAR in Table The tables can also be used for other motor ratings as follows: A. For standard 60 Hz motors operating at 50 Hz: kVAR = 1.71.4 of kVAR listed % AR = 1.81.35 of % AR listed B. For standard 50 Hz motors operating at 50 Hz: kVAR = 1.41.1 of kVAR listed % AR = 1.41.05 of % AR listed C. For standard 60 Hz wound-rotor motors: kVAR = 1.1 of kVAR listed % AR= 1.05 of % AR listed
Note: For A, B, C, the larger multipliers apply for motors of higher speeds; i.e., 3600 rpm = 1.7 mult., 1800 rpm = 1.65 mult., etc.
To derate a capacitor used on a system voltage lower than the capacitor voltage rating, such as a 240V capacitor used on a 208V system, use the following formula:
Actual kVAR =
( Applied Voltage ) Nameplate kVAR --------------------------------------------------------------------2 ( Nameplate Voltage )
2
For the kVAC required to correct the power factor from a given value of COS 1 to COS 2, the formula is: kVAC = kW (tan phase1tan phase2) Capacitors cause a voltage rise. At light load periods the capacitive voltage rise can raise the voltage at the location of the capacitors to an unacceptable level. This voltage rise can be calculated approximately by the formula: MVA r % VR = MVA SC
MVAR is the capacitor rating and MVASC is the system short-circuit capacity.
With the introduction of variable speed drives and other harmonic current generating loads, the capacitor impedance value determined must not be resonant with the inductive reactances of the system.
Denitions
kVARrating of the capacitor in reactive kilovolt-amperes. This value is approximately equal to the motor no-load magnetizing kilovars.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 059

Protection and Coordination
1.4-3
Overcurrent Protection and Coordination

Overcurrents in a power distribution system can occur as a result of both normal (motor starting, transformer inrush, etc.) and abnormal (overloads, ground fault, line-to-line fault, etc.) conditions. In either case, the fundamental purposes of current-sensing protective devices are to detect the abnormal overcurrent and with proper coordination, to operate selectively to protect equipment, property and personnel while minimizing the outage of the remainder of the system. With the increase in electric power consumption over the past few decades, dependence on the continued supply of this power has also increased so that the direct costs of power outages have risen signicantly. Power outages can create dangerous and unsafe conditions as a result of failure of lighting, elevators, ventilation, re pumps, security systems, communications systems, and the like. In addition, economic loss from outages can be extremely high as a result of computer downtime, or, especially in industrial process plants, interruption of production. Protective equipment must be adjusted and maintained in order to function properly when an overcurrent occurs, but coordination begins during power system design with the knowledgeable analysis and selection and application of each overcurrent protective device in the series circuit from the power source(s) to each load apparatus. The objective of coordination is to localize the overcurrent disturbance so that the protective device closest to the fault on the power-source side has the rst chance to operate; but each preceding protective device upstream toward the power source should be capable, within its designed settings of current and time, to provide backup and de-energize the circuit if the fault persists. Sensitivity of coordination is the degree to which the protective devices can minimize the damage to the faulted equipment. To study and accomplish coordination requires (a) a one-line diagram, the roadmap of the power distribution system, showing all protective devices and the major or important distribution and utilization apparatus, (b) identication of desired degrees of power continuity or criticality of loads throughout system, (c) denition of operating-current characteristics (normal, peak, starting) of each utilization circuit, (d) equipment
CA08104001E
damage or withstand characteristics, (e) calculation of maximum shortcircuit currents (and ground fault currents if ground fault protection is included) available at each protective device location, (f) understanding of operating characteristics and available adjustments of each protective device, (g) any special overcurrent protection requirements including utility limitations. Refer to Figure 1.4-1. To ensure complete coordination, the time-trip characteristics of all devices in series should be plotted on a single sheet of standard log-log paper. Devices of different-voltage systems can be plotted on the same sheet by converting their current scales, using the voltage ratios, to the same voltagebasis. Such a coordination plot is shown in Figure 1.4-1. In this manner, primary fuses and circuit breaker relays on the primary side of a
substation transformer can be coordinated with the low voltage breakers. Transformer damage points, based on ANSI standards, and low voltage cable heating limits can be plotted on this set of curves to ensure that apparatus limitations are not exceeded. Ground-fault curves may also be included in the coordination study if ground-fault protection is provided, but care must be used in interpreting their meaning. Standard denitions have been established for overcurrent protective devices covering ratings, operation and application systems. MMotor (100 hp). Dashed line shows initial inrush current, starting current during 9-sec. acceleration, and drop to 124A normal running current, all well below CBA trip curve.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V

1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60
6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000

1000 900 800 700 600 500 400
600 700 800 900 1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
4.16 kV
250 MVA
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
B A C D
300
200
200
D
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20
250A 1000 kVA 5.75%

ANSI Three-Phase Thru Fault Protection Curve (More Than 10 in Lifetime)
4,160V 480/277V 19,600A
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
1,600A 24,400A 600A
20
TIME IN SECONDS
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
M
20,000A A 175A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
TIME IN SECONDS
1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3
100 hp 124A FLC
1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5
X = Available fault current including motor contribution.
.4 .3
.2
Ground Fault Trip C
.2
.1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03
Max. Three-Phase 4.16 kV Fault
Transformer Inrush
.1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02
18 19 20 21
.02
Max. 480V Fault
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
6 7 8 9 10
20
30
40 50 60
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V
Figure 1.4-1. Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Typical Power Distribution System Protective Devices Coordination Analysis
6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000
70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600 700 800 900 1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
.01
.01
1.4-4

ACB (175A) coordinates selectively with motor M on starting and running and with all upstream devices, except that CB B will trip rst on low level ground faults. BCB (600A) coordinates selectively with all upstream and downstream devices, except will trip before A on limited ground faults, since A has no ground fault trips. CMain CB (1600A) coordinates selectively with all downstream devices and with primary fuse D, for all faults on load side of CB. DPrimary fuse (250A, 4160V) coordinates selectively with all secondary protective devices. Curve converted to 480V basis. Clears transformer inrush point (12 x FLC for 0.1 sec.), indicating that fuse will not blow on inrush. Fuse is underneath right-half of ANSI three-phase withstand curve, indicating fuse will protect transformer for highmagnitude faults up to ANSI rating. Delta-wye secondary side short circuit is not reected to the primary by the relation VS IP = I VP S for L-L and L-G faults. For line-to-line fault, the secondary (low voltage) side fault current is 0.866 x I three-phase fault current. However, the primary (high voltage) side fault is the same as if the secondary fault was a three-phase fault. Therefore in coordination studies, the knee of the short-time pickup setting on the secondary breaker should be multiplied by 1 or 1.1547 0.866 before it is compared to the minimum melting time of the upstream primary fuse curve. In the example shown, the knee is at 4000A 30 sec., and the 30-sec. trip time should be compared to the MMT (minimum melt time) of the fuse curve at 4000 x 1.1547 = 4619A. In this case, there is adequate clearance to the fuse curve. Maximum 480V three-phase fault indicated on the horizontal current axis.
September 2011
Sheet 01 060
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Maximum 4160V three-phase fault indicated, converted to 480V basis.

4160 I 480 V = I 4160 V 480 The ANSI protection curves are specied in ANSI C57.109 for liquidlled transformers and C57.12.59 for dry-type transformers. Illustrative examples such as shown here start the coordination study from the lowest rated device proceeding upstream. In practice, the setting or rating of the utilitys protective device sets the upper limit. Even in cases where the customer owns the medium voltage or higher distribution system, the setting or rating of the lowest set protective device at the source determines the settings of the downstream devices and the coordination. Therefore the coordination study should start at the present setting or rating of the upstream device and work toward the lowest rated device. If this procedure results in unacceptable settings, the setting or rating of the upstream device should be reviewed. Where the utility is the sole source, they should be consulted. Where the owner has its own medium or higher voltage distribution, the settings or ratings of all upstream devices should be checked. If perfect coordination is not feasible, then lack of coordination should be limited to the smallest part of the system. Application data is available for all protective equipment to permit systems to be designed for adequate overcurrent protection and coordination. For circuit breakers of all types, time-current curves permit selection of instantaneous and inverse-time trips. For more complex circuit breakers, with solid-state trip units, trip curves include long- and short-time delays, as well as ground-fault tripping, with a wide range of settings and features to provide selectivity and coordination. For current-limiting circuit breakers, fuses, and circuit breakers with integral fuses, not only are timecurrent characteristic curves available, but also data on current-limiting performance and protection for downstream devices. In a fully rated system, all circuit breakers must have an interrupting capacity adequate for the maximum
available fault current at their point of application. All breakers are equipped with long-time-delay (and possibly short delay) and instantaneous overcurrent trip devices. A main breaker may have short time-delay tripping to allow a feeder breaker to isolate the fault while power is maintained to all the remaining feeders. A selective or fully coordinated system permits maximum service continuity. The tripping characteristics of each overcurrent device in the system must be selected and set so that the breaker nearest the fault opens to isolate the faulted circuit, while all other breakers remain closed, continuing power to the entire unfaulted part of the system. The National Electrical Code contains specic requirements for designing certain circuits with selective coordination. Article 100 denes selective coordination: Coordination (Selective), the following denition: Localization of an overcurrent condition to restrict outages to the circuit or equipment affected, accomplished by the choice of overcurrent protective devices and their ratings or settings.
NEC 2011 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code International Electrical Code Series.
Article 620.62 (elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts) requires Where more than one driving machine disconnecting means is supplied by a single feeder, the overcurrent protective devices in each disconnecting means shall be selectively coordinated with any other supply side overcurrent protective device. A similar requirement under Article 700.27 is as follows; Emergency system(s) overcurrent devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply side overcurrent protective devices. Article 701.27 states that Legally required standby system(s) overcurrent devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply side overcurrent devices. Exception: Selective coordination shall not be required between two overcurrent devices located in series if no loads are connected in parallel with the downstream device. In addition, for health care facilities, Article 517.26, Application of Other Articles requires that The essential electrical system shall meet the requirements of Article 700, except as amended by Article 517.
In the example shown, the ANSI three-phase through fault protection curve must be multiplied by 0.577 and replotted in order to determine the protection given by the primary for a single line to ground fault in the secondary.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 061

1.4-5
All breakers must have an interrupting capacity not less than the maximum available short-circuit current at their point of application. A selective system is a fully rated system with tripping devices chosen and adjusted to provide the desired selectivity. The tripping characteristics of each overcurrent device should not overlap, but should maintain a minimum time interval for devices in series (to allow for normal operating tolerances) at all current values. Generally, a maximum of four low voltage circuit breakers can be operated selectively in series, with the feeder or branch breaker downstream furthest from the source. Specify true rms sensing devices in order to avoid false trips due to rapid currents or spikes. Specify tripping elements with I2t or I4t feature for improved coordination with other devices having I2t or I4t (such as OPTIM trip units) characteristics and fuses. In general for systems such as shown in the example: 1. The settings or ratings of the primary side fuse and main breaker must not exceed the settings allowed by NEC Article 450. 2. At 12 x IFL the minimum melting time characteristic of the fuse should be higher than 0.1 second. 3. The primary fuse should be to the left of the transformer damage curve as much as possible. The correction factor for a single lineto-ground factor must be applied to the damage curve. 4. The setting of the short-time delay element must be checked against the fuse MMT after it is corrected for line-to-line faults. 5. The maximum fault current must be indicated at the load side of each protective device. 6. The setting of a feeder protective device must comply with Article 240 and Article 430 of the NEC. It also must allow the starting and acceleration of the largest motor on the feeder while carrying all the other loads on the feeder.
Protection of Conductors (Excerpts from NFPA 70-2011, Article 240.4)

Conductors, other than exible cords and xture wires, shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with their ampacities as specied in Section 310.15, unless otherwise permitted or required in (A) through (G). A. Power Loss Hazard. Conductor overload protection shall not be required where the interruption of the circuit would create a hazard, such as in a material handling magnet circuit or re pump circuit. Short-circuit protection shall be provided.
Note: FPN See NFPA 20-2003, standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection.
E. Tap Conductors. Tap conductors shall be permitted to be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the following: 1. 210.19(A)(3) and (A)(4) Household Ranges and Cooking Appliances and Other Loads. 2. 240.5(B)(2) Fixture Wire. 3. 240.21 Location in Circuit. 4. 368.17(B) Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway. 5. 368.17(C) Feeder or Branch Circuits (busway taps). 6. 430.53(D) Single Motor Taps.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Circuit Breaker Cable Temperature Ratings

UL listed circuit breakers rated 125A or less shall be marked as being suitable for 60C (140F), 75C (167F) only or 60/75C (140/167F) wire. All Eaton breakers rated 125A or less are marked 60/75C (140/167F). All UL listed circuit breakers rated over 125A are suitable for 75C conductors. Conductors rated for higher temperatures may be used, but must not be loaded to carry more current than the 75C ampacity of that size conductor for equipment marked or rated 75C or the 60C ampacity of that size conductor for equipment marked or rated 60C. However, when applying derated factors, so long as the actual load does not exceed the lower of the derated ampacity or the 75C or 60C ampacity that applies.
B. Devices Rated 800A or Less. The next higher standard overcurrent device rating (above the ampacity of the conductors being protected) shall be permitted to be used, provided all of the following conditions are met. 1. The conductors being protected are not part of a branch circuit supplying more than one receptacle for cord-and-plug-connected portable loads. 2. The ampacity of the conductors does not correspond with the standard ampere rating of a fuse or a circuit breaker without overload trip adjustments above its rating (but that shall be permitted to have other trip or rating adjustments). 3. The next higher standard rating selected does not exceed 800A. C. Overcurrent Devices Rated Over 800A. Where the overcurrent device is rated over 800A, the ampacity of the conductors it protects shall be equal to or greater than the rating of the overcurrent device as dened in Section 240.6. D. Small Conductors. Unless specically permitted in 240.4(E) or 240.4(G), the overcurrent protection shall not exceed 15A for 14 AWG, 20A for 12 AWG, and 30A for 10 AWG copper; or 15A for 12 AWG and 25A for 10 AWG aluminum and copper-clad aluminum after any correction factors for ambient temperature and number of conductors have been applied.
Zone Selective Interlocking

Trip elements equipped with zone selective interlocking, trip without intentional time delay unless a restraint signal is received from a protective device downstream. Breakers equipped with this feature reduce the damage at the point of fault if the fault occurs at a location between the zone of protection. The upstream breaker upon receipt of the restraint signal will not trip until its time-delay setting times out. If the breaker immediately downstream of the fault does not open, then after timing out, the upstream breaker will trip. Breakers equipped with ground fault trip elements should also be specied to include zone interlocking for the ground fault trip element.
CA08104001E
1.4-6

September 2011
Sheet 01 062
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ground Fault Protection

Article 230.95 of NEC requires groundfault protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly grounded wye electrical services of more than 150V to ground, but not exceeding 600V phase-to-phase for each service disconnect rated 1000A or more. The rating of the service disconnect shall be considered to be the rating of the largest fuse that can be installed or the highest continuous current trip setting for which the actual overcurrent device installed in a circuit breaker is rated or can be adjusted. The maximum allowable settings are: 1200A pickup, 1 second or less trip delay at currents of 3000A or greater. The characteristics of the ground-fault trip elements create coordination problems with downstream devices not equipped with ground fault protection. The National Electrical Code exempts re pumps and continuous industrial processes from this requirement. It is recommended that in solidly grounded 480/277V systems where main breakers are specied to be equipped with ground fault trip elements that the feeder breakers be specied to be equipped with ground fault trip elements as well.
Suggested Ground Fault Settings

For the main devices: A ground fault pickup setting equal to 2030% of the main breaker rating but not to exceed 1200A, and a time delay equal to the delay of the shorttime element, but not to exceed 1 second. For the feeder ground fault setting: A setting equal to 2030% of the feeder ampacity and a time delay to coordinate with the setting of the main (at least 6 cycles below the main). If the desire to selectively coordinate ground fault devices results in settings that do not offer adequate damage protection against arcing single lineground faults, the design engineer should decide between coordination and damage limitation. For low voltage systems with highmagnitude available short-circuit currents, common in urban areas and large industrial installations, several solutions are available. High interrupting Series C molded case breakers, current-limiting circuit breakers, or current-limiting fuses, limiters integral with molded-case circuit breakers (TRI-PAC) or mounted on power circuit breakers (MDSL) can be used to handle these large fault currents. To provide current limiting, these devices must clear the fault completely within the rst half-cycle, limiting the peak current (Ip) and heat energy (I2t) let-through to considerably less than what would have occurred without the device. For a fully fusible system, rule-of-thumb fuse ratios or more accurate I2t curves can be used to provide selectivity and coordination. For fuse-breaker combinations, the fuse should be selected (coordinated) so as to permit the breaker to handle those overloads and faults within its capacity; the fuse should operate before or with the breaker only on large faults, approaching the interrupting capacity of the breaker, to minimize fuse blowing. Recently, unfused, truly current-limiting circuit breakers with interrupting ratings adequate for the largest systems (Type Series C, FDC, JDC, KDC, LDC and NDC frames or Type Current Limit-R) have become available.
The Series G high performance, current-limiting circuit breaker series offers interrupting ratings to 200 kA. Frames are EGC, EGU, EGX, JGC, JGU, JGX, LGC, LGU and LGX. Any of these current-limiting devices fuses, fused breakers or current-limiting breakerscannot only clear these large faults safely, but also will limit the Ip and I2t let-through signicantly to prevent damage to apparatus downstream, extending their zone of protection. Without the current limitation of the upstream device, the fault current could exceed the withstand capability of the downstream equipment. Underwriters Laboratories tests and lists these series combinations. Application information is available for combinations that have been tested and UL-listed for safe operation downstream from MDSL, TRI-PAC, and Current Limit-R, or Series C breakers of various ratings, under high available fault currents. Protective devices in electrical distribution systems may be properly coordinated when the systems are designed and built, but that is no guarantee that they will remain coordinated. System changes and additions, plus power source changes, frequently modify the protection requirements, sometimes causing loss of coordination and even increasing fault currents beyond the ratings of some devices. Consequently, periodic study of protective-device settings and ratings is as important for safety and preventing power outages as is periodic maintenance of the distribution system.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 063

Grounding/Ground Fault Protection
1.4-7
Grounding
Grounding encompasses several different but interrelated aspects of electrical distribution system design and construction, all of which are essential to the safety and proper operation of the system and equipment supplied by it. Among these are equipment grounding, system grounding, static and lightning protection, and connection to earth as a reference (zero) potential.
1. Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding is essential to safety of personnel. Its function is to ensure that all exposed noncurrentcarrying metallic parts of all structures and equipment in or near the electrical distribution system are at the same potential, and that this is the zero reference potential of the earth. Equipment grounding is required by both the National Electrical Code (Article 250) and the National Electrical Safety Code regardless of how the power system is grounded. Equipment grounding also provides a return path for ground fault currents, permitting protective devices to operate. Accidental contact of an energized conductor of the system with an improperly grounded noncurrent-carry metallic part of the system (such as a motor frame or panelboard enclosure) would raise the potential of the metal object
above ground potential. Any person coming in contact with such an object while grounded could be seriously injured or killed. In addition, current ow from the accidental grounding of an energized part of the system could generate sufcient heat (often with arcing) to start a re. To prevent the establishment of such unsafe potential difference requires that (1) the equipment grounding conductor provide a return path for ground fault currents of sufciently low impedance to prevent unsafe voltage drop, and (2) the equipment grounding conductor be large enough to carry the maximum ground fault current, without burning off, for sufcient time to permit protective devices (ground fault relays, circuit breakers, fuses) to clear the fault. The grounded conductor of the system (usually the neutral conductor), although grounded at the source, must not be used for equipment grounding. The equipment grounding conductor may be the metallic conduit or raceway of the wiring system, or a separate equipment grounding conductor, run with the circuit conductors, as permitted by NEC. If a separate equipment grounding conductor is used, it may be bare or insulated; if insulated, the insulation must be green, green with yellow stripe or green tape. Conductors with green insulation may not be used for any purpose other than for equipment grounding.
The equipment grounding system must be bonded to the grounding electrode at the source or service; however, it may be also connected to ground at many other points. This will not cause problems with the safe operation of the electrical distribution system. Where computers, data processing, or microprocessorbased industrial process control systems are installed, the equipment grounding system must be designed to minimize interference with their proper operation. Often, isolated grounding of this equipment, or isolated electrical supply systems are required to protect microprocessors from power system noise that does not in any way affect motors or other electrical equipment. Such systems must use single-point ground concept to minimize noise and still meet the NEC requirements. Any separate isolated ground mat must be tied to the rest of the facility ground mat system for NEC compliance.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. System Grounding
System grounding connects the electrical supply, from the utility, from transformer secondary windings, or from a generator, to ground. A system can be solidly grounded (no intentional impedance to ground), impedance grounded (through a resistance or reactance), or ungrounded (with no intentional connection to ground.
3. Medium Voltage System: Grounding

Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (from ANSI C62.92)
Description (1) Apparatus insulation (2) Fault to ground current A Ungrounded Fully insulated Usually low B Solidly Grounded Lowest Maximum value rarely higher than three-phase short circuit current C Reactance Grounded Partially graded Cannot satisfactorily be reduced below one-half or one-third of values for solid grounding D Resistance Grounded Partially graded Low E Resonant Grounded Partially graded Negligible except when Petersen coil is short circuited for relay purposes when it may compare with solidly grounded systems Is eliminated from consideration during single line-to-ground faults unless neutralizer is short circuited to isolate fault by relays Requires special provisions but can be made satisfactory Unlikely Effect of faults transmitted as excess voltage on sound phases to all parts of conductively connected network Seem to be more likely but conclusive information not available
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(3) Stability
Usually unimportant
Lower than with other methods but can be made satisfactory by use of high-speed breakers
Improved over solid grounding particularly if used at receiving end of system
Improved over solid grounding particularly if used at receiving end of system
(4) Relaying
Difcult
Satisfactory
Satisfactory
Satisfactory
(5) Arcing grounds (6) Localizing faults
(7) Double faults
Possible if reactance is excessive Effect of fault transmitted Effect of faults localized Effect of faults localized to as excess voltage on to system or part of system or part of system sound phases to all system where they occur where they occur unless parts of conductively reactance is quite high connected network Likely Likely Unlikely unless reactance is quite high and insulation weak
Likely
Unlikely
Unlikely Effect of faults transmitted as excess voltage on sound phases to all parts of conductively connected network Unlikely unless resistance is quite high and insulation weak
CA08104001E
1.4-8

Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (Continued)
Description (8) Lightning protection A Ungrounded B Solidly Grounded C Reactance Grounded If reactance is very high arresters for ungrounded neutral service must be applied at sacrice in cost and efciency Will be reduced from solidly grounded values D Resistance Grounded Arresters for ungrounded, neutral service usually must be applied at sacrice in cost and efciency Will be reduced from solidly grounded values
September 2011
Sheet 01 064
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
E Resonant Grounded Ungrounded neutral service arresters must be applied at sacrice in cost and efciency Will be low in magnitude except in cases of double faults or series resonance at harmonic frequencies, but duration may be great May be high during faults
Ungrounded neutral Highest efciency and service arresters must be lowest cost applied at sacrice in cost and efciency Will usually be low except in cases of double faults or electrostatic induction with neutral displaced but duration may be great Will be greatest in magnitude due to higher fault currents but can be quickly cleared particularly with high speed breakers
(9) Telephone interference
(10) Radio interference (11) Line availability
May be quite high during Minimum faults or when neutral is displayed Will inherently clear Must be isolated for themselves if total length each fault of interconnected line is low and require isolation from system in increasing percentages as length becomes greater
Greater than for solidly grounded, when faults occur Must be isolated for each fault
Greater than for solidly grounded, when faults occur Must be isolated for each fault
Need not be isolated but will inherently clear itself in about 60 to 80 percent of faults
(12) Adaptability Cannot be interconnected Satisfactory indenitely Satisfactory indenitely to interconnection unless interconnecting with reactance-grounded with solidly-grounded system is ungrounded systems systems or isolating transformers are used
Satisfactory with solidlyor reactance-grounded systems with proper attention to relaying
Cannot be interconnected unless interconnected system is resonant grounded or isolating transformers are used. Requires coordination between interconnected systems in neutralizer settings Interrupting capacity determined by threephase fault conditions
(13) Circuit breakers
Interrupting capacity determined by threephase conditions
Same interrupting capacity as required for three-phase short circuit will practically always be satisfactory Simple
Interrupting capacity determined by threephase fault conditions
Interrupting capacity determined by threephase fault conditions
(14) Operating procedure
Ordinarily simple but possibility of double faults introduces complication in times of trouble
Simple
Simple
Taps on neutralizers must be changed when major system switching is performed and difculty may arise in interconnected systems. Difcult to tell where faults are located Highest unless the arc suppressing characteristic is relied on to eliminate transmission circuits when it may be lowest for the particular types of service
(15) Total cost
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
High, unless conditions Lowest are such that arc tends to extinguish itself, when transmission circuits may be eliminated, reducing total cost
Intermediate
Intermediate
Because the method of grounding affects the voltage rise of the unfaulted phases above ground, ANSI C62.92 classies systems from the point of view of grounding in terms of a coefcient of grounding
Highest Power Frequency rms Line Ground Voltage COG = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------rms Line Line Voltage at Fault Location with the Fault Removed
This same standard also denes systems as effectively grounded when COG .8 such a system would have X0 /X1 3.0 and R0 /X1 1.0. Any other grounding means that does not satisfy these conditions at any point in a system is not effectively grounded.
The aforementioned denition is of signicance in medium voltage distribution systems with long lines and with grounded sources removed during light load periods so that in some locations in the system the X0 /X1, R0 /X1 may exceed the dening limits. Other standards (cable and lightning arrester) allow the use of 100% rated cables and arresters selected on the basis of an effectively grounded system only where the criteria in the above are met. In effectively grounded system the lineto-ground fault current is high and there is no signicant voltage rise in the unfaulted phases. With selective ground fault isolation the fault current should be at least 60%
of the three-phase current at the point of fault. Damage to cable shields must be checked. Although this fact is not a problem except in small cables, it is a good idea to supplement the cable shields returns of ground fault current to prevent damage, by installing an equipment grounding conductor.
The burdens on the current transformers must be checked also (for saturation considerations), where residually connected ground relays are used and the current transformers supply current to phase relays and meters.
If ground sensor current transformers (zero sequence type) are used they must be of high burden capacity.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 065

1.4-9
Table 1.4-2 taken from ANSI-C62.92 indicates the characteristics of the various methods of grounding.
Reactance Grounding
It is generally used in the grounding of the neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution system bus, in order to limit the line-to-ground fault to somewhat less than the threephase fault at the generator terminals. If the reactor is so sized, in all probability the system will remain effectively grounded.
Resistance Grounded
Medium voltage systems in general should be low resistance grounded. The ground fault is typically limited to about 200400A but less than 1000A (a cable shield consideration). With a properly sized resistor and relaying application, selective fault isolation is feasible. The fault limit provided has a bearing on whether residually connected relays are used or ground sensor current transformers are used for ground fault relaying. In general, where residually connected ground relays are used (51N), the fault current at each grounded source Table 1.4-2. Characteristics of Grounding
Grounding Classes and Means A. Effectively 1. Effective 2. Very effective B. Noneffectively 1. Inductance a. Low inductance b. High inductance 2. Resistance a. Low resistance b. High resistance 3. Inductance and resistance 4. Resonant 5. Ungrounded/capacitance a. Range A b. Range B
should not be limited to less than the current transformers rating of the source. This rule will provide sensitive differential protection for wye-connected generators and transformers against line-to-ground faults near the neutral. Of course, if the installation of ground fault differential protection is feasible, or ground sensor current transformers are used, sensitive differential relaying in resistance grounded system with greater fault limitation is feasible. In general, ground sensor current transformers (zero sequence) do not have high burden capacity. Resistance grounded systems limit the circulating currents of triple harmonics and limit the damage at the point of fault. This method of grounding is not suitable for line-to-neutral connection of loads. On medium voltage systems, 100% cable insulation is rated for phase-toneutral voltage. If continued operation with one phase faulted to ground is desired, increased insulation thickness is required. For 100% insulation, fault clearance is recommended within one minute; for 133% insulation, one hour is acceptable; for indenite operation, as long as necessary, 173% insulation is required.
Grounding Point
The most commonly used grounding point is the neutral of the system or the neutral point created by means of a zigzag or a wye-broken delta grounding transformer in a system that was operating as an ungrounded delta system. In general, it is a good practice that all source neutrals be grounded with the same grounding impedance magnitude. However, neutrals should not be tied together to a single resistor. Where one of the medium voltage sources is the utility, their consent for impedance grounding must be obtained. The neutral impedance must have a voltage rating at least equal to the rated line-to-neutral voltage class of the system. It must have at least a 10-second rating equal to the maximum future line-to-ground fault current and a continuous rating to accommodate the triple harmonics that may be present.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4. Low Voltage System: Grounding

Solidly grounded three-phase systems (Figure 1.4-2) are usually wyeconnected, with the neutral point grounded. Less common is the redleg or high-leg delta, a 240V system supplied by some utilities with one winding center-tapped to provide 120V to ground for lighting. This 240V, threephase, four-wire system is used where 120V lighting load is small compared to 240V power load, because the installation is low in cost to the utility. A corner-grounded three-phase delta system is sometimes found, with one phase grounded to stabilize all voltages to ground. Better solutions are available for new installations.
Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral
Ratios of Symmetrical Component Parameters X0/X1 0-3 0-1 R0/X1 0-1 0-0.1 R0/X0
Percent Fault Current
Per Unit Transient LG Voltage
>60 >95
2 <1.5
3-10 >10 0-10 >10
0-1 >100
<2 2 (-1) >2
>25 <25 <25 <1 <10 <1 <8 >8
<2.3 2.73 <2.5 2.73 2.73 2.73 3 >3
- to -40 -40 to 0
N
Grounded Wye
Values of the coefcient of grounding (expressed as a percentage of maximum phase-to-phase voltage) corresponding to various combinations of these ratios are shown in the ANSI C62.92 Appendix gures. Coefcient of grounding affects the selection of arrester ratings. Ground-fault current in percentage of the three-phase short-circuit value. Transient line-to-ground voltage, following the sudden initiation of a fault in per unit of the crest of the prefault line-to-ground operating voltage for a simple, linear circuit. In linear circuits, Class A1 limits the fundamental line-to-ground voltage on an unfaulted phase to 138% of the prefault voltage; Class A2 to less than 110%. See ANSI 62.92 para. 7.3 and precautions given in application sections. Usual isolated neutral (ungrounded) system for which the zero-sequence reactance is capacitive (negative). Same as NOTE (6) and refer to ANSI 62.92 para. 7.4. Each case should be treated on its own merit. Under restriking arcing ground fault conditions (e.g., vacuum breaker interrupter operation), this value can approach 500%. Under arcing ground fault conditions, this value can easily reach 700%, but is essentially unlimited.
Phase B Phase C Phase A Neutral
17 18
Center-Tapped (High-Leg) Delta Phase A Phase B Phase C
19 20 21
Corner-Grounded Delta
Figure 1.4-2. Solidly Grounded Systems

1.4-10 Power Distribution Systems System Application Considerations

Ungrounded systems (Figure 1.4-3) can be either wye or delta, although the ungrounded delta system is far more common.
September 2011
Sheet 01 066
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Selecting the Low Voltage System Grounding Method

There is no one best distribution system for all applications. In choosing among solidly grounded, resistance grounded, or ungrounded power distribution, the characteristics of the system must be weighed against the requirements of power loads, lighting loads, continuity of service, safety and cost. Under ground fault conditions, each system behaves very differently. A solidly grounded system produces high fault currents, usually with arcing, and the faulted circuit must be cleared on the rst fault within a fraction of a second to minimize damage. An ungrounded system will pass limited current into the rst ground fault only the charging current of the system, caused by the distributed capacitance to ground of the system wiring and equipment. In low voltage systems, this is rarely more than 1 or 2A. Therefore, on rst ground fault, an ungrounded system can continue in service, making it desirable where power outages cannot be tolerated. However, if the ground fault is intermittent, sputtering or arcing, a high voltageas much as 6 to 8 times phase voltagecan be built up across the system capacitance, from the phase conductors to ground. Similar high voltages can occur as a result of resonance between system capacitance and the inductances of transformers and motors in the system. The phase-to-phase voltage is not affected. This high transient phase-to-ground voltage can puncture insulation at weak points, such as motor windings, and is a frequent cause of multiple motor failures on ungrounded systems. Locating a rst fault on an ungrounded system can be difcult. If, before the rst fault is cleared, a second ground fault occurs on a different phase, even on a different, remote feeder, it is a highcurrent phase-to-ground-to-phase fault, usually arcing, that can cause severe damage if at least one of the grounds is not cleared immediately. If the second circuit is remote, enough current may not ow to cause protection to operate. This can leave high voltages and stray currents on structures and jeopardize personnel. In general, where loads will be connected line-to-neutral, solidly grounded systems are used. High resistance grounded systems are
used as substitutes for ungrounded systems where high system availability is required. With one phase grounded, the voltage to ground of the other two phases rises 73%, to full phase-to-phase voltage. In low voltage systems this is not important, since conductors are insulated for 600V. A low voltage resistance grounded system is normally grounded so that the single line-to-ground fault current exceeds the capacitive charging current of the system. If data for the charging current is not available, use 4050 ohm resistor in the neutral of the transformer. In commercial and institutional installations, such as ofce buildings, shopping centers, schools and hospitals, lighting loads are often 50% or more of the total load. In addition, a feeder outage on rst ground fault is seldom crucialeven in hospitals, that have emergency power in critical areas. For these reasons, a solidly grounded wye distribution, with the neutral used for lighting circuits, is usually the most economical, effective and convenient design. In some instances, it is an NEC requirement. In industrial installations, the effect of a shutdown caused by a single ground fault could be disastrous. An interrupted process could cause the loss of all the materials involved, often ruin the process equipment itself, and sometimes create extremely dangerous situations for operating personnel. On the other hand, lighting is usually only a small fraction of the total industrial electrical load. A solidly grounded neutral circuit conductor is not imperative and, when required, can be obtained from inexpensive lighting transformers. Because of the ability to continue in operation with one ground fault on the system, many existing industrial plants use ungrounded delta distribution. Today, new installations can have all the advantages of service continuity of the ungrounded delta, yet minimize the problems of the system, such as the difculty of locating the rst ground fault, risk of damage from a second ground fault, and damage transient overvoltages. A highresistance grounded wye distribution can continue in operation with a ground fault on the system and will not develop transient overvoltages.

Ungrounded Delta
Phase A Phase B Phase C
N
Ungrounded Wye
Figure 1.4-3. Ungrounded Systems Resistance-grounded systems (Figure 1.4-4) are simplest with a wye connection, grounding the neutral point directly through the resistor. Delta systems can be grounded by means of a zig-zag or other grounding transformer. Wye broken delta transformer banks may also be used.
N R
Resistance-Grounded Wye
Phase A
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Phase B Phase C
Delta With Derived Neutral ResistanceGrounded Using Zig-Zag Transformer
Figure 1.4-4. Resistance-Grounded Systems This derives a neutral point, which can be either solidly or impedancegrounded. If the grounding transformer has sufcient capacity, the neutral created can be solidly grounded and used as part of a three-phase, four-wire system. Most transformer-supplied systems are either solidly grounded or resistance grounded. Generator neutrals are often grounded through a reactor, to limit ground fault (zero sequence) currents to values the generator can withstand.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 067

1.4-11
And, because the ground point is established, locating a ground fault is less difcult than on an ungrounded system especially when a pulsing contactor design is applied. When combined with sensitive ground-fault protection, damage from a second ground fault can be nearly eliminated. Ungrounded delta systems can be converted to high-resistance grounded systems, using a zig-zag or other grounding transformer to derive a neutral, with similar benets, see Tab 36. While the majority of manufacturing plants use solidly grounded systems, in many instances, the high-resistance grounded distribution will be the most advantageous.

A ground fault normally occurs in one of two ways: by accidental contact of an energized conductor with normally grounded metal, or as a result of an insulation failure of an energized conductor. When an insulation failure occurs, the energized conductor contacts normally noncurrent-carrying grounded metal, which is bonded to or part of the equipment grounding conductor. In a solidly grounded system, the fault current returns to the source primarily along the equipment grounding conductors, with a small part using parallel paths such as building steel or piping. If the ground return impedance was as low as that of the circuit conductors, ground fault currents would be high, and the normal phase overcurrent protection would clear them with little damage. Unfortunately, the impedance of the ground return path is usually higher, the fault itself is usually arcing and the impedance of the arc further reduces the fault current. In a 480Y/277V system, the voltage drop across the arc can be from 70 to 140V. The resulting ground fault current is rarely enough to cause the phase overcurrent protection device to open instantaneously and prevent damage. Sometimes, the ground fault is below the trip setting of the protective device and it does not trip at all until the fault escalates and extensive damage is done. For these reasons, low level ground protection devices with minimum time delay settings are required to rapidly clear ground faults. This is emphasized by the NEC requirement that a ground fault relay on a service shall have a maximum delay of one second for faults of 3000A or more. The NEC (Sec. 230.95) requires that ground fault protection, set at no more than 1200A, be provided for each service
CA08104001E
disconnecting means rated 1000A or more on solidly grounded wye services of more than 150V to ground, but not exceeding 600V phase-to-phase. Practically, this makes ground fault protection mandatory on 480Y/277V services, but not on 208Y/120V services. On a 208V system, the voltage to ground is 120V. If a ground fault occurs, the arc goes out at current zero, and the voltage to ground is often too low to cause it to restrike. Therefore, arcing ground faults on 208V systems tend to be self-extinguishing. On a 480V system, with 277V to ground, restrike usually takes place after current zero, and the arc tends to be self-sustaining, causing severe and increasing damage, until the fault is cleared by a protective device. The NEC requires ground fault protection on the service disconnecting means. This protection works so fast that for ground faults on feeders, or even branch circuits, it will often open the service disconnect before the feeder or branch circuit overcurrent device can operate. This is highly undesirable, and in the NEC (230.95) a Fine Print Note (FPN) states that additional ground fault protective equipment will be needed on feeders and branch circuits where maximum continuity of electric service is necessary. Unless it is acceptable to disconnect the entire service on a ground fault almost anywhere in the system, such additional stages of ground fault protection must be provided. At least two stages of protection are mandatory in health care facilities (NEC Sec. 517.17). Overcurrent protection is designed to protect conductors and equipment against currents that exceed their ampacity or rating under prescribed time values. An overcurrent can result from an overload, short circuit or (high level) ground fault condition. When currents ow outside the normal current path to ground, supplementary ground fault protection equipment will be required to sense low-level ground fault currents and initiate the protection required. Normal phase overcurrent protection devices provide no protection against low-level ground faults. There are three basic means of sensing ground faults. The most simple and direct method is the ground return method as illustrated in Figure 1.4-5. This sensing method is based on the fact that all currents supplied by a transformer must return to that transformer.
Main
i
Neutral
Service Transformer Sensor GFR Ground Bus Main Bonding Jumper Grounding Electrode Conductor Equipment Grounding Conductor Typical 4W Load Typical Feeder
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 1.4-5. Ground Return Sensing Method When an energized conductor faults to grounded metal, the fault current returns along the ground return path to the neutral of the source transformer. This path includes the main bonding jumper as shown in Figure 1.4-5. A current sensor on this conductor (which can be a conventional bar-type or window type CT) will respond to ground fault currents only. Normal neutral currents resulting from unbalanced loads will return along the neutral conductor and will not be detected by the ground return sensor.
This is an inexpensive method of sensing ground faults where protection per NEC (230.95) is desired. For it to operate properly, the neutral must be grounded in only one place as indicated in Figure 1.4-5. In many installations, the servicing utility grounds the neutral at the transformer and additional grounding is required in the service equipment per NEC (250.24(A)(2)). In such cases, and others including multiple source with multiple, interconnected neutral ground points, residual or zero sequence ground sensing methods should be employed.
A second method of detecting ground faults involves the use of a zero sequence sensing method, as illustrated in Figure 1.4-6. This sensing method requires a single, specially designed sensor either of a toroidal or rectangular shaped conguration. This core balance current transformer surrounds all the phase and neutral conductors in a typical three-phase, four-wire distribution system. The sensing method is based on the fact that the vectorial sum of the phase and neutral currents in any distribution circuit will equal zero unless a ground fault condition exists downstream from the sensor. All currents that ow only in the circuit conductors, including balanced or unbalanced phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral normal or fault currents, and harmonic currents, will result in zero sensor output.

However, should any conductor become grounded, the fault current will return along the ground pathnot the normal circuit conductorsand the sensor will have an unbalanced magnetic ux condition, and a sensor output will be generated to actuate the ground fault relay.
Zero Sequence Sensor Main Alternate Sensor Location
September 2011
Sheet 01 068
i ii 1 2 3
neutral. In a residual sensing scheme, the relationship of the polarity markings as noted by the X on each sensor is critical. Because the vectorial sum of the currents in all the conductors will total zero under normal, non-ground faulted conditions, it is imperative that proper polarity connections are employed to reect this condition.
Sensor Polarity Marks Main
levels of ground fault protection are desired for added service continuity. Additional grounding points may be employed upstream of the residual sensors, but not on the load side. Both the zero sequence and residual sensing methods have been commonly referred to as vectorial summation methods. Most distribution systems can use either of the three sensing methods exclusively or a combination of the sensing methods depending upon the complexity of the system and the degree of service continuity and selective coordination desired. Different methods will be required depending upon the number of supply sources, and the number and location of system grounding points. As an example, one of the more frequently used systems where continuity of service to critical loads is a factor is the dual source system illustrated in Figure 1.4-8. This system uses tie-point grounding as permitted under NEC Sec. 250.24(A)(3). The use of this grounding method is limited to services that are dual fed (doubleended) in a common enclosure or grouped together in separate enclosures, employing a secondary tie. This scheme uses individual sensors connected in ground return fashion. Under tie breaker closed operating conditions, either the M1 sensor or M2 sensor could see neutral unbalance currents and possibly initiate an improper tripping operation. However, with the polarity arrangements of these two sensors along with the tie breaker auxiliary switch (T/a) and interconnections as shown, this possibility is eliminated.
Residual Sensors
Neutral
4
GFR
Neutral
Typical Feeder
GFR
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical 4W Load
Typical Feeder
Typical 4W Load
Figure 1.4-6. Zero Sequence Sensing Method Zero sequence sensors are available with various window openings for circuits with small or large conductors, and even with large rectangular windows to t over bus bars or multiple large size conductors in parallel. Some sensors have split cores for installation over existing conductors without disturbing the connections. This method of sensing ground faults can be employed on the main disconnect where protection per NEC (230.95) is desired. It can also be easily employed in multi-tier systems where additional levels of ground fault protection are desired for added service continuity. Additional grounding points may be employed upstream of the sensor, but not on the load side. Ground fault protection employing ground return or zero sequence sensing methods can be accomplished by the use of separate ground fault relays (GFRs) and disconnects equipped with standard shunt trip devices or by circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection with external connections arranged for these modes of sensing. In some cases, a reliable source of control power is needed. The third basic method of detecting ground faults involves the use of multiple current sensors connected in a residual sensing method as illustrated in Figure 1.4-7. This is a very common sensing method used with circuit breakers equipped with electronic trip units, current sensors and integral ground fault protection. The three-phase sensors are required for normal phase overcurrent protection. Ground fault sensing is obtained with the addition of an identically rated sensor mounted on the
Figure 1.4-7. Residual Sensing Method As with the zero sequence sensing method, the resultant residual sensor output to the ground fault relay or integral ground fault tripping circuit will be zero if all currents ow only in the circuit conductors. Should a ground fault occur, the current from the faulted conductor will return along the ground path, rather than on the other circuit conductors, and the residual sum of the sensor outputs will not be zero. When the level of ground fault current exceeds the pre-set current and time delay settings, a ground fault tripping action will be initiated. This method of sensing ground faults can be economically applied on main service disconnects where circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection are provided. It can be used in protection schemes per NEC (230.95) or in multi-tier schemes where additional
Power Transformer
Power Transformer
Main Bkr. 52-1
Neutral Sensor Main Bkr. 52-1 A, B, C Neutral
Tie Bkr. 52-T
Neutral Sensor Main Bkr. 52-2 A, B, C Neutral
Main Bkr. 52-2
M1N M1G
4-Wire Load B4 B5 Digitrip
B5 B4 Digitrip Main Bkr. 52-1
3352-T B4 B5 Digitrip Main Bkr. 52-2
M2G M2N
TG
TN
Typical 4-Wire Feeder
( )B5 ( )B4 52-T a
Neutral Sensor Tie Bkr. 52-T
Typical 52-T 4-Wire Feeder a 4-Wire Load
( )B5 ( )B4
B4 B5 Digitrip Main Bkr. 52-2
B4 B5 Digitrip
Figure 1.4-8. Dual Source SystemSingle Point Grounding

September 2011
Sheet 01 069

1.4-13
Selective ground fault tripping coordination between the tie breaker and the two main circuit breakers is achieved by pre-set current pickup and time delay settings between devices GFR/1, GFR/2 and GFR/T. The advantages of increased service continuity offered by this system can only be effectively used if additional levels of ground fault protection are added on each downstream feeder. Some users prefer individual grounding of the transformer neutrals. In such cases, a partial differential ground fault scheme should be used for the mains and tie breaker. An example of a residual partial differential scheme is shown in Figure 1.4-9. The scheme typically relies upon the vector sum of at least two neutral sensors in combination with each breakers three-phase sensors. To reduce the complexity of the drawing, each of the breakers three-phase sensors have not been shown. It is absolutely critical that the sensors polarities are supplied as shown, the neutral sensor ratings of the mains and tie are the same, and that there are no other grounds on the neutral bus made downstream of points shown. An innite number of ground fault protection schemes can be developed depending upon the number of alternate sources, the number of grounding points and system interconnections involved. Depending upon the individual system conguration, either mode of sensing
or a combination of all types may be employed to accomplish the desired end results. Because the NEC (230.95) limits the maximum setting of the ground fault protection used on service equipment to 1200A (and timed tripping at 3000A for one second), to prevent tripping of the main service disconnect on a feeder ground fault, ground fault protection must be provided on all the feeders. To maintain maximum service continuity, more than two levels (zones) of ground fault protection will be required, so that ground fault outages can be localized and service interruption minimized. To obtain selectivity between different levels of ground fault relays, time delay settings should be employed with the GFR furthest downstream having the minimum time delay. This will allow the GFR nearest the fault to operate rst. With several levels of protection, this will reduce the level of protection for faults within the upstream GFR zones. Zone interlocking was developed for GFRs to overcome this problem. GFRs (or circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection) with zone interlocking are coordinated in a system to operate in a time delayed mode for ground faults occurring most remote from the source. However, this time delayed mode is only actuated when the GFR next upstream from the fault sends a restraining signal to the upstream GFRs. The absence of a restraining signal from a downstream
GFR is an indication that any occurring ground fault is within the zone of the GFR next upstream from the fault and that device will operate instantaneously to clear the fault with minimum damage and maximum service continuity. This operating mode permits all GFRs to operate instantaneously for a fault within their zone and still provide complete selectivity between zones. The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) states, in their application guide for ground fault protection, that zone interlocking is necessary to minimize damage from ground faults. A two-wire connection is required to carry the restraining signal from the GFRs in one zone to the GFRs in the next zone. Circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection and standard circuit breakers with shunt trips activated by the ground fault relay are ideal for ground fault protection. Many fused switches over 1200A, and Eaton Type FDP fusible switches with ratings from 400 to 1200A, are listed by UL as suitable for ground fault protection. Fusible switches so listed must be equipped with a shunt trip, and be able to open safely on faults up to 12 times their rating. Power distribution systems differ widely from each other, depending upon the requirements of each user, and total system overcurrent protection, including ground fault currents, must be individually designed to meet these needs. Experienced and knowledgeable engineers must consider the power sources (utility or on-site), the effects of outages and costs of downtime, safety for people and equipment, initial and lifecycle costs, and many other factors. They must apply protective devices, analyzing the time-current characteristics, fault interrupting capacity, and selectivity and coordination methods to provide the most safe and cost-effective distribution system.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Transformer
Power Transformer
Main Breaker 52-1
Neutral Sensor Main Breaker 52-1
Neutral Sensor Main Breaker 52-2
X X
Main Breaker 52-2
Phase A, Phase B, Phase C Neutral Trip Unit
Tie Breaker 52-T

X
Phase A, Phase B, Phase C Neutral Trip Unit
Further Information
Neutral Sensor X Tie Breaker 52-T

X X
X X
Typical Four-Wire Feeder
52-1 a
52-T a
52-2 a
Typical Four-Wire Feeder
Four-Wire Load Trip Unit Main Breaker 52-1 Trip Unit Trip Unit Tie Breaker Main Breaker 52-T 52-2
Four-Wire Load
PRSC-4ESystem Neutral Grounding and Ground Fault Protection (ABB Publication) PB 2.2NEMA Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment IEEE Standard 142Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Green Book) IEEE Emerald Book (Standard 1100) UL 96A, Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems
Figure 1.4-9. Dual Source SystemMultiple Point Grounding


September 2011
Sheet 01 070
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Lightning and Surge Protection

Physical protection of buildings from direct damage from lightning is beyond the scope of this section. Requirements will vary with geographic location, building type and environment, and many other factors (see IEEE/ANSI Standard 142, Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems). Any lightning protection system must be grounded, and the lightning protection ground must be bonded to the electrical equipment grounding system.
The electrical distribution system and equipment ground must be connected to this grounding electrode system by a grounding electrode conductor. All other grounding electrodes, such as those for the lightning protection system, the telephone system, television antenna and cable TV system grounds, and computer systems, must be bonded to this grounding electrode system.
Surge Protection
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is applied over a broad range of circuits, and is one of the many types of equipment in the total system. The distribution system can be subject to voltage transients caused by lighting or switching surges. Recognizing that distribution system can be subject to voltage transients caused by lighting or switching, the industry has developed standards to provide guidelines for surge protection of electrical equipment. Those guidelines should be used in design and protection of electrical distribution systems independent of the circuit breaker interrupting medium. The industry standards are: ANSI C62 Guides and Standards for Surge Protection IEEE 242Buff Book IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems IEEE 141Red Book Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE C37.20.2 Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear Eatons medium voltage metal-clad and metal-enclosed switchgear that uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied over a broad range of circuits. It is one of the many types of equipment in the total distribution system. Whenever a switching device is opened or closed, certain interactions of the power system elements with the switching device can cause high frequency voltage transients in the system. Due to the wide range of applications and variety of ratings used for different elements in the power systems, a given circuit may or may not require surge protection. Therefore, Eaton does not include surge protection as standard with its metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium voltage switchgear. The user exercises the options as to the type and extent of the surge protection necessary depending on the individual circuit characteristics and cost considerations. The following are Eatons recommendations for surge protection of medium voltage equipment. Please note these recommendations are valid when using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
Medium Voltage Equipment Surge Protection Considerations

Transformers
If the voltage withstand/BIL rating of the transformer is less than that of the switchgear feeding the transformer, surge protection is recommended at the transformer terminals, in line with established practices. In addition, consideration should be given to using surge arresters and/or surge capacitors for transformers having equal or greater withstand/BIL ratings than that of the switchgear feeding the transformer for distribution systems where reected voltage waves and/or resonant conditions may occur. Typically incoming voltage surges are reected at the transformer primary terminals (because of the change in impedance) resulting in voltages at the ends of the transformer primary terminals/windings of up to two times the incoming voltage wave. System capacitance and inductance values combined with the transformer impedance values can cause resonant conditions resulting in amplied reected waves. Surge arresters/capacitors when required, should be located as close to the transformer primary terminals as practical.
Grounding Electrodes
At some point, the equipment and system grounds must be connected to the earth by means of a grounding electrode system. Outdoor substations usually use a ground grid, consisting of a number of ground rods driven into the earth and bonded together by buried copper conductors. The required grounding electrode system for a building is spelled out in the NEC Article 250. The preferred grounding electrode is a metal underground water pipe in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 ft (3m). However, because underground water piping is often plastic outside the building, or may later be replaced by plastic piping, the NEC requires this electrode to be supplemented by and bonded to at least one other grounding electrode, such as the effectively grounded metal frame of the building, a concrete-encased electrode, a copper conductor ground ring encircling the building, or a made electrode such as one or more driven ground rods or a buried plate. Where any of these electrodes are present, they must be bonded together into one grounding electrode system. One of the most effective grounding electrodes is the concrete-encased electrode, sometimes called the Ufer ground, named after the man who developed it. It consists of at least 20 ft (6m) of steel reinforcing bars or rods not less than 1/2 inches (12.7 mm) in diameter, or at least 20 ft (6m) of bare copper conductor, size No. 4 AWG or larger, encased in at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) of concrete. It must be located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth. Tests have shown this electrode to provide a low-resistance earth ground even in poor soil conditions.
Motors
Surge capacitors and, where appropriate, surge arresters should be applied at the motor terminals.
Generators
Surge capacitors and station class surge arresters at the machine terminals.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 071

1.4-15
Surge Protection Recommendations

Note: The abbreviation ZORC used in the text below refers to Surge Protection Device manufactured by Strike Technology (Pty) Ltd. An equivalent device offered by other manufacturers, such as Type EHZ by ABB, and Protec Z by Northern Technologies SA can also be used.
RC Snubber and/or ZORC damp internal transformer resonance: The natural frequency of transformer windings can under some circumstances be excited to resonate. Transformer windings in resonance can produce elevated internal voltages that produce insulation damage or failure. An RC Snubber or a ZORC applied at the transformer terminals as indicated above can damp internal winding resonance and prevent the production of damaging elevated internal voltages. This is typically required where rectiers, UPS or similar electronic equipment is on the transformer secondary. 3. Arc-Furnace Transformers Provide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the transformer terminals. 4. MotorsProvide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the motor terminals. For those motors using VFDs, surge protection should be applied and precede the VFD devices as well. 5. GeneratorsProvide station class Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the generator terminals.
6. Capacitor SwitchingNo surge protection is required. Make sure that the capacitors lightning impulse withstand rating is equal to that of the switchgear. 7. Shunt Reactor Switching Provide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the reactor terminals. 8. Motor Starting Reactors or Reduced Voltage Auto-Transformers Provide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the reactor or RVAT terminals. 9. Switching Underground Cables Surge protection not needed.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. For circuits exposed to lightning, surge arresters should be applied in line with Industry standard practices. 2. Transformers a. Close-Coupled to medium voltage primary breaker: Provide transients surge protection, such as Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC. The surge protection device selected should be located and connected at the transformer primary terminals or it can be located inside the switchgear and connected on the transformer side of the primary breaker. b. Cable-Connected to medium voltage primary breaker: Provide transient surge protection, such as Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC for transformers connected by cables with lengths up to 75 feet. The surge protection device should be located and connected at the transformer terminals. No surge protection is needed for transformers with lightning impulse withstand ratings equal to that of the switchgear and connected to the switchgear by cables at least 75 feet or longer. For transformers with lower BIL, provide surge arrester in parallel with RC Snubber or ZORC.
Types of Surge Protection Devices

Generally surge protective devices should be located as closely as possible to the circuit component(s) that require protection from the transients, and connected directly to the terminals of the component with conductors that are as short and at as possible to minimize the inductance. It is also important that surge protection devices should be properly grounded for effectively shunting high frequency transients to ground.
Figure 1.4-10. Surge Protection Devices
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Grounding/Ground Fault Protection Surge Arresters
The modern metal-oxide surge arresters are recommended because this latest advance in arrester design ensures better performance and high reliability of surge protection schemes. Manufacturers technical data must be consulted for correct application of a given type of surge arrester. Notice that published arrester MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) ratings are based on 40 or 45C ambient temperature. In general, the following guidelines are recommended for arrester selections, when installed inside Eatons medium voltage switchgear: A. Solidly Grounded Systems: Arrester MCOV rating should be equal to 1.05 x VLL/(1.732 x T), where VLL is nominal line-to-line service voltage, 1.05 factor allows for +5% voltage variation above the nominal voltage according to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating factor to allow for operation at 55C switchgear ambient, which should be obtained from the arrester manufacturer for the type of arrester under consideration. Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0. B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems (systems grounded through resistor rated for 10 seconds): Arrester 10-second MCOV capability at 60C, which is obtained from manufacturers data, should be equal to 1.05 x VLL, where VLL is nominal line-to-line service voltage, and 1.05 factor allows for +5% voltage variation above the nominal voltage. C. Ungrounded or Systems Grounded through impedance other than 10-second resistor: Arrester MCOV rating should be equal to 1.05 x VLL/T, where VLL and T are as dened above. Refer to Table 1.4-3 for recommended ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters that are sized in accordance with the above guidelines, when located in Eatons switchgear.
September 2011
Sheet 01 072
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Surge Capacitors
Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the magnitude of prospective surge overvoltage, but are ineffective in controlling its rate of rise. Specially designed surge capacitors with low internal inductance are used to limit the rate of rise of this surge overvoltage to protect turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and 0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV and higher.
ZORC
A ZORC device consists of parallel combination of Resistor (R) and Zinc Oxide Voltage Suppressor (ZnO), connected in series with a Surge Capacitor. The resistor R is sized to match surge impedance of the load cables, typically 20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless metal-oxide nonlinear arrester, set to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where 1 PU = 1.412*(VL-L/1.732). The Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. As with RC Snubber, under normal operating conditions, impedance of the capacitor is very high, effectively isolating the resistor R and ZnO from the system at normal power frequencies, and minimizing heat dissipation during normal operation. Under high frequency transient conditions, the capacitor offers very low impedance, thus effectively inserting the resistor R and ZnO in the power system as cable terminating network, thus minimizing reection of the steep wave-fronts of the voltage transients and prevents voltage doubling of the traveling wave. The ZnO element limits the peak voltage magnitudes. The combined effects of R, ZnO, and Capacitor of the ZORC device provides optimum protection against high frequency transients by absorbing, damping, and by limiting the peak amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts. Please note that the ZORC is not a lightning protection device. If lightning can occur or be induced in the electrical system, a properly rated and applied surge arrester must precede the ZORC.
RC Snubber
A RC Snubber device consists of a non-inductive resistor R sized to match surge impedance of the load cables, typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected in series with a Surge Capacitor C. The Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal operating conditions, impedance of the capacitor is very high, effectively isolating the resistor R from the system at normal power frequencies, and minimizing heat dissipation during normal operation. Under high frequency transient conditions, the capacitor offers very low impedance, thus effectively inserting the resistor R in the power system as cable terminating resistor, thus minimizing reection of the steep wave-fronts of the voltage transients and prevents voltage doubling of the traveling wave. The RC Snubber provides protection against high frequency transients by absorbing and damping and the transients. Please note RC Snubber is most effective in mitigating fast-rising transient voltages, and in attenuating reections and resonances before they have a chance to build up, but does not limit the peak magnitude of the transient. Therefore, the RC Snubber alone may not provide adequate protection. To limit peak magnitude of the transient, application of surge arrester should also be considered.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 073

1.4-17
Surge Protection Summary

Minimum protection: Surge Arrester for protection from high overvoltage peaks, or Surge Capacitor for protection from fast-rising transient. Please note that the surge arresters or surge capacitor alone may not provide adequate surge protection from escalating voltages caused by circuit resonance. Note that when applying surge capacitors on both sides of a circuit breaker, surge capacitor on one side of the breaker must be RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate possible virtual current chopping.
Good protection: Surge Arrester in parallel with Surge Capacitor for protection from high overvoltage peaks and fast rising transient. This option may not provide adequate surge protection from escalating voltages caused by circuit resonance. When applying surge capacitors on both sides of a circuit breaker, surge capacitor on one side of the breaker must be RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate possible virtual current chopping. Better protection: RC Snubber in parallel with Surge Arrester for protection from high frequency transients and voltage peaks.
Best protection: ZORC, plus proper surge arrester preceding ZORC where needed for protection against lightning. ZORC provides protection from high frequency voltage transients and limits peak magnitude of the transient to 1 to 2 PU (see ZORC description on Page 1.4-16 for more detail). Surge arrester provides protection from higher voltage peaks resulting from lightning surges.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Further Information
IEEE/ANSI Standard 142Grounding Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Green Book) IEEE Standard 241Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings (Gray Book) IEEE Standard 141Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants (Red Book)
Table 1.4-3. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings

Service Voltage Line-to-Line kV Distribution Class Arresters Solidly Low Resistance Grounded System Grounded System Arrester Ratings kV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 10 12 12 12 15 18 18 18 18 21 21 21 27 30 30 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 17.00 17.00 17.00 22.00 24.40 24.40 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 10 10 12 12 12 12 15 18 18 21 21 24 24 24 30 30 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 17.00 17.00 19.50 19.50 19.50 24.40 24.40 Station Class Arresters High Resistance or Solidly Low Resistance Ungrounded System Grounded System Grounded System Arrester Ratings kV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV 3 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 12 12 15 18 18 18 18 18 21 27 30 30 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 17.00 22.00 24.40 24.40 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 10 12 12 12 15 18 18 18 18 21 21 21 27 30 30 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 17.00 17.00 17.00 22.00 24.40 24.40 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 12 12 12 12 15 15 18 21 21 24 24 24 24 27 36 36 36 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 10.20 12.70 12.70 15.30 17.00 17.00 19.50 19.50 19.50 19.50 22.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 High Resistance or Ungrounded System Nominal 3 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 12 12 15 18 18 18 18 18 21 27 30 30 36 36 36 36 39 45 48 MCOV 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 17.00 22.00 24.40 24.40 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 31.50 36.50 39.00
2.30 2.40 3.30 4.00 4.16 4.76 4.80 6.60 6.90 7.20 8.32 8.40 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.47 13.20 13.80 14.40 18.00 20.78 22.00 22.86 23.00 24.94 25.80 26.40 33.00 34.50 38.00
CA08104001E

Power Quality
September 2011
Sheet 01 074
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Quality Terms Technical Overview

Introduction
Sensitive electronic loads deployed today by users require strict requirements for the quality of power delivered to loads. For electronic equipment, power disturbances are dened in terms of amplitude and duration by the electronic equipment operating envelope. Electronic loads may be damaged and disrupted, with shortened life expectancy, by disturbances. The proliferation of computers, variable frequency motor drives, UPS systems and other electronically controlled equipment is placing a greater demand on power producers for a disturbancefree source of power. Not only do these types of equipment require quality power for proper operation; many times, these types of equipment are also the sources of power disturbances that corrupt the quality of power in a given facility. Power quality is dened according to IEEE Standard 1100 as the concept of powering and grounding electronic equipment in a manner that is suitable to the operation of that equipment. IEEE Standard 1159 notes that within the industry, alternate denitions or interpretations of power quality have been used, reecting different points of view. In addressing power quality problems at an existing site, or in the design stages of a new building, engineers need to specify different services or mitigating technologies. The lowest cost and highest value solution is to selectively apply a combination of different products and services as follows: Key services/technologies in the power quality industry:

Dening the Problem

Power quality problems can be resolved in three ways: by reducing the variations in the power supply (power disturbances), by improving the load equipments tolerance to those variations, or by inserting some interface equipment (known as power conditioning equipment) between the electrical supply and the sensitive load(s) to improve the compatibility of the two. Practicality and cost usually determine the extent to which each option is used. Many methods are used to dene power quality problems. For example, one option is a thorough on-site investigation, which includes inspecting wiring and grounding for errors, monitoring the power supply for power disturbances, investigating equipment sensitivity to power disturbances, and determining the load disruption and consequential effects (costs), if any. In this way, the power quality problem can be dened, alternative solutions developed, and optimal solution chosen. Before applying power-conditioning equipment to solve power quality problems, the site should be checked for wiring and grounding problems. Sometimes, correcting a relatively inexpensive wiring error, such as a loose connection or a reversed neutral and ground wire, can avoid a more expensive power conditioning solution.
Another option is to buy power conditioning equipment to correct any and all perceived power quality problems without any on-site investigation.
Power Quality Terms

Power disturbance: Any deviation from the nominal value (or from some selected thresholds based on load tolerance) of the input AC power characteristics. Total harmonic distortion or distortion factor: The ratio of the root-meansquare of the harmonic content to the root-mean-square of the fundamental quantity, expressed as a percentage of the fundamental. Crest factor: Ratio between the peak value (crest) and rms value of a periodic waveform. Apparent (total) power factor: The ratio of the total power input in watts to the total volt-ampere input. Sag: An rms reduction in the AC voltage, at the power frequency, for the duration from a half-cycle to a few seconds. An undervoltage would have a duration greater than several seconds. Interruption: The complete loss of voltage for a time period. Transient: A sub-cycle disturbance in the AC waveform that is evidenced by a sharp brief discontinuity of the waveform. May be of either polarity and may be additive to or subtractive from the nominal waveform. Surge or impulse: See transient. Noise: Unwanted electrical signals that produce undesirable effects in the circuits of control systems in which they occur. Common-mode noise: The noise voltage that appears equally and in phase from each current-carrying conductor to ground. Normal-mode noise: Noise signals measurable between or among active circuit conductors feeding the subject load, but not between the equipment grounding conductor or associated signal reference structure and the active circuit conductors.
Power quality surveys, analysis and studies Power monitoring Grounding products and services Surge protection Voltage regulation Harmonic solutions Lightning protection (ground rods, hardware, etc.) Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or motor-generator (M-G) set
Sometimes this approach is not practical because of limitations in time; expense is not justied for smaller installations; monitoring for power disturbances may be needed over an extended period of time to capture infrequent disturbances; the exact sensitivities of the load equipment may be unknown and difcult to determine; and nally, the investigative approach tends to solve only observed problems. Thus unobserved or potential problems may not be considered in the solution. For instance, when planning a new facility, there is no site to investigate. Therefore, power quality solutions are often implemented to solve potential or perceived problems on a preventive basis instead of a thorough on-site investigation.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 075

Power Quality
1.4-19
Methodology for Ensuring Effective Power Quality to Electronic Loads

The power quality pyramid is an effective guide for addressing power quality problems at an existing facility. The framework is also effective for specifying engineers who are designing a new facility. Power quality starts with grounding (the base of the pyramid) and then moves upward to address the potential issues. This simple, yet proven methodology, will provide the most cost-effective approach. As we move higher up the pyramid, the cost per kVA of mitigating potential problems increase and the quality of the power increases (refer to Figure 1.4-11).
The proliferation of communication and computer network systems has increased the need for proper grounding and wiring of AC and data/ communication lines. In addition to reviewing AC grounding and bonding practices, it is necessary to prevent ground loops from affecting the signal reference point.
The benet of implementing cascaded network protection is shown in Figure 1.4-12. Combined, the two stages of protection at the service entrance and branch panel locations reduce the IEEE 62.41 recommended test wave (C320 kV, 10 kA) to less than 200V voltage, a harmless disturbance level for 120V rated sensitive loads. If only building entrance feeder protection were provided, the letthrough voltage will be approximately 950V in a 277/480V system exposed to induced lightning surges. This level of let-through voltage can cause degradation or physical damage of most electronic loads. Wherever possible, consultants, speciers and application engineers should ensure similar loads are fed from the same source. In this way, disturbance-generating loads are separated from electronic circuits affected by power disturbances. For example, motor loads, HVAC systems and other linear loads should be separated from the sensitive process control and computer systems. The most effective and economic solution for protecting a large number of loads is to install parallel SPDs at the building service entrance feeder and panelboard locations. This reduces the cost of protection for multiple sensitive loads.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. Surge Protection
Surge protection devices (SPDs) are recommended as the next stage power quality solutions. NFPA, UL 96A, IEEE Emerald Book and equipment manufacturers recommend the use of surge protectors. The SPD shunt short duration voltage disturbances to ground, thereby preventing the surge from affecting electronic loads. When installed as part of the facility-wide design, SPDs are cost-effective compared to all other solutions (on a $/kVA basis). The IEEE Emerald Book recommends the use of a two-stage protection concept. For large surge currents, diversion is best accomplished in two stages: the rst diversion should be performed at the service entrance to the building. Then, any residual voltage resulting from the action can be dealt with by a second protective device at the power panel of the computer room (or other critical loads).
Cost Per kVA 5. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS, Gen. Sets, etc.) 4. Harmonic Distortion 3. Voltage Regulation 2. Surge Protection 1. Grounding
Figure 1.4-11. Power Quality Pyramid
1. Grounding
Grounding represents the foundation of a reliable power distribution system. Grounding and wiring problems can be the cause of up to 80% of all power quality problems. All other forms of power quality solutions are dependent upon good grounding procedures.
SPD
CP
SPD
PEAK VOLTAGE
480V
120/208V
20,000V
Inputhigh energy transient disturbance; IEEE Category C3 Impulse 20,000V; 10,000A
13 14 15
Stage 1 Protection (Service Entrance)
Computer or Sensitive Loads
Stage 2 Protection (Branch Location)
Best achievable performance with single SPD at main panel (950V, at Stage 1)
800V 400V 0
System Test Parameters: IEEE C62.41[10] and C62.45 [10] test procedures using category; 480V main entrance panels; 100 ft (30m) of three-phase wire; 480/208V distribution transformer; and 208V branch panel.
= SPD
25 uS 50 uS TIME (MICROSECONDS)
16 17 18 19 20 21
Two stage (cascade approach) achieves best possible protection (less than 200V at Stage 2)
Figure 1.4-12. Cascaded Network Protection
CA08104001E

Power Quality
The recommended system approach for installing SPDs is summarized in Figure 1.4-13.
1. Identify Critical Loads 2. Identify Non-Critical Loads
September 2011
Sheet 01 076
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3. Identify Noise and Disturbance Generating Loads 4. Review Internal Power Distribution Layout 5. Identify Facility Exposure to Expected Levels of Disturbance 6. Apply Mitigating Equipment to: a) Service Entrance Main Panels b) Key Sub-Panels c) Critical Loads d) Data and Communication Lines
Building entrance SPDs protect the facility against large external transients, including lightning SPDs are bi-directional and prevent transient and noise disturbances from feeding back within a system when installed at distribution or branch panels Two levels of protection safeguard sensitive loads from physical damage or operational upset
tion wires, the area between wires is reduced and the mutual inductance affect minimized.
Side-Mounted SPD vs. Integral SPD

Directly connecting the surge suppresser to the bus bar of electrical distribution equipment results in the best possible level of protection. Compared to side-mounted devices, connecting the SPD unit to the bus bar eliminates the need for lead wires and reduces the let-through voltage up to 50% (see Figure 1.4-14). Given that surges are high frequency disturbances, the inductance of the installation wiring increases the let-through voltage of the protective device. Figure 1.4-15 shows that for every inch of lead length, the let-through voltage is increased by an additional 1525V above the manufacturers stated suppression performance. Lead length has the greatest effect on the actual level of protection realized. Twisting of the installation wires is the second most important installation consideration. By twisting the installa-
Increasing the diameter of the installation wires is of negligible benet. Inductance is a skin effect phenomenon and a function of wire circumference. Since only a marginal reduction in inductance is achieved when the diameter of the installation conductors is increased, the use of large diameter wire results in only minimal improvement (see Figure 1.4-15).
Further benets provided by integrated surge suppression designs are the elimination of eld installation costs and the amount of expensive outboard wall space taken up by side-mounted SPD devices.
Building Entrance Feeder Installation Considerations

Installing an SPD device immediately after the switchgear or switchboard main breaker is the optimal location for protecting against external disturbances such as lightning. When placed in this location, the disturbance is intercepted by the SPD and reduced to a minimum before reaching the distribution and/or branch panel(s). The use of a disconnect breaker eliminates the need to de-energize the building entrance feeder equipment should the SPD fail or require isolation for Megger testing.
Figure 1.4-13. System Approach for Installing SPDs
9 10 11 12 13
There may be specic critical loads within a facility that require a higher level of protection. A series SPD is best suited for protecting such loads.
Advantages of the system approach are:
The lowest possible investment in mitigating equipment to protect a facility
208Y/120 Panelboard (integrated versus side mounted SPD) 1000 Side-Mounted SPD Device (assuming 14-inch (355.6 mm) lead length to bus)
14 15 16 17
Let-Through Voltage at Bus Bar
Side-Mounted SPD used for Retrofit Applications
SPD Integrated into Panelboards, Switchboards, MCCs
800 600 400 200 0 200 2.00 Surge Event 0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 Integrated SPD (direct bus bar connection)
SPD SPD
GRO UND
G RO UND
18
\
G N
19
Figure 1.4-14. Performance Comparison of Side-Mounted vs. Integrated SPD
Microseconds
20 21
September 2011
Sheet 01 077

Power Quality
Reference Tab 34 for detailed information on SPDs.
14 AWG 10 AWG 4 AWG
1.4-21
Additional Let-Through Voltage
Additional Let-Through Voltage Using IEEE C1(6000V, 3000A)[3] Waveform (UL 1449 Test Wave)[12]
900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
209V (23%) 673V (75%)
3. Voltage Regulation
Voltage regulation (i.e., sags or overvoltage) disturbances are generally site- or load-dependent. A variety of mitigating solutions are available depending upon the load sensitivity, fault duration/magnitude and the specic problems encountered. It is recommended to install monitoring equipment on the AC power lines to assess the degree and frequency of occurrences of voltage regulation problems. The captured data will allow for the proper solution selection.
3 ft (914.4 mm) Lead Length Loose Wiring Twisted Wires
1 ft (304.8 mm) Lead Length, Twisted Wires
Figure 1.4-15. The Effect of Installation Lead Length on Let-Through Voltage
Additional to UL 1449 ratings.
The size or capacity of a suppressor is measured in surge current per phase. Larger suppressers rated at approximately 250 kA per phase should be installed at the service entrance to survive high-energy surges associated with lightning. A 250 kA per phase surge rating allows for over a 25-year life expectancy assuming an IEEE dened high exposure environment. Lower surge rating devices may be used; however, device reliability and long-term performance may be compromised. For aerial structures, the 99.8 percentile recorded lightning stroke current is less than 220 kA. The magnitude of surges conducted or induced into a facility electrical distribution system is considerably lower given the presence of multiple paths for the surge to travel along. It is for this reason that IEEE C62.41 recommends the C3 (20 kV, 10 kA) test wave for testing SPDs installed at building entrance feeders. SPDs with surge ratings greater than 250 kA are not required, however, higher ratings are available and may provide longer life.
switch is about 5060V. This increase in disturbance voltage can result in process disruption and downtime.
4. Harmonics Distortion
Harmonics and Nonlinear Loads
Until recently, most electrical loads were linear. Linear loads draw the full sine wave of electric current at its 60 cycle (Hz) fundamental frequencyFigure 1.4-16 shows balance single-phase, linear loads. As the gure shows, little or no current ows in the neutral conductor when the loads are nonlinear and balanced. With the arrival of nonlinear electronic loads, where the AC voltage is converted to a DC voltage, harmonics are created because of the use of only part of the AC sine wave. In this conversion from AC to DC, the electronics are turned on in the 60 cycle wave at a given point in time to obtain the required DC level. The use of only part of the sign wave causes harmonics. It is important to note that the current distortion caused by loads such as rectiers or switch mode power supplies causes the voltage distortion. That voltage distortion is caused by distorted currents owing through an impedance. The amount of voltage distortion depends on:

Installing Dataline Surge Protection

Most facilities also have communication lines that are potential sources for external surges. As identied by the power quality pyramid, proper grounding of communication lines is essential for dependable operation. NEC Article 800 states that all data, power and cable lines be grounded and bonded. Power disturbances such as lightning can elevate the ground potential between two communicating pieces of electronic equipment with different ground references. The result is current owing through the data cable, causing component failure, terminal lock-up, data corruption and interference. NFPA 780 D4.8 warns that surge suppression devices should be installed on all wiring entering or leaving electronic equipment, usually power, data or communication wiring. Surge suppressers should be installed at both ends of a data or communication cable. In those situations where one end of the cable is not connected into an electronic circuit (e.g., contactor coil), protection on the electronic end only is required. To prevent the coupling or inducing of power disturbances into communication lines, the following should be avoided: Data cables should not be run over uorescent lighting xtures Data cables should not be in the vicinity of electric motors The right category cable should be used to ensure transmission performance Data cables must be grounded at both ends when communicating between buildings
Installing Panelboard Surge Protection Devices

Smaller surge capacity SPDs (120 kA per phase) are installed at branch panelboards where power disturbances are of lower energy, but occur much more frequently. This level of surge current rating should result in a greater than 25-year life expectancy. When isolated ground systems are used, the SPD should be installed such that any common mode surges are shunted to the safety ground. The use of a disconnect breaker is optional. The additional let-through voltage resulting from the increased inductance caused by the disconnect
System impedance Amount of distorted current
Devices that can cause harmonic disturbances include rectiers, thrusters and switching power supplies, all of which are nonlinear. Further, the proliferation of electronic equipment such as computers, UPS systems, variable speed drives, programmable logic controllers, and the like: nonlinear loads have become a signicant part of many installations. Other types of harmonic-producing loads include arcing devices (arc furnaces, uorescent lights) and iron core storable devices (transformers, especially during energization).
CA08104001E

Power Quality
Nonlinear load currents vary widely from a sinusoidal wave shape; often they are discontinuous pulses. This means that nonlinear loads are extremely high in harmonic content. Triplen harmonics are the 3rd, 9th, 15th,...harmonics. Further, triplen harmonics are the most damaging to an electrical system because these harmonics on the A-phase, B-phase and C-phase are in sequence with each other. Meaning, the triplen harmonics present on the three phases add together in the neutral, as shown in Figure 1.4-17, rather than cancel each other out, as shown in Figure 1.4-16. Odd non-triplen harmonics are classied as positive sequence or negative sequence and are the 1st, 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc. In general, as the order of a harmonic gets higher, its amplitude becomes smaller as a percentage of the fundamental frequency.
September 2011
Sheet 01 078
i ii 1 2 3
Harmonic Issues
Harmonic currents perform no work and result in wasted electrical energy that may over burden the distribution system. This electrical overloading may contribute to preventing an existing electrical distribution system from serving additional future loads. In general, harmonics present on a distribution system can have the following detrimental effects: 1. Overheating of transformers and rotating equipment.
60 Hz Fundamental
4
A Phase
2. Increased hysteresis losses. 3. Decreased kVA capacity. 4. Overloading of neutral. 5. Unacceptable neutral-to-ground voltages.
5 6 7 8
120 Lagging 120 Lagging
B Phase
6. Distorted voltage and current waveforms. 7. Failed capacitor banks. 8. Breakers and fuses tripping. 9. Double or ever triple sized neutrals to defy the negative effects of triplen harmonics. In transformers, generators and uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) systems, harmonics cause overheating and failure at loads below their ratings because the harmonic currents cause greater heating than standard 60 Hz current. This results from increased eddy current losses, hysteresis losses in the iron cores, and conductor skin effects of the windings. In addition, the harmonic currents acting on the impedance of the source cause harmonics in the source voltage, which is then applied to other loads such as motors, causing them to overheat. The harmonics also complicate the application of capacitors for power factor correction. If, at a given harmonic frequency, the capacitive impedance equals the system reactive impedance, the harmonic voltage and current can reach dangerous magnitudes. At the same time, the harmonics create problems in the application of power factor correction capacitors, they lower the actual power factor. The rotating meters used by the utilities for watthour and various measurements do not detect the distortion component caused by the harmonics. Rectiers with diode front ends and large DC side capacitor banks have displacement power factor of 90% to 95%. More recent electronic meters are capable of metering the true kVA hours taken by the circuit.
CA08104001E
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
120 Lagging 120 Lagging B Phase
C Phase
Balance Neutral Current
Figure 1.4-16. Balanced Neutral Current Equals Zero
60 Hz Fundamental 3rd Harmonic A Phase
C Phase
Neutral Triplen Current
20 21
Phase Triplen Harmonics Added in the Neutral
Figure 1.4-17. Unbalanced Single-Phase Loads with Triplen Harmonics

September 2011
Sheet 01 079

Power Quality
1.4-23
Single-phase power supplies for computer and xture ballasts are rich in third harmonics and their odd multiples. Even with the phase currents perfectly balanced, the harmonic currents in the neutral can total 173% of the phase current. This has resulted in overheated neutrals. The Information Technology Industry Council (ITIC) formerly known as CBEMA, recommends that neutrals in the supply to electronic equipment be oversized to at least 173% of the ampacity of the phase conductors to prevent problems. ITIC also recommends derating transformers, loading them to no more than 50% to 70% of their nameplate kVA, based on a rule-ofthumb calculation, to compensate for harmonic heating effects. In spite of all the concerns they cause, nonlinear loads will continue to increase. Therefore, the design of nonlinear loads and the systems that supply them will have to be designed so that their adverse effects are greatly reduced. Table 1.4-4 shows the typical harmonic orders from a variety of harmonic generating sources. Table 1.4-4. Source and Typical Harmonics
Source 6-pulse rectier 12-pulse rectier 18-pulse rectier Switch-mode power supply Fluorescent lights Arcing devices Transformer energization
Total Harmonic Distortion

Revised standard IEEE 519-1992 indicates the limits of current distortion allowed at the PCC (Point of Common Coupling) point on the system where the current distortion is calculated, usually the point of connection to the utility or the main supply bus of the system. The standard also covers the harmonic limits of the supply voltage from the utility or cogenerators. Table 1.4-5. Low Voltage System Classication and Distortion Limits for 480V Systems
Class Special application General system Dedicated system
Table 1.4-7. Current Distortion Limits for General Distribution Systems (120 69,000V)
Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in Percent of IL Individual Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics) ISC /IL <11 11 17 23 35 TDD <h <h <h <h <17 <23 <35 2.0 3.5 4.5 5.5 7.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.4 5.0 8.0 12.0 15.0 20.0
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
<20 20<50 50<100 100<1000 >1000
4.0 7.0 10.0 12.0 15.0
C 10 5 2
AN 16,400 22,800 36,500
DF 3% 5% 10%
All power generation equipment is limited to these values of current distortion, regardless of actual ISC/IL where: ISC = Maximum short-circuit current at PCC. IL = Maximum demand load current (fundamental frequency component) at PCC.
Special systems are those where the rate of change of voltage of the notch might mistrigger an event. AN is a measurement of notch characteristics measured in volt-microseconds, C is the impedance ratio of total impedance to impedance at common point in system. DF is distortion factor.
TDD = Total Demand Distortion. Even harmonics are limited to 25% of the odd harmonic limits above. Current distortions that result in a DC offset, e.g., half-wave converters, are not allowed.
Harmonic Solutions
In spite of all the concerns nonlinear loads cause, these loads will continue to increase. Therefore, the design of nonlinear loads and the systems that supply them will need design so adverse harmonic effects are greatly reduced. Table 1.4-8 and depicts many harmonic solutions along with their advantages and disadvantages. Eatons Engineering Services & Systems Group (EESS) can perform harmonic studies and recommend solutions for harmonic problems.
Table 1.4-6. Utility or Cogenerator Supply Voltage Harmonic Limits

Voltage Range Maximum individual harmonic Total harmonic distortion 2.369 kV 69138 kV >138 kV 3.0% 1.5% 1.0%
Typical Harmonics 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19 11, 13, 23, 25 17, 19, 35, 37 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 2, 3, 4
5.0%
2.5%
1.5%
Vh x 100 for each Percentages are V1 harmonic and h = hmax Vthd =

1/2 2 Vh
Generally, magnitude decreases as harmonic order increases.
h=2 It is important for the system designer to know the harmonic content of the utilitys supply voltage because it will affect the harmonic distortion of the system.
CA08104001E

Power Quality
Table 1.4-8. Harmonic Solutions for Given Loads
Load Type Drives and rectiers includes three-phase UPS loads Solutions Line reactors Advantages
Inexpensive For 6-pulse standard drive/rectier, can
September 2011
Sheet 01 080
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Disadvantages
May require additional compensation
reduce harmonic current distortion from 80% down to about 3540% K-rated/drive isolation transformer DC choke 12-pulse convertor
Offers series reactance (similar to line No advantage over reactors for
reactors) and provides isolation for some transients

Slightly better than AC line reactors
reducing harmonics unless in pairs for shifting phases

Not always an option for drives Less protection for input semiconductors Cost difference approaches 18-pulse drive
for 5th and 7th harmonics

85% reduction versus standard
6-pulse drives Harmonic mitigating transformers/phase shifting Tuned lters

Substantial (5080%) reduction in harmonics
and blocking lters, which guarantee IEEE 519 compliance

Harmonic cancellation highly dependent
when used in tandem

Bus connectedaccommodates
on load balance
Must have even multiples of matched loads Requires allocation analysis Sized only to the requirements of that system;
load diversity Provides PF correction Broadband lters 18-pulse converter

Makes 6-pulse into the equivalent
must be resized if system changes

Higher cost Requires one lter per drive High cost
of 18-pulse
Excellent harmonic control for drives
above 100 hp IEEE 519 compliant Active lters

Handles load/harmonic diversity Complete solution up to 50th harmonic Eliminates the 3rd harmonic from load Relieves system capacity Possible energy savings 3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load When used as phase-shifted transformers, High cost High cost May increase voltage distortion Requires fully rated circuits and
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Computers/ switch-mode power supplies
Neutral blocking lter
Harmonic mitigating transformers
oversized neutrals to the loads
reduces other harmonics Reduces voltage at-topping Oversized neutral/derated transformer K-rated transformer Fluorescent lighting Harmonic mitigating transformers
Tolerate harmonics rather than correct Typically least expensive Tolerate harmonics rather than correct 3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load When used as phase-shifted transformers, Upstream and downstream equipment
fully rated for harmonics

Does not reduce system harmonics Requires fully rated circuits and
oversized neutrals to the loads
reduces other harmonics Reduces voltage at-topping K-rated transformer Low distortion ballasts Welding/arcing loads Active lters
Tolerate harmonics rather than correct them Reduce harmonics at the source Fast response and broadband Does not reduce system harmonics Additional cost and typically more
expensive than system solutions

High cost
harmonic correction
Reduces voltage icker
Tuned lters System solutions Tuned lters Harmonic mitigating transformers Active lters
SCR controlled tuned lters simulates
SCR controlled units are high cost
an active lter response

Provides PF correction Lower cost compared to other systems Excellent choice for new design or upgrade Ideal solution and handles system diversity
but xed lters are reasonable

System analysis required to verify application.
Must be resized if system changes

No PF correction benet Highest cost
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 081
Power Distribution Systems Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)
1.4-25
5. Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)

The advent of solid-state semiconductors over 40 years ago, and their subsequent evolution to transistors, and the miniaturization of electronics into microprocessor over 25 years ago, has created numerous computation machines that assist us in every conceivable manner. These machines, and their clever congurations, whether they take the form of computers, appliance controls, fax machines, phone systems, computers of all sizes, server systems and server farms, emergency call centers, data processing at banks, credit companies, private company communication networks, government institutions and defense agencies, all rely on a narrow range of nominal AC power in order for these devices to work properly. Indeed, many other types of equipment also require that the AC electrical power source be at or close to nominal voltage and frequency. Disturbances of the power translate into failed processes, lost data, decreased efciency and lost revenue.
The normal power source supplied by the local utility or provider is not stable enough over time to continuously serve these loads without interruption. It is possible that a facility outside a major metropolitan area served by the utility grid will experience outages of some nature 1520 times in one year. Certain outages are caused by the weather, and others by the failure of the utility supply system due to equipment failures or construction interruptions. Some outages are only several cycles in duration, while others may be for hours at a time. In a broader sense, other problems exist in the area of power quality, and many of those issues also contribute to the failure of the supply to provide that narrow range of power to the sensitive loads mentioned above. Power quality problems take the form of any of the following: power failure, power sag, power surge, undervoltage, overvoltage, line noise, frequency variations, switching transients and harmonic distortion. Regardless of the reason for outages and power quality problems, the sensitive loads can not function normally without a backup power source, and in many cases, the loads must be isolated from the instabilities of the utility supply and power quality problems and given clean reliable power on a continuous basis, or be able to switch over to reliable clean electrical power quickly.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systems have evolved to serve the needs of sensitive equipment and can supply a stable source of electrical power, or switch to backup to allow for an orderly shutdown of the loads without appreciable loss of data or process. In the early days of mainframe computers, motor-generator sets provide isolation and clean power to the computers. They did not have deep reserves, but provided extensive ride-through capability while other sources of power (usually standby emergency engine generator sets) were brought to serve the motor-generator sets while the normal source of power was unstable or unavailable. UPS systems have evolved along the lines of rotary types and static types of systems, and they come in many congurations, and even hybrid designs having characteristics of both types. The discussion that follows attempts to compare and contrast the two types of UPS systems, and give basic guidance on selection criteria. This discussion will focus on the medium, large and very large UPS systems required by users who need more than 10 kVA of clean reliable power.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
1.4-26 Power Distribution Systems Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)
September 2011
Sheet 01 082
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Power Ratings of UPS Systems

Small UPS: Typically 300 VA to 10 kVA, and sometimes as high as 18 kVA Medium UPS: 1060 kVA Large UPS: 100200 kVA units, and higher when units are paralleled Very Large UPS: 200750 kVA units, and higher when units are paralleled
Each of these categories is arbitrary because manufacturers have many different UPS offerings for the same application. The choice of UPS type and the conguration of UPS modules for a given application depends upon many factors, including how many power quality problems the UPS is expected to solve; how much future capacity is to be purchased now for future loads; the nature of the sensitive loads and load wiring; which type of UPS system is favored, rotary or static; choices of battery or DC storage technology considered; and a host of other application issues.
types of hybrid UPS systems are not the focus of this discussion, because only one or two vendors offer these hybrid types of rotary UPS systems, although admittedly they continue to be used in very large-scale data center applications. See Figure 1.4-18 for the modern high speed Rotary UPS systems discussed in this section of the guide. These types of modern rotary UPS systems are advanced, integrated designs using scalable congurations of high-speed ywheel, motor and generator in one compact UPS package. The new rotary technologies have the potential to replace battery backup systems, or at least reduce the battery content for certain applications. The appeal of rotary systems is the avoidance of the purchase, maintenance and facility space required by DC battery based backup systems.
High-Speed Rotary Concept of Operation

The modern rotary type of UPS operation is understood by reviewing the four topics below: startup mode, normal operation mode, discharge mode and recharge mode.
system checks are performed then the input contactor is closed. The static disconnect switch is turned on and the conduction angle is rapidly increased from zero to an angle that causes the DC bus voltage between the utility converter and the ywheel converter to reach approximately 650V through the rectifying action of the freewheeling diodes in the utility converter. As soon as this level of DC voltage is reached, the static disconnect turns on fully. The next steps involved the utility converter IGBTs to start ring, which allows the converter to act as a rectier, a regulating voltage source and an active harmonic lter. As the IGBTs begin to operate, the DC bus is increased to a normal operating voltage of approximately 800V, and the output bus is transferred from bypass to the output of the power electronics module. The transfer from bypass is completed when the output contactor is closed and the bypass contactor opened in a make-beforebreak manner. The ring of the SCRs in the static disconnect switch is now changed so that each SCR in each phase is only turned on during the half-cycle, which permits real power to ow from the utility supply to the UPS. This ring pattern at the static disconnect switch prevents power from the ywheel from feeding backward into the utility supply and ensures that all of the ywheel energy is available to support the load.
Rotary UPS Systems

Typical Ratings
300900 kVA/720 kW maximum.
Typical Rotary Congurations

Rotary UPS systems are among the oldest working systems developed to protect sensitive loads. Many of these systems are complicated enginegenerator sets coupled with high inertial ywheels operated at relatively low rotational speeds. These legacy
Startup Mode
The UPS output is energized on bypass as soon as power is applied from the source to the system input. The UPS continues the startup procedure automatically when the front panel controls are placed into the Online position. Internal UPS
Static Bypass Option
It = Input Current Ir = Real Load Current Ic = Charging Current Ig = Voltage Regulation Current Bypass Contactor It = Ir + Ic + Ig Id = Ih + Ix + Ir Line Inductor Output Contactor Load Flywheel Converter Ix Utility Converter Ic Inverter Fuse Ig Output Transformer Id = Output Current Ih = Harmonic Current Ix = Reactive Load Current Ir = Real Load Current
16 17 18 19 20 21
Input Contactor
Static Disconnect Switch
Source
Field Coil Driver
ac dc Ih
dc ac
Filter Inductor
Integrated Motor/Flywheel/ and Generator
Figure 1.4-18. Typical-High Speed Modern Rotary UPS
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 083
1.4-27
Immediately after the output is transferred from bypass to the power electronic module, the ywheel eld is excited, which also provides magnetic lift to unload the ywheel bearings. The ywheel inverter is turned on and gradually increases frequency at a constant rate to accelerate the ywheel to approximately 60 rpm. Once the ywheel reaches 60 rpm, the ywheel inverter controls the acceleration to keep currents below the maximum charging and the maximum input settings. Once the ywheel reaches 4000 rpm, the UPS is fully functional and capable of supporting the load during a power quality event. ywheel acceleration continues until the Flywheel reaches full charge at 7700 rpm. The total time to complete startup is less than 5 minutes.
causes a voltage boost across the line inductor, and a lagging current causes a bucking voltage. By controlling the utility converter to maintain nominal output voltage, just enough reactive current ows through the line inductor to make up the difference between the input voltage and the output voltage. The load current consists of three components: the harmonic current required by the load, the reactive load current, and the real current, which does the work. The utility converter supplies both the harmonic and reactive currents. Because these currents supply no net power to the load, the ywheel supplies no energy for these currents. They circulate between the utility converter and the load. The power stage controls analyze the harmonic current requirements of the load and set the ring angle of the inverter IGBTs to make the utility converter a very low impedance source to any harmonic currents. Thus, nonlinear load currents are supplied almost entirely from the utility converter with little effect on the quality of the UPS output voltage waveform and with almost no transmission of load harmonics currents to the input of the UPS.
as the load power is completely transferred to the input source, the utility converter and ywheel converter start to recharge the ywheel and return to normal operation mode. The ywheel recharge power is programmable between a slow and fast rate, and using the fast rate results in an increase of UPS input current over nominal levels. Recharging the ywheel is accomplished by controlling the utility and ywheel converter in a similar manner as is used to maintain full charge in the normal operation mode, however the IGBT gating points are changed to increase current into the ywheel.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
High-Speed Rotary Advantages

Normal Operation Mode

Once the UPS is started and the ywheel is operating at greater than 4000 rpm, the UPS is in the normal operating mode where it is regulating output voltage and supplying reactive and harmonic currents required by the load. At the same time it cancels the effect of load current harmonics on the UPS output voltage. Input current consists of three components: real load current, charging current, and voltage regulation current. Real current is current that is in phase with the supply voltage and supplies real power to the load. Real current owing through the line inductor causes a slight phase shift of the current lagging the voltage by 10 degrees and ensures that the UPS can quickly transfer to bypass without causing unacceptable switching transients. The second component is charging current required by the ywheel to keep the rotating mass fully charged at rated rpm, or to recharge the rotating mass after a discharge. The power to maintain full charge is low at 2 kW and is accomplished by the IGBTs of the ywheel converter gating to provide small pulses of motoring current to the ywheel. This current can be much higher if fast recharge times are selected. The nal component of input current is the voltage regulation current, which is usually a reactive current that circulates between the input and the utility converter to regulate the output voltage. Leading reactive current
Discharge Mode
The UPS senses the deviation of the voltage or frequency beyond programmed tolerances and quickly disconnects the supply source by turning off the static disconnect switch and opening the input contactor. The disconnect occurs in less than one-half cycle. Then the utility converter starts delivering power from the DC bus to the load, and the ywheel converter changes the ring point of its IGBTs to deliver power to the DC bus. The UPS maintains a clean output voltage within 3% or nominal voltage to the load when input power is lost.
Addresses all power quality problems Battery systems are not required or used No battery maintenance required Unlimited discharge cycles 150-second recharge time available Wide range of operating temperatures can be accommodated (20 to 40C) Small compact size and less oor space required (500 kW systems takes 20 sq ft) N+1 reliability available up to 900 kVA maximum No disposal issues Flywheel does not have deep reserve capacityrides through for up to 13 seconds at 100% load Some enhanced ywheel systems may extend the ride through to 30 seconds at 100% load Mechanical ywheel maintenance required every 23 years, and oil changes required every year Recharge fast rates require the input to be sized for 125% of nominal current Flywheels failures in eld not understood Requires vacuum pumps for high-speed ywheels Limited number of vendors and experience
High-Speed Rotary Disadvantages
Recharge Mode
When input power is restored to acceptable limits, the UPS synchronizes the output and input voltages, closes the input contactor and turns on the static disconnect switch. The utility converter then transfers power from the ywheel to the input source by linearly increasing the real input current. The transfer time is programmable from 1 to 15 seconds. As soon

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 084
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Static UPS Systems

Typical Ratings
40750 kVA/600 kW, and higher when multiple units are paralleled.
2. The Rectier/Charger function converts the normal AC power to DC power to charge the battery and power the inverter. The load is isolated from the normal input source. 3. The battery stores DC energy for use when input power to the UPS fails. The amount of power available from the DC battery system and time to discharge voltage is a function of the type of battery selected and the amperehour sized used. Battery systems should be sized for no less than 5 minutes of clean power usage from a fully charged state, and, in many cases, are sized to provide more time on battery power. 4. The DC link connects the output of the rectier/charger to the input of the inverter and to the battery. Typically the rectier/charger is sized slightly higher than 100% of UPS output because it must power the inverter and supply charger power to the battery.
Typical Static UPS Congurations

Static UPS systems modules are available in three basic types of congurations known as standby, line interactive and double conversion. See Tab 33 in this guide for details on all the UPS congurations available from Eaton. The lighter power ratings are likely to be one of the rst two types of congurations, e.g., standby or line interactive. Most medium or large static UPS installations use the double conversion technology in one or multiple module congurations, i.e., or multiple UPS units in parallel. Figure 1.4-19 illustrates the one-line diagram of a simple single Double Conversion UPS module. Brief explanations appear for the standby and line interactive UPS systems after the text explaining the Double Conversion static UPS type of system. A. Double conversion concept of operationthe basic operation of the Double Conversion UPS is: 1. Normal power is connected to the UPS input through the facility electrical distribution system. This usually involves two input circuits that must come from the same source.
mode in 150120 milliseconds. When the UPS recognizes a requirement to transfer to the bypass mode, it simultaneously turns the static switch ON, the output breaker to OPEN, and the bypass breaker to CLOSE. The output breaker opens and the bypass breaker closes in about 50 milliseconds. The restoration of normal conditions at the UPS results in the automatic restoration of the UPS module powering the load through the rectier/charger and inverter with load isolation from power quality problems, and the opening of the bypass circuit.
Static Double Conversion Advantages

5. The bypass circuit provides a path for unregulated normal power to be routed around the major electronic sub-assemblies of the UPS to the load so that the load can continue to operate during maintenance, or when the UPS electronics fails. The bypass static switch can switch to conducting
Addresses all power quality problems Suitable for applications from 5 kVA to over 2500 kVA Simple battery systems are sized for application Long battery backup times and long life batteries are available Higher reliability is available using redundant UPS modules
Bypass Breaker (Optional)
UPS Module
13
Bypass Static Switch
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Source Normal Rectifier/Charger Breaker AC DC Inverter DC AC Battery Breaker Battery Output Breaker
Load
Figure 1.4-19. Typical Static UPS, Double Conversion Type with Battery Backup
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 085
1.4-29
Static Double Conversion Disadvantages

Battery systems, battery maintenance and battery replacement are required Large space requirement for battery systems (higher life takes more space, e.g., 500 kW takes 80200 sq ft depending upon the type of battery used, VRLA 10 year, VRLA 20 year or ooded) Limited discharge cycles of battery system Narrow temperature range for application Efciencies are in the 9094% range, which is lower than some line interactive congurations Bypass mode places load at risk unless bypass has UPS backup Redundancy of UPS modules results in higher costs Output faults are cleared by the bypass circuit Output rating of the UPS is 150% for 30 seconds Battery disposal and safety issues exist
3. The battery stores DC energy for use by the inverter when input power to the UPS fails. The amount of power available from the DC battery system and time to discharge voltage is a function of the type of battery selected and the ampere-hour sized used. Battery systems should be sized for the anticipated outage. 4. The DC link connects the output of the rectier/charger to the input of the inverter and to the battery. Typically the rectier/charger is sized only to supply charger power to the battery, and is rated far lower than in the double conversion UPS. 5. The bypass circuit provides a direct connection of input source to the load. The load operates from unregulated power. The bypass static switch can switch to non-conducting mode in 150 120 milliseconds. When the UPS recognizes the loss of normal input power, it transfers to battery/ inverter mode by simultaneously turning the Inverter ON and the static switch OFF.
C. Static line interactive UPS concept of operationthe basic operation of the Line Interactive UPS is: 1. The Line Interactive type of UPS has a different topology than the static double conversion and standby systems. The normal input power is connected to the load in parallel with a battery and bi-directional inverter/charger assembly. The input source usually terminates at a line inductor and the output of the inductor is connected to the load in parallel with the battery and inverter/ charger circuit. See Figure 1.4-21 for more details. 2. The traditional rectier circuit is eliminated and this results in a smaller footprint and weight reduction. However, line conditioning is compromised. 3. When the input power fails, the battery/inverter charger circuit reverses power and supplies the load with regulated power.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B. Standby UPS concept of operationThe basic operation of the Standby UPS is: 1. The Standby UPS topology is similar to the double conversion type, but the operation of the UPS is different in signicant ways. Normal power is connected to the UPS input through the facility electrical distribution system. This usually involves two input circuits that must come from the same source. See Figure 1.4-20 for details. 2. The rectier/charger function converts the normal AC power to DC power to charge the battery only, and does not simultaneously power the inverter. The load is connected to the input source through the bypass static switch. The inverter is in the standby mode ready to serve the load from battery power if the input power source fails.
Static Line Interactive UPS Advantages

Slight improvement of power conditioning over standby UPS systems Small footprints and weights Efcient design Batteries are sized for the application
Static Standby UPS Advantages

Lower costs than double conversion Rectier and charger are economically sized Efcient design Batteries are sized for the application

Static Line Interactive UPS Disadvantages

Static Standby UPS Disadvantages

Impractical over 2 kVA Little to no isolation of load from power quality disturbances Standby power is from battery alone Battery systems, battery maintenance and battery replacement are required Limited discharge cycles of battery system Narrow temperature range for application Output faults are cleared by the bypass circuit Battery disposal and safety issues exist
Impractical over 5 kVA Not as good conditioning as double conversion Standby power is from battery alone Battery systems, battery maintenance and battery replacement are required Limited discharge cycles for the battery system Narrow temperature range for application Battery disposal and safety issues exist
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 086
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Battery Source Inductor Battery Source Normal Breaker Rectifier/ Charger AC DC Battery Breaker Bypass Static Switch
UPS Module
Load Inverter DC AC Output Breaker
Figure 1.4-20. Typical Static UPS, Standby Type with Battery Backup
UPS Module
Load
Bidirectional Inverter/Charger DC AC
Figure 1.4-21. Typical Static UPS, Line Interactive Type with Battery Backup
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 087

Other Application Considerations
1.4-31
Secondary Voltage Selection

The choice between 208Y/120V and 480Y/277V secondary distribution for commercial and institutional buildings depends on several factors. The most important of these are size and types of loads (motors, uorescent lighting, incandescent lighting, receptacles) and length of feeders. In general, large motor and uorescent lighting loads, and long feeders, will tend to make the higher voltages, such as 480Y/277V, more economical. Very large loads and long runs would indicate the use of medium voltage distribution and loadcenter unit substations close to the loads. Conversely, small loads, short runs and a high percentage of incandescent lighting would favor lower utilization voltages such as 208Y/120V. Industrial installations, with large motor loads, are almost always 480V, often ungrounded delta or resistance grounded delta or wye systems (see section on ground fault protection).
Technical Factors
The principal advantage of the use of higher secondary voltages in buildings is that for a given load, less current means smaller conductors and lower voltage drop. Also, a given conductor size can supply a large load at the same voltage drop in volts, but a lower percentage voltage drop because of the higher supply voltage. Fewer or smaller circuits can be used to transmit the power from the service entrance point to the nal distribution points. Smaller conductors can be used in many branch circuits supplying power loads, and a reduction in the number of lighting branch circuits is usually possible. It is easier to keep voltage drops within acceptable limits on 480V circuits than on 208V circuits. When 120V loads are
supplied from a 480V system through step-down transformers, voltage drop in the 480V supply conductors can be compensated for by the tap adjustments on the transformer, resulting in full 120V output. Because these transformers are usually located close to the 120V loads, secondary voltage drop should not be a problem. If it is, taps may be used to compensate by raising the voltage at the transformer. The interrupting ratings of circuit breakers and fuses at 480V have increased considerably in recent years, and protective devices are now available for any required fault duty at 480V. In addition, many of these protective devices are current limiting, and can be used to protect downstream equipment against these high fault currents.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Elevator Panel
Typical
7 8
Practical Factors
Because most low voltage distribution equipment available is rated for up to 600V, and conductors are insulated for 600V, the installation of 480V systems uses the same techniques and is essentially no more difcult, costly, or hazardous than for 208V systems. The major difference is that an arc of 120V to ground tends to be self-extinguishing, while an arc of 277V to ground tends to be self-sustaining and likely to cause severe damage. For this reason, the National Electrical Code requires ground fault protection of equipment on grounded wye services of more than 150V to ground, but not exceeding 600V phase-to-phase (for practical purpose, 480Y/277V services), for any service disconnecting means rated 1000A or more. The National Electrical Code permits voltage up to 300V to ground on circuits supplying permanently installed electric discharge lamp xtures, provided the luminaires do not have an integral manual switch and are mounted at least 8 ft (2.4m) above the oor. This permits a threephase, four-wire, solidly grounded 480Y/277V system to supply directly all of the uorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting in a building at 277V, as well as motors at 480V.
HVAC Panel
Typical
Emergency Lighting Panel (Typical Every Third Floor)
9 10 11
Elevator Riser
480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V Panel Panel Dry Type Transformer 480-208Y/120 V (Typical Every Floor) HVAC Feeder Busway Riser Emergency Lighting Riser
Typical
12 13 14
Building and Miscellaneous Loads
Typical
Typical
Typical
Typical Spare
Typical
15
Automatic Transfer Switch Gen. CB
4000 A Main CB CTs PTs Utility Metering
16 17 18 19 20 21
Emergency or Standby Generator
Utility Service
4000A at 480Y/277V 100,000A Available Fault Current
Figure 1.4-22. Typical Power Distribution and Riser Diagram for a Commercial Ofce Building
Include ground fault trip.
CA08104001E

Other Application Considerations Economic Factors
Utilization equipment suitable for principal loads in most buildings is available for either 480V or 208V systems. Three-phase motors and their controls can be obtained for either voltage, and for a given horsepower are less costly at 480V. Fluorescent and HID lamps can be used with either 277V or 120V ballasts. However, in almost all cases, the installed equipment will have a lower total cost at the higher voltage. Motors and controls are another cause of wasted energy that can be reduced. New, energy-efcient motor designs are available using more and better core steel, and larger windings. For any motor operating 10 or more hours per day, it is recommended to use the energy-efcient types. These motors have a premium cost of about 20% more than standard motors. Depending on loading, hours of use and the cost of energy, the additional initial cost could be repaid in energy saved within a few months, and it rarely takes more than two years. Because, over the life of a motor, the cost of energy to operate it is many times the cost of the motor itself, any motor with many hours of use should be of the energy-efcient type. Where a motor drives a load with variable output requirements such as a centrifugal pump or a large fan, customary practice has been to run the motor at constant speed, and to throttle the pump output or use inlet vanes or outlet dampers on the fan. This is highly inefcient and wasteful of energy. In recent years, solid-state variablefrequency, variable-speed drives for ordinary induction motors have been available, reliable and relatively inexpensive. Using a variable-speed drive, the throttling valves, inlet vanes or output dampers can be eliminated, saving their initial cost and energy over the life of the system. An additional benet of both energyefcient motors and variable-speed drives (when operated at less than full speed) is that the motors operate at reduced temperatures, resulting in increased motor life. Transformers have inherent losses. Transformers, like motors, are designed for lower losses by using more and better core materials, larger conductors, etc., and this results in increased initial cost. Because the 480V to 208Y/120V stepdown transformers in an ofce building are usually energized 24 hours a day, savings from lower losses can be substantial, and should be considered in all transformer specications. One method of obtaining reduced losses is to specify transformers with 220C insulation systems designed for 150C average winding temperature rise, with no more than 80C (or sometimes 115C) average winding temperature rise at full load. A better method would be to evaluate transformer losses, based on actual loading cycles throughout the day,
September 2011
Sheet 01 088
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
and consider the cost of losses as well as the initial cost of the transformers in purchasing. NEMA standard TP-1 is being adopted by many states and is another method of energy-efcient design. NEMA TP-1 establishes minimum operating efciencies for each distribution transformer size at a loading equal to 35% of the transformer full load kVA. The 35% loading value in the NEMA standard reects eld studies conducted by the U.S. Department of Energy, which showed that dry-type transformers installed in commercial facilities are typically loaded at an average of 35% of their full load capacity over a 24-hour time period. Table 1.4-9 compares losses for both low temperature rise and TP-1 transformers using a 75 kVA design. Table 1.4-9. Load Losses
Temp. Rise C Load Losses in Watts No 25% 35% 50% 75% Full Loss Load Load Load Load Load 360 420 490 480 535 310 620 610 615 480 885 805 730 745 1535 2450 1170 1950 945 1410 1235 2280
Energy Conservation
Because of the greatly increased cost of electrical power, designers must consider the efciency of electrical distribution systems, and design for energy conservation. In the past, especially in commercial buildings, design was for lowest rst cost, because energy was inexpensive. Today, even in the speculative ofce building, operating costs are so high that energy-conserving designs can justify their higher initial cost with a rapid payback and continuing savings. Buildings that must meet LEED certications may require energy-saving designs. There are four major sources of energy conservation in a commercial buildingthe lighting system, the motors and controls, the transformers and the HVAC system. The lighting system must take advantage of the newest equipment and techniques. New light sources, familiar light sources with higher efciencies, solid-state ballasts with dimming controls, use of daylight, environmental design, efcient luminaires, computerized or programmed control, and the like, are some of the methods that can increase the efciency of lighting systems. They add up to providing the necessary amount of light, with the desired color rendition, from the most efcient sources, where and when it is needed, and not providing light where or when it is not necessary. Using the best of techniques, ofce spaces that originally required as much as 3.5W per square foot have been given improved lighting, with less glare and higher visual comfort, using as little as 1.0 to 2.0W per square foot. In an ofce building of 200,000 square feet (60,960m), this could mean a saving of 400 kW, which, at $0.05 per kWh, 250 days per year, 10 hours per day, could save $50,000 per year in energy costs. Obviously, efcient lighting is a necessity.
150 115
80 500 TP-1 150 230
Efciencies above TP-1. Candidates Standard Level (CSL) is a DOE efciency evaluation for transformers. CSL-1 is equivalent to TP-1. Levels are from CSL-1 to CSL-5. CSL-3 is being promoted for higher efciency applications. A NEMA white paper Clarications on the Use of DOE DesignLines 6, 7 and 8 is available from NEMA that elaborates on the matter. HVAC systems have traditionally been very wasteful of energy, often being designed for lowest rst cost. This, too, is changing. For example, reheat systems are being replaced by variable air volume systems, resulting in equal comfort with substantial increases in efciency. While the electrical engineer has little inuence on the design of the HVAC system, he/she can specify that all motors with continuous or long duty cycles are specied as energy-efcient types, and that the variable-air-volume fans do not use inlet vanes or outlet dampers, but are driven by variablespeed drives. Variable-speed drives can often be desirable on centrifugal compressor units as well. Since some of these requirements will be in HVAC specications, it is important for the energy-conscious electrical engineer to work closely with the HVAC engineer at the design stage.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 089

1.4-33
Building Control Systems

In order to obtain the maximum benet from these energy-saving lighting, power and HVAC systems, they must be controlled to perform their functions most efciently. Constant monitoring would be required for manual operation, so some form of automatic control is required. The simplest of these energy-saving controls, often very effective, is a time clock to turn various systems on and off. Where exible control is required, programmable controllers may be used. These range from simple devices, similar to multifunction time clocks, up to full microprocessor-based, fully programmable devices, really small computers. For complete control of all building systems, computers with specialized software can be used. Computers can not only control lighting and HVAC systems, and provide peak demand control, to minimize the cost of energy, but they can perform many other functions. Fire detection and alarm systems can operate through the computer, which can also perform auxiliary functions such as elevator control and building communication in case of re. Building security systems, such as closed-circuit television monitoring, door alarms and intruder sensing, can be performed by the same building computer system. The time clocks, programmable controllers and computers can obtain data from external sensors and control the lighting, motors and other equipment by means of hard wiring-separate wires to and from each piece of equipment. In the more complex systems, this would result in a tremendous number of control wires, so other methods are frequently used. A single pair of wires, with electronic digital multiplexing, can control or obtain data from many different points. Sometimes, coaxial cable is used with advanced signaling equipment. Some systems dispense with control wiring completely, sending and receiving digital signals over the power wiring. The newest systems may use ber-optic cables to carry tremendous quantities of data, free from electromagnetic interference. The method used will depend on the type, number and complexity of functions to be performed.
Because building design and control for maximum energy saving is important and complex, and frequently involves many functions and several systems, it is necessary for the design engineer to make a thorough building and environmental study, and to weigh the costs and advantages of many systems. The result of good design can be economical, efcient operation. Poor design can be wasteful and extremely costly.
Distributed Energy Resources

Distributed energy resources (DER) are increasingly becoming prominent sources of electric power. Distributed energy resources are usually small-tomedium sources of electric generation, either from renewable or non-renewable sources. Sources include:

been changed by the high cost of purchased energy, plus a federal law (Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act, known as PURPA) that requires public utilities to purchase any excess power generated by the cogeneration plant. In many cases, practical commercial cogeneration systems have been built that provide some or all of the electric power required, plus hot water, steam, and sometimes steam absorption-type air conditioning. Such cogeneration systems are now operating successfully in hospitals, shopping centers, high-rise apartment buildings and even commercial ofce buildings. Where a cogeneration system is being considered, the electrical distribution system becomes more complex. The interface with the utility company is critical, requiring careful relaying to protect both the utility and the cogeneration system. Many utilities have stringent requirements that must be incorporated into the system. Proper generator control and protection is necessary, as well. An on-site electrical generating plant tied to an electrical utility, is a sophisticated engineering design. Utilities require that when the protective device at their substation opens that the device connecting a cogenerator to the utility open also. One reason is that most cogenerators are connected to feeders serving other customers. Utilities desire to reclose the feeder after a transient fault is cleared. Reclosing in most cases will damage the cogenerator if it had remained connected to their system. Islanding is another reason why the utility insists on the disconnection of the cogenerator. Islanding is the event that after a fault in the utilitys system is cleared by the operation of the protective devices, a part of the system may continue to be supplied by cogeneration. Such a condition is dangerous to the utilitys operation during restoration work. Major cogenerators are connected to the subtransmission or the transmission system of a utility. Major cogenerators have buy-sell agreements. In such cases, utilities use a trip transfer scheme to trip the cogenerator breaker. Guidelines that are given in ANSI Guide Standard 1001 are a good starting point, but the entire design should be coordinated with the utility.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Photovoltaic (PV) systems (solar systems) Wind Fossil-fueled (diesel, natural gas, landll gas, coal-bed methane) generators (reciprocating engines) Gas-red turbines (natural gas, landll gas, coal-bed methane) Water-powered (hydro) Fuel cells Microturbines Wave power Coal-red boilers
Distributed energy resources may also be termed alternative energy resources.
Prime Power
DER can be used for generating prime power or for cogeneration. Prime power concerns a system that is electrically separated from the electrical grid. Prime power is generated at remote sites where commercial electrical power is not available.
Cogeneration
Cogeneration is another outgrowth of the high cost of energy. Cogeneration is the production of electric power concurrently with the production of steam, hot water and similar energy uses. The electric power can be the main product, and steam or hot water the byproduct, as in most commercial installations, or the steam or hot water can be the most required product, and electric power a byproduct, as in many industrial installations. In some industries, cogeneration has been common practice for many years, but until recently it has not been economically feasible for most commercial installations. This has
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 01 090
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PV System Design Considerations

Successful photovoltaic (PV) design and construction is a complex multidiscipline endeavor. Proper planning includes the site-layout study for maximizing the suns energy harvesting for solar module selection, and for updating the electrical/mechanical design and construction to the latest code and local constraints, including re marshal and seismic regulations. Professionally prepared bid, permit, construction and as-build drawings shall be required and maintained. For installation in/on/for existing structures and sites, it is advised that, at the minimum, pre-design and construction tests be performed for existing power-quality issues, water drainage and the utility feeder/ transformer, and that electrical distribution panel ratings are veried sufcient for the planned solar system, and the necessary arc ash studies be performed. Connection to the utility is always a utility interconnect agreement (application) process, and is typically required for the available solar incentives and programs offered by the utility, municipality, state, and various federal agencies and departments. State, and IRS tax incentives require well-documented records. Solar systems, while low maintenance, do require periodic service. The solar modules need to be washedclean on a regular basis and electrical terminations require initial and annual checks. Cooling system lters are periodic maintenance items, with the re-fresh rate dependent upon typical and unusual circumstances. Solar systems installed near other new construction where dust is generated (e.g., grading, paving) or agricultural environments may require additional solar-system checks and services. Planning for such contingencies is the business of solar-system design, construction and on-going operation. Performance-based incentives require veriable metering, often by registered/approved independent third parties. Such monitoring periods are typically for 60 or more months. The S-Max inverter offers a wide range of features and options to enable a successful and long-lived solar-energy harvesting solution. The isolation stepup transformer, coupled to either a negative or a positive grounded solar array, ensures that the S-Max can match to all (known) solar module technologies. The S-Max follows standard industry and code practices
in determining the maximum number of solar modules per string for the open-circuit photovoltaic (PV) voltage rise in cold weather (Voc < 600V as per NEC). Its low 300V MPPT lower-limit ensures that multiple congurations are possible for solar systems hot weather voltage drop (i.e., Vmp as a function of temperature, solar irradiance and array-conductor voltage drop). The following equations are the basis of all solar system layout and design. Consult professional engineering to help when planning any solar system. Engineering design rms offering complete solar systems turn-key calculations, drawings, construction management and procurement are a good place to start. Eaton offers professional S-Max inverter application assistance, on-site commissioning and maintenance services. Eaton maintains a working relationship with the best engineering services rms across the country, and helps arrange the successful implantation of your solar system. The S-Max 250 kW inverter and up-t solutions easily perform well in Mega-Watt and Utility-Scale systems. Eaton also offers a wide range of balance-of-system (BOS) products, ranging from solar module source and array combiners, to DC and AC breakers, electrical and distribution panels and switchgear.
High Temperature Equation

Once the maximum number of modules per string is established, the minimum number of modules per string needs to be calculated. Here, more site-related aspects come into play, as the voltage of solar modules decreases with increasing temperature. The modules (photovoltaic cell) temperature is inuenced by the ambient temperature, reected sunloads from nearby structures, parapet walls, roof-coatings, etc. Air-ow above and behind the solar modules affect the cell temperature. The accepted industry standards to add to the module heating is listed below. Unusual mounting systems may adjust these gures, and it is best to seek assistance in establishing and planning such installations. 20C for ground or pole mounted solar systems 25C for roof-top solar systems mounted at inclined angles (offers improved air-ow behind the modules) 30C for roof-top solar systems mounted at, yet at least 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) above the roof surface
Vmp_min = Vmp + (temp-differential x temp-coefcient-of-Vmp) The temp-differential in this case includes the above temperature adders. The Vmp and related temperature coefcients are listed on the solar modules data sheets. While the code doesnt indicate the high temperature to use (i.e., because it is an equipment application issue), the industry standard is to evaluate the ASHRAE 2% and 4% high temperature gures, coupled to known location differences. Record high temperatures provide an indication of system performance when climatic condition reaches these levels. Beyond the damaging temperature affects on photovoltaic module Vmp voltage levels, voltage drop in PV conductors under such conditions also need to be calculated and evaluated, beyond normal temperatures. The inverter only uses (knows) the Vmp voltage at the inverter, not at the PV modules. Increasing grid voltages also puts a constraint on the minimum Vmp voltage at the DC input stage.
Low Temperature Equation

Voc_max = Voc + (temp-differential x temp-coefcient-of-Voc) The temp-differential is the difference between the standard module rating at 25C and the low temperature. The voltage (Voc) will rise with temperatures under 25C. Seek the solar module data sheet for a list of standard test condition (STC) data, temperature coefcients, and any special module-related information to determine the low-temperature open circuit voltage. The NEC 2011, and industry practice, requires the use of the sites Extreme Annual Mean Minimum Design Dry Bulb Temperature data, available in the ASHRAE Handbook. Code requires that the resulting maximum voltage (Voc) when added in the string of modules be under 600V. Record low temperatures provide an indication of system performance when temperatures drop to these levels. The S-Max inverter is designed to standards higher than 600 Vdc.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 091

1.4-35
To ensure the full MPPT range without power-clipping (reduced power output), prudent PV system designs shall consider the PV arrays Vmp voltage drop to the point of the inverter connection, ambient temperatures and the PV system installation types effects on Vmp, solar module miss-match and tolerance variations, degradation of solar modules over time (solar system life), etc. Typical Vmp design values, based upon known and expected conditions are 510% over the minimum MPPT tracking voltage. Reference NEC 2011 Section 690, Solar Photovoltaic Systems.
federal or other codes, or by any governmental agency having jurisdiction. Optional standby systems, not legally required, are also covered in the NEC (Article 702). Emergency systems are intended to supply power and illumination essential for safety to human life, when the normal supply fails. NEC requirements are stringent, requiring periodic testing under load and automatic transfer to emergency power supply on loss of normal supply. See Figure 1.4-23. All wiring from emergency source to emergency loads must be kept separate from all other wiring and equipment, in its own distribution and raceway system, except in transfer equipment enclosures and similar locations. The most common power source for large emergency loads is an engine-generator set, but the NEC also permits the emergency supply (subject to local code requirements) to be storage batteries, uninterruptible power supplies, a separate emergency service, or a connection to the service ahead of the normal service disconnecting means. Unit equipment for emergency illumi-
nation, with a rechargeable battery, a charger to keep it at full capacity when normal power is on, one or more lamps, and a relay to connect the battery to the lamps on loss of normal power, is also permitted. Because of the critical nature of emergency power, ground fault protection is not required. It is considered preferable to risk arcing damage, rather than to disconnect he emergency supply completely. For emergency power, ground fault alarm is required by NEC 700.7(D) to indicate a ground fault in solidly grounded wye emergency systems of more than 150V to ground and circuit-protective devices rated 1000A or more. Legally required standby systems, as required by the governmental agency having jurisdiction, are intended to supply power to selected loads, other than those classed as emergency systems, on loss of normal power. These are usually loads not essential to human safety, but loss of which could create hazards or hamper rescue or re-ghting operations.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Emergency Power
Most areas have requirements for emergency and standby power systems. The National Electrical Code does not specically call for any emergency or standby power, but does have requirements for those systems when they are legally mandated and classed as emergency (Article 700), legally required standby (Article 701) by municipal, state,
Utility Source
Typical Application: Three engine generator sets serve the load, plus one additional engine generator set for redundancy to achieve N+1 level of performance. Open or Closed transition is available. G1 G2 G3 G4
10 11 12
Paralleling Switchgear with Distribution
Revenue Metering HMI Touchscreen 52G1 Main Service 52G2 52G3 52G4 D1 D2 D3 D4
13 14 15 16
To Normal Distribution Circuits
To Emergency Circuits
ATS1
ATS2
ATS3
ATS4
17 18 19
EDP1
EDP2
EDP3
EDP4
Optional Remote PC with Software LP1 BP1 LP2 BP2 LP3 BP3 LP4 BP4
20
Figure 1.4-23. Typical Emergency Power System
21

NEC requirements are similar to those for emergency systems, except that wiring may occupy the same distribution and raceway system as the normal wiring if desired. Optional standby systems are those not legally required, and are intended to protect private business or property where life safety does not depend on performance of the system. Optional systems can be treated as part of the normal building wiring system. Both legally required and optional standby systems should be installed in such a manner that they will be fully available on loss of normal power. It is preferable to isolate these systems as much as possible, even though not required by code. Where the emergency or standby source, such as an engine generator or separate service, has capacity to supply the entire system, the transfer scheme can be either a full-capacity automatic transfer switch, or, less costly but equally effective, normal and emergency main circuit breakers, electrically interlocked such that on failure of the normal supply the emergency supply is connected to the load. However, if the emergency or standby source does not have capacity for the full load, as is usually the case, such a scheme would require automatic disconnection of the nonessential loads before transfer. Simpler and more economical in such a case is a separate emergency bus, supplied through an automatic transfer switch, to feed all critical loads. The transfer switch connects this bus to the normal supply, in normal operation. On failure of the normal supply, the engine-generator is started, and when it is up to speed the automatic switch transfers the emergency loads to this source. On return of the normal source, manual or automatic retransfer of the emergency loads can take place. Industrial plants, especially in process industries, usually have some form of alternate power source to prevent extremely costly shutdowns. These standby generating systems are critical when needed, but they are needed only infrequently. They represent a large capital investment. To be sure that their power will be available when required, they should be tested periodically under load. The cost of electric energy has risen to new high levels in recent years, and utilities bill on the basis not only of power consumed, but also on the basis of peak demand over a small interval. As a result, a new use for in-house generating capacity has developed. Utilities measure demand charges on the basis of the maximum demand for electricity in any given specic period (typically 15 or 30 minutes) during the month. Some utilities have a demand ratchet clause that will continue demand charges on a given peak demand for a full year, unless a higher peak results in even higher charges. One large load, coming on at a peak time, can create higher electric demand charges for a year. Obviously, reducing the peak demand can result in considerable savings in the cost of electrical energy. For those installations with engine generators for emergency use, modern control systems (computers or programmable controllers) can monitor the peak demand, and start the engine-generator to supply part of the demand as it approaches a preset peak value. The engine-generator must be selected to withstand the required duty cycle. The simplest of these schemes transfer specic loads to the generator. More complex schemes operate the generator in parallel with the normal utility supply. The savings in demand charges can reduce the cost of owning the emergency generator equipment. In some instances, utilities with little reserve capacity have helped nance the cost of some larger customerowned generating equipment. In return, the customer agrees to take some or all of his load off the utility system and on to his own generator at the request of the utility (with varying limitations) when the utility load approaches capacity. In some cases, the customers generator is paralleled with the utility to help supply the peak utility loads, with the utility buying the supplied power. Some utilities have been able to delay large capital expenditures for additional generating capacity by such arrangements.
September 2011
Sheet 01 092
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
It is important that the electrical system designer providing a substantial source of emergency and standby power investigate the possibility of using it for peak shaving, and even of partial utility company nancing. Frequently, substantial savings in power costs can be realized for a small additional outlay in distribution and control equipment. Peak shaving equipment operating in parallel with the utility are subject to the comments made under cogeneration as to separation from the utility under fault conditions.
Sound Levels
Sound Levels of Electrical Equipment for Ofces, Hospitals, Schools and Similar Buildings
Insurance underwriters and building owners desire and require that the electrical apparatus be installed for maximum safety and the least interference with the normal use of the property. Architects should take particular care with the designs for hospitals, schools and similar buildings to keep the sound perception of such equipment as motors, blowers and transformers to a minimum. Even though transformers are relatively quiet, resonant conditions may exist near the equipment, which will amplify their normal 120 Hz hum. Therefore, it is important that consideration be given to the reduction of amplitude and to the absorption of energy at this frequency. This problem begins in the designing stages of the equipment and the building. There are two points worthy of consideration: 1) What sound levels are desired in the normally occupied rooms of this building? 2) To effect this, what sound level in the equipment room and what type of associated acoustical treatment will give the most economical installation overall? A relatively high sound level in the equipment room does not indicate an abnormal condition within the apparatus. However, absorption may be necessary if sound originating in an unoccupied equipment room is objectionable outside the room. Furthermore, added absorption material usually is desirable if there is a build-up of sound due to reections.
Peak Shaving
Many installations now have emergency or standby generators. In the past, they were required for hospitals and similar locations, but not common in ofce buildings or shopping centers. However, many costly and unfortunate experiences during utility blackouts in recent years have led to the more frequent installation of engine generators in commercial and institutional systems for safety and for supplying important loads.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 093

1.4-37
Some reduction or attenuation takes place through building walls, the remainder may be reected in various directions, resulting in a build-up or apparent higher levels, especially if resonance occurs because of room dimensions or material characteristics.
Table 1.4-11. Maximum Average Sound LevelsDecibels

kVA Liquid-Filled Transformers Self-Cooled Rating (OA) 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 6000 7500 10,000 55 56 58 58 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Forced-Air Cooled Rating (FA) 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 68 69 70 Dry-Type Transformers Self-Cooled Rating (AA) 58 60 64 64 65 66 68 68 70 71 72 73 Forced-Air Cooled Rating (FA) 67 67 67 67 68 69 71 71 73 73 74 75 76
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Area Consideration
In determining permissible sound levels within a building, it is necessary to consider how the rooms are to be used and what levels may be objectionable to occupants of the building. The ambient sound level values given in Table 1.4-10 are representative average values and may be used as a guide in determining suitable building levels. Decrease in sound level varies at an approximate rate of 6 dB for each doubling of the distance from the source of sound to the listener. For example, if the level 6 ft (1.8m) from a transformer is 50 dB, the level at a distance of 12 ft (3.7m) would be 44 dB and at 24 ft (7.3m) the level decreases to 38 dB, etc. However, this rule applies only to equipment in large areas equivalent to an out-of-door installation, with no nearby reecting surfaces. Table 1.4-10. Typical Sound Levels
Description Average Decibel Level (dB) 2530 3035 3540 3540 3545 4045 4555 53 58 60 61 61 64 70 80
Because values given in Table 1.4-11 are in general higher than those given in Table 1.4-10, the difference must be attenuated by distance and by proper use of materials in the design of the building. An observer may believe that a transformer is noisy because the level in the room where it is located is high. Two transformers of the same sound output in the same room increase the sound level in the room approximately 3 dB, and three transformers by about 5 dB, etc. Sounds due to structure-transmitted vibrations originating from the transformer are lowered by mounting the transformers on vibration dampeners or isolators. There are a number of different sound vibration isolating materials that may be used with good results. Dry-type power transformers are often built with an isolator mounted between the transformer support and case members. The natural period of the core and coil structure when mounted on vibration dampeners is about 10% of the fundamental frequency. The reduction in the
Radio, recording and TV studios Theatres and music rooms Hospitals, auditoriums and churches Classrooms and lecture rooms Apartments and hotels Private ofces and conference rooms Stores Residence (radio, TV off) and small ofces Medium ofce (3 to 10 desks) Residence (radio, TV on) Large store (5 or more clerks) Factory ofce Large ofce Average factory Average street
transmitted vibration is approximately 98%. If the oor or beams beneath the transformer are light and exible, the isolator must be softer or have improved characteristics in order to keep the transmitted vibrations to a minimum. (Enclosure covers and ventilating louvers are often improperly tightened or gasketed and produce unnecessary noise.) The building structure will assist the dampeners if the transformer is mounted above heavy oor members or if mounted on a heavy oor slab. Positioning of the transformer in relation to walls and other reecting surfaces has a great effect on reected noise and resonances. Often, placing the transformer at an angle to the wall, rather than parallel to it, will reduce noise. Electrical connections to a substation transformer should be made with exible braid or conductors; connections to an individually mounted transformer should be in exible conduit.
Transformer Sound Levels

Transformers emit a continuous 120 Hz hum with harmonics when connected to 60 Hz circuits. The fundamental frequency is the hum that annoys people primarily because of its continuous nature. For purposes of reference, sound measuring instruments convert the different frequencies to 1000 Hz and a 40 dB level. Transformer sound levels based on NEMA publication TR-1 are listed in Table 1.4-11.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 01 094
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 095
Power Distribution Systems Reference Data

IEEE Protective Relay Numbers
1.5-1
Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus

Device Number 2 Function Time-delay starting or closing relay Denition Typical Uses
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
A device that functions to give a desired amount Used for providing a time-delay for of time delay before or after any point of operation re-transfer back to the normal source in a switching sequence or protective relay system, in an automatic transfer scheme. except as specically provided by device functions 48, 62 and 79 described later. A device whose principal function is to connect a machine to its source of starting voltage. A device that operates to initiate or cause the automatic transfer of a machine from the starting to the running power connection. A device that functions when the circuit admittance, impedance or reactance increases or decreases beyond predetermined limits. A device that functions to raise or to lower the temperature of a machine or other apparatus, or of any medium, when its temperature falls below or rises above, a predetermined level. A device that operates when the ratio of voltage to frequency is above a preset value or is below a different preset value. The relay may have any combination of instantaneous or time delayed characteristics. A device that operates when two AC circuits are within the desired limits of frequency, phase angle or voltage, to permit or cause the paralleling of these two circuits. A device which functions on a given value of undervoltage. Used to transfer a reduced voltage starter from starting to running.
6 19
Starting circuit breaker Starting to running transition timer
21
Distance relay
23
Temperature control device
Used as a thermostat to control space heaters in outdoor equipment.
24
Volts per hertz relay
6
In a closed transition breaker transfer, a 25 relay is used to ensure two-sources are synchronized before paralleling. Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000 feeder protective relays. Used to initiate an automatic transfer when a primary source of power is lost. Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/MP-4000/ EDR-5000/EDR-4000 protective relays. Used to remotely indicate that a protective relay has functioned, or that a circuit breaker has tripped. Typically, a mechanical drop type annunciator panel is used. Used to prevent reverse power from feeding an upstream fault. Often used when primary backup generation is used in a facility. Eaton FP-5000/ EDR-5000 protective relays. Used to indicate the position of a drawout circuit breaker (TOC switch).
25
Synchronizing or synchronism check device
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27
Undervoltage relay
30
Annunciator relay
A non-automatically reset device that gives a number of separate visual indications upon the functioning of protective devices, and which may also be arranged to perform a lockout function. A relay that functions on a desired value of power ow in a given direction, or upon reverse power resulting from arc back in the anode or cathode circuits of a power rectier. A device that makes or breaks contact when the main device or piece of apparatus, which has no device function number, reaches a given point.
32
Directional power relay
33
Position switch
34
Master sequence device
A device such as a motor-operated multi-contact switch, or the equivalent, or a programmable device, that establishes or determines the operating sequence of the major devices in equipment during starting and stopping, or during sequential switching operations. A relay that functions when the current or power ow decreases below a predetermined value. Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000 motor protective relays.
37 38
Undercurrent or underpower relay Bearing protective device
A device that functions on excessive bearing Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000 motor temperature, or on other abnormal mechanical protective relays. conditions, such as undue wear, which may eventually result in excessive bearing temperature. A device that functions on a given or abnormally high or low value or failure of machine eld current, or on an excessive value of the reactive component of armature current in an AC machine indicating abnormally high or low eld excitation. A device that functions to apply, or to remove, the eld excitation of a machine. A device whose function is to connect a machine to its source of running or operating voltage. This function may also be used for a device, such as a contactor, that is used in series with a circuit breaker or other fault-protecting means, primarily for frequent opening and closing of the circuit.
40
Field relay
41 42
Field circuit breaker Running circuit breaker
CA08104001E
1.5-2

Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus (Continued)
Device Number 43 Function Manual transfer or selector device Denition A manually operated device that transfers control or potential circuits in order to modify the plan of operation of the associated equipment or of some of the associated devices. A device that functions to start the next available unit in multiple-unit equipment upon the failure or non-availability of the normally preceding unit. A relay that functions when the polyphase currents are of reverse-phase sequence, or when the polyphase currents are unbalanced or contain the negative phase-sequence components above a given amount. A relay that functions upon a predetermined value of polyphase voltage in the desired phase sequence. Typical Uses
September 2011
Sheet 01 096
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
44
Unit sequence starting relay
46
Reverse-phase, or phase balance, current relay
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/ EDR-4000 feeder protective relays and MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000 motor protective relays. Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/ EDR-4000 feeder protective relays and MP-3000/MP-4000 motor protective relays.
47
Phase-sequence voltage relay
48
Incomplete sequence relay
A relay that generally returns the equipment to the normal, or off, position and locks it out of the normal starting, or operating or stopping sequence is not properly completed within a predetermined amount of time. If the device is used for alarm purposes only, it should preferably be designated as 48A (alarm). A relay that functions when the temperature of a machine armature, or other load carrying winding or element of a machine, or the temperature of a power rectier or power transformer (including a power rectier transformer) exceeds a predetermined value. A relay that functions instantaneously on an excessive value of current, or an excessive rate of current rise, thus indicating a fault in the apparatus of the circuit being protected. Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/ ETR-4000 motor protective relays.
49
Machine, or transformer, thermal relay
50
Instantaneous overcurrent, or rate-of-rise relay
Used for tripping a circuit breaker instantaneously during a high-level short circuit. Can trip on phasephase (50), phase-neutral (50N), phase-ground (50G) faults. Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/ FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/ EDR-3000 protective relays, MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/ ETR-4000 motor protective relays. Used for tripping a circuit breaker after a time delay during a sustained overcurrent. Used for tripping a circuit breaker instantaneously during a high-level short circuit. Can trip on phase (51), neutral (51N) or ground (51G) overcurrents. Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/ FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/ EDR-3000 protective relays, MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/ ETR-4000 motor protective relays. A term applied typically to medium voltage circuit breakers, or low voltage power circuit breakers. Eaton VCP-W vacuum circuit breaker, magnum DS low voltage power circuit breaker
51
AC time overcurrent relay
A relay with either a denite or inverse time characteristic that functions when the current in an AC circuit exceeds a predetermined value.
52
AC circuit breaker
A device that is used to close and interrupt an AC power circuit under normal conditions or to interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency conditions.
53
Exciter or DC generator relay
A device that forces the DC machine eld excitation to build up during starting or that functions when the machine voltage has built up to a given value. A relay that operates when the power factor in an AC circuit rises above or below a predetermined value. Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000 feeder protective relays and MP-4000 motor protective relay.
55
Power factor relay
56
Field application relay
A device that automatically controls the application of the eld excitation to an AC motor at some predetermined point in the slip cycle. A relay that functions on a given value of overvoltage. Used to trip a circuit breaker, protecting downstream equipment from sustained overvoltages. Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000 feeder protective relays and MP-4000 motor protective relay.
59
Overvoltage relay
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 097

1.5-3
Device Number 60 62 Function Voltage or current balance relay Time-delay stopping or opening relay Denition A relay that operates on a given difference in voltage, or current input or output of two circuits. A time-delay relay that serves in conjunction with the device that initiates the shutdown, stopping or opening operation in an automatic sequence. A switch that operates on given values or on a given rate of change of pressure. Typical Uses Used in conjunction with a 27 device to delay tripping of a circuit breaker during a brief loss of primary voltage, to prevent nuisance tripping. Used to protect a transformer during a rapid pressure rise during a short circuit. This device will typically act to open the protective devices above and below the transformer. Typically used with a 63-X auxiliary relay to trip the circuit breaker.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
63
Pressure switch
64
Ground protective relay
A relay that functions on a failure of the insulation Used to detect and act on a groundof a machine, transformer or of other apparatus to fault condition. In a pulsing high ground, or on ashover of a DC machine to ground. resistance grounding system, a 64 device will initiate the alarm. A device consisting of an assembly of uid, electrical or mechanical control equipment used for regulating the ow of water, steam or other media to the prime mover for such purposes as starting, holding speed or load, or stopping. A device that functions to allow only a specied Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000 number of operations of a given device, or motor protective relays. equipment, or a specied number of successive operations within a given time of each other. It also functions to energize a circuit periodically or for fractions of specied time intervals, or that is used to permit intermittent acceleration or jogging of a machine at low speeds for mechanical positioning. A relay that functions on a desired value of AC overcurrent owing in a predetermined direction. Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000 feeder protective relays.
65
Governor
66
Notching or jogging device
67 69
AC directional overcurrent relay Permissive control device
A device that is generally a two-position manually Used as a remote-local switch for operated switch that in one position permits the circuit breaker control. closing of a circuit breaker, or the placing of equipment into operation, and in the other position prevents the circuit breaker to the equipment from being operated. A switch that operates on given values, or on a given rate of change of level. Used to indicate a low liquid level within a transformer tank in order to save transformers from loss-of-insulation failure. An alarm contact is available as a standard option on a liquid level gauge. It is set to close before an unsafe condition actually occurs.
71
Level switch
72
DC circuit breaker
A device that is used to close and interrupt a DC power circuit under normal conditions or to interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency conditions. A device that is used to shunt or insert a step of load limiting, shifting or indicating resistance in a power circuit; to switch a space heater in circuit; or to switch a light or regenerative load resistor of a power rectier or other machine in and out of circuit. A device other than an annunciator, as covered under device number 30, which is used to operate, or to operate in connection with, a visible or audible alarm.
73
Load-resistor contactor
74
Alarm relay
17 18 19 20 21
78
Phase-angle measuring relay
A device that functions at a predetermined phase angle between two voltages, between two currents, or between voltage and current. A relay that controls the automatic closing and locking out of an AC circuit interrupter. Used to automatically reclose a circuit breaker after a trip, assuming the fault has been cleared after the power was removed from the circuit. The recloser will lock-out after a predetermined amount of failed attempts to reclose.
79
AC reclosing relay
CA08104001E
1.5-4

Device Number 81 Function Frequency relay Denition A relay that functions on a predetermined value of frequencyeither under or over, or on normal system frequencyor rate of change frequency. Typical Uses
September 2011
Sheet 01 098
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Used to trip a generator circuit breaker in the event the frequency drifts above or below a given value. Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/ EDR-4000 feeder protective relays and MP-4000 motor protective relay. Used to transfer control power sources in a double-ended switchgear lineup.
83
Automatic selective control or transfer relay
A relay that operates to select automatically between certain sources or conditions in equipment, or performs a transfer operation automatically. A device that is operated or restrained by a signal transmitted or received via any communications media used for relaying. An electrically operated hand, or electrically, reset relay that functions to shut down and hold an equipment out of service on the occurrence of abnormal conditions.
85
Carrier or pilot-wire relay
86
Locking-out relay
Used in conjunction with protective relays to lock-out a circuit breaker (or multiple circuit breakers) after a trip. Typically required to be manually reset by an operator before the breaker can be reclosed.
87
Differential protective relay
A protective relay that functions on a percentage or Used to protect static equipment, phase angle or other quantitative difference of two such as cable, bus or transformers, currents or of some other electrical quantities. by measuring the current differential between two points. Typically the upstream and/or downstream circuit breaker will be incorporated into the zone of protection. Eaton FP-5000 feeder protective relay (87B) and MD-3000 protective relay. A device that functions to regulate a quantity or quantities, such as voltage, current, power, speed, frequency, temperature and load, at a certain value or between certain (generally close) limits for machines, tie lines or other apparatus. A device that operates when the voltage across an open circuit breaker or contactor exceeds a given value in a given direction. A relay that functions to trip a circuit breaker, contactor or equipment, or to permit immediate tripping by other devices, or to prevent immediate reclosure of a circuit interrupter, in case it should open automatically even though its closing circuit is maintained closed.
90
Regulating device
91
Voltage directional relay
94
Tripping or trip-free relay
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 099

Suggested IEEE Designations for Sufx Letters
1.5-5
Suggested IEEE Designations for Sufx Letters

Auxiliary Devices
These letters denote separate auxiliary devices, such as the following: C CL Closing relay/contactor Auxiliary relay, closed (energized when main device is in closed position) Control switch Down position switch relay Lowering relay Opening relay/contactor Auxiliary relay, open (energized when main device is in open position) Push button Raising relay UP position switch relay Auxiliary relay Auxiliary relay Auxiliary relay
Main Device
The following letters denote the main device to which the numbered device is applied or is related: A AC BP BT C DC E F G M MOC S T TOC Alarm/auxiliary power Alternating current Bypass Bus tie Capacitor Direct current Exciter Feeder/eld Generator/ground Motor/metering Mechanism operated contact Synchronizing/secondary Transformer Truck-operated contacts
Other Sufx Letters

The following letters cover all other distinguishing features, characteristics or conditions not specically described in Auxiliary Devices through Main Device Parts, which serve to describe the use of the device in the equipment, such as: A BF C D E F HS L M O OFF ON R T TDC TDDO TDO TDPU THD Automatic Breaker failure Close Decelerating/down Emergency Failure/forward High speed Local/lower Manual Open Off On Raise/reclosing/remote/reverse Test/trip Time-delay closing contact Time delayed relay coil drop-out Time-delay opening contact Time delayed relay coil pickup Total harmonic distortion
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CS D L O OP
PB R U X Y Z
Main Device Parts

These letters denote parts of the main device, except auxiliary contacts, position switches, limit switches and torque limit switches: C CC HC M OC S SI T TC Coil/condenser/capacitor Closing coil/closing contactor Holding coil Operating motor Opening contactor Solenoid Seal-in Target Trip coil
Actuating Quantities
These letters indicate the condition or electrical quantity to which the device responds, or the medium in which it is located, such as the following: A C F I0 I-, I2 I+, I1 P PF S T V VAR VB W Amperes/alternating Current Frequency/fault Zero sequence current Negative sequence current Positive sequence current Power/pressure Power factor Speed Temperature Voltage/volts/vacuum Reactive power Vibration Watts
CA08104001E
1.5-6

Codes and Standards
September 2011
Sheet 01 100
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Codes and Standards

The National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA Standard No. 70, is the most prevalent electrical code in the United States. The NEC, which is revised every three years, has no legal standing of its own, until it is adopted as law by a jurisdiction, which may be a city, county or state. Most jurisdictions adopt the NEC in its entirety; some adopt it with variations, usually more rigid, to suit local conditions and requirements. A few large cities, such as New York and Chicago, have their own electrical codes, basically similar to the NEC. The designer must determine which code applies in the area of a specic project. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) of 1970 sets uniform national requirements for safety in the workplaceanywhere that people are employed. Originally OSHA adopted the 1971 NEC as rules for electrical safety. As the NEC was amended every three years, the involved process for modifying a federal law such as OSHA made it impossible for the act to adopt each new code revision. To avoid this problem, the OSHA administration in 1981 adopted its own code, a condensed version of the NEC containing only those provisions considered related to occupational safety. OSHA was amended to adopt this code, based on NFPA Standard 70E, Part 1, which is now federal law. The NEC is a minimum safety standard. Efcient and adequate design usually requires not just meeting, but often exceeding NEC requirements to provide an effective, reliable, economical electrical system. Many equipment standards have been established by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Underwriters Laboratories (UL) has standards that equipment must meet before UL will list or label it. Most jurisdictions and OSHA require that where equipment listed as safe by a recognized laboratory is available, unlisted equipment may not be used. UL is by far the most widely accepted national laboratory, although Factory Mutual Insurance Company lists some equipment, and
a number of other testing laboratories have been recognized and accepted. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) publishes a number of books (the color book series) on recommended practices for the design of industrial buildings, commercial buildings, emergency power systems, grounding, and the like. Most of these IEEE standards have been adopted as ANSI standards. They are excellent guides, although they are not in any way mandatory.
A design engineer should conform to all applicable codes, and require equipment to be listed by UL or another recognized testing laboratory wherever possible, and to meet ANSI or NEMA standards. ANSI/IEEE recommended practices should be followed to a great extent. In many cases, standards should be exceeded to get a system of the quality required. The design goal should be a safe, efcient, longlasting, exible and economical electrical distribution system.
Professional Organizations American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Headquarters:

1819 L Street, NW 6th Floor Washington, DC 20036 202-293-8020
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1300 North 17th Street Suite 1847 Rosslyn, VA 22209 703-841-3200 www.nema.org
Operations:
25 West 43rd Street 4th Floor New York, NY 10036 212-642-4900 www.ansi.org
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1 Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02169-7471 617-770-3000 www.nfpa.org
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Headquarters:

3 Park Avenue 17th Floor New York, NY 10016-5997 212-419-7900
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

333 Pngsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 847-272-8800 www.ul.com
International Code Council (ICC)

5203 Leesburg Pike Suite 600 Falls Church, VA 22041 1-888-422-7233 www.iccsafe.org
Operations:
445 Hoes Lane Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331 732-981-0060 www.ieee.org
The American Institute of Architects (AIA)

1735 New York Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20006-5292 202-626-7300 www.aia.org
International Association of Electrical Inspectors (IAEI)

901 Waterfall Way Suite 602 Richardson, TX 75080-7702 972-235-1455 www.iaei.org
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 101

Motor Protective Device Data
1.5-7
Motor Protection
Consistent with the 2011 NEC 430.6(A)(1) circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings shall be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as dened in the application section of the NEC. These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings. Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eaton type breakers, specic units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maximum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations. In general, these selections were based on: 1. Ambientoutside enclosure not more than 40C (104F). 2. Motor startinginfrequent starting, stopping or reversing. 3. Motor accelerating time 10 seconds or less. 4. Locked rotormaximum 6 times motor FLA. Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not set at more than 1300% of the motor full-load current to comply with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA Design B energy high-efciency motors that can be set up to 1700%.) Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specic system application requirements. For motor full load currents of 208V and 200V, increase the corresponding 230V motor values by 10 and 15% respectively.
Table 1.5-2. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower Full Load Amperes (NEC) FLA Fuse Size NEC 430.52 Maximum Amperes Time Delay Non-Time Delay 15 20 25 30 50 70 90 150 175 225 250 350 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1600 6 10 15 15 25 35 45 70 90 110 125 175 200 150 300 400 500 600 800 6 10 10 15 20 30 35 60 70 90 100 125 175 200 250 300 400 450 600 Recommended Eaton Circuit Breaker Amperes 15 15 15 20 30 50 60 90 100 125 150 150 200 225 300 400 500 600 700 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 45 50 70 70 100 110 125 150 175 225 250 350 15 15 15 15 15 20 25 40 50 60 60 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 300 Motor Circuit Protector Type HMCP Amperes 7 15 15 30 30 50 50 70 100 150 150 150 150 250 400 400 600 600 600 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 50 50 70 100 100 150 150 150 150 250 400 400 3 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 50 50 50 100 100 150 150 150 250 250 400 Adj. Range 2170 45150 45150 90300 90300 150500 150500 210700 3001000 4501500 4501500 7502500 7502500 12502500 20004000 20004000 18006000 18006000 18006000 2170 2170 2170 45150 45150 90300 90300 150500 150500 210700 3001000 3001000 4501500 7502500 7502500 7502500 12502500 20004000 20004000 930 2170 2170 2170 45150 45150 90300 90300 150500 150500 150500 3001000 3001000 7502500 7502500 7502500 12502500 12502500 20004000
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
230V, Three-Phase
1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 10 10 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 700 1000 6 6 6 10 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 125 150 175 225 300 350 450 3 6 6 10 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 110 150 175 225 300 350
460V, Three-Phase
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
575V, Three-Phase
CA08104001E
1.5-8

Motor Protective Device Data
Table 1.5-3. 60 Hz, Recommended Protective Setting for Induction Motors
hp Full Load Minimum Wire Size Amperes 75C Copper Ampacity (NEC) FLA at 125% FLA Size Amperes 20 20 30 30 50 85 100 20 20 20 20 30 50 50 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) Minimum Conduit Size, Inches (mm) THW THWN XHHN Fuse Size NEC 430.52 Maximum Amperes Time Delay Non-Time Delay Recommended Eaton: Circuit Breaker Amperes Motor Circuit Protector Amperes
September 2011
Sheet 01 102
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Adjustable Range
115V, Single-Phase
3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2

13.8 16 20 24 34 56 80 6.9 8 10 12 17 28 40
14 14 12 10 8 4 3 14 14 14 14 12 10 8
0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7)
25 30 35 45 60 100 150 15 15 20 25 30 50 70
45 50 60 80 110 175 250 25 25 30 40 60 90 125
30 35 40 50 70 100 150 15 20 25 30 40 60 80
Two-pole device not available
230V, Single-Phase
Two-pole device not available
Consult fuse manufacturers catalog for smaller fuse ratings. Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed breakers I.C.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 103

Chart of Short Circuit Currents for Transformers
1.5-9
Table 1.5-4. Secondary Short-Circuit Current of Typical Power Transformers

Transformer Rating ThreePhase kVA and Impedance Percent 300 5% Maximum ShortCircuit kVA Available from Primary System 50,000 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 500 5% 50,000 100,000 150,000 208V, Three-Phase Rated Load Continuous Current, Amps 834 834 834 834 834 834 1388 1388 1388 Short-Circuit Current rms Symmetrical Amps Trans50% Comformer Motor bined Alone Load 240V, Three-Phase Rated Load Continuous Current, Amps 722 722 722 722 722 722 Short-Circuit Current rms Symmetrical Amps Trans100% Comformer Motor bined Alone Load 480V, Three-Phase Rated Load Continuous Current, Amps 361 361 361 361 361 361 601 601 601 601 601 601 902 902 902 902 902 902 Short-Circuit Current rms Symmetrical Amps Trans100% Comformer Motor bined Alone Load 600V, Three-Phase Rated Load Continuous Current, Amps 289 289 289 289 289 289 481 481 481 481 481 481 722 722 722 722 722 722 962 962 962 962 962 962 Short-Circuit Current rms Symmetrical Amps Trans100% Comformer Motor bined Alone Load
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
14,900 15,700 16,000 16,300 16,500 16,700 21,300 25,200 26,000 26,700 27,200 27,800 28,700 32,000 33,300 34,400 35,200 36,200 35,900 41,200 43,300 45,200 46,700 48,300 47,600 57,500 61,800 65,600 68,800 72,500
1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 2800 4200 4200 4200 4200 4200 4200 5600 5600 5600 5600 5600 5600 8300 8300 8300 8300 8300 8300
16,600 17,400 17,700 18,000 18,200 18,400
12,900 13,600 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,400 20,000 21,900 22,500 23,100 23,600 24,100 24,900 27,800 28,900 29,800 30,600 31,400 31,000 35,600 37,500 39,100 40,400 41,800 41,200 49,800 53,500 56,800 59,600 62,800
2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 7200 7200 7200 7200 7200 7200 9800 9800 9800 9800 9800 9800 14,400 14,400 14,400 14,400 14,400 14,400
15,800 16,500 16,800 17,000 17,200 17,300 24,800 26,700 27,300 27,900 28,400 28,900 32,100 35,000 36,100 37,000 37,800 38,600
6400 6800 6900 7000 7100 7200 10,000 10,900 11,300 11,600 11,800 12,000 12,400 13,900 14,400 14,900 15,300 15,700 15,500 17,800 18,700 19,600 20,200 20,900 20,600 24,900 26,700 28,400 29,800 31,400 24,700 31,000 34,000 36,700 39,100 41,800 28,000 36,500 40,500 44,600 48,100 52,300 30,700 41,200 46,600 51,900 56,800 62,800 34,000 47,500 54,700 62,200 69,400 78,500
1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 7200 7200 7200 7200 7200 7200 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 18,000 18,000 18,000 18,000 18,000 18,000
7800 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 12,400 13,300 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,400 16,000 17,500 18,000 18,500 18,900 19,300 20,300 22,600 23,500 24,400 25,000 25,700
5200 5500 5600 5600 5700 5800 8000 8700 9000 9300 9400 9600 10,000 11,100 11,600 11,900 12,200 12,600 12,400 14,300 15,000 15,600 16,200 16,700 16,500 20,000 21,400 22,700 23,900 25,100 19,700 24,800 27,200 29,400 31,300 33,500 22,400 29,200 32,400 35,600 38,500 41,800 24,600 33,000 37,300 41,500 45,500 50,200 27,200 38,000 43,700 49,800 55,500 62,800
1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800 5800 7800 7800 7800 7800 7800 7800 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 11,500 11,500 11,500 11,500 11,500 11,500 14,400 14,400 14,400 14,400 14,400 14,400
6400 6700 6800 6800 6900 7000 9900 10,600 10,900 11,200 11,300 11,500 12,900 14,000 14,500 14,800 15,100 15,500 16,300 18,200 18,900 19,500 20,100 20,600 22,300 25,800 27,200 28,500 29,700 30,900 27,500 32,600 35,000 37,200 39,100 41,300 32,000 38,800 42,000 45,200 48,100 51,400 36,100 44,500 48,800 53,000 57,000 61,700 41,600 52,400 58,100 64,200 69,900 77,200
25,900 1203 28,000 1203 28,800 1203 29,500 1203 30,000 1203 30,600 1203 32,900 1804 36,200 1804 37,500 1804 38,600 1804 39,400 1804 40,400 1804 41,500 2406 46,800 2406 48,900 2406 50,800 2406 52,300 2406 53,900 2406 55,900 3609 65,800 3609 70,100 3609 73,900 3609 77,100 3609 80,800 3609
1388 250,000 1388 500,000 Unlimited 1388 750 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000 2080 2080 2080
2080 250,000 2080 500,000 Unlimited 2080 1000 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000 2776 2776 2776
40,600 1203 45,200 1203 47,100 1203 48,700 1203 50,000 1203 51,400 1203 55,600 1804 64,200 1804 57,900 1804 71,200 1804 74,000 1804 77,200 1804 2406 2406 2406 2406 2406 2406 3008 3008 3008 3008 3008 3008 3609 3609 3609 3609 3609 3609 4511 4511 4511 4511 4511 4511
2776 250,000 2776 500,000 Unlimited 2776 1500 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000 4164 4164 4164
27,800 1444 32,100 1444 33,900 1444 35,600 1444 37,000 1444 38,600 1444 34,300 1924 40,600 1924 43,600 1924 46,300 1924 48,700 1924 51,400 1924 40,000 2405 48,500 2405 52,500 2405 56,600 2405 60,100 2405 64,300 2405 44,700 2886 55,200 2886 60,600 2886 65,900 2886 70,800 2886 76,800 2886 52,000 3608 65,500 3608 72,700 3608 80,200 3608 87,400 3608 96,500 3608
4164 250,000 4164 500,000 Unlimited 4164 2000 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000
250,000 500,000 Unlimited 2500 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000
250,000 500,000 Unlimited 3000 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000
250,000 500,000 Unlimited 3750 5.75% 50,000 100,000 150,000
250,000 500,000 Unlimited

Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit currents are inversely proportional to impedance. The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current. For 208V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit current will be in direct proportion.
CA08104001E
1.5-10 Power Distribution Systems Reference Data

Transformer Full Load Amperes
Table 1.5-5. Transformer Full-Load Current, Three-Phase, Self-Cooled Ratings
Voltage, Line-to-Line kVA 208 83.3 125 208 312 416 625 833 1388 2082 2776 4164 240 72.2 108 180 271 361 541 722 1203 1804 2406 3608 4811 480 36.1 54.1 90.2 135 180 271 361 601 902 1203 1804 2406 3007 3609 4511 600 28.9 43.3 72.2 108 144 217 289 481 722 962 1443 1925 2406 2887 3608 4811 2400 7.22 10.8 18.0 27.1 36.1 54.1 72.2 120 180 241 361 481 601 722 902 1203 1804 2406 4160 4.16 6.25 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.2 41.6 69.4 104 139 208 278 347 416 520 694 1041 1388 7200 2.41 3.61 6.01 9.02 12.0 18.0 24.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 120 160 200 241 301 401 601 802 12,000 1.44 2.17 3.61 5.41 7.22 10.8 14.4 24.1 36.1 48.1 72.2 96.2 120 144 180 241 361 481 12,470 1.39 2.08 3.47 5.21 6.94 10.4 13.9 23.1 34.7 46.3 69.4 92.6 116 139 174 231 347 463 13,200 1.31 1.97 3.28 4.92 6.56 9.84 13.1 21.9 32.8 43.7 65.6 87.5 109 131 164 219 328 437 13,800 1.26 1.88 3.14 4.71 6.28 9.41 12.6 20.9 31.4 41.8 62.8 83.7 105 126 157 209 314 418 22,900 0.75 1.13 1.89 2.84 3.78 5.67 7.56 12.6 18.9 25.2 37.8 50.4 63.0 75.6 94.5 126 189 252
September 2011
Sheet 01 104
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
34,400 0.50 0.76 1.26 1.89 2.52 3.78 5.04 8.39 12.6 16.8 25.2 33.6 42.0 50.4 62.9 83.9 126 168
30 45 75 112-1/2 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 105

Impedances Data
1.5-11
Approximate Impedance Data

Table 1.5-6. Typical Impedances Three-Phase Transformers Liquid-Filled
kVA Liquid-Filled Network 37.5 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000
Table 1.5-9. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Dry-Type Distribution Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 %Z 4.8 4.6 5.1 5.3 6.0 5.3 5.1 7.6 7.2 8.0 4.4 4.8 4.6 5.9 3.1 5.2 6.2 5.4 6.6 3.5 3.4 3.3 4.3 4.1 4.7 5.6 6.1 5.4 %R 4.6 3.5 3.8 3.5 2.9 3.0 2.6 2.5 1.7 1.5 4.3 4.4 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.2 2.0 2.0 1.1 2.6 2.4 1.6 1.9 1.8 1.4 1.4 1.4 0.8 %X 1.4 3.0 3.4 4.0 5.2 4.4 4.4 7.2 7.0 7.9 1.2 1.8 3.7 5.1 1.9 4.7 5.8 4.9 6.5 2.3 2.5 2.9 3.9 3.7 4.5 5.4 5.9 5.3 X/R 0.30 0.86 0.91 1.14 1.79 1.50 1.68 2.88 4.20 5.42 0.27 0.41 1.35 1.82 0.79 2.16 2.93 2.44 6.09 0.89 1.02 1.76 2.05 2.04 3.22 3.77 4.18 6.57
Table 1.5-10. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Dry-Type Distribution Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 %Z 4.8 5.2 4.6 4.3 5.1 4.3 7.4 5.5 6.8 8.2 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.7 5.0 4.4 8.1 5.2 6.8 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.3 3.3 3.7 5.4 6.1 %R 4.0 3.1 3.5 3.4 2.9 2.5 2.9 2.4 1.4 0.8 3.8 3.0 3.1 2.7 2.3 1.9 2.6 1.7 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.2 %X 2.6 4.1 3.0 2.5 4.2 3.5 6.8 4.9 6.7 8.1 2.9 3.5 3.1 3.9 4.5 4.0 7.7 4.9 6.6 1.3 2.1 3.1 3.8 2.8 3.2 5.2 6.0 X/R 0.65 1.33 0.86 0.72 1.44 1.39 2.32 2.04 4.86 10.13 0.76 1.19 0.99 1.43 1.98 2.09 2.99 2.80 5.16 0.75 1.05 1.25 1.93 1.60 1.78 3.60 5.07
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Padmount 3.4 3.2 2.4 3.3 3.4 4.6 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 6.50 6.50 6.50
150C Rise Aluminum
150C Rise Copper
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
115C Rise Aluminum
115C Rise Copper
Values are typical. For guaranteed values, refer to transformer manufacturer.
Table 1.5-7. 15 kV Class Primary Oil Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers

kVA %Z 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 %R 1.71 1.88 1.84 1.35 1.50 1.41 1.33 1.12 0.93 0.86 %X 4.70 4.63 4.65 4.81 4.77 5.57 5.59 5.64 5.67 5.69 X/R 2.75 2.47 2.52 3.57 3.18 3.96 4.21 5.04 6.10 6.61
80C Rise Aluminum
80C Rise Copper
65C Rise
112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
Note: Values are typical. Measurements at temperature rise +20C.
Note: Values are typical. Measurements at temperature rise +20C.
Table 1.5-8. 15 kV Class Primary Dry-Type Substation Transformers

kVA %Z 4.50 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 4.50 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 %R 2.87 2.66 2.47 2.16 1.87 1.93 1.74 1.93 1.44 1.28 0.93 0.87 0.66 0.56 %X 3.47 5.10 5.19 5.33 5.44 5.42 5.48 4.06 5.57 5.61 5.67 5.68 5.71 5.72 X/R 1.21 1.92 2.11 2.47 2.90 2.81 3.15 2.10 3.87 4.38 6.10 6.51 8.72 10.22
Table 1.5-11. 600V Primary Class NEMA Type TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers
kVA 300 300 300 500 500 750 750 Temperature Rise 80 115 150 115 150 115 150 Impedance 3.16 at 100C 3.03 at 135C 7.06 at 170C 5.97 at 135C 6.04 at 170C 7.21 at 135C No test
150C Rise
300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
80C Rise
300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
CA08104001E

Transformer Losses
September 2011
Sheet 01 106
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Loss Data

See product sections for data.
Transformer Losses at Reduced Loads

Information on losses based on actual transformer test data can be obtained from the manufacturer. Transformer manufacturers provide no load watt losses and total watt losses in accordance with ANSI standards. The calculated difference between the no load losses and the total losses are typically described as the load losses. Although transformer coils are manufactured with either aluminum or copper conductors, the industry has sometimes referred to these load losses as the copper losses.
Transformer losses for various loading can be estimated in the following manner. The no load watt losses of the transformer are due to magnetization and are present whenever the transformer is energized. The load watt losses are the difference between the no load watt losses and the full load watt losses. The load watt losses are proportional to I2R and can be estimated to vary with the transformer load by the square of the load current. For example, the approximate watts loss data for a 1000 kVA oil-lled substation transformer is shown in the table as having 1800 watts no load losses and 15,100 watts full load losses, so the load losses are approximately 13,300 watts (15,1001800). The transformer losses can be calculated for various loads as follows.
At 0% load: 1800 watts At 50% load: 1800 watts + (13,300)(0.5)2 = 1800 watts + 3325 watts = 5125 watts At 100% load: 1800 watts + 13,300 watts = 15,100 watts At 110% load: 1800 watts + (13,300)(1.1)2 = 1800 watts + 16,093 watts = 17,893 watts Because transformer losses vary between designs and manufacturers, additional losses such as from cooling fans can be ignored for these approximations.
Note: 1 watthour = 3.413 Btu.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 107

Power Equipment Losses and Enclosures/Knockout Dimensions
1.5-13
Power Equipment Losses

Table 1.5-12. Power Equipment Losses
Equipment Watts Loss 600 1400 2100 3700 500 750 840 600 1000 500 800 400 1000 1500 2400 3000 4700 200 500 750 3600 4500 4000 5000 7000 1200 300
Enclosures
The following are reproduced from NEMA 250. Table 1.5-13. Comparison of Specic Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Nonhazardous Locations
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Following Environmental Conditions Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment Falling dirt Falling liquids and light splashing Circulating dust, lint, bers and yings Settling airborne dust, lint, bers and yings Hosedown and splashing water Oil and coolant seepage Oil or coolant spraying and splashing Corrosive agents Occasional temporary submersion Occasional prolonged submersion

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Medium Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 5 and 15 kV)

1200A breaker 2000A breaker 3000A breaker 4000A breaker 600A unfused switch 1200A unfused switch 100A CL fuses 400A starter FVNR 800A starter FVNR 600A fused switch 1200A fused switch 800A breaker 1600A breaker 2000A breaker 3200A breaker 4000A breaker 5000A breaker Fuse limiters800A CB Fuse limiters1600A CB Fuse limiters2000A CB Fuse truck3200A CB Fuse truck4000A CB Structures3200A Structures4000A Structures5000A High resistance grounding
Enclosure Type 1 2 4 4X
6P
12
12K 13
Medium Voltage Starters (Indoor, 5 kV)
Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 480V)
These enclosures may be ventilated. These bers and ying are nonhazardous materials and are not considered the Class III type ignitable bers or combustible yings. For Class III type ignitable bers or combustible yings, see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
Table 1.5-14. Comparison of Specic Applications of Enclosures for Outdoor Nonhazardous Locations
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Following Environmental Conditions Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment Rain, snow and sleet Sleet Windblown dust Hosedown Corrosive agents Occasional temporary submersion Occasional prolonged submersion

Enclosure Type 3 3R 3S
4X
6P
Panelboards (Indoor, 480V)

225A, 42 circuit 800A 1200A 1350A 1600A 2000A 2500A 3200A 4000A 5000A
These enclosures may be ventilated. External operating mechanisms are not required to be operable when the enclosure is ice covered. External operating mechanisms are operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
Low Voltage Busway (Indoor, Copper, 480V)

44 per foot 60 per foot 66 per foot 72 per foot 91 per foot 103 per foot 144 per foot 182 per foot 203 per foot 39 56 92 124 244 200 > 96% efciency
Table 1.5-15. Comparison of Specic Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Hazardous Locations
Provides a Degree of Protection Against Atmospheres Typically Containing (For Complete Listing, See NFPA 497M) Acetylene Hydrogen, manufactured gas diethyl ether, ethylene, cyclopropane Gasoline, hexane, butane, naphtha, propane, acetone, toluene, isoprene Metal dust Carbon black, coal dust, coke dust Flour, starch, grain dust Fibers, yings Methane with or without coal dust

Class
Enclosure Types Enclosure Type 7 and 8, Class I Groups 9, Class II Groups A B C D E F G 10
I I I I II II II III MSHA
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Motor Control Centers (Indoor, 480V)

NEMA Size 1 starter NEMA Size 2 starter NEMA Size 3 starter NEMA Size 4 starter NEMA Size 5 starter Structures Adjustable frequency drives
For Class III type ignitable bers or combustible yings, see the National Electrical Code, Article 500. Due to the characteristics of the gas, vapor or dust, a product suitable for one class or group may not be suitable for another class or group unless so marked on the product.
Adjustable Frequency Drives (Indoor, 480V)
Note: If the installation is outdoors and/or additional protection is required by Tables 1.5-13 and 1.5-14, a combination-type enclosure is required.
Note: The information provided on power equipment losses is generic data intended to be used for sizing of HVAC equipment.
CA08104001E

Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
2 2
September 2011
Sheet 01 108
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Average Characteristics of 600V Conductors Ohms per 1000 ft (305m)

The tables below are average characteristics based on data from IEEE Standard 141-1993. Values from different sources vary because of operating temperatures, wire stranding, insulation materials and thicknesses, overall diameters, random lay of multiple conductors in conduit, conductor spacing, and other divergences in materials, test conditions and calculation methods. These tables are for 600V 5 kV and 15 kV conductors, at an average temperature of 75C. Other parameters are listed in the notes. For medium voltage cables, differences among manufacturers are considerably greater because of the wider variations in insulation materials and thicknesses, shielding, jacketing, overall diameters, and the like. Therefore, data for medium voltage cables should be obtained from the manufacturer of the cable to be used.
Application Notes
Resistance and reactance are phase-to-neutral values, based on 60 Hz AC, three-phase, four-wire distribution, in ohms per 100 ft (30m) of circuit length (not total conductor lengths) Based upon conductivity of 100% for copper, 61% for aluminum Based on conductor temperatures of 75C. Reactance values will have negligible variation with temperature. Resistance of both copper and aluminum conductors will be approximately 5% lower at 60C or 5% higher at 90C. Data shown in tables may be used without signicant error between 60 and 90C For interlocked armored cable, use magnetic conduit data for steel armor and non-magnetic conduit data for aluminum armor
Z = X +R For busway impedance data, see Tab 21 of this catalog For PF (power factor) values less than 1.0, the effective impedance Z e is calculated from Z e = R PF + X sin (arc cos PF)
For copper cable data, resistance based on tinned copper at 60 Hz; 600V and 5 kV nonshielded cable based on varnished cambric insulation; 5 kV shielded and 15 kV cable based on neoprene insulation For aluminum cable data, cable is cross-linked polyethylene insulated
Table 1.5-16. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305m) at 75C (a) Three Single Conductors
Wire Size, AWG or kcmil 8 8 (solid) 6 6 (solid) 4 4 (solid) 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 750 In Magnetic Duct 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded R X Z 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.128 0.102 0.0805 0.0640 0.0552 0.0464 0.0378 0.0356 0.0322 0.0294 0.0257 0.0216 0.0754 0.0754 0.0685 0.0685 0.0632 0.0632 0.0585 0.0570 0.0540 0.0533 0.0519 0.0497 0.0495 0.0493 0.0491 0.0490 0.0480 0.0466 0.0463 0.0495 0.814 0.790 0.515 0.501 0.327 0.318 0.210 0.170 0.139 0.115 0.0958 0.0810 0.0742 0.0677 0.0617 0.0606 0.0578 0.0551 0.0530 0.0495 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.128 0.103 0.0814 0.0650 0.0557 0.0473 0.0386 0.0362 0.0328 0.0300 0.0264 0.0223 0.0860 0.0860 0.0796 0.0796 0.0742 0.0742 0.0685 0.0675 0.0635 0.0630 0.0605 0.0583 0.0570 0.0564 0.0562 0.0548 0.0538 0.0526 0.0516 0.0497 0.816 0.791 0.516 0.502 0.329 0.321 0.214 0.174 0.143 0.121 0.101 0.0929 0.0797 0.0736 0.0681 0.0657 0.0630 0.0505 0.0580 0.0545 In Non-Magnetic Duct 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded R X Z 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.127 0.101 0.0766 0.0633 0.0541 0.0451 0.0368 0.0342 0.0304 0.0276 0.0237 0.0194 0.0603 0.0603 0.0548 0.0548 0.0506 0.0506 0.0467 0.0456 0.0432 0.0426 0.0415 0.0398 0.0396 0.0394 0.0393 0.0392 0.0384 0.0373 0.0371 0.0356 0.813 0.788 0.513 0.499 0.325 0.316 0.207 0.166 0.134 0.110 0.0871 0.0748 0.0670 0.0599 0.0536 0.0520 0.0490 0.0464 0.0440 0.0405 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.128 0.102 0.0805 0.0640 0.0547 0.0460 0.0375 0.0348 0.0312 0.0284 0.0246 0.0203 0.0688 0.0688 0.0636 0.0636 0.0594 0.0594 0.0547 0.0540 0.0507 0.0504 0.0484 0.0466 0.0456 0.0451 0.0450 0.0438 0.0430 0.0421 0.0412 0.0396 0.814 0.789 0.514 0.500 0.326 0.318 0.209 0.169 0.138 0.114 0.0939 0.0792 0.0712 0.0644 0.0586 0.0559 0.0531 0.0508 0.0479 0.0445
Note: More tables on Page 1.5-15.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 109

Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
1.5-15
Table 1.5-17. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305m) at 75C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Wire Size, AWG or kcmil 8 8 (solid) 6 6 (solid) 4 4 (solid) 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 750 In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z R X Z 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.128 0.102 0.0805 0.0640 0.0552 0.0464 0.0378 0.0356 0.0322 0.0294 0.0257 0.0216 0.0577 0.0577 0.0525 0.0525 0.0483 0.0483 0.0448 0.0436 0.0414 0.0407 0.0397 0.0381 0.0379 0.0377 0.0373 0.0371 0.0361 0.0349 0.0343 0.0326 0.813 0.788 0.513 0.499 0.325 0.316 0.207 0.166 0.135 0.110 0.0898 0.0745 0.0670 0.0598 0.0539 0.0514 0.0484 0.0456 0.0429 0.0391 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.128 0.103 0.0814 0.0650 0.0557 0.0473 0.0386 0.0362 0.0328 0.0300 0.0264 0.0223 0.0658 0.0658 0.0610 0.0610 0.0568 0.0508 0.0524 0.0516 0.0486 0.0482 0.0463 0.0446 0.0436 0.0431 0.0427 0.0415 0.0404 0.0394 0.0382 0.0364 0.814 0.789 0.514 0.500 0.326 0.317 0.209 0.168 0.137 0.114 0.0936 0.0788 0.0707 0.0640 0.0576 0.0551 0.0520 0.0495 0.0464 0.0427 In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z R X Z 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.127 0.101 0.0766 0.0633 0.0541 0.0451 0.0368 0.0342 0.0304 0.0276 0.0237 0.0197 0.0503 0.0503 0.0457 0.0457 0.0422 0.0422 0.0390 0.0380 0.0360 0.0355 0.0346 0.0332 0.0330 0.0329 0.0328 0.0327 0.0320 0.0311 0.0309 0.0297 0.812 0.787 0.512 0.498 0.324 0.315 0.206 0.164 0.132 0.107 0.0841 0.0715 0.0634 0.0559 0.0492 0.0475 0.0441 0.0416 0.0389 0.0355 0.811 0.786 0.510 0.496 0.321 0.312 0.202 0.160 0.128 0.102 0.0805 0.0640 0.0547 0.0460 0.0375 0.0348 0.0312 0.0284 0.0246 0.0203 0.0574 0.0574 0.0531 0.0531 0.0495 0.0495 0.0457 0.0450 0.0423 0.0420 0.0403 0.0389 0.0380 0.0376 0.0375 0.0366 0.0359 0.0351 0.0344 0.0332 0.813 0.788 0.513 0.499 0.325 0.316 0.207 0.166 0.135 0.110 0.090 0.0749 0.0666 0.0596 0.0530 0.0505 0.0476 0.0453 0.0422 0.0389
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 1.5-18. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 Ft (305m) at 90C (a) Three Single Conductors
Wire Size, AWG or kcmil 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 750 1000 In Magnetic Duct 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded R X Z 0.847 0.532 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.133 0.106 0.0896 0.0750 0.0644 0.0568 0.0459 0.0388 0.0338 0.0318 0.0252 0.053 0.050 0.046 0.048 0.043 0.041 0.040 0.039 0.0384 0.0375 0.0369 0.0364 0.0355 0.0359 0.0350 0.0341 0.0341 0.849 0.534 0.338 0.269 0.214 0.172 0.139 0.113 0.0975 0.0839 0.0742 0.0675 0.0580 0.0529 0.0487 0.0466 0.0424 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z 0.532 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.132 0.105 0.0892 0.0746 0.0640 0.0563 0.0453 0.0381 0.0332 0.0310 0.0243 0.068 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.055 0.053 0.051 0.0495 0.0479 0.0468 0.0459 0.0444 0.0431 0.0423 0.0419 0.0414 0.536 0.341 0.271 0.217 0.176 0.142 0.117 0.102 0.0887 0.0793 0.0726 0.0634 0.0575 0.0538 0.0521 0.0480 In Non-Magnetic Duct 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded R X Z 0.847 0.532 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.133 0.105 0.0894 0.0746 0.0640 0.0563 0.0453 0.0381 0.0330 0.0309 0.0239 0.042 0.040 0.037 0.035 0.034 0.033 0.037 0.031 0.0307 0.0300 0.0245 0.0291 0.0284 0.0287 0.0280 0.0273 0.0273 0.848 0.534 0.337 0.267 0.213 0.170 0.137 0.109 0.0945 0.0804 0.0705 0.0634 0.0535 0.0477 0.0433 0.0412 0.0363 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z 0.532 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.132 0.105 0.0891 0.0744 0.0638 0.0560 0.0450 0.0377 0.0326 0.0304 0.0234 0.054 0.050 0.047 0.045 0.044 0.042 0.041 0.0396 0.0383 0.0374 0.0367 0.0355 0.0345 0.0338 0.0335 0.0331 0.535 0.339 0.269 0.215 0.173 0.139 0.113 0.0975 0.0837 0.0740 0.0700 0.0573 0.0511 0.0470 0.0452 0.0405
Table 1.5-19. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (30m) at 90C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Wire Size, AWG or kcmil 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 750 1000 In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z R X Z 0.847 0.532 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.133 0.106 0.0896 0.0750 0.0644 0.0568 0.0459 0.0388 0.0338 0.0318 0.0252 0.053 0.050 0.046 0.048 0.043 0.041 0.040 0.039 0.0384 0.0375 0.0369 0.0364 0.0355 0.0359 0.0350 0.0341 0.0341 0.849 0.534 0.338 0.269 0.214 0.172 0.139 0.113 0.0975 0.0839 0.0742 0.0675 0.0580 0.0529 0.0487 0.0466 0.0424 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.133 0.105 0.0895 0.0748 0.0643 0.0564 0.0457 0.0386 0.0335 0.0315 0.0248 0.056 0.053 0.050 0.049 0.048 0.045 0.0436 0.0424 0.0418 0.0411 0.0399 0.0390 0.0381 0.0379 0.0368 0.340 0.270 0.216 0.174 0.141 0.114 0.100 0.0860 0.0767 0.0700 0.0607 0.0549 0.0507 0.0493 0.0444 In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV R X Z R X Z 0.847 0.532 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.133 0.105 0.0894 0.0746 0.0640 0.0563 0.0453 0.0381 0.0330 0.0309 0.0239 0.042 0.040 0.037 0.035 0.034 0.033 0.037 0.031 0.0307 0.0300 0.0245 0.0291 0.0284 0.0287 0.0280 0.0273 0.0273 0.848 0.534 0.337 0.267 0.213 0.170 0.137 0.109 0.0945 0.0804 0.0705 0.0634 0.0535 0.0477 0.0433 0.0412 0.0363 0.335 0.265 0.210 0.167 0.132 0.105 0.0893 0.0745 0.0640 0.0561 0.0452 0.0380 0.0328 0.0307 0.0237 0.045 0.042 0.040 0.039 0.038 0.036 0.0349 0.0340 0.0334 0.0329 0.0319 0.0312 0.0305 0.0303 0.0294 0.338 0.268 0.214 0.171 0.138 0.111 0.0959 0.0819 0.0722 0.0650 0.0553 0.0492 0.0448 0.0431 0.0378
CA08104001E

Conductor Ampacities
September 2011
Sheet 01 110
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Current Carrying Capacities of Copper and Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors From National Electrical Code (NEC), 2011 Edition (NFPA 70-2011)
Table 1.5-20. Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 02000V, 60 to 90C (140 to 194F).
Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway, cable or earth (directly buried), based on ambient temperature of 30C (86F). Size AWG or kcmil Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.15 [B][16]) 60C (140F) Types TW, UF RHW, THHW, THW, THWN, XHHW, USE, ZW TBS, SA, SIS, FEP, FEPB, MI, RHH, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, THW-2, THWN-2, USE-2, XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW-2 75C (167F) 90C (194F) 60C (140F) Types TW, UF RHW, THHW, THW, THWN, XHHW, USE TBS, SA, SIS, THHN, THHW, THW-2, THWN-2, RHH, RHW-2, USE-2, XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW-2 75C (167F) 90C (194F) Size AWG or kcmil
Copper 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000
Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum 20 25 35 50 65 85 100 115 130 150 175 200 230 255 285 310 335 380 420 460 475 490 520 545 590 625 650 665 14 18 25 30 40 55 75 95 110 130 150 170 195 225 260 290 320 350 380 430 475 520 535 555 585 615 665 705 735 750 20 25 30 40 55 65 75 85 100 115 130 150 170 190 210 225 260 285 310 320 330 355 375 405 435 455 470 20 30 40 50 65 75 90 100 120 135 155 180 205 230 250 270 310 340 375 385 395 425 445 485 520 545 560 25 35 45 60 75 85 100 115 135 150 175 205 230 255 280 305 350 385 420 435 450 480 500 545 585 615 630 12 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000
15 20 30 40 55 70 85 95 110 125 145 165 195 215 240 260 280 320 355 385 400 410 435 455 495 520 545 560
See NEC Section 240.4 (D).
Note: For complete details of using Table 1.5-20, see NEC Article 310 in its entirety.
Table 1.5-21. Correction Factors From NFPA 70-2011 (See Table 310.15 [B][2][a])
Ambient Temperature C 2125 2630 3135 3640 4145 4650 5155 5660 6170 7180 For ambient temperatures other than 30C (86F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the appropriate factor shown below. 1.08 1.00 0.91 0.82 0.71 0.58 0.41 1.05 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.75 0.67 0.58 0.33 1.04 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.58 0.41 1.08 1.00 0.91 0.82 0.71 0.58 0.41 1.05 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.75 0.67 0.58 0.33 1.04 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.58 0.41 Ambient Temperature F 07077 07886 08795 096104 105113 114122 123131 132140 141158 159176
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 111

1.5-17
Ampacities for Conductors Rated 02000V (Excerpted from NFPA 70-2011, 310.15)
Note: Fine Print Note (FPN) was changed to Informational Note in the 2011 NEC.
(4) Preservation of the safety benets of established industry practices and standardized procedures. (1) General. For explanation of type letters used in tables and for recognized sizes of conductors for the various conductor insulations, see Table 310.104(A) and Table 310.104(B). For installation requirements, see 310.1 through 310.15(A)(3) and the various articles of this Code. For exible cords, see Table 400.4, Table 400.5(A)(1) and Table 400.5(A)(2). (3) Adjustment Factors. (a) More Than Three CurrentCarrying Conductors in a Raceway or Cable. Where the number of current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable exceeds three, or where single conductors or multiconductor cables are installed without maintaining spacing for a continuous length longer than 24.00-inch (600 mm) and are not installed in raceways, the allowable ampacity of each conductor shall be reduced as shown in Table 310.15(B)(3)(a). Each current-carrying conductor of a paralleled set of conductors shall be counted as a current-carrying conductor.
Note: Informational Note No. 1: See Annex B, Table B.310.15(B)(2)(11), for adjustment factors for more than three current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable with load diversity. Note: Informational Note No. 2: See 366.23(A) for adjustment factors for conductors in sheet metal auxiliary gutters and 376.22(B) for adjustment factors for conductors in metal wireways.
(4) Adjustment factors shall not apply to Type AC cable or to Type MC cable under the following conditions: a. The cables do not have an overall outer jacket. b. Each cable has not more than three current-carrying conductors. c. The conductors are 12 AWG copper. d. Not more than 20 current-carrying conductors are installed without maintaining spacing, are stacked, or are supported onbridle rings. (5) An adjustment factor of 60 percent shall be applied to Type AC cable or Type MC cable under the following conditions: a. The cables do not have an overall outer jacket. b. The number of current carrying conductors exceeds 20. c. The cables are stacked or bundled longer that 24.00-inch (600 mm) without spacing being maintained. (b) More Than One Conduit, Tube, or Raceway. Spacing between conduits, tubing, or raceways shall be maintained. (c) Circular Raceways Exposed to Sunlight on Rooftops. Where conductors or cables are installed in circular raceways exposed to direct sunlight on or above rooftops, the adjustments shown in Table 1.5-22 shall be added to the outdoor temperature to determine the applicable ambient temperature for application of the correction factors in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or Table 310.15(B)(2)(b).
Note: Informational Note: One source for the average ambient temperatures in various locations is the ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(A) General.
(1) Tables or Engineering Supervision. Ampacities for conductors shall be permitted to be determined by tables as provided in 310.15(B) or under engineering supervision, as provided in 310.15(C).
Note: Informational Note No. 1: Ampacities provided by this section do not take voltage drop into consideration. See 210.19(A), Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits and 215.2(A), Informational No. 2, for feeders. Note: Informational Note No. 2: For the allowable ampacities of Type MTW wire, see Table 13.5.1 in NFPA 79-2007, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.
(2) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one ampacity applies for a given circuit length, the lowest value shall be used. Exception: Where two different ampacities apply to adjacent portions of a circuit, the higher ampacity shall be permitted to be used beyond the point of transition, a distance equal to 10 ft (3.0m) or 10 percent of the circuit length gured at the higher ampacity, whichever is less.
Note: Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for conductor temperature limitations due to termination provisions.
(B) Tables. Ampacities for conductors rated 02000V shall be as specied in the Allowable Ampacity Table 310.15(B)(16) through Table 310.15(B)(19), and Ampacity Table 310.15(B)(20) and Table 310.15(B)(21) as modied by 310.15(B)(1) through (B)(7).
Note: Informational Note: Table 310.15(B)(16) through Table 310.15(B)(19) are application tables for use in determining conductor sizes on loads calculated in accordance with Article 220. Allowable ampacities result from consideration of one or more of the following:
(1) Where conductors are installed in cable trays, the provisions of 392.80 shall apply. (2) Adjustment factors shall not apply to conductors in raceways having a length not exceeding 24.00-inch (600 mm). (3) Adjustment factors shall not apply to underground conductors entering or leaving an outdoor trench if those conductors have physical protection in the form of rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC), or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) having a length not exceeding 10 ft (3.05m), and if the number of conductors does not exceed four.
Table 1.5-22. NEC (2011) Table 310.15(B)(3)(c) Ambient Temperature Adjustment for Circular Raceways Exposed to Sunlight On or Above Rooftops
Distance Above Roof to Bottom of Conduit 00.51-inch (013.0 mm) Above 0.51-inch (13.0 mm) 3.54-inch (90.0 mm) Above 3.54-inch (90.0 mm) 11.81-inch (300.0 mm) Above 12.00-inch (300.0 mm) 36.00-inch (900.0 mm) Temperature Adder F (C) 60 (33) 40 (22) 30 (17) 25 (14)
(1) Temperature compatibility with connected equipment, especially the connection points. (2) Coordination with circuit and system overcurrent protection. (3) Compliance with the requirements of product listings or certications. See 110.3(B).
CA08104001E

(4) Bare or Covered Conductors. Where bare or covered conductors are installed with insulated conductors, the temperature rating of the bare or covered conductor shall be equal to the lowest temperature rating of the insulated conductors for the purpose of determining ampacity. (5) Neutral Conductor. (a) A neutral conductor that carries only the unbalanced current from other conductors of the same circuit shall not be required to be counted when applying the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a). (b) In a three-wire circuit consisting of two phase conductors and the neutral conductor of a four-wire, three-phase, wye-connected system, a common conductor carries approximately the same current as the line-to-neutral load currents of the other conductors and shall be counted when applying the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a). (c) On a four-wire, three-phase wye circuit where the major portion of the load consists of nonlinear loads, harmonic currents are present in the neutral conductor; the neutral conductor shall therefore be considered a currentcarrying conductor.
September 2011
Sheet 01 112
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(6) Grounding or Bonding Conductor. A grounding or bonding conductor shall not be counted when applying the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 113

Formulas and Terms
1.5-19
Table 1.5-23. Formulas for Determining Amperes, hp, kW and kVA

To Find Amperes (l) when horsepower is known Amperes (l) when kilowatts is known Amperes (l) when kva is known Kilowatts kVA Horsepower (output)
Direct Current hp 746 E % eff kW 1000 E IE 1000 I E % eff 746
Alternating Current Single-Phase hp 746 E % eff pf kW 1000 E pf kVA 1000 E l E pf 1000 IE 1000 Two-PhaseFour-Wire hp 746 2 E % eff pf kW 1000 2 E pf kVA 1000 2E l E 2 pf 1000 IE2 1000 Three-Phase hp 746 3 E % eff pf kW 1000 3 E % pf kVA 1000 3E l E 3 pf 1000 IE 3 1000
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
20 68 60 140 100 212
I E % eff pf 746 For two-phase, three-wire circuits, the current in the common conductor is
I E 2 % eff pf I E 3 % eff pf 746 746 2 times that in either of the two other conductors.
Note: Units of measurement and denitions for E (volts), I (amperes), and other abbreviations are given below under Common Electrical Terms.
Common Electrical Terms

Ampere (l) Volt (E) Ohm (R) = unit of current or rate of ow of electricity = unit of electromotive force = unit of resistance E Ohms law: I = (DC or 100% pf) R = 1,000,000 ohms = unit of apparent power = E l (single-phase) = El 3
How to Compute Power Factor

Watts Determining Watts pf = --------------------------------------------Volts Amperes
1. 1. From watthour meter. Watts = rpm of disc x 60 x Kh Where Kh is meter constant printed on face or nameplate of meter. If metering transformers are used, above must be multiplied by the transformer ratios. 2. Directly from wattmeter reading. Where: Volts = line-to-line voltage as measured by voltmeter. Amperes = current measured in line wire (not neutral) by ammeter. Table 1.5-24. Temperature Conversion
(F to C) (C to F) C 15 F 5 C 25 F 77 C 65 F 149 10 14 30 86 5 23 C = 5/9 (F32) F = 9/5(C)+32 0 32 5 41 10 50 15 59
Megohm Volt Amperes (VA)
Kilovolt Amperes (kVA) = 1000 volt-amperes Watt (W) = unit of true power = VA pf = 0.00134 hp = 1000 watts = ratio of true to apparent power kWW = -------- ----------VA kVA = unit of electrical work = 1 watt for 1 hour = 3.413 Btu = 2655 ft-lbs = 1000 watthours = measure of time rate of doing work = equivalent of raising 33,000 lbs 1 ft in 1 minute = 746 watts = ratio of maximum demand to the total connected load = ratio of the sum of individual maximum demands of the various subdivisions of a system to the maximum demand of the whole system = ratio of the average load over a designated period of time to the peak load occurring in that period
Kilowatt (kW) Power Factor (pf)
Watthour (Wh)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Kilowatt-hour (kWh) Horsepower (hp)
35 40 45 95 104 113
50 55 122 131 90 95 194 203
70 75 80 85 158 167 176 185
Demand Factor Diversity Factor
Load Factor
1 Inch = 2.54 centimeters 1 Kilogram = 2.20 lbs 1 Square Inch = 1,273,200 circular mills 1 Circular Mill = 0.785 square mil 1 Btu = 778 ft lbs = 252 calories 1 Year = 8760 hours
CA08104001E

Seismic Requirements
September 2011
Sheet 01 114
i ii 1
General
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
In the 1980s, Eaton embarked on a comprehensive program centered around designing and building electrical distribution and control equipment capable of meeting and exceeding the seismic load requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC) and California Building Code (CBC). These codes emphasize building design requirements. Electrical equipment and distribution system components are considered attachments to the building. The entire program has been updated to show compliance with the 2009 International Building Code (IBC) and the 2010 CBC seismic requirements. A cooperative effort with the equipment user, the building designer and the equipment installer ensures that the equipment is correctly anchored such that it can withstand the effects of an earthquake. Eatons electrical distribution and control equipment has been tested and seismically proven for requirements exceeding the IBC and CBC. Over 100 different assemblies representing essentially all product lines have been successfully tested and veried to seismic levels higher than the maximum seismic requirements specied in the IBC and CBC. The equipment maintained structural integrity and demonstrated the ability to function immediately after the seismic tests. A technical paper, Earthquake Requirements and Eaton Distribution and Control Equipment Seismic Capabilities (SA12501SE), provides a detailed explanation of the applicable seismic codes and Eatons equipment qualication program. The paper may be found at www.eaton.com/seismic. Type in SA12501SE in the document search eld.
Figure 1.5-1. Typical Earthquake Ground Motion Map for the United States
International Building Code (IBC)

On December 9, 1994, the International Code Council (ICC) was established as a nonprot organization dedicated to developing a single set of comprehensive and coordinated codes. The ICC foundersthe Building Ofcials and Code Administrators (BOCA), the International Conference of Building Ofcials (ICBO), and the Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI)created the ICC in response to technical disparities among the three nationally recognized model codes now in use in the U.S. The ICC offers a single, complete set of construction codes without regional limitationsthe International Building Code.
California Building Code

The 2001 CBC was based upon the 1997 UBC. In August of 2006, it was repealed by the California Building Standards Commission (CBSC) and replaced by the 2007 CBC, California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2 and used the 2006 IBC as the basis for the code. The 2010 CBC is based upon the 2009 IBC, with amendments as deemed appropriate by the CBSC. Eatons seismic qualication program fully envelopes the requirements of the 2010 CBC.
Process
According to Chapter 16 of the 2009 IBC, structure design, the seismic requirements of electrical equipment in buildings may be computed in two steps. The rst step is to determine the maximum ground motion to be considered at the site. The second step is to evaluate the equipment mounting and attachments inside the building or structure. These are then evaluated to determine appropriate seismic test requirements. The ground motion, seismic requirements of the equipment, and the seismic response spectrum requirements are discussed on Page 1.5-22, see Figure 1.5-3.
Uniform Building Code (UBC)

1997 was the nal year in which the UBC was published. It has since been replaced by the IBC.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 115

1.5-21
Ground Motion
According to the code, the rst and most important step in the process is to determine the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short periods of 0.2 seconds (SS) and at a period of 1.0 second (S1). These values are determined from a set of 24 spectral acceleration maps (Figure 1.5-1) and include numerous contour lines indicating the severity of the earthquake requirements at a particular location in the country. The spectral acceleration maps indicate low to moderate seismic requirements for the entire country, with the exception of two particular areas; the West Coast and the Midwest (the New Madrid area). The seismic requirements at the New Madrid area are approximately 30% higher than the maximum requirements of the West Coast. The maps also suggest that the high seismic requirements in both regions, West Coast and Midwest, quickly decrease as one moves away from the fault area. Therefore, the high requirements are only limited to a relatively narrow strip along the fault lines. Just a few miles away from this strip, only a small percentage of the maximum requirements are indicated. Assuming the worse condition, which is a site directly located near a fault, the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short periods of 0.2 seconds (SS) is equal to 285% gravity and at 1.0 second period (S1) is 124% gravity. These numbers are the maximum numbers for the entire country except for the New Madrid area. These particular sites are on the border of California and Mexico (S1) and in Northern California (SS). To help understand the 2009 IBC (and 2010 CBC) seismic parameters for a specic building location, the link to the US Geological Society is extremely helpful: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/ research/hazmaps/design/ Download the le Java Ground Motion Parameter Calculatorand save it to your hard drive, then run the executable that was downloaded. The program will allow one to enter the latitude and longitude of a location. (One must be connected to the Internet to run this application, even after downloading the program.) The IBC (CBC) seismic parameters for that location will then be displayed.
If the latitude and longitude of the building location is not known, another convenient Web site is available that will provide this information based upon a street address: http://geocoder.us/ To determine the maximum considered earthquake ground motion for most site classes (A through D), the code introduces site coefcients, which when applied against the location-specic site class, produces the adjusted maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration for the required site. The site coefcients are dened as Fa at 0.2 seconds short period and FV at 1.0 second period. From the tables in the code, the highest adjusting factor for SS is equal to 1.0 and the highest adjusting factor for S1 is 1.50. As a result, the adjusted maximum considered earthquake spectral response for 0.2 second short period (SMS) and at 1.0 second (SM1), adjusted for site class effects, are determined from the following equations: SMS = Fa SS = 1.0 x 2.85g = 2.85g SM1 = Fv S1 = 1.5 x 1.24g = 1.86g ASCE 7 (American Society of Civil Engineers), Section 11.4, provides a plot of the nal shape of the design response spectra of the seismic ground motion. The plot is shown in Figure 1.5-2. ASCE 7 is referenced throughout the IBC as the source for numerous structural design criteria. The design spectral acceleration curve can now be computed. The peak spectral acceleration (SDS) and the spectral acceleration at 1.0 second (SD1) may now be computed from the following formulas in the code: SDS = 2/3 x SMS = 2/3 x 2.85g = 1.90g SD1 = 2/3 x SM1 = 2/3 x 1.8g = 1.24g
Spectural Response Acceleration Sa(g)
SDS, the peak spectral acceleration, extends between the values of T 0 and TS. T0 and TS are dened in the codes as follows: T0 = 0.2 SD1/SDS = 0.2 x 1.24/1.90 = 0.131 seconds (7.63 Hz) TS = SD1/SDS = 1.24/1.90 = 0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz) According to the IBC and ASCE 7, the spectral acceleration (Sa) at periods less than 1.45 seconds may be computed by using the following formula: Sa = SDS (0.6 T/T0 + 0.4) Where T is the period where Sa is being calculated: Therefore, the acceleration at 0.0417 seconds (24 Hz), for example, is equal to:
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.0417/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.12g

The acceleration at 0.03 seconds (33 Hz) is equal to: Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.03/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.02g At zero period (innite frequency), T = 0.0, the acceleration (ZPA) is equal to: Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.0/0.131) + 0.4) = 0.76g (ZPA) The acceleration to frequency relationship in the frequency range of 1.0 Hz to TS is stated equal to: Sa = SD1/T Where Sa is the acceleration at the T period. At 1.0 Hz (T=1.0) this equation yields the following acceleration: Sa = 1.24/1 = 1.24g
SDS Sa = SD1 T
17 18
S T Sa = D12 L T
SD1
19 20
T0
TS
1.0 Period T (sec)
TL
Figure 1.5-2. Design Response Spectrum

21

Testing has demonstrated that the lowest dominant natural frequency of Eatons electrical equipment is above 3.2 Hz. This indicates that testing at 1.24g at 1 Hz is not necessary. In addition, having the low end of the spectra higher than realistically required forces the shake table to move at extremely high displacements to meet the spectral acceleration at the low frequencies. Testing to accommodate the low end of the spectra using this acceleration component can result in testing to a factor 2 to 3 times greater than that realistically required. Through testing experience and data analysis, the seismic acceleration at 1.0 Hz is taken equal to 0.7g, which will ensure that the seismic levels are achieved well below 3.2 Hz. This yields a more vigorous test over a wider range of seismic intensities. In developing the seismic requirements above, it is important to recognize the following: T0 and TS are dependent on SMS and SD1. If SD1 is small relative to SMS then T0 and TS will be smaller and the associated frequencies will shift higher. The opposite is also true. This must be realized in developing the complete required response spectrum (RRS). Therefore, it is not adequate to stop the peak spectral acceleration at 7.63 Hz. There are other contour line combinations that will produce higher T0. To account for this variation it is almost impossible to consider all combinations. However, a study of the spectral acceleration maps indicates that all variations with high magnitude of contour lines could very well be enveloped by a factor of 1.5. Therefore, T0 is recomputed as follows: T0 = 0.2 SD1/(SDS x 1.5) = 0.2 x 1.24/ (1.90 x 1.5) = 0.087 seconds (11.49 Hz) Eaton ensures maximum certication by requiring peak acceleration during testing to extend to 12 Hz. It can be seen that Eaton has elected to develop generic seismic requirements that envelop two criteria: The highest possible spectral peak accelerations and ZPA The maximum frequency range required for many different sites
September 2011
Sheet 01 116
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
This completes the ground motion design response spectrum. The spectral accelerations are equal to 0.76g at ZPA, or 33 Hz, and increases linearly to a peak acceleration of 1.90g at 0.09 seconds (or 11.49 Hz) and stays constant to 0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz), then gradually decreases to 1.24g at 1 second (or 1.0 Hz). This curve is shown in Figure 1.5-3.
Acceleration (g peak)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
Test Response Spectrum (TRS)
Zero Period Acceleration = Maximum Table Test Motion
Spectrum Dip Not Important Because Frequency is Not an Equipment Natural Frequency
1.0 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3
Required Response Spectrum (RRS)
Zero Period Acceleration = Maximum Floor Motion
.2
.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
Frequency Hz
Figure 1.5-3. Design Response Spectrum
ASCE 7 Section 13.3Seismic Demands on Non-Structural Components

ASCE 7 Paragraph 13.3.1 (IBC Section 1621.1.4) provides a formula for computing the seismic requirements of electrical and mechanical equipment inside a building or a structure. The formula is designed for evaluating the equipment attachment to the equipment foundations. The seismic loads are dened as: Fp = 0.4 ap SDS Wp (1 + 2 Z/h)/(Rp/Ip) Where:
Rp = Component response modication factor that for electrical equipment varies from 2.5 to 6.0. Ip = Component importance factor that is either 1.0 or 1.5. Z = Highest point of equipment in a building relative to grade elevation. h = Average roof height of building relative to grade elevation. The following parameters produce the maximum required force:

Fp = Seismic design force imposed at the components center of gravity (C.G.) and distributed relative to component mass distribution. ap = Component amplication factor that varies from 1.00 to 2.50. SDS = Ground level spectral acceleration, short period. Wp = Component operating weight.
Z is taken equal to h (equipment on roof) Ip is taken equal to 1.5 ap is taken equal to 2.5 Rp is taken equal to 2.5 SDS is equal to 1.90g as indicated in the previous section
The acceleration (Fp/Wp) at the C.G. of the equipment is then computed equal to: Acceleration = Fp/Wp = 0.4 x 2.5 x 1.90g (1 + 2) / (2.5/1.5) = 3.42g
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 117

1.5-23
For equipment on (or below) grade, the acceleration at the equipment C.G. is then computed equal to: Acceleration = Fp/Wp = 0.4 x 2.5 x 1.90g (1 + 0) / (2.5 /1.5) = 1.14g It is impractical to attempt to measure the actual acceleration of the C.G. of a piece of equipment under seismic test. The seismic response at the middle of base mounted equipment close to its C.G. is at least 50% higher than the oor input at the equipment natural frequency. The base accelerations associated with the accelerations of FP/WP at the C.G. of the equipment could then be computed as 3.42 /1.5 = 2.28g. It is the equipment base input acceleration that is measured and documented during seismic testing and is the acceleration value shown on Eatons seismic certicates.
10
i
IBC 2009/CBC 2010 IBC 2009 New Madrid
ii 1
Acceleration (g)
1 Eaton Seismic
2 3 4
0.1 1 10 Frequency (Hz) 100
5 6 7
Final Combined Requirements

To better compare all seismic levels and determine the nal envelope seismic requirements, the 2010 CBC, 2009 IBC for California, and 2009 IBC for New Madrid area seismic requirements are plotted in Figure 1.5-4. All curves are plotted at 5% damping. An envelopment of the seismic levels in the frequency range of 3.2 Hz to 100 Hz is also shown. This level is taken as Eatons generic seismic test requirements for all certications. Eaton performed additional seismic test runs on the equipment at approximately 120% of the generic enveloping seismic requirements (see Figure 1.5-5). Eaton has established this methodology to provide additional margin to accommodate potential changes with the spectral maps, thus eliminating the need for additional testing.
Figure 1.5-4. Required Response Spectrum Curve

10
8
Eaton 120% Seismic Envelope
9
Acceleration (g) Eaton 100% Seismic Envelope 1
10 11 12 13
0.1
10 Frequency (Hz)
100
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 1.5-5. Eaton Test Required Response Spectrum Curve
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 01 118
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Product Specic Test Summaries

Table 1.5-25. Distribution Equipment Tested and Seismically Proven Against Requirements within IBC 2009
Eaton Equipment Low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear DS II Magnum DS High resistance ground Panelboards Pow-R-Line C 1a, 1a-LX, 2a, 2a-LX, 3a, 3E, 4, 5P, F-16 and Pow-R-Command Switchboards Instant Pow-R-Line 5P Integrated facilities Pow-R-Line C Multimeter Pow-R-Line i MCC IT. Advantage Series 2100 FlashGard Freedom 2100 Low voltage busway Pow-R-Way and associated ttings Pow-R-Way III and associated ttings Dry type transformers Mini powercenters EP, EPT, DS-3, DT-3 Transfer switches Automatic transfer switch equipment Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) Battery modules UPSs Enclosed control safety switches General-duty Heavy-duty Elevator control module Medium voltage switchgear Type VacClad-W Type MMVS MEF Type MVS/MEB MV bus Metal-enclosed non-segregated phase bus Network protectors Type CM-22 Type CMD Medium voltage control AMPGARD SC9000 drives Substation transformers Dry-type Liquid type Unitized dry-type power centers
Figure 1.5-6. Sample Seismic Certicate
Note: See www.eaton.com/seismic for current seismic certicates.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 01 119

1.5-25
Additional Design and Installation Considerations

When installing electrical distribution and control equipment, consideration must be given as to how the methods employed will affect seismic forces imposed on the equipment, equipment mounting surface, and conduits entering the equipment. Eaton recommends that when specifying a brand of electrical distribution and control equipment, the designer references the installation manuals of that manufacturer to ascertain that the requirements can be met through the design and construction process. For Eaton electrical distribution and control products, the seismic installation guides for essentially all product lines can be found at our Web site: http://www.eaton.com/seismic. Electrical designers must work closely with the structural or civil engineers for a seismic qualied installation. Consideration must be given to the type of material providing anchorage for the electrical equipment.
If steel, factors such as thickness or gauge, attachment via bolts or welding, and the size and type of hardware must be considered. If concrete, the depth, the PSI, the type of re-enforcing bars used, as well as the diameter and embedment of anchorage all must be considered. The designer must also give consideration if the equipment will be secured to the wall, versus stand-alone or freestanding, which requires the equipment to withstand the highest level of seismic forces. Top cable entry should be avoided for large enclosures, as accommodation for cable/conduit exibility will need to be designed into the system. For a manufacturer to simply state Seismic Certied or Seismic Qualied does not tell the designer if the equipment is appropriate for the intended installation.
Note: Eaton recommends that designers conrm with the manufacturer if the seismic certication supplied with the equipment is based on:
Stand-Alone or Free-Standing Equipment

If stand-alone or free-standing, then this may require that additional width space be allowed at each end of the equipment for additional seismic bracing supplied by the manufacturer. Additional thought must be given to the clearances around the equipment to rigid structural edices. Space must be allowed for the differing motions of the equipment and the structure, so that they do not collide during a seismic event and damage one another.
Note: If the equipment is installed as standalone or free-standing, with additional seismic bracing at each end and not attached to the structure as tested, and yet, it is tted tightly against a structural wall, then this would be an incorrect installation for the application of the seismic certicate.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1. ACTUAL shaker table test as required by the IBC and CBC. 2. The seismic certicate and test data clearly state if the equipment was tested as free-standing anchored at the bottom of the equipment to the shaker table. 3. Structure attached, that is, anchored at the center of gravity (C.G.) or at the TOP of the equipment to a simulated wall on the shaker table.
Furthermore, if conduits are to be installed overhead into the equipment, does the design call for exible conduits of sufcient length to allow for the conicting motion of the equipment and the structure during a seismic event so as to not damage the conductors contained therein, and the terminations points within the equipment.
Structure Attached Equipment

The designer must work closely with the structural engineer if the equipment is to be attached to the structure to ascertain that the internal wall re-enforcement of the structure, type of anchor, and depth of embedment is sufcient to secure the equipment so that the equipment, conduits and structure move at or near the same frequency.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 01 120
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring

September 2011
Sheet 02 001
2.0-1
Contents
Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring Overview Power Xpert Architecture Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-2 Power Xpert Network Connectivity Power Xpert Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1 Power Xpert Gateway 200E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1 Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-6 Ethernet-Enabled Power Quality & Energy (PQ&E)IQ Meters . . . . 2.1-18 Ethernet-Enabled Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Protective Relays . . 2.1-19 Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-21 IPONI Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23 Breaker Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-24 I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25 Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-26 Power Xpert Ethernet Switches Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1 Copper Ethernet Cable Wiring Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-2 Fiber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-3 X-Slot Connectivity Options Power Xpert Gateway Power Distribution Products (PDP) Card . . . . . 2.3-1 Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3 Monitoring Software Power Xpert Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-1 Power Xpert Software Optional Modules/Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-4 Foreseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20 Power Xpert Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20 Power Management Systems & Products for Third-Party Integration Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1 RS-485 PONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1 DPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1 MINTII RS-232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2 mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3 PMINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16901 & Section 26 27 13.11 & Section 16911 Section 26 09 13.13 Addressable Relay II. . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16902, Section 26 29 05, Paragraph 2.02.C Paragraph 2.02.C BIMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16901, Section 26 27 13.11 & Paragraph 2.04.A Paragraph 2.04.A SMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16901, Section 26 27 13.11 & Paragraph 2.04 Paragraph 2.04
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.0-2
Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring Overview
September 2011
Sheet 02 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Xpert Architecture Introduction

Enabling Power System Management
Eatons Power Xpert Architecture (PXA) provides a complete hardware/ software solution to manage your entire power system. Power Xpert Architecture consists of Power Xpert meters, gateways, switches and software. Power Xpert devices are devices that can provide by themselves, or facilitate for others, Ethernet network protocols to communicate with your critical infrastructure components. Power Xpert devices provide the intelligent hardware connectivity layer to allow Web-enabled communications throughout the power system.
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches

Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet switches are ideal for extending Ethernet networks in harsh, industrial environments. Power Xpert Ethernet switches provide communications from the factory oor or facility basement to the front end ofce.
Foreseer Services
Foreseer Software and Engineering Services provide the vendor with independent, power and energy infrastructure integration solutions that help companies reduce energy consumption and unplanned downtime due to the failure of critical power, environmental, safety or security systems.
Power Xpert Software

Power Xpert Software is a comprehensive solution for system-level management of your power infrastructure via a Web-browser. Power Xpert Software provides a clear picture of what is happening at a component, device and system level. Because no two organizations needs are the same, Power Xpert Software is available in two editions.
Power Xpert Reporting

Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works in conjunction with Power Xpert Software or Foreseer Services, allowing a view past individual measurements, trend graphs and events. It consolidates complex data from a multitude of devices from around the globe into easy-tounderstand graphical reports.
Power Xpert Software Professional Edition

Geared toward end users, with built-in support for Eaton power distribution products such as switchgear, UPSs, breakers, PDUs, RPPs, meters, relays, VFDs and MCCs among others. Eaton products connect with the software directly via an Ethernet connection, while legacy devices use a Power Xpert Gateway to Web enable their communications. A subset of third-party meters and devices are supported as standard via the gateway connection.
Power Xpert Meters

Power Xpert Meters provide measurement of the critical elements found in power systems, including voltage, power, current, transients, harmonics or even time. Power Xpert Meters provide Web-enabled communications for use through a Web browser or with the Power Xpert Software or thirdparty monitoring systems.
Support for Existing PowerNet Systems

Power Xpert Software is directly compatible with existing PowerNet systems v.3.32 and higher. All communications hardware devices such as MINT II can be connected to Power Xpert Software through the PowerNet server for conguration of the INCOM communication devices.
Power Xpert Gateways

Power Xpert Gateways are capable of Web-enabling electrical devices contained in electrical gear via a standard Web-browser on the Ethernet network. Standard on-board Web pages eliminate the need for any customer programming or software.
Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition

Geared toward advanced power users, system integrators and enterprises with heterogeneous device spectrum and system developers who can take advantage of the included SNMP and Modbus integration development utilities.
Power Xpert Gateway (X-Slot) Cards

Eatons Power Xpert Gateway Cards (PXGX) for the UPS and PDP provide Web-enabled, real-time monitoring of your important infrastructure equipment, including single- and three-phase Eaton UPSs and Eaton Power Distribution Units, Eaton Remote Power Panels, Rack Power Modules, and the Eaton Energy Management System for power quality status and fast response to power-related events.
Extensive support for third-party devices via standard SNMP and Modbus TCP protocols Large variety of ready-made thirdparty drop-in drivers
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 003
2.0-3
Power Xpert Architecture
i ii
a 1
Web Browser e (WAN) Email (SMTP) Data Export (csv)
h g
Waveform Data Capture and Acquisition Trending j 3rd Party HMI Software Network Time Server
1 2
Internet Web Browser (LAN) b HTTP

2
BACnet/IP
l
NTP
Modbus TCP/IP Power Xpert Ethernet Switch
BACnet/WS+
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Power Xpert 4 Gateway 200E
Power Xpert 5 Gateway 400E
Power Xpert Ethernet Switch Motor Controls

n o p q
Power Xpert Meter 2000
3 m
3
5
Power Xpert Gateway 600E
Power Distribution r
4 5
MultiPort Device Server ATS

Alarm Energy
12
IQ 130/140/150 Meters
IQ Analyzer Meter w/PONI Card IQ 250/250 Meters
STS
19
6 7 8 9 10 11
IQ 35M
20
IQ MESII GEN & CTRL
PDU
u
C440/441 21 Overload Relay CRAC

16
13
IQ DP-4000 Meter w/PONI Card IQ 220/230 Meters
Critical Power Distribution & Cooling

17
Digtal Input Module KYZ
14
Eaton PDU
V 15
InsulGard Relays SVX9000 MVX9000 Drive
DT-1150 Trip Unit
Breaker Interface 8 Module w/PONI Card 3rd Party Motor Relays

9
OPTIM Trip Unit
18
Eaton UPS
EOLR EOLTR
10
3rd Party Protective Relays
MP-3000/4000 FP-4000/5000 Motor Protection Relays
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Product Name Power Xpert Software Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Power Xpert 6-Port Ethernet Switch Power Xpert Gateway 200E Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E IQ Analyzer Digitrip DT1150 Breaker Interface Module OPTIM Trip Unit MP-3000/MP-4000/MD-3000 DT-3000/FP-4000/FP-5000 Energy/Power Sentinel IQ 130/140/150 Meters IQ 250/260 Meters InsulGard Relay SVX9000/MVX9000 Drive Digital Input Module KYZ Eaton PDU w/PXGX PDP Card Eaton UPS w/PXGX UPS Card IQ 35M IQ MESII C440/441 Overload Relay
Page Reference 2.4-1 2.5-1, 3.1-1, 3.1-20 2.2-1 2.1-1 2.1-6 3.3-1 6.0-12 2.1-24, 6.0-14, 20.1-17, 21.0-7, 26.1-27 21.0-5, 27.4-10 4.2-11, 4.2-17, 4.3-1 4.1-1, 4.1-11, 4.1-16 3.2-15, 24.0-42 2.1-18, 3.1-35, 20.1-17, 21.0-6, 25.5-14 2.1-18, 3.1-32, 20.1-16, 21.0-7, 25.5-14 4.5-1, 5.3-1, 6.0-15, 7.3-4, 8.0-9, 41.4-11 29.1-33, 29.1-35, 29.1-37, 31.0-1, 31.4-1 2.1-25 2.3-1 2.3-3 3.2-1 3.2-10 4.2-1, 4.2-5
3rd Party PQ Meters EOLR EOLR Power Sentinel Meter
11
12 13 14
Energy Sentinel Meter EOLTR
Freedom MCC
MV Starter
MV Switchgear
LV Switchgear
Eatons Assembled Equipment may include one or more of the devices with communications shown in the above drawing. Ethernet Network QC Port Network INCOM Network RS-485 Network End of line resistor End of line termination resistor
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EOLR EOLTR
Figure 2.0-1. Power Xpert System Overview See Notes on Page 2.0-4.
CA08104001E
2.0-4
September 2011
Sheet 02 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Xpert SystemNotes

a. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)Device events and periodic log le attachments are sent to users in the form of an e-mail from the following Power Xpert products: Foreseer Services, Power Xpert Software, Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/ 6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateway 600E, 800E and Power Xpert Gateway UPS and PDP Cards. b. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP)Web browser access is available on the following Power Xpert products: Foreseer Services, Power Xpert Software, Power Xpert Meters 4000/6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert Gateway UPS and PDP Cards. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)A secure protocol allowing Web browser access on the following Power Xpert products: Power Xpert Software, Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert Gateway Cards. c. Network Time Server (NTP) Network Time Protocol (Clientside) is available on the following Power Xpert products: Foreseer Services, Power Xpert Software, Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/ 6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert Gateway UPS and PDP Cards. d. Modbus TCP/IPModbus TCP/IP over Ethernet is available on the following Power Xpert products: Foreseer Services, Power Xpert Software, Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert Gateway UPS and PDP Cards. Modbus register maps are available online at www.eaton.com/powerxpert. e. Data ExportData les consist of metered data and event log information that is exported from the meter, gateway or software in the form of a .csv (comma separated variable) le. Supported products are: Power Xpert Gateway PXG 600E/800E, PXGXUPS, PXGXPDP, Power Xpert Meter 2000/4000/6000/8000 and Power Xpert Software. f. BACnet/IPOver Ethernet is available on the following Power Xpert products: Power XPert Gateways (200E/400E/600E/800E) and Power Xpert Gateway Cards (UPS, PDP). g. Data TrendingViewing trended data in a standard web browser interface in the form of a graphed line for one or more data points is available for the following products: Power Xpert Gateway 600E/800E, PXGXUPS, PXGXPDP, Power Xpert Meter 2000/4000/ 6000/8000 and Power Xpert Software. h. Waveform CaptureThe ability to capture a waveform and/or export the waveform as a standard comtrade le format is available on the following products: Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000. i. Waveform Acquisition and ExportThe ability to acquire a waveform from another device that natively captures a waveform internally and then export that waveform in a standard comtrade le format is supported by the following devices: PXG 600E/800E (provides data acquisition and comtrade conversion for: IQ Analyzer, DT1150 and FP-5000).
Note: The Power Xpert Meters 4000/6000/8000 also export natively captured waveforms as comtrade le format.
l. BACnet/WS+Is based upon the protocol specication developed by the ASHRAE standards group as an Addendum c to Standard 135-2004. Reference: [BACnetA Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks. Public Review Draft, ASHRAE Standard. BSR/ASHRAE Addendum c to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004. First Public Review. Released: October 22, 2004. 32 pages. Copyright (c) American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. August 30, 2004.] This draft shows proposed changes to the current BACnet standard.
Note: Eaton Corporation has extended this protocol addendum with a (+) to signify the addition of an event-driven behavior to the existing polled data acquisition model. This allows optimization in communications between Power Xpert devices and Power Xpert Software.
m. Power Xpert Ethernet Switch The Eaton Power Xpert Ethernet switch provides connectivity between Power Xpert devices on a common subnetwork. The 6-port version of the switch shown provides six RJ-45 network ports. As an option 1 or 2 of these ports can be substituted to be ST-Type ber connections. n. Multiport Terminal ServerIs a device that is used to add network connectivity to serial devices. These terminal servers offer 8 or 16 RS-232/485 serial ports to connect a variety of serial devices including meter devices, UPS, PDU, static switch, automatic transfer switch, generators, computer room air conditioners, and other commercial, industrial or business automation equipment. The serial ports use standard RJ-45 or DB-9 connectors for convenient cabling, and optional adapters are available as well.
j. Third-Party HMI Software IntegrationIs achieved through the Modbus TCP/IP interface on all Power Xpert devices. If PowerNet software is used in the system, then an OPC server is available. k. Proprietary Serial Device Protocols over EthernetThe ability to communicate with third-party equipment is achieved by rst converting the physical serial media to Ethernet by using a standard serial to Ethernet multiport terminal server (see Note k.). Next, a device driver library is required to convert the proprietary protocol to an Eaton internal standard to allow the data to be integrated within Eaton software. Products that support this type of thirdparty device integration are Foreseer Services.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 005
2.0-5
o. Single-port Device ServerIs a device that is used to add network connectivity to a single serial device. These device servers offer a single RS-232/485 serial port to connect a variety of serial devices including meter devices, UPS, PDU, static switch, automatic transfer switch, generators, computer room air conditioners, and other commercial, industrial or business automation equipment. The serial ports use standard RJ-45 or DB-9 connectors for convenient cabling, and optional adapters are available as well. p. PXG 600E/800E COM2 Port Is used to communicate on a Modbus RS-232/485 network or on an Eaton QCPort (IT) bus. The user may choose between a DB-9 or terminal strip connector to connect up to 32, RS-45 serial devices. q. PXG 600E/800E COM1 Port Is used to communicate on a Modbus RS-232/485 network or on an Eaton QCPort (IT) bus. A terminal strip connector is provided for this interface. Up to 32 devices may be connected to this port.
r. PXG 600E/800E INCOM PortIs used to communicate on an Eaton INCOM device network only. Up to 64 devices may be connected to this port. s. PXG 200E/400E PortsThe ports on the PXG 200E/400E operate the same as on the PXG 600A; however, there is only one RS-232/485 port to be used for Modbus or QCPort. t. PONI (Product Oriented Network Interface)Is used to connect the Breaker Interface Module (8) to an INCOM network. u. PXGXPDP CardIs used to connect an Eaton PDU (Power Distribution Unit) or RPP (Remote Power Panel) to an Ethernet network. Available interfaces are: HTTP (Web) SNMP, SMTP (e-mail), Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP and BACnet/WS+. v. PXGXUPS CardIs used to connect an Eaton UPS to an Ethernet network. Available interfaces are: HTTP (Web) SNMP, SMTP (e-mail), Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP and BACnet/WS+.
Important Note: When connecting multiple Modbus RTU devices to either a multiport terminal server or a Power Xpert Gateway over an RS-485 daisychain network, the baud rate, data frame (stop bits, data bits and parity), byte order (standard or reversed) and physical wiring (two- or four-wire) must be the same for all devices connected.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.0-6

September 2011
Sheet 02 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 007
Power Management Systems & Products Network Connectivity

2.1-1
Fixed List of supported devices (no ability to add new product support via EDS upload); however, new supported devices will be added during rmware updates.

i ii 1 2
Bus Page
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway 200E (PXG 200E) is designed to provide a Web-enabled gateway to serially communicating energy meters via a standard Web browser. The PXG 200E supports revenue grade single and multipoint energy meters via Modbus RTU and INCOM. Operates as a cost-effective hardware solution for better energy management; no software required; can export data for use in other new or existing monitoring systems. The PXG 200E allows you to:
IQ 35M IQ Energy Sentinel IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 220/230 IQ 220M/230M IQ 250 IQ 260 IQ MESII DIM KYZ (WAGES) EI NEXUS 1200 Series PM710
3 4 5 6 7
Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots
Monitor energy usage patterns and reveal opportunities for efciency improvements Remotely monitor real-time conditions and prole 5-minute interval trend logs, and export data in csv format Allocate energy costs to departments or processes Reduce peak demand surcharges Reduce power factor penalties Identify billing discrepancies Allows user to daisy-chain multiple Ethernet compatible downstream devices via RJ-45 port (for specics, see Page 2.1-5, Figure 2.1-5) Connect to downstream devices via a Web browser, Modbus master or SNMP client separately or concurrently
Device Page
8 9
Home Page
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.1-2

Table 2.1-1. PXG 200E Features
Features Total number of supported devices Maximum number of INCOM devices supported Maximum number of Modbus devices supported Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM and Modbus RTU) Number of downstream communication ports Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously USB port for conguration Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100Base-T Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported SNMP client access v.1 INCOM slave action commands supported INCOM date and time settings supported Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Device summary screens per main, bus and device Event notication via the Web interface Secure Ethernet communicationsSSL encryption Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list IPv4 support Save and restore conguration le Interval loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel Ability to upload additional or modied EDS les Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE le format Set user-dened events Trend graph displayed Data loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel Event loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel E-mail notication on events and threshold alarms Custom summary Web page creation Ability to create custom events Supports SAM3Z energy meters BACnet/IP support
September 2011
Sheet 02 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PXG 200E 64 64 32 Yes 2 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No No No Yes
The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway 200E Includes:

The Power Xpert Gateway module Mounting provisions and required hardware for panel and DIN rail mounting CD-ROM: contains the user manual, Modbus register maps, USB driver and other associated les

Figure 2.1-1. Power Xpert Gateway with DIN Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)
Expected availability 4Q11.
Table 2.1-2. Supported Devices

Supported Devices Protocol INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Device Type I/O Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Device Name DIM KYZ (WAGES) IQ MESII IQ 220/230 IQ Energy Sentinel IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 220M/230M IQ 250 IQ 260 EI NEXUS 1200 Series IQ 35M

HTTP
Web Services

MB TCP
INCOM Pass-Thru

SNMP
File Export csv

Modbus Pass-Thru
BACnet/IP
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 009

Dimensions
2.1-3
Power Xpert GatewayDimensions in Inches (mm)
i ii 1 2 3
24 Vdc Input Power
COM 1 Port: RS-485 Connection for up to 32 Modbus RTU Devices
INCOM Port: RS-485 Connection for up to 64 INCOM Devices
RJ-45 Connection to the LAN
RJ-45 Connection to the Other Ethernet Devices
USB Connection for Local Conguration Capability
Power and Trafc Indicator Lights
4 5 6
Figure 2.1-2. Power Xpert Gateway 200E

10.75 (273.1)
0.19 (6) (4.8)
10.25 (260.4)
7
0.56 (14.2) 1.60 (40.6)
2.00 1.12 (50.8) (28.5) 0.56 (14.2)
8 9
8.75 (222.3) Front
0.24 (6.1) 0.25 (6.4)
10 11 12
Figure 2.1-3. Power Xpert Gateway 200E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
8.75 (222.3)
13 14 15
4.30 (109.2)
16 17 18
0.60 (15.2)
19 20
Figure 2.1-4. Power Xpert Gateway 200E
21
2.1-4

Technical Data and Specications
September 2011
Sheet 02 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Table 2.1-3. PXG 200E Part Numbers
Description Power Xpert Gateway 200E Power supply24 Vdc Mounting bracket kit Style Number 103008420-5591 ELC-PS02 66B2146G01 Catalog Number PXG200E ELC-PS02 PXGACC01
Power Input

Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.8A Input voltage range: 20% Nominal 8 watts maximum 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) 40 to 185F (40 to 85C) 5 to 95% noncondensing at 50C 2.10 x 4.50 x 8.90 (53.3 x 114.3 x 226.1) 1.5 lbs
Power Consumption
Operating Temperature
Memory
Flash: 1 GB RAM: 128 MB
Serial Protocols Supported

INCOM Modbus RTU
Ambient Storage Temperature
Communication Ports
Network port: two 10/100Base-T RJ-45 connector Conguration port: one USB port Serial ports PXG 200E One RS-485 port for connection to INCOM devices One RS-485 port for connection to Modbus RTU devices
Supported Devices
Refer to www.eaton.com/pxg for most current list. Call for information on additional devices.
Relative Humidity
Size (H x D x L) in Inches (mm)
Web Browsers Recommended

IE 6.0 or higher Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher Google Chrome: Future
Weight
Regulatory and Standards Compliance

UL 508, Standard for Programmable Controller Equipment FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B, Sections 15.107b and 15.109b EN55022: 1994 Class A, Information Technology Equipment EN 61000-6-2:2001 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Party 6-2: Immunity for Industrial Environments
Network Protocols Supported

Note: Future; see www.eaton.com/pxg for most recent specications.
12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Modbus TCP/IP: supports data access from Modbus TCP clients Web server: supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS) DHCP: supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled SNMP: supports common network management tools NTP: supports time synchronization via a network time server for PXG synchronization SMTP: supports mail server for e-mail notication BACnet/IP: supports data access from BACnet/IP clients
Number of Devices Supported
PXG 200E 64 total with INCOM Port + COM 1 port not to exceed 64. Port limitations are as follows: INCOM port: up to 64 INCOM devices COM 1 port: up to 32 Modbus devices
Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. Although every attempt has been made to ensure the accuracy of information contained within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness, correctness or accuracy and assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options.
Note: BACnet/IP support expected 4Q11.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 011

2.1-5
PXG-E Daisy Chain Application

The PXG-E allows for units to be connected together through two RJ-45 10/100 connectors on the front of the PXG-E series of products. This arrangement is a pass-through of Ethernet communications allowing a single network drop to connect up to ve Ethernet communicating devices. The maximum length of a copper cable run should not exceed 295 ft (90m) total.
Ethernet LAN
Note: In this conguration, if any of the PXG-E units go ofine or lose power, the communication to the downstream Ethernet devices will lose connection to the LAN.
i ii 1 2 3 4
LAN Connection
5 6
295 ft (90m) PXM2000
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 2.1-5. PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
CA08104001E
2.1-6

September 2011
Sheet 02 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
The PXG 600E/800E allow you to enable pre-selected parameters to be trended for each supported device. Selecting the trend symbol will generate a realtime graph for that parameter and can be viewed for the past 24 hours, seven days, 30 days or all past history. The PXG 600E/800E also offer direct e-mail notications to up to 10 users. Select from event notications, data logs, interval log, event logs and heartbeat e-mails. The PXG 800E brings this communication hardware-only solution closer to those requirements that have previously only been met by a software package. The PXG 800E includes all the functionality of the PXG 600E. Additional features include: Creation of custom summary Web pages on the user interface Ability to create custom events from existing device parameters or events Ability to communicate wirelessly with the SAM3Z submetering system
Home Page
Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and 800E are typically installed in an electrical assemblya motor control center, low/ medium voltage switchgear or switchboard to consolidate data available from components such as trip units, meters, motor controllers and protective relays.
General Description
Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and 800E (PXG 400E/600E/800E) provide a cost-effective method to easily Webenable Eaton and third-party products. The PXG 400E/600E/800E series offers improved performance over the previously offered series, logging in the PXG 600E/800E, daisy chaining capabilities (Page 2.1-8, Figure 2.1-8) and design enhancements including a new processor and additional RAM and Flash memory. The gateway consists of an embedded Web server that allows the user to connect to Eaton products such as breakers, meters and relays found in MCCs, LV and MV switchgear and switchboardsto name a fewthat communicate via Eaton protocols INCOM and QCPort, in addition to thirdparty products that communicate via Modbus RTU. The Gateway provides the central connection point for the power metering/monitoring/protective devices, allowing their parameters to be monitored via the Web. The PXG 400E/600E/800E provide data communications to Eatons Power Xpert Software to facilitate centralizing and gathering data for long-term data archival, analysis and trending features. The PXG 400E/600E/800E are compatible with and facilitate integration with many third-party building and factory automation systems via Modbus TCP and Web services.
Note: Enclosed solution available. Contact your Eaton sales ofce for more details.
Bus Page
In the PXG 400E/600E/800E, information is presented in organized, userfriendly Web pages and includes, but is not limited to, the following:

Device status Comm status Voltage Current Power Power factor Energy Power quality Temperature I/O states
Device Page

Downstream devices on the Power Xpert Gateways often report key operating status information that warrants immediate attention. The PXG identies a set of key status values for each device and generates Events in response to changes in these status values. An example of a device event is an overcurrent trip on a circuit breaker. In addition to displaying events on its home page, the PXG reports events to monitoring software such as Power Xpert Software. These events will then be integrated with those from across the power system, providing unied enterprise level event management.
Trending Page (PXG 600E/800E Only)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 013

2.1-7
Table 2.1-4. Features of the PXG-E Product Offering

Features Total number of supported devices Maximum number of INCOM devices supported Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM, Modbus RTU and QCPort) Number of downstream communication ports Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously USB port for conguration Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100Base-T Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported SNMP client access v.1 INCOM slave action commands supported INCOM date and time settings supported Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Device summary screens per main, bus and device Event notication via the Web interface Secure Ethernet communicationsSSL encryption Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list IPv4 support Ability to upload additional or modied EDS les Save and restore conguration le Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE le format Set user-dened events Trend graph displayed Data loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel Interval loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel Event loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel E-mail notication on events and threshold alarms Custom summary Web page creation Ability to create custom events Supports SAM3Z energy meters BACnet/IP protocol supported
The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway Includes:

PXG 400E PXG 600E PXG 800E 64 64 Yes 2 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No 96 64 Yes 3 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No 96 64 Yes 3 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
The Power Xpert Gateway module Mounting provisions and required hardware for panel and DIN rail mounting CD-ROM: contains the user manual, Modbus register maps, USB driver and other associated les
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 2.1-7. Power Xpert Gateway with DIN Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Expected availability 4Q11.
24 Vdc Input Power
COM 1 Port: RS-485 Connection for up to Either (32) QCPort or Modbus RTU Devices
INCOM Port: RS-485 Connection for up to 64 INCOM Devices
RJ-45 Connection to the LAN
RJ-45 Connection to the Other Ethernet Devices
USB Connection for Local Conguration Capability
Power and Trafc Indicator Lights
15 16
COM 2 Port: Either RS-485 or RS-232 Connection for up to Either (32) QCPort or Modbus RTU Devices Wireless antenna available only with 800E for communication to SAM3Z device
Data and Link Indicator Lights: Available only with 800E
17 18 19
PXG 600E or 800E
20 21
Figure 2.1-6. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E

2.1-8

Technical Specications PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
The PXG-E allows for units to be connected together through two RJ-45 10/100 connectors on the front of the PXG-E series of products. This arrangement is a pass-through of Ethernet communications allowing a single network drop to connect up to ve Ethernet communicating devices. The maximum length of a copper cable run should not exceed 295 ft (90m) total.
Note: In this conguration, if any of the PXG-E units go ofine or lose power, the communication to the downstream Ethernet devices will lose connection to the LAN.
September 2011
Sheet 02 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ethernet LAN
LAN Connection
295 ft (90m) PXM2000
Figure 2.1-8. PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 015

Connectivity Matrix
2.1-9
Table 2.1-5. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices
Supported Devices Device Type Device Name
i ii
PXG 600E/800E Only File Export (Waveform File Export) SMTP (E-mail Client) Pass-through INCOM (PowerNet) Pass-through QCPort (CHStudio)
PXG 400E/600E/800E Web Services (Power Xpert Software) Modbus TCP (BMS and SCADA)
HTTP (Web Browser)
File Export (Data File Format)
1 2 3 4 5 6
INCOM
Drive Drive I/O I/O I/O Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter point Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Protective Starter Starter Subnetwork master Subnetwork master Subnetwork master Subnetwork master Subnetwork master Transfer switch Transfer switch Transfer Switch

Accutrol 400 AF97 Universal RTD DIM DIM KYZ IQ DP-4000 IQ Energy Sentinel IQ 220/IQ 320 IQ 230/IQ 330 IQ Analyzer IQ Data IQ Data Plus IQ Data Plus II Power Manager IQ Power Sentinel IQ MES II Digitrip 3000 Digitrip 3200 FP-6000 FP-5000 FP-4000 MP-3000 MP-4000 Digitrip 520MC NRX520 IQ 500 MPCV Relay Digitrip 1150/DT1150V Digitrip 810 Digitrip 910 Digitrip MV Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 750 Advantage Advantage ACM AEM II CMU IQ CED II IQ MES II ATC-400 ATC-600 ATC-800
BACnet/IP

SNMP (NMS)
(6000/6200)
IQ Analyzer (6400/6600)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
BIM II
Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway. Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.
Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.
CA08104001E
2.1-10 Power Management Systems & Products Network Connectivity

Connectivity Matrix
Table 2.1-5. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices (Continued)
Supported Devices Device Type Device Name PXG 400E/600E/800E Web Services (Power Xpert Software) Pass-through INCOM (PowerNet) Pass-through QCPort (CHStudio) Modbus TCP (BMS and SCADA)
September 2011
Sheet 02 016
i ii
PXG 600E/800E Only File Export (Waveform File Export) SMTP (E-mail Client)

HTTP (Web Browser)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Modbus
Drive Drive Insulation monitor Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Protective Protective Protective Protective Overload relay Temp monitor Temp monitor Temp monitor Transformer differential relay MVX9000 SVX9000 InsulGard IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 220M/230M IQ 250 IQ 260 IQ 35M Nexus 1262 SQD CM3000 Series SQD CM4000 Series SQD PM710 SQD PM850 PML 7350 PML 7550 PML 7650 PM3 GE 369 Motor Relay GE 469 Motor Relay FP-4000/FP-5000 FP-6000 C441 Qualitrol 118 TC-50 TC-100 ABB TPU 2000 D77A-AI16 D77A-AI8 D77A-DI16 D77A-DI8 IT. S811 (MV811) IT. Starter IT. Starter QSNAP
QCPort
I/O I/O I/O I/O Starter Starter Starter
Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.
Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity. Note: Additional supported devices will be available via rmware updates. Contact your local Eaton sales ofce for help with devices not currently listed in Table 2.1-5.
File Export (Data File Format)

BACnet/IP
SNMP (NMS)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 017

Product Selection
2.1-11
The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive. For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map le at http://www.eaton.com/pxg. Table 2.1-6. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway
Units IQ Meters IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 IQ Energy Sentinel Circuit Breaker Trip Units Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 750 Protective Relays
i ii 1
IQ Power Sentinel
Digitrip RMS 910
Digitrip RMS 810
Power Manager
Digitrip 520MC
IQ Data Plus II
MPVCV Relay
IQ 230/330M
Digitrip 1150
Digitrip 3000
Digitrip 3200
IQ Data Plus
Digitrip MV
IQ DP-4000
IQ 220/320
IQ 230/330
EDR-3000
MP-3000
MP-4000
IQ MESII
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000
IQ Data
IQ 35M
IQ 250
IQ 260
IQ 130
IQ 140
IQ 150
IQ 500
2 3
Voltage
Average Voltage (line-line) Voltage (line-neutral) V V V A A A A A A VA VAR W PF PF Wh Wh Wh Vah VARh VARh VARh % % % Hz N/A C C C C C C C

Current
Average Phase Ground Neutral Peak Demand

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Power
Apparent Reactive Real

Power Factor
Apparent Displacement
Energy
Real Forward Reverse Apparent Reactive Leading Lagging
Power Quality
THD Current THD Voltage THD Frequency Waveform capture
14 15 16 17 18
2 2
Temperature
Ambient Auxiliary Load bearing Motor bearing Winding Phase (L, C, R) Terminal block
Input Status
Number of inputs Status/cause of trip Thermal memory Pole temperature Winding temp. Fan status Alarm/trip relay

19 20 21
CA08104001E

Product Selection
Table 2.1-6. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway (Continued)
Units Insulation Motor Starters Monitor & VFDs C441 Overload Relay Advantage Starters IT. Starters/QSNAP SVX & MVX Drives Transfer Switches I/O Digital Input Module Third-Party Devices SQD CM 3000 Series SQD CM 4000 Series GE 369 Motor Relay GE 469 Motor Relay
September 2011
Sheet 02 018
i ii
D77A-AI16
D77A-DI16
PML 7350
PML 7550
PML 7650
InsulGard
D77A-AI8
D77A-DI8 DIM KYZ
ATC-400
ACT-600
ACT-800
IT. S811
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Voltage
Average Voltage (line-line) Voltage (line-neutral) V V V A A A A A A VA VAR W PF PF Wh Wh Wh Vah VARh VARh VARh % % % Hz N/A C C C C C C C
Nexus 1262/1272
ABB TPU 2000
Universal RTD
Qualitrol 118
SQD PM 710
SQD PM 850
Accutrol 400
Current
Average Phase Ground Neutral Peak Demand

Power
Apparent Reactive Real

Power Factor
Apparent Displacement
Energy
Real Forward Reverse Apparent Reactive Leading Lagging
Power Quality
THD Current THD Voltage THD Frequency Waveform capture
Temperature
Ambient Auxiliary Load bearing Motor bearing Winding Phase (L, C, R) Terminal block

Input Status
Number of inputs Status/cause of trip Thermal memory Pole temperature Winding temp. Fan status Alarm/trip relay Partial discharge intensity (PDI)
8 16
8 16 8 4

Note: Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com for latest information.
CA08104001E
TC-100 2
TC-50
AF97
PM3
September 2011
Sheet 02 019

Dimensions
2.1-13
Power Xpert GatewayDimensions in Inches (mm)

10.75 (273.1)
i ii
0.56 (14.2) 1.60 (40.6)
0.19 (6) (4.8)
10.25 (260.4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.00 1.12 (50.8) (28.5) 0.56 (14.2)
8.75 (222.3) Front
0.24 (6.1) 0.25 (6.4)
Figure 2.1-9. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
8.75 (222.3)
4.30 (109.2)
9 10 11 12
0.60 (15.2)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 2.1-10. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 02 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Table 2.1-7. PXG Part Numbers
Description Power Xpert Gateway 400E Power Xpert Gateway 600E Power Xpert Gateway 800E Wireless energy meter for PXG 800E Wireless repeater module for SAM3Z Power supply24 Vdc Mounting bracket kit Style Number 103008421-5591 103008422-5591 103008423-5591 P-103000007-591 P-103000008-591 ELC-PS02 66B2146G01 Catalog Number PXG400E PXG600E PXG800E SAM3Z EZR ELC-PS02 PXGACC01
Power Input

Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.8A Input voltage range: 20% Nominal 8 watts maximum 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) 40 to 185F (40 to 85C) 5 to 95% noncondensing at 50C 2.10 x 4.50 x 8.90 (53.3 x 114.3 x 226.1) 1.5 lbs
Power Consumption
Ambient Storage Temperature
Memory
Flash: 1 GB400E/600E 2 GB800E RAM: 128 MB
Serial Protocols Supported

INCOM QCPort Modbus RTU
Relative Humidity
Size (H x D x L) in Inches (mm)
Communication Ports
Network port: two 10/100Base-T RJ-45 connectors Conguration port: one USB port Serial ports PXG 400E One dedicated RS-485 port for connection to INCOM devices One RS-485 port for connection to either QCPort or Modbus RTU devices Serial ports PXG 600E/800E One dedicated RS-485 port for connection to INCOM devices One RS-485 port for connection to either QCPort or Modbus RTU devices One RS-485 or RS-232 (software selectable) port for connection to either QCPort or Modbus RTU devices
Supported Devices
Refer to www.eaton.com/pxg for most current list. Call for information on additional devices.
Weight
Regulatory and Standards Compliance

UL 508, Standard for Programmable Controller Equipment FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B, Sections 15.107b and 15.109b EN55022: 1994 Class A, Information Technology Equipment EN 61000-6-2:2001 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Party 6-2: Immunity for Industrial Environments
Web Browsers Recommended

IE 6.0 or higher Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher Google Chrome (future)
Number of Devices Supported
PXG 400E 64 total with INCOM Port + COM 1 port not to exceed 64. Port limitations are as follows: INCOM port: up to 64 INCOM devices COM 1 port: up to 32 QCPort or Modbus RTU devices PXG 600E/800E 96 total with INCOM Port + COM 1 port + COM 2 PORT not to exceed 96. Port limitations are as follows: INCOM port: up to 64 INCOM devices COM 1 port: up to 32 QCPort or Modbus RTU devices COM 2 port: up to 32 QCPort or Modbus RTU devices COM 3 port: the SAM3Z energy meter is the only supported device
Network Protocols Supported

15
16 17 18 19 20 21
Modbus TCP/IP: supports data access from Modbus TCP clients Web server: supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS) DHCP: supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled SNMP: supports common network management tools NTP: supports time synchronization via a network time server for PXG synchronization SMTP: supports mail server for e-mail notication BACnet/IP: supports data access from BACnet/IP clients
Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. Although every attempt has been made to ensure the accuracy of information contained within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness, correctness or accuracy and assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options.
Note: PXG 800Eup to 96 total devices.
Note: BACnet/IP support expected 4Q11.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 021

Wiring Guidelines
2.1-15
General Wiring GuidelinesRS-485 Network

Table 2.1-8. RS-485 Wiring GuideThree Terminal Devices
Device Name IQ 230M IQ 250 A ( Wire) 12 (MOD2) B (+ Wire) 11 (MOD1) Common Wire 10 (INCOM 3) SH XCVR Common I 26V I Data Bias None None
Rule 5: Cable Shielding

The cable shielding and outer jacket should not be stripped back beyond 1.50 inches (38 mm). Three-pole terminal blocks are used to ensure a continuous metallic shield ground path. To ensure a secure electrical connection when daisy chaining devices that have built-in two-pole terminal blocks, mechanically crimp sleeves onto the two shield path drain wires.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
() (+) Older Models Older Models are Marked are Marked B () A () or A(+) () (+) Older Models Older Models are Marked are Marked B () A () or A (+) 12 (MOD2) B B Data A 750B-S A() 11 (MOD1) A A Data B 750B-S B(+)
IQ 260
SH
None
Rule 6: Cable Grounding

10 (INCOM 3) None None Shield (COM) COM I 26V Floating Floating I 300V I None None None 750 Ohm Switch Sel
IQ 330M InsulGard Bushing Gard (InsulGard G3 ) Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Power Xpert Gateways
Transceiver (XCVR) Common Connected to: I = Isolated NI = Non Isolated E = Earth Ground Center terminal on Insulgard (marked with Ground symbol) is for shield splicing only and is electrically oating. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is directly compatible with Ethernet networks and does not need a Power Xpert Gateway. See Tab 3 for more details.
Ground the communication network at only one point in the network, preferably by terminating the drain wire to ground at the EOL node (same location as the EOLR). A solid earth ground is accomplished by connecting the shield ground paths drain wire to a #14 AWG or larger multi-stranded wire that has an impedance path of 1 ohm or less to a known earth ground.
Note: The building electrical ground may not be effective since it may travel through many connections and considerable distances before reaching earth ground. In such cases a new ground path will be required since the effectiveness of this shield earth ground connection will affect the integrity of data transferred over the cable.
When communicating over RS-485 networks to Eaton products, the following general wiring guidelines should be used.
Rule 3: System Topology, Size and Capacity

Strict daisy chain must be adhered to. A strict daisy chain conguration is one where the transmission line connects from one RS-485 receiver to the next. The transmission line appears as one continuous line to the RS-485 driver Maximum 32 devices Line termination: maximum cable lengths of 4000 ft (1219m); longer bus lengths will slow the data rate
Rule 1: Cable Selection Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP)

Note cables specically designed for RS-485 applications are highly recommended. The RS-485 bus is a length of twisted shielded pair (TSP) that includes a third conductor (used for the common wire), a braided shield accompanied by a drain wire, and nominal impedance of 120 ohms.
Rule 7: Cable Termination

End of Line Resistors (EOLR) are necessary to maintain signal strength and minimize reections. EOLR must match the impedance of the TSP. Two EOLR are needed and should be located at both ends of the RS-485 bus. If there is only one device connected to the Modbus master, it is considered the last device in the network and should be terminated with a 120 ohm 1/4 watt terminating resistor.
Rule 4: Cable Splicing

The prime goal is to create a secure electrical connection while minimizing exposure to electrical transients. Ferrules are used to dress cable ends. Most devices have built-in terminal blocks which can be used for splicing. Additionally, terminal blocks should be used when splicing elsewhere in the gear or facility to ensure a secure electrical connection.
Belden Wire and Cable Company Part Number 3106A or equivalent
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing

Any cable in the Belden 3106A family can be intermixed with each other in the Modbus network.
Note: For ber optic wiring guidelines, see Pages 2.2-2 and 2.2-3.
Rule 8: Device Addressing

Each device must have a unique slave address No two devices on the same RS-485 network can have the same slave address
Ethernet Cable Specications

For complete specications, refer to the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specication.
CA08104001E

Wiring Guidelines
September 2011
Sheet 02 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
INCOM Network
INCOM was specically designed with the intention of delivering a comprehensive and powerful energy management solution for use in electrical distribution environments while ensuring affordability, exibility, simplicity and noise immunity. An INCOM network installed per the following rules will allow the user to fully realize all of the above advantages. (Refer to Eaton document TD17513 for specic system layout recommendations and details.)
Table 2.1-9. Cable Attenuation

Cable Type IMPCABLE Belden 9463 family Attenuation/ 1000 ft (305m) 1.6 dB 2.0 dB
Rule 6: Cable Grounding

The shield should be continuous across a network segment and connected to the buildings electrical system grounding electrode conductor. The 2005 NEC provides the following guidance on grounding communication cables: 1. When a communication cable enters a building, a primary protector is required and must be grounded as described in section 800 IV. Specically, paragraphs 800.93 and 800.100 dene grounding requirements for the primary protector. 2. Grounding systems are generally covered by Section 250 III. The grounding electrode conductor is specically covered by paragraphs 250.62, 250.64, 250.66, 250.68 and 250.70. 3. Bonding requirements between communication systems and the power distribution system is specied by Paragraph 250.94. A solid earth ground is accomplished by connecting the shield ground paths drain wire to a #14 AWG or larger multi-stranded wire that has an impedance path of 1 ohm or less to the buildings grounding electrode conductor.
Table 2.1-10. Attenuation at Star

Number of Long Lines 3 4 5 Attenuation 3.5 dB 6 dB 8 dB
Rule 1: Cable Selection Twisted Shielded Pair

Approved cable types:

Any of the cables in the Belden 9463 family Quabbin 6205 CommScope 9022 Manhattan Electric M4154 IMPCABLEa 600V rated cable custom designed for INCOM Style # 2A95705G01
Denitions: Daisy chain: point-to-point wiring between devices or clusters of devices Star: single point with a number of long lines emanating from it Long line: >200-ft (61m) wire run Simple tap: <200-ft (61m) connection to cluster of devices
Rule 4: Cable Splicing

The goal is to create a secure electrical connection while minimizing exposure to electrical transients. Ferrules are used to dress cable ends in order to avoid problems associated with frayed and loose wires. Besides facilitating cable installation, subsequent data line troubleshooting and downtime are minimized. Most INCOM devices have built in three pole terminal blocks for data lines and shield. For older INCOM devices that have only two terminals, shield continuity must be ensured by other means. Additional terminal strips should be used when splicing elsewhere in the electrical enclosure or facility to ensure secure electrical connections. All devices, End of Line Termination Resistors, and Taps should be wired in parallel across the cable.
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing

Due to impedance differences between IMPCABLE and the Belden 9463 family, the main cable run(s) should be entirely for the 9463 family OR IMPCABLE: do not alternate between these types. The cable used for taps can be different from the main run.
Rule 7: Cable Termination

Each network segment requires a minimum of two End of Line Termination Resistors (EOLTRs). The EOLTRs maintain signal strength and minimize reections. The EOLTRs should be 1/2 watt 100 ohm non-inductive resistors, such as carbon composition or metal lm. Wire-wound resistors are not acceptable. Taps on network segments should not be terminated. Some INCOM devices have the EOLTR permanently installed and must be located at the end of a main run. Other INCOM devices have an EOLTR that can be switched to optionally terminate the network segment at the device. Care must be exercised when installing devices containing termination resistors that the switches are set appropriately. A minimum of two, up to a maximum of ve EOLTRs must be installed on each network segment as dictated by network topology.
Rule 3: System Topology, Size and Capacity

Supports Daisy Chain, Star and MultiLevel Network Segment Topologies. (Note: Star Segment Topology is not recommended for new designs). See Figure 2.1-10. Surge protection is required for FSK networks that leave a building at the egress/ingress of the building.
Supports distances up to 10,000 ft (3048m) per segment when designed within the specications of this guideline Supports up to 1000 devices on a single network segment Supports sub-network master devices and associated sub-networks Supports 1200 or 9600 baud rate. Attenuation: Total system capacity: 25 dB Attenuation per device: 0.01 dB Attenuation for approved wire types (see Tables 2.1-9 and 2.1-10)
Rule 5: Cable Shielding

The cable shielding and outer jacket should not be stripped back beyond 1.50 inches (38 mm). Terminal blocks are used at tap points to ensure a continuous metallic shield ground path. To ensure a secure electrical connection when daisy-chaining INCOM devices that have built-in two pole terminal blocks, use crimp sleeves to join the two shield drain wires. The cable shield ground path for a main network and sub-network must not be joined. Each should have a separate connection to earth ground reference.
Rule 8: Device Address

In order to avoid the possibility of devices in a main network having the same addresses as those in subnetworks, set main network device addresses at 100 or higher excluding addresses 901 to 908.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 023

Wiring Guidelines
2.1-17
INCOM Master Device 1 Device 2
Main Run Device 5 Device 10 EOLTR
i ii 1 2
Device 8 Device 9
EOLTR Tap Tap
Device 3
Device 6
3 4
Note: Device 1 may be a PC with internal CONI Card, a SubNetwork Master (BIM, LDISP), an INCOM MINT (RS-232 MINTII, Ethernet MINT, Modbus RS-485 MINT), an INCOM Gateway (NetLink, Power Xpert Gateway).
Device 4 Device 7
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 2.1-11. Daisy-Chain Segment Topology
CA08104001E

IQ Meters
September 2011
Sheet 02 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ethernet-Enabled Power Quality & Energy (PQ&E) IQ Meters
600E/800E is 8000. Dividing 8000 by 274 tells you that the maximum number of FP-5000s you can have downstream on a single PXG 400E/600E/800E is 28. Please contact your local Eaton sales ofce for a maximum number of downstream devices based on your monitored parameter requirements.
Communication Interfaces

Equipment
Note: For detailed equipment information, refer to Tab 3.

Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM (downstream) Modbus TCP/IP (with PXG) HTTP (with PXG) XML/SOAP (with PXG) SMTP (with PXG 600E/800E) SNMP (with PXG 600E/800E)
Metering/Monitoring Applications
Real-time viewing of power/energy readings (PXG) View trended power/energy readings (PXG 600E/800E) User-dened events (PXG 600E/800E) E-mail notication (PXG 600E/800E)
IQ Digital Panel Meters
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway 400E supports a total of 64 devices. The Power Xpert Gateway 600E and 800E support up to 96 total devices, with a limit of 64 INCOM devices. When designing a system using gateways, it is important to consider not only the number of devices that will communicate through a PXG 400E/ 600E/800E, but also the quantity of monitored parameters of each of its supported downstream devices. For example, the number of the monitored parameters in the FP-5000 protective relay is 274, the maximum number of parameters per PXG 400E/
IQ 35M meterModbus RS-485 IQ MES IIINCOM IQ 130/140/150 meters IQ 250/260 metersModbus RS-485 IQ 220/230 metersINCOM IQ 320/330 metersINCOM IQ DP-4000/4100 metersINCOM IQ 6400/6600 metersINCOM IQ Energy Sentinel/Power Sentinel metersINCOM IQ Central Energy Display IIINCOM
Installation Applications
Low voltage switchgear Medium voltage switchgear Low voltage motor control centers Medium voltage motor starters

Communications Applications

Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may be connected for Web browser access and INCOM translation for Power Xpert Software and Foreseer Services PXG 600E/800EUp to 96 IQ meters may be connected for Web browser access, data logging, alarm notication, control commands, and INCOM translation for Power Xpert Software and Foreseer Services
Building Management System (BMS) Energy Management Systems Network Management Systems (NMS) HMI Power Xpert Software Power Xpert Reporting Foreseer Services
PXG 600E and PXG 800E IQ 250/260
IQ Analyzer IQ 250/260 IQ 250/260
IQ Analyzer
16 17 18 19 20 21
Ethernet Network QCPort Network INCOM Network RS-485 Network eolr = End of line resistor eoltr = End of line terminator resistor 3rd Party Meter
3rd Party Meter
eolr 3rd Party Meter eolr eoltr 3rd Party Meter
eolr 3rd Party Meter
eoltr
Figure 2.1-12. PXG Ethernet-Enabled IQ Meter Applications

Note: Many other devices supported. See complete supported device list at www.eaton.com/pxg.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 025

Trip Units and Protective Relays
2.1-19
Ethernet-Enabled Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Protective Relays


Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM downstream Modbus TCP/IP (with PXG) HTTP (with PXG) (with ECC) HTTPS (with PXG) SMTP (with PXG 600E/800E) SNMP (with PXG 600E/800E) XML/SOAP (with PXG)
Building Management System (BMS) HMI Energy Management Systems Network Management Systems (NMS) Power Xpert Software Foreseer Services
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Electronic Trip Units
General Description
Up to a combination of 64 INCOM trip units and protective relays may be connected to a single Power Xpert Gateway (PXG) and deployed in various power distribution and motor control applications and made accessible to an Ethernet network using the PXG.

Viewing an Eaton FP-5000 Protective Relay through the Power Xpert Gateway
7 8 9 10
Equipment

Digitrip 3000/3200 FP-4000/5000/6000 MP-3000/4000 Digitrip 520MC IQ 500 MPCV Relay Digitrip 1150/DT1150V Digitrip 810/910 Digitrip MV Digitrip OPTIM 1050/750/550 BIM II (Breaker Interface Module)
24 Vdc Power Supply Required
PXG 600E and PXG 800E
11
1150/DT1150 1150/DT1150 3rd Party Motor Relay 3rd Party Motor Relay
12 13
3rd Party Motor Relay
3rd Party Motor Relay 3rd Party Motor Relay BIM II
3rd Party Motor Relay BIM II
14
OPTIM 1050
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may be connected for Web browser access and INCOM translation for Power Xpert Software PXG 600E/800EUp to 96 IQ meters may be connected for Web browser access, data logging, alarm notication, control commands, and INCOM translation for Power Xpert Software
Optim 1050 3rd Party Portective Relay eolr FP4000 FP5000 DT3000 3rd Party Portective Relay 3rd Party Portective Relay eolr FP4000 FP5000 DT3000
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
eolr
eoltr
Ethernet Network QCPort Network INCOM Network RS-485 Network eolr = End of line resistor eoltr = End of line termination resistor
eoltr
Figure 2.1-13. Power Xpert Gateway Trip Unit and Relay Application
Note: When using Modbus RTU over an RS-485 communications network, the data rate, data protocol (data bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring topology (two-wire or four-wire) must be the same for each of the devices. Note: Many other devices supported. See complete supported device list at www.eaton.com/pxg.
Note: Both PXG 400E/600E support a maximum of 64 INCOM devices while not to exceed the total PXG device limit. PXG 400E64 Total PXG 600E/800E96 Total
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 02 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(End of Line Terminating Resistor)
Medium Voltage Fused Switch
Step Down Unit Substation Transformer
Low Voltage Secondary Distribution Switchboard
All CAT5e or CAT6 Wiring, Connectors and Conduit to Additional Ethernet Devices if Required (i.e., PXM in Medium Voltage Switch) by Installing Contractor.
Optional Connection Via 62.5 Micron Duplex Multimode Fiber Pair With ST Connectors to Facility Power Monitoring System. all Fiber Optic Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor. CAT5e or CAT6 Connection to Facility Power Monitoring Network. All Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor. (Daisy Chain to other INCOM Trip Units or PM3 Meter Modules)
Modbus RS-485 Belden Wiring and Conduit from Switchboard to Transformer Temperature Controller by Installing Contractor.
Thru-Door RJ-45 Port
11
Eaton PXES6P Network Switch
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Optional PXM6000 Meter Inputs

Switch Open Contact Switch Closed Contact Switch Blown Fuse Contact
Eaton TC-100 Transformer Temperature Control
Typical Optional PXM6000 Meter Inputs

SPD Alarm Contact Trans Hi Temp Alarm Trans Fans On Contact
Eaton PX600 Gateway Eaton Series C F 225A Frame Breaker with PM3K3225CO2V48M Meter Module Eaton Series C K 400A Frame Breaker with PM3K3630C02V48M Meter Module
Typical Eaton Internal Wiring
Eaton Magnum Breaker 520MC or 1150 Trip Unit
Eaton Digitrip OPTIM 1050 or 550 Trip Unit
Eaton Series G LG 600A Frame Breaker with PM3L3630C02V48M Meter Module
Medium Voltage Fused Switch
Step Down Unit Substation Transformer
Low Voltage Secondary Distribution Switchboard
Figure 2.1-14. Typical Ethernet-Enabled Unit Substation With Switchboard Secondary
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 027

Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center
2.1-21
Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center

Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM (FSK) Modbus TCP/IP (with PXG) HTTP (with PXG) HTTPS (with PXG) XML/SOAP (with PXG) SMTP (with PXG 600E/800E) SNMP (with PXG 600E/800E)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Electronic Motor Overload Relays, Soft Starters and Variable Frequency Drives

General Description
Eaton Variable Frequency Drives may be connected to a single Power Xpert Gateway (PXG) 400E (not to exceed 64 total) or Power Xpert Gateway 600E/800E (not to exceed 96 total) deployed in various low-voltage motor control center applications and made accessible to an Ethernet network.

Equipment
S811 Soft Starter SVX9000/MVX9000 variable frequency drives C441 Overload Relay
Building Management System (BMS) Energy Management Systems Network Management Systems (NMS) HMI Power Xpert Software Foreseer Services
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may be connected for Web browser access and INCOM translation for Power Xpert Software PXG 600E/800EUp to 96 IQ meters may be connected for Web browser access, data logging, alarm notication, control commands and INCOM translation for Power Xpert Software
Note: Both PXG 400/600 support a maximum of 64 INCOM devices while not to exceed the total PXG device limit. PXG 400E64 total PXG 600E/800E96 total
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 02 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 2.1-15. Typical Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center
Eaton IQ 260 Meter Eaton SVX9000 Variable Frequency Drive Eaton PX600 Gateway Eaton Digitrip OPTIM 1050 or 550 Trip Unit Eaton Digitrip OPTIM 1050 or 550 Trip Unit Eaton SVX9000 Variable Frequency Drive Eaton Digitrip OPTIM 1050 or 550 Trip Unit Eaton Motor Insight C441 Overload Relay Thru-Door RJ-45 Port Eaton Motor Insight C441 Overload Relay All CAT5e or CAT6 Wiring, Connectors and Conduit to Additional Ethernet Devices if Required (i.e., Other Ethernet Communicating MCCs) by Installing Contractor. Optional Connection Via 62.5 Micron Duplex Multimode Fiber Pair with ST Connectors to Facility Power Monitoring System. All Fiber Optic Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor. CAT5e or CAT6 Connection to Facility Power Monitoring Network. All Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor. XP702 Industrial PC with Touch Screen
10.40 Inch Touch Screen
Eaton Motor Insight C441 Overload Relay
Eaton PXES6P Network Switch
Eaton IQ 260 Meter
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 029

IPONI Communication Modules
2.1-23
IPONI Communication Modules

Metered Parameters/ Communications
An IPONI enables communication of the metered parameters and set points consistent with those of the device to which it is attached.
Communications
The IPONI enables communications over a twisted shielded pair INCOM device network. Wiring communications to these devices adhere to the Wiring Guidelines (see Pages 2.1-15 and 2.1-17).
Supported Devices

IQ Analyzer (1.06) IQ DP-4000 Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) BIMII MP-3000 MP-4000
i ii 1 2
Catalog Information
Table 2.1-11. PONI Communication Modules
Description INCOM PONI Catalog Number IPONI
Physical Characteristics
Each IPONI attaches to its associated product. No other mounting or enclosure is required. When mounted to the back of the meter or relay or other communicating device, the IPONI gets its power from the device to which it is attached. The connection to the device is via a 9-Pin connector.
3 4 5
IPONI Communication Module
Certications/Listings
IPONI: UL/cUL
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Breaker Interface Module (BIMII)
September 2011
Sheet 02 030
i ii 1 2 3 4
Breaker Interface Module
Features and Functions

Communications
A PONI card can be easily eldmounted to the back of the Breaker Interface Module, enabling the unit to pass the information from its subnetwork to a remote master control unit up to 10,000 ft (3048m) away. No reprogramming of the unit is required when the IPONI is added. The Breaker Interface Module can be mounted directly on the assembly or at a remote location and can be used to access, congure and display information from OPTIM trip units.
Non-Volatile Memory
The programmed functions, addresses and circuit descriptions are stored in non-volatile memory.
External Power
A 24 Vdc supply is required for the BIMII. (No external power supply is required for the PONI Card.) A 120 or 240 Vac supply is required for the BIMPS.
Rear Access Area

All wiring connections to the breaker interface module are made at the chassis rear and include:
Breaker Interface Module
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Eatons Breaker Interface Module is a panel-mounted device which performs the following functions: Monitors and displays parameters (right) from any combination of Digitrip RMS 810, 910, Digitrip 1150 when set up to communicate as a 910 and Digitrip OPTIM Trip Units, Energy Sentinels and Power Sentinels, supporting as many as 50 of these devices up to 10,000 ft (3048m) away Communicates the information from these protective and energy monitoring devices over an Eaton INCOM network Continuously monitors breakers recording and time stamping trip events along with approximate fault currents. Events are logged into non-volatile RAM
An operator can use the Breaker Interface Module to:
Complete initial system setup: Select system frequency (50/60 Hz) Set password Congure the system: Change time-current set points for Digitrip OPTIM breakers Select protection options Select alarm levels Display information: Breaker information Time-current set points Metered values Trip event information Test trip unit performance: Phase and ground Trip/no trip Expanded energy monitoring: Set addresses for group energy monitoring Group energy readings Local and remote indication: Remote indication/alarming Breaker status LED indication Expanded communications. Communicate with: OPTIM Trip Units Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 Digitrip 1150, 1150+ and 520MC IQ Energy Sentinels IQ Power Sentinel A total of 50 devices
Relay connection for alarm condition, high load condition, peak exceed for device or group, and watthour pulse Initiator 24 Vdc inputBIMII 120 or 240 Vac inputBIMPSII DIP switches for selecting an operating mode Three-contact connector with subnetwork Connector for PONI card for remote communications local display units

Power Requirement
15 VA maximum 24 Vdc 5%BIMII 120 or 240 Vac 10%BIMPSII 0 to 70C (32 to 158F) 5% to 95% R.H. (noncondensing)
Input Voltage

Parameters Displayed

Phase current Energy Present demand watts Peak demand watts Average demand current Cause and magnitude of trip Trip history % Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for each phase % Harmonic Content for each phase (1st27th harmonic) Custom circuit description
Humidity
Alarm Contact Ratings

10 A at 277 Vac (resistive) 10 A at 30 Vdc (resistive) 1/3 hp at 125, 250 Vac

Dimensions in Inches (mm)

6.72 H x 10.25 W x 2.60 D (170.7 H x 260.4 W x 66.0 D) 6.72 H x 10.25 W x 3.85 D (170.7 H x 260.4 W x 97.8 D) (with communications card)
Note: The Breaker Interface Module displays only a portion of the information it receives from the Digitrip RMS 910 and Power Sentinels. The balance of the information (such as waveform analysis and power factor) can be passed through the unit to a master computer, where it can be viewed.
Table 2.1-12. Catalog Information

Description Breaker interface module Breaker interface module power supply Catalog Number BIMII BIMPSII
Password Protection
A user-dened password is included for added security when changing settings or performing breaker tests.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 031

Digital Input Module (DIM)
2.1-25
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM)
Standards and Certications


Frequency Range
UL 873 CE mark (48 Vdc operation) FCC Part 15, Class A IEC 1000-4-x CISPR 22, Class A IEC 1000-4-2; 1995, Electro Static Discharge IEC 1000-4-3; 1995, Radiated RFImmunity. IEC 1000-4-6; 1996, Conducted RFImmunity FCC Part 15 Class A (10 meters) Radiated Emissions CISPR 22, Class A (30 meters); 1991, Radiated Emissions CISPR 22, Class A; 1991, Conducted Emissions (PowerPort)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50/60 Hz 85 to 138 Vac (120 Vac nominal) 50/60 Hz; 100 mA 48128 Vdc (48 Vdc nominal); 100 mA Brownout operation at 50% and 80% of nominal ac and dc ratings Power input is provided from a limited source, isolated from the mains by double isolation Power for all inputs is supplied from an internal, isolated 24 Vdc power source
Rating 20 to 60C 20 to 70C 5 to 90% maximum noncondensing 10,000 ft (3048m) Indoor use only Category 2 1 Class 1
Power

Table 2.1-13. Specications

Description Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Altitude Environment Transient overvoltage Pollution Equipment
Digital Input Module (DIM)
General Description
Eatons Digital Input Module is a device that interfaces with up to four standard utility (electric, gas, water) meters or monitors eight digital inputs. It translates KYZ pulses from meters into a register count that is maintained and compiled within the DIM module in non-volatile memory. The pulse count can be accessed from the DIM module remotely using Eatons Power Management Software including the energy billing application. The DIM can also be used to monitor eight digital inputs from switch closures.
Mounting Information
The DIM module is designed to be DIN rail mountable. DIN rail must be 1/3 inches H x 1-3/8 inches W (8.5 mm H x 34.9 mm W).
Height: 4.25 inches (107.9 mm) Width: 3.54 inches (90.0 mm) Depth: 3.50 inches (88.9 mm) (does include DIN rail) 10 LED status indicators, 100 ohm termination DIP switch, address selector switches DIN rail mounting

Communications
Figure 2.1-16. KYZ Input Module The DIM is a fully compatible Power Management Software communicating device with built-in INCOM communications. The DIM comes complete with a 3-pin connector to receive the shielded twisted pair conductor. All wiring must be complete as per Instruction Leaet TD17513, wiring specication base rules. Table 2.1-14. Ordering Information
Description Digital input module Catalog Number DIM

Reads four separate KYZ equipped utility meters Pulse counts stored in non-volatile memory Each channel independently monitors KYZ counts, pulse counts, or digital indications Monitors a maximum of eight individual digital inputs Input channels are isolated Isolated 24 Vdc power is provided on the I/O connector LED indicators on the input channels indicate when the unit is counting
CA08104001E

Addressable Relay II
September 2011
Sheet 02 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The Addressable Relay II must be updated every 10 seconds when the communications watchdog is enabled or else communications are assumed to be lost. The communications watchdog is enabled when DIP switch 3 is set to the ON position. When the communications watchdog is not enabled, the relay will remain in the state set by the last command issued. See Figure 2.1-17 for DIP switch conguration.
Monitors two digital status inputs on the Power Management Software system
Monitored Parameters
Output relay energized/de-energized Input relay 1 status Input relay 2 status Breaker status open/closed Protective relay status normal/tripped

Communications
Height: 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) Width: 1.75 inches (44.5 mm) Depth: 4.00 inches (101.6 mm)
Built-in INCOM communications for monitoring in a Power Management Software system

Catalog Number ARII
Table 2.1-15. Ordering Information

Description Addressable relay
General Description
Eatons Addressable Relay II is designed for use where information or control of non-communicating devices is required remotely. The relays communicate INCOM Frequency Shift Key (FSK) on the Power Management Software system. Devices are assigned a 3-digit address to uniquely identify them on the daisy-chained twisted shielded pair network. The Addressable Relay II is a Form C relay with output contact ratings as shown in the specications table. The Addressable Relay II may be powered by 48120 Vac or 48125 Vdc through terminals 11 and 12 of the terminal block. dc polarity is not signicant. The operating temperature range of the Addressable Relay II is 0 to 70C. Each Addressable Relay II includes two status indicating circuits (IN1 and IN2) that can be used to transmit the contact status of devices external to the Addressable Relay II. A typical installation using these report-back inputs to the Power Management Software system is shown in the wiring example. Terminals 4 and 5 connect to the status input 1 circuit, and terminals 6 and 7 connect to the status input 2 circuit. These status indicating circuits operate with input voltages of 48120 Vac or 48125 Vdc circuits. The Addressable Relay II includes a feature called the communications watchdog. The communications watchdog monitors communications between the Addressable Relay II and the computer control station. If communications are lost, the communications watchdog will reset the relay to the de-energized (OFF) state.
Enables remote control of noncommunication capable devices on the Power Management Software system
O 1 2 3 N
Baud Rate Relay Pulse Communications Watchdog
OFF 9600 Disabled Disabled
ON 1200 Enabled Enabled
Figure 2.1-17. DIP Switch Functions

Power Bus L1 L2 L3 INCOM Network
Breaker Status
Figure 2.1-18. Typical Addressable Relay II Wiring Diagram

Note: The Power Xpert Gateway does not support the Addressable Relay II.
O O O
Cpt M1 M2 M3
OL FL 2 T1
OL T2
OL T3 Hand
Communication and Controlled Output Relay Off 1 Auto M
OL
OL 51 Trip 6 8 9 11 3 Input 1 Input 2 INCOM Communications Power Addressable Relay 12 5 7 MA
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 033
Power Management Systems & Products Power Xpert Systems and Network System Expansion
2.2-1

Table 2.2-1. Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Description 4 port Ethernet switchcopper only 6 port Ethernet switchcopper only 6 port Ethernet switch5 copper/1 ber (ST connector) 6 port Ethernet switch4 copper/2 ber (ST connector) Catalog Number PXES4P24V PXES6P24V PXES6P24V1ST PXES6P24V2ST
i ii 1 2
Catalog Number ELC-PS02 PXESPS12V PXESDINRL PXESTRAY
Table 2.2-2. Accessories

Description Power supply (preferred)100240 Vac input DIN rail mount with screw24 Vdc output terminals Power supply (alternate)120 Vac input Wall plug-in type with 6 ft. cord12 Vdc output DIN rail mounting bracket 19-inch rack mount tray
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Convenient Network Expansion
General Description
Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet switches are ideal for extending Ethernet networks via CAT5 wiring or ber in harsh, industrial environments. Built with high-grade components and constructed using special thermal techniques, PXE switches can withstand the unpredictable conditions of such environments.
Table 2.2-3. Operating Environment

Description Ambient temperature ratings Storage temperature Cold start Ambient relative humidity Altitude MTBF Specications 25 to 60C long-term per independent agency tests (UL), or 40 to 85C short-term per IEC type tests 40 to 185F (40C to 85C) to 20C 5%95% (noncondensing) 200 to 50,000 ft (60 to 15,000m) > 15 years
Features
Simultaneous, full-duplex, highspeed communication on all ports no network performance bottlenecks Hardened for factory oorideal for both industrial or data center applications Unmanaged, plug-and-play implementationno software or additional hardware required for conguration Seamlessly integrates into Eatons Power Xpert Architecturequality and reliability of Eaton guaranteed Mounting options include standalone panel-mounting, DIN rail mounting, or 19-inch standard rack mounting
Table 2.2-4. Network Standards

Description Ethernet IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u; IEEE 802.1p, 100Base-TX, 10Base-T, 100Base-FX
Table 2.2-5. Agency Approvals and Standards Compliance

Description UL listed (UL60950), cUL, CE, emissions meet FCC Part 15, Class A
Table 2.2-6. Power Consumption

Description 7.0 watts typical9 watts maximum
Table 2.2-7. Packaging

Description Enclosure Dimensions of PXES4P series Weight of PXES4P series Dimensions of PXES6P series Weight of PXES6P series Cooling method Specications Robust sheet metal (steel) 3.50 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.00 in D (8.9 cm x 7.6 cm x 2.5 cm) 8.6 oz. (243g) 3.60 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.70 in D (9.2 cm x 7.6 cm x 4.3 cm) 13 oz. (370g) Case used as a heat sink
PXE 6-Port Switch10/100 Mb with Optional 100 Mb Fiber

This compact switch provides six Ethernet ports, with exible congurations. The base models have one of three options: Two 100 Mb ber and four 10/100 copper ports One ber and ve copper ports Six copper ports
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 2.2-8. Mounting

Description Metal panel mounting clips DIN rail mounting 19-inch rack mount Specications Included Optional Optional
PXE 4-Port Switch10/100 Mb

For smaller applications requiring fewer connection points and no ber, the 4-port Power Xpert Ethernet switch is a versatile option. It provides edge access Ethernet ports in a convenient and compact package.
Note: These specications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user manual for detailed specications. Please see www.eaton.com/ powerxpert for latest information.
CA08104001E
2.2-2
Application Information
September 2011
Sheet 02 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Copper Ethernet Cable Wiring Guidelines

The following information can be used as a guide when designing an Ethernet system using copper Ethernet cable.
Cables should not be routed near equipment that generates strong electric or magnetic elds such as motors, drive controllers, arc welders and conduit Ethernet cable insulation has a voltage rating of 300 Vac. Use of barriers, cable trays or high voltage sheathing with STP Ethernet cable may be required in installations with cables carrying voltages greater than 300 Vac. This may also be necessary in order to comply with UL requirements. In installations where the cable cannot be physically separated from the power cables (where a physical barrier is not practical) ber optic cable should be used When crossing power conductors with Ethernet cable, cross at right angles Shielded twisted pair (STP) Ethernet cable should be specied for use in high noise environments. Shielded shrouded connectors must be used and the shield must be connected at both ends of the wire. The mating plug must have a shielded shroud that is terminated to ground at both ends. Where there is a possibility of a difference in ground potential (common mode) voltages between the two terminated ends, ber optic cable is recommended When using conduit or a metal cable tray, each section of the conduit or tray must be bonded to each adjacent section and the conduit or tray needs to be bonded to earth ground. Do not allow the shields to touch the conduit or metal tray at any point Only shielded (STP) Ethernet cables should be placed into metal conduit. Some UTP cables may not function properly when installed in conduit, as the metal conduit can affect the electrical properties of an unshielded cable. Consult the cable manufacturer when installing UTP cables in conduit As a general rule for noise protection, Ethernet Cable should maintain a minimum distance of 3 inches (8 cm) from electric power conductors for up to 100V and 1 inch (3 cm) for each additional 100V up to 400V. STP cable is recommended
For Ethernet cable run within conduit but near conductors with potentially noisy power conductors carrying currents of greater than 20A or voltages greater than 400V, maintain the following distances. STP cable is required Conductors of less than 20A = 3 inches Conductors of 20A or more and up to 100 kVA = 6 inches Conductors greater than 100 kVA = 12 inches For Ethernet cable run near conductors with potentially noisy power conductors carrying currents of greater than 20A or voltages greater than 400V, maintain the following distances. STP cable is recommended Conductors of less than 20A = 6 inches Conductors of 20 A or more and up to 100 kVA = 12 inches Conductors greater than 100 kVA = 24 inches Route Ethernet cable at least 5 ft (1.5m) from sources of rf/microwave radiation. STP cable is required Do not cascade more than four Ethernet repeaters (router, switch or hub) within a network segment Environmentally sealed connectors should be specied for cables used in outdoor installations Avoid pinching the cable when using cable ties Total distance between an Ethernet transmitter and receiver at the end points of the network should not exceed 328 ft (100m) Total distance from a patch panel to a wall jack (using solid cable) shall not exceed 295 ft (90m). Splices are not permitted Patch cords used as cross-connect jumpers in a patch panel should not exceed 20 ft (6m) Patch cords from a wall jack to the work area PC (or device) shall not exceed 16 ft (5m) Ethernet cable used in harsh environments must be selected to withstand the following conditions: vibration, air born contaminants, chemicals, temperature, electromagnetic interference, combustible atmospheres and local regulatory standards such as UL and NEMA
Ethernet connectors used in harsh environments must be robust enough to withstand vibration, multiple connection cycles, temperature changes, and provide a proper seal to protect against moisture, dust/dirt and chemical attack Different cable media support different bandwidth capabilities. When installing cable in a network, care should be taken to install the cable that will ll current network loading requirements and future expansion needs. In general, ber optic cable can support the greatest bandwidth (upward of 25,000 gigabits) and UTP has the lowest. CAT5e cabling is designed to operate a bit rates up to 1000 Mb and CAT6 cable up to 2000 Mb Operating your cable at maximum speed reduces the distance between network segments. Check with your cable supplier for specications regarding segment distance vs. speed Cable with 5% impedance mismatch or return loss of 27 to 32 dB is recommended. Ethernet cable impedance can vary by as much as 15% (85 to 115 ohms). Average Ethernet cable with 15% impedance variation can have up to 10 dB additional return loss. This discontinuity is referred to as return loss, since it causes some of the signal to be reected back down the cable instead of propagating forward. It is measured in decibels or ratio of transmitted versus reected signal
Fiber Optic Technology

The use of ber optics in telecommunications and wide area networking has been common for many years, but more recently ber optics have become increasingly prevalent in industrial data communications systems as well. High data rate capabilities, noise rejection and electrical isolation are just a few of the important characteristics that make ber optic technology ideal for use in industrial and commercial systems. Although often used for point-to-point connections, ber optic links are being used to extend the distance limitations of RS-232, RS-422/485 and Ethernet systems while ensuring high data rates and minimizing electrical interference.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 035
2.2-3
Conventional electrical data signals are converted into a modulated light beam, introduced into the ber and transported via a very small diameter glass or plastic ber to a receiver that converts the light back into electrical signals. Optical bers allow data signals to propagate through them by ensuring that the light signal enters the ber at an angle greater than the critical angle of the interface between two types of glass. Optical ber is actually made up of three parts. The center core is composed of very pure glass. Core dimensions are usually in the range of 50125 um for multi-mode cables and 89 um for single-mode cables. The surrounding glass, called cladding, is a slightly less pure glass. The diameter of the core and cladding together is in the range of 125440 um. Surrounding the cladding is a protective layer of exible silicone called the sheath.
Fiber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines

The following information can be used as a guide when designing an Ethernet system using ber optic Ethernet cable:
Select a ber cable that is suited for the application, e.g., outdoor, aerial, duct, intra-building, risers, general building and plenum applications Fiber optic cable is useful in applications where the environment is combustible, electrically noisy, the cable must be bundles with high voltage wires or where common mode voltages may exist between the earth ground points of the terminating connectors Fiber optic cable is available in various operating temperature ranges. Care should be taken to match the temperature rating of the ber to the environment it will be exposed to. The temperature specication for ber may be narrower than copper cable. Consult the cable manufacturer for temperature specications of your cable type Sealed ber connectors are available for use in harsh environments to prevent contamination from entering the connector and ber. The type of seal required will be application dependant and can vary from dustand moisture-proof to water-tight Mixing ber cable types is not permitted. The same core dimensions and mode must be used within cable segments
Care should be taken when purchasing connectors to include strain relief, which reduces mechanical strain (vibration) within the cable, as well as the connector. Strain relief also provides support to the cable to ensure proper bend radius at the connector Single-mode ber is used for long distance transmission of up to 120 km. Distance may vary depending on speed and type of converter used Multi-mode graded-index ber cable is used for communication over shorter distances of up to 2 km Fiber cable is composed of glass and is not well suited for applications requiring tight bend radiuses. Cable radius dimensions vary per manufacturer. If the manufacturer does not provide a bend radius, a typical rule of thumb is a radius not less than 15x the cable diameter Fiber cable to connector terminations can be performed in the eld using special equipment. This method is not recommended Tier One testing is recommended when diagnosing system irregularities and should be performed in all new installations Tier Two testing is recommended to certify that a system complies with standards set forth by the owner/installer
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.2-4
Power Management Systems & Products

September 2011
Sheet 02 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 037
Power Management Systems & Products X-Slot Connectivity Options

Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card
2.3-1
Power Xpert Gateway PDP CardPower Distribution Unit
Features
Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway Power Distribution Products Card (PXGX PDP) provides Web-enabled, real-time monitoring of Powerware Power Distribution Units (PDUs), Rack Power Modules (RPM) and Powerware Remote Power Panels (RPPs) through standard on-board Web pages, Power Xpert Software or third-party software. An integral part of the Power Xpert Architecture, which provides end-toend PowerChain solutions, the PXGXPDP provides a central point to connect distribution products to an Ethernet network. Information is presented in organized, user-friendly Web pages and include the following:

PDU system identication Graphic panel layouts Voltage Current Frequency Energy Power THD (current and voltage)
Web-enabled monitoring of power quality data down to the branch circuit leveldata can be viewed from any location with a Web browser Congure and edit the EMS remotely via the Web interface supports remote conguration, including naming, alarm and warning set points, and percentages Data and event logging with time stampaccurate logging for power quality analysis Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP support open communication protocol facilitates integration with standard building management systems and network management systems Customized e-mail messaging for events notication, including data and event logs and periodic heartbeat e-mailsdirect alarm and event notication to the appropriate person(s) in the organization Easy integration into existing Ethernet infrastructureminimize installation cost Securely access and view informationpassword authentication is required at two levels. The card also supports secure Web-based communication via SSL Generate Modbus register maps on the yall of the data specic to the system is immediately available and can be generated with one click of the mouse Save and Restore settings Conguring a large PDU with EMS can take time. Once the effort is complete, the conguration can be saved for later use. It also allows the user to duplicate panel identical congurations in minimal time Supports the environmental monitoring probetemperature, humidity and contact status can be viewed though the Web page
i ii 1 2
PDU or RPP System Summary Page
3 4 5 6 7 8
PDU or RPP Panel Page
9 10 11 12 13
EMP Page
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.3-2

September 2011
Sheet 02 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 2.3-1. The Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card Kit
Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card Local conguration Cable Quick Start guide
Ordering Information
Catalog number Style number Description PXGXPDP 103008064-5591 Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card for use with Powerware PDUs/RPPs/RPMs/PDRs/EMS-UGK
Devices Supported
Eaton Power Distribution Units with X-Slot compatibility Eaton Remote Power Panels with X-Slot compatibility Eaton Rack Power Modules with X-Slot compatibility Eaton Power Distribution Rack with X-Slot compatibility Eaton Energy Management System with X-Slot compatibility
Communication Ports
Ethernet ports Serial ports Two RJ-45 ports: supports 10/100Base-T for daisy chaining via integrated Ethernet switch One USB port: supports local conguration and one RJ485 for optional connection to an Environmental Monitoring Probe (EMP) Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS) Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients Supports common network management tools Supports e-mail notication Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and PDU synchronization Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled Supports data access from BACnet/IP clients
Communication Protocols Supported

Web server Modbus TCP/IP SNMP SMTP NTP DHCP BACNET IP
Supported MIBs
Eaton PDU MIB Eaton EMP MIB Eaton alarms and traps MIB RFC 4133 entity MIB RFC 4268 entity state MIB RFC 4268 entity state MIB Part II RFC 1213 MIB II
Web Browsers Supported

IE, 7 and 8 Mozilla Firefox, 2.0 and higher Google Chrome
Dimensions Weight 12 cm x 11.4 cm x 3.9 cm (4.70 in x 4.50 in x 1.50 in) 200g (7.0 oz) 0 to +40C (32 to 104F) 10 to 80%, noncondensing 10,000 ft Indoor use only
Environmental Specications
Ambient operating Relative humidity Altitude Enclosure rating
Mounting Conguration
X-Slot form factor ts directly into PDU/RPP/RPM chassis/PDR/EMS-UGK
Power Supply
Nominal input voltage Input voltage range 12 Vdc, unregulated (provided by PDU/RPP) 825 Vdc, unregulated
Power Consumption
3.5 watts
Regulatory/Standards Compliance
FCC Part 15, Class A CISPR 22, Class A ROHS Compliant Telecom conducted via EU standard
EN 55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003, Class A/EN55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003
Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the software and products with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 039

Power Xpert Gateway Series 2000 Card
2.3-3
Power Xpert Gateway UPS CardUninterruptible Power Supplies
Features
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card (PXGX UPS) provides Web-enabled, real-time monitoring of Powerware Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) through standard on-board Web pages, Power Xpert Software or thirdparty software. An integral part of the Power Xpert Architecture, which provides end-toend PowerChain solutions, the PXGX UPS provides a central point to connect distribution products to an Ethernet network. Information is presented in organized, user-friendly Web pages and include the following:

UPS system identication Voltage Current Frequency Energy Output Power Powerfull load % Battery information History and maintenance Run time remaining Voltage % battery left
Web-enabled monitoring of power quality datadata can be viewed from any location with a Web browser Data, event and system logging with time stampaccurate logging for power quality analysis Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP supportopen communication protocol facilitates integration with standard building management systems and network management systems Intelligent e-mail communications two options for alarm and event e-mail notication, individual e-mails for each alarm or event, or collective notication, providing the same information with a drastically reduced number of e-mails Easy integration into existing Ethernet infrastructureminimize installation cost Securely access and view informationpassword authentication is required at two levels. The card also supports secure Web-based communication via SSL Generate Modbus register maps on the yall of the data specic to the UPS is immediately available and can be generated with one click of the mouse Save and Restore settingsonce the conguration effort is complete, it can be saved for later use Supports the environmental monitoring probetemperature, humidity and contact status can be viewed through the Web page Two independent, redundant Ethernet portsdesigned to support high reliability systems
i ii 1 2
UPS Summary Page
3 4 5 6 7 8
Alarm Summary Page
9 10 11 12 13
NetWatch Conguration Page
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.3-4

September 2011
Sheet 02 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 2.3-2. The Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card Kit
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card Local conguration cable Quick start guide
Catalog number Style number Description PXGXUPS 103007974-5591 Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card for use with Powerware UPSs
Devices Supported
Eaton uninterruptible power supplies with X-Slot compatibility; these include the Eaton 9155, 9315, 9355, 9330, 9390, 9395, BladeUPS
Communication Ports
Ethernet ports Serial ports Web server Modbus TCP/IP SNMP SMTP NTP DHCP BACnet/IP IP v4 and v6 Two RJ-45 ports: supports 10/100Base-T for daisy-chaining One USB port: supports local conguration and one RJ485 for optional connection to an Environmental Monitoring Probe (EMP) Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS) Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients Supports common network management tools Supports e-mail notication Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and UPS synchronization Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled Supports data access from BACnet/IP IP v4 and v6 compatibility
Supported MIBs
Eaton Power MIB RFC 1628 UPS MIB Eaton EMP MIB Eaton alarms and traps MIB RFC 4133 entity MIB RFC 4268 entity State MIB; RFC 4268 entity state MIB Part 2 RFC 1213 MIB II
Web Browsers Supported

IE, 7 and 8 Mozilla Firefox, 2.0 and higher Google Chrome
Dimensions Weight 12 cm x 11.4 cm x 3.9 cm (4.70 in x 4.50 in x 1.50 in) 200g (7.0 oz) 0 to +40C (32 to 104F) 10 to 80%, noncondensing 10,000 ft Indoor use only
Ambient operating Relative humidity Altitude Enclosure rating
Mounting Conguration
X-Slot form factor ts directly into UPS chassis
Power Supply
Nominal input voltage Input voltage range 12 Vdc, unregulated (provided by UPS) 825 Vdc, unregulated
Power Consumption
3.5 watts
Regulatory/Standards Compliance
FCC Part 15, Class A CISPR 22, Class A ROHS Compliant Telecom conducted via EU standard
EN 55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003, Class A/EN55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003
Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the software and products with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02041
Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring Monitoring Software

2.4-1

General Description
Power Xpert Software aggregates the information arriving from different types of device families via various communication methods. Its unique Web-based design, alarm bubble-up and advanced trend and waveform analysis tools help you to quickly turn your attention to the most important events and to identify reliability issues and cost-saving opportunities. The standard custom graphic package, the Layout Manager, with an icon library and standard vertical templates, allows you to import and mimic your physical environment and gauges. Open protocol support makes Power Xpert Software compatible with most newer generation third-party equipment. Older legacy, proprietary protocols are supported by Power Xpert Gateways (see Page 2.1-1), and custom software drop-in drivers made available by Eaton. Power Xpert Software is the rst power system software of this caliber to put all these powerful features at your ngertips.
Key Features

Connects to your existing network Data trending and graphing for detailed information for troubleshooting, problem prevention and costs savings Web-based views that allow access to critical information from any location via a Web browser A modular, scalable architecture that allows the addition of capabilities and devices as the power system expands Alarm conditions bubble up through the system to allow personnel to identify which device is in alarm and where it is located All the functionality of Eatons PowerNet software suite Connectivity to a wide range of Eaton and third-party devices. For a full list of compatible devices, refer to the hardware compatibility list found at www.eaton.com/pxs
i ii 1 2
Power Xpert Software Layout Manager
3 4 5 6 7
The Power Xpert Software Layout Manager module provides the user a library of powerful design tools and standard templates for the creation of custom HumanMachine Interface (HMI) graphical layouts. Objects can be easily animated, various gauges can be selected, and custom bitmaps can be imported with little effort.
Table 2.4-1. Power Xpert Software Edition Features

Feature Sets Server module Trend viewer module Layout manager module Quality manager module Eaton device support (switchgear, UPSs, breakers, ePDUs, meters, relays, VDFs, MCCs, etc.) Power Xpert Gateway third-party device support SNMP connector Modbus connector Optional third-party driver support Custom third-party device driver support Power Xpert Software Professional Edition


8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Product Selection Guide Power Xpert Software Professional Edition

Geared toward end users, with built-in support for Eaton power distribution products such as switchgear, UPSs, breakers, PDUs, RPPs, meters, relays, VFDs and MCCs, among others Eaton products connect with the software directly via an Ethernet connection, while legacy devices use a Power Xpert Gateway to Web-enable their communications A subset of third-party meters and devices are supported as standard via the gateway connection
Note: For complete listing of Foreseer class hardware compatibility, visit the Foreseer Web site at www.eaton.com/foreseer.

Geared toward advanced power users, system integrators and enterprises with heterogeneous device spectrum and system developers who can take advantage of the included SNMP and Modbus integration development utilities Extensive support for third-party devices via standard SNMP and Modbus TCP protocols Large variety of ready made, optional third-party drop in drivers available
CA08104001E
2.4-2

Table 2.4-2. Power Xpert Software General Features
Features
September 2011
Sheet 02 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General
Web browser user interface Web-based monitoring capabilities Downloadable software version updates
Event Notication
Event notication via e-mail notication Event Notication via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces Alarm state management Event indicator displayed without Web page active Alarm/event searching and ltering Waveform attached to applicable power event Web browser based waveform viewing Alarm capabilities based on device driven events
Analysis and Trending

Graphic trend viewer Chart or data option selection Multiple trends display Multiple axis support View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform Standard COMTRADE le format support Customizable trend viewer look and feel Fixed or custom time frames Trend analysis capabilities Data export
Custom Graphics and Layouts

Custom graphics development via Web browser Four user view example templates included as standard iFrame capability Browser portal widget support Streaming media support Graphic object library included as standard ISO standard electrical picture objects available Graphic les import capability Graphic object animation capability Gauge object library support External Web Links support Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers Trend object support
UPS Shutdown
File saving during shutdown Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability
Security and Administration

Windows authentication security Two tier secure system access support SSL Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS)
Time Synchronization
Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond time resolution
Export and Integration

Extended Excel spreadsheet support SQL database query support
Logs
System log Error log
Service
Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE) Turnkey startup service
System Backup
Power Xpert Software system backup
Documentation and Training Videos

System Administrators Guide Power Xpert Software Users Guide Layout Manager Guide Quick Start Guide Power Xpert Software introduction and training video Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02043

2.4-3
Analyzing Power Quality

Electrical power quality is becoming ever more important with the continuing increase of nonlinear loads in industrial and commercial facilities. Voltage or frequency variances can disrupt many industrial processes, resulting in costly downtime and equipment losses. Power Xpert Software provides historical proles, or records of events for internal and utility verication, as well as real-time information that allows the user to isolate the source, magnitude, time and direction of power quality problems, including the following: Voltage Disturbances The most common power quality problem, voltage sags and swells, occurs because of utility supply variations, system faults or the concurrent starting of large motor loads Harmonics Harmonic distortion appears on the distribution system because of variable frequency drives and other non-sinusoidal loads where AC/DC conversion is present (UPS systems, computer power supplies, etc.) Power Factor The ability to monitor power factor throughout the facility ensures delivery of power at optimal efciency, allows 100% usage of transformers and prevents costly power factor penalties
Managing Energy Costs

Energy management is essential for an industrial or commercial facility. Electricity costs account for between 10 and 30% of total facility operating costs. Despite being often considered overhead, energy costs are manageable.
Manage When Energy is Used

Manage your energy costs by accurately measuring and quantifying energy patterns and usage within the facility. Track Use Patterns Efciently schedule processes during non-peak usage times by being able to identify where and when energy is being consumed. Verify the effectiveness of energy reduction methods Purchase Energy Make informed energy purchasing decisions by comparing how the rate structures offered by various suppliers impact your bottom-line
Power Xpert Software Computer Server
Allocate Energy Costs Establish accountability and enable incentives for energy conservation by accurately allocating usage and costs to each process or department Verify Energy Bill Conrm the accuracy of your energy bill using the detailed data supplied by Power Xpert Software
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Track and Schedule Maintenance

Coordination problems can be identied by overlaying coordination curves of active devices identifying problems before an unnecessary outage occurs. Maintenance schedules can be created on real-time mechanical and electrical equipment usage avoiding unnecessary preventive maintenance. Equipment beneting from usage-based maintenance can have maintenance alarms initiated based on equipment lifetime deteriorators rather than simply time schedules.
Web Browser or Client
12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 2.4-1. Typical Power Xpert Software System
18 19 20 21
2.4-4

September 2011
Sheet 02 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Problem Avoidance and Troubleshooting

Operators receive alerts to potential problems before they occur, such as a breaker timing out to trip. Loads can be shed or switched to alternate sources to prevent critical upstream breakers from unnecessarily tripping on an overload condition. Crucial electrical distribution information is instantaneously available to identify which breaker has tripped along with the cause and magnitude of the problem. Event sequence information narrows the list of possible causes to a trip. Immediate identication of problems can shorten downtime from hours to minutes saving production losses.
Power Xpert Software Modules

Power Xpert Software GUI Views/Templates
Each device category has its own template presenting pertinent information and metrics that are customized for that device type (UPS, PDU, meter, VDF, MCC and the like). You will be able to review a short list of the latest events time-stamped to the millisecond, the picture of the device, and its model information including name, location, contact and serial number. At any point, you can create a custom user view of any device with various gauges, custom icons and imported graphics that change color (greenyellowred) depending on event status.
Power Xpert Software Graphic View
Increased Productivity
Increased productivity by eliminating the need for time-consuming data collection. Personnel are freed to perform actual maintenance functions that keep facilities operating. Historical archive records and software tools provide simple-to-use tools for collecting energy data for internal and tenant energy billing without manual meter reading or monthly bill calculating. Load proles are immediately available for analysis when considering expansion. Spare capacity on existing feeders can be identied through historical load proling avoiding trips due to seasonal peaks. Correct determination of transformer spare capacity can help avoid unnecessary substation purchases. Double-ended substations designed for redundancy can have their ability to carry loads through a single transformers outage veried.
The Power Xpert Software Graphic View device template provides a standard layout for displaying Eaton device-specic measurements and data. Graphic templates are built into the software for standard Eaton devices. Viewing the most vital parameters along with self-explaining legends and one-line diagrams is available at a glance. Device-specic information is gathered at the bottom of the screen, including a product picture, location, system contact, maintenance schedule and asset serial number.
Power Xpert Software List View
The Power Xpert Software List View device template is provided as a standard layout for all devices, including third-party systems. The List View is available for any device integrated into Power Xpert Software, including third-party products. Typically it arranges product attributes into logical categories and displays them in a spreadsheet format, including continuously updated values and eld labels. The List View presents all measurements and data in a spreadsheet format that can be easily viewed and acted upon.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 045

2.4-5
Layout Manager
Layout Manager lets you model actual physical representations in a virtual replica of your real-world power system.

Trend Viewer
i ii 1 2
Build complete power system diagrams Large library of symbols and icons Create building groups that mirror your physical facilities or organization structure Create drill-down Web pages and folder structure to display your data the way you want to see it Alarm bubble-up ensures alarm events to raise to the top level through the folder structure
Hospital/Campus User View Examples
3
Trend Viewer
Industry-Specic Templates Power Xpert Software
Switchgear One-Line Layout Manager
The Trend Viewer gives quick insight into understanding power system device measurement trends. Preventing system overloads, planning future capacity and preventing expensive downtime can be achieved with this tool. The Power Xpert Software Trend Viewer offers a multitude of sophisticated trending capabilities. Viewable charts are quickly plotted with Microsofts SilverLight technology. Device measurement attributes and other parameters can be easily selected from either the List View or the Custom User View. Trend graphs can be presented in various chart formats one at a time, or you can view multiple charts at the same time. Single and multiple trends can be shown at the same time using xed or custom time frames. Results can be easily exported to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Plant Floor Example User View
Power Xpert Software has sample graphic layout templates that you can use and modify for various applications and environments. At Eaton, we understand that mimicking the real world is often the best way of keeping your system easy to use and simple to monitor. Included sample templates consist of a typical plant industrial layout, data center, hospital (health care) environment and a generic geographical layout application. All of the templates have typical devices integrated into them and, with the included Layout Manager utility, you can customize them to t your unique needs.
Data Center
CA08104001E
2.4-6

September 2011
Sheet 02 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Quality Manager
The standard Quality Manager, invoked directly from the event log, provides a tool for detailed waveform analysis. Determining and comparing waveform signatures provides a wealth of information on electrical phenomena, allowing you to take necessary protective action to prevent or protect against further occurrences. Quality Manager allows you to zoom in and out of waveforms, to sample individual parts of a waveform in great detail, and to provide accurate measurement information per points of sampling versus time scaleall the way up to the millisecond time resolution. In addition, this module can open third-party and individual COMTRADE standard les for examination. Spot trends faster with easy-to-read graphical displays of real-time information Monitor for voltage disturbances, voltage variances, and more Analyze complex waveforms See trends for historical data
Installation with Deployment Utility

All key setup requirements are automatically validated. If any of the prerequisites are not met or are incorrectly congured, the deployment utility will alert you to resolve the situation. The best part of using the deployment utility is that it has a button you can click to x the discovered problem.
Power Xpert Modbus TCP/IP Connector

Connects to and retrieves data from devices using Modbus TCP/IP protocol Modbus connector provides interfaces to devices from many non-Eaton manufacturers that communicate via industry-standard Modbus TCP/IP Requires user conguration and installation of the tool
Note: Available with Enterprise edition.
Power Xpert SNMP Connector

Easy Installation with Deployment Utility
Connects to and retrieves data from devices using SNMP protocol SNMP connector provides interfaces to non-Eaton devices that communicate via SNMP protocol Industry-standard SNMP support Flexible compiler to process MIB les Requires user conguration and installation of the tool
Note: Available with Enterprise edition.
Waveform Analysis Quality Manager
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02047

2.4-7
Integrated PowerNet Support

PowerNet (available on the Power Xpert Software DVD)
General Description
The features of Eatons PowerNet software suite are available as a standard part of Power Xpert Software. PowerNet is a family of software applications, client/ server conguration, that help provide a window into an electrical distribution system. Existing PowerNet systems can be easily integrated with Power Xpert Software.
PowerNet Features
Connectivity bundle Communication to 1000 INCOM devices Auto learn of all INCOM connected devices for maximum usability Security conguration Trending/logging congurations Device set point editing/printing/ viewing MSDE/SQL data storage Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) server OLE for Process Control (OPC) server Modbus RTU Gateway to data from Eaton INCOM communicating devices
Power quality bundle Viewing of captured waveforms Up to eight cycles of actual waveform Zoomed-in view of high-speed waveform samples Spectrum chart showing frequency content and magnitude (Fourier analysis) CBEMA/ITIC representation of events Top down access to specic Waveform events from event lists and CBEMA/ITIC curves Trip curve display for coordination and selectivity needs Log-log coordination curve plottedon-screen for trip units and motor protective relays with the click of a button Online modication of trip curve pickups and time delays; instant verication of coordination with an updated trip curve
Automatic scale adjustment based on device pickup level Addition or removal of trip curves directly from the display screen Color-coded curves tied to the device description for added clarity Overlay multiple curves View motor start proles next to motor protection relay trip curve
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PowerNet Digitrip Screen Viewed in Power Xpert Software
8 9 10
Table 2.4-3. PowerNet WaveformCaptured Waveforms

Captured Waveform Eaton Device IQ Analyzer Digitrip 910

1150

OPTIM 1050

MPCV Relay
Currents
Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral Ground

11 12
Voltages
Line-Line Line-Neutral Ground-Neutral Transformer

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
2.4-8

September 2011
Sheet 02 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Power Xpert Reporting Software

Greenhouse Gas Report: Captures the six offensive greenhouse gasses: carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxide, mercury, methane and nitrous oxide broken down by selected locations within a facility
Capacity Summary Report: The summary of top- and bottom-loaded circuits, as well as loading details for each circuit according to userdened date/time range and facility hierarchy location
Foreseer Software (one or more instances)
Power Xpert Software (one or more instances)
4CR Data Acquisition Engine
Device Aggregators (PowerNet, Gateways)
Power Xpert Devices (Meters, Gateways, Other)
Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices
Greenhouse Gas Report
Figure 2.4-2. Power Xpert Reporting Architectural Overview Power Xpert Reporting brings the power system information together to compare and contrast. Power Xpert Reporting provides a standard set of reports, including:
Utilities Report: Captures consumption of water, air, gas, electricity and steam (WAGES)
Data Center Efciency Report: A summary of data center infrastructure efciency and power usage effectiveness, including such information as temperature and humidity, and energy consumption
Capacity Summary Report Utilities Report
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Data Center Efciency Report
September 2011
Sheet 02 049

2.4-9
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report: Determine branch circuit loading levels at a glance with color-coded graphics indicating loading status against capacity. Redundant sources can be reviewed, as well as single source loads
Energy Summary Report: The summary of consumption (kWh) and demand (kW) for a userdened date/time range and facility hierarchy location
Power Quality Report: The distribution and trend for amps, volts and THD according to userdened date/time ranges and facility hierarchy location
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Energy Summary Report
10 11 12 13
Power Quality Report
Energy Cost Allocation Report: The total energy bill dollar value or a cost per kWh across a facility hierarchy for a user-dened date/time range
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report
14 15
Energy Cost Allocation Report
16 17 18 19 20 21
2.4-10 Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring Monitoring Software

September 2011
Sheet 02 050
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Event Summary Report: Provides a Pareto chart of events according to user-dened date/time ranges and facility hierarchy location
Service Offerings Available Power Xpert Startup Service Packs

At Eaton, we want to make it as easy and non-disruptive as possible to implement our Power Xpert products. Eaton offers several startup service packs from partial help to full turnkey solution implementation. All services are performed by authorized Eaton Electrical Services & Systems group personnel.
Startup Service Packs Include the Following Services

Startup scope determination Eaton services will help you evaluate your service needs and check that the service pack you have selected has appropriate coverage for your circumstances Pre-installation checkup Eaton services will contact you to go through the pre-installation checklist, which ensures efcient, prime quality installation and conguration services
Installation and conguration Eaton services will install Power Xpert Software and congure it for operation with your equipment according to startup scope determination. Conguration may also include creating custom graphic layouts if necessary and required System test Eaton services will test the Power Xpert Software for operability and will validate communications with key components Optional hands-on training If required, Eaton services can provide hands-on training for Power Xpert Software, using the software on-site or using simulated demo systems
Event Summary Report
Joint Commission Report: Standard Joint Commission Compliant Report supports hospital power test requirements. It checks events, key metrics of generators and automatic transfer switches (ATS) during generator testing at user-dened date/time ranges and facility hierarchy location
Table 2.4-4. Selecting the Appropriate Service Pack

Startup Service Product Number of Eaton Devices to be Integrated <15 Power Xpert 1 Day

1530
3175
>75
Non-Eaton Devices
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Joint Commission Report
Power Xpert 2 Day Power Xpert 5 Day Customer Fixed Price Quote

Available and valid in continental United States only. Typical number of Eaton devices that can be congured in the Power Xpert Software during the course of the selected Startup Service Pack. We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs. Please call the Technical Resource Center for custom Startup Service at 800-809-2772, option 4, 1 for a price quote.
Note: The number of devices that can be congured during the course of a selected Start Pack can vary depending on the devices installation readiness levels. Maximum numbers indicated require full conguration readiness levels dened in the Power Xpert Startup Services Checklist document in the services brochure at www.eaton.com/pxs.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 051

2.4-11
Table 2.4-5. Technical Specications

Power Xpert Startup Service Pack Guidelines 1 day 2 day 5 day Additional services After hours service Customer required training Description 8 hrs, on-site, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m. 16 hrs, on-site, two consecutive days, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m. 5-day 40 hrs, on-site, ve consecutive days, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m. Can be purchased at Eaton prevailing time and service time material rates or xed price quote can be provided. Call 1-800-809-2772 option 4, 1. If required during night shift or weekend, additional service costs will apply and a purchase order must be received for the premium time prior to scheduling the service. Any required safety training will be charged at the required training service hours purchased. Any expenses required or safety training (i.e., drug testing payments) will be an extra charge. IP addresses are required for the serving computer, certain communicating devices and certain device interfaces. Static IP addresses including subnet mask and default gateway must be provided prior to scheduling service. The system must be fully wired and connected prior to commencing service. This includes any network drops for any TCP/IP devices and actual device wiring (i.e., INCOM or Modbus networks). We strongly recommend that you review Eatons full Hardware Compatibility List available at www.eaton.com/pxs. The pricing includes both travel and lodging in the continental United States. Eaton Selling Policy 5-000 applies to all Power Xpert Policy Startup Service Pack sales. Eaton Power Xpert Startup Service Packs are available and valid in the continental United States only. Valid for 12 months after date of purchase. Recommended to schedule a service appointment within the rst three months of purchase. A minimum of three weeks advance notice is required prior to requested service date.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Catalog Number PXS-PRO PXS-PRON1S PXS-PRON2S PXS-PRON5S PXS-PRONPXR PXS-ENT PXS-ENTN1S PXS-ENTN2S PXS-ENTN5S
Customer Requirements
IP addresses Connections Device compatibility
Travel
Travel costs
Selling policy
Eaton selling policy
Validity and restrictions

Availability Validity Scheduling Advance notice
Table 2.4-6. Power Xpert Software

Description
Power Xpert Software Professional Edition

Power Xpert Software Professional Edition Power Xpert Software Professional Edition w/ 1-day startup Power Xpert Software Professional Edition w/ 2-day startup Power Xpert Software Professional Edition w/ 5-day startup Power Xpert Software Professional Edition and Power Xpert Reporting
10 11 12 13 14

Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition w/ 1-day startup Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition w/ 2-day startup Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition w/ 5-day startup

Power Xpert Reportingsingle source DB connection Power Xpert Reportingup to 2 source DB connections Power Xpert Reportingup to 5 source DB connections Power Xpert Reportingup to 10 source DB connections Power Xpert Reportingup to 25 source DB connections Power Xpert Reportingup to 50 source DB connections PXR PXR-2DB PXR-5DB PXR-10DB PXR-25DB PXR-50DB PX-1S PX-2S PX-5S
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Service Packs
Power Xpert 1-day startup Service Pack Power Xpert 2-day startup Service Pack Power Xpert 5-day startup Service Pack
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 02 052
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Hardware Requirements
Power Xpert Software (PXS) requires a server-class machine with the following minimum hardware specications: Table 2.4-7. Hardware Specications
Hardware Processor Memory Specication 2.8 GHz, dual-core processor 2 GB allocated for PXS (allocate 3 GB of memory to a virtual machine session running PXS) The PXS application itself requires 190 MB of disk storage A typical database will grow to 2 GB within a year. If you have a large number of devices, reserve additional storage space 1280 by 1024 pixels or higher DVD RO drive
Software Requirements Supported operating systems
Disk space required for application Disk space required for database
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 (Standard or Enterprise) 32-bit edition Microsoft Windows XP Professional (32-bit) with Service Pack 3, 32-bit Windows Server 2008 (Standard or Enterprise), 32-bit or 64-bit Windows Server 2008 R2 (Server or Enterprise), 32-bit or 64-bit Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate or Enterprise editions, either 32-bit or 64-bit
Software components
IIS 5.0 or higher (must be installed prior to installing PXS; for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008, this is installed automatically) Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or 8.0
Video resolution Removable media
Third-Party Software Installed

The following Microsoft software is also installed during the PXS installation.

You may wish to add the following hardware as well: Local printer Sound card (if sounds are assigned to specic alarm conditions) Modem (for remote alarm notication to machines not available via your network)

.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 Windows Installer 4.5 C++ Runtime Library 2008 Microsoft Data Access 2.8 SQL Server 2008 Express SP2 SQL Server 2005 Express Management Studio SP2
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 053

2.4-13
Table 2.4-8. Power Xpert Software (PXS) Hardware Compatibility List (HWCL)
Device Communication Protocol Supported Directly in Power Xpert Software Supported via PowerNet Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Foreseer Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Power Xpert Gateway 200E Supported via Power Xpert 400E/ 600E/800E Gateway Supported via Power Xpert Gateway PDP/1000 Card Supported via Power Xpert Gateway UPS/2000 Card

Supported via ConnectUPS SNMP/Web Card
i ii 1
Eaton UPSs
5115 UPS 5125 UPS 5130 UPS 9120 UPS 9120 UPS 9125 UPS 9125 UPS 9130 UPS 9135 UPS 9140 UPS 9150 HV single-phase UPS 9150 HV three-phase UPS 9150 LV UPS 9155 two-phase UPS 9155 three-phase UPS 9155 three-phase UPS 9155 UPS 9155 UPS 9170 Plus two-phase UPS 9170 Plus single-phase UPS 9305 UPS 9305 UPS 9305 UPS 9305 UPS 9315 50500 UPS 9315 50500 UPS 9315 750 UPS 9315 750 UPS 9315 SBM 9315 SBM with MBP 9315 SBM without MBP 9315 UPM with Bypass 9315 UPM without bypass 9320 UPS 9330 UPS 9330 UPS 9335 UPS 9335 UPS 9340 UPS
SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP XCP/BCM SNMP XCP/BCM SNMP SNMP SNMP XCP/BCM XCP/BCM XCP/BCM BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ SNMP BACnetWS+ SNMP XCP/BCM XCP/BCM XCP/BCM UCII SNMP XCP/BCM/UCII XCP/BCM SNMP XCP/BCM SNMP SNMP BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ XCP/BCM SNMP XCP/BCM SNMP XCP/BCM XCP/BCM

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
These specications are subject to change without notice and represent typical congurations that may require additional connectivity products in conjunction with Power Xpert Software. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options and product model, and depending on the communication methods being used and rmware versions, some device-specic parameters may not get always passed through to the software. Please refer to the Technical Data Sheets and User Manuals for detailed specications and parameter availability. Please refer to the Hardware Compatibility List posted at www.eaton.com/pxs for latest version and details.
Note: For updated list, see www.eaton.com/pxs.
CA08104001E

Table 2.4-8. Power Xpert Software (PXS) Hardware Compatibility List (HWCL) (Continued)

September 2011
Sheet 02 054
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton UPSs (Continued)

9355 UPS 9390 2-module 9390 3-module 9390 4-module 9390 UPS 9390 UPS 9395 2-module 9395 3-module 9395 4-module 9395 5-module 9395 6-module 9395 7-Module 9395 8-Module 9395 distributed parallel with SBM 9395 distributed parallel without SBM 9395 UPS 9395 UPS BladeUPS BladeUPS 2-module BladeUPS 3-module BladeUPS 4-module BladeUPS 5-module BladeUPS 6-module BladeUPS module Ferrups IPM BP III UPS, BCM IPM BP IV BCM IPM BP Plus UPS IPM BPII UPS, P-Record single-phase IPM BPII UPS, P-Record three-phase Plus 1836 UPS Prestige UPS Prestige UPS
BACnetWS+ SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP BACnetWS+ SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+
BACnetWS+ SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP XCP/BCM XCP/BCM XCP/BCM XCP/BCM
XCP/BCM
XCP/BCM SNMP XCP/BCM
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 055

2.4-15
Device Communication Supported Protocol Directly in Power Xpert Software Supported via PowerNet Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Foreseer Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Power Xpert Gateway 200E Supported via Power Xpert 400E/ 600E/800E Gateway Supported via Power Xpert Gateway PDP/1000 Card

Supported via Power Xpert Gateway UPS/2000 Card
i ii 1
Eaton Power Distribution Equipment

EMS-PDR EMS-PDU EMS-RPM EMS-RPP ePDU MI red display 208V 30A (630, L6-30) ePDU MI red display 208V 60A (IEC 309-60 1P) ePDU MI red display all 120V (5-xx, L5-xx), ePDU MI red display 208V 20A (620, L6-20) BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ SNMP

2 3 4 5 6
SNMP
SNMP
ePDU MI red SNMP display split-phase 20A (L14-20), ePDU MI red display split-phase 30A (L14-30) Monitored ePDU blue display Monitored ePDU red display three-phase PDU panel, PDU subfeed, EMS panel, EMS subfeed Switched ePDU 16 outlets single-phase Switched ePDU 24 outlets single-phase Switched ePDU 24 outlets three-phase Switched ePDU 8 outlets single-phase
7 8

SNMP SNMP
BACnetWS+
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
SNMP
SNMP
SNMP
SNMP
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 02 056
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton Meters
IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 IQ Data, IQ Generator IQ DataPlus, IQ DataPlus II, IQ DataPlus II Goldstar, IQ DataPlus II HV IQ DP-4000 IQ Multipoint ES IQ Multipoint ESII IQ Power Sentinel IQ Sentinel, univ. w/external CTs, univ. multiple well-head, univ. single well-head IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 200/IQ 300, IQ 220/320, IQ 230/IQ 330 IQ 230M/IQ 330M (three-wire) IQ 230M/IQ 330M (four-wire) IQ 250 IQ 260 IQ 7000 Meter point Power Manager, Power Manager, w/inp. trans. Power Xpert Meter 2250 Power Xpert Meter 2260 Power Xpert Meter 2270 Power Xpert Meter 4000 Power Xpert Meter 6000 Power Xpert Meter 8000
INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM
INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM
Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU INCOM
IQ 220/230
Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU INCOM INCOM INCOM
BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+ BACnetWS+
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 057

2.4-17
Device Communication Supported Protocol Directly in Power Xpert Software Supported via PowerNet Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Foreseer Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Power Xpert Gateway 200E Supported via Power Xpert 400E/ 600E/800E Gateway Supported via Power Xpert Gateway PDP/1000 Card Supported via Power Xpert Gateway UPS/2000 Card Supported via ConnectUPS SNMP/Web Card
i ii 1
Eaton Circuit Protection Products

ARMS IDM C441 overload relay Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 700/800 Digitrip 810 Digitrip 910 Digitrip MV, Digitrip 3000, Digitrip 3200 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Digitrip OPTIM 550, Digitrip OPTIM 750 DT1150/DT1150V/ Navy EDR-3000 EDR-4000 ETR-4000 FP-4000/FP-5000 FP-6000 IQ 500 overload relay MMCO relay MP-3000, MP-4000 MPCV relay Series NRX 1150 Series NRX 519 Series NRX 520M INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus

2 3 4 5 6
INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus
INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus SNMP
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Eaton DC Systems
SC200 system controller AEM, AEMII AIM BIM/BIMII CMU IQ 1000 IQ 1000II, IQ 1000II Goldstar IQ CED, IQ CED II WCMU
Eaton Sub-Network Master

INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton Transfer Switch

ATC-400 ATC-600 ATC-800
These specications are subject to change without notice and represent typical congurations that may require additional connectivity products in conjunction with Power Xpert Software. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options and product model, and depending on the communication methods being used and rmware versions, some device-specic parameters may not get always passed through to the software. Please refer to the Technical Data Sheets and User Manuals for detailed specications and parameter availability. Please refer to the Hardware Compatibility List posted at www.eaton.com/pxs for latest version and details. Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 02 058
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Eaton Starters
ACM/Advantage Advantage IQ 500 overload relay IT. Starter S811 (MV811) IT. Starter QSnap IT. Starter with cover controls D77A-AI16 D77A-DI16 D77A-DI8 INCOM INCOM INCOM QCport QCport QCport QCport QCport QCport INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus Modbus RTU Modbus RTU INCOM/Modbus QCport QCport QCport QCport SNMP INCOM/Modbus Communications Card INCOM/Modbus 802.11g

Eaton Drives
Accutrol 400 AF97 MVX9000 SVX9000
Eaton I/O
DIM D77A-AI16 D77A-AI8 D77A-DI16 D77A-DI18 Foreseer DAT Universal RTD EMP Qualitrol 118 Wireless temperature sensor
Environmental Monitoring
Integration Tools
LanSafe SNMP agent Third-party custom device driver support Third-party Modbus TCP compatible devices SNMP Various

Modbus TCP
Third-party SNMP SNMP compatible devices
These specications are subject to change without notice and represent typical congurations that may require additional connectivity products in conjunction with Power Xpert Software. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options and product model, and depending on the communication methods being used and rmware versions, some device-specic parameters may not get always passed through to the software. Please refer to the Technical Data Sheets and User Manuals for detailed specications and parameter availability. Please refer to the Hardware Compatibility List posted at www.eaton.com/pxs for latest version and details. Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.
19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 059

2.4-19
Device Communication Supported Protocol Directly in Power Xpert Software Supported via PowerNet Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Foreseer Server (Built into PXS) Supported via Power Xpert Gateway 200E Supported via Power Xpert 400E/ 600E/800E Gateway Supported via Power Xpert Gateway PDP/1000 Card Supported via Power Xpert Gateway UPS/2000 Card Supported via ConnectUPS SNMP/Web Card
i ii 1
Miscellaneous
Addressable relay, addressable relay inv. Alarm relay Breaker controller InsulGard insulation monitor IQ Transfer Switch II Pow-R-Command Wireless current sensor INCOM/Modbus

INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus INCOM/Modbus
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Third-Party Device Support

ABB TPU 2000 GE 369 motor relay GE 469 motor relay EI Nexus 1262/1272 PML 7350 meter series PML 7550 meter series PML 7650 meter series Power Xpert Gateway thirdparty device support Square D CM3000 meter series Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus

Modbus
Square D CM4000/4250 Modbus meter series Square D PM710 meter series Square D PM810/820/850/870 meter series
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Modbus Modbus
CA08104001E

Foreseer Services
September 2011
Sheet 02 060
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Foreseer Services
Foreseer Software and Engineering Services (Foreseer Services) provide vendor independent, power and energy infrastructure integration solutions that help companies reduce energy consumption and unplanned downtime due to the failure of critical power, environmental, safety or security systems. Turnkey software and connectivity solutions are coupled with state-ofthe-art project management, systems design, third-party device integration, testing and custom application development to develop a comprehensive monitoring solution to meet your custom needs. Foreseer Services is delivered in four categories, each offering a multitude of unique value-add services that you can discuss with your Eaton sales professional.

of the best t for various integration environments, and the right solution at the right price.
User-Dened Formulas
Information from multiple sources and systems can be inserted into user dened formulas, providing knowledge for informed decision making.
Foreseer Services Categories

Foreseer Services has three general categories: Foreseer Software Services Foreseer Project Management Services Foreseer Engineering Services
Extensive Device Driver Library

Foreseer Software Services enables the full-scale integration of third-party products. A device library of over 600 drivers has been developed. For a full list of compatible devices, see the Foreseer services/hardware compatibility list at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
Foreseer Software Services Unique Features Four scalable solutions

Four classes, capable of handling 15,000 to 256,000 data streams (channels). Software (up to 15,000 channels) Foreseer M-Class server software (up to 25,000 channels) Foreseer R-Class server software (up to 100,000 channels) Foreseer S-Class server software (up to 256,000 channels)

Trend Analysis
High performance analysis and forecasting tools assess equipment performance specications including cause analysis, impact analysis, capacity planning, preventive maintenance assessments and trending.
Custom User Interfaces

Custom, mimic graphics, dashboards, and 3D renderings.
Design services Installation services Commissioning services Follow-up services Hardware services Software services
Web Browser AccessUnlimited Seats

Web browser access enables easy system access. Multiple users can access Foreseer software without the need for additional client seat licenses.
Redundant, Worldwide Coverage

The inclusion of one or more extra Foreseer servers provides the highest possible levels of system reliability. In the unlikely event that one Foreseer server fails then the remaining servers can carry the load of the power monitoring system. With the Manager of Managers (MOM) software option, data from one server can be monitored alongside data from other servers, enabling you to aggregate multiple Foreseer sites into a single system.
Alarm Notications
For each channel being monitored, you can assign up to four alarm thresholdsfrom routine maintenance alerts to system failureplus handling instructions and escalation procedures for each.
Foreseer services is fully distributable to allow different monitoring capabilities to be deployed at different sites allowing you to purchase only what is needed. Many competitive systems offer a one-size-ts all type approach where you end up paying for more capacity than is needed. With Foreseer Services, you pay only for what you need, when you need it.
Foreseer Project Management Services

Each Foreseer integration project can be customized. See Figure 2.4-3 for an overview of project ow.
Four Scalable Solutions

Foreseer Software Services is available in four classes, capable of handling 15,000 to 256,000 data streams (channels), so you can be assured
Data Gathering, 24/7

A proactive algorithm gathers data 24/7, enabling you to sample data points from thousands of devices, every second.
Figure 2.4-3. Foreseer Project Management Services
21
September 2011
Sheet 02 061

Foreseer Services
2.4-21
Foreseer Engineering Services Design Services

After extensive assessment of your requirements and the existing device and facility infrastructure, the Foreseer design services team congures your system, complete with a bill of materials and recommendations unique to your needs. Specication development, drawings and detailed documentation for your project is part of this step. Third-party device support and communication interface planning is critical, including driver development and enhancement, if necessary. User interfaces are designed with default views to meet your specications.
Custom Foreseer Services Applications

Data Center Efciency
Growth Planning
i ii 1 2
Power Capacity View Eaton Powerware UPS-Primary View
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Calculates DCiE and PUE

Use Foreseer Software Services Power Xpert Reporting option to automatically calculate Data Center Infrastructure Efciency (DCiE) and Power Usage Effectiveness (PUE). These industry-standard efciency metrics help IT managers to understand and to track how efciently their data center is running and how effective improvement efforts have been.
Installation Services
Installation services team members are with you from project initiation to handing over the Foreseer system when work is complete. Tasks include:

Startup needs, testing and customization Drawings and custom graphic layout development Customized device gauge graphics and status indicators Third-party software integration Custom software and application development Setup and conguration of reporting packages and basic Foreseer training
The Power Capacity View provides an at-a-glance simple analysis of the data centers electrical capacity. Normal, cautionary and alarm events are triggered automatically, both online and remotely once a threshold has been reached. Mapping the data centers capacity is critical for power, cooling and redundancy planning. With Foreseer Software projection graphing capability, data center managers can easily predict when they are going to hit a capacity threshold going into the future and can prepare accordingly.
Energy Cost Allocation Fair Share Utility Cost Distribution

Foreseer Software provides energy usage by individual circuit so each device can be a part of the energy management strategy. It even allocates electrical cost to individual and branch circuits, which can then be assigned to individual users of a department or device.
Plan with the Electrical Capacity Planning Tool

Demand on devices grows as organizations expand. While average demand may not be a concern, peak demand is. Foreseer software tracks the kW and kVA over time, immediately informs of peak levels, and projects future demands based on past usage. Assisting in planning for electrical upgrades and/or changes to the power system to support changing load patterns.
Commissioning Services
Commissioning services consist of overall and tiered systems testing and full point-to-point system commissioning options.
Power Density Pinpoint Hot Spots in Your Data Center

Power density is a critical measurement as racks proliferate and expand from TCP/IP networks and servers and other elements of the infrastructure are placed into smaller areas. Foreseer Software manages power density by device, for a single rack, oor or an entire building, allowing identication of overloaded racks and incorrect power drains due to device failure.
Follow-up Services
Our follow-up services team handles all issues related to connectivity, device installation, conguration and customization, hardware integration, third-party system setup, conguration and testing. Technical support and customized service contracts with scheduled site visits are also available with advanced Foreseer system training.
CA08104001E

Foreseer Services Load Balancing Prevent Unbalanced Loads
Improper load balancing contributes to harmonic distortion. Foreseer software tracks load levels by phase, giving instant notication when extreme imbalances begin to occur, and providing the knowledge to take the necessary steps to re-distribute the load. Foreseer software visually illustrates the load balance of a device or
September 2011
Sheet 02 062
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
system in real-time, while showing what the balanced model should be. You see the current state, the worstcase scenario and the proper load.
Figure 2.4-4. Data Center/Co-Location DeviceThe typical Data Center/Co-Location device mixture includes a large variety of power distribution, cooling, environmental monitoring, lighting, safety and security, backup and emergency power systems that have been purchased over a long period of time. Foreseer Services integrates all of these systems into a simple, single software monitoring package. Support for metering and energy measurement, including greenhouse gas monitoring, are requirements that need to be taken into consideration as well as, for example, Building Management System integration.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 063

Foreseer Services
2.4-23
A/C Control Client Software
Foreseer Services Available Options

Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works in conjunction with Foreseer Software allowing a view past individual measurements, trend graphs and events. It consolidates complex data from a multitude of devices from around the globe into easy-to-understand graphical reports. It provides a standard set of reports for the most common report requests. Simply choose from 10 ready-to-go report templates. Power Xpert Reporting can be set to run the report automatically and send you new, updated reports via e-mail at predened intervals.
Redundancy
Safeguards valuable information. The inclusion of one or more extra Foreseer software servers provides the highest levels of system reliability. In the event that one Foreseer software server fails, the remaining servers carry the load of the power monitoring system.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE)

Designed specically for geographically or physically removed sites where local IT expertise may not exist. The data acquisition engine (see Page 2.4-24 for details) automatically collects and sends data from critical infrastructure devices, and communicates that data back to the Foreseer software server. Using local processing and the shared bandwidth of an IP network, the DAE reduces the cost required to transmit data to the central server. The DAE also continues to operate independently and generate alarms even if the connection to the central server is unavailable, increasing the overall availability of the management system.
AC Control-Zone Assignment
Take Control of Your Environment

The Foreseer software A/C interface offers comprehensive monitoring and optional lead/lag control for Air Flow, Data Aire and Liebert System 3 air conditioning units. Lead/lag control and scheduling is viewable via a Web-browser and is controllable with the proper user authority.
Manager of Managers (MOM)

Provides a powerful means to integrate data from multiple locations where each location is running its own Foreseer software server. This unique feature provides a scalable system where the total number of integrated points on the centralized MOM server can be as large as 256,000 points.
Maintenance Scheduler
Sequence of Events Recorder

Enables breaker status monitoring capability at a time stamping resolution of 1 millisecond. During a critical or catastrophic event, sequence of event information is captured by the recorder for retrospective analysis and root cause issue mitigation.
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT)

Easily integrates monitored equipment and sensors located in small, networked remote sites. The DAT (see Page 2.4-24 for details) employs standard Modbus communications to relay information to either a Foreseer software server or a data acquisition engine over a TCP/IP network. Data is packaged in sequential Modbus registers to enable optimum scan times without impacting network bandwidth.
Maintenance Scheduler
Eliminate the Hassles

The Foreseer software maintenance scheduler offers the ability to preset scheduled (weekly or periodic) maintenance windows within the system to disarm selected devices on which maintenance will be performed. Disarming the devices allows continued monitoring and archiving during the maintenance period while disabling alarms and preventing unnecessary notication of personnel.
Secure Web Server (https)

Provides an encrypted means to protect all data that is viewed via a standard Web browser on the Internet or intranet. Using the OpenSSL package from the Internet, Foreseer software is able to provide 128 bit encryption between the Foreseer Software and the Web browser. Both registered certicates from a third-party provider or self-signed certicates are allowed to be used with this option.
Universal Input Enclosure

Provides network connectivity for analog and contact input information along with device server capability. Each enclosure contains from one to ve input modules with pluggable connectors used for power and input wiring, enabling cost-efcient monitoring of equipment in small, remote facilities.
CA08104001E

Foreseer Class Hardware Options
To further expand the reach of Foreseer Services, two hardware devices are offered. The Foreseer data acquisition engine is designed specically for geographically or physically removed Foreseer class sites where local IT expertise may not exist. The Foreseer data acquisition terminal easily integrates monitored equipment and sensors located in small, networked remote sites. For complete listing of Foreseer class hardware compatibility, visit the Foreseer Web site at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
September 2011
Sheet 02 064
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE)
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT)
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT) Data Acquisition Engine (DAE)
Designed specically for geographically or physically removed sites where local IT expertise may not exist. The data acquisition engine automatically collects and sends data from critical infrastructure devices, such as UPS, generator and power distribution units, and communicates that data, as well as status and alarms, back to the centrally located Foreseer server. Using local processing and using the shared bandwidth of an IP network, the DAE reduces the cost required to transmit data to the central server. The DAE can also continues to operate independently and generate alarms even if the connection to the central server is unavailable, increasing the overall availability of the management system.
Easily integrates monitored equipment and sensors located in small, networked remote sites. The DAT employs standard Modbus communications to relay information to either a Foreseer server or a data acquisition engine over a TCP/IP network. Data is packaged in sequential Modbus registers to enable optimum scan times without impacting network bandwidth.
DAT Technical Specications
DAE Technical Specications

12
13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
External power input: 115/230 Vac in, 5 Vdc 8A out, optional48 Vdc Ethernet: dual 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports Communications ports: four RS-232/ 422/485 and four USB ports Dimensions in inches (H x W x D): 3.50 x 17.00 x 11.00, 19.00-inch rackmount with removable anges Environment: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C), 0% to 90% noncondensing RH Monitoring: 3072 channels, maximum of 1536 analog
External power input: 100/240 Vac, 47/63 Hz,1A (0.5A at 240) optional 48 Vdc Ethernet: 10Base-T, status and activity LEDs Communications: Modbus RTU via UDP using TCP/IP Port 7010 or Modbus TCP Dimensions in inches (H x W x D): 1.75 x 19.00 x 4.63 Weight: 3 lbs Environment: 4 to 185F (20 to 85C), 0% to 90% noncondensing RH Discrete inputs: 16 channels congure as dry contact Relay outputs: 16 channels, SPDT conguration, contacts rated at 500 mA, 125 Vac Analog inputs: eight channels of 12-bit A/D up to 16 digital inputs
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 065
Power Management Systems & Products for Third-Party Integration

Power Xpert Gateway and PONI Communication Modules
2.5-1
Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
The MPONI comes with mounting hardware and attaches to the back of its associated device.
Note: Please see IL for detailed register support information for each supported product. Not all device functionality is supported with the RS-485 PONI over the Modbus protocol.
MP-4000. The DPONI is powered both by the host product to which it is attached and by the DeviceNet network. The DPONI uses opto-couplers to isolate the two power systems. The DPONI communicates at 125, 250 or 500 Kbps selected via a front panel DIP switch. All products on the DeviceNet network must be set at the same communication rate. The DPONI has a bi-color network/module status LED that functions in accordance with the DeviceNet specication. An additional monocolor LED ashes while the DPONI is receiving a message from the host device.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
DPONI
The DeviceNet Product Operated Network Interface (DPONI) enables communication between a DeviceNet network master station and a host device in a master/slave format over a DeviceNet network. The DPONI is compatible with the MP-3000 and
Power Xpert Gateway
The Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and 800E work on an open communication architecture. They connect both Eaton and third-party electrical equipment communicating through INCOM, QCPort and Modbus RTU. Modbus TCP/IP supports integration with third-party monitoring solutions. For example, the gateways send information to a Kepware OPC server, which then allows the data from downstream devices to integrate with third-party HMI and Building Management systems. Ethernet TCP support uses your existing network infrastructure, reducing costs. For detailed information on the Power Xpert Gateways, please see Page 2.2-1. For detailed information on compatible devices, refer to www.eaton.com/pxg.
Network Connection (Green Phoenix LED Connection)

TX
Address Selector Switches
Function Selector Switch
6 7 8
IQ Host Device Connection
RS-485 RX NETWORK
1=A 2=G 3 = COMMON 4 = SHIELD 5 = CHASSIS
STATUS
9 10 11 12 13
RS-485 P roduct O perated N etwork I nterface LED
Recommended 18 gauge twisted pair IMPCABLE or 20 gauge Belden 9463 class
Figure 2.5-1. RS-485 PONI

DeviceNet Status DeviceNet Network Connection (5 point plug)
DEVICE MOUNTING
RS-485 PONI
The RS-485 Product Operated Network Interface card, or MPONI card, enables Modbus communication capability to various Eaton products. Each MPONI contains two rotary address switches to uniquely identify each device on the network and a baud rate DIP switch. A 5-pin connector is provided for wiring to the RS-485 network. Various baud rates are available for networking exibility, and onboard LEDs indicate operation, error and communication status. The MPONI is applied where a device network exists connected by a dedicated shielded twisted pair conductor. Modbus RS485 allows a single device or multiple units in a daisy-chain conguration to communicate with another local or remote device and may extend up to 4000 ft (1219m) without a repeater.
14
T
15
Data Code
16 17 18
Earth GND
19
INCOM Status IQ Host Device Connection
20 21
Figure 2.5-2. DPONI
CA08104001E
2.5-2

MINTII RS-232 Converter
September 2011
Sheet 02 066
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Master INCOM Network Translator II

The Master INCOM Network Translator II (MINTII) converts the twisted shielded pair network of INCOM devices to an RS-232 signal. This signal can be accessed by PLCs, computer serial ports and building management system serial interface cards. The MINTII is also often applied as an interface to standard line drivers and converters to allow communication through dedicated telephone lines, dial-up modems, ber-optic line drivers, radio frequency or wireless modems.
Temperature: 0 to 60C Humidity: 095% Power: 120V Speed: 1200, 2400 and 9600 baud (INCOM), 19.2K baud (RS-232) Communications: INCOM, RS-232
Product Selection
Table 2.5-1. MINTII RS-232 Converter
Description Master INCOM Network Translator II Catalog Number MINTII
General Description
Applications
Converts a network of power management software devices to ASCII RS-232 format for access through a serial port of a PC, laptop, or Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).
Displayed Parameters
Eatons MINTII provides access to all parameters monitored over a system monitoring system such as Power Xpert Software or Foreseer Services Supports INCOM networks up to 8500 ft (2590m) in distance and device counts up to 1000
9-Pin PC Comport
PC
MINTII Twisted Pair INCOM Network

Suitable for panel mounting or desktop use 120 Vac power cord included for plug-in to standard duplex receptacle Height: 2.25 inches (57.2 mm) Width: 11.50 inches (292.1 mm) Depth: 4.25 inches (108.0 mm)
9-Pin Female to 25-Pin Male Straight-Through RS-232 Cable
Figure 2.5-3. MINTII Connection Diagram for Use with a PC
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 02 067

mMINT
2.5-3
mMINT
LED indicators for INCOM transmit and receive communications exchanges LED indicators for Modbus RS-485 transmit and receive communications exchanges Input power for the module from either 120 Vac or 24125 Vdc DIN rail mount package 0 to 60C ambient operation
Modbus RS-485 Network

The following simplied rules apply to a given system consisting of a cable link between master and slave devices (see Figure 2.5-5). For more complex congurations, please refer to standard Modbus RTU wiring specication rules for the RS-485 network. The recommended Modbus cable has twisted-pair wires (24 AWG stranded 7x32 conductors with PVC insulation) having an aluminum/ mylar foil shield with drain wire The maximum system capacity is 4000 feet of communications cable and 247 devices on the Modbus RTU network Make sure that there is twistedpair wire that is recommended for Modbus RTU network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect each slave to the Modbus RTU network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted pair is critically important
RS-485 Modbus A B COM SHD
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Module Mounting
When mounting the mMINT, verify that an 11 mm H x 28 mm W DIN rail is used and that it is within an enclosed space.
mMINT Module
Simplied Wiring Rules

INCOM Network
The following simplied rules apply to a given system consisting of a single daisy-chained main cable link between master and slave devices (see Figure 2.5-4). For more complex considerations including star congurations, please refer to the IMPACC wiring specication T.D. 17513.
Modbus RTU Serial Network
General Description
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM Network Translator) Module is an Eaton accessory product that will provide communication between a Modbus RTU network and an INCOM (INdustrial COMmunications) network (see Figure 2.5-4). This module is transparent to the Modbus network. It communicates to a master on the Modbus network using the Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) protocol. It communicates to slave devices on the INCOM network using the IMPACC (Integrated Monitoring, Protection, and Control Communication) protocol. The catalog number of this product is mMINT.
J3 (Slave) Modbus mMINT (Master) INCOM Network J1 J2 Modbus Master 4.25 (108.0)
Features
The mMINT module is a slave device on the Modbus network and as such requires a master that will exchange register objects with the mMINT module.

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Handles generic pass-through commands (Modbus/INCOM/Modbus) Capable of passing Modbus register objects from Eatons existing products and newer PnP (Plug-n-Play) products to a Modbus RTU master Data in IEEE Floating Point format and xed point Modbus RTU communications data transfer rates of 1200, 9600 or 19200 baud with one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, and either one or two stop bits Up to 32 products connected to INCOM network port (246 unique addresses maximum) Flashing Status LED to indicate an active module
INCOM Slaves
24125 Vdc 120 Vac
Shield INCOM 3.54 (89.9)
Figure 2.5-4. mMINT in a Communications Network Recommended INCOM cable styles are Belden 9463 or C-H style 2A957805G01 The maximum system capacity is 10,000 feet of communications cable and 32 slave devices on the INCOM network under the mMINT Non-terminated taps, up to 200 feet in length, off the main link are permitted, but add to the total cable length Make sure that there is twisted-pair wire that is recommended for IMPACC network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect each slave to the INCOM network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted pair is not important
Figure 2.5-5. mMINT Module Dimensions
Burden
24 Vac/dc 3 VA
Safety Standards
UL CSA CE mark

Communications Speed
INCOM: N2 Bus:
1200, 9600 baud 9600 baud
CA08104001E
2.5-4

PMINR
September 2011
Sheet 02 068
i ii 1 2
PMINT
Features
The PMINT module is a slave device on the PROFIBUS network and as such requires a PROFIBUS master that will interrogate the PMINT module.
The following simplied rules apply to a given system consisting of an INCOM master and the slave trip unit. Recommended INCOM cable styles are Belden 3073F or Eaton style 2A957805G01 A 100 ohm terminating resistor is required across the INCOM carrier signal pair at the trip unit The maximum system capacity is 8000 feet of communications cable on an INCOM network under the PMINT
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PMINT Module
General Description
The PMINT (PROFIBUS DPMaster INCOM network translator) module is an Eaton accessory product that will provide communications between a PROFIBUS DP network master and an INCOM (INdustrial COMmunications) based Digitrip Magnum 520MC or 1150 trip unit. The module is transparent to the PROFIBUS network master. It communicates to a master on the PROFIBUS network using the PROFIBUS-DP-V0 protocol. It communicates to a slave Magnum trip unit device on INCOM.

The PMINT uses the VPC3+C ProChip integrated circuit, providing PROFIBUS communications support with automatic recognition of data transfer rates up to 12 Mbits/s Flashing Status LED to indicate an active module LED indicators for PROFIBUS SYSFAULT and BUSFAULT LED indicators for INCOM transmit and receive communications exchanges Input power for the module from either 100240 Vac or 24150 Vdc DIN rail mount package 40 to 85C ambient operation
Make sure that there is twisted pair wire that is recommended for INCOM network use. Use shielded twisted pair wire to connect between the PMINT and the INCOM communications based trip unit. The polarity of the twisted pair is not important.
PROFIBUS DP RS-485 Network

Reference material pertaining to PROFIBUS can be obtained from the http://PROFIBUS.com Web site. Refer to the PROFIBUS DP standard for transmission using copper cables (RS-485). A 9-pin D-SUB connector interface is provided.
INCOM Connection
INCOM communications is based on a master-slave protocol. The PMINT is a master on the INCOM connection and continually obtains data from the attached trip unit. Reference material pertaining to INCOM can be obtained from http://www.eaton.com, then search on 17384. IL17384Part A: INCOM Communications Standard IL17384Part C: Protective Relays and Trip Units
CA08104001E
Advanced and Electronic Metering

June 2012
Sheet 03 001
3.0-1
Advanced and Electronic Metering
Contents
Advanced and Electronic Metering General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-2 Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3 Eaton Advanced Meters Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1 Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-20 Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31 IQ 250/260 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 IQ 130/140/150 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 Eaton Submeter Overview IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1 IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16 IQ Energy Sentinel and Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27 Eaton Electronic Meters IQ Analyzer 6000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1 Accessories IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series and PXM 2000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 Sub-Network Master Local Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-2 Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3 Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-8 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16901 Section 26 27 13.11 Power Xpert Meter Paragraph 2.02.A 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.A Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.B Paragraph 2.02.B IQ 250/260 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.E Paragraph 2.02.E IQ 100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.D Paragraph 2.02.D IQ Power Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.F Paragraph 2.02.F IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.G Paragraph 2.02.G IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . Paragraph 2.02.H Paragraph 2.02.H IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.I Paragraph 2.02.I Breaker Power Monitoring and Paragraph 2.02.J Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.J IQ 150S/250S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02K Paragraph 2.02K
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Metering Products Family
21
CA08104001E
3.0-2
Advanced and Electronic Metering Overview

General Description
June 2012
Sheet 03 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Eatons metering products provide solutions needed to monitor and manage all aspects of an electrical distribution system. When seeking greater reliability, increased productivity and signicant cost savings to remain competitive in todays market, Eatons metering products t the bill. These innovative meters and communications systems, along with Power Management software, make it possible to successfully take control of the electrical distribution system.
Power Xpert Meters

Power Xpert Meters are the benchmark for intelligent Web-enabled topquality metering devices for the power chain. Power Xpert Meters provide measurement of the critical elements found in the power chain whether that be voltage, power, current, transients, harmonics or even time. Power Xpert Meters provide Web-enabled high denition communications for use with the Power Xpert Software. All Power Xpert Meters provide a standard communications protocol for easy integration into other systems.
Metering Products Family
Reduced Energy and Operating Costs

When we think about meters and power quality, the common thread throughout the basket of solutions is information. Collecting, monitoring, and managing data from the electrical distribution system can help reduce costs for those facilities prepared to dene and analyze present electrical energy usage levels and patterns. Data provided by Eaton metering products comprise the data for verifying utility bills for energy management and lowering operating costs. Deregulation in some geographical locations permits energy users to select a utility provider and negotiate rate structures. For large users with heavy utility bills this may be an incentive to verify the utility bill, identify an opportunity for savings, negotiate a better utility rate, and apply the savings directly to the bottom line. Users are also empowered to decrease energy consumption, thereby lowering peak demand charges and decreasing operating costs. When an Eaton meter is used with Eaton trip units and relays incorporating built-in metering capabilities, the entire electrical distribution system can be cost-effectively managed. Eaton is an industry leader offering a complete integrated solution to oversee your entire electrical distribution system. As a global manufacturer of low and medium voltage electrical distribution system equipment and components, Eaton is an experienced innovator of Metering Products that incorporate leading-edge technology. These innovations result from our scientic and engineering expertise, physical resources and the ongoing R&D programs at our technology centers.
Greater Reliability
Eaton metering products permit receiving an early warning of potential problems, eliminate unnecessary trips, isolate faults to ensure minimum downtime and shed or equalize loads while a problem is being corrected.
Increased Productivity
Equipment downtime resulting from voltage or frequency variations can be very costly to an operation. Monitoring power quality with Eatons metering products throughout the electrical distribution system provides data to identify, isolate and correct problems quickly and efciently.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 003

Selection Chart
3.0-3
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm)

Device Name Accessories See Page 3.1-18 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series IQ 250/260 Series
i ii
Section Page Number
3.1-1
0.1% of reading + 0.02% FS 0.05% of reading + 0.01% FS 0.00520A (400%) 0.1% of reading + 0.0025% FS 0.1% of reading + 0.0025% FS 0.1% of reading + 0.0025% FS 0.1% 0.1% 0.01 Hz 127th 127th 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.05% of reading + 0.01% FS 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 85th 85th Yes
3.1-20
0.1% of reading 0.1% of reading 0.1200% 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.03 Hz 40th 40th 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) 40th 40th
3.1-32
0.1% of reading 0.1% of reading 0.1200% 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.03 Hz 40th 40th 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
Electrical Parameters
Volts Amperes Current range (% of nominal) Watts VARs VA PF-apparent PF-displacement Frequency THD-voltage THD-current Watthours VAR-hours VA-hours Ampere-demand Watt-demand VAR-demand VA-demand Revenue accuracy Individual ampere harmonics Individual voltage harmonics Interharmonics
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Minimum and/or Maximum Values

Volts Current Power Power factor Frequency THD Demand values Trend analysis Event logging Disturbance recording L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L A, B, C, N, G Watt, VAR, VA Apparent/displacement Hertz Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L) kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 2/4 /8 GB 2/4 /8 GB 2/4 /8 GB, 60 cycles per event 2/4 /8 GB 5 maximum 8 Via status input Yes Yes Local/computer Yes, 512 LCD Graphic (320 x 240 pixels) 5.5 mm H x 4 mm W Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP, HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP Via Web browser/display Meter: 8.82 (224.0) H x 8.22 (208.8) W x 6.72 (170.7) D Display: 9.02 (229.1) H x 7.80 (198.1) W x 2.49 (63.2) D 20 to 60C display unit 20 to 70C meter base unit TD02601007E

L-L, L-N A, B, C, N Watt, VAR, VA Apparent Hertz Amperes/volts kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 256/512 /768 MB 100,000 alarms/events with timestamp 768 MB, up to 64 cycles per event 256/512 /768 MB Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA Optional (2) or (4) Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs
L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, VAR, VA Apparent Hertz Amperes/volts 128 KB
kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes
Other Features
Storage PG output relays PG analog outputs Discrete contact inputs Analog inputs Synch-input kW utility Auxiliary voltage kWh pulse initiator Waveform display Waveform capture, samples/cycle Frequency distribution display Display type Display lines/character Display character height Communications 128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every 15 minutes for 30 days Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA Optional (2) or (4) Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs Yes Red LED 3 lines, 4 characters 0.56 (14.2) H Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway Via conguration software/display 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D (see Page 3.1-34) 20 to 70C TD02601016E
Yes
Yes, up to 64 , up to 512 Red LED 3 lines, 4 characters 0.56 (14.2) H Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, Waveform FTP Via Web browser/display
Setup conguration Dimensions inches (mm)
4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D (see Page 3.1-26) 20 to 70C TD02601017E
Operating temperature range Reference literature

Under typical operating conditions. PXM 2260 only. PXM 2270 only. PXM 2280 only. PXM 2290 only. IQ 260 only. Individual values reported to 85th harmonic; anti-alias ltering prevents higher frequencies from distorting readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).
PXM 6000 only. PXM 8000 only. At computer only. Optional. The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to Power Xpert Meters. Using <10 VA meter sourced 24V power.
Legend:
PG = Programmable FS = Full scale RV = Read value Auxiliary Voltage (Optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2. Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.
CA08104001E
3.0-4

Selection Chart
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Device Name Accessories See Page 3.1-18 IQ Analyzer 6000 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series
June 2012
Sheet 03 004
i ii 1
Section Page Number
3.3-1
0.2% FS 0.2% FS 3800% 0.4% FS, 6 reading 0.4% FS, 6 reading 0.4% FS, 6 reading 0.8% FS 0.8% FS 0.04% or 0.01 Hz 50th 50th 0.5% reading 1% reading 0.5% reading 0.2% FS 0.4% FS 0.4% FS 0.4% FS ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) 50th 50th
0.3% FS 0.3% FS 10250% 0.6% FS 0.6% FS 0.6% FS 1.0% FS 1.0% FS 0.17% FS 31st 31st 0.6% FS 0.6% FS 0.6% FS 0.3% 0.6% 0.6% 0.6%
0.5% FS 0.5% FS 1200% 1.0% FS 1.0% FS 1.0% FS 2.0% FS 2.0% FS 0.1% Hz 1.0% per ANSI C12 1.0% per ANSI C12 1.0% per ANSI C12 0.5% per ANSI C12 1.0% per ANSI C12 1.0% per ANSI C12 1.0% per ANSI C12 ANSI C12.1 (1%)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Volts Current Power Power factor Frequency THD Demand values Trend analysis Event logging Disturbance recording L-L, L-N A, B, C, N, G Watt, VAR, VA Apparent/displacement Hertz Amperes/volts All Time/date 504 events w/timestamp 10 waveform events L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, VAR, VA Apparent/displacement Hertz Amperes/volts All 2 Alarms
L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, VAR, VA Apparent/displacement Hertz All

Other Features
Storage PG output relays PG analog outputs Discrete contact inputs Analog inputs Synch-input kW Utility Auxiliary voltage kWh pulse initiator Waveform display Waveform capture, samples/cycle Frequency distribution display Display type Display lines/character Display character height Communications Setup conguration Dimensions inches (mm) Operating temperature range Reference literature

90 kB (4) 10A Form C (4) 010/420 mA (3) +30 Vdc Differential (1) 020/420 mA At device or via communications Yes Local /computer Yes, 128 Local /computer Graphic LCD with LED backlight 7 lines, 147 characters Up to 7 Lines Serial: INCOM Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Via conguration software/display 6.70 (170.2) W x 10.30 (261.6) H x 5.40 (137.2) D 20 to 70C

15 Parameters (3) 10A Form C (1) kW Demand At device or via communications Yes 7 Segment LED 1 line, 7 characters 1 line Serial: INCOM Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Via conguration software/display 6.70 (170.2) W x 10.30 (261.6) H x 5.40 (137.2) D 20 to 70C
(2) 100 mA Form A (2) +30 Vdc differential (1) 420 mA Via communications only Yes Backlit LCD 4 lines, 20 characters 1.60 (40.6) H x 0.09 (2.3) W Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Via conguration software/display Refer to TD.17.06.T.E. (see Page 3.2-20) 0 to 50C
From 3300% of FS. At unity power factory and 5300% of FS. At a power factor < 0.5 and 5300% of FS. At computer only. Relays programmable to operate on any measured function.
Optional. The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to Power Xpert Meters. An IPONI is required. IQ 230M only. Dimensions in mm = 170.2 W x 261.6 H x 137.2 D
Legend:
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 005

Selection Chart
3.0-5

Device Name Accessories See Page 3.1-18 IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 35M IQ 150S/250S Series
i ii 1
Section Page Number
3.1-35
0.25% of reading 0.25% of reading 0.1200% 0.5% of reading 0.5% of reading 0.5% of reading 0.5% of reading 0.03 Hz 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 0.25% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)
3.2-1
0.4% +0.015% per C deviation from 25C 0.4% (5100%), 0.8%(15%) +0.015% per C from 25C 1120% 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs Calculated: watts/VAs 0.02 Hz 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
3.2-11
0.1% of reading 0.1% of reading 0.1200% 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.2% of reading 0.03 Hz 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Volts Current Power Power factor Frequency THD Demand values Trend analysis Event logging Disturbance recording L-L, L-N A, B, C Watt, VAR, VA Apparent Hertz

Apparent (low alert) Hertz (out of range alert) kW, kVAR, kVA; maximum kW, kVAR, kVA Logging on demand interval or Modbus command
L-L, L-N A, B, C, Watt, VAR, VA Apparent Hertz kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 2 MB 2 MB 2 MB Yes Red LED 3 lines, 4 characters 0.56 (14.2) H Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless Via conguration software/display 7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D 20 to 70C TD02601019E
kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes
Other Features
Storage PG output relays PG analog outputs Discrete contact inputs Analog inputs Synch-input kW utility Auxiliary voltage kWh pulse initiator Waveform display Waveform capture Frequency distribution display Display type Display lines/character Display character height Communications Setup conguration Dimensions inches (mm) Operating temperature range Reference literature

10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each (115 KB) 2-pulse inputs with BACnet Optional demand synchronization via Modbus Yes Backlit LCD 2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row) 7.5 mm Serial: Modbus RTU , BACnet MS/TP Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway Via display/conguration software 3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D (see Page 3.2-4) Meter: 30 to 70C Display: 10 to 50C TD02601018E
Red LED 3 lines, 4 characters 0.56 (14.2) H Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII Network: Modbus TCP Via conguration software/display 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D (see Page 3.1-37) 20 to 70C TD02601016E
IQ 140/150. IQ 150 only. At computer only. Optional. IQ 250S only. The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to Power Xpert Meters.
Legend:
CA08104001E
3.0-6

Selection Chart
Device Name Accessories See Page 3.1-18 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Power Monitoring/ Metering Module (PM3) IQ Energy/ Power Sentinel
June 2012
Sheet 03 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Section Page Number
3.2-16
0.5% FS 1.0% FS 1.0% per ANSI C12 1.0% per ANSI C12 ANSI C12.1 (1%)
3.2-27
0.5% of reading 0.5% of reading 1.0% of reading 1.0% of reading 1.0% of reading 2.0% of reading 0.1 Hz 1.0% per ANSI C12.1 1.0% of reading 1.0% of reading 1.0% per ANSI C12.1
3.2-21
0.5% FS 0.5% FS 1.0% FS 1.0% FS 1.0% FS 2.0% FS 2.0% FS 0.1% FS 1.0% FS 1.0% FS

Volts Current Power Power factor Frequency THD Demand values Trend analysis Event logging Disturbance recording

Other Features
Storage PG output relays PG analog outputs Discrete contact inputs Analog inputs Synch-input kW utility Auxiliary voltage kWh pulse initiator Waveform display Waveform capture Frequency distribution display Display type Display lines/character Display character height Communications Setup conguration Dimensions inches (mm) Operating temperature range Reference literature

Via communications only Serial: INCOM Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Via conguration software Refer to TD02601004E (see Page 3.2-19) 25 to 70C
Circuit breaker status Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Refer to IL01219085E 25 to 70C
Via communications only Serial: INCOM Network: via Power Xpert Gateway Via conguration software Refer to TD.17.07.T.E. (see Page 3.2-26) 25 to 70C
IQ Power Sentinel only. At computer only. The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to Power Xpert Meters. Contact factory for availability.
Legend:
20 21
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 007
Advanced and Electronic Metering Eaton Advanced Meters

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series
3.1-1
Both the local graphic display and the embedded Web server present real time, historical and event information in a browser-style graphical format to help the user interpret key circuit information, such as:

Detect and Record High-Speed Transients to Help:

Avoid equipment damage and disruption Identify equipment malfunction
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Current loading Voltage and power levels Power factor energy usage I/O status Power quality measurements Harmonic plots Disturbance and transient waveforms ITIC disturbance summary screen
Monitor Circuit Loading to Help:

Avoid overloads and nuisance overload trips Maximize equipment utilization Manage emergency overloads
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:

Reduce peak demand charges and power factor penalties Identify excessive energy consumption
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 Series Graphic Display uses a simple twist and click navigation control dial to easily navigate the menus and drill down into increasing levels of important detail. A back key enhances the browser-like navigation of the graphic display. The Web server provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy. It also provides critical information regarding power quality, such as harmonic distortion, icker, crest factor, K-Factor and more.
Note: Features and functionality may vary depending on the meter model and options being used. Review the Features and Benets chart in Table 3.1-2 for details.
Metered/Monitored Parameters
Note: See Table 3.1-2.

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Display and Meter Base
General Description
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 Series monitors the critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument is simple to use, powerful, scalable and highly exible. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 offers a new level of intuitive user interface design, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in simple-to-navigate and easy-to-understand information architecture. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display visualizes the information from up to 16 meter modules. The embedded Web server displays complex power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device conguration from the browser.
Application Description
Identify Power Quality Problems to Help:
Identify harmonics, sags, swells and transients damaging or disrupting sensitive, missioncritical IT equipment Boost IT equipments service life to the maximum Analyze sequence of events up to 1 millisecond time resolution Protect motors from damage Preserve the integrity of processes and batches Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses Protect transformers and conductors from overheating
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N, N-G Phase neutral and ground currents Power: real, reactive and apparent Frequency Power factor: apparent and displacement Energy Demand % THD Minimum and maximum values Harmonics Flicker Individual harmonics Interharmonics % TDD ITIC events plot, duration, magnitude Energy comparisons Demand comparisons Event calendar Event timeline and sequence Number of 9s of availability Phasors Sequence components Crest factor K-Factor PQ index
Accuracy
Currents: 0.05% reading + 0.025%FS Voltage: 0.1% reading + 0.025% FS Energy, and demand power: 0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20 Frequency: 0.01 Hz Power factor: 0.10% at Unity PF 0.30% at 0.5 PF

CA08104001E
3.1-2

June 2012
Sheet 03 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Communications
Multiple communications ports including:

Two-Piece Design
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 meter module Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display 320 x 240 pixel backlight LCD remote graphics display (supports up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 meter modules)
Standard

RS-485 remote display port RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave port RJ-45 10/100Base-T Local Conguration Port (local browser connection)
Optional
Selectable 100FX or 10/100Base-T Ethernet network port RS-485 Modbus RTU Selectable Master/Slave port RS-232 Modbus RTU Slave port
Modbus RTU Modbus TCP Ethernet TCP/IP HTML NTP (Network Time Protocol) FTP (File Transfer Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) COMTRADE
Display/Meter Mounting Options

Remotely mount the display up to 2000 ft (1210m) away from 1 to 16 Power Xpert Meter modules Mount the display and Power Xpert Meter module on opposite sides of a panel. 15 additional meter bases can be remotely mounted
Graphic Display
Note: Display ports restrict access to up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 meter modules located on the display RS-485 network.

RS-485 meter display network port RJ-45 10/100Base-T for access to Local Display Power Xpert network
Meter Base Unit Characteristics

Height: 8.88 inches (225.6 mm) Width: 9.56 inches (242.8 mm) Depth: 6.72 inches (170.8 mm) including optional wall mounting brackets NEMA rating: NEMA 1, IP3

Display Unit Characteristics

Height: 9.02 inches (229.0 mm) Width: 7.80 inches (198.1 mm) Depth: 1.45 inches (36.8 mm) behind panel surface 1.04 (26.3 mm) projection in front of panel surface NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front of panel rating
eolr
Power Xpert Meter in Modbus RTU Slave Mode
Modbus Master PLC
Figure 3.1-1. RS-485 Network 1. When using Modbus RTU over an RS-485 communications network, the data rate, data protocol (data bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring topology (two-wire or four-wire) must be the same for each of the devices.
2. Connections should be made using communication/control shielded cable equivalent to Belden cable p/n 9463.

Safety: EN61010-1, UL/cUL 61010-1 Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class, ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A EN55011 Class A Measurement Canada approval pending Immunity IEC 61326 CE Mark
Power Xpert Ethernet Switch
Power Xpert Meter
Standard Web Browser
Figure 3.1-2. Ethernet Network 1. Optional Ethernet Communications Card must be ordered with the meter.
2. Available Ethernet connections are: 10Base-T and ST ber.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 009

3.1-3
Ease-of-UsePower Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display (Option)

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 display features a large easy-toread white backlit graphic LCD. The information presented by the display is organized into an information architecture that is easy-to-navigate and organized for simplicity. Screen navigation is accomplished using a navigation control dial and a back button. The user simply twists the knob on the navigation control dial to move between menu selections and drill down links on the screen. When the selection is highlighted, pressing the dial makes the selection. Information is displayed from a single meter or an RS-485 daisychain of up to 16 meters. The display features a rich set of screens including real-time data, trend plots, waveform views and an ITIC Plot. The graphic display allows basic device setup and password protected resets. An audible alarm is available to annunciate alarm conditions.
Both the Power Xpert Meter 4000/ 6000/8000 embedded Web server and the local graphic display support graphical trend charts of key circuit measurements such as current, voltage, power and energy. The trend chart supports a zoom feature that allows the user to view data over a short period of 16 hours up to 4 years. The trend chart includes zoom in/out buttons and a horizontal slider bar control to manage scrolling forward and backward through the data. Trend charts of basic readings include minimum, maximum and average readings. Trend charts of interval by interval energy data also display peak demand.
Note: For remote access and networking capabilities such as connecting to a LAN/ WAN, use the optional Communications Expansion Card (CEC).
Historical Trend Logging

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 records historical data for graphical viewing from the Local display or the embedded Web server. Graphical views of historical data support pan and zoom. 145 standard metering parameters are logged as part of the standard meter functionality including min./max. and average for each parameter. The averages are calculated over the interval period. The minimum and maximum readings are based on 200 ms calculations. Storage capacity for standard trend plots includes all of the following intervals: Every 5 minutes for 48 hours (2 days) Every 15 minutes for 192 hours (8 days) Every hour for 28 days (4 weeks) Every 8 hours for 56 weeks Every week for 44 months

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Sag/Swell/Transient Capture and Recording

60 cycles of waveform are oversampled at 4096 samples per cycle (Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000), ltered through antialiasing and recorded at 512 samples per cycle and post event data. The Power Xpert Meter 8000 samples at a rate of 100,000 samples per cycle. Embedded Web server supports viewing of triggered waveforms one channel at a time and includes the ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally using a slider bar. The Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 Series have precongured (600V and below) trigger settings for sags, swells and transients, and do not require additional setup by the user. Waveforms are stored in non-volatile ash memory using an industry standard COMTRADE format. Waveforms can be automatically sent out as COMTRADE attachments to an e-mail following an event, or can be retrieved from an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) directory structure in the Power Xpert meter modules memory.
Note: Trend plot data can be easily exported to third-party applications, such as Microsoft Excel in csv-le format.
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Embedded Web Server

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 embedded Web server offers Eaton customers a new level of accessibility to the critical information required to manage their electrical distribution system. The Web server includes real-time circuit information in both numeric and graphical visual formats to help monitor circuit parameters such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor, THD, Flicker and more. The Web server also provides energy and demand readings with graphic usage plots to help analyze energy usage patterns. Energy readings include kWh, kVARh, delivered and received and kVAh with time of use and RTP displays. The interval energy usage plot includes the ability to do week-toweek and month-to-month energy consumption graphical comparisons for benchmarking purposes.
In addition, metered parameters are automatically stored on the built-in FTP Servers, where they can be easily copied and imported into third-party applications for benchmarking and analysis. Logs on the FTP Server include the min./max. and average for 145 standard metering parameters at 5-minute intervals. Storage capacity for trend data: 63 days of 5-minute interval trend data. Capacity=18,144 intervals.
CA08104001E
3.1-4

June 2012
Sheet 03 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Energy Prole Data

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 records Real and Reactive energy forward, reverse, net and absolute sum, as well as Apparent energy (kVAH). Up to eight status inputs can be congured as energy accumulators for counting KYZ pulse inputs (option). These readings are stored over a congurable interval from 1 to 60 minutes, as well as in daily and weekly totals. With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet Communication Expansion Card, users can easily congure the meters to send periodic e-mails at user-dened intervals of energy consumption and power demand. E-mails contain a summary of readings per rate structures and also have the actual measurements attached to the e-mails body as a CSV le in a ZIP container. In addition, metered parameters are automatically stored on the built-in FTP Server, where they can be easily copied and imported into third-party applications for benchmarking and analysis. Logs on the FTP Server include energy consumption logs, one for every month in CSV le format, trended measurement logs also in CSV le format and waveform captures in COMTRADE le format. Storage capacity for energy prole data: 62 days of 15 minute interval energy and pulse interval data (Fixed interval capacity = 5952 intervals. Congurable intervals from 1 to 60 min) 372 days of 1 day accumulated energy and pulse interval data 208 weeks of 1 week accumulated energy and pulse interval data
Power Xpert Meter Proler Free Download

The Power Xpert Meter Proler is a free energy-management software download, compatible with the Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, allowing a comparison of expected or baseline energy consumption patterns to actual usage, and agging areas of concern using deviations from modeled energy patterns. These deviations point to targets as they hunt for energy consumption offenders in their facility. By applying pattern analysis techniques and intelligently using color and shape to convey the results, the Power Xpert Meter Proler provides the user an easy-tounderstand visualization of energy usage, thus offering information for proactive energy management.
Multi-Day Detail Comparison View
The Proler uses the previous 9 weeks of data for the energy use baseline, but you can manually add more values to the baseline. The Power Xpert Meter Proler is also a predictor: It can predict what energy consumption would be expected later in a day. The Real-Time view generates a baseline from the last two months and makes a prediction of the future load. The view represents the current day (today), and shows three graphs: the baseline for the day, the historical data (up to present) and the predicted future data. Instantaneous data is retrieved and averaged to keep the graphs up-to-date. The averaged values are shown as shapes at the current time: Instantaneous, 1-minute average and 15-minute average. In addition, users can add the data from two different Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000s into one calendar view. The proler will mathematically combine the two loads into a totalized view. It is also possible to change the percentage contribution of each meter, as well as subtract a portion of one meter from another. To download the tool, go to www.eaton.com/pxm and click on the link for the Power Xpert Meter Proler. Registration will be required to download.
Calendar Usage View
Features and Benets

Energy and Demand Comparisons

Energy and demand usage patterns can be analyzed with the month-to-month, week-to-week comparison chart built into the meter. Raw data can be exported with the Save Table option to other applications, such as Excel, for further analysis and graphing.
Develops a baseline of energy demand for management analysis Easily identies periods of high energy demand at-a-glance by day, week and month Allows for a daily, weekly, monthly comparison of energy usage compared to baseline Allows for detailed comparison of multi days energy usage Offers multi views of energy usage and baseline comparisons to quickly identify anomalies
Daily Detailed Energy Usage View
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 011

3.1-5
Eaton Power Xpert Energy ViewerFree Download

The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV) provides the means to develop an energy usage baseline for energy management programs, comparing interval logged data points. It is a free Web download for compatible Eaton product home pages. This tool allows easy interpretation of the data collected by compatible devices via graphical charts, graphs and reports without having to export the available .csv le into Microsoft Excel or another tool. See Page 3.1-31 for more information.
Event Logging
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 local graphic display or the embedded Web server both allow the user to view a list of triggered events along with any captured parameters, event details, and triggered waveforms. In addition, a separate event log includes a variety of activities including acknowledged triggers, new min. and max. events, and system operations such as resets. The size of the event log is virtually unlimited based only on the memory option selected.
ITIC Analysis Plot

The Power Xpert Meter graphic display (option) and Web server (option) include a graphic representation of the ITIC plot (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000) with counts of disturbances and transients that have occurred. The ITIC plot organizes events into eight distinct disturbance zones corresponding to severity and a 9th zone for transients. A pass/fail count is displayed to indicate how many events are outside the ITIC limits. Clicking on any counter in the ITIC Web page will link the user to the event view and display all triggered events in the selected zone. This makes it simple to view disturbance waveforms associated with the ITIC plot. A separate ITIC graph is available to review individual ITIC events. This graph will show the user the event hit position on the graph and the event duration and magnitude.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E-mail Notication
With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet Communication Expansion Card attached to the Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, the users can easily congure the meters to send periodic e-mails at user-dened intervals for energy consumption and power demand. E-mails contain a summary of readings per rate structures and also have the actual measurements attached to the e-mails body as a CSV le in a ZIP container. Prompt alarm e-mails can also be sent for any event condition either standard in the meter or ones set up by the user based on thresholds, dV/dt triggers or IO status changes with the optional IO Card. Alarm e-mails can be congured to have the COMTRADE waveform capture attached to the e-mails body.
Inputs and Outputs

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is available with an optional digital I/O card that includes: Eight digital inputsself sourced 24 Vdc Three relay outputs5A max. continuous, 240 Vac max., 30 Vdc max. Two solid-state outputs80 mA max. continuous, 30 Vdc max.
Comparison Summary
Event Triggers
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 supports ve types of congurable event triggers:

Out of limits (4000/6000/8000) Demand overload (4000/6000/8000) Sub-cycle disturbance (4000/6000/8000) ITIC (6000/8000) Fast transient (8000)
These triggers permit pickup, reset and pickup delay to be congured by the user. When a trigger occurs, actions include Performance Monitoring (#9s analysis), Capturing Waveform, Capture Parameters, Send E-mail and Operate a Relay Output. The Graphic Display ashes an LED to annunciate the alarm condition. An audible alarm is also available. Trigger options include: Out of limits: over 100 triggers Demand overload: 10 triggers ITIC: eight triggers Fast transient: dV/dT and absolute per phase Sub-cycle disturbancedV/dT and absolute

Each of the eight inputs are interrupt driven, allowing for 1 ms accuracy of digital events time stamps (1 ms accuracy requires local NTP TimeServer). Inputs can also be congured for demand synch, and pulse counting. Inputs selected for pulse counting can be scaled. Interval by interval pulse recordings are maintained in prole memory and can be displayed graphically. Outputs can be used for KYZ, or alarm annunciation.
Periodic E-mail Message
20 21
CA08104001E
3.1-6

June 2012
Sheet 03 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ratings
Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600V CT ratios selectable from standard 120/600 Vac line CT inputs accept 5A secondary Power supply: standard 120/240 Vac or 110/250 Vdc

Storage Capacity
Table 3.1-1. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Estimated Memory and Storage Capacity with 2/4/8 GB Memory Capacity
Model Memory Event File Size (KB) Occurrence Per Month Typical PXM 4000 PXM 6000 2 GB 4 GB Subcycle disturbance ITIC event Subcycle disturbance ITIC + subcycle disturbance PXM 8000 8 GB ITIC event Subcycle disturbance Transients ITIC + subcycle disturbance + transients

Memory Usage (MB) Typical 12.3 6.2 12.3 18.5 6.2 12.3 6.0 24.5 Severe 73.8 24.6 73.8 98.4 24.6 73.8 60.0 158.4
Months of Capacity with 8 GB Memory Typical 166 666 333 222 1332 666 1365 335 Severe 28 166 55 42 333 111 137 52
Severe 60 20 60 80 20 60 30 110
1260 1260 1260 Total---> 1260 1260 2048 Total--->
10 5 10 15 5 10 3 18
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The typical and severe power quality event occurrences are estimates and may vary depending on the electrical environment. Memory is not allocated by event category; memory is used rst come, rst served.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 013

3.1-7



Impulsive transient capture at 6 MHz 100,000 samples per cycle Premium power quality index 8 GB data logging
Harmonics Disturbance capture Low frequency transient detection and capture Standard power quality index 2 GB data logging
Harmonics, including individual harmonics Flicker calculations ITIC performance curve Event calendar view Events timeline view Sequence of events waveform plot Enhanced power quality index 4 GB data logging
i ii 1 2 3
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benets

Feature Power Xpert Meter 4000 6000

Benet
8000

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General
Embedded Web server TOU metering support Firmware ash update support Self-learning capability (characterizes normal per circuit)

Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network, Internet. Time of usage can be set up to support four different schedules. Enables you to ash the meter with the latest rmware updates. The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm only when real events occur. Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter or external software. Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand comparison. Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties. Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage and usage against previous month, identify peaks to conserve energy usage. Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas. Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms. Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems. Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective analysis or e-mailing.
Power, Energy and Demand

Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph analysis, export, print Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month, week-to-week Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, TOU, prole, previous month comparison, graph analysis, export, print

Power Quality Analysis

Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average) Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording Symmetrical components: zero, negative, positive Low frequency transient detection and capture Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle Number of Nines uptime data (e.g., 6 nines=99.9999%) K-factor Crest factor

4096

4096

100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture impulsive transients.

Review uptime availability per cent. Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving non-linear and linear loads. Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform. Dene appropriate security access level per user.
Security
Secure 5 level user access privileges
Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.
Note: These specications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, rmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user manual for detailed specications.
CA08104001E
3.1-8

Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benets (Continued)

June 2012
Sheet 03 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Benet
8000

Communications and I/O

Modbus TCP Modbus RTU HTML SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) FTP (File Transfer Protocol) NTP (Network Time Protocol) COMTRADE, open IEEE standard le format for waveform capture export Trend measurements CSV le export I/O (eight digital inputs, three relay outputs, two solid-state KYZ outputs)

Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software. Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (116) meters together. Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser. Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system. Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture les on the meter with an FTP Client. Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution. Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COMTRADE le format to third-party software. Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g., Microsoft Excel in standard CSV le format. The Power Xpert Meter I/O Card is extremely exible and can be used in a large variety of different applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various conditions dened by the user. Various third-party devices, such as alarm, pulse meters, trip units, sensors can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the meters standard functions such as, e.g., e-mail, logs and trends. Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution The GPS option allows the meter to synchronize time over the GPS satellite positioning system up to the 1 millisecond resolution Log trend information for easy statistical analysis. Review the load prole graph to get a better understanding of your electrical load versus time. Log events for retrospective event analysis. Store large amounts of waveform captures and events for historical analysis. Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion. Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter. Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion. Over-sampling enables the usage of Anti-Aliasing technology, increasing accuracy. Technology to remove out-of-band signal components resulting in more accurate data. Review individual harmonic levels directly on the meter. Identify harmful harmonics in, e.g., lightly loaded variable-speed drive environments where THD may be high but not relative. Interharmonics allow you to see what is going on between the integer multiples of the fundamental. Zoom in on the harmonics trend graph and review frequency content every 5 Hz instead of every 60 Hz.
Time Synchronization
NTP time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy GPS time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy

Logs
Trend logging Load prole Event logging

Memory and Storage

Standard memory, GB 2 4 8
Harmonics
Harmonic levels Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Delta-Sigma D/A conversion technology Harmonics over-sampling (4096 samples per cycle) Anti-alias ltering Individual harmonics Total Demand Distortion (TDD) Interharmonics 127

127

127

When used with third-party device and I/O option.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 015

3.1-9
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benets (Continued)


Benet
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
8000

Highlights
Subcycle disturbance capturing dV/dt triggers for subcycle oscillatory transients Absolute threshold and dV/dt triggering Power quality indexstandard (includes dv/dt count, %TDDi and %THDv) Power quality indexenhanced (includes standard index plus Sag level, swell level and icker) Flicker calculations Automatic trigger setting Automatic event severity analysis Event severity counters ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously CBEMA performance curve Custom ITIC (CBEMA) plot with individual event magnitude and duration Event calendar view Events timeline view Sequence of events and events plot on waveform Power quality indexpremium (includes enhanced index plus counts of impulsive transients)

Capture fast voltage changes/low frequency transient (e.g., capacitor switching transient). Detect and record a large magnitude oscillation transient resulting in equipment damage. Detect and record if a surge suppressor is necessary. Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format. Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format (includes ITIC events and icker calculations). Detect and quantify low frequency rms voltage variations causing incandescent lighting icker. Trigger thresholds are automatically set according to ITIC (CBEMA) standard, no need to gure this out by yourself. Automatically analyze the severity of the event with the ITIC (CBEMA) performance curve plot, see where the event actually hit. An ITIC (CBEMA) event counter keeps track of the number of all sags, swells and transients. ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously CBEMA performance curve for easy power problem evaluation. Review custom ITIC (CBEMA) plots of individual events showing you the actual magnitude, duration and hit are in a simple graphical representation. The Events Timeline calendar view provides instant insight to the frequency of power events and helps detect reoccurring problems. View and understand the sequence of events that have occurred during a period of time. Plot color-coded events on a captured waveform to gain insight into the sequence of events cycle per cycle. Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format (includes ITIC events and icker calculations). Capture impulsive transients by taking six samples every millionth of a second. Record and analyze transients during a longer timeframe. High-speed ensures impulsive transients are correctly captured (fast rise time). Capture impulsive transients on all four channels.
High-Speed Transient Capture and Detection

6 MHz capture of impulsive transients Transient capture duration: ~20 ms/6M Hz ~120 ms/1 MHz Waveform recorded at 100,000 samples per cycle Three-phase voltage and neutral-to-ground fast transient capture

CA08104001E
3.1-10 Advanced and Electronic Metering Eaton Advanced Meters

June 2012
Sheet 03 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display (Option) Features

A menu-driven graphical display with information organized into a user-friendly information architecture. The Homepage (see below) offers: Graphical level indicator based on a statistical analysis for three-phase line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltage and per phase currents to quickly indicate out of normal readings Large easy-to-read average L-L voltage average phase currents and system frequency can be highlighted and selected using the navigation control dial to drill down for additional detail Menu selections for meter, power, quality, events and setup are shown for ease of navigation into display for more detail, or basic device setup
Selecting the trend plot for a given parameter displays a historical graph of the selected parameter over the last 16 hours. The zoom buttons change the time scale to one of several data views based on historical averages with min./max. The Pan button allows scrolling within the selected view.
Ethernet Settings
Ethernet and other settings can be input or veried via the Power Xpert LCD Display.
Note: Some of the other settings are specic only to the Web Browser GUI. Trend Plot
Waveforms can be displayed for currents and voltages. The waveforms can be viewed on demand for steadystate conditions. Triggered waveforms can also be displayed to view sag/ swell or transient data.
ITIC Plot (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
Homepage
Highlighting a eld such as the avg. current value and pressing the navigation control dial brings up a detail screen like the one below.
Waveform Viewer
The Power Xpert Meter classies disturbances and summarizes the results graphically using the ITIC plot. The number of ITIC sags and swells are indicated for each of nine severity levels. A pass/fail summary is shown to indicate how many events are outside the ITIC pass zone.
Current Summary
Harmonic Spectrum
Highlighting an individual reading on the detail summary level screen and selecting it drills down to a level including links to min./max., historical trend plots, triggers, harmonic spectral data, and waveform viewing.
The harmonic spectral plot displays both harmonics and interharmonics up to the 85th order. A detailed table also includes individual magnitudes and angles of current and voltage harmonics, as well as a harmonic power calculation at each frequency.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 017

3.1-11
Power Xpert Meter Graphic Display (Option) Screens

Meter Top Level Screen
V-LL avg, V-LN avg, IA, IB, IC, Iavg, Freq.
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Web Browser Views
The Web server allows the user to view waveforms of the voltage and current to spot power quality problems such as notching.
i ii 1 2 3
Meter Detail Screens

Per phase detail L-L, L-N, Symmetrical Comp, Aux. Channels, Min./Max. with date/time of occurrence, Trend Plots, Triggers, Phasors.
Power Top Level Screen

Three-Phase Power Factor, kWHr, kWd, Real-Time kW, kVAR, kVA, Load Prole Link.
Power Detail Screens

Per phase detail, kVA, kVAR, kW, Min./ Max. with date/time of occurrence, Trend Plots, Triggers.
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Web Browser Homepage (Note: 4000 does not include icker, ITIC)
4
Events Timeline (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
Quality Top Level Screen

10 min. and 24 hr. PQIndex, THDI, THDV, K-Factor, Crest Factor, Flicker Pst, %9s of Reliability.
Quality Detail Screens

Per phase detail L-L, L-N,V aux, Odd, Even, Interharmonics, Present, Min/Max, Trend Plots, Harmonic spectrum plots, waveform plots.
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 embedded Web server offers Eaton customers a new level of accessibility to the critical information required to manage the electrical distribution system. The embedded Web server includes real time circuit information in both numeric and graphical formats to help monitor circuit parameters such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor. The Web server also provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy. Readings include kWh, kVARh, delivered and received and kVAh with time-of-use and separate status input controlled energy accumulation to account for energy during special times such as rate alert periods or stand-by generator times of operation. The Web server also includes critical information regarding Power Quality such as harmonic distortion, icker (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000), crest factor, K-Factor and more.
View and understand the sequence of events that have occurred during a period of time. Plot color-coded events on captured waveforms to gain insight into the sequence of events from one single cycle to the next one. This provides the user an excellent vantage point to review and compare multiple events at an unprecedented resolution.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Events Top Level Screen

Active/Acknowledged Event list, Trigger List, System Log, ITIC Curve Link.
Event Detail Screens

Event List, Condition, Acknowledge Button, Trigger Date/Time, Trigger description.
Setup Top Level Screen

View setup, Edit setup, Login, Logout.
Harmonic Spectral Plot
Setup Detail Screens

Quick Setup, Trigger setup, Detail setting.
The harmonic spectral plot displays both harmonics and interharmonics up to the 85th order. A detailed table also includes individual magnitudes and angles of current and voltage harmonics, as well as a harmonic power calculation at each frequency. Even, odd and total THD are displayed for diagnostic purposes. In addition, the Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 provides interharmonics, which allow users to see what is going on between the integer multiples of the fundamental.
13 14 15 16 17 18
Steady-State Waveform
19 20 21
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Energy Comparison Historical Trend Plot Demand Comparison ITIC Analysis Plot (Power Xpert 6000/8000)
Graphical Trending of Data

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 embedded Web server supports graphical trend charts of key circuit measurements such as current, voltage, power and energy. The trend chart supports a zoom feature that allows the user to view data over a short period of 16 hours or a longer period of 48 months. The trend chart has a horizontal slider bar control to manage scrolling forward and backward through the data. Trend charts of basic readings include minimum, maximum and average readings. Trend charts of energy data also display demand values.
Demand comparison compares power consumption day-to-day, month-tomonth or week-to-week. Power Xpert Meters can set to measure demand at 1 to 60 minute intervals. Both sliding and xed interval windows are supported for maximum exibility.
The ITIC Web page includes counters to track the occurrence of disturbances and a pass/fail summary. In addition, selecting any disturbance counter links to a detailed event view of the disturbances in that ITIC category. Disturbance waveforms can be viewed from the browser.
Disturbance Recording
Events Calendar (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
Sag/Swell Recording
60 cycles of waveform are recorded at 256 samples per cycle including 30 cycles of pre and post trigger data. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 embedded Web server supports viewing of triggered waveforms one channel at a time including the ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally using a slider bar. Waveforms are stored in Power Xpert Meter 4000/ 6000/8000 non-volatile ash memory using an industry standard Comtrade format. Waveforms can be automatically sent out by e-mail following an event, or can be retrieved from an FTP directory structure in the meter modules memory.
The Events Timeline calendar view provides instant insight to the frequency of power events and helps detect reoccurring problems. Color-coded events can be ltered to detect specic issues.
Web Server Device Conguration

Special software is not required to congure a Power Xpert Meter 4000/ 6000/8000. The embedded Web server includes comprehensive device setup capability.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Energy usage patterns can be effortlessly analyzed with the month-tomonth, week-to-week comparison chart. Raw data can be easily exported with the Save Table option to other applications such as Excel for further analysis or graphing (rmware version 12.x.x and higher only).
Note: All data logging for trend plotting is automatically precongured in the Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000. In addition, the 6000 and 8000 Series Meters have sag, swell and transient triggers built-in according to the ITIC (CBEMA) standard.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 019

3.1-13
PQ Index
Power at a Glance
i ii 1 2 3
Figure 3.1-5. Power at a Glance
Easily Upgrade Your Power Xpert Meter 4000 to a 6000

Figure 3.1-3. PQ Index A statistical analysis comparing the last 10 minute and 24 hour periods Power Quality to the historical norm for the circuit. The PQ Index score results in a Power Quality rating of Normal, Caution and Alert for the period. Eaton understands that our customers needs change over time. Thats why weve developed meters that can grow with you. Once a Power Xpert Meter 4000 is purchased, you have the ability to upgrade to a Power Xpert Meter 6000, with no intervention from Eaton, when needed. All the features of the Power Xpert Meter 4000 that you have been using and depend on remain, however, once updated, all the additional features of the Power Xpert Meter 6000 are available. The selfupgrade is available on Eatons Web site. Youll need a credit card, your Power Xpert Meter 4000 serial number and date code (you will be presented with this information if you are using the upgrade link directly from your Power Xpert Meter) and your e-mail address. Once you have completed the purchase, we will send you your new license key information via e-mail that will allow you to complete the upgrade. High-speed triggering of waveforms based on events such as breaker trips or static transfers Demand interval timing taken from a master utility meter end of interval pulse
Relay Outputs
The optional PXIO-B card includes three 5 A form C relay outputs rated for 240 Vac or 30 Vdc. These outputs can be used for applications such as: Alarm annunciation KYZ pulse output
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Alarm outputs can be driven from triggers based on metering values. Output modes include: Normalrelay energized during alarm condition Latchedrelay energized by event trigger, de-energized by acknowledgement Timedrelay energized by event trigger, maintained for a programmed interval
Flicker (EN61000-4-15; Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
Auxiliary Voltage Option

The optional auxiliary voltage selection allows for sensing of another input voltage such as a transformer or UPS and secondary voltage from transformer or UPS output. This option permits waveform or harmonic comparisons across these devices.
Figure 3.1-4. Flicker Flicker values for Perceptibility, PST and PLT are calculated based on EN61000-4-15 guidelines.
Discrete Contact Inputs

The optional PXIO-B expansion card offers eight digital inputs that are useful for a variety of applications such as: Status indication with time stamping of transitions (1 ms precision) Pulse Counting of KYZ or other utility pulses such as air, water or gas
Status inputs are self sourced providing a nominal 24 Vdc (2030 Vdc) across the circuit. Names can be congured for each input for ease of use.
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 020
i ii 1 2 3 4
Communications Expansion Card (CEC)

The optional CEC Card offers two Ethernet connection options, 10/100Base-T and a ber-optic port that can be used for the following applications:
5 6 7 8
Monitoring, managing and conguring the meter remotely using a standard Web Browser interface like Microsoft Internet Explorer Alarm notications via e-mail, SMTP Enabling access to the meters FTP server (energy, trend and waveform logs) Providing Modbus TCP/IP or RTU communications to BMS systems Providing SNMP communications to NMS systems Synchronizing with an NTP server for 1ms timestamping resolution Asset management via SNMP to Network Management Systems Updating rmware on the meter
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 3.1-6. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module Layout

I/O Card (option) Digital inputs 1-8. Solid-state outputs 1-2. Relay outputs 1-3. CT and Voltage Connections CT input connections. Standard three-phase voltage phase inputs. Auxiliary channel voltage inputs (option). Communication Expansion Card (LAN/WAN Ethernet Networking) (option) 100FX ST-type Ethernet (multi-mode). 10/100Base-T Ethernet. RS-485 (two-wire w/shield)24V accessory power (Com 2). RS-232 (Tx Rx) Modbus RTU (Com 3). Standard Features Local RJ-45 cong. port (non-networkable Ethernet). RS-485 (two-wire w/shield) Modbus RTU (Com 1). Meter mounting brackets. Sealable mode switch cover. Control power (100240 Vac and 110250 Vdc) (20%). Display RS-485 network port (up to 15 meters)24V accessory power (Com 0). Meter base address. Com reset button.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 021

3.1-15
Voltage Inputs Control Power 120/240 AC 110/250 DC

() N (+) L
Current Inputs VR 5 4 3 2 1
i ii 1 2
V1
V2
V3
V4
PSI2
52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11 Protective Earth / Chassis Ground Shorting Block
Disconnect Switch Breaker Disconnect Switch
3 4
L3 Load Line
5 6 7
L2
L1
Figure 3.1-7. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Up to 600V)

Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
8 9
Voltage Inputs Control Power

() N
Current Inputs VR 5 4 3 2 1
V1
V2
V3
V4
120/240 AC 110/250 DC
(+) L
PSI2
52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11 Protective Earth / Chassis Ground
10 11 12 13 14 15
Disconnect Switch Breaker Disconnect Switch
Shorting Block
L3 Load L2 L1 Line
16 17 18
Figure 3.1-8. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Above 600V)

19 20 21
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 022
i ii 1 2
PowerXpert
7.22 (183.5) 1.50 (38.1) 1.45 (36.8) 5X #8 32 Thread Thread Depth 0.31 7.80 (198.0) 0.57 (14.5) 3.00 Ref. (76.2) 3.00 Ref. (76.2)
EVENTS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.42 (10.7) 8.20 (208.3) (8.6)
9.02 (229.0)
Push to Hold in for Help Select Turn to Highlight BACK
7.22 (183.5)
7.76 Ref. (197.1)
Model#: PX8000 Catalog#: PX8054A1CB Style#: 65D8054G010 Serial#: 000042 G.O.#: XXXXXXXXXX Power Supply: 24 VDC (+/ -20%) SELV, 8W MAX. Oper Temp: -20 TO 60C
Rev: 1 Date Code: C050131
MADE IN CANADA DO NOT HIPOT / DIELECTRIC TEST THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: 1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND 2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Customer Satisfaction for Technical Support www.eaton.com 1-800-809-2772 or 1-414-449-7100 E18555 24 Vdc Input Power DG24 3 2 1 C 24 SH O + M 3 Display Link Com 0 DG12 D A 1
DG3 10/100 T Li TX R nk DX
SH D B
1.04 (26.3) 0.46 (11.6)
4.00 Ref. (101.6)
Figure 3.1-9. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Multimeter Graphic Display (PXD-MMG) Sold Separately, Supports up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Modules
9.56 (242.8)
21
Figure 3.1-10. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module

June 2012
Sheet 03 023

3.1-17
Power Xpert Meters Conguration and Wiring Examples

Up to 16 Meters can be Daisy-Chained to a Single Power Xpert Meter LCD Display Modbus RTU (RS-485) Master Power Xpert Software Web Browser Modbus TCP Master
i ii 1
Up to 16
2
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Display Link (RS-485)
3 4
Figure 3.1-11. Display Link

Display Link (RS-485) Modbus RTU (RS-485) Master
Figure 3.1-14. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality
5 6
Modbus RTU (RS-485) Up to 16 Flow Meter (Pulse Count) Rack Monitoring Open Door/Tamper Switch Display Link (RS-485)
7 8 9
Figure 3.1-12. Modbus RTU (RS-485)Non-Web Enabled

Modbus RTU (RS-485) Master Web Browser Modbus TCP Master
10
Alarm Trip and Sequence of Events Eight programmable digital inputs Two solid-state programmable outputs Three relay programmable outputs
11 12 13
Figure 3.1-15. AccessoriesI/O Card (Option)
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Up to 16
Water Leak and Vibration Sensors Rack Monitoring Open Door/ Tamper Switch
14 15 16 17
Smoke Alarm
Display Link (RS-485)
Figure 3.1-13. Web EnabledBrowser and Modbus TCP
Alarm
Eight programmable digital inputs Two solid-state programmable outputs Three relay programmable outputs
18 19 20 21
Figure 3.1-16. IT Conguration ExamplesAccessories I/O Card (Option)
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
To order a Power Xpert Meter 4000/ 6000/8000, the catalog number should be determined using the chart shown in Table 3.1-3. The chart illustrates how to include the desired factory options as part of a catalog number. Option cards that are selected at time of order entry will be installed at the factory. Option cards are also eld installable for eld upgrades. If a display is required, it should be ordered separately. The Multi-Meter Graphic Display is capable of displaying data from an RS-485 daisychain of
up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 meter modules over a distance of up to 2000 ft. Power Xpert meter modules include panel mounting brackets. The Multi-Meter Graphic Display is designed to mount separately. If back-to-back meter to display panel mounting is desired, a mounting bracket kit is available (PX-PMBA). Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. and I/O Cards) Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. Card)
Technical Data
Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature: Meter: 20 to +70C Display: 20 to 60C operating Storage temperature: 40 to 85C Operating humidity: 595% condensing Device weight: 7.1 lbsmeter 2.1 lbsdisplay Meter and back of display are pollution degree 2 Elevation to 6562 ft (2000m) Conversion: 4096 samples per cycle delta-sigma converter digitally ltered down to 512 samples per cycle CT Input: 4096 rms samples per cycle delta-sigma converter digitally ltered down to 512 samples per cycle for anti-aliasing Burden: less than 10 milliohms Overload withstand: 500A for 1 second, non-repeating Range: 0.00520A continuous Accuracy: 0.05% or reading plus 0.01% of full scale (from 50 milliamps to 20A) Conversion: 4096 rms samples per cycle delta-sigma converter digitally ltered down to 512 samples per cycle for anti-aliasing PT input: 120500,000V primary Input range: 600V L-L, 347 L-N direct connect Nominal full scale: 1000V rms Input impedance: 2 megohms 4763 Hz 127th harmonic ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class IEC 687 0.2 Class Self sourced: 24 Vdc
Current Inputs (Each Channel)
Table 3.1-3. Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter Catalog Numbering System
PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B
Model Series 4 = 4000 (standard power quality), 2 GB 6 = 6000 (enhanced power quality), 4 GB 8 = 8000 (premium PQ w/ transient capture), 8 GB Voltage Input Configuration 0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4) 2 = Standard plus auxiliary (V6, V7, V8) Power Supply Configuration 1 = Standard 100240 Vac or 110250 Vdc power supply
7 8 9 10 11 12
Card Slot 3 Configuration A = No card option B = I/O option card (eight digital inputs, two solid-state outputs, three relay outputs) Card Slot 2 Configuration A = No card option B = Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking w/10/100Base-T, 100F, RS-485, RS-232 Ports Card Slot 1 Configuration
Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
Frequency Range
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1 = Standard communications module with RS-485 Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. and I/O Cards) Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. Card)
Harmonic Response (Voltage, Current)
Accuracy

Table 3.1-4. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Accessories

Description Digital I/O Card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking: 100FX ber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232 Graphic display module Panel-mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrotting a graphic display to an IQ Analyzer cutout Panel-mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key
Catalog Number PXMIO-B PXMCE-B PXD-MMG PX-PMBA PX-PMBB PX-PMBC PXM-4KUPG
Discrete Inputs
Relay Output Contacts

5A maximum, 240 Vac maximum, 30 Vdc maximum Lifetime: 1,000,000 no load operations 100,000 under rated voltage and load
Solid-State Outputs

Maximum load: 100 milliamps Max. voltage: 30V (externally sourced)
Applicable to PXM 4000 Meters only. Upgrade package to be eld loaded by customer. Provides enhanced PXM 6000 functionality in an existing PXM 4000 Meter, including ITIC and calendar functions.
Control Power Input

Input range AC: 100240 Vac (20%) Frequency range: 4763 Hz Input range DC: 110250 Vdc 20% Burden 50 VA Ride-through: 15s

Note: Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for meter module connection.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 025

3.1-19
Ethernet-Ready Power Quality & Energy (PQ&E) Power Xpert Meters

General Description
One or more Ethernet-ready PQ&E Power Xpert Meters may be deployed in various power distribution and motor control applications.
Layout Diagrams
Modbus Master
i ii 1 2 3 4
Modbus RS-458 Network eolr
Equipment
Power Xpert Meter 4000 Power Xpert Meter 6000 Power Xpert Meter 8000

Options
Ethernet Expansion CardCEC (recommended one per meter) Local display (one per 16 meters)
5 6 7

Figure 3.1-17. Power Xpert Meter Used in a Modbus RS-485 Network Application
Building Management System
Modbus RTU (RS-485) (standard) Display link (RS-485) (standard) Modbus TCP/IP (with CEC) HTTP (with CEC) FTP (with CEC) SMTP (with CEC) SNMP (with CEC) XML/SOAP (with CEC)
Web Browser
Network Time Server
8 9
Identify power quality problems, view waveforms, monitor circuit loading, and manage energy use via standard Web browser (PXM 4000/6000/8000) View ITIC plots, Enhanced Power Quality Index (PQI), and event/ calendar view via Web browser (PXM 6000/8000) Detect and record high-speed transients (PXM 8000)
Ethernet Network
XML/SOAP
Modbus TCP/IP
HTTP
NTP
10 11 12
Figure 3.1-18. Power Xpert Meter Used in an Ethernet Network Application
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21


Building Management System (BMS) Energy Management Systems Network Management Systems HMI Power Xpert Software Foreseer Software
CA08104001E

Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
June 2012
Sheet 03 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The embedded Web server displays comprehensive power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device conguration from the browser. The embedded Web server presents real time, historical, and event information in a browserstyle graphical format to help the user interpret information such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor, energy usage, I/O status, power quality measurements, as well as harmonic plots. The embedded Web server also allows for waveform capture and for visualizing steady-state harmonic content that is critical for power quality analysis. The Web server provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy.
Accuracy
Note: Under typical operating conditions.
Currents: 0.1% reading Voltage: 0.1% reading Energy, and demand power: 0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20 Frequency: 0.03 hertz Power factor: 0.2% reading

Communications
Multiple communications ports including:
Standard

RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave port 10/100Base-T Ethernet network port

Modbus RTU Modbus TCP BACnet/IP Ethernet TCP/IP HTTP, HTTPS NTP (Network Time Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) v1, v3 DNP 3.0

Identify Power Quality Problems to Help:
Protect motors from damage Preserve the integrity of processes and batches Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses Protect transformers and conductors from overheating

Power Xpert Meter 2000 with integral display Power Xpert Meter 2000 transducer only (no display) meter module NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front of panel rating

Avoid overloads and nuisance overload trips Maximize equipment utilization Manage emergency overloads
General Description
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series power quality instrument monitors the most critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument uses the latest in advanced technology to make it simple to use, powerful, scalable and highly exible. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 offers the same level of intuitive user interface design as the Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in a simple to navigate and easy-to-understand information architecture.
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:

Meter with Integral Display Dimensions

Height: 4.85 inches (123.2 mm) Width: 4.85 inches (123.2 mm) Depth: 3.96 inches (100.5 mm) behind panel surface 1.01 (25.6 mm) projection in front of panel surface

Note: See Table 3.1-8.

Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N Phase and neutral currents Power: real, reactive and apparent Frequency Power factor: apparent Energy: real, forward, reverse, sum Demand: peak with date and time % THD Minimum and maximum values Harmonics Individual harmonics Demand comparisons Phasors

UL/cUL Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Test Equipment 22CZ Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class, ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ANSI C62.41 Burst CE Mark
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 027

3.1-21
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Embedded Web Server

The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server offers Eaton customers a new level of accessibility to the critical information required to manage their electrical distribution system. The Web server includes real-time information in both numeric and graphical visual formats to help monitor parameters such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor, THD, and more. The Web server also provides energy and demand readings with graphic usage plots to help analyze energy usage patterns. Energy readings include kWh, kVARh, delivered and received and kVAh with time. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server supports graphical trend charts of key measurements such as current, voltage, power and energy. The trend chart supports a zoom feature that allows the user to view data over predened ranges from as little as 16 hours to as much as 4 years. The trend chart includes zoom in/out buttons and a horizontal slider bar control to manage scrolling forward and backward through the data. Trend charts of basic readings include minimum, maximum and average readings. Trend charts of interval by interval energy data also display peak demand.

The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records historical data for graphical viewing from the embedded Web server. Graphical views of historical data support pan and zoom. Over 100 standard metering parameters are logged as part of the standard meter functionality including min./max. and average for each parameter. The averages are calculated over the interval period.
Event Logging
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server allows the user to view a list of triggered events. In addition, a separate system log records system operations such as resets.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
E-mail
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 contains the ability to send e-mails based on an event that has been triggered or cleared along with the option to send an event or data log le. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 also has the ability to send a congurable periodic e-mail with meter information.
Energy Prole Data

The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records Real and Reactive energy forward, reverse, net and absolute sum, as well as Apparent energy (kVAH). These readings are stored on a xed 5 minute interval. Up to 4 status inputs can be congured as energy accumulators for counting KYZ pulse inputs.
Inputs and Outputs

Power Xpert Meter 2000 is available with a standard KYZ output. The base meter also includes two expansion slots for plug-in cards. See Figure 3.1-19 on Page 3.1-23 for details. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server card takes up one of these option slots, leaving an additional slot that can be populated by one of the following I/O cards. Two relay outputs/two status inputs Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs Four analog outputs 01 mA Four analog outputs 420 mA
Demand Comparisons
Demand usage patterns can be analyzed with the month-to-month, week-to-week comparison chart built into the meter. Raw data can be exported as a .csv le with the Save Table option to other applications for further analysis and graphing.
Event Triggers
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 has two levels of congurable event triggers: On-board meter limits (PXM 2260/ 2270/2280/2290) On-board gateway card limits
Waveform Display
60 cycles of waveform are sampled at 400 samples per cycle. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server offers a view of a single-cycle waveform to visualize steady-state harmonic content. Waveforms are presented via a Web browser. By clicking refresh, the waveform is updated to that period in time.
Waveform Recording
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 can record waveforms at up to 512 samples per cycle. Waveform captures are automatically stored on the FTP server in the IEEE standard COMTRADE le format. This allows users to view and analyze the waveforms in any standard free-of-charge or commercial COMTRADE le viewer.
The on-board meter limits can be set for any measured parameter, for up to 16 limits. If either of the 16 limits are exceeded, an alarm condition will be present and illuminate one of the LEDs on the meter faceplate. The on-board meter out of limits can also be used to energize a relay output, if so equipped. The on board gateway limits can trigger an alarm off of any measured parameter on any of the PXM 2000 model series. These triggers permit pickup, reset and pickup delay to be congured by the user.
Inputs can also be congured for demand synch and pulse counting. Inputs selected for pulse counting can be scaled. Accumulated pulse recordings are maintained in prole memory. Outputs can be used for alarm annunciation.
Ratings
Application to any PT ratio, no PTs required to 600 Vac CT ratios to any CT ratio CT inputs available as 5 or 1A secondary Separate Source Control Power Input: 90265 Vac or 100370 Vdc Low voltage 1860 Vdc
Displayed Information
Monitored information is available locally through the display, the Web browser or system power management software True rms values through 40th harmonic ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2% revenue metering specication
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Web Browser Views
Harmonic Spectral Plot
Energy Demand Prole
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Web Browser
Power Xpert Meter 2000s embedded Web server offers Eaton customers a new level of accessibility to the critical information required to manage the electrical distribution system. The embedded Web server includes real time circuit information in both numeric and graphical formats to help monitor parameters such as current loading, voltage and power levels and power factor. The Web server also provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy. Readings include kWh, kVARh, delivered and received and kVAh. The Web server also includes critical information regarding Power Quality such as harmonic distortion.
The harmonic spectral plot displays harmonics up to the 40th order. A detailed table also includes individual magnitudes and angles of current and voltage harmonics, at each frequency. Individual and total THD are displayed for diagnostic purposes.
Energy Managers can view load prole data compared against the peak demand. The plot allows comparison of present and past months usage.
Web Server Device Conguration

Special software is not required to congure a Power Xpert Meter 2000. The embedded Web server includes a comprehensive device conguration engine.

The optional I/O expansion cards offers two or four digital inputs that are useful for a variety of applications such as: Pulse Counting of KYZ or other utility pulses such as air, water or gas Demand interval timing taken from a master utility meter end of interval pulse
Historical Trend Plot
Graphical Trending of Data

The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web server supports graphical trend charts of key circuit measurements such as current, voltage, power and energy. The trend chart supports a zoom feature that allows the user to view data over a short period of 16 hours or a longer period of 48 months. The trend chart has a horizontal slider bar control to manage scrolling forward and backward through the data. Trend charts of basic readings include minimum, maximum and average readings. Trend charts of energy data also display demand values.
Names can be congured for each input for ease of use.
Real-Time Visualization of Harmonic Content
16 17 18 19 20 21
The Web server offers a waveform view to visualize steady-state harmonic content of the voltage and current to spot power quality problems.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 029

3.1-23
Relay Outputs
The optional I/O card includes two 5A Form C relay outputs rated for 240 Vac or 30 Vdc or 4 Form A solid-state outputs. These outputs can be used for applications such as Alarm annunciation KYZ pulse output
ii 1 2
Alarm outputs can be driven from triggers based on metering values.
Analog Outputs
The optional IO card includes either four 420 mA outputs or 01 mA outputs. These outputs can be used for applications such as:
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Input to BMS or PLC systems for tracking a measured meter parameter
Standard Communications Card

The standard communications card provides one Ethernet connection and 10/100Base-T port (copper only) that can be used for the following applications:
Figure 3.1-19. PXM 2000 Rear View

Monitoring, managing and conguring the meter remotely using a standard Web Browser interface Alarm notications via e-mail, SMTP Providing Modbus TCP/IP, RTU and BACnet/IP communications to BMS systems Providing SNMP communications to NMS systems Synchronizing with an NTP server Asset management Updating rmware on the meter
Power supply inputs System voltage inputs NEMA 12 gasket RS-485 KYZ out Meter gateway card I/O slot
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 030
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
90265 Vac 100370 Vdc Optional 1860 Vdc GND L (+) N () VRef A B C Control Power Supply GND L (+) N () VRef A B x
HI
HI
HI
HI
HI
HI
Power Supply
Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
C N A B C
C A N A B C
Figure 3.1-20. Service: Wye or Delta, Four-Wire with No PTs, Two or Three CTs
HI
HI
HI
15 16 17
Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
GND L (+) N () VRef A B C
90265 Vac 100370 Vdc Optional 1860 Vdc Control Power Supply
C or
18 19
A B C Not Connected to Meter
20 21
Figure 3.1-21. Service: Delta, Three-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs

CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 031

3.1-25
Power Xpert Meters Conguration and Wiring Examples

Modbus RTU (RS-485) Master Power Xpert Software Web Browser Modbus TCP Master Building Automation System Water Leak & Vibration Sensors Rack Monitoring Open Door/ Tamper Switch Modbus RTU (RS-485)
i ii 1 2 3
Smoke Alarm
Connections: = Ethernet(Modbus TCP and BACnet/IP = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Alarm Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs Four KYZ pulses/two programmable inputs Four programmable analog outputs
4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3.1-22. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality
Figure 3.1-24. IT Conguration ExamplesAccessories I/O Cards (Option)
Flow Meter (Pulse Count) Rack Monitoring Open Door/ Tamper Switch
9 10 11
Alarm
Trip and Sequence of Events
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs Four KYZ pulses/four programmable inputs Four programmable analog outputs
Figure 3.1-23. AccessoriesI/O Cards (Option)
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 032
i ii
PXM 2000 Dimensions

0.08 (2.0)
4.85 (123.2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
3.54 (89.9) 1.69 (42.9) 3.54 (89.9) 3.62 (92.0) 0.91 (23.1) 0.95 (24.0) 3.25 (82.6) 0.77 (19.6) 3.25 (82.6)
4.85 (123.2)
4.85 (123.2) 5.02 (127.5)
0.77 (19.6)
Figure 3.1-25. PXM 2000 Display Front View
Figure 3.1-26. PXM 2000 Meter/Display Side View
Figure 3.1-27. PXM 2000 Transducer Only Side View
3.38 (85.9) 4 x .02 (0.5) 4.0 (101.6)
3.62 (92.0)
Figure 3.1-28. PXM 2000 Rear View
Figure 3.1-29. ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout
Figure 3.1-30. DIN Mounting Cutout
June 2012
Sheet 03 033

3.1-27
To order a Power Xpert Meter 2000, the catalog number should be determined using the chart shown in Table 3.1-5. The chart illustrates how to include the desired factory options as part of a catalog number. Option cards that are selected at time of order entry will be installed at the factory. Option cards are also eld installable for future upgrades.
Power Xpert Meter modules include panel mounting brackets. Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO). Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc).
i ii 1 2 3 4
I/O Slot 2 5 = Gateway card
Table 3.1-5. Power Xpert Meter 2000 Catalog Numbering System
PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5
Model Series 2250 2260 2270 2280 Energy meter Power quality meter Power quality plus meter Power quality plus with up to 64 samples/cycle waveform recording meter 2290 = Power quality plus with up to 512 samples/cycle recording meter Meter Type M = Meter (with integral display) T = Transducer only (no display) Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 meter/display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO) Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 meter/display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc)
= = = =
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system Power Supply 1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc 4 = 2460 Vdc Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary
I/O Slot 1 0 = None 1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs 2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs 3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA 4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA
Refer to Table 3.1-8 for model-specic features.
Table 3.1-6. Power Xpert 2000 Meter Accessories

Description Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrotting a PXM 2000 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ data cutout PXM 2000 gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 Catalog Number IQ250-PMAK PXM2000-GCK
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 3.1-7. Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards

Description PXM 2000 I/O card2 relay outputs/2 status inputs PXM 2000 I/O card4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs PXM 2000 I/O card4 analog outputs 01 mA PXM 2000 I/O card4 analog outputs 420 mA Catalog Number IQ250/260-IO1 IQ250/260-IO2 IQ250/260-IO3 IQ250/260-IO4
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 034
i ii 1 2 3
Technical Data
PXM 2000 Series Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
Current Inputs

Isolation
KYZ Pulse

All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V
Environmental Ratings
Operating temperature: 20 to 70C Storage temperature: 20 to 70C Operating humidity: to 95% RH noncondensing Faceplate rating: NEMA 12 Mounting gasket included
4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13

Class 10: 5A nominal, 10A maximum Class 2: 1A nominal, 2A maximum Fault current withstand: 100A for 10 seconds 300A for 3 seconds 500A for 1 second Continuous current withstand: 20A for screw terminated or passthrough connections Programmable current: full scale to any CT ratio Burden: 0.005 VA per phase maximum at 11A Pickup current: 0.1% of nominal Class 10: 5 mA Class 2: 1 mA Connections: Pass-through wire gauge dimension: 0.177 inches (4.5 mm) Quick connect: 0.25-inch (6.35 mm) male tab Range: Line-to-neutral 20576 Vac Line-to-line 0721 Vac Programmable voltage range: full scale to any PT ratio Supported systems: 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye 2 element delta, four-wire delta systems Input impedance: 1 megohm/phase Burden: 0.36 VA/phase maximum at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V Connection: 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable terminal block, AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm2)
Contacts: 1 Form A On resistance, maximum: 35 ohms Peak switching voltage: 350 Vdc Continuous load current: 120 mA Peak load current: 350 mA (10 ms) Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc: 1 uA Opto-isolation: 3750 Vac
Dimensions and Shipping

Weight: 2 lbs (0.91 kg) Basic unit: H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches (H 127.0 x W 124.5 x L 127.0 mm) PXM 2000 Series: mounts in 3.62-inch (92.0 mm) DIN and ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs Shipping container dimensions: 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) cube Tolerance: 0.1 inches (2.54 mm)

Sensing Method
Voltage, current: true rms Power: sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on all channels Harmonics Resolution: 40th order

Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA: 100 msec at 60 Hz All other parameters: 1 second at 60 Hz
Compliance
IEC/EN60687: 0.2% accuracy ANSI C12.20: 0.2% accuracy ANSI C62.41: burst UL/cUL: Electrical & Electronic Measuring & Test Equipment 22CZ CE

Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option: 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc, universal AC/DC supply Low voltage DC voltage option: 1860 Vdc Burden: 10 VA maximum
Voltage Inputs
Serial Communications Format

Connection type: RS-485 (through back plate) Com port baud rate: 9600 57,600 bauds Com port address: 01247 Data format: 8-bit, no parity Protocols: Modbus ASCII, RTU or DNP 3.0
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Network Communications Format

Connection type: RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet Network port Protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, NTP, SMTP, SNMP
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 035

3.1-29

Measures basic meter parameters 256 MB for data logging Ethernet On-board gateway card limits/alarms

Features of PXM 2250 plus: Harmonics On-board meter hardware limits to activate optional relay outputs Visual indication of limits exceeded at meter face 512 MB for data logging

Features of 2270 plus: Up to 64 samples per cycle for waveform recording Conguration of total, pre- and post-event cycles.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5

Features of 2280 plus:

Features of PXM 2260 plus: Harmonics, including individual Waveform view to visualize steady-state harmonic content 768 MB for data logging Table 3.1-8. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benets

Up to 512 samples per cycle for waveform recording
Benet 2280

2270

2290

General
Embedded Web Server Firmware ash update support

6
Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network, Internet. Enables you to ash the meter with the latest rmware updates. Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter or external software. Plot two months or two weeks for vivid demand comparison. Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties. Keep track of your energy usage, identify peaks to conserve energy usage. Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas. High sampling rate resulting in high accuracy. Dene appropriate security access level per user. Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software. Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (132) meters together. Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser. Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system. Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network. Easy integration with serial DNP networks. Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, in standard CSV le format.
7 8

Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph analysis, export, print Demand plot comparisons month-to-month, week-to-week Power, apparent, real, reactive, power factor Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, TOU, prole, export, print

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average) Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle

400

400

400

400

400

Security
Secure two level user access privileges
Communications
Modbus TCP Modbus RTU HTTP, HTTPS SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) NTP (Network Time Protocol) DNP 3.0 Trend measurements CSV le export
CA08104001E

Table 3.1-8. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benets (Continued)

June 2012
Sheet 03 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Benet 2270

2280

2290

Logs
Trend logging Load prole Event logging

Log trend information for easy statistical analysis. Review the load prole graph to get a better understanding of your electrical load versus time. Log events for retrospective event analysis. Store trend data and events for historical analysis. Allows you to identify potential harmful harmonics. Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter. Provides simple metric for power quality viewable from the embedded Web server. Waveform view on a PC to visualize steady-state harmonic content through embedded Web server to identify power quality issues. Ability to record waveforms up to specied samples/cycle.
Memory and Storage

Standard memory, MB 256 512 40th
768 40th

768 40th

768 40th

Harmonics
Harmonic levels Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Individual harmonics
Waveform
Waveform display Waveform recording

64
512
I/O
I/O Two relay outputs/two status inputs Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs Four analog outputs 01 mA Four analog outputs 420 mA Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional The Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards are extremely exible and can be used in a large variety of different applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various conditions dened by the user. Various third-party devices, such as alarms, pulse meters, trip units and sensors, can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert Meter 2000. Triggers and events can be tied to the meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and trends. Analog outputs can be programmed to output meter parameters to BMS or PLC systems.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 037

Power Xpert Energy Viewer
3.1-31
Power Xpert Energy Viewer

General Description
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV) provides the means to develop an energy usage baseline for energy management programs, comparing interval logged data points. It is a free Web download for compatible Eaton product home pages. This tool allows easy interpretation of the data collected by compatible devices via graphical charts, graphs and reports without having to export the available .csv le into Microsoft Excel or another tool.
The nal report consists of four tabs. The rst tab, the Power tab, shows the statistics on the raw power data. The Day, Week and Month tabs show the statistics for energy, calculated by integrating the power over the corresponding interval duration. Users can select up to four different devices for energy comparison.
Compatible Devices

Power Xpert Meter 2000 series Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 series Power Xpert Gateway 600A (connected devices that capture watt and kWh values, i.e., IQ 100 series) Power Xpert Gateway PDP card Power Xpert Gateway Series 1000 card
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The PXEV is a versatile tool suited for a wide range of customer applications. Two basic examples are presented below.
Schools and Dormitories

An excellent application for the PXEV is a Schools and/or Dormitory scenario where each elementary school in a school district or college dorm (building) on a campus has a three-phase main meter. The PXEV could be used to graphically compare each building, thus determining which is the most energy efcient.
Monitoring Secondary Transformers

PXEV users can monitor the secondary of three-phase transformers (kVA) to compare transformer loading over time. This determines the unused, available capacity when expansion projects are planned and engineers need to determine if additional power transformers need to be purchased/ installed. In the case where more transformers are not necessary to carry the expansion load, the information from the PXEV can assist in providing signicant monetary savings.
Summary Report: Select the different tabs to view the appropriate energy values. The Power tab shows kW or MW power on a 15-minute demand window (normal setting on our devices). The Day/Week/Month tabs show kWh or MWh for those time periods.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Features

Quickly add an Eaton device specied above using its IP address Compare two devices energy usage Compare last month to the current month Develop an energy baseline Customize/specify values from the source: Invert values Magnitude Resolution Interpolation Customize data range for summary data
Comparison Summary: Users can select up to four different devices for energy comparison. This graphic shows two devices.
21
CA08104001E

IQ 250/260 Series
June 2012
Sheet 03 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters
Features and Benets

Measure and display real-time information about critical power parameters with a sampling rate of 400 samples per cycle Monitor power utilization and quality with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.2%) Optional 128 KB for data logging, which guards against loss of historical data
Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test pulse self-certication capabilities Standard Modbus RTU communications Available as transducer only or with display Field upgradeable to a Power Xpert Meter 2000 Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert Architecture for a holistic systemlevel view
Additional Features
Table 3.1-9. Features of IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters
Features IQ 250

IQ 260

Instrumentation IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter

Current, per phase Current demand Calculated neutral current Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) Frequency
General Description
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 meters provide capabilities you would not normally expect in affordable, ultra-compact meters, such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Providing the rst line of defense against costly power problems, Eatons IQ 250 and IQ 260 electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment using todays technology. When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 250/ 260 series t the bill. These meters are ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear feeders and motor control centers. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, IQ 250/260 series t into a standard ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or other electrical equipment, and therefore t easily into retrot applications.

Real, reactive and apparent power, total and per phase (kW, kVAR, kVA) Real, reactive and apparent energy, total and per phase (kWh, kVARh, kVAh) Real, reactive and apparent power demand Power factor, total and per phase Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, THD (IQ 260), kW, kVAR, kVA
Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, xed)
Data Logging
128 KB for data logging Optional

Optional

Communications
RS-485 KYZ output Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII DNP 3.0
I/O
Two digital in/two digital out Four digital in/four KYZ out Four analog output (420 mA) Four analog output (01 mA) Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional



Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) voltage and current per phase
Utility and commercial metering Substations, industrial facilities, power generation sites and campuses Submetering Load studies and voltage recording Analog meter replacement
Alarming
Set point driven alarm

Digital Out with IQ 250 requires external command. Requires external power supply.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 039

IQ 250/260 Series
3.1-33

Table 3.1-10. IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
Description Specications Amp. nominal, 10A maximum 1A nominal, 2A maximum 10 seconds 3 seconds 1 second 20A for screw terminated or pass-through connections Full scale to any CT ratio 0.005 VA per phase maximum at 11A 0.1% of nominal 5 mA 1 mA 0.177 inches (4.5 mm) 0.25-inch male tab Description Specications True rms Sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on all channels 40th order 100 msec at 60 Hz 1 second at 60 Hz 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc, universal AC/DC supply 1860 Vdc 10 VA maximum RS-485 (through back plate) 960057,600 bauds 01247 8-bit, no parity Modbus ASCII, RTU or DNP 3.0 1 Form A 35 Ohms 350 Vdc 120 mA 350 mA (10 ms) 1 uA 3750 Vac
i
Sensing Method
Voltage, current Power Harmonics resolution
Current Inputs
Class 105 Class 2 Fault current withstand 100A for: 300A for: 500A for: Continuous current withstand Programmable current Burden Pickup current Class 10 Class 2 Connections Pass-through wire gauge dimension Quick connect
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Update Rate
Watts, Var and VA All other parameters
Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option
DC voltage option Burden
Standard Communications Format

Connection type Com port baud rate Com port address
Voltage Inputs
Range Line-to-neutral Line-to-line Programmable voltage range Supported systems 20576 Vac 0721 Vac Full scale to any PT ratio 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye, 2 element delta, four-wire delta systems 1 megohm/phase 0.36 VA/phase maximum at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120 Volts 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable terminal block, AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm2)
Data format Protocols
KYZ Pulse
Contacts On resistance, maximum Peak switching voltage Continuous load current Peak load current Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc Opto-isolation
Input impedance Burden Connection
Isolation

Weight Basic unit 20C to +70C 20 to +70C To 95% RH noncondensing NEMA 12 mounting gasket included IQ 250/260 Shipping container dimensions Tolerance 2 lbs H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs 6.00-inch cube 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) 0.2% accuracy 0.2% accuracy Burst Electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment 22CZ Meets EU safety, health and environmental requirements
Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Faceplate rating
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Compliance
IEC 687 ANSI C12.20 ANSI C62.41 UL/cUL
CE
CA08104001E

IQ 250/260 Series
June 2012
Sheet 03 040
i ii 1 2 3
IQ 250/260 Meter Dimensions
Expandable I/O Componentry
4
IQ 250/260 Face IQ 250/260M Side IQ 250/260T Side
5
Figure 3.1-31. IQ 250/260 Meter DimensionsFace and Side Views
6 7 8
Table 3.1-11. IQ 250/260 Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0
Model Series I/O Slot 2 I/O Slot 1 Data Logging A = None L = On-board data logging Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary Power Supply 1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc 4 = 2448 Vdc 0 = None 1 = Two relay outputs/ two status inputs 2 = Four KYZ pulses/ four status inputs 3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA 4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA 0 = None 1 = Two relay outputs/ two status inputs 2 = Four KYZ pulses/ four status inputs 3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA 4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
250 = Power 260 = Power quality Meter Type M = Meter (with integral display) T = Transducer only (no display)
Table 3.1-12. IQ 250/260 Meter Accessories

Description Panel mounting adapter for retrotting an IQ 250/260 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout PXM 2000 Gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 Catalog Number IQ250-PMAK PXM2000-GCK
Table 3.1-13. Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards

Description IQ 250/260 I/O card2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ 250/260 I/O card4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs IQ 250/260 I/O card4 analog outputs 01 mA IQ 250/260 I/O card4 analog outputs 420 mA Catalog Number IQ250/260-IO1 IQ250/260-IO2 IQ250/260-IO3 IQ250/260-IO4
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 041

IQ 130/140/150 Series
3.1-35
IQ 130/140/150 Electronic Power Meters

Features and Benets
Measure and display real-time information about critical power parameters with a sampling rate of 400 samples per cycle
Monitor power utilization and quality with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.5%) Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test pulse self-certication capabilities Optional Modbus RTU or TCP communications Available as transducer only or with display Designed to accommodate upgrades Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert Architecture for a holistic system-level view
i ii 1 2 3 4
Additional Features
Table 3.1-14. Features of IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters
IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter
Features IQ 130

IQ 140

IQ 150

5 6 7 8 9 10 11
General Description
The IQ 100 meter family provides capabilities you would not normally expect in affordable, compact meters, such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Providing the rst line of defense against costly power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment utilizing todays technology. When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 100 series ts the bill. These meters are ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear feeders and motor control centers. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, IQ 100 series meters t into a standard ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or other electrical equipment, and therefore t easily into retrot applications.
Instrumentation
Current, per phase Current demand Calculated neutral current Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) Min./max. readings, I, V Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA Frequency
Power
Real, reactive and apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA) Power factor, total Real, reactive and apparent power demand
Demand Methods
Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, VAh)
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, KYZ output RJ45, Modbus TCP, KYZ output Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

IQ 130/140/150 Series
June 2012
Sheet 03 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Table 3.1-15. IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
Description Specications 5A nominal, 10A maximum 1A nominal, 2A maximum 10 seconds 3 seconds 1 second 20A for screw terminated or pass-through connections Full scale to any CT ratio 0.005 VA per phase maximum at 11A 0.1% of nominal 5 mA 1 mA 0.177 inches (4.5 mm) 0.25-inch male tab DC voltage option Burden Description Specications True rms Sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on all channels 100 msec at 60 Hz 1 second at 60 Hz 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc, universal AC/DC supply 1860 Vdc 10 VA maximum RS-485 or RJ45 (through back plate) 960057,600 bauds 01247 8-bit, no parity Modbus ASCII/RTU or TCP 1 Form A 35 Ohms 350 Vdc 120 mA 350 mA (10 ms) 1 uA 3750 Vac 2 lbs H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs 6.00-inch cube 0.10 inches (2.54 mm) 0.5% accuracy 0.5% accuracy Burst Electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment 22CZ
Current Inputs
Class 10 Class 2 Fault Current Withstand 100A for: 300A for: 500A for: Continuous current withstand Programmable current Burden Pickup current Class 10 Class 2 Connections Pass-through wire gauge dimension Quick connect
Sensing Method
Voltage, current Power
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA All other parameters
Power Supply
Optional Communications Format

Connection type Com. port baud rate Com. port address Data format
Voltage Inputs
Range Line-to-neutral Line-to-line Programmable voltage range Supported systems 20576 Vac 0721 Vac Full scale to any PT ratio 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye, 2 element delta, four-wire delta systems 1 megohm/phase 0.36 VA/phase maximum at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable terminal block, AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm2)
Protocols
Optional KYZ Pulse


Weight Basic unit IQ 100
Isolation
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Faceplate rating 20 to +70C 40 to +85C To 95% RH noncondensing NEMA 12 water-resistant mounting gasket Included
Shipping container dimensions Tolerance
Compliance
IEC 687 ANSI C12.20 ANSI C62.41 UL/cUL/CE
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 043

IQ 130/140/150 Series
3.1-37
IQ 100 Meter Dimensions
i ii 1 2
IQ 100T Transducer Only
3 4
IQ 100M Front View IQ 100M Side View IQ 100T Side View
Figure 3.1-32. IQ 100 Meter DimensionsFront and Side Views
5 6 7
Table 3.1-16. IQ 100 Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1
8
Model Series 130 = Volts/amps 140 = Power 150 = Energy Meter Type M = Meter (with integral display) T = Transducer only (no display) Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary Power Supply 1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc 4 = 2448 Vac Communication 0 = None 1 = Modbus RTU and KYZ pulse 2 = Modbus TCP and KYZ pulse
9 10 11
Table 3.1-17. IQ 100 Meter Accessories

Description Panel mounting adapter for retrotting an IQ 100 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout Catalog Number IQ250-PMAK
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
3.1-38 Advanced and Electronic Metering

June 2012
Sheet 03 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 045
Advanced and Electronic Metering Eaton Submeter Overview

IQ 35M
3.2-1
IQ 35M
Commercial submetering Energy management Industrial monitoring Cost allocation
Features and Benets

IQ 35M
General Description
The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a DIN rail meter that combines exceptional performance and easy installation to deliver a cost-effective solution for energy and power monitoring applications, as well as submetering applications. All models include pulse output and phase alarms for true versatility in all situations. The Modbus output options offer added exibility for conguration and data analysis. The IQ 35M allows you to:

DIN rail or surface mounted watthour meter with demand Affordable, lightweight and compact meter providing watthours energy information Included backlit LCD display for local reading Power and energy readings kW kWh Peak demand available Monitors Watts, watthours, watt demand Volts, amperes PF, frequency VARs, VA Optional data logging capability Optional serial communications (Modbus-RTU or BACnet MS/TP) Revenue grade, ANSI C12.20 0.5% accuracy, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S User-enabled password protection On-board diagnostics
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Verify energy bills Make informed load shifting and shedding decisions Fairly and accurately allocate energy costs to users Identify wasteful practices Decrease unnecessary usage Produce an energy prole Secure the optimum utility rate structure
IQ 35M mounted and wired in Eaton panelboard. Closeup photo showing IQ 35M panelboard integration and deadfront cover. Note: Please refer to Tab 22 for panelboard information. IQ 35M in optional NEMA 4X enclosure. Enclosure shipped loose for eld mounting of meter. Enclosure only model number: IQ35M-ENC.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
3.2-2

IQ 35M
June 2012
Sheet 03 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Product Selection
Table 3.2-1. Catalog Number Selection

Voltage input UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L) CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L) Current input Scaling: 532,767A Input range: 00.333V or 01V (selectable) Control power UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L) CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
Environmental
Operating temperature range Meter: 30 to 70C (22 to 158F) Display: 10 to 50C (14 to 122F) Storage temperature range Meter: 40 to 85C (40 to 185F) Display: 10 to 60C (14 to 140F) Humidity range <95% RH noncondensing
IQ35M A 1 1
Meter Series Enclosure Type 1 = Standard energy 2 = Four quadrant energy Output Option 1 = Pulse output only 2 = Pulse output + Modbus 3 = Pulse output + Modbus + data logging 5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet + data logging
Data Outputs

Accuracy
Real power and energy 0.5% (ANSI C12.20, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S)
Outputs
IQ35MAx1 thru 3: Real energy pulse: NO static; alarm contacts: NC static IQ35MA11 Reactive energy pulse 30 Vac/dc IQ35MAx2, IQ35MAx3 RS-485 two-wire Modbus RTU IQ35MA15 RS-485 two-wire BACnet MS/TP
Accessories

NEMA 4 enclosure Fuse kits DIN rail Replacement mounting clips CTssolid and split core
Inputs
IQ35MA15 Two pulse accumulators
Mechanical
Mounting DIN rail or 3-point screwmount
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kW, kWh: Total Current: Three-phase average and per phase Voltage: Three-phase average, per phase, and line-line and line-neutral Power: Real, reactive and apparent; Three-phase total and per phase Power factor: Three-phase average and per phase Frequency Power demand: most recent and peak Demand conguration: xed, rolling block and external sync Data logging (IQ35MAx3) 10 congurable data buffers; congurable demand subinterval (when set at a 15-minute interval, buffers store data for 60 days) Data logging (IQ35MA15) 6 congurable data buffers; congurable demand subinterval (when set at a 15-minute interval, buffers store data for 60 days) Trending requires communication network to retrieve data
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 047

IQ 35M
3.2-3
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 3.2-1. IQ 35M Product Diagram
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 3.2-2. IQ 35M Advanced CommunicationModbus RTU

21
3.2-4

IQ 35M
June 2012
Sheet 03 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3.2-3. IQ 35M Advanced CommunicationBACnet
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 3.2-4. IQ 35M Mechanical Installation
June 2012
Sheet 03 049

IQ 35M
3.2-5
Dimensions
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Figure 3.2-5. Dimensional Drawing Figure 3.2-7. Wall Mount Conguration
6 7 8 9 10 11
Figure 3.2-6. DIN Rail Conguration
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
3.2-6

IQ 35M
June 2012
Sheet 03 050
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IQ 35M Current Transducers Low Current Ranges 5600A

General Description
Solid- and split-core AC current transducers have different hole sizes and current ratings to suit any application. The solid-core models are ideal for new construction projects. Split-core models are perfect for retrots. Output is xed at the industry standard of 00.333 Vac.
Figure 3.2-8. IQ 35M-SO Solid Core CT Dimensions Figure 3.2-9. IQ 35M-SO Split-Core CT Dimensions Table 3.2-2. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)
Description A 0.30 (8.0) 0.30 (8.0) 0.50 (13.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 2.00 (51.0) 2.00 (51.0) 2.00 (51.0) 2.00 (51.0) 2.00 (51.0) 3.25 (83.0) 3.25 (83.0) 3.25 (83.0) 3.25 (83.0) B 1.70 (44.0) 1.70 (44.0) 1.90 (49.0) 2.10 (54.0) 2.70 (69.0) 2.70 (69.0) 2.70 (69.0) 2.70 (69.0) 2.70 (69.0) 2.10 (54.0) 2.10 (54.0) 2.10 (54.0) 2.10 (54.0) 2.10 (54.0) 3.35 (86.0) 3.35 (86.0) 3.35 (86.0) 3.35 (86.0) C 0.75 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 0.80 (21.0) 0.80 (21.0) 0.80 (21.0) 0.80 (21.0) 0.80 (21.0) 0.61 (16.0) 0.61 (16.0) 0.61 (16.0) 0.61 (16.0) 0.61 (16.0) 1.00 (26.0) 1.00 (26.0) 1.00 (26.0) 1.00 (26.0) D E Model Number IQ35M-SO-30-5 IQ35M-SO-030-20 IQ35M-SO-050-50 IQ35M-SO-075-50 IQ35M-SO-125-100 IQ35M-SO-125-200 IQ35M-SO-125-250 IQ35M-SO-125-300 IQ35M-SO-125-400

Data logging Recording Power monitoring Energy management Alternative energy monitoring Cost allocation
Solid Core
IQ 35M CT, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ 35M CT, 20A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.50 inch IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ 35M CT, 100A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 200A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 Inch
Features
High accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130% of rated current 00.333 Vac standard output Solid-core models have a rugged epoxy encapsulated construction, giving it outstanding durability Split-core models have interleaving joints for reliability with a selflocking mechanism and no exposed metal; a safe design

UR CE RoHS

Split Core
IQ 35M CT, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ 35M CT, 30A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ 35M CT, 100A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ 35M CT, 200A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ 35M CT, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ 35M CT, 600A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 0.75 (20.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) 1.25 (32.0) IQ35M-SP-075-5 IQ35M-SP-075-30 IQ35M-SP-075-50 IQ35M-SP-075-100 IQ35M-SP-075-200 IQ35M-SP-125-250 IQ35M-SP-125-300 IQ35M-SP-125-400 IQ35M-SP-125-600

Inputs
Frequency range: 50400 Hz Accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130% of rated current
Outputs
At rated current: 0.333 Vac
Environmental
Operating temperature range: 10 to 55C (14 to 131F) Storage temperature range: 40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Lead Length
8-foot twisted pair
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 051

IQ 35M
3.2-7
IQ 35M Current Transducers High Current Ranges 8002400A

General Description
The IQ 35M split-core current transducers, high current ranges, provide a safe 00.333 Vac output for use with the IQ 35M energy meter.

Inputs

i ii 1 2 3
Figure 3.2-10. IQ 35M-SP-25X
Frequency range: 50/60 Hz Accuracy: 1% of reading from 10% to 100% of the rated current of the CTs At rated current: 0.333 Installation category: Cat II or Cat III
Outputs

Mechanical
Data logging Recording Power monitoring Energy management Alternative energy monitoring Cost allocation
Environmental
Operating temperature range: 15 to 60C (5 to 140F) Storage temperature range: 40 to 70C (40 to 158F) Humidity range: 095% noncondensing
4 5 6 7
Features
High accuracy: 1% of reading from 10% to 100% of rated current 00.333V output
Lead Length
6-foot twisted pair
Table 3.2-3. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)

Description A 4.90 (125.0) 4.90 (125.0) 4.90 (125.0) 4.90 (125.0) 4.90 (125.0) 4.90 (125.0) B 2.90 (73.0) 5.50 (139.0) 5.50 (139.0) 5.50 (139.0) 5.50 (139.0) 5.50 (139.0) C 2.50 (62.0) 2.50 (62.0) 2.50 (62.0) 2.50 (62.0) 2.50 (62.0) 2.50 (62.0) D 1.20 (30.0) 1.20 (30.0) 1.20 (30.0) 1.20 (30.0) 1.20 (30.0) 1.20 (30.0) E 5.20 (132.0) 7.90 (201.0) 7.90 (201.0) 7.90 (201.0) 7.90 (201.0) 7.90 (201.0) F 5.90 (151.0) 6.00 (151.0) 6.00 (151.0) 6.00 (151.0) 6.00 (151.0) 6.00 (151.0) Model Number IQ35M-SP-253-800 IQ35M-SP-255-1000 IQ35M-SP-255-1200 IQ35M-SP-255-1600 IQ35M-SP-255-2000 IQ35M-SP-255-2400

UR CE
Split Core
IQ 35M CT, 800A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ 35M CT, 1000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ 35M CT, 1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ 35M CT, 1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ 35M CT, 2000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ 35M CT, 2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
3.2-8

IQ 35M
June 2012
Sheet 03 052
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Supported System Types

The IQ 35M power meters have a number of different possible system wiring congurations (see wiring diagrams on Page 3.2-9). To congure the meter, set the System Type via the User Interface or Modbus register 130 (if so equipped). The System Type tells the meter which of its current and Table 3.2-4. Supported System Types
Number of Wires CTs Qty ID Voltage Connections Qty ID
voltage inputs are valid, which are to be ignored, and whether neutral is connected. Setting the correct System Type prevents unwanted energy accumulation on unused inputs, selects the formula to calculate the Theoretical Maximum System Power, and determines which phase loss algorithm is to be used. The phase
loss algorithm is congured as a percent of the Line-to-Line System Voltage (except when in System Type 10) and also calculates the expected Line to Neutral voltages for system types that have Neutral (12 and 40).
System Type Modbus Register 130 User Interface: SETUP>S SYS
Phase Loss Measurements VLL VLN Balance
Type
Wiring Diagram Figure Number 3.2-11 3.2-12 3.2-13 3.2-14 3.2-15 3.2-16
Single-Phase Wiring
2 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 A A A, B 2 2 3 A, N A, B A, B, N A, B, C A, B, C, N L-N L-L L-L with N Delta Grounded wye 10 11 12 31 40 1L + 1n 2L 2L + 1n 3L 3L + 1n AN AB AB AB, BC, CA AB, BC, CA AN, BN, CN AN, BN AN-BN AB-BC-CA AN-BN-CN and AB-BC-CA
Three-Phase Wiring
A, B, C 3 A, B, C 4
Table 3.2-5. Wiring

Symbol Description Voltage disconnect switch Fuse (installer is responsible for ensuring compliance with local requirements. No fuses are included with the device.) Earth ground
S1
Current transducer
11
S2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Potential transformer Protection containing a voltage disconnect switch with a fuse or disconnect circuit breaker. The protection device must be rated for the available short-circuit current at the connection point.
Note: IQ 35MA1x models are not polarity sensitive. No need to observe polarity when wiring. IQ 35MA2x models are polarity sensitive. Observe correct polarity when wiring.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 053

IQ 35M
3.2-9
Wiring Diagrams
Use System Type 10 (1L + ln) N L1 Use System Type 31 (3L) L1 L2 L3
i ii 1
A B C N A B C N
X1
2 3
X1
White Black
X2
+ A + B + C
White Black
X1 X2 X1 X2
X2
White Black White Black
+ A + B + C
4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3.2-11. Single-Phase Line-to-Neutral Two-Wire System, 1 CT
Figure 3.2-14. Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 3 CTs, No PT
Use System Type 11 (2L) L1 L2
Use System Type 40 (3L + ln) N L1 L2 L3
A B C N
X1
A B C N
X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
White Black
X2
+ A + B + C
X2
X1 X2 X1 X2
White Black White Black White Black
+ A + B + C
Figure 3.2-12. Single-Phase Line-to-Line Two-Wire System, 1 CT

Use System Type 12 (2L + ln) N L1 L2
Figure 3.2-15. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Direct Voltage Connection, 3 CTs
L1 L2
L3
A B C N
X1
A B C N
X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2
17 18 19 20 21
White Black
X1
X2
White Black
X2
+ A + B + C
White Black White Black White Black
+ A + B + C
Figure 3.2-13. Single-Phase Direct Voltage Connection, 2 CTs
Figure 3.2-16. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Connection, 3 CTs, 3 PTs
CA08104001E
3.2-10 Advanced and Electronic Metering Eaton Submeter Overview

IQ 35M
June 2012
Sheet 03 054
i ii
Control Power
G 1 2 L1 L2 L3
G 1 2 N L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
G 1 2 N L1 L2 L3
Figure 3.2-17. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Line) Line-to-Line from 90 Vac to 600 Vac (UL) (520 Vac CE). In UL installations, the lines may be oating (i.e., a delta). If any lines are tied to an earth (i.e., a corner grounded delta), see the Line-to-Neutral installation limits. In CE installations, the lines must be neutral (earth) referenced at less than 300 Vac L-N.
Figure 3.2-20. Control Power Transformer (CPT) Connection The Control Power Transformer may be wired L-N or L-L. Output to meet meter input requirements
Fuse Recommendations
Keep the fuses close to the power source (obey local and national code requirements). For selecting fuses and circuit breakers, use the following criteria:

8 9 10 11 12
G 1 2
Figure 3.2-18. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Neutral) Line-to-Neutral from 90 Vac to 347 Vac (UL) or 300 Vac (CE).
Current interrupt capacity should be selected based on the installation category and the fault current capability Overcurrent protection should be selected with a time delay The voltage rating should be sufcient for the input voltage applied Provide overcurrent protection and disconnecting means to protect the wiring. For DC installations, the installer must provide external circuit protection (suggested: 0.5A, time delay fuses) The earth connection is required for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and is not a protective earth ground
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 3.2-19. Direct Connect Control Power (DC) DC control power from 125 Vdc to 300 Vdc (UL and CE max.).
June 2012
Sheet 03 055

IQ 150S/250S Series
3.2-11
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters
Features and Benets
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meter
Self-enclosed, these meters are an ideal solution for surface mounting next to a selected piece of equipment for energy monitoring NEMA 12 enclosure with a large, easy-to-read faceplate, consistent with other Eaton meter models, designed with knockouts for easy installation Ethernet communications option for either wired or wireless setup, allowing for additional ease of installation and integration into existing networks Available data and alarm recording for historical records/trending Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert Architecture for a holistic systemlevel view
Perhaps you dont have network drops in all the right places. The IQ 150S/250S offers a wireless communications option. The transmissions are encrypted using 128-bit Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) for security.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Industry-Standard Communication Protocols Standard Modbus RS-485 Communication

Standard communication includes an RS-485 output speaking Modbus protocol. This allows the unit to be connected to any serial RS-485 bus using the Modbus interface. The unit communicates easily with most building automation, Power Xpert Software or other software systems. Baud rates are up to 57.6K baud to provide fast update times.
General Description
With energy costs skyrocketing, you need the ability to verify the accuracy of utility billing and allocation of energy costs among business units, different manufacturing areas or facilities, and tenants. Production equipment and IT systems are vulnerable to power anomalies; therefore, you must ensure that power is always up to specications. If your infrastructure is an established facility, you may not currently have metering or may have addressed these concerns by deploying a variety of analog gauges and metersone for volts, one for amperes and so on, with separate meters for each measurement. If youre planning an upgrade or a new power infrastructure, no doubt you would like to capitalize on the latest technology to improve upon that cumbersome architecture and its patchwork view.
Wireless and High-End Capabilities you would not Expect from a Self-Enclosed, Compact Meter
Providing the rst line of defense against costly power problems, Eatons IQ 150S/250S electronic selfenclosed meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment using todays secure wireless technology. Eatons IQ 150S/ 250S meters use 24-bit AD converters that sample at more than 400 samples per cycle and meet IEC 687 (0.2% accuracy) and ANSI C12.20 (0.2% accuracy) standards. With such highperformance measurement capability, these meters can be condently used for primary revenue metering and submetering applications. Either model will help you monitor energy demand, while the IQ 250S provides the extra benet of also monitoring and recording the changes in the characteristics of your power. Eatons IQ 150S/250S meters provide direct-reading metered values for the most critical power aspects, such as watts, watt demand, watthours, voltage amperes (VA), VA-hours, VARs, VAR-hours and power factor. They have high sampling speed and accuracy. These meters are self-enclosed in a NEMA 12 enclosure with knockouts on the bottom for communication and power, providing for an easy installation.
Wi-Fi or Land-Based Ethernet

The unit offers an Ethernet option congured either as an RJ45 or Wi-Fi connection. The Wi-Fi conguration allows the 150S/250S to be used on standard Wi-Fi base stations. The unit is assigned an IP address; it communicates Modbus protocol over Ethernet TCP/IP. Wireless Ethernet is reliable and easy to integrate, making it the superior solution for mass meter deployment.
KYZ Pulse
For applications in which a pulse is needed, the unit also provides a KYZ output that pulses proportional to the amount of energy consumed. This feature is used for pulse counting applications into building management systems where serial or Ethernet protocol is not available.
Verify Energy Bills

The IQ 150S/250S models provide a traceable watthour test pulse (used with a watthour pulse recorder or totalizer), so you can verify the accuracy of your meter and in turn, the accuracy of billing from your utility company and to internal customers.
Industrial and commercial buildings, metering and submetering Government facilities and military Universities and airports Load studies and voltage recording
CA08104001E

IQ 150S/250S Series Integrated with Eatons Power Xpert Architecture
IQ 150S/250S meters integrate into Eatons Power Xpert Architecture, where meters, gateways and monitoring devices collaborate to create a unied, centralized view of the end-to-end power and facility infrastructure. When used in this architecture, either with a Power Xpert Gateway or directly via Ethernet, the meters with the Modbus RTU option can provide Web-based graphics of current power conditions. Simply connect your meter to a Power Xpert Gateway to translate Modbus-based information from the meter into HTML-based Web pages that are accessible from any standard Web browser. If you select a model with the Ethernet option, the meter can easily be monitored remotely via Power Xpert Software or another third-party monitoring system. With access to accurate, real-time information from IQ 150S/250S meters, Power Xpert Architecture can transform your power system into an integrated, agile system, and an easily managed entity that performs better and costs less. Table 3.2-6. Features of IQ 150S/250S Electronic Power Meters
Features IQ 150S

June 2012
Sheet 03 056
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IQ 250S

Instrumentation
Current, per phase Calculated neutral current Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) Frequency Minimum/maximum readings, I , V , PF, F, W, VAR, VA
Total Total Average

Total and per phase Total and per phase Average and per phase

Power
Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA) Power factor
Demand Methods
Block interval (xed, sliding) Current demand Real, reactive and apparent power demand
Total Total Total

Total and per phase Total and per phase Total and per phase

Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh) Real and reactive, net and positive and negative (Wh, VARh)
I/O
Pulse output
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0 RJ45 or 802.11b, Modbus TCP Optional Optional

Data Logging
2 MB for data logging
Alarming
Set point driven alarm

Designed for the User

When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, Eaton IQ 150S/250S meters t the bill. These ultra-compact meters are ideal for surface mounting next to a selected piece of equipment for energy monitoring. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, and offering a NEMA 12 enclosure and a large, easy-to-read faceplate, consistent with other Eaton meter models, these meters are designed with knockouts for easy retrot installation. Most meters in this class have small or dark displays that can be hard to see, especially from a distance. Eatons IQ 150S/250S meters have a large, bright red, three-line LED display, each line more than a half-inch tall. This display is very easy to read, even if the meter is installed at a height or distance. Using the keypad and menus on the local display, users can display a variety of electrical system values or program the meter.
Per phase only. If congured for Ethernet, RS-485 not available.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 057

IQ 150S/250S Series
3.2-13

Table 3.2-7. IQ 150S/250S Electronic Meter Technical Information
Description Specications 5A nominal, 10A maximum 1A nominal, 2A maximum 10 seconds 3 seconds 1 second Full scale to any CT ratio 0.005 VA per phase maximum at 11A 0.1% of nominal 5 mA 1 mA #632 screws Description Specications 100 msec at 60 Hz 1 second at 60 Hz 90400 Vac at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc, universal AC/DC supply 16 VA maximum RS-485 960057,600 Bauds 01247 8-bit, no parity Modbus ASCII, RTU, DNP 3.0 RJ45 or 802.11b (wireless) Modbus TCP 1 Form A 35 Ohms 350 Vdc 120 mA 350 mA (10 ms) 1 uA 3750 Vac
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 lbs H 7.90 x W 7.50 x D 3.10 inches 0.2% accuracy 0.2% accuracy Burst Surge withstand Electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment 22CZ
Current Inputs
Class 10 Class 2 Fault Current Withstand 20A for: 60A for: 100A for: Programmable current Burden Pickup Current Class 10 Class 2 Connections Screw terminal
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA All other parameters
Power Supply
Burden
Standard Serial Communications Format

Connection type Communications port baud rate Communications port address Data format Protocols
Voltage Inputs
Range Line-to-neutral Line-to-line Programmable voltage range Supported systems 20416 Vac (IQ150S), 20576 Vac (IQ250S) 20721 Vac Full scale to any PT ratio 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye, 2 element delta, four-wire delta systems 1 megohm/phase 0.36 VA/phase maximum at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V 7-pin, 0.400-inch screw terminal block, AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm2)
Optional Ethernet Communications Format

Connection type Protocols
KYZ Pulse

Weight Basic unit
Isolation
Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Faceplate rating 20 to +70C 20 to +70C To 95% RH noncondensing NEMA 12 rms Sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on all channels
Compliance
IEC 687 ANSI C12.20 ANSI C62.41 ANSI (IEEE) C37.90.1 UL/cUL
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Sensing Method
Voltage, current Power
Note: Specications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, rmware version and product model. Please refer to User Manual for detailed specications.
CA08104001E

IQ 150S/250S Series
June 2012
Sheet 03 058
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Wiring Diagram
Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE Direct
Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE with PTS
Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct
Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct
Figure 3.2-21. IQ 150S/250S Wiring Diagram
Installation Diagram

7.53 (191.3) 3.70 (94.0)
Closed
5.60 (142.2)
19 20 21
Lockable Revenue Seal 0.50 (12.7)
Mounting Plate
7.90 (200.7)
7.90 (200.7)
5.95 (151.1)
Antenna Length: 4.40 (111.8)
3.11 (79.0)
Figure 3.2-22. IQ 150S/250S Installation
Figure 3.2-23. IQ 150S/250S Meter Dimensions

June 2012
Sheet 03 059

IQ 150S/250S Series
3.2-15
Table 3.2-8. IQ 150S/250S Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1
Model Series 150 = Energy 250 = Energy plus Meter Type S = Self-enclosed meter Frequency 5 = 50 Hz system 6 = 60 Hz system Power Supply 1 = 90400 Vac/dc Current Input 1 = 1A secondary 5 = 5A secondary Communication 1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485) 2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485) or TCP(RJ45) or 802.11b (Wi-Fi)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
June 2012
Sheet 03 060
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter IILow Cost Multipoint Meter
usage for the purposes of monthly energy cost allocation. As such, its customers include apartment complex owners, ofce owners, tenant building managers, and meter reading companies. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II can measure any of the following number of circuits: 16 single-phase, two-wire (single-pole) Eight single-phase, three-wire (two-pole) Five three-phase, four-wire (three-pole)
Measures bus voltage Front panel LEDs provide status of unit and communication activity Meets rigid ANSI C12.1 and IEC 61036 accuracy specications for revenue meters UL listed under UL 8N83 Current sensors are UL-recognized components Can be directly mounted in a UL-approved switchboard
Communication Capabilities
With the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter IIs built-in communication capabilities, remote meter reading and monitoring functions can be integrated into both new and retrot applications.
Eatons IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is a revenue class electronic submetering device that can be mounted in switchboards. When mounted in a switchboard, the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II provides customers with an integrated power distribution and energy metering solution that saves space, reduces installation labor and lowers total cost.
Any of the circuits listed can be mixed provided the total number of Current Sensors does not exceed 16. The meter provides instantaneous (kW), demand and cumulative (kWh) measurements for each load. The unit also provides interval energy data logging, time of use energy registers, coincident peak demand storage and scheduled remote meter reading data in non-volatile memory. Bus voltage is also measured. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II uses highly accurate Current Sensors to monitor each load. Current Sensors can be provided in a number of ratings and are supplied with integral cable and plug-in connector. All Current Sensors are self-protecting in the event of an open circuit condition under load. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II automatically detects the rating of each Current Sensor that is connected. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is UL listed as a Class 1 device.
Eaton INCOM communications.
Software Compatibility
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is fully compatible with the Eaton PowerNet software platform including the E-Bill cost allocation software The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II can be used as part of an electrical energy monitoring and billing system The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II can be remotely monitored via Eatons FetchIT software package The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is compatible with third-party software platforms and interface devices
General Description
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II provides a cost-effective solution for residential or commercial metering installations. Typical installations include:

High-rise buildings Government institutions Universities and campuses Ofce buildings Medical facilities Apartment and condominium complexes Airports Shopping malls Industrial parks Mixed-use facilities
For additional information on Power Xpert Power Management Software, E-Bill and FetchIT software, see Tab 2 Power Management Systems Software.
Features

Conguration
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II provides cost-effective and space saving energy submetering for a wide variety of applications. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is ideally suited for energy metering of multi-tenant buildings. It can also be used to monitor energy to any load up to 600 volts for energy billing or cost allocation. Built-in communication capabilities enable an IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II to be networked to a local PC or via modem to a remote master PC or energy service provider. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is ideal for multi-tenant applications in which property managers are interested in measuring tenant energy

Multipoint electrical energy metering Built-in communication interface Flexible metering conguration Monitors single-phase and threephase loads from 120600 Vac in three voltage ranges Monitors power in watts and energy in watthours for up to 16 current sensors Very low-prole design, less than 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) in height Energy values stored in non-volatile memory Stores extensive energy prole data for each metering point. Can be used to identify coincidental peak demand contribution Space-saving stacking design allows two units to be mounted together Supports Time-of-Use energy monitoring Demand interval adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II is fully congurable using Power Xpert or free PowerPort conguration software PowerPort can be downloaded free from either the Internet or the Eaton intranet Each IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II can be congured for up to 16 metering points in any combination of single-phase and three-phase metering points PowerPort is used to assign current sensors to metering points Either PowerPort or Power Xpert software can be used to congure the built-in data logs for energy proling Both Power Xpert software and PowerPort can be used to set up the Time-of-Use energy registers and the automatic meter reading schedule
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 061

3.2-17
Wiring
The Current Sensor cable is rated 600 volts and is recognized by UL as Class 1 wiring IMPCABLE used for INCOM communication between devices is rated 600 volts and is recognized by UL as Class 1 wiring Consult TD17513 Wiring Specication Base Rules for detailed information on proper installation and termination of INCOM communications network cable
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Easy to Install
Approved by UL for mounting inside switchboards Stacking design allows two units to be mounted in a switchboard using less that 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) of vertical space For retrot applications, the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II can be mounted in an external auxiliary enclosure Quick-connect terminals for Current Sensors, INCOM communications and bus voltages make wiring the unit quick and easy
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter IICurrent Sensor
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Voltages
Three models are available, each covering a specic voltage range. Model 1120/240/208V: 120V single-phase 120/240V single-phase 120/208V three-phase Y Model 2277/480V: 277V single-phase 277/480V three-phase Y Model 3347/600V: 347V single-phase 347/600V three-phase Y
Metering Accuracy
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II meets the rigid ANSI C12.1 and IEC 610361.0% metering accuracy requirements.


UL listed under le number E166079 CSA approved Complies with UL 991 radiated susceptibility requirements Third-party tested for ANSI C12.1 (1%) accuracy Complies with FCC emission standard Part 15, Subpart B

<2% error at 1% of full scale <1% error at 1.5% of full scale <1% error at 90% to 110% of rated voltage <1% error at 57 and 63 Hz <2% error at 0.5 lagging PF
Environmental
Operating temperature: 20 to +50C Humidity: 0% to 95%
Current Sensors

050A 070A 0125A 0200A 0400A 05A for use with an external current transformer with 5A secondary. (ANSI C12 Class 10) (Catalog number: CS005)
Power
There are three power supply options: 120 Vac, 57 to 63 Hz, 6 VA 277 Vac, 57 to 63 Hz, 6 VA 347 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, 6 VA
CA08104001E

Intelligent Electronic Metering Equipment EMC
Compliant with FCC rules and regulations, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B equipment Compliant with UL 991 radiated susceptibility requirements
Swiltchboards with one or more IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
June 2012
Sheet 03 062
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Communications
INCOM communication network supports up to 1,000 devices up to distances of 10,000 ft (3048m) INCOM communication speed of 9600 bps
Energy Value Storage

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50A current sensor: 214,748,364 kWh 70A current sensor: 300,647,710 kWh 125A current sensor: 536,870,912 kWh 200A current sensor: 858,993,459 kWh 400A current sensor: 1,717,986,916 kWh 5A external CT sensor: 8,589,934 x CT primary rating in kWh
Optional Local Display Module
Modem Remote Billing OR Local PC
Figure 3.2-24. Typical Building Installation Reduced Wiring and Cost: Because Current Sensors are provided with pre-wired leads and connectors for each load in the switchboard, there is 60% less eld wiring to be performed on site, greatly reducing cost, time and potential for errors in the eld. High Accuracy: ANSI and IEC revenuegrade accuracy for each metering point permits the facility owner to charge each tenant condently. Communications Capability: INCOM communications is built into each IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II for chaining them together on a robust, eld-proven, communications architecture. INCOM can be used to communicate to the complete line of Eatons metering products and is also useful for those projects requiring local communications to Power Xpert Software. In addition, Table 3.2-10 lists several Gateway products to enable communications to RS-232 Ethernet or RS-485 with Modbus protocol. Time-of-Use Metering: The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II will keep track of four different utility rates for four changes of rate seasons with separate weekday, weekend and holiday rates. The Time-of-Use logging supports eight rate changes per day and also stores the peak demand for each rate period. All Time-of-Use information is stored in non-volatile memory. Automatic Meter Reading: The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II can be congured for easy remote reading by saving just the needed energy information in a separate memory location. This location can be set up to save all of the necessary energy data for a periodic monthly read with a set day of the month and time of that day. Additionally, the user can program up to six specic dates and times to save meter readings. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II then stores the total energy and peak demand for each Time-of-Use rate for each meter point so that all of this information can be effortlessly downloaded to a remote system. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II saves all of this data for up to 13 months in nonvolatile memory.
Product Feature Overview

The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II offers low-cost metering of kW and kWh for multiple tenants of residential and commercial ofce buildings for one- to three-phase voltage loads not exceeding 347/600V. The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II contains INCOM networking to chain together multiple meters in locations throughout the facility. See Figure 3.2-24 for a typical apartment building layout.
Key Features
Reduced Equipment Space: The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II consumes 80% less wall space compared to glass bulb meters that must be individually or group mounted independent of the loadcenter. By installing the meter in the loadcenter and providing Current Sensors to each load within the switchboard, less real estate is occupied, not only in the ground oor, but at individual tenant oor spaces. A typical integrated distribution and metering solution using the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II uses 45% less wall space than separately mounted submeters.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 063

Intelligent Electronic Metering Equipment
3.2-19
Product Selection
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II, Current Sensors and other accessories can be ordered from Eaton distributors. Refer to the following catalog numbers when ordering. Table 3.2-9. IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Products
Product Description IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 120V with INCOM IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 277V with INCOM IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 347V with INCOM Current Sensor5A, quantity 3 Current Sensor50A, quantity 6 Current Sensor70A, quantity 6 Current Sensor125A, quantity 3 Current Sensor200A, quantity 3 Current Sensor400A, quantity 3 Current Sensor Extension4 ft (1.2m), quantity 6 Current Sensor Extension8 ft (2.4m), quantity 3 Current Sensor Extension16 ft (4.9m), quantity 3 Catalog Number IQMESIIN1 IQMESIIN2 IQMESIIN3 CS005 CS050 CS070 CS125 CS200 CS400 CSET04 CSET08 CSET16
Mounting Dimensions
0.19 (4.8) REF REF 1.25 (31.8) 11.25 (285.8) REF 8.74 (222.0) REF
i
0.22 (5.6) REF
ii 1 2
7.56 REF (192.0)
7.50 REF (190.5)
3 4
8x 0.201
0.28 REF (7.1)
10.97 REF (278.6)
5 6 7 8 9 10
7.94 REF (201.7)
Note: Total sensor lead length must not exceed 20 ft (6m).
Support products for the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II include the Digital Input Module (DIM), the Local Display Module, IMPCABLE and a number of communications converters, as described in Table 3.2-10. Table 3.2-10. IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Support Products
Product Description INCOM communication cable, 1000 ft (305m), 600V insulation Subnetwork master local display allows local access to energy information (120 Vac) Subnetwork master local display allows local access to energy information (24 Vac/Vdc) INCOM to RS-232 Communication Gateway Power Xpert Gateway 200E Power Xpert Gateway 400E Power Xpert 600E (data logging and e-mail) Power Xpert Gateway 800E INCOM to RS-485 Communication Gateway with Modbus Protocol Digital Input Modulesupports four pulse Inputs or eight status Inputs Catalog Number IMPCABLE LDISP120 LDISP24 MINTII PXG200E PXG400E PXG600E PXG800E MMINT DIM
Figure 3.2-25. Single UnitFront View
11 12 13 14 15
All of the gateway products in Table 3.2-10 above can support the conversion of multiple IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II meters to another communication network. The MINT II can support up to 1000 units. The mMINT supports up to 32 units. The PXG400 and PXG600A can support up to 64 units (sum of meter modules and current sensors). The Digital Input Module (DIM) can be used to totalize pulse outputs from water meters, gas meters, steam meters or even old electrical meters with KYZ pulse outputs. The DIM can then be connected to the same INCOM network as the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II and this information can then be used in Power Management software packages.
.0478 THK.
Figure 3.2-26. Single UnitSide View

11.87 REF (301.5)
16 17
1.49 REF (37.8)
18 19
Figure 3.2-27. Single UnitTop View
20 21

Intelligent Electronic Metering Equipment
June 2012
Sheet 03 064
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Mounting Dimensions (Continued)

11.25 (285.8) 0.19 (4.8) 1.25 (31.8) 8.74 (222.0) 11.90 (302.3) 1.49 (37.8) 2.99 (75.9)
0.22 (5.6)
Figure 3.2-30. Double UnitTop View

7.56 (192.0) 7.50 (190.5)
0.28 (7.1)
0.201 x8 10.97 (278.6) R.19 x4
Figure 3.2-28. Double UnitFront View
8 9 10 11 12
7.94 (201.7)
Figure 3.2-31. Current Sensor Dimensions Table 3.2-11. Current Sensor Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sensor CS005 CS050 CS070 CS125 CS200 CS400 H 2.28 (57.9) 1.55 (39.4) 2.10 (53.4) W T ID L 2.60 (66.0) 0.60 (15.2) N/A 56.00 (1422.4) 1.18 (30.0) 0.50 (12.7) 0.32 (8.1) 36.00 (914.4) 1.73 (44.0) 0.58 (14.7) 0.55 (14.0) 36.00 (914.4)
2.10 (53.4) 1.73 (44.0) 0.58 (14.7) 0.55 (14.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 3.06 (77.7) 2.69 (68.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.25 (31.8) 45.00 (1143.0) 4.33 (110.0) 3.42 (86.9) 1.08 (27.4) 1.50 (38.1) 72.00 (1828.8)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0.0478 THK.
Figure 3.2-29. Double UnitSide View
June 2012
Sheet 03 065

IQ Energy and Power Sentinel
3.2-21
IQ Energy Sentinel and Power Sentinel
IQ Sentinels
IQ Sentinels are microprocessorbased submeters, designed to monitor power, energy, currents, voltages, power factor, frequency, apparent power and reactive power. They represent an alternative to installing separate wattmeters, watthour meters, watt demand meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and more. IQ Sentinels are available with two different capabilities:
The Power Sentinel version that monitors watts, watthour, watt demand, currents, voltages, power factor, frequency, apparent power and reactive power
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Key advantages include unmatched savings in space, lower installation costs, and the capability to communicate data readings in a variety of ways. IQ Sentinels with built-in CTs and communications have the added benet of greater overall system accuracy. Conventional metering often is less accurate since external CTs and separate transducers may each have inaccuracies of 1% or more.
IQ Sentinel
The Energy Sentinel version that monitors watts, watthour and watt demand
Table 3.2-12. IQ Energy and Power Sentinel Features

IQ Energy Sentinel Features
Monitors (accuracy stated full scale)
IQ Power Sentinel Features

Monitors (accuracy stated full scale)
IQ Sentinel Benets
One device replaces multiple meters
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Kilowatts 1.0% Kilowatts demand 1.0% Kilowatt hour 1.0% Built-in CTs version up to 400A or external CTs version up to 4000A Breaker, panel or DIN rail mounted Powered directly off the line Built-in communication capability Address set by DIP switches Communication at 9600 baud Noise immune INCOM protocol Choice of operator interfaces Subnetwork master local display Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Power Management Energy Billing software Power Management software UL and CSA listed
AC line current (each phase) 0.5% AC line-to-line voltage 0.5% AC line-to-neutral voltages 0.5% Watts (each phase and total) 1.0% VARs (each phase and total) 1.0% VA (each phase and total) 1.0% Apparent power factor (each phase and total) 0.5% Displacement power factor (each phase and total) 0.5% Demand (total watts) 1.0% Frequency 0.5% Watthours 1.0% Built-in CTs version up to 400A Panel or DIN rail mounted Powered directly off the line Built-in communication capability Address set by DIP switches Communication at 9600 baud Noise immune INCOM protocol Choice of operator interfaces Subnetwork master local display Breaker Interface Module Power Management Energy Billing software Power Management software UL and CSA listed CE mark
and/or transducers Improved system accuracy Savings in product cost Savings in space Savings in installation cost No external power source is needed Permits remote monitoring and interconnection with programmable logic controllers and building management systems. For more information, see section on Power Management Software Systems Designed to interface directly with Power Management Software Energy Billing software Flexibilitydisplays what is needed where it is needed Power Management Software
Note: The Power Sentinel is available only in the Universal Mount version with internal CTs.
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 066
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IQ Sentinels (Continued)
Eatons IQ Sentinels provide a unique cost-effective method to implement energy submetering at lower levels in the distribution system. The ability to monitor power distribution systems down to the machine or process level at an industrial facility has become essential to provide key benets such as to verify the accuracy of the utility bill, identify and track energy usage to the loads that consume it, develop a facility energy prole to establish a baseline, allocate energy costs to create accountability and so on. An optional door-mounted interface, the Subnetwork Master Local Display, is available to display the energy parameters monitored by the IQ Sentinels. Submetering application examples for the IQ Sentinels include energy demand monitoring, product cost analysis, process machine tool efciency and productivity improvement, and energy-cost allocation or tenant billing for commercial, industrial, recreational and residential facilities.
Note: For customer-billing applications, consult local utility for metering requirements.
The IQ Energy Sentinel is available in three different package versions: breaker mounted, universal breaker with internal CTs, and universal breaker with external CTs. Designed for mounting on Series C circuit breakers used in Eaton assemblies such as:

Universal Mount with Internal CTs
Pow-R-Line four panelboards feeder circuits Power-R-Line C switchboards feeder circuits Motor control centers and enclosed control with circuit breaker disconnectsstarter or feeder circuits Enclosed motor control Enclosed circuit breakers Pow-R-Way III Bus Plugs with circuit breaker disconnects
Universal Mount Applications

The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinel with internal CTs includes integral 400A CTs and may be applied on loads up to 400A. The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinels with internal CTs may be used wherever breaker mounting is not feasible or possible. The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinel with provisions for external CTs may be applied on loads up to 4000A. They are usually used for monitoring loads larger than 400A, on power cable sizes larger than 500 kcmil or on circuits containing more than one conductor per phase.
Breaker Mount Applications New Equipment
IQ Power Sentinel
Like the IQ Energy Sentinel, the IQ Power Sentinel is a highly accurate microprocessor-based submeter designed to monitor power and energy. In addition to watts, watthour, and watt-demand, the IQ power sentinel monitors current, voltage, reactive power (VARs), apparent power (VA), power factor and frequency. The IQ Power Sentinel offers an accurate and economic alternative to separate meters and transducers.
F-Frame Breaker with IQ Sentinel
Commercial applications include energy-cost allocation within convention halls, ofce buildings, shopping malls, hospitals, warehouses and storage facilities. Industrial applications include departmental billing and process/assembly line energy cost analysis. IQ Energy Sentinels may be substituted for watt transducers when monitoring machine tool and equipment performance within plants. Recreational facilities include sports arenas, camping grounds, trailer parks and marinas. The IQ Sentinel may be applied on three-phase (three- or four-wire), as well as single-phase (three-wire) systems. IQ Sentinels may be applied on either 50 or 60 Hz systems.
Retrotting
The space-saving design characteristics of the breaker mount IQ Energy Sentinels allow them to be added to existing Eaton circuit breakers at any time...often with no additional space or modications required. Or they may be installed when upgrading from older circuit breakers...often with no additional space or modications required.
The IQ Power Sentinel is only available in the universal mount with internal CTs up to 400A.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 067

3.2-23
Eaton Breaker Mount

Eatons breaker mount IQ Energy Sentinel installs in less than 10 minutes on the load side of a Eaton Series C F-Frame (150A), J-Frame (250A), or K-Frame (400A) circuit breakers.
Note: The Power Sentinel is available only in the Universal Mount version with internal CTs.
Voltage Tangs Transmit LED
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ground/Neutral Connection
DIP Switch Address
Communications Connections
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Energy Sentinel Features
Universal Mount with Internal CTs(UI)

The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel with internal CTs may be panel-mounted or DIN rail mounted on disconnects or other circuits up to 400A. A pull-apart terminal block is provided on the device for connection of the system voltage reference wiring.
Note: Only the Universal Mount with Internal CTs is available in both IQ Power Sentinel and IQ Energy Sentinel versions. The location of the ground/neutral connection differs on Breaker Mount IQ Energy Sentinels from the location of the ground/neutral connection on Universal Mount IQ Sentinels. Incorrect wiring to the ground/ neutral and communications connections may result in accuracy and communication errors.
Communications Connections Communications Shield Connection
Universal Mount for External CTs(UE)

The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel for external CTs may be panel-mounted or DIN rail mounted on circuits up to 4000A. A pull-apart terminal block is provided on the device for connection of the system voltage reference wiring as well as another terminal block for connection to the users existing 5A secondary CTs that may range in standard ratios from 25:5 up to 4000:5.
Note: If the device will be disconnected without interruption of the monitored load, the use of a CT shorting block is advised.
Communications Connections
Communications Shield Connection
CT Terminal Block
18 19
Ground/Neutral Connection Voltage Terminal Block
Ground/Neutral Connection Voltage Terminal Block
20 21
Energy and Power Sentinel Features
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 068
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 3.2-13. Energy Sentinel
Current Input Current Range: 1% to 125% of current rating Burden: 1 VA Voltage Input Voltage Range: 20% of voltage rating Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Power Factor Range All (1 to +1) Communications Protocol: INCOM Speed: 9600 baud Compatibility: Power Management Software compatible Environmental Conditions Operating temperature: 25 to 70C (13 to 158F) Storage temperature: 40 to 85C (40 to 185F) Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity noncondensing Dimensions D x W x H in Inches (mm) F 3.20 x 4.12 x 1.30 (81.3 x 104.6 x 33.0); CT window size 0.59 (15.0) J 4.04 x 4.12 x 1.28 (102.6 x 104.6 x 32.5); CT window size 0.77 (19.6) K 4.04 x 5.31 x 1.25 (102.6 x 134.9 x 31.8); CT window size 0.96 (24.4) UI 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2); hole clearance 1.17 (29.7) UE 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2) Weight in Lbs (kg): F 0.65 (0.30) J 0.69 (0.31) K 0.87 (0.39) UI 1.10 (0.50) UE 1.10 (0.50) Other Specications UL File No. E64983 CSA File No. LR106359-1

Table 3.2-14. Power Sentinel

Nominal Full Scale Current 400A Current Accuracy Range 1%125% of full scale Current Overload Capability 250% of full scale Power Factors All Nominal Operating Line-to-Line Voltages G01 208 G03 480 G02 400 G04 600 Maximum Operating Voltage Fluctuation G01 20% G03 10% G02 10% G04 10% Maximum Power Consumption G01 2 VA G03 5 VA G02 5 VA G04 6 VA Frequency 50/60 Hz Communication Protocol: INCOM Speed: 9600 Baud Compatibility: Power Xpert Power Management software compatible Dimensions D x W x H (inches) 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2) Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) 1.10 lbs (0.50 kg) Environment Indoor use only Maximum Operating Altitude 2000 meters Operating Temperatures 25 to 70C 13 to 158F Storage Temperatures 40 to 85C 40 to 185F Maximum Relative Humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31C decreasing linearly to 50% at 70C Transient Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category III Pollution Degree 2 (IEC 664) UL File Number E185559
Phase A Phase A
Neutral Phase C
Phase C
Three-Phase Star, Four-Wire, Earthed Neutral.
Three-Phase Star, Four-Wire, NonEarthed Neutral.
Single-Phase, Three-Wire, Earthed Mid-Point (Connect to A and C Phases).
Two-Phase Star, Three-Wire, Earthed Neutral (Connect to A and C Phases).
40C (standard) maximum for Series C circuit breakers. Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy Sentinels only.
Three-Phase Star, Three-Wire
System Voltage Considerations (Application Note)

The Ground (GND) terminal of the IQ Energy Sentinel should be connected to the ground bus or other non-current- carrying ground with 600V rated wire to ensure accuracy.
Three-Phase Star, Three-Wire, Earthed Neutral Point.
Three-Phase Delta, Three-Wire
Three-Phase Open Delta, Four-Wire, Earthed Junction.
Note: Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy Sentinels only.
Figure 3.2-32. Acceptable System Congurations
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 069

3.2-25
Table 3.2-15. IQ Energy Sentinels Catalog Information

Description For F-Frame breakers For F-Frame breakers For F-Frame breakers For F-Frame breakers For J-Frame breakers For J-Frame breakers For J-Frame breakers For J-Frame breakers For K-Frame breakers For K-Frame breakers For K-Frame breakers For K-Frame breakers Universal with internal CTs Universal with internal CTs Universal with internal CTs Universal with internal CTs Universal for external CTs Universal for external CTs Universal for external CTs Universal for external CTs Voltage RatingVac 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 480, 480Y/277 600, 600Y/347 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 480, 480Y/277 600, 600Y/347 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 480, 480Y/277 600, 600Y/347 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 480, 480Y/277 600, 600Y/347 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 480, 480Y/277 600, 600Y/347 Current Rating Maximum Amperes 150 150 150 150 250 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 4000 4000 4000 4000 Catalog Number IQESF208 IQESF400 IQESF480 IQESF600 IQESJ208 IQESJ400 IQESJ480 IQESJ600 IQESK208 IQESK400 IQESK480 IQESK600 IQESUI208 IQESUI400 IQESUI480 IQESUI600 IQESUE208 IQESUE400 IQESUE480 IQESUE600
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table 3.2-16. IQ Power Sentinels Catalog Information

Description Universal with internal CTs Universal with internal CTs Universal with internal CTs Universal with internal CTs Voltage RatingVac 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 480, 480Y/277 600, 600Y/347 Current Rating Maximum Amperes 400 400 400 400 Catalog Number IQPSUI208 IQPSUI400 IQPSUI480 IQPSUI600
Table 3.2-17. Terminal, Cable and Wiring Guidelines

Sentinel F-Frame J-Frame K-Frame Universal with internal CTs System voltage reference wiring Current transformer wiring Ground reference wiring Communications wiring Eaton Series C Terminal 624B100G02, G17, G18, G19 T250KB, TA250KB T350K, TA350KB Wire Size Single Conductor #141/0, #44/0, #44/01, #141/0 AWG #4350 kcmil #250500 kcmil #250500 kcmil #24#10 AWG #12 AWG (maximum) #22#12 AWG (minimum 600V rated) Eaton IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 070
i ii 1 2 3 4

F-Frame Energy Sentinels
0.25 Typical (6.4) 0.75 (19.1) 1.30 (33.0)
J-Frame Energy Sentinels

0.25 Typical (6.4) 1.25 (31.8)
K-Frame Energy Sentinels

0.25 Typical (6.4) 1.10 (27.9) 1.25 (31.8)
1.28 (32.5)
4.04 (102.6)
5
3.20 (81.3)
1.17 Typical (29.7) 0.59 (15.0) 1.38 (34.9) 1.38 (34.9) 1.38 (34.9) 2.06 (52.3)
0.90 Typical (22.9) 0.77 (19.6)
1.17 Typical (29.7) 4.04 (102.6) 0.96 (24.4)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Figure 3.2-33. IQ Sentinel
1.72 (43.7) 1.17 (29.7) Diameter 1.36 (34.5) 0.14 (3.6) Radius
1.38 (34.9)
1.38 (34.9) 2.06 (52.3)
1.72 (43.7)
1.72 (43.7) 2.66 (67.5) 5.31 (134.9)
4.12 (104.6)
4.12 (104.6)
Universal with Internal CTs Energy and Power Sentinels

1.80 (45.7) 1.71 (43.4) 1.80 (45.7)
Universal with External CTs Energy and Power Sentinels

1.80 (45.7) 1.71 (43.4) 1.80 (45.7)
0.14 (3.6) Radius 3.00 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
2.60 (66.0) 5.31 (134.9)
1.36 (34.5)
1.36 (34.5)
2.60 (66.0) 5.31 (134.9)
1.36 (34.5)
4.36 (110.7)
4.36 (110.7)
1.72 (43.7) 2.66 (67.5)
20 21
June 2012
Sheet 03 071

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
3.2-27
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module (PM3)
Real power (kW)total and per phase Reactive power (kVAR)total and per phase Apparent power (kVA)total and per phase Power factortotal and per phase Real energy (WHr)forward, reverse and net Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward, reverse and net Apparent energy (VAHr)forward, reverse and net
Communications
INCOM and Modbus RTU communications Shielded-twisted pair communications Daisy-chaining of multiple units Web-based communications available through a Power Xpert Gateway TX and RX communication diagnostic LEDs
Contact Eaton for availability.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Accuracy
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of reading Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1 Revenue Grade Accuracy: ANSI C12.1
Monitoring
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
General Description
The Power Monitoring and Metering Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on communications module that mounts directly to the load side of three-pole molded-case circuit breakers, similar to an earth leakage module. The PM3 adds revenue accurate power metering and breaker status monitoring to new and/or existing Series C and Series G breakers. Regardless of the type of trip unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic), the PM3 can be applied in applications where power metering, circuit breaker monitoring and/or communications is essential. The PM3 is extremely exible and can be used in main breaker or feeder breaker applications. The automatic voltage sensing means that the same PM3 module can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac applications. It can also be installed in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing (CBA) applications.
Breaker status Open/close statusthru breaker auxiliary contact Tripped statusthru breaker bell alarm contact Unit healthashing status LED when module is powered
Metering Module
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the circuit breaker voltage for applications 480 Vac and below. External control power is not required for these applications. However, an auxiliary 24 Vdc external power input is included for applications requiring communications capability even when the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc auxiliary power is required.
7 8 9 10 11 12
Breaker must include auxiliary contact and bell alarm contact accessory.
Product Selection
Table 3.2-18. PM3 Product Selection
Breaker Frame Series C, F-Frame (225A Frame) Line Voltage 208, 240, 480 208, 240, 480, 600 Series G, J-Frame (250A Frame) 208, 240, 480 208, 240, 480, 600 Series C, K-Frame (400A Frame) 208, 240, 480 Power Supply Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power required 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Communications Catalog Number INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM PM3F3225C02V48M PM3F3225C02V60M PM3J3250C02V48M PM3J3250C02V60M PM3L3630C02V48M
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

The PM3 provides the following metering, monitoring and communications functions:
208, 240, 480, 600 Series G, L-Frame (600A Frame) 208, 240, 480 208, 240, 480, 600
INCOM INCOM INCOM
PM3L3630C02V60M PM3L3630C02V48M PM3L3630C02V60M
Metering
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg) Phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg) Phase-to-neutral voltages (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
Contact Eaton for Modbus RTU availability.
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 072
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 073
Advanced and Electronic Metering Eaton Electronic Meters

IQ Analyzer6000 Series
3.3-1
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series 6400 Series without Waveform Display, 6600 Series with Waveform Display
General Description
Applications
Monitoring of over 150 electrical parameters Power quality management Energy management
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IQ Analyzer 6600 Series

rms sensing Phase, neutral and ground currents Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N, N-G Power: real, reactive, apparent (system and per phase) Frequency Power factor: apparent and displacement (system and per phase) Energy and demand (forward, reverse, net) real, reactive apparent at four different utility rates Individual current and voltage harmonics: magnitude, phase angle % THD: current and voltage Waveform capture Minimum/maximum values Event logging/disturbance recording ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5% revenue metering accuracy, ANSI C12.16, IEC687 Class 0.5% Currents and voltages: 0.20% Power, energy and demand: 0.40% Frequency: 0.01 Hz Power factor: 0.80% Accuracy maintained from 3%800% of full scale and from 0.50 to 1.00 to +0.50 power factor
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Communications
Optional interface capability to computer network for data collection, storage and/or printout via the Eaton Power Management software.
Features
IQ AnalyzerComprehensive Electrical Distribution Monitoring
The IQ Analyzer is a complete solution to monitor and manage all aspects of the electrical distribution system. Its high-performance metering exceeds ANSI C12.16 (0.5%) specication for revenue meters and meets ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5%, provides quality true rms readings through the 50th harmonic, accurately measures nonsinusoidal waveforms up to a 3.0 crest factor, and displays even and odd multiples of the fundamental current and voltage through the 50th harmonic. Both magnitude and phase angle of the harmonics are displayed.
Note: For denition of power quality terms, see Page 3.3-7.

Accuracy

Graphical reverse-mode LCD display with LED backlight Up to seven lines of information Height: 10.25 inches (260.4 mm) Width: 6.72 inches (170.7 mm) Depth: 4.70 inches (119.4 mm) without PONI, 5.83 inches (148.1 mm) with PONI Membrane faceplate NEMA 3R and 12 rated UL listed, File E62791, NKCR File E185559 (CE versions) cUL listed #1010.1 C22.2 CE mark EN61010-1 EN50082-2 Measurement Canada Electricity Meter AE-0782 CSA approved
Listings/Certications

The unique operator interface, which includes a reverse-mode LCD display, easy-to-use Meter Menu screens and detailed Analysis screens, is designed to allow a wealth of real-time and recorded information to be accessed easily by an operator. All programming can be accomplished through the faceplate or the communications port. The comprehensive online Help feature provides useful information on device operation, programming and troubleshooting.
CA08104001E
3.3-2

IQ Analyzer6000 Series Disturbance Information
With the communications option and Eatons Power Management software and Waveform Display software, a Waveform Analysis will construct waveforms of up to 56 cycles of all currents and voltages (including neutral and ground) to help troubleshoot undervoltage/sag and overvoltage/swell conditions. (See CBEMA Trend Logging section.) By programming a reset threshold, the duration of the voltage disturbance can also be indicated. The IQ Analyzer 6600 series with Graphic Waveform Display offers the ability to view the captured waveform right at the device. The 6600 series also offers the ability to detect and capture sub-cycle voltage disturbances.
June 2012
Sheet 03 074
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

The IQ Analyzer is equipped with on-board logging capability, which includes the ability to log a total of 24 parameters with intervals ranging from 0.13 seconds (every 8 cycles) to twice a week (5040 minutes). The trending function can begin immediately or can be triggered upon receipt of a discrete input into the IQ Analyzer. On-board logging provides a cost-effective means of distributed data storage, where realtime communications may not be feasible or for applications where data storage redundancy is desired. Four trend data logs are stored in non-volatile memory aboard the IQ Analyzer and can be retrieved at the display or via communications for viewing using Eaton software.

Event Logging
The IQ Analyzer will store in nonvolatile memory the time and reason for last 504 events. These events can be viewed from the graphical display or accessed via communications. In addition to all of the meter events listed in the Event Conditions paragraph on Page 3.3-4, the following events are entered into the event log. Time and date of: Alarms Meter power up All resets All setting changes Communications established or lost

Extensive Harmonic Distortion Analysis

Current and voltage distortion data are displayed at the device and are accessible through the communications port. This includes % THD, K-Factor, crest factor, CBEMA factor, and both magnitudes and phase angles of all harmonics through the 50th. A snapshot sample of this information may be activated by user commands, discrete inputs or programmable thresholds to capture distortion data during conditions of real interest. To help eliminate nuisance alarms, harmonic distortion information can be captured and relay outputs activated when THD exceeds a programmable percentage of fundamental or a programmable magnitude (e.g., amperes) threshold.
Event logging is another powerful troubleshooting tool within the IQ Analyzer.
Time-of-Use Metering
The IQ Analyzer offers the ability to store energy usage data for time of use revenue metering. It can be programmed for any combination of weekday, Saturday, Sunday, 22 holidays, 8 seasons, 32 schedules, and 10 time periods per schedule. The IQ Analyzer will keep track of the following parameters for four different utility rates:

Up to 24 parameters with storage capacity for up to 90,000 data points Up to 234 days of data can be stored when recording a parameter every 15 minutes Trends 1, 2 and 3 can save data on a discrete contact input Trend 4 can save data on a power quality or meter event Minimum and maximum recording (min./max. three-phase average current, max. IG, min./max. threephase average VLL and VLN, max. VNG, max. system watts, vars and VA, min./max. apparent and displacement PF). Using this feature, minimum and maximums reached during each trend interval are recorded
Extensive I/O and Communications Capability

One analog and three digital inputs are provided to interface with sensors and transducers. Three analog outputs and four relay contacts are furnished to share data with PLCs and control systems and to actuate alarms and control relays. Terminals are captive clamp type and nger safe. With the communications option, the device can be remotely monitored, controlled and programmed.
Ratings

ITIC (formally CBEMA) Trend Logging

The IQ Analyzer can be congured to store the necessary data so that PowerNet can display a sag or swell voltage event on the industry standard ITIC (formerly CBEMA) curve for predictive maintenance and troubleshooting. This application uses the IQ Analyzer waveform capture for high-speed events along with historical trend logging for longer term voltage disturbances. Once this data is uploaded to a PC running the Power Management Software Event Viewer, the information is analyzed, displayed and stored. Automatic uploading of ITIC events can be selected in PowerNet. A three-phase event will be correctly displayed as a single point on the ITIC curve.
Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600V CT ratios selectable from 5: 5A to 10,000: 5A Standard 120/600 Vac line Three-phase power supply module, 100600 Vac Separate source power supply module available, 100240 Vac or 100250 Vdc DC only separate source power module also available, 2448 Vdc
Watthours Varhours VA-hours Current demand Watt demand VA demand VAR demand
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 075

3.3-3
Displayed Information Features
All information is accessible at the device or through the communications port via Eatons Power Management Software Quality true rms readings through 50th harmonic Complies with the accuracy portion of ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5% revenue metering specication Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal waveforms with up to 3.0 crest factor Screens display auto ranging units, kilo units, mega units as needed 10-digit energy readings Displays multiple parameters at the same time Programmable custom screens
The IQ Analyzer allows a user to view commonly used parameters by scrolling through its LED indicator Meter Menu.
Harmonic Analysis Screens
i ii 1 2
Meter Menu Displayed Information
Current: Phases A, B, C, average Neutral Ground (separate CT) Voltage: Phases A-B, B-C, C-A, average Phases A-N, B-N, C-N, average Neutral-ground Power: Real (watts) Reactive (vars) Apparent (VA) Phases A, B, C and system
Harmonic Spectrum Available with Model 6600
Minimum and Maximum Values
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Current: Phases A, B, C, N, G Voltage: Phases A-B, B-C, C-A Phases A-N, B-N, C-N, N-G Power: Real (watts) Reactive (vars) Apparent (VA) Phases A, B, C and system Power factor: Apparent Displacement (three-phase and system) Frequency. THD (amperes, volts, and %): Current (phases A, B, C, N) Voltage (phases A-B, B-C, C-A, A-N, B-N, C-N)
Meter Menu Screens
Meter Menu
Energy (forward, reverse and net): Real (kWh) Reactive (kvarh) apparent (kVAh)no reverse or net Frequency, time and date Demand: System current (amperes) Systems real power (kW) System reactive power (kVAR) System apparent power (kVA)
Power factor: Phases A, B, C and system Displacement Apparent % THD current: Phases A, B, C, N % THD voltage: Phases A-B, B-C, C-A Phases A-N, B-N, C-N K-Factor ITIC (CBEMA) derating factor (displayed as Z) Crest factor Discrete input and output status Analog input reading CustomUser may program four screens to show any combination of seven Meter Menu parameters per screen
Examples of Meter Menu
All minimum/maximum values may be reset via reset pushbutton on faceplate, discrete input or communications command. Values are updated at least once every 16 line cycles. The F3 function key accesses the Harmonic Analysis screens. Two cycles of data sampled at 128 samples/cycle are simultaneously recorded for:
Custom Screen
Current: Phases A, B, C, N, G Voltage: Phases A-B, B-C, C-A Phases A-N, B-N, C-N Neutral to ground
Custom Screen
Magnitudes (or % of fundamental) of odd and even multiples of the fundamental from 2nd50th are displayed. The phase angle associated with each multiple of the fundamental is also displayed.
CA08104001E
3.3-4

June 2012
Sheet 03 076
i ii 1 2
Event/Alarm Analysis Screens
Event Conditions
Events may be triggered by up to seven of any of the following conditions:
Discrete Input Energized
Input 1, 2, 3
Voltage Disturbances
All trigger conditions have programmable time delays from 0.1 to 60 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Undervoltage/sagany VL-L, VL-N (40%100%) Overvoltage/swellany VL-L, VL-N (100%750%)
Demand Recording
Peak Demands are date and time stamped for:

Note: 60% minimum for self-powered unit.
Example of Event Analysis Screens
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Waveform Screen Available with Model 6600
If zero time delay is programmed, any disturbance lasting two cycles (less if magnitude is sufcient to effect rms readings) will trigger a voltage disturbance event/alarm.
Current phases A, B, C, average System power: Real (watts) Reactive (VARs) Apparent (VA)
Sub-cycle transient capture/excess dv/dt on VA-N, VB-N, VC-N Sub-cycle voltage interruption on VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Input/Output
Extensive input/output capability is standard on the IQ Analyzer. In addition to monitoring three-phase currents and voltages, separate inputs are provided for both ground and neutral currents. Voltage of neutral-toground is also monitored to indicate the presence of harmonics and potential downstream grounding problems. Analog and digital I/O provide interfaces for transducers, relays, PLCs and control systems.
Note: 6600 Series only.
Note: 6600 Series only.
Pressing the F2 function key accesses the Event Analysis screens. These display the following data for up to ten event/alarm conditions: Description, date, and time of event/alarm with 10 millisecond resolution Current, voltages, power readings, demand readings, frequency and % THD at time of event/alarm Current and voltage distortion information available on Harmonic Analysis screens
Maximum Threshold Exceeded

Event data is stored in non-volatile memory. If a reset threshold is programmed, the duration of the event (e.g., undervoltage) is also displayed. With Eatons PowerNet communications option and Series III software, waveforms and harmonic proles may be displayed on a PC.
Currentsphases A, B, C, neutral and ground Voltageneutral to ground System powerwatts, VA, VARs System power factordisplacement and apparent Demand Currentsphase A, B, C and AVG System powerwatts, VARs, VA Frequency % THD or magnitude total harmonic distortion Currents Phases A, B, C, neutral Voltage VA-N, VB-N, VC-N, VA-B, VB-C, VC-A
Current Inputs
Five ampere secondary CT connections for: Phases A, B, C Ground Neutral Separate ground and neutral CT inputs CT range 5:5 to 10,000:5 (any integer)

Voltage Inputs
Phases A, B, C (from 120 Vac 500 kV AC) 120/240 Vac control power input standardnot required with optional line power module Separate ground-to-neutral voltage reference PT range 120:120 to 500,000:120 (any integer)
Minimum Threshold Exceeded

Currentsphases A, B, C System powerwatts, vars, VA System power factor displacement and apparent Frequency

Voltage Phase Unbalance
Voltage L-L, L-N CurrentPhases A, B, C
Current Phase Unbalance
External 120V secondary PTs are required above 600 Vac, optional from 120600 Vac.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 077

3.3-5

Three dry contact discrete inputs may be programmed by the user to:
Status of input contacts is displayed in the Meter Menu Custom screen.
Analog Input and Outputs

One analog input and four analog outputs may be congured as 020 or 420 mA. The analog input is displayed at the device as a percentage and is accessible through the communications port. The analog input provides an interface with gas ow meters, temperature transducers or other analog devices. The analog outputs may be programmed to reect any of the following: Currentphases A, B, C, average, N, G VoltageL-L, L-N, N-G Power: Real (watts) Reactive (VARs) Apparent (VA) Phases A, B, C and system

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Relay Output Contacts

Four Form C NO/NC relay contacts may be independently programmed to: Act as a kWh, kvarh or kVAh pulse initiator output Actuate on one or more event conditionsincluding discrete input and Eaton Power Management Software command (through communications port) Reverse sequence alarm
Trigger Event Analysisthe information described in Event Analysis Screens, including Harmonic Analysis information, can be recorded when external devices trip or change state by wiring their auxiliary contacts into these inputs Act as a synch.-pulse input to synchronize power demand windows with utility provided synch pulse Actuate a relay output Reset relay output, peak demands, Trend Analysis records and Event Analysis records With communications option, provide remote status indication on Eatons network
Each Relay may be set for Auto or Manual Reset with 030 minute release delay (one second increments). Relays are Form C NO/NC. Relay(s) programmed to actuate on undervoltage also have a programmable 030 minute delay on power-up for transfer applications.
Current Transformer Connections
% THD: Current (phases A, B, C, N) Voltage (L-L, L-N)
Power Module Connection
Earth Ground Analog Input Common Analog Outputs
Frequencysystem Power factor: System displacement PF System apparent PF
Separate Source Power Supply Chassis Ground Relay #1
Remote Inputs
Relay #2
Field Replaceable Fuse Communication Connection
Relay #3
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Relay #4 System Voltage Connections
Figure 3.3-1. IQ AnalyzerRear View
CA08104001E
3.3-6

June 2012
Sheet 03 078
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
IQ Analyzer Wiring Diagram

Three-Phase, Four-Wire (Above 600V) External Potential Transformers and Current Transformers 4 CT N Line L3 L2 L1 Fuse Wye Connection Note: External PTs Not Required Under 600V A B C 3 CT 2 CT 1 CT Load
5 CT
Optional Ground Current
Control Power
6
Fuse
IQ Analyzer
Relay No. 1 Relay No. 2 Relay No. 3 Relay No. 4 H1G H1N H1C H1B H1A H2G H2N H2C H2B H2A
7 8 9
1 2 3 4 (See Label for 120 Vac/125 Vdc Connections)
C Neutral Terminal
3 4
6 7
9 10
11
12
Separate Source Power Supply Module (Also Available with Control Power Derived from Monitored Line) Discrete Contact Inputs 1 2 (-) 14 (+) 15 (-) 16 (+) 17 3 (-) 18 19 20 21 22 1 Analog I/O Outputs 2 3 4 Ground 23
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(+) 13
Analog Input 24
Earth Ground 25
Figure 3.3-2. Sample Wiring Diagram for a Three-Phase, Four-Wire System
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 079

3.3-7
Denition of Power Quality Terms

Displacement Power Factor =

6.72 (170.7)
i ii
-------------------------W 2 + Var 2
Normal Event Reset Relay Program
1 2 3
= Fundamental (60 Hz) watts to (60 Hz) VA. A ratio of fundamental (60 Hz) real power to apparent power. Apparent Power Factor =
IQ Analyzer
Previous s Level
F1
F2
F3
F4
Home
W -----VA
Current Voltage Power (Watts) Power (Vars) Power (VA) V Energy Demand Power Factor Frequency % THD Distortion Factor Custom Down Up
10.25 (260.4)
4 5 6 7
= Total rms watts to VA. A ratio of total real power (including harmonic component) to apparent power. K-Factor =
2 2 I n -- hn I 1
Program
Help
-------------------I n 2 -- I 1
A derating factor that is related to the sum of the squares of harmonic currents times the squares of their harmonic numbers (multiples of the fundamental). CBEMA Factor = 2 rms ----- = ----------------CF I Peak A transformer harmonic derating factor (THDF) dened as a pure sine waves crest factor (1.4141) divided by the measured crest factor. Crest Factor = I Peak 2I
Figure 3.3-4. Dimensions and Cutout

5.38
8.11 (206.0)
8
4.06 (103.1)
2.69
9 10
8.90
6.68
9.38
10.41 (264.4
.213 (5.4) Typ. for 8
11
11.03 (280.2)
4.45
C L 10.09 (256.3) C L
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4.69
2.23
.06 RAD 4 Places

.94 (23.9)
5.52 (140.2)
2.53
5.06
.218 DIA 10 Places
7.41 (188.2)
---------I rms
Figure 3.3-5. Drilling Pattern
Figure 3.3-6. Drilling Pattern for Flange Mounting
Ratio of peak current to rms current. Figure 3.3-3. Denition of Power Quality Terms
CA08104001E
3.3-8

June 2012
Sheet 03 080
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Table 3.3-1. Input/Output Information
Fuses
Self-powered units with IQMSSPM have 0.75A, 600V Bus
Type KTK-R-3/4 fuses (three required)

Separate source dual voltage units with IQMSSPM have a
single 0.20 (5.0) x 0.79 (20.0) 0.25A fuse

Separate source DC units with IQMDCPM do not have
user-replaceable fuses Environmental Conditions Operating temperature: 20 to 70C Storage temperature: 30 to 85C Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity Device weight: 5.8 lbs (2.6 kg) Current Inputs (each channel) Conversion: True rms, 32 sample/cycle (all samples used in all rms calculations) CT input: 5A secondary (any integer 5:5 to 10,000:5) Burden: 0.05 VA Overload withstand: 40A AC continuous, 300A AC 1 second Range: 8 x CT continuous Accuracy: 0.1% of CT primary rating, 0.2% of reading above 150% of rating, sinusoidal (see accuracy below for non-sinusoidal specications) Input impedance: 0.002 ohm Voltage Inputs (each channel) Conversion: True rms, 32 samples/cycle (all samples used in all rms calculations) PT Input: Direct or any integer 120:120 to 500,000:120 Range: 30 to 660 Vac (separate source and DC source) Nominal Full Scale: 100600 Vac Burden: 21 VA (self-powered only) Overload Withstand: 635 Vac, continuous 700 Vac, 1 second Input Impedance: 1 megohm Frequency Range 2066 Hz fundamental (up to 50th harmonic) Harmonic Response (voltages, currents) 50th harmonic
Accuracy (in percent full scale) Accuracy from 3300% of full scale and from 0.5. to 1.00 to 0.5 power factor. Current and voltage: 0.20% Power, energy, and demand: 0.40% Frequency: 0.04% Power factor: 0.80% THD: 1.00% Specic current accuracies: 0.20% of full scale to 200% of full scale and 150% crest factor 0.20% of full scale to 150% of full scale and 200% crest factor 0.20% of full scale to 100% of full scale and 300% crest factor 0.40% of reading for currents to 800% of full scale Power and energy: start recording with an average of 3 mA secondary current
Discrete Inputs (dry contact) +30 Vdc differential across each discrete input pair of terminals. Minimum pulse width: 1.6 msec Optically isolated inputs to protect IQ Analyzer circuitry. Analog Outputs (4) 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA into maximum 750 ohm load. Accuracy: 1%. Analog Input (1) 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA into 200 ohm load. Accuracy: 1%. Relay Output Contacts (4) Form C dry contact: 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) 10A at 30 Vdc (resistive) 30A make (50 ms) at 240 Vac/240 Vdc Minimum pulse width: Four cycles (68 ms) Withstand Rating: 1000 Vac, 1 minute across contacts 5000 Vac (contacts to coil, 1 minute) 10,000 Vac (contacts to coil, surge voltage) Relay Response Time (excluding programmed time delays): 2 line cycles for discrete input, Power Xpert Software command (communications port) 45 line cycles for voltage disturbance, voltage unbalance 910 line cycles for all others
Table 3.3-2. Control Power Input
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Description Input range, AC Frequency range Input range, DC Burden
Separate Source 110240 Vac 10% 4566 Hz 110250 Vdc 10% 21 VA
Self-Powered 110600 Vac 10% 4566 Hz N/A 21 VA
DC Source N/A N/A 2448 Vdc 20% 21 VA
When directly wired to 480 Vac, IQ Analyzer can ride through a continuous sag that is 20% of rated voltage.
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 081

3.3-9
Table 3.3-3. Catalog Information

Description IQ Analyzer, separate source power module IQ Analyzer, 2448 Vdc power module IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture IQ Analyzer, 2448 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module 45.00-inch (1143.0 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module 2448 Vdc separate source power module 100240 Vac and 100250 Vdc separate source power module Three-phase, self-powered power module INCOM communication module RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol
Catalog Number IQA6410 IQA6420 IQA6430 IQA6610 IQA6620 IQA6630 IQFLANGE IQACABLE IQA45CABLE IQMDCPM IQMSSPM IQM3PPM IPONI MPONI
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Use three-phase power module if meter electronics are to be powered from the three-phase line voltage of 600V and below. Use separate source power module if the meter electronics is to be powered from a separate 110240 Vac or 110250 Vdc source. Use 2448 Vdc power module if only 2448 Vdc is available to power electronics. Separate power modules can be ordered if an active meter needs to have the existing power supply changed to a different voltage.
CA08104001E

June 2012
Sheet 03 082
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 083
Advanced and Electronic Metering Accessories

IQ Flange/Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
3.4-1
IQ Flange
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series and PXM 2000 Meters
Product Selection
Description Catalog Number
i ii 1 2 3
Panel mounting adapter kit IQ250-PMAK IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000 Series adapter kit to IQ Analyzer/ IQ DP-4000/IQ Data
Dimensions
6.72 (170.7) 5.38 (136.7)
IQ Flange
4 5
4.45 (113.0)
Retrot Applications
For applications where extra doormounting space is required, a angemounting unit is available. The IQ Flange provides an extra 2.50 inches (63.5 mm) of clearance for the device.
6 7 8 9 10
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
For use with the following products:

IQ Analyzer IQ DP-4000 MP-3000 DT-3000
The ange adapter plate can be installed as follows: 1. Remove the old meter from the panel or door. Many IQ metering products use the typical IQ drilling pattern shown in Figure 3.4-2 for mounting 2. Install the ange adapter plate. Mount it from the rear using the six screws provided in the kit. The ange adapter plate screw hole pattern shown in Figure 3.4-2 should match the typical IQ drilling pattern. If not, perform the next step 3. Drill six holes in the panel or the door to mount the ange adapter plate. Follow the typical IQ drilling pattern. You need only the top, center and bottom sets of holes
10.25 (260.4)
4.45 (113.0)
Product Selection
Description IQ Flange Catalog Number IQFLANGE
Figure 3.4-2. Flange Adapter Plate Screw Hole Pattern
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5.38 (136.7) 2.69 (68.3) 8.90 (226.1) 6.68 (169.7) 4.45 (113.0) 2.23 (56.6) 0.06 (1.5) RAD 4.69 4 Places (119.1) 2.53 (64.3) 5.06 (128.5) 0.218 (5.5) DIA 10 Places 9.38 (238.3)
4. Install the new IQ 100/200 Series or PXM 2000 meter in the ange adapter plate. Secure it from behind with four at washers, lock washers and nuts provided with the meter
Figure 3.4-1. Typical IQ Flange Drilling Pattern
CA08104001E
3.4-2

Sub-Network Master Local Display
June 2012
Sheet 03 084
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Sub-Network Master Local Display (SMLD)
Following devices are supported: IQ 210/220/230 IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II IQ Energy Sentinel (F, J, K Frames) Universal Internal Energy Sentinel Universal External Energy Sentinel IQ Power Sentinel Digitrip OPTIM 1050L
Power connector rating: 24 Vac or 24 Vdc at 1A Power source: 120 Vac or 24 Vdc, UL Class 2 or CSA Class III SELV transformer in accordance with C22.2 No. 1010-1. The voltage range is 18 to 24 Vac or Vdc, 200 mA (maximum)
Ratings
Operating temperature: 0 to 60C Storage temperature: 20 to 70C Operating humidity: 5 to 90% maximum noncondensing Altitude: 10,000 feet (3048m) Environment: indoor use only

Keypad functions: Menu Scroll up Scroll down Enter Backlit LCD, 4-line x 20 character
Mounting Information
4.37 H x 4.37 W x 1.50 D inches (111.0 H x 111.0 W x 38.1 D mm) Door mount or panel mount
Sub-Network Master Local Display
General Description
Eatons sub-network master local display (SMLD) is an electronic submetering device that provides users the ability to view information from sub-network connected devices locally at switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers and control panels, nearby or thousands of feet away. The SMLD has a built-in LCD display with navigations for conguring, as well as monitoring. Auto-learn capabilities complete the conguration requirements, enabling customization by use of user-dened descriptions, as well as adding and deleting meters. The SMLD can be operated standalone or in parallel with the new FetchIT software application or the Power Xpert complete energy monitoring system solution software.

Safety standardsUL 61010B-1 EMC Susceptibility Standards IEC 1000-4-3, 1995 Radiated RF Immunity EMC Emissions StandardsFCC Part 15, Class B Radiated Emissions

Communications

Product Selection
Description Local display (120 Vac) Local display (24 Vac or Vdc) Catalog Number LDISP120 LDISP24
INCOM Frequency Shift Key (FSK) network compatible 9600 baud Non-intrusive arbitration algorithm Passive monitoring automatically enabled by arbitration algorithm while host PC is communicating Master on INCOM network upon data request from front panel if host PC is not communicating Addresses for sub-network devices can be 001044 hex (1255 decimals)
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm) Table 3.4-4. Meter Base Unit
Width 4.37 (111.0) Height 4.37 (111.0) Depth 1.50 (38.1)

Frequency Range
50/60 Hz Power consumption: 200 mA (maximum) at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc
Power
Acquire and display data (no control) from up to 100 devices that can communicate on Eatons INCOM network, used in the PowerNet monitoring system
Note: DIN (92 mm x 92 mm) access cutout.
SMLD
Features, Benets and Functions

Auto-learn connected devices Conguration stored in non-volatile memory Host communications arbitration algorithm enables seamless integration into existing communication networks Functions standalone or networked

Computer with Power Management Software
IQ 210/220/230
IQ ES or PS
Digitrip OPTIM 1050C
Multiple Units as Required
Figure 3.4-3. Typical Use Diagram of SMLD
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 085

Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters
3.4-3
Factory designed and wired to t various Eaton power and energy meters at varying price points, Eatons Enclosed Meter line offers savings in labor and installation costs because input current and voltage wiring, as well as I/O wiring, is pre-wired to terminal blocks inside the enclosure. Standalone, enclosed meters are ideal for new metering applications where no metering existed previously, retrot installations where energy monitoring is a must or where ease of installation is required. Health care facilities Educational facilities and campuses Industrial facilities Commercial facilities Government facilities

Features and Benets

Saves installation time and cost One part number to order; no need to worry that any part has been left out Pick the meter or meters you need as it is designed to t various Eaton power and energy meters, at varying price points
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Factory Wired
Most electrical contractors are very familiar with wiring meters. However, it does take time to place the disconnect, CT shorting blocks, terminal blocks, control power transformer, etc. and associated wiring. It is not uncommon for errors to be introduced during the installation of multiple meters; it's just inherent in wiring. With Eatons Enclosed Meter line, everything is wired at the factory: the shorting block, terminal blocks, etc., assuring that its done right. Further, to ensure safety, Eatons Enclosed Meter line includes a primary fusible disconnect for line voltage that can be turned off during meter maintenance. For applications with line voltages above the rated power supply of the meter, an optional control power transformer is supplied in the enclosure. Control voltage can also be supplied via a separate source that is wired to the eld installation terminal block. CT inputs for the meter are wired directly to shorting terminal blocks for easy eld installation. Factory wired products also save on installation time and costs. The meters are ush mounted on the enclosure door with all inputs/outputs factorywired to terminal blocks.
Single and Multi Unit NEMA 12 Enclosed MetersFront Views
General Description
The Eaton Enclosed Meter line provides a complete energy metering and data acquisition solution in a single enclosure. Designed for Eatons IQ 35M, IQ 150, IQ 250/260 and Power Xpert 2000 Meters, Eatons Enclosed Meter line offers mounting and installation exibility, especially in retrot applications where no metering compartment or mounting space is available in the existing electrical distribution equipment or where installation time is a premium. Factory designed and wired, Eatons Enclosed Meter line offers savings in labor and installation costs because input current and voltage wiring, as well as I/O wiring, is pre-wired to terminal blocks inside the enclosure. The Enclosed Meter line has two offerings; single, prewired unit (specic IQ 150, IQ 250/260 or PXM 2000 models) and a multi unit (specic IQ 150, IQ 250/260 or IQ 35M models). Because the multi unit automatically includes Eatons Power Xpert Gateway 200E, it facilitates measurement and verication of the energy usage on processes and in buildings. This provides a convenient way to monitor energy usage from multiple points, collect and log specic energy use parameters, and display and generate logs for historical energy usage reports. Simply put, Eatons multi unit enclosed meter solution helps meet any measurement and verication requirement to show energy efciency improvements and results.
The multi unit offering consolidates energy-related data available from the meters in the enclosure, but also allows for external meters to be added to the embedded Power Xpert Gateway 200E. Through the Power Xpert Gateway 200Es embedded Web server, information can be presented in a variety of ways, a standard Web browser being the most widely used method. The enclosed product is a standalone solution that is ideal for many infrastructure designs. Further, as needs change and grow, the enclosed product can be integrated through Power Xpert Software into a broader solution that encompasses other intelligent hardware and can integrate with third-party network management systems (NMS) or building management systems (BMS) for system-wide monitoring and reporting of energy and power.
Fused Disconnect Neutral, Ground and Input/Output (not shown) Terminal Blocks Control Power, Voltage and CT Inputs
15 16 17 18 19
CT Shorting Terminal Block
Pre-Wired Control Power Transformer Meter Fusing
20 21
NEMA 12 Front View, Door Open, Pre-Wired and Tested
CA08104001E
3.4-4

Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters NEMA Rated
NEMA 12 enclosure prevents dust and other materials from entering. Internal gaskets also prevent air irritants from harming the vital equipment inside. This quality enclosure meets most indoor application needs. NEMA 3R enclosure is constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt); to provide a degree of protection with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow); and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. NEMA 4X enclosure provides the same degree of protection as the NEMA 3R with the additional protection against windblown dust, splashing and hose directed water, and protection against corrosion.
Gateway Power Supply Fused Disconnect Meter Fusing PX Gateway
June 2012
Sheet 03 086
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Control Power, Voltage, CT and Communications Inputs
Fused Control Power Transformer
Ground
CT Shorting Blocks
NEMA 12 Multi Unit View, Door Open, Pre-Wired and Tested
NEMA 3R Single Unit Closed and Open
NEMA 4X Single Unit Closed and Open
19 20 21
June 2012
Sheet 03 087

3.4-5

Table 3.4-5. Enclosed Meters
Description Enclosure rating Enclosure operating temperature Specication NEMA 12, 3R, 4X 20C to +40C Note: Temperature range of meter is 20C to 70C. If applied outside, proper precautions should be taken to avoid exceeding the maximum and minimum temperature ratings of the meter. Single unit: NEMA 12 (8.00" wide x 16.30" high x 10.40" deep), NEMA 3R/4X (8.00" wide x 16.30" high x 9.60" deep) Multi unit: NEMA 12 (13.00" wide x 30.00" high x 15.20" deep) NEMA 3R (13.20" wide x 30.10" high x 14.60" deep) NEMA 4X (13.00" wide x 30.00" high x 14.00" deep) Single unit: IQ 150, IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000 models Multi unit: IQ 35M, IQ 150 and IQ 250/260
Table 3.4-6. Single Unit Enclosed Meter Catalog Numbering System
i ii 1
PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B
Meter Type PXM2250MA65105 PXM2250MA65115 PXM2250MA65145 PXM2260MA65105 PXM2260MA65115 PXM2260MA65145 PXM2270MA65105 PXM2270MA65115 PXM2270MA65145 IQ250MA65100 IQ250MA65110 IQ250MA65114 IQ260MA65100 IQ260MA65110 IQ260MA65114 IQ150MA6511 IQ150MA6512 CPT Option A = 120/240 Vac (No CPT) B = 480 Vac (CPT) NEMA Rating 2 = NEMA 12 3 = NEMA 3R 4 = NEMA 4X
2 3 4 5
Dimensions
Meters
Communications Power Xpert Gateway 200E (multi unit only) Control voltage Up to 265V (IQ 35M/150/250/260 and PXM 2000) no CPT required Greater than 265V (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000) CPT required Separate source controlno CPT required Fusible disconnectprimary voltage 6 point shorting block(s) Ground terminal block Neutral terminal block 8 point terminal block(s) for input/output modules for IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000 Wired for three-phase four-wire applications. Threephase three-wire applicationswill need to change the wiring for both the voltage and current per the wiring diagram in the meter instruction manual. UL 508A and cUL No separate source control voltage required for applications below 265 Vac (IQ 35M/150/250/260 and PXM 2000) Pre-wired current transformer, shorting terminal block(s), neutral, ground, voltage, control power, fusible disconnect and input/output terminal block(s) Padlocking latch provision Control power transformersingle unit50 VA, multi unit200 VA control power supply for meter where monitored voltage is above 265 Vac (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000)
Table 3.4-7. Multi Unit Enclosed Meter Catalog Numbering System
IQ150MA6511 - 2 B 4 C
Meter Type IQ35MA12 IQ150MA6511 IQ250MA65100 IQ260MA65100 NEMA Rating 2 = NEMA 12 3 = NEMA 3R 4 = NEMA 4X Communications C = Includes PXG200E
6 7 8 9
Basic model
Wiring
Number of Meters 4 = 4 meters CPT Option A = No CPT B = CPT
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Certications Source control Pre-wire
Not available with IQ 35M.
Latch Optional features
Note: Specications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, rmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specications.
CA08104001E
3.4-6

June 2012
Sheet 03 088
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 3.4-4. NEMA 12 Single Unit Enclosure
13.00 (330.2)
8.50 23.9)
Right Side View
Front View
Rear View
19
Figure 3.4-5. NEMA 12 Multi Unit Enclosure
20 21
June 2012
Sheet 03 089

3.4-7
i ii 1 2 3
This Drip Cap is on NEMA 3R On
4 5 6 7
(no door)
8 9
Figure 3.4-6. NEMA 3R/4X Single Unit Enclosure
13.20 (335.3) (NEMA 3R) 13.00 (330.2) (NEMA 4X)
10 11 12 13 14
This Drip Cap is on NEMA 3R Only
15
27.00 (685.8) (NEMA 3R) 28.50 (723.9) (NEMA 4X)
16 17 18 19
Right Side View
Front View
Front View (no door)
Rear View
20 21
Figure 3.4-7. NEMA 3R/4X Multi Unit Enclosure
CA08104001E
3.4-8

Current Transformers
June 2012
Sheet 03 090
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Product Selection
Table 3.4-8. Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Primary ANSI B0.1 Current Metering Rating Class at 60 Hz (Accuracy in %) 300 400 500 600 750 800 1000 1200 50 100 150 200 400 500 600 750 800 1000 1200 500 600 750 800 1000 1200 1500 1600 2000 2500 3000 600 750 800 1000 1200 1500 1600 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 25 50 0.3 Window Catalog Size in Number Inches (mm) Diameter
Table 3.4-9. Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy

Primary ANSI B0.1 Window Current Metering Size in Rating Class Inches (mm) at 60 Hz (Accuracy in %) 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500 1600 2000 600 750 800 1000 1200 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 4.8 4.8 2.4 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) Catalog Number
1.56 (39.6)
General Description
Eatons low voltage current transformers are available in both solid core and split core designs. Engineered for electronic metering applications, all solid core designs and selected split core designs offer ANSI metering quality accuracy. The solid core designs also meet ANSI C57.13 relay accuracy requirements including over-ranging capabilities. The current transformer offering has a 5A secondary at the rated primary current.
Split core CTs are specically designed to be installed around primary conductors without disconnecting wires or breaking the circuit to be monitored. These current transformers are perfect solutions for energy management applications and are manufactured for installation ease.
S050-301 S050-401 S050-501 S050-601 S050-751 S050-801 S050-102 S050-122 S060-500 S060-101 S060-151 S060-201 S080-401 S080-501 S080-601 S080-751 S080-801 S080-102 S080-122 S090-501 S090-601 S090-751 S090-801 S090-102 S090-122 S090-152 S090-162 S090-202 S090-252 S090-302 S025-601 S025-751 S025-801 S025-102 S025-122 S025-152 S025-162 S025-202 S025-252 S025-302 S025-352 S025-402 W190-025 W190-050
M000-401 M000-501 M000-601 M000-801 M000-102 M000-122 M000-152 M000-162 M000-202
1.2 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3
1.25 (31.8)
3.25 (82.6)
M050-601 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-751 M050-801 M050-102 M050-122 M050-152 M050-202 M050-252 M050-302 M050-352 M050-402
Table 3.4-10. Split Core Current Transformers

Primary Accuracy Current at 60 Hz Rating (in %) 100 150 200 300 400 100 150 200 300 400 200 300 400 500 600 750 800 1000 1200 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500 1600 2000 2500 3000 5.0 5.0 4.0 2.0 2.0 5.0 4.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 Window Size in Inches (mm) 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) Catalog Number M030-101 M030-151 M030-201 M030-301 M030-401 M040-101 M040-151 M040-201 M040-301 M040-401 M060-201 M060-301 M060-401 M060-501 M060-601 M060-751 M060-801 M060-102 M060-122
0.3
4.25 (108.0)
1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)
0.3
6.31 (160.3)
For new construction and retrot applications where no current transformer exists, Eaton offers a complete selection of low voltage (up to 600V) current transformers. These current transformers can be used in commercial grade applications such as control panels and panelboards. Additionally, they can be used for most industrial metering and relaying applications in switchboards, switchgear and motor control centers.
Note: Not for use with IQ 35M or IQ MESII.
2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)
0.3
Wound Primary
1.0
2.60 x 6.25 M080-501 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-601 M080-801 M080-102 M080-122 M080-152 M080-162 M080-202 M080-252 M080-302
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 091

3.4-9

(4) Open Slots 0.22 x 0.34 (5.6 x 8.6) 2.75 (69.9)
i ii 1
2.23 (56.6) 1.67 (42.4) 1.10 (27.9)
2 3
X1 LA B EL
0.44 (11.2) 3.53 (90.0) 3.00 (76.2)
4 5
X1
H1
6 7
3.70 (94.0) H1 1.88 (47.8) 0.31 (7.9) 1.56 Dia. (39.6)
8 9
Approximate weight: 1 lb
(2) Holes 0.20 (5.1) Diameter
2.25 (57.2)
10 11
Figure 3.4-8. S050Approximate Dimensions

5.25 (133.4) 4.00 (101.6) 3.10 (78.7)
12 13
2.88 (73.2)
14 15 16
X1
(2) Slots 0.28 x 0.50 (7.1 x 12.7)
(2) 0.28 x 0.50 Slots (7.1 x 12.7) 3.62 (91.9)
H1
0.88 (22.4) X1
0.44 (11.2)
17 18
4.00 (101.6) H1
See Tables
19 20 21
1.95 (49.5)
Approximate weight: 5.25 lbs

3.4-10 Advanced and Electronic Metering Accessories

June 2012
Sheet 03 092
i ii 1 2 3 4
H1
LA L BE
(8) Open Slots 0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6) 5.73 (145.5) 4.85 (123.2) 3.81 (96.8)
2.19 (55.6)
1.15 (29.2)
2.91 (73.9)
X1
0.44 1.09 (11.2) (27.7)
(4) Holes 0.42 (10.7) Dia.
0.55 (14.0) X1
5 6 7 8
Approximate weight: 2.5 lbs 0.51 (13.0) 4.70 (119.4) H1 3.25 (82.6) Dia. 2.84 (72.1)
5.73 (145.5)
9 10 11 12

5.92 (150.4) 4.85 (123.2) 3.81 (96.8) 2.91 2.19 (73.9) (55.6)
X1
LA BE L
1.15 (29.2)
13 14 15 16 17 18
0.42 (10.7)
(8) Open Slots 0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6) 3.50 (88.9)
H1
X1 6.17 (156.7) H1 4.25 (108.0) Dia. 2.97 (75.4)
4.86 (123.4)
19 20 21
Approximate weight: 3 lbs
(4) 0.28 x 0.63 (7.1 x 16.0) Slots
CA08104001E
June 2012
Sheet 03 093

3.4-11
i
2.98 (75.7) 4.10 1.28 (32.5) (104.1)
ii 1
X1
L BE LA
0
0.56 (14.2) 6.37 (161.8) 8.50 (215.9) 0.75 (19.1) 0.44 (11.2) 8.50 (215.9) (4) Slots 0.44 x 1.00 (11.2 x 25.4)
2 3 4 5 6 7
H1
6.75 (171.5)
H1
6.31 (160.3)
4.25 (108.0)
Approximate weight: 3 lbs
0.88 (22.4)
6.75 (171.5)
(4) 0.56 (14.2) Diameter Holes
8 9

(4) Closed Slots 0.21 x 0.50 (5.3 x 12.7)
10 11
2.75 (69.9)
X2 H1
LA BE L
X1
4.12 (104.6)
2.19 (55.6) H2 H1 X2 X1 3.25 (82.6)
4.69 (119.1)
12 13 14 15 16
3.50 (88.9) 4.50 (114.3) 0.75 (19.1)
(4) Open Slots 0.44 x 0.50 (11.2 x 12.7) 0.38 (9.7)
LABEL
0.44 (11.2) 4.88 (124.0) 0.50 (12.7)
17 18 19 20 21
3.48 (88.4) Approximate weight: 4 lbs (2) Mounting Holes 0.38 (9.7) Diameter
Figure 3.4-13. W190Approximate Dimensions

3.4-12 Advanced and Electronic Metering Accessories

June 2012
Sheet 03 094
i ii 1 2 3 4
H1
d En is ble Th ov a m Re
LA BE L
Approximate weight: 1.5 lbs
4.25 (108.0) 2.00 (50.8)

This End Removable
H1
0.75 (19.1) X1 H1
LABEL
0.44 (11.2)
7.75 (196.9) 5.50 (139.7)

4.10 (104.1) 7.10 (180.3) 10.00 (254.0)
LABEL
Th
is
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
H1 X1 X2 3.50 (88.9)
This End Removable
0.38 (9.7) 1.13 (28.7)
6.40 (162.6) 7.30 (185.4)
(2) 0.19 (4.8) Diameter Holes
1.63 (41.4) (4) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Holes
Figure 3.4-14. M000Approximate Dimensions
En
dR
10.90 (276.9)
CA08104001E
em ov
ab
le
X1 X2
June 2012
Sheet 03 095

3.4-13
i
2.50 (63.5)
ii 1
H1
X2
Terminal Arrangement for
3.38 (85.9) 1.20 (30.5)
2 3
X2 4.78 (121.4) 3.52 (89.4) 1.53 (38.9)

LABEL
4
H1 4.12 (104.6)
LABEL X1 1.42 (36.1)
5 6 7 8 9
Ratios 100:5 through 200:5
LA
BE
H1
10 11 12 13
H1
14 15 16
H1
H1
17
2.70 (68.6) 5.80 (147.3)
X1 - WHITE X2 - BLACK
6.25 (158.8) 9.25 (235.0) H1
18
X1 - WHITE X2 - BLACK
H1
19
1.75 (44.5)
2.75 (69.9) 6.05 (153.7) 1.75 (44.5)
2.60 (66.0) 6.05 (153.7)
20 21

CA08104001E


June 2012
Sheet 03 096
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Protective and Predictive Relays

September 2011
Sheet 04 001
4.0-1
Protective and Predictive Relays
Contents
Protective and Predictive Relays Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-5000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FP-6000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDR-3000 Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay with Voltage Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InsulGard Predictive Maintenance General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchgear Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010 Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.A FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.B FP-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.C FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.D MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.E MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.F MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.G DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.K VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.H EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.E EDR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.F EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.G EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.C EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.D ETR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.L EGR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.I Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16901, Paragraph 2.04.A InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sections 16950A, 16950C, 16950D
i
4.0-2 4.1-1 4.1-1 4.1-6 4.1-8 4.1-11 4.1-16 4.1-21 4.1-27 4.1-31 4.1-38 4.2-1 4.2-1 4.2-1 4.2-5 4.2-11 4.2-17 4.2-22 4.2-29 4.2-37 4.3-1 4.3-1 4.3-3 4.3-6 4.3-6 4.3-12 4.3-12 4.4-1 4.4-1 4.4-4 4.4-4 4.5-1 4.5-4 4.5-5 4.5-5 4.5-6 4.5-8 4.5-10
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Paragraph 2.03.A
4.0-2
Protective and Predictive Relays Selection Guide

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 04 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Selection Chart
Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart
Device Name Description IEEE Device Number Feeder Protection DT-3000 FP-4000 FP-5000 FP-6000 EDR-3000 EDR-4000 EDR-5000
Page Number
Page 4.1-1 50 51 50G 51G 67 67N 51VR 11 49 49S/51 51R 27 46 47 55 59 81 78V 81R 32V 87 32 25 79 LOP 50BF
Page 4.1-11
Page 4.1-16
Page 4.1-21 10
Page 4.1-27
Page 4.1-31
Page 4.1-38
Protection Functions
Phase inst. OC Phase TOC Ground inst. OC (measured) Ground TOC (measured) Phase directional control Ground directional control Phase voltage restrained OC No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) Zone interlocking Thermal overload Locked rotor Jam/stall Undervoltage Current unbalance Negative sequence voltage Power factor Overvoltage Frequency (over/under) Vector surge Rate of change Forward/reverse VARs Differential Forward/reverse power Sync check Reclosing Loss of potential block Cold load pickup Breaker failure 2nd harmonic restrain 5th harmonic restrain 4th harmonic restrain Ground differential Generator unbalance Loss of excitation Volts/hertz 100% stator ground fault

11 11
11
10
10
87GD 46G 40 24 27TN/59N
The 50 and 51 protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection. The 50N, 51N, 50G and 51G protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection. 87B using zone selective interlocking.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 003

General Description
4.0-3
Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart (Continued)

Device Name Description IEEE Device Number Feeder Protection DT-3000 FP-4000 FP-5000 FP-6000 EDR-3000 EDR-4000 EDR-5000
i ii 1
Page Number
Page 4.1-1
Page 4.1-11 4
Page 4.1-16 4
Page 4.1-21 4
Page 4.1-27 4
Page 4.1-31 4
Page 4.1-38 4
Control Functions
Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable logic control Multiple settings groups Number of starts limit Starts per hour Time between starts Emergency override Reduced voltage starting Trip lock out 86
2 3 4 5 6
Metering Functions
Amperes Ampere demand Volts Phase angle (current and voltage) Positive, negative and zero sequence Watts Watt demand Watthour VARs VAR demand VAR-hour VA VA demand VA-hour Frequency Trending (load prole) Minimum/maximum recording
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Monitoring Functions
Trip circuit monitor Breaker wear Failure to trip Oscillography Sequence of events Trip target data Clock Number of starts Acceleration time RTD temperature Hottest RTD
CA08104001E
4.0-4

General Description
Device Name Description IEEE Device Number Feeder Protection DT-3000 FP-4000 FP-5000 FP-6000 EDR-3000 EDR-4000
September 2011
Sheet 04 004
i ii 1
EDR-5000
Page Number
Page 4.1-1
Page 4.1-11
Page 4.1-16 Optional 4060C 48125 Vac/Vdc 2 Form C 5
Page 4.1-21 Optional 4060C 48125 Vac/Vdc 2 Form C 5
Page 4.1-27
Page 4.1-31
Page 4.1-38 Removable terminals 4060C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 Form C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Communications
Local human machine interface Remote communication port RS-232 RS-485 Ethernet copper Frequency shift key Addressable protocols INCOM Modbus-RTU Modbus-TCP IEC-61850 Optional 3055C 120240 Vac 24250 Vdc AC current inputs AC voltage inputs Wye PTs Delta/open delta PTs Binary inputs Alarm outputs Trip outputs Analog outputs Analog inputs Local display LEDs (local targets) DT-3030 only 2 Form C 2 40 60C 48125 Vac/Vdc 2 Form C 5
Removable terminals 4060C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac
Removable terminals 4060C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac
Construction
Panel-mount case Drawout Operating temperature range Power supply options
100240 Vac/Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc
1 Form C 3
1 Form C 10
Standards
ANSI IEC UL CE CSA
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 005

General Description
4.0-5

Device Name Description IEEE Device Number Motor Protection C306 Bimetallic OLR C440/XT Solid-State OLR C441 Solid-State OLR
i ii 1
Page Number
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Motor Protection Thermal overload protection Trip class 49 Bi-metallic 10 or 20 Selectable via heater packs Adjustable via dial (range approx.1.6:1) 49S/51 46 46 51N 50 47 Microprocessor-based 10A, 10, 20, 30 Selectable via DIP switches Adjustable via dial (range 5:1) Selectable on/off (90% setting) Selectable on/off (50% setting) Fixed at 50% of FLA setting Microprocessor-based 530 Selectable via user interface Adjustable via user interface (range 9:1 and 18:1) Selectable on/off (60% setting) Adjustable (030% setting), off Programmable threshold, and alarm or trip mode Instantaneous and adjustable 59 27 47 47 1 1 contacts 1 B600 1 B600
Adjustable FLA
Locked rotor/stall current Phase losscurrent Phase imbalance Ground fault Jam/current level protection Phase reversal Load Protection Undercurrent Low power (kW) High power (kW) Voltage Protection Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage imbalance Voltage phase loss Power-up delay
Control Functions
Manual reset Automatic reset Electronic remote reset Network command reset Output Contacts NO contacts NC contacts Ground fault shunt relay Independently programmable Control Power Self (line) powered Separate 24 Vdc supply Separate 120 Vac supply 1 B300 (Form A or Form C) 1 B300 (Form B or Form C) 1 B300 (Form A)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Metering Functions (via Local Display)

Amperes Individual phase Average Current imbalance % Voltage Individual phase Average Voltage imbalance %
Depends on the catalog number ordered.
CA08104001E
4.0-6

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 04 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Page Number
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-5
Metering Functions (via Local Display) (continued)

Kilowatts Power factor Trip status Diagnostics (10 fault queue) Overload indication Thermal capacity Frequency Run hours Ground fault current
Monitoring Functions (via Communications)

Overload indication Operating LED Trip status Congured settings Thermal memory (time until reset) Thermal capacity Ground fault current Frequency Motor starts Motor run hours Power motor kW Power factor Current Individual Phase I rms Average Phase I rms Current imbalance % Voltage Individual Phase V rms Average Phase V rms Voltage imbalance % Fault Indication Overload Phase loss Phase imbalance Ground fault Phase reversal Jam/stall/current level Undercurrent Low power High power Voltage imbalance Undervoltage Overvoltage
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 007

General Description
4.0-7

i ii 1
Page Number
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-1
Page 4.2-5
2 3 4 5 6
Communications
Modbus RTU RS-485 Modbus RTU with I/O DeviceNet with I/O PROFIBUS with I/O EtherNet/IP with I/O Modbus TCP with I/O
Mounting
Panel mounting Contactor mounting DIN rail mounting Optional remote mounted display
Standards
UL CSA CE NEMA IEC RoHS
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.0-8

General Description
Device Name Description IEEE Device Number Motor Protection MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 Differential Protection MD-3000 DP-300
September 2011
Sheet 04 008
i ii 1
Transformer Generator Protection Protection ETR-4000 EGR-4000
Voltage Protection VR-300
Page Number
Page 4.2-11 Page 4.2-17 Page 4.2-22 Page 4.2-29 Page 4.3-1 Page 4.3-3 Page 4.3-6 50 51 50G 51G 67 67N 51VR 11 49 49S/51 51R 27 46 47 55 59 81 78V 81R 32V 87 32 25 79 LOP 50BF 87GD 46G 40 24 27TN/ 59N 11 11
Page 4.3-12 Page 4.4-1 11
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Phase inst. OC Phase TOC Ground inst. OC (measured) Ground TOC (measured) Phase directional control Ground directional control Phase voltage restrained OC No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) Zone interlocking Thermal overload Locked rotor Jam/stall Undervoltage Current unbalance Negative sequence voltage Power factor Overvoltage Frequency (over/under) Vector surge Rate of change Forward/reverse VARs Differential Forward/reverse power Sync check Reclosing Loss of potential block Cold load pickup Breaker failure 2nd harmonic restrain 5th harmonic restrain 4th harmonic restrain Ground differential Generator unbalance Loss of excitation Volts/hertz 100% stator ground fault

The 50 and 51 protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection. The 50N, 51N, 50G and 51G protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection. 87B using zone selective interlocking. 87M or 87G (motor or generator differential). 87M, 87T or 87G (motor, transformer or generator differential). 87T (transformer differential).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 009

General Description
4.0-9

Device Name Description Motor Protection IEEE MP-3000 Device Number MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 Differential Protection MD-3000 DP-300 Transformer Generator Protection Protection ETR-4000 EGR-4000 Voltage Protection VR-300
i ii 1
Page Number
Page 4.2-11 Page 4.2-17 Page 4.2-22 Page 4.2-29 Page 4.3-1 Page 4.3-3 Page 4.3-6 (Trip only) 4 86 Max. only 4 Current only 4
Page 4.3-12 Page 4.4-1
Control Functions
Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable logic control Multiple settings groups Number of starts limit Starts per hour Time between starts Emergency override Reduced voltage starting Trip lock out 4
2 3 4 5 6

Metering Functions
Amperes Ampere demand Volts Phase angle (current and voltage) Positive, negative and zero sequence Watts Watt demand Watthour VARs VAR demand VAR-hour VA VA demand VA-hour Frequency Trending (load prole) Minimum/maximum recording
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Trip circuit monitor Breaker wear Failure to trip Oscillography Sequence of events Trip target data Clock Number of starts Acceleration time RTD temperature Hottest RTD
16 17 18 19 20 21
Differential and restrain current only.
CA08104001E
4.0-10 Protective and Predictive Relays Selection Guide

General Description
Device Name Description Motor Protection IEEE MP-3000 Device Number MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 Differential Protection MD-3000 DP-300 Transformer Protection ETR-4000
September 2011
Sheet 04 010
i ii 1
Generator Protection EGR-4000
Voltage Protection VR-300
Page Number
Page 4.2-11
Page 4.2-17
Page 4.2-22
Page 4.2-29
Page 4.3-1
Page 4.3-3
Page 4.3-6
Page 4.3-12
Page 4.4-1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Communications
Local human machine interface Remote communication port RS-232 RS-485 Ethernet copper Frequency shift key Addressable protocols INCOM Modbus-RTU Modbus-TCP IEC-61850 Optional 20 to 60C 120240 Vac Optional 20 to 60C 120240 Vac Optional Optional Removable terminals 40 to 60C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac AC current inputs AC voltage inputs Wye PTs Delta/open delta PTs Binary inputs Alarm outputs Trip outputs Analog outputs Analog inputs Local display LEDs (local targets) 1 Form C 1 Form C 1 Form C 3 Removable terminals Optional Removable terminals 40 to 60C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Removable terminals 40 to 60C 20 to 70C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 2 Form C 1 NO 1 Form C 1 Form C 40250 Vac 90250 Vdc 1 Form C
Construction
Panel-mount case Drawout Operating temperature range Power supply options
40 to 60C 30 to 55C 20 to 70C 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 Form C 120240 Vac 40250 Vac
24250 Vdc 90250 Vdc
Standards
ANSI IEC UL CE CSA
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 011
Protective and Predictive Relays Feeder Protection

General DescriptionDigitrip 3000
4.1-1
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay
The Digitrip 3000 features a userfriendly operator panel to monitor, program and test the relay. Operating parameters and troubleshooting information are displayed in the two highly visible display windows. In addition, all data and information can be communicated to a host computer equipped with the appropriate software. A Communication Trip and Communication Close control command can also be initiated by a host computer with an authorized access code.
Continuous internal circuitry self-testing Programmable lockout/self reset after trip Relay failure alarm contact Trip alarm contact Optional Dual-Source Power Supply (DSPS), see Page 4.1-6 Optional quick-release drawout case, see Page 4.1-8
Catalog Number DT3000 DT3001 DT3001-IC DT3001-OC DT3010 DT3020 DT3030 DT3031
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Table 4.1-1. Catalog Numbers

Description Digitrip 3000 Digitrip 3000 drawout relay Digitrip 3000 drawout inner chassis Digitrip 3000 drawout outer case Digitrip 3000 with 120 Vac dual-source power supply Digitrip 3000 with 240 Vac dual-source power supply Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc power supply and CE mark Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc power supply and CE mark in drawout case
Features
General

Digitrip 3000 Front View
General Description
Eatons Digitrip 3000 protective relay is a multi-function, microprocessorbased overcurrent relay designed for both ANSI and IEC applications. It is a panel-mounted, self-contained unit that operates from either AC or DC control power. The Digitrip 3000 is available in an optional quick-release drawout case for panel-ush mounting. For AC control power applications, an optional Dual-Source Power Supply (DSPS) is recommended. See Page 4.1-6 for details. The Digitrip 3000 design provides true rms sensing of each phase and ground current. Only one unit is required for each threephase circuit. Current monitoring and operator selectable protective functions are integral to each relay. The Digitrip 3000 relay operates from the 5A secondary output of standard current transformers. Current transformer ratio information is quickly programmed into the unit via settings. This enables the relay to display metered current in primary amperes.
ANSI or IEC applications User-friendly front panel Non-volatile memory View settings any time Set CT ratios Metered currents in primary amperes Individual phase targeting of fault Integral test mode (phase and ground) Program and test mode security access cover with meter seal provision
DIP Switches Communication Connection Terminal Block 2-1 Terminal Block 2-2 Terminal Block 1
12 13 14 15
Terminal Block 2
Current Transformer Connections
16 17 18 19 20 21
Digitrip 3000 Rear View
CA08104001E
4.1-2

General DescriptionDigitrip 3000 System Protection

September 2011
Sheet 04 012
i ii 1
2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
True rms sensing of each phase and ground current Selectable curve shapes: ANSI, IEC or thermal curves Phase overcurrent protection per time-current curve Independent ground fault protection per time-current curve Time overcurrent reset time delay Ground element capable of residual, zero sequence or external source connections Instantaneous phase and ground OC Short delay phase and ground OC Selectable true making current release (discriminator) Congurable trip outputs Zone selective interlocking (phase and ground) for bus protection and reduced arc ash energy Displays individual phase currents Displays ground current Displays magnitude and phase of current causing trip Displays peak demand current for each phase and ground since last reset Displays current transformer ratio Indicates cause of trip (time or instantaneous) Data/information transmission Provides breaker Open or Close status to a remote location via Eatons PowerNet
The Digitrip 3000 may be applied as the transformer primary protection or as backup to the differential protection, as in Figure 4.1-2.
Time Overcurrent Reset

The Digitrip 3000 includes time delay reset characteristic for the time overcurrent functions. This improves the overcurrent protection response to arcing fault conditions. The current during an arcing fault may vary above and below the pickup level. The time above pickup will accumulate until trip occurs.
50
51
CB
50N
51N
Overcurrent Protection
The Digitrip 3000 provides complete three-phase and ground protection with separate elements and settings. The relay can be used with CT ratios from 5/5 to 5000/5. The CT ratio can be set independently for phase and ground, allowing the ground element to be connected in either the residual or the separate ground CT conguration as in Figure 4.1-4 and Figure 4.1-5.
a b c A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 50/51 G2
Digitrip 3000
Figure 4.1-2. Transformer Protection The Digitrip 3000 may be connected to the secondary side of a delta-wye grounded transformer with the ground element connected to a separate CT in the neutral connection of the transformer. With this connection, a lower CT ratio and a pickup setting can be used to provide more sensitive ground fault protection especially for resistance grounded systems (see Figure 4.1-3).
Information and Data Delivery

GND G1
CB-52
Resistor
50N/51N 51N Digitrip 3000
50G
51G
Figure 4.1-4. Residual Ground Connections
50
51
a
Digitrip 3000 CB
A1 C1
A2 B2 C2 50/51
General
The Digitrip 3000 microprocessorbased relay provides reliable three-phase and ground overcurrent protection for all voltage levels. It can be used for any application where instantaneous and/or time overcurrent protection is required. It is most commonly used as primary feeder circuit protection, as in Figure 4.1-1.
Figure 4.1-3. Transformer Secondary Protection with Ground CT Connection The Digitrip 3000 relay has special provisions for connection in a Zone Interlocking Scheme that can be used for bus protection or to improve protection coordination in a tight or close system. Zone interlocking is described in more detail on Page 4.1-4.
CB-52 50G/51G G2 GND G1
Digitrip 3000
Figure 4.1-5. Separate Zero Sequence Ground CT Connections
50
51
CB 52
50N
51N
Digitrip 3000 Load
21
Figure 4.1-1. Primary Feeder Protection
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 013

4.1-3
The phase and ground overcurrent characteristics are dened by six parameters. Curve shape Overcurrent pickup Time multiplier or dial Short delay pickup Short delay time Instantaneous pickup
Phase Curve Shape

The Digitrip 3000 includes the thermal, ANSI and IEC family of curves, which make it easy to coordinate with any conventional protection scheme. The user can select Moderately Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse or Denite Time characteristics. The thermal curves It, I2t, I4t and at slopes can also be selected.
Instantaneous Protection
Instantaneous (short-circuit) protection reacts to high level fault currents. If NONE is selected for the instantaneous setting, the instantaneous trip function is disabled and a true making current release (discriminator) function is provided. If selected, the discriminator is functional for 10 cycles and will trip the breaker instantaneously, if the fault current is above 11 times (I n).
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

Time overcurrent (overload and fault) protection is dened by the current pickup setting and time multiplier.

The ground fault protection function is a composite of the ground: Ground curve shape Time overcurrent and pickup time settings Short delay current and time settings Instantaneous setting
Phase Short Time Protection
TIME
Short time (fault) protection responds to short-circuit conditions. It is similar to the Phase Long Time Protection in that current and time settings are offered. It differs, however, in two ways: (1) NONE is a Short Delay Pickup setting that, if selected, will disable the Phase Short Time Protection, and (2) a slope selection is not available for the time line.
A NONE setting selection disables that characteristic of the ground fault protection.
CURRENT
Figure 4.1-6. Phase or Ground Overcurrent Characteristics
I4t
(Curve Shape)
I2t It FLAT
11
(Curve Shape)
MOD
(Curve Shape) IEC-A IEC-B
12 13
(Short Delay)
TIME
TIME
VERY
(Short Delay)
EXTREME
(Short Delay)
IEC-D IEC-C
TIME
(Instantaneous)
(Instantaneous)
(Instantaneous)
14 15
CURRENT
CURRENT
CURRENT
Thermal Curves
ANSI Curves
IEC Curves
Figure 4.1-7. Digitrip 3000 Selective Curve Types
16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.1-4

September 2011
Sheet 04 014
i ii 1
Zone 1 Main Breaker A
Digitrip 3000 A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Zone 3 Zone 2 Feeder Breaker B Digitrip 3000 B Interlocking Wire
Downstream Breaker C
Digitrip 3000 C
LOAD
Figure 4.1-8. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
Zone Selective Interlocking (Phase and Ground)

Zone selective interlocking is a protection function to minimize equipment damage resulting from a phase fault or a ground fault in an area where long time and/or short time delay is in use. When the Ground Zone Interlocking feature is used, an immediate trip is initiated when the fault is in the breakers zone of protection, and no restraining signal received regardless of its preset time delay. When the Phase Zone Interlocking feature is used, the time overcurrent and short delay phase elements work as follows. The short delay phase element will initiate an immediate trip when the fault is in the breakers zone of protection, and no restraining signal received regardless of its preset time delay. The time overcurrent phase element will initiate an immediate trip when the fault is in the breakers zone of protection, and no restraining signal received regardless of its preset time delay only when the current being sensed by the Digitrip 3000 exceeds 300% (3 x I n) of the current transformer rating.
Upstream Digitrip 3000 protected breakers are restrained from tripping immediately by an interlocking signal from the downstream Digitrip 3000 relay. This interlocking signal requires only a pair of wires from the downstream breaker to the upstream breaker. It provides standard coordinated tripping when the fault is located outside the zone of protection. In the sample zone interlocking system shown above, circuit breakers A, B and C are equipped with Digitrip 3000 overcurrent relays.
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2, the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B senses the fault and sends a restraining signal to the upstream Digitrip 3000 of Main Breaker A. The Digitrip 3000 of the Downstream Breaker C does not see this fault because it is situated on the downstream side of the fault. As a result, the Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C does not send a restraining signal to the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B. Because it did not receive a restraining signal from the Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C, the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B identies that the fault is in Zone 2 and immediately trips Feeder Breaker B, regardless of its time setting.
Fault Location Zone 3

Note: For the phase time overcurrent element, the current sensed by the Digitrip 3000 must exceed 300% (3 x In) for the zone selective interlocking to initiate an immediate trip signal.

If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3, the Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C senses the fault and sends a restraining signal to the upstream Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B. Having received this signal, the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B withholds its trip command. As a result, only Downstream Breaker C is tripped.

If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no restraining signal is received by the Digitrip of Main Breaker A. As a result, Main Breaker A is immediately tripped by its Digitrip overcurrent relay, regardless of its time setting.
September 2011
Sheet 04 015

Technical DataDigitrip 3000
4.1-5

6.72 (170.7) 3.36 (85.3) 0.51 (13.1) 2.67 (67.8) 3.74 (95.0) 1.87 (47.5)
i ii 1
Operational Digitrip 3000 Time Overcurrent

Curve
Reset
High Load Communications Trip rms Amperes
2
4.66 (118.4) 0.38 (9.7) Typical
5.13 (130.3)
Pickup (xln)
3 4 5
Short Delay
Pickup (xln) Time
Amp Demand IA IB IC Select
Terminal Block 9.31 (236.5)
( 7.6)
Phase Ground Instantaneous Pickup (xln)
IG
In=5A (Secondary) or CT (Primary)
Settings/Test Program Test
Time/Trip Cause
V iew Settings
10.25 (260.3)
5.25 (133.4)
Program
Program Select Settings Raise Select Tests Lower T Test Save Settings
6 7
0.50 (12.7) 0.62 (15.7) 0.29 (7.4) 3.02 (76.7)
Test
Test
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1.05 6.7
Figure 4.1-9. Digitrip 3000 Fixed MountDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.1-10. Digitrip 3000 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
21
CA08104001E
4.1-6

General DescriptionDual-Source Power Supply
September 2011
Sheet 04 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Digitrip 3000 Relay with Dual-Source Power Supply
Functional Description
The Dual-Source Power Supply contains one AC voltage transformer and three AC current transformers. The AC voltage transformer is used to supply nominal AC control power to the unit. The current transformers are used to power the unit from the line current. Normally, the unit will operate from the AC auxiliary power. Because this voltage is usually obtained from the system containing the circuit that the relay is protecting, a fault on the protected line could cause the AC voltage to drop below an acceptable operating level. Below approximately 70V for Digitrip 3010 or 140V for Digitrip 3020, the DSPS switches over to current powering. All three current transformer secondaries are connected in series to supply this power. The DSPS will supply enough power to operate the Digitrip 3000 overcurrent relay in the tripped state with currents greater than 1.8 per unit rated secondary current, or 9A, in a singlephase. The DSPS will operate with three-phase currents in a tripped state with currents greater than 1.2 per unit or 6A rated secondary current.
Note: There will be no effect to the Digitrip 3000 relay trip time accuracy when the Dual-Source Power Supply switches from normal AC voltage to fault-current power.
Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source Power Supply
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Eatons Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source Power Supply (DSPS) is a microprocessor-based feeder overcurrent protective relay designed for AC auxiliary power applications. The DSPS versions, Digitrip 3010 and Digitrip 3020, include an integral power supply module that: Powers the relay from nominal 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz (Digitrip 3010 model) or 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz (Digitrip 3020 model) auxiliary power, which is normally connected and available Operates solely from the main current transformers (CTs) during a fault if the normally connected auxiliary AC voltage is not available, like an electromechanical relay or an electronic self-powered relay The transition from external auxiliary AC power to current power is smooth with no time delay
The CT powering capability is critical for tripping if the AC auxiliary supply or its fuses fail prior to the fault; or if the fault itself collapses, the supply voltage at the critical moment when tripping is needed. The Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source Power Supply design offers signicant performance and reliability benets over the electromechanical or selfpowered relays. It provides a full-time metering display, remote communications and self-monitoring functions. In addition, there is no calibration required. The burden is lower than most electromechanical and solid-state self-powered relays. The Digitrip 3000 with DSPS provides long-term, robust, maintenance-free performance, which cant be achieved with an energy-storing uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The DSPS will operate anytime there is a fault even after an extended power outage.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 017

Technical DataDual-Source Power Supply
4.1-7

6.03 (153.2) 6.72 (170.7) 0.51 (13.0) 5.45 (138.4) 3.74 (95.0)
i ii 1 2 3
AC Input 100-120 Vac, 50/60Hz
S/N000217 P 0 4D13125G01 Digitrip 3000
Terminal T Block
4 5 6 7
10.25 (260.3)
9.31 (236.5)
Digitrip 8010 Protective Relay with Dual-Source Power Supply
0.50 (12.7) 0.62 (15.7)
8
1.05 (26.7) 5.74 (145.8)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 4.1-11. Digitrip 3010/3020 Dual-Source Power SupplyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.1-12. Digitrip 3010/3020 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram

21
4.1-8

General DescriptionDrawout Case
September 2011
Sheet 04 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Digitrip 3000 Drawout Case Option
General Description
The quick-release Drawout Case option permits easy removal and replacement of the protective unit without disruption of the wiring. The CT circuits are self-shorting with make-before-break operation on removal. All voltage inputs, discrete inputs and contact outputs are disconnected while maintaining security against false tripping.
The terminal blocks feature a twostage disconnect operation. Removal of the Eatons Digitrip 3000 Inner Chassis will disconnect the trip circuits and short the CT secondaries before the unit control power is disconnected. Upon insertion of the Inner Chassis, the control power connections are made before the trip circuits are activated. This feature provides added security against false tripping.
Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay

5.23 (132.8) Hole for Viewing INCOM Communications Activity LED
9.51 (241.6)
Figure 4.1-13. Rear View of Digitrip 3000 Drawout Outer CaseTerminal Layout
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 019

Technical DataDrawout Case
4.1-9
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 4.1-14. Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
19 20 21
4.1-10 Protective and Predictive Relays Feeder Protection

Technical DataDigitrip 3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Standards, Certications and Ratings

Table 4.1-2. Digitrip 3000 Specications
Current Inputs
CTs: CT burden: In: Momentary: 5A secondary <0.004 ohm <0.1 VA at rated current (5A) 5A (secondary) or CT (primary) 100 x In for 1 second
Environment
Operating temperature: 30C to +55C Operating humidity: 0% to 95% Relative humidity (noncondensing) Storage temperature: 40C to +70C
Ground Overcurrent Pickup Ranges

Inverse time Overcurrent setting: Short delay setting: Instantaneous setting: 0.1 to 2.0) x In, None (26 settings) (1 to 11) x In, None (25 settings) (1 to 25) x In, None (30 settings)
CT (Primary) Settings Available

Phase and ground: 5/10/25/50/75/100/ 150/200/250/200/ 250/300/400/500/ 600/630/800/1000/ 1200/1250/1500/ 1600/2000/2400/ 2500/3000/3200/ 4000/5000
Auxiliary Alarm Contacts

5A continuous 5A break at 120/240 Vac
Time Delay Settings

Inverse time overcurrent time multiplier: It, I2t, I4t Curve: 0.2 to 40 (47 settings) FLAT: 0.2 to 2 (21 settings) ANSI (all): 0.1 to 5.0 (50 settings) IEC (all): 0.025 to 1.00 (40 settings) 0.05 to 1.5 sec (22 settings)
Tests
Dielectric strength: Current inputs: 3000 Vac for 1 minute phase to phase Seismic test: Meets requirements for UBC and California Building Code Zone 4 ZPA = 3.5 Standards: ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2 IEC 255 UL 1053
Input Voltage DT-30XX

Nominal: 22 to 250 Vdc 120 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 28 to 280 Vdc 90 to 254 Vac 50/60 Hz
Short delay time:
Current Monitoring
True rms sensing: Display accuracy: Three-phase and ground 1% of full scale [ln] from 0.04 x ln to 1 x In 2% of full scale [ln] from 1 x ln to 2 x In Average demand over 5 minute sampling window 85% of inverse time overcurrent setting
Operating range:
Power consumption: 24 48 125 250 Vdc 10W Vdc Vdc Vdc
Phase and Ground Time-Current Curves

120 Vdc 240 Vac Thermal: It (moderately inverse) I2t (very inverse) I4t (extremely inverse) FLAT (denite time) Ampere demand: High load:
10W 10W 10W 10 VA 18 VA
DT
Nominal: operating range:
3010
120 Vac 70 132 Vac
3020
240 Vac 140 264 Vac 15 VA
3030
24/48 Vdc
ANSI: (per ANSI C37.112, 1996)
Moderately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse
Timing Accuracy
Inverse time overcurrent time: Short delay time: Standards: 10% at >1.5 x pickup 50 ms ANSI C37.90 IEC 255 UL 1053
Power consumption: 15 VA
IEC: (per IEC 255-3, 1989)
Trip and Communications Close Output Contacts

IEC-A (moderately inverse) IEC-B (very inverse) IEC-C (extremely inverse) IEC-D (denite time)
Communications
PowerNet compatible: Baud rate: Built-in INCOM 1200 or 9600 baud
Phase Overcurrent Pickup Ranges

Make 30A for 0.25 seconds 0.25A break at 250 Vdc 5A break at 120/240 Vac Meets ANSI C37.90, paragraph 6.7 Inverse time overcurrent setting: Short delay setting: Instantaneous setting:

(0.2 to 2.2) x In (28 settings) (1 to 11) x In, None (25 settings) (1 to 25) x In, None (30 settings)
Refer to Burden Curves for Digitrip 3010/3020. For Ground Pickup < 0.2pu; Time Tolerance 15%.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 021

General DescriptionFP-4000
4.1-11
FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Six gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software or contact input. The FP-4000 feeder protection relay has a mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 100 sequence of event records, detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The FP-4000 feeder protection relay has eight programmable binary inputs, ve normally opened heavy-duty outputs and one Form C signal relay.
Metering

Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load prole over time) Trip coil monitor Close coil monitor Breaker wear (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (up to 16 events) Fault data logs (up to 16 events) Sequence of events report (up to 100 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable Local communication port Remote communication port: FSK RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: INCOM Modbus Conguration software
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Monitoring

FP-4000 Relay
Features
Protection
General Description
Eatons FP-4000 feeder protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessorbased relay for feeder circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as primary protection for main, feeder and tie circuit breaker applications and transformers, and as backup protection for high voltage lines and differential protection. The FP-4000 feeder protection relay provides complete current and voltage protection and metering. The relay has four current inputs rated for 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground, delta or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection. The multiple settings groups can be used for arc ash mitigation when an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only, is activated using a selector switch and the programmable I/O in the FP-4000. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and for retrieval of data. LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An INCOM communication port on the back of the relay is standard for local area networking. Optional communication ports and protocols are available.
CA08104001E
Phase overcurrent: Two-stage instantaneous with timers (50P-1 and 50P-2) Inverse time overcurrent (51P-1) 10 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Two independent ground overcurrent elements (one measured-IX and one calculated IR): Two-stage instantaneous with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2) (50R-1, 50R-2) Inverse time overcurrent (51X, 51R) 10 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46) Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47) Under/overvoltage (27/59) Under/overfrequency (81U/81O) Power factor (55) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)
Communication

Control Functions
Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable logic gates and timers Multiple setting groups Bus transfer logic

Table 4.1-3. Catalog Numbering Selection
FP4 2 01 - 0 1
Current Range 2 = 5A 3 = 1A Packaging 1 = Fixed case Control Voltage 0 = 48125 Vac/dc 1 = 100240 Vac/dc Communications 0 = INCOM 1 = Modbus
20 21

September 2011
Sheet 04 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Eatons FP-4000 feeder protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions.
Voltage Protection
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a three-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The three-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a singlephase, two out of three phases, or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/ reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and an adjustable time delay.
Metering
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay provides complete and accurate metering of the voltages, currents, frequency, power, power factor and energy. Information is available on the individual phase magnitude, angles and the symmetrical component values of positive, negative and zero sequence current and voltage. The FP-4000 feeder protection relay includes a programmable demand feature and stores the maximum demand of current, kW, kVAR and kVA since last reset. The demand is user-congurable for xed or sliding window, the time interval is adjustable and the demand interval can be synchronized to a demand pulse. Energy usage direction and net values are given for kWh, kVARh and kVAh. The relay monitors, logs and time stamps minimum and maximum values for current, voltage, watts, VARs, VA, power factor and frequency. The FP-4000 feeder protection relay has metered set points that can be used to activate an output for an alarm, control or trip function. For example, you might want to close a contact to insert a capacitor bank if the power factor is less than 0.9 lagging or provide an alarm if the demand is greater than a preset value.
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground overcurrent protection. There are two independent ground overcurrent elements. The rst ground element X uses the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The second ground element R uses a calculated 3Io current obtained from the sum of the three-phase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a three-phase, four-wire system.
Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements provides three protection functions. Each element contains an inverse-time overcurrent (51) function and two instantaneous overcurrent (50) functions with adjustable timers.
Flexible Phase Rotation

The FP-4000 feeder protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or an A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.
Frequency Protection
The FP-4000 relay provides under/over frequency (81U/81O) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Inverse-Time Characteristics
There are 10 user-selectable inversetime overcurrent curve characteristics. The user can select from the ANSI, IEC or thermal curve families and can select instantaneous or time delay reset characteristics.
Breaker Failure
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or an external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or to trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.
PowerPort and PowerNet Protection Overview Screen
21
September 2011
Sheet 04 023

4.1-13
Loading Prole
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay has memory available to store metered data on a predetermined interval. The log holds data from 1024 time sample intervals. This information can be retrieved and plotted with a PC to show the loading prole of a given circuit over a period of time. For example, if the time interval is set for 15 minutes, then the relay will store a metered data prole over an approximate 10-day period.
Trip Log
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay will store a maximum of 16 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution and reference an event number associated with oscillographic and sequence of event data. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Programmable Logic
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay provides six logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are six independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Waveform Capture
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all voltage and current signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The FP-4000 relay can record 16 records of 16 cycles of data. Fewer records of longer duration can be selected and recorded. The waveform capture is initiated by a trip, pickup, external contact, front panel interface or through the remote communications port.
Sequence of Events Records

The FP-4000 feeder protection relay records a maximum of 100 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and self-diagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in an FIFO in chronological order.
Integral User Interface

The front panel user interface has a 4.00 x 20.00-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alphanumeric vacuum uorescent display for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm and trip indication. Pushbuttons are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through data and settings. A security door restricts access to the program and test modes. In addition, the relay settings and test functions can be password protected.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 024
i ii 1 2 3
CB Phase CTs (3) 51P 50 P1 50 P2 50 P3 461 462 55A 55D 50 BF CALC 31o = IR 51R 50 R1 50 R2 50 R3 Optional Zero Sequence CT METERING V, I, F, PF, W, VARS, VA Energy Demand Min./Max. %THD Phasors Data Logger Waveform SER Fault Records Main VTs (2) or (3)
59 M1 59 M2 27 M1 27 M2 471
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Load
Trip Coil Monitor
472 81 U1 81 U2 81 O1
51X
50 X1
50 X2
50 X3
Optional VT (1) 59 A1 59 A2 27 A1 27 A2 FP-4000
81 O2
11
Figure 4.1-15. FP-4000 Relay Typical One-Line Diagram
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Programmable I/O
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay provides ve heavy-duty, trip-rated, normally open contacts and two Form C auxiliary contacts. Two trip rated contacts are tted with a circuit continuity feature for monitoring the trip or close circuits. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (failsafe) mode. There are eight user-congurable discrete inputs that accept a dry contact. Each input and output is user-programmable for maximum application exibility.
Communication Software
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort. It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration, and to view metered values and stored data. PowerPort is free and can be downloaded from the Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com. The second package is PowerNet. PowerNet is a power management software package that is designed for continuous, remote monitoring of many devices. It provides all the functionality of PowerPort plus additional functions such as billing, trending and graphics. Contact your local Eaton representative for more information on PowerNet software.
Transview
Transview is a COMTRADE le viewer that is required in addition to the PowerNet waveform client to view FP-4000 waveforms. Users can view individual voltage and current waveforms, as well as phasers and digital input/output and internal protection functions such as undervoltage and current unbalance.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 025

Technical DataFP-4000
4.1-15

Table 4.1-4. FP-4000 Specications
i
Metering Accuracy (Continued)
Input signal Frequency necessary for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal, 5763 Hz (5%) 50 Hz nominal, 4753 Hz (5%) Clock accuracy: Free running 1 Minute/month at 25C Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when present.
Compliance
UL Recognized, File # E154862 UL 1053 (1994) Recognized ANSI C37.90 (1989) EN 55011 (1991) EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Discrete Inputs
Number of contact inputs: Rating: 8 48 Vdc wetting voltage provided with internal ground only
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Emission Tests
EN 55011 (1991): Group 1 Class A (CISPR-11, Class A) FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1: Part 15 Subpart b Class A
Output Contacts
Number of output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
Immunity Tests
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989): ANSI C37.90.2 (1995): EN 61000-4-2 (1995): EN 61000-4-3 (1997): EN 61000-4-4 (1995): EN 61000-4-5 (1995): EN 61000-4-6 (1996): EN 61000-4-11 (1994): Surge withstand capability EMI immunity to 35 V/m ESD rating of 8 kV Radiated EM eld at 10 V/m Fast transient burst at 2 kV Surge immunity test Conducted RF at 10 V/m Voltage dips and variations
Protective Functions Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics 51, 51N, 51G:
Rating of Output Contacts

Momentary: Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 seconds Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc (resistive) Break 5A at 120 Vac 5A at 120 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc
Continuous: Moderate, very, extremely, IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, at
Control Power
Control voltage: Operating voltage: Interruption ride-through time: Power consumption: 48125 Vac/dc 100240 Vac/dc 55264 Vac 38300 Vdc 20 cycle interruption of nominal AC supply 20 VA maximum
Inverse time overcurrent pick-up ranges 51, 51N, 51G: 0.1 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps Inverse time overcurrent multipliers 51, 51N, 51G: 0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps Inverse time delay range 51, 51N, 51G: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps Instantaneous overcurrent pickup ranges 50, 50N, 50G: 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps Pick-up accuracy 50/51: 1% (at 0.12 per unit) time accuracy 51, 51N, 51G: 3% or 30 ms
Logic and Control Functions

Six programmable logic gates for AND, OR, NAND, NOR operation Two latching (ip/op) gates Six timer gates provide on/off delays
INCOM Communications
Baud rate: Maximum distance: Protocol: 9600 xed 10,000 feet (3048m) INCOM
RS-485 Communication, Rear Panel

Baud rate: Protocol: 9.2k, 9.6k Modbus RTU
Current Inputs
Nominal (In): CT rating: CT burdens: 1A or 5A 2 x In continuous 50 x In for 1 second < 0.25 VA at 5A (nominal) < 0.05 VA at 1A (nominal)
Voltage Unbalance (47)

Threshold (minimum voltage) 1 to 100V in 1V steps. % V2/V1: 4 to 40% in 1% Steps Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
RS-232 Communication, Front Panel

Baud rate: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k Connector standard 9-pin subminiature, three-wire protocol: INCOM
Current Unbalance (46)

Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps. % I2/I1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Operating temperature: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F) product tested to +85C 40C to +85C (40F to +185F) 5% to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) 0 to 6350 feet (0 to 2500m) above mean sea level
Voltage Inputs
Nominal: Operating range: Burden: 120 Vac 69150 Vac <0.015 at 120 Vac 1 megaohm
12 13 14 15
Under/Overvoltage Protection (27/59)

Pickup range: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: 10 to 150V in 1V steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 45 to 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 0.1 to 5.0 per unit in 0.01 steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Storage temperature: Humidity:
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: 0.5% or 0.025A from 0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully offset current waveform 0.5% of full scale (In) from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit fully offset current waveform 0.5% or 0.2V from 0160 Vac
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810)

Altitude:
Ground current:
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
Dimensions Behind Panel

Height: Width: Depth: 10.15 inches (257.9 mm) 7.62 inches (193.5 mm) 7.48 inches (190.0 mm)
Phase voltage: Frequency measurement accuracy: Phase angle: Power metering accuracy: Metering accuracy temperature range: Temperature range:
Power Factor (55)

Trigger/Reset Threshold: Time delay: 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
16 17 18
0.02 Hz 1 1.5% 0C to 50C 5% for operation below 0C and above 50C
In Front of Panel
Height: Width: Depth: 10.15 inches (257.9mm) 7.62 inches (193.5 mm) 0.62 inches (15.7 mm)
Weight
9.0 lbs (4.1 kg)
19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Six gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software or contact input. The FP-5000 feeder protection relay has a mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 100 sequence of event records, detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The FP-5000 feeder protection relay has eight programmable binary inputs, ve normally opened heavyduty outputs and one Form C signal relay. It can be powered from 48 Vdc to 125 Vdc or 120 Vac to auxiliary power.
Sync check (25) Power factor (55) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)

Metering

FP-5000 Relay
Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load prole over time) Trip coil monitor Close coil monitor Breaker wear (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (up to 16 events) Fault data logs (up to 16 events) Sequence of events report (up to 100 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable Local communication port Remote communication port: FSK RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: INCOM Modbus Conguration software Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable logic gates and timers Multiple setting groups Bus transfer logic Cold load pickup Loss of potential (PT blown fuses)
General Description
Eatons FP-5000 feeder protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessorbased relay for feeder circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as primary protection for main, feeder and tie circuit breaker applications, transformers and as backup protection for high voltage lines and differential protection. The FP-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete current and voltage protection and metering in a single, compact drawout case. The relay has four current inputs rated for 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground, delta or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection. The multiple settings groups can be used for arc ash mitigation when an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only, is activated using a selector switch and the programmable I/O in the FP-5000. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data. LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An INCOM communication port on the back of the relay is standard for local area networking. Optional communication ports and protocols are available.
Features
Protection
Monitoring

Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse or both): Two-stage instantaneous with timers (50P-1 and 50P-2) Two Inverse time overcurrent (51P-1 and 51P-2) Directional current (67) 10 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Voltage restrained time overcurrent (51VR) Two independent ground directional overcurrent elements (one measured-IX and one calculated IR): Two-stage instantaneous with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2) (50R-1, 50R-2) Inverse time overcurrent (51X, 51R) Ground directional polarizing (67N) 3 Vo, Ipol, negative sequence 10 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46) Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47) Under/overvoltage (27/59) Under/overfrequency (81U/81O) Reverse/forward power (32-1, 32-2)
Communication

Control Functions

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 027

4.1-17
Table 4.1-5. Catalog Numbering Selection
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
FP5 2 00 - 0 1
Current Range 2 = 5A 3 = 1A Packaging 0 = Drawout 1 = Fixed case Control Voltage 0 = 48125 Vac/dc 1 = 100240 Vac/dc Communications 0 = INCOM 1 = Modbus
Breaker Failure
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.
Eatons FP-5000 feeder protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection, and metering functions.
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P-2). This modication of the pickup overcurrent level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The FP-5000 uses the simple linear model below to determine the effective pickup value.
Pickup % 100 %
Directional Overcurrent Protection

The FP-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground directional overcurrent protection. There are two independent ground overcurrent elements. The rst ground element X uses the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The second ground element R uses a calculated 3Io current obtained from the sum of the three-phase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a three-phase, four-wire system. Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements provides three protection functions. Each element contains an inverse-time overcurrent (51) function and two instantaneous overcurrent (50) functions with adjustable timers. Phase direction is a function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault. This function is selectable to operate in the forward, reverse or both directions. Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function is selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions.
Voltage Protection
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a three-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The three-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a singlephase, two out of three phases, or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/ reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
25 %
Figure 4.1-16. Voltage Restraint Coil Pickup Characteristics
Sync Check
The sync check function is provided for double-ended power source applications. The sync check monitors voltage magnitude, phase angle and slip frequency between the bus and line. It also incorporates breaker close time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live line and live bus live line features.

The FP-5000 feeder protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for power owing through a feeder. There are two elements to be congured: operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over power conditions. Reverse power is typically applied to generator or motor applications while under power is generally applied to load or generation loss.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionFP-5000 Metering
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete and accurate metering of the voltages, currents, frequency, power, power factor and energy. Information is available on the individual phase magnitude, angles and the symmetrical component values of positive, negative and zero sequence current and voltage. The FP-5000 feeder protection relay includes a programmable demand feature and stores the maximum demand of current, kW, kVAR and kVA since last reset. The demand is user-congurable for xed or sliding window, the time interval is adjustable and the demand interval can be synchronized to a demand pulse. Energy usage direction and net values are given for kWh, kVARh and kVAh. The relay monitors, logs and time stamps minimum and maximum values for current, voltage, watts, VARs, VA, power factor and frequency. The FP-5000 feeder protection relay has metered set points that can be used to activate an output for an alarm, control or trip function. For example, you might want to close a contact to insert a capacitor bank if the power factor is less than 0.9 lagging or provide an alarm if the demand is greater than a preset value.
September 2011
Sheet 04 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Trip Log
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay will store a maximum of 16 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution and reference an event number associated with oscillographic and sequence of event data. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all voltage and current signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The FP-5000 relay can record 16 records of 16 cycles of data. Fewer records of longer duration can be selected and recorded. The waveform capture is initiated by a trip, pickup, external contact, front panel interface or through the remote communications port.
or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are six independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.

The front panel user interface has a 4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alphanumeric vacuum uorescent display for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm and trip indication. Pushbuttons are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through data and settings. A security door restricts access to the program and test modes. In addition, the relay settings and test functions can be password protected.
Programmable Logic
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay provides six logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special
Loading Prole
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay has memory available to store metered data on a predetermined interval. The log holds data from 1024 time sample intervals. This information can be retrieved and plotted with a PC to show the loading prole of a given circuit over a period of time. For example, if the time interval is set for 15 minutes, then the relay will store a metered data prole over an approximate 10-day period.

FP-5000 Set Point Overview
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 029

4.1-19
i ii
Metering V, I, F, PF, W, VARS, VA Energy Demand Min./Max. % THD Phasors Data Logger Waveform SER Fault Records
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FP-5000
8 9
Load
Programmable I/O
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort. It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration and to view metered values and stored data. PowerPort is free and can be downloaded from the Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com. The second package is PowerNet. PowerNet is a power management software package that is designed for continuous, remote monitoring of many devices. It provides all the functionality of PowerPort plus additional functions such as billing, trending and graphics. Contact your local Eaton representative for more information on PowerNet software.
Transview
Transview is a COMTRADE le viewer that is required in addition to the PowerNet waveform client to view FP-5000 waveforms. Users can view individual voltage and current waveforms, as well as phasers and digital input/output and internal protection functions such as undervoltage and current unbalance.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 030
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Compliance
UL Recognized, File # E154862 UL 1053 (1994) Recognized ANSI C37.90 (1989) EN 55011 (1991) EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Metering Accuracy (Continued)

Input signal frequency necessary for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal, 5763 Hz (5%) 50 Hz nominal, 4753 Hz (5%) Clock accuracy: Free running 1 Minute/month at 25C Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when present.
Discrete Inputs
Number of contact inputs: Rating: 8 48 Vdc wetting voltage provided with internal ground only
Emission Tests
Output Contacts
Number of output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
Immunity Tests
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989): ANSI C37.90.2 (1995): EN 61000-4-2 (1995): EN 61000-4-3 (1997): EN 61000-4-4 (1995): EN 61000-4-5 (1995): EN 61000-4-6 (1996): EN 61000-4-11 (1994): Surge withstand capability EMI immunity to 35 V/m ESD rating of 8 kV Radiated EM eld at 10 V/m Fast transient burst at 2 kV Surge immunity test Conducted RF at 10 V/m Voltage dips and variations
Protective Functions Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics 51, 51N, 51G: Inverse time overcurrent pickup ranges 51, 51N, 51G: Inverse time overcurrent multipliers 51, 51N, 51G: Inverse time delay range 51, 51N, 51G: Instantaneous overcurrent pickup ranges 50, 50N, 50G: Pickup accuracy 50/51: Time accuracy 51, 51N, 51G: Directional 67, 67N, 67G:

Momentary: Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 seconds Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc (resistive) Break 5A at 120 Vac 5A at 120 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc
Continuous: Moderate, very, extremely, IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, Flat

0.1 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Control Power
Control voltage: Operating voltage: Interruption ride-through time: Power consumption: 48250 Vdc 100240 Vac 55264 Vac 38300 Vdc 20 cycle interruption of nominal AC supply 20 VA maximum
0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps 1% (at 0.12 per unit)
3% or 30 ms Reverse overcurrentsame data as above for reverse

Current Inputs
Nominal (In): CT rating: CT burdens: 1A or 5A 2 x In continuous 50 x In for 1 second < 0.25 VA at 5A (nominal) < 0.05 VA at 1A (nominal)

Baud rate: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k Connector standard nine-pin subminiature, three-wire protocol: INCOM

Threshold (Minimum Voltage) 1 to 100V in 1V steps. % V2/V1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Operating temperature: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F) product tested to +85C 40C to +85C (40F to +185F) 5% to 95% Relative humidity (noncondensing) 0 to 6350 feet (0 to 2500m) above mean sea level
Voltage Inputs
Nominal: Operating range: Burden: 120 Vac 69150 Vac <0.015 at 120 Vac 1 megaohm

Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps. % I2/I1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Storage temperature: Humidity:
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: 0.5% or 0.025A from 0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully offset current waveform 0.5% of full scale (In) from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit fully offset current waveform 0.5% or 0.2V from 0160 Vac
Under/Overvoltage Protection (27/59)

Pickup range: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: 10 to 150V in 1 volt steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 45 to 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 0.1 to 5.0 per unit in 0.01 steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps Altitude:
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810) Dimensions Behind Panel

Height: Width: Depth:
Ground current:
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) Power Protection (32)
Phase voltage: Frequency measurement Accuracy: Phase angle: Power metering accuracy: Metering accuracy temperature range: Temperature range:
6.70 inches (170.2 mm) 5.30 inches (134.6 mm) 6.90 inches (175.3 mm)
0.02 Hz 1 1.5% 0C to 50C 5% for operation below 0C and above 50C
Forward/reverse over/under Pickup accuracy: 1.0% Trip time accuracy: 0 to 12 cycles or 0.1% whichever is greater
In Front of Panel
Height: Width: Depth: 11.34 Inches (288.0 mm) 7.72 Inches (196.1 mm) 0.80 Inches (20.3 mm)
Sync Check (25)

Phase angle: Slip frequency: Voltage differential: Breaker close time: 1 to 60 0.1 to 2 Hz 1 to 100V 0 to 9999 cycles
Weight
12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
Power Factor (55)

Trigger/reset threshold: 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps Time delay: 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 031

4.1-21
communication port on the back of the relay is standard for local area networking. Optional communication ports and protocols are available. The FP-6000 feeder protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Six gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the FP-6000 relay ideally suited for main-tie-main and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software or contact input. The FP-6000 feeder protection relay has a mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 100 sequence of event records, detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The FP-6000 feeder protection relay has eight programmable binary inputs, ve normally opened heavyduty outputs and one Form C signal relay. It can be powered from 48 Vdc to 250 Vdc or 120 Vac to 240 Vac auxiliary power.
Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47) Under/overvoltage (27/59) Under/overfrequency (81U/81O) Reverse/forward power (32-1, 32-2, 32-3) Reverse/forward VARs (32V-1, 32V-2, 32V-3) Thermal Protection (49DT, 49MT, 49DA, 49MA) Sync check (25) Power factor (55) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load prole over time) RTD temperatures Trip coil monitor Close coil monitor Breaker wear (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (up to 16 events) Fault data logs (up to 16 events) Sequence of events report (up to 100 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable Local communication port Remote communication port: FSK RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: INCOM Modbus Conguration software
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Metering

FP-6000 Relay
General Description
Eatons FP-6000 feeder protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessorbased relay for feeder circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as a reclosing relay; primary protection on feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker applications; or as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines and differential protection. The FP-6000 feeder protection relay provides complete current, voltage and power protection and metering in a single, compact drawout case. The relay has four current inputs rated 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection. The FP-6000 is the only relay in its class that offers a exible yet simple reclosing protection. Its compact design makes it ideal for polemounted recloser controls. The multiple settings groups can be used for arc ash mitigation when an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only, is activated using a selector switch and the programmable I/O in the FP-6000. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data. LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An INCOM
CA08104001E
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse or both): Two-stage instantaneous with timers (50P-1 and 50P-2) Two Inverse time overcurrent (51P-1 and 51P-2) Directional current (67) 10 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Voltage restrained time overcurrent (51VR) Two independent ground directional overcurrent elements (one measuredIX and one calculated IR): Two-stage instantaneous with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2) (50R-1, 50R-2) Inverse time overcurrent (51X, 51R) Ground directional polarizing (67N) 3 Vo, Ipol, negative sequence 10 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46)
Monitoring

Communication


Table 4.1-7. FP-6000 Catalog Numbering Selection
September 2011
Sheet 04 032
i ii
Reverse VARs
Reverse VARs can be used to detect loss of excitation in synchronous machines. There are three elements to be congured: operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over VARs conditions.
FP6 2 00 - 0 1
Current Range Packaging 0 = Drawout Control Voltage 0 = 48125 Vac/dc 1 = 100240 Vac/dc
1 2
2 = 5A 3 = 1A
Communications Protocol 0 = INCOM 1 = Modbus RTU
Thermal Protection
The FP-6000 has a ber optic port to communicate to URTD, which is offered separately and is able to provide 11 direct temperature measurements. With URTD connected to the relay, the FP-6000 is able to provide fan control, and temperaturerelated overload alarm, and trip functions. Each RTD can be assigned to some dedicated spots, such as windings, rotor bearing, load bearing, top oil and user-dened spots.
Control Functions
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable logic gates and timers Multiple setting groups Bus transfer logic Cold load pickup Loss of potential (PT blown fuses) Autoreclose function (79) Auto zone coordination
Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function is selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions.

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P-2). This modication of the pickup overcurrent level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The FP-6000 uses the simple linear model below to determine the effective pickup value.
Pickup % 100 %
Eatons FP-6000 feeder protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The base relay includes all of the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions.
Breaker Failure
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or to trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.

The FP-6000 feeder protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground directional overcurrent protection. There are two independent ground overcurrent elements. The rst ground element X uses the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The second ground element R uses a calculated 3Io current obtained from the sum of the three-phase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a three-phase, four-wire system. Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements provides three protection functions. Each element contains an inverse-time overcurrent (51) function and two instantaneous overcurrent (50) functions with adjustable timers. Phase direction is a function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault. This function is selectable to operate in the forward, reverse or both directions.
25 %
Voltage Protection
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a three-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The three-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a singlephase, two out of three phases, or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/ reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Sync Check
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for power owing through a feeder. There are three elements to be congured: operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over power conditions. Reverse power is typically applied to generator or motor applications while under power is generally applied to load or generation loss.

The FP-6000 feeder protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 033

4.1-23
For example, if the time interval is set for 15 minutes, then the relay will store a metered data prole over an approximate 10-day period.
The waveform capture is initiated by a trip, pickup, external contact, front panel interface or through the remote communications port.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Programmable Logic
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay provides six logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are six independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.
Autoreclosing Logic
The FP-6000 provides a four shotrecloser scheme. Autoreclosing is normally used by the utilities in their distribution and transmission lines, but it can be used in commercial and industrial applications with long overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that occur on overhead lines are transient in nature. Tripping of a circuit breaker normally clears a transient fault and reclosing of the circuit breaker restores power back to the circuit.
Trip Log
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay will store a maximum of 16 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution and reference an event number associated with oscillographic and sequence of event data. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Metering
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay provides complete and accurate metering of the voltages, currents, frequency, power, power factor, energy and RTD temperatures. Information is available on the individual phase magnitude, angles and the symmetrical component values of positive, negative and zero sequence current and voltage. The FP-6000 feeder protection relay includes a programmable demand feature and stores the maximum demand of current, kW, kVAR and kVA since last reset. The demand is user congurable for xed or sliding window, the time interval is adjustable and the demand interval can be synchronized to a demand pulse. Energy usage direction and net values are given for kWh, kVARh and kVAh. The relay monitors, logs and time stamps minimum and maximum values for current, voltage, watts, VARs, VA, power factor and frequency. The FP-6000 feeder protection relay has metered set points that can be used to activate an output for an alarm, control or trip function. For example, you might want to close a contact to insert a capacitor bank if the power factor is less than 0.9 lagging or provide an alarm if the demand is greater than a preset value.

The front panel user interface has a 4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alphanumeric vacuum uorescent display for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm and trip indication. Pushbuttons are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through data and settings. A security door restricts access to the program and test modes. In addition, the relay settings and test functions can be password protected.
Waveform Capture
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all voltage and current signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The FP-6000 relay can record 16 records of 16 cycles of data. Fewer records of longer duration can be selected and recorded.
Loading Prole
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay has memory available to store metered data on a predetermined interval. The log holds data from 1024 time sample intervals. This information can be retrieved and plotted with a PC to show the loading prole of a given circuit over a period of time.
CA08104001E
FP-6000 Set Point Overview
21

September 2011
Sheet 04 034
i ii
32V -1 32V -2 32V -3
1 2 3
79 49D 42M
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Load
Metering V, I, F, PF, W, VARS, VA Energy Demand Min./Max. % THD Phasors Data Logger Waveform SER Fault Records
FP-6000
Programmable I/O
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort. It runs on a PC or a laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration, and to view metered values and stored data. PowerPort is free and can be downloaded from the Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com.
The second package is Power Xpert Software. Power Xpert Software is a power management software package that is designed for continuous, remote monitoring of many devices. It provides all the functionality of PowerPort plus additional functions such as billing, trending and graphics. Contact your local Eaton representative for more information on Power Xpert Software.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 035

4.1-25

i
Principal Parameters
Current (amperes) Ia, Ib, Ic, Ir, Ix Sequence currents Main voltage Sequence voltages Auxiliary voltage Phase angle for I and V System frequency Ampere demand Watt demand Range 0.02 to 20 per unit 0.02 to 20 per unit 0 to 160V 0 to 160V 0 to 250V 0 to 360 45 to 65 Hz 0.02 to 20 per unit 0 to 4000 MW Accuracy at < 2 + CT rating: 0.5% of CT rating at > 2 + CT rating: 0.5% of reading 1% of nominal 0.5% of nominal 0.2V 1% of nominal 1% of nominal 1 at nominal voltage 0.02 Hz 0.5% 1.0% FS for PF = unity 1.5% FS for PF = 0.5 to 0.5
Compliance
UL Recognized, File # E154862 (FP6200-00 5A CT model only) UL 1053 (1994) Recognized ANSI C37.90 (1989) EN 55011 (1991) EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Emission Tests
Watts 0 to 4000 MW Watthours 0 to 999.999 MWh Immunity Tests VAR demand 0 to 4000 MVAR ANSI C37.90.1 (1989): Surge withstand capability VARs 0 to 4000 MVAR ANSI C37.90.2 (1995): EMI immunity to 35 V/m VAR-hours 0 to 999.999 MVARh EN 61000-4-2 (1995): ESD rating of 8 kV VA demand 0 to 4000 MVA EN 61000-4-3 (1997): Radiated EM eld at 10 V/m VA 0 to 4000 MVA EN 61000-4-4 (1995): Fast transient burst at 2 kV VA-hours 0 to 999,999 MVAh EN 61000-4-5 (1995): Surge immunity test Apparent power factor 1 to +1 EN 61000-4-6 (1996): Conducted RF at 10 V/m Displacement power factor 1 to +1 EN 61000-4-8: Power frequency magnetic Total harmonic distortion 0 to 9999 1% eld immunity Other metering accuracy 1% EN 61000-4-11 (1994): Voltage dips and variations FS (full scale) = 3 x CT rating x nominal L-N voltage.
1.5% FS for PF = 0.5 to 0.5 1% FS
0.02 for load currents above 20% rated 0.02 for load currents above 20% rated
Control Power
Control voltage: 48125 Vdc 100120 Vac 100250 Vdc 100240 Vac 38150 Vdc 55132 Vac 80308 Vdc 55264 Vac 83 ms at 120V, 60 Hz AC 250 ms at 110 Vdc/ 300 ms at Vac 20 VA maximum 22 VA maximum
Protective Functions Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection

Inverse characteristics: Moderate, very, extremely, IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, at TOC (51) pickup range: 0.02 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps Time multipliers: 0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps IOC (50) pickup range: 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps Pickup accuracy: 1% (at 0.1 to 2 per unit) Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps Time accuracy: 3% or 30 ms Directional (67, 67N, 67G): forward, reverse or both
Protective Functions (continued) Power Protection (32)

Direction: forward/reverse Criterion: over/under Pickup range: 0.02 to 4 pu Note: 1pu = 3 x CT secondary rating x VT secondary rating for wye; the square root of 3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating for open delta. Pickup accuracy: 1.0% Trip time accuracy: 0 to 2 cycles or 0.1%, whichever is greater
Operating voltage:
Interruption ride-through time:
Power consumption:

Threshold (minimum voltage): % V2/V1: Time delay: Threshold (minimum current): % I2/I1: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: Source: Criterion: Pickup range: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: Pickup range: Time delay: 1 to 100V in 1 volt steps 2 to 40% in 1% steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
VAR Protection (32V)

Direction: forward/reverse Criterion: over/under Pickup range: 0.02 to 4 pu Note: 1pu = 3 x CT secondary rating x VT secondary rating for wye; the square root of 3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating for open delta. Pickup accuracy: 1.0% Trip time accuracy: 0 to 2 cycles or 0.1%, whichever is greater
Current Inputs
CT ratings: 2 x In at 5A continuous 3 x In at 1A continuous 80 x In at 5A for 1 second 100 x In at 1A for 1 second < 0.25 VA at 5A (nominal) < 0.05 VA at 1A (nominal)

0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps 2 to 40% in 1% steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 10 to 150V in 1 volt steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps calculated, measure phasor, rms 5 to 250V in 1V steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 45 to 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps 0.02 to 5.0 per unit in 0.01 steps 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
CT burdens:
Voltage Inputs
Nominal: Operating range: Burden: 0120 Vac line to common 0144 Vac (+20%) Line to common 1 megaohm input
Under/Overvoltage Protection (27/59) Neutral Voltage Protection (59N)
Thermal Protection (49)

Pickup range: Time delay: 0 to 199C or 0 to 390F 0.1 to 3500 seg
Sync Check (25)

Phase angle: Slip frequency: Voltage differential: Breaker close time: 1 to 60 0.1 to 2 Hz 1 to 100V 0 to 9999 cycles
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/O) Metering Accuracy

Input Signal Frequency Necessary for Accurate Operation: 60 Hz nominal, 5763 Hz (5%) 50 Hz nominal, 4753 Hz (5%) Frequency measuring accuracy: 0.02 Hz Clock accuracy: Free running 1 minute/ month at 25C (77F) Automatically updated by PowerNet host when present
Discrete Inputs
Number of contact inputs: 8 Rating: 48 Vdc wetting voltage provided with internal ground only
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) Power Factor (55)

Trigger/reset threshold: 0.5 to 1 lag; 0.5 to 0.99 lead in 0.01 steps Time delay: 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
Output Contacts
Number of contact inputs: 5 Form A and 2 Form C
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Standards, Certications and Ratings (Continued)

Table 4.1-8. FP-6000 Specications (Continued)

Momentary: Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 seconds Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc (resistive) Break 5A at 120/240 Vac 5A at 120/240 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc
Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Humidity: Altitude: 40C to +60C (40F to +140F) 40C to +85C (40F to +185F) 5% to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) 0 to 6350 feet (0 to 2500m) Above Mean Sea Level
Continuous:

Dimensions Behind Panel


Baud rate: Connector standard: Protocol: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k 9-pin subminiature, 3-wire INCOM
In Front of Panel

Weight
12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 037

General DescriptionEDR-3000
4.1-27
EDR-3000 Distribution Relay
General
The EDR-3000 microprocessor-based relay provides reliable three-phase and ground overcurrent protection for all voltage levels. It can be used for any application where instantaneous and/or time overcurrent protection is required. It is most commonly used as primary feeder circuit protection, as in Figure 4.1-20.
The EDR-3000 may be connected to the secondary side of a delta-wye grounded transformer with the ground element connected to a separate CT in the neutral connection of the transformer. With this connection, a lower CT ratio and a pickup setting can be used to provide more sensitive ground fault protection especially for resistance grounded systems (see Figure 4.1-22).
i ii 1 2 3
Resistor
50
51
50G
51G
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50
51
50G CB 52
51G
CB
EDR-3000
EDR-3000 Relay
EDR-3000
General Description
The EDR-3000 protective relay is a multifunction, microprocessor-based overcurrent relay designed for both ANSI and IEC applications. It is a panel-mounted, self-contained unit that operates from either AC or DC control power. The EDR-3000 design provides true rms and fundamental sensing of each phase and ground current. Only one unit is required for each three-phase circuit. Current monitoring and operator selectable protective functions are integral to each relay. The EDR-3000 relay operates from the 5A or 1A secondary output of standard current transformers. Current transformer ratio information is quickly programmed into the unit via settings. This enables the relay to display metered current in primary amperes, secondary amperes or per unit values. The EDR-3000 features a user-friendly operations panel to monitor and to program the relay. Operating parameters and troubleshooting information are displayed in the 128 x 64 LCD display. In addition, all data and information can be communicated to a host computer equipped with PowerPort-E. A Communication Trip and Communication Close control command can also be initiated by a host computer.
Load
Figure 4.1-22. Transformer Secondary Protection with Neutral CT Connection The EDR-3000 relay has special provisions for connection in a zone interlocking scheme that can be used for bus protection or to improve protection coordination in a tight or close system. Zone interlocking is described in the following sections. In addition, the EDR-3000 has multiple setting groups that can be used to reduce arc ash hazard with instantaneous elements.
Figure 4.1-20. Primary Feeder Circuit Protection The EDR-3000 may be applied as the transformer primary protection or as backup to the differential protection, as in Figure 4.1-21.
50
51
50G CB
51G
EDR-3000
Figure 4.1-21. Transformer Overcurrent Protection
CA08104001E

General DescriptionEDR-3000 Overcurrent Protection
The EDR-3000 provides complete three-phase and ground protection with separate elements and settings. The relay can be used with CT ratios from 1 to 50,000 for 1A models and 1 to 10,000 for 5A models. The CT ratio can be set independently for phase and ground, allowing the ground element to be connected in either the residual or the separate ground CT conguration, as in Figure 4.1-23 and 4.1-24.
a b c 2 5 8 3 6 9 50/51 50N/51N GND 12 11 EDR-3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Zone Selective Interlocking (Phase and Ground)

Zone selective interlocking is a protection function to minimize equipment damage resulting from a phase or a ground fault in an area where long time and/or short time delay is in use. When the Ground Zone Interlocking feature is used, an immediate trip is initiated when the fault is in the breakers zone of protection, regardless of its preset time delay. When the Phase Zone Interlocking feature is used, the time overcurrent elements work as follows. The instantaneous phase element will initiate an immediate trip when the fault is in the breakers zone of protection, regardless of its preset time delay. For the time overcurrent phase element, the current sensed by the EDR-3000 must exceed 1.5 times the pickup setting for the zone selective interlocking to initiate an immediate trip signal when the fault is in the breaker's zone of protection. Upstream EDR-3000 protected breakers are restrained from tripping immediately by an interlocking signal from the downstream EDR-3000 relay. This interlocking signal requires only a pair of wires from the downstream breaker to the upstream breaker. It provides standard coordinated tripping when the fault is located outside the zone of protection. In the sample zone interlocking system shown in Figure 4.1-26, circuit breakers A, B and C are equipped with EDR-3000 overcurrent relays.
CB-52
Figure 4.1-23. Residual Ground Connection
a b c
2 5 8
3 6 9 50/51
CB-52 50G/51G 12 GND 11
EDR-3000
Figure 4.1-24. Separate Zero Sequence Ground CT Connection
Table 4.1-9. Catalog Numbering Selection for EDR-3000 Distribution Relay Removable Terminals
EDR-3000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 Mounting Options Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A/1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) I = Modbus-TCP (RJ-45) Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A = Four digital inputs, four outputs, removable terminals B = Eight digital inputs, six outputs, removable terminals, trip coil monitor C = Four digital inputs, four outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking and IRIG-B
Consult factory for the availability of eight digital inputs, six outputs, trip coil monitor, zone interlocking, IRIG-B and Modbus-TCP.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 039

4.1-29

If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3, the EDR-3000 of downstream breaker C senses the fault and sends a restraining signal to the upstream EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B. Having received this signal, the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B withholds its trip command. As a result, only downstream breaker C is tripped.
signal to the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B. Because it did not receive a restraining signal from the EDR-3000 of downstream breaker C, the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B identies that the fault is in Zone 2 and immediately trips feeder breaker B, regardless of its time setting.
5.38 (136.7) 4.94 (125.5) 3.94 (100.0) C L B A Cutout t A B
B Holes for Projection Panel Mount
i ii
A Holes for Standard Panel Mount
1 2 3 4

If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no restraining signal is received by the Digitrip of main breaker A. As a result, main breaker A is immediately tripped by its EDR-3000 overcurrent relay, regardless of its time setting.
Note: For the time overcurrent phase element, the current sensed by the EDR-3000 must exceed 1.5 times the pickup setting for the zone selective interlocking to initiate an immediate trip signal when the fault is in the breakers zone of protection.
3.62 (91.8)

If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2, the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B senses the fault and sends a restraining signal to the upstream EDR-3000 of main breaker A. The EDR-3000 of the downstream breaker C does not see this fault because it is situated on the downstream side of the fault. As a result, the EDR-3000 of downstream breaker C does not send a restraining
4.88 (124.0) C L
3.05 (77.6) A B 4x 0.19 (4.8) A B
6.30 (160.0)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Figure 4.1-25. Drilling Pattern
Figure 4.1-26. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Technical Data and SpecicationsEDR-3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 4.1-10. EDR-3000 Specications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage: Buffer time in case of supply failure: 19300 Vdc/40250 Vac 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage communication is permitted to be interrupted Max. permissible making current: 18A peak value for <0.25 ms 12A peak value for <1 ms The voltage supply must be protected b a fuse of: 2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm (approx. 0.20 in. x 0.08 in) according to IEC 60127 3.5A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: Input current: Reaction time: Fallback time: 4 Switching thresholds: 300 Vdc/270 Vac <4 mA <20 ms <30 ms (safe state of the digital inputs) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc, 230 Vac/dc Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. 9.6 Vdc Min. 42.6 Vdc Max. 21.3 Vdc Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Screw-type terminal
Front Interface RS-232

Baud rates: Handshake: Connection: 115,200 Baud RTS and CTS Nine-pole D-Sub plug
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave Connection: Six screw-clamping terminals RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL) (terminating resistors internal)
Power Consumption
Power supply range: 19300 Vdc: 6W idle mode/ 8W max. power 40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/ 8W max. power (for frequencies of 4070 Hz) Power consumption: Phase current inputs at In = 1A burden = 0.15 mVA at In = 5A burden = 0.15 mVA Ground current input: at In = 1A burden = 0.35 mVA at In = 5A burden = 0.35 mVA
Un = 24 Vdc Switching threshold 1 ON: Switching threshold 1 OFF: Un = 48V/60 Vdc Switching threshold 2 ON: Switching threshold 2 OFF: Un = 110/120 Vac/dc Switching threshold 3 ON: Switching threshold 3 OFF: Un = 230/240 Vac/dc Switching threshold 4 ON: Switching threshold 4 OFF: Terminals:
Climatic Environmental Conditions

Storage temperature: 25C up to +70C (13F to +158F) Operating temperature: 20C up to +60C (4F to +140F) Permissible humidity at Ann. average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.) Permissible installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft) above sea level If 4000m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies, a changed classication of the operating and test voltages may be necessary.
Binary Output Relays

Continuous current: Switch-on current: Max. breaking current: 5A DC up to 50V (resistive) 0.2A DC at 300V Max. switching voltage: Switching capacity: Contact type: Terminals: 5A AC/DC 25A AC/DC for 4s 5A AC up to 125V AC
250 Vac/300 Vdc 2000 VA 1 changeover contact Screw-type terminals
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 041

4.1-31
EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay
A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available. The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay includes programmable logic functions*. Logic gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the EDR-4000 relay ideally suited for main-tie-main and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software or contact input. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software, the display or a contact input. The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay has a mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/ maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The EDR-4000 has eight programmable binary inputs, two normally opened and eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and one Form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
General Description
Eatons EDR-4000 distribution protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for feeder circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as a primary protection on feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker applications; or as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines and differential protection. The relay is most commonly used on medium voltage switchgear applications. The EDR-4000 feeder protection relay provides complete current, voltage, frequency protection and metering in a single, compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent singlephase undervoltage/overvoltage protection, or ground protection for an ungrounded system. The Maintenance Mode password protected soft key, can be used for arc ash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be changed, via communications or a digital input. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status.
Ground overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1] and 51X[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]) Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Main three-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) Auxiliary single-phase under/ overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2]) Six frequency elements that can be assigned to: overfrequency, underfrequency, rate of change or vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6]) Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2]) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Switch onto fault protection Cold load pickup Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load prole over time)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Features
Protection
Metering

Phase overcurrent elements: Three instantaneous elements with timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3]) Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2] and 51P[3]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset 51P[2] and 51P[3] can be voltage restrained
CA08104001E
4.1-32 Protective and Predictive Relays Distribution Protection

General DescriptionEDR-4000 Monitoring

September 2011
Sheet 04 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Communication

Control Functions

Trip coil monitor Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping)
Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port Remote communication port: RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: Modbus-RTU Modbus-TCP (optional) Conguration software
Breaker open/close Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable Logic Programmable LEDs Multiple setting groups Cold load pickup CT supervision
EDR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 Mounting Options Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A/1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 = Phase current 5A/1A, sensitive ground current 0.5A/0.1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) 1 = Modbus-RTU + Modbus-TCP Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking and large display
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground and large display.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 043

4.1-33
Protection and Control Functions

Eatons EDR-4000 distribution protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions.
Breaker Failure
The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or an external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or to trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the user to switch to more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication or via a digital Input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and helps to reduce the possibility of injury.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground overcurrent protection. There are eight independent ground overcurrent elements. The ground elements X use the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The ground elements R use a calculated 3Io residual current obtained from the sum of the threephase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a three-phase, four-wire system. Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements can be selected to operate based on fundamental or rms current.
Voltage Protection
The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a three-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a singlephase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The three-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a single-phase, two out of three phases, or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/ reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Monitoring and Metering

The EDR-4000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and selfdiagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in an FIFO log in chronological order.

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[2] and 51P[3]). This modication of the pickup overcurrent level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The EDR-4000 uses the simple linear model below to determine the effective pickup value.
Pickup % 100 %
Ground Voltage Protection

In high impedance grounded systems, ground fault protection is provided by the detection of zero sequence voltage (3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer by an overvoltage element (59N) connected to the secondary of the distribution grounding transformer, or in the secondary of a wye-broken delta transformer used when the neutral is not accessible or in delta system. In the EDR-4000, we can measure this zero sequence voltage through the 4th voltage input; the 59N element has to be desensitized for 3rd harmonic voltages that can be present in the system under normal operation.
Trip Log
The EDR-4000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
The EDR-4000 transformer protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications.
25 %

Figure 4.1-27. Voltage Restraint Coil Pickup Characteristics The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.
There are 11 user-selectable inversetime overcurrent curve characteristics. The user can select from the ANSI, IEC or thermal curve families, and can select instantaneous or time delay reset characteristics.
The EDR-4000 relay provides six frequency elements than can be used to detect under/over frequency, rate of change, and a vector surge (decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionEDR-4000 Integral User Interface
The front panel user interface has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. 17 programmable LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm and trip indication. Soft keys are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through data and settings. In addition, the relay settings and test functions are password protected.
September 2011
Sheet 04 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Programmable I/O
The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, two normally open and eight Form C contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (fail-safe) mode. There are eight user-congurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is userprogrammable for maximum application exibility.
Programmable Logic
The EDR-4000 distribution protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are 24 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.
Figure 4.1-28. Typical One-Line Diagram
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 045

4.1-35
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 4.1-29. Typical Control Diagram
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration and to view metered values and stored
data. PowerPort-E is free and can be downloaded from the Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com/pr. The second package is Power Xpert Software. Power Xpert Software is a power management software package that is designed for continuous,
remote monitoring of many devices. It provides additional functions such as billing, trending and graphics. Contact your local Eaton representative for more information on Power Xpert Software.
Figure 4.1-30. PowerPort-E EDR-4000 Device Planning
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 047

4.1-37

i
Digital Inputs Zone Interlocking
300 Vdc/259 Vac <4 mA <20 ms <30 ms (safe state of the digital inputs) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc, 230 Vac/dc Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. 9.6 Vdc Min. 42.6 Vdc Max. 21.3 Vdc Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Screw-type terminal NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING OUTPUTS (ZONE INTERLOCK, SEMI-CONDUCTOR OUTPUT): 5 Vdc, <2 mA FOR CONNECTION TO ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY. Zone out: Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc Zone in: Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc Max. input voltage: +5.5 Vdc Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc Switching threshold OFF: Max. 1.5 Vdc Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV AC (to ground and other IO) Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair) Max. input voltage: Input current: Reaction time: Fallback time: Switching thresholds:
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage: Buffer time in case of supply failure: 24270 Vdc/48230 Vac (20%/+10%)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50 ms at minimal aux. voltage interrupted communication is permitted Max. permissible making current: 18A peak value for <0.25 ms 12A peak value for <1 ms The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of: 2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm (approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 3.5A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption
Power supply range: 24270 Vdc: 7W idle mode/ approx. 13W max. power 48230 Vac: 7 VA idle mode/ approx. 13 VA max. power (for frequencies of 4070 Hz) Power consumption: Phase current inputs at In = 1A, S = 0.15 mVA at In = 5A, S = 0.15 mVA Ground current input: at In = 1A, S = 0.35 mVA at In = 5A, S = 0.35 mVA

Relay Outputs
Continuous current: Max. make current: 5A AC/DC 25A AC/25A DC up to 30V for 4s 30A/230 Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005 30A/250 Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005 Max. breaking current: 5A AC up to 125 Vdc 5A DC up to 30V (resistive) 0.3A DC at 300V Max. switching voltage: 250 Vac/250 Vdc Switching capacity: 1250 VA Contact type: Form C or normally open contact Terminals: Screw-type terminals
RS-485

Storage temperature: 30C to +70C (22F to +158F) Operating temperature: 20C up to +60C (4F to +140F) Permissible humidity at Ann. average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.) Permissible installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft) above sea level If 4000m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies a changed classication of the operating and test voltages may be necessary.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available. The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Logic gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the EDR-5000 relay ideally suited for main-tie-main and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. Flash memory is used for the programming, and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software, the display or a contact input. The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/ maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The EDR-5000 has eight programmable binary inputs, two normally opened and eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and one Form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
General Description
Eatons EDR-5000 distribution protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for feeder circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as a primary protection on feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker applications; or as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines and differential protection. The relay is most commonly used on medium voltage switchgear applications. The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides complete current, voltage and frequency protection, and metering in a single, compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection, or ground protection for an ungrounded system. The Maintenance Mode password protected soft key, can be used for arc ash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be changed, via communications or a digital input. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent elements: Three instantaneous elements with timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3]) Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2] and 51P[3]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Voltage restraint (51P[2] and 51P[3]) Directional control (all elements)
Ground overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1] and 51X[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Directional control (all elements) Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]) Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Main three-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) Auxiliary single-phase under/ overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2]) Six frequency elements that can be assigned to: overfrequency, underfrequency, rate of change or vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6]) Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2]) Forward and reverse watts (32[1], 32[2]) Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1], 32V[2]) Sync check (25) Autoreclosing (79) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Switch onto fault protection Cold load pickup
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 049

4.1-39
Metering

Monitoring

Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Sync values Trending (load prole over time)
Trip coil monitor Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port Remote communication port: RS-232 RS-485
Protocols: Modbus-RTU Modbus-TCP (optional) Conguration software
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control Functions

Communication

Breaker open/close Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable logic Programmable LEDs Multiple setting groups Cold load pickup CT supervision
EDR-5000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking and large display Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A/1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 = Phase current 5A/1A, sensitive ground current 0.5A/0.1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) H = IEC-61850 (Goose) 1 = Modbus-RTU + Modbus-TCP Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards Mounting Options 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground and large display.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 050
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

The Eatons EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions.
Sync Check
The sync check function is provided for double-ended power source applications. The sync check monitors voltage magnitude, phase angle and slip frequency between the bus and the line. It also incorporates breaker close time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live line, and live bus live line features.
Ground Voltage Protection

In high impedance grounded systems, ground fault protection is provided by the detection of zero sequence voltage (3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer by an overvoltage element (59N) connected to the secondary of the distribution grounding transformer, or in the secondary of a wye-broken delta transformer used when the neutral is not accessible or in delta system. In the EDR-5000, we can measure this zero sequence voltage through the 4th voltage input; the 59N element has to be desensitized for 3rd harmonic voltages that can be present in the system under normal operation.

The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground directional overcurrent protection. There are eight independent ground overcurrent elements. The ground elements X use the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The ground elements R uses a calculated 3Io residual current obtained from the sum of the three-phase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a three-phase, four-wire system. Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements can be selected to operate based on fundamental or rms current. Phase direction is a function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault. This function is selectable to operate in the forward, reverse or both directions. Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero, negative or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function is selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions.
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for power owing through a feeder. There are three elements to be congured: operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over power conditions. Reverse power is typically applied to generator or motor applications while under power is generally applied to load or generation loss.

The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.
Reverse VARs
The EDR-5000 relay provides six frequency elements than can be used to detect under/over frequency, rate of change, and a vector surge (decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Autoreclosing Logic
The EDR-5000 provides a six shotrecloser scheme. Autoreclosing is normally used by the utilities in their distribution and transmission lines, but it can be used in commercial and industrial applications with long overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that occur on overhead lines are transient in nature. Tripping of a circuit breaker normally clears a transient fault and reclosing of the circuit breaker restores power back to the circuit.
Breaker Failure
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or to trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]). This modication of the pickup overcurrent level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear model below to determine the effective pickup value.
Pickup %
Voltage Protection
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a three-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a singlephase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The three-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a single-phase, two out of three phases, or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/ reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the user to switch to more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication or via a digital input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce the possibility of injury.
18 19
100 %
25 %
20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 051

4.1-41

The EDR-5000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and selfdiagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in an FIFO log in chronological order.
number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications.

One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (failsafe) mode. There are eight user-congurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is user-programmable for maximum application exibility.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Programmable Logic
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are 24 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.
Trip Log
The EDR-5000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Load Proling/Trending
The EDR-5000 relay automatically records selected quantities into nonvolatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting.
Waveform Capture
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The EDR-5000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The
Programmable I/O
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, two normally open and eight Form C contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit.
Figure 4.1-32. Visual Logic Editor
19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 052
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 04 053

4.1-43
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration and to view metered values and stored
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Figure 4.1-35. PowerPort-E EDR-5000 Device Planning
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 054
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Voltage Supply
Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: Input current: Reaction time: Fallback time: Switching thresholds: 300 Vdc/259 Vac <4 mA <20 ms <30 ms (safe state of the digital inputs) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc, 230 Vac/dc Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. 9.6 Vdc Min. 42.6 Vdc Max. 21.3 Vdc Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Screw-type terminal
Zone Interlocking
NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING OUTPUTS (ZONE INTERLOCK, SEMI-CONDUCTOR OUTPUT): 5 Vdc, <2 mA FOR CONNECTION TO ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY. Zone out: Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc Zone in: Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc Max. input voltage: +5.5 Vdc Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc Switching threshold OFF: Max. 1.5 Vdc Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV AC (to ground and other IO) Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
50 ms at minimal aux. voltage interrupted communication is permitted Max. permissible making current: 18A peak value for 0.25 ms 12A peak value for 1 ms The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of: 2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm (approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 3.5A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption

Relay Outputs
RS-485

Storage temperature: 30C to +70C (22F to +158F) Operating temperature: 20C up to +60C (4F to +140F) Permissible humidity at Ann. average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.) Permissible installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft) above sea level If 4000m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies, a changed classication of the operating and test voltages may be necessary.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 055
Protective and Predictive Relays Motor Protection

General DescriptionOverload Relays
4.2-1
Freedom Overload Relays
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay
Features and Benets

Features

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Reliable, accurate, electronic motor protection Easy to select, install and maintain Compact size Flexible, intelligent design Global product offering available with NEMA, IEC and DP power control
Size/Range
Broad FLA range (0.331500A) Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30) Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and DP contactors Most compact electronic overload in its class
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay 32A OverloadC306DN3B
General Description
Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL) is the most compact, high-featured, economical product in its class. Designed on a global platform, the new EOL covers the entire power control spectrum including NEMA, IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA and DP versions are offered with the C440 designation while the IEC offering has the XT designation. The electronic design provides reliable, accurate and value driven protection and communications capabilities in a single compact device. It is the exible choice for any application requiring easy-to-use, reliable protection. Eaton has a long history of innovations and product development in motor control and protection, including both traditional NEMA, as well as IEC control. It was from this experience that the C440 was developed, delivering new solutions to meet todays demands. C440 is a self-powered electronic overload relay available up to 100A as a self contained unit. With external CTs, C440 can protect motor up to 1500 FLA. Available add-on accessories include remote reset capability and communication modules with I/O for DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, and Modbus.
General Description
C306 Overload Relays are designed for use with CE or CN non-reversing and reversing contactors. Four sizes are available for overload protection up to 144A.
Motor Control
Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault (NC) contacts Test/Trip button
Motor Protection
Thermal overload Phase loss Selectable (ON/OFF) phase imbalance Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault

Features

Selectable manual or automatic reset operation Interchangeable heater packs adjustable 24%to match motor FLA and calibrated for use with 1.0 and 1.15 service factor motors. Heater packs for 32A overload relay will mount in 75A overload relay useful in derating applications such as jogging Class 10 or 20 heater packs Load lugs built into relay base Bimetallic, ambient compensated operated. Trip free mechanism Electrically isolated NO-NC contacts (pull RESET button to test). (Electrical ratings see tables in Volume 5Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 33, Section 33.1) Overload trip indication Shrouded or ngerproof terminals to reduce possibility of electrical shock
User Interface
Large FLA selection dial Trip status indicator Operating mode LED DIP switch selectable trip class, phase imbalance and ground fault Selectable Auto/Manual reset

Feature Options
Remote reset 120 Vac 24 Vac 24 Vdc

Meets UL 508 single-phasing requirements UL listed, CSA certied, NEMA compliance and CE mark
Tamper-proof cover Communications modules Modbus RTU RS-485 DeviceNet with I/O PROFIBUS with I/O Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010) Ethernet IP (planned)
Reference
Refer to Volume 5Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 33, Section 33.1 for additional product information.
4.2-2

General DescriptionOverload Relays Benets Reliability and Improved Uptime
C440 provides the users with peace of mind knowing that their assets are protected with the highest level of motor protection and communication capability in its class Extends the life of plant assets with selectable motor protection features such as trip class, phase imbalance and ground fault Protects against unnecessary downtime by discovering changes in your system (line/load) with remote monitoring capabilities Status LED provides added assurance that valuable assets are protected by indicating the overload operational status
September 2011
Sheet 04 056
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Flexibility

Safety
IP 20 rated terminal blocks Available in Eatons industry leading FlashGard MCCs Tested to the highest industry standards such as UL, CSA, CE and IEC RoHS compliant

Available with NEMA, IEC and DP contactors Improves return on investment by reducing inventory carrying costs with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and selectable trip class Design incorporates built-in ground fault protection thus eliminating the need for separate CTs and modules Flexible communication with optional I/O enables easy integration into plant management systems for remote monitoring and control Available as an open component and in enclosed control and motor control center assemblies

Monitoring Capabilities
Individual phase currents rms Average three-phase current rms Thermal memory Fault indication (overload, phase loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
UL CSA CE NEMA IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1) RoHS ATEX directive 94/9/EC Equipment Group 2, Category 2
Table 4.2-1. Electronic Overload Education

Description Motor Protection Thermal overload Overload is a condition in An increase in the load or which current draw exceeds torque that is being driven 115% of the full load by the motor. amperage rating for A low voltage supply to the an inductive motor. motor causes the current to go high to maintain the power needed. A poor power factor causing above normal current draw. A line to ground fault. Increase in current draw Thermal trip behavior is dened leads to heat and insulation by UL, CSA and IEC standards. breakdown, which can cause Trip class is settable from 10A, system failure. 10, 20, 30 Increase in current can increase power consumption and waste valuable energy. Denition Cause Effect if not Protected C440/XT Protection
Ground fault
A current leakage path to ground. An undetected ground fault can burn through multiple insulation windings, ultimately leading to motor failure, not to mention risk to equipment or personnel
Fixed protective setting that takes the starter ofine if ground fault current exceeds 50% of the FLA dial setting, i.e., if the FLA dial is set to 12A, the overload relay will trip if the ground current exceeds 6A. Fixed protective setting that takes the starter ofine if a phase drops below 50% of the other two phases.
Imbalanced phases (voltage and current)
Uneven voltage or current between phases in a threephase system.
When a three-phase load is powered with a poor quality line, the voltage per phase may be imbalanced.
Imbalanced voltage causes large imbalanced currents and as a result this can lead to motor stator windings being overloaded, causing excessive heating, reduced motor efciency and reduced insulation life. Single-phasing can lead to unwanted motor vibrations in addition to the results of imbalanced phases as listed above.
Phase loss current (singlephasing)
One of the three-phase voltages is not present.
Multiple causes, loose wire, improper wiring, grounded phase, open fuse, etc.
Fixed protective setting that takes the starter ofine if a phase drops below 50% of the other two phases.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 057

Product SelectionOverload Relays
4.2-3
Modbus Communication Module

The Modbus module combined with an expansion module and a communication adapter provide Modbus communication capability to the C440 electronic overload relay.
DeviceNet Communication Modules

The DeviceNet Communication Module provides monitoring and control for the C440 overload relay from a single DeviceNet node. These modules also offer convenient I/O in two voltage options, 24 Vdc and 120 Vac.
PROFIBUS Communication Modules

The PROFIBUS module combined with an expansion module and a communication adapter provide Modbus communication capability to the C440 electronic overload relay.
i ii 1 2 3
PROFIBUS Communication Module DeviceNet Communication Module
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Features and Benets
Features and Benets

The PROFIBUS communication module is capable of baud rates up to 12 Mb PROFIBUS address is set via convenient DIP switches; LEDs are provided to display PROFIBUS status Intuitive conguration with common PROFIBUS conguration tools Terminals Unique locking mechanism provides for easy removal of the terminal block with the eld wiring installed Each terminal is marked for ease of wiring and troubleshooting

The Modbus communication module is capable of baud rates up to 115K The Modbus address and baud rate conguration can be easily changed using the HMi user interface Modbus address and baud rate are set via convenient DIP switches; LEDs are provided to display Modbus trafc Conguration with common Modbus conguration tools Terminals Unique locking mechanism provides for easy removal of the terminal block with the eld wiring installed Each terminal is marked for ease of wiring and troubleshooting Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT Signal types include 24 Vdc I/O and 120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically isolated between the eld I/O and the network adapter to protect the I/O and communication circuits from possible damage due to transients and ground loops Input Module features a userdenable input debounce, which limits the effects of transients and electrical noise Output Module supports a userdenable safe state for loss of communication; hold last state, ON or OFF
Features and Benets

Communication to DeviceNet uses only one DeviceNet MAC ID Conguration DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud rate are set via convenient DIP switches with an option to set from the network Advanced conguration available using common DeviceNet tools

Terminals Unique locking mechanism provides for easy removal of the terminal block with the eld wiring installed Each terminal is marked for ease of wiring and troubleshooting Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT Signal types include 24 Vdc I/O and 120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically isolated between the eld I/O and the network adapter to protect the I/O and communication circuits from possible damage due to transients and ground loops Input Module features a userdenable input debounce, which limits the effects of transients and electrical noise Output Module supports a userdenable safe state for loss of communication; hold last state, ON or OFF Combined status LED
Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT Signal types include 24 Vdc I/O and 120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically isolated between the eld I/O and the network adapter to protect the I/O and communication circuits from possible damage due to transients and ground loops Input Module features a userdenable input debounce, which limits the effects of transients and electrical noise Output Module supports a userdenable safe state for loss of communication; hold last state, ON or OFF
CA08104001E
4.2-4

September 2011
Sheet 04 058
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 4.2-2. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A
Description Specication 45 mm 55 mm 690 Vac (60/50 Hz) 20100A
Electrical Ratings
Operating voltage (three-phase) and frequency 690 Vac (60/50 Hz) 0.331.65A 15A 420A 945A
FLA Range
Use with Contactors

XT IEC frames Freedom NEMA sizes Trip Class 10A, 10, 20, 30 Selectable 10A, 10, 20, 30 Selectable 1.05 x FLA: does not trip 1.15 x FLA: overload trip Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50% 50% of FLA dial setting >150% = 2 sec >250% = 1 sec Manual/automatic Orange ag One ash: Overload operating properly Two ashes: Current is above FLA dial setting pending trip Yes Yes Yes Yes B, C, D 00, 0, 1, 2 F, G 3
Motor Protection
Thermal overload setting 1.05 x FLA: does not trip 1.15 x FLA: overload trip Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50% 50% of FLA dial setting >150% = 2 sec >250% = 1 sec Manual/automatic Orange ag One ash: Overload operating properly Two ashes: Current is above FLA dial setting pending trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
Feature
Phase loss Phase imbalance (selectable: enable/disable) Ground fault (selectable: enable/disable)
Reset
9 10
Indicators
Trip status Mode LED
Options
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Remote reset Reset bar Communication expansion module Communication adapter
Capacity
Load terminals Terminal capacity Tightening torque Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals Terminal capacity Tightening torque 2 x (1812) AWG 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm) 690 Vac 500 Vac 6000 Vac III/3 2 x (1812) AWG 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm) 690 Vac 500 Vac 6000 Vac III/3 1210 AWG (46 mm2) 86 AWG (616 mm2) 2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm) 2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm) 61 AWG (1650 mm2) 2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
Voltages
Insulation voltage U i (three-phase) Insulation voltage U i (control) Rated impulse withstand voltage Overvoltage category/pollution degree
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 059

4.2-5
C441 Overload Relays
One external remote reset terminal Trip status indicator Thermal overload Jam protection Current imbalance Current phase loss Ground fault Phase reversal
Motor Protection

Provides superior protection of motors and pumps before catastrophic failure occurs Increases protability with greater process uptime and throughput, reduced costs per repair, reduced energy consumption and extended equipment life Adjustments to overload conguration can be made at any time
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
C441 Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relay
Load Protection
Undercurrent Low power (kW) High power (kW)
Safety
IP20 rated terminal blocks Terminal blocks are set back from the display to reduce operator shock hazard Remote display (optional) does not require that the operator open the panel to congure the device

General Description
Eatons C441 Motor Insight, the rst product in the Intelligent Power Control Solutions family, is a highly congurable motor, load and line protection device with power monitoring, diagnostics and exible communications allowing the customer to save energy, optimize their maintenance schedules and congure greater system protection, thus reducing overall costs and downtime. C441 Motor Insight is available in either a line-powered or 120 Vac control powered design, capable of monitoring voltages up to 660 Vac. Each of these units is available in a 19A or a 590A FLA model. With external CTs, Motor Insight can protect motors up to 540A FLA. Available add-on accessories include communication modules for Modbus, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS, all with I/O options. For ease-of-use and operator safety, C441 Motor Insight offers a remote display that mounts easily with two 30 mm knockouts.
Line Protection
Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage imbalance Voltage phase loss

Flexibility

Currentaverage and phase rms Voltageaverage and phase rms Powermotor kW Power factor Frequency Thermal capacity Run hours Ground fault current Current imbalance % Voltage imbalance % Motor starts Motor run hours
Communications modules Offered in a variety of congurations External snap-on modules provide support for multiple communications protocols Advanced power, voltage and current monitoring capabilities Communications modules and remote display can be used simultaneously Highly congurable fault and reset characteristics for numerous applications Fully programmable isolated fault and auxiliary relays
Options
Type 1, 12 remote display Type 3R remote display kit Communication modules Modbus Modbus with I/O DeviceNet with I/O PROFIBUS with I/O Modbus TCP with I/O (contact product line) Ethernet IP (contact product line)

Ease of Use
Bright LED display with easy-tounderstand setting and references Powered from line voltage or 120 Vac control power Remote display powered from base unit Full word descriptions and units on user interface
Features and Benets

Features Size/Range
Broad FLA range of 1540A Selectable trip class (530) Four operating voltage options Line-powered from 240 Vac, 480 Vac, 600 Vac Control-powered from 120 Vac

Benets Reliability and Improved Uptime
Motor Control
Two output relays One B300 Form C fault relay and one B300 ground fault shunt relay Other relay congurations are available, including one Form A and one Form B SPST (fault and auxiliary relays), allowing programmable isolated relay behavior and unique voltages
Advanced diagnostics allows for quick and accurate identication of the root source of a motor, pump or power quality fault; reducing trouble-shooting time and the loss of productivity, reducing repeat faults due to misdiagnosis, and increasing process output and protability
cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508 UL 1053 applicable sections for ground fault detection CSA certied (Class 3211-02) CE NEMA IEC EN 60947-4-1 RoHS
CA08104001E
4.2-6

Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education
Description Denition Source Result
September 2011
Sheet 04 060
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
C441 Motor Insight Protection Thermal trip behavior is dened by UL, CSA and IEC standards. Trip class is settable from 530 by 1 Provides power factor monitoring and low voltage protection features.
Motor Protection
Thermal overload Overload is a condition in which current draw to a motor exceeds 115% of the full load amperage rating over a period of time for an inductive motor. An increase in the load or torque that is being driven by the motor. A low voltage supply to the motor would cause the current to go high to maintain the power needed. A poor power factor would cause above normal current draw. Mechanical stall, interference, jam or seizure of the motor or motor load. Increase in current draw. Current leads to heat and insulation breakdown, which can cause system failure. Additionally, an increase in current can increase power consumption and waste valuable energy.
Jam
Jam is similar to thermal overload in that it is a current draw on the motor above normal operating conditions.
The motor attempts to drive the load, which has more resistive force due to the mechanical interference. In order to drive the load, the motor draws an abnormal amount of current, which can lead to insulation breakdown and system failure. An undetected ground fault can burn through multiple insulation windings, ultimately leading to motor failure.
Provides a congurable Jam setting that is active during motor run state to avoid nuisance trips. Trip Threshold 150400% of FLA. Trip Delay 120 seconds. Motor Insight has ground fault protection capability down to 0.15 amps estimated from the existing three-phase CTs using the residual current method. That is, the three-phase current signals should sum to zero unless a ground fault (GF) condition is present. In the case of a GF, Motor Insight can alarm, trip the starter, or trip an alternative relay that can be used to shunt trip a breaker or light up a warning light. GF current can also be monitored in real-time through the advanced monitoring capabilities. Note: GF settable thresholds vary with motor FLA. 0.15A may not be available in all cases. Provides two protection settings that address this problem. The user can choose to set current imbalance thresholds or voltage imbalance thresholds, each of which can trip the starter. Additionally, both of these may be monitored through Motor Insights advanced monitoring capabilities, allowing the customer to notice in real-time when and where a condition is present. Fixed protective setting that takes the starter ofine if a phase drops below 60% of the other two phases. Congurable phase protection, allowing the user to dene the phase sequencing intended for that application. If no phase sequence is required, the user has the ability to disable this feature. Advanced monitoring capabilities allow the user to monitor frequency in real-time.
Ground fault
A line to ground fault.
A current leakage path to ground.
Imbalanced phases Uneven voltage or currents (voltage and current) between phases in a threephase system.
When a three-phase load is powered with a poor quality line, the voltage per phase may be imbalanced.
Imbalanced voltage causes large imbalanced currents and as a result this can lead to motor stator windings being overloaded, causing excessive heating, reduced motor efciency and reduced insulation life.
Phase losscurrent (single-phasing)
One of the three-phase current is not present.
Multiple causes, loose wire, improper wiring, grounded phase, open fuse, etc. A miswired motor. Inadvertent phase-reversal by the utility.
Single-phasing can lead to unwanted motor vibrations in addition to the results of imbalanced phases as listed above. Phase-reversal can cause unwanted directional rotation of a motor. In the event that the load attached to the motor can only be driven in one direction, the result could be signicant mechanical failure and/or injury to an operator. Variations in frequency can cause increases in losses, decreasing the efciency of the motor. In addition, this can result in interference with synchronous devices.
Phase rotation (phase-reversal)
Improper wiring, leading to phases being connected to the motor improperly.
Frequency variance
When line frequency is inconsistent.
Malfunctioning alternator speed regulator, or poor line quality caused by an overload of a supply powered by individual sources.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 061

4.2-7
Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education (Continued)

Description Denition Source Result C441 Motor Insight Protection Motor Insight has two protection settings to detect this: undercurrent and low power. Low power is a more consistent way of ensuring detection as power is linear with motor load, where as current is not. An unloaded motor may draw 50% of its rated current, but the power draw will be less than 10% of rated power due to a low power factor. Monitors the three-phase real power. If the real power value is estimated above the set threshold for the set length of time, a fault is detected and the overload will trip the starter. Additionally, power can be monitored in real-time.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Load Protection
Undercurrent or low power Average rms current provided Undercurrent is usually to the motor falls below normal associated with a portion of operating conditions. the users load disappearing. Examples of this would be a broken belt, a dry-pump (low suction head) or a dead-headed centrifugal pump. If undercurrent goes undetected, a mechanical failure can and has occurred. In the case of a pump, running a pump dry or running a pump in a dead-headed condition can cause excessive heating, damaging expensive seals and breaking down desired uid properties.
High power
The motor load is drawing more This is typical of batch processpower than it should at normal ing applications where several operating conditions. ingredients ow into a mixer. When a substances consistency changes and viscosity increases from what is expected, the motor may use more power to blend the mixture. Out-of-tolerance conditions can be detected using the High Power and Low Power settings. When the line voltage to the motor exceeds the specied rating. Poor line quality.
If a high-power fault goes undetected, the result may be a batch of material that does not meet specication.
Line Protection
Overvoltage An overvoltage condition leads to a lower than rated current draw and a poor power factor. A trip limit of 110% of rated voltage is recommended. Overvoltage can also lead to exceeding insulation ratings. Monitors the maximum rms value of the three-phase voltages. If the rms value rises above the set threshold for the set length of time, a fault is detected and the overload can trip the starter or send and display an alarm of the condition. All line-related faults have an alarm-no-trip mode. Monitors the minimum rms value of the three-phase voltages. If the rms value drops below the set threshold for the set length of time, a fault is detected and the overload can trip the starter or send and display an alarm of the condition. All line-related faults have an alarm-no-trip mode. Congurable to delay closing the fault relay on power-up. For each Motor Insight controlling a motor, a different setting can be programmed, helping to maintain the integrity of your line power.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Undervoltage
When the line voltage to the motor is below the specied rating.
Poor line quality.
An undervoltage condition leads to excessive current draw. This increases the heating of the motor windings and can shorten insulation life. A trip limit set to 90% of rated voltage is recommended.
Power-up delay
Allows for starting motors and loads in a deliberate fashion.
When there is a power failure, or power cycle, multiple loads come online simultaneously.
Multiple loads starting simultaneously can cause sags affecting the operation of devices that may prevent successful startup. If power is lost to a motor driving a pump, it may be necessary to delay a restart to allow the pump to come to a complete stop to prevent starting a motor during backspin.
CA08104001E
4.2-8

September 2011
Sheet 04 062
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Accessories
The C441 Motor Insight Modbus Communication Module is a sidemounted device providing Modbus communication capability to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay. The Modbus Communication Module with I/O provides communication, monitoring and control for the C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
Table 4.2-4. Modbus Communication Module

Description Modbus Communication Module I/O None Catalog Number C441M
Features and Benets
Modbus Module Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac 24 Vdc C441N C441P
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The Modbus communication module is capable of baud rates up to 115K The Modbus address and baud rate conguration can be easily changed using the Motor Insight user interface (C441M only) Modbus address and baud rate are set via convenient DIP switches (C441N and C441P); LEDs are provided to display Modbus trafc Conguration with common Modbus conguration tools Terminals Unique locking mechanism provides for easy removal of the terminal block with the eld wiring installed Each terminal is marked for ease of wiring and troubleshooting Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT Signal types include 24 Vdc I/O and 120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically isolated between the eld I/O and the network adapter to protect the I/O and communication circuits from possible damage due to transients and ground loops Input Module features a userdenable input debounce, which limits the effects of transients and electrical noise Output Module supports a userdenable safe state for loss of communication; hold last state, ON or OFF
Modbus with I/O Module
DeviceNet Communication Modules

The DeviceNet Communication Module provides monitoring and control for the Motor Insight overload relay from a single DeviceNet node. These modules also offer convenient I/O in two voltage options, 24 Vdc and 120 Vac.
Features and Benets

Communication to DeviceNet uses only one DeviceNet MAC ID Conguration DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud rate are set via convenient DIP switches with an option to set from the network Advanced conguration available using common DeviceNet tools

Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT Signal types include 24 Vdc I/O and 120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically isolated between the eld I/O and the network adapter to protect the I/O and communication circuits from possible damage due to transients and ground loops Input Module features a userdenable input debounce, which limits the effects of transients and electrical noise Output Module supports a userdenable safe state for loss of communication; hold last state, ON or OFF Combined status LED
Terminals Unique locking mechanism provides for easy removal of the terminal block with the eld wiring installed Each terminal is marked for ease of wiring and troubleshooting
Description
Table 4.2-5. DeviceNet Modules

I/O 120 Vac 24 Vdc Catalog Number C441K C441L
DeviceNet Communication Module DeviceNet Communication Module
DeviceNet Module
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 063

4.2-9
PROFIBUS Communication Module

The C441 Motor Insight PROFIBUS Communication Module is a sidemounted device providing PROFIBUS communication capability to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay. The PROFIBUS Communication Module with I/O provides communication, monitoring and control for the C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
Table 4.2-6. PROFIBUS Communication Module

Description PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT I/O 120 Vac 24 Vdc Catalog Number C441S C441Q
i ii 1 2
Features and Benets
The PROFIBUS communication module is capable of baud rates up to 12 Mb PROFIBUS address is set via convenient DIP switches (C441Q and C441S); LEDs are provided to display PROFIBUS status Intuitive conguration with common PROFIBUS conguration tools Terminals Unique locking mechanism provides for easy removal of the terminal block with the eld wiring installed Each terminal is marked for ease of wiring and troubleshooting Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT Signal types include 24 Vdc I/O and 120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically isolated between the eld I/O and the network adapter to protect the I/O and communication circuits from possible damage due to transients and ground loops Input Module features a userdenable input debounce, which limits the effects of transients and electrical noise Output Module supports a userdenable safe state for loss of communication; hold last state, ON or OFF
PROFIBUS with I/O Module
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.2-10 Protective and Predictive Relays Motor Protection

September 2011
Sheet 04 064
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.30 (7.6)
3.90 (99.1)
0.20 (5.1)
4.00 (101.6)
0.20 (5.1)
0.40 (10.2) 2.70 (68.6) 3.60 (91.4) 3.10 (78.7)
2.30 (58.4) 0.20 (5.1)
3.30 (83.8)
Figure 4.2-1. C441 Motor Insight Conversion Plate

(4) Open Slots 0.22 x 0.34 (5.6 x 8.6)
1.67 (42.4)
1.09 (27.7) 2.23 (56.6) 2.75 (69.9)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(2) Holes 0.20 Dia. 3.53 (89.7) 3.00 (76.2) Label H1 1.56 Dia. 1.88 (47.8) 0.31 (7.9) 2.25 (57.8) X1 0.44 (11.2) 3.65 (92.7)
Quantity Three per Assembly
Figure 4.2-2. Applicable for C441CTKIT150, C441CTKIT300 and C441CTKIT600
September 2011
Sheet 04 065

General DescriptionMP-3000
4.2-11
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay
from the residual connection of the phase CTs. The zero sequence ground CT provides greater ground fault sensitivity than the residual connection. The relay is programmable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. The MP-3000 motor protection relay has two discrete inputs, four Form C (1NO and 1NC) contacts and one 4 to 20 mA analog output. The relay provides maximum user exibility to congure the I/O. All inputs and outputs (except for the trip output) are user-programmable. In addition, the relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of protection on, program mode, monitor mode, view setting mode, history mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary 1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page in the program mode provides display indication of the discrete input states and testing of the output relays, target LEDs and analog circuit. A user-friendly operator interface and display provides quick access to the settings, monitored values, motor history and operational logs. Large LED alphanumeric character display provides easy viewing from any angle in any light. Simple keypad operation provides quick and easy navigation through all settings and stored data. The program mode and emergency override buttons are access restricted via a latched cover which can be sealed if required. An integrated help function provides an online description display of functions, abbreviations and operations.
Features
General

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Microprocessor-based Self diagnostics User-friendly interface Large LED display Built-in help program Built-in test mode LED mode and target indication Remote communications Programmable discrete inputs Programmable outputs overload protection (49/51) Locked rotor (49S/51) Ultimate trip current (51) Negative sequence phase unbalance (46) Instantaneous overcurrent (50) Ground fault protection (50G) RTD trip and alarm with URTD module (49/38) Underload trip (37) Starts per time (66) Jam or stall (51R) Auto or manual reset (86) Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes
Protection
I2t
General Description
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection relay is a multi-functional microprocessor-based protective relay for the protection of any size motor at all voltage levels. It is most commonly applied on medium voltage starters and on critical or larger motors. The MP-3000 relay is a current only device that provides complete and reliable motor protection, monitoring and starting control functions. The MP-3000 motor protection relay is available in either a xed mount, semi-ush case or in a semi-ush quickrelease drawout case. Both housings are compact and t a standard IQ cutout. The optional quick-release drawout case features two-stage contact disconnection and self-shorting CT circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting terminal pair is available for use as relay removal alarm or for continuous motor operation (non-failsafe mode) on relay removal. The optional communication module is externally mounted on the xed mount case and internally mounted in the drawout case. The MP-3000 motor protection relay has three phase and one ground current inputs. Both a 5A and 1A version are available. The ground protection and metering functions can be used with either a zero sequence ground CT or
Alarming
Ground fault overload Jam/stall Underload Phase unbalance
I2t
Optimum Motor Protection

The MP-3000 motor protection relay has been designed for maximum motor operation and protection. It permits running the motor as close to its design limits while protecting it against excessive heating and damaging overload conditions. The MP-3000 eld proven protection algorithms were developed based on motor designs and operating parameters for optimum operation and protection while minimizing nuisance tripping. The MP-3000 motor protection relay uses a protection algorithm and measurement technique based on proven positive and negative (unbalance) sequence current sampling and true rms calculations.
Control
Transition for reduced voltage starts: Transition on current level Transition on time Transition on current level or time Transition on current level and time Incomplete sequence monitoring Permits number of cold starts Limits number of starts per time Time between starts Anti-backspin time delay Mechanical load shedding Zero speed switch for long acceleration motors Motor stop input for synchronous motor applications Remote trip input Differential trip input Emergency override
CA08104001E

General DescriptionMP-3000 Monitoring Functions

September 2011
Sheet 04 066
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Motor currents: Average current (I ave) Individual phase and ground current in primary amperes % of full load % phase unbalance RTD temperatures: Individual winding Motor bearing Load Auxiliary temperatures Motor conditions: % of I2t thermal bucket Time before start Remaining starts allowed Oldest start time Motor history: Operational counter Run time Highest starting and running currents Highest % phase unbalance Maximum winding, bearing and load RTD temperatures Number of emergency overrides Trip history (number of trips): Ground faults Overloads Instantaneous overcurrent JAM Underload Phase unbalance RTDs Phase reversal Incomplete sequence Remote, differential Communication Starts exceeded Time between starts Transition Alarms history (number of alarms): Ground faults Overloads JAM Underload Phase unbalance RTDs Starts exceeded
Total history (record which cannot be reset): Total trips Run time Operations count
The MP-3000 motor protection relay overload protection is easy to set and apply. Simply input motor nameplate information and CT ratios and the characteristic is automatically set. When using the MP-3000 motor protection relay, it is recommended that the ratio of CT primary rating to the motor full load amperes (CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to fall between 0.25 and 1.5. The thermal model adapts its tripping characteristics if RTDs are connected.
Logging
Log book (chronological list of last 100 events with date and time stamp) Event log (detailed information of last 20 trips and alarms with date and time stamp) Start log (data on most recent four starts with date and time stamp)
Instantaneous Overcurrent
The MP-3000 motor protection relay provides an instantaneous phase overcurrent function to trip the motor for high fault current levels. This function can be disabled and has an adjustable time delay on starting to avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
User Interface
The MP-3000 motor protection relay has a user-friendly interface that makes it easy to retrieve important information or make setting changes. LEDs provide visual indication of display and keypad mode. The pushbuttons are clearly labeled and quickly access the desired information.
History
Phase Unbalance Protection

Motor supply circuits are often fed through fuses and can be run with a single-phase fuse blown. The motor may still see three-phase voltage but will only have current on two phases, referred to as single-phasing the motor. The MP-3000 motor protection relay measures the current unbalance and can be used to alarm or trip the motor before damage occurs. Pickup, start and run timers and a separate alarm setting are provided.
The MP-3000 motor protection relay provides protection against motor overloads, short circuits and abnormal operating conditions.
I2t Overload
Motor overloads are typically limited by the rotor thermal capabilities but the measuring quantities are from the stator. This requires accurate measurements and good motor thermal models to provide reliable protection. The MP-3000 motor protection relay uses a eld proven measurement and motor thermal protection model. The relay samples the current waveforms 36 times per cycle providing accurate measurements of the positive and negative sequence currents. The negative sequence component of current causes greater heating effect on the rotor and has a greater impact on the thermal model in the relay. This same algorithm has been used to protect thousands of motors since 1984.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

A separate circuit measures ground fault current. A ground CT is recommended for more sensitive protection against winding fault ground. The relay ground circuit can be connected residually from the three-phase CTs. The ground fault protection has pickup and time delay set points or can be disabled.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 067

4.2-13
JAM Protection
The user-selectable JAM function protects motors that are running against a sudden mechanical jam or stall condition. The common application is on motors used on crushers, chippers or conveyors. It detects an increase of motor current to a level above full load. Pickup, start and run timers and a separate alarm setting are provided.
Anti-Backspin
For certain applications, for example, pumping uid up a pipe, the motor may be driven backward for a period of time after it stops. The MP-3000 relay provides an anti-backspin timer to prevent starting the motor while it is spinning in the reverse direction. The timer begins counting from the moment a stop is declared by the relay.
Remote/Differential Trip
One of the binary inputs can be programmed to accept a contact input from a separate differential relay, such as the MD-3000 or other device to trip the motor. This provides local and remote target information and uses the trip contacts of the MP-3000 motor protection relay. It will also record and log the motor information at the time of the trip.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Start Control Timers

Motors typically have limits to the number of cold starts, hot starts, starts per time period and time between starts that are permitted without damage. The MP-3000 motor protection relay incorporates these timers to prevent starting the motor beyond its capabilities.
MP-3000
Protection Functions 49/51 Overload I2T 49S/51 Locked Rotor 51R Jam/Stall 37 Loss of Load/ Underload 46 Phase Loss/ Unbalance 50 Phase Inst. OC 50G Ground Inst. OC 66 Starts per time period
Load Shedding
The MP-3000 motor protection relay provides a mechanical load shedding feature that can be used to control an upstream process. The load shedding function closes a contact on an overload condition to control an upstream process from adding more load until the overload condition is gone.
URT
Motor
11 RTDs
Motor Starting Prole Time/Current Chart
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fiber Optic Link
Motor Starting Prole

The MP-3000 relay records the average current of the motor for the last two starts. This information is available over the communications port. The motor current can then be plotted and compared to the motor overload protection curve. Available in PowerPort or the PowerNet Event Viewer Client.
Figure 4.2-3. MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay Functions
Underload Protection
The user-selectable underload function is used to detect the loss of load on the motor. Coupling failure is a common cause for loss of load. Pickup, start and run timers and a separate alarm setting are provided.
Emergency Override
The MP-3000 motor protection relay has a user-programmable feature that will let the operator reset the start control timers and thermal overload bucket. This function is intended for use in emergency conditions only and may result in motor damage or failure.
Reduced Voltage Starting

Eatons MP-3000 motor protection relay provides a transition and incomplete sequence function for reduced voltage starting. The user can select to transition based on the current level or on time.
Long Acceleration Motors

Large motors with high inertia loads may experience starting currents that exceed the locked rotor current and time. The MP-3000 motor protection relay has logic and provisions for a zero speed switch input to differentiate between a stall and start condition. If the motor is spinning then the relay will not trip on the normal locked rotor time allowing the motor to start.
CA08104001E

Product DescriptionMP-3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 068
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Product Selection
Table 4.2-7. MP-3000
Description MP-3000 drawout, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, INCOM, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, Modbus, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, INCOM, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, Modbus, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 drawout, DeviceNet, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, INCOM, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, Modbus, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, DeviceNet, 1A with RS-232 MP-3000 xed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232, URTD MP-3000 xed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232, URTD MP-3000 xed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232, URTD MP-3000 xed case, INCOM, 1A with RS-232, URTD MP-3000 xed case, Modbus, 1A with RS-232, URTD MP-3000 xed case, DeviceNet, 1A with RS-232, URTD Catalog Number MP3011 MP3012 MP3013 MP3014 MP3111 MP3112 MP3113 MP3114 MP3010 MP3010-INCOM MP3010MODBUS MP3010DEVICEN MP3110 MP3110-INCOM MP3110MODBUS MP3110DEVICEN MP3010VPI MP3010VPM MP3010VPD MP3110VPI MP3110VPM MP3110VPD

Main Fuse CTs T C B A Ground Primary Fuses CPT Non-Current Carrying Ground 5 Ground
H 1 C G 1 H 2 C G 2
L3 L2 L1
L3 L2 L1
M M M
GFCT
T3 T2 T1 To Motor or Load Device Under Control
Gnd.
X1 X2
14 15
STAR T T
Secondary Fuses 4 ac Supply To MP-3000 Additional Control 7
2 A
H 2 B
16
M
STOP
Trip Contacts 12 11 M
MP-3000 Back View with Jumper Connection
17 18 19
Alarm Contacts 18 19
Alarm
Auxiliary Trip Contacts 15 16
Aux. Trip
Figure 4.2-4. MP-3000 Wiring
20 21
September 2011
Sheet 04 069

Technical DataMP-3000
4.2-15
L3
L3
Main Fuse
CTs C M
See Below for Residual Ground Connection GFCT T3 To Motor or Load Device Under Control
i ii 1 2 3
L2
T2
L1 Ground Primary Fuses
M Ground X1 X2
T1
CPT Secondary Fuses 17 START 19
Non-current Carrying Ground 60 nd 15 16 42 44 46 48 Trip Contacts 56 54 M Contacts 29 30 Alarm 52 54 56 28 29 30 Aux. Trip 58 60 6 50
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Residual Ground Connection C
ac Supply to MP-3000 Additional Control
STOP
Alarm Contacts 51 53
Auxiliary Trip Contacts 48 46
12 13
B
14
A Ground
15 16
21 23 25
22
24
26
27
28
17 18
Back View of Drawout
Figure 4.2-5. MP-3000 Drawout Typical CT Circuits and Motor Control Wiring
19 20 21

September 2011
Sheet 04 070
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 4.2-8. MP-3000 Specications
Control Power
Nominal rating: Frequency: Power use: 120 Vac or 240 Vac (+10%, 25%) 50 or 60 Hz 20 VA maximum URTD: 6 VA maximum IPONI: 1 VA maximum 120 Vac: 90132 Vac 240 Vac: 180264 Vac 30 cycles at nominal Vac
Motor Overload Protection (I2t)

Full load amperes: Locked rotor current: Locked rotor time: Ultimate trip current: Phase CT ratio: Ground CT ratio: Timing accuracy: 10 to 3000A 300% to 1200% FLA 1 to 120 seconds 85% to 150% FLA 10 to 4000: In 10 to 4000: In 2.5% or 30 ms For I > 1.1x U.T.C.
Start Control Functions

Starts per time: Time for starts per time: Time between starts: Number of cold starts: Motor transition current: Time for transition: Inc. sequence timer: Long acceleration timer: Anti-backspin timer: Off, 1 to 10 starts Off, 1 to 240 minutes Off, 1 to 240 minutes 1 to 5 starts 10% to 300% FLA 0 to 1200 seconds Off, 1 to 240 seconds Off, 1 to 1200 seconds Off, 1 to 3600 minutes
Operating range: Ride through time:
Current Inputs
Nominal (In): CT rating: Phase burden: Ground burden: Saturation: 1A or 5A 2 x In continuous 40 x In for 1 second VA at In VA at In x In
Trip Setting Range

Ground fault (GF): GF Start and run time delay: Timer accuracy: Instantaneous O.C.: IOC start time delay: Timer accuracy: JAM trip: Underload trip: Phase unbalance trip: Off, 2% to 55% CT ratio 2 to 60 cycles 20 ms Off, 300% to 1600% FLA 0 to 60 cycles 20 ms Off, 100% to 1200% FLA Off, 1% to 90% FLA Off, 4% to 40% Ineg/Ipos 0 to 1200 seconds
Clock
Accuracy: 1 minute/month at 25C
Communications
DPONI Type: Baud rate: Protocol: Functions: 5-wire 500K, 250K, 125K, Auto DeviceNet Read/write set points Read metered values Read trip/alarms Read events/history View starting prole 2-wire, FSK 1200 or 9600 baud INCOM Read/write set points Read metered values Read trip/alarms Read events/history View starting prole 5-wire, 485 1200 or 9600 baud Modbus RTU Read/write set points Read metered values Read trip/alarms Read events/history View starting prole
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: Ground current: 1% of In (5%100%) 1.5% of In (0%55%)
Discrete Inputs
Number of inputs: Rating: 2 Programmable 1.2 VA at 120 Vac Maximum OFF = 36 Vac Minimum ON = 86 Vac
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance Time Delay

Start delay timers: Run delay timers: Timer accuracy: 0 to 120 seconds 0 to 240 seconds 0.5% +100 ms
IPONI Type: Baud rate: Protocol: Functions:
Output Contacts
Number of outputs: Momentary: (Resistive) Continuous:
Alarm Setting Range

4 Form C, Programmable Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 second Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc Break 5A at 120/240 Vac 5A at 120/240 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc Ground fault: Overload I2t: JAM: Underload: Phase unbalance: Run delay timers: 4 to 20 mA Programmable 1K ohm 1% Off, 2% to 75% CT ratio Off, 60% to 99% I2t Off, 100% to 1200% FLA Off, 1% to 90% FLA Off, 4% to 40% Ineg/Ipos 0 to 240 seconds
MPONI Type: Baud rate: Protocol: Functions:
Analog Output
Rating: Maximum load: Accuracy:
Logging
Log book: Log event: Log start: Start prole: History records: 100 events 20 trips and alarms Last 4 starts Last start (communication only) Motor, trips, alarms and permanent records
Operating: Storage: Humidity: Temperature: 20C to +60C Temperature: 45C to +85C 0% to 95% (noncondensing)

Height: Width: Depth: Weight: 10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 3.70 (94.0) 7 lbs (3 kg)
UL Recognized
File Number E154862 UL 1053 ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2 CSA
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 071

4.2-17
MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay with Voltage Inputs
The MP-4000 motor protection relay has two discrete inputs, four Form C (1NO and 1NC) contacts and one 4 to 20 mA analog output. The relay provides maximum user exibility to congure the I/O. All inputs and outputs (except for the trip output) are user-programmable. In addition, the relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of protection on, program mode, monitor mode, view setting mode, history mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary 1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page in the program mode provides display indication of the discrete input states and testing of the output relays, target LEDs and analog circuit. A user-friendly operator interface and display provides quick access to the settings, monitored values, motor history and operational logs. Large LED alphanumeric character display provides easy viewing from any angle in any light. Simple keypad operation provides quick and easy navigation through all settings and stored data. The program mode and emergency override buttons are access restricted via a latched cover which can be sealed if required. An integrated help function provides an online description display of functions, abbreviations and operations.
Features
General

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Microprocessor-based Self diagnostics User-friendly interface Large LED display Built-in help program Built-in test mode LED mode and target indication Remote communications Programmable discrete inputs Programmable outputs overload protection (49/51) Locked rotor (49S/51) Ultimate trip current (51) Undervoltage (27) Overvoltage (59) Under power (32) Negative sequence phase unbalance (46) Negative sequence voltage unbalance (47) Instantaneous overcurrent (50) Ground fault protection (50G) RTD trip and alarm with URTD module (49/38) Underload trip (37) Power factor (55) Starts per time (66) Jam or stall (51R) Auto or manual reset (86) Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes Ground fault overload Jam/stall Underload Phase unbalance Voltage unbalance
Protection
I2t
General Description
Eatons MP-4000 motor protection relay is a multi-functional microprocessor-based protective relay for the protection of any size motor at all voltage levels. It is most commonly applied on medium voltage starters and on critical or larger motors. The MP-4000 relay provides complete and reliable motor protection, monitoring and starting control functions. The MP-4000 motor protection relay is available in either a xed mount, semi-ush case or in a semi-ush quick-release drawout case. The optional quick-release drawout case features two-stage contact disconnection and self-shorting CT circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting terminal pair is available for use as relay removal alarm or for continuous motor operation (non-failsafe mode) on relay removal. The optional communication module is externally mounted on the xed mount case and internally mounted in the drawout case. The MP-4000 motor protection relay has three phase and one ground current inputs. The MP-4000 also has three voltage inputs. Both a 5A and 1A version are available. The ground protection and metering functions can be used with either a zero sequence ground CT or from the residual connection of the phase CTs. The zero sequence ground CT provides greater ground fault sensitivity than the residual connection. The relay is programmable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation.
CA08104001E
Optimum Motor Protection

The MP-4000 motor protection relay has been designed for maximum motor operation and protection. It permits running the motor as close to its design limits while protecting it against excessive heating and damaging overload conditions. The MP-4000 eld proven protection algorithms were developed based on motor designs and operating parameters for optimum operation and protection while minimizing nuisance tripping. The MP-4000 motor protection relay uses a protection algorithm and measurement technique based on proven positive and negative (unbalance) sequence current sampling and true rms calculations.
Alarming
I2t

General DescriptionMP-4000 Control
September 2011
Sheet 04 072
i ii 1
History
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transition for reduced voltage starts: Transition on current level Transition on time Transition on current level or time Transition on current level and time Incomplete sequence monitoring Permits number of cold starts Limits number of starts per time Time between starts Anti-backspin time delay Mechanical load shedding Zero speed switch for long acceleration motors Motor stop input for synchronous motor applications Remote trip input Differential trip input Emergency override Metering RTD temperatures: Individual winding Motor bearing Load Auxiliary temperatures Motor conditions: % of I2t thermal bucket Time before start Remaining starts allowed Oldest start time
Motor history: Operational counter Run time Highest starting and running currents Highest % current unbalance Highest % voltage unbalance Highest starting and running voltages Maximum winding, bearing and load RTD temperatures Number of emergency overrides Trip history (number of trips): Ground faults Overloads Instantaneous overcurrent JAM Underload Phase unbalance Voltage unbalance Overvoltage Undervoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Under power Power factor RTDs Phase reversal Incomplete sequence Remote, differential Communication Starts exceeded Time between starts Transition
Alarms history (number of alarms): Ground faults Overloads JAM Underload Current unbalance Voltage unbalance Overvoltage Undervoltage Overfrequency Underfrequency Under power Power factor RTDs Starts exceeded Total history (record which cannot be reset): Total trips Run time Operations count

Logging
Log book (chronological list of last 100 events with date and time stamp) Event log (detailed information of last 20 trips and alarms with date and time stamp) Start log (data on most recent four starts with date and time stamp)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 073

Product SelectionMP-4000
4.2-19
User Interface
The MP-4000 motor protection relay has a user-friendly interface that makes it easy to retrieve important information or make setting changes. LEDs provide visual indication of display and keypad mode. The pushbuttons are clearly labeled and quickly access the desired information.
Product Selection
Table 4.2-9. MP-4000 Ordering Information
Description MP-4000 drawout, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, INCOM, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, Modbus, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, INCOM, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, Modbus, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 drawout, DeviceNet, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, INCOM, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, Modbus, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, DeviceNet, 1A with RS-232 MP-4000 xed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232, URTD MP-4000 xed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232, URTD MP-4000 xed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232, URTD MP-4000 xed case, INCOM, 1A with RS-232, URTD MP-4000 xed case, Modbus, 1A with RS-232, URTD MP-4000 xed case, DeviceNet, 1A with RS-232, URTD Catalog Number MP4011 MP4012 MP4013 MP4014 MP4111 MP4112 MP4113 MP4114 MP4010 MP4010INCOM MP4010MODBUS MP4010DEVICEN MP4110 MP4110INCOM MP4110MODBUS MP4110DEVICEN MP4010VPI MP4010VPM MP4010VPD MP4110VPI MP4110VPM MP4110VPD
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The MP-4000 motor protection relay provides protection against motor overloads, short circuits and abnormal operating conditions.
I2t Overload
Motor overloads are typically limited by the rotor thermal capabilities but the measuring quantities are from the stator. This requires accurate measurements and good motor thermal models to provide reliable protection. The MP-4000 motor protection relay uses a eld-proven measurement and motor thermal protection model. The relay samples the current waveforms 36 times per cycle providing accurate measurements of the positive and negative sequence currents. The negative sequence component of current causes greater heating effect on the rotor and has a greater impact on the thermal model in the relay. This same algorithm has been used to protect thousands of motors since 1984. The MP-4000 motor protection relay overload protection is easy to set and apply. Simply input motor nameplate information and CT ratios and the characteristic is automatically set. When using the MP-4000 motor protection relay, it is recommended that the ratio of CT primary rating to the motor full load amperes (CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to fall between 0.25 and 1.5. The thermal model adapts its tripping characteristics if RTDs are connected.
The MP-4000 motor protection relay provides an instantaneous phase overcurrent function to trip the motor for high fault current levels. This function can be disabled and has an adjustable time delay on starting to avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 074
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Current Unbalance Protection
Motor supply circuits are often fed through fuses and can be run with a single-phase fuse blown. The motor may still see three-phase voltage but will only have current on two phases, referred to as single-phasing the motor. The MP-4000 motor protection relay measures the current unbalance and can be used to alarm or trip the motor before damage occurs. Pickup, start and run timers and a separate alarm setting are provided.
JAM Protection
The user-selectable JAM function protects motors that are running against a sudden mechanical jam or stall condition. The common application is on motors used on crushers, chippers or conveyors. It detects an increase of motor current to a level above full load. Pickup, start and run timers and a separate alarm setting are provided.
Emergency Override
The MP-4000 motor protection relay has a user-programmable feature that will let the operator reset the start control timers and thermal overload bucket. This function is intended for use in emergency conditions only and may result in motor damage or failure.

Large motors with high inertia loads may experience starting currents that exceed the locked rotor current and time. The MP-4000 motor protection relay has logic and provisions for a zero speed switch input to differentiate between a stall and start condition. If the motor is spinning then the relay will not trip on the normal locked rotor time allowing the motor to start.
The user-selectable underload function is used to detect the loss of load on the motor. Coupling failure is a common cause for loss of load. Pickup, start and run timers and a separate alarm setting are provided.
Voltage Unbalance Protection

The MP-4000 will calculate negative sequence voltage from three-phase voltages. The presence of negative sequence voltage identies either a phase unbalance or reverse phase rotation condition. The MP-4000 provides both alarm and trip functionality.

Eatons MP-4000 motor protection relay provides a transition and incomplete sequence function for reduced voltage starting. The user can select to transition based on the current level or on time.
One of the binary inputs can be programmed to accept a contact input from a separate differential relay, such as the MD-3000, or other device to trip the motor. This provides local and remote target information and uses the trip contacts of the MP-4000 motor protection relay. It will also record and log the motor information at the time of the trip.

A separate circuit measures ground fault current. A ground CT is recommended for more sensitive protection against winding fault ground. The relay ground circuit can be connected residually from the three-phase CTs. The ground fault protection has pickup and time delay set points or can be disabled.
Anti-Backspin
For certain applications, for example, pumping uid up a pipe, the motor may be driven backward for a period of time after it stops. The MP-4000 relay provides an anti-backspin timer to prevent starting the motor while it is spinning in the reverse direction. The timer begins counting from the moment a stop is declared by the relay.
The MP-4000 provides over/under protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an independent threshold and time delay.

Motors typically have limits to the number of cold starts, hot starts, starts per time period and time between starts that are permitted without damage. The MP-4000 motor protection relay incorporates these timers to prevent starting the motor beyond its capabilities.
Voltage Protection
The MP-4000 voltage protection can be used to generate a trip or alarm if the voltage exceeds (overvoltage 59) a specied threshold for a specic time delay or drops below (undervoltage 27) a specied threshold for a specied time delay. Voltage elements can act on one, two or three phases.
Motor Starting Prole Time/Current Chart
Load Shedding
The MP-4000 motor protection relay provides a mechanical load shedding feature that can be used to control an upstream process. The load shedding function closes a contact on an overload condition to control an upstream process from adding more load until the overload condition is gone.
Motor Starting Prole

The MP-4000 relay records the average current of the motor for the last two starts. This information is available over the communications port. The motor current can then be plotted and compared to the motor overload protection curve. Available in PowerPort or the PowerNet Event Viewer Client.
Power Factor
The power factor function in the MP-4000 can be used for many applications. For a synchronous motor, it can be used to indicate eld loss. The power factor protection can generate a trip or alarm when the power factor falls between specied thresholds.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 075

4.2-21

Table 4.2-10. MP-4000 Specications
i
Motor Overload Protection (I2t) Logging
Log book: Log event: Log start: Start prole: History records: 100 events 20 trips and alarms Last 4 starts Last start (communication only) Motor, trips, alarms and permanent records Full load amperes: Locked rotor current: Locked rotor time: Ultimate trip current: Phase CT ratio: Ground CT ratio: Timing accuracy:
Control Power
Nominal rating: Frequency: Power use: 120 Vac or 240 Vac (+10%, 25%) 50 or 60 Hz 20 VA maximum URTD: 6 VA maximum IPONI: 1 VA maximum 120 Vac: 90132 Vac 240 Vac:180264 Vac 30 cycles at nominal Vac
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10 to 3000A 300% to 1200% FLA 1 to 120 seconds 85% to 150% FLA 10 to 4000: In 10 to 4000: In 2.5% or 30 ms For I > 1.1x U.T.C.
Operating range: Ride through time:
Start Control Functions

Starts per time: Time for starts per time: Time between starts: No. of cold starts: Motor transition current: Time for transition: Inc. sequence timer: Long acceleration timer: Anti-Backspin Timer: Off, 1 to 10 starts Off, 1 to 240 minutes Off, 1 to 240 minutes 1 to 5 starts 10% to 300% FLA 0 to 1200 seconds Off, 1 to 240 seconds Off, 1 to 1200 seconds Off, 1 to 3600 minutes
Current Inputs
Nominal (In): CT rating: Phase burden: Ground burden: Saturation: 1A or 5A 2 x In continuous 40 x In for 1 second VA at In VA at In x In
Trip Setting Range

Ground fault (GF): GF Start and run time delay: Timer accuracy: Instantaneous O.C.: IOC Start time delay: Timer accuracy: JAM trip: Underload trip: Current unbalance trip: Off, 2% to 55% CT Ratio 2 to 60 cycles 20 ms Off, 300% to 1600% FLA 0 to 60 cycles 20 ms Off, 100% to 1200% FLA Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Voltage Inputs
Nominal rating: Operating range: Burden: 120 Vac 69 to 150 Vac 2 VA
Clock
Accuracy: 1 minute/month at 25C
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: Ground current: 1% of In (5%100%) 1.5% of In (0%55%)
Discrete Inputs
Number of Inputs: Rating: 2 Programmable 1.2 VA at 120 Vac Maximum OFF = 36 Vac Minimum ON = 86 Vac
Output Contacts
Number of outputs: Momentary: (Resistive) Continuous: 4 Form C, Programmable Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 second Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc Break 5A at 120/240 Vac 5A at 120/240 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc
Off, 4% to 40% Ineg/Ipos 0 to1200 seconds Voltage unbalance (47) Threshold: OFF, 1 to 100V % V2/V1: 4% to 40% Time delay: 0 to 1200 seconds Under/overvoltage (27/59) Pickup range: OFF, 10 to 150V Time delay: 0 to 1200 seconds Under/overfrequency (81U/81O) Pickup range: Off, 15 to 60 Hz Time delay: 0 to 60 seconds Power protection (32) Threshold: OFF, 0.06 to 0.90 *FLA *VT Time delay: 0 to 1200 seconds Power factor (55) Threshold: OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 Time delay: 0 to 60 seconds
Communications
DPONI Type: Baud rate: Protocol: Functions: 5-wire 500K, 250K, 125K, Auto DeviceNet Read/write set points Read metered values Read trip/alarms Read events/history View starting prole 2-wire, FSK 1200 or 9600 baud INCOM Read/write set points Read metered values Read trip/alarms Read events/history View starting prole 5-wire, 485 1200 or 9600 baud Modbus RTU Read/write set points Read metered values Read trip/alarms Read events/history View starting prole
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IPONI Type: Baud rate: Protocol: Functions:
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance Time Delay

Start Delay timers: Run Delay timers: Timer accuracy: 0 to 120 seconds 0 to 240 seconds 0.5% + 100 ms
MPONI Type: Baud rate: Protocol: Functions:
Analog Output
Rating: Maximum load: Accuracy: 4 to 20 mA Programmable 1K ohm 1%
Alarm Setting Range

Ground fault: Overload I2t: JAM: Underload: Phase unbalance: Run Delay timers: Off, 2% to 75% CT Ratio Off, 60% to 99% I2t Off, 100% to 1200% FLA Off, 1% to 90% FLA Off, 4% to 40% Ineg/Ipos 0 to 240 seconds
Operating: Storage: Humidity: Temperature: 20C to +60C Temperature: 45C to +85C 0% to 95% (noncondensing)

Height: Width: Depth: Weight: 10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 3.70 (94.0) 7 lbs (3 kg)
UL Recognized
File Number E154862 UL 1053 ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2 CSA
CA08104001E

General DescriptionEMR-3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 076
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay
An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load proles, the ve latest start proles, motor trending, breaker wear information and oscillography data.
Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E software provides local computer access and user-friendly windows based interface for relay settings, conguration and data retrieval Breaker open/close from relay faceplate or remotely via communications Fast and easy troubleshooting, improved maintenance procedures and increased device security. Provides detailed traceability for system conguration changes Relays self-diagnostics and reporting improves uptime and troubleshooting Breaker trip circuit monitoring improves the reliability of the breaker operation
Features
Protection
EMR-3000
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Eatons EMR-3000 motor protection relay is a multifunctional microprocessor-based protective relay for the protection of any size motor at all voltage levels. It is most commonly applied on medium voltage or larger motors. The MP-3000 relay is a current only device that provides complete and reliable motor protection, monitoring and starting control functions. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay has removable terminal blocks, and it has Modbus-RTU communications as standard; and an optional Ethernet port for Modbus-TCP communications. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay has three-phase and one ground current inputs. It can be used with either 5A or 1A CTs. The ground protection can be used with either a zero sequence ground CT or from the residual connection of the phase CTs. The zero sequence ground CT provides greater ground fault sensitivity than the residual connection. The unit is user programmable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. The Maintenance Mode password protected soft key, can be used for arc ash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be changed, via communications or a digital input. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory.
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay has four discrete inputs and one ber optic input, one Form C and two NO programmable contacts, and one Form C healthy contact. It also has an optional 420 mA analog output or zone interlocking card. The relay provides maximum user exibility to congure the I/O. All inputs and outputs (except the healthy output) are user-programmable. The unit also counts with a test mode to force outputs and simulate currents, to facilitate the commissioning of the unit. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Thermal protection (49/51) Locked rotor protection (49S/51) Phase overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous elements with timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3]) Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2] and 51P[3]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Ground overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1] and 51X[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Jam or Stall protection (50J[1] and 50J[2]) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2]) Underload protection (37[1], 37[2], 37[3]) Temperature protection with optional URTD (49/38) Stars per hour (66) Lockout protection (86) Breaker failure (50BF) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)
CA08104001E
Microprocessor-based protection with monitoring and control for medium voltage motors Integral test function reduces maintenance time and expense Zone selective interlocking improves coordination and tripping time, and saves money compared to a traditional bus differential scheme Reduce troubleshooting time and maintenance costsTrip and event recording in non-volatile memory provides detailed information for analysis and system restoration. 6000 cycles of waveform capture aids in post fault analysis (viewable using PowerPort-E software) Minimum replacement time Removable terminal blocks ideal in industrial environments
September 2011
Sheet 04 077

4.2-23
Metering

Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Phase angles Frequency % THD I Magnitude THD I Minimum/maximum recording Phase angles Temperature with remote URTD module Trip coil monitor Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Trending (load prole over time) Motor history Records the last ve motor start proles Motor start trending CT supervision Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port Remote communication port: RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: Modbus-RTU Modbus-TCP (optional) Conguration software Transition for reduced voltage starts Incomplete sequence delay Permits numbers of cold starts Limits numbers of starts per hour Anti-backspin time delay Mechanical load shedding Zero speed switch for long acceleration motors Motor stop inputs Remote trip input Differential trip input Emergency override Breaker/Contactor open-close/ stop-start
Remote open-close (stop-start) Programmable I/O Programmable LEDs Multiple setting groups

Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip characteristics that adjust the trip times based on measured motor temperature when RTDs are used.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Eatons EMR-3000 motor protection relay has been designed for maximum motor operation and protection. It permits running the motor close to its design limits while protecting it against excessive heating and damaging overload conditions. The EMR-3000 eld-proven protection algorithms were developed based on motor designs and operating parameters for optimum operation and protection while minimizing nuisance tripping. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay uses a protection algorithm and measurement technique based on proven positive and negative (unbalance) sequence current sampling and true rms calculations.
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay provides an instantaneous phase overcurrent function to trip the motor for high fault current levels and to save the fuses. This function can be disabled and has an adjustable time delay on starting to avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
Monitoring


Motor supply circuits are often fed through fuses and can be run with a single-phase fuse blown, referred to as single-phasing the motor. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay measures the current unbalance and can be used to alarm or trip the motor before damage occurs. Pickup, start and run timers, and a second element for alarm purposes are provided.
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection

The EMR-3000 motor relay features the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload protection system. Intel-I-Trip develops custom overload curves simply from motor nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip protects motors from potentially damaging overload and abnormal operating conditions. The Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload protection feature uses eld-proven measurement techniques and a motor thermal protection model. The EMR-3000 motor relays unique measurement technique samples the current waveforms 36 times per cycle, providing accurate measurements of the positive and negative sequence currents. The negative sequence current causes a greater heating effect on the rotor and has a greater impact on the thermal model in the relay. Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements in its motor model to safely protect the motor against the heating effects of these currents. The motor thermal model is analogous to a bucket that is being lled and drained at the same time. The ll rate is dependent on the motor currents and the drain is based on motor design principles. The size of the bucket is equivalent to the thermal capacity associated with the mass of the motor. Intel-I-Trip integrates these rates and will issue a trip when the thermal capacity is lled.

A separate measuring circuit is used to measure ground current. A ground CT is recommended for more sensitive protection against winding insulation breakdown to ground. The relay ground circuit can be connected residually from the three-phase CTs. The ground fault protection has pickup and time delay set points or can be disabled.
Communication

Jam Protection
The user-selectable Jam function protects motors that are running against a sudden mechanical jam or stall condition. The common application is on motors used on crushers, chippers or conveyors. It detects an increase of motor current to a level above full load. Pickup, start and run timers and a second element for alarm purposes are provided.
Control Functions

The user-selectable underload function is used to detect the loss of load on the motor. Coupling failure is a common cause for loss of load. Pickup, start and run timers, and a second element for alarm purposes are provided.

The EMR-3000 motor protection relay provides a transition and incomplete sequence function for reduced voltage starting. The user can select to transition based on the current level and/or on time.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionEMR-3000 Antibackspin
The stop function is programmable from 220%. For certain applications, such as pumping a uid up a pipe, the motor may be driven backward for a period of time after it stops. The EMR-3000 relay provides an antibackspin timer to prevent starting the motor while it is spinning in the reverse direction. The timer begins counting from the moment a stop is declared by the relay.
September 2011
Sheet 04 078
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor

The EMR-3000 motor protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.
Waveform Capture
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The EMR-3000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications.

The EMR-3000 motor protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.

Motors typically have limits to the number of cold starts, starts per hour period, or time between starts that are permitted without damage. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay incorporates these timers to prevent starting the motor beyond its capabilities.

The front panel user interface has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. Seven programmable LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm and trip indication. Soft keys are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through data and settings. In addition, the relay settings and test functions are password protected.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the user to switch to more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication or via a digital Input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce the possibility of injury.
Load Shedding
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay provides a mechanical load shedding feature that can be used to control an upstream process. The load-shedding function closes a contact on an overload condition to control an upstream process from adding more load until the overload condition is gone.
Starting Proles
The EMR-3000 records the average current versus time for the last ve starting cycles. This information is available via the communications port through PowerPort-E.
Emergency Override
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay has a user-programmable feature that will let the operator reset the start inhibitor timers and thermal overload bucket. This function is intended for use in emergency conditions only, and it may result in motor damage or failure.

The EMR-3000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and selfdiagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in a FIFO in chronological order.
Motor Statistics
For each motor start, the EMR-300 stores a motor start report and adds this data to the motor statistics buffer. With the motor statistics you can track motor start data for the past 18 30-day periods. For each 30-day interval, the relay records the following information: The date the interval began The total number of starts in the interval The averages of the following quantities: Motor start time Start % rotor thermal capacity used Maximum start current


Large motors with a high inertia may experience starting currents that exceed the locked rotor current and time. The EMR-3000 motor protection relay has logic and provisions for a zero speed switch input to differentiate between a stall and start condition. If the motor is spinning, then the relay will not trip on the normal locked rotortime allowing the motor to start.
Trip Log
The EMR-3000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
The digital inputs can be programmed to accept a contact input from a separate differential relay or other device to trip the motor. This provides local and remote target information and uses the trip contacts of the EMR-3000 motor protection relay. It will also record and log the motor information at the time of the trip.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 079

4.2-25
The EMR-3000 relay automatically records selected quantities into nonvolatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting.
Programmable I/O
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip rated, 2NO and one Form C contacts. One isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm
function and is operated in a normally energized (failsafe) mode. There are 4 eight user-congurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is user-programmable for maximum application exibility.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 080
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration and to view metered values and stored
Figure 4.2-8. PowerPort-E EMR-3000 Device Planning
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 081

4.2-27
Table 4.2-11. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-3000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
i ii
EMR-3000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 A = Four digital inputs, four outputs, removable terminals, one 420 mA analog output, URTD interface, IRIG-B small display B = Four digital inputs, four outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking, URTD interface, IRIG-B, small display Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A/1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 = Phase current 5A/1A, sensitive ground current, 0.5A/0.1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) I = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) + Modbus-TCP (RJ-45) Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards Mounting Options 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground.
CA08104001E

Technical Data and SpecicationsEMR-3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 082
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 4.2-12. EMR-3000 Specications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage: Buffer time in case of supply failure: 19300 Vdc/40250 Vac 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage communication is permitted to be interrupted Max. permissible making current: 18A peak value for 0.25 ms 12A peak value for 1 ms The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of: 2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm (approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 3.5A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: Input current: Reaction time: Fallback time: 4 switching thresholds: 300 Vdc/270 Vac <4 mA <20 ms <30 ms (safe state of the digital inputs) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc, 230 Vac/dc Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. 9.6 Vdc Min. 42.6 Vdc Max. 21.3 Vdc Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Screw-type terminal

RS-485
Power Consumption
Power supply range: 19300 Vdc: 6W idle mode/ 8W max. power 40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/ 8W max. power (for frequencies of 4070 Hz) Power consumption: Phase current inputs at In = 1A burden = 0.15 mVA at In = 5A burden = 0.15 mVA Ground current input: at In = 1A burden = 0.35 mVA at In = 5A burden = 0.35 mVA
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
Connection: Versatile link

Storage temperature: 25C up to +70C (13F to 158F) Operating temperature: 20C up to +60C (4F to 140F) Permissible humidity at Ann. average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.) Permissible installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft) above sea level If 4000m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies, a changed classication of the operating and test voltages may be necessary.
Binary Output Relays

Continuous current: Max. make current: Max. breaking current: 5A AC/DC 25A AC/25A DC for 4s 5A AC up to 125 Vdc 5A DC up to 30V (resistive) 0.2A DC at 300V Max. switching voltage: 250 Vac/300 Vdc Switching capacity: 2000 VA Contact type: 1 changeover contact Terminals: Screw-type terminals
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 083

4.2-29
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides complete current, voltage and frequency protection in a single compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent singlephase undervoltage/overvoltage protection. The unit is user programmable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. The Maintenance Mode password protected soft key can be used for arc ash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be changed, via communications or a digital input. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available.
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Logic gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. With the programmable logic control functions you can simplify the complexity of your starting schemes by eliminating timers and auxiliary relays. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software or contact input. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load proles, the ve latest start proles, motor trending, breaker/ contactor wear information and oscillography data. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay has eight discrete inputs, one ber optic input, two Form C and 2NO output programmable contacts, and one Form C healthy contact. It also has four 420 mA analog outputs and one zone interlocking card. The relay provides maximum user exibility to congure the I/O. All inputs and to outputs (except the healthy output) are user-programmable. The unit also counts with a test mode to force outputs and simulate currents, to facilitate the commissioning of the unit. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EMR-4000
General Description
Eatons EMR-4000 motor protection relay is a multifunctional microprocessor-based protective relay for the protection of any size motor at all voltage levels. It is most commonly applied on medium voltage or larger motors. The EMR-4000 relay is a current and voltage device that provides complete and reliable motor protection, monitoring, diagnostics, metering and starting control functions. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay has removable terminal blocks, and it has Modbus-RTU communications as standard; and an optional Ethernet port for Modbus-TCP communications or IEC-61850.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
September 2011
Sheet 04 084
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Features
Protection

10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Thermal protection (49/51) Locked rotor protection (49S/51) Phase overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous elements with timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3]) Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2] and 51P[3]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Ground overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1] and 51X[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Jam or Stall protection (50J[1] and 50J[2]) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2]) Underload protection (37[1], 37[2], 37[3]) Temperature protection with optional URTD (49/38) Stars per hour (66) Switch onto fault protection Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Main three-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) Auxiliary single-phase under/ overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) Six frequency elements that can be assigned to: overfrequency, underfrequency, rate of change or vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2]) Forward and reverse watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3]) Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3]) Lockout protection (86) Breaker failure (50BF) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load prole over time) Minimum/maximum recording Temperature with remote URTD module Trip coil monitor Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Trending (load prole over time) Motor history Records the last ve motor start proles Motor start trending CT supervision VT supervision Clock (1 ms time stamping)
Diagnostic
Broken rotor bar (Beta version) Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port Remote communication port: RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: Modbus-RTU (optional) Modbus-TCP (optional) IEC-61850 (optional) Conguration software Transition for reduced voltage starts Incomplete sequence delay Permits numbers of cold starts Limits numbers of starts per hour Anti-backspin time delay Mechanical load shedding Zero speed switch for long acceleration motors Motor stop inputs Remote trip input Differential trip input Emergency override Breaker/contactor open-close/ stop-start Remote open-close (stop-start) Programmable I/O Programmable LEDs Programmable logic Multiple setting groups
Communication

Metering

Control Functions

Monitoring

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 085

General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
4.2-31
Table 4.2-13. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-4000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
i ii
EMR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 A = Eight digital inputs, ve outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking, URTD interface, IRIG-B, small display B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable terminals, zone interlocking, URTD interface, IRIG-B, large display Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 = Phase current 5A/1A, sensitive ground current, 0.5A/0.1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) H = IEC-61850 I = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) + Modbus-TCP (RJ-45) Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards Mounting Options 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount
1 2 3 4 5
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground, large display and IEC-61850.

Eatons EMR-4000 motor protection relay has been designed for maximum motor operation and protection. It permits running the motor close to its design limits while protecting it against excessive heating and damaging overload conditions. The EMR-4000 eld-proven protection algorithms were developed based on motor designs and operating parameters for optimum operation and protection while minimizing nuisance tripping. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay uses a protection algorithm and measurement technique based on proven positive and negative (unbalance) sequence current sampling and true rms calculations.
The motor thermal model is analogous to a bucket that is being lled and drained at the same time. The ll rate is dependent on the motor currents and the drain is based on motor design principles. The size of the bucket is equivalent to the thermal capacity associated with the mass of the motor. Intel-I-Trip integrates these rates and will issue a trip when the thermal capacity is lled. Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip characteristics that adjust the trip times based on measured motor temperature when RTDs are used.

A separate measuring circuit is used to measure ground current. A ground CT is recommended for more sensitive protection against winding insulation breakdown to ground. The relay ground circuit can be connected residually from the three-phase CTs. The ground fault protection has pickup and time delay set points or can be disabled.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Jam Protection
The user-selectable jam function protects motors that are running against a sudden mechanical jam or stall condition. The common application is on motors used on crushers, chippers or conveyors. It detects an increase of motor current to a level above full load. Pickup, start and run timers, and a second element for alarm purposes are provided.
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides an instantaneous phase overcurrent function to trip the motor for high fault current levels and to save the fuses. This function can be disabled and has an adjustable time delay on starting to avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection

The EMR-4000 motor relay features the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload protection system. Intel-I-Trip develops custom overload curves simply from motor nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip protects motors from potentially damaging overload and abnormal operating conditions. The Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload protection feature uses eld proven measurement techniques and a motor thermal protection model. The EMR-4000 motor relays unique measurement technique samples the current waveforms 36 times per cycle, providing accurate measurements of the positive and negative sequence currents. The negative sequence current causes a greater heating effect on the rotor and has a greater impact on the thermal model in the relay. Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements in its motor model to safely protect the motor against the heating effects of these currents.
Underload/Underpower Protection
The user-selectable underload/ underpower function is used to detect the loss of load on the motor. Coupling failure is a common cause for loss of load. Whenever possible, it is better to use underpower to detect loss of load. Three power elements and two underload elements are provided in the relay for tripping and alarm purposes. Pickup, start and run timers are provided for each element.

Motor supply circuits are often fed through fuses and can be run with a single-phase fuse blown, referred to as single-phasing the motor. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay measures the current and voltage unbalance and either can be used to alarm or trip the motor before damage occurs. The EMR-4000 has two voltage and two current unbalance elements. Pickup, start and run timers are provided for each element.
The frequency elements provide the ability to detect when the motor is operating at off-nominal frequencies that can do damage to the process or, to signal to upstream protections or controls to implement load shedding actions.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionEMR-4000 Power Factor Protection
This protection is used in synchronous motors applications to detect out-ofsynchronism conditions.
September 2011
Sheet 04 086
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Large motors with a high inertia may experience starting currents that exceed the locked rotor current and time. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay has logic and provisions for a zero speed switch input to differentiate between a stall and start condition. If the motor is spinning, then the relay will not trip on the normal locked rotor time allowing the motor to start.
Diagnostic Features
Broken Rotor Bar (Beta Version)
The EMR-4000 provides advanced motor diagnostics including a broken rotor bar detection function. The broken rotor bar detection is a condition maintenance function that continuously monitors the motors health while in operation. The advanced Motor Current Signature Analysis (MCSA) continuously analyzes the motor current signature and based on preset algorithms it will determine when a broken rotor bar is present in the motor. The broken rotor bar function will provide early detection of any rotor problems and advise maintenance personnel of the impending issue, allowing for predictive maintenance of the motor and for prevention of catastrophic motor failures. By providing early indication of potential rotor problems, serious system issues such as: reduced starting torque, overloads, torque and speed oscillation and bearing wear can be avoided. With the advanced broken rotor bar detection system, advanced warning of impending problems reduces catastrophic failures, maximizing motor life and system uptime.
Undervoltage/Overvoltage Protection
Use the voltage protective functions to detect abnormal system voltage conditions that are potentially hazardous to the motor.

The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides a transition and an incomplete sequence function for reduced voltage starting. The user can select to transition based on the current level and/or on time.
The digital inputs can be programmed to accept a contact input from a separate differential relay or other device to trip the motor. This provides local and remote target information and uses the trip contacts of the EMR-4000 motor protection relay. It will also record and log the motor information at the time of the trip.
Antibackspin
The stop function is programmable from 220%. For certain applications, such as pumping a uid up a pipe, the motor may be driven backward for a period of time after it stops. The EMR-4000 relay provides an antibackspin timer to prevent starting the motor while it is spinning in the reverse direction. The timer begins counting from the moment a stop is declared by the relay.
Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor

The EMR-4000 motor protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.

Motors typically have limits to the number of cold starts, starts per hour period or time between starts that are permitted without damage. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay incorporates these timers to prevent starting the motor beyond its capabilities.

The EMR-4000 motor protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.

The EMR-4000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and selfdiagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in a FIFO in chronological order.
Load Shedding
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides a mechanical load shedding feature that can be used to control an upstream process. The load-shedding function closes a contact on an overload condition to control an upstream process from adding more load until the overload condition is gone.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and to lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the user to switch to more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication or via a digital Input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce the possibility of injury.
Emergency Override
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay has a user-programmable feature that will let the operator reset the start inhibitor timers and thermal overload bucket. This function is intended for use in emergency conditions only, and it may result in motor damage or failure.
Trip Log
The EMR-4000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 087

4.2-33
Waveform Capture
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The EMR-4000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications.
Starting Proles
The EMR-4000 records the average current versus time for the last ve starting cycles. This information is available via the communications port through PowerPort-E.
Programmable I/O
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, 2NO and one Form C contacts. One isolated input can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (failsafe) mode. There are 4 eight user-congurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is user-programmable for maximum application exibility.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Motor Statistics
For each motor start, the EMR-3000 stores a motor start report and adds this data to the motor statistics buffer. With the motor statistics you can track motor start data for the past 18 30-day periods. For each 30-day interval, the relay records the following information: The date the interval began The total number of starts in the interval The averages of the following quantities: Motor start time Start % rotor thermal capacity used Maximum start current

The front panel user interface has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. Seven programmable LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm and trip indication. Soft keys are provided for operating mode selection, scrolling through data and settings. In addition, the relay settings and test functions are password protected.
Programmable Logic
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are 80 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.
The EMR-4000 relay automatically records selected quantities into non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting.
19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 088
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 4.2-11. Typical Control Diagram Figure 4.2-10. Typical One-Line Diagram
21
September 2011
Sheet 04 089

4.2-35
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration and to view metered values and stored
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 4.2-12. PowerPort-E EMR-4000 Device Planning
21

Technical Data and SpecicationsEMR-4000
September 2011
Sheet 04 090
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 4.2-14. EMR-4000 Specications
Voltage Supply
Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: Input current: Reaction time: Fallback time: Switching thresholds: 300 Vdc/259 Vac <4 mA <20 ms <30 ms (safe state of the digital inputs) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc, 230 Vac/dc Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. 9.6 Vdc Min. 42.6 Vdc Max. 21.3 Vdc Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Screw-type terminal
Zone Interlocking
NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING OUTPUTS (ZONE INTERLOCK, SEMI-CONDUCTOR OUTPUT): 5 Vdc, <2 mA FOR CONNECTION TO ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY. Zone out: Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc Zone in: Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc Max. input voltage: +5.5 Vdc Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc Switching threshold OFF: Max. 1.5 Vdc Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV AC (to ground and other IO) Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
Power Consumption

Relay Outputs
RS-485
Fiber Optic
URTD-Interface

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 091

General DescriptionUniversal RTD
4.2-37
Universal RTD Module
Eatons Universal RTD Module is an electronic resistance temperature detector designed to monitor as a stand-alone device or in conjunction with the protective relays. The Universal RTD Module can be used to monitor, for example, transformer temperature and relay that information back to a remote computer or programmable controller. When used in conjunction with the motor relays, the Universal RTD Module enhances the units motor protection ability. In addition to the FP-6000, ETR-4000, EMR-3000, EMR-4000 and EGR-4000, the Universal RTD Module can be used with the older motor relays such as IQ-1000 II, MP-3000 and MP-4000. The Universal RTD Module can be used to monitor as many as 12 RTD inputsfour groups consisting of six motor windings, two motor bearings, two load bearings and two auxiliary. The Universal RTD Module can be programmed to accept any of the following types of RTD inputs: 10 ohm copper, 100 ohm platinum, and 100 and 120 ohm nickel.
The Universal RTD Module transmits information using a ber optic link, with a maximum distance of 400 feet (122m). Table 4.2-15. Catalog Numbers
Description Universal RTD Module 48250 AC/DC Universal RTD Module 2448 Vdc Catalog Number URTDI-01 URTDII-02
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Height: 7.67 (194.8) Width: 4.32 (109.7) Depth: 2.00 (50.8)
Communications
Communications to the Power Xpert Software are enabled through Power Xpert Gateway and Modbus-RTU port built into the module.
General Description
Monitors as a stand-alone device or in conjunction with the MP-3000, MP-4000, FP-6000, ETR-4000, EMR-3000, EMR-4000 and EGR-4000 protection relays.
Universal RTD Module AC A 120 Vac H3 ACN
Control Power Transformer

H
10
A H 1 B
Data Strobe
120 Vac
H 2 B
H 1 C
G 1 H 2 C G 2
11
23 22 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 Shield n Data Strobe
MP-3000
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
No on-current Carrying arrying Ground
25 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Optical Fiber for URTD Communications to MP-3000 (Preferred Method)
Customer Remote Input Contacts or Pushbuttons
Figure 4.2-13. MP-3000 and URTD Wiring
19 20 21
CA08104001E

Technical DataUniversal RTD
September 2011
Sheet 04 092
i ii 1 2 3
RTD Inputs: (Requires URTD Module)

6.26 (159.0) with PONI and RTD Module 5.07 (128.8)
Sensor types:
10 ohm copper 100 ohm nickel 120 ohm nickel 100 ohm platinum Fiber optic Type HFBR-PNS005
URTD Module Communications

Interface: Fiber optic cable:
4 5
+4/20 OUTPUT -4/20 OUTPUT 25 24
STYLE NUMBER 2D78559
UNIVERSAL RTD MODULE
6 7 8
1A49102H19
120 35 33 31 29 27 VAC AUTO SELECT V
AC J3
1 AUX 2 2 3 4 SOURCE 7
ACN AUX1 GND LB2
LB1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AC ACN 120VAC J3
DISCRETE 1 DISCRETE COMMON DISCRETE IN 2
25 24 MB2 23 22 21 MB1 20
Figure 4.2-14. MP-3000 URTD MountingDimensions in Inches (mm)
8 9 10
RTD Module Mounting Bracket

Common Data Strobe
Control Power Transformer 120V AC
11 12 13 14 16 18 20
41 42 43 45 47 49 44 46 48 50
Data Strobe Common Shield
16 17 18 19 20 21
Optical Fiber for URTD Communications to MP-3000 (Preferred Method)
15 17 19
21 22 23 25 27 24 26 28
51 52 53 55 57 59 54 56 58 60
29 30
Non-current Carrying Ground
Customer Remote Input Contacts Or Pushbuttons
Figure 4.2-15. MP-3000 Drawout Typical AC Supply and URTD Wiring

September 2011
Sheet 04 093
Protective and Predictive Relays Differential Protection

General DescriptionMD-3000
4.3-1
MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay
The MD-3000 microprocessor-based relay provides reliable instantaneous trip protection for all voltage levels. It is most commonly used as a motor differential protection relay.
Table 4.3-1. Catalog Numbers

Description Fixed case Drawout Catalog Number MD3000 MD3001
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
System Protection
Features

MD-3000 Differential Relay
General Description
Eatons MD-3000 Protective Relay is a microprocessor-based sensitive three-phase instantaneous OC relay designed for both ANSI and IEC applications. The MD-3000 is suitable for use as a motor or generator selfbalancing differential protection relay. The MD-3000 Relay operates from the 5A secondary output of standard current transformers. Current transformer ratio information is quickly programmed into the unit via settings. The MD-3000 features a user-friendly operator panel to monitor, program and test the relay. Operating parameters and troubleshooting information are displayed in the two display windows.
ANSI and IEC applications Phase differential metering Monitoring and reporting of magnitude and phase of current causing trip Relay failure alarm contact Trip alarm contact User-friendly front panel Non-volatile memory View settings any time Set CT ratios Integral test mode Program and test mode security access cover with meter seal provision Continuous internal circuitry self-testing Programmable lockout/self reset after trip
Instantaneous sensitive phase overcurrent trip Displays current transformer ratio Data/information transmission
Information and Data Delivery

Wiring Diagram
87
6 7 8
9 10
Figure 4.3-1. Self-Balancing Differential Protection
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.3-2

Technical DataMD-3000
September 2011
Sheet 04 094
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Test
7.72 (196.1) 3.86 (98.0)
5.33 (135.4) 0.80 (20.3) 2.61 (66.3)
5.23 (132.8)
5.67 (144.0)
MD 3000 Motor/Generator Differential
Operational Reset
S/N000000 W000000 66D0000G00 REV. 0 Built by FEC

Tested by GLK
RMS Amperes
MD 3001 Motor Differential Drawout Case Power Supply Input: Term. 17/19 AC 120-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz DC 48-250 Vdc Caution - Refer to Instruction Leaflet
Differential Pickup In Time

A DIF B DIF C DIF
Unused 11 Unused 13 12 Unused 14 Unused 16 Unused 18 Unused 20
4.75 (120.7)
11 12 13 14 15 16
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Select
Unused 15
17 (+) Power Supply 19 Input (-)
11.34 (288.0)
In=5A (Secondary) Settings/Test Time/Trip Cause Program Test Program

Program
Current Input 21 A2 23 B2 25 26 C1 27 29 30 28 Unused Unused C2 Unused Unused 24 B1 22 A1
17 18 19 20
View Settings
9.51 (241.6)
Select Settings
Save Settings
21 22 23 24 25 26
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Raise Lower
Select Tests Test
27 28 29 30
Test
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
52 A B C AC/DC Supply TC 52a
1.51 (38.4)
6.89 (175.0)
Figure 4.3-2. MD-3000Dimensions in Inches (mm)

For The DT3031 To Be "CE Compliant", The Power Supply Input Fuse Must Be Rated At A Maximum Of 0.25 AMPS. TB2 14 Differential Trip TB2 15 52a
CS C
CS T
Enclosure Rear View
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 A1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Trip Alarm
16 17 18 19 20 21
CT A2 B2 C2 A B C Chassis Gnd B1 C1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Equip Gnd Differential Trip
Figure 4.3-3. MD-3000 Wiring Diagram

September 2011
Sheet 04 095

General DescriptionDP-300
4.3-3
DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay
IL
or or
IL
or or
i ii
Ia
Ib
Ia
Ib
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A)
B)
Schematic Circuit Diagrams (Single-Phase Version): A) Fault Outside the Protection Area B) Fault Inside the Protection Area
Figure 4.3-4. Protected Area PrincipleFault A Outside = No Alarm, Fault B Inside = Alarm
DP-300
Features
General Description
The DP-300 offers a three-phase current differential protection for generators, motors and two winding transformers. The current owing in the individual conductors is measured by means of current transformers installed on both sides of the protection zone. These transformers form the limits of the protection zone. By means of freely congurable relays, the unit will indicate if any of the adjusted fault current limits have been exceeded. The unit counts with a slope characteristic to prevent operation due to CT ratio mismatches, CT ratio errors, CT saturation, and errors because of tap changes. For transformer applications, the unit has 2nd and 5th harmonic restraints to prevent misoperation in case of inrush currents caused for energization or over excitation of the transformer. When used in transformer applications, the DP-300 allows change to the phase shift of the transformer, without having to change the connection of the external CTs, via selecting the vector group in the display. The different nominal currents of the high and low voltage side of the transformer, as well as the transformer ratio, may be congured. Every measuring point may be set separately. These features permit the DP-300 to be universal in its applications. The DP-300 permits design simplication of the switchgear cabinet, facilitates the commissioning, ensures the operation of the system, is user friendly, and increases the availability of the system.

True rms 6 x current measurement, three-phase system on both sides of the protected zone Secondary current transformer output available as: /1A or /5A Congurable trip set points for: Differential current (Id) Restrain current (Is) Congurable delays Four alarm relays
Three discrete inputs (for blocking, acknowledgment and conguration) Two-line LC display Congurable transformer ratio Congurable vector group Transformer inrush detection/ suppression Individual conguration of the nominal current for the high- and low-voltage side of the transformer Congurable transformer ratio separated for currents of high- and low-voltage side of the transformer
Typical Nameplate
Figure 4.3-5. Typical DP-300 Nameplate
19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.3-4

Technical DataDP-300
September 2011
Sheet 04 096
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Technical Data
Table 4.3-2. DP-300 Specications
Description Specication 5A 40.0 to 70.0 Hz Class 1 5.0 x In < 0.15 VA 30.0 x In 90 to 250 Vac/Vdc Maximum 10 VA 30 to +80C (22 to +176F) 20 to +70C (4 to +158F) 95%, noncondensing 6562 ft (2000m) 2 Nominal voltage 18 to 250 Vac/dc Approximately 68K ohms AgCdO AC: 2.00 Aac at 250 Vac DC: 2.00 Adc at 24 Vdc, 0.36 Adc at 125 Vdc, 0.18 Adc at 250 Vdc AC: B300 DC: 1.00 Adc at 24 Vdc, 0.22 Adc at 125 Vdc, 0.10 Adc at 250 Vdc Minimum 100 ms Minimum 10% APRANORM DIN 43 700 5.67 x 3.78 x 5.20 inches (144 x 96 x 132 mm) 5.43 [+0.039] x 3.63 [=0.031] inches (138 [+1.0] x 92 [+0.8] mm) Screw-type, terminals depending on connector, 0.00388 in.2 (2.5 mm2) or 0.00620 in.2 (4.0 mm2) [0.00388 in.2] 4.43 in./lbs/[0.00620 in.2] 5.3 in./lbs ([2.5 mm2] 0.5 Nm/[4.0 mm2] 0.6 Nm) Use 60/75C (140/167F) copper wire only Use Class 1 wire only (or equivalent) Approximately 2.2 lbs (1000g) IP42 from front with correct mounting IP54 from front with gasket Gasket: P/N 8923-1038) IP20 from back Insulating surface Tested according to applicable EN guidelines CE marking; UL listing for ordinary locations, UL/cUL listed, ordinary locations, File No.: E231544 IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2
Measurements, CurrentsIsolated
Measured currents (nominal value IN) Measuring frequency Accuracy Linear measuring range Maximum power consumption per path Rated short-time current (1s)
Ambient Conditions
Voltage supply Intrinsic consumption Ambient temperature storage Operational Ambient humidity Maximum altitude Degree of pollution
Digital InputsIsolated
Input range (Vcont, digital input) Input resistance
Relay OutputsIsolated
Contact material Resistive load (GP) (Vcont, relay output) Inductive load (PD) (Vcont, relay output)
Protective Functions
Operating time Differential current
Housing
Type Dimensions (W x H x D) Front panel cutout (W x H) Terminals Recommended tightening torque
Weight
14 15
Housing Protection
Protection system
Front foil
16 17 18 19 20 21
EMC-Test (CE) Listings Additional approvals
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 097

Technical DataDP-300
4.3-5
Wiring Diagram
DP-300 Block Differential Protection Possible Protected Objects:
i ii
1 2 3
N Transducer Set 2 (Low Voltage Side) PE L (90 to 250 Vac/dc) The Transducer Ratio is Adjustable in the Display. 31 32 Current IL1 Transducer Set 2
83 81
79
4 5 6 7
34
33
Current IL2 Transducer Set 2
DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay
35 36
Blocking Acknowledgement Configuration Off N/C Common
18 19
8 9 10 11
Protected Object
12
15 16
17
Relay 4
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
N/C Relay 3 Ready for Operation
Transducer Set 1 (High Voltage Side) L1
The Transducer Ratio is Adjustable in the Display.
30
29
Relay 2
28
27
25 26
Relay 1
L2
L3
Subject to Technical Modifications.
Figure 4.3-6. DP-300 Wiring Diagram
CA08104001E
4.3-6
Protective and Predictive Relays Transformer Protection

General DescriptionETR-4000
September 2011
Sheet 04 098
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
The ETR-4000 transformer protection relay has a mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of events records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/ maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The ETR-4000 has eight programmable binary inputs, four normally opened and four Form C heavy-duty outputs and one Form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset
Two breaker failure elements (50BF[1] and 50BF[2]) Phase transformer overload protection (49) Switch onto fault protection Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)
Metering

ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
Features
Protection
Dual-slope percentage restrained current differential with magnetizing inrush and overexcitation blocking (87R) Unrestrained current differential (87H) Restricted ground fault/Ground Differential (87GD) Phase overcurrent (elements can be assigned to either side of the transformer):

General Description
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for two winding transformers of all voltage levels. The ETR-4000 provides phase and ground percentage restrained differential protection using a variable dual slope characteristic with phase, negative, residual and neutral overcurrent elements for backup protection. It can also be used to provide restrained differential protection to large motors and generators. The ETR-4000 has eight current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A to monitor both sides of the transformers. The CTs can be connected in wye in both sides of the transformer; the relay automatically compensates for the connection of the transformer and for CT mismatch errors. The Maintenance Mode password protected soft key can be used for arc ash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups that can be activated through software, the display or a contact input.
Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Current phase angles % THD I Magnitude THD I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load prole over time) RTD temperatures Trip coil monitor for both primary and secondary breakers Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (3600 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port Remote communication port: RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: Modbus-RTU Modbus-TCP (optional) Conguration software Breaker open/close both breakers Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable LEDs Multiple setting groups Cold load pickup CT supervision
Monitoring

Four instantaneous elements with timers (50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3] and 50P[4]) Four inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3] and 51P[4]) 11 standard curves Inrush blocking Instantaneous or time delay reset
Communication

Negative sequence phase overcurrent (elements can be assigned to either side of the transformer): Two inverse time overcurrent elements (51Q[1] and 51Q[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Ground overcurrent (elements can be assigned to either side of the transformer): Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1] and 51X[2])
Control Functions

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 099

4.3-7
Table 4.3-3. Catalog Numbering Selection for ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay Removable Terminals
i ii
ETR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 A = Eight digital inputs, nine outputs, removable terminals, two zone interlocking, URTD interface, IRIG-B, small display B = Four digital inputs, ve outputs, removable terminals, IRIG-B, small display C = Eight digital inputs, ve outputs, removable terminals, one zone interlocking, IRIG-B, small display Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A/1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 = Phase current 5A/1A, sensitive ground current 0.5A/0.1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) 1 = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) + Modbus-TCP (RJ-45) Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards Mounting Options 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground, four inputs/ve outputs and eight inputs/ve outputs.
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The ETR-4000 is suitable for application on small, medium and large two-winding power transformers. Multiple current inputs are used to provide primary protection, control and backup protection of transformers, including current differential, restricted ground differential and overcurrent protection.
The operating characteristic of the percent differential element is a dualslope characteristic to accommodate for CT saturation and CT errors.
Another condition that can create a false differential current is a sudden change of voltage or frequency that can put the transformer in a overexcitation state. In this case there is high content of 5th harmonic currents. The percentage differential element is also desensitized when the 5th harmonic content exceeds a predened value.
Dual-Slope Percent Differential Protection

The primary protective element for transformer protection is the percent differential element, which compares the current entering the primary and leaving the secondary of the transformer. The ETR-4000 has built in compensation for the turns-ratio and the phase shift of the transformer, so its not necessary to compensate for the transformer connection by the connection of the CTs. The current differential element looks at the vector difference between the current entering and leaving the zone of protection. If the difference exceeds a pre-determined amount, the element will operate.
Dual-Slope Operating Characteristics
Harmonic Restraints
There are certain conditions like energizing one side of the transformer with the other side de-energized (inrush currents) or the paralleling of two transformers (sympathetic currents) that can create false differential currents. These differential currents if not recognized can cause a false trip; in the case of inrush conditions or sympathetic currents, the differential current is characterized by a heavy content of 2nd and 4th harmonic currents. The percentage differential element is desensitized either permanently (stationary conditions) or temporarily (transient conditions), whenever the 2nd or 4th harmonic exceed the value programmed into the relay.
11 12
Harmonic Restraints
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Unrestrained Differential
An unrestrained differential element is provided for fast tripping on heavy internal faults to limit catastrophic damage to the transformer and to minimize risks to the remainder of the power system.
CA08104001E
4.3-8

General DescriptionETR-4000 Restricted Ground Fault
Ground differential protection is applied to transformers having impedance grounded wye windings. It is intended to provide sensitive ground fault detection for low magnitude fault currents, which would not be detected by the main percent differential element.
September 2011
Sheet 04 100
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Because this element does not respond to balanced load or three-phase faults, the negative-sequence overcurrent element may provide the desired overcurrent protection. This is particularly applicable to delta-wye grounded transformers where only 58% of the secondary p.u. phase-to-ground fault current appears in any one primary phase conductor. Backup protection can be particularly difcult when the wye is impedance grounded. A negative-sequence element can be used in the primary supply to the transformer and can be set as sensitively as required to protect for secondary phase-to-ground or phaseto-phase faults. This element should be set to coordinate with the low-side phase and ground relays for phaseto-ground and phase-to-phase faults. The negative sequence element must also be set higher than the negative-sequence current due to unbalanced loads.

The ETR-4000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and selfdiagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in an FIFO in chronological order.
Trip Log
The ETR-4000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Restricted Ground Fault
Waveform Capture
The ETR-4000 transformer protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications.
Overcurrent Elements
The ETR-4000 can be used to provide backup for transformer and adjacent power system equipment. Instantaneous overcurrent elements can be used for fast clearing of severe internal or external (through) faults. Time overcurrent protection elements per winding allow coordinating with the adjacent protection zones and acting as a backup protection. There are 11 user-selectable inverse-time overcurrent curve characteristics. The user can select from the ANSI, IEC or thermal curve families, and can select instantaneous or time delay reset characteristics.
Breaker Failure
The ETR-4000 transformer protection relay includes two breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) elements that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. These are independent elements that can be used to operate a lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and to lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the user to switch to more sensitive settings via a password-protected soft key, communication or via a digital Input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce the possibility of injury.

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 101

4.3-9
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Figure 4.3-7. ETR-4000 Device Planning
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.3-10 Protective and Predictive Relays Transformer Protection

General DescriptionETR-4000 Programmable I/O
September 2011
Sheet 04 102
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 4.3-8. ETR-4000 Typical One-Line Diagram
The ETR-4000 transformer protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, four normally open and four Form C contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuits. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (failsafe) mode. There are eight usercongurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is userprogrammable for maximum application exibility.
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration and to view metered values and stored data. PowerPort-E is free and can be downloaded from the Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com/pr. The second package is Power Xpert Software. Power Xpert Software is a power management software package that is designed for continuous, remote monitoring of many devices. It provides additional functions such as billing, trending and graphics. Contact your local Eaton representative for more information on Power Xpert Software.
18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 04 103

Technical Data and SpecicationsETR-4000
4.3-11

Table 4.3-4. ETR-4000 Specications
i
Voltage Supply
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
> = 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage interrupted communication is permitted Max. permissible making current: 18A peak value for 0.25 ms 12A peak value for 1 ms The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of: 2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm (approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 3.5A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption

Relay Outputs
RS-485
Fiber Optic
URTD-Interface

CA08104001E
4.3-12 Protective and Predictive Relays Generator Protection

General DescriptionEGR-4000
September 2011
Sheet 04 104
i ii 1 2 3 4
EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay
The Maintenance Mode password protected soft key, can be used for arc ash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group, set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be changed, via communications or a digital input. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct user programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 and an Ethernet port in the back are optional for local area networking. Optional Modbus-RTU, Modbus-TCP or IEC-61850 protocols are supported. The EGR-4000 generator protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Logic gates and timers may be dened and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the EGR-4000 very exible. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The EGR-4000 generator protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load proles, breaker wear information and oscillography data. The EGR-4000 has eight programmable binary inputs, two analog inputs, two analog outputs, two normally opened and two Form C heavy-duty outputs, and one Form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Eatons EGR-4000 generator protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for small to medium sized generators. It may be used as a primary or backup protection in standby generators, and cogeneration applications. The EGR-4000 generator protection relay provides voltage controlled, voltage restrained, and standard directional three-phase overcurrent protection, as well as directional phase-residual and independent ground overcurrent protection and breaker failure. Three-phase over-/ undervoltage, voltage unbalance, current unbalance, over/under and rate-of-change frequency, vector surge, power factor, directional VARs, directional power, loss of excitation, overexcitation and sync check functions are standard functions. The EGR-4000 generator relay provides all required protection, control, monitoring and metering for small and medium sized generators in a single, compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the three-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta conguration. The fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection, or 100% ground protection for a high resistance grounded generator.
Features
Protection
Thermal protection (49/51) Phase overcurrent elements: Three instantaneous elements with timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3]) Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2] and 51P[3]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Voltage restraint (51P[2] and 51P[3]) Directional control (all elements)
Ground overcurrent elements: Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1] and 51X[2]) Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) 11 standard curves Instantaneous or time delay reset Directional control (all elements) Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]) Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Main three-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) Auxiliary single-phase under/ overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2]) Six frequency elements that can be assigned to: overfrequency, underfrequency, rate of change or vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6]) Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2]) Forward and reverse watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3]) Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3]) Overexcitation, volts-per-hertz (24[1], 24[2]) 64S, 100% stator ground fault (27TN/ 59N) Generator unbalance (46G[1], 46G[2]) Loss of excitation (40[1],40[2]) Sync check (25) Lockout (86) Loss of potential-LOP Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Switch onto fault protection Cold load pickup
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 105
Protective and Predictive Relays Generator Protection

4.3-13
Metering

Generator hours of operation Amperes: positive, negative and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: positive, negative and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) VARs and kVAR demand kVARh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording
Sync values Trending (load prole over time) Temperature with remote URTD module

Monitoring

Trip coil monitor Breaker wear Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port
Remote communication port: RS-232 RS-485 Protocols: Modbus-RTU (optional) Modbus-TCP (optional) IEC-61850 (optional) Conguration software
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control Functions

Communication

Breaker open/close Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable Logic Programmable LEDs Multiple setting groups Cold load pickup CT supervision
Table 4.3-5. Catalog Numbering Selection for EGR-4000 Generator Relay Removable Terminals
EGR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1 A = Eight digital inputs, ve outputs, 2AI +2AO, removable terminals, zone interlocking, URTD interface Hardware Option 2 0 = Phase current 5A/1A, ground current 5A/1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac 1 = Phase current 5A/1A, sensitive ground current 0.5A/0.1A, power supply range: 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac Communication Options B = Modbus-RTU (RS-485) H = IEC-61850 (Goose) I = Modbus-RTU + Modbus-TCP Conformal Coating Options A = None B = Conformal coated circuit boards Mounting Options 0 = Standard mount 1 = Projection panel mount
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 106
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Eatons EGR-4000 generator protection relay has been designed for maximum user exibility and simplicity. The EGR-4000 provides comprehensive protection, metering and monitoring of small to medium sized synchronous or induction generators operating at 50 or 60 Hz. The base relay includes all the standard protection and metering functions. Protection features found in the EGR-4000 include:

Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]), to protect the distribution system components against excessive damage and to prevent the generator and its auxiliaries from exceeding their thermal limitations. This modication of the pickup overcurrent level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The EGR-4000 uses the simple linear model below to determine the effective pickup value.
Pickup % 100 %
Reverse VARs

The EGR-4000 generation protection relay provides complete three-phase and ground directional overcurrent protection. There are 14 independent ground overcurrent elements. The ground elements X use the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The ground elements R use a calculated 3Io residual current obtained from the sum of the three-phase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a three-phase, four-wire system. Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements can be selected to operate based on fundamental or rms current. Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero, negative or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function is selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions. Phase direction is a function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault. This function is selectable to operate in the forward, reverse or both directions. Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero, negative or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function is selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions.
Breaker Failure
The EGR-4000 generator protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or to trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times.
25 %
Voltage Protection
The EGR-4000 generator protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a three-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a singlephase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The three-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a single-phase, two out of three phases, or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/ reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and an adjustable time delay.
Sync Check
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for power owing through a generator. There are three elements to be congured, operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over power conditions. Reverse power is typically applied to prevent generator motoring that can cause damage to the prime mover; while under power is generally applied to load loss and to prevent an overspeed condition that could damage the prime mover.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 107

4.3-15
100% Ground Stator Protection

In high impedance grounded generators, ground fault protection is provided by the detection of voltage in the neutral of the generator by an overvoltage element (59N) connected to the secondary of the distribution grounding transformer, this overvoltage element has to be desensitized for 3rd harmonic voltages normally present in the generator. Under normal conditions there is no voltage across the secondary of the grounded transformer; when one of the phases goes to ground, voltage appears across the resistor and the overvoltage element operates, indicating a ground conductor. However, the overvoltage element technique described above will protect around 90% to 95% of the winding. The last 5% to 10% is protected by detecting the decayed of the 3rd harmonic voltage using an undervoltage element (27TN) tuned to the 3rd harmonic voltage. In the EGR-4000 we can provide 100% stator ground protection by measuring the zero sequence voltage through the 4th voltage input, and by combining the 59N and 27A elements. The 27A element has to be programmed to operate for 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltages.
Operation of generators at off-nominal frequencies can have extremely detrimental effects on both the generator itself and the associated prime mover, in particular with steam turbine generators operating below normal frequency. The EGR-4000 relay provides six frequency elements that can be used to detect under/over frequency, rate of change and a vector surge (decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an independent threshold set point and an adjustable time delay.
Loss of Excitation
Loss of eld protection or loss of excitation is used to avoid unstable operation, potential loss of synchronism and possible damage to synchronous generators. When a synchronous generator loses its eld, the generator can continue to generate power as an induction generator, provided that it can obtain its excitation from the other machines on the system. During this condition, the rotor will quickly overheat due to the slip frequency currents induced in it. Loss of excitation in one machine could jeopardize the operation of other machines beyond their capability and also the stability of the entire system. The EGR-4000 supports the two typical distance relaying schemes used for detecting the loss excitation. The two schemes differ mainly in that scheme 1 uses a negative offset mho element and scheme 2 uses a positive offset mho element with directional unit supervision.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Negative Sequence Protection

Negative sequence overcurrent protection prevents the generators from rotor overheating damage. Unbalanced loads, fault conditions or open phasing will produce a negative sequence current to ow. The unbalanced currents induce double system frequency currents in the rotor, which quickly causes rotor overheating. Serious damage will occur to the generator if the unbalance is allowed to persist. The EGR-4000 provides a negative sequence denite time overcurrent element and a negative sequence timed overcurrent tripping element to ensure that the generator stays within its short-time and continuous negative sequence current rated limits.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and a reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and to lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the user to switch to more sensitive settings via a password-protected soft key, communication or via a digital input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or a device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and help to reduce the possibility of injury.

The EGR-4000 generator protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or an A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system conguration.
Overexcitation Protection
Generator overexcitation occurs when the ratio of voltage versus frequency is too high, and the rotor iron saturates due to high ux density. High ux density results in stray ux in components not designed to carry it, which in turn causes overheating and can potentially damage the generator. This protection is provided through a Volts/Hertz function with a programmable inverse time characteristic.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 108
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 4.3-10. Negative Sequence Protection
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Figure 4.3-11. Loss of Excitation
17 18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 04 109

4.3-17

The EGR-4000 generator protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classied as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes and self-diagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in an FIFO log in chronological order.

The EGR-4000 relay automatically records selected quantities into nonvolatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting.
Trip Log
The EGR-4000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
providing protection and monitoring of generator bearing vibration. The analog inputs are eld programmable to measure transducer signals that operate over a range of 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10V. Two analog outputs are available for signaling the value of measured analog quantities to external process control devices such as PLCs. They can be programmed to operate over a 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10V range. The analog outputs can be congured to signal a representation of most analog quantities measured by the EGR-4000 including current, voltages and RTD temperature.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Programmable Logic
The EGR-4000 generator protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the user can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are 24 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings.
Programmable I/O
The EGR-4000 generator protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, two normally open and two Form C contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (failsafe) mode. There are eight user-congurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is user-programmable for maximum application exibility. The EGR-4000 also has two analog inputs and two analog outputs. The analog inputs are available for
Waveform Capture
The EGR-4000 distribution protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact closures. The EGR-4000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications.
21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 04 110
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 04 111

4.3-19
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

September 2011
Sheet 04 112
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton provides two types of communication software. The rst is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access to a single relay to change set points or conguration, and to view metered values and stored
Figure 4.3-15. PowerPort-E EGR-5000 Device Planning
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 113

Technical Data and SpecicationsEGR-4000
4.3-21

Table 4.3-6. EGR-4000 Specications
i
Voltage Supply
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Consumption

Relay Outputs
RS-485
Fiber Optic
URTD-Interface

CA08104001E
4.3-22 Protective and Predictive Relays

September 2011
Sheet 04 114
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 115
Protective and Predictive Relays Voltage Protection Relay

General DescriptionVR-300
4.4-1
VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay
Features
Over-/undervoltage monitoring (59/27) Over-/underfrequency monitoring (81O/U) Voltage asymmetry monitoring (47) Sync-check (25)xed to relay 3
Zero voltage monitoring: dead bus start functionality (close CB to dead bus) Two congurable relays Discrete input for blocking of protective functions or remote acknowledgment
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Typical Nameplate
VR-300
6 7 8 9 10 11
Figure 4.4-1. Typical VR-300 Nameplate
General Description
The VR-300 is an industrial grade protective relay that offers multiple protective features in a single package, ideal for stand-alone protection or for the implementation of transfer schemes. Using a digital processor to measure true rms values enables a high degree of measuring accuracy regardless of harmonics, transients or disturbing pulses. The compact size and multiple functions of the VR-300 help to simplify switchgear design. The digital display offers a user-friendly interface to set up the unit as well as to monitor the operation and display any alarms.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
4.4-2

Technical DataVR-300
September 2011
Sheet 04 116
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Technical Data
Table 4.4-1. VR-300 Specications
Description Specication 66/115 Vac Maximum 150 Vac 50 Vac/2.5 kV 2.5 kV 40.0 to 80.0 Hz Class 1 1.3 x Vrated 0.21M ohms < 0.15W 90 to 250 Vac/Vdc Maximum 12 VA Storage: 30 to +80C (22 to +176F) Operational: 20 to +70C (4 to +158F) 95%, noncondensing 6562 ft (2000m) 2 Rated voltage 18 to 250 Vac/Vdc Approximately 68K ohms AgCdO AC: 2.00A AC at 250 Vac DC: 2.00A DC at 24 Vdc, 0.22A DC at 125 Vdc, 0.10A DC at 250 Vdc AC: B300 DC: 1.00A DC at 24 Vdc, 0.22A DC at125 Vdc, 0.10A DC at 250 Vdc APRANORM DIN 43 700 3.78 x 2.84 x 5.20 in. (96 x 72 x 132 mm) 3.62 [+0.03) x 2.68 [+0.03] in. (92 [+0.8] x 68 [+0.7] mm) Screw-type, terminals 0.0039 in.2 (2.5 mm2) 0.369 ft/lbs (0.5 Nm). Use 60/75C (140/167F) copper wire only. Use Class 1 wire only (or equivalent) Approximately 2.14 lbs (800g) IP42 from front with correct mounting IP54 from front with gasket (gasket: P/N 8923-1036) IP20 from back Insulating surface Tested according to applicable EN guidelines CE marking; UL listing for ordinary locations, UL/cUL listed, ordinary locations, File No.: E231544 IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2
Measuring Voltage
Standard (Vrated) wye/delta Maximum value Vph-ph maximum, (UL/cUL) Rated Voltage Vph-ground Rated surge voltage Measuring frequency Accuracy Linear measuring range Input resistance Maximum power consumption per path
Ambient Variables
Wide range power supply Intrinsic consumption Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Maximum altitude Degree of pollution
Discrete InputsIsolated
Input range (Vcont, discrete input) Input resistance
Relay OutputsPotential Free

Contact material General purpose (GP) (Vcont, relay output) Pilot duty (PD) (Vcont, relay output)
Housing
Type Dimensions (W x H x D) Front panel cutout (W x H) Wiring Recommended tightening torque Weight
Protection
Protection system Front foil EMC-test (CE) Listings Additional approvals
Table 4.4-2. Reference Conditions

Measuring Value Display Range 40.0 to 80.0 Hz 0 to 520, 0 to 65 kV Accuracy
Reference Conditions
The data apply to the following reference conditions:

Frequency
fL1, fL2, fL3 0.05 Hz 1%
Voltage
VL1, VL2, VL3, VL12, VL23, VL31
Accuracy depending on the congured transformer ratio.
Input voltage = sinusoidal rated voltage Frequency = rated frequency 2% Power supply = rated voltage 2% Power factor cos = 1 Ambient temperature 23C 2K Warm-up period = 20 minutes
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 117

Technical DataVR-300
4.4-3
Wiring Diagram
Supervised System (Variable) 3/4
i ii 1 2
1 2 3 4
3/4
(Measuring Voltage N) Measuring Voltage 3-Wire or 4-Wire System Measuring Voltage L3 Measuring Voltage L2 Measuring Voltage L1
VR-300 (Multi-Function Voltage Relay)
3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Relay 3 (Fixed to synch-check zero voltage configurable)
4 5 6 7 8
CB
Relay 2
70 71 72
2/3
Not Measured.
Synchronizing Voltage L3 Synchronizing Voltage L2 Synchronizing Voltage L1
Synchronizing System (Fixed)
Relay 1 (Ready for Operation)
The synchronizing voltage must be connected 3-phase if the measuring voltage is connected 3-phase (N not connected). If the measuring voltage is connected 4-phase (L1, L2, L3, N), the synchronizing voltage may be connected 2-phase (L1-L2). L3 is connected only for compensation and is not measured.
5 6 7 8
90 to 250 Vac/dc 0 Vdc Blocking of protective functions or remote acknowledgement.
Measuring Voltage: 100 Vac The socket for the PC parameterization is situated on the side of the unit. This is where the DPC must be plugged in.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Subject to Technical Modifications.
Figure 4.4-2. VR-300 Wiring Diagram
CA08104001E
4.4-4
Protective and Predictive Relays Transformer Temperature Controller

General DescriptionTC-100
September 2011
Sheet 04 118
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers
TC-100
Form C contacts are provided for notication of alarm conditions. A red LED illuminates to indicate that the alarm is actuated. An internal audible alarm also sounds when the unit goes into alarm condition. This audible buzzer can be silenced without canceling the alarm. The alarm and trip relays can be congured as a fail-safe relay (normally energized when the unit is powered up). For example, if the alarm relay was congured as a fail-safe; if supply control power to the TC-100 is interrupted, the alarm relay changes state for notication of this condition. The alarm circuit is also used for notication of an open or a missing thermocouple. If a thermocouple were to open, the alarm relay operates and the corresponding channel will read - on the LED display. It is important to note that a failed thermocouple will not cause the device to trip the transformer ofine. Form C contacts are provided to trip the transformer ofine if any of the winding temperatures exceed the trip setting. A red LED indicates that the trip relay has actuated. A test function is provided to: test the digital display and all of the LEDs; simulate over-temperature conditions; and check the internal temperature of the monitor. A 420 mA analog signal is provided for remote indication or for use with SCADA systems. The TC-100 has built-in monitoring functions and logging functions to help you shed some light on the unknowns of the operation of your transformer. Temperature trending lets you understand the hour of the day that the transformer runs hotter, and modify its loading to extend the life of your transformer; logging information lets you restore the operation of your system faster, by letting you correlate tripping and alarming events to the overall conditions of your system; and fan wear information can be used to perform preventive maintenance to increase the uptime in your transformers.
Features and Benets

Control

Thermocouple inputs (E or K type thermocouples) Automatic correlation throughout entire temperature range to compensate for thermocouple non-linearity Programmable on and off set points Alarm relay for remote monitoring Trip relay for remote monitoring Two fan power relays Fan failure detection to start a backup fan or alarm Fan exerciser (cycle time and duration) to reduce fan wear Fans can be operated automatically or manually Average temperature (all three windings) Maximum instantaneous temperature (all three windings) Maximum temperature memory per winding Fans hours of operation Winding 1, Winding 2, Winding 3 and ambient temperature Trending Fan failure Fan wear Alarm log Trip log Test mode Detect failed sensors Self-diagnostics
Metering

General Description
The TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller monitors up to three ventilated dry-type transformer windings and one ambient temperature. The TC-100 operates relays by comparing the highest winding temperature to stored set point temperatures and displays four thermocouple inputs, as well as the stored maximum temperature and its associated winding. The unit provides fans, alarm and trip output relays. Up to two fans can be controlled via the TC-100. Each fan operating contact is fuse protected. A yellow LED indicates that fans are on. A fan exerciser turns the fans on automatically at periodic intervals to prevent fan motor seizing (on-time and interval is programmable).
Monitoring

Communications
USB port in the front Modbus-RTU communications Programming and monitoring software (the unit can be completely programmed through the front of the unit) 420 mA output for integration with SCADA systems

Hardware

One trip relay (Form C) One alarm relay (Form C) Two power fan relays (1 NO each) Two digital inputs 420 mA output for integration with SCADA systems Local Alarm 95 db Available in semi-ush or hinge panel-mounting versions
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 04 119

Technical DataTC-100
4.4-5
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 4.4-3. TC-100 External Wiring Diagram
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Figure 4.4-4. Programming and Monitoring Software
20 21
CA08104001E
4.4-6

Technical DataTC-100
September 2011
Sheet 04 120
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Table 4.4-3. TC-100 Technical Specications
Description Specication 120 Vac or 240 Vac (+10%, 25%) 50 or 60 Hz 15 VA maximum 120 Vac: 90132 Vac 240 Vac:180264 Vac 20 cycles at nominal Vac 30 to +72C 50 to +72C 0 to 90% (noncondensing) 1C one count under normal conditions 2C one count under extreme conditions Extreme conditions are: Ambient temperature colder than 10C Winding to unit temperature greater than 210C Two programmable 1.2 VA at 120 Vac Max. OFF = 36 Vac Min. ON = 86 Vac (built in power source available) Two individually congurable SPST contacts rated 30A at 120/240 Vac, 1 hp at 120 Vac, 2 hp at 240 Vac for each contact One SPDT contact rated 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) congurable for normal or fail-safe operations One SPDT contact rated 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) congurable for normal of fail-safe operation 420 mA into a load of up to 1000 ohms max. proportional to hottest winding temperature 1% ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-2002 - Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) tests for protective relays and relay systems ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2-2004, standard withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic interference from transceivers EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-11 Emissions EN 50011 CISPR-11, Class A CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A +/1 1 minute/month at 25C 100 entries, logging interval programmable from 1 minute to 30 days Last 25 alarm events Last 25 trip events ESD RF Radiated immunity EFT/Burst immunity Surge immunity RF conducted immunity Power frequency magnetic eld immunity Voltage variation immunity
Control Power
Nominal rating Frequency Power use Operating range Ride-through time
Environmental
Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity
Measurement Accuracy
Temperature
Discrete Inputs
Number of inputs Rating
Outputs
Output fans Output alarm
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Output alarm Remote analog output
EMC
Immunity
Clock
Accuracy
Logging
Trend data Alarm events Trip events
Table 4.4-4. Catalog Ordering Information for TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers
Description Barrier cabinet Controller only (semi ush mounting) TC-100 Controller with barrier cabinet (hinge front panel) Catalog Number TC-100-Barrier TC-100 TC-101
CA08104001E
September 2010
Sheet 04 121
Protective and Predictive Relays InsulGard Predictive Maintenance

General DescriptionInsulGard
4.5-1
InsulGard
InsulGard
General Description
The InsulGard is a continuous partial discharge monitor that can be applied to a variety of medium voltage electrical equipment rated 4 kV to 38 kV. It is commonly applied to motors, generators, switchgear, bus duct, unit substations and cable systems. The InsulGard will monitor the quality of insulation while the equipment is in service under normal operating conditions. Through monitoring, it can ascertain the relative condition of insulation, the deterioration of which is the leading cause of electrical failures. The InsulGard system consists of sensors and a monitor. The monitor can be used as a stand-alone unit, or it can be wired so that it can remotely upload data to your system or to Eaton diagnostics personnel for analysis. While the sensors vary according to application, they are all designed to detect partial dischargesthe foundation of the InsulGard technology and one of the best predictors of insulation breakdown.
The term partial discharge is a common name for small electrical discharges (arcs) that typically occur within or between insulation materialsusually across a void in the insulation. Partial discharge is also referred to as corona or surface tracking. The visible evidence of corona presents itself as white, powdery residue, typically found on the end windings of motors or generators. Surface-tracking damage appears as tree-like, jagged lines, typically found on switchgear and bus ducts. Surface tracking stems from a contaminated insulation surface, often started by corona. The small arcing activity on the surface of the insulation contributes to further burning, resulting in additional stress points that promote further deterioration. Both corona and surface tracking are the primary causes of insulation breakdown, which can lead to full discharges and electrical failures. It is important to note that traditional methods of detecting corona and surface-tracking damage require taking equipment ofine. It also requires disassembling the equipmenta costly procedure. Moreover, corona and surface tracking damage have to be severe to be visible. The InsulGard system allows you to detect partial discharge while the electrical system is energized. It does so by detecting and analyzing the radio signal frequencies emitted by the partial discharges. More specically, the InsulGard focuses on the 1 MHz to 20 MHz bandwidth range where the majority of partial-discharge activity can be detected. InsulGard allows predictive analysis and maintenance as opposed to preventive analysis and time-based maintenance. The detection of partial discharge on equipment can indicate if a problem exists. Even more useful is information that can correlate the signal intensity (measured in milliwatts) associated with partial discharges to various states of insulation degradation on similar equipment. Eatons Predictive Diagnostics Group has studied numerous cases of partial discharge on rotating equipment and switchgear. The knowledge base accumulated has allowed Eaton to develop guidelines and parameters to help one determine the seriousness (failure-time windows) of the partial-discharge activity that the equipment may be exhibiting. Because it is a continuous, online monitoring system, it is easy to monitor conditions over time.
Eatons InsulGard is a stand-alone microprocessor-controlled continuous partial discharge monitoring device for a wide range of medium voltage power equipment. It is designed to provide an alarm based on PD characteristics at an early stage of insulation degradation. It measures partial discharges from up to 15 different partial discharge sensors and stores the information in internal memory, alarming users if any set points are exceeded. InsulGard can work with constant 50/60 Hz frequency powered equipment, as well as with variable frequency applications. Various PD sensor types can be used, depending on the application. InsulGard has three auxiliary inputs for PD data correlation to additional parameters. One of the inputs is designated for temperature, where the other two are commonly used for load, voltage or humidity depending upon the application. InsulGard has several interfaces that allow for easy implementation into any alarm or SCADA system: Three C-form dry relay contacts provide Yellow or Red alarm indication, and the Device Status relay indicates any device malfunction 420 mA optically isolated output can be congured to represent Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI) or maximum discharge magnitude to any SCADA system RS-485 optically isolated interface based on Modbus RTU protocol allows for remote device conguration and data download. InsulGard can be networked with an existing Modbus, allowing for up to 231 addressable devices Ethernet port, Web page, FTP or Modbus TCP
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Communication protocol includes Modbus, proprietary binary and ASCII text options allowing a software programmer to build InsulGard into a high-level software program using simple text type commands. InsulGard is supplied with database software that allows for automated communication to a device or several devices for data acquisition and analysis. The software allows for either direct network or dialup connection to a device by a regular telephone landline or a cellular connection.
CA08104001E
4.5-2

InsulGard has 15 signal inputs (Ch1Ch15) for partial discharge measurement and a noise input dedicated for noise suppression (Ch16). All 16 inputs have identical conditioning circuits (CC) providing signal isolation, transient suppression and high-pass ltering of the input signals. The frequency band of the InsulGard is from 1 MHz to 20 MHz. InsulGard acquires PD data in the form of three dimensional phase-resolved pulse height distribution (PRPHD) PD pulse count as a function of pulse magnitude and 60(50) Hz phase. It has 24 (15) phase windows and a magnitude dynamic range of about 70 dB, divided in 21 magnitude windows. The data can be stored in the internal device memory in the form of threedimensional PRPHD matrixes and/or in the brief form of integral quantities derived from these matrixes. Each record is accompanied by three additional correlation parameters. Before each measurement, InsulGard performs self-calibration and self-test. If any problem is detected, the status relay dry contacts will open and an appropriate message will appear on the InsulGard display. Loss of power will be indicated in the same way by opening status relay contacts. InsulGard measures signals from signal inputs sequentially multiplexing them to a single metering channel. Each pulse from each sensor is validated by the allowed pulse width. In the case of non-compliance, InsulGard will not count the pulse. After each measurement, data from all active signal channels will be compared to alarm thresholds. If any of the Yellow threshold limits are exceeded, the Warning LED will be turned on and the Warning relay dry contacts will close. In the case of a Red level achieved, InsulGard will trigger additional measurement and, if conrmed, an Alarm LED will be turned on and the Alarm relay dry contacts will close. If Red alarm is detected, full measurement data will be stored in the memory. PD measurements can be performed on a time schedule (up to 50 per day) or in specied time intervals (from 1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes). Four measurements per day are recommended. Between scheduled measurements, the High Alarm feature is enabled. All signal sensors are connected to a summation unit and further to a separate High Alarm channel. InsulGard continuously searches for an appearance of high magnitude pulses and pulse series. Magnitude threshold and repetition in series are congurable. If ve events of pulse series were detected between the scheduled measurements, InsulGard will trigger a full PD measurement, and display an alarm, if any. Full PD measurement by InsulGard involves a measurement of statistical Phase Resolved Partial Discharge Distribution (PRPDD) for every active channel. After each measurement for every active channel, InsulGard calculates PDI, Maximum PD magnitude, PD pulse repetition rate, and trend parameters (rate of PD parameter change). The calculated parameters are compared to alarm set points and alarm status is determined. All calculated and alarm status parameters are stored in the internal memory for each measurement. Additionally, three auxiliary parameters (temperature, % of full load current and operating voltage or humidity) are assigned to the measurement data. PRPDD can, optionally, be stored in the internal memory. There are two modes of PD data storage Brief and Full.
September 2010
Sheet 04 122
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fullduring this mode PRPDD is stored in the memory with the mentioned above parameters for each active channel and every measurement. Briefin order to save a memory, PRPDD can be stored in the memory several times a month. An operator should set a number of days and a measurement number at the current day for storing PRPDD. During the remaining measurements, InsulGard will store the brief version of PD data. InsulGard has two Megabytes of internal ash memory for data storage allowing for its standalone operation. When the memory is lled, the device starts replacing the oldest data with the latest data. The rate of the memory consumption depends upon a number of active channels, frequency of measurements, and frequency of PRPDD storage. As an example, if all 15 channels are active for measurements four times a day and PRPDD are stored twice a month, the device holds 17 months of the latest PD data in its internal memory. All stored data and settings can be accessed from the keypad, or remotely from a PC.
CA08104001E
September 2010
Sheet 04 123

4.5-3
Alarms
InsulGard has two congurable alarms, Red and Yellow, that connect to two C-form relays. There are two groups of parameters that can generate an alarm. One is if an alarm set point is exceeded (Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI) and its trend or PD pulse magnitude and its trend). One of two, PDI or Magnitude, can be congured for alarm at one time. The same parameter is congured for 420 mA interface output automatically. 420 mA output provides a signal with the slope of 10% of Red Alarm Threshold per 1mAmp. That means that Red alarm threshold corresponds to 14 mA output. Alarm set points for PDI are represented in terms of mW. Magnitude is represented in terms of mV. Trend is set in terms of times per year for both PDI and Magnitude. Alarm on trend is enabled after a training period of 1/3 of the trend-sliding window.
Yellow and Red alarms operate differently. In the case of a Yellow alarm, it will appear on the corresponding relay as received. In the case of a Red alarm, InsulGard will initiate an additional measurement at the time of alarm, and only if conrmed, will indicate the alarm by relay. If the Red alarm is not conrmed, the status of the alarm will be set per the last measurement. If at any measurement the alarm status will be reduced, InsulGard will indicate the reduced alarm status with both an alarm LED reading and relay. Alarm relays can operate in two modes (congurable). Relays lock in an alarm status received at the last measurements, until the next measurement. Or a relay can operate for a limited congurable time and then open the contacts. At the next measurement, if an alarm status is detected, relays will hold the alarm contacts closed for the same time.
Continuous Watch Feature

Between the scheduled measurements the Continuous Watch feature (High Alarm) is initiated. At this time all signal sensors are summarized and connected to the separate High Alarm channel. InsulGard is continuously watching for the events of high magnitude pulses (congurable) and their series. If ve series of such events are detected, InsulGard starts full PD measurement and, in the case of Red alarm conrmation, InsulGard indicates this alarm and stores full PD data in the internal device memory.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Schedule
PD measurements can be performed at specied times during a day or time interval basis (congurable). The device is shipped with time basis schedule enabled and set to record measurements four times a day. This is sufcient for all common applications. If necessary, InsulGard can be set to measure up to 50 times per day at scheduled times or in specic time intervals varying from 1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes.
Trend
InsulGard calculates trend of a parameter enabled for alarm. Trend is normalized to the value of the parameter change in times per year. Trend has two alarm thresholds, Yellow and Red, connected to alarm relays and also to the alarm status LED at the front panel of the device. Trend is calculated as a linear approximation of data over specied time interval (default is 18 weeks). This 18-week time window is sliding over time while device monitors partial discharges.
CA08104001E
4.5-4

Technical DataInsulGard
September 2010
Sheet 04 124
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Table 4.5-1. Power Source Specications
Description
Applications Mounting options Installation category Pollution degree Temperature range Relative humidity Maximum altitude Power source Power consumption of device (VA max) Fuse inside InsulGard case: 20 mm, 250 Vac, time lag 5TS type by BEL Inc. Input fuse on the panel (panel mount option): 20 mm, 250 Vac, Fast fuse 5MF type by BEL Inc. (A maximum output current from outlet for 115 Vac3A) Display Keypad LEDs (normal, warning (Alarm 1) or Alarm (Alarm 2) conditions, memory and setting modes
Specication
HV and MV equipment (motors including VFD), switchgears, generators, bus ducts, cable terminations, transformers, est.) In NEMA 4X enclosure. On the panel. Door (Flash) mount II 2 40C to +70C (+85C without enclosure) 0%RH90%RH 6562 ft (2000m) 115V / 230 Vac 10% 60 / 50 Hz 15 VA For 115 Vac5ST200-R (200 mA) For 230 Vac5ST125-R (125 mA) 5MF 3 R (3 A) Graphic dot display, two lines Four arrows and four functional keys Five LEDs
Approximate Size (Length x Width x Height) and Weight

Main unit Door-mount option (main unit with sensor interface board) Panel-mount option Enclosure (NEMA 4X) mount option 9.20 x 7.00 x 2.50 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 6.4 cm), 4.2 lb (1.9 kg) 9.20 x 7.00 x 4.00 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 10.2 cm), 4.6 lb (2.1 kg) 14.80 x 12.90 x 4.00 inches (37.6 x 32.8 x 10.2 cm), 10.3 lb (4.7 kg) 17.20 x 15.40 x 8.80 inches (43.7 x 39.0 x 22.3 cm), 21.6 lb (9.8 kg) 15 1 1 Phase-resolved PD distribution 68 dB 21 24 320 Hz, 20400 Hz Internal and external 367,300 pulses/second at 60 Hz 306,000 pulses/second at 50 Hz Partial discharge intensity (PDI) or maximum pulse magnitude (Q max), Pulse repetition rate (pps), Trend PDI, Qmax, Trend Full/Brief 2 MB At powering up and before every measurement Congurable from keypad and PC Up to 150 ft (46m) 1 2 For future use 3 120 Vac/ 5A 28 Vdc/ 5A For other ratings refer to the relay specication Slope is 1 mA per 10% Communication Protocol: Modbus RTU, binary, text commands Modbus-TCP, Web page, FTP PC connection For future use
PD Measurement Parameters
PD channels Noise channel Continuous watch (high PD activity) channel Basic type of data PD channel dynamic range Number of magnitude windows (3.23 dB each) Number of phase windows (15 each) Power frequency at a monitored equipment Synchronization type Maximum measured pulse repetition rate Calculated parameters for each PD channel Alarming parameters Data record types Internal data memory allows for up to 1000 days data storage at four measurements per day Self-test and self-calibration Setup Allowed RG-58 coaxial cable length to PD sensors
Auxiliary Inputs
Input specied for temperature measurement calibrated for 100 ohm platinum RTD sensor Analog inputs specied for current, voltage or humidity measurement USB Host
Interfaces
C-form dry-type relays for device status, warning (Alarm 1) and alarm (Alarm 2) PD levels (fully congurable)
420 mA isolated interface represents highest PDI or max. magnitude as % of the alarm (Alarm 2) threshold RS-485 interface optically isolated (231 addresses) Ethernet USB USB host
CA08104001E
September 2010
Sheet 04 125

Product SelectionInsulGard
4.5-5
General Notes
The three basic InsulGard packages are Switchgear Applications, Motor Applications and Generator Applications. At the beginning of each section to follow are the basic components typically found in each type of application.
Table 4.5-2. Standard Equipment

Description InsulGard Humidity sensor mounted as specied Temperature mounted as specied RS-485 communication port InsulGard software CD Set of instruction manuals Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Switchgear Applications
Switchgear Applications have three typical components: InsulGard Switchgear Package, Coupling Capacitor Sensors and RFCT Sensors. lnsulGard Systems for Switchgear Applications are sold as packages. Packages provide greater value. Standard Equipment with the lnsulGard Switchgear Package is shown in Table 4.5-3.
Table 4.5-3. InsulGard Switchgear PackagesOrder PD Sensors Separately

Description Door-mount InsulGard for mounting onto indoor cabinet door cut-out, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports Embedded temperature and humidity sensors InsulGard software CD and one set of instruction manuals Back-panel-mount (no enclosure) for installing InsulGard into an existing enclosure, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports Embedded temperature and humidity sensors InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports External temperature and humidity sensors (PD-SR-TS, PD-SR-HS) InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals Catalog Number PD-IG-S-E0
PD-IG-S-E1
6 7
PD-IG-S-E2
8 9
Catalog Number PD-USB PD-MODEM
Table 4.5-4. Communication Options

Description RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV (installed on back panel except for door-mounted IG it must be mounted separately)
10 11 12
Table 4.5-5. Auxiliary (Dynamic) Sensors

Description Catalog Number PD-SR-TS PD-SR-HS PD-SR-CT
Auxiliary Sensors for InsulGard, BushingGard

External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS) Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet External humidity sensor for InsulGard (HS) Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet Load sensor for InsulGard: includes Current Transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50 inches Connect to secondary winding of the motor (or generator) current transformer Note: Differential current transformer cant be used Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet Split (Flex)Core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT. Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement if the motor/generator current transformer cant be used (Order separately if required)
13 14 15 16
PD-SR-CTF
17 18 19 20 21
Note: In switchgear applications, humidity and temperature sensors are installed in the same switchgear cubicle (embedded) with the InsulGard.
CA08104001E
4.5-6

Table 4.5-6. Coupling Capacitors Sensors
Description Catalog Number PD-SR-IPDS-5
September 2010
Sheet 04 126
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Motor Applications
Generally, the Motor Application components list consists of just the InsulGard Package itself. In some applications, the customer may want to monitor the cable feeding the motor. In those cases, one will need to add the line item for the appropriate RFCT. InsulGard Systems for Motor Applications are sold as packages. Packages provide greater value. Standard Equipment with the lnsulGard Motor Package is shown in Table 4.5-8. Table 4.5-8. Standard Equipment
Description InsulGard NEMA 4X enclosure Set of three coupling capacitors Coupling capacitor mounting kit (cabling, hardware, boots, connectors) RTD module (six inputs) External mount humidity sensor (65 ft cable pigtail included) Temperature sensor (65 ft cable pigtail included) RS-485 communication port lnsulGard software CD Set of instruction manuals Quantity 1 1 1 1
InsulGard Partial Discharge Sensors

IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor Set of three 5 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor Set of three 7 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor Set of three 15 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor Set of three 27 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor Set of three 38 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet
PD-SR-IPDS-7
PD-SR-IPDS-15
PD-SR-IPDS-27
PD-SR-IPDS-38
Note: The number of cubicles will determine the number of coupling capacitors required for the project. One set of three coupling capacitors is required for every three vertical structures. The catalog numbered set includes mounting kits, boots, cables and the like.
Table 4.5-7. RFCT Sensor

Description 0.75-inch diameter RFCT, default cable length 65 feet Catalog Number PD-SR-RFCT-075
The number of RFCTs required is determined by what cables the customer wants to protect (to protect secondary cables leaving the switchgear, incoming feeder cables to the main breaker/switch, etc.). There will be one RFCT per cubicle to protect the cabling (even if there are multiple cables per phase).
The length of cable or sensitivity zone of protection depends upon the type of cable, the number of splices, and the number of taps. PLIC Type Cable is protected up to maximum of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition) distances are shorter with protection up to a maximum of 300 ft. In gures shown below, the lnsulGard is protecting the six vertical section switchgear layout with the two sets of coupling capacitors and is protecting the feeder cables via the RFCTs installed on the power cable shield. An exploded view of the RFCT is also shown.
1 1 1 1 1 1
Typical Installation of RFCT Sensor
CA08104001E
September 2010
Sheet 04 127

4.5-7
Table 4.5-9. InsulGard Motor Packages

i ii
InsulGard Motor Kits

Stator RTD number 8 Motor voltage 15 kV For motors with Stator RTD number 9 order additional PD-SR-RTD-6
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17 One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6 External temperature and humidity sensors (PD-SR-TS, PD-SR-HS) Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT) InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17 One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6) External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS) Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT) Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17 One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6 External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS) Split core CT (PD-SR-CTF) Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals
PD-IG-M-E2-A1
1 2 3
PD-IG-M-E2-A2
4 5 6
PD-IG-M-E2-A2-CTF
7 8 9 10

Description RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV (installed on back panel except for door-mounted IG it must be mounted separately) Catalog Number PD-USB PD-MODEM
11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS) Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet External humidity sensor for InsulGard (HS) Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50-inches Connect to secondary winding of the motor (or generator) current transformer Note: Differential current transformer can't be used Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet
Split (ex)core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT. PD-SR-CTF Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement if the motor/generator current transformer can't be used (Order separately if required)
Note: In most motor applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard Enclosure (typically eld mounted in cable termination compartment) and shipped with a 65 foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not typical for motor applications. Also please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
Table 4.5-12. RFCT Sensor

Description 0.75-Inch diameter RFCT, default cable length 65 feet Catalog Number PD-SR-RFCT-075
20 21
CA08104001E
4.5-8

The length of cable or sensitivity zone of protection depends upon the type of cable, the number of splices, and the number of taps. PLIC Type Cable is protected up to maximum of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition) distances are shorter with protection up to a maximum of 300 ft.
September 2010
Sheet 04 128
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Generator Applications
Typically, the Generator Package components list consists of the InsulGard Package and occasionally additional sets of coupling capacitors. For part numbers of additional sets of coupling capacitors, please see Switchgear Applications Section on Page 4.5-5. lnsulGard Systems for Generator Applications are sold as packages. Packages provide greater value. Standard Equipment with the lnsulGard Generator Package is shown in Table 4.5-13.
Table 4.5-13. Standard Equipment

Description InsulGard NEMA 4X enclosure Set of three coupling capacitors Coupling capacitor mounting kit (cabling, hardware, boots, connectors) RTD module (six inputs) External mount humidity sensor ( 65 cable pigtail included) Temperature sensor (65 cable pigtail included) RS-485 communication port lnsulGard software CD Set of instruction manuals Quantity 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
Table 4.5-14. Generator Packages

Description Catalog Number PD-IG-M-E2-A1
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV

InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17 One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6 External temperature and humidity sensors (PD-SR-TS, PD-SR-HS) Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT) InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17 One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6) External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS) Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT) Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals
PD-IG-M-E2-A2
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV

InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27) Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6) Auxiliary sensors set (PD-SR-A1) InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27) Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6) Auxiliary sensors set A2 (PD-SR-A2) InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals PD-IG-GV-E2-A1
PD-IG-GV-E2-A2
InsulGard Generator Kit (Hydrogen-Cooled)Voltage 16 kV

InsulGard inside NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17 Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6) Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT) Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals PD-IG-HC-E2-A3
CA08104001E
September 2010
Sheet 04 129

4.5-9

Description RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port Advanced RS232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV (installed on back panel except for door-mounted IG it must be mounted separately) Catalog Number PD-USB PD-MODEM
i ii 1

2 3 4 5

External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS) Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet External humidity sensor for InsulGard (HS) Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50-inches Connect to secondary winding of the motor (or generator) current transformer Note: Differential current transformer cant be used Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet Split (Flex) - Core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT. Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for Load measurement if the motor/generator current transformer cant be used (Order separately if required)
PD-SR-CTF
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: In most generator applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard enclosure {typically eld mounted in cable termination compartment} and shipped with a 65-foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not typical for generator applications. Also, please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
CA08104001E
4.5-10 Protective and Predictive Relays InsulGard Predictive Maintenance

Connection DiagramInsulGard
September 2010
Sheet 04 130
i ii 1 2
Connection Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4
Modem TD-34
RJ-11 Phone Cable
InsulGard Panel Wiring Diagram IWD115-M
N L Local Port RS485 2 1

BLACK
RED
3 4 5 6
Sensor Interface Board
Connector to InsulGard Connector to Interface Board
4-20 mA
Cables from: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RTD-WHITE RTD-BLACK RTD-RED LOAD-SIG-RED 1 2 3 4

CT-Load sensor RTD Temperature Sensor
LOAD-GND-BLACK 5 H%(GND)-WHITE 6 H%(+5V)-RED H%(SIG)-BLACK 4-20mA- (+) 4-20mA- (-) RS485-A(+) RS485-B(-) RS485-ISOGND ALARM - NC ALARM - COM ALARM - NO WARNING-NC WARNING-COM WARNING-N0 STATUS-NC STATUS-COM STATUS-NO NOT/USED NOT/USED L 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 10
Humidity sensor
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 T Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 Ch8 Ch9 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12 Ch13 Ch14 Ch15 Ch16 (Noise)
10
+
-
X2
11
C
RS-485
Coax cables from PD Sensors ##1-16
7 8 9
ALL BLUE
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22
RED
10
1
23 24
WHITE
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Notes
3 4 5 6 S
RTD
R3
Status
CT Ref
GR N 25 26
WHITE GREEN RED
7 S1 8 S2 9 10 11 +5 H% 12 S Sw Ref H%
Power
PC cable to temporary brought Ground Screw laptop on back cover
RED
GREEN
DIN-Rail Terminal Strip 115 VAC

CA08104001E
X1
+5
Alarm
Alarm 2
InsulGard
Warning
Alarm 1
27 28 29 30 31
LINE NEUTRAL GROUND
WHITE GREEN GREEN GREEN
ENCLOSURE, PANEL GROUND
DIN RAIL GROUND
FUSES: Inside InsulGard for 115 Vac Application: Time-Lag 80 mA, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 195 Series by Wickmann (DigiKey.com, Part No: WK5026-ND) On the Panel: Fast Acting 3.0A, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 191 Series by Wickman (DigiKey Part No: WK4714-ND).
Figure 4.5-1. Typical Connection Diagram 1. Modem with Power Module are installed if ordered. 2. On motors, an unused RTD can be used as the temperature sensor (wire colors in brackets relate only to TS sensor). 3. In switchgears current sensor (CT) is not used, and if panel is installed without an enclosure, the temperature (TS) and humidity (HS) sensors can be installed directly on the panel. Use a left tting (hub) on the enclosure for power supply cable and for the cables to the relays (Alarm1&2, R3) and use a right hub for all signal cables. 4. Fuses: Miniature Fuses 5 x 20, 250 Vac, 195 Series by Wickmann (DistributorDigiKey.com). 5. Fuse inside InsulGard for 120V application200 mA (DigiKey Part NO: WK5034-ND), for 230 Vac application 80mA (DigiKey Part NO: WK5026-ND). Fuse on a panel: 1.0A (DigiKey Part NO: WK5048-ND). 6. Outlet is not installed for 230 Vac application.
Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

September 2011
Sheet 05 001
5.0-A
Medium Voltage Switchgear

Table 5.0-A. Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide
CAG Tab Tab Title Voltage Range Switching Drawout Front/Rear Device or Fixed Accessible Compartmentalized Breaker Bus Cable Area VTs & CPTs Insulated ANSI Bus Standards
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Metal-Clad Switchgear VacClad-W Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEF Front-Access Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MSB Medium Voltage Switch- and Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breakers Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
4.7638 kV
Vacuum breaker
Drawout Front & rear required Front only required Front & rear required
C37.20.2 C37.20.2 & C37.20.3 C37.20.3
4.7615 kV
7.1
7.2
Switch & vacuum breaker 4.7638 kV Fusible switches
Fixed
Optional front access only designs available. Available as an option.
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear
MEB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
21
CA08104001E
5.0-B
Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

September 2011
Sheet 05 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 05 001
5.0-1
Metal-Clad Switchgear VacClad-WMedium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
Contents
Metal-Clad Vacuum Breaker SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1 5 and 15 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-4 5 kV Switchgear26.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-8 27 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-9 38 kV Switchgear42.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-10 Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1 Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-13 Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-15 Arc-Resistant Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-16 Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-17 Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-22 Control Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-24 RelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-26 Main-Tie-Main Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-29 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1 5 and 15 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1 27 kV (Standard Metal-Clad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-11 38 kV (Standard Metal-Clad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-15 5 and 15 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-19 27 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-30 38 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-34 Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) Room Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-38 Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tab 12 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16346 Sections 26 13 26
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear
21
CA08104001E
5.0-2

September 2011
Sheet 05 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 003
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers

General Description
5.1-1
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear with Type VCP-W vacuum breakers provides centralized control and protection of medium voltage power equipment and circuits in industrial, commercial and utility installations involving generators, motors, feeder circuits, and transmission and distribution lines. VacClad-W switchgear is available in maximum voltage ratings from 4.76 kV through 38 kV, and interrupting ratings as shown below. VacClad-W offers a total design concept of cell, breaker and auxiliary equipment, which can be assembled in various combinations to satisfy user application requirements. Two-high breaker arrangements are standard up to 15 kV. One-high arrangements can be furnished when required.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Typical Indoor Assembly with a Breaker Withdrawn on Rails
Ratings
Maximum Voltages:
4.76 kV, 8.25 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV, 38 kV
8 9
Interrupting Ratings:
4.76 kV: 8.25 kV: 15.0 kV: 27.0 kV: 38.0 kV: Up to 63 kA Up to 63 kA Up to 63 kA Up to 40 kA Up to 40 kA
Fixed Stem
10 11 12 13
Support Gasket Only (Seal Formed by Bellows)
Continuous CurrentCircuit Breakers:

1200A, 2000A, 3000A (5 and 15 kV) 4000A Forced cooled (5 and 15 kV) 1200A, 2000A, (27 kV) 600A, 1200A, 1600A, 2000A, 2500A (38 kV) 3000A Forced cooled (38 kV)
Contacts Bellows Shield
Movable Stem
Continuous CurrentMain Bus:

1200A, 2000A, 3000A (5 and 15 kV) 4000A (5 and 15 kV) 1200A, 2500A (27 kV) 1200A, 2000A, 2500A, 3000A (38 kV)
Note: Continuous currents above 4000A, contact Eaton.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
VCP-W Breaker Element
Cut-Away View of Vacuum Interrupter (Enlarged to Show Detail)
Advantages
Eatons Electrical Sector has been manufacturing metal-clad switchgear for over 50 years, and vacuum circuit breakers for over 30 years. Tens of thousands of Eaton vacuum circuit breakers, used in a wide variety of applications, have been setting industry performance standards for years. With reliability as a fundamental goal, Eaton engineers have simplied the VacClad-W switchgear design to minimize problems and gain trouble-free performance. Special attention was given to material quality and maximum possible use was made of components proven over the years in Eaton switchgear. Maintenance requirements are minimized by the use of enclosed long-life vacuum interrupters. When maintenance or inspection is required, the component arrangements and drawers allow easy access. VacCladWs light weight simplies handling and relocation of the breakers.
Certications
UL and CSA listings are available
CA08104001E
5.1-2

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 05 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Standards
Eatons VacClad-W switchgear meets or exceeds ANSI/ IEEE C37.20.2 and NEMA SG-5 as they apply to metalclad switchgear. The assemblies also conform to Canadian standard CSAC22.2 No. 31-04, and EEMAC G8-3.2. Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers meet or exceed all ANSI and IEEE standards applicable to AC high voltage circuit breakers rated on symmetrical current basis.
Main Bus 3-Phase Test Source (Low Voltage)
BKR
Shorting Bar (Bolted Fault)
Seismic Qualication
Figure 5.1-1. Metal-Clad Switchgear ShortCircuit and Momentary Withstand Tests The short-time current withstand tests demonstrate electrical adequacy of busses and connections against physical damage while carrying the short-circuit current for a given duration. The momentary current withstand tests demonstrate the mechanical adequacy of the structure, busses and connections to withstand electro-magnetic forces with no breakage of insulation. It should be noted that design testing of standard metal-clad switchgear does not involve any internal arcing faults.
Refer to Tab 1 for information on seismic qualication for this and other Eaton products.
Metal-Clad Switchgear Compartmentalization

Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear equipment conforming to C37.20.2 is a compartmentalized design, wherein primary conductors are fully insulated for the rated maximum voltage of the assembly, and all major primary circuit components are isolated from each other by grounded metal barriers. This type of construction minimizes the likelihood of arcing faults within the equipment and propagation of fault between the compartments containing major primary circuits. The C37.20.2 metal-clad switchgear equipment is designed to withstand the effects of short-circuit current in a bolted fault occurring immediately downstream from the load terminals of the switchgear. The bolted fault capability is veried by short-time and momentary short-circuit withstand current testing on complete switchgear, as well as by fault making (close and latch) testing on the switching devices as shown in Figure 5.1-1.
FeaturesVacuum Circuit Breaker

High power laboratory tests prove VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to 200 full fault current interruptions V-Flex (stiff-exible) current transfer from the vacuum interrupter moving stem to the breaker primary disconnecting contact is a nonsliding/non-rolling design, which eliminates maintenance required with the sliding/rolling type transfer arrangements. The V-Flex system provides excellent electrical and thermal transfer, and long vacuum interrupter life. Easy inspection and accessibility is afforded by a front-mounted stored energy operating mechanism. The same basic mechanism is used on all ratings, which requires a minimum investment in spare parts
All VCP-W circuit breakers are horizontal drawout design, which provides connect, test and disconnect position. A latch secures the breaker in the connected and disconnected/ test position. 5/15/27 kV breakers can be fully withdrawn on extension rails for inspection and maintenance without the need for a separate lifting device. 38 kV circuit breaker is designed to roll directly on the oor All breaker functions, indicators and controls are grouped on an easily accessible panel on front of the breaker Trip-free interlocks prevent moving a closed circuit breaker into or out of the connected position Breaker cannot be electrically or mechanically closed when in the intermediate position Closing springs automatically discharge before moving the circuit breaker into or out of the enclosure Breaker frame remains grounded during levering and in the connected position Coding plates are provided to ensure only correct breaker rating can be installed in cell Quality Assurance Certicate is included with each circuit breaker Easy-to-see contact erosion indicator is provided as standard on the vacuum interrupter moving stem. Only periodic visual inspection is required to verify that the contacts have not worn out A simple visual means, T-cutout, is provided to verify by simple visual inspection that the loading springs are applying proper pressure to the contacts when the breaker is closed Corona-free design increases circuit breaker reliability and in-service life by maintaining insulation integrity Vacuum interrupters with copperchrome contacts provide superior dielectric strength and very low chop current High-strength, high-impact, trackresistant glass polyester on 5/15 kV and cycloaliphatic epoxy on 27/38 kV is used for primary insulation and support as standard
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 005

General Description
5.1-3
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Fixed Stem Glass Polyester Insulator Front-Accessible Stored Energy Mechanism Breaker Operations Counter Breaker Main Contacts Open/Closed Status Contacts Bellows Shield
i ii 1 2 3 4
Support Gasket Only (Seal Formed by Bellows)
Vacuum Interrupter Pole Unit Manual Spring Charging Port Spring Charged/ Discharged Status
Movable Stem
Manual Push-to-Close & Open Pushbuttons
Type VCP-W 5/15 kV Circuit Breaker
Cut-away View of Vacuum Interrupter (Enlarged to Show Detail)
5 6
Primary Disconnect Epoxy Insulator Primary Disconnect Front-Accessible Stored Energy Mechanism Behind this Panel
Pole Unit Vacuum Interrupter Located Inside this Molded Epoxy Housing Insulation Shrouds
7 8 9 10
Control Panel (Breaker Functions and Indicators) Alignment Rollers Code Plates Secondary Disconnect Breaker Wheel
11 12
Type VCP-W 27 kV Circuit BreakerSide View
Type VCP-W 38 kV Circuit BreakerFront View
Type VCP-W 38 kV Circuit BreakerRear View
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Type VCP-W Circuit BreakerFeatures
V-Flex System
Contact Erosion Indicator
T-Cutout
20 21
5.1-4
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)

General DescriptionSwitchgear
September 2011
Sheet 05 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FeaturesSwitchgear Assembly
VacClad is a Metal-Clad Design
Eatons VacClad switchgear is an integrated assembly of drawout vacuum circuit breakers, bus and control devices coordinated electrically and mechanically for medium voltage circuit protection and control. The metal-clad integrity provides maximum circuit separation and safety.
Circuit Breaker Compartment
The mechanism for levering the breaker is a unique cell mounted design. It incorporates all the safety interlocks to render the breaker mechanically and electrically tripfree during the levering procedure
A silver-plated copper ground bus provided on the levering pan assembly is engaged by a spring loaded ground contact on the circuit breaker to ensure that the circuit breaker remains grounded throughout its travel
Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV Shown)
13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
All circuit breakers are equipped with self-aligning and self-coupling primary and secondary disconnecting devices, and arranged with a mechanism for moving it physically between connected and disconnected positions All major primary components, such as circuit breaker, voltage transformer, control power transformer, and buses are completely enclosed and grounded by metal barriers. A metal barrier in front of the circuit breaker and auxiliary drawer ensures that, when in the connected position, no live parts are exposed by opening the compartment door Automatic shutters cover primary circuit elements when the removable element is in the disconnected, test or removed position All primary bus conductors and connections are insulated with track-resistant uidized bed epoxy coating for rated maximum voltage of the assembly Mechanical interlocks are provided to maintain a proper and safe operating sequence Instruments, meters, relays, secondary control devices and their wiring are isolated, where necessary, by grounded metal barriers from all primary circuit elements
Front View
Automatic Steel Shutters
Secondary Disconnect Ground Bus Levering Screw Assembly
MOC & TOC Switch (Optional) Under this Cover Code Plates
VacClad is Corona Free

Corona emissions within the standard VacClad switchgear assemblies have been eliminated or reduced to very low levels by special fabrication and assembly techniques, such as rounding and bufng of all sharp copper edges at the joints, employing star washers for bolting metal barriers, and using specially crafted standoff insulators for primary bus supports. By making switchgear assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made its standard switchgear more reliable.

Cell Studs
Front-Accessible CTs Primary Insulating Tubes
Circuit Breaker Compartment Shown with Shutters Opened for Illustration
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 007
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage 5.1-5 Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)
Circuit Breaker Compartment (Continued)

Each circuit breaker compartment is provided with steel shutters (breaker driven) that automatically rotate into position to cover the insulating tubes and stationary cell studs to prevent accidental contact with live primary voltage, when the breaker is withdrawn from the connected position Current transformers installed over the primary insulating tubes, located behind the steel shutters, are front accessible. Up to four standard accuracy current transformers can be installed per phase. Front accessibility permits adding or changing the transformers when the unit is de-energized without breaking high voltage connections and primary insulation Code plates ensure that only correct breaker rating can be installed in cell
Control power transformer drawer is mechanically interlocked with the transformer secondary main breaker that requires the main breaker to be opened, so that the primary circuit is disconnected only under no-load when the drawer is withdrawn
Grounding straps are provided in each drawer to automatically ground and discharge primary fuses when the drawer is withdrawn
i ii 1 2 3

VT Drawer Extension Rail VT Secondary Fuses
4 5 6 7
Drawout Auxiliaries
CTP Drawer CPT Secondary Breaker/ Drawer Interlock CPT Secondary Main Breaker
Auxiliary Compartments
5/15 kV VacClad design permits up to four auxiliary drawers in one vertical unit (only two shown in the photo). These drawers can be used for installing voltage or control power transformers, or primary fuses. Each drawer can also be congured for use as a battery tray. Each auxiliary drawer is a horizontal drawout design that can be fully withdrawn on extension rails similar to the breaker, thus allowing front access to auxiliary equipment to permit easy testing and fuse replacement A safety shutter (operated by the drawer) is included in each auxiliary drawer compartment. It automatically operates when the auxiliary drawer is withdrawn to protect workmen from accidental contact with the stationary primary contacts Each auxiliary drawer can accommodate two voltage transformers, connected line-to-line (open delta); three voltage transformers, connected line-to-ground; or singlephase control power transformer up to 15 kVA, 15 kV with their associated primary fuses. Three-phase control power transformer, or single-phase transformers larger than 15 kVA can be xed mounted within the structure, with their primary fuses installed in the auxiliary drawer
8
CPT, Single-Phase up to 15 kVA Primary Taps
VT Primary Fuses
Extension Rail
Secondary Terminals
9 10 11 12 13
2 or 3 VTs
CPT Primary Fuse
Extension Rail
14 15
VT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails
CPT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails

Primary Fuse Grounding Straps (Attached to Cell Frame)
16 17 18 19
Secondary Disconnect Block
Glass Polyester Shutter Barrier
Drawer to Cell Frame Ground Contact
Space Heater (Optional for Indoor)
20 21
VT/CPT Compartment with VT/CPT Drawer RemovedInside View
CA08104001E
5.1-6
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)

September 2011
Sheet 05 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Rear Compartments
Rear of each structure is segregated into main bus and cable compartments by grounded metal barriers, as required for a given application. Access to main bus and power cable connections is provided from the rear through removable bolted covers or optional rear hinged doors. Cable trough (chimney) is provided to segregate upper and lower compartment power cables as required. All primary buses (main bus and line and load runbacks) are 100% conductivity copper, and insulated for rated maximum voltage of the assembly by ame retardant, trackresistant uidized epoxy coating. The bolted bus joints are silver- or optionally tin-plated for positive contact and low resistance, with each joint insulated with easily installed boots. Bus supports between the adjacent units are made of high-impact, high-strength, track-resistant glass polyester at 5 and 15 kV, and cycloaliphatic epoxy at 27 and 38 kV Adequate space is available for cable termination, bus duct connection, installation of zero sequence current transformers, and surge arresters. In two-high arrangement, power cables for each circuit are separated by metal barriers A bare copper ground bus is provided in the rear of each structure, which extend the entire length of the switchgear All control wiring is isolated from primary circuit elements by grounded metal-conduit or braided metal jacket, with the exception of short lengths of wire such as at instrument transformer terminals

Cable Lugs (stress cones not shown) Metal Barrier Between Upper and Lower Compartment Customers Power Cables
Breaker Shown in the Connected Position
Surge Arresters (Optional) Cable Barrier (Chimney) Pre-formed Insulating Boots Around Bus Joints Copper Bus, Insulated with Fluidized Epoxy Coating
Rear View
Breaker Shown in the Test/ Disconnected Position

Main Bus Support Between Each Adjacent Unit Copper Bus, Silver or (Optional) Tin Plated
Fluidized Epoxy Coating
Breaker Shown in the Fully Withdrawn Position
Main Bus Details
20 21
September 2011
Sheet 05 009
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage 5.1-7 Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)
Roll-on-the-Floor Breaker Option
i ii 1 2 3 4
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with Fixed Wheels
5 6 7 8 9
Roll-on-the-Floor Switchgear Compartment
10 11 12
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with Swivel Wheels on Front
An optional direct roll-in breaker designed for use in upper and lower compartment of 5/15 kV indoor and outdoor walk-in aisle switchgear is available for all 5/15 kV VCP-W, VCPWC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. Breaker is tted with special wheel kit, and compartment interface is modied to allow circuit breaker to be rolled directly from the oor into the switchgear compartment, or from switchgear compartment onto the oor without a need for external lifting device or dolly. The circuit breaker can be supplied with all four xed wheels or can be supplied with two swivel-type wheels on the front and two xed wheels on the rear. In 2-high construction, the roll-on-the-oor breaker option is available for breakers in upper or lower compartments, however, removal of upper breaker requires external lifter and lift pan, which are optional accessories.
When using a 1200 or 2000A circuit breaker in the lower compartment, the compartment above the breaker can be left blank or used of auxiliaries, such as VTs or single-phase CPT, or primary fuses for three-phase or larger than 15 kVA single-phase CPTs. When using 3000A circuit breaker in the lower compartment, the compartment above the breaker is left blank for ventilation. The design is rated for application in Seismic Zone 4 environment. It can also be supplied with UL or CSA label for certain ratings. Contact Eaton for ratings available with UL/CSA label. The overall dimensions of the 5/15 kV indoor and outdoor walk-in aisle structures with the roll-on-the-oor breaker option are the same as the standard structures that use standard non roll-on-the-oor circuit breakers.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
5.1-8
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 kV (26.00-Inch Wide)

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 05 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide 5 kV 250 MVA Switchgear
This narrow width VacClad-W MV Metal-Clad switchgear was designed for use in instances where oor space requirements would not allow the industry standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide switchgear. Typical applications include not only new construction but also replacement switchgear for installations previously equipped with 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide airbreak devices. This line of switchgear has also been used where 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA applications are commonplace, such as generator and control applications.
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Low Prole Model

In addition to the oor space saving offered by the standard 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide model, a further saving in the height and depth of the switchgear is also available. Where height and depths are an issue, such as an outdoor powerhouse or in a mobile power container, the standard 95.00inch (2413.0 mm) high unit can be reduced to an 80.00-inch high (2032.0 mm), 72.00-inch (1828.9 mm) deep low prole model. Main bus rating available in the 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) high x 72.00-inch (1828.9 mm) deep low prole model is limited to 1200A maximum. It is not compatible in size or location with standard 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide or 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high VCP-W units. The low prole model is designed to house breaker over auxiliary or auxiliary over breaker, or auxiliary over auxiliary. In order to provide maximum vertical space for power cable terminations, auxiliary over breaker conguration should be used for customers top entrance cables, and breaker over auxiliary conguration should be used for customers bottom entrance cables. Auxiliary compartments are designed to accommodate one or two auxiliary drawers. That is, up to four auxiliary drawers can be installed in an auxiliary over auxiliary conguration. A set of two line-to-line or three line-to-ground connected voltage transformers, or a single-phase control power transformer up to 15 kVA can be installed in each auxiliary drawer. Because of the reduced depth, control devices cannot be located on breaker compartment door. All control devices should be located on the auxiliary compartment doors. Refer to Pages 5.5-9 for available congurations, dimensions and weights. For all 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide congurations, multifunction microprocessor-based relays and meters, such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 and IQ meters are recommended for reduced panel space.
Ratings
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide switchgear line is designed for use with Eatons Type VCPW-ND Narrow Design vacuum circuit breakers rated 4.76 kV, 60 kV BIL, 250 MVA, 1200A maximum, with rated main bus of 1200 or 2000A. For installations requiring 2000A main breakers with 1200A feeders, lineups can be built with standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide main breaker cubicles and 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide feeders.
Fully Withdrawn Breaker
Congurations
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Standard Model
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design is exible. Available congurations include breaker over breaker, one or two auxiliary drawers over breaker, breaker over one or two auxiliary drawers, or up to four auxiliary drawers in one vertical section. The standard height and depth are 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) and 96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) respectively. A breaker over auxiliary, or auxiliary over breaker combination can be supplied in reduced depth of 86.25-inch (2190.8 mm). The depth of breaker over breaker combination can also be reduced to 86.25-inch (2190.8 mm) if power cables for top breaker enter from the top and the cables for bottom breaker enter from the bottom. The main bus location and connections in the standard 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design are 100% compatible with standard 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide vertical sections. As a result, additions to existing Eaton 5 kV, 250 MVA 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide VCP-W installations can be simply and rapidly performed without costly system modications and transition sections. Refer to Pages 5.5-7 and 5.5-8 for available congurations, dimensions and weights.
Automatic Shutters
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fused PT Drawer
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 011

General Description
5.1-9
27 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons 27 kV nominal metal-clad switchgear is used for applications at system voltages higher than 15 kV, up to and including 27 kV. It is designed for use with Type VCP-W, horizontal drawout vacuum circuit breakers.
Ratings

Maximum rated voltage: 27 kV rms

Note: Eaton tested to 28.5 kV.
BIL withstand: 125 kV peak Maximum symmetrical interrupting: 16 kA, 22 kA, 25 kA, 40 kA rms Continuous current: Circuit breakers1200A, 2000A Switchgear main bus One-high design: 1200A, 2000A Two-high design: 1200A, 2000A, 2500A, 2700A
Features and Congurations

27 kV metal-clad switchgear design is an extension of Eatons 5 and 15 kV VacClad design. It has same footprint and overall space envelop, and it incorporates all features and advantages of the 5 and 15 kV VacClad design, with the exception of some modications required for 27 kV application. Uses horizontal drawout type VCP-W 125 kV BIL rated vacuum circuit breakers A cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation material is used throughout the switchgear housings and the circuit breakers for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase primary bus supports. For decades, cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation has demonstrated its outstanding electrical and mechanical characteristics in harsh outdoor applications. The use of this insulation system with the 27 kV design ensures a comfortable margin of safety at higher voltages All primary bus conductors are insulated for full 28.5 kV by uidized epoxy coating. All buses are fabricated from 100% conductivity copper. Bus joints are silver- or tin-plated as required, and covered with pre-formed insulating boots to maintain metal-clad integrity Available congurations include: auxiliary over breaker, and auxiliary over auxiliary. Each auxiliary or breaker requires one-half vertical space

Each auxiliary drawer can accommodate two voltage transformers connected line-to-line, or three voltage transformers connected line-toground, which can be withdrawn for easy maintenance and replacement of primary fuses When required by an application, a single-phase control power transformer up to 37.5 kVA, or a three-phase control power transformer up to 75 kVA can be xed mounted in the front bottom compartment, with the primary fuses in an auxiliary drawer located in the upper compartment. When the control power transformer is located remotely from the switchgear, but fed through primary fuses located in the switchgear, the fuses are installed in an auxiliary drawer. The primary fuse drawer is key interlocked with the control power transformer secondary main breaker to ensure that it is opened rst, and transformer load is disconnected, before the fuse drawer can be withdrawn 27 kV metal-clad switchgear is available in general purpose, ventilated, indoor or outdoor aisleless type enclosure Two-high 27 kV arrangements with breaker-over-breaker are available in indoor type enclosure Roll-on-the-oor congurations are available
Epoxy Insulator
Primary Disconnect
i ii 1 2 3 4
27 kV VCP-W Circuit BreakerSide View

Draw-out Auxiliary Drawer
5 6 7 8 9 10
27 kV SwitchgearFront View
Surge Arresters
11 12 13
Main Bus Barrier Split Rear Covers Epoxy Bus Supports
14 15 16 17 18
Fluidized Epoxy Coated Cu Bus
27 kV SwitchgearRear View
19 20 21
CA08104001E
5.1-10

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 05 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
38 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons VacClad switchgear family is designed for use in applications with distribution voltages up to 38 kV maximum. Typical applications include not only new construction but also replacement for older air-break, minimum oil or SF6 switchgear. The circuit breaker and switchgear will meet industry requirements for greater safety, quality, superior reliability and minimal maintenance while providing higher insulation levels in less space than other breaker types, thus reducing overall switchgear size for signicant space savings.
Easy inspection and accessibility is afforded by front mounted stored energy operating mechanism. The same basic mechanism is used on all ratings, which requires a minimum investment in spare parts
All 38 kV circuit breakers are horizontal drawout design, which provide connect, test and disconnect position. A latch secures the breaker in the connected and disconnected/test position. The circuit breaker is designed to roll directly on the oor
Control Compartment Type VCP-W Roll-on the Floor Drawout Circuit Breaker
Ratings
Maximum rated voltage: 38 kV rms BIL withstand: 150 and 170 kV peak Maximum symmetrical interrupting with K = 1: 16 kA, 25 kA, 31.5 kA, 40 kA rms, and 35 kA rms (21 kA rating with K = 1.65) Continuous current: Circuit breakersup to 2500A Switchgear main busup to 3000A

Breaker Compartment Door
Control Panel (Breaker Functions and Indicators) Contact Erosion Indicator Secondary Contact Block
Features38 kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker
15 16
17 18 19 20 21
Corona-free design increases circuit breaker reliability and in-service life by maintaining insulation integrity Superior cycloaliphatic epoxy insulationa void-free insulating material with outstanding electrical and mechanical characteristics, such as track resistance, dielectric strength, and fungus resistance, even in harsh industrial environment is used throughout the circuit breaker as primary phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation Axial-magnetic, copper-chrome contacts are used in 38 kV vacuum interrupters to provide superior dielectric strength, better performance characteristics, and lower chop current High power laboratory tests prove VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to 200 full fault current interruptions V-Flex (stiff-exible) current transfer from the vacuum interrupter moving stem to the breaker primary disconnecting contact is a nonsliding/non-rolling design, which eliminates maintenance required with the sliding/rolling type transfer arrangements. The V-Flex system provides excellent electrical and thermal transfer, and long vacuum interrupter life
Guide Rails Ensure Breaker/Cell Alignment Lift/Pull Handle Code Plates
38 kV BreakerFully Withdrawn
Pole Unit Primary Disconnect
Vacuum Interrupter Located Inside this Molded Epoxy Housing
Insulation Shrouds
Alignment Rollers Breaker Wheel
38 kV BreakerRear View
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 013

General Description38 kV Switchgear
5.1-11
Features38 kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker (Continued)
Features38 kV Switchgear Assembly

Like the circuit breaker described above, the 38 kV switchgear assembly is a corona-free metal-clad design. It incorporates many features and advantages of 5, 15 and 27 kV VacClad design, with additional modications required for 38 kV application. Industry-leading cycloaliphatic epoxy supports are used for primary phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation throughout, providing 170 kV BIL and 80 kV (1 minute) power frequency withstand capability All primary bus conductors are insulated for full 38 kV by uidized epoxy coating. All buses are fabricated from 100% conductivity copper. Bus joints are silver- or tin-plated as required, and covered with Eatons pre-formed insulating boots to maintain metal-clad integrity
Control Compartment Control Devices
All breaker controls and indicators are functionally grouped on the front control panel and include: main contact status, closing spring status, port for manual spring charging, close and trip button, and mechanical operations counter Clearly visible contact erosion indicator on the front of the breaker Trip-free interlocks prevent moving a closed circuit breaker into or out of the connected position Breaker cannot be electrically or mechanically closed when in the intermediate position Closing springs automatically discharge before moving the circuit breaker into or out of the enclosure Breaker frame remains grounded during levering and in the connected position Coding plates are provided to ensure only correct breaker rating can be installed in cell Quality Assurance Certicate is included with each circuit breaker
Circuit breaker compartment is designed to interface with Type VCP-W 38 kV circuit breaker. It includes oor-mounted breaker pan assembly (levering assembly) with all safety interlocks required by the metal-clad design. Cell mounted guide rails accurately guide the breaker into the cell during levering, and ensure correct alignment of the circuit breaker primary disconnects with the cell primary contacts when breaker reaches connected position Coding plates are provided to ensure only correct breaker rating can be installed in the cell Automatic steel shutters cover cell primary contacts when circuit breaker is withdrawn from its connected position, to prevent persons from accidentally touching the stationary primary cell contacts. Each shutter can be padlocked in the closed or open position. It can also be manually latched open as required for maintenance
Shutter Latch (Manual) Primary Contact Housing
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Steel Shutter
9 10 11 12
Provision for Padlocking Shutter in Closed Position
Steel Shutters
Breaker Compartment
38 kV SwitchgearControl Compartment
Ground Secondary Bus Disconnect MOC Switch Beneath this Cover
13 14
Stationary Primary Contacts Shutter Latch (Manual) Steel Shutter
15 16 17
Breaker Compartment (Shutter Shown Open for Illustration)
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly
TOC Switch MOC Switch
18
Guide Rail Guide Rail Breaker Pan Assembly Racking Screw and Moving Block Assembly Code Plates Provision for Padlocking
38 kV SwitchgearCircuit Breaker Compartment
19 20 21
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly
CA08104001E
5.1-12

September 2011
Sheet 05 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Features38 kV Switchgear Assembly (Continued)

Fuse Drawer Position Indicator Viewing Window Levering Access Levering Access VT/CPT Primary Fuse Drawer Assembly
breaker such that the access to the drawer levering mechanism is blocked until the secondary main breaker is opened
38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design

This design is similar to 38 kV, 170 kV BIL design described previously, except main bus is oriented differently and the design is provided with drawout VT with integral fuses, and front accessible CTs. Each 38 kV 150 kV BIL indoor structure is 42.00inch (1066.8 mm) wide x 95.00-inch (2413 mm) high x 124.36-inch (3158.8 mm) deep. The 150 kV BIL assembly uses the same 38 kV circuit breakers as in 170 kV BIL assemblies. The breakers are interchangeable between the two designs Voltage transformers are equipped with integral top-mounted primary fuses and installed in an auxiliary compartment. Two auxiliary compartments can be provided in one vertical section. Each auxiliary compartment can be supplied with 1, 2 or 3 VTs, and can be connected to bus or line, as required for a given application. The VTs assembly is located behind a xed bolted panel, and provided with mechanism for moving it between connected and disconnected position. The VT assembly is interlocked with the xed bolted panel such that the panel cannot be removed unless the VTs are withdrawn to disconnected position. A shutter assembly covers the primary stabs when VTs are withdrawn to disconnected position. A mechanism is also provided to automatically discharge VT primary fuses as the VTs are withdrawn from connected to disconnected position Ring type current transformers are installed over bus or line side primary insulating bushings, located behind the steel shutters, in the breaker compartment. In this design, the CTs are easily accessible from the front, after removal of the circuit breaker. The front accessibility permits adding or changing the CTs when the equipment is de-energized, but without removal of high voltage joints or primary insulation. The design allows installations of two sets of standard or one set of high accuracy CTs on each side of the circuit breaker As of this update, the 38 kV, 150 kV BIL design cannot be supplied for applications that require a CPT, or primary fuse drawer for a remote CPT. Contact Eaton for availability
Hinged Door
Door-Cell Interlock Assembly
Fuse Pull-out Knobs
VT/CPT Primary Fuse Drawer (Shown with Door Open)
A separate control compartment is provided for installation of protection, metering and control devices. No devices are located on circuit breaker compartment door Rear of the switchgear is divided in main bus and cable compartments, isolated from each other by grounded metal barriers. Sufcient space is available for customers top or bottom entry power cables. Bus duct terminations can also be supplied. A bare copper ground bus is provided along the entire lineup, with an extension in each cable compartment for termination of power cable shields
38 kV, 170 kV BIL Design

Line side current transformer bushings are included as standard. Bus side current transformer bushings are only included when bus side current transformers are supplied Ring-type current transformers are installed over bus or line side primary insulating bushings as required. They are accessible from the rear of the unit. Maximum two sets of standard accuracy or one set of high accuracy current transformers can be installed on the bus side; and three sets of standard accuracy or one set of standard, and one set of high accuracy transformers can be installed on the line side Voltage and control power transformers (VTs and CPTs), when required, are stationary mounted
inside the cubicle, with their primary fuses installed in a drawout auxiliary drawer Each primary fuse drawer is provided with a levering mechanism for moving the drawer within its compartment between connected and disconnected positions, with the compartment door closed. The levering mechanism is mechanically interlocked with the compartment door such that the door cannot be opened, and access to the primary fuses cannot be gained, until the drawer is levered out to the disconnected position. A colored ag visible through a small viewing window on the compartment door indicates the position of the drawer inside the compartment as follows: Red Colordrawer is in the fully connected position Green Colordrawer is in the fully disconnected position Orange Colordrawer is in-between connected and disconnected position Also provided are grounding straps to automatically discharge the fuses as they are pulled from the fuse holders On VT fuse drawers, a cell switch automatically disconnects the secondary circuit before the primary fuses are disconnected as the drawer is withdrawn On CPT fuse drawers, the compartment door is key interlocked with the CPT main secondary circuit
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 015

5.1-13
Features38 kV Switchgear Assembly (Continued)
i ii
Enclosed Main Bus Compartment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Bus SupportEpoxy Customers Cable Connections
Ground Bus
38 kV Switchgear AssemblyRear View

Bus SupportEpoxy
Fluidized Epoxy Coated Bus
Cu Bus, Silver- or Tin-Plated at Joints
Main Bus
13 14
Cycloaliphatic Epoxy Support
15 16 17 18 19
Power Cable Lug Removable Insulating Boots at Bus Joints
Ring Type Current Transformers
Rear Compartment (Partial)
20 21
CA08104001E
5.1-14

September 2011
Sheet 05 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 017
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Arc-Resistant Switchgear

General Description
5.2-1
Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear Medium Voltage
Eatons 5/15 kV switchgear is designed and tested for IEEE Type 2B accessibility, and 27 and 38 kV switchgear is designed and tested to IEEE Type 2. Arc-resistant features are intended to provide an additional degree of protection to the personnel performing normal operating duties in close proximity to the equipment while the equipment is operating under normal conditions. The normal operating conditions for proper application of arc-resistant switchgear designs are as follows:
Circuit Breakers
The Type VCP-W and VCP-WC vacuum circuit breakers, used in VacClad-W arc-resistant switchgear, meet or exceed all ANSI and IEEE standards applicable to AC high voltage circuit breakers rated on symmetrical current basis, including but not limited to: C37.04, C37.06, and C37.09. Also available are type VCP-WG vacuum circuit breakers conforming to IEEE standard C37.013 for AC high voltage generator circuit breakers.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Arc-Resistant Switchgear with Plenum Installed
Eaton has been manufacturing arcresistant metal-clad switchgear since 1990. Eaton was the rst major North American manufacturer to design, test and manufacture arc-resistant switchgear in accordance with EEMAC G14.1. We now offer Type 2 and 2B arc-resistant switchgear assemblies, designed and tested in accordance with the IEEE C37.20.7, with Type VCP-W drawout vacuum circuit breakers. Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad arcresistant switchgear with Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers can be congured in various combinations of breakers and auxiliaries to satisfy users application requirements. One-high and two-high arrangements can be provided when required.
All doors and covers providing access to high voltage components are properly closed and latched Pressure relief devices are free to operate The fault energy available to the equipment does not exceed the rating of the equipment (shortcircuit current and duration) There are no obstructions around the equipment that could direct the arc fault products into an area intended to be protected The equipment is properly grounded
Third-Party Certication
5 and 15 kV arc-resistant metal-clad switchgear assemblies can be provided with CSA (Canada or USA) or UL (USA only) listing. Contact Eaton for available ratings.
Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear

Arc-resistant metal-clad switchgear also conforms to C37.20.2 and is tested as such for short time and momentary short-circuit withstand for through bolted fault as noted on Page 5.1-2. In addition, the enclosure is also tested in accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7 for withstand against the effects of internal arcing faults as shown in Figure 5.2-1.
Three-Phase Test Source (High Voltage)
The user should also refer to documents such as NFPA 70E, for safety training and safe work practices and methods of evaluating safe work distances from energized equipment based on the potential ash hazard, and use proper PPE when working on or near energized equipment with the door/cover opened or not properly secured.
Main Bus
Standards
Switchgear Assembly
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant switchgear meets or exceeds the following standards and test guides:
BKR Ground Bus 0.5 mm Dia. (24 AWG) Wire Used to Initiate Arcing Fault
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Accessibility Types

Arc-resistant switchgear performance is dened by its accessibility type in accordance with IEEE test guide C37.20.7 as follows: Type 1Switchgear with arc-resistant designs or features at the freely accessible front of the equipment only. Type 2Switchgear with arc-resistant designs or features at the freely accessible exterior (front, back and sides) of the equipment only. (Type 2 incorporates Type 1.) Type 2BSwitchgear with Type 2 accessibility plus arc-resistant in front of the instrument/control compartment with the instrument/control compartment door opened. (Type 2B incorporates Type 2.)
CA08104001E
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
North American Documents

IEEE C37.20.2Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear IEEE C37.20.7Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear for Internal Arcing Faults
Figure 5.2-1. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Enclosure Internal Arcing Short-Circuit Withstand Test Internal arcing faults are those faults occurring in air, phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground, within the connes of the switchgear enclosure. Arcing faults can occur within a switchgear compartment as a result of insulation failure or human error. The arcing fault produces a tremendous release of heat energy at the point of the fault, which heats and expands the air volume
Canadian Documents
CSA C22.2 No. 31-04Switchgear Assemblies EEMAC G8-3.2Metal-Clad and Station Type Cubicle Switchgear EEMAC G14-1Procedure for testing the resistance of metal-clad switchgear under conditions of arcing due to an internal fault. The G14-1 was the rst North American testing guide introduced in 1987
5.2-2

General Description
within the enclosure, and may decompose or vaporize materials exposed to an arc or involved in its path. The effects of this type of fault vary depending on enclosure volume, arc duration, arc voltage, and available short-circuit current. If the switchgear is not designed and tested to withstand effects of internal arcing faults, its parts could blow away along with discharge of hot decomposed matter, gaseous or particulate, causing injury to personnel that may be present in its vicinity. Arc-resistant switchgear is designed to channel and control effects of the arcing fault and its enclosure is tested for withstand against such fault in accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7. The structure roof, including the pressure release ap vents, is drip proof. The design is made strong such that the roof can be walked-on when the gear is completely deenergized (for example, during installation) Since arc pressure is vented out through the top of each individual vertical section, the equipment damage is conned to individual structures, minimizing damage to adjacent structures
September 2011
Sheet 05 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

The levering mechanism is mechanically interlocked with the compartment door such that the door cannot be opened until the circuit breaker is opened and levered out to the test/ disconnect position. This interlocking ensures that the levering of the circuit breaker into or out from the connected position is done with compartment door closed and latched, with no exposure to potential arc ash Easy access and viewing ports are provided on the door to allow operator to carry out all normal functions with the door closed and latched, with no exposure to potential arc ash. Those functions include: Breaker levering, manual charging of closing springs, manual opening and closing of the circuit breaker, viewing of open/close status of the breaker main contacts, viewing of charged/discharged status of the closing springs, viewing of mechanical operations counter, and breaker position
Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker Features and Ratings

VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant switchgear is designed for use with Eatons state-of-the-art medium voltage vacuum type VCP-W (standard ANSI), VCP-WC (extra capability), and VCP-WG (generator) circuit breakers. Refer to Tables 5.4-1B, 5.4-2 and 5.4-3 for complete list of available ratings.
A viewing window is provided on the door and on front panel of the drawer to allow viewing of the drawer position and the primary fuses In 5/15 kV designs, each auxiliary drawer can also accommodate a single-phase CPT rated up to 15 kVA, with primary fuses, or the drawer can also be congured as a fuse drawer with two or three primary fuses, and connected to a xed mounted CPT (single-phase or three-phase 45 kVA maximum) in the rear of the structure In 27 kV designs, an auxiliary drawer can be congured as a fuse drawer with two primary fuses and connected to a xed-mounted CPT (single-phase 25 kVA maximum) in the rear of the structure In 38 kV designs, fuse drawer can be provided with two primary fuses and connected to a xed-mounted CPT (single-phase 25 kVA maximum) in the rear of the structure. Please note that in 38 kV designs, a fuse drawer requires a full vertical section, because it occupies the same compartment space as required for a circuit breaker
Arc-Resistant Enclosure and Arc Exhaust

VacClad-W arc-resistant switchgear is designed to withstand effects of internal arcing faults up to its rated arc short-circuit current and duration. The arc-withstand capability of the switchgear enclosure is achieved by use of reinforced heavier gauge steel where needed, smart latching of doors and covers, and top-mounted built-in pressure relief system. Following are standard design features built into each arc-resistant switchgear assembly. The formed steel compartment design provides sealed joints under fault conditions. This prevents smoke and gas from escaping to other compartments, a condition that can occur with switchgear compartments designed with conventional at bolted panels Integral, pressure release ap vents mounted on top of each individual vertical section provide for controlled upward release of arc created overpressure, re, smoke, gases and molten material out of the assembly without affecting structural integrity, and protect personnel who might be present in the vicinity of the switchgear
Control Compartments
The control compartment doors can be opened to access control wiring without having to de-energize the primary circuit. The control compartments have been tested to provide arc-resistant protection with its door opened under normal operating condition. Please note the control compartment door should be opened only for access to control wiring when needed, and should remain closed at all other times.
VacClad arc-resistant 5/15 and 38 kV designs permit maximum of two auxiliary drawers in one vertical section. The 27 kV design permits maximum of only one auxiliary drawer per vertical section.
Relay Box on Breaker Compartment Door in 5/15 kV Switchgear

When needed for additional relays/ instruments/controls, a relay box mounted on the breaker compartment door provides ample space for individual breaker relaying and controls. An access to control wiring or device terminals that are enclosed within the relay box does not require opening of the circuit breaker compartment door.
Each auxiliary drawer is equipped with cell-mounted levering mechanism. The mechanism is mechanically interlocked with its compartment door such that the door cannot be opened and access to auxiliary drawer cannot be gained until the drawer is rst levered out to the disconnected position. This interlocking ensures that the levering of the auxiliary drawer into or out from the connected position is done with compartment door closed and latched , with no exposure to potential arc ash
Arc Exhaust Wall and Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum)

Refer to Page 5.5-38.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 019

General Description
5.2-3
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Front ViewType VCP-W 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Plenum Above the Switchgear Not shown)
5/15 kV Auxiliary Over Auxiliary
5/15 kV Breaker Over Breaker
6 7 8 9 10
Breaker Compartment
Breaker Shown Fully Withdrawn on Extension Rails
VTs DrawerShown Fully Withdrawn
Fuse DrawerShown Fully Withdrawn
11 12 13
Ground Bus
14 15 16 17 18 19
Rear View 5/15 kV VCP-W Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Rear ViewBreaker Over Breaker Cable Termination
Rear ViewBottom Cable Compartment
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-19 to 5.5-29 and Pages 5.5-38 to 5.5-40.
20 21
CA08104001E
5.2-4

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 05 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Front View27 kV VCP-W Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Plenum Above the Switchgear is Not Shown)
Typical 27 kV CellControls in Top, Breaker in the Bottom
Rear ViewTypical 27 kV Breaker Cable Termination
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-30 to 5.5-33 and Pages 5.5-38 to 5.5-40.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 021

General Description
5.2-5
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Shown Without Arc Plenum Above the Switchgear)
Circuit Breaker Compartment Shown with Breaker Removed
7 8 9
Control Compartment
Main Bus Cover
Main Bus (Shown with Cover Removed)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
VT Drawer
Primary Cable Termination
Front ViewVT Over VT
VT TraySide View (Shown Removed)
Rear Assembly
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-34 to 5.5-40.
17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
5.2-6

September 2011
Sheet 05 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 023
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Partial Discharge

General Description
5.3-1
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear
i ii 1 2
InsulGard Relay (PD Monitoring)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
InsulGard Relay
RFCT Sensor
Partial Discharge Equipment
Partial Discharge in Switchgear

Partial discharge is a common name for various forms of electrical discharges such as corona, surface tracking, and discharges internal to the insulation. It partially bridges the insulation between the conductors. These discharges are essentially small arcs occurring in or on the surface of the insulation system when voltage stress exceeds a critical value. With time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that result in partial discharges. Partial discharges start at a low level and increase as more insulation becomes deteriorated. Examples of partial discharge in switchgear are surface tracking across bus insulation, or discharges in the air gap between the bus and a support, such as where a bus passes through an insulating window between the sections of the switchgear. If partial discharge process is not detected and corrected, it can develop into a full-scale insulation failure followed by an electrical fault. Most switchgear ashover and bus failures are a result of insulation degradation caused by various forms of partial discharges.
Sensing and Monitoring

Eatons Type VCP-W metal-clad switchgear (2.438 kV) is corona-free by design. Corona emissions within the standard VacClad switchgear assemblies have been eliminated or reduced to very low levels by special fabrication and assembly techniques, such as rounding and bufng of all sharp copper edges at the joints, employing star washers for bolting metal barriers, and using specially crafted standoff insulators for primary bus supports. By making switchgear assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made its standard switchgear more reliable. However, as indicated above, with time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that cause partial discharges to develop in switchgear operating at voltages 4000V and above. Type VCP-W switchgear can be equipped with factory-installed partial discharge sensors and partial discharge sensing relay for continuous monitoring of the partial discharges under normal operation. Timely detection of insulation degradation through increasing partial discharges can identify potential problems so that corrective actions can be planned and implemented long before permanent deterioration develops. Partial discharge detection can be the foundation of an effective predictive maintenance program. Trending of partial discharge data over time allows prediction of failures, which can be corrected before catastrophic failure occurs. The PD sensing and monitoring system consists of Eatons InsulGard Relay and PD sensors specically developed for application in the switchgear to work with the relay.
Partial discharges within the switchgear compartment are detected by installation of a small donut type radio frequency current transformer (RFCT) sensor over oating stress shields of the specially designed bus or line side primary bushings. Partial discharges in customers power cables (external discharges) are detected by installation of the RFCT around ground shields of the incoming or outgoing power cables termination.
In 38 kV switchgear (refer to Figure 5.3-3), one RFCT sensor is installed around primary bushing stress shield in every breaker compartment and supplied as standard for measurement of discharges internal to the switchgear compartment. Its output is wired to terminal blocks in control compartment for easy access for periodic eld measurements. It can also be connected directly to optional InsulGard relay for continuous monitoring of partial discharges. Because one RFCT sensor is included in 38 kV breaker compartment, Eatons 38 kV switchgear is PD Sensing Ready when received by the customer. An additional RFCT sensor for each incoming and outgoing power cable circuits can be provided as an option for measurement of external discharges.
In 5/15/27 kV switchgear (refer to Figure 5.3-2), primary epoxy bushings with stress shield and RFCT sensors for measurement of internal as well as external partial discharges are all optional. InsulGard relay is also optional. When specied, one set of primary epoxy bushings (located on bus side) with stress shield and associated RFCT sensor is provided at every two vertical sections. An additional RFCT sensor for each incoming and outgoing power cable circuits can be provided as required. The RFCT output signals can be connected directly to InsulGard relay for continuous monitoring of partial discharges or can be used for periodic eld measurements.
CA08104001E
5.3-2

General DescriptionPartial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring
September 2011
Sheet 05 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment. RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear. RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment. RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear. Signals (up to 15 Total) from PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors, RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.) 120 Vac Auxiliary Power Output Alarm Status Temp Sensor Humidity Sensor Input Terminal Block InsulGard Relay Optional Modem
Figure 5.3-1. InsulGard Relay System
Figure 5.3-3. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections (38 kV Switchgear)
Figure 5.3-2. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections (527 kV Switchgear)

Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
September 2011
Sheet 05 025

5.3-3
Partial Discharge Sensors and Monitoring for Switchgear

Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT) Epoxy Bottles with Stress Shield
i ii 1 2 3
PD Sensors
4 5 6
PD Sensors PD Sensors are Installed in Switchgear Cubicle
7 8 9
Figure 5.3-4. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
Pulse Repetition Rate (PPC) 5 4 3 2 1 0 Cub11 Cub12 Cub13 Cub14 Cub15 Cub16 Cub2 Cub3 Cub4 Cub5 Cub6 Cub7 Cub8 Cub9 Cub1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Relatively high Partial Discharge levels indicate problems in older non-uidized epoxy insulated MV bus. Problems in cable terminations and in connected equipment can also be revealed.
Figure 5.3-5. How the Process WorksData Analysis and Report (Sample)
21
5.3-4
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage Communications and Supplemental Devices

General DescriptionCommunications, Protection and Supplemental Devices
September 2011
Sheet 05 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Integrated Monitoring Protection and Control

Communications System
Eatons Power Xpert System Architecture provides a fully scalable set of hardware/software solutions that can be applied in varying levels of sophistication depending upon a customers needs. This new architecture permits backward communication compatibility to existing Eaton and other third-party equipment, as well as expanded functionality for new devices. The Power Xpert System Architecture uses embedded Web server technology for ease of connectivity to Ethernet Local and Wide Area Networks. The architecture includes Eatons Power Xpert Meter, Power Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert Software. Eatons selection matrix includes a number of deployment levels, from Web browser based monitoring of a single Power Xpert Meter, through fully customized monitoring of Eaton and third-party devices in a multi-site environment. Medium voltage VacClad-W switchgear is ideally suited for Eatons unique Power Xpert system incorporating PowerNet devices. Refer to Tab 2 for more information on communication systems.
removed from its connected position only after the primary circuit in which it is to be applied is completely de-energized. Before using a dummy element, it is recommended that each user develop detailed operating procedure consistent with safe operating practices. Only qualied personnel should be authorized to use the dummy element.
Ground and Test Device

The ground and test device is a drawout element that may be inserted into a metal-clad switchgear housing in place of a circuit breaker to provide access to the primary circuits to permit the temporary connection of grounds or testing equipment to the high-voltage circuits. High potential testing of cable or phase checking of circuits are typical tests which may be performed. The devices are insulated to suit the voltage rating of the switchgear and will carry required level of short-circuit current. Before using ground and test devices, it is recommended that each user develop detailed operating procedures consistent with safe operating practices. Only qualied personnel should be authorized to use ground and test devices. Manual and electrical ground and test devices are available, These devices include six studs for connection to primary circuits. On the manual device, selection and grounding is accomplished by cable or bus bars connection. On electrical-type devices, grounding is accomplished by an electrically operated grounding switch.
5/15 kV Manual Type G&T Device
Protective Relays
A full scope of protective relays designed to meet all application requirements is available to provide the utmost in system and component protection. Refer to Tab 4 for further information.
5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown with Upper Terminals Grounded
Standard Accessories

Supplemental Devices
Dummy Element (Dummy Breaker)
Dummy element is a drawout element with primary disconnects similar to a drawout circuit breaker, but consists of solid copper conductors in place of vacuum interrupters, and is designed for manual racking. it is typically used as drawout disconnect link in the primary system for circuit isolation or bypass. The device is insulated to suit the voltage rating of the switchgear and will carry required levels of shortcircuit current, but it is not rated for any current interruption. It must be key interlocked with all source devices such that it can only be inserted into or
One test jumper One levering crank One maintenance tool One lifting yoke (527 kV) One sets of rails (527 kV) One turning handle (5th wheel, 38 kV) Transport dolly (527 kV), (515 kV arc-resistant) Portable lifter (527 kV) Test cabinet Electrical levering device (538 kV) Ramp for lower breaker (527 kV), (515 kV arc-resistant) Manual or electrical ground and test device Hi-pot tester
Optional Accessories

5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown with Lower Terminals Grounded
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 027

Technical DataStandard VCP-W Circuit Breakers
5.4-1
Discussion of changes in the Rated Voltage Range Factor, K, or K-factor in Circuit Breaker Rating Structure
In 1997 and 2000 editions of ANSI C37.06, under Table 1, preferred values for the rated voltage range factor, K, were set to 1.0 for all indoor circuit breaker ratings. This was done because interrupting capabilities of todays vacuum circuit breakers are better represented by K = 1.0. Unlike old air-magnetic and oil circuit breakers, todays vacuum breakers generally do not require a reduction in interrupting current, as the operating voltage is raised to rated maximum voltage, for example from 11.5 kV up to 15 kV. The interrupting capability of vacuum circuit breakers is essentially constant over the entire range of operating voltages, up to and including its rated maximum voltage. The change was also made as a step toward harmonizing preferred ANSI ratings with the preferred ratings of IEC standards. It was further recognized that it is much simpler to select and apply circuit breakers rated on the basis of K = 1.0.
The change in the K value, however, in no way affects the ratings and capabilities of circuit breakers originally tested and rated on the basis of K > 1 in the earlier editions of C37.06. Existing circuit breakers, with ratings based on K > 1.0, are still perfectly valid, meet the latest editions of the standards, and should be continued to be applied as they have been in the past. The original K > 1.0 ratings are neither obsolete nor inferior to the new K = 1.0 ratings; they are just different. The new 1997 and 2000 editions of ANSI standard C37.06 still include the earlier K > 1 ratings as Table A1 and A1A. The change from K > 1.0 to K = 1.0 should be implemented by manufacturers as they develop and test new circuit breakers designs. The change does not require, recommend or suggest that manufactures re-rate and re-test existing breakers to new standard. And accordingly, Eaton continues to offer both circuit breakers rated on the traditional basis of K > 1.0 just as thousands of those breakers have been applied for variety of circuit switching applications worldwide, and also as Eaton develops new breakers, they are rated and tested to the new
K = 1 ratings. As a leader in vacuum interruption technology, Eaton continues to provide a wide choice of modern vacuum circuit breakers so that the user can select the most economical circuit breaker that can satisfy their circuit switching application.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 5.4-1A includes 5/15 kV circuit breakers rated on the basis of K = 1.0 in accordance with revised ANSI standards Table 5.4-1B includes capabilities of traditional 5/15 kV circuit breakers rated on the basis of K > 1.0 Table 5.4-1C includes 27/38 kV circuit breakers rated on the basis of K = 1.0 Table 5.4-2 includes circuit breaker designs, rated on the basis of K = 1.0 with extra capabilities for those applications whose requirements go beyond what is usually experienced in normal distribution circuit applications Table 5.4-3 includes circuit breakers for special generator applications
CA08104001E
5.4-2
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers

September 2011
Sheet 05 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 5.4-1A. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0) (Continued on next page)
Identication Drawout Circuit Breaker Type Rated Values Insulation Level Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2 x 50 s) Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min.) Short-Circuit Ratings (Reference C37.04-1999 and C37.06-2009 Except as Noted ) Asymmetrical Interrupting Current (It) Transient Recovery Voltage Parameters are Based on TD-4 Short-Time Withstand Current Closing and Latching Current (2.6 x I)
Symmetrical Interrupting Current (I)
DC Component (% DC)
Maximum Voltage (V)
Continuous Current
Power Frequency
TRV Rise Time (t3)
Units
kV rms 4.76
Hz
kV rms 19
kV Peak 60
A rms 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000
kA rms sym 25
kA rms kA asym Peak Total 31 65
rms
kV Peak 8.2
sec
sec
RRRV = uc/t3
kV/ sec 0.19
Interrupting Time ms
Peak Voltage (E2) = (uc)
Time to Peak (T2 = t3 x 1.137)
Cycles (60 Hz) 3
50 VCP-W 25
60
50
25
50
44
50
50 VCP-W 40
4.76
60
19
60
40
50
49
104
40
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
50 VCP-W 50
4.76
60
19
60
50
44
59
130
50
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
50 VCP-W 63
4.76
60
19
60
63
55
80
164
63
8.2
50
44
0.19
50
75 VCP-W 40
8.25
60
36
95
40
50
49
104
40
14
59
52
0.27
50
75 VCP-W 50
8.25
60
36
95
50
44
59
130
50
14
59
52
0.27
50
150 VCP-W 25
15
60
36
95
25
50
31
65
25
28 25.7
75
66
0.42 0.39
50
150 VCP-W 40
15
60
36
95
1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000
40
50
49
104
40
25.7
75
66
0.39
50
150 VCP-W 50
15
60
36
95
50
44
59
130
50
25.7
75
66
0.39
50
150 VCP-W 63
15
60
36
95
63
55
80
164
63
28
75
66
0.42
50
All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz; however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no derating. 4000A fan-cooled rating is available for 3000A circuit breakers. Because the voltage range factor K = 1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated symmetrical interrupting current. Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and the minimum contact parting time as determined from the minimum opening time plus the assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz). The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (It) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA rms asymmetrical total. Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both 2 seconds for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.06-2009. RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E2/T2. These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specied in C37.06-2000.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 029

5.4-3
Table 5.4-1A. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
(Continued)
Identication Drawout Circuit Breaker Type Mechanical Endurance Rated Values Capacitance Current Switching Capability (Reference C37.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-2005) Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching Isolated Shunt Capacitor Bank Current Cable-Charging Current Capacitor Bank Current Out-of-Phase Switching
i ii 1
Continuous Current
Voltage = 1.44 x V
Inrush Frequency
Current = 0.25 x I
Operating Duty
Inrush Current
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Units
A rms 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000
Duty Cycle
No-Load Operations
Class
A rms 310
Class
A rms 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600
Class
A rms 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600 75630 751000 751600
kA Peak 6
kHz
kV rms 7
kA rms 6.3
50 VCP-W 25
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
C2
C2
0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.3
50 VCP-W 40
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
310
C2
C2
10
50 VCP-W 50
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
310
C2
C2
12.5
50 VCP-W 63
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
C2
15.8
75 VCP-W 40
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
C2
12
10
75 VCP-W 50
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2
C2
12
12.5
150 VCP-W 25
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
C2 C2 C1 C2 C2 C1 C2 C2 C1 C2
C2 C2 C1 C2 C2 C1 C2 C2 C1 C2
22
6.3
150 VCP-W 40
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
22
10
150 VCP-W 50
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
22
12.5
150 VCP-W 63
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000
C2
7.525
22
15.8
Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening. All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations.
CA08104001E
5.4-4

September 2011
Sheet 05 030
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay
Rated Maximum Voltage Divided by K
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Circuit Breaker Type Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class
Voltage
Insulation Level Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2 x 50 s) Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min.)
Current
Rated Transient Recovery Voltage
Current Values Maximum Sym. Interrupting Capability 3-Second ShortTime Current Carrying Capability Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary)
K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current
2.7 K Times Rated ShortCircuit Current 2.7 KI kA Crest 97 97
1.6 K Times Rated ShortCircuit Current
V kV MVA kV Class Class rms 50 VCP-WND 250 50 VCP-W 250 50 VCP-W 350 75 VCP-W 500 150 VCP-W 500 150 VCP-W 750 150 VCP-W 1000

I E2 K kV kV kA kV T2 rms Crest Amp rms Crest S 60 60 1200 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 29 29 8.9 8.9 50 50
Y kV/S Cycles Sec. ms 0.2 0.2 5 5 2 2 300 300
V/K kV rms
KI kA rms
KI kA rms 36 36
1.6 KI kA rms S asym. 58 58 1.2 1.2
4.16 4.16
250 250
4.76 1.24 19 4.76 1.24 19
3.85 36 3.85 36
4.16
350
4.76 1.19 19
60
41
8.9
50
0.2
300
4.0
49
49
132
78
1.2
7.2
500
8.25 1.25 36
95
33
15.5
60
0.29
300
6.6
41
41
111
66
1.2
13.8
500 15
1.30 36
95
18
28
75
0.42
300
11.5
23
23
62
37
1.2
13.8
750 15
1.30 36
95
28
28
75
0.42
300
11.5
36
36
97
58
1.2
13.8
1000 15
1.30 36
95
37
28
75
0.42
300
11.5
48
48
130
77
1.2
For capacitor switching, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2. 5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed. For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an operating voltage V (Rated Short-Circuit Current) Isc = Vo But not to exceed KI. Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage Isc = 1.15 V (Rated Short-Circuit Current) Vo
3-cycle rating available, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2. Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula: T (seconds) = Y
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current) 2 Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker
16
But not to exceed KI. The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the operating voltage. 4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details. E2 RRRV = 1.137 -----T2
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula. For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements. For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2. Included for reference only. Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical interrupting capability, both at specied operating voltage.
17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers
Table 5.4-1B. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K > 1)
Identication Rated Values Related Required Capabilities
Rated Voltage Range Factor
Rated Short-Circuit Current (at Rated Maximum kV) Rated Crest Voltage
Rated Maximum Voltage
Rated Interrupting Time
Nominal Voltage Class
Rated Reclosing Time
Rated Time to Crest
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage
Rated Continuous Current at 60 Hz
September 2011
Sheet 05 031

5.4-5
Table 5.4-1C. Available 27/38 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards
Identication Circuit Breaker Type Rated Values Voltage Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class Rated Voltage Range Factor Rated Permissible Tripping Delay Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min.) Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2 x 50 s) Current Rated Transient Recovery Voltage Related Required Capabilities Current Values Rated Maximum Voltage Divided by K Maximum Sym. Interrupting Capability 3-Second ShortTime Current Carrying Capability Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary) Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated Short-Circuit Current (at Rated Maximum kV) Rated Crest Voltage
Rated Time to Crest
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage
K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current
2.7 K Times Rated ShortCircuit Current 2.7 KI kA Crest 43 60 68 108 43 95 68 85
1.6 K Times Rated ShortCircuit Current
V kV MVA kV K kV kV Class Class rms rms Crest Amp 270 VCP-W 27 750 270 VCP-W 27 1000 270 VCP-W 27 1250 270 VCP-W 27 40 380 VCP-W 34.5 16 380 VCP-W 34.5 21 380 VCP-W 34.5 25 380 VCP-W 34.5 32 380 VCP-W 34.5 40

I E2 T2 kA kV rms Crest S 16 22 25 40 16 21 25 51 51 51 51 71 71 71 105 105 105 105 125 125 125 125
Y kV/S Cycles Sec. ms 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
V/K KI kV rms kA rms 16 22 25 40 16 35 25 31.5
KI kA rms 16 22 25 40 16 35 25 31.5
1.6 KI kA rms S asym. 26 35 40 64 26 56 40 51 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
27 27 27 27 38 38 38 38
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
60 60 60 60 80
125 125 125 125 170 170 170 170
1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 2500 1200 2000 2500
300 27 300 27 300 27 300 27 300 38 300 23 300 38 300 38
1.65 80 1.0 1.0 80 80
31.5 71
38
1.0
80
170
40
71
125
0.64
38
40
40
108
64
1.2
For capacitor switching, refer to Table 5.4-2. 27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed. For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an operating voltage Isc = V (Rated Short-Circuit Current) Vo
3-cycle rating available, refer to Table 5.4-2. Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula: T (seconds) = Y
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current) 2 Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker
But not to exceed KI. Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage V (Rated Short-Circuit Current) Isc = 1.15 Vo But not to exceed KI. The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the operating voltage. 4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details. E2 RRRV = 1.137 -----T2
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula. For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements. For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2. Included for reference only. Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical interrupting capability, both at specied operating voltage. ANSI standard requires 150 kV BIL. All 38 kV ratings are tested to 170 kV BIL. Type 380 VCP-W 40 circuit breaker is not rated for rapid reclosing.
CA08104001E
5.4-6

Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 05 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Industry Leader VCP-WC

Introducing the VCP-WC extra capability medium voltage drawout circuit breaker. Designed to provide all the industry-leading features expected of the VCP-W, plus extra capabilities for those application requirements that go beyond what is usually experienced. The performance enhancement features of the VCP-WC make it an ideal choice for capacitor switching duty, high altitude applications, transformer secondary fault protection, locations with concentrations of rotating machinery or high operating endurance requirements, just to mention a few. Consider these capability enhancements:

Higher voltage ratings with K=1 3-cycle interrupting time Higher switching life Designed and tested to ANSI standards and higher WR xed retrot conguration available

Vacuum Circuit Breaker Design Leadership

Eaton is a world leader in vacuum interrupter and vacuum circuit breaker technology, offering VCP-WC with extra capabilities without sacricing the proven features already standard with other VCP-W circuit breakers. Features such as: Vacuum interrupters with copper-chrome contacts V-Flex non-sliding current transfer system Visible contact erosion indicators Visible contact wipe indicators
Front, functionally grouped controls and indicators Glass-polyester (5/15 kV), or epoxy insulation (27/38 kV) Front, vertically mounted stored energy mechanism Drawout on extension rails Integrally mounted wheels Quality Assurance Certicate
Denite purpose capacitor switching Higher close and latch Faster rate of rise of recovery voltage Higher short-circuit current Higher mechanical endurance Higher insulation level
The Type VCP-WC Breakers are not Interchangeable with Standard VCP-W Breakers. They are Equipped with Different Code Plates and Taller Front Panels.
Table 5.4-2. Extra Capability Type VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1
9 10
Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2 x 50 s)
Identication Circuit Breaker Type
Rated Values Voltage Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min.)
Current Short-Circuit Current
Maximum Permissible Tripping Delay
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV)
% DC Component (Idc)
Maximum Voltage (V)
Voltage Range Factor
Asym. Interrupting (It)
Closing and Latching Capability
12 13
50 VCP-W 25C
kV K kV rms rms 5.95 1 24
kV Peak 75
A rms
kA rms % Total 50 75 75 75
kA rms 31 36 36 58
kA kA ms Seconds Peak rms 97 25 50 2.0
kV/s 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 1.1
A rms 400 & 630 1000 250 630 1000 250 630 1000 250 250 630 1000 250
A rms 400 & 630 1000 630 1000 630 1000 200, 1600 200, 1600 200, 1600 630 1000
kA Peak
Inrush Frequency
Capacitor Bank Current
Inrush Current
11
Short-Time Current for 3 Seconds Interrupting Time
Continuous Current at 60 Hz
Sym. Interrupting at Voltage (Isc)
Capacitor Switching Ratings General Denite Purpose Purpose Back-to-Back Isolated Capacitor Switching Shunt Capacitor Bank Current
Mechanical Endurance
kHz
No-Load Operations
14
50 VCP-W 40C 5.95 1 24 75
1200 25 2000 3000 1200 40 2000 3000 1200 50 2000 3000 1200 63 2000 3000 1200 50 2000 3000 1200 25 2000 3000 1200 40 2000 3000 1200 50 2000 3000 1200 63 2000 3000
20 & 20 6.5 & 5.5 10,000 10,000 2.7 18 5,000 15 18 15 18 7.7 7.7 7.7 15 18 3.5 2.7 3.5 2.7 465 465 465 3.5 2.7 10,000 10,000 5,000 10,000 10,000 5,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 5,000
139
40
50
2.0
15 16 17 18 19
50 VCP-W 50C
5.95 1
24
75
57 57 52 62
64 64 62 83
139
50
50
2.0
50 VCP-W 63C
5.95 1
24
75
175
63
50
2.0
75 VCP-W 50C
10.3 1
42
95
57 57 52 50 75 75 75
64 64 62 31 36 36 58
139
50
50
2.0
0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.8 1.1
150 VCP-W 25C
17.5 1
42
95
97 25
50
2.0
400 & 600 400 & 600 20 & 20 6.5 & 5.5 10,000 10,000 2.7 18 1000 1000 5,000 250 630 1000 250 630 1000 250 250 630 1000 630 1000 200, 1600 200, 1600 200, 1600 15 18 15 18 7.7 7.7 7.7 3.5 2.7 3.5 2.7 465 465 465 10,000 10,000 5,000 10,000 10,000 5,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
150 VCP-W 40C
17.5 1
42
95
139
40
50
2.0
150 VCP-W 50C
17.5 1
42
95
20 21
57 57 52 62
64 64 62 83
139
50
50
2.0
150 VCP-W 63C
15
42
95
175
63
50
2.0
Note: Refer to Page 5.4-7 for footnotes.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 033

Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
5.4-7
Table 5.4-2. VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1 (Continued)

Identication Circuit Breaker Type Rated Values Voltage Insulation Level Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (1.2 x 50 s) Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min.) Current Short-Circuit Current Maximum Permissible Tripping Delay Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) Capacitor Switching Ratings General Purpose Cable Isolated Charging Shunt Current Capacitor Bank Current Denite Purpose Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching Mechanical Endurance
i ii 1
% DC Component (Idc)
Asym. Interrupting (It)
Maximum Voltage (V)
Voltage Range Factor
Closing and Latching Capability
Short-Time Current for 3 Seconds
Interrupting Time
Continuous Current at 60 Hz
Sym. Interrupting at Voltage (Isc)
Inrush Frequency
Capacitor Bank Current
Inrush Current
2
No-Load Operations 5,000 5,000 5,000
kV K kV rms rms 270 VCP-W 25C 27 270 VCP-W 32C 27 270 VCP-W 40C 27 380 VCP-W 16C 38 380 VCP-W 25C 38 380 VCP-W 32C 38 1 1 1 1 1 1 60 60 60 80 80 80
kV A Peak rms 125 125 125 170 170 170 1200 1600 1200 1600 1200 1600 1200 2000 1200 2000
kA rms Total 25 31.5 40 16 25
kA kA kA rms Peak rms 36 40 49 85 100 112 25
ms Seconds
kV/s
A rms
A rms
A rms
kA Peak 20 20 20
kHz
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
75 55 50 75 65 57
50
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
1.1 1.1 1.1 0.7 1.3 0.7 1.3 0.7 1.3 0.7 1.3 0.7
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
400 400 400 250 250 & 1000 250 250 & 1000
400 400 400
4.2 4.2 4.2
31.5 50 40 16 25 31.5 50 50 50 50
23.3 50 34.0 75 42.5 91
250 20 4.4 10,000 250 & 1000 20 & 20 5 & 5 250 20 4.4 10,000 250 & 1000 20 & 20 5 & 5 20 20 & 20 20 & 20
1200 33.1 2000 2500 3000FC 1200 40 2000 2500 3000FC
250 250 250 & 1000 250 & 1000 250 & 1000 250 & 1000

10,000 4.4 5&5 5&5
380 VCP-W 40C 38
80
170
63
53.5 107
40
50
2.0
10,000
Except as noted. 3 cycles. Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for more information. 4000A FC rating available. Breaker tested to 2700A single bank switching for momentary load (thermal derating must consider harmonic content of current waveform). Breaker tested to 1270A back to back switching for momentary load (thermal derating must consider harmonic content of current waveform). C37.04.a-2003 Class C2 at 15 kV. Close and Latch Current for 1200A Type 150 VCP-W 25C is proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated. Capacitor Switching Ratings are proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated. 2.5 seconds. 1.6 second. 1 second. 2000A FC to 3000A. 2500A FC to 3000A. Contact Eaton for capacitor switching ratings.
Note: 38 kV, 2500A and 3000A WC breakers are not rated for rapid reclosing.
CA08104001E
5.4-8

Technical DataType VCP-WG and VCP-WRG Generator Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 05 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type VCP-WG Generator Circuit Breakers
The VCP-WG (drawout) and VCP-WRG (xed) circuit breakers meet, and even exceed, the rigorous service duty requirements for generator circuit applications as dened by IEEE. Eatons VCP-WG and VCP-WRG generator breakers are available in two frame sizes. The 29.00-inch frame (29.00 inches wide with front cover on) has ratings up to 15 kV, 63 kA and 3000A (4000A with forced-air cooling). The 31.00-inch frame (31.00 inches wide with front cover on) has ratings up to 15 kV, 75 kA and 4000A (5000A with forced-air cooling). The 31.00inch frame is also available in a xed version with ratings up to 15 kV, 75 kA and 6000A (7000A with forcedair cooling). Count on Eatons innovative technology to handle high continuous AC current and voltage, then safely switch through extreme out-of-phase voltages and high-stress asymmetrical currents using clean and green vacuum interruption without fail for over 10,000 normal operations. Eatons VCP-WG generator circuit breakers meet the strict service duty requirements set forth by IEEE for generator circuit applications, including: Generator circuit conguration High continuous current levels Unique fault current conditions Transformer-fed faults Generator-fed faults Unique voltage conditions Very fast RRRV Out-of-phase switching

High Continuous Current Levels

Generator circuit breakers must be able to handle high continuous current levels without overheating. VCP-WG drawout circuit breakers are designed to reliably operate up to 4000A with natural air convection cooling, and up to 5000A with suitable enclosure fan cooling during overload conditions. VCP-WRG xed circuit breakers are designed to reliably operate up to 6000A with natural air convection cooling and up to 7000A with suitable enclosure fan cooling during overload conditions.
Unique Fault Current Conditions

System-source (aka, transformer-fed) faults (see Figure 5.4-1, fault location a) can be extremely high. The full energy of the power system feeds the fault, and the low impedance of the fault current path does very little to limit the fault current. Eatons type VCP-WG Generator Circuit Breakers are ideal for interrupting such high fault currents because they have demonstrated high interruption ratings up to 75 kA, with high DC fault content up to 75%, as proven by high power laboratory tests. Generator-source (aka, generator-fed) faults, see Figure 5.4-1, fault location b) can cause a severe condition called Delayed Current Zero, see Figure 5.4-2). The high ratio of inductive reactance to resistance (X/R ratio) of the system can cause the DC component of the fault current to exceed 100%. The asymmetrical fault current peak becomes high enough and its decay becomes slow enough that the natural current zero is delayed for several cycles. The circuit breaker experiences longer arcing time and more electrical, thermal and mechanical stress during the interruption. The IEEE standard requires verication that the circuit breaker can interrupt under these severe conditions. Eatons VCP-WG generator circuit breakers have demonstrated their ability to interrupt three-phase fault current levels up to 135% DC content under delayed current zero conditions.
VCP-WG Breaker (Front View)
VCP-WG Breaker (Rear View)
Why generator circuit breakers?

Specially rated generator breakers typically should be used on generator applications 10,000 kW and above A generator circuit breaker, properly rated and tested to the appropriate industry standard, can protect the generator from damage, or even complete failure, that could occur when feeding a faulted transformer, and also can protect the transformer, in the event that a fault should occur in the generator
Generator Circuit Conguration

The transformer and generator can be in close proximity to the circuit breaker. See Figure 5.4-1. Applications with high continuous current levels require connections with large conductors of very low impedance. This construction causes unique fault current and voltage conditions as shown in Figure 5.4-2.
Generator Circuit Breaker High Voltage Circuit Breaker
Generator circuits have unique characteristics that require specially designed and tested circuit breakers. The IEEE developed the special industry standard C37.013 and amendment C37.013a-2007 to address these characteristics. Eaton Corporation has dedicated years of research, design, enhancement and testing to create Eatons family of generator breakers.
Generator
Step-up Transformer
Figure 5.4-1. Generator Circuit Application
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 035

5.4-9
Unique Voltage Conditions

Generator circuits typically produce very fast rates of rise of recovery voltage (RRRV) due to the high natural frequency and low impedance and very low stray capacitance. VCP-WG generator circuit breakers are designed to interrupt fault current levels with very fast RRRV in accordance with IEEE standard C37.013 and C37.013a. VCP-WG generator circuit breakers have a distinct ability to perform under out-of-phase conditions when the generator and power system voltages are not in sync. The voltages across the open contacts can be as high as twice the rated line-to-ground voltage of the system. The IEEE standard requires demonstration by test that the generator circuit breaker can switch under specied out-of-phase conditions.
8 Current pu 6 4 2 0 -2 Contact Parting
i ii 1 2 3 4
Idc
-4 -6 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
5 6 7
Versatility in Application
Eatons generator vacuum circuit breakers are available in drawout (VCP-WG) or xed (VCP-WRG) congurations to provide for superior performance and versatility. Many industrial and commercial power systems now include small generators as a local source of power. New applications are arising as a result of the de-regulation of the utility industry, and the construction of smaller packaged power plants. Eatons generator breakers interrupt large short-circuit currents in a small three-pole package. Typical applications include:

Figure 5.4-2. Generator-Fed Faults Can Experience Delayed Current Zero, Where the High Inductance to Resistance Ratio of the System Can Cause the DC Component of the Fault Current to Exceed 100%
10.00 (254.0) 29.00 (736.6)
10.00 (254.0) 30.00 (762.0)
10.00 (254.0) 29.00 (736.6)
10.00 (254.0) 26.60 (675.6)
8 9 10 11
31.40 (797.6)
31.20 (792.5)
Electric utilities: fossil, hydro and wind power Packaged power plants Industrial companies using combined cycle/combustion turbine plants Government and military Commercial institutions Petrochemical and process industries Forestry, pulp and paper Mining, exploration and marine
24.60 (624.8) 29-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG
24.60 (624.8) 29-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
12 13
10.00 (254.0) 30.60 (777.2)
10.00 (254.0) 30.00 (762.0)
10.00 (254.0) 30.60 (777.2)
10.00 (254.0) 26.80* (680.7)
14 15
The VCP-WG is the worlds generator circuit breaker for reliable and robust power generation protection.
39.60 (1005.8)
39.30 (998.2)
16 17
24.60 (624.8) 31-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG
*6000 A has a depth of 28.50 (723.9) 31-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
18 19
Figure 5.4-3. Type VCP-WG (Drawout) and Type VCP-WRG (Fixed) Circuit Breakers
20 21
5.4-10

September 2011
Sheet 05 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings

Table 5.4-3. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX)
Description Units Short-Circuit Current (Isc) 50 kA 63 kA 29.00 (736.6) FIX 1200 2000 3000 4000 19 60 50 47 50 75 30 50 3 137 25 130 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 25 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 31.00 (787.4) DO 4000 5000 19 60 83 47 50 75 54 50 2.3 137 25 130 31.5 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 25 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 31.00 (787.4) FIX 4000 5000 6000 6300 7000 19 60 83 47 50 75 54 50 2.3 137 25 130 31.5 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 25 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 29.00 (736.6) DO 1200 2000 3000 4000 19 60 50 47 63 75 30 63 3 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 31.5 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 29.00 (736.6) FIX 1200 2000 3000 4000 19 60 50 47 63 75 30 63 3 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 31.5 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 31.00 (787.4) DO 4000 5000 19 60 83 47 63 75 54 63 1.4 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 31.5 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 31.00 (787.4) FIX 4000 5000 6000 6300 7000 19 60 83 47 63 75 54 63 1.4 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 31.5 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 75 kA 31.00 (787.4) DO 1200 2000 3000 4000 5000 19 60 83 47 75 63 54 75 1 206 40 130 50 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 37.5 6.1 3.3 13 4.5 31.00 (787.4) FIX 1200 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 6300 7000 19 60 83 47 75 63 54 75 1 206 40 130 50 110 3.0 9.2 3.1 10,000 10,000 37.5 6.1 3.3 13 4.5
Maximum Voltage (V): 5 kV

Frame in Inches (mm) (see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9) Ratings Assigned Continuous Current A rms 29.00 (736.6) DO 1200 2000 3000 4000 Dielectric Strength Power frequency withstand voltage Lightning impulse withstand voltage Interrupting Time Closing Time Short-Circuit Current Asymmetrical current interrupting capability Ref: Minimum opening time Short-time current carrying capability Duration of short-time current Closing and Latching Capability First Generator-Source Symmetrical Current Interrupting Capability First Generator-Source Asymmetrical Current Interrupting Capability Second Generator-Source Symmetrical Current Interrupting Capability Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical Current Interrupting Capability Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V) Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak (T2 = 0.62 x V) Load Current Switching Endurance Capability No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability 90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V) 90 out-of-phase inherent TRV Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 2.6 x V) Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak (T2 = 0.89 x V)

kV rms kV peak ms ms kA rms % DC ms kA rms sec kA peak kA rms % DC kA rms % DC kV / s kV peak s
19 60 50 47 50 75 30 50 3 137 25 130 3.0 9.2 3.1
Operations 10,000 Operations 10,000 kA kV rms kV / s kV peak s 25 6.1 3.3 13 4.5
Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure. TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.
Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz. Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO. Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007. Note: Test certicates available.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 037

5.4-11
15 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings

Table 5.4-4. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX) (Continued)
Description Units Short-Circuit Current (Isc) 50 kA 63 kA 29.00 (736.6) FIX 1200 2000 3000 4000 36 95 50 47 50 75 30 50 3 137 25 130 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 25 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 31.00 (787.4) DO 4000 5000 36 95 83 47 50 75 54 50 2.3 137 25 130 31.5 110 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 25 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 31.00 (787.4) FIX 4000 5000 6000 6300 7000 36 95 83 47 50 75 54 50 2.3 137 25 130 31.5 110 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 25 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 29.00 (736.6) DO 1200 2000 3000 4000 36 95 50 47 63 75 30 63 3 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 31.5 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 29.00 (736.6) FIX 1200 2000 3000 4000 36 95 50 47 63 75 30 63 3 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 31.5 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 31.00 (787.4) DO 4000 5000 36 95 83 47 63 75 54 63 1.4 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 31.5 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 31.00 (787.4) FIX 4000 5000 6000 6300 7000 36 95 83 47 63 75 54 63 1.4 173 31.5 130 40 110 3.4 27.6 9.3 10,000 10,000 31.5 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 75 kA 31.00 (787.4) DO 1200 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 95 83 47 75 63 54 75 1 206 40 130 50 110 3.4 30.9 9.3 10,000 10,000 37.5 18.4 3.3 39 13.4 31.00 (787.4) FIX 1200 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 6300 7000 36 95 83 47 75 63 54 75 1 206 40 130 50 110 3.4 30.9 9.3 10,000 10,000 37.5 18.4 3.3 39 13.4
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Maximum Voltage (V): 15 kV

Frame in Inches (mm) (see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9) Ratings Assigned Continuous Current A rms 29.00 (736.6) DO 1200 2000 3000 4000 Dielectric Strength Power frequency withstand voltage Lightning impulse withstand voltage Interrupting Time Closing Time Short-Circuit Current Asymmetrical current interrupting capability Ref: Minimum opening time Short-time current carrying capability Duration of short-time current Closing and Latching Capability First Generator-Source Symmetrical Current Interrupting Capability First Generator-Source Asymmetrical Current Interrupting Capability Second Generator-Source Symmetrical Current Interrupting Capability Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical Current Interrupting Capability Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V) Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak (T2 = 0.62 x V) Load Current Switching Endurance Capability No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability 90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V) 90 out-of-phase inherent TRV Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 2.6 x V) Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak (T2 = 0.89 x V)

kV rms kV peak ms ms kA rms % DC ms kA rms s kA peak kA rms % DC kA rms % DC kV / s kV peak s
36 95 50 47 50 75 30 50 3 137 25 130 3.4 27.6 9.3
Operations 10,000 Operations 10,000 kA kV rms kV / s kV peak s 25 18.4 3.3 39 13.4
Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure. TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.
Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz. Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO. Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007. Note: Test certicates available.
CA08104001E
5.4-12

Technical DataCircuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 05 038
i ii 1 2 3 4
Type VCP-W Circuit Breaker Operating Times

The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break) are shown in Table 5.4-5. Table 5.4-5. Closing Time and Opening Time
Rated Control Voltage 48V, 125V, 250 Vdc 120V, 240 Vac 120V or 240 Vac capacitor trip Optionalundervoltage trip release 48V, 125V, 250 Vdc Breaker Rating All All All All Closing Time Milliseconds 4560 4560 Opening Time Milliseconds Standard 5-Cycle Breaker Optional 3-Cycle Breaker 3045 2641 3045 3038 2638 3045
Figure 5.4-4 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with applicable VCP-W circuit breaker timings.
Clearing Time
5 6
Contact Parting Time
Interrupting Time Standard: 83 ms (5 Cycle) Optional Available: 50 ms (3 Cycle)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
52-1

Maximum Contact Parting Time = 38 ms (2-1/4 Cycle) Based on Minimum Tripping Delay Equal to 8 ms (1/2 Cycle) Tripping Delay Time 8 ms (1/2 Cycle) Minimum Delay 2 sec = (120 Cycle) Maximum Delay Protective Relay Operating Time Auxiliary Relay Operating Time Opening Time 3045 ms for 5 Cycle VCP-W 3038 ms for 3 Cycle VCP-W Shunt Trip Operating Time Mechanism Operating Time Arcing Time 517 ms
ShortCircuit Begins
Rated Control Voltage Energizes Trip Coil
Main Contacts Parts
Last Pole Clears
Figure 5.4-4. Sequence of Events and Circuit Breaker Operating Times

Times shown are based on 60 Hz. % DC component capability (and asymmetry factor S) depend on the minimum contact parting time. The % DC component capability is 50% (S factor 1.2) for all VCP-W circuit breakers.
10
20
38 ms
30
40
12 ms
50
60
70
80
90
100
Time (ms)
47 ms Dead Time (With Arcing)
Load
52-2
52-1 Opening Time
Arcing Time 7 ms
52 ms 52-2 Closing Time
Source #1
Source #2
52-1 Makes 59 ms
17 18 19 20 21
+ Transfer Initiate Control Supply Trip 52-1 Close 52-2 52-1 b Standard b Contact Transfer Initiate Signal
Dead Bus Time (No Arcing) Approx. 100 ms Total Transfer Time
Figure 5.4-5. Typical Transfer Times Fast Sequential Transfer

Times shown are based on 60 Hz.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 039

Technical DataCircuit Breakers and Switchgear
5.4-13
Application Quick Check

See Table 5.4-7 for application of circuit breakers in a radial system supplied from a single-source transformer. Short-circuit duty was determined using E/X amperes and 1.0 multiplying factor for X/R ratios in the range of 15 to 40.
Rated Short-Time and Close and Latch Currents

No derating is required for short time and close and latch current at lower frequency.
Rated Continuous Current

Because the effective resistance of circuit conductors is less at lower frequency, continuous current through the circuit can be increased somewhat. Table 5.4-8 provides nominal current rating for VCP-W breakers when operated at frequencies below 60 Hz.
i ii 1 2
Usual Service Conditions

Usual service conditions for operation of metal-clad switchgear are as follows: Altitude does not exceed 3300 feet (1000m) Ambient temperature within the limits of 30C and +40C (22F and +104F) The effect of solar radiation is not signicant
Table 5.4-7. Radial System Application Information

Source Transformer MVA Rating Motor Load 100% 0% Up to Up to 50 VCP-W 5 7.5 250 (36 kA) 7.5 10 10 12 10 10 12 15 50 VCP-W 350 (46.9 kA) 75 VCP-W 500 (41.3 kA) 150 VCP-W 750 (35 kA) 150 VCP-W 1000 (46.3 kA) 150 VCP-W 750 (30.4 kA) 150 VCP-W 1000 (40.2 kA) 270 VCP-W 1000 (22 kA) 270 VCP-W 1250 (25 kA) 50 VCP-W 350 (49 kA) 50 VCP-W 250 (33.2 kA) 150 VCP-W 500 (23 kA) 150 VCP-W 500 (22.5 kA) 150 VCP-W 500 (19.6 kA) 270 VCP-W 750 (16 kA) Operating Voltage kV 2.4 4.16 6.6 12 13.8 27
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Applications Above 3300 Feet (1006m)

The rated one-minute power frequency withstand voltage, the impulse withstand voltage, the continuous current rating and the maximum voltage rating must be multiplied by the appropriate correction factor in Table 5.4-9 to obtain modied ratings that must equal or exceed the application requirements.
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
15 20
20 25 30 50
Breaker type and symmetrical interrupting capability at the operating voltage
Applications Above or Below 40C Ambient

Refer to ANSI C37.20.2, Section 8.4 for load current-carrying capabilities under various conditions of ambient temperature and load.
25 30
50
Applications at Frequencies Less Than 60 Hz Rated Short-Circuit Current

Based on series of actual tests performed on Type VCP-W circuit breakers and analysis of these test data and physics of vacuum interrupters, it has been found that the current interruption limit for Type VCP-W circuit breakers is proportional to the square root of the frequency. Table 5.4-6 provides derating factors, which must be applied to breaker interrupting current at various frequencies.
Table 5.4-6. Derating Factors
Interrupting Current Derating Factors 50 Hz None 25 Hz 0.65 16 Hz 0.52 12 Hz 0.45
Also includes 50VCPW-ND250. Transformer impedance 6.5% or more. All other transformer impedances are 5.5% or more.
Table 5.4-8. Current Ratings

Rated Continuous Nominal Current at Current at 60 Hz Frequency Below 60 Hz 50 Hz 25 Hz 16 Hz 12 Hz 1200A 2000A 3000A 1243 2075 3119 1410 2374 3597 1519 2573 3923 1589 2703 4139
Table 5.4-9. Altitude Derating Factors

Altitude Above Altitude Correction Factor to Sea Level in be Applied to: Feet (m) Voltage Rated Continuous Current 3300 (1006) (and Below) 4000 (1219) 5000 (1524) 6000 (1829) 6600 (2012) 7000 (2137) 8000 (2438) 9000 (2743) 10,000 (3048) 12,000 (3658) 13,200 (4023) 14,000 (4267) 16,000 (4877) 16,400 (5000) 18,000 (5486) 20,000 (6096) 1.0 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.75 0.72 0.70 0.65 0.64 0.61 0.56 1.0 0.995 0.991 0.987 0.985 0.98 0.97 0.965 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.935 0.925 0.92 0.91 0.90
Power Frequency and Impulse Withstand Voltage Ratings

No derating is required for lower frequency.
CTs, VTs, Relays and Instruments

Application at frequency other than rated frequency must be veried for each device on an individual basis.
CA08104001E
5.4-14

Technical DataSwitchgear
September 2011
Sheet 05 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Unusual Service Conditions

Applications of metal-clad switchgear at other than usual altitude or temperature, or where solar radiation is signicant, require special consideration. Other unusual service conditions that may affect design and application include:
Maintenance shall consist of adjusting, cleaning, lubricating, tightening, etc., as recommended by the circuit breaker instruction book. Continuous current switching assumes opening and closing rated continuous current at rated maximum voltage with power factor between 80% leading and 80% lagging. Inrush current switching ensures a closing current equal to 600% of rated continuous current at rated maximum voltage with power factor of 30% lagging or less, and an opening current equal Table 5.4-10. Breaker Operations Information
Circuit Breaker Ratings Rated Maximum Voltage kV rms Rated Continuous Current Amperes Rated Short-Circuit Current kA rms, sym.
to rated continuous current at rated maximum voltage with power factor between 80% leading and 80% lagging. In accordance with ANSI C37.06, if a short-circuit operation occurs before the completion of the listed switching operations, maintenance is recommended and possible functional part replacement may be necessary, depending on previous accumulated duty, fault magnitude and expected future operations.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Exposure to salt air, hot or humid climate, excessive dust, dripping water, falling dirt, or other similar conditions Unusual transportation or storage conditions Switchgear assemblies when used as the service disconnecting means Installations accessible to the general public Exposure to seismic shock Exposure to nuclear radiation
Maximum Number of Operations Between Servicing No-Load Rated Mechanical Continuous Current Switching 10,000 5000 5000 2500 1500 10,000 5000 5000 2500 1500 Inrush Current Switching 750 400 400 100 100
Load Current Switching

Table 5.4-10 showing number of operations is a guide to normal maintenance for circuit breakers operated under usual service conditions for most repetitive duty applications including isolated capacitor bank switching and shunt reactor switching, but not for arc furnace switching. The numbers in the table are equal to or in excess of those required by ANSI C37.06.
4.76, 8.25, 15 1200, 2000 4.76, 8.25, 15 3000 4.76, 15 All 27 38
33 kA and below 2000 All 1000 37 kA and above 1000 All All 500 250
All All
Each operation is comprised of one closing plus one opening.
Table 5.4-11. Heat Loss in Watts at Full Rating, at 60 Hz

Type of Switchgear Assembly VCP-W VCP-W Breaker Rating 5, 15, and 27 kV 38 kV 50W 100W 60W 450W 892W 250W 1200A 600W 850W 2000A 1400W 1700W 2500A 2300W 3000A 2100W 3800W 4000A Fan Cooled 3700W
Other Components
Each CT, standard accuracy Each CT, high accuracy Each VT CPT single-phase, 25 kVA CPT single-phase, 45 kVA Space heatereach
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 041

Technical DataAssembly Ratings
5.4-15
Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly Ratings

VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is available for application at voltages up to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz. Refer to the table below for complete list of available ratings. Table 5.4-12. Standard VCP-W (Non-Arc-Resistant) Metal-Clad Switchgear Ratings Per IEEE C37.20.2-1999
Rated Maximum Voltage (Ref.) Rated Voltage Range Factor K (Ref.) Rated ShortCircuit Current I kA rms 1 1.24 1 1.19 1 1 8.25 15 1.25 1 1.3 1 1.3 1 1.3 1 1 27 1 1 1 1 1 38 1 1 1 1.65 1 38 1 1 1 1.65 1

i ii 1 2
Rated Momentary Short-Circuit Current Withstand (10-Cycle) (167 ms) 2.7 *K*I kA Crest 68 97 108 132 135 170 111 135 62 68 97 108 130 135 170 43 60 68 85 108 43 68 85 95 108 43 68 85 95 108 1.6 *K* I (Ref. only) kA rms Asym. 40 58 64 78 80 101 66 80 37 40 58 64 77 80 101 26 35 40 51 64 26 40 51 56 64 26 40 51 56 64 Rated Main Bus Continuous Current Rated Short-Time Short-Circuit Current Withstand (2-Second) K*I Amperes 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 kA rms Sym. 25 36 40 49 50 63 41 50 23 25 36 40 48 50 63 16 22 25 31.5 40 16 25 31.5 35 40 16 25 31.5 35 40
Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage, 60 Hz, 1 Minute kV rms 19 Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage [LIWV] (BIL) kV Peak 60
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kV rms 4.76
25 29 40 41 50 63 33 50 18 25 28 40 37 50 63 16 22 25 31.5 40 16 25 31.5 23 40 16 25 31.5 23 40
36 36
95 95
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
60
125
1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700
80
150
1200, 2000, 2500 1200, 2000, 2500 1200, 2000, 2500 1200, 2000, 2500 1200, 2000, 2500
80
170
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC circuit breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. In such cases, switchgear assembly ratings as given in this table will apply. Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability. Circuit breaker requires forced air cooling to carry 4000A at 4.76, 8.25 and 15 kV, and 3000A at 38 kV. 27 kV 2500A and 2700A main bus ratings are available in two-high design congurations only. Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices may limit the duration to a value less than 2 seconds. These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999 and ANSI C37.06-2000. These values exceed 1.55*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999. This is a standard IEEE C37.20.2 rating for 38 kV Class of switchgear. 170 kV LIWV (BIL) rating available as an option, except when a control power transformer is included.
CA08104001E
5.4-16

Technical DataAssembly Ratings
September 2011
Sheet 05 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Assembly Ratings

VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant switchgear is available for application at voltages up to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz. Refer to the table below for complete list of available ratings. Table 5.4-13. VacClad-W Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear
Rated (Ref.) Maximum Rated Voltage Voltage Range Factor K (Ref.) Rated ShortCircuit Current I Ratings per IEEE C37.20.2-1999 Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage, 60 Hz, 1 Minute kV rms
19
Enclosure Internal Arc Withstand Rated Short-Time ShortCircuit Current Withstand (2-Second) K*I Rated Momentary Short-Circuit Current Withstand (10-Cycle) (167 ms) Accessibility Rated Arc ShortType Circuit Withstand Current Rated Arc Duration
Rated Main Bus Continuous Current
2.7 *K*I 1.6 *K* I (Ref. only) kA Crest

68 97 108 132 135 170 111 135 62 68 97 108 130 135 170 43 60 68 85 108 43 68 85 95 108
EEMAC G14-1
IEEE C37.20.7
Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage [LIWV] (BIL) kV Peak

60
Isc kA rms Sym.

25 36 40 49 50 63 41 50 23 25 36 40 48 50 63 16 22 25 31.5 40 16 25 31.5 35 40
2.6*Isc kA Peak
65 93.6 104 127.4 130 170 106.6 130 59.8 65 93.6 104 124.8 130 170 41.6 57.2 65 81.9 104 41.6 65 81.9 91 104
kV rms
kA rms
1 1.24 1 1.19 1 1 25 29 40 41 50 63 33 50 18 25 28 40 37 50 63 16 22 25 31.5 40 16 25 31.5 23 40
Amperes
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
6
4.76
kA rms Sym.
25 36 40 49 50 63 41 50 23 25 36 40 48 50 63 16 22 25 31.5 40 16 25 31.5 35 40
kA rms Asym.
40 58 64 78 80 101 66 80 37 40 58 64 77 80 101 26 35 40 51 64 26 40 51 56 64
Sec.
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
B B B B B B B B B B
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
8.25 15
1.25 1 1.3 1 1.3 1 1.3 1 1
36 36
95 95
1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000
27
1 1 1 1 1
60
125
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000
38
1 1 1 1.65 1
80
150
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC circuit breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. In such cases, switchgear assembly ratings as given in this table will apply. Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability. 515 kV switchgear is supplied with a plenum. 2738 kV switchgear is supplied with arc wall. For plenum requirements at 27 and 38 kV, contact Eaton. Maximum continuous current rating for circuit breaker that can be supplied at 38 kV is 2500A. Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices may limit the duration to a value less than 2 seconds. These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999 and ANSI C37.06-2000. These values exceed 1.55*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999. 27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can be supplied in one-high conguration only.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 043

Technical DataSurge Protection
5.4-17
Surge Protection
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is applied over a broad range of circuits, and is one of the many types of equipment in the total system. The distribution system can be subject to voltage transients caused by lighting or switching surges. Recognizing that distribution system can be subject to voltage transients caused by lighting or switching, the industry has developed standards to provide guidelines for surge protection of electrical equipment. Those guidelines should be used in design and protection of electrical distribution systems independent of the circuit breaker interrupting medium. The industry standards are: ANSI C62 Guides and Standards for Surge Protection IEEE 242Buff Book IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems IEEE 141Red Book Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE C37.20.2 Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear Eatons medium voltage metal-clad and metal-enclosed switchgear that uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied over a broad range of circuits. It is one of the many types of equipment in the total distribution system. Whenever a switching device is opened or closed, certain interactions of the power system elements with the switching device can cause high frequency voltage transients in the system. Due to the wide range of applications and variety of ratings used for different elements in the power systems, a given circuit may or may not require surge protection. Therefore, Eaton does not include surge protection as standard with its metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium voltage switchgear. The user exercises the options as to the type and extent of the surge protection necessary depending on the individual circuit characteristics and cost considerations.
The following are Eatons recommendations for surge protection of medium voltage equipment. Please note these recommendations are valid when using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
RC Snubber and/or ZORC damp internal transformer resonance: The natural frequency of transformer windings can under some circumstances be excited to resonate. Transformer windings in resonance can produce elevated internal voltages that produce insulation damage or failure. An RC Snubber or a ZORC applied at the transformer terminals as indicated above can damp internal winding resonance and prevent the production of damaging elevated internal voltages. This is typically required where rectiers, UPS or similar electronic equipment is on the transformer secondary. 3. Arc-Furnace Transformers Provide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the transformer terminals. 4. MotorsProvide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the motor terminals. For those motors using VFDs, surge protection should be applied and precede the VFD devices as well. 5. GeneratorsProvide station class Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the generator terminals. 6. Capacitor SwitchingNo surge protection is required. Make sure that the capacitors lightning impulse withstand rating is equal to that of the switchgear. 7. Shunt Reactor Switching Provide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the reactor terminals. 8. Motor Starting Reactors or Reduced Voltage Auto-Transformers Provide Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the reactor or RVAT terminals. 9. Switching Underground Cables Surge protection not needed.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Surge Protection Recommendations:

Note: The abbreviation ZORC used in the text below refers to Surge Protection Device manufactured by Strike Technology (Pty) Ltd. An equivalent device offered by other manufacturers, such as Type EHZ by ABB, and Protec Z by Northern Technologies SA can also be used.
1. For circuits exposed to lightning, surge arresters should be applied in line with Industry standard practices. 2. Transformers a. Close-Coupled to medium voltage primary breaker: Provide transients surge protection, such as Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC. The surge protection device selected should be located and connected at the transformer primary terminals or it can be located inside the switchgear and connected on the transformer side of the primary breaker. b. Cable-Connected to medium voltage primary breaker: Provide transient surge protection, such as Surge Arrester in parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC for transformers connected by cables with lengths up to 75 feet. The surge protection device should be located and connected at the transformer terminals. No surge protection is needed for transformers with lightning impulse withstand ratings equal to that of the switchgear and connected to the switchgear by cables at least 75 feet or longer. For transformers with lower BIL, provide surge arrester in parallel with RC Snubber or ZORC.
CA08104001E
5.4-18

September 2011
Sheet 05 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Types of Surge Protection Devices
Figure 5.4-6. Surge Protection Devices Generally surge protective devices should be located as closely as possible to the circuit component(s) that require protection from the transients, and connected directly to the terminals of the component with conductors that are as short and at as possible to minimize the inductance. It is also important that surge protection devices should be properly grounded for effectively shunting high frequency transients to ground. B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems (systems grounded through resistor rated for 10 seconds): Arrester 10-second MCOV capability at 60C, which is obtained from manufacturers data, should be equal to 1.05 x VLL, where VLL is nominal line-to-line service voltage, and 1.05 factor allows for +5% voltage variation above the nominal voltage. C. Ungrounded or Systems Grounded through impedance other than 10-second resistor: Arrester MCOV rating should be equal to 1.05 x VLL/T, where VLL and T are as dened above. Refer to Table 5.4-14 for recommended ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters that are sized in accordance with the above guidelines, when located in Eatons switchgear.
system at normal power frequencies, and minimizing heat dissipation during normal operation. Under high frequency transient conditions, the capacitor offers very low impedance, thus effectively inserting the resistor R in the power system as cable terminating resistor, thus minimizing reection of the steep wave-fronts of the voltage transients and prevents voltage doubling of the traveling wave. The RC Snubber provides protection against high frequency transients by absorbing and damping and the transients. Please note RC Snubber is most effective in mitigating fast-rising transient voltages, and in attenuating reections and resonances before they have a chance to build up, but does not limit the peak magnitude of the transient. Therefore, the RC Snubber alone may not provide adequate protection. To limit peak magnitude of the transient, application of surge arrester should also be considered.
ZORC
A ZORC device consists of parallel combination of Resistor (R) and Zinc Oxide Voltage Suppressor (ZnO), connected in series with a Surge Capacitor. The resistor R is sized to match surge impedance of the load cables, typically 20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless metal-oxide non-linear arrester, set to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where 1 PU = 1.412*(VL-L/1.732). The Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. As with RC Snubber, under normal operating conditions, impedance of the capacitor is very high, effectively isolating the resistor R and ZnO from the system at normal power frequencies, and minimizing heat dissipation during normal operation. Under high frequency transient conditions, the capacitor offers very low impedance, thus effectively inserting the resistor R and ZnO in the power system as cable terminating network, thus minimizing reection of the steep wave-fronts of the voltage transients and prevents voltage doubling of the traveling wave. The ZnO element limits the peak voltage magnitudes. The combined effects of R, ZnO, and Capacitor of the ZORC device provides optimum protection against high frequency transients by absorbing, damping, and by limiting the peak amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts. Please note that the ZORC is not a lightning protection device. If lightning can occur or be induced in the electrical system, a properly rated and applied surge arrester must precede the ZORC.
Surge Arresters
The modern metal-oxide surge arresters are recommended because this latest advance in arrester design ensures better performance and high reliability of surge protection schemes. Manufacturers technical data must be consulted for correct application of a given type of surge arrester. Notice that published arrester MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) ratings are based on 40 or 45C ambient temperature. In general, the following guidelines are recommended for arrester selections, when installed inside Eatons medium voltage switchgear: A. Solidly Grounded Systems: Arrester MCOV rating should be equal to 1.05 x VLL/(1.732 x T), where VLL is nominal line-to-line service voltage, 1.05 factor allows for +5% voltage variation above the nominal voltage according to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating factor to allow for operation at 55C switchgear ambient, which should be obtained from the arrester manufacturer for the type of arrester under consideration. Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0.
Surge Capacitors
Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the magnitude of prospective surge overvoltage, but are ineffective in controlling its rate of rise. Specially designed surge capacitors with low internal inductance are used to limit the rate of rise of this surge overvoltage to protect turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and 0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV and higher.
RC Snubber
A RC Snubber device consists of a non-inductive resistor R sized to match surge impedance of the load cables, typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected in series with a Surge Capacitor C. The Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal operating conditions, impedance of the capacitor is very high, effectively isolating the resistor R from the
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 045

5.4-19
Surge Protection Summary

Minimum protection: Surge Arrester for protection from high overvoltage peaks, or Surge Capacitor for protection from fast-rising transient. Please note that the surge arresters or surge capacitor alone may not provide adequate surge protection from escalating voltages caused by circuit resonance. Note that when applying surge capacitors on both sides of a circuit breaker, surge capacitor on one side of the breaker must be RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate possible virtual current chopping.
Good protection: Surge Arrester in parallel with Surge Capacitor for protection from high overvoltage peaks and fast rising transient. This option may not provide adequate surge protection from escalating voltages caused by circuit resonance. When applying surge capacitors on both sides of a circuit breaker, surge capacitor on one side of the breaker must be RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate possible virtual current chopping.
Better protection: RC Snubber in parallel with Surge Arrester for protection from high frequency transients and voltage peaks. Best protection: ZORC, plus proper surge arrester preceding ZORC where needed for protection against lightning. ZORC provides protection from high frequency voltage transients and limits peak magnitude of the transient to 1 to 2 PU (see ZORC description on Page 5.4-18 for more detail). Surge arrester provides protection from higher voltage peaks resulting from lightning surges.
i ii 1 2 3 4
Table 5.4-14. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2.30 2.40 3.30 4.00 4.16 4.76 4.80 6.60 6.90 7.20 8.32 8.40 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.47 13.20 13.80 14.40 18.00 20.78 22.00 22.86 23.00 24.94 25.80 26.40 33.00 34.50 38.00
CA08104001E
5.4-20

Technical DataSurge Protection and Instrument Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 05 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are used to protect personnel and secondary devices from high voltage, and permit use of reasonable insulation levels for relays, meters and instruments. The secondaries of standard instrument transformers are rated at 5A and/or 120V, 60 Hz.
For ground detection, three VTs connected in Line-to-ground/brokendelta are used. A single VT, when used, can be connected line-to-line (it will provide line-to-line output, for example Vab or Vbc or Vca), or line-to-ground (it will provide line-to-ground output, for example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally, a single VT is used to derive voltage signal for synchronizing or Over Voltage/Under Voltage function.
7.25 inches (184.2 mm). Special zero-sequence transformers with larger windows are also available. The minimum number of current transformers for circuit relaying and instruments is three current transformers, one for each phase or two-phase connected current transformers and one zero-sequence current transformer. Separate sets of current transformers are required for differential relays. The minimum pickup of a ground relay in the residual of three-phase connected current transformers is primarily determined by the current transformer ratio. The relay pickup can be reduced by adding one residual connected auxiliary current transformer. This connection is very desirable on main incoming and tie circuits of low resistance grounded circuits. When utilizing the MP-3000 Motor Protective Relay, it is recommended that the ratio of CT primary rating to the motor full load amperes (CTprim/Motor FLA) is selected to fall between 0.5 to 1.5. Standard accuracy current transformers are normally more than adequate for most standard applications of microprocessor-based protective relays and meters. See Table 5.4-17 for CT accuracy information.
Voltage Transformers
Selection of the ratio for voltage transformers is seldom a question since the primary rating should be equal to or higher than the system line-to-line voltage. The number of potential transformers per set and their connection is determined by the type of system and the relaying and metering required. When two VTs are used, they are typically connected L-L, and provide phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc, Vca) for metering and relaying. When three VTs are used, they are connected line-to-ground, and provide phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca), as well as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc) voltages for metering and relaying. If metering or relaying application requires phase-to-ground voltages, use three VTs, each connected L-G. If not, use of two VTs connected L-L is sufcient.
The current transformer ratio is generally selected so that the maximum load current will read about 70% full scale on a standard 5A coil ammeter. Therefore, the current transformer primary rating should be 140150% of the maximum load current. Maximum system fault current can sometimes inuence the current transformer ratio selection because the connected secondary devices have published one-second ratings. The zero-sequence current transformer is used for sensitive ground fault relaying or self-balancing primary current type machine differential protection. The zero-sequence current transformer is available with a nominal ratio of 50/5 or 100/5 and available opening size for power cables of
Table 5.4-15. Standard Voltage Transformer Ratio Information

Rating-Volts Ratio 2400 20-1 4200 35-1 4800 40-1 7200 60-1 8400 70-1 10800 90-1 12000 100-1 14400 120-1 15600 130-1 18000 150-1 21000 175-1 24000 200-1 27000 225-1 36000 300-1
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 047

Technical DataInstrument Transformers
5.4-21
Table 5.4-16. Standard Voltage Transformer, 60 Hz Accuracy Information

Switchgear kV Class 5 kV BIL 60 Voltage TransformerANSI Accuracy Maximum Number Per Set and Connection 2LL or 3LG 2LL or 3LG 2LL or 3LG Standard Ratios 20, 35, 40 35, 40, 60, 70, 100, 120 90, 100, 120, 130, 150, 175, 200, 225 175, 300 Burdens at 120 Volts W, X, Y 0.3 Z 1.2 M ZZ Burdens at 69.3 Volts W, X 0.3 Y M Z Thermal Rating 55C Connection LL LG LG LL LG LG LL LG LG LL LG LG Volt-Ampere
i ii
700 400 700 1000 550 1000 1000 550 1000 1000 550 1000
1 2 3 4 5
7.5 and 15 27
95
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
125
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
38
170
2LL or 3LG
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
For solidly grounded 4160V system only or any type 2400V system. For solidly grounded system only.
Note: LL = Line-to-line connection. LG = Line-to-ground connection.
Table 5.4-17. Current Transformers, 55C Ambient

CT Ratio (MR = Multi-Ratio) Metering Accuracy Classication At 60 Hz Standard Burden B 0.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 At 60 Hz Standard Burden B 0.5 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 At 60 Hz Standard Burden B 1.8 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 2.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 Relaying Accuracy Classication Minimum Accuracy Required per IEEE C37.20.2 C10 C10 C10 C20 C20
6
Optional High Accuracy Available in VCP-W Switchgear C50 C50 C50 C100 C100 C100 C200 C200 C200 C400 C400 C400 C400 C400 C400 C200 C400 C400 C400
Standard Accuracy Supplied in VCP-W Switchgear C10 C20 C20 C20 C20 C20 C20 C50 C50 C100 C100 C100 C200 C200 C200 C200 C200 C200 C100 C200 C200 C200 C10 C20
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50:5 75:5 100:5 150:5 200:5 250:5 300:5 400:5 500:5 600:5 800:5 1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 2000:5 2500:5 3000:5 4000:5 600:5 MR 1200:5 MR 2000:5 MR 3000:5 MR 50:5 zero sequence 100:5 zero sequence
C20 C50
C50 C50
C100 C100 C100
C100 C100

Not listed in C37.20.2.
Note: Maximum number of CTsTwo sets of standard accuracy or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed in the breaker compartment on each side of the circuit breaker.
CA08104001E
5.4-22

Technical DataControl Equipment
September 2011
Sheet 05 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Control Equipment
Circuit Breaker Control
Eatons VCP-W circuit breaker has a motor charged spring type stored energy closing mechanism. Closing the breaker charges accelerating springs. Protective relays or the control switch will energize a shunt trip coil to release the accelerating springs and open the breaker. This requires a reliable source of control power for the breaker to function as a protective device. Typical AC and DC control schematics for type VCP-W circuit breakers are shown on Pages 5.4-24 and 5.4-25. For AC control, a capacitor trip device is used with each circuit breaker shunt trip to ensure that energy will be available for tripping during fault conditions. A control power transformer is required on the source side of each incoming line breaker. Closing bus tie or bus sectionalizing breakers will require automatic transfer of control power. This control power transformer may also supply other AC auxiliary power requirements for the switchgear. For DC control, it would require a DC control battery, battery charger and an AC auxiliary power source for the battery charger. The battery provides a very reliable DC control source, since it is isolated from the AC power system by the battery charger. However, the battery will require periodic routine maintenance and battery capacity is reduced by low ambient temperature. Any economic comparison of AC and DC control for switchgear should consider that the AC capacitor trip is a static device with negligible maintenance and long life, while the DC battery will require maintenance and replacement at some time in the future.
Auxiliary contacts available for controls or external use from auxiliary switch located on the circuit breaker are typically limited in number by the breaker control requirements as follows: Breakers with AC control voltage: 1NO and 3NC Breakers with DC control voltage: 2NO and 3NC
38 kV Breakers: Each 38 kV breaker can be provided with an additional breaker mounted auxiliary switch, with 5 NO and 5 NC contacts
When additional auxiliary contacts are needed, following options are available:
Another optional switch available is called TOCTruck Operated Switch. This switch is mounted in the cell and operates when the circuit breaker is levered into or out of the operating position. This switch changes its state when breaker is moved from test to connected position and vice versa. The TOC provides 4NO and 5NC contacts. Auxiliary switch contacts are primarily used to provide interlocking in control circuits, switch indicating lights, auxiliary relays or other small loads. Suitability for switching remote auxiliary devices, such as motor heaters or solenoids, may be checked with the interrupting capacity listed in Table 5.4-18. Where higher interrupting capacities are required, an interposing contactor should be specied.
5/15/27 kV Breakers: Each breaker compartment can be provided with up to three Mechanism Operated Cell (MOC) switches, each with 5NO and 4NC contacts. The MOC switches are rotary switches, mounted in the cell, and operated by a plunger on the breaker. Two types of MOC switches can be providedMOC that operates with breaker in connected position only, or MOC that operates with breaker in connected, as well as test position
Signal:
Initiation of Close Signal C Closing Time t = 45 60 ms
Initiation of Trip Signal T Closed
VCP-W Circuit Breaker Main Contacts
Breaker Auxiliary Switch a Contact Breaker b Switch b Contact
Open Opening Time 45 ms If Interrupting Time = 83 ms t 3 ms b Closed Open e
t 3 ms
a Makes t -9 ms to -3 ms
a Closed t +4 ms to +10 ms Open
Figure 5.4-7. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times Table 5.4-18. Auxiliary Switch Contacts Interrupting Capacities
Type Auxiliary Switch Continuous Control Circuit Voltage Current 120 Vac 240 Vac 48 Vdc Amperes 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 16 16 16 16 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Relays
Microprocessor-based or solid-state relays would generally require DC power or reliable uninterruptible AC supply for their logic circuits.
Non-inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

Breaker Auxiliary Switch 20 TOC Switch 20 MOC Switch 20 Breaker Auxiliary Switch 20 TOC Switch 20 MOC Switch 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5
Auxiliary Switches
Optional circuit breaker and cell auxiliary switches are available where needed for interlocking or control of auxiliary devices. Typical applications and operation are described in Figure 5.4-7 and Table 5.4-18. Breaker auxiliary switches and MOC switches are used for breaker open/ close status and interlocking.
Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 049

Technical DataControl Equipment
5.4-23
Table 5.4-19. VCP-W Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power Requirements
Rated Control Voltage 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac Spring Charging Motor Inrush Amperes 36.0 16.0 9.2 16.0 9.2 Run Amperes 9 4 2 4 2 Average Run Time, Sec. 6 6 6 6 6 Close or Trip Amperes UV Trip mA Maximum 200 80 40 Voltage Range Close 3856 100140 200280 104127 208254 Trip 2856 70140 140280 104127 208254 Indicating Light Amperes 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
i ii 1 2
16 7 4 6 3
Table 5.4-20. Control Power TransformersSingle-Phase, 60 Hz

Taps +7-1/2% 2580 4470 5160 7740 9030 13405 14190 14835 24725 37088

Rated 2400 4160 4800 7200 8400 12470 13200 13800 23000 34500
7-1/2% 2220 3850 4400 6680 7770 11535 12210 12765 21275 31913
Secondary Volts 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120 240/120
kVA
kV Class 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 27 38
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 5, 10, 15 15, 25
Line-to-line connection only available. Refer to Eaton for other voltages and kVA ratings. 150 kV BIL.
CA08104001E
5.4-24

Technical DataControl Schematics
September 2011
Sheet 05 050
i
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker DC Control Schematic
ii 1 2
P (+) CS C CS T PR
Spring Charged Indicating Light
WL
GL
RL
4 5 6 7 8 9
1
DC Source
9UV 6
11
UV
1 3 LS1 bb M PS2 bb 4 24
13
7 Y
7 51 53
8 55
9 57
10 61
9A 10A
T S_ TCSSL TRCS_ TRCS LOCATI LOCAT AT ATI TIO T 51N ON
12
52
56
54
58
62
SR b LC Y 14 bb aa b ST 1
18
a
17
16
15
22
ST 2 a
10
19
TRCS_ TRCS TCSSL TCSS S_ AT _ _51N TION TIO T ION ON
N (-)
Not Available when Second Trip Coil Option is Chosen
13
Options
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker AC Control Schematic
10 11 12
AC Source
WL
CS C T
GL RL
PR 9UV 11
UV 9UV 14
T O TCSS TRCS_ TRCS LOCATI LOCAT S_ ATI AT TION TIO 51N ON
13 14 15 16
10UV
AC
1 3 2
(+)
6
12
UV 10UV
13
55
7 Y
7 51
53
8 57
10 61
LS1 bb M PS2 bb 4
6
AC
Y
SR
() ST 1
9A
a ST 2 a
52
18
a
17
58
62 15 22
54
b 1 Y bb aa
For AC UV Trip Only
16 2
Not Available when Second Trip Coil Option is Chosen
14
56
10
13
TRCS_ T TCSSL LOCATI LOCAT CS_ O_51N S_ AT ATI _ TION TIO TI T ION
Options
17 18 19 20 21
Figure 5.4-8. Typical 5/15/27 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics

Legend: CS = Breaker Control SwitchClose C CS = Breaker Control SwitchTrip T Y = Anti Pump Relay SR = Spring Release Coil (Coil) M = Spring Charge Motor ST = Shunt Trip PR = Protective Relay = Secondary Disconnect >> Operation: LS1 aa = Open until springs are fully charged. LS1 = Closed until springs are fully charged. bb LS2 = Open until springs are fully charged. aa LS2 = Closed until springs are fully charged. bb LC = Open until mechanism is reset. PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions. PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 051

Technical DataControl Schematics
5.4-25
i
Breaker DC Control Schematic
P (+)
ii
CS C Spring Charged Indicating Light
WL GL RL 9UV
CS T
PR
11
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U7
U8
U9
U10
1 2 3
UV 10UV
U24
U24
U23
U22
U21
U20
U19
U18
U15
DC Source
14
T S_ TCSSL TRCS_ TRCS LOCATI LOCAT AT ATI TI TIO T 51N ON
12 13
OPTIONS
57
53
Y Y
SR
55
61
3A
9A
4 3
9 62
a
22
ST 2 10A
4 5
56
ST
LOCAT TION
14
24
21
20
TCSSL TRCS LOCAT ATIO AT TIO TION T 51N ON
10
PS2 bb 4 6
b LC LS2 aa
b a
19
18
17
58
13
N (-)
This a Contact from Second Trip Coil Option is Chosen and Make the Appropriate Connections
6 7 8
Breaker AC Control Schematic

1
9
CS C
PR
GL RL 9UV
U24
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U7
U8
U9
U10
WL
10
U22 U21 U20 U19 U18 U17 U16 U15 UV 10UV
11
9UV OPTIONS
AC Source
TCSS TRCS_ LOCAT O_51N ATIO A AT _ TIO TION T ON
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AC
(+) 51 53
12
UV 10UV
13
3A
55
LS1 Y M PS2 bb 4 PS 6 Y SR
AC
(-) ST 1
57
CAP TRIP DEV
9A
1 3
6
52
10
a
15 22
ST 2
LOCAT TION
b
14
56
18
17
a
20 16 19
For AC UV Trip Only

a
24
2
This Contact from Second Trip Coil Option is Chosen and Make the Appropriate Connections
Figure 5.4-9. Typical 38 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics

Legend: CS = Breaker Control SwitchClose C CS = Breaker Control SwitchTrip T Y = Anti Pump Relay SR = Spring Release Coil (Coil) M = Spring Charge Motor ST = Shunt Trip PR = Protective Relay = Secondary Disconnect >> Operation: LS1 aa = Open until springs are fully charged. LS1 = Closed until springs are fully charged. bb LS2 = Open until springs are fully charged. aa LS2 = Closed until springs are fully charged. bb LC = Open until mechanism is reset. PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions. PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
CA08104001E
5.4-26

Technical DataRelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function
September 2011
Sheet 05 052
i ii
Bus
Bus 3Y 52 86
ETR-4000 50/51 50N/51N 87T
1 2 3 4 5
3
52
50/51G
EDR-3000 50/51 50/51N 1
63
1 50/5 1 N
87GD 50/51G
50N/51N 50/51
1 50/5
50/51G
52
3Y
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Phase CT Rating = 200% Feeder Full Load EDR-3000 = Eaton Distribution Relay Alternate to 50/51N
Phase CT Rating = 200% Full Load ETR-4000 = Eaton Transformer Relay 87TTransformer Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA) 86GD = Ground Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA and Low Resistance Grounded) 86Lockout Relay 63Sudden Pressure Relay (Liquid Above 5 MVA) Alternate to 50/51N
Figure 5.4-10. Protective RelaysFeeder Circuit

Bus
Figure 5.4-12. Protective RelaysTransformer Feeder

Bus 3
52 2
EMR-3000
2 52
13
VR-300
27/ 47 27/ 47X
1 3 1 1 50/5
14 15 16
49 50 51 46 86 51G
3 1 50/5 NEUT 3
EMR-4000 49 37 50 38 51 66 46 2/19 27/47 74 50G 86 51G 55 MD-3000 1 87 86 A A B 87 DP-300 1 86
RTD U R T D
17 18 19 20 21
Figure 5.4-11. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Below 1500 hp Minimum Adequate Protection
Phase CT Rating = 150% Full Load EMR-3000 = Eaton Motor Relay 27/47Undervoltage, Phase Sequence, and Unbalanced Voltage Relay VR-300 (One Per Bus) 27/47xAuxiliary Relay for Multi-motor System
Phase CT Rating = 150% Full Load APreferred Scheme (MD-3000 = Self-Balancing Differential Scheme) BAlternate Scheme (DP-300 = Restrained Differential Scheme) EMR-4000 = Eaton Motor Relay 87Motor Differential Relay 86Lockout Relay 55Loss of Synchronism (Synchronous Motors Only) URTDUniversal RTD Interface Module
Figure 5.4-13. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Above 1500 hp and Synchronous Motors
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 053

5.4-27
EDR-4000 RelayTypical One-Line Diagrams
i ii 1
2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
Figure 5.4-14. EDR-4000 Eaton Distribution RelayTypical Main or Feeder Breaker Application Diagram

Can be set for Forward, Reverse or Both directions. Can be Set for Underfreq, Overfreq, Rate of Change or Vector Change.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
5.4-28

September 2011
Sheet 05 054
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EDR-5000 RelayTypical One-Line Diagrams
Figure 5.4-15. EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution RelayTypical Main or Feeder Breaker Application Diagram

Can be set for Forward, Reverse or Both directions. Can be Set for Underfreq, Overfreq, Rate of Change or Vector Change.
Refer to Tab 4 for details on Eatons relays. Refer to Tab 3 for details on Eatons available metering.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 055

Typical Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Application Layouts, 515 kV
5.4-29
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Standard Metal-Clad)

Note: Arrangements shown in Figures 5.4-165.4-18 can be provided in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high, 96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) deep structures with 50VCPWND, 1200A circuit breakers. Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter.
i ii 1
Line VTs
Line VTs
2 3 4
Bus VTs
Line CPT 1-ph, 15 kVA max.
52-T 1200 or 2000A
Bus VTs
Line CPT 1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Bus 1
Bus 2
5
1200A R CTs M CTs 52-M1 1200 or 2000A R M CTs 1200A R M CTs 1200A R M CTs 52-M2 1200 or 2000A R M
6 7 8 9
Feeder
Source 1
Feeder
Feeder
Source 2
Figure 5.4-16. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs and Line CPTs 5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 1200 or 2000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
10 11 12
Line VTs
Line VTs
13
Bus VTs 52-T 1200 or 2000 A Bus 2 Bus VTs
14 15 16
Bus 1
52-M1 1200 or 2000A R M CTs CTs
1200A R M CTs
1200A R M CTs
52-M2 1200 or 2000A R M
17 18 19
Source 1
Feeder
Feeder
Source 2
20 21
Figure 5.4-17. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsPreferred Arrangement 5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 1200 or 2000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
5.4-30

September 2011
Sheet 05 056
i ii 1
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)

Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
Feeder Feeder
Line VTs
2
CTs
CTs R 1200A M Bus VTs 52-T 1200 or 2000A Bus VTs 1200A R M
3 4
Bus 1
Bus 2
5 6 7
CTs 1200A R M CTs Line VTs 52-M1 1200 or 2000A R M CTs 52-M2 1200 or 2000A R M CTs 1200A R M
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
52-M1 3000A Bus 1 Line CPT 1-ph, 15 kVA max. Bus VTs Feeder Source 1
Source 2
Feeder
Figure 5.4-18. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsAlternate Arrangement 5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 1200 or 2000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
Bus VTs
Bus 2 Line CPT 1-ph, 15 kVA max. 52-T 3000A M CTs Line VTs Line VTs 52-M2 3000A R M
17 18 19 20 21
Source 1 CTs
Source 2
Figure 5.4-19. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, and Line CPTs 5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
September 2011
Sheet 05 057

5.4-31
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)

Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
i ii
R M
R M
1 2 3 4
52-M1 3000 A
52-T 3000 A
52-M2 3000 A
Bus 1 (Optional Fans) (Optional Fans)
Bus 2 (Optional Fans)
5 6 7
Line VTs
Bus VTs
Bus VTs
Line VTs
8
Source 1 Source 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 5.4-20. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs 5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
This arrangement can be supplied with cooling fans to allow 4000A continuous.
Medium Voltage High Resistance Grounding System

Refer to Tab 36, Section 36.1, for complete product description, singleline diagram, layout and dimensions of medium voltage high resistance grounding system.
CA08104001E
5.4-32

September 2011
Sheet 05 058
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 059

Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures (Standard Metal-Clad)
5.5-1
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical Units Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
i
Available Congurations
ii 1
1200 Ampere Breaker 1200 Ampere Breaker 1200 Ampere Breaker
2
1200 Ampere Breaker 2000 Ampere Breaker Drawout Auxiliary
3 4
5
Drawout Auxiliary 2000 Ampere Breaker Drawout Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-1. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
1200 Ampere Breaker Drawout Auxiliary 2000 Ampere Breaker
6 7 8 9
Figure 5.5-4. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
Vented Auxiliary Compartment (Non-Drawout)
Drawout Auxiliary
2000 Ampere Breaker
10 11
Breakers cannot be located in bus transition compartment.

3000 Ampere Breaker Drawout Auxiliary 1200 Ampere Breaker
12 13
Figure 5.5-2. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
3000 Ampere Breaker
14 15
Vent Area Drawout Auxiliary
16 17
Figure 5.5-5. Available Congurations

For 4000A force cooled application, refer to Eaton. This conguration is available for indoor and outdoor walk-in designs only.
18 19 20
Figure 5.5-3. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
21
5.5-2

September 2011
Sheet 05 060
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)

Table 5.5-1. Assemblies (Less Breakers. See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers.)
Type of Main Bus Indoor Vertical Section Rating Amperes B/B 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 2400 (1090) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 2300 (1044) 2400 (1090) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2000 (908) 2100 (953) 2200 (999) 2300 (1046) Aisleless Sheltered-Aisle Including Aisle Single Row 3200 (1453) 3300 (1500) 3400 (1545) 3500 (1590) 2900 (1317) 3000 (1362) 3100 (1407) 3200 (1453) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 2800 (1271) 2900 (1317) 4200 (1907) 4300 (1952) 4400 (1998) 4500 (2045) 4100 (1861) 4200 (1907) 4300 (1952) 4400 (1998) 3800 (1725) 3900 (1771) 4000 (1816) 4100 (1861) Double Row 7200 (3269) 7400 (3360) 7600 (3450) 7700 (3500) 7000 (3178) 7200 (3269) 7400 (3360) 7500 (3409) 6400 (2906) 6600 (2996) 6800 (3087) 6900 (3136)
B/A or A/B A/A
See Table 5.5-2 for breakers.
Table 5.5-2. Breaker Weights in Lbs (kg)

Type of Breaker Current Rating, Amperes 1200 2000 3000 Approximate Weight, Lbs (kg), Static 50 VCP-W 250, 40C, 25, 40 50 VCP-W 350, 50C, 50 50 VCP-W 500, 63C, 63 75 VCP-W 500, 50C, 50 150 VCP-W 500, 25C, 25 150 VCP-W 750, 40C, 40 150 VCP-W 1000, 50C, 50 150 VCP-W 1500, 63C, 63
Figure 5.5-8. Indoor
350 (159) 460 (209) 575 (261) 375 (170) 350 (159) 350 (159) 460 (209) 575 (261)
410 (186) 490 (222) 575 (261) 410 (186) 410 (186) 410 (186) 490 (222) 575 (261)
525 (238) 525 (238) 575 (261) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 525 (238) 575 (261)
Impact weight = 1.5 times static weight.
Figure 5.5-9. Outdoor Aisleless
Figure 5.5-6. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Single Row
Figure 5.5-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Double Row
Dimensions and weights for estimating purposes only. CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 061

5.5-3
Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 23.00 (584.2) 32.00 (812.8) 2.00 (50.8)
i
2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 32.00 (812.8) 2.00 (50.8)
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8)

ii 1 2
23.00 (584.2)
11.25 (285.8)
96.25 (2444.8)
34.25 34 25 (870.0) 9.00 (228.6)
Four Conduits
3 4 5
60.88 (1546.4)
44.50 (1130.3)
(4) Knockouts for T Top Secondary Conduit Entry

6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
34.25 (870.0)
3.00
0.56 (14.2) 3.38

Two Conduits
(76.2)
6 7 8
(514.4) 0.25 (6.4) Member 0.56 (14.2) 5.56 5 56 (141.2) Front
Figure 5.5-12. Primary Conduit Locations for Top or Bottom Entry
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional hinged rear doors are required.
Front
Figure 5.5-11. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor Breaker or Auxiliary Structure

Figure 5.5-10. Top View of Typical Indoor Breaker and Auxiliary Structures
Primary conduit locations for top or bottom entry.
Primary conduit locations for top or bottom entry. Recommended minimum clearance to rear of VacClad-W: 36.00 inches (914.4 mm). Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W. Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts. Station ground connection provision. Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection. Minimum clearance to LH side of VacClad-W: 32.00 inches (812.8 mm). Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W: 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm). Floor steel if used, must not exceed this dimension under VacClad-W.
9 10
Upper Hinged Panel 1-Large Relay Case 2-Small Relay Case 3-Instrument 4-Test Switch 5-Switch 6-Lock-out Relay or Switch 7-IQ Metering Unit
11 12 13 14
3 6
3 5
3 5
3 4 4
3 6
3 5
3 5
3 4
Lower Hinged Panel
15 16 17
Figure 5.5-13. Maximum Hinged Panel Equipment

Note: The gure above shows that the arrangement of components differs between upper and lower panels. The gure may also be used to select custom arrangements of hinged panel components. Also, the use of multi-purpose solid-state relays such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 (same size as 7) will signicantly reduce consumption of panel space.
18 19 20 21
5.5-4

September 2011
Sheet 05 062
i ii 1
Attach to the Switchgear Channels Using Supplied Hardware
6.00 (152.4) (101.6)
1.00 (25.4)
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6) 4.88 (124.0)
0.75 (19.1) 0.63 (16.0)
4.25 (108.0)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1 2
Location for station ground connection. Attach switchgear to foundation using one of the two holes. Use 5/8" Grade 5 or better bolt. Torque to 150 ft.-lbs. (Total of 4 mounting bolts per vertical section, one at each corner.)
Power cable entrance space. Refer to shop order base plan drawing for conduit locations. Conduit projection not to exceed 8.00 inches (203.2 mm). Secondary control wiring conduit entrance space. Conduit stub ups not to project more than 7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
6.00 (152.4)
4.50 (114.3)
Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
2
Mounting Clip Details 4.50 2.00 (50.8) 5/8" Bolt & HDWE Supplied by Customer
6.00 (152.4)
2.00 (50.8) Optional Rear Door View A
7 GA Steel Mounting Clip Supplied by Eaton
2.75 (69.8) 4.50 (114.3)

C L
36.00 (914.4) Minimum Recommended Clearance

X
6.00 (152.4)
3.31 (84.1) 4.50 (114.3) 2.00 (50.8)
21.25 (539.8)
3
7.12 (180.8) 4.38 (111.3) 7.12 (180.8)
11.50 (292.1)
8.00 (203.2)
20.50 (520.7)
90.69 (2303.5)
101.25 (2571.8) 90.27 (2292.8) 90.27 (2292.8)
0.56 (14.2)
3.00 (76.2) 0.56 (14.2)
4 Channel Locations 0.25 (6.4)

7.67 (194.8) 10.56 (268.2) 2.00 (50.8)
4.50 (114.3)
(3.0) Outdoor End Wall

2.75 (69.8) 4.50 (114.3)
0.12 (3.0) Outdoor End Wall
View X-X
Grade Level
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
70.00 (1778) Minimum Recommended Clearance
Front of Switchgear
Figure 5.5-14. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 063

5.5-5
6.00 (152.4) Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs. Attach to the Switchgear Channels Using Supplied Hardware (101.6)
i
1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2) 4.25 4.88 (124.0)
ii 1 2 3
1.25 (31.8)
6.50 (165.1)
1 2 5
Location for station ground connection. Attach switchgear to foundation using one of the two holes. Use 5/8" Grade 5 or better bolt. Torque to 150 ft.-lbs. (Total of 4 mounting bolts per vertical section, one at each corner.)
Power cable entrance space. Refer to shop 5.75 (146.1) for conduit locations. Conduit projection not to exceed 8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
2.75 (69.8) 6.00 (152.4)
0.75 (19.1) 0.63 (16.0)
4.50 (114.3)
5.75 (146.1) 3.75 (95.3) 5 Mounting Angle Details Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs. 2 Mounting Clip Details 4.50 (114.3) 5/8" Bolt & HDWE Supplied by Customer 2.00 (50.8)
Secondary control wiring conduit entrance space. Conduit stub ups not to project more than 7.00 inches (177.8 mm). Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
4 5 6 7
6.00 (152.4) 2.00 (50.8) Optional Rear Door View
2 7 GA Steel Mounting Clip Supplied by Eaton 2.75 (69.8) 4.50 (114.3) 36.00 (914.0) Minimum Recommended Clearance C L 7.00 (177.8) 3 21.25 (539.8) 3 8.00 (203.2) 1 7.12 (180.8) 20.50 (520.7) 7.12 (180.8) 4.38 (111.3) 11.50 (292.1) X SEE ENLARGED VIEW A 4.50 (114.3) 0 (50.8) Locations
8
6.00 (152.4)
9 10 11 12 13
90.69 (2303.5) 0.56 (14.2) 3.00 (76.2) 4 0.56 (14.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.38 (85.9)
90.27 (2292.8)
Channel
167.23 (4247.6) 3.88 (98.5) Outdoor End Wall 0.75 (19.1) 11.50 (292.1) 11.40 (289.6) 11.50 (292.1) 0.70 (17.8) 0.10 (2.5) 0.10 (2.5) Outdoor End Wall 4.50 (114.3) View X-X 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) Front of Switchgear 36.00 (914.4) 38.00 (965.2) 3.00 (76.2) 4.00 (101.6) CHANNEL LOCATIONS 4.00 (101.6)
14 15 16 17 18
Typical
Removable Covers Aisle
68.96 (1751.6)
0.12 (3.0) 2.75 (69.8) 4.50 (114.3) 38.00 (965.2)
19 20 21
Figure 5.5-15. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
5.5-6

September 2011
Sheet 05 064
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: First install both rows of switchgear then install aisle parts per drawing. (Later)
Location for station ground connection typical each end unit.
2 5
6.50 (165.1) 6 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 3.75 (95.3) 5 Mounting Angle Details
Attach switchgear to foundation using one of the two holes. Use 5/8" Grade 5 or better bolt. Torque to 150 ft. lbs. (Total of 4 mounting bolts per vertical section, one at each corner.) Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
Power cable entrance space. Refer to shop order base plan drawing for conduit locations. Conduit projection not to exceed 8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
Secondary control wiring conduit entrance space. Conduit stub ups not to project more than 7.00 inches (177.8 mm). Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or Better Torque to 150 Ft. Lbs.
6.00 (152.4)
Attach to the Switchgear Channels Using Supplied Hardware
6.00 (152.4) 4.00 (101.6) 4.88 (124.0) 2 Mounting Clip Details
Optional Rear Door
2 7 GA Steel Mounting Clip Supplied by Eaton
3.00 (76.2) 4.00 L
Minimum 36.00 Recommended (914.4) Clearance
6.00 (152.4)
4.50 (114.3) 3 21.25 (539.8) 3 8.00 (203.2) 1 7.12 (180.8) 20.50 (520.7) 90.69 (2303.5) 0.56 (14.2) 7.12 (180.8) 11.50 (292.1) Channel Locations 90.27 (2292.8) Channel Locations (292.1) 11.50 68.96 (1751.6) 2.00 (50.8) 261.50 (6642.1)
4.00 (101.6)
00 (50.8)
9 10 11
3.00 (76.2) 4
0.56 (14.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.38 (85.8)
3.88 (98.5)
4.00 (101.6)
Removable Covers
0.75 (19.1)
11.50 (292.1)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
0.12 (3.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.00 (101.6) Outdoor End Wall 0.12 (3.0)
Aisle
4 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
38.00 (965.2)
Outdoor End Wall 38.00 (965.2) 90.27 (2292.8) Channel Locations 4.50 (114.3) 36.00 Minimum (914.4) Recommended Clearance View X-X X
19 20 21
Figure 5.5-16. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Common Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 065

Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
5.5-7
Layout Dimensions5 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical UnitsIndoor Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
i
ii 1
1200 Ampere Breaker 1200 Ampere Breaker Drawout Auxiliary
2 3
1200 Ampere Breaker
Drawout Auxiliary
1200 Ampere Breaker
5
Drawout Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-17. 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
6 7
Drawout Auxiliary
8 9
Figure 5.5-21. Available Congurations Figure 5.5-20. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-3. Switchgear Assembly (Less Breaker)
Type of Vertical Section B/B Main Bus Rating, Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 Weight Lbs (kg) 2000 (908) 2200 (999) 1700 (772) 1900 (863) 1600 (726) 1800 (817)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Figure 5.5-18. 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
B/A or A/B A/A
Table 5.5-4. Circuit Breaker

Type of Circuit Breaker 50 VCPW-ND-250
Current Rating, Amperes 1200
Weight Lbs (kg) (Static) 345 (157)
Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
Figure 5.5-19. 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
20
Dimensions for estimating purposes only.
21
CA08104001E
5.5-8

Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
September 2011
Sheet 05 066
i ii 1 2 3

2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 23.00 (584.2) 22.00 (558.8) 2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2)
22.00 (558.8)
2.00 (50.8)
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8)
23.00 (584.2)
11.25 (285.8)
96.25 (2444.8)
24 25 24.25 (619.9) 9.00 (228.6)
Four Conduits
60.88 (1546.4)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

44.50 (1130.3)

6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
24.25 (619.9)
3.00
0.56 (14.2) 3.38

Two Conduits
(76.2)
(514.4) 0.25 (6.4) Member 0.56 (14.2) 5.56 5 56 (141.2) Front
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional hinged rear doors are required.
Front

15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Primary conduit locations for top or bottom entry. Recommended minimum clearance to rear of VacClad-W: 30.00 inches (762.0 mm). Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W. Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts. Station ground connection provision. Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection. Minimum clearance to LH side of VacClad-W: 26.00 inches (660.4 mm). Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W: 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm). Floor steel if used, must not exceed this dimension under VacClad-W.
Upper Hinged Panel 1-Large Relay Case 2-Small Relay Case 3-Instrument 4-Test Switch 5-Switch 6-Lock-out Relay or Switch 7-IQ Metering Unit
3 6 5
3 6 5 1
Lower Hinged Panel

Note: The gure above shows that the arrangement of components differs between upper and lower panels. The gure may also be used to select custom arrangements of hinged panel components. Also, the use of multi-purpose solid-state relays such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 (same size as 7) will signicantly reduce consumption of panel space.
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 067

Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5 kV, Low Prole 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
5.5-9
i ii
80.00 (2032.0)
1
LL (1) 521 RTH
2
36.00 (914.4)
SCD 0H7 Pad
3 4
80.00 (2032.0)
Figure 5.5-26. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Prole 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Blank/Breaker
5 6
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables enter from top. Blank 1200 Ampere ND Breaker Auxiliary or Blank Auxiliary or Blank 1200 Ampere ND Breaker
7 8 9 10
521 RTH
36.00 (914.4)
SCD 0H7 Pad
80.00 (2032.0)
1200 Ampere ND Breaker
Blank
1200 Ampere ND Breaker
Auxiliary or Blank Auxiliary or Blank
Figure 5.5-30. Available Congurations (Front View)
Relays or control devices cannot be mounted on the circuit breaker or auxiliary compartment door.
11 12 13 14 15
80.00 (2032.0)
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-5. Switchgear Assembly (Less Breaker)
Vertical Section Type B/A or A/B A/A Main Bus Rating, Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 Weight Lbs (kg) 1500 (682) 1700 (772) 1400 (636) 1600 (726)
Figure 5.5-27. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Prole 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Breaker/Blank
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables enter from below.
Table 5.5-6. Circuit Breaker

Circuit Breaker Type
VTX (2)
Current Rating, Amperes 1200
Weight (Static) Lbs (kg) 345 (157)
16 17 18 19
50 VCPW-ND-250
LP (2)
RTH
80.00 (2032.0)
Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
521 RTH
SCD 0H7 Pad
36.00 (914.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
Figure 5.5-28. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Prole 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Auxiliary/Breaker
20 21
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inch (1831.7 mm) if power cables enter from top.
CA08104001E
5.5-10

Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5/15 kV, Low Prole 36.00-Inch (9.14.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
September 2011
Sheet 05 068
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC 80.00 (2032.0) Breaker
CT CT
Access for VT Cables Blank VT or CPT

VT Cables Either/Or
36.00 (914.4)
BYZ(1)
CT CT
HTR
86.25 (2190.8)
Auxiliary
Blank
Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-31. 36.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide VCP-W Low Prole Indoor Unit
Other depths possible depending on cable entry direction and VT/CPT connections. Contact Eaton.
VCP-W Breaker 1200 or 2000 A
VCP-W Breaker 1200, 2000 or 3000 A
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-33. Available Congurations (Front View)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-7. Assemblies (Less Breakers, See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers)
Vertical Section Type B/B Main Bus Rating, Amperes 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 Indoor Structure Lbs (kg) 2200 (999) 2300 (1044) 2400 (1090) 2100 (953) 2200 (999) 2300 (1044) 1800 (818) 1900 (864) 2000 (908)
B/A or A/B
A/A
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 069
5.5-11
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design
Layout Dimensions27 kV One-High DesignDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical Units Available Congurations
i ii
Drawout VTs T
Drawout VTs T
Drawout VTs T
1 2
1200 Ampere Breaker
2000 Ampere Breaker
Drawout VTs T
3 4 5
Figure 5.5-34. Indoor 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
Figure 5.5-36. Indoor Auxiliaries 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Drawout Fuses
6
Fixed CPT

Table 5.5-8. Assemblies (Less Breakers)
Type of Vertical Section A/B A/A Main Bus Indoor Rating Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 Outdoor Aisleless
7 8
2500 (1135) 3400 (1545) 2600 (1180) 3500 (1591) 2200 (999) 2800 (1271) 2300 (1045) 2900 (1317)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Type of Breaker Current Rating, Amperes 1200 2000
Figure 5.5-35. Outdoor Aisleless Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
270 VCP-W 750 270 VCP-W 1000 270 VCP-W 1250, 25C 270 VCP-W 40, 40C
415 (188) 415 (188) 415 (188) 415 (188)
475 (216) 475 (216) 475 (216) 475 (216)
Breaker impact = 1.5 x breaker weight.
21
5.5-12

Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design
September 2011
Sheet 05 070
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

2.00 (50.8) 32.00 (812.8) 3.00 (76.2) 23.00 (584.2) 2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8) 11.25 (285.8)
32.00 (812.8) 3.00 (76.2) 23.00 (584.2) 96.25 (2444.8)
34.25 (870.0)
Four Conduits
9.00 (228.6) 59.31 (1506.5) 34 (863.6)
15.50 (393.7)
8 50 8.50 (215.9) (215 9) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 3 00 (76.2)
34.25 (870.0) 3.00 (76.2) 3.88 (98.6) 0.25 (6.35) Member 0.56 (14.2) 5.56 (141.2)
0.56 (14.2)
Two Conduits
3.88 (98.6)
Changes to 8.25 inches (209.6 mm) if optional hinged rear doors are required.
Front
Front

Primary conduit locations for top or bottom entry. Recommended minimum clearance to rear of VacClad-W: 36.00 inches (914.4 mm). Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W. Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts. Station ground connection provision. Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection. Minimum clearance to LH side of VacClad-W: 32.00 inches (812.8 mm). Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W: 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm). Floor steel if used, must not exceed this dimension under VacClad-W.
Upper Hinged Panel 1-Large Relay Case 2-Small Relay 3-Instrument t Relay or 7-IQ Metering Unit
3 6
3 5
3 5
3 4 4
No devices on the breaker compartment door.
Lower Hinged Panel
Note: Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan 27 kV switchgear outdoor Aisleless base plan details are same as 5/15 kV outdoor Aisleless switchgear. Refer to Figure 5.5-14.

Note: The gure above shows that the arrangement of components differs between upper and lower panels. The gure may also be used to select custom arrangements of hinged panel components. Also, the use of multi-purpose solid-state relays such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 (same size as device 7) will signicantly reduce consumption of panel space.
September 2011
Sheet 05 071

Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design
5.5-13
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical UnitsIndoor
Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
i ii 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
Figure 5.5-42. Indoor 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Breaker-over-Breaker Vertical Section
Figure 5.5-43. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical Auxiliary-over-Breaker Vertical Section
For 1-high arrangement (1 breaker per cell), depth may be reduced to 108.64 inches (2759.5 mm).
Blank
1200 Ampere Breaker
Drawout VTs T
CPT Primary Fuse Drawer
1200 Ampere Breaker
1200 Ampere Breaker H 100.00 (2540.0)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Typical Weights
Type of Vertical Section Aux/Bkr Main Bus Rating, Amperes 1200 2000 2500 2700 1200 2000 2500 2700 1200 2000 2500 2700 Weight Lbs (kg) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1227) 2200 (1000) 2300 (1046) 2300 (1046) 2400 (1091) 2700 (1227) 2800 (1273) 2800 (1273) 2900 (1318)
1200 Ampere or 2000 Ampere Breaker
Blank
Drawout VTs T
36.00 (914.4) Aux/Aux Drawout VTs Blank CPT Primary Fuse Drawer CPT Primary Fuse Drawer CPT Primary Fuse Drawer Blank Bkr/Bkr
H 100.00 (2540.0) Drawout VTs Drawout VTs Drawout VTs CPT Blank Blank
Refer to Table 5.5-9 for breaker weights.

Available Main Bus Ratings for 27 kV two-high design are 1200A, 2000A, 2500A or 2700A. Bus connected, maximum 4A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear. Fuses are bus or line connected. CPT is installed in front bottom, on drawout frame. Maximum CPT size is single-phase 37.5 kVA or three-phase 45 kVA. Bus or Line connected, maximum 4A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear.
19 20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-14

Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
September 2011
Sheet 05 072
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
5 36.00 (914.4) Min. 2.00 (50.8)
Rear 32.00 (812.8)
1 2.00 (50.8) A 3.00 (76.2) 2 3 4 5 1 10 6
Anchor locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts SAE Grade 5 or better, (6) places in each vertical section. Secondary control wiring conduit openings, conduit projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Minimum front clearance when using Eatons portable lifter. Minimum left-hinged panel clearance. Recommended minimum rear clearance. Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. 4.25 inches (108.0 mm) maximum dimension under the front of the switchgear must not be exceeded to avoid interference with secondary conduits. Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit locations. Customer's ground provisions, provided as shown by symbol on shop order sectional side views. 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) minimum foundation supports for attaching switchgear.
Line Compt.
8 0.88 (22.4) 1
32.00 (812.8)
Bus Compt. 118.64 (3013.5)
2.00 (50.8) 48.00 (1219.2)
9 9.00 (228.6) Supplied by Customer 6
Breaker Compt.
10
65.97 0.88 (1675.6) (22.4) 1

1.00 (25.4)
9 10
Control Compt.
22.25 3.00 (565.2) (76.2)
7.00 (177.8) 10.96 (278.4)
2 1
1.32 (33.5) 32.00 (812.8) Min.
3.00 (76.2) 0.59 (15.0)
3.00 (76.2) 0.59 (15.0)
36.00 (914.4)
7 4.25 (108.0) A
Section A-A
Top Entry Secondary Control Knockouts for 1.38" (35.1) or 1.75 (44.5) Conduits 72.00 (1828.8) Min. 3
Front
7.80 (198.1) 7.38 (187.5) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 36.00 (914.4)
Figure 5.5-46. Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
September 2011
Sheet 05 073
5.5-15
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), 170 kV BIL Design
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 170 kV BIL Design Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical Units Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)
Type of Vertical Section
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Main Bus Rating Amperes 1200 2000 2500 3000 1200 2000 2500 3000
Indoor
Breaker
3300 (1500) 3400 (1545) 3555 (1616) 3555 (1616) 3200 (1453) 3300 (1500) 3455 (1570) 3455 (1570)
Auxiliary

Type of Breaker 380 VCP-W-16, 16C 380 VCP-W-25, 25C 380 VCP-W-32, 32C 380 VCP-W-21 380 VCP-W-40, 40C Current Rating, Amperes 1200 1080 (490) 1080 (490) 1080 (490) 1080 (490) 1080 (490) 1080 (490) 2000 1140 (518) 1140 (518) 1140 (518) 1140 (518) 1140 (518) 1140 (518)
Figure 5.5-47. IndoorTypical Breaker, Vertical Section, Bottom Cable Exit
Bus side CT bushings are not provided if there are no bus side CTs.
Figure 5.5-48. IndoorTypical Auxiliary/Auxiliary
14 15 16 17
18 19 20
Figure 5.5-49. IndoorTypical Bus Tie Breaker, Vertical Section
Bus side CT bushings are not provided if there are no bus side CTs.
21
CA08104001E
5.5-16

Layout Dimensions38 kV, 42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), 170 kV BIL Design
September 2011
Sheet 05 074
i ii 1 2

3.75 (95.3) 3.50 (88.9)
4.15 (105.4)
42.00 (1066.8) 3.75 (95.3) 34.50 (876.3)
B C B A
9.00 (228.6)
34.50 (876.3) 4.15 (105.4) 16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
128.75 (3270.3)
7.00 (177.8)
A = 13.75 (349.3) B = 4.50 (114.3) C = 5.50 (139.7)

Four Conduits
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3
Top Secondary T Conduit Space

65.85 (1672.6)
39.60 (1005.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8) 9.00 (228.6) 7.00 (177.8)
12.00 (304.8)
61.62 (1565.2)
7.5 50 (190.5) 3.38 (85.9) 2.20 (55.9) 3.00 (76.2) Front
39.60 (1005.8)
Three Conduits
9.00 (228.6) 7.00 (177.8)
30.90 (784.4)
7.50 (190.5) 15.38 (390.7)
3.00 (76.2)
1.48 (37.6)
Front
Two Conduits
Figure 5.5-52. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor Breaker and Auxiliary Structure
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 5 5 6 4
Control Compt. Door 1-Large Relay Case 3-Instrument 4-Test T Switch 56-Lock-out Relay or Switch 7-IQ Metering Unit
No devices on the breaker compartment door. Breaker Compt. Door
Primary conduit locations for top or bottom entry. Recommended minimum clearance to rear of VacClad-W: 42.00 inches (1066.8 mm). Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W. Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts. Station ground connection provision. Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection. Minimum clearance to LH side of VacClad-W: 38.00 inches (965.2 mm). Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W: 84.00 inches (2133.6 mm).
12.00 (304.8)
Single Conduit

Changes to 10.25 inches (260.4 mm) if optional hinged rear doors are required. Changes to 13.25 inches (336.6 mm) if optional hinged rear doors are required.

Note: The gure above shows that the arrangement of components. The gure may also be used to select custom arrangements of hinged panel components. Also, the use of multi-purpose solid-state relays such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 (same size as device 7) will signicantly reduce consumption of panel space.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 075

Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design
5.5-17
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical Units Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)
Type of Vertical Section Breaker Main Bus Rating Amperes 1200 2000 2500 1200 2000 2500 Indoor
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
3100 (1409) 3200 (1455) 3355 (1525) 3000 (1364) 3100 (1409) 3355 (1525)
Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-54. IndoorTypical Breaker, Main or Feeder
7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 5.5-55. Typical Auxiliary-over-Auxiliary
13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 5.5-56. Typical Bus Tie Breaker
19 20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-18

Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design
September 2011
Sheet 05 076
i ii 1
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignDimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Rear Max. 3.00 (76.2)
Suggested locations for 0.500-13 bolts or welding. Secondary conduit location bottom entrance. Conduit projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Recommended minimum clearance on all sidesfollow local regulations. Minimum left-hinged panel clearance. Recommended minimum real clearancefollow local regulations. Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Floor steel if used, must not exceed this dimension under switchgear. Finished foundation (within 0.08-inch (2.0 mm) clearance) must extend under switchgear minimum 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to maximum 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit locations. Customers ground provisions provided as shown by symbol on shop order sectional side views. 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) minimum channel supplied by customer.
2 3 4
Min. 42.00 (1066.8) 3.75 (95.2)
2 7A 3.75 (95.2)
3 4 5 6
Line Compt.
1.16 (29.5)
34.50 16.00 (876.3) (406.4)
5 6 7
68.48 2.00 (50.8) 1 10 8.69 (220.7) 6 Unfinished Foundation Under Switchgear
7A 7B
8 9 10
(1739.4) Bus Compt.
124.36 (3158.7)
2.00 (50.8)
39.60 (1005.8)
73.24 (1860.3)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Breaker Compt.
1.75 30.88 (44.4) (784.4) 3.00 (76.2) Floor Plate Door Min. 38.00 (965.2) 4
7.50 (190.5) 15.38 (390.7)
1 1.23 (31.3)
10 Max. 3.00 (76.2)
1.00 (25.4)
7A
Alternate Secondary Conduit Location Top Entrance 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 1.94 (49.3) 3 Min. 84.00 (2133.6) 7.50 (190.5) 7B 3.54 (89.9) 3.00 (76.2)
Front
Figure 5.5-57. IndoorTypical Indoor Base Plan
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 077

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
5.5-19
Typical Application Layouts
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 5.5-58. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV

Notes:
19
3. All lineups shown can be provided in mirrored conguration. 4. Refer to Figure 5.5-61 to 5.5-66 for dimensions.
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two sets of standard or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed on each side of the circuit breaker.
2. Bottom entry is standard for all power cables. In breaker over breaker arrangement, maximum number of cables is limited to two per phase for each breaker.
20 21
CA08104001E
5.5-20

September 2011
Sheet 05 078
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Notes:
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two sets of standard or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed on each side of the circuit breaker. 2. Bottom entry is standard for all power cables. In breaker over breaker arrangement, maximum number of cables is limited to two per phase for each breaker. 3. All lineups shown can be provided in mirrored conguration. 4. Refer to Figure 5.5-61 to 5.5-66 for dimensions.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 079

5.5-21
Typical Application Layouts (Continued)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Notes:
19
3. All lineups shown can be provided in mirrored conguration. 4. Refer to Figure 5.5-61 to 5.5-66 for dimensions.
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two sets of standard or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed on each side of the circuit breaker.
2. Bottom entry is standard for all power cables. In breaker over breaker arrangement, maximum number of cables is limited to two per phase for each breaker.
20 21
CA08104001E
5.5-22

Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
September 2011
Sheet 05 080
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
32.00 (812.8)
Arc exhaust plenum
Control Compartment
1200A Breaker (with relay box)
Auxiliary (VT, CPT or Fuses) (no relays)
95.00 (2413.0)
Control Compartment 1200A Breaker (with relay box)
Control Compartment Control Compartment
Control Compartment Auxiliary (VT, CPT or Fuses) (no relays)
32.00 (812.8)
Auxiliary (VT, CPT or Fuses) (no relays)
95.00 (2413.0)
Dynamic Vent 2000A Breaker (with relay box)
Dynamic Vent Auxiliary (VT, CPT or Fuses) (no relays)
Dynamic Vent 2000 0A Breaker (with relay box)
(Notes 1, 2) 36.00 (914.14)
(Notes 1, 2)
(Notes 1, 2, 3)
(Notes 1, 2, 3)
(Notes 1, 3, 4)
Notes: 1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door. 2 = Maximum current through a 2000A breaker in this location must be limited to 1750A. 3 = This configuration requires use of a 4000A main bus. 4 = Maximum current through each 2000A breaker in this configuration must be limited to 1750A each.
Figure 5.5-61. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
21
September 2011
Sheet 05 081

Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
5.5-23
i ii
32.00 (812.8)
Arc exhaust plenum
1
Auxiliary (VT, CPT or Fuses) (no relays) Control Compartment Auxiliary (VT, CPT or Fuses) (no relays) Blank or Transistion to Ampgard
2 3 4
Control Compartment
95.00 (2413.0)
Dynamic Vent 2000/3000A Breaker (with relay box)
Control Compartment
Control Compartment
5 6 7 8
Control Compartment
Blank or Auxiliary
32.00 (812.8)
9 10
2000/3000A Breaker (with relay box) 3000A Breaker (with relay box) 3000A FC Breaker (with relay box) 3000A FC Breaker (with relay box) 4000A FC Breaker (with relay box)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fan
Fan
95.00 (2413.0)
Dynamic Vent
Dynamic Vent
Control Compartment
Control Compartment
Control Compartment
Fans located inside this compartment
Dynamic Vent (Notes 2, 5) 36.00 (914.14) (Notes 1, 5) (Note 6) (Notes 1, 6) (Note 7)
Notes: 1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door. 2 = Maximum current through a 2000A breaker in this location must be limited to 1750A. 5 = Maximum current through a 3000A breaker in this location must be limited to 2500A. 6 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000A circuit breaker in this configuration is 3000A with fans running, and 2500A when fans are not running. 7 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000A circuit breaker in this configuration is 4000A with fans running, and 2500A when fans are not running.
Figure 5.5-61. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV (Continued)
CA08104001E
5.5-24

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
September 2011
Sheet 05 082
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Sectional Side Views
Figure 5.5-62. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 083

5.5-25
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21
CA08104001E
5.5-26

September 2011
Sheet 05 084
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)

September 2011
Sheet 05 085

Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearWeights5 and 15 kV
5.5-27
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant SwitchgearTypical Weights

Type of Vertical Section Main Bus Rating Amperes Breaker/breaker 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 4000 Indoor Structure 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W 97.50-Inch (2476.5 mm) D Lbs (kg) 2800 (1271) 2900 (1317) 3000 (1362) 3100 (1407) 2700 (1226) 2800 (1271) 2900 (1317) 3000 (1362) 2650 (1203) 2750 (1248) 2850 (1294) 2950 (1339) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 2800 (1271) 2900 (1317) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 2800 (1271) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 2800 (1271) Indoor Structure 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W 109.50-Inch (2781.3 mm) D Lbs (kg) 3025 (1374) 3175 (1441) 3275 (1487) 3375 (1532) 2900 (1317) 3125 (1419) 3150 (1430) 3275 (1487) 2850 (1294) 2975 (1351) 3100 (1407) 3225 (1464) 2800 (1271) 2925 (1328) 3050 (1385) 3175 (1441) 2700 (1226) 2825 (1283) 2950 (1339) 3075 (1396) 2700 (1226) 2825 (1283) 2950 (1339) 3075 (1396) Indoor Structure 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W 121.50-Inch (3086.1 mm) D Lbs (kg) 3175 (1441) 3375 (1532) 3475 (1578) 3575 (1623) 3125 (1419) 3175 (1441) 3325 (1510) 3475 (1578) 2975 (1351) 3225 (1464) 3275 (1487) 3450 (1566) 2925 (1328) 3175 (1441) 3225 (1464) 3375 (1532) 2825 (1283) 2975 (1351) 3125 (1419) 3275 (1487) 2825 (1283) 2975 (1351) 3125 (1419) 3275 (1487)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Blank/breaker or breaker/blank
Auxiliary/breaker or breaker/auxiliary
Auxiliary/auxiliary
Blank/auxiliary or auxiliary/blank
Blank/blank
Refer to Table 5.5-2 for breaker weights. Add weights of end-wall to left and right end structures as follows: 350 Lbs (159.1 kg) for 97.50-inch (2476.5) D structures. 390 Lbs (177.3 kg) for 109.50-inch (2781.3) D structures. 430 Lbs (195.4 kg) for 121.50-inch (3086.1) D structures. Add plenum weight as follows: 300 Lbs (136.4 kg) to left and right end structures. 200 Lbs (91.0 kg) to each intermediate structures. Add arc duct assembly weight as follows: 200.00 Lbs (91.0 kg) for standard 51.00-inch (1295.4 mm) arc exhaust duct assembly. 30.00 Lbs (14.0 kg) per foot for additional arc duct.
CA08104001E
5.5-28

September 2011
Sheet 05 086
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Typical Top Plan

End Wall 1.50 (38.1) 18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (914.4) 18.00 (457.2) 3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (914.4) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (914.4) 18.00 (457.2) 3.00 (76.2) 7.00 (177.8) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 End Wall (38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
9.00 (228.6)
9.00 (228.6)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
81.00 (2057.4) Plenum
108.00 (2743.2)
15.25 (387.4) VS #1 VS #2 Front Top View VS #3
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 5.5-65. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear, Top Entry CablesTypical Conduit Entrance Locations5 and 15 kV
Note: For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical, minimum two vertical sections and one arc duct exit are required. For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of 50 kA rms symmetrical or higher, minimum three vertical sections and two arc duct exits are required.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 087

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
5.5-29
Typical Floor Plan
i ii 1 2
Suggested locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts or welding. 2 Secondary control wiring conduit openings, conduit projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). 3 Minimum front clearance when using Eatons portable lifter. 4 Minimum left-hinged panel clearance. 5 Recommended minimum rear clearance. 6 Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. 7A Floor steel, if used, must not exceed this dimension under the switchgear. 7B Finished foundation (within 0.06-inch [1.5 mm] clearance) must extend under the switchgear a minimum of 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to a maximum of 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). 8 Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit locations. 9 Customers ground provisions provided as shown by symbol on the shop orders sectional side views. 10 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) minimum channel supplied by customer. 11 Foundation under the switchgear must be at least 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) thick. 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 5.5-66. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
19 20 21
CA08104001E
5.5-30

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV
September 2011
Sheet 05 088
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 5.5-67. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV

Notes:
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two sets of standard or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed on each side of the circuit breaker. 2. Bottom entry is standard for all power cables, maximum four per phase. 3. Refer to Figure 5.5-68 to 5.5-70 for dimensions. 4. 27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can be supplied in one-high design conguration only.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 089

Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)27 kV
5.5-31
Available Congurations (Continued)
i ii
40.00 (1016.0)
1 2 3 4 5 6
90.37 (225.0)
7 8
No Relays No Relays No Relays
9 10 11
42.00 (1067.0) Figure 5.5-68. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)27 kV
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Please note that an additional 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) clearance is required above the arc wall for arc exhaust.

Type of Vertical Section Control/breaker Control/auxiliary
Main Bus Rating Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000
Indoor Structure 2700 (1226) 2800 (1271) 2400 (1090) 2500 (1135)
CA08104001E
5.5-32

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
September 2011
Sheet 05 090
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Sectional Side ViewsDimensions in Inches (mm)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.37 (2295.0)
90.37 (2295.0)
108.63 (2759.0)
108.63 (2759.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.37 (2295.0)
90.37 (2295.0)
108.63 (2759.0)
108.63 (2759.0)
Figure 5.5-69. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 091

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
5.5-33
Typical Floor PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)
i ii
Rear 42.00 (1066.8) Min. 5 5.50 (140) 42.00 (1067) 1.00 (25) 1B Bottom cable entrance. 2 Secondary control wiring conduit openings, location bottom entrance (optional; only by special order). Minimum front clearance. Minimum left clearance. Recommended minimum rear clearance. Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. 102 mm base channel.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.38 (35) 6.00 (152) Standard Secondary Conduit Location Top Entrance
14.00 (356)
1B 6.00 (152)
4.00 (102)
3 4 5 6
108.62 (2759)
30.00 (762) 7 4.00 (102)
7 3.00 (76) 2
50.38 (1280)
9 10
3.25 (83)
1.00 (25) 38.00 (965.2) Min. 4
4.75 (121)
3.00 (76) 1.12 (29)
11 12 13 14 15
Front
72.00 (1829) Min. 3 1.00 (25)
6.00 (152)
Figure 5.5-70. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
5.5-34

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV
September 2011
Sheet 05 092
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Notes: 1. Maximum # of CTS: Bus Side 2 sets of standard or 1 set of high accuracy Line/Cable side 3 sets of standard or 1 set of standard and 1 set of high accuracy 2. CT mounting bushings on bus side are provided only when bus side CTs are included. 3. Bottom entry is standard f or all power cables. Contact Eaton if top entry is required. 4. Refer to Figure 5.5-72 to 5.5-74 for dimensions.
Figure 5.5-71. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV

September 2011
Sheet 05 093

Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)38 kV
5.5-35
i ii
40.00 (1016.0)
1 2 3 4
100.00 (2540.0)
5 6 7 8 9
42.00 (1067.0)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 5.5-72. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts (Front Views)38 kV
Please note that an additional 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) clearance is required above the arc wall for arc exhaust.

Type of Vertical Section Breaker cell Main Bus Rating Amperes 1200 2000 2500 3000 1200 2000 2500 3000 Indoor Structure 3500 (1589) 3700 (1680) 4000 (1816) 4000 (1816) 3000 (1362) 3200 (1453) 3500 (1589) 3500 (1589)
Auxiliary cell
CA08104001E
5.5-36

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
September 2011
Sheet 05 094
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical SectionalDimensions in Inches (mm)
40.00 (1016.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
129.75 (3296.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
129.75 (3296.0)
Figure 5.5-73. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 095

Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV
5.5-37
Typical Floor PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)
i ii 1
42.00 (1066.8) Min.
2
Rear
7B
3.75 (9.5)
34.50 (87.6)
3.75 (9.5)
4.15 (10.5)
3.00 (7.6) Max.
3 4
1
Suggested locations for 0.50-Inch (12.7 mm) bolts or welding. Secondary control wiring conduit openings, conduit projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Minimum front clearance. Minimum left-hinged panel clearance. Recommended minimum rear clearance. Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Floor steel if used, must not exceed dimension under switchgear.
Line Compt
16.00 (40.6)
.88 (22.3)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2.00 (5.1)
Bus Compt
40.24 (102.2)
1
4
10
Unfinished Foundation Under Switchgear
129.75 (329.5)
14.63 (37.2)
7A
7B
Supplied by Customer
Breaker Compt
2.00 (5.1)
10
1.16 (2.9)
Finished foundation (within 0.06-inch [1.5 mm] clearance) must extend under switchgear minimum 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to a maximum 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit locations. Customers ground provisions, provided as shown by symbol on shop order sectional side views.
39.58 (100.5)
31.88 (81.0)
7.50 (19.0)
61.62 (156.5)
10
16.38 [41.6]
4.00-inch (101.6 mm) minimum channel supplied by customer.
1.50 (38.1)
7A
3.00 (7.6) Max.
1.70 (43.2)
3.00 (76.2)
42.00 (106.7)
7B
Front
38.00 (965.2) Min.
Alternate Secondary Conduit Location Top Entrance

42.00 (106.7)
16 17
84.00 (213.4) Min.

3
2.20 (5.6)
7.50 (19.1)
18 19 20
3.38 (8.6)
3.00 (7.6)
Figure 5.5-74. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV

21
5.5-38

Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearArc Exhaust Wall and Plenum
September 2011
Sheet 05 096
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Arc Exhaust Wallfor 27 and 38 kV Switchgear
Arc Exhaust wall Figure 5.5-75 is supplied as standard for all 27/38 kV arcresistant switchgear. The arc exhaust wall must be eld installed above the switchgear. Note minimum 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) ceiling clearance is required above the arc exhaust wall for proper venting of the arc exhaust. All 5/15 kV arc-resistant switchgear is provided with arc exhaust chamber (plenum). It is also installed in the eld. When using arc exhaust chamber, minimum ceiling clearance required above the arc exhaust chamber (plenum) is equal to that needed for eld installation of the chamber. Eaton recommends minimum 18.00-inch (457.2 mm). Refer to Figures 5.5-77 and 5.5-78 for typical arc exhaust chamber (plenum) and arc duct exit arrangements for arc-resistant switchgear installed inside an electrical room and inside an outdoor house.
Figure 5.5-75. Arc Exhaust Wall Above the Switchgear
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit for 5 and 15 kV Switchgear
Note: APPLICABLE TO ALL ARC-RESISTANT SWITCHGEAR:
For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical, minimum two vertical sections and one arc duct exit is required. For switchgear with enclosure arc rating of 50 kA rms symmetrical or higher, minimum three vertical sections and two arc duct exits are required.
Figure 5.5-76. Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit Above the Switchgear
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 05 097

Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
5.5-39
Typical LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

72.00 (1828.8) Minimum 48.00 (1219.2) Minimum
i ii
Arc Exhaust Caution! When equipment is energized and operating, all personnel stay clear of fenced area below the arc exhaust release point.
1 2 3 4
Wall
De-energize the equipment prior to entering the fenced area or prior to opening any switchgear rear doors.
= Up to 24.00 (610.0) Arc Duct Collar Rear
5 6 7 8
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum)
9 10 11
Front
Top View
Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Lineup
81.00 (2057.4)
Duct Cross Section 24.00 (609.6) x 24.00 (609.6)
12 13
Arc Exhaust Chamber (plenum above the switchgear) Arc Duct
32.00 (812.8)
14 15 16 17
Switchgear Front 95.00 (2413.0) 1090.50 (2781.3)
Wall Flashing Around the Duct by Others End Piece (arc exhaust)
Arc Plenum with Arc Duct Exit (Partial View) 95.00 (2413.0) Side View Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
18 19 20 21
1.25 (31.8)
1.25 (31.8)
Figure 5.5-77. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside Electrical Room and Outside Minimum Exhaust Area
CA08104001E
5.5-40

Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
September 2011
Sheet 05 098
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Layout (Continued)
Arc Exhaust Caution! When equipment is energized and operating, all personnel stay clear of fenced area below the arc exhaust release point. Front Min. 48.00 (1219.2) Min. 72.00 (1829.0) De-energize the equipment prior to entering the fenced area prior to opening any switchgear rear doors.
Fenced Area with Access Gate
Simplified Top View (not to scale)
Seismic Applications = 6.00 (152.4) Non-Seismic Applications can be Less than 6.00 (152.4) or as Required by the House Design
Outdoor House Minimum Recommended Clearance Above the Plenum = 18.00 (457.2) 32.00 Arc Exhaust Plenum (812.8) Arc Duct Exit Piece with Hinged Flap Assembly
Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Switchgear Height
House Wall with Doors for Access to Rear of the Switchgear Customers Power Cables From Below For the layout shown, doors on the house wall (not shown) provide access to rear of the switchgear. For rear access to switchgear from within the house, minimum 36.00 (914.4) clearance is required behind the switchgear.
Simplified Side View (not to scale)
Figure 5.5-78. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside an Outdoor House (Electrocenter)
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Medium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 06 001
Drawout Vacuum Breakers
6.0-1
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEF Front-Access Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
Contents
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-2 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-19 Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-31 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16347A Section 26 13 19.11
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Note: Viewing windows shown in the photo are illustration only.
20 21
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
CA08104001E
6.0-2

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 06 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Medium Voltage Drawout Breaker

Eatons newest Type MEF metalenclosed front-accessible switchgear with Type VCP-T/VCP-TL drawout vacuum circuit breakers provide centralized control and protection of medium voltage power equipment and circuits in industrial and commercial installations involving:

Transformer primary switching Transformer secondary main General purpose feeder circuit Bus tie circuit Generator Main Across-the-line starting of medium voltage motors Automatic transfer switching using main-main or main-tie-main congurations Harmonic lter bank switching Any combination of above applications
MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker with Integral Protective Relay
Type MEF metal-enclosed switchgear is designed for application at voltages up to 15 kV. It is a modularized design that can be assembled in various combinations to satisfy user application requirements. The switchgear can be supplied with one-high or two-high breaker arrangements. Type MEF switchgear is a front-accessible design, suitable for installation against the wall. For metal-clad, rear-access switchgear design, refer to Tab 5, type VCP-W switchgear.
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakerSide View
Seismic Qualication
Ratings

Standards
MEF metal-enclosed switchgear is designed to meet requirements of C37.20.3, IEEE standard for metalenclosed switchgear. Drawout circuit breakers and auxiliary drawers are designed to meet requirements of C37.20.2, IEEE standard for metal-clad switchgear. MEF also meets Canadian Standard, CSA C22.2 No. 31-04. Type VCP-T/VCP-TL vacuum circuit breakers used in MEF switchgear meet or exceed ANSI and IEEE standards applicable to AC high voltage circuit breakers rated on symmetrical current basis; C37.04, C37.06, C37.09.
Rated maximum voltage: 4.76 kV, 15 kV Rated main bus continuous current: 1200A, 2000A Circuit breaker ratings: continuous current 600, 1200, 2000A Rated short-circuit current: 16, 20, 25, 32 and 40 kA Refer to Table 6.0-3 and Table 6.0-4 for more details
Third-Party Certications
UL CSA
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 003

General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
6.0-3
Advantages

Reduced footprint Front-access design Maintenance-free bus joints Full benets of switching and interrupting capabilities of vacuum breakers Integral relaying and metering by use of breaker mounted protection that allows full short-circuit and overload coordination with upstream devices External control power is not required when using integral protection Optional external relays and meters MEF lls the application gap between metal-enclosed fusible load interrupter and metal-clad breaker switchgear designs Breakers shipped installed in the switchgear; no mismatch or misplaced circuit breakers at site and reduced installation cost
Secondary control connector interlock prevents breaker being moved into the connected position if the breaker control wiring connector is not correctly engaged with its compartment control wiring connector. Interlocking also prevents disconnection of circuit breaker control wiring connector, manually or automatically, while the circuit breaker is in the connected position and in any position between the connected and the test/disconnected Breaker frame remains grounded throughout its travel and in the connected position Choice of manually or electrically operated circuit breakers Integral spring charging handle Choice of breaker mounted protection for automatic short-circuit and overload protection without a need for external control power
Can also be used with external relays when equipped with optional shunt trip and external control power Easy-to-see contact erosion indicator is provided on the moving stem of the breaker. Only visual inspection is required to verify that the contacts have not worn out Easy-to-see contact wipe indicator is provided for verication by simple visual inspection that the loading springs are applying proper pressure to the contacts when the circuit breaker is closed One auxiliary switch (5a, 5b) included as standard on all breakers for breaker contact status Quality Assurance Certicate is included with each circuit breaker
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
FeaturesVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Vacuum circuit breakers provide high duty cycle, fast interruption, reduced maintenance, and are environmentally friendly Very compact and lightweight circuit breaker rated to 15 kV; weighs only 250440 lbs (114200 kg) Fully horizontal drawout feature with connect, test and disconnect positions provides ease of operation and interchangeability. Levering-in (racking) system is an integral part of the breaker All circuit breaker functions, indicators and controls are grouped on an easily accessible panel on front of the circuit breaker Levering interlock prevents the breaker from being racked out when in connected position and closed Trip-free interlock prevents breaker from closing, manually or electrically, while it is being levered or when in an intermediate position
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Fully Withdrawn on Extension Pan
18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
6.0-4

General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
September 2011
Sheet 06 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Choice of Breakers
VCP-T/VCP-TC Breakers VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breakers
VCP-T/VCP-TC Breaker
VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breaker

6 7 8 9
ANSI rateddrawout Equipped with stored energy spring operating mechanism 5/15 kV, 600/1200/2000A 25 kA and 40 kA rms symmetrical K=1 Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle Operating mechanism = 10,000 operations Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations
ANSI rateddrawout Equipped with linear magnetic actuator operating mechanism 5/15 kV, 600/1200A 25 kA rms symmetrical K=1 Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle Operating mechanism = 100,000 operations Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations
10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
VCP-T Breaker
Secondary Wiring Through-the-Window Accessories Electric Charging Motor Manual Charging Handle Contact Status (Open-Close) Spring Status (ChargedDischarged) Manual OFF Pushbutton Manual ON Pushbutton Operations Counter 5A/5B Auxiliary Switch Opening Spring OFF Key Lock Location Motor Cutoff Switch Integral Protective Relay (Optional) Cradle with Levering Mechanism Shock Bolt Handle Shock Bolt Packing Screw Lock Plate Levering Drive Nut Push/Pull Handle Magnetic Actuator Capacitor Controller Power Supply
VCP-TL Breaker
Notes: 1. Type VCP-TC and VCP-TLC are optional designs with capacitor switching capabilities. See Table 6.0-5 on Page 6.0-19. 2. VCP-TL/VCP-TLC breakers are designed such that in event of control power loss, internal capacitors provide sufcient energy to perform an electrical open operation up to 48 hours after the loss of control power.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 005

General DescriptionMEF Switchgear
6.0-5
FeaturesMEF Switchgear Assembly

Type MEF is metal-enclosed frontaccessible switchgear with many metal-clad features. Drawout circuit breaker and auxiliary (VT, CPT) compartments with automatic shutters to prevent accidental contact with high voltage circuits when breaker/auxiliary is removed No high voltage connections or circuits are exposed by opening of circuit breaker, VT or CPT compartment door All drawout elements are provided with mechanical interlocks for proper operating sequence under normal operating conditions as described in IEEE C37.20.2 All low voltage control wiring, devices and control compartments are isolated from high voltage circuits
MEF Switchgear is Modular

Available congurations include: Breaker over auxiliary Breaker over breaker Auxiliary over auxiliary Pull sections with various cable entry combinations
Control Compartment
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
CPT Drawer VT Drawer
MEF Switchgear is Front Accessible

Allows primary cable connections from the front of the switchgear All drawout elements (breaker, VT, CPT) are front accessible after opening their compartment door All eld connections required at shipping splits are accessible and made from the front No rear access space is required. The switchgear can be installed against the wall All non-accessible primary bus joints and connections are maintenance-freedo not require inspection or re-torque
6 7 8
MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit
MEF Switchgear is Compact

Breaker and auxiliary cells are 26.00-inch wide, 61.50-inch deep, 92.00-inch tall (660.6 mm wide, 1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall) Cable pull sections are 19.00 inches wide, 61.50 inches deep, 92.00 inches tall (482.6 mm wide, 1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall) Reduced front aisle space for breaker withdrawal saves overall oor space Shipping groups can be moved in place by forklift, or overhead lifting means
Control Compartment
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
MEF SwitchgearBreaker Over Breaker and Adjacent Pull Section
MEF Switchgear Single Breaker with Cables Out the Bottom
16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
6.0-6

September 2011
Sheet 06 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Each circuit breaker compartment is provided with steel shutters (breaker driven) that automatically rotate into position to cover stationary cell studs to prevent contact with high voltage circuit when the breaker is moved from connected to disconnected position. Provisions for padlocking the shutters open or closed is included as standard Rejection interlock pins prevent insertion of the circuit breaker if the circuit breaker and structure ratings are not compatible A silver-plated copper ground bus keeps the breaker grounded throughout its travel and in its connected position
Circuit Breaker Compartment Breaker in Connected Position
Circuit Breaker in Connected Position Indicator
Panel Space for LV Control Devices
Steel Shutters Cell Stabs
Provision for Padlock Shutters
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment
17 18 19 20 21
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment (Shutters Shown Open for Illustration)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 007

6.0-7
MEF switchgear permits use of up to four auxiliary drawers in one vertical unit. Those drawers can be used for installation of voltage or control power transformers.
i ii 1
VT Drawer
Each drawer can be fully withdrawn on extension rails, thus allowing easy access to VT, CPT and their primary fuses Safety shutter protects against accidental contact with primary stabs when the drawer is withdrawn A VT drawer can accommodate two VTs, each connected line-to-line (open delta), or three VTs, each connected line-to-ground A CPT drawer can accommodate a maximum of single-phase, 5 kVA CPT Mechanical interlock is included on CPT drawer that requires CPT secondary breaker to be opened prior to withdrawing the drawer to ensure that the primary circuit can only be disconnected under no-load Primary fuses are automatically grounded as the drawer is withdrawn from connected to disconnected position
Primary Shutter Secondary Disconnect
2 3 4
CPT Drawer
5
Interlock CPT Secondary Main Breaker Extension Rail
6 7
Drawout VT and CPT
8 9 10
Primary Fuses
11 12 13 14 15
Extension Rail
16 17 18 19 20 21
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment
CPT Withdrawn on Extension Rails
CA08104001E
6.0-8

September 2011
Sheet 06 008
i ii 1 2
Cable Pull Sections

CT/Sensor Secondary Wires Three-Phase CT Single-Phase Current Sensors CT/Sensor Primary Bushings
Pull Section Close-Up View CT/Sensor Mounting
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
MEF Cable Pull Section Adjacent to 2-High Breaker Cell
Zero Sequence Sensor Customers Cable Terminal Pads
Surge Arresters
Cable pull sections are included as required to allow top or bottom primary cable terminations from the front of the switchgear. Current sensors for use with breaker mounted integral protective relay, or current transformers for use with door mounted external relays are mounted in the primary circuits in the pull sections. Pull sections are also used as needed for bus transition and bus connections to other equipment. Pull section is metal-enclosed.
Zero Sequence CT
Pull Section Close-Up View Cable Termination and Zero Sequence CT/Sensor

September 2011
Sheet 06 009

6.0-9
Bus Compartments
Pull Section Breaker Over Breaker Cell
i ii 1 2 3
Main Bus Main Bus Joint with PVC Boot Main Bus Support
Risers to Main Bus
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Top ViewMain Bus Access
Type MEF switchgear is completely front accessible, designed to be installed against a wall. Access necessary for customers primary cable terminations, joining of bus joints (main bus and ground bus) at shipping splits, and terminations of customers control wires are provided from the front of the switchgear. Main bus is accessible from the top front of the switchgear. All bus bars are insulated throughout by epoxy coating using Eatons uidized bed process, and covered with PVC boots at joints. All joints are silver-plated. All bus joints that are not accessible are bolted with special hardware to eliminate need for future inspection or re-torque. Minimum 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) clearance to ceiling is recommended for main bus access.
Breaker Cell Primary Insulators Run Backs to Pull Section Copper Ground Bus (Accessible in Pull Section)
Rear View (Shown with Rear Covers Removed for Illustration Purposes)
CA08104001E
6.0-10

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 06 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Protection and Metering

Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T/ VCP-TL circuit breakers can be supplied with integral breaker mounted protective relays for overload and short-circuit protection and metering. The integral relays are self-powered from specially designed and tested current sensors. MEF switchgear can be supplied with external relays and meters connected to current transformers and powered from an external auxiliary power.
The power required to operate the protective relays basic overcurrent protection functions is provided by secondary output from the current sensors once the three-phase primary current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10 to 12% of the current sensor rating or singlephase primary current exceeds approximately 30% of the current sensor rating. The relay continuously analyzes secondary current signals from the current sensors and when preset current levels and time delay settings are exceeded, sends and a trip signal to the trip actuator of the circuit breaker. The trip actuator causes tripping of the circuit breaker by providing the required mechanical force for tripping. The trip actuator is automatically reset each time the circuit breaker opens. The current sensors, protective relay and circuit breaker are fully tested as a system for time-overcurrent response over the entire current range up to the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker. An optional Overcurrent Trip Switch (OTS) with one latching type Form C contact can be provided to indicate tripping of the circuit breaker by the action of an integral protective relay.
Rating Plug
A rating plug matched to phase current sensor rating is installed on all integral protective relays. The rating plug and phase current sensors dene maximum continuous current rating (In) of the circuit breaker. The rating plug and phase current sensors also determine the maximum instantaneous setting. If the rating plug is removed from the protective relay, the circuit breaker will trip if it is carrying current. See Page 6.0-25 for available phase current sensors and rating plugs.
Integral Protection and Metering
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers can be equipped with Eatons Type Digitrip 520V/520MCV or Digitrip 1150V protection relays The Digitrip 520V/520MCV is used for basic overcurrent protection The Digitrip 520MCV relay includes an Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS) feature that may be activated at the breaker or from remote. When activated, the ARMS feature lowers the available arc ash energy at the connected downstream device by faster clearing of the downstream fault The Digitrip 1150V is used for advanced current and voltage protections, and metering and communication functions. ARMS feature is included on 1150V relay as standard The 520V/520MCV and 1150V relays are designed and tested to work with Eatons Type V current sensors only
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 011

General Description
6.0-11
Digitrip 520V/520MCV Integral Protective Relay

The Digitrip 520V/520MCV integral protective relay is used when basic three-phase (50/51) and ground (50/ 51N or 50/51G) overcurrent protection is required. It does not contain provisions for communication. The relay is a microprocessor-based device that operates from secondary output of current sensors and provides true rms sensing of each phase and ground, and is suitable for application at either 50 or 60 Hz systems. The sensing current for ground protection can be derived from residual connections of the phase sensors or from an optional Type-V zero sequence current sensor. The relay does not require external control power for its protection functions and can be applied with Manually or Electrically Operated circuit breakers. The 520V/520MCV relay provides a number of time-overcurrent response curves and settings for phase, as well as ground protection and coordination with upstream or downstream devices. It can also be zone interlocked with other upstream or downstream relays for faster selective tripping. The 520MCV includes an Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS) feature when enabled, it reduces arc ash incident energy during equipment maintenance.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 6.0-1. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 520V Table 6.0-1. Digitrip 520V Protection and Coordination
IEEE Device Number 51 Protection Function Available Settings (50 or 60 Hz)
7 8
Phase Long Delay

Pickup setting (Ir) Time delay, I2t Thermal memory Pickup setting Time delay, FLAT Time delay, I2t Pickup setting Pickup setting Time delay, FLAT Time delay, I2t Phase short delay and ground fault Pickup 2.5 x rating plug amperes 4.0 x rating plug amperes 6.0 x rating plug amperes 8.0 x rating plug amperes 10.0 x rating plug amperes (0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0) times In (2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 seconds) at 6 times Ir Enable/disable (1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times Ir, M1 0.1,0.3,0.4, st1, st2 seconds (0.1, 0.3, 0.5 seconds) at 8 times Ir (2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times In, M1, OFF (0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75) times In, OFF 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 second (0.1, 0.3, 0.5) at 0.625 times In Enable/disable
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Phase Short Delay

50T
Phase Instantaneous
50
Ground Fault
51/50G

Settings R1 R2 R3 R4 R5

ARMS Mode Settings
Digitrip Model 520MCV
In = Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes. M1 = Maximum Setting based on In = (12 x In) for In = 1600 and 2000A; = (14 x In) for all other values of In st1 and st2 settings are based on In In st1 st2 100A 0.5 sec 0.5 sec 200400A 0.5 sec 1.0 sec 6002000A 1.0 sec 2.0 sec 2 I t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x Ir). For currents greater than (8 x Ir), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response. When using phase residual connection scheme, In is current sensor/rating plug rating in ampere. When using zero sequence connection scheme, In is zero sequence current sensor rating in ampere. I2t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x In). For currents greater than (0.625 x In), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
CA08104001E
6.0-12

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 06 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
Figure 6.0-2. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 1150V The Digitrip 1150V integral protective relay is used for advanced current and voltage protection, and metering and communication. The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS) feature is included on 1150V units as standard. When enabled, it reduces arc ash incident energy during equipment maintenance. The relay is a microprocessor-based device that operates from secondary output of current sensors and external voltage transformers, provides true rms sensing of each phase and ground, and is suitable for application at either 50 or 60 Hz systems. The sensing current for ground protection can be derived from residual connections of the phase sensors or from an optional Type-V zero sequence current sensor. The basic overcurrent protection functions of this relay are self-powered from the current owing in the secondary of the current sensors. It does require external auxiliary power for its voltage and frequency related protection and alarm functions, and metering displays. The relay can be applied with manually or electrically operated circuit breakers. The 1150V relay provides following ANSI/IEEE protection functions: 51/50, 51/50N or 51/50G, 37, 46, 27, 59, 81U, 81O, 47 and 32. The 1150V relay provides a number of time-overcurrent response curves and settings for phase, as well as ground protection and coordination with upstream or downstream devices. It can also be zone interlocked with other upstream or downstream relays for faster and selective tripping. In addition to display of metering values as noted in Figure 6.0-2 above, the relay provides data through its front panel display to help plan inspection and maintenance schedules of the circuit breaker and the circuit it is protecting. Those data include: Total number of Close Operations by circuit breaker since last reset The last time the circuit breaker was operated (Opened or Closed or Tripped) with time and date Total number of instantaneous and short delay trip operations by the circuit breaker since last reset Total number of overloads (long delay trips) and ground fault trips since last reset
The 1150V relay is also suitable for communication using the INCOM communications system. All monitored values, trip/alarm events, and captured waveforms can be displayed on a remote computer. Breakers can also be opened/closed remotely with password protection. Peripheral translator/gateway devices are available to convert INCOM to other protocols, such as Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, etc. The relay has a built-in 24-character alphanumeric LED display to allow programming and viewing of settings, menus, trip and alarm logs, and real time metering data. Because the relay is installed on the circuit breaker, the breaker compartment door must be opened for viewing or programming of the relay functions. An optional Breaker Interface Module can be used for monitoring, viewing and programming of multiple relays from an alternate location, eliminating the need to open circuit breaker compartment door. Also available is wireless transceiver for short-range infrared wireless communication between a hand-held Palm personal data assistant (PDA) and the Digitrip 1150V relays with compartment doors closed.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 013

General Description
6.0-13
Table 6.0-2. Digitrip 1150V Protection and Coordination

IEEE Protection Device Function Number Available Settings (50 or 60 Hz)
ARMS Mode Available Trip Current Settings

The 1150V unit provides the following pick-up settings:
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Phase Long Delay

51 Pickup setting (Ir) Time delay, I2t Time delay, I4t IEEE moderately inverse IEEE very inverse IEEE extremely inverse Thermal memory Pickup setting Time delay, FLAT Time delay, I2t Pickup setting Pickup setting Time delay, FLAT Time delay, I2t Thermal memory Phase short delay and ground fault Pickup Time delay Pickup Time delay Pickup Time delay Pickup Time delay Pickup50 Hz system Pickup60 Hz system Time delay Pickup50 Hz system Pickup60 Hz system Time delay Pickup Time delay Pickup Time delay (0.41.0, in steps of 0.05) times In (224 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times Ir (15 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times Ir Time dials of 0.15.0, in steps of 0.1 Time dials of 0.25.0, in steps of 0.1 Time dials of 0.25.0, in steps of 0.1 Enable/disable (1.512 or 1.514, in steps of 0.5) times Ir 0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05 (0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 8 times Ir (212 or 214) times In, OFF (0.241.0, in steps of 0.01) times In, OFF 0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05. (0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 0.625 times In Yes Enable/disable 75% current unbalance, OFF 130 seconds 525% current unbalance, OFF 0240 seconds 45110% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF 1250 seconds 80135% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF 1250 seconds 4852 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF 5862 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF 0.25 seconds, in steps of 0.02 4852 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF 5862 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF 0.25 seconds, in steps of 0.02 550% voltage unbalance, OFF 1250 seconds 165000 kW 1250 seconds
2.5 x rating plug amperes 4.0 x rating plug amperes 6.0 x rating plug amperes 8.0 x rating plug amperes 10.0 x rating plug amperes

Phase Short Delay

50T
Metering, Power Quality and Other Features

Phase Instantaneous
50 51/50G
Ground Fault

37
Phase Loss (Current Based)
Current Unbalance
46
Undervoltage
27
Overvoltage
59
Underfrequency
81U
Overfrequency
81O
Voltage Unbalance
47
Individual phase and ground currents in rms amperes, real time Individual phase and ground currents in rms amperes, 5-minute average Individual phase and ground currents, maximum and minimum since last reset Line-to-line voltages Forward/reverse kW, kW demand and maximum kW demand kVA, kVA demand and maximum kVA demand Watt and VA demand, maximum W and VA demand Forward/reverse kWh kVAh kVAh and kWh pulse initiate Total harmonic distortion for each phase current Individual harmonic currents up through 27th harmonic for each phase Power factor, minimum and maximum Frequency Circuit breaker operations count Programmable alarms Programmable output contacts (breaker close, alarm, trip)
Reverse Power
32

Metering Accuracy
1% of full-scale (In) for currents in the range of 5100% of (In) 3% of full-scale for voltages (full scale is equal to phase-to-phase voltage) 4% of full-scale for power and energy readings
In = Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes. Thermal memory feature is available when using I2t or I4t curves only. Maximum Setting is based on In: = (12 x In) for In = 1600 and 2000A; = (14 x In) for all other values of In Upper limit of this setting is 0.5 for 100A sensor/rating plug, 1.0 for 200 to 400A sensor/rating plug, and 2.0 for sensors/rating plugs rated above 600A. I2t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x Ir). For currents greater than (8 x Ir), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response. I2t response curve for phase short delay is only available when phase long delay response selected is I2t. When using phase residual connection scheme, In is current sensor/rating plug rating in amperes. When using zero sequence connection scheme, In is zero sequence current sensor rating in amperes. I2t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x In). For currents greater than (0.625 x In), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
CA08104001E
6.0-14

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 06 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Breaker Interface Module II
Wireless Transceiver
External Protection and Metering

Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T circuit breakers can be supplied with external relays, such as Eatons EDR-3000, EDR-5000 and EMR-3000, and meters such as Eatons Power Xpert Meter family. The external relays and meters are typically installed on the circuit breaker or control compartment doors and connected into the secondary circuits of conventional CTs and VTs. External control power may be required for correct operation of the external relays depending on the type of relays used. Eatons EDR-3000 is a microprocessorbased multifunction overcurrent protection relay designed to provide the following ANSI protection functions:
Breaker Interface Module II
Wireless Transceiver
51/50, 51N/50N or 51G/50G. EDR-3000 relays can be zone interlocked for faster selective tripping. Refer to Tab 4 for more details of EDR-3000. Eatons EDR-5000 is a microprocessorbased multifunction protection and metering unit designed to provide the following ANSI protection functions: 51/50, 51N/50N, 51G/50G, 50BF, 25, 32, 46, 67, 27, 59, 47, 78V, 81-O, 81-U, 86. The EDR-5000 can be zone interlocked for faster selective tripping. It can also be used for automatic open or closed transition transfer of three breaker main-tie-main systems. Refer to Tab 4 for more details of the EDR-5000. Eatons EMR-3000 is a microprocessorbased motor protection relay designed to provide the following ANSI protection functions: 49, 50, 51, 46, 50G, 51G, 37, 38, 66, 2/19, 74, 86. Refer to Tab 4 for more details of the EDR-3000. Eatons Power Xpert and IQ include microprocessor-based metering and communication devices that can be provided in MEF for use with conventional CTs and VTs. Refer to Tab 3 for further information on these devices.
The Breaker Interface Module is a microprocessor-based operator interface that can be locally mounted on one of the switchgear compartment doors or remote from the switchgear. It is used for access, monitoring, display of parameters, and programming of multiple Digitrip 1150V relays. It communicates to the relays over a subnetwork, with up to 50 relays. The Breaker Interface Module can also communicate using the INCOM communications system via an appropriate PONI (product operated network interface) module. Peripheral translator/gateway devices are available to convert INCOM to other protocols, such as Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, and so forth.
Eatons wireless transceiver module (IRMINT) provides short-range infrared (IR) wireless communication between a hand-held Palm personal data assistant (PDA) and the Digitrip 1150V relays. The wireless transceiver module can be locally mounted on one of the switchgear compartment doors or remote from the switchgear. The wireless transceiver communicates up to 64 supported INCOM devices over INCOM subnetwork. It communicates with standard hand-held device with Palm OS operating system through infrared wireless link. From the handheld device, the user can perform relays set point and data monitoring, programming, data collection and remote control functions, from a distance of up to 1 meter, without a need to touch the switchgear equipment.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 015

6.0-15

Eatons Type MEF metal-enclosed switchgear (2.415 kV) is corona-free by design. By making switchgear assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made its standard switchgear more reliable. However, as indicated above, with time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that cause partial discharges to develop in switchgear operating at voltages 4000V and above. Type MEF switchgear can be equipped with factory-installed partial discharge sensors and partial discharge sensing relay for continuous monitoring of the partial discharges under normal operation. Timely detection of insulation degradation through increasing partial discharges can identify potential problems so that corrective actions can be planned and implemented long before permanent deterioration develops. Partial discharge detection can be the foundation of an effective predictive maintenance program. Trending of partial discharge data over time allows prediction of failures, that can be corrected before catastrophic failure occurs. The PD sensing and monitoring system consists of Eatons InsulGard relay and PD sensors specically developed for application in the switchgear to work with the relay. Partial discharges within the MEF switchgear compartment are detected by the installation of a small donut type radio frequency current transformer (RFCT) sensor over oating stress shields of the specially designed CT/sensor primary bushings. Partial discharges in the customers power cables (external discharges) are detected by the installation of the RFCT around ground shields of the incoming or outgoing power cables termination. Output signals from sensors (RFCTs) are wired out to terminal blocks for future or eld use, or connected to the InsulGard relay. One InsulGard relay can monitor up to 15 output signals, including temperature and humidity. The temperature and humidity sensors are included with each InsulGard relay system. The relay continuously monitors the switchgear primary system for partial discharges and provides an alarm signal (contact closure) when high PD level is detected. Data analysis and diagnostics by Eaton engineers can also be provided by remote communication with the InsulGard relay. The sensors and InsulGard relay are optional in MEF switchgear. In 5/15 kV MEF switchgear (refer to Figure 6.0-4), primary epoxy bushings with stress shield and RFCT sensors for measurement of internal, as well as external partial discharges are all optional. InsulGard relay is also optional. When specied, one set of CT/sensor primary bushings (located on the line side) with stress shield and associated RFCT sensor is provided in every incoming and outgoing primary circuit. An additional RFCT sensor for each incoming and outgoing power cable circuits can be provided as required. The RFCT output signals can be connected directly to InsulGard relay for continuous monitoring of partial discharges or can be used for periodic eld measurements. One InsulGard relay can monitor up to 15 output signals.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
RFCT Sensor

Partial discharge is a common name for various forms of electrical discharges such as corona, surface tracking and discharges internal to the insulation. It partially bridges the insulation between the conductors. These discharges are essentially small arcs occurring in or on the surface of the insulation system when voltage stress exceeds a critical value. With time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that result in partial discharges. Partial discharges start at a low level and increase as more insulation becomes deteriorated. Examples of partial discharge in switchgear are surface tracking across bus insulation, or discharges in the air gap between the bus and a support, such as where a bus passes through an insulating window between the sections of the switchgear. If partial discharge process is not detected and corrected, it can develop into a full-scale insulation failure followed by an electrical fault. Most switchgear ashover and bus failures are a result of insulation degradation caused by various forms of partial discharges.
Temp Sensor Humidity Sensor
Input T Terminal Block
InsulGard Relay
Optional Modem
16 17 18
Signals (up to 15 T Total) from PD Sensors ( Capacitors, , RTD Input, etc..)
120 Vac Auxiliary Power
Output Alarm Status
19 20 21
CA08104001E
6.0-16

September 2011
Sheet 06 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment. RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear.
Figure 6.0-4. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of CT/sensor bushings for all incoming and outgoing primary circuits.

September 2011
Sheet 06 017

General Description
6.0-17
Power XpertIntegrated Monitoring Protection and Control

Medium voltage MEF switchgear, when equipped with Eaton relays such as Digitrip 520MCV, Digitrip 1150V, EDR-3000, EDR-5000, EMR-3000 and the Power Xpert family of meters, is ideally suited for Eatons Power Xpert communications system. Power Xpert uses the proven INCOM chip for highly reliable, two-way communications (even in noisy industrial environments) for subnetworks within the switchgear. Data from these relays and meters can be accessed from a remote computer via Ethernet or twisted-shielded pair. A Power Xpert Gateway can provide Web browser access to the devices, as well as Modbus TCP communications to Power Xpert Software or third-party software packages. These devices can also communicate to existing PowerNet systems via twistedshielded pair or Ethernet. Refer to Tab 2 for more information on Power Xpert.
Breaker Lifting Device
Used for installing/removing the breaker onto/from the Breaker Extension Pan.
Dummy Element
Dummy element is a drawout element with primary disconnects similar to a drawout circuit breaker, but consists of solid copper conductors in place of vacuum interrupters, and is designed for manual racking. It is typically used as drawout disconnect link in the primary system for circuit isolation or bypass. The device is insulated to suit the voltage rating of the switchgear and will carry required levels of short-circuit current, but it is not rated for any current interruption. It must be key interlocked with all source devices such that it can only be inserted into or removed from its connected position only after the primary circuit that it is to be applied is completely de-energized. Before using a dummy element, it is recommended that each user develop detailed operating procedure consistent with safe operating practices. Only qualied personnel should be authorized to use the dummy element.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Manual Ground and Test Device

The ground and test device is a drawout element that may be inserted into a breaker compartment in place of a circuit breaker to provide access to the primary circuits to permit the temporary connections of grounds or testing equipment to the high voltage circuits. The device includes six terminals for connections to primary circuits. Selection of upper or lower terminals for grounding is accomplished manually by cable connections before the device is inserted into the desired breaker compartment. The circuit selected for grounding using this device must be checked by some other means, prior to insertion of the device into the compartment, to be sure it is de-energized. High potential testing of cable or phase checking of circuits are typical tests that may be performed. The device is insulated to suit voltage rating of the switchgear and will carry required levels of short-circuit current, but it is not rated for any current interruption. Before using a ground and test device, it is recommended that each user develop detailed operating procedure consistent with safe operating practices. Only qualied personnel should be authorized to use the ground and test device.
Functional Test Kit (for Testing of Digitrip 520V and 1150V Relays)
Functional Test Kit is a hand-held battery powered tester capable of testing trip elements of 520V and 1150V protective relays. The test kit allows testing of: Relay Power Up, Instantaneous Trip, Short Delay Trip, Long Delay Pickup and Trip, and Ground Fault Trip, when applicable.
Levering Crank
Used for moving the breaker between the disconnected/test and connected position.
Breaker Extension Pan

Used for installing/removing the breaker to/from its compartment.
Breaker Lifting Yoke

Used with the breaker for installation/ removal of the breaker onto/from the breaker extension pan using optional breaker lifter or other overhead lifting means.
Test Jumper
Allows connection of breaker secondary controls disconnect to cell disconnect when the breaker is outside its compartment.
VT/CPT Drawer Extension Rails

Allows withdrawal of VT/CPT auxiliary drawer for inspection and access to primary fuses and VT/CPT.
CA08104001E
6.0-18

Application
September 2011
Sheet 06 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
MEF Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control (ATC)

Application
Eatons MEF switchgear with an automatic transfer control system is an integrated assembly of drawout VCP-T/VCP-TL breakers, sensing devices and control components available in 5 through 15 kV classes. Automatic transfer control is typically applied where the continuity of service for critical loads from two power sources in either a two-breaker (one load) or three-breaker (two loads) conguration is desired. MEF switchgear with an automatic transfer control system can meet most automatic throwover requirements as it has a wide variety of operational sequences embodied in one standard automatic transfer control system.
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC controller is equipped to display history information either via the front panel or over the PowerNet power monitoring system. Source 1 and Source 2 Run Time, Available Time and Connect Time are available, as well as Load Energized Time, Number of Transfers, and the Date, Time and Reason for the last 16 transfers. For communications capability, the ATC controller can be equipped with a PONI card that will allow the user to communicate with the unit via PowerNet software (see Tab 2). All settings for purchased options can be set from the faceplate of the unit or downloaded over PowerNet. Software allows for charting of key historical data, as well as providing the capability to monitor and control the transfer switch from a remote location. See Tab 2 for further information.
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer Control Using ATC Controller

Eatons ATC controller continuously monitors all three phases on both sources for correct voltages. Should the voltage of the normal source be lost while the voltage of the alternate source remains normal, the voltage sensing function in the ATC controller will change state starting the time delay function. If the voltage of the normal source is not restored by the end of the time delay interval, the normal breaker will open and the alternate source breaker will close, restoring power to the load.
Typical Three-Breaker (Two Mains and Normally Open Tie) Automatic Transfer Control
The automatic transfer switchgear assembly includes two main breakers and one tie breaker, and an integrated automatic transfer control system containing sensing devices, low voltage logic control and auxiliary equipment. The transfer control system monitors both sources for correct voltages. An automatic-manual transfer selector switch is provided for selection of manual or automatic operating mode. In manual mode, all three breakers can be manually operated. Interlocking is provided in manual mode of operation to prevent closing all three breakers at the same time. In the automatic mode, the basic sequence of operation based upon two normally energized sources is carried out as follows. Normal operation is with the main breakers closed and the tie breaker open. Upon detection of an undervoltage(s) to the line side of a main breaker, and after a eldadjustable time delay, that main breaker opens and after an additional eldadjustable time delay, the tie breaker closes to restore power to the affected portion of the facility. Upon restoration of voltage to the line side of the main breaker, and after a eld-adjustable time delay, the tie breaker opens and after a eld-adjustable time delay, the opened main breaker closes. An interlocking is provided to prevent closing all three breakers simultaneously in manual mode.
ATC Controller
Standard Features

Voltage sensing on both sources is provided by the ATC controller Lights to indicate status of switches, sources, and so on Interlocking to prevent paralleling of sources via software Control power for the automatic transfer control system is derived from the sensing voltage transformers Manual override operation Selectable closed with sync check or open transition on return to normal Programmable time delays on both sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY Single-source responsibility; all basic components are manufactured by Eaton
Optional Features
Lockout on phase and/or ground overcurrents and/or internal bus faults
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 019

Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
6.0-19
Technical Data
Table 6.0-3. MEF Switchgear Assembly Rated Per ANSI Standards
Rated Maximum Voltage Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage, 60 Hz, 1 Minute Impulse Withstand Voltage (BIL) Rated Main Bus Continuous Current Rated Short-Time Short-Circuit Current Withstand (2-Second) I kV rms 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 15 15 15 15 kV rms 19 19 19 19 36 36 36 36 kV Peak 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 Rated Momentary Short-Circuit Current Withstand (10 Cycle) 2.6 * I 1.55 * I (for Reference Only) kA rms Asymmetrical 39 39 62 62 39 39 62 62
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Mechanical Endurance No Load C-O Operations Cable Charging Breaking Current Three-Phase MVA at Rated Maximum Voltage (for Reference Only) 1.732 * V * I MVA 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 130 130 165 210 260 330 420 520 650 830 1040
kA rms Symmetrical kA Crest 25 25 40 40 25 25 40 40 65 65 104 104 65 65 104 104
Table 6.0-4. Available Type VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09)
Rated Maximum Voltage Rated Voltage Range Factor Circuit Breaker Type Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 60 Hz, 1 Minute Impulse Withstand Voltage (BIL) 1.2 x 50 microsec Rated Continuous Current Rated Short-Circuit Current at Rated Maximum Voltage Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting & 2-Second Short-Time Current Carrying Capability K*I kA rms Symmetrical 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 16 20 25 31.5 40 16 20 25 31.5 40 Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V kV rms 50VCP-T16 50VCP-T16 50VCP-T20 50VCP-T25 50VCP-T32 50VCP-T40 kV rms kV Peak 60 60 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95 Amperes 600 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000 600, 1200, 2000
I kA rms Symmetrical 16 16 20 25 31.5 40 16 20 25 31.5 40
2.6 * K * I kA Crest 42 42 52 65 82 104 42 52 65 82 104
Amperes
4.76 19 4.76 19 4.76 19 4.76 19 4.76 19 4.76 19 36 36 36 36 36
20,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
150VCP-T16 15 150VCP-T20 15 150VCP-T25 15 150VCP-T32 15 150VCP-T40 15

Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms). Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Table 6.0-5. Type VCP-TC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching) Type VCP-TC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-T circuit breakers, plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Cable Charging 25A
Grounded Capacitor Banks Single Bank 250 and 1000A Back-to-Back 250A with Inrush Current 4 kApk at 5.9 kHz and 1000A with Inrush Current 15 kApk at 25 kHz
Type 50 VCP-T32C, 50 VCP-T40C, 150 VCP-T32C and 150 VCP-T40C circuit breakers only.
Notes: Ratings of 250 and 1000A cover capacitor bank applications from 751000A. Type VCP-TC breakers are considered denite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
CA08104001E
6.0-20

Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 06 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Technical Data
Table 6.0-6. Available Type VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09)
Rated Maximum Voltage Circuit Breaker Type Insulation Level Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 60 Hz, 1 Minute Rated Rated Continuous Short-Circuit Impulse Current Withstand Current at Rated Voltage Maximum (BIL) Voltage 1.2 x 50 microsec I kV rms kV Peak 60 60 60 95 95 95 Amperes 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 kA rms Symmetrical 16 20 25 16 20 25 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting & 2-Second Short-Time Current Carrying Capability K*I Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary) Cable Charging Breaking Current Three-Phase MVA at Rated Maximum Voltage (for Reference Only) Mechanical Endurance No Load C-O Operations
V kV rms 50VCP-TL16 50VCP-TL20 50VCP-TL25 150VCP-TL16 150VCP-TL20 150VCP-TL25

Rated Voltage Range Factor K
2.6 * K * I
Amperes 1.732 * V * I MVA 25 25 25 25 25 25 130 165 210 420 520 650 Vacuum Mechanism Interrupter 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000
kA rms kA Crest Symmetrical 16 20 25 16 20 25 42 52 65 42 52 65
4.76 19 4.76 19 4.76 19 15 15 15 36 36 36
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms). Operating duty for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Table 6.0-7. Type VCP-TLC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching) Type VCP-TLC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-TL circuit breakers, plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Cable Charging 25A Grounded Capacitor Banks Single Bank 250 and 630A Back-to-Back 250A with inrush current 15 kApk at 5 kHz and 630A with inrush current 15 kApk at 1.5 kHz
Note: Ratings of 250 and 630A cover capacitor bank applications from 75 to 630A. Note: Type VCP-TLC breakers are considered denite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 021

6.0-21
Type VCP-T Circuit Breaker Operating Times

The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break) are shown in Table 6.0-8. Figure 6.0-5 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with applicable VCP-T circuit breaker timings. Table 6.0-8. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-T Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage
Rated Control Voltage 48V, 125V, 250 Vdc 120V, 240 Vac 120V or 240 Vac capacitor trip Optionalundervoltage trip release 48V, 125V, 250 Vdc
i ii 1 2 3 4
Breaker Rating All All All All
Closing Time Milliseconds 2840 2840
Opening Time Milliseconds 1727 1727 4060
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time. Clearing Time Interrupting Time 2 2.5 Cycles Based on 1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay Contact Parting Time (S-Factor Based on This) (S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers) 3 Cycles (50 ms)
5 6 7
Release (Tripping) Delay Time 1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum 2 Seconds Maximum Protecting Relay Operating Time Auxiliary Relay Operating Time
Opening Time 25 33 msec
Arcing Time (5 17 msec)
8 9 10
Shunt Trip Operating Time
Mechanism Operating Time
ShortCircuit Begins
Main Contact Parts
Last Pole Clears
11 12 13
Figure 6.0-5. Sequence of Events for VCP-T Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time.
0 Load
29 ms Opening Time
29
12 ms Arcing Dead Time (With Arcing) 52 ms 4 52-1 b Contact ms Makes 60 ms Closing Time Dead Time (No Arcing) 64 ms
89
Time (msec)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
52-1
52-2
52-1
52-2
Source #1
Source #2 Transfer Initiate Signal Standard b Contact
+ Transfer Initiate Control Supply 52-1 b
Trip 52-1
Close 52-2
Figure 6.0-6. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-T Circuit Breakers

6.0-22

September 2011
Sheet 06 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Type VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Operating Times

The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break) are shown in Table 6.0-9. Figure 6.0-7 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with applicable VCP-TL circuit breaker timings. Table 6.0-9. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-TL Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage, Typical
Rated Control Voltage 3660 Vac, 3672 Vdc 100240 Vac, 100353 Vdc
Breaker Rating All All
Closing Time Milliseconds 60 60
Opening Time Milliseconds 2533 2533
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time. Clearing Time Interrupting Time 2 2.5 Cycles Based on 1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay Contact Parting Time (S-Factor Based on This) (S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers) 3 Cycles (50 ms)
Release (Tripping) Delay Time 1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum 2 Seconds Maximum Protecting Relay Operating Time Auxiliary Relay Operating Time
Opening Time 25 33 msec
Arcing Time (5 17 msec)
Shunt Trip Operating Time
Mechanism Operating Time
ShortCircuit Begins
Main Contact Parts
Last Pole Clears
Figure 6.0-7. Sequence of Events for VCP-TL Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time.
0 Load
29 ms Opening Time
29
12 ms Arcing Dead Time (With Arcing)
89
Time (msec)
52-1
52-2
52-1
52-2
52 ms 4 52-1 b Contact Makes ms 60 ms Closing Time Dead Time (No Arcing) 64 ms
16 17
Source #1
Source #2 Transfer Initiate Signal Standard b Contact
+ Transfer Initiate 52-1 b
18 19 20 21
Control Supply
Trip 52-1
Close 52-2
Figure 6.0-8. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-TL Circuit Breakers
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 023

Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control Power Requirements
Table 6.0-12. Undervoltage Release Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers
6.0-23
Table 6.0-10. Shunt Trip Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers

Rated Control Voltage Operational Voltage Range Volts 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 110 Vdc 125 Vdc 220 Vdc 250 Vdc 110 Vac 120 Vac 220 Vac 240 Vac
Inrush Power Remark Consumption at Rated Voltage VA 250 250 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 Capacitor Trip Capacitor Trip Capacitor Trip Capacitor Trip
Rated Operational Dropout Inrush Continuous Power Control Voltage Voltage Range Power Consumption Voltage Range (3560%) Consumption at Rated Voltage Volts 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 110 Vdc 2026 4153 94121 Volts 814 1729 3966 4475 77132 88150 3966 4272 77132 84144 VA 250 275 450 450 450 450 450 450 400 400 VA 18 18 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1428 2856 77121 70140 154242 140280 77121 104127 154242 208254
125 Vdc 106138 220 Vdc 187242 250 Vdc 213275 110 Vac 94121 120 Vac 102132 220 Vac 187242 240 Vac 204264
These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker, and require external control power. Please specify each of these accessories as required for the application.
Table 6.0-11. Spring Release Coil (Closing Coil) Ratings, VCP-T Breakers
Rated Control Voltage Operational Voltage Range Volts 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 110 Vdc 125 Vdc 220 Vdc 250 Vdc 110 Vac 120 Vac 220 Vac 240 Vac
Table 6.0-13. Spring Charging Motor Ratings, VCP-T Breakers

Rated Control Voltage Operational Voltage Range Volts 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 110 Vdc 2027 3856 94121 Running Inrush Current Current Ampere 8 4 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 Ampere 32 16 12 12 8 8 12 12 8 8 Power Consumption at Rated Voltage VA 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Spring Charging Time Seconds 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Inrush Power Consumption at Rated Voltage VA 250 250 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 450
2027 3856 94121 100140 187242 200280 94121 104127 187242 208254
125 Vdc 100140 220 Vdc 187242 250 Vdc 200280 110 Vac 120 Vac 220 Vac 240 Vac
94121 104127 187242 208254
Table 6.0-14. VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Control Power Requirements

Rated Control Voltage Electro-Magnetic Controller Internal Capacitors Charging Maximum Inrush Peak A 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac
Inrush Duration ms 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
Charging Current Peak A 1 1 1 1 1
Minimum Close, Carry and Interrupting Maximum Charging Current Ratings Needed for External Contacts Duration Sec. 30 30 30 30 30 Close Contact 11 mA at 96 Vdc 11 mA at 96 Vdc 11 mA at 96 Vdc 11 mA at 96 Vdc 11 mA at 96 Vdc Trip Contact 4 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0.52 14 22 17 22
Data provided are for charging of internal capacitors from a fully discharged state. In normal operation, the capacitors recharge in about 15 seconds after each closing operation.
CA08104001E
6.0-24

Technical DataCircuit Breaker Auxiliary and Other Switches
September 2011
Sheet 06 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Breaker Auxiliary Switch

All VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers are supplied with an auxiliary switch with 5NO and 5NC contacts. On Manually Operated breakers, all 5NO and 5NC contacts are available for customers use. On Electrically Operated circuit breakers, 1NO and 1NC contacts are used for breaker status indicating lights (red and green lights) and remaining 4NO and 4NC contacts are generally available for other control functions or customers use. The auxiliary switch is a heavy-duty, double-break type switch with wipe type contacts. The switch contact ratings and operating times are given in Table 6.0-15 and Figure 6.0-9.
Table 6.0-15. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Contact Ratings

Continuous Current in Amperes 20 20 Control Circuit Voltage 120 Vac 240 Vac 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

15 15 10 10 16 16 16 16 10 10 5 5
Signal:
Initiation of Close Signal
Initiation of Shunt Trip Signal T Closed Open Time t = 17 27 ms Closed t 3 ms "a" Breaks 7 ms Before "b" Makes t +10 ms to +4 ms Closed Open Open
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Main Contacts
C Time t = 28 40 ms
MOC Switch
The mechanism operated cell (MOC) switch is not available in MEF switchgear. When number of NO and NC contacts available from the Breaker Auxiliary Switch are not sufcient for controls or customers use, an auxiliary relay energized by one of the available NO or NC contacts must be used as needed. The use of auxiliary relay requires external control power.
Breaker Auxiliary Switch "a" Contact
t 3 ms "b" Breaks B k 6 ms Before "a" Makes
Breaker Auxiliary Switch "b" Contact
3 ms
Figure 6.0-9. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times, at Rated Control Voltage Table 6.0-16. TOC Switch Contact Ratings
Continuous Current in Amperes 20 20 Control Circuit Voltage 120 Vac 240 Vac 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
TOC Switch
The optional truck operated cell (TOC) switch operates when the circuit breaker is levered into or out of the operating (connected) position. In MEF TOC option includes two micro switches, one for connected position, and one for test/disconnected position, each with 1 Form C contact. If additional contacts are required, auxiliary relay must be used. The use of auxiliary relay requires external control power. The TOC switch contact ratings are given in Table 6.0-16.
Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes

15 12.5 15 12.5 6 5 0.5 0.05 0.5 0.05 0.2 0.03
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 025

Technical DataCurrent Sensors and Instrument Transformers
6.0-25
Phase Current Sensors

Eaton Type-V phase current sensors are specically designed and tested to function with Eatons 520V and 1150V integral protective relays and the Type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker. The phase current sensors are installed in the primary circuit, external to the circuit breaker, over a set of specially designed insulated bushings. The bushings and current sensors are tested as an assembly for the same impulse withstand (BIL) rating as that of the switchgear in which they are installed. The power required to operate the relays basic overcurrent protection functions is provided by secondary output from the current sensors once the three-phase primary current through the circuit breaker exceeds approximately 10 to 12% of the current sensor rating or single-phase primary current exceeds approximately 30% of the current sensor rating. The current sensors are designed to supply sensing and operating power to Eatons 520V and 1150V integral protective relays. They are not suitable for use with any other relays or meters. Primary current rating of the current sensors denes maximum continuous current rating (In) of the primary circuit in which they are installed, regardless of the circuit breaker frame rating. For example, an 800A current sensor installed in a primary circuit controlled by 1200A rated circuit breaker, denes 800A as the maximum continuous current that can be carried through that circuit. The current sensors also determine the maximum instantaneous setting that can be set on the relays.
Zero Sequence Current Sensors

Eaton Type-V zero sequence current sensors are specically designed and tested to function with Eatons 520V and 1150V integral protective relays and type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker. The zero sequence sensor, as its name implies, measures zero sequence current (vector summation of phase currents) and provides sensitive method for ground fault sensing. Refer to Table 6.0-17 for available zero sequence sensors. Table 6.0-17. Zero Sequence Current Sensors Available Ratings
Description ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm) (tap selectable), ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm)
Phase and Zero Sequence Current Transformers

Conventional current transformers with 5A secondary are used when using external relays. CTs used for phase protection and metering are installed over the specially designed insulated bushings in the primary circuit. Maximum of two sets of CTs, or one set of CT and one set of current sensor can be installed over those insulated bushings. Ground fault sensing, when used, can be accomplished by residual sensing of phase currents, or by using an optional zero sequence current transformer. Refer to Table 6.0-18 for the available current transformers and their ratings and accuracies.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ratio 50:1 100/200:1
For use with 1150V relay only and with auxiliary power to the relay.
Table 6.0-18. Phase and Zero Sequence Current TransformersAvailable Ratings

CT Ratio Metering Accuracy Classication at 60 Hz Burden B 0.1 50:5 100:5 200:5 250:5 300:5 400:5 500:5 600:5 750:5 800:5 1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 1600:5 2000:5 50:5 Zero sequence 100:5 Zero sequence
Burden B 0.2 2.4 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Burden B 0.5 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Burden B 0.9 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Burden B 1.8 4.8 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Relay Class
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1.2 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
C10 C20 C20 C20 C50 C50 C100 C100 C100 C100 C100 C100 C100 C100 C10 C20
This accuracy is less than IEEE C37.20.2.
Phase Current Sensors and Rating PlugsAvailable Ratings
Voltage Transformers
Voltage transformers supply voltage signal proportional to primary circuit voltage for relaying and metering. Refer to Table 6.0-19 for available VT ratings and accuracies. When two VTs are used, they are typically connected L-L, and provide phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc, Vca) for metering and relaying. When three VTs are used, they are connected line-to-ground, and provide phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca), as well as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc) voltages for metering and relaying.
100, 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600 and 2000
If metering or relaying application requires phase-to-ground voltages, use three VTs, each connected L-G. If not, use of two VTs connected L-L is sufcient. For ground detection, three VTs connected in line-to-ground/brokendelta are used. A single VT, when used, can be connected line-to-line (it will provide line-to-line output, for example Vab or Vbc, or Vca), or line-to-ground (it will provide line-to-ground output, for example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally, a single VT is used to derive voltage signal for synchronizing or Over Voltage/Under Voltage function.
CA08104001E
6.0-26

Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control, CPT and Surge Protection
September 2011
Sheet 06 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 6.0-19. Voltage Transformers Available Ratings

Primary Voltage 2400 4200 4800 7200 8400 12000 12480 13200 14400
Ratio 20:1 35:1 40:1 60:1 70:1 100:1 104:1 110:1 120:1
Secondary Voltage 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
For AC control, a capacitor trip device is used with each circuit breaker shunt trip to ensure energy is available for tripping during fault conditions. When AC control power is derived from within the switchgear, CPT should be connected on line side of the main breaker. For main-tie-main lineups, CPT connected on source side of each main with automatic transfer control device on the secondary should be used.
Control Power Transformers

Control power transformer is used for auxiliary power for space heaters, light, receptacle and control of electrically operated breakers when external auxiliary power source is not available. Control power transformer when used for control of electrically operated breakers should be connected on source side of the main breaker so that the control power is available to close the main breaker. Refer to Table 6.0-20 for available control power transformer ratings in MEF switchgear. Table 6.0-20. Control Power Transformers Available Ratings, Single-Phase, 60 Hz
Voltage Primary 2400V 4000V 4160V 4800V 6900V 7200V 8320V 8400V 11500V 12000V 12470V 13200V 13800V 14400V
All voltage transformers are rated for metering accuracy of 0.3% at 10 VA burden, and rated for thermal VA of 200 at 55 degrees C.
VCP-TL Circuit Breakers

All VCP-TL circuit breakers are equipped with linear actuator mechanism, comprising of: the linear actuator, electro-magnetic controller (EM controller), three closing capacitors, and internal power supply modules for the EM controller. An AC or DC control supply (selected by breaker style number) is required to operate the linear actuator mechanism. Internal power supply modules convert input control voltage and supplies 96 Vdc for operation of the EM controller and charging of capacitors. The linear actuator mechanism is designed for OCO duty cycle with control power on. Initial charging of capacitors (from fully discharged state) takes about 30 seconds. In normal operation with control power connected, the capacitors recharge in about 15 seconds after each closing operation. All circuit breakers include a standard anti-pump feature. Once the capacitors are charged, circuit breaker can be closed and opened through: the use of manual ON and OFF pushbuttons mounted on the breaker itself, control switch mounted on the breaker compartment door, or any external dry contacts. In the event that control power is lost, the circuit breaker is capable of performing a manual or electrical OPEN operation up to 48 hours after the loss of control power. If the control power loss lasts longer than 48 hours, the circuit breaker can be opened using the integral EMERGENCY OPEN handle located on the front of the circuit breaker, by grasping the handle rmly and then pulling down.
Circuit Breaker Control

VCP-T Circuit Breakers
Type VCP-T circuit breakers are available as either Manually Operated (MO) or Electrically Operated (EO). All circuit breakers are equipped with spring charging handle integral to the circuit breaker, and push-to-close and push-to-open pushbuttons. Manually charging the closing springs and then pressing the push-to-close pushbutton accomplish closing of the MO breaker. Closing of the breaker charges the tripping springs. Manually pressing the push-to-open pushbutton accomplishes tripping of the MO breaker. If the MO breaker is equipped with integral protective relay, the relay provides tripping impulse via trip actuator to open the breaker, without a need for external control power supply. Electrically operated breakers are equipped with electric motor for spring charging, spring release coil (close coil) and shunt trip coil. All EO breakers can be manually operated as described above. In order to electrically operate the EO breakers, external control power is required. Also, when using microprocessorbased or solid-state external relays, external control power is required for relay logic.
Secondary 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V 240/120V
kVA Rating 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BIL kV 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
Line-to-Line connection only available.
Surge Protection
Surge arresters and or surge capacitors can be provided in MEF switchgear. Refer to Tab 5 for surge protection guidelines and recommended ratings.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 027

Technical Data
6.0-27
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, Integral Protection
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Digitrip 520V Protection: 51 50T 50 51G 50G
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Short Time & Ground Fault Zone Interlocking
Figure 6.0-10. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 520V Integral Protective Relay
Digitrip 1150V Protection: 51 37 47 50T 46 74 50 27 51G 50G 59 32
17 18 19
81U 81O
Short Time & Ground Fault Zone Interlocking Metering: Iph, Ig, V, F, kW, kVA, kvar, kWH, kvah, kW & kVA Demand, % harm, THD, Bkr Op Count, Event Logs
20 21
Figure 6.0-11. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
6.0-28

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 06 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, External Protection

MV Supply Ph 1 VCP-T/VCP-TL Drawout Breaker 2 3 Note: External Control Power Required for Breaker Control and EDR-3000.
CS
Auxiliary Power (AC, DC) (1) Three-Phase Current Transformer

EDR-3000 Phase and Ground Overcurrent
Ground Fault Sensing via Phase Residual, or Zero Sequence (1) BYZ Zero Seq. CT (optional) Load
Figure 6.0-12. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
MV Supply Ph 1 2 3 VTs (3-LG or 2-LL) VCP-T/VCP-TL Drawout Breaker 3P-3A Note: External Control Power Required for Breaker Control and EDR-4000. CS = Control Switch Auxiliary Power (AC, DC) (1) Three-Phase Current Transformer
EDR-4000 Multi-Function Protection and Metering
CS
Ground Fault Sensing via Phase Residual, or Zero Sequence (1) BYZ Zero Seq. CT (optional) Load
Figure 6.0-13. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-4000 Multi-Function Protective Relay
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 029

Technical Data
6.0-29
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes

Ph 1P15A
BRE EAKER
i ii
G Spring Charged Indicating Light (Optional) 120 Vac Control Supply Close
RES
R
RES
Control T Trip
Protective Relay
1 2
Capacitor Trip
ac
+
3 4
Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare B10 a
W
RES
C M COM
B15
A16
B12
Close Circuit (Spring Release Coil)
A23
A25
A27
b
A29
a
B19
b
B21
a
B23
b
B25
a
B27
b
B29
a
5 6 7
Motor Circuit
T Trip Coil
A28
A30
B20
B22
B24
B28
B30
B14 N
A26
8 9 10
Figure 6.0-14. Typical AC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker
P
(+)
2P15A
Spring Charged Indicating Light (Optional) DC Control Supply
Control G Switch Close

RES
R
RES
Switch T Trip
Protective Relay
11 12 13
W Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare

RES
14
B12
Close Circuit (Spring Release Coil)
B15
A16
A23
A25
B10 52 a
A27
b
A29
a
B19
b
B21
a
B23
b
B25
a
B27
b
B29
a
15 16 17
Motor Circuit
Trip T Coil
A28
A30
B20
B22
B24
B26
B28
B30
B14 N (-)
B13
A26
B11
18 19 20 21
Figure 6.0-15. Typical DC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker
CA08104001E
6.0-30

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 06 030
i ii 1
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes

2P15A (DC Control) 1P15A (AC Control)
(+) or Ph
Res
Res
Control Voltage AC or DC (selected by breaker part number)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CS C
Remote Close
CS T
Relay Trip
Remote Trip
System Healthy Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare (+) A27 52 b A28 A29 52 a A30 B15 Power Supply B14 B12 B13 Local Bkr Open PB VCP-TL Breaker B10 B11 Local Bkr Close PB A26 A25 B19 52 b B20 B21 52 a B22 B23 52 b B24 B25 52 a B26 B27 52 b B28 B29 52 a B30
(-) or N
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 6.0-16. Type VCP-TL Circuit BreakerTypical Control Circuit
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 031

Layouts and Dimensions
6.0-31
MEF Switchgear Available Congurations with Metering Compartment

Table 6.0-21. Maximum Number of Cables per Phase

Conguration 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Cell Adjacent 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section None Cable Entry Direction Number of Power Cables/Phase When Using Zero Sequence CT 4 4 4 1 4 Without Zero Sequence CT or Sensor 4 4 4 2 2 4
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Available MEF congurations are shown in Figure 6.0-17. For other congurations, contact Eaton If utility metering compartment is required, use MVS or VCP-W (rear-access) switchgear Shipping group maximum length = 104.00 inches (2642.0 mm) All units are 92.00 inches (2367.0 mm) tall, 61.50 inches (1562.0 mm) deep Main bus1200 or 2000A 2000A breakers1-high (one breaker/vertical section) only, except as noted in Figure 6.0-17 600 and 1200A breakers can be stacked 2-high (breaker/breaker) Auxiliary shown can be either VTs (two or three) or single-phase 5 kVA CPT CTs or current sensors cannot be placed on main-bus side of the breaker CTs shown can be either one or two sets; or one set of CT and one set of current sensors Zero sequence CT shown can be replaced with Zero sequence current sensor Zero sequence CT and surge arresters shown are optional Maximum number of cables per phase is limited as shown in Table 6.0-21
Breaker/blank
Bottom Bottom Top Top/top Top/bottom
Breaker/auxiliary Yes Breaker/breaker Yes
Bottom/bottom 1
Multiple cables per phase are based on the use of a maximum wire size of 500 kcmil for each cable. One cable per phase is based on the use of maximum wire size of 1000 kcmil. When using a zero sequence sensor (for use with an integral protective relay), the number of cables is limited to one per phase with a maximum wire size of 750 kcmil.
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Congurations

Note: = No shipping split here.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
6.0-32

September 2011
Sheet 06 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
MEF Switchgear Available Congurations

Note: Refer to Page 6.0-31 for notes.
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Congurations (Continued)

CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 033

6.0-33

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
6.0-34

September 2011
Sheet 06 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21


CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 035

6.0-35
Front and Sectional Views
i ii 1 2
6001200A Breaker Compartment
B V 92.00 (2337.7)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Main Bus
Cable Pull Box
CT Bushing 3-PH CT
Zero Seq CT or Current Sensor 26.00 (660.4) Front View 61.50 (1561.7) Side View
3 SA
Figure 6.0-18. Typical 1-High Breaker Unit, Cables Out the Bottom
Main Bus Access
11 12 13
ontrol
6002000A Breaker
Pull Section (2337.7) (3) SA
14 15
CT Bushing VTs
16 17
Drawout
18
Zero Seq CT or Current Sensor 26.00 (660.4) Front View 19.00 (482.6) 61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewBreaker Cell 61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewPull Section
19 20 21
Figure 6.0-19. Typical Breaker/Auxiliary Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out Top or Bottom
6.0-36

September 2011
Sheet 06 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Front and Side Views
ontrol
600 1200A Breaker
Pull Section
VCP
(2337.7)
(3) SA
VCP
Zero Seq CT or Current Sensor 26.00 (660.4) Front View 19.00 (482.6) 61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell 61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewPull Section
Figure 6.0-20. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Bottom
Zero Seq CT or Main Bus Access
Control
Pull Section
VCP-T
92.00
(3) SA
B V
CT Bushing
26.00 (660.4) Front View
19.00 (482.6)
61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell
61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewPull Section
Figure 6.0-21. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Top

September 2011
Sheet 06 037

6.0-37
Front and Side Views

Main Bus Access Main Bus-1 s-2
i ii 1 2
ontrol
600 000 Breaker Compartment
Pull Section
Brea VCP 92.00 (2337.7)
3 4 5
Drawout
6 7 8
26.00 (660.4) Front View
19.00 (482.6)
61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewTie Breaker
61.50 (1561.7) Side ViewPull Section
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 6.0-22. Typical Bus Tie Breaker Unit and Pull Section
CA08104001E
6.0-38

Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
September 2011
Sheet 06 038
i ii
MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit

3.00 (76.2) Rear 6 6.00 For (152.4) Seismic 7 8.50 (215.9) 9.00 4.00 (101.6) 30.25 (768.4) 5 2.50 (63.5) 8 9.80 1 (249.2) 2.00 (50.8) 1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5) A 4 26.00 (660.4) Front 5.00 (127.0) 18.00 (457.2) 2 1.75 (44.5) 22.25 (565.2) 1.63 (41.4) 8.38 (212.9) 1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5) B 4 1.25 (31.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 3.00 (76.2)
2.00 (50.8)
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
28.50 (723.9)
12.00 (304.8) 7.00 (177.8)
3.00 (76.2) 26.00 (660.4) Load Bearing Surfaces
3.00 (76.2)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
9 60.00 (1524.0)
Figure 6.0-23. MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit Floor Plan

Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding. Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance. Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6. Primary cable entrance space, available only with 1-high breaker with cables from below. Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit location. Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance. Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Location of station grounding lug. Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 06 039

Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
6.0-39
MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section

3.00 (76.2) Rear 5 6.00 For (152.4) Seismic 6 7.00 (177.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 6.00 (152.4) 8 11.00 (279.4) 5.00 (127.0) 1.75 (44.5) 22.25 (565.2) 4.00 (101.6) 1.63 (41.4) 8.38 (212.9) 1.25 (31.8) 28.50 (723.9) 60.00 (1524.0) 3.00 (76.2)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3.00 (76.2) 19.00 (482.6) 3.00 (76.2)
2.00 (50.8)
2.50 (63.5) 30.25 (768.4) 7 9.81 (249.2) 1
1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5) A 4
1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5)
8 9 10
Load Bearing Surfaces
19.00 (482.6) Front
B 4
3 9 60.00 (1524.0)
11 12 13
Figure 6.0-24. MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section Floor Plan

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding. Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance. Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6. Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance. Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Location of station grounding lug. Primary cable entrance space (top or bottom entry). Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit location. Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
CA08104001E
6.0-40

September 2011
Sheet 06 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table 6.0-22. MEF Switchgear Units Less Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights

Type of Structure Structure Width Inches (mm) Structure Weight in Lbs (kg) 25 kA Switchgear Main Bus Rating 1200A 6001200A Breaker over cable entry 6001200A Breaker over 6001200A breaker, with an adjacent pull section 6001200A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section 6001200A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section 2000A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section 2000A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section 1200A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section 2000A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section Auxiliary over blank or blank over auxiliary Auxiliary over auxiliary Blank structure (with main bus only) Transition section (for close coupling to MCC, liquid or dry transformer) Blank pull section (with main bus only) 26.00 (660.4) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 26.00 (660.4) 26.00 (660.4) 26.00 (660.4) 19.00 (482.6) 19.00 (482.6) 1350 (614) 2000 (909) 1550 (706) 2000 (909) 2000 (909) 1500 (682) 1900 (864) 1000 (455) 800 (364) 550 (250) 2000A 1500 (682) 2250 (1023) 1700 (773) 2150 (977) 2210 (1005) 2660 (1209) 2150 (977) 2210 (1005) 1600 (727) 2000 (909) 1100 (500) 900 (409) 650 (295) 40 kA Switchgear Main Bus Rating 1200A 1560 (709) 2670 (1214) 1785 (811) 2235 (1016) 2235 (1016) 1500 (682) 1900 (864) 1000 (455) 800 (364) 600 (273) 2000A 1710 (777) 2920 (1327) 1935 (880) 2385 (1084) 2210 (1005) 2660 (1209) 2385 (1084) 2210 (1005) 1600 (727) 2000 (909) 1100 (500) 900 (409) 700 (318)
Table 6.0-23. VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights

Circuit Breaker Type 50 VCP-T16, 50 VCP-T20, 50 VCP-T25 50 VCP-T32, 50 VCP-T40 150 VCP-T16, 150 VCP-T20, 150 VCP-T25 150 VCP-T32, 150 VCP-T40 50 VCP-TL16, 50 VCP-TL20, 50 VCP-TL25 150 VCP-TL16, 150 VCP-TL20, VCP-TL25 Continuous Current Rating Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 600 1200 600 2200 Static Weight in Lbs (kg) 250 (114) 440 (200) 250 (114) 440 (200) 232 (105) 234 (106) 232 (105) 234 (106)
Note: Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 6.0-24. MEF Equipment Losses

Equipment 600A breaker 1200A breaker 2000A breaker Watts Loss 400 600 1400
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB Medium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 07 001
Vacuum Breakers
7.0-1
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB & MSB Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers
Contents
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB & MSB Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers Drawout-Mounted Breaker (MEB) General Description and Seismic Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2 Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2 Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-3 Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-3 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-4 Switch- and Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breaker (MSB) General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-2 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3 Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-4 Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-4 Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5 Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-6 Vacuum Breakers Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1 Low Resistance Ground Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1 Single-Ended Substation Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1 Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-2 Surge Arresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-2 MEB and MSB Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-3 Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-4 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 MEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16347A Section 26 13 19.11 MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16347B Section 26 13 19.16
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
MEB
MVS Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MVS
20 21
CA08104001E
7.0-2

September 2011
Sheet 07 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 003
Drawout Vacuum Breakers (MEB)

General Description
7.1-1
MEB Metal-Enclosed Drawout Breaker

General Description
Eatons MEB (metal-enclosed breaker) switchgear assembly consists of a single-high drawout vacuum circuit breaker (Type VCP-W) in a metalenclosed cabinet. This equipment has been designed primarily where metalclad switchgear is not required and a switch or switch and fuse combination are not suitable. As primary protection for single-ended substations, it can eliminate the need for a secondary main circuit breaker. It can also be applied as the primary main device and integrated with fused or unfused feeder switches in an Eaton Type MVS load interrupter switchgear assembly. Two and three breaker automatic transfer schemes are also available. For drawout vacuum circuit breaker metal-clad switchgear, Eaton Type VacClad-W, see Tab 5. For drawout vacuum circuit breaker metal-enclosed front access only, Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6.
A Type MEB switchgear assembly is classied as an overcurrent protective device that provides increased system protection and increased coordination with upstream and downstream devices where these benets cannot be achieved with a switch and fuse combination. Vacuum circuit breakers provide the following features:
Type MEB switchgear is one product of choice for ground fault interruption when air interrupters alone would be potentially hazardous if called on to operate above their assigned interrupting ratings. Capacitor switching is easily handled by MEB, avoiding the restrike hazard presented by air switches. Standardized designs cover most common applications, while custom designs are also available for unusual requirements. Type MEB vacuum switchgear meets or exceeds the following industry standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3, ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4, ANSI C37.22, ANSI C37.57, ANSI C37.58, NEMA SG5, NEMA SG6, CSA 22.2 No. 31-04, EEMAC G8-3.3. It is also CSA listable for Canada and U.S. markets. MEB circuit breaker sections are easily mixed with MVS fused switch sections in lineups. No bus transitions are required between them except where bus runs from top to bottom locations, such as between main and feeder sections.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
High interrupting capacity suitable for use with ground fault equipment and differential relay schemes High duty cycle Adjustable overcurrent protection Expanded protective relay functions, such as those provided in the EDR-4000 (refer to Tab 4) Three-phase tripping; no single phasing on tripping Maintainable Long equipment life Special applications, such as capacitor switching, are possible with breakers
Type MEB switchgear provides a minimal footprint using vacuum breaker technology. All protective devices and metering are conveniently mounted on the switchgear structure door. Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers have been designed with a V-Flex current transfer system that provides a unique non-sliding current transfer arrangement, no maintenance, excellent electrical and thermal transfer, and long vacuum interrupter life. Both indoor and outdoor non-walk-in enclosures are available. Uses are single or multiple circuits, transformer primaries and mains for MVS applications. Congurations with an automatic transfer control system can be easily accommodated. Drawout vacuum breakers are ideal for high duty cycle, as well as applications requiring rapid return to service after a load fault.
Seismic Qualication
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
7.1-2

General DescriptionTechnical Data
September 2011
Sheet 07 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Construction
Current and voltage transformers associated with protection devices such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 electronic overcurrent relays are applied using the same ratings as drawout metal-clad switchgear. Metering and protective relay devices are mounted on the single front hinged door. The front door may be opened at any time to provide access to low voltage components and to the front of the circuit breaker without being exposed to high voltage. The IQ family of electronic meters is normally used when metering functions are required. The circuit breaker is racked into or out of position, but can easily be drawn out and removed from the enclosure with grounded steel shutters, preventing accidental contact with primary voltage connections. Routine maintenance can be performed on the circuit breaker mechanism in the enclosure.
If AC control power is used, a capacitor trip device is provided as standard. A Digitrip 3010 relay with dual source power supply may be used for overcurrent protection, thus eliminating the need for an uninterruptible power source for continuous fault current protection. Once the circuit breaker is closed and the closing spring is recharged, the breaker can open, close and open without spring recharge.
EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
EDR-4000 Multifunction Protective Relay
Table 7.1-1. Protective Relays

The VCP-W vacuum circuit breaker is easily accessible for routine inspection and maintenance. User-friendly, front panel controls and indicators are functionally grouped together for easy operation.
Relay Type EDR-3000 Protective Relay IEEE Functions 50/51; 50/51G Metering Amperes and ampere demand Amps; volts; pf, energy, power; THD; waveform
Eatons MEB breaker can be furnished with an Eaton Type EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 relay to provide overcurrent and fault protection. Optional zero sequence 50/51G ground fault protection is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for more details.
MEB with Complete Access to Control Switches, Overcurrent Relays and Meters, as well as Breakers
EDR-4000
25, 27, 32, 46, 47, 50N/G, 51N/G, 50/51,50BF, 51V, 59, 67N, 67
See Tab 4 for available relays, selection and application details.
Standard MEB insulators are NEMA rated glass polyester or optional epoxy. Control power is required. The AC control power can be supplied integrally if specied. The DC control power, if required, must be furnished by others.
3-CTs Vacuum Breaker 52
EDR-3000 or EDR-4000
50/51 50N/51N
1-Zero Sequence CT
19 20 21
Figure 7.1-1. Typical MEB Single-Section One-Line Diagram
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 005

Technical Data
7.1-3
Assembly Ratings
Table 7.1-2. MEB Assembly Main Bus Ratings
Rated Maximum Volts kV 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
i
Rated Momentary Current kA rms Asymmetrical 40 61 80 40 61 80 101 40 61 40 61 80 40 61 80 101 Rated Short-TIme (2 Seconds) Current kA Symmetrical 25 38 50 25 38 50 63 25 38 25 38 50 25 38 50 63
Rated BIL kV 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
Rated Main Bus Current Amperes 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 1200 2000 2000 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 1200
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC circuit breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. In such cases, switchgear assembly ratings as given in this table will apply.
Table 7.1-3. Available Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Circuit Breaker Type Rated Maximum Voltage V kV rms 50 VCP-W 250 50 VCP-W 350 50 VCP-W 500 75 VCP-W 500 150 VCP-W 500 150 VCP-W 750 150 VCP-W 1000 150 VCP-W 1500 50 VCP-W 25 50 VCP-W 40 50 VCP-W 50 50 VCP-W 63 75 VCP-W 50 150 VCP-W 25 150 VCP-W 40 150 VCP-W 50 150 VCP-W 63 50 VCP-WG 50 50 VCP-WG 63 150 VCP-WG 50 150 VCP-WG 63

Rated Voltage Range Factor K
Rated Continuous Current Amperes
Rated Short-Circuit Current at Rated Maximum Voltage I
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting and 3-Second Short-Time Current Carrying Capability K*I
Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary) 2.6 * K * I kA Crest 97 132 170 111 62 97 130 170 65 104 130 164 130 65 104 130 164 137 173 137 173 1.6 * K * I kA rms Asym 58 78 101 66 37 58 77 101 40 64 80 100.8 80 40 64 80 100.8 82 103 82 103
kA rms Symmetrical kA rms Symmetrical 29 41 63 33 18 28 37 63 25 40 50 63 50 25 40 50 63 50 63 50 63 36 49 63 41 23 36 48 63 25 40 50 63 50 25 40 50 63 50 63 50 63
4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25 15 15 15 15 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25 15 15 15 15 4.76 4.76 15 15
1.24 1.19 1.0 1.25 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
For detailed ratings of Type VCP-W circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-1A. For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WC circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-2. For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WG circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-3 and 5.4-4. Please note certain Eaton breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. When these breakers are applied in an MEB switchgear assembly, the assembly ratings as given in Table 7.1-2 will apply.
Breaker Control Ratings

Rated Control Voltage 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac Spring Charge Motor Inrush Amperes 36.0 16.0 9.2 16.0 9.2 Run Amperes 9.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 Time Seconds 6 6 6 6 6 Close or Trip Amperes 16 7 4 6 3 Voltage Range Close 3856 100140 200280 104127 208254 Trip 2856 70140 140180 104127 208254
18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
7.1-4

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 07 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent the most common arrangements. Layouts shown are for rear-accessible equipment. Front-accessible designs are availablerefer to Eaton. See Tab 8 for detailed layout information on load interrupter switchgear. Many other congurations and combinations are available. Two voltage transformers (xed or drawout) for metering or
80.00 (2032.0)
one control transformer for AC breaker control can be mounted in the structures shown. For control power above 1 kVA, additional space is required. Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters, instrument transformers, special cable terminators, and so on. Cables are shown out top and bottom for layout
70.00 (1778.0)
only. Top or bottom must be selected for incoming and for outgoing cables. Please note that rear access is required for installation. Cable sizing is based on two 500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase using preformed slip-on cable termination devices. For unit substation alignment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
70.00 (1778.0)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.6) 52
PR
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.6) 52
PR
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.6) 52
PR
36.00 (914.4) Arrangement 1 Single Unit, Cable In and Out
Outdoor 41.00 (1041.4) Indoor 36.00 (914.4) Arrangement 2 Primary for Dry-Type Transformer 70.00 (1778.0)
20.00 36.00 (508.0) (914.4) Arrangement 3 Primary for Liquid-Filled Transformer
70.00 (1778.0) Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.6) 52
PR
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.6) 52
PR ATC 52
PR
36.00 48.00 (914.4 1219.2)
36.00 36.00 36.00 15.00 (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (381.0) Arrangement 4 Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional) 70.00 (1778.0) Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.6) 52
36.00 15.00 36.00 (914.4) (381.0) (914.4) Arrangement 5 Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
36.00 (914.4)
PR 52 52
PR
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 36.00 15.00 (914.4) (914.4) (381.0) Arrangement 6 Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main Feeders
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Figure 7.1-2. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eaton EDR-3000 or EDR-4000. Note: ATCAutomatic Transfer Controller.
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 007

LayoutDimensions
7.1-5
Roof for Outdoor Unit
Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit

16.00 (406.4)
i ii 1
Customer's Cable Support (Locate at Installation) 95.46 (2424.7) Outdoor Height 90.37 (2295.4) Indoor Height
10.00 (254.0) Optional Rear Door 1.50 (38.1) 8.00 (203.2) A&B
10.00 (254.0) 1.25 (31.8)
CT
70.00 (1778.0)
2 3
VCPW
Lug
Roof Layout
36.00 (914.4)
4 5 6 7 8
Line or Bus (Fixed) VT
10.00 (254.0) Optional Rear Door 6.60 (167.6) 8.00 (203.2) A&B
16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 1.25 (31.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
Figure 7.1-3. 5 and 15 kV MEB with Main Bus, Main Breaker and Fixed Line or Bus VTs
Depth shown is based on the use of (2)-500 kcmil cables per phase. For stand-alone cable in and cable out in the same section, minimum 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) depth is required.
Floor Layout
36.00 (914.4)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: Drawout VTs are not available in MEB switchgear. Use Type VCP-W or MEF designs.
Figure 7.1-4. 5 and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts

For cable in and cable out in same section, 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) depth is required.
Table 7.1-5. Approximate Weights in Lbs (kg)

5 or 15 kV Class MEB section MVS section (non-fused) Fuses (three) add Transition section Indoor 1600 (726) 1500 (681) 200 (91) 300 (136) Outdoor 1900 (863) 1800 (817) 200 (91)
Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.
CA08104001E
7.1-6

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 07 008
i ii 1 2 3 4
3 5.00 (127.0) Typ. 2 Optional Rear Door 6 7
Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5 mm) diameter holes. Four places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5, (M12 x 1.75 min. CL 10.9), and tightened to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm). Door swing equals unit width at 90. The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
1.25 (31.8) 2.95 (74.9) 3 6.00 (152.4) Min.
4.25 (108.0)
Clearance required for additional door swing to insert or remove breaker, and for metering/relays on front of door. Left hand side only. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. Minimum distance in front is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) for breaker insertion and removal. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. The standard minimum recommended distance is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear access for installation and maintenance. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-toright, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
5 6 7 8 9
6.00 (152.4) Min. 1.25 (31.8) 4.25 (108.0) 4 18.00 (457.2) Min. FRONT DOOR 5 Min.
Figure 7.1-5. Typical Anchor Plan for MEB, Indoor or Outdoor
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

September 2011
Sheet 07 009
Switch and Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB)

General Description
7.2-1
MSB Metal-Enclosed Switch and Vacuum Breaker

General Description
Eatons assembly designated MSB (metal-enclosed switch and breaker) consists of a load interrupter switch (Type MVS) in series with a vacuum circuit breaker (Type VCP-TR for 515 kV) in a metal-enclosed cabinet. This combination has been designed primarily where a vacuum circuit breaker is required for its higher interrupting capacity and a switch is required to provide a visible means of disconnect. As primary protection for single-ended substations, it can eliminate the need for a secondary main circuit breaker. It can also be applied as the primary main device and integrated with fused or unfused feeder switches in a lineup of MVS switchgear. Two and three breaker automatic transfer schemes are also available. For drawout vacuum circuit breaker metal-enclosed switchgear, Type MEB, see Page 7.1-1. For drawout vacuum circuit breaker metal-clad switchgear, Type VacClad-W, see Tab 5. For drawout vacuum circuit breaker metal-enclosed front access only, Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6.
With the vacuum circuit breaker, Type MSB switchgear is classied as an overcurrent protective device that provides increased system protection and increased coordination with upstream and downstream devices where these benets cannot be achieved with a switch and fuse combination. Vacuum circuit breakers provide the following features:
High interrupting capacity suitable for use with ground fault equipment and differential relay schemes Load Break Switch providing visible means of disconnect without opening the door High duty cycle Adjustable overcurrent protection Expanded protective relay functions, such as those provided in the EDR-4000 (refer to Tab 4) Three-phase tripping; no single phasing on tripping Maintainable Long equipment life Special applications, such as capacitor switching, are possible with breakers
Visible disconnect means is ensured by the load break air interrupter switch and viewing window. Both indoor and outdoor non-walk-in enclosures are available. Applications are single units, lineups and transformer primary applications. Congurations with an automatic transfer control system can be easily accommodated. Fixed vacuum breakers are ideal for high duty cycle, as well as applications requiring rapid return to service after a load fault. Type MSB switchgear is the product of choice for ground fault interruption when air interrupters alone would be potentially hazardous if called on to operate above their assigned ratings. Capacitor switching is easily handled by MSB avoiding the restrike hazard presented by air switches. Standardized designs cover most common applications while custom designs are also available for unusual requirements. Type MSB vacuum switchgear meets or exceeds the following industry standards:

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eaton Type MSB switchgear provides a small footprint using vacuum breaker technology where the breaker rating does not exceed 1200A continuous and the interrupting ratings shown. All protective devices and metering are conveniently mounted on the switchgear structure door. The VCP-TR vacuum breaker is a fully rated two-step stored energy circuit breaker with an open-close-open duty cycle. It is rated for 25 or 40 kA interrupting ratings at all voltages from 4.76 to 15 kV and has a front access mechanism. Type VCP-TR circuit breakers can be supplied with integral trip unit for phase and ground overcurrent protection. The vacuum circuit breakers have been designed with a ex current transfer system that provides a unique non-sliding current transfer arrangement, no maintenance, excellent electrical and thermal transfer, and long vacuum interrupter life.
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4 ANSI C37.22 ANSI C37.57 ANSI C37.58 NEMA SG5 NEMA SG6 CSA 22.2 No. 31 EEMAC G8-3.3 CSA listable for Canada and U.S. markets
Refer to MVS Tab 8. MVS switch sections are easily mixed with MSB sections in lineups. No bus transitions are required between them except where bus runs from top to bottom locations, such as between main and feeder sections.
CA08104001E
7.2-2

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 07 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Seismic Qualication
5/15 kV MSB Assembly
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 011

7.2-3
Construction
Eatons Type MSB switchgear uses the same proven enclosure and air switch mechanism as MVS switchgear. It differs in the addition of the xedmounted Eaton VCP-TR (515 kV) vacuum breaker in place of fuses. Current and voltage transformers associated with protection devices such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 electronic protective relays are applied using the same ratings as drawout metal-clad switchgear. Integral overcurrent protective devices with the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System mode switch, such as DT 520MCV and DT 1150V, are also available. Devices are mounted on the single front-hinged door. The front door may be opened at any time to provide access to low voltage components and the front of the circuit breaker without being exposed to high voltage. Eatons IQ family of electronic meters is normally used when metering functions are required. The circuit breaker is bolted into position, but can be unbolted and removed from the enclosure. Routine maintenance can be performed on the circuit breaker mechanism in the enclosure. Standard switch insulators are NEMA rated glass polyester or optional epoxy. Control power will be required as detailed below. The AC can be supplied integrally if specied. The DC control power, if required, must be furnished by others. If AC control power is used, a capacitor trip device is provided. Once the circuit breaker is closed and the closing spring is recharged, the breaker can open, close and open without spring recharge.
i ii 1 2 3
EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
4 5 6 7 8
MSB with Control Switches, Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay with Optional Metering Shown
EDR-4000 Multifunction Protective Relay
9 10 11 12 13 14
Digitrip 520MCV
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Digitrip 1150V
CA08104001E
7.2-4

Technical Data
Table 7.2-1. Integral Protective Relays
Relay Type DT 520MCV DT 1150V
September 2011
Sheet 07 012
i ii 1 2 3 4
Eatons MSB breaker can be furnished with an Eaton Type EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 relay to provide overcurrent and fault protection. Optional zero sequence 50/51G ground fault protection is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for more details.
Protective Relay IEEE Functions 50, 50T, 51, 50G, 51G 50, 50T, 51, 51G, 50G, 37, 46, 27, 59, 32, 47, 74, 81U, 81-0
Metering Amperes Amperes, voltage, VA, VAR, Watt, Wh, VAh, THD
See Tab 6, Pages 6.0-10, 6.0-11 and 6.0-12 for details.
MVS Load Break Switch
EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 3-CTs 50/51 50N/51N
Table 7.2-2. Protective Relays

Relay Type EDR-3000 EDR-4000 Protective Relay IEEE Functions 50/51; 50/51G 25, 27, 32, 46, 47, 50N/G, 51N/G, 50/51, 50BF, 51VR, 59, 67N, 67 Metering Amperes and ampere demand Amps; volts; pf, energy, power; THD; waveform
Vacuum Breaker
52
See Tab 4 available relays selection and application details.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
MVS Switch Phase Current Sensors VCP-TR or -TRL Circuit Breaker 52 Optional Ground Current Sensor MVS Switch Phase Current Sensors VCP-TR or -TRL Circuit Breaker
1-Zero Sequence CT
Assembly Ratings
Table 7.2-3. MSB Switchgear Assembly Ratings
Rated Rated Rated Maximum BIL Main Bus Volts kV kV Current Amperes 4.76 4.76 15 15 60 60 95 95 Rated Momentary Current kA rms Asymmetrical Rated Short-TIme (2 Seconds) Current kA Symmetrical 25 40 25 40
Figure 7.2-1. Typical MSB Single-Section One-Line Diagram
600, 1200, 2000 40 600, 1200, 2000 64 600, 1200 600, 1200 40 64
Integral Trip Unit DT 520MCV Primary Source TA EM (if TRL bkr) RP TA = Trip Actuator EM = Electromagnetic Linear Actuator RP = Rating Plug MVS Switch CTs R ST Required if Using DT-1150V VTs 2 L-L or 3 L-G R = Relay DT-3010 Integral Trip Unit DT 520MCV or DT 1150V TA = Trip Actuator EM = Electromagnetic Linear Actuator RP = Rating Plug ST = Shunt Trip Coil Max Length = 50 Feet
52
Figure 7.2-2. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT 520MCV
VCP-TR or -TRL Circuit Breaker 52
TA
EM
RP
Substation Transformer VYs 2 L-L or 3 L-G Current Sensors
(if TRL bkr)
LV Switchgear Main Bus Integral Trip Unit DT 1150V TA EM (if TRL bkr) RP TA = Trip Actuator EM = Electromagnetic Linear Actuator RP = Rating Plug
Figure 7.2-4. Transformer Primary Breaker with Secondary Bus Overcurrent Protection
Surge protection device, such as RC snubber, ZORC, EHZ or Protec Z is highly recommended for transformer protection. Refer to Tab 5, Page 5.4-17 to Page 5.4-19 for Eatons recommendations for surge protection.
Optional Ground Current Sensor
Figure 7.2-3. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT 1150V
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 013

Technical Data
7.2-5
Circuit Breaker Ratings

Type MSB assemblies can be supplied with Type VCP-TR or VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) or with Type VCP-TRL or VCP-TRLC (electromagnetic linear actuator operator) circuit breakers. Type VCP-TRC and VCP-TRLC circuit breakers are
Circuit Breaker Type Rated Insulation Level Rated Maximum Power Continuous Impulse Voltage Frequency Withstand Current Withstand Voltage Voltage (BIL) 60 Hz, 1.2 x 50 1 Minute microsec V kV rms 50VCP-TR25 50VCP-TRL25 50VCP-TR40 4.76 4.76 4.76 kV rms 19 19 19 36 36 36 kV Peak 60 60 60 95 95 95 Amperes 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 600, 1200 Rated ShortCircuit Current at Rated Maximum Voltage I kA rms sym 25 25 40 25 25 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rated Voltage Range Factor
identical to VCP-TR and VCP-TRL breakers except they are rated for additional capacitor switching capability as indicated in Table 7.2-5.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Table 7.2-4. Available Type VCP-TR and VCP-TRL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting & 2-Second Short-Time Current Carrying Capability K*I kA rms sym 25 25 40 25 25 40 Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary) Cable Charging Breaking Current Three-Phase Mechanical Endurance MVA No Load C-O Operations at Rated Maximum Voltage (for Reference Only) 1.732 *V*I Amperes MVA 25 25 25 25 25 25 210 210 330 650 650 1040 Vacuum Mechanism Interrupter 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 10,000 100,000 10,000 10,000 100,000 10,000
2.6 * K * I kA Crest 65 65 104 65 65 104
150VCP-TR25 15 150VCP-TRL25 15 150VCP-TR40 15

Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 cycle (50 ms). Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Table 7.2-5. Available Type VCP-TRC Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards (Denite Purpose, Tested for Capacitor Switching) Type VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) circuit breakers have same ratings as Type VCP-TR breakers, plus additional capacitor switching capabilities as follows.
Circuit Breaker Type Cable Charging Grounded Capacitor Banks Single Bank 250 and 1000A Back-to-Back 250A with inrush current of 4 kA peak at 5.9 kHz and 1000A with inrush current of 15 kA peak at 25 kHz
Breaker Control Ratings

Table 7.2-6. Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power Requirements
Rated Control Voltage Spring Charge Motor
8
Close or Trip Amperes Voltage Range Close 5.2 3.6 1.8 3.6 1.8 3856 100140 200280 104127 208254 Trip 2856 70140 140180 104127 208254
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Run Amperes 4.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0
Time Seconds 5 5 5 5 5
VCP-TRC 25A (40 kA ratings)
48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac
Inrush current is 4 times running amperes.
CA08104001E
7.2-6

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 07 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent the most common switch arrangements. Many other congurations and combinations are available. Layouts shown are for rear-accessible equipment. Front-accessible designs are availablerefer to Eaton. Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters, instrument transformers, special cable terminators, and so on. Cables are shown out top and bottom for layout only. Top or bottom must be selected for incoming and for outgoing cables. Cable sizing is based on two 500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase using preformed slip-on cable termination devices. Rear access is required for installation. For unit substation alignment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
70.00 (1778.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7) PR 52
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7) PR 52 Outdoor 41.00 (1041.4) Indoor 36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7) PR 52
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)

PR 52
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
20.00 (508.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Arrangement 1 Single Unit, Cable In and Out
Arrangement 2 Primary for Dry-Type Transformer
Arrangement 3 Primary for Liquid Filled Transformer
Arrangement 4 Duplex Arrangement Source Selective
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)

PR 52
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7)
PR 52
Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
PR 52
PR 52
52
PR
36.00 - 48.00 (914.4 - 1219.2)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 - 48.00 (914.4 - 1219.2)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Arrangement 5 Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional)
Arrangement 6 Main Lugs with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor ATC 90.38 (2295.7)

PR 52
52 PR
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
PR 52
PR 52
ATC
52
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
Arrangement 7 Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
Arrangement 8 Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main with Feeders
Figure 7.2-5. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Width of metering compartment may vary depending on utility requirements.
Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eatons EDR-3000 or EDR-4000.

September 2011
Sheet 07 015

LayoutDimensions
7.2-7

10.00 (254.0) Optional Rear Door 1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
i ii 1
16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 1.25 (31.8)
A&B
Roof Layout
95.46 (2424.7) Outdoor Height 90.37 (2295.3) Indoor Height VT Switch CT
36.00 (914.4)
2 3 4
Vacuum Breaker
10.00 (254.0) Optional Rear Door 6.60 (167.6) 8.00 (203.2)
16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0)
1.25 (31.8)
A&B
5 6
Floor Layout
7
62.00 (1574.8)
36.00 (914.4)
8 9 10 11
Figure 7.2-6. 5, 15 kV MSB with Main Bus
Figure 7.2-8. 5 kV and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
Minimum depth 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required.
Cable location B not available with main bus.
VT cannot be located here when using 40 kA breaker
Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source. Note: For D dimension, refer to Page 7.1-4.
VT
12 13
95.46 (2424.7) Outdoor Height
Switch CT
14 15 16 17
90.37 (2295.3) Indoor Height
Vacuum Breaker
18 19 20
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Figure 7.2-7. 5, 15 kV MSB without Main Bus
Minimum depth 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required.
21
CA08104001E
7.2-8

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 07 016
i ii
5 7
1 2 3
5.00 (127.0) Typ.
2 6 Optional Rear Door
Locations for tie-down 0.65 inches (16.5 mm) diameter holes for four places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min. (M12 x 1.75 min. CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm). Door swing equals unit width at 90.
4.25 (108.0) 1.25 (31.8) 2.95 (74.9) 3 3 6.00 (152.4) Min. 6.00 (152.4) Min.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. Minimum clearance in front is the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. The standard minimum recommended distance is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear access for installation and maintenance. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. For MVS only. If the application is specically provided by contract as not requiring rear access as stated in 5, then the minimum recommended distance is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-toback and diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
1.25 (31.8) 4.25 (108.0) FRONT DOOR 4 Min.
Figure 7.2-9. Typical Anchor Plan for MSB, Indoor or Outdoor Table 7.2-7. Approximate Weights in Lbs (kg)
5 or 15 kV Class MSB section MVS section (non-fused) Fuses (three) add Transition section Indoor 1700 (773) 1500 (681) 200 (91) 300 (136) Outdoor 2000 (909) 1800 (817) 200 (91)

September 2011
Sheet 07 017
Vacuum Breakers
Application Examples
7.3-1
Application Examples
Low Resistance Ground Schemes
Medium voltage low resistance ground schemes are typically used for medium voltage 5 kV class systems feeding 5 kV class motor loads. The resistor affords both full selectivity in tripping on ground faults, while limiting ground fault magnitudes to low values (typically 50400A). Reducing the current levels to a faulted motor greatly reduces the damage to the motor and subsequent rewind and repair costs. System tripping during a ground fault on the line side of the secondary main breaker must be cleared by sending a trip signal to the transformer primary side protective device. Fusible switches on the primary side of the step-down transformer (typically rated 515 kV) may not be used for this purpose. Any ground fault sensed may escalate as the switch is being signaled to trip thereby exceeding its typical 600A maximum current breaking capacity. Eatons MEB and MSB breaker, being a fully rated interrupting device, may be tripped regardless of fault level up to its interrupting rating (for example, 28 kA). Only this type of overcurrent device or a metal-clad switchgear drawout breaker may be safely used.
i ii
52-1
1 2
R 251G 151G 52-2 52-2 Unprotected Zone for Ground Fault Protection
3
R 251G
4 5
Complete Secondary Ground Fault Protection Using WVB for Primary Device
Incomplete Ground Fault Protection Using Fusible Switch Primary DeviceNOT RECOMMENDED
6 7 8 9 10
Figure 7.3-1. Low Resistance Ground Scheme (Phase and Primary Ground Fault Protection not Shown)
50/51 50N/51N
DT 520MCV DT 1150V EDR-3000 or EDR-4000
52
Single-Ended Substation Designs

In this conguration, the MEB or MSB serves as both primary and secondary protection for the transformer. Savings in both oor space and cost result, due to elimination of the secondary main device. This scheme is only recommended where cost and space prevent the use of secondary main device.
Note: Two sets of current transformers are used to protect against secondary ground faults, overloads and short circuits, as well as primary winding faults.
EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 50/51 50N/51N
11 12 13
Figure 7.3-2. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MEB)
14 15 16 17
50/51 50N/51N EDR-3000 EDR-4000 DT 520MCV DT 1150V 52 50/51 50N/51N EDR-3000 EDR-4000
18 19 20
Figure 7.3-3. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MSB)
21
7.3-2
Vacuum Breakers
Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB)
September 2011
Sheet 07 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Surge Arresters
IEEE Standard C62.11 for metal-oxide surge arresters lists the maximum rated ambient temperature as 40C. The ambient temperature inside an MEB and MSB switchgear vertical section may exceed this temperature, especially in outdoor applications where solar radiation may produce a signicant contribution to the temperature. Table 7.3-1 lists the recommended minimum duty cycle voltage rating for various system grounding methods based on switchgear temperatures not exceeding 55C.
Table 7.3-1. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Service Voltage Line-to-Line kV Distribution Class Arresters Solidly Low Resistance Grounded System Grounded System Arrester Ratings kV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 10 12 12 12 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 10 10 12 12 12 12 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 10.20 Station Class Arresters High Resistance or Solidly Low Resistance Ungrounded System Grounded System Grounded System Arrester Ratings kV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV 3 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 12 12 15 18 18 18 18 18 21 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 17.00 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 10 12 12 12 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 12 12 12 12 15 15 2.55 2.55 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 10.20 10.20 10.20 10.20 12.70 12.70 High Resistance or Ungrounded System Nominal 3 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 10 12 12 15 18 18 18 18 18 21 MCOV 2.55 5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 8.40 10.20 10.20 12.70 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 15.30 17.00
2.30 2.40 3.30 4.00 4.16 4.76 4.80 6.60 6.90 7.20 8.32 8.40 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.47 13.20 13.80 14.40
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 019
Vacuum Breakers
7.3-3
MEB and MSB Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control

Application
Eatons MEB and MSB switchgear with an automatic transfer control system is an integrated assembly of drawout VCP-W breakers, sensing devices and control components. Available in 515 kV classes. It is typically applied where the continuity of service for critical loads from two power sources in either a two-breaker (one load) or threebreaker (two loads) conguration is desired. MEB and MSB switchgear with an automatic transfer control system can meet most automatic throwover requirements as it has a wide variety of operational sequences embodied in one standard automatic transfer control system.
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC controller is equipped to display history information either via the front panel or over the PowerNet power monitoring system. Source 1 and Source 2 Run Time, Available Time and Connect Time are available, as well as Load Energized Time, Number of Transfers, and the Date, Time and Reason for the last 16 transfers. For communications capability, the ATC controller can be equipped with a PONI card that will allow the user to communicate with the unit via PowerNet software (see Tab 2). All settings for purchased options can be set from the faceplate of the unit or downloaded over PowerNet. Software allows for charting of key historical data, as well as providing the capability to monitor and control the transfer switch from a remote location. See Tab 2 for more information.
Typical Three-Breaker (Two Mains and Normally Open Tie) Automatic Transfer Control
The automatic transfer switchgear assembly includes two main breakers and one tie breaker, and an integrated automatic transfer control system containing sensing devices, low voltage logic control and auxiliary equipment. The transfer control system monitors both sources for correct voltages. An automatic-manual transfer selector switch is provided for selection of manual or automatic operating mode. In manual mode, all three breakers can be manually operated. Interlocking is provided in manual mode of operation to prevent closing all three breakers at the same time. In the automatic mode, the basic sequence of operation based upon two normally energized sources is carried out as follows. Normal operation is with the main breakers closed and the tie breaker open. Upon detection of an undervoltage(s) to the line side of a main breaker, and after a eldadjustable time delay, that main breaker opens and after an additional eld-adjustable time delay, the tie breaker closes to restore power to the affected portion of the facility. Upon restoration of voltage to the line side of the main breaker, and after a eldadjustable time delay, the tie breaker opens and after a eld-adjustable time delay, the opened main breaker closes. Interlocking is provided to prevent closing all three breakers simultaneously in manual mode.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer Using ATC Controller

Eatons ATC controller continuously monitors all three phases on both sources for correct voltages. Should the voltage of the normal source be lost while the voltage of the alternate source remains normal, the voltage sensing function in the ATC controller will change state starting the time delay function. If the voltage of the normal source is not restored by the end of the time delay interval, the normal breaker will open and the alternate source breaker will close, restoring power to the load.
ATC Controller
Standard Features

Voltage sensing on both sources is provided by the ATC controller Lights to indicate status of switches, sources, and so forth Interlocking to prevent paralleling of sources via software Control power for the automatic transfer control system is derived from the sensing voltage transformers Manual override operation Selectable closed with sync check or open transition on return to normal Programmable time delays on both sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY Single-source responsibility; all basic components are manufactured by Eaton Lockout on phase and/or ground overcurrents and/or internal bus faults
Optional Features
CA08104001E
7.3-4
Vacuum Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 07 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Eatons Type MEB and MSB metalenclosed switchgear (2.415 kV) is corona-free by design. By making switchgear assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made its standard switchgear more reliable. However, as indicated above, with time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that cause partial discharges to develop in switchgear operating at voltages 4000V and above. Type MEB and MSB switchgear can be equipped with factory-installed partial discharge sensors and partial discharge sensing relay for continuous monitoring of the partial discharges under normal operation. Timely detection of insulation degradation through increasing partial discharges can identify potential problems so that corrective actions can be planned and implemented long before permanent deterioration develops. Partial discharge detection can be the foundation of an effective predictive maintenance program. Trending of partial discharge data over time allows prediction of failures, which can be corrected before catastrophic failure occurs. The PD sensing and monitoring system consists of Eatons InsulGard relay and PD sensors specically developed for application in the switchgear to work with the relay. Partial discharges within the MEB switchgear compartment are detected by the installation of a small donut type radio frequency current transformer
(RFCT) sensor over oating stress shields of the specially designed bus or line side primary bushings. Partial discharge in the customers power cables (external discharges) are detected by the installation of the RFCT around ground shields of the incoming or outgoing power cables termination. Partial discharges within the MSB switchgear compartment are detected by installation of coupling capacitor type sensor connected to the main bus or on the load side of the feeder breakers. Partial discharges in the customers power cables (external discharges) are detected by the installation of the RFCT around ground shields of the incoming or outgoing power cables termination. Output signals from sensors (coupling capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to terminal blocks for future or eld use, or connected to the InsulGard relay. One InsulGard relay can monitor up to 15 output signals, and temperature and humidity. The temperature and humidity sensors are included with each InsulGard relay system. The relay continuously monitors the switchgear primary system for partial discharges and provides an alarm signal (contact closure) when high PD level is detected. Data analysis and diagnostics performed by Eaton engineers can also be provided by remote communication with the InsulGard relay. The sensors and InsulGard relay are optional in MEB and MSB switchgear.
Coupling Capacitor Type PD Sensor
RFCT Sensor

Partial discharge (PD) is a common name for various forms of electrical discharges such as corona, surface tracking and discharges internal to the insulation. It partially bridges the insulation between the conductors. These high-frequency discharges are essentially small arcs occurring in or on the surface of the insulation system when voltage stress exceeds a critical value. With time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that result in partial discharges. Partial discharges start at a low level and increase as more insulation becomes deteriorated. Examples of partial discharge in switchgear are surface tracking across bus insulation, or discharges in the air gap between the bus and a support, such as where a bus passes through an insulating window between the sections of the switchgear. If partial discharge process is not detected and corrected, it can develop into a fullscale insulation failure followed by an electrical fault. Most switchgear ashover and bus failures are a result of insulation degradation caused by various forms of partial discharges.
Input Terminal Block
InsulGard Relay
Optional Modem
Signals (up to 15 Total) from PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors, RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.)
Output Alarm Status
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 07 021
Vacuum Breakers
7.3-5
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 7.3-5. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MEB Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
Figure 7.3-6. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MSB Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/ outgoing cable circuit.
CA08104001E
7.3-6

September 2011
Sheet 07 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 001
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
8.0-1
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
Contents
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-2 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-2 Duplex Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-5 Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-5 Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-6 Motor Operated MVS Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-7 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-7 Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-9 MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-11 MVS Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12 MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-15 Mini MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-25 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Sections 16361A, Sections 26 13 16.11, 16361B 26 13 16.13
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21
CA08104001E
8.0-2

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 08 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

General Description
Eatons MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear is an integrated assembly of switches, bus and fuses that are coordinated electrically and mechanically for medium voltage circuit protection. All major components are manufactured by Eaton, establishing one source of responsibility for the equipments performance and ensuring high standards in quality, coordination, reliability and service. A complete line of Eaton switches and fuses is available, as follows:

Standard MVS switchgear meets or exceeds the following industry standards:

ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4 ANSI C37.22 ANSI C37.57 ANSI C37.58 NEMA SG5 NEMA SG6 CSA 22.2 No. 31-04 (5/15 kV ratings only) EEMAC G8-3.3 UL listed (5/15 kV ratings only) CSA/US listable (538 kV)
5, 15, 27 and 38 kV voltage classes 600A continuous and load interrupting ratings, all voltage classes, 1200A continuous and load interrupting for 5 and 15 kV classes 350A continuous and load interrupting ratings for 5 kV and 15 kV classes for capacitive circuits Non-fused or fused with current limiting or boric acid-type fuses Manual or motor operated Indoor or outdoor non-walk-in enclosures Single switches and transformer primary switches Duplex loadbreak switch arrangements for selection of alternate feeds Two-position, manual no-load selector switches for selection of alternate feeds (5 and 15 kV only) Lineups with main bus Standard arrangements with automatic transfer control systems, two sources feeding one load or two sources feeding two loads on a split bus with tie switch
Outdoor Duplex with Customer Metering
Eatons Load Interrupter Type MVS metal-enclosed switchgear provides safe, reliable switching and fault protection for medium voltage circuits rated from 2.438 kV. The MVS switch is ideal for applications where high duty cycle operation is not needed. MVS switchgear has the advantage of low initial cost inherent in switch designs while offering the characteristics most vital to safety and coordination. The MVS switchs quick-make, quickbreak mechanism provides full-load current interrupting capability while fuses provide accurate, permanently calibrated short circuit detecting and interrupting capabilities. Visibility of actual blade position improves safety by giving positive assurance of circuit de-energization.
5 and 15 kV MVS switchgear assemblies are available as listed products with Underwriters Laboratories and Canadian Standards Association for most options. In addition, 27 and 38 kV MVS switchgear assemblies are available with CSA/US listing to U.S. standards with a limited number of options. Load interrupter switches should not be used to interrupt load currents above their interrupting rating of 600 or 1200A, as they are not designed nor tested for interrupting fault currents on electrical systems. Optional fuses can be provided for phase overcurrent protection. For ground fault current tripping, see MSB and MEB switchgear Tab 7. Refer to Page 8.0-13, Table 8.0-6 for applicable fuse ratings.
Seismic Qualication
Standard design congurations for:

NEMA pads for cable lugs Surge arresters Instrument transformers Control power transformers IQ electronic metering Eatons PowerNet accessing devices such as addressable relays and PONI cards Other auxiliary equipment
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 003

General Description
8.0-3
Construction
i ii
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Switch with Hinged Screen Barrier Open
High Quality Insulation Bus and switch insulators, switch drive rod barriers between phases, and barriers between outer phases and the housing, are of high strength, non-hygroscopic, trackresistant glass polyester as standard. Optional switch, fuse and main bus epoxy insulation system is available. Red-Green Switch Position Indicators Provisions for Padlocking Switch Open or Closed Provisions for Door and Switch Key Interlocks
Typical Switch with Front Door Open
Switch Mechanism Quick-make, quick-break stored energy operation. The opening and closing of the switch blades is done by the operating spring. An operators actions only charge and release the operating spring. The switch blades cannot be teased to any intermediate positions. During the closing operation, full clearance between blades and stationary contacts is maintained until the switch mechanism goes over toggle. The switch mechanism has only metal-to-metal linkageno chains or cables are used. Arc interruption takes place between copper-tungsten tipped auxiliary (icker) blade and arcing contacts with a DE-ION arc chute; no arcing takes place between the main blades and the stationary contacts to prolong the life of the main blades. Blow-out forces cannot be transmitted to the operating handle.
Provisions for Padlocking Door Handle not visible in the photo. Inspection Window A large 8.00-inch x 16.00-inch (203.2 x 406.4 mm) gasketed, rectangular, high impact viewing window permits full view of the position of all three switch blades through the closed door. Full Height Main Door The door has a return ange and two rotary latch-type handles to provide latching members held in shear. It closes over a projecting frame. Foot-Operated Door Stop Grounded Metal Safety Barrier Prevents inadvertent contact with any live part, yet allows full-view inspection of the switch blade position. Door Interlock Prevents the door of the enclosure from being opened when the switch is closed. Switch Interlock Prevents inadvertent closure of the switch if the door of the enclosure is open.
The Operating Handle It is conveniently located behind a small access door giving the structure a smooth homogeneous appearance and discourages casual contact by unauthorized personnel. Switchgear Assembly Rating Nameplate
14 15 16
17
18 19
20
Switch Operating Compartment Door Open
21
CA08104001E
8.0-4

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 08 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Switch Mechanism
The quick-make, quick-break mechanism uses a heavy-duty coil spring that provides powerful opening and closing action. To close the switch, the handle is inserted into the spring charging cam, then rotated upward through an angle of 120 degrees. This action charges the operating spring, and as the mechanism is forced past toggle, the stored energy of the spring is released and transferred to the main shaft that snaps the switch closed. As a result of the over-toggle action, the blades are moved independently of the operator. It is impossible to tease the switch into any intermediate position. To open the switch, the handle is inserted into the spring charging cam and rotated downward through 120 degrees resulting in charging of the operating spring, then releasing its stored energy in similar sequence.
As the main blades open, current is transferred momentarily to the icker blades, which are held in the arc chutes by high pressure contact ngers. There is no arcing at the main blades. When the main blades reach a predetermined angle of opening, a stop post on the main blades prevents further angular movement between the main and icker blades. This starts the icker blades out of the high pressure contacts in the arc chutes and as contacts are broken, the icker blades are snapped into position by their torsion springs. The heat of the arc, meanwhile, releases a blast of de-ionizing gas from the gas-generating material of the arc chute. This combination of quick-break and DE-ION action quickly extinguishes the arc and the circuit is safely de-energized. A non-fused switch has the ability to close and latch four times when rated 40 kA fault close, and one time when rated 61 kA fault close, and continue to carry rated current thus adding a large margin of integrity to the electrical system. The 5/15 kV switch designs have also demonstrated the ability to surpass the number of ANSI C37.22 required loadbreak current operations by no less than 200%.
Bus Insulation System

All bus runs are supported using a high strength and high creep, nned support providing in excess of 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 5/15 kV and 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 27/38 kV, of creep distance between phases and ground. The molded high track-resistant ns are constructed as standard of Aramid nylon or optional Cycloaliphatic epoxy.

Signicantly superior bus bracing than standoff type A20 insulators Signicantly increased creep distance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground Improved endurance from fault incidents Minimizes bus system failures due to tracking Eliminates additional ground planes in the switchgear for bus supporting systems
Quick-Break DE-ION Arc Interruption

With the switch closed, both main and auxiliary (icker) blades are closed, and all of the current ows through the main blades. The icker blades are in the closed position in the arc chutes, but are past the arcing contacts and thus carry no current.
Bus Support
Main, Flicker Blades Engaged
Main Blades Disengaged, Flicker Blade Engaged
Both Blades Disengaged
16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 8.0-1. Switch Operation
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 005

General Description
8.0-5
Duplex Switch Conguration

Two MVS load interrupter switch sections can be used to provide costeffective source selectivity with a common load side bus feeding one load, fused or nonfused. Key interlocks are a standard feature provided to permit only one switch to be closed at one time and prevent opening any switch door unless both switches are open.
Two-Position, No-Load Selector Switch

Eatons MVS load interrupter switch can be used to provide the most costeffective source selectivity in a single compact structure with a two-position Type MVS non-loadbreak selector switch in series with the load break MVS switch. This selector switch is mechanically interlocked such that operation can be performed only when the load interrupter switch is in the open position. Also, neither the MVS switch nor the main door can be closed without the selector switch being positively locked in one of the two feeder positions.
Loadbreak Switch with Grounding Jaw

The loadbreak switch can be supplied with optional grounding jaws for automatic grounding of the load circuit. When the switch is opened, the switch main blades engage grounding jaws to ground the load circuit. This feature cannot be used in a duplex switch conguration. The ground jaw option is available at 538 kV. It is meant for applying a static ground, and is not rated for carrying fault currents.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
K1
K1
6 7
K1 Door K1 Door
95.40 (2423.2)
8
Figure 8.0-5. Typical Feeder Switch with Optional Grounding Jaw (538 kV)
9 10
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Grounding Jaw
62.00 (1574.8)
11
Line
SA
Figure 8.0-2. Typical Duplex Switch Conguration with One K1 Key Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 8.0-3. Typical Two-Position Selector Switch for Bottom Cable Entrance Dimensions in Inches (mm)
12 13
90.37 (2295.0)
SW
No n Load Break Selector Switch
FU 2.19 (56.0) 31.60 (803.0) Load
14
1.3620
15 16
62.00 (1575.0)
Mechanical Interlock Load Break Switch
17 18 19
Figure 8.0-6. Typical Section View of Feeder Switch with Optional Grounding Jaws
36.00 (914.4)
20 21
Figure 8.0-4. Typical Selector Switch CongurationDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
8.0-6

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 08 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Mini-MVS (26-Inch Wide)
Eatons Mini-MVS switchgear assembly is rated 200A, 4.76 kV. The medium voltage Mini-MVS switchgear assembly is for use in power distribution, transformer primary connections and isolation applications requiring a stand-alone assembly, cable in/cable out terminations and manual operation. The Mini-MVS switchgear assembly is seismically qualied. The assembly is listed by UL or CSA. The switch is available fused or non-fused. There is an option for an outdoor enclosure. Several built-in interlocks and safety features are provided.
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly

Standard Features

Seismically qualied Manually operated switch Door-to-switch safety interlocking Auxiliary switch, one Form C contact Viewing window for switch position Provisions for padlocking the switch in the OPEN position Provision for padlocking the two door handles closed Spare fuse rack Grounded metal screen barrier in front of the switch Cycloalaphatic epoxy insulators Line, load and ground cable lugs for #6 solid-4/0 stranded cable Aluminum or copper Key interlock provisions ListedUL/CSA Enclosed typeindoor or outdoor Outdoor enclosure includes space heater
Optional Features
Note: If the application requires a heater for condensation, an outdoor enclosure should be selected
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly W = 26.00 inches (660.4 mm) H = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm) D = 27.25 inches (692.2 mm)
Fused or unfused switch If fused, Eatons Type CLE current limiting fuses from 10E amperes to 200E amperes are supplied Distribution type surge arresters, 3 or 6 kV Spare fuses
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 007

General Description
8.0-7
Motor Operated MVS Switches

Application
Eatons MVS Pow-R-Drive motor operator makes possible the safety, convenience and coordination inherent in remote switch operation.
Description
A MVS Pow-R-Drive motor operated switch is a standard, manually operated switch in combination with a heavy-duty electric motor-driven linear actuator that charges the spring. The linear actuator is located in a separate isolated low voltage compartment. During electrical operation, it smoothly and quietly extends or retracts the proper distance to cause the switch mechanism to operate. Standard motor operators are mounted in the switch enclosure. This eliminates the separate motor compartment conserving oor space.
Manual Operation
To operate manually, loosen the holding screw that keeps the pin connecting the linear actuator to the mechanism in place. Remove this pin. Remove the clevis pin on the support of the bottom of the linear actuator. Unplug the cord from the disconnecting terminal block as the actuator is removed and set the actuator aside. The switch can now be operated manually with the removable handle.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Key Interlock to Lock Switch Open

A keyed lock is standard to lock the switch in the open position only. This lock not only locks the switch in the open position, but also breaks the electrical motor contacts integral to the lock and permits the key to be removed. With the key, the operator can then open the lock on the switch door. This scheme gives positive assurance that the switch is open and cannot be closed with the door open.
Motor Operated MVS Switch
Manual Operation Override
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
8.0-8

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 08 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Electronic Metering and Communications Apparatus

MVS switchgear assemblies can be equipped with Eatons family of Power Xpert and IQ Electronic Meters to monitor a power circuits electrical quantities within the capabilities of each device. See Tab 3 for further
information on these devices. MVS switchgear assemblies can also be equipped to interface with Eatons PowerNet integrated monitoring and control communications system with communication (PONI) accessories, addressable relays, etc. See Tab 2 for further information.
Outdoor Enclosures
Weatherproong complying with the requirements of NEMA 3R and IEEE standard C37.20.3 is available for MVS switchgear assemblies. The weatherproong consists of sloped roof panels that are joined together with caps. Doors and rear covers are fully gasketed. Externally accessible louvered ltered covers, top and bottom, front and rear, are provided for ventilation. At least one 250 watt heater is provided in each vertical section. Power for the heaters may be supplied from an external source, or an optional integral control power transformer may be specied to provide power for the heaters.
Other Meters: IQ 160/260 Refer to Tab 3.
Outdoor Enclosure
Power Xpert Meter PXM 4000/6000/8000
18 19 20 21
Electronic Metering
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 009

8.0-9

Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed switchgear (2.427 kV) is corona-free by design. By making switchgear assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made its standard switchgear more reliable. However, as indicated above, with time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that cause partial discharges to develop in switchgear operating at voltages 4000V and above. Type MVS switchgear can be equipped with factory-installed partial discharge sensors and partial discharge sensing relay for continuous monitoring of the partial discharges under normal operation. Timely detection of insulation degradation through increasing partial discharges can identify potential problems so that corrective actions can be planned and implemented long before permanent deterioration develops. Partial discharge detection can be the foundation of an effective predictive maintenance program. Trending of partial discharge data over time allows prediction of failures, which can be corrected before catastrophic failure occurs. The PD sensing and monitoring system consists of Eatons InsulGard relay and PD sensors specically developed for application in the switchgear to work with the relay. There are two types of PD sensors used in the switchgear: the rst sensor is a coupling capacitor type sensor developed for use with 5, 15 and 27 kV switchgear.
The coupling capacitor sensor detects partial discharges within the switchgear cubicle and/or adjacent cubicles, and is typically installed on the load side of the feeder switches or on the main bus. The second sensor is a small donut type radio frequency current transformer (RFCT). It is designed for installation around ground shields of customers incoming or outgoing power cables. It detects partial discharges in customers power cables and external electrical noise. Typically one set of coupling capacitor sensors is used at every two cubicles. One RFCT sensor is used for each incoming and outgoing power cable circuit. Output signals from sensors (coupling capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to terminal blocks for future or eld use, or connected to the InsulGard relay. One InsulGard relay can monitor up to 15 output signals, and temperature and humidity. The temperature and humidity sensors are included with each InsulGard relay system. The relay continuously monitors the switchgear primary system for partial discharges and provides an alarm signal (contact closure) when high PD level is detected. Data analysis and diagnostics by Eaton engineers can also be provided by remote communication with the InsulGard relay. The sensors and InsulGard relay are optional in MVS switchgear.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Coupling Capacitor Type PD Sensor
RFCT Sensor

Partial discharge (PD) is a common name for various forms of electrical discharges such as corona, surface tracking, and discharges internal to the insulation. It partially bridges the insulation between the conductors. These high frequency discharges are essentially small arcs occurring in or on the surface of the insulation system when voltage stress exceeds a critical value. With time, airborne particles, contaminants and humidity lead to conditions that result in partial discharges. Partial discharges start at a low level and increase as more insulation becomes deteriorated. Examples of partial discharge in switchgear are surface tracking across bus insulation, or discharges in the air gap between the bus and a support, such as where a bus passes through an insulating window between the sections of the switchgear. If a partial discharge process is not detected and corrected, it can develop into a full-scale insulation failure followed by an electrical fault. Most switchgear ashover and bus failures are a result of insulation degradation caused by various forms of partial discharges.
Input T Terminal Block
InsulGard Relay
13
Optional Modem
14 15
Signals (up to 15 T Total) from PD Sensors ( Capacitors, , RTD Input, etc..)
16
Output Alarm Status
17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
8.0-10 Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch

September 2011
Sheet 08 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT) Coupling Capacitor
PD Sensors
Figure 8.0-8. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
Coupling Capacitor detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment. RFCT detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear.
Figure 8.0-9. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MVS Switchgear (527 kV)
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/ outgoing cable circuit.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 011

Application
8.0-11
MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control
For communications capability, the ATC controller can be equipped with a PONI card, which will allow the user to communicate with the unit via PowerNet software (see Tab 2). All settings for purchased options can be set from the faceplate of the unit or downloaded over PowerNet. Software allows for charting of key historical data as well as providing the capability to monitor and control the transfer switch from a remote location. See Tab 2 for further information.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
ATC Controller
Application
Eatons MVS switchgear with an automatic transfer control system is an integrated assembly of motor operated MVS switches, sensing devices and control components. Available in 538 kV classes. It is typically applied where the continuity of service for critical loads from two power sources in either a two-switch (one load) or three-switch (two loads) conguration is desired. MVS switchgear with an automatic transfer control system can meet most automatic throwover requirements as it has a wide variety of operational sequences embodied in one standard automatic transfer control system. Please note that the duty cycle of load interrupter switches is limited by ANSI Standard C37.22. Refer to Table 8.0-4 for maximum number of switching operations allowed. If the number of switching operations is expected to exceed the maximum allowed, then load interrupter switches should not be used. Use circuit breakers (refer to Type MSB, MEB, MEF or VCP-W switchgear designs).
Standard Features Typical Two-Switch Automatic Transfer Using ATC Controller

Eatons ATC controller continuously monitors all three phases on both sources for correct voltages. Should the voltage of the normal source be lost while the voltage of the alternate source remains normal, the voltage sensing function in the ATC controller will change state starting the time delay function. If the voltage of the normal source is not restored by the end of the time delay interval, the normal switch will open and the alternate source switch will close, restoring power to the load.

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC controller is equipped to display history information either via the front panel or over the PowerNet power monitoring system. Source 1 and Source 2 Run Time, Available Time and Connect Time are available, as well as Load Energized Time, Number of Transfers, and the Date, Time and Reason for the Last 16 Transfers.
Voltage sensing on both sources is provided by the ATC controller Lights to indicate status of switches, sources, etc. Interlocking to prevent paralleling of sources via software Control power for the automatic transfer control system is derived from the sensing voltage transformers Manual override operation Selectable closed with sync check or open transition on return to normal Programmable time delays on both sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY Single-source responsibility; all basic components are manufactured by Eaton Key interlocking of operating system and doors where required to provide operator safety
Optional Features
Lockout on phase and/or ground overcurrents and/or internal bus faults Blown fuse overcurrent lockout
CA08104001E

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 08 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Technical Data
Test Data
All Eatons MVS switch ratings have been thoroughly tested in recognized high power laboratories with certied inspectors from both UL and CSA organizations. Tests were performed to substantiate all published ratings in accordance with ANSI, IEEE, CSA and NEMA standards. The testing program included tests of:

Table 8.0-1. Switch Ratings (Non-Fused)

Rated Maximum kV 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 15 15 15 15 27 27 38 Impulse Withstand kV 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 125 125 150 Cont. and Load-Break Amperes 600 600 1200 1200 600 600 1200 1200 600 600 600 Fault-Close & Rated Short-Time Momentary Amperes Current (2 sec.) kA rms Asym. (10 Cycles) kA rms Sym. 40 61 40 61 40 61 40 61 40 64 40 25 38 25 38 25 38 25 38 25 40 25
Basic impulse levels Momentary withstand Short-time withstand Fault closing Load interrupting at various loads, various power factors Mechanical life tests Temperature rise test
Table 8.0-2. Switchgear Assembly Ratings

Rated Maximum Volts kV 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 15 15 15 15 27 27 38 Rated BIL kV 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 125 125 150 Rated Main Bus Current Amperes 6001200 6001200 6001200 1200 2000 2000 2000 6001200 6001200 6001200 1200 6001200 6001200 6001200 Rated Momentary Current kA rms Asym. 40 61 80 101 61 80 101 40 61 80 101 40 64 40 Rated Short-Time Current (2 sec.) kA rms Sym. 25 38 50 63 38 50 63 25 38 50 63 25 40 25
These tests veried not only the performance of the switch and integrated switch-fuse assembly, but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus spacing. The mechanical life test subjected the MVS switch to a number of no load cycles greater than the requirements tabulated in ANSI C37.22 standards. There were no moving or current carrying part failures as a result. The Fault Close and Load Interrupting test demonstrated signicant improved performance above ANSI/ IEEE standards. See Tables 8.0-3 and 8.0-4 for results.
Table 8.0-3. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Full Load Operations
Rated Maximum kV 4.76 4.76 15 15 27 38 Switch Load Interrupting Ampere Rating 600 1200 600 1200 600 600 ANSI Required Number of Load Interrupting Operations 50 20 30 10 10 5 Eaton MVS Switch Number of UL Tested Load Break Operations 60 50 60 50 10 5
Table 8.0-4. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Fault Close OperationsNon-Fused
Rated Maximum kV 5 and 15 5 and 15 27 27 38 Switch Fault Close Ampere Rating 40 61 40 61 40 ANSI Required Number of Fault Close Operations 1 1 1 1 1 Eaton MVS Switch Number of UL Tested Fault Close Operations 4 1 1 1 1
Table 8.0-5. Mini-MVS Ratings, rms Values

Description Input voltage, maximum Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) Low frequency voltage Frequency Continuous current, maximum Load current interrupting rating Magnetizing interrupting current Short-time current symmetrical for 2 seconds Momentary current, asymmetrical Fault close current, asymmetrical
Unfused 4.76 kV 60 kV 19 kV 60 Hz 200A 200A 4A 12.5 kA 20 kA 20 kA
Fused 4.76 kV 60 kV 19 kV 60 Hz 200A 200A 4A
101 kA 101 kA
100% to 80% power factor lagging.
Not applicable for fused units.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 013

Technical Data
8.0-13
Table 8.0-6. Primary Fuses, Standard Ratings and Fused Switch Fault Close Rating
Type Fuse RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-400 RBA-800 RBA-800 BHLE CLE600/750 RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-400 RBA-800 RBA-800 HRBA-400 HRBA-800 BHLE BHCL RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 Cooper NX RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 GE EJO-1 Cooper NX

Switchgear Rated Maximum Voltage, kV 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 15 15 15 15 15 14.4 14.4 15 15 25.8 25.8 25.8 27 38 38 38 38 38
Fuse Rated Continuous Current Range, Amperes 10200 10200 0.5400 0.5400 0.5720 10450 600750 10200 0.5400 0.5400 0.5720 0.5720 0.5400 0.5720 10250 300 10200 0.5300 0.5540 0.5100 10200 0.5300 0.5540 2080 20100
Rated Interrupting Capacity kA Symmetrical 19 25 37.5 25 37.5 63 40 14.4 25 29.4 25 29.4 34.8 34.8 63 63 10.5 21 21 35 6.9 16.8 16.8 12.5 35
Fused Switch Fault-Close Rating, kA Asymmetrical rms 26.5 40 60 40 60 101 64 23 40 47 40 47 55.7 55.7 101 101 16.8 33.6 33.6 56 11 26.8 26.8 20 56
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
When RBA expulsion fuses are used, and two ratings appear, the lower rating applies when the lower-rated switch (15 kV, 40 kA fault close, 25 kA short-time current) versus the higher rating that applies when the higher-rated switch (15 kV, 61 kA fault close, 38 kA short-time) is used. UL and CSA listed integrated rating with an Eaton BHLE or BHCL fuse. UL and CSA listed integrated rating with Cooper NX fuse.
Note: For additional fuse data, refer to fuse documents in Tab 9.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 08 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Surge Protection
IEEE standard C62.11 for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters lists the maximum rated ambient temperature as 40C. The ambient temperature inside an Eaton MVS switchgear vertical section may exceed this temperature, especially in outdoor applications where solar radiation may produce a signicant contribution to the temperature. Table 8.0-7 lists the recommended minimum duty cycle voltage rating for various system grounding methods. Surge arrester rating is based upon the ambient air temperature in the switchgear vertical section not exceeding 55C.
Table 8.0-7. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
2.30 2.40 3.30 4.00 4.16 4.76 4.80 6.60 6.90 7.20 8.32 8.40 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.47 13.20 13.80 14.40 18.00 20.78 22.00 22.86 23.00 24.94 25.80 26.40 33.00 34.50 38.00
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 015

LayoutsDimensions
8.0-15
Typical Arrangements5 and 15 kV

The drawings in this section represent the most common arrangements. Layouts shown are for rear-accessible equipment. Front-accessible designs are availablerefer to Eaton. Many other congurations and combinations are available. Two voltage transformers for customer metering and one control transformer for auxiliary power can be mounted in the structures shown.
55.25 (1403.4)
For control power transformer larger than 1 kVA, additional space is required. Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters, instrument transformers, special cable terminators, etc. Disconnect fuses may require wider sections . Cables are shown out top and bottom for layout only. Top or bottom must be
Top 70.00 (1778.0) Bottom 62.00 (1574.8) 55.25 (1403.4)
selected for incoming and for outgoing cables. Structure depth is based on two 500 kcm XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase using preformed slip-on cable termination devices. Refer to note below for minimum required depth when more than two cables per phase are used. For unit substation alignment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
i ii 1 2 3 4
34.9449.25 (887.51251.0)
Entry
62.00 (1574.8)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
5 6
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor 41.00 (1041.4) Indoor 36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
20.00 (508.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Arrangement 1 Single Unit Cable In and Out
Arrangement 3 Selector Switch
Arrangement 4 Primary for Liquid Filled Transformer
7 8 9 10 11
55.25 (1403.4)
55.28 (1404.1)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
36.00 48.00 (914.4 1219.2)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 48.00 (914.4 1219.2)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
12 13 14
Arrangement 6 Main Incoming Metering Section (optional) with Main Switch and Feeders
55.28 (1404.1)
Arrangement 7 Main Incoming Metering Section (optional) with Main Lugs Only Feeders
62.00 (1574.8)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
Outdoor 95.50 (2425.7) Indoor 90.38 (2295.7)
15 16
36.00 (914.4) 15.00 (381.0) 36.00 (914.4)
ATC
ATC
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.0)
36.00 (914.4)
17 18 19 20 21
Arrangement 8 Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load
Arrangement 9 Three Switch Auto TransferMainTieMain with Feeders
Figure 8.0-10. 5 and 15 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Mini-MVS switch unit in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 27.25-inch (692.2 mm) deep and 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm) tall enclosure can be provided for 5 kV, 200A.
Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary. Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator. Note: Minimum depth of MVS unit: Up to two 500 kcm per phase: 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) or 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep; three or four 500 kcm per phase: 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) deep, ve or six 500 kcm per phase: 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) deep.
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

LayoutsDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 08 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Typical Arrangements27 and 38 kV

The drawings in this section represent the most common arrangements. Layouts shown are for rear-accessible equipment. Front-accessible designs are availablerefer to Eaton. Many other congurations and combinations are available. Two voltage transformers for metering and one control transformer for auxiliary power can be mounted in the structures shown. For control power above 1 kVA, additional space is required. Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters, instrument transformers, special cable terminators, etc. Cables are shown out
70.00 (1778.0)
top and bottom for layout only. Top or bottom must be selected for incoming and for outgoing cables. Cable sizing is based on two 500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase using preformed slip-on cable termination devices. For unit substation alignment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
80.00 (2032) Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0) Indoor 127.00 (3226.0) Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0) Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) 48.00 (1219.0)
Unfused or EJO Fuses
80.00 (2032) Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0) Indoor 127.00 (3226.0) Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0) Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) Outdoor 53.00 (1346.2) Indoor 48.00 (1219.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
RBA or S&C Fuses Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0) Indoor 127.00 (3226.0) Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0) Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) 48.00 (1219.0) Outdoor 35.00 (889.0) Indoor 30.00 (762.0)
RBA or S&C Fuses
RBA or S&C Fuses
RBA or S&C Fuses
Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0) Indoor 127.00 (3226.0) Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0) Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) 48.00 (1219.0) 48.00 (1219.0)
Arrangement 1 Single Unit Cable In and Out
Arrangement 3 Primary for Liquid-Filled Transformer
70.00 (1778.0)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RBA Fuses
70.00 (1778.0)
Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0)
RBA Fuses
Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0)
Indoor 127.00 (3226.0)

Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0)
RBA Fuses
Indoor 127.00 (3226.0)

Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0)
Indoor 101.50 (2578.0)
Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) 48.00-60.00 (1219.0-1524.0) 48.00 (1219.0)
48.00-60.00 (1219.0-1524.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
Arrangement 5 Main Device with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
Arrangement 6 Main Lugs with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
100.00 (2540.0)
Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0)
80.00 (2032.0) Outdoor 135.00 (3429.0)

Indoor 127.00 (3226.0)
Indoor 127.00 (3226.0)

Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0)
RBA Fuses
M M
ATC
Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) 48.00 (1219.0) 48.00 (1219.0)

48.00 (1219.0)
Outdoor 110.00 (2794.0)

Indoor 101.50 (2578.0) 48.00 (1219.0) 48.00 (1219.0)
ATC
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.0)
Arrangement 7 Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load
Arrangement 8 Three Switch Auto TransferMain Tie Main with Feeders
Figure 8.0-11. 27 and 38 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary. Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator.
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 08 017

LayoutsDimensions
8.0-17
Typical ArrangementsMVS Connecting to Other Switchgear

The drawings in this section represent the most common arrangements. Layouts shown are for rear-accessible equipment. Front-accessible designs are availablesee Page 8.0-22. Many other congurations and combinations are available. Two voltage transformers for metering and one control transformer for auxiliary power can be mounted in
20.00 (508.0)
the structures shown. For control power transformer larger than1 kVA, additional space is required. Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters, instrument transformers, special cable terminators, etc. Disconnect fuses may require wider sections . Cables are shown out top and bottom
for layout only. Top or bottom must be selected for incoming and for outgoing cables. Cable sizing is based on two 500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase using preformed slip-on cable termination devices. For unit substation alignment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
i ii 1 2 3
Main Switch 55.30 (1404.6)
Feeder Switch
30.00 (762.0)
S i chg ar Sw
Medium Voltage Starters

36.00 (914.4)
55.30 (1404.6)
62.00 (1574.8)
30.00 (762.0)
S itchg Sw Starters
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
S itchgear Sw
gea ar
4 5
36.00 (914.4)
Plan View Main Switch 92.00 (2336.8)
1.25 (31.8)
Plan View
1.25 (31.8)
36.00 (914.4)
26.00 or 19.00 (660.4 or 482.6)
Plan View
6 7
Feeder Switch
90.40 (2296.2)
AMPGARD D Medium Voltage Starters
92.00 (2336.8)
AMPGARD Medium Voltage Starters
92.00 (2336.8)
Feeder Switch
S itc ge ear
8 9
36.00 (914.4)
20.00 (508.0)
36.00 (914.4)
Front View
36.00 (914.4)
26.00 or 19.00 (660.4 or 482.6)
Front View
Arrangement 1 Indoor Top Cable to MV MCC
Arrangement 2 Indoor Bottom Cable to MV MCC
Arrangement 3Indoor MVS Close-coupled to MEF Switchgear

4.00 (101.6)
10 11
Feeder Switch
94.37 (2397.0)
MVS Switchgear
VCP-W Medium Voltage Switchgear
Feeder Switch
96.25 (2444.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
MVS Switchgear
VCP-W Medium Voltage Switchgear
12 13 14
4.60 (116.8)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Plan View
36.00 (914.4) Plan View (Vac-Clad Main Bus Location Only)

36.00 (914.4)
15 16 17 18
VCP-W Medium Voltage Switchgear Feeder Switch Feeder Switch Feeder Switch Feeder Switch
36.00 (914.4) 90.40 (2296.2)
VCP-W Medium Voltage Switchgear 95.50 (2425.7)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
4.00 (101.6)
Front View
A) Depth 84.00 (2133.6) or 94.00 (2387.6) inches to rear align with MVA. B) Cable exit rear only, top or bottom.
Front View
A) DepthSection adjacent MVA, 80.00 inches (2032). B) Depth addition MVS sections 55.30 inches (1404.6). C) 2000A bus maximum.
19 20 21
Arrangement 4Indoor to Metal-Clad Switchgear
Arrangement 5Outdoor Only to Metal-Clad Switchgear
Figure 8.0-12. Connections to AMPGARD MCC (7.2 kV Maximum) and to VCPW Switchgear (15 kV Maximum)Dimensions in Inches (mm)

LayoutsDimensions, 5 and 15 kV Switch
September 2011
Sheet 08 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
2.19 (56.0) 31.60 (803.0) 90.37 (2295.0) Indoor 95.46 (2425.0) Outdoor
Main Bus
Main Bus
95.46 (2425.0) Outdoor Switch 90.37 (2295.0) Indoor
Taps 1.36 (35.0) H1,2 515 kVA CPT (Single Phase)
Switch Fuse 2.19 (56.0) Load
X1-4
Fuse Load
31.60 (803.0) Depth Depth See Table 8.0-10
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
90.37 (2295.0) Indoor Switch 95.46 (2425.0) Outdoor 2.19 (56.0) Main Bus
See Table 8.0-8
Figure 8.0-13. Front Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused
Figure 8.0-15. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT Table 8.0-8. Front Access
No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 1 or 2 out bottom 1.36 (35.0) 1 or 2 out top 34.94 (887.5) 49.25 (1250.0) 34.94 (887.5) 49.25 (1250.0)
Table 8.0-9. Rear Access

No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV Load Fuse Load 3 or 4 top or bottom 5 or 6 top or bottom 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 80.00 (2032.0)

34.15 (867.0) No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 1 or 2 out bottom Depth See Table 8.0-9 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8)
Figure 8.0-14. Rear Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused
September 2011
Sheet 08 019

8.0-19
Main Bus
Main Bus
i ii
Taps 90.37 (2295.0) Indoor Switch 95.46 (2425.0) Outdoor Fuse 2.19 (56.0) 31.60 (803.0) Depth See Table 8.0-11 Load 1.36 (35.0) H1,2 X1-4 515 kVA CPT (SinglePhase) 95.46 (2425.0) Outdoor
40.22 (1022.0) Switch Line
1 2 3
90.37 (2295.0) Indoor 2.19 (56.0)
Fuse Load 34.15 (867.0)
4 5
Depth See Table 8.0-13
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 8.0-16. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT
Figure 8.0-18. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus Table 8.0-11. Rear Access
Main Bus
No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 1 or 2 out top Lug 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0)
95.46 (2425.0) Outdoor 90.37 (2295.0) Indoor

No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 1 or 2 top or bottom 55.25 (1403.3) 62.00 (1574.8)
Switch
Fuse 2.19 (56.0) 31.60 (803.0) Load

1.36 (35.0) No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 3 or 4 top in/bottom out 5 or 6 top in/bottom out 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Figure 8.0-17. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 08 020
i ii 1 2
Line 18.00 (457.0) Line 20.00 (508.0)
3 4 5 6
Load Fuse Load Fuse 110.37 (2803.0) Indoor Switch 115.46 (2933.0) Outdoor Switch
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
31.60 (803.0) 31.60 (803.0)
Figure 8.0-19. Rear Access Indoor, Cable In/Cable Out Table 8.0-14. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom
No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 1 or 2 top in bottom out 1 or 2 top in top out 34.94 (887.5) 49.25 (1250.0) 34.94 (887.5) 49.25 (1250.0)
Figure 8.0-20. Rear Access Outdoor, Cable In/Cable Out
September 2011
Sheet 08 021

8.0-21
i ii
135.00 (3429.0) Outdoor Tall Height 110.00 (2794.0) Outdoor Low Height Note (A)
Switch
135.00 (3429.0) Outdoor Tall Height 110.00 (2794.0) Outdoor Low Height Note (A)
Switch
1 2 3 4
Fuse
127.00 (3225.8) Indoor Tall Height 101.50 (2578.1) Indoor Low Height Note (A)
Fuse
127.00 (3225.8) Indoor Tall Height 101.50 (2578.1) Indoor Low Height Note (A)
5 6 7 8
Front
Front
9 10
Figure 8.0-21. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom

Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
Figure 8.0-22. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom

Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Table 8.0-15. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom

No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 27 kV 38 kV 1 or 2 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Table 8.0-16. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom

No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) (Based on 500 kcmil) 27 kV 38 kV 1 or 2 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
21

LayoutsDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 08 022
i
16.00 (406.4)
Front Only Access Bottom Entry, Top or Bottom Exit

10.00 (254.0) Optional Rear Door 1.50 (38.1) 8.00 (203.2) A&B 10.00 (254.0) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 8.00 (203.2) A 1.50 (38.1) 8.00 (203.2) A 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 33.00 0 (838.2) (83 16.00 (406.4) 13.00 (330.2)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Roof Layout
Roof Layout
10 8.00 (203.2) 16 B Front 36.00 (914.4) (914.4 10
Roof Layout
Front 36.00 6.00 (914.4) (914.4 10.00 (254.0) Optional Rear Door 6.60 (167.6) 8.00 (203.2) A&B 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 1.25 (31.8)
19.00 (482.6)
Front 20.00 (508.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 6.00 (152.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 8.00 (203.2)
Floor Layout
10 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 36.00 (914.4) (914.4 16 A 10
Floor Layout
10 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 16 A Front 36.00 (914.4) 10
Floor Layout
16.00 (406.4) 8.00 (203.2) 10 B 16 A Front 56.00 (1422.4) 10

Cable location not available with top main bus. When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-10 and 8.0-13 through 8.0-20 as applicable for dimension D on Pages 8.0-15 and 8.0-19 through 8.0-20.
Rear Access Top or Bottom Exit
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) Optional Rear Door 1.50 (38.1) 8.00 (203.2) A 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 8.00 (203.2) A&B 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 46.00 (1168.4) 16.00 (406.4)
Front Only Access Bottom Entry, Top or Bottom Exit
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
Roof Layout
Roof Layout
Roof Layout
Front
Front 48.00 (1219.2 (1219.2) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 30.00 (762.0)
Front
15
16.00 (406.4)
48.00 (1219.2) (1219.2
78.00 (1981.2)
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 6.60 (167.6) 15.00 (381.0)
11.00 (279.4)
16 17 18 19 20 21
Optional Rear Door 6.60 (167.6) 8.00 (203.2) A
.00 (1498.6) 59.00 59 (1498.6 8.00 (203.2)
6.00 (152.4)
A&B
Floor Layout
D
Floor Layout
Floor Layout
D 16 16
D 16 B
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) Front 48.00 0 (1219.2) (12 (1219.2 48.00 0 (1219.2 (1219.2) (12
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
Front
78.00 (1981.2)

When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-11 and 8.0-21 through 8.0-22 as applicable for dimension D on Pages 8.0-16 and 8.0-21.
September 2011
Sheet 08 023

LayoutsDimensions
8.0-23
Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5) diameter holes in four places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lbs. (101.7 Nm). Door swing equals unit width at 90.
5.00 (127.0) Typ. 2 5 6 Optional Rear Door 4.25 (108.0) 2.95 (74.9) 6.00 (152.4) Min. 3 1 1.25 (31.8) 7
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. Minimum clearances in front is the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. The standard minimum recommended distance is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear access for installation and maintenance. The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance. For MVS only. If the application is specically provided by contract as not requiring rear access as stated in 5, then the minimum recommended distance is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
Finished foundations surface shall be level within
3 6.00 (152.4) Min.
1.25 (31.8) 4.25 (108.0) FRONT DOOR
4 Min.
0.06 inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Table 8.0-17. Approximate Weights in Lbs. (kg)
Figure 8.0-25. Typical Anchor Plan515 kV Indoor or Outdoor
Switch Description
Indoor
Outdoor
5 or 15 kV Class
Non-fused switch Fuses (3), add Indoor transition Outdoor throat 1500 (681) 200 (91) 300 (136) 1800 (817) 200 (91) 500 (227)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Dimensions in Inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
21

LayoutsDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 08 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Dimensions in Inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
FRONT 0.44 (11.2) Typ. 0.44 (11.2) Typ. 6.00 (152.4) Min. 3 1 1 1.25 (31.8) Typ. 3 6.00 (152.4) Min. 4.50 (114.3) Typ. 5 1.25 (31.8) Optional Rear Door
2 2.12 (53.8) Typ. 5.81 (147.6) Typ. 6.00 (152.4) Min. 3 Optional Rear Door
Min. 5
1.28 (32.5) Typ. 3 6.00 (152.4) Min. 7 1.28 (32.5) Typ.
5.81 (147.6) Typ. FRONT DOOR
4
2 Min.
4 Min.
Figure 8.0-26. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Outdoor Typical location for four (two front, two back) Eaton supplied tie down clips for all 2738 kV. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5 M12 x 1.75 min. CL 10.9 or stronger, and tightened to 75 ft-lbs. Door swing equals vertical section width at 90. Minimum clearance on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front to rear. Local jurisdictions may require a larger clearance. Minimum clearance in front is the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm), but not less than that required by the NEC. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance. Minimum clearance in rear is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm). If rear doors are supplied, the minimum clearance is the width of the widest vertical section equipped with a rear door plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Local jurisdictions may require a larger clearance. Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
Locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) anchor bolts.
Figure 8.0-27. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Indoor Table 8.0-18. Approximate Weights in Lbs (kg)
Switch Description Indoor Outdoor
27 or 38 kV Class
Non-fused switch Fuses (3), add Indoor transition Outdoor throat Motor operator adder 2000 (908) 300 (136) 1100 (499) 400 (182) 2400 (1090) 300 (136) 1200 (545) 400 (182)
September 2011
Sheet 08 025

LayoutsDimensions
8.0-25
Mini-MVS Switch (5 kV, 200A Only)

Dimensions and Weights
Maximum weight of switch assembly is 550 lbs (250 kg).
6.00 (152.4) 12.69 (322.3)
Arrester Option
ii 1
Cable Routing Area
17.38 (441.5)
Line Lug
2.12 (53.8) Entrance/Exit 27.25 (692.2) 15.00 (381.0) 4.11 (104.4) Front 26.00 (660.4) Top View 2.12 (53.8)
Front View w/o Door and Screen Barrier Non-Fused Switch 53.56 (1360.4)
2 3 4
Load Lug 16.38 (416.1)
4.11 (104.4)
29.50 (749.3)
5 6 7 8 9
Ground Lug 27.25 (692.2) Side Section View Non-Fused Switch
27.25 (692.2)
Entrance/Exit Area Bottom
Figure 8.0-29. Front and Side View of Non-Fused Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly
Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.

Arrester Option 12.69 (322.3) 6.00 (152.4) 17.38 (441.5)
3.37 (85.6) 4.11 (104.4) Front 26.00 (660.4) Floor Plan Lifting Plates 4.11 (104.4)
10
Line Lug
11 12
Cable Routing Area
13 14
Viewing Window 66.25 (1682.8)
53.56 (1360.4)
15 16
11.50 (292.1) Front View w/o Door and Screen Barrier CLE Fused Switch
16.25 (412.8)
Load Lug Ground Lug
17 18 19 20 21
27.25 (692.2) Side Section View CLE Fused Switch
26.00 (660.4) Front View
Figure 8.0-30. Front and Side View of Fused CLE Mini-MVS Switch Assembly
Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.
Figure 8.0-28. Front View and Conduit Entrance

CA08104001E
Note: The Mini-MVS unit is designed for front access only or as front and rear access. Cable terminations are accessible from the front. The unit can be placed against the wall, with a minimum 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) clearance. For rear access applications, a minimum 30.00-inch (762.0) clearance is recommended. Check for additional NEC code clearance requirements.
8.0-26 Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 08 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 001
9.0-1
Fuses Medium Voltage
Contents
FusesMedium Voltage General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2 Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-4 Expulsion Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-6 Technical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-7 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16362 Section 26 18 16
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Current Limiting Fuses
21
CA08104001E
9.0-2
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Medium Voltage Fuses
Eatons entry in the power fuse business began over 75 years ago under Westinghouse Electric. In 1935, Westinghouse introduced the medium voltage boric acid expulsion fuse followed by the medium voltage current limiting fuse. Even today, medium voltage fuses continue to use the core Westinghouse technology. Eaton continues to build on the Westinghouse technology legacy by engineering higher performance, cost-effective power fuse products. Eaton medium voltage fuses are manufactured and tested to the requirements of the ANSI C37.4X series of standards. Eaton is the only North American manufacturer of both current limiting and expulsion medium voltage power fuses. A full range of general purpose, backup and boric acid fuses is available for distribution and power applications. All Eaton medium voltage fuses are thoroughly tested and conform to ANSI specications. Some motor starter fuses are UR recognized, and both current limiting and expulsion fuses have been approved in UL rated switchgear. Current limiting and expulsion fuses can be used to meet any overcurrent protection need. At any point along the medium voltage electrical distribution system, Eaton has a fuse to satisfy your overcurrent protection needs.
The following fuse terminology will assist in understanding and selecting the correct fuse. The following is a brief overview of those terms.
Expulsion vs. Current Limiting

Expulsion Fuse: An expulsion fuse is a vented fuse in which the expulsion effect of the gases produced by internal arcing, either alone or aided by other mechanisms, results in current interruption. An expulsion fuse is not current limiting and as a result limits the duration of a fault on the electrical system, not the magnitude. Current Limiting Fuse: A current limiting fuse is a fuse that, when its current responsive element is melted by a current within the fuses specied current limiting range, abruptly introduces a high resistance to reduce current magnitude and duration, resulting in subsequent current interruption. Table 9.0-1. General Fuse Comparison
Expulsion Vented Electromechanical Current Limiting Sealed Static
Power vs. Distribution

The differentiation is intended to indicate the test conditions and where fuses are normally applied in a power system, based on specic requirements for generating sources, substations and distribution lines. Each class has its own unique set of voltage, current and construction requirements (see ANSI C37.42, .46 and .47).
Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage

While fuses are dened in the ANSI standards as either low or high voltage, Eatons Electrical Sector has elected to name their fuses to correspond with the equipment in which they are installed. Therefore, per ANSI C84, fuses are named as follows: Low Voltage Medium Voltage High Voltage 1000V and below Greater than 100069,000V Greater than 69,000V
Interrupts at current zero, Limits fault current limits fault magnitude and current duration duration Generally higher voltage Generally higher ratings interrupting ratings Different time/current characteristics Different time/ current characteristics
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 003
9.0-3
Table 9.0-2. Eaton Medium Voltage Fuse Family

Current Limiting HLE: CLE: CLS: HCL: CX: CLPT: Helical conguration current limiting, E-rated Current limiting, E-rated Current limiting starter (motor starter) Current limiting, clip-mount, E-rated Current limiting, C-rated Current limiting, E-rated Expulsion RBA: Rellable, boric acid RDB: Rellable, dropout, boric acid DBU: Dropout, boric acid, indoor/outdoor S&C equivalent
i ii 1
Table 9.0-3. Application Guide

Type Fuse Fuse Voltage Ampere Range (kV) Rating 2.415.5 2.438 2.48.3 10E1350A 0.25E10E 2R44R 3.5C300C 10A900A 10E450E Fuse Maximum Class Use Interrupting Indoor/Outdoor Rating (kA Sym.) 65 80 50 50 63 65 General purpose indoor/outdoor General purpose indoor Backup distribution indoor General purpose distribution indoor General purpose distribution indoor General purpose indoor/outdoor Boric acid power indoor Boric acid power outdoor Boric acid power indoor/outdoor Applied in:
2 3
Current Limiting
CLE CLPT CLS Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, dip poles, substation capacitor banks. Potential transformers. BAL-1 mountings and clips are no longer available. AMPGARD and non-AMPGARD motor starters. HCLS version is the same as the CLS except hermetically sealed for hazardous locations. Pad mounted distribution transformers, Substation service transformers, and fused switches. Direct substitution for McGraws NX fuse. Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, dip poles, substation capacitor banks. Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, dip poles, substation capacitor banks. Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, and power transformers. Feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, substation service transformers, dip poles, potential transformers, and substation capacitor banks. Outdoor version of the RBA. Feeder circuit sectionalizing, fused switches, power transformers, substation service transformers, dip poles, and potential transformers. Direct equivalent for S&Cs SMU-20 fuse units.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CX/CXI 4.315.5 CXN HCL HLE 2.415.5 2.415.5
Expulsion Fuses
RBA RDB 2.438 2.438 0.5E720E 0.5E720E 37.5 37.5
DBU
4.438
5E200E, 3K200K
50
Table 9.0-4. Power Fuse Ampere Characteristic Ratings

Rating Denition E R C A X Fuses rated 100E or below will melt in 300 seconds at some current value between 2.0 and 2.4 times the E number. Fuses rated above 100E will melt in 600 seconds at some current value between 2.2 and 2.64 times the E number. The fuse will melt in 15 to 35 seconds when the current equals 100 times the R number. The fuse will melt in 1000 seconds at some current value between 1.7 and 2.4 times the C number. Class A fuses have parameters that do not fall within the C, E, or R denitions above. Meet C37.40 temperature requirements, but not the E rating.
CA08104001E
9.0-4
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Current Limiting Fuse Types
There are three current limiting fuse types: backup, general purpose and full range. It is important that the user have an understanding of these denitions to ensure proper application of the fuse (Figure 9.0-1). Backup Fuse: A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the rated maximum interrupting current down to the rated minimum interrupting current. Backup fuses are normally used for protection of motor starters and are always used in series with another interrupting device capable of interrupting currents below the fuses rated minimum interrupting current. General Purpose Fuse: A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the rated maximum interrupting current down to the current that causes melting of the fusible element in no less than one hour. General purpose fuses are typically used to protect feeders and components such as transformers. Full Range Fuse: A fuse capable of interrupting all currents from the rated maximum interrupting rating down to the minimum continuous current that causes melting of the fusible element, with the fuse applied at the maximum ambient temperature specied by the manufacturer.
Current limiting fuses are constructed with pure silver fuse elements, high purity silica sand ller, and a glass resin outer casing. A high fault current melts the silver element almost instantly and loses energy to the surrounding sand. The sand melts and forms fulgurite, a glass-like substance. The arc voltage rapidly increases to nearly three times the fuse voltage rating and forces the current to zero. Low fault current melts a solder drop on the silver fuse element that, in turn, melts the silver. The element burns back until there is a sufcient internal gap to interrupt the current. This is known as the M-effect. Eaton offers current limiting fuses in two basic types: backup and general purpose. Backup fuses are applied in series with another circuit protective device, such as a contactor or an expulsion fuse, to interrupt high fault currents beyond the other devices range. General purpose fuses are designed to interrupt low fault currents that cause them to melt in one hour or less.
Multi-Range Fuses
CLE and HLE fuses are also available in user-selectable multi-range versions 1040A, 50125A and 150200A.
Disconnect End Fittings and Disconnect Live Parts
Accessories
A wide assortment of mountings, live parts and end ttings are available to facilitate power fuse installation.
Mountings
Mountings include a base, porcelain or glass polyester insulators, and live parts. They help enable the fuse to be safely attached to the gear. Mountings can be either disconnect or non-disconnect.
Live Parts
Live parts attach the fuse to the insulators and are considered part of the mounting. All parts above the insulators are live parts.
Current Limiting Type
16 17 18 19 20 21
i max. rated maximum interrupting current i min. rated minimum interrupting current i hr. r current causing element melting in 1 hour i any current melting element with no time limit
i min.
Backup
General Purpose Full Range

i Interrupting Current
i hr.
i max.
Figure 9.0-1. Current Limiting Types Protection Range
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 005
9.0-5

Table 9.0-5. CLE, HLE, HCL and CLS Fuses
Description Family CLE HLE HCL CLS
i ii 1
General
Class Use Maximum kV Maximum kA Rating Mounting Indicator Approvals General purpose Power 2.7515.5 63 10E1350A Clip Standard IEEE, ANSI General purpose Power 5.515.5 63 10E450A Clip, bolt-on, hookeye Standard IEEE, ANSI General purpose Power 5.515.5 63 10E900E Clip lock, bolt-on Standard IEEE, ANSI Backup Power 2.415.5 50 2R44R Clip, bolt-on, hookeye Standard UL, IEEE, ANSI
2 3 4 5 6 7

Applications
Feeder circuits Motor starters PTs and CTs LV breakers Substation service Transformers Capacitor banks Fused switches
8 9
DSL
Table 9.0-6. CLPT, CX, CLT and DSL Fuses

Description Family CLPT CX CLT
10 11 12
General
Class Use Maximum kV Maximum kA Rating Mounting Indicator Approvals General Power/distribution 5.538 80 0.25E 10E Clip Optional IEEE, ANSI General Distribution 4.315.5 50 3.5C300C Clip None IEEE, ANSI General Distribution 2.7515 25 5150 Stud bolt-on None IEEE, ANSI Back-up Power 600V 200 1005000 Bolt-on None UL
13 14 15 16 17
Applications
Feeder circuits Motor starters PTs and CTs LV breakers Substation service Transformers Capacitor banks Fused switches
18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
9.0-6
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Expulsion Fuses
Eatons expulsion fuses use boric acid as the interrupting medium. Under a fault condition, arc heat decomposes the boric acid into water vapor. The water vapor blast deionizes the arc path preventing arc re-ignition after a natural current zero. Type RBA indoor expulsion fuses must be tted with a discharge lter or condenser that moderates the discharge exhaust. The discharge lter limits the exhaust to a small and relatively inert amount of gas and lowers the noise level without affecting the fuse interrupting rating. Steam discharge, that can effect the interrupting, is fully restricted by the condenser. Type RDB outdoor dropout fuses include an ejector spring that forces the arcing rod through the top of the fuse. The arcing rod strikes a latch on the mounting that forces the fuse to swing outward through a 180 arc into the dropout position. Rell units can be eld installed into RBA and RDB expulsion fuses. Once the operated unit has been removed, the separately purchased unit can be easily installed into the fuse holder.
Accessories
The following accessories are available for expulsion fuses:
Mountings
Mountings include a base, porcelain or glass polyester insulators, and live parts. They help enable the fuse to be safely attached to the gear. Mountings can be either disconnect, non-disconnect or dropout. Non-disconnect mountings are available in either bolt-on or clamptype arrangements. Fuses may be vertical or underhung.
RBA E-Rated Rellable Boric Acid
Live Parts
Live parts attach the fuse to the insulators and are considered part of the mounting. All parts above the insulators are live parts.
End Fittings
End ttings are metal parts that attach to each end of the fuse at the ferrules. They are used only on disconnect fuses or when converting a non-disconnect to a disconnect fuse.
RDB E-Rated Rellable Outdoor Dropout Boric Acid
Type DBU fuse units are designed for new and aftermarket utility applications. End ttings are available, in both indoor and outdoor versions, as well as live parts and mountings. Mufers conne the arc within the fuse and substantially reduce the noise and exhaust when the fuse interrupts.
DBU Dropout Boric Acidfor Use Indoors, Inside Switchgear or Outdoors
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 007
9.0-7
Technical Ratings
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application
System Voltage Fuse Type Maximum Transformer kVA Self-Cooled Forced Air 866 1560 2600 4676 866 1039 695 1385 2500 1502 2703 4506 8111 1501 1802 1200 2400 4320 1731 3116 5193 9348 1731 2077 1385 2775 5000 1792 3485 2490 2987 2000 3985 7170 259 1039 1870 3637 2598 3117 2080 4160 7500 Fuse Family/Characteristics Type Current Range 10250 300450 600750 10001350 60250 300 10200 5400 450720 3200 10250 300450 600750 10001350 60250 300 10200 5400 450720 3200 10250 300450 600750 10001350 60250 300 10200 5400 480720 3200 10175 200350 60250 300 10200 5400 450720 3200 1025 30100 125180 200350 60250 300 10200 5400 450720 3200 Maximum kV 5.5 Interrupting Rating Amperes (Symmetrical) 63,000 63,000 40,000 31,500 50,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 37,500 14,000 63,000 63,000 40,000 31,500 50,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 37,500 14,000 63,000 63,000 40,000 31,500 50,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 37,500 14,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 37,500 14,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 37,500 14,000
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2400
Current limiting
742 1336 2228 4010 742 890 600 1190 2140 1287 2317 3862 6952 1286 1545 1030 2055 3700 1483 2671 4451 8013 1483 1780 1190 2375 4280 1536 2987 2134 2560 1705 3415 6150 222 890 1603 3117 2226 2672 1785 3565 6420
CLE CLE CLE-750 CLE-750 CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 CLE/HLE CLE/HLE CLE-750 CLE-750 CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 CLE/HLE CLE/HLE CLE-750 CLE-750 CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 CLE/HLE CLE CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 CLE/HLE CLE/HLE CLE/HLE CLE CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17
8.3 8.3
Expulsion
17.1 5.5
4160
Current limiting
8.3 8.3
Expulsion
17.1 5.5
4800
Current limiting
8.3 8.3
Expulsion
6900
Current limiting
8.3
Expulsion
8.3
7200
Current limiting
8.3
Expulsion
8.
17.1
Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (IF/IT) as listed. For a 55C rise liquid-lled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications, see Tables 9.0-9, 9.0-10 and 9.0-11. The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge lter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of expulsion gases is assured.
These applications are subject to modication when specic factors such as transformer characteristics, other protective devices, coordination requirements and load variations may indicate a different IF/IT ratio.
Caution: Primary fuses must not be relied upon for clearing secondary ground faults.
CA08104001E
9.0-8
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 008
Technical Ratings
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Technical Ratings (Continued)

Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application (Continued)
System Voltage Fuse Type Maximum Transformer kVA Self-Cooled Forced Air 432 1731 2597 5195 1731 3030 3465 6930 Fuse Family/Characteristics Type Current Range 10150 10125 175300 150250 45100 120175 10200 5400 450720 10200 10150 10125 175300 150250 45100 120175 10200 5400 450720 7150 10150 10125 175300 150250 45100 120175 10200 5400 450720 7150 10200 5300 450540 3200 10200 5300 450540 3200 Maximum kV 15.5 Interrupting Rating Amperes (Symmetrical) 63,000 63,000 63,000 63,000 50,000 50,000 14,400 29,400 29,400 14,000 63,000 63,000 63,000 63,000 50,000 50,000 14,400 29,400 29,400 14,000 63,000 63,000 63,000 63,000 50,000 50,000 14,400 29,400 29,400 14,000 10,500 21,000 21,000 12,500 6,900 16,800 16,800 10,000
12,000
Current limiting
371 1484 2226 4452 1484 2597 2970 5945
CLE HLE CLE HLE CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 CLE HLE CLE HLE CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 CLE HLE CLE HLE CXN CXN RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-17 RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-27 RBA-200 RBA-400 RBA-800 DBU-38
Expulsion
15.5
13,200
Current limiting
408 1632 2449 4898 1632 2857 3265 6530
476 1905 2857 5715 1905 3333 3810 7620
15.5
Expulsion
15.5
13,800
Current limiting
426 1707 2560 5121 1707 5855 3415 6830 3415 5690 8535 5690 8535 12800 8535
497 1991 2987 5975 1991 3485 3985 7970 3985 6635 9950 6635 9950 14925 9950
15.5
Expulsion
15.5
17.1 25.5
23,000
Expulsion
27.0 38.0
34,500
Expulsion
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (IF/IT) as listed. For a 55C rise liquid-lled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications, see Tables 9.0-9, 9.0-10 and 9.0-11. The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge lter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of expulsion gases is ensured.
These applications are subject to modication when specic factors such as transformer characteristics, other protective devices, coordination requirements and load variations may indicate a different IF/IT ratio.
Caution: Primary fuses must not be relied upon for clearing secondary ground faults.
Table 9.0-8. Selection of Minimum Primary Fuse for Transformer Protection

Instructions: Multiply the transformer primary full load current (FLA) times the multiplier shown in the table to determine suggested minimum size fuse. Use fan-cooled primary FLA with forced air transformer multiplier. See Tables 9.0-9 thru 9.0-11 for suggested minimum fuse size. Type CLE current limiting fuses Type RBA, DBU expulsion type fuses All ratings For self-cooled transformers For forced air transformers
1.4 x FLA of XFMR
1.2 x FLA of XFMR
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 009
9.0-9
Technical Ratings
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses

Modern fuses are rated in amperes rms symmetrical. They also have a listed asymmetrical rms rating, which is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating. Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse interrupting duty guidelines.
Step 3Construct the sequence networks using reactances and connect properly for the type of fault under consideration and reduce to a single equivalent reactance. Step 4Same as above except using resistances (omit if a symmetrically rated fuse is to be selected). Step 5Calculate the E/XI value, where E is the prefault value of the voltage at the point of fault normally assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase faults E/XI is the fault current to be used in determining the required interrupting capability of the fuse.
Note: It is not necessary to calculate a single phase-to-phase fault current. This current is very nearly 3/2 x three-phase fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed the three-phase fault for fuses located in generating stations with solidly grounded neutral generators, or in delta-wye transformers with the wye solidly grounded, where the sum of the positive and negative sequence impedances on the high voltage side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of the transformer.
For single line-to-ground fault; XI = XI(+) + XI(-) + XI(0)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
-3 I f = ---Step 6Select a fuse with a published interrupting rating exceeding the calculated fault current. Table 9.0-10 should be used where older asymmetrically rated fuses are involved. The voltage rating of power fuses used on three-phase systems should equal or exceed the maximum lineto-line voltage rating of the system. Current limiting fuses for three-phase systems should normally be applied so that the fuse voltage rating is equal to or less than 1.41 x nominal system voltage. However, the insulation levels on 2.4 kV systems normally allow 4.3 or 5.5 kV rated fuses to be used.
E XI
Calculation of the fuse required interrupting rating:

Step 1Convert the fault from the utility to percent or per unit on a convenient voltage and kVA base. Step 2Collect the X and R data of all the other circuit elements and convert to percent or per unit on a convenient kVA and voltage base same as that used in Step 1. Use the substransient X and R for all generators and motors.
Table 9.0-9. Suggested Minimum Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
System 2.4 Nominal kV Fuses Maxi- 2.75 mum kV 4.16 5.5 4.8 5.5 7.2 8.3 12.0 15.5 13.2 15.5 13.8 15.5 14.4 15.5
Transformer Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse kVA Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000 27.1 36.1 54.1 72.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 360.8 481.1 601.4 721.7 902.1 1202.8 1804.2 2405.6 50E 65E 80E 125E 200E 300E 350E 600E 750E 1100E 1100E 1350E 15.6 20.8 31.2 41.6 69.4 104.1 138.8 208.2 277.6 347.0 416.4 520.4 693.9 1040.9 1387.9 25E 30E 50E 80E 125E 150E 200E 300E 400E 600E 600E 750E 1100E 13.5 18.0 27.1 36.1 60.1 90.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 300.7 360.8 451.1 601.4 902.1 1202.8 20E 25E 50E 65E 100E 150E 175E 250E 350E 450E 600E 750E 1100E 1350E 9.0 12.0 18.0 24.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 120.3 160.4 200.5 240.6 300.7 400.9 601.4 801.9 15E 20E 25E 40E 65E 100E 125E 175E 250E 300E 350E 5.4 7.2 10.8 14.4 24.1 36.1 48.1 72.2 96.2 120.3 144.3 180.4 240.6 360.8 481.1 10E 15E 15E 20E 50E 65E 80E 100E 150E 200E 250E 250E 4.9 6.6 9.8 13.1 21.9 32.8 43.7 65.6 87.5 109.3 131.2 164.0 218.7 328.0 437.4 10E 10E 15E 20E 30E 65E 80E 100E 125E 175E 200E 250E 300E 4.7 6.3 9.4 12.6 20.9 31.4 41.8 62.8 83.7 104.6 125.5 156.9 209.2 313.8 418.4 10E 10E 15E 20E 30E 65E 80E 100E 150E 175E 200E 250E 300E 4.5 6.0 9.0 12.0 20.0 30.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 100.2 120.3 150.4 200.5 300.7 400.9 10E 10E 15E 20E 30E 65E 80E 100E 125E 175E 200E 250E 300E
Note: Fuse ratings represent the fuse that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLC for 0.1 second and 25 x FLC for 0.01 second) and be able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
CA08104001E
9.0-10 FusesMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 09 010
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-10. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse kVA Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

27.1 36.1 54.1 72.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 360.8 481.1 601.4 721.7 902.1 1202.8 1804.2 2405.6
40E 50E 80E 100E 175E 250E 400E 450E 720E
15.6 20.8 31.2 41.6 69.4 104.1 138.8 208.2 277.6 347.0 416.4 520.4 693.9 1040.9 1387.9
25E 30E 50E 65E 100E 150E 200E 300E 400E 540E 720E 720E
13.5 18.0 27.1 36.1 60.1 90.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 300.7 360.8 451.1 601.4 902.1 1202.8
20E 25E 40E 50E 80E 125E 175E 250E 350E 400E 540E 720E
9.0 12.0 18.0 24.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 120.3 160.4 200.5 240.6 300.7 400.9 601.4 801.9
15E 20E 25E 40E 65E 80E 125E 175E 250E 300E 350E 400E 540E
5.4 7.2 10.8 14.4 24.1 36.1 48.1 72.2 96.2 120.3 144.3 180.4 240.6 360.8 481.1
10E 10E 15E 20E 40E 50E 65E 100E 150E 175E 200E 250E 400E 540E 720E
4.9 6.6 9.8 13.1 21.9 32.8 43.7 65.6 87.5 109.3 131.2 164.0 218.7 328.0 437.4
4.7 6.3 9.4 12.6 20.9 31.4 41.8 62.8 83.7 104.6 125.5 156.9 209.2 313.8 418.4
4.5 6.0 9.0 12.0 20.0 30.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 100.2 120.3 150.4 200.5 300.7 400.9
Two 300E-ampere fuse rell units in parallel with 10% derating. Two 400E-ampere fuse rell units in parallel with 10% derating. Two 250E-ampere fuse rell units in parallel with 10% derating.
Table 9.0-11. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838 kV Transformer Applications
System Nominal kV Fuses Maximum kV Transformer kVA Rating Self-Cooled 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
22.9 25.8 Full Load Current Amps 18.9 25.2 37.8 50.4 63.0 75.6 94.5 126.1 189.1 252.1 Fuse Rating Amps E 30E 40E 65E 80E 100E 125E 150E 175E 300E 450E
34.5 Full Load Current Amps 12.6 16.7 25.1 33.5 41.8 50.2 62.8 83.7 125.5 167.3 Fuse Rating Amps E 20E 25E 40E 50E 65E 80E 100E 125E 175E 250E
Two 250E-ampere fuse rell units in parallel with 10% derating.
CA08104001E
FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 011
9.0-11
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-12. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Transformer Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse kVA Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
Three-Phase Transformers
112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 27 36 54 72 120 180 241 361 481 601 40E 50E 80E 100E 200E 16 21 31 42 69 104 139 208 278 347 25E 30E 50E 65E 100E 150E 200E 14 18 27 36 60 90 120 180 241 301 20E 25E 40E 50E 100E 125E 200E 9 12 18 24 40 60 80 120 160 200 15E 20E 25E 40E 65E 100E 125E 200E 5 7 11 14 24 36 48 72 96 120 10E 10E 15E 20E 40E 50E 80E 100E 150E 200E 5 7 10 13 22 33 44 66 87 109 7E 10E 15E 20E 30E 50E 65E 100E 125E 150E 5 6 9 13 21 31 42 63 84 105 7E 10E 15E 20E 30E 50E 65E 100E 125E 150E 5 6 9 12 20 30 40 60 80 100 7E 10E 15E 20E 30E 50E 65E 65E 125E 150E
Table 9.0-13. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
System 22.9 Nominal kV Fuses Maxi- 27.0 mum kV Transformer Full Load kVA Rating Current Amps Self-Cooled Fuse Rating Amps E 23.9 27.0 Full Load Current Amps Fuse Rating Amps E 24.9 27.0 Full Load Current Amps Fuse Rating Amps E 34.5 38.0 Full Load Current Amps Fuse Rating Amps E
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3750 19 25 38 50 63 95 30E 40E 65E 80E 100E 150E 18 24 36 48 60 91 25E 40E 50E 80E 100E 150E 17 23 34 46 58 87 25E 40E 50E 65E 80E 125E 13 17 25 33 42 63 20E 25E 40E 50E 65E 100E
Table 9.0-14. Type DBU Expulsion Fuses, Boric Acid, Indoor/Outdoor

Maximum Design kV 17.1 Current Rating Amperes 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K, 5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E, 15SE, 20SE, 25SE, 30SE, 40SE, 50SE, 65SE, 80SE, 100SE, 125SE, 150SE, 175SE, 200SE 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K, 5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E, 15SE, 20SE, 25SE, 30SE, 40SE, 50SE, 65SE, 80SE, 100SE, 125SE, 150SE, 175SE, 200SE 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K, 5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E, 15SE, 20SE, 25SE, 30SE, 40SE, 50SE, 65SE, 80SE, 100SE, 125SE, 150SE, 175SE, 200SE Interrupting Rating rms (kA Symmetrical) 14
27
12.5
38
10outdoor 8.5indoor with mufer
Note: Used on overhead distribution transformers, substation equipment, industrial transformer installations, and radial distribution circuits.
For additional information, see: Volume 4, CA08100005E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab 26 CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
21
9.0-12 FusesMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 09 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage

May 2012
Sheet 10 001
10.0-1
Motor Control (AMPGARD) Medium Voltage
Contents
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Motor Starters General Description Application and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1 Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1 Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-2 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorBolt-in, Type SL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-3 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorStab-in, Type SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-4 Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-4 Isolated Low Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-5 Bus and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-6 Reduced Voltage StartersMechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7 Reduced Voltage StartersSolid-State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-8 Synchronous Motor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-10 Incoming Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-11 Potential Transformers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-11 Type LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-11 Main Breaker AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-12 Technical Data Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-14 LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-17 Type SL, 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-17 Type SJ, 800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-18 Type SL, 250A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-19 Main Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-20 Contactor-Fuse Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-21 Protection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-22 Starter Fuse Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-23 Layout Dimensions Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-24 Primary Reactor, Reduced Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-27 Autotransformer, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-29 Synchronous Brush Type Mark V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-30 Solid-State Reduced Voltage AMPGARD MV4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-32 Incoming Line Switch/PT Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-35 Tie Switch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-37 Arc-Resistant Starter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-38 Main Breaker AMPGARD Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-39 Adjustable Frequency Drives General Description Application and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-1 AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated AE-Frame AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-2 Synchronous Transfer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-13 15 kV Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-15 Integrated VCPW Main Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-16 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-17 Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-19 Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-20 Optional Output Filters and Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-23 Technical Data and Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-24 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 AMPGARD Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349 Section 26 18 39 SC 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349B Section 26 18 39.13
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
10.0-2 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage

May 2012
Sheet 10 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 003
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Motor Starters

General Description
10.1-1
AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly
The low voltage compartment is painted white as standard to maximize serviceability. Simplicity of design: Componentto-component design eliminates half of the electrical connections. Time-proven contactor technology: Three vacuum contactor ratings are used, 400A and 800A 7.2 kV and 250A 15 kV. 400A 7.2 kV contactors are available as stab-in or bolt-in design. 800A 7.2 kV and 250A 15 kV contactors are available as stab-in design only. High degree of isolation: Main bus is located in separate compartment on top of lineup. Vertical bus is barriered in rear of starter and auxiliary compartments. Load cables are isolated from adjacent starter in two-high sections. A vertical low voltage wireway is provided for isolation of customer control wiring. The low voltage control compartment is isolated from medium voltage by steel barriers. Starter catalog types are available for the following applications:

of the starters in the enclosure. Refer to Table 10.1-4 on Page 10.1-17 for specic ratings for each enclosure type.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
When specied, AMPGARD is available in special arc-resistant construction. Two ratings are available, 30 kA and 50 kA. Both designs have been tested and veried to meet the requirements of IEEE C37.20.7 for Type 2B construction. Type 2B construction is dened as arc-resistant at front, back and sides of the enclosure with the low voltage compartment door open. Most types of 400A and 800A starters, as well as 24-inch (610 mm) wide incoming cable sections are available in arc-resistant construction. A common plenum design to close couple to Eaton arc-resistant switchgear is also available. Consult factory for ratings on this design. Main breaker AMPGARD, SC 9000 AFD, LBS load break switches are not available in arc-resistant construction. Due to the specic nature of arc-resistant testing, no modications may be made to the enclosure while maintaining the arc-resistant rating. Consult Eaton for more details.
AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly
General Description
Eatons medium voltage metal-enclosed control family provides control and protection of medium voltage motors and equipment rated 230013,800V nominal/15,000V maximum. AMPGARD
AMPGARD control has a complete metal-enclosed offering:
Full and reduced voltage starting of medium voltage motors up to 8000 hp Main breaker metal-enclosed switchgear, a smaller footprint, single integrated assembly direct coupled to the AMPGARD control Integral LBS loadbreak switches available as main, tie or feeder. The LBS can be supplied as fused or un-fused Adjustable frequency drives (SC 9000) up to 4160V, 6000 hp
Squirrel cage, full voltage (reversing and non-reversing) Squirrel cage, primary reactor Squirrel cage, autotransformer Solid-state reduced voltage Synchronous full voltage Synchronous primary reactor Synchronous auto-transformer (reversing and non-reversing) Two-speed, two winding Two-speed, one winding
Personnel Safety Features

One of the most important considerations in designing the AMPGARD starter was personnel safety. The result is an extensive system of interlocks and other safety features.
Interlocks
Interlocking on AMPGARD starters includes:
Enclosures
AMPGARD products are available in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures as standard. NEMA 12 (dust tight), NEMA 3R (outdoor) and arc-resistant enclosures are available options for most products. Contact the factory for exceptions. Enclosure type affects the maximum continuous current rating

Personnel safety: Positive mechanical isolating switch with visible disconnect completely grounds and isolates the starter from the line connectors with a mechanically driven isolating shutter, leaving no exposed high voltage. Medium voltage door is mechanically locked closed with the disconnect; low voltage section has separate door and is segregated from the medium voltage section. Ease of installation: Current limiting fuses, contactor assembly and isolating switch assembly are easily removed from the enclosure; line and load terminals are completely accessible from the front. Ease of maintenance: All components are front accessible, facilitating routine inspection and/or parts replacement.
CA08104001E
Isolating switch mechanism locks the medium voltage door closed when the switch is in the ON position Provision for optional key interlocks When door is open, interlock prevents operating handle from being moved inadvertently to ON position When contactor is energized, isolating switch cannot be opened or closed
AMPGARD Main Breaker
AMPGARD SC 9000 4160V, 2500 hp AFD
MV4S SSRV
2-High FVNR
21
10.1-2 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Motor Starters

General Description Other Safety Features
AMPGARD starters include many additional features designed to protect operating personnel. These features include:
May 2012
Sheet 10 004
i ii 1 2 3 4
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch

Isolation Switch Auxiliary Contacts
Features
A positive mechanical interlock between the isolating switch handle mechanism and contactor prevents the isolating switch from being opened when the contactor is closed or from being closed if the contactor is closed. An operating lever in the isolating switch handle mechanism is designed to shear off if the operator uses too much force in trying to open the non-loadbreak isolating switch when the contactor is closed. This feature ensures that the operator cannot open the switch with the main contactor closed, even if excessive force is used on the operating handle. To operate the isolating switch, the operating handle is moved through a 180 vertical arc from the ON to the OFF position. In the ON position, an operator on the back of the handle housing extends through a bracket on the rear of the starter high voltage door, preventing the door from being opened with the switch closed. When the high voltage door is open, a door interlock prevents the handle from being inadvertently returned to the ON position. When the operating handle is moved from ON to OFF, copper stabs are withdrawn from incoming line ngers. As the stabs withdraw, they are visible above the top of the fuses when viewed from the front, and simultaneously grounded. As the ngers are withdrawn, a spring-driven isolating shutter moves across the back barrier to prevent front access to the line connections. As the shutter slides into position, distinctive markings appear on the back barrier, making it easier to check the position of the shutter.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Provision for a padlock on the isolating switch handle in OFF position Shutter barrier between line terminals and isolation switch stabs is mechanically driven Distinctive marking on back of switch assembly appears when shutter barrier is in position and starter is completely isolated from the line Grounding clips provide a positive grounding of the starter and main fuses when the isolating switch is opened High and low voltage circuits are compartmentalized and isolated from each other The drawout isolation switch is easily removed by loosening two bolts in the back of the switch. The shutter remains in place when the switch is withdrawn
Optional Blown Fuse Indicator Contacts
Switch Operating Arm
Control Plug
JMT-400/800A Isolation Switch Front View

Line Side Connections
A remote operator for the starter isolation switch is an available option. The AMPGARD Remote Operator (ARO) enables users to open or close the switch through the use of a pushbutton station operated up to 30 feet away from the starter. Users can mount the ARO on the front of the starter, plug it into any available 120 Vac source, then easily operate the isolation switch from outside the starter arc ash boundary.
Line Side Access Panel (Removable From Front)
JMT-400/800A Isolation Switch Rear View
Isolation Switch
Eatons Type JMT-4/8 and JMT-15 are each a drawout, lightweight, three-pole, manually operated isolating switch mounted in the top of the starter enclosure. They may be easily removed by loosening two bolts in the rear of the switch. The JMT-4 is rated 400A continuous while the JMT-8 is rated 800A continuous. The JMT-15 is rated 250A continuous at 15 kV. All isolation switches have a mechanical life rating of 10,000 operations. The component-to-component circuitry concept includes the mountings for the current limiting fuses as part of the isolating switch.
AMPGARD Remote Operator
Switch Handle Closed
Switch Handle Open
21
May 2012
Sheet 10 005

General Description
10.1-3
400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor, Type SL
Design
Eaton Vacuum Contactors are highly versatile, low-chop contactors that have been designed to meet all applicable NEMA standards and are UL recognized components. The contactors accommodate mechanical interlocks that function with the starter isolation switch and with other contactors. These interlocks provide unmatched safety and service protection. The contactors consist of a molded frame with moving armature, magnet and vacuum interrupters. The contactor is easily positioned into the starter and long-life vacuum interrupters provide many operations with a minimal maintenance program. The SL operating coils are energized by a control board that provides a pulsewidth-modulated DC output. Control voltages and contactor dropout times are programmed using a DIP switch located on the control board. The control board is mounted in a protected cavity in the molded contactor frame to prevent inadvertent access to the voltage and dropout DIP switch. Four auxiliary contacts (2NO, 2NC) are supplied with each contactor and are wired to terminal blocks on the starter control panel. The vacuum interrupters employ special main contact materials that exhibit a low chop current plus other specially engineered characteristics that minimize switching surges. Surge protection is therefore not required due to the use of the vacuum contactor. Surge protection may be required for other reasons such as the high probability of lightning strike, etc.
Maintenance
Reduced maintenance is one of the outstanding features of Eatons Vacuum Contactor line. The special contact material in the vacuum interrupters provides long life even under severe operating conditions. The main coils operate with a very low temperature rise to maximize insulation life. Steel bearings on the main shaft provide long, troublefree operation.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
400A Bolt-in Contactor 7200 Volt Maximum
A simple go/no-go gauge is used for checking contact wear. Wear can be checked without removing the contactor from the starter. The vacuum contactor is much lighter than previous generation airbreak or vacuum contactors, which allows for easier insertion and removal from the starter structure.
General Description
Eatons Type SL Vacuum Contactors were designed and engineered specically for use in AMPGARD starters. 7.2 kV SL 400A Vacuum Contactors are self-supporting, compact, drawout, three-pole, DC magnet closed contactors. To permit application matching of the starter to the motor rating, the SL Contactor is available in 400A standard and high interrupting ratings. SL Contactors are available in the standard bolt-in conguration and optional stab-in design. Either bolt-in or stab-in designs can be supplied in a two-high conguration, with a starter maximum of 400 full load amperes. The total NEMA 1 structure rating cannot exceed 720A for a combination of two starters. Refer to Table 10.1-4 on Page 10.1-17 for other ratings.
Contactor Control Board
9 10 11 12 13
DIP Switch on Contactor Control Board
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

General Description
Mechanical Interlock with Isolation Switch
May 2012
Sheet 10 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
400A Stab-in Contactor
7200V Maximum
400A, 7.2 kV Bolt-in

The bolt-in version of the SL Contactor is supplied as standard for those applications requiring a 400A contactor. The contactor is mounted on wheels and rolls into the AMPGARD structure on steel rails. Bolted bus bars connect the contactor line and load terminals to the power components in the starter cell. A three-phase current transformer, three-phase potential transformer and ground fault current transformer are mounted in the cell when required. A plug on the side of the contactor connects the contactor to the low voltage control panel. The contactor is easily withdrawn from the structure by removing the six bolts securing the contactor line and load terminals, and the pin connecting the isolating switch interlock arm. The contactor can be removed from the starter without disconnecting any medium voltage cables.
Roll-out Wheels Self-Aligning Contactor Line and Load Fingers
250A Stab-in Contactor 15 kV Maximum
400A Stab-in Contactor 7200V Maximum with Mechanical Interlock

7.2 kV AMPGARD starters use Eatons Type CLS power fuses with special time/current characteristics for motor service. Type CLE or Type HLE power fuses are applied with the 15 kV starter or when the 7.2 kV starter is used to feed a transformer. The fuse is coordinated with the contactor and overload relay characteristics to provide maximum motor/transformer utilization and protection. The standard mounting method for power fuses is bolted with an option for fuse clips in the 400A starter. 800A 7.2 kV and 250A 15 kV fuses are supplied as bolted only. Interruption is accomplished without expulsion of gases, noise or moving parts. Type CLS/CLE/HLE fuses are mounted in a vertical position to ensure maximum rating reliability, proper operation and to eliminate the possibility of dust and dirt collecting, resulting in a deterioration of dielectric properties. When a fault has been cleared, a plastic indicator in the top of the fuse, normally depressed, pops up to give visible blown fuse indication. This indicator also operates the optional blown fuse mechanism (available with bolted 7.2 kV fuses only) on the isolation switch that gives a contact closure to allow use in the starter control circuit. The control circuit primary fuses are also current limiting. Blown fuses may be removed and replaced without removing or drawing out the contactor.
800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactors

The 800A SL Contactor is available in a one-high conguration and is rated at 650A enclosed. The 800A contactor is available with a stab-in type connection only. The 800A contactor is mounted on wheels and has similar features to the stab-in 400A contactor.
400A, 7.2 kV Stab-in

A stab-in version of the SL Contactor is an available option. The stab-in contactor is mounted on wheels and rolls into the AMPGARD structure. Contactor line and load ngers engage cell-mounted stabs as the contactor is inserted into the starter cell. The contactor is held in position by a bolt and bracket combination. It can be easily withdrawn from the starter cell by removing the bolt holding the contactor against the bracket and disconnecting the isolation switch interlock. The contactor can be removed from the starter without disconnecting any medium voltage cables.
800A Vacuum Break Contactor 7200V Maximum Stab-in with Wheels, and Line and Load Fingers
250A, 15 kV Stab-in Contactor

The 250A 15 kV SL Contactor is available in a one-high conguration and is rated at 250A enclosed. The 250A contactor is available with a stab-in type connection only. The 250A contactor is mounted on wheels and has similar features to the 800A 7.2 kV contactor. While the contactor is rated at 250A enclosed, the maximum starter current is 200 full load amperes due to the maximum available fuse size.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 007

General Description
Standard Isolation Switch Viewing Window Motor Load Connections (Accepts 2-Hole Lugs as Standard)
10.1-5
i ii
Bolted Main Fuses Customer Terminal Blocks for Remote Control Connections
1 2 3
CLS Clip Fuse
CLS Bolted Fuse
Standard Fuse Mounting is Bolted with Optional Clip Mounting
Horizontal Wireway Vertical Control Wireway Control Power Transformer (750 VA Standard, up to 4 kVA Available)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fuse Fault Indicator
AMPGARD 400A StarterMedium Voltage Door Open

Blown Fuse Indicator Operating Arm
Blown Fuse Indicating Device
Isolated Low Voltage Control

The low voltage door has four cutouts as standard.
1/4 Turn Door Latch Top and Bottom Motor Protective Relay (When Specied) Indicating Lights Start/Stop Pushbutton (When Specied) MD-3000 Differential Relay (When Specied) Low Voltage Access Door
The device panel, MP-3000 and MP-4000 motor protective relays all t in this same size low voltage door cutout. The low voltage control panel is behind the low voltage door and is completely isolated from the medium voltage compartment. A standard viewing window allows visual verication of the isolation switch status before attempting to open the medium voltage door. The medium voltage door is locked closed whenever the isolation switch is closed.
Predrilled Holes for Additional Control Devices
Standard Isolation Switch Viewing Window Isolation Switch Operating Handle (Mechanism Locks Medium Voltage Door When Switch is Closed)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AMPGARD 400A Starter Door Closed

Distinctive Markings on Isolation Switch Shutter Indicate Shutter is Closed and Switch is Open
Medium Voltage Access Door
Interposing Control Relay DIN Rail Mounted
AMPGARD 400A StarterLow Voltage Door Open
View of Isolation Switch Through Viewing Window
21
CA08104001E

General Description
May 2012
Sheet 10 008
i ii 1
Bus and Optional Features

Insulated Barriers to Separate Motor Load Cables from Main Bus Low Voltage Conduit Area
Phase A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Bus Splice Plates Vertical Bus Drops Medium Voltage Conduit Area (Upper Starter) Phase B
Phase C
Medium Voltage Conduit Area (Lower Starter)
Vertical Bus, Rear View (2-High 400A)
Bus Compartment Top View 3000A Main Horizontal Bus

UL, CSA and IEC Certication
AMPGARD starters are designed, assembled and tested to meet all applicable standards: NEMA/ANSI ICS3 EEMAC E14-1 UL 347 CSA C22.2 No. 14

Main Bus
When starters are grouped together in a lineup, a typical option is the main bus. The AMPGARD main bus is mounted in its own 12-inch (305 mm) high top-mounted enclosure, which isolates it from the starter. The connection from the main bus to the starter is done with rigid vertical bus. Insulated barriers are provided for separate top entry of power and control cables. The main bus is top, side and front accessible, which allows for ease of maintenance or extension of lineup without disassembling the starters. Main bus is available for 1000, 1200, 2000 and 3000A. Main bus is uninsulated as standard. Fully insulated bus is an available option for up to 7.2 kV starters and is standard on 15 kV starters. Bus may be supplied with either tin or silver plating. Crossover bus, busway entry, and pull boxes are not available for the 3000A design (3000A bus duct provisions are available with the Main Breaker AMPGARD, see Page 10.1-12). The standard bus short circuit rating is 50 kA per NEMA standards and is based on the let-through current of the largest fuse used in any starter. An optional 50 kA, 2-second bus rating is available for customers that require a higher rating for the main bus.
Vertical Bus
Vertical bus is located behind a xed barrier in the rear of the enclosure. It is fully insulated as standard, with plating to match that of the main bus.
Other Optional Features

AMPGARD starters are available with a variety of accessories and modications to satisfy a wide range of application requirements. Some of the broad areas covered include:

The major components, i.e., contactor, isolating switch, fuses, EMR-3000 and EMR-4000 are UL recognized. UL or CSA labeling of a specic starter requires review to ensure that all requested modications and auxiliary devices meet the appropriate standards. Refer to factory when specied. AMPGARD starters meet the requirements of IEC standards 60694, 60298 and 60470.
Bus and cable entrance enclosures Transformers Power factor correction capacitors Operators and pilot devices Instruments and meters Control relays and timers Solid-state or selected electromechanical protection devices
Seismic Qualication
May 2012
Sheet 10 009

General Description
10.1-7
Reduced Voltage Starters

General Description
Eaton offers traditional electromechanical reduced voltage starters in addition to reduced voltage solid-state starters. Unless otherwise specied, reactors and autotransformers are NEMA medium duty rated. They are designed for three 30-second starts per hour. Heavy-duty reactors and transformers can be supplied when specied. Locked rotor current must be specied when ordering reduced voltage starters to ensure that the reactors or autotransformers are properly sized.
Reduced Voltage Reactor Starter
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Starter
i ii 1 2 3 4
Reactor Starter
Table 10.1-1. Type 502 Reactor Starting Characteristics

Starter Type % % % % Motor Motor Line Torque Voltage Current Current 80 65 50 80 65 50 64 42 25
Auto Transformer Starter
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 10.1-2. Type 602 Auto-transformer Starting Characteristics

80 80% tap 65% tap 65 50% tap 50
Factory set on 65% tap.
80 80% tap 65% tap 65 50% tap 50
Advantages
Reduces starting currents Least costly reduced voltage starting method
Advantages
Produces the most torque per incoming line ampere of any reduced voltage starting method Less costly than RVSS
Disadvantages
Large footprint: 1-1/2 structures at 400A Bump on transition to full voltage Not as efcient as autotransformer Due to reduced torque during starting, motor must typically be unloaded during the start sequence
Disadvantages
Large footprint: 1-1/2 structures at 400A More costly than reactor Bump on transition to full voltage Due to reduced torque during starting, motor must typically be unloaded during the start sequence
Sequence of Operation
Main contactor (M) closes Current ows through reactor reducing voltage to motor (based on tap setting) When motor current reaches ~125%, the run contactor (R) closes providing full voltage to the motor

Note: Care should be taken when selecting the motor for reduced voltage starting to ensure that there is sufcient torque to accelerate the load at reduced voltage. Motors that do not fully accelerate at reduced voltage will generate high voltages at transition that can damage the autotransformer and void the factory warranty.
Sequence of Operation
Shorting contactor (S) closes Main contactor (M) closes Current ows through autotransformer reducing voltage to motor (based on tap setting) When motor current reaches ~125%, the shorting contactor (S) opens and the run contactor (R) closes providing full voltage to the motor
Note: Because the motor is never disconnected from the supply voltage, the starting is closed transition.
CA08104001E

General Description
May 2012
Sheet 10 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Solid-State Reduced Voltage AMPGARD MV4S

Eaton offers reduced voltage solidstate soft starters in 400A and 720A congurations. Horsepower ratings are available through 5000 hp. The 400A AMPGARD soft starter requires one full height structure with a full voltage starter in the upper compartment bus connected to a soft start truck assembly in the lower compartment. The 720A soft starter requires two full height structures (total 72 inches (1829 mm) wide). The soft start components are xed mounted in the 720A starter. Both soft starters include internal fault protection and built-in basic motor protection. The standard assembly includes an EMR-3000 motor relay for advanced motor protection.
Starting Characteristics
The soft start controller provides a number of selectable starting characteristics as standard:
Kick Start
Provides an initial boost of current to overcome motor and system inertia.
Ramp Start
Operator sets the initial starting voltage and ramp time. Factory setting for starting voltage is 20%. Range is 0 to 100%. Factory setting for starting time is 10 seconds. Range is 0 to 120 seconds.
Load CablesNormal
Current Limit
Limits the maximum starting current. Used in long start time applications and motor protection applications. Factory setting is 350% of motor FLA. Range is 200 to 600%.
Why is Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starting Desirable?

Solid-State Soft Stop

Provides a slow decrease in output voltage. Extends the stopping time of the motor. Typically used with pumps.
Eliminate shock to your mechanical components Avoid coupling and shaft damage Prevent rotor and winding failure Stop drive belt squeal and breakage Prevent water hammer in pipes Soft stop the pump motors Reduce pressure so valves close gently Avoid the surge wave Reduce peak starting currents Reduce voltage drop on motor start
Motor Protection Relay Main Starter Cubicle
Load CablesMoved for Full Voltage Starter
Ratings
23004160 Vac grounded systems 60 kV BIL impulse rating Horsepower: to 5000 hp

Refer to Table 10.1-19 on Page 10.1-32 for more detailed ratings information. The AMPGARD solid-state soft starter is recommended for application only on power systems that are solidly grounded or resistance grounded. Ungrounded systems are not recommended.
Soft Starter LV Control Compartment
Drawout SCR Truck (Located Behind MV Door)
Industry Standards
The AMPGARD solid-state starter is designed and built to meet all applicable industry standards. The 400A starter is available as a UL listed assembly. NEMA ICS3 UL 347 CSA EEMAC E14-1 Manufactured in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certied facility

AMPGARD 400A Soft Starter
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 011

General Description How It Works
1. At the time of start, the bypass contactor is open and all current passes through the SCRs that ramp the voltage per the preprogrammed starter settings. 2. After start is complete, the run contactor closes, taking the SCRs out of the circuit.
10.1-9
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3. The SCRs are on for only a short time therefore no MCC venting or cooling is required. 4. When a stop command is received, the SCRs can be programmed to ramp down, providing a soft stop.
MV4S Keypad and Display
400A MV4S Roll-out Truck
Application with Capacitors

Capacitors of any kind may not be connected to the load of the solid-state starter. When power factor correction capacitors are required, the capacitors are connected ahead of the RVSS truck and are switched with a separate capacitor contactor. If multiple starters with capacitors are supplied in the same lineup, all capacitors are switched off while the solid-state starter ramps. At the completion of the ramp cycle, the capacitors for all energized starters are sequenced back on. Long cable runs may create enough capacitance to be of concern. Capacitance connected to the starter motor connections must not exceed 0.3 ufd.
Design
Soft start components and bypass contactor are mounted in a easyto-remove roll-out truck assembly. Maintenance can be performed with the truck on a bench away from the starter cubicle.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
720A MV4S with Doors Open
21

General Description
May 2012
Sheet 10 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Synchronous Motor Control, Basic or Enhanced, with Mark V Controller

AMPGARD synchronous starters are available for Brush-type and Brushless Motors, in Basic and Enhanced versions. Both Basic and Enhanced Brush-type designs feature the AMPGARD exclusive Soft-sync that minimizes mechanical shock as the motor is synchronized. Eaton Factory Authorized Start-up Service is required with all Enhanced Synchronous Starters.
Basic Brushless
The Basic Brushless starter includes a three-phase DC power supply to generate exciter eld current up to 10A plus a control board that provides basic protection. A solid-state motor protective relay is supplied for pullout protection. Output voltage is adjustable from 62125 Vdc. Stator protection is provided by an EMR-4000 solid-state motor protection relay.
Enhanced Brushless
The Enhanced Brushless starter includes all features of the Basic starter plus premium protection, metering and communications. Features include: Power factor regulation Auto-loading Enhanced metering Event recorder Communications with Modbus TCP/Modbus RTU, Serial Interface (RS-232)

Basic Brush-type
The Basic Brush-type starter includes a three-phase exciter to generate DC rotor current up to 200A plus a control board that determines the proper time to apply the DC eld while also providing basic protection, including:

AMPGARD Synchronous Starter
Locked rotor protection Incomplete sequence Failure to synchronize Blown fuse protection Pullout protection Field loss protection
The protective features are displayed on an Eaton GP02 interface module. Stator protection is provided by an EMR-3000 solid-state motor protection relay.
The standard enhanced display is an Eaton GP04 interface module. An Eaton PanelMate is available as a high-end display.
Basic Display with Trip Indication
Enhanced Brush-type
The Enhanced Brush-type starter includes all features of the Basic starter plus premium protection, metering and communications. Features include: Power factor regulation/ VAR regulation Auto-loading Field forcing Enhanced metering Event recorder Communications with Modbus TCP/Modbus RTU, Serial Interface (RS-232) The standard enhanced display is an Eaton GP04 interface module. An Eaton PanelMate is available as a high-end display.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 013

General Description
10.1-11
Incoming Line
Depending on the size and number of incoming cables, an incoming line enclosure may be necessary. Different designs are available for incoming power for top or bottom entry. When incoming line metering is specied, an additional 24-inch (610 mm) wide metering structure is typically supplied.
Incoming Line Connection Options

Cable: Maximum of six per phase, 750 kcmil maximum, top or bottom entry Bus Duct: Top only, 1200, 2000 or 3000A. Standard Eaton three-wire designs only Transformer Throat: Must be the standard design used by Eaton
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch

For application needs with loads rated 600 or 1200A at 23006600V, AMPGARD is available with the Type LBS loadbreak switch. The LBS is xed mounted and will t in one-half of a standard 80-inch (2032 mm) high, 36-inch (914 mm) wide vertical structure. Power fuses up to 450E amperes can be mounted within the half-high structure. 600E or 750E fuses require an additional half-structure, 1100E or 1350E fuses require an additional full structure. Lineups supplied with unfused LBS switches or with switches that use fuses greater than 450A cannot be rated for 50 kAIC. Refer to Table 10.1-5 on Page 10.1-17 for additional ratings information. Mechanical interlocks are incorporated so that the door cannot be opened when the switch is on, and when the door is open the switch cannot be closed. A safety screen is supplied behind the switch door. The Type LBS switch can be supplied with two Form C electrical interlocks.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Potential Transformers, Control Power Transformer Disconnect and Fuses

Bus connected (7.2 kV max.) potential transformers and/or control power transformers are mounted in a 20-inch (508 mm) high assembly that includes a disconnect and primary fuses. The assembly can be mounted in a 24-inch (610 mm) or 36-inch (914 mm) wide structure.
Bus for Top or Bottom Entry Incoming Power
Typical 24-Inch (610 mm) Wide Incoming Line Structure
Potential Transformers, Control Power Transformer and Fuses Mounted in a Disconnect Assembly, Height 20 Inches (508 mm)
10 11 12
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch Shown in Upper or Lower Half of 36-Inch (914 mm) Wide Structure, Height 40 Inches (1016 mm)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch Shown with Safety Screen Removed
21
CA08104001E

General Description
May 2012
Sheet 10 014
i ii 1 2 3 4
Main Breaker AMPGARD
Ratings
23006600 Vac systems (7200 Vac maximum), three-phase 60 kV BIL impulse withstand rating ANSI interrupting ratings250, 350 and 500 MVA. 500 MVA rating available for 6600V systems only Continuous current1200, 2000 and 3000A
Front/Side Accessible Connections

All connections requiring maintenance are front or side accessible Rear access space is not required An MBA (excluding back-to-back design) can be installed ush against the wall
Circuit Breaker Rating Chart

Table 10.1-3. ANSI Standards Type VCP-W Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis
Short-Circuit Current at Rated Maximum kV kA rms 29 at 4760V 41 at 4760V 33 at 8250V Nominal Voltage Class
ANSI Interrupting Rating
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Main Breaker AMPGARD
MVA 250
kV 4.16
kV Peak 60 kV BIL
General Description
Eatons Main Breaker AMPGARD (MBA) is a fully integrated metalenclosed medium voltage Type VCP-W Drawout Vacuum Circuit Breaker that is bus connected (close-coupled) to AMPGARD Medium Voltage Starters in a single integrated assembly.
Note: MBA sections are 100 inches (2540 mm) high.
350
4.16
60 kV BIL
500
7.2
60 kV BIL
Note: See Page 10.1-20 for complete ratings.
Main Breaker AMPGARD (7.2 kV max.) is suitable for service entrance. Utility metering sections are not available. Main Breaker AMPGARD is designed and built to meet the following standards where applicable: NEMA ICS-1 and NEMA ICS-3, Part 2 ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 UL 347 and UL 869A CSA C22.2, No. 31 and No.14 EEMAC G8.2 and E14.1

Main Breaker AMPGARDDoors Open
Requires Less Floor Space

Only 60 inches (1524 mm) deep, the integrated MBA design provides a bus system that directly connects to AMPGARD motor starters, eliminating space-consuming transition sections. The reduced oor space requirements yield signicant cost savings, particularly when installation in a prefabricated electrical house is required Back-to-back starters provide for an increase in the number of starters without an increase in oor space
Listing/Certication
UL listing and CSA certication is available, depending on the specic bill of material.
CA08104001E
Continuous Current at 60 Hz Amperes 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000
Impulse Withstand Rating
May 2012
Sheet 10 015

General Description
10.1-13
Microprocessor-Based Relays
Eatons protective relays provide programmable circuit protection, information and operator conducted testing. Refer to Tab 4 for more information.
Enclosures
The MBA is available in NEMA/ EEMAC 1, NEMA/EEMAC 1G/1A, and NEMA/EEMAC 12 enclosures.
i ii 1 2 3
Low Voltage Equipment Cell Compartment for Metering and Protection Devices
Metering
IQ and Power Xpert meters are available for multi-function metering. Refer to Tab 3.
Communications
Eatons Power Xpert Architecture communications provides for monitoring and controlling complete electrical distribution systems of those parts of a system selected by the operator. Refer to Tab 2.
AMPGARD 2-High Structure Bus Connected to Main Breaker Section
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Side Panel Removed to Show Incoming Cable Connections
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 016
i ii 1
Technical Data
Typical Wiring Diagram for Full Voltage FVNR Starter
Motor
2 3 4
1CT
T3
T2
T1
X2 X1
X2 X1 X1
CG GND
MP
H1A H2A
DP
H1C H2A
5 6
C3
1B
H2B
H1B H2B
C12
1C 25
IQ DP4130
C13 H1A H2C
7
GFCT
GND
X2 X1
3000 24
G2 G1
DP V3 PF1
V2 V2
Ground Neutral IQ DP-4130
8 9 10 11
C H2 H1
B A
GND
SF2 1Amp
MP
Set Point System 11 Trip Mode 1 (X2) Run RIL Off (X2)
2 4
12 13 14 15 16 17
1T3
1T2
1T1
50
+
DC COIL 2
Cust. Rcpt. M M M Cust. 120 V ACN Test Power
3
Coil Controller
(X1) MX
(X1)
(BLK)
M 5
C B MA A PF1 1 Amp X1 CPT 750 1 Plug 120 V X1 SF1 8 Amp MX 12 Ground X2
M7
M5
*
Start
Start
Ma
Main Fuse
Stop Ground 1A G URTD MP L3 L2 L1 P1 G Ground Ground Stop Ma Mb
18 19 20 21
ISW
4160 Vac 60 Hz
Figure 10.1-1. Induction Motor Across-the-Line Starter, Vacuum Contactor with Optional EMR-3000 Motor Protection and IQ Metering, Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Red and Green Indicating Lights
May 2012
Sheet 10 017

Technical Data
10.1-15
Typical Wiring Diagram for Reduced Voltage Autotransformer RVAT Starter
i ii
MOTOR
1
T3 T2 T1
2 3 4
Ground MP EMR-3000
5 6
DP
X1 X2
X1 X2
1CT
Grou
C1 C2 C3
H2A H1A C21 H2B C22 H2C C C23 H1C 25 24
G2
7 8
Ground R4
H3 H2 V11
9
PT SF2 1 AMP Set Point Sys TP Mode 1 11 Set MP3000 Set Point "START" to the Following; TRNC(100), TRNT (Max 30 Sec), and TRN(I).
Ground
H1
10
SB
6 2 6 2
L 0 T2
VC VB VA
12
11 12 13
X2 RUN OFF X2
3SA
1SA
MP
DC
(WHT)
+ -
(BLK)
R 5 1 5 1
(BLK)
Autotransformer
COIL CONTROLLER
SA M M M Cust 120 V ACN Cust RCPT 50
14 15 16
MP
SX 52 MA RA SA MP S5
C B A 1 AMP Main Fuse CPT 750 VA 1 PLUG 120V
R3
(DISCRETE IN 2) INC. SEQ.
X1
X1
51 RX SF1 MX 8 RX SX 3 M7 Ground M7 M5
17
M4
START 2
ISW
18 19 20 21
L3
L2 4160 Vac 60 Hz
L1 9 4 MP P1 G
STOP 1A
Figure 10.1-2. Induction Motor Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Starter, Vacuum Contactor with Optional EMR-3000 Motor Protection and IQ Metering, Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Red and Green Indicating Lights

Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 018
i ii 1
Typical Wiring Diagram for Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter

Contactor Status Indicators for Customers Use
Motor
Ground Fault, Instantaneous Overcurrent and Differential (if used). These Trip Conditions Will Result in the Immediate Opening of the Main Contactor (Uncontrolled Shutdown) All Other Trip Functions Will Operate the Trip Output and Allow the Softstart Module to Open the Circuit (Controlled Shutdown)
MAX
24 23 MAX 22
26 21
31 TRPX MP AUX 3 30
B7 Ba TCB
B6
20
71
T3
T2
T1
2 3
Refer to MP4000 Manual IB02602002E, Pages 4-12 Through 4-13, Setpoints 10-2, 10-15 and 10-19.
SS2 Softstart Bypass Position Cont Normal Bypass 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X X2
Off
12
SCTB CG
X2 CG1 CG1 MAX Run RIL X1 MP C12 C22 C32

H1A H2A H1B H2B
X2
4 5 6
CG
GIL Bypass 1RIL X1 X1
White
1CT C3 Blue C2 Black
Green G GND C1 Red C11 C21 C31 C31 C11 C21
C13 C23 C33
TB1
1 2
= Circuit Board Input

Continued from Lower Left M3 M5 B3
TB2
1 2
= Circuit Board Dry Output = Circuit Board Wetted Output
EMR-3000
H1C H2C
1
TB3
2
25 24 CIB
GND X2 GF2 GFCT GF1 GF21
MP G2 GF11 EMR-3000 G1 M3 Ma M2 Mb M4 M5 Ba B2 B3
7 8
X1
1T3 1T2 1T1 B 1 SCR ASSY SCR ASSY 400 AMP Pole ASSY SCR ASSY B
Reduced Voltage 400A MVS4 Starter
9 10 11 12
F
B D E V3
H2 H1 H2 H1 X2 X1 X2 X1
68 TB2-1 TB2-2 Emergency Bypass MP G V31 C GND V2 V11 V1 SF2 1 AMP 12 NEU B MP4000 A V13 V2 V11 V13 BLK V2 GRY V11 YEL J2-1 J2-4 J2-7 MCB See MP Programming Notes SS2 3 TCB GND
66 TB1-6 TB1-8 Start/Stop
64 TB2-5 TB2-6 RVSS Reset
Reset
RVSS Bypass Input
TB8-5
TB8-6
MP4000 Must be Programmed for AUX2 Relay Output to Trip on:
MAX
Fault Status Indicator for Customers use
Capacitors (Power Factor or Surge) Must not be Connected to the Load Side of the RVSS Starter. If Capacitors are Supplied in the Motor Terminal Box, They Must be Removed.
MP4000 Programming Notes:

MAX
25
27
72
CR
TCB
CPU
*
TX
= = = =
Remote Device Internal Term. Blk(s) Term. Blk. for Customer Conn. TX Type Light
PT
67
65
63
12 MB 2 6 2 (White) MP AUX 2 1 Coil Controller
BB
Mode 1
(White)
6 (Black) +
2 12 MP TRIP
Coil Controller
(Black)
VA D
+ M 5
(White)
+ B MX 5
(White)
(Black)
13 14
M F E
(Black) + VC VB
DC Coil 1
Mode 2 13 52 TB2-2 X2 RVSS WIL Fault X1
DC Coil 2
DC Coil 1
DC Coil 2
1 MA
1 BA
BX
SS2
MCB TB2-1
Time Between Starts Timer (AUX5 Failsafe)
TRPX
M CUST ACN RCPT CUST 120V Test Power 51 TRPX 50 TCB TB1-9 TB1-1
15
C
50 X2 GND 120V 1 Plug
16 17 18 19 20 21
Main Fuse
B A
VB VA PF1 3 AMP
H2 H1
69 BA
70 CIB 3 62
CPT 2K VA
ISW
ISW IS1 SF1 AMP 15 1 TB8-9 MX TB8-7 A1 SS2 TCB 4 A1 Main Coil SS2 TCB 2 * Start Bypass Coil Reset 2 55 BX CR * Stop 1A Stop TB3-11 Start 3
CR
GND ISW
PNL PNL AED
62 Ring Transformers S N PHASE C RVSS Fault S N PHASE B S N PHASE A
L3
L2
L1
TRPX 1 G
MP 4160 VAC 60 HZ
4 1
GND 1
1
TB3-10
EZ Relay Timing Head .1-30SEC 54 NO/NC
TCB
Figure 10.1-3. Induction Motor Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starter, Vacuum Contactor with EMR-3000 Motor Protection, Local and Remote Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Local and Remote Red and Green Indicating Lights
TB4-1
1 RCPT X1 IS2 IS3
TB4-3
12
CR
Continued at Right
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 019

Technical Data
10.1-17
Table 10.1-4. Starter Maximum Continuous Current Ratings

Starter Class Enclosure Type NEMA 1 Two-high with 400A 7.2 kV contactors Two-high with 400A 7.2 kV contactorsalternate One-high with 800A 7.2 kV contactor One-high with 250A 15 kV contactor
i
NEMA 12/NEMA 3R 330 top 330 bottom 230 top 370 bottom 650 200 Arc Resistant 320 top 320 bottom 210 top 350 bottom 600 N/A
360 top 360 bottom 320 top 400 bottom 720 200
ii 1 2 3
Limited acceleration time and locked rotor current. Contact Eaton for details.
LBS Loadbreak Switch

Table 10.1-5. LBS Switch Ratings
Description 600A unfused switch 1200A unfused switch 600A fused switch, 450E maximum fuse 1200A fused switch, 450E maximum fuse 600A fused switch, 750E maximum fuse 1200A fused switch, 750E maximum fuse 1200A fused switch, 1350E maximum fuse
Continuous Amperes 600 1200 450 450 600 750 1200
Load-Break Amperes 600 1200 600 1200 600 1200 1200
Fault Close Rating, kA Asymmetrical 40 61 80 80 64 64 49
System Fault Rating, kA Symmetrical 25 38 50 50 40 40 31
4 5 6 7 8
1200A rating is for NEMA 1 enclosure with vented covers. NEMA 3R/12 rating is 1000A.
Type SL, 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings

Table 10.1-6. Type SL 400A Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Rated Utilization Voltage Interrupting rating (With 400A high interrupting contactor) NEMA unfused (E1) NEMA fused (E2) Application table Induction motor Synchronous motor (0.8 PF) (1.0 PF) Transformer Capacitor three-phase 2200 to 2500V 3000 to 3600V 3800 to 4800V 6000 to 7200V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
8.5 kA 50 kA 200 MVA at 2400V 1750 hp 1750 hp 2000 hp 1500 kVA 1200 kVAR
8.5 kA 50 kA 285 MVA at 3300V 2250 hp 2250 hp 2500 hp 2000 kVA 1650 kVAR Arcing time Pickup voltage Dropout voltage Control voltages AC DC Control circuit burden Closing (AC)/(DC) Holding (AC)/(DC) Auxiliary contact rating Voltage (maximum) Continuous current Making capacity (AC) Making capacity (DC) Breaking capacity (AC) Breaking capacity (DC) Latch (when specied) Mechanical life Trip voltages (DC) Trip voltages (AC) Minimum trip voltage Trip burden 24 Vdc 125 Vdc 110/120 Vac Trip time Weight
Maximum Insulation Voltage: 7200V

Maximum interrupting current (3 operations) Rated current IEC make-break capability-AC4 Make Break Short-time current 30 seconds 1 second 8.7 milliseconds (0.5 cycle) Standard service altitude Optional service altitudes Mechanical life Electrical life BIL Dielectric strength (60 Hz) Closing time (Energization to contact touch) Opening time 8500A (High interrupting) 4500A (Standard interrupting) 400A enclosed 4000A 3200A 2400A 6000A 63 kA Peak 1000 to +2000 meters 3500 to 1001 meters +2001 to +5000 meters 2.5 million operations 300,000 operations 60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds) 20 kV (1 minute) 80 milliseconds 30 to 330 milliseconds (selectable) 12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less 80% rated coil voltage 60% rated coil voltage 110/120/220/240 (50/60 Hz) 125 100V125V, 1 kVA/200V250V, 1.8 kVA 100V125V, 40 VA/200V250V, 50 VA 600V 10A 7200 VA 125 VA 720 VA 125 VA 250,000 operations 24/125V 110/120V 80% rated coil voltage 400 VA 400 VA 400 VA 30 milliseconds 60 lbs (27 kg) (stab-in/bolt-in)
Time stated in cycles on 60 Hz base.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type SJ, 800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings

Table 10.1-7. Type SJ 800A Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Description Rated utilization voltage Interrupting rating NEMA unfused (E1) NEMA fused (E2) NEMA fused (E2) Interrupting rating Induction motor Synchronous motor (0.8 PF) (1.0 PF) Transformer Capacitor three-phase SJ 25V830 22002500V 12.5 kA 200 MVA at 2300V 50 kA 3000 hp 3000 hp 3500 hp 2500 kVA 2400 kVAR SJ 33V830 30003300V 12.5 kA 285 MVA at 3300V 50 kA 4000 hp 4000 hp 5000 hp 3500 kVA 3200 kVAR SJ 50V830 38005000V 12.5 kA 408 MVA at 4600V 50 kA 5000 hp 5000 hp 6000 hp 4500 kVA 4000 kVAR SJ 72V830 60007200V 12.5 kA 570 MVA at 6600V 50 kA 8000 hp 8000 hp 10,000 hp 6000 kVA 4800 kVAR 12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less 80% rated coil voltage 60% rated coil voltage 110/120/220/240V (50/60 Hz) 125 Vdc 2600 VA 80 VA 600V 10A 7200 VA 200 VA 720 VA 200 VA 250,000 operations 24/48/96V 110/220V (50/60 Hz) 80% rated coil voltage 1200 VA 400 VA 500 VA 95 lbs (43 kg)
Maximum Insulation Voltage: 7200V

Maximum interrupting current (three operations) Rated current IEC make-break capability-AC4 class 3 Make Break Short time current 30 seconds 1 second 8.75 milliseconds (0.5 cycle) Mechanical life Electrical life BIL Dielectric strength (60 Hz) Closing time (energization to contact touch) Opening time 12,500A 650A enclosed 800A open 8000A 6400A 4320A 10,800A 86 kA peak 1 million operations 250,000 operations At rated current 60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds) 18.2 kV (1 minute) 80 milliseconds 130 milliseconds Arcing time Pickup voltage Dropout voltage Control voltages (AC)/(DC) Control circuit burden (rated volt) Closing (AC)/(DC) Holding (AC)/(DC) Auxiliary contact rating (L-64) Voltage (maximum) Continuous current Making capacity (AC) Making capacity (DC) Breaking capacity (AC) Breaking capacity (DC) Latch (when specied) Mechanical life Trip voltages (DC) Trip voltages (AC) Tripping voltage Tripping burden 24 Vdc 48 Vdc and 96 Vdc 110 Vac and 220 Vac Weight
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 021

Technical Data
10.1-19
Type SL, 250A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings

Table 10.1-8. Type SL 15 kV Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Description Utilization voltage Interrupting rating EI (unfused) E2 (fused) E2 (fused) Induction motor Synchronous motor (0.8 PF) Synchronous motor (1.0 PF) Transformer BIL SL12V230 10,00011,000V 5 kA 950 MVA at 11,000V 50 kA 4000 hp (200 FLA) 4000 hp 4500 hp 3800 kVA at 11 kV 75 kV SL15V230 12,40013,800V 5 kA 1190 MVA at 13,800V 50 kA 5000 hp (200 FLA) 5000 hp 5500 hp 4750 kVA at 13.8 kV 95 kV (with arrestors)
i ii 1 2 3 4
Rating 15,000V 5000A 250A enclosed 250A open AC3make 2500 AC3break 2000 1500A 3750A 25 kA peak 250,000 operations 250,000 operations 36 kV (1 minute) 80 milliseconds 130 to 330 milliseconds (selectable) 95 lbs (43 kg) 12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less 80% rated coil voltage 60% rated coil voltage 110/120/220/240V (50/60 Hz) 125V 2600 VA 80 VA 600V 10A 7200 VA 200 VA 720 VA 200 VA 250,000 operations 24/48/96V 110/220V (50/60 Hz) 80% rated coil voltage 1200 VA 400 VA 500 VA 95 lbs (43 kg)
Table 10.1-9. Type SL 15 kV Vacuum Contactor Specications

Specication Maximum voltage Maximum interrupting Current (three operations) Rated current IEC make-break capability Short-time current 30 seconds 1 second 8.75 milliseconds Mechanical life Electrical life Dielectric strength (60 Hz) Closing time Opening time Weight Arcing time Pickup voltage Dropout voltage Control voltages (AC) (DC) Control circuit burden (rated voltage) Closing Holding Auxiliary contact ratings Voltage (maximum) Continuous current Making capacity (AC) Making capacity (DC) Breaking capacity (AC) Breaking capacity (DC) Latch (when specied) Mechanical life Trip voltages (DC) Trip voltages (AC) Tripping voltage Tripping burden 24 Vdc 48 Vdc and 96 Vdc 110 Vac and 220 Vac Weight
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 022
i ii 1 2
Main Breaker Ratings

Table 10.1-10. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards
Identication Circuit Breaker Type Rated Values Voltage Insulation Level Current Rated Transient Recovery Voltage Related Required Capabilities Current Values
Rated Withstand Test Voltage Maximum Sym. Interrupting Capability
3-Second Short-Time Current Carrying Capability
Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary)
Rated Short-Circuit Current (at Rated Maximum kV)
3
Nominal Three-Phase MVA Class
1.6 K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current
1.6 K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current 78 66
Rated Crest Voltage
Rated Time to Crest
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
kV MVA V Class Class kV rms K
Normal Frequency
kV rms
kV Crest
E2 T2 Amps I kV mS Cycles Y kA Crest Sec rms
Cycles V/K kA kV rms rms
kA rms
kA Crest kA rms S Assy.
50 VCP-W 250 50 VCP-W 350 75 VCP-W 500
4.16
250
4.76
1.24 19
60
1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000
29
8.9
50
30
3.85
36
36
97 58 132 78 132
4.16
350
4.76
1.19 19
60
41
8.9
50
30
4.0
49
49
7.2
500
8.25
1.25 36
95
33
15.5
60
30
6.6
41
41
111
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
For reclosing service, there is No Derating necessary for Eatons type VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements. V For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an operating voltage, Vo = (Rated Short-Circuit Current) Vo But not to exceed KI. V (Rated Short-Circuit Current) Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage, Vo = 1.15 Vo But not to exceed KI. The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the operating voltage. 4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. Contact Eaton for details. 3-cycle rating available. Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula: (K Times Rated Short-Circuit current) 2 T (seconds) =Y Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula. Included for reference only. Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical interrupting capability, both at specied operating voltage. Non-standard breakers with high momentary rating available for special applications. Note: Contact Eaton for capacitor switching, low inductive switching, and cable charging ratings.
Rated Control Voltage 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac Spring Charge Motor Run Amperes 9.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 Time (Seconds) 6 6 6 6 6 Close or Trip Amperes 16 7 4 6 3 UV Trip mA (Maximum) Voltage Range Close 3856 100140 200280 104127 208254 Trip 2856 70140 140280 104127 208254 Indicating Light Amperes 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
200 80 40
CA08104001E
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers 1.2 1.2 1.2
4
Rated Maximum Voltage Divided By K
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay
K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current KI
Rated Voltage Range Factor
1.2 x 50 sec. Impulse
May 2012
Sheet 10 023

Technical Data
10.1-21
Contactor-Fuse Coordination
The AMGARD starter provides ensured coordination between its fuses, contactor, current transformers, protective relays, and the motor it is controlling. One of the most critical coordination issues is between the contactor and the starter fuses. The fuses must interrupt faults greater than the interrupting rating of the contactor. The AMPGARD 400A high interrupting contactor (SL400A-HI) has an 8-cycle dropout time factory setting as standard and will interrupt at 8500A. The maximum size fuse used with an SL400A-HI contactor is a 450-24R. By comparing the fuse curve with the contactor rating, it can be observed that for faults greater than 8500A, the fuse will open before the contactor. With faults less than 8500A, the contactor may clear the fault before the fuse blows, depending on the settings of the protective relays. Refer to Figure 10.1-4 for an illustration of AMPGARD coordination. Other vacuum contactors available today may have lower interrupting ratings than the AMPGARD Type SL vacuum contactors. Dropout times also vary, and may be as short as two cycles on other starter designs. Lower interrupting ratings and shorter dropout times can result in fault current levels where the contactor may be required to interrupt a fault greater than its rating. This can result in equipment failure. Refer to Figure 10.1-5 for an illustration of an improperly coordinated starter.
AMPGARD starters also ensure coordination between other starter components. The current transformers and protective relays are selected to work properly with each other, and to protect the motor. Protective relays like Eatons EMR-3000 provide optimal motor protection, while also rapidly opening the contactor during fault conditions. This rapid opening signal cannot open the contactor in less than its set dropout time, but it will take the motor off-line in the shortest possible time. This will help minimize
mechanical damage to the motor and may prevent the starter fuses from blowing by allowing the contactor to clear the fault (only if the fault is less than the contactor interrupting rating). AMPGARD starters use 400A standard interrupting contactors (SL400-SI) when the contactor is not required to coordinate with the starter main fuse. An example of this application is the run contactor of a reduced voltage starter.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time
7
Contactor Dropout Contactor Interrupting Rating 24R Fuse Curve
8 9
Current
10 11 12 13
24R Fuse Curve
Figure 10.1-4. Proper Contactor Fuse Coordination Found in AMPGARD Starter
14 15
Time
Contactor Dropout
Contactor Interrupting Rating
16 17
Fault Current Range where Contactor can Attempt to Open on a Fault Greater than its Rating
Current
18 19 20 21
Figure 10.1-5. Contactor Fuses that are not Properly Coordinated
CA08104001E

Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Protection Considerations
Coordinated with the motors characteristics, the protective devices in the AMPGARD starter provide motor protection from overload to full system capacity faults. AMPGARD starters are supplied with an adjustable thermal overload relay as standard. Multi-function solid-state motor protection relays are a common option on AMPGARD starters. The EMR-3000 is typically provided when a multi-function relay is specied. The EMR-3000 provides many types of protection including overload, locked rotor, ground fault and phase loss/ phase unbalance. The EMR-3000 also provides start control logic to protect the motor against excessive starting. The relay may be applied to either across-the-line or reduced voltage starters. On reduced voltage starters, the EMR-3000 can control the transition from reduced to full voltage, offering the greatest protection for the motor and starter. An optional RTD module can be supplied for motors with built-in RTDs. The EMR-4000 can be supplied when voltage monitoring and protection are required. Eatons MD-3000 can be supplied when motor differential protection is required.
InsulGard relays are an available option on AMPGARD starters. The InsulGard provides early warning of increasing partial discharge levels in
the starting equipment, cables and motor. This early warning will help the user to better schedule maintenance and avoid unplanned downtime.
Ultimate Trip
MP-3000 Motor Protection Curve Programmed to Follow Specific Motor Damage Curve Providing Maximum Motor Utilization
Controller Maximum Interrupting Rating
Time In Seconds
Full Load Amps
Motor Starting Curve
12 13 14
Contactor Dropout 24R Fuse
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EMR-3000 Motor Protective Relay
Current Asymmetrical Offset Compensation Contactor Interrupting Capacity
Figure 10.1-6. Full Range Coordinated Protection Between Current Limiting Type CLS Fuses, Vacuum Contactor and Motor Protection Relay
May 2012
Sheet 10 025

Technical Data
10.1-23
Starter Fuse Information

Table 10.1-12. Fuse Coordination Recommendations
Minimum FLA Maximum FLA 22.9 31.1 41.9 46.7 62.9 74.7 82.9 93.5 123.9 137.0 165.9 187.0 246.9 328.9 360.0 400.0 250.0 330.0 499.0 650.1 720.0 Fuse Rating 70-2R 70-2R 100-3R 100-3R 130-4R 150-5R 170-6R 170-6R 200-9R 200-9R 230-12R 230-12R 390-18R 450-24R 450-24R 450-24R 450-24R 450-24R 650-36R 800-44R 800-44R CT Ratio 25:5 50:5 50:5 75:5 75:5 100:5 100:5 150:5 150:5 200:5 200:5 300:5 300:5 400:5 600:5 600:5 300:5 400:5 600:5 800:5 1000:5
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
7.2 kV/400A Contactor

10.0 23.0 31.2 42.0 46.8 63.0 74.8 83.0 93.6 124.0 137.1 166.0 187.1 247.0 329.0 360.1
7.2 kV/800A Contactor

200.0 250.1 330.1 500.0 650.1
Specic motor acceleration time and locked rotor current must be reviewed to ensure 24R fuse has sufcient capacity for start cycle.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Layout Dimensions
Full Voltage Squirrel Cage Starters Catalog S210 Non-Reversing Catalog S310 Reversing
Equipment Details Mounted in the Medium Voltage Section

Specications
Table 10.1-13. Starter Selection InformationDimensions in Inches (mm)
Contactor Ampere Rating (Enclosed) Starter Interrupting Rating (kVA) Height Width Depth Additional Starter Spaces Equipment Arrangement Number Horsepower Volts Dimensions Weight Lbs (kg)
22002400V Non-Reversing
700/800 1500/1750 3000 700/800 1500/1750 3000 1250/1500 2500/3000 5500 1250/1500 2500/3000 5500 2000/2250 4000/4500 8000 2300 2300 2300 2300 2300 2300 4600 4600 4600 4600 4600 4600 400 400 720 400 400 720 400 400 720 400 400 720 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 1 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 4 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 0 1350 (613) 1350 (613) 1700 (772) 1800 (817) 1800 (817) 2400 (1090) 1350 (613) 1350 (613) 1700 (772) 1800 (817) 1800 (817) 2400 (1090) 1500 (681) 1500 (681) 1800 (817) 1800 (817) 1800 (817) 2400 (1090)
Three incoming line connectors Drawout three-pole gang-operated line isolating switch assembly with isolating shutter, external operating handle interlocked to prevent opening the medium voltage compartment door until the isolating switch is open and grounded Vertically mounted current limiting power fuses with pop-up blown fuse indicators One magnetic three-pole vacuum contactor with DC operating coils and mechanical interlock to prevent opening the isolating switch when contactor is closed One control power transformer (115V secondary) Two CPT primary current limiting fuses Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC) Three current transformers
22002400V Reversing
40004800V Reversing
6600V Non-Reversing
6600 400 6600 400 6600 720 6600 400 6600 400 6600 720
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 4000/4500 8000

Reversing Starter
One additional magnetic three-pole vacuum contactor (duplicate of above), both contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked.
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm. When horizontal bus is added, height becomes 92.00 inches (2336.8 mm). At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds. At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds. Maximum current for two starters in a single structure is 720A. May be applied on 6900V systems where maximum voltage does not exceed 7200V.
Mounted in the Low Voltage Compartment
Control panel with: One EMR-3000 motor protection relay One interposing control relay Set of control circuit terminal blocks One control circuit secondary fuse One run-test circuit
M Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RVS RVS
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4
Figure 10.1-7. Starter Arrangements
May 2012
Sheet 10 027

Layout Dimensions
10.1-25
1.50 (38) 3.50 (89)

1200 Amp - 4.00" X 1/Ph a Ph Ph b c Main Bus
13.50 (343)
1.25 (32)
i
30.00 (762) 5.50 (140)
12.00 (305) 3.00 (76) (51)
Note T
9.32 (237)
ii 1 2 3
Control
Load Term Detail A Note L
2.00 (51)
Main Bus Note C1 3.00 (76) 6.00 (152) 36.00 (914) Top View 36.00 (914) 4.50 (114) Note B 13.75 (349)
5.50 (140) 6.80 (173)
7.39 (188) 5.81 (148) 62.00 (1575)

(35) 1.18 (30) 80.00 (2032)
2.00 (51) 4.63 (118)
Control
61.00 (1549)
9.25 (235) Note A (58)
22.00 (559) 5.81 (148)
Gnd 1.45
7.39 21.00 (188) (533)
2.50 (64)
6.00 (152) Note C 3.00 (76) 27.00 (686)

Floor Plan Note D
30.00 (762) 28.00 (711) 21.67 (550) 1.00 (25)
4 5 6 7
36.00 (914)
Front View
Detail A Load Terms T1 T3
22.85 (580) 30.00 (762)

Side View
2.00 (51)
4.50 (114)
4.38 (111)
4.38 (111)
1200A Main Bus
on Rear Wall W ll Load L d Panel P in Starter
For seismic installations, mount a minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from wall.
8 9 10
Figure 10.1-8. Arrangement 1 Detail (Full Voltage 400A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
1.25 (32)
1.50 (38)
3.50 (89)
a Ph c
13.50 (343)
Note E
11
30.00 (762) 5.50 (140)
Mai n Bus
12.00 (305) 3.00 (76)
(237)
12 13 14 15
5.50 (140)
Main Bus
6.80 (173)
Low Voltage Control
80.00 (2032)
1.36 (35) 1.18 (30)
Note G 6.00 (152)
2.00 (51) 4.63 (118) 31.75 (806)
36.00 (914) Top View 36.00 (914) 4.50 (114)

Note A
29.00 (737) 5.81 (148) 1.45 (37) 22.85 (580) 30.00 (762)
Side View
7.39 (188)
13.75 2.50 (64)
2.31 (59) 1.00 (25)

Note G
30.00 (762) 28.00 (711) 21.67 (550) 1.00 (25)
16 17 18 19
2.00 (51)
3.00 (76) 27.00 (686)

Floor Plan Note D
4.50 (114)
36.00 (914)
Front View
Detail A Load Term T3
4.3 (109)
4.3 (109)
800A Starter
on Rear Wall Load Panel in Starter
20 21
Figure 10.1-9. Arrangement 2 Detail (Full Voltage 800A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 028
i ii
1 2 3.50 (88.9)
PH PH PH Main A B C Bus
11.50 (292.1) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)

Note F
1.25 (31.8) 5.50 (139.7)
27.50 (698.5) 6.70 (170.2)

Main Bus
30.00 (762.0)
1 2
Top Plan View
0.90 (22.9)
80.00 (2031.9) Ground Bus 1.45 (36.8) 62.00 (1574.8)
24.00 (609.6) Top View
Continuation of Bus from Adjacent Structure
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
UNIT 1D 1 24.00 (609.6) UNIT 2D 2
24.00 (609.6) 4.50 (114.3) 19.00 2.00 (482.6) (50.8) 1.00 (25.4)
Note F
22.85 (580.3) 30.00 (762.0) Side View
22.00 (558.8)
28.00 (711.3) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)
30.00 (762.0)
Note A
36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0)
15.00 (381.0) Floor Plan Note D
Structure #1
Shipping Section 1 1500 Lbs Elevation View
1.50 (38.1) 13.50 (342.9) 9.32 (236.7)

1.25 (31.8) 5.50 (139.7) 30.00 (762.0) 6.70 (170.2)
Note E
11 12 13 14 15
24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) Shipping Section 1 1500 Lbs Base Plan View 56.43 (1433.3)
12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9)
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)

Main Bus Note G
Low Voltage Control
1.85 (47.0)
3.00 (76.2) 1.36 (34.5) 80.00 (2032.0)
6.00 (152.4) 1.18 (30.0) 36.00 (914.4) Top View 36.00 (914.4)
5.81 (147.5) 0.90 (22.9)
7.39 (187.7) Ground Bus 1.45 (36.8)
59.00 (1498.6)
2.00 (50.8)
4.50 (114.3) 1.00 (25.4)
13.75 (349.3)
22.85 (580.4)
Note E
9.25 (235.0)
Note A
16 17 18 19 20 21
LH Side Sheet 2.92 (74.2) 4.38 (111.3)
Load Term T1 T2 T3
30.00 (762.0) Side View
2.50 (63.5)
28.00 2.31 (58.7) 1.00 21.67 (711.3) 30.00 (762.0) (25.4) (550.5) 4.50 (114.3)
Note G
4.38 (111.3)
2.00 (50.8)
6.00 (152.4) 3.00 (76.2)
Arranged Horizontally on Rear Wall Load Panel in Starter
27.00 (685.9)
Detail A Structure #2
Floor Plan Note D
Figure 10.1-10. Arrangement 1 Detail (Full Voltage 15 kV)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 029

Layout Dimensions
10.1-27
Equipment Arrangement Number
Volts
Contactor Ampere Rating (Enclosed)
Starter Interrupting Rating (kVA)
Primary Reactor, Reduced Voltage Starters Catalog S510 Non-Reversing Catalog S710 Reversing
Mounted in the Medium Voltage Section

Specications
Horsepower Dimensions Height Width Depth Weight Lbs (kg)
i ii 1
Three incoming line connectors One drawout three-pole gangoperated line isolation switch assembly with isolating shutter, external operating handle interlocked to prevent opening the medium voltage compartment door until the isolating switch is open and grounded One vertically mounted current limiting power fuse with pop-up blown fuse indicators One magnetic three-pole vacuum contactor with DC operating coils and mechanical interlock to prevent opening the isolation switch when the contactor is closed One control power transformer (115V secondary) Two CPT primary current limiting fuses Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC)
700/800 1500/1750 3000 700/800 1500/1750 3000 1250/1500 2500/3000 5500 1250/1500 2500/3000 5500 2000/2250 4000/4500 8000 2300 2300 2300 2300 2300 2300 4600 4600 4600 4600 4600 4600 6600 6600 6600 6600 6600 6600 400 400 720 400 400 720 400 400 720 400 400 720 400 400 720 400 400 720 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 1 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 4 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 30 (762) 2800 (1271) 2800 (1271) 4000 (1816) 3250 (1476) 3250 (1476) 4650 (2111) 2800 (1271) 2800 (1271) 4000 (1816) 3250 (1476) 3250 (1476) 4650 (2111) 3300 (1498) 3300 (1498) 4650 (2111) 3250 (1476) 3250 (1476) 4650 (2111)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
22002400V Reversing
40004800V Reversing
6600V Non-Reversing
Reversing Starter
One additional magnetic contactor (duplicate of above), both contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked.
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 4000/4500 8000

One control panel with: One EMR-3000 motor protection relay Two interposing relays One set of control circuit terminal blocks One control circuit secondary fuse One run-test circuit
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm. When horizontal bus is added, height becomes 92.00 inches (2336.8 mm). At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds. At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Run Contactor
Run Contactor
Run Contactor
Run Contactor
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M
Reactor Reactor Reversing Reactor Contactor Arrangement 3
M
Reversing Reactor Contactor Arrangement 4
M
Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2
Reduced Voltage Structure

One magnetic three-pole vacuum run contactor with DC operating coil and electrical interlocks Three current transformers One medium-duty starting reactor with 506580% taps
Table 10.1-14. Type 502 Reactor Starting Characteristics
80 80% tap 65% tap 65 50% tap 50
21

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 030
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Front View 3.50 (89)
13.50 (343) 1.50 ( ) (38)
1.25 (32) 9.32 (237) 2.00 (51) 30.00 (762) 5.50 (140) 5.50 (140)
1200 Amp p - 4.00" X 1/Ph /
Main Ph Ph Bus a b c 7.39
Note L1
12.00 (305) 2.88 2.00 (73) (51) 1.70 (43) 1.00 (25) 80.00 (2032)
Load Term
4.38 (111) 4.38 (111) 2.92 (74)
Main Bus Load Term Note G 3.00 (76) 36.00 (914)

36.00 (914) 4.50 (114) 28.00 (711) 2.00 (51) 6.00 (152) 21.67 Note G (550) 27.00 (686) Floor Plan Note D
36.00 (914) 36.00 (914) 27.00 (686) 4.50 30.00 (762)
Control
61.00 (1549)
61.00 (1549)
13.75 ( ) (349)
22.00 (559)
5.81 (148)
Gnd 1.45 Bus (37)

22.85 (580)
2.31 (59) 1.00 (25) Note A 4.50 (114)
4.63 (118) 1.00 (25)
28.00 (711) 1.00 (25)
30.00 (762)
2.50 (64)
7 8
Side View
RVNR 400A Starter w/Main Bus 1200A
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 10.1-12. Arrangement 1 Detail (Reduced Voltage, 400A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 031

Layout Dimensions
10.1-29
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Starters Catalog S610 Non-Reversing Catalog S810 Reversing

Table 10.1-16. Type 602 Auto-transformer Starting Characteristics
i ii 1 2 3
Number of Structures Weight Lbs (kg)
Three incoming line connectors One drawout three-pole gangoperated line isolation switch assembly with isolating shutter, external operating handle interlocked to prevent opening the medium voltage compartment door until the isolating switch is open and grounded Three vertically mounted current limiting power fuses with pop-up blown fuse indicators One magnetic three-pole vacuum contactor with DC operating coils and mechanical interlock to prevent opening the isolation switch when the contactor is closed One control power transformer (115V secondary) Two CPT primary current limiting fuses Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC)
80 80% tap 65% tap 65 50% tap 50
Specications
Equipment Arrangement Number Horsepower Volts Contactor Ampere Rating (Enclosed)
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Starter Interrupting Rating (kVA)
4 5
700/800 1500/1750 3000 700/800 1500/1750 3000 1250/1500 2500/3000 5500 1250/1500 2500/3000 5500 2000/2250 4000/4500 8000 2300 400 2300 400 2300 720 2300 400 2300 400 2300 720 4600 400 4600 400 4600 720 4600 400 4600 400 4600 720 6600 400 6600 400 6600 720 6600 400 6600 400 6600 720 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 400,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 570,000 1 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 4 1 1 2 3 3 4 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2 80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 3 80 (2032) 108 (2743) 30 (762) 4 3100 (1407) 3100 (1407) 4800 (2179) 3650 (1657) 3650 (1657) 5650 (2565) 3100 (1407) 3100 (1407) 4800 (2179) 3650 (1657) 3650 (1657) 5650 (2565) 3100 (1407) 3100 (1407) 4800 (2179) 3650 (1657) 3650 (1657) 5650 (2565)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
22002400V Reversing
Reversing Starter
40004800V Reversing
One control panel with: One EMR-3000 motor protection relay Three interposing relays One set of control circuit terminal blocks One control circuit secondary fuse One run-test circuit One magnetic three-pole vacuum run contactor with DC operating coil and electrically and mechanically interlocked with the starting contactor One magnetic two-pole vacuum start contactor with DC operating coil and electrical and mechanical interlocks Three current transformers One medium-duty starting autotransformer with 506580% taps Three distribution class lightning arresters for high voltage stress protection on the transformer zero tap
6600V Non-Reversing
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 4000/4500 8000

Reduced Voltage Structure(s)
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm. When horizontal bus is added, height becomes 92.00 inches (2336.8 mm). At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds. At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Short Short Run Auto Transformer Run M

Arrangement 2
Short Auto Transformer
M
Rev
Run Auto Transformer M Rev
Short
16
Auto Transformer
Run
17 18 19 20
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4
21

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 032
i ii 1 2 3 4
Full Voltage Synchronous Starters Brush Type Mark V Controller Catalog S241 Non-Reversing Catalog S341 Reversing

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Three incoming line connectors One drawout three-pole gangoperated line isolation switch assembly with isolating shutter. External operating handle interlocked to prevent opening the medium voltage compartment door until the isolating switch is open and grounded Three vertically mounted current limiting power fuses with pop-up blown fuse indicators One magnetic three-pole vacuum contactor with DC operating coils and mechanical interlock to prevent opening the isolation switch when the contactor is closed One control power transformer (115V secondary) Two CPT primary current limiting fuses Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC) Three current transformers
Mounted on inside compartment: One step-down exciter transformer three-phase One SCR power supply panel One synchronous control board MOV surge protection One three-phase CT
One ELC controller One set of control circuit blocks Three primary fuses Three secondary fuses

Mounted on top of starter: One starting and eld discharge resistor

Dimensions

Equipment Arrangement Number Starter Interrupting Rating (kVA) Horsepower Horsepower Volts at 1.0 PF at 0.8 PF Contactor Ampere Rating (Enclosed) Height Width Depth Weight Lbs (kg)
900/1000 2300 400 700/800 1500/1750 1750/2000 2300 400 3000 3500 2300 720 200,000 1 200,000 1 200,000 2 200,000 3 200,000 3 200,000 4 400,000 1 400,000 1 400,000 2 400,000 3 400,000 3 400,000 4 570,000 1 570,000 1 570,000 2 570,000 3 570,000 3 570,000 4 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1500 (681) 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1500 (681) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2350 (1067) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2900 (1317) 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1550 (704) 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1550 (704) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2350 (1067) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2900 (1317) 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1700 (772) 80 (2032) 36 (914) 30 (762) 1700 (772) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2500 (1135) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2100 (953) 80 (2032) 72 (1829) 30 (762) 2900 (1317)
22002400V Reversing
900/1000 2300 400 700/800 1500/1750 1750/2000 2300 400 3000 3500 2300 720
1250/1500 1500/1750 4600 400 2500/3000 3000/3500 4600 400 5500 6000 4600 720
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500 1500/1750 4600 400 2500/3000 3000/3500 4600 400 5500 6000 4600 720
Reversing Starter
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250 2500/2750 7200 400 4000/4500 5000/5500 7200 400 8000 10,000 7200 720
6600V Reversing
2000/2250 2500/2750 7200 400 4000/4500 5000/5500 7200 400 8000 10,000 7200 720

One control panel with: One EMR-3000 motor protection relay One interposing relay One set of control circuit terminal blocks One control circuit secondary fuse One run-test circuit
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm. When horizontal bus is added, height becomes 92.00 inches (2336.8 mm). Starting and discharge resistors are mounted on top, add 13.00 inches (330.2 mm) to the height. At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds. At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Mounted in the Upper Compartment or Auxiliary Structure

One brush-type solid-state Mark V eld panel with:
Field Panel
Field Panel M
Field Panel M
Field Panel
Rev
Rev
Mounted on door: One AC line ammeter, panel type One DC eld ammeter, panel type One exciter eld potentiometer One set of externally ventilated heatsinks One graphic display
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 2
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4

When the eld panel requirement exceeds 88A at 125 Vdc or 44A at 250 Vdc, an auxiliary structure 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) wide is required. Mounting location of exciter transformer when eld panel requirement exceeds 88A at 125 Vdc or 44A at 250 Vdc. Otherwise compartment is blank.
May 2012
Sheet 10 033

Layout Dimensions
10.1-31
25.0 (635) Starting & Discharge res. 3.50 (90) 1000 Amp p - 3.00" X 1/Ph / Ph Ph a b DC Field Conn's MTD on rh Side c 12.25 (311) Main Bus 12.00 (305) 3.00 (76) 2.00 (51) 2.00 (51) Main Bus Note G 1.18 (30) 80.00 (2032) Low Voltage Control Load Term Detail A Note L 3.00 (76) 36.00 (914) Top View 36.00 (914) 4.50 (114) Note A Note E 7.39 (188) 1.45 (37) 21.00 (533) 2.50 (64) 1.00 (25) 6.00 (152) Note G 27.00 (686)
Floor Plan Note D
i
1.50 (38) 13.50 (343) Note E 1.25 (32)
ii
30.00 (762) 5.50 (140) 5.50 6.80 (173)
1 2 3 4 5
4.13 (105)
22.00 (559) 5.81 (148)
2.31 (59)
Gnd Bus
30.00 (762) 28.00 (711) 21.67 (550) ( 1.00 (25)
6 7 8 9 10
36.00 (914) Front View
22.85 (580) 30.00 (762) Side View
2.00 (51)
4.50 (114)
Detail A Load Term T1 T2 T3 4.38 (111) 4.38 (111) Synchronous Starter 1000A Main Bus
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
On Rear Wall W ll Load L d Panel P in Starter
Figure 10.1-15. Arrangement 1 Detail (400A, Synchronous)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 034
i ii 1 2
Reduced Voltage Solid-State Soft Starter AMPGARD MV4S Starters
Equipment Details
Mounted in the Medium Voltage Sections

3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Volts
Three incoming line connectors Drawout three-pole gang-operated line isolating switch assembly with isolating shutter, external operating handle interlocked to prevent opening the medium voltage compartment door until the isolating switch is open and grounded Vertically mounted current limiting power fuses with pop-up blown fuse indicators One magnetic three-pole vacuum contactor with DC operating coils and mechanical interlock to prevent opening the isolating switch when contactor is closed One control power transformer (115V secondary) Two CPT primary current limiting fuses Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC) Three current transformers Withdrawable SCR truck with fully rated vacuum bypass contactor
Control panel with: One EMR-3000 motor protection relay One interposing control relay Set of control circuit terminal blocks One control circuit secondary fuse One run-test circuit
Mounted in Lower Door Compartment

Soft start control module with Modbus and RS-232 interface for remote communications User interface module with 2 x 20 character LCD display, 12 LEDs, and eight pushbuttons

Horsepower SCR/Contactor Ampere Rating 400 720 400 720 400 720 Starter Interrupting Rating (AIC) 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 Dimensions Height 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) Width 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) Depth 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) Add. Starter Spaces 0 0 0 0 0 0 Weight Lbs (kg) 2000 (908) 4000 (1816) 2000 (908) 4000 (1816) 2000 (908) 4000 (1816)
2300 2300 3300 3300 4160 4160

1500 3000 1800 3600 2500 5000
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm. Based on maximum acceleration time of 30 seconds. Includes horizontal bus. Does not include incoming line provisions.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 035

Layout Dimensions
10.1-33
1.50 (38.1) PH PH PH Main A B C Bus 9.32
13.50 (343.0) Note: E
1.25 (32.0)
i ii
12.00 (305.0)
Load Term Detail A Note: L Low Voltage Control 7.39 Ground (188.0) Bus 1.45 (36.8) Low Voltage Control
3.50 (89.0)
3.00 2.00 (76.2) (51.0)
2.00 (51.0) Main Bus
5.50 (140.0) 5.50 (140.0) 6.80 (173.0)
30.00 (762.0)
1 2 3 4
1.36 (345.4) 1.18 (30.0) 80.00 (203.2) 61.00 (155.0) 2.00 (51.0)
5.81 (148.0)
3.00 Note: C1 (76.2) 6.00 (152.4) 36.00 (914.4) Top View 36.00 (914.4) 4.10 (104.1) 4.50 (114.3)
POWER RUN ALARM TRIP
62.00 (1575.0)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
10.00 (254.0)
Note: A Note: E 1.00 (25.4) 6.00 (152.4) Note: G 28.00 (711.2) 30.00 (762.0)
Ground Bus 1.45 (36.8) 36.00 (914.4) 22.85 (580.4) 30.00 (762.0) For seismic installations, mount a minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from wall. Side View
2.50 (64.0)
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (51.0)
3.00 (76.2) 27.00 (686.0) 4.50 (114.3)
Floor Plan
Figure 10.1-16. Arrangement Detail (400A Solid-State Reduced Voltage)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
Table 10.1-20. Arrangement Detail Notes
Note 1 2 3 4 A B B1 C Description Line connection is designed for maximum of one 4/0 cable. Line connection is designed for maximum of two 500 kcmil. Load connection is designed for maximum of one 350 kcmil or two 4/0. Load connection is designed for maximum of one 750 kcmil or two 500 kcmil. 0.875 dia. typical 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
May 2012
Sheet 10 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Cable Notes
Arrangement Notes
HV conduit space, load cables for two-high starters. Cables for lower starter enter in front half of conduit space, and cables for upper starter enter in rear half. HV conduit space, line and load cables for bottom entry stand-alone starters. Line cables should enter in rear half of conduit space, and load cables should enter in front half of conduit space. LV conduit space for two-high starters with bottom entry control conduit. Control wiring for upper starter should enter in left half of conduit space, and lower starter control wiring should enter in right half of conduit space. LV conduit space for two-high starters with top entry control conduit. Control wiring for upper starter should enter in right half of conduit space, and lower starter control wiring should enter in left half of conduit space. 90 door swing requires 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure and 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure. HV conduit space, load. HV conduit space, line only. HV conduit space, line only. Line cables to enter in rear half of conduit space only. LV conduit space only. Load terminations located on rear wall of starter mounted on a load panel. Terminations are arranged horizontally from left to right. T1, T2, T3 left to right at 4.38-inch (111.3 mm) centers. Load terminations located on rear wall of reduced voltage enclosure mounted on a load panel. Terminations are arranged horizontally from left to right. T1, T2, T3 left to right at 4.38-inch (111.3 mm) centers. HV conduit space, load cables for two-high starters. Cables for lower starter enter in rear half of conduit space, and cables for upper starter enter in front half. Steel bottom with removable lead plates. Tolerances 0.0 inches +0.25 inches per structure. Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
C1 D
E F F1 G L L1 T X Y Z
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 037

Layout Dimensions
10.1-35
Incoming Line Switch/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 6.70 MAIN BUS (170.2) Note C1 3.00 (76.2) 30.00 (762.0)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
30.00 28.00 (762.0) (711.2) 1.00 (25.4)
3.00 (76.2)
PH PH PH MAIN A B C BUS
12.00 (304.8)
1.36 6.00 (34.5) (152.4) 1.18 (30.0)
36.00 (914.4) Top View
3.50 (88.9)
36.0 (914.4) 2.00 (50.8) 80.00 (2,032.0) Unit 1B Unit 2B 59.00 (1,498.6) Line Term 19.00 (482.6) 34.00 (863.6) Note F 7.75 (196.9) 1.45 (36.8) 1.00 (25.4) 24.00 (609.6) 27.00 (685.8) Floor Plan Note D 2 24.00 (609.6) 60.00 (1,524) Shipping Section 1 - 1750 Lbs 9.32 (236.7) PH PH PH MAIN A B C BUS 12.00 (304.8) 2.00 (50.8) 3.50 (88.9) MAIN BUS 24.00 (609.6) Top View 6.70 (170.2) 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 5.50 (139.7) 30.00 (762.0) 22.85 (580.4) 30.00 (762.0) Side View Structure 1 1.50 (38.1) 21.00 (533.4) 1.25 (31.8) 4.50 (114.3)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Unit 2C
0.90 (22.9) GND BUS
4.50 (114.3)
Unit 1D 1 36.00 (914.4)
Unit 2D
80.00 (2,032.0) 2.00 (50.8)
24.00 (609.6) 4.50 (114.3) 22.00 (558.8) 28.00 (711.2) 1.00 (25.4) 15.00 (381.0) 30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0.90 (22.9)
5.81 (147.6) 1.45 (36.8)
19.00 (482.6)
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
GND BUS
22.85 (580.4) 30.00 (762.0) Side View Structure 2
1.00 (25.4)
4.50 (114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Figure 10.1-17. Incoming LBS, Bottom Entry up to 450A Fuse, Unfused with Metering Section
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 038
i ii 1 2 3 4
Incoming Line Switch/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

33.00 (838.2) 1.25 (31.8) 5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) MAIN BUS 36.00 (914.4) 80.00 (2,032.0) 2.00 (50.8) 19.00 (482.6) Top View 6.70 (170.2) 5.50 (139.7) 30.00 (762.0)
1.50 (38.1) PH PH PH MAIN A B C BUS 3.50 (88.9) 12.00 (304.8) 9.32 (236.7)
4.50 (114.3)
36.00 (914.4)
34.00 GND BUS 1.45 (36.8) Note F
28.00 30.00 (711.2) (762.0) 1.00 (25.4)
Unit 2B
Unit 3B
5
Unit 3C
1.00 (25.4) 27.00 (685.8)

Floor Plan Note D
6
Unit 1D
4.50 (114.3)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Unit 2D
Unit 3D 2 24.00 (609.6) 3 PH PH PH MAIN A B C BUS 12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9) 1.36 (34.5) 1.18 (30.0) 80.00 (2,032.0) 59.00 (1,498.6) 0.90 (22.9) Line Term 7.75 (196.9) GND 1.45 BUS (36.8) 24.00 (609.6) 2.00 (50.8) 19.00 (482.6) 3.00 NOTE C1 (76.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
5.50 (139.7) 30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4) 96.00 (2,438.4) Shipping Section 1 - 3250 Lbs
5.50 (139.7)
MAIN BUS 6.70 (170.2) 3.00 (76.2) 6.00 (152.4)
36.00 (914.4) Top View 4.50 (114.3) 36.00 (914.4)
34.00 Note F
28.00 30.00 (711.2) (762.0) 1.00 (25.4)
1.00 (25.4) 27.00 (685.8)

Floor Plan Note D 21.00 (533.4) 1.25 (31.8)
22.85 (580.4) 30.00 (762.0) Side View Structure 2 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9) 9.32 (236.7) 2.00 (50.8)
4.50 (114.3)
5.50 (139.7) 6.70 (170.2)
30.00 (762.0)
2.00 (50.8) MAIN BUS 24.00 (609.6) Top View 80.00 (2,032.0) 2.00 (50.8) 24.00 (609.6) 4.50 (114.3) 22.00 (558.8)
5.50 (139.7)
5.81 30.00 (147.6) (762.0) 0.90 (22.9)
19.00 (482.6) GND 1.45 BUS (36.8)
1.00 (25.4)
15.00 (381.0)
28.00 30.00 (711.2) (762.0) 1.00 (25.4)
4.50 (114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Figure 10.1-18. Incoming LBS, Bottom Entry, 600E/750E/1100E/1350E Fused with Metering Section
21
May 2012
Sheet 10 039

Layout Dimensions
10.1-37
Tie Switch LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
i ii 1
10.25 (260.4) 5.27 1.50 (133.9) (38.1)
2
1.25 (31.8)
5.50 (139.7)
3
5.50 (139.7) 30.00 (762.0)
12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9)
8.25 (209.6) 3.00 1.36 (76.2) (34.5)
24.50 (622.3)
4 5 6 7
2.00 (50.8) MAIN BUS

6.70 (170.2)
GND BUS 59.00 (1,498.6) 0.90 (22.9)
1.45 (36.8)
Note C1 1.18 (30.0) 80.00 (2,032.0)
3.00 (76.2) 6.00 (152.4)
36.00 (914.4)
Top View
Unit 1B
1.45 (36.8) 2.00 (50.8) GND BUS 22.85 (580.4) 30.00 (762.0) Side View 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 1 - 1200 lbs.
4.50 (114.3)
9.00 (228.6)
36.00 (914.4)
8 9
28.00 (711.2) 1.00 (25.4)
30.00 (762.0)
Unit 1D
19.50 (495.3)
10 11
1.00 (25.4) 27.00 (685.8)

Floor Plan Note D
4.50 (114.3)
12 13 14
Figure 10.1-19. LBS Tie
15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Arc-Resistant Starter LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

Plenum Ships Separately Duct Ships Separately
Notes: For non-seismic installations, mount a minimum of 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) from wall.
Flap Assy.
Side Covers
80.00 (2032.0) Continuation of Bus from Adjacent Structure Unit 2B 52.25 (1327.2) 30.51 (775.0) Cable Chimney through Plenum 17.75 (450.9) 123.62 (3139.9) 4.00 (101.6) 51.00 50.00 0.75 (1295.4) (1270.0) (19.1) 5.50 TYP (139.7) 52.25 5.50 (1327.2) (139.7) Bolting Flange
16.00 (406.4)
Unit 1D 1 24.00 (609.6)
Unit 2D 2 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 1.70 (43.2)
PH PH PH A B C
MAIN BUS 3.50 (88.9)
Note F
MAIN BUS 6.70 24.00 (170.2) (609.6) Top View
Rear Supports Protrude 1.00" from Rear Please Consider Dimension Before Locating Equipment
Front
Rear Sprt.
24.00 (609.6) 4.50 (114.3) 50.00 (1270.0)
0.90 (22.9)
9 10 11 12 13 14
Low Voltage Control Low Voltage Conduit
1.45 GND BUS (36.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
25.23 (640.8)
42.85 (1078.2) 50.00 (1270.0) 51.00 (1295.4) Side View Structure 1 52.25 (1327.2)
19.82 (503.4)
Note X Note 28.00 30.00 F 10.00 (711.2)(762.0) 1.00 (254.0) (25.4) Note A 15.00 (381.0) 4.50 (114.3)
6.98 (177.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Cable Chimney through Plenum
20.06 (509.5)
1.13 (28.7)
13.60 (345.4) Note B 2.00 (50.8) MAIN BUS Note C1 5.38 (136.7) 36.00 (914.4) Top View
8.68 (220.5) 1.70 (43.2) 1.85 (47.0) PH PH PH A B C Load Term Detail A Note L MAIN BUS 123.62 (3139.9) 3.50 (88.9) 27.39 (695.7) Rear Sprt. Load Term Detail A Note L 1.45 (36.8) 27.39 (695.7) 21.00 (533.4) 80.00 (2032.0) 61.00 (1549.4) 1.24 (31.5)
5.50 (139.7) 5.50 (139.7)
51.00 (1295.4) 52.25 (1327.2) 50.00 Bolting (1270.0) Flange
6.70 (170.2)
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5.81 (147.6) 62.00 (1574.8) 1.85 (47.0)
3.38 (85.9) 1.63 (41.4)
1.45 GND (36.8) BUS
36.00 (914.4) 22.09 (561.1) 50.00 51.00 (1270.0) (1295.4) At Floor Level
22.00 (558.8)
4.63 (117.6) 9.25 (235.0)
4.50 (114.3)
Note B Note A
GND BUS
42.85 (1078.2) 50.00 (1270.0) 51.00 (1295.4) Side View Structure 2
2.50 1.00 (63.5) (25.4)
13.75 (349.3)
2.31 (58.7)
Note X
28.00 (711.2) 30.00 1.00 21.67 (762.0) (25.4) (550.4)
2.00 6.00 (50.8) (152.4)
Note C 3.00 (76.2) 27.00 (685.8) Floor Plan Note D
4.50 (114.3)
Figure 10.1-20. 50 kA Arc-Resistant, 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Incoming Cable Section and Two-High 400A Starter Section
May 2012
Sheet 10 041

Layout Dimensions
10.1-39
Main Breaker AMPGARD LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

11.00 (279.4) 10.00 MAIN (254.0) BUS 11.50 (292.1) PH PH PH C B A Low Voltage Compartment 6.50 (165.1) Front Front Access Panels Disc SW (if reqd.) 17.00 (431.8) PH A 31.12 (790.4) PH PH MAIN BUS B C 11.50 (292.1) 10.00 (254.0)
i ii 1 2
90.00 (2286.0)
6.50 (165.1)
Low Voltage Wireway 90.00 (2286.0)
Line Termination Mounted on RH Side 1L3 1L2 1L1 GND
Disc SW (if reqd.) 17.00 (431.8) High Voltage Access Removable Barrier
Incoming Cable Termination
20.64 (524.3) 36.63 (930.4)
6.50 (165.1)
51.20 (1300.5) 39.63 (1006.6)
14.87 (377.7) 51.20 (1300.5) Customer Terminal Block
3
Main Breaker Compartment 3.00 (76.2) GND BUS 24.62 (625.3) 60.00 (1524.0) Righthand Side View Main Breaker Compartment
Customer 29.55 Terminal (750.6) Block Low Voltage Wireway GND BUS 24.62 (625.3) 60.00 (1524.0) 3.00 (76.2)
4 5 6 7
5.50 (139.7) 30.00 (762.0) 5.50 (139.7) 6.70 (170.2)
Unit 1B
26.00 (660.4) Front View Incoming Cable Termination Compartment
Unit 1C
Unit 2C Unit 4B
Lefthand Side View Incoming Cable Termination Compartment
52
26.00 (660.4) 6.00 (152.4) 1.63 (41.4) Note G PH C PH B PH A MAIN BUS 11.88 (301.8) 14.00 (355.6) HV Conduit Area 22.00 (558.8)
36.00 (914.4)
1.50 (38.1)
13.50 (342.9)
1.25 (1.8)
1.50 (38.1) Unit 1F 1 26.00 (660.4) Unit 2F 2 36.00 (914.4) 3 Unit 4D 4 36.00 (914.4) 4.00 (101.6) 102.00 (2590.8) Shipping Section 1 7900 lbs. 6.25 (158.8)
9.32 (236.7) 3.00 (76.2) 31.12 (790.4) 4.63 (117.6) 2.00 (50.8) Note C1 3.00 (76.2) 1.18 (30.0)
Note T
3.00 (76.2)
8 9 10
2.00 (50.8) MAIN BUS
60.00 (1524.0) 1.36 (34.5)
6.00 (152.4) 36.00 (914.4) Top View
Vented Compartment 30.00 (762.0) 2.00 (50.8)
11.00 (279.4)
3.00 (76.2) Front
Top View
PH PH PH MAIN A B C BUS Low Voltage Control 1.85 (47.0) Load Term Detail A Note L
12.00 (304.8)
11
80.00 (2032.0)
3.50 (88.9) 7.39 (187.7)
5.00 (127.0) 6.00 (152.4)
26.00 (660.4) 16.00 (660.4)
36.00 (914.4) 26.00 (660.4) 5.00 (127.0) 62.00 (1574.8) 5.81 (147.6) 1.85 (47.0)
12 13 14 15 16 17
1.45 GND (36.8) BUS
61.00 (1549.4) Load Term Detail A Note L 7.39 (187.7) 21.00 (533.4)
Note A 22.00 (558.8) HV Conduit Area 2.00 (50.8) 57.00 (1447.8)
1.25 (31.8) 22.00 (558.8)
40.00 (1016.0) 60.00 (1,524) 0.56 dia. (TYP) 6.00 (152.4) 4.75 (120.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.25 (31.8) 0.00 (0.00) 0.00 (0.00) 3.00 (76.2) 5.00 (127.0) 2.75 (69.9) 11.25 (285.8)
5.81 (147.6)
1.45 (36.8)
GND BUS LV Conduit Area 26.00 (660.4) Front
22.00 (558.8) 30.00 (762.0) Side View
36.00 (914.4) Aux. Compt. Door (Note D)
Upper Compt. Door (Note D)
2.00 4.63 (50.8) (117.6)
36.00 (914.4) 4.50 (114.3) Note B 9.25 (235.0) 2.31 (58.7) 1.00 (25.4) 21.67 (550.4) Note A
1.00 (25.4)
Floor Plan
Incoming Cable Terminal Adapter 1.00 (25.4)
13.75 (349.3) 6.00 (152.4) Note C 3.00 (76.2) 27.00 (685.8)
30.00 (762.0) 28.00 (711.2)
18 19 20 21
2.00 (50.8)
2.50 (63.5)
4.50 (114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Figure 10.1-21. AMPGARD Main Breaker and Two-High 400A Starter Section
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 042
i ii
Incoming Line/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

21.00 (533.4) 1.50 (38.1) 9.32 (236.7) 3.50 (88.9) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) MAIN BUS 6.70 (170.2) 1.25 (31.6)
12.00 (304.8)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Unit 1B 30.00 (762) 5.81 (147.6) 0.90 (22.9) 1.45 GND (36.8) BUS 80.00 (2032.0)
5.50 (139.7)
30.00 (762.0)
5.50 (139.7)
24.00 (609.6) Top View
2.00 (50.8)
24.00 (609.6) 4.50 (114.3)
19.00 (482.6)
22.00 (558.8)
28.00 (711.2) 30.00 1.00 (762.0) (25.4)
1.00 (25.4) 15.00 (381.0)
8 9 10
Unit 1D Un it 2D 2 24.00 (609.6) Unit 1C
4.50 (114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
Continuation of Bus From Adjacent Structure
1.25 (31.8)
11.50 (292.1)
1.50 (38.1)
12.00 (304.8)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1 24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0) 5.50 (139.7) 5.50 (139.7) 6.70 (170.9) Note F 27.50 (698.5)
48.00 (1219.2) Shipping Section 1 - 850 lbs.
3.50 (88.9)
MAIN BUS 24.00 (609.6) Top View 80.00 (2032.0) 0.90 (22.9) 62.00 (1574.8) 2.00 (50.8) 24.00 (609.6) 4.50 (114.3)
Note F GND BUS 1.45 (36.8) 19.00 (482.6) 22.00 (558.8) 1.00 (25.4) Note A 28.00 (711.2) 1.00 (25.4) 30.00 (762.0)
15.00 (381) Floor Plan Note D
4.50 (114.3)
Figure 10.1-22. 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Incoming Cable Section with 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Metering Section (for Right End of Lineup)
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 043
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives

General Description
10.2-1
AMPGARD SC 9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive

Personnel safety: Positive mechanical isolating switch with visible disconnect completely grounds and isolates the AFD from the line power with a mechanically driven isolating shutter, leaving no exposed high voltage. Medium voltage door is mechanically key locked closed with the isolation switch; low voltage section has a separate door and is segregated from the medium voltage section. Ease of installation: Current limiting fuses, contactor assembly, inverter assembly, and isolating switch assembly are easily removed from the enclosure; line and load terminals are completely accessible from the front. Ease of maintenance: All components are front accessible, facilitating routine inspection and/or parts replacement. The low Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) means a time and cost savings. Smallest industry footprint: The SC 9000s specialized design and high density packaging makes it the smallest footprint per hp in the industry as a fully integrated drive. This size benet ensures installations in space limited electrical rooms, eliminates the need for additional cable and conduit installations, and in some cases, eliminates the need for additional feeders required by our competitors.
Clean and quiet: The SC 9000s integrated 24-pulse converter coupled to a 3-level inverter topology results in minimum component usage and ensures compliance with IEEE 519 no matter what the power source is. Heat pipe technology improves cooling efciency and allows the SC 9000 to run at a 75 dB noise level or less, making it the quietest drive in the industry. Output lters are required for non-inverter duty motors with cable lengths greater than 100 feet and for inverter duty motors with cable lengths greater than 300 feet. See Table 10.2-2 on Page 10.2-22 for detailed output lter application recommendations. Noise pollution is minimized with the quiet operation. Easy AMPGARD integration: Available as a fully integrated drive, the SC 9000 can be supplied as a stand-alone drive or directly connected to other AMPGARD products in a conguration known as Integrated Control-Gear. This integrated solution aligns the SC 9000 with a host of other motor control products, such as motor starters, load break switches and main breakers all connected via a common bus. Protection through technology: The encapsulated roll-out inverter employs an insulation system, which reduces the potential of environmental contamination. This modular inverter design coupled with a spare inverter option reduces MTTR and results in maximum uptime.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AMPGARD SC 9000
General Description
Eatons AMPGARD SC 9000 medium voltage adjustable frequency drive (AFD) family provides precise control and protection of medium voltage motors and equipment rated 2400V, 3300V and 4160V nominal.
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD has a complete offering: Precise control of medium voltage motors up to 6000 hp A smaller footprint, 24-pulse front end, and integrated assembly direct coupled through a common power bus to the entire AMPGARD product family as Integrated Control-Gear Fully integrated package with isolation switch, main contactor, multi-pulse isolation transformer, rectier and inverter
CA08104001E
10.2-2 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives

Frame Size and Rating
May 2012
Sheet 10 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame A AFD (3001150 hp at 4160V) (300700 hp at 3300V) (300500 hp at 2400V)
Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch Top Entry Control Conduit Area
Top Entry HV Conduit Area
Line and Load Cable Termination Type SL Vacuum Contactor Assembly Encapsulated Roll-Out Inverter (in the Rear) 24-Pulse Rectier Bridge 24-Pulse Isolation Transformer
DC Link Pre-Charge Circuit
Bottom Entry HV Conduit Area
Bottom Entry Control Conduit Area
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 045

Layout Dimensions
10.2-3
Layout DimensionsFrame A AFD (3001150 hp at 4160V) (300700 hp at 3300V) (300500 hp at 2400V)

Main Bus 2.00 (50.8) 27.27 (692.7) F 5.00 (127.0) 1.60 (40.6) E 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) Line Terminals Pullbox 2.00 (50.8) E 23.33 (592.6) 50.00 (1270.0) 36.38 (924.1)
i ii
Detail Notes: A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade. D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. G - LV conduit space only. J - Load terminals located on left-hand side of enclosure. Y - Tolerances: 0.0 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
1 2 3 4 5
5.50 (139.7 7.00 (177.8) G
65.00 (1651.0) Top View Optional Redundant Blower
Recommend 24.00 Inch 24.00 (609.6 mm) Clearance (609.6) for Blower Removal
Optional Redundant Blower 18.50 (469.9)

6 7 8 9
80.00 (2032.0
K2
User Interface
12.00 (304.8)
MP4000
K1
Window
Low Voltage Control
9.00 (228.6) 1.85 (47.0)
Line Term Note J U V W
3.50 (88.9)
K1 K2 K3
1 3
2 4 5 CTB
6.00 (152.4) Line Term Note J L1
4.13 (104.9) 0.90 (22.9) 62.00 (1574.8)
10 11 12 13
Unit 1D
Elevation View
1 65.00 (1651.0) Shipping Section 2 Approx. Weight 6225 lbs (2826 kg) 59.00 (1498.6) 29.50 (749.3) Note A 21.81 (554.0) 5.00 (127.0) F E 1.50 (38.1) 32.50 (825.5) Front 1.38 (35.1) 2.80 (71.1) G 4.00 (101.6) 2.69 (68.3)
12.81 7.50 (190.5) 62.00 (325.4) L2 (1574.8) 2.50 L3 7.50 (190.5) (63.5) 3.25 2.50 (82.6) 16.90 (63.5) (429.3) Ground Bus 22.49 (571.2)
49.00 (1244.6) Right Side View
Main Bus End 1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph 38.63 (981.2) 0.75 (19.1) 1.50 3.00 (38.1) (76.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 4.00 (63.5) (101.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.25 (6.4)
Main Bus End 1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 4.00 (63.5) (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.25 (6.4)
14 15 16 17 18
0.25 (6.4)
29.80 (756.9) 2.38 (60.5) 7.00 (177.8)
12.75 (323.9)
43.63 (1108.2)
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from Each Side of the Structure 0.562 Dia. Hole
C L
32.50 (825.5) 60.00 (1524.0) 59.00 (1498.6) Floor Plan Note D
0.50 (12.7) 2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
29.30 (744.2)
0.75 (19.1) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot
0.25 (6.4)
0.63 (16.0)
19 20 21
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm) Clear in Front of Drive Unit for Removal of Drive Inverter
Figure 10.2-1. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame A Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

May 2012
Sheet 10 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame B AFD (10002000 hp at 4160V) (8001500 hp at 3300V) (6001000 hp at 2400V)
Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses Top Entry HV Conduit Area Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch Top Entry Control Conduit Area
Line and Load Cable Termination Type SL Vacuum Contactor Assembly DC Link Pre-Charge Circuit
24-Pulse Isolation Transformer (in the rear)
Encapsulated Roll-Out Inverter
24-Pulse Rectier Bridge
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 047

Layout Dimensions
10.2-5
Layout DimensionsFrame B AFD (10002000 hp at 4160V) (8001500 hp at 3300V) (6001000 hp at 2400V)

Main Bus 28.50 (723.9) 2.00 (50.8) 15.50 (393.7) F 1.25 (31.8)
Redundant Blowers 2.00 (50.8)
i ii
Main Bus Main Bus 12.27 (311.7) 2.00 2.00 (50.8) (50.8) 12.27 (311.7) 5.50 31.88 (139.7) (809.8)
E
1 2
50.00 (1270.0)
12.27 (311.7)
2.00 2.00 (50.8) (50.8)
5.00 (127.0)
65.00 (1651.0) Top View
39.27 (997.5) 5.50 50.00 (139.7) (1270.0) 7.00 G (177.8) 1.25 (31.8)
2.80 (71.1) 5.50 50.00 (139.7) (1270.0) 12.00 (304.8)
3 4
6.00 (152.4)
30.00 (762.0) Top View

PH A PH PH Main B C Bus
36.00 (914.4) Optional Top View 12.00 (304.8)
Optional Redundant Blowers
5 6
K2
K3
Low Voltage Control
1.85 (47.0)
Load Term Note J

U V W
MP4000
K1
7
3.50 (88.9)
WINDOW K1 K2 K3
Inverter
1 3 2 4 8
4.38 (111.3) 4.38 (111.3) 12.00 (304.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 2.86 (72.6) 80.00 (2032.0) Recommend 24.00 Inch (609.6 mm) Clearance for Blower Removal
Converter Unit 1D
4.13 (104.9)
CTB
Approx. 120.00 Inches (3048.0 mm) Tall Redundant 24.00 Blowers (609.6)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Unit 2D 64.80 (1645.9)
0.90 (22.9)
12.20 (309.9) 19.90 (505.5)
1 65.00 (1651.0) Shipping Section 1 Approx. Weight 8025 lbs (3643 kg)
2 30.00 (762.0) Shipping Section 2 Approx. Weight 900 lbs (409 kg)
Ground Bus
49.00 (1244.6)
22.49 (571.2) 50.00 (1270.0)
3.50 (88.9)
Right Side View 59.00 (1498.6) 2.40 (61.0) 4.75 (120.7) 44.20 (1122.7) 2.50 (63.5) F 7.00 (177.8) 3.00 (76.2) E 33.50 (850.9) 4.75 Front (120.7) 33.50 (850.9) G 7.00 (177.8) 2.50 (63.5) 25.00 (635.0)
Front Note A
36.80 (934.7)
38.30 (972.8)
3.50 (88.9) 43.00 (1092.2)
Note A
3.50 (88.9) 43.00 (1092.2)
Note A Optional With Redundant Blowers
30.00 (762.0) 2.80 (71.1)
1.58 (40.1)
6.00 (152.4) E 31.00 (787.4)
12.00 (304.8)
30.00 (762.0)
2.50 (63.5)
36.00 (914.4)
Front
Floor Plan Note D
Floor Plan Note D
60.00 (1524.0)
Floor Plan Note D
60.00 (1524.0)
Optional With Redundant Blowers 60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm) Clear in Front of Drive Unit for Removal of Drive Inverter 60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm) Clear in Front of Drive Unit for Removal of Drive Inverter
Detail Notes: A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade. D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. . G - LV conduit space only. J - 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) inverter load terminals located on left side of converter. 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) inverter load terminals located on right side of inverter. Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
Main Bus End 1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) 1.50 3.00 (38.1) (76.2) 0.437 x 0.688 0.75 (19.1) Slot 0.25 (6.4)
Main Bus End 1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 4.00 (63.5) (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 0.25 (6.4)
Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 4.00 (63.5) (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 0.25 (6.4) 0.50 (12.7)
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from Each Side of the Structure 0.562 Dia. Hole 0.63 (16.0) 0.50 (12.7)
C L
2.00 (50.8) 0.25 (6.4)
20 21
Figure 10.2-2. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame B Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet 10 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame C AFD (22503000 hp at 4160V) (17502000 hp at 3300V) (12501750 hp at 2400V)
Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses Top Entry HV Conduit Area Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch Top Entry Control Conduit Area DC Link Pre-Charge Circuit
Line and Load Cable Termination
Type SL Vacuum Contactor Assembly
24-Pulse Isolation Transformer
Note: See Page 10.2-7 for dimensional details.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 049

Layout Dimensions
10.2-7
Layout DimensionsFrame C AFD (22503000 hp at 4160V) (17502000 hp at 3300V) (12501750 hp at 2400V)

2.75 (69.9) 16.00 (406.4) 29.25 (743.0) 16.00 (406.4) Main Bus 2.00 (50.8) F 7.00 (177.8) E 50.00 (1270.0) 5.50 (139.7) 5.00 (127.0) 50.00 (1270.0) F E 5.75 (146.1) 36.00 (914.4) Top View 2.38 (60.5) 3.70 (94.0)
7.00 (177.8)
i ii 1
Main Bus 2.00 (50.8) 12.27 (311.7) 31.88 (809.8) 5.50 (139.7) 12.00 (304.8) E 6.00 (152.4) 50.00 (1270.0)
2 3 4
7.00 (177.8)
26.70 (678.2) G 3.70 (94.0)
12.23 (310.6) 65.00 (1651.0) Top View
30.00 (762.0) Optional 36.00 (914.4) Top View Main Bus End 1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph
5 6
Recommend 24.00 (609.6) Clearance 24.00 for Blower Removal (609.6)
Redundant Blowers 18.50 (469.9)

0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 1.50 (38.1) 0.25 (6.4)
7 8 9
K2 WINDOW K1
K3
K4
WINDOW
Inverter
1 2 4 5
Low Voltage Control
1.85 (47.0)
Main Bus End 1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5) 0.25 (6.4)
Main Disconnect Unit 1D
K1 K2 K3 K4 CTB1
80.00 (2032.0)
CTB
Unit 2D
Converter
Unit 3D
0.90 (22.9) 2.86 (72.6)
10 11
1 Shipping Section 1 36.00 (914.4) Approx. Weight 1550 lbs (704 kg)
1 Shipping Section 2 65.00 (1651.0) Approx. Weight 9800 lbs (4449 kg)
2 Shipping Section 3 30.00 (762.0) Optional 36.00 (914.4) Approx. Weight 900 lbs (409 kg)
Ground Bus
22.49 (571.2) 50.00 (1270.0) Right Side View 2.50 (63.5) Note A 43.00 (1092.2) 6.00 (152.4) Front 3.00 (76.2) 25.00 (635.0) 30.00 (762.0) Optional 36.00 (914.4) E 2.80 (71.1) 12.00 (304.8)
Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5)
0.50 (12.7) 0.25 (6.4)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
3.50 (88.9) 2.75 (69.9) 16.00 (406.4) 29.25 (743.0) 16.00 (406.4) Note A F 7.00 (177.8) E 29.00 (736.6) Front 36.00 (914.4) 4.00 (101.6) 43.00 (1092.2) 35.00 (889.0)
3.50 (88.9) Note A 59.00 (1498.6) 3.00 (76.2) 2.50 (63.5) 5.00 (127.0) Front 8.00 32.50 (203.2) (825.5) G 32.50 9.50 (825.5) (241.3)
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches from Each Side of the Structure 0.50 (12.7) 0.562 Dia. Hole C
L
0.63 (16.0) 7.00 (177.8)
5.75 (146.1)
2.00 (50.8)
0.25 (6.4)
60.00 Floor Plan (1524.0) Note D 60.00 Inches Detail Notes: (1524.0 mm) A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend Clear in a maximum of 2.00 inches: (50.8 mm) above grade. Front of Unit D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, for Removal 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, of Inverter 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure. 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. G - LV conduit space only. J - Load terminals located on right side of inverter. Optionload terminals located on left side of converter. Y - Tolerances: 0.0 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
Figure 10.2-3. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame C Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

May 2012
Sheet 10 050
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame D AFD (Single Inverter) (20002500 hp at 2400V)
Top Entry Control Conduit Area Top Entry HV Conduit Area Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch DC Link Pre-charge Circuit
Top Load Conduit Area
Load Cable Termination
Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses
Type SL Vacuum Contactor Assembly
Bottom Load Conduit Area
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 051

Layout Dimensions
10.2-9
Layout DimensionsFrame D AFD (Single Inverter) (20002500 hp at 2400V)

Main Bus 2.00 (50.8) 41.42 (1052.1) 2.00 (50.8) 12.32 (312.9) 50.00 (1270.0) 6.19 (157.2) 76.00 (1930.4)
G
i
2.00 (50.8) Main Bus 12.32 50.00 (312.9) (1270.0) 5.50 (139.7) 40.75 1.38 (1035.1) (35.1) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 12.32 (312.9) 5.50 (139.7) 12.00 (304.8) 36.00 (914.4) Main Bus End 1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1)
E
ii
31.88 (809.8) 50.00 (1270.0)
2.00 (50.8)
1 2 3 4
5.50 6.00 (152.4) (139.7) 5.00 (127.0)
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
36.00 (914.4)
3.00 (76.2)
Recommend 24.00 Inch (609.6 mm) Clearance For Blower Removal
3.00 (76.2) 24.00 (609.6)

PH A PH B PH MAIN C BUS
0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9)
1.50 (38.1)
0.25 (6.4)
5 6 7
WINDOW
1.85 (47.0)
7
1
K11 K12 K13 K14 K44
2 4 8
Inverter
Low Voltage Control
K12
K13
K14
CTB2
CTB
K11
CTB1
Isolation Transformer and Converter Unit 2D
0.90 (22.9)
UNIT 3D
80.00 (2032.0)
Main Disconnect Unit 1D 1 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 1 40.00 (1016.0) Approx. Wt. 2560 lbs (1162 kg) 2 76.00 (1930.4) Shipping Section 2 76.00 (1930.4) Approx. Wt. 16,500 lbs (7491 kg) 3 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 3 36.00 (914.4) Approx. Wt. 3775 lbs (1714 kg)
Ground Bus 2.86 (72.6) 38.25 (971.6) 49.00 (1244.6) 50.00 (1270.0) Right Side View
Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5) 0.25 (6.4) 0.50 (12.7)
8 9 10 11 12 13
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from Each Side of the structure 0.562 Dia. Hole 0.63 (16.0) 30.00 (762.0) 0.50 (12.7)
C L
5.00 29.00 (127.0) (736.6) Note A 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 23.00 F 41.33 (584.2) 14.00 7.00 (1049.8) (355.6) 41.38 (177.8) (1051.1) 3.00 19.63 (76.2) (498.6) 3.50 (88.9) Front 6.00 1.50 (152.4) (38.1) 8.88 (225.6) 36.00 (914.4)
13.00 (330.2)
25.00 (635.0) 5.00 (127.0)
25.00 (635.0) Note A 43.25 4.15 (1098.6) (105.4 2.75 (69.9)

G
3.50 (88.9) 6.00 (152.4) 43.00 (1092.2) 2.80 (71.1) Front 31.00 (787.4) 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm) Clear in Front of Unit for Removal of Inverter
E
2.00 (50.8)
0.25 (6.4)
39.00 Front (990.6)
44.00 (1117.6)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50.00 (1270.0)
3.00 (76.2)
12.00 (304.8)
38.00 (965.2)
38.00 (965.2)
1.85 (47.0)
Detail Notes: A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade. D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. G - LV conduit space only. J - Load terminals located on right-hand side of enclosure. Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
Figure 10.2-4. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame D (Single Inverter) Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

May 2012
Sheet 10 052
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame D AFD (Parallel Inverters) (32504500 hp at 4160V) (22503000 hp at 3300V)
Top Entry Control Conduit Area Secondary Blower DC Link Pre-Charge Circuit Balancing Reactor Top Load Conduit Area
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch
Load Cable Termination Type HLE Current Limiting Fuses Type SL Vacuum Contactor Assembly
Dual Encapsulated Roll-Out Inverters
Bottom Load Conduit Area
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 053

Layout Dimensions
10.2-11
Layout DimensionsFrame D AFD (Parallel Inverters) (32504500 hp at 4160V) (22503000 hp at 3300V)

Main Bus 2.00 (50.8) 41.42 (1052.1) 2.00 (50.8) 12.32 (312.9) 50.00 (1270.0) 6.19 (157.2) 76.00 (1930.4)
G
i ii
2.00 (50.8) 12.32 (312.9) 50.00 (1270.0) 2.00 (50.8) 12.32 (312.9) 30.88 5.50 (784.4) (139.7)
E
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
1 2 3 4
5.50 6.00 (152.4) (139.7) 5.00 (127.0)
3.00 (76.2)
5.50 (139.7) 40.75 1.38 (1035.1) (35.1) 3.00 (76.2) 86.00 (2184.4)
7.00 (177.8) 2.11 (53.6)
14.00 50.00 (355.6) (1270.0)
36.00 (914.4) Optional Redundant Blowers
Recommend 24.00 Inch (609.6 mm) Clearance 24.00 for Blower Removal (609.6)
K12 K13 K14 K15 K44 K15 K16 K17
7
20.50 (520.7) 12.00 (304.8)

U V W
12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Low Voltage Control
WINDOW
1.85 (47.0)
3.50 (88.9)
30.36 (771.1)
2 4 8
K11 K12 K13 K14 K44
CTB2
CTB
K11
CTB1
Main Disconnect
Isolation Transformer and Converter Unit 2D
Inverter-1 Unit 3D
Inverter-2
0.90 (22.9)
80.00 (2032.0) 0.90 (22.9)
4.38 (111.3) Load Term Note J 68.00 (1727.2) Ground 3.26 (82.8) Bus 22.75 (577.9) 49.00 (1244.6) 50.00 (1270.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
Unit 1D 1 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 1 40.00 (1016.0) Approx. Weight 2560 lbs (1162 kg) 3.50 (88.9)
Ground Bus 5.00 (127.0) 38.25 (971.6) 49.00 (1244.6) 50.00 (1270.0) Right Side View
2 76.00 (1930.4) Shipping Section 2 76.00 (1930.4) Approx. Weight 16,500 lbs (7491 kg)
3 86.00 (2184.4) Shipping Section 3 86.00 (2184.4) Approx. Weight 6800 lbs (3087 kg) 13.00 (330.2)
29.00 (736.6)
5.00 (127.0) 12.00 (304.8) 14.00 (355.6)
25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
31.13 (790.7)
48.12 (1222.2)
15.50 (393.7)
5.00 (127.0)
41.38 (1051.1)
Note A 18.00 23.00 (457.2) F (584.2) 19.63 (498.6) Front 36.00 (914.4)
41.33 (1049.8)
3.00 (76.2) 6.00 (152.4) 1.50 (38.1) 8.88 (225.6)
7.00 (177.8)
43.25 5.00 Note A 4.15 (1098.6) (127.0) 44.00 (105.4) 39.00 Front (1117.6) 50.00 (990.6) 2.75 (1270.0) (69.9) 3.00 (76.2)
G
Note A
5.00 (127.0) Front
3.00 (76.2) 32.50 (825.5)
3.00 31.00 39.00 (76.2) (787.4) (990.6) 2.63 (66.8) 2.00 14.00 (50.8) E (355.6) 42.50 6.75 (1079.5) (171.5)
38.00 (965.2)
38.00 (965.2)
1.85 (47.0)
Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches from Each Side of the Structure 0.562 Dia. Hole 0.63 (16.0) 0.50 (12.7)
C L
0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5)
0.50 (12.7) 0.25 (6.4)
Detail Notes: A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade. D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. G - LV conduit space only. J - Load terminals located on right-hand side of enclosure. Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
16 17 18 19 20 21
2.00 (50.8)
0.25 (6.4)
Figure 10.2-5. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame D (Parallel Inverters) Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

Frame Size and RatingLayout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 054
i ii 1 2 3 4
Layout DimensionsFrame E AFD (50006000 hp at 4160V) (32504000 hp at 3300V)

Recommend 24.00 Inch (609.6 mm) Clearance for Blower Removal Typical T All Units Redundant Blowers 24.00 (609.6)
K2
K3
K4
K5
K33 K4 K6
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CTB1
1
Window
2 4 8
92.00 (2336.8) All Units 80.00 (2032.0) All Units
K1 K3
K1 CTB2
Isolation Transformer and Converter
CTB
Inverter-1
Inverter-2
Main Disconnect Unit 1D 1 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 1 Approx. Weight (2560 lbs) 2 100.00 (2540.0) Shipping Section 2 Approx. Weight (19,500 lbs) 3 86.00 (2184.4) Shipping Section 3 Approx. Weight (6800 lbs)
Figure 10.2-6. AMPGARD Frame EDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 10.2-1. AMPGARD Frame EDimensions in Inches (mm)
Output Voltage 3300 4160
Motor FLA 520640 620713 hp 32504000 50006000
Cabinet Size Width 222.00 (5638.8) 222.00 (5638.8) Height 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) Depth 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0)
Redundant Blower Height 12.10 (307.3) 12.10 (307.3)
3300V, 50 Hz.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 055
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage 10.2-13 Adjustable Frequency Drives Synchronous Transfer Systems
General Description
Synchronous Transfer Control with AMPGARD SC 9000
If the PLC receives a command to sync down, the PLC will start the AFD and close the motor select contactor; however, the AFD output contactor does not close initially. See Figure 10.2-11.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
i ii 1 2
AFD Bus
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 10.2-11. PLC Receives Command to Sync Down

Synchronous Transfer Control System
General Description
The sequence of operation outlined is of an Adjustable Frequency Drive/Programmable Logic Controller (AFD/PLC) synchronous transfer control system. Included in this system is an AFD per system, a PLC per system, a bypass contactor and a motor select contactor per motor. The AFD output contactor feeding the AFD bus is an option and is illustrated for this example.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
The AFD output will adjust to match the utility voltage, frequency and phase. Once these parameters are locked in, the AFD output contactor will close and the bypass contactor will open such that paralleling is minimized. The output reactor will dampen transient currents. See Figure 10.2-12.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-8. Synchronous Transfer Process When the motor is required to transfer to the utility line, the PLC will send the Sync Up command to the AFD. The AFD will adjust the output to match the line voltage, frequency and phase angle. Once synchronization is locked, the bypass and motor select contactor are closed and opened such that paralleling is minimized. The output reactor dampens transient currents. See Figure 10.2-9.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
The basic principle is to adjust the AFD output voltage, frequency and phase to match the utility. By matching these parameters, the system can transfer the motor to the utility in a bump-less manner. The AFD and PLC system is programmed to follow these general commands.

AFD Bus
10 11 12 13 14
Figure 10.2-12. AFD Adjusts to Match the Utility Voltage, Frequency and Phase The AFD will operate at a set speed point or follow a reference speed. See Figure 10.2-13.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
Start/Stop Sync Up/Sync Down
Once the system bus is energized, the AFD and Feeder Bus are energized. See Figure 10.2-7.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line AFD Bus AFD Bus
15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 10.2-9. Voltage, Frequency and Phase Angle Synchronization The AFD is shut down and waits for another Start command for the next motor. The rst motor is running on bypass. See Figure 10.2-10.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
Figure 10.2-13. AFD Operating Speed These sequences can be commanded for any of the motors (15) illustrated and are not limited to just ve motors in a system; however, only one motor at a time can be on the AFD. Each system can be congured to start any number of motors, keeping in mind equipment size and layout.
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-7. AFD and Feeder Bus Energized The Start command will start the synchronous transfer process. First the PLC will close the appropriate motor select contactor and then start the AFD. The AFD will operate at a preset speed or a reference speed. See Figure 10.2-8.
AFD Bus
Figure 10.2-10. AFD Shut Down and Waiting

21
10.2-14 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Synchronous Transfer Systems
Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 056
i ii 1
Layout DimensionsSynchronous Transfer Systems

VFD Bus Main Bus
K2
K3
K4
2 3
SC 9000
CTB
Inverter
Output Filter Unit 5B Unit 6B

Door
Unit 7B
Door
A3 Motor Bypass Door Unit 8B
A4 Motor Bypass Door Unit 9B
Unit 10B
Door
4 5 6 7 8 9
Converter Inverter 1
Unit 2D
Unit 3D
K5
Drive Output 2 3 4 5 6
Trip PB Mech Unlatch
A3 Motor Select Unit 7D 7

Mech Unlatch
A4 Motor Select 9
Mech Unlatch
Mech Unlatch
10
Trip PB Mech Unlatch
4.00 (101.6) 65.00 (1651.0) 65.00 (1651.0) Shipping Section 1 Approx. Weight (9325 lbs) 36.00 (914.4) 76.00 (1930.4) Shipping Section 2 Approx. Weight (4725 lbs) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) Shipping Section 3 Approx. Weight (3600 lbs) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) Shipping Section 4 Approx. Weight (4700 lbs) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) Shipping Section 5 Approx. Weight (4700 lbs) 36.00 (914.4)
Output Filter BP Unit 6B Unit 7B Unit 8B Unit 9B Unit 10B
10
24 Pulse XFMR
11
D Unit 1D Unit 2D Unit 3D Unit 5D Unit 6D MS Unit 7D MS Unit 8D MS Unit 9D MS Unit 10D MS
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 10.2-14. AMPGARD SC 9000 Synchronous Transfer System with Five MV Starters (For Reference Only)
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 057
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives 15 kV Input Voltage

Layout Dimensions
10.2-15
Layout Dimensions15 kV Input Voltage

Redundant Blowers Recommend 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) Clearance for Blower Removal TypicalAll Units 24.00 (609.6)
i ii 1 2
K2 K3 K5 K6
MP4000
K1
1 2
Window
K4 K5 K6
3 4 5
1 3
2 4 8
K1 K2 K3 K4
CTB2 Isolation Transformer Converter Unit 3D
CTB Inverter-1 Unit 4D Inverter-2
Incoming Line Unit 1D
Contactor Unit 2D
6 7
1 36.00 (914.4)
2 36.00 (914.4)
3 100.00 (2540.0) Shipping Section 2 Approx. Weight (17,925 lbs)
4 86.00 (2184.4) Shipping Section 3 Approx. Weight (6800 lbs) Detail Notes: A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade. D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure. 32.50 inches (82.6 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. G - LV conduit space only. J - Load terminals located on right side of inverter. Optionload terminals located on left side of converter. Y - Tolerances: 0.0 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.4 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
72.00 (1828.8) Shipping Section 1 Approx. Weight (4500 lbs) Main Bus End 1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) 1.50 (38.1) 3.00 (76.2) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 0.25 (6.4) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1)
Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 0.50 (12.7)
Main Bus End 1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5) 4.00 (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 Slot 0.75 (19.1) 0.25 (6.4)
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from Each Side of the Structure 0.50 (12.7)
Kirk Key Interlock

Description K1 Drive must be off. Main contactor must be open, ISW must be open to release K1. K1 is released when K2, K3, K4 are returned to transfer block. Can only be released by K1. K2, K3 are used to open the converter doors on Unit 7D. Can only be released by K1. K4 is used to open the second transfer block on Unit 8D. Can only be released by K4. K5, K6 are used to open the inverter doors on Unit 8D.
0.562 Dia. Hole

C L
0.63 (16.0)
2.00 (50.8)
0.25 (6.4)
K2, K3 K4 K5, K6
Figure 10.2-15. AMPGARD SC 9000 Frame D 4160V with High Voltage Input
Adjustable Frequency Drives With High Voltage Input

The fully integrated AMPGARD SC 9000 can be designed to receive input voltages from 2.4 to 13.8 kV, with output voltages of 2400V, 3300V and 4160V, with 50 or 60 Hz available. Voltages above 6.9 kV will require an
CA08104001E
19 20 21
additional 72-inch (1828.8 mm) wide structure to accommodate a 95 kV BIL incoming line and a 15 kV input contactor. Please consult the factory for drive dimensions and incoming line section requirements.
10.2-16 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Integrated VCPW Main Breaker
Layout Dimensions
May 2012
Sheet 10 058
i ii 1 2 3 4
Layout DimensionsIntegrated VCPW Main Breaker

Top View
61.12 (1552.4)
Note: See Page 10.1-25 for details.
Frame B SC 9000 Medium Voltage Drive Main Breaker, Output Contactor with Bypass Elevation View
5
1 2
Cs Sw Fp4000
6
Unit 1B
MP3000
Window Unit 2B Window

Local Reset Remote Fault
1
Start Stop
2 4
7
Unit 1C
Loc/rem
Enter
3 5
Unit 2C
Converter
1 3
2 4 8
Inverter
Unit 7D
8 9
Spacer Unit 4D
Ctb Unit 5D
1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
60.00 (1524.0) Floor Plan
Main Breaker
Unit 1F
1
Spacer
4
Unit 2F
2
Unit 7D
7
26.00 (660.4)
36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 2 66.00 (1676.4)
4.00 (101.6) 65.00 (1651.0) Shipping Section 2 65.00 (1651.0) Approx. Weight 8025 lbs (3643 kg) 30.00 (762.0) Shipping Section 3 30.00 (762.0) Approx. Weight 900 lbs (409 kg)
4.00 (101.6) 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 3 40.00 (1016.0) Approx. Weight 1800 lbs (817 kg)
Approx. Weight 8025 lbs (3643 kg)
30.00 (762.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
201.00 (5105.4) Overall
Note: See Page 10.1-15 and Page 10.1-26 for details.
Figure 10.2-16. AMPGARD Integrated Control-Gear with Main Breaker Dimensions(See Page 10.1-6 for Information on Main Bus. Refer to Eaton for Larger hp Layouts and Detailed Assembly Dimensions.)
Note: For exact conduit locations and descriptions, please see Page 10.2-5.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 059
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data

Technical Data
10.2-17
Typical Schematic
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 10.2-17. Typical Schematic for AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD

21
10.2-18 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data
Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 060
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 10.2-18. Typical Schematic for 24-Pulse Transformer, Rectier and Inverter
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 061
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage 10.2-19 Adjustable Frequency Drives Personnel Safety Features
General Description
Personnel Safety Features

Interlocks
Interlocking on AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD includes: Isolating switch mechanism locks the medium voltage door closed when the switch is in the ON position Standard key interlocks on all medium voltage doors When door is open, interlock prevents operating handle from being moved inadvertently to ON position When contactor is energized, isolating switch cannot be opened or closed
i ii 1 2 3
Isolation Switch Operating Shaft
4 5
Additional Safety Features

Provision for a padlock on the isolating switch handle in OFF position Shutter barrier between line terminals and isolation switch stabs is mechanically driven Distinctive marking on back of switch assembly appears when shutter barrier is in position and starter is completely isolated from the line Grounding clips provide a positive grounding of the SC 9000 AFD and main fuses when the isolating switch is opened High and low voltage circuits are compartmentalized and isolated from each other The drawout isolation switch is easily removed by loosening two bolts in the back of the switch. The shutter remains in place when the switch is withdrawn Grounding device is provided for shorting the DC bus to ground before entering the medium voltage compartments See Page 10.1-2 for details on the Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch.
Mechanical Interlock with Contactor
6 7
Isolation Switch Door Locking Mechanism
8 9 10
Removable Cover Allows Access to Bolted Line Side Connections
Shutter Operated by Stab Motion when Isolation Switch is in Position
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Distinctive Marking when Shutter is in Closed Position
Motion of Shutter
19 20 21
Shutter Mechanism and Finger Barrier Isolation of Incoming Line Bus (Shown with Removable Portion of Isolation Switch Removed)
CA08104001E
10.2-20 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Component Details
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 10 062
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Modular Roll-in/Roll-out Stab-in Three-Phase Inverter
This method of heat removal from the inverter is up to 10 times more efcient than traditional air-cooling methods, resulting in less required airow for quieter and more efcient operation. The thermal management system has been subjected to temperatures of 50C to model cold weather transport without the rupture of any heat pipes. It is also important to note that thermal management performance was unaffected by the extreme cold storage.
In the event of a failure, the modular roll-in/roll-out design of the inverter will minimize downtime. In traditional medium voltage drives, only the device that fails is replaced. This can result in future downtime due to latent failures of other devices that were damaged in the original incident. The SC 9000 uses an inverter replacement system that minimizes mean-time-to-repair (MTTR) and is designed exclusively for the purposes of inverter module exchange. The system removes the existing inverter safely and effectively and then allows for the insertion of a replacement inverter that is on-site or shipped from the factory where spare inverters are stocked.
Plug-n-Play 2500 hp Three-Phase Inverter
General Description
The roll-out three-phase inverter module employs an insulation and buswork system to obtain the highest power density rating in the market. Heat pipe technology is used to cool the active power components in the inverter.
Figure 10.2-20. Heat Pipe Construction This cooling methodology and the encapsulation of the medium voltage components result in a harsh-environment inverter that protects the active power devices and circuit boards from the environment and airborne contaminants eliminating potential causes of failures. The encapsulation system also protects other components from ying debris and collateral damage in the event of a device failure.
Inverter Replacement System
Figure 10.2-19. Heat Pipe Thermal Management System
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 063
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Component Details

General Description
10.2-21
Type SL Vacuum Contactor Stab-in with Wheels, Fuses, and Line and Load Fingers
Mechanical Interlock with Isolation Switch
See Page 10.1-4 for detailed information on current limiting fuses. See Page 10.1-21 for detailed information on contactor-fuse coordination.
i ii 1 2 3 4
Isolated Low Voltage Control

The low voltage door has four cutouts as standard.
Control Rack Viewing Window SC 9000 Keypad
Roll-Out Wheels
400A Stab-In Contactor and Fuse Assembly
Self-Aligning Contactor Line and Load Fingers
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1/4 Turn Door Latch Top and Bottom External Motor Protection Relay (optional) Indicating Lights and Pushbuttons
Stab-In Contactor Mechanical Interlock and Fingers
General Description 400A Vacuum Contactors

A stab-in version of the SL Contactor is standard. The stab-in contactor is mounted on wheels and rolls into the AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD structure. Contactor line and load ngers engage cell-mounted stabs as the contactor is inserted into the SC 9000 AFD incoming cell. The contactor is held in position by a bolt and bracket combination. It can be easily withdrawn from the SC 9000 AFD incoming cell by removing the bolt holding the contactor against the bracket and disconnecting the isolation switch interlock. The contactor can be removed from the SC 9000 AFD after disconnecting the medium voltage cables going to the control transformer.

AMPGARD SC 9000 AFDs use Eatons Type HLE power fuses with special time/current characteristics. The fuse is coordinated with the contactor to provide maximum motor/transformer utilization and protection. The standard mounting method for power fuses is bolted onto the contactor assembly. Interruption is accomplished without expulsion of gases, noise or moving parts. Type HLE fuses are mounted in a horizontal position. When a fault has been cleared, a plastic indicator in the front of the fuse, normally depressed, pops up to give visible blown fuse indication. The control circuit primary fuses are also current limiting.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
800A Vacuum Contactors

The 800A SL Contactor is available in the SC 9000 Frame D AFD and is rated at 720A enclosed. The 800A contactor is also stab-in. The 800A contactor is mounted on wheels and has similar features to the stab-in 400A contactor.
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Low Voltage Door Closed
Fuse Fault Indicator
Blown Fuse Indicating Device
The Device Panel and optional Eaton MP Series Motor Protection Relays t in the same size low voltage door cutout. The standard SC 9000 keypad can be removed for plug-in of a laptop via a serial connection. A standard viewing window allows visual verication of the AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD status. The low voltage control panel is behind the low voltage door and is completely isolated from the medium voltage compartment. The medium voltage door is locked closed and interlocked with the isolation switch.
CA08104001E
10.2-22 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Component Details
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 10 064
i ii 1 2 3
Pre-Charge Circuit
SC 9000 Options
Integrated Control-Gear Under One Main Bus Options

Monitoring and Protection Options

4 5
SC 9000 Pre-Charge Circuit
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Unlike other pre-charge methods, the innovative pre-charge circuit in the AMPGARD SC 9000 protects the transformer, rectier and DC bus components from high in-rush currents. The design uses the control power circuit for DC link capacitor charging. This feature eliminates the risk of component or transformer failure during the pre-charge cycle and lengthens the life of the affected components.
AMPGARD main/feeder breaker MEF main/feeder breaker VCPW main/feeder breaker Incoming line section Load break switches Output contactor Full voltage non-reversing contactor bypass Reduced voltage solid-state bypass Reduced voltage autotransformer bypass Reduced voltage primary reactor bypass Full voltage non-reversing contactor additional starters Reduced voltage solid-state additional starters Reduced voltage auto-transformer additional starters Synchronous starters Classic AMPGARD transition
Powerware UPS control power backup (see Tab 33, Section 33.2) Eaton MP-3000 motor protection relay with RTDs (see Tab 4, Section 4.2) Eaton MP-4000 motor protection relay with RTDs (see Tab 4, Section 4.2) Eaton Power Xpert meters (see Tab 3) Eaton EMR-4000 motor protection relays with RTDs Eaton EMR-5000 motor protection relays with RTDs Redundant fans with automatic switchover
Communications Options

Enclosure Options
NEMA 1 Gasketed is standard and the only enclosure option at this time. If an outdoor installation is required, Eaton can supply the AFDs and other electrical equipment in a modular building called an Integrated Power Assembly (see Tab 38).
Johnson Controls N2 Modbus TCP Modbus PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet BACnet CANopen LonWorks EtherNet/IP
Output Filters
Drive output lters are recommended for longer cable lengths between the drive and motor. Table 10.2-2. Recommended Output Filter Application
Motor Type Motor Lead Length (ft) dv/dt Filter Non-inverter duty rated Inverter duty rated Over 100 ft Over 300 ft Sine Filter Over 500 ft Over 1000 ft

UL and CSA Certication
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFDs are designed, assembled and tested to meet all applicable standards: NEMA ICS6, NEMA ICS7, IEEE 519, IEEE 1100, UL 347 and CSA C22.2. The major components (contactor, isolating switch, fuses, transformer and inverter active devices) are UL recognized. UL or CSA labeling of a specic AFD requires review to ensure that all requested modications and auxiliary devices meet the appropriate standards. Refer to factory when specied.
See Page 10.2-23 for dimensional details.
Seismic Qualication
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 065
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage 10.2-23 Adjustable Frequency Drives Optional Output Filters and Reactors
Layout Dimensions
Layout Dimensions
DVDT Filter 2.00 (50.8) 23.80 (604.5) 2.00 (50.8) 12.27 (311.7) 32.47 (824.7) 7.00 (177.8) 50.00 (1270.0) 6.00 (152.4) 36.00 (914.4) Top View 40.00 (1016.0) Top View Sine Filter 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) Detail Notes: A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade. D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure. E - HV conduit space, load. F - HV conduit space, line only. G - LV conduit space only. J - Load terminals located on right-hand side of enclosure. Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure. Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
PH A PH B PH MAIN C BUS
23.33 (592.6) 5.50 (139.7)
31.38 (797.1) 2.74 (69.6) 12.00 (304.8) 5.50 (139.7)
E
2.63 (66.8)
26.67 (677.4)
50.00 (1270.0)
12.00 (304.8) 3.50 (88.9)
K4
K16
Load Term Note J

U V W
6 7
DVDT Filter
Sine Filter
6.75 (171.5)
6
4.38 (111.3)
8
46.88 (1190.8) 80.00 (2032.0)
Contactor/Output Filter Unit 1D
Output Reactor Unit 2D 0.90 (22.9)
9 10
Ground Bus 1 36.00 (914.4) Shipping Section 1 1875 lbs (851 kg) 3.00 (76.2) 2.40 (61.0) 2 40.00 (1016.0) Shipping Section 2 2560 lbs (1162 kg)
1.45 (36.8) 22.85 (580.4) 50.00 (1270.0) Main Bus End 1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1)
11 12 13 14
0.25 (6.4)
49.00 (1244.6)
Main Bus End 1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph 0.75 (19.1) Note A
Note A 21.50 (546.1) 43.00 (1092.2) 22.00 (558.8) 31.00 (787.4) 2.50 (63.5) 36.00 (914.4) Front 35.00 (889.0) 2.50 (63.5) 44.00 (1117.6)
26.63 (676.4) 0.437 x 0.688 0.75 Slot (19.1) 14.00 (355.6)
2.25 (57.2) 7.00 (177.8)
3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 0.25 (6.4) 0.437 x 0.688 0.75 Slot (19.1)
4.00 (101.6) 2.50 (63.5)
15 16 17
E
Front
Main Bus End 2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6) 0.437 x 0.688 0.75 Slot (19.1) 2.50 (63.5) 0.50 (12.7)
Ground Bus End 600A 0.25 x 2.00 3.63 Inches from Each Side of the Structure 0.562 Dia. Hole
C L
40.00 (1016.0)
0.50 (12.7)
0.63 (16.0) 0.25 (6.4)
2.00 (50.8)
0.25 (6.4)
18 19 20 21
Varies for sine (depends on option), 46.88 (1190.8) standard, dv/dt 57.88 (1470.2). 10.92 (277.4) sine. 9.00 for dv/dt.
Figure 10.2-21. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Output Filter Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
10.2-24 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data and Ratings
Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 10 066
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Technical Data
Table 10.2-3. Design Specications
Description Power rating Motor type Input voltage rating Input voltage tolerance Power loss ride-through Input protection Input frequency Input power circuit protection Input impedance device Output voltage NEMA 3006000 hp Induction and synchronous 2400V15 kV 10% of nominal 5 cycles (Std.) Metal oxide varistor 50/60 Hz, 5% Contactor/fuses Isolation transformer 02400V 03300V 04160V PWM IGBT NEMA 1 0 to 40C 40 to 70C 95% noncondensing 03300 ft 2006 IBC UL, IEEE, CSA Air-cooling advanced heat pipe technology 25 watts/hp >0.96 IGBTs 12 12 12 PIV 3300V 6500V 6500V 24-pulse PWM Diode Non-rupture, non-arc Air-cooled Sinusoidal current/voltage 0.1% without tach feedback 1120 Hz Standard 9798% <75 dB (A) Yes IEC 1504313 kW Induction 2400/3300/4160V 10% of nominal 5 cycles (std.) Metal oxide varistor 60 Hz, 5% Contactor/fuses Isolation transformer 02400V 04160V PWM IGBT IP20 0 to 40C 40 to 70C 95% noncondensing 01000 m 2006 IBC IEC Air-cooling advanced heat pipe technology 2527 watts/hp >0.96 IGBTs 12 12 12 PIV 3300V 6500V 6500V 24-pulse PWM Diode Non-rupture, non-arc Air-cooled Sinusoidal current/voltage 0.1% without tach feedback 1120 Hz Standard 9798% <75 dB (A) Yes
Inverter design Inverter switch Enclosure Ambient temperature Storage and transport temperature Relative humidity Altitude (without derating) Seismic Standards Cooling Average watts loss Input power factor Number of inverter IGBTs 2400V 3300V 4160V IGBT PIV rating 2400V 3300V 4160V Rectier designs Rectier switch Rectier switch failure mode Rectier switch cooling Output waveform to motor Speed regulation Output frequency range Service duty rating Typical efciency Noise level Flying start capability
Reects conservative estimate. Actual amounts may vary.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 10 067
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage 10.2-25 Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data and Ratings
Technical Data
Frame Size VT/CT Reference Chart

Table 10.2-4. SC 9000 Frame A See Page 10.2-3 and Figure 10.2-1
2400/60 Hz VT FLA 69 80 91 103 114 hp 300 350 400 450 500 3300/50 Hz VT FLA 48 56 64 72 80 96 112 hp 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 4160/60 Hz VT FLA 38 44 51 57 63 76 89 101 114 124 132 hp 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1150
Table 10.2-7. SC 9000 Frame D See Pages 10.2-9 and 10.2-11 and Figures 10.2-4 and 10.2-5
2400/60 Hz VT FLA 448 504 561 hp 2000 2250 2500 3300/50 Hz VT FLA 360 400 440 480 hp 2250 2500 2750 3000 4160/60 Hz VT FLA 403 434 461 493 527 558 hp 3250 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
2400/60 Hz CT FLA 335 390 448 hp 1500 1750 2000
3300/50 Hz CT FLA 240 280 320 hp 1500 1750 2000
4160/60 Hz CT FLA 279 310 341 372 403 hp 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250
2400/60 Hz CT FLA 69 80
3300/50 Hz CT FLA 48 56 64 72 80 hp 300 350 400 450 500
4160/60 Hz CT FLA 38 44 51 57 63 76 hp 300 350 400 450 500 600
hp 300 350
Table 10.2-8. SC 9000 Frame E See Figure 10.2-6

2400/60 Hz VT FLA hp 3300/50 Hz VT FLA 520 560 600 640 hp 3250 3500 3750 4000 4160/60 Hz VT FLA 589 620 651 682 713 744 hp 4750 5000 5250 5500 5750 6000
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Requires second blower conguration.
Table 10.2-5. SC 9000 Frame B See Page 10.2-5 and Figure 10.2-2
2400/60 Hz VT FLA 134 156 178 201 223 hp 600 700 800 900 1000 3300/50 Hz VT FLA 128 144 160 200 240 hp 800 900 1000 1250 1500 4160/60 Hz VT FLA 124 155 186 217 248 hp 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000
2400/60 Hz CT FLA hp
3300/50 Hz CT FLA 360 400 hp 2250 2500
4160/60 Hz CT FLA 434 461 493 hp 3500 3750 4000
2400/60 Hz CT FLA 91 103 114 134 156 hp 400 450 500 600 700
3300/50 Hz CT FLA 96 112 128 144 160 hp 600 700 800 900 1000
4160/60 Hz CT FLA 89 101 114 124 155 hp 700 800 900 1000 1250
VT = Variable Torque (110% overload for 1 minute every 10 minutes) CT = Constant Torque (150% overload for 1 minute every 10 minutes)
Table 10.2-6. SC 9000 Frame C See Page 10.2-7 and Figure 10.2-3
2400/60 Hz VT FLA 279 335 390 hp 1250 1500 1750 3300/50 Hz VT FLA 280 320 hp 1750 2000 4160/60 Hz VT FLA 279 310 341 372 hp 2250 2500 2750 3000
16 17 18 19 20 21
2400/60 Hz CT FLA 178 201 223 279
3300/50 Hz CT FLA 200 hp 1250
4160/60 Hz CT FLA 186 217 248 hp 1500 1750 2000
hp 800 900 1000 1250
Requires second blower conguration.
CA08104001E
10.2-26 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data and Ratings
Technical Data
Table 10.2-9. AMPGARD SC 9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive Efciency, Power Factor and Harmonics Typical Data
Description Load (%) 50 75 0.98 3.64 6.40 0.959 0.99 2.32 4.44 0.970 0.99 2.20 4.38 0.972 100 0.98 3.43 6.73 0.962 0.99 3.15 3.85 0.971 0.99 2.30 3.13 0.974
May 2012
Sheet 10 068
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Speed 50%
Input PF (1) Input THD (V) Input THD (I) Efciency (%) 0.96 3.13 7.59 0.943 0.98 1.34 6.76 0.965 0.98 2.16 5.95 0.971
Speed: 75%
Input PF (1) Input THD (V) Input THD (I) Efciency (%)
Speed: 100%
Input PF (1) Input THD (V) Input THD (I) Efciency (%)
CA08104001E
BuswayMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 11 001
11.0-1
Busway Medium Voltage
Contents
BuswayMedium Voltage Space Heaters . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-11 General Description. . . . . . . . . 11.0-2 Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-11 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2 Traditional Elbows . . . . . . 11.0-12 Short-Circuit Current Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-13 Withstand Ratings. . . . . . 11.0-2 Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-14 Technical Data and Switchgear Flanges . . . . . 11.0-15 Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-3 End Cable Tap Box . . . . . . 11.0-16 Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-3 Phase Transposition . . . . . 11.0-16 Dimensional Data . . . . . . . . 11.0-4 Expansion Joints. . . . . . . . 11.0-17 General Description. . . . . . . . . 11.0-8 Bushing Box Termination. 11.0-17 Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-8 Transformer Termination . 11.0-18 Splice Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-8 Sealing Ring . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-18 Boot Connection . . . . . . . . . 11.0-8 Vapor/Fire Barriers . . . . . . 11.0-19 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-9 Column Supports . . . . . . . 11.0-20 Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-9 Horizontal Hanger . . . . . . . 11.0-21 Non-Segregated Phase Wall/Floor Flange . . . . . . . 11.0-22 Feeder Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-10 Installation Diagrams . . . . 11.0-23 Vertical Feeder . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-11 Field Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-24 Dust-Proof Construction . . 11.0-11 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Metal-Enclosed Bus Medium Voltage. . . . . . Section 16341 Section 26 18 29
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Typical 0.6/5/15 kV Bus Run Section
21
CA08104001E
11.0-2 BuswayMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 11 002
General Description Test

The design of non-segregated bus runs has been tested per ANSI C37.23. Certication of momentary current testing, impulse testing and heat rise are available upon request.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Downward Elbow Straight Section
Short-Circuit Current Withstand Ratings

The metal-enclosed non-segregated phase bus runs are designed to withstand electrical and mechanical forces generated by momentary (10 cycle) and short-time (2 second) short-circuit currents in accordance with the latest ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.23. For 600V application, 4-cycle momentary current withstand rating up to 158 kA peak (98.8 kA rms asymmetrical) is also available. Refer to Table 11.0-1 for available short-circuit ratings.
Predictive Diagnostics
Partial discharge sensing and monitoring is available as an option for medium voltage applications. Refer to Tab 4, Pages 4.5-1 through 4.5-8.
Seismic Qualication
Third-Party Certication
Certain bus ratings can be supplied with CSA listing. Refer to Tables 11.0-111.0-4 for availability of CSA listing.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Eatons non-segregated phase bus runs are designed for use on circuits whose importance requires greater reliability than power cables provide. Typical of such applications are the connections from transformers to switchgear assemblies in unit substations, connections from switchgear assemblies to rotating apparatus, and tie connections between switchgear assemblies. Non-segregated phase bus is an assembly of bus conductors with associated connections, joints and insulating supports conned within a metal enclosure without interphase barriers. The conductors are adequately separated and insulated from each other and grounded by insulating bus supports. Each conductor for 2400V service and above is insulated with a uidized bed epoxy coating throughout, which reduces the possibility of corona and electrical tracking.
Optional Ground Bus Three-Phase, Three-Wire 12003200A 600V 515 kV
Optional Ground Bus Three-Phase, Four-Wire 12003200A 600V 515 kV
Optional Ground Bus Three-Phase, Three-Wire 40005000A 600V 515 kV
Optional Ground Bus Three-Phase, Four-Wire 40005000A 600V 515 kV
Standards
The metal-enclosed non-segregated phase bus runs are designed for 600V, 5 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV and 38 kV service in accordance with ANSI C37.23. Available ratings are shown in Table 11.0-1.
Temperature Rise
The bus will be capable of carrying rated current continuously without exceeding a conductor temperature rise of 65C above an outside ambient temperature of 40C, as required by ANSI Standard C37.23.
Optional Ground Bus Three-Phase, Three-Wire 12002000A 27 kV
Optional Ground Bus Three-Phase, Three-Wire 12002000A 38 kV
Figure 11.0-1. System Congurations

September 2011
Sheet 11 003
11.0-3

Electrical Data
Table 11.0-1. Available Non-Segregated Bus Ratings per ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.23-1987
Rated Maximum Voltage kV rms Rated Power Frequency Hz Power Frequency Withstand 1 min. Dry, kV rms Impulse Withstand Rated (1.2 x 50 microsec) Continuous kV Peak Current Amperes Rated Short-Time Short-Circuit Withstand Current (kA rms Symmetrical) 2 Sec. 1 Sec. Rated Momentary Short-Circuit Withstand Current 10 Cycle kA Peak 0.635 60 2.2 10 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 1200 2000 1200 2000 50 69 132 kA rms Asym. 78
i ii 1 2 3 4
63 89 170 100.8
0.635
60
2.2
10
5
50 132 78
4.76
60
19
60
6 7
4.76
60
19
60
63
170
100.8
8
50 132 78
8.25
60
36
95
9 10
8.25
60
36
95
63
170
100.8
11
50 130 78
15
60
36
95
12 13
15
60
36
95
63
170
100.8
14
40 40 108 104 64 64
27 38

60 60
60 80
125 170
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Refer to Tables 11.0-2, 11.0-3 and 11.0-4 for available CSA and UL listings. This is a value calculated from 2-second short-circuit withstand current rating based on relationship l2t = constant.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 11 004
i ii
Dimensional Data
W Bus C L C 1 2 3 H Bus C L C W 1 1 2 2 3 3 H C Optional L Ground Bus Layout 2 Bus C L C 1 W 2 3 1 2 3 H C Optional L Ground Bus Layout 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
C Optional L Ground Bus Layout 1
Figure 11.0-2. Medium Voltage Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Congurations Table 11.0-2. Bus Duct Rated 49 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds
Wire Voltage kV Ampere Rating Layout Width No. Height Conductor Centerline Conductor Size Phase-Phase Conductor Spacing 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 4.00 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 4.00 Bracing Supports Optional Ground Bus 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 0.25 x 2.00 Average Weight Per Foot 38 47 68 68 101 118 48 60 88 88 127 58 67 106 106 154 154 72 84 124 124 188 Standards Listing
Aluminum Enclosures
3 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 5 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 5 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 35.75 35.75 26.00 26.00 26.00 26.00 35.75 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 35.75 35.75 26.00 26.00 26.00 26.00 35.75 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 (1) 0.50 x 3 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 6 (2) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 3 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 3 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 3 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 8 Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA
Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)

3
All phase conductors above 635V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600V as an option. Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory. Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.
Note: For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 11 005
11.0-5
Dimensional Data (Continued)

W Bus C L C 1 2 3 N H C L Layout 4 Bus C L C W 1 1 2 2 3 3 N N H C Optional L Ground Bus Layout 5
i ii 1 2 3
Bracing Supports Ground Bus Average Weight Per Foot 48 48 78 78 105 121 61 61 101 101 128 68 68 89 89 134 160 85 85 115 115 188 Standards Listing
Optional Ground Bus
Figure 11.0-3. Medium Voltage Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Congurations Table 11.0-3. Bus Duct Rated 63 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds
Wire Voltage kV Ampere Rating Layout Width No. Height Conductor Centerline Conductor Size Phase-Phase Conductor Spacing 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 4.00 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 5.38 4.00
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Aluminum Enclosures
3 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 5 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 5 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 35.75 35.75 26.00 26.00 26.00 26.00 35.75 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 35.75 35.75 26.00 26.00 26.00 26.00 35.75 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 17.38 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 8.13 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 6 (2) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 6 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 6 (2) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.38 x 6 (1) 0.50 x 8 (1) 0.50 x 8 (2) 0.50 x 6 Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester Glass polyester 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 0.25 x 3 CSA CSA CSA
Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)

3
All phase conductors above 635V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600V as an option. Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory. Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 11 006
i ii

W Bus C L C 1 2 3 H C L Layout 8 Ground Bus C L Layout 9 Ground Bus C L Layout 10 Bus C L D Ground Bus 1 W 2 3 H Bus C L D 1 W 2 3 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 11.0-4. Dimensional Data for 27 kV/38 kV Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Congurations Table 11.0-4. Dimensional Data for 27 kV Bus Rated up to 108 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second
Wire Rated Type Maximum Voltage kV 3 3

Rated Layout Enclosure Enclosure Cont. No. Material Size (Inches) Current Standard Optional W H C Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 8 8 8 8 Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel
# of Bars Ph and Size, Cu (Inches)
Ph-Ph Insulating Bus Supports Spacing Standard Optional (Inches)

Optional Ground Bus, Cu (Inches)
Approx. Listing Average Weight CSA UL per Foot (Lbs) Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
27 27 27 27
30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 7.00 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.50 x 4 7.00 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 7.00 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.50 x 4 7.00
0.25 x 2.00 37 0.25 x 2.00 49 0.25 x 2.00 37 0.25 x 2.00 49
All bus bars for applications above 600V are fully insulated with uidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage. Check with Eaton for availability. Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester. Glass polyester. Polyester/porcelain. Epoxy.
Table 11.0-5. Dimensional Data for 38 kV Bus Rated up to 104 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second
Wire Rated Type Maximum Voltage kV 3 3

Rated Layout Enclosure Enclosure Cont. No. Material Size (Inches) Current Standard Optional W H C Amperes 1200 2000 1200 2000 9 10 9 10 Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel
# of Bars Ph and Size, Cu (Inches)
Ph-Ph Insulating Bus Supports Spacing Standard Optional (Inches) Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy Epoxy
Optional Ground Bus, Cu (Inches) 0.25 x 3.00 0.25 x 3.00
Approx. Listing Average Weight CSA UL per Foot (Lbs) 61 89 Yes Yes No No No No No No
38 38 38 38
40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 10.50 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.38 x 4 10.50 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 10.50 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.38 x 4 10.50
0.25 x 3.00 88 0.25 x 3.00 116
All bus bars for applications above 600V are fully insulated with uidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage. Check with Eaton for availability. Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 11 007
11.0-7

Table 11.0-6. Non-Segregated Phase Bus Electrical Properties and Watt Loss Data
Wire Type Rated Max. Voltage Cont. Rated Current Amperes 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 1200 2000 3000 3200 4000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 Conductor (Copper) #/ph Thick Inch 0.50 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.38 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25 0.38 0.25 0.38 Width Inch 3.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 6.00 8.00 3.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 3.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 6.00 3.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-1-2-2-3-3 1-1-2-2-3-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-1-2-2-3-3 1-2-3-1-2-3 1-2-3-N 1-2-3-N 1-2-3-N 1-2-3-N 1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N 1-2-3-N 1-2-3-N 1-2-3-N 1-2-3-N 1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum Steel Steel Phase Arrang. Enclosure Material Size Electrical Properties ohm/Ph/ft DC 60 Hz R 7.1 4.7 2.7 2.7 1.8 1.3 7.1 4.7 2.7 2.7 1.3 1.3 7.1 4.7 2.7 2.7 1.8 7.1 4.7 2.7 2.7 1.3 10.6 5.3 10.6 5.3 10.6 5.3 10.6 5.3 XL 49.8 37.0 31.1 31.1 35.6 32.9 49.8 37.0 31.1 31.1 32.9 14.6 49.8 37.0 31.1 31.1 35.6 49.8 37.0 41.1 41.1 32.9 51.6 24.8 51.6 24.8 61.3 59.0 61.3 59.0 Z = R+JXL 50.3 37.3 31.3 31.3 35.6 32.9 50.3 37.3 31.3 31.3 32.9 14.6 50.3 37.3 31.3 31.3 35.6 50.3 37.3 41.2 41.2 32.9 52.7 25.4 52.7 25.4 62.3 59.2 62.3 59.2 W x H (Inches) R 20C 20.00 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 35.75 x 17.38 35.75 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 20.00 x 17.38 35.75 x 17.38 35.75 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 35.75 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 26.00 x 17.38 35.75 x 17.38 30.00 x 21.00 30.00 x 21.00 30.00 x 21.00 30.00 x 21.00 40.25 x 21.50 40.25 x 21.50 40.25 x 21.50 40.25 x 21.50 5.5 3.7 2.1 2.1 1.4 1.0 5.5 3.7 2.1 2.1 1.0 1.0 5.5 3.7 2.1 2.1 1.4 5.5 3.7 2.1 2.1 1.0 8.3 4.1 8.3 4.1 8.3 4.1 8.3 4.1 F/PH/FT Cap to Grd Cg 2.2 4.4 5.9 5.9 5.9 7.8 2.2 4.4 5.9 5.9 7.8 7.4 1.5 3.1 4.1 4.1 4.9 1.5 3.1 4.1 4.1 6.6 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kV 3 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635/5/15 0.635 0.635 27 27 27 27 38 38 38 38
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 11 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
General Description
Collar
Collars (see Figure 11.0-5) are U-shaped metal pieces used for enclosure-toenclosure connections.
0.312 18 x 0.875 (7.9 x 22.2) Hex Steel Bolt 0.312 (7.9) Weather Seal Washer (Steel) Weather Seal Washer NEOP. (Outdoor Only) Collar 0.125 TK x 0.75 (3.2 x 19.05) Wide Gasket on Inside of Collar (Outdoor Only) Tinnerman Nut
Splice Joint
Conductors are silver-plated for maximum conductivity (tin plating is optional). Bus runs rated 3200A (aluminum enclosure) or 2000A (steel enclosure) and below use one conductor per phase, while the higher ratings use two conductors per phase. Adjacent sections are electrically bonded together by means of plated copper splice plates to provide electrical continuity. All splice joints (see Figure 11.0-6) should be torqued 50 ft/lbs.
Note: Numbers indicate bolt tightening sequence.
Boot Connection
Bus joints are insulated with a ameretardant PVC boot, easily removable for joint inspection (see Figure 11.0-7).
Figure 11.0-5. Enclosure Section Joint Collar
Insulated Bus
0.50 13 x 2.0 (12.7 x 50.8) Hex Bolt 0.500 (12.7) Washer
Splice Plate Splice Plate
0.500 (12.7) Pyramidal Washer 0.500 (12.7) 13 Hex Nut
Figure 11.0-6. Typical Splice Plate Connection
PVC Boot Phase Conductors
16 17 18 19 20 21
Splice Plates
Nylon Ties
Figure 11.0-7. Boot Assembly (for Insulated Bus Only)
September 2011
Sheet 11 009
11.0-9
Construction
Enclosures are fabricated from 11-gauge aluminum, and are welded for maximum rigidity (see Figure 11.0-8). Removable covers are secured with bolts for ease of access when making joints and subsequent and periodic inspection. (Steel housings are also available.) Enclosures are painted with baked-on epoxy powder coat paint system resulting in a very durable nish with uniform thickness and gloss. This cosmetically pleasing nish minimizes the risk of problems in harsh environments. The standard color is ANSI-61 light gray. Special paint colors are available upon request. Flexible joints are supplied in all straight bus runs at approximately 50 feet (15.2m) intervals to allow for the expected expansion when the conductors are energized and are carrying rated current. A variety of terminations is available to accommodate most termination requirements. Bus runs can be terminated with exible shunts, potheads, porcelain bushings or conductor stub ends for connections to riser bars in switchgear assemblies.
3. Apply 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) insulating tape, lapping and layering (1 layer up to 5 kV) (2 layers for 5 kV to 15 kV). Tape must overlap preinsulation by 1.50 inches (38.1 mm). Should a tape roll expire, start a new roll by overlapping any previous end by 1/2-turn.
0.25 x 3.00 inch (6.4 x 76.2 mm) bare copper ground bus running along the entire length is provided when required. In the 170 kA peak rated bus, ground pads are welded at each end of the enclosure. Copper ground links are provided (regardless of provisions of ground bus) to ensure a continuous ground path throughout the run.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ground Conductor (Optional)

For all ratings except 170 kA peak rated bus, a separate, continuous 0.25 x 2.00 inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm) bare copper ground bus, bolted and running along the entire length is available. For 170 kA peak rated bus runs, a continuous
Neutral Conductor (Optional)

Fully rated, isolated and insulated neutral conductor can be provided when specied.
Phase Conductors
All conductors are 98% conductivity copper bars. Bus joints are made by solidly bolting the bus bars together with splice plates on each side (see Figure 11.0-9). All joint surfaces are silver-plated or tin-plated to ensure maximum conductivity through the joint. After bolting, each standard joint is covered by a preformed, ameretardant insulating boot, providing full insulation for bus conductors (5 kV and above). These boots are easily removable for inspection of the joints at any future time. The copper bus bars are mounted on supports of track-resistant, ame-retardant glass polyester. If boots are not available for connection, taping the joint will be required. For ex connectors, nish connections with insulating tape (furnished). The following procedures should be followed for taping joints. 1. Clean area of dirt and foreign matter as specied under cleaning procedures. 2. Apply at least 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) of ller over the sharp edges of the conductor, splice plates, hardware or ex connectors. Smooth out and blend the contour so that tape may be easily applied.
CA08104001E
Figure 11.0-8. Housing Assembly
13 14 15
Bare Conductor Flex Conne Filler Transformer Spade
16 17
Transformer Main Bus Pre-Insulation
18 19 20 21
1.00-inch (25.4 mm) Insulating Tape to Secure Joint 1.50 (38.1) Minimum Overlap 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) Insulating Tape to Pad Filler
Figure 11.0-9. Taping Instructions


September 2011
Sheet 11 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Non-Segregated Phase Feeder Bus

Straight sections of feeder bus can be supplied in any length, at 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) increments, from a 14.00inch (355.6 mm) minimum to an 8-foot (2m) maximum. Figure 11.0-10 illustrates the conguration of feeder bus and the conductors locations. Collars are used for all horizontal enclosureto-enclosure connections.
20.00 (508.0) 3-Wire 1200 2000 and 3000 Amperes p View
5.38 (136.7)
26.00 (660.4)
5.38 (136.7)
Top View
35.75 (908.5)
5.38 (136.7)
p View
35.75 (908.5)
4.00 (101.6)
8.13 (206.5)
F
17.38 (441.5)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
9.25 (235.0)
Figure 11.0-10. Non-Segregated Phase Feeder Bus
September 2011
Sheet 11 011
11.0-11
Vertical Feeder
Vertical feeder enclosures (see Figure 11.0-11) are designed in standard lengths of 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) through 56.00 inches (1422.4 mm) in 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) increments. All vertical enclosures are supplied with external (turned-out) anges for enclosure-to-enclosure connections.
i ii 1 2 3
Duct Width
Dust-Proof Construction
Both vertical and horizontal sections of feeder bus can be supplied with dustproof construction in any length, at 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) increments, from 14.00 inches (355.6 mm) to an 8-foot (2.4m) maximum. Figure 11.0-10 illustrates the conguration of feeder bus and the conductors locations. Removable gasket at covers are secured with bolts for ease of access when making joints and subsequent and periodic inspection. External and internal anges are used for all dustproof enclosure-to-enclosure connections. Gasket material is to be placed between internal and external anges during installation.
4 5
8.13 (206.5) 16.25 (412.8)
6 7 8
Space Heaters
Space heaters are provided on outdoor bus duct runs for use with customersupplied 120 or 240 Vac power supply at 250 watts for both. Consult the factory for additional heater ratings. Heaters come pre-wired using #14 shielded pair cable with a terminal block ready to accept customersupplied power. The heaters are continuously energized or may be thermostat controlled. There is one heater provided every 8 ft (2.4m) as standard.
Figure 11.0-11. Vertical Feeder

Upward Rearward
9 10 11 12
Forward
F
13 14 15
Downward
Fittings
There is a tting to meet every application need: anges, elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes, transformer connections and expansion joints. These ttings, along with standard and minimum dimensions, are described on the following pages. The relationship of ttings to straight lengths (forward, rearward, upward and downward) is illustrated in Figure 11.0-12. When making eld measurements and layouts, it should be remembered that the dimensions are given from the centerline of the non-segregated bus bar, not the centerline of the housing. Figure 11.0-11 and Figure 11.0-12 show the differences in center line in relationship to the housing.
CA08104001E
16
8.13 206.5) 17.38 (441.5)
17 18
Figure 11.0-12. Horizontal Feeder
19 20 21

September 2011
Sheet 11 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Traditional Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90-degree changes in the direction of bus runs. The four types that are available are forward, rearward, upward and downward. Table 11.0-7. Elbow Dimensions
Amperes Wire Enclosure Type Material Dimensions in Inches (mm) Upward A 1200 2000 3000 3000 3200 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3000 3200 3200 4000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum/steel B Downward A B Rearward A B Forward A B
17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 21.00 (736.6) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 21.00 (736.6) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 17.00 (431.8) 19.25 (489.0) 18.00 (457.2) 19.25 (489.0) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6)
Note: All dimensions are to the centerline of the non-segregated bus bar.
B A
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Figure 11.0-13. Upward Elbow
Figure 11.0-15. Rearward Elbow
17 18 19 20 21
Figure 11.0-14. Downward Elbow
B A
Figure 11.0-16. Forward Elbow

September 2011
Sheet 11 013
11.0-13
Offsets
An offset is used to avoid obstacles and to conform to building structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single tting for use where space restrictions prohibit the use of a standard 90degree elbow. The minimum lengths are listed in Table 11.0-8. Table 11.0-8. Offset Dimensions
Amperes Wire Type Enclosure Material Dimensions in Inches (mm) Upward A 1200 2000 3000 3000 3200 3200 4000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3000 3200 3200 4000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum/steel 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) Downward A 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) Rearward A 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 29.00 (736.6) Forward A 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 29.00 (736.6)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.13 (206.5) 27.38 (695.5)
8.13 (206.5) 27.38 (695.5) 10.00 (254.0) Minimum 9.25 (235.0) A
9 10 11 12 13
10.00 (254.0) Minimum C L Bus A A A 9.25 (235.0)
C L Bus
14
Figure 11.0-17. Upward Offset Figure 11.0-19. Rearward Offset
15
A 3.50 (88.9) Minimum Offset A 3.50 (88.9) Minimum Offset
16 17 18 19 20
Figure 11.0-18. Downward Offset

CA08104001E
Figure 11.0-20. Forward Offset

21

September 2011
Sheet 11 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tees
Tees are used to branch-off a bus run. The four types available are forward, rearward, upward and downward.
36.00 (914.4)
17.38 (441.5) F 18.00 (457.2)

F
19.25 (489.0)
29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6)
19.25 (489.0)
Figure 11.0-21. Downward
Figure 11.0-23. Forward
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 11.0-22. Upward Figure 11.0-24. Rearward
19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 17.00 (431.8) 17.38 (441.5) 36.00 (914.4)
19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 11 015
11.0-15
Switchgear Flanges
Switchgear termination enclosures connect non-segregated phase bus to medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage motor control centers, and low voltage switchgear, switchboards or motor control centers. Each enclosure is designed to coordinate with opening, drilling and bus extension detail supplied on the switchgear equipment by the switchgear supplier. Standard switchgear termination enclosures include external (turned out) ange for connections to switchgear equipment for medium voltage applications, and internal (turned in) ange for low voltage applications. All anges will match switchgear roof sheet coordinations. Table 11.0-9. Flange
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Amperes Wire Type 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Enclosure 49 kA A Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum/steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) B 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 63 kA A 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) B 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2)
0.312-18 x 1.25 (7.9 x 31.8) Stl. Hex Bolt 0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Stl.) 0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Neop.) 0.125 Tk. x 1.25 (3.2 x 31.8) Wide Gasket "A" 0.312 (7.9) Flat Washer 0.312 (7.9) Lockwasher 0.312-18 (7.9) Stl. Hex Nut 0.125 Tk. x 1.25 (3.2 x 31.8) Wide Gasket "A"
i ii
"B"
1
0.312-18 x 0.875 (7.9 x 22.2) Stl. Hex Bolt 0.312 (7.9) Flat Washer Internal Flange
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1200 2000 3000 3000 3200 3200 4000 4000 5000 5000 1200 2000 3000 3000 3200 3200 4000 4000
Figure 11.0-25. Low Voltage Switchgear Flange (Internal Flange)
10 11
"B"
12 13
External Flange
14 15 16 17
0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Neop.) 0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Stl.) 0.312-18 (7.9) Stl. Hex Nut
18 19 20 21
Figure 11.0-26. Medium Voltage Switchgear Flange (External Flange)


September 2011
Sheet 11 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
End Cable Tap Box

End cable tap boxes (see Figure 11.0-27) are applied to feed a run of bus duct with cable and conduit. The enclosure is designed to accommodate specied size and number of cables per phase. Conductors are separated and provided with the required number of cable lugs per phase, and necessary space for cable termination. The enclosure is provided with removable access covers as necessary for access to power cable terminations.
Accessible Top Covers 47.00 36.00 (1193.8) (914.4) 11.00 (279.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
36.00 (914.4) Main Bus C L Cable Lugs
Phase Transposition
Phase transposition is normally provided within the switchgear equipment. However, when required, it can be provided within the bus run system to align phasing of terminal equipment at two ends. All dimensions are to the centerline of the non-segregated bus bar.
Optional Ground Bus
Accessible Bottom Covers
Figure 11.0-27. End Cable Tap Box
11.00 (279.4) 62.00 40.00 (1574.8) (1016.0) 17.38 (441.5) 11.00 (279.4)
Accessible Cover Accessible Cover Accessible Cover Main Bus
Accessible Cover
Figure 11.0-28. Phase Transposition
16 17 18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 11 017
11.0-17
Expansion Joints
An expansion joint is a special bus and housing tting provided in long runs to accommodate thermal expansion of bus conductors with respect to steel or aluminum housing, when carrying rated continuous current. The tting consists of two pieces of housing, each with one ange end. The anged ends are separated by a 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) gap. A sealing ring assembly is then installed over the bolted anges (see Page 11.0-18). Flexible copper braids of required ampacity connect bus conductors within the expansion tting. An expansion joint is normally provided for every 50 feet (15m) of straight run. However, within those 50 feet (15m), if the bus run contains elbows or exible termination, such as transformer throat, the expansion joint may be omitted. The enclosure is bolted together for shipping, but the four bolts should be removed after installation.
Steel Sealing Frame 0.125 x 3.00 Gasket (3.2 x 76.2) Flat .312 (7.9) Washer 0.312 (7.9) 18 x "A" + 1 Hex Steel Bolt "A" Flat 0.312 (7.9) Std. Washers to Space Flanges as Required Flat 0.312 (7.9) Washer 0.312 (7.9) Split Steel Lockwasher 0.312 (7.9) 18 Hex Steel Nut Hardware to be Removed After Installation
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Standard 1.00 (25.4) Bolting Detail (4) Places
Tinnerman Nut Flat 0.312 (7.9) Steel Washer 0.312 (7.9) Steel Split Lockwasher 0.312 18 x 1.00 Hex (7.9 x 25.4) Steel Bolt
6 7
Bushing Box Termination

This is used to connect bus duct to an outside source such as a power station or when the customer wants to connect cable that is located outdoors. The enclosure is designed to accommodate bushing sizes of 12003000A with voltages up to a maximum of 15 kV (see Figure 11.0-30). The conductors are separated and provided with ex connectors on the internal portion. The enclosure will be furnished with heaters and removable access covers for maintenance.
Bottom Section
8 9
Figure 11.0-29. Expansion Joint
49.00 (1244.6)
36.00 (914.4)
10
72.00 (1828.8)
11
24.00 (609.6)
12 13
Bushings
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 38.00 (965.2)
Main Bus Bar
14 15
Flex Connectors
16
Figure 11.0-30. Bushing Box
17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 11 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Termination
This is a special enclosure designed to match the transformer throat. It includes a matching ange and required number of exible copper braids for connections to transformer bushing terminal pads. The transformer termination enclosure ange is provided with or without drilling as required for a given transformer. A sealing ring kit is included for eld installation around the ange connection (see Figure 11.0-31).
"D" Flex Connectors
"B"
Sealing Ring
A sealing ring kit is provided for placement around enclosure-to-enclosure ange connections in an expansion tting, and for placement around bus run ange and transformer or generator ange interface (see Figure 11.0-32). The sealing ring provides a weatherproof seal around such joints. The kit consists of three pieces: a U-shaped metal piece fabricated by welding together three members, a separate bottom piece and a U-shaped gasket. The sealing ring kit is installed in the eld by the customer. First, the U-shaped gasket is placed upside down around ange-to-ange interface. Then the U-shaped metal piece is placed over the gasket bolted to the bottom piece to provide a weatherproof seal around the enclosure.
"A" "E" "C" "E"
5.50 (139.7) Heater Box 9.50 (241.3)
Access Cover Support Bracket 29.50 (749.3)
A = Floor to Centerline of Transformer Flange B = Flange Height C = Flange Width D = Pending Location of Transformer Spade E = Dimensions Between Transformer Spades
Figure 11.0-31. Transformer Termination
0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Steel) 0.312 (7.9) Steel Split Lockwasher 0.312 18 x 1.00 Hex Steel Bolt (7.9 x 25.4) Bottom Section
"A"
Steel Sealing Frame Standard 0.50 (12.7) (See Bus Run Layout Drawing for Actual Dimension.) 0.125 x 3.00 Gasket (3.2 x 76.2)
Figure 11.0-32. Sealing Ring
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 11 019
11.0-19
Vapor Barriers
Vapor barriers are two pieces of 0.75-inch (19.1 mm) thick glass polyester that are sealed with silicone sealant. The vapor barrier is used to seal construction openings and penetrations through oor slabs, walls and other building partitions and assembles against the passage of moisture.
5.38 (136.7) Vapor Barrier 5.38 (136.7) 1.12 (28.4) 6.50 (165.1) 1.12 (28.4) Fire Foam
i ii 1 2 3
8.13 (206.5)
Fire Barriers
Fire barriers consist of desired rerated barrier sandwiched between two vapor barriers. Used to seal construction openings and penetrations through oor slabs, walls and other re-rated building partitions and assemblies against the passage of ame, noxious gas, smoke and water. Restore re-rated construction to original integrity. Table 11.0-10. Suggested Guide for Designing Minimum Penetration Thickness for Designated Fire Ratingsin Inches (mm)
Description Fire Rating 1-Hour Fire Test Thickness of 4.00 Dow Corning (101.6) RTV Foam 2-Hour Fire Test 8.00 (203.2) 3-Hour Fire Test 12.00 (304.8) 5.38 (136.7) Vapor Barrier
4.00 (101.6)
Figure 11.0-33. 1-Hour Fire Barrier

11.00 (279.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4) Fire Foam
5.38 (136.7) Vapor Barrier
5.38 (136.7)
4 5 6 7 8
8.13 (206.5)
8.00 (203.2)

15.00 (381.0) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4) Fire Foam
5.38 (136.7)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: Data extracted from results of several large scale E-l 19-76 re test of different Dow Corning silicone RTV foam penetration seal systems in both oor and wall test structures.
8.13 (206.5)
12.00 (304.8)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 11 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Column Supports
Outdoor bus runs are normally supported by a single structural column with a crossbeam, which is bolted to brackets provided on the bus housing. Special conditions may require a different design. The customer furnishes the columns, beams and foundation hardware for the support columns. Only the brackets are included with the bus run. Column supports should be placed every 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to 3.0m), at transformer throats and at transitions where the run turns vertical for more than 3 feet (0.91m).
Hardware Splice Plate Of C L Bus Collar Boot Enclosure
Of 5.50 C L Bus (139.7)
Ground Bus Ground Bus Link See Figure 11.0-38 for Piercing H-Beam By Customer
Support Angle
Figure 11.0-37. Column Support at Joint

6.00 (152.4) 5.50 (139.7) 1.75 (44.5) C L 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) 0.503 (12.8) Dia. (4) C L 1.75 (44.5)
1.50 (38.1)
1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5)
6.00 (152.4)
Plate By Customer Welded to I-Beam Recommended Plate 6 x 6 x 1/2 TK
Figure 11.0-38. Beam Drilling

6.00 (152.4) 4.50 (114.3) C L 0.656 Dia. (2) ea. side 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3) C L 0.75 (19.1) Tk Plate 4.50 (114.3) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 4.50 (114.3)
6.00 (152.4)
0.875 (22.2) Dia. (4)
1.50 (38.1)
6.00 (152.4)
15.5 0.75 (19.1)
Figure 11.0-36. Column Support at Transformer
20 21
Figure 11.0-39. Base Plate Detail
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 11 021
11.0-21
Horizontal Hanger
The indoor bus run is attached to existing building structure through the use of
5/8-inch (15.9) diameter hanger rod assembly (see Figure 11.0-40). Exact placement to be determined by installer.
Hanger rods and associated support material to be supplied by the customer or contractor.
i ii
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
A
A = 20.00, 26.00, 35.75 (508.0, 660.4, 908.1) Width of Enclosure
1 2 3 4 5 6
6.00 (152.4)
Minimum Distance
Minimum Distance
6.00 (152.4)
0.625 (15.9) Nut Lockwasher Flatwasher
(6) Locations
Threaded Rod 0.625 Dia. (15.9) Hanger- Supplied By Customer 0.75 (19.1) Unistrut 0.75 (19.1)
Threaded Rod Extends to Roof Hangers
17.38 (441.5)
7
Unistrut 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1)
8 9 10 11
Threaded Rod 0.625 Dia. (15.9)
Figure 11.0-40. Horizontal Hanger Assembly
Floor Flange
al Feeder
12 13 14
End Cable Tap Box Bushing Box
Horizontal Tee Downward Elbow Enclosure to Enclosure Flange Hardware Sealing Ring Thru Wall Transformer Brackets T-Beams by Customer Upward Elbow Interna Switchgea Flange Colla Enclosure to Switchgear Hardware Phase Transposition Horizontal Feeder External Switchgear Flange Horizonta Hange Hanger Angles
Collar
Expansion Joint Downward
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 11.0-41. Typical Bus Duct Components


September 2011
Sheet 11 022
i ii 1 2 3 4
Wall/Floor Flange
Wall/oor ange ttings are provided when a bus run passes through a wall or oor. The wall/oor ange assembly is a sliding design. It consists of a U-shaped piece fabricated with two lips. The assembly is installed in the wall opening by the purchaser. The bus run is installed through the wall/ oor ange assembly by sliding through it.
A 0.438 (11.1) Dia. Holes In Wall Frame 0.375 (9.5)-16 Tap By Purchaser
1.00 (25.4) Wall Frame 1.00 (25.4) 8.00 (203.2)
Wall THK
8.63 (219.2)
5 6 7
9.75 (247.7)
18.38 (466.8)
3.00 (76.2)
Figure 11.0-43. Wall Flange
Wall lO Opening Ope B
8.00 (203.2)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 11.0-42. Wall Opening Table 11.0-11. Wall/Floor Opening Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Width 20.00 (508.0) 26.00 (660.4) 35.75 (908.1) A 7.25 (184.2) 7.25 (184.2) 8.00 (203.2) B 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 36.75 (933.5) C 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 18.38 (466.9)
September 2011
Sheet 11 023
11.0-23
Installation Diagrams
i ii 1
Horizontal Feeder
Internal Switchgear Flange
External Switchgear Flange
2 3 4
Collar
Horizontal Hanger
5 6 7 8
Figure 11.0-44. Typical Bus Run (Switchgear-to-Switchgear)
9
Downward Elbow
Enclosure to Enclosure Flange Hardware Collar all Flange
10 11
Horizontal Feeder
Wall Enclosure
Sealing Ring
12
Internal Switchgear Flange
13 14 15 16
Transformer Enclosure
Switchgear Horizontal Hanger
Brackets
T-Beam Support by Customer
17 18
Figure 11.0-45. Typical Bus Run (Switchgear-to-Transformer)
19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 11 024
i ii 1 2 3 4
Field Fit
A eld t section of bus is typically an elbow or a short length of feeder that is intentionally left out of a run for later shipment. It is most often a mutually agreed upon section between the customer and the plant. The purpose of the program is to effectively manage the dimensional uncertainties that may be involved in a bus layout. The example shown in Figure 11.0-46 identies the eld t piece as a straight length.
Upon release of the order, this item is kept on hold for eld measurement. The contractor installs the bus duct and is then able to obtain an exact dimension for the nal eld t piece. The measurement should be made from edge of the housing 1 to the edge of the housing 2. The contractor can fax the dimensions directly to the factory on the Final Field Fit Fax Release form, which is packed with the original shipment.
The eld t section will ship within 5 to 10 working days from the receipt of the release fax. This program has been successful for many years and it provides assurance of an exact t the rst time. It allows bus duct to be released when certain dimensions are not yet determined. It also eliminates the costly delays that can occur when sections have to be remade and shipped due to last minute job site changes. In turn, this allows installations to begin early and projects can be completed on time.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Equipment Switchgear Edge of Housing 1 Hold FF for Final Fit. Customer to Furnish Dimensions. FF Edge of Housing 1 1 Final Field Fit Edge of Housing 2 4
FF
Field Measure Dimension A A
Edge of Housing 2
Figure 11.0-46. Final Field Fit
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 12 001
12.0-1
Transfer Switches Medium Voltage
Contents
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-2 Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-4 Protection and Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-4 Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-5 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-6 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-8 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16495 Section 26 36 23.21
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Medium Voltage Transfer Switch
21
CA08104001E
12.0-2 Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch (VCP-W)

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 12 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Reliability and Control with Vacuum Technology and Microprocessor-Based Logic
Metal-Clad
Compartmentalized with drawout circuit breaker switches (CBS). The metal-clad assembly and all components are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA SG-4 and SG-5, and but not limited to IEEE C37.20.2. UL and CSA listings are available. The MV ATS style is perfect for any emergency or backup system and suitable for service entrance use. It provides reliable automatic transfer to standby power when:
Standard Control Features
The normal power source fails Peak shaving is used The power source is unreliable Backup power is mandated by code or local regulations
Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch
Eatons Electrical Sector is an innovator of low and medium voltage manual transfer switches and has expanded these capabilities into medium voltage automatic transfer switches (MV ATS) that combine proven vacuum technology and microprocessor-based logic.
Eaton manufactures all MV ATS basic components and provides one year full warranty, eliminating problems that can arise with multiple warranties for a single piece of equipment. Assembly and manufacturing is completed in ISO certied facilities.
Lights: Normal position Emergency position Normal source available Emergency source available Undervoltage/overvoltage, underfrequency/overfrequency sensing on Source 1 Undervoltage/overvoltage, underfrequency/overfrequency sensing on Source 2 Six timers: TDNE = Time Delay Normal to Emergency TDEN = Time Delay Emergency to Normal TDES = Time Delay Engine Start TDEC = Time Delay Engine Cooldown TDEF = Time Delay Emergency Failure TDN = Time Delay Neutral

Seismic Qualied
Eatons medium voltage circuit breaker transfer switch assemblies are seismically tested or qualied by analysis based on actual testing done on similar equipment, to exceed the requirements based upon the following 2009 IBC parameters:

Why Use Vacuum Circuit Breakers Instead of Load Interrupter Switches for Automatic Transfer?
Vacuum circuit breakers are suitable for multiple switching (500010,000 or even more) operations between sources involved in automatic transfer system. Duty cycle of load interrupter switch is limited (5 to 50 operations) by ANSI C37.22 Vacuum circuit breakers are rated for both load current switching as well as interrupting fault currents, where as the load interrupter switches are rated for load current switching only Vacuum circuit breakers allow use of various relay schemes (for example, phase and ground overcurrent, under and overvoltage, under and overfrequency, directional overcurrent, directional power, differential, etc.) for protection and coordination as desired for a given application. Relaying schemes are either not possible or very limited when using load interrupter switches Drawout circuit breakers are easily maintainable
Site Classication D (Also covers Site Classication A, B and C): Fa = 1.0 (and higher for lower values of SS) Fv = 1.5 (and higher for lower values of S1) Spectral Response Accelerations: SS = 285%g, and S1 = 124%g SMS = 2.85g, SM1 = 1.86g SDS = 2.51g, SD1 = 1.24g
Eatons test criteria: Frequency range: 1100 Hz Peak front-to-back and side-toside spectral accelerations in the frequency range of 312 Hz plotted at 5% damping are greater than 2.51g (SDS). The vertical capabilities are at least 2/3 that of the horizontal. These levels exceed the required 2009 UBC seismic levels for the entire continental United States with the exception of areas near the New Madrid fault zone
Programmable engine test mode and test run timer Source-1 availableone Form C contact Source-2 availableone Form C contact Communication capability via PowerNet Real-time clock and date Phase reversal on Source 2 Phase reversal on Source 1 Go to Emergency feature Preferred source selector for use on systems comprised of utility/utility or utility/generator Overcurrent lockout feature Plant Exerciser with fail-safe feature Automatic or manual pushbutton re-transfer selection PT ratio set points Closed Transition with Default to In-Phase Transition with Default to Time Delay Neutral (for closed transition switches only)
Additional Options
Overcurrent protection: Normal Emergency Eatons Power Xpert and IQ metering: normal and emergency

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 12 003
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch (VCP-W)

General Description
12.0-3
Eaton IQ Analyzer metering: normal and emergency Space heater Closed transition with sync check Partial discharge InsulGard relay Communications: INCOM Modbus RTU Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet)
is a true mechanically and electrically trip-free design, meaning that while holding a mechanical trip command, the breaker contacts will not close or touch while receiving an electrical or mechanical close command. Each CBS is electrically operated by these control voltages: 120 Vac close and ac capacitor trip, or 48 Vdc, 125 Vdc or 250 Vdc. AC control voltage is derived from potential transformers connected in the line side of each CBS. The DC control voltage is provided by the user. Controls and indicators are functionally grouped on the front control panel and include: closing spring status, close and trip button, operation counter, contact status indicators and a T handle latch (located at the bottom of the control panel). Each CBS includes a control switch, and red and green lights to indicate the CBS contact position.
voltage, frequency and phase angle. If a power source is lost, the closed transition ATC controller will operate in the open mode. ATC controller capabilities include:
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Circuit Breaker Switches

Switching is provided by Eatons VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers in ANSI voltages of 5 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV and 38 kV. Circuit breaker switches (CBS) are horizontal drawout types up to 27 kV. The 38 kV CBS is a roll-on-the-oor design and rolls directly in and out of the bottom compartment. The CBS includes ve major components: vacuum interrupter pole units, stored energy mechanism, push rod assembly, primary disconnecting contacts, and removable glass polyester insulating barriers.
Contacts
Primary disconnects are silver-plated copper. Secondary contacts are silverplated and automatically engage in the CBS operating position. They can be manually engaged in the CBS test position.
Vacuum Interrupters
Each CBS includes three vacuum interrupters, separately mounted in a self-contained, self-aligning pole unit that is easily removed. A direct reading contact erosion indicator is clearly visible when the CBS is withdrawn from the compartment. Each vacuum interrupter pole unit is mounted on glass polyester supports for 5 kV and 15 kV ratings and epoxy supports for 27 kV and 38 kV ratings. The unique, nonsliding current transfer system from the movable vacuum interrupter stem to the CBS consists of a series of tin-plated, high conductivity copper leaf conductors. The conductors are swaged onto the movable vacuum interrupter stem and provide:
Continuous monitoring of all three phases of all loads and voltage on the source and bus Generator testing under load Simplied, custom programming on the faceplate keypad to meet specic user requirements. There are no DIP switches to set Visual status indications of both sources and the load. Easy-to-use: At-a-glance overview of the MV ATS status and parameters and key diagnostic data Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed on the LED display plus the power source in use Displays historical information including Source 1 and Source 2 run time, available time, and connected time, load energized time, number of transfers, and the date, time and reason for the last 16 transfers
Safety
Double deadfront shields isolate the operator from high voltage when the CBS is energized. The CBS can be connected or disconnected with the compartment door closed by a manually operated levering device. Safety interlocks provide for the mechanism to be held mechanically trip-free during racking. Closing springs will discharge automatically when the CBS is being withdrawn.
ATC-600 Open Transition Transfer

When the system is operating from the normal source, the ATC-600 controller indicates real-time values for volts and frequency on the front panel LED display with an indication of the power source in use. The ATC-600 controller continuously monitors either singlephase or three-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the load. The ATC-600 controller allows system conguration selection for Source 1/ Source 2 as Utility/Generator, or Dual Generator, or Dual Utility. When Source 1 voltage or frequency is detected to be below userprogrammed set points, transfer to Source 2 is initiated. The transfer occurs when Source 2 voltage and frequency are detected to be within programmed parameters. While the load is connected to Source 2, the ATC-600 controller continues to monitor Source 1. When Source 1 voltage and frequency return to within programmed parameters of Source 1, and after a programmed time delay, load transfer back to Source 1 is initiated. The load transfer back to Source 1 is open type because the Source 2 circuit breaker switch is opened rst after which the Source 1 circuit breaker switch is closed.
Maintenance
The stored energy mechanism and control components are easily accessible and can be inspected by removing the front panel. Minor maintenance when required, such as lubricating the mechanism and accessing the control components, is simplied.
Improved current ow because the multi-point contact offers very low electrical resistance No required maintenance because the current transfer from the movable stem to the CBS primary conductor is a nonsliding and nonrolling design Longer vacuum interrupter life Operation is by a motor-charged stored energy spring mechanism charged by a universal electric motor, or a manual levering tool in an emergency. The stored energy mechanism
CA08104001E
Operation Sequence
Transfer is initiated by Eatons ATC controller microprocessor-based logic door mounted device. Two ATC controller models, Open or Closed Transition, are available. Both models are identical except that the closed transition ATC controller will not initiate the transfer until both power sources are synchronized in
Operation

General Descriptions
September 2011
Sheet 12 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
ATC Controller
Bus and Bus Insulation

Bus
The main bus is copper. A set of either 1200A or 2000A main bus is provided with provisions for future extension. Bolted bus connections are silverplated for positive contact and low resistance. Each joint is insulated with easily installed boots. The bus is braced to withstand fault currents equal to the close and latch rating of the circuit breakers. All bus, bus supports and connections will withstand stresses produced by currents equal to the momentary ratings of the circuit breakers. Temperature rise of the bus and connections conforms to ANSI standards and is documented by factory testing. The copper ground bus extends the entire length of the MV ATS. An optional fully rated neutral bus (insulated or noninsulated) extends the entire length of the MV ATS.
Incoming line and feeder cable lugs are provided.
Protective Relays
Customer-requested protective relays can be provided and installed in the MV ATS. Refer to Tab 4.
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring

Refer to Tab 5, Section 5.3 for details of partial discharge sensing and monitoring option.
ATC-800
ATC-800 Closed Transition Transfer

When the system is operating from the normal source, Eatons ATC-800 controller indicates real-time values for volts and frequency on the front panel LED display with an indication of the power source in use. The ATC-800 controller continuously monitors either single-phase or three-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the load. The ATC-800 controller allows system conguration selection for Source 1/ Source 2 as Utility/Generator, or Dual Generator, or Dual Utility. The ATC-800 controller provides for selection of closed transition enabled or disabled. When enabled, it is possible for load to be transferred from Source 1 to Source 2 without interruption of power to the load when both sources are available. The source paralleling during load transfer is less than 100 milliseconds. When disabled, the two sources cannot operate in parallel. When Source 1 voltage or frequency is detected to be below the userprogrammed set points, transfer to Source 2 is initiated. The transfer occurs when Source 2 voltage and frequency are detected to be within the programmed parameters. While the load is connected to Source 2, the ATC-800 controller continues to monitor Source 1. When Source 1 frequency and voltage return to within programmed limits of Source 1, and after a programmed time delay, the load is transferred back to Source 1. When the closed transition mode is enabled, Source 1 is closed rst, then Source 2 is opened without power interruption to the load. When in the disabled mode, Source 2 is opened rst and then Source 1 is closed.
Note: See Page 12.0-6 for ATC controller programming selections and ratings.
Metering
Customer-requested metering can be provided. Associated instrument transformers are included. Current transformers are provided and wired to shorting-type terminal blocks. Potential transformers are provided including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means for metering. A choice of Eaton microprocessorbased metering is available, such as IQ Series or Power Xpert. Refer to Tab 2.
Bus Insulation
The main bus is insulated with epoxy, applied in the uidized bed process. When applied in this process, the epoxy is nonhygroscopic, inert, and track, mold and fungus resistant. Thermal and electrical performance is enhanced because the epoxy is bonded directly to the bus bar conductor, eliminating the air gap between insulation and conductor. Heat transfer is greatly improved, resulting in the bus system running cooler. No air gap exists for insulation damage or corona discharge. The main bus supports are glass polyester for 5 kV and 15 kV ratings (except 63 kA rating) and cycloaliphatic epoxy for 27 kV and 38 kV ratings. The main bus supports for 63 kA ratings are porcelain.
Enclosure Construction
Metal-clad integrity provides maximum circuit separation and safety through isolated grounded metal compartments, complete isolation of all conductors, and no live parts are exposed when a door is opened.
Communications
When the ATC controller is provided with an Eaton IPONI communication network interface, an MV ATS can be included on a PowerNet communications network, providing for remote monitoring and control using a PC.
Outdoor Enclosures
Two outdoor enclosure styles are available. Aisleless, mounted on an integral base frame with a weatherproof enclosure for eld assembly. A weatherproof door is provided on the circuit breaker switch drawout side Sheltered aisle mounted on an integral base frame with a weatherproof enclosure for eld assembly. The enclosure is extended on the circuit breaker switch drawout side to form an operating and/or maintenance aisle with sufcient space to permit interchange of circuit breaker
Terminations and Secondary Wiring

Eatons MV ATS includes terminal blocks for secondary wire terminations plus an inventory of spare terminal connections. One control circuit cutout device is provided in each CBS housing. Secondary wire is #14 AWG, Type SIS rated 600 Vac, 90C. The wires terminate on terminal blocks, identied on marker strips numbered in agreement with the connection diagrams.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 12 005

General Description
12.0-5
switches. A weatherproof door with an inside quick release latch mechanism is located at each end of the inside, even when locked from the outside. Interior lights, light switches, and duplex ground fault receptacles are provided in the aisle. Each vertical section is provided with tubular-type space heaters operated at half voltage for long life. 500V or 250V rated heaters are used at 240V or 120V respectively. Power is furnished from a control power transformer mounted in the MV ATS. As an option, heaters can be wired to provide temporary heating during storage.
Shorting terminal blocks are provided on each current transformer secondary.
Nameplates
External engraved nameplates are screw mounted on the face of each MV ATS assembly for each main and feeder circuit. Nameplates are laminated plastic with black 0.2-inch (5.1 mm) high characters on a white background. A master nameplate includes MV ATS designation, voltage and ampere ratings, short circuit rating, manufacturers name, and shop order number. Internal engraved nameplates are screw mounted within the MV ATS to identify control components such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons and switches.
Portable lifting device for lifting the circuit breaker on or off the rails
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: For 5 kV, 15 kV and 27 kV circuit breakers.
Ramp for rolling a circuit breaker directly onto the oor from the lower compartment
Test cabinet for testing electrically operated circuit breakers outside housing Dockable transport dolly for moving a circuit breaker outside of the cabinet
Auxiliary Equipment
Voltage and Control Power Transformers
Voltage transformers are drawoutdrawer mounted for ratings up to 27 kV. Control power transformers up to 15 kV, 15 kVA, single-phase are drawout-drawer mounted. Voltage transformers for 38 kV rating and control power transformers for 27 kV and 38 kV ratings are x mounted with primary fuses in drawout doors. Up to three voltage transformers can be mounted in a drawer. Drawers are in enclosed auxiliary compartments and can be withdrawn on rails for easy inspection, testing and fuse replacement. When a drawer is withdrawn, the fuses are automatically disconnected, grounded, and primary bus stabs isolated by glass polyester shutters. A mechanical interlock is provided so that the secondary circuit breaker must be open before the control power transformer drawer or control power transformer primary fuse drawer can be withdrawn.
Electrical levering device.
Finish
Standard nish, inside and out, is a thermosetting, polyester powder paint (ANSI 61 gray) applied electrostatically to all metal parts (steel and aluminum) that are rst precleaned and phosphatized. This nish provides excellent mechanical strength and scratch resistance, resists chalking caused by the suns ultraviolet rays, and meets the salt spray requirements of ASTM B-117.
Factory Testing
Circuit Breaker Switch Element
Alignment test with master cell to verify all interfaces and interchangeability Circuit breaker operated over a range of minimum to maximum control voltage One-minute dielectric test
Circuit Breaker Switch Housing

Alignment test with master circuit breaker to verify interfaces One-minute dielectric test on primary and secondary circuits Operational sequence test to verify operation of wiring, relays and other devices Final inspection and quality check
Accessories
Provided for testing, inspection, maintenance and operation.
Maintenance tool for manually charging the circuit breaker closing spring and manually operating the shutter Levering crank for moving the circuit breaker between test and connected positions Test jumper for electrically operating the circuit breaker while out of the compartment Lifting yoke for lifting the circuit breaker on or off compartment rails
Three certied copies of the factory test reports are provided.
Test Witnessing
As an option, all factory tests can be witnessed by the customer or customer representative.
Ring-type current transformers are provided with thermal and mechanical ratings coordinated with the circuit breakers. Current transformer accuracy meets ANSI standards. Standard current transformer location on the bus side and line side of the 5 kV, 15 kV and 27 kV CBS units provide front accessibility so that adding or changing transformers can be accomplished when an Eatons MV ATS is de-energized without breaking the high voltage connections and primary insulation.
CA08104001E
Installation
Complete installation, startup, testing and long-term maintenance is available from Eatons Electrical Services & Systems (EESS).
Rail extensions and rail clamps.

Technical Data
Table 12.0-1. ATC Controller Programming Selections
Parameters Set Points ATC Controller Open Transition
September 2011
Sheet 12 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Closed Transition
Time delay normal to emergency Time delay emergency to normal Time delay engine cool-off Time delay engine start Time delay neutral Closed Closed transition frequency differential Closed transition voltage deviation Single-phase In-phase frequency differential Synchronized time Load sequencing Pretransfer Signal device Plant exerciser Preferred source selector Sensing System selection
0 to 1800 seconds 0 to 1800 seconds 0 to 1800 seconds 0 to 120 seconds 0 to 120 Seconds or based on load voltage decay (10 to 30% of nominal voltage) Enabled or disabled 0.0 to 0.3 Hz 1 to 5% (voltage) Enabled or disabled 0.0 to 3.0 Hz 1 to 60 minutes 0 to 10 devices 0 to 20 seconds (Up to 10 devices) Load or no load transfer (selectable) Source 1 or source 2 or none Three-phase or single-phase Utility/generator or utility/utility or generator/generator
Optional parameters.
Table 12.0-2. ATC Controller Ratings

Input control power range Voltage measurements of: 65 Vac rms to 160 Vac rms, 50/60 Hz Source 1 VAB Source 1 VBC Source 1 VCA 0 to 790 Vac rms, 50/60 Hz 2% of nominal range Source 1 and source 2 40 Hz to 60 Hz 0.1 Hz Source 1 and source 2 50 to 90% of nominal range 105 to 120% of nominal voltage 90 to 100% of nominal frequency 100 to 120% of nominal frequency 5A, 250 Vac 5A, 30 Vdc 10A, 250 Vac 10A, 30 Vdc 10A, 250 Vac 10A, 30 Vdc Source 2 VAB Source 2 VBC Source 2 VCA Load VAB Load VBC Load VCA
Voltage measurement range Voltage measurement accuracy Frequency measurement for: Frequency measurement range Frequency measurement accuracy Undervoltage sensing Undervoltage dropout range Overvoltage dropout range Underfrequency dropout range Overfrequency dropout range
Contact Outputs
Two Form A contacts for generator start Four Form A contacts for control functions Form C contacts for control functions
Front Panel Indications

Mode Automatic Test Program LED Lights Source 1 available: amber Source 1 connected: green Source 1 preferred: red Load energized: red LED Display History information Set points Real-time clock Blinking LED indicates automatic operation Illuminated LED indicates unit is in the test mode Illuminated LED indicates unit is in the program mode Blinking LED indicates the user is viewing set points in the program mode Source 2 available: amber Source 2 connected: green Source 2 preferred: red
20C to +70C 30C to +85C
Environmental Temperature Range

Operation Storage
Optional.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 12 007

Technical Data
12.0-7
Drawout Vacuum Circuit Breakers

Refer to Tables 5.4-1B, 5.4-2 and 5.4-3 in Tab 5, Section 5.4 for available VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. Please note maximum available continuous current is limited to 2000A for medium voltage transfer switch.
i ii 1
Typical One-Line Diagram

____ Ampere Main Bus Heaters __ k VA 1-Phase CPT Lights GFCI Receptacle Other Loads When Required Cable Lugs To Load
2 3 4 5
ATC Controller
6
52-1 Circuit Breaker
____ A, __ MVA
(3) CTs ____ :5
VCP-W
Breaker #1 Control Power

(When Required)
52-2 Circuit Breaker

____ A, __ MVA
(3)
VCP-W
Breaker #2 Control Power

(When Required)
7 8 9 10
Digitrip 3010
(Dual Powered)
IQ Analyzer Meter (Optional) or IQ DP-4000 Meter

(Optional)
CTs ____ :5
Digitrip 3010
(Dual Powered)
IQ Analyzer Meter (Optional) or IQ DP-4000 Meter

(Optional)
(2 or 3)
VTs
(2 or 3)
VTs
11 12
Surge Arresters
(Optional)
Cable Lugs
Cable Lugs
Surge Arresters
(Optional)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Normal Power
(Source #1)
Emergency Power
(Source #2)
Figure 12.0-1. Typical MV ATS One-Line DiagramUsing Vacuum Breakers
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 12 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Layout Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Cable Entrance
7.00 (177.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
18.50 (469.9)
C L
Top Bottom Load Breaker Breaker Cables
C L 96.25 (2444.8)
C L
C L 101.25 (2571.8)
Secondary Control Wires Entrance
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
Line VTs
Line VTs Main Breaker (1200 A)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Main Breaker (1200 A)
95.00 (2413.0)
Bus CPT (Optional)
Bus CPT (Optional)
115.00 (2921.0)
Line VTs
Line VTs
Shipping Group
Shipping Group
Front Elevation
Front Elevation
Figure 12.0-2. Indoor 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers

Circuit breakers are packaged and shipped separately. Indoor 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA rating is available in narrow design with overall width of 52.00 inches (1320.8 mm).
Figure 12.0-3. Outdoor Aisleless 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers
Circuit breakers are packaged and shipped separately.
Table 12.0-3. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)

Equipment Type Indoor Outdoor aisleless Switchgear Assembly 4400 (1998) 5600 (2542) Circuit Breaker 350575 (159261) 350575 (159261)
Table 12.0-4. Minimum Recommended Clearances in Inches (mm)

Equipment Type Indoor Outdoor aisleless Front 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0) Side Rear
32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 12 009

Layout Dimensions
12.0-9

72.00 (1828.8)
i ii 1 2
Line VTs
C L
C L
3 4
120.00 (3048.0)

169.38 (4302.3)
Bus CPT Main Breaker (1200 A)

(Optional)
5 6
Line VTs
38.00 (965.2)
Shipping Group
7
Aisle 72.00 (1828.8)
8 9
Front Elevation
38.00 (965.2)
Floor Plan
10 11
Equipment Type Outdoor sheltered aisle Front N/A Side Rear
Figure 12.0-4. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers

Equipment Type Outdoor sheltered aisle Switchgear Assembly 8000 (3632) Circuit Breaker 350575 (159261)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 12 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

7.00 (177.7)

108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
C L
Load Cables
C L
C L 96.25 (2444.8)
C L
Load Cables
C L
C L
101.25 (2571.8)
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
Line VTs
Line VTs
Line VTs
Line VTs
95.00 (2413.0)
115.00 (2921.0)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Main Breaker (2000 A) Bus CPT

(Optional)
Shipping Group
Shipping Group
Front Elevation
Front Elevation
Figure 12.0-5. Indoor 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers
Figure 12.0-6. Outdoor Aisleless 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers

Equipment Type Indoor Outdoor aisleless Switchgear Assembly 6900 (3133) 8700 (3950) Circuit Breaker 410575 (186261) 410575 (186261)

Equipment Type Indoor Outdoor aisleless Front Side Rear
70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4) 70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 12 011

Layout Dimensions
12.0-11

108.00 (2743.2)
i ii 1
Line VTs Line VTs
2 3
C L
Load Cables
C L
C L

169.38 (4302.3)
120.00 (3048.0)
4 5 6 7
Bus CPT
(Optional)
38.00 (965.2)
Shipping Group
Aisle
72.00 (1828.8)
Front Elevation
8 9 10 11
38.00 (965.2)
Floor Plan
Figure 12.0-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers

Aisles shipped separately. Circuit breakers are packaged and shipped separately.

Equipment Type Outdoor sheltered aisle Switchgear Assembly 12,300 (5584) Circuit Breaker 410575 (186261)

Equipment Type Outdoor sheltered aisle Front N/A Side Rear
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 12 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7.00 (177.7)
108.00 (2743.2)

108.00 (2743.2)
C L
Load Cables
C L
C L 96.25 (2444.8)
C L
C L
Load Cables
C L
101.25 (2571.8)
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
8 9 10 11 12 13
Shipping Group
Main Breaker (1200 or 2000 A) Line VTs Line VTs
Line VTs Line VTs
95.00 (2413.0)
115.00 (2921.0)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Main Breaker (1200 or 2000 A)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Shipping Group
Front Elevation
Front Elevation
Figure 12.0-8. Indoor 27 kV, 1200 or 2000A Main Breakers

Figure 12.0-9. Outdoor Aisleless 27 kV, 1200 or 2000A Main Breakers

Equipment Type Indoor 1200A Indoor 2000A Outdoor aisleless 1200A Outdoor aisleless 2000A Switchgear Assembly 7100 (3223) 7400 (3360) 8900 (4041) 9200 (4177) Circuit Breaker 415 (188) each 475 (216) each 415 (188) each 475 (216) each

Equipment Type Indoor Outdoor aisleless Front Side Rear
70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4) 70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 12 013

Layout Dimensions
12.0-13

7.00 (177.8)
126.00 (3200.4)
i ii 1
Line VTs & VT Fuses Line VTs 30.00 & (762.0) VT Fuses Superstructure
2 3
C L Load Cables
C L
C L
Control Compartment Control Compartment Control Compartment
128.75 (3270.3)
4
CPT Fuses
(Optional)
100.00 (2540.0) Main Breaker (1200 or 2000 A)
5 6 7 8
Main Breaker (1200 or 2000 A) Bus CPT

(Optional)
84.00 (2133.6) Shipping Group
42.00 (1066.8) Shipping Group
9 10 11
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
Figure 12.0-10. Indoor 38 kV, 1200 or 2000A Main Breakers

Each superstructure is shipped separately. Circuit breakers are packaged and shipped separately.

Equipment Type Indoor 1200A Indoor 2000A Switchgear Assembly 7400 (3360) 7700 (3496) Circuit Breaker 1080 (490) each 1140 (518) each

Equipment Type Indoor Front Side Rear
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
84.00 (2133.6) 38.00 (965.2) 42.00 (1066.8)
CA08104001E
12.0-14 Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 12 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide

September 2011
Sheet 13 001
13.0-A
Transformer Product SelectorLiquid-Filled Types

Table 13.0-1A. Transformer Product Selector
Transformer Available Primary Secondary kVA Primary Unit Substation (Steps down utility service voltage) 69 kV 34.5 kV 500 kVA 20 MVA Maximum Voltage CAG Tab Types Application Considerations
i ii
Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled

13 Mineral OilTypical outdoor installation. SiliconeApplied where ammability is a concern. Vegetable OilSpecied where ammability and clean-up are a concern. Transformer is part of a close-coupled assembly that includes both primary and secondary equipment. High short-circuit strength. Sealed tank design is impervious to the environment.
1 2 3 4 5
Secondary 34.5 kV Unit Substation (Provides secondary system voltage)
600V
300 kVA 3750 kVA
14
Pad-Mounted TransformerLiquid-Filled
34.5 kV 5 kV 45 kVA 5 MVA 17 Mineral OilTypical outdoor installation. SiliconeApplied where ammability is a concern. Vegetable OilSpecied where ammability and clean-up are a concern. Stand-alone unit servicing underground distribution loads such as shopping centers, schools, industrial and institutional facilities. Tamper-resistant compartmentalization allows unit to be installed in open access applications.
6 7 8 9
Network Transformer (Spot Networks)Liquid-Filled

Secondary Spot Network 34.5 kV 480V 500 kVA 3000 kVA 18 Mineral OilTypical outdoor installation. SiliconeApplied where ammability is a concern. Vegetable OilSpecied where ammability and clean-up are a concern. Network transformers are part of a commercial spot network system where multiple transformer units feed large potential loads in parallel, such as four 2500 kVA units feeding 480/277 volt loads. Liquid network transformers have uid-lled primary mag-break integral switch and network protectors eld-mounted on the secondary ange with safety interlocks. Installations are usually indoors, and multiple primary circuits and sources that can be paralleled must exist upstream, usually supplied by the utility. Government buildings with high levels of loads at the utilization voltage merit these systems. The loads are not adversely affected by one primary circuit outage, and may not be affected by two being down in four transformer spot network systems.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
69 kV 34.5 kV 750 kVA 20 MVA 16 Mineral OilTypical outdoor installation. SiliconeApplied where ammability is a concern. Vegetable OilSpecied where ammability and clean-up are a concern. Stand-alone unit servicing underground distribution loads such as shopping centers, schools, industrial and institutional facilities. Tamper-resistant compartmentalization allows unit to be installed in open access applications.
CA08104001E
13.0-B Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide

September 2011
Sheet 13 002
Transformer Product SelectorDry Types

Table 13.0-1A. Transformer Product Selector (Continued)
Transformer Maximum Voltage Available Primary Secondary kVA Primary Unit Substation (Steps down utility service voltage) 34.5 kV 15 kV 500 kVA 10 MVA CAG Tab Types Application Considerations
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Unit Substation TransformerDry-Type

13 VPIVacuum pressure impregnation with polyester resin. Used in commercial construction and industrial application. VPEVacuum Pressure Encapsulated with silicon resin. Applied where MIL-1-24092 spec is required (salt-spray application). Secondary 34.5 kV Unit Substation (Provides secondary system voltage) 600V 112.5 kVA 14 3750 kVA Cast CoilUses the electrical and mechanical strength of epoxy to provide higher levels of performance and environmental protection in high moisture, dust-laden and chemical environments. Windings are hermetically sealed in epoxy. ResiblocCoils insulated with epoxy and reinforced with roving glass ber. Highly resistant to short-circuit forces, severe climate conditions and cycling loads. Transformer is part of a close-coupled assembly that includes both primary and secondary equipment. Explosion resistant, re resistant and nonpolluting to the environment.
Network Transformer (Spot Networks)Dry-Type

Secondary Spot Network 34.5 kV 480V 500 kVA 3000 kVA 18 VPIVacuum pressure impregnation with polyester resin. Used in commercial construction and industrial application. VPEVacuum Pressure Encapsulated with silicon resin. Applied where MIL-1-24092 spec is required (salt-spray application). Cast CoilUses the electrical and mechanical strength of epoxy to provide higher levels of performance and environmental protection in high moisture, dust-laden and chemical environments. Windings are hermetically sealed in epoxy. ResiblocCoils insulated with epoxy and reinforced with roving glass ber. Highly resistant to short-circuit forces, severe climate conditions and cycling loads. Network transformers are part of a commercial spot network system where multiple transformer units feed large potential loads in parallel, such as four 2500 kVA units feeding 480/277 volt loads. Dry-type network transformers do not have an integral switch. Network protectors are eld mounted on the secondary ange, or assembly mounted in switchgear sections. Installations are usually indoors, and multiple primary circuits and sources that can be paralleled must exist upstream, usually supplied by the utility. Government buildings with high levels of loads at the utilization voltage merit these systems. The loads are not adversely affected by one primary circuit outage, and may not be affected by two being down in four transformer spot network systems.
CA08104001E
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above

September 2011
Sheet 13 001
13.0-1
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above
Contents
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Primary Liquid-Type Substations General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-2 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-4 Primary Dry-Type Substations General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-9 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-10 Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-13 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16312 Section 26 11 13
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Primary Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
21
CA08104001E
13.0-2 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Primary Liquid-Type Substations
General Description
September 2011
Sheet 13 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Denition
A primary unit substation is a close-coupled assembly consisting of enclosed primary high voltage equipment, three-phase power transformer and enclosed secondary medium voltage equipment. The following electrical ratings are typical:
Primary voltage: 6.969 kV Transformer kVA: 50020,000 kVA Secondary voltage: 2.4 kV34.5 kV
A primary unit substation is dened in the following standards:

NEMA Standard No. 201-1982 IEEE Standard No. 100-1977
Primary unit substations are used to step down utility distribution voltages to in-plant distribution voltages. Primary unit substation transformers are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable IEEE standards.
Primary Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
Easier to Specify
Standardization through IEEE standards results in proven designs with complete accessory equipment and features.
Ratings Available
kVAThree-Phase:

Advantages
As a result of locating power transformers and their close-coupled equipment as close as possible to the areas of load concentration, the secondary distribution cables or busways are kept to minimum lengths. This concept has obvious advantages such as:

6.969 kV (350 kV BIL and below) 50020,000 kVA 60 Hz or 50 Hz
Highest Short-Circuit Strength

Highly researched and thoroughly tested designs provide the short-circuit strength necessary to withstand the repeated large short-circuit currents that are available in modern systems.
Frequency:
Transformer Fluids:
Mineral oil Silicone uid Environmentally friendly uid

Reduced power losses Improved voltage regulation Improved service continuity Reduced exposure to faults Increased exibility Minimum installation cost Efcient space utilization
Easier Handling and Reduced Maintenance

Compact designs reduce the cost of rigging and hauling and require smaller installation space. Straight-forward design and simplied accessories reduce maintenance costs.
Note: For additional information about insulating uids, see Tab 14, Pages 14.0-314.0-8.
Primary and Secondary Equipment:

Additional advantages of Eatons unit substations in this unied approach are:
Single-source responsibility Complete electrical and mechanical control over coordination of the three close-coupled sections Availability of all switchgear types as secondaries gives broad application exibility Modern design Composite assembly retains proven safety and integrity of each of its three major parts
Air terminal chamber (ATC) Load interrupter switchgear, Type MVS Metal-enclosed circuit breaker switchgear, Types MEB, MEF and MSB Metal-clad circuit breaker switchgear, Type VacClad-W MV motor control assemblies, Type AMPGARD Cover-mounted bushings (liquid transformer only) Medium voltage busway
Note: For additional information about transformer applications and types of insulating uids, see Tab 14.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 13 003
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Primary Liquid-Type Substations
General Description
13.0-3
Standard Features Liquid-Filled Transformer

Coverwelded to tank Cooling tubes (radiators)
Note: Radiator position and number of radiators will vary based upon design.
i

H3
ii

X0 X3
1 2 3 4
Bolted handhole on cover Automatic resealing mechanical pressure relief device HV bushing, three total, located in ANSI Segment 2 LV bushing, four total (wye connected), located in ANSI Segment 4
Note: HV and LV bushings may be cover mounted or left/right orientation may be reversed.
H2
X2 X1
H1
5 6 7
Top View
Z-bar ange Lifting loopstwo for lifting cover only Lifting hooksfour for lifting complete unit Jacking provisions on tank or base Ground padtwo total Drain valvefor combination lower lter press connection and complete drain with sampler Base (may be at or formed) Control cabinet for alarm lead termination Diagram instruction nameplate with warning nameplate De-energized tap changer with padlock provisions Liquid temperature indicator with maximum indicating hand Upper valve for upper lter press connection Magnetic liquid level gauge Vacuum pressure gauge with air test and Sealedaire valve
8 9
10 11 12
13 14 15
16 17
Front View
18
Figure 13.0-1. Liquid-Filled Primary Unit Substation Transformer with Wall-Mounted HV and LV Bushings
19 20 21
CA08104001E
Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 13 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Layout Dimensions
Transition Section or Throat
D1R Primary Equipment DP Transformer Center Line D1F D D2F Secondary Equipment DS D2R
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
WP
W1
W Front
W1
WS
Figure 13.0-2. Outdoor Liquid-Filled Primary Unit SubstationsPlan View

Radiator position and number of radiators will vary based on design.
Table 13.0-1. Outdoor Dimension References

Equipment Transformer MVC MVS ME MC Primary or Secondary Equipment 5 kV 5 kV or 15 kV 27 kV MVC MVS ME MC MVS ME MC MVS ME MC Dimensions W, D WS, DS WP, DP, WS, DS WP, DP, WS, DS WP, DP, WS, DS Reference Pages 13.0-6 through 13.0-8 Tab 10, Pages 10.1-24 through 10.1-40 Tab 8, Pages 8.0-15 through 8.0-25 Tab 7, Pages 7.1-4 through 7.1-6 Tab 5, Pages 5.5-1 through 5.5-40
Legend:
MVC = Medium Voltage Motor Control, Type AMPGARD MVS = Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches, Type MVS ME = Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Breakers, Type MEB, MEF, MSB MC = Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Breaker Assemblies, Type VacClad-W
Transition Section or Throat and other Reference Dimensions

Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Four-Wire D1F 25.25 25.25

D1R 16.5
W1 12 20 20 16 35 35 35
D2F 25.25 25.25

D2R 21 16.5
38 kV
Four-wire connections are not available with MVC equipment. For three-phase, four-wire, D1F and D2F are 30.25. For three-phase, four-wire, D1R and D2R are 14.5. Contact Eaton. This product is not available for this voltage and conguration.
September 2011
Sheet 13 005
Layout Dimensions
13.0-5
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UtilizationLiquid-Filled Transformer

A substation using one or two Air Terminal Chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the primary and secondary sides. An ATC uses a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
Air Terminal Chamber
Transformer
i
Air Terminal Chamber
ii
DS
D TX C L of Transformer
DP
1 2 3
W TX W2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
W1
Figure 13.0-3. Liquid-Filled Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View
Table 13.0-2. Primary or Secondary ATC or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage kV 5 or 15 27 38 Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase, Four-Wire W1 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0) 35.00 (889.0) DP 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) W2 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0) 35.00 (889.0) DS 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above. The width of any ATC can be expanded to allow for the installation of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the conduit opening, allow for a 2.00-inch (50.8 mm) lip around the entire perimeter of the ATC.
CA08104001E
Layout Dimensions
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal chambers, see Notes 2 through 6 at bottom of page for dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions. Table 13.0-3. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled HV 6900D, 75 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 500 750 1000 Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth 56 (1442.4) 56 (1442.4) 59 (1498.6) 67 (1701.8) 70 (1778.0) 70 (1778.0) 70 (1778.0) 73 (1854.2) 74 (1879.6)
September 2011
Sheet 13 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 13.0-6. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled HV 22900D, 150 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 5650 (2563) 6400 (2903) 8020 (3638) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 220 (833) 220 (833) 250 (946) 280 (1060) 300 (1136) 330 (1249) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 95 (2413.0) Width Depth
59 (1498.6) 81 (2057.4) 61 (1549.4) 87 (2209.8) 64 (1625.6) 101 (2565.4) 68 (1727.2) 101 (2565.4) 70 (1778.0) 107 (2717.8) 73 (1854.2) 127 (3225.8) 73 (1854.2) 74 (1879.6) 102 (2590.8) 106 (2692.4) 128 (3251.2) 129 (3276.6) 140 (3556.0) 145 (3683.0)
4520 (2050) 120 (454) 4750 (2155) 150 (568) 5590 (2536) 170 (644)
92 (2336.8) 56 (1422.4) 92 (2336.8) 56 (1422.4) 92 (2336.8) 59 (1498.6) 92 (2336.8) 67 (1701.8) 92 (2336.8) 70 (1778.0) 92 (2336.8) 70 (1778.0)
2000 9500 (4309) 2500 10,550 (4785) 3000 12,000 (5443) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1500 7380 (3348) 210 (795) 2000 8890 (4032) 240 (908) 2500 10,060 (4563) 260 (984)
14,350 (6509) 450 (1703) 95 (2413.0) 19,110 (8668) 700 (2650) 117 (2971.8) 30,880 (14,007) 1210 (4580) 117 (2971.8) 39,080 (17,726) 1600 (6057) 124 (3149.6)
3000 11,110 (5039) 290 (1098) 95 (2413.0) 70 (1778.0) 3750 13,200 (5987) 340 (1287) 95 (2413.0) 73 (1854.2) 5000 18,020 (8174) 620 (2347) 113 (2870.2) 74 (1879.6)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 210 (795) 230 (871) 250 (946) 290 (1098) 310 (1173) 340 (1287) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 95 (2413.0) Width 58 (1473.2) 62 (1574.8) 64 (1625.6) 66 (1676.4) 71 (1803.4) 73 (1854.2) Depth 83 (2108.2) 87 (2209.8) 107 (2717.8) 107 (2717.8) 107 (2717.8) 130 (3302.0) 130 (3302.0) 132 (3352.8) 143 (3632.2) 146 (3708.4)

kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 4840 (2195) 5720 (2595) 7370 (3343) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 160 (606) 180 (681) 210 (795) 230 (871) 260 (984) 350 (1325) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 95 (2413.0) Width 56 (1422.4) 59 (1498.6) 65 (1651.0) Depth 79 (2006.6) 78 (1981.2) 92 (2336.8)
750 1000 1500
5660 (2567) 6640 (3012) 8000 (3629)
2000 9350 (4241) 2500 10,860 (4926) 3000 12,400 (5625) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
2000 8760 (3973) 2500 9940 (4509) 3000 11,650 (5284) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
68 (1727.2) 114 (2895.6) 68 (1727.2) 125 (3175.0) 70 (1778.0) 127 (3225.8) 127 (3225.8) 131 (3327.4) 138 (3505.2) 139 (3530.6)
13,330 (6046) 390 (1476) 95 (2413.0) 72 (1828.8) 16,640 (7548) 480 (1817) 95 (2413.0) 75 (1905.0) 30,300 (13,744) 1220 (4618) 114 (2895.6) 113 (2870.2) 34,830 (15,799) 1230 (4656) 114 (2895.6) 118 (2997.2)
14,500 (6577) 430 (1628) 95 (2413.0) 74 (1879.6) 19,510 (8850) 720 (2725) 118 (2997.2) 74 (1879.6) 30,270 (13,730) 1120 (4240) 118 (2997.2) 101 (2565.4) 38,140 (17,300) 1500 (5678) 124 (3149.6) 105 (2667.0)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 250 (946) 280 (1060) 290 (1098) 290 (1098) 330 (1249) 350 (1325) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 92 (2336.8) 95 (2413.0) Width 65 (1657.0) 66 (1676.4) 69 (1752.6) 70 (1778.0) 73 (1854.2) 74 (1879.6) Depth 64 (1625.6) 78 (1981.2) 88 (2235.2) 96 (2438.4) 106 (2692.4) 130 (3302.0) 133 (3378.2) 136 (3454.4) 139 (3530.6) 143 (3632.2)

750 1000 1500
6630 (3007) 7510 (3406) 9040 (4100)
57 (1447.8) 79 (2006.6) 62 (1574.8) 81 (2057.4) 63 (1600.2) 100 (2540.0) 65 (1651.0) 108 (2743.2) 70 (1778.0) 114 (2895.6) 73 (1854.2) 127 (3225.8) 129 (3276.6) 131 (3327.4) 140 (3556.0) 143 (3632.2)
2000 10,110 (4586) 2500 11,670 (5788) 3000 12,760 (5793) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
2000 8700 (3946) 2500 10,290 (4667) 3000 11,860 (5380) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
13,410 (6083) 360 (1363) 95 (2413.0) 73 (1854.2) 17,030 (7725) 520 (1968) 99 (2514.6) 75 (1905.0) 29,720 (13,481) 1140 (4315) 109 (2768.6) 113 (2870.2) 35,790 (16,234) 1310 (4959) 116 (2946.4) 117 (2971.8)
15,280 (6931) 440 (1666) 95 (2413.0) 75 (1905.0) 19,370 (8786) 650 (2461) 107 (2717.8) 76 (1930.4) 30,850 (13,993) 1180 (4467) 114 (2895.6) 100 (2540.0) 38,320 (17,382) 1450 (5489) 122 (3098.8) 104 (2641.6)
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. 2. For 55C units, add 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) to W dimension and 10 in (254.0 mm) to D dimension. 3. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) to W dimension for each bus duct throat. 4. Add 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) to W dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber. 5. Add 25.00 inches (635.0 mm) to W dimension for each 27 kV air terminal chamber. 6. Add 35.00 inches (889.0 mm) to W dimension for each 34.5 kV air terminal chamber.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 13 007
Layout Dimensions
13.0-7
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal chambers, see Notes 2 through 6 at bottom of page for dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions. Table 13.0-9. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled HV 34400D, 200 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 7000 (3175) 7720 (3502) 9880 (4481) Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 67 (1701.8) 67 (1701.8) 69 (1752.6) Depth 66 (1676.4) 79 (2006.6) 98 (2489.2)
Table 13.0-12. 65C Rise, Silicone/Environmentally Friendly Fluid HV 6900D, 75 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 4930 (2236) 5940 (2694) 7690 (3488) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 160 (606) 180 (681) 220 (833) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) Width 48 (1219.2) 52 (1320.8) 59 (1498.6) 62 (1574.8) 62 (1574.8) 63 (1600.2) 67 (1701.8) 68 (1727.2) Depth 76 (1930.4) 92 (2336.8) 95 (2413.0) 107 (2717.8) 112 (2844.8) 121 (3073.4) 122 (3098.8) 123 (3124.2)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Width Depth
330 (1249) 115 (2921.0) 350 (1325) 115 (2921.0) 380 (1438) 115 (2921.0) 410 (1552) 115 (2921.0) 450 (1703) 115 (2921.0) 460 (1741) 115 (2921.0)
2000 9270 (4205) 2500 10,630 (4822) 3000 12,280 (5570) 3750 14,540 (8446) 5000 18,620 (8453)
250 (946) 87 (2209.8) 280 (1060) 87 (2209.8) 340 (1287) 87 (2209.8) 380 (1438) 87 (2209.8) 580 (2196) 98 (2489.2)
2000 11,300 (5126) 2500 12,880 (5842) 3000 13,760 (6241) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
71 (1803.4) 112 (2844.8) 71 (1803.4) 122 (3098.8) 72 (1828.8) 130 (3302.0)
16,030 (7271) 520 (1968) 19,780 (8972) 660 (2498) 30,270 (13,730) 1070 (4050) 39,290 (17,822) 1480 (5602)
115 (2921.0) 85 (2159.0) 136 (3454.4) 117 (2971.8) 100 (2540.0) 138 (3505.2) 129 (3276.6) 124 (3149.6) 138 (3505.2) 136 (3454.4) 127 (3225.8) 140 (3556.0)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 5010 (2272) 6090 (2762) 7730 (3506) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 160 (606) 180 (681) 220 (833) 250 (946) 270 (1022) 310 (1173) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 7230 (3279) 8040 (3647) 9920 (4500) Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 68 (1727.2) 68 (1727.2) 69 (1752.6) Depth 67 (1701.8) 80 (2032.0) 94 (2387.6)
6 7 8 9 10 11
48 (1219.2) 79 (2006.6) 53 (1346.2) 82 (2082.8) 55 (1397.0) 116 (2946.4) 59 (1498.6) 118 (2997.2) 61 (1549.4) 119 (3022.6) 65 (1651.0) 119 (3022.6) 121 (3073.4) 122 (3098.8) 131 (3327.4) 131 (3327.4)
340 (1287) 115 (2921.0) 360 (1363) 115 (2921.0) 390 (1476) 115 (2921.0) 430 (1628) 115 (2921.0) 460 (1741) 115 (2921.0) 500 (1893) 115 (2921.0)
2000 9270 (4205) 2500 10,510 (4767) 3000 12,100 (5488) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
2000 11,700 (5307) 2500 13,120 (5351) 3000 14,400 (6532) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
71 (1803.4) 116 (2946.4) 73 (1854.2) 124 (3149.6) 76 (1930.4) 128 (3251.2) 136 (3454.4) 139 (3530.6) 140 (3556.0) 145 (3683.0)
14,380 (6523) 390 (1476) 87 (2209.8) 65 (1651.0) 18,490 (8387) 560 (2120) 97 (2463.8) 68 (1727.2) 32,180 (14,597) 1020 (3861) 98 (2489.2) 112 (2844.8) 46,580 (21,128) 1760 (6662) 119 (3022.6) 120 (3048.0)
16,210 (7353) 540 (2044) 20,490 (9294) 740 (2801) 31,470 (14,275) 1190 (4505) 36,390 (16,506) 1190 (4505)
115 (2921.0) 77 (1955.8) 124 (3149.6) 95 (2413.0) 133 (3378.2) 122 (3098.8) 132 (3352.8) 125 (3175.0)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 9110 (4132) 1000 9370 (4250) 1500 10,760 (4881) 2000 12,210 (5538) 2500 13,600 (6169) 3000 14,990 (6799) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) Depth 63 (1600.2) 70 (1778.0) 93 (2362.2)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
49 (1244.6) 79 (2006.6) 51 (1295.4) 82 (2082.8) 56 (1422.4) 116 (2946.4) 59 (1498.6) 118 (2997.2) 64 (1625.6) 119 (3022.6) 66 (1676.4) 115 (2921.0) 121 (3073.4) 122 (3098.8) 131 (3327.4) 131 (3327.4)
410 (1552) 115 (2921.0) 390 (1476) 115 (2921.0) 410 (1552) 115 (2921.0) 450 (1703) 115 (2921.0) 470 (1779) 115 (2921.0) 510 (1931) 115 (2921.0)
2000 9080 (4119) 2500 11,180 (5071) 3000 12,470 (5656) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
72 (1828.8) 108 (2743.2) 74 (1879.6) 109 (2768.6) 77 (1955.8) 125 (3175.0) 137 (3479.8) 138 (3505.2) 139 (3530.6) 148 (3759.2)
16,590 (7585) 540 (2044) 20,480 (9290) 710 (2688) 32,220 (14,615) 1050 (3975) 38,460 (17,445) 1350 (5110)
115 (2921.0) 77 (1955.8) 122 (3098.8) 94 (2387.6) 125 (3175.0) 123 (3124.2) 135 (3429.0) 124 (3149.6)
14,590 (6618) 360 (1363) 87 (2209.8) 68 (1727.2) 18,330 (8314) 540 (2044) 93 (2362.2) 68 (1727.2) 31,330 (14,211) 970 (3672) 98 (2489.2) 111 (2819.4) 39,050 (17,713) 1230 (4656) 101 (2565.4) 114 (2895.6)
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. 2. For 55C units, add 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) to W dimension and 10 inches (254.0 mm) to D dimension. 3. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) to W dimension for each bus duct throat. 4. Add 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) to W dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber. 5. Add 25.00 inches (635.0 mm) to W dimension for each 27 kV air terminal chamber. 6. Add 35.00 inches (889.0 mm) to W dimension for each 34.5 kV air terminal chamber.
CA08104001E
Layout Dimensions
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal chambers, see Notes 2 through 6 at bottom of page for dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions. Table 13.0-15. 65C Rise, Silicone/Environmentally Friendly Fluid HV 22900D, 150 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 230 (871) 240 (908) 280 (1060) 310 (1173) 338 (1279) 380 (1438) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) 87 (2209.8) Width 52 (1320.8) 54 (1371.6) 57 (1447.8) Depth 73 (1854.2) 91 (2311.4) 95 (2413.0)
September 2011
Sheet 13 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 7600 (3447) 1000 8460 (3837) 1500 10,740 (4872) 2000 12,260 (5561) 2500 13,760 (6241) 3000 15,020 (6813) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth
370 (1401) 107 (2717.8) 390 (1476) 107 (2717.8) 420 (1590) 107 (2717.8) 460 (1741) 107 (2717.8) 490 (1855) 107 (2717.8) 520 (1968) 107 (2717.8)
60 (1524.0) 68 (1727.2) 60 (1524.0) 84 (2133.6) 62 (1574.8) 107 (2717.8) 64 (1625.6) 115 (2921.0) 64 (1625.6) 121 (3073.4) 66 (1676.4) 121 (3073.4) 129 (3276.6) 132 (3352.8) 136 (3454.4) 136 (3454.4)
750 1000 1500
5970 (2708) 6820 (3093) 8710 (3951)
2000 10,140 (4599) 2500 11,890 (5393) 3000 13,480 (6114) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
58 (1473.2) 110 (2794.0) 62 (1574.8) 121 (3073.4) 66 (1676.4) 124 (3149.6) 125 (3175.0) 129 (3276.6) 133 (3378.2) 133 (3378.2)
16,950 (7688) 570 (2158) 20,270 (9194) 650 (2461) 33,980 (15,413) 1200 (4542) 42,340 (19,205) 1440 (5451)
107 (2717.8) 78 (1981.2) 109 (2768.6) 92 (2336.8) 120 (3048.0) 117 (2971.8) 129 (3276.6) 150 (3810.0)
15,820 (7176) 440 (1666) 87 (2209.8) 68 (1727.2) 19,250 (8732) 540 (2044) 87 (2209.8) 70 (1778.0) 32,700 (14,832) 1090 (4126) 100 (2540.0) 99 (2514.6) 50,160 (22,752) 2200 (8328) 120 (3048.0) 118 (2997.2)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 7930 (3597) 1000 8840 (4010) 1500 10,710 (4858) 2000 12,530 (5684) 2500 13,920 (6314) 3000 15,620 (7085) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 17,580 (7974) 20,980 (9516) 32,460 (14,724) 40,320 (18,289) Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 61 (1549.4) 61 (1549.4) 62 (1574.8) Depth 68 (1727.2) 81 (2057.4) 95 (2413.0)
380 (1438) 107 (2717.8) 400 (1514) 107 (2717.8) 440 (1666) 107 (2717.8) 470 (1779) 107 (2717.8) 500 (1893) 107 (2717.8) 560 (2120) 107 (2717.8) 610 (2309) 680 (2574) 1080 (4088) 1360 (5148)
52 (1320.8) 75 (1905.0) 55 (1397.0) 91 (2311.4) 56 (1422.4) 102 (2590.8) 58 (1473.2) 107 (2717.8) 63 (1600.2) 114 (2895.6) 66 (1676.4) 116 (2946.4) 126 (3200.4) 129 (3276.6) 134 (3403.6) 137 (3479.8)
64 (1625.6) 117 (2971.8) 66 (1676.4) 117 (2971.8) 69 (1752.6) 127 (3225.8) 127 (3225.8) 132 (3352.8) 135 (3429.0) 135 (3429.0)
2000 10,050 (4559) 2500 12,170 (5520) 3000 13,600 (6169) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
107 (2717.8) 71 (1803.4) 108 (2743.2) 84 (2133.6) 119 (3022.6) 116 (2946.4) 129 (3276.6) 119 (3022.6)
15,300 (6940) 420 (1590) 87 (2209.8) 68 (1727.2) 19,350 (8777) 580 (2196) 89 (2260.6) 70 (1778.0) 32,590 (14,783) 1040 (3937) 94 (2387.6) 98 (2489.2) 40,250 (18,257) 1370 (5186) 109 (2768.6) 102 (2590.8)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 6930 (3143) 7920 (3592) 9370 (4250) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 360 (1363) 300 (1136) 310 (1173) 330 (1249) 370 (1401) 390 (1476) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth 66 (1676.4) 72 (1828.8) 90 (2286.0) 104 (2641.6) 110 (2794.0) 111 (2819.4) 122 (3098.8) 130 (3302.0) 139 (3530.6) 139 (3530.6)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 9270 (4205) 1000 9900 (4491) 1500 11,620 (5271) 2000 13,160 (5969) 2500 14,580 (6613) 3000 16,090 (7298) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 65 (1651.0) 65 (1651.0) 65 (1651.0) Depth 55 (1397.0) 67 (1701.8) 96 (2438.4)
400 (1514) 107 (2717.8) 420 (1590) 107 (2717.8) 460 (1741) 107 (2717.8) 500 (1893) 107 (2717.8) 530 (2006) 107 (2717.8) 560 (2120) 107 (2717.8)
87 (2209.8) 56 (1422.4) 87 (2209.8) 58 (1473.2) 87 (2209.8) 59 (1498.6) 87 (2209.8) 62 (1574.8) 87 (2209.8) 66 (1676.4) 87 (2209.8) 69 (1752.6) 69 (1752.6) 71 (1803.4) 97 (2463.8) 99 (2514.6)
65 (1651.0) 117 (2971.8) 67 (1701.8) 117 (2971.8) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2) 130 (3302.0) 131 (3327.4) 132 (3352.8) 116 (2946.4)
2000 11,240 (5098) 2500 12,760 (5788) 3000 14,260 (6468) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
17,930 (9711) 600 (2271) 21,410 (9720) 680 (2574) 32,060 (14,542) 1010 (3823) 41,850 (18,983) 1330 (5035)
108 (2743.2) 77 (1955.8) 110 (2794.0) 77 (1955.8) 114 (2895.6) 116 (2946.4) 122 (3098.8) 148 (3759.2)
15,910 (7217) 420 (1590) 87 (2209.8) 19,830 (8995) 530 (2006) 89 (2209.8) 33,990 (15,418) 1100 (4164) 94 (2387.6) 39,610 (17,967) 1280 (4845) 109 (2768.6)
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. 2. For 55C units, add 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) to W dimension and 10 in (254.0 mm) to D dimension. 3. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) to W dimension for each bus duct throat. 4. Add 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) to W dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber. 5. Add 25.00 inches (635.0 mm) to W dimension for each 27 kV air terminal chamber. 6. Add 35.00 inches (889.0 mm) to W dimension for each 34.5 kV air terminal chamber.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 13 009
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Primary Dry-Type Substations
General Description
13.0-9
General Description
VPI

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformer
Aluminum windingscopper optional Step-lap mitered core 220C insulation system150C average temperature rise Vacuum pressure impregnated in polyester resin Four full-capacity taps on HV winding rated 2-1/2% 2-FCAN 2-FCBN on units with voltage above 601V NEMA 1 heavy-gauge ventilated enclosure with removable panels front and rear ANSI 61 gray paint electrostatically applied using dry powder Vibration isolation pads between core and coil and enclosure Base equipped with jacking pads and designed for rolling or skidding enclosure in any direction Provisions for lifting core and coil assembly Diagrammatic aluminum nameplate 100% QC impulse test Short-circuit design verication
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
VPE

Cast Coil
RESIBLOC

Aluminum windingscopper optional Step-lap mitered core 220C insulation system150C average temperature rise Vacuum pressure encapsulated silicone resin Four full-capacity taps on HV winding rated 2-1/2% 2-FCAN 2-FCBN on units with voltage above 601V NEMA 1 heavy-gauge ventilated enclosure with removable panels front and rear ANSI 61 gray paint electrostatically applied using dry powder Vibration isolation pads between core and coil and enclosure Base equipped with jacking pads and designed for rolling or skidding enclosure in any direction Provisions for lifting core and coil assembly Diagrammatic aluminum nameplate 100% QC impulse test Short-circuit design verication
Windings cast in a mold. HV coils vacuum cast in epoxy in a metal mold. LV coils encapsulated/ pressure-injected in epoxy for 600V and below Aluminum windingscopper optional Step-lap mitered core 180C insulation system115C average temperature rise Four full-capacity taps on HV winding rated 2-1/2% 2-FCAN 2-FCBN on units with voltage above 601V NEMA 1 heavy-gauge ventilated enclosure with removable panels front and rear ANSI 61 gray paint electrostatically applied using dry powder Vibration isolation pads between core and coil and enclosure Base equipped with jacking pads and designed for rolling or skidding enclosure in any direction Provisions for lifting core and coil assembly Diagrammatic aluminum nameplate 100% QC impulse test Partial discharge-free (less than 20 pc at 120% rated voltage)
High voltage windings cast in epoxy reinforced by berglass rovings Copper high voltage, aluminum low voltage windings Step-lap mitered core 155C insulation system80C average temperature rise Four full-capacity taps on HV winding rated 2-1/2% 2-FCAN 2-FCBN on units with voltage above 601V NEMA 1 heavy-gauge ventilated enclosure with removable panels front and rear ANSI 61 gray paint electrostatically applied using dry powder Vibration isolation pads between core and coil and enclosure Base equipped with jacking pads and designed for rolling or skidding enclosure in any direction Provisions for lifting core and coil assembly Diagrammatic aluminum nameplate 100% QC impulse test Partial discharge-free (less than 20 pc at 120% rated voltage)
CA08104001E
13.0-10 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Primary Dry-Type Substations
Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 13 010
i ii
Layout Dimensions
Transition Section
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transition Section
1
DP Primary Equipment
Transformer
Secondary Equipment
DS
WP
W1
W Front
W1
WS
Figure 13.0-4. Indoor VPI/VPE/Cast/RESIBLOC Primary Unit SubstationsPlan View Table 13.0-21. Indoor Dimension References
Equipment Transformer MVC MVS ME MC Primary or Secondary Equipment MVC MVS ME MC

Legend:
Reference Page 13.0-12 Tab 10, Pages 10.1-24 through 10.1-40 Tab 8, Pages 8.0-15 through 8.0-25 Tab 7, Pages 7.1-4 through 7.1-6 Tab 5, Pages 5.5-1 through 5.5-40
Dimensions W, D WS, DS WP, DP, WS, DS WP, DP, WS, DS WP, DP, WS, DS W1 5 kV 7.5 0 20 18
Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

15 kV 0 20 18 27 kV 30 30 36 38 kV 30 30 42
Front to rear centerline aligns with centerline of the transformer. Four-wire connections are not available with MVC equipment.
Note: Surge arresters as discussed in Tabs 7 and 8 can be located in the primary of dry-type transformers. Note: Dimensions are APPROXIMATE.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 13 011
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above 13.0-11 Primary Dry-Type Substations
Layout Dimensions
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) Utilization Dry-Type Transformer

A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the primary and secondary sides. An ATC uses a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
Air Terminal Chamber Air Terminal Chamber
i ii 1
D
DTX Transformer
2 3 4
Front W1 WTX W2
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 13.0-5. Dry-Type Indoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Transformer dimensions are shown on the following page in Table 13.0-23. ATC depths shall match transformer depth, for any kVA of interest. See Table 13.0-23.
Table 13.0-22. Primary or Secondary ATC or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase, Four-Wire ATC Widths kV 5 or 15 27 38 W1 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) W2 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) ATC Depths D DTX DTX DTX
CA08104001E
13.0-12 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Primary Dry-Type Substations
Layout Dimensions
Table 13.0-23. VPI/VPE/Cast/RESIBLOC Ventilated Dry-TypeDimensions in Inches (mm) Aluminum Windings, Standard Design and Losses, Delta-Wye VPI/VPE = 150C Rise, Cast/RESIBLOC = 80C Rise
kVA HV (kV) HV BIL Height Width Depth Weight in Lbs (kg) VPI/VPE
September 2011
Sheet 13 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Cast/RESIBLOC 14,000 (6356) 16,000 (7264) 18,000 (8172) 17,000 (7718) 19,000 (8626) 21,000 (9534) 22,000 (9988) 24,000 (10,896) 26,000 (11,804) 31,000 (14,074) 33,000 (14,982) 35,000 (15,890) 48,000 (21,792) 50,000 (22,700) 52,000 (23,608) 62,000 (28,148) 64,000 (29,056) 66,000 (29,964) 18,000 (8172) 20,000 (9080) 21,000 (9534) 23,000 (10,442) 26,000 (11,804) 28,000 (12,712) 35,000 (15,890) 37,000 (16,798) 52,000 (23,608) 54,000 (24,516) 66,000 (29,964) 68,000 (30,872)
5 kV Secondary
2000 15 27 38 15 27 38 15 27 38 15 27 38 15 27 38 15 27 38 27 38 27 38 27 38 27 38 27 38 27 38 95 125 150 95 125 150 95 125 150 95 125 150 95 125 150 95 125 150 125 150 125 150 125 150 125 150 125 150 125 150 102 (2590.8) 112 (2844.8) 130 (3302.0) 112 (2844.8) 130 (3302.0) 138 (3505.2) 120 (3048.0) 130 (3302.0) 138 (3505.2) 130 (3302.0) 138 (3505.2) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 148 (3759.2) 102 (2590.8) 112 (2844.8) 112 (2844.8) 120 (3048.0) 120 (3048.0) 124 (3149.6) 124 (3149.6) 130 (3302.0) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 148 (3759.2) 148 (3759.2) 120 (3048.0) 130 (3302.0) 148 (3759.2) 124 (3149.6) 140 (3556.0) 150 (3810.0) 130 (3302.0) 140 (3556.0) 150 (3810.0) 140 (3556.0) 148 (3759.2) 150 (3810.0) 150 (3810.0) 150 (3810.0) 154 (3911.6) 160 (4064.0) 160 (4064.0) 160 (4064.0) 120 (3048.0) 130 (3302.0) 140 (3556.0) 140 (3556.0) 148 (3759.2) 150 (3810.0) 150 (3810.0) 154 (3911.6) 154 (3911.6) 160 (4064.0) 160 (4064.0) 160 (4064.0) 68 (1727.2) 72 (1828.8) 78 (1981.2) 68 (1727.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 72 (1828.8) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 82 (2082.8) 78 (1981.2) 84 (2133.6) 88 (2235.2) 78 (1981.2) 84 (2133.6) 90 (2286.0) 72 (1828.8) 72 (1828.8) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 82 (2082.8) 88 (2235.2) 88 (2235.2) 88 (2235.2) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 11,000 (4994) 13,000 (5902) 13,500 (6129) 13,500 (6129) 15,000 (6810) 15,500 (7037) 16,500 (7491) 18,500 (8399) 19,500 (8853) 22,000 (9988) 23,000 (10,442) 24,000 (10,896) 24,500 (11,123) 26,000 (11,804) 27,000 (12,258) 29,000 (13,166) 30,000 (13,620) 31,000 (14,074) 12,000 (5448) 13,500 (6129) 14,000 (6356) 14,500 (6583) 15,500 (7037) 16,000 (7264) 17,500 (7945) 19,000 (8626) 20,500 (9307) 22,500 (10,215) 23,500 (10,669) 25,000 (11,350)
2500
3000
5000
7500
10000
15 kV Secondary
2000 2500 3000 5000 7500 10000
Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Add 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) to width dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber. Add 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) to width dimension for each 25 kV air terminal chamber. Add 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) to width dimension for each 38 kV air terminal chamber. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 13 013
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above 13.0-13 Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers
Technical Data
ANSI Segment Identication for HV and LV Bushings/ Terminations on Dry and Liquid Transformers
The plan view below shows the ANSI segments used to identify the location of both the HV and LV bushings.
Segment 3
Table 13.0-24. Dry-Type Transformer Rating Table112 to 10,000 kVA

Primary/Secondary BIL kV
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FA 67 67 67 68 69 71 71 73 73 74 75 76
Maximum Voltage (kV) 2.5 5.0 8.7 15.0 25.0 27.0 34.5
20/30/45 30/45/60/75/95 45/60/75/95 60/75/95/110/125 110/125 125 150
First BIL rating given below is standard. Others shown are optional.
Table 13.0-25. Liquid Transformer Rating Table500 to 10,000 kVA

Segment 2 Segment 4
Primary BIL kV Voltage Range 12000D, 12470D, 13200D, 13800D 12000D, 12470D, 13200D, 13800D 22900D 22900D 22900D 22900D 34400D, 34500D 34400D, 34500D 34400D, 34500D 34400D, 34500D 46000 69000
Secondary BIL kV 45 60 45 60 75 95 45 60 Voltage Range 2400Y, 2400D, 2520D 4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D, 5040D 2400Y, 2400D, 2520D 4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D 6900D, 7200D, 7560D, 8320D, 8720D 12000D, 12470Y, 12600D, 13090Y, 13200Y, 13200D, 13800Y, 14400D 2400Y, 2400D, 2520D 4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D, 5040D
Segment 1
Figure 13.0-6. Front (Nameplate, Gauges, etc.) HV: Segment 2 is standard for wall-mounted bushings (optional Segment 4) Segment 3 is standard for cover-mounted bushings LV: Segment 4 wall-mounted is standard (optional Segment 2)
95/110 95/110 125/150 125/150 125/150 125/150 150/200 150/200 150/200 150/200 250 350
Note: See Tab 9 for fuse selections.
75 95
6900D, 7200D, 7560D 8320Y, 8720D 12000D, 12470Y, 12600D, 13090Y, 13200Y, 13200D, 13800Y, 14400D
First BIL rating given below is standard. Others shown are optional.
Transformers will have a minimum 98% efciency for all ratings (maximum 2% losses). Table 13.0-26. Standard Sound LevelsDecibels (per ANSI TR-1)
kVA Liquid-Filled Transformers OA 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 6000 7500 10000 56 58 58 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 FA 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 68 69 70 Vent Dry-Type and Cast Coil Transformers AA 60 64 64 65 66 68 68 70 71 72 73
Table 13.0-27. Standard Impedances (Percent)

HV kV BIL Class 45150 200 250 350

Low Voltage Below 2400V 5.75 7.25 7.75
Low Voltage 2400V and Above 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00
17 18 19 20 21
6.75% is also available as an option. 5.50% is also available as an option.
CA08104001E
13.0-14 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers
Technical Data
Table 13.0-28. Liquid Filled 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1795 2277 3193 4045 4833 5364 6424 8152 11,458 14,565 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 10,085 12,741 17,352 21,031 23,776 23,823 28,273 35,345 48,205 59,352 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 11,880 15,018 20,545 25,076 28,609 29,187 34,697 43,497 59,663 73,917 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4320 5460 7530 9300 10,780 11,320 13,490 16,990 23,510 29,400
September 2011
Sheet 13 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1947 2470 3464 4388 5243 5819 6970 8844 12,431 15,803 Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 10,942 13,823 18,826 22,818 25,796 25,847 30,676 38,349 52,302 64,396 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 12,889 16,293 22,290 27,206 31,039 31,666 37,646 47,193 64,733 80,199 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20CNL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4680 5930 8170 10,090 11,690 12,280 14,640 18,430 25,510 31,900
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1777 2254 3161 4004 4784 4310 6359 8070 11,343 14,419 Load Loss at100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 9984 12,613 17,178 20,820 23,538 23,584 27,990 34,991 47,722 58,758 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 11,761 14,867 20,339 24,824 28,322 27,894 34,349 43,061 59,065 73,177 60 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4270 5410 7460 9210 10,670 10,210 13,360 16,820 23,270 29,110

750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1812 2299 3224 4084 4879 4396 6486 8231 11,569 14,707 Load Loss at100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 10,183 12,865 17,521 21,236 24,008 24,055 28,549 35,690 48,676 59,933 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 11,995 15,164 20,745 25,320 28,887 28,451 35,035 43,921 60,245 74,640 150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4360 5520 7600 9390 10,880 10,410 13,620 17,150 23,740 29,690

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1966 2494 3498 4431 5293 4769 7037 8930 12,552 15,957 Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 11,048 13,958 19,010 23,041 26,048 26,099 30,875 38,735 52,813 65,027 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 13,014 16,452 22,508 27,472 31,341 30,868 37,912 47,665 65,365 80,984 150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4730 5980 8250 10,190 11,810 11,290 14,760 18,610 25,760 32,210
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000


kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 2063 2618 3672 4652 5557 5007 7388 9376 13,179 16,754 Load Loss at1 00% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 11,600 14,656 19,960 24,193 27,350 27,403 32,523 40,659 55,453 68,277 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 13,663 17,274 23,632 28,845 32,907 32,410 39,911 50,035 68,632 85,031 200 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4960 6280 8660 10,700 12,390 11,860 15,520 19,540 27,040 33,820
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Losses based on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating 25 kV.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 13 015
Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above 13.0-15 Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers
Technical Data
Table 13.0-36. Biotemp Filled 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1774 2258 3188 4069 4900 5299 6350 8085 11,495 14,824 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 9587 11,942 15,734 18,298 19,638 21,758 24,962 30,018 39,066 46,694 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 11,361 14,200 18,922 22,367 24,538 27,057 31,312 38,103 50,561 61,518 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4170 5240 7120 8640 9810 10,740 12,590 15,590 21,260 26,500

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1924 2449 3458 4414 5316 5749 6889 8772 12,472 16,084 Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 10,401 12,957 17,071 19,853 21,307 23,607 27,083 32,569 42,386 50,662 Total losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 12,325 15,406 20,529 24,267 26,623 29,356 33,972 41,341 54,858 66,746 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4520 5690 7730 9380 10,970 11,650 13,660 16,910 23,070 28,750
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

kVA No load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1756 2235 3156 4028 4851 5246 6286 8004 11,380 14,675 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 9491 11,822 15,576 18,115 19,441 21,540 24,712 29,717 38,675 46,227 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 11,247 14,057 18,732 22,143 24,292 26,786 30,998 37,721 50,055 60,902 60 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4130 5190 7050 8560 9710 10,630 12,460 15,430 21,050 26,230

750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1791 2279 3219 4108 4948 5350 6411 8164 11,607 14,968 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 9680 12,058 15,887 18,477 19,829 21,970 25,206 30,311 39,448 47,150 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 11,471 14,337 19,106 22,585 24,777 27,320 31,617 38,475 51,055 62,118 150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4210 5290 7190 8730 9910 10,840 12,710 15,740 21,470 26,760

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1943 2472 3492 4457 5368 5804 6955 8857 12,593 16,240 Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 10,502 13,082 17,237 20,047 21,514 23,837 27,348 32,887 42,801 51,157 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 12,445 15,554 20,729 24,504 26,882 29,641 34,303 41,744 55,394 67,397 150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL ref. temp and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4570 5740 7800 9470 10,750 11,760 13,790 17,080 23,290 29,030
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

kVA No load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 1880 2392 3379 4313 5195 5617 6731 8572 12,187 15,716 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 10,164 12,660 16,681 19,400 20,820 23,068 26,466 31,826 41,420 49,507 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 12,044 15,052 20,060 23,713 26,015 28,685 33,197 40,398 53,607 65,223 200 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4420 5560 7550 9160 10,400 11,380 13,350 16,530 22,450 28,090

750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
CA08104001E
13.0-16 Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers
Technical Data
Table 13.0-44. Typical Losses for Dry-Type Transformers (Watts)
kVA Rating VPI/VPE No Load Loss Load Loss 30,000 32,500 37,500 40,000 45,000 55,000 Total Loss 37,000 41,000 47,500 54,500 62,000 78,500 Cast Coil/RESIBLOC No Load Loss 6500 8000 9000 13,500 20,000 22,500 Load Loss 18,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 40,000 50,000
September 2011
Sheet 13 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Total Loss 24,500 28,000 34,000 43,500 60,000 72,500
2000 2500 3000 5000 7500 10,000
7000 8500 10,000 14,500 17,000 23,500
CA08104001E
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V

September 2011
Sheet 14 001
14.0-1
Secondary Unit Substations Secondary Below 1000V
Contents
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Transformer Fluids and NEC Compliance Transformer Product Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-2 Transformer Cooling Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-3 Transformer Fluids Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-4 National Electrical Code (NFPA 70 NEC) Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-5 Product Overview DOE 2010 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-9 Types of Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-10 Cable Terminal Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-11 Type MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-11 Type MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-11 Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-12 VPI/VPE Dry-Type Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-14 RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast Resin Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-16 Cast Coil Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-18 Integrated Unit SubstationOptional Conguration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-20 Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-21 DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-21 Magnum SB Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22 Pow-R-Line C Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22 Layout Dimensions Composite Floor Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-23 Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-28 Primary Switching Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-30 Transformers and Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-31 Outdoor Secondary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-39 Technical Data Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-41 Primary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-42 Secondary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-47 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16311 Section 26 11 16.11
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MVS Primary Switch and DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
21
CA08104001E
14.0-2 Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Transformer Fluids and NEC Compliance
Product Selection
September 2011
Sheet 14 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Transformer Product Selector

Table 14.0-1. Transformer Product Selector
Transformer Maximum Voltage Available Primary Secondary kVA Secondary 34.5 kV Unit Substation (provides secondary system voltage) 600V CAG Tab Types Application Considerations
Unit Substation TransformerDry-Type

112.5 kVA 14 3750 kVA VPIVacuum pressure impregnation with polyester resin. Used in commercial construction and industrial application. VPEVacuum Pressure Encapsulated with silicon resin. Applied where MIL-1-24092 spec is required (salt-spray application). Cast CoilUses the electrical and mechanical strength of epoxy to provide higher levels of performance and environmental protection in high moisture, dust-laden and chemical environments. Windings are hermetically sealed in epoxy. ResiblocCoils insulated with epoxy and reinforced with roving glass ber. Highly resistant to short-circuit forces, severe climate conditions and cycling loads. Transformer is part of a close-coupled assembly that includes both primary and secondary equipment. Explosion-resistant, reresistant and nonpolluting to the environment.
Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Secondary 34.5 kV Unit Substation (provides secondary system voltage)
600V
300 kVA 3750 kVA
14
Mineral OilTypical outdoor installation. SiliconeApplied where ammability is a concern. Environmentally Friendly FluidsSpecied where ammability and clean-up are a concern.
Transformer is part of a closecoupled assembly that includes both primary and secondary equipment. High short-circuit strength. Sealed tank design is impervious to the environment.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 003
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Transformer Fluids and NEC Compliance
Cooling Classes
14.0-3
Cooling Classes of Transformers

The cooling classes of transformers have recently changed, and are explained in Table 14.0-2. The IEEE transformer cooling designations were changed to become consistent with the IEC standards (IEC 60076-2: 1998). The new classications are described in IEEE C57.12.00-2000. The new cooling designations have four-letter descriptions that describe the type of oil, how the oil is internally circulated, what is used to cool the oil, and how the oil is externally cooled. For example: ONAN
Table 14.0-2. IEEE Transformer Cooling Classes
i ii
Fourth Letter Circulation Mechanism for External Cooling Medium N = Natural convection F = Forced circulation fans (air cooling) or pumps (water cooling) Third Letter External Cooling Medium A = Air W = Water
O N A N
First Letter Internal Cooling Medium In Contact With Windings O = Mineral oil or other fluid with fire point 300C K = Insulating liquid with fire point >300C L = Insulating liquid with no measurable fire point Second Letter Circulation Mechanism for Internal Cooling Medium N = Natural convection flow through cooling equipment and in windings. F = Forced circulation through cooling equipment (i.e., cooling pumps) and natural convection flow in windings. D = Forced circulation through cooling equipment, directed from the cooling equipment into at least the main windings.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 14.0-3. Cooling Classes Comparisons, Past/Present Designations

Designations Previous OA FA OA/FA/FA OA/FA/FOA OA/FOA OA/FOA/FOA FOA FOW FOA FOW Present ONAN ONAF ONAN/ONAF/ONAF ONAN/ONAF/OFAF ONAN/ODAF ONAN/ODAF/ODAF OFAF OFWF ODAF ODWF
CA08104001E
Fluids Comparison
September 2011
Sheet 14 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Fluids Comparison

Table 14.0-4. Fluid Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Higher installation cost Vaults required for indoor installations per code low re point160C <30% Biodegradability
Mineral Oil

Low transformer cost Good dielectric performance Low maintenance cost Good heat dissipation Good cold climate performance Preventative maintenanceDGA historical data available Low heat release Reduced smoke Low ame Self extinguishing Good dielectric performance Low toxicity Moderate viscosity High stability High re point360C High ash point343C Compatible with mineral oil Excellent retrol uid (compatible with oil up to a 10% mixture) Excellent dielectric performance 97% biodegradable Renewable resource Greater tolerance to moisture
Silicone Fluid

Non-biodegradable Not suitable for use with internal Bay-O-Net fuses Transformer cost Disposal cost Viton gaskets required Retrol applications High transformer cost High moisture absorption
Environmentally Friendly Fluids

Transformer cost (lower than silicone uid) Pour point (15 to 25C) transformer energized with full load with
top oil temperature at 50C with no problemsno crystals formed at 68C
Table 14.0-5. Fluid Properties Comparison

Property Specic gravity Flash point C Fire point C Viscosity (cSt.) 100C 40C 0C Pour point C Dielectric strength, kV Dissipation factor (%) 25C Permittivity Resistivity Oxidation inhibitor Biodegradability Mineral Oil 0.91 145 160 3 12 76 -40 30 0.05 2.2 1013 Optional <30% Silicone Fluid 0.96 300 330 16 38 90 -55 4.3 0.01 2.7 1014 No 0% Environmentally Friendly Fluids 0.91 343 360 10 45 300 1525 49 0.0250.05 3.1 1013 Required 97%
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 005
NEC Requirements
14.0-5
NEC Requirement Guidelines for the Installation of Listed Less-Flammable Liquid-Filled Transformers
NEC (NFPA) Recognition
These guidelines focus on the requirements of Article 450.23 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) for the installation of less-ammable liquid-insulated transformers. Less ammable liquids are used in transformers where an extra margin of re safety is important. Typical applications include installations indoors, on rooftops, near buildings, bush and forest re prone areas, and in pedestrian trafc areas. Less-ammable liquids, also known as high re point liquids, are transformer dielectric coolants that have a minimum re point of 300C. Commonly used re-resistant uids include dimethysiloxane, and ester-based uids. Two Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL); Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and FM approvals (FM) currently list less-ammable liquids. They also list less-ammable liquid-lled transformers. Less-ammable liquid-lled transformers were formally recognized by the NEC for indoor installation in 1978. In 1990, the NEC integrated specic less-ammable transformer requirements for outdoor installations for Article 450.23, in effect recognizing less-ammable transformers as inherently safer than conventional oil-lled transformers. Less-ammable transformers, long recognized as an additional safeguard for indoor installations, are becoming increasingly recognized for outdoor applications as well.
General NEC Requirements

The requirements and options for the different types of indoor and outdoor installations are outlined in Table 14.0-6. These guidelines also summarize the UL classication and FM approvals installation requirements for lessammable uids referred to as listing requirements in NEC 450.23. In cases where the transformer installation presents a re hazard, one or more of the following safeguards shall be applied according to the degree of hazard involved: 1. Space requirements 2. Fire-resistant barriers 3. Automatic re suppression systems 4. Enclosures that conne the oil of a ruptured transformer tank NEC Article 450.28, modication of transformers, requires that when modications are made to transformers in existing installations that change the transformer type, the transformers must be marked to show the type of insulating liquid installed and the installations must comply with current requirements of the NEC. Examples of changes include replacing a complete transformer (retrotting) or replacement of the liquid only (retrolling). Askarel (PCB) and conventional mineral oil-lled transformers are frequently retrotted or retrolled using less-ammable liquids. NEC 110.34 sets minimum clear work space dimensions around transformers.
If the installation cannot meet the liquid listing requirement, it must be provided with an automatic re extinguishing system and a liquid containment or the transformer must be installed in a vault complying with NEC 450, Part III, transformer vaults. Article 450.26 may be followed in lieu of any requirements listed in Article 450.23. Exceptions to vault requirements listed in NEC 450.26 are also valid for less-ammable uidlled installations. Construction requirements for vaults are detailed in Part III of Article 450. Article 450.42 in Part III, transformer vaults, allows an exception to the 3-hour vault requirement permitting a 1-hour rated re-resistant rated room if equipped with an automatic extinguishing system. The installation of less-ammable liquid-insulated transformers indoors without a vault in Type I or II non-combustible building where no combustible materials are stored required that: A liquid containment area be provided The transformer be lled with a listed less-ammable insulating liquid with a minimum 300C re point The installation comply with the listing requirements of the liquid in the transformer
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Indoor installations using less-ammable liquid-insulated transformers must comply with NEC Article 450.23, which denes the requirements for three types of indoor transformer installations as detailed in Table 14.0-6:
Non-combustible building with no combustible materials stored in area Combustible building or combustibles stored in area Rating greater than 35 kV
If the installation cannot meet the liquid listing requirements or one or more of the exceptions listed in NEC 450.26, the installation must either be provided with an automatic re extinguishing system and a liquid connement area or the transformer must be installed in a vault, per NEC 450, Part III. Article 450.42 in Part III, Transformer Vaults, allows an exception to the 3-hour vault requirement permitting a 1-hour rated re-resistant rated room if equipped with an automatic spray extinguishing system. If the installation does not comply with one or more of the exceptions listed in 450.26, the transformer must be installed in a vault complying with NEC 450, Part III transformer vaults. Article 450.23. Exceptions to vault requirements listed in Article 450.26 may be followed in lieu of any requirements listed in NEC 450.26 would also be valid for less-ammable uid-lled transformer installations. Construction requirements for vaults are detailed in Part III of Article 450.
The installation of less-ammable liquidinsulated transformers indoors without a vault in a Type I or II non-combustible building where no combustible materials are stored requires that:
A liquid connement area be provided The transformer be lled with a listed less-ammable insulating liquid with a minimum 300C re point The installation comply with the listing requirements of the liquid in the transformer

CA08104001E
NEC Requirements
Table 14.0-6. NEC Article 450.23 Requirements
Installation Type NEC Requirements
September 2011
Sheet 14 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Indoor Installations
Transformer rated 35 kV, installed in a non-combustible building with no combustible materials stored in area.

Both liquid connement, and either of the following listing requirements : Underwriters Laboratories FM approvals Both liquid connement and auto extinguishment Vault per NEC 450, Part III
Transformer rated 35 kV, installed in a combustible building or in a building with combustible materials stored in area. Transformer rated >35 kV
Both liquid connement and auto extinguishment Vault per NEC 450, Part III Vault per NEC 450, Part III
Outdoor Installations
Non-combustible building and no combustible materials stored in area. Combustible building or combustible materials stored in area.

Either of the following listing requirements :

Underwriters Laboratories FM approvals
In accordance with NEC Article 450.27, oil insulated transformers installed outdoors, i.e., space separation, re barriers or water spray systems.
Optionalno additional safeguards are required if one or more Exceptions 1-6 of Article 450.26, oil-insulated transformers installed indoors apply. Refer to NFPA 220-1999 for denition of non-combustible Type I and II building construction. Fine print note, Article 450.23, (B) (1) states: Installations adjacent to combustible material, re escapes, or door and window openings may require additional safeguards such as those listed in Article 450.27.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 007
NEC Requirements
14.0-7
Listing OptionA
Underwriters Laboratories Requirements
The UL classication of lessammable liquids per the NEC Article 450.23 for three-phase 4510,000 kVA transformers requires: Transformers be equipped with tanks capable of withstanding 12 psig minimum without rupture Transformers be equipped with pressure relief devices with minimum pressure relief capacity per the UL classication marking Transformer primaries be protected with overcurrent protection options per the UL classication marking
Less-ammable liquid-lled transformers must comply with one of the following: Be FM approved or equivalent Be located in a room with a 1-hour re-resistance rating Have automatic sprinklers above the transformer and 20 ft beyond with a discharge density of 0.20 gpm/sq ft

The unit is lled with an FM approval less-ammable uid to reduce the probability of ignition to the liquid. Less-ammable uids, also known as high re point or re-resistant liquids, are dielectric coolants that have a minimum re point of 300C (572F) per the ASTM D92 Cleveland Open Cup test method
Note: For a listing of FM-approved less-ammable uids, refer to Factory Mutual Research Approval Guide P7825.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
FM Approved Transformer
Less-ammable liquid-lled transformers rated 510,000 kVA must be equipped with specic design and protection features to be FM approved or equivalent. Key characteristics of this protection system are re properties of the liquid, the ability to mechanically withstand pressure generated by a low-level electrical fault and the ability of electrical protection to clear a fault before tank rupture. According to FM approval Standard 3990, the key protection features are as listed below. Refer to the FM standard for complete requirements: The transformer tank rupture strength shall be a minimum of 15 psi for rectangular and 20 psi for cylindrical tanks. All transformer tanks shall be designed to withstand a pressure of 7 psi without permanent distortion The transformer tank shall be provided with a pressure relief device to vent internal over-pressures. The device must be capable of venting a minimum specied ow rate, based on the kVA as noted in Table 14.0-7 Section 2.3.3 of the FM approval Standard 3990. Proper pressure venting coordinated with proper tank pressure withstand rating has proven highly effective in preventing tank rupture from overpressure due to internal fault currents below the trip rating of primary circuit current limiting fuses

Listing OptionB
Factory Mutual Requirements
The indoor installation requirements according to factory mutual loss prevention data (LPD) 5-4/14-8, January 1997, revised January 2001, consist of requirements for all transformer and uid types. Specic requirements for less-ammable liquid-insulated transformers are included. Refer to Section 2.2.1.2 of FM LPD for special installation requirements for network transformers. General transformer requirements are as follows:

Minimum 3 ft (0.9m) clearance from building walls Liquid containment provisions Room re-resistance rating based on uid and transformer type Room ventilation, if necessary, to prevent non-thermal damage Smoke detection with alarm in the electrical room
The primary circuit shall have overcurrent protection that limits the let-through current (I2t) to a specied maximum value as listed in Table 14.0-8 and in Section 2.3.5 of the FM approval Standard 3990. Current-limiting fusing and its functional equivalents are designed to interrupt a high current internal fault before the tank withstand pressure level is reached. If protection is designed to vent gas during operation, such as with expulsion fuses, this protection shall be located outside the transformer tank. Certain exceptions apply and permit expulsion fusing to be mounted in the tank if in series and properly coordinated with current limiting fusing The transformer shall have an additional nameplate with the FM approval mark with the following data: tank pressure rating, fuse part number, pressure relief device part number, and requirements particular to the type of installation
CA08104001E
NEC Requirements
September 2011
Sheet 14 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Listing OptionB (Continued)

Factory Mutual Requirements
For grounded wye secondary windings of 150V or more and rated at 1000 or more nominal amperes, a notication tag shall be provided by the manufacturer, secured to the low voltage neutral bushing, advising that the transformer installation requires ground fault relay protection prior to energization (if not installed at time of manufacturing) Indoor units greater than 500 kVA and outdoor units greater than 2500 kVA shall be equipped with alarm contacts on the pressure relief device and a rapid-rise relay Three-phase pad-mounted and substation transformers shall be equipped with an oil level gauge. Additionally, all transformers rated 750 kVA or higher shall be equipped with a liquid temperature indicator and pressure-vacuum gauge Transformers shall be capable of passing basic lightning impulse insulation level (BIL) testing at a minimum tilt of 1.5 from vertical
Table 14.0-7. FM Pressure Relief Device Required Ratings

kVA Rating ThreePhase 112.5 150 300 1000 2000 10,000 SinglePhase 37.5 50 100 333 667 3333 Flow Rate SCFM at 15PSI (103 kPa) 35 50 100 350 700 5000
Table 14.0-8. FM Maximum I2t Let-Through Required Ratings

kVA Rating ThreePhase 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000 SinglePhase 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 250 333 500 667 833 1000 1250 1667 2500 3333 Current Limiting Fusing 500,000 500,000 550,000 600,000 650,000 750,000 900,000 1,100,000 1,250,000 1,500,000 1,750,000 2,000,000 2,250,000 2,500,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 Other Protection
700,000 800,000 900,000 1,000,000 1,200,000 1,400,000 1,900,000 2,200,000 3,400,000 4,500,000 6,000,000 7,500,000 9,000,000 11,000,000 14,000,000 14,000,000 14,000,000
Note: For kVA ratings not listed, use next highest rating in table.
Note: For kVA ratings not listed, use next lowest rating in table.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 009
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Product Overview

DOE Requirements
14.0-9
DOE 2010 Requirements

This information details the minimum efciencies required of power transformers rated 2500 kVA and below, as dened by the Department of Energy (DOE) Federal Regulation for Distribution Transformers. This federal regulation requires all transformers rated 2500 kVA and below with a primary voltage of 35,000V and below, and a low voltage of 600V and below to meet the minimum efciency levels as stated below. This regulation affects all transformers in scope manufactured as of January 1, 2010. This regulation affects all transformers installed in the U.S., regardless of domestic or foreign manufacturing. Table 14.0-9. High Voltage 35 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase Distribution Transformers
Liquid-Filled <34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 165 220 320 450 500 750 1300 1500 1900 2600 2750 3800 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 700 1000 1450 2200 2600 3600 5600 7000 9500 12,000 15,000 16,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 865 1220 1770 2650 3100 4350 6900 8500 11,400 14,600 17,750 19,800 6050 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408 N/A
Table 14.0-11. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers
VPI, 15 kV Primary 150C Temp. Rise kVA No Load (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 170C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 4500 8500 10,000 13,000 17,000 21,000 24,000 33,500 35,000 40,000 45,000 55,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 170C (Watts) 5750 10,000 12,000 15,500 20,500 25,250 29,000 42,500 46,000 53,000 63,500 78,500 4695 kV BIL Total Losses at 75% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 2022 2960 3980 4898 6659 8268 9700 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

1250 1500 2000 2500 3500 4250 5000 9000 11,000 13,000 18,500 23,500
Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Units must typically meet the new DOE efciency guideline levels with noted losses complying with such.
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

Table 14.0-12. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers
Cast, 15 kV Primary 115C Temp. Rise kVA No Load (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 135C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 4000 8000 9000 12,500 16,000 19,000 20,000 26,000 29,000 30,000 35,000 45,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 135C (Watts) 5250 9500 11,500 15,500 20,000 24,000 25,500 35,000 40,000 43,500 55,000 67,500 4695 kV BIL Total Losses at 75% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 2022 2960 3980 4898 6659 8268 9700 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

1250 1500 2500 3000 4000 5000 5500 9000 11,000 13,500 20,000 22,500
Table 14.0-10. High Voltage 35 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase Distribution Transformers
Liquid-Filled <34.5 kV Primary 65C Temp. Rise kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 200 300 375 450 500 900 1000 1500 1900 2600 2800 4000 Load Loss at 100% Load and 135C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 900 1000 1400 2200 3000 4300 6000 7000 10,500 12,500 15,500 18,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1100 1300 1775 2650 3500 5200 7000 8500 12,400 15,100 18,300 22,000 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408 N/A
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

CA08104001E
14.0-10 Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Product Overview

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
Denition
A secondary unit substation is a close-coupled assembly consisting of enclosed primary high voltage equipment, three-phase power transformers, and enclosed secondary low voltage equipment. The following electrical ratings are typical: Primary voltage: 2.438 kV Transformer kVA: 3003750 Secondary voltage: 208, 240, 480 or 600V (maximum)
Types of Distribution Systems

Simple Radial
Primary Switch Transformer Low-Voltage Main

be further improved by substituting selector type primary switches as in B.
Loop Selective
Feeders
Figure 14.0-1. Simple Radial Simple and less costly Easy to coordinate No idle parts

MVS
Figure 14.0-4. Loop Selective
A secondary unit substation is dened in the following standards: NEMA Standard No. 210 IEEE Standard No. 100
Primary Selective
Advantages
As a result of locating power transformers and their close-coupled secondary switchboards as close as possible to the areas of load concentration, the secondary distribution cables or busways are kept to minimum lengths. This concept has obvious advantages such as:

Duplex MVS
Reduced power losses Improved voltage regulation Improved service continuity Reduced exposure to low voltage faults Increased exibility Minimum installation cost Efcient space usage
Selector MVS
Figure 14.0-2. Primary Selective Radial Similar to simple radial with added advantage of a second primary incoming cable circuit. By switching to a second circuit, duration of outage from cable failure is limited.
This conguration is based upon a string of substations being fed from two sources. The power cables from the rst source terminate at a loop switch in the substation primary switchgear assembly, down the switchgear bus to another loop switch in the same switchgear assembly, then back out to another loop switch in a different substation. The loop cabling system is continued through every unit substation until the cable connects to the second source. Typically, the path from one substation to another is broken by an open switch in one of the substations. The philosophy is if there is a failure somewhere, or it is desired to perform maintenance to cable or a switchgear assembly, it may be isolated by opening the appropriate switches in the loop, thus restoring service to the other substations.
Spot Network (See Tab 18)

Secondary Selective
M

Additional advantages of Eatons unit substations in this unied approach are: Single-source responsibility Complete electrical and mechanical control over coordination of the three close-coupled sections Availability of all switchboard and switchgear types gives broad application exibility Modern design Composite assembly retains proven safety and integrity of each of its three major parts

Figure 14.0-5. Spot Network Figure 14.0-3. Secondary Selective Normally operated as two electrically independent unit substations, with bus tie breaker (T) open, and with approximately half of the total load on each bus. In case of failure of either primary incoming circuit, only one bus is affected, and service can be promptly restored by opening main breaker (M) on the dead bus and closing tie breaker (T). This operation can be made automatic, with duration of outage on either bus limited to a few seconds. The transformers are parallel on the secondary sides through network protectors. In case of primary voltage failure, the associated protector automatically opens. The other protector remains closed, and there is no dead time on the bus, even momentarily. When primary voltage is restored, the protector automatically checks for synchronism and recloses. Secondary voltage regulation is improved by paralleled transformers. Secondary fault capability is increased by paralleled transformers and the feeder breakers must be selected accordingly. Primary switches are usually selector or duplex type so that transformers may be transferred to alternate live sources.
CA08104001E
Because the transformers are not paralleled, secondary fault currents and breaker applications are similar to those on radial unit substations. Service continuity and substation capacity can
September 2011
Sheet 14 011
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V 14.0-11 Product Overview

General Description
Cable Terminal Compartment, Air Filled, No Disconnect
Load Interrupter Switchgear, Type MVS, Unfused or Fused
2 Position

Duplex
i ii 1
Selector
Loop

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 14.0-6. MVS Switch Arrangements
Switch Arrangements
In addition to the single, two-position switch for simple ON-OFF operation from a single primary feeder, other standard arrangements are available for use with primary selective power centers involving two primary alternate sources. These arrangements are shown above.
Type MVS Fused Switch
Air Terminal Compartment
Air terminal chamber is furnished when connecting cables only to the transformer, such as in the case when the primary circuit protection or disconnect switch is remotely located from the unit substation. The standard air terminal chamber is a oor-standing, metalenclosure mechanically and electrically connected to the transformer primary, and includes the following equipment:
Clamp-type terminals and busconnectors, if required, for making the connection from the bushings to the customer-furnished incoming cables Undrilled entrance plate for top or bottom entry of customer cables Cutout and hardware for bolting to transformer Z-Bar ange Gasket for installation between terminal chamber and Z-Bar ange connection for outdoor designs only Removable end panel for access to chamber
Secondary unit substations requiring a primary disconnect are furnished with Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed load interrupter switchgear assemblies. Each assembly consists of one (or more) gang-operated MVS switch(es) with full air load break characteristics. With power fuses incorporated into the assembly, the MVS switchgear provides short circuit protection for the transformer as well. MVS switchgear is furnished as the standard high side disconnecting equipment for all secondary unit substations, both dry-types and liquid-lled types.
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Assembly, Type MSB

MVS switchgear, when provided with a xed-mounted medium voltage vacuum circuit breaker instead of fuses, is termed Type MSB metalenclosed switchgear. Use of the medium voltage circuit breaker in conjunction with protective relaying provides a signicantly higher level of protection for the transformer and low voltage switchboard/switchgear than that attainable with fuses. Typical protection relaying functions are: Overcurrent and ground fault protection Transformer differential Rate of rise relay on liquid-lled transformer
Ratings
See Technical Data Page 14.0-43 for standard ratings. For additional details, see MVS Tab 8.
MVS Switchgear Features
Quick-make, quick-break stored energy manual or optional electrically operated mechanism Removable operating handle conveniently and attractively stored DE-ION arc interruption Positive position indication Standard insulated cable connections to transformer (voltage rating 15 kV maximum) for fused switches Available with current limiting fuses or expulsion fuses, or unfused Proven reliability UL or CSA listing is available as an option
On single-ended substations, deleting the secondary main circuit breaker might be possible as the medium voltage circuit breaker and the protective relays would serve the same purpose. In some critical applications, it may still be necessary to apply overcurrent relaying on the secondary of the transformer to trip the medium voltage circuit breaker rather than relying solely on the primary overcurrent protection.
Other Available Primary Incoming Line Equipment

Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear. See Tab 5.
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers

Eatons liquid-lled substation transformers are custom-designed power transformers suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications. The transformers are of the sealed tank design and suitable for use in coordinated unit substation in most any type of application and environment. Typical applications of liquid-lled transformers are:

Standard Features and Accessories

Available in higher kVA ratings High short-circuit strength IEEE short-time overload capability Aluminum or copper windings Impervious to the environment through sealed design Lowest rst cost and comparable cost of ownership to cast/dry designs Available as mineral oil-lled or with less-ammable liquids, such as silicone or environmentally friendly uids
Liquid-lled transformers are suitable for use up to 65C average rise over a maximum ambient temperature of 40C, not to exceed 30C average for any 24-hour period. The transformer may be specied as 55C rise, in which case the transformer has a self-cooled (OA) overload capability of 112% without loss of life. Material used for cores is non-aging, cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel. Cores are rigidly braced to reduce sound levels and losses in the nished product. The core and coil assembly is immersed in either mineral oil, silicone or environmentally friendly uids and is contained in a sealed tank. Flat, tubular or panel radiators are mounted on the front and back of the tank. The liquid circulates through the tank and radiators by means of natural convection, and effectively cools the core and coil assembly.
Utility substations Pulp and paper mills Steel mills Chemical plants/reneries General industry Commercial buildings
Design and Technology

Liquid-lled transformers are custom designed and manufactured. Coils are of the rectangular design with Insuldur layer insulation. Primary windings are comprised of strap conductors, either aluminum or copper. Secondary windings are either full height sheet conductors or strap conductor dependent on the voltage and kVA rating. The turn-to-turn insulation is coated with a diamond pattern of B-stage epoxy adhesive, which cures during processing to form a high-strength bond. This bond restrains the windings during operation and under short-circuit stresses.
Benets
Custom-design exibility to meet special customer needs and applications Computerized loss-evaluated designs for specic customer load and evaluation criteria
Padlockable No Load Tap Changer Lifting Hooks and Loops
Mechanical Relief Device (Optional)
Welded Tank Cover Pressure Vacuum Gauge Dial Type Thermometer Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge (Not Visible) Low Voltage Sealed Cast Resin Bushing
High Voltage Cast Resin Bushing (Not Visible)
Stainless Steel Diagrammatic Nameplate
LV and HV Z-Bar Flanges for Connection to Incoming Line Section and Switchgear Section Provision for Forced Air Cooling is Standard on Transformers 750 kVA and Above Upper Filter Press Connection (Not Visible) 1.00-Inch Drain Valve with 0.38-inch (9.6 mm) Sampler NEMA Ground Pad
Base
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformer
21
September 2011
Sheet 14 013

General Description
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers (Continued)

Accessories
Standard accessories include:

Optional Features

Factory Tests
The following tests are standard:

De-energized padlockable manual tap changer Liquid level gauge Dial type thermometer Drain valve Lifting hooks Jacking pads Ground pad Diagrammatic nameplate Bolted handhole Provisions for rolling and skidding ANSI 61 paint nish
Rapid pressure rise relay with seal in Pressure relief device Pressure vacuum gauge Upper lter press cap Dial hot spot indicator Alarm contacts on gauges Control power transformer, single-phase 480120/240V 55C average rise Non-standard ambient temperature (30C average/24-hour 40C maximum is standard) Non-standard altitude (up to 3300 ft (1006m) is standard) Non-standard BIL level Fan cooling package Lightning arresters Low loss design (loss evaluation) Special sound level Wye-wye connected windings Tank undercoating Copper windings/bussing Containment pan with drain valve UL listed FM (factory mutual) certied Future fan provisions (on units 7502500 kVA) Core ground strap Neutral grounding resistor
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Induced potential Applied potential Resistance measurement Ratio test Polarity and phase relationship test No load loss Exciting current at rated voltage Impedance and load loss Regulation, calculated from test results Mechanical leak test
Special Tests
The following tests can be provided at additional cost:

Temperature rise ANSI impulse Sound level Corona (partial discharge) Witness Insulation resistance and power factor test Short circuit Zero-phase sequence impedance
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VPI/VPE Dry-Type Transformers

Eatons VPI and VPE transformers are custom-designed dry-type power transformers, which give environmental protection, for both indoor and outdoor applications. The transformers are explosion-resistant, reresistant, non-polluting to the environment, and ideally suitable for use in coordinated unit substations. Typical applications of VPI/VPE transformers are: Schools, hospitals, shopping centers High-rise buildings Industrial environments
Ventilation Louvers
Fan Control/ Winding Temperature Indicator Removable Panel
Core-Coil Assembly
Benets
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Custom-design exibility to meet special customer needs and applications Computerized loss-evaluated designs for specic customer load and evaluation criteria Environmental protection Low maintenance High short-circuit strength IEEE short-time overload capability Aluminum or copper windings Available in NEMA 1, 2 and 3R enclosures Economical
Fan Motor and Blades
Dry-Type Substation Transformer

The dry-type transformers are custom designed and manufactured with coils insulated with 220C Class H Nomex , insulation system. Environmental protection is provided by vacuum pressure impregnation with polyester resin (VPI). Enhanced environmental protection is available through the use of silicone resin encapsulation (VPE). The VPE process provides 4-cycle enhanced environmental protection. The entire core and coil assembly is vacuum pressure encapsulated with a silicone resin per MIL-1-24092. Both systems are superior to the conventional dry-type technology known as Dip and Bake. Both resin types, and Nomex, insulation system are 220C Class H rated. Transformers with Class H insulation are suitable for use up to 150C average rise over a maximum ambient temperature of 40C, not to exceed 30C average for any 24-hour period. Other temperature rise options are 80C and 115C, which allow the transformer to be overloaded up to 150C rise. Taps are provided on the central section of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed by removing enclosure panels, and taps are changed by moving the exible bolted links from one connecting point to the other. To simplify these changes, the connection points are clearly identied. Material used for cores is non-aging, cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel. Cores are constructed with step lap mitered joints and are rigidly braced to reduce sound levels and losses in the nished product. To reduce the transfer of noise to the case, the core is mounted on neoprene rubber vibration dampeners. The core is electrically grounded by means of a exible ground braid. The enclosure has removable panels for access to taps and for core and coil inspection. The complete case can be removed and knocked down to reduce size and weight for rigging into tight locations.
Ratings

112.53750 kVA Primary voltages: 600V35 kV Primary BIL: up to 150 kV Secondary voltages: 120V15 kV Secondary BIL: up to 75 kV Temperature rise: 80/115/150C
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 015

General Description
VPI/VPE Dry-Type Transformers (Continued)

Accessories

Optional Features

Tests

Jacking pads Ground pad Diagrammatic nameplate Provisions for rolling Ventilation grilles Core ground strap Primary reconnectable taps Future fan provisions on units over 500 kVA Core ground strap ANSI 61 paint nish Step-lap mitered core NEMA 1 enclosure
Copper windings/bussing (aluminum is standard) VPE silicone resin vacuum pressure impregnation and encapsulation Fan cooling package, complete with digital winding temperature 80C or 115C rise (150C rise is standard) Non-standard ambient temperature (30C average/24-hour 40C maximum is standard) Non-standard altitude (up to 3300 ft (1006m) is standard) Non-standard BIL level NEMA 3R enclosure Aluminum or copper ground bus Lightning arresters Low loss design (loss evaluation) Special sound level Wye-wye connected windings UL label
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Induced potential Applied potential Resistance measurement Ratio test Polarity and phase relationship test No load loss at rated voltage Exciting current at rated voltage Impedance and load loss Quality control impulse
Special Tests
The following tests can be provided at additional cost: Temperature rise ANSI impulse Sound level Witness

CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast Resin Transformers
Available in NEMA 1, 2, 3R enclosures Low losses and longest life for greatest economy of ownership
Temperature Rise
RESIBLOC cast transformers use 155C class insulation and are typically specied for 80C average rise over a maximum ambient temperature of 40C, not to exceed 30C average for any 24-hour period.
Ratings

112.53750 kVA Primary voltages: 2300V34.5 kV Primary BIL: up to 150 kV Secondary voltages: 120V15 kV Secondary BIL: up to 75 kV Temperature rise: 80C
Taps
Taps are provided on the central section of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed by removing enclosure panels, and taps are changed by moving the exible bolted links from one connecting point to the other. To simplify these changes, the connection points are clearly identied.

The RESIBLOC epoxy cast resin transformers are custom-designed and manufactured with coils insulated with epoxy and reinforced with glass ber.
RESIBLOC Substation Transformer
Core
Material used for cores is non-aging, cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel. Cores are constructed with strap lap mitered joints and are rigidly braced to reduce sound levels and losses in the nished product. To reduce the transfer of noise to the case, the core is mounted on neoprene rubber vibration dampeners. The core and associated core clamps and structural parts are electrically grounded to prevent an induced voltage buildup.
Eatons RESIBLOC cast resin transformers are premium, custom-designed, dry-type power transformers that offer longer life, higher BIL levels, superior mechanical and short-circuit strength, as well as superior protection against high moisture, metallic dust-laden and harsh chemical environments. RESIBLOC cast resin transformer may be applied indoors as well as outdoors. The transformers are explosionresistant, re-resistant, non-polluting to the environment and ideally suitable for use in a coordinated unit substation. Typical applications of RESIBLOC cast resin transformers are:

Low Voltage Windings

Transformer low voltage windings with an insulation class of 1.2 kV (600V) and below, are wound using sheet conductors that allow free current distribution within the axial width of the coil and that eliminate the axial forces developed in other types of windings under short-circuit conditions. The impregnated insulation bonds the sheet conductors together to form a solid winding block for internal mechanical strength. During assembly, each low voltage winding is blocked radially against the core for additional short-circuit integrity.
Enclosure
The enclosure has removable panels for access to taps and for core and coil inspection. The complete case can be removed and knocked down to reduce size and weight for rigging into tight locations.
High Voltage Windings

Transformer high voltage windings, insulation class 2.5 kV (2400V) and above, are wound using the exclusive RESIBLOC cast resin construction, which is reinforced with a licensed glass roving technique. This ber roving technique was originally developed for production of synthetic cylindrical components, such as containers, which are subject to high mechanical loads. The use of the glass ber roving technique in the manufacture of RESIBLOC transformers provides mechanical, thermal and short-circuit strength that is unequaled. The high coils are coaxially mounted over the low voltage windings on the core legs.
Steel mills High-rise buildings/rooftop units Pulp and paper mills Cement mills and mining operations Chemical plants Water-slide installations, sand and salt spray Rail transportation systems
Accessories

Benets
Custom-design exibility to meet special customer needs and applications Computerized loss-evaluated designs for specic customer load and evaluation criteria Environmental immunity, unlimited storage Practically maintenance free Highest possible short-circuit strength Ultimate withstand to thermal and mechanical stresses ANSI short-time overload capability Copper windings
Jacking pads Ground pad Diagrammatic nameplate Provisions for rolling Ventilation grilles Core ground strap Future fan provisions on units over 500 kVA Reconnectable primary taps ANSI 61 paint nish Step-lap mitered core NEMA 1 enclosure
Epoxy
The epoxy used in RESIBLOC is a bisphenol A-based resin that is halogen-free to ensure that no harmful decomposition products are formed in the event of a re. In addition, epoxy is one of the best non-hygroscopic materials available for insulation, and is highly resistive to chemicals and harsh industrial environments.
September 2011
Sheet 14 017

General Description
RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast Resin Transformers (Continued)

Optional Features

Tests

Special Tests
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fan cooling package, complete with digital winding temperature Non-standard ambient temperature (30C average/24-hour 40C maximum is standard) Non-standard altitude (up to 3300 ft (1006m) is standard) Non-standard BIL level NEMA 3R enclosure Lightning arresters Low loss design (loss evaluation) Special sound level Wye-wye connected windings
Induced potential Applied potential Resistance measurement Ratio test Polarity and phase relationship test. No load loss Exciting current at rated voltage Impedance and load loss Partial discharge test (for coils rated 1.2 kV and higher) Quality control impulse
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cast Coil Transformers

Eatons cast coil transformers are premium, custom-designed, dry-type power transformers, which offer longer life, higher BIL levels, superior shortcircuit strength and superior protection against high moisture, metallic dustladen and harsh chemical environments. Cast coil transformers may be applied indoors as well as outdoors. The transformers are explosion resistant, re resistant, non-polluting to the environment and ideally suitable for use in coordinated unit substations. Typical applications of cast coil transformers are:

LV Bus
Ventilation Louvers
Core-Coil Assembly
Fan Control/ Winding Temperature Indicator Removable Panel
HV Bus
Steel mills High-rise buildings/rooftop units Pulp and paper mills Cement mills and mining operations Chemical plants Water-side installations, sand and salt spray Rail transportation systems
Fan Motors and Blades
Cast Coil Substation Transformer

The cast coil transformers are customdesigned and manufactured with coils insulated with materials such as glass mat and DuPont Nomex. The epoxy used in the casting process has the lowest temperature tolerance and limits the insulation system to 185C. The thickness of the epoxy is carefully engineered to provide maximum strength and environmental protection and yet minimize the temperature differential through the core thickness in order to limit destructive stresses. HV and LV coils are separately manufactured and mounted coaxially on the core legs with blocks to hold them rmly, yet permit expansion and contraction. HV windings are wound with one or more strands of rectangular wire, into disc or drum development, and placed into molds. They are dried and vacuum poured or cast, to eliminate moisture and voids in the sealing process. Low voltage windings are hermetically sealed in epoxy using one of two processes. The windings can also be designed with air ducts for improved cooling performance. The rst method used to seal low voltage windings is the pre-impregnated insulation process. This process consists of winding the sheet conductor(s) in parallel with an epoxy pre-impregnated sheet of insulation. After the winding process is completed, the coil is baked to dry the moisture from the winding and to cure the epoxy pre-impregnated insulation. The curing process binds the coil together to form a solid winding block. The ends of the coil are then sealed with epoxy for added protection. The second process
Benets
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Custom-design exibility to meet special customer needs and applications Computerized loss-evaluated designs for specic customer load and evaluation criteria Environmental immunity, unlimited storage Practically maintenance free Highest possible short-circuit strength IEEE short-time overload capability Aluminum or copper windings Available in NEMA 1, 2 and 3R enclosures Low losses and longest life for greatest economy of ownership Ultimate impulse withstand Moisture and chemical resistant
is to cast the low voltage winding in a mold. Windings with operating voltage less than 600V are cast using a pressure injection process. Winding with operating voltages greater than 600V are processed using the same techniques employed for the high voltage windings. Cast transformers use 185C class insulation and are typically specied for 80C average rise over a maximum ambient temperature of 40C, not to exceed 30C average for any 24-hour period. Other temperature rise options are 100C or 115C. Taps are provided on the central section of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed by removing enclosure panels, and taps are changed by moving the exible bolted links from one connecting point to the other. To simplify these changes, the connection points are clearly identied. Material used for cores is non-aging, cold rolled, high permeability, grainoriented silicone steel, cores are constructed with strap lap mitered joints and are rigidly braced to reduce sound levels and losses in the nished product. To reduce the transfer of noise to the case, the core is mounted on neoprene rubber vibration dampeners. The core and associated core clamps and structural parts are electrically grounded to prevent an induced voltage buildup. The enclosure has removable panels for access to taps, and for core and coil inspection. The complete case can be removed and knocked down to reduce size and weight for rigging into tight locations.
CA08104001E
Ratings

112.53750 kVA Primary voltage: 2300V46 kV Primary BIL: up to 250 kV Secondary voltages: 120V15 kV Secondary BIL: up to 95 kV Temperature rise: 80/100/115C
September 2011
Sheet 14 019

General Description
Cast Coil Transformers (Continued)

Accessories

Optional Features

Special Tests
Jacking pads Ground pad Diagrammatic nameplate Provisions for rolling Ventilation grilles Core ground strap Future fan provisions on units over 500 kVA Reconnectable primary taps ANSI 61 paint nish Step-lap mitered core NEMA 1 enclosure
Copper windings Full cast secondary Fan cooling package, complete with digital winding temperature 100C or 115C rise (80C rise is standard) Non-standard ambient temperature (30C average/24-hour, 40C maximum is standard) Non-standard altitude (up to 3300 ft (1006m) is standard) Non-standard BIL levels NEMA 3R enclosure Lightning arresters Low loss design (loss evaluation) Special sound level Wye-wye connected windings UL listing
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Tests

Induced potential Applied potential Resistance measurement Ratio test Polarity and phase relationship test No load loss Exciting current at rated voltage Impedance and load loss Partial discharge test (for coils rated 1.2 kV and higher) Quality control impulse
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Integrated Unit Substation Optional Conguration
When electrical room space is limited or when additional electrical system capacity is required for renovation of an existing building, unit substation dimensions can create layout challenges for electrical designers and engineers. The solution to these problems is Eatons IUSintegrated unit substation. By combining transformer primary and secondary protective devices in a single section, Eatons IUS offers a signicant oorspace reduction compared to other substation designs. The IUS uses a 5 or 15 kV class VCP-T drawout vacuum breaker for transformer primary protection, integrated with a 600V Magnum DS drawout air circuit breaker for transformer secondary protection. Both breakers are in a single UL listed structure. The integrated unit substation addresses issues that matter to building owners, electrical contractors and engineers, including:

Product Offering
Up to 15 kV, 1200A primary (VCP-T breaker up to 25 kAIC) Up to 600V, 6000A secondary (Magnum DS breaker up to 100 kAIC) Main structure is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide x 91.00 inches (2311.4 mm) deep Standard coordination available to Eaton dry-type or cast-coil substation transformers
For main breaker applications 4000A or above, a separate 44.00 inch (1117.6 mm) structure is required beside the main 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure.
Features
Shorter approval drawing lead-times Fewer control wiring interconnections Improved transformer access transformer is not sandwiched between primary and secondary equipment Reduction of arc-ash hazard by incorporating VCP-T primary breaker with Arcash Reduction Maintenance System trip unit
Integrated Unit Substation
Reduction in installation time Fewer structures Reduction in delivery time Reduction in overall oor space Reduction in overall installed costs Reduction in material handling and rigging requirements
IUS Standards
The integrated unit substation primary/secondary breaker section is UL listed. The IUS complies with ANSI C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51 for the low voltage compartment, and ANSI C37.20.3 for the medium voltage compartment. Low voltage power switchgear distribution sections are UL 1558 listed and comply with ANSI C37.20.1. Transformer sections are UL 1562 listed and comply with ANSI C37.30.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 021

General Description
Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

See Tab 20 for complete description and layout information.
DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

Contact Eaton for complete description and layout information.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DSII Magnum DS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Construction Details


10,000A main bus capacity Front-access enclosures available for use in front-access substations, allowing the substation to be placed up against a wall All devices individually mounted and compartmentalized Sections ush front and rear Drawout construction Designed for mounting away from the wall
6000A main bus capacity Front and rear accessible All devices individually mounted and compartmentalized Sections ush front and rear All units are drawout construction Designed for mounting away from wall
Main DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized

Eaton DSII power circuit breakers with integral microprocessor-based Digitrip RMS trip units and stored energy manual or electrical operating mechanism, 8005000A, drawout mounted DSLII power circuit breakerssame as DS II except equipped with current limiters for 200 kA fault current application, 8004000A, drawout mounted
Main DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Eatons Magnum DS power circuit breakers with integral microprocessor-based Digitrip RMS trip units and stored energy manual or electrical operating mechanism, 8006000A
Feeder DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Feeder DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized

DSII power circuit breakers with integral microprocessorbased Digitrip RMS trip units and stored energy manual or electrical operating mechanism, 8005000A, drawout cell mounted Eaton DSLII power circuit breakerssame as DS II except equipped with current limiters for 200 kA fault current application, 8004000A, drawout mounted
Magnum DS power circuit breakers with integral microprocessor-based Digitrip RMS trip units and stored energy manual or electrical operating mechanism, 8006000A
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 14 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Magnum SB Switchboards
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards
Magnum SB
Pow-R-Line C
6000A main bus maximum Front and rear accessmain section front and/or side accessible Feeder devices panel mounted Sections rear aligned, or front and rear aligned Not designed for mounting against a wall, self-supporting and requires code clearance at the rear

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
6000A main bus maximum Rear accessmain and distribution sections Drawout feeder devices individually compartmentalized Designed for mounting with code clearance to a wall
Main DevicesIndividually Mounted
Insulated-case circuit breaker, Magnum SB, 8006000A, drawout, per UL 1066
Main DevicesIndividually Mounted

Molded case circuit breaker, 4002500A, xed or drawout Air power circuit breaker, Magnum DS, 8006000A, xed or drawout Air power circuit breaker with current limiting fuses, DSL, 8005000A Bolted pressure switch, 8005000A, xed Fusible switches, 4001200A, xed

Feeder DevicesIndividually Mounted
Insulated-case circuit breaker, Magnum SB, 8004000A, drawout per UL 1066
Feeder DevicesGroup Mounted

Molded-case circuit breaker, 151200A Fusible switches, 301200A
Feeder DevicesIndividually Mounted

Air power circuit breaker, Magnum DS, 8005000A Bolted pressure switches, 8005000A, xed Molded-case circuit breaker, 16002500A

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 023
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V 14.0-23 Layout Dimensions

Indoor Liquid-Filled
Indoor Composite Floor PlanLiquid-Filled Transformer

Rear
i ii
Primary Equipment
Transition Section
Transformer
Transition Section
Secondary Equipment D2R
1 2 3 4 5
DP
DTX C L of Transformer DS
D1F
D2F
WP
W1
WTX Front
W2
WS
6 7
Figure 14.0-7. Liquid-Filled, IndoorTop View Table 14.0-13. Primary Equipment Dimension References
Primary Equipment Transformer MVS ME MC Voltage kV 5 or 15 Primary Equipment MVS ME MC MVS MC MVS MC Dimensions WTX, DTX WP, DP WP, DP WP, DP Reference Page(s) Page 14.0-31 Page 14.0-30 Page 14.0-30 Tab 5
Legend:
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase Four-Wire W1 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) D1F 25.25 (641.3) 25.25 (641.3) 42.50 (1079.5)

27 38

For three-phase, four-wire, D1F is 30.25. Contact Eaton.
Table 14.0-14. Secondary Equipment Dimension ReferencesDimensions in Inches (mm)

Secondary Equipment Magnum DS and SB switchgear (rear access) Pow-R-Line C switchboard (front access) Pow-R-Line C switchboard (rear access) Pow-R-Line i switchboard (rear access) W2 D2F D2R For WS, DS Dimensions Tab-Page 22.00 (558.8) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 20.1-25 21.1 (All) 21.2 (All) 21.3 (All)
15 16 17 18 19 20
21
14.0-24 Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Layout Dimensions

Outdoor Liquid-Filled
September 2011
Sheet 14 024
i ii
Outdoor Composite Floor PlanLiquid-Filled Transformer

Transformer Transition Section/Throat Secondary Equipment D2 R
D1R DP
Primary Equipment
1 2 3
C L of Transformer
D1F
4 5 6 7
Figure 14.0-8. Liquid-Filled, Outdoor EnclosureTop View
WP W1 W TX W2 WS Walk-in Aisle (if used) Door Swing
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transition Section/Throat
DTX
DS
Table 14.0-15. Primary Equipment Dimension References

Primary Equipment Transformer MVS ME MC Voltage kV 5 or 15 Primary Equipment MVS ME MC MVS MC MVS MC Dimensions WTX, DTX WP, DP WP, DP WP, DP Reference Page(s) Page 14.0-31 Page 14.0-30 Page 14.0-30 Tab 5
Legend:
D1R 16.50 (419.1)
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition Section/ThroatDimensions in Inches (mm)

Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase Four-Wire W1 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 35.00 (889.0) 35.00 (889.0) D1F 25.25 (641.3) 25.25 (641.3)
27 38

For three-phase, four-wire, D1F is 30.25 inches (768.4 mm). For three-phase, four-wire, D1R is 14.50 inches (368.3 mm). Contact Eaton.

Secondary Equipment Magnum DS and SB switchgear Pow-R-Line C switchboard (front access) Pow-R-Line C switchboard (rear access) Pow-R-Line i switchboard (rear access) W2 D2R For WS, DS Dimensions Tab-Page 20.1-25, 14.0-39 21.1 (All) 21.2 (All) 21.3 (All)
38.50 (977.9) 25.00 (635.0) 25.00 (635.0) 25.00 (635.0)
27.00 (685.8) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 25.00 (635.0)
September 2011
Sheet 14 025

Indoor IUS
Indoor IUS Composite Floor Plan
i ii 1 2
DS
Secondary Equipment
DIUS S
IUS
Transformer DTX
3 4 5
Front WS WIUS WTX
6 7
Figure 14.0-9. IUS with Liquid-Filled or Dry-Type TransformerTop View Table 14.0-17. IUS (Primary & Secondary) Equipment Dimension References
Primary and Secondary Equipment Transformer IUS Dimensions WTX, DTX WIUS, DIUS Reference Page(s) Pages 14.0-36 and 14.0-38 Page 14.0-20
Legend:
IUS = Integrated Unit Substation TX = Transformer LV = Low Voltage
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Notes: The IUS houses both the primary (MV) and secondary (LV) equipment breaker. Primary (MV) equipment is housed in the bottom portion of the IUS Structure. Secondary (LV) equipment is housed in the top portion of the IUS Structure. A VCP-T (MV) breaker is used between the primary equipment and transformer. See Tab 5 for additional information on the VCP-T breaker. A Magnum-DS (LV) breaker is used between the transformer and secondary equipment. See Tab 26 for additional information on the Magnum DS breaker. The IUS/Transformer is a front-aligned substation.
CA08104001E

Indoor Dry-Type
September 2011
Sheet 14 026
i ii 1
Indoor Composite Floor PlanDry-Type Transformer
DP
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
DTX Primary Equipment Transition Section Transformer Transition Section Secondary Equipment
DS
Front WP W1 WTX W2 WS
Figure 14.0-10. Ventilated Dry-Type, RESIBLOC and Cast Coil, IndoorTop View Table 14.0-18. Primary Equipment Dimension References
Primary Equipment Transformer MVS ME MC Dimensions WTX, DTX WP, DP WP, DP WP, DP Reference Page(s) Pages 14.0-35 and 14.0-37 Page 14.0-30 Page 14.0-30 Tab 5
Legend:

Secondary Equipment Magnum DS and SB switchgear (rear access) Magnum DS and SB switchgear (front access) Pow-R-Line C switchboard (front access) Pow-R-Line C switchboard (rear access) Pow-R-Line i switchboard (rear access) For WS, DS Dimensions Tab-Page 20.1-25 20.1-31 21.1 (All) 21.2 (All) 21.3 (All)
September 2011
Sheet 14 027

Outdoor Dry-Type
Outdoor Composite Floor PlanDry-Type Transformer
i ii
Primary Equipment
1
Transition Section Transition Section T DTX Transformer DS Secondary Equipment
DP
2 3 4
Front WP W1 WTX W2 WS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 14.0-11. Ventilated Dry-Type, RESIBLOC and Cast Coil, OutdoorTop View Table 14.0-20. Primary Equipment Dimension References
Primary Equipment Transformer MVS ME MC Primary Equipment MVS ME MC
Legend:
Reference Page(s) Pages 14.0-35 and 14.0-37 Page 14.0-30 Page 14.0-30 Tab 5
Dimensions WTX, DTX WP, DP WP, DP WP, DP W1 5 kV 5.00 (127.0) 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4)
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition Section/ThroatDimensions in Inches (mm)

15 kV 5.00 (127.0) 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 27 kV
38 kV
N/A
N/A
Contact Eaton.

Secondary Equipment Magnum DS and SB switchgear Pow-R-Line C switchboard (front access) Pow-R-Line C switchboard (rear access) Pow-R-Line i switchboard (rear access) W2 For WS, DS Dimensions Tab-Page 38.50 (977.9) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 20.1-25 21.1 (All) 21.2 (All) 21.3 (All)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21

Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC)
September 2011
Sheet 14 028
i ii 1 2 3 4
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UsageLiquid-Filled Transformer

A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the primary and secondary sides. An ATC uses a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
Transformer D2 R D1R Air T Terminal Chamber DP DTX C L of Transformer Air T Terminal minal Ch Chamber DS
D1F
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
W1 W TX W2
Figure 14.0-12. Liquid-Filled Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Table 14.0-22. Primary ATC or Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage kV 5 or 15 27 38 Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase, Four-Wire W1 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) DP DTX DTX DTX
Table 14.0-23. Secondary ATC or Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage V All 18.00 (457.2) DTX W2 DS
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 029

Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC)
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UsageDry-Type Transformer

A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the primary and secondary sides. An ATC using a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
i ii 1 2
Transition Section
Transition Section
DP
DTX Transformer
DS
3 4 5 6
Front W1 WTX
W2
7 8
Figure 14.0-13. Dry-Type Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Radiator position and number of radiators will vary based on design. Protective collars are only used on outdoor designs.
Table 14.0-24. Primary ATC or Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage kV 5 or 15 27 38 Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase, Four-Wire W1 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) DP DTX DTX DTX
Table 14.0-25. Secondary ATC or Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Voltage V All 18.00 (457.2) DTX W2 DS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21

Primary Switching Equipment
September 2011
Sheet 14 030
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Primary Switching EquipmentType MVS/MSB Switchgear

Table 14.0-26. Primary Switching EquipmentType MVS Switchgear
Conguration of Switch(es) Rated Maximum Voltage, kV 5 15 27 38
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Fault Close kV WP DP Asym. Three-Wire Maximum 64 64 60 30 64 64 60 30 64 64 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 55.30 (1404.6) 55.30 (1404.6) 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Four-Wire
Height (Indoor)
Height (Outdoor Non-Walk-in)
WC
CC
Single switch
62.00 (1574.8) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 62.00 (1574.8) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 80.00 (2032.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0) 80.00 (2032.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0) 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 100.00 (2540.0) 100.00 (2540.0) 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0) 90.40 (2296.2) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
Duplex (two) switches Selector switch
5 15 27 38 5 15
72.00 (1828.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 100.00 (2540.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 100.00 (2540.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0)
10.00 (254.0) 20.00 (508.0) 10.00 (254.0) 20.00 (508.0)
Sectionalizing loop feed switches
5 15 27 38
64 64 60 30
108.00 (2743.2) 108.00 (2743.2) 144.00 (3657.6) 144.00 (3657.6)
55.30 (1404.6) 55.30 (1404.6) 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
62.00 (1574.8) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 62.00 (1574.8) 90.40 (2296.2) 95.50 (2425.7) 80.00 (2032.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0) 80.00 (2032.0) 127.00 (3225.8) 135.00 (3429.0)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
A transition section is required when any MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a liquid-lled transformer and when any MSB switchgear assembly is connected to any kind of transformer. When a 5 or 15 kV MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a dry-type or cast coil transformer, no transition section is required when installed indoors, but a 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) throat is required when installed outdoors. Where disconnect fuses are used, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to section width, 5 and 15 kV only. When height of 101.50 inches (2578.1 mm) is used with fuses identied in footnote , the depth increases to 100.00 inches (2540.0 mm). Height is 101.50 inches (2578.1 mm) for 27 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with Cooper type NX fuses, and 38 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with GE type EJO-1 fuses. Height is 110.00 inches (2794.0 mm) for 27 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with Cooper type NX fuses, and 38 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with GE type EJO-1 fuses. Can be 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep if incoming cable enters from below.
Table 14.0-27. Primary Switching EquipmentType MSB Switchgear

Conguration of Switch(es) and Vacuum Breaker Single
52
Fault Close Dimensions in Inches (mm) Rated Maximum kV Asym. WP DP Voltage, kV Maximum 5 15 64 64 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0)
Height (Indoor) 90.40 (2296.2) 90.40 (2296.2)
Height (Outdoor Non-Walk-in) 95.50 (2425.7) 95.50 (2425.7)
WC 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
CC 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
Duplex
5 15
64 64
78.00 (1981.2) 78.00 (1981.2)
70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2) 90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7) 95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
52
Sectionalizing loop feed switches
5 15
52
64 64
114.00 (2895.6) 114.00 (2895.6)
70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2) 90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7) 95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
A transition section is required when any MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a liquid-lled transformer and when any MSB switchgear assembly is connected to any kind of transformer. When a 5 or 15 kV MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a dry-type or cast coil transformer, no transition section is required when installed indoors, but a 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) throat is required when installed outdoors.
WC
6.6 (167.6)
WC
6.6 (167.6)
CC
WC
WC WC
WC
WC
WC WC
WC
Table 14.0-28. Approximate Weights in Lbs (kg)

Description 5 or 15 kV Class MSB section MVS section (non-fused) Fuses (3) add Transition section Outdoor throat 25.8 or 38 kV Class MVS section (non-fused) Fuses (3) add Transition section Outdoor throat 2000 (908) 300 (136) 1100 (499) 2400 (1090) 300 (136) 1200 (544) 1600 (726) 1500 (681) 200 (91) 300 (136) 1900 (863) 1800 (817) 200 (91) 1200 (544) Indoor Outdoor
6.6 (167.6)
CC
CC
DP
19 20 21
WP
WP
WP
Single or Selector Plan View
Duplex Plan View
Sectionalized Loop Feed Plan View
Figure 14.0-14. Primary Equipment Floor Plan


CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 031

Transformers
Liquid-Filled Transformers
Table 14.0-29. Oil-Filled Standard Design, 60 Hz, HV Delta, LV at 600V Class (30 kV BIL) Indoor or Outdoor Application
kVA HV, kV HV BIL, kV Dimensions in Inches (mm) HTX WTX 53.00 (1346.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 70.00 (1778.0) 76.00 (1930.4) 53.00 (1346.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 70.00 (1778.0) 78.00 (1981.2) DTX 38.20 (970.3) 47.00 (1193.8) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 115.00 (2921.0) 118.00 (2997.2) 50.50 (1282.7) 52.20 (1333.5) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 122.00 (3098.8) 135.00 (3429.0) Weight Lbs (kg) Liquid Gallons (Liters)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
650 (2461)
Oil-Filled 65C Rise

300 500 750 5 or 15 5 or 15 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 25 35 25 35 5 or 15 5 or 15 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 25 35 25 35 60 or 95 60 or 95 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 125 150 125 150 60 or 95 60 or 95 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 125 150 125 150 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 100.00 (2540.0) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 100.00 (2540.0) 6100 (2767) 7400 (3357) 9300 (4218) 9301 (4219) 9302 (4219) 11,000 (4990) 11,000 (4990) 11,000 (4990) 12,700 (5761) 12,700 (5761) 12,700 (5761) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 17,250 (7825) 17,250 (7825) 17,250 (7825) 17,850 (8097) 17,850 (8097) 16,800 (7627) 18,000 (8165) 6100 (2767) 7400 (3357) 9300 (4218) 9301 (4219) 9302 (4219) 11,000 (4990) 11,000 (4990) 11,000 (4990) 12,700 (5761) 12,700 (5761) 12,700 (5761) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 17,500 (7938) 17,500 (7938) 17,500 (7938) 17,850 (8097) 17,850 (8097) 16,800 (7620) 18,000 (8165) 480 (1817) 517 (1957) 575 (2177)
1000
600 (2271)
1500
640 (2423)
2000
650 (2461)
2500
6
680 (2574) 900 (3407)
3000 3750
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Oil-Filled 55/65C Rise

300 500 750 480 (1817) 517 (1957) 575 (2177)
1000
600 (2271)
1500
640 (2423)
2000
670 (2536)
2500
700 (2650)
3000 3750
700 (2650) 900 (3407)
Plan
Elevation
16
HTX DTX C L
C Lof Bushing
17 18 19
WTX
Figure 14.0-15. Liquid-Filled, Indoor and Outdoor
20
= 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) for all ratings through 15 kV primary, 600V secondary.
21
CA08104001E

Transformers
Liquid-Filled <34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 175 250 300 330 520 730 1100 1500 1900 2600 2800 3800 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 960 1250 1630 2500 2600 4900 6200 6700 10,000 12,000 15,000 16,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1135 1500 1930 2830 3120 5630 7300 8200 11,900 14,600 17,800 19,800 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408 N/A
September 2011
Sheet 14 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Designates units must typically meet the new DOE efciency guideline levels with noted losses complying with such.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 033

Transformers
Environmentally Friendly Fluid Filled Units

Table 14.0-32. Liquid-Filled Standard Design, 60 Hz, HV Delta, LV at 600V Class (30 kV BIL) Indoor or Outdoor Application
kVA HV, kV HV BIL, kV Dimensions in Inches (mm) HTX WTX 53.00 (1346.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 70.00 (1778.0) 76.00 (1930.4) 53.00 (1346.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 69.00 (1752.6) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 70.00 (1778.0) 78.00 (1981.2) DTX 38.20 (970.3) 47.00 (1193.8) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 50.50 (1282.7) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 96.60 (2453.6) 115.00 (2921.0) 118.00 (2997.2) 50.50 (1282.7) 52.50 (1333.5) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 63.60 (1615.4) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 71.20 (1808.5) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 96.60 (2453.6) 122.00 (3098.8) 135.00 (3429.0) Weight Lbs (kg) Liquid Gallons (Liters)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Liquid-Filled 65C Rise

300 500 750 5 or 15 5 or 15 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 25 35 25 35 5 or 15 5 or 15 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 5 or 15 25 35 25 35 25 35 60 or 95 60 or 95 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 125 150 125 150 60 or 95 60 or 95 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 60 or 95 125 150 125 150 125 150 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 100.00 (2540.0) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 100.00 (2540.0) 6100 (2767) 7400 (3357) 9300 (4218) 9301 (4219) 9302 (4219) 11,000 (4990) 11,000 (4990) 11,000 (4990) 12,700 (5761) 12,700 (5761) 12,700 (5761) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 17,250 (7825) 17,250 (7825) 17,250 (7825) 17,850 (8097) 17,850 (8097) 16,800 (7620) 18,000 (8165) 6100 (2767) 7400 (3357) 9300 (4218) 9301 (4219) 9302 (4219) 11,500 (5216) 11,500 (5216) 11,500 (5216) 13,500 (6124) 13,500 (6124) 13,500 (6124) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 15,200 (6895) 17,500 (7938) 17,500 (7938) 17,500 (7938) 18,000 (8165) 18,000 (8165) 16,800 (7620) 18,000 (8165) 480 (1817) 517 (1957) 575 (2177)
1000
600 (2271)
1500
640 (2423)
2000
650 (2461)
2500
650 (2461)
3000 3750
680 (2574) 900 (3407)
Liquid-Filled 55/65C Rise

300 500 750 480 (1817) 517 (1957) 575 (2177)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1000
600 (2271)
1500
640 (2423)
2000
670 (2536)
2500
700 (2650)
3000 3750
700 (2650) 900 (3407)
Plan
Elevation
HTX DTX C L
C Lof Bushing
17 18 19
WTX
20
Figure 14.0-16. Liquid-Filled, Indoor and Outdoor
= 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) for all ratings through 15 kV primary, 600V secondary.
21
CA08104001E

Transformers
Liquid-Filled <34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 175 250 300 330 520 730 1100 1500 1900 2600 2800 3800 Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 960 1250 1630 2500 2600 4900 6200 6700 10,000 12,000 15,000 16,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1135 1500 1930 2830 3120 5630 7300 8200 11,900 14,600 17,800 19,800 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408 N/A
September 2011
Sheet 14 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 035

Transformers
VPI and VPE Ventilated Dry-TypeStandard Unit Substation

Table 14.0-35. Aluminum Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600 Volt LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA HV, HV Dimensions in Inches (mm) kV BIL, H WTX kV TX 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 112.00 (2844.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 112.00 (2844.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 120.00 (3048.0) 120.00 (3048.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 108.00 (2743.2) 96.00 (2438.4) 120.00 (3048.0) 132.00 (3352.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 132.00 (3352.8) DTX Weight Lbs (kg) kVA HV, HV Dimensions in Inches (mm) kV BIL, H WTX kV TX 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) DTX Weight Lbs (kg)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
150C Rise
300 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 3200 (1453) 3600 (1634) 4000 (1816) 4500 (2043) 4400 (1998) 4600 (2088) 5000 (2270) 5500 (2497) 5500 (2497) 6200 (2815) 6500 (2951) 7000 (3178) 6300 (2860) 7400 (3360) 7500 (3405) 8000 (3632)
80 or 115C Rise
300 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 4000 (1816) 5000 (2270) 6000 (2724) 6500 (2951) 5200 (2361) 5800 (2633) 7000 (3178) 7500 (3405) 6200 (2815) 7000 (3178) 8000 (3632) 8500 (3859)
500
500
750
750
1000
1000
66.00 (1676.4) 7800 (3541) 66.00 (1676.4) 8750 (3972) 72.00 (1828.8) 9500 (4313) 72.00 (1828.8) 10,000 (4540)
1500
66.00 (1676.4) 8200 (3723) 66.00 (1676.4) 9300 (4222) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,000 (4540) 72.00 (1828.8) 10,500 (4767) 66.00 (1676.4) 9400 (4268) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,500 (4767) 72.00 (1828.8) 12,000 (5448) 78.00 (1981.2) 12,500 (5675) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 78.00 (1981.2) 11,700 (5312) 13,000 (5002) 14,500 (6583) 15,000 (6810) 15,000 (6810) 16,000 (7264) 18,000 (8172) 19,000 (8626) 16,000 (7264) 17,000 (7718) 19,000 (8626) 21,000 (9534)
1500
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 9500 (4313) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,500 (4767) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 11,000 (4994) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 11,500 (5221) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 130.00 (3302.0) 130.00 (3302.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 130.00 (3302.0) 140.00 (3556.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 130.00 (3302.0) 140.00 (3556.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 132.00 (3352.8) 138.00 (3505.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 138.00 (3505.2) 144.00 (3657.6) 114.00 (2895.6) 120.00 (3048.0) 150.00 (3810.0) 150.00 (3810.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 78.00 (1981.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 78.00 (1981.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 78.00 (1981.2) 12,000 (5448) 13,000 (5902) 13,200 (5993) 13,500 (6129) 15,000 (6810) 15,800 (7173) 16,000 (7264) 16,500 (7491) 17,000 (7718) 18,000 (8172) 20,000 (9080) 22,000 (9988) 18,000 (8172) 19,000 (8626) 22,000 (9988) 24,000 (10,896)
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 108.00 (2743.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 120.00 (3048.0) 138.00 (3505.2) 78.00 (1981.2) 120.00 (3048.0) 144.00 (3657.6) 78.00 (1981.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 120.00 (3048.0) 108.00 (2743.2) 114.00 (2895.6) 144.00 (3657.6) 150.00 (3810.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 78.00 (1981.2)
3000
3750
3750
Dimensions based on MVS primary coordination and Magnum DS secondary coordination. For outdoor base construction, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) to height and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width and depth. Roof overhangs 8.50 inches (215.9 mm) front and rear. 30 kV BIL is standard for 5 kV class; 60 kV BIL is available as an option. 60 kV BIL is standard for 15 kV class; 95 kV BIL is available as an option.
Note: Smaller dimensions/weights may be available, refer to Eaton.
Table 14.0-36. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600 V and Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers
VPI, 15 kV Primary 150C Temp. Rise kVA No Load (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 170C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 4500 8500 10,000 13,000 17,000 21,000 24,000 33,500 35,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 170C (Watts) 5750 10,000 12,000 15,500 20,500 25,250 29,000 42,500 46,000 4695 kV BIL Total Losses at 75% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 2022 2960 3980 4898 6659 8268 9700 N/A N/A
TX
300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750

1250 1500 2000 2500 3500 4250 5000 9000 11,000
TX
TX
Figure 14.0-17. Indoor Ventilated Enclosure (NEMA 1 Construction)
21

Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 14 036
i ii 1 2 3
VPI and VPE Ventilated Dry-TypeIntegrated Unit Substation (IUS)

Table 14.0-37. Aluminum/Copper Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600V LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA HV, kV HV BIL, kV 2 Dimensions in Inches (mm) HTX WTX DTX Weight Lbs (kg) Aluminum Core and Coil 4900 (2225) 6500 (2951) 6700 (3042) 8000 (3632) 8500 (3859) 9700 (4404) 9600 (4358) 11,800 (5357) 12,500 (5675) 13,700 (6220) 15,400 (6992) 15,000 (6810) 6600 (2996) 7100 (3223) 8700 (3950) 9400 (4268) 11,500 (5221) 11,900 (5403) 12,600 (5720) 13,900 (6311) 15,500 (7037) 15,400 (6992) 18,000 (8172) 20,000 (9080) Aluminum Total 5900 (2679) 7500 (3405) 7700 (3496) 9000 (4086) 9500 (4313) 11,000 (4994) 10,700 (4858) 13,200 (5993) 13,700 (6220) 15,200 (6901) 16,800 (7627) 16,500 (7491) 7600 (3450) 8200 (3723) 9700 (4404) 10,500 (4767) 12,700 (5766) 13,400 (6084) 13,900 (6311) 15,500 (7037) 16,900 (7673) 17,300 (7854) 19,500 (8853) 21,900 (9943) Copper Core and Coil 5900 (2679) 6800 (3087) 8200 (3723) 8800 (3995) 8900 (4041) 10,800 (4903) 10,900 (4949) 12,400 (5630) 13,300 (6038) 14,500 (6583) 15,400 (6992) 19,800 (8989) 7900 (3587) 7800 (4212) 10,000 (4540) 11,400 (5176) 12,300 (5584) 15,800 (7173) 14,500 (6583) 17,500 (7945) 16,300 (7400) 20,000 (9080) 22,000 (9988) 24,000 (10,896) Copper Total 6900 (3133) 7800 (3541) 9200 (4177) 9800 (4449) 9900 (4495) 12,100 (5493) 12,000 (5448) 13,800 (6265) 14,500 (6583) 16,000 (7264) 16,800 (7627) 21,300 (9670) 8900 (4041) 8900 (4041) 11,000 (4994) 12,500 (5675) 13,500 (6129) 17,300 (7854) 15,800 (7173) 19,100 (8671) 17,700 (8036) 21,900 (9943) 23,500 (10,669) 25,900 (11,759)
150C Rise 1000 1500 2000 2500 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 112.00 (2844.8) 52.00 (1320.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 64.00 (1625.6) 56.00 (1422.4) 64.00 (1625.6) 56.00 (1422.4) 64.00 (1625.6) 56.00 (1422.4) 64.00 (1625.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 108.00 (2743.2) 108.00 (2743.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 112.00 (2844.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 112.00 (2844.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 118.00 (2997.2) 114.00 (2895.6) 118.00 (2997.2)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3000 3750
80C Rise 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750
TX
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Dimensions and weights for estimating purposes only. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
W D
TX TX
September 2011
Sheet 14 037

Transformers
Cast Coil and RESIBLOC Dry-TypeStandard Unit Substation

Table 14.0-38. Standard Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600V LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA HV, HV Dimensions in Inches (mm) kV BIL, WTX H TX kV 5 15 5 15 27 5 15 27 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 5 15 27 38 60 95 60 95 125 60 95 125 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 60 95 125 150 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) DTX Weight Lbs (kg) kVA HV, HV Dimensions in Inches (mm) kV BIL, HTX WTX kV 5 15 5 15 5 15 5 15 60 95 60 95 60 95 60 95 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) DTX Weight Lbs (kg)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
80C Rise 300 500 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 4000 (1816) 4400 (1998) 5900 (2679) 7100 (3223) 7500 (3405) 7400 (3360) 7900 (3587) 8400 (3814)
100C Rise or 115C Rise 300 500 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 90.00 (2286.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 3900 (1771) 4200 (1907) 6000 (2724) 6200 (2815) 7500 (3405) 7900 (3587) 8400 (3814) 8500 (3859)
90.00 (2286.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 10.002 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 126.00 (3200.4)
750
750
1000
66.00 (1676.4) 8700 (3950) 66.00 (1676.4) 8800 (3995) 66.00 (1676.4) 9000 (4086) 72.00 (1828.8) 11,300 (5130) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 11,000 (4994) 11,400 (5176) 11,700 (5312) 13,000 (5902) 13,600 (6174) 14,000 (6356) 14,000 (6356) 18,000 (8172) 16,900 (7673) 16,600 (7536) 16,000 (7264) 21,200 (9625) 22,500 (10,215) 23,500 (10,669) 24,000 (10,896) 24,000 (10,896) 24,000 (10,896) 25,000 (11,350) 26,000 (11,804) 27,000 (12,258)
1000
1500
1500
5 15
60 95
90.00 (2286.0) 102.00 (2590.8)
96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,200 (4631) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 10,800 (4903)
2000
96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 112.00 (2844.8) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 132.00 (3352.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 124.00 (3149.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 120.00 (3048.0) 120.00 (3048.0) 124.00 (3149.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 138.00 (3505.2) 144.00 (3657.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 144.00 (3657.6) 150.00 (3810.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 126.00 (3200.4) 144.00 (3657.6) 150.00 (3810.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6)
2000
5 15
60 95
96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 12,400 (5630) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 13,000 (5902)
2500
2500
5 15
60 95
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 15,200 (6901) 112.00 (2844.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 14,700 (6674)
3000
3000
5 15
60 95
102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 20,000 (9080) 112.00 (2844.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 21,000 (9534)
9 10 11 12
3750
3750
5 15
60 95
102.00 (2590.8) 126.00 (3200.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 23,000 (10,442) 120.00 (3048.0) 126.00 (3200.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 26,000 (11,804)
Dimensions based on MVS primary coordination and Magnum DS secondary coordination. For outdoor base construction, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) to height and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width and depth. Roof overhangs 8.50 inches (215.9 mm) front and rear. 30 kV BIL is standard for 5 kV class; 60 kV BIL is available as an option. 60 kV BIL is standard for 15 kV class; 95 kV BIL is available as an option.
Table 14.0-39. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers.
Cast, 15 kV Primary 115C Temp. Rise kVA No Load (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 135C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 4000 8000 9000 12,500 16,000 19,000 20,000 26,000 29,000 30,000 35,000 45,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 135C (Watts) 5250 9500 11,500 15,500 20,000 24,000 25,500 35,000 40,000 43,500 55,000 67,500 4695 kV BIL Total Losses at 75% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 2022 2960 3980 4898 6659 8268 9700 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
TX
300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000

1250 1500 2500 3000 4000 5000 5500 9000 11,000 13,500 20,000 22,500
TX
TX
Dimensions and weights for estimating purposes only. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 14 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Cast Coil Dry-TypeIntegrated Unit Substation (IUS)

Table 14.0-40. Aluminum/Copper Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600 Volt LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA HV, kV HV BIL, kV Dimensions in Inches (mm) HTX WTX DTX Weight Lbs (kg) Aluminum Core and Coil 7800 (3541) 9600 (4358) 11,400 (5176) 14,000 (6356) 16,400 (7446) 20,000 (9080) 8300 (3768) 10,200 (4631) 13,500 (6129) 16,000 (7264) 18,000 (8172) 23,300 (10,578) Aluminum Total 8800 (3995) 10,700 (4858) 12,600 (5720) 15,400 (6992) 17,900 (8127) 21,700 (9852) 9400 (4268) 11,400 (5176) 15,100 (6855) 17,800 (8081) 19,900 (9035) 25,200 (11,441) Copper Core and Coil 8000 (3632) 11,200 (5085) 12,900 (5857) 15,500 (7037) 18,200 (8263) 22,000 (9988) 8900 (4041) 16,300 (7400) 16,900 (7673) 19,800 (8989) 21,000 (9534) 25,000 (11,350) Copper Total 9000 (4086) 12,300 (5584) 14,100 (6401) 16,900 (7673) 19,200 (8717) 23,700 (10,760) 10,000 (4540) 17,500 (7945) 18,500 (8399) 21,600 (9806) 22,900 (10,397) 26,900 (12,213)
115C Rise 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 96.00 (2438.4) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 102.00 (2590.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 108.00 (2743.2) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 96.00 (2438.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 108.00 (2743.2) 114.00 (2895.6) 114.00 (2895.6) 114.00 (2895.6) 102.00 (2590.8) 114.00 (2895.6) 118.00 (2997.2) 124.00 (3149.6) 124.00 (3149.6) 124.00 (3149.6)
80C Rise
TX
TX
TX
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Dimensions and weights for estimating purposes only. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 039

Outdoor Secondary Equipment
12.13 (308.1) 2.50 (63.5) 3.06 (77.7) 3.21 (81.5) 26.94 Opening (684.3) 25.00 (635.0) 25.00 (635.0) 45.66 (1159.8) Control Wire Opening 4.25 x 3.50 (108.0 x 88.9) Bottom Conduit Space 3.93 (99.8) 47.83 (1214.9) Control Wire Opening 4.25 x 3.50 (108.0 x 88.9) 5.03 (127.8) 2.00 (50.8) 30.00 Unit (762.0)
i
Roof Rear of Base Structure Width 'C' B Rear of Inner Structure 1.05 (26.7) 25.25 (641.4) 109.13 to Floor (2771.9)
ii 1 2
Maximum Opening
15.68 14.07 (398.3) (357.4) A B A C
3.06 (77.7)
40.94 Opening (1039.9)
30.81 Opening (782.6) Maximum Opening Maximum Opening
44.00 Unit (1117.6)
1.05 (26.7)
Section B-B
Top View A
22.00 Unit (558.8) Bus Duct Chimney & Cover 1.05 (26.7) 1.05 (26.7)
3.06 (77.7)
18.94 Opening (481.1)
Structure Width 22.00 (558.8) 30.00 (762.0) 38.00 (965.2) 44.00 (1117.6) 50.00 (1270.0)
'B' 16.99 (431.6) 24.99 (634.8) 32.99 (838.0) 38.99 (990.4) 44.99 (1142.8)
'C' 11.00 (279.4) 15.00 (381.0) 19.00 (482.6) 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0)
3 4 5
Lifting Angle
1.50 (38.1)
'B'
Foundation Tie Down (for Seismic Only)
Floor Plan
Section A-A
'A' 119.98 Overall Depth (3047.5) 15.68 Bus Opening (398.3) (from Base) 0.61 (15.5) 28.59 (From Base) (726.2) 5.75 C (146.1) C *51.79 (1315.5) A 1.00 (25.4) 26.00 (660.4) 117.08 (Base) (2973.8) 33.45 (Door Width) (849.6) 4.00 A (101.6) 30.21 (Opening Width) (767.3) O.S. of Outdoor End Sheet Outdoor Roof Sheet 1.00 (25.4) 29.97 26.57 (761.2) (674.9) 5.75 (146.1) 111.48 Overall Height (2831.6) C Throat Opening & TXF Switchgear Throat (Shipped Disassembled) 36.00 (914.4) 21.50 (546.1)
22-inch Width = 21.40 (543.56) to Rear Frame 30-inch Width = 29.40 (746.76) to Rear Frame 38-inch Width = 37.40 (949.96) to Rear Frame 50-inch Width = 49.40 (1254.76) to Rear Frame 55-inch Width = 54.40 (1381.76) to Rear Frame
6 7
See Section A-A Above for Bus Duct Orientation Info.
2.30 (58.4)
14.50 (368.30)
16.96 (430.8)
'A'
C 72.00 (Switchgear Depth) (1828.8) C See Top View Above
8 9 10
109.13 (2771.9) 105.06 (2668.5)
33.45 Door Swing (849.6)
42.00 (Aisle Width) (1066.8)
33.45 Door Swing (849.6)
39.66 (1007.4)
11 12 13
Side View
Top View
Front of Outdoor Base
Transition Box (Shipped Attached)
Weights of Outdoor Structures (without breakers) Structure End trims (one set per lineup) 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 30-inch (762.0 mm) wide breaker structure 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide breaker structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 38-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 50-inch (1270.0 mm) wide utility structure Transformer throat WeightLbs (kg) 1500 (681) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 5200 (2361) 2300 (1044) 2500 (1135) 2700 (1226) 3200 (1453) 150 (68)
14 15 16 17 18
Switchgear Throat (Shipped Disassembled) 19.70 (500.4) 45.00 (1143.0)
41.38 (1051.1)
8.00 (203.2) 16.00 (406.4) 44.00 30.00 (1117.6) (762.0) Unit Widths (Overall Shipping Width)
1.00 (25.4) 38.50 (977.9) 21.50 (546.1)
22.00 (558.8)
5.00 (127.0)
Front View 9255C25
19 20 21
Figure 14.0-21. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Magnum DS Switchgear and Magnum SB SwitchboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)

46.63 inches (1184.4 mm) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box). 52.63 inches (1336.8 mm) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box). 18.70 inches (475.0 mm) = 44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box. 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations.
CA08104001E

Outdoor Secondary Equipment
September 2011
Sheet 14 040
i ii 1
EnclosuresPow-R-Line C
2.15 (54.6)
4.50 (114.3)
17.37 (441.2)
Table 14.0-41. Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1.25 (31.8) 31 8)
Switchboard Indoor Structure Depth 48.00 (1219.2)
Non-Walk-in Enclosure Depth 61.00 (1549.4) 55.00 (1397.0) 61.00 (1549.4)
2.13 (54.0) (54 0)
5.00 (127.0) 90.70 (2303.8) 2303.8
20.00 (508.0) 22.00 (558.8)
Dimension A
02500 kVA transformer 25015000 kVA transformer
3 4 5 6
Structure Width A To Floor
44.00 (1117.6) Front of PRL C Inne er Structure
Standard busway entry/exit location, 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) deep minimum. 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure only.
20-inch (508.0) Transition Structure Width
12.81 (325.4)
Swbd. Struc. Depth Enclosure Depth
Figure 14.0-22. Front or Rear AccessNon-Walk-in with Flat RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
7
4.5 (114.3) 2.25 (57.2)

Switchboard Indoor Structure Depth 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 66.00 (1676.4) Non-Walk-in Enclosure Depth 61.00 (1549.4) 67.00 (1701.8) 79.00 (2006.6) 55.00 (1397.0) 61.00 (1549.4)
8 9
5.00 (127.0) 2.13 (54.0) 20.00 (508.0) 22.00 (558.8)
10 11 12
0.13 (3.2) End Trim Structure Width 20-inch (508.0) Transition A To Floor
92.95 (2360.9)
Dimension A
44.00 (1117.6) Front of PRL C Inner Structure
0.13 (3.2) End Trim
12.81 (325.4)
13 14 15 16
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure minimum.
Figure 14.0-23. Front AccessNon-Walk-in with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)

20.5 (520.7)
4.50 (114.3)

2.31 (58.7)
2.13 (54.0) 5.00 (127.0)
25.00 (635.0)
Rear of Enclosure
Switchboard Indoor Structure Depth 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 66.00 (1676.4)
Non-Walk-in Enclosure Depth 65.00 (1651.0) 71.00 (1803.4) 83.00 (2108.2) 55.00 (1397.0) 61.00 (1549.4)
17 18 19 20 21
92.95 (2360.9)
22.00 (558.8) 44.00 (1117.6) Rear of PRL C Inner Structure
96.25 (2444.8) Top of Bus Duct Chimney Cap
Dimension A
A to Floor
Front of PRL C Inner Structure
Structure Width
20-inch (508.0) Transition
0.125 (3.2) End Trim
4.19 (106.3)
Standard transformer throat connection, 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) deep only. 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Non-walk-in dimension12.81 inches (325.4 mm). Standard busway entry/exit location.
Figure 14.0-24. Rear AccessNon-Walk-in with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)

September 2011
Sheet 14 041
Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V 14.0-41 Technical Data

Transformers
Table 14.0-44. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
System Grounding Solidly grounded system Low resistance grounded system High resistance or ungrounded system Nominal System Line-to-Line Voltage (kV) 2.4 3 3 6 4.16 6 6 6 4.8 6 6 9 7.2 6 6 12 12.0 12 12 18 12.47 12 12 18 13.2 12 12 21 13.8 12 12 21 14.4 12 12 24 22.9 12 21 36 24.9 24 24 39 34.5 30 30 54
i ii 1 2
Note: Arrester rating is based on a 55C maximum ambient temperature in the enclosure.
Table 14.0-45. Transformer Primary Fuse Applications

Rated Maximum System Voltage, kV 2.75 Fuse Type Current limiting Type Nomenclature CLE (striker pin type) CLE-750 CXN RBA200 RBA400/RBA800 CLE (striker pin type) CLE-750 CXN RBA200 RBA400/RBA800 CLE (striker pin type) CXN RBA200 RBA400/RBA800 HRBA400/HRBA800 CLE (striker pin type) CXN RBA200 RBA400/RBA800 RBA200 RBA400/RBA800 RBA200 RBA400/RBA800 Amperes Symmetrical Interrupting Rating 63,000 40,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 63,000 40,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 63,000 50,000 19,000 37,500 34,800 63,000 50,000 14,400 29,400 10,500 21,000 6,900 16,800
To nd the suggested minimum fuse size for transformer:

1. Calculate the transformers base full load current rating by dividing the transformer base kVA by the nominal transformer voltage, then dividing this result by 1.732. 2. Multiply the result of Step 1 by 1.4 to determine the theoretical minimum recommended fuse continuous current rating. 3. Find the closest available fuse continuous current rating that is equal to or greater than this value. This is the suggested minimum recommended fuse size for the transformers base kVA rating. If the transformer has a fan rating, perform two calculations: 1.) selfcooled (as above), and 2.) fan-cooled, however in the later calculation, use the fan full load amperes and use a 1.2 multiplier instead of 1.4, as directed above. Select the fuse rating for each of the applications by selecting a fuse value equal to or greater than the calculated ampere values. Usually, fan-cooled transformers require a higher rated primary fuse, and the higher rated fuse from the calculations should be selected. However, it is possible that the fuse selection process yields the same fuse rating for self-cooled and fancooled units; when that occurs, higher rated fuses are not required for fan-cooled units. These application guidelines are subject to modication when specic factors such as transformer characteristics, other protective devices, coordination requirements and load variations may indicate a different ratio of fuse ampere rating to transformer full load current rating. Caution: Primary fuses must not be relied upon for clearing secondary ground faults.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Expulsion 5.5 Current limiting
Expulsion 8.3 Current limiting Expulsion 14.4 15.5 Expulsion Current limiting Expulsion 25.8 38 Expulsion Expulsion
CA08104001E
14.0-42 Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V Technical Data

Primary Equipment
Table 14.0-46. Suggested Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer Applications (Check Compliance of Fuses to FM Requirements if Installation Must Comply with FM)
System 2.4 Nominal kV Fuses Maximum kV 2.75 4.16 5.5 4.8 5.5 7.2 8.3 12.0 15.5 13.2 15.5 13.8 15.5 14.4 15.5
September 2011
Sheet 14 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Full Fuse kVA Rating Load Rating Self-Cooled Current Amps E Amps
112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
15.6 20.8 31.2 41.6 69.4 104.1 25E 30E 50E 80E 125E 150E 200E 300E 400E 600E 13.5 18.0 27.1 36.1 60.1 90.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 300.7 20E 25E 50E 65E 100E 150E 175E 250E 350E 400E 9.0 12.0 18.0 24.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 120.3 160.4 200.5 15E 20E 25E 40E 65E 100E 125E 175E 250E 300E 5.4 7.2 10.8 14.4 24.1 36.1 48.1 72.2 96.2 120.3 10E 10E 15E 20E 40E 65E 80E 100E 150E 175E 4.9 6.6 9.8 13.1 21.9 32.8 43.7 65.6 87.5 109.3 10E 10E 15E 20E 30E 65E 80E 100E 125E 150E 4.7 6.3 9.4 12.6 20.9 31.4 41.8 62.8 83.7 104.6 10E 10E 15E 20E 30E 65E 80E 100E 125E 150E 4.5 6.0 9.0 12.0 20.0 30.1 40.1 60.1 80.2 100.2 10E 10E 15E 20E 30E 65E 80E 100E 125E 150E
Percent Impedance (% Z)
27.1 36.1 54.1 72.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 360.8 481.1 601.4
40E 50E 80E 100E 175E 250E
2.25 3.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75
350E 138.8 600E 208.2 750E 277.6 1100E 347.0
Fuse ratings represent the smallest fuse possible that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLA for 0.1 second and 25 x FLA for .01 second) and be able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLA).
Table 14.0-47. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
System 2.4 Nominal kV Fuses Maximum kV 8.3 4.16 8.3 4.8 8.3 7.2 8.3 12.0 15.5 13.2 15.5 13.8 15.5 14.4 15.5 Percent Impedance (% Z)
Transformer Full Fuse kVA Rating Load Rating Self-Cooled Current Amps E Amps
Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
16 21 31 42 69 104 139 208 278 347 25E 30E 50E 65E 100E 150E 200E 300E 400E 14 18 27 36 60 90 120 180 241 20E 25E 40E 50E 100E 125E 200E 250E 400E 9 12 18 24 40 60 80 120 160 15E 20E 25E 40E 65E 100E 125E 200E 250E 300E 5 7 11 14 24 36 48 72 96 120 180 10E 10E 15E 20E 40E 50E 80E 100E 150E 200E 250E 5 7 10 13 22 33 44 66 87 109 164 7E 10E 15E 20E 30E 50E 65E 100E 125E 150E 250E 5 6 9 13 21 31 42 63 84 105 157 7E 10E 15E 20E 30E 50E 65E 100E 125E 150E 250E 5 6 9 12 20 30 40 60 80 100 150 7E 10E 15E 20E 30E 50E 65E 65E 125E 150E 250E
112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3750

27 36 54 72 120 180 241 361 481 601
40E 50E 80E 100E 200E 250E 400E 540E 720E
2.25 3.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75
540E 301
450E 200
Fuse ratings represent the smallest fuse possible that will withstand transformer inrush (12XFLA for 0.1 second and 25XFLA for .01 second) and be able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLA). Two 300 E-Ampere fuse rells used in parallel with 10% derating factor. Two 400 E-Ampere fuse rells used in parallel with 10% derating factor. Two 250 E-Ampere fuse rells used in parallel with 10% derating factor.
Table 14.0-48. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838.0 kV Power Transformer Applications
System Nominal kV Fuses Maximum kV Transformer kVA Rating Self-Cooled 22.9 25.8 Full Load Current Amps 19 25 38 50 63 95 Fuse Rating Amps E 30E 40E 65E 80E 100E 150E 23.9 25.8 Full Load Current Amps 18 24 36 48 60 91 Fuse Rating Amps E 25E 40E 50E 80E 100E 150E 24.9 25.8 Full Load Current Amps 17 23 34 46 58 87 Fuse Rating Amps E 25E 40E 50E 65E 80E 125E 34.5 38.0 Full Load Current Amps 13 17 25 33 42 63 Fuse Rating Amps E 20E 25E 40E 50E 65E 100E
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3750
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 043

Primary Equipment
Table 14.0-49. Type MVS Primary Switch, Standard Ratings

Rated Maximum Voltage, kV 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 27 27 38 Impulse Withstand, kV (BIL) 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 125 125 150 Rated Current Continuous and Load Break, Amperes 600 600 1200 1200 600 1200 600 1200 600 600 600 Rated Fault-Close and Momentary Current, kA Asym. 40 64 40 64 40 40 64 64 40 64 40
Transformer Technical Data

Transformer Standards
Dimensions and weights as listed in the tables are based on the following:
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 14.0-50. Available Vacuum Breaker Ratings, MSB Switchgear

Rated Control Voltage 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac
Spring Charge Motor Run Amperes 4.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0
Time Seconds 5 5 5 5 5
Close or Trip Amperes 5.2 3.6 1.8 3.6 1.8
Voltage Range Close 3856 100140 200280 104127 208254 Trip 2856 70140 140180 104127 208254
Inrush current is four times running amperes.
Standard base kVA ratings: 30050075010001500 2000250030003750 Three-phase, 60 Hz, two windings Standard temperature rise (see tables) above ambient air temperature of 40C (104F) maximum and 30C (86F) average in any 24-hour period Maximum altitude of 3300 ft (1006m) above sea level for full rating Standard high-voltages: 2400416048006900720012000 1247013200138002080022900 34500, delta connected only Standard high-voltage taps: Two approximately 2-1/2% full capacity above and two below rated voltage Standard low voltages (no taps): 208Y/120 (1000 kVA maximum) 240 delta (1000 kVA maximum) 480 delta (all ratings) 480Y/277 (all ratings)
Note: 600Y and 600 delta also available.
Aluminum winding conductors No series-parallel or delta-wye terminal boards Standard accessories and losses Standard surface preparation, nish processes, materials and colors Standard tests in accordance with IEEE standard test code (see below) HV and LV basic impulse levels (BIL), impedance and sound levels in line with the following tables Resistance measurements Ratio tests Polarity and phase relation No-load loss Exciting current Impedance and load loss Applied potential test Induced potential test
IEEE Standard Tests

CA08104001E

Transformers
Table 14.0-51. Liquid-Filled Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Temperature Rise, C, Base Rating, OA 55 65 Transformer Base, kVA Continuous kVA Multiplier 65C OA Below 2500 2500 and larger Below 2500 2500 and larger 1.120 1.120 1.000 1.000 55C FA 1.150 1.250 N/A N/A
September 2011
Sheet 14 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
65C FA 1.290 1.400 1.150 1.250
Table 14.0-52. Dry-Type (Conventional VPE and VPI) Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Temperature Rise, C, Base Rating, AA 80 115 150 Continuous kVA Multiplier 80C AA 1.000 N/A N/A 115C AA 1.150 1.00 N/A 150C AA 1.330 1.150 N/A 80C FA 1.330 N/A N/A 115C FA 1.500 1.330 N/A 150C FA 1.800 1.500 1.330
Table 14.0-53. Dry-Type Cast Coil, Dura-Cast, and RESIBLOC Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Temperature Rise, C, Base Rating, AA 80 100 115 80 Type Continuous kVA Multiplier 80C AA Cast Coil or Dura-Cast RESIBLOC 1.000 N/A N/A 1.000 100C AA 1.120 1.000 N/A N/A 115C AA 1.170 1.050 1.000 N/A 80C FA 1.330 N/A N/A 1.330 100C FA 1.450 1.330 N/A N/A 115C FA 1.500 1.380 1.330 N/A
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 045

Transformers
Table 14.0-54. Secondary Short-Circuit Capacity of Typical Power Transformers

Transformer Rating ThreePhase kVA and Impedance % 300 5% Maximum ShortCircuit kVA Available from Primary System 208V, Three-Phase Rated Load Continuous Current, Amps Short-Circuit Current rms (Symmetrical Amperes) ComTrans- 50% former Motor bined Alone Load

240V, Three-Phase Rated Load Continuous Current, Amps Short-Circuit Current rms (Symmetrical Amperes) Trans- 100% Comformer Motor bined Alone Load


i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
50,000 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited
834
14,900 1700 15,700 16,000 16,300 16,500 16,700 21,300 2800 25,200 26,000 26,700 27,200 27,800 28,700 4200 32,000 33,300 34,400 35,200 36,200 35,900 5600 41,200 43,300 45,200 46,700 48,300 47,600 8300 57,500 61,800 65,600 68,800 72,500
16,600 17,400 17,700 18,000 18,200 18,400
722
12,90 13,60 13,90 14,10 14,300 14,400 20,000 21,900 22,500 23,100 23,600 24,100 24,900 27,800 28,900 29,800 30,600 31,400 31,000 35,600 37,500 39,100 40,400 41,800
2900 15,800 16,500 16,800 17,000 17,200 17,300 4800 24,800 26,700 27,300 27,900 28,400 28,900 7200 32,100 35,000 36,100 37,000 37,800 38,600
361
6,400 6,800 6,900 7,000 7,100 7,200 10,000 10,900 11,300 11,600 11,800 12,000 12,400 13,900 14,400 14,900 15,300 15,700 15,500 17,800 18,700 19,600 20,200 20,900 20,600 24,900 26,700 28,400 29,800 31,400 24,700 31,000 34,000 36,700 39,100 41,800
1400
7,800 8,200 8,300 8,400 8,500 8,600
289
5,200 5,500 5,600 5,600 5,700 5,800 8,000 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,400 9,600 10,000 11,100 11,600 11,900 12,200 12,600 12,400 14,300 15,000 15,600 16,200 16,700 16,500 20,000 21,400 22,700 23,900 25,100 19,700 24,800 27,200 29,400 31,300 33,500 22,400 29,200 32,400 35,600 38,500 41,800
1200
6,400 6,700 6,800 6,800 6,900 7,000 9,900 10,600 10,900 11,200 11,300 11,500
500 5%
50,000 1388 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 2080 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 2776 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 4164 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited 50,000 100,000 150,000 250,000 500,000 Unlimited
25,900 1203 28,000 28,800 29,500 30,000 30,600 32,900 1804 36,200 37,500 38,600 39,400 40,400 41,500 2406 46,800 48,900 50,800 52,300 53,900 55,900 3609 65,800 70,100 73,900 77,100 80,800
601
2400 12,400 13,300 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,400 3600 16,000 17,500 18,000 18,500 18,900 19,300 4800 20,300 22,600 23,500 24,400 25,000 25,700
481
1900
750 5.75%
902
722
2900 12,900 14,000 14,500 14,800 15,100 15,500 3900 16,300 18,200 18,900 19,500 20,100 20,600 5800 22,300 25,800 27,200 28,500 29,700 30,900 7800 27,500 32,600 35,000 37,200 39,100 41,300 9600 32,000 38,800 42,000 45,200 48,100 51,400
1000 5.75%
6900 40,600 1203 45,200 47,100 48,700 50,000 51,400
962
1500 5.75%
41,200 14,400 55,600 1804 49,800 64,200 53,500 57,900 56,800 71,200 59,600 74,000 62,800 77,200 2406
7200 27,800 1444 32,100 33,900 35,600 37,000 38,600 9600 34,300 1924 40,600 43,600 46,300 48,700 51,400
2000 5.75%
2500 5.75%
3008
28,000 12,000 40,000 2405 36,500 48,500 40,500 52,500 44,600 56,600 48,100 60,100 52,300 64,300 30,700 14,000 44,700 2886 41,200 55,200 46,600 60,600 51,900 65,900 56,800 70,800 62,800 76,800 34,000 18,000 52,000 3608 47,500 65,500 54,700 72,700 62,200 80,200 69,400 87,400 78,500 96,500
3000 5.75%
3609
24,600 11,500 36,100 33,000 44,500 37,300 48,800 41,500 53,000 45,500 57,000 50,200 61,700 27,200 14,400 41,600 38,000 52,400 43,700 58,100 49,800 64,200 55,500 69,900 62,800 77,200
3750 5.75%
4511
Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit currents are inversely proportional to impedance. The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current. For 208V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit current will be in direct proportion.
CA08104001E

Transformers
Table 14.0-55. IEEE Standard Insulation LevelskV BIL
HighVoltage Rating 2400 4160 4800 6900 7200 12,000 12,470 13,200 13,800 22,900 34,400 Transformer Liquid-Filled HV 45 60 60 75 75 95 95 95 95 125 150 LV 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 Ventilated Dry HV 20 30 30 45 45 60 60 60 60 110 150 LV 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Cast Coil HV 20 30 30 45 45 60 60 60 60 110 150 LV 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
September 2011
Sheet 14 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 14.0-58. Transformer kVA Ratings, Three-Phase In addition to their self-cooled (AA or OA) kVA ratings, Eatons standard secondary unit substation transformers of liquid-lled and ventilated dry-types are designed for continuous operation at the following supplementary self-cooled and fan-cooled (FA) kVA ratings:
Liquid-Filled
65C Rise OA 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 FA N/A N/A 862 1150 1725 2300 3125 3750 4690 55/65C Rise OA 55C 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 OA 65C 336 560 840 1120 1680 2240 2800 3360 4200 FA 55C N/A N/A 862 1150 1725 2300 3125 3750 4690 FA 65C N/A N/A 966 1288 1932 2576 3500 4200 5250
600V maximum.
Note: Increased BIL option is available.
Table 14.0-56. Standard Guaranteed Sound LevelsDecibels

Maximum Base kVA (Self-Cooled) 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 Liquid-Filled Transformer OA 55 56 58 58 60 61 62 63 64 FA 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 Ventilated Dry and Cast Coil Transformer AA 55 60 64 64 65 66 68 68 70
Ventilated Dry-Type
150C Rise AA 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 FA 400 667 1000 1333 2000 2667 3333 115/150C Rise AA 115C 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 AA 150C 345 575 863 1150 1725 2300 2875 80/150C Rise FA 115C 460 767 1151 1533 2300 3067 3833 4580 5391 AA 80C 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 AA 150C 405 675 1012 1350 2025 2700 3375 4050 5063 FA 150C 538 898 1346 1795 2693 3591 4489 5400 6329 FA 150C 460 767 1151 1533 2300 3067 3833
FA 67 67 67 67 68 69 71 71 73
80/115C Rise AA 80C 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 AA 115C 345 575 863 1150 1725 2300 2875 3450 4313
Table 14.0-57. Impedances (7-12% Tolerance)

kVA 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750
Liquid-Filled Transformer 5.0% 5.0% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75%
Ventilated Dry and Cast Coil Transformer 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75% 5.75%
Cast Coil
80/115C Rise AA 80C 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 AA 115C 345 575 862 1150 1725 2300 2875 3450 4312 FA 115C 460 765 1150 1530 2300 3066 3833 4588 5391
Optional impedance values are available up to 8.0%. Contact Eaton for more information.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 14 047

Secondary Equipment
Secondary Equipment
For information on secondary equipment for use in unit substations, refer to the following tabs of the Consulting Application Guide: Tab 20Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Drawout Switchgear Tab 21Low Voltage Switchboards Tab 26Power Circuit Breakers and Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Tab 27Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Enclosures
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
14.0-48 Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V

September 2011
Sheet 14 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Unitized Power Centers

September 2011
Sheet 15 001
15.0-1
Contents
Unitized Power Centers General Description and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-2 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-2 Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-2 Third-Party Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-3 Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-3 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-4 LayoutDimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-5 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16313 Section 26 11 16.13
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Unitized Power Center
21
CA08104001E
15.0-2 Unitized Power Centers

September 2011
Sheet 15 002
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ratings
Three-phase kVA: 112.51000 Primary voltages: 2.4 kV Class with 20 kV BIL, 60 Hz 5 kV Class with 30 kV BIL, 60 Hz 15 kV Class with 60 kV BIL, 60 Hz MV power system grounding solid or low resistance grounded (100A) only. UPC product is not to be used on high-resistance or ungrounded MV power systems Transformer windings: Primary connectionsthree-wire delta only Copper or aluminum Type AA, ventilated dry-type NEMA Class 220C insulation 80, 115, 150C rise. When transformer must meet requirements of Federal 10CFR-431K, the 750 and 1000 kVA units are only available in 150C rise Type FA (forced air) available, increases kVA ratings by 33% Primary taps at 95%, 97.5%, 100%, 102.5%, 105% of rated primary voltage Secondary voltages: 208Y/120V, four-wire 240V, three-wire 480Y/277V, four-wire 480V, three-wire 575/380V, four-wire
Advantages
Unitized Power Center
General Description and Application

Eatons unitized dry-type power centers are self-contained metalenclosed unit substations especially designed to supply and distribute low voltage power from medium voltage lines in modern commercial and industrial systems. They are ideal where considerations of equipment size, accessibility, maintainability, ease of installation, and overall economy are uppermost. Due to the inherent compactness of unitized power centers, they are easily and conveniently applied in multiples throughout a distribution system at physical locations close to centers of load concentration. The distribution voltage is thus stepped down to the utilization voltage only at or near the areas of demand with kVA being allocated as required for new construction or renovation in existing buildings. The application of unitized power centers in this manner results in several advantages not available with conventional secondary unit substations.
Moving into place is facilitated by the rugged channel base construction and lifting eyes included with each assembly All standard unitized power centers are especially designed to minimum dimensions consistent with safety and reliability Standard unitized power centers are front-only accessible, making against-the-wall installations possibleminimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from wall for seismic applications, 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) for non-seismic Future load growth is easily accommodated by the addition of unitized power centers to the system without affecting the units serving the original load areas Losses in the medium voltage portion of the distribution system are lower, resulting in a continuous operating savings Secondary output voltage may be adjusted at each unitized power center to compensate for unusual load conditions without affecting the voltage setting of other apparatus in the system Trouble is more quickly isolated with individual units located at or near their served loads Primary power is purchased from the utility at the lower primary power rates, resulting in operational cost savings throughout the life of the equipment Overall installed cost is lower because of the cost benets of medium voltage distribution cable as compared to low voltage cable or busway IQ Energy Sentinel devices can be provided on each feeder circuit to interface with an Eaton PowerNet system to monitor and display electrical energy (kWH). See Tab 3 for more information The IQ family of electronic meters can be provided to monitor the parameters unique to each type of device. With a PONI accessory, each of these devices can be connected to an Eaton PowerNet power monitoring system. See Tab 2 for more information
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 003
15.0-3
Advantages (continued) Third-Party Listing

The UPC is UL listed.
Technical Data
Table 15.0-1. Primary Disconnect Switch RatingsType MVS Load Interrupter
Rated Maximum Voltage kV rms Impulse Withstand Voltage kV peak Continuous and Load Break Current Ampere 600 600 600 600 Short-Time Short-Circuit Withstand Current (2 second) kA, rms sym 25 38 25 38 Non-Fused Switch Fault Close and Momentary Rating (10 cycles) kA, rms Asym 40 61 40 61 Fused Switch Fault Close Rating kA, rms Asym
i ii 1
Seismic Qualication
4.76 4.76 15 15
60 60 95 95
101 101 101 101
2 3
UL listing available with fused switch only.
Table 15.0-2. Primary Fuse Ampere Rating Current Limiting Eaton Type HCL, 63,000A Symmetrical Interrupting Rating
kVA Primary Fuse Ampere Rating at, kV 2.4 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 45 50 75 100 200 4.16 4.8 25 35 45 60 100 150 200 18 25 40 50 80 120 175 7.2 15 18 25 35 60 85 125 12.0 13.2 13.8 7 10 15 20 40 60 75 7 10 15 20 30 45 60 7 10 15 18 30 45 60
Table 15.0-4. Unitized Power Center, Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings

Breaker Range of Type Rated Continuous Current, Amperes EDB EDS ED EDH EDC EHD FDB FD HFD FDC JD HJD JDC DK KD HKD KDC LGE LGH LD HLD LDC MDL HMDL ND HND NDC RD RDC
Rated Maximum Interrupting Capability, kA Sym. 240V 22 42 65 100 200 18 18 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 200 65 100 65 100 200 65 100 65 100 200 125 200 480V 14 14 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 35 65 100 50 65 50 65 100 65 100
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
100225 100225 100225 100225 70225 15100 15150 15225 15225 15225 70250 70250 70250 250400 100400 100400 100400 250600 250600 300600 300600 300600 400800 400800 6001200 6001200 6001200 8002500 8002500
Table 15.0-3. Unit WeightsLbs (kg)

kVA 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000

Weight in Lbs (kg) 4097 (1858) 4317 (1958) 4744 (2152) 5247 (2380) 5659 (2567) 6721 (3049) 10834 (4924)
Single primary, LV distribution in front of the transformer. Single primary. Separate LV switchboard close coupled to transformer.
Not panel mounted, supplied only in added auxiliary distribution section.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 004
Technical Data
Table 15.0-5. Ventilated Dry-Type Transformer Standard Ratings
kVA Impedance kV Primary LIWV % Class Volts (BIL) Primary Taps Wye Self-Cooled Secondary Secondary Full Volts Load Amperes 208V 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fan Cooled (Optional) kVA Secondary Full Load Amperes 208V 150 200 300 400 667 1000 1333 150 200 300 400 667 1000 1333 416 555 833 1110 1200 2776 3000 416 555 833 1110 1200 2776 3000 480V 180 241 361 481 802 1203 1604 180 241 361 481 802 1203 1604
Transformer Maximum Short-Circuit Amperes rms Symmetrical 208V 11566 11896 14194 15840 24136 36205 48274 6245 8327 12491 15140 24136 36205 48274 480V 5012 5155 6151 6561 10459 15689 20918 2706 3608 5413 6561 10459 15689 20918
480V 135 180 271 361 601 902 1203 135 180 271 361 601 902 1203
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
2400, 4160 or 4800
20 kV, 30 kV, or 30 kV
22-1/2%
208Y/120 or 480Y/277
312 416 625 833 1389 2082 2776 312 416 625 833 1389 2082 2776
15
7200, 12470 13200 or 13800
30 kV, 60 kV, 60 kV or 60 kV
22-1/2%
208Y/120 or 480Y/277
Refer to Table 15.0-6 for available temperature rise, fan and secondary voltage options. Short circuit currents assume unlimited utility source, and do not include motor contributions. Maximum load/output is limited to 1200A due to chassis limitation. Maximum load/output is limited to 3000A (cross bus limitation).
Note: All units are three-phase, 60 Hz, 150C rise, 220C insulation system.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 005
15.0-5
LayoutDimensions
Unitized Power Centers Available Congurations
Table 15.0-6. Available Transformer Options

Transformer Section 48-Inch Wide With LV Distribution in Front Trans. kVA 112.5 150 225 300 500 Temp. Rise C 80, 115, 150 80, 115, 150 80, 115, 150 80, 115, 150 150 Optional Fan Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Secondary Voltage All All All All All Transformer Section 48-Inch Wide With Separate LV Distribution Trans. kVA 112.5 150 225 300 Temp. Rise C 80, 115, 150 80, 115, 150 80, 115, 150 80, 115, 150 Optional Fan Yes Yes Yes Yes Secondary Voltage All All All All
i ii 1 2
MV switch will be fused or nonfused. UL listing available with fused switch only MV fuse class: current limiting, Eaton Type HCL only Primary surge protection shown is optional. Surge arresters, snubber pack or both can be provided Use separate LV switchboard if: LV distribution chassis required is >1200A LV chassis-mounted devices will consume more than 36X of available chassis space Bottom or top entry incoming high voltage cable size and quantity is limited to 250 kcmil, two per phase Vent screens, lters, door gaskets or space heaters are not available in this product FA rating (33% increase in kVA) is optional Available transformer options see Table 15.0-6
Transformer Section 60-Inch Wide With LV Distribution in Front Trans. kVA 500 500 750

Transformer Section 60-Inch Wide With Separate LV Distribution Trans. kVA 500 750 1000 Temp. Rise C 80, 115 150 150 Optional Fan Yes Yes Yes Secondary Voltage All All All
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Temp. Rise C 80, 115 150 150
Optional Fan Yes Yes Yes
Secondary Voltage 480V, 600V All 480V, 600V
Available secondary voltages: 208/120V wye (four-wire), 240V delta (three-wire), 480/277V wye (four-wire), 480V delta (three-wire) and 575/380V wye (four-wire). 33% increased kVA capacity with fans. At 208 or 240V secondary, maximum load (output) is limited to 1200A due to chassis limitation. 33% increased kVA capacity with fans, except for 1000 kVA transformer using 208V secondary, maximum load/output is limited to 3000A (cross bus limitation).
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 006
LayoutDimensions
i ii 1
HV Left Top or Bottom Entry HV Right Top or Bottom Entry
Fan (optional)
Fan (optional) Vent To LV Distribution Chassis 100.00 (2540.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 80.00 (2032.0) 2/ph Max.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
37.82 (960.6) Primary Switch 36.00 (914.4) 2/ph Max.
Vent To LV Distribution Chassis Power Transformer 48.00 or 60.00 (1219.2) (1524.0)
Power Transformer
One Line/Front Elevation
11 12
Power Transformer LV Distribution Chassis Front
36.64 (930.7)
Power Transformer LV Distribution Chassis Front Foot Print
Primary Switch
Foot Print
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: These UPCs are shipped fully assembled, except 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) top vent or 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) fan and vent assembly, which are shipped separately.
Figure 15.0-1. Single Primary, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 007
15.0-7
LayoutDimensions
HV Left Top or Bottom Entry
HV Right Top or Bottom Entry
i ii
Fan (optional) Vent 2/ph Max. 85.00 (2159.0) 100.00 (2540.0) 90.00 To LV Distribution (2286.0) Close-Coupled Switchboard To LV Distribution Close-Coupled Switchboard
Fan (optional) Vent 2/ph Max.
1 2 3 4 5
80.00 (2032.0)
Power Transformer 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 or 60.00 (1219.2) (1524.0) 36.00 or 45.00 (914.4) (1143.0)
Power Transformer
6 7
= Shipping Split One Line/Front Elevation
8
37.82 (960.6) Primary Switch Power Transformer 36.64 (930.7) LV Switchboard 36.00 (914.4) LV Switchboard Power Transformer Primary Switch
9 10
Front Foot Print
Front Foot Print
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: In addition to shipping splits shown, 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) top vent or 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) fan and vent assembly are also shipped separately.
Figure 15.0-2. Single Primary, Separate LV Distribution Switchboard Close-Coupled to Transformer
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 008
LayoutDimensions
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
37.82 (960.6) 36.00 (914.4)
HV Left Top or Bottom Entry
HV Right Top or Bottom Entry
Fan (optional) Vent To LV Distribution Chassis 2/ph Max. 2/ph Max. 100.00 (2540.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Fan (optional) Vent To LV Distribution Chassis 2/ph Max. 2/ph Max.
Power Transformer 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 or 60.00 (1219.2) (1524.0) = Shipping Split One Line/Front Elevation
Power Transformer
Primary Switch
Primary Switch
36.64 (930.7)
Primary Switch
Primary Switch
Foot Print
Foot Print
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 15.0-3. Duplex Primary, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 009
15.0-9
LayoutDimensions
HV Right Top or Bottom Entry Top or Bottom Entry
i ii
Fan (optional) Vent 2/ph Max. 2/ph Max. 100.00 (2540.0) To LV Distribution 90.00 Close-Coupled (2286.0) Switchboard To LV Distribution Close-Coupled Switchboard
Fan (optional) Vent 2/ph Max. 2/ph Max.
1 2 3 4
85.00 (2159.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Power Transformer 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 or 60.00 (1219.2) (1524.0) 36.00 or 45.00 (914.4) (1143.0) = Shipping Split One Line/Front Elevation
Power Transformer
5 6
7
37.82 (960.6) Primary Switch Primary Switch Power Transformer LV Switchboard 36.64 (930.7) 36.00 (914.4) LV Switchboard Power Transformer Primary Switch Primary Switch
8 9
Front Foot Print
Front Foot Print
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 15.0-4. Duplex Primary, Separate LV Distribution Switchboard Close-Coupled to Transformer
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 010
LayoutDimensions
i ii
Secondary Distribution Panelboard Maximum Panel HeightX Unit
Molded Case Circuit BreakerLayout See Table 15.0-2 for Ampere Ratings
2-Pole ED, EDH, 2-Pole ED, EDH, EDC, EHD, EDC, EHD, FD, FDB, FD, FDB, FDC, HFD 3-Pole 3-Pole ED, EDH, FD, FDB, FD, FDB, FDC, HFD, JD, JDB, JD, JDB, HJD, JDC HJD, JDC 2- or DK, KD, KDB, HKD, KDC 3-Pole 2- or LD, LDB, HLD, LDC, MDL LG 3-Pole HMDL, ND, HND, NDC
2X
1 2 3 4 5 6
Transformer Ventilating Opening Space for Main and Feeder 36X Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3X
4X 6X
Figure 15.0-5. Distribution Panel Layout Mounted in Front of Transformer up to 1200A Panel-Mounted Main and Feeder Devices
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
100% rated main and feeder electronic trip breakers are available rated 4001200A. 90C wire rated at 75C ampacity must be used. May be used as a main device.
Note: For main devices or main bus 1200A and below. Feeder devices mounted in front of transformer. Note: For auxiliary switchboard section layoutadjacent to transformer, refer to Figure 15.0-7 for switchboard section information. Note: Neutral conductor is always gutter mounted.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 011
15.0-11
LayoutDimensions
i
3
ii
Primary Switch Power Transformer
LV Distribution Chassis
Primary Switch
Power Transformer
LV Switchboard
1 2 3
Front 4
Front
Figure 15.0-6. Base Plan ViewHV Left, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
Figure 15.0-7. Base Plan ViewHV Left, LV Switchboard Close-coupled to Transformer on the Right
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Minimum recommended clearance on each side and rear = 2.00 inches (51.0 mm) for non-seismic applications, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for seismic applications. Local jurisdictions may require more. Minimum recommended clearance in the front = 36.00 inches (863.6 mm). Local jurisdictions may require more.
Minimum recommended clearance on each side and rear = 2.00 inches (51.0 mm) for non-seismic applications, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for seismic applications. Local jurisdictions may require more. Minimum recommended clearance in the front = 36.00 inches (863.6 mm). Local jurisdictions may require more.
Note: Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06 inches (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Refer to actual order drawings for power cable conduit entrance locations.
Note: Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06 inches (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Refer to actual order drawings for power cable conduit entrance locations.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 15 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Substation Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 16 001
16.0-1
Contents
Substation Transformers General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2 Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2 Rectangular Core and Coil Process Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-3 Fluid Preservation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4 Transformer Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4 Quality Assurance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4 Optional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4 Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4 Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-4 Standard FeaturesLiquid-Filled Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-7 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-8 Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-12 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16322A Section 26 12 13
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
21
CA08104001E
16.0-2 Substation Transformers

September 2011
Sheet 16 002
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Product Scope
Substation Benets/Advantages

75030,000 kVA Primary voltages: through 69 kV Secondary voltages: through 34.5 kV
Available Fluids
Mineral oil Silicone Environmentally friendly uids

Rectangular core/coil design: Minimal size: space saving Minimal weight: energy saving Insuldur layer insulation system for thermal upgrade and mechanical strength DuraBIL turn insulationsuperior adhesion, abrasion resistance and thermal stability High efciency with the best combination of initial cost and low operating cost Sealedaire preservation system sealed gas blanket over uid in tank

Substation Transformers Feature CoverMounted Primary and Secondary Bushings and Can Be Provided with Load (LTC) Changers
Denition
A substation transformer is typically a standalone unit located at the front end of a campus, industrial site or large commercial project. The substation transformer is used to step down the utility service voltage. Eatons substation transformers use a rectangular core and coil design that is a distinguishing characteristic of Eaton small power liquid-lled transformers. This proven design provides excellent mechanical strength, dependability and spacesaving economy needed for utility, industrial and commercial applications. With most ratings, a choice of uids including mineral oil (typically specied for outdoor applications), silicone (ammability concerns) and environmentally friendly uids (ammability concerns or anywhere that an insulating uid spill could require expensive cleanup procedures).
Core and Coil Assembly
Core and Coil Items

Tap leads Tap changer High voltage leads Low voltage bus Low voltage bushing connection Flexible bus Phase coil
High voltage lead Core ground (removable) Step-lap core Side braces and support tie Bottom support Inner phase barrier insulation
September 2011
Sheet 16 003
16.0-3
General Description
Rectangular Core and Coil Process Design

The rectangular design offers excellent mechanical strength that has been proven through years of service and in special testing. Mechanical strength is achieved through the use of a unique six-piece supporting structure. This supporting structure is assembled in a pressure jig around the core and coils, and arc welded to form a rigid structure. The top and bottom pieces exert a clamping action on the yokes of the core to hold the laminations rmly in place and more importantly, to achieve optimum sound attenuation by using a precalculated pressure. Welding holds this preload for a permanently quiet core. Steel end plates are pressed into position and welded to the top and bottom pieces to form a permanent framing. The thickness of the end plate is calculated for each design. The end plates calculated thickness provides the beam strength required to minimize the tendency of the wide, at part of the outside coils to round out during fault conditions.
space. The short yoke between the core legs reduces the external path of the ux between active core leg material, resulting in an increase in efciency. The rectangular shape of the core allows for more uniform and rigid support that prevents the shift of laminations and improves sound level characteristics.
Traditional crepe paper or Nomex tape is used in some design considerations. However, DuraBIL, which is a tough, exible and inert turn insulation, is used in most designs. It reduces the most prevalent cause of transformer failure: deterioration of turn insulation. DuraBIL is a single layer of epoxy powder deposited electrostatically and baked on the wire conductor. The process is closely controlled and monitored to ensure a continuous, uniform coating. The result is a compact turn insulation with superior characteristics, including adhesion, exibility, abrasion resistance, and thermal and chemical stability. DuraBIL will not degrade and contaminate the transformer uid with moisture. Beyond the chemical attributes, DuraBIL maintains dimensional stability and the coils structural integrity.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Coil
The Core Efciently Fills the Similar Shape Opening in the Coil to Minimize Unused Space
Insuldur Insulation
Insuldur insulation thermally upgraded craft paper is typically used for layer and high to low insulation. The Insuldur system of chemical stabilizers thermally upgrades cellulose insulating materials to permit a 12% higher load capacity. Insuldur can be used with all uids offered with Eaton small power transformers. Chemical stabilizers retard insulation breakdown under elevated temperature conditions. Additionally, dimensional changes in the insulating materials are minimized to ensure a tighter structure. The result is greater strength and coil integrity throughout the life of the transformer. The Insuldur system allows a unit rated at 55C rise to be operated at a 10C higher temperature, with a 12% increase in kVA capacity. Generous oil ducts extend the height of the coil to provide cooling in the winding. The staggered, diamond epoxy bonds help to ensure free oil ow through the winding.
Core
Eaton coils feature aluminum or copper conductors in both high and low voltage windings. The low voltage winding is accomplished on a constant tension machine and consists of a fullwidth or part-coil sheet conductor extending the full height of the coil. The advantage of the low voltage sheet is a continuous cross-section of conductor that allows the electrical centers of high and low voltage windings to easily align themselves, virtually eliminating the vertical component of short-circuit force. The high voltage windings use wire conductors and are wound directly over the low voltage winding on a constant tension traversing machine. The high voltage conductors are typically insulated with the DuraBIL turn insulation.
Step-Lap Mitered Core Joints are Used for Efciency and Noise Reduction
The rectangular core is a series of laminations made from high-quality, grain-oriented silicon steel. The stacked core provides a superior ux path by using a step-lap mitered core joint. The effective way in which the core is supported, as well as the efcient step-lap joint, have resulted in:
Turn Insulation
Tank Construction
The transformer tank is designed to withstand a pressure 25% greater than the maximum operating pressure. The carbon-steel plate used to form the tank is reinforced with external side wall braces, and tank seams are continuously welded. Each cooler assembly is individually welded and receives a pressurized check for leaks prior to assembly on the tank. After the coolers are attached to the tank, the completed tank assembly is leak-tested before shipment.
Decreases in exciting current up to 40% Reductions in sound levels up to 3 dB Reductions in no load loss up to 10%
DuraBIL Turn Insulation
The rectangular-shaped core efciently lls the correspondingly shaped opening in the coil with a minimum of unused
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 004
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Mical Low Frequency Heating Insulation Drying Process

The insulation is dried in its own tank and is never exposed to the atmosphere once it dries The windings are heated uniformly, so the insulation deep in the coils reaches a temperature that promotes moisture removal during the vacuum cycle The moisture level of the air in the vacuum exhaust is monitored constantly to ensure that the insulation is dry when the process is completed
Silicone
Silicone is a less ammable dielectric coolant for transformer applications and features heat stability, material compatibility, low ammability and low toxicity. Silicones high re point of 340C qualies it as a less ammable uid, which is UL listed and factory mutual approved for indoor and outdoor use. Its a good choice in areas where potential re hazards exist and special re-suppressant systems are installed.
Optional Tests
The following additional tests can be made on any substation transformer. All tests are made in accordance with the latest revision of IEEE Standard Test Code C57.12.90. 1. IEEE Impulse Test. 2. Quality Control Impulse Test. 3. IEEE Front-of-Wave Impulse Test. 4. Temperature Test. 5. Sound Test. 6. Octave Band Sound Test. 7. Insulation Resistance (Meggar) Test. 8. Corona (Partial Discharge) or Radio Inuence Voltage (RIV) Tests. 9. Short-Circuit Test. 10. Short-Circuit Capability Calculations in lieu of Short-Circuit Test. 11. Insulation Power Factor Test. 12. Zero-Phase Sequence Impedance Test. 13. Seismic Test. 14. Quality Assurance Documentation. 15. Witness or Inspection.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is a new, fully biodegradable, environmentally friendly dielectric uid. In a 21-day period, BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 has been tested to be 97% biodegradable. BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is Factory Mutual approved and UL listed. BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is suitable for application indoors and in areas of heightened environmental sensitivity where any insulating uid spill could require expensive clean-up procedures.
Fluid Preservation Systems

Sealedaire Standard on Units >2500 kVA or 250 kV BIL
The Sealedaire preservation system uses a sealed gas space above the uid that prevents breathing under normal conditions. An automatic pressurevacuum relief valve assembly is factory-set to keep internal pressure within the limits of 6.5 pounds per square inch pressure or vacuum.
Intertaire Optional
The Intertaire Fluid Preservation System prevents oxygen and moisture from being drawn into the transformer tank when vacuum conditions exist. This system consists of a nitrogen cylinder and necessary controls to maintain positive nitrogen pressure in the gas space.
Quality Assurance Testing

The following tests are made on all transformers unless noted as an exception. The numbers shown do not necessarily indicate the sequence in which the tests will be made. All tests will be made in accordance with the latest revision of IEEE C57.12.90 Test Code for Transformers. 1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated tap and on the tap extremes on one unit of a given rating on a multiple unit order. 2. Ratio Tests on the rated voltage connection and all tap connections. 3. Polarity and Phase-relation Tests. 4. No-load loss at rated voltage. 5. Excitation current at rated voltage. 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection of each unit and on the tap extremes on one unit of a given rating on a multiple unit order. 7. Applied Potential Tests. 8. Induced Potential Test. 9. Mechanical Leak Test.
Standards Compliance

Conservator Optional
The Conservator, or Expansion-Tank System, seals the uid from the atmosphere in the main tank by using an auxiliary tank partially lled with transformer uid and connected to the main tank by piping. The system allows the transformer tank to remain full, despite expansion or contraction of the uid due to temperature changes.
IEEE C57.12.00 IEEE C57.12.90 ISO 9001 CSA-C88 Substation transformers have successfully passed IEEE shortcircuit tests Substation transformers are manufactured in an ISO 9001 certied factory
Seismic Qualication
Transformer Fluids
Mineral Oil
Mineral oil is primarily used in outdoor applications. Eaton offers transformers designed with less ammable uidssilicone, Envirotemp FR3 and BIOTEMPthat can be used to meet the National Electrical Code 450.23 for indoor applications.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 16 005
16.0-5
General Description
General Description
Self-cooled power rating (kVA): 75020,000 Primary voltage (kV): Up through 69 Secondary voltage (kV): Up to 34.5 Available uids: Oil, silicone, BIOTEMP and Envirotemp FR3 Load tap changers: 2500 kVA and larger
Standard Electromechanical Features

Aluminum windings Tap changer for de-energized operation with the handle brought out through the tank wall Rubber-jacketed multi-conductor control wiring

Standard Electrical Features

Optional Electromechanical Features

Two windings, without reconnectable windings Four high voltage winding fullcapacity taps with a total tap range of 10% Standard impedance as shown in chart Frequency of 60 Hz Sound levels as shown in chart Standard BIL levels as shown in chart Excitation limits dened by IEEE C57.12.00-1980: Unit will deliver rated kVA at 5% above rated secondary voltage without exceeding the limiting temperature rise provided the load power factor is 80% or higher and the frequency is at least 95% of rated value Unit can be energized at 10% above rated secondary voltage at no-load without exceeding the limiting temperature rise 65C average temperature rise
Copper windings Tap changer mechanical key interlock Provisions only for tap changer mechanical key interlock Flexible conduit for control wiring Rigid conduit for control wiring Special control wiring size or insulation Core ground lead brought to test point located inside tank adjacent to bolted handhole Electrostatic shields Internally-mounted bushing current transformer
Pressure-relief device (no alarm contacts): Silicone lled Oil lled Pressure-relief device with alarm contacts Rapid pressure rise relay Dial hot-spot indicator Shock indicator for shipment Audible alarm RTD coil for use with remote temperature indicator
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Optional Gauges and Fittings

Standard Tank Features

Optional Electrical Features

Series multiple windings Delta-wye connectionchanging the internal connections on the HV or LV windings (three-phase only) Nonstandard HV taps and tap range Nonstandard phase relationship Low-loss, high-efciency designs Frequency other than 60 Hz Special impedances Design to withstand IEEE front-ofwave impulse test Special sound level Special BIL level Over excitation 55C/65C average temperature rise Special ambient temperatures Operation at altitudes above 3300 ft (1000m) Motor-starting duty or dedicated motor loads
Corrosion-resistant steel hardware Lifting hooks for complete unit Lifting loops for tank cover Welded main tank cover Welded handhole on cover, or bolted handhole when access to tank interior is required Tank grounding provisions Transformer base that permits rolling in directions parallel to the base center line Provisions for jacking
Magnetic liquid-level gauge with alarm contacts Dial-type thermometer with alarm contacts Pressure-vacuum gauge (no alarm contactsprimary units +/<2500 only) Pressure-vacuum gauge with alarm contacts Pressure-relief device (no alarm contacts): Silicone lled (excluding primary units >2500) Oil lled (excluding primary units >2500) Pressure-relief device with alarm contacts Rapid pressure rise relay Dial hot-spot indicator Remote winding temperature indicator Shock indicator for shipment Audible alarm Top lter-press connection-valve
Optional Cooling System

Tank design pressure: 15 psig Fluid preservation system: Sealedaire on units 2500 kVA Intertaire Conservator Coolers: Removable coolers Panel coolers Provisions only for future fans (FFA) excluding secondary units >500 kVA Complete forced air cooling systems (FA): 15% added capacity units rated 2500 kVA 25% added capacity units rated >2500 kVA

Optional Tank Features

Special hardware Bolted handhole Bolted manhole Ground connector and pad Skid mounting

Standard Gauges and Fittings

Magnetic liquid-level gauge with alarm contacts Dial-type thermometer with alarm contacts Pressure-vacuum gauge: Units rated 200 kV BIL and below Units rated 2500 kVA and below Pressure-vacuum gauge with alarm contacts
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 006
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Standard Tank Finish

Special paint color Paint system process: Standard system: 5 mils total thickness System I: zinc chromate epoxy primer and intermediate coat, oven cure, air spray aliaphatic polyurethane, ambient cure, 57 mils System II: zinc-rich primer, epoxy coat, oven cure and air dry, 7 mils minimum (only available with panel coolers)
Standard High and Low Voltage Components
Special Options
Bushings: cover-mounted porcelain with copper conductor

Optional High and Low Voltage Components
Optional Tank Finish

Special paint color Paint system process: Standard system: 5 mils total thickness System I: zinc chromate epoxy primer and intermediate coat, oven cure, air spray aliaphatic polyurethane, ambient cure, 57 mils System II: zinc-rich primer, epoxy coat, oven cure and air dry, 7 mils minimum (only available with panel coolers) Tank undercoating
Bushings: Special cover-mounted porcelain bushings Extra creep bushings Transformer-breakerinterchangeable (TBI) bushings Bushing terminal connectors Cover-mounted bus duct throat HV and LV surge arresters External fuses (HV only)
Operation in hazardous locations (qualication of externally attached equipment such as wiring, conduit, fans, cabinets, alarm contacts and relays) Receptacle or light in control cabinet Space heater with thermostat in control cabinet Reusable gaskets on bushings, handhole and devices Special dimensions
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 16 007
16.0-7
General Description
Standard Features Liquid-Filled Transformer

Coverwelded to tank Cooling tubes (radiators)
Note: Radiator position and number of radiators will vary based upon design.
ii

X0 X3
1 2
D
Bolted handhole on cover Automatic resealing mechanical pressure relief device HV bushing, three total, located in ANSI Segment 2 LV bushing, four total (wye connected), located in ANSI Segment 4
Note: HV and LV bushings may be cover mounted or left/right orientation may be reversed.
H3
H2
X2 X1
3 4 5 6
H1
Lifting loopstwo for lifting cover only Lifting hooksfour for lifting complete unit Jacking provisions on tank or base Ground padtwo total Drain valvefor combination lower lter press connection and complete drain with sampler Base (may be at or formed) Control cabinet for alarm lead termination Diagram instruction nameplate with warning nameplate De-energized tap changer with padlock provisions Liquid temperature indicator with maximum indicating hand Upper valve for upper lter press connection Magnetic liquid level gauge Vacuum pressure gauge with air test and Sealedaire valve
Top View
8 9 10 11 12
13
14 15

16 17
W (Flange to Flange)
18 19 20 21
Front View
Figure 16.0-1. Liquid-Filled Primary Unit Substation Transformer with Wall-Mounted High Voltage and Low Voltage Bushings
Note: See Pages 16.0-12 through 16.0-14 for dimensions and weights.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 008
Technical Data
Table 16.0-1. Standard Sound Levels
Self-Cooled (OA) Equivalent Two-Winding (kVA) 60017500 750110,000 10,00112,000 12,00115,000 15,00120,000 NEMA Average DB-OA 67 68 69 70 71 NEMA Average DB-FA 69 70 71 72 73
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
ANSI Segment Identication for HV and LV Bushings

The plan view, below, shows the ANSI segments used to identify the location of both the HV and LV bushings.
Segment 3
Table 16.0-2. Standard Basic Impulse Levels

kV Class 1.2 2.5 5.0 8.7 15.0 25.0 (Ground Y only) 25.0 34.5 (Ground Y only) 34.5 46.0 69.0 Introduced Test 180 Hz7200 Cycles Twice Normal Voltage kV BIL 45 60 75 95 110 125 150 150 200 350 250 Applied Test 60 Hz-kV 10 15 19 26 34 40 50 50 70 95 140
Segment 2 Segment 1 (Front)
Segment 4
Figure 16.0-2. Front (Nameplate, Gauges, etc.) HV: Segment 2 is standard for wall-mounted bushings (optional Segment 4). Segment 3 is standard for cover-mounted bushings. LV: Segment 4 wall-mounted is standard (optional Segment 2).
Table 16.0-3. Standard Impedances (Percent)

HV kV BIL Class 45150 200 250 350

Low Voltage Below 2400V 5.75 7.25 7.75
Low Voltage 2400V and Above 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00
6.75% is also available as an option. 5.50% is also available as an option.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 16 009
16.0-9
Technical Data
kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 60 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4270 5410 7460 9210 10,670 10,210 13,360 16,820 23,270 29,110

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Total Losses at 200 kV HV BIL 100% Load and Total Losses 85C (Watts) at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 12,594 15,921 21,782 26,586 30,330 29,872 36,786 46,116 63,256 78,371 4580 5790 7980 9860 11,420 10,930 14,300 18,010 24,920 31,170
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1777 2254 3161 4004 4784 4310 6359 8070 11,343 14,419
9984 12,613 17,178 20,820 23,538 23,584 27,990 34,991 47,722 58,758
11,761 14,867 20,339 24,824 28,322 27,894 34,349 43,061 59,065 73,177
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1902 2413 3385 4288 5122 4615 6810 8642 12,147 15,442
10,692 13,508 18,397 22,298 25,208 25,257 29,976 37,474 51,109 62,929


750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1795 2277 3193 4045 4833 5364 6424 8152 11,458 14,565
10,085 12,741 17,352 21,031 23,776 23,823 28,273 35,345 48,205 59,352
11,880 15,018 20,545 25,076 28,609 29,187 34,697 43,497 59,663 73,917
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1928 2445 3429 4344 5190 4676 6899 8755 12,307 15,644
10,832 13,685 18,638 22,589 25,538 25,584 30,369 37,965 51,778 63,752
12,760 16,130 22,067 26,933 30,728 30,260 37,268 46,720 64,085 79,396


kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4680 5930 8170 10,090 11,690 12,280 14,640 18,430 25,510 31,900
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1812 2299 3224 4084 4879 4396 6486 8231 11,569 14,707
10,183 12,865 17,521 21,236 24,008 24,055 28,549 35,690 48,676 59,933
11,995 15,164 20,745 25,320 28,887 28,451 35,035 43,921 60,245 74,640
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1947 2470 3464 4388 5243 5819 6970 8844 12,431 15,803
10,942 13,823 18,826 22,818 25,796 25,847 30,676 38,349 52,302 64,396
12,889 16,293 22,290 27,206 31,039 31,666 37,646 47,193 64,733 80,199
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Losses based on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating of 25 kV.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 010
Technical Data
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 16.0-13. Environmentally Friendly Fluid 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 4170 5240 7120 8640 9810 10,740 12,590 15,590 21,260 26,500
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1966 2494 3498 4431 5293 4769 7037 8930 12,552 15,957
11,048 13,958 19,010 23,041 26,048 26,099 30,875 38,735 52,813 65,027
13,014 16,452 22,508 27,472 31,341 30,868 37,912 47,665 65,365 80,984
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1774 2258 3188 4069 4900 5299 6350 8085 11,495 14,824
9587 11,942 15,734 18,298 19,638 21,758 24,962 30,018 39,066 46,694
11,361 14,200 18,922 22,367 24,538 27,057 31,312 38,103 50,561 61,518


750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
2063 2618 3672 4652 5557 5007 7388 9376 13,179 16,754
11,600 14,656 19,960 24,193 27,350 27,403 32,523 40,659 55,453 68,277
13,663 17,274 23,632 28,845 32,907 32,410 39,911 50,035 68,632 85,031
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1791 2279 3219 4108 4948 5350 6411 8164 11,607 14,968
9680 12,058 15,887 18,477 19,829 21,970 25,206 30,311 39,448 47,150
11,471 14,337 19,106 22,585 24,777 27,320 31,617 38,475 51,055 62,118


750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1756 2235 3156 4028 4851 5246 6286 8004 11,380 14,675
9491 11,822 15,576 18,115 19,441 21,540 24,712 29,717 38,675 46,227
11,247 14,057 18,732 22,143 24,292 26,786 30,998 37,721 50,055 60,902
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1880 2392 3379 4313 5195 5617 6731 8572 12,187 15,716
10,164 12,660 16,681 19,400 20,820 23,068 26,466 31,826 41,420 49,507
12,044 15,052 20,060 23,713 26,015 28,685 33,197 40,398 53,607 65,223
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 16 011
16.0-11
Technical Data

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1905 2424 3424 4370 5263 5691 6820 8684 12,347 15,922
10,297 12,826 16,899 19,654 21,093 23,370 26,812 32,242 41,962 50,156
12,202 15,250 20,323 24,024 26,356 29,061 33,632 40,926 54,309 66,078
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1943 2472 3492 4457 5368 5804 6955 8857 12,593 16,240
10,502 13,082 17,237 20,047 21,514 23,837 27,348 32,887 42,801 51,157
12,445 15,554 20,729 24,504 26,882 29,641 34,303 41,744 55,394 67,397


750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 7500 10,000
1924 2449 3458 4414 5316 5749 6889 8772 12,472 16,084
10,401 12,957 17,071 19,853 21,307 23,607 27,083 32,569 42,386 50,662
12,325 15,406 20,529 24,267 26,623 29,356 33,972 41,341 54,858 66,746
750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
2039 2595 3666 4679 5636 6094
11,027 13,736 18,098 21,049 22,589 25,028 28,715 34,531 44,940 53,715
13,066 16,331 21,764 25,728 28,225 31,122 36,018 43,831 58,162 70,766
3750 7303 5000 9300 7500 13,222 10,000 17,051
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 012
Layout Dimensions
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal chambers, see Notes at bottom of page for dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions. Table 16.0-20. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled HV 6900D, 75 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 4520 (2050) 4750 (2155) 5590 (2536) 7380 (3348) 8890 (4032) 10,060 (4563) 11,110 (5039) 13,200 (5987) 18,020 (8174) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 120 (454) 150 (568) 170 (644) 210 (795) 240 (908) 260 (984) 290 (1098) 340 (1287) 620 (2347) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth 56 (1422) 56 (1422) 59 (1499) 67 (1702) 70 (1778) 70 (1778) 70 (1778) 73 (1854) 74 (1880)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 5650 (2563) 6400 (2903) 8020 (3638) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 220 (833) 220 (833) 250 (946) 280 (1060) 300 (1136) 330 (1249) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 95 (2413) Width Depth
92 (2337) 56 (1422) 92 (2337) 56 (1422) 92 (2337) 59 (1499) 92 (2337) 67 (1702) 92 (2337) 70 (1778) 92 (2337) 70 (1778) 95 (2413) 70 (1778) 95 (2413) 73 (1854) 113 (2870) 74 (1880)
59 (1499) 81 (2057) 61 (1549) 87 (2210) 64 (1626) 101 (2565) 68 (1727) 101 (2565) 70 (1778) 107 (2718) 73 (1854) 127 (3226) 128 (3251) 129 (3277) 140 (3556) 145 (3683)
2000 9500 (4309) 2500 10,550 (4785) 3000 12,000 (5443) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 14,350 (6509) 19,110 (8668) 30,880 (14,007) 39,080 (17,726)
450 (1703) 95 (2413) 73 (1854) 700 (2650) 117 (2972) 74 (1880) 1210 (4580) 117 (2972) 102 (2591) 1600 (6057) 124 (3150) 106 (2692)

kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 4840 (2195) 5720 (2595) 7370 (3343) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 160 (606) 180 (681) 210 (795) 230 (871) 260 (984) 350 (1325) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 95 (2413) Width 56 (1422) 59 (1499) 65 (1651) Depth 79 (2007) 78 (1981) 92 (2337)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 5660 (2567) 6640 (3012) 8000 (3629) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 210 (795) 230 (871) 250 (946) 290 (1098) 310 (1173) 340 (1287) 430 (1628) 720 (2725) 1120 (4240) 1500 (5679) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 95 (2413) Width Depth
2000 8760 (3973) 2500 9940 (4509) 3000 11,650 (5284) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 13,330 (6046) 16,640 (7548) 30,300 (13,744) 34,830 (15,799)
68 (1727) 114 (2896) 68 (1727) 125 (3175) 70 (1778) 127 (3226) 127 (3226) 131 (3327) 138 (3505) 139 (3531)
58 (1473) 83 (2108) 62 (1575) 87 (2210) 64 (1626) 107 (2718) 66 (1676) 107 (2718) 71 (1803) 107 (2718) 73 (1854) 130 (3302) 130 (3302) 132 (3353) 143 (3632) 146 (3708)
390 (1476) 95 (2413) 72 (1829) 480 (1817) 95 (2413) 75 (1905) 1220 (4618) 114 (2896) 113 (2870) 1230 (4656) 114 (2896) 118 (2997)
2000 9350 (4241) 2500 10,860 (4926) 3000 12,400 (5625) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 14,500 (6577) 19,510 (8850) 30,270 (13,730) 38,140 (17,300)
95 (2413) 74 (1880) 118 (2997) 74 (1880) 118 (2997) 101 (2565) 124 (3150) 105 (2667)

kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 6630 (3007) 7510 (3406) 9040 (4100) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 250 (946) 280 (1060) 290 (1098) 290 (1098) 330 (1249) 350 (1325) 440 (1666) 650 (2461) 1180 (4467) 1450 (5489) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 95 (2413) Width 65 (1651) 66 (1676) 69 (1753) Depth 64 (1626) 78 (1981) 88 (2235)
57 (1448) 79 (2007) 62 (1575) 81 (2057) 63 (1600) 100 (2540) 65 (1651) 108 (2743) 70 (1778) 114 (2896) 73 (1854) 127 (3226) 129 (3277) 131 (3327) 140 (3556) 143 (3632)
2000 8700 (3946) 2500 10,290 (4667) 3000 11,860 (5380) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 13,410 (6083) 17,030 (7725) 29,720 (13,481) 35,790 (16,234)
360 (1363) 95 (2413) 73 (1854) 520 (1968) 99 (2515) 75 (1905) 1140 (4315) 109 (2769) 113 (2870) 1310 (4959) 116 (2946) 117 (2972)
2000 10,110 (4586) 2500 11,670 (5293) 3000 12,760 (5788) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 15,280 (6931) 19,370 (8786) 30,850 (13,993) 38,320 (17,382)
70 (1778) 96 (2438) 73 (1854) 106 (2692) 74 (1880) 130 (3302) 133 (3378) 136 (3454) 139 (3531) 143 (3632)
95 (2413) 75 (1905) 107 (2718) 76 (1930) 114 (2896) 100 (2540) 122 (3099) 104 (2642)
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. Refer to the transformers outline drawing for actual dimensions for construction. 2. For 55C units, add 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) to W dimension and 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) to D dimension. 3. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) to W dimension for each bus duct throat. 4. Add 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) to W dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber. 5. Add 25.00 inches (635.0 mm) to W dimension for each 27 kV air terminal chamber. 6. Add 35.00 inches (889.0 mm) to W dimension for each 34.5 kV air terminal chamber.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 16 013
16.0-13
Layout Dimensions
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal chambers, see Notes at bottom of page for dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions. Table 16.0-26. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled HV 34400D, 200 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 7000 (3175) 7720 (3502) 9880 (4481) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 330 (1249) 350 (1325) 380 (1438) 410 (1552) 450 (1703) 460 (1741) 520 (1968) 660 (2498) 1070 (4050) 1480 (5602) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 115 (2921) 115 (2921) 115 (2921) 115 (2921) 115 (2921) 115 (2921) Width 67 (1702) 67 (1702) 69 (1753) 71 (1803) 71 (1803) 72 (1829) Depth 66 (1676) 79 (2007) 98 (2489) 112 (2845) 122 (3099) 130 (3302) 136 (3454) 138 (3505) 138 (3505) 140 (3556)
i
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3750 5000 4930 (2236) 5940 (2694) 7690 (3488) 9270 (4205) 10,630 (4822) 12,280 (5570) 14,540 (6595) 18,620 (8446) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 160 (606) 180 (681) 220 (833) 250 (946) 280 (1060) 340 (1287) 380 (1438) 580 (2196) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 98 (2489) Width 48 (1219) 52 (1321) 59 (1499) 62 (1575) 62 (1575) 63 (1600) 67 (1702) 68 (1727) Depth 76 (1930) 92 (2337) 95 (2413) 107 (2718) 112 (2845) 121 (3073) 122 (3099) 123 (3124)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Width Depth
2000 11,300 (5126) 2500 12,880 (5842) 3000 13,760 (6241) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 16,030 (7271) 19,780 (8972) 30,270 (13,730) 39,290 (17,822)
115 (2921) 85 (2159) 117 (2972) 100 (2540) 129 (3277) 124 (3150) 136 (3454) 127 (3226)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 7230 (3279) 8040 (3647) 9920 (4500) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 340 (1287) 360 (1363) 390 (1476) 430 (1628) 460 (1741) 500 (1893) 540 (2044) 740 (2801) 1190 (4505) 1190 (4505) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth 67 (1702) 80 (2032) 94 (2388) 116 (2946) 124 (3150) 128 (3251) 136 (3454) 139 (3531) 140 (3556) 145 (3683)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 5010 (2272) 6090 (2762) 7730 (3506) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 160 (606) 180 (681) 220 (833) 250 (946) 270 (1022) 310 (1173) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210)
7 8 9 10 11 12
115 (2921) 68 (1727) 115 (2921) 68 (1727) 115 (2921) 69 (1753) 115 (2921) 71 (1803) 115 (2921) 73 (1854) 115 (2921) 76 (1930) 115 (2921) 124 (3150) 133 (3378) 132 (3353) 77 (1956) 95 (2413) 122 (3099) 125 (3175)
48 (1219) 79 (2007) 53 (1346) 82 (2083) 55 (1397) 116 (2946) 59 (1499) 118 (2997) 61 (1549) 119 (3023) 65 (1651) 119 (3023) 121 (3073) 122 (3099) 131 (3327) 131 (3327)
2000 11,700 (5307) 2500 13,120 (5951) 3000 14,400 (6532) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 16,210 (7353) 20,490 (9294) 31,470 (14,275) 36,390 (16,506)
2000 9270 (4205) 2500 10,510 (4767) 3000 12,100 (5488) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 14,380 (6523) 18,490 (8387) 32,180 (14,597) 46,580 (21,128)
390 (1476) 87 (2210) 65 (1651) 560 (2120) 97 (2464) 68 (1727) 1020 (3861) 98 (2489) 112 (2845) 1760 (6662) 119 (3023) 120 (3048)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 9110 (4132) 1000 9370 (4250) 1500 10,760 (4881) 2000 12,210 (5538) 2500 13,600 (6169) 3000 14,990 (6799) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 16,590 (7525) 20,480 (9290) 32,220 (14,615) 38,460 (17,445) Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) Depth 63 (1600) 70 (1778) 93 (2362)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 5340 (2422) 6120 (2776) 7660 (3475) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 180 (681) 190 (719) 220 (833) 250 (946) 290 (1098 310 (1173) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) Width Depth
410 (1552) 115 (2921) 390 (1476) 115 (2921) 410 (1552) 115 (2921) 450 (1703) 115 (2921) 470 (1779) 115 (2921) 510 (1931) 115 (2921) 540 (2044) 710 (2688) 1050 (3975) 1350 (5110)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
72 (1829) 108 (2743) 74 (1880) 109 (2769) 77 (1956) 125 (3175) 137 (3480) 138 (3505) 139 (3531) 148 (3759)
49 (1245) 79 (2007) 51 (1295) 82 (2083) 56 (1422) 116 (2946) 59 (1499) 118 (2997) 64 (1626) 119 (3023) 66 (1676) 115 (2921) 121 (3073) 122 (3099) 131 (3327) 131 (3327)
115 (2921) 77 (1956) 122 (3099) 94 (2388) 125 (3175) 123 (3124) 135 (3429) 124 (3150)
2000 9080 (4119) 2500 11,180 (5071) 3000 12,470 (5656) 3750 5000 7500 10,000
14,590 (6618) 360 (1363) 18,330 (8314) 540 (2044) 31,330 (14,211) 970 (3672) 39,050 (17,713) 1230 (4656)
87 (2210) 68 (1727) 93 (2362) 68 (1727) 98 (2489) 111 (2819) 101 (2565) 114 (2896)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 16 014
Layout Dimensions
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal chambers, see Notes at bottom of page for dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions. Table 16.0-32. 65C Rise, Silicone/Environmentally Friendly Fluid HV 22900D, 150 BIL LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 230 (871) 240 (908) 280 (1060) 310 (1173) 338 (1279) 380 (1438) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) 87 (2210) Width 52 (1321) 54 (1372) 57 (1448) Depth 73 (1854) 91 (2311) 95 (2413)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 7600 (3447) 1000 8460 (3837) 1500 10,740 (4872) 2000 12,260 (5561) 2500 13,760 (6241) 3000 15,020 (6813) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 16,950 (7688) 20,270 (9194) 33,980 (15,413) 42,340 (19,205) Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth
750 1000 1500
5970 (2708) 6820 (3093) 8710 (3951)
370 (1401) 107 (2718) 390 (1476) 107 (2718) 420 (1590) 107 (2718) 460 (1741) 107 (2718) 490 (1855) 107 (2718) 520 (1968) 107 (2718) 570 (2158) 650 (2461) 1200 (4542) 1440 (5451)
60 (1524) 68 (1727) 60 (1524) 84 (2134) 62 (1575) 107 (2718) 64 (1626) 115 (2921) 64 (1626) 121 (3073) 66 (1676) 121 (3073) 129 (3277) 132 (3353) 136 (3454) 136 (3454)
2000 10,140 (4599) 2500 11,890 (5393) 3000 13,480 (6114) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 15,820 (7176) 19,250 (8732) 32,700 (14,832) 50,160 (22,752)
58 (1473) 110 (2794) 62 (1575) 121 (3073) 66 (1676) 124 (3150) 125 (3175) 129 (3277) 133 (3378) 133 (3378)
440 (1666) 87 (2210) 68 (1727) 540 (2044) 87 (2210) 70 (1778) 1090 (4126) 100 (2540) 99 (2515) 2200 (8328) 120 (3048) 118 (2997)
107 (2718) 78 (1981) 109 (2769) 92 (2337) 120 (3048) 117 (2972) 129 (3277) 150 (3810)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 7930 3597) 1000 8840 (4010) 1500 10,710 (4858) 2000 12,530 (5684) 2500 13,920 (6314) 3000 15,620 (7085) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 17,580 (7974) 20,980 (9516) 32,460 (14,724) 40,320 (18,289) Gallons (Liters) Liquid Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width 61 (1549) 61 (1549) 62 (1575) Depth 68 (1727) 81 (2057) 95 (2413)
52 (1321) 75 (1905) 55 (1397) 91 (2311) 56 (1422) 102 (2591) 58 (1473) 107 (2718) 63 (1600) 114 (2896) 66 (1676) 116 (2946) 126 (3200) 129 (3277) 134 (3404) 137 (3480)
380 (1438) 107 (2718) 400 (1514) 107 (2718) 440 (1666) 107 (2718) 470 (1779) 107 (2718) 500 (1893) 107 (2718) 560 (2120) 107 (2718) 610 (2309) 680 (2574) 1080 (4088) 1360 (5148)
2000 10,050 (4559) 2500 12,170 (5520) 3000 13,600 (6169) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 15,300 (6940) 19,350 (8777) 32,590 (14,783) 40,250 (18,257)
64 (1626) 117 (2972) 66 (1676) 117 (2972) 69 (1753) 127 (3226) 127 (3226) 132 (3353) 135 (3429) 135 (3429)
420 (1590) 87 (2210) 68 (1727) 580 (2196) 89 (2261) 70 (1778) 1040 (3937) 94 (2388) 98 (2489) 1370 (5186) 109 (2769) 102 (2591)
107 (2718) 71 (1803) 108 (2743) 84 (2134) 119 (3023) 116 (2946) 129 (3277) 119 (3023)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 1000 1500 6930 (3143) 7920 (3592) 9370 (4250) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 360 (1363) 300 (1136) 310 (1173) 330 (1249) 370 (1401) 390 (1476) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height Width Depth 66 (1676) 72 (1829) 90 (2286) 104 (2642) 110 (2794) 111 (2819) 122 (3099) 130 (3302) 139 (3531) 139 (3531)
kVA Weight Rating Lbs (kg) 750 9270 (4205) 1000 9900 (4491) 1500 11,620 (5271) 2000 13,160 (5969) 2500 14,580 (6613) 3000 16,090 (7298) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 17,930 (8133) 21,410 (9711) 32,060 (14,542) 41,850 (18,983) Gallons (Liters) Liquid 400 (1514) 420 (1590) 460 (1741) 500 (1893) 530 (2006) 560 (2120) 600 (2271) 680 (2574) 1010 (3823) 1330 (5035) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Height 107 (2718) 107 (2718) 107 (2718) 107 (2718) 107 (2718) 107 (2718) Width 65 (1651) 65 (1651) 65 (1651) Depth 55 (1397) 67 (1702) 96 (2438)
87 (2210) 56 (1422) 87 (2210) 58 (1473) 87 (2210) 59 (1499) 87 (2210) 62 (1575) 87 (2210) 66 (1676) 87 (2210) 69 (1753) 69 (1753) 71 (1803) 97 (2464) 99 (2515)
2000 11,240 (5098) 2500 12,760 (5788) 3000 14,260 (6468) 3750 5000 7500 10,000 15,910 (7217) 19,830 (8995) 33,990 (15,418) 39,610 (17,967)
65 (1651) 117 (2972) 67 (1702) 117 (2972) 69 (1753) 123 (3124) 130 (3302) 131 (3327) 132 (3353) 116 (2946)
420 (1590) 87 (2210) 530 (2006) 89 (2261) 1100 (4164) 94 (2388) 1280 (4845) 109 (2769)
108 (2743) 77 (1956) 110 (2794) 77 (1956) 114 (2896) 116 (2946) 122 (3099) 148 (3759)
CA08104001E
Pad-Mounted Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 17 001
17.0-1
Contents
Pad-Mounted Transformers General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Industry Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Design Impedances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Application Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-2 Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-3 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-3 Transformer Cooling Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-4 NEC Requirement Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-5 Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-5 Primary Protection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-6 Primary Switching Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-8 Loadbreak Wells and Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-9 Primary Fuse Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-10 Layout Data 752500 kVA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-11 Technical Data 752500 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-12 Layout Dimensions 30005000 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-13 Technical Data 30005000 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-14 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16321 Section 26 12 19
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Typical Pad-Mounted Transformer
21
CA08104001E
17.0-2 Pad-Mounted Transformers

September 2011
Sheet 17 002
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformers
Industry Standards
Pad-mounted transformers meet industry standards: IEEE C57.12.00, IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.29, IEEE C57.12.70, IEEE C57.12.80, IEEE C57.12.90, IEEE C57.91 and NEMA.
Application Limitations
The transformers described herein are designed for the application conditions normally encountered on electric power distribution systems. As such, they are suitable for use under the usual service conditions described in IEEE Standard C57.12.00 general requirements for liquid-immersed distribution, power and regulating transformers. Consult Eaton for unusual service conditions such as:
Ratings

Typical Pad-Mounted Transformer
Introduction
Eatons three-phase pad-mounted transformer is offered in a variety of designs and congurations. The following pages describe the standard designs and the common options that are available. Some special designs and options may require additional engineering, factory coordination, unusual application requirements or special manufacturing needs. Higher impedances limit secondary fault currents such that coordination with secondary low voltage moldedcase circuit breakers is usually possible. (Low impedances are also available if required for paralleling, and so on.) Standard color is pad-mounted green [Munsell Green (#7GY3.29/1.5)]. ANSI #24, 61 and 70 are available as options.
755000 kVA High voltages (primary): 4160 Grd. Y/2400 2400 through through 34,500 Grd. Y/19,920 34,500 HV Taps: 22-1/2% above and below normal, or 42-1/2% below normal Standard BIL levels: kV Class BIL (kV) 1.2 30 2.5 45 5.0 60 8.7 75 15.0 95 25.0 Grd. Y Only 125 25.0 150 34.5 Grd. Y Only 150 34.5 150 Low voltages (secondary). All voltages through 5 kV class UL labeling available Factory Mutual labeling available
Design Impedances
Impedances are supplied to meet IEEE C57.12.00 standards. Customerspecied impedances are available. (Subject to IEEE/ANSI 7.5% impedance tolerance.)
Abnormal environmental conditions Unusual transient voltages present on the source voltage Frequent or planned throughfault duty Planned overloading unless in strict accordance with the IEEE loading guide (C57.91) Motors whose horsepower rating is greater than half the transformer kVA rating Unusual frequency of impact loading may occur when supplying welding apparatus, electric arc furnaces or motors with cyclical loads Loads involving abnormal harmonic or DC current that may result where appreciable load currents are controlled by solid-state or similar devices These lists do not purport to cover all unusual conditions and applicable limitations. Other unusual service conditions are described in IEEE Standard C57.12.00.
Application
Liquid-lled, three-phase, commercial pad-mounted distribution transformers are designed for servicing such underground distribution loads as shopping centers, schools, institutions and industrial plants. They are available in both livefront and deadfront construction, for radial or loop-feed applications, with or without taps.
Typical design impedances: kVA %Z 75 4.00 112-1/2 4.00 150 4.00 225 4.00 300 5.00 500 5.00 750 5.75 1000 5.75 1500 5.75 2000 5.75 2500 5.75 3000 5.75 3750 5.75 5000 5.75
Table 17.0-1. Temperature Guarantees

Description Standard Optional
Ambient 30C 30C
Rise 65C 55C
30C average ambient temperature of cooling air not to exceed 40C maximum over any 24-hour period. Degree rise is the average winding temperature rise by resistance. A dual temperature rating of 55/65C adds 12% additional continuous capacity to the base kVA rating of the transformer.
Note: Altitudes not to exceed 3300 ft (1006m).
Note: Subject to NEMA/IEEE 7.5% impedance tolerance. Note: Non-standard design impedance may be obtained by contacting Eaton.
FluidsLiquid Dielectric
The choice of uid, mineral oil or less ammable natural esther uid (BIOTEMP, Envirotemp FR3) is made based upon site conditions and proximity to facility walls, windows and ammable structures, and environmentally sensitive areas.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 17 003
17.0-3
General Description
Standard Features
Four lifting hooks Bolted-on terminal compartment with removable front sill Hinged, lift-off cabinet doors Interlocked hex-head or penta-head bolt padlock handle operates a cam assembly that is part of the threepoint door latching mechanism Hex-head or penta-head bolts must be removed from the ange formed on the steel high/low barrier before the HV door can be openednot shown Removable neutral ground strap not shown Tank ground pads (1 in HV, 1 in LV) Steel high/low voltage compartment barrier Nameplate Fill plug and self-actuating pressure relief device Externally operated no load tap changer Drain valve and sampling device
i ii 1 2 3
4 5

6 7
8 9 10
Options
Primary Termination
For livefront construction, externally clamped high voltage porcelain bushings double eye-bolt or spade for cable (75225 kVA) or a single eyebolt or spade for cable (3001500 kVA). Spade bushings are also offered For deadfront construction, externally clamped high voltage epoxy bushing wells for 200A loadbreak, or 600A non-loadbreak inserts
11 12 13
14 15 16
Secondary Termination
NEMA spade terminals
17 18
Primary and Secondary Compartment Features
19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 004
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformer Cooling Classes

Table 17.0-2. Fluids Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Higher installation cost Vaults required for indoor installations per code low re point160C <30% biodegradability
Mineral Oil

Low transformer cost Good dielectric performance Low maintenance cost Good heat dissipation Good cold climate performance Preventative maintenanceDGA historical data available Low heat release Reduced smoke Low ame Self extinguishing Good dielectric performance Low toxicity Moderate viscosity High stability High re point360C High ash point343C Compatible with mineral oil Excellent retrol uid (compatible with oil up to a 10% mixture) Excellent dielectric performance 97% biodegradable Renewable resource Greater tolerance to moisture
Silicone Fluid

Non-biodegradable Not suitable for use with internal Bay-O-Net fuses Transformer cost Disposal cost Viton gaskets required Retrol applications High transformer cost High moisture absorption
Environmentally Friendly Fluids

Transformer cost (lower than silicone uid) Pour point (15 to 25C) transformer energized with full load with top
oil temperature at 50C with no problemsno crystals formed at 68C
Table 17.0-3. Fluid Properties Comparison

Property Specic gravity Flash point C Fire point C Viscosity (cSt.) 100C 40C 0C Pour point C Dielectric strength, kV Dissipation factor (%) 25C Permittivity Resistivity Oxidation inhibitor Biodegradability Mineral Oil 0.91 145 160 3 12 76 40 30 0.05 2.2 1013 Optional <30% Silicone Fluid 0.96 300 330 16 38 90 55 4.3 0.01 2.7 1014 No 0% Environmentally Friendly Fluids 0.91 343 360 10 45 300 15 to 25 49 0.0250.05 3.1 1013 Required 97%
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 17 005
17.0-5
General Description
NEC Requirement Guidelines for the Installation of Listed Less-Flammable Liquid-Filled Transformers
NEC (NFPA) Recognition
These guidelines focus on the requirements of Article 450.23 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) for the installation of less-ammable liquid-insulated transformers. Lessammable liquids are used in transformers where an extra margin of re safety is important. Typical applications include installations indoors, on rooftops, near buildings, bush and forest re prone areas and in pedestrian trafc areas. Less-ammable liquids, also known as high re point liquids, are transformer dielectric coolants that have a minimum re point of 300C. Commonly used re-resistant uids include dimethysiloxane and ester-based uids. Two Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL); Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and FM Approvals (FM) currently list less-ammable liquids. They also list less-ammable liquid-lled transformers. Less-ammable liquid-lled transformers were formally recognized by the NEC for indoor installation in 1978. In 1990, the NEC integrated specic less-ammable transformer requirements for outdoor installations for Article 450.23, in effect recognizing less-ammable transformers as inherently safer than conventional oil-lled transformers. Less-ammable transformers, long recognized as an additional safeguard for indoor installations, are becoming increasingly recognized for outdoor applications as well.
General NEC Requirements

The requirements and options for the different types of outdoor installations are outlined in Table 17.0-4. These guidelines also summarize the UL Classication and FM Approvals installation requirements for lessammable uids referred to as listing requirements in NEC 450.23. In cases where the transformer installation presents a re hazard, one or more of the following safeguards will be applied according to the degree of hazard involved: 1. Space requirements. 2. Fire-resistant barriers. 3. Automatic re suppression systems. 4. Enclosures that conne the oil of a ruptured transformer tank. NEC Article 450.28, Modication of Transformers, requires that when modications are made to transformers Table 17.0-4. NEC Article 450.23 Requirements
Installation Type
in existing installations that change the transformer type, the transformers must be marked to show the type of insulating liquid installed and the installations must comply with current requirements of the NEC. Examples of changes include replacing a complete transformer (retrotting) or replacement of the liquid only (retrolling). Askarel (PCB) and conventional mineral oil-lled transformers are frequently retrotted or retrolled using lessammable liquids. NEC 110.34 sets minimum clear work space dimensions around transformers.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Seismic Qualication
7 8
NEC Requirements Either of the following listing requirements : Underwriters Laboratories FM approvals In accordance with NEC Article 450.27, oil-insulated transformers installed outdoors, i.e., space separation, re barriers or water spray systems.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Outdoor Installations
Non-combustible building and no combustible materials stored in area. Combustible building or combustible materials stored in area.

Refer to NFPA 220-1999 for denition of non-combustible Type I and II building construction. Fine Print Note, Article 450.23, (B) (1) states: Installations adjacent to combustible material, re escapes, or door and window openings may require additional safeguards such as those listed in Article 450.27.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 006
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Primary Overcurrent Protection Options

Primary protective devices are applied to distribution transformers in order to: 1. Prevent injury to personnel. 2. Prevent or minimize damage to equipment. 3. Improve the continuity of service by selectively controlling outages. Factors that affect the protection scheme are: 1. Industry standard. 2. Customers specication. 3. Customers system conguration (available fault current, system voltage, system connection, and so on.) 4. Availability of equipment. The rst consideration in determining the ampere rating of a fuse is to verify that the fuse in question is capable of withstanding typical inrush currents without element damage. When a transformer is energized, it is exposed to very large currents for very short periods of time. These currents are known as magnetizing inrush (or fuse withstand) and cold load pickup, and are a result of the transformers magnetic circuit, the electrical system conguration and the connected load. The second consideration for selecting the fuse ampere rating is the maximum load current the fuse is expected to carry without damage. Transformer fusing tables available from the manufacturer normally list the range of overload provided. If the longtime minimum melt current for a particular fuse size is known, it can be compared to the transformer rated current to determine the exact amount of overload permitted. An ambient of 2540C is generally assumed for application tables. Care should be taken when fuses are applied in higher ambient conditions, which will reduce the amount of overload permitted. An example of a high ambient condition used frequently in distribution transformers is that of current limiting fuses in dry-well canisters. To accommodate the overload and derating factors referred to, the following ratios are used on general-purpose CL fuses.
Nameplate current rating of fuse/ nameplate current rating of transformer = 1.25 for enclosures surrounded by air (EFD, clip mount, arc-strangler) or = 1.35 for enclosures surrounded by oil (canisters). Derating factors are not applied to expulsion or backup CL fuses because high temperature has minimal effect on their operation. Finally, it is necessary to verify that the fuse current rating under consideration will, in fact, operate prior to the transformer sustaining any permanent thermal damage (conductor or insulation burning or melting). This is done by comparing the total clearing characteristics of the fuse in question with the IEEE (I2t) damage line. It is important that the total clearing characteristics of the device under consideration lie to the left of the damage line for all expected values of fault current. Note that most fuse characteristics will cross the damage line at some point. It is important to make this occur at the lowest possible value of the current. The interrupting rating of a device is a measure of the maximum symmetrical fault current at which the device can successfully clear a fault condition without excessive damage to itself, the equipment it is protecting or the surrounding environment. It is extremely critical that the interrupting rating of a device be greater than the maximum available symmetrical fault current. For devices applied to the transformer primary, the maximum fault current must be supplied by the utility because this value is dependent on the electrical system conguration.
Bay-O-Net fuse assemblies are used to protect transformers and distribution systems. They are designed for use in pad-mounted or sub-surface distribution transformers lled with transformer oil or approved equivalent. The assemblies combine the ease of hotstick operation with the safety of deadfront construction. Removal of the fuse holder from the assembly indicates that the apparatus is electrically disconnected. It also allows convenient fuse element inspection and replacement. When typical safety practices are followed, the assemblies can be load-break operated for working on the transformer secondary; changing distribution voltage with dual voltage switches or tap changers; or disconnecting the apparatus from the line. The optional Flapper Bay-O-Net Assembly (available as sidewallmounted only) includes a apper valve inside the housing, which closes when the fuse holder is removed, thus minimizing oil spillage. Table 17.0-5. Bay-O-Net Fuse Electrical Ratings
kV Rating 150 50 8.3 Specication
Electrical Ratings
BIL and full wave crest 60 Hz, AC, 1-minute withstand 3000A rms asymmetrical cover mount 3500A rms symmetrical sidewall mount 15.5 2500A rms asymmetrical cover mount 2500A rms symmetrical sidewall mount 23.0 1000A rms asymmetrical cover mount 1000A rms symmetrical sidewall mount
Maximum Single-Phase Interrupting Ratings
Protective Fuse Link

Internal, oil-immersed, expulsion type Sized to operate only in the event of a winding failure, isolating the transformer from the primary system Interrupting rating is 3500A at 8.3 kV
10.0 15.5 26.7 34.5

Load Break Ratings (Phase-to-Phase at 80% PF)

160A 150A 80A 50A
With RTE Bay-O-Net fuse links only. Except high ampere overload links, which are rated at 2000A symmetrical.
Protective Fuse Link
Bay-O-Net-Type Fuse
Oil immersed, expulsion type Drawout for fuse replacement Hookstick operable, loadbreak design Available with either overloadsensing or fault sensing 3500 AIC at 8.3 kV, 1800 AIC at 15.5 kV

Bay-O-Net-Type Fuse Assembly
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 17 007
17.0-7
General Description Current Limiting Fuses

Air immersed in drywell canister Drawout for fuse replacement Hookstick operable Limits both the current magnitude and energy associated with low impedance faults Effective in minimizing the probability of tank rupture due to internal, high energy, low impedance faults Available fuse interrupting ratings of 25,00050,000A rms (symmetrical) Maximum fuse ampere rating at 15 kV (250A fuses)
This two-part system provides low current protection with the replaceable expulsion fuse and it adds the energy-
limiting protection of a current-limiting fuse. Together, they coordinate easily with upstream and downstream devices.
i ii
Table 17.0-7. Two- and Four-Position, Load Break, Sectionalizing Switch

Ratings Voltage kV phasephase maximum Voltage kV phaseground maximum Impulse withstand kV 60 Hz 1-minute withstand kV Continuous current Loadbreak Momentary, 10 Hz 2-second 3-shot make and latch ampere 200 Ampere 35 21.1 150 50 200 200 10,000 10,000 6000 300 Ampere 25 15.2 125 40 300 300 10,000 10,000 10,000 600 Ampere 15 8.3 95 34 600 600 15,000 10,000 10,000
1 2 3 4
Partial Range Current Limiting Fuses

Oil immersed, internally block mounted Applied in series with an expulsion type fuse (Bay-O-Net typesee above) Protection against tank rupture
Table 17.0-8. Current-Limiting Backup Fuse Interrupting Ratings

Continuous Ampere Current Rating Minimum Interrupting (Amperes) 100 125 165 300 200 350 375 450 500 800 1000 1200 100 150 200 350 250 350 400 450 800 1000 125 200 325 400 300 400 500 600 700 900 1200 1400 Minimum Melt I2t (A2x s) 1200 1800 4100 6200 9600 17,100 30,500 43,900 68,600 122,000 175,600 274,400 1200 1800 4100 6200 9600 17,100 30,500 43,900 122,000 175,600 1200 1800 4100 6200 9600 17,100 30,500 43,900 68,600 122,000 175,600 274,400 Maximum Clear I2t (A2x s) 5800 8200 16,500 26,700 42,900 62,000 97,800 148,000 245,000 369,000 566,000 875,700 7600 11,000 23,000 33,000 52,900 93,800 125,700 162,300 408,000 660,700 10,500 15,100 34,300 38,400 68,300 121,000 149,700 196,700 307,300 391,100 563,000 882,000
8.3 kV
30 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 165 250 300 330
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The current-limiting backup fuse is used in series with low-current primary protection devices such as a Bay-O-Net fuse. The fuses highly efcient current-limiting section minimizes the effects of high fault current stresses on equipment and the distribution system. Its minimum interrupting rating is coordinated with that of a low current interrupter to avoid undesirable low current operation; yet its maximum interrupting rating will clear the highest fault currents likely to occur. Higher continuous current ratings can be achieved by connecting two fuses in parallel. The current-limiting fuse is used in transformers to protect and isolate faulted equipment. When connected in series with a low current primary protection device, the fuse becomes an element of a two-part protection system that gives a full range of fault protection.
15.5 kV
30 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 165 250 300 330
23 kV
30 40 50 65 80 100
Drawout Current Limiting Fuse Canister
125 150 165 250 300 330

Drawout Current Limiting Fuse Loadbreak Assembly
Table 17.0-6. Current-Limiting Backup Fuse Electrical Ratings and Characteristics

Fuse Type Backup (partial range) C rated
Maximum Interrupting Current 50,000A rms symmetrical
The 8.3 kV, 30100A ratings have been tested and approved for application at 9.9 kV. The maximum interrupting capacity for the 65100A ratings at 9.9 kV is 18 kA. Parallel fuses. The 15.5 kV, 30125A and 250A ratings have been tested and approved for application at 17.2 kV. The maximum interrupting rating for the 15.5 kV fuse, 30125A at 17.2 kV is 43 kA. For the 15 kV, 250A fuse at 17.2 kV, the maximum interrupting rating is 12 kA. The maximum interrupting rating for the 23 kV fuse, 80165A, 300 and 330A, is 30 kA. For the 23 kV, 250A fuse, the maximum interrupting rating is 12 kA.
See Table 17.0-8 for fuses with ratings other than 50,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 008
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Primary Switching Options

Eatons oil-immersed switches are available for radial or loop-feed system switching in three current ratings. The three-phase gangoperated switch has a spring-loaded mechanism for loadbreak and latch operation. The switch is mounted near the core and coil assembly, for low cable capacitance; and with simultaneous three-phase switching, the possibility of ferroresonance is reduced. Available in ratings through 600A at 15 kV, 300A at 25 kV, and 200A at 35 kV.
A-Coil Source A Open Coil
Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) Deadfront Arrester

Surge protection is available without losing deadfront construction in the cabinet. The Eaton type MOV arrester is completely deadfront. It is compact, and is usable wherever a loadbreak elbow can be used. The highly nonlinear characteristics of the varistor elements provide more precise and predictable operating characteristics. The MOV arrester is capable of withstanding temporary overvoltages, so that ratings can be reduced, providing improved margins of protection. Because it is fully shielded and deadfront, it is mountable at any angle and submersible. Its durable rubber construction means there are no fragile porcelain skirts to chip or crack. The MOV arrester is available in ratings from 3 kV to 27 kV.
AB-Coil B-Coil Coil B Source A-Coil Open
Figure 17.0-1. Two-Position Switch

AB-Coil B-Coil Source A A-Coil Open and Loop through
Deadfront Elbow Arrester
Surge Arresters
Eaton distribution class surge arresters are supplied on transformers when specied. Transformers with livefront conguration have mounting nuts welded on the tank wall for arrester mounting.
B Source
Coil
Figure 17.0-2. Four-Position Switch (Loop Feed) T Blade
Source
Figure 17.0-3. Four-Position Switch (Loop-Feed) V Blade
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 17 009
17.0-9
General Description
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE INSERT High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber creates a smooth surface around the current interchange to evenly distribute electrical stress within the insulation. PULLING EYE Stainless steel reinforced for positive shotgun stick switching operations. TEST POINT (OPTIONAL) Corrosion-resistant, conductive electrode provides consistent capacitive voltage for application of fault indicators and for determining if the circuit is energized (cap not shown). LOADBREAK BAND UV-resistant nylon band identifies the elbow as three-phase loadbreak rated and is field replaceable.
-.910 100
INSULATION High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber formulated, mixed and milled in-house for consistent and reliable field performance. SEMI-CONDUCTIVE SHIELD High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber provides protective deadfront shield that meets requirements of IEEE Standard 592. LOADBREAK PROBE Tin-plated copper probe with arc-ablative tip(arc follower) provides dependable loadbreak switching characteristics.
i ii 1 2 3
COPPERTOP COMPRESSION CONNECTOR Inertia-welded aluminum barrel and threaded copper lug makes crimping easy and ensures a tight, reliable electrical connection with loadbreak probe. GROUNDING TABS Molded into semi-conductive shield for the attachment of a ground wire to maintain deadfront safety.
M
4 5 6 7 8 9
CONDUCTIVE INSERT ENDS Encapsulated with insulating rubber. Reduces cable extrusion and distortion that can be caused by thermocycling. Mitigates the effects of the electrical stresses along the cable to elbow interface, greatly reducing the possibility of interface tracking.
LE215
78
-23.1 1
IN
Figure 17.0-4. 200A, 15 kV Class Loadbreak Elbow Connector
INSULATION High-quality, peroxide-cured EPDM rubber formulated, mixed and molded in-house for consistent and reliable field performance. SHIELD HOUSING Structural member of insert providing mechanical strength and uniform electrical shielding.
17
10
LATCH INDICATOR RING Molded-in bright yellow ring eliminates elbow installation guesswork by ensuring a quality connection. SEMI-CONDUCTIVE SHIELD High quality EPDM rubber provides protective deadfront shield that meets requirements of IEEE Standard 592. CONTACT HOLDER Copper component transfers current from piston-contact to bushing well stud.
11 12 13 14
THREADED BASE 3/8-16 UNC Copper threads provide connection to bushing well stud. ARC SNUFFER ASSEMBLY Arc-ablative plastic produces arc-extinguishing gas during loadbreak switching operations. GROUNDING TABS Three tabs molded into a semi-conductive shield for the attachment of a ground wire to maintain deadfront safety. HEX BROACH 5/16 hex broach permits consistent installation with torque tool.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
INTEGRAL PISTON-CONTACT One-piece copper component provides a multi-point, knurled current transfer to the contact holder. During a fault-close switching operation, the piston is forced quickly forward to engage the elbows loadbreak probe.
Figure 17.0-5. Bushing Well Insert Cutaway Illustrates Uncomplicated Nature of Current Path
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 17 010
General Description
i ii
Recommended Oil Level
Tank Wall
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
High Voltage Lead Isolation Link
Minimum Oil Level
1.25 (29.0)
Transformer Primary Winding Elbow Connector
Bottom Contact
Upper Contact
Underground Cable
High Voltage Bushing
10
Figure 17.0-6. Bay-O-Net Assembly with Isolation Link
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: Isolation link is not required if the Bay-O-Net fuse is used in series with a backup energy limiting fuse.
Bay-O-Net Fuse Link
Contact Flare End
Cartridge
Tulip Tip End
Figure 17.0-7. Insertion of Bay-O-Net Into Cartridge
Tulip End of Bay-O-Net Link
Flare End of Bay-O-Net Link
End Plug (c)
Cartridge (a)
Inner Holder (b)
Figure 17.0-8. Assembly of Cartridge with Fuse Onto Inner Holder
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 17 011
17.0-11
Layout Dimensions
Front View
Side View
Pad
i
15.50 (393.7)
ii 1 2
HV Comp
LV Comp
H Conductor Entry Area 3.50 (88.9) Min.
D + 4.00 (101.6)
42.00 (1066.8) W + 4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 17.0-9. Pad-Mounted Transformer (752500 kVA)Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 17.0-9. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed 65C Rise, 752500 kVADimensions in Inches (mm)
kVA Transformer Dimensions Width (W) 75 112 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 75 112 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 75 112 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 81.00 (2057.4) 84.00 (2133.6) 86.00 (2184.4) 92.00 (2336.8) 98.00 (2489.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 81.00 (2057.4) 84.00 (2133.6) 86.00 (2184.4) 92.00 (2336.8) 98.00 (2489.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 65.00 (1651.0) 65.00 (1651.0) 65.00 (1651.0) 65.00 (1651.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 68.00 (1727.2) 82.00 (2082.8) 86.00 (2184.4) 88.00 (2235.2) 92.00 (2336.8) 98.00 (2489.2) 102.00 (2590.8) Depth (D) 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 58.00 (1473.2) 62.00 (1574.8) 64.00 (1625.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 80.00 (2032.0) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 58.00 (1473.2) 62.00 (1574.8) 64.00 (1625.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 80.00 (2032.0) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 58.00 (1473.2) 62.00 (1574.8) 64.00 (1625.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 80.00 (2032.0) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) Height (H) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 58.00 (1473.2) 58.00 (1473.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 77.00 (1955.8) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 58.00 (1473.2) 58.00 (1473.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 77.00 (1955.8) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 56.00 (1422.4) 58.00 (1473.2) 58.00 (1473.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 77.00 (1955.8) Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) of Oil (Approximate)
Dimensional Variations
Height Variations
1. Add 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) to the height when using bayonet fusing on all kVA ratings. 2. Add 7.00 inches (177.8 mm) to the height when using dry well canister fusing on 75500 kVA ratings. 3. Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) to the height when using dry well canister fusing on 750 kVA rating only.
HV: 515 kV Radial Feed, Livefront

2280 (1034.2) 2400 (1088.6) 2700 (1224.7) 3350 (1519.5) 3650 (1655.6) 5200 (2358.7) 7200 (3265.9) 9000 (4082.3) 10,250 (4649.3) 13,400 (6078.1) 15,000 (6803.9) 16,500 (7484.3) 2350 (1065.9) 2450 (1111.3) 2700 (1224.7) 3400 (1542.2) 3700 (1678.3) 5400 (2449.4) 7200 (3265.9) 9000 (4082.3) 10,250 (4649.3) 13,400 (6078.1) 15,000 (6803.9) 16,500 (7484.3) 2400 (1088.6) 2500 (1134.0) 2800 (1270.1) 3500 (1587.6) 3800 (1723.7) 5600 (2540.1) 7200 (3265.9) 9000 (4082.3) 10,250 (4649.3) 13,400 (6078.1) 15,000 (6803.9) 16,500 (7484.3) 115 (435.3) 115 (435.3) 125 (473.2) 150 (567.8) 165 (624.6) 200 (757.1) 360 (1362.7) 400 (1514.2) 440 (1665.6) 550 (2082.0) 570 (2157.7) 625 (2365.9) 115 (435.3) 115 (435.3) 125 (473.2) 150 (567.8) 165 (624.6) 200 (757.1) 360 (1362.7) 400 (1514.2) 440 (1665.6) 550 (2082.0) 570 (2157.7) 625 (2365.9) 115 (435.3) 115 (435.3) 125 (473.2) 150 (567.8) 165 (624.6) 200 (757.1) 360 (1362.7) 400 (1514.2) 440 (1665.6) 550 (2082.0) 570 (2157.7) 625 (2365.9)
Depth Variations
4. Canister fuses require deeper tanks on some transformer sizes. a. Add 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) to the depth of kVA ratings 75, 150 and 225. b. Add 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) to the depth of kVA rating 500. 5. Less ammable natural esther uid requires deeper tanks on some transformer ratings. a. Add 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) to the depth of kVA ratings 751500. Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) to the depth of kVA ratings 2000 and 2500.
HV: 515 kV Radial Feed, Deadfront
HV: 515 kV Loop Feed, Livefront
Dimensions are approximate not for construction. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
21

September 2011
Sheet 17 012
Layout Dimensions/Technical Data

Table 17.0-9. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed 65C Rise, 752500 kVADimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
kVA Transformer Dimensions Width (W) Depth (D) 52.00 (1320.8) 54.00 (1371.6) 56.00 (1422.4) 69.00 (1752.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 74.00 (1879.6) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) 52.00 (1320.8) 54.00 (1371.6) 56.00 (1422.4) 69.00 (1752.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 74.00 (1879.6) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) Height (H) 55.00 (1397.0) 55.00 (1397.0) 55.00 (1397.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 77.00 (1955.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 55.00 (1397.0) 55.00 (1397.0) 55.00 (1397.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 77.00 (1955.8) 78.00 (1981.2) Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) of Oil (Approximate)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
HV: 25 kV Radial Feed Deadfront

75150 225300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 75150 225300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 68.00 (1727.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 76.00 (1930.4) 80.00 (2032.0) 89.00 (2260.6) 92.00 (2336.8) 98.00 (2489.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 68.00 (1727.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 76.00 (1930.4) 80.00 (2032.0) 89.00 (2260.6) 92.00 (2336.8) 98.00 (2489.2) 102.00 (2590.8) 3500 (1587.6) 4500 (2041.2) 6000 (2721.6) 7200 (3265.9) 9000 (4082.3) 10,250 (4649.3) 13,400 (6078.1) 15,000 (6803.9) 16,500 (7484.3) 3500 (1587.6) 4500 (2041.2) 6000 (2721.6) 7200 (3265.9) 9000 (4082.3) 10,250 (4649.3) 13400 (6078.1) 15,000 (6803.9) 16,500 (7484.3) 135 (511.0) 185 (700.3) 190 (719.2) 360 (1362.7) 400 (1514.2) 440 (1665.6) 550 (2082.0) 570 (2157.7) 625 (2365.9) 135 (511.0) 185 (700.3) 190 (719.2) 360 (1362.7) 400 (1514.2) 440 (1665.6) 550 (2082.0) 570 (2157.7) 625 (2365.9)
HV: 25 kV Loop Feed Deadfront
Technical Data
Table 17.0-10. Liquid Filled<34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 960 1250 1630 2500 2600 4900 6200 6700 10,000 12,000 15,000 16,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1135 1500 1930 2830 3120 5630 7300 8200 11,900 14,600 17,800 19,800 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408
Table 17.0-12. Environmentally Friendly Fluid<34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 960 1250 1630 2500 2600 4900 6200 6700 10,000 12,000 15,000 16,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1135 1500 1930 2830 3120 5630 7300 8200 11,900 14,600 17,800 19,800 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
175 250 300 330 520 730 1100 1500 1900 2600 2800 3800
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
175 250 300 330 520 730 1100 1500 1900 2600 2800 3800
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.
Table 17.0-11. Liquid Filled<34.5 kV Primary 65C Temp. Rise

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 950 1300 1600 2300 3000 5000 6500 8500 10,500 14,500 15,500 18,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1140 1560 1920 2700 3500 5700 7500 9800 12,400 16,600 18,200 22,000 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408
Table 17.0-13. Environmentally Friendly Fluid<34.5 kV Primary 65C Temp. Rise

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 950 1300 1600 2300 3000 5000 6500 8500 10,500 14,500 15,500 18,000 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 1140 1560 1920 2700 3500 5700 7500 9800 12,400 16,600 18,200 22,000 60150 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp per DOE (Watts) 413 562 696 942 1164 1889 2567 3221 4375 5429 6408
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
190 260 320 400 500 700 1000 1300 1900 2100 2700 4000
75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
190 260 320 400 500 700 1000 1300 1900 2100 2700 4000
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 17 013
17.0-13
Layout Dimensions
Front View
Side View
i ii
Pad
H1 H2 H3 A X0 X1X2 X3 15.00 (381.0) H1 H2 H3 XOX1 X2 X3 8.00 (203.2)

T
1
C E
2 3 4 5
F D
8.00 (203.2)
Figure 17.0-10. Pad-Mounted Transformer (30005000 kVA)Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 17.0-14. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed Rated 65C Rise, 30005000 kVADimensions in Inches (mm)
kVA Transformer A 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000 3000 3750 5000

6
Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) Gallons (Liters) of Oil
Pad B 119.00 (3022.6) 82.00 (2082.8) 137.00 (3479.8) 117.00 (2971.8) 81.00 (2057.4) 119.00 (3022.6) 84.00 (2133.6) 84.00 (2133.6) 101.00 (2565.4) 80.00 (2032.0) 85.00 (2159.0) 110.00 (2794.0) 86.00 (2184.4) 82.00 (2082.8) 122.00 (3098.8) 86.00 (2184.4) 82.00 (2082.8) 122.00 (3098.8) 84.00 (2133.6) 84.00 (2133.6) 122.00 (3098.8) 84.00 (2133.6) 87.00 (2209.8) 105.00 (2667.0) 104.00 (2641.6) 104.00 (2641.6) 102.00 (2590.8) C 100.00 (2540.0) 111.00 (2819.4) 108.00 (2743.2)
D 74.00 (1879.6) 79.00 (2006.6) 76.00 (1930.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 81.00 (2057.4) 84.00 (2133.6) 86.00 (2184.4) 86.00 (2184.4) 84.00 (2133.6) 80.00 (2032.0) 84.00 (2133.6) 84.00 (2133.6) 78.00 (1981.2) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) 78.00 (1981.2) 82.00 (2082.8) 83.00 (2108.2) 86.00 (2184.4) 86.00 (2184.4) 81.00 (2057.4) 86.00 (2184.4) 86.00 (2184.4) 85.00 (2159.0) 107.00 (2717.8) 107.00 (2717.8) 107.00 (2717.8)
E 72.00 (1828.8) 83.00 (2108.2) 80.00 (2032.0) 74.00 (1879.6) 77.00 (1955.8) 80.00 (2032.0) 74.00 (1879.6) 78.00 (1981.2) 79.00 (2006.6) 74.00 (1879.6) 78.00 (1981.2) 80.00 (2032.0) 73.00 (1854.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 74.00 (1879.6) 77.00 (1955.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 76.00 (1930.4) 79.00 (2006.6) 79.00 (2006.6) 83.00 (2108.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
F 58.00 (1473.2) 63.00 (1600.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 62.00 (1574.8) 65.00 (1651.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 64.00 (1625.6) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 62.00 (1574.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 67.00 (1701.8) 62.00 (1574.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 67.00 (1701.8) 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 65.00 (1651.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0) 69.00 (1752.6) 91.00 (2311.4) 91.00 (2311.4) 89.00 (2260.6)
15 kV Class, Delta Connected HV-HV 95 kV BIL, LV 30 kV BIL

76.00 (1930.4) 80.00 (2032.0) 78.00 (1981.2) 74.00 (1879.6) 97.00 (2463.8) 91.00 (2311.4) 83.00 (2108.2) 96.00 (2438.4) 101.00 (2565.4) 84.00 (2133.6) 93.00 (2362.2) 90.00 (2286.0 86.00 (2184.4) 86.00 (2184.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 82.00 (2082.8) 91.00 (2311.4) 92.00 (2336.8) 84.00 (2133.6) 84.00 (2133.6) 92.00 (2336.8) 80.00 (2032.0) 86.00 (2184.4) 95.00 (2413.0) 88.00 (2235.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 101.00 (2565.4) 12,900 (5851) 20,000 (9072) 21,500 (9752) 15,000 (6804) 21,800 (9888) 22,000 (9979) 15,400 (6985) 20,100 (9117) 22,900 (10,387) 16,300 (7394) 21,200 (9616) 23,100 (10,478) 15,700 (7121) 19,800 (8981) 22,600 (10,251) 15,700 (7121) 19,800 (8981) 22,600 (10,251) 15,400 (6985) 19,300 (8754) 20,500 (9299) 17,100 (7756) 20,600 (9344) 23,800 (10,795) 19,800 (8981) 24,400 (11,068) 28,600 (12,973) 385 (1457) 540 (2044) 565 (2139) 390 (1476) 550 (2082) 585 (2214) 515 (1949) 650 (2461) 670 (2536) 450 (1703) 575 (2177) 605 (2290) 420 (1590) 525 (1987) 580 (2196) 420 (1590) 525 (1987) 580 (2196) 530 (2006) 630 (2385) 600 (2271) 500 (1893) 560 (2120) 625 (2366) 720 (2725) 840 (3180) 920 (3483)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
15 kV Class, Wye Connected HV-HV 95 kV BIL, LV 30 kV BIL
102.00 (2590.8) 101.00 (2565.4) 108.00 (2743.2) 101.00 (2565.4) 98.00 (2489.2) 107.00 (2717.8) 102.00 (2590.8) 99.00 (2514.6) 108.00 (2743.2) 101.00 (2565.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 106.00 (2692.4) 101.00 (2565.4) 102.00 (2590.8) 106.00 (2692.4) 100.00 (2540.0) 101.00 (2565.4) 106.00 (2692.4) 104.00 (2641.6) 107.00 (2717.8) 107.00 (2717.8) 99.00 (2514.6) 104.00 (2641.6) 106.00 (2692.4)
Standard compartment depth is 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) except 200 kV BIL has a depth of 30.00 inches (762.0 mm). Depth may be altered by the addition of switching and fusing. Extends under base of transformer only. Does not include rear coolers. Standard low voltages are 480Y and 480 delta (through 3750 kVA only). Low voltage above 3750 kVA must be 2400V or above.
Dimensions are approximatenot for construction. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

September 2011
Sheet 17 014
Technical Data
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Liquid Filled Technical Data

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 22,491 26,340 32,255 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 11,140 13,110 16,260

kVA No Load at 85C Ref. Temp (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 85C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 24,402 28,578 34,996 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 95 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 12,090 14,220 17,640
3000 3750 5000
5517 6521 8193
28,008 32,861 40,448
3000 3750 5000
5985 7075 8889
30,387 35,653 43,885

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 22,269 26,076 31,932 Total Losses at 100% Load and 85C (Watts) 60 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 11,030 12,230 16,090

3000 3750 5000
5461 6455 8111
27,730 32,531 40,043
3000 3750 5000
5925 7003 8800
30,086 35,295 43,446


3000 3750 5000
5570 6584 8273
27,616 32,399 39,885
3000 3750 5000
6043 7143 8976
29,962 35,152 43,275

kVA No Load at 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) Load Loss at 100% Load and 75C Ref. Temp. (Watts) 21,825 25,556 31,295 Total Losses at 100% LOAD and 85C (Watts) 200 kV HV BIL Total Losses at 50% Load and 55C LL Ref. Temp. and 20C NL Ref. Temp. per DOE (Watts) 11,300 13,300 16,510

3000 3750 5000
5848 6913 8686
27,673 32,469 39,981
3000 3750 5000
6345 7500 9424
30,025 35,228 43,379
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Losses based on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating 0.48 kV.
CA08104001E
Spot Network Equipment

September 2011
Sheet 18 001
18.0-1
Spot Network Equipment
Contents
Spot Network Equipment Discussion Spot Network Decision Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-2 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-3 Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-5 Network Protector Equipment Liquid-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-16 Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-18 CM52 Network Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-20 Protector NPL Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-24 MPCV Network Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25 Communications Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-27 MPCV Network Relay Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-28 Communications Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-30 CM52 Protector Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-31 Network Disconnect Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-32 Network Transition Box to Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-33 Rating Selection Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-34 Protector Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-36 Layout Dimensions Liquid-Type Network Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-37 Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-38 Dry-Type Network Unit Switchgear Mounted Protector Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-39 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16422 Section 26 23 16
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CM52 Network Protector
21
CA08104001E
18.0-2 Spot Network Equipment Discussion

Spot Network Decision Tree
September 2011
Sheet 18 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 18.0-1. Spot Network Decision Tree
Two Transformer Spot Networks are practical. See Pages 18.0-34 through 18.0-36 for Application information. If anticipated load = X kVA, use two network transformers each rated X kVA. Four Transformer Spot Networks are practical. See Pages 18.0-34 through 18.0-36 for Application information. If anticipated load = Z kVA, use four network transformers each rated Z/3 kVA. Spot Networks may be possible, but without the redundancy of multiple primary circuits. Three Transformer Spot Networks are practical. See Pages 18.0-34 through 18.0-36 for Application information. If anticipated load = Y kVA, use three network transformers each rated Y/2 kVA. How many circuits are available or routed to each major load areas of the facility? One (1) Two (2) Three (3) Four (4) Are the multiple circuits from the utility the same voltage and frequency under most operating conditions? YES NO Spot Networks may be possible, but without the redundancy of multiple primary circuits. Are the multiple incoming circuits from the utility in synchronization? YES NO Use separate Radial or Double-ended Substations with Open Transition Switching. Does the local utility offer multiple circuits for the metered utility service? YES NO Use Radial design at one or more service voltages.
Continuity of Service Critical
Considering Spot Networks for Electrical Distribution in a Facility?
Continuity of Service NOT Critical
September 2011
Sheet 18 003
Spot Network Equipment Discussion

General Description
18.0-3
Description
Eatons Spot Network Systems are designed to ensure service continuity in 208/120V and 480/277V wye connected secondary network systems. These systems, in either grid or spot network form, are commonly used in areas of high load density such as metropolitan and suburban business districts or facilities. Suburban loads were formerly almost entirely residential and power outages caused little more than personal inconvenience. Now, the suburban load includes not only shopping plazas, industries and residences, but such vital facilities as hospitals and airports. For these and other critical loads, power interruptions can have serious consequences to public and personal safety. Spot networks provide superior reliability at these important loads. The need to supply increasing amounts of power efciently, without increasing equipment size, has resulted in a shift from 208V to 480V wye systems. The change to a higher utilization voltage requires a commensurate change in operating procedures because of the difference in arcing characteristics at 480V compared to 208V. For example, while an arc in a 208 volt system is normally self-extinguishing, an arc in a 480V system will usually burn until it is interrupted by an overcurrent device or until it totally consumes the arcing material. Secondary network systems using Eaton Network Protectors are among the most dependable in use today. In the event of a fault on a primary system cable or transformer, the protector opens due to reverse power ow, thus isolating the fault from the network bus and avoiding load power disturbances. Loss of the primary feeder will not result in service outage at the load on the secondary network. The other primary feeders will continue carrying the load until the faulted cable is repaired and returned to service. The network protector basically consists of a special air power breaker, a breaker operating mechanism, network relay(s) and control equipment. Units are available in both weatherproof and submersible enclosures for either separate or transformer throat mounting. Switchgear mounting is also possible.
Typical Feeder Primary Circuit Network Transformer Protector Fuses Optional Main, 50/51 Relaying and/or Network Disconnect To Other Networks
i ii 1
Tie Tie
2
Low Voltage Switchgear Drawout
LV Feeder
NC
NC
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Customer Loads
Customer Loads
Customer Loads
Figure 18.0-2. Typical Conguration for Three Transformer Spot Network
Better Continuity of Service

The largest user of network systems in the United States is Consolidated Edison of New York. Historical data developed by this utility illustrates that outages are very rare (approximately zero) on grid systems and that spot network systems are ve times more reliable than secondary selective double-ended substation services.
to a radial system supplying the same loads, because of the diversity in the demand among the larger number of circuits. Therefore, less transformer capacity may be required in a network system than in a radial system in the same area, particularly if three or more primary feeders supply the network system.
System Operation
A short circuit on any one primary feeder will cause all the network protectors on that feeder to open on reverse energy, provided the total power on the three-phase feeder is in the reverse direction. When the feeder cable is repaired properly, the network protectors on that feeder will automatically reclose when the feeder circuit breaker at the upstream switchgear is closed, if correct voltage conditions exist at the network transformer. If the phases are reversed during the cable repairs, the protectors will not reclose automatically as long as the network remains energized. Likewise, if a voltage less than network voltage is restored to the feeder, the network protector on that feeder will not reclose automatically. The unit could be closed manually if the network relay trip contact is not closed. If a feeder from a networkable source is to be connected to an energized network, the incoming voltage must be slightly higher than the network voltage and in proper phase relation with it. If a feeder is being connected to a dead network, it is sufcient to have the incoming voltage high enough to operate the closing mechanism.
Improved Regulation Less Voltage Sagging

Each load is supplied from at least two directions. Services supplied from a transformer location have a minimum of two paths of supply on utility grids and spot networks, and can be designed to have more. Abrupt changes in loads, such as motor starting, cause much less voltage disturbance due to the multiple paths for load current compared to simple radial services. The voltage dip resulting from a given starting current may be 70% less in a network system than in a radial system.
Less Transformer Capacity Required

In normal operation, the loads along the network service are divided among the various network transformers in such a way that the best possible voltage conditions and lowest losses are realized. Since all the services are tied together, many more loads are supplied from the same secondary network source than in a simple radial system. The peak loads on the transformers are correspondingly lower in the network system compared
CA08104001E

General Description
Maintenance of primary feeder circuits can be accomplished by opening upstream switchgear primary devices one at a time, thereby opening every protector connected to a given primary due to reverse magnetizing currents owing through each protector served. By opening the primary circuits one at a time, the network loads are not disturbed. Also, at times of light load, the system can be economically loaded by disconnecting some of the primary circuits and operating the transformers at more efcient levels. Although the protectors are capable of opening under reverse magnetizing currents, the opening may be delayed depending upon the time delay setting of the network relay. When the load increases on the network, other primaries can be brought into service by closing the feeder breakers. The associated protectors on the reactivated feeders will reclose serving the network if the transformer voltage is higher than the network voltage by a certain minimum amount and in the proper phase relation. The network protector fuses provide backup protection for clearing faults on the primary feeder in the unlikely event the protector fails to operate. These melting alloy or partial range current limiting fuses are located on the load side of the protector, and when removed, serve to isolate the protector from the network. Numerous protector models are available from Eaton and the best product for the application is a function of the type of system being designed: utility grid (see Figure 18.0-3) or spot network. Spot network systems (see Figure 18.0-2) usually use the CM52 type of protector, which has important safety features not found on earlier Eaton or competitor models.
September 2011
Sheet 18 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Primary Feeder Breaker
Typical Protector
Typical Network Transformer

LOADS LOADS LOADS
Grid Grid
LOADS LOADS LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
LOADS
Figure 18.0-3. Typical Conguration for Utility Grid Network
CM52 Protector Advantages
put back into service reducing maintenance time. Spring Close Operating Mechanism: Avoids partial closures. The CM52 spring close mechanisms will not permit closing motion of the contacts until the closing springs are fully charged. Also provides close and latch ratings on protectors. Externally Mounted Silver-Sand Fuses: Operate with no contamination of the protector, and will positively interrupt fault current to disconnect the protector from the network bus in abnormal fault situations.
CM52 Protector
Exclusive Drawout Design: With positive safety interlocks, provides maximum protection against contact with energized components while disconnecting the unit for test or maintenance; ensures maximum safety for operating personnel. All main current carrying and mechanical operating components are located behind a deadfront panel which minimizes the possibility of tools or hands being inserted into an energized protector. The drawout unit is operated by a hand-cranked levering system, which cannot be engaged unless the circuit breaker is open and cannot be disengaged unless the drawout unit is either fully disconnected or fully connected. Modular Construction: Simplies eld maintenance and/or replacement of components. Protectors can be quickly
Low Energy, Trip Actuator: Provides reliable tripping effort, even when system voltage is not available, up to four operations via remote tripping before recharging is needed. Close and Latch Ratings: Ratings comparable to air power breakers are readily available since the mechanism is spring charged, unlike motor operated protectors which have no close and latch ratings. Increased Dielectric Strength: CM52 units have passed a more stringent dielectric test voltage of 5000 Vac compared to the lower value of 2200V required by ANSI standards. Stored Energy Option: The CM52 can be provided wired for stored energy. This option charges the closing springs after a closure, resulting in a 5-cycle close after a trip event. This is the preferred conguration for 2-unit spot networks.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 005

Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations
18.0-5

This section deals with the various components which make up the commercial spot network, either as a double-ended substation or multiple transformer substation. The intent of the discussion is to give some basic guidelines for the selection of Eaton transformers and network protectors. The major components that will be discussed are: 1. Primary switches 2. Network transformer types 3. Network protectors 4. Spot network disconnects 5. Low voltage drawout switchgear congurations 6. Typical spot network layouts 7. Use of current limiting fuses 8. Network device coordination
Coil #1 Interlock Interlock logic can vary thus both an A and B auxiliary contact is supplied.
b a
i ii 1
To Network
Primary MagBreak Switch Open Closed
Network Transformer
2 3 4
Ground Position
Protector
Fuses
Coil #2 Interlock
5
switches are added ahead of the integral type liquid switches. Eaton recommends that no more than two transformers be served by a single upstream breaker and relay, unless separate fused air switches are located ahead of the transformers.
Figure 18.0-4. Three-Position Primary Switch Interlock for Liquid Network Transformers electrical connections for the interlocking between the primary switch, transformer and network protector. Coil #1 and #2 are electrical interlocks which prevent unsafe operation of the primary mag-break switch. Coil #1 ensures that the protector must be used to break load current before operating the switch from closed to open. Coil #2 ensures that the primary cable must be deenergized before operating the switch from closed to ground. These interlocks are not necessary on a two-position air switch if it has loadbreak ratings. Due to their common use, liquid type network transformers are manufactured with the three-position mag-break only switch integral to the transformer. Drytype transformers use the commonly available two-position air switch with special icker blades which give the air switch a loadbreak rating. The capability of interrupting load currents can save time by not having to deenergize the feeder. The choice of switch type is thus dictated by the type of transformer selected for the spot network system. Another consideration is the necessity to provide primary overcurrent protection for each transformer, such as in the form of power fuses. Upstream breakers usually serve two, three or four transformers on their circuit and thus have the protective relays set at higher levels dictated by the entire circuit load, which sacrices individual transformer protection. See Figure 18.0-13 later in this section for a specic example of this type of situation. When dry-type units are used, one solution is to add power fuses to the loadbreak switches. However, this option is not easy when liquid types are used unless air
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1. Medium Voltage Primary Switches

The incoming medium voltage feeder may range from 4160V to 34.5 kV. Any feeder which has a voltage higher than 34.5 kV should not be considered for spot network service because the cable charging capacitance begins to affect the operation of the network relay response. The primary feeder enters into a switch compartment, which can be liquid or air type. The liquid type transformers usually use a special three-position, liquid-lled, non-loadbreak primary switch, which has a special third position for grounding the incoming feeder cable during maintenance work on a primary circuit. Dry-type transformers usually use a two-position air switch, which omits the third position. Grounding the circuit becomes a manual procedure, if needed, on dry-type transformers. The three positions of the liquid type non-loadbreak switch on liquid network transformers are: 1. Close 2. Open 3. Ground These liquid switch designs use electrical interlocks that prevent the unintentional movement of the switch, with either the network protector in the Closed position or the medium voltage feeder being energized. Figure 18.0-4 shows the typical
CA08104001E
If fuses are used anywhere in the primary circuit, the network protector relays must be capable of tripping under WATT-VAR conditions. New digital type network relays have the ability to congure their tripping characteristics from WATT to WATT-VAR in the eld. Older type protectors having electromechanical relays should be updated by retrotting with the newer relays. If fuses are not present, the standard WATT trip characteristic, which is standard in the industry, is appropriate.
Each type of primary switch uses unique terminations of the primary cable. Liquid switches use a terminal chamber which is lled in the eld with a suitable compound to improve the insulation strength of the cables. Air switches use mechanical or compression terminations with stress cones. Air switches require more oor space than the integral liquid type of switch, especially since the depth of the air switch is made to match the depth of the transformer. Transition sections add to required oor space if hard bus connections, not cable, are required. Whereas the three-position liquid switch dimensions are no greater than 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) deep off the end of the transformer and 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) in width centered at the end of the unit.

It is possible to use both types of switches for liquid installations. Groups of air switches can be mounted along a wall to receive and distribute primary circuit power to each transformer. Individual power fuses can be mounted within the air switches. Dry-well mounting of current limiting fuses in air canisters accessible from the top or side walls of the transformer is not recommended. The available space will dictate much of the design if sufcient space is not allocated for electrical system equipment. Primary switches accommodate the three-phase conductors and never use a neutral conductor. Most spot networks use delta wound transformers, so there is no need to deliver the neutral through the primary switch. Any type cable can be used, however the more modern types are easier to handle than paper lead insulated types which require potheads for terminations within the primary switch. Also, the impedance values among transformers in a spot network should be as close in value to each other that manufacturing tolerances will allow; this helps reduce circulating currents between transformers. Table 18.0-1. Transformer Impedance
kVA Size 3001000 15003000 Recommended Z 5% or greater 7% or greater
September 2011
Sheet 18 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
FA fan rating when compared to conventional dry-type designs. When both transformers are available, the 1000 kVA units in our example will only be loaded to 75% of their AA base rating. The transformer winding conguration will depend upon the primary service available and the type of service needed by utilization equipment comprising the loads. For the most part, transformers are DELTA-WYE, which permits the lowest ground relay pickup value for the primary feeder breaker. This type of winding conguration also eliminates any zero sequence current in the primary feeder for load unbalances in the secondary. At higher primary voltages, 27 kV through 34.5 kV, some use has been made of GROUNDED WYE-GROUNDED WYE windings. The advantage gained is the reduction of overvoltages which can result if one leg of the unit is de-energized. The disadvantage is that the primary breaker ground relay must be set much higher because load unbalances and ground faults in the secondary are reected by zero sequence currents in the primary circuit. See Pages 18.0-16 and 18.0-18 for network transformer features.
Notice that 3000 kVA is typically the largest transformer that can be used for network services, although Eaton can go higher. As an example, lets assume a twounit spot network using dry-type transformers having 80C temperature ratings. In this example we calculate that the building load will not exceed 1495 kVA. Since we are designing the service as a double-ended network substation, either transformer must be capable of carrying the full building load of 1800A. One choice is to select a 1500 kVA transformer size which has a full load rating of 1805 amperes. However, in specifying transformers for network services, the units can be undersized, realizing that under most conditions both units are available to supply power to the network. When only one is handling the entire load, it should be considered an abnormal event that should not continue indenitely. For our load of 1495 kVA, a 1000 kVA transformer will supply 1888 amperes at 157% of nameplate rating, therefore we would select a 80C rise 1000 kVA dry-type unit operated at 115C with fans (157% overload capability) and a protector with a continuous rating of 1875A. In all spot network designs, the equipment must be sized to handle the load even though one primary, and thus one transformer, is out of service (known as a single contingency condition) for some period of time. The basic design constraint is that the load not exceed the maximum thermal rating of the remaining unit(s) during the time of the single contingency. Protector ratings recommended by vendors, as well as protector circuitry, anticipate the loads and are sized to handle the higher currents, so the limiting factor is the transformer. One advantage of liquid designs is their large thermal mass which enables them to handle higher currents for a longer period of time without the need for an
2. Network Transformer Characteristics

After the primary switch, the power is delivered to the primary windings of a network type transformer. The design may be liquid- or dry-type, with liquid types being more popular from a historical perspective, due to their application in utility systems. However, dry-type designs are now available meeting the ANSI network standards. Most applications within commercial buildings desire dry-type designs due to the desire to avoid the re hazard associated with liquid dielectrics. It is important to use proper dry-type ratings which mimic the overload characteristics of liquid units, therefore dry types should be rated for 80C rise and use Class H 20C total temperature insulation materials in VPI designs or 185C in cast coil designs. Fans are normally employed to aid the air cooling during periods of overloading, and which occur during a single primary outage. Secondary voltages are always 480V wye or 208V wye. Also, 216V wye is a common rating. Primaries are always delta, such as 4160V, 13.2 kV, 13.8 kV, etc. Transformer impedances should fall within the standard ranges indicated in Table 18.0-1, or else the usual protector interrupting ratings may become inadequate. If impedances drop below these values, the maximum through-fault may exceed the interrupting rating of the protector.
3. Network Protector
The network protector can be provided in a weather-proof NEMA 4 housing, submersible or suitable for mounting within a low voltage switchgear assembly. Both the transformer side (line) and network (load) connections of the protector are bus bar which can accommodate transformer ange connections and loadside connections to cable, busway or switchgear buswork. Network protectors are special selfcontained air power breaker units having a full complement of current, potential and control transformers, as well as relay functions to protect the integrity of the low voltage network bus. Normally, protectors do not have any overcurrent protection in the forward direction; if necessary, the 50/51 function can be achieved through the use of remote mounted protective devices. Figure 18.0-5 illustrates a simplied diagram of the various components of the network protector.
Note: The symbol for a protector is the air breaker symbol with a dot in the middle.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 007

18.0-7
Protectors have either rollout or drawout mechanisms for easy maintenance. Protectors having the drawout mechanisms, such as the CM52 type, are comparable to air power breakers in terms of maintenance and stored energy functions. The older rollout units use manually disconnected fuses and links which must be removed from the energized network bus prior to rolling the unit out of the cubicle for inspection, testing and maintenance. Details on protectors are reviewed later in this section and the recommended spot network equipment ratings for two, three and four unit congurations are shown in Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12 that appear on Pages 18.0-34 and 18.0-35 in this product section. The protector load side contains a network fuse, usually a partial range current limiting type. The fuses are present as back-up protection if the protector fails to open properly. These fuses are separately removable, but do not drawout with the protector mechanism. Commonly, the fuses are located at the top of each protector. The fact that the fuses are located on the network side means that fuse maintenance requires operators to come into contact with live parts and conductors which can deliver high fault currents. A method of easily disconnecting the secondary of the protector from the network bus, similar to the conguration of the primary, is needed to isolate the fuse and protector, thus the need for a network disconnect.
dedicated maintenance staff. Many forms of disconnect devices are available; the specic choice depends upon several related factors such as protector mounting, use of main breakers, protector type, etc. Three key choices for network disconnect devices are outlined below.
Types of Network Disconnects

Principally, the two types are main air power circuit breakers within switchgear assemblies and non-loadbreak hookstick operated switches mounted above the protectors in a NEMA 1 cabinet. Regardless of the type used, each disconnect is interlocked with the protector to ensure that the loadbreak protector is used to break and make the load currents. The protector mechanism is rated for at least 10,000 operations before maintenance and is the best device to interrupt normal load currents. Protectors include an operations counter to keep track of the number of operations. The interlocks may be keyed type or electrical control wiring. Refer to Figure 18.0-6 for a typical one-line.
The key interlocking between main air power breakers and network protectors may be eliminated since the main is a true interrupting device usually rated at or above 65,000A interrupting at 480V. When mains are used as loadbreak devices on network services, the opening of a main may result in the opening of the respective protector, however maintenance procedures should always verify protector operation.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Non-Loadbreak Disconnect
The network disconnect device for mounting above the protector is the non-loadbreak bolted pressure switch. The device is hookstick operated from the oor and provides a reliable means of visibly disconnecting the protector circuit from the loadside of the protector. The switch is NEMA 1 cabinet mounted with double doors and electrical interlocks to assure that the protector is used to break the load current. The door interlocks have a defeatable procedure if qualied personnel need to gain access under load ow conditions. Key interlocking with the protector is not necessary.
Main Breakers
Main air power breakers are the safest option to use as a network disconnect, however their interrupting rating guarantees proper operation under all conditions including fault currents. Switchgear mounting of the main breakers means that the disconnect device is the same type of device as all other overcurrent devices mounted in the assembly, thereby requiring common maintenance and operation procedures. The mains can be key interlocked with their respective protectors to ensure that the protectors are opened rst, then the mains are opened and racked to a disconnect position prior to maintenance of the protector or circuit devices. Main breakers include overcurrent trip units to provide individual overload protection for each protector and conductors. This protection is not a normal function of the network relays and augments protection generally so long as the trip unit settings are properly coordinated with the tie and feeder devices. The trip unit protection does not protect the incoming cable against fault currents such as ground faults or short circuit currents; the sensors are not located at the lineside of the protector circuit, rather they are at the switchgear (load) side thus giving only overload protection.
4. Spot Network Disconnects

The multiple sources of power to the network bus can create a safety concern on the load side of each protector. Obviously, each protector loadside is energized from the network so long as at least one transformer remains connected. The use of a network disconnect can provide a degree of operator safety by requiring that the disconnect be used to disconnect the protector loadside from the network before allowing access to network fuses or protector mechanism. Such a disconnect reduces the likelihood of contacting live bus and forces operators to follow a safe procedure prior to any protector maintenance. Accidents involving protectors can be traced to the absence of such devices in customers facilities and distribution system designs. Eaton encourages the use of network disconnect devices, especially in facilities not having
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Protector Fuses Potential Transformer (PTs)
MPCV Voltage
Loadside (Network) MPCV Phasing Voltage
Network transformer neutrals are brought to the loadside area of the disconnect for transitioning to the protector circuit neutral for delivery into the switchgear. The loadside of the disconnect can accommodate outgoing busway or cables as needed. See Page 18.0-32 for network disconnect features.
Network Protector MPCV = Protector Network Relay Lineside (Transformer)
PTs
MPCV Trip
50/51 Relaying for Protectors

Users who specify the non-loadbreak disconnect can easily add the current transformers for relaying at the load side of the protector circuits and provide superior fault and overload protection for the incoming conductors between the protector and the switchgear buswork. The relays are usually mounted within the switchgear and use a lockout feature to trip and lockout the protector. Modern microprocessor relays such as the Eaton Digitrip 3000 can also be used for the 50/51 protection to save costs and mounting space. The use of forward relaying on the protector circuit needs to be coordinated with the tie breakers to ensure that the protector auxiliary 50/51 protective settings are not faster than the tie settings. Coordination is achieved when the ties are faster acting than the 50/51 protector forward overcurrent relays, and they usually trip open rst due to the presence of multiple transformer faults passing through the ties. See Figures 18.0-14 and 18.0-15 for more details. Also refer to tables on Pages 18.0-34 and 18.0-35 for details on the recommended tie device ratings and settings.
Tie Cont.
Ground 480V 125V b 208V Motor MPCV Trip Trip MPCV Close
Transformer
Control Txs.
Figure 18.0-5. Typical Network Protector Schematic
5 kV or 15 kV Primary
Network Transformer
208 o
0 Wye
Network Protector
Fuses
11 12 13
Cont. L SWGR LV 86
3 Cts
Disconnect Switch (Optional)
50/51
Main Breaker NC
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 18.0-6. Partial Spot Network One-Line Diagram
Recommended when no separate main breaker is used.
The use of forward relaying current transformers is recommended even when the non-loadbreak disconnect is not used, such as occurs when only transition boxes are used at the top of the protectors.
This product has become a standard for Eaton and is manufactured in the same plant as the protector for improved assembly and product coordination. Recent designs move the NPL fuses on the protector into the disconnect cabinet to ensure that fuses have controlled access. Space exists within the cabinet to mount separate current transformers to provide inputs for separate instantaneous and time delay overcurrent relays which protect the protector circuitry from point of supply to the switchgear buswork. The General Services Administration uses this type of product on hundreds of network units throughout the National Capital Region and in other areas of the country where networks are used.
The non-loadbreak design has been chosen over the loadbreak for several reasons. First, the loadbreak mechanisms need regular maintenance and should not be allowed to sit in a closed position for years, then be called upon to operate without failure. This type of duty is exactly what is required of a network disconnect. Additionally, the operating mechanism of a loadbreak design requires a lot of force, more than an operator can safely deliver from a ladder or step. Hookstick operation from the oor is a safer procedure. Refer to Figure 18.0-7 for typical section view of network units using a network disconnect atop the protector.
System Neutral Grounding

Regardless of the device selected as the network disconnect, the XO transformer neutrals are not grounded at the transformers. Rather they are brought into the switchgear and grounded at one and only one location. This conguration allows the use of the ground return method of ground fault protection whose zone of protection extends from the secondary transformer windings to the outgoing air power breakers in the switchgear. Other ground fault detection methods are possible, but are considerably more complicated to wire and maintain and are without signicant advantage or greater reliability.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 009

18.0-9
5. Low Voltage Drawout Switchgear Congurations

The most reliable and safe network bus equipment is in the form of low voltage drawout switchgear built per ANSI C37 standards. Unlike the UL 891 switchboard assemblies, low voltage switchgear uses true 200,000A braced buswork, 30 cycle short time ratings, drawout stored energy air power circuit breakers rated for 100% application, for easier maintenanceall of which provides superior performance compared to xed mounted molded case breakers in switchboard construction. This is true regardless of where the protector is mounted. A typical switchgear installation of a protector uses a low voltage switchgear compartment which is 96.00 inches (2438.4 mm) high x 44.00 inches (1117.6 mm) wide x 66.0084.00 inches (1676.42133.6 mm) deep. The use of transition sections between the protector and switchgear ensures that sufcient space exists to route buswork between the two compartments. Refer to Figures 18.0-8 through 18.0-12 which illustrate typical plan views and front elevations for double-ended network substations and three transformer spot network designs. Figure 18.0-8 shows the bus conguration of the two-unit spot network substation. Note that there must be a separate ground return neutral bus which has only one point of connection to the grounding conductor. This type arrangement permits selective tripping of the Tie, then the protector. For a line-to-ground fault on Bus #1, the 86T lockout relay controlling the Tie breaker will be operated rst when GFR-T detects 1.0 per unit ground current. After the Tie breaker is open, the line-to-ground fault current is sensed only by GFR-1, which will actuate the 86-1 lockout to trip the network protector NP #1. For primary faults, the network relay must be set such that it can respond to both reverse magnetizing levels of current as well as to any primary circuit fault current. Since most systems employ DELTA-WYE windings, primary faults will not be detected by either GFR-T or the GFR devices associated with the protectors, since no zero sequence current will ow. However, if GROUNDED WYEGROUNDED WYE transformers are used, the relay coordination must be such that the network relay responds rst to primary feeder faults. This permits the correct operation of the protector under such conditions,
CA08104001E
Neutral Bus Neutral (XO Bushing on Back) Primary Switch
Load Transition
i ii 1 2 3 4
Non-loadbreak Disconnect NEMA 1 Cabinet Fuse Location (Inside) Network Protector (CM52 Type)
Network Transformer
Section View
5
Figure 18.0-7. Typical Non-Loadbreak Network Disconnect Mounting Arrangement because the GFR-T should not attempt to trip the Tie open. Therefore, power will be maintained on the low voltage bus with the Tie breaker remaining closed. See Figures 18.0-9 and 18.0-11 for layout arrangements for dry-type and liquid-type spot networks respectively. Figure 18.0-10 shows the bus conguration for a three-unit commercial spot network. Again, the ground return neutral bus is required which has only one point of connection to the grounding conductor. Selective tripping is achieved in the same fashion as the double-ended network substation with GFR-T sensing ground current and operating the 86T device which then opens both Tie breakers. The ground relays GFR-1, GFR-2 and GFR-3 will only sense ground current after the Tie 86 lockout is energized and the Tie breakers are open. Interlocking auxiliary contacts on the 86-T with the GFR circuits guarantees this selective tripping and ensures the user that ground currents are accurately measured. The ampacity of the ground return neutral bus must meet the minimum requirements of the neutral bus. It is prudent to size the ground return neutral bus the same size as the phase bus, since the ground and neutral carry fault currents during abnormal events. The space required by the ground sensors and connecting buswork can be accommodated easily in two-unit spot networks. However, on threeand four-unit systems, the extensive structure-to-structure insulated ground bus plus the normal phase, neutral and ground buses can reduce the usage of four breaker cells in the
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
switchgear to three. Vendor designs vary on this issue. All four breaker cells are available on two-unit, threeunit, and four-unit systems from Eaton, when Magnum DS switchgear is used. The ampacity of the phase and neutral buswork must meet the gross demand plus spare capacity for growth as stipulated by the National Electrical Code for the loads served. If each transformer on a two-unit spot network has been sized with 100% redundancy, then each protector and load buswork should be rated to carry the entire load from one primary feeder and one transformer. Threeunit spot networks can reduce the redundancy to 50% for the same loads since two units remain in service. Four-unit spot networks may reduce the redundancy to 33%, unless the loads need to be served from two remaining services in which case 100% redundancy is still required.
6. Typical Spot Network Layouts

The amount of space available for the electric service will dictate the size and quantity of the network units chosen for a project. Double-ended substations, especially dry-type designs, tend to be arranged in a single lineup with the primary feeders located at opposite ends of the room. Refer to Figure 18.0-9 for an example of this type of arrangement. The single lineup can be used if space permits. One alternative is to locate the transformers behind, or in front of the switchgear, with interconnecting busway or cables.

September 2011
Sheet 18 010
i ii 1
N.P. #1 N.P. #2
(228.6254.0 mm) required by a rail mounted top of gear breaker lifter device, or the network disconnect, and must be accommodated. Liquid transformer units have very high core and coil untanking heights, which precludes any chance of untanking the core and coils in a normal building. See Figures 18.0-32 through 18.0-34. Regarding conductors, it is prudent to remember that busway can enter or exit a switchgear structure at only one location. Room does not exist to accommodate more than the rst run of busway in a single section, unless the rst connects at the top and the second connects at the bottom. A typical plan view for a three-unit spot network is shown in Figure 18.0-11; four-unit spot networks are similarly designed. If it becomes necessary to split the switchgear assembly, position the splits at one side or the other of the Tie devices. This approach simplies the power connections of the neutral and ground buses. The number of network transformers used in a typical spot network is directly correlated with the number of independent, yet networkable primary feeders available. At least, that is a general rule to follow, however the secondary equipment can take many congurations. Eaton recommends using at least one normally closed tie breaker in the low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear for the purpose of isolating ground faults, and for maintenance of the assembly (cleaning, torquing and testing). Usually the number of normally closed Tie breakers equals N-1, where N equals the number of transformers used in the spot network. However, for some projects it may be desirable to have a ring low voltage assembly where the number of Tie breakers equals N. In such a ring spot network, a Tie busway or cable connects the extreme left side bus of the assembly to the extreme right side bus, thus keeping the N-1 network conguration even when one primary or network transformer is down, or the low voltage assembly bus is down for maintenance or fault isolation. Main breakers, when used, may be positioned in switchgear that is one integral lineup, or mounted in switchgear close-coupled to dry-type transformer/protector pairs which feed power circuits to remote assemblies having all Tie and Feeder breakers.
2 3 4 5 6
Feeder Breakers PH. A,B,C
86-1
86-2
50/51 NC Tie N GFR-1 86-T
50/51
PH. A,B,C
N GFR-2 GRN (Ground Return Neutral) Loads Ground Bus
Feeder Breakers
7
GFR-T
8 9
Loads
Figure 18.0-8. One-Line for Two-Unit Spot Network
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Protectors not fused.
FDR FDR FDR FDR 2-Position PRI SW. (Fuse) Transformer Network Protector Tie FDR FDR FDR FDR
FDR FDR FDR FDR FDR FDR FDR FDR Network Protector Transformer 2-Position PRI SW. (Fuse)
Figure 18.0-9. Front View of Double-Ended Network Substation Three or more transformer unit spot networks cannot be arranged in one lineup, therefore they use the remote mounting of the transformers. Refer to Figure 18.0-11 for an example of this type of equipment layout. It is important to remember which side or end of equipment is used for normal operations when designing a network layout. The primary switches are operated from the end as are the protectors. Switchgear needs both NEC clearances at the front and the rear, due to the drawout breakers and the rear accessible cable compartments. Designers are encouraged to pay attention to the different voltage levels present, both medium and low voltage, and the required working clearances given in the NEC or local codes. Equipment weights should also be investigated to ensure that the structure can support the network assemblies. Means of egress and routes to remove material if replacement becomes necessary should be identied. Avoid placing any network equipment against any wall; the NEC clearances required probably double if two means of egress are not available. Structural columns pose challenges, however they rarely defeat network arrangements; avoid switchgear door openings bumping against columns before they are fully opened. The highest piece of equipment may be the low voltage switchgear, which is usually 96.00 inches (2438.4 mm) in height, plus the 9.0010.00 inches
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 011

18.0-11
Historically, some users and designers have recommended using low voltage busway as the spot collector bus, then feeding loads radially from the collector bus. Eaton does not recommend low voltage busway as the network collector bus, since it has limited short-time ratings and has higher failure rates than the more robust low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear. It is certainly acceptable to use multiple segments of busway to feed protector circuits into the switchgear, where the redundancy of busway circuits prevents loss of power to loads for a single busway fault or failure, and the available fault currents are limited to levels that can be delivered by one transformer, not N transformers. Control voltages for network protectors are usually 120 Vac and derived internally from the transformer secondary or within the protector itself, thus protectors are self-contained regarding control power. The low voltage switchgear assembly may be ac or DC with AC control power being more popular. The ac current control systems use a control power transformer on the incoming of each protector circuit with a control power transfer system on the secondaries of all control power transformers to pick the rst live source. The control power circuits are always energized so long as at least one protector is closed. The addition of main meters for power monitoring, overcurrent relays and communication trip units generally take very little space and can be accommodated without adding space if the switchgear layout rules and standards are followed. It is possible to monitor other non-switchgear equipment by adding space for the required number of communicating addressable relays which monitor remote contacts wired to the switchgear for status and alarming at a remote power monitoring and control system, such as transformer temperature and pressure alarms.
i ii
N.P. #1 N.P. #2
N.P. #3
1 2 3
N
86-1
86-2
86-3
50/51 PH. A,B,C NC Tie N GFR-1 Feeder Breakers Loads GFR-T 86-T
50/51
50/51
NC
PH. A,B,C N GFR-2
Tie
PH. A,B,C
N
GFR-3
4 5 6 7
Feeder Breakers
Loads
Feeder Breakers
GRN (Ground Return Neutral) Loads
Ground Bus
Figure 18.0-10. One-Line for Three-Unit Spot Network

Protectors are fused for three- and four-unit spot networks. Fuse location.
8
Primary Switch
9 10 11 12
Network Transformer
Network Protector Busway or Cable
Low Voltage Drawout Switchgear
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
FDRS Sections
Aux.
Tie
FDRS Sections
Aux.
Tie
FDRS Sections
Aux.
Figure 18.0-11. Floor Plan for Three-Unit Spot Network System Tie breakers), and at the load side of feeder breakers. Network systems that use air power breakers and deliver more than 65,000A of fault current should use feeder breakers such as Eatons Magnum DS breakers rated up to 100,000A. Network protectors are normally equipped with load side fuses (usually partial range current limiting) and serve as backup protection should the protector fail to open on reverse fault current conditions. Air power breakers are now available with kAIC ratings of 65, 85, 100 and 200 kAIC, without fuses. In two transformer spot networks, one can argue that the protectors do not need to be fused for any application up to and including 3000 kVA transformers. The principal logic is that the Tie can experience only the fault current from one transformer and that the Tie protective trip settings provide faster acting backup protection than the protector fuses for reverse power conditions. When protector fuses are used, the system needs to be designed with interlocking to ensure that the fuses are not accessible unless the protector and disconnect are opened.
7. Use of Current Limiting Fuses

Generally, this issue needs to be addressed in the design stage of a project, prior to specication writing. Protectors are usually applied with fuse limiters on the load side of each protector, but there can be exceptions to using the limiters. The expected fault currents need to be calculated for several locations, including secondary windings of transformers, network switchgear bus (both sides of
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 18 012
i ii 1
Busway or Cable Tray Network Transformer Network Protector Network Protector r Network Transformer
rather it makes grounding the primary cable a manual procedure. In this example, a two-unit network with 1000/1500 kVA dry transformers AA/FA, 80C rise are used. The transformers are congured delta-wye with 13.8 kV primary, a 480V wye secondary, and the impedance of each is within the range of 5.757.00%. Eaton Type CM52 Network Protectors are rated 1875A and are mounted within low voltage switchgear structures. The CM52 is a deadfront, drawout protector whose operation is very similar to the air power circuit breaker used throughout the switchgear to distribute power to the outgoing circuits. The network relay used within the CM52 is the MPCV type, a microprocessor-integrated solid-state relay that allows for eld programming the network characteristics. All CM52 protectors are factory wired for application of remote trip and lockout functions, which will be used in our example via the 86 lockout relay and separate 50/51 protective relay. The 50/51 relay will use 2000/5 ratio current transformer inputs from current transformers mounted on the load side of each protector within a transition box. The 50/51 device may be a solid-state relay, Digitrip 3000, due to its broad range of eld programmable settings. Thus, the protectors are used as main overcurrent protective devices as well as protectors. When transformers are remote from the switchgear, the current transformers must be located within a transition box atop the protectors. The current transformers may be used for metering also, or if more accurate metering at lower current levels is desired then a second set may be necessary in the switchgear with multi-ratios to match the average load demands. The low voltage assembly uses Eaton Magnum DS breakers for both Tie and Feeder devices. The Tie breaker will be an MDS-620, 2000A frame, 1600A trip, electrically operated, drawout design, incorporating the Digitrip 520 trip unit. The feeder breakers are a mix of 800A frame and 1600A frame to serve the outgoing feeder circuits. The switchgear will panel mount the two 50/51 relays, which provide overcurrent protection for the protectors. In this example, the fault currents are less than 65 kA; however, systems having higher fault currents can be accommodated using higher-rated Magnum DS breakers.
2 3
Aux. Sections
Low Voltage Drawout Switchgear FDRS Tie FDRS Sections

Aux.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 18.0-13. Example of Two-Unit Spot Network Coordination Issues
1000/1500 kVA Dry Transformer AA/FA #1 Primary Medium Voltage Devices #2 To Other Spot Networks Two Position Fusible Primary Switch 65E CLE Fuse
Figure 18.0-12. Floor Plan for Double-Ended Network Substation
1875A CMD Non-Fused Protector 50/51 2000A Tie NC Typical DS or DSL Feeders 50/51
8. Network Device Coordination

By way of example, we shall illustrate the level of coordination possible in a typical two-unit network system as shown in Figure 18.0-13. In this example, two networkable primary sources are available and several transformers are presumed to be fed from each of the two primary circuits. The upstream primary device is a 13.8 kV vacuum circuit breaker with a complement of relaying.
The medium voltage switches are fused air type. The switches have two positions, open and closed, not three positions. We recommend that the primary switches use key interlocks with protectors to ensure that the protectors are used to break and make load currents, although this interlocking is not absolutely necessary since the switches are loadbreak rated. The lack of a ground position in the primary switches does not impede the normal operation of the network system;
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 013

18.0-13
General DiscussionCoordination Curves

The protective device settings for a two-unit spot network are similar to those used for a standard doubleended substation. The goal is to serve both continuity of service and protection equally. Settings should not favor either one or the other, but rather should keep loads served if at all possible and minimize nuisance outages even under serve fault conditions, including ground fault events. Basically, settings should be implemented which allow the closest upstream device near a fault to clear before other upstream devices trip. Faults in a network have more than one source, which is a major difference compared to double-ended substations with a normally open Tie breaker. In Figure 18.0-14, we plot the timecurrent curves of the medium voltage power fuses, whose main function is to provide short circuit protection to each transformer, the ANSI damage curve typical for the transformers, the 50/51 relaying upstream from each spot network, the Tie and Feeder device trip curves, and the 50/51 relaying used by each protector. We have shown the primary 50/51 protective relaying curves by postulating their relative position as being to the right of each damage curve and to the left of primary cable damage curves, since several transformers are served by each primary service. In other words, several vault locations exist in the facility. Obviously, these primary relays cannot protect each transformer individually, nor is it desirable to do so since it is better to isolate a simple faulted transformer with a power fuse than to open the entire primary circuit. The following paragraphs detail the protective device settings, discuss the curves, and review the important issues.
Eaton CLE 65E Power Fuses

The selected current limiting fuse, 65E, provides little if any overload protection for the transformer, however, it does an acceptable job of supplying NEC code mandated short circuit protection for the 100% damage curve. The fuse cannot provide protection for the 58% curve and downsizing the selected rating lower than 65E is likely to result in nuisance fuse operation. Each power fuse vendor has applica-
tion tables and charts to properly select fuses for any application. The fuse meets the NEC stipulated protection, but lacks the exibility of a relay with nearly continuous adjustments. If superior protection is desired, then a vacuum breaker with 50/51 relaying should be used in lieu of the fused primary switch. Do not use 50/51 relaying on a load interrupter switch.
i ii 1 2 3
100
1000
10000
100000 1000
4 5
100
6 7 8
10
9
TIME
T3
T1
1.0
10 11 12
P T
MAG
0.1
13 14
3MAG
ANSI Transformer Damage Curves

Two curves are plotted: both the 100% and the 58% damage curves are shown for the dry types in our example. These curves are dened in ANSI Standard 141. The 58% curve reects the fact that a one per unit secondary fault on a grounded wye transformer creates a 0.58 per unit fault in the primary conductors when the primary windings have a delta conguration.
0.01
15
CURRENT (Amperes)
Legend:
16 17 18 19 20 21
R T3 T1 F P T B
Primary 50/51 RelayingTypical for These Transformers 100% ANSI Damage/Withstand Curve for Transformer 58% ANSI Damage/Withstand Curve Power Fuse 65E Rating Network Protector Relay 50/51(Both LTD = 40 Seconds and 6 Seconds Shown) Tie Breaker 1600AT MAG = 1 TX INRUSH Feeder Breaker 800AT 3MAG = 3 TX INRUSH
Figure 18.0-14. Two-Transformer Spot Network Phase Overcurrent
CA08104001E

Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations Protector RelayingEaton Digitrip 3000 Plus Ground Fault Relay (GFR)
Network relays do not have any form of forward 50/51 (instantaneous and time overcurrent) protection, therefore if it is desired it must be added separately. An 86 lockout relay is recommended for positive lockout indication and reset operations. The curve for the Digitrip 3000 is shown in Figure 18.0-14 and depicts the settings for this microprocessor-based solidstate multi-phase relay. Using the 2000/5 ratio current transformers, the settings are as follows: Long Time Pickup (LTPU) Long Time Delay I2t (LTD) Short Time Pickup (STPU) Short Time Delay (STD) Instantaneous (INST) Ground Fault Relay (GFR) Ground Fault Relay (GFR) = 1.0 (2000A) = 40 seconds = 3 X (6000A) = 0.3 seconds = 11 X (22000A) = 700A pickup = 0.58 seconds (35 cycles)
September 2011
Sheet 18 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Tie BreakerEaton MDS 2000A with Digitrip LS Plus Ground Fault Relay
The settings shown in Figure 18.0-14 were developed using 2000/5 sensors on the Tie breaker. The settings recommended are: Long Time Pickup (LTPU) Long Time Delay I2t (LTD) Short Time Pickup (STPU) Short Time Delay (STD) Instantaneous (INST) Ground Fault Relay (GFR) Ground Fault Relay (GFR) = 0.8 (1600A) = 2 seconds = 3 X (4800A) = 0.2 seconds = Not used = 700A pickup = 0.58 seconds (35 cycles) See Figure 18.0-15
Typical FeederEaton MDS 800A with Digitrip LSIG

The settings in Figure 18.0-14 were generated using 800/5 sensors applied on the feeder breakers. The Digitrip 520 trip unit settings are: Long Time Pickup (LTPU) Long Time Delay (LTD) Short Time Pickup (STPU) Short Time Delay (STD) Instantaneous (INST) Ground Fault Pickup (GFPU) Ground Fault Delay (GFD) = 1.0 (800A) = 2 seconds = Not used = Not used = 2 X (1600A) = F (500A) = 0.3 seconds (18 cycles) See Figure 18.0-15
It is very important that the protector 50/51 settings be slower than the Tie breaker. The faster acting Tie is desired for isolation of switchgear faults between one side of the Tie and the loadside of a protector without taking the whole network down. The Tie clears one transformers fault contribution, while the unfaulted side remains energized. The protector experiencing the remaining fault current will subsequently trip open, thereby isolating one-half of the network bus for repair. Faults located in the transformer secondary windings may open both the Tie and the protector, depending upon the magnitude of the event. The protector should open rst upon reverse power, since protectors respond to reverse power in 7 cycles. If the Tie also trips open, the Tie can be reclosed to serve the entire load again after locking out the protector on the faulted transformer.
Note: The transformer is given superior overload protection by the Digitrip 3000 compared to the level of protection given by the power fuse. This is especially true even in the overload region of the ANSI damage curve.
These settings allow the Tie to act quickly for abnormal current conditions, yet also provide enough delay to allow protectors to trip on reverse current when protector operation is the prudent rst course of action. Also, larger feeder devices, such as 1200A breakers (not shown in Figure 18.0-14) will easily t to the left and beneath the Tie curve. It is important to set the Tie to operate quicker than the protector 50/51 relaying. The faster Tie settings assure that switchgear bus faults do not take the entire service down (only half). In our example, the Tie will only be called upon to interrupt the fault current from one transformer.
These settings provide for fast action of feeder devices experiencing the maximum fault duty of the switchgear (fault current from two transformers). Ground fault protection is recommended for the feeder trip units; these settings can be coordinated with the two-stage ground fault detection system (single point ground return method) mentioned earlier in Figure 18.0-8. Suggested ground fault protective device settings are illustrated in Figure 18.0-15, and the settings are listed under the protector, Tie breaker, and feeder device discussion in this section.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 015

18.0-15
Ground fault settings are established essentially the same as a double-ended substation using a single tee ground point and ground return methodology. Eatons MDS feeder breakers are set to coordinate with downstream devices so that downstream breakers experiencing a fault trip rst. The GFR relays for the Tie and protectors are set slightly higher in pickup and have a longer delay than the ground fault for the feeder devices. Protector and Tie ground fault settings are usually set at the same levels; coordination is achieved by interlocking the two stages so that the Tie stage operates rst followed by the protector stage. Ground current originating from faults in the switchgear buswork or incoming conductors is directly measured by the GFR on the Tie, then by one of the protectors after the Tie opens. Subsequently, the GFR on the faulted zone causes the protector experiencing the fault to trip open thereby isolating the fault completely. Downstream ground faults are cleared by downstream circuit breakers or the DS feeder breaker serving the faulted circuit.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Figure 18.0-15. Spot Network Ground Fault Protection
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
18.0-16 Spot Network Equipment Network Protector Equipment

Liquid-Type Network Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 18 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5

The primary switch is interlocked with the associated network protector and secondary transformer windings to ensure that the switch is only used to break or make magnetizing current. Liquid network transformers have a special low voltage ange for eld mounting a network protector on the secondary ange. The protector is best mounted close to the secondary windings of the associated transformer to minimize distance between the windings and the protector contacts. There are only two standard ANSI ange congurations, smaller and larger, and the user generally gets one based upon the transformer kVA size. It is possible to chose one over the other, but the specier must be careful in the selection and make certain adequate load growth and redundancy are built into the system when choosing a small ange size for a transformer that normally is supplied with a large ange for a higher ampacity protector. If the specier stays with the Eaton recommendations for sizing protectors, the ange size is properly chosen for every unit. Liquid transformers are available with an array of accessories, most of which are listed on the next page with the outline drawings of a typical liquid network transformer. Alarm contacts are usually wired to terminal boxes for use on alarm schemes or monitoring. Certain accessories allow for the sampling of uids at regular maintenance intervals for testing and analysis.
BioTemp Advantages
BIOTEMP is a natural ester uid made from renewable and biodegradable vegetable-based oil. Below are some of the environmental, re safety and operational advantages of using BIOTEMP.
Environmental Advantages
Even though secondary containment is still required, BIOTEMP spills can be disposed through normal means and not treated as hazardous or toxic waste BIOTEMP minimizes air pollution by producing only carbon dioxide and water during combustion BIOTEMP also offers the potential for relief from government regulatory penalties, resulting in less costly spill cleanups
Typical Liquid Network Transformer
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Network transformers are available with liquid immersed core and coil assemblies, and use the liquid as the principal insulation means for primary and secondary windings. The uid can be mineral oil, silicon or a biodegradable form of vegetable oil. Indoor applications benet from using silicon or the biodegradable vegetable oil liquid dielectric. See the discussion below for ABBs BioTemp uid. The transformers are built to ANSI C57.12.40 standards and have an integral primary non-loadbreak threeposition switch having connected, open and grounded positions. The grounded position grounds the incoming medium voltage feeder that serves the transformer, and does not ground the primary windings.
Fire Safety Advantages

BIOTEMP offers greater risk mitigation on collateral damage from transformer explosion and re, potentially lowering insurance premiums Active re suppression and barrier walls can essentially be eliminated with BIOTEMP when minimal spacing is maintained BIOTEMP can alternatively be used safely indoors and in tighter spaces outdoors typically without additional re safety requirements BIOTEMP is listed as a less ammable dielectric uid by Factory Mutual (FM Global) and is classied as a less hazardous dielectric medium in respect to re hazard by Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
Table 18.0-2. Typical Properties of Insulating Fluids

Description BIOTEMP 45 10 45 300 330 360 0.47 15 to 25 0.91 <0.5 97.0 Mineral Oil 30 3 12 76 145 160 0.43 7.55 x 104 40 0.91 0.5 25.2 H.T.H. 40 11.5 110 2200 285 308 0.45 7.30 x 104 24 0.87 0.52.0 27.1 Silicone 43 16 38 90 300 330 0.36 1.04 x 103 55 0.96 <0.5 0.0
Electrical
Dielectric strength, kV (ASTM D877)
Operational Advantages
BIOTEMP impregnated paper experiences a much lower aging rate compared to mineral oil impregnated paper, leading to an increase in the insulation system lifetime (grid reliability) BIOTEMP impregnated paper can alternatively operate at a higher hotspot temperature and attain the same life expectancy as mineral oil impregnated paper, increasing the transformer peak load or overload capacity (energy efciency)
Physical
Viscosity, cST. (ASTM D445) Flash pt. C 100C 40C 0C (ASTM D92) (ASTM D92)
17 18 19 20 21
Fire pt. C
Specic heat (cal/gr/C) (ASTM D2766) Pour pt. C Sp. gravity Color (ASTM D97) (ASTM D1298) (ASTM D1500)
Coefcient of expansion, /C (ASTM D1903) 6.88 x 104
Environmental
Biodegradation Rate (%) 21day CECL33
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 017
Spot Network Equipment Network Protector Equipment

18.0-17
Sealed TankBraced for 15 PSI (103 KPA)Color Network Black. Base-Bar Type0.75 (19.0) x 1.50 (38.0). Jacking Areas4 Total. Lifting Hook for Lifting Complete Transformer. Welded Cover with Gasket and Lifting Loops for Lifting Cover Only. 1.00 (25.4) Filling and Upper Filter Connection. Bolted Manhole12.50 (318.0) x 12.50 (318.0) Opening with Cortite Gasket. Relief DeviceOver a 7.00 (178.0) Handhole. Cap with 2.00 (51.0) Square Head for Access to De-energized Tap Changer (with Key Interlock, Coordinated with HV Switch). Item . LV ThroatPer ANSI C57.12.40 Figure 3. LV Bushing3 Total. XO Bushing Style 8D11227G02Spade 1.75 (44.0) NEMA Drilled. 3.75 (95.0) Wide x 0.5 (13.0) Thick Spade. 1.00 (25.4) Drain Valve with Bronze Pipe Plug. Ground Pads2-Hole NEMA Drilling02 Total. Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge with Alarm Contacts. 80.50 (2044.7) Vacuum Pressure Gauge with Alarm Contact and Air Test Valve. Overall & Shipping Length Liquid Temperature Gauge with Alarm Contacts. 35.50 Rapid Pressure Rise Relay. (901.7) Control Cabinetwith Undrilled Entrance Plate. 21.40 Bolted Manhole12.50 (318.0) x 12.50 (318.0) Opening (543.6) with Cortite Gasket. H.V. 3-Position Magnetic Break Disconnect and Grounding Switch Operating Mechanism with Provisions for Padlocking, with X0 Key Interlock. Locked in Open or Ground Positions, Coordinated 27.90 with Tap Changer. Item and Second Key Interlock. Locked in (708.7) Closed Position and Coordinated with Low Voltage Protector. 22.00 1.00 (25.4) Filling Coupling. (558.8) Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge. CL 46.90 X3 Switch PositionsTop to Bottom, Ground, Closed, Open. Tank (1191.3) Switch Cover with 0.50 (13.2) 3 Taps for Jack Screws (Bolted on). X2 Overall & Terminal Chamber Cover with 0.50 (13.2) 3 Taps for Jack X1 Shipping Screws (Bolted on). Length Nameplate and Warning Plate. H.V. Terminal Chamber. 1.00 (25.4) Drain Coupling. Plan View Terminal for #2 to 4/0 Cable Range3 Total. 2.50 Entrance 3 G & W Stuffing Boxes. Catalog Number RS33-G1, 4.50 (114.0) CL to CL. (63.5) 0.50 (13.2) Air Test Fitting with Bronze Pipe Plug. 0.50 (13.2) Top Liquid Sampler with Bronze Pipe Plug. 0.25 (6.0) Fluid Level Plug. Interlock Bushing. 36.30 (922.0) 25.30 To Switch Entrance) (642.6) XO 4.10 (104.1)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
75.4 (1915.2) Shipping Height
67.00 (1701.8) Over Tank 62.00 (1574.8) To XO
16.60 (421.6) 47.40 (1204.0) Over Switch Entrance
25.40 (645.2) To Cab
42.00 (1066.8) Centerline LV Throat
17 18 19 20 21
1.50 (38.1)
14.80 (375.9) 29.60 (751.8) Side View
3.90 (99.1)
23.70 (602.0)
23.70 (602.0)
53.40 (1356.4) Base Length Front View
Figure 18.0-16. Outline Drawing750 kVA, 55/65C Rise, 13,750 Delta to 480Y/277 Volts

Dry-Type Network Transformers
September 2011
Sheet 18 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Eaton can also supply close-coupled primary switchgear with a two-breaker (VCPW) transfer capability on the primary of cast coil dry-type network units. The proximity of vacuum breakers will mandate using RC snubbers within the transformer. Dry-type network transformers have a special low voltage ange for eld mounting a network protector on the secondary ange. The protector is best mounted close to the secondary windings of the associated transformer to minimize distance between the windings and the protector contacts. There are only two standard ANSI ange congurations, smaller and larger, and the user generally gets one based upon the transformer kVA size. It is possible to chose one over the other, but the specier must be careful in the selection and make certain adequate load growth and redundancy are built into the system when choosing a small ange size for a transformer that normally is supplied with a large ange for a higher ampacity protector. If the specier stays with the Eaton recommendations for sizing protectors, the ange size is properly chosen for every unit. Dry-type transformers can be closecoupled to LV drawout switchgear with protectors, tie and feeder devices all switchgear mounted. Dry-type network transformers are available with an array of features, most of which are listed on the next page with the outline drawings of a typical dry network transformer. A transformer monitoring package is usually included with temperature readings, RTDs and Alarm contacts. Most designs have knock-down enclosures for ease in rigging a unit into position through hallways and doorways.
Typical Dry-Type Network Transformer
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Network transformers are available with dry-type core and coil assemblies, and use special polyester resin or cast epoxy as the principal insulation means for primary and secondary windings. The choice depends upon the economics of the project. Indoor applications benet from using drytype networks since no containment or sampling of liquid dielectric is needed. Eaton strongly recommends 80C rise cast coil transformers for use in spot network systems.
The transformers are built to ANSI C57.12.57 standards and do not have an integral primary switch, unless a two-position switch is added in the eld. The process of grounding the incoming medium voltage feeder that serves the transformer becomes a manual process of adding grounding cables. The two-position primary switch is usually loadbreak rated and is not interlocked with the associated network protector and secondary transformer windings.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 019

18.0-19
Characteristics
Total of Two Jack Screws 0.5013 UN 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) Ventilated Surface Front and Back
TEMPERATURE MONITOR OR CUTOUT PROVIDED
3.38 (85.7) 77.00 (1955.8) 1.25 (31.8)
5.44 (138.1)
NAMEPLATE
1.50 (38.1)
8.38 (212.9)
108.00 (2743.2) Front View 12.00 (304.8) 9.00 (228.6)
X0
12.88 (327.0) 9.50 (241.3)
C L 32.88 (835.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 27.13 (689.0) 66.00 (1676.4) LV End View 5.00 (127.0) 33.00 (838.2) 9.00 (228.6)
X1 X2 X3
5.00 (127.0) 67.63 (1717.7)
Enclosure: NEMA 2 (indoor ventilated with drip-proof roof) Finish: ANSI 61 Product type: Cast/Cast kVA: 1000/1500 HV: 13,200 HV kV BIL: 95 LV: 480Y/277 LV kV BIL: 10 Taps: 12,540/12,870/13,200/ 13,530/13,860 Impedance: 5% Temperature rise: 80C Cooling class: AA/FA Hertz: 60 Phases: 3 LV windings: Cu HV windings: Cu Sound level: 64 dB Approximate weight: 10,200/4627 lbs/kg Provisions for mounting network protector on the left end Primary is cable connected to closed coupled primary switchgear, such as MVS
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0.56 x 1.06 (14.2 x 20.6) Slots 9.00 (228.6)
Accessories

1.50 (38.1) 0.56 x 1.06 (14.33 x 27.0) Rects 1.88 (47.6) 30.00 (762.0)
Braced for seismic ANSI 61 LV end sheets Standard ventilation Aluminum screens Copper ground bus (0.25 x 2.00) Neutral disconnect link UL listing Control panel Control power supplied by ABB Forced cooling
3.00 (76.2)
90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4)
16 17 18 19
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2) 1.13 (28.6)

H1 H2 H3
8.88 (225.4) 51.00 (1295.4)
17.13 (435.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
HV End View
20 21
Figure 18.0-17. Outline Drawing1000/1500 kVA Cast Coil Network Transformer, 80C/100C Rise, 13,800 Delta to 480Y/277 Vac Wye

Type CM52 Network Protectors
September 2011
Sheet 18 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
CM52 Drawout
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Typical Enclosed CM52 Network Protector
Network Protector Ratings

Several network protector models currently exist to satisfy all location requirements. The new CM52 design covers all of these ratings, giving you one type of protector to handle all installation needs. The styles available include internal or external fuse mountings and submersible or NEMA 4 enclosures throughout the current and voltage ratings. Having parts and accessories common through all protector ratings means lower maintenance and inventory costs. The CM52 was also designed with higher interrupting and fault close ratings than older protector models. This higher rating allows for safer installations and better protection on a network system. Table 18.0-3. CM52 Ratings TableRatings through 480 Volts Wye
Continuous Current Rating 800 1200 1600/1875 2000 2500/2825 3000 3500 4500 Interrupting Rating Close and Latch Rating 35 35 35 35 45 45 65 65 Suggested Transformer Rating (kVA) 216V 225 300 500 600 750 1000 1000 1000 480V 500 750 1000 1000 1500 2000 2000 2000
Quality Designed to be Smarter, Safer and Streamlined

The CM52 Network Protector provides the highest level of reliability and service continuity available today. An intelligent protective device, the CM52 Network Protector is designed to handle ratings from 800 to 4500A, 216 to 600V. This new network protector features an electrically operated, composite case, spring closed air network circuit breaker controlled by the MPCV network relay. The CM52 meets or exceeds the standards in IEEE C57.12.44. This ensures a product with the highest performance standard applicable to a network protector. A rst for network protectors, the CM52 is setting a new standard by being UL-qualied. This third party approval certies the delivery of a quality product. A UL-qualied network protector means easier code approval for quicker system start-up and less approval time and costs in a non-utility environment. UL listed and labeled CM52 protectors are presently available through 4500A. Contact Eaton and the protector product line for more details on UL listed and labeled CM52 network protectors.
42 42 42 42 65 65 85 85
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 021

18.0-21
CM52 Secondary Contacts
Protector downtime is both frustrating and costly. No mechanism adjustments, few replacement parts, colorcoded wiring, diagnostics, and a protected motor are key contributors to the high-level service reliability and reduced downtime of the CM52 Network Protector.
The CM52 is a low maintenance network protector. It requires no mechanism adjustments, is easier to troubleshoot and has built-in diagnostics. Maintenance time is no longer needed for the adjustment of protector contacts. Troubleshooting is much easier with the CM52 through color-coded wiring and a front accessible test block. Diagnostics are built into the Indicating Diagnostic Module. The IDM replaces the traditional manual adjustment of the min. motor pick-up adjustable resistor and offers diagnostic indicators for available control voltage for the motor, spring release and trip circuit. With the new CM52, maintenance becomes easier and protector downtime decreases, saving money and increasing reliability. Much more manageable at less than half the weight of older network protectors, the protector is easier to handle, resulting in less time in vaults, and lower labor costs. A four-position, drawout, deadfront circuit breaker makes testing quick and safe, curbing maintenance time and costs. The deadfront provides worker safety, drastically reducing the possibility of live electricity accidents during inspection. A front accessible 6-point test block provides safe and easy connection of test equipment during testing, phasing and troubleshooting. Quality was the focus through the design to the manufacturing of the new CM52 Network Protector. The circuit breaker in the CM52 goes through a 100-point testing procedure in an ISO 9000 breaker specialty plant. The quality design and testing of the CM52 virtually eliminates the need for later adjustments and insures a reliable product.
The Intelligence of the ProtectorMPCV Relay

Within the CM52 lies its intelligence, the MPCV Network Relay. The programmable MPCV Network Relay brings the proven performance of microprocessor-based technology to the CM52 Network Protector. This programmable relay offers multiple selections to meet the requirements of each network protector installation. With the MPCV, you can select between the traditional straight-line master close curve and modied circular close curve. Our enhanced sequence-based algorithm provides exceptional performance and stability over a wide range of temperatures and voltages in comparison with a power-based algorithm. Additionally, the antipumping feature on the MPCV relay protects the motor under damaging system conditions.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Communications
The MPCV relay has built in communication capabilities for monitoring and control of the network protector. This allows users to access and display information from the relay including voltage, current, energy usage, power quality, and last trip details. Control of the protector is possible from a remote location, providing safer conditions and quicker response time. The relay can also communicate other information about the network protectors environment through standard auxiliary inputs. Information such as water or pressure loss inside the network housing, or erratic internal enclosure temperature will send an alert notifying of problems in the vault. The relay has the capability of communicating information to a Data Concentrator/Translator (DC/T) over a shielded twisted pair of communications wires. Information is obtained through a utilitys SCADA protocol and/or Eatons PowerNet software program.
CM52 IDM
CA08104001E

Type CM52Features, Functions and Benets
September 2011
Sheet 18 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Features, Functions and Benets

1. Standardized Breaker Frames: Only three basic breaker frames of minimal physical size are used throughout the CM52 to provide different electrical ratings. Table 18.0-4. CM52 Sizes
Ampere Rating 8002000 22503000 35004500 Breaker SizeInches (mm) Width 17.00 (431.8) 22.00 (558.8) 35.00 (889.0) Height 17.00 (431.8) Depth 17.00 (431.8)
Table 18.0-6. CM52 Ratings Comparison TableRating Tested at 600 Volts

Continuous Breaker Current Rating Element (Amperes) Width Inches (mm) 800 1200 1600/1875 2000 2500/2825 3000 3500 4500
CM52 Interrupting Rating (kA) 42 42 42 42 65 65 85 85 Close & Latch Rating (kA) 35 35 35 35 45 45 65 65
IEEE/ANSI Interrupting Rating (kA) 30 30 30 35 60 60 60 60 Close & Latch Rating (kA) 25 25 25 35 40 40 40 40
17.00 (431.8) 17.00 (431.8) 17.00 (431.8) 17.00 (431.8) 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8) 35.00 (889.0) 35.00 (889.0)
Close & Latch ratings apply only to spring close and stored energy mechanisms.
6. Four Breaker Element Drawout Positions: a. ConnectedFully connected to primary and secondary connections. The door may be open or closed in this position. b. TestPrimary clusters are disconnected, secondary wiring disconnects are made. Testing can be performed on the unit at this point without disturbing the power connections. The door may also be opened or closed in this position. c. DisconnectedPrimary clusters are disconnected, secondary disconnects are open. The door must be open in this position. d. Removable positionBreaker element can be removed from its rails. The door must be open with the breaker element in this position. 7. Standardized Modular Components: The motor, shunt trip, spring release coil, arc chutes, IDM, auxiliary switches and multi-ratio CTs are easily removable, and main components are standard across different ratings. This allows reduced part inventories and reduced training for shop and eld crews.
2. Light Weight Breaker Element: A reduced breaker physical size also results in a substantial weight reduction compared to existing Network Protector designs. Table 18.0-5. CM52 Weights
Ampere Rating Weight in Lbs (kg) CM52 Breaker Element 170 (77) 185 (84) 350 (159) Comparable Breaker 400 (182) 550650 (250295) 7001300 (318590)
8. Low Maintenance: The breaker has no adjustments required over the life of the unit and fewer replacement parts than traditional units. A built-in wear gauge shows the acceptable limit of contact wear, making the breaker condition easier to identify for service periods.
8002000 22503000 35004500
3. 10 kV BIL (Basic Impulse Level): Impulse testing is the application of a high surge voltage on equipment to simulate possible surges caused by lightning. Although not dened or required by IEEE/ANSI C57.12.44, this test provides an additional measure of safety and performance to the design. (The test was performed at 1.2us x 50 us wave shape on a 3 x 3 grid.) 4. Deadfront Drawout Breaker: Protects the user from accessing live circuits. Eaton offers the only deadfront drawout breaker designs in the Network Protector industry. 5. Improved Interrupting and Fault Close (Close & Latch) Ratings: Improved interrupting and fault close ratings ensure that the network protector will withstand fault conditions and continue to protect their associated transformer.
Easy Inspection
9. Sealed Motor Gear Box: Charges closing spring in less than 1-1/2 seconds. 10. Indicating Diagnostic Module (IDM): Replaces the traditional Motor Close Relay and adjustable resistor, and offers diagnostic indicators on available control voltage for the motor, spring release and trip actuator. 11. Front-Mounted Test Points: Easy access test points located on the front of the unit make for quick test cable connections and avoid requiring the operator to reach into live voltage area.
Convenient Accessories
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 023

Type CM52Options and Standards and Certications
16. Improved Submersible Enclosure Design: Customer-Specied Internal or External Fuse Mounting and revised Hinging and Opening hardware for easier door opening and closing. The door has greater than 90 opening capability.
18.0-23
Remote Racking System

The CM52 network protector is also available with an integral remote racking system. The system remotely racks the breaker off the energized bus work while the door is still closed to the test position either through an external pendant or through communications.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Options
Arc Flash
Test Block Access Cover
Remote Racking System

Meets or exceeds the standards in IEEE C57.12.44 The CM52 network protector is UL labeled and approved in the NEMA housing at all ratings
7 8 9 10 11
Test Block with Cover Removed
Seismic Qualication
12. Universal Wired Breaker: Breakers are wired all the same regardless of system voltage. Breakers can be interchanged between 216V grids and 480V spots without modications. Multi-Tap settings for current transformers make changing amperes easy for maximum exibility and inventory reduction. 13. Retrot Adapter Frames and Bus Adapters: Allows replacing of most older GE and Westinghouse breakers in existing enclosures. 14. Color Coded Teon Wire: Red = Close Circuit Green = Open Circuit White = All Other Yellow = Normally Open Blue = Normally Closed Black = Common 15. Sixty (60) Point Secondary Contact: Allows quick wiring for additional contacts, relays and other devices in the breaker element. Connections are automatic for breaker racking in and out.
VaultGard Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Indicating Diagnostic Module
12
The CM52 network protector is available with the NPARMs module (Arcash Reduction Maintenance System). This device is internal to the network protector and can be remotely activated usually through a switch mounted at the vault entrance or through communications. This will enable the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System device on all CM52s in a spot network. Once activated, the NPARMs places the protectors in a sensitive mode, sensing both forward and reverse current directions. This device will actuate in 34 ms and call for all CM52 breakers to trip if a fault is sensed on an adjacent network protector or collector bus. It has been shown that this device limits the total incident energy to less than 8 cal/cm2.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

NPL Fuse
September 2011
Sheet 18 024
ii 1 2 3 4
Scale x 10 = Seconds
1000 900 800 700 600 500
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
6 7 8 9 10
20
30
40 50 60
400
300
200
4 5
100 90 80 70 60
50 40
30 20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
NPL Fuse
Eatons NPL fuse has been designed as a nonexpulsion, silver-sand type fuse. It is exclusively for use on the CM52 network protector. Each end terminal is fabricated from high conductivity, impact extruded copper. High quality NEMA Grade G5 convolutely wound glass melamine tubing is permanently sealed to the terminal with RTV Silastic to eliminate possible sand leakage or moisture entry. The terminals and tube are secured together with stainless steel, high strength, spirally wound pins. All fuses are tested on an ultra-low resistance measuring instrument capable of resolving onehundredth of a micro-ohm and evaluated on the basis of statistical probability techniques to ensure uniformity. Characteristics of the NPL fuse have been especially tailored for coordination with the transformer safe-heating curve and in consideration of the protector interrupting rating. This specially designed characteristic curve is less inverse than the ordinary melting characteristic of a silver-sand fuse. The curve is a function of the design of the unique, silver element used in its make-up. The NPL fuse does not become currentlimiting within the interrupting rating of the protector. The fuses have been successfully tested in its epoxy enclosure at a three-phase fault condition of 150,000A at 600V. The NPL fuse is not ampacity rated, and does not provide overcurrent protection per NEC Article 240. Fusing a protector is necessary for three- and four-spot network transformer spot networks.
1 .9 .8 .7 .6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1
6 7 8 9 10
20
30
40 50 60
Scale x 1000 = Current in Amperes
Figure 18.0-18. Average Melting Curve of NPL Fuse Table 18.0-7. CM52 Protector Limiter Selection
Protector Current Rating (A) 800 1200 16001875 2000 25002825 3000 3500 4000 4500

Limiter/Fuse Style Number 140D318G04 140D318G05 140D318G01 140D318G07 140D318G02 140D318G06 140D318G08 5980C01G03 KRPC6000
Curve Number 1 2 3 4 5

These are the recommended limiters for use on three and four transformer spot network systems. The limiters are optional on two transformer systems. Consult Eaton for DSL fuse curve and Bussmann for KRPC fuse curved.
CA08104001E
6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000
70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
600 700 800 900 1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
.01
6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000

1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02 .01
600 700 800 900 1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
70 80 90 100
200
300
400
500
NPL Fuse
September 2011
Sheet 18 025

Type MPCV Network Protector Relay
18.0-25
Description
The microprocessor controlled network relays were designed to replace the Type CN-33 electromechanical master relay, the Type CNJ electromechanical phasing relay and the Type BN electromechanical desensitizing relay. The MPCV series relays use the same voltage and current inputs as do the electromechanical equivalent. They |also continually monitor voltage across an open breaker and current through a closed breaker, and perform the following functions. The trip contact will close upon balanced fault conditions if the positive sequence power ow is out of the network The close contact will close if the ensuing positive sequence power will be into the network The trip contact will close upon the ow of reverse magnetizing current of its associated transformer
Warning
The MPCV relays are designed to be used on network protectors which have been wired for 216Y/125V or 480Y/277V service using relay potential transformers. This relay is designed to operate at 125V (line to ground). Do not attempt to apply this relay on any other system voltage or conguration.
Trip Function
Figure 18.0-19 diagrams the currentinduced trip characteristics. The positive sequence current I1 is multiplied by the cosine of the angle of its phasor related to V1N. If the resulting sign is negative, then reverse powerow is indicated. The trip level (11COS) for this can be adjusted from 0.05 to 5 percent of rated current. The cosine multiplication operation results in the straight line which is perpendicular to the phasor.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The MPCV series relay will mount on standard CM52 and existing CMD and CM-22 network protectors utilizing the present system of low voltage relay mounting studs.
MPCV Network Relay Exclusive Features

The MPCV relay is the only sequencedbased network relay in the market. The MPCV relay calculates the fundamental frequency positive sequence voltage and current phasors to account mathematically for any power system voltage unbalances. Essentially, the MPCV relay extracts the fundamental components of the sampled voltage and current signals using discrete Fourier Transform, then the positive sequence components are then calculated. The positive sequence current phasors for each phase are compared with the reverse trip setting (RT in the setting menu) and a determination to trip is made within the relay. The sampling rate is 32 samples per power line cycle, and the algorithm requires two successive line cycles of data to initiate a trip where the positive sequence currents experienced by the MPCV relay exceed the RT settings. The MPCV has the following exclusive features: Gull-Wing Trip to address high X/R Network Transformers Anti-pump algorithm Protective remote close
MPCV Relay (Front View) for CM52 Protectors
Failure to follow these instructions could result in severe personal injury, death, and/or product or property damage.
11
Figure 18.0-19. Trip Characteristics In a different fault condition, the negative sequence network voltage V2N will exceed 0.06 P.U., in which case the trip curve is rotated 60 clockwise direction to the alternate trip curve shown, with the same trip level as set before (0.05 to 5 percent). In either case, the trip is called for after 50 mS, or three line cycles, in a 60 Hz system, of a fault condition. The BN function can be initialized to modify the characteristics and timing of the reverse-current trip conditions. This adds to the basic detection requirements that the true rms value of the reverse current exceeds some settable threshold between 50% and 250% of the protector CT rating. When the magnitude of the reverse current is less than the settable threshold, a trip will occur if the condition exists for an adjustable time period of 0 to 5 minutes. The BN function is standard on all MPCV relays.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Functional Characteristics
All measurements in the relay are made as net voltages and currents, computed as the positive sequence voltage and current (represented as V1X or I1) and the negative sequence voltage and current (represented as V2X or I2). The network positive and negative voltages sequence are denoted V1N and V2N respectively. The other important voltage is the phasing voltage, which is the difference between the transformer and network voltages, whose sequence components are denoted V1P and V2P. The V1N is dened as the reference phasor for all phase measurements, and the nominal phase-to-neutral voltage (1 P.U.) is dened as 125 Vac rms. From this, the basic functional characteristics are graphically depicted in Figures 18.0-19 through 18.0-22.
CA08104001E

Type MPCV Network Protector Relay
September 2011
Sheet 18 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Special Trip Characteristic Gull-Wing Trip

For some applications, the straightline trip curve is not the optimum performance setting to use. If the transformers have high X/R ratios, then the straight-line trip does not perform as well as the enhanced Gull-Wing trip characteristic, a feature that has been in the MPCV relay since 2003. Technically, the following circumstances benet from having the enhanced Gull-Wing trip feature: Under a three-phase fault with the X/R ratio higher than 11.4, the voltage to current angle is less than 95 degrees Double line-ground faults on the primary of a delta-wye transformer with blown protector fuse on one phase Single line-ground fault on the primary of grounded wye-grounded wye transformer with blown protector fuse on one phase
0 Non-Trip Region ITYP. Forward
VN
RT/Tan (5) 90 RT IHigh_Lag
5 Tilt 270
IBackfeed
Trip Region 180
Figure 18.0-20. Traditional Relay Trip Characteristic

0 Non-Trip Region ITYP. Forward
Close Characteristics
Figure 18.0-23 also diagrams the voltage regions for close, oat and trip operation when the protector is open. Under extreme conditions when the protector is open, a trip is called for to prevent a dangerous manual close operation. With the protector open and the network and transformer voltages normal and balanced, positive sequence phasing voltage (V1P) is measured. If V1P is in the close region, the relay makes its close contact. If V1P is not in the close region, but is less than 0.06 P.U., then the oat is called for, as this voltage difference is not deemed dangerous regardless of the phase relationships, and manual close of the protector would not exceed the breaker capacity. If V1P is greater than 0.06 P.U. and does not lie in the close region, then trip is called for to prevent manual closing. The relay also calls for trip under all rolled and crossed phase conditions, even when either the transformer side or the network side of the protector is de-energized. The close contact will close only in the quadrant dened by the two lines, termed master and phasing. The phasing line, emanating from 0, denes a minimum phase angle of the phasing voltage ahead of the network voltage for closing, which is selectable at +5, 5, 15 or 25. The master line sets a minimum difference between the transformer and network voltage, settable from 0.0008 to 0.02 P.U. at 0 (in phase). This line exhibits a slope of 7.5.
VN
Expanded 5 Gull-Wing Trip Region 90 RT IHigh_Lag
RT/Tan (5)
5 Tilt 270
IBackfeed
Trip Region 180
Figure 18.0-21. Enhanced Gull-Wing Trip Characteristic
Protective Remote Close (PRC) Feature

This feature helps address problems with very lightly loaded network protectors. If a protector is opened and the system is very lightly loaded, the users had to manually close the protector that had opened. The MPCV can be sent a PRC communications close command via any Eaton communication
option available. The PRC command is not an unqualied close, rather the MPCV relay relaxes its master line setting to 75 mV and the command closes the protector provided the phase voltage angle is in the widen close window. After closure, the MPCV relay automatically readjusts the master line setting back to the original master line setting congured in the relay.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 027

Communications Capabilities
18.0-27
0 Protective Remote Close (PRC) Straight Line Close Characteristic PL 25
Normal ML, PL Re-close Settings
i ii
PRC Close Region VP ML VPX PRC 90 VN ~75 mV 270 Temporary (10 sec) PRC Boundary
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 18.0-22. Circular Closing Curve

Note: If the phases are crossed on both the transformer and the network side, V2P could be very close to or equal to zero, but the trip contact will close as V1N is less than 0.1 P.U. and V1P is less than 0.8 P.U.
180
Figure 18.0-24. PRCStraight Line Close
0 Protective Remote Close (PRC) Circle Close Characteristic PL1 25
The other closing curve characteristic option available is the circular line closing curve which maintains the same value of phasing volts from the 25 to +90 quadrants (refer to Figure 18.0-22). The circular closing curve permits the network protector to close at lower loads while ensuring the watt ow is into the network. Any close conditions must exist for 500 ms before the close contact will close.
PL2 90
Nornal ML, PL1, PL2 Re-close Settings
7 8
PRC Close Region VP ML VPX PRC VN ~75 mV 270 Temporary (10 sec) PRC Boundary
9 10 11 12
180
Figure 18.0-25. PRCCircle Close exceeds 0.2 P.U., then the trip contact will close, indicating crossed phases on either the transformer side or the network side. each project and protector application represents different voltage and loading conditions, which can require adjustment of the default settings to other appropriate values. Experienced service technicians must be used when commissioning protectors, and proper tools such as protector test sets and programming pendants must be used to start up protectors and maintain the units. Relay settings can also be implemented via PowerNet software, which allows for the full use of the communication features of the MPCV network relay as described on the following pages. Non-Eaton communication protocols may be able to interface with a subnetwork of MPCV relays through a data concentrator and an independently written and supplied driver.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Settings
All settings can be altered through a digital programming pendant which plugs into the unit while mounted on the network protector breaker. When not in use, the pendant may be stored separate from any network protector location, most conveniently with the network protector test kit. While the pendant is plugged in, actual trip and close operations will be inhibited and the amber oat light will ash. The pendant has a display for the readout of the set points and a keyboard to set them.
Figure 18.0-23. Closing Characteristics Straight Closing If the network side is de-energized, and the transformer side is energized, the close contact will close, if V1N is less than 0.1 P.U., and V2N is less than 0.06 P.U., and V1P exceeds 0.8 P.U. Note that, as stated before, if V2P
CA08104001E
Factory default settings are programmed into each MPCV network relay, however,

MPCV Network Relay Communications
September 2011
Sheet 18 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Control and Monitoring Capabilities from MPCV Network Relays

Proven PowerNet and Power Xpert software, developed by Eaton, provides an operator with the capability to control network protectors from a personal computer while simultaneously monitoring power quality and operating conditions, providing this information in real time. PowerNet software is a user-friendly, Microsoft Windows-based program that allows the operator to point and click through the screens. Standard software screens are appropriate for most applications but can be customized to meet your individual requirements. Power Xpert is a Web-based information gathering system that uses only Ethernet browsers and IP addresses to display data. No custom or proprietary vendor software is required.
Monitoring
PowerNet and Power Xpert provides energy management, operations and equipment status information, and offers the operator these capabilities: Real-time information. The operator commands an inquiry to each MPCV Relay on the system which logs current, voltage, power (watts, vars and VA), energy, frequency, demand, power factor, and total harmonic distortion (THD). This information is displayed on a single screen Also displayed on this screen is network protector inside air temperature. Additionally, from the same screen, the operator can select to view the last trip waveform or review the MPCV Relay set points Data printout. Real-time information from all MPCV Relays on any one feeder can be printed out to provide a near instantaneous load ow of the entire feeder Internal environment of the network protector enclosure. Water inside the network housing and upper copper bus temperatures. Breaker status (open/closed) Vault environment. Transformer top oil temperature, water in the network vault, re alarm, and network enclosure pressure
Control
PowerNet provides multiple network protectors controlled from a remote location and allows the following capabilities: Close or trip the breaker relay contacts. If the operator chooses to have the breakers relay trip contact make, the breaker opening can be viewed on-screen and listed currents will go to zero. A designedin safety feature prevents the network protector from being closed while the MPCV Relay trip contact is made until the relay trip response is removed Relay set points. The operator can review or change the operational set points without using the hand-held controlling pendant. Password protected security helps prevent accidental or improper usage
Alarming
Eaton software provides the operator with these capabilities: Receive an alarm in real time. When an established parameter of a monitoring function is reached or exceeded, an alarm condition is displayed immediately on the PC screen, enabling the operator to: Identify the vault or feeder in question Determine what alarm has been triggered and at what location Power Xpert is a Web-based approach to communications without proprietary vendor software For more information, visit the URLs below: www.eaton.com/powerxpert www.eaton.com/pxm www.eaton.com/pxgx www.eaton.com/pxs www.eaton.com/pxr
Sample Set Point Screen
Sample Monitoring Screen
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 029

MPCV Network Relay Communications
18.0-29
Other Communication Protocols

Eaton has introduced two new communications options for the MPCV relay, those being the VaultGard, and the DNP MINT.
VaultGard
The server is simple to connect and requires no software, only Internet Explorer. The system displays real time voltage and current readings, PF, watts, temperature, open/close status, relay set points and MPCV relay control-remote open and block open, protective remote close (PRC). The device can log up to 32 MPCV relay data and provide MPCV reason code outputs.

DNP MINT Translator
i ii 1 2 3 4
VaultGard
This device server can display up to 32 MPCV relays on one screen. The protocol is Ethernet and/or DNP 3.0. Devices can be connected in various communication congurations, such as hardwired LAN or wireless, including short-range wireless from module (100m), cellular modem and hot spot zone connect ability.
No software needed!wireless Wi-Fi or hardware Ethernet connection Object trending Operations counter Wireless control and calibration color coded alarms E-mail notication (with cellular, hot spot or ethernet connection conguration) Automatically discovers connected MPCVs Reason code display No new relay to purchase 128 bit security Data logging DNP 3.0, up and down link DNP 3.0 RS-485 DNP 3.0 over Ethernet
DNP MINT Translator
The DNP MINT allows connection of up to 16 devices, including MPCV relays, DT810 and DT910 trip units, DT OPTIM, DT 520MC, DT1150, DT3000, DTMV, DT3200, DP-4000, DIM digital input module, and addressable relays. The output is DNP3.0 in RS-485. The DNP MINT can be congured either hardwired, ber optic, 900 MHz radio, or cellular.

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Up to 16 MPCVs or other devices can be connected to one module RS-485 uplink allows networking multiple DNP MINTs Toggle switch controlled conguration mode Class 0 polling and Class 1, 2, 3 events supported Direct operate or select and operate remote control Can be hardwired or wirelessly viewed Simple twisted pair to MPCVs can be run up to 10,000 feet
CA08104001E

Communications Congurations
September 2011
Sheet 18 030
i ii 1
Antenna
Serial DNP
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Communications Enclosure 120 Vac Power Supply 120 Vac12/48 Vdc Cellular DNP-RTM
Multiple MPCVs!
10 11 12 13 14
Figure 18.0-26. Conguration #1Cellular with DNP
Laptop
or
Pocket PC
PC
Twisted Pair INCOM Cable
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
MPCV Network Protector 1 MPCV Network Protector 2 MPCV Network Protector 3 MPCV Network Protector 4
Fiber or Wireless RF or Ethernet or Cellular
VaultGard
Figure 18.0-27. Conguration #2Wireless Sites/Digital Communication Links
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 031

CM52 Protector Schematic
18.0-31
50 TB-14 A-10 50 TB-15 A-11
51
i
Connector on Relay
TS AUX b
N1 N11
30A
N41
52b AUXb
ii 1
A-12 A-13 B-7 B-8
A-9
Network
A B C
30A
N2
A
N42
18
S
N3 N1 N2 N3 N13 A-1
M P C V
TB-28 B-27 B-26 B-25
30A
N43
S S A
N12
13
2
J1-4
TA (-)
A
A-14
J2-1 Common J2-2 Close Enabled J2-3 Motor OK J2-4 Coil OK J2-5 TA OK
X1
L1
TA
X2
125 Vac
IDM
J1-2
Motor Monitor
3 4 5
1C 2C
A-4
TS
11C
G1
52a
TR2
15
A-6 13C
3-CT
3C 0C
11 5
M P C V
X4 T3
L3
CLF
X5
T3C
B-11
Close Output
Trip Input
3- DO Power
T1
CPT
TR1 CL1
EL
TB-1 T3 T2 T1 B-3 B-2 B-1
30A
T1 T11 T41
MPCV Trip 1 7
Remote Trip TB-2 2 4
6
43 Close BF1
A
T42
T2
30A
17
M P C V
BF2
1 3 A-8
120 Vac
L1
CL5
7
LS1
CL9
Transformer Customer Auxiliary Breaker Contacts

52 a AUX a
D1a B-4 B-5
T3
30A
S S A
T43
12 LS1 BF1
M1
LS2
CL6
T13
G T12
A-15
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
52 b AUX b
D1b D1c
52 a
D2a B-29
52 b AUX b
D2c
52 a
D3a
52 b AUX b
D3c A-30 G1
TB-16
TB-17
TB-18
TB-19
TB-20
TB-21
TB-22
TB-23
TB-24
Notes: Legend:
BF-2 CL TS LS1 MOT IDM = Anti-Close/Lockout Relay = Close Coil/Spring Release = Test Switch = Motor 120 Vac = Network Relay = Indicating Diagnostic Module TA = Trip Actuator 43 = Ext. handle Switch 52a = BKR Aux(Open When Breaker Is Open) BF-1 = Close Relay EL = Electrical Interlock
1. Trip and Lockout Provisions: for remote trip, wire external N.O. contact to position 2 block and position 1 block. must not exceed 24 Vac/dc 1020 MA. Electrical interlock manufactured after September of 2003. See Note 2 N.C. Dry Contacts for Monitoring.
Figure 18.0-28. Typical Schematic DiagramCM52 Network Protector 480Y/277V
CA08104001E

Network Disconnect Cabinet
September 2011
Sheet 18 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Network Disconnect Cabinet
the disconnect, is always used to break and make load current. The mechanism is behind electrically interlocked cabinet doors, which when opened, trips open the protector. Common ratings are 8004000A, 600 Vac and below. The cabinet designs are NEMA 1 indoor only. The protector has a ange at the top which allows for the mounting of the disconnect at the top of each respective protector. In many cases, it is possible to locate current transformers within the network disconnect cabinet to provide for forward 50/51 protection (relays mounted remotely) on the network circuits. These relays serve to monitor the circuit and trip the network protector when faults occur within the power circuit feeding the downstream spot network switchgear. In some cases, it is possible to locate the protector fuses within the cabinet.
Eaton designs, manufactures and tests the non-loadbreak disconnects at the same factory that makes the network protectors, and the plant is ISO 9000 certied. Product electrical and dimensional coordination is ensured between the protectors and network disconnects with Eaton. Due to the mounting location, the network disconnects are seated at high distances from the oor and sufcient vertical space must exist in the electrical room to accommodate the non-loadbreak product. The load conductor cables or busway are connected at the top of each network disconnect. The drawings detailed on this page depict a busway ange and connection. When busway is used, only two ange orientations are preferred and those align the busway phase conductors with the A, B, C left to right orientation of the protector phase conductors.
Typical Network Disconnect Neutral Connection Visible
Pow-R-Way Busway (Flange Gasket Supplied by Busway) See Busway Drawing Four Lifting/ Drop Brackets Welded to Each Corner of Main Module Hinged Exterior Doors Cover Latch Padlock Provision on Hinged Exterior Covers Removable Cover on Fuse Housing 1.75 (44.5) D Lift Hole C L Roll Out Unit C L Trans. Throat Extension Rail Stored Location of Track Ext. In. Pipe Plug (2) Side View Front View C L Network Protector
Typical Network Disconnect with Doors Open
Network disconnects are an important safety item for spot network systems. Many forms of disconnect are available, including downstream main breakers and non-loadbreak disconnects at the top of the network protector. This page describes the non-loadbreak product. Network disconnect means on the load side of each protector is necessary to allow safe access to the protector and protector fuses in the circuit. These fuses are on the load side of the protector and are still energized from the downstream network when a given protector is opened. Safe access to the fuses requires some form of network disconnect means, as outlined above. Eaton recommends the use of a network disconnect means for each protector on all spot network systems. The choice is up to the owner or designer based upon costs and available space. The non-loadbreak product from Eaton is a hook-stick, gang operated mechanism. The non-loadbreak design allows for easier Open-Close operations from the oor at the front of the unit compared to loadbreak designs. The protector, not
Inspection Window
Figure 18.0-29. Typical 3000A Non-Loadbreak Disconnect Mounted on a Network Protector

0.50 All-thread rod must be used for hanging as permanent support from overhead. Disconnect enclosure cabinet: interior and exterior surfaces receive ANSI-61 Cationic Epoxy Electrocoat grey nish over phosphatized 12 gauge steel. The interior of main module is then nished gloss white. Three-point cover latching mechanism between the two hinged front covers. Dimensions for the neutral connection from disconnect cabinet to X/O on transformer must be supplied by contractor. Current transformers mounted inside cubicle. CT ratio and class per customers specications.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 033

Network Transition Box
18.0-33
Network Transition Box

Network transition boxes are used at the top of protectors when the network disconnect takes a form other than the non-loadbreak disconnect explained on the previous page. Two other forms of disconnect are available, including downstream main breakers and downstream fused drawout fuse trucks. This page describes the transition box product. Network disconnect means on the load side of each protector is necessary to allow safe access to the protector and protector fuses in the circuit. These fuses are on the load side of the protector and are still energized from the downstream network when a given protector is opened. Safe access to the fuses requires some form of network disconnect means, as outlined above. Eaton recommends the use of a network disconnect means for each protector on all spot network systems. The decision to use a main breaker or drawout fuse truck implies that the protector circuit does not use the non-loadbreak disconnect, perhaps due to the lack of space at the top of the protector. The downstream disconnect is usually key interlocked with the network protector, especially when the disconnect is the drawout fuse truck. The area at the top of the protector becomes a transition area to connect to cables or busway. Common ratings for transition boxes are 8004000A, 600 Vac and below.
The transition box designs are NEMA 1 indoor and NEMA 3R outdoor only. The protector has a ange at the top which allows for the mounting of the transition box at the top of each respective protector. In many cases it is possible to locate current transformers within the network transition to provide for forward 50/51 protection (relays mounted remotely) on the network circuits. These relays serve to monitor the circuit and trip the network protector when faults occur within the power circuit feeding the downstream spot network switchgear.
Eaton designs, manufactures and tests transition boxes the same factory that makes the network protectors, and the plant is ISO 9000 certied. Product electrical and dimensional coordination is ensured between the protectors and transition boxes with Eaton. The load conductor cables or busway are connected at the top of each transition box. The drawings detailed on this page depict a busway ange and connection. When busway is used, several ange orientations are preferred and those align the busway phase conductors with the A, B, C left to right orientation of the protector phase conductors.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Eaton Bus Flange
Bolt-on Front Cover NPL Type Silver Sand Fuses Removable Fuse Housing Cover Removable Front Cover 1.75 (44.5) D Lift Hole Roll Out Unit C L Trans. Throat Extension Rail Stored Location of Track Ext. Inspection Window C L Network Protector Current Transformer
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1.00 (25.4) In. Pipe Plug (2) Side View Front View
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 18.0-30. Typical 1875A Network Transition Box Mounted on a Network Protector
CA08104001E
18.0-34 Spot Network Equipment Rating Selection

Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide
September 2011
Sheet 18 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Figure 18.0-31 illustrates the general conguration of the network equipment for Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12 equipment values. For three-unit spot networks, the fourth transformer/protector pair and load L4 bus and load do not exist. For 2-unit spot networks, the third and fourth transformer/protector pairs and load L3 and L4 buses and loads do not exist. Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12 are developed for systems anticipating only one primary feeder outage, and secondary voltage is 480 wye or 208 wye respectively. Table 18.0-8. CM52 Protector Features
Features Continuous current ratings in amperes Operating mechanism Close and latch rating available Mechanism withdrawal Mechanical life (no. ops) Withdrawn construction Protector fuse type Fuse location Protector trip device Dielectric test passed UL label
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
NP1 Tie
NP2 Tie
NP3 Tie
NP4
LOADS L1
LOADS L2
LOADS L3
LOADS L4
TL = L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 = Total Network Load kVA
Figure 18.0-31. Spot Network Congurations Table 18.0-9. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Liquid Transformers 480V Secondaries Liquid Transformers (Including Oil and Silicone) OA 55C Rise with 138% Short Time Capacity (Up to 24 Hours for Probable Sacrice of 1% Life)
Total Network TX kVA Nominal TL = Load kVA (Maximum for One PRI Outage) 690 1035 1380 2070 2760 3450 1380 2070 2760 4140 5520 6900 2070 3105 4140 6210 8280 10350 TX = Network TX kVA (55C Liquid) NP = Protector Ampacity at 480V 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500 LV Switchgear Tie Breaker Frame/ Trip Amperes 800/800AT 1600/1200AT 1600/1600AT 3200/2200AT 4000/3200AT 4000/4000AT 800/800AT 1600/1200AT 1600/1600AT 3200/2200AT 4000/3200AT 4000/4000AT 800/800AT 1600/1200AT 1600/1600AT 3200/2200AT 4000/3200AT 4000/4000AT
CM52 8004500A Spring close Yes Drawout 10,000 Deadfront Silver- sand NPL type External Shunt trip 2200V Yes 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 1500 2250 3000 4500 6000 7500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10000
Two-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2 and L3 = L4 = 0TX3 and TX4 are Absent
500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
Three-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2+L3 and L4 = 0TX4 is Absent
Four-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2+L3+L4All TXs are Present
Strongly recommended for spot network applications. Used optional pre-charge energy mechanism on two transformer spot networks. NPL fuses can be mounted in epoxy enclosures or network disconnect cabinets.
Table 18.0-10. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Dry Transformers 480V Secondaries Dry-Type Transformers (Including VPI, VPE and Cast Coil) AA/FA 80C Rise with 150% Overload Capacity (Continuous when Fan Cooling is Active and Ambient is 30C)
Total Network TX kVA Nominal TL = Load kVA (Maximum for One PRI Outage) 750 1125 1500 2250 3000 3750 1500 2250 3000 4500 6000 7500 2250 3375 4500 6750 9000 11250 TX = Network TX kVA (80C Dry) NP = Protector Ampacity at 480V 1200 1600 1875 2825 3500 4500 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500 LV Switchgear Tie Breaker Frame/ Trip Amperes 1600/1000AT 1600/1400AT 2000/1600AT 3200/2600AT 4000/3200AT 4000/4000AT 1600/1000AT 1600/1400AT 2000/1600AT 3200/2600AT 4000/3200AT 4000/4000AT 1600/1000AT 1600/1400AT 2000/1600AT 3200/2600AT 4000/3200AT 4000/4000AT
1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 1500 2250 3000 4500 6000 7500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10000 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 035
Spot Network Equipment Rating Selection

18.0-35
Table 18.0-11. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Liquid Transformers216Y or 208Y Secondaries Liquid Transformers (Including Oil and Silicone) OA 55C Rise with 138% Short Time Capacity (Up to 24 Hours for Probable Sacrice of 1% Life)
Total Network TX kVA Nominal 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 1500 2250 3000 4500 6000 7500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10000
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
TL = Load kVA (Maximum for One PRI Outage) 690 1035 1380 2070 2760 3450 1380 2070 2760 4140 5520 6900 2070 3105 4140 6210 8280 10350
TX = Network TX kVA (55C Liquid) 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
NP = Protector Ampacity at 216 or 208V 2000 3000 4500
LV Switchgear Tie Breaker Frame/Trip Amperes 2000/1900AT 3200/2800AT 4000/4000AT 5000/5000AT N/A N/A 2000/1900AT 3200/2800AT 4000/4000AT 5000/5000AT N/A N/A 2000/1900AT 3200/2800AT 4000/4000AT 5000/5000AT N/A N/A
N/A N/A 2000 3000 4500
N/A N/A 2000 3000 4500
N/A N/A
For the listed table Total Load values (TL) protector ratings are not available. However, protector ratings are available through 5000A, which will support reduced TL (Total Load) values of 1871 kVA, 3742 kVA and 5613 kVA for 2-, 3-, and 4-unit spot networks, respectively at 216Y volt secondary (4% less load values are supported if 208Y is the system voltage).
Note: NA indicates that spot networks are not available.
Table 18.0-12. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Dry Transformers216Y or 208Y Secondaries Dry Transformers (Including VPI, VPE and Cast Coil) AA/FA 80C Rise with 150% Overload Capacity (Continuous when Fan Cooling is Active and Ambient is 30C)
Total Network TX kVA Nominal 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 1500 2250 3000 4500 6000 7500 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10000
TL = Load kVA (Maximum for One PRI Outage) 750 1125 1500 2250 3000 3750 1500 2250 3000 4500 6000 7500 2070 3105 4140 6210 8280 10350
TX = Network TX kVA (80C Dry) 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500
NP = Protector Ampacity at 216 or 208V 2250 3500 4500
LV Switchgear Tie Breaker Frame/Trip Amperes 2000/1900AT 3200/3100AT 4000/4000AT 5000/5000AT N/A N/A 2000/1900AT 3200/3100AT 4000/4000AT 5000/5000AT N/A N/A 2000/1900AT 3200/3100AT 4000/4000AT 5000/5000AT N/A N/A
N/A N/A 2250 3500 4500
N/A N/A 2250 3500 4500
N/A N/A
For the listed table Total Load values (TL) protector ratings are not available. However, protector ratings are available through 5000A, which will support reduced TL (Total Load) values of 1871 kVA, 3742 kVA and 5613 kVA for 2-, 3-, and 4-unit spot networks, respectively at 216Y volt secondary (4% less load values are supported if 208Y is the system voltage).
Note: NA indicates that spot networks are not available.
CA08104001E
18.0-36 Spot Network Equipment Rating Selection

Protector Application Information
September 2011
Sheet 18 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Protector Application Information

Table 18.0-13. Transformer and Protector Combinations and Protector RatingsCM52 Protectors
Network Transformer Transformer Nameplate kVA Rating 225 300 500 500 500 500 750 750 1000 1000 1000 Full Load Current rms Amperes Network Protectors Continuous Current Rating rms Amperes 800 1200 1600 1875 2000 2250 2500 2825 3000 3500 4500 800 1200 1600 1875 2000 2250 2500 2825 3000 3500 4500 5000 Protector Rating as % of Transformer Full Load Current 133 150 120 141 150 169 125 141 112 131 169 133 133 133 158 167 188 139 157 125 145 150 167 Interrupting Rating in rms Symmetrical Amperes 42,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 85,000 Close and Latch Rating in rms Symmetrical Amperes 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 45,000 45,000 45,000 45,000 65,000 65,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 45,000 45,000 45,000 45,000 65,000 65,000 65,000
System Voltage = 216Y/125 or 208Y/120

600 800 1333 1333 1333 1333 2000 2000 2667 2667 2667 600 900 1200 1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 2400 2400 3000 3000
System Voltage = 480Y/277

500 750 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 2000 2000 2500 2500

The interrupting rating exceeds the available fault current from the transformer. The short time rating of protectors without fuses equals the interrupting rating.
Note: Use this table and its equipment ratings when designing network systems where the protectors are rated lower or higher, as a percentage of the full load amperes of the transformers, than those selected in the Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12. This table is also useful when selecting equipment ratings for systems that anticipate more than one single primary outage, e.g., when two outages are expected on a four-transformer spot network.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 037
Spot Network Equipment Layout Dimensions

Liquid-Type Network Unit Dimensions
18.0-37
Dimensions
Legend: SW = Primary TX = Network Transformer (Silicone filled) NP = Network Protector ND = Network Disconnect (Non-loadbreak) All dimensions are shown in Tables 18.0-14 and 18.0-15.
i
Neutral
ii
ND
12 (304.8) Front H
18 (457.2)
W WT
WP ND DD
1 2 3 4
HT
HP
SW
SW 32 (812.0)
D
TX NP
Liquid Transformer
HL
TX NP
HN
DN
Plan View
Front View
5 6 7
Figure 18.0-32. Liquid Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design
Note: Dimensions are approximate for silicone lled network transformers and are typical for the ratings indicated. Designs can be customized to t into existing spaces in many instances, although at higher cost. Speciers are encouraged to consult Eaton to facilitate special existing conditions.
Table 18.0-14. Liquid NetworkDimensions in Inches (mm)

Network Equipment TX kVA 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500

DimensionsRefer to Plan and Front View Figures Above HT HP HL HN H WT WP W 102 (2590.8) 105 (2667.0) 108 (2743.2) DN 32 (812.8) 32 (812.8) 32 (812.8) DD D
NP Amps 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500
8 9 10 11 12
64 (1625.6) 49 (1244.6) 40 (1016.0) 52 (1320.8) 106 (2692.4) 67 (1701.8) 50 (1270.0) 43 (1092.2) 55 (1397.0) 109 (2768.6) 77 (1955.8) 54 (1371.6) 54 (1371.6) 66 (1676.4) 120 (3048.0) 83 (2108.2) 57 (1447.8) 55 (1397.0) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2) 90 (2286.0) 61 (1549.4) 65 (1651.0) 74 (1879.6) 93 (2362.2) 63 (1600.2) 67 (1701.8) 90 (2286.0)
50 (1270.0) 34 (863.6) 53 (1346.2) 34 (863.6) 56 (1422.4) 34 (863.6)
34 (863.6) 42 (1066.8) 34 (863.6) 45 (1143.0) 34 (863.6) 48 (1219.2)
62 (1574.8) 36 (914.4) 116 (2946.4) 66 (1676.4) 38 (965.2) 122 (3098.8) 68 (1727.2) 42 (1066.8) 128 (3251.2)
38 (965.2) 34 (863.6) 55 (1397.0) 38 (965.2) 63 (1600.2) 48 (1219.2) 68 (1727.2)
Protector selected at 480V per Table 18.0-9 recommendations. Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location, then the transition box at top of protector is 30.0036.00 inches (762.0914.4 mm) above protector ange.
Table 18.0-15. Liquid NetworkWeights in Lb (kg)

Network Equipment TX kVA NP Amps Weights in Lbs (kg) Network TX 7800 (3541) 10,600 (4812) 11,400 (5176) 16,100 (7309) 21,000 (9534) 24,000 (10,896) Protector NP 850 (386) 850 (386) 850 (386) 1200 (545) 1450 (658) 1500 (681) Network Disconnect 250 (114) 300 (136) 350 (159) 400 (182)

Liquid Gallons (Liters) Network TX 220 (833) 250 (946) 320 (1211) 500 (1893) 600 (2271) 700 (2650)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
500 1200 750 1600 1000 1875 1500 2500 2000 3500 2500 4500

Weights for transformers include the uid weight. The number of gallons of liquid includes the uid inside the primary switch. Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location, then the transition box at top of protector is 30.0036.00 inches (762.0914.4 mm) above protector ange.
CA08104001E
18.0-38 Spot Network Equipment Layout Dimensions

Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 18 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
D
36 (914.4)
20 (508.0) W WT
WP
Legend: SW = Primary TX = Network Transformer (Silicone filled) NP = Network Protector ND = Network Disconnect (Non-loadbreak)
Neutral
ND
12 (304.8)
Front
Dry Type Transformer
Dry Type Transformer
ND
HP
Front SW DN HT TX HL NP
HN
SW
TX
NP
DD
Front
Plan View
Front View
18 (457.2)
Figure 18.0-33. Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design
Note: Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Table 18.0-16. Dry-Type NetworkDimensions in Inches (mm)

Network Equipment TX kVA DimensionsRefer to Plan and Front View Figures Above HP HL HN H WT WP W 180 (4572.0) 192 (4876.0) 192 (4876.0) DN 32 (812.8) 32 (812.8) 32 (812.8) DD D
NP HT Amps
500 1200 750 1600 1000 1875 1500 2500 2000 3500 2500 4500

90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 56 (1422.4) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 56 (1422.4) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2) 102 (2590.8) 90 (2286.0) 56 (1422.4) 69 (1752.6) 123 (3124.2) 102 (2590.8) 90 (2286.0) 60 (1524.0) 75 (1905.0) 129 (3276.6) 112 (2844.8) 90 (2286.0) 64 (1625.6) 81 (2057.4) 120 (3048.0) 90 (2286.0) 66 (1676.4) 90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0) 34 (863.6) 102 (2590.8) 34 (863.6) 102 (2590.8) 34 (863.6)
34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4) 34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4) 34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4)
102 (2590.8) 36 (914.4) 194 (4927.6) 124 (3149.6) 38 (965.2) 218 (5537.2) 130 (3302.0) 42 (1066.8) 226 (5740.4)
38 (965.2) 34 (863.6) 66 (1676.4) 38 (965.2) 66 (1676.4) 48 (1219.2) 66 (1676.4)
Protector selected at 480V per Table 18.0-10 recommendations. Dimensions for overall width include a bussed transition20.00 inches (508.0 mm) on the primary. This 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) section may be eliminated by using cable connections to primary bushing in lieu of buswork. Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location, then the transition box at top of protector is 30.0036.00 inches (762.0914.4 mm) above protector ange.
Table 18.0-17. Dry-Type NetworkWeights in Lbs (kg)

Network Equipment TX kVA Weights in Lbs (kg) Network TX 5600 (2542) 6700 (3042) 8450 (3836) 10,150 (4608) 13,150 (5970) 16,000 (7264) Protector NP + Stand 950 (431) 950 (431) 950 (431) 1330 (604) 1550 (704) 1600 (726) Network ND Disconnect 250 (114) 300 (136) 350 (159)

NP Primary SW + Fuses Amps 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908)
500 1200 750 1600 1000 1875 1500 2500 2000 3500 2500 4500

400 (182)
Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation. Protector stand carries the weight of the protector, since the dry-type end sheets do not have the strength to support the weight of the protector. Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location then the transition box at top of protector is 30.0036.00 inches (762.0914.4 mm) above protector ange.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 18 039
Spot Network Equipment Layout Dimensions

Dry-Type Network UnitSwitchgear Mounted Protector Dimensions
18.0-39
20 (508.0) (1) W 36 (914.4) WT 66 (1676.4) Voltage Switchgear D SW NP TX (2)
Legend: = Primary TX etwork Transformer (Silicone filled) r ND (1) Tr s (2) = Protector Structure May Be Close-Coupled To Switchgear Without Transition
i ii 1
Switchgear Mounted NP (2) To Switchgear
Dry T Type Transformer DP
HP SW
HT (1)
Dry T Type Transformer TX HN
2
H
3 4 5 6
Plan View
Front
Front View
Figure 18.0-34. Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design with Switchgear Mounted Protector
Note: Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Table 18.0-18. Dry-Type with Switchgear Mounted ProtectorDimensions in Inches (mm)


DimensionsRefer to Plan and Front View Figures Above HT 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 102 (2590.8) 102 (2590.8) 112 (2844.8) 112 (2844.8) HP 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) HN 96 (2438.4) 96 (2438.4) 96 (2438.4) 96 (2438.4) 96 (2438.4) 96 (2438.4) H 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 102 (2590.8) 102 (2590.8) 112 (2844.8) 112 (2844.8) WT 102 (2590.8) 102 (2590.8) 102 (2590.8) 112 (2844.8) 112 (2844.8) 112 (2844.8) W 228 (5791.2) 228 (5791.2) 228 (5791.2) 238 (6045.2) 238 (6045.2) 238 (6045.2) DP 66 (1676.4) 66 (1676.4) 66 (1676.4) 66 (1676.4) 66 (1676.4) 66 (1676.4) D 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 78 (1981.2) 84 (2133.6)
NP Amps 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Protector selected at 480V per Table 18.0-10 recommendations. Primary transition section 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) in width may be eliminated by using cable interconnections. Elimination of transition reduces width by 20.00 inches (508.0 mm). Dimensions are approximate for low voltage switchgear construction. Close-coupling to switchgear structures with main and feeders will require 72.0078.00 inch (1828.81981.2 mm) depth depending upon the type of feeders used, fused or nonfused. When switchgear is remote, using cable or busway connections, the depth of the protector section can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
Table 18.0-19. Dry-Type with Switchgear Mounted ProtectorWeights in Lbs (kg)

Weight in Lbs (kg) Primary SW Including Power Fuses 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) 2000 (908) Network Transformer TX 5600 (2542) 6700 (3042) 8450 (3836) 10,150 (4608) 13,150 (5970) 15,600 (7082) Low Voltage Switchgear and Protector NP 4000 (1816) 4000 (1816) 4000 (1816) 4400 (1998) 4600 (2088) 4600 (2088)
NP Amps 1200 1600 1875 2500 3500 4500
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
CA08104001E
18.0-40 Spot Network Equipment

September 2011
Sheet 18 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 19 001
19.0-1
Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage
Contents
Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage Glossary of Transformer Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-2 The Energy Policy Act of 2005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-5 General Description/Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-1 Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-5 General Purpose Encapsulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-8 K-Factor Rated for Nonlinear Loads (KT Type) TP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-11 Harmonic Mitigating (HMT Type) TP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-12 NEMA TP-1 Energy Efcient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-16 Energy Efcient (CSL-3 Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-17 Motor Drive Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-18 Hazardous Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-19 MiniPower Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-20 FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-35 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16461 26 22 13 MiniPower Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16463 26 27 00.11 Further Information Volume 2Commercial Distribution 2011, Tab 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08100003E
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Eatons Family of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
21
CA08104001E
19.0-2 Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage Glossary
September 2011
Sheet 19 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Glossary of Transformer Terms

Air cooled: A transformer that is cooled by the natural circulation of air around, or through, the core and coils. Ambient noise level: The existing or inherent sound level of the area surrounding the transformer, prior to energizing the transformer. Measured in decibels. Ambient temperature: The temperature of the air surrounding the transformer into which the heat of the transformer is dissipated. Ampacity: The current-carrying capacity of an electrical conductor under stated thermal conditions. Expressed in amperes. Ampere: The practical unit of electric current. Attenuation: A decrease in signal power or voltage. Unit of measure is dB. Autotransformer: A transformer in which part of the winding is common to both the primary and the secondary circuits. Banked: Two or more single-phase transformers wired together to supply a three-phase load. Three single-phase transformers can be banked together to support a three-phase load. For example, three 10 kVA single-phase transformers banked together will have a 30 kVA three-phase capacity. BIL: Basic impulse level. The ability of a transformers insulation system to withstand high voltage surges. All Eaton 600V-class transformers have a 10 kV BIL rating. BTU: British thermal unit. In North America, the term BTU is used to describe the heat value (energy content) of fuels, and also to describe the power of heating and cooling systems, such as furnaces, stoves, barbecue grills and air conditioners. When used as a unit of power, BTU per hour (BTU/h) is understood, though this is often abbreviated to just BTU. Buck-boost: The name of a standard, single-phase, two-winding transformer application with the low voltage secondary windings connected as an autotransformer for boosting (increasing) or bucking (decreasing) voltages in small amounts. Applications can either be single-phase or three-phase.
CE: Mark to indicate third-party approved or self-certication to specic requirements of the European community. Celsius (centigrade): Metric temperature measure. F = (1.8 x C) + 32 C = (F-32) / 1.8 Center tap: A reduced capacity tap at the mid-point of a winding. The center tap on three-phase delta-delta transformers is called a lighting tap. It provides 5% of the transformers kVA for single-phase loads. Certied tests: Actual values taken during production tests and certied as applying to a given unit shipped on a specic order. Certied tests are serial numberspecic. Common mode: Electrical noise or voltage uctuation that occurs between all of the line leads and the common ground, or between ground and line or neutral. Compensated transformer: A transformer with a turns ratio that provides a higher than nameplate output (secondary) voltage at no load, and nameplate output (secondary) voltage at rated load. It is common for small transformers (2 kVA and less) to be compensated. Conductor losses: Losses (expressed in watts) in a transformer that are incidental to carrying a load: coil resistance, stray loss due to stray uxes in the windings, core clamps, and the like, as well as circulating currents (if any) in parallel windings. Also called load losses. Continuous duty rating: The load that a transformer can handle indenitely without exceeding its specied temperature rise. Core losses: Losses (expressed in watts) caused by magnetization of the core and its resistance to magnetic ux. Also called no-load losses or excitation losses. Core losses are always present when the transformer is energized. CSA: Canadian Standards Association. The Canadian equivalent of Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
CSL3: Candidate Standard Level 3 (CSL3) design criteria developed by the U.S. Department of Energy. This term is used when considering the maximum, practical efciency of a transformer. cUL: Mark to indicate UL Certication to specic CSA Standards. Decibel (dB): Unit of measure used to express the magnitude of a change in signal or sound level. Delta connection: A standard threephase connection with the ends of each phase winding connected in series to form a closed loop with each phase 120 degrees from the other. Sometimes referred to as three-wire. Dielectric tests: Tests that consist of the application of a voltage higher than the rated voltage for a specied time for the purpose of determining the adequacy against breakdowns of insulating materials and spacings under normal conditions. Dry-type transformer: A transformer in which the core and coils are in a gaseous or dry compound insulating medium. A transformer that is cooled by a medium other than a liquid, normally by the circulation of air. E3: Eatons version of a CSL3 transformer. Eddy currents: The currents that are induced in the body of a conducting mass by the time variation of magnetic ux or varying magnetic eld. Efciency: The ratio of the power output from a transformer to the total power input. Typically expressed as a %. Electrostatic shield: Copper or other conducting sheet placed between primary and secondary windings, and grounded to reduce electrical interference and to provide additional protection from line-to-line or line-toground noise. Commonly referred to as Faraday shield. Encapsulated transformer: A transformer with its coils either dipped or cast in an epoxy resin or other encapsulating substance. Enclosure: A surrounding case or housing used to protect the contained equipment against external conditions and prevent personnel from accidentally contacting live parts.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 003
Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage Glossary
19.0-3
Environmentally preferable product: A product that has a lesser or reduced negative effect on human health and the environment when compared to competing products that serve the same purpose. This comparison may consider raw materials acquisition, production, manufacturing, packaging, distribution, reuse, operation, maintenance and disposal of the product. This term includes recyclable products, recycled products and reusable products. EPACT: The Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPAct) is an important piece of legislation for efciency because it established minimum efciency levels for dry-type distribution transformers manufactured or imported after December 2006. EPAct, which was based on NEMA standards, dened a number of terms, including what constitutes an energy-efcient transformer. The DOE issued a rule that denes these transformers and how manufacturers must comply. DOE EPAct rule (PDF): Energy Efciency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment: Test Procedures, Labeling, and the Certication Requirements for Electric Motors. Final Rule. 10-CFR Part 431. Excitation current: No load current. The current that ows in any winding used to excite the transformer when all other windings are open-circuited. It is usually expressed in percent of the rated current of a winding in which it is measured. Also called magnetizing current. FCAN: Full Capacity Above Nominal taps. Designates the transformer will deliver its rated kVA when connected to a voltage source which is higher than the rated primary voltage. FCBN: Full Capacity Below Nominal taps. Designates the transformer will deliver its rated kVA when connected to a voltage source which is lower than the rated primary voltage. Frequency: On AC circuits, designates the number of times that polarity alternates from positive to negative and back again per second, such as 60 cycles per second. Typically measured in Hertz (Hz). Ground: Connecting one side of a circuit to the earth through low resistance or low impedance paths to help prevent transmitting electrical shock to personnel.
Harmonic: A sinusoidal waveform with a frequency that is an integral multiple of the fundamental frequency (60 Hz). 60 H3 fundamental 120 H3 2nd harmonic 180 H3 3rd harmonic 240 H3 4th harmonic Harmonic distortion: Nonlinear distortion of a system characterized by the appearance of harmonic (non-sinusoidal) currents in the output, when the input is sinusoidal. Harmonic distortion, total (THD): The square root of the sum of the squares of all harmonic currents present in a load, excluding the fundamental 60 Hz current. Usually expressed as a percent of the fundamental. High voltage windings: In a twowinding transformer, the winding intended to have the greater voltage. Usually marked with H designations. HMT: Harmonic Mitigating Transformer (HMT) is better able to handle the harmonic currents present in todays electrical power system. thereby increasing system capacity, reducing distortion throughout a facility, help to minimize downtime and mysterious maintenance on equipment, and return the longevity of equipment life through reduced operational energy losses, thereby running cooler. Hp: Horsepower. The energy required to raise 33,000 pounds a distance of one foot in one minute. 1 hp is equal to 746 watts, or 0.746 kW. Hi pot: A standard test on dry-type transformers consisting of extra-high potentials (voltages) connected to the windings. Used to check the integrity of insulation materials and clearances. Hottest-spot temperature: The highest temperature inside the transformer winding. Is greater than the measured average temperature of the coil conductors, when using the resistance change method. Hysteresis: The tendency of a magnetic substance to persist in any state of magnetization. Impedance: The retarding forces of current in an AC circuit; the current-limiting characteristics of a transformer. Symbol = Z Inductance: In electrical circuits, the opposition to a change in the ow of electrical current. Symbol = L
Inducted potential test: A standard dielectric test of transformer insulation. Veries the integrity of insulating materials and electrical clearances. Inrush current: The initial high peak of current that occurs in the rst few cycles of energization, which can be 30 to 40 times the rated current. Insulating transformer: Another term for an isolating transformer. Insulation: Material with a high electrical resistance. Insulation materials: Those materials used to insulate the transformers electrical windings from each other and ground. Integral TVSS or SPD: Major Standard Change for Surge Protective Devices (formerly known as Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors). The primary safety standard for transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) has undergone major revisions in the past three years with mandatory compliance by manufacturers required by September 29, 2009. Even the name of the standard has changed from UL Standard for Safety for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors, UL 1449 to UL Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices, UL 1449. This means that TVSS listed to the UL 1449 2nd Edition standard will no longer be able to be manufactured after September 29, 2009. All Surge Protective Devices must be designed, tested, manufactured and listed to the UL 1449 3rd Edition standard after this date. Isolating transformer: A transformer where the input (primary) windings are not connected to the output (secondary) windings (i.e., electrically isolated). K-factor: A common industry term for the amount of harmonics produced by a given load. The larger the K-factor, the more harmonics that are present. Also used to dene a transformers ability to withstand the additional heating generated by harmonic currents. kVA: Kilovolt-ampere. Designates the output that a transformer can deliver for a specied time at a rated secondary voltage and rated frequency without exceeding the specied temperature rise. When multiplied by the power factor, will give kilowatts or kW. 1000 VA = 1 kVA
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
19.0-4 Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage Glossary
September 2011
Sheet 19 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Lamination: Thin sheets of electrical steel used to construct the core of a transformer. Limiting temperature: The maximum temperature at which a component or material may be operated continuously with no sacrice in normal life expectancy. Linear load: A load where the current waveform conforms to that of the applied voltage, or a load where a change in current is directly proportional to a change in applied voltage. Live part: Any component consisting of an electrically conductive material that can be energized under conditions of normal use. Load losses: I2R losses in windings. Also see conductor losses. Low voltage winding: In a twowinding transformer, the winding intended to have the lesser voltage. Usually marked with X designations. Mid-tap: See center tap. Noise level: The relative intensity of sound, measured in decibels (dB). NEMA Standard ST-20 outlines the maximum allowable noise level for dry-type transformers. Nonlinear load: A load where the current waveform does not conform to that of the applied voltage, or where a change in current is not proportional to a change in applied voltage. Non-ventilated transformer: A transformer where the core and coil assembly is mounted inside an enclosure with no openings for ventilation. Also referred to as totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV). No load losses: Losses in a transformer that is excited at rated voltage and frequency but that is not supplying a load. No load losses include core losses, dielectric losses and conductor losses in the winding due to the exciting current. Also referred to as excitation losses. Overload capability: Short-term overload capacity is designed into transformers as required by ANSI. Continuous overload capacity is not deliberately designed into a transformer because the design objective is to be within the allowed winding temperature rise with nameplate loading.
Percent IR (% resistance): Voltage drop due to resistance at rated current in percent of rated voltage. Percent IX (% reactance): Voltage drop due to reactance at rated current in percent of rated voltage. Percent IZ (% impedance): Voltage drop due to impedance at rated current in percent of rated voltage. Phase: Type of AC electrical circuit; usually single-phase two- or three-wire, or three-phase three- or four-wire. Polarity test: A standard test on transformers to determine instantaneous direction of the voltages in the primary compared to the secondary. Primary taps: Taps added to the primary (input) winding. See Tap. Primary voltage: The input circuit voltage. Power factor: The cosine of the phase angle between a voltage and a current. Ratio test: A standard test of transformers to determine the ratio of the input (primary) voltage to the output (secondary) voltage. Reactance: The effect of inductive and capacitive components of a circuit producing other than unity power factor. Reactor: A single winding device with an air or iron core that produces a specic amount of inductive reactance into a circuit. Normally used to reduce of control current. Regulation: Usually expressed as the percent change in output voltage when the load goes from full load to no load. Scott T connection: Connection for three-phase transformers. Instead of using three sets of coils for a threephase load, the transformer uses only two sets of coils. Series/multiple winding: A winding consisting of two or more sections that can be connected for series operation or multiple (parallel) operation. Also called series-parallel winding. Short circuit: A low resistance connection, usually accidental, across part of a circuit, resulting in excessive current ow.
Sound levels: All transformers make some sound mainly due to the vibration generated in its core by alternating ux. All Eaton generalpurpose dry-type distribution transformers are designed with sound levels lower than NEMA ST-20 maximum levels. Star connection: Same as a wye connection. Step-down transformer: A transformer where the input voltage is greater than the output voltage. Step-up transformer: A transformer where the input voltage is less than the output voltage. T-T connection: See Scott T connection. Tap: A connection brought out of a winding at some point between its extremities, usually to permit changing the voltage or current ratio. Taps are typically used to compensate for above or below rated input voltage, in order to provide the rated output voltage. See FCAN and FCBN. Temperature class: The maximum temperature that the insulation system of a transformer can continuously withstand. The common insulation classes are 105, 150, 180 (also 185) and 220. Temperature rise: The increase over ambient temperature of the windings due to energizing and loading the transformer. Total losses: The sum of the no-load losses and load losses. Totally enclosed non-ventilated enclosure: The core and coil assembly is installed inside an enclosure that has no ventilation to cool the transformer. The transformer relies on heat to radiate from the enclosure for cooling. Transformer tests: Per NEMA ST-20, routine transformer production tests are performed on each transformer prior to shipment. These tests are: Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection; Polarity and Phase Relation tests on the rated connection; No-Load and Excitation Current tests at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection and Applied Potential and Induced Potential tests. Special tests include sound level testing.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 005
Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage Glossary and The Energy Policy Act of 2005
19.0-5
Transverse mode: Electrical noise or voltage disturbance that occurs between phase and neutral, or from spurious signals across metallic hot line and the neutral conductor. Turns ratio: The ratio of the number of turns in the high voltage winding to that in the low voltage winding. Typical test data: Tests that were performed on similar units that were previously manufactured and tested. UL (Underwriters Laboratories): An independent safety testing organization. Universal taps: A combination of six primary voltage taps consisting of 2 at +2-1/2% FCAN and 4 at -2-1/2% FCBN. Watt: A unit of electrical power when the current in a circuit is one ampere and the voltage is one volt. Wye connection: A standard threewire transformer connection with similar ends of single-phase coils connected together. The common point forms the electrical neutral point and may be grounded. Also referred to as three-phase four-wire. To obtain the line-to-neutral voltage, divide the line voltage by 3 ( 1.732 ) .
The Energy Policy Act of 2005

The Energy Policy Act of 2005 and the resulting Federal Law 10 CFR Part 431 require that efciency of low voltage dry-type distribution transformers manufactured after January 1, 2007 shall be no less than the efciency levels listed in Table 4-2 of NEMA Standard TP-1-2002. Transformers specically excluded for the scope of this law include:

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Transformers rated less than 15 kVA Transformers with a primary or secondary voltage greater than 600V Transformers rated for operation at other than 60 Hz Transformers with a tap range greater than 20% Motor drive isolation transformers Rectier transformers Autotransformers Transformers that supply Uninterruptible Power Supplies Special impedance transformers Regulating transformers Sealed and non-ventilated transformers Machine tool transformers Welding transformers Grounding transformers Testing transformers Repaired transformers
CA08104001E
19.0-6 Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 19 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 007
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Overview

General Description/Product Overview
19.1-1
Energy-Efcient Transformers
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear Transformers
Harmonic Mitigating Transformers
i ii 1 2 3
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Ventilated Transformer
Ventilated Transformer
Eatons family of energy-efcient transformers meet NEMA TP-1 efciency requirements and federal energy efciency laws mandated by the Energy Policy Act of 2005. Distribution transformers installed in the United States are required to meet these energy efciency requirements. Energy-efcient transformers are especially designed to have low no load (core) losses. Minimum efciency levels have been established for these transformers when loaded at 35% of their full load capacity. Available 600V. Eaton offers a wide variety of energyefcient transformers, including 150C, 115C or 80C; general purpose or K-factor rated; with aluminum or copper windings. Eatons energyefcient transformers are manufactured with a NEMA 2 enclosure as standard, and are suitable for installation outdoors when a NEMA 3R weathershield kit is installed. Eatons energy-efcient transformers use a 220C insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Installation of energy-efcient transformers may help facilities earn points toward LEED certication from the U.S. Green Building Council. Refer to Page 19.1-16 for additional information.
Eaton K-Factor nonlinear transformers are specically designed to withstand the harmful overheating effects caused by harmonics generated by nonlinear (non-sinusoidal) loads. These loads include computers, laser printers, copiers and other ofce equipment, as well as video monitors and other electronic equipment. The core and coils of K-Factor transformers are especially designed to have reduced induction levels, which result in a reduction in stray losses. Oversized (200% rated) neutrals and electrostatic shielding are provided as standard on K-Factor transformers. Eaton K-Factor transformers are available in ratings with a K-factor of 4, 13, 20, 30, 40 and 50. 600V-class single-phase models are available to 167 kVA; three-phase ratings to 1500 kVA. Eatons family of K-Factor transformers are manufactured with the same high-quality construction features as our ventilated transformer products, including NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C (Class R) insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Refer to Page 19.1-11 for additional information. Eaton K-Factor rated transformers comply with NEMA TP-1 standards.
Harmonic Mitigating Ventilated Transformer
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers (HMTs) are specially designed transformers that treat a wide variety of harmonics. Also called phaseshifting transformers, their low zerosequence impedance wye zig-zag secondary windings prevent harmful triplen (3rd, 9th, 15th, etc.) harmonic currents from coupling into the primary delta, where they can progress upstream to the service entrance. Multiple HMTs with a variety of phaseshift congurations can be applied in a coordinated scheme to target 5th, 7th, and higher order harmonics at the common bus feeding all of the transformers. HMTs are ideally suited for installations rich in harmonic loads, such as educational facilities (K-12 and universities), government, commercial, medical and call-center applications. HMTs are manufactured with the same high-quality features as Eatons ventilated transformers, including NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C (Class R) insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Additionally, Eatons HMTs are manufactured with a 200% neutral and electrostatic shield as standard. Refer to Page 19.1-12 for additional information. HMTs are available in four congurations: Type NON (0 phase-shift) Type THR (30) Type POS (+15) Type NEG (15)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Available in three-phase ratings to 500 kVA and 600V. All Eaton HMTs meet or exceed NEMA TP-1 efciency levels, when operated under either linear or nonlinear load proles Eaton HMT transformers comply with NEMA TP-1 standards.
CA08104001E
19.1-2 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Overview

September 2011
Sheet 19 008
i ii 1 2 3
Motor Drive Isolation Transformers
Hazardous Location Transformers
MiniPower Center
Motor Drive Isolation Ventilated Transformer
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are especially designed for three-phase, SCR-controlled, variablespeed motor drive load proles. Sized by horsepower and common motor voltages, motor drive isolation transformers are braced to withstand the mechanical stresses associated with AC adjustable frequency drives or DC drives. Available in three-phase ventilated designs to 1500 hp and 600V. Epoxy encapsulated three-phase designs are available to 20 hp. Motor drive isolation transformers are manufactured using the same highquality construction features as our ventilated transformer products, including NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C (Class R) insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Epoxy encapsulated models have NEMA 3R enclosures and 115C temperature rise as standard. All Eaton three-phase motor drive isolation transformers include a normally open dry contact temperature sensor installed in the coils. This sensor can be connected to provide advance alert or warning of a potential overheating of the transformer. Refer to Page 19.1-18 for additional information. Read the text on Page 19.0-5 on the Energy Policy Act of 2005 before specifying these units. These units are exempt from NEMA TP-1 requirements.
MiniPower Center Hazardous Location Transformers
An Eaton minipower center replaces three individual components: Primary main breaker Transformer Distribution loadcenter.

Eatons hazardous location transformers are suitable for use in environments classied by the 2002 and 2005 National Electrical Code (NEC) as Class I, Division 2, Group C or D, as dened by NEC Article 501,when installed in compliance with NEC-recommended procedures for dry-type transformers rated 600V and below. As dened by NEC Article 500, Class I, Division 2 locations include atmospheres that may contain volatile or ignitable concentrations of ammable liquids or gas vapors, or locations adjacent to such environments. Acetone, ammonia, benzene, gasoline, methane, propane and natural gas are examples of such substances. Eatons hazardous location transformers are of the encapsulated design, and are available up to 600V ratings. Single-phase ratings 0.05 kVA through 37.5 kVA; three-phase ratings to 75 kVA. Hazardous location transformers use a 180C insulation system with 115C temperature rise. All Eaton hazardous location transformers are provided with explosion-proof connections. Refer to Page 19.1-19 for additional information.
The minipower center combines all three into a single unit. All interconnecting wiring is performed at the factory. Minipower centers are ideally suited for applications where 120V is required at a remote location. Parking lots, workbenches and temporary power on construction sites are common applications for minipower centers. Available in single-phase and three-phase ratings to 600V, 100A, and 30 kVA with secondary loadcenters with provisions for up to 24 single-pole branch breakers. Available with aluminum bus and plug-on branch breakers, or with copper bus and bolt-on branch breakers. Minipower centers incorporate an encapsulated transformer in their construction, and are NEMA 3R rated for outdoor applications. Refer to Page 19.1-20 for additional information.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 009
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Overview

19.1-3
Shielded Isolation Transformers
Marine Duty Transformers
Buck-Boost and Low Voltage Lighting Transformers
i ii 1 2 3
Shielded Isolation Ventilated Transformer
Marine-Duty Ventilated Transformer
Eatons shielded isolation transformers are typically installed where sensitive loads such as input circuits of computers, medical equipment and microprocessors require additional protection from high-frequency electrical disturbances. Shielded isolation transformers include an electrostatic shield (Faraday shield) installed between the primary and secondary windings. This shield is grounded to the core of the transformer to attenuate high-frequency electrical disturbances in the load from being transmitted to the line side of the transformer. Shielded isolation transformers are available in all sizes and ratings of encapsulated and ventilated transformers. By design, all K Factor and harmonic mitigating transformers include an electrostatic shield as standard. Read the text on Page 19.0-5 on the Energy Policy Act of 2005 before specifying these units.
Eatons marine-duty transformers are Type Approved by the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) for on-board use in steel vessels (not for propulsion systems or combat vessels). These transformers are typically installed below deck in electrical or mechanical rooms where the ambient temperature is greater than normal. Eatons marineduty transformers are especially designed for operation in 50C ambient locations. Marine-duty rated transformers are manufactured with copper windings as standard. Encapsulated designs are available in single-phase ratings 0.05 kVA through 37.5 kVA; three-phase designs 15 kVA through 75 kVA. Ventilated designs are available in single-phase ratings of 15 kVA through 100 kVA; three-phase designs 15 kVA through 300 kVA. Encapsulated and ventilated models are available up to 600V ratings. The standard temperature rise of Eatons marine-duty transformers is 115C. Read the text on Page 19.0-5 on the Energy Policy Act of 2005 before specifying these units.
Buck-Boost Transformers
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Eatons buck-boost transformers are ideally suited to applications where the available voltage needs to be slightly increased (boosted) or decreased (bucked) to be used in a specic application. When buckboost transformers are wired as autotransformers, they can be used to accomplish this bucking or boosting of voltage. Buck-boost transformers are single-phase encapsulated transformers and are available in three voltage combinations; 120 x 24012/24 120 x 24016/32 240 x 48024/48
...and are available in 0.05 kVA through 7.5 kVA. These transformers can also be used at their nameplate voltages for applications such as low voltage interior or landscape lighting.
CA08104001E
19.1-4 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Overview

September 2011
Sheet 19 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CSL-3 Transformers
CSL-3 Transformer
Eaton CSL-3 transformers have the highest efciencies and the lowest losses of any type of unit. Copper or aluminum windings are available in 15 kVA through 300 kVA ratings. Units are available with temperature rise of 115 or 150C rise. Eaton CSL-3 transformers are more efcient than NEMA P-1 by 34%38%. Using CSL-3 units lowers the carbon footprint of a facility and assists with LEED certication. Refer to Page 19.1-17 for additional information on CSL-3 transformers.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 011
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers General Purpose Ventilated Transformers

Description
19.1-5
General Construction Features of General Purpose (TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1) Ventilated Transformers Rated 600V and below
General Description
Eatons single-phase and three-phase general purpose dry-type ventilated transformers are of the two-winding type, self-cooled, and are available in a wide variety of primary and secondary voltage combinations. Eatons transformers are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with all of the latest applicable ANSI, NEMA and IEEE standards. All 600V class ventilated transformers with ratings through 1500 kVA are UL listed and bear the UL label. Open core and coil assemblies are UR labeled products. These transformers are designed for continuous operation at rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as dened in ANSI C57.96.
Insulation System
Industry standards classify insulation systems and temperature rise as shown below. Table 19.1-1. Insulation System Classied
Ambient Temperature 40C 40C 40C + Winding Rise 80C 115C 150C + Hot Spot 30C 30C 30C = Temp. Class 150C 185C 220C
Core and Coil Assemblies

The transformer core is constructed using high-grade, non-aging, silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic ux densities are substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume allows for efcient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations are tightly clamped and compressed. Coils are wound of electrical grade aluminum or copper, and are of continuous wound construction. The BIL (basic impulse level) for all 600V-class windings is 10 kV. The core and coil assembly is installed on vibration-absorbing pads. Ventilated transformers with wyeconnected secondaries have the neutral brought out to a separate XO terminal or bus bar. The core and coil assembly is grounded to the transformer enclosure by means of a visible exible copper ground strap. The copper ground strap is sized per the NEC to be a grounding conductor.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The design life of transformers having different insulation systems is the same; the lower temperature systems are designed for the same life as the higher temperature systems. Eatons ventilated transformers, regardless of their temperature rise, are manufactured using a 220C insulation system. Required performance is obtained without exceeding the insulation system rating at rated temperature rise in a 40C maximum ambient, with an average ambient temperature of 30C over a 24-hour period. All insulation materials used are ame-retardant and do not support combustion as dened in ASTM Standard Test Method D635.
CA08104001E
19.1-6 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Ventilated Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Taps
Primary taps are available on most Eaton ventilated transformers to allow compensation for source voltage variations.
Winding Terminations
Primary and secondary windings are terminated in the wiring compartment. Encapsulated units have copper leads or stabs brought out for connections. Ventilated transformers have leads brought out to aluminum or copper pads that are pre-drilled to accept Cu/Al lugs. Aluminum-wound transformers have aluminum pads; copperwound transformers have copper pads. Lugs are not supplied with Eaton transformers; however, lug kits are available as a eld-installed accessory. Eaton recommends external cables be rated 90C (sized at 75C ampacity) for encapsulated designs and rated 75C for ventilated designs.
For ventilated transformers, the enclosure construction is ventilated, dripproof, NEMA 2, with lifting provisions. All ventilation openings are protected against falling dirt. Proper installation of weathershields on ventilated transformers makes the enclosure NEMA 3R rated and suitable for outdoor use. To ensure proper ventilation and cooling of the transformer, follow manufacturers recommended clearances around ventilation openings.
Installation Clearances
Eatons transformers should be installed with a minimum of 6 inches of clearance around the transformer enclosure to prevent accidental contact with ammable or combustible materials. Most Eaton ventilated transformers require a minimum of 6 inches of clearance in front and in back of the transformer to allow for proper airow through the transformer. Care should be taken to avoid restricting the airow through the bottom of the transformer. Transformers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.
All Eaton ventilated transformers are designed to have audible sound levels lower than those required by NEMA ST-20. However, consideration should be given to the specic location of a transformer and its installation to minimize the potential for sound transmission to surrounding structures and sound reection. Installation and ambient conditions at a specic location can result in eldmeasured audible sound levels as much as 15 dBA greater than those levels measured in a sound-proof chamber. The following installation methods should be considered: 1. If possible, mount the transformer away from corners of walls or ceilings. For installations that must be near a corner, use sound-absorbing materials on the walls and ceiling if necessary to eliminate reection. 2. Provide a solid foundation for mounting the transformer and use vibration dampening mounts if not already provided in the transformer. Eatons ventilated transformers contain a built-in vibration dampening system to minimize and isolate sound transmission. However, supplemental vibration dampening mounts installed between the oor and the transformer may provide additional sound dampening. 3. Make electrical connections to the transformer using exible conduit. 4. Locate the transformer in an area where audible sound is not offensive to building inhabitants. 5. If a transformer is going to be installed in a location where the audible sound could be objectionable, consider installing a transformer specically designed to have reduced sound levels. Eaton offers many transformers with a sound reduction up to 5 dB below NEMA ST-20 limits.
Series-Multiple Windings
Series-multiple windings consist of two similar coils in each winding that can be connected in series or parallel (multiple). Transformers with seriesmultiple windings are designated with an x or a / between the voltage ratings, such as voltages of 240 x 480 or 120/240. If the series-multiple winding is designated by an x, the winding can be connected only in series or parallel. With a / designation, a mid-point also becomes available in addition to the series or parallel connection. As an example, a 240 x 480 winding can be connected for either 240 (parallel) or 480 (series). A 120/240 winding can be connected for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series), or 240 with a 120 mid-point.
Sound Levels
All transformers emit some audible sound due mainly to the vibration generated in their core by alternating ux. NEMA ST-20 denes the maximum average sound levels for ventilated transformers. Table 19.1-2. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01 Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 600V Class Transformers (dB 40)
kVA 09 1050 51150 151300 301500 501700 7011000 10011500 Ventilated Transformers 40 45 50 55 60 62 64 65 Encapsulated Transformers 45 50 55 57
Enclosures
The transformer enclosure is made of heavy-gauge steel and is nished using a continuous process of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of a thermosetting polyester powder coating and subsequent baking. The coating color is ANSI 61 and is UL recognized for outdoor use. In compliance with NEMA ST-20, Eatons ventilated transformers are designed such that the maximum temperature on the top of the enclosure does not exceed 50C rise above the ambient temperature.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 013
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Ventilated Transformers

Description
19.1-7
Applicable Standards
600V-class ventilated transformers are manufactured per the following standards: UL 1561 NEMA ST-20 ANSI C57.12.01 IEC 60726 for CE-marked ventilated models
However, because Eatons ventilated transformers are manufactured using a 220C insulation system, 115C and 80C low temperature rise transformers can be operated as 150C rise transformers. The excess thermal capacity of these low temperature rise transformers allows a 115C transformer to be operated as a 150C rise transformer
and overloaded by 15% of its nameplate kVA without compromising the normal life of the transformer. Likewise, an 80C rise transformer operated as a 150C rise transformer is capable of a constant 30% overload without compromising the normal life expectancy of the transformer.
i ii 1 2
Table 19.1-3. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Single-Phase Transformers
kVA Rating 1 1.5 2 3 Rated Line Voltage 120 8.3 12.5 16.7 25.0 41.7 62.5 83.3 125.0 208.3 312.5 416.7 625.0 833.3 1391.7 2083.3 2775.0 4166.7 208 4.8 7.2 9.6 14.4 24.0 36.6 48.1 72.1 120.2 180.3 240.4 360.6 480.8 802.9 1201.9 1601.0 2403.8 240 4.2 6.3 8.3 12.5 20.8 31.3 41.7 62.5 104.2 156.3 208.3 312.5 416.7 695.8 1041.7 1387.5 2083.3 277 3.6 5.4 7.2 10.8 18.0 27.1 36.1 54.2 90.3 135.4 180.5 270.8 361.0 602.9 902.5 1202.2 1805.1 480 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.3 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 52.1 78.1 104.2 156.3 208.3 347.9 520.8 693.8 1041.7 600 1.7 2.5 3.3 5.0 8.3 12.5 16.7 25.0 41.7 62.5 83.3 125.0 166.7 278.3 416.7 555.0 833.3 2400 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.3 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.3 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 41.7 69.6 104.2 138.8 208.3 4160 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.6 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 24.0 40.1 60.1 80.0 120.2 4800 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 1.0 1.6 2.1 3.1 5.2 7.8 10.4 15.6 20.8 34.8 52.1 69.4 104.2
Seismic Qualication
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 7.5 10 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 250 333 500
Standard Production Tests

The following production tests are performed as standard on all Eaton transformers, prior to shipment: 1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections. 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection. 3. Applied potential tests. 4. Induced potential tests. 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
Note: Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/Line Voltage.
Table 19.1-4. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Three-Phase Transformers
kVA Rating 3 6 9 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 Rated Line Voltage 208 8.3 16.7 25.0 41.6 83.3 125.0 208.2 312.5 416.3 625.0 832.7 1387.8 2081.9 2775.8 240 7.2 14.4 21.6 36.1 72.2 108.4 180.4 271.6 360.8 541.9 721.7 1202.8 1804.3 2405.7 480 3.6 7.2 10.8 18.0 36.1 54.2 90.2 135.3 180.4 270.7 360.8 601.4 902.1 1202.9 600 2.9 5.8 8.7 14.4 28.9 43.3 72.2 108.2 144.3 216.5 288.7 481.1 721.7 962.3 2400 0.7 1.4 2.2 3.6 7.2 10.9 18.0 27.1 36.1 54.2 72.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 4160 0.4 0.8 1.3 2.1 4.2 6.3 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 41.6 69.4 104.1 138.8 4800 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.8 3.6 5.4 9.0 13.5 18.0 27.1 36.1 60.1 90.2 120.3
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Operation
Eatons ventilated transformers are designed for continuous operation at rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as dened in ANSI C57.96. Short-term overload capacity is designed into transformers, as required by ANSI. Ventilated transformers will deliver 200% of nameplate load for 30 minutes; 150% of nameplate load for 1 hour; and 125% of nameplate load for 4 hours without being damaged, provided that a constant 50% load precedes and follows the overload. Refer to ANSI C57.96-01.250 for additional limitations.
Note: Continuous overload capacity is not deliberately designed into transformers. The design objective is to be within the allowable winding temperature rise at nameplate full load capacity.
Note: Three-Phase Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/(Line Voltage x 1.732).
CA08104001E
19.1-8 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers General Purpose Encapsulated Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Construction Features of General Purpose Encapsulated Transformers Rated 600V and Below
General Description
Eatons single-phase and three-phase general purpose encapsulated dry-type transformers are of the two-winding type, self-cooled, and are available in a wide variety of primary and secondary voltage combinations. Eatons transformers are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with all of the latest applicable ANSI, NEMA and IEEE standards. All 600Vclass encapsulated transformers with ratings through 75 kVA are UL listed and CSA certied, and bear the UL and CSA labels. These transformers are designed for continuous operation at rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as dened in ANSI C57.96.
Insulation Systems
Industry standards classify insulation systems and temperature rise as shown below. Table 19.1-5. Insulation System Classication
Ambient Temperature 40C 40C 25C 40C 40C + Winding Rise 55C 80C 135C 115C 150C + Hot Spot 10C 30C 20C 30C 30C = Temp. Class 105C 150C 180C 185C 220C
Core and Coil Assemblies

The transformer core is constructed using high-grade, non-aging, silicon steel with high-magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic ux densities are substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume allows for efcient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations are tightly clamped and compressed. Coils are wound of electrical grade aluminum or copper, and are of continuous wound construction. The BIL (basic impulse level) for all 600V-class windings is 10 kV. In encapsulated transformers, the core and coil assembly is completely encased in a proportioned mixture of resin or epoxy, and aggregate to provide a moistureproof, shock-resistant seal. The core and coil encapsulation system is designed to minimize the audible sound level.
The design life of transformers having different insulation systems is the same; the lower temperature systems are designed for the same life as the higher temperature systems. Eatons encapsulated transformers are manufactured using a 180C insulation system. Required performance is obtained without exceeding the insulation system rating at rated temperature rise in a 40C maximum ambient, with an average ambient temperature of 30C over a 24-hour period. All insulation materials are ameretardant and do not support combustion as dened in ASTM Standard Test Method D635.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 015
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers General Purpose Encapsulated Transformers

Description
19.1-9
Taps
Primary taps are available on many Eaton encapsulated transformers to allow compensation for source voltage variations.
Enclosures
The transformer enclosure is made of heavy-gauge steel and is nished using a continuous process of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of a thermosetting polyester powder coating and subsequent baking. The coating color is ANSI 61 and is UL recognized for outdoor use. In compliance with NEMA ST-20, Eatons transformers are designed such that the maximum temperature on the top of the enclosure does not exceed 50C rise above the ambient temperature. For encapsulated transformers, the enclosure construction is totallyenclosed, non-ventilated NEMA 3R, with lifting provisions. Wall mounting brackets are provided on many Eaton encapsulated transformers. These mounting brackets are designed to provide the proper spacing between the mounting surface and the transformer enclosure. To ensure proper ventilation and cooling of the transformer, follow manufacturers recommended clearances around encapsulated transformers.
Winding Terminations
Primary and secondary windings are terminated in the wiring compartment. Encapsulated units have copper leads or stabs brought out for connections. Ventilated transformers have leads brought out to aluminum or copper pads that are pre-drilled to accept Cu/Al lugs. Aluminum-wound transformers have aluminum pads; copperwound transformers have copper pads. Lugs are not supplied with Eatons transformers; however, lug kits are available as a eld-installed accessory. Eaton recommends external cables be rated 90C (sized at 75C ampacity) for encapsulated designs and rated 75C for ventilated designs.
All Eaton encapsulated transformers are designed to have audible sound levels lower than those required by IEEE C57.12.01. However, consideration should be given to the specic location of a transformer and its installation to minimize the potential for sound transmission to surrounding structures and sound reection. Installation and ambient conditions at a specic location can result in eldmeasured audible sound levels as much as 15 dBA greater than those levels measured in a sound-proof chamber. The following installation methods should be considered: 1. If possible, mount the transformer away from corners of walls or ceilings. For installations that must be near a corner, use soundabsorbing materials on the walls and ceiling if necessary to eliminate reection. 2. Provide a solid foundation for mounting the transformer and use vibration-dampening mounts if not already provided in the transformer. Eatons encapsulated transformers use a special encapsulation system to minimize and isolate sound transmission. However, supplemental vibration dampening mounts installed between the oor and the transformer may provide for additional sound dampening. 3. Make electrical connections to the transformer using exible conduit. 4. Locate the transformer in an area where audible sound is not offensive to building inhabitants. 5. If a transformer is going to be installed in a location where the audible sound could be objectionable, consider installing a transformer specically designed to have reduced sound levels. Eaton offers many transformers with a sound reduction up to 5 dB below IEEE C57.12.01 limits.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Series-Multiple Windings
Series-multiple windings consist of two similar coils in each winding that can be connected in series or parallel (multiple). Transformers with series-multiple windings are designated with an x or a / between the voltage ratings, such as voltages of 240 x 480 or 120/240. If the seriesmultiple winding is designated by an x, the winding can be connected only in series or parallel. With a / designation, a mid-point also becomes available in addition to the series or parallel connection. As an example, a 240 x 480 winding can be connected for either 240 (parallel) or 480 (series). A 120/240 winding can be connected for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series), or 240 with a 120 mid-point.
Sound Levels
All transformers emit some audible sound due mainly to the vibration generated in their core by alternating ux. NEMA ST-20 denes the maximum average sound levels for ventilated transformers, and IEEE C57.12.01 denes the maximum average sound level for encapsulated transformers. Table 19.1-6. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01 Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 600V Class Transformers (dB 40)
CA08104001E
19.1-10 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers General Purpose Encapsulated Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Applicable Standards
600V-class encapsulated transformers are manufactured per the following standards:

Table 19.1-7. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Single-Phase Transformers
kVA Rating 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 250 333 500 Rated Line Voltage 120 8.3 12.5 16.7 25.0 41.7 62.5 83.3 125.0 208.3 312.5 416.7 625.0 833.3 1391.7 2083.3 2775.0 4166.7 208 4.8 7.2 9.6 14.4 24.0 36.6 48.1 72.1 120.2 180.3 240.4 360.6 480.8 802.9 1201.9 1601.0 2403.8 240 4.2 6.3 8.3 12.5 20.8 31.3 41.7 62.5 104.2 156.3 208.3 312.5 416.7 695.8 1041.7 1387.5 2083.3 277 3.6 5.4 7.2 10.8 18.0 27.1 36.1 54.2 90.3 135.4 180.5 270.8 361.0 602.9 902.5 1202.2 1805.1 480 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.3 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 52.1 78.1 104.2 156.3 208.3 347.9 520.8 693.8 1041.7 600 1.7 2.5 3.3 5.0 8.3 12.5 16.7 25.0 41.7 62.5 83.3 125.0 166.7 278.3 416.7 555.0 833.3 2400 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.3 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.3 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 41.7 69.6 104.2 138.8 208.3 4160 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.6 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 24.0 40.1 60.1 80.0 120.2 4800 0.2 0.3 0.4 06 1.0 1.6 2.1 3.1 5.2 7.8 10.4 15.6 20.8 34.8 52.1 69.4 104.2
UL 5085 up to 15 kVA UL 1561 15 kVA and larger NEMA ST-20 ANSI C57.12.01 IEEE C57.12.01 IEC 61558 for single-phase CE-marked models CSA C22.2 No. 47-M90
Seismic Qualication
Note: Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/Line Voltage.
Table 19.1-8. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Three-Phase Transformers
kVA Rating 3 6 9 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 Rated Line Voltage 208 8.3 16.7 25.0 41.6 83.3 125.0 208.2 312.5 416.3 625.0 832.7 1387.8 2081.9 2775.8 240 7.2 14.4 21.6 36.1 72.2 108.4 180.4 271.6 360.8 541.9 721.7 1202.8 1804.3 2405.7 480 3.6 7.2 10.8 18.0 36.1 54.2 90.2 135.3 180.4 270.7 360.8 601.4 902.1 1202.9 600 2.9 5.8 8.7 14.4 28.9 43.3 72.2 108.2 144.3 216.5 288.7 481.1 721.7 962.3 2400 0.7 1.4 2.2 3.6 7.2 10.9 18.0 27.1 36.1 54.2 72.2 120.3 180.4 240.6 4160 0.4 0.8 1.3 2.1 4.2 6.3 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 41.6 69.4 104.1 138.8 4800 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.8 3.6 5.4 9.0 13.5 18.0 27.1 36.1 60.1 90.2 120.3
Standard Production Tests

The following production tests are performed as standard on all Eaton transformers, prior to shipment: 1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections. 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection. 3. Applied potential tests. 4. Induced potential tests. 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
Note: Three-Phase Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/(Line Voltage x 1.732).
Operation
Eatons encapsulated transformers are designed for continuous operation at rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as dened in ANSI C57.96. Short-term overload capacity is designed into transformers, as required by ANSI. Encapsulated transformers will deliver 200% of nameplate load for 30 minutes; 150% of nameplate load for 1 hour; and 125% of nameplate load for 4 hours without being damaged, provided that a constant 50% load precedes and follows the overload. Refer to ANSI C57.96-01.250 for additional limitations.
Note: Continuous overload capacity is not deliberately designed into transformers because the design objective is to be within the allowable winding temperature rise at nameplate full load capacity.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 017
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers K-Factor Rated Nonlinear Transformers

Description
K = (Ih)2(h)2 Ih = Percent Current at Harmonic h
19.1-11
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear Transformers Rated 600V and Below

Applications
Eaton K-Factor transformers are specically designed to withstand the harmful overheating effects caused by harmonics generated by nonlinear (non-sinusoidal) loads. These loads include computers, laser printers, copiers and other ofce equipment, as well as video monitors and other electronic equipment. Eaton K-Factor transformers are not simply over-sized transformers. The core and coils of our K-Factor transformers are specially designed to have reduced induction levels, which results in a reduction in stray losses. Oversized (200% rated) neutrals and electrostatic shielding are typical features found in our K-Factor transformers. Eaton K-Factor transformers are manufactured with the same high-quality construction features as our other ventilated transformer products, including NEMA 2 enclosures as standard.
Eatons ventilated transformers should be installed with a minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance around the transformer enclosure to prevent accidental contact with ammable or combustible materials. Most Eaton ventilated transformers require a minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance in front and in back of the transformer to allow for proper airow through the transformer. Care should be taken to avoid restricting the airow through the bottom of the transformer. Transformers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
h = Harmonic Order, i.e., 3rd, 5th, 7th For example, a load that is 90% of the fundamental, 30% of the third harmonic, and 20% of the fth harmonic would yield (.9)2(1)2 + (.3)2(3)2 + (.2)2(5)2 or a K-factor of 2.62. This load would require a transformer with a K-factor rating of 4. Transformers that carry a K-factor rating dene the transformers ability to withstand a given harmonic load while operating within the transformers insulation class. An analysis of harmonic loads and a calculation of the K-factor must be made to properly apply transformers in any building or facility. Note that the calculated K-factor is not constant since nonlinear loads change throughout the day as equipment and lighting is turned off and on. These harmonic loads also change over the life of the building or facility as equipment is added or removed.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons ventilated transformers have wiring compartments sized to comply with NEMA and NEC standards.
The K-factor
A common industry term for the amount of harmonics produced by a given load is the K-factor. The larger the K-factor, the more harmonics are present. Linear loads, for example, have a K-factor of 1. Transformers may carry a K-factor rating to dene the transformers ability to withstand the additional heating generated by harmonic currents.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eaton K-Factor transformers are available in a wide range of ratings to meet specic voltage conversion requirements. Eaton offers transformers with K-factor ratings of 4, 13, 20, 30, 40 and 50.
Harmonic Currents
Harmonic currents are found in nonlinear loads. These currents are generated by various types of equipment including switching mode power supplies that abruptly switch current on and off during each line cycle. Switching mode power supplies or diode capacitor power supplies convert AC line voltage to low voltage DC. This process accomplished by charging capacitors during each line cycle with narrow pulses of current that are time-coincident with line voltage peaks. Examples of this equipment include electronic ballasts for uorescent lighting, personal computers, printers, fax machines, electronic and medical test equipment uninterruptible power supplies and solid-state motor drives.
Note: Nonlinear is synonymous with the term non-sinusoidal.
Calculating the K-factor

All nonlinear waveforms can be broken down mathematically into a fundamental frequency and its harmonics. IEEE C57.110 establishes a direct relationship between these harmonics and transformer heating. Underwriters Laboratories has established a similar relationship, the K-factor, which is derived by summing the square of the percentage current at a given harmonic level multiplied by the square of the harmonic order.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase ventilated designs are available in ratings from 15 kVA through 167 kVA; three-phase ratings 15 kVA through 1500 kVA.
Insulation System and Temperature Rise

Ventilated transformers are manufactured using a 220C insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Low temperature rise designs (115C and 80C temperature rise) are available as options.
Frequency
Most ventilated transformers are designed to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available as an option. Eatons ventilated transformers can be designed to operate at a variety of frequencies.
Winding Material
Aluminum conductor and terminations are provided as standard on ventilated transformers. Copper winding conductors and terminations are available as an option.
CA08104001E
Figure 19.1-1. Harmonic Currents Found in Nonlinear Loads Cause Wave Shape Distortion and Create Added Stresses on Transformers
21
19.1-12 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Harmonic Mitigating Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 018
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Harmonic Mitigating Transformers Rated 600V and Below

Applications
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers (HMTs) are specially designed transformers that treat a wide variety of harmonics. Also called phaseshifting transformers, their low zerosequence impedance wye zig-zag secondary windings prevent harmful triplen (3rd, 9th, 15th, etc.) harmonic currents from coupling into the primary delta, where they can progress upstream to the service entrance. Multiple HMTs with a variety of phaseshift congurations can be applied in a coordinated scheme to target 5th, 7th and higher-order harmonics at the common bus feeding all of the transformers. HMTs are ideally suited for installations rich in harmonic loads, such as educational facilities (K12 and universities), government, commercial, medical and call-center applications. HMTs are manufactured with the same high-quality features as Eatons ventilated transformers, including NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C (Class R) insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Additionally, Eatons HMTs are manufactured with a 200% neutral and electrostatic shield as standard. Eatons harmonic mitigating ventilated transformers are designed primarily for indoor installations. Ventilated transformers have NEMA 2 enclosures as standard, and are suitable for installation outdoors when NEMA 3R weathershield kits are installed. Ventilated transformers are typically oor-mounted on an elevated housekeeping pad. When properly supported, they are also suitable for wall mounting or trapeze-mounting from ceilings.
kVA Capacity
Three-phase ratings 15 kVA through 500 kVA.
Application Considerations
Eaton offers harmonic mitigating transformers with four different phaseshift options: Type NON (0 phase-shift) Type POS (+15 phase-shift) Type NEG (15 phase-shift) Type THR (30 phase-shift)


Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers are manufactured using a 220C insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Low temperature rise designs (115C and 80C temperature rise) are available as options.
Frequency
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers are designed to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available as an option. The transformers can be designed to operate at a variety of frequencies.
To select the proper HMT, the nonlinear load prole of a particular application must be known. Type NON (0) HMTs are ideally suited for treating 3rd and other triplen harmonics that are the signature of single-phase nonlinear loads. This is the most common application encountered. Type NON HMTs use electromagnetic ux cancellation to cancel triplen harmonics. There, harmonics are treated in the secondary windings and prevented from coupling into the primary delta windings, where they may be transmitted upstream to the service entrance location. Type NON HMTs can be deployed singly to treat triplen harmonics. As with most other harmonic mitigating methods, the closer the HMT can be installed to the load, the greater the benet. Type POS (+15) and Type NEG (15) harmonic mitigating transformers are typically used together in coordinated pairs to treat 5th, 7th and other harmonics that are generated by threephase nonlinear loads. 5th, 7th and higher order harmonics pass through the harmonic mitigating transformers, to a point of common coupling; the rst common electrical point that is shared by the HMTs. At this common point, balanced portions of the 5th, 7th, etc., harmonic currents are canceled and prevented from owing further upstream in the distribution system. Type POS and Type NEG HMTs have nearly identical electrical characteristics, including zerosequence and positive-sequence impedance and reactance. The more closely matched the coordinated pairs of transformers, the more thorough the harmonic cancellation. Coordinated pairs of Type NON and Type THR transformers, as well as coordinated pairs of Type NON, Type THR, Type POS and Type NEG HMTs provide treatment of 3rd and other triplen harmonics within their secondary windings. This cancellation is achieved by virtue of their wye zig-zag winding conguration.
Winding Material
Copper conductor and terminations are provided as standard on harmonic mitigating transformers. Aluminum winding conductors and terminations are available as an option.
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers should be installed with a minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance around the transformer enclosure to prevent accidental contact with ammable or combustible materials. Most Eaton ventilated transformers require a minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance in front and in back of the transformer to allow for proper airow through the transformer. Care should be taken to avoid restricting the airow through the bottom of the transformer. Transformers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons ventilated transformers have wiring compartments sized to comply with NEMA and NEC standards.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons harmonic mitigating transformers are available in a wide range of ratings to meet specic voltage conversion requirements. Eatons HMTs accept a three-phase three-wire input and have a three-phase four-wire (phases and neutral) output.
Thermal Sensors
Harmonic mitigating transformers are available with warning and/or alarm thermal sensors imbedded in their coils. Thermal sensors are normally open dry contacts that can be wired to provide a signal to remote locations to indicate a potential heating problem within the transformer coils. Contacts are rated 180C (warning) and 200C (alarm).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 019
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Harmonic Mitigating Transformers

Description
19.1-13
Harmonic Mitigating Transformers

As our world becomes even more dependent on electrical and electronic equipment, there is an increased likelihood that operations will experience the negative effects of harmonic distortion. The productivity and efciency gains achieved from increasingly sophisticated pieces of equipment have a drawback: increased harmonic distortion in the electrical distribution system. The difcult thing about harmonic distortion is determining the source. Once this task has been completed, the solution can be easy. Harmonic mitigating transformers (HMTs) are one of the many possible solutions to help eliminate these harmful harmonics.
What are Harmonics?

An understanding of how harmonics are generated and what harmonics really are is necessary in order to understand how HMTs can provide harmonic mitigation. Electronic equipment requires DC voltage to operate. Rectiers and capacitors are used to convert AC voltage to DC voltage within the equipment. These devices are frequently referred to as switch mode power supplies. As the capacitors charge and discharge during this conversion, the capacitor draws current in pulses, not at a continuous rate. This irregular current demand, as depicted in Figure 19.1-2, distorts the linear 60 Hz sine wave. As a result, these types of loads are commonly referred to as non-sinusoidal, or nonlinear. As shown in Figures 19.1-3 and 19.1-4, the waveform created by the nonlinear source is actually the mathematical sum of several sine waves, each with a different frequency and magnitude. Each of these individual waveforms is called a harmonic, and is identied by its frequency relative to the fundamental frequency, 60 Hz. In other words, each individual harmonic is identied by a number, which is the number of complete cycles the specic harmonic goes through in a single 60 Hz cycle. In Figure 19.1-4, the fundamental frequency is 60 Hz. The fundamental frequency is assigned the harmonic number of 1, and is the benchmark for all other harmonic numbering. The fundamental, 60 Hz sine wave completes 60 full cycles in one second. The 3rd harmonic completes three full cycles in the time it takes the fundamental to complete just one cycle, or 180 cycles per second. Likewise, the 5th harmonic completes ve full cycles in the time it takes the fundamental harmonic to complete a single cycle, which equates to 300 cycles per second. Odd multiples of the 3rd harmonic (3rd, 9th,15th, 21st, etc.) are commonly referred to as triplen harmonics.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
60 Hz fundamental
Figure 19.1-2. Typical Waveform of Single-Phase Devices
Figure 19.1-3. Composite Waveform
5th
7th 3rd fundamental
Figure 19.1-4. Components of a Nonlinear Waveform
The proliferation of electronic equipment (including computers, fax machines, copiers, electronic ballasts, ofce equipment, cash registers, slot machines, electronic monitoring devices, video games, medical diagnostic equipment and the like) is what makes single-phase devices the most common source of harmonics. These devices generate a typical waveform shown in Figure 19.1-2, and have a harmonic prole as shown in Table 19.1-9. As one can see, the predominant harmonic is the 3rd harmonic.
Three-phase, nonlinear loads such as drives, on the other hand, are typically rich in 5th and 7th harmonics.
CA08104001E
19.1-14 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Harmonic Mitigating Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
What Problems do Harmonics Cause?

The distorted current waveform that is created by nonlinear loads can cause many problems in an electrical distribution system. Depending upon the severity of the harmonic distortion, the negative effects of harmonics may be tolerable, and the installation of a K-factorrated transformer may be an adequate solution. K-factorrated transformers do not provide any harmonic treatment. Rather, they are designed to withstand the destructive effects of the additional heat generated by harmonic currents in the transformers windings. In many instances, the harmful effects of harmonics are too severe, and simply tolerating them is not an acceptable option. Harmonic currents can cause excessive heating in distribution transformers. This additional heat not only reduces the life expectancy of a transformer, it also reduces the usable capacity of the transformer. Another side effect is that the audible noise of a transformer may be amplied when installed in a system that contains harmonics. An important characteristic of harmonics is that they are transmitted upstream from the load, to the transformers secondary windings, through the primary windings of the transformer, back to the service entrance, and eventually to the utility lines.
Harmonic currents owing upstream from nonlinear loads, through the system impedance of cables and transformers, create harmonic voltage distortion. When linear loads, like motors, are subjected to harmonic voltage distortion, they will draw a nonlinear harmonic current. As with distribution transformers, harmonic currents cause increased heating, due to iron and copper losses, in motors and generators. This increased heating can reduce the life of the motor, as well as the motors efciency. In electrical cables, harmonic currents may also create increased heating, which can lead to premature aging of the electrical insulation. Nuisance tripping of the circuit breakers protecting the cable may also occur. Communications equipment and data processing equipment are especially susceptible to the harmful effects of harmonics because they rely on a nearly perfect sinusoidal input. This equipment may malfunction, or even fail, when installed in systems that are rich in harmonics. The costs associated with downtime resulting from the malfunction or failure of electrical or electronic equipment can be staggering. These costs can easily surpass thousands, if not millions, of dollars per hour in lost production or lost productivity. In addition to the well-dened costs associated with the most catastrophic of harmonic effects, there are many less quantitative costs that are often overlooked when evaluating the need for harmonic mitigation. The increased heating caused by harmonics in cables, motors and transformers increases the cooling requirements in air-conditioned areas. The same increases in heating result in increased maintenance costs and more frequent equipment replacement in order to avoid failures that could shut down a building for a period of time.
What do HMTs do?

HMTs are an economical solution in the battle against the harmful effects of harmonics. HMTs are passive devices: they dont have any moving parts and they are typically energized 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year. This means that they are always on the job treating harmonics, regardless of the level of load they are serving at a given point in time. Whenever the HMT is energized, it will provide harmonic treatment. Harmonic mitigating transformers are commonly referred to as phase-shifting transformers. The HMT offering from Eatons electrical business has delta-connected primary windings and wye zig-zag connected secondary windings. The use of wye zig-zag secondary windings allows a transformer to be designed in a wide variety of different phase-shifts (30, 15, 0, +15). In standard delta-wye transformers, including K-factorrated transformers, triplen harmonics are passed from the secondary windings into the primary delta windings, where they are trapped and circulate. In HMTs, the electromagnetic ux cancellation created by the wye zig-zag winding conguration prevents 3rd and other triplen harmonics from being transmitted into the primary delta winding. Harmonic treatment is provided entirely by electromagnetic ux cancellation; no lters, capacitors or other such devices are used. It is important to remember that the harmonic currents still ow in the secondary windings.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 021
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Harmonic Mitigating Transformers

Description
19.1-15
Benets of Installing HMTs

In addition to improved system reliability and reduced maintenance costs, HMTs also have excellent energy-saving characteristics. With the cost of electricity continuing to increase around the world, there is an ever-increasing interest in energyefcient products. In many facilities, the cost of electricity is the second largest expense, eclipsed only by salaries and wages. Transformers consume energy even when they are lightly loaded or not loaded at all. Signicant energy savings may be attained if the no-load losses of a transformer are reduced. NEMA Standard TP-1 addresses this issue by requiring high efciency levels when a transformer is loaded at 35% of its full capacity. However, this standard applies to linear load proles only, and tests to validate compliance with NEMA TP-1 are performed using linear loads.
In actual applications, the growing presence of electronic devices creates nonlinear load proles. Nonlinear loads cause the losses in distribution transformers to increase, thereby reducing their realized efciency. Therefore, NEMA TP-1 efciency compliance may not be a true indication of the efciency of a transformer exposed to nonlinear loads. Though a measure of linear load efciency, Eatons family of HMTs meets the efciency standards set forth in NEMA Standard TP-1. Because HMTs are intended to be installed in systems that contain high levels of nonlinear loads, Eatons family of HMTs is designed to meet the NEMA TP-1 efciency levels when applied to nonlinear load proles with 100% harmonic distortion, across a broad range of load levels, not just the 35% load level used in NEMA TP-1. These energy savings are realized over the entire life of the transformer. Table 19.1-9. Typical Harmonic Prole of Single-Phase Switched Mode Power Supply
Harmonic 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Magnitude 1.000 0.810 0.606 0.370 0.157 0.024 0.063 0.079
The closer that an HMT can be located to the load, the greater the benets of harmonic treatment. Installation of a large capacity HMT at the service entrance of a large building would certainly provide some harmonic treatment. However, installation of several smaller rated HMTs, perhaps one or more on each oor of a building, provides greater benets that will be noticed throughout the facility. For this reason, the most popular HMTs will be rated 75 kVA and less. This complements the cost-efciencies that can be gained by distributing higher voltages through smaller cables to the point where a safer, lower voltage is needed to operate equipment. When connecting the loads to the transformer, it is important to remember that the balanced portion of the harmonic loads will be treated. To achieve the maximum harmonic treatment, when considering the triplen harmonics that are treated in the secondary windings, each phase should be balanced, and the harmonic prole of the loads should be as similar as possible. When treating 5th, 7th and higher order harmonics by using multiple transformers, the loads should likewise have similar harmonic proles, and the kVA and impedance of the transformers should be identical as well. For example, two 75 kVA HMTs can be paired with a single 150 kVA HMT to provide maximum harmonic performance. In instances where transformers of unequal kVA are used in combination, harmonic treatment is provided for the lowest kVA load. For example, if, instead of pairing two 75 kVA HMTs with a single 150 kVA HMT, one would pair two 45 kVA HMTs with a 150 kVA HMT. Only 90 kVA (two times 45 kVA) of the 150 kVA load would be treated (if they were fully loaded). In real-world situations, it is nearly impossible to have perfectly matched loads. However, the benets of treating harmonics, even in situations where the loads are unbalanced, are a far superior option than to not treat them at all. Eaton HMT transformers comply with NEMA TP-1 standards.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
19.1-16 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 022
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Transformers Rated 600V and Below

Applications
Eatons family of NEMA TP-1-2002, ventilated transformers are another option available to customers interested in reducing their energy consumption. These transformers comply with all state and local regulations that mandate installation of energy-efcient distribution transformers in new construction. NEMA TP-1 transformers are typically installed in commercial construction, as well as in educational (K12 and universities), government and industrial facilities. NEMA TP-1 compliant transformers are especially designed to have low no-load (core) losses. Minimum efciency levels have been established for these transformers when loaded at 35% of their full load capacity. NEMA TP-1 transformers are manufactured using the same high-quality construction features as Eatons ventilated transformer products, including NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C (Class R) insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. Ventilated transformers are typically oor-mounted on an elevated housekeeping pad. When properly supported, they are also suitable for wall mounting or trapeze-mounting from ceilings.
Frequency
Most NEMA TP-1 transformers are designed to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available as an option. Eatons transformers can be designed to operate at a variety of frequencies.
The Energy Policy Act of 2005

The Energy Policy Act of 2005 and the resulting Federal Law 10 CFR Part 431 require that efciency of low voltage dry-type distribution transformers manufactured after January 1, 2007, shall be no less than the efciency levels listed in Table 4-2 of NEMA Standard TP-1-2002. Transformers specically excluded from the scope of this law include: transformers rated less than 15 kVA, transformers rated greater than 600V, transformers rated for operation at anything other than 60 Hz, transformers with a tap range greater than 20%, drive transformers, rectier transformers, autotransformers, uninterruptible power supply transformers, special impedance transformers, regulating transformers, sealed and nonventilated transformers, machine tool transformers, welding transformers, grounding transformers and testing transformers. Table 19.1-10. NEMA TP-1-2002 Efciency Levels
Tables of Energy Efciency NEMA Class 1 Efciency Levels Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Low Voltage (600V and below) Single-Phase kVA 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 250 333 Three-Phase Efciency 97.0 97.5 97.7 98.0 98.2 98.3 98.5 98.6 98.7 98.8 98.9 Efciency kVA 97.7 98.0 98.2 98.3 98.5 98.6 98.7 98.8 98.9 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000
Winding Material
Aluminum conductor and terminations are provided as standard on ventilated transformers. Copper winding conductors and terminations are available as an option.
Eatons NEMA TP-1 transformers require clearances that are identical to those for general purpose ventilated transformers. Transformers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons NEMA TP-1 energy-efcient transformers have wiring compartments sized to comply with NEMA and NEC standards.
What is NEMA TP-1?

The Energy Act of 1992, H.R. 776 empowered the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) to set guidelines for more efcient electrical devices that would reduce the nations energy consumption. In 1996, in conjunction with the DOE, NEMA adopted a new standard for efciencies of distribution transformers: NEMA Standard TP-1-1996. This standard set minimum efciency levels for standard transformer kVA ratings. Prior studies had shown that transformers in commercial and industrial facilities are loaded at an average of 35% of their nameplate full-load capacity. The minimum efciency levels included in NEMA TP-1 for low voltage transformers (600V and below) are based upon this 35% loading, and at 75C ambient temperature. The Environmental Protection Agency adopted the efciency levels set forth in NEMA TP-1 as part of their Energy Star program. The DOE, in conjunction with NEMA, is continually looking at the attainable efciency levels for distribution transformers, and revising them upward. Since distribution transformers are typically energized 24 hours a day, seven days a week, 365 days a year, the energy savings gained by installing high-efciency transformers is realized for the vast majority of a transformers 20-year or greater anticipated life.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
As an Energy Star Partner, Eatons brand offers a wide range of NEMA TP-1 energy-efcient transformers to meet specic voltage conversion requirements.
kVA Capacity
Eatons NEMA TP-1 ventilated transformers are available in the same kVA ratings as single-phase and three-phase general purpose ventilated transformers.

Eatons NEMA TP-1 energy-efcient transformers are manufactured using a 220C insulation system with 150C as standard. NEMA TP-1 transformers are also available in either 115C or 80C temperature rise.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 023
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Low Temperature Rise Transformers

Description
19.1-17
CSL-3 Transformers
Energy Policy Legislation
In an effort to increase energy efciency within the U.S. electrical system, effective January 1, 2007, the federal government implemented legislation found within EPACT 2005 standards to change manufacturing of dry-type transformers such that they had to meet the NEMA TP-1 energy efciency levels. The foundation and reasoning for this change was started in a 2004 government study called, 10 CFR Part 430Energy Conservation Program for Commercial and Industrial Equipment: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers; Proposed Rule. This study laid the foundations of ve different efciency levels (Candidate Standard Levels CSL) for a multitude of transformer technologies. Whereas many transformer technologies (both dry and oillled, low and medium voltage) were discussed, the CSL-1 transformer represents the least efciency level of low voltage, dry-type transformers listed. This energy efciency level is at the same performance as NEMA TP-1 transformers (the current required efciency performance). The CSL-2 through CSL-5 classications represent increasingly higher performance energy efciency levels (with CSL-5 being the highest efciencies/ lowest losses). While CSL-5 is the most efcient transformer in this classication shown, currently the material costs necessary to meet those efciencies are prohibitive in the commercial market. The CSL-3 level has a signicant increase in performance when compared with NEMA TP-1 efciency levels.
The 10 CFR Part 430 standard was an evolving standard. As more was learned about possible transformer efciencies, materials and performance, the standard continued to evolve until the 10 CFR Part 431 Energy Conservation Program for Commercial Equipment: Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards; Final Rule was published in October 2007. This nal rule shows improvements and renements made as the standard matured, changing CSL-3 minimum efciency levels from an average of 28% lower losses than NEMA TP-1 to an average of 32%. Eaton Corporation is continuing to provide cutting-edge efciencies and performance to our customers looking for that extra performance when designing a LEED or green building.
CSL-3 Compliant Eaton Type E3 Features and Benets

480V to 208/120V standard 150 or 115C temperature rise available Copper windings and terminals standard; aluminum not available CSL-3 2007 Final Rule efciencies levels Increased efciencies help to gain LEED points (because LEED only incorporates regulated losses, the comparison of No Load Losses against standard NEMA TP-1 transformers can be used to document energy savings)
Lbs of CO2 Saved 608 991 1411 2007 2682 3513 4422 5520
30%40%less losses than NEMA TP-1 transformers No additional maintenance to maintain energy efciency and savings K-13 ratedcan be used in areas with a high concentration of nonlinear loads 25-year, pro-rated, warranty Ultra-low excitation (no-load) losses Available in three-phase ratings from 15 to 300 kVA Reduced heat output helps to reduce cooling costs Energy savings provides a return on investment (ROI) energy savings analysis Environmentally friendly through reduced pollution due to low energy losses 200% rated neutral Single electrostatic shield for attenuation of common-mode and transverse-mode noise 220C insulation system Operating costs kept to a minimum May be installed as a stand-alone transformer, or included with an Integrated Facility System (IFS) Meet NEMA ST-20 audible sound level standards Enclosures are NEMA 2 drip-proof. The addition of optional weathershields makes the enclosure NEMA 3R rainproof
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Table 19.1-11. Environmental Impact of E3 Transformers vs. Standard NEMA TP-1

kVA Number of Men (Average Weight 250 Lbs) CO2 Savings Equivalence 3.0 5.0 7.0 10.0 13.4 17.6 22.1 27.6 Pollution Cleaning 61 99 141 201 269 352 443 553
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300
Environmental impact data per nationalized averages of utility pollution production in 2004 published by the U.S. EPA eGrid report in 2007. Transformer losses based on 35% loading of nameplate with linear load.
CA08104001E
19.1-18 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Motor Drive Isolation Transformers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Motor Drive Isolation Transformers Rated 600V and Below

Applications
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are especially designed for three-phase SCR controlled, variable speed motor drives load proles. Sized by horsepower and common motor voltages, motor drive isolation transformers are braced to withstand the mechanical stresses associated with AC adjustable frequency drives or DC drives. Two-winding drive isolation transformers provide: Electrical isolation between the incoming line and the drive circuitry Voltage conversion on input line to standard drive input voltages Help to minimize line disturbances caused by SCR ring Reduce short-circuit currents and voltage line transients
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are available in a wide range of ratings to meet specic voltage conversion requirements. Available in three-phase ventilated designs to 1500 hp and 600V; epoxy encapsulated three-phase designs are available to 20 hp.
Winding Material
Aluminum conductor and terminations are provided as standard on ventilated transformers. Copper winding conductors and terminations are available as an option. For encapsulated designs, most models rated 2 kVA and below are constructed using copper windings; 3 kVA and larger designs have aluminum windings as standard, with copper windings available as an option.
kVA Capacity
Eatons motor drive isolation encapsulated and ventilated transformers are available in the same kVA ratings as general purpose encapsulated and ventilated transformers.
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers require clearances that are identical to those for general purpose transformers. Transformers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.

Eatons motor drive isolation ventilated transformers are manufactured using a 220C insulation system with 150C temperature rise as standard. 115C or 80C temperature rise are available as an option. Encapsulated designs use a 180C insulation system with 115C temperature rise as standard. 80C temperature rise is available as an option on encapsulated transformers.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers have wiring compartments sized to comply with NEMA and NEC standards.
Thermal Sensors
Eatons motor drive isolation transformers are provided with thermal sensors imbedded in their coils. The thermal sensors have normally open dry contacts that can be wired to provide a signal to remote locations to indicate a potential heating problem within the transformer coils. Contacts are rated for 180C.
Motor drive isolation transformers are manufactured using the same high-quality construction features as our ventilated transformer products, including NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C (Class R) insulation system as standard. Epoxy encapsulated models have NEMA 3R enclosures and 115C temperature rise as standard. All Eaton three-phase ventilated motor drive isolation transformers include a normally open dry contact temperature sensor installed in the coils. This sensor can be connected to provide advance alert or warning of a potential overheating of the transformer. Ventilated transformers are typically oor-mounted on an elevated housekeeping pad. When properly supported, they are also suitable for wall mounting or trapezemounting from ceilings. Encapsulated designs are typically wall-mounted through 15 kVA; larger designs are oor-mount.
Frequency
Most motor drive isolation transformers are designed to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available as an option. Eatons transformers can be designed to operate at a variety of frequencies.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 025
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Hazardous Location Transformers

Description
19.1-19
Hazardous Location Transformers Rated 600V and Below

Applications
Eatons hazardous location transformers are suitable for use in environments classied by the 2002 and 2005 National Electrical Code (NEC) as Class I, Division 2, Group C or D, as dened by NEC Article 501, when installed in compliance with NEC-recommended procedures for dry-type transformers rated 600V and below. As dened by NEC Article 500, Class I, Division 2 locations include atmospheres that may contain volatile or ignitable concentrations of ammable liquids or gas vapors, or locations adjacent to such environments. Acetone, ammonia, benzene, gasoline, methane, propane and natural gas are examples of such substances. Eatons hazardous location transformers are of the encapsulated design, and are available up to 600V ratings. Single-phase ratings 0.05 37.5 kVA; three-phase ratings to 75 kVA. Hazardous location transformers use a 180C insulation system with 115C temperature rise. All Eaton hazardous location transformers are provided with explosion-proof connections. When provided in a Grade 304 or 316 stainless steel enclosure, Eatons hazardous location transformers meet the corrosion-resistance requirements of a NEMA 3RX enclosure rating. Hazardous location transformers can be mounted in any position indoors, and only in upright positions for outdoor installations.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons hazardous location transformers are available in the same ratings as sand and resin encapsulated transformers. Hazardous location transformers are available in a wide range of ratings to meet specic customer requirements.
Eatons wall-mounted hazardous location transformers have a specially designed hanger bracket that spaces the transformer an adequate distance from the mounting surface. Floor-mounted designs should be installed with a minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance around the transformer enclosure to prevent accidental contact with ammable or combustible materials. Transformers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kVA Capacity
Single-phase designs are available in ratings from 0.05 kVA through 37.5 kVA; three phase ratings 375 kVA.

Eatons hazardous location transformers are manufactured using a 180C insulation system with 115C temperature rise as standard. 80C temperature rise is available as an option.
Wiring Compartments
Eatons hazardous location transformers do not have a wiring compartment. Transformers leads are brought out through explosion-proof ttings. Leads of adequate length to allow for them to be terminated in appropriately rated junction boxes. The explosionproof tting of wall-mount transformers is located in the bottom portion of the enclosure; oor-mount designs have the ttings located in the top section of the enclosure.
Frequency
Most hazardous location transformers are designed to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available as an option. Eatons transformers can be designed to operate at a variety of frequencies.
Winding Material
Copper conductors and terminations are provided as standard on Eatons hazardous location transformers rated 2 kVA and less. Aluminum conductor and terminations are provided as standard on hazardous location transformers rated 3 kVA and greater. Copper winding conductors and terminations are available as an option.
CA08104001E
19.1-20 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Mini-Power Centers

Description
September 2011
Sheet 19 026
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
MiniPower Centers Rated 600V and Below

Applications
An Eaton minipower center replaces three individual components: Primary main breaker Transformer Distribution loadcenter

Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons minipower centers are available in single-phase and threephase ratings to 600V, 100A and 30 kVA with secondary loadcenters with provisions for up to 24 singlepole branch breakers. Minipower centers are available in a wide range of ratings to meet specic voltage conversion requirements.
Wiring Compartments
Eatons minipower centers have wiring compartments sized to comply with NEMA and NEC standards. Ample conduit knockouts are provided to offer ready access. The wiring compartment of wall-mounted transformers is located in the bottom portion of the enclosure.
Primary Main Breakers

Minipower centers are provided with primary main circuit breakers that have an interrupting rating of 14 kAIC. EHD primary main circuit breakers are provided as standard on mini-power centers with a 480V primary; 600V designs have an FD primary main breaker as standard. Primary main circuit breakers with greater AIC ratings are available as an option on minipower centers with plug-on secondary circuit breakers. Optional primary main breakers are FD (rate 25 kAIC at 480V; 18 kAIC at 600V), HFD (65 kAIC at 480V; 25 kAIC at 600V) or FDC (100 kAIC at 480V; 35 kAIC at 600V).
...by combining all three into a single unit. All interconnecting wiring is performed at the factory. Minipower centers are ideally suited for applications where 120V is required at a remote location. Parking lots, workbenches and temporary power on construction sites are common applications for minipower centers. Available with aluminum bus and plug-on branch breakers, or with copper bus and bolt-on branch breakers. Minipower centers incorporate an encapsulated transformer in their construction. Primary main breakers are available in a variety of interrupting ratings. The NEMA 3R enclosure makes it ideally suited for use in areas that contain dust, moisture, corrosive fumes, metal shavings and other airborne particles that may cause damage to ventilated transformers. When provided in a Grade 316 stainless steel enclosure, the Eaton minipower center meets the corrosion-resistance requirements of a NEMA 3RX enclosure rating. Minipower centers can be mounted in any position indoors, and in upright positions only for outdoor installations.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase designs are available in ratings from 3 kVA through 25 kVA; three-phase ratings 15 kVA through 30 kVA.

Minipower centers are manufactured using a 180C insulation system with 115C temperature rise as standard. 80C temperature rise is available as an option.
Frequency
Most minipower centers are designed to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available as an option. Eatons minipower centers can be designed to operate at a variety of frequencies.
Branch Circuit Breakers

Eatons minipower centers are available with an aluminum bus loadcenter interior that accepts 1.00-inch plug-on branch circuit breakers Type BR family. The all-copper minipower center is constructed with a copper-wound transformer and a copper bus loadcenter interior that accepts 1.00-inch bolt-on branch breakers Type BAB family.
Winding Material
Aluminum conductor and terminations are provided as standard on encapsulated transformers rated 3 kVA and greater. Copper winding conductors and terminations are available as an option. Copper windings are standard in the all-copper model.
Eatons minipower centers are designed to be wall-mounted. They have a specially designed hanger bracket that spaces the minipower center an adequate distance from the mounting surface. Minipower centers should be located in areas not accessible to the public.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 027
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Single-Phase Transformers for Motors

Technical Data
19.1-21
Transformer Selection
How to Select Single-Phase Units
1. Determine the primary (source) voltagethe voltage presently available. 2. Determine the secondary (load) voltagethe voltage needed at the load. 3. Determine the kVA load: If the load is dened in kVA, a transformer can be selected from the tabulated data. If the load rating is given in amperes, determine the load kVA from the following chart. To determine kVA when volts and amperes are known, use the formula: kVA = Volts x Amperes 1000 If the load is an AC motor, determine the minimum transformer kVA from Table 19.1-12 at the right. Select a transformer rating equal to or greater than the load kVA. 4. Dene tap arrangements needed. 5. Dene temperature rise.
Table 19.1-12. Single-Phase AC Motors

Note: When motor service factor is greater than 1, increase full load amperes proportionally. Example: If service factor is 1.15, increase ampere values by 15%.
Horsepower Full Load Amperes 115 Volts 1/6 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
208 Volts 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.4 7.6 8.8 11.0 13.2 18.7 30.8 44 55
220 Volts 2.3 3.0 3.8 5.1 7.2 8.4 10.4 12.5 17.8 29.3 42 52
230 Volts 2.2 2.9 3.6 4.9 6.9 8 10 12 17 28 40 50
Minimum Transformer kVA 0.53 0.70 0.87 1.18 1.66 1.92 2.40 2.88 4.10 6.72 9.6 12.0
4.4 5.8 7.2 9.8 13.8 16 20 24 34 56 80 100
If motors are started more than once per hour, increase minimum transformer kVA by 20%.
Table 19.1-13. Full Load Current in AmperesSingle-Phase Circuits

kVA Voltage 120 0.25 0.50 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167
208 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 7.2 9.6 14.4 24.0 36 48 72 120 180 240 360 480 802
220 1.1 2.3 3.4 4.5 6.8 9.1 13.6 22.7 34 45 68 114 170 227 341 455 759
240 1.0 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.2 8.3 12.5 20.8 31 41 62 104 156 208 312 416 695
277 0.9 1.8 2.7 3.6 5.4 7.2 10.8 18.0 27 36 54 90 135 180 270 361 602
480 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.2 10.4 15.6 20.8 31 52 78 104 156 208 347
600 0.4 0.8 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.3 5.0 8.3 12.5 16.7 25 41 62 83 125 166 278
2400 0.10 0.21 0.31 0.42 0.63 0.83 1.2 2.1 3.1 4.2 6.2 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 41.7 69.6
4160 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.24 0.36 0.48 0.72 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.6 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 24.0 40.1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2.0 4.2 6.3 8.3 12.5 16.7 25 41 62 83 125 208 312 416 625 833 1391
Table of standard transformer ratings used to power single-phase motors in Table 19.1-12.
CA08104001E
19.1-22 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers Three-Phase Transformers for Motors

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 19 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
How to Select Three-Phase Units
1. Determine the primary (source) voltagethe voltage presently available. 2. Determine the secondary (load) voltagethe voltage needed at the load. 3. Determine the kVA load: If the load is dened in kVA, a transformer can be selected from the tabulated data. If the load rating is given in amperes, determine the load kVA from the following chart. To determine kVA when volts and amperes are known, use the formula: kVA = Volts x Amperes x 1.732 1000 If the load is an AC motor, determine the minimum transformer kVA from Table 19.1-14 at the right. Select a transformer rating equal to or greater than the load kVA. 4. Dene tap arrangements needed. 5. Dene temperature rise. Using the above procedure, select the transformer from the listings in this catalog.
Table 19.1-14. Three-Phase AC Motors

Horsepower Full Load Amperes 208 Volts 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
230 Volts 2.0 2.8 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480
380 Volts 1.2 1.7 2.2 3.1 4.1 5.8 9.2 14 17 26 33 41 48 63 79 93 116 150 189 218 291
460 Volts 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240
575 Volts 0.8 1.1 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192
Minimum Transformer kVA 0.9 1.2 1.5 2.1 2.7 3.8 6.3 9.2 11.2 16.6 21.6 26.6 32.4 43.2 52 64 80 103 130 150 200
2.2 3.1 4.0 5.7 7.5 10.7 16.7 24 31 46 59 75 88 114 143 170 211 273 342 396 528
If motors are started more than once per hour, increase minimum transformer kVA by 20%.
Note: When motor service factor is greater than 1, increase full load amperes proportionally. Example: If service factor is 1.15, increase above ampere values by 15%.
Table 19.1-15. Full Load Current in AmperesThree-Phase Circuits

kVA Voltage 208 3 6 9 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 8.3 16.6 25 41.7 62.4 83.4 104 124 139 208 312 416 624 832 1387 2084 2779 240 7.2 14.4 21.6 36.1 54.1 72.3 90.3 108 120 180 270 360 541 721 1202 1806 2408 380 4.6 9.1 13.7 22.8 34.2 45.6 57.0 68.4 76 114 171 228 342 456 760 1140 1519 480 3.6 7.2 10.8 18.0 27.1 36.1 45.2 54.2 60.1 90 135 180 270 360 601 903 1204 600 2.9 5.8 8.6 14.4 21.6 28.9 36.1 43.4 48.1 72 108 144 216 288 481 723 963 2400 0.72 1.4 2.2 3.6 5.4 7.2 9.0 10.8 12.0 18.0 27.1 36.1 54.2 72.2 120 180 241 4160 0.42 0.83 1.2 2.1 3.1 4.2 5.2 6.3 6.9 10.4 15.6 20.8 31.3 41.6 69.4 104 139
CA08104001E
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers

September 2011
Sheet 19 029
19.1-23
Technical Data
Table 19.1-16. Typical Data for Encapsulated 480V Class General-Purpose Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA Frame Weight Lbs Al Cu Losses in Watts No Load 7 7 7 8 12 13 20 30 40 40 69 120 133 208 235 414 856 123 153 178 300 504 745 1450 6 7 5 7 14 20 29 24 30 30 61 104 129 153 209 191 225 110 145 195 265 250 300 400 Total Efciency 1/4 Load 65.3 66.0 82.4 83.4 79.0 85.1 86.0 90.8 92.5 94.2 92.0 91.8 93.2 93.9 94.4 96.8 97.4 87.3 90.9 91.6 93.0 96.5 97.2 97.7 1/2 Load 79.6 79.0 86.9 88.2 87.2 90.3 91.3 93.9 94.7 95.7 95.0 95.0 96.0 96.3 96.6 98.0 98.3 92.6 94.5 95.0 95.7 97.7 98.2 98.6 3/4 Load 84.3 82.5 87.7 88.9 89.5 91.4 92.7 94.5 95.0 95.8 95.7 95.8 96.7 97.0 97.1 98.3 98.5 94.3 95.5 95.9 96.5 98.0 98.4 98.8 Full Load 85.6 82.8 86.5 87.8 89.6 91.4 92.9 94.4 94.6 95.4 95.7 95.9 95.9 97.2 97.2 98.4 98.4 94.9 95.7 96.1 96.6 97.9 98.5 98.8 % Regulation 100% P.F. 5.9 9.4 10.3 9.0 5.9 5.5 3.9 3.8 4.1 3.6 2.5 2.3 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.0 1.9 1.5 1.0 0.8 80% P.F. 6.4 9.2 10.6 9.6 7.5 7.0 5.0 4.9 5.2 4.7 3.5 3.3 2.4 2.5 2.8 2.5 2.6 6.1 3.1 2.8 3.1 2.5 2.1 1.6 % Impedance Min. Max. Sound Level dB
i ii
Type EP 115C Rise Single-Phase

0.05 0.075 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 25 37.5 3 6 9 15 30 45 75

FR52 FR54 FR54 FR55 FR57P FR57P FR58AP FR67P FR67P FR68P FR176 FR177 FR178 FR179 FR180 FR182 FR300A FR201 FR200 FR103 FR95 FR243 FR244 FR245
65 113 123 193 216 385 735 116 143 166 275 422 660 1275
9 14 15 20 29 47 57 60 90 100 135 215 250 295 435 440 370 165 275 375 545 665 740 945
5.5 7.5 8.0 8.0 7.5 5.0 4.0 3.8 2.5 3.3 2.5 2.0 2.4 2.0 1.6 1.6 2.8 2.4 2.9 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7
9.5 11.0 12.0 12.0 9.5 7.0 6.0 5.8 4.5 5.3 4.1 4.6 3.4 3.3 3.6 4.2 4.0 8.0 4.9 3.6 3.9 3.8 4.0 3.4
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 50 50 50 50 45 45 45 50 50 50 55
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type EPT 115C Rise Three-Phase
Typical values for aluminum windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2619.1-28 for typical data for copper windings. Up-to-date design data is available at www.eaton.com. Actual impedance may vary 7.5%. Type EPT transformers 315 kVA are T-T connected.
Note: Performance data is based upon 480V delta primary and a 208Y/120V secondary for three-phase transformers; 240 x 480V primary and a 120/240V secondary for single-phase transformers. All data is subject to future revision. Refer to Eaton for 5 kV class information. All data is subject to future revision.
CA08104001E
19.1-24 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers

September 2011
Sheet 19 030
Technical Data
Table 19.1-17. Typical Data for 480V Class NEMA TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts No Load 15 816 25 818 37.5 818 50 75 100 167 819 820 821 814 246 359 374 555 740 841 1610 246 373 380 590 689 360 370 565 680 900 204 291 381 351 531 553 793 913 1343 1597 2590 3340 202 311 418 556 581 829 996 1569 1908 3117 4884 276 350 540 810 944 1438 1746 2400 3418 80 300 125 300 170 260 900 80 300 125 300 170 115 120 150 175 260 95 165 210 210 270 300 400 490 650 750 1400 1800 100 165 220 270 300 440 530 720 830 1650 2000 165 180 290 360 470 650 830 1100 1800 Total at Rise +20 549 848 1314 1668 2266 2543 3987 519 766 1182 417 2356 269 580 834 1014 1387 778 1207 1428 1911 1316 2917 3693 4923 6476 8239 9782 12,692 743 1492 1458 1211 2415 3209 3781 5205 6926 6968 9335 551 904 1027 1782 2521 2760 4047 5338 5858 Efciency (T Rise +20) 25% 50% 75% Full 100% Load PF 97.6 97.6 97.2 96.6 97.7 98.1 97.9 97.5 98.1 97.8 97.2 96.6 98.2 98.4 98.5 68.7 98.1 98.2 98.4 98.7 97.6 97.6 98.0 98.4 97.0 97.0 97.6 98.0 2.0 1.4 2.2 1.9 2.3 1.9 1.4 2.1 1.4 2.0 1.8 2.7 0.8 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.4 4.8 3.7 3.5 3.8 2.2 3.6 3.2 3.2 2.8 2.9 1.9 1.8 4.4 4.5 2.8 1.9 3.0 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.3 1.2 1.3 3.4 2.5 1.7 0.3 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.6 0.9 % Regulation % Imp. 80% T Rise +20 PF 2.9 2.7 4.6 4.0 5.3 4.7 6.8 3.1 2.8 3.1 4.1 5.6 1.7 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4.0 5.6 5.5 6.3 4.0 6.6 7.5 6.5 6.3 8.9 8.2 8.9 3.9 4.8 5.4 3.7 6.7 3.6 5.8 6.8 6.0 6.6 8.7 3.9 3.9 3.5 3.5 4.4 4.8 5.5 5.9 4.9 4.3 3.5 5.8 5.1 6.9 6.1 9.7 3.9 3.3 4.1 5.2 6.9 2.0 3.9 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.8 4.6 4.5 5.1 3.2 5.3 6.0 5.3 5.1 7.6 7.2 8.0 4.4 4.8 4.6 3.2 5.9 3.1 5.2 6.2 5.4 6.6 9.0 3.5 3.4 3.3 4.3 4.1 4.7 5.6 6.1 5.4 X T Rise +20 R T Rise +20 Sound Level dB TP1 Inrush Efciency Absolute Practical Max. Max. 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.00 97.50 97.70 97.70 98.00 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 98.80 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 98.80 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 737 1139 1066 1585 2105 2834 1250 773 1102 616 1553 1717 1381 1046 1471 1733 2423 382 479 484 564 999 561 1049 1518 2204 2097 3769 4521 383 411 550 892 758 1301 1534 1875 2678 3930 4458 358 337 953 1006 1554 1665 2003 2655 4462 245 379 355 528 701 944 416 244 367 205 511 572 460 348 490 577 807 127 159 161 188 333 187 350 506 734 699 1256 1507 127 137 183 297 252 433 511 631 872 1310 1486 119 112 317 355 518 555 667 885 1487
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type DS-3 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient Single-Phase

3.0 2.8 4.8 4.3 6.3 5.6 9.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 5.2 6.3 1.8 3.4 3.6 3.9 4.0 1.4 3.0 3.1 3.4 2.4 4.0 5.2 4.4 4.4 7.2 7.0 7.9 1.2 1.8 3.7 2.6 5.1 1.9 4.7 5.8 4.9 6.5 8.9 2.3 2.5 2.9 3.9 3.7 4.5 5.4 5.9 5.3 3.1 2.2 3.2 2.7 2.8 2.3 1.8 2.9 1.9 2.8 0.2 2.9 1.0 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.5 4.6 3.5 3.2 3.8 2.1 3.5 2.9 3.0 2.6 2.5 1.7 1.5 4.3 4.4 2.8 1.9 2.8 2.5 2.2 2.0 2.0 1.1 1.0 2.6 2.4 1.6 1.9 1.8 1.4 1.4 1.4 0.8 45 45 45 45 50 50 55 45 45 45 45 50 45 45 45 45 50 45 45 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 60 64 45 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 60 64 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 60

15 816 25 818 37.5 818 50 75 819 820 97.8 97.8 97.3 96.8 97.7 98.1 98.0 97.7 98.2 98.4 98.1 97.8 98.4 98.3 97.9 97.4 98.5 98.2 97.6 97.0 97.4 98.3 98.4 98.4 97.8 98.2 98.0 97.8 98.1 98.4 98.1 97.8 98.4 98.5 98.4 98.1 98.3 98.6 98.5 98.2 96.6 96.7 96.0 95.1 97.2 97.3 96.9 96.2 97.5 97.5 97.0 96.4 97.5 97.4 96.7 96.0 97.7 98.1 97.9 97.5 97.9 97.7 97.0 96.3 98.0 98.0 97.5 96.9 98.2 98.0 97.5 96.9 98.4 98.2 97.8 97.2 98.5 98.3 97.9 97.3 98.6 98.7 98.5 98.1 98.8 98.9 98.7 98.4 96.7 96.8 96.2 95.4 97.3 97.1 96.3 95.5 97.8 97.9 97.5 97.0 97.6 98.1 98.0 97.7 97.9 97.9 97.5 96.9 98.0 98.1 97.8 97.3 98.1 98.3 97.9 97.5 98.4 98.4 98.1 97.8 98.5 98.5 98.2 97.8 98.5 98.9 98.8 98.7 98.9 99.1 99.0 98.8 96.7 97.4 97.2 96.8 97.3 97.8 97.6 97.2 97.7 98.2 98.2 97.9 97.8 98.2 98.0 97.7 98.2 98.4 98.2 97.9 98.2 98.6 98.5 98.3 98.3 98.6 98.5 98.3 98.6 99.0 99.0 98.9 98.6 99.0 99.0 98.9

15 818 25 818 37.5 819 50 75 820 821
Type DT-3 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient

15 912B 30 912B 37.5 912B 45 50 75 912B 914D 914D
112.5 916A 150 916A 225 917 300 500 750 15 30 45 918A 919 920 912B 912B 912B
50 914D 75 914D 112.5 916A 150 225 300 500 750 15 30 45 916A 918A 923 920 922 912B 912B 914D
75 916A 112.5 916A 150 917 225 300 500

923 919 920
Typical values for aluminum windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2619.1-28 for typical data for copper windings. Up-to-date design data is available at www.eaton.com. Actual impedance may vary 7.5%.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 031
19.1-25
Technical Data
Table 19.1-18. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated, TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts No Load 15 30 45 912B 912B 912B 206 311 400 547 800 1010 1680 2122 3201 307 313 400 587 947 1243 1680 2480 378 365 550 774 1380 1604 2336 2689 271 365 545 812 920 1221 1960 2358 332 390 548 808 990 1600 2306 3291 315 408 555 838 1367 1607 2582 3228 100 165 220 300 440 530 700 1100 1800 135 165 220 285 470 560 700 1100 165 188 285 360 550 700 850 1100 165 198 280 360 490 530 830 1100 165 200 280 360 540 650 850 1100 165 188 280 400 550 668 850 1100 Total at Rise +20 883 1263 1554 2622 3525 4055 5879 5895 7054 394 1344 1463 2355 2910 4119 5413 5735 416 877 1055 1784 1872 2728 3728 4589 604 977 1215 2139 3059 4297 4461 5931 432 903 1187 1850 2373 2372 4001 4583 536 854 982 1289 1905 2474 3471 3978 % Regulation % Imp. 25% 50% 75% Full 100% 80% T Rise +20 Load PF PF 96.7 96.5 95.6 94.6 97.2 97.3 96.7 96.0 97.7 97.7 97.3 96.7 97.9 97.8 97.2 96.6 98.0 98.0 97.6 97.0 98.1 98.2 97.8 97.4 98.3 98.3 97.9 97.5 98.4 98.6 98.4 98.1 98.5 98.9 98.8 98.7 96.3 97.5 97.6 97.5 97.4 97.3 96.6 95.9 97.8 97.9 97.5 97.0 97.9 97.9 97.5 97.0 97.9 98.1 97.9 97.5 98.1 98.2 97.8 97.4 98.3 98.3 98.1 97.7 98.4 98.7 98.5 98.2 96.4 97.6 97.7 97.6 97.2 97.7 97.6 97.2 97.4 98.1 98.0 97.8 97.8 98.2 98.0 97.7 97.9 98.5 98.5 98.4 98.0 98.5 98.5 98.3 98.4 98.7 98.6 98.4 98.4 98.8 98.7 98.5 96.7 97.3 97.0 96.5 97.1 97.6 97.3 96.9 97.5 98.0 97.8 97.4 97.7 98.0 97.8 97.4 98.0 98.2 97.8 97.4 98.1 98.1 97.7 97.2 98.3 98.6 98.3 98.0 98.4 98.6 98.4 98.2 96.6 97.6 97.6 97.4 97.3 97.8 97.6 97.2 97.5 98.1 98.0 97.7 97.8 98.1 97.8 97.5 97.9 98.3 98.2 98.0 98.1 98.5 98.4 98.1 98.3 98.7 98.6 98.3 98.4 98.8 98.7 98.5 96.4 97.3 97.2 96.9 97.4 97.9 97.7 97.3 97.6 98.2 98.2 98.0 97.8 98.4 98.5 98.4 97.9 98.5 98.5 98.4 98.2 98.6 98.6 98.4 98.3 98.7 98.7 98.5 98.3 98.8 98.8 98.7 5.5 3.9 3.2 3.3 3.0 2.6 2.6 1.9 1.3 1.8 4.1 3.0 2.9 2.4 2.5 2.3 1.8 1.7 2.4 1.8 2.0 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 3.1 2.7 2.2 2.6 2.4 2.7 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.5 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.3 1.6 1.3 2.5 2.3 1.6 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.1 5.2 7.4 5.9 6.7 7.4 6.6 7.6 6.8 5.9 2.7 5.1 6.1 6.7 5.0 6.6 7.5 6.7 2.9 3.9 3.7 4.7 4.2 4.4 5.0 5.5 4.2 4.3 4.2 5.9 5.0 6.5 6.6 7.2 3.2 4.4 5.6 4.5 3.4 4.9 6.2 3.9 4.0 3.2 3.0 4.2 4.6 5.1 4.2 5.5 6.0 4.8 5.3 6.0 5.4 6.3 5.9 5.4 2.2 4.6 5.2 5.9 4.3 5.7 7.0 6.3 2.5 3.5 3.4 4.5 4.2 4.5 5.2 5.8 3.6 3.5 3.3 4.9 4.1 5.3 6.1 6.3 2.8 3.6 3.0 4.8 4.0 3.0 5.1 6.3 3.6 3.6 3.0 2.9 4.4 4.7 6.3 4.5 Efciency (T Rise +20) X T Rise +20 R T Rise +20 Sound Level dB TP1 Inrush Efciency Absolute Practical Max. Max. 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 375 453 710 995 1082 1574 1943 2863 4588 491 584 591 823 1447 1468 1719 2547 482 583 708 986 1577 1880 2647 2610 379 565 890 907 1513 1790 1771 2543 409 420 836 805 1303 1932 2508 2851 375 497 656 1624 1171 1562 2159 3255 125 151 236 331 360 524 647 954 1529 163 194 197 274 482 489 573 849 160 194 236 328 525 626 882 870 126 188 277 302 504 597 590 847 136 120 278 268 434 644 836 950 125 166 218 541 390 520 719 1085
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type KT-4 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient

1.8 4.8 3.8 4.4 5.3 4.8 5.9 5.7 5.2 1.4 2.4 4.4 5.2 3.7 5.2 6.7 6.1 1.9 2.6 2.9 4.0 4.1 4.3 5.1 5.6 2.1 2.4 2.6 4.3 3.4 4.6 5.9 6.0 2.2 2.8 2.3 4.3 3.6 2.8 4.9 6.2 2.5 2.8 2.5 2.6 4.2 4.5 6.2 4.3 5.2 3.7 3.0 3.1 2.7 2.3 2.3 1.6 1.1 1.7 3.9 2.8 2.8 2.2 2.4 2.1 1.5 1.7 2.3 1.7 1.9 1.2 1.4 1.3 1.2 2.9 2.6 2.1 2.4 2.3 2.5 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.3 2.0 2.2 1.6 1.1 1.4 1.2 2.5 2.2 1.6 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.0 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 60 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55 45 45 45 50 50 50 55 55
75 914D 112.5 916A 150 916A 225 300 500 15 30 45 918A 919 920 912B 912B 912B
75 914D 112.5 916A 150 917 225 300 15 30 45 918A 919 912B 912B 914D
75 916A 112.5 917 150 918A 225 300 15 30 45 919 919 912B 912B 914D
75 916A 112.5 916A 150 917 225 300 15 30 45 923 919 912B 912B 914D
75 916A 112.5 916A 150 918A 225 300 15 30 45 919 919 912B 912B 914D
75 916A 112.5 917 150 918A 225 300

919 920
Typical values for aluminum windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2619.1-28 for typical data for copper windings. Up-to-date design data is available at www.eaton.com. Actual impedance may vary 7.5%.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 032
Technical Data
Table 19.1-19. Typical Data for 480V Class NEMA TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts No Load 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 15 25 37.5 50 75 15 25 37.5 50 75 15 30 37.5 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 15 30 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Efciency (Trise +20) 25% 50% 75% Full Load 97.6 97.9 98.2 98.3 98.5 98.6 98.7 97.8 97.9 98.2 98.4 98.5 97.3 97.9 98.1 98.3 98.3 98.9 97.3 97.5 97.4 97.7 97.9 97.9 98.1 98.4 98.4 98.8 97.7 97.7 97.7 97.8 97.9 98.1 98.3 98.4 98.6 98.8 96.6 97.3 97.9 97.9 98.1 98.3 98.4 98.5 97.5 98.1 98.1 98.4 98.3 98.4 98.8 98.1 98.2 98.0 98.4 98.3 98.2 98.4 98.6 98.6 98.6 97.0 97.5 97.6 97.4 98.2 97.5 97.9 98.2 98.1 98.3 98.9 97.8 97.8 97.7 98.2 98.0 98.2 98.5 98.3 98.7 98.9 97.7 97.9 98.0 98.2 98.3 98.5 98.7 98.8 96.9 97.7 97.6 98.1 97.7 98.0 98.6 97.8 98.0 97.5 98.0 97.8 98.3 98.3 98.6 98.4 98.4 96.4 97.0 97.1 96.9 98.0 97.1 97.4 97.8 97.5 97.9 98.7 97.3 97.3 97.2 98.0 97.6 97.9 98.2 97.8 98.4 98.7 97.7 97.7 97.7 98.0 98.0 98.3 98.5 98.7 96.3 97.3 97.0 97.7 97.1 97.5 98.3 97.3 97.7 96.9 97.6 97.2 98.2 98.1 98.5 98.1 98.1 95.7 96.5 96.5 96.2 97.7 96.4 96.8 97.3 97.0 97.4 98.4 96.7 96.8 96.6 97.7 97.0 97.4 97.8 97.3 98.1 98.5 97.6 97.4 97.2 97.7 97.6 97.9 98.3 98.5
% Regulation 100% PF 3.5 2.7 2.0 2.8 2.3 1.5 2.4 2.0 2.9 2.2 2.7 1.2 1.5 1.1 1.7 1.6 4.2 3.2 3.2 3.6 2.0 3.6 3.0 2.7 3.2 2.6 1.6 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.0 2.8 2.5 2.0 2.9 2.0 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.9 1.6 1.4 80% PF 4.2 3.7 3.3 4.8 4.3 6.3 2.2 2.9 4.5 3.8 4.7 1.7 2.6 2.2 2.9 3.4 5.3 4.5 4.8 5.5 3.5 7.4 6.7 5.3 8.7 6.7 7.4 5.4 6.2 5.2 3.5 5.4 5.7 4.8 8.8 5.7 6.8 2.4 3.4 4.5 9.3 3.8 3.9 5.4 5.6
Total at Rise +20 605 732 1154 1159 2259 2504 3094 437 603 1217 1409 2178 293 679 729 1013 1447 755 1100 1382 1786 1220 2903 3699 4269 7124 7959 8292 669 1077 1625 1213 2346 2953 3364 6445 6038 7841 390 823 1308 1837 2409 3349 4096 4646
% Imp.
Sound Level dB
TP1 Efciency
Inrush Absolute Max. 551 1379 1321 1321 2133 2779 2865 718 862 1300 1498 2107 375 494 617 989 1015 321 614 639 637 1072 1015 1185 1752 2498 2872 3839 229 433 658 960 842 1036 1605 1572 1860 4033 449 493 473 937 1754 1593 2568 3753 Practical Max. 183 459 440 440 711 926 955 239 287 433 499 702 125 164 205 329 338 107 204 213 212 357 338 395 584 832 964 1279 76 144 219 320 280 345 535 524 620 1344 150 164 158 312 584 531 856 1251

816 818 818 819 820 821 814 816 818 818 819 820 818 818 819 820 821 912B 912B 912B 912B 914D 914D 916A 916A 917 923 919 912B 912B 912B 914D 914D 916A 916A 917 923 919 912B 912B 912B 916A 916A 917 923 919 270 406 453 657 803 960 1665 264 420 450 703 793 407 430 685 799 1042 250 350 415 416 647 643 876 1064 1569 2050 3681 256 337 446 630 662 914 1132 2036 2325 3681 349 410 504 818 1065 1410 2030 3041 80 115 125 160 175 250 570 80 110 125 300 175 115 300 300 180 250 150 165 210 215 270 320 420 530 560 730 1400 95 180 215 270 320 400 530 650 830 1400 135 210 200 370 440 650 830 1100 4.2 3.5 4.8 3.8 6.5 5.5 9.0 3.3 3.2 5.9 4.7 6.2 1.8 3.0 2.6 3.4 3.8 4.8 5.2 4.0 4.6 2.8 4.3 5.1 4.3 7.4 5.5 6.8 4.8 4.6 4.4 3.0 4.7 5.0 4.4 8.1 5.2 6.8 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.3 3.3 3.7 5.4 6.1 2.3 3.5 45 2.5 2.5 45 4.0 2.7 45 3.8 5.8 5.0 8.8 2.0 2.8 2.3 1.5 45 50 50 50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.00 97.50 97.70 97.70 98.00 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.70 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60

2.2 2.4 45 2.6 2.0 45 5.1 2.9 45 4.1 2.2 5.6 2.7 50 1.4 1.2 45 2.6 1.5 45 2.3 1.1 45 2.9 1.7 45 3.5 1.6 50 2.6 4.0 45 4.1 3.1 45 2.5 3.1 45 3.0 3.5 45 2.0 1.9 45 2.5 3.4 50 4.2 2.9 50 3.5 2.5 50 6.8 2.9 55 4.9 2.4 55 6.7 1.4 60 2.9 3.8 45 3.5 3.0 45 3.1 3.1 45 2.3 1.9 45 3.9 2.7 50 4.5 2.3 50 4.0 7.7 4.9 6.6 1.9 2.6 1.7 1.3 50 55 55 60

1.3 1.7 45 2.1 2.0 45 3.1 2.5 45 3.8 2.0 50 2.8 1.8 50 3.2 1.8 50 5.2 1.5 55 6.0 1.2 55
Typical values for copper windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2319.1-25 for typical data for aluminum windings. Up-to-date design data is available at www.eaton.com. Actual impedance may vary 7.5%.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 033
19.1-27
Technical Data
Table 19.1-20. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated, TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts No Load 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225

Efciency (Trise +20) 25% 50% 75% Full Load 96.8 97.4 97.6 97.9 98.1 98.3 98.4 98.6 96.7 97.4 97.9 98.1 98.0 98.2 98.5 98.6 97.0 97.3 97.4 97.8 98.2 98.5 98.3 96.2 97.2 97.6 97.7 98.0 98.2 98.4 96.6 97.1 97.4 97.9 98.1 98.2 98.3 96.7 97.4 97.4 97.7 98.1 98.0 98.2 97.1 97.5 97.8 97.7 98.2 98.4 98.5 98.6 96.9 97.6 98.1 98.3 98.3 98.5 98.6 98.7 98.0 97.9 98.1 98.1 98.7 98.7 98.6 97.4 97.7 97.9 97.9 98.2 98.3 98.6 97.8 97.8 97.7 98.1 98.3 98.5 98.6 97.8 98.2 97.9 98.9 98.6 98.4 98.9 96.6 97.1 97.3 97.1 97.9 98.0 98.1 98.4 96.3 97.3 97.9 98.1 98.0 98.3 98.4 98.4 98.1 97.8 98.1 97.8 98.6 98.5 98.4 97.5 97.5 97.6 97.5 97.9 98.1 98.4 97.9 97.6 97.4 97.9 98.1 98.3 98.4 97.9 98.2 97.8 98.4 98.5 98.3 99.1 96.0 96.5 96.8 96.4 97.5 97.6 97.7 98.0 95.6 96.8 97.5 97.8 97.7 98.1 98.1 98.0 98.0 97.6 98.0 97.5 98.4 98.2 98.1 97.3 97.1 97.2 97.0 97.4 97.7 98.2 97.9 97.3 96.9 97.5 97.8 98.0 98.2 97.8 98.1 97.5 98.3 98.3 98.0 99.1
% Regulation 100% PF 3.7 3.5 3.0 3.6 2.6 2.4 2.4 2.2 4.2 3.0 2.3 1.9 2.2 1.7 1.9 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.6 2.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.4 2.3 2.0 1.5 2.2 2.8 1.9 2.0 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4 2.1 1.4 1.4 1.7 0.6 80% PF 5.0 5.3 5.6 7.1 6.6 6.0 7.6 6.3 5.7 4.8 5.0 5.0 4.4 4.9 5.6 5.2 2.3 3.2 3.1 5.2 4.3 6.1 6.5 3.0 4.0 3.2 5.7 4.3 5.1 6.3 2.4 3.6 4.6 5.1 4.3 5.9 6.1 2.4 3.0 3.9 2.8 4.2 4.3 2.7
Total at Rise +20 635 1134 1505 2883 2952 3716 5420 6259 702 1007 1200 1715 2735 3076 4434 6127 371 787 977 1951 2009 2873 4449 461 908 1328 2402 2991 3686 4250 378 824 1476 2128 2612 3185 4382 382 595 1189 1351 2039 3053 2364
% Imp.
Sound Level dB
TP1 Efciency
Inrush Absolute Max. 265 504 670 975 1031 1574 1694 2594 279 466 633 929 1171 1250 1979 2187 499 659 925 854 1449 1288 2292 527 579 854 1046 1180 1250 2771 472 620 939 847 1375 1379 2490 472 592 736 1590 1374 1472 4321 Practical Max. 88 168 223 325 344 524 565 864 93 155 211 309 390 416 659 729 166 219 308 284 483 429 764 176 193 285 348 393 416 923 157 206 313 282 458 460 830 157 197 245 530 458 490 1440
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

912B 912B 912B 914D 916A 916A 917 923 912B 912B 912B 914D 916A 917 918A 923 912B 912B 914D 916A 916A 917 923 912B 912B 914D 916A 916A 917 923 912B 912B 914D 916A 916A 917 923 912B 912B 914D 916A 916A 918A 919 251 326 479 463 977 1212 1815 2400 256 341 526 759 1030 1631 1965 2337 365 424 653 640 1264 1825 2096 346 390 623 848 1080 1431 2129 341 444 598 894 1054 1399 2088 370 490 635 987 854 1807 4091 100 165 220 300 440 540 650 830 95 165 220 300 470 650 690 830 165 210 290 350 560 650 890 165 190 235 370 455 600 830 165 188 250 350 460 600 890 165 188 290 410 560 650 1200 4.2 4.3 5.0 5.9 5.6 5.1 6.5 5.2 5.0 4.2 4.1 4.5 3.8 4.5 5.3 4.7 2.1 2.9 3.0 4.9 4.2 6.4 6.6 2.5 3.3 2.8 4.5 3.5 4.2 5.4 2.1 3.1 4.0 4.6 3.3 5.4 5.7 2.2 2.8 3.5 2.6 4.3 4.0 2.9 2.1 3.6 45 2.9 3.2 45 4.1 2.9 45 4.7 3.4 50 5.1 2.2 50 4.6 2.1 50 6.2 2.1 55 4.9 1.8 55 2.9 4.0 45 3.1 2.8 45 3.5 2.2 50 4.1 1.9 50 3.2 2.0 50 4.2 1.6 50 5.0 1.7 55 4.3 1.8 55 1.5 1.4 45 2.2 1.9 45 2.5 1.5 45 4.4 4.0 6.3 6.4 2.1 1.3 1.5 1.6 50 50 50 55 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50

1.6 2.0 45 2.3 2.4 45 1.4 2.4 45 3.6 2.7 3.7 5.1 2.7 2.3 2.1 1.5 50 50 50 55

1.6 1.4 45 2.2 2.1 45 2.9 2.7 45 4.0 2.6 5.1 5.5 2.4 1.9 1.7 1.6 50 50 50 55

1.6 1.4 45 2.5 1.4 45 2.8 2.0 45 2.3 4.1 3.7 2.8 1.3 1.3 1.6 0.5 50 50 50 55
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 034
Technical Data
Table 19.1-21. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated and HMT, TP-1 and CSL-3 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound
kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts No Load 15 30 45 912B 912B 915D 325 370 635 870 1526 1665 2094 3900 335 406 635 870 1526 1665 2094 362 430 627 926 1628 2001 3596 3891 450 610 868 1643 3370 3894 78 125 135 225 350 350 650 750 78 125 135 210 350 350 650 80 100 170 250 400 500 590 800 80 100 170 250 400 500 590 800 Total at Rise +20 359 636 1076 1529 1768 2419 3650 3731 353 670 1075 1551 1583 2463 3766 527 1040 1368 2096 2515 2688 3310 4854 708 1409 1374 2341 2685 3304 3712 4688 Efciency (Trise +20) 25% 50% 75% Full Load 97.6 98.1 98.5 98.5 98.6 97.8 98.9 98.9 97.4 98.0 98.6 98.5 98.6 98.8 98.8 97.6 98.3 98.3 98.4 98.4 98.5 98.8 98.7 97.1 98.0 98.2 98.2 98.3 98.5 98.7 98.9 98.1 98.4 98.5 98.6 98.8 98.9 98.9 99.1 98.0 98.3 98.5 98.6 98.9 98.9 98.9 97.7 98.0 98.2 98.3 98.5 98.7 98.9 98.9 97.0 97.4 98.1 98.1 98.4 98.6 98.8 99.0 98.0 98.3 98.1 98.4 98.7 98.7 98.8 99.0 98.0 98.1 98.2 98.3 98.8 98.7 98.7 97.3 97.4 97.7 97.9 98.3 98.6 98.8 98.7 96.4 96.5 97.7 97.6 98.1 98.3 98.7 98.8 97.7 98.0 97.7 98.0 98.5 98.4 98.5 98.8 97.7 97.8 97.7 98.0 98.6 98.4 98.4 96.7 96.7 97.2 97.4 97.9 98.3 98.6 98.4 95.5 95.6 97.1 97.0 97.7 97.9 98.4 98.5 % Regulation 100% PF 2.0 1.7 2.2 1.9 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 2.0 1.9 2.3 1.9 1.2 1.6 1.7 3.2 3.2 2.8 2.6 2.0 1.6 1.5 1.7 4.3 4.7 2.8 2.9 2.2 2.0 1.7 1.7 80% PF 3.7 2.7 4.1 4.9 3.5 4.5 5.4 5.2 3.7 2.7 4.1 4.0 3.0 4.5 5.5 5.9 6.2 6.0 7.0 5.5 5.6 6.2 7.1 7.4 8.0 4.8 6.6 5.5 6.7 6.6 7.4 % Imp. X R Sound Level dB Efciency Inrush Absolute Max. 98.00 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.80 98.90 99.00 99.04 98.00 98.30 98.50 98.60 98.80 98.90 99.00 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 97.00 97.50 97.70 98.00 98.20 98.30 98.50 98.60 307 779 617 993 2447 1976 2686 2990 287 780 603 958 2480 1930 2778 Practical Max. 102 260 206 331 816 659 895 997 96 260 201 319 827 643 926
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type KT-13 115C Rise CSL-3 Efcient

3.2 2.3 3.5 4.4 3.1 4.2 5.2 5.2 3.2 2.4 3.5 3.6 2.7 4.2 5.2 5.1 5.4 5.2 6.2 4.9 5.2 6.0 7.0 6.3 6.8 4.2 5.8 5.0 6.3 6.4 7.2 2.6 1.9 45 1.6 1.7 45 2.8 2.1 45 4.1 1.7 50 2.8 1.3 50 3.9 1.4 50 5.1 1.3 55 5.1 1.0 55 2.6 1.8 45 1.5 1.8 45 2.8 2.1 45 3.1 2.5 4.0 5.0 1.8 1.1 1.4 1.4 50 50 50 55
75 915D 112.5 917 150 917 225 300 15 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 15 30 45 918A 919 912B 912B 915D 915D 917 917 918A 912B 912B 915D
Type KT-9 115C Rise CSL-3 Efcient
Type NON HMT 115C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient

4.2 3.0 45 4.4 3.1 45 4.4 2.7 45 5.7 2.5 50 4.5 1.9 50 5.0 1.5 50 5.9 1.2 55 6.8 1.4 55 4.7 4.2 45 5.2 4.4 45 3.2 2.7 45 5.0 2.8 50 4.6 2.0 50 6.0 1.9 50 6.2 1.4 55 7.1 1.3 55
75 916A 112.5 917 150 918A 225 300 15 30 45 919X 919X 912B 912B 915D
Type THR HMT 115C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient
75 916A 112.5 917 150 918A 225 300

919X 919X
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 035
19.1-29
Dimensions
DimensionsNEMA TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1 Types
i
Outside Width
ii 1
Top
Outside Width Top Outside Width Outside Height Left Front Top Front Outside Height Left Drawing 1 Outside Height Left
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outside Length
Front
Outside Length Outside Length Drawing 2 Drawing 3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 19.1-5. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsVentilated Transformers, NEMA TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1 Types Table 19.1-22. Ventilated TransformersApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing Number 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 Dimensions Height 31.30 (795.0) 37.59 (954.8) 42.03 (1067.6) 42.03 (1067.6) 62.91 (1597.9) 62.91 (1597.9) 30.00 (762.0) 39.00 (990.6) 39.00 (990.6) 48.56 (1233.4) 56.17 (1426.7) 62.18 (1579.4) 57.54 (1461.5) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 90.00 (2286.0) Width 22.89 (581.4) 22.89 (581.4) 24.22 (615.2) 24.22 (615.2) 29.97 (761.2) 29.97 (761.2) 23.00 (584.2) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 28.22 (716.8) 31.44 (798.6) 31.44 (798.6) 36.69 (931.9) 44.20 (1122.7) 44.20 (1122.7) 69.26 (1759.2) Length 18.39 (467.2) 20.36 (517.10 23.84 (605.5) 23.84 (605.5) 33.97 (862.8) 33.97 (862.8) 16.50 (419.1) 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8) 23.42 (594.9) 24.67 (626.6) 30.68 (779.3) 32.65 (829.3) 36.23 (920.2) 36.23 (920.2) 42.65 (1083.3)
FR816 FR818 FR819 FR820 FR814, FR814E FR821 FR912B FR914D FR915D FR916A FR917 FR918A FR923 FR919, FR919E, FR919X FR920, FR920E, FR920X FR922
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 036
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EP
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Drawing 10 Outside Length Right Back Outside Width Top Outside Length Outside Width
Top
Outside Width Outside Width Top Outside

Right
Top Outside Height Right Back
Height ack
Outside Length
Outside Height Right Back
Outside Length
Drawing 6 Outside Width
Drawing 7
Drawing 8
Top Outside Width Outside Length Right Outside Height Back Outside Length Right Back Outside Height Outside Height
Top
10
Drawing 9 Drawing 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 19.1-6. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EP) Single-Phase Table 19.1-23. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EP)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing Number 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 9 11 9 11 11 9 9 10 10 Dimensions Height 8.91 (226.3) 8.91 (226.3) 8.91 (226.3) 8.97 (227.8) 8.97 (227.8) 11.28 (286.5) 11.28 (286.5) 13.41 (340.6) 13.41 (340.6) 14.25 (361.9) 16.00 (406.4) 22.26 (565.4) 16.00 (406.4) 25.26 (641.6) 25.26 (641.6) 19.00 (482.6) 19.00 (482.6) 23.31 (592.1) 26.31 (668.3) Width 4.11 (104.4) 4.11 (104.4) 4.11 (104.4) 4.87 (123.7) 4.87 (123.7) 5.99 (152.1) 5.99 (152.1) 6.37 (161.8) 6.37 (161.8) 7.69 (195.3) 10.38 (263.7) 12.71 (322.8) 10.38 (263.7) 12.71 (322.8) 14.72 (373.9) 13.38 (339.9) 13.38 (339.9) 16.35 (415.3) 16.35 (415.3) Length 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.06 (103.1) 4.91 (124.7) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 6.52 (165.6) 6.52 (165.6) 8.00 (203.2) 9.89 (251.2) 12.79 (324.9) 9.89 (251.2) 12.79 (324.9) 14.82 (376.4) 10.52 (267.2) 10.52 (267.2) 14.12 (358.6) 14.12 (358.6)
FR52 FR54 FR55 FR56 FR57 FR58A FR59A FR67 FR68 FR176 FR177 FR301 FR178 FR302 FR304 FR179 FR180 FR182 FR190
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 037
19.1-31
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EP
Outside Width Top
i ii 1
Outside Width Top
Outside Length Left Front
Outside Height Outside Width
2 3
Top
Outside Length Front Left
Outside Height Outside Length Right
4
Drawing 13 Outside Height Back
5 6 7
Drawing 12
Drawing 14
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 19.1-7. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EP) Single-Phase Table 19.1-24. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EPT)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing Number 13 12 14 14 14 14 Dimensions Height 20.67 (525.0) 28.24 (717.3) 9.34 (237.2) 11.68 (296.7) 13.03 (330.9) 13.78 (350.0) Width 19.02 (483.1) 22.42 (569.5) 4.45 (113.0) 4.99 (126.7) 5.74 (145.8) 6.22 (158.0) Length 13.59 (345.2) 14.06 (357.1) 5.18 (131.6) 5.99 (152.1) 6.56 (166.6) 6.32 (160.5)
FR132 FR300A FR57P FR58AP FR567P FR568P
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 038
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EPT
i ii 1 2
Front Outside Width
Outside Length
Top
Outside Width
Top Top Outside Height Outside Height Left Front
3 4 5
Outside Height
Left
Front Left
Outside Length
Outside Length
Outside Width
Drawing 15
Drawing 16
Drawing 17
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 19.1-8. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EPT) Three-Phase Table 19.1-25. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EPT)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing Number 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 15 16 17 Dimensions Height 13.40 (340.4) 13.12 (333.2) 15.90 (403.9) 15.90 (403.9) 15.19 (385.8) 17.38 (441.5) 17.38 (441.5) 16.19 (411.2) 28.15 (715.0) 32.06 (814.3) Width 15.93 (404.6 19.59 (497.6) 16.93 (430.0) 16.93 (430.0) 25.68 (652.3) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 29.68 (753.9) 26.58 (675.1) 30.29 (769.4) Length 8.26 (209.8) 7.09 (180.1) 10.01 (254.3) 10.01 (254.3) 8.38 (212.9) 10.52 (267.2) 10.52 (267.2) 9.42 (239.3) 14.66 (372.4) 15.68 (398.3)
FR201 FR102 FR103 FR200 FR97 FR95 FR243 FR96 FR244 FR245
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 039
19.1-33
Dimensions
i
Outside Width
ii
Top
1 2
Front
Outside Width
3 4
Top Outside Height Outside Height Left Left
5 6 7 8
Front
Outside Length Drawing 4
9 10 11
Figure 19.1-9. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsCSL-3 Transformers Table 19.1-26. CSL-3 TransformersApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing Number 4 4 4 5 5 Dimensions Height 30.00 (762.0) 39.18 (995.2) 56.18 (1427.0) 62.18 (1579.4) 75.00 (1905.0) Width 23.00 (584.2) 29.00 (736.6) 31.25 (793.8) 31.25 (793.8) 44.46 (1129.3) Length 16.50 (419.1) 22.00 (558.8) 24.24 (615.7) 30.25 (768.4) 35.75 (908.1)
912B 915D 917 918A 919
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 040
Dimensions
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outside Length Outside Length Drawing 26 Outside Height Left Outside Height Left Outside Width Top Outside Width Front Front Top Outside Height Left Outside Width
Top
Front
9
Drawing 27
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 19.1-10. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsTotally Enclosed Nonventilated Transformers Table 19.1-27. Totally Enclosed Nonventilated Transformers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing Number 26 27 27 27 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 Dimensions Height 37.59 (954.8) 42.03 (1067.6) 42.03 (1067.6) 62.91 (1597.9) 30.00 (762.0) 39.18 (995.2) 39.18 (995.2) 46.58 (1183.1) 56.18 (1427.0) 62.18 (1579.4) 57.50 (1460.5) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) Width 22.89 (581.4) 24.22 (615.2) 24.22 (615.2) 29.97 (761.2) 23.00 (584.2) 29.00 (736.6) 29.00 (736.6) 28.22 (716.8) 31.44 (798.6) 31.44 (798.6) 36.69 (931.9) 44.21 (1122.9) 44.21 (1122.9) Length 20.36 (517.1) 23.84 (605.5) 23.84 (605.5) 33.97 (862.8) 16.50 (419.1) 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8) 23.42 (594.9) 24.67 (626.8) 30.68 (779.3) 32.65 (829.3) 36.23 (920.2) 36.23 (920.2)
FR818N FR819N FR820N FR814N FR912BN FR914DN FR915DN FR916AN FR917N FR918AN FR923N FR919N FR920N
See Eaton Catalog CA08100003E, Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 2 Commercial Distribution, Tab 9 for product information and frame cross-reference data.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 041
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers FAQ

Product Selection
19.1-35
Frequently Asked Questions About Transformers

Can 60 Hz transformers be used at other frequencies?
Transformers rated for 60 Hz can be applied to circuits with a higher frequency, as long as the nameplate voltages are not exceeded. The higher the frequency that you apply to a 60 Hz transformer, the less voltage regulation you will have. 60 Hz transformers may be used at lower frequencies, but only at reduced voltages corresponding to the reduction in frequency. For example, a 480120V 60 Hz transformer can carry rated kVA at 50 Hz but only when applied as a 400100V transformer (50/60 x 480 = 400).
What are Insulation Classes?

Insulation classes were originally used to distinguish insulating materials operating at different temperatures. In the past, letters were used for the different designations. Recently, insulation system temperatures (C) have replaced the letters designations. Table 19.1-28. Insulation Classes
Previous Designation Class A Class B Class F Class H Class R Insulation System Rating (C) 105 150 180 220 220
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Can single-phase transformers be used on a three-phase source?

Yes. Any single-phase transformer can be used on a threephase source by connecting the primary terminals of the single-phase transformer to any two wires of a three-phase system. It does not matter whether the three-phase source is three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire. The output of the transformer will be single-phase.
How do you know if the enclosure temperature is too hot?

UL and CSA standards strictly regulate the highest temperature that an enclosure can reach. For ventilated transformers, the temperature of the enclosure should not increase by more than 50C in a 40C ambient at full rated current. For encapsulated transformers, the temperature of the enclosure should not increase by more than 65C in a 25C ambient at full rated current. This means that it is permissible for the temperature of the enclosure to reach 90C (194F). Although this temperature is very warm to the touch, it is within the allowed standards. A thermometer should be used to measure enclosure temperatures, not your hand.
Can transformers be used to create three-phase power from a single-phase system?

No. Single-phase transformers alone cannot be used to create the phase-shifts required for a three-phase system. Phase-shifting devices (reactors or capacitors) or phase converters in conjunction with transformers are required to change single-phase power to three-phase.
What considerations need to be taken into account when operating transformers at high altitudes?
At altitudes greater than 3300 ft (1000m), the density of the air is lesser than at lower elevations. This reduces the ability of the air surrounding a transformer to cool it, so the temperature rise of the transformer is increased. Therefore, when a transformer is being installed at altitudes greater than 3300 ft (1000m) above sea level, it is necessary to derate the nameplate kVA by 0.3% for each 330 ft (100m) in excess of 3300 feet.
Can transformers be reverse-connected (reverse-fed)?

Yes, with limitations. Eatons single-phase transformers rated 3 kVA and larger can be reverse-connected without any loss of kVA capacity or any adverse effects. Transformers rated 2 kVA and below, because there is a turns ratio compensation on the low voltage winding that adjusts voltage between no load and full load conditions, should not be reverse-fed. Three-phase transformers with either delta-delta or deltawye congurations can also be reverse-connected for stepup operation. When reverse-feeding a delta-wye connected transformer, there are two important considerations to take into account: (1) The neutral is not connected, only the three-phase wires of the wye system are connected; and (2) the ground strap between X0 and the enclosure must be removed. Due to high inrush currents that may be created in these applications, it is recommended that you do not reverse-feed transformers rated more than 75 kVA. The preferred solution is to purchase an Eaton step-up transformer designed specically for your application.
What considerations need to be taken into account when operating transformers where the ambient temperature is high?
Eatons dry-type transformers are designed in accordance with ANSI standards to operate in areas where the average maximum ambient temperature is 40C. For operation in ambient temperatures above 40C, there are two options: 1. Order a custom-designed transformer made for the specic application. 2. Derate the nameplate kVA of a standard transformer by 8% for each 10C of ambient above 40C.
Can transformers be connected in parallel?

Yes, with certain restrictions. For single-phase transformers being connected in parallel, the voltages and impedances of the transformers must be equal (impedances must be within 7.5% of each other). For three-phase transformers, the same restrictions apply as for single-phase transformers, plus the phase shift of the transformers must be the same. For example, a delta-wyeconnected transformer (30 phase shift) must be connected in parallel with another delta-wye connected transformer, not a delta-deltaconnected transformer (0 phase shift).
What is the normal life expectancy of a transformer?

When a transformer is operated under ANSI/IEEE basic loading conditions (ANSI C57.96), the normal life expectancy of a transformer is 20 years. The ANSI/IEEE basic loading conditions are: A. The transformer is continuously loaded at rated kVA and rated voltages. B. The average temperature of the ambient air during any 24-hour period is equal to 30C and at no time exceeds 40C. C. The altitude where the transformer is installed does not exceed 3300 ft (1000m).
CA08104001E
19.1-36 Distribution Dry-Type Transformers FAQ

Product Selection Why is the impedance of a transformer important?
The impedance of a transformer is important because it is used to determine the interrupting rating and trip rating of the circuit protection devices on the load side of the transformer. To calculate the maximum short-circuit current on the load side of a transformer, use the following formula: Load Current (Amps) Maximum Short-Circuit = Full -----------------------------------------------------------------Load Current (Amps) Transformer Impedance Full load current for single-phase circuits is:
September 2011
Sheet 19 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
How Can I Reduce Transformer Sound Levels?

All transformers emit some audible sound due mainly to the vibration generated in their core by alternating ux. NEMA ST-20 denes the maximum average sound levels for ventilated transformers. Table 19.1-29. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01 Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 100V Class Transformers (dB 40)
Nameplate Volt-Amps ---------------------------------------------------------Load (output) Voltage and for three-phase circuits the full load current is:
Nameplate Volt-Amps ------------------------------------------------------------------Load (output) Volts 3

Example: For a standard three-phase, 75 kVA transformer, rated 480V delta primary and 208Y/120V secondary (catalog number V48M28T75J) and impedance equal to 5.1%, the full load current is: 75,000 VA --------------------------------= 208.2A 208V x 1.732 The maximum short-circuit load current is:
All Eaton ventilated transformers are designed to have audible sound levels lower than those required by NEMA ST-20. However, consideration should be given to the specic location of a transformer and its installation to minimize the potential for sound transmission to surrounding structures and sound reection. The following installation methods should be considered: 1. If possible, mount the transformer away from corners of walls or ceilings. For installations that must be near a corner, use sound-absorbing materials on the walls and ceiling if necessary to eliminate reection. 2. Provide a solid foundation for mounting the transformer and use vibration dampening mounts if not already provided in the transformer. Eatons ventilated transformers contain a built-in vibration dampening system to minimize and isolate sound transmission. However, supplemental vibration dampening mounts installed between the oor and the transformer may provide additional sound dampening. 3. Make electrical connections to the transformer using exible conduit. 4. Locate the transformer in an area where audible sound is not offensive to building inhabitants. 5. Install low sound transformers (up to 5 dB below NEMA ST-20 sound limits).
208.2A = 4082.4A -----------------0.051

The circuit breaker or fuse on the secondary side of this transformer would have to have a minimum interrupting capacity of 4083A at 208V. NEMA ST-20 (1992). A similar transformer with lower impedance would require a primary circuit breaker or fuse with a higher interrupting capacity.
What clearances are required around transformers when they are installed?
All dry-type transformers depend upon the circulation of air for cooling; therefore, it is important that the ow of air around a transformer not be impeded. UL 1561 requires that there be no less than 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) clearance between any side of a transformer with ventilation openings and any wall or obstruction. In compliance with NEC 450-9, Eatons ventilated transformers have a note on their nameplates requiring a minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) clearance from the ventilation openings and walls or other obstructions. This clearance only addresses the ventilation needs of the transformer. There may be additional local codes and standards that affect installation clearances. Transformers should not be mounted in such a manner that one unit will contribute to the additional heating of another unit, beyond allowable temperature limits, for example, where two units are mounted on a wall one above the other.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 19 043
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers FAQ

Product Selection
19.1-37
Why are CSL-3 transformers offered, and when should they be used?
There is still a lot of confusion on the use of CSL-3 transformers. There currently is no legal requirement to use CSL-3 transformers; however, their use provides the following benets in the form of lower losses and operating costs, lower carbon footprint and lower heat rejection, and lower air-conditioning requirements in a project. Currently (circa 2010) within the U.S., the minimum efciency levels for low voltage transformers legislated by Congress are equivalent to TP-1/CSL-1. CSL-3 offers additional energy savings above and beyond TP-1 based on 10 CFR Part 431Energy Conservation Program for Commercial Equipment Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards; Final Rule published October 2007. CSL-3 transformers provide 3040% less losses than NEMA TP-1 transformers. By using CSL-3 transformers, increased efciencies can help to gain LEED point (because LEED only incorporates regulated losses, the comparison of No Load Losses against standard NEMA TP-1 transformers can be used to document energy savings). It is recommended that the design engineer understand the transformer application within a project so that the cost savings and return can be accurately determined. In addition, always make sure that the CSL-3 performance data obtained from manufacturers references a NEMA or DOE standard and is veried by a third-party independent test lab verses manufacturerdetermined standards and self-certied documentation. Eatons CSL-3 compliant transformers are Type E3, such as 75 kVA, style number N48M28F75CUE3.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 19 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 20 001
20.0-1
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage
Contents
Metal-Enclosed Drawout Switchgear Low Voltage Magnum DS (For detailed information on Magnum DS breakers, refer to Tab 26.) General Description Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-3 Instrumentation/Metering . . 20.1-4 Accessories/Options. . . . . . 20.1-4 Magnum DS Front Accessible Switchgear. . . 20.1-5 Magnum DS ArcResistant Switchgear . . . . 20.1-6 Magnum DS Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . 20.1-7 Magnum DS Switchgear Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-9 Arcash Reduction Maintenance System . . . . 20.1-10 Series NRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13 Metering and Monitoring Devices . . . . . 20.1-16 Technical Data Voltage and Bus Ratings . . 20.1-18 Heat Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-18 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-18 Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . 20.1-19 Breaker Control Voltages . . . 20.1-20 CT Metering Accuracies . . . 20.1-22 Voltage Transformers . . . . . 20.1-22 Control Power Transformers. 20.1-22 Layout Dimensions Breaker Arrangements . . . . 20.1-25 Floor Plan/Conduit Area . . . . 20.1-34 Switchgear Section View . . . 20.1-36 Outdoor Enclosure . . . . . . . 20.1-39 Arc-Resistant Layout Restrictions. . . . . . 20.1-41 Center of Gravity/Weights . 20.1-45 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: 1995 2010 Section 16426A Section 26 23 00.11 Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage and DSLII For DS/DSII or DSL/DSLII Switchgear, please consult factory at 1-800-257-3278. Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: 1995 2010 Section 16426B Section 26 23 00.13
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Magnum DS Switchgear
21
CA08104001E
20.0-2 Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 20 002
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 003
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage Magnum DS

General Description
20.1-1
Eatons Magnum DS power circuit breaker switchgear is backed by 40 years of power circuit breaker and switchgear development that have set the industry standards for quality, reliability, maintainability and extended operating life, when it comes to protecting and monitoring low voltage electrical distribution systems. Magnum DS switchgear is designed to meet the changing needs of our customers by providing:

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Lower installation and maintenance costs Higher interrupting ratings and withstand ratings Better coordination capability Increased tripping sensitivity Enhanced safety measures Higher quality, reliability and maintainability Communications and power quality monitoring and measuring capabilities Flexible layouts that maximize use of capital by minimizing equipment footprint
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Magnum DS breakers are designed to:
Structure Features
Standard nish: Gray paint nish (ANSI 61) using a modern, completely automated and continuously monitored electrostatic powder coating. This continually monitored system includes spray de-grease and clean, spray rinse, iron phosphate spray coating spray rinse, non-chemical seal, oven drying, electrostatic powder spray paint coating and oven curing. Integral base: The ruggedly formed base greatly increases the rigidity of the structure, reduces the possibility of damage during the installation of the equipment, and is suitable for rolling, jacking and handling. A lifting angle is permanently welded into the bus compartment structure for increased strength. The bottom frame structure members are indented to allow the insertion of a pry bar. Heavy-duty door hinges: Each breaker door is mounted with hinge pins. Removal of the door is easily accomplished by just lifting the hinge pin. This allows easy access to the breaker internal compartment for inspection and maintenance. Rear cover/doors: In Magnum DS switchgear, standard rear bolted covers are provided. They are split into two sections to facilitate handling during removal and installation. Optional rear doors are also available.
ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.16, C37.17, C37.50 UL 1066
Magnum DS switchgear can meet the needs of general applications, service entrances, harsh environments, multiple source transfers, special grounding systems and many others. With a modern design, Magnum DS metal-enclosed low voltage switchgear and power circuit breakers provide:

Magnum DS switchgear conforms to the following standards:

100% rated, fully selective protection Integral microprocessor-based breaker tripping systems Two-step stored-energy breaker closing Standard 100 kA short-circuit bus bracing Optional 150 and 200 kA short-circuit bus bracing Optional metal barriers to isolate the cable compartment from the bus compartment Both indoor and outdoor aisle and aisleless enclosures Full range of safety solutions dealing with arc ash hazard and operator error
CSA C22.2, No. 31-M89 ANSI C37.20.1 ANSI C37.51 UL Standard 1558 and UL Standard 891 American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Built in an ISO certied facility
Maximum ratings for Magnum DS switchgear are 600 Vac, 10,000A continuous cross bus and 200,000A short-circuit capacity.
Seismic Qualication
Many other features for coordinated, safe, convenient, trouble-free, and economical control and protection of low voltage distribution systems are also provided.
CA08104001E
20.1-2 Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage Magnum DS

General Description
Through-the-door design: The following functions may be performed without the need to open the circuit breaker doorlever the breaker between positions, operate manual charging system and view the spring charge status ag, close and open breaker, view and adjust trip unit and read the breaker rating nameplate. Closing spring automatic discharge: Mechanical interlocking automatically discharges the closing springs when the breaker is removed from its compartment. Optional safety shutters: Positive acting safety shutters that isolate the breaker connections to the main bus when the breaker is withdrawn from the cell is an option offered for additional safety beyond our standard design. They reduce the potential of accidental contact with live bus. Insulating covers (boots) are furnished on live main stationary disconnecting contacts in compartments equipped for future breakers. Breaker inspection: When withdrawn on the rails, breaker is completely accessible for visual inspection; tilting is not necessary. The rails are permanent parts of every breaker compartment. Interference interlocks: Supplied on breakers and in compartments where the compartments are of the same physical size. Interference interlocks ensure an incorrect breaker cannot be inserted. Optional key interlock (switchgear mounted): This mechanism holds the breaker cell mechanically trip-free to prevent electrical or manual closing. Breaker can be stored in compartment, and completely removed for maintenance or for use as a spare without disturbing the interlock. Modication of the breaker is not required. An additional single cylinder breaker mounted key interlock is available as an option. Optional mechanical interlock: Available between adjacent breakers to ensure the proper sequence of operation between two circuit breakers or a circuit breaker and a fuse truck.
September 2011
Sheet 20 004
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Bus bracing: Unique vertical bus conguration provides an optional industry-leading short-circuit withstand rating of 200,000A. Standard bracing is 100,000A. The U shaped bar is the heart of the Magnum DS vertical bus. This conguration provides a much higher mechanical strength. To further demonstrate the strength and rigidity of this bus system, it has been veried through testing to withstand 85,000A shortcircuit for a full 60 cycles. Silver plating: Bolted, silver-plated copper main buses are standard. The plating is over the entire length of the bar, not just at the joints. Optional tin-plated copper buses are available. Bus joints: All joints are bolted and secured with Belleville-type spring washers for maximum joint integrity. These washers reduce the potential of joint hardware loosening during the change of joint temperature associated with variations of the loads. Optional maintenance-free hardware is also available. Full neutral: For four-wire applications, the neutral bus is rated 100% of main bus rating as standard. Neutral ratings up to a maximum of 10,000A are available as an option. Additionally, four-pole breakers can be used in conjunction with four-wire systems. Ground: A ground bus is furnished the full length of the switchgear assembly and is tted with terminals for purchasers connections. Glass reinforced polyester and Ultramid standoff insulation system: Glass reinforced polyester has been used on both low and medium voltage switchgear for decades. By combining this industry proven material with Ultramid insulation, a total system providing exceptional mechanical and dielectric withstand strength, as well as high resistance to heat, ame and moisture, is produced. Substantial testing to demonstrate accelerated effects of heating and cooling on the mechanical and dielectric properties of this system prove it to provide superior performance for decades of trouble-free operation.
Through-the-Door Design
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Cassette design: The breaker cassette supports the breaker in the cell, as well as on the movable extension rails when the breaker is placed into or removed from the cell. The extension rails allow the breaker to be drawn out without having to de-energize the entire switchgear lineup. Accessibility: When the door is open or removed, each breaker compartment provides front access to isolated, vertical wireways, primary disconnects, cell current transformers and other breaker compartment accessories for ease of eld wiring and troubleshooting eld connections.
Bus Features
Buses and connections: Vertical and cross bus ratings in Magnum DS switchgear are based on a UL and ANSI standard temperature rise of 65C above a maximum ambient air temperature of 40C. As an option, 55C temp rise over a maximum ambient air temp of 40C is available.
Breaker Cell
Four-position drawout: Breakers can be in connected, test, disconnected or removed position. The breaker can be moved between the connected, test and disconnected positions while the compartment door is closed.
Bus ampacities: Vertical and cross bus ratings in Magnum DS are 2000, 3200, 4000 and 5000A. In addition, a 6000, 8000 and 10,000A cross bus rating is available. Vertical section bus is sized per main cross bus maximum rating or by ANSI C37.20.1 Section 7.4.1.3. Table 11 to a maximum of 5000A.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 005

General Description
20.1-3
Optional conductor insulation covering: For applications requiring additional bus protection in harsh environments, Magnum DS switchgear is designed for the addition of optional conductor insulation covering, in addition to providing full UL air clearance without insulation. This material is applied during the assembly of the bus, and covers all vertical and horizontal phase bus bars. Removable boots provide access to section-tosection bus joints for inspection and maintenance purposes. This insulation is not available for vertical sections containing Series NRX breakers.
Wiring Features
Cable compartment: The cable compartment gives ample room for terminating the power cables. Removable top roof sheets allow for easy conduit hub installation. The oor of the cable compartment is open to allow cable entry from underground duct banks. Optional oor plates are available. In addition to cable, busway and nonsegregated bus duct can be terminated in the compartment. Lug pad: The lugs are located on the breaker run-backs to accommodate lug orientations at a 45 angle to reduce the bending radius of the cable needed for making the connections, thus reducing installation and maintenance time. Mechanical setscrew type lugs are standard. Optional NEMA two-hole compression lugs are available as an option. Control wireway: An isolated vertical wireway is provided for routing of factory and eld wiring in each switchgear section. Breaker secondary terminal blocks are mounted as standard above each circuit breaker. The terminal blocks are rated 30A, and will accept bare wire, ring or spade terminals for wire size ranges of #22#10. Extruded loops are punched in side sheets of the vertical wireway to allow securing of customer control wiring without the use of adhesive wire anchors. Control circuits may be wired in all cells without removing the circuit breaker. In addition, power circuits may be connected in the rear of the switchgear at the same time control circuits are being wired in the front of the switchgear. For applications involving excessive wiring, or nonstandard terminal blocks, terminal blocks are mounted on the rear frame with the power cables where they are readily accessible for customers connections and inspection. Control wire: Standard wire is Type SIS insulated stranded copper, extra exible No. 14 AWG minimum. Pow-R-Way
Control wire marking: Each wire is imprinted with ink cured under ultraviolet light for durability and for easy identication by the user. The enhanced solvent resistance and durability of the aerospace grade UV cure ink has been tested for severe environments. The imprinting is made every 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) along the length of the wire to make eld troubleshooting easier. The point of origin, wire designation and point of destination are imprinted in the following format: <origin zone/ wire name/destination zone>. Each device has a uniquely designated zone. < indicates the direction of the wire origination and > indicates the direction of the wire destination. As an option, wire marking can be made using sleeve type or heat shrink sleeve type.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Control Wire Marking
Optional Insulated Bus
Barriers: Optional grounded metal barriers isolate the main bus and connections from the cable compartment providing added safety to the workers while reducing the potential of objects falling into the bus compartment. In addition, vertical barriers between cable sections can be added to reduce potential hazards. Barriers are removable to give access to the bus compartment for inspection and maintenance. Barriers can be either solid metal or vented for ease of infrared scanning.
Secondary terminal compartment: There are 72 nger-safe secondary connections for a standard frame Magnum breaker, 60 for a narrow frame Magnum breaker and 54 for a Series NRX breaker. The customers secondary terminal connections are located at the front of the structure behind a separate door providing access to these connections without the need to open the breaker compartment door. Short-circuiting terminal blocks: One provided for each set of instrumentation or relaying application current transformers. Shipping split connection: At each shipping split, the control connections are made with plug-in terminal blocks rated 600V, 40A. The terminal blocks mechanically interlock without removing the line or load connections. This method of making the shipping split control connections increases the speed of installation and reduces the potential of incorrect connections.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Optional Bus Compartment and Vertical Section Barriers
21
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 20 006
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Instrumentation/Metering Features
Flexibility: Magnum DS switchgear allows for a variety of metering options: Analog switchboard type meters such as ammeters, voltmeters, watthour, power factor and so on Electronic power metering such as the Power Xpert, PX 2000, IQ 250/ 260 and IQ Analyzer Instrument door-mounted meters. For feeder circuit instrumentation, 2% accuracy ammeters and ammeter switches can be mounted on the secondary contact compartment door between the breaker compartment doors. The ammeters and switches are immediately associated with denite breaker circuits. Other devices, such as control pushbuttons, breaker control switches, indicating lights and test switches can be mounted on these panels, within space limitations
Instrumentationdoor-mounted secondary terminal compartment door: Devices, such as control pushbuttons, indicating lights, switches and analog meters can be mounted on these panels, within space limitations. The ammeters and switches are immediately associated with denite breaker circuits.

Devices Mounted on Secondary Terminal Compartment Door
See Tabs 2, 3 and 4 for Metering and Power Management products. Voltage transformers: Voltage transformers are rated 10 kV BIL, and are protected by both primary and secondary fuses. The primary fuses are of the current limiting type. Current transformers: Current transformers for metering and instrumentation are mounted in the breaker compartments and are front accessible. Secondary wiring between the current transformer and the standard shorting terminal block is color-coded for ease of identication. Control power transformers: Control transformers are provided when required for AC control of circuit breakers, space heaters and/or transformer fans. Like voltage transformers, they are protected by current limiting primary fuses. Non-current limiting fuses are used on the secondary side to protect branch circuits.
Instrument compartment door: Devices, such as electronic power metering and analog switchboard type meters that do not t on the secondary terminal compartment door, are mounted on the instrument compartment door or on a panel of a blank cell.
Traveling type circuit breaker lifter, rail-mounted on top of switchgear Floor-running portable circuit breaker lifter and transfer truck with manual lifting mechanism. This requires approximately 84.00 inches (2133.6 mm) deep front aisle space Test cabinet for electrically operated breakers, with pushbuttons, control cable and receptacle, for separate mounting. Optional space heaters to be placed in the bottom of the breaker, cable and bus compartments. Space heaters are provided as standard in outdoor gear to reduce condensation Portable test kit (MTK2000) for secondary injection testing and verication of trip units. Uses standard 120V, 15A, single-phase, 60 Hz supply, available from any outlet. Allows for testing of both Magnum DS and Series NRX breakers Remote racking device (MRR1000) for both breaker racking and operation (open/close) from a safe distance. Mounts to any existing Magnum DS breaker. Uses standard 120V, 15A, single-phase, 60 Hz supply, available from any outlet
Power Xpert Meter Display
Accessories and Options Features

Switchgear accessories: Standard accessories furnished with each Magnum DS switchgear assembly include: One breaker levering crank Insulating covers or boots furnished on live main stationary disconnecting contacts in compartments equipped for future breakers Removable cover to block opening in the door when the breaker is temporarily removed from its compartment

Optional Switchgear Mounted Lifter
MRR1000
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 007

General Description
20.1-5
Enhanced Switchgear Options

Infrared scanning windows for bus thermal scans White interior panels for ease of visibility in instrument compartments Maintenance-free (Torque-&-Forget) bus hardware Lug booting that provides additional protection against accidental contact to live parts in the cable compartment Grounding balls and covers for protecting maintenance personnel downstream of switchgear feeder breakers Electronic remote control device that allows for breaker to open and close away from the front of the switchgear
Magnum DS FrontAccessible Switchgear

CommercialOfce buildings, high rise and convention centers IndustrialAutomotive, petrochemical, pharmaceutical, pulp and paper, utility and data centers InstitutionalUniversities and hospitals GovernmentWater treatment, federal buildings and municipalities Critical Power OEMsGenerator and UPS manufacturers
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Features

Magnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear 42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Deep Enclosure
When oor space is limited, or room constraints dictate that equipment be mounted against a wall, why compromise on switchgear design? Eatons Magnum DS front-accessible switchgear combines the robustness of UL 1558 low voltage switchgear with the exibility of UL 891 switchboard design. The front-accessible switchgear offering allows mounting against a wall, or in other tight locations, where a standard rear-accessible switchgear lineup would not normally t. The three divisions of rear-accessible switchgear are redistributed into two vertical sections, with the breaker and the bus in one half and cable and bus in the other half on the right-hand side. Both sections can be easily accessed by operators and maintenance personnel from the front of the switchgear.
Standard 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) switchgear depth Up to 4-high breaker arrangement Breaker sections are 18.00, 22.00, 24.00 or 44.00 inches (457.2, 558.8, 609.6 or 1117.6 mm) wide depending on breaker type and frame sizes Cable compartments are 18.00, 22.00, 24.00, 30.00 or 44.00 inches (457.2, 558.8, 609.6, 762.0 or 1117.6 mm) wide depending on cable or conduit sizes Substation arrangement, with close coupling to dry-type or liquid-lled transformers, where required
Benets
Grounding Balls and Covers
Product Offering

Remote Control Device
UL 1558 20008000A bus 8006000A breakers 100, 150 and 200 kA bus designs 600 Vac class NEMA1 indoor (corner section available for layout exibility) NEMA 3R outdoor, both aisle and aisleless enclosures
Improved uptimeHighest withstand ratings in the industry allow for levels of selective coordination never seen before Improved maintainability Dedicated secondary terminals with separate access door and front accessible control wireway Increased reliabilityModular design allows for reduced parts for both structures and breakers Increased safetyEnhanced performance suite of options Reduced installation costsFirst UL 1558 switchgear designed to be placed against a wall, allowing for reduced oor plan requirements without sacricing design
MTK2000 Trip Unit Test Kit
21

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 20 008
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Magnum DS ArcResistant Switchgear
Normal Operating Conditions

Arc-resistant features are intended to provide an additional degree of protection to the personnel performing normal operating duties in close proximity to the equipment while the equipment is operating under normal conditions. The normal operating conditions for proper application of arc-resistant switchgear designs are as follows:

Standard Features
ANSI Type 2 arc-resistance: Type 2 arc-resistant switchgear regardless of whether the arc originates the breaker, bus or cable compartment Stronger door and latch: The robust doors are made of heavy 12 gauge metal and secured with two-point latches. One piece doors cover both primary and secondary controls so that the arc gasses cannot escape by secondary contacts
ArcGard Magnum DS Switchgear
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Arc-resistant low voltage switchgear is a new development in the Magnum DS line that protects operating and maintenance personnel from dangerous arcing faults by channeling the arc energy out the top of the switchgear. Arc faults, caused by human error or insulation failure, can generate thermal energy as high as 35,000F and a blast equivalent to 20.7 lbs of TNT. While arc-resistant gear does not prevent these arcs from occurring, it does safely redirect and contain these arcs that do occur, regardless of the originating location of the arc. ArcGard Magnum DS switchgear has been tested in all three compartments for a full 0.5 seconds, passing ANSI Type 2 and Type 2B standards at 100 kA at 508V and 85 kA at 635V.
All doors and covers are properly closed and latched Pressure relief devices are free to operate The fault energy available to the equipment does not exceed the rating of the equipment (shortcircuit current and duration) There are no obstructions around the equipment that could direct the arc fault products into an area intended to be protected The equipment is properly grounded
Bellows and Two-Point Door Latch
The user should also refer to documents such as NFPA 70E, for safety training and safe work practices and methods of evaluating safe work distances from energized equipment based on the potential ash hazard, and use proper PPE when working on or near energized equipment with the door/cover opened or not properly secured.
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Product Offering

Arc-resistant switchgear comes standard with:
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Accessibility Types

Arc-resistant switchgear performance is dened by its accessibility type in accordance with IEEE test guide C37.20.7 as follows: Type 1: Switchgear with arc-resistant designs or features at the freely accessible front of the equipment only. Type 2: Switchgear with arc-resistant designs or features at the freely accessible exterior (front, back and sides) of the equipment only. (Type 2 incorporates Type 1.) Type 2B: Switchgear with Type 2 accessibility plus arc-resistant in front of the instrument/control compartment with the instrument/ control compartment door opened. (Type 2B incorporates Type 2.)
Up to 100 kA short circuit at 508 Vac maximum and 85 kA short circuit at 635 Vac maximum Up to 10 kA horizontal main bus continuous current Up to 5 kA vertical bus continuous current Magnum DS power circuit breaker frame ratings between 800A and 6000A Up to four high breaker conguration with no additional layout restrictions (requires 10-foot ceiling clearance) Additional safety without increasing the footprint of regular Magnum DS switchgear
Breaker bellows: Bellows surround the breaker door, preventing arc gasses from escaping around the nose of the breaker while ensuring easy racking of the breaker into the disconnected position Rear dynamic ap system: The ventilation openings in the breaker must be open during operation to allow proper equipment ventilation, but sealed off during an arc event. The rear dynamic ap system uses gravity to keep the aps open during normal operating conditions and the arc pressure wave to close the aps during an arcing event. It is a passively designed system so there are no electrical or automated parts that could break or fail
Rear Dynamic Flap System
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 009

General Description
20.1-7
Ventilation system: Each breaker compartment is vented to allow ionized gas to ow into the bus compartment from any location in the switchgear and out the top of the switchgear through the hinged aps Bottom or top cable or bus duct entry Cable compartment oor plates
Magnum DS Power Circuit Breakers

Eatons Type MDS power circuit breakers constitute a complete, modern and rugged line of low voltage power circuit breakers using Eatons DE-ION principle of arc extinction. The breaker family is distinguished by its similarity of appearance and operation frame to frame. All frame sizes are either manually or electrically operated. Refer to Tab 26 for detailed information on Magnum DS low voltage power circuit breakers.
Release of the stored energy is accomplished by manually depressing a button on the front of the breaker or electrically energizing a releasing solenoid.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Optional Features

ANSI Type 2B arc-resistance Plenum: The plenum is mounted on top of arc-resistant gear to direct dangerous arc gasses as they leave the switchgear. The exit path can either be a side or rear exit, with a 4-foot blast zone around the exit Zone selective interlocking protection: Zone selective interlocking capability is also available in arc-resistant gear, allowing the breaker closest to the fault to trip without any preset time delay while the remainder of the distribution system remains online Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Safety shutters One piece hinged and bolted rear panel Insulated bus Vented bus/cable compartment barriers: Bus/cable compartment barriers are only available vented to allow ow of arc gasses in the case of an arc event Cable compartment segregation barrier
Breaker Features
Four Physical Frame Sizes
Narrow, standard, double narrow and double to promote breaker application in compact modular enclosures and to improve enclosure density.
Contacts
Magnum DS has silver tungsten moving contacts and silver graphite stationary contacts. The contacts provide a long-wearing, low-resistance joint. The contacts are protected from arcing damage even after repeated interruptions by the heel-toe action, which causes the integral arcing contacts to mate before the main contacts part. The arcing contacts then part last, striking the arc away from the main contacts. The main contacts are of the butt type and are composed of multiple ngers to give many points of contact without alignment being critical.
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers have high withstand ratings from 42 to100 kA to provide for maximum system coordination and selectivity.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers have integral current limiters to provide interrupting ratings of 200 kA at 600 Vac.
13 14 15 16 17
UL 1558/UL 1066 ANSI C37.20.1, C37.13, C37.51 ANSI C37.20.7 CSA C22.2 No 31-04 Third-party UL witnessed and certied NFPA 70E
Magnum DS Breaker Contacts (Arc Chutes Removed)
18 19
Magnum MDSX Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers have fast opening contacts to provide interrupting ratings up to 200 kA at 480 Vac without fuses.
Stored-Energy Mechanism
A cam-type closing mechanism closes the breaker. It receives its energy from a spring that can be charged by a manual handle on the front of the breaker or by a universal electric motor.
20 21

General Description Arc Chute
There are three basic means of extinguishing an arc: lengthening the arc path; cooling by gas blast or contraction; deionizing or physically removing the conduction particles from the arc path. The DE-ION principle is incorporated in all Magnum DS circuit breakers. This makes possible faster arc extinction for a given contact travel, ensures positive interruption and minimum contact burning. Stored energy is energy held in waiting, ready to open or close the breaker within ve cycles or less. The unique cam and spring design provides necessary energy for a single close-open sequence as well as the energy for multiple charge-close operations such as this possible sequence: charge-close-rechargeopen-close-open. The closing springs are interlocked with the breaker racking mechanism to ensure the closing springs are discharged before the breaker can be removed from the compartment. Provisions for padlocking: All breakers include provision for padlocking open to prevent electrical or manual closing. This padlocking can secure the breaker in the connected, test or disconnected position by preventing levering of the breaker. Ease of inspection and maintenance : Magnum DS breakers are designed for maximum accessibility and the utmost ease of inspection and maintenance. Manually operated breakers: Manually operated breakers are equipped with a manual charging handle to charge the closing springs. Manual closing and tripping pushbuttons are used to operate the breaker. Remote closing and tripping can be accomplished by installing optional electric spring release and shunt trip coils (see Tables 20.1-9 and 20.1-10 for available control voltages, currents and motor-operated spring charging times). The breaker closing springs must be charged manually, then remote closing and tripping signals can be sent to the breaker. Electrically operated breakers: Electrically operated breakers are equipped with a spring charging motor and electrically operated spring release and shunt trip coils (see Tables 20.1-9 and 20.1-10 for available control voltages, currents and motor-operated spring charging times). The breaker manual charging handle can be used to charge the closing springs when power is not available to the charging motor.
September 2011
Sheet 20 010
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Optional Breaker Attachments and Accessories
Levering Mechanism
The worm gear levering mechanism is self-contained on the breaker drawout element and engages slots in the breaker compartment. A standard 3/8-inch (10 mm) drive set is used to lever the breaker between the connected, test and disconnected positions. Mechanical interlocking is arranged so that levering cannot be accomplished unless the breaker is in the opened position.
Protection During Levering Operation

When levering the breaker between the connected, test and disconnected positions, the operator is protected from contact with live parts by the breaker door. True two-step stored energy closing: Refers to the sequence required to charge and close the breaker. 1. The breaker closing springs are charged either through the manual-charging handle or by the optional charging motor. The breaker is mechanically interlocked to prevent closing of the breaker until the closing springs are fully charged. 2. With the closing springs fully charged, the breaker can then be closed by pressing the manual close pushbutton on the breaker, or by the optional spring release coil through a remote electrical signal. This means that the energy required to open the breaker is always restored following a closing operation.
Shunt trip device (ST): Provides for remote electrically controlled breaker opening when energized by a rated voltage input Spring charge motor (MOT): Charges the breaker closing springs automatically, facilitating remote or local closing. The motor assembly includes its own cut-off switch that changes state at the end of the charging cycle. This contact can be wired out for external indication Spring release device (SR): Provides for remote electrically controlled breaker closing when its coils are energized by a rated voltage input Undervoltage release (UVR): Trips the breaker when an existing voltage signal is lost or falls below an established threshold Auxiliary switch: Up to 6a/6b auxiliary individual dedicated contacts are available for customer use to indicate if the breaker is in the OPEN or CLOSE position Mechanical trip indicator ag: The red trip indicator ag pops out to provide local visual indication when the Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker on an overcurrent condition. Available in two options: an interlocked version that mechanically locks out the breaker until the indicator is manually reset and a non-interlocked version for indication only Bell alarm/overcurrent trip switch (OTS): Provides two Form C contacts that change state when the Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker. The contacts are available for external indication or customer use and are manually reset by the mechanical trip indicator Padlockable pushbutton cover: Permits padlocking hinged cover plates to block access to the PUSH ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the breaker faceplate Mechanical operations counter : Records mechanical operations of the breaker over its installed life Key off lock provisions: Enables mounting of a single cylinder Kirk , Castell or Ronis Key Lock to lock the breaker in the OPEN position Latch check switch: Provides one Form C contact that changes state when the breaker is ready to close. Can be wired to the spring release device for fast transfer applications or wired for external ready-to-close indication
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 011

General DescriptionElectronic Trip Units
20.1-9
Magnum DS Switchgear Trip Units

Digitrip RMS trip unit. Eatons Digitrip RMS trip units feature a dependent curve that is depicted in the nameplate by a blue shaded area of the trip curve. The dependent curve affords better protection exibility. Additionally, all of the trip units have, as standard, thermal memory, 50/60 Hz operation and thermal self-protection at 90C. Digitrip RMS integral microprocessorbased breaker overcurrent trip systems: Provide maximum reliability with true rms sensing as standard, gives excellent repeatability and requires minimum maintenance. No external control source is required for its protective functions.
Trip functions: Magnum DS trip units provide the maximum in exibility and are available in the following congurations: LSI, LSIG, LSIA (ground fault alarm only). In each case, either the short delay or instantaneous (not both) functions may be defeated. This reduces the need for spare breaker inventories and provides maximum usage of interchangeable breakers. Digitrip RMS 520: Enables the user as many as nine phase and ground current protection settings for maximum exibility in trip-curve shaping and multi-unit coordination, and adds zone selective interlocking. Digitrip RMS 520M: Adds phase, neutral and ground current metering with a four-character LCD display window with 2% current metering accuracy and type LSIA alarm when ground fault settings are exceeded. Digitrip RMS 520MC: Adds communication of trip values and breaker status (open, close and tripped). Adds Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS).
Digitrip RMS 1150+: Provides programmability for more sophisticated distribution systems. Adds Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS). Increased protection and coordination capabilities Systems monitoring information including power factor, voltage current, harmonic distortion values, and waveform capture with a three-line, (eight characters per line) LED display Two programmable contacts for customer use Time stamping of trip events for improved troubleshooting and diagnostics Accuracy of 1% on metered values and 2% on energy and power Systems diagnostic information Web enabled or PowerNet communications Breaker health menu Additional protection functions: Undervoltage/overvoltage Underfrequency/overfrequency Voltage unbalance Reverse power Zone selective interlocking: The Digitrip RMS zone selective interlocking (ZSI) capability provides positive system coordination without time delays. ZSI allows the breaker closest to the fault to trip without any preset time delay. The breaker closest to the fault trips rst, while the remainder of the distribution system remains online, thus avoiding unnecessary and costly downtime.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Digitrip 1150+
CA08104001E

General DescriptionElectronic Trip Units
September 2011
Sheet 20 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Arcash Reduction Maintenance System

The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Maintenance Mode function of the Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ can reduce arc ash incident energy that is generated on a fault condition. Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System employs a separate, dedicated analog trip circuit that eliminates microprocessor latencies, resulting in clearing times that are faster than standard instantaneous tripping. This provides superior arc ash reduction to competing systems that simply lower the standard instantaneous pickup set point. There are three ways to arm the Maintenance Mode Arc Flash Reduction setting. One method is locally at the trip unit front panel. For the 520MC, the 2-position switch in the Maintenance Mode section of the trip unit is used. Turning the switch to the ON position will arm the setting. For the 1150+, the local front keypad is used to enable the Maintenance Mode setting. The setting is located in the SYSTEM submenu of programmable settings (PGM SET).
For the second method of arming the Maintenance Mode function, a remote switch wired through the breaker secondary contacts can remotely arm the Maintenance Mode setting. A high-quality gold-plated or palladium contact is required in this application. A third method to arm the maintenance setting is via a communication device. This can be accomplished through a Power Xpert Gateway. A BIM (Breaker Interface Module), Power Xpert software or PowerNet system is another communication method to arm the setting. For Magnum DS breakers, the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System setting has ve unique settings (2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0 x In). To adjust this setting, a rotary switch on the trip unit face is provided for the 520MC while the 1150+ trip unit uses its local keypad. For the Series NRX breakers, the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System setting has a constant setting of 5000A. For all three arming methods, the 520MC provides a blue LED to conrm the Maintenance Mode function is on. In addition, there is also a normally open breaker contact that allows the user to wire in an external stacklight or annunciator for remote indication. For the 1150+, the message Maintenance Mode Enabled will be shown on its LED display. The 1150+ also has an alarm relay that can be programmed to track the Maintenance Mode state.
The Maintenance Mode function will provide fast tripping even when the regular Instantaneous is set to OFF. The Instantaneous LED position is also used to indicate a trip initiated by the Maintenance Mode setting. The 520MC LCD display, if powered, will indicate with four dashes while the 1150+ will display the message Maintenance Mode Trip.
The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System can be wired out to a separate lockable switch/light combination mounted on the switchgear for ease of operation. Additionally, the switch can be wired out to a remote station for operation outside the arc ash boundary of the switchgear, and the alarm can be wired to an optional beacon or audible device.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 013
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage 20.1-11 Magnum DS

Low Voltage Trip UnitSelection Data
Table 20.1-1. Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
i ii 1
Trip Unit Type Ampere Range Interrupting rating at 480V rms sensing
Digitrip 520 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LI, LSI, LSIG Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) & M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) & M1 Yes LSI & LSIG No 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N/A No No Test set No No No No

Digitrip 520M 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) & M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) & M1 Yes Yes Yes 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes Yes Yes No 4-character LCD Yes +/2% No No No No No No No No No Optional No No Test set No No No No
Digitrip 520MC 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) & M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) & M1 Yes Yes Yes 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes Yes Yes No 4-character LCD Yes +/2% No No No No No No No No INCOM/PowerNet Standard No No Test set No Yes No No
Digitrip 1150+ 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds 15 seconds Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (Ir) 2001000% x (Ir) & M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) & M1 Yes Yes Yes 24100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes Yes Yes Yes 24-character LED Yes +/1% Yes +/1% Yes +/2% Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink Standard Yes Yes Integral and test set Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Protection Ordering options xed rating plug (In) overtemperature trip Long delay pickup Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir Long delay time I4t IEEE curves Long Delay Thermal Memory High Load Alarm Short delay protection (S) Instantaneous protection (I) Ground fault protection (G) Short delay pickup Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir Short delay time at Short delay time ZSI Instantaneous pickup making current release off position Ground fault alarm Ground fault pickup Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In Ground fault delay at Ground fault ZSI Ground fault thermal memory
Long delay protection (L)
Disable ground fault protection Neutral protection (N)
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs Magnitude of trip information Remote signal contacts Programmable contacts
System Monitoring
Digital display Current (% ) full scale sensor Voltage (%) L to L Power and energy (%) Apparent power kVA and demand Reactive power kvar Power factor Crest factor Power qualityharmonics % THD, waveform capture
System Communications
Type Power supply in breaker
Additional Features
Trip log (three events) Electronic operations counter Testing method Waveform capture Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Breaker health monitor Programmable relay functions
Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip and phase rotation alarm are included.
1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC. Test set for secondary injection.
Legend: In = Rating Plug and Sensor Rating. Ir = Long Delay Pickup setting.
CA08104001E

Table 20.1-2. Magnum DS Breakers Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings
Time/Current Characteristic Long delay Instantaneous Pickup Setting 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0 Off, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, M1 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, M1 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0 Pickup Point In times long delay setting In times instantaneous setting Ir times short delay setting In times ground fault setting Time Bands, Seconds 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24
September 2011
Sheet 20 014
i ii 1
Short delay
2
Ground fault
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 at response 0.1, 0.03, 0.05 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (at response) 0.1, 0.3, 0.5
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
In = Rating plug value Ir = Long delay pickup setting x In I2t response
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 015

Series NRXGeneral Description
Series NRX
In switchgear, its important that the breaker be easily accessible during scheduled equipment maintenance. The design of the breaker and cassette enables full use of the breaker handle and cassette rails with a gloved hand, allowing electricians to remain in the appropriate PPE protective gear. The breakers ergonomic design also maximizes functionality. Individual Series NRX breaker door will open in a saloon or barn type of arrangement so that personnel can access one of the side-by-side breakers without having to interact with the other. The breakers handle allows the operator to easily apply leverage across seven complete strokes (with an average of only 21 lbs of force) charging the breaker quickly and easily, and making it easier to cycle when needed during commissioning or scheduled maintenance. Series NRX breakers use a true two-step stored energy mechanism similar to Magnum DS breakers. The reduced weight of the Series NRX makes it easier to handle during startup and scheduled inspection. A threepole, fully populated drawout breaker weighs only 54 lbs/24 kg. The Series NRX enables twice as many feeder breakers in a standard structure for a reduction in overall assembly size of up to 50%. The small size, 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) wide by 10.70 inches (271.8 mm) deep by 14.20 inches (360.7 mm) high, of the Series NRX allows for much higher densities of power circuit breakers in a structureup to eight breakers in a 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide structureand a 2.50-inch (63.5 mm) customer wireway. This means that two Series NRX breakers can be mounted side-by-side in the same space typically used for one Magnum DS breaker. The Series NRX breakers can also be mixed and matched with Magnum DS breakers, increasing layout exibility and providing the ability to stack feeder breakers around larger main and tie breakers. See layout guide for more details.
All optional Magnum DS breaker attachments and accessories are also available for the Series NRX breakers. Series NRX accessories can be quickly installed at the job site, without any special tools. Each breaker comes standard with an accessory tray; the needed accessories simply plug and lock into the tray. The Series NRX uses one CT for the breaker frame. This eliminates the need to match CTs and rating plugs to change the continuous current rating of the breaker. For example, changing from 1200 to 800A on previous breaker designs required changing CT from 1200 to 800A and changing the rating plug from 1200 to 800A. The Series NRX breaker simplies this process by only requiring changing the 1200A rating plug to 800A. This is accomplished through the Series NRXs Rogowski air core CT. The Rogowski coil does not saturate like a traditional ferrous core CT, allowing the CT to be used across a broad current range with greater accuracy. One sensor accommodates 2001200A range. A full range of trip units, ranging from basic protection (LSI or LSIG) to metering, system diagnostics, protective relay functions and communications, complement the breaker offering. Two of the trip unit models, the Digitrip 520M and 1150, include (optional) Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System, built to reduce arc ash energy on a downstream unit during system maintenance. Zone selective interlocking is also available. When communication capability is required, the Series NRX breaker has cassette-mounted modules, eliminating the need for readdressing replacement breakers. These DIN rail mounted modules save space and time during installation and are available for eld mounting capability. Modules for Modus and Eatons INCOM system are available with future releases for PROFIBUS and Ethernet compatible with Eatons Power Xpert Architecture protocols. Refer to Tab 26 for more detailed information on Series NRX breakers.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Series NRX Breakers Have a Compact But Powerful Size to Provide Interrupting Ratings up to 65 kA at 480 Vac
General Description
The Series NRX provides the performance of a power circuit breaker 65 kA interrupting at 480 Vacin the compact size of a molded case breaker. It offers the protection and features of a power circuit breaker, along with increased exibility at a portion of the size. All frame sizes are either electrically or mechanically operated. The Series NRX is tested to 20,000 mechanical operations and 10,000 electrical operationssignicantly higher than industry standards, such as UL and IEC, require or the capabilities of equivalent products on the market. Thus, your maintenance personnel can do what needs to be done, instead of spending valuable time inspecting and maintaining the breakers in the system.
CA08104001E

Table 20.1-3. Digitrip Trip Units for Series NRX ANSI/UL Rated Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 20 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Trip Unit Type Ampere range Interrupting rating at 480V rms sensing
Digitrip 520 2001600A 42 kA Yes LI, LSI, LSIG Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) 2001200% x (In) Yes LSI and LSIG No 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N/A
Digitrip 520M 2001600A 42 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes Yes (LSI only) 2001000% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) 2001200% x (In) Yes Yes Yes 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No 4-character LCD Yes 2% full scale No No No No No No No No Yes +24 Vdc No No Test set No Yes (RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA) No No
Digitrip 1150 2001600A 42 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds 15 seconds Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (Ir) 2001000% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) 2001200% x (In) and M1 Yes Yes Yes 24100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Color graphic LCD Yes 1% of reading Yes 1% of reading Yes 2% of reading Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes +24 Vdc Yes Yes Integral and test set Yes (current and voltage) Yes (RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA) Yes Yes

Protection Styles Fixed rating plug (In) Overtemperature trip
Long delay pickup Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir Long delay time I4t IEEE curves Long delay thermal memory High load alarm Short delay Short delay pickup protection (S) Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir Short delay time at Short delay time ZSI Instantaneous Instantaneous pickup protection (I) Making current release Off position Ground fault alarm Ground fault Ground fault pickup protection (G) Ground fault delay I2t at .625 x In Ground fault delay at Ground fault ZSI Ground fault thermal memory Disable ground fault protection Neutral protection (N)
System Diagnostics
Cause-of-trip LEDs Magnitude of trip information Remote signal contacts Programmable contacts
System Monitoring
Digital display Current (%) Voltage (%) L to L Power and energy (%) Apparent power kVA and demand Reactive power kVAR Power factor Crest factor Power qualityharmonics % THD, waveform capture
Type Power supply
Additional Features
Trip log No Electronic operations counter No Testing method Test set Waveform capture No No Arcash Reduction Maintenance System No Breaker health monitor No Programmable relay functions 1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC. Optional communications modules available: Ethernet (Web-browsing, Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP), Modbus RTU, INCOM, PROFIBUS DP. Test set for secondary injection.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 017

Table 20.1-4. Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings for Series NRX Breakers
Time/Current Characteristic Long delay Instantaneous Short delay Pickup Setting 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 Pickup Point In times long delay setting In times instantaneous setting Ir times short delay setting In times ground fault setting Time Band, Seconds 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 (at 6 times pickup value) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.05 (at response) 0.1, 0.3, 0.5 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.05 (at response) 0.1, 0.3, 0.5
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ground fault
0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0 (1200A maximum)
In = Rating plug value Ir = Long delay pickup setting x In I2t response.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionMetering and Monitoring Devices
September 2011
Sheet 20 018
i ii 1 2 3
Power Xpert
Incoming Line Power Meter
See Tab 3.
The Web server provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy. It also provides critical information regarding power quality, such as harmonic distortion, icker, crest factor, K-Factor and more. For detailed information, refer to Tab 3.
Applications Identify Power Quality Problems to Help:

Protect motors from damage Preserve the integrity of processes and batches Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses Protect transformers and conductors from overheating


Avoid overloads and nuisance overload trips Maximize equipment use Manage emergency overloads
Power Xpert
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
General Description
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 Series monitors the critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument is simple to use, and is powerful, scalable and highly exible. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 offers a new level of intuitive user interface design, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in simple-to-navigate and easy-tounderstand information architecture. The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 graphic display visualizes the information from up to16 meter modules. The embedded Web server displays complex power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device conguration from the browser. Both the local graphic display and the embedded Web server present real time, historical and event information in a browser-style graphical format to help the user interpret key circuit information, such as:

Manage Energy Use to Help:

General Description
The Power Xpert 2000 Series Meter power quality instrument monitors the most critical aspects of an electrical distribution system. This premier power quality metering instrument uses the latest in advanced technology to make it simple to use, and is powerful, scalable and highly exible. The Power Xpert 2000 offers the same level of intuitive user interface design as the Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter, presenting critical electrical distribution system information in a simple-to-navigate and easy-tounderstand information architecture. The embedded Web server displays comprehensive power quality data using standard Internet browsers and allows for device conguration from the browser. The embedded Web server presents real-time, historical and event information in a browserstyle graphical format to help the user interpret information such as current loading, voltage and power levels, power factor, energy usage, I/O status and power quality measurements, as well as harmonic plots. The embedded Web server also offers a waveform view to visualize steady-state harmonic content, which is critical for power quality analysis. The Web server provides the energy and demand readings required to help manage the cost of energy.
For more details, see Tab 3.
IQ 250/260
Incoming Line Metering
See Tab 3.
IQ 250/260
Current loading Voltage and power levels Power factor Energy usage I/O status Power quality measurements Harmonic plots Disturbance and transient waveforms ITIC disturbance summary screen
This microprocessor device provides metering that meets ANSI C12.20 revenue metering accuracy, and has capabilities such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. In addition, the IQ 250 and IQ 260 Meters are prepared for the future. Built-in slots allow for upgrades to capabilities yet to be developed.

The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 graphic display uses a simple twist and click navigation control dial to easily navigate the menus and to drill down into increasing levels of important detail. A back key enhances the browser-like navigation of the graphic display.
Comprehensive metering High-end accuracy Self-test capability to validate accuracy Large, easy-to-read display Local or remote conguration Industry-standard communication protocols Mix-and-match input/output options Integration with Eatons Power Xpert Architecture Field-upgradeable
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 019

General DescriptionMetering and Monitoring Devices
IQ 130/140/150
General Description
The IQ 100 meter family provides capabilities you would not normally expect in affordable, compact meters, such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Providing the rst line of defense against costly power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment using todays technology. When space is at a premium, yet you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 100 series ts the bill. These meters are ideal for electrical equipment assemblies, machine control panels, such as panelboard and switchboard mains and feeders, low voltage metalenclosed switchgear feeders and motor control centers. Requiring far less space than other meters with similar functionality, IQ 100 series meters t into a standard ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or other electrical equipment, and therefore t easily into retrot applications.
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII)

Local Subnetwork Display
See Tab 4.
Communications
For remote power monitoring and software, see PowerNet Tab 2.
i ii 1 2
Low Voltage High Resistance Grounding

See Tab 36 for more details.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C-HRG Wall-Mounted Unit (Separately Mounted Resistors Not Shown)
The breaker interface module is a panel-mounted device that performs the following functions: Monitors and displays parameters from Digitrip 1150+ circuit breaker trip unit. Supports as many as 50 of these devices up to 10,000 ft (3048m) away Communicates the information from these protective and energy monitoring devices over a PowerNet network to a computer or PLC
Direct On/Off Control Capabilities
See Tab 2.
Typical Applications

Features and Benets
Measure and display real-time information about critical power parameters with a sampling rate of 400 samples per cycle Monitor power use and quality with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.5%) Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test pulse self-certication capabilities Optional Modbus RTU communications Available as transducer only or with display Designed to accommodate upgrades Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert Architecture for a holistic system level view
An industrial control relay with two inputs to monitor the status of external contacts and one output controllable over the communication network. The relay is AC/DC powered with AC/DC contacts rated to directly switch/monitor switchgear breakers, motor starters, etc. Features include:

Where continuity of service is a high priority, high-resistance grounding can add the safety of a grounded system while minimizing the risk of service interruptions due to grounds. The concept is a simple one: provide a path for ground current via a resistance that limits the current magnitude, and monitor to determine when an abnormal condition exists. This provides for maximum continuity of service, because no tripping occurs for the resistance limited ground fault. HRG can be installed as stand-alone equipment (as shown in photo) or can be integrated into Magnum DS low voltage switchgear.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
For more information, refer to Tab 3.
Address assigned by setting three hexadecimal switches LEDs show when the relay is energized and when it is sending reports Two status inputs and a Form C contact output Built-in remote communications capability within a PowerNet system Selectable baud rate
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 20.1-7. Heat Loss Data Estimated Heat Loss Per Breaker (Watts)
Maximum Voltage 254 508 635 Breaker Frame 800 1600 2000 3200 4000 5000 6000 Drawout Mounting Only 150 329 374 719 749 1000
September 2011
Sheet 20 020
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ratings
Table 20.1-5. Voltage Ratings (AC)
System Voltage 208/240 480 600
Vertical section bus is sized per main cross bus maximum rating or by ANSI C37.20.1 Section 7.4.13 Table 11 to a maximum of 5000A. (4000A in 18.00-inch [457.2 mm] structure.)
Note: In addition to the available bus bracings shown in Table 20.1-6, the bus has been tested for short-circuit values of 85,000A for a full 60 cycles.
Table 20.1-6. Available Bus Ratings

Cross Bus Ampacity 2000 3200 4000 5000 6000 8000 10,000 Bus Bracing kA 100, 150, 200
Estimated Heat Loss Per Structure (Watts)
Closing Times of Magnum DS and Series NRX Breakers
Loss is based on fully loaded vertical and cross bus rating in a structure as given below. Rating Vertical Bus 410 1623 1097 1410
5 cycles or less
100, 150, 200 2000 3200 4000 5000 6000 8000 10,000
Cross Bus 288 1163 1169 886 1265

For lower than maximum load currents, watt loss may be estimated by reducing the full load loss by the following: WL = (IL/IFL)2 WFL Where: WL = Load Watts WFL = Full Load Watts IL = Actual Load Current IFL = Full Load Current Contact Eaton.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 20 021

Technical Data
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066
i ii 1 2 3
Standard Magnum DS
Double Magnum DS
Narrow Magnum DS
Series NRX
4 5
Magnum DS and Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Table 20.1-8. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Frame Amperes Breaker Type Frame Type rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting at 254 Vac 800 MDN-408 MDN-508 MDN-608 MDN-C08 MDS-408 MDS-608 MDS-808 MDS-C08 MDS-L08 NRX-408 NRX-508 NRX-608 1600 MDN-416 MDN-516 MDN-616 MDN-C16 MDS-616 MDS-816 MDS-C16 MDS-L16 MDS-X16 2000 MDN-620 MDN-C20 MDS-620 MDS-820 MDS-C20 MDS-L20 MDS-X20 3200 MDS-632 MDS-832 MDS-C32 MDS-X32 4000 MDS-840 MDS-C40 MDS-X40 Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Compact Compact Compact Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Double Double Double Double 42 50 65 100 42 65 85 100 200 85 85 85 42 50 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 65 85 100 200 85 100 200 Interrupting at 508 Vac 42 50 65 100 42 65 85 100 200 42 50 65 42 50 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 65 85 100 200 85 100 200 Interrupting at 635 Vac 42 50 65 65 42 65 85 100 200 35 35 35 42 50 65 65 65 85 100 200
Short-Time Withstand Rating
Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip
Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
6 7 8 9
42 50 65 20 42 65 85 85 42 kA at 254 Vac 42 kA at 508 Vac 35 kA at 635 Vac 42 50 65 30 65 85 85 30 65 35 65 85 85 30 65 85 85 50 85 100 50
18 x In 85 18 x In 85 30 18 x In 85 30 85 50 50
200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800
10 11 12 13
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600
65 65 65 85 100 200
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
14 15
65 85 100
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
16 17 18 19 20 21
85 100
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short-time and xed instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac. Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. Series NRX uses the same sensors for all trip settings. No changes to sensors required.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
Table 20.1-8. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Frame Amperes Breaker Type Frame Type rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting at 254 Vac 5000 MDS-850 MDS-C50 MDS-X50 MDS-C60 Double Double Double Double 85 100 200 100 Interrupting at 508 Vac 85 100 200 100 Interrupting at 635 Vac 85 100
September 2011
Sheet 20 022
i ii 1
Short-Time Withstand Rating
Available Current Sensor & Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating)
85 100 50 100
50
2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
6000
100
3200, 4000, 5000, 6000
2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure. Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
Table 20.1-9. Magnum Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc

Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage Shunt Trip (ST) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Opening time Spring Release (SR) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Closing time Spring Charge Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range Amps (running) Amps (inrush) Power consumption Charging time Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range Drop-out voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Power consumption (continuous) Opening time Auxiliary Switches Minimum load Contact rating Trip circuit 70110% (Required for 35 ms) Seconds Close circuit 70110% (Required for 200 ms) Seconds 85110% voltage Running % of running seconds 24 Vdc 32 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
1726 Vdc 250 watts 35 ms 1726 Vdc 250 watts 40 ms 2026 Vdc 12.0A 300% 300 watts 5 sec 2026 Vdc 714 Vdc 250 watts 18 watts 70 ms 0.5A
3453 Vdc 250 watts 35 ms 3453 Vdc 250 watts 40 ms 4153 Vdc 5.0A 500% 250 watts 5 Sec 4153 Vdc 1429 Vdc 275 watts 18 watts 70 ms 0.5A
85110% voltage 3060% voltage Required for 200 ms Required for 400 ms Seconds Inductive load
2735 Vdc 1019 Vdc 275 watts 15 watts 70 ms
Table 20.1-10. Magnum Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac

Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage Shunt Trip (ST) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Opening time Spring Release (SR) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Closing time Spring Charge Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range Amps (running) Amps (inrush) Power consumption Charging time Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range Drop-out voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Power consumption (continuous) Opening time Auxiliary Switches Minimum load Contact rating Trip circuit 70110% (Required for 35 ms) Seconds Close circuit 70110% (Required for 200 ms) Seconds 85110% voltage Running % of running seconds 120 Vac 240 Vac 415 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
77140 Vac 450 VA 35 ms 77140 Vac 450 VA 40 ms 94140 Vac 2.0A 600% 250 VA 5 Sec 94140 Vac 3376 Vac 450 VA 10 VA 70 ms 10A
146264 Vac 450 VA 35 ms 146264 Vac 450 VA 40 ms 177264 Vac 1.0A 600% 250 VA 5 Sec 177264 Vac 62144 Vac 400 VA 10 VA 70 ms 10A
85110% voltage 3060% voltage Required for 200 ms Required for 400 ms Seconds Inductive load
323457 Vac 114249 Vac 480 VA 10 VA 70 ms
408528 Vac 144288 Vac 400 VA 10 VA 70 ms
510660 Vac 180360 Vac 400 VA 10 VA 70 ms
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 023

Technical Data
Table 20.1-11. Series NRX Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc

Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage Shunt Trip (ST) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Opening time Spring Release (SR) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Closing time Spring Release Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range Amperes (running) Amperes (inrush) Power consumption Charging time Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range Drop-out voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Power consumption (continuous) Opening time Auxiliary Switches Minimum load Contact rating Trip circuits 70110% (Required for 35 ms) Seconds Trip circuits 70110% (Required for 200 ms) Seconds Trip circuits 85110% Running % of running Seconds 24 Vdc 32 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1726 Vdc 500 VA 25 ms 1726 Vdc 500 VA 25 ms 2026 Vdc 5A 500% 150 VA 3 seconds 2026 Vdc 814 Vdc 500 VA 5 VA 50 ms
3453 Vdc 530 VA 25 ms 3453 Vdc 530 VA 25 ms 4153 Vdc 3A 500% 150 VA 3 seconds 4153 Vdc 1729 Vdc 850 VA 5 VA 50 ms
77138 Vdc 540 VA 25 ms 77138 Vdc 540 VA 25 ms 94138 Vdc 1A 500% 150 VA 3 seconds 94138 Vdc 4494 Vdc 890 VA 5 VA 50 ms 0.5A
154275 Vdc 515 VA 25 ms 154275 Vdc 515 VA 25 ms 187275 Vdc 1A 1000% 280 VA 4 seconds 187275 Vdc 88132 Vdc 910 VA 5 VA 50 ms 0.25A
Trip circuits 85110% 3560% voltage Required for 200 ms Required for 400 ms Seconds Inductive load
2735 Vdc 1119 Vdc 620 VA 5 VA 50 ms
Table 20.1-12. Series NRX Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac

Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage Shunt Trip (ST) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Opening time Spring Release (SR) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Closing time Spring Release Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range Amperes (running) Amperes (inrush) Power consumption Charging time Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range Drop-out voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Power consumption (continuous) Opening time Auxiliary Switches Minimum load Contact rating Trip circuits 70110% (Required for 35 ms) Seconds Trip circuits 70110% (Required for 200 ms) Seconds Trip circuits 85110% Running % of running Seconds 120 Vac 240 Vac 415 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
8 9 10 11 12
77140 Vac 540 VA 25 ms 77140 Vac 540 VA 25 ms 94140 Vac 2A 300% 280 VA 3 seconds 94138 Vac 4494 Vac 890 VA 5 VA 50 ms
146264 Vac 500 VA 25 ms 146264 Vac 500 VA 25 ms 177264 Vac 1A 1000% 280 VA 4 seconds 177264 Vac 84125 Vac 910 VA 5 VA 50 ms 10A
Trip circuits 85110% 3560% voltage Required for 200 ms Required for 400 ms Seconds Inductive load
323457 Vac 145228 Vac 960 VA 5 VA 50 ms
408528 Vac 168288 Vac 800 VA 8 VA 50 ms
510660 Vac 210360 Vac 800 VA 12 VA 50 ms
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 20 024
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ratings
The narrow-band characteristic curve allows close coordination with Digitrip RMS tripping devices. Repeatability is within 2%. The maximum breaker current rating for any breaker frame size is determined by the rating of the sensor used. The breaker current rating for any frame size can be changed by simply changing the sensors and associated rating plug, which are easily removed from the breaker drawout element. The wide range of long-delay pickup makes one set of sensors more exible on a wider range of loads. The Digitrip RMS itself need not be changed when the associated sensors and rating plugs are changed. Eatons Digitrip RMS can be supplied in various combinations of four independent, adjustable, overcurrent protection functions: Long delay (L) Instantaneous (I) Short delay (S) Ground (G) Ground alarm only (A)

Table 20.1-13. Metering Type Current Transformers

ANSI Meter Accuracy Classication Breaker Frame Rating 800, 1600, 2000 Ratio 100/5 150/5 200/5 250/5 300/5 400/5 500/5 600/5 750/5 800/5 1000/5 1200/5 1500/5 1600/5 2000/5 3200 1600/5 2000/5 2400/5 2500/5 3000/5 3200/5 3500/5 4000/5 4000 5000 6000 4000/5 5000/5 6000/5 Ratio 100/1 150/1 200/1 250/1 300/1 400/1 500/1 600/1 750/1 800/1 1000/1 1200/1 1500/1 1600/1 2000/1 1600/1 2000/1 2400/1 2500/1 3000/1 3200/1 3500/1 4000/1 4000/1 5000/1 6000/1 B-0.1 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 B-0.2 2.4 2.4 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 B-0.5 2.4 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 B-0.9 2.4 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 B-1.8 2.4 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Current transformers with meter accuracy classications at higher burdens and/or suitable for relaying are also available. They will be mounted in the rear cable connection compartment.
Every Eaton Magnum DS trip unit comes standard with LSI characteristics. Optional ground (G) or ground alarm (A) may also be provided. These trip units also provide the ability to defeat instantaneous to provide LS protection only. In addition, short delay protection may be set to the maximum instantaneous level, effectively disabling short delay protection. Under no condition is it possible to set the trip unit beyond the capabilities of the circuit breaker.
Table 20.1-14. Voltage Transformers

Insulation Class is 600V dielectric, 10 kV full wave BIL. Accuracy Class is 0.6 for W and 1.2 for X burdens at 60 Hz. Thermal ratings are 150 VA at 300C and 100 VA at 55C. Primary and secondary fuses are mounted on the face of the VT. Available standard ratios: 120:120 240:120 288:120 480:120 600:120
Table 20.1-15. Control Power Transformers

Insulation Class is 600V dielectric. Primary and secondary fuses are mounted on the face of the CPT. An optional primary fuse cover is available. 0.5 kVA, 1 kVA, 3 kVA and 5 kVA ratings are available as standard. Available standard ratios: 208:120/240 240:120/240 480:120/240 600:120/240
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 025

Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum DS Rear-Accessible Switchgear

Table 20.1-16. Layout Guide
Rear-Accessible Switchgear Breaker Type Ampacity Available <=100 kAIC 200 kAIC Narrow (MDN) 8002000 MDN4MDN5MDN6MDNC8002000 MDS4MDS6MDS8MDSC3200 MDS6MDS8MDSC8001200 NSS4NSS5NSS640005000 MDS8MDSC6000 MDSC32004000 MDSX5000 MDSXAll positions All positions All positions All positions 8001600 MDSLMDSXStructure WidthsAllowable Breaker PlacementsInches (mm) 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (117.6) FeederA, B, C, D, E, F, G, H
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H TieB/F, C/G MainB/F, C/G, D/H FeederBC/FG, CD/GH TieBC/FG, CD/GH MainBC/FG, CD/GH All positions
FeederA, B, C, D FeederA, B, C, D TieB MainB, C, D MainB, C, D TieB, C
Standard (MDS)
FeederA, B, C, D MainB/F, C/G FeederA, B, C, D FeederA, B, C, D, TieB, C TieB/F, C/G TieB, C E, F, G, H MainB, C, D FeederB/F, C/G, D/H MainB, C, D
Standard (MDS)
2000 MDSLMDSX-
FeederB, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D
MainB/F, C/G FeederB, C, D TieB/F, C/G TieB, C FeederB/F, C/G, D/H MainB, C, D
Feeder contact Eaton
Standard (NRX)
FeederA, B, C, D, E, F, G, H
Double (MDS)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Double w/fans (MDS) Instrument compartment (SPD, HRG, metering, controls, panelboard, etc.)
Series NRX 65 kAIC maximum.
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 20 026
i ii
1
B B B F B B F
2
C C C G C C G
3 4 5
Figure 20.1-1. Breaker Structures
D 18.00 (457.2) D 22.00 (558.8) D 24.00 (609.6) H D 30.00 (762.0) D H
44.00 (1117.6)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A Metering Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 Metering 800A A/E Metering SPD Feeder Feeder MDS-608 MDS-608 Metering 800A 800A Tie MDS-840 4000A SPD
Feeder Feeder Main Tie Main MDS-632 MDN-608 MDS-630 MDN-608 MDS-632 800A 800A 3200A 3200A 3200A SPD
Feeder Feeder Feeder MDN-608 MDN-608 MDN-608 800A 800A 800A
B/F
Main MDS-840 4000A
Main MDS-840 4000A Feeder Feeder MDS-608 MDS-608 800A 800A
SPD
C/G
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder MDS-608 MDS-608 MDS-608 MDS-608 800A 800A 800A 800A
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder MDN-608 MDN-608 MDN-608 MDN-608 MDN-608 800A 800A 800A 800A 800A 22.00 (558.8) 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8) 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8)
D/H
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 MDS-616 1600A 1600A 1600A 1600A 1600A 1600A 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6)
Using Narrow and Standard Breakers
Using Standard and Double Breakers
Figure 20.1-2. Main-Tie-Main Typical LayoutsMDS Mains and Feeders

Notes: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to vertical bus limitations. Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75C ampacity values per the NEC for ampacity calculations. Any cell not used as a feeder breaker may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge.
September 2011
Sheet 20 027

Layout Guide

Blank or Instrument or SPD
i
Blank or Instrument or SPD A A Blank or Instrument Blank or Instrument Blank or Instrument or SPD A
Blank or Instrument or SPD A
ii 1 2
B
Transition or Auxiliary
Utility Compartment
Main 800 1600 2000 3200
Blank or Instrument
B Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 1 38.00 or 50.00 (965.2 or 1270.0) Arrangement 1a or 1b Feeder 800 1600 A Main 800 1600 2000 3200 B Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 D 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 6 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 7 Blank or Instrument Main 800 1600 2000 3200 C Main 800 1600 2000 3200 D 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 8 D 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 9 Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 B Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 A Main 800 1600 2000 3200 B Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 2 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 3 Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 Main 800 1600 2000 3200
B Blank or Instrument
B Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 C Main 800 1600 2000 3200 Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 30.00 (762.0) Arrangement 4 30.00 (762.0) Arrangement 5
3 4
38.00-Inch (965.2) or 50.00-Inch (1270.0) Compartment
5 6
7 8
Blank or Instrument A
Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 B
Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 B Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 10 D C
Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 B Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 22.00 (558.8) Arrangement 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsMagnum DS Mains, Ties, Feeders and Miscellaneous, 3200A and Below Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A transition section is required if connecting to a non-standard dry-type transformer or auxiliary and metering devices are to be located in a transition section, or there is a re pump breaker required, or there is a zero sequence ground fault required. A maximum of two 3200A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear, one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200A frame breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclosure with a 4000A main or tie. For a 3200A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a 5000A main or tie, contact Eaton. Contact Eaton for placement of 2000A frame breaker in this compartment. A maximum of three 2000A breakers are 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear. If three are required, positions B, C and D must be used. Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment.
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 20 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Blank or Instrument A Main 4000 5000 B Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 12 Blank or Instrument or SPD A Blank or Instrument B Blank or Instrument C Main 4000 5000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 15 H Blank or Instrument G Blank or Instrument F E Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 H Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 G Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 13 Blank or Instrument or SPD A Main 4000 5000 B Blank or Instrument C Main 4000 5000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 16 H G F E Blank or Instrument B Feeder 4000 5000 C Main 4000 5000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 17a H G F Blank or Instrument or SPD E Blank or Instrument B Main 4000 5000 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 H G Blank or instrument Blank or Instrument A Blank or Instrument F Blank or Instrument or SPD E Blank or Instrument B Main 4000 5000 C Blank or instrument G Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Blank or Instrument F Feeder 800 1600 2000 E
D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 14 Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Blank or Instrument Feeder 800 1600 2000
Blank or Instrument
Blank or Instrument
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains, 4000 and 5000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the top. A maximum of two 3200A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear, one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200A frame breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclosure with a 4000A main or tie. For a 3200A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a 5000A main or tie, contact Eaton. Service entrance option is not available with feeder breakers mounted in this structure. If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the bottom. Busway or cable entrance must be from the top. B and D position feeders must be reverse fed. Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 029

Layout Guide

Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Feeder 800 1600 2000 B Blank C Main 4000 5000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 17b Feeder 800 1600 A Tie 4000 5000 B Main 4000 5000 C Blank or Instrument D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 20 Blank or Instrument H G Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 21 F Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200
i
Blank or Instrument E A Main 4000 5000 F B Tie 4000 5000 G Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 H D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 19 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 H G F Blank or Instrument or SPD E
Feeder 800 1600 2000 E Feeder 800 1600 2000 F Blank G
Blank or Instrument A Main 4000 5000 B Tie 4000 5000 C Main 4000 5000 H D
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 18 Feeder 800 1600 E A Tie 4000 5000 B Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 H
Feeder 800 1600
Feeder 800 1600 E
Feeder 800 1600 A Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 F B Tie 4000 5000 G Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D C
Feeder 800 1600 E Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 F
8 9 10 11
G Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 H
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 22
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains and Ties, 4000 and 5000ADimensions in Inches (mm)

Fixed-mounted main breakers are not permitted in the D position. If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the bottom. If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the top. Busway or cable entrance must be from the top. A maximum of two 3200A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear, one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200A frame breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclosure with a 4000A main or tie. For a 3200A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a 5000A main or tie, contact Eaton. Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide compartment in the structure.
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 20 030
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Tie 4000 5000 B Feeder 4000 5000 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 23 Feeder 800 1600 A Feeder 800 1600 2000 B Feeder 4000 5000 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 26 Feeder 800 1600 2000 H G Feeder 800 1600 2000 F Feeder 800 1600 2000 C Feeder 4000 5000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 27 H Feeder 800 1600 E Feeder 800 1600 2000 B Feeder 800 1600 2000 G Feeder 800 1600 2000 H G Feeder 800 1600 2000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 24 Feeder 800 1600 A Feeder 800 1600 2000 F Feeder 800 1600 E F Feeder 800 1600 2000 E Feeder 800 1600 2000 A Feeder 4000 5000 B Tie 4000 5000 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 H G Feeder 800 1600 2000 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 25 F Feeder 800 1600 2000 C Feeder 800 1600 2000 H Feeder 800 1600 2000 E Feeder 800 1600 A Feeder 4000 5000 B Feeder 800 1600 2000 G F Feeder 800 1600 E
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Ties and Feeders, 4000 and 5000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
B and D position feeders must be reverse fed. Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 031

Layout Guide

Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Blank or Instrument Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 800
i ii
E Feeder 800
A Feeder 800 Feeder 800
E Main 800 1600 2000 3200 F Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 800
A Main 800 1600 2000 3200
E Feeder 800
1 2
B Feeder 800
B Feeder 800 Feeder 800
B Tie 800 1600 2000 3200
3 4
C Feeder 800 Feeder 800
G Feeder 800
C Feeder 800
G Feeder 800
C Feeder 800
G Feeder 800 Feeder 800
5 6 7 8
D 24.00 (609.6) Arrangement 28
Blank or Instrument or SPD A Blank or Instrument
9 10
B Main 800 1600 2000 3200 C Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 800
11 12
G
C Feeder 800
13
H
14 15
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains and Ties, and Series NRX Feeder Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm)
16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 20 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Blank or Instrument Blank or Instrument Blank or Instrument Blank or Instrument
A Main or Tie 6000 B Fan Compartment
E Blank or instrument F 92.00 (2336.8)
A Blank or Instrument B Main or Tie 6000
C Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 34 Blank or Instrument Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200
C Fan Compartment
G See Tab 21, Section 21.1 Figure 21.1-9 for MCCB Circuit Breaker Layout Information.
D 44.00 (1117.6) Arrangement 35
Blank or Instrument
96.00 (2438.4)
50.00 38.00 or (1270.0) (965.2)
12.00 (304.8) Arrangement 36 Slider Control Section
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued) Magnum DS Mains and Ties, 6000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 20.1-4. Group-Mounted Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Switchboard

Note: Structures using molded-case breakers for distribution will be UL 891 rated with 30-cycle bus bracing.
17 18 19 20 21
A maximum of two 3200A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (559 mm) width of switchgear, one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200A frame breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclosure with a 4000A main or tie. For a 3200A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a 5000 or 6000A main or tie, contact Eaton. When a top-of-gear breaker lifter is used, height is 99.00 inches (2514.6 mm) total. Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure. Need a 44.00-inch wide section on both sides of the tie for layout to be correct.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 033

Layout Guide
Layout GuideMagnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear

Front-Accessible Switchgear Breaker Type Frame Ampacity Available 150 kAIC 8002000 MDN4MDN5MDN6MDNC8003200 MDS4MDS6MDS8MDSC8001200 NSS4NSS5NSS6All positions All positions Breaker Section WidthsInches (mm) 18.00 + X (457.2 + X) FeederA, B, C, D TieB MainB, C, D 22.00 + X (558.8 + X) FeederA, B, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D 24.00 + X (609.6 + X)
i ii 1 2
MainB/F TieB/F or C/G FeederB/F and C/G
Narrow Magnum DS Frames (MDN)
Standard Magnum DS Frame (MDS)
FeederA, B, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D
3 4 5
Standard Series NRX Frames (NRX)
FeederA, B, C, D, E, F, G, H
Instrument compartment (SPD, HRG, metering, controls, panelboard, etc.)
All positions
6 7
A A A E
Series NRX 65 kAIC maximum.
8
Cable Compartment
Cable Compartment
Cable Compartment
9 10
11 12
x
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 20.1-5. Front-Accessible Breaker Structures

18.00 (457.2), 22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6) 22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6) 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
Notes: Cable section can ONLY be on the right. Shipping splits are not allowed between breaker section and its cable section. Shipping splits must be adjacent to a cable section.
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 20 034
i ii 1 2

Cable Compartment Top Entry Cable Compartment Top Entry Cable Compartment Top Entry Instrument or SPD Main Breaker Instrument or SPD Blank
Main Breaker 5 kA
6 kA Main Breaker
Main Breaker
Main Breaker 5 kA
3
Fans
Cable Compartment Bottom Entry
4
44.00 (1117.6)
Instrument or SPD 22.00 (558.8)
Instrument or SPD
Blank
44.00 (1117.6)
22.00 (558.8)
44.00 (1117.6)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 20.1-6. Combination Breaker/Cable Sections
Metering
Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 800A
Metering
Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 800A Feeder MDN-608 800A 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8) Cable Compartment
Metering
Main MDS 632 3200A
Cable Compartment
Tie MDS 632 3200A
Main MDS 632 3200A
Blank
Cable Compartment
Cable Compartment
Blank 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8)
22.00 (558.8)
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
Figure 20.1-7. Front-Accessible Standard and Narrow Breakers Main-Tie-Main Typical Layout
Instr. A
Instr. E
Main MDS 3200A B F Feeder Feeder NRX NRX 600A 600A C G Feeder SPD NRX 400A D 24.00 (609.6)
Cable Compartment
Feeder Feeder NRX NRX 800A 800A A E Tie MDS 3200A B F Feeder Feeder NRX NRX 800A 800A C G Feeder NRX 400A D 24.00 (609.6)
Instr. A
Instr. E
Cable Compartment
Main MDS 3200A B F Feeder MDS 1600A C Feeder NRX 400A D SPD G
Cable Compartment
44.00 (1117.6)
44.00 (1117.6)
24.00 (609.6)
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 9
Arrangement 10
Arrangement 11
Figure 20.1-8. Main-Tie-Main Typical LayoutMDS Mains and Tie, NRX/MDS Feeders
Notes: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to vertical bus limitations. Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75C ampacity values per the NEC for ampacity calculations. Any cell not used as a feeder breaker may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge. Cable compartment must be at least as wide as the breaker compartment. Cable sections must be on the right-hand side of the breaker sections when facing the front.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 035

Layout Guide

24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
i
24.00 (609.6) Instr. A Instr. E
24.00 (609.6) Feeder Feeder 800 800 A E Feeder Feeder 800 800 B F Feeder Feeder 800 800 C G Feeder 800 D NRX 800 H
ii 1 2
Cable Compartment
Main 800 1600 2000 3200 B F Feeder Feeder 800 800 C G Feeder Feeder 800 800 D H
Cable Compartment
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Arrangement 1 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 2 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
24.00 (609.6) Feeder Feeder 800 800 A E Feeder Feeder 800 800 B F Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 C G Feeder Feeder 800 800 D H
24.00 (609.6) Feeder Feeder 800 800 A E Tie 800 1600 2000 3200 B F Feeder Feeder 800 800 C G Feeder Feeder 800 800 D H
24.00 (609.6) Instr. A Instr. E
Cable Compartment
Cable Compartment
Main 800 1600 2000 3200 B F Feeder 800 1600 2000 3200 C G Feeder Feeder 800 800 D H
Cable Compartment
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Arrangement 3
Arrangement 4
Arrangement 5
Figure 20.1-9. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsSeries NRX and Magnum DS Breakers
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 20 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Conduit Area LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)

44-Inch
3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.38 (35.1) Power Conduit Area
3.00 (76.2)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4) 6.00 (152.4)
3.00 (76.2) 1.38 (35.1) 1.50 (38.1) A
CC 12.00 (304.8) 1.50 (38.1)

3.00 (76.2) 1.03 (26.2)
1.50 (38.1) A 3.00 (76.2)
CC
1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)
Power Conduit Area
6.00(152.4) 3.00 (76.2)
3.60 (91.4)
21.50 (546.1)
0.65 (16.5) 3.50 (88.9)
Top Control D Conduit Area 31.18 (792.0) 3.60 (91.4) 3.38 3.50 (85.9) (88.9)
3.60 (91.4)
D Top Control Conduit Area 3.60 (91.4) 3.50 (88.9) Bottom Control Conduit Area Front 16.00 (406.4) W Ref: 4A37896 3.00 (76.2) 1.03 (26.2) 0.65 ( 16.5) 4.25 (108.0) 3.60 (94.4) 31.18 (792.0) 21.50 (546.1)
3.00 (76.2) 1.03 (26.2) 0.65 ( 16.5) 3.50 (88.9)
Top Control Conduit Area 3.60 (91.4) 3.50 (88.9) Bottom Control Conduit Area Front
21.50 (546.1)
5.38 (136.7) 36.00 (914.4) 3.00 (76.2)
Bottom Control Conduit Area Front W
Provision for 0.50 (12.7) Hardware

3.00 (76.2)
5.38 (136.7) 36.00 (914.4)
8.38 Provisions for 0.50 (12.7) (212.9) Hardware 3.00 (76.2)
4.63 (117.6)
36.00 (914.4)
3.00 (76.2)
16.00 (406.4)
Figure 20.1-10. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)18.00, 22.00, 30.00, 44.00-Inch (457.2, 558.8, 762.0, 1117.6 mm) Wide Rear-Access Structures
This dimension is reduced by 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) when vertical section is close coupled to a dry-type transformer due to secondary bus connections.
Note: See Table 20.1-18 for further dimensions.
48.00 (1219.2) 24.00 24.00 (609.6) (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
30.00 (762.0)
24.00 (609.6)
68.00 (1727.2)
44.00 (1117.6) 20.00 (508.0)
Bus 40.20 (1021.1) Breakers
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Cable Conduit Area 20.50 (520.7)
Breakers
Cable Conduit Area 26.50 (673.1) Front
Breakers
17.50 (444.5)
Figure 20.1-11. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)Front-Access Structures
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 037

Layout Dimensions
Table 20.1-18. Rear-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W D A CC Recommended Number of Conduits 3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 18.00 (457.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 9.08 (230.6) 15.08 (383.0) 21.08 (535.4) 27.08 (687.8) 33.08 (840.2) 39.08 (992.6) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 2 4 6 8 12 14 16 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 5 9 12 15 18 21 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm) 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 5 8 12 15 18 21 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 8 16 24 32 40 48 56
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
Table 20.1-19. Front-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W CC Recommended Number of Conduits 3.00 Inch (76.2 mm) 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 13.89 (352.8) 17.89 (454.4) 20.50 (520.7) 25.89 (657.6) 39.89 (1013.2) 12 15 22 3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 6 8 8 12 18 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm) 6 8 8 11 17
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 20.1-20. Arc-Resistant Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W D A CC Recommended Number of Conduits for Top Entry 3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 22.00 (558.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 14.80 (375.9) 20.80 (528.3) 26.80 (680.7) 34.80 (883.9) 14.80 (375.9) 20.80 (528.3) 26.80 (680.7) 34.80 (883.9) 14.80 (375.9) 20.80 (528.3) 26.80 (680.7) 34.80 (883.9) 8 10 14 18 11 14 20 24 16 20 28 36 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm) 6 9 13 15 8 12 20 24 12 18 26 30
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
Arc-resistant switchgears conduit space for bottom entry is the same as regular rear-accessible gear.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 20 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Section ViewDimensions in Inches (mm)

Lifting Plate Metal-Enclosed Shipping Split Terminal Blocks Optional top-of-gear Breaker Lifter
4.10 (104.1)
92.00 (2336.8)
Horizontal Cross Bus Area
99.00 (2514.6)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Ground Bus
Vertical Bus Riser Area
20.28 (515.1) D 25.63 (651.0)
18 19 20 21
Figure 20.1-12. Section View of a Typical Structure with Magnum DS BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
See Table 20.1-18, Page 20.1-35.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 039

Layout Dimensions
Lifting Plate Metal-Enclosed Shipping Split Terminal Blocks Optional Top-of-Gear Breaker Lifter
i ii 1 2 3
4.10 (104.0)
4 5 6 7
Vertical Bus Riser Area 99.00 (2515.0)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
92.00 (2337.0)
Ground Bus
20.28 (515.0) D 25.63 (651.0)
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 20.1-13. Section View of a Typical Structure with Series NRX BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 20 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
22.00 (558.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8) 800A Runbacks Shown; See Table A for Other Sizes 4.10 (104.1) 8.81 (223.8) 6.02 (152.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9)
3.19 (81.0)
Encl. Width View A
Lifting Angle (View A) 30.8 (782.82)
Neutral Taps
16.55 (420.4)
15 16
6.41 (162.8)
17 18 19 20 21
Table A. Bus Cross-Sections
Ampere Rating Runback Cross-Section 800A 1200/1600A 3.50 x 0.25 2.50 x 0.38 40.16 (1020.1) 2000A 4.50 x 0.50
20.28 (515.1)
0.88 (22.2)
Figure 20.1-14. Front-Access Section ViewDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Top-mounted breaker lifting device available for bottom cable entry/exit only. For cables exiting the top of the switchgear, a oor-mounted lifter must be used.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 041

Layout Dimensions
LayoutOutdoor Walk-in Switchgear

17.13 (435.1) 2.50 (63.5) 3.06 (77.7) 4.00 (101.6) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 45.66 (1159.8) 5.03 (127.8) 2.00 (684.3) Opening 3.50 x 3.50 (88.9 x 88.9) 25.31 (642.9) (1039.9) Opening Bottom Conduit Space 3.93 (99.8) 48.87 (1241.3) Control Wire Opening 3.50 x 3.50 (88.9 x 88.9) 44.00 (1117.6) Unit 30.00 (762.0) Unit Roof Rear of Base 18.44 (468.4) 16.81 (427.0 A B C L C A L 0.95 (24.1) Structure Width Structure Width C B Rear of Inner Structure 0.95 (24.1) 25.52 (648.2) 109.03 (2769.4) to Floor
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14.00 (355.6) 20.74 (526.8) 72.00 (1828.8) Switchgear Depth A
3.06 (77.7)
Section B-B
B C 9.00 (228.6) 11.00 (279.4) 15.00 (381.0) 19.00 (482.6) 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0)
Bus Duct Chimney & Cover 22.00 0.95 (24.1)
Top View
3.06 (77.7) Opening Lifting Angle Foundation Tie Down (for Seismic Only) 1.50 (38.1)
Unit
0.95 (24.1)
Section A-A Figure 1
Floor Plan
119.98 (3047.5) Overall Depth 18.44 Bus Opening (From Base) (468.4) 0.61 (15.5) 28.59 (From Base) C L 5.75 (146.1) C L 33.45 (849.6) (Door Width) 43.38 (1101.9) (Aisle Width) 30.21 (767.3) (Opening Width) 5.75 (146.1) 111.48 (2831.6) Overall Height
18.00 13.35 (457.2) (339.1) 17.35 22.00 (558.8) (440.7) 30.00 25.35 (762.0) (644.0) 38.00 33.35 (965.2) (847.1) 39.35 44.00 (1117.6) (999.5) 50.00 45.35 (1270.0) (1151.9)
See Figure 1 Above for Bus Duct Orientation 3.89 (98.8) 109.03 (2769.4) 105.06 (2668.5) 51.23 (1301.2) 2.00 (50.8)
O.S. of Outdoor End Sheet Transformer Flange Outdoor Roof Sheet 36.00 (914.4) 22.00 (558.8)
18.00-Inch Width = 17.4 to Rear Frame (441.9) 22.00-Inch Width = 21.4 to Rear Frame (543.6) 30.00-Inch Width = 29.4 to Rear Frame (746.8) 38.00-Inch Width = 37.4 to Rear Frame (950.0) 50.00-Inch Width = 49.4 to Rear Frame (1254.8) 55.00-Inch Width = 54.4 to Rear Frame (1381.8)
2.30
4.00 (101.6)
30.89 26.97 (784.6) (685.0) C L Throat Opening & TXF Switchgear Throat (Shipped Disassembled) Door Swing 33.45 (849.6)
9
C L C L See Figure 1 Front of Outdoor Base Door Swing
10 11 12 13
26.00 (660.4) 117.08 (2973.8) (Base)
39.66 (1007.4)
42.00 (1066.8) (Clear Width)
33.45 (849.6)
Side View
Top View
Weights of Outdoor Structures (without breakers) Structure End Trims One set per lineup) 18-inch (457.2) wide breaker structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 30-inch (762.0 mm) wide breaker structure 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide breaker structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 38-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 50-inch (1270.0 mm) wide utility structure Transformer throat WeightLbs (kg) 1500 (681) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 5200 (2361) 2300 (1044) 2300 (1044) 2700 (1226) 3200 (1453) 150 (68)
14 15 16 17 18
Switchgear Throat (Shipped Disassembled)
45.00 (1143.0)
41.38 (1051.1)
8.00 (203.2)
Transformer Flange 37.50 (952.5)
15.50 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8)
44.00 30.00 (762.0) Unit Widths (Overall Shipping Width) 5.00 (127.0)
19
Reference Drawing: 9255C35
Front View
Figure 20.1-15. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

20 21
46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box). 18.70 (475.0) = 44.00-inch wide transition box. 0.75-inch (19.1 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 20 042
i ii
LayoutOutdoor Non-Walk-in Switchgear

17.13 (435.1) 2.50 (63.5) 4.00 (101.6) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 2.00 (50.8) 30.00 (762.0) Unit 17.83 (452.9) 44.00 (1117.6) Unit Roof Rear of Base 18.44 (468.4) 16.85 (428.0 A B C L C A L 0.95 (24.1) Structure Width Structure Width C B Rear of Inner Structure 0.95 (24.1) 25.52 (648.2) 109.03 (2769.4) to Floor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3.06 (77.7)
(684.3)
Control Wire Opening 3.50 x 3.50 (88.9 x 88.9) 25.44 (646.2)
3.06 (77.7) 40.94 (1039.9) Opening
Section B-B
B C
Bottom Conduit Space
3.93 (99.8)
Bus Duct Chimney & Cover 22.00 Unit 1.50 (38.1) 0.95 (24.1)
Top View
18.00 13.35 9.00 (457.2) (339.1) (228.6)

0.95 (24.1) 22.00 17.35 (558.8) (440.7) 30.00 25.35 (762.0) (644.0) 38.00 33.35 (965.2) (847.1) 44.00 39.35 (1117.6) (999.5) 50.00 45.35 (1270.0) (1151.9) 11.00 (279.4) 15.00 (381.0) 19.00 (482.6) 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0)
3.06 (77.7)
18.94 Opening
Lifting Angle Foundation Tie Down (for Seismic Only)

O.S. of Outdoor End Sheet Transformer Flange Outdoor Roof Sheet 36.00 (914.4) 22.00 (558.8)
Floor Plan
88.02 (2235.7) Overall Depth 18.44 Bus Opening (From Base) (468.4)
See Figure 1 Above for
22.00-Inch Width = 21.4 30.00-Inch Width = 29.4 38.00-Inch Width = 37.4 50.00-Inch Width = 49.4 55.00-Inch Width = 54.4 Indoor Gear 1.60 14.00 (40.6) (355.6) 1.65 (41.9) 20.10 (510.5)
to Rear Frame (543.6) to Rear Frame (746.8) to Rear Frame (950.0) to Rear Frame (1254.8) to Rear Frame (1381.8) Rear of Base A Outdoor Base
3.89 (98.8) 28.58 109.05 (2769.9) 105.08 (2669.0) 51.23 (1301.2) 2.00 (50.8) 26.00 (660.4) 86.04 (2185.4) (Base) C L C L 109.79 (2788.7) Overall Height
30.23 26.97 (767.8) (685.0) C L Throat Opening & TXF Switchgear Throat (Shipped Disassembled)
C L C L See Figure 1 7.51 (190.8) Work Space
72.00 (1828.8) Switchgear Depth
4.00 (101.6)
Side View
Top View Weights of Outdoor Structures (without breakers) Structure End trims one set per lineup) 18-inch (457.2 mm) wide breaker structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 30-inch (762.0 mm) wide breaker structure 44-inch (1117.6 mm) wide breaker structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 22-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 38-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 50-inch (1270.0 mm) wide utility structure Transformer throat WeightLbs (kg) 1500 (681) 2400 (1090) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 5200 (2361) 2300 (1044) 2300 (1044) 2700 (1226) 3200 (1453) 150 (68)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

45.00 (1143.0)
41.38 (1051.1)
8.00 (203.2)
15.50 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8)
44.00 30.00 (762.0) Unit Widths (Overall Shipping Width)
Front View
Figure 20.1-16. Outdoor Non-Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.75-inch (19.1 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations. 18.70 (475.0) = 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide transition box. 46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 043

Layout Guide
Arc-Resistant Layout Restrictions

All Magnum rear-accessible layouts (see Table 20.1-16) are available in arc-resistant design with the exceptions of the following: 1. Utility compartments as shown in Figure 20.1-3 arrangement 1a or 1b. 2. 38.00-inch (965.2 mm) or 50.00-inch (1270.0 mm) compartments as shown in Figure 20.1-3 arrangement 1a or 1b. 3. 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) compartments as shown in Figure 20.1-3, arrangements 2833. 4. Slider control section as shown in Figure 20.1-3, arrangement 36. 5. Group-mounted molded-case circuit breaker switchboard as shown in Figure 20.1-4. 6. MDN, MDSX, MDSL, MDDX, fourpole and Series NRX breakers. The following minimum dimensional requirements also apply:
Dimension Width (of entire structure) Depth Height (without plenum) Height (with plenum) Section width

Front 36.00 (914.4) W
i ii 1 2
0.95 (24.1)
21.25 (539.8)
3 4
Top Control Conduit Area
5 6
Plenum and Roof Flaps D
7
A
8 9 10
CC
Minimum in Inches (mm) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 96.10 (2440.9) 117.00 (2971.8) 22.00 (558.8) 3.85 (97.8) Dynamic Flap Cage
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Requires an additional 10-foot ceiling clearance with no overhead obstructions (i.e., lights, conduits, smoke detectors, etc.).
Figure 20.1-17. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm) Arc-Resistant Structure
Front access and outdoor/sprinkler proof enclosures are not currently available in arc-resistant gear.
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) is the recommended front clearance for breaker removal with top-of-switchgear-mounted breaker lifter. If a portable breaker lifter is to be used, allow at least 84.00 inches (2133.6 mm) of aisle space.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 20 044
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PlenumDimensions in Inches (mm)

A 26.10 (662.9)
117.10 (2974.3)
91.90 (2334.3)
98.70 (2507.0)
27.00 (685.8)
Figure 20.1-18. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Elevation View
19 20 21
Note: Refer to Table 20.1-20, Page 20.1-35 for complete dimensions.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 045

Layout Dimensions
i
34.80 (883.9) to Rear Frame
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Right-Hand Exit
72.00 (1828.8) Deep
23.7 (602.0) REF
37.30 (947.4) to Front of Door
23.70 (602.0) Width
7 8
15.20 (386.1)
Center Line of Exhaust Duct
28.90 (734.1)
9
Rear Exit Will Cover Two 22.00-Inch (558.8 mm) Wide Structures
10 11 12 13 14 15
Rear Right-Hand Exit
72.00 (1828.8) Deep
Figure 20.1-19. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Exhaust Congurations

Note: Gear shown with rear covers.
16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 20 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Side Exit with 90 Elbow 21.90 (556.3) Rear Left-Hand Exit 72.00 (1828.8) Deep 15.10 (383.5)
23.70 (602.0) Width 28.90 (734.1) Center Line of Exhaust Duct
Rear Exit Will Cover Two 22.00-Inch (558.8 mm) Wide Structures
23.70 (602.0) Width
Non-Plenum/Exhaust Exit
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
72.00 (1828.8) Deep
Center Line of Exhaust Duct
40.00 (1016.0) 63.50 (1612.9) 72.00 (1828.8) Deep
10.00 (254.0) Minimum Distance Before Turning 90 or 45
Figure 20.1-19. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Exhaust Congurations (Continued)
19 20 21
Note: Gear shown with rear covers.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 047

Technical Data/Dimensions/Weights
Application
Center of Gravity
For seismic calculations, the following dimensions should be used to locate the center of gravity for Indoor Magnum DS switchgear. Table 20.1-21. Center of Gravity Location
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Vertical 60.00 (1524.0) Left-to-Right Center of lineup From the Front
Table 20.1-22. Magnum DS Indoor Rear Switchgear Structure Approximate Weights (Less Breakers)
Width in Inches (mm) Depth in Inches (mm) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 30.00 (762.0) 26.00 (660.4) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (117.6) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) Approximate Weight in Lbs (kg) 1250 (568) 1300 (591) 1350 (614) 1400 (639) 1450 (659) 1500 (682) 1900 (864) 2000 (909) 2100 (955) 2200 (1000) 2300 (1045) 2400 (1091) 2500 (1136) 2600 (1182) 2700 (1227) 2800 (1273) 2900 (1318) 3000 (1364) 3800 (1727) 4000 (1818) 4200 (1909) 4400 (2000) 4600 (2091) 4800 (2182) 475 (216) 500 (227) 525 (239) 550 (250) 575 (261) 600 (273) 950 (432) 1000 (455) 1050 (477) 1100 (500) 1150 (523) 1200 (545) 1700 (773) 1750 (795) 1800 (818) 1850 (840) 1900 (864) 1950 (886) 1600 (726) 1625 (738) 1650 (749) 1675 (760) 1700 (772) 1725 (783) 1650 (749) 1675 (760) 1700 (772) 1725 (783) 1750 (795) 1775 (806)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Breaker Structure
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00 (457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
Auxiliary/Transition Structures
12.00 (304.8) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 18.00, 22.00 and 24.00 (457.2, 558.8 and 609.6) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0)
Utility Structures
38.00 (965.2) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 50.00 (1270.0) 60.00 (1542.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0)
CA08104001E

Table 20.1-23. Magnum DS Indoor Front Switchgear Structure Approximate Weights (Less Breakers)
Width in Inches (mm) Depth in Inches (mm) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) Approximate Weight in Lbs (kg) 1100 (500) 1750 (795) 2200 (1000) 800 (363) 1550 (705) 1600 (727)
September 2011
Sheet 20 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 20.1-24. Magnum DS and Series NRX Breaker Weights

Breaker Drawout in Lbs (kg) 54 (24) 130 (59) 130 (59) 130 (59) 145 (66) 130 (59) 130 (59) 130 (59) 145 (66) 145 (66) 145 (66) 130 (59) 130 (59) 145 (66) 145 (66) 210 (95) 130 (59) 145 (66) 145 (66) 210 (95) 145 (66) 145 (66) 145 (66) 210 (95) 175 (79) 175 (79) 175 (79) 325 (148) 310 (141) 310 (141) 310 (141) 310 (141) 310 (141) 345 (157) 325 (148) 310 (141) 310 (141) 345 (157) 325 (148) 310 (141) 325 (148) 185 (84) 215 (98) 215 (98)
Compact
NRX
Breaker Structure
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00 (457.2, 558.8 and 609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
Narrow
MDN-408 MDN-508 MDN-608 MDN-C08 MDN-416 MDN-516 MDN-616 MDN-C16 MDN-620 MDN-C20
Cable Compartment
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00 (457.2, 558.8 and 609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
Standard
MDS-408 MDS-608 MDS-808 MDS-C08 MDS-X08 MDS-616 MDS-816 MDS-C16 MDS-X16 MDS-620 MDS-820 MDS-C20 MDS-X20 MDS-632 MDS-832 MDS-C32
Double Wide
MDS-X32 MDN-640 MDN-840 MDN-C40 MDS-840 MDS-C40 MDS-X40 MDD-X40 MDS-850 MDS-C50 MDS-X50 MDD-X50 MDS-C60 MDD-X60
Fused
MDS-L08 MDS-L16 MDS-L20
Note: Impact weight equals 1.5 times breaker static weight. Three-pole frame weight given; four-pole frame weight equals 1.33 times more.
Table 20.1-25. Magnum DS Arc-Resistant Switchgear Additional Approximate Weights

Arc-Resistant Component Plenum Exhaust duct Approximate Weight (kg/Foot (m) 34 (50.60) 38 (56.55)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 20 049

Application
Standards
Magnum DS circuit breakers meet or exceed all applicable requirements of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA.
Table 20.1-26. Altitude Derating Factors

Altitude Feet 6600 7000 7500 8000 8500 9000 9500 10,000 10,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,500 13,000 Meters 2012 2134 2286 2438 2591 2743 2896 3048 3200 3353 3505 3658 3810 3962 Voltage Current Correction Correction 1000 0.989 0.976 0.963 0.950 0.933 0.917 0.900 0.883 0.867 0.850 0.833 0.817 0.800 1000 0.998 0.995 0.993 0.990 0.987 0,983 0.980 0.977 0.973 0.970 0.967 0.963 0.960
4. Excessively high or low ambient temperatures. For ambient temperatures exceeding 40C, and based on a standard temperature rise of 65C, the continuous current ratings of breaker frame sizes, and also buses, current transformers, etc., will be subject to a derating factor calculated from the following formula: 105 TotalSpecial Ambient, C ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------105 Total40C Standard Ambient Circuit breakers are not adversely affected by very low outdoor ambient temperatures, particularly when energized and carrying load currents. The standard space heaters in weatherproof switchgear will raise the temperature slightly and prevent condensation. Electrical components such as relays and instruments, however, must be applied within the manufacturers specied limits. 5. Exposure to seismic shock. Magnum DS assemblies and breakers have been certied for applications through International Building Code 2009 (IBC) and California Building Code 2010 (CBC). Assembly modications may be required, so such conditions must be specied. 6. Abnormally high frequency of operation. In line with above, a lesser number of operations between servicing, and more frequent replacement of parts, may be indicated.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
System Voltage and Frequency

Magnum DS breakers are designed for operation on AC systems only, 60 Hz or 50 Hz, 635V maximum.
Continuous Current Ratings

Unlike transformers, generators and motors, circuit breakers are maximumrated devices and have no built-in temporary overload current ratings. Consequently, it is vital that each application take into consideration the maximum anticipated current demand, initial and future, including temporary overloads. The continuous rating of any Magnum DS breaker is limited to the sensor rating, or the frame size current rating, whichever is the lesser. For instance, an MDS-616 1600A frame breaker with 800A sensors has a maximum continuous rating of 800A, but the same breaker with 1600A sensors is limited to 1600A maximum. All current ratings are based on a maximum ambient air temperature of 40C (104F).
Unusual Environmental and Operating Conditions

Special attention should be given to applications subject to the following conditions: 1. Damaging or hazardous fumes, vapors, etc. 2. Excessive or abrasive dust. For such conditions, it is generally recommended that the switchgear be installed in a clean, dry room, with ltered and/or pressurized clean air. This method permits the use of standard indoor switchgear and avoids the derating effect of non-ventilated enclosures. 3. Salt spray, excessive moisture, dripping, etc. Drip shields in equipment rooms and space heaters in indoor weatherproof enclosures, may be indicated, depending upon the severity of the conditions.
Ambient Temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding the enclosure should be within the limits of: 30C (22F) to +40C (+104F).
Altitude
The breakers are applicable at their full voltage and current ratings up to a maximum altitude of 6600 ft (2012m) above sea level. When installed at higher altitudes, the ratings are subject to the following correction factors in accordance with ANSI C37.20.1.
CA08104001E
20.1-48 Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 20 050
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
SwitchboardsLow Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 21 001
21.0-1
Switchboards Low Voltage
Contents
SwitchboardsLow Voltage General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-2 OPTIM Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5 Metering Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-6 Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-8 Pow-R-Line C Front- or Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . 21.0-9 Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-10 Pow-R-Line i, Compartmentalized Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-11 Circuit Breakers and Fusible Switch Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-14 Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1 Pow-R-Line C Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders and Pow-R-Line i . . . . . 21.2-1 Pow-R-Line i, Compartmentalized Feeders, Rear-Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-1 Outdoor Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1 Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchboardsLow Voltage FeaturesGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1 Magnum SB Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-2 Layout and Breaker Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-3 Integrated Facility System Switchboards General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 Layout Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-2 Generator Quick Connect Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1 Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1 Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 Commercial Metering Switchboards General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-1 Layout Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-9 Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.11-1 Specications: See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Type 1 Pow-R-Line C Front-Access Section 26 24 13.11 Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429 Pow-R-Line i Compartmentalized Feeders . . . . . . . . . Section 16428 Section 26 24 13.13 Integrated Facility System Switchboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16433 Section 26 24 13.15 Commercial Metering Switchboard . . . . . Section 16431 Section 26 24 13.17 Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16435 Section 26 24 13.19 Power Distribution Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16474 Section 26 26 00 Circuit Breakers and Fusible SwitchesLV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475 Section 26 28 11 Generator Quick Connect Switchboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429G Section 26 24 13.33 Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429E Section 26 24 13.31
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
21.0-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 21 002
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Application Considerations and Denitions

Eatons Pow-R-Line family of distribution switchboards incorporates new design concepts that t the ever-increasing need for applications on high short circuit systems, while retaining maximum exibility, safety and convenience throughout the line.
rear-connected switchboard. See Pow-R-Line i switchboards in this section for details.
Standard Switchboard Height

Standard Pow-R-Line switchboard height is 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm). Contact Eaton for special heights.
breakers and FDPW fusible switches unless they are tested and listed for application at 100% of the rating. All Magnum type breakers and bolted pressure switches are 100% rated.
Short-Circuit Rating
Standard bus and connectors on all switchboards are rated for use on systems capable of producing up to 65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit current at the incoming terminals. Increased bus short-circuit ratings equal to that of connected switchboard devices, up to 200,000A rms symmetrical, are available in most Pow-R-Line C switchboards when approved main devices are installed. UL labeled switchboard sections are marked with their applicable short-circuit rating. When air power circuit breakers are used as feeder devices in a switchboard, these devices may experience up to a 30-cycle (1/2 second) delay if the instantaneous setting is turned off. Eaton has qualied our low voltage switchboards when air power circuit breakers are used as feeders (and mains) to 30 cycles. This rating is not recognized under the UL 891 standard. However, Eaton has witness tested the structure bussing with a qualied National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) at 30 cycles (1/2 second) up to 100 kAIC symmetrical.
Group Mounting
Group-mounted circuit protective devices are an assembly of units mounted on a panelboard type chassis. Units may be moldedcase breakers, fusible switches, customer metering and surge protective devices. A main molded-case breaker or main fusible switch, within the sizes listed for panelboard design, can be included in the panel-mounted assembly in lieu of a separate, individually mounted unit.
Front Access
Front-access switchboards align at the rear, enabling them to be placed against a wall (Type Pow-R-Line C front accessible). If the main section is deeper than others, due to physical size of the main device, the necessary offset in lineup will occur in front, and the main section will be accessible from the side as well as from the front. Eaton also offers front accessible switchboards that align at the front and rear.
Rear Access
Rear-access switchboards align at the front and the rear. Bus maintenance and cable entry and exit require rear access. There are two types of rear accessible switchboards. Both types use the same incoming utility and/or main structures. The rst type uses group-mounted feeder devices with panel construction (Type Pow-R-Line C rear accessible). The second type uses individually compartmentalized feeder devices with load side insulated bus bar extensions (Type Pow-R-Line i).
Space Only for Future Devices Group-Mounted Construction

Where space only for future circuit protective devices is required, the proper space and a blank ller plate will be supplied. Connections and mounting hardware are not included.
Provision for Future Devices

Where provisions for future circuit protective devices are required, space for the device, corresponding vertical bus, device connectors and the necessary mounting hardware will be supplied.
Provision for Busway Entrance and Exit

Busway connections to switchboard sections include cutout and drilling in the top of the switchboard with riser connections from the switchboard device or bus, up to the point where the bus duct enters the switchboard. No connections are furnished external to the switchboard. In all transactions involving busway attached to switchboards, it is essential that information regarding orientation of the busway with respect to the front of the switchboard be supplied to the coordinating assembly plant. On Pow-R-Line C switchboards, a solid bus bar is used to connect the bus duct to the individually mounted main device, main or sub-main switchboard bus, or vertical main bus of panelmounted circuit protective device panels. Busway fed by group-mounted branch devices are cable connected.
Aluminum riser connections are standard. Copper- or silver-plated copper is available as an option.
Individually Mounted
Larger overcurrent protective devices (OCPD) may be individually mounted. In most cases, this means that the OCPD is mounted vertically in the switchboard and is connected via bus bar. All insulated case circuit breakers, power air circuit breakers and bolted pressure contact switches are individually mounted. Moldedcase circuit breakers 600A and above may be individually mounted when used as a main or as a feeder device feeding other OCPD within a section or adjacent sections.
Bus Bar System

Standard bus in the switchboards is tin-plated aluminum. Copper, silver-plated copper or tin-plated copper are also available. Main bus and sub-main buses meet UL and NEMA standards for temperature rise on all Pow-R-Line switchboards. Special density rated bus is available.
Overcurrent Devices
To properly select and size overcurrent devices for use in a switchboard, the allowable temperature rise must be taken into account as to its effect on the tripping characteristics of the devices in question per UL 891. Accordingly, the NEC requires overcurrent devices to be rated not less than 125% of the continuous load they are protecting. To comply with this, an 80% derating factor must be used with all overcurrent devices such as molded-case
Compartmentalized Feeder and Branch Devices

Compartmentalized molded-case circuit breakers and fusible switches provide additional isolation. Individually mounted molded-case circuit breakers and fusible switches through 1200A are available in a compartmentalized, rear-access,
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 003
21.0-3
General Description
Transitions
Transition structures are required for connecting switchboards to the secondary of power center transformer (uid lled), motor control centers, and for other special switchboard congurations such as L or U shaped lineups. In some applications, an extra structure complete with connections is required; in others, where switchboard depth and space permit, only the connection conductors are required. Refer to Eaton for these applications.
Switchboards Used as Service Equipment

Service equipment is the electrical equipment that constitutes the main control and means of power cutoff the electric service (normally Power Company supply) brought into the building. Where switchboards are to be used as service equipment, certain NEC and UL requirements apply that necessitate modications not normally supplied in switchboards. The following is a summary of the requirements that are pertinent to the application of a switchboard for service equipment: A. A switchboard with main lugs only (no main disconnect) must be designed so that all circuits in the switchboard can be disconnected from the supply source by the operation of no more than six operating handles (breaker or switch). Switchboard equipped with main disconnect devices are not subject to the above six disconnect limitation, as the entire board can be de-energized with the main disconnect device. Ground fault protection of equipment must be provided for solidly grounded wye electrical services of more than 150V to ground, but not exceeding 600V phase-to-phase for each service disconnecting means rated 1000A or more. B. For testing purposes, means are also required to disconnect the switchboard neutral bus from the grounded service neutral conductor (single-phase, three-wire; and threephase, four-wire systems). To comply with this requirement, a removable link (solid bar) is provided in the switchboard neutral bus. This link is generally located near the point where the main feeders enter the switchboard or in the area of the main disconnect device where one is provided.
To further comply with NEC and UL requirements, a separate bonding strap is connected from the neutral bus to the switchboard frame. This bonding connection is located on the line side of the removable neutral link, maintaining a service ground to the switchboard frame when the test link is removed. See Figure 21.0-1.
1 2 3 N To Station Ground Neutral Link
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Auxiliary Structures
These are normally mounted adjacent to service structures or distribution structures, and used where incoming service or feeder conductors require additional space or facilities not included in the standard switchboard, such as: 1. Mounted adjacent to a top connected service structure and used as a cable pull structure where service conductors are brought in underground. Auxiliary structures are the same depth and height as the service structure, and are wide enough to accommodate the incoming cables. 2. Mounted adjacent to a service structure and used as a bus transition compartment for running riser bus from the loadside of the service structure up to top outgoing bus duct connection when distribution structures are not required. Auxiliary structures are the same depth and height as service structures. In addition to the above applications, auxiliary structures may be mounted adjacent to a distribution structure and used as a structure for lighting panel or other device that may be cable-connected to a branch circuit device in the distribution structure. Dimensions are compatible with the arrangements required.
Bonding Strap N 1 2 3
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Equipment Ground Bus
Switchboard Frame
Figure 21.0-1. Neutral Link UL labeling will clearly indicate service equipment listed switchboards.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 004
General Description
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Underwriters Laboratories Requirements and Labeling

The basic requirement for obtaining a UL label on a switchboard, is that all the component devices (breakers, switches, and so on) in the switchboard assembly are UL listed. In addition, the switchboard must comply with all applicable provisions of UL 891. Todays modern electrical systems require that switchboards offer a wide selection of electrical devices, many of which do not fall within the scope of UL listed devices. Therefore, the conditions under which a switchboard may be labeled are limited. Listed below are several important guidelines for consideration when a UL label is specied: 1. UL nameplates, where applicable, are supplied for each vertical structure rather than one common nameplate for the complete switchboard lineup. Where all of the component devices in the switchboard are UL listed and all applicable provisions of UL 891 are met, each of the switchboard sections may be labeled. 2. Individual vertical structures of a switchboard may be labeled where they comply with UL requirements, although other vertical structures in the same switchboard lineup may not meet the UL standards, and will not be labeled. 3. All Pow-R-Line C switchboards are UL labeled when all mounted devices are UL listed.
Alternate Power Source Capabilities

Multiple solutions are available to accommodate alternate power sources available. Due to the large number of customer and system requirements, details are not provided in this guide. Eaton offers solutions that include main-main conguration and maintie-main congurations. Automatic transfer equipment, including UL 1008 listed transfer switches and other automatic transfer schemes, are available.
Seismic Qualication
Automatic Transfer Equipment

For continuity of service, automatic transfer equipment between two incoming sources may be required. This equipment transfers the load upon failure of the normal (or preferred) source to the standby (or alternate) source. Upon restoration of the normal source, the load is automatically transferred back to it. To accomplish this, electrically operated main protective devices (and bus tie devices, if required) must be employed. Additional relays also are required to detect source voltage failure and to transfer control power, when required. A manual selector switch is usually provided to select the mode of operationautomatic or manual transfer.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 005
21.0-5
General DescriptionOPTIM Trip Units
Digitrip OPTIM
Description
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable communicating microprocessorbased low voltage electronic trip unit system for Eaton molded-case circuit breakers. Digitrip OPTIM trip units are available in two models: Digitrip OPTIM 550 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050. Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully programmable and can be applied as a stand-alone breaker with a hand-held Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for conguring the trip unit, displaying information and testing. In addition, OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage assembly with a panel mounted Breaker Interface Module (BIMII) to congure, display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM can be applied as part of a fully integrated PowerNet system. (See Section 2.)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Digitrip OPTIMizer
Features
Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held programmer accesses, displays and congures information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of the trip unit and is powered by a 9V battery, or an auxiliary power module. An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Fully programmable. rms sensing trip unit Available in K, L, N, R breakers Available in 80% and 100% rated breakers Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA congurations
Note: LSIA has ground fault alarm only.
Available in two models OPTIM 550 and OPTIM 1050 Ten function time-current curve shaping options, including a new I 4t Long Delay Time or slope Short delay and ground delay Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) Additional programmable protection features including thermal memory and discriminator functions Advanced warning systems including high load alarm, ground fault alarm Full system diagnostics capability System monitoring features including: Load current Power and energy Power factor Power qualityharmonics Line-to-line voltage PowerNet communications saves individual wiring of breakers
Complete initial system setup: Select breaker address Select system frequency (50/60 Hz) Set system baud rate Set system password Congure the system: Change time-current set points Select protection options Select alarm levels Display information: Breaker information Time-current set points Metered values Trip event information Test trip unit performance: Phase and ground Trip/no trip
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 006
General DescriptionMetering Devices
i ii 1 2 3
Power Xpert Meters 2000
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Power Xpert Meters 2000
IQ 130/140/150
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
IQ 130/140/150
Providing the rst line of defense against costly power problems, Eatons IQ 100 electronic power meters can perform the work of an entire wall of legacy metering equipment using todays technology.

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
The Power Xpert 2250 Meter

This meter provides all the core functions for monitoring power consumption and power quality, Ethernet connectivity and onboard gateway card limits. This unit uses D/A technology to sample circuits at 400 samples per cycle for extremely accurate measurement of power factor and energy consumption. In addition, the meter has 256 MB for logging meter data.

This meter adds the ability to monitor total harmonic distortion and the ability to set onboard meter limits. The meter also will illuminate LEDs on the faceplate, indicating that a limit has been exceeded and provides 512 MB for data logging.
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ 8000 series is an Internet-enabled (including a built-in Web server), power quality and energy meter with comprehensive power and energy measurement, and integrated quality analysis. These meters allow you to use a standard Web browser to surf the meter and visualize a waveform and analyze trends Accurate detection of fast transients Early warning of impending problems At-a-glance view of power quality Reduces power monitoring cost Supports continuous, nondisruptive monitoring Accessible via the Ethernet Uses industry-standard communication protocols
24-bit AD converters that sample at more than 400 samples per cycle Meet ANSI C12.20 standards for accuracy of 0.5 percent Condently used for primary revenue metering and submetering applications Direct-reading metered values such as watts, watt demand, watthours, voltage amperes (VA), VA-hours, VARs, VARhours and power factor Also available in Eaton's enclosed meter product

This meter adds the ability to monitor individual harmonics and visualize waveforms on your desktop using the embedded Web server and raises the storage to 768 MB for data logging. Meter series benets include:

17 18 19

Fully understand your facilitys power quality Detailed event information; pinpoint the root causes of problemsor prevent them from occurring Measure, trend and analyze power via information through onboard Web and comma separated values (CSV) exporting capabilities Up to 768 MB of storage; typically 15 years of storage capability depending on the meter model and frequency of events Local or remote conguration
20 21
September 2011
Sheet 21 007
21.0-7
General DescriptionMetering Devices
i ii 1
IQ 250/260 Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IQ 250/260
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 electronic meters provide capabilities you wouldnt normally expect in an affordable, ultra-compact meter such as fast sampling rate and accurate metering for a full range of power attributes. Built-in slots allow for future upgrades.


The Breaker Interface Module II is a panel-mounted device that performs the following functions: Monitors and displays parameters from any combination of Digitrip RMS 810, 910 and 1150 Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units, F/J/K Frame Energy Sentinels, and Universal Energy Sentinels, supporting as many as 50 of these devices up to 10,000 feet (2540m) away Communicates the information from these protective and energy monitoring devices over your network
Comprehensive metering High-end accuracy Self-test capability to validate accuracy Large, easy-to-read display Local or remote conguration Industry-standard communication protocols Mix-and-match input/output options Integration with Eatons Power Xpert Architecture Field-upgradeable
Note: For full technical information, see Tab 2.
Note: For full technical information, see Tab 3.
For information on other available power meters, visit www.eaton.com/ meters.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 008
General DescriptionSurge Protective Devices (SPD)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Xpert Gateway
Power Xpert Gateway

Eatons Power Xpert Gateway (PXG) bridges the IT and facilities management worlds by bringing disparate panelboards, switchboards and other power equipment onto the network. The PXG takes the complexity out of connecting power equipment to the network. The Webenabled PXG is an out-of-the-box device that can support up to 96 devices, translate most industrial communication protocols, and offer user-selectable events and real-time trending. It also features e-mail notication of events, waveform capture and data/event loggingall with no special software. Adding basic meters or the utilitys meter, the PXG assists in tracking energy usage. The PXG recognizes the interdependence of IT systems and power systems, and delivers what organizations need to bring these worlds together for seamless, end-to-end system reliability. The PXG consolidates data available breakers, meters, motor controllers and protective relays, and presents the information in a variety of ways (a Web browser being the most widely used method). The PXG is a standalone solution. As needs change and grow, the PXG can be integrated through Power Xpert Software into a broader solution that encompasses other intelligent hardware and can integrate with third-party network management systems (NMS) or building management systems (BMS) for system-wide monitoring and reporting of power and IT. For detailed information, please refer to Tab 2.
Integrated Surge Protective Devices
Integrated Surge Protective Devices

Eaton integrates our industry-leading surge protective devices (SPD) in to switchboards. Lead length is kept to a minimum to maximize SPD performance. SPD units are available with ratings up through 400k, and are UL listed and labeled to UL 1449 3rd Edition. All switchboards with integrated SPD units are connected to a lineside overcurrent protective device for disconnecting means. When applied on the lineside of a service entrance main, the disconnecting means does not count as a service disconnect per National Electrical Code Article 230.71[A]. For complete SPD product description, application and ratings, refer to Tab 34.
September 2011
Sheet 21 009
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Pow-R-Line C Switchboards

General DescriptionPow-R-Line C, Front- or Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
21.0-9
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and UL 891.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Pow-R-Line C Switchboard
6000A main bus maximum Front accessiblemain sections front- and/or side-access Front- and rear-access; main sections front- and/or side-access Feeder devices group-mounted Sections rear-aligned or front- and rear-aligned

Main Devices, Individually Mounted

Molded-case circuit breakers, 4002500A, xed-mounted Insulated-case circuit breakers, Magnum SB, 8005000A, xed and drawout Air power circuit breakers, Magnum DS, 8005000A, xed or drawout Air power circuit breakers with current limiting fuses, Magnum DSL, 8005000A Bolted pressure switches, 8005000A, xed Fusible switches, 4001200A, xed
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Feeder Devices, Group-Mounted

Molded-case circuit breakers, 151200A Fusible switches, 301200A
Feeder Devices, Individually Mounted

Molded-case circuit breakers, 8002500A, xed Insulated-case circuit breakers, Magnum SB, 8005000A, xed and drawout Air power circuit breakers, DS and Magnum DS, 8004000A, xed and drawout Bolted pressure switches, 8001600A, xed
Selective Coordination
Selectively coordinated systems dictated by code and customer mandates may be achieved with Eaton switchboards to either 0.1 or 0.01 seconds as mandated by codes and/or customers. Refer to Tab 1, Section 1.4 for additional details.
Note: For selection and layout guidelines, please reference Page 21.1-1.
For a complete product specication in CSI format, see Eatons Product Specication Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429 For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
20 21
CA08104001E
21.0-10 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Pow-R-Line C Switchboards

General DescriptionPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
September 2011
Sheet 21 010
i ii 1
Features

3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Eatons circuit breaker ratings up to 200 kAIC Trip units that integrate Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System reduces potential arc ash available Integral ground fault protection available in electronic trip units from 155000A Electronic trip units that integrate zone selective interlocking capabilities available in moldedcase, insulated-case and air power circuit breaker Available with circuit breakers and fusible switches on the same chassis
Type 1 Pow-R-Line C Features
The Single Chassis Design Provides Device Flexibility
Customer metering. Utility metering compartment. Surge protective device.
Main breaker (Magnum SB). Cable pull and termination space.
16 17 18 19 20 21
UL listed and labeled. Meets NEC and NEMA standards Eaton microprocessor-based metering devices are standard when metering is specied. Conventional metering is available. IQ and Power Xpert devices can provide a communications capability. See Tab 3 Optional integral surge protective device (SPD) is available in Pow-R-Line C switchboards, when specied. See Tab 34 Aluminum, copper or silver-plated copper bus A full range of device modications is available Available in NEMA Type 1 and 3R enclosures, UL listed
Table 21.0-1. Pow-R-Line C Group-Mounted Switchboards Voltage: 240480600 Vac, 250 Vdc Mains: 4006000A
Main Device Type Molded-case circuit breakers Insulated-case circuit breakers, Magnum SB Air power circuit breakers, Magnum DS Air power circuit breakers with CL fuses, DSL Bolted pressure switches Fusible switches Main lugs only Amperes 4002500 8005000 8005000 8005000 4001200 4006000 Short-Circuit Symmetrical Rating (kA) 14200 30100 200 200 200 Rating determined by overcurrent protective device Short-Circuit Rating (kA) 10200 200 18200 30100 30100
Feeder Device Type Molded-case circuit breakers Fusible switches Stackedmain with branch devices Magnum SB up to two high Magnum DS up to two high

Amperes 151200 301200 4002500 8002000 8002000
Modications
Ground fault protection on mains and distribution devices Coordination with other Eaton divisions for busway and transformer connections
5000A bolted pressure switches are not UL listed. Third-party witness tested at 30 cycles.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 011
21.0-11
General DescriptionPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and UL 891.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Pow-R-Line i Switchboard
4000A main bus maximum Front and rear accessible main and distribution sections Feeder devices individually compartmentalized Sections front and rear aligned Designed for mounting with code clearance to a wall

Main Devices, Individually Mounted

Molded case circuit breakers, 4002500A, xed or drawout Insulated case circuit breakers, Magnum SB, 8004000A Air power circuit breakers, Magnum DS, 8004000A, xed or drawout Air power circuit breakers with current limiting fuses, Magnum DSL, 8004000A Bolted pressure switches, 8004000A, xed Fusible switches, 4001200A, xed
Feeder Devices

Molded case circuit breakers, 151200A are compartmentalized Molded case circuit breakers above 1200A are not compartmentalized Fusible switches, 1001200A Insulated case circuit breakers, Magnum SB, 8004000A Air power circuit breakers, Magnum DS, 8002000A Bolted pressure switches, 8002500A Trip units that integrate Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System to reduce potential arc ash Integral ground fault protection available in electronic trip units from 155000A Electronic trip units that integrate zone selective interlocking capabilities available in moldedcase, insulated-case and air power circuit breaker
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Note: For selection and layout guidelines, please reference Page 21.3-1.
For a complete product specication in CSI format, see Eatons Product Specication Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16428 CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
20 21

September 2011
Sheet 21 012
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Pow-R-Line i Construction Features
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Distribution SectionFront View
Distribution SectionRear View
Glass polyester circuit breaker compartment. Insulated copper load side runbacks. Full length barrier isolating the cable compartment. Horizontal cross bus. Tandem mounted circuit breakers through 400A. Isolating bus compartment.
Available zero sequence ground fault. Angled neutral connections. A, B, C phase connections. Anti-turn lugs. Movable cable support. Generous conduit space.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 013
21.0-13
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards... Greater Flexibility and Increased Safety Features

Eatons Pow-R-Line i Switchboards are engineered in a new compartmentalized design for applications where a greater degree of safety is required. A wide variety of congurations is possible, including utility metering, customer metering, main devices, branch devices, accessories and enclosures. Signicant safety features include: Individual compartments for branch devicesglass polyester for circuit breakers and steel for fusible switches. These compartments help eliminate possible contact with the main bus and reduce fault propagation Three-section construction with each section barriered from the other Device section. Each device is mounted in its own compartment Bus bar section. Contains both horizontal and vertical buses Rear cable compartment. Completely isolated from the bus bars

i ii 1 2 3 4
Ground fault test panels can be mounted in compartments with the circuit breakers for convenience and space savings. Pow-R-Line i switchboards can help to provide for future distribution system requirements by including empty compartments for branch circuit breakers and fusible switches. (Circuit breaker provisions shown.)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Branch circuit breakers range from 1501200A frames. Branch fusible switches are available from 1001200A frames. Short-circuit ratings up to 200,000A are UL listed. Pow-R-Line i switchboards are UL listed and meet all applicable requirements of NEMA and NEC. They are rearaccessible and front- and rear-aligned.
Space-Saving Ground Fault Test Panels

Pow-R-Line i switchboards can accommodate either integral or zero sequence types of ground fault protection. Depending on the specic application, a test panel can be mounted in the circuit breaker compartment, which may eliminate the need for an auxiliary structure.
Insulated copper runback. Power is taken from the protective device by the insulated copper runback through a standard full height glass polyester barrier to the rear cable compartment. This design virtually eliminates the possibility of accidental contact with the main buses during installation or maintenance
Provisions for the Future

Future expansion provisions include line side connectors, load side runbacks, terminals, and glass polyester compartments and covers (for circuit breakers).
Customer Metering
Eaton microprocessor-based metering devices are standard when customer metering is specied. Conventional metering is available. IQ and Power Xpert devices can provide communications capabilities. See Tab 3.
A Wide Selection of Main and Branch Devices

Main devices are available from 4004000A and can include molded case circuit breakers, Magnum SB and DS breakers, and fusible switches or bolted pressure switches. Main buses are rated up to 4000A.
The Magnum DS breaker includes the Digitrip RMS trip unit that provides circuit protection, information and testing functions, and true rms sensing.
CA08104001E
21.0-14 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Technical Data

Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Technical Data
Table 21.0-2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Type Cont. Ampere Rating at 40C No. of Poles Voltage AC DC
September 2011
Sheet 21 014
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Trip Type
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes AC Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 14,000 14,000 18,000 18,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 50,000 35,000 35,000 25,000 35,000 50,000 65,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 DC Ratings Volts 125 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 42,000 10,000 10,000 42,000 42,000 10,000 10,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 250 10,000 42,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 42,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 50,000 22,000 22,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 42,000 22,000 22,000 25,000 25,000 42,000 42,000 65,000
125/250 600 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 50,000 65,000
EDB 100225 2, 3 240 125 EDS 100225 2, 3 240 125 ED 100225 2, 3 240 125 EDH 100225 2, 3 240 125 EDC 100225 2, 3 240 125 15100 1 277 125 EHD 15100 2, 3 480 250 EHD 15150 2, 3 600 HFDDC FDB 15225 2, 3 600 250 FDB 15225 4 600 250 FD, FDE 15225 1 277 125 FD, FDE 15225 2, 3 600 250 FD, FDE 15225 4 600 250 HFD, HFDE 15225 1 277 125 HFD, HFDE 15225 2, 3 600 250 HFD, HFDE 15225 4 600 250 FDC, FDCE 15225 2, 3 600 250 FDC, FDCE 15225 4 600 250 70250 2, 3 600 250 JD 70250 2, 3 600 250 HJD 70250 2, 3 600 250 JDC 70250 2, 3 600 HJDDC DK 250400 2, 3 240 250 70400 2, 3 KD 600 250 70400 3 CKD 600 250 HKD 70400 2, 3 600 250 CHKD 70400 3 600 250 KDC 70400 2, 3 600 250 HKDDC 100400 2, 3 600 LHH 125400 2, 3 600 250 NHH 150350 3 600 300600 2, 3 600 250 LGE LGH 300600 2, 3 600 250 LGC 250600 2, 3 600 250 LGU 250600 2, 3 600 250 300600 LD 2, 3 600 250 300600 CLD 3 600 250 HLD 300600 2, 3 600 250 CHLD 300600 3 600 250 LDC 300600 2, 3 600 250 CLDC 300600 3 600 250 HLDDC 300600 2, 3 600 400800 2, 3 600 250 MDL CMDL 400800 3 600 HMDL 400800 2, 3 600 CHMDL 400800 3 600 HMDLDC 300800 2, 3 600 600120 2, 3 600 ND 6001200 3 600 CND HND 6001200 2, 3 600 6001200 3 600 CNDC NDC 6001200 2, 3 600 CHND 6001200 3 600 NBDC 7001200 2, 3 600 8001600 3 600 RD 1600 8001600 3 600 CRD 1600 RD 2000 10002000 3 600 10002500 3 600 RD 2500 3 600 CRD 2000 10002000 RDC 1600 8001600 3 600 3 600 CRDC 1600 8001600 RDC 2000 10002000 3 600 RDC 2500 10002500 3 600 3 600 CRDC 2000 10002000 PBDC 16002000 2, 3 600 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
N.I.T.
22,000 42,000 N.I.T. 65,000 100,000 200,000 N.I.T. 14,000 N.I.T. 18,000 14,000 N.I.T. N.I.T. 18,000 14,000 18,000 14,000 N.I.T. 35,000 65,000 35,000 65,000 35,000 N.I.T. 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 I.T. 65,000 35,000 I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. 200,000 100,000 I.T. N.I.T. 65,000 I.T. 65,000 35,000 I.T. 65,000 35,000 I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. 200,000 100,000 I.T. I.T. 100,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 I.T. 65,000 35,000 I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. 200,000 100,000 I.T. 200,000 150,000 I.T. 65,000 35,000 I.T. 65,000 35,000 I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. 200,000 100,000 I.T. 200,000 100,000 I.T. N.I.T. 65,000 50,000 N.I.T. 65,000 50,000 N.I.T. 100,000 65,000 N.I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. N.I.T. 65,000 50,000 N.I.T. 65,000 50,000 N.I.T. 100,000 65,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. 100,000 65,000 I.T. N.I.T. 125,000 65,000 N.I.T. 125,000 65,000 N.I.T. 125,000 65,000 N.I.T. 200,000 65,000 N.I.T. 125,000 65,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 I.T. 100% rated. Not available in Pow-R-Line i switchboards. For use on DC systems only. Individually, vertically mounted.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 015
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Technical Data

21.0-15
Table 21.0-3. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings

Circuit Breaker Type SBS-608 SBS-C08 SBS-612 SBS-C12 SBS-616 SBS-C16 SBS-620 SBS-C20 SBS-625 SBS-C25 SBS-630 SBS-C30 SBS-840 SBS-C40 SBS-850 SBS-C50
Frame Amperes
Trip Unit Current Sensor and Rating Plug Ranges 200800 200800 2001200 2001200 2001600 2001600 2002000 2002000 2002500 2002500 2003000 2003000 20004000 20004000 25005000 25005000
Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (000) Interrupting Ratings 208/240 Vac 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 480 Vac 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 600 Vac 65 85 65 85 65 85 65 85 65 85 65 85 65 85 65 85
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
800 800 1200 1200 1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3000 3000 4000 4000 5000 5000
Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at approximately 18 x In symmetrical.
Table 21.0-4. Magnum DS Power Breaker Interrupting Ratings

Circuit Breaker Type MDS-408 MDS-608 MDS-808 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-816 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-820 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-832 MDS-C32 MDS-840 MDS-C40 MDS-850 MDS-C50
Frame Amperes
Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (000) Interrupting Ratings 208/240V 480V 42 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 85 100 85 100 600V 42 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 85 100 85 100 Short-Time Rating 208/240V 42 65 85 85 65 85 85 65 85 85 65 85 85 85 100 85 100 480V 42 65 85 85 65 85 85 65 85 85 65 85 85 85 100 85 100 600V 42 65 85 85 65 85 85 65 85 85 65 85 85 85 100 85 100
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
800 800 800 800 1600 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 3000 3000 3000 4000 4000 4000 5000
42 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 130 130 130 130
Also ratings without instantaneous trip.
Table 21.0-5. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type

Circuit Breaker Type FCL LCL

Cont. Ampere Rating at 40C 15100 125400
No. of Voltage Poles AC DC
Trip Type
Federal Spec. W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes AC Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 DC 125 250 125/250
15 16 17
2, 3 2, 3
480 600
N.I.T. N.I.T.
200,000 200,000
150,000 200,000 100,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. Not dened in W-C-375b.
Table 21.0-6. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type

Circuit Breaker Type FB LA NB PB

Cont. Ampere Rating at 40C 15100 70400 300800 6001600
No. of Voltage Poles AC DC
Trip Type
Federal Spec. W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes AC Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 DC 125 250 125/250 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000
18 19 20 21
2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
600 600 600 600
250 250 250 250
N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T.
16a, 16b, 17a, 26a 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a 16b, 17a, 26a 17a, 26a
200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000
200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
CA08104001E
21.0-16 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Technical Data

Table 21.0-7. Electrical Characteristics of Fusible Switches
Device Type Fusible switch System Voltage 240 or 600 Ampere Rating 30600 3001200 30600 800, 1200 Interrupting Capacities kA Symmetrical Amperes 200 kAIC with Class R Fuses 200 kAIC with Class T Fuses 200 kAIC with Class R and J Fuses 200 kAIC with Class L Fuses
September 2011
Sheet 21 016
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Cable Ranges for Standard Secondary Device Terminals

Wire and cable terminals supplied on switchboard mounted devices for making up incoming or outgoing cable connections are of the mechanical screw clamp pressure type. All standard terminals are suitable for use with either aluminum or copper cable except as noted in the table. Panel mounted devices use the standard terminal provided with that device. Table 21.0-9. Fusible Switches
Ampere Rating 30, 60, 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Wire Size Ranges #141/0 #4300 kcmil 250750 kcmil or (2) 3/0250 kcmil (2) #4600 kcmil or (4) 3/0250 kcmil (3) 250750 kcmil or (6) 3/0250 kcmil (4) 250750 kcmil or (8) 3/0250 kcmil
Bolted 240 pressure or switch 480
800, 1200, 1600 200 kAIC with Class L Fuses 2000, 2500, 3000, 200 kAIC with Class L Fuses 200 kAIC with Class L Fuses 4000, 5000
5000A bolted pressure contact switch is not UL listed.
Table 21.0-8. Standard Switchboard Terminals Standard Main Breaker, Branch Breaker, Main Switch or Branch Switch Terminals
Type Breaker EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE FCL JD, HJD, JDC DK Ampere Rating 100225 15100 125225 15100 70250 250350 400 100225 250350 400 300500 600 150350 400600 700800 Wire Size Ranges # 4#4/0 or # 6300 kcmil #14#1/0 # 4#4/0 or #6300 kcmil #14#1/0 # 4350 kcmil (1) 25500 kcmil (2) 3/0250 kcmil or (1) 3/0500 kcmil (1) #3350 kcmil (1) 250500 kcmil (2) 3/0250 kcmil (1) 3/0500 kcmil (2) 250350 kcmil (2) 400500 kcmil (1) #2600 kcmil (2) #1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil (2) 500750 kcmil
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD , CHKD
Table 21.0-10. Standard Mechanical Incoming Terminal Ranges for Main Lugs Only and Main Devices Including Circuit Breakers and Fusible Devices
Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 Cable Range (2) #2500 kcmil (2) #2500 kcmil (3) #2500 kcmil (4) #2500 kcmil (4) #2500 kcmil (5) #2500 kcmil (6) #2500 kcmil (7) #2500 kcmil (10) #2500 kcmil
LGE, LGH, LD, HLD, LDC, CLD , CHLD , CLDC , LHH, LGC, LGU NHH MDL, CMDL , HMDL, CHMDL
ND, HND, NDC, CND , CHND , CNDC LCL
6001000 (3) 3/0400 kcmil 1200 (4) 4/0500 kcmil 125225 250400 15100 70225 250400 350700 800 (1) #6350 kcmil (1) #4250 kcmil and (1) 3/0600 kcmil #141/0 (1) #6350 kcmil (1) #4250 kcmil and (1) 3/0600 kcmil (2) #1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil
Table 21.0-11. Range Taking Compression Main Terminals

Main Ampere 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000
Number of Conductors and Wire Range Per Phase Aluminum Conductors (4) 500750 kcmil (5) 500750 kcmil (6) 500750 kcmil (7) 500750 kcmil (8) 500750 kcmil (11) 500750 kcmil (13) 500750 kcmil Copper Conductors (3) 500750 kcmil (4) 500750 kcmil (4) 500750 kcmil (6) 500750 kcmil (7) 500750 kcmil (9) 500750 kcmil (11) 500750 kcmil
FB-P
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
LA-P
NB-P
100% rated breaker.
Note: All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding to those shown in NEC Table 310-16 under the 75C insulation columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills), regardless of insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL labels on devices and equipment. Note: For other terminals available on some ratings of molded case circuit breakers and fusible switches, refer to Tab 27.
Compression terminations will take a range of conductors and include 500, 600, 700 and 750 kcmil.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 017
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Pow-R-Line C

Layout and Dimensions
21.1-1
Layout Guide for Pow-R-Line C, Front-Access, GroupMounted Feeders
Table 21.1-1. Front-Access Group-Mounted Feeders Pow-R-Line C

Steps Description Page 21.1-2 21.1-6 21.1-8 21.1-9 21.1-9 21.1-11 21.1-14 21.4-1 21.0-14 Step 1 Layout incoming main section (with or without main device) as follows: Special Utility Metering Compartment West Coast Utility Metering Compartment Standard NEMA Utility Metering Compartment Customer Only Metering Compartment No Metering Compartment Step 2 Layout Feeder Devices in Distribution Sections Pow-R-Line C Group-Mounted Type Individually Mounted Type Outdoor Enclosures
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Step 3 Step 4
Technical data, e.g., interrupting ratings, terminal size. Specication Data
For a complete product specication in CSI format, see Eatons Product Specication Guide, Section 16429.
Because utility compartment dimensions are the minimum required by utility, check no metering main device widths and use the larger width of either the main device or utility metering compartment. Feeders are individually mounted, not compartmentalized.
Table 21.1-2. Rear-Access Group-Mounted Feeders Pow-R-Line C

Steps Description Page 21.2-3 21.2-5 21.2-7 21.2-8 21.2-8 21.2-10 21.1-14 21.4-1 21.0-14 Step 1 Layout incoming main section (with or without main device) as follows: Special Utility Metering Compartment West Coast Utility Metering Compartment Standard NEMA Utility Metering Compartment Customer Only Metering Compartment No Metering Compartment Step 2 Layout Feeder Devices in Distribution Sections Pow-R-Line C Group-Mounted Type Individually Mounted Type Outdoor Enclosures
PRLC SwitchboardFront-Access
Drawings
Drawings and data on the following pages reect dimensions for worst case switchboard designs. Smaller switchboard dimensions may be available. Both preliminary and asbuilt approval drawings are available from Eaton. These drawings reect the actual switchboard congured, and include height, width and depth dimensions.
Step 3 Step 4
Building Information Model

In addition, a building information model (BIM) 3D compatible drawing is available for all congured to order switchboards. A BIM is a three-dimensional digital representation of a facilitys physical and functional characteristics. It serves as a shared knowledge resource for information about a facility and forms a reliable basis for decisions throughout its life-cycle. Eaton offers 3D BIM compatible models to support a variety of MEP software, including Autodesk AutoCAD MEP, Revit MEP and NavisWorks, Bentley Building Electrical Systems, Graphisoft ArchiCAD MEP Modeler, Nemetschek N.A. VectorWorks, and others.
Table 21.1-3. Rear-Access Compartmentalized Feeders Pow-R-Line i

Steps Description Page 21.2-3 21.2-5 21.2-7 21.2-8 21.2-8 21.3-1 21.1-14 21.4-1 21.0-14 Step 1 Layout incoming main section (with or without main device) as follows: Special Utility Metering Compartment West Coast Utility Metering Compartment Standard NEMA Utility Metering Compartment Customer Only Metering Compartment No Metering Compartment Step 2 Layout Feeder Devices in Distribution Sections Pow-R-Line C Compartmentalized Type Individually Mounted Type Outdoor Enclosures
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Step 3 Step 4
CA08104001E
21.1-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Switchboard Layout Data

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access
September 2011
Sheet 21 018
i ii
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed
Pull Box
Bottom or Top Feed

Pull Box Main 2500 Pull Section Amp Max. Utility Compartment Cold Sequence 2.50 (63.5) 2.50 (63.5) H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Utility Compartment Hot Sequence
Blank
Utility Pull Section Compartment Hot Sequence
Clear Area
Blank Pull Section D W
Main
3.00 (76.2) W or W1
3.00 (76.2)
D W W1 W
D W1 W
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4 (Cold Sequence)
Floor Plan Layouts 1, 3 and 4 Pull Section Only
Figure 21.1-1. Incoming Utility CompartmentDimensions in Inches (mm)

Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.1-9, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.1-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure. Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame.
Table 21.1-4. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-1 LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Metering Sequence Front-Access Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 4 TopMounted Pull Box Height (H) Pull Section Width (W1)
Width (W) Atlantic City Electric Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Cold
Depth (D)
Depth (D)
Depth (D) Bottom Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Depth (D)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
800 1200 16002000 25004000 BGE (Baltimore Gas and Electric) 800 12002500 30004000 NSTAR (Boston Edison, Cambridge Electric, Commonwealth Electric) 8001600 20002500 30004000 CH Energy Group (Central Hudson Gas and Electric) Central Vermont Public Service Cinergy/CG&E (Cincinnati Gas and Electric) 800 1000 12002000 25004000 Exelon/ComEd (Commonwealth Edison) 4001000 12002000 25004000
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A N/A N/A
36 (914.4)/ N/A 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)/ N/A 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) N/A
36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4) N/A 45 (1143.0) N/A Hot /Cold Hot Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) N/A

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) N/A

N/A N/A
Bottom 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
For BG&E, the utility compartment is mounted in the bottom for Layout 1 and top for Layout 2. For bottom feed (Layout 1); up to 2500A, the main is mounted in top. For 3000 and 4000A bottom feed, the main is in a separate structure. For top feed (Layout 2), maximum amperes is 4000A and the main is mounted in the bottom. Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.1-9, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.1-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure. For special applications approved by the utility. Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Figure 21.1-4. Only required for 750 kcmil incoming cables.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater. For main device dimensions, see Figure 21.1-5. N/A = Not Applicable.
September 2011
Sheet 21 019
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Switchboard Layout Data

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
21.1-3
Table 21.1-4. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-1 LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Metering Sequence Width (W) Connecticut Light and Power (Northeast Utilities) 8001200 16002000 25004000 ConEdison (Consolidated Edison) 800 (Spec. 298) 12001600 (Spec. 298) 12002000 (Spec. 377) 25004000 (Spec. 377) DTE Energy (Detroit Edison) 800 12002000 25004000 Florida Power and Light Georgia Power Co. IPL (Indianapolis Power Co.) 800 12002000 25004000 Jersey Central Power (First Energy) 800 12002000 25004000 Kansas City Power and Light LIPA (Long Island Power Authority) 800 12002000 25004000 LG&E Energy (Louisville Gas and Electric) 800 12002000 25003000 Madison Gas and Electric 8001200 16002000 25004000 Massachusetts Electric (National Grid) 800 12002000 25004000 Metropolitan Edison (First Energy) Monongahela Power Naperville Narragansett (National Grid) 800 12002000 25004000

Front-Access Layout 1 Depth (D) Layout 2 Depth (D) Layout 3 Depth (D) Layout 4 Depth (D) Top-Mounted Pull Pull Box Section Height (H) Width (W1)
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
Hot /Cold

36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 45 (1143.0) Hot 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) Bottom Top
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2)
N/A 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6)
26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) N/A 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Hot 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Hot Hot Hot/Cold

36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

12 (304.8) Fig. 3 12 (304.8) Fig. 3 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) N/A 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) N/A N/A 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6)
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 26 (48D) 30 (48D) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)

36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Hot /Cold
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Hot Hot

Bottom 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Top 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
26 (660.4) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
38 (965.2) 24 (609.6) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Cold 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Hot

24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Bottom 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Bottom
Top 24 (609.6) N/A 36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4) N/A Top 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Top
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
N/A N/A N/A 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot Hot Hot Hot

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)

N/A 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)

Bottom
Top
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
N/A 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
For special applications approved by the utility. Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.1-8. Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.1-9, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.1-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater. For main device dimensions, see Page 21.1-9. N/A = Not Applicable.

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front -Access
September 2011
Sheet 21 020
i ii
Bottom Feed
Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed
Bottom or Top Feed

2.50 (63.5)
Pull Box
Pull Box Main Pull 2500A Section Max.
1 2 3 4 5
Blank
Utility Pull Section Compartment Hot Sequence
Clear Area
Blank Pull Section D W
Main
Utility Compartment Cold Sequence
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2) W or W1
3.00 (76.2)
D W W1 W
W1
Floor Plan Layouts 1, 3 and 4 Pull Section Only
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Figure 21.1-2. Incoming Utility Compartment and/or Main DevicesDimensions in Inches (mm)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Metering Sequence Front-Access Layout 1 Width (W) Depth (D) New York State Electric and Gas 8001200 16002000 25004000 Niagara Mohawk (National Grid) 8001200 16002000 25004000 Northeast Utilities 8001200 16002000 25004000 XCEL (Northern States Power) 8001200 16002000 25003000 4000 Omaha Public Power 12002000 25004000 Orange and Rockland PPL (Pennsylvania Power and Light) 8004000 8004000
Layout 2 Depth (D)
Layout 3 Depth (D) Bottom Top N/A N/A N/A Top N/A N/A N/A Top
Layout 4 Depth (D)
Top-Mounted Pull Pull Box Section Height (H) Width (W1)
Cold 36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4) N/A 45 (1143.0) N/A Cold 36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4)/ N/A 45 (1143.0) Hot /Cold

N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A N/A Bottom
30 (762.0) 12 (304.8) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2)
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A N/A Bottom
N/A 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2)
26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)/ 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot /Cold 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) Hot Hot 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Bottom
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Top 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top
N/A 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6)
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Bottom 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
N/A N/A N/A
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
N/A N/A
18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) N/A
26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
Bottom
480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A
N/A N/A
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0)
Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.1-9, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.1-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure. Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.1-8. For special applications approved by the utility. For limiter lugs or more than six (6) mechanical lugs per phase, use Layout 3. For limiter lugs or more than six (6) mechanical lugs per phase, a 12-inch (304.8 mm) pull box is required. For bottom incoming, front accessible applications only, 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide pull section required.
September 2011
Sheet 21 021

21.1-5
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Metering Sequence Width (W) Exelon/PECO (Philadelphia Electric Company) 8002000 25004000 8002500 4000 PEPCO (Potomac Electric Power Co.) 8002000 25004000 8003000 4000 XCEL Energy of Colorado 8001200 16002000 25004000 PSEG (Public Service Electric and Gas) 800 12002000 2500 30004000 Public Service of New Hampshire Hot/Cold First Energy Toledo Edison Ameren (Union Electric) 8004000 Dominion (Virginia Power Company) 800 1200 16002000 25004000 We Energies (Wisconsin Electric Power Co.) 800 1200 16003000 4000 Alliant Energy (Wisconsin Power and Light) 800 12002000 25003000 Wisconsin Public Service Corp. 10004000

Front-Access Layout 1 Depth (D)
i
Layout 4 Depth (D)
Layout 2 Depth (D)
Layout 3 Depth (D)
Top-Mounted Pull Box Height (H) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Pull Section Width (W1)
ii 1 2 3
Hot
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Hot
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) N/A N/A
N/A N/A 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
N/A N/A N/A N/A Bottom
N/A N/A N/A N/A Top N/A N/A N/A N/A Top
N/A N/A N/A N/A
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) N/A N/A
N/A N/A 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
N/A N/A N/A N/A Bottom
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
N/A N/A N/A N/A 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
4 5 6
36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Bottom
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Top 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) N/A N/A
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)

7 8 9 10
Cold Hot
N/A
Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Hot 45 (1143.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
Bottom 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Bottom 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Bottom N/A
Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) Top 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Top N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) N/A N/A N/A N/A 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) N/A N/A N/A N/A 18 (457.2) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.1-8. Only required for 750 kcmil incoming cables. For special applications approved by the utility.
Note: The following utilities have standardized on the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) utility metering compartment standard. Refer to Page 21.1-8 for specic sizing and requirements. American Electric Power, Central Hudson Gas and Electric, Central Vermont, Consumers Power Company, Delmarva Power and Light, Georgia Power Company, Kansas City Power and Light, Orange And Rockland, Philadelphia Electric Company, Allegheny Power, Toledo Edison, Union Electric, Columbus Southern Power, Pennsylvania Electric Co. and Southern Maryland Electric Coop.
21

September 2011
Sheet 21 022
i ii 1
Main StructuresIncoming West Coast Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed Bottom or Top Feed
2.50 (63.5) Pull Box
2.50 (63.5)
2 3
Pull Section
Utility Compartment Hot Sequence 2.50 (63.5) Main
Clear Area
Clear Area
3.00 (76.2)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Blank
3.00 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5)
W1
Floor Plan Layout 1

D W
Floor Plan Layout 2
D W W1
Layout 1
Layout 2
Figure 21.1-3. West Coast Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame. Front-Access Layout 1 Width (W) Depth (D) Layout 2 Width (W) Depth (D) (Top Feed) (Bottom Feed) Top-Mounted Pull Box Pull Section Height (H) Width (W1)

Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings
West Coast Utilities E.U.S.E.R.C.

400800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 400 600800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 400 600800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
N/R 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/R N/R 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4)
Southern California Edison (S.C.E.)
Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (L.A.D.W.P.)
Refer to Eaton.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater. For main device dimensions, see Page 21.1-9. N/R = Not Required.
September 2011
Sheet 21 023

21.1-7
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Front-Access Layout 1 Width (W) Depth (D) Layout 2 Width (W) Depth (D) (Top Feed) (Bottom Feed) Top-Mounted Pull Box Pull Section Height (H) Width (W1)
i ii 1
West Coast Utilities Pacic Gas and Electric (P.G. and E.)
400800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 400800 1000 1200 16002000 (Copper) 1600 (Aluminum) 2000 (Aluminum) 2500 3000 4000 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) N/R 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 54 (1371.6)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
San Diego Gas and Electric (S.D.G. and E.)
21

September 2011
Sheet 21 024
i ii 1 2
Main StructureIncoming Standard (NEMA) Utility Compartments and/or Main Device

Hot Sequence Utility Bottom Entrance Top Entrance Cold Sequence Utility Bottom Entrance Top Entrance
Optional Customer Metering Optional Customer Metering
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
Optional GFP Utility Pull Compartment Section Hot Sequence Optional GFP
Optional GFP Main D Clear Area D Clear Area
90.00 (2286.0)
Utility Compartment Hot Sequence Optional GFP
Pull Main 90.00 Section (2286.0) Utility Compartment Cold Sequence D D W1 W
3 4
Main
Main
Utility Compartment Cold Sequence D W
2.50 (63.5) 3.00 (76.2) W1
2.50 (63.5) 3.00 3.00 (76.2) (76.2) W
3.00 (76.2)
D W1 W W
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Floor Plan, Pull Section
Top Plan, Main Section
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4
Figure 21.1-4. NEMA Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Rigid bus extension into Pull Section is required above 2000A. Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame. IQ meter mounted to disconnect door as an alternate location. (When K, L, M, N and R xed-mounted frames and xed-mounted power circuit breakers are used.)
Table 21.1-7. Main Device Structure Size for Figure 21.1-4 Layouts
Main Device Max. Width Depth Pull Amp. (W) (D) Section Rating Width (W1) Main Device Max. Width Depth Pull Amp. (W) (D) Section Rating Width (W1) Main Device Max. Width Amp. (W) Rating Depth (D) Pull Section Width (W1)
Fixed-Mounted Devices
Molded-Case Breakers Available with Optional Integral GFP

KD, HKD, KDC 400 LGS, LGH, 600 LGC, LGU LD, HLD, LDC 600 MDL, HMDL 800 ND, HND, NDC 1200 RD, RDC RD, RDC RD, RDC 1600 2000 2500 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 20 20 20 20 26 26 26 26
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available with Optional Integral GFP
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48 26 26 26 30 30
100% Rated Manual Bolted Pressure Switches Not Available with Ground Fault Protection
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 QA-2000 QA-2500 QA-3000 QA-4000 QA-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 45 36 45 36 45 36 Refer to Eaton 20 26 26 26 30 30 30
100% Rated Power Circuit Breakers Available with Optional Integral GFP
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 400 600 800 1200 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 48 48 48 30 30 30 30 26 26 26 30 30 20 20 20 26
100% Rated Molded-Case Breakers Available with Optional Integral GFP

CKD, CHKD CLD, HCLD, CLDC 400 600 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 20 20 20 20 26 26 20 20 26 400 600 800 1200
Drawout-Mounted Devices
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48 26 26 26 30 30
Fusible Switches
CMDL, CHMDL 800 CND, CHND, 1200 CNDC CRD, CRDC CRD, CRDC LA-P NB-P PB-P 1600 2000 400 800 1600
TRI-PAC Fuse Type Current Limiting Breakers
100% Rated Electric Trip Bolted Pressure Switches Available with Optional GFP
CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600 CBC-2000 CBC-2500 CBC-3000 CBC-4000 CBC-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 36 45 45 45 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 20 26 26 26 30 30 30
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 48 48 48 48 54 66 26 26 26 30 30
Note: Dimensions for Figure 21.1-4. Note: Refer to Pages 21.1-2 to 21.1-4 for dimensions on special utility CT compartments.
Not UL listed. Refer to Eaton.
Note: See Pages 21.1-11 to 21.1-13 for layout of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures. Topmounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For metric conversion: inches x 25.4 = mm. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 025

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Top Feed
21.1-9
Incoming StructureWith Customer Metering and/or Main Device

Top Entrance Bottom Entrance Mid-Mounted Main Bottom-Mounted Main Load Cross Bus Load Cross Bus
Optional Customer Metering Optional GFP
i
2.50 (63.5)
Bottom Entrance TopMounted Main with Distribution Chassis
Top Entrance TopMounted Main with Distribution Chassis
Top or Bottom Entry Mid-Mounted Main Cable Exit

Layouts 1 & 2
Layouts 3 & 4
ii 1
Optional Customer Metering
Clear Area
12.00 (304.8) 3.00 3.00 (76.2) (76.2)
Clear Area
2.50 (63.5)
90.00 (2286.0)
Main
Pull 2500A Section Max. Optional GFP
Main
2500A Max.
Main
3.00 (76.2)
4000A Main Max.
3.00 (76.2)
Floor or Top Plan

Ampere Rating
Floor Plan
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height 12 (304.8) 18 (457.2) 24 (609.6)
2 3 4 5 6 7
Main
Optional GFP 22X Dist. Classis
D W W
36.00 (914.4) Min.
24.00 (609.6) Min.
36.00 (914.4) Min.
24.00 (609.6) Min.
D W
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4
Layout 5 (Fixed-Mounted Devices Only)
Pull Section Minimum Dimensions
400800 12002000 2500
20 (508.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
Top Pull Box 400800 Minimum 12002000 Dimensions 2500
Figure 21.1-5. Main Structure LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame. Customer metering with IQ meter requires 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) minimum width. Not available with bottom fed TRI-PAC breaker.
Main Device Max. Width (W) Depth Amp. Zero No GFP (D) Rating Seq. or With GFP Integral GFP Main Device Max. Amp. Rating Width (W) Depth (D) Main Device Max. Amp. Rating Fixed-Mounted Devices Width (W) Depth (D)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 QA-2000 QA-2500 QA-3000 QA-4000 QA-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 30 30 30 30 36 45 45

KD, HKD, KDC 400 LGS, LGH, 600 LGC, LGU 600 LD, HLD, LDC 600 MDL, HMDL 800 ND, HND, NDC 1200 RD, RDC RD, RDC RD, RDC 1600 2000 2500 30 36 36 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 24 20 20 24 24 24 30 30 30
30 30 30 30 30 36 36
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 400 600 800 1200 36 36 36 36 45 45 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 48 48 48 18 18 18 18
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48

CKD, CHKD CLD, HCLD, CLDC CMDL, CHML CND, CHND, CNDC CRD, CRDC CRD, CRDC LA-P NB-P PB-P 400 600 600 800 1200 1200 1600 2000 400 800 1600 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 18 18 18 18 18 18 30 30 18 18 24
Fusible Switches
400 600 800 1200
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 36 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48
CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600 CBC-2000 CBC-2500 CBC-3000 CBC-4000 CBC-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 36 45 45 45
Note: See Pages 21.1-11 to 21.1-13 for layout of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures. Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
30 30 30 30 36 36 36
Bottom feed switch structure depth per Figure 1 is 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) minimum. Not UL listed. Refer to Eaton.
Note: Dimensions for Layouts 1, 2 and 5 shown above. Dimensions for Layouts 3 and 4use larger allowable dimension of main (shown above) or distribution mounted devices (see Pages 21.1-9 to 21.1-14).
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For metric conversion: inches x 25.4 = mm. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Individually Mounted
September 2011
Sheet 21 026
i ii 1 2
Individually Mounted Distribution Devices

Top-Mounted Feeder with Distribution Chassis
2.50 (63.5)
2500A Feeder Max.
Clear Area D
CC
Optional GFP
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RD, RDC RD, RDC RD, RDC 1600 2000 2500
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
W (Front)
3.00 (76.2)
36.00 (914.4) W Min.
24.00 (609.6) Min. D
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Layout 2
Note: Switchboards designed using these distribution structures require front access for cable terminations.
Figure 21.1-6. Individually Mounted Distribution Layouts

Clear area assumes no oor channels used under front or rear frame members.
Note: Individually mounted distribution devices are not compartmentalized.
Table 21.1-9. Stacked Individually Mounted Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.1-6 Layout 1 OnlyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder Device Max. Zero Sequence Amp. GFP Rating Minimum Width (W) Fixed-Mounted Devices Depth (D) No GFP or with Integral GFP Minimum Width (W) Depth (D) Minimum Cable Space CC
Table 21.1-10. Top Feeder with Group-Mounted Distribution Chassis Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder Device RD, RDC Magnum SB Magnum DS Manually Operated Bolted Pressure Contact Switch Maximum Ampere Rating 2500 2500 2500 2500 Width (W) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Depth (D) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
Molded-Case Breakers
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available

Magnum 800 SB 1600 2000 Magnum 800 DS 1600 2000 CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600 CBC-2000 CBC-2500 800 1200 1600 2000 2500
100% Rated Power Circuit Breaker

45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.6)
100% Rated Electric Trip Bolted Pressure Switches
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 QA-2000 QA-2500

800 1200 1600 2000 2500
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (762.0)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
Structure size to be determined by device requiring the largest structure width and depth. Magnum DS Power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have been qualied by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
September 2011
Sheet 21 027

21.1-11
Distribution SectionsGroup-Mounted Devices
i ii
Optional Customer Metering or Blank

90.00 (2286.0)
Busway Connection
2.50 (63.5)
1
ClearArea
90.00 (2286.0)
22X Device Space
38X Vertical Panel Space for Devices
90.00 (2286.0)
2 3
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
W (Front) Floor Plan
3.00 (76.2)
4 5 6 7 8 9
24.00 (609.6) 36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0) Layout 1 Maximum 2000 Amperes CT Compartment Combination Section
36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0)
18.00 (457.2)
36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0)
18.00 (457.2)
Layout 2 Busway Connection
Layout 3 Full Distribution Section
Note: See Distribution Layout Guides for structure width and for feeder device X requirements on Pages 21.1-12 and 21.1-13.
Figure 21.1-7. Distribution Section LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame. For panels rated above 2000A, minimum depth is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm). Busway connection can be either incoming service or exiting load from a feeder breaker. Increased depth will be required.
Main Lug Distribution Sizing

Most switchboard layouts feed the distribution section(s) from adjacent main breaker sections; however, a single distribution section may have a set of incoming main lugs only. Main lugs may be positioned in two ways. 1. Main lugs on distribution panel using space requirements in Table 21.1-11. 2. With a bussed auxiliary structure for incoming cable per Figure 21.1-8.
Table 21.1-11. Main Lug Only Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes Lug Range (kcmil) 400 & 600 800 1200 1600 2000

Wall
Cross Bus
Incoming Conduits
Pull Section Top Section View

X Space Required 50X Chassis 38X Chassis
18.00 (457.2)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PNLBD
W
PNLBD
W
2#2500 2#250750 3#2500 3#250750 4#2500 4#250750 5#2500 5#250750 6#2500 6#250750
10 (254.0) 10 (254.0) 16 (406.4) 10 (254.0) 10 (254.0) 10 (254.0) 16 (406.4) 10 (254.0) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 16 (406.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 16 (406.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 16 (406.4) 12 (304.8)
Figure 21.1-8. Section Plan View For 30004000A: Incoming cable or busway enters top or bottom of pull section, terminating in cross bus extension. For pull section dimensions, refer to Page 21.1-8.
For compression lugs, use #250750 kcmil lug dimensions. Dimensions shown are for top entry on 38X Chassis only. For bottom entry, use 50X Chassis space requirements.

21

September 2011
Sheet 21 028
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Distribution Layout GuideMolded-Case Breakers

Filler Surge P ive evice 1X 7X or 10X Breaker to Fusible Transition, All Widths
1X = 1-3/8 inches (34.9 mm)
400 kA
Customer Meter ng 1P 2P 3P 2P 3P 2 or r 3P 1P 2P 3P 2P 3P 36-inch (914.4 4 mm) Wide Structure
11X
Customer Metering Maximum Amperes Frame 100 150 EHD FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE, HFDDC EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
1X 2X 3X 2X
225 3X 3X 250
2 or r 3P
4 4X
400
DK, KD, HKD, LHH KDC, CKD , CHKD
, HKDDC
Ear r
kage
4 4X
400
ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC
2 or r 3P
4 4X
600
LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
2 or P
Load
6X
600
LD, HLD, LDC, CLD , CHLD , CLDC FB-P JD, HJD, JDC
, HLDDC
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
3X 3X
100 250
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
6X
400 800
NHH, LA-P MDL, HMDL, CMDL , CHMDL , HMDLDC ND, HND, NDC
2 or r 3P
6X
1200
15
45-inch (1143.0 mm) Wide Structure 2 or r 3P 2 or r 3P 4 4X 400
16 17 18 19 20 21

DK, KD, HKD, KDC NB-P CND , CHND , CNDC , NBDC
2 or r 3P
6X
800 1200
Break
m y b use as
ain.
Figure 21.1-9. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Preferred location of SPD is mounted at the top of rst distribution section. See Tab 34 for further information. 100% rated breakers. For use on direct current (DC) systems only.
Note: For breaker interrupting rating and terminal data, see Tab 26.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 029

21.1-13
Distribution Layout GuideFusible Switches

1X = 1-3/8 inches (34.9 mm)
Surge Protective Device (SPD) 7X up to 200 kA 10X at 250400 kA Customer Metering
i
1X 7X or 10X 11X
Fusible to Breaker Transition, All Widths Surge Protective Device (SPD)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Customer Metering
30A
30A 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide Structure
4X
60A
60A
4X
100A 250V Max.
100A 250V Max.
4X
100 A
5X
200A Main or Branch
6X
7 8 9
(11X with Shunt Trip)
100A
100A
5X

200A
400A Branch 600A Branch 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide Structure 200A
9X
10 11
11X
6X
12
400A Main or Branch 600A Main or Branch 800A Branch Only 1200A Branch Only
9X
13 14
11X
11X
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
15X
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36- or 45-inch (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) wide structure. 400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide structure.
Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main.
Figure 21.1-10. Fusible Switch X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Preferred location of SPD is mounted at the top of rst distribution section. See Tab 34 for further information. Twin 200A switches requires the use of J or T fuses at 480V.
Note: Ground fault applications for 800 and 1200A switches require a shunt trip.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 030
i ii
Individually Mounted Feeder Devices
Rear of Switchboard
1 2 3 4
W
19.50 (495.3) Clear Area Clear Area
Optional GFP
36.00 (914.4) 8.50 (215.9)
3.00 (76.2)
D
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8) 51.00 (1295.4)
3.00 (76.2)
Floor Plan
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600

Layout 1
Figure 21.1-11. Individually Mounted Feeder LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

Verify acceptance with code authorities. Clear area assumes no oor channels used under front or rear frame members. Clearance from walls (on boards that are not rear accessible) should be a minimum of 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) for indoor boards. For boards used in outdoor or wet locations the clearance should be no less than 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
Table 21.1-12. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-11 LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

Feeder Device Maximum Ampere Rating Zero Sequence GFP Minimum Width (W) Depth (D) No GFP or with Integral GFP Minimum Width (W) Depth (D)

800 1200 1600 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 800 1200 1600 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
September 2011
Sheet 21 031

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders and Pow-R-Line i
21.2-1
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed
2.50 (63.5)
i ii
Clear Area Clear Area 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) CC
Blank Utility Compartment Hot Sequence
Main 2500 Amp Max. Utility Compartment Cold Sequence
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blank
Main
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
D W W
D W
D W
Floor Plan Layout 1
Floor Plan Layouts 3 and 4
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4 Cold Sequence)
Note: Switchboards designed using these main structures require rear access for cable terminations. Refer to NEC Article 110-26 for requirements.
Figure 21.2-1. Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Atlantic City Electric 800 1200 16002000 25004000 BGE (Baltimore Gas and Electric) Hot 800 12002500 30004000 NSTAR (Boston Edison, Cambridge Electric, Commonwealth Electric) 8001600 20002500 30004000 CH Energy Group (Central Hudson Gas and Electric) Central Vermont Public Service Cinergy/CG&E (Cincinnati Gas and Electric) 800 1000 12002000 25004000 Exelon/ComEd (Commonwealth Edison) 4001000 12002000 25004000

Metering Sequence Width (W) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Cold
Rear-Access Layout 1 Depth (D) Layout 2 Depth (D) Layout 3 Depth (D) CC Layout 4 Depth (D) CC
8 9 10 11 12
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4)/ 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)/ 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4)/ 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)/ 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)

6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)

36 (914.4) N/A 36 (914.4) N/A 45 (1143.0) N/A Hot /Cold Hot Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/A N/A
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) N/A
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
N/A N/A N/A N/A
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8)
N/A N/A N/A
For special applications approved by the utility. Refer to Eaton. For BG&E, the utility compartment is mounted in the bottom for Layout 1 and top for Layout 2. For bottom feed (Layout 1); up to 2500A, the main is mounted in top. For 3000 and 4000A bottom feed, the main is in a separate structure. For top feed (Layout 2), maximum amperes is 4000A and the main is mounted in the bottom. Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.2-8, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.2-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure. Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.2-7.

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access and Pow-R-Line i Feeders
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Connecticut Light and Power (Northeast Utilities) 8001200 16002000 25004000 ConEdison (Consolidated Edison) 800 (Spec. 298) 12001600 (Spec. 298) 12002000 (Spec. 377) 25004000 (Spec. 377) DTE Energy (Detroit Edison) 800 12002000 25004000 Florida Power and Light Hot Hot Hot/Cold 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
September 2011
Sheet 21 032
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Metering Sequence Width (W) Hot /Cold
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) Hot 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
N/A N/A
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)

30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)

36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)

6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8)

Georgia Power Co. IPL (Indianapolis Power Co.) 800 12002000 25004000
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)

Jersey Central Power (First Energy) Hot /Cold 800 12002000 25004000 Kansas City Power and Light LIPA (Long Island Power Authority) 8001000 12002000 25004000 LG&E Energy (Louisville Gas and Electric) 800 12002000 25003000 Madison Gas and Electric 8001200 16002000 25003000 Massachusetts Electric (National Grid) 800 12002000 25004000 Metropolitan Edison (First Energy) Monongahela Power Naperville Narragansett (National Grid) 800 12002000 25004000

45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot Hot 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Cold 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot

48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) N/A N/A N/A N/A
24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) N/A N/A N/A
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) N/A N/A N/A
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) N/A N/A N/A
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
N/A N/A N/A
36 (914.4) 6 (152.4) 36 (914.4) 6 (152.4) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) Hot Hot Hot Hot

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8)

45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8)
For special applications approved by the utility. Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.2-7. Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.2-8, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.2-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure. Refer to Eaton.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater. For main device dimension, see Page 21.2-8. N/A = Not Applicable.
September 2011
Sheet 21 033

21.2-3
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices (Continued)

Bottom Feed Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed
2.50 (63.5)
i ii
Clear Area
Clear Area 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
Blank
Main 2500 Amp Max.

Utility Compartment Cold Sequence
CC
1 2
Blank
Main
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
D W
D W
W
D
W
Floor Plan Layout 1
Floor Plan Layouts 3 and 4
3 4 5 6 7
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Figure 21.2-2. Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.2-7. Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame.
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings New York State Electric and Gas 8001200 16002000 25004000 Niagara Mohawk (National Grid) 8001200 16002000 25004000 Northeast Utilities 8001200 16002000 25004000 XCEL (Northern States Power) 8001200 16002000 25003000 4000 Omaha Public Power 12002000 25004000 Orange and Rockland 8004000 Exelon/PECO (Philadelphia Electric Company)
Metering Sequence Width (W) Cold 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Cold
8 9 10
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) Hot /Cold
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4)
11 12 13
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)/ 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PPL (Pennsylvania Power and Light) Hot 45 (1143.0) Hot
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.6)

6 (152.4)
Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.2-8, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.2-5. The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of utility compartment structure. Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.2-7. For special applications approved by the utility. Refer to Eaton. For limiter lugs or more than six mechanical lugs per phase, a separate pull section is required. For limiter lugs or more than six mechanical lugs per phase, a 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) pull box is required.

September 2011
Sheet 21 034
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Metering Sequence Width (W) Rear-Access Layout 1 Depth (D) Layout 2 Depth (D) Layout 3 Depth (D) CC Layout 4 Depth (D) CC
PEPCO Hot (Potomac Electric Power Company) 8002000 25004000 8003000 4000 XCEL Energy of Colorado 800 12002000 25004000 PSEG (Public Service Electric and Gas) 800 12002000 2500 30004000 Public Service of New Hampshire First Energy Toledo Edison Ameren (Union Electric) 8004000 Dominion (Virginia Power Company) 800 1200 16002000 25004000 We Energies (Wisconsin Electric Power Co.) 800 1200 16003000 4000 Alliant Energy (Wisconsin Power and Light) 800 12002000 25003000 Wisconsin Public Service Corp. 10004000

36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) Hot
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) N/A N/A
N/A N/A 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
N/A N/A N/A N/A
36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot/Cold Cold Hot

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4) 12 (304.8)
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)

30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)

36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)

6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)

N/A
N/A
Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) Hot 45 (1143.0) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) N/A N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) N/A N/A N/A 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) N/A N/A N/A N/A 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 6 (152.4) 6 (152.4) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.2-7. For special applications approved by the utility.
Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater. For main device dimensions, see Page 21.2-8. N/A = Not Applicable. Note: The following utilities have standardized on the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) utility metering compartment standard. Refer to Page 21.1-8 for specic sizing and requirements. American Electric Power, Central Hudson Gas and Electric, Central Vermont, Consumers Power Company, Delmarva Power and Light, Georgia Power Company, Kansas City Power And Light, Orange and Rockland, Philadelphia Electric Company, Allegheny Power, Toledo Edison, Union Electric, Columbus Southern Power, Pennsylvania Electric Co. and Southern Maryland Electric Coop.
September 2011
Sheet 21 035

21.2-5
Incoming West Coast Utility CT Compartments and/or Main Devices

Bottom Feed Bottom or Top Feed
2.50 (63.5) 2.50 (63.5)
i ii
Pull Box
1
D Clear Area
D
Pull Section

2.50 (63.5)
Clear Area
2
W
Main
3.00 (76.2)
Blank
3.00 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5)
W1
3 4 5 6 7
Floor Plan Layout 1

D W
Floor Plan Layout 2
D W
W1
Layout 1
Layout 2
Figure 21.2-3. West Coast Utility LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame.

Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Front- and Rear-Access Layout 1 Width (W) Depth (D) Layout 2 Width (W) Depth (D) (Top Feed) (Bottom Feed) Top-Mounted Pull Box Pull Section Height (H) Width (W1)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
West Coast Utilities E.U.S.E.R.C.

400800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 400 600800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 400 600800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
N/R 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) N/R N/R 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4)
Southern California Edison (S.C.E.)
Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (L.A.D.W.P.)
Refer to Eaton.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 036
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Power Company Compartments Ampere Ratings Front- and Rear-Access Layout 1 Width (W) Depth (D) Layout 2 Width (W) Depth (D) (Top Feed) (Bottom Feed) Top-Mounted Pull Box Pull Section Height (H) Width (W1)
West Coast Utilities Pacic Gas and Electric (P.G. and E.)
400800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 400800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 38 (965.2) 51 (1295.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) N/R 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 54 (1371.6)
San Diego Gas and Electric (S.D.G. and E.)
September 2011
Sheet 21 037

21.2-7
Incoming Standard (NEMA) Utility CT Compartment and/or Main Device

Hot Sequence Utility Top Feed Bottom Feed
2.50 Floor Plan (63.5) Clear Area D Utility Compartment Hot Sequence 90.00 (2286.0) Optional GFP
i
Cold Sequence Utility Top Entrance Bottom Entrance
ii 1 2 3
CC
Utility Compartment Hot Sequence Optional GFP
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
W (Front)
3.00 (76.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
Main
Main
Main
Main
Utility Compartment Cold Sequence D D W
Utility Compartment Cold Sequence D W
4 5 6 7 8
D W W
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4
Figure 21.2-4. NEMA Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Clear area assumes no oor channels used under front or rear frame members. IQ meter can be mounted to disconnect door as an alternate location for molded case circuit breakers and xed-mounted power circuit breakers.
Main Device Max. Width Depth Min. Amp. (W) (D) Cable Rating Space CC Main Device Max. Width Depth Min. Amp. (W) (D) Cable Rating Space CC Main Device Max. Width Depth Min. Amp. (W) (D) Cable Rating Space CC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Molded-Case Breakers Available With Optional Integral GFP

KD, HKD, KDC LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU LD, HLD, LDC MDL, HMDL ND, HND, NDC RD, RDC RD, RDC RD, RDC 400 600 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 45 36 30 36 36 36 48 48 48 48 6 20 6 6 6 12 12 12 12
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48 26 26 26 30 30
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 QA-2000 QA-2500 QA-3000 QA-4000 QA-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 36 36 6 36 36 6 36 36 6 36 36 6 45 48 12 45 48 12 45 48 12 Refer to Eaton
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 400 600 800 1200 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 36 48 48 48 54/66 54/66 66 36 36 36 36 12 12 12 12/18 12/18 18 6 6 6 6

CKD, CHKD CLD, HCLD, CLDC 400 600 600 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 48 48 36 36 36 6 6 6 6 6 6 12 12 6 6 12
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48 26 26 26 30 30
Fusible Switches
400 600 800 1200
CMDL, CHMDL 800 CND, CHND, 1200 CNDC 1200 CRD, CRDC CRD, CRDC LA-P NB-P PB-P 1600 2000 400 800 1600
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 54 54 54 66 66 66 6 6 6 18
CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600 CBC-2000 CBC-2500 CBC-3000 CBC-4000 CBC-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 36 36 6 36 36 6 36 36 6 36 36 6 45 48 12 45 48 12 45 48 12 Refer to Eaton
Note: Refer to Pages 21.1-14 to 21.6-6 for dimensions on special utility CT compartments. Note: See Pages 21.2-10 to 21.2-12 for layout of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures.
Refer to Eaton. Not UL listed.
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For metric conversion: inches x 25.4 = mm. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

September 2011
Sheet 21 038
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Main StructureWith Customer Metering and/or Main Device

Top Entrance Bottom Mounted Main Load Cross Bus Bottom Entrance Bottom Mounted Main Load Cross Bus Top or Bottom Entrance Top Mounted Main with Distribution Chassis Top or Bottom Entrance Top Mounted Main Bottom Mounted Feeder Top or Bottom Entrance Mid Mounted Main Cable Exit
2.50 (63.5)
Clear Area
CC
Main 2500A Max.
Main 2500A Max.
Optional Customer Metering Optional G, F, P 2.50 (63.5) 4000A Max.
90.00 (2286.0) Optional GFP
Main
3.00 (76.2)
Optional GFP Optional GFP

Optional GFP
W (Front)
3.00 (76.2)
Floor Plan

Main
Main
22X Dist. Classis D
Feeder Device 2500A Max. D 36 (914.4) Min. 48 (1219.2) Min. D W
D W W
36 (914.4) Min.
Layout 1
Layout 2
Layout 3
Layout 4
Layout 5
Figure 21.2-5. Main Section LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Customer metering with IQ Meter requires 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) minimum width.
Not available with bottom fed TRI-PAC breaker.
Clear area assumes no oor channels used under front or rear frame members.
Min. Width Min. (W) Depth Zero Inte- (D) Seq. gral GFP GFP or W/ No GFP Fixed-Mounted Devices Main Device Max Amp Rating Min. Cable Space CC Main Device Max. Min. Min. Min. Amp. Width Depth Cable Rating (W) (D) Space CC Fixed-Mounted Devices Main Device Min. Min. Min. Width Depth Cable (W) (D) Space CC Fixed-Mounted Devices Max. Amp. Rating
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48 26 26 26 30 30
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 QA-2000 QA-2500 QA-3000 QA-4000 QA-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 36 48 45 48 45 48 Refer to Eaton 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

KD, HKD, KDC LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU LD, HLD, LDC LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU MDL, HMDL ND, HND, NDC RD, RDC RD, RDC RD, RDC 400 30 600 36 600 30 600 36 800 30 1200 30 1600 30 2000 30 2500 30 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 30 30 30 30 30 30 48 48 48 12 20 12 20 12 12 18 18 18 400 600 800 1200
Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 400 600 800 1200 36 36 36 36 45 45 30 30 30 30 48 48 48 54 54 66 30 30 30 30 12 12 12 12 12
Magnum SB 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 48 48 48 26 26 26 30 30
Fusible Switches
12 12 12 12

CKD, CHKD 400 30 CLD, HCLD, 600 30 CLDC CMDL, 800 30 CHMDL CND, CHND, 1200 30 CNDC CRD, CRDC 1600 30 CRD, CRDC 2000 30 LA-P NB-P PB-P 400 30 800 30 1600 30 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 30 30 30 48 48 48 30 30 36 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 12 18
CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600 CBC-2000 CBC-2500 CBC-3000 CBC-4000 CBC-5000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 48 45 48 45 48 45 Refer to Eaton

Magnum DS 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 5000 36 36 36 45 45 45 54 54 54 66 54
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 18 12
Refer to Eaton. Bottom feed switch structure is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) minimum. Not UL listed.
Note: See Pages 21.2-10 to 21.2-12 for layout of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures. Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For metric conversion: inches x 25.4 = mm. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 039

21.2-9
Individually Mounted Feeder Devices
i ii
2.50 (63.5)
22X Panel Space
1
Clear Area
CC
Optional GFP
Optional GFP

2
3.00 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
W Layout 1
36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0) Layout 2
W Layout 3
W (Front) Floor Plan
Note: Switchboards designed using these distribution structures require rear access for cable terminations. Refer to NEC Article 110-26 for requirements.
Figure 21.2-6. Individually Mounted Feeder LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

When using top-mounted (bottom feed) inverted bolted switches, verify acceptance with code authorities. For Layout 2, width will be 36.00 or 45.00 inches (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) depending on size of panel mounting devices. Refer to Page 21.2-10.
Table 21.2-5. Stacked Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.2-6 Layouts 1 and 2Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder Device Max. Zero Sequence GFP Amp. Rating Minimum Width (W) Fixed-Mounted Devices Depth (D) No GFP or with Integral GFP Minimum Width (W) Depth (D) Minimum Cable Space CC
Table 21.2-6. Stacked Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.2-6 Layout 3 OnlyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder Device Maximum No GFP or with Ampere Integral GFP Rating Minimum Width (W) Fixed-Mounted Devices Depth (D) Minimum Cable Space CC
Molded-Case Breakers
RD, RDC RD, RDC RD, RDC 1600 2000 2500 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 54 (1371.6) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 26 (660.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 54 (1371.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker

Magnum SB Magnum DS 800 800 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
100% Rated Power Circuit Breaker 100% Rated Manual Bolted Pressure Switches Not Available with Ground Fault Protection
QA-800
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available

Magnum 800 SB 1600 2000 Magnum 800 DS 1600 2000 CBC-800 CBC-1200 CBC-1600 CBC-2000 CBC-2500 800 1200 1600 2000 2500
800
30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
100% Rated Power Circuit Breaker
Magnum DS power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have been qualied by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
Note: See Pages 21.2-10 to 21.2-12 for layout of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures. Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12, 18, 24 and 30 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
QA-800 QA-1200 QA-1600 QA-2000 QA-2500

800 1200 1600 2000 2500
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8) 12 (304.8)
Structure size determined by device requiring largest width and depth. Magnum DS power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have been qualied by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
21

September 2011
Sheet 21 040
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Distribution SectionsGroup-Mounted Devices
Optional Customer Metering or Blank
Busway Connection
2.50 (63.5)
90.00 (2286.0)
22X Device Space
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
ClearArea
2.50 (63.5) 3.00 (76.2) 18.00 (457.2)

18.00 (457.2)
W (Front)
3.00 (76.2)
36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0)
24.00 (609.6)
36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0)
36, 45 (914.4, 1143.0)
Floor Plan
Layout 1 Maximum 2000 Amperes CT Compartment Combination Section
Layout 2 Busway Connection
Layout 3 Full Distribution Section
See Distribution Layout Guides for structure width and for feeder device X requirements on Pages 21.2-11 and 21.2-12.
Figure 21.2-7. Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

Busway connection can be either incoming service to structure or exiting load from a feeder breaker. Increased depth will be required. For panels rated above 2000A, minimum depth is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm). Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame.
Main Lug Distribution Sizing

Main lugs are accessible from the rear of switchboard and do not require any panel space. See Figure 21.2-8 below.
Incoming Conduits Cross Bus
PNLBD
PNLBD
PNLBD
W Top Section View
Figure 21.2-8. Section Floor Plan For 30004000A: Incoming cable or busway enters top or bottom (rear) of any section.

September 2011
Sheet 21 041

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
21.2-11
Distribution Layout GuideMolded-Case Breakers

Filler Surge P ive evice 1X 7X or 10X Breaker to Fusible Transition, All Widths 7X through 200 kA 400 kA
i
1X = 1-3/8 inches (39.4 mm)
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Customer Meter ng 1P 2P 3P 2P 3P 2 or r 3P 1P 2P 3P 2P 3P ture
11X
Customer Metering Maximum Amperes Frame 100 150 EHD FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE, HFDDC EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
1X 2X 3X 2X
225 3X 3X 250
36-inch (914.4 4 mm) Wide Str
2 or r 3P
4 4X
400
DK, KD, HKD, LHH KDC, CKD , CHKD LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
, HKDDC
2 or r 3P
4 4X
600
Load
2 or P
6X
600
LD, HLD, LDC, CLD , CHLD , CLDC FB-P JD, HJD, JDC
, HLDDC
9 10 11 12 13 14
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
3X 3X
100 250
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
6X
400 800
LA-P, NHH MDL, HMDL, CMDL , CHMDL , HMDLDC ND, HND, NDC
2 or r 3P
6X
1200
45-inch (1143.0 mm) Wide Structure
2 or r 3P
2 or r 3P
4 4X
400
DK, KD, HKD, KDC NB-P CND , CHND , CNDC , NBDC
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2 or r 3P
6X
800 1200
Break
m y b use as
ain.
Figure 21.2-9. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementDimensions in Inches (mm)

Preferred location of SPD is mounted at top of rst distribution section. 100% rated breakers. For use on direct current (DC) systems only.
Note: For breaker interrupting ratings and terminal data, see Tab 26.
CA08104001E

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
September 2011
Sheet 21 042
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Fusible to Breaker Transition, All Widths Surge Protective Device (SPD)
1X 7X or 10X 11X
1X = 1-3/8 inches (39.4 mm)

Surge Protective Device (SPD) 7X up to 200 kA 10X at 250400 kA Customer Metering
Customer Metering
30A
30A 36-inch (914.4 mm) wide Structure
4X
60A
60A
4X
100A 250V Max.
100A 250V Max.
4X
100 A
5X
200A Main or Branch
6X
100A
100A
5X

200A
400A Branch 600A Branch 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide Structure 200A
9X (11X with Shunt Trip)
11X
6X
400A Main or Branch 600A Main or Branch 800A Branch Only 1200A Branch Only
11X
11X
15X
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36- or 45-inch (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) wide structure. 400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide structure.
Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main.
Figure 21.2-10. Fusible Switch X Space RequirementDimensions in Inches (mm)

Preferred location of SPD is mounted at top of rst distribution section. See Tab 34 for more information. Twin 200A switches requires the use of J or T fuses at 480V.
Note: Ground fault applications for 800 and 1200A switches require a shunt trip.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 043

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
21.3-1
Distribution Layout GuideCircuit Breakers
i ii
A Zone 225A FD Family (T win Only) 250A JD Family OR 400A KD Family OR 6001200A LD, MDL, ND Families
1 2 3 4
Zone A
25X
50X Zone B 16X B Zone Limited Due to Cross Bus B Zone 6001200A LD, MDL, ND Families
5 6
Zone C 9X
C Zone 225A FD Family (T win Only) 250A JD Family OR 400A KD Family OR 6001200A LD, MDL, ND Families X Space Determines Amount of Breakers Allowed in Zone Frame Types can be Mixed within Zones Specified
7 8 9 10 11
LOAD
LINE
4X
2P OR 3P
FD, HFD, FDC (225A Twin Only) JD, HJD, JDC (Twin and Single)
12 13 14
5X
2P OR 3P
LOAD
LINE
KD, HKD, KDC 400A (Twin and Single) Zero Sequence Ground Fault Compartmentalized
8X (OPTIM)
2P OR 3P
LOAD
LINE
7X
LD, HLD, LDC, LCL, LA-P, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND, NDC, NB-P 6001200A (Single Only)
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 21.3-1. Individually Compartmentalized Feeder Layout 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Section 50X Structure Only (4000A Maximum)

Unused bus space to be located in Zone A when possible. For breakers with OPTIM trip units, the compartment height is 8X.
CA08104001E

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
September 2011
Sheet 21 044
i ii
A Zone 1001200A Fusible Switch
1 2
Zone A
25X
3 4
50X Zone B B Zone Limited Due to Cross Bus 16X B Zone 4001200A Fusible Switch
5 6 7 8 9 10
6X 5X
Zone C 9X
C Zone 100200A Fusible Switch
X Space Determines Amount of Switches Allowed in Zone Switch Types can be Mixed within Zones Specified
100A Branch
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc Fusible Switch
200A Branch
11
12 13
9X
400A Branch
240V, 600V Fusible Switch
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
11X
600/800A Branch
240V, 600V Fusible Switch 1200A Branch
15X
Figure 21.3-2. Individually Compartmentalized Feeder Layout 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Section 50X Structure Only (4000A Maximum)
Unused bus space to be located in Zone A when possible.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 045

Outdoor Enclosures
21.4-1
Non-Walk-in with Flat Roof

17.37 (441.2) 1.25 (31.8)
i
4.5 (114.3)
ii 1
2.15 (54.6)
2
2.13 (54.0) 5.00 (127.0)

3
20.00 (508.0)
4 5 6
22.00 (558.8) 90.7 (2303.8) 44.00 (1117.6)
7 8
A to Floor
9 10
Structure Width
20.00 (508.0) Transition Structure Width
12.81 (325.4)
Switchboard Structure Depth Enclosure Depth
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 21.4-1 Front-AccessNon-Walk-In with Flat RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)

Standard busway entry/exit location, 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) deep minimum. 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure only.
Table 21.4-1. Switchboard DepthsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Switchboard Indoor Structure Depth 24 (609.6)not available for transformer connection 30 (762.0)not available for transformer connection 36 (914.4)not available for transformer connection 48 (1219.2)minimum for transformer connection Non-Walk-in Enclosure Depth 37 (939.8) 43 (1092.2) 49 (1244.6) 61 (1549.4)
Table 21.4-2. Transformer Throat LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)

Transformer 02500 kVA 25015000 kVA Dimension A 55 (1397.0) 61 (1549.4)
21

Outdoor Enclosures
September 2011
Sheet 21 046
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Non-Walk-in with Sloped Roof

4.50 (114.3)
2.25 (57.2)
2.13 (54.0) 20.00 (508.0) 92.95 (2360.8)
5.00 (127.0)
22.00 (558.8)
44.00 (1117.6) A to Floor
0.13 (3.2) End Trim
Structure Width
20.00 (508.0) Transition Structure Width
0.13 (3.2) End Trim
12.81 (325.4)
Switchboard Structure Depth Enclosure Depth
Figure 21.4-2. Front-AccessNon-Walk-In with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure minimum.
Table 21.4-3. Switchboard DepthsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Switchboard Indoor Structure Depth 24 (609.6)not available for transformer connection 30 (762.0)not available for transformer connection 36 (914.4)not available for transformer connection 48 (1219.2)minimum for transformer connection 54 (1371.6) 66 (1676.4) Non-Walk-in Enclosure Depth 37 (939.8) 43 (1092.2) 49 (1244.6) 61 (1549.4) 67 (1701.8) 79 (2006.6)
Table 21.4-4. Transformer Throat LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)

Transformer 02500 kVA 25015000 kVA Dimension A 55 (1397.0) 61 (1549.4)
September 2011
Sheet 21 047
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Metal-Enclosed DrawoutMagnum SB

General Description
21.5-1
Drawout Magnum SB Switchboard

Eatons drawout Magnum SB switchboard has been designed for the power user that desires the congurations and features of low voltage switchgear, but does not require the full selectivity and robustness that low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear provides. The drawout Magnum SB switchboard is designed and built using many of the same techniques and parts of the Magnum DS switchgear platform. The design has been optimized for the differences between the UL 891 standard and the more rigorous UL 1558 standard. Refer to Tab 20, Section 20.1 Magnum DS switchgear structure features, ratings and layout guides. Differences in these ratings are covered on the following pages. Magnum SB is a low voltage insulatedcase circuit breaker family designed for the performance and economic requirements of UL 891 switchboards. Magnum SB insulated-case circuit breakers have interruption ratings up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 6000A Magnum SB insulated-case circuit breakers have lighter-duty short time withstand ratings and xed internal instantaneous trips on most ratings, which is characteristic of UL 489 molded-case breakers commonly used in UL 891 switchboards. This provides for greater economy and excellent coordination and selectivity for most commercial applications Fixed internal instantaneous trips on all SB insulated-case circuit breakers rated 3200A and below will provide an extra safety factor by reducing the energy let-through to downstream circuits at the maximum instantaneous trip point and facilitate feeder circuit breaker protection in UL 891 switchboards with 3-cycle bus bracing Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breakers have 150 kA interrupting ratings at 480 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A. The short-time withstand rating is 30 kA for standard frame and 50 kA for double frame breakers
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Magnum SB Switchboard
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Magnum SB breakers meet or exceed the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA standards, including:
Drawout Magnum SB switchboards conform to the following standards: CSA UL Standard 891 American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Built in an ISO certied facility
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) ANSI C37.16 (preferred ratings, related requirements and application recommendations for low voltage power circuit breakers and AC power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.17 (trip devices for AC and general purpose DC low voltage power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.50 (test procedures for low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) UL 1066 (standard for low voltage AC and DC power circuit breakers used in enclosures)
Maximum ratings for Magnum SB switchboards are 600 Vac, 10,000A continuous cross bus and 200 kA short-circuit capacity.
CA08104001E
21.5-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Metal-Enclosed DrawoutMagnum SB

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 21 048
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Magnum SB Switchboard Class UL 1066 Insulated-Case
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated for Switchboard Applications
Table 21.5-1. Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Frame Breaker Type Frame Amperes Catalog Type Position 16 800 SBN-508 SBN-608 SBN-C08 SBS-608 SBS-C08 SBS-E08 1200 SBN-512 SBN-612 SBN-C12 SBS-612 SBS-C12 SBS-E12 1600 SBN-516 SBN-616 SBN-C16 SBS-616 SBS-C16 SBS-E16 2000 SBN-620 SBN-C20 SBS-620 SBS-C20 SBS-E20 2500 SBS-625 SBS-C25 SBS-E25 3000 SBS-630 SBS-C30 SBS-E30 4000 SBS-840 SBS-C40 SBS-E40 SBS-850 SBS-C50 SBS-E50 SBS-C60 Narrow Narrow Narrow rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting at 254 Vac 50 65 100 Interrupting Interrupting Short-Time at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating 50 65 100 65 100 150 50 65 100 65 100 150 50 65 100 65 100 150 65 100 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 100 35 42 65 65 85

20 20 20 20 20 30 25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35 35 30 45 45 50 50 50 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 100
18 x In

Standard 65 Standard 100 Standard 200 Narrow Narrow Narrow 50 65 100
30

35 42 65 65 85
18 x In
30
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200
35 42 65 65 85
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600
18 x In

Standard 65 Standard 100 Standard 200 Narrow Narrow 65 100
30
65 65 65 85
18 x In

200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
Standard 65 Standard 100 Standard 200 Standard 65 Standard 100 Double 200 Standard 65 Standard 100 Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 100
30

14 15 16 17
6000
65 85
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
50

65 85
50 50 50

85 100
5000
85 100
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
100
3000, 4000, 5000, 6000 Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts. Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
18 19 20 21
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published shorttime withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices.
The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at approximately 18 x In symmetrical will be phased into the product. Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
Note: Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 049

Layout Guide
21.5-3
Layout GuideDrawout Magnum SB Rear-Access Switchboard

Rear-Connected Switchgear Breaker Type Ampacity Available <=100 kAIC Narrow (SBN) 8002000 SBN5SBN6SBNC8002000 SBS6SBSC25003000 SBS6SBSC40005000 SBS8SBSC6000 SBSC 150 kAIC Structure WidthsAllowable Breaker PlacementsInches (mm) 18 (457.2) FeederA, B, C, D TieB MainB, C, D 22 (558.8) FeederA, B, C, D MainB, C, D TieB, C FeederA, B, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D FeederB, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D 30 (762.0) 44 (117.6) FeederA, B, C, D, E, F, G, H
i ii 1 2
FeederA, B, C, D TieB or C MainB, C, D Feeder B, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D FeederA, B, C, D, E, F, G, H Feedercontact Eaton
Standard (SBS)
8001600 SBSE 2000 SBSE
3 4 5 6 7
Standard (SBS)
Double (SBS)
32004000 SBSE 5000 SBSE
FeederB/F or C/G or D/H TieB/F, C/G MainB/F, C/G, D/H FeederBC/FG or CD/GH TieBC/FG, CD/GH MainBC/FG, CD/GH All positions
Double w/ Fans (SBS)
All positions
All positions
All positions
8 9 10
11
D 18 D 22 D 30 D 44 H
12 13
Metering Main SBS-630 3000A SPD
Feeder SBN-608 800A
Feeder SBN-608 Metering 800A Main SBS-630 3000A SPD
Metering A/E
SPD
Feeder SBS-608 800A
Feeder SBS-608 800A
Metering
SPD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Feeder Feeder Tie SBN-608 SBS-630 SBN-608 800A 800A 3000A Feeder Feeder Feeder SBN-608 SBN-608 SBN-608 800A 800A 800A
B/F
Main MBS-840 4000A Feeder Feeder SBS-608 SBS-608 800A 800A Feeder SBS-616 1600A Feeder SBS-616 1600A 44
Tie MBS-840 4000A Feeder SBS-608 800A Feeder SBS-616 1600A Feeder SBS-608 800A Feeder SBS-616 1600A 44
Main SBS-840 4000A Feeder SBS-608 800A Feeder SBS-608 800A
C/G
Feeder SBN-608 800A 22
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder SBN-608 SBN-608 SBN-608 SBN-608 800A 800A 800A 800A 18 22 18 22
D/H
Feeder Feeder SBS-616 SBS-616 1600A 1600A 44
Using Narrow and Standard Breakers
Using Standard and Double Breakers
Figure 21.5-2. Main-Tie-Main Typical Layouts
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 21 050
i ii 1 2
Layout GuideDrawout Magnum SB Front-Access Switchboard

Front-Connected Switchgear Breaker Type Ampacity Available <=100 kAIC 8002000 SBN5SBN6SBNC8003000 SBS6SBSC40005000 SBS8SBSC6000 SBSC Structure WidthsInches (mm) 18 + X (457.2 + X) FeederA, B, C, D TieB MainB, C, D 22 + X (558.8 + X) FeederA, B, C, D TieB, C MainB, C, D FeederB TieB MainB 44 + X (1117.6 + X)
Narrow (SBN)
Standard (SBS)
3
Double (SBS)
4 5 6 7
FeederB/F TieB/F MainB/F FeederBC/EF TieBC/EF Main BC/EF All positions
Double w/ Fans (SBS)
All positions
All positions
E Note: 18" Breaker Sections: Cable Compartment can ONLY be on the right. 22" and 44" Breaker Sections: Cable Compartment can be on the right or left.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
6 kA Main Breaker Main Breaker Main Breaker 5 kA Cable Compartment Bottom Entry Cable Compartment Top Entry Cable Compartment Top Entry Cable Compartment Top Entry Instrument or SPD Main Breaker D D D H B Cable Compartment B Cable Compartment B F Cable Compartment
G Shipping splits are not allowed between 18" Breaker structure and its cable compartment. Shipping splits must be adjacent to a cable compartment. "x"
18
"x"
22
"x"
44
Instrument or SPD
Blank
Main Breaker 5 kA
Fans
Instrument or SPD 44 (1117.6) 22 (558.8)
Instrument or SPD
Blank
44 (1117.6)
22 (558.8)
44 (1117.6)
Figure 21.5-4. Front-Access Main Sections
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 051

Layout Guide
21.5-5
Cable Compartment
Main SBS-630 3000A
Metering Feeder SBN-608 800A Tie Cable Feeder SBN-608 Compart- SBS-630 3000A ment 800A Feeder SBN-608 800A Feeder SBN-608 800A 18
Feeder SBN-608 800A Feeder Cable SBN-608 Compart800A ment Feeder SBN-608 800A Feeder SBN-608 800A 18
i
Main SBS-630 3000A Cable Compartment
ii 1 2
22
22
18
22
22
22
3 4 5
Figure 21.5-5. Standard and Narrow BreakersTypical Main-Tie-Main Layout
Magnum SB Rear-Accessible Switchboard with NRX Feeders

Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200 Blank or Instrument Feeder 800 Feeder 800 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
6
E
A Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
E Main 800 1600 2000 3000 F Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
A Main 800 1600 2000 3000 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
E Feeder 1200
A Feeder 1200
7
F
B Feeder 1200
B Tie 800 1600 2000 3000 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
8 9
C Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
G Feeder 1200
C Feeder 1200
G Feeder 1200 H
C Feeder 1200
10 11 12 13
14 15 16
B Main 800 1600 2000 3000 C Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200 Feeder 1200
C Feeder 1200
17 18 19
Figure 21.5-6. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum SB Mains and Ties, and Series NRX Feeder Breakers Dimensions in Inches (mm)
20 21
CA08104001E

Layout Guide
September 2011
Sheet 21 052
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Layout GuideMagnum SB Front-Accessible Switchboard with NRX Feeders

24. 30. 7 44.00 ( 17.6) 7 0 0 7 44.0 11 7.6) 7
24.00 (609.6) Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 A E Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 B F Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 C G Feeder NRX 1200 1200 D H
24.00 (609.6) Instr. A Instr. E
Cable Compartment
Main 800 1600 2000 3000 B F Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 C G Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 D H
Cable Compartment
Arrangement 1 24. 24.00 (609.6) Feeder eeder 1200 1200 A E Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 B F Tie 800 1600 2000 3000 C G Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 D H Arrangement 3 44.0 17.6) 7 24.00 (609.6) Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 A E Tie 800 1600 2000 3000 B F Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 C G Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 D H Arrangement 4 24. 44.0 7 7.6)
Arrangement 2 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) Instr. A Instr. E 44.0 11 7.6) 7
Cable Compartment
Cable Compartment
Main 800 1600 2000 3000 B F Feeder 800 1600 2000 3000 C G Feeder Feeder 1200 1200 D H
Cable Compartment
Arrangement 5
Figure 21.5-7. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsSeries NRX and Magnum SB Breakers
48.00 (1219.2) 24.00 24.00 (609.6) (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
30.00 (762.0)
24.00 (609.6)
68.00 (1727.2)
44.00 (1117.6) 20.00 (508.0)
Bus 40.20 (1021.1) Breakers
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Breakers
Cable Conduit Area 26.50 (673.1) Front
Breakers
17.50 (444.5)
Figure 21.5-8. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)Front-Access Structures
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 053

21.5-7
Table 21.5-4. Magnum SB Breaker WeightsLbs (kg)

Breaker SBN-800 SBN-1600 SBN-2000 SBS-800 SBS-1600 SBS-2000 SBSE-800 SBSE-1600 SBSE-2000 SBS-2500, SBS-3000 SBS-4000 SBS-5000 SBS-6000 SBSE-3000 SBSE-4000 SBSE-5000 Drawout 110 (50)
i ii
145 (66)
1
190 (86)
2
175 (80) 310 (141)
3 4
96.00 (2438.4) See Section 21.1 Figure 21.1-9 for MCCB Circuit Breaker Layout Information.
340 (154)
Note: Manually or electrically operated. For approximate impact weight, add 50% of breaker weight.
5 6 7 8 9 10
50.00 38.00 or (1270.0) (965.2)
11 12 13
Figure 21.5-9. Group-Mounted Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Switchboard
When a top-of-gear breaker lifter is used, height is 99.00 inches (2514.6 mm) total.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: Structures using molded-case breakers for distribution will be UL 891 rated with 30-cycle bus bracing.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 21 054
i ii
Layout
44-Inch
3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.38 (35.1) Power Conduit Area
3.00 (76.2)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4) 6.00 (152.4)
3.00 (76.2) 1.38 (35.1) 1.50 (38.1) A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
W
CC 12.00 (304.8) 1.50 (38.1)

3.00 (76.2) 1.03 (26.2)
1.50 (38.1) A 3.00 (76.2)
CC
1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)
Power Conduit Area
6.00(152.4) 3.00 (76.2)
3.60 (91.4)
21.50 (546.1)
0.65 (16.5) 3.50 (88.9)
Top Control D Conduit Area 31.18 (792.0) 3.60 (91.4) 3.38 3.50 (85.9) (88.9)
3.60 (91.4)
D Top Control Conduit Area 3.60 (91.4) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.03 (26.2) 0.65 ( 16.5) 4.25 (108.0) 3.60 (94.4) 31.18 (792.0) 21.50 (546.1)
3.00 (76.2) 1.03 (26.2) 0.65 ( 16.5) 3.50 (88.9)
Top Control Conduit Area 3.60 (91.4) 3.50 (88.9) Bottom Control Conduit Area Front
21.50 (546.1)
5.38 (136.7) FC 3.00 (76.2)
Bottom Control Conduit Area Front W
Provision for 0.50 (12.7) Hardware

3.00 (76.2)
5.38 (136.7) FC 3.00 (76.2)
Bottom Control Conduit Area Front 16.00 16.00 (406.4) (406.4) 44.00 (1117.6)
8.38 Provisions for 0.50 (12.7) (212.9) Hardware 3.00 (76.2)
4.63 (117.6) FC
Ref: 4A37896
Figure 21.5-10. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)18.00, 22.00, 30.00, 44.00-Inch (457.2, 558.8, 762.0, 1117.6 mm) Wide Rear-Access Structures
This dimension is reduced by 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) when vertical section is close coupled to a dry-type transformer due to secondary bus connections.
12 13 14 15
0.65 (16.5) 3.50 (88.9) 5.42 (138.0)
2.75 (70.0)
Control Conduit Areas
18.73 (475.7) 40.20 (1021.0) 17.52 (445.0)
CC
Figure 21.5-11. Front- Access Structures
16 17 18 19 20 21
September 2011
Sheet 21 055

Layout Dimensions
21.5-9
Table 21.5-5. Rear-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W D A CC Recommended Number 3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 18.00 (457.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 9.08 (230.6) 15.08 (383.0) 21.08 (535.4) 27.08 (687.8) 33.08 (840.2) 39.08 (992.6) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 7.30 (185.4) 13.30 (337.8) 19.30 (490.2) 25.30 (642.6) 31.30 (795.0) 37.30 (947.4) 43.30 (1099.8) 2 4 6 8 12 14 16 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 5 9 12 15 18 21 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm) 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 5 8 12 15 18 21 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 8 16 24 32 40 48 56
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
Table 21.5-6. Front-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

W CC Recommended Number 3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 13.89 (352.8) 17.89 454.4) 25.89 (657.6) 39.89 (1013.2) 6 8 11 16 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm) 6 8 11 16
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 21 056
i ii
LayoutOutdoor Walk-in Switchboard

17.13 (435.1) 2.50 (63.5) 4.00 (101.6) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 45.66 (1159.8) 5.03 (127.8) 2.00 (684.3) Opening 3.50 x 3.50 (88.9 x 88.9) 25.31 (642.9) (1039.9) Opening Bottom Conduit Space 3.93 (99.8) 48.87 (1241.3) Control Wire Opening 3.50 x 3.50 (88.9 x 88.9) 44.00 (1117.6) Unit 30.00 (762.0) Unit Roof Rear of Base 18.44 (468.4) 16.81 (427.0 A B C L C A L 0.95 (24.1) Structure Width Structure Width C B Rear of Inner Structure 0.95 (24.1) 25.52 (648.2) 109.03 (2769.4) to Floor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3.06 (77.7)
3.06 (77.7)
Section B-B
B C 9.00 (228.6) 11.00 (279.4) 15.00 (381.0) 19.00 (482.6) 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0)
Bus Duct Chimney & Cover 22.00 0.95 (24.1)
Top View
3.06 (77.7) Opening Lifting Angle Foundation Tie Down (for Seismic Only) 1.50 (38.1)
Unit
0.95 (24.1)

O.S. of Outdoor End Sheet Transformer Flange
Floor Plan
119.98 (3047.5) Overall Depth 18.44 Bus Opening (From Base) (468.4) 0.61 (15.5) 28.59 (From Base) C L 5.75 (146.1) C L 33.45 (849.6) (Door Width) 43.38 (1101.9) (Aisle Width) 30.21 (767.3) (Opening Width) 5.75 (146.1) 111.48 (2831.6) Overall Height (784.6) C L Throat Opening & TXF Switchgear Throat
18.00 13.35 (457.2) (339.1) 17.35 22.00 (558.8) (440.7) 30.00 25.35 (762.0) (644.0) 38.00 33.35 (965.2) (847.1) 39.35 44.00 (1117.6) (999.5) 50.00 45.35 (1270.0) (1151.9)
18" Width = 17.4 to Rear Frame (441.9) 22" Width = 21.4 to Rear Frame (543.6) 38" Width = 37.4 to Rear Frame (950.0) 55" Width = 54.4 to Rear Frame (1381.8)
See Figure 1 Above for Bus Duct Orientation 3.89 (98.8) 109.03 (2769.4) 105.06 (2668.5) 51.23 (1301.2) 2.00 (50.8)
2.30
Outdoor Roof Sheet
36.00 (914.4) 22.00
14.00 (355.6)
C L 72.00 (1828.8) Switchgear Depth C L See Figure 1 Front of Outdoor Base Door Swing 42.00 (1066.8) (Clear Width) 33.45 (849.6)
4.00 (101.6)
Door Swing 33.45 (849.6)
26.00 (660.4) 117.08 (2973.8) (Base)
39.66 (1007.4)
Side View
Top View Weights of Outdoor Structures (without breakers) Structure End Trims One set per lineup) 18.00-inch (457.2) wide breaker structure 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide breaker structure 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide breaker structure 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 38.00-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 50.00-inch (1270.0 mm) wide utility structure Transformer throat Weight Lbs (kg) 1500 (681) 2500 (1135) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 5200 (2361) 2300 (1044) 2300 (1044) 2700 (1226) 3200 (1453) 150 (68)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

45.00 (1143.0)
41.38 (1051.1)
8.00 (203.2)
15.50 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8)
44.00 30.00 (762.0) Unit Widths (Overall Shipping Width) 5.00 (127.0)
Front View
Figure 21.5-12. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box). 18.70 (475.0) = 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide transition box. 0.75-inch (19.1 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 057

Layout Dimensions
21.5-11
LayoutOutdoor Non-Walk-in Switchboard

17.13 (435.1) 2.50 (63.5) 3.06 (77.7) 4.00 (101.6) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 2.00 (50.8) 30.00 (762.0) Unit 17.83 (452.9) 44.00 (1117.6) Unit Roof Rear of Base 18.44 (468.4) 16.85 (428.0 A B C L C A L 0.95 (24.1) Structure Width Structure Width C B Rear of Inner Structure 0.95 (24.1) 25.52 (648.2) 109.03 (2769.4) to Floor
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C L 72.00 (1828.8) Switchgear Depth C L See Figure 1 7.51 (190.8) Work Space
(684.3)
Control Wire Opening 3.50 x 3.50 (88.9 x 88.9) 25.44 (646.2)
3.06 (77.7) 40.94 (1039.9) Opening
Section B-B
B C
Bottom Conduit Space
3.93 (99.8)
Bus Duct Chimney & Cover 22.00 Unit 1.50 (38.1) 0.95 (24.1)
Top View
18.00 13.35 9.00 (457.2) (339.1) (228.6)

0.95 (24.1) 22.00 17.35 (558.8) (440.7) 30.00 25.35 (762.0) (644.0) 38.00 33.35 (965.2) (847.1) 44.00 39.35 (1117.6) (999.5) 50.00 45.35 (1270.0) (1151.9) 11.00 (279.4) 15.00 (381.0) 19.00 (482.6) 22.00 (558.8) 25.00 (635.0)
3.06 (77.7)
18.94 Opening
Lifting Angle Foundation Tie Down (for Seismic Only)
Floor Plan
See Figure 1 Above for
88.02 (2235.7) Overall Depth 18.44 Bus Opening (From Base) (468.4)
O.S. of Outdoor End Sheet Transformer Flange Outdoor Roof Sheet 36.00 (914.4) (558.8) 30.23 26.97 (767.8) (685.0) C L Throat Opening & TXF Switchgear Throat (Shipped Disassembled)
22" Width = 21.4 to Rear Frame (543.6) 30" Width = 29.4 to Rear Frame (746.8) 50" Width = 49.4 to Rear Frame (1254.8)
Indoor Gear 1.60 (355.6) 20.10 1.65
Rear of Base A Outdoor Base
3.89 (98.8) 28.58 109.05 (2769.9) 105.08 (2669.0) 51.23 (1301.2) 2.00 (50.8) 26.00 (660.4) 86.04 (2185.4) (Base) C L C L 109.79 (2788.7) Overall Height
10 11 12
4.00 (101.6)
Side View
Top View Weights of Outdoor Structures (without breakers) Structure End Trims One set per lineup) 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) wide breaker structure 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide breaker structure 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide breaker structure 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 38.00-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 50.00-inch (1270.0 mm) wide utility structure Transformer throat Weight Lbs (kg) 1500 (681) 2400 (1090) 2600 (1180) 2700 (1226) 5200 (2361) 2300 (1044) 2300 (1044) 2700 (1226) 3200 (1453) 150 (68)
13 14 15 16 17 18
45.00 (1143.0)
41.38 (1051.1)
8.00 (203.2)
15.50 22.00 (558.8) 22.00 (558.8)
44.00 30.00 (762.0) Unit Widths (Overall Shipping Width)
19
Front View
Figure 21.5-13. Outdoor Non-Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.75-inch (19.1 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations. 18.70 (475.0) = 4.004-inch (1117.6 mm) wide transition box. Note: 46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 058
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 059
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Integrated Facility System Switchboards

General Description
21.6-1
Integrated Facility System Switchboards
Standards
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and UL 891 Used with Type 1 Pow-R-Line C switchboard sections Select main, branch feeder, customer and utility metering from Section 21.1 Factory wired panelboards and dry-type distribution transformers meet NEMA Standard PB-2, UL 891 and the National Electrical Code
Integrated Facility System Switchboard Sections and Selection

From the following pages select the appropriate section Type Select from panelboards, blank steel backpans and dry-type distribution transformers by cell Layout IFS sections near standard distribution sections Indicate on drawings and one-line diagrams the connections from feeder devices to the appropriate cell
i ii 1 2 3 4
Integrated Facility System Switchboards
General Description
Eatons Integrated Facility System Switchboard product is a simple concept. This technology integrates standard panelboards, dry-type distribution transformers, contactors and other electrical equipment into free-standing, front-access switchboards.
Panel L1
Panel L2 Main Switchboard
5 6 7
Transformer
Integrated Facility System Switchboard Benets

Telephone
Panel P3
Panel P2
Panel P1
8 9 10
Space savings up to 50% or more Factory wired and pre-tested Assembled and ready to install Signicantly reduces installation time and materials Signicantly reduces materials associated with panel installation Frees up additional space at no charge to the owner Installed cost is typically less than with traditional products Sustainability and LEED compliant Automatic transfer switches UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supplies) SPD (surge protective devices) HVAC control Lighting control Power factor correction Metering Generator Quick Connect Customer metering Lighting power reduction products
Figure 21.6-1. Traditional Electrical RoomPlan View
IFS Switchboard Integrated Facility System Switchboard Solution
11 12 13
Available Options
Telephone
14 15 16
Figure 21.6-2. IFS Electrical RoomPlan View
Main RD Utility Breaker Metering Customer Section Metering, SPD
P1 Feeder Breaker Section P2
P3
L1
17 18 19 20 21
Dry-Type Dist. X-Former
L2
Figure 21.6-3. Optimized IFS LayoutFront View
CA08104001E
21.6-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Integrated Facility System Switchboards

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 21 060
i ii
Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section Layout

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to panelboards. Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IFS Type 1 Section
W D W D
IFS Type 1 Section IFS Type 2 Section
Panelboard Cell A Panelboard Cell C
3.00 (76.2) 3.00 D (76.2) 90.00 (2286.0)

Panelboard Cell B
3.00 (76.2)
Conduit Area
12.00 (304.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
Floor Plan Type 1 and 2 Sections
Figure 21.6-4. Type 1 and 2 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-1. IFS Type 1 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Maximum Main Device Voltage Catalog Rating AC Type Section Maximum Main Rating Amperes Width Dimensions (W) Depth Dimensions (D) Section Branch Allowable Circuits Panelboard Standard Optional Standard Optional Height Ampere Modications Range 15100
10 11 12 13
A or B
Pow-R-Line 1a
27
240
MLO 400 Breaker 225
26 (660.4) 20 (508.0)
30 (762.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27
480Y/277
MLO 400 Breaker 225
15100
26 (660.4) 20 (508.0)
18 (457.2)
Pow-R-Command 28
240 480Y/277
MLO
225
15100
26 (660.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Pow-R-line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details. 42 branch circuits maximum. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD). If panel sizing main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for structure dimensions. Optional hinged panelboard door available on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide structures.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 061

Layout Dimensions
21.6-3
Table 21.6-1. IFS Type 2 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Maximum Main Device Voltage Catalog Rating AC Type Section Maximum Main Rating Amperes Width Dimensions (W) Depth Dimensions (D) Section Branch Allowable Circuits Panelboard Standard Optional Standard Optional Height Ampere Modications Range 15100
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
IFS Type 2 Section

C Pow-R-Line 1a
27
240
Breaker 400
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27
480Y/277
Breaker 400
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
Pow-R-Command 28
480Y/277
MLO 400 Breaker 225 MLO 600 Breaker 600 MLO 800
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
Pow-R-Line 3a
27
480Y/277
15225
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
15225
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details. 42 branch circuits maximum. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service equipment label and surge protective device (SPD). If panel sizing with non-interchange main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for cell height.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 21 062
i ii

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard and transformer integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent sections. Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
W
1 2
Cell D D 3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
Conduit Area
12.00 (304.8)
3
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
Cell F

W 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
4
Cell E
5 6 7 8 9
IFS Type 3 Section
D W W D
3.00 (76.2)
Conduit Area
3.00 (76.2)
IFS Type 3 Section
IFS Type 4 Section
Floor Plan Type 4 Sections with Blank Steel Backpan Only
Figure 21.6-5. Type 3 and 4 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-2. IFS Type 3 and 4 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Maximum Main Device Voltage Catalog Rating AC Type Section Maximum Main Rating Amperes 400 Width Dimensions (W) Branch Allowable Circuits Panelboard Standard Optional Ampere Modications Range 15100
Depth Dimensions (D) Standard Optional
Section Height
10 11 12 13
D or E
Pow-R-Line 1a
27
240
MLO
26 (660.4) 20 (508.0)
30 (762.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
Breaker 225 27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100
13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
26 (660.4) 20 (508.0)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 None
Blank Steel Backpan
20 (508.0)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
IFS Type 4 Section
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Blank Steel Backpan
None
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 3E panelboard available. Contact Eaton for details. 42 branch circuits maximum. Possible uses: HVAC, dimming and contactors. Contact Eaton for details. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service equipment label and surge protective device (SPD). If panel sizing is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for cell height. Optional hinged panelboard door available on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide structures. Galvanized steel backpan provided for customer specied equipment. Contact Eaton for requirements and details.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 063

Layout Dimensions
21.6-5

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard and transformer integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent sections. Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
i ii 1
Cell I Cell G 3.00 (76.2)
W 3.00 (76.2)
2
3.00 (76.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
3.00 (76.2)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Cell H
D W W
IFS Type 5 Section
IFS Type 6 Section
Floor Plan Type 5 Section with Blank Space in Cell H No Bottom Entry Conduit Space with Transformer in Cell H or I (Type 5 or 6)
Figure 21.6-6. Type 5 and 6 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-3. IFS Type 5 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Maximum Main Device Voltage Catalog Rating AC Type Section Maximum Main Rating Amperes 400 225 400 225 225 Width Dimensions (W) Depth Dimensions (D) Section Branch Allowable Circuits Panelboard Standard Optional Standard Optional Height Ampere Modications Range 15100 15100 15100

IFS Type 5 Section

G Pow-R-Line 1a

27 27 28
240 480Y/277 240, 480Y/277
Pow-R-Line 2a Blank Steel Backpan Pow-RCommand
MLO Breaker MLO Breaker None MLO
26 (660.4) 26 (660.4) 26 (660.4) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 3E panelboard available. Contact Eaton for details. 42 branch circuits maximum. Galvanized steel backpan provided for customer specied equipment. Contact Eaton for requirements and details. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, hinged panelboard door on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide sections, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD).
Note: Select one Panelboard Type or one Blank Steel Backpan and either one Transformer or one Blank Space per Cell.
Table 21.6-4. IFS Type 5 and 6 General Purpose Dry-Type Distribution TransformersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Temper- Windings ature Catalog Rise Section kVA Range Full Cap Taps FCAN 42.5% 42.5% 42.5% 42.5% FCBN 22.5% 22.5% 22.5% 22.5%

Allowable Width Modications Dimensions (W) Standard 26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 26 (660.4) Optional
Section Height
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
IFS Type 5 Section

19 H DT-3 Transformer
150C Only
TP1, 480: 208Y/ 120 Vac Blank Steel Backpan
Aluminum 1545 75 112.5 150 None
30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 90 (2286.0) 36 (914.4) N/A N/A 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0) N/A 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 90 (2286.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) N/A 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
IFS Type 6 Section

I 19 DT-3 Transformer TP1, 480: 208Y/ 120 Vac 150C Aluminum 225 300 42.5% 42.5% 22.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) N/A 45 (1143.0) N/A
Copper windings, 115C, 80C, K-Factor, low sound are available options but may change dimensions. Either one F-Frame or K-Frame circuit breaker can be included in any transformer section to be used as a disconnect. Galvanized steel backpan provided for customer specied equipment. Contact Eaton for requirements and details. Contact Eaton for other Temperature Rise Transformers and Specials.
Note: 480:208Y/120 Vac three-phase or 480:120/240 Vac single-phase.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 21 064
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to Panelboard Cell J. Distribution Chassis in Cell K may be eld wired or wired from an adjacent section. Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
W 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
Cell J
22X Distribution Chassis Cell K 90.00 (2286.0) 286.0
3.00 (76.2) Conduit Area
12.00 (304.8)
90.00 (2286.0) 286.0
22X Distribution Chassis Cell K
Cell J
D W W
IFS Type 7 Section
IFS Type 8 Section
Figure 21.6-7. Type 7 and 8 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-5. IFS Type 7 and 8 Sections Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Maximum Main Catalog Voltage Device Section Rating AC Type Maximum Main Rating Amperes 400 Branch Allowable Width Dimensions (W) Circuits Panelboard Standard Optional Ampere Modications Range 15100
Section Height
IFS Types 7 and 8 Sections

J Pow-R-Line 1a 27
240
MLO
26 (660.4)
Breaker 225
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
480Y/277
MLO
400
15100
26 (660.4)
Breaker 225
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-RCommand
28
240, 480Y/277
MLO
225
15100
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
15 16 17 18

Pow-R-Line C Switchboard Chassis
480Y/277
MLO
800
15600
26 (660.4)
Breaker 600
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
MLO or 1200 Breaker
15600
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
19 20 21
42 branch circuits maximum. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged panelboard door on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide sections, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD). If panel sizing main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton to see if it will t. Reference Page 21.1-11 for selection criteria. Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 065

Layout Dimensions
21.6-7

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s). Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
i ii
1 2 3
Cell L
Cell L
Floor Plan Type 9 Section There is no Bottom Entry Conduit Space with Transformer in Cell M Cell M
4 5 6
IFS Type 9 Section
7 8 9 10
Figure 21.6-8. Type 9 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-6. IFS Type 9 Section Panelboard Over Dry-Type Transformer (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm )
Panel Panelboard Cell Type Reference Maximum Main Catalog Voltage Device Section Rating AC Type Maximum Main Rating Amperes 225 225 225 Branch Allowable Width Dimensions (W) Circuits Panelboard Standard Optional Ampere Modications Range 15100 15100 15100
Section Height
IFS Type 9 Section

L Pow-R-Line 1a 27
240 480Y/277 240, 480Y/277
MLO MLO MLO
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 26 (660.4)
45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 18 (457.2)
Breaker 400
45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0) 90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
11 12 13 14 15
Breaker 400 27
Pow-RCommand
Pow-R-Line 3E panelboard available. Contact Eaton for details. 42 branch circuits maximum. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 100A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers.
Table 21.6-7. IFS Type 9 Section General Purpose Dry-Type Distribution TransformersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Transformer Reference Temper- Windings ature Cell Type Catalog Rise Section kVA Range Full Cap Taps FCAN FCBN Allowable Width Dimensions (W) Modications Standard Optional Depth Dimensions (D) Section Standard Optional Height
16 17 18 19 20 21
IFS Type 9 Section

M 19 DT-3 Transformer TP-1 480: 208Y/ 120 Vac 150C Only Aluminum 1575 112.5 42.5% 42.5% 22.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 90 (2286.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
Contact Eaton for other Temperature Rise Transformers and Specials. Copper windings, 115C, 80C, K-Factor, and low sound TP-1 are available options but may change dimensions.
CA08104001E

Layout Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 21 066
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to Panelboard Cell J. Distribution Chassis in Cell K may be eld wired or wired from an adjacent section. Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
W 3.00 (76.2) Cell N Cell N 3.00 (76.2)
22X Distribution Chassis Cell O 90.00 (2286.0) Cell N Cell N
12.00 (304.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
22X Distribution Chassis Cell O
D W IFS Type 10 Section W IFS Type 11 Section
Figure 21.6-9. Type 10 and 11 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-8. IFS Type 10 and 11 Sections Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Section Height
IFS Types 10 and 11 Sections

N Pow-R-Line 1a 27
240
MLO
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
18 (457.2)
Breaker 225
13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
13 14 15 16 17
480Y/277
MLO
400
15100
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225
Pow-RCommand
28
240, 480Y/277
MLO
225
15100
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line C Switchboard Chassis
480Y/277
MLO
800
15600
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 600
MLO or 1200 Breaker
15600
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2)
90 (2286.0)
18 19 20 21
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton when applicable. 42 branch circuits maximum. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged trim, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD). If panel sizing is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton to see if it will t. See Page Page 21.1-11 reference information in Tab 21.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 067

Layout Dimensions
21.6-9

Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s). Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
i ii
W 3.00 (76.2) Cell P Cell P D 3.00 (76.2)
1 2
12.00 (304.8)
3 4 5 6
Floor Plan Type 12 Section Cell P Cell P
IFS Type 12 Section
7 8 9 10
Figure 21.6-10. Type 12 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.6-9. IFS Type 12 Section Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Section Height
IFS Types 12 Section

P Pow-R-Line 1a 27
240
MLO
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
18 (457.2)
Breaker 225
13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 13 (330.2) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
11
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a 27
480Y/277
MLO
400
15100
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
18 (457.2)
Breaker 225
12
90 (2286.0)
Pow-RCommand
28
240, 480Y/277
MLO
225
15100
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Reference Section 27. Contact Eaton when applicable. 42 branch circuits maximum. Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames, Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged trim, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD). If panel sizing is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for structure dimensions. If any single-phase is selected as 400A or PRC, section minimum width is 45.00 inches (1143.0 mm).
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 068
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 069
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Generator Quick Connect Switchboard

General Description
21.7-1
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard
Product Benets
Decrease utility dependency: In power outages, especially those that are widespread, the utility company may take hours before they are available to disconnect service from a facility. By use of the Generator Quick Connect switchboard, a facility is equipped with a means that allows switching between utility feed and a generator feed, without waiting for the utility to disconnect service Decrease chance of spoilage : For those facilities that house perishable goods that require controlled environmental conditions such as refrigeration, prolonged power outages can cost hundreds of thousands of dollars in spoilage. By use of the Generator Quick Connect switchboard, a facility ensures that they can be back on sustained power before spoilage occurs, and without the necessity of calling in expensive specialty equipment. In addition to direct loss of product, the result of spoilage can have a negative affect on a facilitys insurance, which can result in additional long-term costs Decrease chance of lost revenue : Without a constant supply of electricity, a facilitys revenue generation capability grinds to a halt. By use of the Generator Quick Connect switchboard, a facilitys operations can be sustained and downtime can be reduced Decrease chance of liability : Among the risks to a facility during a power outage is the injury of patrons due to loss of lighting. By use of the Generator Quick Connect switchboard, a facilitys lighting can be sustained, allowing for the safety of patrons
Decrease chance of loss and damage: During a sustained power outage, a facility may become susceptible to loss due to theft, damage and other malicious acts. By use of the Generator Quick Connect Switchboard, a facility can better protect itself from these losses and damages. Quick and readily available connection: In facilities that are not equipped for a backup generator, connection can demand eld modication of existing switchboard structures, and/or even modication of the facilitys physical structure. By use of the Generator Quick Connect Switchboard, the time required for these connections can be greatly reduced.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Construction Specications
Eatons Generator Quick Connect switchboard is built to UL 891 listed Pow-R-Line C switchboard standards. As such, the sizing rules of standard switchboards apply, and all modications for Pow-R-Line C switchboards are available. For sizing information and available modications, consult Eaton.
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard Section
General Description
Eatons Generator Quick Connect switchboard is an engineered switchboard assembly designed to allow easy and quick connection of a standby generator to your facilitys service entrance switchboard. Through inclusion of cam-type receptacles, standard mechanical lugs, a dedicated generator service disconnect and a key interlock transfer scheme, a facility can quickly be switched to generator power. By including the Generator Quick Connect switchboard, a facility can be on backup power without waiting on the utility to disconnect service.
CA08104001E
21.7-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Generator Quick Connect Switchboard

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 21 070
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
As the Generator Quick Connect switchboard is based on the brand Pow-R-Line C switchboard, it can be applied in both new and retrot applications.
Table 21.7-1. Generator Quick Connect Dimensions and kW Ratings (Rated up to 480V)
Ampere Rating
Number of Structures
kW (Max.) Rating 80% Rated Generator Disconnect Breaker 100% Rated Generator Disconnect Breaker 480V 266 399 531 797 1063 1329 1661 1993 208V 115 173 230 345 461 576 720 864
Depth 400 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000

Signicant Components and Assemblies

The Generator Quick Connect switchboard is based on the Pow-R-Line C switchboard construction. However, as part of the larger assembly, there are several sub-assemblies that provide greater function and benet to facilities. These components are described in the following and are illustrated in the photos to the right.
Structure Width 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 & 30.00 (762.0 & 762.0) 30.00 & 30.00 (914.4 & 914.4)
Total Width 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
480V 213 319 425 638 850 1063 1329 N/A
208V 92 138 184 276 368 461 576 N/A
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0)
9 10 11
12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Generator disconnect: The generator service disconnect is a UL listed circuit breaker with a key interlock in combination with one mounted on the main service disconnect. It can include ground fault protection, shunt trips, alarms, single-phase protection and auxiliary contacts Cam-type receptacle sub-assembly: This sub-assembly is designed to work with the quick connects that are commonly found on portable generator cables. This sub-assembly additionally includes color coding to industry standards for proper and easy phase identication, assuming proper installation Permanent operation instructions : Afxed to each Generator Quick Connect switchboard is a set of simple instructions for operation. With these instructions, any generator technicians can operate the mechanisms included in the assembly Standard mechanical lugs: In addition to the cam-type receptacles, a set of standard mechanical lugs is provided with the Generator Quick Connect switchboard to allow an alternate method of connecting generator cables Bus connection sub-assembly: All connection methods described previously are connected together using only factory stamped and bent bus. Bus connection, as opposed to cable, provides a more robust and smaller construction
65 kAIC standard bus bracing. Type 3R enclosures shall be equipped with a 13.00-inch (330.2 mm) front structure extension. Calculated using the following: kW (max.) = [(V*A*1.73*PF)/1000]*(Breaker Rating) with PF (power factor) equalling 0.8. For applications above 3000A, contact Eaton.
Cam-Type Receptacle Sub-Assembly Typical (1200A) Generator Quick Connect Switchboard
Signicant Components an Assemblies (Typical)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 071
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes

General Description
21.8-1
Construction and Application Considerations

Eatons Roll-Up Generator Termination Boxes (RUGTB) are designed as an intermediate termination cabinet between a temporary, portable, roll-up generator and the facility being served by the portable generator. The RUGTB is designed for permanent installation and is secured to a concrete pad with bolts. The RUGTB includes line terminations for the temporary connection of the portable generator and permanent connections on the load side to the secondary disconnect in the facility which is interlocked with the main overcurrent device in a manner that ensures that only one, either the service main or the generator main, can be energized at any one time. The conductors and conduits must be sized and suitable for carrying the load ratings marked on the equipment per the National Electrical Code.
Enclosure
The enclosure is free-standing with feet on the bottom providing access to the cable connections for temporary roll-up generator terminations. The enclosure is made from code gauge steel and suitable for either outdoor or indoor installation (Type 3R construction). The enclosure is powder coat painted ANSI 61 grey. Each enclosure houses line and load phase and neutral connections. Access is provided at the bottom of the enclosure for both the temporary connections to the roll-up generator and permanent connections to the facilitys generator overcurrent disconnecting means. The permanent connection section at the bottom of the enclosure contains a xed mounting plate. The temporary generator connection to the RUGTB contains a cover that allows the enclosure to be sealed once the temporary connections have been removed.
The enclosure uses feet that raise the termination compartment off the nished grade by 18 inches. Enclosure feet have provisions for anchoring. Anchor bolts used to secure the RUGTB shall be encased in a concrete pad by the installer in a manner that is suitable as a permanent base for the RUGTB. A template for anchor bolt installation is available from the manufacturer. The enclosure contains a sturdy, lockable, hinged door for access to the termination compartment by qualied personnel as described in NFPA 70E and the National Electrical Code. Feeder conductor entry is provided in the bottom of the enclosure for the line side (generator). Removable bottom plate for connections to the line side (connection from the generator) is available on either the right or left side and must be specied on order. The permanent load connections (feeding generator disconnect inside the facility) may exit the enclosure either from the bottom or the back of the enclosure.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Standards and Ratings

UL 1773termination boxes 600 Vac maximum Ampere ratings: 800, 1200, 1600, 2000 and 2500 Assembly short-circuit rating: 35,000A rms symmetrical Marked Suitable for use on the line side of service equipment per UL 1773

Standard Features
Type 3R enclosure standard Line and load side mechanical alloy set screw lugs Hinged bottom trap door for line conductors 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) width [45.00 inches (1143.0 mm) wide with 2 hole compression lugs]
Optional Features
Compression lugs (line and load) 1 hole Anderson 2 hole Burndy (requires 45.00-inch (1143.0 mm) wide enclosure) Compression lug provisions line and load [0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolt, 1.75-inch (44.5 mm) spacing] Optional 45.00-inch (1143.0 mm) width
RUGTB Free-Standing Enclosure
21
21.8-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 21 072
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Technical Data
Table 21.8-1. Roll-Up Generator Termination Box Available Lugs

Ampere Rating 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 Available Line and Load Connections Select One Line and One Load by Ampacity (3) 4/0500 kcmil or (2) 3/0750 kcmil (4) 4/0500 kcmil or (3) 3/0750 kcmil (5) 4/0500 kcmil or (4) 3/0750 kcmil (6) 4/0500 kcmil or (5) 3/0750 kcmil (8) 4/0500 kcmil or (7) 3/0750 kcmil (3) 350 kcmil or (3) 400 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil or (4) 600 kcmil or (3) 750 kcmil (6) 500 kcmil or (5) 600 kcmil or (5) 750 kcmil (7) 500 kcmil or (6) 600 kcmil or (6) 750 kcmil (9) 500 kcmil or (8) 600 kcmil or (7) 750 kcmil 3provisions / phase 4provisions / phase 5provisions / phase 6provisions / phase 7provisions / phase 3provisions / phase 4provisions / phase 5provisions / phase 6provisions / phase 7provisions / phase
Al/Cu Mechanical Lugs
2 Hole Cu Only Compression Lugs Brundy OnlyFactory Installed

800 1200
1600
2000
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Figure 21.8-1. Bottom View Left Line (Generator) Connection

2500
1 Hole Compression Provisions Only (Lugs Supplied by Others)

800 1200 1600 2000 2500 800 1200 1600 2000 2500
2 Hole Compression Provisions Only (Lugs Supplied by Others)
Provisions only. Compression/crimp lugs supplied by installer.
Figure 21.8-2. Front Bus Arrangement
Note: Wire bending space provided based on the Roll-up Generator Termination Box size and number of conductors and meets requirements of UL and the National Electrical Code.
Terminations
All Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes contain a termination/lug landing for three phases and neutral suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. Mechanical box lugs are supplied standard. The number and size of mechanical box lug connectors are determined by the ampacity of the RUGTB ordered. Optional lug offering includes a compression lug pad (compression lugs supplied by others).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 073
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Multipoint Tenant Submetering

PRC7000/7500 Tenant Submetering
21.9-1
PRC7000/7500Tenant Submetering
When the need for accurate information of consumed energy for monthly invoicing statements, use Eatons Tenant Billing solution. Using Tenant Billing for Utility Allocation maximizes revenue by effectively measuring, allocating and recovering utility expenditures. The Tenant Billing solution can interface with a thirdparty utility allocation service. The Tenant Billing solution offers to:

Product Benets

i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Purchase energy at bulk rates while charging consumer rates Capitalize on naturally variable tenant loads by purchasing energy at lower coinciding load Capture and allocate common area maintenance cost Promote tenant retention with accurate and defensible billing Eliminate subsidization of other tenants
Factory-wired system Saves oor space Lower installed cost Network compatible Tenant billing Create revenueallows purchases of bulk rate energy and charge consumer rates to tenants UL listed
PRC7000Tenant Submetering
PRC7000 Tenant Submetering
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter (IQMES II)
8 9 10 11 12
General Description
Allocation of energy consumption in a residential or commercial application is a tremendous task for a property owner, management rm or electrical energy manager. To assist in allocation or direct billing of consumed energy, use Eatons PRC7000 or PRC7500 low cost solutions. The PRC7000/PRC7500 provides a cost-effective energy tabulation system for residential or commercial metering installations. These installations can include:

Factory Assembled and Wired Meters
13 14
High rise buildings Universities and campuses Ofce buildings Apartment and condominium complexes Shopping malls Airports System commissioning is required and priced separately
PRC7000CTs are Factory-Mounted and Wired to Meter (Cable Shown is Customer Installed)
15 16 17
PRC7000Tenant Submetering Using the Power-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis with Eatons Multipoint Energy Submeter II Meter and Current Sensors
18 19 20 21
Local display and network capable devices are available as optional components. See Tab 3, Section 3.1 Metering for more information.
CA08104001E
21.9-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Multipoint Tenant Submetering

September 2011
Sheet 21 074
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Quadlogic Meter
The MiniCloset-5 has a display incorporated into the meter. A shorting terminal block is provided to connect between the MiniCloset-5 and the Current Transformers. An optional component for collecting data from the MiniCloset-5 meters is the Scan Transponder-5 (mounted separately) (13.50 H x 8.50 W x 4.50 D in inches) (342.9 H x 215.9 W x 114.3 D in mm).
Factory Assembled and Wired Meters
PRC7500CTs are Factory-Mounted and Wired to Meter (Cable Shown is Customer Installed)
PRC7500Tenant Submetering Using the Power-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis with Quadlogics MiniCloset-5 Meter and Current Transformers
QLC QLC QLC Meter Meter
QLC Meter
QLC Meter
14
QLC QLC Meter
Meter
15 16 17 18
Utility Transformer Utility Master Meter M
Meter
Utility Transformer
Switch 1 Disconnect Device QLC Scan Transponder
Switch 2
Switch 3
19 20 21
Utility Service
Note: 1) There should be no more than one transformer between the Scan Transponder and the Quadlogic Meter. 2) Voltage connection wires to the Scan Transponder should be at least 12 AWG. 3) Voltage connection run between the Scan Transponder and the voltage tap should be under 20 feet (6.1m). 4) If the disconnect switch is fused, use only FAST ACTING FUSES.
Figure 21.9-1. Typical System Layout for PRC7500 with Multiple Tenant Location
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 075
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Multipoint Tenant Submetering

PRC7000/7500 Tenant Submetering
21.9-3
Layout Guide
PRC7000 Reference Table 21.1-7 for Main Lugs Only and Table 21.1-11 for Main Breakers PRC7000 Multipoint Energy Submeter II or PRC7500 Mimi-Closet 5 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Line Line 2- or 3-Pole 2- or 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Load Load PRC7500
i ii 1
15X Bucket for Meter(s) Maximum (2) MC-5 Meters EHD (100A Max.) FDB (150A Max.) FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE (225A Frame) ED, EDH, EDC, EDB, EDS (225A Frame) Trip Range (150200A) JD, HJD, JDC (250A Frame) Trip Range (100200A) JD, HJD, JDC (250A Frame) Trip Range (225250A) DK, KDB, KD (400A Frame) HKD, KDC (400A)
Bucket for Meter(s) Maximum (3) MESII Meters EHD (100A Max.) FDB (150A Max.) FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE (225A Frame) ED, EDH, EDC, EDB, EDS (225A Frame) Trip Range (150200A) JD, HJD, JDC (250A Frame) Trip Range (100125A) JD, HJD, JDC (250A Frame) Trip Range (175250A) DK, KDB, KD (400A Frame) HKD, KDC (400A)
15X
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2X 3X 4X 5X 4X 2P 5X 3P 6X 2P 8X 3P 6X 2P 8X 3P 6X 2P 8X 3P
2X 3X 4X 5X 3X 6X 2P 8X 3P 6X 2P 8X 3P 6X 2P 8X 3P
2- & 3-Pole Line
2- & 3-Pole Load Lugs
2- or 3-Pole
Figure 21.9-2. PRC7000/7500 Layout Guide for Current Sensor and Current Transformer SizingStandard Pow-R-Line C Switchboard Construction Applies
Note: For all other breaker frames and amperages, consult factory for X space sizing. Note: Consult Section 21.1 for Pow-R-Line C structure conguration.
Table 21.9-1. PRC7000 and PRC7500 Breaker Frames

Breaker Type EHD EHD FDB, FD, HFD, FDC FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE DK, KD, HKD, KDC DK, KD, HKD, KDC Amperes Poles PRC7000 X Space 100 100 150 150 225 225 400 400 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2X 3X 2X 3X 4X 5X 6X 8X PRC7500 X Space 2X 3X 4X 5X 4X 5X 6X 8X
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 076
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 077
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Commercial Metering Switchboards

General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Types WWCMS (EUSERC Only) and WCMS
21.10-1
Construction and Application Considerations

Eatons Pow-R-Line C commercial metering switchboards incorporate design concepts to t the needs for reliable multiple circuit distribution and metering in commercial applications while retaining maximum standardization, safety and convenience. Type WWCMS metering switchboards provide incoming service and tenant metering arrangements that comply with EUSERC utility requirements. Type WCMS metering switchboards meet the standard requirements for service and tenant metering arrangements for all utility locations other than EUSERC service areas. Type WCMS may be either hot or cold sequenced.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Utility Approved Termination Compartment
Enclosure
The commercial metering switchboards are made up of one or more sections bolted together to form a 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm) high, freestanding, front-access grounded enclosure. Each section uses conventional distribution switchboard construction consisting of formed vertical posts and angle cross members for a rigid selfsupporting framework to support the bussing, devices and covers. Code gauge steel covers for the rear, side and front are formed and sectionalized for easy removal and handling. Covers on all unmetered compartments are provided with sealing screws or studs. All exterior surfaces are nished inside and out with a durable powder coat ANSI 61 light gray nish over a rust resistant primer. The switchboards are available in NEMA Type 1 construction for indoor use or NEMA Type 3R for outdoor applications. Service and cross buses are supported by high-strength glass-reinforced polyester insulating supports. Splice connections between sections are easily made with bus tie links. Ground bus is provided as standard on all switchboards.
Auxiliary Structures
These are normally mounted adjacent to service structures or distribution structures and used where incoming service or feeder conductors require additional space or facilities not included in the standard switchboard, such as the following two applications. 1. Mounted adjacent to a topconnected service structure and used as a cable pull structure where service conductors are brought underground. Auxiliary structures are the same depth and height as the service structure and are wide enough to accommodate the incoming cables. 2. Mounted adjacent to a service structure and used as a bus transition compartment for running riser bus from the line side of the service structure up to a top incoming busway connection. Auxiliary structures are the same depth and height as service structures. Busway connections to switchboard sections include cutout and drilling in the top of the switchboard with riser connections from the switchboard device or bus, up to the point where the busway enters the switchboard. In addition to the above applications, auxiliary structures may be mounted adjacent to a distribution structure and used to route feeder cables out the top of the lineup.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Short-Circuit Rating
Standard bus and connectors on all switchboards are rated for use on systems capable of producing up to 65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit current at the incoming terminals. Increased bus short-circuit ratings equal to that of the connected switchboard devices, up to 200,000A rms symmetrical, are available in all Pow-R-Line C switchboards. UL labeled switchboard sections are marked with their applicable short-circuit rating, taking into account the short-circuit capability of the power source to which they are to be connected.
Bus Bar System

The standard main bus in the service section and the horizontal cross bus is tin-plated aluminum with ratings from 4004000A. Both copper and silver-plated copper bus are available as options. Main bus and sub-main buses meet UL and NEMA standards for temperature rise on all metering switchboards. Special bus densities can be provided to meet specic needs.
Transitions
Transition structures are required for special switchboard congurations such as L or U shaped lineups. In some applications, an extra structure complete with connections is required; in others, where switchboard depth and space permit, only the connection conductors are required. (Refer to factory for these applications.)
CA08104001E
21.10-2

September 2011
Sheet 21 078
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Switchboards Used as Service Equipment

Service equipment is the electrical equipment that constitutes the main control and means of power cutoff for the electric service (normally power company supply) brought into the building. Where switchboards are to be used as service equipment, certain NEC and UL requirements apply that necessitate modications not normally supplied in switchboards. Following is a summary of the requirements that are pertinent to the ordering of a switchboard for service equipment: A. A switchboard with main lugs only (no main disconnect) must be designed so that all circuits in the switchboard can be disconnected from the supply source by the operation of no more than six operating handles (breaker or switch). Switchboard equipped with main disconnect devices are not subject to the above six disconnect limitation, as the entire board can be de-energized with the main disconnect device. Ground fault protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly grounded wye electrical services of more than 150V to ground, but not exceeding 600V phase-tophase for each service disconnecting means rated 1000A or more. B. For testing purposes, means are also required to disconnect the switchboard neutral bus from the ground service neutral conductor (single-phase three-wire, threephase four-wire systems). To comply with this requirement, a removable link (solid bar) is provided in the switchboard neutral bus. This link is generally located near the point where the main feeders enter the switchboard or in the area of the main disconnect device where one is provided. To further comply with NEC and UL requirements, a separate bonding strap is connected from the neutral bus to the switchboard frame. This bonding connection is located on the line side of the removable neutral link, maintaining a service ground to the switchboard frame when the test link is removed.
Where switchboards are to be used for service equipment, it should be clearly indicated in requests for quotations, and noted on the order.
Incoming Service
The incoming service section is similar in design and arrangement to standard distribution switchboards. The incoming service can be located on either end of the lineup or in the center. Main lugs only (4004000A) can be provided with an appropriate pull section for cable entry and termination. A variety of main service protective devices are also available. The standard devices include insulated-case circuit breakers up to 4000A, molded-case circuit breakers (4002500A), fusible switches (4001200A) and bolted pressure switches (8004000A). Ground fault protection is available to meet code requirements and a service entrance label can be provided when specied. Service sections can also include power company main service metering provisions, if required, and user instrumentation or monitoring devices.
Underwriters Laboratories Requirements and Labeling

The basic requirement for obtaining an Underwriters Laboratories label on a switchboard, is that all the compartment devices (breakers, switches, and the like) in the switchboard assembly are UL listed. In addition, the switchboard must comply with all applicable provisions of UL 891. Todays modern electrical systems require that switchboards offer a wide selection of electrical devices, many of which do not fall within the scope of UL listed devices. Therefore, the conditions under which a switchboard may be labeled are limited. Listed below are several important guidelines for consideration when an Underwriters Laboratories label is specied: 1. Underwriters Laboratories nameplates, where applicable, are supplied for each vertical structure rather than one common nameplate for the complete switchboard lineup. Where all of the component devices in the switchboard are UL listed and all applicable provisions UL 891 are met, each of the vertical structures that make up the switchboard may be labeled. 2. Individual vertical structures of a switchboard may be labeled where they comply with Underwriters Laboratories requirements although other vertical structures in the same switchboard lineup may not meet the UL standards, and will not be labeled. 3. All Pow-R-Line C metering switchboards are UL labeled if all mounted devices are UL listed.
Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers rated 800A and below have thermal-magnetic trip devices with optional electronic trip units. Breakers 1200A and larger have electronic trip units as standard. Optional electronic trip units are available rated 800A, offering increased short-time function adjustability and integral ground fault protection.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 079

General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Type WWCMS (EUSERC Only)
21.10-3
Fusible Switches
These switches incorporate a quickmake, quick-break mechanism housed in individual enclosures. The switches rated 4001200A are provided in single unit construction and applied as individually mounted main devices. Shunt trips are available for use with ground fault protection. Switches rated 400 and 600A are designed for use with Class R fuses. They can be provided with either Class J or T fuse provisions. The 800 and 1200A units have provisions for Class L fuses.
Meter Socket
The meter socket is a ring type device rated 200A continuous for selfcontained metering applications. The assembly includes a bypass test block in a fully bussed combination to meet EUSERC standard requirements.
Circuits Over 200A

Requirements for tenant metered circuits over 200A can be met using separate sections with appropriate disconnect devices installed below a current transformer/metering compartment. The metering compartment constructed to EUSERC standards provides mounting provisions for the utility-furnished current transformers that can be connected to a transformer rated meter socket provided on the sealable compartment door. Single disconnects can include molded-case circuit breakers, fusible switches or bolted pressure switches. For multiple feeder applications, a 22X distribution chassis with breakers or fusible switches can be provided in combination with the metering compartment. The standard arrangement is for hot sequence metering.
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Disconnect
Tenant disconnects can be moldedcase circuit breakers, fusible pullout devices (for Class T fuses) or fusible switches arranged for Class R fusing. Short-circuit ratings of the disconnect/ meter socket assembly are established based on UL peak let-through currents using self-contained meter sockets.
Bolted Pressure Switches

Bolted pressure switches use a quickacting stored energy mechanism with bolted pressure force on the contacts in the closed position. Available in ratings of 8004000A, the switches can be provided as a manually operated device or with an electric trip mechanism for use with ground fault protection equipment. All bolted pressure switches have provisions for Class L current limiting fuses. The units are 100% rated devices.
Tenant Metering Sections

Type WWCMS for EUSERC Service Areas
Tenant metering sections provide arrangements for grouping individual tenant feeder circuits rated 200A or less. Each circuit consists of a utility approved meter socket and an appropriate disconnect device. These sections contain chassis mounted, factory assembled and wired meter sockets and disconnects arranged for hot sequence metering (meter socket ahead of the tenant disconnect). The switchboards are shipped ready for connection of the tenant feeder cables and installation of the utility furnished watthour meter. Sealable covers are provided to comply with utility standard requirements. The WWCMS hot sequence metering sections are constructed for bottom exit of the tenant feeder cables. If top exit of the cables is required, an optional rear barrier wireway can be provided in the back of the metering section or a load side cable pull section can be added to the lineup.
Assembly Includes Meter Socket and Test Block per EUSERC Requirements Prewired to Tenant Disconnect
Meter Socket Sealable Cover Arrangement
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
21.10-4 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Commercial Metering Switchboards

General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Type WCMS (Non-EUSERC)
September 2011
Sheet 21 080
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Tenant Metering Sections

Type WCMS
Tenant metering sections provide arrangements for grouping individual tenant feeder circuits rated 200A or less. Each circuit consists of a utilityapproved meter socket and an appropriate disconnect device. These sections contain factory assembled and wired meter sockets and disconnects that can be arranged for hot sequence metering (meter socket ahead of the tenant disconnect) or cold sequence metering (disconnect ahead of the meter socket). The switchboards are shipped ready for connection of the tenant feeder cables and installation of the utility-furnished watthour meter. The WCMS metering sections are constructed for bottom exit of the tenant feeder cables. If top exit of the cables is required, an optional rear barriered wireway can be provided in the back of the metering section or a load side cable pull section can be added to the lineup.
provisions for the utility or ownerfurnished current transformers that can be connected to a transformer rated meter socket. The socket can optionally be provided on the switchboard or can be furnished and installed separately by others. Single disconnects can include molded-case circuit breakers, fusible switches or bolted pressure switches, and can be arranged for hot or cold sequence metering. For multiple feeder applications, a 22X distribution chassis with breakers or fusible switches can be provided in combination with the metering compartment. The standard arrangement for multiple feeders is for hot sequence metering. Two types of 400A self-contained meter sockets are available. A single circuit 400A (320A continuous) rated self-contained meter socket with manual lever bypass is available with either a breaker or fusible switch tenant main. Also available is a 400A continuous rated self-contained meter socket without bypass, which uses either a breaker or fusible switch tenant main.
Barriered Socket Construction with Manual Lever Bypass
Meter Socket
The meter socket is a ringless type device rated 200A continuous for selfcontained metering applications. All sockets include a manual lever bypass device. The standard meter socket is the heavy-duty Type HQ series. Type HB sockets are also available. Each meter socket is provided with an individual screwless cover that includes a sealing bracket with provisions for barrel locks, sealing wire or sealing bands. Individual internal barriers are provided around each socket.
Disconnect
Tenant disconnects can be moldedcase circuit breakers, fusible pullout devices (for Class T fuses) or fusible switches arranged for Class R fusing. Short-circuit ratings of the disconnect/ meter socket assembly are established based on UL peak let-through currents using self-contained meter sockets.
Circuits Over 200A

Requirements for tenant metered circuits over 200A can be met using separate sections with appropriate disconnect devices installed in combination with a current transformer/metering compartment. The utility-approved metering compartment provides mounting
Typical 200A 7 Jaw Sockets with Manual Lever Bypass Connected to Circuit Breaker Disconnects in Hot Sequence Arrangement
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 081

21.10-5
Disconnect Selection and Ratings

Main and Large Feeder Disconnects
Ampere Rating Breaker Type Interrupting Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes 240V 400 KD HKD KDC 600 LGE LGH LD HLD LDC, LGC 800 8001200 MDL ND HND NDC 16002500 RD 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 125,000 480V 35,000 65,000 100,000 35,000 65,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 50,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 65,000

i
Meter Section Tenant Main Disconnects
Maximum Voltage 240 Ampere Rating 50100 Breaker Type EHD FD, FDE HFD, HFDE 125200 400 480Y/277 70100 70200 400 ED KDC EHD HFD, HFDE FDC KDC Short-Circuit Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes 18,000 25,000 65,000 65,000 50,000 14,000 35,000 50,000 25,000
ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Short-circuit rating based on peak let-through of 30,000A using self-contained meter sockets per UL 414. Standard device shortcircuit rating applies when used with transformer rated sockets. For use with 400A self-contained socket in single section construction for Type WCMS lineups only.
Table 21.10-6. Fusible Pullout Devices Table 21.10-2. Bolted Pressure Switches
Switch Rating Ampere 8004000 Fuse UL Class L Description Interrupting Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes Current Limiting 200,000 Switch Rating Ampere 100 or 200 Fuse UL Class T Description Interrupting Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes Current Limiting 200,000
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 21.10-7. Fusible Switches Table 21.10-3. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit BreakerMain
Ampere Rating Breaker Type Interrupting Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes 240V 800 1600 2000 3000 4000 SB SB SB SB SB 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 130,000 480V 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 85,000 Switch Rating Ampere 100 or 200 Fuse UL Class R Description Interrupting Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes Current Limiting 200,000
Table 21.10-4. Fusible Switches

Switch Rating Ampere 400600 8001200 Fuse UL Class R J L Description Interrupting Rating rms Symmetrical Amperes Current Limiting 200,000 200,000 200,000
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 21 082
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Wire and Cable Terminals
Table 21.10-8. Standard Incoming Terminals (MLO)

Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
Table 21.10-10. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker Type SB SB SB SB SB
Wire Range (2) #2-500 kcmil (2) #2-500 kcmil (3) #2-500 kcmil (4) #2-500 kcmil (5) #2-500 kcmil (6) #2-500 kcmil (7) #2-500 kcmil (8) #2-500 kcmil (11) #2-500 kcmil
Ampere Rating 800 1600 2000 3000 4000
Wire Range (3) #2-500 kcmil (5) #2-500 kcmil (6) #2-500 kcmil (8) #2-500 kcmil (11) #2-500 kcmil
All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding to those shown in NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C insulation columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mils) regardless of insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
Table 21.10-11. Bolted Pressure Switches

Ampere Rating 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
Wire Range (3) #2-500 kcmil (4) #2-500 kcmil (5) #2-500 kcmil (6) #2-500 kcmil (7) #2-500 kcmil (8) #2-500 kcmil (11) #2-500 kcmil

Breaker Type EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC Ampere Rating 125-225 15-100 125-225 100-225 250-350 400 Wire Range #4-4/0 or #6-300 kcmil #14-1/0 #4-4/0 or #6-300 kcmil (1) #3-350 kcmil (1) 250-500 kcmil (2) 3/0-250 kcmil or (1) 3/0-500 kcmil (2) 250-300 kcmil (2) 400-500 kcmil (2) #1-500 kcmil (2) 3/0-400 kcmil (3) 3/0-400 kcmil (4) 4/0-500 kcmil (5) #2-500 kcmil (6) #2-500 kcmil (7) #2-500 kcmil
Optional Rear Barriered Wireway for Tenant Metering Sections Provides Access for Top Exit of Tenant Feeder Circuits
EHD, FDB, FDE FD, HFD, HFDE FDC, FDCE KD, KDB, HKD, KDC
Standard Switchboard Terminals

Wire and cable terminals supplied on switchboard mounted devices for making up incoming or outgoing cable connections are of the mechanical screw clamp pressure type. All standard terminals are suitable for use with either aluminum or copper cable except as noted in the table. Panel-mounted devices use the terminal provided as standard for and furnished with that device. All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding to those shown in NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C insulation columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills) regardless of insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
LGE, LGH, LD, HLD, LDC, LGC MDL ND, HND, NDC RD
300-500 600 400-600 700-800 800-1000 1200 1600 2000 2500
Table 21.10-12. Fusible Switches

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200
Wire Range #4-#1/0 #4-#1/0 #4-#1/0 #4-300 kcmil #4-600 kcmil (2) #4-600 kcmil (3) #4-600 kcmil (4) #4-600 kcmil
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 083

21.10-7
Main Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: All sections are standard 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high. Add 13.00 inches (330.2 mm) to depth shown for NEMA Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
i ii
Table 21.10-13. Bussed Pull Sections (With Lug Landings)

Main Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
2.50 (63.5)
1 2 3
3.00 (76.2) W 3.00 (76.2)
D W
Figure 21.10-2 W 30 (762.0) D 24 (609.6) D
36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4)
24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2)
2.50 (63.5)
4 5 6 7
If used with a main service section, depth will match the main device section.
Figure 21.10-1. Typical Conduit Area Figures 21.10-2, 21.10-3 and 21.10-4
Figure 21.10-2. Main Lugs OnlyTop or Bottom Feed
Note: For main lug only applications.
Table 21.10-14. Main Fusible Switch Service Sections

Switch Type Fusible Switch Ampere Rating 400 600 800 1200 Bolted Pressure Switch 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 Figure 21.10-3 W 36 (914.4) D 24 (609.6) Figure 21.10-4 W1 30 (762.0) W 36 (914.4) D 30 (762.0)
8 9
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4)
24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)

W D
10 11 12 13
36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
Figure 21.10-3. Main Device (Breaker or Switch)Bottom Feed
Table 21.10-15. Main Circuit Breaker Service Sections

Breaker Type KD, HKD, KDC LGE, LGH, LGC, LD, HLD, LDC MDL, ND ND, HND, NDC RD Ampere Rating 400 600 Figure 21.10-3 W 30 (762.0) D 24 (609.6) Figure 21.10-4 W1 30 (762.0) W 30 (762.0) D 24 (609.6)
14 15
800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 48 (1219.2)
W1 W D
16 17 18 19 20 21
Magnum SB
Figure 21.10-4. Main Device (Breaker or Switch)Top or Bottom Feed
CA08104001E
21.10-8

September 2011
Sheet 21 084
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Tenant Meter and Disconnect Sections200A Maximum Circuit

Hot sequence metering sections incorporating 200A (maximum) continuous rated self-contained meter sockets with test bypass/disconnect block in combination with tenant main disconnect device. Standard arrangement provides for bottom exit of cables. Top exit of cables will require addition of load side pull section or rear barriered wireway for each metering section.
20.00 (508.0) Indoor 26.00 (660.4) Outdoor 3 Circuits Maximum
32.00 (812.8) Indoor 36.00 (914.4) Outdoor 6 Circuits Maximum
20.00 (508.0) Indoor 26.00 (660.4) Outdoor 2 Circuits Maximum 100A 1 Circuit Maximum 200A
32.00 (812.8) Indoor 36.00 (914.4) Outdoor 4 Circuits Maximum 100A 3 Circuits Maximum 200A
36.00 (914.4) Indoor 36.00 (914.4) Outdoor 4 Circuits Maximum (3) 200A Circuits Maximum and (1) 100A Circuit Maximum
Circuit Breaker or Fusible Pullout Disconnects
Fusible Switch Disconnects
Figure 21.10-5. Tenant Meter and Disconnect Congurations

Depth will match main device section. 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) additional clearance required by utility for clearance between meter and door posts for outdoor designs. Double door without center post available for two sections side-by-side.
2.50 (63.5) Barriered Cross Bus Barrier
D Tenant Feeder Cables
Tenant Feeder Cables
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2) W
3.00 (76.2) 20.00 (508.0)
Figure 21.10-6. Typical Conduit Area
Figure 21.10-7. Load Side Pull Section with Barriered Cross Bus
Figure 21.10-8. Rear Barriered Wireway Metering Section Side View
Depth will match main device section.
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
Figure 21.10-9. Outdoor Floor Plans
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 085

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Type WWCMS (EUSERC Only)
21.10-9
Main Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: All sections are standard 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high. Add 13.00 inches (330.2 mm) to depth shown for NEMA Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
i ii 1 2 3 4
Table 21.10-16. Bussed Pull Sections

Main Ampere Rating 800 or Less 12004000
Figure 21.10-10 W 20 (508.0) 30 (762.0) D 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
If used with a main service section, depth will match the main device section.
Note: For main lug only applications and installations requiring separate incoming pull section (top or bottom feed).
W
5
Figure 21.10-10. Main Lug Only Top or Bottom Feed Table 21.10-17. Main Fusible Switch Service Sections
Switch Type Ampere Figure 21.10-11 Rating or 21.10-12 W Fusible switch 400 600 800 1200 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 30 (762.0) D 30 (762.0)
6 7 8 9
Bolted pressure switch
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0) 36 (914.4)
10
D W
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
11 12 13
2.50 (63.5)
Figure 21.10-11. Main Device (Breaker or Switch)Top Feed Table 21.10-18. Main Circuit Breaker Service Sections
Breaker Type Ampere Figure 21.10-11 Rating or 21.10-12 W KD, HKD, KDC LGE, LGH, LD, HLD, LDC, LGC 400 600 30 (762.0) D 30 (762.0) D
14 15 16
3.00 (76.2) W 3.00 (76.2)
MDL, ND, 800 HND, NDC 1200 RD 1600 2000 2500 2.50 (63.5)
D W
17 18
Figure 21.10-12. Main Device (Breaker or Switch)Bottom Feed
19 20 21
CA08104001E

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Type WCMS (Non-EUSERC)
September 2011
Sheet 21 086
i ii 1 2 3 4 5
Tenant Meter and Disconnect Sections

All sections are standard 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high. Hot or cold sequence metering sections incorporating 200A (maximum) continuous rated selfcontained meter sockets (ringless type with manual bypass) in combination with tenant main disconnect device. Standard arrangement provides for bottom exit of cables. Alternate cable exit will require addition of load side pull section or rear barriered wireway for each section.
Barriered Cross Bus
Tenant Feeder Cables 20.00 (508.0)
Figure 21.10-17. Load Side Pull Section with Barriered Cross Bus
Standard depth is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
Barrier
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
D
20.00 (508.0) 2 Circuits Maximum 100A 1 Circuit Maximum 200A 32.00 (812.8) 4 Circuits Maximum 100A 3 Circuits Maximum 200A 38.00 (965.2) 4 Circuits Maximum 200A
20.00 (508.0) 3 Circuits Maximum
32.00 (812.8) 6 Circuits Maximum
38.00 (965.2)
Tenant Feeder Cables
7 Circuits MaximumFusible Pullout 8 Circuits MaximumBreaker
Figure 21.10-14. Circuit Breaker or Fusible Pullout Tenant Disconnects
Figure 21.10-18. Rear Barriered Wireway Metering Section Side View
20.00 (508.0) 1 Circuit
Figure 21.10-19. 400A Tenant Section with Self-Contained Metering (Breaker)
Depth will match metering sections.
Figure 21.10-15. Fusible Switch Tenant Disconnects

2.50 (63.5)
For 400A applications, select either 400A (320A continuous) with manual lever bypass or the 400A continuous rated meter socket with 400A frame Type KDC circuit breaker. Can be arranged for hot sequence metering with bottom cable exit or cold sequence metering with top cable exit. Alternate cable exit will require addition of load side pull section or rear barriered wireway. See Figures 21.10-19 and 21.10-20.
19 20 21
2.50 (63.5) 3.00 (76.2) W 3.00 (76.2)
26.00 (660.4) 1 Circuit
Figure 21.10-20. 400A Tenant Section with Self-Contained Metering (Fusible Switch)
Depth will match metering sections.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 087

Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Types WWCMS (EUSERC Only) and WCMS
21.10-11
Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions

All sections are standard 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high. Add 13.00 inches (330.2 mm) to depths shown for NEMA Type 3R outdoor enclosure. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) for NEMA Type 3R on single section 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) wide only. Table 21.10-19. Single Tenant Disconnect Service SectionsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Type Disconnect Ampere Rating Type WWCMS (EUSERC) W 36 (914.4) D 24 (609.6) Type WCMS W 36 (914.4) D 30 (762.0)
i ii 1 2 3
36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
Fusible SwitchDisconnect
Fusible switch 400 600 800 1200 Bolted pressure switch 800 1200 1600 400 600 800 1200 1600 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
Tenant Sections Arranged for Transformer-Rated Metering

Includes utility-approved metering compartment with provisions for mounting current transformers for metering circuits rated 400A and above. Disconnect device can be either a single fusible switch or circuit breaker arranged for hot or cold sequence. A 22X chassis for installation of multiple disconnects on one metered circuit is also available for hot sequence metering. Standard cable exit is at the bottom. For top cable exit, add wireway barrier.
38 (965.2) 36 (914.4) 38 (965.2)
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
Circuit BreakerDisconnect
KD, HKD, KDC LD, HLD, LDC MDL, ND ND, HND, NDC RD

36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
4 5 6 7 8
Depth (D) will match depth of main device section. Also requires 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide pull section.
2.50 (63.5)
12.00 (304.8)
9 10 11 12
2.50 (63.5)
Single Disconnect or 22X Chassis
3.00 (76.2) W Single Disconnect
3.00 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2) W 22X Chassis
3.00 (76.2)
Figure 21.10-23. Typical Conduit AreasBottom Cable Exit

W
Figure 21.10-21. Multiple Disconnects (22X ChassisSee Figures Below)
Maximum Amperes 1P 2P 3P 2P 3P 1P 2P 36 inches (914.4 mm) Wide Structure 3P 2P 3P 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 2 or 3P 1X 2X 3X 2X 3X 3X 4X 4X 250 400 600 225 225
13
Frame EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC JD, HJD, JDC DK, KD, HKD, KDC LGE, LGH, LGC
Depth (D) will match depth of main device section.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Note: Refer to panel layout guides.

36 inch ( 914.4 mm) Wide Structure
30A
30A 60A
4X 4X 4X 5X 6X 5X 9X
100A 100A 240V Max. 240V Max. 100A 200A 100A 100A
6X 3X
600 250 800
400A Branch 600A Branch 200A 200A
LD, HLD, LDC JD, HJD, JDC MDL ND, HND, NDC
45 inch (1143.0 mm) Wide Structure
11X 6X 11X 16X
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
800A Branch 1200A Branch
2 or 3P
6X 1200
Figure 21.10-22. 22X Chassis Layout Guide Fusible Switches

CA08104001E
Figure 21.10-24. 22X Chassis Layout GuideCircuit Breakers, 1X = 1.38 inches (34.9 mm)

September 2011
Sheet 21 088
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 21 089
SwitchboardsLow Voltage Instant Switchboards
21.11-1
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Instant Switchboards Meet EUSERC Requirements
General Description
Eatons Instant Switchboards are designed as distributor-stocked units to provide fast delivery to match the needs of the construction market. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment, they combine utility metering provisions with a fused main switch in a single compact section that can also include a distribution panel for feeder and branch circuit breakers. Typical applications for these versatile switchboards include small ofce buildings and factories, stores, supermarkets and shopping centers.
For applications that require the load circuit conductors to exit at the top, a loadside wireway compartment is available that bolts to the service section.
35,000 rms symmetrical at 480Y/277 Vac fully rated using 800A main circuit breaker with FD 225A frame branch breakers
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6
Standards
Instant Switchboards are UL 891 listed and comply with all applicable industry standards. These switchboards meet EUSERC requirements.
Dimensions
Indoor: 32.00 x 90.00 x 14.00 inches (812.8 x 2286.0 x 355.6 mm) Outdoor: 38.00 x 90.00 x 26.00 inches (965.2 x 2286.0 x660.4 mm)
Service Ratings
240 Vac, single-phase, three-wire, or three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277 Vac, three-phase, four-wire
Construction
These switchboards are available in either indoor or outdoor enclosures manufactured of code gauge steel with a durable light gray nish. All units are completely enclosed with front, rear and side covers. Outdoor units include a front hinged door. The service section includes: Main lugs mounted at the top (two #4600 kcmil per phase) for overhead feed or for use with underground pull section A metering and CT compartment with bussing for utility bar type CTs and two 15.00-inch (381.0 mm) high meter compartment doorsone with meter socket provision, one blank A 400 or 600A T-fused main switch or 800A main circuit breaker with either load lugs (same as main lugs) or with connections to a factoryinstalled distribution panel Underground pull sections are available with lug landing kits, providing studs for incoming cables per EUSERC requirements and two #4600 kcmil lugs per phase for cable connection to the service section.
Interrupting Ratings (Series Rating)

65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 Vac, with 400 and 600A fusible switch mains using 65,000 AIC ED 225A frame or 10,000 AIC BAB 100A frame branch breakers 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480Y/277 Vac, with 400 and 600A fusible switch mains using 35,000 AIC FD 225A frame or 14,000 AIC GHB 100A frame branch breakers
Type 1 Indoor
Type 3R Outdoor
7 8 9
Table 21.11-1. Instant Switchboards

Service Main Ampere Rating Catalog Number NEMA 1Indoor MSB423 MSB623 MSB424 MSB624 MSBP423 MSBP623 MSBP424 MSBP624 MSB824 MSBP824 MSB444 MSB644 MSBP444 MSBP644 MSB844 MSBP844 NEMA 3ROutdoor
240 Vac MaximumMain Fused Switch Only

Single-phase, 3W Three-phase, 4W 400 600 400 600 400 600 400 600 800 800 400 600 400 600 800 800 RMSB423 RMSB623 RMSB424 RMSB624 RMSBP423 RMSBP623 RMSBP424 RMSBP624 RMSB824 RMSBP824 RMSB444 RMSB644 RMSBP444 RMSBP644 RMSB844 RMSBP844
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
240 Vac MaximumMain Fused Switch with Distribution Panel

Single-phase, 3W Three-phase, 4W
240 Vac MaximumMain Circuit Breaker Only

Three-phase, 4W Three-phase, 4W Three-phase, 4W
240 Vac MaximumMain Circuit Breaker Only with Distribution Panel 480Y/277 Vac Main Fused Switch Only
Distribution panels can be included for 240 Vac maximum (single-phase, three-wire, or three-phase, four-wire) or for 480Y/277 Vac (three-phase, fourwire). The 240V panels have provisions for four two-pole or three-pole, 225A frame circuit breakers; and 24 poles of 100A frame circuit breakers. The 480Y/277V panel has provisions for four two-pole or three-pole 225A frame circuit breakers; and 24 poles of 100A frame circuit breakers. Distribution panel for 800A 240 Vac or 480Y/277 Vac can be included with provisions for six two- or three-pole, 225A frame circuit breakers.
480Y/277 Vac Main Fused Switch with Distribution Panel

Three-phase, 4W
480Y/277 Vac Maximum Main Circuit Breaker Only

Three-phase, 4W Three-phase, 4W
480Y/277 Vac Maximum Main Circuit Breaker Only with Distribution Panel
Not for use on 480V three-phase three-wire delta systems.
Note: Standard switchboards include two 15.00-inch (381.0) high meter compartment doors: one with single meter socket provision and one blank. For other arrangements, use accessories.
CA08104001E
21.11-2 SwitchboardsLow Voltage Instant Switchboards

General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Instant Switchboards Meet EUSERC Requirements
Table 21.11-2. Meter Compartment Doors (Meter Sockets Not Included)
Door Size Inches (mm) 15.00 H x 32.00 W (381.0 x 812.2) 30.00 H x 32.00 W (762.0 x 812.2) Drilling Blank 1 socket Blank 2 socket Catalog Number MD150 MD151 MD300 MD302
September 2011
Sheet 21 090
i ii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Table 21.11-4. Loadside Wireway Same Depth as Switchboard

Section Width Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) Catalog Number NEMA 1 Indoor LSS12W NEMA 3R Outdoor RLSS12W
Table 21.11-6. Lug Landing Kits for Underground Pull Sections

Maximum Ampere Rating 400 800 Service Catalog Number LL4003 LL4004 LL8003 LL8004
Table 21.11-5. Underground Pull Sections

Section Width Inches (mm) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) Catalog Number NEMA 1 NEMA 3R Indoor Outdoor UG24W UG30W RUG24W RUG30W Ampere Rating
Single-phase, 3W Three-phase, 4W Single-phase, 3W Three-phase, 4W
Table 21.11-3. Meter Sockets For Field Installation (order separately)

Number of Jaws 4 5 6 8 13 15 Catalog Number M4 M5 M6 M8 M13 M15
Table 21.11-7. Distribution Breakers

Type Breaker BAB BAB ED GHB FD Poles 1P 2P X X X X X X X 3P X X X X X
240 Vac
1560 70100 125225
Note: Same depth as switchboard with provisions for lug landing kit. Note: If pull section is to be installed separate from service section, add side closer plates. Cat No. UGCP.
480Y/277 Vac
15100 70225
CA08104001E
Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 001
22.0-1
Panelboards
Contents
Panelboards Overview Panelboard Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-3 General Construction Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-3 Application Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-7 Series Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-10 Pow-R-Line 1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-1 Pow-R-Line 2a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2-1 Pow-R-Line 3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-1 Pow-R-Line 3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-5 Pow-R-Line 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1 Pow-R-Line 5P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5-1 Pow-R-Line Column Type Pow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-1 Pow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-4 Retrot Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1R Retrot Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1 Pow-R-Line 2R Retrot Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-3 Pow-R-Line 1aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-5 Pow-R-Line 2aF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-7 Elevator Control Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-9 Panelboard Modications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-10 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16470 Section 26 24 16
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pow-R-Line 2a
CA08104001E
22.0-2 Panelboards Overview

General DescriptionPow-R-Line
September 2011
Sheet 22 002
22 23 24 25
Pow-R-Line 1a, 2a and 3a, and 3E

26
27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Robust design using Eaton circuit breakers Increased ratings (with Series Rated main circuit breakers) provide higher short-circuit ratings Pow-R-Line 3a can accommodate branch breakers dual-mounted through 150A and single-mounted through 225A Pow-R-Line 3E panelboards accommodate branch-mounted breakers up to 125A Lock and Door opening mechanism includes a positive slide catch and right- or left-hand installation Surface or ush trims UL tested and listed. Meets NEC and NEMA standards
Pow-R-Line 4B and 4F Power Panels

Pow-R-Line 5P Power Panels

Plug-on main and branch devices Main and branch ratings through 1200A 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide enclosure for single-row bus (800A maximum) 48.00-inch (1219.0 mm) wide enclosure for double-row bus UL tested and listed. Meets NEC and NEMA standards

\
Special Use Pow-R-Line Panelboards

Pow-R-Line 1a-LX and Pow-R-Line 2a-LX column panelboards are designed to t within the structural I-beam of a facility and offer branch circuits up to 100A Pow-R-Line 1aF and Pow-R-Line 2aF fusible lighting panelboards were developed for ultra high fault currents and for use in selective coordination applications and test circuits Pow-R-Line 1R and Pow-R-Line 2R Retrot Panelboards are the only panelboards in the market listed for use in retrot applications in other manufacturers existing back boxes Elevator control panelboards integrate electrical protection and controls for elevators and meet stringent code requirements in a single, cost-effective package
Pow-R-Line 4B panelboard uses circuit breakers Pow-R-Line 4F panelboard uses fusible switches A single chassis accommodates both circuit breakers and fusible switches Main and neutral are located at the same ends to provide additional space for branch devices Three-piece trim facilitates installation Will accommodate circuit breakers to provide higher ratings in a standard chassis and increased series ratings UL tested and approved. Meets NEC and NEMA standards
Pow-R-Line 4B
Pow-R-Line 4F
Pow-R-Line 1a, 3a 3E and Column
Pow-R-Line 1aF and 2aF
Pow-R-Line 5P
Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R
Elevator Control Panelboard
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 003
Panelboards Overview
22.0-3
Table 22.0-1. Panelboard Selection Guide

Panelboard Type Page Reference Device Type Maximum Voltage Rating AC Pow-R-Line 1a Pow-R-Line 2a Pow-R-Line 3a
Maximum Main Rating, Amperes Main Lugs Only 400 400 400 800 800 800 600 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 400 400 225 225 225 225 800 Main Device 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 400 400 225 225 225 225 800
Branch Circuits Ampere Range
Short-Circuit Current Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes, ac Fully Rated (kA) Series Rated (kA) 22200 65200 22150 22200 22150 35100 22200 22150 22200 22150 200 200 18200 25150 22100 22150 14100
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DC 250 250
22.1-1 22.2-1 22.3-1
Breaker Breaker Breaker
Pow-R-Line 3E Pow-R-Line 4B
22.3-5 22.4-1
Breaker Breaker
Pow-R-Line 4F Pow-R-Line 5P
22.4-7 22.5-1
Fusible switch Breaker
Pow-R-Line 1aF 22.7-5 Fusible switch Pow-R-Line 2aF 22.7-7 Fusible switch Pow-R-Line 1a-LX 22.6-1 Breaker Pow-R-Line 2a-LX 22.6-4 Breaker Pow-R-Line 1R 22.7-1 Breaker Pow-R-Line 2R 22.7-3 Breaker 22.7-9 Fusible Elevator control panelboard Available with surge protective device (SPD).
240 240 480Y/277 240 480 600 480 240 480 600 240 600 240 480 600 240 480Y/277 240 480Y/277 240 480Y/277 480
250 600
250 250
125/250
15100 15100 15100 15225 15225 15225 15125 151200 151200 151200 301200 301200 151200 151200 151200 1530 1530 15-30 1530 15100 15100 15200
1022 65 14 10200 14100 1435 3565 10200 14200 14200 100200 100200 10200 14200 14200 200 200 1022 14 1022 14 10200
General Construction Features

Eatons assembled panelboards are designed for sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices. This allows complete exibility of circuit arrangement (single-, two- or three-poles) to allow balance of the electrical load on each phase. Sturdy, rigid chassis assembly ensures accurate alignment of interior with panel front; prevents exing and minimizes possibility of loosening or damage to current carrying parts during and after installation. Four point in-and-out adjustment of panel interior is provided to meet critical depth dimensions on ush installations. This compensates for possible misalignment of box at installation. Main lugs are mechanical solderless type and approved for copper and aluminum conductors.
All enclosures are furnished in accordance with UL standards and include wiring gutters with proper wire bending space. Special cabinets can be provided at an additional charge. The box dimensions shown are inside dimensions. For outside dimensions, add 0.25-inch (6.4 mm).
The trims for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards and small power distribution panelboards include a door with rounded corners and concealed hinges. A ush-type latch and lock assembly is included. All locks are keyed alike. These trims are available in both surface and ush mounted designs. Fronts for power distribution panelboards use a unique breaker front cover design in which each device has a dedicated bolt-on steel cover. The individual covers form a single deadfront for the panelboard that is used in conjunction with two wiring gutter covers to complete the trim. A door is not nished as part of the standard offering on these panelboards but can be provided, for an additional charge, using a deeper than standard box.
Standard panelboard boxes are supplied without knockouts (blank endwalls).
EZ Trim
The EZ box and EZ trim are provided standard for Pow-R-Line 1a and Pow-R-Line 2a lighting panelboards, as well as Pow-R-Line 3a and Pow-RLine 3E mid-range panelboards.
Combination AFCI Circuit Breakers

Eatons 125 Vac AFCI single- and twopole, 15 and 20A bolt-on breakers in panelboards meet Article 210.12 of the NEC. See the NEC code for denitions and details.
Enclosures
Boxes are code-gauge galvanized steel except for column type panelboards, which include a painted box nished in ANSI-61 light gray to match the trim. Standard panelboard cabinets are designed for indoor use. Alternate types are available for outdoor and special purpose applications.
EZ Trim Provides Standard Door-in-Door Construction With No Exposed Hardware or Sharp Ridges. No Tools are Required for Installation.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Standards
All Eatons panelboards are designed to meet the following applicable industry standards, except where noted: 1. Underwriters Laboratories a. Panelboards: UL 67 b. Cabinets, boxes and trims: UL 50
Note: Only panelboards containing UL listed devices can be UL labeled.
Please refer to Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Tab 27, for detailed information on overcurrent protective device combinations for use on selectively coordinated systems.
Interconnecting Multi-Section Panelboards

When a panelboard, for connection to one feeder, must be furnished in more than one section (box), each section must be furnished with main bus and terminals of the same rating, unless a main overcurrent device is provided in each section. Sub-feed or through-feed provisions must also be added to provide connection capability to the second section.
Note: Sub-feed or through-feed lugs cannot be used on any panelboard that is not protected by a single main overcurrent device either in the panelboard or immediately upstream, i.e., service entrance panelboards with main lugs only using the six disconnect rule.
Service Entrance Equipment

NEC Articles 230.F and G, and UL, require that: a. Panels used as service entrance equipment must be located near the point where the supply conductors enter the building. b. A panelboard having main lugs only shall have a maximum of six service disconnects to de-energize the entire panelboard from the supply conductors. Where more than six disconnects are required, a main service disconnect must be provided. c. Must include connector for bonding and grounding neutral conductor. d. A service-entrance-type UL label must be factory installed. e. Ground fault protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly grounded wye electrical services of more than 150V to ground, but not exceeding 600V phase-tophase for each service disconnecting means rated 1000A or more. Service entrance panels must be identied as such on the order entry to the manufacturing location.
2. National Electrical Code 3. NEMA Standards: PB 1 4. Federal Specication W-P-115c Circuit breakerType I Class 1 Fusible switchType II Class 1
Sub-Feed Lugs (Figure 22.0-1)

Sub-feed lugs are one means of interconnecting multi-section panels. The sub-feed (second set of) lugs are mounted directly beside the main lugs. These are required in each section except the last panel in the lineup. The feeder cables are brought into the wiring gutter of the rst section and connected to the main lugs. Another set of the same size cables are connected to the sub-feed lugs (Section 1) and are carried over to the main lugs of the adjacent panel. Cross connection cables are not furnished by Eaton. Sub-feed lugs are only available on main lug only panels.
Note: Sub-feed lugs may not be used on main lug only (six disconnect rule) service entrance panels.
Panelboard Selection Factors

In selecting a panelboard, the following factors must be considered: a. Service (voltage and frequency). b. Interrupting capacity (fully or series rated). c. Ampere rating of main. d. Ampere ratings of branches. e. Installation environment. f. Codes and standards mandates.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating

The short-circuit rating of Eatons assembled panelboards are test veried by, and listed with, Underwriters Laboratories. Generally, these ratings are that of the lowest interrupting rated device in the panel. Certain exceptions to this rule exist where branch devices have been UL tested in combination with specic main devices having a higher interrupting rating. Where these dened main breaker and branch breaker combinations are used, the series short-circuit rating of the assembled panelboard will be the same as the series tested rating of the approved rated main breaker. Available main and branch breaker combinations are tabulated on Page 22.0-10 through Page 22.0-20. All combinations shown are UL tested and listed. These series ratings apply to panels having main devices, or main lug only panelboards fed remotely by the device listed in the series ratings chart as the main, for which UL listed tests were conducted.
Column Type Panelboards

The same general code restrictions apply as for standard width panels except where trough extensions are used.
Box
Box
Multi-Section Panelboards
When more than 42 overcurrent protective devices are required, two or more separate enclosures may be required. Separate fronts for each box are standard.
Panel
Neutral
Panel
Neutral
Conduit
Section 1
Section 2
Figure 22.0-1. Sub-Feed Lugs
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 005
22.0-5
Application Considerations (Continued)

Through-Feed Lugs (Figure 22.0-2)
Through-feed lugs are another method to interconnect multi-section panelboards. The incoming feeder cables are connected to the main lugs or main breaker at the bottom of panel (Section 1). Another set of lugs (through-feed) are located at the opposite end of the main bus. The interconnecting cables are connected to the through-feed lugs in Section 1 and are carried over to the main lugs in Section 2. The connection arrangement could be reversed, i.e., main lugs at top; through-feed lugs at bottom end of panel. Cross cables are not furnished by Eaton.
Note: Through-feed lugs may not be used on main lug only (six disconnect rule) service entrance panels.
Multiple Section Panelboard Flush Mounted

Shown below is the standard method for ush mounting multiple section lighting and distribution panelboards using standard ush trims.
Conduit Nipple for Cross Wiring by Contractor

Ground fault protection (GFP) may be added to most panelboards using Eatons integral molded-case circuit breaker GFP and included feeder devices on power panelboards and mains on all panelboards.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System is available on many molded-case circuit breakers from 70A to air power circuit breakers at 5000A. Recognized by the 2011 National Electrical Code and the National Electrical Safety Code (NFPA 70E), the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System allows breakers to trip quickly thus signicantly reducing the available arc ash potential.
.75 (19.1) Wall Trim Top Section View .75 (19.1)
.75 (19.1) 1.5 (38.1)
.75 (19.1)
.75 (19.1) Trim
Wall
Trim
Contractor to Mount Boxes 1-1/2-inch (38.1 mm) Apart to Allow for 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) Extension on Both Flush Trims Outside Edge of Box
Ambient Temperatures
The primary function of an overcurrent device is to protect the conductor and its insulation against overheating. In selecting the size of the devices and conductors, consideration should be given to the ambient temperature surrounding the conductors within and external to the panelboard. Cumulative heating within the panelboard may cause premature operation of the overcurrent protective devices. UL test procedures are based, in part, on 80% loading of panelboard branch circuit devices. Article 408 of the NEC limits the loading of overcurrent devices in panelboards to 80% of rating where in normal operation the load will continue for three hours or more. Further derating may be required, depending on such factors as ambient temperature, duty cycle, frequency or altitude. Exception: There is one exception to this rule in both UL and NEC. It applies to assemblies and overcurrent devices that have been approved for continuous duty at 100% of its rating. This exception is covered in NEC 210.20 (a). Also see Tab 27 of this application guide for additional information.
Box
Box
.75 (19.1)
Cross Cables Main Lugs

.75 (19.1) Two Section Panelboard (Flush Mounting) .75 (19.1) .75 (19.1) .75 (19.1)
Neutral
Flush Trim Extends 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) Beyond Outside of Box on All Four Sides
Panel
ThruFeed Lugs
Panel
Figure 22.0-3. Multiple Section Panelboard Flush MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Branch Circuit Loading for Lighting Panels

Neutral
The size of mains and branches should be selected based on the following: a. Lighting circuits: NEC Article 210, 215, 220 and 240. b. Distribution circuits, actual or continuous loads: NEC Article 384.16. c. Motor circuits: NEC Article 430. d. Diversity factor. e. Provision for future loading.
Main Lugs Conduit s Section 1 Section 2
Figure 22.0-2. Through-Feed Lugs
National Electrical Code Article 408 states a panelboard shall be protected by an overcurrent protective device having a rating not greater than that of the panelboard. The overcurrent protective device shall be located within or at any point on the supply side of the panelboard. Exceptions to Article 408 selectively apply. Refer to the National Electrical Code Article 408 for specics.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Application Considerations (Continued)

Special Conditions
Standard panelboards, assembled with standard components, are adequate for most applications. However, special consideration should be given to those required for application under special conditions such as: a. b. c. d. Excessive vibration or shock. Frequencies above 60 cycles. Altitudes above 6600 ft (2012m). Damp environment (possible fungus growth). e. Compliance with federal, state and municipal electrical codes and standards.
Harmonic Currents
Standard panelboard neutrals are rated for 100% of the panelboard current. However, because harmonic currents can cause overheated neutrals, an option is provided for neutrals to be rated at 200% (1200A maximum neutral for 600A main bus) of the panelboard phase current. Panelboards with the 200% rated neutral are UL listed as suitable for use with nonlinear loads. Prior to specifying the 200% rated neutral, Eaton recommends a harmonic survey be conducted of the distribution system, be it new or existing.
Eaton can provide protective and diagnostic systems integral to panelboards. The SPD is integrated into the panelboards using a zero lead length direct busbar connection. Integral disconnect is used on all Pow-R-Line 4 panels.
Surge Protective Devices (SPD)

The quality of power feeding sensitive electronic loads is critical to the reliable operation of any facility. In modern ofces, hospitals and manufacturing facilities, the most frequent causes of microprocessor-based equipment downtime and damage are voltage transients and electrical noise. Electrical loads and microprocessorbased equipment are highly susceptible to both high and low energy transients. High energy transients include lightning induced surges and power company switching. These high energy transients can destroy components instantly. More frequently the electrical system experiences low energy transients and high frequency noise. The effects of continual low energy transients and high frequency noise can cause erratic equipment performance or sudden failure of electronic circuit board components.
Eaton SPDs May be Integrated into Most Panelboards
Seismic Qualication
The SPD protects sensitive electronic equipment from the damaging effects of high and low energy transients. For complete product description and available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
Compact Panelboard Meter

Most Eaton panelboards can integrate a compact meter for reading the panelboard power and energy usage. Eaton's IQ 35M has ANSI 12.20 0.5% accuracy, a bright backlit LCD display, real energy pulse output, phase loss alarm and optional RS-485 communication capability.
Closeup of IQM 35 With Deadfront
41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 007
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line
22.0-7

Table 22.0-2. Electrical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Ratings Type Ampere Rating
1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1550 1550 1520 1520 1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1520 1520 15100 15100 1520 1530 1560 1520 1520 1530 1530 15125 15125 15125 15125 15125 15125 15100 15100 15150 15150 15225 100225 100225 100225 250400 70250 100400 150400 150350 250600 300600 300800 4001200 15150 15225 100225 70250 100400 250600 300600 300800 4001200
22
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (kA rms Symmetrical) Volts AC
120 120/240 240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 240 120 120/240 120 120/240 277 480Y/277 277 277 277 277 480Y/277 277 480Y/277 277 480 277 480 277 480 277 480 600 277 600 240 240 240 240 600 600 480 600 600 600 600 600 277 600 240 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 240 600 600 600 600 600 600
Number of Poles
1 2 2, 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2, 3 1 2 1 2 1 2, 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
AC Rating, Volts 120/240

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 65 65 65 65 65 35 100 200

DC Rating, Volts 277

14 14 25 14 14 14 14 14 18 35 65 14 35 65
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
240
10 22 65 65 65 35 35 100 200 18 18 65 22 42 65 65 65 65 100 100 65 65 65 65 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
480
14 14 14 18 35 65 14 14 35 35 35 65 65 35 35 50 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
600
14 18 18 25 35 35 18 25 25 25 25 25 35 35 35 35 35
125
14 10 35 42 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
250
14 10 35 42 10 10 10 10 10 10 42 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 25 25 22 22 22 42 50 25
BAB, HQP BAB-H, HQP-H BABRP, BABRSP QBGF, QPGF, QBGFEP QBAF, QBAG QBHW, QPHW QBHW-H, QPHW-H QBHGF, QPHGF, QBHGFEP QBHAF, QBHAG GHB GHQ HGHB GHBGFEP GHQRSP GHBS EGB EGS EGH EHD FDB FD, FDE EDB EDS ED DK JD KD , CKD LHH NHH LGE LD , CLD MDL , CMDL ND , CND HFD, HFDE EDH HJD HKD , CHKD LGH HLD , CHLD HMDL , CHMDL HND , CHND
High Interrupting Capacity Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

FDC, FDCE 15225 2, 3 EDC 100225 2, 3 JDC 70250 2, 3 100400 2, 3 KDC LGC 250600 2, 3 LGU 250600 2, 3 LDC , CLDC 300600 2, 3 NDC , CNDC 4001200 2, 3 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. DC rated single-pole, 1570A only. Rating 480Y/277 Vac maximum. 200 100 35 200 200 100 35 200 100 65 200 100 50 200 150 65 200 100 50 200 100 65 Available with integral ground fault protection. 100% rated breaker. DC rating not available with Digitrip 310.
CA08104001E

Table 22.0-2. Electrical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Circuit Breaker Ratings Type Ampere Rating Number of Poles Voltage
AC DC
September 2011
Sheet 22 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (kA rms Symmetrical) AC Rating, Volts 120/240 240 200 200 200 200 200 277 480 150 200 200 200 200 600 200 200 200 DC Rating, Volts 125 42 42 42 42 42 42 250

600 35 35 35 35 35 35
Current Limit-R Circuit Breakers

FCL LCL FB-P LA-P NB-P HFDDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC

15100 125400 15100 70400 300800 15150 70250 100400 300600 300800 7001200
2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
480 480 600 600 600
600 600 600 600 600 600
TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit Breakers
Direct Current (DC) Rated Breakers

42 42 42 42 42 42
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Available with integral ground fault protection. 100k based on NEMA test procedure. For use on DC systems only. Non-interrupting trip type. Interrupting trip type.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 009
22.0-9
Terminal Wire Ranges, Pressure-Type Al/Cu Terminals Except as Noted

Where copper-aluminum terminals are supplied on designated panelboard types, best results are obtained if a suitable joint compound is applied when aluminum conductors are used. Table 22.0-3. Standard Main Lug Terminals
Panel Type Pow-R-Line 1a, 1aF, 1R Pow-R-Line 2a, 2aF, 2R Pow-R-Line 3a Pow-R-Line 3E Pow-R-Line 4 Pow-R-Line 5P Pow-R-Command
22 23
Wire Size Ranges for Ampere Capacity 100A #121/0 #121/0 #121/0 #62/0 #121/0 225A #6300 kcmil #6300 kcmil #6300 kcmil 250A #6350 kcmil #6350 kcmil #2500 kcmil 400A (2) #2500 kcmil (2) #2500 kcmil (2) #2500 kcmil (2) 4/0500 kcmil
600A (2) #2500 kcmil (2) 4/0500 kcmil
800A (3) #2500 kcmil
1200A
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(3) #2500 kcmil
(4) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
Refer to Table 22.5-3 on Page 22.5-2.
Note: Optional 750 kcmil mechanical screw-type terminals are available upon request. Panelboard dimensions may be affected. Refer to Eaton.
Table 22.0-4. Standard Main Breaker and Branch Breaker Terminals

Breaker Type BAB, HQP QBHW, QPHW EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC EGB, EGS, EGH EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE FCL GHB GHQ HGHB GHQRSP GHBS JD, JDB, HJD, JDC DK Ampere Rating 1570 90100 1570 90100 100225 15125 15100 125225 175225 15100 15100 1520 1530 1520 1530 70250 250350 400 150350 100225 250350 400 Wire Size Ranges #14#4 #8#1/0 #14#4 #8#1/0 #4#4/0 or #6300 kcmil #143/0 #14#1/0 #4#4/0 #6#350 #14#1/0 #14#1/0 #14#1/0 #14#1/0 #14#4 #14#1/0 #4350 kcmil 250500 kcmil (2) 3/0250 kcmil or (1) 3/0500 kcmil #2600 kcmil (1) #3350 kcmil (1) 250500 kcmil (2) 3/0250 kcmil (1) 3/0500 kcmil
Table 22.0-4. Standard Main Breaker and Branch Breaker Terminals (Continued)
Breaker Type LGE, LGH, LHH, LGC, LGU LD, HLD, LDC, CLD , CHLD , CLDC MDL, HMDL, CMDL , CHMDL ND, HND, NDC, CND , CHND , CNDC LCL Ampere Rating 250400 500600 300500 600 400600 700800 6001000 1200 125225 250400 15100 70225 250400 350700 800 Wire Size Ranges (1) #2500 kcmil (2) #2500 kcmil (2) 250350 kcmil (2) 400500 kcmil (2) #1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil (2) 500750 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil (4) 4/0500 kcmil (1) #6350 kcmil (1) #4250 kcmil and (1) 3/0600 kcmil #141/0 #6350 kcmil (1) #4250 kcmil and (1) 3/0600 kcmil (2) #1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil
FB-P LA-P
NB-P
100% rated breaker.
NHH KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, CKD , CHKD
Table 22.0-5. Fusible Switch Terminals

Ampere Rating 30, 60, 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Wire Size Ranges #141/0 #4300 kcmil 250750 kcmil or (2) 3/0250 kcmil (2) #4600 kcmil or (4) 3/0250 kcmil (3) 250750 kcmil or (6) 3/0250 kcmil (4) 250750 kcmil or (8) 3/0250 kcmil
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
100% rated breaker.
Note: For other terminals available on some ratings of molded-case circuit breakers, refer to Tab 27. Note: All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding to those shown in NEC Table 310.16 under 75C insulation columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills), regardless of insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
CA08104001E

Technical Data and SpecicationsSeries Ratings
September 2011
Sheet 22 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series Rated Combinations

UL permits panelboards to be labeled with a short-circuit rating of up to 200,000A symmetrical where UL listed combinations of main and branch circuits are used. These combinations consist of main breakers or fusible devices connected ahead of, and in series with approved conventional devices. Two arrangements are acceptable and comply with UL standards for panelboards. The main circuit breaker may be installed in the panel as a main device (Figure 22.0-4), or it may be mounted remote (Figure 22.0-5) from the panel. In either case, the approved main and branch combinations must be followed. These arrangements are acceptable and are UL listed having been tested in accordance with UL standards. From the tables on Page 22.0-12 through Page 22.0-20, specic combinations of main devices (upstream) and branch devices (downstream), series connected and electrically adjacent in the system, may be selected to qualify the assembled panelboard for the short-circuit ratings shown. Series ratings apply only to those Eaton breakers listed and published. Do not use Classied breakers.
Industry standards and the NEC require protection of the entire electrical distribution system from damage due to short-circuit faults. Article 230.205 of the NEC states that service equipment shall be suitable for the short-circuit current available at its supply terminals. The entire distribution system is required to meet this standard. Series rated systems have become an effective method of meeting these requirements. There are three protection systems used to protect low voltage power distribution equipment. They are: Fully rated protection Fully rated, selectively coordinated protection Series rated protection

series connected ratings in assembled equipment. The assembled equipment must also be UL tested for series ratings.
Code Issues
The fault current contribution of motors connected between series rated breakers must be considered. Article 240.86 in the NEC states that for series ratings, the sum of the motor full-load currents cannot exceed 1% of the interrupting rating of the lower rated circuit breaker. The actual fault current contribution from induction motors is about four times their full-load current (impedance value of 25%). For example, if the downstream branch circuit breakers used in a series rated combination have an interrupting rating of 14,000A rms symmetrical for a 480V system, the maximum allowable motor contribution to that panel from the branch circuit breakers is 140A (1%). For typical induction motors, this is equivalent to a total horsepower at 480V of approximately 115 horsepower. Requirements of the NEC (NFPA-70) for series ratings may be met by equipment marked with ratings adequate for the available fault current at the point of application in the electrical system. Eaton panelboards and switchboards are marked consistent with NEC Article 240.83. Additionally, Article 110.22 requires eld marking on equipment where series ratings are used. This label is supplied standard with all Eaton panelboards and switchboards.
Fully Rated ProtectionWhere all overcurrent devices are rated for the full prospective short-circuit current at their line side terminals throughout the system. Selectively Coordinated Protection A fully rated system where the overcurrent device closest to the fault will open rst, thus isolating the faulty circuit. Series Rated ProtectionA shortcircuit interrupting rating assigned to a combination of two or more overcurrent protective devices that are connected in series and in which the rating of the downstream device(s) in the combination is less than the series rating. Series ratings are also known in the industry as integrated ratings, series combination ratings and series connected ratings.
UL Labeled Upstream Overcurrent Device UL Labeled Conventional Branch Breakers Neutral
UL Issues
In a series rated system, all of the overcurrent devices in series in the protective scheme must have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories for series combination use in the system. All Eatons series ratings are in full compliance with all applicable requirements of the latest editions of UL 489, 891 and 67. The UL Recognized Component Directory (the Yellow Book) contains breaker manufacturers series connected listings. These are intended ONLY as a guideline for use by others who are responsible for their own testing, labeling and listing. Therefore, the UL Recognized Component Directory cannot be used to interpret
NEC Required Caution Label Note: The NEC requires the installer to properly apply and complete this label. Label(s) must be placed on all equipment where series ratings are used.
Figure 22.0-4. Main Device

UL Labeled Remote Upstream Overcurrent Device Main Lugs UL Labeled Conventional Branch Breakers
Neutral
Figure 22.0-5. Mounted Remote
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 011
22.0-11
Fuses can be used instead of circuit breakers in fully rated, selectively coordinated and series connected protection systems. See the tables on Page 22.0-17 through Page 22.0-18 for fuse breaker data applied to series connected designs. Dont apply fuses using the upover-down method, which has been recommended by some fuse manufacturers for sizing a currentlimiting fuse that protects a downstream molded-case circuit breaker with a specied rms symmetrical interrupting rating. The method can lead to erroneous and unsafe conclusions, and should not be used. Example: Assume a specic type of current-limiting fuse rated 2000A. Then using the gure below: 1. Draw a vertical line from the prospective short-circuit current of 200 kA to intersect the typical peak let-through curve at A. 2. Draw a horizontal line left from Point A to intersect the prospective peak curve at B. 3. Drop a vertical line from B to intersect the horizontal axis and read the recommended rating, 65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit breaker with a 65 kA interrupting capacity will be protected by a specied 2000A current-limiting fuse. This conclusion is wrong when the downstream service has a blow-open contact assembly, as does a moldedcase circuit breaker or similar device. The reason: The up-over-down method ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent current-limiting of the downstream molded-case circuit breaker). Such impedance is developed directly by the forces of the let-through current created when the contacts are blown open. For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to recommendations by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker, which are based on actual test data.
Prospective Peak Let-through Current in Amperes
Fuse Application Considerations
Example 1: 240V, three-phase, three-wire, AC system with available fault current of 37,438A. Main (upstream) device is a three-pole, 150A, FD breaker. The branch (downstream) breakers are two- and three-pole, 20, 30 and 60A, 240V, BAB breakers. 1. Go to the 240V table (Table 22.0-7). 2. Look down under the 42 kA column. This rating is not shown. 3. Look to the columns to the right. This rating is shown under the 65 kA column, and therefore is valid. Example 2: 480Y/277V, three-phase, four-wire, AC system with available fault current of 62,097A. Main (upstream) device is a three-pole, 250A, HJD breaker. The branch (downstream) breakers are two- and three-pole, 60, 70 and 100A FDB breakers. 1. Go to the 480Y/277V table (Table 22.0-10). 2. Look down under the 65 kA column. This rating is not shown. 3. Look to the columns to the right. This rating is still not shown. 4. Look at the table with the next higher system voltage (480V, Table 22.0-11). 5. This rating is shown under the 65 kA column, and therefore is valid. Example 3: 208Y/120V, three-phase, four-wire, AC system with available fault current of 56,438A. Main (upstream) device is a three-pole, 225A, ED breaker. The branch (downstream) breakers are single-pole, 20A BAB (120/240V), and two- and three-pole, 70A BAB (240V). 1. Go to the 240V table (Table 22.0-7). 2. Look under the 65 kA column. This rating is shown under the 65 kA column, and therefore is valid for the two- and three-pole (240V) breakers. 3. Look at the 120/240V table (Table 22.0-6) for the single-pole (120/240V) rating. 4. Look under the 65 kA column. This rating is shown under the 65 kA column, and therefore is valid for the single-pole (120/240V) breakers.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
460,000
Asymmetrical Prospective Peak Curve at 15% Power Factor B A 2000 Ampere Current-limiter Fuse Curve
150,000
65,000
200,000
Prospective Short-circuit rms Amperes Do Not Use This Method
Figure 22.0-6. Old Up-Over-Down Chart
Applying Series Ratings

The following is provided to use the series rating tables on the following pages. Step 1. Determine the available system voltage and fault current. Step 2. Select the appropriate table using the system voltage. Step 3. Use the appropriate Series Equipment Rating column equal to, or greater than, the available fault current, to determine the allowable combinations of main (upstream) and branch (downstream) overcurrent devices. Main devices are shown in bold/shaded areas. Respective branch breakers are shown directly below their associated main device. If a rating is not initially found in a column, rst look to the columns to the right for higher Series Equipment Ratings within the same table. If still not found, use ratings from table of a higher system voltage (higher numbered tables).
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Other Applications of Series Ratings

Series ratings can also be applied under the following guidelines: Any FULLY RATED breaker can be applied upstream, downstream, or in the middle of, any of the series ratings stated in the tables. Any series rating stated in the tables may have additional branch breakers of the EXACT SAME TYPE further downstream in that rating. COMBINING SERIES RATINGS is allowed under certain conditions.
Main and branch series ratings may be combined if: Breakers A, B and C are in series respectively from main to branch. Breakers A and B series rate together, breakers A and C series rate at the same interrupting rating level (or higher), it is allowable to use A, B and C together at the A-B series rating. It is improper to combine series ratings under the following condition: Breakers A, B and C are in series respectively from main to branch. Breakers A and B series rate together,
breakers B and C series rate at the same interrupting rating level (or higher), it is NOT allowable to use A, B and C together at the A-B or B-C series rating. However, combining multiple overcurrent devices as in this example, can be accomplished if all devices in the series combination have been tested together and listed in triple rating Table 22.0-19. Main devices shown centered at top in shaded area, respective branch devices shown directly below.
Table 22.0-6. 120/240 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical Breaker 18 22 42 65 Maximum Amperes 100 EHD BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QPHW BA, BAB HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG GB, GHB BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QPHW 100 200
FB-P BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QPHW EHD FD
FCL BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QPHW GB, GHB GHQ EHD FD HFD
125
EGH GHQ, GHB FDB BA, BAB HQP QBGF QBAF QBAG
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
150
200
LA-P BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW EHD FD
225
EDB BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBHGF QPHGF QBHW QPHW QBAF QBAG
EDS BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBHGF QPHGF QBHW QPHW QBAF QBAG
ED, FD, FDE BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QBHGF
EDH, EDC BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG
HFD, HFDE BA, BAB HQP QBGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QPHW QBHGF GB, GHB GHQ, GHQRSP EHD, EGS FD
FDC BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW
FDC GB, GHB GHQ GHQRSP EHD FD HFD EGS EGH
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 013
22.0-13
Table 22.0-6. 120/240 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings (Continued) Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical Breaker 18 22 42 65 Maximum Amperes 250 JD, JDB BA (1570A) BAB (1570A) HQP (1570A) QBHW QPHW EHD 400 DK, KD KDB BA, BAB BABRP BABRSP HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG DK, KD KDB, CKD BA (1570A) BAB (1570A) BABRP BABRSP HQP (1570A) QBHW QPHW HKD, CHKD BA (1570A) BAB (1570A) BABRP BABRSP HQP (1570A) QBHW QPHW HJD BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW JDC QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG 100 200
22 23 24 25
LCL BA, BAB HQP QBGF QPGF QBAF QBAG QBHW QPHW GB, GHB EHD FD HFD
HJD GB, GHB EHD FD EGS
JDC BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW
JDC GB, GHB EHD FD HFD EGS EGH KDC GB, GHB EHD FD HFD EGS EGH
DK, KD KDB CKD EHD
KDC BA (1570A) BAB (1570A) HQP (1570A)
HKD CHKD GB, GHB EHD FD EGS
KDC QBHW QPHW
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
600 800 1200
CHLD, HLD EHD HMDL EHD HND EHD
Not valid with CHKD.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Table 22.0-7. 240 VacBreaker/BreakerSeries Ratings For single- and two-pole 120/240V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-6. Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main Breaker Maximum Amperes 100 Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical 18 22 42 65 100 200
EHD BAB_H HQP_H
QBHW_H QPHW_H BAB_H HQP_H
GB, GHB BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H
FB-P BAB_H HQP_H EHD FDB FD
FCL BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H GB, GHB EHD FD, FDE FDB HFD, HFDE
150
FDB BAB_H HQP_H
200
LA-P BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H EHD FDB FD JD, JDB
225
EDB HQP_H BAB_H QBHW QPHW
EDS HQP_H BAB_H QBHW QPHW
ED BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H
FD, FDE BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H EHD (1570A) FDB
EDH, EDC BAB_H HQP_H
HFD, HFDE FDC BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H GB, GHB EHD FDB FD, FDE JDC BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H
FDC GB, GHB EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE
32 33 34
250
JD, JDB BAB_H (1570A) HQP_H (1570A) QBHW_H QPHW_H EHD FDB
HJD BAB_H (1570A) HQP_H (1570A) QBHW_H QPHW_H
HJD GB, GHB EHD FD FDB ED JD, JDB EGS
JDC GB, GHB EHD FD, FDE FDB HFD, EDB, EDS ED, HFDE EDH JD, JDB HJD, EGS, EGH
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 015
22.0-15
Table 22.0-8. 240 VacBreaker/BreakerSeries Ratings For single- and two-pole 120/240V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-6. Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main Breaker Maximum Amperes 400 Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical 65 100 200
22 23
DK, KD, KDB CKD BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H EHD FDB
HKD, CHKD QBHW_H QPHW_H GB, GHB EHD FDB FD, EDB, EDS ED JD, JDB DK, KD, KDB EGS
KDC QBHW_H QPHW_H
KDC GB, GHB EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, EDB, EDS, HFDE ED EDH JD, JDB HJD DK, KD, KDB HKD
LCL BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H GB, GHB EHD FDB FD, HFD, EDB, EDS ED, FDE, HFDE EDH JD, JDB HJD DK, KD, KDB HKD
24 25 26 27 28 29
500
NB-P JD, JDB KD, KDB, DK CKD
600
HLD, HLDB, CHLD GB , GHB FD, EDB, EDS ED, EHD JD, JDB KD, KDB, DK, CKD LD, LDB
LDC EDB, EDS, ED EDH
30 31 32
NDC EDB, EDS, ED EDH RDC EDB, EDS, ED EDH
800
NB-P KD, KDB, DK
HMDL EHD FD
1200
HND, CHND EDB, EDS, ED EHD
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2500
RD EDB, EDS, ED
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole. Not valid with CHKD.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Series Rated Combinations (Continued)

Main devices shown in shaded area, respective branch devices shown directly below. Table 22.0-9. 277 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, see other tables.
FCL GHB GHQ, GHQRSP EHD FD HFD
125 225
EGS GHQ, GHB FD, FDE GHB GHQ GHQRSP
EGH GHQ, GHB HFD, HFDE GHB, GHQRSP GHQ EHD FD HJD GHB (1550A) EHD FD HKD, CHKD GHB (1550A) EHD FD FDC GHB EHD FD HFD LCL GHBS JDC GHB EHD FD HFD LCL GHB EHD FD HFD
250
JD, JDB GHB
JD, JDB GHB (1550A)
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
225 400
KD, KDB CKD GHB
HKD CHKD GHB
KD, KDB CKD GHB (1550A) EHD FD
KDC GHB (1550A) EHD FD HFD
Table 22.0-10. 480Y/277 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. For single-pole branch breakers, see Table 22.0-9.
Main Breaker Maximum Amperes 100 125 EGS GHB FD, FDE GHB, GHQRSP 250 400 JD, JDB GHB KD, KDB CKD GHB HKD, CHKD GHB JD, JDB GHB (1550A) KD, KDB CKD GHB (1550A) EGH GHB HFD, HFDE GHB, GHQRSP HJD GHB (1550A) HKD, CHKD GHB (1550A) FDC GHB JDC GHB KDC GHB (1550A) LCL GHB Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical 22 25 35 65 100 150
FCL GHB, GHQRSP
38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 017
22.0-17

Main devices shown in shaded area, respective branch devices shown directly below. Table 22.0-11. 480 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Main Breaker Maximum Amperes 100 Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical 25 35 65 100 150
22 23 24 25
FB-P EHD FDB FD HFD
FCL EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE
26 27 28 29 30
200
LA-P EHD FDB FD HFD JD, JDB HJD
225
FD, FDE EHD FDB
HFD, HFDE EHD FDB FD, FDE EGS HJD EHD FDB FD JD, JDB EGS
FDC EHD, EGS, EGH FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE JDC EHD, EGS, EGH FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE JD, JDB HJD KDC EHD, EGS, EGH FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE JD, JDB HJD KD, KDB HKD NB-P JD, JDB HJD KD, KDB HKD LA-P JD, JDB HJD KD, KDB HKD LCL FDE, HFDE
250
JD, JDB EHD FDB
31 32
400
KD, KDB EHD FDB
HKD EHD FDB FD, FDE JD, JDB KD, KDB EGS
LCL EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC JD, JDB HJD KD, KDB HKD
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
500
600
LD, LDB CLD JD, JDB
HLD, HLDB CHLD FD, FDE JD, JDB KD, KDB LD, LDB
Not valid with HFDE.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Table 22.0-12. 600 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
FD FDB
HFD FDB FD HJD FDB FD JD, JDB
FDC FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE JDC FDB FD HFD JD, JDB HJD HKD, CHKD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE JD, JDB HJD KDC FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE KDC JD, JDB HJD KD, KDB HKD LCL FDE, HFDE
250
JD, JDB FDB
400
KD, KDB CKD FDB FD JD, JDB
LCL FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC JD, JDB HJD JDC KD, KDB HKD KDC
600
LD, LDB CLD FD JD, JDB
HLD, HLDB CHLD KD, KDB LD, LDB
32 33 34 35 36 37
200
Table 22.0-13. 120/240 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main Fuse Maximum Amperes 100 Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical 100 200
R BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW GB GHB R GB GHB J BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW J GB GHB T BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW T GB GHB
38 39 40 41 42 43
400 J BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW T BA, BAB HQP QBHW QPHW
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 019
22.0-19

Main devices shown in shaded area, respective branch devices shown directly below. Table 22.0-14. 240 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings For single- and two-pole 120/240V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-13. Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
22 23 24 25
R BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H GB GHB
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
200
R GB GHB
J BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H J GB GHB
T BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H T GB GHB
R GB GHB
400
J BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H
T BAB_H HQP_H QBHW_H QPHW_H L EHD FDB FD, FDE ED JD, JDB DK, KD, KDB
600
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. See Table 22.0-13 for single-pole.
Table 22.0-15. 277 Vac Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings Main fuse class are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, consult other tables.
Main Fuse Maximum Amperes 100 Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical 65 100 200
J GHBS GHQ GHQRSP
T GHBS GHQ GHQRSP T EHD FD HFD R GHB
R GHB
200
J GHBS GHQ GHQRSP
T GHBS GHQ GHQRSP
J EHD FD HFD
38
J GHB T GHB
400
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 22.0-16. 480Y/277 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. For single-pole branch breakers, see Table 22.0-15.
Main Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical Fuse 65 100 200 Maximum Amperes 100 200 400 600 J EHD FD, FDE HFD FDC HFDE T GHB EHD FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC JD HJD JDC 400 J GHBS T GHBS J GHBS T GHBS R GHB J GHB T GHB 200 J T R GHB
Table 22.0-18. 600 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
R FD HFD FDC R FD, FDE FD, FDE JD HFD, HFDE HFD, HFDE HJD FDC FDC JDC J JD HJD JDC T JD HJD JDC R KD HKD KDC J KD HKD KDC T KD HKD KDC
600
Table 22.0-17. 480 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Main Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical Fuse 100 200 Maximum Amperes 100 200 J EHD FD HFD FDC T EHD FD HFD FDC R EHD
Table 22.0-19. Triple Series Ratings

Main Fuse Class and Maximum Amperes L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000 L-6000
Tenant Main Type
Branch Type
System Voltage
ShortCircuit Series Rating (kA, Sym.) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
DK, KD, KDB DK, KD, KDB DK, KD, KDB DK, KD, KDB JD, JDB JD, JDB FD FD FD, FDB FD, FDB EHD EHD
GB, GHB, EHD GB, GHB FD , FDB JD, JDB GB, GHB GB, GHB GB, GHB GB, GHB BAB_H, HQP_H QBHW_H, QPHW_H BA, BAB HQP (1570A) BAB_H, HQP_H BA, BAB, HQP
240 120/240 240 240 240 120/240 240 120/240 240 120/240 240 120/240
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 021
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1a
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1a
22.1-1
Pow-R-Line 1a
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100, 225 and 400.
Table 22.1-1. Main Circuit Breakers

Breaker Frame Amperes 100 100 100 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 400 Breaker Type Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 240 Vac 10 22 18 18 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 200 100
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
BAB QBHW EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC, FDCE EDB EDS ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC DK KD HKD KDC LHH
Main Circuit Breakers

The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main breaker only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device or the rating of an approved series rated combination.
Pow-R-Line 1a
General Description
Panelboard Ratings Voltage
240 Vac maximum 100400A 100400A 15100A (Bolt-on or plug-on chassis) 240 Vac: 10 kA and 22 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated
BAB, HQP BAB, HQP BAB, HQP BAB-D , HQP-D BAB-C , HQP-B BABRP BABRSP QBGF, QBGFEP, QPGF, QPGFEP QBCAF QBHW QBHW QBHW QBHGF, QBGFEP QPHGF, QPHGFEP QBHCAF

Main Lugs
Table 22.1-2. Branch Circuit Breakers

Breaker Type Ampere Rating 1570 15100 15100 1560 1530 1530 1530 1550 1550 1520 1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1520 Number of Poles 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1 Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 120/240 Vac 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 240 Vac 10 22
Main Breakers
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Branch Breakers
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (Symmetrical)

Service
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V and 240/120V delta Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 208 and 240V
Suitable for service entrance applications when specied.
Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.1-1. Main breakers, 100A, Types BAB and QBH are horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker. Switching neutral breaker. Single-pole device requires two-pole space, two-pole device requires three-pole space. Solenoid operated breaker. 50A is two-pole only. Arc fault breaker.

Refer to series rating tables beginning on Page 22.0-12 for the approved series rated combinations available for the branch circuit breakers listed in Table 22.1-2.
Branch Circuits
For available branch devices, refer to Table 22.1-2.
CA08104001E
22.1-2 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1a

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1a
September 2011
Sheet 22 022
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing
100400A: Tin-plated aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option.
Table 22.1-5. Sub-Feed Breakers (One Per Panel)

Ampere Rating 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 Breaker Type FDB FD HFD FDC EDB EDS ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC DK KD HKD KDC Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 240V 18 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 200
Box Sizing and Selection

Box size for all Type 1 panelboards are available from Table 22.1-6.
Instructions
1. Select the rating and type of mains required. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles (including spaces) required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles. Convert two- or three-pole branch breakers to single-poles, i.e., three-pole breaker, count as three poles.
Note: For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge galvanized steel. Blank ends are supplied as standard, knockouts are available upon request.
EZ Trim
Trims are made from code-gauge steel and painted ANSI 61 gray. All panelboards have door-in-door as standard with multi-point catch and lock, and concealed mounting hardware.
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on breakers. BAB, HQP, QBHW and QPHW require one additional pole space for shunt trip, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size and threepole is four-pole size.
Modications
Table 22.1-3. Sub-Feed Lugs (Main Lugs Only)
Ampere Rating 100 225 Panel Height Addition 0 Inches (0 mm) 0 Inches (0 mm)
3. Using correct table, type of mains and ampere rating per Step 1, nd total number of poles.
Note: Where total number of poles (Step 2) fall between number in table, use the next higher number.
Ground Bar
Standard bolted in box. Aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option.
4. Read box size across columns to the right.
Table 22.1-4. Through-Feed Lugs

Ampere Rating 100 225 400 Information See Table 22.1-6 See Table 22.1-6 See Table 22.1-6
Top and Bottom Gutters (Minimum)

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4 and 4X.
Side Gutters
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide box: 6.50 inches (165.1 mm).
Surge Protective Device (SPD)

Integrated onto panelboard chassis. For complete product description and available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 023
22.1-3
Table 22.1-6. Type 1 PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Rating of Mains Main Breaker Type Mounting Position Maximum Number of Branch Circuits Including Provisions 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 Mains 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 Box Dimensions Height Width Depth
22 23
100A
100A Main lugs or main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE Vertical
36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
100A Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE Vertical
225A
225A Main lugs or main breaker EDB, EDS, ED EDH, EDC FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE Vertical
225A Main lugs or main breaker with 225A or 100A sub-feed lugs or breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE FDC, EDB, EDS, HFDE, FDCE ED, EDH, EDC Vertical
400A
400A Main lugs or main breaker DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH Vertical
400A Main lugs or main breaker with 225A or 100A sub-feed lugs or breaker
DK, KD, HKD KDC, LHH Vertical EHD, FDB, FD HFD, FDC EDB, EDS, ED EDH, EDC Vertical
Sub-feed breakers
Greater than 42 branch circuit panelboards are available for jurisdiction governed by the 2008 National Electrical Code. Smaller panelboard box sizes are available if required. Contact Eaton for application information. Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) for SPD. 28.00-inch (711.2) optional width is available for panelboards with high circuit counts. For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains. JD, HJD, JDC is same space requirement as 400A DK, HKD, KDC.
CA08104001E
22.1-4 Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 025
22.2-1
Pow-R-Line 2a
Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.2-1.
The GHB main breaker is horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
Main Lugs Only

22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Branch Circuits

The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main breaker only. The short circuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device or the rating of an approved series rated combination.
Pow-R-Line 2a
General Description
Panelboard Ratings Voltage:
240 Vac maximum 480Y/277 Vac maximum

Breaker Frame (Amperes) 100 100 150 225 225 225 225 250 250 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 400
Breaker Type GHB EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC, FDCE ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC DK KD HKD LHH KDC
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 65 18 18 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 100 200 480Y/277 Vac 14 14 14 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 65 100 125/250 Vdc 14 10 10 10 22 22 10 22 22 10 10 22 22
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Note: PRL2a panelboards are suitable for use on three-phase, three-wire applications when derived from a three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277 Vac service where the neutral is not brought to the panelboard. For threephase, three-wire 480 Vac Delta services use a PRL3a panelboard.
250 Vdc maximum 100400A 100400A 15100A (bolt-on)
Main Lugs:
Main Breakers:
For use on 480Y/277 Vac systems only.
Branch Breakers:

Breaker Type GHB GHB GHQ Ampere Rating 15100 15100 1520 Number of Poles 1 2, 3 1 1 1, 2 1 Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 65 65 65 65 240 Vac 65 65 277 Vac 14 14 25 14 14 480Y/277 Vac 14 14 125/250 Vdc 14 14

240 Vac: 65 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 100200 kA series rated 480Y/277 Vac: 14 kA fully rated 480Y/277 Vac: 22150 kA series rated 250 Vdc: 10 kA and 14 kA fully rated

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
HGHB 1530 GHQRSP 1520 GHBGFEP 1560

Service

For use on 480Y/277 Vac systems only. Solenoid operated breaker.
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V and 240/120 V Delta and 480Y/277V Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 208 and 240V Two-wire 125 Vdc Two-wire 250 Vdc

CA08104001E

Technical DataPow-R-Line 2a
September 2011
Sheet 22 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Technical Data
Bussing
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on breakers. GHB breakers with shunt trips require three-pole frame.

Box size for all Type 1 panelboards are available from Table 22.2-6. Instructions 1. Using description on the required panelboard, select the rating and type of mains required. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles (including spaces) required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles. Convert two- or three-pole branch breakers to single-poles. i.e., three-pole breaker, count as three poles.
Note: For horizontal mounted mains (GHB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Ground Bar
Standard bolted in box. Aluminum is standard. Copper is available as an option.
Boxes
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4/4X.
EZ Trim

Modications
Amperes 100 225 Panel Height Addition 0 Inches (0 mm) 0 Inches (0 mm)

Amperes 100 225 400 Information
4. Read box size across columns to the right. Top and Bottom Gutters (minimum)
See Table 22.2-6 See Table 22.2-6 See Table 22.2-6
5.50 inches (139.7 mm). Side Gutters 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide box: 5.50 inches (139.7 mm).

Ampere Rating Breaker Type Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240V 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 250 250 250 400 400 400 FDB FD HFD FDC ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC KD HKD KDC 18 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 480Y/277V 14 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 027
Technical DataPow-R-Line 2a
22.2-3

Ampere Rating of Mains Main Breaker Type Mounting Position Maximum Number of Branch Circuits Including Provisions 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 Main 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 Box Dimensions Height Width Depth
22 23 24
100A Panelboards
100A Main lugs or main breaker EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE Vertical 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE Vertical
225A Panelboards
225A Main lugs or main breaker ED, EDH, EDC, FDE FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE vertical
225A Main lugs or main breaker with 225 or 100A through-feed lugs or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE ED, EDH, EDC vertical
400A Panelboards
400A Main lugs or main breaker DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH vertical
DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH Vertical EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC vertical
Sub-feed breaker
Greater than 42 branch circuit panelboards are available for jurisdiction governed by the 2008 National Electrical Code. Smaller panelboard box sizes are available if required. Contact Eaton for application information. Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) for SPD. 28.00-inch (711.2) optional width is available for panelboards with high circuit counts. For horizontal mounted mains (GHB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains. JD, HJD, JDC is same space requirements as 400A DK, HKD, KDC.
CA08104001E
22.2-4 Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 029
22.3-1
Pow-R-Line 3a
Mains
Main breakers, 100, 150 and 225A, Types EHD, FD, FDE, FDB, HFD, HFDE and FDC may be horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100, 250, 400, 600 and 800.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Branch Circuits

The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main breaker only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device, or the rating of an approved series rated combination.
Pow-R-Line 3a

Breaker Frame (Amperes) 100 100 100 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 600 600 400 400 600 600 600 600 600 600

General Description
240 Vac maximum 480 Vac maximum 600 Vac maximum 250 Vdc maximum
Breaker Type EHD FCL FB-P FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC, FDCE EDB EDS ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC DK KD HKD LHH KDC LCL LA-P LGE LGH LGC LGU LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 18 200 200 18 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 200 65 100 200 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 480 Vac 14 150 200 14 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 65 100 200 200 35 65 100 150 35 65 100 35 65 100 600 Vac 200 14 18 25 35 18 25 35 25 35 65 200 18 35 50 65 25 35 50 25 35 50 250 Vdc 10
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
10 10 22 22 10 22 22 10 10 22 22
Main Lugs
100800A 100600A
Main Breakers
Branches
240 Vac 15225A 480 Vac 15225A 600 Vac 15225A (bolt-on)
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical)

240 Vac: 10200 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated 480 Vac: 14100 kA fully rated 480 Vac: 22150 kA series rated 250 Vdc: 1022 kA fully rated Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V, 240/120V delta and 480Y/277V Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 240, 480 and 600V Two-wire 125 Vdc Two-wire 250 Vdc
Service

22 22 42 50 22 25 25 22 25 25
100,000 AIC based on NEMA test procedure. 100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 or 4X enclosure.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 030
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43


Breaker Type Ampere Rating Number Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Volts of Poles 120 120/240 240 480 600 125 Vac Vac Vac Vac Vac Vdc 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1 1 2, 3 1 1 1 1, 2 1 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 65 10 22 65 65 65 65 65 65 14 18 18 65 65 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200 14 14 14 25 14 14 14 14 14 35 35 65 65 100 14 18 25 35 14 14 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 250 Vdc 14 10 10 10 22 22
BAB BAB BAB BAB-D BAB-C BABRP BABRSP QBGF, QBGFEP QBCAF QBHW QBHW QBHW QBHGF, QBHGFEP QBHCAF GHB GHB GHQ HGHB GHBGFEP GHQRSP EHD EHD FDB FD FD, FDE HFD HFD, HFDE FDC, FDCE EDB EDS ED EDH EDC

1570 15100 15100 1560 1530 1530 1530 1550 1520 1570 15100 15100 1550 1520 15100 15100 1520 1530 1560 1520 15100 15100 15150 15100 15225 15100 15225 15225 100225 100225 100225 100225 100225
HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker. Switching neutral breaker. Single-pole device requires two-pole space, two-pole device requires three-pole space. Solenoid operated breaker. 50A is two-pole only. Arc fault breaker. For use on 480Y/277 Vac systems only. Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 031
22.3-3

Bussing
Tin-plated aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option. Density rated bus is also available as an option.
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on breakers. BAB and QBHW require one additional pole space for shunt trip, i.e., singlepole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size and three-pole is four-pole size. GHB breakers with shunt trip require three-pole frame.
Ground Bar
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Enclosures
Types 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Note: Type 12, 3R, 4/4X enclosures are not available for 800A applications.
Boxes
Remote Control Switches

ASCO 920 can be bus connected and mounted in panel for main or sub-main (split-bus) applications.

All mains: 5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
EZ Trim
Time Clocks
Time clocks are mounted at the top or bottom of the panel, either in extended end gutters or in a separate enclosure under a separate door.
Maximum Panel Height X Units Box Dimensions Height
Side Gutters (Minimum)

4.00 inches (101.6 mm).
Table 22.3-6. Type 1 Box SizesDimensions in Inches (mm)

Width Depth
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Modications
Ampere Rating 100 250 Added Panel Height 0X 1X
100400A
14X 23X 31X 40X 53X 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)

Ampere Rating 100 250 400 600 Added Panel Height 2X 5X 8X 8X
600800A
23X 31X 40X 53X
Note: Sub-feed breakers and through-feed lugs cannot be supplied in the same panel.

Ampere Rating Breaker Interrupting Added Type Rating Panel (kA Symmetrical) Height 240 V 225/250 225/250 225/250 400 400 400 600 600 600 JD HJD JDC KD HKD KDC LD HLD LDC 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 480 V 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 14X
15X
17X
Note: Sub-feed breakers and through-feed lugs cannot be supplied in the same panel. Note: Twin mounted J-Frame sub-feed breakers are available. Requires 20X panel height addition.
CA08104001E

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 3a Panel Layout Instructions
1. Select: a. Required mains (lugs or breaker). b. Neutral where required. c. Branch circuits as required. 2. Layout panel as shown in Table 22.3-7, using appropriate X dimensions. 3. Using total X units (panel height) nd box height in inches from Table 22.3-6. (When total X units come out to an uneven number, use next highest number, i.e., if total X comes out 25X, use 31X.) Table 22.3-7. Layout Example
Poles 3X-6 5X-12 8X-18 10X-24 13X-30 BAB QBGF QBHW QBHGF QBGFEP QBCAF GHB GHQ HGHB QBHGF QBHCAF GHBGFEP GHQRSP
September 2011
Sheet 22 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
15X-36 18X-42
Multiple selections may be used on panel. Single-pole Two-pole Single-pole Two-pole Neutral selection Two- and three-pole Main lug section 5X 100, 250A 8X 400, 600, 800A 3X, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, FDE, EDC , FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE (225A maximum) 2X 100A 5X 250A 8X 400, 600A 14X800A
Single-pole Two-pole Three-pole
1X 2X 3X

EHD FDB FD,FDE (150A HFD, HFDE maximum) FDC
Surge protective device Horizontal mounting
2X two-pole EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC , EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC 3X three-pole EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE, FDC , HFDE, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC 7X EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FDE, HFDE 9X FCL, FB-P 14X JD, HJD, JDC 15X DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH 17X LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD, CLDC 18X LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU 21X LCL , LA-P
Main breaker section Vertically mounted
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
GHB, GHQ and HGHB breakers cannot be mixed on same connector as BAB, QBHW. Sizing shown is for 100% rated neutral with mechanical lugs. For 200% rated neutral with mechanical lugs, add 3X. For special lug arrangements, contact Eaton. Maximum of six breakers per panel. Add 5X for 200 kA maximum SPD. Horizontally mounted 15225A main breakers EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, may be furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch breakers single-, two- or three-pole as required, may be located opposite these main breakers (150A maximum). FB-P and LA-P top mounting only. LCL, LA-P main breaker requires 6.50 inch (165.1 mm) deep box.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 033
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 3E
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 3E
22.3-5
Pow-R-Line 3E
Mains
Main breakers, 100, 150 and 225A, Types EG, EHD, FD, FDE, FDB, HFD, HFDE and FDC may be horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100, 250, 400 and 600.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Branch Circuits

Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 35 100 200 22 42 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 100 200 65 100 480 Vac 18 35 65 35 65 100 35 65 65 100 35 65 250 Vdc 10 35 42 10 22 22 10 22 22 22 22
Pow-R-Line 3E

Breaker Frame (Amperes) 125 125 125 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 400 400 400 400 400 600 600
General Description
240 Vac maximum 480 Vac maximum 250 Vdc maximum

Breaker Type EGB EGS EGH EDB EDS ED EDH EDC FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC DK KD HKD LHH KDC LGE LGH
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Main Lugs
100600A 100600A 240 Vac 15125A 480 Vac 15125A
Main Breakers
Branches

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical)

240 Vac: 25100 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 65100 kA series rated 480 Vac:1865 kA fully rated 480 Vac: 65100 kA series rated
Horizontally/branch mounted.

Breaker Type EGB EGS EGH
Ampere Rating 15125 15125 15125
Number of Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 35 100 200 240 Vac 35 100 200 277 Vac 18 35 65 480 Vac 18 35 65 250 Vdc 10 35 42
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Service

Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V, 240/120V delta and 480Y/277V Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 240 and 480V Two-wire 125 Vdc Two-wire 250 Vdc
Applicable to single-pole devices only.

CA08104001E
22.3-6 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 3E

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 3E
September 2011
Sheet 22 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing
Modications
Table 22.3-10. Through-Feed Lugs, Sub-Feed Lugs (Main Lug Panels Only) and Sub-Feed Breakers (One Per Panel)
Ampere Rating All Information Table 22.3-11

Instructions
1. Using description on the required panelboard, select the rating and type of mains required. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles (including spaces) required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles. Convert two- or three-pole branch breakers to single-poles, i.e., three-pole breaker, count as three poles.
Note: For horizontal mounted mains (GHB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Boxes
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on two- and three-pole breakers.
Ground Bar
EZ Trim
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4/4X.


5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 035
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 3E
22.3-7

Ampere Rating of Mains Main Breaker Type Mounting Position Maximum Number of Branch Circuits Including Provisions 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 84 Main 18 30 42 48 54 60 72 Box Dimensions Height Width Depth
22 23
125A Panelboards
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical
36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical
225A Panelboards
225A Main lugs or main breaker ED, EDH, EDC, FDE FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC, HFDE ED, EDH, EDC Vertical
400A Panelboards
400A Main lugs or main breaker DK, KD, LHH HKD, KDC Vertical
DK, KD, LHH HKD, KDC Vertical EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC Vertical LGS, LGH, LGC Vertical
Sub-feed breaker
600A Panelboards
600A Main lugs or main breaker 30 42 48 54 60 72 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
Greater than 42 branch circuit panelboards are available for jurisdiction governed by the 2008 National Electrical Code. Smaller panelboard box sizes are available if required. Contact Eaton for application information. Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) for SPD. 28.00-inch (711.2) optional width is available for panelboards with high circuit counts. For horizontal mounted mains (EG Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
CA08104001E
22.3-8 Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 037
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 4
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 4
22.4-1
Pow-R-Line 4
Bussing
2501200A tin-plated aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option. Density rated bus is also available as an option.

22 23 24 25 26 27
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 250, 400, 600, 800 and 1200.
PRL4B Circuit Breaker Panelboard PRL4F Fusible Panelboard
Table 22.4-1. Main Circuit BreakersType PRL4B

Breaker Frame Amperes 250 250 250 250 250 350 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200

Breaker Type JD HJD JDC LCL HJDDC NHH DK KD CKD LHH HKD CHKD KDC LCL LA-P HKDDC LGE LGH LGC LGU LD CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC HLDDC MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC NB-P HMDLDC ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC NBDC
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 65 100 200 200 100 65 65 65 100 100 100 200 200 200 65 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 65 65 100 100 200 200 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 480 Vac 35 65 100 200 65 35 35 65 65 65 100 200 200 35 65 100 150 35 35 65 65 100 100 50 50 65 65 50 50 65 65 100 100 200 50 50 65 65 100 100 600 Vac 18 25 35 35 25 25 35 35 35 65 200 18 35 50 65 25 25 35 35 50 50 25 25 35 35 25 25 35 35 65 65 200 25 25 35 35 65 65 250 Vdc 10 22 22 42 10 10 10 42 22 22 22
General Description
240V, 480V or 600 Vac maximum 600 Vdc maximum
600 Vdc 35 65 35 35 50
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Main Lugs
2501200A 2501200A 2001200A Breakers 151200A Fusible switches 301200A 240 Vac: 10200 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated 480 Vac: 14200 kA fully rated 480 Vac: 22150 kA series rated 250 Vdc: 1022 kA fully rated Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V, 240/120V delta and 480Y/277V Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 120, 240, 480 and 600V Two-wire 125 Vdc Two-wire 250 Vdc Two-wire 600 Vdc
Main Breakers
Main Switches
42 22 22 42 50 22 22 25 25 25 25 42 22 22 25 25
Branches (Bolt-On)


Service

42 42
For use on DC systems only. Available with integral ground fault protection. 100% rated circuit breaker. 100,000 AIC based on NEMA test procedure.
CA08104001E
22.4-2 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 4

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 4 Main Fusible Switches
The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main switch only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboards is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device or the rating of an approved series rated combination. (Fuses are not included.) 400 and 600A switches with shunt trip will be rated 100 kA.
Note: Circuit breaker panelboards are designated PRL4B. Fusible Switch panelboards are designated PRL4F.
September 2011
Sheet 22 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 22.4-2. Main Fusible Switches

Switch Fuse Rating Class Amperes Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 10 10
Switches Rated 240 Vac, 250 Vdc

200 400 600 800 1200 200 400 600 800 1200 R, T R, T R, T L L R, J, T R, J, T R, J, T L L
Switches Rated 600 Vac

Breaker Type BAB BAB BAB QBGF, QBGFEP QBHW QBHW QBHW QBHGF, QBHGFEP GHB GHB GHQ HGHB GHBGFEP EHD EHD FDB FD FD, FDE HFD HFD, HFDE HFDDC FDC, FDCE FB-P EDB EDS ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC HJDDC LCL NHH DK KD CKD HKD LHH CHKD KDC HKDDC LCL LA-P

Ampere Rating 1570 15100 15100 1550 1570 15100 15100 1530 15100 15100 1520 1530 1560 15100 15100 15150 15100 15225 15100 15225 15150 15225 15100 100225 100225 100225 100225 100225 70250 70250 70250 70250 125250 150350 250400 100400 100400 100400 125400 100400 100400 100400 200400 125400
Number of Poles 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1 2, 3 1 1 1 1 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 2,3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 10 10 22 22

120/240 Vac 10 10 22 22 100
240 Vac 10 22 65 65 65 65 65 14 18 18 65 65 65 100 200 200 22 42 65 100 200 65 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 100 100 200 200 200
480 Vac 14 14 14 25 14 14 14 35 35 65 65 100 200 35 65 100 200 65 35 65 65 65 65 100 200 200
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 200 18 25 35 35 25 35 35 35 35 65 200
125 Vdc 14 10 10 10 42 10 10 10 10 10 42 42
250 Vdc 14 10 10 10 22 42 22
600 Vdc 35 35 35
10 22 22 42 10 10 22 22 42 22 22 42
50A is two-pole only. Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac. At 480V, use on 480Y/277 Vac system only. Three-pole only. For use on DC systems only.
100,000 AIC based on NEMA test procedure. 100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. K- and N-Frame breakers require density rated copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 039
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 4
22.4-3
Table 22.4-3. Branch Circuit Breakers (Continued)

Breaker Type LGE LGH LGC LGU LD CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC HLDDC MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL HMDLDC ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC NB-P NBDC ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC

Ampere Rating 250600 250600 250600 250600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300800 300800 300800 300800 300800 400800 400800 400800 400800 400800 400800 400800 7001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200
Number of Poles 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 3
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 65 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 65 65 100 100 65 65 100 100 200 200 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 480 Vac 35 65 100 150 35 35 65 65 100 100 50 50 65 65 35 35 65 65 100 100 200 35 35 65 65 100 100 600 Vac 18 35 50 65 25 25 35 35 50 50 25 25 35 35 25 25 35 35 65 65 200 25 25 35 35 65 65 125 Vdc 42 42 42 250 Vdc 22 22 42 50 22 22 25 25 25 25 42 22 22 25 25 42 42 50 600 Vdc 35 35
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. K- and N-Frame breakers require density rated copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures. For use on DC systems only.
Table 22.4-4. Branch Fusible Switches (Fuses are not included)

Switch Rating Amperes 30/30 60/60 100/100 200/200 100 200 400 600 800 1200 30/30 60/60 100/100 200/200 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Mounting Fuse Class Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240V 600V 250 Vdc
Circuit Breaker Trip Units

Circuit breakers will have thermal-magnetic trip units with the following exceptions: 100% rated breakers and all N-Frame breakers have Digitrip RMS 310 solid-state trip units as standard K-, L- and M-Frame three-pole circuit breakers are optionally available with the Digitrip RMS 310 solid-state trip unit The trip function options for the Digitrip RMS 310 include LS and LSI. Main circuit breakers can also include the LSG and LSIG integral ground fault trip functions Digitrip OPTIM trip units are not available in panelboard construction
Switches Rated 240 Vac, 250 Vdc

Twin Twin Twin Twin Single Single Single Single Single Single Twin Twin Twin Twin Single Single Single Single Single Single R R R R, T R R, T R, T R, T L L R, J R, J R, J J, T R, J R, J, T R, J, T R, J, T L L 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Switches Rated 600 Vac

Refer to the series rating tables beginning on Page 22.0-12 for the approved series rated combinations available for the branch circuit breakers listed in Table 22.4-3.
Modications Enclosures
Types 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Ground Bar
Standard bolted in box with (3) #6300 kcmil terminals. Aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option.
Note: Twin branch switches of different ampere ratings are available, i.e., 30/60, 30/100, 60/100.
Trims
Trim with door is available as an option for Type 1 enclosures.

CA08104001E

Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4B
September 2011
Sheet 22 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Main Lug (MLO), Main Breaker, Neutral, Through-Feed (TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) X Space Requirements
(For compression lugs, or other congurations not shown, refer to Eaton.) = Blank means no bus under cover to meet NEC cable bending space.
Standard Main Lug, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs (500 kcmil Maximum) MLO, SFL 10X 10X MLO, TFL 7X Main Breaker Branch Devices Main Breaker 19X 16X 800A Vertically Mtd. 88A Vertically MDL Breaker MDSMain Main Breaker only, only,in in24.00-inch 24" wide (609.6 mm) wide box. Available with box. with 38X Available and 50X Panel 38X andonly 50X Panel Height Height only. Main Breaker with Neutral (when required) (500 kcmil Maximum)
250A , 400A , 600A & 800A
250A, 400A, 250A, 400A, 600A and 800A 600A & 800A Branch Devices
250A , 400A , 600A and 800A
Branch Devices 7X
Branch Devices
Branch Devices
Through-Through Feed Lugs Lugs Feed
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W MLO MLO, TFL
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W 2X Blank Main Breaker Branch Devices 2X Blank
29
1200A 1200A 12X
12X 1200 A 1200A Branch Devices Blank 7X Branch Devices

Through Through-Feed Lugs Lugs Feed
7X Main Breaker Branch Devices Blank
30 31 32 33 34 35
36.00-inch (36 In. Minimum (914.4 mm) Width) Minimum Width 2X
36-inch (36 In. Minimum (914.4 mm) Width) Minimum Width 2X
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
Figure 22.4-1. X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A. For 600A use 1200A X space.
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs (750 kcmil Maximum) MLO, SFL 20X 20X Branch Devices 9X
ThroughThrough Feed Feed Lugs Lugs
MLO, TFL 13X 13X
36 37 38
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W MLO, TFL 20X 15X 1200A 1200A 36.00-inch (36 In. Minimum (914.4 mm) Width) 5X Minimum Width 15X
, 400A , 250A 250A , 400A , and 800A 600A 600A & 800A
Branch Devices 3X Blank
Branch Devices 3X 9X Blank 9X
Branch Devices
ThroughFeed Lugs
39 40
1200A 1200A 20X
MLO
41 42 43
36.00-inch (36 In. Minimum (914.4 mm) Width) 5X Minimum Width
Branch Devices Blank 11X
Branch Devices
Through ThroughFeed Lugs Lugs
Branch Devices
ThroughThrough Feed Lugs Lugs Feed
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A. For 600A use 1200A X space.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 041
22.4-5
Breaker (PRL4B) Type Distribution Panelboards 600 Vac, 250 Vdc

Panelboard Layout and Dimensions
To determine the dimensions of a given panelboard enclosure, make a layout sketch by tting together the main branch and lug modules according to the appropriate tables in the layout guide. Assign X units to each module as shown and obtain a total X number. The height of the enclosure is related to the total X units in the layout as shown in Figure 22.4-3. Three standard box heights are available to accommodate any and all layout arrangements. X unit totals that do not exactly match those in Table 22.4-5 must be rounded off to the next higher standard (26X, 38X, 50X). When a calculated X total for a panel exceeds 50X, the panel must be split into two or more separate sections with X space for through-feed lugs gured in for all but one section. If a neutral is required, a separate neutral bar and appropriate X space must be included in each section.
Layout Example
1 PRL4B panelboard, 480Y/277V, three-phase, four-wire, 65 kA, 800A, main lug, consisting of: 12 20A/single-pole HFD 2 250A/three-pole HJD 1 400A/three-pole HKD
20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 250A/3P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 20A/1P 1X 1X 1X 1X 1X 1X 3X
22 23 24
1. From layout guide, total X height of panel = 26X, (which is a design standard and no rounding off is necessary). 2. From Table 22.4-5, enclosure height for 26X panel = 57.00 inches (1447.8 mm). 3. Width = 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) directly from layout guide. 4. Total enclosure depth = 11.30 inches (287.0 mm)standard for all PRL4 panelboards.
25 26 27 28 29 30
250A/3P
3X
400A/3P
4X
Main Lugs
800A
10X
31 32
Neutral TOTAL = 26X
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Note: For SPD unit, add 7X up to 200 kA and 10X for SPD above 200 kA.
CA08104001E

Table 22.4-5. Standard Panelboard and Box Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panel Box Height Height 26X 38X 50X 38X 50X 38X 50X
September 2011
Sheet 22 042
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Box Width
Box Depth
Filler Sub Panel
1X
Breaker To Fusible Transition, All Widths
57.00 (1447.8) 24.00 (609.6) 10.40 (264.2) 73.50 (1866.9) 24.00 (609.6) 10.40 (264.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 24.00 (609.6) 10.40 (264.2) 73.50 (1866.9) 36.00 (914.4) 90.00 (2286.0) 36.00 (914.4) 73.50 (1866.9) 44.00 (1117.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 10.40 (264.2) 10.40 (264.2) 10.40 (264.2) 10.40 (264.2)
400A Maximum Bus Rating
18 12X Poles
20X
42 Poles
100A Max.
1P 2P
1P 2P
1X 2X
Note: Flush trims available on PRL4B panels with Door-in-Door enclosure only.
2P
2P
24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Wide Box
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm), cover adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) for overall enclosure depth of 11.30 inches (287.0 mm). 800A maximum bus size in 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide box.
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFDE HFD, FDC, FDCE
3P
3P
3X
2X
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC

3X
3P
3P
10.62 inches (269.9 mm)

2 or 3P 2 or 3P
3X
Side Gutters (Minimum)

24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide box: 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide box: 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box: 8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
4X
250A Max. 400A Max.

600A Max.
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH, CKD, CHKD, HKDDC
LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
Load
3P
4X
Load
2 or 3P
6X
600A Max.
LD, HLD, CLD, CHLD, LDC, HLDDC
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Box
7X 10X
SPD
(7X through 200 kA) (10X through 400 kA)
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
3X
100A Max. 250A Max. 400A Max.
FCL, FB-P, HFDDC JD, HJD, JDC
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
3X
LCL, LA-P, NHH MDL, HMDL, HMDLDC CMDL, CHMDL
2 or 3P
6X
2 or 3P
44-Inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box
6X
ND, HND, NDC
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
4X
400A Max. 800A Max.
DK, KD, HKD, KDC NB-P CND, CHND, CNDC, NBDC
2 or 3P
6X
39 40 41 42 43

1200A Max.
Breaker may be used as main.
Figure 22.4-3. Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Devices
BAB and QBHW breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size. If panel contains only BAB or QBHW branch breakers, use a PRL1a panelboard. GHB, HGHB or GHQ breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB, QBHW. If panel contains only GHB, HGHB or GHQ branch breakers, use a PRL2a panelboard. When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis, the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X. Minimum 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide box is required if optional #6300 kcmil lug is required. MDL main breaker in 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide box, refer to Figure 22.4-1. Optional 750 kcmil terminal requires 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
Note: See Page 22.4-4 for MLO or Neutral and Vertically Mounted Mains space requirements.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 043
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4F
22.4-7
Main Lug (MLO), Main Switch, Neutral Through-Feed Lug (TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) X Space Requirements
(For other congurations refer to Eaton.) = Blank means no bus under cover to meet NEC cable bending space.
Standard Main Lugs, Through-Feed Lugs and Sub-Feed Lugs (500 kcmil Maximum) MLO, SFL 10X 250A , 400A , 600A and 800A 10X MLO, TFL 7X Main Switch Branch Devices Main Switch 22X 400A and 600A Vertically Mounted Main Switch. Branch 36.00- (914.4 mm) Devices or 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box. Main Switch with Neutral (when required) (500 kcmil Maximum)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
200A, 400A, 600A Branch Devices
Branch Devices 7X
Branch Devices 7X
ThroughFeed Lugs
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W MLO 12X 1200A Branch Devices 2X Blank 7X Branch Devices 12X MLO, TFL 800A 25X 1200A 26X 800A , 1200A
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
7X
800A and 1200A Branch Vertically Mounted Devices Main Switch. 36.00- (914.4 mm) or 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box. 3Ph 4W
30 31 32 33 34
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W

Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A, for 600A use 1200A X space. 800 and 1200A mains available only in vertical mounting.
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs (750 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL
250 A 600 A
, 400 A , & 800 A
MLO, TFL 20X Branch Devices 9X

ThroughFeed Lugs
35
13X 250A, 400A, 600A and 800A 3X 13X Branch Devices 9X
ThroughFeed Lugs
20X
36 37 38 39
Branch Devices 3X Blank
Branch Devices Blank
3Ph 4W MLO 20X 1200A 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) Minimum 5X Width 20X M LO, TFL 15X 1200A
3Ph 3W
15X
40
Branch Devices
Branch Devices
ThroughFeed Lugs
Branch Devices 5X Blank 11X
41 42 43
ThroughFeed Lugs
3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A, for 600A use 1200A X space.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 22 044
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Fusible (PRL4F) Type Distribution Panelboards 600 Vac, 250 Vdc

Panel Layout and Dimensions
To determine the dimensions of a given panelboard enclosure, make a layout sketch by tting together the main branch and lug modules according to the appropriate tables in the layout guide. Assign X units to each module as shown and obtain a total X number. The height of the enclosure is related to the total X units in the layout as shown in Figure 22.4-6. Three standard box heights are available to accommodate any and all layout arrangements. X unit totals that do not exactly match those in Table 22.4-6 must be rounded off to the next higher standard (38X, 50X). When a calculated X total for a panel exceeds 50X, the panel must be split into two or more separate sections with X space for through-feed lugs gured in for all but one section. If a neutral is required, a separate neutral bar and appropriate X space must be included in each section.
Layout Example
1 PRL4F, three-phase, four-wire, 208Y/120V complete with 400A main switch and the following branches: 1 200A/three-pole 2 100A/three-pole 2 30A/three-pole Panel to have short-circuit rating of 100,000A symmetrical.
400A Neutral 7X
1. From layout guide, X height of panel = 43X. 2. Rounded off to next higher standard = 50X.
30A/three-pole
30A/three-pole
4X
3. From Table 22.4-6, enclosure height for 50X panel = 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm). 4. Width = 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) because no switch in the assembly requires a 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide enclosure. 5. Total enclosure depth = 11.30 inches (287.0 mm) standard for all PRL4 panelboards.
100A/three-pole 100A/three-pole
4X
200A/three-pole
6X
Cabinet Specications
400A three-pole main switch (vertically mounted) 22X
Boxes: Code-gauge commercial galvanized sheet steel (no knockouts).
Total =
43X
Note: In the above example, if a horizontally mounted 400A main switch was used, the enclosure size would be: 73.50 inches H x 44.00 inches W x 11.30 inches D (1866.9 mm H x 1117.6 mm W x 287.0 mm D).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 045
22.4-9
Table 22.4-6. Standard Panel and Box Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Panel Height 38X 50X 38X 50X
Box Height 73.50 (1866.9) 90.00 (2286.0) 73.50 (1866.9) 90.00 (2286.0)
Box Width 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 44 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6)
Box Depth 10.40 (264.2) 10.40 (264.2) 10.40 (264.2) 10.40 (264.2)
Fusible to Breaker Transition, All Widths 30A
22
1X 4X
30A
23 24 25 26 27 28
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) Wide Box
60A
60A
4X
100A 250V Max.
100A 250V Max.
4X
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm), cover adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) for overall enclosure depth of 11.30 inches (287.0 mm).
100A
5X 6X
Note: Flush trims are available on PRL4F panels with door-in-door enclosure only.
200A Main or Branch
Top and Bottom Gutters (minimum)
10.63 inches (269.9 mm)

Surge Protective Device (SPD) 7X 10X
Side Gutters (minimum)

36.00-inch (914.4) wide box: 200A maximum 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) 4001200A maximum 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box: 200A maximum 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) 4001200A maximum 8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
(7X for SPD 200 kA and below) (10X for SPD above 250 kA)
29 30
100A 400A Branch 600A Branch
100A
5X 9X 11X
31 32
44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) Wide Box
200A
200A
6X 9X 11X
33
400A Main or Branch 600A Main or Branch 800A Branch 1200A Branch
34 35
36
Fusible switch may be used as horizontal main. 400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) or 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box. 400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box. For vertically mounted main switch see Page 22.4-4 for sizing.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 22.4-6. Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Fusible Switch Layout Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: See Page 22.4-7 for MLO or neutral and vertically mounted main space requirements.
CA08104001E
22.4-10 Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 046
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 047
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 5P
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 5P
22.5-1
Pow-R-Line 5P
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 400, 600, 800 and 1200. Table 22.5-1. Main Circuit BreakersType PRL5P
Breaker Frame Amperes 400 400 400 400 Breaker Type DK KD HKD KDC LD HLD LDC MDL HMDL ND HND NDC ND HND NDC

22 23 24 25
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240V 65 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 65 100 200 65 100 200 480V 35 65 100 35 65 100 50 65 50 65 100 50 65 100 600V 25 35 65 25 35 50 25 35 25 35 50 25 35 65 250 Vdc 10 10 22 22 22 25 25 22 25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
PRL5P Panelboard
600 600 600 800 800 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200
General Description
240V, 480V or 600 Vac maximum 250 Vdc maximum
Mains (Plug-On)
Main lugs: 4001200A Main breakers: 4001200A
Available with ground fault protection.
Circuit Breaker Units

Breaker adapter units use Eatons Series C molded-case circuit breakers. They are available from 151200A at 600 Vac maximum. A wide range of integrally mounted breaker accessories are available.
Branches (Plug-On)
Breakers 151200A

240 Vac: 10200 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated 480 Vac: 14200 kA fully rated 480 Vac: 22150 kA series rated 250 Vdc: 1022 kA fully rated


Refer to the series rating tables beginning on Page 22.0-12 for the approved series rated combinations available for the branch circuit breakers listed in Table 22.5-2.
600A Pow-R-Line 5P Series C L-Frame Breaker
35 36 37
Service

Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V, 240/120V delta and 480Y/277V Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 120, 240, 480 and 600V Two-wire 125 Vdc Two-wire 250 Vdc
400A Pow-R-Line 5P Series C K-Frame Breaker
38 39 40
Bussing
4001200A tin-plated aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option
Dual-Mounted Pow-R-Line 5P 225A Series C F-Frame Breaker
41 42 43
CA08104001E
22.5-2 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 5P

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 5P
September 2011
Sheet 22 048
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Breaker Type Ampere Rating Number of Poles Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 14 35 65 240 Vac 18 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 65 100 200 65 100 200 277 Vac 14 35 65 480 Vac 14 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 50 65 35 65 100 35 65 100 600 Vac 18 25 35 18 25 35 25 35 65 25 35 50 25 35 25 35 65 25 35 65 125 Vdc 10 10 10 250 Vdc 10 10 22 22 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 10 10 22 22 22 25 25 22 25
Single-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units

EHD FD HFD EHD FD HFD FDC EDB EDS ED EDH EDC JD HJD JDC DK KD HKD KDC LD HLD LDC MDL HMDL ND HND NDC ND HND NDC 1560 1560 1560 15100 15225 15225 15225 100225 100225 100225 100225 100225 70250 70250 70250 250400 100400 100400 100400 300600 300600 300600 300800 300800 400800 400800 400800 6001200 6001200 6001200 1 1 1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Two- and Three-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units
Table 22.5-3. Main Lug and Sub-Feed Lug Unit

Ampere Rating 400 600 800 4001200 X Space 8X 8X 8X 7X Mechanical Lug Size and Number Al/Cu Rated (1) 1/0500 kcmil or (2) 1/0250 kcmil (2) #4500 kcmil (2) #2500 kcmil or (3) #2400 kcmil (4) #4750 kcmil
Dual Breaker Adapters

Any two breakers listed below may be mounted on the same 2X or 3X dual breaker adapter. Dual breaker adapters may be in single- or doublerow chassis. Dual breaker adapters can NOT be mounted across from another in a double-row chassis. Table 22.5-5. Dual Breaker Adapters
Breaker Type EDB, EDS, ED EDH EDC EHD FD HFD FDC Ampere Rating 100225 100225 100225 15100 15225 15225 15225 Number of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Single Bus Connection
Double Bus Connection
1200A Pow-R-Line 5P Main Lug Unit
Table 22.5-4. PRL5P Box Sizes and Maximum Component Unit Ampere RatingDimensions in Inches (mm)
Bus Chassis Type Single-Row Bus Total X Space 24X 32X 40X 24X 32X 40X Box Dimension Width 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) Height 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 86.00 (2184.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 86.00 (2184.0) Maximum Ampere Rating of Plug-on Components Main Lugs 800 Branch Lugs 600 Main Breaker 800 Branch Breaker 600
Double-Row Bus
1200
1200
1200
1200
Deduct X space for main breaker or lugs from the total available X spaces listed above.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 049
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 5P
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 5P
22.5-3
Chassis LayoutX Unit Layout of Circuit Breaker and Lug UnitsX = 1.38-Inch (34.9 mm) Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Double-Bus Interior Mounted in 48.00-Inch (1219.2 mm) Wide Enclosure
48.00 (1219.2)
22 23 24
Single-Bus Interior in 30.00-Inch (762.0 mm) Wide Enclosure

30.00 (762.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
25
2X 2X 3X
NeutralNo X Space Required Top or Bottom 2X 3X 2X 2X 3X Two-Pole Two-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC Three-Pole Three-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC
Two-Pole Two-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC
NeutralNo X Space Required Top or Bottom 2X 3X 2X 2X 3X Two-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC
Two-Pole Two-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC EDH, EDC Three-Pole Three-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC EDH, EDC
26 27 28 29 30 31
Blank Wireway
Two-Pole Two-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC
Blank Wireway
Three-Pole Three-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC ED, EDH, EDC
Three-Pole EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC Two- or Three-Pole JD, HJD, JDC Bus Cover Two- or Three-Pole DK, KD, HKD, KDC Main or Branch
3X
Blank Wireway
3X 1X-6X
4X
Filler Plate
Two- or Three-Pole DK, KD, HKD, KDC
4X
3X
Two- or Three-Pole JD, HJD, JD C Filler Plate
4X
Two- or Three-Pole LD, HLD, LDC
6X Two- or Three-Pole LD, HLD, LDC Main or Branch
3X
6X
32 33
6X
800A MDL, HMDL Main or Branch
6X 800A MDL, HMDL Main Only
6X
6X
800A ND, HND, NDC Main or Branch
34 35
6X
Main Lug or Sub-feed Lug Kit 800A Maximum 6X 1200A ND, HND, NDC Main or Branch 6X
8X
36
7.00 (177.8) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
37 38
7X
Main Lug or Sub-feed Lug Kit 1200A Maximum
7X
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
39 40 41 42 43
Figure 22.5-1. Panel Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 5P

If used as a main device, must be mounted at the neutral end of panel. Fixed bus covers are required for unused spaces if NEC six-circuit disconnect rule is to be met. Blank wireway llers are required opposite any dual breaker unit.
Note: EDB and EDS breakers mount same as ED shown in Figure 22.5-1 above.
CA08104001E
22.5-4 Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 050
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 051
Panelboards Column Type

General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
22.6-1
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100 and 225. Table 22.6-1. Main Circuit Breakers
Breaker Frame Amperes 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 225 225 225 225 225 Breaker Type BAB QBHW EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC EDB EDS ED, FD EDH, HFD EDC, FDC

22 23 24 25
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 240 Vac 10 22 18 18 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200
26 27 28 29 30
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
General Description

Breaker Type BAB BAB BAB BAB-D BAB-C BABRP BABRSP QBGF QBGFEP QBCAF QBHW QBHW QBHW QBHGF QBGFEP QBHCAF

Ampere Rating 1570 15100 15100 1560 1530 1530 1530 1550 1550 1520 1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1520
Number of Poles 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 120/240 Vac 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 240 Vac 10 22
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
240 Vac maximum 100 and 225A 100 and 225A 15100A (bolt-on)
Main Lugs
Main Breakers
Branch Breakers

240 Vac: 10 kA and 22 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated
Service

Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.6-1. Main breakers, 100A, Types BAB and QBHW are horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
CA08104001E
22.6-2 Panelboards Column Type

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
September 2011
Sheet 22 052
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing
100225A: copper is standard.
Top and Bottom Gutters

4.50 inches (114.3 mm) minimum.
Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards

Box size, box and trim catalog numbers for standard column type panelboards listed are available from Table 22.6-4.
Left Side Gutter

Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge steel. Blank ends are supplied as standard.
Instructions
1. Using description of the required panelboard, select the rating and type of main required. a. 100A panelboards Table 22.6-4. b. 225A panelboards Table 22.6-4. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles, including provisions, required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles. Convert two- or three-pole branch breakers to single poles, i.e., three-pole breaker, count as three poles. Determine sub-feed breaker or through-feed lug requirements. 3. Select the panelboard main ampere rating from Table 22.6-4. 4. Panelboard Type from rst column, main breaker Frame and Designation, if applicable from second column, and sub-feed breaker Frame and Designation, if applicable, from the third column. 5. From Step 2, determine the number of branch circuits in Column 4. 6. Read box size numbers across columns to the right. All panels are surface mounted.
Pull Box
Pull box is furnished without knockouts.
Trims
Trims are made from code-gauge steel and painted ANSI 61 gray. Doors have three-point catch and lock.
Modications
Ampere Breaker Rating Type Space 150 150 150 150 225 225 225 225 225 FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 240V 18 65 100 200
Neutral Bars
When column type panels are furnished with trough extensions and pull box, the neutral bar will be placed in the pull box unless otherwise specied. When troughs and pull box are not furnished, the neutral bar will be located on the panel at the same end as the main.
22 EDB 42 EDS 65 ED, FD, FDE EDH, HFD, HFDE 100 EDC, FDC 200
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on BAB, QBHW and FDB breakers. BAB and QBHW require one additional pole space for shunt trip, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size and three-pole is four-pole size.
Cabinets
Boxes and trims are code-gauge steel. ANSI-61 light gray painted nish. Boxes are furnished without knockouts. Standard depth is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Standard width is 8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
Ground Bar
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 053

22.6-3
Table 22.6-4. PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Panelboard Types Main Breaker Types Mounting: (H) = Horizontal (V) = Vertical BAB, QBHW (H) EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD (V), HFDE Sub-Feed Breaker Types Vertical Mounting Maximum Number Box Dimensions of Branch Circuits Height Width Including Provisions Depth
22 23
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4)
100A
Main breaker Main lugs or main breaker Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs or sub-feed breaker EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EHD, FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE 27 39 30 42 30 42 69.00 (1752.6) 81.00 (2057.4) 69.00 (1752.6) 81.00 (2057.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1)
24 25 26
225A
Main lugs or main breaker Main lugs or main breaker with 225A through-feed lugs or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, HFDE, ED, EDH (V) EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EHD, FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE
30 42 30 42
69.00 (1752.6) 81.00 (2057.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4)
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Trough Extension
6.00 (152.4) 16.00 (406.4) 12.00 .0 (304.8) 04
Additional Extensions (If Required)
H Box Height 6.00 (152.4) 8.63 (219.1)
When extension troughs are used, the NEC requires that the number of conductors in wireways shall not contain more than 30 conductors at any cross section, unless the conductors are for signal circuits or are control conductors between a motor and its starter and used only for starting duty. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all contained conductors at any cross section of a wireway shall not exceed 20% of the interior cross-sectional area of the wireway. The derating factors specied in the NEC shall not be applicable to the 30 current-carrying conductors at 20% ll specied above.
Figure 22.6-1. Trough Extension Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type
September 2011
Sheet 22 054
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX
Mains
Type GHB main breakers are horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100 and 225.
Branch Circuits


Pow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type
Breaker Frame Amperes 100 100 150 150 150 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 Breaker Type GHB EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC, FDCE ED FD, FDE EDH HFD, HFDE EDC FDC Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 65 18 18 65 100 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 480Y/277 Vac 14 14 14 35 65 100 35 65 100 125/250 Vdc 14 10 10 10 22 22 10 10 10
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description

240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac maximum

Note: PRL2a panelboards are suitable for use on three-phase, three-wire applications when derived from a three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277 Vac service where the neutral is not brought to the panelboard. For three-phase, three-wire 480 Vac delta services, use a PRL3a panelboard.

Breaker Type GHB GHB GHQ HGHB GHQRSP GHBS
250 Vdc maximum 100 and 225A 100 and 225A 15100A 240 Vac: 65 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 100200 kA series rated 480Y/277 Vac: 14 kA fully rated 480Y/277 Vac: 22150 kA series rated 250 Vdc: 10 kA and 14 kA fully rated Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V and 240/120V delta and 480Y/277V Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V Single-phase, two-wire 120V Three-phase, three-wire 208 and 240V Two-wire 125 Vdc Two-wire 250 Vdc
Ampere Rating 15100 15100 1520 1530 1520 1530
Number of Poles 1 2, 3 1 1 1, 2 1, 2
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 65 65 65 65 65 240 Vac 65 65 65 277 Vac 14 14 25 14 14 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc 14 14 14 14 14
Main Lugs
Main Breakers
Branch Breakers
Solenoid operated breaker.


Service

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 055

22.6-5

Bussing
100225A: copper is standard.
Top and Bottom Gutters

Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards

Box size, box and trim catalog numbers for standard column type panelboards listed are available from Table 22.6-8.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Left Side Gutter

Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge steel. Blank ends are supplied as standard.
Pull Box
Pull box is furnished without knockouts.
Instructions
1. Using description of the required panelboard, select the rating and type of main required.
Trims
Trims are made from code-gauge steel and painted ANSI 61 gray. Doors have three-point catch and lock.
Modications
Ampere Rating Space 150 150 150 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 Breaker Type Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240V FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC ED FD, FDE EDH HFD, HFDE EDC FDC 18 65 100 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 480V 14 35 65 100 35 65 100
Neutral Bars
When column type panels are furnished with trough extensions and pull box, the neutral bar will be placed in the pull box unless otherwise specied. When troughs and pull box are not furnished, the neutral bar will be located on the panel at the same end as the main.
a. 100A panelboardsTable 22.6-8. b. 225A panelboardsTable 22.6-8. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles, including provisions, required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles. Convert two- or three-pole branch breakers to single poles, i.e., three-pole breaker, count as three poles. Determine sub-feed breaker or through-feed lug requirements.
3. Select the panelboard main ampere rating from Table 22.6-8. 4. Panelboard type from rst column, main breaker frame and designation, if applicable from second column, and sub-feed breaker frame and designation, if applicable, from the third column. 5. From Step 2, determine the number of branch circuits in Column 4. 6. Read box size numbers across columns to the right. All panels are surface mounted.
Cabinets
Boxes and trims are code-gauge steel. ANSI-61 light gray painted nish. Boxes are furnished without knockouts. Standard depth is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Standard width is 8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on GHB, FDB and FD breakers. GHB breakers with shunt trips require three-pole frame.
Ground Bar
CA08104001E

Table 22.6-8. PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Panelboard Types Main Breaker Types Mounting: (H) = Horizontal (V) = Vertical GHB (H) EHD, FDB, FD, FDE HFD, HFDE, FDCE (V) Sub-Feed Breaker Types Vertical Mounting Maximum Number of Branch Circuits Including Provisions Box Dimensions Height Width
September 2011
Sheet 22 056
22 23
Depth
100A
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Main breaker Main lugs or main breaker Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs or sub-feed breaker
FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE, FDC, FDCE
27 39 30 42 30 42
69.00 (1752.6) 81.00 (2057.4) 69.00 (1752.6) 81.00 (2057.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4)
225A
Main lugs or main breaker Main lugs or main breaker with 225A through-feed lugs or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE (V)
FD, FDE FDE, HFD, HFDE, FDC
30 42 30 42
69.00 (1752.6) 81.00 (2057.4) 78.00 (1981.2) 90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1) 8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4)
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Trough Extension
6.00 (152.4) 16.00 (406.4) 12.00 .0 (304.8) 04
Additional Extensions (If Required)
H Box Height 6.00 (152.4) 8.63 (219.1)
When extension troughs are used, the NEC requires that the number of conductors in wireways shall not contain more than 30 conductors at any cross section, unless the conductors are for signal circuits or are control conductors between a motor and its starter and used only for starting duty. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all contained conductors at any cross section of a wireway shall not exceed 20% of the interior cross-sectional area of the wireway. The derating factors specied in the NEC shall not be applicable to the 30 current-carrying conductors at 20% ll specied above.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 22.6-2. Trough Extension Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 057
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1R
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1R
22.7-1
Pow-R-Line 1R Retrot Panelboard
Eaton offers a factory-assembled panelboard interior and trim designed to bolt directly into an existing enclosure. Custom-built panelboard interiors and trims can be provided to retrot most any manufacturers existing panelboard enclosure. The panelboards are listed and are marked with both the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) labels.
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device, or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100 and 225.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main breaker only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device, or the rating of an approved series rated combination. Table 22.7-1. Main Circuit Breakers
Breaker Frame Amperes 100 100 100 150 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 Breaker Type BAB QBHW EHD FDB FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC EDB EDS ED EDH EDC Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 240V 10 22 18 18 65 100 200 22 42 65 100 200
Why Retrot?

Pow-R-Line 1R
General Description
Upgrade protective device interrupting ratings Replacing old, obsolete circuit breakers with new Providing additional circuits for load growth Accommodating system change and additions Adding ground fault circuit interrupters
Immediate Benets
Installation time is dramatically reduced Disruption of existing power service is minimal Less cleanup and wall repair because there is no need to cut and break concrete or nished wall surface
240 Vac maximum 100400A 100225A 15100A (bolt-on chassis)
Main Lugs
Main Breakers
Branch Breakers

Breaker Type BAB BAB BAB BAB-D BAB-C BABRP BABRSP QBGF, QBGFEP QBCAF QBHW QBHW QBHW QBHGF, QBGFEP QBHCAF

Ampere Rating 1570 15100 15100 1560 1530 1530 1530 1550 1520 1570 15100 15100 1530 1520
Number of Poles 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120V 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 120/240V 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 240V 10 22

240 Vac: 10 kA and 22 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated
Service
Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.7-1. Main breakers, 100A, Types BAB and QBH are horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.

Branch Circuits
The panelboards are listed and are marked with both the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) labels.
CA08104001E
22.7-2 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1R

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1R
September 2011
Sheet 22 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing
Application Guidelines
The following dimensions and data are necessary for production of a panelboard to t an existing box:
Stud Locations Front View
Existing Flush-Mounted Box

Boxes
Fits existing box depths from 4.50 (114.3 mm) to 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep. Optional mounting brackets are available if existing enclosure exceeds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep. Boxes shallower than standard may require special collar adapters.
Height dimension H Width dimension W Depth dimension D Flange width dimension F If box is not ush with plaster line, dimension E
B H
Existing Surface-Mounted Box

Height dimension H Width dimension W Depth dimension D Flange width dimension may be F or FF as appropriate: Flange width dimension F Flange width dimension FF

Trims
Figure 22.7-1. Existing Interior Mounting Studs
Plaster Line F D Top View (Flush Mounted) FF D Top View (Surface Mounted) E
Stud Locations
In most applications, the existing mounting hardware in the enclosure may be removed, but in some areas, the backpan may need to be attached using a minimum of one existing mounting stud to meet local code requirements for grounding. Conrm with your local electrical code authority having jurisdiction. Stud location dimensions: A _______, B _______ and C _______.
Pow-R-Line 1R
Figure 22.7-2. Existing Box Top View
The trim and door is designed to attach directly to the panelboard deadfront assembly so that there is no external trim-fastening hardware required. The interior backpan or optional mounting plates are fastened directly to the back of the existing enclosure using the hardware provided.
Table 22.7-3. Minimum Enclosure Sizing

Ampere Rating Number of Circuits Main Device Type Minimum Enclosure Dimensions Inches (mm) Height 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) Width 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) Depth 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3)
Main Lug Only

100 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 225 18 30 42 MLO
225
MLO
Neutral and Ground Bus

400
MLO
Integrally mounted Neutral assembly Ground bar and bonding conductor included Neutral and Ground convertible from left-right Insulated/Isolated ground bus is available as an option Aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option
Main Breaker
100 BAB, QBHW
EHD, ED, EDH, FDB, FD, HFD EDB, EDC, EDS
ED, EDH, EDB, EDS, 30.00 (762.0) EDC, FD, HFD, FDC 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 059
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 2R
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2R
22.7-3
Pow-R-Line 2R Retrot Panelboard
Eaton offers a factory-assembled panelboard interior and trim designed to bolt directly into an existing enclosure. Custom-built panelboard interiors and trims can be provided to retrot most any manufacturers existing panelboard enclosure. The panelboards are listed and are marked with both the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) labels.
Main Lugs Only

The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the lowest rated branch device, or may be series rated with an approved upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100 and 225.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main breaker only. The shortcircuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device, or the rating of an approved series rated combination. Table 22.7-4. Main Circuit Breakers
Breaker Breaker Frame Type Amperes 100 150 225 225 225 GHB FDB FDB HFD FDC Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 65 18 65 100 200 480Y/277 Vac 14 14 35 65 100
Why Retrot?

Pow-R-Line 2R
General Description
Upgrade protective device interrupting ratings Replacing old, obsolete circuit breakers with new Providing additional circuits for load growth Accommodating system change and additions Adding ground fault circuit interrupters
Immediate Benets
Installation time is dramatically reduced Disruption of existing power service is minimal Less cleanup and wall repair because there is no need to cut and break concrete or nished wall surface
Main Lugs
100225A 100225A 15100A (bolt-on chassis) 240 Vac: 10 kA and 22 kA fully rated 240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated
Main Breakers

Breaker Type GHQ GHB GHB GHB-HID GHBGFEP HGHB

Branch Breakers
Ampere Rating 1520 15100 15100 1520 1560 1530
Number of Poles 1 1 2, 3 1 1 1
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 120 Vac 65 65 65 65 65 240 Vac 65 277 Vac 14 14 14 14 25 480Y/277 Vac 14

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Service
Three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277 Vac Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120 Vac and 240/120 Vac delta Single-phase, three-wire 120/240 Vac Single-phase, two-wire 120 Vac Three-phase, three-wire 208 and 240 Vac

HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker. GHB breaker with 30ma equipment ground fault protection.

The panelboards are listed and are marked with both the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) labels.
Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.7-4. Main breakers, 100A, Type GHB is horizontally mounted, same as branch breakers. All other main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
CA08104001E
22.7-4 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 2R

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 2R
September 2011
Sheet 22 060
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing
Application Guidelines
The following dimensions and data are necessary for production of a panelboard to t an existing box:
Stud Locations Front View
Existing Flush-Mounted Box

Boxes
Fits existing box depths from 4.50 (114.3 mm) to 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep. Optional mounting brackets are available if existing enclosure exceeds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep. Boxes shallower than standard may require special collar adapters.
Height dimension H Width dimension W Depth dimension D Flange width dimension F If box is not ush with plaster line, dimension E
B H
Existing Surface-Mounted Box

Height dimension H Width dimension W Depth dimension D Flange width dimension may be F or FF as appropriate: Flange width dimension F Flange width dimension FF

Trims
Figure 22.7-3. Existing Interior Mounting Studs
Plaster Line F D Top View (Flush Mounted) FF D Top View (Surface Mounted) E
Stud Locations
In most applications, the existing mounting hardware in the enclosure may be removed, but in some areas, the backpan may need to be attached using a minimum of one existing mounting stud to meet local code requirements for grounding. Conrm with your local electrical code authority having jurisdiction. Stud location dimensions: A _______, B _______ and C _______.
Pow-R-Line 2R
Figure 22.7-4. Existing Box Top View
The trim and door is designed to attach directly to the panelboard deadfront assembly so that there is no external trim-fastening hardware required. The interior backpan or optional mounting plates are fastened directly to the back of the existing enclosure using the hardware provided.
Table 22.7-6. Minimum Enclosure Sizing

Ampere Rating Number of Circuits Main Device Type Minimum Enclosure Dimensions Inches (mm) Height 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 21.00 (533.4) 27.00 (685.8) 34.00 (863.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) Width 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) Depth 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3)
Main Lug Only

100 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 18 30 42 225 18 30 42 MLO
225
MLO
Neutral and Ground Bus

Main Breaker
100 GHB
Integrally mounted Neutral assembly Ground bar and bonding conductor included Neutral and Ground convertible from left-right Insulated/Isolated ground bus is available as an option Aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC FD, HFD, FDC
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 061
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1aF

General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1aF
22.7-5
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.7-7. Main breakers are vertically mounted.

Breaker Frame Amperes Breaker Type Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 240 Vac 22 42 65 65 65 100 100 100 22 42 65 65 65 100 100 100 42 65 100 200 200
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Branch Circuits
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 225 400 400 400 400 400
EDB EDS ED FD FDE EDH HFD HFDE EDB EDS ED FD FDE EDH HFD HFDE DK KD HKD KDC LHH
For use on high fault current systems requiring lighting panels, selectively coordinated systems and laboratories and testing stations where overcurrent protection below 15A is required.
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Main Lugs Only
General Description
The short-circuit rating of the MLO assembled panelboard will be fully rated based upon the upstream device. Main lugs only ampere ratings: 100, 225 and 400.
240 Vac maximum 100400A 100400A
Main Lugs

The short-circuit rating shown is that of the main breaker only. The short circuit rating of the assembled panelboard is the rating of the lowest fully rated main or branch device or the rating of an approved series rated combination
Main Breakers
Table 22.7-8. Branch Overcurrent Devices Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch device
Ampere Rating 30
Branch Devices
30A Hybrid breaker and fuse Class CC fuses, 30A maximum
Interrupting Rating 200
Breaker Type Hybrid
Class CC fuses are required, 30A maximum. Fuses are not supplied by Eaton.
240 Vac: 200 kA fully rated
Service
CA08104001E
22.7-6 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 1aF

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1aF
September 2011
Sheet 22 062
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing

Instructions
1. Select the rating and type of mains required. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles (including spaces) required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles.
Boxes
Top and Bottom Gutters (minimum)

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Trim
Trims are made from code-gauge steel and painted ANSI 61 gray Type YS.
Side Gutters
Modications

Ampere Rating of Mains Main Breaker Type Mounting Position Maximum Number of Branch Circuits Including Provisions 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 Box Dimensions Height Width Depth
Ground Bar
100A
100A Main lugs or main breaker 100A Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical EHD, FDB, FD, FDE, HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE Vertical EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE FDC, EDB, EDS, HFDE ED, EDH, EDC Vertical DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH Vertical 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
Enclosures
Type 1.
225A
225A Main lugs or main breaker with 225 or 100A through-feed lugs
400A
400A Main lugs or main breaker 18 30 42 48 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 063
Panelboards Pow-R-Line 2aF

General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2aF
22.7-7
Pow-R-Line 2aF
For use on high fault current systems requiring lighting panels, selectively coordinated systems and laboratories and testing stations where overcurrent protection below 15A is required.

Breaker Frame Amperes 100 100 100 225 225 225 400 400 400 400 Breaker Type Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) at 480Y/277 Vac 35 65 100 35 65 100 35 65 100 100
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Mains
FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC, HFDE KD HKD KDC LHH
Branch Circuits
Main Lugs Only

Pow-R-Line 2aF
General Description
Table 22.7-12. Branch Overcurrent Devices Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch device
Ampere Rating 30
Interrupting Rating 200
Breaker Type Hybrid
Class CC fuses are required, 30A maximum. Fuses are not supplied by Eaton.

Main Lugs
100400A 100400A
Main Breakers
Branch Devices
30A (bolt-on) Hybrid breaker and fuse Class CC fuses, 30A maximum

480Y/277 Vac: 200 kA fully rated Three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277V
Service
CA08104001E
22.7-8 Panelboards Pow-R-Line 2aF

Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 2aF
September 2011
Sheet 22 064
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Bussing

Instructions
1. Using description on the required panelboard, select the rating and type of mains required. 2. Count total number of branch circuit poles (including spaces) required in the panelboard. Do not count main breaker poles.
Boxes

5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
Trim
Trims are made from code-gauge steel and painted ANSI 61 gray, Type YS.
Modications
Table 22.7-14. Type 1 Panelboards Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Rating of Mains Main Breaker Type Mounting Position Maximum Box Dimensions Number Height Width of Branch Circuits Including Provisions 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 18 30 42 48 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2) Depth
Ground Bar
100A Panelboards
100A Main lugs or main breaker 100A Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1)
Enclosures
Type 1.
225A Panelboards
225A Main lugs or main breaker 225A Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE Vertical FDB, FD, FDE HFD, FDC, HFDE Vertical
400A Panelboards
400A Main lugs or main breaker 400A Main lugs or main breaker with 100A through-feed lugs DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH Vertical DK, KD, LHH HKD, KDC Vertical Main
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 065
Panelboards Elevator Control Panelboard

General DescriptionElevator Control Panelboard
22.7-9
Standards
Codes
The Elevator Control Panelboard is designed to meet the following codes: NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) ANSI/ASME A17.1 (Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators) NFPA 13 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems)

The Elevator Control Panelboard meets and is listed to the following standards: UL 67 listed panelboard UL 50 listed enclosure UL 98 listed fusible elevator control fusible switches
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Options
Integrated Surge Protective Device (SPD) 100400 kA Specialized control to meet local codes
Eatons Elevator Control Panelboard has superior selective coordination properties. When paired with the appropriate upstream fusing, the elevator control panelboard can selectively coordinate with higher fault current levels. All fuses must be of the same manufacturer. Consult the specic fuse manufacturers data for selective coordination values.
The Elevator Control Panelboard is designed to replace multiple components provided in elevator control rooms, thus consolidating and standardizing this area. With the ability to control up to four elevators in a common shaft, the Elevator Control Panelboard offers the needed controls in a space-saving design while allowing access by the various trades involved with the installation. Not only does the Elevator Control Panelboard provide electrical feeds, it also contains necessary components for the control of the elevator and the re alarm system. Table 22.7-15. Elevator Feeder Devices
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 Fuse Class
General Description
Ratings
240 Vac and 600 Vac Three-phase, three-wire and three-phase, four-wire 200 kA short-circuit current ratings


Surge Protective Devices (SPD) may be integrated into all Elevator Control Panelboards. Because most installation calls for SPDs, integrating an Eaton SPD ensures proper installation and signicantly limits destructive let-through beyond all size-mounted solutions. Please see Section 36 for more information.
Main Lugs Only
800A maximum 30200A, 240 Vac and 600 Vac fused switch to feed the elevator Factory wired from switch to controls 200 kA rms short-circuit current rating 120 Vac shunt trip Ground termination Branch fusible switch Class J fuse clips on switch (fuses not included) 100 VA Control Power Transformer (CPT) with 120 Vac secondary CPT primary and secondary fusing Selection of primary CPT voltages Fire safety interface relay with user-selected coil voltage Fire alarm voltage monitoring relay Keyed test switch ON pilot light; user selects color
Branch Devices
Elevator Controls Standard Features

Short-Circuit Current Rating (kAIC Symmetrical) 240 Vac 600 Vac 200 200 200 200
Class J Class J Class J Class J
200 200 200 200
Table 22.7-16. Box Sizing and SelectionDimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Rating Number of Dimensions Elevators Without SPD Width 400 400 400 600 600 600 800 800 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) Height 57.00 (1447.8) 57.00 (1447.8) 57.00 (1447.8) 57.00 (1447.8) 57.00 (1447.8) 57.00 (1447.8) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) With SPD Width 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) Height 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2) 73.00 (1854.2)
38 39 40 41 42 43
Note: Dimensions reect NEMA Type 1 enclosures. All boxes are 11.31 inches (287.3 mm) deep.
CA08104001E
22.7-10 Panelboards Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
General DescriptionTypes PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
September 2011
Sheet 22 066
22 23 24 25 26
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Modications Selection Guide

Table 22.7-17. ModicationsAlphabetical Index
Modication Available on Panelboard Types PRL1a Ambient compensating breakers Bus density Cabinetsspecial: Types 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Complete assembly Compression type lugs, mains only Concealed trim clamps (LT trim) Conduit covers Copper lugs Copper main bus Directory framemetal Doors, special Electronic trip units Fungus-proof Ground bar Ground fault protection (zero sequence) Handle lockoff device Hinges, special (LT trim) Increased dimensions Increased panel bus rating Interiors to t existing boxes Locks, special (LT trim) Metering devices Molded-case switches Nameplates engraved No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes PRL2a No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes PRL3a Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes PRL3E No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL4B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL4F Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Std. Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Column Type No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Standard No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 22 067
Panelboards 22.7-11 Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
General DescriptionTypes PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
Table 22.7-17. ModicationsAlphabetical Index (Continued)

Modication Available on Panelboard Types PRL1a Neutral rated 200% Painting and special coating Permanent circuit numbers Remote control switches (ASCO 920) Service entrance Shunt trips Split bus or meter loop Sub-feed breakers Sub-feed lugs Sub-metering, IQ Energy Sentinel Surge protective device (SPD) Tamperproof screws (LT trim) Terminals, copper only for breakers Through-feed lugs Time clock space only Touchup paint Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL2a Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL3a Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL3E Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL4B Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PRL4F Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Column Type Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
22.7-12 Panelboards
September 2011
Sheet 22 068
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command

February 2012
Sheet 23 001
23.0-1
Lighting Control Systems Pow-R-Command
Contents
Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2 Pow-R-Command Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2 Pow-R-Command Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-3 Pow-R-Command 5000 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1-1 Pow-R-Command 2000 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2-1 System Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2-2 Pow-R-Command 1000 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3-1 System Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3-2 Pow-R-Command 750 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4-1 System Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4-2 Pow-R-Command 100 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5-1 System Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5-2 Pow-R-Command 25 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6-1 System Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6-1 Building Automation Systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6-2 Pow-R-Command 2000/1000/75 Panel Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tab 22 Panelboards Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Pow-R-Command 750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16147D Section 26 24 16.11 Pow-R-Command 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16147E Section 26 24 16.13 Pow-R-Command 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16147F Section 26 24 16.16
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pow-R-Command Family
CA08104001E
23.0-2 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command Family

General Information
February 2012
Sheet 23 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pow-R-Command Family
Eatons Pow-R-Command family of lighting control panelboards is designed to meet the lighting control needs for buildings of all sizes and complexity. The system incorporates microprocessor-based distributed intelligence within a traditional panelboard, simplifying wiring in the eld. The system can be networked over customers LAN or directly interfaced to the Internet, allowing for password protected Web access. The panelboard design allows the Pow-R-Command lighting control system to meet shortcircuit ratings, as required by the National Electrical Code (NEC).
Design Considerations
Short-Circuit Protection: In the past, contactors or relay panels were mounted close to the lighting load and short-circuit ratings were not a major concern. Today, most of the lighting control devices are located in electrical rooms, often adjacent to the panelboards that feed them. These devices are subjected to short-circuit conditions almost as high as those of the electrical distribution equipment. The current version of the National Electrical Code now requires that these lighting control devices carry a shortcircuit rating (Article 110.10). Although some traditional lighting control components are available with shortcircuit ratings, these ratings are limited and may require upstream fusing. A lighting control panelboard makes meeting the requirements of NEC 110.10 as simple as specifying the short-circuit rating of the panelboard. Flexibility: Lighting control panelboards allow simple and inexpensive changes during startup. Contactor and relay panels often require rewiring to make changes in the eld. Choices: Eatons lighting control panelboards offer varying levels of exibility, from six zones per panel with the Pow-R-Command 25, up to 250 zones per panel with the Pow-R-Command 2000 and PC Central software. Space: Lighting control panelboards eliminate contactor panels and/or relay panels, freeing up valuable wall space. Pow-R-Command panels are the same width as standard panelboards. Retrot Applications: Retrotting traditional lighting control methods into an existing electrical distribution system often requires extensive rewiring and unwanted downtime. In most cases, a Pow-R-Command panel interior can be installed into an existing panelboard back box, and the cables can be re-terminated on the new circuit breakers, with minimal downtime.
Installation Considerations
Simplicity: Lighting control panelboards are as easy to install as standard panelboards. There are no additional components to install.
Labor: Because contactors and relays are eliminated, the labor associated with installing them and the additional cables and conduit associated with them is eliminated. Startup: Startup for the Pow-R-Command panelboards is straightforward. The PRC25 requires no startup. It is prewired at the factory. The PRC100 is provided with factory startup assistance for trouble-free installation. The PRC750 is provided with an LCD display and keypad for on-site programming. The PRC1000 and PRC2000 are programmed over the network. They have an optional display available for local interface.
Lighting Control Overview

Traditional lighting control employs lighting contactors or relay panels to turn groups of lighting on or off. Input devices are typically time clocks, photo cells, wall switches, or, in more sophisticated applications, contact inputs from a building automation system (BAS). Pow-R-Command is a lighting control panelboard with remote controllable circuit breakers. These controllable circuit breakers perform a dual function: 1. They provide the overcurrent and overload protection for the circuit. 2. They perform the same function as relays and contactors in traditional lighting control systems, opening and closing the circuit in response to a remote signal.
Operational Considerations
Failure Modes: If a lighting contactor or relay fails to operate due to a mechanical or control system failure, it is very difcult to control the lights manually. Often, it is necessary to hardwire around the device on a temporary basis. With a lighting control panelboard system, the circuit breaker can be manually switched on or off as necessary until the system is back in operation. Flexibility: In many cases, the lighting control scheme may change over the life of the facility. With traditional lighting control methods, changes require major rewiring and facility downtime. Breaker control schemes can be changed within the lighting control panelboard, often with a simple modication through software.
Seismic Qualication
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 003
Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command Family

Selection Guide
23.0-3
Pow-R-Command 2000 (PRC2000)

Eatons PRC2000 is a microprocessorbased programmable lighting control system that can be used to control all of the lighting in your industrial facilities, high-rise ofce buildings and airports. Being on the cutting edge of technology, the Pow-R-Command 2000 is an IP-based device with an embedded Web server. Capable of being used in both standalone and networkable applications, the PRC2000 can incorporate both standard branch-mounted breakers and controllable thermal-magnetic breakers for tailored control. The System Controller also includes load override, holiday scheduling, one-shot or event schedules, off warning to tenants, memory loss protection, hardware diagnostics and real-time clock for optimal energy management functions. The PRC2000 also incorporates the ability to communicate with networked devices over the Building Automation and Control Network (BACnet) protocol. BACnet is an industry standard protocol and provides increased exibility in component and device selection for the control system. Consult your local Eaton representative for availability of additional protocols.

Eatons PRC1000 is a microprocessorbased programmable lighting control system. With ratings from 100400A, the PRC1000 can be used as a standalone panelboard or networked as a system. The panelboard uses both branch mounted standard breakers through 100A, and controllable thermal-magnetic breakers controlled by the Pow-R-Command 1000 System Controller. The System Controller also includes load override, holiday scheduling, one-shot or event schedules, off warning to tenants, memory loss protection, hardware diagnostics and real-time clock for optimal energy management functions. The PRC1000 system contains networkable intelligence and provides automated switching of branch circuit breakers.
Pow-R-Command 100 (JCI-100)

Eatons PRC100 panelboard system offers the broadest range of energy control in the industry using standalone PRC100 panelboards or a network of PRC100 panelboards. The PRC100 system is ideal for large, medium and small facilities with lighting control systems that require frequent changes, networkable panelboards, remote access, or all of the above.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Eatons PRC25 panelboard replaces contactors and relay panels in lighting control and other load switching systems. It is the most basic and costeffective way to remotely control loads. The PRC25 is ideal for any building that requires a xed lighting control scheme with a low installed cost. The PRC25 can be controlled by an external time clock, building management system, low-voltage switches or photocell.
Pow-R-Command 750
Designed for standalone applications, Eatons PRC750 is a premier microprocessor-based lighting control system that can be used to control all of the lighting in your industrial facilities, high-rise ofce buildings and airports. A single PRC750 panel can be connected to a maximum of three expansion panels for the ability to control up to a total of 168 Smart Breakers. The PRC750 also boasts load override, holiday scheduling, memory loss protection, astronomical time clocks and scheduling, 16 switch inputs, and alarm and message log features.
PRC25 No 6 0 No 0 6 6 0 No No No No N/a 42 0 Yes PRC100 Yes 4 8 No 48 64 4 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 42 0 Yes
Table 23.0-1. Pow-R-Command Selection Guide

Controller Required Eaton startup and integration PRC750 No 8 8 No 0 16 16 0 No No No No Yes 168 7 Yes PRC1000 Yes 8 8 Yes 48 64 75 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 168 7 Yes PRC2000 Yes 8 8 Yes 48 64 75 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 168 7 Yes
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Inputs
Low-voltage switch Universal (switch or analog) Digital switch network Optional switch input expander Total inputs
Outputs
Outputs digital (maximum controllable zones) Analog Universal I/O module Telephone override Data logging Remote access Power supply for external devices Maximum number of loads (breaker/relay) Number of satellite panels Manual override
Each rail drives up to 21 breakers. Rails can be distributed individually over a total of eight panels (maximum SLAN wire length of 150 feet).
CA08104001E
23.0-4 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command Family

Selection Guide
Table 23.0-1. Pow-R-Command Selection Guide (Continued)
Controller PRC25 No 0 No Yes No No N/A N/A N/A No N/A No No No No No No No Yes No N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A No No Yes PRC100 Yes 160 Yes Yes Yes Yes 75 50 30 Yes 24 No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 10 years 10 years No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9.6k 120 Yes No Yes PRC750 No 0 No Yes Yes Yes 75 50 30 Yes 24 No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 10 years 10 years Yes No No No No No No No No N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9.6k 1 Yes No Yes PRC1000 Yes 160 Yes Yes Yes Yes 75/250 50 30/16 Yes 24 No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Option Yes Yes 10 years 10 years Yes No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9.6k 1800 Yes No Yes
February 2012
Sheet 23 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
PRC2000 Yes 160 Yes Yes Yes Yes 75/250 50 30/16 Yes 24 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Option Yes Yes 10 years 10 years Yes No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9.6k 1800 Yes No Yes
Outputs (Continued)
Dimming Maximum number of dimming ballasts Daylight harvesting (using dimming ballasts) Daylight switching (on/off circuit switching) Time clock Time schedules Scheduling zones On/off periods per schedule Holidays Blink notice Maximum override time (hrs) RS-232 port RS-485 port Ethernet port Ethernet via external Gateway Input/output matrix across controllers Input/output matrix within controller Local LCD/LED display Local LED status indicators Non-volatile program memory Battery backup for program memory Clock memory backup Flash rmware memory
Protocols
Modbus ASCII/RTU Modbus TCP Johnson Controls N2 BACnet LonWorks SOAP/XML OPC
Browser Access
TCP/IP external device
Built-in Web Server

TCP/IP BACnet/IP server
Standards
UL 916 energy management equipment California Title 24 NEC 110.10 UL 67 panelboards CSA C22.2 #29 panelboards Baud rate Maximum controllers/network Password protected
Mounting
Three-pole breaker housing External bracket mount available

250 additional schedules with optional Network Interface Box NIB. 16 additional holidays with optional Network Interface Box NIB. Ethernet TCP/IP access with optional terminal server.
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 005
Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command 5000

General Description
23.1-1
Pow-R-Command 5000
Features and Benets

Components
Pow-R-Command 5000 Controller
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 5000 (PRC5000) is a microprocessor-based building automation and energymanagement system capable of controlling energy and demand using remotely located unitary controllers. The system performs the functions of scheduling equipment, demand limiting, duty cycling, monitoring, reporting, trend logging and implementing control strategies.
Modular hardware with exible user congurations Non-volatile storage of all database and control information Clock and calendar with battery backup Two multidrop RS-485 LANs Up to 15 individual unitary LANs coordinated through a single PRC5000, two of these may be wired directly to the PRC5000; the rest are connected via the facilitys Ethernet LAN Up to 120 universal unitary controllers per LAN to control many different types of systems: HVAC, pumps, conveyors, etc. Ethernet port for easy access to remote unitary LANs over existing Ethernet LAN wiring RS-232 serial connection for local terminal or modem Automatic fail-safe mode 250 schedules, 250 programming monitors and 50 control structures Supports remote rmware upgrades Optimum START/STOP, equipment scheduling Trend collection Maintenance and security alarm messages Terminal interface with screen editor data entry Load shedding, demand limiting energy management, four meters Reports alarms or messages of adverse conditions by e-mail or pager over modem or network Automatic communications between remote sites and the central system with automatic logon and password exchange
Linux-based operating system for secure operations, communicating TCP/IP via the Web Integrated Web-server serves up canned or custom Web pages stored directly on the controller. These pages can be viewed using any standard Web-browser and provides the interface for monitoring and controlling the system. Canned and custom Web pages then can be viewed with a standard Internet browser Monitor the building and manually control by Web page interface Universal Unitary Controllers User congurable to control pumps, fans, compressors, conveyors, dampers, etc. Accept inputs from pushbutton stations, thermostats, photo sensors, KYZ meter pulses and many other device outputs Addressable with unique address Up to 120 UUC per RS-485 network Basic model (UUC-0) has four direct digital inputs (linked with four pulse counters), eight analog inputs, three analog outputs and two thermostat ports The cost-efcient UUC-4, has four digital outputs (TRIAC or relay) each with an LED status light and analog/universal inputs (no dedicated digital inputs), and one thermostat port The multi-functional UUC-8 can be ordered with four conguration options (TRIAC or relay output options as well as power options). Eight digital outputs, 12 digital inputs, LED status indication of all digital outputs and inputs, eight analog/universal inputs, three analog outputs, two thermostat inputs and LED status lights for controller power and LAN receive/send data U-LAN, the unitary controller LAN operates at 9600 baud on a pair of wires using standard RS-485 drivers, up to 4000 feet on a single twisted-shielded cable. RS-485 repeaters should be used for when more than 4000 feet is required
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
23.1-2 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command

February 2012
Sheet 23 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 007

General Description
23.2-1
Pow-R-Command 2000
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 2000 is a microprocessor-based programmable lighting control system with an embedded Web server and BACnet native capability. The PRC2000 can be used as a standalone panelboard or networked as a system.
Intelligent Power Switching Equipment

Pow-R-Command 2000 panelboards are offered from 100 to 400A in main lug and main breaker congurations. Available voltages are 120/240, 208Y/ 120 and 480Y/277, single-phase and three-phase. The panelboard uses both branch-mounted standard breakers through 100A, and controllable thermalmagnetic breakers up to 30A that are controlled by the Pow-R-Command 2000 System Controller. The panels are available in column width. The Pow-R-Command 2000 controllers provide the ability to directly operate up to eight breaker control busses. Such a capability allows a single controller to directly operate up to 168 GHQRSP and BABRSP controllable circuit breakers, with individual control and status feedback of each controllable breaker. The System Controller also includes load override, holiday scheduling, one-shot or event schedules, off warning to tenants by blinking lights, memory loss protection, power failure/ brownout protection, hardware diagnostics, a real-time clock and 16 dry contact switch inputs. Up to 100 digital switches can be connected. Equipment within the Pow-R-Command 2000 system may be networked. Up to 120 panelboards may be networked over an ethernet cable without the need for a personal computer in the system. The Pow-R-Command 2000 panelboard is listed UL 67 for panelboards and UL 916 for energy management equipment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Features

Optional LCD display and keypad Web pages Memory loss protection Power failure/brownout recovery Astronomical real-time clock PC Central control software Time scheduling Holiday scheduling Digital and analog I/O Input to output switch matrix Messages/alarms Daylight optimization Switch Override Controller (SOC) Telephone Override Controller (TOC) Digital switch network
Components
Pow-R-Command 2000 Panelboard

Controller includes embedded Web server Intelligent power switching equipment LCD programming display and keypad Application Specic Controllers (ASCs) PC Central control software Technical support Web site E-mail Telephone
BACnet Protocol
The PRC2000 unit is capable for integration within BACnet native control networks. BACnet is a communications protocol widely used in building automation and controls and adds even more exibility to the control system. Consult your local Eaton representative for additional network protocols.
CA08104001E
23.2-2 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command 2000

System Congurations
February 2012
Sheet 23 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
System Congurations
PRC2000 Network Architecture
Containing an embedded Web server, each Pow-R-Command 2000 system is programmed with a unique IP address for communication via any standard Internet browser. Web access is standard with the PRC2000. Eight 21-circuit control busses congured as needed throughout PRL1A and 2A panels. The PRC2000 directly interfaces to a BACnet Client Workstation.
PRC EP 1 BCB 5th Floor

PRC EP 1 BCB

PRC EP 1 BCB
Breaker Control Busses (BCB)

Every Pow-R-Command Expansion Panelboard can be congured with the left and/or right breaker control busses installed. When using a PRC EP panel with one BCB, the remote controlled breakers are placed on the side with the control bus. Standard and controlled breakers can be distributed anywhere in the panel as needed.
PRC EP 2 BCB 3rd Floor

PRC EP 2 BCB
PRC EP 2 BCB 2nd Floor
PRC 2000 2 BCB
CAT 5 Customer LAN PC with Internet Browser
PRC 2000 2 BCB Ground
Each Pow-R-Command 2000 Typical for 8 Breaker Control Busses Each with 21 Breakers

#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent). CAT 5E or 6 for digital switch network.
Remote Access Thru VPN
Figure 23.2-1 PRC2000 Breaker Control Busses
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 009

General Description
23.3-1
Pow-R-Command 1000
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 1000 is a microprocessor-based programmable lighting control system. The PRC1000 can be used as a standalone panelboard or networked as a system.

Pow-R-Command 1000 panelboards are offered from 100 to 400A in main lug and main breaker congurations. Available voltages are 120/240, 208Y/ 120 and 480Y/277, single-phase and three-phase. The panelboard uses both branch-mounted standard breakers through 100A, and controllable thermalmagnetic breakers up to 30A that are controlled by the Pow-R-Command 1000 System Controller. The panels are available in column width. The Pow-R-Command 1000 controllers provide the ability to directly operate up to eight breaker control busses. Such a capability allows a single controller to directly operate up to 168 GHQRSP and BABRSP controllable circuit breakers, with individual control and status feedback of each controllable breaker. The System Controller also includes load override, holiday scheduling, one-shot or event schedules, off warning to tenants by blinking lights, memory loss protection, power failure/brownout protection, hardware diagnostics, a real-time clock and 16 dry contact switch inputs. Equipment within the Pow-R-Command 1000 system may be networked. Up to 120 panelboards may be networked over a shielded twisted pair network cable without the need for a personal computer in the system. The Pow-R-Command 1000 panelboard is listed UL 67 for panelboards and UL 916 for energy management equipment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Features

LCD display and keypad Memory loss protection Power failure/brownout recovery Astronomical real-time clock Control software Time scheduling Holiday scheduling Input to output switch matrix Messages/alarms Daylight optimization Switch Override Controller (SOC) Telephone Override Controller (TOC)
Components

Intelligent power switching equipment LCD programming display and keypad Application Specic Controllers (ASCs) Software and support Integration components
CA08104001E

System Congurations
February 2012
Sheet 23 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
System Congurations
PRC1000 Application
Customizable extension panels allow for combinations of both regular and remote controllable breakers for individualized solutions as shown in this riser diagram. Eatons Pow-R-Command 1000 Controller can support up to eight breaker control busses contained within four standard panelboards or split between a maximum of eight. When connected to the buildings Internet, all master and expansion panels can be controlled.

PRC EP 2 BCB

PRC EP 2 BCB

3rd Floor
PRC EP 2 BCB

PRC EP 2 BCB
PRC EP 2 BCB 2nd Floor
PRC 1000 2 BCB
PRC 1000 RS-485 Belden 3105A or Equivalent
Network Interface
PC with Software
Ground
Each Pow-R-Command 1000 8 Breaker Control Busses Each with 21 Breakers

#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent). CAT 5E or 6 for digital switch network.
Remote Access Thru Modem or VPNEthernet
Figure 23.3-1. PRC1000 Breaker Control Busses
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 011

General Description
23.4-1
Pow-R-Command 750
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 750 is a microprocessor-based programmable lighting control system. The Pow-RCommand 750 can be used as a standalone panel, or the user has the option to connect up to three expansion panels to the 750 creating its own standalone subnetwork.

Pow-R-Command 750 panelboards are offered from 100 to 400A in main lug and main breaker congurations. Available voltages are 120/240, 208Y/ 120 and 480Y/277, single-phase and three-phase. The panelboard uses both branch-mounted standard breakers through 100A, and controllable thermalmagnetic breakers up to 30A that are controlled by the Pow-R-Command 750 System Controller. The panels are available in column width. The Pow-R-Command 750 controllers provide the ability to directly operate up to eight breaker control busses. Such a capability allows a single controller to directly operate up to 168 GHQRSP and BABRSP controllable circuit breakers, with individual control and status feedback of each controllable breaker. The System Controller also includes load override, holiday scheduling, one-shot or event schedules, off warning to tenants by blinking lights, memory loss protection, power failure/brownout protection, hardware diagnostics, a real-time clock and 16 dry contact switch inputs. The Pow-R-Command 750 panelboard is listed UL 67 for panelboards and UL 916 for energy management equipment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Features

LCD display and keypad Memory loss protection Power failure/brownout recovery Astronomical real-time clock Time scheduling Holiday scheduling Input to output switch matrix Messages/alarms Daylight control (via photocell)
Components
Intelligent power switching equipment LCD programming display and keypad Integration components
CA08104001E

System Congurations
February 2012
Sheet 23 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
System Congurations
Pow-R-Command 750
Designed for standalone applications, Eatons PRC750 is a microprocessorbased lighting control system that can be used to control the lighting in your industrial facilities, high-rise ofce buildings and airports. A single PRC750 panel can be connected to a maximum of three expansion panels for the ability to control up to a total of 168 Smart Breakers. The PRC750 also includes load override, holiday scheduling, memory loss protection, astronomical time clocks and scheduling, 16 switch inputs, and alarm and message log features.
PRC EP 1 5th Floor
PRC EP 1 4th Floor
PRC EP 2 3rd Floor

PRC EP 2 2nd Floor
PRC 750
Programming via local LCD No Start-up required by factory
Ground
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent)
Figure 23.4-1. PRC750 Standalone System Architecture
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 013
Lightning Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command 100

General Description
23.5-1
Pow-R-Command 100
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 100 is a microprocessor-based programmable lighting control system. The PRC100 can be used as a standalone panelboard or networked as a system.

Pow-R-Command 100 panelboards are offered from 100 to 400A in main lug and main breaker congurations. Available voltages are 120/240, 208Y/ 120 and 480Y/277, single-phase and three-phase. The panelboard uses both branch-mounted standard breakers through 225A, and controllable thermal-magnetic breakers which are controlled by the Pow-R-Command 100 System Controller through an integral communications bus housed in the panelboard. This integral low voltage control bus connects to the System Controller and allows the individual control and status feedback of each controllable breaker. The System Controller also includes load override, holiday scheduling, one-shot or event schedules, off warning to tenants by blinking lights, memory loss protection, power failure/brownout protection, hardware diagnostics, a real-time clock and 12 dry contact switch inputs. Equipment within the Pow-R-Command 100 system may be networked. Up to 120 panelboards may be networked over a shielded twisted pair network cable without the need for a personal computer in the system. The Pow-R-Command 100 panelboard is listed UL 67 for panelboards and UL 916 for energy management equipment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Features

LCD display and keypad Memory loss protection Power failure/brownout recovery Astronomical real-time clock Control software Time scheduling Holiday scheduling Input to output switch matrix Message/alarms Daylight optimization Switch Override Controller (SOC) Telephone Override Controller (TOC)
Components
Intelligent power switching equipment Application Specic Controllers (ASCs) Software and support Integration components
PRC100 Exterior View
CA08104001E
23.5-2 Lightning Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command 100

System Congurations
February 2012
Sheet 23 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Pigtail Cable Standard Panelboard with Controllable and Standard Breakers Typical System Controller
PRC100-EC
PRC100
PRC100 Controllable Breakers or Standard Breakers 3 ASCs Maximum (Typical)
USC SOC
USC
USC
Option Expansion Network Remote Input
SOC Control Cabinet
PRC100-EC
PRC100
PRC100-EC
USC
USC SOC
USC
USC SOC
Typical branches: Up to 42 controllable circuits. Chassis mounted controllable breakers can be mixed with standard non-controllable branch breakers.
Control Cabinet Main Network Cable (Twisted Pair) PRC100 PRC100 PRC100
Photocell Switch or LV Switch Analog Phone Line Standard Analog Modem USC USC USC 120 Vac RS-232/Serial Cable Serial Switching Box
32 33
Optional Networked PCsAccess to Graphics Program via DDE
NIB Optional Computer/ Software PC RS-232 Cable Keyboard Central PC/DDE Server Monitor
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 23.5-1. Typical Building Lighting Control SystemNetworked
Typical New Lighting Control System

Eatons Pow-R-Command 100 panelboards shown above each have a System Controller for the basic lighting control functions. The Pow-R-Command EC panelboards shown contain additional chassis space for a switch override controller.
As shown, the central personal computer (PC) is optional because each panelboard is a standalone operating lighting control system with basic lighting control functions. The PC may be used for programming changes; downloading software; scheduling, viewing system status and conguration, etc.
Legend
PRC100 = Standard Pow-RCommand 100 Panel PRC100-EC = Pow-R-Command 100 with Expansion Chassis USC = Universal System Controller Board PC = Personal Computer NIB = Network Interface Box SOC = Switch Override Controller
CA08104001E
February 2012
Sheet 23 015

General Description
23.6-1
Pow-R-Command 25

Pow-R-Command 25 panelboards are offered from 100 to 400A in main lug and main breaker congurations. Available voltages are 120/240, 480Y/277 Vac and 208Y/120, single-phase and threephase. The panelboard uses both branch-mounted standard breakers through 100A and controllable thermalmagnetic breakers that are controlled by the MTM. The Pow-R-Command 25 panelboard provides the ability to group up to 42 remotely operated controllable
breakers into six individual zones. Each zone is designed to be switched by a dry or control signal contact from an external device. Each Pow-R-Command 25 panelboard has an integral zoning board where the zone designations are pre-wired at the factory and linked to specic contact inputs. Limited changes may be made to zone designations in the eld through wiring changes. The Pow-R-Command 25 panelboard is listed UL 67 for panelboards and UL 916 for energy management equipment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
System Congurations
33 34
Figure 23.6-1. Typical Electrically Held Contactor Control System
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 25 is designed to replace lighting control systems involving multi-pole lighting contactors and relay panels. The Pow-R-Command 25 uses controllable circuit breakers in a panelboard that are grouped into zones and switched by a dry or control signal contact from an external source. The controllable breakers are pre-wired at the factory in up to six customer-designated zones with up to 16 breakers per zone.
Note: Refer to factory for zoning restrictions.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Components
Intelligent power switching equipment Maintained-to-momentary board (MTM)
Figure 23.6-2. Typical Pow-R-Command 25 Panelboard System
CA08104001E
23.6-2 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command Pow-R-Command

Operational Description
February 2012
Sheet 23 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Building Automation Systems (BAS)

Integration
The Pow-R-Command lighting control system can be integrated with Building Automation Systems via the following optional components:
System Interface Equipment
Lighting Management Software
Native Modbus Controller. The Native Modbus Controller takes the place of the PRC100 System Controller. The Native Modbus Controller is designed as a slave Modbus node JCI100 Controller. The JCI100 Controller is designed to take the place of the PRC100 System Controller. The JCI Controller is designed specically for use in a Johnson Controls Metasys network. The JCI100 communicates using JCIs N2 protocol and is treated as an addressed slave node on an N2 bus OPC Server. The PRC OPC Server is a software addition onto a PRC100 or 1000 system. It is designed as an interface between the PRC system and an OPC server/client SOAP Server. The PRC SOAP Server is a PRC100 system network add-on. The PRC SOAP Server is designed as an interface between a PRC100 or 1000 system and a SOAP client BACnet Server. The PRC BACnet Server is a PRC system network add-on. The BACnet Server is designed to interface between the PRC100 or 1000 system and a BAS provider using the BACnet protocol PRC2000 Web-enabled BACnet Controller. The PRC2000 BACnet Controller provides direct interface via the Web to a BACnet BAS system
Computer
The System Interface Equipment

Provides Windows-based programming and monitoring screens. The personal computer functions as the central point for data manipulation and programming of the system. It communicates with the system through a network interface device that is connected to the system through a twisted pair network The personal computer is not a required component of a PRC100 network but is a useful tool for centralized access and backup of system controllers An optional hand-held programmer provides the capability to communicate directly with the PRC100 system when maintenance of the panel is required. The hand-held programmer connects directly to the PRC100 controllers RS-485 board maintenance port using the supplied cable

Software
The Lighting Management Software

Provides programming for the following equipment: Power switching equipment Application-specic controllers The Lighting Management Software provides fully interactive easy-to-use software screens for the following functions: System Setup System Management Controller Access and Modication Data Logging and Backup Remote Monitoring
Refer to the factory for further information on applying these interfaces.
The programming screens provide access to all the capabilities that exist in the power switching and application-specic controllers Additional software components can be purchased that will allow for the creation and use of custom graphic screens and/or Web access to a PRC100 system Network components provide exibility in establishing a PRC100 network. The network can consist of either a pure twisted shielded network or a combination of a twisted shielded network and Ethernet. Ethernet networks are accomplished using the PRC100 Ethernet Server To connect to a PRC100 network via a PC, modem or remote LAN/WAN connection, a Network Access Device is required. There are two types of Network Access Devices offered. The rst is a Network Interface Box, which allows connection via an RS-232 port. The second is an Ethernet Server, which is used for connection via Ethernet
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAT.73.01.T.E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 24 001
24.0-1
BuswayPow-R-Way III Low Voltage
Contents
BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-2 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-2 Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-2 Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-3 Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-8 Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-11 Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-15 Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-16 Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-19 Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-21 Tees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-23 Crosses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-24 Tap Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-25 Weatherheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-27 Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-28 Phase Transpositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-28 Transformer Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-29 Transformer Throat Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-30 Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-31 Meter Center Power Takeoff Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-32 Busway Connected Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-34 Pow-R-Way III Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-35 Wall/Floor/Roof Flanges and End Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-36 Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-37 Plug-in Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39 Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-41 Power Takeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44 Receptacle Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45 Plug-in Device Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46 Plug-in Device Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-48 Construction Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-50 Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51 Final Field Fit Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-52 Pow-R-Flex General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-1 Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-3 Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-4 100-Ampere Busway General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-1 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-1 Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-8 Receptacle Plug-in Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-8 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2-9 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Section 16466 Section 26 25 00
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pow-R-Way III Busway Installation
CA08104001E
24.0-2 BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 24 002
General Description
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Way III is a 600V, totally enclosed, nonventilated, sandwich bus design available with copper bus bars in ratings from 2255000A or with aluminum bus bars from 2254000A. Pow-R-Way III is available in outdoor feeder, indoor feeder, indoor plug-in and indoor sprinkler-proof congurations. All four types can be used interchangeably without adapters or special splice plates provided they are of the same current and system rating. The short-circuit withstand ratings for plug-in busway are equal to those of indoor and outdoor feeder busway.
Table 24.0-1. Pow-R-Way Designations, See Figure 24.0-2

Available Conductor Including Grounding Congurations and Neutral Options 3WG 3WI 3WH 3WHG 4WG 4WI 4WH 4WHG 4WNG 4WNI 4WNH 4WNHG
Three-phase, three-wire, 50% internal ground Three-phase, three-wire, 50% isolated internal ground Three-phase, three-wire, 50% integral housing ground Three-phase, three-wire, 100% ground Three-phase, four-wire, 50% internal ground, 100% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, 50% isolated internal ground, 100% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, 50% integral housing ground, 100% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, 100% ground , 100% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, 50% internal ground, 200% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, isolated internal ground, 200% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, 50% integral housing ground, 200% neutral Three-phase, four-wire, 100% ground , 200% neutral
Standards
Pow-R-Way III meets the requirements of NEMA, UL 857, CSA C22.2 No. 27-94, IEEE, ANSI, IEC, CE and is manufactured in an ISO 9001 certied facility.
100% ground consists of the 50% integral housing ground combined with a 50% internal ground bus.
IEC Standards
Pow-R-Way III busway is self certied for all ratings and KEMA certied on select ratings to conform to the following IEC Standards: EN 60439-1:1999+A1:2004, EN 60439-2:2000-03, EN 60529.
Table 24.0-2. IEC 439-2 Type Tests

IEC 439-2 Subclause 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.7 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.12 8.2.13 8.2.14 Description Verication of temperature rise limits Verication of dielectric properties Verication of short-circuit strength Verication of effectiveness of protective circuit Verication of clearances and creepage distances Verication of degree of protection Verication of electrical characteristics Verication of structural strength Verication of crushing resistance Verication of resistance of insulating materials to abnormal heat Verication of resistance of ame propagation
KEMA Certication
Pow-R-Way III busway has been certied by KEMA for the following IEC 439-2 subclauses:
Seismic Qualication
Table 24.0-3. IEC 60529 IP Ratings
IEC 529 IP Rating IP2X IP40 IP54 IP55 IP66
Busway Type Pow-R-Way III plug-in busway; plug-in outlet protects against access to live parts Pow-R-Way III indoor plug-in and feeder busway Pow-R-Way III sprinkler-proof plug-in busway Pow-R-Way III outdoor feeder busway Pow-R-Way III severe outdoor feeder busway
Figure 24.0-1. Pow-R-Way III Joint Design
Note: Outdoor feeder and sprinkler-proof plug-in busway joints require eld-applied calk to meet above listed IP ratings.
Table 24.0-4. IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection

A B C 3-Phase, 3-Wire with Housing Ground 3WH A B C N 3-Phase, 4-Wire with Housing Ground and 100% Neutral 4WH A B C N 3-Phase, 4-Wire with Housing Ground and 200% Neutral 4WNH
IEC 529 IP Rating IP40
Description Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire or solid foreign object 1 mm diameter. No protection against water. Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire and dust shall not penetrate in quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation or impair safety. Protects against splashing water. Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire and dust shall not penetrate in quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation or impair safety. Protects against water jets. Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire and dust shall not penetrate in quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation or impair safety. Protects against powerful water jets.
IP54
G A B C 3-Phase, 3-Wire with 50% Internal or Isolated Ground Bus 3WG or 3WI
G A B C N 3-Phase, 4-Wire with 50% Internal or Isolated Ground Bus and 100% Neutral 4WG or 4WI
G A B C N 3-Phase, 4-Wire with 50% Internal or Isolated Ground Bus and 200% Neutral 4WNG or 4WNI
IP55
IP66
Figure 24.0-2. Conductor Congurations
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 003
24.0-3
Conductor/Insulation System
Construction Details, See Figure 24.0-3
Bus bars are fabricated from high strength, 98% conductivity copper or 55% conductivity aluminum. The joint edge of each busway conductor bar is beveled while the Pow-R-Bridge conductor bars have full rounded edges. This makes for a smooth and easy connection between the busway and Pow-R-Bridge joint. The phase and neutral bars are insulated with Class B 130C epoxy insulation. The epoxy powder is applied by an automated uidized bed process to ensure uniform thickness. The epoxy powder is applied over the full length of the preheated bar except for the joint and plug-in contact surfaces. After the powder has been fused to the bus bar, the bars enter an oven to cure. This process ensures that all of the epoxy powder cross links and hardens to the bus bar. Fluidized bed applied epoxy provides resistance to water absorption and chemical erosion. Epoxy has outstanding heat transfer characteristics and is ideally suited for sandwich bus applications. The uniform thickness and smooth surface provided by epoxy ensures that the insulation will have no cavities or voids and also provides excellent edge coverage to the bars. Epoxy has excellent dielectric strength, is ame retardant and resists impacts that other Class B insulating material could not withstand. Bus bars for plug-in applications have full-sized welded conductor tabs at the contact location points of the plug-in outlet. The tabs are of the same thickness as the conductor bars. The plug-in conductor tabs extend into the plug-in outlet, maintaining a true sandwich design throughout the entire busway length. The result is improved heat dissipation, better bracing and elimination of the need to separate, or are, the conductor bars at the plug-in opening. Maintaining a true sandwich design also eliminates potential pathways for the propagation of ame, smoke and gas through the busway housing, commonly referred to as the chimney effect. Silver-plating is applied to all joint and contact surfaces after the uidized bed epoxy is applied. Aluminum bus bars are silver-plated by the Alstan 88C process. Copper bus bars are plated with silver by a ashing process. The silver-plating of the conductor tabs provides an extremely durable contact surface for the spring loaded connections of bus plug stab assemblies.
Integral Ground
The two-piece, extruded aluminum housing is designed, manufactured and UL listed as a 50% integral ground path (integral earth) and is fully fault rated. The system ground continuity is maintained through each joint by the ground path end blocks, ground path plates and joint covers. The aluminum joint covers are furnished with ground path contact surfaces on the inside of each end. When the covers are installed, the contact surfaces are bolted directly to the ground path end blocks with four 3/8-16 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) hex bolts per cover. A highly visible label is furnished on each joint cover to alert the installer that the covers must be properly installed to maintain the ground path. The result is a 50% ground path that ensures ground continuity with very low resistance characteristics.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Internal Ground Option

Pow-R-Way III offers a 50% ground bus (copper or aluminum) that is internal to the busway.
Isolated Ground Option

To meet the growing demand for grounding isolation, Pow-R-Way III offers a 50% isolated ground bus that is insulated and internal to the busway. This option is available for application to operations with heavy microprocessorbased loads or large computer installations where grounding isolation is essential.
Housing Details, See Figure 24.0-3

Pow-R-Way III is constructed with a rugged two-piece extruded aluminum housing. There are no seams or welds across the top or bottom sides of the housing. The housing is bolted along the bottom sides below the bus bars with high tensile strength zinc-plated hardware. No fastening bolts or screws penetrate the housing or enter the bus bar package. Pow-R-Way III achieves the highest 6-cycle short-circuit withstand ratings available in the industry today. The nonmagnetic, all-aluminum housing provides for excellent heat dissipation and a signicant reduction in reactance and magnetic ux leakage as compared to a steel or steel and aluminum combination housing. The integrity and strength of the housing ensures speciers and users of a safe and durable installation over a broad spectrum of industrial and commercial applications. A protective nish of ANSI 61, epoxy powder paint is applied by an automated electrostatic process. Figure 24.0-3. Housing Assembly
41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 004
Construction Details 200% Neutral Option, See Figure 24.0-4

Pow-R-Way III offers a fully rated, 200% neutral bus option for busway fed distribution systems with nonlinear loads. The additional neutral capacity prevents the overheating caused by zero sequence harmonic currents. The Pow-R-Way III 200% neutral is manufactured with a single 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) thick bus bar, which receives the same silver-plating and Class B, 130C Epoxy insulation as the phase bars. Power System Harmonics are generated by various types of nonlinear loads. A sinusoidal voltage applied to a nonlinear load will result in a non-sinusoidal current and waveform distortion. Loads that are switched or pulsed, such as rectiers, thyristors and switch-mode power supplies, are nonlinear. With the proliferation of electronics into industrial, commercial and institutional applications, nonlinear loads have become a signicant and critical component of most modern distribution and control systems. Examples of nonlinear loads are personal computers, UPS systems, variable frequency motor controllers, electronic lighting ballasts, fax and copying machines, medical test equipment and many other microprocessor-based apparatus. Nonlinear load currents typically are extremely high in harmonic content. The harmonics create numerous problems in electrical systems and equipment. Some harmonics are negative sequence with 120 phase displacement (this means the phase rotation is ACB instead of ABC). Positive sequence harmonics have 120 phase displacement, but are of the same rotation as the distribution system. Certain nonlinear loads cause odd triplen harmonics which are zero sequence with no phase displacement. Balancing the phase load currents in a three-phase, fourwire system will normally reduce neutral currents to zero if load currents have an undistorted sinusoidal waveform. However, because zero sequence harmonics are additive and will not cancel each other in the neutral, the neutral current can be as high as 1.73 times the phase current, even with the phase currents perfectly balanced. This can result in overheated neutrals and lead to deterioration of equipment performance and a shortened equipment life cycle. The Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA) recommends that neutrals be oversized to at least 173% of the ampacity of the phase conductors to prevent problems. Pow-R-Way III offers a fully rated, 200% neutral bus option for busway fed distribution systems with non-sinusoidal loads. The additional neutral capacity prevents the overheating caused by high harmonic neutral currents.
Pow-R-Way III, Three-Phase Four-Wire with Housing Ground and 200% Neutral
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
UL Fire Stop System

Pow-R-Way III busway may be used in UL listed throughpenetration re stop systems. Systems applicable to busway (i.e., system number C-AJ-6002) are listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems and have met the ASTEM E814 (UL 1479) criteria. For typical installations shown in Figure 24.0-5, the installing contractor uses mineral wool batt and re stop sealant. In riser applications, the system is used in combination with Pow-R-Way III vertical spring hangers and a oor ange. In horizontal applications, the system is used in combination with two wall anges, one on each side of the wall, and sealant.
Note: This information is provided as a guideline for typical re stop systems. Consult the re stop system sealant manufacturer for the UL le number and specic product information.
Vertical Hanger
UL Listed Pow-R-Way III Busway
Mounting Support (by Others)
Floor Flange 12 Ga Steel
Figure 24.0-5. Typical Installations of Pow-R-Way III in Fire Stop Systems
Top
41 42 43
Figure 24.0-4. 200% Neutral Cross Section
C A B N
Floor
Firestop Material Suggest 3m, Specified Technologies, or Equivalent Manufacturer Fire Stop Products UL 1479 Listed Floor Flange (Optional)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 005
24.0-5
Construction Details Pow-R-Bridge, See Figure 24.0-6

Pow-R-Way III joint connections are made with the Pow-R-Bridge joint package, which is installed on each section of busway prior to shipment. A double-headed, torque-indicating bolt is provided to ensure that proper installation torque is achieved. Fall-away instruction tags are furnished on the torque-indicating bolt heads to allow for visual inspection from a distance. When the proper torque value is achieved, the top bolt head will shear off and allow the tag to fall to the oor. Any joint that is improperly torqued will retain the highly visible (caution yellow) tag at the bolt head. The Pow-R-Bridge can provide an adjustment of 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) at each joint. Over adjustment is prevented by the joint covers, which will only allow a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) adjustment to be made and by stopping lances on the conductor bars of the Pow-R-Bridge. The non-rotating design of the Pow-R-Bridge maintains its conguration integrity when it has been removed from a section of busway. The conductors and insulators will not displace or swivel, making reinstallation of the Pow-R-Bridge quick and easy.
Double-headed Torque-Indicating Bolt (Bottom) 1/4-20 flg. Head Hex Bolt (4 per cover) Belleville Bridge Joint Pressure Plate Washer (Top & Bottom) Ground Path Plate Ground Path End Block 130 Epoxy Insulation on Bars Bridge Joint Retainer Screw
22 23 24 25
Ground Path Contact Surface
.375-16 flg. Head Hex Bolt (4 per Cover) Joint Cover
26 27 28 29 30
Ground Path End Block
High Strength Glass Polyester Insulators
Captive Nut Retainer
Ground Path Label
Figure 24.0-6. Indoor Bridge Joint Features

Drain Gasketed Torque Hole Plug Bolt Access Cap (Top & Bottom) Gasketed Top Access Cover
Outdoor Pow-R-Bridge, See Figure 24.0-7

Joint connections for outdoor feeder busway are made with a weatherized version of the Pow-R-Bridge joint. Aluminum water barriers, 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) thick, are provided across the T and T opposite sides of both joint ends on each section of outdoor busway. Closed cell, neoprene gaskets are applied to the top of each water barrier and to the inside of the aluminum side access covers. The aluminum side access covers overlap the top and bottom access covers and bolt directly onto the end blocks. The outdoor Pow-R-Bridge has the same 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) adjustability and features as the indoor unit and is UL listed. Table 24.0-5. Busway Pow-R-Bridge Joint Dimensions
Ampere Rating UL 857 IEC 439 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Figure 24.0-8 Congurations Width Inches (mm) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 5.12 (130.0) 5.62 (142.8) 6.12 (155.4) 7.12 (180.9) 8.38 (212.9) 10.88 (276.4) 15.88 (403.4) 18.38 (466.9) 23.41 (594.6) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 5.62 (142.8) 6.12 (155.4) 7.12 (180.9) 8.38 (212.9) 9.12 (231.6) 10.88 (276.4) 18.38 (466.9) 19.88 (505.0) 23.41 (594.6) Length Inches (mm) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5)
Gasketed Cover Plate

(L)
31
Bridge Joint Retainer Screw Water Barrier Ground Path End Block Pow-R-Bridge Joint Ground Path Label Gasketed Front Joint Cover Belleville Washer p & Bottom) ) Captive Nut Retainer Double-Headed Joint Torque Bolt End Block
32 33 34 35
Ground Path Contact Surface Gasketed Rear Joint Cover
Copper
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 A A A A A A A A A B C C D A A A A A A A B B C D D
Closed Cell Neoprene Gasket Water Barrier Gasketed Bottom Access Cover
orque Bolt Access Opening
Gasketed Cover Plate Drain Hole Plug
36 37 38
Figure 24.0-7. Outdoor Bridge Joint Features

C L L
C L
C L
Aluminum
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5) 7.38 (187.5)
L
L/2
L/2
39
C L
W/2 W Figure A AL 225 1350 Ampere CU 225 2000 Ampere
W/2 W Figure B AL 1600 and 2000 Ampere CU 2500 Ampere

C L
40 41 42 43
C L L/2 W/2 W Figure D AL 3200 and 4000 Ampere CU 5000 Ampere C L

L L/2 W/2
C L
W Figure C AL 2500 Ampere CU 3200 and 4000 Ampere
Figure 24.0-8. Pow-R-Bridge Joint


September 2011
Sheet 24 006
Construction Details Pow-R-Way III Feeder Busway, See Figure 24.0-9 and Table 24.0-6

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
2255000A copper 2254000A aluminum
C L
C L
Straight sections of feeder busway can be supplied in any length, at 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) increments, from a 16.00-inch (406.4 mm) minimum to a 10-foot (3048 mm) maximum. Figure 24.0-9 illustrates the conguration of feeder busway and Pow-R-Bridge for the available ampere ratings. See Table 24.0-6 below for reference to the proper conguration. Table 24.0-6. Feeder Busway Conguration
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 A A A A A A A A A B B C C D D Figure 24.0-9 Conguration
C L
T F Configuration A Top View 1 Bar Per Phase F
C L
Configuration B Top View 1 Bar Per Phase
C L
C L
T Configuration C Top View F 2 Bars Per Phase
Each section will include one, factory installed, Pow-R-Bridge mounted to the left end of the busway (with the T to the top, when viewing the bus from the F side). Each Pow-R-Bridge will have a T label that must always match the T orientation of the busway.
C L
C L
36
F
37
C L
Configuration D Top View 2 Bars Per Phase
38 39 40 41 42 43
T F
16.00 Minimum (406.4)
C L
Front View
Figure 24.0-9. Feeder Busway
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 007
24.0-7
Construction Details Pow-R-Way III Plug-in Busway, See Figure 24.0-10 and Tables 24.0-7 and 24.0-8
2255000A copper 2254000A aluminum Straight sections of plug-in busway are made only in 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) incremental lengths with a maximum length of 10 feet (3m). Figure 24.0-10 depicts the conguration of plug-in busway and Pow-R-Bridge for the available ampere ratings. See Table 24.0-7 below for reference to the proper conguration.

C L
12.00 (304.8)
C L
(609.6)
C L
12.00 (304.8)
C L
22 23
F
C L
1 Bar Per Phase

C C
F
C L
24 25 26
12.00 (304.8)
(609.6)
12.00 (304.8)
Table 24.0-7. Conguration

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 630 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu
F
Figure 24.0-10 Conguration
225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
A A A A A A A A A B B C C D D
1 Bar Per Phase (609.6)

C L C L
F 12.00 (304.8)
C L
27 28 29
C L
12.00 (304.8)
30
Configuration C Top View 2 Bars Per Phase F (609.6) 12.00 (304.8)
C L
12.00 (304.8)
31 32 33
Table 24.0-8 below illustrates the quantity of plug-in openings per side that are available per standard section. Table 24.0-8. Number of Plug-in Openings
Duct Length Inches 24.00 48.00 72.00 96.00 120.00 mm 609.6 1219.2 1828.8 2438.4 3048.0 Number of Plug-In Openings Front 1 2 3 4 5 Back 1 2 3 4 5
C L
34
F
Configuration D Top View 2 Bars Per Phase 24.00 Spacing (609.6)
35 36 37
12.00 (304.8)
Each section will include one, factory installed, Pow-R-Bridge mounted to the left end of the busway (with the T label to the top, when viewing the bus from the F side). Each Pow-R-Bridge will have a T label that must always match the T orientation of the busway.
12.00 (304.8)
Front View
Plug-in Outlet
The plug-in outlet and cover are made from a durable, high strength, polycarbonate material that is rated as Class B, 130C, insulation. The plug-in cover is designed to protect the contact surfaces and prevent the entry of dirt, dust or moisture. The cover has a positive screw close feature that prohibits the opening of the cover without the use of a tool. The cover is also utility leadlock sealable. As a countermeasure to the effects of thermal expansion and mechanical vibration, the plug-in outlet is secured to the busway housing with high tensile strength locking hardware.
38 39
Figure 24.0-10. Plug-In Busway

High Strength Polycarbonate Class B 130C Fingersafe Plug-in Opening
Cover Can Be Hinged on Either Side
Hinge Pins
40 41 42
A C
G B N
Leadlock Sealable
Positive Screw Close Feature
43
Figure 24.0-11. Plug-In Outlet Cover


September 2011
Sheet 24 008
Electrical Data
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Electrical Data
Table 24.0-9. Short-Circuit Rating
UL 857 Ampere Rating 6-Cycle rms Symmetrical Short-Circuit Rating Plug-In Feeder 85,000 85,000 85,000 100,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 85,000 85,000 85,000 85,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 150,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 Maximum Class L Fuse Needed to Achieve 6-Cycle rms Series Rating 100 kA 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 200 kA 1200 1200 1200 2500 2500 2500 4000 4000 4000 1600 1600 1600 1600 3000 3000 3000 3000 4000 4000
Table 24.0-11. Resistance, Reactance and ImpedanceCopper

Milliohms per 100 feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral Copper Plug-in and Feeder Busway UL 857 Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Resistance R 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 1.67 1.39 1.20 0.94 0.76 0.55 0.47 0.38 0.27 Reactance X 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 0.95 0.78 0.66 0.50 0.39 0.26 0.31 0.24 0.16 Impedance Z 2.59 2.59 2.59 2.59 1.93 1.60 1.37 1.07 0.85 0.61 0.57 0.45 0.32
Aluminum
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 85,000 85,000 85,000 100,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 150,000 150,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 85,000 85,000 85,000 85,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 150,000 200,000 200,000 200,000
Copper
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
Table 24.0-12. Resistance Values for Integral Housing Ground (Only) Milliohms Per 100 Feet (30.5m)
UL 857 Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Aluminum Phase Conductors 1.04 1.04 1.04 0.95 0.92 0.85 0.72 0.68 0.61 0.36 0.34 0.30 Copper Phase Conductors 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 0.99 0.95 0.92 0.85 0.72 0.61 0.43 0.36 0.30
Table 24.0-10. Resistance, Reactance and ImpedanceAluminum

Milliohms per 100 feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral Aluminum Plug-in and Feeder Busway UL 857 Ampere Rating 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Resistance R 4.38 4.38 4.38 2.67 2.29 1.76 1.39 1.25 1.01 0.71 0.62 0.50 Reactance X 1.17 1.17 1.17 0.99 0.84 0.64 0.49 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.24 0.19 Impedance Z 4.54 4.54 4.54 2.84 2.44 1.87 1.47 1.32 1.07 0.76 0.67 0.54
Derating Chart for Higher Ambient Temperatures

Pow-R-Way III busway may be operated continuously at its assigned ratings without exceeding the maximum hot spot temperature rise of 55C, provided the ambient temperature does not exceed 55C. For higher ambient temperatures, the ratings should be reduced by applying the appropriate multiplier shown in the following chart. Table 24.0-13. Higher Ambient Temperature Multipliers
Ambient Temperature C 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 Multiplier 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.74 0.68
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 009
24.0-9
Electrical Data Line-to-Line Voltage Drop

The table below gives average three-phase voltage drop per m) at rated current and varying power factor. Line-toneutral voltage drop is obtained by multiplying the line value by 0.577. Table 24.0-14. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop
UL 857 Ampere Rating Percent Power Factor 0 0.47 0.83 1.25 1.66 1.64 1.61 1.54 1.39 1.34 1.15 1.61 1.67 1.43 0.46 0.81 1.21 1.37 1.45 1.33 1.15 1.20 1.18 1.19 1.26 1.31 10 0.55 0.97 1.47 1.97 1.93 1.90 1.81 1.65 1.60 1.39 1.85 1.92 1.66 0.61 1.09 1.66 1.73 1.84 1.69 1.47 1.55 1.25 1.49 1.58 1.66 20 0.62 1.10 1.67 2.26 2.19 2.16 2.07 1.89 1.84 1.61 2.07 2.16 1.88 0.76 1.36 2.10 2.08 2.21 2.03 1.78 1.87 1.86 1.78 1.88 1.99 30 0.68 1.23 1.87 2.53 2.43 2.41 2.31 2.11 2.07 1.82 2.27 2.38 2.08 0.90 1.62 2.52 2.41 2.57 2.36 2.07 2.19 2.18 2.05 2.17 2.30 40 0.75 1.34 2.05 2.79 2.66 2.64 2.53 2.32 2.28 2.01 2.46 2.58 2.27 1.03 1.87 2.93 2.73 2.91 2.68 2.36 2.49 2.48 2.32 2.45 2.61 50 0.80 1.44 2.21 3.03 2.88 2.85 2.74 2.52 2.48 2.20 2.63 2.76 2.44 1.17 2.11 3.33 3.03 3.24 2.98 2.62 2.78 2.78 2.57 2.71 2.89 60 0.85 1.53 2.35 3.24 3.06 3.03 2.92 2.68 2.65 2.36 2.76 2.91 2.58 1.29 2.34 3.70 3.31 3.54 3.25 2.87 3.04 3.05 2.80 2.96 3.16 70 0.89 1.60 2.47 3.40 3.19 3.17 3.06 2.82 2.79 2.49 2.86 3.02 2.69 1.40 2.55 4.04 3.55 3.80 3.50 3.09 3.28 3.29 2.99 3.16 3.39 80 0.91 1.65 2.54 3.52 3.29 3.27 3.16 2.91 2.89 2.59 2.92 3.08 2.76 1.50 2.74 4.35 3.76 4.03 3.70 3.28 3.48 3.51 3.16 3.34 3.59 90 0.92 1.65 2.56 3.57 3.31 3.29 3.18 2.95 2.93 2.64 2.89 3.07 2.76 1.58 2.88 4.61 3.90 4.18 3.85 3.41 3.63 3.66 3.27 3.46 3.72 100
22 23 24 25
0.80 1.45 2.26 3.18 2.90 2.90 2.81 2.62 2.62 2.39 2.46 2.62 2.39 1.54 2.81 4.55 3.69 3.98 3.65 3.25 3.46 3.51 3.07 3.25 3.52
Copper
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Aluminum
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
Notes: Voltage Drop = 3 I (R cos + X sin ) Volts/100 ft (30.5m)concentrated load, where cos = power factor. For plug-in distributed loads, divide the voltage drop by 2. See IEEE Standard 141-13-8.3. Actual voltage drop for loads less than full rated current and different lengths may be calculated by multiplying the values from Table 24.0-14 by (actual/rated current) x (actual length/100 ft [30.5m]).
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 010
Electrical Data
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
IEC Electrical Data

Table 24.0-15. IEC 439-2 RatingsCopper
IEC 439 Ampere Rating 225 400 630 800 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 1-Second rms Micro-Ohms Per Meter Symmetrical Short- Resistance Reactance Circuit Rating R X 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 35,000 55,000 65,000 70,000 80,000 85,000 100,000 120,000 120,000 120,000 80.80 80.80 80.80 80.80 80.80 63.40 50.80 39.70 29.40 26.20 17.80 13.90 13.10 9.11 27.00 27.00 27.00 27.00 27.00 22.30 22.60 26.90 22.90 11.60 9.12 10.30 7.05 5.00 Impedance Z 85.20 85.20 85.20 85.20 85.20 67.20 55.60 48.00 37.30 28.80 20.00 17.30 14.90 10.40
Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground

Eatons Pow-R-Way III busway offers a variety of grounding options. Two of which are 50% integral housing ground and 50% internal ground. The 50% internal ground option has a separate ground conductor internal to the housing, which is rated 50% of the phase conductor. The integral housing ground is where the extruded aluminum housing is used as the ground path and no internal ground conductor is provided. The housing is UL listed as a 50% integral ground path. This type of ground path is as effective of a ground conductor as an internal ground bar. Table 24.0-17 shows a cross-sectional comparison between the aluminum housing and internal ground bar. The integral housing ground provides a larger ground path, which is over 100% of the cross-sectional area of the phase conductors. Figure 24.0-12 illustrates the difference between the two grounding options. Table 24.0-17. Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground Comparison
Ampere Rating UL 857 IEC 439 Al 225 400 630 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1200 1550 1600 2250 3000 3200 4500 5800 0.125 x 1.63 0.125 x 1.63 0.125 x 1.63 0.125 x 1.63 0.125 x 2.25 0.125 x 2.75 0.125 x 3.25 0.125 x 4.25 0.125 x 5.50 0.125 x 6.25 0.125 x 8.00 0.125 x 4.25 0.125 x 5.50 0.125 x 6.25 0.125 x 8.00 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Bar Size In Inches Bar Per Phase Cross-Sectional Area (sq-in) Internal Ground 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.28 0.34 0.41 0.53 0.69 0.78 1.00 1.06 1.38 1.56 2.00 Housing Ground 2.37 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.54 2.69 2.83 3.11 3.46 3.68 4.17 6.22 6.92 7.36 8.34
Table 24.0-16. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop (MV Per Meter)Copper

IEC 439 Ampere Rating 225 400 630 800 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Percent Power Factor 50 26.23 47.21 72.46 99.34 94.43 94.43 93.44 89.84 82.62 81.31 72.13 86.23 90.49 80.00 60 27.87 50.16 77.05 106.23 100.59 100.59 99.34 95.74 87.87 86.89 77.38 90.49 95.41 84.59 70 29.18 52.46 80.98 111.48 104.59 104.59 103.93 100.33 92.46 91.74 81.64 93.77 99.21 88.20 80 29.84 54.10 83.28 115.41 107.87 107.87 107.21 103.74 95.41 94.75 84.92 95.74 100.98 90.62 90 30.16 54.10 83.97 117.05 108.52 108.52 107.87 104.26 96.72 96.07 86.56 94.75 100.66 90.49 100 26.23 47.54 74.10 104.26 95.08 95.08 95.08 92.13 85.90 85.90 78.36 80.66 85.90 78.36
Notes: For plug-in distributed loads, divide the voltage drop by 2. Actual voltage drop for loads less than full rated current and different lengths may be calculated by multiplying the values from Table 24.0-16 by (actual/rated current) x (actual length/100 ft [30.5m]).
Integral Housing Ground
Internal Ground Bar
Figure 24.0-12. Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 011
24.0-11
Physical Data
Physical Data
DimensionsBus Bar and Housing
Table 24.0-18. Three-Wire with No Neutral
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000

22
Bar Conductor Conguration and Housing Size (Width x Height) Inches (mm) Per 50% Integral 50% Internal 50% Internal Phase Housing Ground 3WH Ground Bus 3WHG Isolated Ground 3WI 1 1 1 1 1 1 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 5.38 x 4.38 (136.7 x 111.3) 5.88 x 4.38 (149.3 x 111.3) 6.38 x 4.38 (162.1 x 111.3) 7.38 x 4.38 (187.5 x 111.3) 8.64 x 4.38 (219.5 x 111.3) 9.40 x 4.38 (238.8 x 111.3) 11.17 x 4.38 (283.7 x 111.3) 16.14 x 4.38 (410.0 x 111.3) 18.64 x 4.38 (473.5 x 111.3) 20.16 x 4.38 (512.1 x 111.3) 23.70 x 4.38 (602.0 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 5.38 x 4.50 (136.7 x 114.3) 5.88 x 4.50 (149.3 x 114.3) 6.38 x 4.50 (162.1 x 114.3) 7.38 x 4.50 (187.5 x 114.3) 8.64 x 4.50 (219.5 x 114.3) 9.40 x 4.50 (238.8 x 114.3) 11.17 x 4.50 (283.7 x 114.3) 16.14 x 4.50 (410.0 x 114.3) 18.64 x 4.50 (473.5 x 114.3) 20.16 x 4.50 (512.1 x 114.3) 23.70 x 4.50 (602.0 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 5.38 x 4.55 (136.7 x 115.6) 5.88 x 4.55 (149.3 x 115.6) 6.38 x 4.55 (162.1 x 115.6) 7.38 x 4.55 (187.5 x 115.6) 8.64 x 4.55 (219.5 x 115.6) 9.40 x 4.55 (238.8 x 115.6) 11.17 x 4.55 (283.7 x 115.6) 16.14 x 4.55 (410.0 x 115.6) 18.64 x 4.55 (473.5 x 115.6) 20.16 x 4.55 (512.1 x 115.6) 23.70 x 4.55 (602.0 x 115.6)
Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
Phase Bar Size IEC 439 (Depth and Width) Inches (mm) Cu 225 400 630 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2) 0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
23
Figure 24.0-15 Conguration A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6) 1 0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 1 0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 1 0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 1 0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 1 0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0) 2 0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7) 2 0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8) 2 0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2) 2
100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% internal housing ground. Refer to Figure 24.0-13 on Page 24.0-12 for conguration A and B.
Table 24.0-19. Four-Wire with 100% Neutral


IEC 439 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
Phase Bar Size (Depth and Width) Inches (mm) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2) 0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
Bar Conductor Conguration and Housing Size (Width x Height) Inches (mm) Per 50% Integral 50% Internal 50% Internal Phase Housing Ground 4WH Ground Bus 4WHG Isolated Ground 4WI 1 1 1 1 1 1 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3) 5.38 x 4.38 (136.7 x 111.3) 5.88 x 4.38 (149.3 x 111.3) 6.38 x 4.38 (162.1 x 111.3) 7.38 x 4.38 (187.5 x 111.3) 8.64 x 4.38 (219.5 x 111.3) 9.40 x 4.38 (238.8 x 111.3) 11.17 x 4.38 (283.7 x 111.3) 16.14 x 4.38 (410.0 x 111.3) 18.64 x 4.38 (473.5 x 111.3) 20.16 x 4.38 (512.1 x 111.3) 23.70 x 4.38 (602.0 x 111.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3) 5.38 x 4.50 (136.7 x 114.3) 5.88 x 4.50 (149.3 x 114.3) 6.38 x 4.50 (162.1 x 114.3) 7.38 x 4.50 (187.5 x 114.3) 8.64 x 4.50 (219.5 x 114.3) 9.40 x 4.50 (238.8 x 114.3) 11.17 x 4.50 (283.7 x 114.3) 16.14 x 4.50 (410.0 x 114.3) 18.64 x 4.50 (473.5 x 114.3) 20.16 x 4.50 (512.1 x 114.3) 23.70 x 4.50 (602.0 x 114.3) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6) 5.38 x 4.55 (136.7 x 115.6) 5.88 x 4.55 (149.3 x 115.6) 6.38 x 4.55 (162.1 x 115.6) 7.38 x 4.55 (187.5 x 115.6) 8.64 x 4.55 (219.5 x 115.6) 9.40 x 4.55 (238.8 x 115.6) 11.17 x 4.55 (283.7 x 115.6) 16.14 x 4.55 (410.0 x 115.6) 18.64 x 4.55 (473.5 x 115.6) 20.16 x 4.55 (512.1 x 115.6) 23.70 x 4.55 (602.0 x 115.6)
Figure 24.0-15 Conguration A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% internal housing ground. Refer to Figure 24.0-13 on Page 24.0-12 for conguration A and B.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 012
Physical Data DimensionsBus Bar and Housing (Continued)

Table 24.0-20. Four-Wire with 200% Neutral
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Phase Bar Size (Depth Bar Conductor Conguration and Housing Size (Width x Height) Inches (mm) Per IEC 439 and Width) 50% Integral 50% Internal 50% Internal Inches (mm) Phase Housing Ground 4WH Ground Bus 4WHG Isolated Ground 4WI Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1) 0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2) 0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9) 1 1 1 1 1 1 4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0) 4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0) 4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0) 4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0) 5.38 x 4.92 (136.7 x 125.0) 5.88 x 4.92 (149.3 x 125.0) 6.38 x 4.92 (162.1 x 125.0) 7.38 x 4.92 (187.5 x 125.0) 8.64 x 4.92 (219.5 x 125.0) 9.40 x 4.92 (238.8 x 125.0) 11.17 x 4.92 (283.7 x 125.0) 16.14 x 4.92 (410.0 x 125.0) 18.64 x 4.92 (473.5 x 125.0) 20.16 x 4.92 (512.1 x 125.0) 23.70 x 4.92 (602.0 x 125.0) 4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2) 4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2) 4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2) 4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2) 5.38 x 5.05 (136.7 x 128.2) 5.88 x 5.05 (149.3 x 128.2) 6.38 x 5.05 (162.1 x 128.2) 7.38 x 5.05 (187.5 x 128.2) 8.64 x 5.05 (219.5 x 128.2) 9.40 x 5.05 (238.8 x 128.2) 11.17 x 5.05 (283.7 x 128.2) 16.14 x 5.05 (410.0 x 128.2) 18.64 x 5.05 (473.5 x 128.2) 20.16 x 5.05 (512.1 x 128.2) 23.70 x 5.05 (602.0 x 128.2) 4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5) 4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5) 4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5) 4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5) 5.38 x 5.10 (136.7 x 129.5) 5.88 x 5.10 (149.3 x 129.5) 6.38 x 5.10 (162.1 x 129.5) 7.38 x 5.10 (187.5 x 129.5) 8.64 x 5.10 (219.5 x 129.5) 9.40 x 5.10 (238.8 x 129.5) 11.17 x 5.10 (283.7 x 129.5) 16.14 x 5.10 (410.0 x 129.5) 18.64 x 5.10 (473.5 x 129.5) 20.16 x 5.10 (512.1 x 129.5) 23.70 x 5.10 (602.0 x 129.5) Figure 24.0-15 Conguration A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000

Neutral bar is 0.5 (12.7) x Width shown. 100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% integral housing ground. Refer to Figure 24.0-13 for Conguration A and B.
Width
Width
31 32 33 34
Configuration A Height
A B C N
Height
A B C N
A B C N
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
225 to 2000 Ampere Aluminum 225 to 2500 Ampere Copper
Configuration B 2500 to 4000 Ampere Aluminum 3200 to 5000 Ampere Copper
Figure 24.0-13. Pow-R-Way III Cross-Section Dimensions
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 013
24.0-13
Physical Data
Weights
Table 24.0-21. Weight (lb ft) and Current Density (Amperes/in 2)
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 1000 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Current Density Amperes/In2 UL 857 Cu 554 985 1477 1969 1778 1745 1662 1506 1455 1250 1505 1455 1250 Al 554 985 1477 1164 1231 1129 982 1024 1000 909 960 1000 IEC 439 Cu 554 985 1477 2469 2133 2036 1908 1694 1636 1500 1788 1636 1450 WeightIncluding Integral Housing Ground (lb ft) Three-Wire Cu 8 8 8 8 10 12 14 17 23 29 34 45 63 Al 5 5 5 6 7 8 11 12 14 21 23 28 Four-Wire 100% Neutral Cu 10 10 10 10 12 15 17 21 28 36 42 56 72 Al 6 6 6 7 8 10 12 13 16 24 26 32 Four-Wire 200% Neutral Cu 11 11 11 11 14 17 20 25 33 42 49 66 85 Al 7 7 7 8 9 11 13 15 18 27 29 36 Add for Internal Ground Cu 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 1.08 1.33 1.57 2.05 2.66 3.87 4.11 5.32 7.74 Al 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.40 0.47 0.62 0.80 0.91 1.17 1.61 1.83 2.35
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Four-Wire 200% Neutral Cu 17 17 17 17 21 26 30 37 49 63 73 98 126 Al 11 11 11 12 14 16 20 22 27 40 43 54 Add for Internal Ground Cu 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.17 1.62 1.98 2.34 3.06 3.96 5.76 6.12 7.92 11.53 Al 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.60 0.71 0.92 1.20 1.36 1.75 2.40 2.73 3.50
Table 24.0-22. Weight (kg/M) and Current Density (Amperes/cm 2)

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Current Density Amperes/cm2 UL 857 Cu 86 153 229 305 276 270 258 233 226 194 233 226 194 Al 86 153 229 180 191 175 152 159 155 140 149 155 IEC 439 Cu 86 153 229 380 328 313 293 260 233 231 275 252 223 WeightIncluding Integral Housing Ground (kg/m) Three-Wire Cu 12 12 12 12 15 18 21 25 34 43 51 67 94 Al 7 7 7 9 11 12 16 18 21 32 34 42 Four-Wire 100% Neutral Cu 15 15 15 15 18 22 25 32 42 54 63 83 108 Al 9 9 9 11 12 15 18 20 24 36 39 48
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 014
Physical Data
Table 24.0-23. Ampere Ratings Needed to be at or Below 1000A/sq-in Density
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 2.25 2.75 3.25 4.25 5.50 6.25 8.00 2.00 x 4.25 2.00 x 5.50 2.00 x 6.25 2.00 x 8.00 Bar Size Cu Standard Density 556 988 1481 1975 1778 1745 1662 1506 1455 1250 1506 1455 1250 1000A/sq-in Density 556 988 873 985 941 873 982 800 1000 909 800 1000 N/A Adjusted Rating None None 1200 1350 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 4000 5000 5000 N/A Al Standard Density 556 988 1481 1164 1231 1129 982 1024 1000 909 1024 1000 1000A/sq-in Density 556 988 873 985 941 873 864 800 1000 909 800 1000 Adjusted Rating None None 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 None None 4000 None
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Application Note
The above table is meant to help the user and specier select the higher busway ratings to meet the performance specication of a current density value no higher than 1000A per square inch. The current density values of our standard busway offerings based upon temperature rise are listed in the 5th and 8th columns of the table. These ratings are UL listed and labeled, and safe to apply. However, certain jurisdictions or applications require a better margin of safety, and choose to use a 1000A/sq-in density standard. When the lower than standard densities are required, such as 1000A/sq-in, then the only option is to oversize the busway from the standard bar sizes and ampacity ratings. Oversizing provides more bus bar material in cross-sectional area, and results in lower current densities and lower temperature rises for a given value of load current. By example, take the case of 1600A copper busway. The standard product uses a bar size of 0.25 in x 4.25 in (1.0625 sq-in area) and which results in 1506A/sq-in density (calculated by 1600A/1.0625 sq-in = 1506A/sq-in), as listed in the table. If a project or application using bus runs expected to carry 1600A of load current stipulated that the current densities experienced by the busway should be no greater than 1000A/sq-in, then oversizing to busway bars used in the standard 2500A rating using 0.25 inch x 8 inch bars (2.0 sq-in area) yields a current density of 1600A/2.0 sq-in 800A/sq-in for the 1600A of load current.
Why not just oversize to 2000A busway? The 2000A bar size is 0.25 in x 5.50 in or 1.375 sq-in Computing the new density yields 1600A/1.375 sq-in = 1164A/sq-in which is higher than the desired value of no greater density than 1000A/sq-in.
Therefore, the table provides a quick method of determining the ampacity of busway required to meet current density values no greater than 1000A/sq-in for given values of load current. The most important columns of data are the 1st, 7th and 10th. Eaton warrants that the Pow-R-Way III product will perform as intended regardless of the method of selection, either temperature rise only or current density. Eaton encourages speciers who use current density as the criteria for busway selection to select and specify the busway ratings recommended in the above table under the Adjusted Rating column, and not rely upon the contractors or bidders to resolve the matter in the later stages of a project. If sizing busway is strictly based upon current density, do not specify or use the standard ampacity values based upon the UL and NEMA temperature rise standard on Contract Drawings.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 015
24.0-15
Physical Data Fittings

There is a tting to meet every application need: anges, elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes, weatherheads, transformer connections, power take-off sections, reducers, adapter cubicles, expansion joints and end closures. These ttings, along with standard and minimum dimensions, are described on the following pages. When making eld measurements and layouts, it should be remembered that the dimensions are given from the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge. The relationship of ttings to straight lengths (forward, rearward, upward and downward) is illustrated in Figure 24.0-14. All straight lengths and ttings are marked with a T label and an F label. The T and F locations will also be noted on the construction, or the as-built, drawings furnished. When installing the busway, the T and F markings of each section must match. Failure to do so will result in an improper installation with the phase bars out of sequence. Figure 24.0-14. T and F Orientation for Fittings
Downward Rearward Upward
22 23
Forward
24 25 26 27 28 29
End Closer Built-in Power Take-Off
30
In-Line Power Take-Off
Bolt-on Unit
31 32
Upward/Downward Corner Joint Offset 90 Phase Transposition
Plug-in Unit Wall Flange
Plug-in Bus
Protected Reducer Floor Flange
33 34 35
Upward/ Downward Elbow Upward/ Downward Tee
Tra n
sfo
rm
er
36
Transformer Throat
Forward/Rearward Corner Joint
Center Cable Tap Box
In t Ou do or
do
or
Forward/ Rearward Tee
180 Phase Transposition
Sw
itc
hb
rd oa
37 38 39 40
Sw
itc
o hb
ard
Weatherhead
Expansion Joint
End Cable Tap Box
Figure 24.0-15. Typical Busway Components
41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 016
Physical Data Traditional Indoor and Outdoor Elbows (Figure 24.0-16)

Elbows are used to make 90 changes in the direction of busway runs. The four types that are available are forward, rearward, upward and downward. See minimum leg lengths listed for each type in Table 24.0-24 and Table 24.0-25. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
C L
22 23 24 25
Table 24.0-24. Forward and Rearward Elbows

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4) 18.50 (469.9) 19.50 (495.3) 20.50 (520.7) 22.50 (571.5) Minimum Leg Lengths (X) Inches (mm)
C L X
C L X
26 27 28
C L Forward C L Downward X C L
2500 3200 4000 5000
Table 24.0-25. Upward and Downward Elbows

X
29
X X C L Rearward X C L C L C L C L Upward
Ampere Rating
C L
UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1550 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
Minimum Leg Lengths (X) Inches (mm) Upward 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) Downward 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
30 31
Figure 24.0-16. Traditional Elbows
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Corner Joint Elbows (Figure 24.0-17)

The Pow-R-Way III Corner Joint Elbow can be installed in areas where a traditional 90 turn could never have been accomplished before. Pow-R-Way III Corner Joint Elbows can solve any serious pathway problem and contribute to successful layouts with minimal space requirements. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Corner Joint Connection.
C L C L X C L C L Y
Table 24.0-26. Forward/Rearward Corner Joints

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000
C L
IEC 439 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
Dimensions Inches (mm) (X) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.88 (73.2) 3.25 (82.6) 4.12 (104.7) 6.64 (168.7) 7.89 (200.4) 8.65 (219.7) 10.42 (264.7) (Y) 5.38 (136.7) 5.38 (136.7) 5.38 (136.7) 5.38 (136.7) 5.69 (144.5) 5.94 (150.9) 6.19 (157.2) 6.69 (169.9) 7.31 (185.7) 7.70 (195.6) 8.57 (217.7) 11.07 (281.2) 12.32 (312.9) 13.08 (332.2) 14.85 (377.2)
C L
Forward
C L
X C L
Y C L
C L
Rearward
C L C L C L
C L X X
Y Y
C L
2500 3200 4000 5000
C L C L
Upward
Downward
42 43
Figure 24.0-17. Corner Joint Elbows (For Indoor Applications Only)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 017
24.0-17
Physical Data
Table 24.0-27. Upward/Downward Corner Joints
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Dimensions in Inches (mm) Housing Ground (X) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.70 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.71 (119.6) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) 4.98 (126.5) (Y) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 4.35 (110.5) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) 5.10 (129.5) Internal Ground (X) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 4.77 (121.2) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) 5.04 (128.0) (Y) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 4.41 (112.0) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.07 (128.8) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) 5.17 (131.3) Isolated Ground (X) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.27 (133.9) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) 5.55 (141.0) (Y) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 4.43 (112.5) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.09 (129.3) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Three-Wire
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
Four-Wire (100%)
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
Four-Wire (200%)
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 018
Physical Data Special Angle Elbows

Special angle elbows are traditional elbows that allow the direction of the busway runs to change at angles greater than 90 degrees. They allow easy routing through nontraditional corridors. The four types offered are forward, rearward, upward and downward. See minimum leg lengths for each type listed in Table 24.0-28 and Table 24.0-29. Table 24.0-28. Forward and Rearward Elbows
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4) 18.50 (469.9) 19.50 (495.3) 20.50 (520.7) 22.50 (571.5) Rearward Minimum Leg Lengths (X) Inches (mm)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Forward
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
Table 24.0-29. Upward and Downward Elbows

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Minimum Leg Lengths (X) Inches (mm) Upward 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) Downward Upward 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
Downward
40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-18. Special Angle Elbows
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 019
24.0-19
Physical Data Standard and Flush Flanges (Figure 24.0-19)

Flanges provide a direct connection to low voltage switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers and other apparatus. Cutout dimensions and drilling plans are provided with the customer drawings and it is the responsibility of the switchgear manufacturer to provide the opening, ange drillings, connecting hardware and bus risers in their equipment. For proper coordination between busway and other equipment, detailed drawings, including switchgear orientation, must accompany the order. A standard ange can be supplied to the left or right of a section, as required. A ush ange is used when the busway must lay close to the top of a switchboard. The edge of the busway is 1.25 inches (31.8 mm) from the top of the switchboard. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge. Table 24.0-30. Switchboard Flanges
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Flush Flange Min. Leg Length (X) Inches (mm) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0) Standard Flange Min. Leg Length (X) Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8)
C L Bridge
Flush Flange
22 23
T
24
T F
25
1.25 (31.8)
C L
15.00 (381.0) (Minimum)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32
12.00 (304.8) (Minimum)
33
Standard Flange Left
Vault Flanges
Vault anges are used to enter a utility vault for termination to the utility transformer. Each vault ange is custom designed to meet each specic utility specication. Vault anges may look similar to those shown in Figure 24.0-20. Please consult the factory for specic dimensions based upon utility specications.
34
Figure 24.0-19. Flanges
35 36 37
B
1.00 (25.4)
38 39
N C B A G C
40 41 42
Figure 24.0-20. Vault Flanges
43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 020
Physical Data Elbow Flanges (Figure 24.0-21)

An Elbow Flange is a combination of a standard elbow and a standard ange fabricated into a single tting. Elbow Flanges are typically used when the minimum leg lengths for either the standard elbow or standard ange cannot be maintained. Minimum leg lengths are listed in Table 24.0-31 and Table 24.0-32. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
C L X C L C L Y
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Table 24.0-31. Forward and Rearward Elbow Flanges

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Minimum Dimensions Inches (mm) Joint Leg, (X) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4) 18.50 (469.9) 19.50 (495.3) 20.50 (520.7) 22.50 (571.5) Joint Leg, (Y) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 9.25 (235.0) 9.25 (235.0) 9.75 (247.7) 10.25 (260.4) 10.75 (273.1) 11.75 (298.5) 14.00 (355.6) 15.25 (387.4) 16.00 (406.4) 17.75 (450.9) Y C L Forward Elbow Right Flange
Table 24.0-32. Upward and Downward Elbow Flanges

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al IEC 439 Cu Minimum Dimensions Inches (mm) Joint Leg, (X) Up Down 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) Flange Leg, (Y) Up 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 5.75 (146.1) 7.75 (196.9) 7.75 (196.9) 7.75 (196.9) 7.75 (196.9) Down 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) X C L C L X C L Y Rearward Elbow Right Flange C L C L X C L
Upward Elbow Right Flange
225 225 400 400 600
225 10.00 (254.0) 400 10.00 (254.0) 630 10.00 (254.0)
C L
800 600 1000 10.00 (254.0) 1000 1200 10.00 (254.0) 1200 800 1400 10.00 (254.0) 1350 1000 1550 10.00 (254.0) 1600 1200 1800 10.00 (254.0) 2000 1350 2250 10.00 (254.0) 1600 10.00 (254.0) 2500 2000 3000 10.00 (254.0) 3200 3800 12.00 (304.8) 4000 2500 4500 12.00 (304.8) 3200 12.00 (304.8) 5000 4000 5800 12.00 (304.8)
40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-21. Elbow Flanges
Downward Elbow Right Flange Y

September 2011
Sheet 24 021
24.0-21
Physical Data Offsets (Figure 24.0-22)

An Offset is used to avoid obstacles and to conform to the buildings structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single tting for use where space restrictions prohibit the use of two standard 90 elbows. The minimum leg lengths are listed in Table 24.0-33 and Table 24.0-34.
Y C L Y C L 3.00 (Minimum) C L C L
22 23 24 25
Forward
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge. Table 24.0-33. Forward and Rearward Offsets
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4) 18.50 (469.9) 19.50 (495.3) 20.50 (520.7) 22.50 (571.5) Minimum Dimensions (Y) Inches (mm)
26
C L
27 28
3.00 (76.2) (Minimum) C L
Downward
29 30
C L
31 32
Table 24.0-34. Upward and Downward Offsets

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al IEC 439 Cu Minimum Dimensions Inches (mm) Upward (Y) (Z) Downward (Y) (Z)
Z C L
33
C L C L 3.00 (76.2) (Minimum) C L Y C L Y C L
225 225 400 400 600
225 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 400 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 630 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0)
34 35 36 37
800 600 1000 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 1000 1200 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 1200 800 1400 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 1350 1000 1550 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 1600 1200 1800 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 2000 1350 2250 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 1600 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 2500 2000 3000 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 3200 3800 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8) 4000 2500 4500 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8) 3200 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8) 5000 4000 5800 12.00 (304.8) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8)
Rearward
38 39 40
C L
C L
41 42
Y Upward C L Z 3.00 (76.2) (Minimum) C L
43
Figure 24.0-22. Offsets


September 2011
Sheet 24 022
Physical Data Combination Offsets

Combination offsets are used to conform to the buildings structure and change direction, utilizing a small amount of space. They are two different oriented elbows fabricated into a single tting. Forward or rearward directions are determined by the T and F locations. Please refer to Page 24.0-16. Minimum leg lengths are listed in Table 24.0-24 and Table 24.0-25. Table 24.0-35. Combination Offsets
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al Dimensions in Inches (mm) Y Three-Wire/ Four-Wire Four-Wire 200% N Z 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 13.00 (330.2) 10.00 (254.0) 13.50 (342.9) 10.00 (254.0) 13.50 (342.9) 10.00 (254.0) 14.00 (355.6) 10.00 (254.0) 14.50 (368.3) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 8.00 (203.2) 9.00 (228.6) Z 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 8.00 (203.2) 8.50 (215.9) 9.00 (228.6)
F
F
T
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
C L
X
F
C L
IEC 439 X Cu 225 400 630
T
C L Z C L C L C L
F
Upward/Forward/Rearward
225 225 400 400 600
C L
800 600 1000 1000 1200 1200 800 1400 1350 1000 1550 1600 1200 1800 2000 1350 2250 1600 2500 2000 3000 3200 3800 4000 2500 4500 3200 5000 4000 5800 225 225 400 400 600 225 400 630
10.00 (254.0) 15.00 (381.0) 9.00 (228.6) 9.50 (241.3) 10.00 (254.0) 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 10.50 (266.7) 12.00 (304.8) 18.50 (469.9) 12.50 (317.5) 13.00 (330.2) 12.00 (304.8) 19.50 (495.3) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 12.00 (304.8) 20.50 (520.7) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 12.00 (304.8) 22.50 (571.5) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.00 (330.2) 14.00 (355.6) 13.00 (330.2) 14.50 (368.3) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 8.00 (203.2) 9.00 (228.6) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 8.00 (203.2) 8.50 (215.9) 9.00 (228.6)
C L C L
C L
C L Z C L C L
Downward/Forward/Rearward
Upward/Forward/Rearward
800 600 1000 1000 1200 1200 800 1400 1350 1000 1550 1600 1200 1800 2000 1350 2250 1600 2500 2000 3000 3200 3800 4000 2500 4500 3200 5000 4000 5800
C L
C L
F
Z C L
13.00 (330.2) 15.00 (381.0) 9.00 (228.6) 9.50 (241.3) 13.00 (330.2) 16.00 (406.4) 10.00 (254.0) 10.50 (266.7) 13.00 (330.2) 18.50 (469.9) 12.50 (317.5) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 19.50 (495.3) 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6) 13.00 (330.2) 20.50 (520.7) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 13.00 (330.2) 22.50 (571.5) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1)
Y F
F X
C L
C L Z C L
C L
Y
T
F
41
X
C L
42 43
C L
Downward/Forward/Rearward
Figure 24.0-23. Combination Offsets


September 2011
Sheet 24 023
24.0-23
Physical Data Tees (Figure 24.0-24)

A tee is a busway tting suitable for connection in three directions. The minimum leg lengths are shown in Table 24.0-36 and Table 24.0-37. Table 24.0-36. Forward and Rearward Tees
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Minimum Leg Dimensions Inches (mm)
C L Forward X C L Y C L C L C L
22 23 24 25 26
(X)
(Y)
C
B C A C L X C L Rearward X C L C L Y C L
13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4)
13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4)
27 28 29 30 31
C L
27.25 (692.2) 8.00 (203.2) 26.38 (670.1) 19.39 (492.5) 21.12 (536.4) 28.50 (723.9) 8.00 (203.2) 27.62 (701.6) 21.88 (555.8) 23.63 (600.2) 29.25 (743.0) 8.00 (203.2) 28.38 (720.9) 23.41 (594.6) 25.12 (638.0) 31.00 (787.4) 8.00 (203.2) 30.12 (765.1) 26.94 (684.3) 28.63 (727.2)
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge. Table 24.0-37. Upward and Downward Tees
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Minimum Leg Dimensions Inches (mm) (X) A (Y) B C 9.25 (235.0) 9.25 (235.0) 9.25 (235.0) 9.25 (235.0) 10.50 (266.7) 11.50 (292.1) 12.50 (317.5) 14.50 (368.3) 17.00 (431.8) 18.50 (470.0)
Downward B C Y C L C L C L X C L X Upward Y C L
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 21.88 (555.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.62 (142.7) 22.38 (568.5) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 6.12 (155.4) 22.88 (581.2) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 6.62 (168.1) 23.88 (606.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 7.62 (193.5) 25.12 (638.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 8.65 (219.7) 25.88 (657.4) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 9.65 (245.1)
27.62 (701.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 11.42 (290.1) 22.00 (558.8) 23.88 (606.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 16.38 (416.1) 14.50 (368.3) 25.12 (638.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 18.65 (473.7) 17.00 (473.7) 25.88 (637.4) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 20.41 (518.4) 18.50 (470.0) 27.62 (701.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 23.94 (608.1) 22.00 (558.8)
C L
42 43
X C L C L
Figure 24.0-24. Tees


September 2011
Sheet 24 024
Physical Data Crosses (Figure 24.0-25)

A cross is a busway tting suitable for connection in four directions. It is applied when a bus run must branch off in three directions, all in the same plane. Table 24.0-38. Forward and Rearward Crosses
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Minimum Leg Dimensions Inches (mm) (X) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4) 21.70 (551.2) 22.94 (582.7) 23.71 (602.2) 25.09 (637.3) (Y) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9) 14.00 (355.6) 14.50 (368.3) 15.00 (381.0) 16.00 (406.4) 21.70 (551.2) 22.94 (582.7) 23.71 (602.2) 25.09 (637.3)
Forward Rearward
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge. Table 24.0-39. Upward and Downward Crosses
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Minimum Leg Dimensions Inches (mm) (X) 21.25 (539.8) 21.25 (539.8) 21.25 (539.8) 21.25 (539.8) 21.88 (555.8) 22.38 (568.5) 22.88 (581.2) 23.88 (606.6) 25.12 (638.1) 25.88 (657.4) 27.62 (701.6) 23.88 (606.6) 25.12 (638.1) 25.88 (637.4) 27.62 (701.6) (Y) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7) 25.50 (647.7)
Upward Downward
Figure 24.0-25. Crosses
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 025
24.0-25
Physical Data End Cable Tap Box (Figure 24.0-26)

End cable tap boxes are used to feed a run of busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by busway are connected without the need for overcurrent protection. For indoor applications, the T side, side opposite T and the end panel are removable for access to the lugs. For outdoor applications, these panels are gasketed to prevent moisture from entering. In addition, the outdoor end cable tap boxes are provided with removable gasketed side access panels located on the F and side opposite F for more accessibility to the lugs. Removable side access panels are available on indoor cable tap boxes upon request. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
C L
22
38.00 (965.2) Min. T Side Removable Indoor 12.00 (304.8) (Minimum) ( )
L of Du
23
30.00 (762.0)
32.50
24 25 26
(825.5)
Side Opposite T Removable Indoor
(381.0) 17.50 (444.5)
Gasketed Access Cover on Front and Back of Box for Outdoor Tap Boxes Standard
27 28 29 30 31 32
Figure 24.0-26. End Cable Tap Box

Dimension D: For mechanical lugs = 21.34 inches (542.0 mm). For compression lugs = 19.44 inches (493.8 mm). 200% neutral.
Table 24.0-40. End Cable Tap Box Dimension

Copper Dimensions Ampere Rating UL 857 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000

Aluminum Dimensions Dimension (A) Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 20.50 (520.7) 20.50 (520.7) 24.50 (622.3) 30.50 (774.5) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) Ampere Rating UL 857 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Dimension (A) Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 20.50 (520.7) 24.50 (622.3) 24.50 (622.3) 30.50 (774.5) 30.50 (774.5) 45.00 (1143.0)
Quantity of Mechanical Terminals, Range One #4 (20 mm2)600 kcmil (300 mm2) Two 1/0 (50 mm2)250 kcmil (120 mm2) Copper G 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 P 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 15 N 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 16 18 24 30 Aluminum G 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 P 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 N 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 16 18 24
IEC 439 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
For compression lugs, factory provides provisions only. All dimensions shown in Figure 24.0-26 remain constant regardless of system wiring conguration. Denotes quantity of terminals per ground bus. Denotes quantity of terminals per phase and 100% neutral bus. Denotes quantity of terminals per 200% neutral bus option.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 026
Physical Data Center Cable Tap Box (Figure 24.0-27)

Center cable tap boxes are used to center feed a run of busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by the busway are connected without the need for overcurrent protection. For indoor applications, the T side, side opposite T and the end panel are removable for access to the lugs. For outdoor applications, these panels are gasketed to prevent moisture from entering. In addition, the outdoor center cable tap boxes are provided with removable gasketed access panels located on the front and back for more accessibility to the lugs. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge. Table 24.0-41. Center Tap Box DetailsDimension C
Dimension C in Inches (mm)
f Box D End Removable Indoor
A C
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
T Side Removable Indoor 12.00 (304.8) (Minimum) )
30.00 (762.0)
32.50 (825.5)
Copper
2251350A 3.63 (92.2) 16002000A 4.75 (120.7) 12001350A 4.75 (120.7) 2500A 6.00 (152.4) 16002000A 6.00 (152.4) 3200A 40005000A
Side Opposite T Removable Indoor Gasketed Access Cover on Front and Back of Box for Outdoor Tap Boxes Only
10.75 (273.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25003200A 4000A
15.00 17.50 (381.0) Dimension is the Minimum Gutter Space
Aluminum
2251000A 3.63 (92.2) 10.75 (273.1) 12.25 (311.2)
Figure 24.0-27. Center Cable Tap Box

Dimension D: For mechanical lugs = 21.34 inches (542.0 mm). For compression lugs = 19.25 inches (489.0 mm). 200% neutral.
Table 24.0-42. Center Tap Box DetailsDimensions A and B
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Dimensions Inches (mm) IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 (A) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 20.50 (520.7) 20.50 (520.7) 24.50 (622.3) 30.38 (774.5) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) (B) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 42.50 (1079.5) 42.50 (1079.5) 45.00 (1143.0) 58.00 (1473.2) 60.50 (1536.7) 60.50 (1536.7)
Ampere Rating UL 857 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
Dimensions Inches (mm)
Quantity of Mechanical Terminals, Range One #4 (20 mm2)600 kcmil (300 mm2) Two 1/0 (50 mm2)250 kcmil (120 mm2) Copper Aluminum P 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 15 N 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 16 18 24 30 G 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 P 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 N 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 16 18 24 (B) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 42.50 (1079.5) 42.50 (1079.5) 45.00 (1143.0) 45.00 (1143.0) 58.00 (1473.0) 58.00 (1473.0) 60.50 (1536.7) G 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7
(A) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 20.50 (520.7) 20.50 (520.7) 24.50 (622.3) 24.50 (622.3) 30.38 (771.7) 30.38 (771.7) 45.00 (1143.0)
For compression lugs, factory provides provisions only. All dimensions shown in Figure 24.0-27 remain constant regardless of system wiring conguration. Denotes quantity of terminals per ground bus. Denotes quantity of terminals per phase and 100% neutral bus. Denotes quantity of terminals per 200% neutral bus option.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 027
24.0-27
Physical Data Weatherheads (Figure 24.0-28)

Weatherheads are used for service entrance connections to busway. The side opposite of T is removable for access to the lugs. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
12.00 (304.8) (Minimum) M C L 41.00 (1041.4)
A
22 23
C L of Box C L of
24.00 (609.6)
24 25
Busway
1.00 Compression and (25.4) Mechanical Lugs (381.0)
26 27 28 29
17.50 (444.5)
Removable Barrier
Figure 24.0-28. Weatherhead Details Table 24.0-43. Weatherhead Details


Copper Minimum Dimension (A) IEC 439 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) Inches (mm)
Aluminum Minimum Dimension (A) Inches (mm)
Quantity of Mechanical Terminals, Range One #4 (20 mm2)600 kcmil (300 mm2) Two 1/0 (50 mm2)250 kcmil (120 mm2) Copper G P 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 15 N 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 16 18 24 30 Aluminum G 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 P 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 12 N 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 9 12 16 18 24
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 40.00 (1016.0)
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7
For compression lugs, factory provides provisions only. 200% neutral. Denotes quantity of terminals per ground bus. Denotes quantity of terminals per phase and 100% neutral bus. Denotes quantity of terminals per 200% neutral bus option.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 028
Physical Data Expansion Joints (Figure 24.0-29)

Expansion joints accommodate the expansion and contraction of bus bars with respect to the enclosure. They compensate for the difference in the coefcient of expansion of the aluminum housing and the copper or aluminum bus bars. Expansion joints must be used wherever a run of busway crosses an expansion joint of a building. They should also be installed in the center of extremely long straight runs of busway; one every 300 feet (91m) for copper or one every 225 feet (68m) for aluminum. The use of expansion joints should be engineered for individual installations. Minimum dimensions are shown in Table 24.0-44. All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Phase Transpositions (Figure 24.0-30 and Figure 24.0-31)

Phase transposition ttings are used in applications where a phase rotation is needed due to a change in phasing from the source equipment to the load equipment. Both 90 and 180 rotations are possible. In each case, all conductors are rotated.
Table 24.0-44. Expansion Joints

IEC 439 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
Dimensions (A) Inches (mm)
12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 20.50 (520.7) 20.50 (520.7) 24.50 (622.3) 24.50 (622.3) 30.25 (768.4)
Figure 24.0-30. 180 TranspositionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Dimension remains as shown regardless of system conguration.
C L
49.00 (1244.6) (Minimum) 12.00 (304.8) (Minimum)
25.00 (635.0)
C L
C L of
T F
Box
29.69 (754.1)
Figure 24.0-31. 90 TranspositionDimensions in Inches (mm)
40
C L of Duct
41 42 43
Figure 24.0-29. Expansion Joints
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 029
24.0-29
Physical Data Single-Phase Transformer Taps (Figure 24.0-32)

Single-phase transformer taps arrangements are used for connections to three single-phase transformers. The bus extensions do not include drilling or lugs (see Figure 24.0-2 on Page 24.0-2 for wiring conguration designations).
Taps
Three-Phase Transformer Taps (Figure 24.0-33)

Three-phase transformer taps are used when making connections to a three-phase transformer. The bus extensions do not include drilling or lugs.
22 23 24
C L
Taps
15.00 (381.1)
Support Pad
C
Taps B
C L 17.00 + 2X (431.8) + 2X
Taps
25 26
G A B C
Pow-RBridge C L
C L
17.00 + 2X (431.8) + 2X Pow-RBridge C L
Pow-RBridge C L 8.50 + y (215.9) + y 8.50 + X (215.9) + X 8.50 + X (215.9) + X
27
C
(1/0) 6.00 (2/0) 7.50 (152.4) (190.5)
N
6.00 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) (152.4)
28 29 30
Pow-RBridge C L 8.50 + X (215.9) + X
8.50 + X (215.9) + X 8.50 + X (215.9) + X
Figure 24.0-33. Three-Phase Transformer Taps Table 24.0-46. (A) Minimum Dimensions
A Phase or Neutral Ground when Required C Phase or Neutral Wire Designation Inches mm 3W/ 3WH 16.50 419.1 3WG/ 3WHG/ 3WI 16.50 419.1 4W/ 4WH 19.50 495.3 4WG/4WHG/4WI/ 4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI 19.50 495.3
31 32 33
B Phase or Neutral
Table 24.0-47. (B) Minimum Dimensions

Wire Designation Inches mm 3W/ 3WH 6.25 158.8 3WG/ 3WHG/ 3WI 12.12 307.8 4W/ 4WH 9.25 235.0 4WG/4WHG/4WI/ 4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI 15.12 384.0
Figure 24.0-32. Three Single-Phase Transformer Taps Table 24.0-45. Single-Phase Transformer Taps
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
IEC 439 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800
Minimum Dimensions Inches (mm) (X) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.50 (114.3) 5.00 (127.0) 5.50 (139.7) 6.50 (165.1) 7.75 (196.9) 8.50 (215.9) 10.25 (260.4) 6.50 (165.1) 7.75 (196.9) 8.50 (215.9) 10.25 (260.4) (Y) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 9.75 (247.7) 10.75 (273.1) 11.75 (298.5) 13.75 (349.3) 16.25 (412.8) 17.50 (444.5) 21.25 (539.8) 13.75 (349.3) 16.25 (412.8) 17.50 (444.5) 21.25 (539.8)
Table 24.0-48. (C) Minimum Dimensions

Wire Designation Inches mm 50% Housing Ground 3.00 76.2 50% Integral Ground and 100% Ground 6.00 152.4
Includes ground tap.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 030
Physical Data Transformer Throat Connections (Figure 24.0-34 and Figure 24.0-35)
A transformer throat is used when making connections to a liquid-lled substation transformer. All transformer throat connections include exible connectors between the transformer low voltage spades and Pow-R-Way III bus bars. For transformers with drilled anges, the busway will bolt to the transformer throat instead of using a sealing ring.
Transformer
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Table 24.0-49. Transformer Throat Connections

Ampere Rating UL 857 IEC 439 2251550 16002000 25004000 2252500 25003000 32005800 Bars Per Phase Minimum Dimensions (A) Inches (mm) 26.00 (660.4) 28.50 (723.9) 31.50 (800.1) 26.00 (660.4) 28.50 (723.9) 31.50 (800.1)
Aluminum
2251350 16002000 25004000 1 1 2 1 1 2
Copper
2252000 2500 32005000
Transformer Throat Sealing Ring

LV Spades
Front
Front
29
LV Throat
30 31 32 33
Edge of Transformer Throat A
C L
Indicate Number of Holes, Diameter of Holes, and Spacing Between Holes
Top of Transformer
1.75 (44.5) Plus 1/2 Duct Width
x x x
Transformer
C L Bushing
34
Transformer Throat
x
35 36
T
Sealing Ring
Side View of Transformer x x x x x
Edge of Throat Collar
X Thickness
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Front C L
Edge of Transformer Throat
Transformer Tank Wall
x LV Spade Detail
X Number and Diameter of Holes
9.50 (241.3)
Figure 24.0-35. Transformer Throat Connection Detail
Figure 24.0-34. Transformer Throat
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 031
24.0-31
Physical Data Transformer Flange Connections (Figure 24.0-36 and Figure 24.0-37)
Transformer ange connections are used when making a connection to a dry-type substation transformer. Transformer ange connections include exible connectors between the transformer low voltage spades and the Pow-R-Way III ange bus bars. Hardware is supplied to bolt the ange plate to the transformer enclosure.
C L X 20.00 (508.0)
C Pow-R-Bridge
12.00 (304.8) (Minimum) X 12.00 (304.8) (Minimum)
22 23 24
B Circuit Breaker or Fused Reducer
25 26 27
X
X C L Flexible Braid
Figure 24.0-38. Circuit Breaker or Fused Reducer Table 24.0-50. Circuit Breaker and Fused Reducer Dimensions
Circuit Breaker Reducer Breaker A B Amperes Inches (mm) 225
X X
Fusible Switch Reducer Fuse A B Rating Inches (mm) 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2)
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
400 600
Figure 24.0-36. Transformer Flange Connections

800 x x x x LV Spades 1600 2000 x x x 2500 1000 1200
18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 18.25 (463.6) 26.25 (666.8) 26.25 (666.8) 26.25 (666.8)
18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0)
34.00 (863.6) 34.00 (863.6) 34.00 (863.6) 42.25 (1073.2) 42.25 (1073.2) 42.25 (1073.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2)
42.25 (1073.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0)
Non-Protected Reducers (Figure 24.0-39)

Non-protected reducers are used to reduce the ampacity of the busway without overcurrent devices. Per NEC Section 364.11, for industrial applications, no overcurrent protection is required where the busway is reduced in size, provided the length of the smaller busway does not extend more than 50 feet (15.2m) and has a current rating of at least one-third of the rst upstream overcurrent device.
Front View of Transformer x
Side View of Transformer
X Thickness
x x x x x
0 406.4 (Min 06.4) (Mini
Transformer Tank Wall
x LV Spade Detail
X Number and Diameter of Holes
Figure 24.0-37. Transformer Flange Connection Detail
Protected Reducers (Figure 24.0-38)

Protected reducers are used to reduce the ampacity of busway using either a circuit breaker or a fused, nonautomatic circuit breaker overprotection device. Both serve as a disconnecting means. The line side of the cubicle is connected to the higher rated busway and the load side is connected to the lower (reduced) rated busway.
CA08104001E
Figure 24.0-39. Non-Fused Reducer
43

September 2011
Sheet 24 032
Physical Data Meter Center Power Takeoffs

Meter center power takeoffs (PTO) are designed to tap power off the busway and feed tenant meter stacks in highrise applications. There are two types of power takeoffs, bridge joint and in-line. Both devices are UL listed.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
In-Line PTO
The in-line PTO shown in Figure 24.0-41 is built integral with the busway, having the busway pass through the device. This space-saving design reduces the horizontal wall space by up to 24.00 inches (609.6 mm). With this device there is no need to install a separate main device; saving installation time and money. This device is available with a main circuit breaker, main fusible switch or no main device. In-line PTOs should be ordered with the busway through the Eaton Greenwood, SC facility. The height of the rst busway joint up through the oor must be coordinated to meet local utility/code requirements for minimum/maximum meter socket heights not to exceed a minimum height of 16.00 inches (406.4 mm) above the oor. Meter stack may be placed to the left, right or both sides of the main device. All dimensions shown are for reference only showing a typical installation.
Note: If 5-high 200A meter stacks are used, it is recommended to increase the bridge joint height from 20.00 inches (508.0m) to 22.0024.00 inches (558.8609.6 mm). Attention must be given to the minimum/maximum heights of the meter sockets.
Bridge Joint PTO

The bridge joint PTO shown in Figure 24.0-40 mounts to the right or left side of the busway at a joint between two sections of busway. The bridge joint PTO comes with a main circuit breaker or main fusible switch. Bridge joint PTOs should be ordered with the meter stacks through the Eaton Lincoln, IL facility. The height of the busway bridge joint must be coordinated to meet local utility/code requirements for minimum/maximum meter socket heights. All dimensions shown are for reference only showing a typical installation.
Wall
8.55 (217.2)
12.26 (311.4)
Vertical Busway
In-Line PTO Wall .50 (12.7)

13.51 (343.2)
125 A Meter Stock
12.26 (311.4)
8.55 (217.2)
35.90 (911.9)
Meter Center Front

37.76 (959.1)
20.00 (508.4) .61 (15.5)
1.93 (49.0)
70.00 (1778.0) 18.00 (457.2)
Horizontal Cross Bus

17.17 (436.1)
200 A Stack
125 A Stack
Bridge Joint
12.61 (320.3) 25.00 (635.0)
20.00 (508.0) 5.81 (147.6) 30.06 (763.5)
12.45 (316.2)
67.34 (1710.4)
70.00 (177.8)
Floor
30.88 (784.35) 25.00 (635.0) 12.45 (316.2) Floor 20.00 (508.4) 12.39 (314.7)
Figure 24.0-40. Bridge Joint PTO
Figure 24.0-41. In-Line PTO
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 033
24.0-33
Physical Data In-Line Power Takeoff Main Circuit Breaker PTO

The in-line main circuit breaker PTO shown in Figure 24.0-42 is available with trip ratings from 300A up to 1200A; using L, M and N frame circuit breakers. This device is indoor rated and may be weatherized upon request. See Table 24.0-51 for dimensions and ratings. Table 24.0-51. In-Line PTO Dimensions and Ratings
Device Short-Circuit Rating (kAIC) (A) Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Bar Per Phase 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 2 Bar Per Phase 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2) 33.00 (838.2)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Main Circuit Breaker

LD HLD MDL HMDL ND HND 400A 600A 800A 65 100 65 100 65 100 200 200 200 100
Main Fusible Switch PTO

The in-line main fusible switch PTO shown in Figure 24.0-43 is available with 400, 600 and 800A switches; using Class T fuses. This device is indoor rated only. The switch handle is mounted in front, eliminating interference with the meter sockets and the need for spacers between the main device and meter stack. It comes with a hinged door, giving easy access to the fuses mounted below the main switch. See Table 24.0-51 for dimensions and ratings.
Main Fusible Switch
No Main Device
1200A

Unprotected PTO
The in-line PTO with no main device shown in Figure 24.0-44 comes with 1200A horizontal cross bus as standard. This device is intended for use with six meter sockets or less, or as local code permits. See Table 24.0-51 for dimensions and ratings.
C
Bridge Joint
Class T fuses only. Rating of horizontal cross bus.
C
Bridge Joint
12.00 (304.8)
C L Bridge Joint
31 32 33
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
A 2.00 (50.8)
20.00 (508.0)
A 5.00 (127.0)
20.00 (508.0)
15.00 (381.0) A
34 35
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
36 37 38
Figure 24.0-42. Main Breaker
Figure 24.0-43. Main Fusible Switch
Figure 24.0-44. Unprotected PTO
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 034
Physical Data Busway-Connected Panelboards

Pow-R-Way III busway-connected panelboards save space and installation time by eliminating the need to install a bus plug and cable over to a panelboard. This special enclosure plugs directly on to vertical busway and accepts Eaton PRL1a, PRL2a and PRL3a main circuit breaker panelboard interiors. The enclosure also accepts 28.00-inch wide standard and EZ trims. The panels can be top or bottom fed, and can mount on either side of the busway. Each panel is UL 857 listed.
Note: These panels are not seismic rated.
2.37 (60.2) Top Conduit Space 28.00 (711.2) Edge of Busway to Wall 6.00 (152.4) Top View Third Plug-In Opening Up From Lower Joint
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Busway-connected panelboards are sold and shipped through the Eaton regional satellite plants and coordinated with the Eaton busway plant in Greenwood, SC. See Figure 24.0-45.
Panelboard Spring Hangers

This specialized spring hanger shown in Figure 24.0-46, allows the panel to be anchored and supported directly to a wall, and uniquely allows the panel to oat with the riser busway. Panelboard spring hangers are sold separately as a busway accessory. Hardware is included to mount the spring hangers to the panelboard enclosure. Table 24.0-52. Panelboard Enclosure Detail
MCB Frame Maximum Box Size MCB Height Busway Joint Height C 23.00 (584.2) 23.00 (584.2) 23.00 (584.2) 33.00 (838.2) 34.00 (863.6) 36.00 (914.4) 23.00 (584.2) 23.00 (584.2) 23.00 (584.2) 23.00 (584.2) 34.00 (863.6) 36.00 (914.4) 34.00 (863.6) 38.00 (965.2) 34.00 (863.6) 36.00 (914.4) Box Height Off Floor D 47.00 (1193.8) 35.00 (889.0) 23.00 (584.2) 21.00 (533.4) 4.00 (101.6) 6.00 (152.4) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 4.00 (101.6) 6.00 (152.4) 4.00 (101.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 6.00 (152.4) Minimum Floor-Ceiling Height Dimension in Inches (mm) A
Dimension in Inches (mm) A F F F J 40.00 (1016.0) 52.00 (1320.8) 64.00 (1625.6) 76.00 (1930.4) B 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 74.00 (1879.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 74.00 (1879.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Front View
PRL1a & 2a Main Circuit Breaker

103.00 (2616.2) 103.00 (2616.2) 103.00 (2616.2) 113.00 (2870.2) 114.00 (2895.6) 116.00 (2946.4) 103.00 (2616.2) 103.00 (2616.2) 103.00 (2616.2) 103.00 (2616.2) 114.00 (2895.6) 116.00 (2946.4) 114.00 (2895.6) 118.00 (2997.2) 114.00 (2895.6) 116.00 (2946.4)
Figure 24.0-45. Busway-Connected Panelboard Detail
K (500) 94.00 (2387.6) K (750) 94.00 (2387.6) F (4/0) FCL FB J 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4) 76.00 (1930.4)
PRL3a Main Circuit Breaker
K (500) 94.00 (2387.6) K (750) 94.00 (2387.6) L LCL LA LG 94.00 (2387.6) 94.00 (2387.6) 94.00 (2387.6) 94.00 (2387.6)
Figure 24.0-46. Panelboard Spring Hangers
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 035
24.0-35
Physical Data Pow-R-Way III Adapters (Figure 24.0-47 and Figure 24.0-48)
A complete line of adapters are available to enable the user to add to existing old-line Westinghouse or obsolete bus runs with the Pow-R-Way III design. The specic Westinghouse product lines are Low Impedance Busway, Current Limiting Busway, Pow-R-Way and Pow-R-Way II. The obsolete designs are CP2, CP3 and CP4 Safetybus. See Table 24.0-53. The adapters allow the incorporation of present day technologies, available in Pow-R-Way III plug-in units, into existing busway systems. State-of-the-art features such as energy monitoring, transient voltage surge suppression and coordination/communication capabilities can all be added to existing distribution systems without having to upgrade and replace entire runs of busway. See Table 24.0-53. Special adapters to competitive busway products are also available. Please contact the Greenwood factory for information. Table 24.0-53. Available Pow-R-Way III Adapters
Busway Types Low impedance busway Low impedance plug-in busway Pow-R-Way busway Pow-R-Way II busway CP2 Safetybus CP3 Safetybus CP4 Safetybus Competitive busway Brand Westinghouse Westinghouse Westinghouse/ Cutler-Hammer Westinghouse/ Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Contact factory Minimum Adapter Length in Inches (mm) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Adapter
30 31 32
POWRWAY III Existing POWRWAY
33 34
Figure 24.0-47. Pow-R-Way III to Pow-R-Way Adapter
Adapter
35 36 37
POWRWAY III
Existing CP Busway
38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-48. Pow-R-Way III to CP Adapter
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 036
Physical Data Wall/Floor Flanges (Figure 24.0-49)

Wall and oor anges are used to t around the busway and close off the opening made to allow the bus run to pass through a oor or wall. Wall and oor anges are for cosmetic purposes only and do not provide any type of vapor or re barrier.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Busway Height
Roof Flange (Figure 24.0-50)

A roof ange should always be used when outdoor busway penetrates a roof.
End Closures (Figure 24.0-51)

End closures terminate a bus run and can be used to close either the right or left end (see Figure 24.0-2 on Page 24.0-2 for wiring conductor congurations). Table 24.0-54. End Closures
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 5.13 (130.3) 5.13 (130.3) 5.13 (130.3) 5.13 (130.3) 5.75 (146.1) 6.25 (158.8) 6.75 (171.5) 7.77 (197.4) 9.02 (229.1) 9.78 (248.4) 11.55 (293.4) 16.52 (419.6) 19.02 (482.9) 20.54 (521.7) 24.08 (611.6)
Bell
10.25 (minimum) (260.3) 7.00 (177.8) 2.00 (Rec.) (50.8)
Wall
Dimensions (A) in Inches (mm)
Wall/Floor Flange
2.00 (50.8)
Busway Width
2.00 (50.8)
Figure 24.0-49. Wall/Floor Flange

Roof Flange
C L of Joint 2.50 (63.5) (All 4 Sides) Roof
Table 24.0-55. Dimensions

Description 3WH, 3WG, 3WHG, 3WI, 4WH, 4WG, 4WHG, 4WI 4WNH, 4WNG, 4WNI, 4WNHG Dimensions (B) in Inches (mm) 5.00 (127.0) 5.50 (139.7)
Flange
C L
Maximum Roof Slope with Standard Flange is 2.00 (50.8) per Foot (304.8 mm)
Note: End closure extends 0.44 inches (11.2 mm) beyond the centerline of the removed Pow-R-Bridge.
Figure 24.0-50. Roof Flange

.44 (11.2) C L 6.25 (158.8) Indoor
7.38 (187.5) Outdoor
43
Figure 24.0-51. End Closure with Pow-R-Bridge Removed
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 037
24.0-37
Physical Data Horizontal Hangers

One hanger is provided for every 10 feet (3.0m) of horizontally mounted busway. The type of hanger supplied is determined by the specic mounting requirements of the busway. (For hook hangers and angle hangers, see Figure 24.0-52 and Figure 24.0-53.) Drop rods 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) diameter are not included and must be furnished by the installer. Drop rods 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) diameter are required for seismic applications.
A 1 Bar Per Phase Only B
22 23
Duct Width Duct Width Duct Height Edgewise
24 25 26 27
Flatwise
Figure 24.0-52. Hook HangersNon-Seismic Only Table 24.0-56. Flatwise Hook Hanger
Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 5.38 (136.7) 5.88 (149.4) 6.38 (162.1) 7.38 (187.5) 8.64 (219.5) 9.40 (238.8) 11.17 (283.7) 5.12 (130.0) 5.12 (130.0) 5.12 (130.0) 5.12 (130.0) 5.75 (146.1) 6.25 (158.8) 6.75 (171.5) 7.75 (196.9) 9.03 (229.4) 9.78 (248.4) 11.58 (294.1) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) Dimension in Inches (mm) Duct Width (A) (B) (C)
28 29 30 31 32 33
Table 24.0-57. Edgewise Hook Hanger

Conductor Conguration 3WH/4WH/3WG/3WHG/4WG/4WHG 3WI/4WI 4WNH/4WNG 4WNHG/4WNI Dimension in Inches (mm) Duct Height 4.384.56 (111.2115.8) 4.384.56 (111.2115.8) 4.925.10 (125.0129.5) 4.925.10 (125.0129.5) Duct Width 4.756.38 (120.7162.1) 7.3811.17 (187.4283.7) 4.756.38 (120.7162.1) 7.3811.17 (187.4283.7) (A) 8.40 (213.3) 13.19 (335.0) 8.40 (213.3) 13.19 (335.0) (B) 4.81 (122.2) 4.81 (122.2) 5.35 (135.9) 5.35 (135.9)
34 35 36
Table 24.0-58. Flatwise Angle Hanger

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 Al 225 400 600 800 1000 1200 1350 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 IEC 439 Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400 1550 1800 2250 3000 3800 4500 5800 Conductor Bars Per Phase 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Dimension in Inches (mm) Busway Width 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 5.38 (136.7) 5.88 (149.4) 6.38 (162.1) 7.38 (187.5) 8.64 (219.5) 9.40 (238.8) 11.17 (283.7) 16.14 (410.0) 18.64 (473.5) 20.16 (512.1) 23.70 (602.0) (A)
Table 24.0-59. Edgewise Angle Hanger

Conductor Conguration 3WH/4WH/3WG/3WHG/ 4WG/4WHG/3WI/4WI Dimension in Inches (mm) Duct Height 4.384.56 (111.2115.8) (A) 9.00 (228.6) 9.36 (237.7)
37 38 39
9.00 (228.6) 9.00 (228.6) 9.00 (228.6) 9.00 (228.6) 9.63 (244.6) 10.12 (257.0) 10.63 (270.0) 11.63 (295.4) 12.88 (327.2) 13.62 (345.9) 15.44 (392.2) 20.39 (517.9) 22.88 (581.2) 24.39 (619.5) 28.00 (711.2)
4WNH/4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI 4.925.10 (125.0129.5)
Note: Angle hangers must be used for seismic applications.
.7 (19 .75 A 1 Bar Per Phase .75 A Flatwise 75 .75 A 2 Bars Per Phase Edgewise
40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-53. Angle Hangers
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 038
Physical Data Vertical Hangers (Figure 24.0-54 and Figure 24.0-55)

When busway is to be installed vertically, a spring suspension type vertical hanger should be used. Vertical hangers are not provided unless specied. This unique hanger equalizes the weight of vertically mounted busway along all supports. A vertical hanger must be used on each oor and at the end of the bus run on the last oor. The maximum span permitted by UL on vertical hangers is 16 feet (4.9m). Intermediate hangers are required for oor heights exceeding 16 feet (4.9m). Table 24.0-60. Edgewise Vertical Hangers (F and F-Opposite Sides)
Conductor Conguration Busway Height Inches (mm) 3WH/4WH 3WG/3WHG/4WG/ 4WHG 3WI/4WI 4WHN 4WNG/4WNHG 4WNI 4.38 (111.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.56 (115.8) 4.92 (125.0) 5.05 (128.3) 5.10 (129.6) Hangers on F and F Opposite Sides (A) Inches (mm) 4.72 (119.9) 4.91 (124.7) 4.91 (124.7) 5.25 (133.4) 5.44 (138.2) 5.44 (138.2) Figure 24.0-55 Conguration A A A A A A
Configuration A (1 Bar per Phase) Configuration B (1 Bar per Phase) A A
Edgewise (1 Bar per Phase) Flatwise (1 Bar per Phase) Flatwise (2 Bar per Phase)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-54. Typical Installation
Table 24.0-61. Flatwise Vertical Hangers (T and T-Opposite Sides)

Ampere Rating UL 857 Cu 225 400 600 800 1200 Al 225 400 600 800 Busway IEC 439 Width Inches (mm) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 4.75 (120.7) 5.38 (136.7) 5.88 (149.4) 6.38 (162.1) 7.38 (187.5) 8.64 (219.5) 9.40 (238.8) 11.17 (283.7) 16.14 (410.0) 18.64 (473.5) 20.16 (512.1) 23.70 (602.0) Hangers on T and T Opposite Sides (A) Inches (mm) 4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3) 5.25 (133.4) 5.75 (146.1) 6.25 (158.8) 7.25 (184.2) 8.50 (215.9) 9.25 (235.0) 11.06 (280.9) 16.00 (406.4) 18.50 (469.9) 20.06 (510.0) 23.59 (600.0) Figure 24.0-55 Conguration B B B B B B B B B C C D D D D
Cu 225 400 630 1000 1200 1400
1000
1350 1000 1550 1600 1200 1800 2000 1350 2250 1600 3800 2500 2000 3000 3200 4000 2500 4500 3200 5000 4000 5800
Configuration C (1 Bar per Phase)
Configuration D (2 Bar per Phase)
Figure 24.0-55. Vertical Hangers
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 039
24.0-39
Plug-in Protective Devices
Plug-in Protective Devices

All Pow-R-Way III plug-in units are designed with the safety of the installer and user as the key criteria. The following features are standard for both fusible and circuit breaker type plug-in units: Pow-R-Way III bus plugs have extended ground and neutral bars which bring the termination points down into the cable entry area making for a safer, easier connection. A barrier is provided over the line side connections from the bus plug stab assembly to the fusible switch or circuit breaker. The bus plug ground stab makes positive contact with the busway ground (integral or internal) before the phase or neutral stabs contact the bus bars. A bus plug guide port is provided in the busway housing, to the right of each plug-in outlet. A polarizing alignment pin is located at the line side end of each bus plug enclosure. The alignment pin must be inserted into the guide port for proper installation. The plug-in unit and the busway are interlocked to ensure that the device is in the OFF position prior to installation or removal of the unit. To ensure that the bus plug is seated onto the busway, the clamping mechanism will draw the unit tight onto the busway housing as the installer tightens the clamps. Plug-in units have an interference bracket that prevents the cover from being opened while the device is in the ON position and to prevent accidental closing of the device while the cover is open. There are two locations available for eld positioning of the bus plug operating handle. On vertical bus run applications, the handle can be mounted on the side of the plug, and for horizontal runs, the handle can be mounted on the (line side) end of the unit. Bus plugs are shipped with the handle mounted on the end as standard. Mounting positions are illustrated in Figure 24.0-58. When a plug-in unit is installed, the bus plug stab base assembly engages a seating ridge provided on the plug-in outlet. The stab base is drawn in to overlap the ridge and form a tight seal against moisture and dust.
Outlet Seating Ridge Mounting Hardware T F Finger-Safe Barriers Ground Stab Guide Port
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Figure 24.0-57. Plug-in Outlet Details
Plug-in Device Mounting

The load end of a plug-in unit varies with the orientation of the busway as determined by the F and T markings (see Figure 24.0-58 below).
ON
Handle
Load Handle
30
ON
OFF
T F
31 32 33
OFF
Load
OFF
OFF
Handle Load
ON
34 35
Load Handle
T
ON
36 37
T Load F OFF
Guide Pin and Port

F T
Handle ON
38 39
ON Handle
ON
Load
OFF
O ON OFF O
Load OFF
ON
40 41
OFF
OFF ON
F
Handle Handle Load
42 43
Clamp and Guide

DANG
Figure 24.0-56. Plug-in Stab Details
Figure 24.0-58. Plug-in Device Mounting
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 040
Plug-in Protective Devices Plug-in Device Mounting (Continued)

Plug-in openings are spaced every 24.00 inches (609.9 mm) starting 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) in from the centerline of each bridge joint with a maximum of ve openings per side of an individual section of busway. Figure 24.0-59 and Figure 24.0-60 illustrate the number of plug-in openings taken up by each style/size bus plug.
P3F321(30 A), P3F361 (30 A), P33F361H (30 A), P3F322 (60 A), P3F362 (60 A), P3F362H (60 A) P3F323(100 A), P3F363(100A) and P3F363H (100 A) (Occupies 1 Plug-in Opening) " .00 12 " .00 24 P3F364H (200 A) " .00 and P3F365H (400 A) 24 (Occupies 1 Plug-in Opening) " .00 P3F324 (200 A) 24 " and P3F364 (200 A) .00 (Occupies 2 Plug-in Openings) 24 " in. .00 12 0M 7.0 1 Can't Use
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Each plug-in unit uses only one plug-in opening; however, may cover up additional plug-in openings preventing use.
P3BFD (Occupies 1 Plug-in Opening)
" .00 " 0 4.0 .00 .0 "
12
F
24 ing 0" en 16.5 mp Cla 24
0"
o C L
p fO f do
of C L
Op
en
ing 12" . 18
En ing " n e " ing 75 en 29. Op 8.62 1 of Op f C L p o L lam C fC do n E Section Shown
" .00 24 " .00 12 Can't Use e
P3BJD (Occupies 1 Plug-in Opening) P3BKD (Occupies 2 Plug-in Openings)
29 30 31 32 33
f Co
L
Op
en
ing
19 C L d En
.00
" 20 Cla mp
.75
"
of
10 ft. Section Shown
"T
"
P3B2D, P3BMD, P3BND and P3BLAP (Occupies 2 Plug-in Openings)
o C L
T F
p fO
en
ing 4 1 1.3
"
P3BLCL (Occupies 2 Plug-in Openings)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
o C L fO n pe ing 44 p .19 "
P3F325 (400 A), P3F365 (400 A), P33F236 (600 A), P3F366 (600 A), P3F327 (800 A) and P3F367 (800 A) (Occupies 3 Plug-in Openings)
o nd C L
m Cla
p .25 "
En
Can't Use
do
fC
la
37 mp
o nd
m Cla
Figure 24.0-60. Breaker Plug-in Device Mounting
Figure 24.0-59. Fusible Plug-in Device Mounting
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 041
24.0-41
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices

SPD Series (Figure 24.0-61)
The Pow-R-Way III plug-in device product offering includes a surge protective device (SPD), which is ideal for busway fed distribution systems. A transient voltage is a random, high energy, short duration electrical anomaly. These high energy surges can disrupt, damage or destroy sensitive microprocessor-based equipment. Eaton has developed the SPD family of products to ensure that quality power is supplied to commercial, industrial, medical and institutional facilities. The SPD not only protects against externally created impulse transients such as lightning, utility capacitor switching and disturbances emitted by adjacent facilities, but also provides needed protection against internal transients. This type of transient is generated within a facilitys own distribution system. Sources of internally generated, or ringwave, transients are imaging, equipment, variable frequency drives, lighting dimmers, arc welders, and the switching on and off of electrical distribution equipment. It is estimated that over 80% of surge disturbances are actually caused by internal transients. The SPD series also lters repetitive electrical line noise (EMI/RFI), which is dened as any unwanted electrical signal that produces undesirable effects in the circuits of sensitive electronic equipment or disturbances that are two times peak voltage. The suppression of AC transients is accomplished through the use of Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) that provide a low impedance path to divert surges away from loads. Electrical line noise and ringing transients are eliminated by adding ltering capacitors to the suppression device. Not all SPD units on the market have ltering capabilities. The benets of combining SPD and ltering are reduced MOV stress resulting in a longer life cycle, lower let-through voltage, better noise attenuation levels and increased reliability. Table 24.0-62. SPD Bus Plugs Selection Chart
Without protection devices, electronic based loads and microprocessors are not provided with the noise- and disturbance-free power that they require. Because microprocessors are now common in most facilities, speciers must ensure that the AC power supply is properly ltered. Signicant performance advantages are achieved by integrating SPD lters into busway systems. Because the SPD unit is directly connected to the busway, it is able to minimize let-through voltage and isolate critical loads that are fed from a protected busway run. Due to the integrated design, the SPD bus plug saves the userneeded wall space and greatly reduces the installed project cost. The SPD bus plug is furnished with a breaker disconnect. For catalog numbers and selection criteria, see Table 24.0-62 below.
22 23 24 25 26 27
14.24 (361.7)
28 29
5.75 (146.1)
30 31 32
21.50 (546.1)
33 34 35 36
Figure 24.0-61. SPD Bus Plug
P3BSPD 250 480Y S C

FixedDo Not Change FixedDo Not Change Surge Rating (kA/Phase) 100 120 160 200 250 300 Voltage Code 4W 3W Three-phase wye (four-wire + ground) Voltage Requirements 120/208 230/400 277/480 347/600 240V 208Y 400V 400Y 480V 480Y 600V 600Y Option Code 1 = BasicDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, singlecolored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire. S = StandardDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm with silence button, and Form C relay contact. N = Standard + Surge CounterDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm with silence button, Form C relay contact, EMI/RFI filtering providing up to 50 dB of noise attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz, and surge counter with reset button.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Three-phase 240D delta (threewire + ground)
480D
600D
Note: Available for Pow-R-Way III plugs. This information is required for all quotations. This information should also be included at order entry to ensure prompt processing of the order.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 042
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plugs (Figure 24.0-62)
The IQ Energy Sentinel is a UL listed microprocessor-based metering module capable of communicating energy usage and demand values over the PowerNet power monitoring network. These innovative submetering devices are designed to mount directly to Series C molded-case breakers through 400A and are available for universal mounting through 2500A. It offers a centralized alternative to individually mounted wattmeters, watthour meters and watt-demand meters. Key advantages include unmatched savings in space, lower installation costs, and the capability to communicate data readings in a variety of ways. IQ Energy Sentinels with builtin CTs and communication capability have the added benet of overall system accuracy. The Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of Eaton F, J and K frame breakers within the bus plug enclosure. The Energy Sentinel is also available for fusible plug-in units, which use external CTs within the plug-in enclosure. Submetering application examples for the Energy Sentinel include energy monitoring and demand management, energy cost analysis/allocation and tenant or interdepartmental billing. To accomplish the communication system, the customer must provide a twisted pair communication cable in 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) conduit connecting the IQ Energy Sentinel to a Breaker Interface Module or a customer PC to display and collect the information. The IQ Energy Sentinel offers the user full energy monitoring capability in a compact, cost-effective module ideally suited to busway application.
Ground Connection
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug (Figure 24.0-63)

In rare cases, bus bars in a busway system pick up static electricity. In order to discharge this potential, a neutralizer and ground detector bus plug is available. The unit has three 18,000 ohm resistors connected between the bus bars and the ground. Static electricity is discharged through these resistors. A neon lamp is wired in series with the bus bar and part of the resistor, and burns continuously. If there is a ground anywhere on the system of a lower resistance than the path through the lamp, the lamp will go out, indicating that there is a short in the system.
18,000 Ohm Resistors (3)
Cover (Cutaway) Ground Indicating Lamp (3)
Figure 24.0-63. Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug
Combination Starter Bus Plugs (see Figure 24.0-64)

Eatons Freedom and Advantage motor starters are included in the Pow-R-Way III bus plug product offering. Freedom Motor Starters offer state-of-the-art features that ensure greater value, exibility and performance in the toughest commercial and industrial applications. Advantage motor starters have features including a solidstate, heaterless overload relay with built-in ground fault protection. Advantage also features communication capabilities and an on-board microprocessor that controls the contactor magnet to eliminate burnout in low voltage or varying control circuit conditions. Plug-in combination starters or contactors are mounted in enclosures identical to the circuit breaker and fusible switch type bus plugs including the clamp and guides, safety interlocks and guide pin. They are available from size 0 through 5 with a circuit breaker, motor circuit protector or fusible disconnect. Contact Eaton for specic application and outline dimensions.
Advantage Starter
Figure 24.0-62. IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plug Figure 24.0-64. Freedom/Advantage Bus Plug

September 2011
Sheet 24 043
24.0-43
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices Digitrip OPTIM Bus Plugs (Figure 24.0-65)
Digitrip OPTIM is a new programmable, communicating, microprocessor-based electronic trip unit system for Eatons Series C circuit breakers. OPTIM is available for Pow-R-Way III bus plugs on K-Frame (125400A), L-Frame (70600A) and N-Frame (4001200A) circuit breakers. Digitrip OPTIM provides an electrical distribution system with superior programmable protection, coordination and a state-ofthe-art advanced warning capability along with system diagnostics, monitoring and communications. Digitrip OPTIM is available in two trip unit types: OPTIM 550 and OPTIM 1050. Unique Digitrip OPTIM features can provide: Time current settings with more increments that permit the user to optimize system protection and coordination, improved accuracy gives more selectivity and closer sensitivity in providing coordination, programmable short delay and/or instantaneous curve tripping options, selectable thermal memory, as well as selectable sure start discriminator protection features. Increased system security is provided by the addition of a programmable password protection. For improved system coordination, I4t long delay time slope has been added to the traditional nine LSIG curve shaping options. Short delay and ground delay zone selective interlocking have also been added, down to a 70A circuit breaker. The following Advance Warning options are also available: A programmable high load phase and neutral alarm, adjustable between 50% and 100% of Ir (LDPU setting), will signal an impending trip condition. An adjustable ground fault alarm that will alert the user of a ground fault condition without the breaker. Energy alarming can be performed (such as peak demand exceeded) to reduce energy costs with OPTIM 1050 via PowerNet. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) alarming detects changes in power quality with OPTIM 1050 via PowerNet. Digitrip OPTIM provides a complete selection of system diagnostic capabilities including: four cause-of-trip LEDs are mounted on the front of the trip unit to improve troubleshooting capabilities. They are complemented by trip event information that is stored in memory after a trip condition, remote breaker status indication is provided by auxiliary and alarm switches. The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) provides trip indication information on the front of the unit or via relay contacts to a remote location. Digitrip OPTIM has an extensive menu of monitoring capabilities including load monitoring, power factor (OPTIM 1050), power and energy (OPTIM 1050) power quality-current harmonics. OPTIM trip units are PowerNet compatible and can be included in the unique tripping PowerNet communications system. Contact Eaton for specic applications and outline dimensions.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Figure 24.0-65. OPTIM Bus Plug
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 044
Power Takeoff
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Power Takeoff Sections

Power takeoff sections are used to tap up to 1200A of power off of the busway. A power takeoff section must be used when power in excess of the current carrying capabilities of the plug-in stabs (800A) is required. A bolt-on fusible switch or circuit breaker unit can then be bolted to the power takeoff.
C L Pow-R-Bridge
6.94 (176.3) 9.00 (228.6)
C L Pow-R-Bridge F
17.00 (431.8) (Minimum)
17.00 (431.8) (Minimum)
6.94 (176.3) 9.00 (228.6)
C L P.T.O.
C L P.T.O.
Bridge Joint Power Takeoff (Figure 24.0-66)

A bridge joint power takeoff is a special connection that allows for the attachment of a bolt-on unit at the bridge joint. The bridge joint power takeoff and a bolt-on unit can be used to tap off power where plug-in busway is not available.
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
Edgewise Mounted Single Bar Per Phase Only

DANG ER
Flatwise Mounted Available in Single and Double Bars Per Phase
Load P.T.O. Line

F
Figure 24.0-67. Built-in Power Takeoff
Plug-in Cable Tap Boxes (Figure 24.0-68)

Plug-in cable tap boxes are used to feed the busway run, or where equipment served by the busway is connected without overcurrent protection. Plug-in cable tap boxes plug into any Pow-R-Way III busway (2255000A) plug in opening.
Bolt-on Circuit Breaker Unit or Fusible Switch
A B Top Removable
31 32 33 34 35 36
C L Pow-R-Bridge
Figure 24.0-66. Bridge Power Takeoff
Built-in Power Takeoff (Figure 24.0-67)

A built-in power takeoff is a special piece of feeder busway that allows for the attachment of a bolt-on unit. Built-in power takeoffs are used where space restrictions dictate that the wide dimensions of the busway be at against the wall, ceiling or other obstruction. In this application, power takeoffs and bolt-on units are used instead of plug-in units.
C L
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-68. Plug-in Cable Tap Box Table 24.0-63. Plug-in Cable Tap Box Details
Ampere Rating Dimension (A) Inches (mm) 200 200 400 400 600 600 800 800 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3) 26.25 (666.7) 26.25 (666.7) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) (B) Inches (mm) 15.50 (393.7) 15.50 (393.7) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 24.75 (628.6) 24.75 (628.6) 24.75 (628.6) 24.75 (628.6) (C) Inches (mm) 7.12 (180.8) 7.12 (180.8) 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) (D) Inches (mm) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 7.50 (190.5) 12.80 (325.1) 12.80 (325.1) 12.80 (325.1) 12.80 (325.1) Compression Conn./Phase and N English (1) (1) (2) (3) Metric (1) (1) (2) (3) Mechanical Lugs/Phase and N English (1) #4350 kcmil (1) 250750 kcmil or (2) 3/0250 kcmil (2) 250750 kcmil or (4) 3/0250 kcmil (3) 250750 kcmil or (6) 3/0250 kcmil Metric
DANG
ER
Stab. 3.81 (96.8)
Load End
D Wiring Gutter
Catalog Number
P3PTB200C P3PTB200M P3PTB400C P3PTB400M P3PTB600C P3PTB600M P3PTB800C P3PTB800M
(1) 21.2177 mm2 (1) 127380 mm2 or (2) 85.0127 mm2 (1) 127380 mm2 or (4) 85.0127 mm2 (3) 127380 mm2 or (6) 85.0127 mm2
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 045
24.0-45
Receptacle Plug-in Units

Eatons unique receptacle plug-in unit design makes them the most exible receptacle units in the industry. Pow-R-Way III receptacle plug-in units come fully assembled and wired, reducing installation time, and are built to order. They are CSA and UL 857 listed and come in ve different congurations.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Figure 24.0-70. Single Receptacle Plug
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit

The fused duplex receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-69, allows for quick standard receptacle power at any plug-in location along the busway. Each unit comes with either two NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles (catalog number: P3FD62FD62F) or two NEMA L5-15R duplex receptacles (catalog number: P3FD61FD61F). Each duplex receptacle is rated and fuse protected at 15 or 20A and is 120V, singlephase, three-wire.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Quad Receptacle Unit

The quad receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-71, is congured to order and uses Type CH single-, two- and three-pole plug-in circuit breakers. Each unit comes with 24 NEMA congured receptacles in any combination of straight blade and twist-lock and three-, four- and ve-wire, rated 1550A. Each receptacle can be xed mounted to the front of the enclosure or cord mounted from the bottom of the enclosure (not as shown). Cord lengths are 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
Figure 24.0-69. Duplex Receptacle Plug
Single Receptacle Unit

The single receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-70, is congured to order and uses Type CH single- or two-pole plug-in circuit breakers. One receptacle comes with each unit that can be straight blade or twist-lock, rated from 1550A. Each receptacle can also be xed mounted to the front of the enclosure or cord mounted from the bottom of the enclosure (not as shown). Cord lengths are 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
37 38 39 40 41
Figure 24.0-71. Quad Receptacle Plug
42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 046
Plug-in Device Electrical Data
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 24.0-64. Circuit Breakers 100% rated breakers are not available for use in bus plugs. Contact product line for guidance.
Ampere Rating 1560 70100 1560 70100 110150 1560 70100 110150 175225 1560 70100 110150 175225 1560 70100 110225 15100 100225 100225 100225 70225 250 70225 250 70225 250 125250 250400 100400 100400 100400 200400 300600 300600 300600 400800 400800 400800 400800 400800 6001200 6001200 6001200 Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 18 18 18 18 18 65 65 65 65 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 65 100 200 65 65 100 100 200 200 200 65 65 100 200 200 65 100 200 65 100 65 100 200 65 100 200 480 Vac 14 14 14 14 14 25 25 25 25 65 65 65 65 100 100 100 150 35 35 65 65 100 100 200 35 65 100 200 35 65 100 50 65 50 65 100 50 65 100 600 Vac 14 14 14 18 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 35 35 35 18 18 25 25 35 35 25 35 50 25 35 50 25 35 25 35 50 25 35 50 Breaker Type EHD EHD FDB FDB FDB FD FD FD FD HFD HFD HFD HFD FDC FDC FDC FCL ED EDH EDC JD, JDB JD, JDB HJD HJD JDC JDC LCL DK KD, KDB HKD KDC LCL LD, LDB HLD LDC MDL HMDL ND HND NDC ND HND NDC
Table 24.0-65. Branch Devices Earth Leakage Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, continued)
(Adjustable pickup from 30 mA to 30A)
Ampere Rating 100250 100250 100250 200400 200400 200400 kAIC (Symmetrical) 480 Vac 35 65 100 35 65 100 Breaker Type ELJD ELHJD ELJDC ELKD ELHKD ELKDC
Table 24.0-66. Integrally Fused, Current Limiting Circuit Breaker

Ampere Rating 15100 125225 250400 400600 700800 Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) 240 Vac 200 200 200 200 200 480 Vac 200 200 200 200 200 600 Vac 200 200 200 200 200 Breaker Type FB-P LA-P LA-P NB-P NB-P
Table 24.0-67. Breaker Unit Catalog Numbering System
P3B HFD 3 015 G N

Bus Style P3B = PRWIII IBP = PRW BP = Old line Breaker Frame (Ex. FD, JDC, KDB) 3-Pole Only Trip Rating (Ex. 015, 060, 150, 400) Ground Option G = 50% internal I = Isolated ground (PRWIII only) Neutral Option
N = 100% neutral
N2 = 200% neutral (PRWIII only) ZN = Low Z (old line only)
Operating Handle Busway Interlock
Table 24.0-65. Branch Devices Earth Leakage Ground Fault Circuit Breakers
(Adjustable pickup from 30 mA to 30A)
Ampere Rating 3560 70100 110150 3560 70100 110150 3560 70100 110150 kAIC (Symmetrical) 480 Vac 25 25 25 65 65 65 100 100 100 Breaker Type ELFD ELFD ELFD ELHFD ELHFD ELHFD ELFDC ELFDC ELFDC
Line Side Barrier Guide Pin
Neutral Bar and Terminal
Ground Bar and Terminal
Figure 24.0-72. Typical Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit

Notes: Please call Greenwood Low Voltage Busway department for help in assigning a catalog number for a specic application. Do not leave spaces between characters. Example: P3BFD3225N; IBPKD3400N. All plug-in units come fully assembled.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 047
24.0-47

Table 24.0-68. Fusible Switch Horsepower and Short-Circuit Rating (Based on Fuse Class)
Ampere Rating NEC Standard 3 7.5 15 25 50 75 100 5 15 25 50 100 150 200 7.5 15 30 60 125 200 250 Maximum Maximum Symmetrical rms at Fuse Class 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAL 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAJ 200 kAL 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAR 200 kAJ 200 kAJ 200 kAL
Operating Handle
Busway Interlock
Neutral Bar & Terminal
22 23 24
240V
30 60 100 200 400 600 800 7.5 15 30 60 125 200 250 15 30 60 125 250 400 500 20 50 75 150 350 500 500
Guide Pin
25 26 27
Ground Bar & Terminal
480V
30 60 100 200 400 600 800
28 29 30 31 32 33
600V
30 60 100 200 400 600 800
Figure 24.0-73. Typical Fusible Plug-In Unit

NoteS: H clips are standard for ITAP and TAP unless specied by adding R in catalog number. R clips are standard for P3F. Please call Greenwood Low Voltage Busway department for help in assigning a catalog number for a specic application. Do not leave spaces between characters. Example: P3F362RN; ITAP361N. All plug-in units come fully assembled.
Table 24.0-69. Fusible Unit Catalog Numbering System
P3F 3 6 4 R G N
Bus Style P3F = PRWIII ITAP = PRW TAP = Old Line Three-Pole Only Voltage 6 = 600V 2 = 240V Ampere 1 = 30 2 = 60 3 = 100 4 = 200 5 = 400 6 = 600 7 = 800 Fuse Clips H, J or R 600A T or L for 800A Ground Option G = 50% I = Isolated PRWIII only) Neutral Options N = 100% N2 = 200% (PRWIII only) ZN = Low Z (old line only)
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 048
Plug-in Device Physical Data
22 23 24

A B ON
Guide Pin
C
ON OFF
25
Handle C L OFF C L E D F C L Plug-in Opening and B
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Plug-in Opening
Figure 24.0-74. Bus Plugs Table 24.0-70. Plug-in Units

Plug-In Unit Maximum Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm) Amperes AC Volts (A) (B) (C) (D) Mechanical Terminal (E) (F) Wire Range Per Phase (mm2) Approx. Weights Lbs (kg) 25 (11.3) 47 (21.3) 53 (24.0) 75 (34.0) 136 (61.7) 138 (62.6)
Circuit Breaker Plug-in Units

P3BFD 225 (E- & F-Frame breakers) P3BJD (J-Frame breakers) P3BKD (K-Frame breakers) P3BLD (L-Frame breakers) P3BMDL (MDL-Frame breakers) P3BND (N-Fame breakers) P3BLAP (TRI-PAC) P3BLCL 250 400 600 800 800 400 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 21.20 (538.5) 23.26 (590.8) 34.41 (874.0) 41.91 (1064.5) 45.89 (1165.6) 45.98 (1167.9) 45.89 (1165.6) 41.86 (1063.2) 12.36 (314.0) 12.36 (314.0) 13.29 (337.6) 19.65 (499.1) 19.65 (499.1) 19.65 (499.1) 19.65 (499.1) 19.65 (499.1) 5.43 (138.0) 6.97 (177.0) 7.79 (197.9) 10.15 (257.8) 10.15 (257.8) 10.15 (257.8) 10.15 (257.8) 10.15 (257.8) 6.25 (158.8) 10.44 (265.2) 12.56 (319.0) 17.38 (441.5) 17.38 (441.5) 17.38 (441.5) 13.80 (350.5) 13.80 (350.5) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 6.06 (153.7) 6.06 (153.7) 6.64 (168.7) 9.83 (249.7) 9.83 (249.7) 9.83 (249.7) 9.83 (249.7) 9.83 (249.7) 100A(1) #141/0 (2.550) 150A(1) #44/0 (2595) 250A(1) #14350 kcmil (25185) 225A(1) 3350 kcmil (35185) 350A(1) 250500 kcmil (120240) 400A(2) 3/0250 kcmil (45120) 400A(1) 4/0600 kcmil (120300) 600A(2) 400500 kcmil (185240) 600A(2) #1500 kcmil (50240) 800A(2) 500750 kcmil (300400) 700A(2) # 1500 kcmil (50240) 800A(3) 3/0400 kcmil (95185)
400
OFF
ON
Clamp and Guide
225A(1) #6350 kcmil (16185) 96 400A(1) #4250 kcmil and (43.5) (1) 3/0600 kcmil (25120 and 95300) (1) #4250 kcmil (25120) and (1) 3/0600 kcmil (95300) 88 (39.9)
600
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 049
24.0-49

Table 24.0-70. Plug-in Units (Continued)
Plug-In Unit Maximum Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm) Amperes AC Volts (A) (B) (C) Mechanical Terminal (D) (E) (F) Wire Range Per Phase (mm2) Approx. Weights Lbs (kg) 22 (10.0)
22 23 24 25
Fusible Plug-in Units

P3F321RH P3F321RV 30 240 12.64 (321.1) 15.66 (397.8) 12.64 (321.1) 15.66 (397.8) 12.64 (321.1) 15.66 (397.8) 12.64 (321.1) 15.66 (397.8) 14.83 (376.7) 19.85 (504.2) 14.83 (376.7) 19.85 (504.2) 23.86 (606.0) 13.92 (353.6) 12.64 (321.1) 13.92 (353.6) 12.64 (321.1) 13.92 (353.6) 12.64 (321.1) 13.92 (353.6) 12.64 (321.1) 17.92 (455.2) 12.76 (324.1) 17.92 (455.2) 12.76 (324.1) 17.24 (437.9) 15.29 (388.4) 17.24 (437.9) 15.29 (388.4) 21.22 (539.0) 21.22 (539.0) 26.31 (668.3) 26.31 (668.3) 8.46 (214.9) 4.30 (109.2) 3.90 (99.1) 8.26 (209.8) 6.72 (170.7) 8.26 (209.8) 6.72 (170.7) 8.26 (209.8) 6.72 (170.7) 8.26 (209.8) 6.72 (170.7) 13.62 (345.9) 6.84 (427.7) 13.62 (345.9) 6.84 (427.7) 3.83 (97.3) 8.26 (209.8) 3.83 (97.3) 8.26 (209.8) 10.69 (271.5) 10.69 (271.5) 13.16 (334.3) 13.16 (334.3) (1) 250750 kcmil Cu/Al (127380) (2) 3/0250 kcmil Cu/Al (85127) (1) 250750 kcmil Cu/Al (127380) (2) 3/0250 kcmil Cu/Al (85127) (2) #2600 kcmil Cu/Al (35300) (3) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300) (3) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300) 77 (34.9) 81 (36.7) 82 (37.1) 108 (49.0) (1) # 4250 kcmil Cu/Al (25120) (1) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300) or (2) 250 kcmil (120) 47 (21.3) Cu(1) #14#3, (2.535) Al(1) #12#2 (3.238) 24 (10.9) Cu(1) #14#3, (2.535) Al(1) #12#2 (3.235)
P3F361RH P3F361RV
600
8.46 (214.9)
4.30 (109.2)
3.90 (99.1)
P3F322RH P3F322RV
60
240
8.46 (214.9)
4.30 (109.2)
3.90 (99.1)
26 27 28
P3F362RH P3F362RV
600
8.46 (214.9)
4.30 (109.2)
3.90 (99.1)
Cu(1) #141/0, (2.550) Al(1) #121/0 (3.250)
24 (10.9)
P3F323RH P3F323RV
100
240
8.37 (212.6)
4.30 (109.2)
3.90 (99.1)
Cu(1) #141/0, (2.550) Al(1) #121/0 (3.250) (1) # 4250 kcmil Cu/Al (25120)
24 (10.9)
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
P3F363RH P3F363RV
600
8.37 (212.6)
4.30 (109.2)
3.90 (99.1)
P3F324RH P3F324RV
200
240
8.52 (216.4)
5.71 (145.0)
6.80 (172.7) 3.90 (99.1) 6.80 (172.7) 3.90 (99.1) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6)
P3F364RH P3F364RV
600
23.86 (606.0)
8.52 (216.4)
5.71 (145.0)
P3F325R and P3F365R P3F365H P3F326R and P3F366R P3F327R and P3F367R
400 400 600 800
240 600 600 240 600 240 600
48.85 (1240.8) 23.59 (599.2) 48.90 (1242.1) 48.90 (1242.1)
10.07 (255.8) 21.00 (533.4) 10.59 (270.0) 10.59 (270.0)
12.67 (321.8) 12.67 (321.8) 14.26 (362.2) 14.26 (362.2)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 050
Construction Drawing
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Construction Drawing
0.45 (11.4) Indoor/Outdoor 1600 Ampere, 3-Phase Copper, 227/480 Volts 4-Wire, Housing Ground, 100% Neutral
A15
A14 A12
96.00 (2438.4) 111.44 (2830.6) 30.00 (762.0)
G 4.38 A (111.3) B C N
A12
Plug-In Unit
120.0 (3048.0) 6.00 (152.4) 150.0 (3810.0) 30.00 (762.0)
7.38 (187.5) 1 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Phase 1 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Neutral Duct Weight = 21 Lbs./Ft. Color = ANSI 61 Gray
A12
Outdoor Duct 44.00 (1117.6)

A02 A03
A13
2500 A 30 4W
Indoor Duct 39.00 A06 (990.6)

A04
1600 A 30 4W
A12
120.0 (3048.0) 6.00 (152.4) 150.0 (3810.0) 30.00 6.00 (762.0) (152.4)
Indoor/Outdoor 3200 Ampere, 3-Phase Copper, 227/480 Volts 4-Wire, Housing Ground, 100% Neutral G 4.38 A (111.3) B C N
30 31 32 33 34
25.00 (635.0)
All Floors A11 24.00 (609.6) 15.00 2 of A09 30.00 (381.0) (762.0) 18.00 (457.2) 240.00 (6096.0)
A10
17.00 (431.8)
2.00 1.00
25.63 (651.0)
52.00 (1320.0)
8.00 (203.2)
16.14 (409.9)
6 .00 5/8 48.00 (1219.2)

A01 A07
A08
12.00 (304.8) 36.00 (914.4)
15.00 (381.1)
35.00 (889.0) 29.00 (736.6) 293.00 (7442.2)
2 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Phase 2 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Neutral Duct Weight = 42 Lbs./Ft. Color = ANSI 61 Gray
Same Elevation
See Drawing BVC1004 Line 15 See Drawing BVC1012 Line 5 Style No. or S.O. No. LVB01234 U01 LVB01234 A02 BVC0299G11 LVB01234 A04 BVD0301G12 LVB01234 A06 LVB01234 A07 LVB01234 A08 LVB01234 A09 Style No. or S.O. No. LVB01234 A10 BVD0299G06 LVB01234 A12 LVB01234 A13 LVB01234 A14 BVD0156G08 BVD0300G12 BVD0300G15
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Item A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 Description XFMR Throat Elbow Wall Flange Elbow Flange Hanger Flange Elbow Elbow 29.0 Inches (736.6 mm) Length 120.0 Feet (3048.0mm) Length
Req. 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
Item A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17
Description Elbow Floor Flange 30 Inches (726.0mm) Length 120.0 Feet (3048.0 mm) Length 96.0 Feet (2438.4 mm) Length End Closer Hanger Hanger
Req. 1 3 3 2 1 1 3 4
Figure 24.0-75. Sample Installation Drawing After the approval process and prior to shipment of the busway from the factory, the installer will receive a set of construction drawings. A sample is illustrated in Figure 24.075 above. The drawings will contain a complete layout of the entire installation and a bill of material that includes: 1. The item number of each section which can be correlated with the drawing. 2. A description of each section. 3. The style number or shop order number of each section. 4. The quantity of each section or style number required. 5. The height, width and weight (per foot) of each ampere rating.
6. Location of the T and F markings on the busway. 7. Flange reference drawings. 8. Switchgear locations and orientation. 9. Wall and oor locations. 10. The length of each section. 11. The location of any sections that have been designated as Field Fit pieces (see Page 24.0-52). The installer should review this drawing prior to and during the installation process. Please note that plug-in units are generally not shown on a construction drawing. The installer will also receive installation instruction leaets and operation and maintenance manuals with the drawings.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 051
24.0-51
Installation Data
Installation Data
Hoisting and Positioning Busway
Pow-R-Way III is manufactured with two sets of lifting eyes at the ends of each piece to facilitate the hoisting and positioning of the busway during installation. Refer to Figure 24.0-76 for location of lifting eyes.
22 23
Incorrect Joint Assembly: No Pow-R-Bridge
24 25 26
Incorrect Joint Assembly: T and F Labels Misaligned
27 28 29
Correct Joint Assembly
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Figure 24.0-77. Bridge Joint Installation
Torque Indicating Bolt (Figure 24.0-78)

The torque indicating bolt is a double-headed bolt designed to ensure that proper installation torque is achieved. Fallaway instruction labels are provided between the upper and lower bolt heads. A standard wrench with a (minimum) 14.00-inch (355.6 mm) handle should be used to complete the joint installation. Torque should be applied to the upper head only and as when the proper value is achieved. This bolt head will shear off allowing the tag to fall to the oor. Any joint that is improperly torqued will retain the highly visible tag and should be retightened. The lower bolt head remains intact for future maintenance and a label is provided on the bridge joint with the proper torque requirements.
Torque Indicating Bolt as Shipped
Figure 24.0-76. Hoisting Riser and Horizontal Busway
Busway Joint Assembly

When connecting sections of busway the following guidelines must be followed: 1. Carefully read NEMA publication BUI.1 provided with the busway before installing equipment. 2. Contact surfaces must be kept clean and free of all contaminants. 3. Align the (factory installed) Pow-R-Bridge end of the piece being positioned with the non-bridge joint end of the adjacent section. Conrm that the T and F labels of both sections are in the same plane. Failure to do so will result in an improper installation with the phase bars of the connected sections out of sequence. Then, slide the two sections together until the bus bars of the nonbridge section contact the stopping lances of the bridge joint conductor bars of the section being positioned. Figure 24.0-77 illustrates examples of incorrect and correct connections. Obviously, the installation is incorrect if the bridge joint is missing, but the busway will also be improperly installed if the T label of the bridge joint is not in the same plane as the T label of the busway.
Torque Indicating Bolt After Installation
Yellow Instruction Label
For initial installation, tighten until outer head shears off. Use a 14-inch (355.6 mm) or longer wrench.
40 41 42 43
Figure 24.0-78. Torque Indicating Bolt

Note: For maintenance or relocation torque from 55 to 65 ft lbs using a torque wrench.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 052
Final Field Fit Program
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Final Field Fit Program

A eld t section of busway is typically an elbow or a short length of feeder that is intentionally left out of a run for later shipment. It is most often a mutually agreed upon section between the customer and the plant. The purpose of the program is to effectively manage the dimensional uncertainties that may be involved in a busway layout. The example shown in Figure 24.0-79 identies the eld t piece as item F01, a straight length. Upon release of the order, this item is kept on hold for eld measurement. The contractor installs the busway (Items A01 through A04) and is then able to obtain an exact dimension for the nal eld t piece, Item F01. The measurement should be made from the edge of the housing of A01 to the edge of the housing A02.
The contractor can fax the dimensions directly to the factory on the Final Field Fit Fax Release form, which is packed with the original shipment. The eld t section will ship within 5 to 10 working days from the receipt of the release fax. Offset ttings or more than four eld ts released at the same time will ship within 15 working days. This program has been successful for many years and it provides the assurance of an exact t the rst time. It allows for busway runs to be released when certain dimensions are not yet determined. It also eliminates the costly delays that can occur when sections have to be remade and shipped due to last-minute job site changes. In turn, this allows for installations to begin early and projects can be completed on time. The Final Field Fit Fax Release form is customized to each order and is shipped to the job site with the busway. The eld t items shown on the form will match the F items shown on the as-built drawings provided. The sheet is faxed from the job site directly to the product engineer at the factory.
Field Measure Dimension A 24.00 (609.6)
A02
A A
A04 36.00 (914.4) 24.00 (609.6)
T F
36.00 (914.4) A01 36.00 (914.4) F01 A03 T F 24.00 (609.6)
Hold F01 for Final Fit. Customer to Furnish Dimensions. Switchgear #1 Front F01
Customer Faxes A Dimension for F01
Final Fit Piece Shipped within 5 to 10 Working Days (Elbow or Feeder Length)
Figure 24.0-79. Final Field Fit Program
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 053
BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage Pow-R-Flex

General Description
24.1-1
Pow-R-Flex Low-Ampere Busway
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is a three-phase design available in threewire and four-wire congurations with integral housing, internal and isolated internal ground options. Oversized neutral ratings are available on select current ratings. See Table 24.1-5.
22 23
C B A
Seismic Qualication
Pow-R-Flex Low-Ampere Busway
24 25
Three-Wire Housing Ground Assembly
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is the latest design in a family of innovative busway products and is the newest in the industry. The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is an excellent solution for distributing power throughout facilities, providing the exibility to easily use the electrical system power where and when it is needed. The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is practical for manufacturing and assembly facilities, machine shops, school and private laboratories, warehouse facilities, and data centers, and will reduce installation time and costs. The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is a maximum 600V design that uses the latest in extrusion construction, providing appealing aesthetics without compromising heavy-duty performance. The design consists of an extruded, all-aluminum housing with silverplated copper or aluminum conductors. Copper conductors offer ratings from 225600A, and aluminum conductors offer ratings from 150400A. The Pow-R-Flex lowampere busway comes in feeder type and plug-in type with a full line of complementary ttings and accessories. Feeder and plug-in busways can be used interchangeably without adapters or special splice plates. Each section is joined using a Pow-R-Bridge joint-compression tting. The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway comes in two color options: ANSI 61 gray or black.
26 27 28
Conductor Details
Pow-R-Flex bus bars are fabricated from high-strength 100% to over 200% neutral capacity on select current ratings. The phase and neutral conductors are silver-plated along the entire length of the bus bars. Aluminum bars are silver-plated by the Alstan 88C process, and copper bars are silver-plated through a ashing process. The ground bar for the internal ground option is not plated. The internal conductors are separated from one another using an air insulation gap between phases, ground and housing. The conductors are supported and braced with a durable, high-strength polycarbonate support block that has a Class B 130C insulation rating. The support blocks provide superior fault current bracing. For a Pow-R-Flex type plug-in busway, there are no special provisions for plug-in unit connections. Each plug-in unit clamps directly onto each phase and neutral conductor. A support block is used at each plug-in provision, providing additional bracing and support around the plug-in unit provision. This provides a more robust, reliable and safe plug-in unit connection. The neutral conductor is made from the same material as the phase conductors and is the same physical size, providing 100% to 200% neutral capacity on select current ratings. See Table 24.1-5 for neutral capacity by ampere rating.
C B A G Three-Wire Internal Ground Assembly
29 30 31 32
N C B A
33 34
Four-Wire Housing Ground Assembly
35 36
N C B A G Four-Wire Internal Ground Assembly
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Standards
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway meets the requirements of NEMA, ANSI, UL 857, and CSA-C22.2 and is manufactured in an ISO 9001-certied facility. The feeder, plug-in, ttings and accessories are designed to withstand the short-circuit ratings listed for each ampere rating.
Figure 24.1-1. Conductor Congurations

Note: Single-phase congurations are also available. Contact your local Eaton sales representative for additional information.
CA08104001E
24.1-2 BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage Pow-R-Flex

General Description Ground Options
Integral grounduses the extruded aluminum housing as the ground/ earth path. It has been designed, manufactured and UL listed as a 50% integral ground/earth path and is fully fault rated. The system ground continuity is maintained through each joint by the aluminum joint covers. The joint covers are furnished with ground/earth path contact surfaces on the inside of each cover. When installed, the contact surfaces are bolted directly to the busway ground/ earth path. A highly visible label is furnished on each joint cover to alert the installer that the covers must be properly installed to maintain the ground/earth path. The result is a 50% ground/earth path with very low resistance characteristics. Internal grounduses a copper ground/earth conductor that is internal to the busway and is UL listed as a 50% ground/earth path. The internal ground/ earth continuity is maintained through the Pow-R-Bridge joint in the same fashion as each phase conductor. Isolated internal grounduses the 50% internal ground/earth conductor; however, it has been isolated from the busway housing throughout the busway system and is UL listed as a 50% isolated ground/earth path.
September 2011
Sheet 24 054
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pow-R-Bridge
Pow-R-Flex joint connections are made with the Pow-R-Bridge joint package, which is installed on each section of busway prior to shipment. A double-headed, torque-indicating bolt is provided to ensure that the proper installation torque is achieved. Fall-away instruction tags are furnished on the torque-indicating bolt heads to allow for visual inspection from a distance. When the proper torque value is achieved, the top bolt head will shear off and allow the tag to fall to the oor. Any joint that is improperly torqued will retain the highly visible (caution yellow) tag at the bolt head. The Pow-R-Bridge can provide an adjustment of 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) at each joint. Overadjustment is prevented by the joint covers, which will only allow a 0.50-inch (12.0 mm) adjustment to be made. The nonrotating design of the Pow-R-Bridge maintains its conguration integrity when it has been removed from a section of busway. The conductors, insulator plates, and insulators will not displace or swivel, making reinstallation of the Pow-R-Bridge quick and easy.
blocks, which are rated as Class B 130C insulation. The plug-in provision cover incorporates a shutter design that prevents incidental contact with the conductors inside the busway. The shutter has a positive screw close feature that prohibits the shutter from being operated and opened without the use of a tool. Once the screw is removed, it is mechanically operated by the plug-in unit when a plug-in unit is being inserted onto the busway. This shutter design puts safety rst and is IP2X nger safe. One plug-in/ tap-off provision cover is provided every 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) along a plug-in busway section. Each feeder section will include one factoryinstalled Pow-R-Bridge on the left end of the busway when viewing the front of the busway. Table 24.1-1. Number of Plug-In Openings
Duct Length Inches (mm) 24.00 (609.6) 48.00 (1219.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 96.00 (2438.4) 120.00 (3048.0) Number of Plug-In Provisions 1 3 5 7 9
Pow-R-Flex Feeder Busway

Housing Details
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is constructed with a heavy-duty U-shaped aluminum extruded base housing. The front covers are also made from extruded aluminum. The U-shaped base and front cover incorporate a unique hinge design to lock in the front covers on the top side. The bottom sides are fastened in place. This maintains short-circuit strength, provides clean lines, and adds to the aesthetic look and feel of the product. The non-magnetic, all-aluminum housing provides for excellent heat dissipation and a signicant reduction in reactance and magnetic ux leakage, as compared to steel, or steel and aluminum combination housings. The integrity and strength of the housing ensures speciers and users of a safe and durable installation over a broad spectrum of applications. A protective nish is applied by an electrostatic process. There are two color options: ANSI 61 gray or black.
150400A aluminum 225600A copper
Straight sections of feeder busway can be supplied in any length, at 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) increments, from 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) minimum to 120.00 inches (3048.0 mm) maximum. Each feeder section will include one factory-installed Pow-R-Bridge on the left end of the busway when viewing the front of the busway. For added safety and reliability, there are no openings or access covers along the entire length of each feeder section.
Figure 24.1-2. Feeder Busway
Pow-R-Flex Plug-In Busway

150400A aluminum 225600A copper
Straight sections of plug-in busway can be supplied in only 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) increments from 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) minimum, with a maximum of 120.00 inches (3048.0 mm). For a Pow-R-Flex type plug-in busway, a plug-in/tap-off provision cover is used. This cover hinges into the housing in the same manner as the extruded front covers and is made from the same durable, high-strength polycarbonate material as the support
Figure 24.1-3. Plug-in Busway
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 055

Electrical Data
24.1-3
Electrical Data
Table 24.1-2. Short-Circuit RatingsThree-Cycle rms Symmetrical
Ampere Rating Plug-In Short-Circuit Rating 22,000 35,000 35,000 42,000 22,000 35,000 42,000 42,000 Feeder Short-Circuit Rating 22,000 35,000 35,000 42,000 22,000 35,000 42,000 42,000
Table 24.1-5. Oversized Neutral Ratings

Ampere Rating Neutral Size D x W Inches (mm) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) Neutral Rating 250% 150% 150% 150% 250% 150% 100% 100%
22 23 24 25 26
50%
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Copper
225 400 500 600
Copper
225 400 500 600
Table 24.1-6. Voltage Drop Volts per 100 Feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral, 60 Hz at Rated Current (Varying Power Factors)
Ampere Rating 100% 90% 80% 70% 60%
Table 24.1-3. Resistance, Reactance and Impedance Milliohms per 100 Feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral, Plug-in and Feeder Busway
Ampere Rating Resistance R 9.93 3.44 3.44 2.41 5.30 1.85 1.32 1.32 Reactance X 4.56 2.92 2.92 2.50 4.24 2.96 2.51 2.51 Impedance Z 10.90 4.57 4.57 3.46 6.87 3.53 2.75 2.75
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Aluminum
150 225 300 400 2.58 1.34 1.79 1.67 2.07 1.28 1.14 1.37 2.84 1.70 2.27 2.26 2.58 2.05 1.98 2.37 2.77 1.76 2.34 2.37 2.64 2.26 2.22 2.66 2.65 1.75 2.33 2.41 2.63 2.36 2.35 2.82 2.50 1.71 2.29 2.39 2.56 2.41 2.42 2.91 2.32 1.66 2.21 2.33 2.46 2.42 2.45 2.94
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Copper
225 400 500 600
Copper
225 400 500 600
Table 24.1-4. Ground Resistance Values Milliohms per 100 Feet (30.5m)
Ampere Rating Integral R 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 Internal R 2.86 2.86 2.86 2.86 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44
Notes: Values shown in Table 24.1-6 are based upon concentrated loads. For plug-in distributed loads, divide the values by 2. See IEEE 141-13-8.3. For line-to-neutral voltage drop, multiply the values from Table 24.1-6 by 0.577. For other than rated current, multiply the values from Table 24.1-6 by actual current/rated current. For total voltage drop, multiply voltage drop by actual length/ 100 ft (30.5m).
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Copper
225 400 500 600
CA08104001E

Physical Data
September 2011
Sheet 24 056
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Physical Data
Table 24.1-7. Physical DimensionsWidth x Height in Inches (mm)
Ampere Rating Phase Conductor 0.28 x 0.50 (7.1 x 12.7) 0.28 x 1.25 (7.1 x 31.8) 0.28 x 1.25 (7.1 x 31.8) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 0.50 (7.1 x 12.7) 0.28 x 1.25 (7.1 x 31.8) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) 0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5) Ground Conductor 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) 0.20 x 1.75 (5.1 x 44.5) Housing Enclosure 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 3.55 x 8.29 (90.2 x 210.6) 1.25 (31.7) 8.30 (210.8) 3.60 (91.4) 0.50 (12.7) 8.30 (210.8) 3.60 (91.4)
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Copper
225 400 500 600
Table 24.1-8. Weight (lb ft)/Current Density (A/in^2)

Ampere Rating Current Density 1067 640 610 813 1618 1151 1027 1233 Weight Three-Wire 6.45 7.10 7.55 7.55 7.50 9.80 11.45 11.45 Weight Four-Wire 6.60 7.50 8.10 8.10 8.00 11.05 13.25 13.25 Add for Ground 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 Add for Oversized Neutral 0.40 0.15 0.15 1.30 0.82 3.60 (91.4)
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Copper
225 400 500 600
1.75 (44.4) 8.30 (210.8)
Table 24.1-9. Weight (kg/m)/Current Density (A/cm^2)

Ampere Rating Current Density 165 99 132 126 251 178 159 191 Weight Three-Wire 9.60 10.57 11.24 11.24 11.16 14.58 17.04 17.04 Weight Four-Wire 9.82 11.16 12.05 12.05 11.91 16.44 19.72 19.72 Add for Ground 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 1.93 1.93 1.93 1.93 Add for Oversized Neutral 0.60 0.22 0.22 1.93 0.82
Aluminum
150 225 300 400
Figure 24.1-4. Conductor Dimensions
Copper
225 400 500 600
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 057

Physical Data
24.1-5
Fittings
There are various ttings allowing the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to meet every application need: anges, elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes, adapters, expansion joints, phase transpositions and end closures. These ttings, along with standard and minimum dimensions, are described on the following pages. When making eld measurements and layouts, it should be remembered that the dimensions are given from the centerline of the busway and the Pow-R-Bridge. The relationship of ttings to straight lengths (forward, rearward, upward and downward) is illustrated in Figure 24.1-5. All straight lengths and ttings are marked with an F label. The F marks the front of the busway and will be noted on the construction or the as-built drawings provided by Eaton.
Upward Downward
22
Rearward Upward
23 24
Forward
25
Rearward
26 27 28 29 30 31
Figure 24.1-5. Busway Orientation
Phasingthe phasing is indicated by the location of the F label. When facing the front of the busway, the phasing is N-C-B-A-G top to bottom. See Figure 24.1-6. When installing Pow-R-Flex lowampere busway, the F labels on the front of the busway must be aligned. Failure to do so will result in an improper installation with the phase bars out of sequence.
Figure 24.1-6. Busway Phase Sequence
Traditional Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90-degree changes in the direction of the busway layouts. There are four types of elbows available: forward, rearward, upward and downward, allowing the busway layout to turn in any direction. Figure 24.1-7 shows the standard/ minimum leg lengths for each type of elbow for all ratings and congurations. Nonstandard lengths are also available. All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge and centerline of the busway.
Downward
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Forward
39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.1-7. Traditional Elbows
CA08104001E

Physical Data Standard Flanges
Flanges provide for a direct connection to low voltage switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers and other electrical equipment. Cutout dimensions and drilling plans are provided with the customer installation drawings, and it is the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to provide the opening, ange drillings, connecting hardware and bus risers in their electrical equipment. For proper coordination between the busway and other equipment, detailed drawings, including equipment orientation, must accompany the order prior to release and manufacture. Figure 24.1-9 shows the standard/minimum ange length and phase-to-phase dimensions for all ratings and congurations. Nonstandard lengths and phase-to-phase dimensions are also available. All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge measured from the top of the ange plate.
September 2011
Sheet 24 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1.50 (38.1)
1.05 (26.7)
1.50 (38.1) 0.50 (12.7)
31 32 33 34
0.28 (7.1)
0.75 (19.0) 3.50 (88.9)
A G
3.50 (88.9)
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
4.05 (102.9) 0.89 (22.6) 3.50 (88.9) 15.78 (400.8)
C L
3.50 (88.9)
4.50 4.50 4.50 (114.3) (114.3) (114.3)
1.60 (40.6)
Figure 24.1-9. Standard Flanges
Figure 24.1-8. Flange Cutout Detail
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 059

Physical Data
24.1-7
Offsets
An offset is used to allow the busway layout, avoid any obstacles and to conform to the buildings structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single tting for use where space restrictions prohibit the use of two traditional elbows. There are four types of offsets available: forward, rearward, upward and downward, allowing the busway layout to offset in any direction. Figure 24.1-10 shows the standard/minimum leg lengths for each type of offset for all ratings and congurations. Nonstandard lengths are also available. All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge and centerline of the busway.
22 23 24 25 26 27
Downward
28 29 30 31
Forward
32 33 34 35 36
Rearward
37 38 39 40 41 42
Upward
Figure 24.1-10. Offsets
43
CA08104001E

Physical Data Cable Tap Boxes
There are two types of cable tap boxes: end and center. End cable tap boxes are used to feed power to a run of busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by busway are connected without the need of overcurrent protection. Center cable tap boxes are used to center feed a run of busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by the busway are connected without the need of overcurrent protection. The front and back covers are removable, improving the ease of cable termination. Top and bottom access plates are removable, allowing easy access to the lugs with tools. See Figure 24.1-12 and Figure 24.1-13. There are two mechanical lugs provided: per phase and one lug for the ground. Terminal conductor range is as follows:

September 2011
Sheet 24 060
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Phase and neutral: Ground:
(1) #4350 kcmil (1) #81/0 Figure 24.1-12. End Cable Tap Box
Figure 24.1-12 shows the standard/minimum stub lengths for each type of cable tap box for all ratings and congurations. Nonstandard lengths and enclosure sizes are also available. All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the Pow-RBridge measured from the edge of the box enclosure.
Figure 24.1-13. End Cable Tap Box Detail View
Figure 24.1-14. Mechanical Lug Access
Figure 24.1-15. End Cable Tap Box With IQ Power Meter
Figure 24.1-11. Center Cable Tap Box
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 061

Physical Data
24.1-9
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints accommodate the expansion and contraction of bus bars with respect to the enclosure. They accommodate for the difference in the coefcient of expansion of the aluminum housing and copper or aluminum bus bar conductors. Expansion joints must be used whenever a run of busway crosses an expansion joint of a building. They should also be installed in the center of an extremely long straight run of busway; one every 300 feet (91m) for copper and one every 225 feet (68m) for aluminum. Usage per footage recommendations are based upon fullload ampere ratings. The use of expansion joints should be engineered for specic applications and installations. Minimum dimensions are shown in Figure 24.1-16.
Phase Transpositions
Phase transposition ttings are used in applications where a phase rotation is needed due to a change in phasing from the source equipment to the load equipment. They may also be used to correct plug-in unit orientation when the busway comes out of proper orientation for plug-in units due to the routing of the busway. There are two types of phase transpositions: 90 degree and 180 degree. In both types, all conductors are transposed. See Figure 24.1-17 and Figure 24.1-18 for minimum dimensions.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Figure 24.1-17. 90-Degree Phase Transposition
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Figure 24.1-16. Expansion Joint
39
Figure 24.1-18. 180-Degree Phase Transposition
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Physical Data VaporFire Barriers
Vaporre barriers hold a two-hour re rating and are used to seal the busway internally for penetrations through walls, oors, and other re-rated penetrations, preventing the passage of ame, noxious gas, smoke and moisture. See Figure 24.1-19 for minimum dimensions.
September 2011
Sheet 24 062
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Accessories
End Closures
End closures terminate a bus run and can be used to cap off either the left or right end of a section of busway. End closures enclose and prevent incidental contact with live conductors. An end closure adds 0.25 inches to the overall length of the busway run. See Figure 24.1-21.
Figure 24.1-19. VaporFire Barrier
Tees (Horizontal)
Tee ttings allow for busway connection in three different horizontal directions. Pow-R-Flex tee ttings consist of special joint covers with instructions on how to place the bridge joint. The through connections connect to the short sides of the bridge joint, and the change connections connect to the long side of the bridge joint.
Figure 24.1-21. End Closure
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.1-20. Horizontal Tees
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 063

Physical Data
24.1-11
Wall Flanges
Wall anges t around the busway and are designed to close off the wall gap opening around the busway, made to allow the busway to pass through a wall. Wall anges are primarily for cosmetic purposes and do not provide any type of vapor or re barrier. See Figure 24.1-22. The recommended cutout opening in a wall for the busway should be 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) greater than the busway dimensions or A x B.
Type C Wallmount Hanger

The Type C wallmount hanger provides a means to mount the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to a wall, beam, pedestal or other xed structure. The Type C brackets are installed prior to installing the busway. Each hanger comes with the hardware to mount the hanger to the busway. One hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m), and the busway span between hangers should not exceed 10 feet (3m). See Figure 24.1-23.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 24.1-23. Type C Wallmount Hanger
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Type L Wallmount Hanger

The Type L wallmount hanger provides a means to mount the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway ush against a wall. The Type L brackets are sold as a two-piece hanger set and come with the hardware to mount the hanger to the busway. One hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m), and the busway span between hangers should not exceed 10 feet (3m). See Figure 24.1-24.
38
Figure 24.1-24. Type L Wallmount Hanger
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Physical Data Horizontal HangerSingle
Horizontal hangers provide a means to attach a single 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) threaded drop rod to the busway, suspending the busway from above. Each hanger comes with the hardware to mount the hanger to the busway. One hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m), and the busway span between hangers should not exceed 10 feet (3m). See Figure 24.1-25.
September 2011
Sheet 24 064
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Horizontal HangerBack-to-Back
The back-to-back horizontal hanger allows two busway runs to be mounted back-to-back and suspended from above, using a single 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) threaded drop rod. Each hanger comes with the hardware to mount the hanger to the busway. One hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m), and the busway span between hangers should not exceed 10 feet (3m). See Figure 24.1-26.
Figure 24.1-26. Back-to-Back Hanger
Sway Braces
Figure 24.1-25. Single Hanger Sway brace brackets provide a provision to brace the busway run at a 45-degree angle, restricting the suspended busway from swinging. There are two types of sway brace brackets: single and back-to-back. Each sway brace comes with the hardware to mount the brace to the busway. See Figure 24.1-27.
Figure 24.1-27. Sway Braces
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 065

Physical Data
24.1-13
Busway Power Monitoring

Eatons family of IQ electronic power meters is available to monitor each run of busway. Each power meter is attached to the end cable tap box and comes installed, ready for use. The installing contractor will need to wire the CTs to the meter. CTs are included with the power meter. Each power meter comes with a highly visible LED display, showing metered values for each phase with its threeline display. This display is very easy to read, even if installed at a height or distance. Using the keypad and menus on the local display, users can display a variety of electrical system values or program the meter. Metered data may also be transmitted and congured remotely, depending upon the selected meter and options selected. Table 24.1-10. IQ Electronic Power Meters
Features Current, per phase Current demand Calculated neutral current Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) Min./max. readings (I, V) Min./max. readings (I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA) Frequency Real, reactive, apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA) Power factor, total Real, reactive, apparent power demand Real, reactive, apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, Vah) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), per phase (V, I) Set point driven alarm I/O (Digital in/digital out, analog out, KYZ out) Logging, trend, event Embeded Web server Firmware ash update Waveform display RS-485 Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII KYZ output DNP 3.0 HTTP, HTTPS SNMP SMTP NTP IQ 130 Opt Opt Opt Opt IQ 140 Opt Opt Opt Opt IQ 150 Opt Opt Opt Opt IQ 250 Opt Opt Opt IQ 260 Opt PXM2000 Opt
22 23 24 25
IQ Meter (Front) IQ Power Meter (Rear)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Physical Data Plug-In Unit Overcurrent Protective Devices
A variety of plug-in units have been designed for the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to meet multiple applications and a variety of installation conditions. Plug-in unit devices provide easy and exible access to a buildings electrical power system, while providing safe overcurrent protection to equipment and wiring. All Pow-R-Flex plug-in units are designed with the safety of the installer and user as the key criteria. The following safety features are standard for all fusible and molded-case circuit breaker plug-in units:
September 2011
Sheet 24 066
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Plug-in cable tap boxes

Plug-in cable tap boxes are used to back feed power to a run-off busway, or where equipment served by the busway is connected without overcurrent protection. Plug-in cable tap boxes t into any plug-in provision on a plug-in type busway. See Figure 24.1-30. Table 24.1-11. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Details
Catalog Number LAPTB100MG LAPTB100MGN LAPTB200MG LAPTB200MGN Ampere Rating 100 100 200 200 Mechanical Lugs (Standard) Mechanical Lugs (Metric)
31
32 33 34 35 36
Each plug-in unit ground stab makes positive contact with the busway ground (integral or internal) before the phase or neutral stabs contact the bus bars Plug-in unit molded guide tabs are provided in the stab support base. These ensure proper phase alignment and open the busway outlet shutter mechanism Each plug-in unit has an interface bracket, which prevents the unit from being installed onto or removed from the busway, while the device is in the on/closed position Each plug-in unit has a door interlock, preventing the front cover from being opened while the device is in the on/closed position and preventing accidental closing of the device while the front cover is open Line-side barriers are provided over the line-side terminal to help prevent accidental contact with line-side connections When the plug-in unit is installed, the stab-base assembly on the plug-in unit is recessed into the busway outlet cover to help seal against moisture and dust Each plug-in unit has mounting anges, which help protect the stab-base assembly and have captive hardware that bolt the unit securely to the busway
Figure 24.1-30. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Table 24.1-12. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Dimensions
Catalog Number LAPTB100MG LAPTB100MGN LAPTB200MG LAPTB200MGN A B C D
Stab Base
37 38
Figure 24.1-28. Plug-In Stab Assembly Details
Neutral
39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.1-29. Plug-In Outlet Details Figure 24.1-31. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Details
Ground Gutter Space
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 067

Physical Data
24.1-15
22 23 24
Figure 24.1-33. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit Dimensions Table 24.1-15. Breaker Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Plug-In Unit Max. Max. A Amperes Voltage 600 600 B C D E
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
LABFD 225 (F-Frame) LABJD 250 (J-Frame)
18.00 10.80 8.17 5.97 4.80 (457.2) (274.3) (207.5) (151.6) (121.9) 18.56 10.80 9.08 5.97 4.61 (471.4) (274.3) (230.6) (151.6) (117.1)
Figure 24.1-32. Plug-In Device Mounting
Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

Circuit breaker plug-in units are stock and come with the circuit breaker fully installed, ready for installation and termination. All units are three-phase with three-pole Eaton Series C molded-case circuit breakers. Table 24.1-13. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings (kA Symmetrical)
Ampere Rating 15225 15100 15150 15225 15225 70250 70250 70250 240 Vac 65 18 18 65 100 65 65 100 480 Vac 14 14 35 65 35 35 65 600 Vac 14 18 25 18 18 25 Breaker Frame ED EHD FDB FD HFD JDB JD HJD
Table 24.1-16. Breaker Plug-In Unit Physical Data

Plug-In Unit LABFD (F-Frame) LABJD (J-Frame) Mechanical Terminals Cu/Al-(1)#44/0 Cu/Al-(1)#14350 kcmil Approximate Weight lbs 25 40
Neutral
Breaker
33 34 35 36
Note: 100%-rated circuit breakers are not for use in plug-in units.
Table 24.1-14. Breaker Unit Selection Chart
LAB FDB 3100 G N

Bus Style LAB = Low ampere Breaker Frame (Ex. FD, JDB) Trip Rating (Ex. 3015, 3225) Ground Option G = Internal I = Isolated Neutral Option N = 100% N2 = Oversized
Ground
37 38
Figure 24.1-34. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit Details
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Physical Data
September 2011
Sheet 24 068
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Fusible Switch Plug-In Units

Fusible switch plug-in units are stock and come fully assembled with the switch assembly and fuse mounting base ready for installation and termination. All fusible switch plug-in units come standard with Class R fuse clips and can be eld modied for use with Class H and J fuses. Fuses are not included. Instructions for fuse base modications are shown on the data label mounted on the inside of the plug-in unit door. Table 24.1-17. Fusible Switch Horsepower and Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 30 60 100 200 30 60 100 200 Voltage 240 240 240 240 480 480 480 480 600 600 600 600 NEC Standard 3 7.5 15 25 5 15 25 50 7.5 15 30 60 Eaton Maximum 3 7.5 15 25 15 30 60 125 20 50 75 150 Fault Current 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Figure 24.1-35. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Dimensions Table 24.1-19. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Plug-In Unit LAF321R LAF361R LAF322R LAF362R LAF323R LAF363R LAF324R LAF364R Max. Amperes 30 30 60 60 100 100 200 200 Max. Voltage 240 600 240 600 240 600 240 600 A B C D E
Table 24.1-20. Fusible Plug-In Unit Physical Data

Plug-In Unit LAF321R LAF361R LAF322R Mechanical Terminals Cu-(1)#14#3 Al-(1)#12#2 Cu-(1)#14#3 Al-(1)#12#2 Cu-(1)#141/0 Al-(1)#121/0 Cu-(1)#141/0 Al-(1)#121/0 Cu-(1)#141/0 Al-(1)#121/0 Cu-(1)#4250 kcmil Al-(1)#4250 kcmil Cu-(1)#4250 Al-(1)#4250 Cu-(1)#4250 Al-(1)#4250 Approximate Weight lbs 25 25 35 35 35 35 45 45
Table 24.1-18. Fusible Unit Selection Chart
LA 3 6 4 R G N
Bus Style Neutral Option N = 100% N2 = Oversized Ground Voltage G = Integral/internal I = Internal/isolated Fuse Clips
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
LA = Low ampere Three-pole only
LAF362R LAF323R LAF363R LAF324R LAF364R
6 = 600V 2 = 200V Amperes 1 2 3 4 = 30 = 60 = 100 = 200
H, J or R
Figure 24.1-36. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Details
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 069

Physical Data
24.1-17
Surge Protective Device Plug-in Units

The Pow-R-Flex plug-in device product offering includes surge protective devices (SPD), which are ideal for buswayfed distribution systems. A transient voltage is a random high-energy, short-duration electrical anomaly. These highenergy surges can disrupt, damage, or destroy sensitive microprocessor-based equipment. Eaton has developed the SPD series of products to ensure that quality power is supplied to commercial, industrial, medical, institutional and data-center facilities. The SPD device not only protects against externally created impulse transients, such as lightning, utility capacitor switching and disturbances emitted by adjacent facilities, but also provides needed protection against internal transients. This type of transient is generated within a facilitys own distribution system. Sources of internally generated or ringwave transients are imaging equipment, variable-frequency drives, lighting dimmers, arc welders, and the switching on and off of electrical distribution equipment. The SPDs also offer units that lter repetitive electrical line noise (EMI/RFI), which is dened as any unwanted electrical signal that produces undesirable effects in the circuits of sensitive electronic equipment or disturbances that are two times peak voltage. The suppression of AC transients is accomplished through the use of thermally protected metaloxide varisters (MOVs), which provide a low-impedance path to divert surges away from loads. Electrical line noise and ringing transients are eliminated by adding ltering capacitors to the suppression device. The benets of combining SPDs and ltering are reduced MOV stress (resulting in a longer life cycle), lower letthrough voltage, better noise attenuation levels and increased reliability. Because the SPD units are directly connected to the busway, they are able to minimize let-through voltage and isolate critical loads, which are fed from a protected busway run. Due to the integrated design, the SPD plug-in units save the user wall space and greatly reduce the installed project cost. The SPD plug-in units are furnished with a breaker disconnect. For catalog numbers and selection criteria, see Table 24.1-21. Table 24.1-21. SPD Plug-In Unit Selection Chart
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Figure 24.1-37. SPD Plug-In Unit
35 36 37
LABSPD 250 480Y 2 C

38
FixedDo Not Change Voltage Code Surge Rating (kA/Phase) 50 80 100 120 160 200 250 300 400 208Y = 208Y/120V (four-wire + ground) 400Y = 400Y/230V (four-wire + ground) 480Y = 480Y/277V (four-wire + ground) 600Y = 600Y/347V (four-wire + ground) 240D = 240 Delta (three-wire + ground) 480D = 240 Delta (three-wire + ground) 600D = 240 Delta (four-wire + ground) Option Code 1 = BasicDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire. S = StandardDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm with silence button, and Form C relay contact. N = Standard + Surge CounterDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, singlecolored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm with silence button, Form C relay contact, EMI/RFI filtering providing up to 50 dB of noise attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz, and surge counter with reset button. FixedDo Not Change
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Plug-In Unit Devices
September 2011
Sheet 24 070
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Eatons unique receptacle plug-in unit design makes them the most exible receptacle units in the industry. Pow-R-Flex receptacle plug-in units come fully assembled and wired, reducing installation time. Each unit is built to order, based upon receptacle type and rating combinations. Additionally, each individual unit has been optimally phased balanced and are also optimally phased balanced for the entire run, based upon the combination of receptacle plug-in units on the run. This eliminates the need to manually phase balance during installation. They are UL 857 and CSA listed, and come in seven different styles with two different breaker options, using standard NEMA receptacle congurations. Table 24.1-22. Maximum 240V Plug-In Units
Plug-In Unit Type Single Double Quad Maximum Ampere Rating 60 120 120 Maximum Ampere Rating/Circuit 60 60 60 Number of Circuits 1 2 4 Receptacle Mounting Fixed/cord Fixed/cord Fixed/cord
Table 24.1-24. Receptacle Unit Physical Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Plug-In Unit Type Single Voltage 240 400 480 240 400 480 240 400 480 Width 8.50 (215.9) 8.50 (215.9) 8.50 (215.9) 8.50 (215.9) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) Height 11.50 (292.1) 11.50 (292.1) 11.50 (292.1) 12.25 (311.2) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 10.00 (254.0) 11.50 (292.1) 11.50 (292.1) Depth 6.50 (165.1) 6.50 (165.1) 6.50 (165.1) 6.50 (165.1) 6.50 (165.1) 6.50 (165.1) 5.50 (139.7) 7.25 (184.2) 7.25 (184.2)
Double
Quad
Table 24.1-25. Receptacle Unit Short-Circuit Withstand Rating (rms Symmetrical)

Plug-In Unit Type Single Double Quad
Breaker Type CH FD CH FD CH FD
240V 10,000A 22,000A 10,000A 22,000A 10,000A 22,000A
400V 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A
480V 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A 10,000A
25 kAIC is available for single-phase connectors at 240V.
Table 24.1-23. Maximum 400/480/600V Plug-In Units

Plug-In Unit Type Single Double Quad Maximum Ampere Rating 60 120 240 Maximum Ampere Rating/Circuit 60 60 60 Number of Circuits 1 2 4 Receptacle Mounting Cord Cord Cord
Note: For receptacle options, see receptacle selection chart.
NEMA Receptacle Congurations

Table 24.1-26. Straight-Blade Receptacles
Phase Single-phase Voltage 125V 250V 277V 250V Conguration Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Three-pole, four-wire, grounded 15A 515R 615R 715R 1515R 20A 520R 620R 720R 1520R 30A 530R 630R 1530R 50A 650R 1550R 60A 1560R
Three-phase
Available in a duplex conguration.
Table 24.1-27. Twist-Lock Receptacles

Phase Single-phase Voltage 125V 250V 277V 250V 208/120V 480/277V Conguration Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Three-pole, four-wire, grounded Three-pole, ve-wire, grounded Three-pole, ve-wire, grounded 15A L515R L615R L7-15R 20A L520R L620R L720R L1520R L2120R L2220R 30A L530R L630R L730R L1530R L2130R L2230R 50A CS6360 CS8264 CS8364 60A
Three-phase
Available in a duplex conguration. California standard receptacles.
Table 24.1-28. Pin and Sleeve Receptacles (UL and IEC 309)
Phase Single-phase Voltage 125V 250V 277V 250V 208/120V 480/277V Conguration Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Two-pole, three-wire, grounded Three-pole, four-wire, grounded Three-pole, ve-wire, grounded Three-pole, ve-wire, grounded 15A 20A P5-20C P6-20C P7-20C P15-20C P21-20C P22-20C 30A P5-30C P6-30C P7-30C P15-30C P21-30C P22-30C 50A 60A P5-60C P6-60C P7-60C P15-60C P2160C P2260C
Three-phase
43
Note: For other receptacle options, contact the factory. 480/277V receptacles may be applied at 400/230V.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 071

24.1-19
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit

The fused duplex receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-38 allows for quick standard receptacle power at any plug-in location along the busway run. There are two options. The LAFD62FD62F comes with two NEMA 5-20R, 20A duplex standard receptacles. The LAFU61FU61F comes with two NEMA L5-15R duplex twistlock receptacles. Each unit is fused protected at 20 and 15A and is 120V single-phase, three-wire.
Single Receptacle Unit (240V max.)

The single receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-39 is congured to order based upon the receptacle type and rating. These units are three- phase and can service single- or three-phase loads, 120V, 240V and 208/120V. They use Type CH plug-in (10 kAIC), singlepole, two-pole or three-pole breakers. Each unit comes with one receptacle, with the breaker sized per the receptacle rating. Each receptacle can be xed mounted to the front of the enclosure or cable mounted to a cord drop coming out of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 24.1-40. Cord drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
Double Receptacle Unit (240V max.)

The double receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-41 is congured to order based upon each receptacle type and rating. These units are three-phase and can service single- or three-phase loads, 120V, 240V and 208/120V. They use Type CH plug-in (10 kAIC), singlepole, two-pole or three-pole breakers. Each unit comes with up to two receptacles, with each breaker sized per the receptacle rating. Each receptacle can be xed mounted to the front of the enclosure or cable mounted to a cord drop coming out of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 24.1-42. Cord drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Figure 24.1-38. Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
32 33
Figure 24.1-41. 240V, Double Receptacle Unit (Fixed Mounted)
34 35 36 37 38 39
Figure 24.1-39. Single Receptacle Unit (Fixed Mounted)
Figure 24.1-42. 240V, Double Receptacle Unit (Cord Mounted) Figure 24.1-40. Single Receptacle Unit (Cord Mounted)
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Plug-In Unit Devices Quad Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
The quad receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-43 is congured to order based upon each receptacle type and rating. These units are three-phase and can service single- or three-phase loads, 120V, 240V and 208/120V. They use Type CH plug-in (10 kAIC), singlepole, two-pole or three-pole breakers. Each unit comes with up to four receptacles, with each breaker sized per the receptacle rating. Each receptacle can be xed mounted to the front of the enclosure or cable mounted to a cord drop coming out of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 24.1-44. Cord drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
September 2011
Sheet 24 072
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Single Receptacle Unit (600V max.)

The single receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-45 is congured to order based upon the receptacle type and rating. These units are three-phase and can service single- or three-phase loads up to 600V maximum (120V, 240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V, 400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type F-Frame bolt-on molded-case circuit breakers are used in single-pole, twopole or three-pole congurations. Each unit comes with one receptacle, with the breaker sized per the receptacle rating. Each receptacle is cable mounted to a cord drop coming out of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 24.1-45. Cord drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
Double Receptacle Unit (600V max.)

The double receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-46 is congured to order based upon the receptacle type and rating. These units are three-phase and can service single- or three-phase loads up to 600V maximum (120V, 240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V, 400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type F-Frame bolt-on molded-case circuit breakers are used in single-pole, twopole or three-pole congurations. Each unit comes with two receptacles, with the breakers sized per the receptacle rating. Each receptacle is cable mounted to a cord drop coming out of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 24.1-46. Cord drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
Figure 24.1-43. 240V, Quad Receptacle Unit (Fixed Mounted) Figure 24.1-46. 600V Double Receptacle Unit
Figure 24.1-45. 600V, Single Receptacle Unit
Figure 24.1-44. 240V, Quad Receptacle Unit (Cord Mounted)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 073

24.1-21
Quad Receptacle Units (600V max.)

The quad receptacle unit shown in Figure 24.1-47 is congured to order based upon the receptacle type and rating. These units are three-phase and can service single- or three-phase loads up to 600V maximum (120V, 240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V, 400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type F-Frame bolt-on molded-case circuit breakers are used in single-pole, twopole or three-pole congurations. Each unit comes with up to four receptacles, with the breakers sized per the receptacle rating. Each receptacle is cable mounted to a cord drop coming out of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 24.1-47. Cord drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645 for cord drop applications.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Figure 24.1-47. 600V, Quad Receptacle Unit
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Installation Drawing Information
September 2011
Sheet 24 074
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Installation Drawing Information
2.00 (0 6m)
2.00
14 00
2.00 (0.6m) A07 2.00 (0.6m)
2.00 (0.6m) 2.00 (0.6m)
Style # Or S.O. # LVB01234-A01 LVB01234-A02 LVB01234-A03 BVD0892G11 BVD1274G12 LVB01234-A07 BVD7156G08
Req. 1 1 3 2 8 2 1
Figure 24.1-48. Sample Installation Drawing
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
After the layout approval process, installation drawings will be provided just prior to shipment of the busway from the factory. A sample is illustrated in Figure 24.1-48. The drawings will contain a complete layout of the entire busway installation and a bill of material that includes the following: 1. The item number of each section, which can be correlated with the layout drawing. 2. A description of each section. 3. The style number of each section, which can be correlated to the nameplate information on each section. 4. The quantity of each style number required.
5. The height, width and weight (per foot) of each ampere rating. 6. Location of F markings on the busway. 7. Fitting reference drawings. 8. Electrical equipment/switchgear locations and orientation. 9. Wall and oor locations. 10. The length of each section. The installer should review the installation drawings prior to and during the installation process. Please note that plug-in units are generally not shown on the installation drawings. The installer will also receive installation instruction leaets, and operation and maintenance manuals with the drawings.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 075
BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage 100-Ampere Busway

General Description
24.2-1
100A Busway
Construction
Enclosure
The busway housing is made of 20 gauge steel and is painted ANSI 61 gray using a powder coat paint process. The enclosure includes 10 plug-in outlets per 10 foot (3m) length (ve per side). Each plug-in outlet provides complete polarization of the plug-in outlet, ensuring proper phasing, see Figure 24.2-1. All plug-in outlets are usable at the same time. The plug-in outlet is enclosed by a removable steel knockout cover. Replacement covers are available for outlets no longer being used.
ensure a good low resistance joint between electrical conductors of adjacent sections. The conductors are rmly supported by molded insulators on alternate sides of the busway. Insulators are the type through which it is possible to fully isolate the stabs, as well as afford extra protection in the event of stresses due to fault. Insulators are spaced to allow mounting of the plug-in units opposite to each other without interference.
22 23 24 25 26 27
100A Busway
General Description
Eatons 100A busway is an excellent solution for supplying multiple small blocks of power for any normal commercial and industrial power system. 100A busway is practical for small shops, laboratories, classrooms and light manufacturing. The exibility of 100A busway will reduce cost by reducing installation time compared to cable and conduit installations. Eaton 100A busway consists of a durable steel housing and silver-plated copper rods for maximum use and efciency. The complete product offering consists of straight sections of plug-in busway, ttings, accessories and plug-in units. 100A busway can be used for three-phase 600V systems and single-phase 240V systems.
Conductors
Electrical conductors are round silverplated copper rods 9/32 in diameter. The conductors are enclosed between two steel housings that are riveted together in a solid assembly. See Figure 24.2-2 for cross sectional detail. Conductor joints are made by means of boltless pressure clips, which require no assembly or adjustment by the installer. The busway is not dependent upon the cover screws of the enclosure for maintaining the proper mechanical pressure to
C Phase
Neutral
28 29
B Phase
30
A Phase
31
Figure 24.2-1. Polarizing Plug Outlet
32 33 34 35 36 37
Standards
Eaton 100A busway meets the requirements of NEMA, UL 857, ANSI and IEEE, and is manufactured in an ISO 9001 certied facility. The busway is designed for 100A capacity and is available for single-phase threewire, three-phase three-wire, and three-phase four-wire applications. A 50% internal copper ground bar is provided as standard. The short-circuit withstand rating is14 kAIC at 3 cycles.
5.00 (127.0)
38 39 40
4.00 (101.6) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4)
41 42 43
Figure 24.2-2. Typical Joint Detail
CA08104001E
24.2-2 BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage 100-Ampere Busway

General Description Joint Connections
100A joints are designed for quick and easy assembly by simply snapping on section of busway to another and then securing them by running up the captive cover screws. Electrical connection is made by special high-pressure spring clips that rmly engage the conductors. The enclosure connection is made with a scarf lap type joint secured by captive cover screws. See typical joint detail in Figure 24.2-3. Table 24.2-1. Plug-In Outlets
Outlet Cover
September 2011
Sheet 24 076
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Enclosure
Bus Rod Number of Outlets 10 6 4 2 2 Insulator
Straight Length Feet (m) 10 (3.0) 5 (1.5) 3 (0.9) 2 (0.6) 1 (0.3)
Weight Lbs (kg) 29.50 (13.4) 14.75 (6.7) 8.85 (4.0) 5.90 (2.7) 3.75 (1.7)
Table 24.2-2. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop The table below gives line-to-line voltage drop at rated current and varying power factors.
Percent Power Factor 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Voltage Drop 0.35 0.56 0.77 0.98 1.19 1.39 1.59 1.79 2.00 2.20 2.50 Enclosure
Figure 24.2-3. Cross-Sectional Detail
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 077

Construction
24.2-3
Straight Lengths
100A busway comes in lengths of 10 feet, 5 feet, 3 feet, 2 feet and 1 foot (3m, 1.5m, 0.9m, 0.6m and 0.3m) with plug-in outlets included in all lengths. Table 24.2-1 shows the total plug-in outlets for each length. All plug-in outlets may be used simultaneously. Plug-in outlets are made usable by the removal of a steel knockout cover. Replacement outlet covers are available for covering exposed outlets when a plug-in unit is relocated.
22 23 24 25 26 27
26.25 (666.8) 26.25 (666.8) 26.25 (666.8) 6.00 (152.4)
9.00 (228.6)
26.25 (666.8)
28 29
9.00 (228.6) 22.50 (571.5) 22.50 (571.5) 6.00 (152.4)
30 31 32
9.00 (228.6)
21.00 (533.4)
6.00 (152.4)
33 34 35
18.00 (457.2)
6.00 (152.4)
36 37
4.81 (122.2) 7.19 (182.6)
38 39
Figure 24.2-4. Typical Straight Length Detail
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Construction Fittings
There are three basic ttings to meet every application need. These include elbows, tees and cable tap boxes and are described in the following pages. When making eld measurements and layouts, it should be remembered that dimensions of ttings are given from the centerline of the busway. Fittings in relationship to straight lengths are described as upward, downward, forward and rearward. This relationship is shown in Figure 24.2-5.
September 2011
Sheet 24 078
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90 degree changes in the direction/routing of the busway runs. There are four types available with each leg of the elbow being 10 inches (254 mm) long, measured from the centerline of the busway to the centerline of the joint. See Figure 24.2-6.
Forward Upward
Rearward
Downward
Figure 24.2-5. Fitting Relationship
C L Joint
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
C L Joint 10.00 (254.0)
C L Joint
34 35 36 37
C L Joint C L Joint 10.00 (254.0) Upward Elbow Downward Elbow
38 39 40 41 42
C L Joint C L Joint 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0) C L Joint
43
Forward Elbow Rearward Elbow
Figure 24.2-6. Elbows

September 2011
Sheet 24 079

Construction
24.2-5
Tees
Tees are busway ttings used for making T connections to the busway. The four standard tees are: upward, downward, forward and rearward. Each leg of a tee is 10 inches (254 mm) long, measured from the centerline of the busway to the centerline of the joint.
22 23 24 25
C LJoint 10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
C L Joint
26 27 28
10.00 (254.0)
C L Joint C L Joint 10.00 (254.0)
29 30 31
C L Joint
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
32
Downward Tee
Upward Tee
33 34
10.00 (254.0)
C L Joint
C L Joint
35
10.00 (254.0)
36
C L Joint 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) C L Joint C L Joint 10.00 (254.0) C L Joint 10.00 (254.0)
37 38 39 40
Forward Tee Rearward Tee
41
Figure 24.2-7. Tees
42 43
CA08104001E

Construction Cable Tap Boxes
The standard end cable tap box mounts at either the left or the right end of a busway straight length. Knockouts are provided sized at 1.25, 1.50 and 2.00 inches (31.8, 38.1 and 50.8 mm). The center cable tap box allows busway to be attached to the right and left of the tap box. Knockout conguration is the same as the end cable tap box. Also available is a plug-in cable tap box with stabs for mounting at a plug-in outlet anywhere along the busway run. Knockouts are provided sized at 0.75, 1.00, 1.25, 1.50 and 2.00 inches (19.1, 25.4, 31.8, 38.1 and 50.8 mm). All tap boxes are rated 100A and include lugs for accepting either copper or aluminum cable.
September 2011
Sheet 24 080
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
10.19 (258.8) 4.13 (104.9)
5.69 (144.5)
6.06 (154.0)
4.13 (104.9)
5.38 (136.7)
7.50 (190.5) Neutral 2.63 (66.8) Plug-in Cable Tap Box
End Cable Tap Box
6.00 (152.4) 12.00 (304.8) 6.00 (152.4)
Center Cable Tap Box
38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 24.2-8. Cable Tap Boxes
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 24 081

Construction
24.2-7
End Closer
End closers are used for closing off the end of a busway run. An end closer will end at 4 inches (101.6 mm) to the length of the busway run, measured from the centerline of the joint to the end of the end closer.
C Joint L
22 23
4.00 (101.6)
24 25 26 27 28
Wall Flange
Wall anges are used to t around the busway and close off the opening made to allow the busway run to pass through the wall. Wall anges are for cosmetic purposes only and, by themselves, do not provide any type of vapor or re barrier. Wall openings should be cut 0.50 inch (0.5 mm) wider and taller than the busway.
Hangers
Hangers are included with the busway; one for each 10-foot (3m) length of the busway run. The busway is suitable for supporting on 10-foot (3m) centers when mounted edgewise. The edgewise hanger easily slips over the busway rmly holding the busway on edge. The C clamp hanger is used for wall mounting or sway bracing. Customer supplied angle iron must be used in conjunction with the C clamp. Figure 24.2-9. End Closer
3.75 (95.3)
29 30 31
7.25 (184.2)
32 33
7.25 (184.2)
34
3.75 (95.3)
35 36
37
1.00 (25.4) Angle Iron 0.75 (19.1)
38 39
6.00 (152.4) 5.44 (138.2)
40 41 42
Wall Hanger
1.00 (25.4) Edgewise Hanger
43
Figure 24.2-11. Hangers
CA08104001E

Plug-In Devices
September 2011
Sheet 24 082
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Plug-in Devices
Plug-in devices plug in through the insulated outlets of the busway enclosure and stab onto the busway conductors. They are available with both fusible and circuit breaker overcurrent protection. Grounds for all plug-in devices are ordered and shipped separately.
5.69 (144.5) 15.13 (384.3)
Fusible Plug-in Units

Fusible plug-in units are available in 240V and 600V service ratings. Both offer 30, 60 and 100 ampere current ratings with provisions for Class H fuses. See Figure 24.2-12.
4.00 (101.6)
Circuit Breaker Plug-in Units

Circuit breaker plug-in units are available with provisions for HQP circuit breakers rated 240V, 10100A, and FD circuit breakers rated 600V, 15100A. Enclosures have provisions to accept any combination of single-, two- and three-pole circuit breakers up to three poles. An external operating handle is available for hook stick or chain operation. See Figure 24.2-13.
PINFD
Neutral
5.69 (144.5)
7.63 (193.8)

The receptacle plug-in unit includes provisions for three HQP or FD frame circuit breaker poles and provisions for up to three conventional single gang outlets and blank covers to ll unused spaces. The receptacle plug-in unit does not come with circuit breakers, outlets or wiring. See Figure 24.2-14.
3.13 (79.5)
PINQP
Neutral
Figure 24.2-13. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit

22.25 (565.2) 8.69 (221.0)
15.38 (390.7) 8.00 (203.2)
FAN363
LCNFD
4.69 (119.1)
39
Figure 24.2-12. Fusible Plug-In Unit
13.25 (336.6) 3.13 (79.5)
3.69 (93.7)
40 41
LCNQP
42 43
Figure 24.2-14. Receptacle Plug-In Units
5.69 (144.5)
September 2011
Sheet 24 083

Product Selection
24.2-9
Product Selection
Table 24.2-3. 100A BuswayCopper (Includes 50% Internal Ground Bar)
Description Three-Phase, Three-Wire 600V Max. Catalog Number Three-Phase, Four-Wire FN 277/480V Catalog Number CST14G CST145G CST143G CST142G CST141G CFE14G CRE14G CUE14G CDE14G CFT14G CRT14G CUT14G CDT14G Single-Phase, Three-Wire 120/240V Catalog Number CST13NG CST13N5G CST13N3G CST13N2G CST13N1G CFE13NG CRE13NG CUE13NG CDE13NG CFT13NG CRT13NG CUT13NG CDT13NG
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Straight LengthsFeet (m)

10 (3) 5 (1.5) 3 (0.9) 2 (0.6) 1 (0.3) CST13G CST135G CST133G CST132G CST131G CFE13G CRE13G CUE13G CDE13G CFT13G CRT13G CUT13G CDT13G
Elbows
Forward Rearward Upward Downward
Tees
Forward Rearward Upward Downward
Table 24.2-4. Cable Tap Boxes

Description Three-Wire or Four-Wire Catalog Number Plug-in End Center PIB14 EB14 CBIB14G Ground (If Required) Catalog Number PIGS100 GL100 (Included)
30 31 32 33 34
Table 24.2-5. Accessories

Description End closer Outlet cover Edgwise hanger C clamp hanger Slip-on wall ange Catalog Number EC1 OC1 EH1 FH1 WF1
Table 24.2-6. Fusible Plug-In Units

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 30 60 100 Voltage Rating 240 240 240 600 600 600 Fusible Enclosure Catalog Number FAN321 FAN322 FAN323 FAN361 FAN362 FAN363 Ground (If Required) Catalog Number PIGS100 PIGS100 PIGS100 PIGS100 PIGS100 PIGS100
35 36 37 38
Table 24.2-7. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units

Ampere Rating Breaker Frame Circuit Breaker Enclosure Catalog Number 1550 15100 QUICKLAG HQP FD, EHD, FDB PINQP PINFD Receptacle Enclosure Catalog Number LCNQP LCNFD Ground (If Required) Catalog Number PIGS100 PIGS100 External Handle (Required for Hook-Stick Operation) Catalog Number HMQP HMFD
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 24 084
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
Transfer Switches
September 2011
Sheet 25 001
25.0-1
Transfer Switches
Contents
Transfer Switches Transfer Switch Equipment Transfer SwitchGeneral Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2 Transfer SwitchApplication Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-4 ATC Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-6 Contactor-Based Designs Automatic Open Transition, 401200A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-1 Automatic Closed Transition, 401200A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-4 Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 401200A, Dual Drawout . . . . . . . 25.1-7 Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 401200A, Fixed Bypass . . . . . . . . 25.1-12 Breaker-Based Designs Molded-Case SwitchesManual Wallmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1 Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic Wallmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-4 Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic Wallmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-7 Magnum-Based Designs Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-1 Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-3 Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-3 Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-10 ATC Controllers Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-1 ATC-100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-5 ATC-300 Controller and ATC-300+ Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-7 ATC-600 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-9 ATC-800 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-12 Standard and Optional Features Standard and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-1 Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-13 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-18 Appendix AkW Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-19 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Breaker-Based Transfer Switches. . . . . . . . Section 16496A Section 26 36 23.11 Contractor-Based Transfer Switches . . . . . Section 16496G Section 26 36 23.23 Manual and Non-Auto Transfer Switches . Section 16496C Section 26 36 23.15 Maintenance Bypass Transfer Switches . . Section 16496E Section 26 36 23.17
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Automatic Transfer Switch Family
CA08104001E
25.0-2 Transfer Switches Transfer Switch Equipment

Automatic Transfer SwitchesGeneral Description
September 2011
Sheet 25 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Automatic Transfer Switches
The three basic components of a typical transfer switch are: 1. Power switching device to shift the load circuits to and from the power source. 2. Transfer Logic Controller to monitor the condition of the power sources and provide the control signals to the power switching device and initiate the back generator startup. 3. Control power source to supply operational power to the controller and switching device. All Eaton transfer switches are designed to meet the requirements set forth by UL 1008 and are 100% rated switches. Eaton builds contactorbased design switches, molded-case switch (or breaker-based) design switches, and Magnum power-case switch design switches.
UtilityGenerator
Transfer switches are traditionally applied between a utility and a generator set for emergency and standby power systems.
Utility Service Disconnect Generator Breaker
ATS
Automatic Transfer Switch Family
General Description
Eatons automatic transfer switches are reliable, rugged, versatile and compact assemblies for transferring essential loads and electrical distribution systems from one power source to another. Transfer switches are normally supplied in stand-alone enclosures. Eaton has the capability to integrate transfer switches into other Eaton distribution assemblies. See the following table for a list of integrated solutions. Table 25.0-1. Product Description
Product Type Magnum DS switchgear Pow-R-Line switchboards Motor control centers Panelboards Tab Reference 20 21 29 22
Load
Figure 25.0-1. Standard Application UtilityGenerator
GeneratorGenerator
Transfer switches are sometimes applied between two generator sets for prime power use, often in remote installations. In such applications, source power is periodically alternated between the generator sets to equally share run-time.
UL 1008 Endurance Testing

The importance of specifying a UL 1008 transfer switch can be seen in Table 25.0-2. When specifying any UL 1008 transfer switch, you can be assured that the switch has met and passed the following endurance testing.
UL 1008 Life Expectancy

Transfer switch applications typically require a plant exerciser once a week or once a month. Table 25.0-3 demonstrates the life expectancy operating the UL 1008 switch once a week for the life of the switch. Table 25.0-2. UL 1008 Endurance Testing
ATS Rating (Amperes) 0300 301400 401800 8011600 16014000 Rate of With Without Total Operation Current Current Per Minute Generator Breaker
G Generator Breaker
Note: For information on Transfer Switch Panels, refer to CA08100002E, Residential & Light Commercial Catalog, Volume 1, Tab 3.
ATS
Design Description
A transfer switch is a critical component of any emergency or standby power system. When the normal (preferred) source of power is lost, a transfer switch quickly and safely shifts the load circuit from the normal source of power to the emergency (alternate) source of power. This permits critical loads to continue running with minimal or no outage. After the normal source of power has been restored, the retransfer process returns the load circuit to the normal power source.
Load 1 1 1 0.5 0.25 6000 4000 2000 1500 1000 1000 1500 2000 6000 4000 3000 3000 3000
Figure 25.0-2. Standard Application GeneratorGenerator
Table 25.0-3. UL 1008 Life Expectancy

ATS Rating (Amperes) Minimum Life Operations Expectancy Per Year in Years With Current Applied
52 52 52 52 52 115 76 38 28 19
Life Expectancy in Years Without Current Applied

115 76 57 57 57
0300 301400 401800 8011600 16014000
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 003
Transfer Switches Transfer Switch Equipment

25.0-3
Transfer Switch Types

Although an automatic transfer is the most common type of transfer, transfer switches have the following types.
Mounting Type
Fixed-mount switchMost transfer switches use a xed-mounted power device. For contactor-based designs and breaker-based designs, the transfer switch contactor or moldedcase switch is a xed-mounted design. Individual switching devices may not be removed from the circuit without breaking hard connections to bus bars. Drawout mount switchBoth contactor-based and Magnum-based transfer switches have optional drawout capability. Magnum ATSs have optional drawout of both Source 1 and Source 2 Magnum power case switch or breaker. Bypass isolation switches have drawout ATS switches. In addition the bypass isolation contactor design has an optional dual drawout design. Magnum bypass isolation transfer switches are supplied as standard with drawout of all the power-case switches.
Switch Types
Manual transferThis type of transfer is a non-automatic transfer switch manually initiated and manually operated. There is no motor operator or solenoid to initiate the transfer. The operator needs to open the enclosure door and operate the manual handle. Manual transfer is available only on a breaker-based design. Service entrance ratings are not available on manual transfer breaker-based designs. Non-automatic transferThis type of transfer is manually initiated, but electrically operated via the solenoid in a contactor-based design and the motor operator in a breaker-based design. Automatic transferThis type of transfer takes place automatically per the programmable settings in the ATS controller. The ATS controller senses source availability and when the programmed conditions are met, initiates a command to start the transfer including the generator start command (when transferring from a utility to a generator source). An automatic transfer switch can be congured to perform a utility-toutility transfer or a generator-togenerator transfer (provided the ATS controller has this capability). Bypass isolation transfer switch This type of transfer switch includes an automatic transfer switch and also includes the bypass switch that allows the capability to transfer the load to the bypass switch without interrupting the power. Maintenance bypass transfer switch A maintenance bypass transfer switch is a manually (manually initiated and electrically operated) initiated transfer switch used for specic applications for a UPS. Soft load transfer switchThis is an automatic closed transition transfer switch with active control of the generator voltage and governor frequency from the transfer switch controller.
Delayed transitionThis is a breakbefore-make or open transition that also has a center off or neutral position with a programmable time delay setting for the neutral position. The three position transfer switch is either closed on Source 1, closed on Source 2, or in a center off, neutral position (not closed on either source). Delayed transition with load voltage decayThis is a delayed transition with the optional feature to delay in the neutral position to point where the load voltage decays to a programmable voltage level. When the load voltage level reaches the programmable set point, the transfer from the neutral position initiates. Closed transitionThis is a makebefore-break transfer. Both sources are connected to the load for less than 100ms before the break occurs. The two power sources have to be in synchronism and be good sources for the transfer to take place. These programmable settings for relative phase angle difference, frequency and voltage difference are made in the ATS controller. Soft load transitionThis is a closed transition type transfer with the soft load ATS controller having the ability to take active control of the generator voltage and frequency. This control is used to synchronize the generator source to the utility source.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Transition Type
Open transitionThis is a breakbefore-make transfer. There is a denite break in power as the load s taken off one source and connected to the other source. Open in-phase transitionThis is a break-before-make transfer. There is a denite break in power as the load is taken off one source and connected to the other source. The ATS controller allows the transfer only when the phase difference between the two sources is near zero. The two position transfer switch is closed on Source 1 or closed on Source 2. Table 25.0-4. Transition Types
Transition Contactor-Based Two Position Open Open in-phase Delayed time delay neutral Delayed load voltage decay Closed Soft load Yes Yes No No Yes No
Breaker-Based
Magnum-Based
Three Position Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Installation Types
EmergencyA system legally required and classied as emergency by municipal, state, federal or other governmental agencies. Automatically transfers from the normal source to the emergency source and cannot exceed 10 seconds and occurs automatically. Meets the requirements of NEC (NFPA-70 Article 700). Legally requiredLegally required systems are those that are so classied by municipal, state, federal or other governmental agencies. Automatically supply power to selected loads, other than those already classied as emergency. The transfer from normal power to the emergency power cannot exceed 60 seconds and occurs automatically. OptionalGenerally, supplied to selected loads either automatically or manually. There is no time limit associated with the transfer. Article 702.2 is the only article that allows manual transfer switches.
Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches
Eaton provides UL 1008 service entrance rated transfer switches using the breaker-based designs or the Magnum power-case switch designs. Modifying the molded-case switch in the transfer switch by adding trip units and optional ground fault, along with adding the service entrance option eliminates the need for separate upstream disconnect devices and their respective power interconnections. This means the automatic transfer switch (ATS) is installed directly at the point of service entrance, saving valuable space and cost.
Built-in Protection
All Eaton molded-case switches are self protected, such that under extreme fault conditions, the switch will open before destroying itself. This feature allows Eaton to offer Maintenance-Free Contacts on the molded-case transfer switch. The molded-case switches have instantaneous magnetic trip units installed in each switch. These trips are not accessible once installed by the factory to eliminate eld tapering. The trips are set to a minimum of 12 to 15 times the rated current of the molded-case device, well above any coordination set points. This means they will not interfere with the normal operation of the distribution system.
Typical Transfer Switch Installation Utility Service
Transfer Switch Installation Rated For Service Entrance Utility Service
Service Disconnect G G Generator Breaker ATS
Service Disconnect Generator Breaker
ATS
Load
Load
Figure 25.0-3. Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches
Example: 400A ATS With 500A T/M Breaker 400 FLA x 1.25 = 500A Breaker Compare 400A ATS and 500A LD Breaker 500A HLD Breaker 5 Breaker Trips ATS Ok Misconception: Breaker Type Switches Susceptible ATS Trips to Nuisance Tripping. Reality: Upstream Breaker Will Trip Before ATS MCS Trips When Overcurrent is <7200A 6 7 8 9 10 400A ATS
Time (Min.)
Breaker Ok 1 2 3 4 5 Current x 1000
Figure 25.0-4. Built-in Protection
Magnetic Trip 12 x frame rating.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 005

25.0-5
Separately Derived and Non-Separately Derived Systems (Switching the Neutral)

Separately derived systems are discussed in Article 250.20(D) of the NEC. The code says that a separately derived system is where the alternate source is provided with a grounded conductor (neutral) that is not solidly interconnected with the service supplied grounded conductor (neutral). The NEC does not mandate the need for creating a separately derived system, but does provide guidance on how it is done. Basically the ATS will switch the neutral (fourpole ATS) to keep the two systems totally isolated. This may be done to allow Ground Fault Sensing to work properly, but a separately derived system may be created for other reasons left up to the engineer. If the desire is to bond the generator neutral to ground at the generator, then a separately derived system is being created, and the neutral in the four-pole ATS must be switched. Both the Eaton breaker-based and contactor-based type ATS in all ratings are available with an optional switched neutral. This can be done for either single-phase (three-pole) or threephase (four-pole) applications. The switched neutral pole is fully rated, meaning it has Withstand, Interrupt and Closing ratings identical to the power contacts. The neutral pole is operated on a common shaft with the power contacts, thereby ensuring simultaneous opening and closing of the neutral. Eaton provides a fully rated switched neutral or fourth pole.
Separately Service Derived Equipment System Bonding Jumper G Equipment N Grounding Grounding Conductor Electrode N Conductor N Three-Pole Transfer Switch N Load Grounding Electrode Nearby
Service Equipment
Not a Separately Derived System Equipment Grounding Conductor N N
Breaker-Based Versus Contactor-Based Considerations

Eaton builds both molded-case switch (breaker-based) designs up to 1000A and contactor-based designs up to 1200A. Both designs are 100% rated designs, have the UL 1008 approval and carry the UL 1008 label. Application considerations may favor one design over the other. Low amperage applications requiring a high withstand rating are more readily met with the breaker-based design. The breaker-based design meets 65 kA withstand ratings for many of the sizes. Applications requiring a service entrance rating are more readily met with a breaker-based design. An overcurrent trip is added to the molded-case switch without increasing the footprint and the entire SE rated switch is UL 1008 approved. The Eaton breaker-based designs are inherently delayed transition type and this transition type is more suited to highly inductive loads, dual utility applications, and where older AFDs may be used downstream. Contactor-based designs tend to have a smaller footprint due to less moving parts and a smaller power contactor. Contactor-based ATSs can be applied for those applications not requiring a higher withstand rating. Applications requiring open in-phase transfer are more suited to two-position contactorbased designs. A two-position contactorbased design will operate with a shorter dead bus time than a comparable breaker-based design. This shorter dead bus time enables the ATS controller to perform the open in-phase transfer. In applications where delayed transition is required, a three-position contactorbased design may be used.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
G N
Two-Pole Transfer Switch N Load
Figure 25.0-6. Non-Separately Derived System
Short-Time Ratings
The Eaton Magnum ATS is UL listed with a UL 1008 short-time rating. This is a true withstand rating, with a viability temperature rise test performed at the end of the short-circuit fault per UL 1008. The short-time rating has three components: voltage, current and time. These are published in the literature on the ATS, and the individual rating components cannot be exceeded. (In other words, it is not acceptable to allow double the current rating for half the time.) The components are absolute, and the ATS must be applied downstream from a breaker that will not allow those ratings to be exceeded. Eaton has had short-time ratings on ATS products since 2002.
Surge Protection
Eaton can supply, and in fact, highly recommends the use of an SPD (surge protective device) on Service Equipment Rated transfer Switches. The SPDs should only be applied on the utility side of the ATS and should be ordered for the correct system voltage on which they are to be used. SPDs are rated in kA, which is simply a longevity measure. The kA rating on an SPD has nothing to do with available fault current. Eaton recommends that for services 800A and above, a minimum 250 kA rated SPD be supplied. For applications below 800A, a 160 kA device is suggested. Of course there are other factors that may affect the decision as to the rating, and as always, the nal decision is up to the engineer. And remember that an SPD is a transient/surge protective device; it is NOT an overvoltage protective device. An overvoltage condition (such as the backup generator overvoltage) will damage the SPD.
Selective coordination of emergency and legally required systems may involve intentional delay of breakers upstream of the ATS. In these applications, the ATS withstand may require short-time ratings. Eatons Magnum ATS is rated for 85 kAIC up to 30 cycles.
Figure 25.0-5. Separately Derived System
CA08104001E

Selection Guide
September 2011
Sheet 25 006
22 23 24 25 26 27
Transfer Switch Selection Guide

Table 25.0-5. Transfer Switch Product FamilyContactor-Based Design
Description Switch Type Transition Type Open Contactor-based transfer switch design Automatic non-automatic
Delayed
Closed
Controller Type
Mounting Type
Voltage
Current Amperes 40 80 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 40 80 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200
No. of Poles 2, 3, 4
NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 4X NEMA 12
ATC-100 Fixed ATC-300 ATC-800
See Page 25.1-1
600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120
28 29 30 31
Contactor-based transfer switch design
Automatic
ATC-800
Fixed
2, 3, 4
Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
See Page 25.1-4
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Contactor-based bypass isolation transfer switch design
Automatic bypass isolation
ATC-300 ATC-800
Drawout
100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200
2, 3, 4
Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
See Page 25.1-7 Contactor-based bypass isolation transfer switch design Automatic bypass isolation

ATC-300 ATC-800
Fixed
See Page 25.1-12
600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120
100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200
2, 3, 4
Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
Up to 400A only.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 007

Selection Guide
25.0-7
Table 25.0-6. Transfer Switch Product FamilyBreaker-Based Design

Description Switch Type Transition Type Open Molded-case switch-based design Manual
Delayed
Closed
Controller Type No controller
Mounting Type Fixed
Voltage
Current Amperes 30 70 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000
NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R NEMA 4 NEMA 4X
22 23 24 25 26
See Page 25.2-1 Molded-case switch-based design Non-automatic

600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 480 480/277 240 240/120 208/120
No controller
Fixed
30 70 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000
2, 3, 4
Open NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R NEMA 4 NEMA 4X
27 28 29 30
See Page 25.2-4 Molded-case switch-based design Automatic

ATC-100 Fixed ATC-300 ATC-800
30 70 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000
2, 3, 4
31 32 33 34
See Page 25.2-7 Maintenance bypass Manual
No controller
Fixed
100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000
2, 3, 4
35 36 37
See Page 25.1-8

Up to 400A only. Contact factory for availability.
38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Product Selection
Table 25.0-7. Transfer Switch Product FamilyMagnum-Based Design
Description Switch Type Transition Type Open Delayed
September 2011
Sheet 25 008
22 23 24 25 26
Closed
Controller Type ATC-600 ATC-800
Mounting Type Fixed or drawout
Voltage
Current Amperes 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 3200 4000 5000 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 3200 4000 5000 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000
NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1behind NEMA 1thru NEMA 3R
Power-case switch Magnum-based design
Automatic
See Page 25.3-1
600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Power-case switch Magnum-based design
Non-automatic
No controller
Fixed or drawout
2, 3, 4
Open NEMA 1behind NEMA 1thru NEMA 3R
See Page 25.3-1 Power-case switch Magnum- Automatic bypass isolation based design bypass isolation

ATC-600 ATC-800
Drawout
2, 3, 4
NEMA 1behind NEMA 1thru NEMA 3R
See Page 25.3-10

Drawout only. Up to 3200A.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 009
Transfer Switches Contactor-Based Design

Automatic Open Transition, 401200AGeneral Description
25.1-1
Automatic Open Transition, 401200A
General Description
The automatic open transition contactor-based transfer switch is the most basic design that will provide a fully functioning automatic transfer switch. The power switching operation of Eatons contactor-based transfer switches may be separated into the following key categories of: Open in-phase transitionbreakbefore-make operation using an in-phase monitor for source synchronization Open delayed transitionbreakbefore-make operation using a programmable time delay (true neutral position)
Features
Standard Features with ATC-300 Controller
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Contactor-Based ATS with ATC-300+ Controller
The open in-phase transition uses a two-position mechanism and the open delayed transition uses a three-position mechanism. The mechanism used to operate the Eaton electrical contactor is a momentarily energized solenoid consisting of a stationary core and a moving core that is magnetically driven by an electrical coil. The mechanism can be electrically and mechanically operated. The design is such that the mechanism is inherently interlocked so that the device cannot be closed on the Source 1 and Source 2 at the same time under any circumstances. When switching from Source 1 to Source 2, or Source 2 to Source 1, the mechanism will only allow a breakbefore-make operation. These contactor-based designs can be applied with the ATC-100 controller up to 400A. The ATC-300 controller can be applied for applications 401200A. Applications needing communication capability require the ATC-800 controller.
Auxiliary relay contacts: Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC Source 2 present 2NO and 2NC Switch position indication contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase rotation protection Three-phase voltage unbalance Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC (with three-position mechanism) Go to emergency (Source 2) Seven eld-programmable time delays LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostics and Help message display Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton Programmable plant exerciser OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Available surge suppression device for power/controller, engine start circuit, phone and cable connections Space heater with thermostat Ammeterload side Power quality metering Steel cover for controller Open in-phase transition or time delay neutral transition ATC-100 controller available ATC-800 controller available
Optional Features
An automatic open transition transfer switch may be used for those applications where emergency backup power is required, but a momentary loss of power is acceptable on the retransfer from emergency to normal.
Commercial Design Highlights

UL 1008 front access High withstand and closing ratings Compact design
CA08104001E
25.1-2 Transfer Switches Contactor-Based Design

Automatic Transition, 401200ATechnical Data
September 2011
Sheet 25 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Technical Data
Table 25.1-1. UL 1008 Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
UL 1008 Ampere Rating 40 80 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 480V Any Breaker 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 480V Specic Breaker 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 600V Any Breaker 10 10 10 22 22 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 600V Specic Breaker 22 22 22 35 35 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse Rating (kA) 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Test Voltage 480 480 480 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Fuse Type RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T Maximum Fuse Amperes 200 200 200 400 400 600 600 600 1600 1600 1600 1600
Table 25.1-2. UL 1008 Ratings

Mounting Type Fixed Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 40 80 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 No. of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4X
200A ATS with ATC-300+ Controller

Normal Power Source Logic Panel
Manual Operating Mechanism
Transfer Mechanism Emergency Power Source Load Lugs Voltage Selection and Transformer Panel
Neutral Connections
Power Panel
1200A ATS with ATC-300+ Controller
42 43
Typical Contactor-Based ATS 100400A
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 011
Transfer Switches Contactor-Based Designs

Automatic Transition, 401200ADimensions
25.1-3
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 25.1-3. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 401200A Open Transition (See Figure 25.1-1 and Figure 25.1-2)
Ampere Rating Enclosure A (Height) 38.68 (982.5) 38.68 (982.5) 38.68 (982.5) 48.74 (1237.9) 48.74 (1237.9) 79.41 (2017.0) 79.41 (2017.0) B (Width) 18.31 (465.1) 18.31 (465.1) 18.31 (465.1) 18.81 (477.8) 18.81 (477.8) 25.25 (641.4) three-pole 29.19 (741.4) C (Depth) 13.34 (338.8) 13.34 (338.8) 13.34 (338.8) 13.84 (351.5) 13.84 (351.5) 22.46 (570.5) 22.46 (570.5) Bolt Pattern G (Horizontal) H (Vertical) 10.25 (260.4) 10.25 (260.4) 10.25 (260.4) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) 18.25 (463.6) 22.19 (563.6) 37.38 (949.5) 37.38 (949.5) 37.38 (949.5) 51.10 (1298.0) 51.10 (1298.0) N/A N/A Standard Terminals Load Side, Normal and Standby Source (1) #142/0 (1) #142/0 (1) #6300 kcmil (1) #6300 kcmil (2) #3/0250 kcmil (4) 1/0750 kcmil (4) 1/0750 kcmil Neutral Connection (1) #141/0 (1) #141/0 (3) 1/0250 kcmil (3) 1/0250 kcmil (6) 250500 kcmil Weight in Lbs (kg) 164 (74) 164 (74) 164 (74) 260 (118) 260 (118)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B G C
40100 at 480V 40100 at 600V 150200 at 480V 150200 at 600V 225400 at 480V 6001200 at 480V 2251200 at 600V
(12) 1/0750 kcmil 600 (272) (12) 1/0750 kcmil 600 (272) three-pole 650 (295) four-pole
Wallmount. Floor standingheight dimension includes the bottom bracket.
B G 13.29 (337.6) 7.75 (196.8) 6.11 (155.2)
C Neutral 68.59 (1742.2) Normal 13.13 (333.5) H A
Top of Lugs on Power Panel
30 31 32 33 34
55.12 (1400.0)
Front View
Side View
35 36 37 38
Emergency 43.23 (1098.1)
Figure 25.1-2. Automatic, Non-Automatic Up to 400A Wallmount Outline NEMA1 and NEMA 3R
28.09 (713.5) 25.69 (652.5)
C
Load 10.37 (263.4) 3.94 (100.0) 3.94 (100.0) 3.68 (93.5) 9.60 (43.9) 13.13 (333.5)
39 40 41 42 43
Front View
Side View
Figure 25.1-1. Automatic, Non-Automatic 6001200A Outline NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
CA08104001E
25.1-4 Transfer Switches Contactor-Based Designs

Automatic Transition, 401200AGeneral Description
September 2011
Sheet 25 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Automatic Closed Transition, 401200A
A transfer switch designed for closed transition has make-before-break contacts that require the normal and alternate sources to be synchronized. The source contacts on Eatons CTC8 will parallel for 100 ms or less. The ATC-800 provides all-phase undervoltage, underfrequency, and overvoltage and overfrequency protection as a standard. Consult with the local utility company for permission and to verify the protection requirements as each utility may have different rules regarding closed transition applications. Protective relays may be available as an option upon request.
Features
Standard Features with ATC-800 Controller
Closed transition controls

Contactor-Based ATS with ATC-800 Controller
General Description
Eatons closed transition contactorbased automatic transfer switch (CTC8) is designed to avoid intentional interruption of power when both sources of power are available by momentarily paralleling both sources. The ATC-800 is a comprehensive, multi-function, microprocessorbased controller, offering extensive monitoring, status reporting and transfer control operation. The make-before-break contact sequence coupled with Eatons ATC-800 provides a transfer switch that is useful in critical standby power applications available from 40 to 1200A.
The CTC8 accomplishes the closed transition transfer by monitoring the voltage and frequency set point conditions of both power sources. Once the set point conditions are met, the ATC-800 controller will start the closed transition synchronization timer (TSCT). The TSCT is adjustable from 160 minutes in duration. This duration is the time during which the ATC-800 controller will monitor the phase angles to anticipate when they will be within 8 electrical degrees. The closed transition scheme is anticipatory, allowing the close contacts signal to be initiated before the sources are exactly in phase. If the TSCT times out and the transfer switch has not reached synchronization, the transfer switch will remain connected to the current power source and a failure to transfer alarm will be displayed. The transfer switch can also be equipped with an optional open transition transfer method for situations where synchronization is not possible, but a transfer is required. One of the following transition features can be selected: Closed transition only Closed transition with default to load voltage decay Closed transition with default to time delay neutral
Auxiliary relay contacts: Source 1 present 1NO and 1NC Source 2 present 1NO and 1NC Switch position indication contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Go to emergency (Source 2) Seven eld-programmable time delays LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostics and Help message display Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton Programmable plant exerciser OFF, daily, 7-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Multi-Tap transformer Available surge suppression device for power/controller, engine start circuit, phone and cable connections Space heater with thermostat Ammeterload side Power quality metering Steel cover for controller Three-phase rotation protection Three-phase voltage unbalance Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC (with three-position mechanism)
Optional Features
Commercial Design Highlights

UL 1008 front access High withstand and closing ratings Compact design

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 013

Automatic Transition, 401200ATechnical Data
25.1-5
Technical Data
UL 1008 Ampere Rating 40 80 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 480V Any Breaker 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 480V Specic Breaker 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 600V Any Breaker 10 10 10 22 22 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 600V Specic Breaker 22 22 22 35 35 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse Rating (kA) 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Test Voltage 480 480 480 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Fuse Type RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T Maximum Fuse Amperes 200 200 200 400 400 600 600 600 1600 1600 1600 1600
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Current Amperes 40 80 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 No. of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12
Normal Power Source

Controller Mounting Type Fixed Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120
29 30 31 32 33 34
Multi-Tap Transformer
Load Lugs
Emergency Power Source
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Typical Contactor-Based ATC-800 Controller
CA08104001E

Automatic Transition, 401200ADimensions
September 2011
Sheet 25 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 25.1-6. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 401200A Closed Transition (See Figure 25.1-3 and Figure 25.1-4)
Ampere Rating Enclosure A (Height) B (Width) C (Depth) 17.18 (436.4) 17.18 (436.4) 17.18 (436.4) 14.72 (373.9) Bolt Pattern G (Horizontal) 10.25 (260.4) 10.25 (260.4) 10.25 (260.4) 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2) N/A N/A H (Vertical) 37.38 (949.5) 37.38 (949.5) Standard Terminals Load Side, Normal and Standby Source (1) #142/0 (1) #6250 kcmil Neutral Connection (3) #142/0 (3) #141/0 (3) 1/0250 kcmil (6) 250500 kcmil (6) 250500 kcmil (12) 1/0750 kcmil (12) 1/0750 kcmil Weight in Lbs (kg) 190 (86) 210 (95) 210 (95) 420 (191) 420 (191) 800 (363) 800 (363)
40100 at 480V 40100 at 600V 150200 at 480V 150200 at 600V 225400 at 480V 2251200 at 600V 6001200 at 480V
52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0) 52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0) 52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0) 71.02 (1803.9) 31.11 (790.2)
37.38 (949.5) (1) #6250 kcmil 47.84 (1215.1) (2) 3/0250 kcmil 47.84 (1215.1) (2) 3/0250 kcmil N/A (4) 1/0750 cu/al N/A (4) 1/0750 cu/al
71.02 (1803.9) 31.11 (790.2) 14.72 (373.9) 90.00 (2286.0) 46.00 (1168.4) 32.00 (812.8) 90.00 (2286.0) 46.00 (1168.4) 32.00 (812.8)
For NEMA 3R, add 14.60-inch (370.8 mm) to depth.
4.50 (114.3)
Emergency Power Cable Normal Power Cable Connections Connections
Neutral Cable Connections

B 2.64 (67.1) TYP
A 41.96 (1065.8) Emerg. Power 18.60 (472.4) Load Power 49.00 (1244.6)
A
68.99 (1752.3)
63.74 (1619.0)
B Front View
C Side View (with right side removed)
15.66 (397.8) 19.19 (487.4)
25.40 (645.2) 23.00 (584.2)
Transformer
Figure 25.1-3. Automatic Up to 400A Wallmount

For switched neutral applications, connect to terminals marked NN, EN and LN. Neutral assembly will not be provided. Transformer pack is not included with 240/120V, single-phase or 208/120V, three-phase systems.
C Load Power Cable Connections
11.20 (284.5)
3.94 (100.1) TYP
Side View (with left side removed)
Front View
Figure 25.1-4. Automatic 6001200AWallmount
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 015
25.1-7
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual DrawoutGeneral Description
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual Drawout
Features
Industrial Design Highlights

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
General Description
A bypass isolation transfer switch may be used to provide emergency power to life safety and other critical loads where maintenance of the main transfer switch, without interruption of power to the load, is either desirable or required. The bypass isolation transfer switch may be provided with either open or closed transition type. Open delayed transitionbreakbefore-make operation using a programmable time delay (true neutral position) Closed transitionmake-beforebreak operation that requires the normal and alternate sources to be synchronized

Front access is a standard feature on all ratings Entry: Top, bottom or both Isolated compartments Improved safety: Isolated compartments with barriers Single motion rack-out with doors closed Ability to test power switching elements during drawout process Dual ATS capabilitybypass contactor can be controlled by the ATS controller in the bypass mode of operation Installation exibility: Field entry/exit locations can be modied in the eld Interchangeable drawout contactors Field-selectable multi-tap transformer panel permits operation on a wide range of system voltages Dual drawout Drawout cassette design on both ATS and bypass No service interruption in bypass to the same source Source available contacts: Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC Source 2 present 2NO and 2NC Switch position contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase rotation protection (ATC-300 only) Three-phase voltage unbalance/ loss (ATC-300 only)
Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO and 1NC (open transition only) Go to Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Field-programmable time delays: Time delay engine start: 01200 seconds Time delay normal to emergency: 01800 seconds Time delay emergency to normal: 01800 seconds Time delay engine cooldown: 01800 seconds Time delay emergency failure: 06 seconds LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostics and Help menu display Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton Programmable plant exerciser OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Available surge protection device (SPD) for power/controller, engine start circuit, phone and cable connections Automatic transfer operation with selectable (via programming) nonautomatic or automatic retransfer with fail-safe Space heater with thermostat Digital multi-function power quality metering Stainless steel cover for controller Load sequencing contacts
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Optional Features
Standard Features

Eatons automatic transfer switch is designed to provide unmatched performance, reliability and versatility for critical standby power applications. The switches can be equipped with the ATC-300 or ATC-800 controllers to match your application needs.
CA08104001E

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual DrawoutFeatures Bypass Isolation Switch Features Front Access
Front access is a standard feature. Source 1 (NORMAL) Source and Load connections are set up as standard top entry and Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Source connections as bottom entry. These connections are located in their own separate compartments. These connections can be relocated in the eld if necessary.
September 2011
Sheet 25 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Improved Safety
The unique Eaton design includes separation between control and power components. The ATS and bypass isolation contactors are mounted in separate compartments with protective barriers between them. This design prevents the possibility of contact with the rear-mounted power connections to the contactors. In addition, the top and bottom entry have separate compartment doors.
Ease of Transfer
The Eaton design allows the operator to make a quick and simple transfer from the ATS power contactor to the bypass contactor by initiating the electrically operated transfer via a two-position switch. Door-mounted indicating lights conrm that a successful transfer has taken place.
Dual ATS Capability

The controller on conventional bypass isolation switches only controls the ATS contactor. The Eaton design allows the switch controller to remain active in both the ATS and bypass modes, thus providing control to either contactor. This ability of the controller to remain active and control the bypass isolation contactor provides N+1 redundancy of a second fully functioning ATS, a feature unique to Eaton.
The industry-exclusive multi-tap system voltage selector allows the transfer switch to be applied on most system voltages by proper insertion of the selector plug.
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power contactor is easily initiated and controlled via door-mounted controls. Once the transfer to the bypass contactor is complete, the ATS contactor is easily racked out with the compartment door closed. The ATS contactor may then be tested in the racked out position.
Drawout Contactors
The ATS and the bypass drawout cassette power contactor designs are identical and interchangeable. This standard feature allows the user the ability to withdraw, maintain or swap contactor assemblies, providing redundancy of ATS and bypass functions from one contactor assembly to the other.
Source 1 (NORMAL) Connections
Load Connections
Drawout Bypass Contactor Front Access for Top or Bottom Entry; Terminals can be Relocated in the Field
Separate Doors for ATS and Bypass Compartments
Drawout ATS Contactor Completely Removed
Multi-Tap Transformer with Quick Connect Plug
Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Connections
Bypass Isolation Switch Components
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 017

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual DrawoutTechnical Data
25.1-9
Technical Data
UL 1008 Ampere Rating 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 480V Any Breaker 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 480V Specic Breaker 50 50 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 600V Any Breaker 10 22 22 42 42 42 50 50 50 50 600V Specic Breaker 35 35 35 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse Rating (kA) 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Test Voltage 480 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Fuse Type RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T Maximum Fuse Amperes 200 400 400 600 600 600 1600 1600 1600 1600
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
(1) ATS (2)

Shown as Normal Operation Bypass Source 1 (NORMAL) Bypass Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Mounting Type Drawout Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 No. of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
Bypass Source 1 (NORMAL) Available (3) (4) Load Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Available
35
ATS Source 1 (NORMAL) ATS Locked In ATS Isolated (Flashing: ATS Removed) Door Open ATS Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 25.1-5. Bypass Isolation Diagram

UL 1008 listed CSA C22.2 No. 178 certied
CA08104001E

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 100400A, Dual DrawoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 25 018
22 23 24

55.15 (1400.8) 25.20 (640.1) 8.37 (212.6) 12.00 (304.8) 28.74 (730.0)
2.40 (61.0) 5.23 (132.8)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
B A Emergency Power Cable Connections 18.28 (464.3)
Cable Compartment 2.98 (75.7) 24.05 (610.9)
Load Cable Connections Normal Power Cable Connections
Note: Source 1, Source 2 and load connections can be relocated in the eld.
C
39 40 41 42 43
Figure 25.1-6. Bypass Isolation-Based Drawing NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R Table 25.1-9. Isolation-Based Transfer Switch 100400A
C-Frame Fixed Bypass Enclosure Switch Rating Amperes 100200 at 480 Vac 225400 at 480 Vac 100200 at 600 Vac
Standard Terminals Width Depth 29.30 (744.2) 29.30 (744.2) 29.30 (744.2) Line Side (Normal and Emergency) (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al (1) #6350 Cu/Al Load (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al (1) #6350 Cu/Al Neutral
Height
Weight Lbs (kg)
78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0)
(3) 3/0750 Cu/Al 625 NEMA 1 (12) 3/0-750 Cu/Al 626 NEMA 1 (3) #6350 Cu/Al 627 NEMA 1
For NEMA 3R, add 15.50 inches (393.7 mm) to depth.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 019

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 6001200A, Dual DrawoutDimensions
25.1-11

Cable Entry Top & Bottom
22 23 24
FRONT
CG
25 26
17.86 (453.6)
14.35 (364.5)
2.71 (68.8)
34.05 (864.9) Top View 40.00 (1016.0) Load Connections
2.97 (75.4)
36.80 (934.7)
27
65.13 (1654.3) Plan View
28 29 30
28.97 (735.8)
18.50 (470.0)
31 32
Source 1 Normal Connections
33 34
90.08 (2288.0)
CG
35 36
Source 2 Emergency Connections Neutral Connections
37 38 39
Side View (With Right Side Removed)
18.50 (470.0)
2.00 (50.8)
Front View
Note: Source 1, Source 2 and load connections can be relocated from top to bottom in the eld.
40 41
Figure 25.1-7. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R Table 25.1-10. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 6001200A 480 Vac, 2251200A 600 Vac
Switch Rating Amperes Enclosure Height 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) Width 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 46.00 (1168.4) Depth 32.00 (812.8) 47.50 (1026.5) 32.00 (812.8) 47.50 (1206.5) Standard Terminals Line Side (Normal and Emergency) (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al Load (12) 3/0750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0750 Cu/Al Neutral (3) #142/0 Cu/Al (3) #142/0 Cu/Al (12) 3/0750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0750 Cu/Al Weight Lbs (kg)
42 43
6001200 at 480 Vac 6001200 at 480 Vac 2251200 at 600 Vac 2251200 at 600 Vac
1800 (817) NEMA 1 1850 (840) NEMA 3R 1800 NEMA 1 1850 NEMA 3R
NEMA 3R dimensionsa front 15.50-inch (393.7 mm) front extension section is added for NEMA 3R.
CA08104001E

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed BypassGeneral Description
September 2011
Sheet 25 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed Bypass
Features

General Description
A bypass isolation transfer switch may be used to provide emergency power to life safety and other critical loads where maintenance of the main transfer switch, without interruption of power to the load, is either desirable or required. The bypass isolation transfer switch may be provided with either open or closed transition type.
Front access is a standard feature on all ratings Entry: Must be all top or all bottom Isolated compartments Improved safety: Isolated compartments with barriers Single motion rack-out with doors closed Ability to test power switching elements during drawout process Optional dual ATS capability bypass contactor can be controlled by the ATS controller in the bypass mode of operation Installation exibility: Entry/exit locations are either all top or all bottomfactory congurable only Interchangeable drawout ATS contactor Field-selectable multi-tap transformer panel permits operation on a wide range of system voltages Fixed-mount bypass contactor Drawout cassette design on ATS and xed-mount on bypass No service interruption in bypass to the same source Source available contacts: Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC Source 2 present 2NO and 2NC Switch position contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase rotation protection (ATC-300 only) Three-phase voltage unbalance/ loss (ATC-300 only)
Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO and 1NC (open transition only) Go to Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Field-programmable time delays: Time delay engine start: 01200 seconds Time delay normal to emergency: 01800 seconds Time delay emergency to normal: 01800 seconds Time delay engine cooldown: 01800 seconds Time delay emergency failure: 06 seconds LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostics and Help menu display Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton Programmable plant exerciser OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe (ATC-300 only) Available surge protection device (SPD) for power/controller, engine start circuit, phone and cable connections Automatic transfer operation with selectable (via programming) non-automatic or automatic retransfer with fail-safe Space heater with thermostat Digital multi-function power quality metering Stainless steel cover for controller Load sequencing contacts Dual ATS
Optional Features
Standard Features

Open delayed transitionbreakbefore-make operation using a programmable time delay (true neutral position) Closed transitionmake-beforebreak operation that requires the normal and alternate sources to be synchronized
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Eatons automatic transfer switch is designed to provide unmatched performance, reliability and versatility for critical standby power applications. The switches can be equipped with the ATC-300 or ATC-800 controllers to match your application needs.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 021

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed BypassFeatures
25.1-13
Bypass Isolation Switch Features Front Access

Front access is a standard feature. Source 1 (NORMAL), Source 2 (EMERGENCY) and Load connections are set up as either all top or all bottom entry. These connections are located in their own separate compartments.
Improved Safety
The unique Eaton design includes separation between control and power components. The ATS and bypass isolation contactors are mounted in separate compartments with protective barriers between them. This design prevents the possibility of contact with the rear-mounted power connections to the contactors. In addition, the top and bottom entry have separate compartment doors.
Ease of Transfer
The Eaton design allows the operator to make a quick and simple transfer from the ATS power contactor to the bypass contactor by initiating the electrically operated transfer via a two-position switch. Door-mounted indicating lights conrm that a successful transfer has taken place.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
The industry-exclusive multi-tap system voltage selector allows the transfer switch to be applied on most system voltages by proper insertion of the selector plug.
Optional Dual ATS Capability

The controller on conventional bypass isolation switches only controls the ATS contactor. The Eaton design allows the switch controller to remain active in both the ATS and bypass modes, thus providing control to either contactor. This ability of the controller to remain active and control the bypass isolation contactor provides N+1 redundancy of a second fully functioning ATS, a feature unique to Eaton.
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power contactor is easily initiated and controlled via door-mounted controls. Once the transfer to the bypass contactor is complete, the ATS contactor is easily racked out with the compartment door closed. The ATS contactor may then be tested in the isolated position.
Drawout ATS and Fixed-Mounted Bypass

The ATS is designed as a drawout with the contactor mounted in a cassette with wheels. This allows the user the ability to withdraw, maintain, inspect and re-insert the ATS. The bypass contactor is designed as a xed-mounted design in its own separate compartment.
Fixed-Mounted Bypass Contactor Front Access for Either All Top or All Bottom Entry
35 36 37 38
Drawout ATS Contactor Completely Removed
39
Separate Doors for ATS and Bypass Compartments
40 41
Bypass IsolationFixed Bypass Components
42 43
CA08104001E

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed BypassTechnical Data
September 2011
Sheet 25 022
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Technical Data
UL 1008 Ampere Rating 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 480V Any Breaker 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 480V Specic Breaker 50 50 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 600V Any Breaker 22 22 22 42 42 42 50 50 50 50 600V Specic Breaker 35 35 35 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse Rating (kA) 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Test Voltage 480 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Fuse Type RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 RK5 L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T L, R, J, T Maximum Fuse Amperes 200 400 400 600 600 600 1600 1600 1600 1600

Shown as Normal Operation Bypass Source 1 (NORMAL) Bypass Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Mounting Type Fixed Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 100 150 200 225 260 400 600 800 1000 1200 No. of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
Bypass
31 32 33 34
Source 1 (NORMAL) Available
(3)
(4) Load
Source 2 (EMERGENCY) Available
(1)
ATS
(2)
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATS Source 1 (NORMAL) ATS Locked In ATS Isolated (Flashing: ATS Removed) Door Open ATS Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Figure 25.1-8. Bypass Isolation
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 023

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 100400A, Fixed BypassDimensions
25.1-15

55.15 (1400.8) 25.20 (640.1) 6.15 (156.2) 13.22 (335.8)
22
28.74 (730.0)
2.40 (61.0) 5.23 (132.8)
23 24 25 26
18.28 (464.3)
2.98 (75.7)
Cable Compartment 24.05 (610.9)
27 28
Source 1 Normal Connections Electrical Panel Not Shown for Clarity
29 30 31 32 33
34
Load Connections
35 36
Source 2 Emergency Connections B Note: Source 1 Normal, Source 2 Emergency and load connections are NOT factory or field reconfigurable. Sufficient wireway and bending space is available to come in from either direction. C
37 38 39 40
Figure 25.1-9. Bypass Isolation-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R Table 25.1-13. Isolation-Based Transfer Switch 100400A
C-Frame Fixed Bypass Switch Ampere Rating 100200 at 480/600V 225400 at 480V
Enclosure Height 78.07 (1983.0) 78.07 (1983.0) Width 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) Depth
Bolt Pattern G (Horizontal) N/A N/A H (Vertical) N/A N/A
Standard Terminals Line Side (Normal) (1) #6350 Cu/Al (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al Load (1) #6350 Cu/Al (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al Neutral (3) #6350 Cu/Al (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al
Weight in Lbs (kg)
41 42
29.30 (744.2) 29.30 (744.2)
625 (284) 625 (284)
43
For NEMA 3R, add 15.48 inches (393.2 mm) to depth.
CA08104001E

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 4001200A, Fixed BypassDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 25 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

14.61 (371.1) 3.24 (82.3)
40.00 (1016.0) 2.40 (61.0) 9.24 (234.7) 18.28 (464.3) 2.00 (50.8) 5.22 (132.6) 2.40 (61.0)
Cable Entry Top
34.04 (864.6)
28.99 (736.3)
35.20 (894.1) Top View
36.80 (934.7)
65.47 (1662.9) Plan View
90.00 (2286.0)
Source 2 Emergency Connections
Source 1 Normal Connections 40.00 (1016.0) Front View
Note: S1 Normal, S2 Emergency and load connections must be either ALL Top or ALL Bottom and are NOT field reconfigurable.
Load Connections 28.99 (736.3) Side View
Figure 25.1-10. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R Table 25.1-14. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 1001200A
Switch Ampere Rating 100200 100200 4001200 4001200
Enclosure Height 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) Width 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) Depth 28.99 (736.3) 44.47 (1129.5) 28.99 (736.3) 44.47 (1129.5)
Standard Terminals Line Side (Normal) (1) #6250 Cu/Al (1) #6250 Cu/Al (2) 3/0750 Cu/Al (2) 3/0750 Cu/Al Load (1) #6250 Cu/Al (1) #6250 Cu/Al (2) 3/0750 Cu/Al (2) 3/0750 Cu/Al Neutral (3) #6250 Cu/Al (3) #6250 Cu/Al (12) 3/0750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
Weight in Lbs (kg) 1750 (795) NEMA 1 1850 (840) NEMA 3R 1800 (817) NEMA 1 1850 (840) NEMA 3R
NEMA 3R dimensions. If seismic mounting brackets are required, then the width will be 46.00 inches (1168.4 mm).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 025
Transfer Switches Breaker-Based Designs

Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountGeneral Description
25.2-1
Molded-Case Switches Manual Wallmount
General Description
Eatons wallmount manually operated transfer switches are designed for a variety of standby power applications for critical loads. In the event of a primary power source interruption, the user can manually transfer the load circuits to the standby power source. Once primary power has been restored, the user can manually transfer the load circuits back to the primary power source.
Features and Benets

Features
Molded-case switch power contact assemblies Positive mechanical interlocking Permanently afxed manual operating handle
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Benets
High withstand, totally enclosed for maximum arc suppression and isolation during power transfer Optional trip units offer system overcurrent protection Prevents the paralleling of two sources of power Permits safe and convenient manual transfer of power
Manual transfer switches cover applications ranging from 30 to 1000A through 600 Vac for standard manual congurations and open transition. Manual transfer switches may be applied for those application where a manually initiated and manually operated transfer is suitable. The front door of the switch must be opened to operate the manual handle. The design comes standard with a deadfront design, allowing safe manual transfer under load. Applications requiring the manual operation to be initiated without opening the door need to select a non-automatic transfer switch. Should an application require a service entrance rating, then a non-automatic or automatic design needs to be selected.

Complies with UL 1008 and UL 489 standards Meets American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) approval
Manual Switch with Door Closed Must Open Door to Engage the Manual Handle
Seismic Qualication
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
25.2-2 Transfer Switches Breaker-Based Designs

Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountTechnical Data
September 2011
Sheet 25 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Technical Data
Table 25.2-1. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for Power Cable Connections
Switch Ampere Rating 30100 150225 225300 400 Breaker Frame HFD HFD HKD HLD Line Side (Normal Load and Standby Connection Source) (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #3350 (1) 4/0600 (1) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #6350 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 Neutral Connection (3) #141/0 (3) #4300 (3) #4350 (6) 250350 (6) 250350 (12) 4/0500 (3) 3/0400 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500
Table 25.2-2. Transfer Switch RatingsSystems Coordination InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
Standard UL 1008 3-CycleHorizontal and Vertical Industrial ATS Ampere Rating Any Breaker Rating 240V 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 65 65 480V 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 50 600V 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Ratings When Used With Upstream Fuse (kA) Maximum Fuse Rating 200 200 200 400 400 400 400 600 800/1200 1200/1600 1600 Fuse Type J,T J,T J,T J,T J,T J,T J,T J,T J,T L L 600V 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100/200 100/200 200
30 70 100 150 200 225 300 400 600 800 1000
600 HLD 600 HMDL 600 (four-pole) NB 800 800 1000
HMDL HNB HNB
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
For maximum breaker ratings in circuits when the transfer switch is evaluated as a Motor Branch Circuit Conductor, refer to NEC Section 430.25 for sizing. Class RK5 fuse with 100 kA rating. Four-pole units rated 35 kA.
Table 25.2-3. Wallmount Transfer Switch Ratings

Mounting Type Manual Handle Fixed Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 30 70 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 No. of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R NEMA 4 NEMA 4X
Deadfront
Manual Switch with Door Open Manually Initiated and Manually Operated Note: If a service entrance rating is required, then a non-automatic type switch must be selected. Service entrance ratings are not available on a manual transfer switch.
Manual Transfer Switch Shown without Deadfront
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 027

Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountDimensions
25.2-3
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm). For Table 25.2-4Table 25.2-6, refer to Figure 25.2-1 and Figure 25.2-2. Table 25.2-4. 301000A Type MTVX
Switch Type Enclosure A Height
HKD (150225A) HKD (300A) HLD (400A) HLD (400A) HLD (600A) HLD (600A) HMDL (600A) HMDL (800A) NB (8001000A)

22 23
Weight Lbs (kg)
Gutter Space B Width

20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6)
Bolt Pattern F Bending

10.59 (269.0) 13.59 (345.2) 10.54 (267.7) 11.85 (301.0) 10.54 (267.7) 10.54 (267.7) 17.73 (450.3) 17.73 (450.3) 17.58 (446.5)
Standard Terminals H Vertical

45.50 (1155.7) 53.50 (1358.9) 61.48 (1561.6) 50.48 (1282.2) 61.48 (1561.6) 61.48 (1561.6) 75.15 (1908.8) 75.15 (1908.8) 75.15 (1908.8)
C Depth
18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3)
D Width
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
E Depth
4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6)
G Horizontal
11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
Line
(1) #3350 (1) #3350 (1) 4/0600 (2) 3/0350 (2) 3/0350
Load
(1) #6350 (1) #6350 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500
Neutral
(3) #4350 (3) #4350 (6) 250350 (6) 250350 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 305 (138) 395 (179) 395 (179) 395 (179) 395 (179) 395 (179) 510 (232) 510 (232) 540 (245)
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
48.00 (1219.2) 56.00 (1422.4) 64.00 (1625.6) 53.00 (1346.2) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 76.74 (1949.2) 76.74 (1949.2) 76.74 (1949.2)
(2) 400500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500
Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes. Alternate line terminals.
Note: Dimensions are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes.
Table 25.2-5. 30150A Type MTHXFD Manual

Dimensions A B C D E F G H Weight Lbs (kg)
Table 25.2-6. Power Panel and Transformer Panel

Power Panel Type Height
11.00 (279.4) 24.50 (622.3) 26.00 (660.4) 36.25 (920.8) 36.25 (920.8) 22.00 (558.8) 28.63 (727.2)
Width
17.00 (431.8) 11.88 (301.8) 16.88 (428.8) 16.88 (428.8) 16.88 (428.8) 16.50 (419.1) 8.25 (209.6)
Depth
6.81 (173.0) 17.50 (444.5) 17.50 (444.5) 17.50 (444.5) 19.00 (482.6) 6.50 (165.1) 5.50 (139.7)
32 33 34 35 36 37
F
Power Panel
HFD HKD HLD HMDL NB
22.88 13.13 22.74 22.62 24.50 9.78 10.28 32.31 143 (581.2) (333.5) (577.6) (574.5) (622.3) (248.4) (261.1) (820.7) (65)
A 5.00 (127.0) B
2.00 (50.8) Latch Open 0.75 (19.1) Latch Closed
Transformer Panel
HFD HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB
B G
D C E
38
D
1.75 (44.5)
H A
39 40 41
Power Panel
Gutter Space
Transformer Panel
Logic Panel
H 1.25 (31.8) F G
Top View
Front View
Side View
42 43
Figure 25.2-2. Dimensions Figure 25.2-1. Dimensions
CA08104001E

Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountGeneral Description
September 2011
Sheet 25 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Molded-Case Switches Non-Automatic Wallmount
General Description
Eatons wallmount non-automatic transfer switches are designed for a variety of standby power applications for critical loads. In the event of a primary power source interruption, the user can manually transfer the load circuits to the standby power source through the use of an external pushbutton. Once primary power has been restored, the user can manually transfer the load circuits back to the primary power source through the use of an external pushbutton.
Features and Benets

Features
Molded-case switch power contact assemblies Positive mechanical and electrical interlocking Permanently afxed manual operating handle Pushbutton operation
Benets
High withstand, totally enclosed for maximum arc suppression and isolation during power transfer Optional trip units offer system overcurrent protection Prevents the paralleling of two sources of power Permits safe and convenient manual transfer of power under load via external pushbutton initiated operation
Non-automatic transfer switches cover applications ranging from 30 to 1000A through 600 Vac for manual congurations, open transition, standard or service entrance.
Non-Automatic Wallmount
Non-automatic transfer switches are manually initiated, but electrically operated designs. Front door-mounted controls allow the operator to initiate the transfer. Overcurrent trips may be added to the design for either or both the normal and emergency source. Service entrance ratings are available.

Complies with UL 1008 and UL 489 standards Meets American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) approval
Seismic Qualication
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 029

Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountTechnical Data
25.2-5
Technical Data
Switch Breaker Line Side (Normal Ampere Rating Frame and Standby Source) 30100 150225 225300 400 600 600 HFD HFD HKD HLD HLD HMDL (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #3350 (1) 4/0600 (1) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 Load Neutral Connection Connection (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #6350 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 (3) #141/0 (3) #4300 (3) #4350 (6) 250350 (6) 250350 (12) 4/0500 (3) 3/0400 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500
Table 25.2-8. Transfer Switch RatingsSystems Coordination InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
Standard UL 1008 Three-CycleHorizontal and Vertical Industrial ATS Ampere Rating Any Breaker Rating 240V 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 65 65 480V 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 50 600V 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Ratings When Used with Upstream Fuse (kA) Maximum Fuse Rating 200 200 200 400 400 400 400 600 800/1200 1200/1600 1600 Fuse Type J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T L L 600V
22 23 24
30 70 100 150 200 225 300 400 600 800 1000
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100/200 100/200 200
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
600 (four-pole) NB 800 HMDL 800 HNB 1000
HNB
For maximum breaker ratings in circuits when the transfer switch is evaluated as a Motor Branch Circuit Conductor, refer to NEC Section 430.25 for sizing. Class RK5 fuse with 100 kA rating. Four-pole units rated 35 kA.
Table 25.2-9. Non-Automatic Wallmount Transfer Switch Ratings

Device Panel Control Switch, Service Entrance Keyed Switch and Indication Lights Service Entrance Label (Optional) Mounting Type Fixed Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 30 70 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000 No. of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R NEMA 4 NEMA 4X
Non-Automatic Switch with Doors Closed Note: Optional service entrance rating shown for this photo.
Non-Automatic Transfer Switch

Device panel shows controls to initiate the manual transfer and control indicating lights. In addition, an optional service entrance rating may be specied. Keyed switch is mounted on the device panel.
CA08104001E

Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 25 030
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Table 25.2-10. 301000A Types NTHE, NTVE (See Figure 25.2-3)
Switch Type Enclosure A Height
Gutter Space B Width 20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) C Depth 17.22 (437.0) 17.22 (437.0) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3) D Width 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) E Depth 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) F Bending 6.22 (157.9) 6.22 (157.9) 10.59 (269.0) 13.59 (345.2) 10.54 (267.7) 11.85 (301.0) 10.54 (267.7) 10.54 (267.7) 17.73 (450.3) 17.73 (450.3) 17.58 (446.5)
Bolt Pattern G Horizontal 10.75 (273.0) 10.75 (273.0) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) H Vertical 45.24 (1049.1) 45.24 (1049.1) 45.50 (1155.7) 53.50 (1358.9) 61.48 (1561.6) 50.48 (1282.2) 61.48 (1561.6) 61.48 (1561.6) 75.15 (1908.8) 75.15 (1908.8) 75.15 (1908.8)
Standard Terminals Line (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #3350 (1) #3350 (1) 4/0600 (2) 3/0350 (2) 3/0350 Load (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #6350 (1) #6350 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 Neutral (3) #141/0 (3) #4300 (3) #4350 (3) #4350 (6) 250350 (6) 250350 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500
Weight Lbs (kg)
HFD (30100A)
47.74 (1213.0) 47.74 (1213.0)
227 (103) 227 (103) 305 (138) 395 (179) 395 (179) 395 (179) 395 (179) 395 (179) 510 (232) 510 (232) 540 (245)
HFD (150A)
HKD (150225A) 48.00 (1219.2) HKD (300A) HLD (400A) HLD (400A) HLD (600A) HLD (600A) HMDL (600A) HMDL (800A) 56.00 (1422.4) 64.00 (1625.6) 53.00 (1346.2) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 76.74 (1949.2) 76.74 (1949.2)
(2) 400500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500
NB (8001000A) 76.74 (1949.2)

Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes. NTHE with multi-tap voltage selection panel. Alternate line terminals.
Table 25.2-11. Power Panel and Transformer Panel

D Gutter Space Transformer Panel Logic Panel E Power Panel Type Height Width Depth
Power Panel
HFD HKD HLD HMDL NB 11.00 (279.4) 24.50 (622.3) 26.00 (660.4) 36.25 (920.8) 36.25 (920.8) 22.00 (558.8) 28.63 (727.2) 17.00 (431.8) 11.88 (301.8) 16.88 (428.8) 16.88 (428.8) 16.88 (428.8) 16.50 (419.1) 8.25 (209.6) 6.81 (173.0) 17.50 (444.5) 17.50 (444.5) 17.50 (444.5) 19.00 (482.6) 6.50 (165.1) 5.50 (139.7)
Power Panel
Transformer Panel
B G T op of Lugs on Power Panel C HFD HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB
38 39 40 41 42 43
Front View Side View H A
Figure 25.2-3. Dimensions

September 2011
Sheet 25 031

Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountGeneral Description
25.2-7
Molded-Case Switches Automatic Wallmount

Double-throw, mechanically interlocked transfer mechanism High withstand and closing ratings
Optional Features

Standard Features
Automatic Wallmount Transfer Switch
General Description
Eatons wallmount transfer switches are designed for a variety of standby power applications for critical loads. They provide exibility, reliability and value in a compact package. In the event of a primary power source interruption, a transfer switch provides an effective means to transfer the load circuits to an alternate power source while reducing the possibility of injury or property damage. Wallmount transfer switches meet or exceed all industry standards for endurance, reliability and performance. These breaker-based designs can be applied with the ATC-100 (up to 400A), ATC-300+ or ATC-600 controllers.
Auxiliary relay contacts: Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC Source 2 present 2NO and 2NC Switch position indication contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase rotation protection Three-phase voltage unbalance/loss Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC Go to emergency (Source 2) Seven eld-programmable time delays LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostic and Help message display Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton Programmable plant exerciser OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Safe manual operation under full load with permanently afxed operating handle
Suitable for use as service equipment in the standard enclosure size Available SPD for power/controller, engine start circuit, phone and cable connections Integrated distribution panels Field-selectable multi-tap transformer panel permits operation on a wide range of system voltages Integral overcurrent protection Not available on contactor transfer switch Space heater with thermostat Ammeterload side Stainless steel cover for controller
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Seismic Qualication
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Suitable for emergency and standby systems (all loads).
CA08104001E

Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountFeatures
September 2011
Sheet 25 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Source 1 and Load Power Cable Connections Control Service Disconnect (Service Equipment Rated Switches Only) Surge Suppression Device (Optional) Permanently Afxed Manual Transfer Handle Provides Safe Manual Transfer Under Full Load
Automatic Transfer Controller (ATC-300+)

Monitors Power Sources Initiates Power Transfers
Customer Control Connections Service Disconnect Switch (Keyed) (Service Equipment Rated Switches Only)
Power Switching Panel (With Deadfront Cover Installed)
Source 2 Power Cable Connections
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Eatons Superior Design Transfer Switch Characteristics Unmatched Performance and Versatility
Eatons family of wallmount transfer switches offers unmatched performance, versatility and value for power switching applications. At the heart of these designs is Eatons molded-case switch, designed specically to meet UL 1008.
Basic Components of Automatic Transfer Switches
Transformer Panel Steps Line Power Down to 120 Vac for Logic and Electrical Operator Available Multi-Tap Voltage Selector (See Page 25.2-9 for additional details.) Space Heater (Optional)
Fast, Powerful and Safe Power Switching Mechanism

The power panel uses a unidirectional gear motor mechanism. The power panel can be operated manually under a full load.
Optional Integral Overcurrent Protection Capability

For service entrance and other applications, trip units can be integrated into the power switching section. This eliminates the need for separate upstream protective devices, saving cost and space.
Molded-Case Switch Features

True four-pole switched neutral availability Totally enclosed contact assembly
Superior Main Contact Structure

All Eaton wallmount transfer switches meet or exceed the standards set forth in UL 1008 and UL 489. No other transfer switch manufacturer has met the rigid testing requirements of this combination of standards. Completely enclosed contacts add a measure of safety and reliability. It also ensures the integrity of the contact assemblies and minimizes the need for periodic maintenance of the contacts, reducing downtime.
Optional Thermal-Magnetic or Electronic Trip Units
Molded-Case Switch
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 033

Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountFeatures
25.2-9
Mechanical Interlock
Wallmount transfer switches feature a rear-mounted, fail-safe mechanical interlock to prevent paralleling of sources. This is, in addition to software interlocking and the interlocking inherently provided by the transfer mechanism.
North American Voltage Selector

North American multi-tap transformer comes with 600, 480, 240, 208 and 120 Vac, single- and three-phase, and 60 Hz taps, which are all eld selectable. Simply remove the steel cover and move the appropriate blue ag terminal to the desired voltage. All switches are shipped with the blue ag in the 600V position.
22 23 24 25 26
Multi-Tap Voltage Selector
Ease of Maintenance Keyed quick-disconnect plugs are provided for easy and complete isolation of the control circuitry. Maintenance can be performed on the logic independent from the power sections and still allow the user to manually transfer power under full load conditions.
Transformer Panel
27 28
Transformer Panel Location
29 30
Triple Interlocks
Transformer Panel Allows for Easy Field Changes to Voltage Congurations
31 32 33
Load Bus Assembly

The load bus can be oriented for either top or bottom access. Top entry is standard.
Logic Disconnect Plugs

Load Lugs (Top Entry) Power Panel
Transformer Panel Opened
34 35
Load Bus
Neutral Connections Manual Operating Handle
Normal Power Source MoldedCase Switch
36 37 38
Service Disconnect
Load Bus
Indicator Wheel Voltage Selection Panel (Domestic) Transfer Mechanism
39 40 41 42

Eatons industry-exclusive Multi-Tap system voltage selector allows our transfer switch to be applied on most system voltages just by proper insertion of the selector plug. Available in two congurations: Worldwide Multi-Tap with 600, 480, 415, 380, 240, 220 and 208 Vac, single- and three-phase, 50 and 60 Hz taps. North American Multi-Tap with 600, 480, 240, 208 and 120 Vac, single- and three-phase, 60 Hz taps.
Motor Brake Board
Emergency Power Source Molded-Case Switch
43
Typical (2251000A) Vertical Design Transfer Switch Equipment
CA08104001E

Breaker-Based Transfer Switches, Molded-CaseTechnical Data
September 2011
Sheet 25 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

They are listed under Underwriters Laboratories UL 1008 Standard for transfer switch equipment and are optionally available as suitable for emergency and standby systems as dened in NFPA 99 for health care facilities.

Molded-Case Transfer Switch and Circuit Breaker

Switch Ampere Rating 30100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000
UL 1008 3-Cycle Any Breaker Rating 240 Vac 100 100 100 100 100 100 65 65 480 Vac 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 50 600 Vac 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Ratings When Used with Upstream Fuse Maximum Fuse Rating 200 400 400 400 600 1200 1600 1600 Fuse Type J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T J, T L L 600 Vac 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
UL 1008 listed CSA C22.2 No. 178 certied
Technical Data
Electrical Ratings
Molded-case and circuit breaker 301000A Two-, three- or four-pole Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz NEMA 1, 3R, 12, open
For 600, 800 and 1000A ratings, single- through four-pole units are rated 35 kA.
Switch Ampere Rating 30100 150225 150225 225300 400 600 600 600 (four-pole) 800 800 1000
Breaker Frame HFD HFD HKD HKD HLD HLD HMDL NB HMDL HNB HNB
Line Side (Normal and Standby Source) (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #3350 (1) #3350 (1) 4/0600 (1) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500
Load Connection (1) #141/0 (1) #6300 (1) #6350 (1) #6350 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (2) #1500 (3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500
Neutral Connection (3) #141/0 (3) #4300 (3) #4350 (3) #4350 (6) 250350 (6) 250350 (12) 4/0500 (3) 3/0400 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500

Mounting Type Fixed Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 30 70 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000 Number of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R NEMA 4 NEMA 4X
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 035

Breaker-Based Transfer Switches, Molded-CaseDimensions
25.2-11

B G C
22 23
F
24 25
D Power Panel
Gutter Space
H A E
26 27 28
Transformer Panel
Logic Panel
Top View
Front View
Side View
Figure 25.2-4. Dimension Views Table 25.2-15. Breaker-Based and Molded-Case Transfer Switches
Switch Switch Rating Type Amperes Molded-Case 30100 150225 30100 150 150225 150225 300 400 600 600 800 HFD HFD
29
Gutter Space Bolt Pattern G Horizontal 10.75 (273.0) 10.75 (273.0) 10.75 (273.0) 10.75 (273.0) 10.75 (273.0) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) H Vertical 46.44 (1180.0) 46.44 (1180.0) 46.44 (1180.0) 46.44 (1180.0) 34.31 (904.0) 45.50 (1155.7) 53.50 (1358.9) 51.50 (1308.0) 62.50 (1588.0) 75.15 (1908.8) 75.15 (1908.8) 75.15 (1908.8) Standard Terminals Line Side (Normal Load and Standby Source) Connection Neutral Connection
30
Weight Lbs (kg)
Enclosure A Height 47.74 (1213.0) 47.74 (1213.0) 47.74 (1213.0) 47.74 (1213.0) 35.61 (904.0) 56.00 (1422.4) 53.00 (1346.2) 53.00 (1346.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 76.74 (1949.2) B Width 20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 20.81 (528.6) 20.06 (509.5) 20.81 (528.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) 25.81 (655.6) C Depth 17.22 (437.0) 17.22 (437.0) 17.22 (437.0) 17.22 (437.0) 13.34 (339.0) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 18.40 (467.4) 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3) 19.50 (495.3)
D Width 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2)
E Depth 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6)
31
232 (105) 232 (105) 240 (190) 240 (190) 150 (68) 305 (134) 295 (134) 425 (193) 475 (214) 480 (218) 510 (232) 540 (245)
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
HFD HFD HFD HKD HKD HLD HLD HMDL
HMDL 76.74 (1949.2) 76.74 (1949.2)
8001000 HNB

Suitable with copper only. 240/120V, single-phase, three-wire or 208V, three-phase, four-wire systems only. With multi-tap voltage selection panel.
CA08104001E
25.2-12 Transfer Switches

September 2011
Sheet 25 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 037
Transfer Switches Magnum-Based Designs

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesGeneral Description
25.3-1
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switches
The Magnum family of transfer switches covers applications ranging from 200 to 5000A through 600 Vac. Some of the applications are: automatic or non-automatic congurations, open or closed transition and standard or rated suitable for use as service entrance. They are designed for applications where total system coordination must be accomplished while achieving a high level of withstand, interrupting and closing performance. Drawout construction is available for applications, such as critical lifesupport systems, where preventive maintenance, inspection and testing must be accomplished while maintaining continuity of power to the load.

Eaton Magnum transfer switches meet or exceed all industry standards for endurance, reliability and performance. They are listed under Underwriters Laboratories UL 1008 Standard for transfer switch equipment. With certain options, they also comply with Source 2 and standby system requirements as dened in NFPA 99 for health care facilities.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch
General Description
Eatons Magnum transfer switches are designed for a variety of standby power applications for critical and noncritical loads. They monitor both Source 1 (Normal) and Source 2 (Emergency) power sources. In the event of a Source 1 power interruption, these switches will automatically transfer the load circuits to the Source 2 power source. Once Source 1 power source has been restored, the process is automatically reversed.
Freestanding Magnum insulated case devices Fastest switching times available (<3 cycles) High withstand ratings Full 60-cycle short-time withstand capability Safe manual transfer under load Multi-tap voltage selection plug Integral service entrance capability Integral overcurrent protection capability Drawout capability Programmable microprocessor controller with keypad entry and display Communications capable Durable powder-coated steel enclosures UL 489 and UL 1008 listed. 4000 and 5000A available as UL 891 only 100 kA standard withstand ratings 85 kA, 30 cycle, extended withstand ratings Electrically operated True four-pole switched neutral availability Totally enclosed contact assembly
UL 1008standard for safety for automatic transfer switches 4000 and 5000A available as UL 891 only UL 489standard for circuit breakers and molded case switches CSA 22.2-178Canadian transfer switch standard NEC articlescode sections 517, 700, 701, 702applicable switch equipment NFPA 110Source 2 and Standby Power Systems NFPA 99health care facilities EGSA 100Sstandard for transfer switches NEMA ICS10Standard for transfer switch equipment ISO 9000International Organization for Standardization IBCInternational Building Code 2006 BOCABuilding Ofcials Code Administrators
Note: Stored energy mechanism for manual operation.
CA08104001E
25.3-2 Transfer Switches Magnum-Based Designs

September 2011
Sheet 25 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch
Ambient temperature range: 40 to 40C (40 to 104F) Operating temperature range: 20 to 70C (4 to 158F) Operating humidity: up to 90% Relative humidity (noncondensing)
Transfer Switch Withstand Ratings

Table 25.3-1. Systems Coordination InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
Rating When Used with Upstream Circuit Breaker Transfer Switch Ampere Rating 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 3 Cycle 600V (kA) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Ratings Used for Coordination with Upstream Breakers with Short-Time Rating 30 Cycle 600V (kA) 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85
Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch

2005000A Two-, three-, four-pole (except units 3200A and higher only three- or four-pole) 120600 Vac 100,000A withstand/closing/ interrupting at 480 Vac Short-time withstand85,000 for 30 cycles 2003200A Two-, three-, four-pole (except units 3200A and higher only three- and four-pole) 120600 Vac 100,000A withstand/closing/ interrupting at 480 Vac Short-time withstand85,000 for 30 cycles
4000 and 5000A ratings are drawout.
Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch

Tested in accordance with UL 1008. Eaton drawout Magnum transfer switch will coordinate with a power switching device short-time rating. Contact factory for details. Table 25.3-2. Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch Mounting
Mounting Type Fixed Drawout Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 200 300 400 600 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 3200 4000 5000 Number of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure Open NEMA 1 behind NEMA 1 thru NEMA 3R
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 039

25.3-3
Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch
Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2000A, Four-Pole, NEMA 1 Enclosed, Through-the-Door Design
2000A, Three-Pole, Fixed Design, NEMA Behind-the-Door Enclosure
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Drawout construction with switch position indicator Completely interchangeable power switching devices Available in NEMA Type 1 and 3R enclosures Rear, side and top cable access
Fixed-mount construction Available in NEMA Type 1 and 3R enclosures Rear, side and top cable access Deadfront construction Front access only requires an additional wireway to be added

Source 1 Connections
36 37
Neutral Connections Load Connections
38 39 40 41
Source 2 Connections Neutral Assembly
Side View of Magnum Side or Rear Access Required (Half-High Side Panels and Back Panels are Not Shown)
42 43
Magnum-Based Transfer Switches
CA08104001E

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesFeatures
Power Panel Performs Power Transfer Between Source 1 and Source 2 Using Magnum Power-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 25 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Mechanical Cable Interlock
Side-to-Side Ledge
Side-to-Side Ledge
Contact Wear Inspection Area (Ledge Not Visible Under Contacts) Electrical Operator Pushbutton Contact Wear Indicator Contacts Closed and in Good Condition
Contact Wear Inspection Area (Ledge Now Becoming Visible Under Contacts) Contact Wear Indicator Contacts Closed and Wear is Indicated
Basic Switch Components of Drawout Magnum Automatic Transfer Switches
The open transition type Magnum Transfer Switches feature both mechanical (cable) and electrical interlocking to prevent paralleling of sources.

Allows the transfer switch to be readily applied on most system voltages worldwide by connecting to the proper terminals. Available system voltages include 120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380, 401, 415, 480, or 600 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz.
Ease of Maintenance
Keyed quick-disconnect plugs are provided for easy and complete isolation of the control circuitry. Maintenance can be performed on the logic independent from the power sections and still allow the user to manually transfer power under full load conditions.
41
Voltage Selection Terminals
42 43
Logic Disconnect Plugs
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 041

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesFeatures
25.3-5
Logic
Application Versatility
Whether the application calls for open or closed transition, Eaton has the right logic controller for the task. ATC-600/800 controllers have set a new standard for transfer switch technology featuring:

Automatic Transfer Closed Transition

Closed transition applications feature the ATC-800 Closed Transition logic controller. Refer to Technical Data TD.15A.09.T.E Closed Transition ATC-800 for Automatic Transfer Switches for additional information.
Ease of Coordination and Application Short-Time Withstand

The use of electronic trips has allowed performance curve shaping to facilitate proper system coordination. The most signicant is the short time rated trip unit. These trip settings may be set for what are considered extremely high currents for much longer durations than the three-cycle withstand test required under UL 1008. To facilitate improved coordination, Eaton Magnum transfer switches have been tested and are provided with 30-cycle, extended withstand ratings.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Microprocessor-based logic Digital display Field set point programmability Transfer history PowerNet Communications capability Voltmeter and frequency meter True rms voltage sensing Mimic BUS/LED display Load voltage decay delayed transition capability In-phase monitor capability Field upgrade capability
ATC-800 Closed Transition
Unmatched Performance and Versatility

The Eaton family of Magnum transfer switches offers unmatched performance, versatility and value for standby power applications. At the heart of these designs is the Magnum switch with the following features:
Automatic Transfer Open Transition

Open transition type Magnum transfer switches use the Eaton programmable ATC-600 microprocessor-based logic controller. Refer to Technical Data TD.15A.05.T.E Open Transition ATC-600 for Automatic Transfer Switches for additional information.
30 31
Magnum Power-Case Switch
32 33 34 35 36
Superior Main Contact Structure

All Eaton Magnum transfer switches meet or exceed the standards set forth in UL 1008 and UL 489 with high withstand, totally enclosed Magnum switches. No other transfer switch manufacturer has met the rigid testing requirements of this combination of standards. Completely enclosed contacts add a measure of safety and reliability. They also ensures the integrity of the contact assemblies and minimizes the need for periodic maintenance of the contacts, reducing downtime and maintenance time.
Optional Integral Overcurrent Protection Capability
Optional DigitripTM Magnum Trip Unit
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATC-600
Fast, Powerful and Safe Switching Mechanism

The mechanism uses a high speed than 3-cycle stored energy switching mechanism. This mechanism can be operated manually under a full load.
Service Entrance
For service entrance and other applications, Digitrip solid-state trip units can be integrated into the power switching section. This eliminates the need for separate upstream protective devices, saving cost and space. Available with various combinations of long, short time, instantaneous, ground fault protection and communications.
CA08104001E

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 25 042
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm). Table 25.3-3. Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switches
Ampere Rating Number A of Height Poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 4 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)

B Width
C Depth
Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1050 (477) 1050 (477) 1250 (568) 1900 (863) 1900 (863) 2000 (910)

NEMA 1 Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch

2002000 2002000 2002000 25003200 25003200 25003200 4000 5000 2002000 2002000 2002000 25003200 25003200 25003200 25003200 4000 5000
32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6)

48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2)

Figure 25.3-1. 2003200A Fixed-Mount NEMA 1

B C
NEMA 3R Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch

90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)

32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6)

63.00 (1600.2) 63.00 (1600.2) 63.00 (1600.2) 63.00 (1600.2) 63.00 (1600.2) 63.00 (1600.2) 63.00 (1600.2)

1600 (726) 1600 (726) 1600 (726) 2400 (1090) 2400 (1090) 2400 (1090) 2400 (1090) A
Figure 25.3-2. 2003200A Fixed-Mount NEMA 3R
At 4000 and 5000A, the standard design is drawout. See drawout dimensions.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 043

25.3-7
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm).

B C
22 23 24
Table 25.3-4. Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

Ampere Rating Number A of Height Poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) B Width C Depth Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1600 (727) 1600 (727) 1900 (864) 2500 (1136) 2500 (1136) 2800 (1273) 2100 (953) 2100 (953) 2400 (1090) 3000 (1362) 3000 (1362) 3000 (1362) A A
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

2002000 2002000 2002000 25003200 25003200 25003200 32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 32.00 (812.8) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 44.00 (1117.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0)
25 26 27
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

2002000 2002000 2002000 25003200 25003200 25003200 2 3 4 2 3 4
Figure 25.3-3. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 1

B C
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Figure 25.3-4. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 3R
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Wireway Cubicle SP A Cubicle ATS D
September 2011
Sheet 25 044
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Source 1 (Normal)
Load A
Source 2 (Emergency)
Fr 1
Right Side NEMA
Table 25.3-5. Connection Type (40005000A Only)
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
SP = Shipping Split. 32.00 (812.8) 54.00 (1371.6) B C Front View Without Covers NEMA 1 urce 2 mergency) Loa Lug Norm Lugs urce 1 ormal)
Connection Type Line Cable Bus Cable Cable Bus Bus Cable Bus Emergency Cable Cable Bus Cable Bus Cable Bus Bus Load Cable Cable Cable Bus Cable Bus Bus Bus
Wireway Required Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
Table 25.3-6. Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

Ampere Rating 4000 5000 No. A of Height Poles 3 or 4 90.00 (2286.0) 3 or 4 90.00 (2286.0) B Width 86.00 (2184.4) 86.00 (2184.4) C Width 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8) D Depth 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

42 43
Figure 25.3-5. Magnum 40005000A UnitsDrawout NEMA 1
The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power-case switches or breakers. A second cubicle called a wireway is most likely required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable connections to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power-case switch or breaker cubicle are made from the back. The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm). Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width. Consult factory.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 045

25.3-9

Wireway Cubicle SP ATS Cubicle
22 23 24
Source 1
25 26
A Load
27 28 29 30
Source 2
Front View NEMA 3R With Cover Emergency Lugs Located in Rear of Cubicle
D Right Side View
31 32
Source 1 (Normal) Normal Lugs
Table 25.3-7.
Connection Type Line Cable Bus Cable Cable Emergency Cable Cable Bus Cable Bus Cable Bus Bus Load Cable Cable Cable Bus Cable Bus Bus Bus Wireway Required Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
33 34 35 36
Load Lugs
Bus Bus Cable Bus
Table 25.3-8.
Ampere Rating
Source 2 (Emergency)
No. of Poles 3 or 4 3 or 4
A Height 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
B Width 86.00 (2184.4) 86.00 (2184.4)
C Width 92.00 (2336.8) 92.00 (2336.8)
D Depth 82.35 (2091.7) 82.35 (2091.7)
Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)

37 38 39 40 41 42 43
4000 5000
32.00 (812.8)
54.00 (1371.6) B C Front View Without Covers
SP = Shipping Split.
Figure 25.3-6. Magnum 40005000A UnitsNEMA 3R
The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power-case switches or breakers. A second cubicle called a wireway is most likely required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable connections to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power-case switch or breaker cubicle are made from the back. The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm). Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width. Consult factory.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 046
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
The bypass isolation switch is designed for applications where maintenance, inspection and testing must be performed while maintaining continuous power to the load. This is typically required in critical lifesupport systems and standby power situations calling for safe system maintenance with no power disruptions. Such a design allows for the quick removal of the different switching devices for inspection, maintenance or replacement.
The switching devices have a high withstand rating. The high-speed, stored-energy switching mechanism guarantees a transfer time of less than three cycles.


Eatons transfer switch is a rugged, compact design using Magnum power switches or Magnum power circuit breakers to transfer essential loads from one power source to another. Open transition switching devices are interlocked to prevent both switching devices from being closed at the same time. The versatile design, in addition to standard transfer functions, offers an optional integral thermal and short-circuit protection in either or both switching devices. The switching devices are in a compact vertical arrangement. The logic can be easily disconnected from the switching device without disturbing critical connections. The enclosure is free standing, and by using the specially supplied cleats, the switch is seismic approved (Option 42). The terminals are mounted in the rear of the switch, permitting rear, top, bottom or side cable or bus bar entrance.
General Description
A bypass isolation switch uses loadbreak isolation and bypass transfer power contacts. Thus, should voltage be lost on the line to which the ATS is connected, and should a manual bypass be required to the other line, this can be accomplished safely and quickly as described below. With contactor designs using non-loadbreak isolation and bypass switches, manual bypass to the other line is hindered by mechanical or electrical safety interlocking.
Reliable microprocessor logic Designed to safely withstand fault currents Eliminates need for complex interlocks Most versatile bypass isolation transfer switch available Eaton drawout cassette design Overcurrent protection available No loadbreak when bypassing to the same source Drawout capabilities on both ATS and bypass portions Compact design Ability to test power switching elements during drawout process Power switching devices completely interchangeable between ATS and bypass portions
Seismic Qualication
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 047

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesTechnical Data
25.3-11
Technical Data
Table 25.3-9. Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch Mounting

Mounting Type Drawout Voltage 600 600/347 480 480/277 480/240 415/240 380/220 240 240/120 220 220/127 208/120 120 Current Amperes 200 300 400 600 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 3200 4000 5000 Number of Poles 2, 3, 4 NEMA Enclosure NEMA 1Behind NEMA 1Thru NEMA 3R
22 23 24 25 26 27
Table 25.3-10. Withstand Ratings

Rating When Used with Upstream Circuit Breaker Transfer Switch Ampere Rating 200 1000 1200 3-Cycle 600V (kA) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Ratings Used for Coordination with Upstream Breakers with Short-Time Rating 30-Cycle 600V (kA) 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Magnum Bypass Isolation Front View NEMA 1 Through-the-Door
1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000

Tested in accordance with UL 1008. Eaton drawout Magnum transfer switch will coordinate with a power switching device short-time rating. Contact factory for details.
INCOMING SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1 ISOLATED
36
ATS SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 BYPASS
SOURCE 1 BYPASS
SOURCE 1 POSITION
37 38 39
A
Front Access Option 54A is Available on All Magnum Designs NEMA 1 Behind the Door
SOURCE 1 AVAILABLE
LOAD
SOURCE 2 ISOLATED
ATS SOURCE 2
SOURCE 2 BYPASS
40
SOURCE 2 BYPASS
SOURCE 2 POSITION
A
SOURCE 2 AVAILABLE
INCOMING SOURCE 2
41 42 43
Figure 25.3-7. Typical Bypass Isolation Switch Schematic
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 048
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm). Table 25.3-11. Magnum Bypass Isolation Drawout Transfer Switches
Ampere Rating Number A of Height Poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) B Width C Depth Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 3100 (1409) 3100 (1409) 3700 (1682) 4700 (2136) 4700 (2136) 5500 (2500) 3700 (1682) 3700 (1682) 4300 (1955) 5300 (2410) 5300 (2410) 6000 (2730)
A A B C
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

2002000 2002000 2002000 25003200 25003200 25003200 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0) 75.00 (1905.0)
Figure 25.3-8. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 1

B C
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

2002000 2002000 2002000 25003200 25003200 25003200 2 3 4 2 3 4
Figure 25.3-9. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 3R
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 049

25.3-13
22
Source 2 Emergency Lugs
23 24
A
25
Note: Seismic mounting brackets add 3.00 inches (76.2) width to each side or an additional 6.00 inches (152.4) to total width. D
26 27 28
32.00 (872.8) Source 1 Normal Lugs
54.00 (1371.8) Top View
54.00 (1371.8)
Normal ATS Breaker Emergency ATS Breaker
Normal Bypass Breaker Emergency Bypass Breaker
29 30 31 32
Load Lugs Wireway Cubicle SP
B C
SP
Right Side View
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Front View SP = Shipping Split.
Figure 25.3-10. Magnum 40005000A UnitsNEMA 1

Note: The 4000 and 5000A bypass isolation ATS will include two cubicles for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal and the Bypass power-case switch. An additional cubicle called a wireway is provided for the Normal and Load connections. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections for Emergency are made in the rear. The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Table 25.3-12. NEMA 1 Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

Ampere Rating 4000 5000

Number of Poles 3 or 4 3 or 4
A Height 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
B Width 140.00 (3556.0) 140.00 (3556.0)
C Width 146.00 (3708.4) 146.00 (3708.4)
D Depth 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2)

Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width. Consult factory.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 050
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Source 2 Emergency Lugs
Source 1 Normal Lugs
T Top
Normal ATS Breaker Emergency ATS Load Lugs Wireway Cubicle SP SP = Shipping Split. Front View
Normal Bypass Breaker Emergency Bypass
Right Side View
Figure 25.3-11. Magnum 40005000A UnitsNEMA 3R

Note: The 4000 and 5000A bypass isolation ATS will include two cubicles for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal and the Bypass power-case switch. An additional cubicle called a wireway is provided for the Normal and Load connections. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections for Emergency are made in the rear. The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Table 25.3-13. NEMA 3R Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

Ampere Rating 4000 5000

Table 25.3-14. Connection Type (40005000A Only)

Connection Type Line Cable Bus Cable Cable Bus Bus Cable Bus
Number of Poles 3 or 4 3 or 4
A Height
B Width
C Width
D Depth

Wireway Emergency Cable Cable Bus Cable Bus Cable Bus Bus Load Cable Cable Cable Bus Cable Bus Bus Bus Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
90.00 140.00 146.00 82.35 (2286.0) (3556.0) (3708.4) (2091.7) 90.00 140.00 146.00 82.35 (2286.0) (3556.0) (3708.4) (2091.7)
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width. Consult factory.
A wireway is required in accordance with the following table for 4000 and 5000A ratings.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 051
Transfer Switches ATC Controllers

Product Selection Guide
25.4-1

Table 25.4-1. ATC Controller Feature Selection Chart
Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
22 23 24 25
Transition
Open transition Closed transition Standard Not available Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard SelectableOFF, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval xed run time 15 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Standard Not available Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ProgrammableOFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Not available Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ProgrammableOFF, daily, 7-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ProgrammableOFF, daily, 7-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard Standard Optional
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Timers
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) Time delay engine start (TDES) Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) Time delay emergency fail (TDEF)
Engine/Generator Exerciser
Plant exerciser (PE) with fail-safe
Source 1 Sensing
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency protection All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency protection Three-phase rotation sensing Three-phase voltage unbalance/loss Standard Standard Not available Not available Standard Standard Not available Not available
Source 2 Sensing
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency protection All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency protection Three-phase rotation sensing Three-phase voltage unbalance
CA08104001E
25.4-2 Transfer Switches ATC Controllers

Table 25.4-1. ATC Controller Feature Selection Chart (Continued)
Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
September 2011
Sheet 25 052
22 23 24
Manual Controls
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Test operators Four-position test selector switch (FPSS) Time delay bypass pushbutton Maintenance selector switch (MSS) Automatic/manual operation selector switch Automatic transfer or automatic transfer with non-automatic retransfer operation
Standard Not available Standard Not available Not available Not available
Standard Not available Standard Optional Optional Optional
Standard Optional Standard Optional Optional Optional
Standard Optional Standard Optional Optional Optional
Indications/and Status Display

Source 1 connected/Source 2 connected Source 1 present/Source 2 present Source 1 tripped/Source 2 tripped Standard Standard Standard Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Standard Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available Standard Standard Standard Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC Standard 1NO and 1NC Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional Not available Not available Not available Optional Standard Standard Standard Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC Optional Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional Not available Not available Not available Optional Standard Standard Standard Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC Optional Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Customer Outputs
Source 1/Source 2 present contacts Source 1/Source 2 present contacts Source 1 available/Source 2 available contacts
Switch Position Indication Contact

Source 1 position indication contact Source 1 position indication contact Pretransfer signal contacts
Customer Inputs
Go to emergency (Source 2) Load shed
Transfer Mode Open Transition

Time delay neutral In-phase monitoring Load voltage decay
Transfer Mode Closed Transition

Time delay neutral In-phase monitoring Load voltage decay
Service Entrance Rating

Source 1, Source 2 or both and with and without ground fault protection
Stainless Steel Cover

SS lockable cover for controller
Not available
Optional
Optional
Optional
ATC-300s supplied prior to September 2011 did not have this optional feature.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 053

25.4-3
Table 25.4-2. ATC Controller Specication Selection Chart

Specication Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
22 23 24
Programming Selections
Time delay normal to emergency Time delay emergency to normal Time delay engine cooldown Time delay engine start Time delay neutral 3 seconds (xed) 5 minutes (xed) 5 minutes (xed) 3 seconds (xed) N/A 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 0120 seconds 0120 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 0120 seconds 0120 seconds or based on load voltage decay of 2%30% of nominal 06 seconds N/A N/A N/A Enabled or disabled Up to 10 devices (via sub-network) 0120 seconds (up to 10 devices via sub-network) 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 0120 seconds 0120 seconds or based on load voltage decay of 2%30% of nominal 06 seconds N/A N/A N/A Enabled or disabled Up to 10 devices (via sub-network) 0120 seconds (up to 10 devices via sub-network) Programmabledisabled or 7-day interval, 0600 minutes, load or no load Source 1 or 2 or none Enabled or disabled Automatic or manual Utility/generator or dual utility or dual generator TD.15A.05.T.E.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Time delay Source 2 fail Time delay voltage unbalance Voltage unbalance three-phase % of unbalanced voltage dropout Phase reversal three-phase In-phase Load sequencing Pretransfer signal
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
06 seconds 1030 seconds 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) 5% to 20% (DO) dropout 2% to 3% (PU) OFF, ABC, CBA 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) N/A 1120 seconds (Form C contact)
Plant exerciser
Selectable day, off, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 15 minutes run time, no load N/A N/A N/A N/A Utility/generator PA01600002E
Programmableoff, daily Programmabledisabled or 7-, 14-, 28-day intervals, or 7-day interval, 0600 0600 minutes, load or no load minutes, load or no load N/A N/A Automatic or manual 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) Utility/generator or dual utility TD01602006E Source 1 or 2 or none Enabled or disabled Automatic or manual Utility/generator or dual utility or dual generator TD.15A.05.T.E.
Preferred source selection Commitment to transfer in TDNE Retransfer mode Auto daylight savings time adjustment System selection Additional information
Note: Features are order specic. Not all features are supplied as standard.
CA08104001E

Table 25.4-2. ATC Controller Specication Selection Chart (Continued)
Specication Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
September 2011
Sheet 25 054
22 23 24
Voltage Specications
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
System application voltage Voltage measurements of: Voltage measurement range Operating power
Up to 480 Vac Source 1 and 2 120480 Vac 95145 Vac Source 2 5060 Hz 20 to +70C 30 to +85C 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons Unit status. Source 1 and 2 available and connected (ve total)
Up to 600 Vac Source 1 and 2 VAB, VBC and VCA 0790 Vac rms 65145 Vac Source 1 and 2 4070 Hz 20 to +70C 30 to +85C 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons Unit status. Source 1 and 2 available and connected (ve total)
Up to 600 Vac Source 1, 2 and load VAB, VBC and VCA 0790 Vac rms 65145 Vac Source 1 and 2 4070 Hz 20 to +70C 30 to +85C 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons Automatic, test and program mode. Source 1 and 2 available, connected and preferred. Load energized (10 total) LED display English PONI/INCOM NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV-resistant faceplate Operation 20 to +70C Storage 30 to +85C Humidity 0 to 95% relative (noncondensing)
Up to 600 Vac Source 1, 2 and load VAB, VBC and VCA 0790 Vac rms 65145 Vac Source 1 and 2 4070 Hz 20 to +70C 30 to +85C 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons Automatic, test and program mode. Source 1 and 2 available, connected and preferred. Load energized (10 total) LED display English PONI/INCOM NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV-resistant faceplate Operation 20 to +70C Storage 30 to +85C Humidity 0 to 95% relative (noncondensing)
Frequency Specications
Frequency measurements of: Frequency measurement range
Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating humidity Operating environment
Front Panel Indication

Mimic diagram with LED indication
Main display Display language Communications capable Enclosure compatibility Operating environmental range
N/A N/A N/A NEMA 1 and 3R Operation 20 to +70C Storage 30 to +85C Humidity 0 to 95% relative (noncondensing)
LCD-based display English, French, Spanish Modbus 485 NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV-resistant faceplate Operation 20 to +70C Storage 30 to +85C Humidity 0 to 95% relative (noncondensing)
Note: Features are order specic. Not all features are supplied as standard.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 055

ATC-100 ControllerGeneral Description
25.4-5
ATC-100 Controller

Standard Features

UL listed component IEC 61000-4-2, 61000-4-3, 61000-4-4, 61000-4-5, 61000-4-6, 61000-4-11 CISPR 11, Class B FCC Part 15, Class B
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATC-100 Controller
General Description
The ATC-100 Controller is a comprehensive, multifunction, microprocessorbased ATS controller. It is a compact, self-contained, panel-mounted device designed to replace traditional relay and solid-state logic panels.
The ATC-100 Controller provides both xed and jumper-selectable settings to allow for a range of applications. It operates from all system voltages between 120 and 480 Vac, single-phase and three-phase, at 50 or 60 Hz. In addition, a period of no control power operation is provided. The ATC-100 Controller monitors the condition of the three-phase line-toline voltage and frequency of both the utility and generator power sources. It can also be set up for single-phase operation. The ATC-100 controller provides the necessary intelligence to ensure that the transfer switch operates properly through a series of sensing and timing functions. The ATC-100 controller can be used with both the breaker-based design and the contactor-based design. See Table 25.4-4 for ranges and factory settings.
Auxiliary relay contacts: Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC Source 2 present 2NO and 2NC Switch position indication contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Controller settings via jumpers located at the rear of the unit Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton SelectableOFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval xed run time 15 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Monitor utility and generator power source voltages and generator power source frequency Provide undervoltage protection of the utility and generator power sources Provide underfrequency and overfrequency protection of the utility and generator power source Permit easy customer setup Permit system testing Provide faceplate source status indications
CA08104001E

ATC-100 ControllerTechnical Data
September 2011
Sheet 25 056
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Technical Data
Table 25.4-3. ATC-100 Controller Specications
Description Input control voltage Voltage measurements of Specication 95 to 145 Vac 50/60 Hz Utility VAB Generator VAB Utility VBC Generator VBC Utility VCA Generator VCA 0 to 575 Vac rms (50/60 Hz) 1% of full scale Generator 40 Hz to 70 Hz 0.3 Hz over the measurement range 20 to +70C (4 to +158F) 0 to +85C (22 to +185F) 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons 5A, 1/6 hp at 250 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum load 10A, 13 hp at 250 Vac 10A at 30 Vdc NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 UV-resistant ATC-100 faceplate
Voltage measurement range Voltage measurement accuracy Frequency measurements of Frequency measurement range Frequency measurement accuracy Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating humidity Operating environment Generator start relay K1, K2 relays Enclosure compatibility
Table 25.4-4. Adjustable Features with Range and Factory Default

Set Point Fixed/ Adjustable Fixed Jumper-selectable Fixed Fixed Jumper-selectable Jumper-selectable Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Jumper-selectable Jumper-selectable Description Range Factory Default Breakers Time delay engine start Time delay normal to emergency Time delay emergency to normal Time delay engine cool-off Nominal frequency Nominal voltage Utility undervoltage dropout Generator undervoltage dropout Utility undervoltage pickup Generator undervoltage pickup Utility underfrequency dropout Generator underfrequency pickup Generator overfrequency dropout Generator overfrequency pickup Generator test programming Test mode Engine run test time Three-phase or single-phase Time delay emergency fail timer Time delay neutral 3 seconds 2 or 15 seconds 5 minutes 1 minute 50 or 60 Hz 120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380 and 480V 80% of NOMV 80% of NOMV 90% of NOMV 90% of NOMV 90% of NOMF 95% of NOMF Off or 115% of NOMF (contactor) Off or 110% of NOMF 7-, 14- or 28-day Off, No Load, Load 15 minutes 1 or 3 6 seconds Disabled (0 seconds) or enabled (2 seconds) 3 seconds 15 seconds 5 minutes 1 minute As ordered As ordered 80% of NOMV in volts 80% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMF in hertz 95% of NOMF in hertz Off Off 7-day Off 15 minutes As ordered 6 seconds Enabled (2 seconds) Contactors 3 seconds 15 seconds 5 minutes 1 minute As ordered As ordered 80% of NOMV in volts 80% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMF in hertz 95% of NOMF in hertz 115% 110% 7-day Off 15 minutes As ordered 6 seconds Enabled (2 seconds)
TDES TDNE TDEN TDEC NOM FREQ NOM VOLTS S1 UV DROP S2 UV DROP S1 UV PICK S2 UV PICK S2 UF DROP S2 UF PICK S2 OF DROP S2 OF PICK
Generator test Jumper-selectable Test mode TER PHASES TDEF TDN Jumper-selectable Fixed Jumper-selectable Fixed Jumper-selectable
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 057

ATC-300+ ControllerGeneral Description
25.4-7
ATC-300 Controller and ATC-300+ Controller

Standard Features
Auxiliary relay contacts: Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC Source 2 present 2NO and 2NC Switch position indication contacts: Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC Source 2 position 1NO and 1NC Source 1 and Source 2 sensing: Undervoltage/underfrequency Overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase rotation protection Three-phase voltage unbalance


UL listed component Meets UL 1008 Meets intent of UL 991 Meets IEC 1000-4-2, 1000-4-3, 1000-4-4, 1000-4-5, 1000-4-6, 1000-4-11 Meets CISPR 11, Class A Complies with FCC Part 15, Class A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATC-300 Controller
General Description
Transfer switches are equipped with the high-performance ATC-300+ digital transfer controller, receive rock-solid monitoring, status reporting and transfer control operation. Its superior design and robust construction make the ATC-300+ the industry benchmark for critical and distributed power systems. The ATC-300+ will supersede the ATC-300 controller for units supplied after September 2011. The ATC-300+ will have the same form and t as the ATC-300. Size and mounting dimensions are identical. In addition, the ATC-300+ will have additional optional capability for manual retransfer, Source 2 emergency inhibit and RS-485 Modbus communication capability.
Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC Go to emergency (Source 2) Source-2 emergency inhibit contact Seven eld-programmable time delays LCD-based display for programming, system diagnostic and Help message display Mimic diagram with source available and connected LED indication Time-stamped history log System TEST pushbutton Programmable plant exerciser OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval selectable run time 0600 minutes no load/load with fail-safe Suitable for use as service equipment in the standard enclosure size when used with breaker-based design transfer switches Available UL 1449 3rd Edition compliant surge protection devices Integrated distribution panels Field-selectable multi-tap transformer panel permits operation on a wide range of system voltages Integral overcurrent protection available when used with breakerbased design transfer switches Space heater with thermostat Ammeterload side Power quality metering Manual retransfer selector switch Stainless steel cover for controller Source 2 inhibit Manual retransfer RS-485 communication capability
Optional Features
Eatons ATC-300+ controller-based automatic transfer switch is designed to provide unmatched performance, reliability and versatility for critical standby power applications.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Technical Data
Table 25.4-5. ATC-300+ Controller Specications
Description Input control voltage Voltage measurements of Specication 65145 Vac 50/60 Hz Source 1 VAB Source 1 VBC Source 1 VCA 0790 Vac rms (50/60 Hz) 2% of nominal input voltage Source 1 and Source 2 4070 Hz 0.3 Hz 5097% of the nominal system voltage 7897% of the nominal system voltage (Dropout +2%) to 99% of the nominal system voltage 105120% of the nominal system voltage 105110% of the nominal system voltage 103% to (dropout 2%) of the nominal system voltage 9097% of the nominal system frequency (Dropout +1 Hz) to 99% of the nominal system frequency 103 to 110% of the nominal system frequency 103 to 105% of the nominal system frequency 101% to (dropout 1 Hz) of the nominal system frequency 20 to +70C (4 to +158F) 0 to +85C (22 to +185F) 095% relative humidity (noncondensing) Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons 5A, 1/6 hp at 250 Vac/5A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum load 10A, 13 hp at 250 Vac/10A at 30 Vdc NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 UV-resistant ATC-300 faceplate Source 2 VAB Source 2 VBC Source 2 VCA
Voltage measurement range Voltage measurement accuracy Frequency measurement for Frequency measurement range Frequency measurement accuracy Undervoltage dropout range Breaker/switch style ATS Contactor style ATS Undervoltage pickup range Overvoltage dropout range Breaker/switch style ATS Contactor style ATS Overvoltage pickup range Underfrequency dropout range Underfrequency pickup range Overfrequency dropout range Breaker/switch style ATS Contactor style ATS Overfrequency pickup range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating humidity Operating environment Generator start relay K1, K2, pretransfer, alarm relays, K3, K4 Enclosure compatibility
The following set points are programmable if the corresponding feature is programmed. Table 25.4-6. ATC-300+ Programming Features/Set Points
Set Point TDES Set Point Units Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Days Hours: minutes Minutes: seconds Volts Percent Percent Seconds Seconds Description Time delay engine start Time delay normal to emergency Time delay emergency to normal Time delay engine cool-off Time delay neutral Plant exerciser programming Test Mode Engine run test time Pre-transfer delay timer Three-phase or single-phase Voltage unbalanced Percent for unbalanced voltage dropout Percent for unbalanced voltage pickup Unbalanced delay timer Time delay emergency fail timer Phase reversal Range 0120 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 0120 seconds Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day or 28 day 0600 min 0120 sec 1 or 3 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) 520% of phase voltage unbalance Dropout minus (UNBAL DROP % 2) to 3% 1030 06 sec OFF, ABC or CBA Factory Default 0:03 0:00 5:00 5:00 0:00 Off 5:00 0:00 As ordered 1 20% 10% 0:20 6 OFF
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
TDNE TDEN TDEC TDN PLANT EXER TEST MODE TER TPRE PHASES VOLT UNBAL UNBAL DROP % UNBAL PICK % UNBAL DELAY TDEF PHASE REV
0, 1 or 2 (0 = no load engine test, 1 = load engine test, 2 =disabled) 0
Complete list of programming selections found in IB01602009E.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 059

25.4-9
ATC-600 Controller
The ATC-600 continuously monitors either single-phase or three-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the load. When the Source 1 voltage or frequency is detected to be below the customer-programmed set points, transfer to Source 2 is initiated. When the Source 2 voltage and frequency are detected to be within the programmed parameters, the transfer occurs. While the load is connected to Source 2, the ATC-600 continues to monitor Source 1. As soon as the Source 1 voltage and frequency return to within the programmed limits, and after a programmed time delay, a retransfer back to Source 1 is initiated.
The ATC-600 is equipped to display history information either via the front panel or over PowerNet. Source 1 and Source 2 run time, available time, and connect time are available, as well as Load energized time, number of transfers, and the date, time and reason for the last 16 transfers. For communications capability, the ATC-600 can be equipped with a PONI card that will allow the user to communicate with the unit via Series III software. All settings for purchased options can be set from the faceplate of the unit or downloaded over PowerNet. Series III software allows for charting of key historical data, as well as providing the capability to monitor and control the transfer switch from a remote location. For further information on PowerNet products and software, see Eatons Volume 3Power Distribution and Control Assemblies, CA08100004E, Tab 22.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATC-600 Controller
General Description
Eatons ATC-600 is a microprocessorbased logic controller to be used with transfer switches. This device is doormounted and provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use.
The ATC-600 uses microprocessor technology to provide the operator with a vast array of selections. Depending on the application, the user can customize the ATC-600 to meet the particular application. A summary of several key selections is listed in Table 25.4-4.
UL listed component
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 060
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Technical Data
Table 25.4-7. ATC-600 Controller Specications
Description Input control power range Voltage measurements of Specication 65 Vac rms to 160 Vac rms (50/60 Hz) Source 1 VAB Source 1 VBC Source 1 VCA 0 to 790 Vac rms (50/60 Hz) 2% of nominal input voltage Source 1 and Source 2 40 Hz to 80 Hz 0.1 Hz Source 1 and Source 2 5090% of nominal voltage 105120% of nominal voltage 90100% of nominal frequency 100120% of nominal frequency 5A 250 Vac; 5A 30 Vdc 10A 250 Vac; 10A 30 Vdc 10A 250 Vac; 10A 30 Vdc PONI (Product-Operated Network Interface) Blinking LED indicates automatic operation LED illuminated indicating the unit is in the TEST mode LED illuminated indicating the unit is in the program mode blinking LED indicates user is viewing set points in program mode Source 1 available (amber), Source 2 available (amber), Source 1 connected (green), Source 2 connected (red), Source 1 preferred (red), Source 2 preferred (red), load energized (red) History information Set points Real-time clock Operation: 20C to +70C/Storage: 30C to +85C Source 2 VAB Source 2 VBC Source 2 VCA Load VAB Load VBC Load VCA
Voltage measurement range Voltage measurement accuracy Frequency measurement for Frequency measurement range Frequency measurement accuracy Undervoltage sensing Undervoltage dropout range Overvoltage dropout range Underfrequency dropout range Overfrequency dropout range Contact Outputs Two Form A contacts for generator start Four Form A contacts for control functions Three Form C contacts for control functions Communications output over PowerNet (optional) Front Panel Indications Automatic mode Test mode Program mode LED lights to indicate
LED display to indicate
Operating temperature range
Optional features.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 061

ATC-600 ControllerTechnical Ratings and Data
25.4-11
All ATC-600 programmable features and associated set point possibilities with any required explanations are presented below. Remember, only features originally ordered and factory programmed will appear in the display.
Note: Changing the system nominal voltage or frequency set points will automatically change all the pickup and dropout settings to new default values.
22 23 24
Table 25.4-8. ATC-600 Programming Features/Set Points

Programmable Feature Display TDES TDNE TDEN TDEC TDN PRF SRC Display Explanation
Set Point Range
Factory Default Value
Measure
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Time delay engine start timer Time delay normal to emergency timer Time delay emergency to normal timer Time delay engine cool down timer Time delay neutral timer Preferred source
0120 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 0120 seconds None 1 = source 1 0 = source 2 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = automatic 1 = PB return 0 = not committed 1 = committed 0 = no load transfer 1 = load transfer 2 = disable test pattern 100 seconds 1 or 3 1120 seconds 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 0.03.0 Hz 160 minutes 060 seconds
0:03 0:00 5:00 5:00 0:00 1
Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds
EXER MANTR CTDNE TMODE
Plant exerciser enabled or disabled Re-transfer mode Commitment to transfer in TDNE Engine test with/without load transfer
1 0 0 1
TPRE PHASE TSEQ IPHASE IPFD SYNC TDEF

Pre-transfer sub-network time delay Number of system phases Time delay load sequencing In-phase transition enabled or disabled In-phase transition frequency difference (Hertz) Closed/in-phase transition synchronization timer Time delay engine failure
0:01 3 0:10 0 1.0 5 6
Minutes: seconds Minutes: seconds Hertz Minutes Seconds
Complete list of programming selections found in IB ATS-1005. Set to order specic value.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 062
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATC-800 Controller
Passive Closed Transition

The closed transition mode of operation requires that both power sources be synchronized in voltage, frequency and phase angle within prescribed limits. Eatons ATC-800 uses a technique that involves waiting for synchronization of the two sources without actively controlling the generators voltage or frequency. The mode of operation is anticipatory in that the switch close command is initiated before the sources are exactly in phase. Using the phase angle and frequency difference between the two sources, a calculation is made to predict when both sources would be in phase. The response time of the switch is then factored in to determine when the switch close signal should be given to ensure optimal closure of the two sources in phase. Eatons closed transition ATC-800 must be selected with one of three feature sets: 47C, 47D or 47E (47D, 47F, 47G on contactor-based designs. The difference between these three feature sets is the action taken by the closed transition ATC-800 if it is determined that the two sources will not achieve synchronization. If feature set 47C is selected, failure to synchronize results in the switch reverting to an Open Transition mode of operation with low voltage decay. If feature set 47E is selected, then failure to synchronize results in the switch reverting to time delay neutral. However, if feature set 47D is selected, failure to synchronize will result in the ATC-800 refusing to transfer to Source 2 and an alarm signal being activated. In neither case will there be a paralleling of sources if synchronization is not achieved.
The generator used with a closed transition transfer switch must be equipped with an isynchronous governor When paralleling sources, fault current contributions from both sources should be considered in the system design Closed Transition (make-before-break) technology causes paralleling with the Source 1. It is the users responsibility to comply with any requirements regarding protective relaying. Protective relaying is not supplied with the standard transfer switch, but is available as an option
ATC-800 Controller
General Description
Eatons ATC-800 is a microprocessorbased logic controller to be used with transfer switches. This device is doormounted and provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use. The ATC-800 is a programmable, microprocessor-based monitoring device designed for use in Eaton closed transition transfer switches and for open transition contactor-based designs. For closed transition applications, the user may avoid intentional interruption of power when both sources of power are available. This make-beforebreak mode of operation is useful during testing of the engine generator under load and where a predetermined transfer to the generator is desired. Source paralleling duration is limited to less than 100 msec.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 063

ATC-800 ControllerFeatures, Benets and Functions
25.4-13

Switch Application SectionEaton Closed Transition (ATC-800) Features
The closed transition ATC-800 is a door-mounted, totally enclosed device that is customer accessible from the transfer switch front panel. Data access and programming operations are performed using the ATC-800 Transfers touch-sensitive function buttons in conjunction with an easy-to-read, illuminated, alphanumeric LED display. Both the function buttons and the display window are part of the devices front panel. A builtin Help button provides user assistance in the form of message displays. The ATC-800 is communications ready and compatible with all Eaton IQ devices as well as Eatons Power Xpert system-wide monitoring software. This permits monitoring of several transfer switches, locally or remotely, from a single point.
Instrumentation: Voltmeter (accuracy 1%) Reads line-to-line on Sources 1 and 2 and Load Frequency meter (4080 Hz, accuracy 0.1 Hz) Source available time (both sources) Source connected time (both sources) Source run time
While the ATC-800 is in the program mode, the device continues to operate in accordance with the previously programmed set points and parameters. The unit is never ofine, and preset values do not change until programming has been completed. Once reprogramming is complete, the user may return the program switch to the run position. At this point, all new values are stored in the ATC-800 nonvolatile memory, and the unit returns to Automatic mode.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ATC-800 Programming Button Functions

Three buttons provide easy access to all commonly used ATC-800 functions. When the preferred source is connected and the ATS is operating normally, the automatic indicator light will be ashing and the display window will be blank. Using the Display Select button, the operator can step through each of the six display families:

Denitions
Closed transition: Closed transition is a feature that will temporarily parallel two live sources in a make-before-break scheme when performing a transfer. The ATC-800 will close the switching devices for both sources, paralleling both sources, for a maximum time of 100 milliseconds after the sources are synchronized. Open transition/in-phase monitor: In-phase monitor is a feature that will allow a transfer between two sources only when the phase difference between the two sources is near zero. This is an open transition transfer that prevents inrush currents from exceeding normal starting currents in the case where motor loads are being transferred. Open transition/delayed with load voltage decay: Load voltage decay transfer is a feature that, after opening the switch for the original source, holds in the neutral position until the voltage on the load is less than 30% of rated voltage. This is an open transition that prevents inrush currents from exceeding normal starting currents in the case where motor loads are being transferred.
Additional Features

Source paralleling duration is limited to 100 msec or less True rms three-phase voltage sensing on normal, Source 2 and Load Frequency sensing on normal and Source 2 Programmable set points stored in nonvolatile memory PowerNet communication to personal computer either on site or remote Historical data on most recent transfers (up to 16 events) viewable at switch. Unlimited history storage (remote) available when used with PowerNet software Wide range of user-selectable option combinations Load sequencing Engine start contacts Engine test switch with userselectable test mode and fail-safe Alarm contact (multiple alarm functions available) Pretransfer signal Heartbeat monitor (ashing green Automatic light signies that the ATC-800 is operating properly)
Source 1 Source 2 Load History Time/date Set points
Note: Stepping through the various display modes does not alter preset values or otherwise affect operation of the ATS.
Once the desired display family is selected, the user may press the Step button to cycle through specic parameters or metered values shown in the display window.
Initial Programming
Factory programming will load all customer-specied functions and presets. At the customers request, Eaton will add, delete or adjust optional features.
Customer Programming
Customers may reprogram set points and other parameters to match their application, using the program switch located on the rear of the unit. Once the programming mode has been activated and the program light is ashing, the user may access set point settings by pressing the Display Select button until the set points LED is illuminated. Values for individual set points may then be altered by pressing the Increase or Decrease buttons. Once a parameter has been reset, the user advances to the next set point by pressing the Step button.
CA08104001E

Test Indicator light is on when unit is in Test mode. Automatic LED indicates that the ATS is operating normally and is in the Automatic mode.
September 2011
Sheet 25 064
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Time/Date Displays real-time clock. Clock can be easily set in this mode using the Increase and Decrease buttons. Engine Test Buttons Pressing this button twice initiates an engine test. LED Display Unit will provide LED readout showing actual metered values for Voltage, Frequency and Condition (including Normal, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, etc.) Source 1, Source 2, and Load Colored LED lights show status of both Sources and Load.
Program LED indicates unit is in Programming mode. (This mode is activated using the Program switch located on the rear of the unit.) History By pressing the Display Select button to light the History LED and the Step button to rotate through available data, historical or cumulative values for Available Time (Both Sources), Connected Time (Both Sources), Number of Transfers and Date/Time Reason for last 16 transfers are displayed. Help Pressing the Help button in any function mode will bring up display messages, explanations and prompts to assist the operator. Set Points Selecting this LED permits the user to display existing programmed values. Increase/Decrease A detailed explanation of these buttons can be found in the Operation section. Display Select Source 1 Source 2 Load History Time/Date Set Points Button is discussed in Operation section. Step Button Shows multiple variables under each display select function.
Closed Transition ATC-800 Front Panel Display and Button Functions
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 065

25.4-15
Operation
The ATC-800 operates in the following modes to meet most load management applications: Loss of normal power Open transition to alternate source Normal power restored Closed transition back to normal source Peak shave (remote or local) closed transition to and from alternate source Test (user selectable) Load transferclosed transition to and from alternate source No-load transferstarts alternate power source and allows to run unloaded. No transfer takes place
Yes Request for Transfer
22 23
No
Alternate Source Available?
24 25
Yes Closed Transition
Sources Synchronized <Tmax
No Open Transition/ In-phase Monitor
26 27
No
Close Source 2 Both Sources Still Available Detect Source 2 Closed
28
Yes
Open Source 1
Programming and Options Closed Transition Operation Modes Feature Set 47C Closed/In-Phase/Load Voltage Decay
ATC-800 controllers equipped with Feature Set 47C execute the following sequence of operations upon receipt of a request for transfer: the controller waits (for a preselected time frame) for synchronization of voltage and frequency. If achieved, a closed transition transfer occurs. Failure to synchronize results in the controller defaulting to an in-phase monitor, open transition mode of operation. If the two sources fail to achieve frequency synchronization within the user-selectable range, the controller defaults to an open transition using a load voltage decay delayed transition.
Yes Open Source 2 Good Alarm Close Source 2 Close Source 2 Yes Open Source 1 Source 1 Open <100 msec? No Sources Synchronized <Tmax No Open Transit Delayed
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Customer Adjustments 0.0 to 0.3 Hz 15% 0.00.3 Hz 160 minutes 160 minutes
Open Source 1
Load Voltage Decay
End
End
End
Figure 25.4-1. Feature Set 47C Schematic Table 25.4-9. Closed Transition/In-Phase Standard Features
Standard Features Closed transition frequency difference (Hz) Closed transition voltage difference (V) In-phase transition frequency difference (Hz) Closed transition synchronization timer In-phase transition synchronization timer
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

ATC-800 ControllerFeatures, Benets and Functions In-Phase Transfer Feature Set 47D Closed Only
ATC-800 controllers equipped with Feature Set 47D only transfer to an alternate source when both sources are synchronized. For synchronization to occur, both voltage and frequency differentials must fall within the userselectable ranges. If synchronization does not occur (within a preselected amount of time), the controller will maintain load connection to the current power source and initiate an alarm.
Request for Transfer
September 2011
Sheet 25 066
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Yes
Alternate Source Available?
No
Yes Closed Transition
Sources Synchronized <Tmax
No
Closed Transition With Default to In-Phase Transition With Default to Time Delay Neutral
Provides a closed transition transfer as the primary transfer mode. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted voltage difference, frequency difference, phase angle difference and time, then the controller defaults to the In-phase transition with default to time delay neutral operation as described in Features 32D and 32A. Adjustable frequency difference 0.0 0.3 Hz. Adjustable voltage difference 15% volts. Adjustable synchronization time allowance 160 minutes.
Close Source 2
Detect Source 2 Closed
Open Source 1
Source 1 Open <100 msec?
No
Yes Open Source 2 Good Alarm Alarm
End
End
Feature Set 47F Closed/Load Voltage Decay

ATC-800 controllers equipped with Feature Set 47F will perform a closed transition when both sources are synchronized in frequency, phase and voltage. Failure to synchronize will result in an open transition Time Delay Load Voltage Decay transfer. Time Delay Load Voltage Decay uses the load voltage measurements to sense back EMF that is generated when the transfer switch is in the Neutral position. It provides a delay in transfer in either direction if an unacceptable level is sensed as established by a customer programmed level. The transfer will not take place until the back EMF decays below the acceptable programmed level. This feature has a separate setting of enabling or disabling the operation. If disabled, the transfer switch will not delay in the Neutral position and will transfer between the sources as fast as possible. This feature is not available with the Time Delay Neutral Optional Feature 32A. Figure 25.4-2. Feature Set 47D Schematic Table 25.4-10. Closed Transition Standard Features
Standard Features Closed transition frequency difference (Hz) Closed transition voltage difference Closed transition synchronization timer Customer Adjustments 0.00.3 Hz 15% 160 minutes
Feature Set 47G Closed/Time Delay Neutral

ATC-800 controllers equipped with Feature Set 47F will perform a closed transition transfer when both sources are synchronized in frequency, phase and voltage. Failure to synchronize will result in an open transition Time Delay Neutral transfer. Time Delay Neutral provides a time delay in the transfer switch neutral position when both sources are open. This delay takes place when the load is transferred in either direction to prevent excessive in-rush currents due to out-of-phase switching of large motor loads.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 067
Transfer Switches Standard and Optional Features

Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
25.5-1
Standard and Optional Features

Table 25.5-1. Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
Feature Number Description Open Transition RLC1 Residential Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller ATC1 Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller 40400A Only ATC3 Contactor Switch ATC-300 Controller 401200A ATC8 Contactor Switch ATC-800 Controller Open Transition BIC3 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-300 Controller S S S S S S S S S S BIC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-800 Controller S S S S O S S S O S Closed Transition CBC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Closed Transition ATC-800 Controller S S S S O S S S O S
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1 1a
Timers Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) S Fixed 2 seconds or 15 seconds Adjustable 01800 seconds S Time delay engine start (TDES) Fixed 3 seconds Adjustable 0120 seconds
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S O S S O S O S
Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) S Fixed 1 minute Adjustable 01800 seconds S S S S S Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) Fixed 5 minutes Adjustable 01800 seconds Emergency (S2) source sensing Phase reversal All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency All-phase voltage unbalance and phase loss All-phase overfrequency System or engine test System test pushbutton Maintained 2-position test switch Maintained 4-position test switch Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Fixed 6 seconds Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Adjustable 06 seconds) Pushbutton bypass Bypass TDEN Bypass TDNE Maintenance selector switch Electrical operator isolator switch Preferred source selector Utility to utility or utility to generator Generator to generator Indicating lights Normal (S1) source connected Emergency (S2) source connected Normal (S1) source available Emergency (S2) source available Auxiliary relay contacts Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C
5 5H 5J 5K 5L 5N 6 6B 6D 6H 7 7a 8 8C 8D 9 9B 10 10B 10D 12C 12D 12G 12H 14 14C
S S S S
S S S S
S S O S S S S O
S S O S S S S S S
S S O S S S S O
S S O S S S S S S O
S S O S S S S S S O
Note: S = Standard, O = Optional
CA08104001E
25.5-2 Transfer Switches Standard and Optional Features

Table 25.5-1. Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature Description Number Open Transition RLC1 Residential Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller ATC1 Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller 40400A Only ATC3 Contactor Switch ATC-300 Controller 401200A ATC8 Contactor Switch ATC-800 Controller Open Transition BIC3 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-300 Controller O S S S S O O O O O O O O O O O O S O BIC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-800 Controller O S S S S O O O O O O O O O O O O S O
September 2011
Sheet 25 068
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Closed Transition CBC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Closed Transition ATC-800 Controller O S S S S O O O O O O O O O O O O S O
14D 14E 14F 14G 14H 15 15E 15F 15G 15H 15M 16S 18
Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C Position contacts Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C Position indicating contact emergency (3 Form C) Source 2 load shed contacts 4 Form C (must order as a separate eld-installed kit) Service equipment /overcurrent protection (S1) Metering IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM 2250 PXM 2260 PXM 2270
O O
S S S S O O O O O O O O O O O O S
O S S S S O O O O O O O O O O O O S O
S S S S O O O O O O O O O O O O S O
Position indicating contact normal (3 Form C)
18W
Analog ammeter one per phase Non-standard terminals
35 36 37 38 39 40 41
21A 23 23A 23J 23K 23L 26 26D 26H 26J 26K 26L 26M
Plant exerciser Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval, S FIXED 15 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe Selectabledisabled/7 day interval, 0600 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 0600 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe 24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable programmable plant exciser Normal (S1) source sensing Go to emergency (S2) input Phase reversal protection All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase voltage unbalance/phase loss Allows operation with generator with utility sensing (option available only through a eld-installed kit) All-phase undervoltage
S S S S S
S O S S O
S S S S S
S O S S O
S O S S O
26P
42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 069

25.5-3

Feature Description Number Open Transition RLC1 Residential Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller ATC1 Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller 40400A Only ATC3 Contactor Switch ATC-300 Controller 401200A ATC8 Contactor Switch ATC-800 Controller Open Transition BIC3 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-300 Controller O O BIC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-800 Controller S O Closed Transition CBC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Closed Transition ATC-800 Controller S O
22 23 24 25 26 27
29 29D 29G
Alternative transfer modes of operation Dual ATS bypass isolation Selector switch for automatic or non-automatic operation (switch must be labeled as non-automatic) Automatic transfer operation with selectable (via programming) automatic or nonautomatic retransfer operation with fail-safe Delayed transfer operation modes Time delay neutral adjustable 0120 seconds (available on 3-position contactors) Load voltage decay adjustable (available on 3-position contactors)
29J
32 32A 32B 32C 32D 32E 32F 32G
28
S S S S O S S S O
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
230% nominal voltage In-phase monitor defaults to load voltage decay In-phase monitor defaults to time delay neutral In-phase monitor (2-position contactors only) Time delay neutral xed 0 or 2 seconds (available on 3-position contactors and breaker-based design) Logic extender cable 48.00 inches (1219.0 mm) 96.00 inches (2438.0 mm) 144.00 inches (365.08 mm) Pretransfer Sig-l contacts 1 Form C Load shed from emergency Go to isolated position (not SE rated)
Delay transition timer adjustable 360 seconds
34 34A 34C 34E 35A 36 37 38 38A 38B 41 41A 41E 42 45 45A 45B 45C 45D 45E 45F 45G 45H
O O S
S O O S
O S O O O O S O O O O O O O O
S O O S
O S O O O S O O O O O O O O
S O O O S O O O O O O O O
Stainless steel device covers SS cover for device plate or service equipment Disconnect SS cover for controller Space heater with thermostat 100 watts 375 watts Seismic IBC, UBC Load sequencing contacts Load sequencing contacts (1) Load sequencing contacts (2) Load sequencing contacts (3) Load sequencing contacts (4) Load sequencing contacts (5) Load sequencing contacts (6) Load sequencing contacts (7) Load sequencing contacts (8) S
Select 16S for service entrance rating on RLC1.
CA08104001E

Feature Description Number Open Transition RLC1 Residential Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller ATC1 Contactor Switch ATC-100 Controller 40400A Only ATC3 Contactor Switch ATC-300 Controller 401200A ATC8 Contactor Switch ATC-800 Controller Open Transition BIC3 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-300 Controller BIC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Open Transition ATC-800 Controller O O
September 2011
Sheet 25 070
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Closed Transition CBC8 Bypass Isolation Contactor Switch Closed Transition ATC-800 Controller O O
45I 45J 47 47C 47D 47E 48 48A 48D 48F 48R 48RAC 49B 49C 51 51D1 51F1 80A
Load sequencing contacts (9) Load sequencing contacts (10) Closed transition operation-l modes (user must specify mode) Closed transition in-phase with default to load voltage decay Closed transition Closed transition in-phase with defaults to time delay neutral Communications IPONI module (INCOM communications) Ethernet communication 10Base-T only (PXG400 Gateway) EPONI module (10Base-T and 10Base-FL) MPONI module (MODBUS) Remote annunciator Remote annunciator with control Sensing isolation transformer Multi-tap voltage transformer (at 240, 208 and 120 Vac not included) Surge protection device 50 kA CVX surge device source 1 100 kA CVX surge device source 1 Emergency (S2) inhibit contact
O O
O S O
S O O O
O O O S O O O O
O O O O O O S O O O S
O S O O O
O O O O S O O O S
O O O O O S O O O S
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 071

Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
25.5-5
Table 25.5-2. Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features

Feature Number Description Open Transition ATV1 ATH1 Light Commercial Molded Case Switch ATC-100 Controller 1 1a Timers Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) Fixed 2 seconds or 15 seconds Adjustable 01800 seconds 2 Time delay engine start (TDES) Fixed 3 seconds Adjustable 0120 seconds 3 Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) Fixed 1 minute Adjustable 01800 seconds 4 Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) Fixed 5 minutes Adjustable 01800 seconds 5 5H 5J 5K 5L 5N 6 6B 6D 6H 7 7a 8 8C 8D 9 9B 10 10B 10D 12C 12D 12G 12H 12L 12M 14 14C 14D 14E 14F 14G 14H Emergency (S2) source sensing Phase reversal All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency All-phase voltage unbalance and phase loss All-phase overfrequency System or engine test System test pushbutton Maintained 2-position test switch Maintained 4-position test switch Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Fixed 6 seconds Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Adjustable 06 seconds) Pushbutton bypass Bypass TDEN Bypass TDNE Maintenance selector switch Electrical operator isolator switch Preferred source selector Utility to utility or utility to generator Generator to generator Indicating lights Normal (S1) source connected Emergency (S2) source connected Normal (S1) source available Emergency (S2) source available Normal (S1) source tripped (requires Feature 16) Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires Feature 16) Auxiliary relay contacts Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C S ATV3 ATH3 Molded Case Switch ATC-300 Controller ATVI ATH Molded Case Device ATC-600 Controller NTHE NTVE Molded Case Switch Non-Automatic Transfer Switch MTHX MTVX Molded Case Switch Manual Transfer Switch
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
S S S S S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S S S O S S S S O O O O S S
S S S S O S S S O O S S S O S S S S S S O O S S
S S S S O O O O O O
CA08104001E

Table 25.5-2. Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature Number Description Open Transition ATV1 ATH1 Light Commercial Molded Case Switch ATC-100 Controller 15 15E 15F 15G 15H Position contacts Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C Position indicating contact normal (3 Form C) Position indicating contact emergency (3 Form C) Integral overcurrent protection Normal (S1) switch only Emergency (S2) switch only Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches Service equipment /overcurrent protection (S1) Metering IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM 2250 PXM 2260 PXM 2270 18W Analog ammeter one per phase Rear bus connections Non-standard terminals Plant exerciser Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval, FIXED 15 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe Selectabledisabled/7 day interval, 0600 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 0600 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe 24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable programmable plant exciser Normal (S1) source sensing Go to emergency (S2) input Phase reversal protection All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency Three-phase voltage unbalance/phase loss Allows operation with generator with utility sensing (option available only through a eld-installed kit) All-phase undervoltage Alternative transfer modes of operation Selector switch for automatic or non-automatic operation (switch must be labeled as non-automatic) Automatic transfer operation with selectable (via programming) automatic or non-automatic retransfer operation with fail-safe 20A 21A 23 23A 23J 23K S S O O ATV3 ATH3 Molded Case Switch ATC-300 Controller ATVI ATH Molded Case Device ATC-600 Controller NTHE NTVE Molded Case Switch Non-Automatic Transfer Switch
September 2011
Sheet 25 072
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
MTHX MTVX Molded Case Switch Manual Transfer Switch
S S O O
S S O O
O O
16 16N 16E 16B 16S 18
O O O O O O O O O O O S
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
23L 26 26D 26H 26J 26K 26L 26M 26P 29 29G 29J
O S
S S S S S O O
S O S S O O
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 073

25.5-7

Feature Number Description Open Transition ATV1 ATH1 Light Commercial Molded Case Switch ATC-100 Controller 32 32A Delayed transfer operation modes Time delay neutral adjustable 0120 seconds (available on 3-position contactors and breaker-based design) Load voltage decay adjustable Delay transition timer adjustable 360 seconds Time delay neutral xed 0 or 2 seconds (available on 3-position contactors and breaker-based design) Logic extender cable 48.00 inches (1219.0 mm) 96.00 inches (2438.0 mm) 144.00 inches (3658.0 mm) Pretransfer Sig-l contacts 1 Form C Load shed from emergency Go to isolated position (not SE rated) Without ground fault protection Rated as suitable for use as service equipment (requires 16B or 16N or 16E or 16S) With ground fault protection Rated as suitable for use as service equipment (requires 16B or 16N or 16E or 16S) Stainless steel device covers SS cover for device plate or service equipment disconnect SS cover for controller Distribution panel (for 240/120V, AT3 switches only) 225A with (2) 200A feeders 300A with (3) 200A feeders 400A with (4) 200A feeders Space heater with thermostat 100 watts 375 watts Seismic IBC, UBC ATV3 ATH3 Molded Case Switch ATC-300 Controller ATVI ATH Molded Case Device ATC-600 Controller NTHE NTVE Molded Case Switch Non-Automatic Transfer Switch MTHX MTVX Molded Case Switch Manual Transfer Switch
22 23 24 25
S S
26
S O S
32B 32E 32G 34 34A 34C 34E 35A 36 37 37A
27 28 29 30 31
S O O
O O O O S O O
O O O O
37B
32
O O S O O O O O O S O O O S O O O S
38 38A 38B 39 39A 39B 39C 41 41A 41E 42
33
O S
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects rated 1000A or more if the electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than 150V to ground but not exceeding 600V phase to phase.
CA08104001E

Feature Number Description Open Transition ATV1 ATH1 Light Commercial Molded Case Switch ATC-100 Controller 45 45A 45B 45C 45D 45E 45F 45G 45H 45I 45J 48 48A Load sequencing contacts Load sequencing contacts (1) Load sequencing contacts (2) Load sequencing contacts (3) Load sequencing contacts (4) Load sequencing contacts (5) Load sequencing contacts (6) Load sequencing contacts (7) Load sequencing contacts (8) Load sequencing contacts (9) Load sequencing contacts (10) Communications IPONI module (INCOM communications) Ethernet communication 10Base-T only (PXG400 Gateway) EPONI module (10Base-T and 10Base-FL) MPONI module (MODBUS) Remote annunciator Remote annunciator with control Sensing isolation transformer Surge protection device (listed rating is per phase) 50 kAclipper device connected to Source 1 80 kAclipper device connected to Source 1 100 kAclipper device connected to Source 1 50 kACHSP device connected to Source 1 (240/120 Vac single-phase only) 75 kACHSP device connected to Source 1 (240/120 Vac single-phase only) Telephone/modem/DSL (four lines total) Cable TV/satellite cable/cable modem (two lines total) 12 Vdc generator start circuit protection 24 Vdc generator start circuit protection 100 kA surge device w/Advisor Source1 O ATV3 ATH3 Molded Case Switch ATC-300 Controller ATVI ATH Molded Case Device ATC-600 Controller NTHE NTVE Molded Case Switch Non-Automatic Transfer Switch
September 2011
Sheet 25 074
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
MTHX MTVX Molded Case Switch Manual Transfer Switch
O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
48D 48F 48R 48RAC 49B 51 51D1 51E1 51F1 51G1 51H1 51J4 51K4 51M4A 51M4B 51NA1
O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 075

Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
25.5-9
Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features

Feature Description Number Open Transition ATVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-600 Controller 1 1a Timers Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) Fixed 2 seconds or 15 seconds Adjustable 01800 seconds 2 Time delay engine start (TDES) Fixed 3 seconds Adjustable 0120 seconds 3 Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) Fixed 1 minute Adjustable 01800 seconds 4 Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) Fixed 5 minutes Adjustable 01800 seconds 5 5H 5J 5K 6 6B 6H 7 7a 8 8C 8D 9 9B 10 10B 10D 12C 12D 12G 12H 12L 12M 14 14C 14D 14E 14F 14G 14H 15 15E 15F Emergency (S2) source sensing Phase reversal All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency System or engine test System test pushbutton Maintained 4-position test switch Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Fixed 6 seconds Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Adjustable 06 seconds) Pushbutton bypass Bypass TDEN Bypass TDNE Maintenance selector switch Electrical operator isolator switch Preferred source selector Utility to utility or utility to generator Generator to generator Indicating lights Normal (S1) source connected Emergency (S2) source connected Normal (S1) source available Emergency (S2) source available Normal (S1) source tripped (requires Feature 16) Auxiliary relay contacts Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C Position contacts Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C NTVEMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount Non-Automatic Transfer BIVIMG Bypass Isolation Magnum Drawout ATC-600 Controller Closed Transition CTVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-800 Closed Transition S S S S O S S S O S CBVIMG Bypass Isolation Drawout ATC-800 Closed Transition
22 23 24 25
S S S S O S S S O S
S S S S O S S S O S
S S S S O S S S O S
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
S S O S S S S S S O
S S S S O O O O O O
S S O S S S S S S O O O O S S S S
Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires Feature 16) O O O S S S S
CA08104001E

Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature Description Number Open Transition ATVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-600 Controller 16 16N 16E 16B 18 Integral overcurrent protection Normal (S1) switch only Emergency (S2) switch only Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches Metering IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM 2250 PXM 2260 PXM 2270 PX 4000 PX 6000 PX 8000 20A 21A 22 22A 22B 22C 23 23J 23L Rear bus connections Non-standard terminals Ground bus with provisions to attach to neutral 18-conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil 30-conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil Special ground barcontact factory Plant exerciser Selectabledisabled/7 day interval, 0600 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe 24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable programmable plant exciser Normal (S1) source sensing Go to emergency (S2) input Phase reversal protection All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency Alternative transfer modes of operation Selector switch for automatic or non-automatic operation (switch must be labeled as non-automatic) Automatic transfer operation with selectable (via programming) automatic or non-automatic retransfer operation with fail-safe Delayed transfer operation modes Time delay neutral adjustable 0120 seconds (available on 3-position contactors and breaker-based design) Load voltage decay adjustable 230% nominal voltage In-phase monitor defaults to load voltage decay In-phase monitor defaults to time delay neutral 100.00 inches (2540.0 mm) open Magnum only Pretransfer Sig-l contacts 1 Form C Load shed from emergency NTVEMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount Non-Automatic Transfer BIVIMG Bypass Isolation Magnum Drawout ATC-600 Controller Closed Transition CTVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-800 Closed Transition O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O S O
September 2011
Sheet 25 076
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
CBVIMG Bypass Isolation Drawout ATC-800 Closed Transition
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O S
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O S O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O S O
26 26D 26H 26J 26K 29 29G
S O S S O
S O S S O
S O S S O
S O S S O
29J
39 40
32 32A
32B
O O O O O O
O O O O O
41 42 43
32C 32D 34F 35A 36
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 077

25.5-11
Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)

Feature Number Description Open Transition ATVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-600 Controller 37 37A Go to isolated position (not SE rated) Rated as suitable for use as service equipment (requires 16B or 16N or 16E) Without ground fault protection Rated as suitable for use as service equipment (requires 16B or 16N or 16E) With ground fault protection Stainless steel device covers SS cover for device plate or service equipment disconnect SS cover for controller Space heater with thermostat 375 watts Seismic IBC, UBC Load sequencing contacts Load sequencing contacts (1) Load sequencing contacts (2) Load sequencing contacts (3) Load sequencing contacts (4) Load sequencing contacts (5) Load sequencing contacts (6) Load sequencing contacts (7) Load sequencing contacts (8) Load sequencing contacts (9) Load sequencing contacts (10) Closed transition operation-l modes (user must specify mode) Closed transition in-phase with default to load voltage decay Closed transition Closed transition in-phase with defaults to time delay neutral Communications IPONI module (INCOM communications) Ethernet communication 10Base-T only (PXG-400 Gateway) EPONI module (10Base-T and 10Base-FL) MPONI module (Modbus) Remote annunciator Remote annunciator with control Sensing isolation transformer Magnum O O NTVEMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount Non-Automatic Transfer O BIVIMG Bypass Isolation Magnum Drawout ATC-600 Controller O O Closed Transition CTVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-800 Closed Transition O O CBVIMG Bypass Isolation Drawout ATC-800 Closed Transition O O
22 23 24 25 26
37B
27
O O O S O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O S O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O O O O O O O O O O
38 38A 38B 41 41E 42 45 45A 45B 45C 45D 45E 45F 45G 45H 45I 45J 47 47C 47D 47E 48 48A 48D 48F 48R 48RAC 49a
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
O O O
O O O
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
O O O O O O
O O O O O O
O O O O O
O O O O O
Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects rated 1000A or more if the electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than 150V to ground but not exceeding 600V phase to phase.
CA08104001E

Table 25-5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature Number Description Open Transition ATVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-600 Controller 51S1B 51S2B 51S3B 51S4B 51S5B 51S6B 51S7B 51S8B 51S9B 51S1C 51S2C 51S3C 51S4C 51S5C 51S6C 51S7C 51S8C 51S9C 51SC8 51SC12 51SC4 54a 55b 57a 57b 58a 58b 59a 59b 80A 81A 50 kA SPD standard source 1 80 kA SPD standard source 1 100 kA SPD standard source 1 120 kA SPD standard source 1 160 kA SPD standard source 1 200 kA SPD standard source 1 250 kA SPD standard source 1 300 kA SPD standard source 1 400 kA SPD standard source 1 50 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 80 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 100 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 120 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 160 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 200 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 250 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 300 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 400 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 Remote display panel cable (8 feet standard) Remote display panel cable (12 feet) Remote display panel cable (4 feet) Front-access cabinet (Magnum design only) Source 1 bottom mounting Magnum breaker lift device (1) Magnum breaker lift device (2) Shutterless cassette Shuttered casette Silver-plated bus Tin-plated bus Emergency (S2) inhibit contact General alarm indicator contact O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O S O O O NTVEMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount Non-Automatic Transfer O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O S O BIVIMG Bypass Isolation Magnum Drawout ATC-600 Controller O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O S O O O Closed Transition CTVIMG Magnum Fixed and Drawout Mount ATC-800 Closed Transition O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O S O O O
September 2011
Sheet 25 078
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CBVIMG Bypass Isolation Drawout ATC-800 Closed Transition O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O S O S O O O
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 079

Automatic Transfer Switch Features
25.5-13
Feature Description
Timers
1. Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE) Provides a time delay to allow for the generator to warm up before transferring the load to the emergency source. Timing begins only after the Emergency Source becomes available and is deemed good based on the programmable voltage and frequency set points in the controller. 2. Time Delay Engine Start (TDES) Provides a time delay before initiating the generator start cycle. This is to account for momentary power outages or voltage uctuations of the normal source. Provides a Form C contact to the generator starter circuit. 3. Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN) Provides a time delay of the retransfer operation to permit stabilization of the normal source. Timing begins only after the normal source becomes available and is deemed good based on the programmable voltage and frequency set points in the controller. This function is fail-safe protected. 4. Time Delay Engine Cooldown (TDEC) Provides a time delay before initiating the generator stop cycle after the retransfer operation. This allows the generator to cool down by running unloaded. Timing begins on completion of the retransfer cycle.
5H. Three-Phase Rotation Protection Provides three-phase reversal sensing in order to protect against transferring to an out-of-phase source. The controller will treat the opposite source as unavailable if the sources are out of phase, based on programmable set points in the controller. 5L. Three-Phase Voltage Unbalance/ Phase Loss Provides phase loss detection from blown fuses on the Source 2 supply circuit. 6B. Test Operators Automatic transfer switches are provided with a controller faceplate test pushbutton that simulates a loss of the Source 1 as standard. All programmed time delays (TDNE, TDEN, etc.) will be performed as part of the test. Engine run time of the test is equal to the plant exerciser programmed set point. All tests are fail-safe protected. 6H. 4-Position Test Selector Switch (FPSS) Provides a door-mounted 4-position, maintained contact selector switch marked Auto, Test, Engine Start, and Off. The FPSS is fail-safe protected, except for the Off Position. Transfer switch operation is determined by the switch position. Transfer switch operations are as follows: AutoAutomatic operation mode. TestA load test is performed until the switch is moved to another position. Engine StartA no-load test is performed until the switch is moved to another position. OffThe automatic transfer controller and engine start contact are disabled. A white pilot light is provided to indicate that the FPSS is in the Off position. 7. Time Delay Emergency Fail (TDEF) Provides a time delay that prevents a connected emergency source from being declared unavailable based on the customers set points. This is to account for momentary generator uctuations. If the Source 2 remains in a failed state, then 0.5 second after the TDEF timer expires the transfer switch will proceed with the programmed sequence for retransfer if Source 1 is available. This time delay is only implemented when Source 2 is a generator.
Note: This feature is also enabled when large loads cause generator output to drop below customer set points.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
8. Time Delay Bypass Pushbutton Provides a momentary contact pushbutton to bypass the TDNE (Feature 1) and/or TDEN (Feature 3) time delays. The Time Delay Bypass Pushbutton contact, when closed, will reduce any or all of the programmed time delay to zero. Must be executed when TDNE or TDEN timer is displayed on the controller. 8C. Bypass Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN) 8D. Bypass Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE) 9B. Maintenance Selector Switch (MSS) Provides a 2-position, maintained contact selector switch marked Operate and Disable. When the MSS is placed in the Disable position, the controller logic will be disconnected from the transfer motor circuit. The MSS is placed in the Operate position for normal automatic operation. 10. Preferred Source Selector Provides a means to designate either Source 1 or Source 2 as the Preferred source. The Preferred source is the source that the transfer switch will connect the load to if it is available.
Note: This is a programmable software feature not an actual switch.
Source 2 Sensing
5. Source 2Monitoring and Protection Provides monitoring and protection based on the Source 2 voltage and/or frequency set points. All Feature 5 monitoring and protection functions are fail-safe operations. 5J. All-Phase Undervoltage/ Underfrequency Protection Provides undervoltage/underfrequency monitoring and protection based on programmable set points in the controller. 5K. All-Phase Overvoltage/ Overfrequency Protection Provides overvoltage/overfrequency monitoring and protection based on programmable set points in the controller.
10B. Preferred Source Selector Provides a programmable source selector for use on systems comprised of dual utility or utility and engine/ generator power sources. 10D. Preferred Source Selector Provides a programmable source selector for use on systems comprised of dual engine/generator power sources. (Dual engine starting circuits are provided.) 12C. Source 1Load Connected Provides a green indication that indicates the load is connected to Source 1 when lit. 12D. Source 2Load Connected Provides a red indication that indicates the load is connected to Source 2 when lit.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 080
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Feature Description (Continued)

12G. Source 1Present Provides a white or amber indication Depending on the Controller that Source 1 has power; however, this does not indicate whether Source 1 is acceptable. 12H. Source 2Present Provides an amber indication that Source 2 has power; however, this does not indicate whether Source 2 is acceptable.
15. Switch Position Indication Contact Provides a contact that indicates if the power switching device is in the open or closed position. 15E. Source 1 Position Indication Contact Provides 1 Form C contact that indicates the position of the Source 1 power switching device. 15F. Source 2 Position Indication Contact Provides 1 Form C contact that indicates the position of the Source 2 power switching device. 15M. Source 2 Load Shed Contacts Provides 4 Form C contacts to initiate a load circuit disconnect while on Source 2. This gives the user the capability of selectively choosing not to run certain loads while on Source 2. 16B. Integral Overcurrent Protection on Both Power Source Switching Devices Provides integral overcurrent protection on both Source 1 and Source 2 power switching devices. 16E. Integral Overcurrent Protection on the Source 2 Power Switching Device Provides integral overcurrent protection on the Source 2 power switching device. 16N. Integral Overcurrent Protection on the Source 1 Power Switching Device Provides integral overcurrent protection on the Source 1 power switching device. 16S. External Overcurrent Protection on the Source 1 Power Switching Device Provides overcurrent protection on the Source 1 power switching device. 18. Metering The ATS controller provides voltage and frequency readings. If additional metering functions are required, Eaton offers a series of digital meters that may be added to the ATS. The meter type can provide simple current and voltage readings or more capable meters providing Power, Demand and energy readings. Available with an optional communications interface. (See Feature 48 Communications for available communication modules.) Feature 18 metering options include all required external devices (CTs, etc.) for a fully functioning metering system.
IQ 130/140/150
IQ 130
This digital meter provides basic current and voltage per phase (L-L, L-N) and min./max. readings (I, V). Optional communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
IQ 140
In addition to basic current and voltage, will provide frequency, power measurements real, reactive and apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA). Optional communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
Overcurrent Trip Indication

Available only with integral overcurrent protection (Feature 16) (shown on automatic transfer controller display). 12L. Source 1 Trip Indication The automatic transfer controller display will read Lockout if the Source 1 circuit breaker is in the tripped position. 12M. Source 2 Trip Indication The automatic transfer controller display will read Lockout if the Source 2 circuit breaker is in the tripped position. 14. Relay Auxiliary Contacts 14C. Source 1 Present Provides 4 Form C relay auxiliary contacts. The relay is energized when Source 1 is present. 14D. Source 2 Present Provides 4 Form C relay auxiliary contacts. The relay is energized when Source 2 is present. 14E. Source 1 Available Provides 1 Form C relay auxiliary contact. The relay is energized when Source 1 is available and within the controllers programmable set points. 14F. Source 2 Available Provides 1 Form C relay auxiliary contact. The relay is energized when Source 2 is available and within the controllers programmable set points. 14G. Source 1 Present Provides 2 Form C relay auxiliary contacts. The relay is energized when Source 1 is present. 14H. Source 2 Present Provides 2 Form C relay auxiliary contacts. The relay is energized when Source 2 is present.
IQ 150
In addition to basic current/voltage/ frequency and power readings, will provide Energy Real reactive and apparent (Wh, VAR, Vah). Optional communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
IQ 250/260
IQ 250
This digital meter provides current per phase and current demand, voltage (L-L, L-N) and frequency. Power, energy and demand readings. Real, reactive and apparent power and energy, power factor. RS-485 communications, Modbus RTU or ASCII. Optional I/O slots available.
IQ 260
In addition to all of the features of the IQ 250, power quality analysis is available with THD voltage and current per phase.
Power Xpert 2000

Provides either a Power Xpert PXM 2250, PXM 2260 or PXM 2270 meter.
Power Xpert 4000, 6000, 8000

Provides one of the Power Xpert Meters with or without graphic displays. 18W. Ammeter Side Metering Provides an ammeter for monitoring the load side circuit. 20A. Rear Bus Provisions Provides Source 1, Source 2 and Load Circuit rear accessible bus stabs with provision for bus bar connection. Eaton transfer switches are provided with either front or rear (dependant on switch type) connected solderless screw-type terminals for power cable connection as standard.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 081

25.5-15

21A. Optional Power Cable Connection Terminals Eaton transfer switches are provided as standard with Source 1, Source 2 and load circuit solderless screw-type terminals for power cable connection. Alternate terminal wire sizes, and compression lug provisions may be available dependant on transfer switch type and ampere rating.
26D. Go to Emergency (Source 2) Provides the capability for an external contact closure to initiate a transfer to the Source 2 power source. This includes starting the generator, performing the programmed time delays and the transfer operation. Retransfer will occur when the external contact is opened. This is a fail-safe function.
29J. Automatic Transfer or Automatic Transfer With Non-Automatic Retransfer Operation Provides a eld-selectable programmable set point that permits the transfer switch to operate in one of the following two transfer modes (A or B): A. Fully automatic operation. B. Automatic engine/generator startup and automatic transfer operation from Source 1 to Source 2. Manual pushbutton operation is required to initiate the retransfer operation and engine/generator shutdown. The pushbutton for manual retransfer operation is included. This is fail-safe protected. 29G. Automatic/Manual Operation With Selector Switch Provides 2-position selector switch (labeled Auto/manual) that permits selection of the automatic or manual transfer. When in the Auto position, the transfer switch operates with fully automatic transfer, retransfer and generator startup and shutdown operations. When in the Manual position, manual operation is required to initiate the generator startup or retransfer with generator shutdown operations.
Note: Transfer switches with Feature 29 must be labeled as non-automatic transfer switch equipment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Source 1 Sensing
26. Source 1Monitoring and Protection Provides Source 1 monitoring and protection functions. If Source 1 fails, then the automatic transfer controller will begin the sequence of operations necessary to transfer the load to Source 2. All Feature 26 monitoring and protection functions are fail-safe operations. 26H. Three-Phase Rotation Protection Provides three-phase reversal sensing in order to protect against transferring to an out-of-phase source. The controller will treat the opposite source as unavailable if the sources are out of phase, based on programmable set points in the controller. 26J. All-Phase Undervoltage/ Underfrequency Protection Provides all-phase undervoltage/ underfrequency monitoring and protection based on programmable set points in the controller. 26K. All-Phase Overvoltage/ Overfrequency Protection Provides all-phase overvoltage/ overfrequency monitoring and protection based on programmable set points in the controller. 26L. Three-Phase Voltage Unbalance/ Phase Loss Provides phase loss detection from blown fuses on the Source 1. 26M. Generator Utility Sensing Allows for the switch to operate with generators that have internal utility sensing. This option comes as a kit that needs to be eld installed. 26N. All-Phase Undervoltage Protection Provides undervoltage protection for Source 1 (ATC-100 Controller only). 29. Transfer Operation Modes Provides standard or optional transfer modes, mode selection devices and operational methods for transfer switches.
Plant Exerciser
23A. Plant Exerciser With Fail-Safe Provides a means for automatic testing of the engine generator set or standby power system. All programmed time delays in the controller will be performed during plant exerciser operations. Programmable set points for test intervals are start time, either disabled, daily, 7, 14 or 28 days. 15-minute xed engine test time. Test may be performed with or without load transfer. Test may be manually cancelled during the operation. This function is fail-safe protected. 23J. Plant Exerciser (PE) With Fail-Safe Provides a means for automatic testing of the engine generator set or standby power system. All programmed time delays in the controller will be performed during the plant exerciser operation. Programmable set points for test interval are start time, either disabled or 7 days, and engine test time. Test may be performed with or without a load transfer. Test may be manually cancelled during the operation. This is a fail-safe operation. 23K. Plant Exerciser With Fail-Safe Provides a means for automatic testing of the engine generator set or standby power system. All programmed time delays in the controller will be performed during plant exerciser operations. Programmable set points for test intervals are start time, either disabled, daily, 7, 14 or 28 days, engine test time. Test may be performed with or without load transfer. Test may be manually cancelled during the operation. This function is fail-safe protected.
32. Delayed Transition Transfer Modes for Open Transition Transfer Switches Provides delayed transition transfer modes for an open transition transfer switch. Often used in systems with inductive loads, a delayed transition transfer switch may prevent or reduce inrush currents due to out-of-phase switching of inductive loads. 32A. Time Delay Neutral Provides a time delay in the neutral position during the transfer and retransfer operations during which both Source 1 and Source 2 are disconnected from the load circuit. This allows inductive loads time to reach a safe voltage and eliminate back EMF. The time delay is programmable and is the same for both transfer and retransfer operations. This is a passive feature that requires the consulting engineer/installer to determine the settings based on how the user will operate the facility. Adjustable 0120 seconds.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 082
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

32B. Load Voltage Decay Provides load voltage measurement to sense back EMF that is generated when the transfer switch is the neutral position. It provides a delay in transfer in either direction if an unacceptable level is sensed as established by a programmed set point. This is an active feature that adapts to how the facility is operating in order to minimize neutral position wait time, but ensure safety. Adjustable 230% of nominal voltage. 32C. In-Phase Transition With Default to Load Voltage Decay Provides in-phase transition, which is a feature that will permit a transfer or retransfer between two available sources that have a phase angle difference near zero. The in-phase transition feature includes permissible frequency difference and synchronization time set points. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted frequency difference and time, then the controller defaults to the load voltage decay operation as described in Feature 32B. Adjustable frequency difference 0.03.0 Hz. Adjustable synchronization time allowance 160 minutes. 32D. In-Phase Transition With Default to Time Delay Neutral Provides in-phase transition, which is a feature that will permit a transfer or retransfer only between two available sources that have a phase angle difference near zero. The in-phase transition feature includes permissible frequency difference and synchronization time set points. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted frequency difference and time, then the controller defaults to the time delay neutral operation as described in Feature 32A. Adjustable frequency difference 0.03.0 Hz. Adjustable synchronization time allowance 160 minutes. 32E. Delayed Transition The transfer and re-transfer operations during which both Source 1 and Source 2 are disconnected from the load circuit. The time delay is programmable and the same for both transfer and re-transfer operation. Adjustable 360 seconds.
32F. In-Phase Transition Provides in-phase transition, this feature will permit a transfer or retransfer between two available sources that have a phase angle difference of 8 degrees or less. The in-phase transition feature includes permissible frequency difference and synchronization time set points. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted frequency difference and time, the Alarm relay will energize and Failed to Sync will be displayed on Line 1 of the controller. After resetting the alarm, another in-phase transition may be attempted or a non-synchronized transfer may be initiated by failing the connected source. The adjustable frequency difference is 0.0 to 3.0 Hz. If the synchronization does not occur within a specied amount of time, the Alarm relay will energize and the failure will be logged into the transfer history as either Sync Fail - Freq or Sync Fail - Phase depending on whether the frequency difference or the phase difference was excessive. 32G. Time Delay Neutral This feature provides a time delay in the neutral position during the transfer and retransfer operations during which both the utility source and the generator source are disconnected from the load circuit. TDN cannot be implemented on a transfer switch using a 2-position contactor. Jumper selectable at disable (0 seconds) or enable (2 seconds).
36. Load Shed From Emergency Provides the capability for an external NC contact to initiate a load circuit disconnection from the Source 2 power source. If the load circuit is connected to Source 2 and the contact is opened, then a retransfer to Source 1 is completed if Source 1 is available. If Source 1 is not available, then the transfer switch will transfer to neutral. If the load circuit is connected to Source 1 and the contact is open, then a transfer Source 2 is prohibited. 37. Service Equipment Rated Transfer Switch Provides the label suitable for use as service equipment and the features necessary to meet the requirements for the label. Includes service disconnect with visible indication and neutral assembly with removable |link. Feature 16B or 16N must be selected separately. 37A. Service Equipment Rated Transfer Switch Without Ground Fault Protection Provides service equipment rating for an application that does not require ground fault protection. 37B. Service Equipment Rated Transfer Switch With Ground Fault Protection Provides service equipment rating for an application that requires ground fault protection. 38. Steel Cover Provides protection for a device panel as option 38a and protection for the controller as option 38b. 39. Distribution Panel The distribution panel feature uses a panelboard design with bolt-on circuit breakers type EHD. Bolt-on breakers are designed to hold up to the changes in temperature and humidity that an industrial application calls for. (240/120 Vac single-phase systems only.) 39A. 225A With (2) 200A Feeders 39B. 300A With (3) 200A Feeders 39C. 400A With (4) 200A Feeders
Logic Extender Cable

34A. 48 Inches (1219 mm) Provides logic extension cable with connectors. 34C. 96 Inches (2438 mm) Provides logic extension cable with connectors. 34E. 144 Inches (3658 mm) Provides logic extension cable with connectors. 34F. 100 Inches (2540 mm) Provides logic extension only for open Magnum ATS. 35A. Pretransfer Signal With 1 Form C Contact Provides a signal prior to the transferring of the load. Will not transfer until the programmable delay set point in the controller is reached. If both sources are not available, this option will ignore the time delay set in the controller.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 083

25.5-17

41. Space Heater With Thermostat Provides a space heater and adjustable thermostat. External control power is not required. Availability is dependent on transfer switch type. 41A. Space Heater With Thermostat 100 Watt Provides 100-watt space heater with an adjustable thermostat. 41E. Space Heater With Thermostat 375 Watt Provides 375-watt space heater with an adjustable thermostat. 42. Seismic Qualication 45. Load Sequencing Capability Provides the capability for sequential closure of up to 10 addressable relays after a transfer. Each addressable relay provides (1) Form C contact. A single adjustable time delay between each of the relay closures is provided. Operates via a sub-network. Adjustable 1120 seconds. 45A. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (1) addressable relay. 45B. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (2) addressable relays. 45C. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (3) addressable relays. 45D. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (4) addressable relays. 45E. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (5) addressable relays. 45F. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (6) addressable relays. 45G. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (7) addressable relays. 45H. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (8) addressable relays. 45I. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (9) addressable relays. 45J. Load Sequencing Contact Provides (10) addressable relays.
47. Transfer Modes for Closed Transition Transfer Switches Provides available transition transfer modes for a closed transition transfer switch. Closed transition is a make before break transfer and retransfer scheme that will parallel (a maximum of 100 ms) Source 1 and Source 2 providing a seamless transfer when both sources are available. The closed transition feature includes permissible voltage difference frequency difference and synchronization time allowance set points. The phase angle difference between the two sources must be near zero for a permitted transfer. These are all programmable set points in the controller. 47C. Closed Transition With Default to In-Phase Transition With Default to Load Voltage Decay Provides a closed transition transfer as the primary transfer mode. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted voltage difference, frequency difference, phase angle difference and time, then the controller defaults to the in-phase transition with default to load voltage decay operations as described in Feature 32C and 32B. Adjustable frequency difference 0.00.3 Hz. Adjustable voltage difference 15% volts. Adjustable synchronization time allowance 160 minutes. 47D. Closed Transition Provides a closed transition transfer as the primary transfer mode. Only under a fail-safe condition (i.e., loss of the connected source) will the controller transfer to the alternate source using the load voltage decay operation as described in Feature 32B32B. Adjustable frequency difference 0.00.3 Hz. Adjustable voltage difference 15% V. 47E. Closed Transition With Default to In-Phase Transition With Default to Time Delay Neutral Provides a closed transition transfer as the primary transfer mode. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted voltage difference, frequency difference, phase angle difference and time, then the controller defaults to the in-phase transition with default to time delay neutral operation as described in Features 32D and 32A32B32A. Adjustable frequency difference 0.00.3 Hz. Adjustable voltage difference 15 percent volts. Adjustable synchronization time allowance 160 minutes.
47F. Closed/Load Voltage Decay ATC-800 controllers equipped with Feature Set 47F will perform a closed transition when both sources are synchronized in frequency, phase and voltage. Failure to synchronize will result in an open transition Time Delay Load Voltage Decay transfer. Time Delay Load Voltage Decay uses the load voltage measurements to sense back EMF that is generated when the transfer switch is in the Neutral position. It provides a delay in transfer in either direction if an unacceptable level is sensed as established by a customer programmed level. The transfer will not take place until the back EMF decays below the acceptable programmed level. This feature has a separate setting of enabling or disabling the operation. If disabled, the transfer switch will not delay in the Neutral position and will transfer between the sources as fast as possible. This feature is not available with the Time Delay Neutral Optional Feature 32A. 47G. Closed/Time Delay Neutral ATC-800 controllers equipped with Feature Set 47F will perform a closed transition transfer when both sources are synchronized in frequency, phase and voltage. Failure to synchronize will result in an open transition Time Delay Neutral transfer. Time Delay Neutral provides a time delay in the transfer switch neutral position when both sources are open. This delay takes place when the load is transferred in either direction to prevent excessive in-rush currents due to out-of-phase switching of large motor loads. 48. Communication Modules Provides communications modules for the ATC-300, ATC-600 and ATC-800 transfer switch controllers. 48A. INCOM Communication (IPONI) Provides Eatons proprietary INCOM protocol communications modules. 48D. Ethernet
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Communication (PXG400 Gateway)

Translates Modbus RTU, QCPort or INCOM to Modbus TCP. The PXG400 Gateway includes embedded Web server monitoring of up to 64 connected devices. (Includes the IPONI with the ATC-600 and ATC-800 controllers.)
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 25 084
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

48F. Modbus
51S1B. 50 kASPD standard source 1 51S2B. 80 kASPD standard source 1 51S3B. 100 kASPD standard source 1 51S4B. 120 kASPD standard source 1 51S5B. 160 kASPD standard source 1 51S6B. 200 kASPD standard source 1 51S7B. 250 kASPD standard source 1 51S8B. 300 kASPD standard source 1 51S9B. 400 kASPD standard source 1 51S1C. 50 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S2C. 80 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S3C. 100 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S4C. 120 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S5C. 160 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S6C. 200 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S7C. 250 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S8C. 300 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51S9C. 400 kASPD standard with surge counter source 1 51SC8. Remote display panel (8 feet standard) 51SC12. Remote display panel (12 feet) 51SC4. Remote display panel (4 feet) 54. Front Access 54A. Front access cabinet available for all Magnum products. This option will add an additional pull section mounted on the side of the switch. 59a. Silver-Plated Bus Silver-plated bus is a standard feature for all Magnum-based designs. 59b. Tin-Plated Bus Tin-plated bus is available as an option for Magnum-based designs.
Glossary
With respect to their use in this document and as they relate to switch operation, the following terminology is dened: AvailableA source is dened as available when it is within its undervoltage/overvoltage/underfrequency/ overfrequency (if applicable) set point ranges for the nominal voltage and frequency setting. Fail-safeA feature that prevents disconnection from the only available source and will also force a transfer or retransfer operation to the only available source. RetransferRetransfer is dened as a change of the load connection from the secondary to primary source. Source 1is the primary source or normal source or normal power source or normal. (Except when Source 2 has been designated the Preferred Source.) Source 2is the secondary source or emergency source or emergency power source or emergency or standby or backup source. (Except when Source 2 has been designated the Preferred Source.) Source 1Failed or failsSource 1 is dened as failed when it is outside of its undervoltage or overvoltage or underfrequency or overfrequency (if applicable) set point ranges for the nominal voltage and frequency setting. Source 2Failed or failsSource 2 is dened as failed when it is outside of its undervoltage or overvoltage or under-frequency or overfrequency (if applicable) set point ranges for the nominal voltage and frequency setting for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds after the time delay emergency fail (TDEF) time delay expires. TransferTransfer is dened as a change of the load connection from the primary to secondary source except when specically used as Transfer to Neutral. Transfer to NeutralTransfer to Neutral is dened as when the load circuits are disconnected from both Source 1 and Source 2.
Communication (MPONI)
Provides Modbus RTU protocol via communications module. 48R. Remote Annunciator Provides remote monitoring of source availability, source position and test status for the ATC-600 and ATC-800 controllers. Operates via the controller sub-network. 48RAC. Remote Annunciator with Control Provides remote monitoring and control via a color touch screen display for the ATC-300, ATC-600 and ATC-800 controllers. Operates using Modbus protocol (MPONI required for the ATC-600 and 800). Option 51. Surge Protection Device Two types of surge protection devices are used in Eaton automatic transfer switches. Both types meet the requirements for UL 1449 3rd Edition for surge suppression devices and are CE marked. The type CVX is used on Eaton wallmount ATS designs and the Eaton type SPD are used on oor-standing designs. CVX The CVX device features a Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistor technology and comes with high intensity LED phase status indicators. SPD The SPD features a Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistor technology. It comes with dual-colored protection status indicators for each phase and for neutral-ground protection mode. It comes with an audible alarm with silence button and a Form C contact. An optional SPD with surge counter feature package is available. This provides six-digit surge counter with reset button.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 25 085

kW Conversion Chart
25.5-19
Appendix AkW Conversion Chart

Table 25.5-4. kW to Ampere Conversion Chart
Three-Phase Ampere Table at Common Line-to-Line Voltage kW 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 80.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 175.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 700.0 800.0 900.0 1000.0
22 23
240V 15 23 30 45 60 75 90 120 150 180 226 241 301 376 451 526 601 752 902 1052 1203 1504 1804 2105 2406 2706 3007 380V 9 14 19 28 38 47 57 76 95 114 142 152 190 237 285 332 380 475 570 665 760 950 1140 1329 1519 1709 1899 400V 9 13 18 27 36 45 54 72 90 108 135 144 180 226 271 316 361 451 541 631 722 902 1083 1263 1443 1624 1804 415V 9 13 17 26 35 43 52 70 87 104 130 139 174 217 261 304 348 435 522 609 696 870 1043 1217 1391 1565 1739 460V 8 12 16 24 31 39 47 63 78 94 118 126 157 196 235 275 314 392 471 549 628 784 941 1098 1255 1412 1569 480V 8 11 15 23 30 38 45 60 75 90 113 120 150 188 226 263 301 376 451 526 601 752 902 1052 1203 1353 1503 600V 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 90 96 120 150 180 210 241 301 361 421 481 601 722 842 962 1083 1203
200V 18 27 36 54 72 90 108 144 180 217 271 289 361 451 541 631 722 902 1083 1263 1443 1804 2165 2526 2887 3248 3609
208V 17 26 34 52 69 87 104 139 173 208 260 278 347 434 520 607 694 867 1041 1214 1388 1735 2082 2429 2776 3123 3470
220V 16 25 33 49 66 82 98 131 164 197 246 262 328 410 492 574 656 820 984 1148 1312 1640 1968 2296 2624 2952 3280
230V 16 24 31 47 63 78 94 126 157 188 235 251 314 392 471 549 628 784 941 1098 1255 1569 1883 2197 2510 2824 3138
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
At 0.8 power factor.
CA08104001E
25.5-20 Transfer Switches

September 2011
Sheet 25 086
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
Power Circuit Breakers & Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

September 2011
Sheet 26 001
26.0-1
Contents
Power Circuit Breakers & Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Breaker Type Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.0-2 Magnum Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1 Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-5 Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12 Breaker-Mounted Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-14 Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15 Technical and Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-21 Accessories and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-27 Series NRX Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-2 Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-4 Communications Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-5 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Power Circuit Breakers Magnum DS and Series NRX Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475 Section 26 28 11 Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Magnum SB and Series NRX Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . Section 16475 Section 26 28 11 Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904 Section 26 28 50
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
CA08104001E
26.0-2
Breaker Type Comparison
September 2011
Sheet 26 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers, Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
There are two main classications of low voltage circuit breakers molded-case circuit breakers and low voltage power circuit breakers. All UL, NEMA and ANSI standards are for molded-case circuit breakers and low voltage power circuit breakers. The industry recognizes three types of circuit breakersmolded-case circuit breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power circuit breakers LVPCB). Insulated-case circuit breakers are designed to meet the standards for molded-case circuit breakers. Table 26.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart
Description Select trip short-time rating LVPCB (Type Magnum DS and Series NRX) Selective trip over full range of fault currents up to interrupting rating (high short-time ratings) Types of operators: mechanically operated and electrically operated two-step stored energy 5-cycle closing for electrically operated devices Available in drawout construction permitting racking to a distinct test position and removal for maintenance Interrupting duty at 635 Vac: 42100 kA and current limiting with or without fuses up to 200 kA Special current limiting types available with or without fuses up to 200 kA Higher Small number of frame sizes available. Typical 8006000A Extensive maintenance possible on all frame sizes Used in enclosures, MCCs, switchboards and switchgear Not available in series ratings 100% continuous current rated in its enclosure ANSI/IEEE C37 UL 1066 ICCB (Type Magnum SB and Series NRX) Selective trip over partial range of fault currents within the interrupting rating (medium short-time ratings). Typically up to 35 kA Types of operators: mechanically operated and electrically operated two-step stored energy 5-cycle closing for electrically operated devices Available in drawout construction permitting racking to a distinct test position and removal for maintenance Interrupting duty at 508 Vac: 35 150 kA MCCB (QUICKLAG/Series C/Series G) Selective trip over a smaller range of fault currents within the interrupting rating (low short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times the frame size Types of operators: mechanically operated over-center toggle or motor operator Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically operated devices Typically xed-mounted but large frame sizes may be available in drawout construction Interrupting duty at 480 Vac: 22100 kA without fuses and up to 200 kA with integral fuses or for currentlimiting type Current limiting available with and without fuses up to 200 kA Low Large number of frame sizes available. Typical 1002500A Very limited maintenance possible on larger frame sizes Used in enclosures, panelboards, switchboards, MCCs and control panels Available in series ratings 80% continuous-current rated, unless specically stated to be rated 100% in an enclosure NEMA AB1/AB3 UL 489
Low voltage power circuit breakers comply with the following standards:
ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for LVPCB ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures IEEE Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in Enclosures UL 1066LVPCB
Molded-case circuit breakers and insulated-case circuit breakers typically comply with the following standards:
UL 489MCCB UL 489Molded-Case Switches (MCS) NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS NEMA AB3MCCB Application
Operator type
Closing speed Mounting
Interrupting rating
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Current limiting Relative cost Available frame sizes Maintenance Enclosure types Series ratings Enclosed rating
Special current limiting types available without fuses up to 150 kA Medium Small number of frame sizes available. Typical 8006000A Limited maintenance possible on larger frame sizes Used in enclosures, MCCs and switchboards Not available in series ratings 80% continuous-current rated, unless specically stated to be rated 100% in an enclosure NEMA AB1/AB3 UL 489 or UL 1066
Standards
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 003
26.1-1
Low Voltage Power/Insulated-Case Circuit BreakersMagnum DS and SB
Magnum Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers for Global Application

Magnum low voltage power circuit breakers enable comprehensive solutions to meet and exceed the unique and wide-ranging requirements of todays global power distribution systems. This powerful circuit breaker offering is designed for ultimate custom conguration and application exibility, with the needs of the power distribution equipment user and the electrical equipment manufacturer in mind.
Three Product Families

Magnum consists of three product families; each provides specic rating features and approvals to optimize performance when applied in power distribution equipment and custom enclosures:
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers for ANSI/UL 1558 Rated Switchgear Applications
Up to 635 Vac 2006000A continuous 42200 kA interrupting
Standards
Magnum DS circuit breakers meet or exceed all applicable requirements of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA. See Tab 20 for ANSI/UL 1558 low voltage drawout switchgear application considerations, including system voltage and frequency, continuous current ratings, ambient temperature, altitude, and other unusual environmental and operating conditions. See Tab 21 for UL 891 switchboard application considerations, ratings and layouts.
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers for UL 891 Switchboard Applications

30 31 32 33 34 35
Up to 635 Vac 2006000A continuous 50150 kA interrupting
36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers for IEC Rated Switchboard Applications
Up to 690 Vac 2006300A continuous 40105 kA Icu/Ics

Magnum IEC Rated Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker Family for IEC Switchboard Applications
43
For more information on Magnum IEC air circuit breakers, please visit www.eaton.com/electrical.
26.1-2

September 2011
Sheet 26 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
All Magnum Breaker Types Features, Benets and Functions
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Interruption ratings up to 200 kA with current limiting performance and low current let-through to reduce damaging energy to downstream equipment at high fault levels or with high short-time ratings for increased selectivity Short-time ratings up to 100 kA to maximize system coordination and selectivity Four physical frame sizes (narrow, standard, double narrow and double) to promote breaker application in compact modular enclosures Continuous current ratings from 8006000A with 100% rating at 40C and no derating on most ratings up to 50C in a properly sized and ventilated enclosure Fixed breaker mounting congurations with horizontal and optional vertical and front connected terminal connections Drawout breaker mounting congurations with cassette and optional safety shutters Three- and four-pole breaker congurations Through-the-door design for human interface with the breaker compartment door closed Two-step stored energy mechanism for manually and electrically operated breakers Digitrip RMS Trip Unit family protection with four models each providing increasing levels of protection and feature options for coordination, information and diagnostics: Microprocessor-based rms sensing Basic to programmable overcurrent protection and alarms Local display for information, status and diagnostics Ampere, voltage and power metering Power quality, harmonics and waveform capture Communications with translators to common protocols Zone selective interlocking for improved coordination Integral Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Breaker health monitoring
Field-installable accessories (UL listed) common across the breaker frames and designed to be easily installed in the eld to service or modify the breaker at the point of use
Secondary terminal contacts mounted at the top front of the breaker and away from the primary voltage areas for improved safety and access. Finger-safe terminal blocks accommodate ring-tongue or spade type terminals as standard
Through-the-Door Design for Human Interface with the Breaker Compartment Door Closed
High Technology Microprocessor-Based Digitrip RMS 1150+ Trip Units are Available with Advanced Features Like Programmable Overcurrent Settings, Power Metering, Power Quality and Communications
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 005
26.1-3
Breaker Features on Front Cover

The controls and indicators are functionally grouped on the breaker faceplate to optimize the human interface, visibility and ease of use. For maximum safety, a modern, through-the-door design permits access to the breaker levering system, trip unit, controls and indicators with the door closed. Mechanical trip ag pop-out indicator (optional)red Interlocked indicator requiring manual reset is also available Accessory viewing windows for: Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) Spring Release device (SR) Undervoltage Release (UVR) device or second STA
22 23

24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Digitrip RMS trip unit (Model 520M shown) protected by clear cover Contact status indicators: OPENgreen CLOSEDred
Magnum DS Drawout Breaker
Spring status indicators:

Chargedyellow Dischargedwhite
Push OFF (open) pushbuttonred Push ON (close) pushbuttongreen Manual spring charging handle for manually charging the stored energy springs Mechanical operations counter (optional) Key off lock (optional) Padlockable levering device shutter for drawout breakers Color-coded position indicator for drawout breakers:

Accessory Viewing Windows Visibly Conrm the Breaker Shunt Trip, Spring Release, UVR Installation and Their Control Voltage Rating Drawout Breaker Levering Can be Accomplished with the Compartment Door Closed without the Need for a Special Levering Tool
36 37 38 39 40 41 42
CONNECTred TESTyellow DISCONNECTgreen
Through-the-Door Design for Human Interface with the Breaker Compartment Door Closed, for Example, Manually Charging the Stored Energy Springs
43
CA08104001E
26.1-4

September 2011
Sheet 26 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Breaker Internal Features

Magnum circuit breakers are designed for ease of access for inspection, modication and maintenance at the point of use. The breaker front cover is easily removed with four captive bolts, revealing the modular internal breaker features. Secondary terminal points for internal standardized breaker wiring connections Breaker accessory mounting deck with three positions for mounting: Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) Spring Release device (SR) Undervoltage Release (UVR) device or second STA

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Model 1150+ shown) Spring charging motor (optional) for electrically charging the stored energy springs Manual spring charging handle for manually charging the stored energy springs Padlockable levering device shutter for drawout breakers Color-coded position indicator for drawout breakers: CONNECTred TESTyellow DISCONNECTgreen

Magnum Drawout Breaker Front View with Front Cover Removed Showing Easy Access to the Breaker Internal Devices
Secondary contact blocks for connection to external cell control wiring Removable arc chute covers for easy access to breaker main contacts Primary nger cluster disconnecting contacts for drawout breaker are mounted on the breaker element for ease of access for inspection and maintenance
Note: Some competitors mount the primary nger clusters inside the cell, requiring shutdown of the switchgear for inspection and maintenance.
Current sensor viewing windows to view and conrm breaker sensor rating Rigid frame housing (thermoset composite resin) providing increased strength and durability
Magnum Drawout Breaker Rear View Showing Primary Disconnecting Finger Clusters Mounted on the Breaker for Ease of Inspection
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 007
Power Circuit Breakers

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
26.1-5

Magnum DS is a true UL 1066 listed low voltage power circuit breaker family, designed for the highest performance requirements of switchgear and specialty enclosure applications. Magnum DS low voltage power circuit breakers have short-time withstand and interruption ratings up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 6000A to maximize system coordination and selectivity Magnum MDDX non-current limiting PCBs have 200 kA interrupting ratings and up to 100 kA short-time rating at 508 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 6000A Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breakers (fuseless) have 200 kA interrupting ratings and 3050 kA short-time ratings at 480 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breakers with integral current limiters (fuses) have 200 kA interrupting ratings at 600 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 2000A
UL and ANSI Test Certications

Magnum DS meets or exceeds the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA standards, including:

Comprehensive Enclosure Solutions

Magnum DS has proven performance in Eaton manufactured switchgear and switchboards with the following test certications: UL 1558 (Magnum DS low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear) UL 891 (Pow-R-Line C low voltage switchboards) UL 1008 standard for transfer switch equipment UL, CSA 22.2.31 low voltage assemblies
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) ANSI C37.16 (preferred ratings, related requirements, and application recommendations for low voltage power circuit breakers and AC power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.17 (trip devices for AC and general purpose DC low voltage power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.50 (test procedures for low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) UL 1066 (standard for low voltage AC and DC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) NEMA SG3 (this standard adopts ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)
Approvals
UL listed: Magnum DS breaker UL File No. E52096 and cassette UL File No. E204565 ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) Type Listed Certicate Number 04-HS422844A-DUB
Magnum DS, MDSX and MDSL Circuit Breakers
Magnum DS low voltage power circuit breakers have high withstand ratings from 42 to 100 kA to provide for maximum system coordination and selectivity.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breakers have fast opening contacts to provide interrupting ratings up to 200 kA at 508 Vac without fuses.
Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breakers have integral current limiters to provide interrupting ratings of 200 kA at 600 Vac.
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
26.1-6

September 2011
Sheet 26 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Selecting the Optimal Magnum Solution for System Coordination, Interruption Performance and Arc Flash Reduction
Table 26.1-1. System Application Considerations
Magnum Breaker Type Short-Time Current (See Table 26.1-2) System Coordination Interruption Arc Flash Energy Operating System Convenience and Life Time Cost Inspect, reset and close after interruption
MDS and MDDX High short-time currentLS trip functions with trip unit instantaneous off
Up to 65 kA Up to 100 kA (narrow frame) Up to 85 kA (standard frame) Up to 100 kA (double narrow and double frame) 30 kA (standard frame) 50 kA (double frame) Up to the rated short-time current Based on trip unit settings
Up to 100 kA Highest energy at 635 Vac MDS/MDN Up to 200 kA at 508 Vac MDDX 200 kA at 508 Vac Lower energy at fault levels in current limiting range above short-time current rating
MDSX Current limitingfast opening reverse loop contacts with trip unit instantaneous off
Inspect, reset and close after interruption
MDSL Current limiting integral current limiters with trip unit instantaneous off All Magnum breakers with trip unit instantaneous on
Based on current limiter selected
Based on current limiter selected and trip unit settings Trip unit instantaneous settings affect system coordination and continuity
Up to 200 kA Lower energy at fault levels Blown limiters require at 600 Vac in the current limiting range replacement and inventory of current limiter Operating watts loss is higher than fuse-less breakers Per Magnum May be reduced by breaker type employing trip unit: applied Ground fault settings, zone selective interlocking, Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Per Magnum breaker type applied
Per Magnum breaker type applied
Magnum MDS, MDN and MDDX High Short-Time Current Rating Breakers for Maximum Coordination
Magnum MDS and MDDX breakers are designed to hold in and carry their rated short-time current up to 0.5 seconds, the maximum trip unit short-time delay setting. System coordination is maximized when the instantaneous trip unit settings are either turned off or set high enough to facilitate coordination with other load side protective devices in the circuit. Energy let-through and arc ash energy to the downstream circuit can be signicantly reduced by employing instantaneous trip unit settings, as well as ground fault and zone interlocking. However, the desire to reduce arc ash may have to be balanced with the necessity to maintain system coordination and continuity. This is especially true at the low fault levels characteristic of arcing faults, because the trip unit instantaneous trip setting may have to be set as low as the minimum setting, which could cause lack of coordination. The integral Arcash Reduction Maintenance System trip unit option can be employed to optimize arc ash reduction during system startup and maintenance operations.
Magnum MDSX Fuseless Interruption Up to 200 kA Current Limiting Performance

Magnum MDSX breakers provide new fuseless technology with interruption ratings up to 200 kA at 508 Vac. The interruption performance is current limiting when the fault currents exceeds the short-time current rating. The self-protecting fast-opening reverse-loop contacts quickly open, clearing the fault in approximately 1/4 cycle, reducing energy let-through and arc ash energy. Below their short-time current rating, MDSX breakers coordinate like standard MDS breakers. Arc ash levels to the downstream circuit can be reduced by employing the trip unit instantaneous settings as well as ground fault, zone interlocking and Arcash Reduction Maintenance System features. MDSX breakers have the same compact footprint as standard MDS breakers. MDSX improves overall operating system continuity, convenience and life cycle costs by eliminating fuse trucks, blown limiter change outs, replacement limiter inventories and the higher operating watts loss associated with fuses.
Magnum MDSL Interruption Up to 200 kA with Integral Current Limiters

Magnum MDSL breakers with integral current limiters provide interruption ratings up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. MDSL is especially effective in reducing energy let-through and arc ash at the highest fault currents and those that fall within the current limiting range of the current limiter. Interruption is clean and efcient with most of the arc display contained within the current limiter. A wide array of current limiter ratings are available for selection and application with the breaker current sensor ratings and trip unit settings to provide for system coordination. When fault currents fall below the current limiting range of the limiter, energy let-through and arc ash energy will increase. In this range, a lower rated current limiter may be applied, but considerations must be given to nuisance blowing of the limiter and system coordination. MDSL breakers can also employ trip unit instantaneous settings as well as ground fault, zone interlocking and Arcash Reduction Maintenance System features to reduce arc ash levels. Physically, they are 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deeper than standard construction Magnum breakers.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 009

26.1-7
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066
22 23 24 25
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
26 27 28 29 30 31
Table 26.1-2. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Frame Breaker Type Amperes Catalog Number Frame Type rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting at 254 Vac 42 50 65 100 42 65 85 100 200 42 50 65 42 50 65 85 100 200 42 50 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 Interrupting at 508 Vac 42 50 65 100 42 65 85 100 200 42 50 65 42 50 65 85 100 200 42 50 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 65 100 65 85 100 200 200 Interrupting at 635 Vac 42 50 65 65 42 65 85 100 200 42 50 65 42 50 65 85 100 65 42 50 65 65 65 85 100 200
Available Current Sensor Short-Time Fixed Internal and Rating Plugs for Digitrip Withstand Instantaneous RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) Rating Trip 42 50 65 20 42 65 85 85 42 50 65 42 50 65 85 85 30 42 50 65 30 65 85 85 30 65 35 65 85 85 30 18 x In 85 18 x In 85 30 18 x In 85 30 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
800
MDN-408 MDN-508 MDN-608 MDN-C08 MDS-408 MDS-608 MDS-808 MDS-C08 MDS-L08
Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Narrow Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Narrow Narrow Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
1200
MDN-412 MDN-512 MDN-612 MDS-412 MDS-512 MDS-612 MDS-812 MDS-C12 MDS-X12
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1600
MDN-416 MDN-516 MDN-616 MDN-C16 MDS-616 MDS-816 MDS-C16 MDS-L16 MDS-X16
2000
MDN-620 MDN-C20 MDS-620 MDS-820 MDS-C20 MDS-L20 MDS-X20
65 65 65 85 100 200
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short-time and xed instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac. Magnum MDSX fuseless current limiting power circuit breakers with fast opening contacts. See Table 26.1-1 on Page 26.1-6 for peak let-through chart. Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
CA08104001E
26.1-8

September 2011
Sheet 26 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Table 26.1-2. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Frame Breaker Type Amperes Catalog Number Frame Type rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting at 254 Vac 65 85 100 200 Interrupting at 508 Vac 65 85 100 200 65 85 100 85 100 200 200 85 100 200 200 100 200 Interrupting at 635 Vac 65 85 100
Available Current Sensor Short-Time Fixed Internal and Rating Plugs for Digitrip Withstand Instantaneous RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) Rating Trip 65 85 85 50 65 85 100 85 100 50 100 85 100 50 100 100 100 85 50 50 50 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200
3200
MDS-632 MDS-832 MDS-C32 MDS-X32 MDN-640 MDN-840 MDN-C40 MDS-840 MDS-C40 MDS-X40 MDD-X40
Standard Standard Standard Double
4000
Double narrow 65 Double narrow 85 Double narrow 100 Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double 85 100 200 200 85 100 200 200 100 200
65 65 65 85 100
100 85 100
5000
MDS-850 MDS-C50 MDS-X50 MDD-X50 MDS-C60 MDD-X60
100 100 100
6000
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
3200, 4000, 5000, 6000 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short-time and xed instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac. Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. Magnum MDSX fuseless current limiting power circuit breakers with fast opening contacts. See Table 26.1-1 on Page 26.1-6 for peak let-through chart. Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 011

26.1-9
Magnum MDSX Fuseless Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers
Magnum MDSX Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers have fast opening contacts to provide interrupting ratings up to 200 kA at 508 Vac without fuses. The interruption performance is current limiting when the fault currents exceed the short-time current rating. The selfprotecting fast opening reverse loop contacts quickly open, clearing the fault in approximately 1/4 cycle, reducing energy let-through and arc ash energy. Below their short-time current rating, MDSX breakers coordinate like standard MDS breakers.
Arc ash levels to the downstream circuit can be reduced by employing the trip unit instantaneous settings as well as ground fault, zone interlocking, and Arcash Reduction Maintenance System features. MDSX breakers have the same compact footprint as standard MDS breakers. MDSX improves overall operating system continuity, convenience and life cycle costs by eliminating fuse trucks, blown limiter change outs, replacement limiter inventories and the higher operating watts loss associated with fuses.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Magnum MDSX
29
1000
30
Asymmetrical Available Peak 15% PF
31 32
MDS-X50 5000A MDS-X40 4000A MDS-X32 3200A
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Magnum Let-Through DataIpeak
MDS-X20 2000A MDS-X16 1600A MDS-X12 1200A Ipeak (kA)
100
10 10,000 100,000 Available Fault Circuit Current (Amperes) 1,000,000
41 42 43
Figure 26.1-1. Magnum Let-Through Data
CA08104001E
26.1-10

September 2011
Sheet 26 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Magnum MDSL Fused Current Limiting Power Circuit Breakers

The following curves illustrate the ratings, melting time-current characteristics and current limiting, or let-through characteristics, of limiters for Magnum low voltage power circuit breakers.
The let-through current for a given limiter application is readily determined by extending a vertical line from the applicable maximum available symmetrical fault amperes at the bottom margin to the characteristic line for the particular limiter, and from this intersection extending a horizontal line to the left margin and reading the peak current. The withstand rating of any circuit elements protected by the limiters should be at least equal to this peak current. It will be noted that the let-through current increases with the limiter size or ampere rating; in other words, the maximum current limiting effect is obtained with the smallest size. This effect is to be expected, because the resistance decreases as the rating increases. If the vertical line from the bottom margin as described in the previous paragraph does not intersect the limiter characteristic line, the available system fault current is below the threshold current of that limiter, and it will offer no current limiting effect.
The current limiting principle is illustrated below: la = The Available Peak Fault Current tm = The Melting Time Ip = The Peak Let-Through Current ta = The Arcing Time tc = The Total Interrupting (Clearing) Time
Limiter Selection
The selection of a suitable limiter rating for a given application is generally governed by a choice of the following types of protection: A. Maximum protection of downstream components. Type MDSL breakers are often used for this purpose even when the maximum available fault currents are within the interrupting rating of the corresponding unfused Magnum breakers. B. Protection of the circuit breaker only. Case A would tend to use the smallest available limiter; Case B the largest. When downstream protection is required, the selection is usually a compromise, because certain small limiters cannot be coordinated with the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing on overloads or small and moderate short circuits. Minimum, recommended and maximum limiter sizes for Magnum MDSL breakers are given in the table below. Table 26.1-3. Magnum MDSL Ratings
Frame Available Sensor/ Rating Plug (Amperes) 800 1600 2000 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1600, 2000 Catalog Number MDSL08 MDSL16 MDSL20
Ia Ip tm tc ta
Figure 26.1-2. Current Limiting
Table 26.1-4. Magnum MDSL Sensor/Rating Plug vs.Current Limiter Selection

Sensor and MDSL Current Limiter Selection Chart Rating Plug In 200 250 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000

MA250
MA300
MA400 MA400 MA400
MA600 MA600 MA600 MA600
MA800 MA800 MA800 MA800 MA800
MB1200 MB1200 MB1200 MB1200 MB1200 MB1200
MB1600 MB1600 MB1600 MB1600 MB1600 MB1600 MB1600
MB2000 MB2000 MB2000 MB2000 MB2000 MB2000 MB2000 MB2000
MD2500 MD2500 MD2500 MD2500 MD2500 MD2500 MD2500 MD2500
MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000 MD3000
Select the current limiter based on the Magnum breaker frame and current sensor and rating plug as shown. Refer to MDSL current limiter curves for let-through and time characteristics. The recommended ratings shown as shaded provide for reduced current let-through and breaker coordination within the trip unit settings. Selection of current limiters below the recommended ratings shown provides lower current let-through; however, trip unit settings must be considered to avoid nuisance operation.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 013

26.1-11
100 90 80 70 60 50
1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200
22 23 24
MA250 MA300 MA400 MA500 MA800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MB2500 MB3000
Peak Instantaneous Let-Through Current in Kilo Amperes X 10
40 30 20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
MD3000 MD2500 MD2000 MD1600 MD1200 MA800 MA600
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Time in Seconds
MA400 MA300 MA250
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2
1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2
.1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02
.1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .03 .02
4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
20000
400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
2000
3000
30000
200
100
300
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
.01 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 2000 200 300
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Available Current, rms Symmetrical Amperes x 10
Current in Amperes x 100
Figure 26.1-3. Type Magnum DSL Limiters, Peak Let-Through Current Characteristics
Figure 26.1-4. Type Magnum DSL Limiters Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics
CA08104001E
26.1-12
Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 26 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB is a low voltage insulatedcase circuit breaker family designed for the performance and economic requirements of UL 891 switchboards. Magnum SB insulated-case circuit breakers have Interruption ratings up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 6000A Magnum SB insulated-case circuit breakers have lighter-duty shorttime current ratings and xed internal instantaneous trips on most ratings, which is characteristic of UL 489 molded-case breakers commonly used in UL 891 switchboards. This provides for greater economy and excellent coordination and selectivity for most commercial applications Fixed internal instantaneous trips are included on all SB insulated-case circuit breakers rated 3200A and below to provide an extra safety factor by reducing the energy letthrough to downstream circuits at the maximum instantaneous trip point and to facilitate feeder circuit breaker protection in UL 891 switchboards with 3-cycle bus bracing Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breakers have 150 kA interrupting ratings at 480 Vac with continuous current ratings up to 5000A. The short-time current rating is 30 kA for standard frame and 50 kA for double frame breakers
UL and ANSI Test Certications

Magnum SB meets or exceeds the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA standards, including:

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers are Designed for the Performance and Economic Requirements of UL 891 Switchboards
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) ANSI C37.16 (preferred ratings, related requirements, and application recommendations for low voltage power circuit breakers and AC power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.17 (trip devices for AC and general purpose DC low voltage power circuit breakers) ANSI C37.50 (test procedures for low voltage AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) UL 1066 (standard for low voltage AC and DC power circuit breakers used in enclosures) NEMA SG3 (this standard adopts ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)
Comprehensive Enclosure Solutions

Magnum SB has proven performance in Eaton manufactured switchboards with the following test certications: UL 891 (Drawout Magnum SB and Pow-R-Line C low voltage switchboards) UL, CSA 22.2.31 low voltage assemblies
Approvals
UL listed: Magnum SB breaker UL File E52096 and cassette UL File E204565
Typical Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Nameplate
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 015

Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
26.1-13
Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated-Case
22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30
Table 26.1-5. Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated-Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Frame Breaker Type Frame Amperes Catalog Type Number 800 SBN-508 SBN-608 SBN-C08 SBS-608 SBS-C08 1200 SBN-512 SBN-612 SBN-C12 SBS-612 SBS-C12 SBS-E12 1600 SBN-516 SBN-616 SBN-C16 SBS-616 SBS-C16 SBS-E16 2000 SBN-620 SBN-C20 SBS-620 SBS-C20 SBS-E20 2500 SBS-625 SBS-C25 SBS-E25 3000 SBS-630 SBS-C30 SBS-E30 4000 SBS-840 SBS-C40 SBS-E40 SBS-850 SBS-C50 SBS-E50 SBS-C60 Narrow Narrow Narrow rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting at 254 Vac 50 65 100 Interrupting Interrupting Short-Time at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating 50 65 100 65 100 50 65 100 65 100 150 50 65 100 65 100 150 65 100 65 100 150 65 100 150 65 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 100 35 42 65 65 85 35 42 65 65 85 35 42 65 65 85 65 65 65 85 65 85
Fixed Internal Instantaneous Trip 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 30 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 30 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 18 x In 30 18 x In 18 x In 50 18 x In 18 x In 50 18 x In 18 x In 50 18 x In 18 x In 50 18 x In
20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 35 35 35 35 30 45 45 50 50 50 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 100
Standard 65 Standard 100 Narrow Narrow Narrow 50 65 100
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200
31 32
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600
33 34
Standard 65 Standard 100 Standard 200 Narrow Narrow 65 100
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
35 36
Standard 65 Standard 100 Standard 200 Standard 65 Standard 100 Double 200 Standard 65 Standard 100 Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 100
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
37 38 39
65 85
85 100
5000
85 100
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
40
3000, 4000, 5000, 6000
6000
100
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts. Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.
41 42 43
Note: Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
CA08104001E
26.1-14
Breaker-Mounted Options
Magnum DS and SB Breaker-Mounted Options
Bell alarm/overcurrent trip switch (OTS). Provides two Form C contacts that change state when the Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker. The contacts are available for external indication or customer use and are manually reset by the mechanical trip indicator Padlockable pushbutton cover. Permits padlocking hinged cover plates to block access to the PUSH ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the breaker faceplate Mechanical operations counter. Records mechanical operations of the breaker over its installed life Key off lock provisions. Enables mounting of a single cylinder Kirk , Castell or Ronis Key Lock to lock the breaker in the OPEN position Latch check switch. Provides one Form C contact that changes state when the breaker is ready to close. Can be wired to the spring release device for fast transfer applications or wired for external ready-to-close indication
September 2011
Sheet 26 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Breaker-Mounted Options
Magnum breakers are available with a comprehensive array of factoryinstalled breaker options to enable congured-to-order solutions for specied customer requirements. Field option kits are available to provide easy service, modication and customization of the breaker at the point of use.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Shunt trip device (ST). Provides for remote electrically controlled breaker opening when energized by a rated voltage input Spring charge motor (MOT). Charges the breaker closing springs automatically, facilitating remote or local closing. The motor assembly includes its own cut-off switch that changes state at the end of the charging cycle. This contact can be wired out for external indication Spring release device (SR). Provides for remote electrically controlled breaker closing when its coils are energized by a rated voltage input Undervoltage release (UVR). Trips the breaker when an existing voltage signal is lost or falls below an established threshold Auxiliary switch. Up to 6a/6b auxiliary individual dedicated contacts are available for customer use to indicate if the breaker is in the OPEN or CLOSE position Mechanical trip indicator ag . The red trip indicator ag pops out to provide local visual indication when the Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker on an overcurrent condition. Available in two options: an interlocked version that mechanically locks out the breaker until the indicator is manually reset and a non-interlocked version for indication only
Auxiliary Switches Come in Modular 2a/2b Contact Stages Providing up to 6a/6b Dedicated Contacts
Mechanical Trip Indicator with Bell Alarm (OTS) Switches Mounted
For the Digitrip RMS 1150+ trip unit, other protective functions, if programmed, will cause the OTS and mechanical trip indicator ag to operate.
Shunt Trip, Spring Release and Undervoltage Release Device Installed on Accessory Deck
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 017
Microprocessor Trip Units

General DescriptionMagnum DS and SB Trip Units
26.1-15
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Family for Magnum Circuit Breakers

The Magnum family of Digitrip RMS trip units consists of four trip unit models, each providing increasing levels of features and options to enable the ultimate selection to match application requirements for protection, coordination, information, diagnostics and communication: Digitrip RMS 520 Digitrip RMS 520M Digitrip RMS 520MC Digitrip RMS 1150+
The trip unit overcurrent protective pickup settings are a function of the breaker In rating, which is established by the rating plug and current sensors. When preset conditions are exceeded, the trip unit initiates a trip signal to the trip actuator, tripping the circuit breaker. Red cause-of-trip LEDs light up to indicate the cause of trip, powered by a easily replaceable backup battery located behind the rating plug. The LED will ash to save power, until the trip unit reset button is depressed. All trip units include three important self-protecting safety features that are provided as standard: Making Current Release (MCR) : employs a fast-acting analog instantaneous trip that prevents the breaker from closing and latching on a fault when the peak current exceeds 25 x the breaker In rating. This reduces arc ash energy during breaker closing for faults within the self-protecting range. The MCR is enabled for the rst two cycles following the circuit breaker closing operation and thereafter, depending on the type of Magnum breaker applied, becomes inactive. Over-Temperature Protective Trip: automatically trips the breaker when the temperature inside the trip unit exceeds 85C, which indicates that there are signicantly higher temperatures within enclosure. Thermal Memory: provides overtemperature protection on load circuits against effects of repeated overload conditions. This feature is defeatable for special applications such as welding and primary injection testing.
Digitrip RMS 520M adds phase, neutral and ground current metering with a four-character LCD display window Digitrip RMS 520MC adds communication of current values and breaker status (open, closed, tripped), and Arcash Reduction Maintenance System for arc ash reduction
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Programmable Trip Units
Common Trip Unit Features

A summary of the important features common to all Magnum trip units is as follows:

Microprocessor-based true rms sensing Discrete rotary or programmable settings Unit status LED (green) Cause of trip LEDs (red) Battery check LED (green) Reset/battery test pushbutton Making current release Thermal memory Over-temperature protective trip Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) provisions Rating plug receptacle Backup battery for cause of trip LEDs Test kit receptacle with cover Plug-in mounting for easy replacement Clear plastic cover (sealable)
Digitrip RMS 1150+ provides programmability for more sophisticated distribution systems Increased protection and coordination capabilities Systems monitoring information including power factor, voltage, current, harmonic distortion values and waveform capture with a bright three-line, (eight characters per line) LED display Two programmable contacts for customer use Time and date stamping of trip events for improved troubleshooting and diagnostics Accuracy of 1% on current and voltage values and 2% on energy and power Systems diagnostic information and breaker health menu Communications Arcash Reduction Maintenance System for arc ash reduction
Digitrip RMS trip units are highly accurate microprocessor-based protective devices that use a sampling algorithm to compute true rms values for precise system coordination and metering. The trip unit is completely self-contained and requires no external control power to perform its overcurrent protective functions because the power to operate the trip unit is derived from the primary current passing through the current sensors. When the trip unit is operating, the green unit status LED begins to blink like a heartbeat to visibly conrm the microprocessor is powered up.
Trip Units
Eatons electrical sector introduced the rst microprocessor-based trip unit and has advanced the technology into a new family of UL and CSA listed Digitrip RMS electronic and programmable trip units designed and engineered exclusively for Magnum DS breakers.
Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user as many as nine phase and ground current protection settings for maximum exibility in tripcurve shaping and multi-unit coordination, and adds ground current protection settings
Magnum 520MC Trip Unit with Arcash Reduction Maintenance System, Four-Digit LCD Display and Ampere-Based Communications
43
CA08104001E
26.1-16

For the second method of arming the Maintenance Mode function, a remote switch wired through the breaker secondary contacts can remotely arm the Maintenace Mode setting. A high-quality gold-plated or palladium contact is required in this application. A third method to arm the Maintenance Mode setting is via a communication device. There is a conrmation screen that veries the arming. A BIM (Breaker Interface Module) or Power Xpert system are communication methods to arm the setting. The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System setting has ve unique settings (2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0 x In). To adjust this setting, a rotary switch on the trip unit face is provided for the 520MC while the 1150+ trip unit uses its local keypad.
September 2011
Sheet 26 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Magnum 1150+ Trip Unit with Arcash Reduction Maintenance System, 24-Digit LED Display, Programmable Protection, Alarms and Relaying, Power Metering, Power Quality and Alarms, Waveform Capture, Communications and Breaker Health Monitoring
For all three arming methods, the 520MC provides a blue LED to conrm the Maintenance Mode function is on. In addition, there is also a normally open breaker contact that allows the user to wire in an external stacklight or annunciator for remote indication. For the 1150+, the message Maintenance Mode Enabled will be shown on its LED display. The 1150+ also has an alarm relay that can be programmed to track the Maintenance Mode state. The maintenance mode function will provide fast tripping even when the regular Instantaneous is set to OFF. The instantaneous LED position is also used to indicate a trip initiated by the Maintenance Mode setting. The 520MC LCD display, if powered, will indicate with four dashes while the 1150+ will display the message Maintenance Mode Trip.
Time
In = Rating Plug/Sensor Rating Ir n LDPU Typical I n x 0.4 to 1.0

The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Maintenance Mode function of the Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ can reduce arc ash incident energy that is generated on a fault condition. This is accomplished by an analog trip circuit that, when armed, provides a fast-acting response to the fault. This is separate from the normal system protection setting of instantaneous. Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System employs a separate, dedicated analog trip circuit that eliminates microprocessor latencies, resulting in clearing times that are faster than standard instantaneous tripping. This provides superior arc ash reduction to competitors systems that simply lower the standard instantaneous pickup set point. There are three ways to arm the Maintenance Mode Arcash Reduction Maintenance System setting. One method is locally at the trip unit front panel. For the 520MC, the two-position switch in the Maintenance Mode section of the trip unit is used. Turning the switch to the ON position will arm the setting. For the 1150+, the local front keypad is used to enable the Maintenance Mode setting. The setting is located in the SYSTEM submenu of programmable settings (PGM SET).
LDT @ 6X Ir Typical 2 to 20 Sec
SDPV = 2 to 10 Times I r
SDT Typical 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 Sec Maintenance Mode 60 to 75 msec 40 msec Maintenance Mode Total Clearing Time 40 msec 0 2.5 to 10 Times I n 10 Typical at 480V, 60 Hz
Optional Instantaneous
Instantaneous Total Clearing Time 60 to 75 msec
Current
Figure 26.1-5. Arcash Reduction Maintenance SystemTypical Time Current Curve with Maintenance Mode
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 019

26.1-17
Control Voltage
5 4
L
Remote Indicator (BlueLight)
22 23
7
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Switch

1 2
Remote Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Switch Communication wiring to BIM, MODBUS MINT or Power Xpert computer. This can activate Maintenance Mode if desired.
B7
24 25
B7
A15 1
3 A12 A14
A10 A9 B1 6
B2
Alternate Customer 3 A12 Wiring (Partial)
26 27 28 29
Magnum Breaker (with MM wiring)
The Digitrip 520MC (Cat 5ARMxxx) can locally be placed in Maintenance Mode via a two-position switch located on the trip unit. The function can also be armed via a remote switch as shown. In addition, the function can be activated via communications. A blue LED on the Digitrip veries the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode. The recommended selector switch for this low voltage application is Eaton part number 10250T1333-2E, which includes a contact block rated for logic level and corrosive use. The maximum length of this wiring to remote Arcash Reduction Maintenance System switch (or alternate relay contact) is 9.78 ft (3m). Use #20 AWG wire or larger. Control voltage is 120 Vac or 230 Vac or 2448 Vdc or 125 Vdc. Check Magnum circuit breaker front cover for trip unit power requirements. A remote stack light, annunciator panel or other remote indication device can be connected to verify that the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode. Relay in (GF alarm/PS module) makes when in Maintenance Mode. Contact is rated 1A at 120 Vac or 0.5A at 230 Vac or 1A at 2448 Vdc and 0.35A at 125 Vdc. The Digitrip 520MC can also be placed remotely in its Maintenance Mode via a general purpose relayice cube type with logic level contacts activated by remote control switch. A recommended type is IDEC Relay RY22. Choose voltage as desired.
30 31 32 33 34
Figure 26.1-6. Maintenance Mode Wiring Digitrip 520MC
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
26.1-18

September 2011
Sheet 26 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Digitrip 520 Trip Unit
Digitrip 520M Trip Unit
Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit
Digitrip 520 Trip Unit with Basic Overcurrent Protection
The Digitrip 520 is a simple basic trip unit with three available types of protection (LI, LSI and LSIG). Up to nine rotary-type current and time settings provide for maximum exibility in curve-shaping and multi-unit coordination. The Instantaneous function (I) includes an off position setting when Short Time (S) protection is provided to increase application exibility in the eld I2t time delay settings for better curve shaping when Short Time (S) and Ground Fault (G) protective functions are selected Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) provided when Short Time (S) and/or Ground Fault (G) protective functions are selected. ZSI provides hard-wired positive system coordination, allowing the breaker closest to the fault to trip rst, thus avoiding unnecessary and costly system downtime. ZSI is a useful method to reduce arc ash
Digitrip 520M Trip Unit with Four-Digit LCD Display and Ampere-based Metering, Alarms and System Diagnostics
The Digitrip 520M is available with three types of protection (LSI, LSIG and LSIA) and includes the following added features: Four-digit LCD display with a step pushbutton to scroll through the display data, including amperebased metering of phase, neutral and ground currents, plus operational and cause-of-trip diagnostic information When specied, the Power Relay Module (PRM) is supplied to perform the following features: Power up the trip unit display from an external customer supplied source through the breaker secondary contacts to retain the cause-of-trip and magnitude of trip information Provide relay contact for remote indication of overload (LSI) or ground trip (LSIG) or ground alarm (LSIA) Type LSIA units alarm only when ground fault settings are exceeded, which is quite useful in critical power applications Plug receptacle for auxiliary power module to power up the trip unit display during bench testing remote from the switchgear
Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit With Arcash Reduction Maintenance System, Four-Digit LCD Display and Ampere-based Communications
The Digitrip 520MC is available in three types of protection (LSI, LSIG and LSIA) and includes the following enhancements: Communications of ampere-based data, breaker status and cause-oftrip information using the INCOM communications system. Each trip unit has a unique hexadecimal address (001 to 999) set by rotary switches. A red transmit LED is provided to conrm communications activity. Peripheral translator devices are available to convert INCOM to other protocols like Modbus, Ethernet and so on Arcash Reduction Maintenance System allows the operator to enable a special trip unit maintenance mode with a preset accelerated instantaneous override trip that can reduce arc ash energy up to 30%. This accelerated tripping results in total clearing times that are faster than standard instantaneous tripping. The arc ash reduction level is preset at the trip unit using a veposition switch that facilitates the maximum arc ash reduction setting possible while avoiding nuisance tripping. The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System can be turned on locally at the trip unit, remotely using peripheral devices, or via communications. A blue LED provides local indication the trip unit is in the Maintenance Mode. Remote indication can be accomplished by a dedicated trip unit contact for use with a stack light or annunciator panel, or via communications
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 021

General DescriptionMagnum DS and SB Digitrip Trip Units
26.1-19
Digitrip 1150+ Trip Unit
Digitrip 1150+ Trip Unit
The Digitrip 1150+ trip unit is a highly advanced programmable protective device available in three types of protection (LSI, LSIG and LSIA). The following is a rst level summary of the special features and options:
24-character LED digital display easily visible from 50 feet and ideal for dark equipment environments Membrane type dust-resistant keypad pushbuttons to facilitate local unit programming, including view functions (Up, Down, ESCape, SELect and Reset), edit values (Up, Down and Save) and battery test Programmable trip unit settings and curves including I2t and I4t curves, as well as IEEE moderately inverse, very inverse and extremely inverse curves Voltage and power metering Power quality monitoring and alarm with THD and waveform capture
Health menuThe health menu on the Digitrip 1150+ front panel will provide information on the Magnum circuit breakers health, as well as a history of the circuit breaker and circuit it is protecting. This data is useful for planning maintenance and inspection schedules. The type of data includes the total number of all instantaneous and short delay trips seen by the circuit breaker. A second counter shows the number of overloads (LDT) and ground faults (GFT) encountered while in service. The OP count provides data on the number of close operations experienced by the circuit breaker. The last time the circuit breaker was operated (open or closed or tripped) is viewable with time and date displayed. Also included is the maximum temperature in degrees Centigrade as seen by the Digitrip microprocessor CHip. The capture of the data requires external trip unit power. This data, once captured, is stored in non-volatile memory. These features are available for remote communications Programmable alarm contacts or trip contacts Programmable relay functions including undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, overfrequency, reverse power, voltage unbalance and phase rotation
Communications of comprehensive access to trip unit capabilities including programmable settings, breaker control, metering, alarm, status, relaying and diagnostic information. Peripheral translator devices are available to convert INCOM to other protocols like Modbus, Ethernet and so on Accessory bus for use with peripheral digital relay modules that can be programmed through the trip unit keypad for additional auxiliary and various alarm contacts Arcash Reduction Maintenance System allows the operator to enable a special trip unit Maintenance Mode with a preset accelerated instantaneous override trip that can reduce arc ash energy up to 30%. This accelerated tripping results in total clearing times that are faster than standard instantaneous tripping. The arc ash reduction level is preset at the trip unit for the maximum arc ash reduction setting possible, while avoiding nuisance tripping. The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System can be turned on locally at the trip unit, remotely using peripheral devices, or via communications. The display provides local indication the trip unit is in the Maintenance Mode. Remote indication can be accomplished by a dedicated trip unit contact for use with a stack light or annunciator panel, or via communications
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
26.1-20

Selection GuideMagnum DS and SB Digitrip Trip Units
September 2011
Sheet 26 022
22 23 24
Table 26.1-6. Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip 520 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LI, LSI, LSIG Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) and M1 Yes LSI and LSIG
Digitrip 520M 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) and M1 Yes Yes Yes 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes Yes Yes No 4-character LCD Yes 2% No No No No No No No No No Optional No No Test set No No No No
Digitrip 520MC 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) and M1 Yes Yes Yes 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes Yes Yes No 4-character LCD Yes 2% No No No No No No No No INCOM Standard No No Test set No Yes No No
Digitrip 1150+ 2006000A 42200 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds 15 seconds Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (Ir) 2001000% x (Ir) and M1 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes 2001000% x (In) and M1 Yes Yes Yes 24100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes Yes Yes Yes 24-character LED Yes 1% Yes 1% Yes 2% Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes INCOM/TripLink Standard Yes Yes Integral and test set Yes Yes Yes Yes
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ampere range Interrupting rating at 480V rms sensing

Protection Ordering options Fixed rating plug (In) Overtemperature trip Long delay pickup Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir Long delay time I4t IEEE curves Long delay thermal memory High load alarm Short delay protection (S) Instantaneous protection (I) Ground fault protection (G) Short delay pickup Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir Short delay time at Short delay time ZSI Instantaneous pickup Making current release Off position
Ground fault alarm No Ground fault pickup 25100% x (In) Ground fault delay I2t at 0.625 x In 100500 ms Ground fault delay at Ground fault ZSI Ground fault thermal memory 100500 ms Yes Yes No Model LSI Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N/A No No Test set No No No No

Disable ground fault protection Neutral protection (N)
System Diagnostics
System Monitoring
Digital display Current (% ) full scale sensor Voltage (%) L to L Power and energy (%) Apparent power kVA and demand Reactive power kVAR Power factor Crest factor Power qualityharmonics % THD, waveform capture
Type Power supply in breaker
Additional Features
Trip log (three events) Electronic operations counter Testing method Waveform capture Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Breaker health monitor Protective relay functions
Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip, and phase rotation alarm are included.
1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC. Test set for secondary injection.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 023

Technical and Application Data
26.1-21
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Instantaneous (I)
5. Instantaneous Pickup Determines the level of fault current that will actuate a trip with no time delay.
Repetitive Duty
Repetitive breaker opening and closing, such as in frequent motor starting and stopping, are covered by ANSI standards C37.13 and C37.16. These standards list the number of operations between servicing (adjusting, cleaning, lubrication, tightening and so on) and the total numbers of operations under various conditions without requiring replacement of parts, for the various breaker frame sizes. For motor starting duty, with closing starting currents up to 600% and opening running currents up to 100% of the breaker frame size, at 80% power factor or higher, the endurance or total operations (not requiring parts replacement) will be as follows: 800A Frame: 1400 operations 1600A Frame: 400 operations The frequency of operation should not exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in one hour.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ground Fault (G)

2B 2 2A 3 Time 4B 4 6 4A
6. Ground Fault Pickup Determines the level of fault current at which the ground fault trip delay countdown is actuated. 7. Ground Fault Delay Determines the amount of time the breaker will carry a ground fault before tripping.
5
7B 7 7A Current in Multiples
Figure 26.1-7. Time-Current Curve Shaping

Note: See selection guide charts for availability of adjustments.
a. Flat Response I2t out: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic ground fault settings. b. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with zero sequence ground fault relays, fuses and thermalmagnetic breakers.
Long Delay (L)

1. Long Delay Pickup Determines the continuous ampere rating of the breaker. 2. Long Delay Time Determines the amount of time the breaker will carry a low level overload before tripping. a. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic trip devices and for coordination with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers. b. I4t Response I4t in: For coordination with fuses and upstream transformer damage curves.
Feeder BreakersGeneral
Circuit breakers for feeder circuit protection may be manually or electrically operated, with long and short delay or long delay and instantaneous type trip devices, and trip settings, as required for the specic circuit and load requirements.
Group Motor Feeder Breakers

Typical loads for such circuits are motor control centers. The feeder breakers may be either manually or electrically operated as preferred, and are usually equipped with long and short delay trip protection only for coordination with the individual motor circuit devices. The minimum long delay pickup setting should be 115% of the running current of the largest motor in the group, plus the sum of the running circuits of all other motors.
Short Delay (S)

3. Short Delay Pickup Determine or set the level of fault current at which the short-time trip delay countdown is actuated. 4. Short Delay Sets the amount of time the breaker will carry both a low level and high fault currents before tripping. a. Flat Response I2t out: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic trip devices. b. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with fuses and thermal-magnetic breakers.
General purpose feeder breakers, such as for lighting circuits, are usually equipped with long delay and short delay trip devices, with the long delay pickup set for the maximum load demand in the circuit. Where arcing fault protection is required, add instantaneous trip with setting as low as practicable consistent with inrush requirements. As an option, the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System can be selected for increased arc ash protection during maintenance.
Motor Starting Feeder Breakers

These breakers are usually electrically operated, with long delay, short delay and instantaneous tripping characteristics for motor running, locked rotor and fault protection. The breaker sensor rating should be chosen so that the long delay pickup can be set at 125% of motor full load current for motors with a 1.15 service factor, or at 115% for all other motors. Contactors are recommended for this application when circuit breaker duty cycle is exceeded.
CA08104001E
26.1-22

Technical and Application Data
September 2011
Sheet 26 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Zone selective interlocking provides positive system coordination by allowing the breaker closest to the fault to trip without any preset time delays. This is achieved by setting up the distribution system as shown in Figure 26.1-8. The hardwired connection between the trip units sends a restraining signal upstream, allowing the breaker closest to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone selective interlocking also reduces stress on the distribution system by isolating faults without time delays. By denition, a selectively coordinated system is one where by adjusting trip unit pickup and time delay settings, the circuit breaker closest to the fault trips rst. The upstream breaker serves two functions: (1) backup protection to the downstream breaker and (2) protection of the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers. These elements are provided for on Digitrip trip units. For faults that occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers, it is ideally desirable for the upstream breaker to trip with no time delay. This is the feature provided by zone selective interlocking. Digitrip trip units include this option. Zone selective interlocking is a communication signal between trip units applied on upstream and downstream breakers. Each trip unit must be applied as if zone selective interlocking were not employed, and set for selective coordination. During fault conditions, each trip unit that senses the fault sends a restraining signal to all upstream trip units. This restraining signal results in causing the upstream trip to continue timing as it is set. In the absence of a restraining signal, the trip unit trips the associated breaker with no intentional time delay, minimizing damage to the fault point. This restraining signal is a very low level. To minimize the potential for induced noise, and provide a low impedance interface between trip units, twisted pair conductors are used for interconnection.
Ground fault and short delay pickup on Digitrip trip units have zone selective interlocking. Zone selective interlocking may be applied as a type of bus differential protection. It must be recognized; however, that one must accept the minimum pickup of the trip unit for sensitivity.
It must also be recognized that not all systems may be equipped with zone selective interlocking. Systems containing multiple sources, or where the direction of power ow varies, require special considerations, or may not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip zone interlocking has been tested with up to three levels with up to 20 trip units per level.
Zone 1
Ground Fault Setting: 1200A Pickup 0.5 Seconds Time Delay Breaker Number 1 Fault 1 Ground Fault Setting: 600A Pickup 0.3 Seconds Time Delay
Zone 2
Breaker Number 2 Fault 2 Zone Selective Interlocking Wiring
Zone 3 Ground Fault Setting: 300A Pickup No Time Delay Breaker Number 3 Fault 3
Load
Fault 1
There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously.
Fault 2
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit. The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.
Fault 3
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to Zone 1. Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker in Zone 3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds. Figure 26.1-8. Zone Selective Interlocking
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 025
Magnum DS and SB
Technical Data
26.1-23
Table 26.1-7. Magnum DS and SB Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc

Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage Shunt Trip (ST) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Opening time Spring Release (SR) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Closing time Spring Charge Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range Amps (running) Amps (inrush) Power consumption Charging time Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range Drop-out voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Power consumption (continuous) Opening time Auxiliary Switches Minimum load Contact rating Trip circuit 70110% (required for 35 ms) Seconds Close circuit 70110% (required for 200 ms) Seconds 85110% voltage Running % of running Seconds 85110% voltage 3060% voltage Required for 200 ms Required for 400 ms Seconds 24 Vdc 32 Vdc 1726 Vdc 250 watts 35 ms 1726 Vdc 250 watts 40 ms 2026 Vdc 12.0A 300% 300 watts 5 sec 2026 Vdc 714 Vdc 250 watts 18 watts 70 ms 2735 Vdc 1019 Vdc 275 watts 15 watts 70 ms Inductive load 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.25A 4153 Vdc 5.0A 500% 250 watts 5 sec 4153 Vdc 1429 Vdc 275 watts 18 watts 70 ms 94138 Vdc 2.0A 600% 250 watts 5 sec 94138 Vdc 3375 Vdc 450 watts 10 watts 70 ms 187225 Vdc 1.0A 600% 250 watts 5 sec 187275 Vdc 66150 Vdc 450 watts 10 watts 70 ms 3453 Vdc 250 watts 40 ms 77138 Vdc 450 watts 40 ms 154275 Vdc 450 watts 40 ms 3453 Vdc 250 watts 35 ms 77138 Vdc 450 watts 35 ms 154275 Vdc 450 watts 35 ms 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Table 26.1-8. Magnum DS and SB Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac

Breaker Control Device Nominal Voltage Shunt Trip (ST) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Opening time Spring Release (SR) Operational voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Closing time Spring Charge Motor (MOT) Operational voltage range Amps (running) Amps (inrush) Power consumption Charging time Undervoltage Release (UVR) Operational voltage range Drop-out voltage range Power consumption (inrush) Power consumption (continuous) Opening time Auxiliary Switches Minimum load Contact rating Trip circuit 70110% (Required for 35 ms) Seconds Close circuit 70110% (Required for 200 ms) Seconds 85110% voltage Running % of running Seconds 85110% voltage 3060% voltage Required for 200 ms Required for 400 ms Seconds 120 Vac 240 Vac 415 Vac 77140 Vac 450 VA 35 ms 77140 Vac 450 VA 40 ms 93140 Vac 2.0A 600% 250 VA 5 sec 94140 Vac 3376 Vac 450 VA 10 VA 70 ms 146264 Vac 450 VA 35 ms 146264 Vac 450 VA 40 ms 177264 Vac 1.0A 600% 250 VA 5 sec 177264 Vac 62144 Vac 400 VA 10 VA 70 ms 323457 Vac 114249 Vac 480 VA 10 VA 70 ms Inductive load 10A 10A 408528 Vac 144288 Vac 400 VA 10 VA 70 ms 510660 Vac 180360 Vac 400 VA 10 VA 70 ms 480 Vac 600 Vac
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
26.1-24
Magnum DS and SB
Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 26 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
COM IN OUT
Legend: LS Limit Switch for Closing Spring MOT Motor for Spring Charging ST Shunt Trip SR Spring Release UVR Undervoltage Release OTS Overcurrent Trip Switch Description of Operation: 1 Motor is energized through LS contact. 2 Motor runs and charges closing spring. 3 When closing spring is fully charged, LS contacts change state. 4 Close contacts energize SR coil. 5 When breaker closes, b opens. 6 LS contacts change state and motor recharges closing springs.
Close
Open
Open
B12
B15
Lever in Door Switch (Drawout Only)
B26
B10
B24
A7
A1
A2
A3
a.
Control Power SR
L.S.
MOT
b.
ST
a.
UVR
OTS 1* OTS 2*
B13
* Contacts shown for breaker open (not fully charged), not tripped. Dotted line denotes Magnum Breaker.
B14
B27
B11
B25
A8
A4
A5
A6
Continuous Duty Shunt Trip also available that eliminates the requirement for the a contact cutout switch.
MDSEOBKR
Figure 26.1-9. Typical Magnum Breaker Control Circuit Diagram
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7 A8
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 ICL ATR ATR
B1 IP
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8 ZI
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 ZO ST ST SR SR M M
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
ONO OC ONOONO OC ONO UVR UVR ALL ALC AL
IN NPW N2
N1 SGF ZC
CNC CC CNO CNC CC CNO
OTS
OTS
UVR
ATR
35 36 37 38
INCOM CLOSE INPUT
ATR
SHUNT SPRING MOTOR INCOM NEG NEUTRALSOURCE ZONE CELL SWITCH CONTACTS POWER SENSOR GROUND INTER- TRIP RELEASE (SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN WITHDRAWN POSITION) INPUT INPUT INPUT LOCKING
A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 MLS ACN ACP NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC
B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC LCO LC LNC
C7
C8
C9 C10 C11 C12
CNC CC CNO CNC CC CNO
SPRING ACCESSARY CHARGE BUS STATUS COMMUNICATIONS
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION)
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION)
LATCH CELL SWITCH CONTACTS CHECK (SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN WITHDRAWN POSITION) SWITCH
Figure 26.1-10. Typical Magnum Secondary Terminal Block Connection Diagram
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 027
Magnum DS and SB
Application Data
26.1-25
Applications
Transformer Main Secondary Breakers
Transformer secondary breakers are required or recommended for one or more of the following purposes: 1. To provide a one-step means of removing all load from the transformer. 2. To provide transformer overload protection in the absence of an individual primary breaker, and/or when primary fuses are used. 3. To provide the fastest clearing of a short circuit in the secondary main bus. 4. To provide a local disconnecting means, in the absence of a local primary switch or breaker, for maintenance purposes. 5. For automatic or manual transfer of loads to alternate sources, as in double-ended secondary selective unit substations. 6. For simplifying key interlocking with primary interrupter switches. 7. To satisfy NEC service entrance requirements when more than six feeder breakers are required. Main secondary breakers must have adequate interrupting and continuous current ratings. They should be able to carry continuously not only the anticipated maximum continuous output of the transformer, but also any temporary overloads. For a fully selective system, instantaneous protection on main breakers should be defeated, as they typically cannot be coordinated with downstream devices.
Maximum capabilities of transformers of various types, can be found in Tab 14 It will be noted that the maximum ratings will often require the substitution of larger frame main breakers than those listed in the tables. Even if a selfcooled transformer only is considered, it should be remembered that with ratings of 750 kVA and higher, provision for the future addition of cooling fans is automatically included. It is recommended that the main breaker have sufcient capacity for the future fan-cooled rating, plus an allowance for overloads, if possible, particularly because load growth cannot always be predicted. The same considerations should be given to the main bus capacities and main current transformer ratios.
Generator Breakers
In most applications where generators are connected through breakers to the secondary bus, they are used as emergency standby sources only, and are not synchronized or paralleled with the unit substation transformers. Under these conditions, the interrupting rating of the generator breaker will be based solely on the generator kVA and sub-transient reactance. This reactance varies with the generator type and rpm, from a minimum of approximately 9% for a two-pole 3600 rpm turbine driven generator to 15% or 20% or more for a medium or slow speed engine type generator. Thus the feeder breakers selected for the unit substation will usually be adequate for a standby generator of the same kVA as the transformer. Most generators have a 2-hour 25% overload rating, and the generator breaker must be adequate for this overload current. Selective type long and short delay trip protection only is usually recommended for coordination with the feeder breakers, with the long delay elements set at 125% to 150% of the maximum generator current rating for generator protection. In the case of two or more paralleled generators, anti-motoring reverse power relays (device 32) are recommended for protection of the prime movers, particularly piston type engines. For larger generators requiring a Magnum MDS-632 or larger, voltage-restraint type overcurrent relays (device 51V) are recommended.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Bus Sectionalizing (Tie) Breakers

The minimum recommended continuous current rating of bus sectionalizing or tie breakers, as used in double-ended secondary selective unit sub-stations, or for connecting two single-ended substations, is onehalf that of the associated main breakers. It is common practice to select the tie breaker of the next frame size below that of the main breakers. However, many users and engineers prefer that the tie breaker be identical to and interchangeable with the main breakers, so that under normal conditions it will be available as a spare main breaker. In general, the tie breaker, like the main breaker, trip unit should have its instantaneous tripping defeated.
CA08104001E
26.1-26
Magnum DS and SB
Application Data
September 2011
Sheet 26 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
100 During-Weld Amperes (rms) 15000 10000
Sensor Rating, Amperes

40 32 00 50 00
Resistance Welding
The application of Eatons Magnum DS circuit breakers to resistance welding circuits is shown in Figure 26.1-11 of the Sensor Selection Guide. Sensor ratings only are given; the breaker frame must be selected as required for interrupting ratings. The Magnum DS microprocessorbased true rms sensing devices have a thermal memory and are well suited for this service. The thermal memory functions prevent exceeding the breaker and cable maximum permissible thermal energy level. The circuit also replicates time dissipation of thermal energy. The size of the thermal memory is 30 T (In / In)2 unit amperes2 seconds. It lls at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit amperes2 seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds, and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit amperes2 seconds/second, where: T = Long time delay setting in seconds (range is 224 seconds) iw = rms value of the welding current in amperes
00 00
25 20 16
00
5000
00
12
00 10 00 80 0 0 0 0
2000
60
40
30 25 20
500
200
In = Rating plug current value in amperes The memory is lled during the weld and empties during the non-welding period of the duty cycle. These welding applications are based on long delay and instantaneous trip devices with the following settings. The long time delay setting is based on the weld amperes and duty cycle. Instantaneous trip setting is two times the average weld amperes (weld amperes times percent duty cycle) or higher.
Note: Making Current Release (MCR) may prevent closing the breaker during a welding cycle.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Percent Duty Cycle
30
40 50 60
Figure 26.1-11. Magnum DS Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 029
Magnum DS and SB
Accessories and Peripheral Devices
26.1-27
Magnum Peripheral Devices

Modbus Translator Module (mMINT)
BIM II
Digital Relay Accessory Module (DRAM)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Modbus Translator Module
BIM II
Digital Relay Accessory Module
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM Network Translator) is a DIN mounted accessory that facilitates communication with a Modbus RTU Network and as many as 32 Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ trip units or other INCOM communications devices by passing Modbus registers transparently between the two networks.
The Breaker Interface Module (BIM II) is a panel-mounted device that provides a central monitor and display for as many as 50 Magnum 520MC and 1150+ trip units or other INCOM communications devices. The BIM II can be mounted directly on the switchgear or may be located up to 10,000 feet away using twisted pair shielded cable.
The DRAM is a DIN mounted accessory device with four Form C contacts that can be programmed by the Digitrip 1150+ for indication of any combination of the following conditions: auxiliary switch, INST, SDT, LDT, GndT, GFAlm, HLAlm, DEADman and others using the trip unit communications bus function.
Time Delay Undervoltage (TDUVR)
Other Protocol Translators

To facilitate diverse communications from INCOM to other protocols, Eaton offers a host of translator devices including MINTII (RS-232), EtherNet (Power Xpert Gateway), Modbus (mMINT), PROFIBUS DP (PMINT) and others. Contact Eaton for the status of other communication technologies.
Time Delay Undervoltage
The Magnum time delay undervoltage is a DIN mounted accessory device applied in concert with a Magnum, Series C or Series G breaker mounted instantaneous UVR to provide an adjustable time delay ride-through on a temporary loss of voltage. Selectable time delay settings are 0.1, 0.5, 1 and 2 seconds. Models are available for 120 Vac and 230 Vac applications.
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
26.1-28
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
Sheet 26 030
22 23 24
2
Control Voltage
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Magnum Circuit Breaker

RLY 1
RLY2
RLY3
RLY4
RLY 1
RLY2
RLY3
RLY4
5
100
A17
A18
4
Shield
Dedicated local network for each Magnum Circuit Breaker

1
The Digitrip 1150 front panel is used to program the external module for any combination of the following: Aux Switch, Bell Alarm, INST, SDT, LDT, GndT or GFAlm, HLAlm, DEADman, WATCHDOG, ALARM (the Alarm relay tracks the function of the Aux Relay A programming). Each module has four relays. Each relay has a Form C contact with each having a rating of 10A max at 250 Vac. (Maximum of four DRAM Modules per circuit breakertwo shown in illustration.) Control voltage is 120 Vac 20% or 48125 Vdc. Communication cable is C-H style 2A957805G01 or Belden 9463 cable. Set switch up to insert 100 ohm terminating resistor on last relay of network.
Figure 26.1-12. Digitrip Relay Accessory Module Diagram
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 031
Magnum DS and SB
26.1-29

Levering Tool
Locking xture mounts directly to Magnum breaker escutcheon 25-foot umbilical cord between the operator and the device Hand-held pendant with OPEN/ CLOSE and IN/OUT pushbuttons, with ENABLE button Ready lights indicating power to the unit and pendant Safety interlock prevents operation of unit until it is safely locked in place Complete racking in 25 seconds or less Handles for ease of installation Works on new and existing Magnum breakers without the need for any modications to doors, breakers or structures
For maximum safety during drawout breaker levering operations, the universal remote power racking system (RPR-2) can be employed on Magnum, as well as other drawout low and medium voltage power circuit breakers that use rotation of a shaft for insertion or removal. Remote control is accomplished by an operator pendant with an INSERT and REMOVE pushbutton station and a 25-foot connecting cable. The RPR-2 requires 120 Vac, 15A power from a common plug receptacle. Status indication and selectable torque limitation matched to the breaker racking mechanism are also provided.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Lifting Yoke and Floor Lifting Device

Magnum breakers include lifting ears on each side to accept a lifting yoke (or suitable sling) to facilitate lifting using a skyhook from a top of gear lifter, oor lifter or crane. Various lifting yoke style numbers are available for all Magnum frame types in both three-pole and four-pole congurations. A roll-on-the-oor lifting device style number 6727D63H20 is equipped with a skyhook for use in conjunction with a breaker lifting yoke or suitable sling to lift the breaker from above. Shelf-type roll-on-the-oor lifters can also be used to lift the breaker from underneath without a lifting yoke.
Levering Tool
Magnum drawout breakers are designed for closed door manual levering by use of a standard 3/8-inch (10 mm) drive set, which is a commonly available tool. This eliminates the need for a unique levering device, which tends to get lost if not properly stored.
Magnum Remote Racking Device
MRR1000 Connected to Magnum Breaker
36 37 38 39 40 41
Floor Lifting Device
Universal Remote Power Racking System (Type RPR-2)

Magnum Breaker Remote Racking Device
Eatons MRR1000 remote racking device provides a means of remotely inserting or removing any drawout circuit breaker in the Magnum DS and SB family of air circuit breakers (ACBs), to help mitigate arc ash exposure. The MRR1000 permits the operator to remotely open and close a breaker from up to 25 feet away during the rack-in or rack-out process, a distance well beyond the arc ash boundary for traditional LV switchgear.

42 43
120 Vac power supply (with plug) Works with all breakers in the Magnum family (MDS, MDN, SBS, SBN and CM52 network protectors)
Remote Power Racking System
CA08104001E
26.1-30
Magnum DS and SB
September 2011
Sheet 26 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Test Cabinet
The test cabinet is a separately mounted device with open and close pushbuttons that facilitates bench testing of electrically operated Magnum breakers. An input power cord is provided for connection to a 120 Vac, 15A plug receptacle. The test cabinet output power is matched to the breaker control voltage(s) and is connected to the breaker via a cord that plugs into the breaker secondary contacts.
Auxiliary Power Module

The auxiliary power module catalog number PRTAAPM120V or PRTAAPM240V plugs into the receptacle located in the front of the trip unit to power the display and/or communications functions during bench testing. An input power cord is provided for connection to a 120 Vac or 230 Vac source.
TripLink
TripLink style number 5720B59G01 enables the downloading of the trip unit protection settings and circuit data from one Digitrip 1150+ trip unit to another, which saves time during startup and maintenance. TripLink is a means of transferring settings from one circuit breaker to another. TripLink transfers all protection settings and time and date, and the circuit breakers circuit data. The transfer of these settings may be useful for cloning a lineup of circuit breakers, cloning a circuit breakers settings for replacing the circuit breaker with its clone for maintenance purposes, or for making common settings for a test program.
Secondary Injection Test Kit

A test kit style number MTK1000 is available for secondary injection testing of Magnum breakers with Digitrip trip units. This test kit functionally conrms proper operation at all trip unit settings. Test reports can be downloaded to a PC via a removable SD card.
Hand-Held Functional Test Kit
Hand-Held Test Kit
A secondary injection hand-held test kit catalog number MTST120V or MTST240V is available to functionally test Magnum and Series G breakers equipped with Digitrip trip units. The kit includes test cords and faceplate templates to match the breaker being tested, and an auxiliary power module. This test kit functionally conrms proper operations at the minimum trip unit settings.
TripLink Transfer
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 033
Series NRX
General Description
26.2-1
Series NRX
In todays commercial, facilities, data centers or manufacturing environment, available space for new and retrot equipment is a precious commodity. When building space is at a premium, or when system upgrading requires additional functionality, equipment dimensions can present a challenge. In fact, studies have shown that space savings can have a value of up to $4000 per square meter depending on the application. The compact size and broad capabilities of the Series NRX make it the right choice for applications where space savings is a priority. The small size of the Series NRX, coupled with a variety of connection options, gives you the ability to efciently layout distribution equipment. See Tab 20 for low voltage metal enclosed drawout switchgear and Tab 21 for low voltage switchboards. The reduced weight of the Series NRX makes it easier to handle during startup and scheduled inspection. A threepole, fully populated drawout breaker weighs only 54 lbs/24 kg! The Series NRX enables twice as many feeder breakers in a standard structure or a reduction in overall assembly size of up to 50%.
The small size, 10.00 inches wide by 10.70 inches deep x 14.20 inches high, of the Series NRX allows for much higher densities of power circuit breakers in a structureup to eight breakers in a 24.00-inch wide structure. Series NRX accessories can be quickly installed at the job site, without any special tools. Each breaker comes standard with an accessory tray, the needed accessories simply plug and lock into the tray. A full range of trip units, ranging from basic protection (LSI or LSIG) to metering, system diagnostics, protective relay functions and communications, complement the breaker offering. Two of the trip units models include (optional) Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System, built to reduce arc ash energy on a downstream unit during system maintenance. Multiple cable and bus connection options enable quick and exible integration. Options include cable termination, front or rear bus connection in both drawout and xed-mounted styles. Tension clamp secondary contact terminations allow for quick connection of control wiring, reducing wiring time and costs.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Series NRX
General Description
Introducing the Series NRX low voltage power circuit breakera major breakthrough of minor proportions. The Series NRX provides the performance of a power circuit breaker65 kA interrupting at 480 Vacin the compact size of a molded-case breaker. It offers the protection and features of a power circuit breaker, along with increased exibility at a portion of the size. The Series NRX is tested to 20,000 mechanical operations and 10,000 electrical operationssignicantly higher than industry standards, such as UL and IEC, require or the capabilities of equivalent products on the market. Thus, your maintenance personnel can do what needs to be done, instead of spending valuable time inspecting and maintaining the breakers in the system. In switchgear and switchboards, its important that it be easily accessible during schedule equipment maintenance. The cassette design allows you to inspect parts without removing the cassette from the switchgear cell. The design of the breaker and cassette enables full use of the breaker handle and cassette rails with a gloved hand, allowing electricians to remain in the appropriate PPE protective gear. The breaker handles ergonomic design also maximizes functionality and leverage across seven complete strokes (with an average of only 21 lbs of force) charging the breaker quickly and easily, and making it easier to cycle when needed during commissioning or scheduled maintenance.
Technical Data
Description Continuous current rating (amps) Rating 800 85 65 42 42

Description Continuous current rating (amps) Rating 800 1200 85 65 42 42 85 65 42 42
34 35 36 37
Short-Circuit Rating (kA)

254 Vac 508 Vac 635 Vac Short-time withstand (kA)

240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Short-time withstand (kA)
Table 26.2-3. IEC 60947-2 Ratings

Description Continuous current rating (amps) Rating 630 and 800 1000 and 1250 1600
38
Ics
50 50 42 42

240/254 Vac 415/435 Vac 690/725 Vac Short-time withstand = Icw (kA)
Icu
85 65 42 42
Ics
50 50 42 42
Icu
85 65 42 42
Ics
50 50 42 42
Icu
85 65 42 42
39 40 41 42 43
Table 26.2-4. Circuit Breaker Dimensions in Inches (mm) and Weights in lbs (kg)
Description Height 13.18 (334.8) 13.18 (334.8) 14.18 (360.2) 14.18 (360.2) Width 8.25 (209.6) 11.00 (279.4) 10.02 (254.5) 12.69 (322.3) Depth 7.15 (181.6) 7.15 (181.6) 10.69 (271.5) 10.69 (271.5) Weight 33.58 (15.23) 44.40 (20.14) 85.20 (38.65) 104.00 (47.17)
Fixed
Three-pole Four-pole Three-pole Four-pole
Drawout with Cassette
CA08104001E
26.2-2
Series NRX
Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 26 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Table 26.2-5. Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings

Time/Current Characteristic Long delay Pickup Setting 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0 (1200A maximum) Pickup Point In times long delay setting In times instantaneous setting Ir times short delay setting In times ground fault setting Time Band, Seconds 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 (at 6 times pickup value)
Table 26.2-6. Replacement Rating Plugs Field installation rating plug on xed or drawout breakers.
In of Rating Plug Frame Size In (maximum) 630800A Group A Catalog Number 200 250 300 400 500 600 630 800 1000 1200 1250 1600
10001250A Group B Catalog Number NB400T NB500T NB600T NB630T NB800T NB1000T NB1200T NB1250T
1600A Group C Catalog Number NC800T NC1000T NC1200T NC1250T NC1600T
Instantaneous
Short delay
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (at response) 0.1, 0.3, 0.5 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (at response) 0.1, 0.3, 0.5
NA200T NA250T NA300T NA400T NA500T NA600T NA630T NA800T
Ground fault
In = Rating plug value Ir = Long delay pickup setting x In I2t response.
IEC only (not UL listed).
Note: Rating plug must be selected based on breaker frame rating.
For time/current curves, please visit www.eaton.com/seriesnrx.
Accessories
Spring Release with Latch Check Switch/Ready to Close Switch Overcurrent Trip Switches ry Tray
Arc Hood
Terminals
33 34 35
Auxiliary Switches 1A/1B
Secondaries Shutters
Rails
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
UVR
Trip Unit Accessory Tray Shunt Trip
Electric Operator
Ground Clip
Rejection Scheme
Figure 26.2-1. Breaker and Accessories Table 26.2-7. Shunt Trip

Control Voltages 24 48 110127 110125 208240 220250 Frequency DC DC 560 Hz DC 5060 Hz DC
Figure 26.2-2. Cassette/Cradle Components

Operational Voltage Range 70%110% 1726 3453 77140 77138 146264 154275 Inrush/Continuous Power Consumption (VA) 500/5 530/5 540/5 540/5 500/5 515/5 Opening Time (ms) 25 25 25 25 25 25
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 035
Series NRX
Accessories
26.2-3
Table 26.2-8. UVR

Control Voltages 24 32 48 110127 110125 208240 220250 380415 480 600 Frequency DC DC DC 5060 Hz DC 5060 Hz DC AC AC AC Operational Voltage Range 85%110% 2026 2735 4153 94140 94138 177264 187275 323457 408528 510660 Dropout Volts 35%60% 814 1119 1729 4494 4494 84125 88132 145228 168288 210360 Inrush/Continuous Power Consumption (VA) 500/5 620/5 850/5 890/5 890/5 910/5 910/5 960/5 800/8 800/12 Opening Time (ms) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Table 26.2-9. Spring Release

Control Voltages 24 48 110127 110125 208240 220250 Frequency DC DC 5060 Hz DC 5060 Hz DC Operational Voltage Range 70%110% 1726 3453 77140 77138 146264 154275 Inrush Power Consumption (VA) 500 530 540 540 500 515 Closing Time (ms) 25 25 25 25 25 25
Table 26.2-10. Motor Operator

Control Voltages 24 48 110127 110125 208240 220250 Frequency Operational Voltage Range 85%110% 2026 4153 94140 94138 177264 187275 Running Current (A) 5 3 2 1 1 1 Typical Inrush Current 500% 500% 300% 500% 1000% 1000% Power Consumption (VA) 150 150 280 150 280 280 Maximum Charging Time (sec) 3 3 3 3 4 4
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DC DC 5060 Hz DC 5060 Hz DC
Table 26.2-11. Control Voltages and Currents

Control Voltages 24 Vdc 21 21/0.2 TBD 1726 1726 2026 48 Vdc 11 11/0.1 TBD 3453 3453 4153 110125 Vdc 5 5/0.04 5/1 77138 77138 94138 110127 Vac 5 5/0.04 6/2 77140 77140 94140 220250 Vdc 2 2/0.02 10/1 154275 154275 187275 208240 Vac 2 2/0.02 10/1 146264 146264 177264
Current
Close current (inrush) Shunt trip current (ST)(inrush/continuous) Charge motor current(inrush/continuous)
Operating Voltage Rating

Close Trip Charge
Table 26.2-12. OCT/OTS

Control Voltages 250 125 250 Frequency 5060 Hz DC DC Contact Rating (Amperes) 10 0.5 0.25
Table 26.2-13. Auxiliary Switch

Control Voltages 250 125 250 Frequency 5060 Hz DC DC Contact Rating (Amperes) 10 0.5 0.25
Table 26.2-14. Breaker Position/Continuity

Breaker Position Continuity Between Red and Black Lead Pairs NO Continuity Between Blue and Black Lead Pairs 45 and 43 46 and 47 51 and 49 52 and 53 NO
Open
Closed
44 and 43 48 and 47 50 and 49 54 and 53
CA08104001E
26.2-4
Series NRX
September 2011
Sheet 26 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 26.2-15. Digitrip Trip Units for NRX ANSI/UL Rated Circuit Breakers
Trip Unit Type Ampere range Interrupting rating at 480V rms sensing
Digitrip 520 2001600A 42 kA Yes LI, LSI, LSIG Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes No 2001000% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) 2001200% x (In) Yes LSI and LSIG No 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N/A
Digitrip 520M 2001600A 42 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No No Yes Yes (LSI only) 2001000% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) 2001200% x (In) Yes Yes Yes 25100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No 4-character LCD Yes 2% full scale No No No No No No No No Yes +24 Vdc No No Test set No Yes (RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA) No No
Digitrip 1150 2001600A 42 kA Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds 15 seconds Yes Yes 0.51.0 x (Ir) 2001000% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) 2001200% x (In) and M1 Yes Yes Yes 24100% x (In) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes (optional) Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Color graphic LCD Yes 1% of reading Yes 1% of reading Yes 2% of reading Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes +24 Vdc Yes Yes Integral and test set Yes (current and voltage) Yes (RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA) Yes Yes

Protection Styles Fixed rating plug (In) Overtemperature trip
Long delay pickup Long delay time I2t at 6 x Ir Long delay time I4t IEEE curves Long delay thermal memory High load alarm Short delay Short delay pickup protection (S) Short delay time I2t at 8 x Ir Short delay time at Short Delay Time ZSI Instantaneous Instantaneous pickup protection (I) Making current release Off position Ground fault alarm Ground fault Ground fault pickup protection (G) Ground fault delay I2t at .625 x In Ground fault delay at Ground fault ZSI Ground fault thermal memory Disable ground fault protection Neutral protection (N)
System Diagnostics
System Monitoring
Digital display Current (%) Voltage (%) L to L Power and energy (%) Apparent power kVA and demand Reactive power kVAR Power factor Crest factor Power qualityharmonics % THD, waveform capture
Type Power supply
Additional Features
Trip log No Electronic operations counter No Testing method Test set Waveform capture No No Arcash Reduction Maintenance System No Breaker health monitor No Programmable relay functions 1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC. Test set for secondary injection. Optional communications modules available: Ethernet (Web-browsing, Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP), Modbus RTU, INCOM, PROFIBUS DP.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 037
Series NRX
NRX Breaker Communications Adapter Modules
26.2-5
Control Jumper
This jumper provides the user with a means of enabling or disabling remote communication control commands to the Series NRX trip unit. With jumper placed in the ENABLE position, remote slave action commands, such as open and close, can be acted upon. With the jumper in the DISABLE position, commands will not be accepted.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Status LED
Source/Residual Ground Selection Jumper

This jumper selects the protection conguration for Series NRX trip units with ground fault protection or ground fault alarm functionality. Consult Series NRX trip unit instructions for further information on ground sensing. This jumper is not applicable and does not function for non-ground fault style trip units.
Jumper Plug for Source Sensing
Jumper Plugs for Communication Control
Series NRX Communications Adapter Module
General Description
The Series NRX Communication Adapter Modules (CAMs) are DIN mounted accessories that facilitate communication with a variety of different communications protocols: Modbus Communication Adapter Module (MCAM)Modbus RTU INCOM Communication Adapter Module (ICAM)INCOM PROFIBUS Communication Adapter Module (PCAM)PROFIBUS DP Ethernet Communication Adapter Module (ECAM)Web-enabled, Modbus TCP/IP, SNMP and Power Xpert Toolkit
Communications Adapter Module Front View)
Wiring Diagrams
MicroController LED (Status)

This indicator will be ashing green whenever the module is powered up and when the microprocessor is executing instructions. When the Series NRX communications adapter module is connected to a Series NRX trip unit for the rst time, this LED will alternately ash red and green to signal a learning process between both units. This automatic process will take approximately 15 seconds and occurs only once during the initial startup. The LED will also ash red if the module is not connected to, or unable to communicate.
Communications Network
31 32 33 34 35
CAM 1
CAM
CAM
The communication device may be mounted in the Series NRX cassette secondary terminal blocks or remote mounted on a DIN rail. Module/address is assigned to the cassette/cell location. This eliminates the need to do any reprogramming when a replacement breaker is installed in the existing location Communication of Open, Close and Trip status is via the CAM module, not through the trip unit 24 Vdc control power Use with Digitrip 520M or Digitrip 1150 NRX trip units
Figure 26.2-3. Communications Adapter Modules in a Modbus RTU, INCOM or PROFIBUS DP Network
36 37
Optional External Contacts

CS (or PB) Trip CS (or PB) Close Control Power
38 39
Com
Open
Close
40

Communications Module

41 42 43
Series NRX Circuit Breaker
Wiring as shown for optional communication close or open capability. Choose spring release coil voltage rating as desired if communications is required. Choose shunt trip voltage rating to be the same as spring release voltage rating if communication is required. Control power voltage rating must match ST and SR coil voltage rating. Close duration is two seconds on communication activation when comm. control is enabled.
Communication Adapter Module Cassette Mounted in Secondary Terminal Blocks
Figure 26.2-4. Communications Control (SR and ST Wiring)

CA08104001E
26.2-6
Series NRX
September 2011
Sheet 26 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
24 TB2-1 TB2-2
1 TB #1 4 Shield 3 COM 2 NW 1 NW + TB # 121 ohms
Open
Source

Enable
24 Vdc + Comm Control Enable Disable
Comr 24 Vdc
Close
19
20
21 22
23
24
25
26
Series NRX Circuit Breaker
Digitrip 520M
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
The Series NRX communication module is a separate device that snaps into the DIN rail starting at location 19 through 26. (Removal of the four contact blocks is required.) The trip unit AUX voltage is 24 Vdc 10% and should be sourced from a reliable service. Ground the shield at the master device. Set the jumper on the module to enable or disable the communications control as desired. When the communications module is employed and source ground or zero sequence ground sensing method is required, the ground fault function is enabled by this jumper. Connectors are UL/CSA rated 300V, VDE rated 250V. Recommended: Weidmuller (BL 3.5/90/5BK) Orientation: 90 lead exit, but other lead orientations are possible. Wire guage: # 18 AWG/0.82 mm. The nal device in the daisy-chain conguration must have a 121ohms termination resistor installed across terminals #1 and #2 on TB #2.
Figure 26.2-5. Series NRX Modbus Communication with Digitrip 520M
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 26 039
Series NRX
26.2-7
+ 24 Vdc
22
TB2-1 TB2-2
23 24 25 26 27 28
3 2
1 TB #1
1 TB #2 100 ohms
Shield
Open
Comr 24
Close
Source Ground Enable Disable
24
Comm Control Enable Disable
NW +
NW
29 30
31 32
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
33
Series NRX Circuit Breaker Digitrip 520M
34 35
The Series NRX communication module is a separate device that snaps into the DIN rail starting at location 19 through 26. (Removal of the four contact blocks is required.) The trip unit AUX voltage is 24 Vdc 10% and should be sourced from a reliable service. INCOM communication cable is a two conductor with shield type wire in daisy chain conguration. The recommended cable (Belden Blue Hose # 9643 or equivalent) has a twisted-pair of wires (# 20 AWG stranded 7 x 28 conductors with PVC insulation) having an aluminum/mylar foil shield with drain wire. The maximum system capacity is 10,000 feet of communications cable and 1000 devices on the INCOM network. Make sure that the twisted-pair wire is recommended for INCOM network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect each slave to the INCOM network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted-pair is not important. Ground the shield at the host computer (device). Set the jumper on the module to enable or disable the communications control as desired. When the communications module is employed and source ground or zero sequence ground sensing method is required, the ground fault function is enabled by this jumper. Connectors are UL/CSA rated 300V, VDE rated 250V. Recommended: Weidmuller (BL 3.5/90/5BK) Orientation: 90 lead exit, but other lead orientations are possible. Wire gauge: # 18 AWG/0.82 mm. The nal device in the daisy-chain conguration must have a 100 ohms termination resistor installed across terminals #1 and #2 on TB #2.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 26.2-6. Series NRX INCOM Communication with Digitrip 520M
CA08104001E
26.2-8
Series NRX
Ethernet Communications Adapter Module
September 2011
Sheet 26 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ethernet Communications Adapter Module
Series NRX Ethernet Communications Adapter Module
Data View Summary
General Description
The Series NRX Ethernet communications adapter module is an accessory that operates as a communicating device in conjunction with a compatible Series NRX trip unit/breaker via an Ethernet network. The catalog number of this product is ECAM. The Ethernet communications adapter module provides Web-enabled monitoring and control of the Series NRX trip unit metering, logging, and control functions using a standard web browser. Features include display of measured current, voltage, power, energy and alarms; command, event and data logging; conguration of set point, alarm and logging parameters; and control functions such as open/close breaker. In addition to Web server capability, data communication is provided in Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP protocols. Additionally, the Series NRX Ethernet Communications Adapter Module provides data communications to the Eaton Power Xpert Software as an easy means of centralizing and gathering data for long-term data archival, analysis and trending.
Trend Graph View
CA08104001E
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

September 2011
Sheet 27 001
27.0-1
Contents
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Breaker Type Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-2 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-3 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-1 Special Function Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1 Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-1 Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . Section 16475 Section 26 28 11 Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904 Section 26 28 50 Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16476 Section 26 28 16.11
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
CA08104001E
27.0-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Breaker Type Comparison
September 2011
Sheet 27 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers, Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
There are two main classications of low voltage circuit breakersmolded-case circuit breakers and low voltage power circuit breakers. All UL, NEMA and ANSI standards are for molded-case circuit breakers and low voltage power circuit breakers. The industry recognizes three types of circuit breakers molded-case circuit breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power circuit breakers LVPCB). Insulated-case circuit breakers are designed to meet the standards for molded-case circuit breakers. Low voltage power circuit breakers comply with the following standards: ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for LVPCB ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures IEEE Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in Enclosures UL 1066LVPCB

Molded-case circuit breakers and insulated-case circuit breakers typically comply with the following standards: UL 489MCCB UL 489Molded-Case Switches (MCS) NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS NEMA AB3MCCB Application

Table 27.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Description Select trip short-time rating
LVPCB (Type Magnum DS and Series NRX) Selective trip over full range of fault currents up to interrupting rating (high short-time ratings) Types of operators: mechanically operated and electrically operated two-step stored energy 5-cycle closing for electrically operated devices Available in drawout construction permitting racking to a distinct test position and removal for maintenance Interrupting duty at 635 Vac: 42100 kA and current limiting with or without fuses up to 200 kA Special current limiting types available with or without fuses up to 200 kA Higher Small number of frame sizes available. Typical 8006000A Extensive maintenance possible on all frame sizes Used in enclosures, MCCs, switchboards and switchgear Not available in series ratings 100% continuous current rated in its enclosure ANSI/IEEE C37 UL 1066
ICCB (Type Magnum SB and Series NRX) Selective trip over partial range of fault currents within the interrupting rating (medium short-time ratings). Typically up to 35 kA Types of operators: mechanically operated and electrically operated two-step stored energy 5-cycle closing for electrically operated devices Available in drawout construction permitting racking to a distinct test position and removal for maintenance Interrupting duty at 508 Vac: 35 150 kA
MCCB (QUICKLAG/Series C/Series G) Selective trip over a smaller range of fault currents within the interrupting rating (low short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times the frame size Types of operators: mechanically operated over-center toggle or motor operator Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically operated devices Typically xed-mounted but large frame sizes may be available in drawout construction Interrupting duty at 480 Vac: 22100 kA without fuses and up to 200 kA with integral fuses or for current-limiting type Current limiting available with and without fuses up to 200 kA Low Large number of frame sizes available. Typical 1002500A Very limited maintenance possible on larger frame sizes Used in enclosures, panelboards, switchboards, MCCs and control panels Available in series ratings 80% continuous-current rated, unless specically stated to be rated 100% in an enclosure NEMA AB1/AB3 UL 489
Operator type
Closing speed Mounting
Interrupting rating
Current limiting Relative cost Available frame sizes Maintenance Enclosure types Series ratings Enclosed rating
Special current limiting types available without fuses up to 150 kA Medium Small number of frame sizes available. Typical 8006000A Limited maintenance possible on larger frame sizes Used in enclosures, MCCs and switchboards Not available in series ratings 80% continuous-current rated, unless specically stated to be rated 100% in an enclosure NEMA AB1/AB3 UL 489 or UL 1066
Standards
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 003
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
27.0-3
22 23 24 25 26
Series G
27 28
27.3-9 27.3-10 27.3-14 27.3-22 27.3-35 27.3-36 27.3-37 27.3-38 27.4-1 27.4-1 27.4-4 27.4-5 27.4-6 27.4-7 27.4-8 27.4-10 27.4-11 27.4-11 27.4-13 27.4-19 27.4-25 27.4-33 27.4-34 27.4-35 27.4-38 27.4-40 27.4-41 27.4-42 27.4-43 27.4-48
Table of Contents
General Description Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . . Electronic RMS Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories and Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Function Circuit Breakers Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series Rated Breaker Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AFCI Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Hz Breaker Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HID Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Control Solenoid Operated Breakers . . . SWD Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HACR Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naval/Marine Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Data Continuous Ampere Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeder Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breakers Not hp Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slash Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Sizing/Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-1 27.1-2 27.1-7 27.2-1 27.2-1 27.2-3 27.2-5 27.2-8 27.2-12 27.2-12 27.2-13 27.2-14 27.2-16 27.2-19 27.2-19 27.2-19 27.2-19 27.2-19 27.2-20 27.2-20 27.2-20 27.3-1 27.3-1 27.3-1 27.3-2 27.3-2 27.3-2 27.3-2 27.3-2 27.3-2 27.3-2 27.3-3 27.3-4 27.3-6 27.3-6 27.3-7 27.3-8 Time Current Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breaker Selection Table100% Selective . . . . Breaker Selection Table0.1 Sec Selective . . Arc Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arcash Reduction Maintenance System . . . . . . . Unusual Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse-Feed Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker Selection Data Overview Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . Industrial Circuit Breakers in Assemblies . . . . . Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . Series G Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series C Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB). . . . . . Power Monitoring and Metering Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Modules and Breakers. . . . . . Circuit Breaker Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
27.0-4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

September 2011
Sheet 27 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 005

General Description
27.1-1
General Description
General Circuit Breaker Information
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as, . . . a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as, . . . a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material. The NEC describes them as, A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-automatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits.
Thermal trip action is achieved through the use of a bimetal heated by the load current. On a sustained overload, the bimetal will deect, causing the operating mechanism to trip. Because bimetals are responsive to the heat emitted by the current ow, they allow a long-time delay on light overloads, yet they have a fast response on heavier overloads. Magnetic trip action is achieved through the use of an electromagnet in series with the load current. This provides an instantaneous tripping action when the current reaches a predetermined value. Front-adjustable magnetic trip elements are supplied as standard on 250A frame circuit breakers and above (except 100A and 150A magnetic only breakers), all other thermal-magnetic breakers have non-adjustable magnetic trip elements.
Trip unit adjustments are made by setting switches on the front of the trip unit or by programming the trip unit electronically. All electronic RMS trip breakers are equipped with a manual push-to-trip mechanism.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2. Operating Mechanism
The function of the operating mechanism is to provide a means of opening and closing the breaker contacts. All mechanisms are of the quick-make, quick-break type and are trip free. Trip free mechanisms are designed so that the contacts cannot be held closed against an abnormal circuit condition and are sometimes referred to as an overcenter toggle mechanism. In addition to indicating whether the breaker is on or off, the operating mechanism handle indicates when the breaker is tripped by moving to a position midway between the extremes. This distinct trip point is particularly advantageous where breakers are grouped, as in panelboard applications, because it clearly indicates the faulty circuit. The operating mechanism contains a positive on feature. In the normal switching operation, the handle of the circuit breaker will not be capable of being left readily at or near the off position when the main contacts are closed.
Electronic RMS Trip Breakers

Eaton electronic trip breakers are generally applied for applications where high levels of system coordination are called for. Available from 202500A, todays electronic trip breakers can provide superior protection and coordination as well as system alarms and diagnostics, monitoring and communications. Both the overload trip action and the short-circuit trip action of breakers with Digitrip electronic trip units are achieved by the use of current transformers and solid-state circuitry that monitors the current and initiates tripping through a ux shunt trip when an overload or a short circuit is present. All multiple-pole circuit breakers have trip elements in each pole and a common trip bar. An abnormal circuit condition in any one pole will cause all poles to open simultaneously. Electronic RMS trip breakers can include trip features such as:

Circuit Breaker Components and Functions

Being essentially high interrupting capacity switches with repetitive elements, Eaton circuit breakers are comprised of three main functional components. These are: 1. Trip elements (thermal-magnetic or electronic) 2. Operating mechanism 3. Arc extinguishers
3. Arc Extinguishers
The function of the DE-ION arc extinguisher is to conne, divide and extinguish the arc drawn between opening breaker contacts. It consists of specially shaped steel grids isolated from each other and supported by an insulating housing. When the contacts are opened, the arc drawn induces a magnetic eld in the grids, which in turn draws the arc from the contacts and into the grids. The arc is thus split into a series of smaller arcs and the heat generated is quickly dissipated through the metal. These two actions result in a rapid removal of ions from the arc, which hastens dielectric buildup between the contacts and results in rapid extinction of the arc.
1. Trip Elements
The function of the trip element is to trip the operating mechanism in the event of a prolonged overload or short-circuit current. To accomplish this, a thermalmagnetic trip action is provided.
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Eaton thermal-magnetic breakers are general purpose devices suitable for the majority of breaker applications and are considered the industry standard. Available from 15800A, thermalmagnetic breakers provide accurate reliable overload and short-circuit protection for conductors and connected apparatus.
Adjustable long-time pickup Adjustable short-time pickup Adjustable long delay time Adjustable short delay time Adjustable instantaneous pickup Adjustable ground fault pickup Adjustable ground fault delay time Zone selective interlocking Communications
CA08104001E
27.1-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

General DescriptionTrip Units
September 2011
Sheet 27 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Electronic RMS Trip Unit

General
Eaton offers the most comprehensive range of electronic trip units in the industry for molded-case circuit breakers. All electronic trip units are rms sensing and can be applied from 70A up through 2500A. Eaton offers electronic trip units as standard for circuit breakers rated above 800A, and offers electronic trip units as optional for circuit breakers 70A up through 800A. Digitrip electronic trip units are AC devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true rms current sensing means for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic trip unit is to provide circuit protection. This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker shunt trip when pre-set current levels and time delay settings are exceeded. All Eaton electronic trip units use a high effective sampling rate to maintain measurement accuracy, monitoring, and protection with nonlinear loads having harmonic content up to the 27th order. Electronic trip units are applied to distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination are called for. In addition, electronic trip units can provide further enhanced features such as alarming, diagnostics, system monitoring and communications. Eaton RMS sensing trip units fall into two main categories: Front adjustable trip units (Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610, 810 and 910) Programmable trip units (Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050)
Front-Adjustable Trip Units

Front-adjustable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to nine time-current setting options that are set by switches mounted on the front of the trip unit. The application for front adjustable trip units would be distribution systems that can be coordinated within the range of settings available and that do not require sophisticated coordination strategies to be applied down through the distribution system to small rated breakers.
Rating Plugs
Rating plugs provide a means to establish the breakers continuous current rating. Rating plugs are colorcoded and interchangeable to make it easy to match the correct rating plug with the correct trip unit. The same rating plug can be applied to both 50 and 60 Hz distribution systems. Some rating plugs are xed and some have an adjustable range of amperage values for greater exibility. Digitrip 310, 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units can be supplied with either a xed or adjustable rating plug. Digitrip 310+ trip units are equipped with adjustable rating plugs. OPTIM style trip units are furnished with xed rating plugs but have a programmable Long Time Pickup rating to allow application over a range of amperage values.
Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM)

Programmable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to 10 timecurrent setting options that are programmed electronically by the use of a programming device. The application for programmable trip units would be high integrity distribution systems that require superior levels of system coordination coupled with system alarming, diagnostics and monitoring.
Cause of Trip Indication

All OPTIM and Digitrip 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units include Cause-ofTrip indication LEDs. Breakers using the RMS 310+ electronic trip unit have the ability to output cause-of-trip information through the test port. The Cause-of-Trip LED module provides trip information via LED indication. The Digiview and Panelmount Digiview can be installed in the RMS 310+ test port to provide both cause-of-trip information and phase current through an LCD display.
Cause-of-Trip LED Module
Digiview
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 007

27.1-3
Table 27.1-1. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units
RMS 310 RMS 310+ RMS 510 OPTIM 550 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050
22 23 24 25
rms sensing 5 functions Front adjustable
rms sensing 6 functions Front adjustable Optional display for diagnostics and load monitoring Zone selective interlocking Optional Arcash Reduction Maintenance System
rms sensing 9 functions Front adjustable Zone selective interlocking Diagnostics
rms sensing 10 functions Programmable Load monitoring Diagnostics Zone selective interlocking Communications
rms sensing 9 functions Front adjustable Zone selective interlocking Load monitoring Diagnostics
rms sensing 9 functions Front adjustable Zone selective interlocking Load monitoring Diagnostics Communications Power and energy monitoring
rms sensing 9 functions Front adjustable Zone selective interlocking Load monitoring Diagnostics Communications Power and energy monitoring Harmonics
rms sensing 10 functions Programmable Zone selective interlocking Load monitoring Diagnostics Communications Power and energy monitoring Harmonics
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Optional features.
Additional Protection Features

Discriminator/Making Current Release
Eatons Digitrip RMS electronic trip units are designed and built with safety and reliability in mind, both to protect the user and the equipment, as well as to make sure the trip functions within its design parameters. By providing a discriminator circuit to Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units, as well as to Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units that do not have an instantaneous setting, the user is protected should a faulted circuit exist. The discriminator (or making current releases as it is often called) is set at 11 times the rating plug ampere rating and is enabled for approximately the rst 10 cycles of current ow. Should a fault condition exist, the breaker will trip with no intentional time delay on closing, protecting the user from a potentially unsafe condition.
Trip Unit Overtemperature

Digitrip electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures that range from 20 to 85C. In the unlikely event that temperatures exceed this ambient, the trip unit has a built-in overtemperature trip to protect the trip unit should the temperature exceed these design parameters.
imposes a shorter delay time should an additional overcurrent occur before a sufcient cooldown period has elapsed. Thermal memory protects the distribution system from cumulative overheating caused by repeated overcurrent conditions. OPTIM trip units allow this to be turned ON or OFF.
Thermal Memory
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate powered thermal memory, i.e., the units remember recent overcurrent events that may have initiated the trip timing sequence, and then returned to nominal levels, halting the sequence prior to trip initiation. In the event that the current levels again exceed the pickup set point within a few cycles of the original pickup, the units memory recalls the previous near trip and automatically imposes a shorter delay time. In effect, the unit treats multiple time-related events as a single continuous event thereby preventing system damage due to cumulative overheating. As a further enhancement, the trip units incorporate an unpowered thermal memory feature. In the event that current levels cause the breaker to trip and the breaker is immediately reclosed, the trip unit remembers the previous overcurrent trip and again
System Alarms
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 electronic trip units incorporate a high load alarm capability. Set at 85% of Ir, the alarm will be initiated once the load current exceeds 85% for 40 seconds. Once this occurs, the HILD message will ash in the display window and the power/relay module will operate to send a remote signal. Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units also offer a high load alarm capability but with more exibility. OPTIM trip units have a high load alarm that can be programmed to operate between 50% and 100% of Ir. Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate a ground fault alarm capability. Settings available for ground fault alarm are the same as for ground fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm occurs, both local and remote signal indication is available (OPTIM 550 is remote only).
Instantaneous Override
In addition to a discriminator, an instantaneous override is present in all molded-case and insulated-case circuit breakers to provide additional protection for the breaker. The instantaneous override is factory set nominally just below the breaker withstand rating.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionTrip Units System Diagnostics
Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is normally imperative that the cause of trip be determined quickly, the faulty conditions rectied, and the breaker put back into service. Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910, and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate a complete package of systems diagnostics to meet this challenge. Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded in the front of the trip unit case, indicating that the cause-of-trip was either a long delay, short delay, instantaneous or ground fault. Remote signal indication for cause of trip as well as magnitude of trip information is also available. Breakers using the RMS 310+ electronic trip unit have the ability to output cause-of-trip information through the test port. The Causeof-Trip LED module provides trip information via LED indication. The Digiview and Panelmount Digiview can be installed to provide both cause-of-trip information and phase current through an LCD display.
September 2011
Sheet 27 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Current Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units are capable of monitoring currents in individual phases (A, B, C) as well as ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units are capable of monitoring currents in individual phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral and ground currents. Values are displayed in the digital display window in kA. Accuracy of the current monitored values is 2% of full scale sensor rating. Breakers using the Digitrip 310+ electronic trip unit have the ability to output phase current monitoring information through the test port. The Digiview or Panelmount Digiview can be installed to provide phase current through an LCD display. For current and voltage monitoring with 0.5% accuracy of reading that can be used with thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units, refer to the Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3) on Page 27.4-41.
The accuracy of power monitored values is 4% of full scale sensor/ frame rating. The accuracy of energy monitored values is 5% of full scale sensor/ frame rating. Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050 report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910 trip units have the additional capability of monitoring line-to-line voltage. For Real Power and Reactive Power monitoring with ANSI C12.1 revenue class accuracy that can be used with thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units, refer to the Power Monitoring/ Metering Module (PM3) on Page 27.4-41.
Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units are capable of monitoring values of current harmonics. Percentage of total harmonic content can be monitored for each level of harmonic content up to the 27th harmonic. Additionally, a total harmonic distortion (THD) value can be calculated and displayed providing the user with total system current harmonic monitoring capability.
Power and Energy Monitoring

For the trip unit to calculate true power and energy values, a Potential Transformer Module (PTM) is required. This PTM is mounted internally (R-Frame and larger) or externally (N-Frame or smaller) to the breaker, and provides voltage to the trip unit. Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units are capable of monitoring peak power demand, present power demand, and reverse power ow in MW. Additionally, both forward and reverse energy consumption in MWh can be monitored. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units can also monitor the same power and energy parameters, but the units are displayed in kW and kWh.
Systems Monitoring
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units offer a complete menu of monitoring capability to include current, power and energy, power factor, power quality harmonics, and other related parameters with a high level of accuracy.
Digital Display
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have a large, easy-to-read four-digit alphanumeric display mounted on the trip unit. The display is supported by LEDs that indicate which parameter is being displayed along with the unit the value is displayed in, e.g., kA and so on.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 009

27.1-5
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Short Delay (S)

3. Short Delay Pickup Determines or sets the level of fault current at which the short-time trip delay countdown is actuated.
Curve Shaping
Eaton Digitrip RMS 310 trip units are available with up to ve phase and ground adjustments on the front of the trip unit. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units are available with up to six phase and ground adjustments on the front of the trip unit. Selective system coordination with both upstream and downstream devices can be achieved to provide an economic solution for less sophisticated distribution systems. For more sophisticated selective coordination systems Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units are available with up to nine curve shaping choices via switches on the front of the unit. Curve shaping exibility is provided by dependent long and short delay adjustments that are based on continuous amperes (Ir) selection. Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units offer programmable curve shaping via 10 curve shaping choices that are programmed electronically into the trip unit. OPTIM also offers virtual innite settings to allow the user to optimize coordination for a selectively coordinated distribution system. In addition, time-current set points can be downloaded via a communication system from a central personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is normally applied to systems where system integrity is very important.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2B 2 2A 3 Time 4B 4 6 4A
4. Short Delay Sets the amount of time the breaker will carry both a low level and high fault currents before tripping. a. Flat Response I2t out: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic trip devices. b. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with fuses and thermal-magnetic breakers.
5
Instantaneous (I)
5. Instantaneous Pickup Determines the level of fault current that will actuate a trip with no time delay.
7B 7 7A Current in Multiples
Ground Fault (G)

6. Ground Fault Pickup Determines the level of fault current at which the ground fault trip delay countdown is actuated. 7. Ground Fault Delay Determines the amount of time the breaker will carry a ground fault before tripping. a. Flat Response I2t out: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic ground fault settings. b. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with zero sequence ground fault relays, fuses and thermalmagnetic breakers.
Figure 27.1-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping

Note: See selection guide charts for availability of adjustments.
Long Delay (L)

1. Long Delay Pickup Determines the continuous ampere rating of the breaker. 2. Long Delay Time Determines the amount of time the breaker will carry a low level overload before tripping. a. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic trip devices and for coordination with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers. b. I4t Response I4t in: For coordination with fuses and upstream transformer damage curves.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 27 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Zone selective interlocking capabilities are available with Digitrip RMS 310+ 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units as well as Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units.
Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550.
Ground Fault Setting: 1200A Pickup 0.5 Seconds Time Delay Breaker Number 1 Fault 1 Ground Fault Setting: 600A Pickup 0.3 Seconds Time Delay
Zone selective interlocking provides increased system protection and can reduce arc ash risk by allowing the breaker closest to the fault to trip without any preset time delays. This is achieved by setting up the distribution system as shown in Figure 27.1-2. The hardwired connection between the trip units sends a restraining signal upstream, allowing the breaker closest to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone selective interlocking reduces stress on the distribution system and can reduce arc ash risk by isolating faults without time delays.
Zone 1
Zone 2
Breaker Number 2 Fault 2 Zone Selective Interlocking Wiring
Zone 3 Ground Fault Setting: 300A Pickup No Time Delay Breaker Number 3 Fault 3
Load
Figure 27.1-2. Zone Selective Interlocking
Fault 1
There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously.
Fault 3
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to Zone 1. Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker in Zone 3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.
Fault 2
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit. The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 011

Accessories and Modications
27.1-7
Internal Accessories
Note: For a complete listing of available external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch

The alarm (signal)/lockout switch monitors circuit breaker trip status and provides remote signaling and interlocking capabilities when the circuit breaker trips. For two-, three- and four-pole circuit breakers, the alarm (signal)/lockout switch consists of one or two SPDT switches assembled to a plug-in module mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. The SPDT switch contacts are identied as make and break contacts. When the circuit breaker trips, the make contact closes and the break contact opens.
Make Break
Shunt Trip
The shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain AC rated shunt trips are suitable for operation at 55% of rated voltage.
Available in most AC and DC voltages.
Note: Approximate unlatching time 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time 18 milliseconds. Endurance4000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
All internal accessories are of the plug-in type and are listed for eld installation under UL File E64983. Internal accessories for sealed circuit breakers are listed under UL File E7819 for factory installation only. The available plug-in accessories include the following:

Alarm (signal)/lockout switch Auxiliary switch Shunt trip Low energy shunt trip Undervoltage release mechanism
ST
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
31 32
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
The auxiliary switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position of the molded crossbar containing the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for remote signaling and interlocking purposes, and consists of one or two SPDT switches assembled to a plug-in module mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Each SPDT switch has one a and one b contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the a contact is open and the b contact is closed.
a b
OPTIM Communications Kit

Eatons OPTIM Communications Kit provides the option to eld install PowerNet communications into a K-, Lor N-Frame OPTIM 550 breaker. OPTIM 1050 trip units come equipped with communications as standard.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed in K-Frame Circuit Breaker
Different accessory wiring options are available to satisfy most circuit breaker mounting applications. The standard wiring conguration is pigtail leads exiting the rear of the base directly behind the accessory. Optional congurations include a terminal block mounted on the same side of the base as the accessory, leads exiting the side of the base where the accessory is mounted, and leads exiting the rear of the base on the side opposite the accessory. If accessory leads longer than 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) are required, side-mounted terminal blocks should be used.
OPTIM Communications Kit
40 41 42
Auxiliary Switch
43
CA08104001E

Accessories and Modications Low Energy Shunt Trip
Low energy shunt trip devices are designed to operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant ux opposes the permanent magnet ux eld, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. With no voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted.
September 2011
Sheet 27 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included)

The key interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specic customer installation. The key interlock assembly consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position; key interlock mounting hardware; and a wire seal. Specic mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. (Field installation only.)
UV
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
External Accessories
Note: For a complete listing of available external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block

The nonlockable handle block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. (Field installation only.)
ST LE
Key Interlock Kit
Padlockable Handle Block

The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one 5/16-inch (8.0 mm) padlock.
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release Mechanism

The undervoltage release mechanism monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 35% of the solenoid coil rating.
Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

The padlockable handle lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles. One per circuit breaker. (Field installation only.)
The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever assembled to a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (OFF) position.
Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 013
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Special Function Circuit Breakers

Molded-Case Switches
27.2-1
Molded-Case Switches
Eaton molded-case switches (MCS) are UL 489 devices that dont have thermal protection, but do have a selfprotecting high-magnetic trip setting. Molded-case switches are applied when a compact high-capacity disconnect device is necessary. Accessories that can be installed in molded-case circuit breakers are also available for molded-case switches. The most common application for a molded-case switch would be as a main disconnect for a panelboard or a loadcenter. Available from 100 to 2500A, molded-case switches provide a compact high-capacity disconnect device along with the added benets of a molded-case circuit breaker without the thermal protection. It provides no overcurrent protection, overload or low level fault. The MCS is equipped with a high instantaneous magnetic xed trip unit. The xed magnetic trip is factory preset to interrupt high fault currents at or above its preset level. MCS is self protecting within its withstand rating. See Table 27.2-1.
The motor circuit protector design permits the most effective protection possible against low-level faults while offering circuit breaker convenience, quick-make quick-break action, deadfront safety and prevention of single phasing. The GMCP and HMCPE are 480V devices rated between 3100A. The HMCP is a 600V device available in ve frames and rated between 31200A. The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1.
An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1. The interrupting rating is dened on the assembled equipment nameplate.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Table 27.2-1. Molded-Case Switch Short-Circuit Current Ratings at 60 Hz Only (Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied in kAIC)
MCS Frame GD EHD FD HFD JD HJD DK KD HKD LD HLD MDL HMDL ND HND RD EGK JGK LGK LGK NGK RGK Ampere Rating 100 100 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 600 600 800 800 1200 1200 2000 125 250 400 600 1200 2000 Short-Circuit Current Rating 240V 65 18 65 100 65 100 65 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 125 100 100 100 100 100 125 480V 22 14 35 65 35 65 35 65 35 65 50 65 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 600V 18 25 18 25 25 35 25 35 25 35 25 35 50 35 35 35 35 50 250 Vdc 10 10 10 22 10 22 10 10 22 22 25 22 25 42 42 42 42
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Circuit Protectors

Application exibility of Eaton motor circuit protectors (Type GMCP/HMCP/ HMCPE) is enhanced by the higher interrupting ratings and current limiting characteristics designed into the line. These devices are available from 31200A in 63, 100, 150, 250, 400, 600, 800 and 1200A frame sizes.
The motor circuit protectors are designed for application in individual motor circuits in combination motor starter units. Motor circuit protectors operate on the magnetic principle with a current sensing element in each pole to provide short-circuit protection.
CA08104001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
27.2-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Special Function Circuit Breakers
Selection DataMotor Circuit Protectors
September 2011
Sheet 27 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A) circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings will be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as dened in the application section of the NEC. These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings. Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eaton type breakers, specic units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maximum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations. In general, these selections were based on: 1. AmbientOutside enclosure not more than 40C (104F). 2. Motor startingInfrequent starting, stopping or reversing. 3. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times motor FLA. 4. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times motor FLA. Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not be set more than 1300% of the motor full-load current to comply with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA Design B energy efcient motors, which can be set up to 1700%). Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specic system application requirements. For motor full load currents of 208V and 200V, increase the corresponding 230V motor values by 10 and 15% respectively.
230V, Three-Phase
1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 10 10 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 700 1000 6 6 6 10 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 125 150 175 225 300 350 450 3 6 6 10 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 110 150 175 225 300 350
460V, Three-Phase
575V, Three-Phase
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 015

Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
27.2-3
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Eaton offers one of the most complete lines of both fusible and non-fused current limiting breakers, and add-on current limiting modules in the industry. The industrial breakers are available in current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 480V without fuses in the same physical size as standard and high interrupting capacity breakers. Eaton also manufactures both fused and non-fused current limiting devices with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. See Section 27.4 for complete selection data for current limiting circuit breakers and add-on current limiting modules. The current limiting breakers use a reverse loop stationary contact. When current is owing through the contacts of these breakers, the positions of the reverse loop and moving contact arm induce opposing magnetic elds. The resulting ux lines cause rapid contact blow-apart under these conditions, resulting in very high interrupting capacities and provide current limiting characteristics. Current limiting breakers are available from 152500A and have an interrupting rating up to 200 kA at 480V. These breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and in series rating applications where the current limiting capability of these breakers are used upstream in series combinations. Circuit breakers 600A and below that are current limiting have frame catalog numbers that end with the letter C. For example, the F-Frame model that is current limiting has a catalog number FDC. In accordance with UL circuit breaker marking requirements, the nameplate on the breaker is also labeled current limiting.
Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused
The high level current-limiting action is achieved by the use of special design, blow-apart contacts. The opening speed of the contacts is amplied by the repulsion force in the slot motor to effectively separate the contacts under high level fault conditions in less than one millisecond. The rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system, thus limiting the amount of the otherwise available fault current. Current Limit-R current limiting circuit breakers incorporate all the advantages and features of conventional moldedcase circuit breakers. They are available in two- and three-pole versions in two physical frame sizes and three continuous current frame ratings. Type FCL has a maximum continuous current frame rating of 100A. It is equipped with a conventional, noninterchangeable, thermal-magnetictype trip unit with individual ampere ratings. The Type LCL is available with frames having maximum continuous current ratings of either 250 or 400A. Overload and low level short-circuit protection is provided by a SELTRONIC electronic trip unit that uses the individual rating plug concept for determining the continuous rating of the breaker. Rating plugs are available with either xed or adjustable ampere ratings.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
FCL Current Limit-R Breaker
The Current molded-case circuit breaker was developed with interrupting ratings up to 200,000A at 480 Vac to provide complete system protection against faults, including: 1. Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics. 2. Low-level short-circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics. 3. High-level short-circuits, by using ultra high-speed, blow-apart, current limiting contacts. Current Limit-R circuit breakers can be used in series with Eaton standard molded-case circuit breakers with listed interrupting ratings as low as 10,000A in systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200,000A. The excellent current limiting properties of Current Limit-R breakers completely protect all Eaton downstream series circuit breakers applied within their voltage ratings.
Limit-R
CA08104001E
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers TRI-PAC Fused Current Limiting Breakers
TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings from 151600A and have a UL listed interrupting capacity of 200,000A at up to 600 Vac and also have an interrupting capacity of 100,000A at up to 250 Vdc. The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the advantages of the economical moldedcase breaker and the current limiter is retained, while the disadvantages of separately mounted devices are eliminated.
September 2011
Sheet 27 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
The combination of the current limiting breaker or HMCP and the current limiter module provides the following system protection: Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts. The high-level current limiting action is achieved by the use of special design, blowapart contacts. The opening speed of the contacts is amplifed by the repulsion force in the slot motor and reverse loop stationary contact arm to effectively separate the contacts under high-level fault conditions in less than 1 millisecond. The rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system, thus limiting the amount of the otherwise available fault current
Add-on Current Limiting Modules

LA TRI-PAC Breaker
The increase in demand for electrical power in modern commercial and industrial buildings has resulted in electrical services becoming substantially larger. In some low voltage distribution systems, available shortcircuit currents can exceed 100,000 symmetrical rms amperes. Fault currents of this intensity may exceed the interrupting ratings of molded-case breakers. As a result, larger expensive circuit interrupting devices that could withstand the thermal and magnetic stresses associated with currents of this value have had to be used. High interrupting capacity current limiting devices have been developed that will restrict short-circuit current. If applied correctly, they may be used in conjunction with molded-case circuit breakers to provide adequate and economical protection. The TRI-PAC breaker was developed for this application and so named because it affords TRIple-PACkage protection with (1) time delay thermal trip, (2) instantaneous magnetic trip and (3) current limiting protection, combined and coordinated in a compact and economical device. These protective actions are so coordinated that overcurrents and low magnitude faults are cleared by the thermal action; normal short circuits are cleared by the magnetic action; and abnormal short circuits, above an established value, are cleared by the current limiting device. Thus, unless a severe short-circuit occurs, the current limiter is unaffected and its replacement is held to a minimum.
Current Limiting Add-On Modules
The current limiting breaker modules use a reverse loop stationary contact arm. When high short-circuit current is owing through the contacts of these modules, the positions of the reverse loop and moving contact arm induce opposing magnetic elds. The resulting ux lines cause rapid contact blow-apart under fault conditions, resulting in very high interrupting capacities and providing current limiting characteristics. Current limiting breaker modules in combination with select Series C and Series G breakers, are available with interrupting ratings up to 200 kA at 600 Vac.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 017

Application Information100% Rated Circuit Breakers
27.2-5
100% Rated Circuit Breakers

100% rated circuit breakers are tested inside a minimum size enclosure to UL 489 for application at 100% of the breakers continuous current rating. 100% rated circuit breakers are equipped with electronic trip units and applied with 90C cable rated at 75C ampacity. To apply 100% rated breakers in switchboards and panelboards, additional tests are required to meet UL 67 and UL 891. Eaton molded-case circuit breaker frames K-, L-, N-, MDL and R-, 702000A, can be applied at 100% of their rated continuous current as long as the breaker is installed in its minimum size enclosure, including ventilation. 100% rated breakers are applied to distribution system to provide installation cost savings. The amount of savings that can be realized is dependent on the application.
which design (and devices) is the best choice for a given system. Good engineering practice requires a careful system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with the main device. Also included in the system analysis must be all present and future factors that could affect the size and/or quantity of the breakers and associated hardware, such as switchboard bus, busway, cable and conduit. Other factors to consider are loads (continuous and noncontinuous) and system expansions and transformers with provisions for forced air cooling.
Section 210.20(A) covers standard breakers, and the exception 100% rated breakers. NEC Section 210.20(A) and the Section 210.20(A) exception can be expressed by these formulas: Standard 80% Rated Design Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Special 100% Rated Design Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load The necessity for these NEC requirements results from circuit breaker testing procedures. A molded-case circuit breaker is tested in open air to verify its nameplate ampere rating. The nameplate species a value of current the circuit breaker is rated to carry continuously without tripping within specic operating temperature guidelines. In most instances, a breaker is applied in an enclosure and performance could be adversely affected by slow heat dissipation and temperature rise. These factors must be considered regarding the ability of the breaker to comply with its nameplate ampere rating.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
The NEC
The rules and intent of the National Electrical Code governing the use of standard or 100% rated breakers must be understood before recommending or applying such devices. Section 210.20(A) Continuous and Noncontinuous Loads of the National Electrical Code addresses differences between applications of standard rated breakers and 100% rated breakers. (Signicant sections are in bold face type.) Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. The minimum circuit conductor size without the application of any ampacity adjustment or correction factors shall have an allowable ampacity equal to or greater than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. Exception: Where the assembly including the overcurrent devices protecting the feeder(s) are listed for operation at 100% of their rating, neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be less than the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load.
Note: A continuous load as dened by NEC Article 100 is a load where the maximum current is expected to continue for 3 hours or more.
Breaker Nameplate Example
100% Application enclosure and wire ampacity requirements.
Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions

There are distinct differences between these conditions that are addressed in NEC Section 210.20(A) by introducing an overcurrent device and associated hardware sizing factor. The sizing factor ensures reliable equipment performance under realistic conditions. Section 210.20(A) is the key to making the best system design choice. For feeders, Section 215.2(A) addresses the rating of all overcurrent devices that have been tested in open air but are applied in an enclosure. The thermal response of an overcurrent device applied in an enclosure will usually be faster than in open air, thus dictating the 125% requirement. The exception allows for properly tested and listed overcurrent devices to be applied at 100% of their nameplate rating.
Figure 27.2-1. Breaker Nameplate

A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing based on tests conducted in a minimum size enclosure with minimum ventilation (if required) and minimum cable sizes, as stated on this nameplate example.
The amount of protection designed into a distribution system is often based on economics. However, each project should be furnished with a reliable distribution system that delivers the most effective protection possible for each investment dollar. Reliable and economic system design can be usually achieved with Eatons circuit breakers that are UL listed for application at 100% of their ratings instead of standard breakers that in actual use are applied at 80% of their frame ratings in an enclosure. The concept between a system design using standard breakers and that using 100% rated breakers is uncomplicatedbut there are no shortcut methods for determining
Figure 27.2-2. NEC Reference

CA08104001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
Application Information100% Rated Circuit Breakers There is a Difference Between 100% Rated Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies
Special attention should be given to the word assembly in the NEC Exception. Normally, an assembly is listed for 100% operation only after being successfully tested as an assembly per UL requirements. For an assembly to receive a 100% rated UL listing, it must be tested separately by UL project engineers. Panelboards are tested to UL 67, switchboards tested to UL 891. Installing 100% rated breakers in an assembly does not automatically make it acceptable for a 100% rating.
90C Wire
September 2011
Sheet 27 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
90C Wire
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90C wire is applied at the 75C ampacity.
Figure 27.2-3. Conductor Requirements Table 27.2-3. The ApplicationThese Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100% Rated Approach is Used
A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings. Load Continuous Noncontinuous

Feeder #1 400A 200A
Feeder #2 800A 0
Feeder #3 0 1000
Main 1200A 1200A
Description Three-phase distribution System line diagrams
Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with the systems main device. For these system examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100% rated design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily selected. The load table includes the calculations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 210.20(A).
Table 27.2-4. Standard 80% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Description Calculation per NEC of minimum total load Breaker frame (F) trip (T) rating Bus/cable rating Feeder No. 1 200 + (1.25) (400) =700A Feeder No. 2 0 + (1.25) (800) =1000A Feeder No. 3 600 + 0 = 600A Main 2250A
2500A F 2500A T 2500A Bus
Line Diagram
(F) (T) 800A /700A
(F) (T) 1200A /1000A
(F) (T) 600A/600A
(F) (T) 2500A /2500A
Feeder Feeder Feeder #1 #2 #3 1200A F 600A F 800A F 1000A T 600A T 700A T 2500 kcmil, Cu per phase 2350 kcmil, Cu per phase Pnlbd. 600A Bus
800A
1000A
600A
2500A
MCC 800A Bus 3400 kcmil, Cu per phase
1000A Busway
40 41 42 43
(Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A). Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 019

Application Information100% Rated Circuit Breakers
27.2-7
Table 27.2-5. Standard 100% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Description Calculation per NEC of minimum total load Breaker frame (F) trip (T) rating Bus/cable rating Feeder No. 1 200 + 400 = 600A Feeder No. 2 0 + 800 = 800A Feeder No. 3 600 + 0 = 600A Main 2000A
2000A F 2000A T 2000A Bus
Line Diagram
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Potential System Savings
(F) (T) 600A/600A
(F) (T) 800A/800A
(F) (T) 600A/600A
(F) (T) 2000A/2000A
600A F 600A T
Feeder Feeder Feeder #1 #2 #3 800A F 600A F 800A T 600A T 2350 kcmil, Cu per phase 2350 kcmil, Cu per phase Pnlbd. 600A Bus
600A
800A
600A
2000A
MCC 600A Bus 2600 kcmil, Cu per phase
800A Busway
(Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A) Exception. Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads.
Table 27.2-6. The ResultSavings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs

Design Standard 100% rated Results Minimum Total Load (Amperes) 700 600 The standard design requires higher rated, more expensive breaker and bus. Although the minimum total load is 700A, most breakers and hardware are available only in standard sizes requiring even more expensive nearest standard size breakers and hardware. 1000 800 Dramatic economic advantages are achieved by using the 100% rated design. Substantial savings result from using an 800A busway and signicant savings are also provided by the smaller breaker frame and cable size. 600 2250
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
100% rated breaker systems can potentially represent signicant economic Calculations indicate The 100% approach results advantages: either approach in the same frame size In lower rated and sized results in the same breaker with a savings in breakers, less cable and size breaker and hard- conductor material cost. signicant reductions in ware. A 100% rated Additionally, Eaton offers a equipment oor and wall breaker would be 2000A frame 100%-rated space. These savings can be more expensive breaker, which is less realized when the results of although the nal expensive than the 2500A a systems analysis favor the decision could rest frame 80%-rated. 100% rated design approach. on whether or not future load growth is anticipated. 600 2000
Table 27.2-7. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

Frames JG-Frame 50/100/250A Minimum enclosure size 26.00 x 18.00 x 8.00 in (660.4 x 457.2 x 203.2 mm) K-Frame 125/250/400A Minimum enclosure size 24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm) LG-Frame 250/400/600A Minimum enclosure size with ventilation 28.00 x 19.00 x 8.00 in (711.2 x 482.6 x 203.2 mm) L-Frame 125/250/400/600A Minimum enclosure size with ventilation 24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm) M-Frame 800A Minimum enclosure size with ventilation 42.00 x 18.00 x 7.50 in (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm) N-Frame 800/1200A Minimum enclosure size with ventilation 42.00 x 22.75 x 11.50 in (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm) R-Frame 1600/2000A Minimum enclosure size with ventilation 21.50 x 18.00 x 13.00 in (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm)

Rating at 480V JGE-C 25 kA JGS-C 35 kA JGH-C 65 kA JGC-C 100 kA CKD 35 kA CHKD 65 kA LGE-C 35 kA LGS-C 50 kA LGH-C 65 kA CLD 35 kA CHLD 65 kA CLDC 100 kA CMDL 50 kA CHMDL 65 kA CND 50 kA CHND 65 kA CNDC 100 kA CRD 65 kA CRDC 100 kA
Trip Units Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
Digitrip 310
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
Digitrip 310
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
Digitrip 310/510/610/810/910, Digitrip OPTIM
Thermal-magnetic LG requires venting 7.00 square inches above and 7.00 square inches below on the front face of enclosure. Use with 9.00-inch (228.6 mm) tee connector.
CA08104001E
Application InformationSeries Rated Systems
September 2011
Sheet 27 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series Rated Systems

Series rating is a short-circuit interrupting rating assigned to a combination of two or more overcurrent devices connected in series. The short-circuit interrupting rating of the upstream device must be equal to or greater than the available fault current. Downstream breakers, however, are not fully rated for the systems available fault current. Series combinations must be tested to UL 489. Series ratings are applied to distribution systems where shortcircuit coordination is not required. The Eaton listing of available series rating combinations are shown in the applications section of this document. Under most circumstances, selection of a series rated system will reduce initial cost and size, because downstream breakers are not fully rated for the prospective short-circuit fault current at their point of application. The interrupting rating of the upstream breaker must always be equal to or greater than the available fault current at its line terminals. In addition, downstream breakers must have been tested in combination with the upstream breaker and shown to be protected by the upstream breaker at the assigned series rated interrupting rating. The net result is that the system can be assigned a series rated or integrated rating higher than the rating of the downstream breaker when it is tested or applied alone. Design of the system and selection of breakers is based on short-circuit interruption test specied and witnessed by UL. Because of their blow-open design, most molded-case circuit breakers are current limiting to some degree. In a series rated application and in the event of a major fault, both upstream and downstream breakers open, protecting the lower-rated downstream devices by limiting the let-through current. To develop a series rated protective system, it is suggested that the design engineer, after completing preliminary steps: Dene available fault current at the line side terminals of the upstream breaker Select an upstream breaker with an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available fault current Verify the series tested interrupting ratings of the selected combination of breakers by referring to the tables in this section
Conrm, during installation, that the correct breakers have been selected by checking the nameplates appearing on the end-use equipment
Examination, Identication, Installation and Use of Equipment

1. Examination: in judging equipment, considerations such as the following should be evaluated. a. Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of this Code. Suitability of equipment use may be identied by a description marked on or provided with a product to identify the suitability of the product for a specic purpose, environment or application. Suitability of equipment may be evidenced by listing or labeling. b. Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus provided. c. Wire-ending and connection space. d. Electrical insulation. e. Heating effects under normal conditions of use and also under abnormal conditions likely to arise in service. f. Arcing effects. g. Classication by type, size, voltage, current capacity and specic use. h. Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguarding of persons using or likely to come in contact with the equipment. 2. Installation and use: listed or labeled equipment must be used or installed in accordance with any instructions included in the listing or labeling.
Evaluating the Protection Systems

Designed properly, series rated and fully rated systems protect electrical equipment with equal effectiveness. But initial cost and continuity of service can vary widely depending on the inherent characteristics of the system, and on the design philosophy adopted.
Fully Rated System

All breakers are rated for full fault current at their point of application in accordance with the National Electrical Code. The continuity of service provided by the system is greater than a series rated system.
Series Rated System

A series rated system is less costly than a fully rated system. The upstream breaker is always fully rated, but the interrupting ratings of downstream breakers are normally lower. Service continuity can be acceptable after initial startup, because the lowerlevel arcing faults most likely occur after that time can be cleared by the downstream breaker alone. However, under high fault conditions, both the upstream and downstream breakers would open, eliminating service to the affected portion of the system. Therefore, it is not possible to achieve selective coordination for all magnitudes of available fault current with a series rated system.
National Electrical Code Requirements

Requirements of the National Electrical Code for short-circuit ratings may now be met by equipment that is marked with ratings adequate for the available fault current at their point of application in the electrical system. Refer to the current NEC for specic requirements.
Interrupting Rating
Equipment intended to break current at fault levels must have an interrupting rating sufcient for the system voltage and the current that is available at the terminals of the equipment. Equipment intended to break current at other than fault levels must have an interrupting rating at system voltage sufcient for the current that must be interrupted.
General Discussion
Available Short-Circuit Current. Service equipment must be suitable for the short-circuit current available at its supply terminal.
Approval. The conductors and equipment required or permitted by the Code will be acceptable only if approved. See Examination of Equipment for Safety and Examination, Identication, Installation and Use of Equipment. See denitions of Approved, Identied, Labeled and Listed.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 021

Application InformationSeries Rated System
27.2-9
Circuit Impedance and Other Characteristics

The overcurrent protective devices, the total impedance, the component short-circuit withstanding ratings, and other characteristics of the circuit to be protected should be so selected and coordinated as to permit the circuit protective devices used to clear a fault without the occurrence of extensive damage to the electrical components of the circuit. This fault will be assumed to be either two or more of the circuit conductors, or between any circuit conductor and the grounding conductor or enclosing metal raceway.
The entire system is tested because such tests are the only way to correctly verify the performance of overcurrent devices under short-circuit conditions. Calibration, interruption, trip-out and dielectric withstand tests are performed. Breakers in their asreceived condition are used for the interrupting and intermediate interrupting capability tests. If agreeable to concerned parties, previously tested samples may be used. The interrupting rating of the line-side circuit breaker is equal to or greater than the maximum available fault current on the distribution system at its point of intended application. Tests comply also with the intent of the proposed revisions to applicable IEC documents. Tests are completed in a well-dened sequence: Interrupting tests Intermediate interrupting tests Trip-out tests Dielectric voltage-withstand tests
Exception: the breakers may be mounted in the end-use equipment that will contain them and is marked for use with the series combination. The load-side breaker is positioned as close as possible to the line-side breaker(s). Line and load leads are less than 4 feet (1.2m). A fuse is connected between the enclosure and line terminal of the pole least likely to arc to the enclosure, or the neutral, if the breaker is rated 120/240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connection to the load-side of the limiting impedance is #10 AWG copper wire less than 6 feet (1.8m) long. The fuse is a 30A non-renewable type acceptable for branch circuit protection; its voltage rating is not less than the rating of the device, and its interrupting rating is not less than the available current. 1. Interrupting tests: a. The test circuit is closed on the series combination with all breakers fully closed; and b. The load-side breaker is closed on the circuit while the line-side breaker is fully closed.
Note: Random closing is used in all threephase tests. When the circuit is closed on the combination, closing is controlled in single-phase tests so that closing occurs within 10 electrical degrees of the zero-point of the supply voltage wave.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Contribution
The fault current contribution of motors connected between series rated breakers must be considered. Article 240.86(C) in the 2005 edition of the National Electrical Code states that for series ratings the sum of the motor, full-load currents cannot exceed 1% of the interrupting rating of the lowerrated circuit breaker. The actual fault current contribution from induction motors is about four times their fullload current (impedance value of 25%). For example, if the downstream branch circuit breakers used in a series rated combination have an interrupting rating of 14,000A rms symmetrical for a 480V system, the maximum full-load current of motors connected to that panel from the branch circuit breakers is 140A (1%). For typical induction motors, this is equivalent to a total horsepower at 480V of approximately 115 horsepower.
Eatons Series C circuit breakers intended for application in series rated systems are subjected, in the following sequence, to interrupting ability, intermediate interrupting ability, trip-out, and dielectric voltage-withstand tests. During testing of the series rated circuit breakers, each breaker is mounted in the smallest enclosure in which it is to be used; openings in the enclosure do not exceed 10% of its total external area, and there are no openings directly opposite a vent in a circuit breaker case. The two enclosures are connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm) conduit of any diameter. Each lead from test terminals to the line-side breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per breaker, and each load shorting the load-side breaker(s) is sized based on the rating of the load-side breaker. The combined length of the lead from the line-side overcurrent protective device of the load-side breaker and from the load-side breaker to the shorting point, is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per pole.
Design/Test Considerations for Series Coordinated Circuit Breakers

Test procedures for all Eaton moldedcase circuit breakers intended for application in series connected systems are in full compliance with all applicable paragraphs of the latest edition of UL 489.
Note: For further information, see IEEE Standards 141, 242 and 446.
2. Intermediate interrupting tests at the specied available current and maximum voltage. Procedures are identical to those described in 1a and 1b (above) but at the maximum current level that causes the load-side breaker to open, but not the line-side breaker. If the line-side breaker is currentlimiting, the series combination should be evaluated in the region below its current-limiting threshold. (There is no need for these tests if the current is less than the interrupting rating on the load-side breaker.) 3. Trip-out tests of the load-side breaker at 250% of the marked ampere rating. 4. Dielectric voltage-withstand tests verify that the breaker can withstand, without breakdown, a 60 (4862) Hz essentially sinusoidal potential for 1 minute.
CA08104001E
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings
September 2011
Sheet 27 022
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series Connected Ratings: Eaton Circuit Breakers

A wide range of breakers and combinations in the Eaton line is available that has been tested in accordance with UL procedures for series connected ratings: individually enclosed breakers in series with main lug panelboards, main breakers integral with branch breakers in panelboards, in switchboards, and in meter centers. You can rely on the enclosed data for applications with other undened distribution equipment where series application ratings can be an advantage. Circuit breaker/circuit breaker series rated combinations are listed by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under Circuit BreakersSeries Connected. The series combinations shown in the UL Yellow Book are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. Specic series ratings tested combinations in assemblies can be found in Tab 22 for panelboards/switchboards. Both circuit-breaker-to-circuit-breaker and fuse-to-circuit-breaker upstream/ downstream series rating tables are provided. The assemblies series ratings tables are also on the Eaton Web site (www.eaton.com). Search for document 1C96944H02 Panelboard and Switchboards Series Ratings Information Manual.
and products are improved continuously and qualied to meet UL, NEMA and other standards. In addition, engineers from any breaker or panelboard manufacturer can work along-side their peers from Eaton to test their products in the lab. The consolidated nameplate on all breakers provides complete identication and rating information in a format that is easy to read and understand. The interrupting rating of the series combination is never permitted to be marked on the downstream breaker. However, the series rating may be marked on panelboards in which the combination has been tested and listed if: The upstream breaker is installed in the panelboard as a main breaker The panelboard is a main-lug-only type and is specically marked to indicate the type and rating of the upstream listed series tested breaker that must be applied with the panelboard
Example: Assume a specic type of current-limiting fuse rated 2000A. Then using the following gure: 1. Draw a vertical line from the prospective short-circuit current of 200 kA to intersect the typical peak let-through curve at A. 2. Draw a horizontal line left from Point A to intersect the prospective peak curve at B. 3. Drop a vertical line from B to intersect the horizontal axis and read the recommended rating, 65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit breaker with a 65 kA interrupting capacity will be protected by a specied 2000A currentlimiting fuse. This conclusion is wrong when the downstream service has a blow-open contact assembly, as does a moldedcase circuit breaker or similar device. It may be valid when the currentlimiting fuse is sized to protect a passive bus bar system. The reason: The up-over-down method ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent current-limiting of the downstream molded-case circuit breaker). Such impedance is developed directly by the forces of the let-through current created when the contacts are blown open. For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to recommendations by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker, which are based on actual test data.
Up-over-down method. Asymmetrical Prospective Peak Curve at 15% Power Factor B A 2000A Current Limiter Fuse Curve
Marking of Panelboards
Marking of panelboards conforms to the latest edition of UL 67. Markings are clear and understandable, and include the short-circuit rating in rms amperes; maximum voltage rating for each short-circuit rating; a statement indicating that additional or replacement devices shall be of the same type and of equal or greater interrupting capacity; and, when applicable, the identity of combinations of integral and branch circuit overcurrent devices that are required when applying the marked short-circuit current rating.
Circuit Breaker Identication

Marking of all Eatons circuit breakers is clear for easy identication of type, rating and operating status. Nameplates are color-coded for immediate identication of rating, and a colorcoded bar identies the type and interrupting rating at common application voltages. Operating status is indicated clearly by the position of the handle and color-coded ags. On and off positions are identied by English words and international symbols. Scientists and engineers at the Eaton Testing Laboratory ensure that Eaton circuit breakers are the most reliable and develop new concepts and improvements in breaker design. Designs and reliability are veried,
Fuses
Prospective Peak Let-Through Current in Amperes
460,000
Fuses can be used instead of circuit breakers in fully rated, selectively coordinated and series connected protection systems. Specic series ratings tested combinations in assemblies can be found in Tab 22 for panelboards. Dont apply fuses using the up-overdown method that has been recommended by some fuse manufacturers for sizing a current-limiting fuse that protects a downstream molded-case circuit breaker with a specied rms symmetrical interrupting rating. The method can lead to erroneous and unsafe conclusions, and should not be used.
150,000
65,000 200,000 Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes Do Not Use This Method
Figure 27.2-4. Up-Over-Down Misapplication
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 023

Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings
27.2-11
Series Ratings Selected Under Engineering Supervision

The 2005 NEC introduced a new provision allowing a licensed professional engineer to select a series combination of overcurrent devices for existing installations. This represents a major change from the previous requirements that series rated combinations must be proven by actual testing, and witnessed and listed by a third-party certication agency. A calculated evaluation of a series rated system is extremely difcult, if not impossible, to determine because of the dynamic impedance of the downstream breakers as described above. Compatibility of devices could only be determined if it is guaranteed that the downstream device(s) do not even begin to open during the complete interruption time of the upstream device. Another factor is that the letthrough current must not exceed the interrupting rating of the downstream device. These are just a couple of the many difcult factors that must be veried to ensure the safe application of an engineered series rated combination.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
High Selective Coordination Breaker
September 2011
Sheet 27 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
High Instantaneous Breakers for Selective Coordination
High Instantaneous Breaker
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Eaton introduces the LHH thermalmagnetic and NHH electronic trip molded-case circuit breakers capable of providing higher current levels of selective coordination. These circuit breakers are based on Eaton industryleading Series G L-Frame and Series C N-Frame high performance circuit breaker frames. The LHH and NHH circuit breakers are available with trip units having 125400A rating.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers incorporate a higher level of magnetic pickup and electronic instantaneous setting respectively, thus allowing for higher current levels of selective coordination. Standard molded-case circuit breakers typically are furnished with a magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10X) the trip rating. Eatons LHH and NHH molded-case circuit breakers are furnished with a higher level of magnetic pickup (up to 26x) or electronic instantaneous available maximum settings. These higher levels of magnetic pickup (up to 93x) and electronic instantaneous values in turn allow the system designer to obtain selective coordination at fault current levels up to these higher ratings. This allows the line side LHH or NHH circuit breakers to selectively coordinate up to the values for available fault current values determined at the load side circuit breaker. When the line side and load side moldedcase circuit breaker trip ratings are chosen to coordinate in the overload range, they also can be selectively coordinated in the fault range. For overcurrents protected by circuit breakers on the load side of the LHH or NHH, only the effected load side circuit breaker will open, while the line side LHH and/or NHH circuit breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other critical loads supplied by the LHH and NHH circuit breakers. See Page 27.3-15 for LHH and NHH breaker selection data.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
JG, LG MCCBs Shown with Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Eaton earth leakage breakers offer Class 1 ground fault protection and improved ground fault coordination capability. A Class 1 device can open at high levels of fault current, while a Class 2 device prevents opening beyond the contact rating of its interrupting device. Earth leakage breakers are factory supplied with a single sensor and ground fault relay built-in. The ground fault pick-up setting is adjustable from 0.03 to 30A in eight steps, and the ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds. See Page 27.4-42 for earth leakage circuit breaker selection data.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 025

AFCI Circuit Breakers
27.2-13
AFCI Circuit Breakers

An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a device intended to provide protection from the effects of arc faults by recognizing characteristics unique to arcing and by functioning to de-energize the circuit when an arc fault is detected. Eaton offers 120 Vac AFCI single-pole, 15 and 20A breakers, plug-in and bolt-on, to meet Article 210.12 of the 2008 NEC. There are currently two types of AFCI circuit breakers on the market today. The types are clearly dened by UL 1699. These are the branch feeder Type AFCI and the Combination Type AFCI. The dual-purpose AFCI is yet another feature available on the market that is achieved by simply adding 5 mA personnel ground fault protection to the existing AFCI. The AFCI circuit breaker is the most tested residential circuit breaker on the market. In the case of series arc detection, these arcs are detected when equipment is operating thus drawing current. Parallel arcs can occur and are detected even if the load is not operating. When thresholds of monitoring are exceeded, the electronics within this device work to identify safe arcs from hazardous arcs.
There are a few sections in the NEC that in some way reference the AFCI technology. NEC Section 210.12 is the heart of the requirement for the Arc Fault Technology. The introduction of the AFCI product to the National Electrical Code occurred in 1999. The verbiage of this code included a start date of enforcement effective January 1, 2002. The 2002 NEC made a slight change to remove the word receptacle to ensure that the AFCI was to be applied on all circuits supplying the bedroom and not just those circuits supplying receptacle outlets. The 2005 NEC introduced some changes that include the introduction of the combination type AFCI.
Latch Lever
The combination type AFCI is now set to begin its application as of January 1, 2008. Another change included the location of the combination AFCI that allows it to be within 6 feet of the loadcenter with qualications. The 2008 National Electrical Code expanded the application of AFCI outside of the bedroom circuits to include family rooms, closets, parlors, dens, hallways, sunrooms, living rooms and dining rooms. The 6-foot rule was also removed and further claried the requirements around using a receptacle combination type AFCI were expanded upon.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
AFCI Test Button AFCI Detection Circuit
29 30 31 32
Load Terminal
Load Neutral Terminal Pigtail Connection to Loadcenter
Line Connection Contacts Trip Mechanism
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 27.2-5. AFCI Circuit Breaker Table 27.2-8. NEC Specications

Article 210.4 210.12 440.65 550.25 Description Article 210Branch Circuits Multiwire Branch Circuits Article 210Branch Circuits Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Article 440Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment Leakage-Current Detector-Interrupter (LCDI) and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Article 550Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks Arc-Fault Interrupter Protection
CA08104001E
Application InformationDC Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 27 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DC Rated Breakers
Breakers are available for use with ungrounded applications where all three poles are connected in series, and grounded applications where the load is connected to the grounded terminal, and the series connected poles are on the non-grounded terminal. Rated for up to 750 Vdc, breakers are available from 15 to 2500A trip ranges with thermalmagnetic trip units. Their compact size and increased interrupting performance give Eaton the most complete range of DC breakers in the industry.
Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Table 27.2-9. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit Breaker Type HFDDC JGEDC JGSDC JGHDC HJDDC HKDDC LGEDC LGSDC LGHDC HLDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC PBDC

Frame
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA) Volts DC 125 250 50 35 42 50 50 50 22 22 42 50 50 50 50 65

600 42 35 50 65 42 42 35 50 65 35 35 50 65
750 42
225 250 250 250 250 400 600 600 600 600 1200 800 1200 2500
42 35 42 50 42 42 22 22 42 42 42 42 42 42
DC Circuit Breakers
UL listed Eaton DC molded-case circuit breakers are for use in general DC circuits, battery supply circuits of UPS systems, PV systems and Level 3 electric vehicle charging circuits. These devices are an excellent alternative to fuses because they are easier to install and require less maintenance. The various DC voltage ratings are obtained by connecting one, two, three or four poles in series as noted. Connection diagrams are shown on the breaker nameplate. The DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as the standard breakers for AC application. DC breakers up to 600 Vdc are UL 489 listed and exceed the requirements of UL Supplement SC for molded-case circuit breakers with uninterruptible power supplies. Molded-case circuit breakers for transportation application requiring 750 Vdc are available 15150A with 42 kA interrupting capacity at 750 Vdc. Breakers require four poles in series for high fault current protection in 750 Vdc application. For 750V applications with low fault current requirements, contact Eaton for three-pole frames and rating details. 750V is not a UL rating. Dimensions for DC breakers are the same as the standard thermalmagnetic equivalent. DC molded-case circuit breakers use standard thermal-magnetic trip units, which are calibrated on AC circuits. The use of standard trip units allows for easy interchangeability and inventory management when both AC and DC systems are used. The magnetic trip pickup on DC circuits are, on average, 42% higher than AC. Specic time current curves depicting the values or tolerance band increase for DC breakers are available. Refer to publication TC01215003E for curve information.
DC ratings apply to substantially noninductive circuits. Time constant per UL 489. Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc. Single-pole in series. Two poles in series.
Three poles in series. Four poles in series. Not a UL listed voltage rating. Four-pole frame with two-pole connection in parallel.
Table 27.2-10. DC Breaker DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Frame HFDDC Number of Poles 1 2 3 4 3 2, 3 2, 3 3 2, 3 4 2, 3 3 3 Width 1.38 (35.1) 2.75 (70.0) 4.13 (105.0) 5.50 (139.7) 4.13 (105.0) 4.13 (105.0) 5.50 (139.7) 5.48 (139.2) 8.25 (209.6) 11.00 (279.4) 8.25 (209.6) 8.25 (209.6) 12.06 (306.3) Height 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8) 10.00 (254.0) 10.13 (257.3) 10.13 (257.3) 10.75 (273.1) 10.75 (273.1) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 22.06 (560.3) Depth 3.38 (86.0) 3.38 (86.0) 3.38 (86.0) 3.38 (86.0) 3.57 (90.7) 4.06 (103.1) 4.10 (104.1) 4.09 (103.9) 4.06 (103.1) 4.06 (103.1) 4.06 (103.1) 5.50 (139.7) 9.06 (230.1)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC HJDDC HKDDC LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC PBDC
DC Molded-Case Switches
Eatons DC molded-case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and have Table 27.2-11. DC Molded-Case Switches
Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C Interrupting Capacity (kA) Poles in Series With Line and Load Terminals Catalog Number HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3225KL HJDDC3250K HKDDC3400K LGKDC3400KSG LGKDC3630KSG HLDDC3600K HMDLDC3800K HLDDC21200K Without Line and Load Terminals Catalog Number HFDDC3100KW HFDDC3150KW HFDDC3225KW HJDDC3250KW HKDDC3400KW LGKDC3400KSW LGKDC3630KSW HLDDC3600WK HMDLDC3800WK HLDDC21200WK
automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.
600 Vdc Maximum

100 150 225 250 400 400 600 600 800 42 42 42 42 35 65 65 35 35 50 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
250 Vdc Maximum

1200

Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc. Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 27 027
27.2-15
Table 27.2-12. Typical DC System Applications

Description 250 Vdc Maximum Grounded Switchgear batteries Telecom Solar photovoltaic UPS battery systems Traction/transportation systems Electrical vehicle charging DC motors

600 Vdc Maximum Grounded Ungrounded
750 Vdc Maximum Grounded Ungrounded
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Ungrounded
Wiring Diagrams
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application

Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC. For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
Load (A) Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Load
(A)
Load
(A)
32 33 34 35 36
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Load
Load
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 27.2-6. 250 Vdc Maximum Two Poles in Series
Figure 27.2-7. 600 Vdc Maximum Three Poles in Series
Figure 27.2-8. 750 Vdc Maximum Four Poles in Series
CA08104001E
Application Information400415 Hz
September 2011
Sheet 27 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Application of Eaton MoldedCase Circuit Breakers to 400415 Hz Systems

Eatons molded-case circuit breakers, including breakers with electronic trip units, can be applied for overcurrent protection on 400415 Hz systems. Commonly used to power computer installations, 400415 Hz systems are also employed in conjunction with certain aircraft, military and other specialty equipment. This publication contains guidelines to applying Eaton molded-case circuit breakers on 400415 Hz systems.
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers

Breaker Frame Series Maximum Continuous Amperes at 60 Hz 400415 Hz Application Maximum Continuous Amperes 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 65 85 95 115 135 60 80 90 100 125 150 160 175 200 200 60 80 90 100 125 150 160 200 200 Cable/ Bus Bar (Per Phase) 1#12 Cu 1#12 Cu 1#12 Cu 1#10 Cu 1#10 Cu 1#8 Cu 1#8 Cu 1#6 Cu 1#6 Cu 1#4 Cu 1#2 Cu 1#1 Cu 1-1/0 Cu 1-1/0 Cu 1#12 Cu 1#12 Cu 1#12 Cu 1#10 Cu 1#10 Cu 1#8 Cu 1#6 Cu 1#4 Cu 1#2 Cu 1#1 Cu 11/0 Cu 11/0 Cu 1#4 Cu 1#2 Cu 1#1 Cu 11/0 Cu 11/0 Cu 12/0 Cu 13/0 Cu 14/0 Cu 14/0 Cu 1250 kcmil Cu 1#4 Cu 1#2 Cu 1#1 Cu 11/0 Cu 11/0 Cu 12/0 Cu 13/0 Cu 14/0 Cu 1250 kcmil Cu Terminals (Fixed Front) Catalog or Style Number 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 3T125EF 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G17 624B100G17 624B100G17 T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250FJ T250KB T250KB T250KB T250KB T250KB T250KB T250KB T250KB T250KB
EG
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 80 90 100 110 125
Circuit Breaker Derating Required

Table 27.2-13 lists the maximum continuous current carrying capacity and Table 27.2-14 lists the interrupting capacities at 400415 Hz of Eaton molded-case circuit breakers. Due to the increased resistance of the copper sections resulting from the skin effect produced by eddy currents at 400 415 Hz, circuit breakers in many cases require derating. The thermal derating on these devices is based upon 100%, three-phase application in open air in a maximum of 40C (104F) with 4 feet (1.2m) of the specied cable 75C (167F) of bus at the line and load side. Additional derating of not less than 20% will be required if the circuit breaker is to be used in an enclosure. Further derating may be required if the enclosure contains other heat generating devices or if the ambient temperatures exceed 40C.
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD
15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 90 100 125 150
JG
70 90 100 125 150 175 200 200 225 250
JDB, JD, HJD
70 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250
The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the same as at 60 Hz. Thermal-magnetic only. FD and HFD only.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 029

27.2-17
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers (Continued)

Breaker Frame Series Maximum Continuous Amperes at 60 Hz 400415 Hz Application Maximum Continuous Amperes 100 125 150 160 180 200 225 275 300 200 250 275 300 400 400 210 240 275 310 370 425 300 500 340 405 470 355 400 700 750 850 1500 Cable/ Bus Bar (Per Phase) 11/0 Cu 11/0 Cu 12/0 Cu 13/0 Cu 14/0 Cu 1250 kcmil Cu 1350 kcmil Cu 1500 kcmil Cu 23/0 Cu 1250 kcmil Cu 1350 kcmil Cu 1500 kcmil Cu 1500 kcmil Cu 2500 kcmil Cu 2500 kcmil Cu 1250 kcmil Cu 1350 kcmil Cu 1500 kcmil Cu 2250 kcmil Cu 2350 kcmil Cu 2500 kcmil Cu 2250 kcmil Cu 2350 kcmil Cu 23/0 Cu 2300 kcmil Cu 2350 kcmil Cu 24/0 Cu 2300 kcmil Cu 3300 kcmil Cu 3350 kcmil Cu 4350 kcmil Cu 41/2 x 4 Cu Terminals (Fixed Front) Catalog or Style Number T300K T300K T300K T300K T300K T300K T300K T350K T400K TA350LK TA350LK TA350LK TA350LK 3TA632LK 3TA632LK T600LA T600LA T600LA T600LA T600LA T600LA T401LA T401LA T600MA1 T600MA1 T600MA1 T800MA1 T800MA1 T1000NBI T1000NBI T1200NBI Rear connected Cu T-bar
Cable and Bus Sizing

The cable and bus sizes to be used at 400415 Hz are not based on standard National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz application. Larger cross sections are necessary at 400415 Hz to avoid exceeding component temperature limits. All bus bars specied are based upon mounting the bars in the vertical plane to allow maximum air ow. All bus bars are spaced at a minimum of 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in the horizontal plane will necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise orientation of the bus may change the maximum ratings indicated. If additional information is required for other connections of cable or bus, contact the Eaton Technical Resource Center.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
KDB, KD, HKD
125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400
LG
250 300 350 400 500 600
LDB, LD, HLD
250 300 350 400 500 600
Interrupting Capacity
400415 Hz interrupting capacities of the Eaton molded-case circuit breakers are found in Table 27.2-14.
LD with Digitrip RMS 310 MDL with Digitrip RMS 310
300 600 400 500 600 700 800
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that thermal indicating devices such as tempi plates be placed on the line and load terminals or T-connectors of the center pole. These are usually the hottest terminals with a balanced load. A maximum temperature of 90C (50C over a maximum ambient of 40C) would verify the maximum rating for the particular application. Temperature proles taken on these breakers can be correlated to ensure that the hottest points within the breaker are within the required temperature limits. A thermal cutoff switch can also be used to actuate a shunt trip to open the breaker if the thermal limits are exceeded. Consult the Eaton Technical Resource Center for further information on special applications.
ND with Digitrip RMS 310
1200
RD with Digitrip RMS 310

2000
The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the same as at 60 Hz. Thermal-magnetic only.
CA08104001E
Table 27.2-14. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers
Breaker Frame Series Estimated 400415 Hz Interrupting Capacities (rms Symmetrical Amperes) 240V 5000 40,000 7000 20,000 17,000 3600 3600 13,000 8000 40,000 13,000 20,000 17,000 14,000 21,000 14,000 40,000 13,000 20,000 17,000 21,000 14,000 480V 3600 20,000 5000 13,000 7000 2800 2800 5000 7000 20,000 5000 13,000 7000 10,000 11,000 10,000 20,000 7000 13,000 10,000 11,000 10,000 10,000 11,000 16,000 33,000 600V 7000 3600 5000 4400 2800 3600 7000 7000 3600 5000 3600 7000 8000 7000 10,000 3600 7000 5000 8000 7000 7000 8000 8000 33,000
September 2011
Sheet 27 030
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Thermal-Magnetic
EGB EGC EGE EGH EGS EHD FDB FD, HFD JDB, JD JGC JGE JGH JGS HJD KDB, KD, HKD LDB, LD LGC LGE LGH LGS HLD MD

KD, LD, MDL, ND 14,000 HLD, HMDL 21,000 HND RD
21,000 40,000
The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available for circuit breakers applied to 400415 Hz systems. Not UL listed. Series G E-Frame is 600/347 Vac maximum.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 031

Special Application Breakers
27.2-19
High-Intensity Discharge (HID) Breakers

HID breakers are used to switch 120V or 277V uorescent lighting circuits or high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. Per UL 489 Section 7.14, they must be listed and marked HID. HID breakers are tested for endurance at 75% power factor. The contacts and the spring of an HID breaker are heavier duty to dissipate the increased heat from greater current ow during the HID ignition period. For listing of available HID rated breakers, see Table 27.2-15.
Heating, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Circuit Breakers (HACR)

Due to changes in the UL 489 standards, all circuit breakers meet the requirements for HACR application. NEMA AB-3 Standard, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and their Application States, Section 430.53 of the NEC permits the use of an inverse-time circuit breaker as the branch circuit protective device in multi-motor and combination load installations, commonly involved in heating, air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Circuit breakers do not need to be marked HACR in order to be used in these applications unless the end use still requires that marking.
Frame BAB-D CH-HID CHB-HID GHBS HQP-D QC GHQRSP BABRP BABRSP BRRP CLRP Poles 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 Ampere Rating 1560 1530 1530 1530 1560 1560 1530 1530 1530 1530 1530
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Engine generator circuit breakers are designed specically for application on diesel engine powered standby generator systems where high interrupting circuit breakers are not required. Generator breakers are equipped with a special trip unit that provides standard overload protection with low magnetic short-circuit protection to suit generator applications that call for close short-circuit protection at low interrupting ratings. Eaton offers a family of engine generator circuit breakers from 15 to 1200A that conform to UL 489, CSA and IEC 947-2 standards.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Lighting Control Solenoid Operated Breakers

Eaton manufactures a wide array of solenoid operated breakers for lighting control applications. These are available in both 120 and 277V single-pole and two-pole congurations. See individual circuit breaker selection data, Table 27.4-12, for more information. For a full discussion of the use of these breakers, see Tab 23 Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command.
Table 27.2-15. HID Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

120/240V Maximum

277/480V Maximum
29 30 31 32 33 34
Switching Duty (SWD) Rated Breakers

SWD breakers are rated 15 or 20A, 120 and 277V and intended to switch uorescent lighting loads on a regular basis and are marked SWD, per UL 489 Section 7.9. SWD breakers are endurance-tested at 100 % power factor. Eatons single-pole 120 Vac QUICKLAG line, as well as the GB, GC and single-pole 277 Vac GHB, GHBS, GHC, EHD Series C and EG Series G breakers are tested, rated and marked SWD. In addition, there are other SWD rated circuit breakers available (see Table 27.2-16).
Table 27.2-16. SWD Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker Family QUICKLAG Series C Series G Frame GHB, GHBS, GHC and EHD EG Mounting All All All Poles 1 1 1, 2 Ampere Rating 15 and 20 15 and 20 15 and 20 SWD at 120 Vac
SWD at 277 Vac

35 36 37
Table 27.2-17. HACR Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker Family QUICKLAG Frame Mounting Plug-on Bolt-on Cable-cable All All Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3, 4 All All Ampere Rating 15100 15100 10100 All All Up to 240 Vac

Up to 480 Vac

38 39 40 41 42 43
Series C Series G
GD thru LD EG thru LG
CA08104001E
Special Application Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 27 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Mining Circuit Breakers

Eaton mining circuit breakers have a tradition of proven dependability and reliability in harsh mine environments, consistently combining strength and reliability with safe, efcient operation. The mining breaker is available from 152500A and is designed for trailing cable applications per MSHA 30 CFR 75. With interrupting ratings up to 25 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sensing electronic trip unit, the mining breaker can be applied to all mining circuit breaker applications. Mining breakers are available with a full line of accessories.
Marine Circuit Breakers

Eaton circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specications:

Duty Cycle is based on the one minute averaging time of the breaker, and can be determined as follows: Weld Time 100 Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------------------------------Weld Time + Off Time During-weld amperes can be obtained from the welder manufacturer, or as follows: During-weld 1000 kVA During-weld = --------------------------------------------------Amperes Voltage Interrupting capacity of the breaker should be within the maximum available at the point of application. Refer to Eaton for additional application details.
U.S. Coast Guard CFR ABSAmerican Bureau of Shipping IEEE 45 DNV Lloyds ABS / NVR
NAVY MIL-SPEC Breakers

NAVY MIL-SPEC molded-case circuit breakers provide both overload protection for conductors and short-circuit protection for all circuit elements, such as conductors, motors and starters. They also serve as manual disconnecting means, as well as circuit protectors. These breakers range from 5 to 1600A with interrupting ratings to 100,000A rms asymmetrical. These breakers are rated 500 Vac class for use in traditional 450 Vac three-phase open delta ungrounded naval distribution systems. Smaller distribution panel breakers are rated 125 Vac. 60 Hz and 400 Hz versions are available as well as 125/250 Vdc ratings. All Eaton NAVY breakers meet applicable MIL-SPECS including:

These specications generally require molded-case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50C ambient ratings and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need to be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine usefor vessels over 65 feet in length) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval use).
Molded-Case Breakers for Application on Resistance Welding Circuits

Short-circuit protection for resistance welding devices can be obtained by properly applying instantaneous trip molded-case circuit breakers.
Note: Instantaneous only breakers for welding application are intended for application within the welding equipment not as feeder breakers to welding machines.
MIL-C-17588/QPL17588 ALB-1 Breakers MIL-DTL-17361/QPL17361 AQB Breakers MIL-S-901 Shock MIL-STD-167-1 Vibration MIL-STD-461 EMI ASTM D5948 Special Molding Compounds
These breakers permit normally high welding currents, but trip instantaneously if a short-circuit develops. These breakers include standard molded-case circuit breaker features, such as trip-free operation, deadfront and single-phase protection. Because the breakers are resettable after tripping, replacement costs and downtime are minimized.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 033
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Application Data

27.3-1
Continuous Ampere Rating

Molded-case circuit breakers are rated in rms amperes at a specic ambient. This ampere rating is the continuous current that they will carry in the ambient temperature for which they are calibrated. Eaton thermal-magnetic breakers are calibrated for an ambient temperature 40C (104F) that is the average temperature within an enclosure; thus, they minimize the need for derating. If the enclosure ambient is known to exceed 40C, the breaker used should either be especially calibrated for that ambient, or be derated accordingly. In accordance with the National Electrical Code, all circuit breakers are derated to 80% for continuous loads except electronic trip unit circuit breakers that have been tested and marked for 100% application. The selection of a specic ampere rating for a given application is dependent upon the type of load and duty cycle, and is governed by the National Electrical Code. In general, the NEC requires overcurrent protection at the supply and at points where wire sizes are reduced. It further states that the conductors be protected in accordance with their current carrying capacity, but lists exceptions for applications such as motor circuits where a larger rating is often required to override motor inrush currents. Some test methods used in the eld are often poor indicators of the condition of a circuit breaker. These tests are used to minimize test cycle and setup times. Test types range from contact resistance measurements to millivolt drop checks. Contact resistance should not be considered a reliable measure of a breakers ability to carry rated current. Contact resistance is usually measured with low currents from a low voltage supply owing through the contacts, and the resistance value is heavily dependent on transient contact surface conditions. These transient surface conditions can vary with factors, such as the contact material, the gaseous ambient and the current level, and the resistance can markedly decrease with the ow of rated current. Observation of high contact resistance should be considered only as an indicator of the need for further testing whenever circuit breakers are being evaluated.
The millivolt drop procedure outlined in NEMA Standards Publication AB41996 Section 5.4 can be used to assess the electrical integrity of connections and contacts within a circuit breaker. The IEEE paper by John Shea and John Bindas, Measuring MoldedCase Circuit Breaker Resistance Vol. CHMT-16, No. 2, March 1993, is available as a guideline for more reliable millivolt drop measurements. Again, the millivolt drop can be affected by contact surface conditions that can change with breaker operation and arcing. Further, the millivolt drop is only one factor in determining the thermal loading of a breaker, and the total system must be considered prior to judging a breaker to be unacceptable. Proper thermal performance of a well loaded circuit breaker is by far the best indicator of a circuit breakers current carrying capability, and a millivolt drop test, performed at rated current, can serve to indicate whether further testing is required. If the resistance and millivolt drop test data raises concerns in regards to breaker integrity, a proper thermal test must be performed.
UL 489 provides standards for testing the individual poles of two- and threepole molded-case circuit breakers. The test current is generally lower than the interrupting rating of the molded-case circuit breaker. This capability is necessary for breakers applied on corner-grounded delta systems where single line-to-ground faults may be interrupted by only a single pole of a circuit breaker with full line-to-line voltage across that single interrupting pole. Molded-case circuit breakers should not be used on circuits where the available fault current exceeds the level at which individual poles were short-circuit tested at line-toline voltage.
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded B Phase applications, refer to Eaton.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Interrupting Ratings
Molded-case circuit breakers are available in various interrupting capacities. Standard interrupting capacity breakers are available in both industrial and replacement circuit breaker lines. These breakers have interrupting capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac. High interrupting capacity breakers are similar to standard interrupting capacity breakers, but the improved performance makes these breakers suited for use in todays network systems where higher fault currents exist. These breakers have interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at 480 Vac. For applications that call for very high interrupting ratings, current limiting high interrupting capacity breakers are available. These breakers offer true current limiting characteristics in the same physical frame size as the high interrupting capacity version and have interrupting capacities of 100, 150 and 200 kA at 480 Vac. The maximum amount of fault current supplied by a system can be calculated at any point in that system. One rule must be followed for applying the correct circuit breaker. The interrupting rating of the breaker must be equal to or greater than the amount of fault current that can be delivered at that point in the system where the breaker is applied. The interrupting rating of the breaker is the maximum amount of fault current it can safely interrupt without damaging itself. A breakers interrupting rating always decreases as the voltage increases. Interrupting rating is one of the most critical factors in the breaker selection process.
Circuit Voltage
Molded-case circuit breakers are rated by voltage class and should be applied only to system voltages within their rating. The voltage rating is determined by the maximum voltage that can be applied across its terminals, the type of distribution system and how the breaker is applied in the system. Circuit breakers listed for use at 120/240V may be applied on 120/240V grounded systems. For applications on 240V ungrounded systems, apply only circuit breakers rated 240V (with no slash rating) or higher. Circuit breakers rated 277/480V are suitable for application on 277/480V grounded wye systems and are not for application on 480V ungrounded delta systems. Apply circuit breakers rated 480V (with no slash rating) or higher on 480V ungrounded delta systems.
CA08104001E
27.3-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Application Data

Application InformationCode Considerations
September 2011
Sheet 27 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Circuit Frequency
The tripping characteristics of most molded-case circuit breakers remain virtually constant when applied to frequencies of 50 and 60 Hz. On higher frequency applications, molded-case circuit breakers must usually be specially calibrated and/or derated. The amount of derating depends upon the frame size and ampere rating, as well as the current frequency. In general, the higher the ampere rating in a given frame size, the greater the derating required. Thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit breakers applied at frequencies above 60 Hz could require that individual consideration be given to thermal performance, magnetic performance and interrupting capabilities. Electronic trip units are usually calibrated for 50/60 Hz, although operation at higher frequencies is achievable with the use of special derating factors and specially sized cable or bus. Avoid making circuit breaker performance assumptions on applications above 60 Hz. Consult Eaton for molded-case circuit breakers above 60 Hz.
Code Considerations Circuit Breaker Sizing

The following paragraphs outline pertinent information from the NEC according to the type of load and duty cycle.
Branch Circuits
A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring system extending beyond the nal overcurrent device protecting the circuit. (1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310) These are protected in accordance with the conductor ratings as given. High wattage incandescent lamp loads may result in abnormally high inrush currents that must be taken into account to avoid nuisance tripping. The lamp manufacturer should be consulted for data relative to the inrush currents. (2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430) Breakers are primarily intended for the protection of conductors, motor control apparatus and motors against short circuits and ground fault conditions. On motor overloads, the motor overcurrent device will open the circuit before the correctly applied breaker. Currents higher than the locked rotor value will be interrupted by the breakers, protecting the circuit from these heavy fault currents. The breaker must not trip on normal starting.
Service
A service includes the conductors and equipment for delivering electrical energy from the supply system to the wiring system of the premises served. NEC Article 230 contains the many requirements for services of 600V or less including the sizing, location and overcurrent protection of conductors, disconnect means, permissible number of disconnects, grounding of conductors and ground fault protection requirements of service equipment.
Feeder Circuits
A feeder is composed of the conductors of a wiring system between the service equipment or the generator switchboard of an isolated plant and the branch circuit overcurrent device. NEC Article 220: Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. Exception: Where the assembly including the overcurrent devices protecting the feeder(s) are listed for operation at 100% of their rating, neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be less than the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load. Only breakers listed for 100% application, and so labeled, can be applied under the exception (for example, type CKD). Breakers without 100% application listing and label are applied under (B) above, or at 80% of rating. NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders having mixed loads; i.e., heating (lighting and heat appliances) and motors, should have ratings suitable for carrying the heating loads plus the capacity required by the motor loads. NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor feeders shall have a rating not greater than the sum of the highest breaker rating of any of its branches and the full load currents of all other motors served by the feeder.
Number of Poles
The number of poles in the breaker is determined by the type of distribution system. A pole is required for each hot conductor, but usually not for the neutral conductor, except in certain special applications. In general, a single-pole breaker may be used on grounded neutral systems for single-phase applications and a three-pole breaker on three-phase applications. There are instances, however, where two-pole breakers are necessary on single-phase systems and four-pole breakers on three-phase systems to interrupt the neutral. Certain DC voltage applications also use special multi-pole congurations.
While breakers may be applied for motor running overcurrent protection when the requirements of Article 430 of the NEC are met, these applications are not recommended for Eatons breakers and, therefore, this discussion is conned to the use of a breaker as a circuit protector.
For many applications, particularly those where starting behavior of the motor is unknown, the NEC maximum rules are followed. Usually, lower rated breakers can be used successfully. This is further discussed under motor circuit application and motor application tables. Motor circuit application (NEC Article 430): The breaker must have a continuous rating of not less than 115% of the motor full load current. Before applying a breaker, check to determine the effect of any of the following conditions: High ambient temperature, heating within breaker enclosure due to grouping of current consuming devices, frequent motor starting and lengthy motor acceleration period.

Molded-case circuit breakers use internal residual ground fault protection schemes or separate earth leakage modules using zero sequence sensing when optional ground fault protection is required. For more information on how the scheme operates, see Tab 1, Figure 1.4-7 and the associated explanation.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 035

27.3-3
Breaker rating or setting (NEC Article 430): The motor branch circuit overcurrent device must be capable of capable of carrying the inrush current of the motor. The required protection should be considered as being obtained when the overcurrent device has a rating or setting not exceeding the values given in Table 27.3-1, reference NEC Article 430). An instantaneous trip circuit breaker (without time delay) should be used only if adjustable and if part of a combination controller having overcurrent protection in each conductor and the combination is especially approved for the purpose. In the event a breaker chosen on this basis still does not allow motor starting, a higher rating is permitted by the code. See Exceptions listed with Table 27.3-1.
Due to the innite number of motorand-load combinations and because comparable breakers of different manufacture have different tripping characteristics, NEC motor circuit breaker rules are of a general nature and are set up as maximum boundaries. Protection is considered satisfactory if the breaker rating does not exceed the gure allowed by the NEC requirements. Although Eaton breakers rated less than the NEC maximum values may be applied in most cases, many operating engineers select breakers on the basis of the NEC maximum rules simply because consideration of other factors is not usually necessary, or to ensure motor starting when the starting behavior of the motor is not known. Tables 27.3-1 and 27.3-2 are adapted from Article 430 of NEC. When a certain motor is standard for a given job, as on a volume-produced machine tool, it is practical (and often more economical) to select a breaker for closer protection than one chosen on the basis of NEC maximum rules.
Circuit Breaker Not Horsepower Rated

Unlike switches, circuit breakers are not horsepower rated because they are able to safely interrupt currents far in excess of the locked rotor value for any motor with which they may be applied. This ability is recognized in the NEC as stated in paragraph 430.109 and is proven by the Underwriters Laboratories tests described in UL bulletin number 489, Standard for Branch Circuit and Service Circuit Breakers. For example, a breaker must pass the UL overload test consisting of breaking a current 600% of its ampere ratings. As motor branch circuit breaker ratings are usually 125 to 250% of motor full-load currents, this test establishes the ability of the breaker to more than interrupt locked rotor currents. Following the overload test and others, the breaker is called upon to successfully clear its rated short-circuit current that is a minimum of 5000A. This also is many times higher than motor locked rotor current. Because by denition, a circuit breaker is required to open under abnormal conditions...without injury to itself, the breaker must still be in operating condition after the test.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Application InformationCode Considerations Motor Branch Circuits
September 2011
Sheet 27 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Table 27.3-1. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground Fault Protective DevicesNEC Table 430.52
Motor Type Percent of Full Load Current Instantaneous Trip Breaker 800 800 1100 800 800 250 Inverse Time Breaker 250 250 250 250 150 150
Single-phase motors AC polyphase motors other than wound rotor squirrel cage: Other than Design B energy efcient Design B energy efcient Synchronous Wound rotor Direct-current (constant voltage)
For certain exceptions to the values specied, see Sections 430.52 through 430.54. The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit breakers that may be modied as in Section 430.52, Exceptions No. 1 and No. 2. Synchronous motors of the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps and so on, that start unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200% of full load current.
Table 27.3-2. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current MotorsNEC Table 430.250

Hp Induction Type Squirrel Cage and Wound-Rotor Amperes 115V 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-12 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Synchronous Type Unity Power Factor Amperes 460V 1.1 1.6 2.1 3.0 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590 575V 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289 336 382 412 472 2300V 16 20 26 31 37 49 60 72 83 95 103 118 230V 53 63 83 104 123 155 202 253 302 400 460V 26 32 41 52 61 78 101 126 151 201 575V 21 26 33 42 49 62 81 101 121 161 2300V 12 15 20 25 30 40
200V 2.5 3.7 4.8 6.9 7.8 11.0 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 62.1 78.2 92 120 150 177 221 285 359 414 552
208V 2.4 3.5 4.6 6.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88 114 143 169 211 273 343 396 528
230V 2.2 3.2 4.2 6.0 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480
4.4 6.4 8.4 12.0 13.6
The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed will be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600V. For 90% and 80% power factor, the above gures should be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25 respectively.
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 037

27.3-5
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A1) circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data taken from NEC Table 430.250 (threephase). Actual motor nameplate ratings should be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as dened in the application section of the NEC. These additional considerations may require the use of a higher rated HMCP, or at least one with higher magnetic pickup settings. Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based on known characteristics of Eaton breakers, specic units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maximum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations. In general, these selections were based on: 1. Ambientoutside enclosure not more than 40C (104F). 2. Motor startinginfrequent starting, stopping or reversing. 3. Locked rotormaximum 6 times motor FLA. 4. Locked rotormaximum 6 times motor FLA. Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not be set more than 1300% of the motor full-load current to comply with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA Design B energy efcient motors which can be set up to 1700%). Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specic system application requirements. For motor full load currents of 208V and 200V, increase the corresponding 230V motor values by 10% and 15% respectively.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
230V, Three-Phase
1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 10 10 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 700 1000 6 6 6 10 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 125 150 175 225 300 350 450 3 6 6 10 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 110 150 175 225 300 350
460V, Three-Phase
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
575V, Three-Phase
CA08104001E

Application InformationCode Considerations Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460)
In normal applications, breakers rated about 150% of capacitor rated currents are recommended. This factor allows for switching surges, and possible overcurrent due to overvoltage and harmonic currents. Such selection fully meets the NEC requirements in 460.8 for a conductor and disconnect to be rated not less than 135% capacitor rating. Where the operating currents exceed 135% of rated current due to harmonic components, service conditions may require the selection of a breaker with a higher current rating. For application in ambients higher than the rated ambient of the breaker, the breaker derating table should be checked to determine the rating of the breaker required to meet the minimum of 135% capacitor rating. Exception No. 2: An individual overcurrent device will not be required where the primary circuit overcurrent device provides the protection specied in this Section. Exception No. 3: As provided in (2) below. (2) Primary and Secondary
September 2011
Sheet 27 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
overcurrent device is rated or set at a current value not more than six times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having more than 6% impedance and not more than four times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having more than six but not more than 10% impedance. Exception 4: Where the rated secondary current of a transformer is 9A or more and 125% of this current does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the next higher standard rating described in Section 240 will be permitted. Where the rated secondary current is less than 9A, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 167% of the rated secondary current shall be permitted. Closer protection can be provided by breakers having shunt trips actuated by a temperature sensing device imbedded in transformer windings.
A transformer 600V or less having an overcurrent device on the secondary side rated or set at not more than 125% of the rated secondary current on the transformer shall not be required to have an individual overcurrent device on the primary side if the primary feeder overcurrent device is rated or set at a current value not more than 250% of the rated primary current of the transformer.
A transformer 600V or less, equipped with coordinated thermal overload protection by the manufacturer and arranged to interrupt the primary current, will not be required to have an individual overcurrent device on the primary side if the primary feeder
kVA 208V FLA 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 250 333 500 10 14 24 36 48 72 120 180 240 361 481 803 1202 1601 2404 240V Breaker FLA Trip 20 30 50 70 100 150 225 350 450 700 1000 1600 2000 3000 3200 8 13 21 31 42 63 104 156 208 313 417 696 1042 1388 2083 277V Breaker FLA Trip 20 30 50 60 80 125 200 300 400 600 800 1200 1600 2000 3000 7 11 18 27 36 54 90 135 181 271 361 603 903 1202 1805
Circuit breakers and switches for use with capacitor must have a current rating in excess of rated capacitor current to provide for overcurrent from overvoltages at fundamental frequency and harmonic currents. The following percent of the capacitor-rated current should be used:
Fused and unfused switches . . . 165% Enclosed molded-case circuit breaker (includes additional de-rating for enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135% Contactors: Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135% Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% Refer to Tab 35 for specic sizing of protective devices by kVAR rating.
Table 27.3-4. Single-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
480V Breaker FLA Trip 15 20 40 50 70 100 175 250 350 500 700 1200 1600 2000 2500 5 6 10 16 21 31 52 78 104 156 208 348 521 694 1042 600V Breaker FLA Trip 10 15 20 30 40 60 100 150 200 300 400 700 800 1200 1600 4 5 8 13 17 25 42 63 83 125 167 278 417 555 833 Breaker Trip 10 20 30 40 50 100 150 150 250 350 600 800 800 1200
Transformer Protection (NEC Article 450) Primary

Each transformer 600V or less shall be protected by an individual overcurrent device on the primary side. Rated or set at not more than 125% of the rated primary current of the transformer. Exception No. 1: Where the rated primary currents of a transformer are 9A or more and 125% of this current does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the next higher standard rating described in Section 240 will be permitted. Where the rated primary current is less than 9A, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 167% of the primary current shall be permitted. Where the rated primary current is less than 2A, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 300% will be permitted.
Table 27.3-5. Single-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA 208V FLA 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 25 37.5 50 75 100 167 250 333 500 10 14 24 36 48 72 120 180 240 361 481 803 1202 1601 2404 Breaker Trip 15 20 30 45 60 90 150 225 300 450 600 1000 1600 2000 3000 240V FLA 8 13 21 31 42 63 104 156 208 313 417 696 1042 1388 2083 Breaker Trip 15 20 30 40 60 80 150 200 300 400 600 900 1400 1800 3000 277V FLA 11 18 27 36 54 90 135 181 271 361 603 903 1202 1805 Breaker Trip 15 25 35 50 70 150 175 225 350 450 800 1200 1600 2500 480V FLA 10 16 21 31 52 78 104 156 208 348 521 694 1042 Breaker Trip 15 20 30 40 70 100 150 200 300 450 700 900 1400
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 039

27.3-7
Table 27.3-6. Three-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA 240V FLA 3 6 9 15 30 37.5 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 7 14 22 36 72 90 108 120 180 271 361 541 722 1203 1804 2406 Breaker Trip 15 30 40 70 150 200 200 225 350 500 700 1000 1000 2000 2500 4000 480V FLA 7 11 18 36 45 54 60 90 135 180 271 361 601 902 1203 Breaker Trip 15 25 40 70 90 110 125 200 250 350 500 600 800 1200 2000 600V FLA 6 9 14 29 36 43 48 72 108 144 217 289 481 722 962 Breaker Trip 15 20 30 60 70 90 100 150 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1600
Slash Ratings from 2008 NEC Article 240.85 Applications

A circuit breaker with a straight voltage rating, such as 240 or 480V, shall be permitted to be applied in a circuit in which the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the circuit breakers voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall not be used for protecting a threephase, corner-grounded delta circuit unless the circuit breaker is marked 13 to indicate such suitability. A circuit breaker with a slash rating, such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall be permitted to be applied in a solidly grounded circuit where the nominal voltage of any conductor to ground does not exceed the lower of the two values of the circuit breakers voltage rating and the nominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the higher value of the circuit breakers voltage rating. FPN: Proper application of moldedcase circuit breakers on three-phase systems, other than solidly grounded wye, particularly on corner-grounded delta systems, considers the circuit breakers individual pole-interrupting capability. For corner-grounded delta systems refer to Eaton for reduced interrupting ratings of selected type two- and three-pole breakers. For center tapped delta applications where there is a tap between A and C (high B being the leg), the following applies: 1. The voltage from the tapped winding center point that is grounded is 0.867 x line to line voltage.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 27.3-7. Three-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA 208V FLA 3 6 9 15 30 37.5 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1000 8 17 25 42 83 104 125 139 208 312 416 652 833 1388 2082 2776 Breaker Trip 10 20 35 60 110 150 175 175 300 400 600 800 1200 1800 3000 3500 240V FLA 7 14 22 36 72 90 108 120 180 271 361 541 722 1203 1804 2406 Breaker Trip 10 20 30 45 100 125 150 175 225 350 500 700 900 1500 2500 3000 480V FLA 7 11 18 36 45 54 60 90 135 180 271 361 601 902 1203 Breaker Trip 10 15 25 45 60 70 80 125 175 225 350 500 800 1200 1600 600V FLA 9 14 29 36 43 48 72 108 144 217 289 481 722 962 Breaker Trip 10 20 40 50 60 60 90 150 200 300 400 600 900 1200
2. Any single-pole breaker connected to B phase must have a voltage rating equal to 0.867 x line to line voltage.
3. Any two-pole breaker should have a full voltage rating equal to or above line to line voltage (slash rating is not acceptable).
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 27 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Cable Sizing/Selection
There is often much confusion about the size and insulation ratings of cables that are used with circuit breakers and other types of electrical equipment assemblies. Much of the confusion is caused by not taking into consideration the rating of the terminations of the electrical equipment. When sizing and selecting a cable, the designer must consider the temperature rating of the termination it will be landed on so that the proper size and insulation rating can be chosen. Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated 125A or less shall be marked as being suitable for 60C (140F) only, 75C (167F) only or 60/75C (140/167F) wire. All Eaton listed breakers rated 125A and less are marked 60/75C Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated over 125A shall be marked as being suitable for 75C (167F). All Eaton listed breakers rated over 125A are marked 75C
The designer must review the equipment labeling or installation guidelines to determine the proper cable size and insulation required, regardless of the markings on the actual lugs. For example, panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers and so on. often contain lugs that are marked 90C on the lug itself, however, the assembly is only rated for a 75C cable termination. Therefore, only cables with a minimum of 75C insulation and rated/derated per its 75C ampacity rating can be used. Note: All listed electrical distribution equipment rated 600 Vac and less has a maximum cable termination rating of 75C (167F). There are many different types of conductors and Table 310.13(A) of NEC 2008 can help provide an understanding of conductors to use for various eld-wired applications. This table shows that insulation type is a key aspect of a conductor that impacts not only where it can be installed but also the conductors rated ampacity. Together with Tables 310.16 through 310.21, the cable ampacities of various conductors with various insulation types are presented to the designer who must choose the appropriate conductor for the application.
When a designer is sizing cables for termination on electrical distribution equipment, they must ensure not to exceed: 1. The temperature rating of the equipment termination. 2. The insulation rating of the cable at the full load ampacity of the equipment. The following are a couple simple sizing examples to illustrate some of the considerations for selecting and sizing cables. It should also be noted that many terminals are suitable for use only with copper wire. Where aluminum or copper-clad aluminum wire is used, the terminals must be marked appropriately. The marking is usually abbreviated as AL for aluminum, CU for copper and AL-CU for a terminal that can handle both.
It is important to note that the termination rating of electrical equipment is based on the entire equipment assembly and not just the rating of the lug termination itself.
Table 27.3-8. Sizing Example 1

Allowable Ampacity 60C 125A Properly Sized Yes Explanation
#1/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)

125A Breaker Terminals Rated 60/75C Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the equipment terminal ratings The 60C rating of #1 Cu is not sufcient for the 125A equipment Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the equipment terminal ratings Cannot use 90C ratingexceeds the equipment terminal ratings
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 27.3-2. Sizing Example 2
150A Breaker Terminals Rated 75C
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)

60C 110A 75C 130A 90C 150A No Yes No
Figure 27.3-1. Sizing Example 1 Table 27.3-9. Sizing Example 2

Allowable Ampacity 60C 164A Properly Sized No Explanation
##3/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)

Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment, but equipment terminal temperature rating exceeds cable insulation temperature rating The 60C rating of #1 Cu is not sufcient for the 150A equipment The 75C rating of #1 Cu is not sufcient for the 150A equipment Cannot use 90C ratingexceeds the equipment terminal ratings The 60C rating of 1/0 Cu is not sufcient for the 150A equipment The 75C rating of 1/0 Cu is sufcient for the 150A equipment and does not exceed equipment terminal ratings Cannot use 90C ratingexceeds the equipment terminal ratings
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)

60C 110A 75C 130A 90C 150A 60C 125A 75C 150A 90C 170A No No No No Yes No
1/0 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 041

Application InformationTrip Curves
27.3-9
Time-Current Trip Curve Characteristics

Time-current trip curve characteristics are available on the Eaton Web site. The band curves shown for each breaker type represent current tripping limits for the breaker and are within limits established by Underwriters Laboratories. For a given current, at rated ambient, a breaker will clear the circuit automatically at some total time within the two extreme values dened by maximum and minimum curves. For example, a single-pole, 15A QUICKLAG would trip in no less than 10 seconds and in no more than 150 seconds on a 30A current. Because of this allowed spread, users should not specify exact tripping times.
10000 5000
The upper left portions of these curves show the inverse time delay tripping of the breakers due to thermal action. The lower right segments for these curves portray the magnetic tripping action of the breakers. In the case of the front-adjustable thermal-magnetic breakers, the magnetic tripping elements may be adjusted to trip at values within a specic current range. This adjustment is shown in the respective characteristic tripping curve. When these breakers leave the factory, their magnetic trip elements are set at the high side of their tripping range. Adjustment downward may be made to t the requirements of the installation. Currents equal to or greater than these magnetic settings will cause instant tripping.
Curves can be family curves and are suitable for most applications; for more accurate applications, a detailed curve of the particular type and ampere rating of the breaker should be requested. The total time taken by a breaker to clear a fault consists of the mechanical operating time plus the time of actual current interruption. Characteristic time/current curves show total clearing times. Magnetic only breakers have no time delay in tripping. The tripping characteristics of these breakers are similar to the right-hand portion of the standard breakers, except with the vertical lines extended to the top of the curve.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
10000
5000
AMPERE RATING A OR LONG TIME PICK-UP
30 31
TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT CURVE ADJUSTMENTS FOR SOLID-STATE TRIP UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE GROUND FAULT PICK-UP AND DELAY SETTINGS.
1000 500
1000
500
32 33
MAXIMUM
100
T I M E I N
LONG TIME PORTION
100
T I M E I N 50
LONG TIME DELAY A
50
MINIMUM
T I M E I N S E C O N D S
10 8 6
4 3 2 1 .8 .6 .4 .3 .2 .1 .08 .06 I t RAMP GROUND FAUL F LT TIME DELAY A
2
GROUND F FAUL LT PICK-UP
34 35 36 37
10
S E C O N D S
10
S E C O N D S 5
SHORT TIME PICK-UP
2
1 .5
I t RAMP SHORT TIME DELAY A
.5
.04 .03 .2 .3 .4
.6 .8 1
3 4
6 8
38 39 40
.1 .05 INSTANTANEOUS PORTION
.1
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF FRAME OR SENSOR RATING.
.05
INSTANT T TANEOUS PICK-UP
.01 .5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING
.01 .5 1 10 100 5 50 500 1000 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES L OF RA ATING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR
5000 10000
41 42 43
Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable Phase and Ground Current Settings
Figure 27.3-3. Typical Time-Current Curves
CA08104001E

Application InformationSelective Coordination
September 2011
Sheet 27 042
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Selective Coordination Design Issues

In the design of Elevator feeders, Emergency systems, Legally Required Standby systems and new Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS), todays engineer faces greater difculty in meeting the NEC selective coordination requirements. Whether using breakers or fuses, the engineer has to understand the nature of the devices being selected, and properly apply them, such that only the protective device nearest to the fault will open to clear an overload/fault condition.
Design Considerations
In order to properly design a selectively coordinated system, the design professional engineer must recognize how the various low voltage (600V and below) overcurrent protective devices, such as molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs) and low voltage power circuit breakers (LVPCBs) operate. Following is a brief discussion of these devices in relationship to selective coordination. Each MCCB and LVPCB must have a voltage rating and interrupting capacity equal to or greater than the system voltage and available fault current at its point of application in the electrical distribution system.
For MCCBs and LVPCBs in the low level overload or low level fault current range (typically below 10 times the device rating) it is only necessary to ensure that the minimum time band of the upstream device does not overlap the maximum time band of the downstream device. This information can be typically determined from the published time-current curves of the devices.
Overcurrent = Fault or Overload Only This Overcurrent Device 4 Opens for a Fault or Overload at D Locations
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Only This Overcurrent Device 3 Opens for a Fault or Overload at C Locations 3
D D
C 2
Only This Overcurrent Device 2 Opens for a Fault or Overload at B Locations B
Only This Breaker 1 Opens for a Fault or Overload at A Location B 1 A Branch Circuit
A Light Ballast or Motor
Figure 27.3-4. Example of 100% Selective Coordination of Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 043

27.3-11
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting and Short-Time Rating

IEEE Standard 1015 denes the interrupting rating of the breaker as The highest current at rated voltage that a device is intended to interrupt under standard test conditions. On the other hand, IEEE Standard 1015 refers to the short-time rating of the low voltage circuit breaker as A rating applied to a circuit breaker that, for reason of system coordination, causes tripping of the circuit breaker to be delayed beyond the time when tripping would be caused by an instantaneous element. In other words, the devices ability to stay closed and NOT open the circuit immediately under fault conditions. The short-time rating of the breaker will be broken down into two facets for ease of discussion: 1. Short-time current rating The current carried by the circuit breaker for a specied interval, or the maximum current magnitude under a fault condition for which the circuit breaker can stay closed. 2. Short-time delay ratingAn intentional time delay in the tripping of a circuit breaker between the overload and the instantaneous pickup setting. The maximum short-time delay is the maximum amount of time the breaker can keep its contacts closed under the fault condition. If two breakers are in series, to obtain selective coordination, the upstream breaker must have a short-time current rating above the actual fault current on the load side of any downstream breaker. In addition, the upstream breaker has to have short-time delay capability long enough to allow the downstream breaker to open and clear the fault condition. It should be recognized that as the short-time current rating and/or shorttime delay rating of the upstream devices is increased, should a fault occur on the line side of downstream circuit breaker 1 and the load side of upstream circuit breaker 2 the amount of the arc ash energy allowed to the fault condition generally will be increased signicantly. This increased arc ash energy reduces the safety of operating and/or maintenance personnel if they are present at the time of the fault. The higher level of arc ash energy also increases the potential for major equipment damage, resulting in res and extended downtime.

Molded-case circuit breakers are manufactured and tested to the UL 489 standard. Molded-case circuit breakers have over-center toggle mechanisms and either a thermal-magnetic or electronic trip unit. The thermalmagnetic trip unit is such that the magnetic pickup maximum setting is approximately 10 times the trip rating. The electronic trip unit is typically furnished with a xed instantaneous override of approximately 10 to 15 times the breaker frame rating, or trip unit rating. Thus, for molded-case circuit breakers with electronic trip units, for any load side fault above these levels, the breaker will open. The exact magnitude of current that will cause the molded-case circuit breaker to open instantaneously will vary by 1) circuit breaker manufacturer, 2) circuit breaker frame rating, 3) type of trip unit, 4) type/vintage of moldedcase circuit breaker, 5) manufacturers curve tolerances. It will be assumed that the current magnitude needed to open molded-case circuit breakers with electronic trips instantaneously is 13 times the frame ratingits maximum xed instantaneous override. The manufacturers actual data should be used to determine this value. Typically for molded-case circuit breakers, once the magnetic pickup or xed instantaneous override is exceeded, the opening time is 1 cycle or less. Although short-time ratings for molded-case circuit breakers are not covered in the IEEE Standard 1015 for molded-case circuit breakers, some molded-case circuit breakers are equipped with electronic trip units that have adjustable short delay functions. However, they typically also have either an adjustable instantaneous trip (typically with a maximum setting of 10 times trip ampere) or a xed instantaneous override (of 13 times the frame ampere rating). When the electronic trip is in the short-time pickup range (below 13 times frame size), they can typically be adjusted up to a maximum short-time delay setting of approximately 18 cycles (300 ms).
Current Limiting
Per UL 489-1991, current limiting circuit breakers have characteristics that, when operating within their current-limiting range, limit the letthrough l2t to a value less than the l2t of a 1/2-cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current. Current limiting circuit breakers achieve this by opening their contacts very rapidly, such that their l peak let-through current is reduced to a value much lower than the l peak current available from the system at the molded-case circuit breakers point of application.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Insulated-case circuit breakers are also manufactured and tested to the UL 489 standard, however, they usually have a two-step stored energy mechanism and increased short-time ratings. These breakers are typically available in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000 and 5000A frame sizes. Although they may have high interrupting ratings, the typical instantaneous override values for insulated-case circuit breakers are 25 kA to 35 kA for the smaller frames and up to 85 kA for the larger frames. Maximum short-time delay capability is generally up to 30 cycles (0.5s).
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Low voltage power circuit breakers are manufactured and tested to the UL 1066 Standard and ANSI C37 standards and have a two-step stored energy mechanism. Low voltage power circuit breakers are typically available in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000 and 5000A frame sizes. However, even the smaller 800A frame size is available with very high shorttime current ratings of approximately 85 kA to 100 kA. Low voltage power circuit breakers are capable of keeping their contacts closed for up to 30 cycles of fault current, at levels up to their maximum short-time current rating. Thus, low voltage power circuit breakers can normally provide selective coordination with relative ease when in series with each other, or when supplying downstream moldedcase circuit breakers or low voltage power circuit breakers.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 27 044
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Methods to Obtain 100% Selective Coordination

There are various methods to obtain selective coordination between overcurrent protective devices, but the end goal is to have all the line side overcurrent protective devices in series to wait until the overcurrent protective device directly protecting the circuit having the overcurrent opens. This means that typically as the devices progress upstream toward the source, each device on the line side of a downstream series device must have a longer waiting time. The only two exceptions to this general rule would be: 1. Two protective devices of the same trip or fuse rating directly in series. 2. A transformer primary feeder breaker and transformer secondary main breaker. For both of these exceptions, it would not matter which overcurrent device would open or if they both opened, because the protected circuit would be disconnected in either case.
2. Select Larger Line Side Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

Select a line side breaker with a larger frame size than would normally be required when just considering the load current requirements. Typically, the larger the molded-case circuit breaker frame size, the higher the magnetic trip adjustment or xed instantaneous override value. General rule: The magnetic trip setting or xed instantaneous override value must be higher than the calculated available fault current at load side circuit breaker. However, the larger the molded-case circuit breaker frame size, typically the higher the associated cost and arc ash energy on a fault condition.
Use Manufacturers Test Information

Circuit breaker manufacturers, such as Eaton Corporation, provide selective coordination tables between specic line side circuit breakers and load side circuit breakers, for various maximum values of fault current. (See Table 27.3-10 for 100% Selective Breaker Combinations.) These tables are based on circuit breaker test data. It should be noted that in many cases, the allowable fault current levels to achieve selective coordination is signicantly higher when using the manufacturers specic test information. This is attributed to the high-speed performance of modern molded-case circuit breakers that in some cases are marked as being current limiting: In addition, although some molded-case circuit breakers may not be formally marked as current limiting, they still begin to open before the rst 1/2-cycle peak, inserting arc impedance into the circuit, and thus still reduce the peak let-through current (lPI) with resulting lower l2t values. This current reduction by the downstream breaker reduces the current to a level below the instantaneous override of the upstream breaker, thus providing selective coordination for higher fault current levels. It should be noted that the test circuit used by manufacturers to conrm selective coordination must be known and reasonable. Eatons test circuit is similar to the test circuit used by UL 489. This test circuit allows for 4 feet of wire for the combination of wire from the load side of the upstream breaker through the downstream breaker to the point of the fault.
3. Select a Line Side Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

Use the combination of upstream low voltage power circuit breakers and downstream molded-case circuit breakers. The required combinations will vary depending on the available fault current. Most manufacturers have low voltage power circuit breakers available in two types. Type 1: Low voltage power circuit breakers with short-time current ratings available up to 100 kA and with interrupting ratings up to 100 kA. Type 2: For fault currents above 100 kA, low voltage power circuit breakers are available either as combination low voltage power circuit breakers with current limiters, or as true current limiting versions without current limiters. Both types have interrupting ratings up to 200 kA, but typically have reduced short-time current ratings.
Circuit Breaker Selection 1. Select Specic Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Selective coordination between upstream molded-case circuit breakers and downstream molded-case circuit breakers requires special consideration. There are various ways to obtain selective coordination, some applicable basic methods are as follows: For molded-case circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units, select a line-side breaker with a magnetic trip (instantaneous element) setting above the calculated available fault current level at the load side downstream breaker For molded-case circuit breakers with electronic trip units, select a line side breaker that has an adjustable instantaneous element or xed instantaneous override greater than the calculated available fault current level at the load side downstream breakers. In addition, the line side breaker short-time delay setting must be selected to allow the load side breaker adequate time to open and clear the fault
4. Select Both Line and Load Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
When usinng low voltage power circuit breakers, because of the high short-time current ratings available in all frame sizes, and their maximum 30-cycle short-time delay rating, there is generally no problem obtaining selective coordination between line and load side low voltage power circuit breakers. However, the higher the short delay setting, the higher the level of available arc ash energy should a fault occur directly on the load side of a given low voltage power circuit breaker.
0.1 Second Selective Coordination

Some applications and jurisdictions only mandate breaker selectivity for time periods longer than 0.1 seconds. This allows the designer greater exibility to balance the affects of arc ash risk, downtime risk, risk of equipment damage and so on. with selectivity. (See Table 27.3-11 for 0.1 Second Breaker Selectivity Combinations.)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 045

27.3-13
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Selective Coordination Combinations 100% Selective Coordination

For 100% Selective Coordination ApplicationsTable 27.3-10
The left side columns list the amperages of the downstream breaker grouped by the available breaker frames. The next columns on the right of the amperages indicate the type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or switchboard that the given downstream breaker is available in and whether the breaker may be used in that assembly as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker. The top rows of the table list the amperages of the upstream breaker grouped by the available breaker frames. The next row below indicates the type of trip unit needed: T/M = Thermal-Magnetic ETU = Electronic Trip Unit For ETUs, the next rows indicate the specic type of Digitrip RMS trip unit and/or OPTIM trip unit available. The minimum trip/maximum trip rows indicate the amperage range for which the indicated selectivity is valid. The next rows below the minimum/ maximum trip indicate the type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or switchboard that the given upstream breaker is available in and whether the breaker may be used in that assembly as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker. The values at the intersection of a row and column represent the maximum fault current at which selective coordination can be achieved between the chosen downstream and upstream circuit breakers.
Steps in Determining Selective Coordination Between Line and Load Side Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available fault current from all sources, at both the upstream and downstream breakers, by means of a short-circuit study, appropriate charts and/or formulas. Where both upstream and downstream breakers are connected to the same bus, this will be the same value. 2. Starting on the left at the top and moving downward, select the downstream Eaton breaker that has adequate Interrupting Capacity (IC), voltage rating and continuous amperage rating for the downstream breaker application. If the required interrupting rating, voltage rating or amperage rating is not shown in the table, continue downward to the row for the next larger breaker frame. 3. Move horizontally from the selected downstream breaker trip rating to the rst value of symmetrical rms fault current that meets or exceeds the value of rms fault current at the upstream breaker as determined from Step 1. 4. Proceed upward to read the possible upstream breaker frame. Check the minimum and maximum trip range indicated to ensure it meets the required upstream breaker trip rating. If the trip rating meets the requirements, this will be one of the possible upstream breakers that will selectively coordinate with the downstream breaker. If the indicated trip rating or trip range does not meet the requirements for the line side breaker, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
5. Once an upstream family of circuit breakers is determined that selectively coordinates, you can nd the specic breaker within that family that meets the required interrupting capacity by checking the breaker product overview tables on Pages 27.4-4 through 27.4-6. 6. OptionalOnce the selective combination of breakers is determined, you can determine the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard or switchboard assembly that can be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream breakers are to be in the same assembly, ensure that both devices are available in the same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Repeat the above steps for each pair of breakers in the system to quickly and easily select devices that will 100% selectively coordinate.
CA08104001E

Application Information100% Selective Coordination
Table 27.3-10. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 100% Selective Coordination Combinations
Upstream Breaker Breaker Family EG T/M 125A 125A 3E 3E F T/M 100A 100A F T/M 150A 200A F T/M 225A 225A F ETU 310+ 15A 80A F ETU 310+ 60A 160A F ETU 310+ 100A 225A J T/M 70A 125A
September 2011
Sheet 27 046
22 23 24 25
J T/M 150A 225A 3a 4, Swbd 3a
J T/M 250A 250A
Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard Main
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3E
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 50 70 100 100 15 30 50 60 100 125 15 40 100 225
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (10 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 3E 3E 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.8 2.8 2.3 2.3 1.8 1.8 2.8 2.8 2.3 2.3 1.8 1.8 2.8 2.3 1.8 1.0 1.0 0.7 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.0 0.7 1.0 0.7 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.0 3.4 3.4 3.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.4 3.4 3.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.3
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (22 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
GHB Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 14 kA at 480Y/277 Vac)
FCL Family Current Limiting (200 kA at 240 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac) EG Family (EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH)
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB(150A), EHD(100A), FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 047

27.3-15
Table 27.3-10. MCCB 100% Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 70 125 250 125 200 250 200 300 400 100 200 400 300 400 600 250 400 600 400 600 150 200 400 400 600 800 1200 350 2a, 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 4 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4 Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, S 4, S 4, S 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard EG T/M 125A 125A 3E 3E F T/M 100A 100A F T/M 150A 200A F T/M 225A 225A F ETU 310+ 15A 80A F ETU 310+ 60A 160A F ETU 310+ 100A 225A J T/M 70A 125A J T/M 150A 225A 3a 4, Swbd 3a J T/M 250A 250A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3E
J Family (JDB, JD, HJD, JDC)
LCL 250 Family Current Limiting
K Family (KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC)
L Family (LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC)
LG Family (LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC)
LG Current Limiting Family
LHH Family
N Family (ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC, NGS, NGH, NGC)
NHH Family
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family K T/M 100A 175A K T/M 200A 350A K T/M 400A 400A K ETU 310 550, 1050 70A 125A K ETU 310 550, 1050 125A 250A K ETU 310 550, 1050 200A 400A LD T/M 300A 350A LD T/M 400A 500A LD T/M 600A 600A
September 2011
Sheet 27 048
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
LD ETU 310 550, 1050 200A (OPTIM) 300A (Digi) 600A
Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 50 70 100 100 15 30 50 60 100 125 15 40 100 225 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 3E 3E 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a,4,Swbd 4, Swbd
2.5 2.0 2.0 1.2 1.2 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.2 1.2 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 1.6 2.0 1.6 5.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 5.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.5 2.5 2.8 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.3 10 8.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 10 8.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.2 4.2 4.2 5.0 5.6 5.6 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.0 5.0 3.2 3.2 3.0 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 3.6 3.6 3.6 6.0 4.6 4.6 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.2 3.2 10 8.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 10 8.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.2 4.2 4.2 6.5 5.6 5.6 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.0 4.2 4.0 4.0 10 9.0 9.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 9.0 9.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 7.4 10 10 20 15 10 10 10 10 10 8.3 7.0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 7.4 7.4 10 20 15 10 10 10 10 10 8.3 7.0 7.0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 15 15 12 12 12 10 35 35 18 18 18 18 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 10 10 10 7.4 7.4 10 35 35 18 18 18 18 12 12 12 12
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 049

27.3-17

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 70 125 250 125 200 250 200 300 400 100 200 400 300 400 600 250 400 600 400 600 150 200 400 400 600 800 1200 350 2a, 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 4 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4 Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 2.0 2.0 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.7 3.2 3.2 3.5 3.2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 3.7 3.5 4.2 3.7 3.2 4.2 3.7 6.0 6.0 4.2 4.2 8.0 7.0 7.0 4.2 3.2 3.2 4.2 3.7 12 12 10 17 17 17 17 17 17 10 10 10 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 12 12 10 17 17 17 17 17 17 10 10 10 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard K T/M 100A 175A K T/M 200A 350A K T/M 400A 400A K ETU 310 550, 1050 70A 125A K ETU 310 550, 1050 125A 250A K ETU 310 550, 1050 200A 400A LD T/M 300A 350A LD T/M 400A 500A LD T/M 600A 600A 4, Swbd LD ETU 310 550, 1050 200A (OPTIM) 300A (Digi) 600A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a,4,Swbd
LHH Family
NHH Family
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family LHH T/M 150A LHH T/M 175A 200A 4, Swbd LHH T/M 225A 400A LG ETU 310+ 100A 250A LG ETU 310+ 160A 400A LG ETU 310+ 250A 600A 4, Swbd 4, Swbd LG T/M
September 2011
Sheet 27 050
22 23 24 25
NHH ETU 310 150A 350A 4 4, Swbd
Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard Main
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A
600A 600A 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 50 70 100 100 15 30 50 60 100 125 15 40 100 225
1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 3E 3E 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 10 7.5 7.5 5.3 5.3 5.3 4.3 10 7.5 7.5 5.3 5.3 5.3 4.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 10 7.5 3.2 3.2 7.5 3.2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 10 27 14 10 10 10 10 14 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 14 14 14 12.7 12.7 30 65 35 18 18 18 18 22 16 14 12 10 9.0 9.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 9.0 9.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 4.0 4.0 3.6 3.6 3.6 6.0 4.6 4.6 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.2 3.2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14.4 14.4 14.4 14.4 14.4 12 12 12 12 12 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 10 20 15 10 10 10 10 10 8.3 7.0 7.0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 18 18 18 18 18 10 10 10 10 10 10 35 35 18 18 18 18 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 12.7 12.7 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 14 14 14 65 65 65 65 65 65
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 051

27.3-19

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 70 125 250 125 200 250 200 300 400 100 200 400 300 400 600 250 400 600 400 600 150 200 400 400 600 800 1200 350 2a, 3a, 4 3q, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 4 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4 Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3.2 7.6 7.6 5.0 12.7 10 10 12.7 10 10 10 10 2.8 2.8 2.8 3.5 8.0 7.0 7.0 4.2 3.2 3.2 4.2 3.7 12 12 10 17 17 17 15 15 15 10 10 10 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10 6.0 6.0 Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard LHH T/M 150A LHH T/M 175A 200A 4, Swbd LHH T/M 225A 400A LG ETU 310+ 100A 250A LG ETU 310+ 160A 400A LG ETU 310+ 250A 600A 4, Swbd 4, Swbd LG T/M 600A 600A 4, Swbd NHH ETU 310 150A 350A 4 4, Swbd
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
LHH Family
NHH Family
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family N ETU 310 550, 1050 N ETU 310 550, 1050 N ETU 310 550, 1050 N ETU 310 550, 1050 R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 800A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1000A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1200A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1600A
September 2011
Sheet 27 052
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1000A 2000A
R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1200A 2500A
Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 50 70 100 100 15 30 50 60 100 125 15 40 100 225 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 3E 3E 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3a,4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
400A 400A
400A 600A
400A 800A 4, Swbd
600A 1200A 4, Swbd
4, Swbd 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 42 42 35 35 50 42 35 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 42 42 35 35 50 42 35 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 42 42 35 35 50 42 35 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 42 42 35 35 50 42 35 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 65/14 200/65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB [150A], EHD [100A], FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 053

27.3-21

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit N ETU 310 550, 1050 N ETU 310 550, 1050 N ETU 310 550, 1050 N ETU 310 550, 1050 R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 800A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1000A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1200A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1600A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1000A 2000A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1200A 2500A
22 23 24 25 26

Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 70 125 250 125 200 250 200 300 400 100 200 400 300 400 600 250 400 600 400 600 150 200 400 400 600 800 1200 350 2a, 3a, 4 3q, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 4 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4 Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
400A 400A
400A 600A
400A 800A 4, Swbd
600A 1200A 4, Swbd
4, Swbd 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
27 28
Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard

35 30 30 65 65 65 30 30 22 18 10 10 35 30 30 65 65 65 30 30 30 22 18 18 18 18 35 30 30 65 65 65 30 30 30 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 25 18 18 35 30 30 65 65 65 30 30 30 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 25 25 18 18 18 12 12 12 35 30 30 65 65 65 65 65 65 42 40 35 25 22 20 25 22 20 35 30 25 22 20 16 16 35 30 30 65 65 65 65 65 65 42 35 25 22 20 25 22 20 35 30 25 22 20 16 16 65 65 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 42 40 35 25 22 20 25 22 20 35 30 25 22 20 16 16 16 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 42 40 35 25 22 20 25 22 20 50 42 25 22 20 16 16 16 16 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 42 35 30 50 35 30 50 42 50 35 30 22 22 22 18 22 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 42 35 30 50 35 30 50 42 50 35 30 25 25 25 18 25
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
LHH Family
NHH Family
CA08104001E

Application Information0.1 Sec Selective Coordination
September 2011
Sheet 27 054
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Selective Coordination Combinations0.1 Second Selective Coordination

For 0.1 Second Selective Coordination ApplicationsTable 27.3-11
The left side columns list the amperages of the downstream breaker grouped by the available breaker frames. The next columns on the right of the amperages indicate the type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/ or switchboard that the given downstream breaker is available in and whether the breaker may be used in that assembly as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker. The top rows of the table list the amperages of the upstream breaker grouped by the available breaker frames. The next row below indicates the type of trip unit needed: T/M = Thermal-Magnetic ETU = Electronic Trip Unit For ETUs, the next rows indicate the specic type of Digitrip RMS trip unit and/or OPTIM trip unit available. The minimum trip/maximum trip rows indicate the amperage range for which the indicated selectivity is valid. The next rows below the minimum/ maximum trip indicate the type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or switchboard that the given upstream breaker is available in and whether the breaker may be used in that assembly as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker. The letter T at the intersection of a row and column indicates that 0.1 second selective coordination can be achieve between the chosen downstream and upstream circuit breakers up to the maximum interrupting rating of the downstream breaker.
Steps in Determining 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Between Line and Load Side Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available fault current from all sources, at both the upstream and downstream breakers, by means of a short-circuit study, appropriate charts and/or formulas. Where both line and load breakers are connected to the same bus, this will be the same value. 2. Starting on the left at the top and moving downward, select the downstream Eaton breaker that has adequate Interrupting Capacity (IC), voltage rating and continuous amperage rating for the downstream breaker application. If the required interrupting rating, voltage rating, or amperage rating is not shown in the table, continue downward to the row for the next larger breaker frame. 3. Move horizontally from the selected downstream breaker trip rating to the rst column that indicates T. (T indicates that 0.1 second selective coordination can be achieved between the chosen downstream and upstream circuit breakers up to the maximum interrupting rating of the downstream breaker.) 4. Proceed upward to read the possible upstream breaker frame. Check the minimum and maximum trip range indicated to ensure it meets the required upstream breaker trip rating. If the trip rating meets the requirements, this will be one of the possible upstream breakers that will selectively coordinate with the downstream breaker. If the indicated trip rating or trip range does not meet the requirements for the line side breaker, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
5. Once an upstream family of circuit breakers is determined that selectively coordinates, you can nd the specic breaker within that family that meets the required interrupting capacity by checking the breaker product overview tables on Pages 27.4-4 through 27.4-6. 6. OptionalOnce the selective combination of breakers is determined, you can determine the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard or switchboard assembly that can be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream breakers are to be in the same assembly, ensure that both devices are available in the same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair of breakers in the system to quickly and easily select devices that will selectively coordinate to 0.1 seconds.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 055

27.3-23
Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 60 70 100 15 40 50 100 15 20 50 60 90 100 125 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard EG T/M 125A 125A 3E 3E F T/M 100A 100A F T/M 150A 150A F T/M 175A 225A F ETU 310+ 50A F ETU 310+ 80A F ETU 310+ 100A F ETU 310+ 150A 160A F ETU 310+ 200A F ETU 310+ 225A 225A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (240 Vac, 10 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (240 Vac, 22 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
FCL Family Current Limiting (200 kA at 240 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac)
EG Family (EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH)
Note: T = Selectivity to 0.1 seconds is achieved with available fault current values up to the full AIC rating of the breaker.
CA08104001E

Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)
Upstream Breaker Breaker Family EG T/M 125A 125A 3E 3E F T/M 100A 100A F T/M 150A 150A F T/M 175A 225A F ETU 310+ 50A F ETU 310+ 80A F ETU 310+ 100A F ETU 310+ 150A 160A
September 2011
Sheet 27 056
22 23 24 25
F ETU 310+ 200A
F ETU 310+ 225A 225A
Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Branch 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard Main
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
15 40 70 100 125 150 225 70 100 125 175 225 250 150 200 225 250 225 275 300 400 100 150 200 250 300 400 300 350 400 500 600 300 350 400 500 600 400 600 800 1200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 057

27.3-25

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 60 70 100 15 40 50 60 40 100 15 40 50 100 15 20 50 60 90 100 125 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard J T/M 70A J T/M 150A 3a 4, Swbd 3a J T/M 250A K T/M 100A K T/M 200A K T/M 400A K ETU 310 550, 1050 70A 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E K ETU 310 550, 1050 100A K ETU 310 550, 1050 125A K ETU 310 550, 1050 150A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
GD Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 22 kA at 80 Vac)
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family J T/M 70A J T/M 150A 3a 4, Swbd 3a J T/M 250A K T/M 100A K T/M 200A K T/M 400A K ETU 310 550, 1050 70A 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E K ETU 310 550, 1050 100A
September 2011
Sheet 27 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
K ETU 310 550, 1050 125A
K ETU 310 550, 1050 150A
Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 40 70 100 125 150 225 70 100 125 175 225 250 150 200 225 250 225 275 300 400 100 150 200 250 300 400 300 350 400 500 600 300 350 400 500 600 400 600 800 1200 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Branch 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
J Family
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 059

27.3-27

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 60 70 100 15 40 50 60 40 100 15 40 50 100 15 20 50 60 90 100 125 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard K ETU 310 550, 1050 200A K ETU 310 550, 1050 225A K ETU 310 550, 1050 250A 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E K ETU 310 550, 1050 300A K ETU 310 550, 1050 400A L T/M 300A L T/M 400A 4, Swbd L T/M 600A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family K ETU 310 550, 1050 200A K ETU 310 550, 1050 225A K ETU 310 550, 1050 250A 4, Swbd 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E K ETU 310 550, 1050 300A K ETU 310 550, 1050 400A L T/M 300A
September 2011
Sheet 27 060
22 23 24 25
L T/M 400A 4, Swbd
L T/M 600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 4, Swbd
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
15 40 70 100 125 150 225 70 100 125 175 225 250 150 200 225 250 225 275 300 400 100 150 200 250 300 400 300 350 400 500 600 300 350 400 500 600 400 600 800 1200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
J Family
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 061

27.3-29

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 60 70 100 15 40 50 60 40 100 15 40 50 100 15 20 50 60 90 100 125 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard L ETU 310 300A L ETU 310 400A 4, Swbd L ETU 310 600A LG ETU LG ETU LG ETU LG ETU N ETU N ETU 310(+) 600A PRL4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd
22
310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+) 250A 300A 400A 500A 400A 600A 3a, 3E, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
550, 1050 550, 1050
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family L ETU 310 300A L ETU 310 400A 4, Swbd L ETU 310 600A LG ETU LG ETU LG ETU LG ETU N ETU
September 2011
Sheet 27 062
22 23 24 25
N ETU 310(+) 600A PRL4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd
310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+) 250A 300A 400A 500A 400A 600A 3a, 3E, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
550, 1050 550, 1050
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
15 40 70 100 125 150 225 70 100 125 175 225 250 150 200 225 250 225 275 300 400 100 150 200 250 300 400 300 350 400 500 600 300 350 400 500 600 400 600 800 1200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
J Family
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 063

27.3-31

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 60 70 100 15 40 50 60 40 100 15 40 50 100 15 20 50 60 90 100 125 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard N ETU 310(+) N ETU 310(+) R ETU 310 R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1000A Swbd Swbd R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1200A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1000A 1200A PRL4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd 800A
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family N ETU 310(+) N ETU 310(+) R ETU 310 R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1000A Swbd Swbd R Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip)
September 2011
Sheet 27 064
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1200A
550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 800A 1000A 1200A PRL4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd 800A
Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 40 70 100 125 150 225 70 100 125 175 225 250 150 200 225 250 225 275 300 400 100 150 200 250 300 400 300 350 400 500 600 300 350 400 500 600 400 600 800 1200 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Branch 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
J Family
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 065

27.3-33

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Main 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 20 30 60 70 100 15 40 50 60 40 100 15 40 50 100 15 20 50 60 90 100 125 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 2a 2a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 1a, 2a, 3a 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Branch 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 1a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 2a, 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Sub-Feed T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1600A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 2000A Swbd Swbd R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 2500A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Upstream Breaker Breaker Family R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 1600A R ETU 310 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 2000A Swbd Swbd R ETU 310 Type Trip Unit Digitrip RMS Trip Unit OPTIM Trip Unit Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) Maximum Trip (Frame) Pow-R-Line: Main Pow-R-Line: Branch Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed Branch 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard Main
September 2011
Sheet 27 066
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 2500A
15 40 70 100 125 150 225 70 100 125 175 225 250 150 200 225 250 225 275 300 400 100 150 200 250 300 400 300 350 400 500 600 300 350 400 500 600 400 600 800 1200 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
J Family
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 067

Application InformationArc Flash
27.3-35
Electric Arc Flash Hazards

There have been several recent codes and standards regulations that relate to the fundamental dangers of arc ash energy. The following provides a brief overview. The NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces presents numerous requirements for a wide range of topics such as electrical equipment, Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), lockout/tagout practices and safety training. Where it has been determined that work will be performed within the ash protection boundary, NFPA 70E requires an analysis to determine and document the ash hazard incident energy exposure of a worker. This document also contains some of the initial methods developed in order to quantify the incident energy. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) is the governmental enforcement agency whose mission is to save lives, prevent injuries and protect the health of Americas workers. They refer to their standard Code of Federal Regulations, CFR 1910.333, Selection and Use of Work Practices, which states Safety-related work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be energized. This general statement provides the basis for OSHAs citing and insisting upon compliance with the arc ash requirements contained in NFPA 70E. The 2002 edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70, contained the rst arc ash hazard references by adding the following new requirement as Article 110.16. Flash Protection. Switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance while energized, shall be eld marked to warn qualied persons of potential electric arc ash hazards. The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualied persons before examination adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.
3.50 (88.9)
22 23
DANGER
ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD
Will cause severe injury or death. Turn OFF ALL power before opening. Follow ALL requirements in NFPA 70E for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment.
Note to installer: Apply label as required by 2002 NEC Art. 110.16. If desired, additional labels may be purchased through your local EATON representative.
24
2.75 (69.8) 3.25 (82.5)
25 26 27
0.50 (12.7)
28 29
Figure 27.3-5. Electric Arc Flash Hazard FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E-2000, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, provides assistance in determining severity of potential exposure, planing safe work practices, and selecting personal protective equipment. FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998, Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for the design of safety signs and labels for application to products. There were numerous proposals for the 2005 NEC that would expand this requirement to indicate the incident energy in calories per square centimeter for a worker at a distance of 18 in. Adoption of this requirement would indicate the need for a standardized method for determining incident energy. The IEEE 1584-2002, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Calculations , provides a method for the calculation of incident energy and arc ash protection boundaries. It presents formulas for numerically quantifying these values. The IEEE 1584 Guide also includes an Excel spreadsheet Arc Flash Hazard Calculator that performs the actual calculations using the formulas stated in the Guide. The hazard analysis cited in NFPA 70E requires calculations of the incident energy available at a given location. This energy is calculated in cal/cm 2 and, based on amount of energy available, a risk category is assigned, and based on that risk category, certain levels of PPE are required. These risk categories are designed to limit worker injuries to second degree burns that occur at energy levels of 1.2 cal/cm 2. The calculations have two components: 1) magnitude fault current and 2) duration of the fault. The specics of the formulas are beyond the scope of this discussion, but several factors included in the calculations need understanding. Faster clearing times signicantly reduce the incident arc ash energy. The third factor affecting arc ash incident energy exposure to personnel is the distance the person is from the arc ash location.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Application InformationArc Flash
September 2011
Sheet 27 068
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Selected models of Eatons moldedcase circuit breakers are available with an Arcash Reduction Maintenance System to provide reduced levels of incident arc ash energy when put in the Maintenance Mode. The Arcash Reduction Maintenance System is available on Magnum power circuit breakers, NRX power circuit breakers and select Series G moldedcase circuit breakers. In Series G molded-case breakers, the trip unit combines Eatons Arcash Reduction Maintenance System with the Digitrip 310+ electronic trip unit, allowing for the ability to place the trip unit in Maintenance Mode to reduce potential arc ash energy. This is done by a dedicated instantaneous sensing circuit with settings of 2.5 and 4.0 times the current rating of the trip unit. This dedicated analog sensing circuit delivers breaker clearing times that are faster than instantaneous by eliminating microprocessor processing latencies. This provides superior arc ash reduction to competitors systems that simply lower the standard instantaneous pickup set point. When the Eaton Arcash Reduction Maintenance System is enabled, the resulting reduced arc ash energy allows for reduced PPE, which improves worker comfort and mobility. With the Arcash Reduction Maintenance System set at 2.5X or 4.0X, it reduces incident energy levels to allow PPE Category 0 for currents of 2.5X or 4.0X the breaker ampere rating or greater. The initial setting of each Arcash Reduction Maintenance System trip unit is determined by completing a power system analysis, to assess available fault current at the circuit breaker. Based on that analysis, the Maintenance Mode protection settings are dened, achieving a reduced level of arc ash energy. The Maintenance Mode is then activated by adjusting the trip units instantaneous setting to desired Maintenance Mode levels determined by the power analysis.
1000
Current in Amperes 1 10 100 1K 10K 1000
100
480V Feeder Magnum DS, RMS 520M Trip 1600.0A Plug 1600.0A Setting Phase LTPU (0.4-1.0 x P) 1 (1600A) LTD (2-24 Sec.) 12 STPU (2-12 x LTPU) 6 (9600A) STD (0.1-0.5 Sec.) 0.2 (l 2t In) INST (2-12 x P) M1 (12) (19,200A)
100
10
480V Feeder ARMS Trip 1600.0A Plug 1600.0A Settings ARMS ARMS 2.5 (4000A)
10
Time in Seconds
1 Motor 700.0 hp
0.10 Eatons Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Gives Clearing Times That Are Faster Than Instantaneous
0.10
0.01 0.5 1 10 100 1K
0.01 10K
Figure 27.3-6. Time Current Curve
Series G MCCB Features

Close-Up of LG Trip Unit
Available with ALSI and ALSIG electronic trip unit Dedicated analog trip circuit for faster than instantaneous tripping Superior arc ash reduction over systems that simply lower the standard instantaneous pickup set point Adjustable pickup settings (2.5x, 4.0x) Local or remote initiation Maintenance Mode LED
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 069

Application InformationUnusual Environmental Conditions
27.3-37
Unusual Environmental Conditions

Trip Unit Temperatures
Eatons thermal-magnetic circuit breakers are temperature sensitive. At ambient temperatures below 40C (104F), circuit breakers carry more current than their continuous current rating. Nuisance tripping is not a problem under these lower temperature conditions, although consideration should be given to closer protection coordination to compensate for the additional current carrying capability. In addition, the actual mechanical operation of the breaker could be affected if the ambient temperature is signicantly below the 40C standard. For ambient temperatures above 40C, breakers will carry less current than their continuous current rating. This condition promotes nuisance tripping and can create unacceptable temperature conditions at the terminals. Under this condition, the circuit breaker should be recalibrated for the higher ambient temperature. Electronic trip units are insensitive to ambient temperatures within a certain temperature range. The temperature range for most Eaton electronic trip units is 20 to 55C (4 to 131F). However, at very low ambient temperatures, the mechanical parts of the breaker could require special treatment, such as the use of special lubricants. If the ambient temperature exceeds 40C signicantly, damage to the electronic circuitry and other components could result. Eaton includes temperature protective circuits in its designs to initiate a tripping operation and provide self-protection, should the internal temperature rise to an unsafe level.
Table 27.3-12. Derating for Non-Compensated Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Calibrated for 40C
Breaker Ampere Rating at 40C Ampere Rating 25C (77F) 17 22 32 33 41 45 55 66 77 99 110 137 165 79 102 115 140 171 200 230 252 281 121 145 188 210 243 255 294 364 412 471 330 385 440 550 660 332 388 444 495 550 660 770 880 50C (122F) 13 18 21 27 32 34 46 56 65 84 94 116 138 14 19 24 28 33 38 43 48 57 67 76 86 96 63 81 89 114 134 156 178 205 227 90 116 132 159 180 212 230 270 322 368 276 325 372 468 564 277 322 368 418 468 564 658 754 60C (140F) 11 16 18 24 27 29 42 52 60 78 87 105 125 13 18 22 27 31 36 40 45 54 63 72 81 91 55 71 76 102 116 134 153 183 201 79 106 111 141 157 198 208 236 291 333 252 301 340 435 525 252 292 334 383 435 525 613 704
Humidity/MoistureCorrosion
Molded-case circuit breakers are suited for operation in 0 to 95% noncondensing humidity environments. As is the case with all electrical equipment, application in a condition or environment above this humidity level should be avoided. The ability of molded-case circuit breakers to perform their protective function is negatively affected by exposure to condensation or water, as well as the minerals, particles and contaminants that may be present in them. Prolonged humidity exposure and/or the presence of corrosive elements can result in damage to key operating components and/or severely compromise the breakers operational integrity. It may adversely impact breaker contact condition and reduce the insulation and dielectric properties of the circuit breaker. In electronic trip circuit breakers, functionality may be similarly compromised by these conditions. To prevent these effects, the breaker should be protected by the proper NEMA rated enclosure for its installation environment, and kept dry through the use of space heaters in the enclosure. If such operating conditions cannot be met, special treatment of the circuit breaker should be considered to minimize the possibility of operational problems. Most Eaton molded-case circuit breaker cases are molded from glass polyester that does not support the growth of fungus. In addition, a special moistureand fungus-resisting treatment is recommended for any parts that are susceptible to the growth of fungus.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
F-Frame/EG-Frame
15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 90 100 125 150
GD-Frame
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100
J-Frame/JG-Frame
70 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250
K-Frame
100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400
Altitude
Low voltage circuit breakers must be progressively derated for voltage, current carrying and interrupting rating at altitudes above 6000 ft (1829m). The thinner air at higher altitudes reduces cooling and dielectric characteristics compared to the denser air found at lower altitudes. Refer to Eaton for additional application details.
Circuit Breaker Temperatures

The temperature of the air surrounding a circuit breaker is the ambient temperature. In the mid-1960s, industry standards were changed to make all standard breakers calibrated to a 40C ambient temperature. For any ambient temperature application above or below 40C, it is recommended that the breaker manufacturer be consulted as to any possible re-rating, recalibration or special procedures, before the circuit breaker is selected and applied.
L-Frame/LG-Frame
300 350 400 500 600
Shock/Vibration
Where high shock is an anticipated condition, hi-shock Navy MIL-SPEC type breakers are recommended. Molded-case circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specications, several of which require vibration testing: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46, ABSAmerican Bureau of Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489 Supplement SA Marine, UL 489 Supplemental SB Naval, ABS/NVR, Lloyds of London and DNV. See Page 27.2-20 for additional information on Navy MIL-SPEC and marine circuit breakers.
M-Frame
300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
CA08104001E

Application InformationReverse-Feed Applications
September 2011
Sheet 27 070
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Reverse-Feed Application of Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers may be applied in panelboard, switchboard or motor control center installations where there may occasionally be multiple sources of power, as shown in Figure 27.3-7. For example, these may be applications that require high uptime and high reliability requirements. For these requirements, permanent, xed mount or portable electrical generator systems, with an appropriate automatic transfer switching system, are made available to supplement the normal utility power supply source. In other instances, the second power source may be from a so-called alternate energy source, such as that derived from solar photovoltaic or from wind power electric systems. Similarly, these alternate energy sources are also typically connected as a supplement to the normal utility power sources. As electrical load demand conditions change, the user may switch between using power from the normal utility source to the alternate power source, and vice versa. Whenever this switch in power source occurs, the terminals of the circuit breaker that the power is connected to will have been reversed. This reversal in the way that power is connected to a circuit breaker is called reversefeed. Reverse-feed (or back feed) refers to a way that the conductors supplying current are connected to a circuit breaker.
This Circuit Breaker May Be Reverse-Fed Depending on Its Connection to Either of the Utility Power Sources Utility #1 Utility #2
In other applications where there is a single power source, circuit breakers may be mounted in an electrical enclosure where the cables from the power source are fed to the bottom of the enclosure. In this case, it may be a matter of convenience for the installation to simply connect the power source conductors to the terminals at the bottom of the circuit breaker that are closest to the incoming power supply conductors. This connection of the power supply source to the circuit breakers bottom terminals will also result in power being applied in a reversefeed manner. There are different classications and types of circuit breakers that exist, and they should be carefully considered when used in reversefeed applications described above. Depending on the type of circuit breaker, as listed below, reversefeeding of that circuit breaker may or may not be suitable for that application.
Testing Requirements
Per UL 489, Paragraph 7.1.1.18: Except for single-pole circuit breakers tested singly, if a circuit breaker is not marked Line and Load, one sample of each set tested, or one additional sample, shall be connected with the line and load connections reversed during the overload, endurance and interrupting tests. This UL test requirement species that for circuit breakers and molded-case switches to be UL Listed for reversefeed applications, samples shall be tested with the line and load terminals reverse-fed, as shown in Figure 27.3-8, and that the test results shall be the same as those of normally fed circuit breakers. Depending on the design conguration and construction, the circuit breaker may or may not be affected by the application of power in a reversefeed connection during these tests.
Circuit Breaker Classications

Low voltage circuit breakers fall into two basic classications of design. 1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) per UL 489 Standard 2. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (LVPCBs) per UL 1066 Standard
Top Side of Circuit Breaker
Power Source
Load Connected to Top Side of Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Standards Requirements
UL 489Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
Per UL 489, there are clear test performance and marking requirements for circuit breakers and molded-case switches that are UL listed as being suitable for reverse-feed applications. UL 489 requires reverse-feed circuit breakers to meet certain construction requirements, and to be tested and marked accordingly, as follows: 1. Tested per UL 489, Paragraph 7.1.1.18 2. Markings per UL 489, Paragraph 9.1.1.13
Power Source Connected to Bottom Side of Circuit Breaker Load Bottom Side of Circuit Breaker
Figure 27.3-8. Circuit Breaker Connections for Reverse-Feed Testing per UL 489
52 NC NO Bus #1 52 52 Load
52 NC Bus #2
52 Load
Figure 27.3-7. Circuit Breaker Fed from Multiple Power Supply Sources
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 071

27.3-39
Marking Requirements
Per UL 489 Paragraph 9.1.1.13: Circuit breakers shall be marked Line and Load unless the construction and test results are acceptable with the line and load connections reversed. This marking requirement species that UL listed circuit breakers and molded-case switches shall be marked with the word Line on one end of the circuit breaker and the word Load on the other end, as shown in Figure 27.3-9, if they are unable to successfully meet the reverse-feed test requirements per Paragraph 7.1.1.18 of UL 489. Conversely, a UL listed circuit breaker does not have to be marked with Line and Load if it successfully meets the reveried test requirements.
MCCB General Rule

Cannot be reverse-fed: When a UL listed molded-case circuit breaker and a molded-case switch (not shown) are marked showing Line and Load, the power supply conductors must be connected to the end marked Line. These devices cannot be reverse-fed Can be reverse-fed: If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed moldedcase circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be connected to either end. These devices are suitable for reversefeed applications
PCB General Rule
Can be reverse-fed: Low voltage power circuit breakers that are listed per UL 1066 may be reverse-fed
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Special Application Considerations Circuit Breakers With Integral Ground-Fault Protection

Many of Eatons UL listed molded-case and low voltage power circuit breakers have design options and schemes that allow for the detection and interruption of unwanted groundfault currents. In these ground-fault protection schemes, the means for ground-fault detection are either integral to the circuit breaker or externally mounted. The ground-fault detection means commonly consist of current sensors and control logic circuitry that may be connected in various congurations as follows: 1. Separate current sensors that monitor each phase circuit and the neutral circuit conductors, as shown in Figure 27.3-10 2. One current sensor that monitors all phases and the neutral circuit conductors together (not shown) 3. One current sensor that monitors the ground circuit conductor (not shown) The interruption of ground-fault currents is done by the circuit breaker opening all three-phase conductor circuits at the same time, in response to a trip signal from the ground-fault detection means. Therefore, whenever an unwanted ground-fault condition exists, a UL listed circuit breaker with ground-fault protection will detect and interrupt the ground-fault current ow.
UL 1066Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures

As part of the standard test programs required by UL 1066 (referenced to ANSI/IEEE C37.50-1989) for low voltage power circuit breakers, tests are conducted that, when successfully completed, demonstrate that the circuit breaker may be applied in a reverse-feed conguration. These are mandatory tests that are done as part of the short-circuit current tests per Table 3 in Sequence II (Power-Operated Circuit Breaker with Dual Trip Device) of ANSI/IEEE C37.50-1989. As part of this sequence, tests are to be performed with opposite terminals energized.
Figure 27.3-9. Circuit Breakers Showing Line and Load Markings, per UL 489
During these specied sequences of tests, the circuit breaker is energized in a reverse-feed conguration, and the satisfactory completion of these tests demonstrates their ability to be used in reverse-feed applications. Therefore, all low voltage power circuit breakers that are listed per UL 1066 may be reverse-fed.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 27 072
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Bottom Side of Circuit Breaker
Electronic Trip Unit
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with External Ground-Fault/ Earth Leakage Accessories

Top Side of Circuit Breaker Power Source Neutral Circuit Conductor
There are ground-fault current detection schemes that require sensitivity down to relatively low current levels, typically as low as 30 mA. These products are called ground-fault/earth leakage modules.
Circuit Breaker
Neutral Circuit Current Sensor Three-Phase Current Sensors Control Logic Circuitry
Load
Ground-Fault Detection Means
Figure 27.3-10. Circuit Breaker with Integral Ground-Fault Protection In reverse-feed applications, while the primary phase currents and the ground currents have been interrupted with the opening of the circuit breaker, voltage at the circuit breakers terminals may or may not cause damage to the components of the ground-fault protection system. If components in the detection means or control logic circuitry of the ground-fault (or the phase current) protection system may be damaged by reverse-feed connections, then the circuit breaker must be marked accordingly. In this case, where the circuit breaker with ground-fault protection is not suitable for reverse-feed applications, the circuit breakers terminals are marked with Line and Load to indicate the required terminal connection points for the power supply source (Line) and the load (Load). Conversely, there are Eaton circuit breaker design congurations where the components in the ground-fault (or phase current) protection system are unaffected by reverse-feed connections, and are suitable for those applications. These circuit breakers are not marked with Line and Load, to indicate that they are suitable for reverse-feed connections the power supply source may be connected to the terminals at either end of the circuit breaker. A circuit breaker with integral ground-fault protection may be reverse fed if it is not marked with Line and Load. The UL listed mark that is applied on this circuit breaker with integral ground-fault protection indicates that it has successfully met the UL test requirements for reversefeed applications. Figure 27.3-11. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with Earth Leakage Modules Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with UL listed ground-fault (earth leakage) modules that are typically mounted external to the bottom end of the circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 27.3-11. These modules are self-contained with a current sensor and logic control circuitry all located inside the product. Depending on the design conguration and construction of these earth leakage modules, some of these products may or may not be suitable for reverse-feed applications. Each product is marked with a label containing text that describes their suitability for reverse-feed applications, as shown in Figure 27.3-12 and Figure 27.3-13.
General Rule
Cannot be reverse-fed: When either a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing Line and Load, or the earth leakage module is marked as unsuitable for reverse-feed, the power supply conductors MUST be connected to the Line end of the circuit breaker. These devices cannot be reverse-fed Can be reverse-fed: If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed circuit breaker, and the earth leakage module is marked as suitable for reverse-feed, the power supply conductors may be connected to either end. These devices are suitable for reverse-feed applications
General Rule
Cannot be reverse-fed: When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing Line and Load, the power supply conductors must be connected to the end marked Line. These devices cannot be reverse-fed Can be reverse-fed: If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be connected to either end. These devices are suitable for reverse-feed applications
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 073

27.3-41
Miniature Circuit Breakers with Integral Ground-Fault and Arcing-Fault Protection

Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with UL listed ground-fault current protection levels that are able to detect and trip on ground-fault currents as low as 5 mA for personnel protection, and at 30 mA for sensitive electrical equipment. Eaton also has circuit breakers that provide low-level 30 mA arcing-fault protection in residential applications. The constructions of these circuit breakers are typically in a single-pole or two-pole conguration, and with continuous ampere ratings of 15100A. Due to their relative small size and low continuous ampere ratings, these types of molded-case circuit breakers are commonly called miniature circuit breakers. The 5 mA designs for personnel protection are known as ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI) The 30 mA designs for equipment protection are known as ground-fault equipment protectors (GFEP) The circuit breaker designs for arcing-fault protection are known as arc-fault circuit interrupters (AFCI)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 27.3-12. Earth Leakage Module Suitable for Reverse-Feed Applications
While the overall performance of the circuit breaker is governed by UL 489 for molded-case circuit breakers, the specic 5 mA personnel protection performance is per UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters, and the specic 30 mA performance for sensitive electrical equipment is per UL 1053, ground-fault sensing and relaying equipment. The AFCI performance requirements are governed by UL 1699. For these AFCI, GFCI and GFEP ground-fault protection designs, when the circuit breaker is closed, the control power for the groundfault control logic circuitry is typically connected to the Load side of the circuit breaker. Whenever a ground-fault condition occurs, the detection means and control logic circuit will operate and cause the circuit breakers main current-carrying contacts to open without any intentional delay, and will interrupt the ow of the fault current. This instantaneous trip minimizes electrical shock hazards to personnel in GFCIs, and minimizes the ow of potentially damaging currents to sensitive electrical equipment in GFEP applications. In addition to the interruption of the ground-fault current, the detection means and control logic circuitry also rely on the main current-carrying contacts to open and disconnect the currents that ow though the detection and trip system.
Figure 27.3-13. Earth Leakage Modules Not Suitable for Reverse-Feed Applications
Note: The only acceptable combination of circuit breakers and earth leakage modules that should be used in reverse-feed applications is where BOTH 1) the circuit breaker is not marked Line and Load, and 2) the earth leakage module is not marked Line and Load, and not marked Do not reverse-feed.
CA08104001E

If power is applied to the Line terminals, and the load is connected to the Load terminals in a normal feed conguration, whenever the circuit breaker trips and the main current-carrying contacts open, the ground-fault current is interrupted and control power is also disconnected from the detection means and control logic circuitry of the ground-fault system, as shown in Figure 27.3-14.
September 2011
Sheet 27 074
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Power Source Top Side of Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Contacts Open Circuit Breaker
Power Source
Ground-Fault Detection Means and Control Logic Circuitry Neutral Circuit Conductor Circuit Breaker Ground-Fault Detection Means and Control Logic Circuitry Voltage Still Present Ground Bottom Side of Circuit Breaker Control Power Connection for Control Logic Circuitry
Circuit Breaker Contacts Open
Load
No Voltage Present Bottom Side of Circuit Breaker Load
Control Power Connection for Control Logic Circuitry Ground
Figure 27.3-15. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker Connected in Reverse-Feed Conguration Depending on the design conguration, the ground-fault detection means and control logic circuit of AFCI, GFCI, and GFEP miniature circuit breakers may be affected by this reverse-feed application. If the AFCI, GFCI and GFEP circuit breaker is not able to be connected and applied in a reverse-feed conguration, the terminals will be marked Line and Load.
Figure 27.3-14. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker Connected in Normal Feed Conguration When the circuit breaker trips and control power is disconnected from the control logic circuitry, no further current ows through the control logic circuitry to ground. On the other hand, if power is applied to the Load terminals, whenever the AFCI, GFCI, and GFEP circuit breaker trips and the main current-carrying contacts open, the ground-fault current is interrupted, but control power continues to be applied to the ground-fault detection and control logic circuit of the ground-fault system, as shown in Figure 27.3-15. The presence of the control power will cause current to continually ow through the control logic circuitry. The effect of this continuous current may or may not degrade the performance of the control logic circuitry over time.
General Rule
Cannot be reverse-fed: When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing Line and Load, the power supply conductors MUST be connected to the end marked Line. These devices cannot be reverse-fed Can be reverse-fed: If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be connected to either end. These devices are suitable to be reverse-feed applications
Summary
Molded-case circuit breakers, UL listed per UL 489, have specic test and marking requirements to demonstrate that the circuit breaker is suitable for reverse-feed applications. The capabilities of UL 1066 listed low voltage power circuit breakers for reverse-feed applications are veried as part of standard circuit breaker test sequences. If a circuit breaker and molded-case switch are marked Line and Load, it is not suitable for reverse-feed applications Only circuit breakers and molded-case switches without Line and Load markings are suitable for reverse-feed applications
Note: Warningfor all types of Eatons circuit breakers, do not connect the power source to circuit breaker terminals marked Load.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 075

27.3-43
Table 27.3-13. Reverse-Feed ApplicationsEatons Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Types Suitable for Reverse Feed Thermal-Magnetic QUICKLAG and Residential Breakers BW, BWH, BWHH, CSR, CSH CA, CAH, CC, CCH, CHH EB, EHB FB, HFB, FB TRI-PAC JA JB LBB, DA LAB LC, HLC, etc. MC, HMC, etc.; MDS NC, HNC, etc. PC, PCC, PCCG, PCF, PCCF, etc. SPB FCL, LCL SPCB GB, GHB, GC, GHC, GD, GD-K EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC EHD, EHD-K, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FD-K FDE, HFDE, FDCE JD, HJD, JDC sealed breakers JDB, HJDB, JDCB, JDB-K, HJDB-K DK, DK-K KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD sealed breakers KDB, HKDB, KDCB, CKDB, CHKDB KDB-K, HKDB-K LD, HLD, LDC sealed breakers LDB, HLDB, LDCB, CLDB, CHLDB, CLDCB LDB-K, HLDB-K MDL, HMDL sealed breakers MDLB, HMDLB, CMDLB, CHMDLB MDLB-K, HMDLB-K ND, HND, NDC, NDU, CND, CHND, CNDC ND-K, HND-K, NGS, NGH, NGC, NGU, NGK RD, RDC, CRD, CRDC, RD-K, RD-N, RGH, RGC, RGK E125, EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH, EGC E125K, EGK switches J250, JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX sealed breakers J250K, JGK switches L630, LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX sealed breakers L630K, LGK switches Magnum DS, Magnum SB, DS, DSII Series NRX Circuit Breaker Types Not Suitable for Reverse Feed GFCI, GFEP AFCI BABRP, BABSP, BRRP, CLRP GHBS, GBHS, GHQRSP KA, HKA KB, HKB LA, HLA LB, HLB MA, HMA, MD NB, HNB PB LA, NB, PB TRI-PACs JD, HJD, JDC, KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD LD, HLD, LDC MDL, HMDL JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX frames with interchangeable trip unit LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU with interchangeable trip unit GMCP HMCP, HMCPE ELFD, ELHFD, ELFDC ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC ELJD, ELHJD, ELJDC GHBGFEP, GHCGFEP
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
27.3-44 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

September 2011
Sheet 27 076
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 077
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Circuit Breaker Selection Data

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker Overview Tables
27.4-1
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22 23 24 25 26
Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out
Circuit Breaker Type HQP HQP HQP QPHW QPHW QPHW QHPX QHPX QHPX QHPW QHPW QHPW QPGF QPGF QPHGF QPHGF QPGFEP QPGFEP QPHGFEP BABRSP BABRSP BRRP BRRP CLRP CLRP BAB BAB BAB BABRP BABRP QBAF QBCAF QBHW QBHW QBHW QBHAF QBHCAF HBAX HBAX HBAX HBAW HBAW HBAW QBGF QBGF QBHGF QBHGF

27
Vdc Ratings 240 10,000 22,000 42,000 65,000 10,000 22,000 42,000 65,000 2448 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 62.5
Circuit Breaker Type Code
Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C 1070 10125 10100 1570 15125 15100 1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1520 1540 1550 1530 1550 1540 1550 1530 1530 1530 1530 1530 1530 1530 1070 10125 10100 1530 1530 1520 1520 1570 15125 15100 1520 1520 1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1520 1540 1550 1530 1530
Number of Poles 1 2 2, 3 1 2 2, 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2, 3 1 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 1
Vac
Vdc
Federal Spec. W-C-375b 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 12a 10b, 11b, 12b 14a 14a 14b 15a 15a 15b 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 12a 10b, 11b, 12b 14a 14a 14b 15a 15a 15b 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Vac Ratings 120 10,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 120/240 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 10,000 22,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 10,000 22,000 80 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
P P P P P P P P P P P P P, GF P, GF P, GF P, GF P, GFEP P, GFEP P, GFEP B B P P P P B B B B B B, AF B, AF, GF B B B B, AF B, AF B B B B B B B, GF B, GF B, GF B, GF
120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 120 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120 120/240 120 120/240
24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing. Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed. 62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
CA08104001E
27.4-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures Circuit Breaker Selection Data
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out (Continued)
Circuit Breaker Type QBGFEP QBGFEP QBHGFEP QBHGFEP QC QC QC QCD QCD QCF QCF QCF QCR QCR QCR QCHW QCHW QCHW QHCX QHCX QHCX QHCW QHCW QHCW QCGF QCGF QCHGF QCHGF QCGFEP QCGFEP QCHGFEP QCHGFEP

September 2011
Sheet 27 078
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Circuit Breaker Type Code
Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C 1540 1550 1530 1530 1070 10100 10100 1060 10100 1060 1520 1530 1060 1520 1530 1570 15100 15100 1570 15100 15100 1530 1530 1520 1540 1550 1530 1530 1540 1550 1530 1530
Number of Poles 1 2 1 2 1 2 2, 3, 4 1, 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1 2 2, 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Vac
Vdc
Federal Spec. W-C-375b 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 12a 10b, 11b, 12b 14a 14a 14b 15a 15a 15b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Vac Ratings 120 10,000 22,000 22,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 120/240 10,000 22,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 10,000 22,000 10,000 22,000 240 10,000 22,000 42,000 65,000 Vdc Ratings 2448 5000 5000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 62.5
80 5000 5000 5000 5000
B, GFEP B, GFEP B, GFEP B, GFEP C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C, GF C, GF C, GF C, GF C, GFEP C, GFEP C, GFEP C, GFEP
120 120/240 120 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240
24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80
5000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
5000
5000
5000
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing. Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed. 62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 079

27.4-3
Table 27.4-2. Factory Modications

Modication Type Shunt trip (requires one extra pole space on right side) 120, 208, 240 Vac 12, 24, 48 Vac/Vdc Draws 2.6A at 120V Draws 11A at 24 Vdc Special calibration (50C) Shock testing Freeze testing Moisture-fungus treatment Marine duty Naval duty 400 Hz calibration Specic DC ratings (breaker marked with a maximum Vdc rating)
Breaker Type
Catalog Sufx
22 23
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B and C
S S1
24 25 26 27 28 29
Optional Terminals Wire Type Wire Line Range (AWG) N/A Load 3 3 3 3 3 3 N/A
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and Ground Fault QUICKLAG Types P, B, C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
V L Y F H08 H09 G Q thru Q9
Contact the Eaton factory for modications available for QCR and QCF breakers.
Table 27. 4-3. Factory-Installed Breaker Terminals

Breaker Type Standard Load Terminal Continuous Standard Line Terminal Ampere Terminal Wire Wire Terminal Rating Type Type Range (AWG) Type 1030 3550 55125 1030 40 1030 3550 55125 1030 40 1020 2560 70100 1055 60 1020 2550 1060 70100 5 6 7 1 1 5 6 9 10 Cu/Al TBD Cu/Al TBD Cu/Al TBD Cu/Al TBD Cu TBD Cu/Al TBD Cu/Al TBD Cu/Al 144 Cu 41/0 Extended tangs that bolt directly to the bus Extended tangs that bolt directly to the bus Plug-on female clips that mate with the bus stabs Plug-on female clips that mate with the bus stabs 1 2 3 1 (single-pole) 4 (two-pole) 4 1 (single- and two-pole) 2 (three-pole) 3 1 (single-pole) 4 (two-pole) 4 5 2 3 1 1 1 1 9 10
30 31 32 33 34
QUICKLAG Type P HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW QUICKLAG Ground Fault QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP QUICKLAG Type B BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW QUICKLAG Ground Fault/Arc Fault QBGF, QBAF, QBCAF, QBHGF, QBHAF, QBHCAF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP QUICKLAG Type C QC, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW QUICKLAG QCR, QCF QUICKLAG Ground Fault QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP QUICKLAG QCD
Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 81/0 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 148 Cu 148 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 81/0 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 148 Cu 148 Cu/Al 1410 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 81/0 Cu/Al 144 Cu 144 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 144 Cu/Al 144 Cu 41/0
N/A
N/A
N/A
6, 7 5, 7 5 N/A 6, 7 5, 7
6, 7, 8 5, 6, 7, 8 5, 7, 8 N/A 5 5
35 36 37 38
See accessories
Steel Box Lug
Steel Box Lug
Steel Box Lug
Aluminum Box Lug
Steel Ring Type
39 40
10
Aluminum Box Lug
Aluminum Box Lug
4-Prong Quick Connect Catalog Sufx P
QCD Terminal Assembly 1060 Amperes
QCD Terminal Assembly 70100 Amperes
41 42 43
Clamp on line side only.
CA08104001E
Series G Industrial Breakers Overview Table
Table 27.4-4. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries G
Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C No. of Poles Volts AC DC
September 2011
Sheet 27 080
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Trip Type
Federal Specication W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC Ratings Volts 120 120/ 240 240 277 480 600 DC 125 250 125/ 250
E-Frame
EGB EGE EGS EGH EGC 15125 15125 15125 15125 15125 63250 63250 63250 63250 63250 63250 100600 100600 100600 100600 100600 100600 125400 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 1600 150350 8001600 8001600 1 347 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 1 347 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 1 347 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 3 600Y/347 250 N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 I.T. 250 250 250 250 I.T. I.T. I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 23a 23a 23a 23a 35,000 100,000 200,000 25,000 18,000 25,000 18,000 35,000 25,000 10,000 10,000
18,000 10,000 10,000
85,000 35,000 35,000 85,000 35,000 22,000 35,000 100,000 65,000 42,000 100,000 65,000 25,000 42,000 200,000 65,000 85,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 65,000 85,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 25,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 150,000 200,000 35,000 50,000 65,000 35,000 18,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 42,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 50,000 50,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 42,000 50,000 50,000 22,000
J-Frame
JGE JGS JGH JGC JGU JGX 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 600 3, 4 600 3, 4 600 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
L-Frame
LGE LGS LGH LGC LGU LGX LHH
100,000 100,000 150,000 65,000 200,000 65,000 65,000 35,000 50,000 65,000 100,000 25,000 35,000 45,000
N-Frame
NGS 800, 1200 NGH 800, 1200 NGC 800, 1200 NGU 800 NGS NHH 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 600 3 3 3 3, 4 3, 4 600 600 600 600 600 85,000 100,000 200,000 300,000 100,000 125,000 200,000
N.I.T. N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T.
150,000 75,000 65,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 50,000 65,000
R-Frame
RGH RGC

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. Current limiting. Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting. High instantaneous circuit breaker for selective coordination. Not UL or CSA listed.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 081

Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table
27.4-5
Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C

Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C No. Volts of AC Poles DC
Trip Type
Federal UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Specication AC Ratings Volts DC W-C-375b 120 120/ 240 277 480 600 125 240 11a 10b, 11b, 12b, 14b, 65,000 65,000 14,000
22
250 125/ 250 14,000 14,000
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
G-Frame
GHB GHB GHB GHB HGHB GHQ GHQRSP GHBS GBHS GD GD GHC GHC GHC GHC HGHC 15100 15100 15100 15100 1530 1520 1520 1530 1520 1550 15100 15100 15100 15100 15100 1530 100225 100225 100225 100225 100225 15100 15100 15150 15150 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 15225 70250 70250 70250 70250 250400 100400 100400 100400 100400 100400 100400 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 1 1 1, 2 1, 2 2 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3 4 1 2, 3 4 3 1 2,3 4 3 2, 3 4 3 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 120 240 277 125 N.I.T. 125/250 N.I.T. 125 N.I.T. 14,000 14,000 14,000
277/480 125/250 N.I.T. 277 125 N.I.T. 277 N.I.T. 277 277/480 347/600 480 480 120 240 277 277/480 277 240 240 240 240 240 277 480 600 600 277 600 600 600 277 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 N.I.T. N.I.T.
15b 12c, 13a, 13b 65,000 12c, 13a, 13b 65,000 12c, 13a, 13b 65,000 65,000 13b 13b 12c, 13a 13b 12c, 13a 13b 65,000 65,000
14,000 14,000 25,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 10,000
65,000
125/250 N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. 125 N.I.T. 125/250 125 125/250 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 250 250 250 125 250 250 125 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T.
65,000 65,000 65,000
14,000 22,000
10,000 10,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000
14,000 14,000 14,000 25,000
F-Frame
EDB EDS ED EDH EDC EHD EHD FDB FDB FD FD FD FDE HFD HFD HFD HFDE FDC FDC FDCE 12b 12b 12b 14b 1 13a 13b 18a 22,000 42,000 65,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
100,000 200,000 14,000 18,000 18,000 18,000
14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000
10,000 10,000 10,000
13a 22a 13a 22a
35,000 65,000 35,000 18,000 65,000 35,000 18,000 65,000 35,000 18,000 65,000 100,000 65,000 25,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 25,000 65,000 25,000 100,000 35,000 100,000 35,000 100,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 18,000 18,000 25,000 35,000
10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000
24a
22a 22a 22a 22a 14b 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a
J-Frame
JDB JD HJD JDC
K-Frame
DK KDB KD CKD HKD CHKD KDC

2, 3 240 2, 3 600 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 600 600 600 600
65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000
35,000 25,000 35,000 25,000 35,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 65,000
10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 100% rated. Current limiting. Not dened in W-C-375b.
CA08104001E
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table
Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C (Continued)
Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C No. Volts of AC Poles DC
September 2011
Sheet 27 082
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Trip Type
Federal UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Specication AC Ratings Volts DC W-C-375b 120 120/ 240 277 480 600 125 240 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23a 23A 23A 23A 23A 23A 23A 24a 24a 24a 24a 24a 25a 25a 25a 25a 25a 65,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 35,000 25,000 35,000 25,000 35,000 25,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 50,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 35,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000
250
125/ 250
L-Frame
LDB LD CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC 300600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300600 300800 300800 300800 300800 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 6001200 8001600 8001600 10002000 10002500 10002000 8001600 2, 3 600 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 600 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 22,000 22,000 25,000 25,000 22,000 25,000
M-Frame
MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL
N-Frame
ND CND HND CHND NDC HNDC NDU 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 300,000 50,000 25,000 50,000 25,000 65,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 150,000 35,000 65,000 65,000 75,000
R-Frame
RD 1600 CRD 1600 RD 2000 RD 2500 CRD 2000 RDC 1600 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 50,000 100,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000
CRDC 1600 8001600 RDC 2000 10002000 RDC 2500 10002500 CRDC 2000 10002000

N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. 100% rated. Current limiting.
Table 27.4-6. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type

Circuit Breaker Type FCL LCL

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C 15100 125400
No. of Poles 2, 3 2, 3
Volts AC DC
Trip Type
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 200,000 200,000 277 480 150,000 200,000 600 100,000 DC 125 250 125/250
480 600
N.I.T. N.I.T.
Table 27.4-7. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type

Circuit Breaker Type FB LA NB PB

Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C 15100 70400 300800 6001600
No. of Poles 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3
Volts AC DC
Trip Type
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) AC Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 277 480 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 600 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 DC 125 250 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 125/250
600 600 600 600
250 250
N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 083

Current Limiting Industrial Breakers Overview Tables
27.4-7
Table 27.4-8. Eaton Molded-Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies

Frame Ampere Range Panelboards 1A 2A 3A 3E 4 5P Switchboards PRL-C IFS Motor Control Centers Freedom FlashGard Enclosed Control Bus Plugs Enclosed Breaker
22 23 24 25 26
QUICKLAG
BAB QB QBH 15100 15100 15100 15125 20250 100600 4001200 8002500 15225 70250 70400 400600 300800 4001200 8002500 15100 125400 15100 70400 300800 6001600
Series G
EG JG LG NG RG
Series C
FD/ED JD KD LD MDL ND RD FCL LCL FB LA NB PB
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Current Limiting Breakers

Including ground fault, arc fault and solenoid operated versions of each frame.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 084
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 27.4-9. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection (See Table 27.4-10 for details)
Description Digitrip 310 Digitrip 310+ LD LG Molded-case M-Frame 800A Molded-case N-Frame 1200A Molded-case R-Frame 2500A ND NG RD RG 5 6 Option Option Option 9 Option
Digitrip 510
OPTIM 550
Digitrip 610
Digitrip 810
Digitrip 910
OPTIM 1050
Circuit Breaker Type

Molded-case F-Frame 225A Molded-case JG250-Frame 250A Molded-case K-Frame 400A Molded-case L-Frame 600A
Features
Curve shaping functions Front adjustable Programmable Zone selective interlocking Load monitoring Diagnostics (cause-of-trip) Power/energy monitoring Harmonics Waveform capture Communications Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (local and remote) Ground fault alarm

10
10
Option
Optional feature. Requires ammeter/cause-of-trip display. Requires cause-of-trip LED module or ammeter/cause-of-trip display. Requires Power Metering and Monitoring Module (PM3). See Page 27.4-41 for product details. Only available in LG, NG and RG breakers. Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames.
Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see www.eaton.com.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 085

27.4-9
Table 27.4-10. Molded-Case Digitrip Selection Guide

Trip Unit Type
rms sensing
Digitrip RMS 310+

Yes
Digitrip RMS 310

Yes
Digitrip RMS 510

Yes
Digitrip RMS 610

Yes
Digitrip RMS 810

Yes
Digitrip RMS 910

Yes
Digitrip OPTIM 550

Yes
Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Yes
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Breaker Type
Frame Ampere range Interrupting rating at 48V FDE, JG, LG, NG, RG K, L, M, N, R 152500A 35, 65, 100, 150 (kA) 152500A 35, 65, 100 (kA) R 8005000A 65, 100 (kA) R 8005000A 65, 100 (kA) R 8005000A 65, 100 (kA) R 8005000A 65, 100 (kA) K, L, N 701200A 35, 65, 100 (kA) K, L, N, R 705000 35, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
Ordering options Arcash Reduction Maintenance System Fixed rated plug (In) Overtemperature trip LS LSG No No Yes LSI LSIG ALSI ALSIG LS LSG No Yes Yes LSI LSIG No LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG No Yes Yes LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG No Yes Yes LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG No Yes Yes LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG No Yes Yes LSI, LSI (A), LSIG No Yes Yes LSI (A), LISG No Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable rating plug (In) Long delay pickup Long delay time I2t Long delay time I4t Long delay thermal memory High load alarm No 40100% frame 224 seconds No Yes Yes Varies by frame Yes No Yes No Inst300 ms Yes 0.51.0(In) 10 seconds No Yes No No 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No Yes No No 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No Yes 0.85 x Ir 200600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes No 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No Yes 0.85 x Ir 200600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes No 0.51.0 x (In) 224 seconds No Yes 0.85 x Ir 200600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes No 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds 15 seconds Yes 0.51.0 x Ir 150800% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Optional No 0.41.0 x (In) 224 seconds 15 seconds Yes 0.5-1.0 x Ir 150800% x (Ir) 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes
Short Delay Protection (S)

Short delay pickup Short delay time I2t Short delay time at Short delay time Z.S.I. 200800% x (In) 200600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)
100 ms No 100500 ms No Inst300 ms 100500 ms No Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous pickup No Varies by frame No No Yes 200800% x (In) 200600% 200600% 200600% 200600% 200800% M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) x (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 20/25100% 20/25100% 100500 ms 100500 ms Optional Yes 200800% x (In) Yes Yes 20/25100% 20/25100% 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes
Discriminator No Instantaneous override Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground fault alarm Ground fault pickup Ground fault delay I2t Yes 20100% frame No Yes Var/frame No Inst500 ms No Yes No 25100% x In 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No 25100% x In 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No 25100% x In 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes No 25100% x In 100500 ms 100500 ms Yes Yes
Ground fault delay at Inst300 ms Ground fault Z.S.I. Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs Magnitude of trip information Remote signal contacts No No No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display Current Voltage Power and energy Power qualityharmonics Power factor No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes (over Yes PowerNet only)
Communications
PowerNet No No No No Yes Yes Optional Yes
Testing
Testing method Test kit Test set Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet (optional) OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
41 42 43
No rating plugs necessary. Only available on LG, NG and RG breaker. Adjust by rating plug. FDE and JG 2001200% x In LG 2001200% x In NG 200900% x In RG 200800% x In
LS/LSG only. Not to exceed 1200A. L- and N-Frames *20100% x Is. R-Frame *25100% x In. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Yes, with addition of Energy Sentinel. Yes, with addition of power monitoring/ metering module (PM3).
BIM Is In Ir
= = = =
Breaker Interface Module Sensor Rating Rating Plug LDPU Setting x In
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 086
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Digitrip OPTIM
Display information: Breaker information Time-current set points Metered values Trip event information Test trip unit performance: Phase and ground Trip/no trip
Panel-Mounted User Interface

The breaker interface module can be mounted directly on the assembly or at a remote location and can be used to access, congure and display information from OPTIM trip units.
Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories
An operator can use the breaker interface module to:
General Description
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable communicating microprocessor-based electronic trip unit system for Eatons molded-case circuit breakers. Digitrip OPTIM trip units are available in two models: Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050, for the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames (702500A). Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully programmable and can be applied as a standalone breaker with a hand-held Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for conguring the trip unit, displaying information and testing. In addition, OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage assembly with a panel-mounted Breaker Interface Module (BIM) to congure, display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM can be applied as part of a fully integrated IMPACC/PowerNet/ Power Xpert system. (See Tab 2.)
Advanced warning systems including high load alarm, ground fault alarm Full system diagnostics capability System monitoring features including: Phase currents (amps) Power (kW) Peak demand (kW) Forward energy (kWh) Reverse energy (kWh) Total energy (kWh) Power factor Total harmonic distortion (%THD) Magnitude of trip information (amps) Power Xpert communications saves individual wiring of breakers
Complete initial system setup: Select system frequency (50/60 Hz) Set system password Congure the system: Change time-current set points Select protection options Select alarm levels Display information: Breaker information Time-current set points Metered values Trip event information Test trip unit performance: Phase and ground Trip/no trip Expanded energy monitoring: Set addresses for group energy monitoring Group energy readings Common alarm contacts: Three Form C contacts Saves wiring to each breaker Local and remote indication: Remote indication/alarming Breaker status LED indication Expanded communications: Communicate with: OPTIM trip units Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units IQ Energy Sentinel and Universal Sentinels IQ Power Sentinels A total of 50 devices
Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held programmer accesses, displays and congures information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of the trip unit and is powered by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary power module. An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:

Features
Fully programmable, rms sensing trip unit Available in K, L, N and R Series C breakers Available in 80% and 100% rated breakers Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA congurations
Note: Ground fault alarm only.
Available in two models: OPTIM 550 and OPTIM 1050 10 function time-current curve shaping options, including a new I4t long delay time or slope Short delay and ground delay Zone Selective Interlocking (Optional on 550) Additional programmable protection features including thermal memory and discriminator functions
Complete initial system setup: Select breaker address Select system frequency (50/60 Hz) Set system baud rate Set system password Congure the system: Change time-current set points Select protection options Select alarm levels
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 087

Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
27.4-11
22 23 24
HQP, QPHW, QHPX
QPHW
QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
BAB, QBHW, HBAX
HBAW
25 26
Table 27.4-11. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections Plug-On Thermal-Magnetic HQP, QPHW, QHPX Thermal-Magnetic QHPW Thermal-Magnetic QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP Amperes QPGF 1-2 3 120/240 240 1540 1550 QPHGF 1 2 2-3 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 1530 1530 QPGFEP 1540 1550 QPHGFEP 1530 1530 1 2 H 120 120/240 D W 1.00 (25.4) H D W 1.00 (25.4) H D 1 2 120 120/240 1 2 120 120/240 1 2 120 120/240 Poles Volts Bolt-On Thermal-Magnetic BAB, QBHW, HBAX Thermal-Magnetic HBAW
27 28
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes HQP 570 10150 10100 QPHW 1570 15125 15100 QHPX 1570 15100 15100 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 Poles Volts Amperes QHPW 1530 1520 Poles Volts Amperes BAB 570 10150 10100 QBHW 1570 15125 15100 HBAX 1570 15100 15100 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 Poles Volts Amperes HBAW 1530 1520 1-2 3 120/240 240 Poles Volts
29 30 31 32 33 34
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker

W 1.00 (25.4) Volts HQP 120/240, 240 QPHW 120/240, 240 QHPX 120/240, 240 Volts 48 62.5 80 42,000 Poles Amps I.R. Volts 1-2 1 2 5000 2500 5000 22,000 10,000 H D W 1.00 (25.4) H D W 1.00 (25.4) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) 3.19 2.38 (81.0) (60.3) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) Amps I.R. 65,000
35 36 37 38
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Amps I.R. Volts QHPW 120/240, 240 65,000 Amps I.R. Volts QPGF, QPGFEP 120, 120/240 QPHGF, QPHGFEP 120, 120/240 22,000 10,000 Amps I.R. Volts BAB 120/240, 240 QBHW 120/240, 240 HBAX 120/240, 240 Poles Amps I.R. Volts 48 62.5 80 42,000 Poles Amps I.R. 1-2 1 2 5000 2500 5000 22,000 10,000 Amps I.R. Volts HBAW 120/240, 240
DC Interrupting Ratings
Poles Amps I.R. Volts 1-2 1 2 5000 2500 5000 48 62.5 80 Poles Amps I.R. Volts 1-2 1 2 5000 2500 5000 48 62.5 80
39 40 41 42 43
Accessories and ModicationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Moisture-fungus treatment Handle lock devices Shunt trip Special calibration Shock tested Dummy breaker Optional terminals
Moisture-fungus treatment Handle lock devices Shunt trip Special calibration Shock tested Dummy breaker Optional terminals
Moisture-fungus treatment Bell alarm contacts Auxiliary switch contacts
Moisture-fungus treatment Handle lock devices Shunt trip Special calibration Shock tested Panelboard accessories Dummy breaker Optional terminals
Moisture-fungus treatment Handle lock devices Shunt trip Special calibration Shock tested Panelboard accessories Optional terminals
Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
CA08104001E
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
September 2011
Sheet 27 088
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
QCR,QCF
QC, QCHW, QHCX, QCD
QHCW
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
Table 27.4-12. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections Bolt-On Cable-In/Cable-Out Thermal-Magnetic Thermal-Magnetic Thermal-Magnetic Thermal-Magnetic QBAF, QBGF, QBHGF, QCR, QCF QC, QCHW, QHCX QCD QBGFEP, QBHGFEP Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing) Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts QBAF (Arc Fault) QCR, QCF QC QCD 1020 1 120 1060 1 120 570 1 120/240 10100 1-2 120/240 1020 2 120/240 1060 2 120/240 10125 2 120/240 10100 3 240 1530 2-3 240 10100 2-3 240 QBGF QCHW 1540 1 120 1570 1 120/240 1550 2 120/240 15100 2 120/240 15100 2-3 240 QBHGF QHCX 1530 1 120 1570 1 120/240 1530 2 120/240 15100 2 120/240 15100 2-3 240 QBGFEP QHCW 1540 1 120 1530 12 120/240 1550 2 120/240 1520 3 240 QBHGFEP 1530 1 120 1530 2 120/240 Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker W H D W H D W H D W H D 1.00 3.19 2.38 .50 3.94 2.63 1.00 3.75 2.44 1.00 3.75 2.63 (25.4) (81.0) (60.3) (12.7) (74.6) (66.7) (25.4) (95.3) (61.9) (25.4) (95.3) (66.7) AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts Amps Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps Volts Amps I.R. I.R. I.R. QBAF, QBGF, QBGFEP QCR, QCF QC QCD 120, 120/240 10,000 120/240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 QBHGF, QBHGFEP QCHW 120, 120/240 22,000 120/240, 240 22,000 QHCX 120/240, 240 42,000 QHCW 120/240, 240 65,000 DC Interrupting Ratings Volts Poles Amps Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps Volts Poles Amps I.R. I.R. I.R. 62.5 1 3000 48 1-2 5000 48 1-2 5000 125 2 3000 62.5 1 2500 62.5 1 2500 80 2 5000 80 2 5000 Accessories and ModicationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status Moisture-fungus treatment Moisture-fungus treatment Moisture-fungus treatment Moisture-fungus treatment Handle lock devices Handle lock devices Handle lock devices Handle lock devices Bell alarm contacts QCR mounting clips Shunt trip Shunt trip Auxiliary switch contacts Ring terminals Special calibration Special calibration Ring terminals Quick connect Shock tested Shock tested Terminals Face mounting plate Face mounting plate Shunt trip Base mounting hardware Base mounting hardware Shock tested Optional terminals Optional terminals DIN rail mounting clip Dummy breaker Dummy breaker DIN rail mounting clip DIN rail mounting clip
Thermal-Magnetic QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP Amperes QCGF 1540 1550 QCHGF 1530 1550 QCGFEP 1530 1550 QCHGFEP 1550 1530 Poles Volts 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240
W 1.00 (25.4) Volts
H D 3.75 2.44 (95.3) (61.9) Amps I.R.
QCGF, QCGFEP 120/240 10,000 QCHGF, QCHGFEP 120 22,000
Volts
Poles Amps I.R.
Moisture-fungus treatment Handle lock devices Bell alarm contacts Auxiliary switch contacts DIN rail mounting clip
Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 089

Selection DataQUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
27.4-13
Solenoid-Operated, RemoteControlled Latching Types BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP

Bolt-on line-side terminal (BABRP, BABRSPType BA) Plug-on line-side terminal (BRRPType BR, CLRPType CL) Cable connected load-side terminal Four-position control terminal Bi-metal assembly for thermal overload protection Fast-acting short-circuit protection Arc-chute assembly for fast-acting arc extinction Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP (Center), ON
Handle permits manual switching when control power is lost Mechanical trip indicator 15 and 20A breakers SWD (switching duty) rated HID ratings for HID (high intensity discharge) lighting All models HACR rated Status feedback of control circuit (BABRSP) Series rated (BABRP, BABRSP only) BRRP series rated same as BR breakers BABRP, BABRSP same as BA breakers
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Product Selection
Table 27.4-13. BABRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 25 30 15 20 25 30 Vac (50/60 Hz) 120 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 120/240 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 277/480 Catalog Number BABRP1015 BABRP1020 BABRP1025 BABRP1030 BABRP2015 BABRP2020 BABRP2025 BABRP2030
29 30 31 32 33
BABRP and BABRSP Breakers Single- and Two-Pole
Continuous current rating at 40C.
General Description
The BABRP and BABRSP are bolt-on branch circuit breakers designed for use in panelboards. The BRRP is a plug-on branch circuit breaker designed for use in loadcenters not manufactured with breakers with a 1.00-inch wide format and are listed on the Compatibility list for Classied Applications Pub. 26271. In addition to providing conventional branch circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated mechanism that provides for efcient breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting control system. These breakers can also be controlled by pushbutton or a PLC unit.
Table 27.4-14. BABRP and BABRSP Wire Harness

Description This 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single BABRPs control plug to a customers pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600V. Order in multiples of 12. Catalog Number SLBKRPTL1
34 35 36
Table 27.4-15. BABRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 25 30 15 20 25 30 Vac (50/60 Hz) 120 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 120/240 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 277/480 Catalog Number BABRSP1015 BABRSP1020 BABRSP1025 BABRSP1030 BABRSP2015 BABRSP2020 BABRSP2025 BABRSP2030
37 38 39 40
Eatons BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP breakers are remotely operated molded-case circuit breakers ideally suited for lighting control applications or energy management applications.
Table 27.4-16. BRRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 25 30 15 20 25 30 Vac (50/60 Hz) 120 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 120/240 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 Catalog Number BRRP115 BRRP120 BRRP125 BRRP130 BRRP215 BRRP220 BRRP225 BRRP230
41 42 43
CA08104001E
Table 27.4-17. CLRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 25 30 15 20 25 30 Vac (50/60 Hz) 120 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 120/240 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 Catalog Number CLRP115 CLRP120 CLRP125 CLRP130 CLRP215 CLRP220 CLRP225 CLRP230 Red BABRP Remote Contact Load Breaker Contact RM b RM a Yellow
September 2011
Sheet 27 090
22 23
Wiring Diagrams
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2
Line
Black

Solenoid Operating Data
Operation
Tripping systemthe BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit breakers have a permanent trip unit that contains a factory preset thermal (overload) trip element in each pole Operating mechanismthe BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit breakers have an over-center toggle mechanism that provides quickmake, quick-break operation. The operating mechanism is trip free. An internal cross-bar provides a common tripping of all multi-pole circuit breakers
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc (20.4V minimum30V maximum) Controlled signal: +AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero cross, 300 ms maximum AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/ CLOSE cycles per minute
On Coil
Off Remote Coil Status
BABRSP Remote Contact Load Breaker Contact RM b RM a Yellow BKR a Line
Black
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ambient temperature: 0 to 40C Nominal pulse magnitude: 24 Vac/Vdc Frequency: 50/60 Hz Maximum breaker cycling: 6 operations per minute Tolerance: +10% to 15% of nominal voltage Humidity: 0 to 95% noncondensing
On Coil
Off Remote Coil Status
Figure 27.4-1. Control Circuit for the BABRP and BABRSP
Blue
Red
32
Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A Blue wire: power input (see power requirements) Black wire: remote opening Red wire: remote closing Yellow wire: feedback status from power input, maximum 0.50A draw (BABRSP only)
Operating/Application Data
Blue
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 091

27.4-15
Solenoid Operated Remote-Controlled Latching for Type GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP Breakers

Bolt-on line-side terminal Cable-connected load-side terminal Status switchremote status and breaker status available from internal auxiliary switches Bi-metal assembly for thermal overload protection Fast-acting short-circuit protection Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly for fast-acting arc extinction Three-position breaker handle: OFF, TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely operated contacts position (open, closed or trip) Remote override handle permits manual switching when control power is lost 15 and 20A breakers SWD (switching duty) rated 15 and 20A breakers HID rated for HID (High intensity discharge) lighting All models HACR rated Series rated with various Eaton main circuit breakers
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Product Selection
Table 27.4-18. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings
Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 30 15 20 30 Vac (50/60 Hz) 120 65,000 65,000 65,000 240 65,000 65,000 65,000 277/480 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 Catalog Number GHBS1015D GHBS1020D GHBS1030D GHBS2015D GHBS2020D GHBS2030D
29 30 31 32
GHBS and GHQRSP
General Description
Eatons GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP circuit breakers are bolt-on branch circuit breakers designed for use in 277/480 Vac panelboards. In addition to providing conventional branch circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated mechanism that provides for efcient breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting control system.
Table 27.4-19. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings (Not UL Listed)

Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 15 20 Vac (50/60 Hz) 347/600 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 Catalog Number GBHS1015D GBHS1020D GBHS2015D GBHS2020D
33 34 35 36
1 2
Table 27.4-20. GHQRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating 15 20 30 15 20 30 Vac (50/60 Hz) 120 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 120/240 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 277 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 480Y/277 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 Catalog Number GHQRSP1015 GHQRSP1020 GHQRSP1030 GHQRSP2015 GHQRSP2020 GHQRSP2030
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Continuous current rating at 40C. All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (high intensity discharge) rated.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 092
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Solenoid Operating Data
Wiring Diagrams
Circuit Breaker
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc (20.4V minimum 30V maximum) Controlled signal: +AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero cross, 300 ms maximum AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles per minute Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A Blue wire: power input (see power requirements) Black wire: remote opening Red wire: remote closing Yellow wire: feedback status from power input, maximum 0.50A draw
Solenoid
Common AMP Inc. Conductor Plug

/ Cycle Maximum 28 Vac Pulse Source
1 2
Solenoid
Auxiliary
28 Vac
Circuit Breaker Open/Closed Status
Figure 27.4-2. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for GHBS and GBHS Breakers
GHQRSP Remote Breaker Contact Contact Load Line
Operation
Mechanism manually operated by external handle allowing ON, OFF and RESET operation. Handle assumes a center TRIP position after performing protective response.
Operating/Application Data
Ambient temperature: 040C Frequency: 4862 Hz Humidity: 095% noncondensing

Table 27.4-21. Terminal Type

Circuit Breaker Type GHQRSP Circuit Breaker Amperes 1520 Screw Head Type Slotted Terminal Type Clamp Range Yellow Black #14#4 AWG Blue Power Input Height 4.63 (117.6) Red On Coil
Status
Off Coil
Figure 27.4-3. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for GHQRSP Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm). Table 27.4-22. Dimensions Per Pole
Circuit Breaker Type GHQRSP

Width 1.00 (25.4)
Length 2.81 (71.4)
Purchase separate AMP Inc. conductor plug #640426-3. Excluding line terminal. Excluding handle.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 093

Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
27.4-17
Solenoid Operated Remote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Fast-acting short-circuit protection Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly for fast-acting arc extinction Three-position breaker handle: OFF, TRIP (Center), ON Visual indication of the remotely operated contacts position (open, closed or trip) Remote override handle permits manual switching when control power is lost 15 and 20A breakers SWD, and HID rated
Application
Ambient temperature: 040C Frequency: 4862 Hz Humidity: 095% noncondensing
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Product Specications
GHQRSPEL circuit breakers incorporate many of the same robust features as other GHQRSP breakers including:

Product Selection
Table 27.4-23. Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Amperes 15 20 Catalog Number GHQRSPEL2015 GHQRSPEL2020

Operating Data
Mechanism manually operated by external handle allowing ON, OFF and RESET operation. Handle assumes a center TRIP position after performing protective response.
General Description
The GHQRSPEL circuit breaker contains both a solenoid operated remote switching circuit and a manually operated thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. This Emergency Lighting Circuit Breaker complies with the 2008 National Electrical Code; Section 700.12(F) for Sources of Power used in emergency lighting applications.
Handle rating: 20A (both switched and unswitched circuits) Maximum voltage rating: 277 Vac Interrupting ratings: 65 kA at 240 Vac, 14 kA at 277 Vac Maximum series connected ratings: 200 kA at 240 Vac and 100 kA at 277V Overcurrent protection UL listed 489 UL listed switch duty rated (SWD) and high intensity discharge (HID) ratings Lug wire size: (1) #128 Al, #148 Cu per circuit, 75C conductors
Solenoid

Left pole: Integral solenoid controlled contacts in series with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker pole Right pole: Standard thermalmagnetic circuit breaker pole Both poles tied to same phase Bolt-on line-side terminal Cable-connected load-side terminal Status switchremote status and breaker status available from internal auxiliary switches Bi-metal assembly for thermal overload protection
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc (20.4V minimum to 30V maximum) Controlled signal: +AC/DC 12 ms minimum with zero cross, 300 ms maximum AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum DC: 12 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/ CLOSE cycles per minute Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A Blue wire: power input Black wire: remote opening Red wire: remote closing Yellow wire: feedback status from power input, maximum 0.50A draw
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 094
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Wiring Diagrams
GHQRSPEL Circuit Breaker Manually Operated Circuit Source Remotely Operated Circuit
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Emergency Light Equipment
Figure 27.4-4. The Need for Relay is Eliminated with Extra Box, Wiring and Selecting a Properly Rated Component
Note: Circuit breaker mounts into panelboard. Switched and unswitched conductors are connected directly to the breaker load side lug.
Remote Contact
Load
Breaker Contact Line
30 31 32 33
Yellow Black
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Blue
Red
Status
On Coil
Off Coil
Power Input
Figure 27.4-5. Typical Circuit Breaker Schematic for GHQRSP
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 095

Series G Selection DataEG-Frame
27.4-19
Series G, E-Frame Thermal-Magnetic 15125A
Table 27.4-26. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Breaker Type Number Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 120 220240 Icu EGB125 EGE125 EGS125 EGH125 EGC125

22
Volts DC
277 347
380415 Icu Ics 18 25 30 35 100
Ics 25 25 35 43 43 50 50 200 18 35 65 22 30
480 600Y/ 690 125 250 347 Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics 18 25 35 65 18 22 25 10 35 42 10 10 10 35 35 42 42 42 10 10 35 42 42
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 3, 4
35 100
25 25 35 85 85
18 25 40 70 100
200 100 100 200
100 35
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. IEC only. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.
E125-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-24. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Number Width of Poles 1 2 3 4 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 (50.8) Height Depth
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
Table 27.4-25. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Frame EG EG
Ratings 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 16, 32, 63
Not UL listed.
Note: EG breaker is HACR rated.
CA08104001E
Series G Selection DataF-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 096
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series G, F-Frame 15225A Electronic RMS 15225A

Circuit Breaker Type FDE HFDE FDCE

Number of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Trip Type Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 240 277 480 35,000 65,000 100,000 600 18,000 25,000 25,000 125 250 10,000 22,000
3 3 2, 3, 4
N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T.
65,000 100,000 200,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Current limiting. Electronics available on thee-pole only.
Table 27.4-30. Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number Package of 3 Terminals 3T100FB 3TA150FB 3TA225FD 3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3T150FB 3TA225FDK
Standard Pressure Type Terminals

100 150 225 Steel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Stainless steel Aluminum Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al (1) #141/0 (1) #44/0 (1) #44/0 (1) #14#4 (1) #141/0 (1) #44/0 (1) #6300 kcmil 2.550 2595 2595 2.516 2.550 2595 16150
F-Frame Breaker
Optional Pressure Terminals

50 100 150 225

Number Width of Poles 3 Height Depth
UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
Table 27.4-28. Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units

Types FDE, HFDE, FDCE Frame 225 160 80 Ratings 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 097

Series G Selection DataJG-Frame
27.4-21
Series G, J-Frame Electronic RMS, 20250A Thermal-Magnetic, 63250A

Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 220240 Icu JGE250 JGS250 JGH250 JGC250 JGU250 JGX250

22
Volts DC
380415 Icu 25 40 70 100 150 200 Ics 25 40 70 100 150 200
480
600
690 Icu Ics 6 6 7 12 14 14
250
Ics 65 85 100 200 200 200
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
65 85 100 200 200 200
25 35 65 100 150 200
18 18 25 35 50 50
12 12 14 16 18 18
10 22 22 42 50 50
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
JG-Frame circuit breakers include Cu/Al terminals T250FJ as standard. When optional copper only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Table 27.4-35. Line and Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Stainless steel Aluminum Copper Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm2 AWG Wire Range/Number of Conductors #4350 (1) #4350 (1) #4350 (1) Catalog Number
J-Frame Breaker

250 250 250


Number Width of Poles 2, 3 4 Height Depth
Cu Cu/Al Cu/Al
25185 25185 25185
T250FJ TA250FJ TC250FJ
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

Single terminals individually packed. Standard line and load terminals. Contact factory for availability.
4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) 5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

Frame JG JG
Ratings 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 160
Not UL listed.

Frame Ratings 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250 JG250 JG160 63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160 JG100 JG50
40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100 20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50
Not UL listed.
Note: JG breaker is HACR rated.
CA08104001E
Series G Selection DataLG-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 098
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series G, L-Frame Electronic RMS, 100630A* Thermal-Magnetic, 250630A* *UL Maximum is 600A

Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240240 Icu LGE630 LGS630 LGH630 LGC630 LGU630 LGX630

Volts DC 480 600 690 Icu 35 50 65 100 150 200 18 25 35 50 65 65 12 20 25 30 35 35 Ics 6 10 13 15 18 18 250 Icu 22 22 42 42 50 50 Ics 22 22 42 42 50 50 Ics 35 50 70 100 150 200
380415 Icu 35 50 70 100 150 200
Ics 65 85 100 200 200 200
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
65 85 100 200 200 200
DC rating applies to substantially non-inductive circuits. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits. IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.

Maximum Breaker Amperes 400 400 400 400 Terminal Body Material Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Aluminum Copper Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu/Al Cu AWG Wire Range/Number of Conductors 500750 (1) 500750 (1) 500750 (1) 500750 (1) 2500 (2) 2500 (2) 2500 (2) 2500 (2) 2500 (1) 2500 (1) Metric Wire Range mm2 240380 (1) 240380 (1) 240380 (1) 240380 (1) 35240 (2) 35240 (2) 35240 (2) 35240 (2) 35240 (1) 35240 (1) Number of Catalog Terminals Number Included 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 1 3TA631LK 4TA631LK 3T631LK 4T631LK 3TA632LK 4TA632LK 3T632LK 4T632LK TA350LK T350LK
L-Frame Breaker
630 630 630 630 400 400

Table 27.4-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm), Weight in Lbs (kg)

Number Width of Poles 3 4 5.48 (140) 7.22 (183) Height 10.13 (258) 10.13 (258) Depth 4.09 (104) 4.09 (104) Weight 16 (7.3) 20 (9.1)
Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers. Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
Table 27.4-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Rating

Frame LG LG
Ratings 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 320, 630
Not UL listed.

Frame Ratings LG_630 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 500, 600, 630 LG_600 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 LG_400 160, 200, 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 400 LG_250 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250
Note: 160, 315 and 630 are IEC ratings only. LG breaker is HACR rated.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 099

Series G Selection DataNG-Frame
27.4-23
Series G, N-Frame Electronic RMS, 4001200A
Table 27.4-43. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Number Trip Breaker of Poles Type Type Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz) UL 489 240 480 600 IEC 60947-2 220240 Icu Ics 85 100 100 380415 Icu 50 70 100 Ics 50 50 50 660690 Icu 20 25 35 Ics 10 13 18
22 23 24 25 26
800, 1200A
NGS NGH NGC 3 3 3 3 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 65 100 200 300 50 65 100 150 25 35 50 75 85 100 200
800A
NGU

Maximum Breaker Amperes 700 1000 1200 1200 Terminal Body Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors (2) 1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil (4) 4/0500 kcmil (3) 500750 kcmil (2) 2/0500 kcmil (3) 3/0500 kcmil (4) /0400 kcmil Metric Wire Range (mm2) 50300 95185 120300 300400 70300 95300 95185 Catalog Number
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1 T1200NB3
N-Frame Breaker

700 1000 1200

Number of Poles 3 Width 8.25 (209.6) Height 16.00 (406.4) Depth 5.50 (139.7)

Frame Ratings 800 1200 320, 400, 450, 500, 600, 630, 700, 800 500, 600, 630, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200
CA08104001E
Series G Selection DataRG-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 100
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series G, R-Frame Electronic RMS, 8002500A
Table 27.4-48. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Number Trip Breaker of Poles Type Type Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz) UL 489 240 480 600 IEC 60947-2 220240 Icu RGH RGC 3, 4 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. 125 200 65 100 50 65 135 200 Ics 100 100 380415 Icu 70 100 Ics 50 50 660690 Icu 25 35 Ics 13 18

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Aluminum Copper Aluminum Wire Type Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors (4) 5001000 kcmil (4) 1600 kcmil (6) 2600 kcmil Metric Wire Range (mm2) 300500 50300 35300 Catalog Number
Wire Terminal
1600 1600 2000
Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al
English English English
TA1600RD T1600RD TA2000RD
R-Frame Breaker

Number of Poles 3 4 Width 15.50 (393.7) 20.00 (508.0) Height 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) Depth 9.75 (247.7) 9.75 (247.7)
Table 27.4-46. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs

Frame Rating Plugs 1600 2000 2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1500, 1600 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Adjustable rating plug available.
Table 27.4-47. Digitrip 510/610/810/910 and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs
Frame 1600 2000 2500 Rating Plugs 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 1600, 2000, 2500
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 101

Series C Selection DataG-Frame
27.4-25
Series C, G-Frame Thermal-Magnetic, 15100A
22 23 24 25 26
GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP277V 30 mA GF Breaker
GHB Breaker and G-Frame
Application Notes
Depth 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4)
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Single
Table 27.4-50. G-FrameDimensions in Inches (mm)

Number of Poles 1P G-Frame 2P G-Frame 3P G-Frame GHCGFEP GHBGFEP Width 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) Height 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.88 (124.0) 4.00 (101.6)

Frame GHB, GHC GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP GHQ HGHB Ratings 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 15, 20 15, 20, 25, 30
Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard breakers while type GHC is a cable-in and cable-out breaker for stand-alone mounting typically in a control panel or separate enclosure GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth leakage breakers, rated for 30 mA ground fault protection On all three-phase delta (240V) grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton 480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480V) grounded B phase applications All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20A. Switching duty rated (SWD) for uorescent lighting applications Suitable for reverse-feed applications HACR rated

Circuit Breaker Type GDB GD GD GHQ GHB GHB HGHB GHC GHC HGHC

Number of Poles 2, 3 2 3 1 1 2, 3 1 1 2, 3 1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 120 65 65 65 65 65 240 65 65 65 65 277 14 14 25 14 25 480 14 14 22 480Y/277 14 14 Volts DC 125 14 14 14 14 14 14 250 10 10 10
Terminals
Line side (on GHC) and load side (on GHC and GHB) terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound . Table 27.4-54. Terminals
Breaker Amperes 1520 2560 Terminal Type Clamp Pressure Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al Wire Range #14#10 AWG #10 1/0 AWG
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 1570A breakers only.
38 39
Wire Type Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al AWG Wire Range
Table 27.4-53. Terminal Types

Circuit Breaker Amperes 1520 25100 1520 2560
Terminal Body Material Clamp (plated steel) Pressure (aluminum body) Clamp Pressure
Figure 27.4-6. Electrical Schematic

(1) #1410 (1) #101/0 (1) #14#10 AWG (1) #101/0 AWG
40 41 42 43
Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker.
CA08104001E
Series C Selection DataF-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 102
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series C, F-Frame Thermal-Magnetic 10225A Electronic RMS 15225A

Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC EHD FDB FD FD FDE HFD HFD HFDE FDC FDCE HFDDC Number of Poles Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Type Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 240 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 1 2, 3 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 N.I.T. N.I.T. 22,000 42,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 18,000 18,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 277 14,000 35,000 65,000 480 14,000 14,000 35,000 35,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 600 14,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 25,000 125 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 250 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000
N.I.T.
N.I.T. N.I.T.
F-Frame Breaker

Number Width of Poles 1 2 3 4 1.38 (34.8) 2.75 (69.9) Height Depth
6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. Current limiting. Electronics available on three-pole only. HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards. Interrupting rating is 35,000A at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded systems only.
4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7) 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number Package of 3 Terminals 3T20FB 3T100FB 3TA150FB 3TA225FD 3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3T150FB 3TA225FDK

Frame ED, EDH, EDC EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, HFDDC FD, HFD, FDC Ratings 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150 175, 200, 225

20 (EHD) 100 150 225 50 100 150 225

Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Stainless Steel Aluminum
Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al
(1) #14#10 (1) #141/0 (1) #44/0 (1) #44/0 (1) #14#4 (1) #141/0 (1) #44/0 (1) #6300 kcmil
2.54 2.550 2595 2595 2.516 2.550 2595 16150
Optional Pressure Terminals

Types FDE, HFDE, FDCE Frame 225 160 80 Ratings 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 103

Series C Selection DataJ-Frame
27.4-27
Series C, J-Frame Thermal-Magnetic, 70250A

Circuit Breaker Type JDB JD HJD JDC HJDDC

Number of Poles
Trip Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 480 35,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 600 18,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 Volts DC 250 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 600 35,000
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3
N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T.
65,000 65,000 100,000 200,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip. Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 8 milliseconds time constant. Current limiting. Three poles in series. Two poles in series.

Maximum Breaker Amperes 250 250
J-Frame Breaker
Terminal Body Material Aluminum Stainless steel
Wire Type
AWG Wire Range
Metric Wire Range (mm2) 25185 25185
Catalog Number

Depth 4.06 (103.2) 4.06 (103.2) Cu/Al Cu (1) #4350 kcmil (1) #4350 kcmil TA250KB T250KB

Number of Poles 2, 3 4 Width 4.13 (104.8) 5.50 (139.7) Height 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Frame JDB, JD, HJD JDC, HJDDC Ratings 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
CA08104001E
Series C Selection DataK-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 104
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Series C, K-Frame Electronic RMS, 70400A Thermal-Magnetic, 100400A
Table 27.4-67. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Breaker Type DK KDB KD HKD KDC HKDDC CKD CHKD

Number of Poles
Trip Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 480 35,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 35,000 65,000 600 25,000 25,000 35,000 65,000 25,000 35,000 Volts DC 250 10,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 42,000 600 35,000
2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 3 3
N.I.T. N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T.
65,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 65,000 100,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip. Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 8 milliseconds time constant. Current limiting. 100% rated. Two poles in series. Three poles in series.

K-Frame Breaker
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Number of Poles 2, 3 4 Width 5.50 (139.7) 7.22 (183.4) Height 10.13 (257.2) 10.13 (257.2) Depth 4.06 (103.2) 4.06 (103.2)
Maximum Breaker Amperes 225 350 400
Terminal Body Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
Wire Type
AWG/Wire Range/Number Conductors 3350 (1) 250500 (1) 3/0250 (2)
Metric Wire Range (mm2) 35185 120240 95120
Catalog Number

Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al TA300K TA350K 2TA400K 3TA400K 4TA400K T300K T350K 2T400K 3T400K 4T400K 2TA401K 3TA401K 4TA401K 2TA402K 3TA402K 4TA402K 2T402K 3T402K 4T402K

Frame Ratings DK, KDB, KD, HKD, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, KDC, HKDDC, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
225 350 400
Copper Copper Copper
Cu Cu Cu
3350 (1) 50500 (1) 3/0250 (2)
35185 120240 95120
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Table 27.4-66. Digitrip 310 and OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs
Frame KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD

2/0250 (2) or 2/0500 (1) 500750 (1)
70120 70240 70240 300400
Rating Plugs 70, 90, 100, 110, 125 , 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250 , 300, 350, 400
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
400
Copper
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
160A is only available on Digitrip 310. Adjustable rating plug available on Digitrip 310.
Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Two-pole kit. Three-pole kit. Four-pole kit. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 105

Series C Selection DataL-Frame
27.4-29
Series C, L-Frame Electronic RMS, 70600A Thermal-Magnetic, 300600A

Circuit Breaker Type LDB LD, CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC HLDDC

Number of Poles
Trip Type
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 480 35,000 35,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 600 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 Volts DC 250 22,000 22,000 25,000 30,000 42,000 600 35,000
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3
N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T.
65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating T/M trip unit only. 100% rated. Current limiting. Two poles in series. Three poles in series.
L-Frame Breaker

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ Number of Conductors (1) 4/0600 kcmil Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number

29 30

400 Aluminum Cu/Al 120300 2TA401LDK 3TA401LDK 4TA401LDK (two-pole kit) (three-pole kit) (four-pole kit)
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Frame LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC, HLDDC Ratings 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
500 600
Aluminum Aluminum
Cu/Al Cu/Al
(2) 250350 kcmil (2) 400500 kcmil
120150 185240
TA602LD 2TA603LDK (two-pole kit) 3TA603LDK (three-pole kit) 4TA603LDK (four-pole kit) T602LD
Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals

600

Copper
Cu
(2) 250350 kcmil
120150
UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Frame LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC Rating Plugs 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 300/600 adjustable
Table 27.4-72. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs

Frame LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC Rating Plugs 70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600
CA08104001E
Series C Selection DataM-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 106
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Series C, M-Frame Electronic RMS, 400800A Thermal-Magnetic, 300800A

Circuit Breaker Type MDL, CMDL HMDL, CHMDL

Number of Poles
Trip Type
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 480 50,000 65,000 600 25,000 35,000 Volts DC 250 22,000 25,000
2, 3 2, 3
N.I.T. N.I.T.
65,000 100,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Two poles or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 100% rated. Not for use on DC.

Maximum Breaker Amperes 600 800 800 600 800
Terminal Body Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper
Wire Type
AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors (2) #1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil (2) 500750 kcmil (2) 2/0500 kcmil (3) 3/0300 kcmil
Catalog Number

Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA T600MA1 T800MA1
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals M-Frame Breaker
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Width 8.25 (209.6) Height Depth 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2)

Frame MDL Ratings 300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

Frame MDL Rating Plugs 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 400/800 adjustable
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 107

Series C Selection DataN-Frame
27.4-31
Series C, N-Frame Electronic RMS, 4001200A

Circuit Breaker Type ND, CND HND CHND NDC CNDC NDU

Number of Poles
Trip Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 277 480 50,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 150,000 600 25,000 35,000 35,000 65,000 65,000 75,000
22 23 24 25 26 27
2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3
N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T.
65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 300,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. 100% rated. 800A maximum rating. Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac. Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors (2) 1500 kcmil (3) 3/0400 kcmil (4) 4/0500 kcmil (3) 500750 kcmil (2) 2/0500 kcmil (3) 3/0500 kcmil (4) 3/0400 kcmil Metric Wire Range (mm2) 50300 95185 120300 300400 70300 95300 95185 Catalog Number
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
N-Frame Breaker

700 1000 1200 1200 700 1000 1200

Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu
TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1 T1200NB3

Frame 800 1200
Rating Plugs 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200
Table 27.4-82. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs

Frame 800 1200 Ratings 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200
CA08104001E
Series C Selection DataR-Frame
September 2011
Sheet 27 108
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series C, R-Frame Electronic RMS, 8002500A

Circuit Breaker Frame RD CRD RDC CRDC

Number of Poles
Trip Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 240 277 480 65 65 100 100 600 50 50 65 65
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T.
125 125 200 200
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. 100% rated versions.

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Aluminum Copper Aluminum Wire Type Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors (4) 5001000 kcmil (4) 1600 kcmil (6) 2600 kcmil Metric Wire Range (mm2) 300500 50300 35300 Catalog Number
Wire Terminal
1600 1600 2000
Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al
English English English
TA1600RD T1600RD TA2000RD
R-Frame Breaker

Number of Poles 3 4 Width 15.50 (393.7) 20.00 (508.0) Height 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) Depth 9.75 (247.7) 9.75 (247.7)

Frame 1600 2000 2500
Rating Plugs 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1500, 1600 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Table 27.4-87. Digitrip 510/610/810/910 and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs
Frame 1600 2000 2500 Rating Plugs 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 1600, 2000, 2500
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 109

Series G Accessories and Modications
27.4-33
Table 27.4-90. Series G Breaker Accessories and Modications

Breaker Frame E J L N R
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

Internal
Accessories
Alarm lockout (make/break) Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination Shunt trip Undervoltage release mechanism
Control wire kit Multi-wire kit End cap kit Base mounting hardware Terminal cover Terminal shields Terminal end covers Interphase barriers Handle mechanisms Handle extension Non-padlockable handle block Padlockable handle block Padlockable handle lock hasp Key interlock kit Sliding bar/walking beam interlock Electrical operator Rear connecting studs Plug-in adapters Drawout cassette Earth leakage/ground fault protector Power monitoring and metering module Cause-of-Trip LED module Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display DIgitrip 310+ test kit
Modications
Moisture fungus treatment Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Only one per pole. Refer to the Eaton.
CA08104001E
Series C Breaker Accessories and Modications
Table 27.4-91. Series C Breaker Accessories and Modications
Breaker Frame G F J K L M N
September 2011
Sheet 27 110
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Termination Accessories
Line and load terminals Plug nut Control wire terminal kit Base mounting hardware Terminal shields Interphase barriers Multiwire connectors
Alarm lockout (1 make/1 break) Alarm lockout (2 make/2 break) Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)/alarm lockout Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)/alarm lockout Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)/alarm lockout Standard shunt trip Low energy shunt trip Undervoltage release mechanism
Non-padlockable handle block Padlockable handle block Padlockable handle lock hasp Cylinder lock Key interlock kit Sliding bar interlock Walking beam interlock Electrical (solenoid) operator Electrical (motor) operator IQ Energy Sentinel LFD current limiter Plug-in adapters Drawout cassette Rear connecting studs Panelboard connecting straps Handle mechanisms Door hardware/accessories Solid-state (electronic) test kit Handle extension Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display Cause-of-Trip LED module Power monitoring and metering module (PM3) Digitrip 310+ test kit
Modications
Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine application

Make only (one pole). Requires two breakers. Refer to the Eaton.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 111

High Instantaneous Breakers
27.4-35
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination

Eatons LHH and NHH molded-case circuit breakers are furnished with a higher level of magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous settings as indicated in Table 27.4-94. These higher levels of magnetic pickup and electronic instantaneous values in turn allow the system designer to obtain selective coordination at fault current levels up to these higher ratings. Greater values of selective coordination are available based on manufacturer tested combinations using the LHH and NHH as line-side breakers and standard breakers as load-side devices. Refer to IA01200002E to determine the maximum fault values that selective coordination achieves. When the lineside and load-side molded-case circuit breaker trip ratings are chosen to coordinate in the overload range, they also can be selectively coordinated in the fault range up to the values listed in Table 27.4-94 or IA01200002E. For overcurrents protected by circuit breakers on the load-side of the LHH or NHH, only the effected load-side circuit breaker will open, while the line-side LHH and/or NHH circuit breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other critical loads supplied by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers.
directly protecting the circuit having an overcurrent (overload or fault) condition should open. All other overcurrent protective devices within these systems shall remain closed. Similarly, backup power system designs of a critical nature that are not code mandated may also require overcurrent protective devices to be selectively coordinated as much as practicable to provide a higher level of uptime.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Proven Technology and Performance

The LHH is based on the Series G L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the same small footprint and eld-t accessories as the L-Frame breaker. The NHH is based on the Series G N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the same footprint and accessories as the N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories must be factory installed. The LHH incorporates a thermalmagnetic trip unit with xed thermal and xed magnetic settings. The NHH has an OPTIM electronic trip unit with LSI adjustment capabilities. The instantaneous setting is adjustable from 1000 to 4000A or may be turned off to default to the frame override of 14,000A. A hand-held OPTIMizer must be used with the NHH to adjust short-time delay and instantaneous; however, the long delay pickup is xed and cannot be adjusted. The LHH and NHH breakers are available in Eatons panelboards and switchboards.
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker
General Description
Eatons Electrical Sector introduces new high-magnetic withstand moldedcase circuit breakers, specically designed for critical operations and selective coordination requirements. The high-magnetic withstand LHH and NHH frames continue the legacy of circuit breaker innovation for which Eaton is recognized throughout the world. The LHH and NHH breakers are equipped with 125 to 400A trip units with high-magnetic capability. This design enables the breakers to withstand up to 90 times rated current before opening under shortcircuit conditions. The LHH and NHH circuit breakers incorporate a higher level of instantaneous pickup, thus allowing for higher current levels of selective coordination. Standard molded-case circuit breakers typically are furnished with a magnetic pickup or electronic instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10x) the continuous trip rating.
Benets of Using the LHH and NHH Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Customer expectations and codes are driving product development to protect customers critical operations. NEC 2005 and 2008 requires circuits with elevators, emergency systems, legally required standby systems, health care essential systems and critical operation power systems to be selectively coordinated. Simply stated, only the closest protective device

UL CSA
Product Selection
Table 27.4-92. LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers
Ampere Rating 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit LHH Frame LHH3125FFG LHH3150FFG LHH3175FFG LHH3200FFG LHH3225FFG LHH3250FFG LHH3300FFG LHH3350FFG LHH3400FFG LSI Electronic Trip Unit NHH Frame NHH3150T52X15 NHH3175T52X15 NHH3200T52X15 NHH3225T52X15 NHH3250T52X15 NHH3300T52X15 NHH3350T52X15
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 112
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Three-pole 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 125400A LHH 150350A NHH Trip units: LHHthermal-magnetic NHHLSI electronic trip unit

LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics

Table 27.4-93. Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
Description Breaker Type LHH Max. rated current (amperes) 400 100 65 35 42 100 70 25 22 3 125400 NHH 350 100 65 35 100 70 25 3 150350
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vac
No rating plugs required Factory-sealed breakers LHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker NHH uses same internal and external accessories as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker

IEC 60947-2
220 Vac 415 Vac 690 Vac 125/250 Vdc Number of poles Ampere range
Table 27.4-94. Continuous Current Ratings

Continuous Current Rating Amperes 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 LHH Magnetic Trip Point Amperes 2500 2500 4000 4000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 Continuous Current Multiplier 20x 16x 22x 20x 26x 24x 20x 17x 15x NHH Instantaneous Trip Point Amperes 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 Continuous Current Multiplier 93x 80x 70x 62x 56x 47x 40x Short Delay Pickup Amperes 2251200 2601400 3001600 3381800 3752000 4502400 5252800
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 113

27.4-37

Table 27.4-95. Dimensions
Description LHH NHH Height 10.13 (257.3) 16.00 (406.4) Width 5.48 (139.2) 8.25 (209.5) Depth 4.09 (103.9) 5.50 (139.7) Weight in Lbs (kg) 12.36 (5.6) 46.80 (21.2)
22 23 24 25
4.06 (103.1)
C L Breaker 2.43 (61.7) R 0.25 (6.4) 3.16 (80.3)
26 27 28
5.58 141.7) 1.92 (48.8)
10.13 (257.3)
2.00 (50.8) 5.38 (136.7)
2.69 (68.3)
29
Side View
Front Cover Cutout
Front View Four-Pole
30 31
Figure 27.4-7. L-Frame
C L Breaker 3.44 (87.4) R 0.25 (6.4) 1.91 (48.5)
32 33
9.25 (235.0) 16.00 (406.4)
34 35
1.50 (38.1) 3.19 (81.0) 6.38 (162.1) Front Cover Cutout
3.68 (93.5)
8.25 (209.6)
5.50 (139.7)
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Front View Three-Pole
Side View
Figure 27.4-8. N-Frame
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 114
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Circuit Protectors, 31200A
Motor Circuit Protectors 31200A
Catalog Numbering System

Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Table 27.4-96. HMCP
Table 27.4-97. GMCP/HMCPE
HMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit Protector Type HMCP = 3-pole HM2P = 2-pole HMCPS = 3-pole Continuous Ampere Rating 003 = 3 007 = 7 015 = 15 025 = 25 030 = 30 050 = 50 070 = 70 100 = 100 150 = 150 250 = 250 400 = 400 600 = 600 800 = 800 12 = 1200 Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size A0 = 930/0 C0 = 2170/0 E0 = 45150/0 D0 = 4060/0 H1 = 90300/1 G2 = 80120/2 K2 = 150500/2 J2 = 115170/2 M2 = 210700/2 L3 = 160240/3 R3 = 3001000/3 T4 = 4501500/4 U4 = 7502500/4 A5 = 350700/5 C5 = 450900/5 D5 = 5001000/5 F5 = 6251250/5 G5 = 7501500/5 J5 = 8751750/5 K5 = 10002000/5 L5 = 11252250/5 W5 = 12502500/5 N5 = 15003000/5 R5 = 17503500/5 X5 = 20004000/5 L6 = 18006000/6 X6 = 5002500 Y6 = 10004000 X7 = 16006400 Y8 = 24009600 Suffix Non-aluminum terminals W/O terminals Load terminals only Line terminals only Stainless steel terms (150A frame only) No Sufx = Standard terminals on line and load (electronic) C W X Y S = = = = =
GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit Protector Type GMCP = 3-pole HMCPE = 3-pole Continuous Ampere Rating 003 = 3 007 = 7 015 = 15 030 = 30 050 = 50 060 = 60 063 = 63 070 = 70 100 = 100 Magnetic Trip Range GMCP A0 = C0 = E0 = H1 = K2 = J2 = M2 = 1530 3570 75150 150300 250500 300600 320630 HMCPE A0 = C0 = E0 = H1 = K2 = M2 = R3 = T3 = 933 2177 45165 90330 150550 210770 3001100 5001500 Suffix C = Non-aluminum terminals
Table 27.4-98. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum

Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number HMCPJ250D5L HMCPJ250F5L HMCPJ250G5L HMCPJ250J5L HMCPJ250K5L HMCPJ250L5L HMCPJ250W5L HMCPL600L6G HMCPL600N6G HMCPL600R6G HMCPL600X6G HMCPL600Y6G HMCPL600P6G HMCPL600M6G
JG-Frame
250 5001000 6251250 7501500 8751750 10002000 11252250 12502500
On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.
LG-Frame
600 11252250 15003000 17503500 20004000 22504500 25005000 30006000

UL listed for use with Eaton motor starters. Equipped with an electronic trip device.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 115

27.4-39
Motor Circuit Protector Catalog Numbers and Ranges

Tables are available to provide specic catalog numbers and application ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP), E-Frame (HMCPE), J-Frame (HMCP) and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit protectors. Motor circuit protector models are available with earth leakage ground fault protection. Models are also available for motor starters provided with electronic overload relays rather than thermal overload relays, such as the Eatons Advantage motor starter. Similar tables for the selection of the settings are available with motor control products that use motor circuit protectors. As required by the NEC, the HMCP setting is selected by using the actual full load ampere data from the motor nameplate. The corresponding trip settings provided are within 13 times the minimum full load amperes of the motor as required by the NEC. The NEC allows a higher setting for Design B energy efcient motors. See Volume 4Circuit Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, (Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Section 25) for detailed tables.
Accessories
Termination Accessories


Line and load terminals Keeper nut/plug nut Control wire terminal kit Base mounting hardware Terminal shields Terminal end covers Interphase barriers ELC current limiter Multiwire connector Only one internal accessory per pole maximum Alarm lockout (make/break) Alarm lockout (2 make/2 break) Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout Shunt tripstandard Shunt triplow energy Undervoltage release mechanism
Non-padlockable handle block Padlockable handle block Padlockable handle lock hasp Key interlock kit Sliding bar interlockrequires two breakers Electrical (solenoid) operator Handle mechanism Door hardware/accessories DIN rail adapter (GMCP only) Moisture fungus treatment Freeze test
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Modications


CA08104001E
Motor Protector Circuit Breaker
September 2011
Sheet 27 116
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
Product Selection
Table 27.4-99. JGMP Catalog Numbers
Continuous Amperes 50 100 160 250 35 kAIC Catalog Number
JGMPS050G JGMPS100G JGMPS160G JGMPS250G
65 kAIC Catalog Number

JGMPH050G JGMPH100G JGMPH160G JGMPH250G
Table 27.4-100. LGMP Catalog Numbers

Continuous Amperes 250 400 600 630

LGMPS250G LGMPS400G LGMPS600G LGMPS630G

LGMPH250G LGMPH400G LGMPH600G LGMPH630G
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
Note: For pre-trip alarm option, order style number 5721B31G02.
Technical Data
Table 27.4-101. JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz IEC 60947-2 220240 Vac 380415 Vac 660690 Vac NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Number of poles Ampere range I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs 85 85 40 40 12 6 85 35 25 3 50250 100 100 70 70 14 7 100 65 35 3 50250 250 JGMPS JGMPH
General Description
Eliminates need for separate overload relay.
Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload relay and still create manual motor control Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including: Disconnecting means Branch circuit short-circuit protection Overload protection
Table 27.4-102. LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range

Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) Breaker Type Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz 630 LGMPS LGMPH
Features

IEC 60947-2
220240 Vac 380415 Vac 660690 Vac
Phase unbalance protection Phase loss protection Hot trip/cold trip High load alarm Pre-detection trip relay option Class 10, 15, 20, 30 protection
I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs
85 85 50 50 20 10 85 50 25 3 250630
100 100 70 70 25 13 100 65 35 3 250630
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac

IEC 60947-2 UL 489 rating CSA C22.2
Number of poles Ampere range
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 117

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
27.4-41
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module (PM3)
The PM3 provides the following metering, monitoring and communications functions:
Communications
Metering

Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg) Phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg) Phase-to-neutral voltages (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg) Real power (kW)total and per phase Reactive power (kVAR)total and per phase Apparent power (kVA)total and per phase Power factortotal and per phase Real energy (WHr)forward, reverse and net Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward, reverse and net Apparent energy (VAHr)forward, reverse and net
INCOM and Modbus RTU communications Shielded-twisted pair communications Daisy-chaining of multiple units Web-based communications available through a Power Xpert Gateway TX and RX communication diagnostic LEDs
Contact Eaton for availability.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
Accuracy
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of reading Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1 Revenue Grade Accuracy: ANSI C12.1
Metering Module
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
General Description
The Power Monitoring and Metering Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on communications module that mounts directly to the load side of three-pole molded-case circuit breakers, similar to an earth leakage module. The PM3 adds revenue accurate power metering and breaker status monitoring to new and/or existing Series C and Series G breakers. Regardless of the type of trip unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic), the PM3 can be applied in applications where power metering, circuit breaker monitoring and/or communications is essential. The PM3 is extremely exible and can be used in main breaker or feeder breaker applications. The automatic voltage sensing means that the same PM3 module can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac applications. It can also be installed in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing (CBA) applications.
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the circuit breaker voltage for applications 480 Vac and below. External control power is not required for these applications. However, an auxiliary 24 Vdc external power input is included for applications requiring communications capability even when the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc auxiliary power is required.
Monitoring
Breaker status Open/close statusthru breaker auxiliary contact Tripped statusthru breaker bell alarm contact Unit healthashing status LED when module is powered
Breaker must include auxiliary contact and bell alarm contact accessory.
Product Selection
Table 27.4-103. PM3 Product Selection
Breaker Frame Series C, F-Frame (225A Frame) Line Voltage 208, 240, 480 208, 240, 480, 600 Series G, J-Frame (250A Frame) 208, 240, 480 208, 240, 480, 600 Series C, K-Frame (400A Frame) 208, 240, 480 Power Supply Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power required 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Integrated or 24 Vdc auxiliary power 24 Vdc auxiliary power required Communications Catalog Number INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM PM3F3225C02V48M PM3F3225C02V60M PM3J3250C02V48M PM3J3250C02V60M PM3L3630C02V48M
38 39 40 41 42
208, 240, 480, 600 Series G, L-Frame (600A Frame) 208, 240, 480 208, 240, 480, 600
INCOM INCOM INCOM
PM3L3630C02V60M PM3L3630C02V48M PM3L3630C02V60M
43
Contact Eaton for Modbus RTU availability.
CA08104001E
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
September 2011
Sheet 27 118
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Table 27.4-105. EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes 125 125 Poles 3 4 Catalog Number ELEBE3125G ELEBE4125G
Table 27.4-108. LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes 400 400 600 600 Poles 3 4 3 4 Catalog Number
ELLBN3400W ELLBN4400W ELLBN3600W ELLBN4600W
Table 27.4-106. JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
ELJBN3150W ELJBN4150W ELJBN3250W ELJBN4250W
Table 27.4-109. LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted, 230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
ELLBE3400W ELLBE4400W ELLBE3630W ELLBE4630W
Clockwise from Left: JG, LG MCCBs Shown with Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Table 27.4-107. JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted, 230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
ELJBE3160W ELJBE4160W ELJBE3250W ELJBE4250W
Table 27.4-110. Dimensions for Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module
Frame Height Width Depth
General Description
Eaton offers a three- and four-pole 30 mA ground fault (earth leakage) protection module for JG and LG breakers. The module does not restrict the use of other breaker accessories. UL-listed modules are available for JG and LG MCCBs. The JG and LG modules are both bottom mounted for circuits up to 160 and 250A (JG), or 400 and 630A for the LG. The module is completely self-contained because the current sensor, relay and power supply are located inside the product. Current pickup settings are selectable from 0.03 to 10A for all IEC-rated modules and JG UL-listed module, and 0.0330A for the LG UL-listed modules. Time delays are also selectable from instantaneous to 1.0 second for 0.10A settings and above. A current pickup setting of 0.03A defaults to an instantaneous time setting regardless of the time dials position. Two alarm contacts come as standard: a 50% pretrip and a 100% after trip, both based only on earth leakage current levels.
Three-Pole
EG JG LG EG JG LG 10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7) 15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1) 10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8) 11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7) 15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1)
Four-Pole
Figure 27.4-9. UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
Product Selection
Table 27.4-104. EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes 125 125 Poles 3 4 Catalog Number ELEBN3125G ELEBN4125G
43
Figure 27.4-10. IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 119

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
27.4-43
These breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the nal load to limit current to the load. Typical loads include lighting and power distribution, and motor controller applications.
Features and Benets

The combination of the Series G E-Frame current limiting breaker or HMCP and the current limiter module provides the following system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker
Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts. The high-level current limiting action is achieved by the use of special design, blowapart contacts. The opening speed of the contacts is amplied by the repulsion force in the slot motor and reverse loop stationary contact arm to effectively separate the contacts under high-level fault conditions in less than one millisecond. The rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system, thus limiting the amount of the otherwise available fault current
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
General Overview
Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source provides increased fault currents. In the past, 65 and 100 kA overcurrent protective devices may have suited the job. The new systems require in excess of 100 kA shortcircuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 150 kA at 480 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, the current limiter module provides automatic reset of the module after interruption. Reset the molded-case circuit breaker to restore power to the system without worry of nding the correct replacement fuse.
Product Selection
Table 27.4-111. EG
UL Listed (NEMA/IEC Rated) Base Molded-Case Circuit Breaker EGC3015FFG EGC3016FFG EGC3020FFG EGC3025FFG EGC3030FFG EGC3032FFG EGC3035FFG EGC3040FFG EGC3045FFG EGC3050FFG EGC3060FFG EGC3063FFG EGC3070FFG EGC3080FFG EGC3090FFG EGC3100FFG
Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter EGC3015FFGQ01 EGC3016FFGQ01 EGC3020FFGQ01 EGC3025FFGQ01 EGC3030FFGQ01 EGC3032FFGQ01 EGC3035FFGQ01 EGC3040FFGQ01 EGC3045FFGQ01 EGC3050FFGQ01 EGC3060FFGQ01 EGC3063FFGQ01 EGC3070FFGQ01 EGC3080FFGQ01 EGC3090FFGQ01 EGC3100FFGQ01
Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter EGC3015FFGQ02 EGC3016FFGQ02 EGC3020FFGQ02 EGC3025FFGQ02 EGC3030FFGQ02 EGC3032FFGQ02 EGC3035FFGQ02 EGC3040FFGQ02 EGC3045FFGQ02 EGC3050FFGQ02 EGC3060FFGQ02 EGC3063FFGQ02 EGC3070FFGQ02 EGC3080FFGQ02 EGC3090FFGQ02 EGC3100FFGQ02
Line and Load Terminations Included T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF
Interphase Barrier Included for Limiter EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
General Description
The current limiting breaker modules use a reverse loop stationary contact arm. When high short-circuit current is owing through the contacts of these modules, the positions of the reverse loop and moving contact arm induce opposing magnetic elds. The resulting ux lines cause rapid contact blowapart under fault conditions, resulting in very high interrupting capacities and providing current limiting characteristics. Current limiting breaker modules, in combination with Series G E-Frame breakers, are available from 15 to 100A and have an interrupting rating up to 100 kA at 600 Vac.
Table 27.4-112. HMCP

Motor Circuit Protector HMCPE003A0C HMCPE007C0C HMCPE015E0C HMCPE030H1C HMCPE050K2C HMCPE070M2C HMCPE100R3C HMCPE100T3C
Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter HMCPE003A0CQ01 HMCPE007C0CQ01 HMCPE015E0CQ01 HMCPE030H1CQ01 HMCPE050K2CQ01 HMCPE070M2CQ01 HMCPE100R3CQ01 HMCPE100T3CQ01
Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter HMCPE003A0CQ02 HMCPE007C0CQ02 HMCPE015E0CQ02 HMCPE030H1CQ02 HMCPE050K2CQ02 HMCPE070M2CQ02 HMCPE100R3CQ02 HMCPE100T3CQ02
Line and Load Terminations Included T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF T125EF
Interphase Barrier Included for Limiter EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK EIPBSK
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 120
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

Table 27.4-113. Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Frame EG HMCP Height 9.66 (245.7) 9.66 (245.7) Width 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) Depth 2.98 (75.8) 2.98 (75.8)
0.56 (14.2)
4.17 (105.9) 3.61 (91.7)
9.66 (245.4)
1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2) 1.00 (25.4)
0.50 1.00 (12.7) (25.4)
3.20 (81.3) 4.17 (105.9)
2.75 0.09 (69.9) (2.3)
0.78 (19.8) 0.41 (10.4)
Figure 27.4-11. EG-Frame with Current Limiter Module
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 121

Selection DataCurrent Limiting Breakers
27.4-45
Current Limiting Non-Fused Type FCL-Frame 15100A, LCL-Frame 125400A

FCL-Frame
Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add sufx Z to breaker catalog number listed. Table 27.4-115. FCL Terminals
Maximum Breaker Amperes 100 50 100 Wire Type AWG Wire Range
LCL-Frame
22 23 24 25 26 27
Standard Pressure Terminals

Al/Cu Al/Cu Al/Cu #141/0 #14#4 #44/0
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
LCL-Frame Breaker
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Terminal Catalog Number T225LA T401LA

Frame FCL Number Width of Poles 2, 3 Height Depth
Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Except as Noted

Type LCL breakers are not dened in Federal Specications W-C-375-b.
4.13 8.75 3.50 (104.8) (222.3) (88.9) 8.25 16.00 4.00 (209.6) (406.4) (101.6)
FCL-Frame Breaker
LCL, LCLG 2, 3

Table 27.4-119. LCL Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Volts AC Trip (50/60 Hz) Type 240 480 600

Table 27.4-114. FCL Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Volts AC Trip (50/60 Hz) Type 240 480
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 200,000 150,000

Frame FCL Ratings 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 200,000 200,000 100,000
N.I.T. N.I.T.
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Table 27.4-118. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plug

Frame Ratings LCL, LCLG 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 350, 400
Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. Table 27.4-120. LCL Terminals
Maximum AWG/kcmil Breaker Wire Range/Number Amperes of Conductors
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225 400 (1) #6350 kcmil Cu (1) #4250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu (1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4350 kcmil Al (1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
38 39 40

225 400 TA225LA1 TA400LA1
41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 122
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Current LimitingFused Type FB TRIPAC 15100A, LA TRI-PAC 70400A

FB TRI-PAC
Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add sufx Z to breaker catalog number listed. Table 27.4-121. FB TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum Breaker Amperes 100 50 100 Wire Type AWG Wire Range
LA TRI-PAC
Standard Pressure Terminals

Al/Cu Al/Cu Al/Cu (1) #141/0 (1) #14#4 (1) #44/0
LA TRI-PAC Breaker

Frame Number of Poles Width 4.13 (104.8) 8.13 (206.4) Height 8.75 (222.3) 16.00 (406.4) Depth 3.50 (88.9) 7.75 (196.9)

LA TRI-PAC breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as dened in Federal Specication W-C-375b.
FB TRI-PAC Breaker
FB LA
2, 3 2, 3

FB TRI-PAC breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as dened in Federal Specication W-C-375b.

Frame FB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC Ratings 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Underwriters Laboratories Listed

600 Vac maximum: 200,000A symmetrical.
Interrupting Capacity Ratings Underwriters Laboratories Listed

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000A.

Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add sufx Z to complete breaker catalog number. Table 27.4-124. LA TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum AWG/kcmil Breaker Wire Range/Number Amperes of Conductors Terminal Catalog Number T225LA T225LBF T401LA

225 225 400 (1) #6350 kcmil Cu (1) #6250 kcmil Cu (1) #4250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu (1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4350 kcmil Al/Cu (1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu

225 400 TA225LA1 TA400LA1
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 123

27.4-47
Current LimitingFused Type NB TRI-PAC 300800A, PB TRI-PAC 6001600A

NB TRI-PAC
Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add sufx Z to complete breaker catalog number. Table 27.4-125. NB TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum AWG/kcmil Ampere Wire Range/Number Rating of Conductors Terminal Catalog Number T350NB T700NB1 T1000NB1 TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1201NB1
PB TRI-PAC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28

350 700 800 700 800 800 1 #1600 kcmil Cu 2 2/0500 kcmil Cu 3 3/0500 kcmil Cu 2 #1500 kcmil Al/Cu 3 3/0400 kcmil Al/Cu 3 500750 kcmil Al/Cu
PB TRI-PAC Breaker

Frame Number Width of Poles NB 2, 3 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 12.06 (306.4) Height 22.00 (558.8) 22.13 (562.0) Depth 5.50 (139.7) 9.06 (230.2)

PB TRI-PAC breakers meet the requirements for Class 17a and 26a circuit breakers as dened in Federal Specication W-C-375b.
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
NB TRI-PAC Breaker
PB

NB TRI-PAC breakers meet the requirements for Class 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as dened in Federal Specication W-C-375b.


Frame NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC Ratings 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600


Bus Bar Connectors T Connector for Cu/Al Bus

Two required per pole. For rear bus connection. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90.

T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
39 40 41 42
Cable Connector (Optional)

For T Connector. Accepts four 600 kcmil copper cables.
Optional Cable Connector
43
CA08104001E
Selection DataCircuit Breaker Enclosures
September 2011
Sheet 27 124
22 23 24 25 26
NEMA 1 General Purpose

Surface or Flush Mounting 151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof

Stainless SteelType 304, Surface Mounting 151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
Ratings through 1200A are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. A NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design that includes knockouts is available. These units are rated 15400A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location

NEMA 1
Cast Aluminum, Explosion-Proof Surface Mounting 151200A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
NEMA 4/4X, 5
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Eatons NEMA 1 enclosed breakers are designed for indoor use in commercial buildings, apartment buildings and other areas where a general purpose enclosure is applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. (Padlocking not available on enclosures for QUICKLAG breakers.) Ratings through 1200A are listed with Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Both surface and ush mounted enclosures are available. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319
This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and 5 requirements for water and dustproof applications and has no knockouts or other openings. It is particularly well suited for use in dairies, borax mines, breweries, paper mills and other process industries. The operating handle can be padlocked in the OFF position, and is interlocked to prevent the door from opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings through 1200A are Underwriters Laboratories listed as suitable for service entrance application. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location
NEMA 3R Rainproof Surface Mounting

Interchangeable Hubs (through 400A) 151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 12 Dustproof Surface Mounting

No Knockouts or Other Openings 151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B, C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E, F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service cast aluminum enclosure is supplied with a wide, machined anged cover to prevent igniting outside atmospheres by arcing from inside the enclosure. Front operable, the handle padlocks in the OFF position. Enclosures rated 600A and above have lift-off hinges for ease of assembly.
Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
UL File Number E84577 Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Seismic Qualication
NEMA 3R
This general purpose outdoor service center employs a circuit breaker inside a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure to serve as a main disconnect and protective device for feeder circuits. The operating handle can be padlocked in the OFF position, and is interlocked to prevent the door from opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings through 1200A are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319
NEMA 12 Dustproof
The Eaton Type 12 enclosure is designed in line with specications for special industry application where unusually severe conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and other foreign materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF position and the cover is interlocked with the handle mechanism to prevent opening the cover with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 125

27.4-49
To determine enclosed circuit breaker dimensions, rst select the desired frame size along with the desired NEMA class of enclosure (from Table 27.4-128). This will determine the enclosure catalog number. Then, use Tables 27.4-132 through 27.4-138 to determine appropriate dimensions for that selected catalog number. Table 27.4-128. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide
Breaker Frame Breaker Ampere Range Enclosure NEMA Class 1 surface 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 st. steel 1 surface 1 ush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 st. steel 1 surface 1 ush 3R 7/9 cast alum. 7/9 cast alum. 1 surface 1 ush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 st. steel 1 surface 1 ush 3R 1 surface 1 ush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 st. steel 7/9 cast alum. 1 surface 1 ush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 st. steel 7/9 cast alum. 1 surface 3R 12 4/4X, 5 st. steel 7/9 cast alum. Catalog Number SGDN100 RGDN100 JGDN100 DGDN100 WGDN100 SFDN100 FFDN100 RFDN100 JFDN100 DFDN100 WFDN100 SEF3 FEF3 REF3 XFDN050B XFDN225B SFDN225 FFDN225 RFDN225 JFDN225 DFDN225 WFDN225 SJJ3 FJJ3 RJJ3 SJDN250 FJDN250 RJDN250 JJDN250 DJDN250 WJDN250 XJDN250B SKDN400 FKDN400 RKDN400 JKDN400 DKDN400 WKDN400 XKDN400B SLDN600 RLDN600 JLDN600 WLDN600 XMCN800B
Table 27.4-128. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide (Continued)

Breaker Frame Breaker Ampere Range Enclosure NEMA Class 1 surface 1 ush 3R 3R 1 surface 1 ush 3R 3R 1 surface 3R 12 4/4X, 5 st. steel 1 surface 3R 12 4/4X, 5 st. steel 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 st. steel 1 surface 3R 12 4/4X 12 4/4X, 5 st. steel Catalog Number SEF3 FEF3 REF3 REG4 SJJ3 FJJ3 RJJ3 RJG4 SLG630 RLG630 JLG630 WLG630 SLG630E RLG630E JLG630E WLG630E RFDN150 JFDN150 DFDN150 WFDN150 SNDN1200 RNDN1200 JNDN1200 WNDN1200 JNDPN800 WNDPN800
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Series G Breakers
EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH, EGC 15225
Series C Breakers
GC, GHC, GD two- and three-pole only GHCGFEP single-pole only EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC 15100
JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU
100250
LGE, LGS, LGH
250600
15100
Earth Leakage Breakers

LGE, LGS, LGH used with ELLBN 250600
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (F Frame) EHD, FD, FDB HFD, FDC FD, FDB, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC
15225
TRI-PAC Breakers
FB-P 15100
1550 60225 125225
LA-P
70400
NB-P

500800
JDB, JD, HJD, JDC
100250
JD, JDB, HJD, JDC
125250
Three- or four-pole. 65 kAIC at 480 Vac maximum. Four-pole only. Requires additional adapter plate.
KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK
125400
LD, LDB, HLD
300600
1 surface SNDN1200 3R RNDN1200 12 JNDN1200 4/4X, 5 st. steel WNDN1200 ND, HND 4001200 7/9 cast alum. XNDN1200B Suitable for use with single-pole breaker base mounting plate kit. QCCBP required. Maximum wire size: 4/0. Three-pole only.
LD, LDB, HLD, MDL, HMDL MDL, HMDL, ND, HND
300600 400800 4001200
CA08104001E
Table 27.4-129. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
Maximum Enclosure Rating (Amperes) 100 100 (all others) 250 400 600 Main Lug Size Cu/Al (1) 141/0 (1) 141/0 (1) 4350 kcmil (1) 4350 kcmil (1) 4750 kcmil or (2) 1/0250 kcmil (2) 250500 kcmil Ground Lug Size Catalog Cu/Al Number (1) 142 (1) 141/0 (1) 4300 kcmil (1) 4300 kcmil (1) 4300 kcmil (1) 4300 kcmil DH100NK INK100 INK250 INK250G INK400 INK600 INK1200
September 2011
Sheet 27 126
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 27.4-131. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Description A universal breather/drain tting is installed in the top of an enclosure to provide ventilation to minimize condensation and in the bottom to allow drainage of accumulated condensation while maintaining explosion-proof integrity. Compliance Type BD: NEMA 7Class I, Groups C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB NEMA 9Class II, Groups F, G Conduit Opening 0.50 (12.7) Catalog Number XPBD2
1200

(3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) #6250 kcmil (4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
For use with RFDN100, SFDN100, SEF3, FEF3, REF3 and REG4 enclosures with breakers 100A and less. For use with SJJ3, FJJ3, RJJ3 and RJG4 enclosures only.
Type DBB: 0.50 (12.7) NEMA 7Class I, Groups B, C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + Hydrogen NEMA 9Class II, Groups E, F, G
XPDBB50
Table 27.4-130. Raintight HubsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Hub Diameter Catalog Number 1.00 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) DS100H1 DS125H1 DS150H1 DS200H1
Small Hubs
For use with RGDN and RFDN All rainproof enclosures 30400A are shipped with plate over cutout. Hubs are not supplied with screws on 30400A enclosures. Use screws from plate.
Large Hubs
For use with RJDN. RKDN has two cutouts 2.00 (50.8) DS200H2 2.50 (63.5) DS250H2 3.00 (76.2) DS300H2
Required if using Type DS hubs on RJDN and RKDN enclosures DS900AK
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 127

Technical Data and SpecicationsCircuit Breaker Enclosures
27.4-51

NEMA 1, 12, 12K, 3R
Note: Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
22 23
D 13.03 (331.0) 17.00 (431.8) 18.88 (479.6) 18.75 (476.3) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 34.00 (863.6) 51.63 (1311.5) 51.63 (1311.5) 46.56 (1182.6) 61.84 (1570.7) E 1.20 (30.5) N/A 1.13 (28.7) 1.20 (30.5) 1.95 (49.5) 1.88 (47.8) 9.28 (235.7) 1.94 (49.3) 1.94 (49.3) 1.91 (48.5) 1.97 (50.0) F 17.19 (436.6) 18.81 (477.8) 23.00 (584.2) 22.94 (582.7) 34.22 (869.2) 34.39 (873.5) 38.50 (977.9) 50.13 (1273.3) 50.13 (1273.3) 45.56 (1157.2) 60.91 (1547.1) Approximate Weight in Lbs (kg) 12 (5) 13 (6) 15 (7) 15 (7) 27 (12) 31 (14) 53 (24) 90 (41) 90 (41) 81 (37) 178 (81)
Table 27.4-132. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted (See Figure 27.4-12)

Catalog Number SGDN100 SFDN100 SEF3 SFDN225 SJJ3 SJDN250 SKDN400 SLG630 SLG630E SLDN600 SNDN1200

Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm) Amperes A B 100 100 225 225 250 250 400 600 600 600 1200
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C 6.28 (159.5) 5.20 (132.1) 6.51 (165.4) 6.28 (159.5) 7.49 (190.2) 7.20 (182.9) 10.94 (277.9) 9.96 (253.0) 9.96 (253.0) 12.38 (314.5) 15.41 (391.4)
17.50 (444.5) 19.13 (485.9) 23.45 (595.6) 23.25 (590.6) 34.69 (881.1) 34.70 (881.4) 38.81 (985.8) 51.06 (1296.9) 51.06 (1296.9) 45.88 (1165.4) 61.22 (1555.0)
8.56 (217.4) 9.13 (231.9) 8.38 (212.9) 8.56 (217.4) 10.90 (276.9) 10.92 (277.4) 11.06 (280.9) 21.87 (555.5) 21.87 (555.5) 14.31 (363.5) 21.44 (544.6)
Maximum wire size: 4/0. Total width, including door clip is 9.95 inches (252.7 mm). Single centered mounting hole provided. Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil. For earth leakage applications. Includes an opening so that the settings are accessible without removing the cover.
Table 27.4-133. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted (See Figure 27.4-13)

Catalog Number FFDN100 FEF3 FFDN225 FJJ3 FJDN250 FKDN400

Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm) Amperes A B 100 225 225 250 250 400 18.81 (477.8) 24.50 (622.3) 24.56 (623.8) 36.00 (914.4) 36.02 (914.9) 40.13 (1019.3) 9.72 (246.9) 9.75 (247.7) 9.72 (246.9) 12.25 (311.2) 12.23 (310.6) 12.38 (314.5)
C 6.28 (159.5) 6.51 (165.4) 6.28 (159.5) 7.49 (190.2) 7.20 (182.9) 10.94 (277.9)
D 13.03 (331.0) 18.88 (479.6) 18.75 (476.3) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 34.00 (863.6)
E 1.86 (47.2) 1.82 (46.2) 1.86 (47.2) 2.63 (66.8) 1.88 (47.8) 2.94 (74.7)
F 18.50 (469.9) 23.00 (584.2) 24.25 (616.0) 34.22 (869.2) 35.70 (906.8) 39.81 (1011.2)
Approximate Weight in Lbs (kg) 12 (5) 15 (7) 15 (7) 27 (12) 32 (15) 53 (24)
31 32 33 34
Maximum wire size: 4/0. Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil.
E B C
E B C
35 36
37 38 39
Figure 27.4-12. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted
Figure 27.4-13. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
Table 27.4-134. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof (See Figure 27.4-14)
Catalog Number JGDN100 JFDN100 JFDN225 JJDN250 JKDN400 JLG630 JLG630E JLDN600 JNDPN800 JNDN1200 DGDN100 DFDN100 DFDN100E DFDN225 DJDN250 DKDN400

September 2011
Sheet 27 128
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Maximum Amperes 100 100 225 250 400 600 600 600 800 1200 100 100 100 225 250 400
Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 19.91 (505.7) 19.91 (505.7) 25.66 (651.8) 37.53 (953.3) 41.69 (1058.9) 53.37 (1355.6) 53.37 (1355.6) 48.31 (1227.1) 63.59 (1615.2) 63.59 (1615.2) 19.91 (505.7) 19.91 (505.7) 25.66 (651.8) 25.66 (651.8) 37.53 (953.3) 41.69 (1058.9) B 9.16 (232.7) 9.16 (232.7) 9.16 (232.7) 11.88 (301.8) 12.31 (312.7) 23.06 (585.7) 23.06 (585.7) 15.56 (395.2) 22.63 (574.8) 22.63 (574.8) 9.16 (232.7) 9.16 (232.7) 9.16 (232.7) 9.16 (232.7) 11.88 (301.8) 12.31 (312.7) C 9.31 (236.5) 9.31 (236.5) 9.31 (236.5) 10.22 (259.6) 14.06 (357.1) 14.10 (358.1) 14.10 (358.1) 15.50 (393.7) 17.63 (447.8) 17.63 (447.8) 9.31 (236.5) 9.31 (236.5) 9.31 (236.5) 9.31 (236.5) 10.22 (259.6) 14.06 (357.1) D 18.53 (470.7) 18.53 (470.7) 24.28 (616.7) 35.77 (908.6) 39.94 (1014.5) 51.63 (1311.4) 51.63 (1311.4) 46.56 (1182.6) 61.84 (1570.7) E 1.70 (43.2) 1.70 (43.2) 1.70 (43.2) 1.94 (49.3) 1.97 (50.0) 1.94 (49.3) 1.94 (49.3) 1.92 (48.8) 1.97 (50.0)
Approximate Weight in Lbs (kg) 16 (7) 19 (9) 19 (9) 37 (17) 58 (26) 94 (43) 94 (43) 84 (38) 110 (50) 175 (80) 16 (7) 19 (9) 19 (9) 19 (9) 37 (17) 58 (26)
Maximum wire size: 4/0. Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil. For earth leakage applications.
Table 27.4-135. NEMA 3R Rainproof (See Figure 27.4-15)

Catalog Number RGDN100 RFDN100 REF3 REG4 RFDN225 RJJ3 RJG4 RJDN250 RKDN400 RLG630 RLG630E RLDN600 RNDN1200

Maximum Amperes 100 100 225 125 225 250 250 250 400 600 600 600 1200
Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 19.91 (505.7) 19.91 (505.7) 25.65 (651.5) 25.65 (651.5) 25.66 (651.8) 37.47 (951.7) 37.47 (951.7) 37.50 (952.5) 41.69 (1058.9) 53.37 (1355.6) 53.37 (1355.6) 48.31 (1227.1) 63.59 (1615.2) B 9.16 (232.7) 9.19 (232.7) 11.30 (287.0) 11.30 (287.0) 9.16 (232.7) 12.16 (308.9) 12.16 (308.9) 11.88 (301.8) 12.31 (312.7) 23.06 (585.7) 23.06 (585.7) 15.56 (395.2) 22.63 (574.8) C 9.31 (236.5) 9.31 (236.5) 10.93 (277.6) 10.93 (277.6) 9.31 (236.5) 11.29 (286.8) 11.29 (286.8) 10.22 (259.6) 14.06 (357.1) 14.10 (358.1) 14.10 (358.1) 15.50 (393.7) 17.63 (447.8) D 18.53 (470.7) 18.53 (470.7) 24.26 (616.2) 24.26 (616.2) 24.28 (616.7) 35.73 (907.5) 35.73 (907.5) 35.77 (908.6) 39.94 (1014.5) 51.63 (1311.4) 51.63 (1311.4) 46.56 (1182.6) 61.84 (1570.7) E 1.70 (43.2) 1.70 (43.2) 1.73 (43.9) 1.73 (43.9) 1.70 (43.2) 1.84 (46.7) 1.84 (46.7) 1.94 (49.3) 1.97 (50.0) 1.94 (49.3) 1.94 (49.3) 1.92 (48.8) 1.97 (50.0)
Approximate Weight in Lbs (kg) 16 (7) 19 (9) 22 (10) 22 (10) 19 (9) 32 (15) 32 (15) 37 (17) 58 (26) 94 (43) 94 (43) 84 (38) 175 (80)
Maximum wire size: 4/0. Single centered mounting hole provided on RFDN100, Series B. Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil. For earth leakage applications.
ON A D OFF A D OFF F
39 40 41 42 43
B
Figure 27.4-14. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof
Figure 27.4-15. NEMA 3R Rainproof
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27 129

Table 27.4-136. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless SteelDimensions in Inches (mm)
27.4-53
E B C
Catalog Number WGDN100
Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) 16 (7) 16 (7) 20 (9) 20 (9) 39 (18) 60 (27) 88 (40) 39 (18) 185 (84)
Maximum Dimensions Amperes A B 100 100 150 225 250 400 600 600 1200 19.91 (505.6) 19.91 (505.6) 25.66 (651.7) 25.66 (651.7) 37.50 (952.5) 41.69 (1058.9) 48.31 (1227.2) 37.50 (952.5) 63.59 (1615.3) 8.84 (224.6) 8.84 (224.6) 8.84 (224.6) 8.84 (224.6) 11.56 (293.7) 11.75 (298.4) 14.91 (378.6) 11.56 (293.7) 22.00 (558.8)
22
D 18.53 (470.7) 18.53 (470.7) 24.28 (616.7) 24.28 (616.7) 35.77 (908.5) 39.94 (1014.4) 46.56 (1182.7) 35.77 (908.5) 61.84 (1570.8) E 1.70 (43.3) 1.70 (43.3) 1.70 (43.3) 1.70 (43.3) 1.94 (49.2) 1.97 (50.0) 1.92 (48.8) 1.94 (49.2) 1.97 (50.0)
C 9.31 (236.6) 9.31 (236.6) 9.31 (236.6) 9.31 (236.6) 10.22 (259.6) 14.06 (357.2) 15.50 (393.7) 10.22 (259.6) 17.63 (447.7)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
D A
ON OFF
WFDN100 WFDN150 WFDN225 WJDN250
Figure 27.4-16. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel
WKDN400 WLDN600 WLG630 WNDN1200
Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 27.4-138 for breaker weights.
Table 27.4-137. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals15250ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog Number Breaker Size Amperes Number of Outlets Dimensions Mounting A B J Inside C D E Outside F G H K Dim 2.00 (50.8) 2.31 (58.7) 3.50 (88.9) Standard Conduit Size 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) 2.50 (63.5) Approximate Weight Lbs 38 57 104 145 170 kg 17.3 25.9 47.2 65.8 77.2
XFDN050B XFDN100B XFDN225B XJDN225B XJDN250B

1550 60100 125225 70225 250
4 4 4 4 4
5.50 13.13 14.13 6.13 10.75 5.25 10.63 15.25 8.88 (139.7) (333.5) (358.9) (155.7) (273.1) (133.4) (270.0) (387.4) (225.6) 6.00 18.00 19.00 6.50 16.00 5.50 11.00 20.50 9.00 (152.4) (457.2) (482.6) (165.1) (406.4) (139.7) (279.4) (520.7) (228.6) 10.25 22.63 (260.4) (574.8) 8.50 27.13 (215.9) (689.1) 9.50 27.25 (241.3) (692.2) 11.38 20.00 6.38 16.38 25.13 9.63 (289.1) (508.0) (162.1) (416.1) (638.3) (244.6) 11.25 29.88 7.38 16.00 29.50 12.31 (285.8) (759.0) (187.5) (406.4) (749.3) (312.7) 11.25 29.88 8.06 16.38 35.00 12.38 (285.8) (759.0) (204.7) (416.1) (889.0) (314.5)
4.00 3.00 (101.6) (76.2) 4.19 4.00 (106.4) (101.6)
Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 27.4-139 for breaker weights. Maximum wire size: 4/0.
(2) 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) NPT
38 39 40 41 42
Figure 27.4-17. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant SealsDual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100A and Below
43
CA08104001E
Table 27.4-138. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals4001200ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog Number Breaker Size Amperes Dimensions in Inches (mm) Overall Enclosure A XKDN400B XLDN600B 400 600 800 1200 35.00 (889.0) 37.88 (962.2) 47.88 (1216.2) 64.00 (1625.6) B 16.38 (416.1) 23.88 (606.6) 13.63 (346.2) 26.00 (660.4) C 12.63 (320.8) 14.25 (362.0) 12.81 (325.4) 21.38 (543.1) Enclosure Mounting E 9.50 (241.3) 16.00 (406.4) 16.13 (409.7) 27.56 (700.0) F 27.25 (692.2) 45.38 (1152.7) 40.75 (1035.1) 38.63 (981.2) Conduit H 3.00 (76.2) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 6.50 (165.1) I 4.19 (106.4) 5.00 (127.0) 4.00 (101.6) 4.38 (111.3) Standard Conduit Size 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) Location 1, 3 and 6, 8 1, 3 and 6, 8 1, 3 and 6, 8 1, 3 and 6, 8
September 2011
Sheet 27 130
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Weight
Lbs 170 419 228 567
kg 77 191 104 257
XKCN800B XNDN1200B

Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 27.4-139 for breaker weights. Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil. Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed).
Table 27.4-139. Typical Breaker Weights

Conduit Position No.
1 2 3 G-MTG. Holes (4) J B
Frame G E F J K L M N
D C
Lbs 2 3 5 12 13 20 30 45
kg 0.9 1.4 2.3 5.4 5.9 9.1 13.6 20.4
31 32
8 7 6 H H E-MT I
33
Figure 27.4-18. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Table 27.4-140. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data

1st Field Enclosure Type NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 12K NEMA 4/4X, 5 NEMA 7/9 Flush Surface F S R J D W X 2nd Field Breaker Family G-Frame F-Frame J-Frame K-Frame L-Frame M-Frame N-Frame 3rd Field Maximum Ampacity 50 100 150 225 250 400 600 1200 NEMA Enclosure Type 1 3R 12 Denitions NEMA Standard Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment. Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation. Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and dripping noncorrosive liquids. Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts. Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust and falling dirt. Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classied as Class I, Groups B, C or D as dened in the National Electrical Code. Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classied as Class II, Groups E, F or G as dened in the National Electrical Code.
Stainless Cast Al.
F-MTG. A
30
12K
1st 2nd Field Field
3rd Field
4/4X
R FD N 150
5 NEMA Enclosure Breaker Frame NEMA Enclosure 7 9
41 42 43

N in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement. XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
CA08104001E
Switching DevicesLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 28 001
28.0-1
Switching Devices Low Voltage
Contents
Switching DevicesLow Voltage General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-2 General-Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-3 Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-3 Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-3 Six-Pole Motor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-4 Heavy-Duty Double-Throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-4 Quick-Connect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-5 Enclosed Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-5 EnviroLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-5 NEMA 7/9Hazardous Location Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-6 Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7 Elevator Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7 Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-10 Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-11 K-Series Switch Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-13 Accessories, Hubs, Lug Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-14 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-17 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-25 Short-Circuit Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-27 Typical Fuse Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-28 Flex Center Factory Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-30 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16441A Section 26 28 16.16 Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16441B Section 26 28 16.23 Elevator Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16445 Section 26 28 16.17 Quick-Connect Double-Throw . . . . . . . Section 16441C Section 26 28 16.26
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Quick-Connect Double-Throw Safety Switches
CA08104001E
28.0-2 Switching DevicesLow Voltage Safety Switches

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 28 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Safety Switches
General-Duty
Heavy-Duty
EnviroLine
Double-Throw

Rotary
Safety switches have a number of applications from service entrance to branch circuit protection. They are also horsepower rated for use as motor circuit switches. The Application Guide Table 28.0-1, below, summarizes major differences and similarities between the heavy-duty and general-duty type of Eatons safety switches. Individual catalog pages and selection tables provide more specic information as to number of poles, voltage, specications and horsepower ratings.
K-Series Switch Design

Note: K-Series design available where the letter K appears in the catalog number.
The efcient K-Series design uses double-break, rotary blade action for high performance and reliability. Here are some of the characteristics of the K-Series type of switch: High visibility handle and nameplate for indication of switch position ON or OFF Clear line terminal shields on heavy-duty switches only Unique Control Pole option allows the addition of a late-make/ early-break, 15A switched pole for disconnecting control power circuits
Generous wiring roommeeting or exceeding NEC wire bending space Built-in fuse pullers in NEMA 4X and 12 enclosed switches through 200A Side-hinged NEMA 3R enclosure doors Tangential knockouts in heavyduty NEMA 1 and 3R enclosures through 200A Type 304 or 316 stainless steel enclosures for UL NEMA 4X applicationsdust-tight, watertight and corrosion-resistant NEMA 12 enclosures for 30800A switches also rated for NEMA 3R use when a factory provided drain hole is opened Rated for 60C/75C wire connection
Table 28.0-1. Safety Switch Application GuideSee Catalog Selection Tables for Specic Ratings
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Application/ Features Type of facility Maximum voltages Short-circuit rating for non-fused switches Short-circuit rating with standard fuse clips Short-circuit rating with fuse options Ampere sizes Maximum horsepower ratings UL (NEMA) enclosure types
General-Duty Safety Switches Residential, commercial, light industrial 240 Vac250 Vdc in larger sizes 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes
Heavy-Duty Safety Switches Commercial, institutional, industrial 600 Vac250 Vdc and 600 Vdc 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Higher combination ratings available with upstream Eaton molded-case circuit breakers and fuses. Switches with Class H Fuse Clips10,000 rms amperes 8001200A switches with Class L fusing200,000 rms Switches with Class R or Class J fusing and 200800A switches with Class T fuse adaptation200,000A at 480V and 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600V 30, 60, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1200 250 hp at 240V, 500 hp at 480 and 600 Vac Type 1 indoor, 3R outdoor Type 4 watertight and dust-tight Type 4X watertight, dust-tight and corrosion-resistant Type 12 indoor falling dust, dirt and liquids Type 12/3R convertible to outdoor use Type 7/9 hazardous (classied) locations Box lug (screw pressure) for Al/Cu wire Field- or factory-installed for all sizes Field-installed for K-Series switches Standard in Type 4X and 12 enclosed switches through 200A eld-installed for all other 30200A switches
With Class H fuse clips10,000 rms symmetrical amperes Class R fuse adaptation and 400600A switches with T or J fuse adaptation100,000 rms amperes 30, 60, 100, 200, 400, 600 200 hp at 240 Vac Type 1general purpose indoor use Type 3Rrainproof and sleet-resistant
Terminals Electrical interlock snap-switch type Control pole interlock Fuse pullers
Box lug (screw pressure) for Al/Cu wire Field-installed kit, 200600A sizes Field-installed kit, 400600A sizes Not available
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 003
Switching DevicesLow Voltage Safety Switches

General DescriptionSelection Guide
28.0-3
General-Duty
Heavy-Duty
Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch
22 23 24 25 26
General-Duty (Plug Fuse)
27
Heavy-Duty
28
Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch
For heavy commercial and industrial applications where reliable performance and service continuity are critical.

Marked as suitable for NEC 690 PV applications up to 600 Vdc.

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General-Duty (Cartridge Fuse)
For residential and commercial applications. Suitable for light-duty motor circuits and service entrance.

240 Vac 30600A For short-circuit ratings, see Technical Data Suitable for service entrance applications unless otherwise noted Fusible and non-fusible switches are 100% load break and load make rated The continuous load current of fusible switches is not to exceed 80% of the rating of fuses employed in other than motor circuits. Nonfusible switches are 100% fully rated 200600A features K-Series design Horsepower rated Ample wire bending space provides for easier installation With Class R fuses, switches may be used on systems capable of delivering 100,000A rms symmetrical
Note: Plug fuse switches are not service entrance rated.
600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum 301200A For short-circuit ratings, see Technical Data Horsepower rated Fusible and non-fusible switches are 100% load break and load make rated The continuous load current of fusible switches is not to exceed 80% of the rating of fuses employed in other than motor circuits. Nonfusible switches are 100% fully rated Suitable for service entrance applications unless otherwise noted Visible double break rotary blade mechanism. Two points of contact provide a positive open and close, easier operation, and also help to prevent contact burning for longer contact life Triple padlocking capability. Personnel safety feature because the large hasp can accommodate up to three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank locks. Cabinet door can be further padlocked at the top and bottom Interlocking mechanism. Door cannot be opened when the handle is in the ON position. Built-in defeater mechanism provides for user access when necessary De-ionizing arc chutes. Arc chutes conne and suppress the arcs produced by contacts under load
UL 98 listed All switches are single-pole and suitable for switching one circuit Clear polycarbonate deadfront to guard against accidental contact with live parts Suitable for positive and negative grounded systems100% load break rated with current owing in either direction NEC 690.17compliant labeling warning that the switch terminals may be energized in the open position NEC 690.14.(C) two required PV System Disconnect labels included Isolated ground terminals (neutral) for grounded conductors Ground lug for equipment grounding conductor NEMA 3R, 12 and 4X stainless enclosures Fusible and non-fusible congurationsClass R fuse clips standard Fuse clips are located on the center pole to ensure that both fuse clips are de-energizedmeets NEC Article 690.16, which requires isolation of the fuse from all potential supply sources
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 28 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Six-Pole Motor Circuit
Heavy-Duty Double-Throw
Six-Pole Motor Circuit
A compact safety switch thats ideal for use in heavy industry...when an in sight disconnecting means is required for twospeed motors that are remote from their motor control devices.

Heavy-Duty Double-Throw
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
600 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum 30200A Fusible or non-fusible Trunk-type latches keep the cover tightly closed and a neoprene gasket seals out moisture and dust from the switch assembly Visible double break rotary blade mechanism. Two points of contact provide a positive open and close, easier operation, and also help to prevent contact burning for longer contact life Clear line shield protection Built-in fuse pullers Clearly visible handle Triple padlocking capability. Cabinet door can be further padlocked at the top and bottom De-ionizing arc chutes. Arc chutes conne and suppress the arcs produced by contacts under load
Used to transfer service from a normal power source to an alternate source, or to switch from one load circuit to another.

For short-circuit ratings, see Technical Data 301200A switches are horsepower rated 600 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum Fusible or non-fusible Fusible and non-fusible switches are 100% load break and load make rated The continuous load current of fusible switches is not to exceed 80% of the rating of fuses employed in other than motor circuits. Nonfusible switches are 100% fully rated Suitable for service entrance applications unless otherwise noted Wiring conguration for fusible double-throw switches up through 600A are wired from factory for a single load to be supplied by a normal or alternate source. Can be eld modied to allow two loads to be alternately supplied by a single power source
800A fusible double-throw switches must be ordered from the factory for either two-source or two-load conguration 1200A fusible double-throw switches are available only for two-source connections Ample wire bending space provides for easier installation Visible double-break rotary blade mechanism. Two points of contact provide a positive open and close, easier operation, and also help to prevent contact burning for longer contact life Triple padlocking capability. Personnel safety feature because the large hasp can accommodate up to three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank locks Clearly visible handle. The position (ON or OFF) can be clearly seen from a distance Additional locking capability. Cabinet door can be further padlocked at the top and bottom Clear line shield protects against accidental contact with energized parts. Probe holes enable the user to test if the line side is energized without removing the shield De-ionizing arc chutes. Arc chutes conne and suppress the arcs produced by contacts under load UL listed switching neutral capability is available on three-pole and four-pole non-fusible double-throw switches with the installation of the proper bonding kit shown on Page 28.0-14
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 005

28.0-5
Quick-Connect Switches
Enclosed Rotary
EnviroLine
22 23 24 25 26
Enclosed Rotary
Provides users with the ability to lock directly wired motor loads in the OFF position to comply with new OSHA lockout/tagout regulations. Also for machine applications that require compact, economical disconnect switches.
Quick-Connect Double-Throw

Stainless Steel Switch
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Eaton offers a line of safety switches designed for your special application and/or extreme environmental conditions.
Provides a safe and quick means of connecting portable generators to facilities, transferring the building to backup power, or providing for temporary connection of portable loads.

Single-throw and double-throw designs Safety interlocks prevent access to the receptacle compartment unless the lower switch is in the open position. This prevents against accidentally unplugging a circuit under load For short-circuit ratings, see Technical Data 30800A switches 600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum Fusible or non-fusible Fusible and non-fusible switches are 100% load break and load make rated Cam-Lok or Posi-Lok receptacle options NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure ratings Switching neutral option
UL listed Meets NEC Article 430 requirements for a separate disconnect means within sight of all motor loads Padlockable in the OFF position (up to three padlocks) to meet OSHA lockout requirements Available 1680A ratings 600 Vac, three- and four-pole non-fusible device Rated at highest available hp rating (at 480 Vac, 16A10 hp, 25A15 hp, 30A15 hp, 40A20 hp, 60A30 hp, 80A40 hp) Rated for making and breaking loads Accepts auxiliary contacts Capability to signal PLC controllers Ground lug connection provided Can be rated up to 65 kAIC, when protected by applicable upstream fusing
EnviroLine Stainless Steel Switch : Primarily for use in the meatpacking and food processing industries, or any application where water is frequently used to hose down equipment. In addition to the stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure, the interior mechanism, back pan and springs are all stainless steel. Ratings for these heavy-duty switches are 30400A, 240600 Vac, available as fusible and non-fusible switches
Window Switches
Window Switches: These switches are available with either an upper window over the switch contacts or a lower window over the fuse block. The upper window provides visual verication of ON/OFF status. The lower window switch allows for visual verication of fuse status if used in conjunction with fuses with blown fuse indicator. Ratings are 30800A and 2001200A, 240600 Vac, fusible and non-fusible. Available in NEMA 12/3R, 4X stainless steel enclosures
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 28 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Non-Metallic Halyester Switch
NEMA 7/9Hazardous Location Disconnect Switch
Receptacle Switches
Non-Metallic Switches
DS361UX
Receptacle Switches: These heavyduty switches are pre-wired and interlocked to polarized receptacles for three-phase, three-wire, grounded type power plugs. These are used for portable power applications such as welders, infrared ovens, batch feeders, conveyors, and truck and marine docks. Receptacles are interlocked to handle mechanisms so that power plugs may not be inserted or removed when the switch is in the ON position unless noted otherwise. Ratings are 30100A, 600 Vac, NEMA 12, 4X stainless steel enclosures
Non-Metallic Switch: This switch has a KRYDON enclosure. This is a compression molded berglass reinforced polyester enclosure, which is capable of withstanding almost any corrosive environment. Ratings are 30200A, 240600 Vac, fusible and non-fusible. Enclosure is NEMA 4X rated
The cast aluminum enclosure is ideally suited for harsh industrial applications including petrochemical facilities, mining operations, pharmaceutical plants and wastewater treatment facilities. Eatons Type DS switch is used as the switching device. Ratings are 30100A, 600 Vac, fusible and non-fusible
CSA Certied Standard C22.2 File No. LR 42131-6 Class I, division 1 & 2, groups B, C and D
Table 28.0-2. EnviroLine Standards Compliances

UL Classied Standard 886 File No. E84577 Class I, division 1 & 2, groups B, C and D
Class II, division 1 & 2, Class II, division 1 & 2, groups E, F and G groups E, F and G Class III, division 1 & 2 Class III, division 1 & 2 NEMA Types 7 and 9 Zone 1, IIB + H2 NEMA Types 7 and 9 Zone 1, IIB + H2
Seismic Qualication
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Non-Metallic Halyester Switch: A strong, yet lightweight heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X enclosed switch that withstands salt environments and general outdoor conditions better than standard 304-grade stainless steel at a more competitive price point than other non-metallic enclosures 316 Grade Stainless Steel Switches : This option replaces the standard 304 Grade stainless steel and hardware with 316 stainless. 316 stainless holds up better in high salt environments found in coastal areas, and in water/wastewater applications
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 007

General Description
28.0-7
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment. The receptacle outlet is not to be connected to the load side of the equipment disconnecting means. The Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch combines a safety switch, 2 kVA control transformer, and 15A GFI receptacle in a single product. Ratings are 30200A, 240 or 600 Vac, NEMA 3R outdoor enclosures. The auxiliary circuit is tapped off of the line side of the safety switch and can be operated independently of the main switch circuit. Auxiliary circuit voltages are available at either 208, 240, 480 or 600V. In 480V and 600V applications, the auxiliary circuit disconnect and overcurrent protection are provided by a fusible deadfront disconnect switch with Class J fuses. The short-circuit rating is 200 kAIC. 208V and 240V applications have a molded-case breaker with a 100 kAIC rating as the auxiliary circuit disconnect. The use of the Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch eliminates the need for running a separate 120V circuit common to rooftop air-conditioning applications.
Elevator Control Switch
22 23 24 25 26 27
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
NEC Section 210.63 for Heating, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment requires a 125V, singlephase, 15A- or 20A-rated receptacle outlet be installed at an accessible location for the servicing of heating, air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment. The receptacle must be located on the same level and within 25 ft (7.5m) of the heating,
Elevator Control Switch
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Receptacle Secondary Fuse
2-Pole Breaker
Incoming Lugs
The elevator control switch provides an all-in-one product solution and selective coordination for elevator circuits. The elevator control switch uses a shunt trip disconnect as standard with Class J time-delay current-limiting fuses for meeting several code and user requirements for such circuits. Ratings are 30200A, 600 Vac, NEMA 1, 3R, 12 and 4 enclosures. The elevator control switch carries a 200 kAIC rms symmetrical short-circuit rating.
Why do Buildings Require Eaton Elevator Disconnects?

Eatons Elevator Disconnect is a simple, all-in-one solution that takes the mystery out of meeting the many codes associated with re protection and safety in elevator shafts. The model national building codes that prescribe the requirements for sprinklers, elevators and electrical equipment, and how the various systems shall interact are: NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) ANSI/ASME A17.1 (Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators) NFPA 13 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems)
Fuses 15 Ampere or Optional 20 Ampere Available Control Power Transformer Load
(GFCI Receptacle Option Available 3 kVA Transformer Required)
Figure 28.0-1. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch Circuit Diagram
In addition to these national codes, state and local jurisdictions or other agencies of the government (such as the Veterans Administration) may edit or amend the codes, as they deem necessary for public safety.
CA08104001E

General Description
Eatons Elevator Disconnect enables consultants, contractors and building owners to install a single device that meets the requirements of the various codes. When the FACP receives a signal from the re alarm system that there is going to be a sprinkler release in an elevator shaft, a normally open contact in the FACP closes, energizing the Fire Safety Interface Relay and completing a circuit to initiate a trip.
September 2011
Sheet 28 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Why is There a Need for the Eaton Elevator Disconnect?

1. According to 2010 NFPA 13, re sprinkler protection is required (with some exceptions) at the top and bottom of elevator shafts. Additionally, NFPA 13 requires the installation of sprinklers in the elevator machine room. When sprinkler heads are installed in elevator shafts, or in elevator machine rooms, then they must also be installed according to the State-Adopted Elevator Code (in many cases, ANSI/ASME A17.1). 2. The ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, Rule 102.2 (c) (3), requires the shutdown of power to the elevator prior to the application of water in the elevator machine room or hoistway. Shutdown of power is usually accomplished with the use of a shunt trip device in the elevator circuit, and is done for two valid safety concerns. The rst of these is to minimize the potential for electric shock due to the release of water on energized electrical equipment. The second, and less obvious, is to reduce the possibility of elevator car slippage after the car has gone to the recall oor and the doors have opened. Slippage is possible when the hoisting equipment (cables, sheave, braking system, etc.) become wet from discharged water. Eatons Elevator Disconnect is a fusible switch that is equipped with a shunt trip mechanism. The shunt trip is operated by a control relay (called a Fire Safety Interface Relay) in the unit that is wired to a normally open contact in the remote Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
The Fire Safety Interface Relay is available with a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc coil. The 120 Vac coil should be selected when powered by the Elevator Disconnect control circuit, and the 24 Vdc relay should be selected when the power is supplied from the re alarm system.
Sprinkler System Sprinklers
1 2
3
Elevator Disconnect
Fluid Tank Controller
4
Battery Lowering Device
1 NFPA 13 requires sprinklers in elevator shaft (with exceptions) and in control room. 2 ASME A17.1 (Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators) requires shutdown of power to the elevator prior to the release of water.
3 NFPA 72 (Fire Alarm Code) requires control circuit for elevator shutdown to be monitored for the loss of voltage. 4 NEC requires standby power systems such as a battery lowering device to be disconnected by an auxiliary contact in the elevator disconnect.
Figure 28.0-2. Typical Hydraulic Elevator Components and Requirements
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 009

General Description
28.0-9
3. In addition to turning off power, the model codes require other functions that are satised by the Eaton Elevator Disconnect. One of these requirements is that the shunt trip control circuit requires monitoring. The NFPA 72 (Fire Alarm Code) requires: Control circuits to shut down elevator power shall be monitored for the presence of operating voltage. Loss of voltage to the control circuit for the disconnecting means shall cause a supervisory signal to be indicated at the control unit and required remote annunciation. Thus, there is a requirement to monitor and to annunciate the presence of shunt trip control power. This is accomplished in the Eaton Elevator Disconnect by the Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring Relay option. This relay is either a SPDT or a 3PDT relay. When control power is present, the closed relay contacts complete a circuit to the FACP that indicate the presence of control voltage. If control voltage is lost, the contact opens, signaling an alarm at the FACP and/or monitoring and annunciating a single elevator; all that is required is the single-pole relay. When wiring multiple switches (for multiple elevators), the three-pole relay option should be chosen. However, if there is a doubt, selecting the three-pole relay will provide all the functionality that is needed.
to prevent the elevator from automatically lowering while being maintainedwhich would endanger maintenance personnel. Eatons Elevator Disconnect is supplied with a standard set of 1NO and 1NC auxiliary contacts that are wired to the terminal blocks for this feature. Other manufacturers offer this as an option. An additional concern that is not code related is accidental signaling of a loss of voltage if a switch is turned off for maintenance or testing. For example, if an Eaton Elevator Disconnect is turned off to perform routine maintenance, the control voltage will be disconnected and it will send a signal
to the FACPwhich may alert the local re department and initiate a re call. To solve this problem, an optional micro switch mounted on the main switch can be supplied and eld-wired in parallel with the alarm contact on the Voltage Monitoring relay. Wiring in this fashion would prevent an alarm signal from being sent when the Eaton Elevator Disconnect is turned off for routine maintenance. An additional standard feature on the Eaton Elevator Disconnect is a KeyTo-Test switch to perform a functional test of the operation of the shunt trip. A pilot light signaling that the switch is ON and a neutral lug are the only other available options.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
From Feeder
1. A shunt trip device is required if the hoistway and/or machine room is sprinklered. 2. The location of the shunt trip device is required to be in the elevator machine room.
31 32
L1
Shunt Trip Device Shunt trip control voltage must be monitored for loss of voltage. Loss of voltage is required to activate an annunciator on the control unit. The building fire alarm control unit may be utilized for this purpose (ref. NFPA 72 3.9.4).
L2
L3
33
To heat sensor(s) or flow control sensor.
34 35 36
Additional Requirements and Concerns

Many elevators are equipped with backup power supplies to allow the elevator to be lowered if power is lost. For example, many hydraulic elevators are equipped with a battery system that opens a solenoid to lower the elevator, and then provides power to open the elevator doors. This battery-lowering device is viewed by the NEC as an emergency or standby power system, and is governed by Article 620.91. 4. Paragraph (C) requires that the main disconnect be provided with an auxiliary contact that disconnects the additional power source from the load when the disconnecting means is in the open position. The purpose of this auxiliary contact is to disconnect the backup power system when the elevator switch is opened
Battery Lowering Device Auxiliary Contact for Battery Lowering device required by Art. 620.91(C). Purpose of this contact is to distinguish between an actual power failure and the opening of the disconnect for maintenance. Must be provided with overcurrent protection. Must be lockable in the open position. Must be externally operable.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
To Elevator Controller
Figure 28.0-3. Shunt Trip Device Wiring Diagram
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 28 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Safety Switch Selection Guide

Table 28.0-3. Safety Switch Selection Guide
Type Fuse Type Fuse Class Ampere Rating Number Enclosure Types of Poles NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4 NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA Painted Stainless Non316 Grade 7/9 Steel Steel Metallic Stainless Steel 1 and 2 2 and 3 2 and 3 2, 3 and 4 2, 3 and 4 6 6 2 and 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes up to 1200A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes up to 1200A Yes Yes up to 1200A Yes up to 1200A Yes Yes Yes 400 1200A Yes 400 1200A Yes up to 1200A Yes up to 1200A Yes Yes Yes up to 200A Yes up to 200A Yes up to 1200A Yes up to 1200A Yes Yes up to 100A Yes up to 100A
General- Single-throw Fusible Plug duty max. 240 Vac Cartridge H horsepower Non rated fusible Heavyduty Single-throw Fusible Cartridge H max. 600 Vac L horsepower rated Non fusible Single-throw Fusible Cartridge H max. 600 Vac Non fusible
30 30600 30600 30600 8001200 301200
Six-pole motor circuit Doublethrow
30200 30200
Yes up to 600A Yes
Yes Yes Yes up to 400A Yes
Max. 600 Vac Fusible Cartridge H 30200 horsepower T (600V) 400 rated T (240V) 600 L 8001200 Non fusible 301200
2, 3, 4 and 6 3, 4 3 3
Yes up to 400A Yes
Yes up to 400A Yes
Rotary Max. 600 Vac Non switches fusible
16125 30200 30200
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Auxiliary Max. 600 Vac Fusible Cartridge H power horsepower Non heavyrated fusible duty Elevator control switch

Max. 600 Vac Fusible Cartridge J horsepower rated
30200
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NEMA Type 12 enclosures (30800A) can be eld modied to meet NEMA 3R rainproof requirements when a factory provided drain screw is removed. Class J clips provided.
Table 28.0-4. EnviroLine Safety Switch Selection Guide

EnviroLine Fuse Type Fuse Class Ampere Rating Number of Poles Enclosure Types NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4 Painted Steel Yes Yes NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NEMA 4X NonMetallic Yes Yes
Stainless enclosure with stainless mechanism Viewing window upper or lower
Fusible Cartridge H Non fusible
30400 30400 30600 800 30800 30100 60 30200 30200
2 and 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fusible Cartridge H L Non fusible
Welding receptacle
Non-metallic
800A upper window switches are not UL listed. Lower window switches are available through 600A. NEMA Type 12 enclosures (30800A) can be eld modied to meet NEMA 3R rainproof requirements when a factory provided drain screw is removed.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 011

General DescriptionCatalog Numbering System
28.0-11

Table 28.0-5. Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
22 23
Options
DH 3 6 1 N D K LW
Switch Type DP = General-duty/ plug fuse DG = General-duty/ cartridge fuse DH = Heavy-duty DT = Double-throw DS = Classified location with DS interior Poles/Blades 1 2 3 4 6 = 1-Pole = 2-Poles = 3-Poles = 4-Poles = 6-Poles Voltage 1 = 120 Vac 2 = 240 Vac 6 = 600 Vac Amperes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = 30A = 60A = 100A = 200A = 400A = 600A = 800A = 1200A NEMA Enclosure Ratings G R D P W = NEMA 1 = NEMA 3R = NEMA 12 = NEMA 4 (painted steel) = NEMA 4X corrosion resistant (304 Grade stainless steel) C = NEMA 4X non-metallic KRYDON (for Type DH) X = NEMA 7 and 9 (for Type DS) Fusible/Non-Fusible or Neutral F = Fusible without neutral U = Non-fusible N = Fusible with neutral W = Upper viewing window LW = Lower viewing window X = EnviroLine stainless (enclosure and mechanism) GCL = Mill duty CB = Provisions for cube fuses (30100A, 600V) 316 = 316 Grade stainless steel enclosure and hardware
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Series K = DesignAll general-duty switches above 200A and all heavy-duty switches incorporate K-Series switch design features listed on the following page B = Design general-duty 30100A H = Design general-duty double-throw switch (compact design 30100A)
For DC ratings, check individual switch ratings.
Table 28.0-6. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
DH 3 6 1 F R K A1 480
Switch Type DH = Heavy-duty Poles/Blades 3 = 3-Poles Amperes 1 2 3 4 = 30A = 60A = 100A = 200A GFI Receptacle Voltage 2 = 240 Vac 6 = 600 Vac Fusible/Non-Fusible or Neutral F = Fusible without neutral U = Non-fusible N = Fusible with neutral NEMA Enclosure Ratings R = NEMA 3R A1 = 15A A2 = 20A Auxiliary Circuit Voltage 208 = 208V 240 = 240V 480 = 480V 600 = 600V Series K = DesignAll general-duty switches above 200A and all heavy-duty switches incorporate K-Series switch design features listed on the following page
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

General DescriptionCatalog Numbering System
Table 28.0-7. Quick-Connect Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
September 2011
Sheet 28 012
22 23
DT 3 6 5 N U R K
Switch Type
LC
Receptacle Type Series LC = Cam-Lok LCR = Cam-Lok reverse pin LP = Posi-Lok PLR = Posi-Lok reverse pin Neutral Blank = No neutral or included with switch designation N = Solid neutral SN = Switched neutral
24 25 26 27
DT = Heavy-duty double-throw DH = Heavy-duty single-throw Poles 2 = 2 poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Maximum Voltage
Upper Switch U = Non-fusible F = Fusible N = Fusible with solid neutral SN = Fusible with switched neutral Lower Switch U = Non-fusible F = Fusible N = Fusible with solid neutral SN = Fusible with switched neutral
K=K Enclosure G = NEMA 1 R = NEMA 3R
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

2 = 240 Vac 6 = 600 Vac Switch Ampacity 3 4 5 6 7 = 100A = 200A = 400A = 600A = 800A
When upper and lower switches are the same, the switch conguration is consolidated in one letter (e.g.,U not UU). Also, a switch with a neutral will have either a solid neutral or a switched neutral, not both. Lastly, a switched neutral pole is never fused. Heavy-duty single-throw switches will not have a lower switch option. This eld is only used when a switch is completely non-fused.
Table 28.0-8. Elevator Control Switch Catalog Numbering System
ES 1 T2 R2 G F1 R N
Switch Type ES = Elevator control switch Amperes 1 = 30A 2 = 60A 3 = 100A 4 = 200A 5 = 400A Industrial Control Transformer T2 = 208V T3 = 240V T1 = 480V T4 = 600V Fire Safety Interface Relay (3PDT, 10 A, 120 V) R2 = 24 Vdc coil R1 = 120 Vac coil Pilot Light ON G = Green R = Red W = White Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring Relay F1 = Single-pole F3 = Three-pole Enclosure Options R = NEMA 3R D = NEMA 12 W = NEMA 4X stainless Isolated Full Capacity Neutral Lug N = Neutral lug
100 VA with primary and secondary fusing (120V secondary). To monitor shunt trip voltage. NEMA 1 standard with no sufx designation required.
Note: All modules are three-pole, 600V and contain a key to test switch and mechanically interlocked auxiliary contact as standard.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 013

General Description
28.0-13
All General-Duty Switches Above 100A and All Heavy-Duty Switches Incorporate These K-Series Switch Design Features
22 23 24 25 26 27
Visible Double Break Rotary Blade Mechanism
Clearly Visible Handle
Interlocking Mechanism
Two points of contact provide a positive open and close, easier operation, and also help prevent contact burning for longer contact life.
The position (ON or OFF) can be clearly seen from a distance and the length provides for easy operation.
Door cannot be opened when the handle is in the ON position. Front side operable defeater mechanism provides for user access when necessary.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Clear Line Shield
Triple Padlocking Capability
Tangential Knockouts
Protects against accidental contact with energized parts. Probe holes enable the user to test if the line side is energized without removing the shield. Not provided on general-duty switches.
Personnel safety feature because the large hasp can accommodate up to three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank locks.
An ample number are provided on the top, bottom and sides of both NEMA Types 1 and 3R enclosures through 200A.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Built-in Fuse Pullers (NEMA 12 and 4X 30200A Only)
Additional Locking Capability
Bolt-On Hub Kits
Provide easy removal of fuses.
Cabinet door can be further padlocked at the top and bottom as applicable.
Note: Size of hasp in inches (mm): 30100A0.344 (8.7) 0.250 shank 2001200A0.50 (12.7) 0.375 shank
For switches in a NEMA Type 3R, 12, 4 or 4X enclosure.
42 43
CA08104001E

General DescriptionAccessories, Hubs, Lug Data
September 2011
Sheet 28 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Accessories, Hubs, Lug Data
DH030NK
DS16CP
DS200EK1
DS200GK
DS22JK
DS36CL
DS56CK
DS30FP
DS12FK
DS426TK
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 28.0-9. Safety SwitchesAccessories

Description Neutral Kits/Ground Kits 30A DG 60100A DG 200A DG, DH (NEMA 1, 3R enclosures) 3060A DH 100A DH 200A DH (NEMA 4X, 12 enclosures) 400A DG, DH 600A DG, DH 400600A Fusible DT, 8001200A DH 30100A DT 200A DT 400A Non-fusible DT 600A Non-fusible DT 800A DT 1200A DT Ground Lug Kits 30100A DG 30100A DH, DT 200A DG, DH, DT 400600A DG, 4001200A DH, 4001200A DT Switching Neutral Bonding Kits 30100A DT, three-pole, four-pole 200A DT, three-pole, four-pole 400A DT, three-pole, four-pole 600A DT, three-pole, four-pole 800A DT, three-pole, four-pole Control Pole Kit 400600A DG, 301200A DH, 30800A DT Auxiliary Contact Kits All switches (except 30100A DG) 1NO/1NC All switches (except 30100A DG) 2NO/2NC Copper Lug Kits 30A DH, DT 60A DH, DT 100A DH, DT 200A DH 400A DH (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 enclosures) 600800A DH (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 enclosures) Crimp Lug Pad Kit (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 Enclosures) 400600A DH 800A DH 400800A neutral DH

Catalog Number DG030NB DG100NB DG200NK DH030NK DH100NK DH200NK DS400NK DS600NK DS800NK DT100NK DT200NK DT400NK DT600NK DT800NK DT1200NK DG030GB DS100GK DS200GK DS468GK DT100BK DT200BK DT400BK DT600BK DT800BK DS16CP DS200EK1 DS200EK2 DS16CL DS26CL DS36CL DS46CL DS56CL DS66CL DS56CK DS76CK DS800CNK
Description Fuse Puller Kits 3060A DH 3060A DH 100A DH 200A DH J Fuse Adapter Kits 60A 240V DH 60A DT and receptacle switches 400A 600V DT 600A 240600V DH only R Fuse Adapter Kits 30A DG 100A DG 30A 240V DH, DT 30A 600V DH, DT, 60A 240V DH, DT, 60A DG 60A 600V DH, DT 100A 240600V DH, DT 200A 240600V DH, DT, 200A DG 400A 240600V DH, 240V DT, 400A DG 600A 240600V DH, 600A DG T Fuse Adapter Kits 200A 240V DH 200A 600V DH 400A 240V DG, DH 400A 600V DH 600A 240V DG, DH 600A 600V DH 800A 240V DH 800A 600V DH 8001200A 600V DH DT Hookstick handle Lubricating grease for safety switch blades and contacts (Each kit contains three 30 cc tubes of lubricating grease.) Auxiliary Contacts for: 1625A three-, four-pole rotary switches, includes holder and contact (1NO/1NC) 3040A three-pole rotary switches, includes holder and contact (1NO) 60125A three-pole rotary switches, includes holder and contact (1NO) 3040A four-pole rotary switches, includes holder and contact (1NO) 30125A three-, four-pole, contact only (1NC) 30125A three-, four-pole, contact only (1NO)

Catalog Number DS30FP DS60FP DS100FP DS200FP DS22JK DS26JK DT400JK DS600JK DG030RB DG100RB DS12FK DS16FK DS26FK DS36FK DS46FK DS56FK DS66FK DS426TK DS466TK DS526TK DS566TK DS626TK DS666TK DS726TK DS766TK DH800HSH DSLUBEKIT
CMAC CRAC3 CWAC3 CRAC4 CRAA CRAB
Ground bar kit is not listed on device publications. Order one kit for three poles. Order one kit for each pole. Order one kit per switch.
Receptacle switches. Order one kit for six poles. The mechanism is reversed on these contacts.
Note: Accessories are not applicable to NEMA 7/9 switches.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 015

General DescriptionAccessories, Hubs, Lug Data
28.0-15
Hubs
Table 28.0-11. Myers Type Hubs NEMA Type 3R (400A and Above) NEMA Types 4, 4X (Stainless Steel), 12
Conduit Size Inches 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 31.8 38.1 50.8 63.5 76.2 88.9 101.6 127.0 Catalog Number DS050MH DS075MH DS100MH DS125MH DS150MH DS200MH DS250MH DS300MH DS350MH DS400MH DS500MH
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DS075H1
Table 28.0-10. Plate Type Hubs for NEMA Type 3R Enclosures (Up to 200A)
Group 1 General-Duty, Heavy-Duty, Double-Throw Through 100A Conduit Size Inches 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 mm 19.1 25.4 31.8 38.1 50.8 Catalog Number DS075H1 DS100H1 DS125H1 DS150H1 DS200H1 Group 2 General-Duty, Heavy-Duty, Double-Throw200A Conduit Size Inches 2 2-1/2 3 mm 50.8 63.5 76.2 Catalog Number DS200H2 DS250H2 DS300H2
2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5
Note: Contact the Flex Center at 1-888-329-9272 for information on hubs for non-metallic NEMA 4X switches.
Table 28.0-12. Standard Lug Capacities

Ampere Rating 30A DP 30A DG 30A DH, DT 60A DG 60A DH, DT 100A DG 100A DH, DT 200A DG, DT 200A DH Type 1 and 3R 200A DH Type 4 and 12 400A DG, DH, DT 600A DG 600A DH 600A DT (Fusible) 600A DT (Non-fusible) 800A DH 800A DT 1200A DH, DT
Minimum Wire Size #14 #12 #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #6 #6 #6 (2) #1/0 (1) #1/0 (1) #2 (1) #1/0 (2) #250 (4) #1/0 (3) #250 (4) #1/0 #14 #14 #6 #6 #1/0 (2) #1/0
Maximum Wire Size #10 #10 #6 #2 #1/0 #2 #1/0 #1/0 250 kcmil 250 kcmil 300 kcmil (2) 300 kcmil (1) 750 kcmil (1) 600 kcmil (1) 750 kcmil (2) 500 kcmil (4) 750 kcmil (3) 500 kcmil (4) 750 kcmil #6 #4 #1/0 250 kcmil 500 kcmil (2) 500 kcmil
Wire Type Cu OR Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al OR Cu/Al Cu/Al AND Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu Cu
Note: Catalog Number DS900AK Adapter KitPermits Installation of Group 1 Hubs on 200A Type General-Duty, Heavy-Duty and DoubleThrow Switches.
Copper-Bodied Lugs
30A Cu 60A Cu 100A Cu 200A Cu 400A Cu 600A Cu
The maximum size aluminum or copper-clad aluminum wire allowable for applications where the conductor enters or leaves the enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal is #1 gauge.
Note: Although certain lug capacities are larger than required, only minimum wire bending space is provided per the requirements noted in NEC Tables 373.6 (a) and (b) for respective ampere ratings.
CA08104001E

General DescriptionLug Data, Connection Plugs
Table 28.0-13. Available Lug Capacities of the Double-Throw Switch Assembly with Cam-Lok or Posi-Lok Receptacles
Double Throw Switch SizeCam-Lok or Posi-Lok Receptacles 100 200 Service Terminal Openings (1) 1/014 AWG Cu/Al (1) 300 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al (1) 750 kcmil1/0 or (2) 300 kcmil1/0 Cu/Al (4) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (4) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al Load Terminal Openings (1) 1/014 AWG Cu/Al (1) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al (1) 750 kcmil1/0 or (2) 300 kcmil1/0 Cu/Al (4) 500250 kcmil Cu/Al (4) 500250 kcmil Cu/Al Switched Neutral Solid Neutral Pole Load Terminal Terminal Openings Openings (1) 1/014 AWG Cu/Al (1) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al (1) 750 kcmil1/0 or (2) 300 kcmil1/0 Cu/Al (4) 500250 kcmil Cu/Al (4) 500250 kcmil Cu/Al (2) 1/014 AWG, (1) 214 AWG Cu/Al (2) 250 kcmil6 AWG, (1) 1/014 AWG, (1) 214 AWG Cu/Al (6) 500 kcmil, (6) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al (6) 500250 kcmil, (4) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al (6) 500250 kcmil, (4) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al Ground Terminal Openings (3) 214 AWG Cu/Al (3) 214 AWG Cu/Al (4) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al
September 2011
Sheet 28 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Receptacle Bypass Terminal (1) 1032 Screw mounting (2) 1/4 Studs, 1.75-inch spacing (2) 1/2-13 UNC studs, 1.75-inch spacing
400
600
(4) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al (4) 250 kcmil 6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs, 1.75-inch spacing (2) 1/2-13 UNC studs, 1.75-inch spacing
800
Table 28.0-14. Quick-Connect Double-Throw Standard Receptacles and Corresponding Connection Plugs (Part Numbers are Cooper Crouse-Hinds)
Double Throw Switch SizeCam-Lok or Posi-Lok Receptacles 100 Ground (green) Neutral (white) A Phase (black) B Phase (red) C Phase (blue) Ground (green) Neutral (white) A Phase (black) B Phase (red) C Phase (blue) Ground (green) Neutral (white) A Phase (black) B Phase (red) C Phase (blue) Ground (green) Neutral (white) A Phase (black) B Phase (red) C Phase (blue) Ground (green) Neutral (white) A Phase (black) B Phase (red) C Phase (blue) Cam-Lok Connectors Receptacle E1016-1635S E1016-1636S E1016-1600S E1016-1602S E1016-1612S E1016-1635S E1016-1636S E1016-1600S E1016-1602S E1016-1612S E1016-1635S E1016-1636S E1016-1600S E1016-1602S E1016-1612S (2) E1016-1635S (2) E1016-1636S (2) E1016-1600S (2) E1016-1602S (2) E1016-1612S (2) E1016-1635S (2) E1016-1636S (2) E1016-1600S (2) E1016-1602S (2) E1016-1612S Plug E-Z1016-8366 E-Z1016-8367 E-Z1016-8387 E-Z1016-8389 E-Z1016-8393 E-Z1016-8366 E-Z1016-8367 E-Z1016-8387 E-Z1016-8389 E-Z1016-8393 E-Z1016-8366 E-Z1016-8367 E-Z1016-8387 E-Z1016-8389 E-Z1016-8393 (2) E-Z1016-8366 (2) E-Z1016-8367 (2) E-Z1016-8387 (2) E-Z1016-8389 (2) E-Z1016-8393 (2) E-Z1016-8366 (2) E-Z1016-8367 (2) E-Z1016-8387 (2) E-Z1016-8389 (2) E-Z1016-8393 Posi-Lok Connectors Receptacle Panel Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1696 / three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): E0200-1686 / three-pole, four-wire with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole (three-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1687 Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1696 / three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): E0200-1686 / three-pole, four-wire with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole (three-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1687 Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): E0400-1696 / three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole (three-phase and single neutral pole): E0400-1687 Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1696 / three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): (2) E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole (three-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1687 Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1696 / three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): (2) E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole (three-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0200-1687 Plug E0200-281 E0200-282 E0200-283 E0200-284 E0200-285 E0200-281 E0200-282 E0200-283 E0200-284 E0200-285 E0400-281 E0400-282 E0400-283 E0400-284 E0400-285 (2) E0400-281 (2) E0400-282 (2) E0400-283 (2) E0400-284 (2) E0400-285 (2) E0400-281 (2) E0400-282 (2) E0400-283 (2) E0400-284 (2) E0400-285
200
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
600 400
800
Note: Switches are not supplied with the mating plugs. Eaton will supply the plug if cord sets are ordered.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 017

LayoutDimensions
28.0-17
Dimensions
Table 28.0-15. General-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240V, Three-Pole, Single-Throw
Ampere NEMA 1 Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100 200 400 600 Height (H) Depth (D) Depth (D2) NEMA 3R Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) Height (H) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg)
H W D
22 23 24 25
D2
6.38 10.69 (162.1) (271.5) 8.69 14.19 (220.7) (360.4) 9.13 18.81 (231.9) (477.8) 16.00 25.25 (406.4) (641.4) 23.00 44.75 (584.2) (1136.7) 24.00 52.25 (609.6) (1327.2)
6.88 3.75 (174.8) (95.2)
6 (2.724)
6.38 10.81 (162.1) (274.6) 8.69 14.38 (220.7) (365.3) 9.13 19.25 (231.9) (489.0)
6.88 3.75 (174.8) (95.2)
6 (2.724)
7.38 4.21 9 (187.5) (106.9) (4.086) 7.38 4.23 12 (187.5) (107.4) (5.448)
7.38 4.21 9 (187.5) (106.9) (4.086) 7.38 4.23 12 (187.5) (107.4) (5.448) 11.25 6.14 55 (285.8) (156.0) (24.97) 12.63 7.27 105 (320.8) (184.7) (47.67) 14.25 8.95 135 (362.0) (227.3) (61.29)
W D
11.25 6.14 48 16.00 25.50 (285.8) (156.0) (21.792) (406.4) (647.7) 12.63 7.27 100 (320.8) (184.7) (45.4) 14.25 8.95 130 (362.0) (227.3) (59.02) 23.00 45.19 (584.2) (1147.8) 24.00 52.70 (609.6) (1338.6)
26 27 28 29
H
Figure 28.0-4. NEMA 1-3R 30100A
Table 28.0-16. General-Duty, Fusible, 240V, Three-Pole, Solid Neutral, Single-Throw

Ampere NEMA 1, 3R Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 8.13 (206.5) 8.13 (206.5) 11.13 (282.7) 16.00 (406.4) 23.00 (584.2) 24.00 (609.6) 25.38 (644.7) Height (H) 15.88 (403.4) 15.88 (403.4) 21.69 (550.9) 27.63 (701.8) Depth (D) Depth (D2) NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel, 4 Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 8.13 (206.5) 8.13 (206.5) Height (H) 17.88 (454.2) 17.88 (454.2) 24.00 (609.6) 34.38 (873.3) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg)
C L
30 31
D2
10.00 5.25 20 (254.0) (133.3) (9.08) 10.00 5.25 20 (254.0) (133.3) (9.08)
10.00 5.50 22 (254.0) (139.7) (9.988) 10.00 5.50 22 (254.0) (139.7) (9.988) 10.25 5.50 30 (260.4) (139.7) (13.62) 11.50 6.44 61 (292.1) (163.6) (27.694)
10.00 5.25 27 11.13 (254.0) (133.3) (12.258) (282.7) 11.25 6.14 52 16.00 (285.8) (156.0) (23.608) (406.4) 23.00 (584.2)
Figure 28.0-5. NEMA 1-3R 200600A
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
45.19 12.63 7.27 120 (1147.8) (320.8) (184.7) (54.48)
57.63 12.63 7.19 135 (1463.8) (320.8) (182.6) (61.29) 63.00 14.25 8.88 203 (1600.2) (362.0) (225.6) (92.162) 71.75 14.25 8.88 213 (1822.5) (362.0) (225.6) (96.702)
52.70 14.25 8.95 153 24.00 (1338.6) (362.0) (227.3) (69.462) (609.6) 56.69 14.25 8.95 168 25.38 (1439.9) (362.0) (227.3) (76.272) (644.7)
41.47 70.31 19.94 12.44 465 41.47 70.31 19.94 13.51 510 (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (316.0) (211.11) (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (343.2) (231.54)
Note: Not applicable to plug fuse.
Dimensions are for estimating purposes only. CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 28 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Dimensions (Continued)
Table 28.0-17. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 600V, Three-Pole, Single-Throw
Ampere NEMA 1, 3R Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 8.13 (206.5) 8.13 (206.5) 11.13 (282.7) 16.00 (406.4) 23.00 (584.2) 24.00 (609.6) 25.38 (644.7) Height (H) 15.88 (403.4) 15.88 (403.4) 21.69 (550.9) 27.63 (701.8) Depth (D) Depth (D2) NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel, 4 Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 8.13 (206.5) 8.13 (206.5) 11.13 (282.7) Height (H) 12.13 (308.1) 12.13 (308.1) 24.00 (609.6) 34.38 (873.3) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg)
10.00 5.25 (254.0) (133.3) 10.00 5.25 (254.0) (133.3) 10.00 5.25 (254.0) (133.3) 11.25 6.14 (285.8) (156.0)
16 (7.264) 16 (7.264) 22 (9.988)
10.00 5.50 17 (254.0) (139.7) (7.718) 10.00 5.50 17 (254.0) (139.7) (7.718) 10.25 5.50 28 (260.4) (139.7) (12.712) 11.50 6.44 55 (292.1) (163.6) (24.97)
C L
D2
46 16.00 (20.884) (406.4) 110 (49.94) 135 (61.29) 23.00 (584.2) 24.00 (609.6)
Figure 28.0-6. NEMA 1, 3R 301200A

W D
45.19 12.63 7.27 (1147.8) (320.8) (184.7) 52.70 14.25 8.95 (1338.6) (362.0) (227.3) 56.69 14.25 8.95 (1439.9) (362.0) (227.3)
57.63 12.63 7.19 125 (1463.8) (320.8) (182.6) (56.75) 63.00 14.25 8.88 167 (1600.2) (362.0) (225.6) (75.818) 71.75 14.25 8.88 175 (1822.5) (362.0) (225.6) (79.45)
158 25.38 (71.732) (644.7)
C L H
41.47 70.31 19.94 12.44 (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (316.0)
430 41.47 70.31 19.94 13.51 475 (195.22) (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (343.2) (215.65)
Table 28.0-18. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole Solid Neutral, Single-Throw
Ampere NEMA 1, 3R Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 8.13 (206.5) 8.13 (206.5) 11.13 (282.7) 16.00 (406.4) 23.00 (584.2) 24.00 (609.6) 25.38 (644.7) Height (H) 15.88 (403.4) 15.88 (403.4) 21.69 (550.9) 27.63 (701.8) Depth (D) Depth (D2) NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel, 4 Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 8.13 (206.5) 8.13 (206.5) Height (H) 17.88 (454.2) 17.88 (454.2) 24.00 (609.6) 34.38 (873.3) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg)
D2
Figure 28.0-7. NEMA 4/4X and 12 30800A

W D
10.00 5.25 20 (254.0) (133.3) (9.08) 10.00 5.25 20 (254.0) (133.3) (9.08)
10.00 5.50 22 (254.0) (139.7) (9.988) 10.00 5.50 22 (254.0) (139.7) (9.988) 10.25 5.50 30 (260.4) (139.7) (13.62) 11.50 6.44 61 (292.1) (163.6) (27.694)
10.00 5.25 27 11.13 (254.0) (133.3) (12.258) (282.7) 11.25 6.14 52 16.00 (285.8) (156.0) (23.608) (406.4) 23.00 (584.2)
C L
45.19 12.63 7.27 120 (1147.8) (320.8) (184.7) (54.48)
57.63 12.63 7.19 135 (1463.8) (320.8) (182.6) (61.29) 63.00 14.25 8.88 203 (1600.2) (362.0) (225.6) (92.162) 71.75 14.25 8.88 213 (1822.5) (362.0) (225.6) (96.702)
D2
52.70 14.25 8.95 153 24.00 (1338.6) (362.0) (227.3) (69.462) (609.6) 56.69 14.25 8.95 168 25.38 (1439.9) (362.0) (227.3) (76.272) (644.7)
41.47 70.31 19.94 12.44 465 41.47 70.31 19.94 13.51 510 (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (316.0) (211.11) (1053.3) (1785.9) (506.5) (343.2) (231.54)
Figure 28.0-8. NEMA 1, 3R 30800A

W D
D2
Figure 28.0-9. NEMA 12, 4X 30400A
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 019

LayoutDimensions
28.0-19
Table 28.0-19. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole, Double-Throw
Ampere NEMA 1, 3R Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 11.94 (303.3) 11.94 (303.3) 11.94 (303.3) 19.56 (496.8) 23.13 (587.5) 24.13 (612.9) 24.13 (612.9) Height (H) 24.63 (625.6) 24.63 (625.6) 24.63 (625.6) 37.38 (949.5) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg) NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) Height (H) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg)
22 23
H
9.88 5.38 34 12.00 25.88 (251.0) (136.7) (15.436) (304.8) (657.4) 9.88 5.38 34 12.00 25.88 (251.0) (136.7) (15.436) (304.8) (657.4) 9.88 5.38 34 12.00 25.88 (251.0) (136.7) (15.436) (304.8) (657.4) 11.25 6.10 80 (285.8) (154.9) (36.32)
10.25 5.50 60 (260.4) (139.7) (27.24) 10.25 5.50 60 (260.4) (139.7) (27.24) 10.25 5.50 60 (260.4) (139.7) (27.24)
24 25
C L
D2
19.50 41.00 11.63 6.48 105 (495.3) (1041.4) (295.4) (164.6) (47.67) 23.00 57.50 12.50 7.25 185 (584.2) (1460.5) (317.5) (184.2) (83.99)
26 27
Figure 28.0-10. NEMA 1, 3R 301200A

W D
53.81 12.50 7.25 140 (1366.8) (317.5) (184.2) (63.56) 63.31 14.13 8.88 175 (1608.1) (358.9) (225.6) (79.45) 63.31 14.13 8.88 175 (1608.1) (358.9) (225.6) (79.45)
28
C L H
42.15 78.11 25.62 20.47 509 (1070.6) (1984.0) (650.7) (519.9) (231.09)
29 30
Table 28.0-20. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole, Double-Throw

Ampere NEMA 1, 3R Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 11.94 (303.3) 11.94 (303.3) 11.94 (303.3) 19.56 (496.8) 25.38 (644.7) 27.44 (697.0) 28.12 (714.2) Height (H) 36.63 (930.4) 36.63 (930.4) 36.63 (930.4) Depth (D) Depth (D2) NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel Weight Lbs (kg) Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) Height (H) Depth (D) Depth (D2) Weight Lbs (kg)
D2
31 32
Figure 28.0-11. NEMA 4/4X and 12 30800A

W D
9.88 5.38 44 12.00 39.81 10.25 5.50 45 (251.0) (136.7) (19.976) (304.8) (1011.2) (260.4) (139.7) (20.43) 9.88 5.38 44 12.00 39.81 10.25 5.50 45 (251.0) (136.7) (19.976) (304.8) (1011.2) (260.4) (139.7) (20.43) 9.88 5.38 44 12.00 39.81 10.25 5.50 45 (251.0) (136.7) (19.976) (304.8) (1011.2) (260.4) (139.7) (20.43) 19.56 55.63 11.63 6.46 100 (496.8) (1413.0) (295.4) (164.1) (45.4)
33
C L H
50.88 11.25 6.10 95 (1292.4) (285.8) (154.9) (43.13)
34 35
74.75 14.13 8.88 230 25.38 74.75 14.13 8.92 260 (1898.7) (358.9) (225.6) (104.42) (644.7) (1898.7) (358.9) (226.6) (118.04) 86.13 14.13 8.88 320 (2187.7) (358.9) (225.6) (145.28) 58.86 25.62 20.47 282 (1495.0) (650.7) (519.9) (128.03)
D2
36 37 38 39
H
42.15 78.11 25.62 20.47 509 (1070.6) (1984.0) (650.7) (519.9) (231.09)
Figure 28.0-12. NEMA 1, 3R 30800A

W D
40 41 42
D2
Figure 28.0-13. NEMA 12, 4X 30400A
43
CA08104001E

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 28 020
22 23 24 25 26 27
18.57 (471.7) 50.45 (1281.4) Conduit Entry Allowed Along This Side 61.24 (1555.5) 13.56 (344.4) Conduit Entry Allowed In This Area 14.00 (355.6) 5.00 (127.0) 7.00 (177.8) 2.24 (56.9)
8.59 (218.2)
60.51 (1537.0) 95.75 (2432.1) 68.25 (1733.6)
58.38 (1482.9)
38.90 (988.1)
62.89 (1597.4) Grade 33.50 (850.9) 6.00 (152.4)
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
No Conduit Entry This End 18.15 (461.0)
4.14 (105.2)
Figure 28.0-14. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 30/200ADimensions in Inches (mm)

26.68 (677.7) 15.61 (396.5) 2.65 (67.31) 5.12 (130.0)
93.11 (2365.0) 44.43 (1128.5)
92.49 (2349.2)
87.25 (2216.2) 1.37 (34.8) .560 Mounting Holes 2.93 (74.4) 8.02 (203.7) 17.75 (450.9) 4.42 (112.3)
20.95 (532.1)
50.18 (1274.6) 10.63 (270.0) 23.65 26.25 (666.8) (600.7)
15.40 (391.2)
8.00 (203.2) 16.00 (406.4)
Figure 28.0-15. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 400ADimensions in Inches (mm)

38.18 (969.8) 15.61 (396.5) 2.65 (67.3)
5.12 (130.0)
93.11 (2365.0) 44.43 (1128.5)
92.49 (2349.2)
87.25 (2216.2) .560 Mounting Holes 2.93 (74.4) 8.02 (203.7) 29.25 (743.0) 4.42 (112.3)
20.95 (532.1) 61.68 (1566.7) 10.63 (270.0) 8.00 (203.2)
1.37 (34.8)
A
37.75 (958.9) 23.65 (600.7)
16.00 (406.4)
Figure 28.0-16. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 600800ADimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 021

LayoutDimensions
28.0-21
13.68 (347.5) 14.00 R0.25 7.00 (355.6) (177.8) 2.24 (56.9)
22
8.61 (218.7)
1.93 (49.0)
18.57 (471.7) Conduit Entry Allowed in this Area
23 24
1.06 (26.9) 5.00 (127.0) 37.40 (950.0)
27.43 (696.7) 38.15 (969.0)
25
35.27 (895.9)
Conduit Entry Allowed Along Left Side 28.42 (721.9)
26
39.78 (1010.4)
39.12 (993.6)
27
0.56 Mounting Holes
28
4.15 (105.4)
6.25 (158.8) Grade Conduit Entry Allowed in Top End Wall
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
29 30 31 32
18.00 (457.2)
Figure 28.0-17. Quick-Connect Single-Throw 100ADimensions in Inches (mm)

18.57 (471.7) 1.94 (49.3) Conduit Entry Allowed in This Area Allowed Along Left Side 42.53 (1080.3) 41.87 (1063.5) 40.15 (1019.8) 0.56 40.89 (1038.6) 18.00 (457.2) 6.25 (158.8) Conduit Entry Allowed in Top End Wall Grade Holes 13.68 (347.5) 14.00 R0.25 2.24 (56.9)
33 34
38.02 (965.7)
35 36 37 38
28.38 (720.8)
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
4.15 (105.4)
39 40
41 42 43
CA08104001E

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 28 022
22 23 24 25 26 27
32.87 (834.9) 16.10 (408.9)
11.14 (283.0) Conduit Entry Allowed in This Area
60.69 (1541.5) Conduit Entry Allowed Along Left Side
12.00 (304.8) 73.79 (1874.3)
51.64 (1311.6)
69.79 (1772.7)
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
(1541.5) 21.73 (551.9) 32.87 (834.9) Conduit Entry Allowed in This Area 32.60 (828.0) 74.3 (1888 Conduit Entry 8.30 (210.8) 0.5 Mo Hol 4.34 (110.2) Grad 6.00 (152.4) Minimum 24.0 (609. 4.39 (111.5)
35
Conduit Entry
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
32.6 13.96 (354.6) onduit Entry lowed in Top nd Wall 6.00 (152.4) Minimum 85.59 (2174.0) 62.23 (1580.6) 85.04 (2160.0)
81.03 (2058.2)
0.5 Mou Hole 4.34 (110.2) 24.0 (609 4.39 (111.5)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 023

LayoutDimensions
28.0-23
Table 28.0-21. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
Ampere Rating NEMA 3R Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 30 60 100
W Weight Lbs (kg)

22 23
H
Height (H) 24.93 (633.2) 24.93 (633.2) 24.93 (633.2)
Depth (D) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
Depth (D2) 11.29 (286.8) 11.29 (286.8) 11.29 (286.8)
26.58 (675.1) 26.58 (675.1) 26.58 (675.1)
24 25
D2
108 lbs (49 kg) with a 15A GFI receptacle; 130 lbs (59 kg) with a 20A GFI receptacle.
Figure 28.0-21. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Switch Diagram
26 27
Table 28.0-22. Elevator Control Switch

Ampere Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width (W) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 20.00 (508.0) 25.21 (640.3) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 24.00 (609.6) 25.21 (640.3) Height (H) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 30.00 (762.0) 53.25 (1352.6) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 30.00 (762.0) 53.25 (1352.6) Depth (D) 8.63 (219.2) 8.63 (219.2) 8.63 (219.2) 8.63 (219.2) 12.69 (322.3) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 ( 203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 12.69 (322.3)
NEMA 1
30 60 100 200 400
28 29 30 31 32
Figure 28.0-22. Elevator Control Switch Diagram
NEMA 3R or 12
30 60 100 200 400
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

LayoutDimensions
September 2011
Sheet 28 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 28.0-23. NEMA 7/9 Enclosure Sizes
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 30 60 100 Catalog Number DS361FX DS362FX DS363FX DS361UX DS362UX DS363UX Type Fusible (Class J fuse provisions) Non-fusible Poles 3 Voltage 600 Vac 125/250 Vdc Standard Conduit Size in Inches (mm) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) 2.50 (63.5) 3 600 Vac 125/250 Vdc 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) Enclosure Number 1 2 3 1 1 2
(2) 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) NPT
Figure 28.0-23. NEMA 7/930100ADual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on Enclosures 1 and 2 Table 28.0-24. NEMA 7/9Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Number A B 1 2 3
Inside Dimensions J 14.13 (358.9) 19.00 (482.6) C 5.94 (150.9) 6.50 (165.1) 11.75 (298.4) D 10.75 (273.1) 16.00 (406.4) 20.00 (508.0)
Outside Dimensions F 10.63 (270.0) 11.00 (279.4) 16.38 (416.1) G 15.25 (387.4) 20.50 (520.7) 25.13 (638.3) H 8.84 (224.5) 8.97 (227.8) 9.59 (243.6)
Number of Conduits 2 2 2
K Approximate Dimensions Weight Lbs (kg) 2.00 (50.8) 2.31 (58.6) 3.50 (88.9) 38 (17) 57 (26) 104 (47)
5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 10.25 (260.4)
13.13 (333.5) 18.00 (457.2) 22.63 (574.8)
See Table 28.0-23 for threaded conduit sizes, one at top and one at bottom.
Note: Accessories and modications shown on Pages 28.0-14, 28.0-15, 28.0-30 and 28.0-31 are not applicable to NEMA 7/9 disconnect switches.
Dimensions are for estimating purposes only. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 025

Technical Data
28.0-25
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Table 28.0-25. General-Duty, Fusible and Non-Fusible, 120V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere Rating 30 60 Single-Phase AC 2 3 Three-Phase AC 3 7-1/2
Table 28.0-31. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240V

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 Single-Phase AC 3 10 20 15 Three-Phase AC 10 20 40 60 125 200
22 23 24 25 26
Three-Phase AC 20 50 75 125 250 400 500
Table 28.0-26. General-Duty, Fusible and Non-Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 Single-Phase AC 3 10 15 15 Three-Phase AC 7-1/2 15 30 60 125 200

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 Single-Phase AC 7-1/2 20 40 50
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Ampere Rating 30 60 Single-Phase AC 2 3 Three-Phase AC 5 10

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 Single-Phase AC 10 25 50 50 Three-Phase AC 30 60 100 150 350 500 500
Table 28.0-28. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 Single-Phase AC 3 10 15 15 Three-Phase AC 7-1/2 15 30 60 125 200 250
Table 28.0-34. Double Throw, Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600
Single-Phase AC 3 10 15 15
Three-Phase AC 7-1/2 15 30 60 125 50

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 Single-Phase AC 7-1/2 20 30 50 Three-Phase AC 15 30 60 125 250 400 500
Only available for use with fast acting fuses. Standard hp rating is shown.
Table 28.0-35. Double Throw, Fusible, 480V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 Single-Phase AC 7-1/2 20 30 50 Three-Phase AC 15 30 60 125 250

Note: Ratings are based on three-pole designs.
CA08104001E

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 28 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Table 28.0-36. Double-Throw, Fusible, 600V with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 Single-Phase AC 10 25 40 50 Three-Phase AC 20 50 75 150 350
Table 28.0-40. Double-Throw, Non-Fusible, 600V


Ampere Rating 30 60 Single-Phase AC 2 3 Three-Phase AC 5 10
Table 28.0-41. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 480V, 600V Types 7 and 9

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 Three-Phase, 480V AC 20 40 75 125 Three-Phase, 600V AC 20 50 75 150

Table 28.0-42. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 480V, 600V Types 7 and 9 with Time Delay Fuses
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 Three-Phase, 480V AC 15 30 60 125 Three-Phase, 600V AC 20 50 75 150

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 Single-Phase AC 7-1/2 20 40 50 Three-Phase AC 20 50 75 125 250 250 250
Note: Ratings are based on three-pole designs.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 027

Technical DataShort-Circuit Ratings
28.0-27
General-Duty
Table 28.0-43. Short-Circuit Ratings Using Class R, J or T Fusing where Applicable
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes) Type 1 100k at 240V 100k at 240V 100k at 240V 100k at 240V 100k at 250V 100k at 250V Type 3R 100k at 240V 100k at 240V 100k at 240V 100k at 240V 100k at 250V 100k at 250V
Short-Circuit Ratings of Non-Fusible Switches

The UL listed short-circuit ratings for Eatons non-fusible switches are based on the switches being properly protected by overcurrent protective devices. For applications that require a UL listed short-circuit rating of 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes or less, an Eaton non-fusible switch must be properly protected by any overcurrent protective device rated no greater than the ampere rating of the switch. For applications that require a UL listed short-circuit rating of greater than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, an Eaton non-fusible switch must be properly protected by the appropriate class and size fusing noted. Otherwise, this non-fusible switch must be replaced with an Eaton fusible switch that uses the appropriate fusing required. Moldedcase circuit breaker protection of non-fusible Eaton switches for applications that require a short-circuit rating of greater than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes has been evaluated and is summarized below. Refer to the reference tables for typical Eaton fusible switch UL listed short-circuit ratings. Table 28.0-46. UL Recognized Safety Switch/Circuit Breaker Series-Connected Ratings
Safety Switch Ampere Rating 30 and 60 100 Maximum System Voltage AC Circuit Breaker Maximum Short Circuit Rating (rms Symmetrical) 25,000 18,000 14,000 25,000 18,000 14,000 35,000 25,000 18,000 14,000 65,000 Circuit Breaker Frame(s)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A. Rated at 10,000 rms symmetrical when using class H fuses.
Heavy-Duty
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes) Type 1 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 600V Type 3R 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 600V Type 12 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 600V Type 4 and 4X 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 480V 100k at 600V 200k at 600V
600
FDC, HFD, HFDE, EGH FD, EGE FDB FDC, HFD, HFDE, EGH FD, EGE FDB EGH, EGS FDC, HFD, HFDE, HJD, JGH FD, JD, JGE FDB HFD, HFDE, HJD, JGH
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
600
480 200 600
Class L fuse connectors supplied as standard for 800A and 1200A. 480
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A. Rated at 10,000A rms symmetrical when using Class H fuses.
Double Throw
Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200 Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes) (600V) Type 1 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k Type 3R 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k Type 12 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k Type 4 and 4X 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k 100k
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A, except Class T for 400A at 600V and 600A at 240V. Rated at 10,000A rms symmetrical when using class H fuses. Note: Class L fuse connectors supplied as standard for 800A and 1200A. Note: Safety switch short-circuit ratings are applicable to AC only. Note: Safety switch I2t and Ip values are identical to UL maximum acceptable I2t and Ip values for the corresponding class fuse. Note: Table 28.0-45 is not applicable to the compact design shown in Eatons Volume 2Commercial Distribution, CA08100003E, Tab 8, Section 8.1. The compact design is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
CA08104001E

Technical DataFuse Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 28 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Typical Fuse Dimensions

Cl Class T
T-Tron Fuses JJN (300V) JJS (600V)
Cl Class J
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses (600V)
Class RK5 and RK1

Fusetron, Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses (250 and 600V) FRN-R and FRS-R; LPN-RK and LPS-RK; KTN-R and KTS-R
Basic dimensions are same as Class H (formerly NEC) ONE-TIME (NON and NOS) and SUPERLAG Renewable RES and REN fuses. Note: These fuses can be used to replace existing Class H, RK1 and RK5 fuses relating to dimensional compatibility. A B
250V
Ampere 1/1030 3560 A 2.00 3.00 A
B
600V
B 0.56 0.81 A 5.00 5.50 B 0.81 1.06
Fusetron and Limitron
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 28.0-24. Typical Fuse Dimensions in Inches
Note: For typical fuse dimensions in millimeters, see Figure 28.0-25 on Page 28.0-29.
250V
Ampere 70100 110200 225400 Low-Peak A 5.88 7.13 8.63 10.38 B 1.06 1.56 2.06 2.59
600V
A 7.88 9.63 11.63 13.38 B 1.34 1.84 2.59 3.13
250V
Ampere 70100 110200 450600 A 5.88 7.13 8.63 10.38 B 1.16 1.66 2.38 2.88
600V
A 7.88 9.63 11.63 13.38 B 1.16 1.66 2.38 2.88
Cl Class L
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses 4000A) (600V)

Note 800A same dimensions, except tube 3-inch lgth. x 2-inch dia.; terminal 1.63-inch width x 1.25-inch thick.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 029

Technical DataFuse Dimensions
28.0-29
Typical Fuse Dimensions (Continued)

Class T
T-Tron Fuses JJN (300V) JJS (600V)
22
Class J
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses LPJ and JKS (600V)
Class RK5 and RK1

Fusetron, Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses (250 and 600V) FRN-R and FRS-R; LPN-RK and LPS-RK; KTN-R and KTS-R
Basic dimensions are same as Class H (formerly NEC) ONE-TIME (NON and NOS) and SUPERLAG Renewable RES and REN fuses. Note: These fuses can be used to replace existing Class H, RK1 and RK5 fuses relating to dimensional compatibility. A B
23 24 25 26 27
250V
Ampere 1/1030 3560 A 50.8 76.2 A
B
600V
A 127.0 139.7 B 20.6 27.0
B 14.3 20.6
28 29 30
Fusetron and Limitron
250V
Ampere 70100 110 450 Low-Peak A 149.2 181.0 263.5 B 26.9 39.6 52.3 65.8
600V
A 200.0 244.5 295.3 339.7 B 34.0 46.7 65.8 79.5
31 32 33 34 35
250V
Ampere 70100 110 450 A 149.2 181.0 263.5 B 29.5 42.2 60.5 73.2
600V
A 200.0 244.5 295.3 339.7 B 29.5 42.2 60.5 73.2
Class L
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses KRP-C, KTU and KLU (6014000A) (600V)
Note: KRP-CL (150 800A samedimensions, except tube 76.2 mm lgth. x 50.8 mm dia.; terminal 41.3 mm width x 31.8 mm thick.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 28.0-25. Typical Fuse Dimensions in Millimeters

Note: For typical fuse dimensions in inches, see Figure 28.0-24 on Page 28.0-28.
CA08104001E

Factory ModicationsFlex Center Facility
September 2011
Sheet 28 030
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Flex Center
Introduction
The Safety Switch Flex Center is a special facility at the site of Eatons Cleveland, Tennessee, plant that is dedicated to providing customized safety switches that meet customers challenging applications. Eatons Safety Switch Flex Center is a solutions center that provides real value: A dedicated and knowledgeable engineering/manufacturing/customer service team to meet your needs A production facility stocked with a full array of equipment to get the job done The industrys shortest lead time Easy ordering through our distributors
Switching Neutral Double-Throw (SN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed for Single-Throw Non-Fusible Safety Switches (N) . . . 20
Before system construction can begin, the following information must be provided to the Flex Center: 1. Username, address and telephone number. 2. Complete coordination (lock scheme) required with order. To specify, add Sufx TK to the standard catalog number.
1. Nameplates
Price covers up to three lines of text with a maximum of 25 characters per line. Standard nameplates are laserengraved plastic and have black letters on a white background. Rotary-engraved phenolic nameplates are also available at a premium. Additional color combinations and larger nameplates are available. Customer must specify the text when placing an order.
6. Upper Cover Viewing Window

Upper Viewing Window is Centered over the switching contacts to provide visual verication of ON/OFF status. Available on most Heavy-Duty NEMA 4X Stainless Steel and NEMA 12 DoubleThrow enclosures. Not available on nonmetallic enclosures. To specify, add Sufx W to the standard catalog number.
Note: 30100A switches are now provided with a full view cover window for blade verication and blown fuse indication.
2. Fungus Proong
All non-metallic components of the switch are coated with a moisture and fungus-resistant varnish. The inhibitor used meets military specication: MIL-V-173C for MOISTURE AND FUNGUS-RESISTANT TREATMENT. The treated switch meets military specication: MIL-T-152E for MOISTURE AND FUNGUS-RESISTANT TREATMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS, ELECTRONICS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT. Not UL listed. To specify, add Sufx FP to standard safety switch catalog number. Example: DH363FGKFP.
Description (Sufx)
Item
Phenolic Nameplates (NP) . . . . . . . . 1 Fungus Proong (FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Special Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Lock-On Provisions on Heavy-Duty Safety Switches for Most Enclosure Types (LO) . . . . . . . 4 Trapped Key Interlock Systems (TK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Upper Cover Viewing Window (W) . . 6
7. Lower Cover Viewing Window

Lower Viewing Window is positioned over fuses and provides visual verication of Blown Fuse Indicators. Available in 30600A, two- and threepole Heavy-Duty NEMA 12, NEMA 3R and NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Safety Switches. Not available on nonmetallic enclosures. To specify, add Sufx LW to standard catalog number.
Note: 30100A switches are now provided with a full view cover window for blade verication and blown fuse indication.
Lower Cover Viewing Window (LW) . . 7

Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed for Double-Throw Safety Switches (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Class R Fuse Clips Factory Installed for Heavy-Duty Switches (5 or 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Class T Fuse Clips Factory Installed for Heavy-Duty Switches (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Class J Fuse Clips Factory Installed for Heavy-Duty and Double-Throw Safety Switches (J) . 11 Fuse Pullers Factory Installed (FE) . . 12 Special Crimp Lug Pads Factory Installed for General-Duty and Heavy-Duty Switches (CK) . . . . . . . 13 Copper Lugs Factory Installed (CL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Equipment Ground Lugs Factory Installed (G) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Custom Lug Congurations (L) . . . 16 Auxiliary Contacts Factory Installed (2 or 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Control Pole Factory Installed (CP). . 18
3. Special Paint
Special paint colors are available for order quantities of ve or more switches. Colors available are red, orange, yellow, green, black and white. Custom color is applied over the standard ANSI-61 gray nish. Minimum quantity of ve of the same color is required. To specify, add Sufx LO to the standard catalog number. For quantities less than ve, higher ampere ratings, or other color request, contact the Safety Switch Flex Center.
8. Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed for Double-Throw Safety Switches

To specify, add Sufx N to the standard safety switch catalog number. Example: DT361URKN
9. Class R Fuse Clips Factory Installed for Heavy-Duty Switches

To specify, add Sufx 5 to the standard catalog number for 240V application. Add Sufx 6 to standard catalog number for 600V application. Example: DH324FRK5
4. Lock-on Provisions on Heavy-Duty Safety Switches for Most Enclosure Types

Available on 30800A Heavy-Duty and Double-Throw Safety Switches. Provision will accept a single lock. To specify, add Sufx LO to the standard catalog number.
10. Class T Fuse Clips Factory Installed for Heavy-Duty Switches

To specify, add Sufx T to the standard catalog number (catalog number identies voltage). Example: DH364FGKT
5. Trapped Key Interlock Systems

Available only on Heavy-Duty and Double-Throw Safety Switches. Trapped Key Systems are used on safety switches to prevent unauthorized operations or to predetermine a series of power transfers by an authorized operator.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 28 031

Factory ModicationsFlex Center Facility
28.0-31
11. Class J Fuse Clips Factory Installed for Heavy-Duty and Double-Throw Safety Switches
To specify by description. A table of common 30A heavy-duty switches with J fuse clips factory installed is shown below (eld modication kits are not available for 30A Heavy-Duty Switches). Table 28.0-47. Common 30A Heavy-Duty Switches with J Fuse Clips Factory Installed
Voltage 240 Switch Type Three-Pole NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4X NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4X Catalog Number DH321FGKJ DH321FRKJ DH321FDKJ DH321FWKJ DH361FGKJ DH361FRKJ DH361FDKJ DH361FWKJ
16. Custom Lug Congurations

Customer-specied lug arrangements are available on heavy-duty and doublethrow safety switches. Contact the Safety Switch Flex Center for price and lead time.
Additional Safety Switch Flex Center Design Offerings

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
17. Auxiliary Contacts Factory Installed Provide Early-Make/Early-Break Operation

To specify 1NO/1NC contacts, add Sufx 2 to the standard safety switch catalog number. To specify 2NO/2NC contacts, add Sufx 3 to the standard safety switch catalog number. Example: DH423FGK2 Example: DT324FGK22
600
18. Control Pole Factory Installed Provides Late-Make/Early-Break Operation

The K-Series Control Pole provides one Normally Open contact, latemake, early-break operation. It mounts in the exact location as the neutral block using the same pre-drilled holes. This is directly connected to the power pole operating shaft. Direct connection and visible blades provide more secure electrical interlocking than handle linkage operation of a snap/ switch type interlock. This reliability meets the requirements of many specications for four-pole switches when the fourth pole is required for secure electrical interlocking. To specify, add Sufx CP to the standard Safety Switch catalog number. Example: DH267FGKCP
To specify, add Sufx J to the standard catalog number (catalog number identies voltage). Example: DH363FGKJ
Left-hand design (30200A) Cover-mounted status lights and selector switches Integrated: Surge protection devices (SPDs) Current transformers Double-throw receptacle switches 200% neutrals 1200A NEMA 4X stainless steel Seam-welded stainless steel Gang-operated kits: Mechanically interlocks two or three separate switches Cam-Lok receptacles Reverse feed Integrated wattmeter Custom enclosures Double-throw switches with windows 316 Grade stainless steel Mill duty
12. Fuse Pullers Factory Installed

To specify, add Sufx FE to the standard catalog number. Example: DH361FRKFE.
Note: Standard NEMA 12/3R, 4 and 4X switches through 200A are supplied with fuse pullers from the factory.
Literature
The Safety Switch Flex Centers innovative approach to exible engineering, manufacturing and customer service provides the shortest production, design and delivery cycle in the industry. Find out more about how the Safety Switch Flex Center can give you the safety switch solutions you need...when you need them.
13. Special Crimp Lug Pads Factory Installed for General-Duty and Heavy-Duty Switches (Crimp Lugs are Not Included)
To specify add Sufx CK to the standard safety switch catalog number. Heavy-Duty Type DH Switches, 30200A, are adaptable to crimp lugs; simply remove the box lugs.
19. Switching Neutral Double-Throw

UL listed for three-pole and four-pole non-fusible double-throw safety switches. Switching neutrals are required for separately derived systems when bonding the neutral of the generator to a grounding system at the generator. To specify, add Sufx SN to the standard safety switch catalog number. Example: DT324URKSN
14. Copper Lugs Factory Installed

To specify, add Sufx CL to the standard safety switch catalog number. Example: DH221FGKCL
15. Equipment Ground Lugs Factory Installed for General-Duty and Heavy-Duty Switches
To specify, add Sufx G to the standard safety switch catalog number.
20. Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed for Single-Throw Non-Fusible Safety Switches
Available on 200600A General-Duty Safety Switches and 301200A HeavyDuty Safety Switches. To specify, add Sufx N to the standard Safety Switch Catalog Number. Example: DH364UWKN For application, availability or pricing questions, contact Eaton.
CA08104001E
28.0-32 Switching DevicesLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 28 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
Motor Control CentersLow Voltage

May 2012
Sheet 29 001
29.0-1
Motor Control Centers Low Voltage
Contents
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Centers General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-1 NEMA Wiring Classications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-2 Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-2 Wireways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-3 Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-3 Starter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-6 Feeder Tap Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-7 Stab Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-7 Handle Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-8 Device Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-9 Unit Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-9 Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-10 Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-10 Unit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-10 Additional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-11 Control/Load Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-11 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-11 Remote Racking Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-12 Voltage Presence Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-12 Automatic Insulation Tester. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-12 FlashGard Padlock Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-12 SPD Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-12 MCC Motor Control Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-13 Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-14 DeviceNet Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-15 PROFIBUS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-15 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-16 Web-Enabled MCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-17 Harmonic Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-20 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-21 Additional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-22 Layout Guide Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-23 Layout and Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-24 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16482A Section 26 24 19.11 FlashGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16482D Section 26 24 19.13
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center
Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center
CA08104001E
29.0-2 Motor Control CentersLow Voltage

May 2012
Sheet 29 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 003
Motor Control CentersLow Voltage Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard

General Description
29.1-1
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center
Freedom 2100 Features

UL 845 label 42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings Molded-case and air power circuit breakers Across-the-line, reduced voltage and solid-state starters Variable frequency drives and VFD options Unit latch Spring-loaded door latches All standard industrial communication options Automatic transfer switches Panelboards and transformers
as to enable the operator to connect and disconnect starters safely behind the arc ash boundaries prescribed by National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Freedom FlashGard Features

Freedom FlashGard Introduction

UL 845 label 42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings Retractable stab mechanism with connected and disconnected positions Molded-case and air power circuit breakers Unit latch Spring-loaded door latches Remote racking Across-the-line, reduced voltage and solid-state starters Variable frequency and solid-state reduced voltage starter options
Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center
Eatons Freedom FlashGard MCCs are an industry rst in addressing the dangers associated with an arc ash event by minimizing the risk of arc ash exposure, and lowering the PPE requirements as dened by the NFPA 70E.2004, for low voltage applications. Freedom FlashGard offers features to help prevent injury from electric shock, arc-ash burn and arc-blast impacts. A retractable stab mechanism, 120V based electromechanical and solidstate motor control with communications capability enables these MCCs to provide the highest level of safety, quality and innovation for group motor control. A comprehensive range of communications options are available, including DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS and EtherNet/IP. The new Freedom FlashGard MCC uses a retractable stab mechanism, called RotoTract, which allows the electrical worker to connect and disconnect power to the bucket with the unit door closed. A visual indication is provided on the unit door on the Connected and Disconnected positions of RotoTract. A visual indication on the position of the shutters that enclose the stabs is also provided (open shutters indicates that stabs are extended and closed shutters indicate that the stabs are withdrawn). In addition, a number of safety interlocks prevents scenarios where removal or insertion of FlashGard bucket could compromise arc ash safety. A motorized tool, such as an electric screwdriver with a 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) square bit or standard 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) drive ratchet is required to operate RotoTracts retractable stab mechanism. An optional remote racking accessory with a pendant station is available
All standard industrial communication options Automatic transfer switches Panelboards and transformers
Product Description
MCCs provide the best method for grouping motor control as well as associated distribution equipment. Eatons Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Series control centers are specially designed to operate machinery, industrial processes and commercial building systems. The MCC enclosure consists of a strong and rigid steel channel framework assembled into standardized vertical sections and bolted together to form a complete shipping section of up to 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) maximum, four structures each. Structures include horizontal and vertical bus, insulation and isolation barriers, horizontal and vertical isolated wiring troughs, cable entrance areas, and space for inserting starter and control equipment. All control units, removable or xed mounted, are assembled with Eaton components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards. Specically designed bus stabs, insertion guides, handle mechanisms and safety interlocks are added to form a standardized plug-in unit, which meets the highest safety standards.
General Description
Freedom 2100 Introduction
Eatons Freedom 2100 motor control centers (MCCs) provide a convenient method for grouping motor control, as well as associated distribution equipment. Freedom 2100 Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600V, 50 or 60 Hz, having available fault currents of up to 100,000A rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, NEMA 2, 12 and 3R. All controllers are assembled with Eaton components of proven safety, quality and reliability. All components are wired in accordance with NEC and UL standards. A comprehensive range of communications options are available, including DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS, Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP.
CA08104001E
29.1-2 Motor Control CentersLow Voltage Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard
General Description
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Series MCCs may be applied on electrical systems up to 600V, 50 or 60 Hz having available fault currents of up to 100,000A rms. Enclosure designs include NEMA 1 Gasketed, 2, 12, 3R, 3R Walk-in and 3R Walk-in Tunnel. An ongoing temperature and short-circuit design test program, as required by UL 845, ensures a quality product that meets the latest safety codes. Freedom DC motor control centers are available up to 250 Vdc, having available fault currents up to 22,000A rms. Type C-S all factory-supplied control terminals are brought to a master terminal block located in the structure. Type C-M all factory-supplied control terminals are brought to a master terminal block located in a separate marshaling structure.
May 2012
Sheet 29 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
secure closure for all openings. Doors mounted on removable pin hinges are provided on all unit compartments. Vertical wireways, top horizontal wireways and bottom horizontal wireways are standard. The unit pan forms the top barrier of each unit space. In conjunction with the unit wrapper, this provides isolation between adjacent units and wireways. The guide rails are an integral part of this pan and provide precise alignment of the unit stabs on the vertical bus.
Structures
NEMA Classications (ICS 3, Part 1)

Class I Control Centers
A mechanical grouping of combination motor control, feeder tap and/or other units arranged in a convenient assembly. Connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units are included. Interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices is not included. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied. When master terminal blocks are specied, a sketch showing general location of terminals is provided.
Standard Structure Arrangements

Standard structural height is 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) with 9.00-inch (228.6 mm) horizontal wireways available at top and bottom for wiring. The balance of vertical compartments, 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), is available for mounting of control units. This space can provide up to 12 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces) or any combination thereof.
Note: In the rear of common vertical bus back-to-back structures, the top horizontal wireway is 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high and the bottom wireway is 9.00 inches (228.6 mm). This means that back-to-back structures have only 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in the rear. 72.00-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of mounting space is available with a 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) bottom wireway. Two frontmounted only structures can be supplied in a back-to-back conguration, allowing 12X rear usable space (depth dimension will increase).
Class II Control Centers

The same as Class I, but designed to form a complete control system. They include the necessary electrical interlocking and interwiring between units and interlocking provisions to remotely mounted devices. A suitable diagram illustrating operation of the control associated with the motor control center will be provided. When master terminal blocks are specied, the terminal arrangement and required wiring connections are shown on the diagram.
Standard StructureSide View
Construction
The standard vertical structure is 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high and 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Frontmounted-only structures can be either 16.00 inches (406.4 mm) or 21.00 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Backto-back unit mounting is 21.00 inches (533.4 mm) deep. The structure framework is made of 12-gauge formed steel channels. The subframes for the front and rear of each structure are welded. These subframes are then bolted to longitudinal members to form the complete frame, which is rigid and self-supporting. Side, back and roof covers of 14-gauge steel are mounted with screw fasteners for quick and easy removal. All doors are 14-gauge steel with a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) ange to provide a rigid,
Special Structures
In addition to the standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide structures are available in 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) increments up to 40.00 inches (1016.0) wide. Reduced height structures, in increments of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) 1X from 90.00 to 54.00 inches (2286.0 to 1371.6 mm), are available for applications with limited access. Another special structure is a transition section between Type W and the Freedom 2100 Series. This structure is 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) wide to provide for horizontal bus splicing.
NEMA Types of Wiring

Type A includes no terminal blocks. Combination line starters power wiring are factory wired and assembled in the structure in the most efcient arrangement. Auxiliary devices can be supplied, wired or unwired as specied. All feeder circuit breaker or fusible disconnect units are in this classication. Type B duplicates Type A except that all control wires terminate at blocks on the side or near the bottom of each unit. Plug-in type terminal blocks are standard for all control wiring.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 005

General Description
29.1-3
Paint
All enclosure parts are thoroughly cleaned and given a phosphatizing treatment to inhibit rust and to prime the metal for the nish coating. A 2 mil thick electrostatic powder paint coat is applied to all surfaces. The paint type and process meets UL 1332 for electrical equipment steel enclosures. All exterior enclosure covers and doors are painted ANSI 61 gray (Munsell No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For improved interior visibility, the interior of the enclosure and plug-in units are painted white (Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
Vertical Wireway
A vertical wireway is provided in each structure. Located on the right side, it extends the full 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm) height of the structure. The width of the wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at the rear of the vertical frame members. Overall depth of the wireway is 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) providing a crosssectional area of nearly 35 square inches (889 square mm) to easily accommodate control and load wiring. Supports are provided at suitable intervals to secure all wiring and cables. The doors swing open 115 and opposite to the unit doors for maximum accessibility. The doors are mounted on concealed removable pin hinges for quick detachment and are secured in the closed position by spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating type fastener.
For back-to-back unit mounted, the rear top horizontal wireway is 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high and 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) deep. All horizontal wireway openings are covered by doors for increased accessibility. Each door is mounted with removable pin hinges to allow quick detachment.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Bus System
The bus system is designed to efciently distribute power throughout the MCC and provides inherent mechanical strength in the event of faults.
Enclosures
The standard enclosure type is NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General PurposeIndoor. This enclosure is appropriate for installations with normal atmospheric conditions. The NEMA Type 2 DripproofIndoor employs a special roof panel with a drip shield and water channels. This prevents liquid from dripping onto the front of the control center. The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and Sleet ResistantOutdoor consists of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure mounted on a special base with an outdoor house erected around and over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle and tunnel types are available. The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and DriptightIndoor has gasketed material around all doors, door cutouts, cover plates, side, top and back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate is provided with this enclosure. This construction provides maximum protection against airborne matter and dripping liquids. Indoor enclosures comply with NEC UL 845s Two Meter Rule when the bottom of the MCC is at the same level as the operators platform. MCCs elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. Handle extensions are optionally available and may be installed on-site.
Vertical Bus
Horizontal Wireways
Vertical Bus Conguration
31 32 33 34 35 36
Top Horizontal Wireway
The vertical bus provides three-phase power distribution from the main horizontal bus into the vertical compartments. The bus is a unique angular conguration with a Z shape for front-mounted structures and for back-to-back. These shapes have the inherent mechanical strength to withstand fault stresses. They also provide a smooth stabbing surface for unit connection.
Bottom Horizontal Wireway
Seismic Qualication
The top front horizontal wireway is 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) high and 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) deep in frontmounted only structures and in the front of back-to-back mounted structures. It extends the full width of each structure and is totally isolated from the main horizontal bus. The bottom horizontal wireway is 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) high and extends the full depth of the structure. The entire oor area under the control center is open for unrestricted conduit entry. For top entry, the top wireway can be increased to 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high, reducing the bottom wireway height to 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
MCC Bus Layout
General Description
Due to the high-strength capability of the bus bars, bus bracing at 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes is standard. Optional bracing is available at 42,000 and 100,000A rms. Bus braces are molded from a glassreinforced polyester material, which is non-tracking and impervious to moisture and other adverse atmospheric operating conditions. The vertical bus is available in ratings of 600, 800 and 1200A for front-mounted only, and 600, 800 and 1200A for back-to-back mounted. Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper only. In addition to tin plating having environmental superiority over silver, its mechanical strength is better able to withstand the stresses of unit insertion and removal on and off the bus. Vertical bus of the incoming section will match the horizontal bus when applicable. Isolation of the Freedom 2100 vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment is accomplished by a full height barrier. This is a single sheet of glassreinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus. Snap-in covers are available for the cutout openings to provide total isolation during maintenance procedures. When insulation and isolation of the vertical bus is required, a labyrinth design barrier, as shown below, as an option for Freedom 2100 and as a standard for Freedom FlashGard. This barrier is molded glass-reinforced polyester and forms a labyrinth around the bus bars to prevent fault propagation. This design provides maximum protection against phase-tophase insulation breakdown. Thermal efciency is maintained by a close tolerance t between the bus bars and the barrier, which minimizes air pockets. An automatic shutter mechanism is standard with the labyrinth barrier to provide complete isolation of the vertical bus. The shutter moves automatically to cover the stab openings when a unit is removed. This provides maintenance personnel with maximum protection because the vertical bus is never exposed. As the unit is reinserted in the compartment, the shutter moves sideways to uncover the stab openings in the barrier.
May 2012
Sheet 29 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Horizontal Bus
Horizontal Bus
The main horizontal bus provides three-phase power distribution from the incoming line or primary disconnect device to each vertical structure in the motor control center. The bus bars are mounted in a vertical plane, edge to edge. This mounting produces an exceptionally strong assembly, able to withstand high fault current stresses. The main horizontal bus is rated at 600A as standard with ratings of 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200A optionally available. Tin-plated copper horizontal bus bars are supplied as standard. Silver-plated copper horizontal bus bars are also available.
Note: 3200A horizontal bus available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise above 40C ambient only.
Labyrinth Barrier with Automatic Shutter Mechanism Standard Isolation Barrier
The horizontal main bus is isolated from the top horizontal wireway compartment by a metal isolation barrier. This two-piece steel barrier extends to the full width of each vertical structure. The two-piece design allows access to bus connections without the removal of the entire barrier, for added maintenance convenience. The bus bar layout permits front access to all bus connections. This allows maintenance personnel to make splices and check splice bolt torques from the front of the structure.
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 007

General Description
29.1-5
Neutral Assemblies
Units
General
Motor starter units are combination type employing a linestarter and a disconnect device of proven capability. The disconnect device can be a motor circuit protector, circuit breaker or fusible switch. Eatons Type HMCP and HMCPE motor circuit protectors are furnished as standard.
Reduced voltage, autotransformer, closed transition Reduced voltage, wye delta Reduced voltage, part winding Reduced voltage, solid-state Adjustable frequency drives
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Neutral Bus (Bottom)
Each starter includes a stainless steel corrosion-resistant safety ground clip that makes connection before the power stabs engage the vertical bus.
For three-phase, four-wire applications, a neutral landing pad is provided as standard. This is a 100% rated neutral. As an option, half or fully rated neutral bus can be supplied in the bottom of the entire MCC.
All starters and soft starters through NEMA Size 5 are a drawout design except Size 5 electromechanical reduced voltage. All feeder breakers through 400A are a drawout design. All dimensions and ratings in the following tables are based on NEMA Design B, 1800 RPM motors. The HMCP/HMCPE and starter combination has a 65,000 rms symmetrical ampere short-circuit current rating as standard at 480V. Starter units are available with optional 100,000A short-circuit current rating. Series C thermalmagnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC, or optional 100 kAIC) for starter units are also available. Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard starters meet or exceed IEC 947-4 Type II testing with HMCP, or R and J fuses. The fusible switch disconnect device is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quickbreak, visible blade switch with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual element, rejection type, NEMA Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips for Class RK-5 fuses are standard. Fuses are not included as standard. Both breaker and fuse selection must take into consideration the total shortcircuit capacity of the system to which the control center is connected. Typical starter units available include the following: Full voltage, non-reversing Full voltage, reversing Two-speed, single winding and two winding

UnitsFreedom 2100 Starter
Ground Bus
Freedom 2100 FVNR Starter
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ground Bus (Top)
Copper ground bus, rated 300A 0.25-inch by 1.00-inch (6.4 mm by 25.4 mm) is supplied as standard. Mounting is across the top of each vertical structure in the horizontal wireway. The bus can also be mounted across the bottom when the bottom 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) are not occupied by units or master terminal blocks. A 0.25-inch by 2.00-inch (6.4 mm by 50.8 mm) optional copper ground bus rated 600 or 800A is also available.
An optional 300A vertical tin-plated only copper ground bus is available. Located in the vertical wireway, it provides direct starter unit grounding.
Freedom Series 2100 starter units are equipped with Eatons Freedom starters and contactors NEMA Sizes 1 through 5. Size 6 and 7 starters are A200 type. These contactors have been successfully applied in thousands of the most demanding industrial applications. Overload protection is provided by a three-pole adjustable ambient compensated, bi-metallic thermal overload relay. The overload relay also provides single-phase sensitivity and isolated alarm contact. As an option, the overload relay can be upgraded to a standard solid-state overload or an advanced solid-state overload as described on Page 29.1-20. An insulated hand reset button extends through the compartment door. Additionally, motor running data and starter status/control are available through one of the many industrial communication protocols.
CA08104001E
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 29 008
22 23 24 25 26 27
UnitsFreedom FlashGard Starter

Racking Tool Receiver Power Stab Position Connected Disconnected Handle Mechanism Unit Latch
Internal Shutter Position Open Closed
Breaker
Starter
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Freedom FlashGard FVNR Starter
Pilot Device Island Start, Stop, Auto/Man
torque applications, such as fans and pumps. Control schemes are available for volts/Hz, open loop vector and closed loop vector models. SVX9000 drive units include as standard: line reactors and a door-mounted keypad. Units up to 150 hp VT have a standard output reactor for dV/dT ltering. MVX drive units include as standard: a line reactor, viewing window for drive display and an output lter. All drive structures are bus connected, which allows for expansion of the MCC on both sides of the structure. A wide range of AFD features and options are available to meet the requirements of most applications. AFDs are available in NEMA 1A gasketed enclosures. AFDs are available in NEMA 3R MCC enclosures from 1200 hp, constant torque.
UnitsSolid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
The Freedom FlashGard units are equipped with a retractable stab mechanism called RotoTract, that allows the electrical worker to connect and disconnect power to the bucket with the unit door closed, thereby minimizing exposure to arc ash. A visual indication is provided on the unit door on the Connected and Disconnected positions of RotoTract. A visual indication on the position of the shutters that enclose the stabs is also provided (open shutters indicate that stabs are extended and closed shutters indicate that the stabs are withdrawn). A motorized tool such as an electric screwdriver, drill with a 3/8-inch square drill bit or standard 3/8-inch drive ratchet is used to operate RotoTract through its racking tool receiver. Additional safety features of a FlashGard unit include: Unit LatchWhen the RotoTract is in Connected or Test position, this latch is mechanically interlocked to hook the bucket to the divider pan that separates the bucket from the unit above, thereby preventing physical removal of the bucket when it is connected to 480V and/or control power. The unit latch also prevents insertion of a bucket with the stabs extended RotoTract racking tool receiver shutterWhen the breaker is in the On position, the shutter for the access hole in the RotoTract (access hole is needed for the motorized tool to retract the stabs) is closed, thereby not allowing the stabs to be retracted when the breaker is energized
Freedom FlashGard starters are equipped with electromechanical starters and contactors NEMA size 15.
UnitsAC Drives
S801 SSRV Starter 135A
S801/S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage (SSRV) starters are designed to reduce the inrush current to a motor during starting and to limit the amount of available starting torque, thus reducing mechanical wear and utility demand requirements. The amount of starting current is eld adjustable to match the specic requirements of all applications. Eatons S801/S811 SSRV controllers are available with a wide variety of standard features: kick start, soft stop, phase loss and stall protection. S801/ S811 SSRV starters are 3070% smaller than competitive designs.
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Adjustable Frequency Drives are available from 0.51100 hp for control of standard AC motors in processes that benet from the ability to change motor speed. Use of Inverter Duty motors is recommended. Controllers are available to handle constant torque applications, such as conveyors and crushers, and variable
Typical applications include conveyors, compressors, machine tools, pumps and fans.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 009

General Description
29.1-7
UnitsDC Starters
All switches are supplied with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual-element rejection type. Types of fuses include Class J, R or L, which are supplied by others.
Freedom FlashGard Feeder Tap Units
This ensures a positive connection yet permits easy unit insertion and withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic insulation block that totally shrouds each stab and absolutely ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus. The insulation block is also an integral part of the phase-tophase isolation system. Power wiring is welded to the stabs and is totally contained within the unit enclosure. This means the vertical bus compartment is completely free of wiring for maximum safety and reliability. Stab assemblies are accurately matched to the electrical requirements of each individual unit and are provided in 60, 150, 300 or 400A ratings (plug-in through Size 5).
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
DC Starter Unit
UL listed DC MCCs use combination circuit breaker DC starters suitable for motor starting duty only. Using Eatons Type ME DC denite purpose contactors, all DC starters are suitable for up to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand rating. Class 135 starting resistors for reduced voltage starters are sized for 200% starting current. Typical applications include emergency lube oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps and emergency turning gear motors.
Freedom FlashGard Stab Assembly

Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism
Freedom 2100 Feeder Tap Units
Feeder tap units may contain either circuit breakers or fusible switches. Drawout breaker units include the xed trip Type HFD, single-mounted in ratings through 150A and the interchangeable trip Type HJD singlemounted through 250A and Type HKD single-mounted through 400A. Larger Series C circuit breakers with ratings to 2500A are xed-mounted. Fusible feeder tap units use Eatons Type K visible blade disconnect switch. Fused switches are mounted in drawout units through 400A with 30A and 60A ratings available in dual mountings. Fixed-mounted switch ratings of 600A and 800A are also available.
Stabs Extended
Stabs Withdrawn
33 34 35 36
Freedom 2100 Dual Feeder Tap Unit
Feeder tap units may contain either circuit breakers or fusible switches. Freedom 2100 drawout breaker units include the xed trip Type HFD, singleor dual-mounted in ratings through 150A and the interchangeable trip Types HJD and HKD single-mounted through 250A and 400A respectively. Larger Series C circuit breakers with ratings to 2500A are xed-mounted. Fusible feeder tap units use Eatons Type K visible blade disconnect switch. Fused switches are mounted in drawout units through 400A with 30A and 60A ratings available in dual mountings. Fixed-mounted switch ratings of 600A and 800A are also available.
All switches are supplied with fuse clips for use with current-limiting or dual-element rejection type. Types of fuses include Class J, R or L supplied by others.
Freedom FlashGard Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
Freedom 2100 Stab Assembly
Freedom 2100 Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incorporates the ultimate in mechanical simplicity to provide precise control of contact pressure on the bus.
The Freedom FlashGard MCC uses a retractable stab mechanism, called RotoTract, that allows the electrician to connect and disconnect power to the bucket with the unit door closed. A visual indication is provided on the unit door on the Connected and Disconnected positions of RotoTract. A visual indication on the position of the shutters that enclose the stabs is also provided (open shutters indicate that stabs are extended and closed shutters indicate that the stabs are withdrawn). A motorized tool or standard 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) drive ratchet is used to operate RotoTracts retractable stab mechanism. A wired remote racking accessory is also available for operating RotoTract with a pendant station safely beyond the NFPA-prescribed ash protection boundaries.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
The stabs are constructed from a tinplated copper alloy, incorporating the ultimate in mechanical simplicity to provide precise control of contact pressure on the bus. This ensures a positive connection, yet permits easy unit insertion and withdrawal. The stabs are self-aligning and are mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic insulation block, which totally shrouds each stab and ensures positive alignment of the stabs with the vertical bus. The insulation block is also an integral part of the phasephase isolation system. Power wiring is welded to the stabs and is totally contained within the unit enclosure. The wire is designed for a high level of exibility to be suitable for RotoTracts retractable stab mechanism. Stab assemblies are accurately matched to the electrical requirements of each individual unit and are provided in 60A, 150A, 300A or 400A ratings (plug-in through Size 5).
May 2012
Sheet 29 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
To ensure that units are not energized accidentally or by unauthorized personnel, the handle mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. Sufcient space is available for a maximum of three padlocks. Where critical processes are involved and to prevent unauthorized shutdown, the handle mechanism can be modied to enable padlocking in the ON position
Unit Insertion Interlock
Freedom FlashGard Handle Mechanism
Freedom 2100 Handle Mechanism
The handle and exterior front panel are molded from the same plastic material as the device panel. A textured surface preserves the appearance. The ON position indicator is at the top and is a bright red. The OFF/RESET position is at the bottom and is bright green. The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is in the middle, between the ON and OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is designed for rugged duty and solid operator feel.
The handle mechanism is designed to provide a high mechanical leverage, so that little effort is required to operate any device. The standard handle mechanism is a vertical motion type device with four positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET. Only circuit breaker types have tripped and reset positions. It is securely mounted to the front of the unit and mechanically connected to the breaker or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive indication of the breaker or switch position, even with the door open.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism is designed to provide a high mechanical leverage so that little effort is required to operate any device. The standard handle mechanism is a vertical motion type device with four positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET. Only circuit breaker types have tripped and reset positions. It is securely mounted to the front of the unit and mechanically connected to the breaker or fusible switch, eliminating alignment problems. It provides a positive indication of the breaker or switch position, even with the door open.
The handle mechanism provides several safety features: In the ON position, an interlock prevents the unit door from being opened. A door interlock defeater screw located above the handle is provided to enable authorized maintenance personnel access to the units when required With the unit door open and the operating handle in the ON position, an interlock slides into a slot in the divider pan above and prevents removal of the unit. This same interlock prevents insertion of the unit unless the handle mechanism is in the OFF position. The interlock also prevents the operating handle from being turned on with the unit door open
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are molded from the same plastic material as the device panel. A textured surface preserves the appearance. The ON position indicator is at the top and is a bright red. The OFF/RESET position is at the bottom and is bright green.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 011

General Description
29.1-9
The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is in the middle, between the ON and OFF position. All position indicator colors contrast with the black background and are highly visible even at considerable distances. The operating handle is designed for rugged duty and solid operator feel.
Device Panel
Freedom FlashGard Unit Wrapper
22 23 24 25 26
Standard Device Panel Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism for Freedom FlashGard provides several safety features: In the ON position, an interlock prevents the unit door from being opened. A door interlock defeater screw located to the right of the handle is provided to enable authorized maintenance personnel access to the units when required The unit insertion interlock is located to the left of the operating handle. The interlock must be in the locked position in order to turn the disconnect on. When the interlock is in the locked position, the unit cannot be withdrawn or inserted To ensure that units are not energized accidentally or by unauthorized personnel, the handle mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. Sufcient space is available for a maximum of three padlocks. Where critical processes are involved and to prevent unauthorized shutdown, the handle mechanism can be modied to enable padlocking in the ON position
The device panel can accommodate up to six 1-3/16-inch (30.2 mm) Eatons 10250T type pilot devices such as oiltight pushbuttons, indicating lights, selector switches and miniature meters. Molded into the panel is a knockout for each device location. This facilitates the future addition of devices to the panel. The device panel is hinged on a horizontal pivot tube extending across the front of the unit. With the unit door open, loosening two captive retaining screws at the top of the panel and sliding it 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) left, permits it to swing down. This provides ready access to the rear of the panel and increased accessibility to the unit interior.
27
Freedom FlashGard Plug-in Unit Wrapper
The unit wrapper is fabricated of 14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting phosphatizing treatment. The nish on a unit wrapper is a baked Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly durable nish, gloss-white in color to increase visibility within the unit and to facilitate wiring and maintenance procedures. The unit wrapper consists of a threesided rugged steel shell including the mounting base for the unit components. The smallest unit measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm) wide, 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) deep and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) high. Units increase in 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) increments to a maximum height of 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm). The unit wrapper is designed to provide ample space for cable entry from the wireway to the unit. The unit wrapper has four mounting points, two on each side, which support the unit in the structure. They engage guide rails located near the top of each unit space. This mounting point guide rail system produces minimum friction and allows units to be inserted and withdrawn easily. The guide rails also give precise alignment to the unit for accurate stabbing on the vertical bus.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Nameplates
Unit nameplates are engraved with 3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering on a black background (black lettering on a white background optional). They are heat- and crack-resistant to eliminate the need for replacement. Nameplates are mounted with stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Freedom 2100 Unit Wrapper
Each unit has a safe lock position. This interlock will lock the unit in a position off the 480V bus and ensure the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn.
Unit Side Latch Screw
Freedom FlashGard Unit Wrapper Side Latch Freedom 2100 Plug-in Unit Wrapper
43
CA08104001E
General Description
The FlashGard unit wrapper is equipped with a quarter-turn side wrapper latch that securely holds the unit in the compartment. The latch can only be engaged when the stabs are fully mated with the vertical bus. Upon release of the latch, the unit can be partially withdrawn such that the stabs disengage from the vertical bus. In this position, the latch can be re-engaged to prevent the unit from being returned to the fully stabbed position or from being removed from the structure. The latch can be padlocked in this position to ensure that the stabs remain disengaged during maintenance.
May 2012
Sheet 29 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Unit Doors
Side MountedLatched Pull-Apart Terminal Block
Unit Maintenance
Heavy-duty saddle wire terminals are of the resilient collar design, which eliminates loose connections caused by expansion and contracting of the conductor as the current is switched on and off. This unique design maintains constant pressure as the wire expands and contracts. This 600V, 30A rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG stripped wires, as well as 14 AWG ring or spade wire lugs. All terminal block conductors are fully shielded for added safety and cleanliness. A 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X space) starter unit accommodates up to three side-mounted terminal blocks providing a maximum of 21 points. Larger units accommodate two additional 7-point terminal blocks for every additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) 1X space of unit height. The 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) compact starter unit uses a 9-point pull-apart terminal block, which is installed along the top front of the starter unit. Control wiring within each starter compartment consists of 16 AWG control wire for Freedom FlashGard MCCs and 2100 Series MCCs. Rated 105C, the ame-retardant, thermoplastic insulated wire is red. Power wiring is black and sized to carry the maximum full load current of the starter unit.
Freedom 2100 12.00-Inch (304.8 mm) Unit Door
Plug-in Unit Maintenance
The Freedom 2100 three-piece unit wrapper design facilitates easy work bench maintenance. When removed from the MCC, the unit top/side barrier assembly can easily be swiveled up and back for complete access to components and wiring.
Freedom FlashGard 12.00-Inch (304.8 mm) Unit Door
Terminal Blocks
A side-mounted, seven-circuit, latching pull-apart terminal block is standard on units with NEMA Type B or C wiring. This industrial-grade Eaton MCC terminal block provides solid electrical connections while conserving space and making installation and maintenance easier. Terminal blocks are mounted in knockouts on the vertical wireway side of the unit housing affording greater access to the unit compartment and interior components. The two-piece terminal block snap-locks together to ensure permanent circuit continuity. To aid installation and wiring checks, the terminal marking strips for both sides of the terminal block are fully visible from the front of the starter compartment.
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge steel with a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) ange on all four sides. The ange adds rigidity to the door and provides a surface to contain door gasketing. Cutouts are made in the door as required to accommodate the operating handle and device panel. The doors are cleaned, phosphatized and given a nish of gray, baked-on enamel ANSI 61 (Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23). The doors will open 115 opposite to the wireway doors permitting optimum access to the unit compartment. The doors are mounted on removable concealed pin hinges. This permits quick removal of any door in a vertical structure without disturbing adjacent doors. Doors 2X and larger are held closed with a minimum of two quarter-turn indicating-type fasteners. They securely hold the door in the closed position, yet allow quick and easy access to the unit when required. The fasteners provide a visual indication of the latched position. The head slot of the fastener is designed to prevent screwdriver slippage.
Front-Rail-Mounted Terminal Blocks

For special applications, other types of rail-mounted terminal blocks are also available. They are installed horizontally at the bottom front of the starter unit. Refer to Eaton for terminal block types available and space restrictions.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 013

General Description

29.1-11
Active harmonic correction units Surge protective device (SPD) units Size 4, 5 and 6 vacuum starters and contactors Power factor correction capacitors Automatic transfer switches DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP Communications Power Xpert communications Industrial Operator Interface Industrial PLCs and PCs
For NEMA Type C-M wiring, control and load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located in a separate marshaling structure.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Incoming Line
Incoming line cables entering the MCC from either the top or bottom can be easily terminated onto main lugs or connected to a main disconnect. All incoming line sections comply with NEC wiring bending requirements as adopted by UL.
Control and Load Terminations

Spring-Loaded Unit Door Quarter-Turn Latch
Main Lugs Only (MLO)

Up to 1200A rated horizontal bus, cables, up to four per phase, are terminated on crimp or screw lugs mounted on adapters solidly bolted to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry cables are terminated at the top of the MCC and bottom entry cables are conveniently terminated near the bottom. Table 29.1-84 shows spacing requirements for various cable congurations. MLO termination for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200A requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200A main lugs only available in NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise above 40C ambient only.
Options
Eatons starter and feeder tap units can be modied to meet a variety of specication requirements. Some typical components that can be added include: control power transformers with two primary and one secondary control fuses, control relays, solid-state overload relays, ground fault relays, current transformers, extra electrical interlocks, pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, circuit breaker shunt trip or undervoltage release and auxiliary switches. In most cases, one of these modications does not increase starter unit size.
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom (Class C Wiring)
For NEMA Type A wiring, each unit is assembled and devices interwired. Terminal blocks are not supplied and control and load wiring is internal to the unit. For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires are terminated at blocks within the unit. Refer to the discussion of units for types of terminal blocks available. For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control and load wires are extended from the unit terminal blocks to master terminal blocks located at the top or bottom of each vertical structure. The mounting location of the master terminal block in front-mounted only structures is in the existing horizontal wireway space at the top or at the bottom as shown above. When mounting is made in an incoming line section, 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) of unit space must be used. When mounting is made in the rear of back-to-back mounted structures, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space must be used at the bottom and 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) used at the top. Master terminal blocks are rackmounted to permit removal of entire assembly for ease of wiring during installation and maintenance.
Main Disconnects
Incoming cables may also be easily terminated on a main circuit breaker or fused switch. A variety of main circuit breakers are available. Tables 29.1-61 through 29.1-67 show spacing requirements for various main devices.
Additional Equipment
In addition to motor starter and feeder units, additional equipment can be supplied including the following:
Single-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 and 45 kVA Three-phase dry-type distribution transformers in ratings of 9, 15, 25, 30 and 45 kVA Lighting panelboards with up to 42 circuits with either plug-in branch breakers or bolt-on branch breakers, 120/240V, 120/208V or 480V, singleor three-phase Metering equipment including the IQ family of solid-state power monitors, voltmeters and ammeters PLC and DCS I/O racks S801/S811 family of solid-state reduced voltage starters SVX9000 and MVX9000 adjustablefrequency controllers
Metering
IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
Eatons IQ and Power Xpert family of metering and power monitors includes: IQ 250 microprocessor-based threephase power monitor replaces the traditional ammeter, voltmeter and instrument switches. Displays phase currents, voltage, L-L, L-N, power-real and reactive apparent, power factor, frequency, energy (watthours, VAR-hours and VA-hours).
41 42 43
CA08104001E
General Description
IQ 260 includes all of the functions of the IQ 250 plus THD readings for voltage and current. Additionally, the IQ 260 includes contact inputs and outputs. This device is ideal for incoming line monitoring. IQ Analyzer provides extensive metering, power quality analysis, remote input monitoring, control relaying, analog input/outputs, and is communications capable. A display provides the exibility of exhibiting large characters with high visibility and small characters for detailed descriptions. These IQ power monitors each contain their own voltage power pack for systems up to 600V. Therefore, separate potential transformers are not required. Either two or three separate current transformers must be used. All IQ power monitors are communications capable. Refer to Tab 3 for further details. Power Xpert 2000/4000/6000/8000 Meters are available with communication features for power management and system software integration in addition to a Web interface. Customers and facility personnel can view the metering data using a standard PC Web browser. The new platform offers advanced functionality like transient capture, high sampling rate, open communications, Web server gateway, eld-upgradable rmware, expandable memory and optional I/O.
May 2012
Sheet 29 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)
FlashGard Padlock Accessory
FlashGard Padlock Accessory Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)

Hardwired voltage detector connected to load side of disconnect Enables operator to pre-verify voltage presence with unit door closed Installable in a 30 mm pilot device knockout Dual redundant circuitry for reliability Phase insensitive
Locks out RotoTract operation during maintenance Allows operation of FlashGard units by authorized personnel only Provided as standard on NEMA 12 FlashGard MCCs (prevents dust entry into RotoTract access port) Heavy-gauge steel construction
Surge Protective DeviceSPD
Automatic Insulation Tester (Motorguard)
Remote Racking Accessory
SPD (Surge Protective Device) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Automatic Insulation Tester (Motorguard)
39 40
Remote Racking Accessory
41 42 43
Performs RotoTract racking safely behind NFPA Arc Flash boundaries 120 Vac motor driven Mounts to RotoTract mechanism Wired pendant station for rack-in/ rack-out operation Momentary jog Mounting offset bracket to clear device panel
Meggers equipment motor insulation to continuously monitor integrity of insulation for the period that the equipment is de-energized Applies 500 Vdc potential at currentlimited, operator-safe maximum amperage of 200 microamperes Alarms upon detection of a threshold leakage to ground current Visual alarm indication and lockout; Form C contact available for remote alarm status
SPD Series units feature advanced thermodynamic fusing technology and are available in 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) space factors. All units (100400 kA) meet UL 1449, 3rd Edition. Internal fuse protection is up to 200 kAIC. Standard MCC offering includes Monitoring Display with dual-colored status LEDs. Optional surge counter, Form C alarm contacts and audible alarm enable/disable are also available.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 015

General Description
29.1-13
Communications
Eatons motor control centers offer the industrys most comprehensive communications solutions in motor control providing seamless communicating on all major industry standard eld busses. Available with communications to t new and existing applications, Eatons motor control centers are custom-made assemblies of conveniently grouped control equipment primarily used for control of motors and power distribution. Eaton motor control centers not only are capable of communicating to the industry standard protocols, they also have the ability to serve up Web pages, so any Web client can monitor and manage the MCC from any location accessible to the LAN. Ordering the MCC with the Power Xpert Gateway provides the ability to communicate information to the Web as well as provides a seamless interface between the low voltage, medium voltage and all meters.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Eatons Motor Control Centers
Table 29.1-1. Network Matrix

Network Protocol Topology Node count DeviceNet Trunk drop 63 devices per network 150150 Kbaud C441K C441K C441K OPTC7 C441K D77D-DNA DPONI Gateway EtherNet/IP Ethernet Devices limited by scanner (~250) 10/100 meg C441R C441R C441R OPTCI C441R D77D-EIP Gateway Gateway Modbus TCP Ethernet Devices limited by scanner (~250) 10/100 meg C441R C441R C441R OPTCI C441R D77D-EMA Gateway Gateway Modbus Serial Daisy chain PROFIBUS DP Daisy chain
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
32 per segment 32 per segment 254 with 127 with repeaters 3 repeaters Usually <115 Kbaud C441N C441N C441N OPTC2 C441N D77D-EMA MPONI Native 500K to 12 meg C441S C441S C441S OPTC3 C441S D77D-PNA Gateway Gateway
MCC Motor Control Communication Choices

This table is used to determine how each of the communications types are used within the MCC. The Freedom communication solutions provide for a single node per unit conguration where each starter, drive, soft start, breaker, meter or other control device is a single node on the network.
Speed C306 OL C440 SSOL C441 SSOL SVX9000 Feeders S811 Soft Starts MP-3000, MP-4000 IQ 260
Note: The Freedom and FlashGard MCCs are Power Xpert capable with the PXG gateway communicating to each bucket.
CA08104001E
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 29 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Data Parameters
Each of the MCC types have different ways to get to the target network, and they also use varying types of starters/ drives and other types of equipment. Each type of equipment has varying types of data and control associated with it. This table will aid in understanding the type of data available when a style of MCC is selected. Each of the devices has a rich set of data associated with it; consulting the user manual may be needed to determine all available data/parameters.
Table 29.1-2. Data Parameters

Description S811 Soft Starts DeviceNet Modbus Modbus TCP PROFIBUS EtherNet/IP Data Line current (scaled/oat) Average current (scaled/oat) Power pole temperatures % FLA (Running current/FLA setting) Thermal capacity Fault/warning codes Field wiring status Handle position/breaker status Coil voltage Fault history Status (Run/Fault/Warn/Control/Aux...) Speed (Hz) Speed (rpm) Torque Current Voltage DC bus voltage temperature Status (Run/Fault/Warn...) Faults Morerefer to manual Four AC inputs (DC is in an option) (Running/Faulted/Breaker status, user denied) Two B300 relay outputs (Run) Graphic
SVX/M-Max Drives DeviceNet Modbus Modbus TCP PROFIBUS EtherNet/IP
C441 IO DeviceNet PROFIBUS Modbus Modbus TCP EtherNet/IP C440 SSOL DeviceNet PROFIBUS Modbus Modbus TCP EtherNet/IP
Line currents % thermal remaining Faults Ground current Status (Run/Fault/input/output) Morerefer to manual
C441 SSOL DeviceNet PROFIBUS Modbus Modbus TCP EtherNet/IP
Line currents % thermal remaining % current unbalance Line voltages % voltage unbalance Faults kW Status (Run/Fault/input/output) Morerefer to manual Currents Voltages Power Energy Much morerefer to manual
MP-3000 MP-4000 DeviceNet Modbus RTU
Power Xpert Gateway to PowerNet Operator Interface
Data depends on target device Trending Logging Fault indication and more Provides local display of motor parameters and system health. This option is available when using Modbus communication.
Logic Control
In a single bucket, a PLC is provided for local control of the MCC components.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 017

General Description
29.1-15
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is an industry standard eld bus governed by ODVA and is supported by most major vendors of PLC and DSCs. DeviceNet, like most major eld buses, provides simplied control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring and data richness of the motor control centers. The Eaton DeviceNet MCC solution provides users with signicantly reduced installation time and increased uptime through the integration of intelligent devices and advanced software tools. Control products include: ODVA compliant motor starters, variable speed drives, operator interface, line metering and block I/O.
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP is an industry standard eld bus governed by the PROFIBUS Trade Organization and is supported by most major vendors of PLC and DSCs. PROFIBUS, like most major eld buses, provides simplied control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring and data richness of the motor control centers. The Eaton PROFIBUS MCC solution provides users with signicantly reduced installation time and increased uptime through the integration of intelligent devices and advanced software tools. Control products include: motor starters, variable speed drives, operator interface and block I/O.
22 23 24 25 26 27
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Styles of MCC

PROFIBUS
DeviceNet
28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard styles of MCC use either a direct connect I/O block or direct connect advanced solid-state overload relay to connect to DeviceNet. The topology is a trunk drop conguration where the trunk runs along the top of the MCC and each device is connected to DeviceNet via a drop cable.
The Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard styles of MCC use either a direct connect I/O block or direct connect advanced solid-state overload relay to connect to the PROFIBUS. The topology for PROFIBUS is daisy chain and each device in the MCC will be daisy-chained together to meet the PROFIBUS specication.
About DeviceNet
Learn more about DeviceNet by visiting the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association at odva.org.
About PROFIBUS
Learn more about PROFIBUS by visiting the PROFIBUS Trade Organization Association at probus.com.
CA08104001E
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 29 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ethernet
There are two supported protocols on Ethernet for the Eaton MCC offeringEtherNet/IP (ODVA) and Modbus TCP (Modbus IDA), which are both industry standard eld buses and supported by most major vendors of PLCs and DSCs. Ethernet, like most major eld buses, provides simplied control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring and data richness of the motor control centers. Another added benet of Ethernet is that a PC can connect directly to the control system and monitor the MCC from any location where remote access is permitted. The Eaton Ethernet MCC solution provides users with signicantly reduced installation time and increased uptime through the integration of intelligent devices and advanced software tools. Control products include: motor starters, variable speed drives, operator interface, meters and block I/O.
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Styles of MCC to EtherNet/IP

Each Unit (Node) Home Run Wired to Ethernet Switch
Understanding Ethernet
Ethernet can be a very misunderstood word and confusing to someone who is trying to build a control or monitoring system and doesnt have much experience specifying this type of communication. To help bring some clarity to how to specify Ethernet, this simple example is going to use an analogy that most of us are very familiar with. When you are at home and pick up the phone to call a friend or neighbor, your conversation is transmitted across a land line (wire) that can be compared to Ethernet. In this example, both the land line and the Ethernet are the physical medias in which the communication is transmitted. When you call your friends to communicate to them, you need to talk in a language that is understood by each other; this language is called the protocol, which is no different than Ethernet, for the devices to communicate to each other they need to support the same language or protocol. Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP are two widely supported standards for Ethernet industrial protocols. Modbus TCP is a standard founded by Modbus IDA and natively supported by many major PLC and DCS vendors. EtherNet/IP is another standard that is founded by ODVA and supported primarily by AB and other third-party vendors for use in PLC and DCS applications. Now lets add another twist to the example, lets say that you and a friend are talking in one protocol and then you conference in two friends that talk another protocol. Using the same physical media, the four of you can all communicate to each other using multiple protocols. This is no different than Ethernet where the physical media supports both Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP (and others) on the same physical media at the same time. In the Eaton MCC when Ethernet is applied, there is a bucket in each lineup that houses an industrial rated Ethernet switch and all the Ethernet devices are then wired back to that switch to the customer to easily connect to the lineup at one convenient location. Over this Ethernet connection, not only can control and monitoring be performed, but also conguration of the end devices allowing for easy access for maintenance personnel to the equipment once they gain access to the Ethernet system. For more information or clarity on the supported Ethernet protocols and the products that support Ethernet, please call 877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273) Option 2.
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Styles of MCC to EtherNet/IP
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Styles of MCC to Modbus TCP

Power Xpert Gateway with Web Interface
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Styles of MCC to Modbus TCP
About Ethernet
Learn more about EtherNet/IP by visiting the ODVA Web site at odva.org. Learn more about Modbus TCP by visiting the Modbus IDA Web site at modbus.org.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 019

General Description
29.1-17
Web-Enabled MCC
The Power Xpert Gateway provides Web-enabled, real-time monitoring of electrical distribution and control equipment. The Power Xpert Gateway makes integrating power equipment (up to 96 devices) onto an Ethernet network fast and easy. The PXG is installed in a motor control center, low/ medium voltage switchgear or switchboard to consolidate data available from components such as breakers, meters, motor controllers and protective relays. Through standard onboard Web pages, Power Xpert Software or third-party software, the PXG allows you to closely monitor the performance of your power infrastructure with easily accessed, real-time, Web-enabled data. In addition to Web-enabling the components in the MCC, the PXG also makes all the data available to upper level PLC, SCADA, and BMS type systems over Modbus TCP, SNMP and BACnet/IP protocols.
Power Xpert Gateway
22 23 24 25 26
27 28
Modbus TCP Power Xpert Gateway
29 30 31 32 33 34
Figure 29.1-1 through 29.1-6 represent typical Eaton communications equipment found in MCCs. For more available equipment and congurations, please contact your local Eaton representative.
QCPort MVX9000 SVX9000 PXM2250 PXM2260 PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000 IT. S811
Modbus 485 RTU Any 485 RTU device
Figure 29.1-1. MCC CongurationModbus TCP
Web Power Xpert Gateway (Modbus TCP, SNMP, BACnet/IP and Webserver TCP/IP output)
35
Incom IPONI PXM2000 PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000 DT3000 DT3200 FP-4000 FP-5000 FP-6000 SMLD IQ 220/320/230/330 IQES IQESU IQPSU DIM DT520MC, 810, 910, 1150 OPTIM Trip Units ATC 400, 600, 800 IQ DP-4000 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 MP-3000 MP-4000 CMU BIMII Universal RTD IQ Transfer IT S811 MVX9000 SVX9000 IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 220M/230M IQ 230M/330M IQ 250 IQ 260 EDR-3000 FP-5000 FP-6000 C440 C441 SqD 3000 SqD 4000 SqD PM710 SqD PM800 PML ION7350 PML ION7550 PML ION7650 GE 369 GE 469 Nexus 1262/1272 Qualitrol 118 QCPort Modbus RTU 485
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 29.1-2. MCC CongurationWeb-Enabled
CA08104001E
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 29 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Modbus RTU 485
RS485-PONI
EMA Modbus Adapter QCPort
MMINT IPONI DT3000 DT3200 FP-4000 FP-5000 FP-6000 SMLD IQ 220/320/230/330 IQES IQESU IQPSU DIM DT520MC, 810, 910, 1150 OPTIM Trip Units ATC 400,600,800 IQ DP-4000 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 MP-3000 MP-4000 CMU BIMII Universal RTD IQ Transfer
MVX9000 SVX9000 IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 220M/230M IQ 230M/330M IQ 250 IQ 260 EDR-3000 FP-5000 FP-6000 C441 C440 PXM2000 PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000
ATC 400, 600, 800 IQ DP-4000 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 MP-3000 MP-4000 CMU IQ Transfer
IT. S811
Figure 29.1-3. MCC CongurationModbus 485 RTU
DeviceNet DNA Adapter QCPort MVX9000 SVX9000 C441 C440 IT. S811
PROFIBUS DP PMINT PNA Adapter QCPort MVX9000 SVX9000 C441 C440 IT. S811 DT1150
EtherNet/IP E/IP Adapter QCPort MVX9000 SVX9000 C441 C440 IT. S811
Figure 29.1-4. MCC CongurationDeviceNet
Figure 29.1-5. MCC Conguration PROFIBUS DP
Figure 29.1-6. MCC Conguration EtherNet/IP
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 021

General Description
29.1-19
PLCs
Programmable controllers can be mounted in all styles of the Eaton MCCs in a wide variety of congurations. Popular mounting congurations include small PLCs (EZ) unit mounted to replace relays and timers, mediumsized PLCs with I/O for control of an MCC lineup and also eldbus mastering capabilities to control over DeviceNet, Modbus or Modbus TCP. Due to the exibility of PLCs and the wide variety of applications and congurations, the Eaton MCC is designed to meet the mounting requirements of most applications to control not only the MCC but also auxiliary equipment not in the MCC.
ELC PLC
Monitoring and Conguration Tools

For all the advanced MCC choices, a tool is available to allow for conguration and monitoring of the MCC and its devices. The complimentary tool located at www.eaton.com is called CH Studio, and is a Windows-based conguration and monitoring package. CH Studio allows the user to custom congure I/O data for the starters and drives, to verify loads and conguration parameters, and to view the faults and operation status of the end devices. In addition to this, CH Studio is also able to print out a detailed report for the system programmer to use with designing their program. To get an early start on the system design, CH Studio provided the ability to create the system ofine and then synchronize the ofine settings to the online system once the MCC arrives.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ELC PLC
EZ PLC
FlexibilityHandle I/O counts from 10 I/O up to 256 I/O using a single controller. ELCs eliminate the process of counting I/O and deciding which controller to use, as modules can easily be added and removed as needed. ELC modules come in many avors of I/O from modules containing 4 in/4 out to modules containing 8 in/8 out. ELC controllers and modules mount to a DIN rail, and the modules are added by simply snapping them into the mating connectors and closing the attached locks. Large PLC FeaturesInclude the feature set of larger PLCs such as multiple communication ports, remote I/O, data storage, high-speed counters, high-speed pulse outputs, interrupts, timer resolution to 1 ms, PID, plus much more. The ELC also has mastering capabilities to control DeviceNet, Modbus and Modbus TCP slaves over an industrial network. Power of OneRegardless of the level of integration needed, Eaton MCCs provide an easy and comprehensive solution to be part of a larger system or be the entire system all by itself. The Power Xpert gateway allows for seamless integration into the Power Xpert architecture, linking switchgear, meters and medium voltage assemblies. When the MCC is the control, integrating the ELC with one of the Eaton operator interface units and communicating to starters, drives, soft starts, meters and feeder breakers is integrated into a clean, easy-touse solution.
EZ PLC
The EZ PLC is a timer and relay replacer capable of being mounted directly inside the MCC bucket and controlling starters or other types of process equipment. This small PLC comes in styles that have AC or DC I/O and analog I/O, and also the ability to expand the I/O for larger I/O counts. From the face of the EZ, a user can change set points and count values or other program values to easily manipulate the process it is controlling.
CA08104001E
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 29 022
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic ControlTypical Layout

The layout to the right is a typical arrangement for Eatons Clean Control Center including harmonic correction units for nonlinear loads such as AC Variable Frequency Drives. The horizontal bus of the Clean Control Center is virtually free of harmonic current content at the point where the harmonic correction unit connects to the bus. From this point to the connection at the utility bus, the Clean Control Center complies with the most stringent requirements of IEEE 519 and provides a clean waveform to the upstream distribution system. Harmonic correction may be applied to loads fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted AC drives) or loads fed indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC mounted circuit breakers feeding remote drives). Multiple correction units may be used to achieve the level of harmonic correction as required by the amount of nonlinear loads within the MCC lineup.
Source Side Harmonics Attenuated
Load Side Harmonics Present
Main Breaker Panelboard Harmonic Correction Unit 100A SVX9000 AC Drive (30 hp) SVX9000 AC Drive (150 hp) SVX9000 AC Drive (250 hp) Starter
SPD Surge Protection Module
Distribution Transformer SVX9000 AC Drive (30 hp)
Starter
Starter
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
28.00 (711.2)
20.00 (508.0)
Figure 29.1-7. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic ControlDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: As seen by the upstream electrical systemcompliance to the most stringent standards of IEEE 519 is ensured.
Harmonic Correction
The Clean Control Center uses a harmonic correction unit to provide harmonic cancellation directly on the motor control center horizontal bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and injects into the AC lines a synthesized waveform that is inverted compared to the remaining signal. The result is a clean waveform as seen by the upstream electrical system. Single or multiple harmonic correction units may be applied within a Clean Control Center providing an economical solution to excessive harmonics due to AC drives or other nonlinear loads. Use of the Clean Control Center will provide compliance to the most stringent 5% Total Demand Distortion (TDD) requirements of IEEE 519. Clean Control Center assemblies include a 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCC structure, active harmonic correction unit, current transformers and a door-mounted digital interface panel.
Load(s)
Source XFMR Typical CT Placement
Alternate CT Placement
Harmonic Correction Unit
Figure 29.1-8. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 023

General Description
29.1-21
Motor Protection
22 23 24
C441 Overload Relays
25 26
MP-3000 Overload Relays
Eatons C440 and C441 solid-state overload relay offers improved motor protection due to high repeat accuracy and fast reaction times to phase failures. The state-of-the-art microelectronics design permits the choice of relays with different trip classes (Class 5, 10, 20, 30) to accommodate motors with a variety of application needs. The C440 solid-state overloads are available on all Freedom starter sizes. (Size 5 and up use CTs with the overload relay.) Key features include:

The C441 Motor Insight is a microprocessor-based solid-state overload relay providing superior motor protection, communications and motor monitoring features. This overload provides the standard set of protections that includes I2t, jam, stall and phase protections. The C441 also provides ground fault, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, programmable trip class, trip history, thermal capacity, power factor and voltage, current and power monitoring. With the simple addition of a communication module, the C441 is capable of communicating to one of the following industrial eld busses: DeviceNet, Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP or Modbus TCP. Key features of C441 Motor Insight communicating overloads include:

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Phase loss Phase imbalance Wide adjustment range Low energy usage Reduced heat
With the simple addition of a communication module, the C440 is capable of communicating to one of the following industrial eld busses: DeviceNet, Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP or Modbus TCP.
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS and Ethernet communication options Three-phase voltage monitoring Three-phase current monitoring kWh usage indication Motor power factor indication Last four faults history Optional remote mounted display I/O communication adapter with four inputs and two outputs Programmable set points, including: Low voltage set point High voltage set point Voltage unbalance set point CT multiplier/ratio settings Overcurrent set point Current unbalance trip point Trip Class (5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and/or Jam) Rapid cycle timer Restart delay timer Underload restart delay timer Number of restarts after faults (Manual/Auto) Undercurrent trip delay Ground fault trip set point
The MP-3000 motor overcurrent relay is a microprocessor-based relay that provides superior motor protection for critical process motors. Standard protective features provided in the MP-3000 include: I2t, programmable locked rotor protection, instantaneous overcurrent, ground fault, under load, jam, phase loss/unbalance/reversal, limit starts per hour, alarm and trip modes, and the capability to use motor RTD for motor protection. Functions are user programmable via data entry and display panel mounted in the door of the MCC. The MP-3000 can be monitored via its communications port. For further details, refer to Tab 4.
MP-4000 Overload Relays
The MP-4000 motor overload relay provides the ultimate in motor protection. In addition to all the protective features included in the MP-3000, the MP-4000 also includes voltage-based protection/metering as well: undervoltage, negative sequence, power factor, overvoltage, over/under frequency and forward/ reverse power. For further details, refer to Tab 4.
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
General Description
May 2012
Sheet 29 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Additional Services
Startup Assistance
To ensure complete customer satisfaction and to expedite equipment startup for motor control centers, this service provides a factory-trained representative at the job site during equipment energization. This service is provided on a xed price basis. In addition to factory directed startup, the standard equipment warranty is extended for a period of 24 months. This service is especially benecial when solid-state equipment is incorporated within the MCC due to the exibility in adjusting solid-state equipment for each application.
Maintenance and Operational Training

A full range of training and operational training programs are available for all types of MCC-mounted equipment. In addition, preventative maintenance programs are available to ensure years of trouble-free operation.
Retrots
Existing installations can many times benet from some of the new technology equipment available in todays MCCs. Eaton offers a full range of retrot capabilities to upgrade existing MCC lineups. Examples include: vacuum contactors, reduced voltage solid-state starters, solid-state metering and solid-state overload protection. Starter retrot kits for selective competitor MCCs are also available. Consult factory for availability.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 025

General Description
29.1-23
2100 Series Motor Control Center
Quick Reference Layout Guide Index

Device Space Requirements Combination Starters, Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Starters, Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPX9000 Clean Power Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option Groups for Combination Starters, Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge Protective Device (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freedom Communication Choices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering and Protection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Harmonic CorrectionClean Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Lugs Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC Ratings and Highlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Power Transformer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Views/Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 29.1-4 29.1-13 29.1-23 29.1-32 29.1-34 29.1-61 29.1-67 29.1-68 29.1-71 29.1-72 29.1-73 29.1-74 29.1-75 29.1-76 29.1-78 29.1-80 29.1-81 29.1-82 29.1-83 29.1-84 29.1-88 29.1-89 29.1-90 Page 29.1-24 29.1-29 29.1-33 29.1-38 29.1-39 29.1-42 29.1-43 29.1-44 29.1-44 29.1-45 29.1-45 29.1-45 29.1-45 29.1-46 29.1-47 29.1-48 29.1-49 29.1-49 29.1-50 29.1-50 29.1-51 29.1-51 29.1-52 29.1-52
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
Layout and Technical Data
May 2012
Sheet 29 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Technical Data
Table 29.1-3. Short-Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480V)
Short-Circuit Protective Device HMCP motor circuit protector (standard rating) HMCP motor circuit protector (optional rating) MCCB molded-case circuit breaker (standard rating) MCCB molded-case circuit breaker (optional rating) Fusible switch Combination Starter FV and RV (kA) 65 100 65 100 100 Solid-State Reduced Voltage (kA) 65 100 65 100 Adjustable Frequency Drives (kA) 65 100 65 100 100
Table 29.1-4. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers Motor circuit protector ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efciency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208V 240V 380V 480V 600V 125 150 125 150 125 150 E HFD/FDC E HFD/FDC E HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND HND E HFD/FDC E HFD/FDC HFD/FDC/E HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND HMCP/HMCPE Frame MCCB Frame Freedom 2100 Unit Size Inches (mm) Freedom FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space
X Space 1X 2X 3X 1X 2X 3X 2X 3X 4X 2X 3X 4X 6X 7X 10X 12X 3X 4X 3X 4X 6X 5X 10X 12X 12X
Full Voltage Non-Reversing

1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10
Type F206
6.00 (152.4) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 6.00 (152.4) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F206
12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 2X 3X 2X 3X 3X 4X 4X 5X 6X 7X 8X 12X 12X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 6X 11X 12X 12X
10
15
25
25
25
25
30
50
50
50
40 50 75 25 150
50 60 100 100 200
75 100 150 250 300
100 125 200 300 350 400 600
100 150 200 400 600
150 250 400 600 1200 1200 125 150 125 150 125/150 150 250 400 600 1200
5 6 7
300
Full Voltage Reversing

1 2 3 4 5 6

Type F216
7.5 15 30 50 60 100 100 200 10 25 50 75 100 150 250 300 10 25 50 100 125 200 300 400 10 25 50 100 150 200 400 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F216
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
7.5 10 25 40 50 75 125 150
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000A at 480V. Optional HMCP/HMCPE combination starter units are available with 100,000A at 480V. E-Frame motor circuit protection available for size 13 starters only. Optional combination starter units with thermal-magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 or 100,000A at 480V. Maximum of (three) pilot devices, (two) auxiliary contacts 100 VA CPT maximum. Standard lugs only. 12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard. 18.00-inch (457.2 mm)/3X unit is standard. Minimum 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. 1X additional space required with solid-state overloads. 1X additional space with advanced solid-state overload. 1200A HMCP frame available in 11X 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm). For top entry, 8X space required. Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. 7X with solid-state overloads. Requires 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 027

29.1-25
Table 29.1-4. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (Continued) Motor circuit protector ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efciency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208V 240V 380V 480V 600V 125 150 125 150 125 150 150 250 250 400 125 150 125 150 125 150 150 250 250 400 150 150 150 250 400 600 1200 150 150 150 150 250 400 400 600 E HFD/FDC E HFD/FDC E HJD/JDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC E HFD/FDC E HFD/FDC E HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HND HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HMCP Frame MCCB Frame Freedom 2100 Unit Size Inches (mm) Freedom FlashGard Unit Size X Space Inches (mm) X Space
22 23 24
4X 4X 4X 5X 6X 7X 12X
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque

1 2 3 4 5 7.5 10 25 40 50 75 7.5 15 30 50 60 100 10 25 50 75 100 150 10 25 50 100 125 200 10 25 50 100 150 200
Type F946
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
Type F946
4X 4X 6X 6X 12X 24 (609.6) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 42 (1066.8)
25 26 27 28
72.00 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque

1 2 3 25 4 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 1PW 2PW 3PW 30 40 50 75 10 25 30 50 75 150 10 20 40 60 75 100 150 30 40 50 60 100 15 30 50 60 100 200 300 10 25 50 60 75 125 150 50 60 75 100 150 25 50 75 100 150 300 15 40 75 125 150 250 50 75 100 125 200 25 50 100 125 200 400 600 15 40 75 100 150 250 350 50 100 150 200 25 50 100 150 200 400 600 15 40 75 125 150 300 350 7.5 10 7.5 15 10 25 10 25 10 25
Type F956
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 12X 6X 9X 9X 12X 12X 12X 4X 4X 5X
Type F956
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 4X 4X 5X 7X 7X 12X 7X 9X 10X 12X 12X 12X 5X 5X 6X
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
Type F606
36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F606
36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Reduced Voltage Part Winding
Type F706
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0)
Type F706
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0)
4PW 5PW

36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
6X 12X
36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
7X 12X
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE Magnetic Only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000A at 480V. Optional HMCP/HMCPE combination starter units are available with 100,000A at 480V. E-Frame motor circuit protector available through size 3 starter only. Optional combination starter units with thermal-magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 or 100,000A at 480V. Add 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed disconnect. 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) space needed with Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) space needed for thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. 1X additional space required with standard SSOL and 2X additional space required with advanced SSOL. Fixed assemblies not available with RotoTract. Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. For starting speed disconnect, add 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-4. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (Continued) Motor circuit protector ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efciency) motors. Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208V 240V 25 40 50 75 125 150 25 50 75 125 150 380V 40 75 125 150 200 250 40 125 150 200 250 480V 40 75 150 250 300 40 150 250 300 600V 40 5 150 300 40 150 300 150 150 250 250 400 400 600 150 250 250 400 400 600 HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HFD/FDC HFD/FDC HJD/JDC HKD/KDC HKD/KDC HLD/LDC HMCP Frame MCCB Frame Freedom 2100 Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 5X 7X 7X 12X 7X 9X 10X 12X
May 2012
Sheet 29 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Freedom FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 6X 8X 9X 12X 8X 10X 11X 12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition

2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD 2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD

Type F806
30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F806
30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 72.00 (1828.8)
20 30 40 60 100 150 20 40 60 100 150
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition
Type F896
42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F896
42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000A at 480V. Optional HMCP/HMCPE combination starter units are available with 100,000A at 480V. E-Frame motor circuit protector available through size 3 starter only. Optional combination starter units with thermal-magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 or 100,000A at 480V. Fixed assemblies not available with RotoTract. Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 029

29.1-27
Intelligent Technologies IT. S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage StarterHMCP

Eatons IT. S811 solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 29.1-5. Standard-Duty RatingsMotor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection

A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to 1.00 x full load amperes A 1.15 service factor motor may draw up to 1.15 x full load amperes (15% more current) IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases, a larger IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below
Freedom FlashGard Unit Size X Space 2X 3X 6X 6X 6X 9X 12X 12X 2X 3X 6X 6X 6X 12X 12X Inches (mm) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1371.6) 42.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) X Space 3X 4X 7X 7X 7X 9X 12X 12X 3X 5X 7X 7X 9X 12X 12X
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Ampere IT. Width Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/ Freedom 2100 Rating (mm) MCCB Unit Size Frame Inches 208V 240V 380V 480V 600V (mm) 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP
37 66 105 135 135 180 180 240 304 304 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000 37 66 105 135 180 180 240 304 304 360 420 500 650 650 720 850 1000
65 110 200 200 200 290 290 290 65 110 200 200 200 290 290
10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200 10 15 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 200 200
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500 15 30 45 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 315 375 500
18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560 18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 375 500 560
20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700
25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 600 700 800
30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900

30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000
100 100 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 400 600 600 600 1200 1200 1200 2000 150 150 150 225 250 250 400 400 600 600 600 600 800 1200 1200 1200 2000
12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect
290
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Standard-duty ratings reect the maximum starting duty that these units are designed to supply. If starting duty listed is to be exceeded, reference severe duty Table 29.1-9 on Page 29.1-28.
Standard-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-8 below. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 29.1-6. Option SizingDimensions in Inches (mm)

IT. Width (mm) 65 110 110 200 290 290 Disconnect Type HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB Starter Size 1, 2, 3 3, 4 5 5,6 6 7 1, 2, 3 3, 4 5 5, 6 6 7 Option Unit Size 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) Structure Width 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 32.00 (812.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 24.00 (609.6) 32.00 (812.8) 48.00 (1219.2)
Table 29.1-7. Control Options

Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer 24 Vdc Control Line or Load MOV Protection Pump Control Option DeviceNet Communications Module

Isolating Contactor
Option ts in standard unit space. Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66A units.
Table 29.1-8. Standard-Duty Ratings

Ramp Current % of FLA 300% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300% Ramp Time 30 seconds 10 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds Starts Per Hour 3 3 3 2 3 4 Similar to Starting Method Soft start Full voltage Wye delta 80% RVAT 65% RVAT 50% RVAT
Bypass Starter
65 110 110 200 290 290

Option ts in standard unit space. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
CA08104001E
Layout and Technical Data IT06Intelligent Technologies IT. S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage StarterHMCP
Eatons IT. S811 solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, a starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 29.1-9. Severe-Duty RatingsMotor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Ampere IT. Width Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/ Rating (mm) MCCB Frame 208V 240V 380V 480V 600V 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF Freedom 2100 Unit Size Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) X Space 2X 3X
May 2012
Sheet 29 030
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Freedom FlashGard Unit Size Inches X (mm) Space 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 3X 4X
HMCP
22 42 65 80 80 115 150 150 192 192 240 305 365 420 480 525 600 22 42 65 80 115 150 192 240 305 365 420 480 525 600
65 110
200
200 290 290
290 290 65 110 200
5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150 5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150
7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200
7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220 7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220
11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250
10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450
15 30 50 60 75 100 125 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500

20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600
100 100 100 100 150 150 150 250 250 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 1200 150 150 225 225 400 400 400 600 800 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
36.00 (914.4)
6X
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6)
6X 9X 9X
42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
7X 9X 9X
72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (914.4)
12X 12X 2X 3X 6X
12X 12X 3X 5X 7X
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect
290 290
72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 12X
12X 12X
290
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Severe-duty ratings listed reect the maximum starting duty these units are designed to supply. For higher ratings, please contact factory.
Severe-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-12 below. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
Table 29.1-10. Option SizingDimensions in Inches (mm)

IT. Width (mm) 65 110 110 200 290 290 Disconnect Type HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB HMCP, MCCB Starter Size 1, 2, 3 3, 4 5 5, 6 6 7 1, 2, 3 3, 4 5 5, 6 6 7 Option Unit Size 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) Structure Width 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 32.00 (812.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 24.00 (609.6) 32.00 (812.8) 48.00 (1219.2)


Isolating Contactor
Option ts in standard unit space. Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 29.1-12. Severe-Duty Ratings

Bypass Starter
65 110 110 200 290 290

Option ts in standard unit space. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 031

29.1-29
Table 29.1-13. Combination Starters with Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)

NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208V 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 6

Switch Rating 380V 10 25 50 75 150 300 10 25 50 75 150 300 10 25 50 75 150 10 25 50 75 150 25 50 75 150 300 480V 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 30 50 100 200 10 25 50 100 200 25 50 100 200 400 600V 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 100 200 400 10 25 50 50 60 100 200 10 25 30 50 60 100 200 25 50 100 200 400 30 60 60/100 100/200 400 600 30 60 100/200 200 400 600 30 60 60 100 100 200 400 30 60 60 100 100 200 400 60 100 200 400 600
Freedom 2100 Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 2X 2X 4X 6X 9X 11X 12X 3X 3X 5X 8X 12X 12X 4X 4X 6X 10X 12X 4X 4X 5X 10X 12X 6X 9X 12X 12X 12X
Freedom FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 3X 3X 4X 6X 10X 11X 12X 4X 4X 5X 9X 12X 12X 4X 5X 6X 10X
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
4X 5X 6X 10X 12X
240V 7.5 15 30 50 100 200 7.5 15 30 50 100 200 7.5 15 30 30 50 100 7.5 15 30 50 100 15 30 50 100 200
Full Voltage Non-ReversingFusible

7.5 10 25 40 75 150 7.5 10 25 40 75 150 7.5 10 25 25 40 75 7.5 10 25 40 75 10 25 40 75 150
Type F204
12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F204
18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8)
Full Voltage ReversingFusible
Type F214
18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F214
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Two-Speed One WindingFusible
Type F944
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F944
24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Two-Speed Two WindingFusible
Type F954
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1524.6) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F954
24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8)
33 34 35
Reduced Voltage AutotransformerFusible
Type F604
36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F604
36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 7X 10X 12X 12X 12X
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short-circuit current. 7X (42.00-inch [1066.8 mm]) unit size with solid-state overloads. Certain items in unit option Groups B and C may require additional space. See Page 29.1-40. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. For bottom entry of motor cables. For top entry of motor cables. Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. Add 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses. Bottom 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) space in rear is unusable. Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-13. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches (Continued)
NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 208V 1PW 2PW 10 20 40 50 75 100 150 15 20 25 40 50 60 100 150 250 300 15 20 25 40 50 60 100 150 250 300 240V 10 15 25 50 75 100 150 15 25 30 50 60 75 125 150 200 250 350 15 25 30 50 60 75 125 150 200 250 350 380V 15 25 40 75 100 150 200 250 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 350 400 500 480V 15 30 40 50 75 100 150 250 350 40 60 75 125 150 250 300 400 500 700 40 60 75 125 150 250 300 400 500 700 600V 15 40 60 75 150 300 350 40 75 150 300 350 500 700 700 40 75 50 300 350 500 700 700 60 60 100 100 200 200 400 400 600 60 100 100 200 200 400 400 600 400 600 800 1200 60 100 100 200 200 400 400 600 400 600 800 1200 Switch Rating Freedom 2100 Unit Size Inches (mm) X Space 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 10X 10X 12X Freedom FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm)
May 2012
Sheet 29 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
X Space 5X 5X 5X 9X 9X 10X 10X 12X
Reduced Voltage Part WindingFusible
Type F704
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
Type F704
24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8)
3PW 4PW 5PW
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open TransitionFusible

2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD
Type F804
30.00 (762.0) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 5X 9X 12X 12X
Type F804
36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 6X 9X 12X 12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
6YD
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed TransitionFusible

2YD 3YD 4YD 5YD
Type F894
42.00 (1066.8) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 7X 11X 12X 12X 12X
Type F894
48.00 (1219.2) 66.00 (1676.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 8X 12X 12X 12X 12X
6YD

72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short-circuit current. Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure. Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep section.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 033

29.1-31
Intelligent Technologies IT. S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage StarterFusible Switch

Eatons IT. S811 solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. S811 solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, a starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 29.1-14. Standard-Duty RatingsFusible

FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0) X Space 4X 6X 10X
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Ampere IT. Maximum Horsepower (kW) Switch Freedom 2100 Unit Size Rating Width 208V Rating Inches 240V 380V 480V 600V X (mm) (mm) Space 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 304 304 360 420 420 500 650 720 850 1000

65 110 200
200 290
290
290
10 15 30 40 50 60 75 75 125 150 200 200
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 100 100 125 200 250
10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
15 30 45 55 75 110 132 132 160 200 250 315 375 500
18.5 30 55 75 90 132 160 160 200 220 250 375 500 560
20 40 60 75 125 150 200 200 300 350 450 500 600 700
25 50 75 100 150 200 250 250 350 400 500 600 700 800
30 50 75 100 150 200 250 250 300 350 450 600 600 700 900
30 60 100 125 150 200 300 300 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000
30/60 100 200 200 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 800 800 1200 1200 1200 1200
18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1524.0)
3X 5X 10X
60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
10X 12X
60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
10X 12X
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8) 12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Standard-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-16 below. Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66A units. Standard duty ratings reect the maximum starting duty that these units are designed to supply. If starting duty listed is to be exceeded, reference severe duty Table 29.1-9 on Page 29.1-28. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. Consult factory for unit width. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).

Table 29.1-17. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
Starter Option IT. Width Fused Size Unit Size (mm) Switch Inches Type (mm) (Amperes)
65 110 110 30/60/100 100 200 400/800 600/800 800/1200 1, 2, 3 3 4 5, 6 6 7 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm)

36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
Structure Width Inches (mm)

20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0)
Option ts in standard unit space.

Ramp Current % of FLA 300% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300% Ramp Time 30 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 20 Seconds 20 Seconds 20 Seconds Starts Per Hour 3 3 3 2 3 4 Similar to Starting Method Soft start Full voltage Wye delta 80% RVAT 65% RVAT 50% RVAT
200 290 290

72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 32.00 (812.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 64.00 (1625.6)
Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
CA08104001E
Layout and Technical Data Intelligent Technologies IT. S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage StarterFusible
Eatons IT. S811 solid-state reduced voltage starter uses SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during operation. The IT. S811 solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect, a starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT. Table 29.1-18. Severe-Duty RatingsFusible
Ampere IT. Maximum Horsepower (kW) Rating Width 208V 240V 380V (mm) 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 22 42 42 65 80 115 115 150 192 240 305 365 420 480 480 525 600

May 2012
Sheet 29 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

FlashGard Unit Size Switch Freedom 2100 Unit Size Rating Inches X Inches X (mm) Space (mm) Space 1.0 SF 20 40 60 75 100 150 200 300 350 450 500 600 30/60 30/60 100 200 200 200 400 400 400 600 600 800 800 800 1200 1200 1200 18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
480V 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 11 22 30 37 55 75 90 132 160 200 220 250 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 350 450
575V 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 250 300 350 450 500
65
110 200
290
290
5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
5 10 20 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
5 10 20 25 30 50 60 100 125 150
7.5 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200
7.5 18.5 22 37 55 55 90 110 132 160 200 220
30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1524.0)
5X 10X
36.00 (914.4) 60.00 (1524.0)
6X 10X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8) 12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Severe-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-20 below. Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66A units. Severe-duty ratings listed reect the maximum starting duty these units are designed to supply. For higher ratings, please contact factory. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. Consult factory for width of unit. Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).
Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service factor (SF).

Table 29.1-21. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
IT. Width (mm) Fused Switch Type (Amperes) 30/60/100 100 200 400/800 600/800 800/1200 Starter Size Option Unit Size Inches (mm) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6) FlashGard Unit Size Inches (mm) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6) Structure Width Inches (mm) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0)
Option ts in standard unit space.
65 110 110
1, 2, 3 3 4 5, 6 6 7

200 290 290

72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 32.00 (812.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 64.00 (1625.6)
Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 035

29.1-33
SVX9000 130 hp at 480V Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons standard units include a disconnect, an AC choke, an output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All plug-in units have a built-in dynamic braking circuit, M3 frame. Standard unit drives do not include a CPT.
Note: Output reactor not included on 240V units. Standard on 380500V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
Table 29.1-22. Freedom 2100 SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)
IH/IL Nominal Amperes hp IH/IL CB Type Standard Unit Space (X)
3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 7X 7X 7X 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 4X 6X 6X 6X
22
Max. Option Unit Space (X) Dim.
5X 5X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 8X 5X 5X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X 6X 8X 8X 8X 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
Typical Options Unit Space Dim.

30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2)
HMCP MCCB Dim.
(X)
6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 9X
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
200240V
3.6 4.7 5.6 7 10 16 22 30 43 57 .75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 7 15 15 15 15 30 50 50 100 100 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 100 15 15 15 15 25 40 50 70 100 125 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 50 60 80 100 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
CT (IH): High overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. Essentially a constant torque drive. VT (IL): Low overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Essentially a variable torque drive.
54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 7X
380500V
2.2 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12 16 23 31 38 46
54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 9X
For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit.
Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
Table 29.1-23. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs Dimensions in Inches (mm)
IH Amperes 2.2 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12.0 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0

Nominal hp IH 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
IL Amperes 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12.0 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0
Nominal hp IL 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0
CB Type HMCP 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 100 MCCB 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 50 60 80 100
Unit Space (Typ./Max) Dim. 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) (X) 5X 5X 5X 5X 5X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCC. A separate CPT bucket is provided for all AFDs (15 hp) listed in the table. For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit.
Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-24. Freedom FlashGard Adjustable Frequency DrivesDimensions in Inches (mm)
IH/IL Nominal Amperes hp IH/IL CB Type Standard Unit Space HMCP MCCB Dim. 7 15 15 15 15 30 50 50 100 100 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 100 15 15 15 15 25 40 50 70 100 125 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 50 60 80 100 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 42.00 (1066.8) Typical Options Max. Option Unit Space Unit Space (X) Dim. (X) Dim. 4X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 5X 7X 7X 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 4X 4X 4X 7X 7X 7X 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 5X 5X 5X 5X 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
May 2012
Sheet 29 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 29.1-25. Plug-in Options

Plug-in Options
(X) 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 9X
Option Boards
I/O Expander Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications Can Open (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) EtherNet/IP Communications Modbus TCP Communications Modbus (D9 Connector)

200240V
3.6 4.7 5.6 7 10 16 22 30 43 57 .75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
6X 42.00 (1066.8) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 8X 54.00 (1371.6)
9X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X 9X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X 5X 5X 5X 5X 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 6X 6X 6X 6X 7X 7X 7X 7X
380500V
2.2 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12 16 23 31 35 46
Plug-in Control Relays

One relay Two relays Three relays

6X 42.00 (1066.8) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 6X 42.00 (1066.8)
Other Options
Automatic bypass circuit Bypass drive test switch Seven relay 120V control with CPT Isolated signal processor 315 PSIG interface Dynamic breaking resistors Graphics keypad Line fuses RFI lter Deduct to remove output lter KLC 2000 ft (610m) Dv/Dt lter Output contactor Dual overloads Three contactor bypass

8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit.
Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
Up to ve option boards may be selected. Please see Tab 31 for detailed information. All options will t in typical and maximum option unit. This option will t in all units. One of these options will t in 530 hp CT at 480V frame standard units, 130 hp CT at 480V typical and maximum option units. All options will t in maximum option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Not available for 240V units.
Note: Output reactor or Dv/Dt lter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4m)30 feet (9.1m) for 2 hp and below). Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor. Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6m) can be achieved by using the KLC Dv/Dt lter.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 037

29.1-35
SVX9000 30200 hp at 480V Non-Plug-in Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor, an output reactor and a door-mounted keypad. Standard units of 9X unit space must be located in the bottom of the MCC and there is no vertical bus in the lower 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm). There is no vertical bus for 12X units.
Note: Output reactor not included on 200240V units. Standard on 380690V drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
Nominal IL IH Nominal Amperes hp IH Amperes hp IL CB Type Standard Unit Space (X) 9X 9X 9X 12X Drive Option Space Dim. 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
(X) 5X 5X 5X 5X 5X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
HMCP MCCB Dim.
200240V
70 83 113 139 165 200 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 245

25 30 40 50 60 75 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
70 83 113 139 165 200 264 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 261 300
25 30 40 50 60 75 100 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250
100 100 100 150
125 175 200 150
54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8)

100 100 100 150 150 250 400 400 400

125 150 175 225 300 400 500 600 600
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 54.00 (1371.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 9X 9X 9X 9X 12X 12X 12X 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
380500V, 50/60 Hz
CT (IH): High overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. Essentially a constant torque drive. VT (IL): Low overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Essentially a variable torque drive.
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X
Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. 32.00-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure built-in panel. 40.00-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
Table 29.1-27. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs Dimensions in Inches (mm)
IH Amperes 2.2 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12.0 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0 72.0 87.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 245.0

Nominal hp IH 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0
IL Amperes 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12.0 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0 72.0 87.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0
Nominal hp IL 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0
CB Type HMCP 7 7 7 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 100 100 100 150 150 250 400 400 400 MCCB 15 15 15 15 15 25 35 50 60 80 100 125 150 175 225 300 400 600 600
Unit Space (Typ./Max) Dim. 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCC. A separate CPT bucket is provided for all AFDs (15 hp) listed in the table. For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit. 32.00-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure built-in panel.
Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-28. Freedom FlashGard SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Nominal IL Nominal CB Type IH Amperes hp IH Amperes hp IL Standard Unit Space (X) 10X 10X 10X 10X Drive Option Space Dim. 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
May 2012
Sheet 29 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 29.1-29. Non-Plug-in Options

Non Plug-in Options
Option Boards
I/O Expander Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications Can Open (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) EtherNet/IP Communications Modbus TCP Communications Modbus (D9 Connector)

HMCP MCCB Dim.
200240V
70 83 113 139 165 200 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 245

25 30 40 50 60 75 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200
70 83 113 139 165 200 264 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 261 300
25 30 40 50 60 75 100 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250
100 100 100 150
125 175 200 150
60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)

100 100 100 150 150 250 400 400 400

125 150 175 225 300 400 500 600 700
12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 10X 10X 10X 10X 12X 12X 12X 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
380500V, 50/60 Hz


Other Options
Automatic bypass circuit Bypass drive test switch Seven relay 120V control with CPT Isolated signal processor 315 PSIG interface Dynamic breaking resistors Graphics keypad Line fuses RFI lter Deduct to remove output lter KLC 1000 ft (305m) Dv/Dt lter Output contactor Dual overloads Three contactor bypass Dynamic breaking circuit

72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X
Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. 32.00-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. 40.00-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract for VFD unit. Breaker disconnect unit for the drive is provided with RotoTract mechanism.
Up to ve option boards may be selected. Please see Tab 31 for detailed information. This option will t in all units. All options will t in option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Not available for 240V units.
Note: Output reactor or Dv/Dt lter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4m)30.00 feet (9.1m) for 2 hp and below). Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor. Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6m) can be achieved by using the KLC Dv/Dt lter. Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will t in fusible units.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 039

29.1-37
SVX9000 250600 hp at 480V Multi-Structure Adjustable Frequency Drive Units

All Eatons standard units include a disconnect, a line reactor and a doormounted keypad. Disconnect and drive unit are in separate structures, structures are mechanically interlocked. Structures have no vertical bus. These drives are bottom exit only.
IH (CT): High overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. Essentially a constant torque drive. IL (VT): Low overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Essentially a variable torque drive.
Table 29.1-31. Multi-Structure Options

Plug-in Options
22

Option Boards
I/O Expander
23 24 25 26 27
Encoder Expander Interbus S Communications Modbus Communications PROFIBUS DP Communications LonWorks Communications Can Open (Slave) Communications DeviceNet Communications Johnson Controls N2 Communications PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector) EtherNet/IP Communications Modbus TCP Communications Modbus (D9 Connector)
IH Nominal Amperes hp IH IL Nominal Amperes hp IL CB Type Standard Unit Space (X) Drive Option Space Dim. (X) 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X


HMCP MCCB Dim.
380500V
330 385 520 590 730

250 300 400 500 600
385 520 590 730
300 400 500 600
400 600 600 1200 1200
800 800 1200 1600 1600
72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 12X 12X

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Other Options
Automatic bypass circuit Bypass drive test switch Seven relay 120V control with CPT Isolated signal processor 315 PSIG Interface Dynamic breaking resistors Graphics keypad Line fuses RFI lter Deduct to remove output lter KLC 2000 ft (610m) Dv/Dt lter Output contactor Three contactor bypass Dynamic breaking circuit

The drives listed in this table are xed assemblies and not available with RotoTract mechanism. Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space. 60.00-inch (1524.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. 68.00-inch (1727.2 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structure and disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. Contact factory for sizing. 100.00-inch (2540.0 mm) wide unit. 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) drive is in (2) 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structures, disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure. 116.00-inch (2946.4 mm) wide unit. 96.00-inch (2438.4 mm) drive is in (2) 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) wide structures, disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
Up to ve option boards may be selected. Please see Tab 31 for detailed information. This option will t in all units. All options will t in Option unit. Use with bypass option. DB resistors are to be mounted by the customer external to the MCC. Dv/Dt lter not available 700 hp and above. Consult factory for sizing and availability.
Note: Output reactor or Dv/Dt lter not required for motor lead lengths shorter than 100 feet (30.4m)30 feet (9.1m) for 2 hp and below). Note: Maximum motor lead length is 160 feet (48.8m) for 1.5 hp and below, 330 feet (100.6m) for 2 hp and 400 feet (121.9m) for 3 hp and larger when using a standard output reactor. Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet (609.6m) can be achieved by using the KLC Dv/Dt lter. Note: Fusible units take option unit space. Not all options will t in fusible units.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives 1500 hp at 480V

Eatons CPX9000 Clean Power Drives use advanced 18-pulse, clean-power technology that signicantly reduces line harmonics at the drive input terminals, resulting in one of the purest sinusoidal waveforms.
IH (CT): High overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 150% overload for one minute. Essentially a constant torque drive. IL (VT): Low overload drives are capable of producing 200% starting torque for 10 seconds and are rated 110% overload for one minute. Essentially a variable torque drive.
Table 29.1-32. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Thermal-Magnetic Breaker and Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Disconnect Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Low Overload Drive IL Amperes 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590

High Overload Drive IH Amperes 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 Nominal hp IH 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
CB Type HMCP MCCB
Standard Unit Space Dimensions Inches (mm) Width Height Depth (X)
Nominal hp IL 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
50 100 100 100 100 150 150 250 400 600 600 600 600 600 1200 1200
80 100 125 150 175 225 300 400 400 600 600 600 600 600 1200 1200
40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 106.00 (2692.4) 106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2)
12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. The CPX9000 drive uses the term Low Overload (IL) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (IH) in place of the term Constant Torque. CPX9000 Drives in MCCs are available in thermal-magnetic breaker, motor circuit protector and fused disconnect congurations. A minimum clearance of 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) should be provided at the back of CPX9000 Drive MCC section for ventilation. Add 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) of width for bypass. Requires 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) in rear for ventilation.
Table 29.1-33. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Fusible Switch DisconnectDimensions in Inches (mm)
Low Overload Drive IL Amperes 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590

High Overload Drive IH Amperes 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515
Fuse Switch Fuse Switch
Standard Unit Space Dimensions Inches (mm) Width Height Depth (X)
Nominal hp IL 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Nominal hp IH 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
50 60 80 100 100 100 175 200 250 350 450 600 600 600 800 800
60 60 100 100 100 100 200 200 400 600 600 600 600 600 1200 1200
40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 68.00 (1727.2) 106.00 (2692.4) 106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 21.00 (533.4) 28.00 (711.2) 28.00 (711.2)
12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X 12X
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. The CPX9000 product uses the term Low Overload (IL) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (IH) in place of the term Constant Torque. A minimum clearance of 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) should be provided at the back of CPX9000 Drive MCC section for ventilation. Add 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) of width for bypass. Requires 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) in rear for ventilation.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 041

29.1-39
Option Groups for AC Combination Starters, AC Drives

Note: Option groups are common to both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
Table 29.1-40. Internal Circuit Breaker Options

Description Alarm contact Auxiliary 1NO1NC Auxiliary 2NO2NC 120V shunt trip 50C (thermal-magnetic)
22 23 24 25 26
Option Group A
Table 29.1-34. Wiring Class
Description NEMA Class IA NEMA Class IC NEMA Class IIB NEMA Class IIC NEMA Class IS (includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
Table 29.1-41. Terminal Blocks

Description Side mounted (Will accept stripped wire or ring/spade wire lug12 AWG bare/14 AWG ring/spade) Front railpressure connector Front railpull apart Front railutility/accepts ring wire lug.
Control terminal blocks and device panels not included with NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 29.1-35. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity

Starter Type Starters with HMCPs Starters with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers Starters with HMCPs Starters with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
Additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space required for Freedom starters sizes 14
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Voltage 480 480 600 600
Use Burndy YAEV10-L36 for #10 AWG compression termination.
Table 29.1-42. Control Wire Options

Description #16 AWG (standard) #14 AWG Wire markers Spade wire terminals Ring wire terminals Wiring to common CPT SIS power wiresubstitution SIS control wiresubstitution Starter Class 2 interwiring/per wire
Current limiter attachments are used. Add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to all size 3 and 4 starters.
Table 29.1-36. Control Circuit TransformersTypical Sizing

Starter Size 1, 2 (100 VA)includes extra 50 VA 3, 4 (150 VA)includes extra 50 VA 5, 6 (250 VA)includes extra 50 VA Extra 50 VA, size 1, 2 Extra 100 VA, size 3, 4 Extra 150 VA, size 5, 6
Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade wire terminals.
Table 29.1-43. Miscellaneous Options

Description Mini ammeter and CT Mini voltmeter Mini elapsed time meter Panel elapsed time meter Operations counter Wiring diagram on door Coil surge suppressor CT for remote metering (requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space) Heater packs installed Device labels Blank device panels

Refer to Table 29.1-86 for actual ratings.
Note: Price includes one secondary and two primary fuses.
Table 29.1-37. Control Circuit Fusing

Description Control fuse and auxiliary switch Control fuse Blown fuse indicator
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
Table 29.1-38. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts

Description 1NO or 1NC (sizes 14) 1NO or 1NC (sizes 56)
May add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory. May add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.
Maximum of eight on each contactor Maximum of four on each contactor
Table 29.1-44. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break

Starter Type FVNR FVR, 2S2W, PW RVAT, 2S1W, YD-Open YD-Closed Available sizes 46
Maximum of four per contactor on multi-contactor starters and 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 29.1-39. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator

Description 1NO1NC 2NO2NC
Table 29.1-45. Ground Fault ProtectionInstantaneous or Adjustable

Description D64 relay (with zero sequence CT) Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
42 43
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 042
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Option Group C
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 29.1-52. Monitoring Relays
Type of Relay D60LA current sensing voltage transducer AC current sensors with CTs Price includes 1 PT 05 thru 0100A 050 thru 0300A 0300 thru 0600A Additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space required
Table 29.1-46. Power FusesR, J Type

Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 400 600 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Table 29.1-47. Power Factor Capacitor Options

Description Blown power fuse indicator (set of threeone per phase)
AC current transducer, 420 mA, All Ratings self-powered with CTs Phase monitoring relaythree-phase Watt transducer, 420 mA, self-powered CTs

Table 29.1-48. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP

Description Size 12 Size 3 Size 4 Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space
Loop-powered devicesrequires 24 Vdc power source, which is typically provided in the PLC. Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering analog meters.
Table 29.1-53. Extra Bi-Metallic Overload RelayType C306

Description Size 132A overload relay Size 275A overload relay Size 3100A overload relay Size 4144A overload relay
Option Group B
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 29.1-49. Timing Relays
Type of Relay Solid-state timer PneumaticAGASTAT 24-hour motor timer 7-day timer Repeat cycle timer Mounting Panel Panel on or off delay Panel Panel Door or panel
Option Group D
Devices may require extra unit space. Table 29.1-54. Solid-State Overload Relays
Description C440 solid-state overload with ground fault protection C441 Motor Insight MP-3000 motor protector MP-3000 RTD module
Table 29.1-50. Control Relays

Number of Poles Two-pole Four-pole Two-pole Four-pole Six-pole Eight-pole Ten-pole Two-pole Three-pole Four-pole Six-pole Eight-pole
Type General purpose Type D7 socket relay N300 xed contacts Type AR machine tool relays N600 convertible contacts
Size 4 starters require an additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) (1X) space when used with solid-state overloads.
Type MD26 relays N600 convertible contacts
The six- and eight-pole units can be provided with four additional non-convertible NO contacts.
Table 29.1-51. Alternators

Description Two-circuit alternator Three-circuit alternator Panel (additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space required on size 1s and size 2s)
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 043

29.1-41
Option Group G
Table 29.1-57. Remote Racking System
Description Wired remote racking system for FlashGard MCC units
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Option Group E
Table 29.1-55. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
Device Pushbuttons 1 unit 2 unit 3 unit Selector switches 2 position 3 position 4 position Key operated adder Pilot lights Standard transformer 6V bulb Standard transformer LED bulb Push to test transformer 6V bulb Push to test LED bulb Pushbuttons 1 unit 2 unit 3 unit Selector switches 2 position 3 position 4 position Key operated adder Pilot lights Standard transformer 6V bulb Standard transformer LED bulb Push to test Transformer 6V bulb Push to test LED bulb

Device Type 10250T
Table 29.1-58. FlashGard Locking Accessory

Description Locking accessory for FlashGard MCC
Option Group I Optional Safety Accessories

Table 29.1-59. Automatic Insulation Tester
Description Automatic insulation tester Automatic insulation tester with megohm meter (mounted in unit door) E30
Table 29.1-60. Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)

Description Voltage presence indicator (mounted on unit door)
Maximum two devices per starter in dual units. Maximum of six devices without increasing compartment space.
Option Group F Options for 6.00-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units

Control terminal blocks are 300V rated and are limited to 12 points maximum Standard VA control transformer only
Table 29.1-56. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches

Device Pushbuttons 1 unit 2 unit 3 unit Selector switches 2 position 3 position 4 position Key operated adder Pilot lights Standard transformer 6V bulb Standard transformer LED bulb Push to test transformer 6V bulb Push to test LED bulb
Device Type E22
On 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to three E22 devices.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 044
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Table 29.1-61. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit BreakersMolded-Case Circuit BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm) Frames reect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufcient space to terminate cables on any standard breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
Frame Size (Amperes) 125 150 150 225 225 250 400 Circuit Breaker Frame E125H HFD FDC HFD J250 FDC J250 JDC HKD KDC CHKD CKDC 600 HLD LDC CHLD CLDC 800 NDC CHND CNDC 1200 HND NDC CHND CNDC 2000 RD RDC CRD CRDC RD RDC Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) 240V 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 480V 65 65 100 65 100 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 575V 25 25 35 35 35 35 35 35 25 50 25 50 35 50 35 50 50 35 50 35 50 35 50 50 65 50 65 50 65 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) Main Unit Size Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 24.00 (609.6) X Space 2X 3X 3X 3X 3X 4X 5X 5X 5X 4X 4X 7X 12X 7X 12X 12X Feeder Unit Size Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 24.00 (609.6) 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 42.00 (1066.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) X Space 1X or 2X 2X 2X 3X 1X or 3X 3X 4X 5X 5X 4X 7X 12X 7X 12X 12X 750 kcmil (six per phase) 750 kcmil (three per phase) 750 kcmil (three per phase) Maximum Cable Size 4/0 (one per phase) 4/0 (one per phase) 4/0 (one per phase) 4/0 (one per phase) 4/0 (one per phase) 350 kcmil (one per phase) 250 kcmil (two per phase) or 500 kcmil (one per phase) 500 kcmil (two per phase)
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2500

72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
750 kcmil (six per phase)
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. See circuit breaker terminal data for variations. Digitrip 310 LS is required and included in the price. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. NEMA 1 gasketed only. Digitrip 310 LS is standard and included in the pricing. The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable. 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide. Compact feeder units.
Table 29.1-62. Main Circuit BreakersMagnum DS Air Circuit Breakers Manually or Electrically Operated Fixed MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size Amperes 800 1600 2000 3200
Circuit Breaker Type MDS-608 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-C32
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) 240V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 480V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 575V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100
Unit Size 72.00 (1828.8)
Enclosure Width 24.00 (609.6)
Enclosure Depth 36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
Note: A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 045

29.1-43
Table 29.1-63. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated Drawout MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Size (Amperes) 800 1600 2000 3200

22
Enclosure Depth 42.00 (1066.8)
Circuit Breaker Type MDS-608 MDS-C08 MDS-616 MDS-C16 MDS-620 MDS-C20 MDS-632 MDS-C32
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) 240V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 480V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100 575V 65 100 65 100 65 100 65 100
Unit Size 72.00 (1828.8)
Enclosure Width 24.00 (609.6)
23 24 25 26 27 28
X Space 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 3X 5X 7X
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening. Structure is rear aligned.
Table 29.1-64. Digitrip Units

Type RMS 3101150 Refer to Page 21.4-10 for more details. Unit Space Inches (mm)
Table 29.1-66. Freedom 2100 Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm) Three-pole250V or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Switch Rating Amps 30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual 60/60 Dual 100 200 400 600 800 1200

Options
Tie breaker Electrically operated 72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
Fuse Clip Size Amps 30 60 30/30 Dual 30/60 Dual 60/60 Dual 100 200 400 600 800 1200
Unit Space Incoming Line Inches (mm) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 48.00 (1219.2) Feeder X Space Inches (mm) 3X 3X 3X 5X 8X 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 42.00 (1066.8)
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Accessories
UV release-instantaneous Shunt trip (standard on electrically operated breakers) Key interlock on breaker Auxiliary switch (3A/3B) Cell position switch Operations counter Auxiliary power module (to test Digitrip) Portable lift truck Manual close pushbutton cover

54.00 (1371.8) 9X 48.00 (1219.2) 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
48.00 (1219.2) 8X 48.00 (1219.2) 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Tie breaker adds an additional 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus transition section. Also two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) ller sections will be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main structures, the two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) llers are not needed.
Suitable for 100,000A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used. Type of SW K-SW 30800A. High magnetic molded-case switch. For bottom cable entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space. For bottom entry, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space. For top entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
Table 29.1-65. Main-Tie-Main Auto Throw-Over Options

Option AT200 Description Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface (PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external controls are pre-dened and not subject to customer modications. Type of voltage sensing device must be chosen. If closed-transition operation is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used. Same as AT200, except includes operator interface (PanelMate). Same as AT200, except customer modications are acceptable. This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special sequences, more than main-tie-main congurations, and/or where special PanelMate page layouts are required. Standard Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) controller-based control scheme for main-main congurations. Either or both sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation, and generator control switch. If closed-transition operation is required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
Table 29.1-67. Freedom FlashGard Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm) Three-pole250 or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Switch Fuse Unit Space Rating Clip Size Incoming Line Amps Amps Inches (mm) 30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200

Feeder X Space Inches (mm) 3X 3X 3X 5X 8X 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 42.00 (1066.8) X Space 3X 3X 3X 5X 7X
30 60 100 200 400 600 800 1200
18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 30.00 (762.0) 48.00 (1219.2)
38 39 40 41 42 43
AT300 AT300X
54.00 (1371.8) 9X 48.00 (1219.2) 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
48.00 (1219.2) 8X 48.00 (1219.2) 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
AT300IQ
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. PanelMate page layouts are pre-dened and not subject to customer modications.
Suitable for 100,000A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used. Type of SW K-SW 30800A. High magnetic molded-case switch. For bottom cable entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space. Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract. For bottom entry, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space. For top entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-68. Lighting Panelboards 120/240V or 120/208V Lighting Panelboards TypePL1A Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 120/240V, single-phase, three-wire; 208Y/120V, three-phase, four-wire.
Number Chassis Rating of (Amperes) Circuits SingleThreePhase Phase Three-Wire Four-Wire 18 30 42
May 2012
Sheet 29 046
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 29.1-71. Automatic Transfer SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)

Ampere Switch Rating Type 100 150 100 150 225 300 400 600 800 1000 1000 1200 1600 2000 100 150 260 400 600 800 1000 1200

Interrupting Unit Rating (kA) Width 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 65 65 65 35 35 50 50 100 24.00 (609.6) 20.00 (508.0)
Unit Space 36.00 (914.4) or 6X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 72.00 (1828.8) or 12X 72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
Unit Space Inches (mm) Single-Phase Three-Wire Three-Phase Four-Wire
Eaton MTVX, NTVS Eaton MTVX, NTVS Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVI Eaton ATVISP Eaton ATVISP Eaton ATVISP Eaton ATVISP ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000 ASCO Type 7000
225 225 225
100 100 225
24.00 (609.6) or 4X 24.00 (609.6) or 4X 30.00 (762.0) or 5X 30.00 (762.0) or 5X 36.00 (914.4) or 6X 36.00 (914.4) or 6X
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Bolt-on single-, two-, three-pole breakers only.
44.00 (1117.6) 72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
20.00 (508.0) 28.00 (711.2) 36.00 (914.4) 40.00 (1016.0)
Table 29.1-69. 277/480V or 480/600V Lighting Panelboards Type PRL3A Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either 480 or 600V, three-phase, three-wire or 480Y/277V, threephase, four-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.
Number of Circuits Chassis Rating (Amperes)
100 250 100 250 100 250 100 250 400/600 400/600 400/600 400/600
72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
Unit Space Inches (mm) Three-Phase Three-Wire

36.00 (914.4) or 6X 36.00 (914.4) or 6X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 60.00 (1524.0) or 10X 36.00 (914.4) or 6X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
Three-Phase Four-Wire
36.00 (914.4) or 6X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 60.00 (1524.0) or 10X 60.00 (1524.0) or 10X 48.00 (1219.2) or 8X 60.00 (1524.0) or 10X 72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
14 18 24 26 32 36 42 42 12 14 30 42
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker, or select separate feeder unit. Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on single-, two-, three-pole breakers only.
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. ATVI designs include ATC controller door mounted microprocessorbased monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essential. The ATC controller is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be used with Eaton transfer switches. This device provides the operator with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the power source currently in use. The ATC controller continuously monitors either single-phase or three-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize the ATC controller to meet specic application need. Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation. NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic. Requires 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.
Table 29.1-70. Lighting Panelboard Circuit Breakers Eatons circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on, single-, two- or three-pole through 240V. 600V maximum single-, two- or three-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.
Poles Maximum Voltage 240 240 600 600 Plug-in Bolt-on Ampere Interrupting Capacity 10,000 22,000 14,000 65,000
1/2/3 1/2/3 1/2/3 1/2/3
HQP QPHW
BAB QBHW EHD HFD
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 047

29.1-45
Table 29.1-72. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers Transformer 1.02.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker and fuses in a standard 2X unit Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and electrostatic shields as standard Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the primary and secondary circuit breakers housed behind a single door
kVA Rating Unit Space Primary Breaker (Included in Space Factor) 230V 480V 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 30 40 60 70 80 125 15 25 40 50 70 Secondary Breaker (Included in Space Factor)
Table 29.1-74. SPD (Surge Protective Device) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect Includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.
Description Unit Space Inches (mm)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
X Space 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X 3X
Surge Current Per Phase

100 kA 120 kA 160 kA 200 kA SPD-100 SPD-120 (recommended branch unit) SPD-160 SPD-200 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2)
Single-Phase
0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 45 9 15 25 30 45

2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 4X 4X 4X 4X 5X 5X 5X 6X 7X 5X 5X 6X 6X 6X
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 25 40 50 60 70 100 15 20 40 40 60
20 30 40 60 90 125 150 175 250 40 60 90 125 175
250 kA SPD-250 (recommended service entrance) 300 kA SPD-300 400 kA SPD-400

This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Also available in 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X) without circuit breaker disconnect.
Note: Specify three-phase delta or three-phase wye.
Three-Phase
Table 29.1-75. DeviceNet Communications DeviceNet-enabled components in MCCs eliminate up to 90% of the control wiring versus traditional hardwired designs. 24 Vdc DeviceNet is prewired throughout the MCC. Trunk cable is provided in the horizontal wireway. Drop cable is provided for vertical wireways and units.
Part Number D77D-DNA D77D-EMA D77D-EMA MVXDN OPTC7 DN50, DN65 PS1 PS2 PanelMate 1700 DN50

Description QCPort interface to DeviceNet Modbus TCP communications Modbus RTU485 MVX adjustable frequency drives DeviceNet interface SVX9000 adjustable frequency drives DeviceNet Interface Discrete DeviceNet interface for IT. solid-state starters Single 5A power supply Dual 5A power supply Operator interface for DeviceNet system DeviceNet I/O module
Space Requirements In power supply buckets In power supply buckets
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a secondary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
Table 29.1-73. Power Factor Correction Capacitors PF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally available with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators. Capacitors sizes must be specied by the customer. Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.
kvar 208V Unit Space Rating Inches X (mm) Space
2 3 4 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 40 50 60 75 90 100 120
2X 2X 12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/2X 12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/ 2X minimum
240V Unit Space Inches (mm) X Space
600V Unit Space Inches (mm)

12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
X Space
2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 4X 4X 4X 4X 6X 6X
12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6)
2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 2X 4X 4X
12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 12.00 (304.8) 2X 24.00 (609.6) 4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. IT. starters up to 66 amperes require additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) when selecting DN50, DN65 DeviceNet interfaces.
Freedom Communications Choices

The Freedom MCC is capable of communicating on multiple industrial networks connecting to any major brand of PLC or Distributed Control System. The way the communications is designed, it is possible to run multiple segments or even multiple networks through one lineup. The Freedom MCC has direct network connectivity to:

DeviceNet Modbus RTU EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP
CA08104001E
The devices capable of being integrated into the MCC on these industrial networks are bi-metal and solid-state overloads (across the line starters), variable speed drives, soft starts and feeder breakers; it is possible to integrate ATS and meters as well depending on the industrial network.
May 2012
Sheet 29 048
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Power Xpert Gateway

Power Xpert Gateways (PXG) provide a cost-effective method to easily Web-enable Eaton and third-party products. The gateway consists of an embedded Web server that allows the user to connect to Eaton MCC products, such as breakers, meters starters, VFDs and soft starts. The gateway provides the central connection point for the power metering/monitoring/protective devices, allowing their parameters to be monitored via the Web. Power Xpert Gateways provide data communications to Eatons Power Xpert Software to facilitate centralizing and gathering data for long-term data archival, analysis and trending features. The PXG600 allows you to enable preselected parameters to be trended for each supported device. Selecting the trend symbol will generate a real-time graph for that parameter and can be viewed for the past 24 hours, seven days, 30 days or all past history. The PXG600 also offers direct e-mail notications to up to 10 users. Select from event notications, data logs and event logs. Information is presented in organized, user-friendly Web pages and the power monitoring equipment listed in Table 29.1-76, solidstate overload relays, motor protective relays, solid-state reduced voltage starters, adjustable frequency drives and many more communicating devices. Additionally, the PXG can provide communications to solid-state overload relays, motor protective relays, solid-state reduced voltage starters, adjustable frequency drives and much more. The PXG has a feature called pass through, which allows a Modbus TCP master to pass data through the PXG and get/ set device specic registers, and also allows the Modbus TCP master to control the end device. The standard Power Xpert Gateway bucket is 2X and includes the PXG and 24 Vdc power supply.
DeviceNet Wiring
Table 29.1-76. Freedom Communications Choices The type of data available from the devices include but are not limited to the following.
Parameter C306 C440 Bi Metal SolidOverload State Overload

VFD Soft Breaker C441 Start SolidState Overload

ON/OFF (control and feedback) Trip indication Cause of trip Trip reset Operating current (three-phase and average) Operating voltage (three-phase and standard) Thermal capacity kW Frequency Motor speed Four generic inputs Drive specic parameters

Each of the Freedom MCCs are factory wired and factory tested prior to shipment with a common point provided for the customer to connect their industrial network to. Table 29.1-77. Freedom Communications
Part Number OPTC7 OPTCI OPTC3/OPTC5 PS1 PS2 PanelMate ePro Network Interface for Freedom starters
Home Page
Description SVX DeviceNet interface SVX EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP interface SVX PROFIBUS interface Single power supply Dual power supply Operator interface DeviceNet, Modbus, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP, PROFIBUS
Space Requirements No space change No space change No space change 2X 2X 2X No space change
Trending Page (PXG600 Only)
This table is common for both IT. MCC and IT. FlashGard MCC.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 049

29.1-47
Table 29.1-78. Power Metering Equipment

Feature IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM2250 PXM2260 PXM2270 IQA6600 Text only PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Instrumentation
Current, per phase Current demand Calculated neutral current Voltage, per phase (L,L, L-N) Min,/max, readings I, V Min,/max, readings I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA Frequency View amps and volts; phasors on display
Power
Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA) Power factor, total Real, reactive and apparent power demand

Demand Methods

Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, Vah)

30 31

THD
% THD amps and volts (to 40th) Interharmonics To 50th

To 127th
To 127th
To 127th
32 33 34
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU, KYZ output DNP 3.0 Option Option Option Modbus option KYZ option KYZ option KYZ option
Digital I/O
Digital input Digital output Load shedding with I/O card with I/O card with I/O card with I/O card with I/O card with analog card

with I/O card with I/O card with I/O card with analog card



with I/O card with I/O card with I/O card
35 36 37
Analog I/O
Analog output (01 mA or 420 mA) with analog card

020 or 420
Ethernet via Local Area Network

HTTP (Web pages) SMTP (e-mail) NTP (time sync) Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet TCP/IP Fiber optic Ethernet port SNMP Phasor diagram (Web viewwye connected) Live waveform view snapshot Ind. bar harmonics view

38 39 40 41 42 43
Add Gateway Card Kit (PXM-GCK). To obtain this information over LAN rather than the standard Ethernet port, add the extra Communication Module PXCE-B. Via Modbus RS-485.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-78. Power Metering Equipment (Continued)
Feature IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 0.50% 0.50% 0.50% 0.20% IQ 260 0.20% PXM2250 0.20%
May 2012
Sheet 29 050
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
PXM2260 PXM2270 IQA6600 PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000 0.20% 0.20% 0.20%

Revenue Accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5 or 0.2%) 0.20%

0.20%

0.20%

Waveform Analysis
Waveform capture (threshold/input) Volts disturbance, waveform capture trigger Excess Dv/Dt Stores waveform captures Sampling rate, max. samples/cycle Captured waveform displayed on meter/GUI Comtradestandard IEEE le format 6 MHz impulse transient capture Transient capture on neutral
10 2 GB (8 cy ea) 128
4 GB 4096

8 GB 100,000

4096


Individual harmonics magnitude Sub-cycle disturbance capturing Number of 9's availability PQ index graph K-factor Crest factor ITIC performance curve Flicker

To 50th

To 85th

To 85th

To 85th

Table 29.1-79. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection

Type Switchboard meters 1% accuracy Description Ammeter Ammeter with switch Voltmeter Voltmeter with switch AM/VM AM/VM with switches Instrument 600/800A CT Transformers 1000A CT 2000A CT 2500A CT 480/120 PT Signal transducers Current (add CT) single-phase Voltage (add PT) Watt (add CT and PT) single-phase Consult Eaton Unit Space Inches (mm) 12.00 (304.8) or 2X
Harmonic Correction
Table 29.1-80. Clean Control Center Eatons Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction system that provides harmonic correction directly on the MCC horizontal bus. The harmonic correction unit senses the load current and dynamically injects into the horizontal bus a synthesized waveform that cancels harmonic content from nonlinear loads such as AC drives. The result is a clean waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.
Harmonic Current (Amperes) 50A active harmonic lter 100A active harmonic lter
Input Disconnect Voltage Type Up to 480V Up to 480V Moldedcase switch Moldedcase switch
6.00 (152.4) or 1X 6.00 (152.4) or 1X
Standard Unit Space Inches (mm)
Standard Unit Space (X)
72.00 H x 20.00 W 12X (1828.8 H x 508.0 W) 72.00 H x 20.00 W 12X (1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
Voltage Protection
SPD (see Table 29.1-74 on Page 29.1-45) Ground detection lightsthree-phase underground systems System voltage monitor Lightning arrester and surge capacitor 18.00 (457.2) or 3X 6.00 (152.4) or 1X 72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG Safe Ground High Resistance Ground System
Current Voltage

This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Clean Control Center model includes 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide MCE structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital interface panel. Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional harmonic correction.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure without a vertical wireway.
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Two electronic meters will t in a single 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit. Ammeters require two CTs for three-phase/three-wire systems, and three CTs for three-phase/four-wire systems. Voltmeters require two PTs for three-phase/three-wire systems, and three PTs for three-phase/ four-wire systems. Without disconnect 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 051

29.1-49
Standard Structures and Structure Options

Eatons standard Freedom 2100 Series MCC structure is NEMA 1, gasketed, 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm) high, 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide with a depth as shown in Figure 29.1-9. Each standard structure has a 9.00-inch (228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway at the top and at the bottom and a 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height vertical wireway at the right.
Description
All wireway doors are hinged and secured with 1/4-turn latches. The standard busing is 600A, UL rated, copper horizontal bus and 300A, UL rated, copper vertical bus braced for 65,000 symmetrical amperes. Many other bus sizes and types are available. Also included as standard is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
16.00 (406.4)
22 23
90.00 (2286.0)
24 25
20.00 (508.0)
Table 29.1-81. Standard Structures and Structure OptionsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Standard Structures
16.00 (406.4) deep structure 21.00 (533.4) deep structure Front mounting only Front and rear mounting 4.00 (101.6) of additional structure width, 32.00 (812.8) maximum 8.00 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4.00-inch (101.6) Structure 1 Structure 2 Structure 3
21.00 (533.4)
26 27 28 29
Structure 1 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space Front Mounted Only
Special Structures
Single corner section for L conguration of MCC Transition section Series 2100 to Type W 10.00 (254.0) widefront aligned Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch Fixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure 20.00 (508.0) structure with wireway, 13.00 (330.2) with usable panel 24.00 (609.6) structure with wireway, 17.00 (431.8) with usable panel 28.00 (711.2) structure with wireway, 21.00 (533.4) with usable panel 20.00 (508.0) structure without wireway, 17.00 (431.8) with usable panel 24.00 (609.6) structure without wireway, 21.00 (533.4) with usable panel 28.00 (711.2) structure without wireway, 25.00 (635.0) with usable panel 32.00 (812.8) with double door 36.00 (914.4) with double door 40.00 (1016.0) with double door Programmable controller mounting structure (per complete structure with full xed mounting back pan) 20.00 (508.0) structure with wireway 24.00 (609.6) structure with wireway 28.00 (711.2) structure with wireway 20.00 (508.0) structure without wireway 24.00 (609.6) structure without wireway 28.00 (711.2) structure without wireway Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure 19.00 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed in PLC structure
Any 6.00 (152.4) height
30 31
20.00 (508.0)
32 33 34 35 36
Vertical Compartment
Structure 2 72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space Front Mounted Only Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section Complete section 6.00 (152.4) increments Consult Eaton
21.00 (533.4)
Top Horizontal Wireway Vertical Wireway
Table 29.1-82. Structure ModicationsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Channel oor sills: 11-gauge, 1.00 x 3.00 (25.4 x 76.2) NEMA 1 gasket NEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plate Bottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure 150-watt space heater, per structure Thermostat for space heater control Pullbox kit for cable and wiring to be eld mounted on top structure 12.00 (304.8) high 18.00 (457.2) high 24.00 (609.6) high Rear hinged structure door, 72.00 (1828.8) high NEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCC NEMA 3R non-walk-infront-mounted, back-to-back NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mounted NEMA 3R walk-in tunnel type NEMA 4Xconsult factory Special reduced height structures Seismic certication (earthquake qualication) UL handle extension

37
Bottom Horizontal Wireway 20.00 (508.0)
38 39 40 41 42 43
Structure 3 72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront 66-inch (1676.4 mm) SpaceRear Back-to-Back
Figure 29.1-9. StructureDimensions in Inches (mm)
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. The standard Freedom 2100 Series structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78.00 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor control centers elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
The standard Freedom 2100 Series structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78.00 inches (1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the MCC. Motor control centers elevated on a raised pad or installed on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-83. Bus ModicationsDimensions in Inches (mm) Eatons Freedom 2100 Series MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.
Description Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated 600A Size 800A Size 1200A Size 1600A Size 2000A Size 2500A Size 3200A Size 50C 0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 1 0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 2 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 4 0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 6 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 8 N/A 65C 0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1 0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 1 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 2 0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 4 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 6 0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 8
May 2012
Sheet 29 052
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CuTin-Plated (Standard) 21.00 (533.4) deep 21.00 (533.4) deep 21.00 (533.4) deep 21.00 (533.4) deep Optional Optional Standard Cu only Standard Cu only Cu only Optional Standard Optional Standard Optional Freedom Standard Cu Standard Cu Cu Cu
Silver-plated bus main horizontal bus Insulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping) Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300Acopper (tin-plated) Increased bus capacity: rated at 600A (front-mounted only) Rated at 600A (back-to-back)copper Rated at 800A (back-to-back and front) Rated at 1200A Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure: 42,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit current 65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit current 100,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit current Vertical bus isolation barrier, per vertical structure Labyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrier Ground bus, 300A standard, per vertical structure Increased capacity ground bus only, 600A, 1/4- x 2.00-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structure Plug-in grounding system, includes 300A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structure Neutral bus, ungrounded for three-phase, four-wire power, per vertical structure Splice plates

This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure. Contact Eaton for 3200A dimensions. Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only. Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.
Table 29.1-84. Main Lugs OnlyMechanical Lug Compartment (Three-Phase, Three- or Four-wire)Dimensions in Inches (mm) Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200A, all lug landings are bolted to a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
Maximum Cable Size (kcmil) 350 Bus Rating (Amperes) 600 Maximum Cables per Phase 2 4 Cable Entry (Top or Bottom) Top Bottom 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) top hat 600 800 2 4 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) top hat 750 1000 2 Lug Type Screw Crimp Screw Screw Crimp Either Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Either Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Screw Crimp Unit Space 12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 48.00 (1219.2) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) 72.00 (1828.8) X Space 2X 3X 3X 4X 6X 3X 4X 4X 6X 4X 6X 12X 12X 5X 6X 12X 12X 12X 12X Enclosure Width 20.00 (508.0)
4 1000 1000 1200 2500 3200

2 8
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Requires 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space. Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 053

29.1-51
Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main DisconnectPull Box
Pull box and pre-fabricated bus connectors are supplied to match the sandwich type bus duct end ange. Bus duct is assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to the MCC must be provided. Table 29.1-85. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect Pull BoxDimensions in Inches (mm)
Horizontal Bus Rating (Amperes) 6001600 20002500

Table 29.1-88. Freedom MCC Ratings and Highlights

Feature Vertical bus barrier Communications from starter units Bus bracing Control wire Horizontal bus material Pilot devices 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) starter compartment FVNR sizes 3 and 4 FVNR size 6 DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP using E777 solid-state overload relay 65 kA standard 42 and 100 kA available #16 standard Copper 10250T F206 Size 1 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) compartment 54.00-inch (1371.6 mm) compartment Freedom
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pull Box Height 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6)
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Contact Eaton for 3200A dimensions.
Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
Table 29.1-86. Typical Heat Loss Data

Description Vertical Sections Horizontal Bus and Ampacity Current (A) 600 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 3200 Loss (W) 200 300 500 700 1000 1400 2050 500 40 60 100 130 230 400
Table 29.1-89. Control Power Transformer Data All control power transformers are encapsulated and will deliver rated secondary voltage at full load. Two primary and one secondary fuses are furnished as standard.
NEMA Size Starter Starter Type Freedom Standard VA Rating Full voltage non-reversing and reversing 100 100 100 N/A 150 200 200 150 100 150 200 250 200 100 100 200 350 350 200 100 100 150 200 200 200 150 150 200 350 350 200 200 350 350 200 200 Maximum VA Rating 150 100 150 N/A 250 250 350 250 150 250 250 350 350 200 200 250 500 500 350 150 150 250 250 250 350 150 150 250 500 500 350 200 200 500 500 350
Space heaters (each) FVNR size 1 FVNR size 2 FVNR size 3 FVNR size 4 FVNR size 5 FNVR size 6
Size 1 Size 1 Size 2 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6
Autotransformer
Table 29.1-87. Typical Weights in lbs (kg)

Description 16.00-inch (406.4 mm) deep x 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep x 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure Weight 200 (91) 260 (118)
Two-speed One winding
Two-speed Two winding
Adder for Horizontal Bus

800A 1000A 1200A 1600A 2000A 2500A 3200A 10 (5) 15 (7) 18 (8) 24 (11) 30 (14) 38 (17) 49 (22)
Part winding
Adder for Vertical Bus

600A 800A 1200A 30 (14) 40 (18) 60 (27)
Wye delta (open or closed transition)
Adder for Units FreedomInches (mm)

12.00 (304.8) 18.00 (457.2) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4)
25 (11.4) 40 (18) 63 (29) 77 (35) 100 (45)
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Maximum size without increasing starter space. 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) unit.
Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600A horizontal and 300A vertical bus.
CA08104001E
Table 29.1-90. Starter Sizes Selection Guide
Squirrel-Cage 230V, Three-Phase Motor Control Center Full Load Horsepower Starter NEMA Current Amperes Size 1/2 3/4 460V, Three-Phase Wire Size at 75C Max. at 40C Amb. 575V, Three-Phase Control Center Full Load Wire Size Control Center Full Load Starter NEMA Current at 75C Max. Starter NEMA Current Size Amperes at 40C Amb. Size Amperes 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6
May 2012
Sheet 29 054
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Wire Size at 75C Max. at 40C Amb.
2.2 14 1 1 3.2 14 1 1 4.2 14 1 1-1/2 6.0 14 2 6.8 14 1 1 3 9.6 14 1 5 15.2 12 1 7-1/2 22 10 10 28 10 2 2 15 42 8 3 20 54 6 3 25 68 4 30 80 3 3 104 4 40 1 130 4 50 1/0 154 5 60 3/0 192 5 75 4/0 248 5 100 300 kcmil 312 6 125 500 kcmil 360 6 150 24/0 480 6 2300 kcmil 200 250 300 This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs. Information is based on Table 430.150 of NEC (1999).
1.1 14 0.9 14 1 1 1.6 14 1.3 14 1 2.1 14 1.7 14 1 3.0 14 2.4 14 3.4 14 2.7 14 1 1 4.8 14 3.9 14 1 7.6 14 6.1 14 1 11 14 9 14 14 14 11 14 1 2 21 10 17 12 2 27 10 22 10 2 34 8 27 10 40 8 32 8 3 3 52 6 41 8 3 65 4 52 6 4 77 3 62 4 96 2 77 3 4 124 4 1/0 99 2 156 5 125 3/0 1/0 180 5 144 4/0 2/0 300 kcmil 240 192 5 4/0 500 kcmil 302 242 6 300 kcmil 361 289 6 400 kcmil 24/0 Information is based on use of copper conductorsTable 310.16 and Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer to Table 310.16 of NEC (1999).

12.12 (307.8) 10.50 (266.7) A Horizontal Bus Location Vertical Bus Location 3.12 (79.2) 2.25 (57.2)
Location of Ground Bus
Location of Ground Bus
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

12 12 12.12 (307.8) 10.50 (266.7) A
Horizontal Bus Location Vertical Bus Location Removable Bus Barrie er 3.12 (79 9.2) 4.62 (11 17.3) 15.00 (381.0) 4.62 (11 (117.3) Rear Horizontal Wireway y 4.97 (126.2) Deep
4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3)
2.25 (57.2) Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep
Front Horizontal Wireway 7.16 (181.9) Deep
Removable Bus Barrier Flat Rear Cover Supplied on Front Mounted Only Structure Minimum Rated Vertical Bus Supplied as Standard in Front Mounted Only Structure
B Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)

9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
B 5.00 (127.0) 3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills Supplied Only When Specified 3.00 (76.2) Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)
9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5 (399.5)
5.00 (1 (127.0)
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills 3.00 0 Supplied Only When Specified (76 2 (76.2)
10.50 (266.7)
Location of Neutral Bus When Specified
10.50 (266.7) 266 7
Location of Neutral B Bus When Specified
Figure 29.1-10. Side View AFront Mounted Only

Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom. Standard structure arrangement in front Without MTB; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) With MTB at bottom; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) With MTB at top; A = 15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
Figure 29.1-11. Side View BFront and Rear Mounted

Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only. When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom. Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement in front Without MTB; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) With MTB at bottom; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) With MTB at top; A = 15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) Standard structure arrangement in rear Without MTB; C = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm), D = 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), E = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm), E = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) With MTB at top; C = 12.00 inches (304.8 mm), D = 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), E = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
May 2012
Sheet 29 055
Motor Control CentersLow Voltage Freedom FlashGard

29.1-53
22
3 0 3.50 (88.9) ( Removable R bl Top Cover

3 50 3.50 (88.9) ( Top Conduit Space
5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8) 17 50 17.50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0) 1.25 (31.8)
16.00 (406.4)
Vertical Wireway Door 1.25 (31.8) Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) 4.81 (1 122.2) Vertical Wireway
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) 0.36 inches (9.1 mm)16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.50 x 9.73 inches (444.5 x 247.1 mm). For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for seismic. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in FMO structure.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
17.50 (444.5)
1.25 1 25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 13 97 13.97 (354.8) Bottom Conduit Space .70 (17.8)
See Side View A Page 29.1-52 for vertical dimensions.
5.41 (137.4) 6.81 (173.0) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia.
16.00 (406.4)
2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia.
Figure 29.1-12. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16.00 Inches (406.4 mm) Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
3.50 (88.9) Top Conduit Space
3.50 (88.9)
Removable Top Cover
34 35 36
20.38 (517.7) 5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1 25 1.25 (31.8)
17.50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0)
Vertical Wireway Door 1.25 (31.8) Wire Tie Brackets 1.25 1 25 ( (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 18 8.35 8 (46 66.1) 6 Bottom Conduit Space 7 31 7.31 3 (185.7) ( 4.81 (122.2) Vertical Wireway
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1.25 (31.8)
17.50 17 50 (444.50) 444.50
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.8) 5.41 (137.4) 1.58 (40.1) .53 Dia. 16.00 (406.4)
2 00 2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia. .
.70 0 (17.8)
Figure 29.1-13. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21.00 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
29.1-54 Motor Control CentersLow Voltage Freedom FlashGard

Layout and Technical Data Dimensions in Inches (mm)
May 2012
Sheet 29 056
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
2.20 (55.9) 3.22 (81.79) Top Conduit Space 5.41 (137.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1.25 (31.8)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 3 50 (88.9) Removable Top Cover

21.00 (533.4)
Front Vertical Wireway Door 17.50 17 50 (444.5) 20.00 (508.0) 1.25 (31.8) (31 8) 7 31 7.31 (185.7) ) Rear Vertical Wireway
4.81 (122.2)
Wire Ti Wi Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) ) Vertical Wireway
1.25 1 25 (31.8)
17.50 17 50 (444.50) 444.50)
1.25 1 25 (31.8)
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) 0.36 inches (9.1 mm)16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 17.50 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. 7.50 x 9.73 inches (190.5 x 247.1 mm) in 16.00-inch (406.4 mm) deep structure. For multiple structure assemblies. Either one or both of these members are removed to provide maximum unrestricted conduit space at bottom. Not to be removed for Seismic. This conduit space not recommended when neutral bus required. Otherwise available. Channel sills supplied only when specied. For seismic loads, channel sills if required must be embedded so top of channel sill is still at oor level.
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.81) 5.41 (137.4)
Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (466.1) Bottom Conduit Space
4.81 (122.2) 122.2)
See Side View B Page 29.1-52 for vertical dimensions.
.53 Dia.
16.00 (406.4)
2.00 (50.8) .53 Dia.
1.32 (33.5)
Figure 29.1-14. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21.00 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep Front- and Rear-Mounted
Removable Top Cover Ground Bus Location 12.12 (307.9)
Horizontal Bus Location 3.12 (79.25) 4.62 (117.35) 4.62 (117.35) Removable Bus Barrier
Top Conduit Space 5.41 (137.4)
20.38 (517.7) or 16.00 (406.4)
2.25 (57.15)
2.20 1.25 (55.9) (31.8)
7.50 (190.5) (190.5 10 00 10.00 (254.0) 7.50 (190.5)
1.25 (31.8)
37 38
Horizontal Wireway 7.16 inches (181.9 mm) deep
1.25 (31.8) 5.41 (137.4) 5.78 (146.81) 5.41 (137.4) 1.58 (40.1)
1.25 (31.8) Removable Bottom Frame Members 18.35 (466.1) or 13.97 (354.8) Bottom Conduit Space .70 (17.8) Floor Line 1.00 (25.4)
9.73 (247.14) or 14.11 (358.4) 20.11 (510.8) or 15.73 (399.5)
Flat Cover Supplied on Rear of Front Mounted Only Structure
39 40 41 42 43
5.00 (127.0)
.53 Dia. (2)
5.00 (127.0)
3.00 (76.2)
10.50 (266.7)
Location of Neutral Bus When Specified
Figure 29.1-15. 10.00 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16.00 or 21.00 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep Transition Structure
May 2012
Sheet 29 057

29.1-55
Right-Hand Drawing 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 20.00 (508.0) 18.38 (466.9)
0.50 (12.7)
1.25 (31.8)
18.60 (472.5)
22 23
18.00 (457.2)
19.22 (488.2)
Corner Enclosure
16.00 (406.4)
24
1.25 (31.8) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4) 20.00 (508.0)
Top & Bottom Conduit / Wire Space
1.25 (31.8)
25 26 27
20.00 (508.0) Front
4.78 (121.4) (Ref)
5.40 (137.2) 2.00 (50.8) 0.00 2.00 (50.8)
28 29 30 31 32
20.00 (508.0)
Corner Enclosure
16.00 (406.4) 20.00 (508.0) Right-Hand Drawing
0.00 2.00 (50.8) 4.00 (101.6) (Ref)
5.65 (143.6) 4.62 (117.4)
1.25 (31.8) 18.60 (472.5)
19.22 (488.2)
19.22 (488.2)
11.48 (291.6) Horizontal Bus Location
Figure 29.1-16. 16.00-Inch (406.4 mm) DeepFront- and Rear-Mounted Corner Structure
0.50 (12.7) Right-Hand Drawing 24.38 (616.7) 20.00 (508.0) 24.38 (616.7) 21.00 (533.4) 1.25 (31.8) 22.97 (538.4)
33 34
22.76 (578.1)
23.60 (599.4)
Corner Enclosure
3.49 (88.7)
22.38 (568.5)
35 36
21.00 (533.4) 20.00 (508.0) Top & Bottom Conduit / Wire Space 1.25 (31.8) 12.19 (309.6) 1.25 (31.8)
37 38 39 40
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
20.00 (508.0) Front
5.40 (137.2) 4.78 (121.4) (Ref)
24.38 (616.7)
Corner Enclosure
21.00 (533.4) 20.00 (508.0) Right-Hand Drawing
0.00
41 42 43
23.60 (599.4)
2.00 (50.8)
0.00
5.65 (143.5) 4.62 (117.4)
1.25 (31.8) 22.97 (583.4)
23.60 (599.4)
4.00 (101.6) (Ref)
11.48 (291.6) Horizontal Bus Location
Figure 29.1-17. 21.00-Inch (533.4 mm) DeepFront- and Rear-Mounted Corner Structure

May 2012
Sheet 29 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1.75 5 (44.5) (44.5 Lower Horizontal Wireway Door 2.25 (57.2) (57.2 95.25 5 (2419.4) 2419.4 90.00 (2286.0) 2286.0 1.88 1 88 (47 8) (47.8) 4.25 (108.0) Top Conduit Space 3.50 0 (88.9) C L 3.50 (88.9) 0.18 8 (4.6) 4 6)
SECTION A-A 23 50 23.50 (599.4) (599 4)
Minimum Rated Vertical Bus Supplied on Front Mounted Only Structures 0.18 (4.6) Vertical V Wireway Wire Tie Brackets 7.31 (185.7) 4.25 (108.0)
2.87 (72.9) 7.97 (204.2) 20.30 (515.6) 28.85 (732.8)
4.81 (122.2) 9.80 (248.9) 25 75 25.75 (654.1) (654 1) 2.25 (57.2) 57.2 28 85 (732.8) 28.85 (732 8)
1.75 (44.5) n Vertical Bus Location V
Upper Horizontal Wireway Door
4.82 (122.4)
4.62 (117.3)
2.38 (60.5)
2.12 (53.8)
Vertical V Wireway 94.62 (2403.3) 2403.3) 1.25 (31.8) Max. 5.00 (127.0) 2.25 (57.2) Floor Line 15.69 (398.5) 4.31 (109.5) 20 (508.0) B 1.56 (39.6) 0.75 (19.1)
Channel Sills 4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6) Detail 2
0.75 (19.1) 24.85 (631 2) (631.2)
01 02 03
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

1.75 4.00 0 (44.5) (101.6 6)
24.85 24 85 (631.2) (631 2) 14.04 4 04
1.88 (4 47.8) Bottom Conduit Space
4.00 (101.6) Location of Neutral Bus When Specified
23 35 23.35 (593 1) (593.1) 24.85 (631.2) Detail 1
5.00 (127.0) 5.78 78 (146.8) (14 5.00 (127.0) 127.0) 3.78 8 (96.0 (96.0) 3.00 0 (76.2) ( 62 17.50 (444.5) 23.50 (596.9) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95 3 (95.3) 16.00 (406.4) 0.75 (19.1) 24.85 15.78 (631.2) (400.8) 23.35 (593.1)
3 75 3.75 (95.3) 95 3
Figure 29.1-18. Freedom Series 2100 Motor Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). 38.00 (9.7 mm)16 recommended. Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm). Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm). Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location not specied MTB supplied at the bottom. Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used, see Detail 2. This conduit space is not recommended when neutral bus is required. Otherwise available. Top rear conduit space is not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement (in front) without master terminal block, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier is not supplied with front-mounted only structure.
CA08104001E
May 2012
Sheet 29 059

29.1-57
2.50 (63.5)
14.17 (359.9) Wire Tie
7.31 (185.7)
Vertical Wireway
2.12 (53.8) 1.75 (44.5)
22.18 (563.4)
3.00 (76.2)
22 23 24
4.81 (122.2) W 2.00 (50.8) (228.6) 2.00 48.82 (1240.0) Aisle
2.00 (50.8) A 2.00 (50.8)
3.50 (88.9) W-6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9) 1.75 (44.5) 5.41 (137.4) 20.30 (515.6) 2.20 (55.9) 71.00 (1803.4)
25 26
2.50 (63.5)
9.63 (244.6)
Door Opening 36.00 (914.4) W x 90.00 (2288.0) H 71.00 (1803.4) 75.50 (1917.7) 2.12 (53.8) 2.25 (57.2)
3.00 (76.2)
2.25 (57.2)
1.88 (47.8)
27 28 29
11.68 (296.7) 10.06 (255.5) 20.10
10.50 (266.7) 12.12 (307.8)
Vertical Bus Location Horizontal Bus Location Ground Bus Location 15 Ref. 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 2.00 (50.8) W 0.38 (9.7)
3.00 4.00 (101.6) (76.2)
30 31
1 2
2.25 (57.2) Ground Bus
32 33
102.40 (2601.0)
4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3)
34 35
90.00 (2286.0)
5.00 (127.0) B
Vertical Bus
2 3
36
4.00 (101.6)
MTB Top 16.44 (417.6) MTB Bottom 22.44 (570.0)
37 38
4.00 (101.6) See Detail A
11.68 (296.7)
10.50 (266.7)
Location of Neutral Bus When Specified 71.00 (1803.4)
W
1.81 (46.0) Isolation Barrier (Standard) 15.58 (395.7) Labyrinth Barrier When Specified Insulated/Isolated
39 40 41 42 43
Top Conduit Space
Figure 29.1-19. NEMA 3R Walk-In Aisle StructuresDimensions in Inches (mm)

All doors open minimum of 105. Rear vertical bus barrier not supplied with front-mounted only structure. Standard structure arrangement (in front) without master terminal block, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B3.00 inches (76.2 mm). Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location is not specied MTB is supplied at the bottom.
Note: Minimum rated vertical bus supplied as standard. Rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.
CA08104001E

May 2012
Sheet 29 060
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

3.00 (76.2)
W W-6.00 (152.4)
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6) 22.18 (563.4) 4.79 (121.7) 3/8-16 Stud and Lockwasher
5.78 15.98 (146.8) (406.0) 71.00 (1803.4) 2.20 (55.9)
5.41 (137.4)
1.25 (31.8)
2.25 (57.2) 75.50 (1917.7) Bottom Conduit Space Tie DownDetail A
71.00 (1803.4)
Figure 29.1-20. NEMA 3R Walk-In Aisle StructuresDimensions in Inches (mm)

Minimum length of anchor bolt above grade 1.25 (31.75) (0.38-16 grade 5 torqued at 31 lb ft (43.4 Nm). Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 5.50 inches (139.7 mm). Maximum conduit space B. This conduit space not recommended when a neutral bus is required. The space is otherwise available.

Outdoor Structure Width (W) 23.50 (596.9) 27.50 (698.5) 31.50 (800.1) 35.50 (901.7) Indoor Structure Width (A) 20.00 (508.0) 24.00 (609.6) 28.00 (711.2) 32.00 (812.8) Maximum Conduit Space (B) 17.50 x 15.98 (444.5 x 405.9) 21.50 x 15.98 (546.1 x 405.9) 25.50 x 15.98 (647.7 x 405.9) 29.50 x 15.98 (749.3 x 405.9)
CA08104001E
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 30 001
30.0-1
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage
Contents
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Manual Motor Control MS Manual Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1 B100 MMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-2 Lighting Contactors Non-Combination Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 Electrically Held Non-CombinationCN35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-2 Mechanically Held Non-CombinationC30CNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-5 Magnetically LatchedA202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-9 Enclosed Combination TypeECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-11 NEMA Motor StartersElectromechanical FreedomGeneral Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 FreedomTechnical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-2 C441 Motor Insight Motor Protection Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-11 C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-13 Reduced VoltageElectromechanical General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2 Part Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-3 Wye-Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-4 Reduced VoltageSolid-State General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-6 S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-10 S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-18 DS6 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26 DS7 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-35 PSG Series DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-44 Enclosures General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1 Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.6-3 Group ControlMulti-Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1 Specications: See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Sections 16481, Sections 26 29 13.11, 16484, 26 29 13.13, 16485, 26 29 13.15, 16902 26 29 05
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Enclosed S801 Soft Start and Freedom NEMA Starter with C440 Electronic Overload Relay
CA08104001E
30.0-2 Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 30 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 003
Motor Starters and ContactorLow Voltage Manual Motor Control

Type MS
30.1-1
MS Manual Starters
Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts Single-Phase
0.55 (14.0) 4.16 (105.7) 3.06 (77.7) 1/2 Diameter Conduit 3 Single Knockouts 1 in Each End & Back As Shown 2.38 (60.5) 1.19 (30.2) 1.56 KO 0.73 (18.5) 2.55 ) 2.11 KO Indicating Light (When Used)
22 23 24 25 26
0.88 (22.4) KO 1.97 (50.0) Typical Side View
KO
13/64 Diameter 2 Mounting Holes
27 28 29 30
Typical Front View (Single Unit)
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed MS Starter
Figure 30.1-1. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)

19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole
MS manual single-phase starters are designed to give positive, accurate, trouble-free overload protection to single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp. Typical applications are fans, machine tools, motors, HVAC, and so on. Table 30.1-1. MS Ratings
Volts 120/240V, 277 Vac 120/240 Vdc 240 Vdc 32 Vdc hp 1 1 1/4 1/4 Poles 1 or 2 2 1 1 or 2
0.75 (19.1) 5.13 (130.3)
31
5.88 (149.4)
32 33
2.63
3.50 (88.9) 0.44 (11.2)
5.81 (147.6)
6.72 (170.7)
3.63 (92.2) 3/4 Inch Pipe To T p
2.91 (73.7)
0.81 (20.6) 3.94 (100.1) 3/4 Inch Pipe To T p
0.42 (10.7)
34 35 36
Figure 30.1-2. Watertight (Cast Aluminum)
Enclosures

Figure 30.1-3. Hazardous Location (Cast Aluminum)

1.64 (41.7) 1.52 (38.6) 1.06 (26.9) 0.78 (19.8) 0.66 (16.8) 0.34 (8.6)
Type 1: General Purpose Type 1: Flush Mounted, General Purpose Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous Locations Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G Hazardous Locations Red pilot light available for NEMA 1, factory-installed or eld-installed kit
37 38 39 40 41 42
2.75 (69.9) 1.38 (35.1)
Mounting Purposes (2) Holes
Typical Specications
Manual single-phase starters shall be Eatons Type MS or approved equal for motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They shall be built and tested in accordance with the applicable NEMA standards. The starter shall have a quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism. The overload shall have a eld adjustment allowing up to 10% variance in ratings of the nominal heater value.
1 Unit
Indicating Light 1.64 4.50 (41.7) 3.28 (114.3) (83.3)

0.22 (5.6)
Handle Guard
2.25 (57.2)
0.31 (7.9)
1.53 (38.9)
43
Figure 30.1-4. Flush Plates

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
CA08104001E
30.1-2 Motor Starters and ContactorLow Voltage Manual Motor Control

Type B100
September 2011
Sheet 30 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Type B100
Maximum 10 hp, 600 Volts
Eatons B100 manual starter can be used on non-reversing applications up to10 hp, 600 Vac. It features a three-pole block overload relay that uses A200 starter heaters, straightthrough wiring, and will accept auxiliary contacts.
4.98 (126.5) 3.98 (101.1) 1.02 (25.5)
B100 starters are available as toggle or pushbutton-operated open and Type 1 enclosed devices, or toggle-operated in Type 4, 7, 9 and 12 enclosures with padlocking provision as standard. Red pilot lights and one auxiliary contact are available as options.
4.72 (118.0) 2.36 (59.9)
1.05 (26.8)
5.13 (130.3) 2.56 (65.0)
5.00 (127.0)
7.59 (192.8)
Off
6.00 (152.4)
0.92 (23.4) 0.92 (23.4)
9.19 (233.4)
10.16 (258.1)
8.28 (210.3)
General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed B100 Starter
Enclosures
0.63 (16.0)
1.63 ) 3.25 (82.6)
.218 Dia. 4 Mtg. Holes 1/2 x 3/4 Conduit K.O. 2 In Each Side
1.50 (38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
0.09 (2.3)
Type 1: General Purpose Type 4: Stainless Steel, Watertight Type 7: Class I, Group D Hazardous Locations Type 9: Class II, Groups E, F, G Hazardous Locations Type 12: Dust-tight Industrial Use
1/2 x 3/4 Conduit K.O. 2 In Bottom and 2 In Top End T

5 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5)
6.00 (152.4)
2.05 (52.1)
0.17 (4.3) 0.63 (16.0)
1.02 (25.9)
Table 30.1-2. B100 Ratings

NEMA Size Maximum Horsepower 115 Vac 200-230 Vac 2 3 5 3 7-1/2 460-575 Vac 5 10
Figure 30.1-5. Type 1 Enclosed

7.13 (181.1)
Two-Pole, Single-Phase AC
M-0 1 M-1 2 M-1P(1-1/2) 3 M-0 M-1 2 3
6.03 (153.2) 5.13 (130.3)
3.56 (90.4)
5.13 (130.3) 2.56 (65.0)
5.00 (127.0)
0.27 (6.9)
Three-Pole, Three-Phase AC
12.06 (306.3)
8.38 (212.9)
9.19 (233.4) 8.28 (210.3) 9.41 (239.0)
All three-phase manual starters and single-phase starters rated above 1 hp shall be Eatons Type B100 or approved equal. They shall be built and tested in accordance with the applicable NEMA standards. The starter must feature contact operation that is quick-make, quick-break and cannot be teased into a partially open condition. There must be a provision that blocks the closure of the contacts while the line terminals are exposed. Operating handle or buttons must clearly show by their position whether unit is ON, OFF or TRIPPED.
10.25 (260.4)
4.19 (106.4)
Off f On
4.06 (103.1)
8.25 (209.6)
.406 Slot 2 Reqd

3.00 3 00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1IN11.50 NPSK 2 Holes
7.77 (197.4) 6.31 (160.3)
5.97 (151.6)
1.38 (35.1)
0.50 (12.7) 6.00 (152.4) 0.88 (22.4)
2.33 (59.2)
4.78 (121.4)
Figure 30.1-6. Type 7/9 Enclosed
Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 005
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Lighting Contactors

General Description
30.2-1
Non-Combination Lighting Contactors
General Description
Lighting contactors are designed to provide a safe, convenient means for local or remote switching of tungsten (incandescent lament) or ballast (uorescent and mercury arc) lamp loads. They are also suitable for other loads such as low pressure and high pressure sodium lamp loads and other non-motor (resistive) loads. They are not recommended for most sign ashing loads. These lighting contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten lamp loads without contact welding. The full family of lighting contactors does not require derating.
Electrically Held Lighting Contactors Eatons CN35 or approved equal are rated for lighting loads of 10300A. They are built and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA standards.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors Eatons C30CNM or approved equal are rated for lighting loads of 30A. They shall be capable of being supplied in a 212 pole single unit conguration.
These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contacts welding. The contactor is capable of being operated such that it will not switch to OFF during the control power circuit power failures. Magnetically Latched Lighting ContactorsA202 or approved equal are rated for lighting loads of 30 4000A. Magnetically latched enclosed combination lighting contactors are Type ECL12 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for loads up to 30200A when integral short-circuit protection is required. These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contacts welding. The contactors are capable of being mechanically held via a magnetic latch design using a permanent magnet. The contactor is operated by a RUN signal and a STOP signal preventing the contactor from switching to OFF during control circuit power failure.
Mechanically Held C30CNM Magnetically Latched A202 A202 A202 A202 A202 A202
60 Ampere, Five-Pole Electrically Held
Loads: Ballast LampsFluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide sodium vapor, quartz600V maximum.
Filament LampsIncandescent, infrared, heating480V maximum, line-to-line; 277V maximum line-to-neutral.

Resistance HeatingRadiant and convection heating, furnaces and ovens.
30 Ampere, 12-Pole Mechanically Held
Table 30.2-1. Lighting Contactor Comparison

Ampere Rating 30 Ampere, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched 10 20 30 30 30 60 60 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 Number of Poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 112 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3 2, 3 Electrically Held CN35 CN35 CN35 C30CNE CN35 CN35 CN35 CN35
CA08104001E
30.2-2 Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Lighting Contactors

Electrically HeldCN35
September 2011
Sheet 30 006
22 23 24 25 26
CN35-Open (ECL03-Enclosed)
Filament LampsIncandescent, infrared, heating480V maximum. Resistance HeatingRadiant and convection heating, furnaces and ovens. Cover ControlSee Enclosed Control Product Guide PG.3.02.T.E start-stop and hand-off-auto only.
Table 30.2-2. RatingsCN35 AC Lighting ContactorsElectrically Held

Maximum Ampere Rating 10 20 30 60 100, 200, 300 400
Number of Poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 2, 3, 4 , 5 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3
Enclosures
Open, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12.
20 Ampere
Auxiliary Contacts
Eatons CN35 lighting contactors include a NO maintaining auxiliary contact mounted on right-hand side (on 10A, two- and three-pole devices, auxiliary contact occupies 4th power pole positionno increase in width). Enclosed devices include a NO auxiliary contact only on the right-hand contactor. The 1060A devices will accept additional auxiliary contacts on the top and/or sides. The 100400A sizes will accept side-mounted auxiliaries only.
Listed ampere ratings are based on a maximum load voltage of 480V for tungsten lamp applications and 600V for ballast or mercury vapor type applications. Additional power poles mounted on side(s) of contactor.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Open Type 60 Ampere
C
T p To Mtd. Aux.
A U X
T To
U X
Side Mtd. Aux.
Mtg. Holes for #10-32 Screws D
Auxiliary Contacts
Figure 30.2-1. Open Type

A
T p To Mtd. Aux.
Electrically-held lighting contactors are Eaton Type CN35 or ELC03, or approved equal for lighting loads of 10300A. They are built and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA standards. These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contact welding. Contactors are capable of accepting up to 8 auxiliary contactstop and/or side up to 60A and side only up to 400A. Contactors are capable of being operated by AC or DC control.
3 Mtg. Holes for #10-32 Screws
G
T p A To Mtd. U Aux. X E
C
T
General Description
Lighting contactors are designed to handle the switching of tungsten (incandescent lament) or ballast (uorescent and mercury arc) lamp loads as well as other non-motor (resistive) loads. Ratings of 10400A, 112 poles, open or NEMA 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosed.
B Auxiliary Contacts
Figure 30.2-2. Open Type, 2030A Sizes, FourSix Poles
Loads: Ballast LampsFluorescent, mercury vapor, sodium vapor, quartz600V maximum.
A
T p To Mtd. Aux.
G
T p A To Mtd. U Aux. X E
C
T
3 Mtg. Holes for #10-32 Screws
B Auxiliary Contacts
Figure 30.2-3. Open Type, 2030A Sizes, FourSix Poles
See Auxiliary Contacts for type and location of auxiliary contacts supplied.
Table 30.2-3. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Ampere Rating Number of Poles Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 3.50 (88.9) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 6.00 (152.4) 6.00 (152.4) E 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.86 (98.0) 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 6.63 (168.4) 8.50 (215.9) 12.50 (317.5) 4.90 (124.5) 4.90 (124.5) 4.90 (124.5) 5.80 (147.3) 5.80 (147.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) F G Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
41 42 43
10 2030 2030 2030 2030 60 60 60 100 200 300
24 23 46 9 12 23 4 5 23 23 23
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.20 (106.7) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 2.56 (65.1) 3.46 (87.8) 4.36 (110.7) 3.54 (89.9) 7.05 (179.1) 7.05 (179.1)
3.88 (98.5) 3.88 (98.5) 4.35 (110.5) 5.75 (146.0) 5.75 (146.0) 5.05 (128.3) 5.05 (128.3) 5.05 (128.3) 7.17 (182.1) 9.11 (231.4) 13.12 (333.2)
3.49 (88.6) 3.49 (88.6) 3.52 (89.4) 4.52 (114.8) 4.52 (114.8) 4.44 (112.8) 4.44 (112.8) 4.44 (112.8) 5.94 (150.9) 7.25 (184.2) 7.78 (184.2)
1.4 (0.63) 1.45 (0.65) 2.9 (1.3) 4.35 (1.96) 5.8 (2.6) 3.4 (1.53) 3.5 (1.57) 3.55 (1.59) 9 (4.1) 20 (9.0) 23 (10.35)
Center mounting slot at bottom on 1030A sizes only.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 007

Electrically HeldCN35
30.2-3
Enclosed Box Selection

Table 30.2-4. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting ContactorsElectrically HeldCN35
Ampere Size (Poles) Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg) 1 2 3 1 2 5 (2.3) 7.3 (3.3) 9.5 (4.3) 5.2 (2.4) 7.3 (3.3)
Table 30.2-5. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Non-combination Lighting ContactorsElectrically HeldCN35

Ampere Size (Poles) Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg) 5 7 5 5 7 5 6 7 5 6 7 8 8 8 10 10 5 7 5 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 8 8 8 10 10 12 (5.4) 20 (9.1) 12 (5.4) 14 (6.4) 20 (9.1) 13 (5.9) 14 (6.4) 20 (9.1) 13 (5.9) 16 (7.3) 22 (10) 49 (22) 57 (26) 110 (50) 113 (51) 125 57) 16 (7.3) 20 (9) 16 (7.3) 24 (11) 18 (8.2) 18 (8.2) 24 (11) 21 (10) 23 (10) 22 (10) 56 (25) 64 (29) 117 (53) 120 (54) 132 (60)
Table 30.2-6. Type 1 Combination Lighting Contactors

Ampere Size Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Contactorswithout Control Power Transformers

10A 10A 20A 20A 20A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 200A 300A 400A 10A 10A 20A 20A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 200A 300A 400A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P) (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (2P, 3P, 4P) (5P, 6P) (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (2P, 3P, 4P) (5P, 6P) (9P, 10P, 12P) (2P, 3P) (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (2P, 3P, 4P) (5P, 6P) (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (2P, 3P) (4P, 5P, 6P) (9P, 10P, 12P) (2P, 3P) (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P)
Electrically Held3P Onlywith or without Control Power Transformers

30A 60A 100A 200A with disconnect switch 200A with thermal-magnetic breaker 300A 400A A A C D E E E 35 (16) 36 (16) 65 (30) 110 (50) 150 (68) 160 (73) 170 (77)

10 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 10A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/top adders 10A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 20A (2P, 3P) 20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/top adders & 6P w/o top adder 20A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 20A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 30A (2P, 3P) 30A (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders 30A (5P, 6P) 30A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 30A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 30A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 60A (2P, 3P) 60A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 60A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 60A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 100A (2P, 3P) 100A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 200A (2P, 3P) 200A (4P, 5P, 6P) 300A (2P, 3P) 300A (4P, 5P, 6P) 400A (2P, 3P) 10A 10A (2P, 3P, 4P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) w/top adders (2P, 3P, 4P, 6P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/ top adders (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (9P, 12P) w/top adders (2P, 3P, 4P) (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders (5P, 6P) (5P, 6P) w/top adders (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) (9P, 12P) w/top adders (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P) w/top adders (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) (4P, 5P) w/top adders (2P, 3P) (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) (2P, 3P) (4P, 5P, 6P) (2P, 3P) (4P, 5P, 6P) (2P, 3P)
3 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 10 10 10 10 2 3
9 (4.1) 9.3 (4.2) 5.3 (2.4) 7.3 (3.3) 9.0 (4.1) 9.2 (4.2) 9.5 (4.3) 9.7 (4.4) 7 (3.2) 9.8 (4.4) 9.5 (4.3) 10 (4.5) 35 (16) 60 (27) 70 (32) 133 (60) 113 (51) 136 (62) 125 (57) 11 (5.0) 13.1 (5.9)
Table 30.2-7. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination Lighting Contactors

Ampere Size (Device) Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
Electrically Held3P Onlywith or without Control Power Transformers

30A 60A 100A 200A 200A 300A 400A with disconnect switch with thermal-magnetic breaker A A C D E E E 35 (16) 36 (16) 65 (30) 110 (50) 150 (68) 160 (73) 170 (77)
Contactorswith Control Power Transformers
20A 20A 20A 20A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 200A 200A 300A 300A 400A
2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 10 10 10 10 10
11 (5.0) 13.1 (5.9) 13.5 (6.1) 13.5 (6.1) 12 (5.4) 13.1 (5.9) 12.5 (5.7) 13.5 (6.1) 13.9 (6.3) 14.1 (6.4) 12.8 (5.8) 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 14.2 (6.4) 39 (18) 67 (30) 117 (53) 140 (64) 120 (54) 143 (65) 132 (60)
For enclosure box dimensions, refer to Page 30.6-3.


Electrically HeldTechnical DataCN35
Table 30.2-8. AC Magnet Coil Data
Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size CN35AN 10A Frame size 45 mm 74% 78% 100 65 10 3.1 45% 46% 12 12 15% to +10% Class 130 (B)105C Temperature Rate CN35BN 20A 45 mm 74% 78% 100 65 10 3.1 45% 46% 12 12 CN35DN 30A 45 mm 74% 78% 100 65 10 3.1 45% 46% 12 12 CN35GN 60A 65 mm 74% 78% 230 95 28 7.8 49% 50% 20 14 CN35KN 100A 90 mm 72% 76% 390 112 49.8 13 50% 52% 14 11 CN35NN 200A 180 mm 75% 77% 1158 240 100 27.2 63% 64% 23 15 CN35SN 300A 180 mm 75% 77% 1158 240 100 27.2 63% 64% 23 15
September 2011
Sheet 30 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CN35TN 400A 180 mm 75% 77% 1158 240 100 27.2 63% 64% 23 15
AC Magnet Coil Data Pickup voltscold Pickup voltshot Pickup voltamperes Pickup watts Sealed voltamperes Sealed watts Dropout voltscold Dropout voltshot Pickup time (ms) Dropout time (ms) Coil operating range Magnet coil data UL listed rating Maximum operating altitude Mechanical life Wire Range Power terminals
Operating temperature 20 to +65C 6000 20,000,000 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 816 stranded 10 14 solid Cu 10,000,000 314 (upper) &/or 614 (lower) Stranded or solid Cu 6,000,000 1/014 Cu 5,000,000 350 kcmil6 Cu 5,000,000 350 kcmil8 Cu 5,000,000 600 kcmil2/0 Cu
Control Terminals Contact Kit Part No. Two-pole Three-Pole Auxiliary contact rating
1216 Stranded 1214 Solid Cu N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 6-65-7 6-65-8 6-43-5 6-43-6 6-44 6-44-2 6-45 6-45-2 6-45 6-45-2
A600, P300 See Page 30.2-5
Table 30.2-9. dc Magnet Coil Data

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size CN35AN 10A Frame size Volts DC Magnet Coil Data Pickup voltshot Pickup voltamperes Pickup watts Sealed voltamperes Sealed watts Dropout voltshot Pickup time (ms) Dropout time (ms) Maximum operating altitude 45 mm 24V 80% 3.2 76.8 0.14 3.36 60% 22 17 3600 80% 3.2 76.8 0.14 3.36 60% 22 17 80% 3.2 76.8 0.14 3.36 60% 22 17 60% 6.2 88.4 0.21 4.96 29% 20 13 61% 12.0 288.0 0.20 4.75 22% 38 14 61% 12.0 288.0 0.20 4.75 22% 38 14 61% 12.0 288.0 0.20 4.75 22% 38 14 67% 18 400.0 0.22 5.3 25% 53 14 2400 CN35BN 20A 45 mm CN35DN 30A 45 mm CN35GN 60A 65 mm CN35KN 100A 90 mm CN35NN 200A 180 mm CN35SN 300A 180 mm CN35TN 400A 180 mm
UL Insulation RatingClass 130 (B), 105C temperature rise Operational Limits85110% of rated voltage for AC coils and 80%110% of rated voltage for DC coils
Coil Data Notes

P.U. = Pickup time is the average time taken from closing of the coil circuit to main contact touch. D.O. = Dropout time is the average time taken from opening of the coil circuit to main contact separation. Cold = Coil data with a cold coil. Hot = Coil data with a hot coil. All data is based on a standard contactor with no auxiliary devices and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil. Coil data has a 5% range depending on the application, therefore specic data may vary.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 009

Mechanically Held, 30A, 212 PoleC30CNM
30.2-5
Type C30CNMOpen (ECCEnclosed)
Operation
Three-wire control is the choice for use with momentary devices allowing operation from multiple locations. A momentary pulse of energy operates the contactor while a second pulse on an alternate leg returns the contactor to its original state. Two-wire control is the choice for single output automatic operation or for operation from single-pole devices. When voltage is applied to the input terminals the contactor is latched into position (coil is removed from the circuit while control voltage is continuously supplied). When control voltage is removed, the latch is disengaged and the contactor is returned to its original state.
Auxiliary Contacts Rating:
600A, 24 Vdc, 24 VA 13 to 104F (25 to 40C) Vertical three-point mounting only
22 23 24 25 26
Wire Temp. 75C Cu 75C Cu 60/75C Cu 60/75C Cu 60/75C Cu
Ambient Temperature:
Mounting Position:
Coil:
Inrush 248 VA Sealed 28 VA
Wire Size
Table 30.2-14. Wire Specications
Component Number Wire Range of (Solid or Cables Stranded) Power Poles Coil Control Module Auxiliary Contacts
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C30CNM
1 2 1 or 2 1 1 or 2
148 AWG 148 AWG 1814 AWG 2212 AWG 2212 AWG
General Description
Eatons C30CNM 30A mechanically held lighting contactors are designed for industrial, commercial and outdoor lighting applications where efcient control is required. The mechanically held operation ensures that the contactor will not switch to OFF during control power failure. It also ensures the removal of coil from the circuit for noise-free operation and the elimination of all coil losses after the contactor is latched. The control module microprocessor validates the control signal before operation, so it will not respond to momentary voltage spikes of noise. The operation command has a built-in 0.4 second delay to avoid multiple short-term commands that can cause contact fatigue or failure. Also, the feedback loop prevents the contactor from getting out of sequence with switches, even after power failures.

Main Power Poles
Table 30.2-10. Maximum AC Voltage and Ampere Ratings
Load Type Amps Poles Continuous SinglePhase 30 30 20 30 347 Vac 600 Vac 277 Vac 600 Vac ThreePhase 600 Vac 600 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
8 AWG stranded only.
Ballast General use Tungsten AC resistive

Table 30.2-15. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting ContactorsC30CN
Ampere Size (Poles) Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
Table 30.2-11. Maximum Horsepower Rating

Normal Starting Duty Volts Horsepower 1 2 3 5 10 15
Lighting Contactors without Control Power Transformers

30A (212) 2 9 (4.1)
Single-Pole, Single-Phase
110120 220240
Lighting Contactors with Control Power Transformers

30A
35
3 13.5 (5.9)
Three-Pole, Three-Phase
200208 220240 440480 550600
(212)
Consult factory for combination enclosures.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Mechanically held lighting contactors are Eaton Type C30CNM or approved equal and are rated for lighting loads of 30A. They are capable of being supplied in a 212 pole single unit conguration. These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contact welding. The contactor is capable of being operated such that it will not switch to OFF during control circuit power failures.
Table 30.2-16. Type 3R, 4X and 12 Noncombination Lighting ContactorsC30CN

Ampere Size (Poles) Maximum VA 2 5 12 30 Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
Table 30.2-12. Control Module

Input Voltage 1224 Vdc 24 Vac 115120 Vac 200277 Vac Steady-State Current at Rated Voltage (mA) 42 80 83 91
Lighting Contactors without Control Power Transformers

30A (212) 6 14 (6.4)
Lighting Contactors with Control Power Transformers

30A
(212)
20 (9.1)
Consult factory for combination enclosures.
Table 30.2-13. Other Control Module Characteristics

Description Minimum pulse duration (Three-wire control module) Maximum allowable Leakage current EMI Surge transient peak Frequency range Specication 250 ms 1.8 mA 35 V/m 6 kV 4070 Hz
CA08104001E

Mechanically Held, 30 Ampere, 212 PoleC30CNM
September 2011
Sheet 30 010
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Components
Electrically Held Base Contactor
Power Poles
Mechanically Held Module Kits
Conversion Kits Power Poles
The C30CNM contactor accepts up to a maximum six single- or double-pole (or combinations) power poles. These can be used to form up to:
Electrically Held Base Contactor
The C30CNE20_0 electrically held base contactor contains a 2NO power pole as standard and will allow the addition of power poles to build an electrically held contactor up to 12 poles maximum. A mechanically held module kit can also be added to convert the electrically held contactor into a mechanically held contactor in the eld. Table 30.2-17. Electrically Held Base Contactor
Power Poles 2NO
12NO poles maximum when six double-poles are used in NO positions (16) or 8NC poles maximum with four double-poles in the NC position (14) and 4NO poles with two doublepoles in the 2NO positions (56)
Catalog Number C320PRP1 C320PRP2
These kits are for converting electrically held contactors to mechanically held units. Kits include control module, latch, latch cover and auxiliary contacts plus installation instructions. Conversion kits are suitable for coil voltages of 277V and below. Table 30.2-20. Mechanically Held Module Kits
Coil Volts Control Volts 110120 Vac 200277 Vac 24 Vac 1224 Vdc 110120 Vac 200277 Vac 24 Vac 1224 Vdc Catalog Number C320MH2WA0 C320MH2WH0 C320MH2WT0 C320MH2WT1 C320MH3WA0 C320MH3WH0 C320MH3WT0 C320MH3WT1
Two-Wire
24277 Vac
Table 30.2-19. Power Poles

Power Poles Single-pole Double-pole
Three-Wire
24277 Vac
Catalog Number C30CNE200
When ordering, select required contactor by Catalog Number and replace the magnet coil alpha designation in the Catalog Number (...) with the proper Code Sufx from Table 30.2-18.
Table 30.2-18. Coil Base Voltage (Digit 8)

Voltage (Digit 8) 115120V 60 Hz/110V 50 Hz 230240V 60 Hz/220V 50 Hz 460480V 60 Hz/440V 50 Hz 575600V 60 Hz/550V 50 Hz 200208V 60 Hz 265277V 60 Hz/240V 50 Hz 24V 60 Hz/20V 50 Hz 28V 60Hz/24V 50 Hz 347V 60 Hz Code Sufx A B C D E H T V X
Figure 30.2-4. C30CNM ComponentsExploded View
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 011

30.2-7
Auxiliary Contacts
Table 30.2-21. Auxiliary Contact Congurations

Two-Wire None 1NO (single-pole) 2NO (double-pole) 1NC (double-pole) 1NO1NC (NO single-pole NC double-pole) 2NO1NC (double pole) Three-Wire None 1NC (double-pole) 1NO (double-pole) 1NO1NC (double-pole)
Replacement Parts
Magnetic Coils for the Base Contactor
22 23 24 25
Auxiliary Contacts
Table 30.2-22. Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Auxiliary Block Single-pole Double-pole Catalog Number C320AMH1 C320AMH2 Coil Voltage 115120V 60 Hz/110V 50 Hz 230240V 60 Hz/220V 50 Hz 460480V 60 Hz/440V 50 Hz 575600V 60 Hz/550V 50 Hz 200208V 60 Hz 265277V 60 Hz/240V 50 Hz 24V 60 Hz/20V 50 Hz 28V 60 Hz/24V 50 Hz 347V 60 Hz
A mechanically held contactor with a two-wire control module uses 1NC auxiliary contact as standard for the control wiring circuit. The mechanically held contactor with a three-wire control module uses 1NO1NC auxiliary contacts as standard for the control wiring circuit. See Table 30.2-21 for possible additional auxiliary contact congurations.
26
Magnetic Coils
27
Catalog Number 9-3242-1 9-3242-2 9-3242-3 9-3242-4 9-3242-5 9-3242-6 9-3242-7 9-3242-8 9-3242-9
Table 30.2-23. Magnetic Coils
28 29 30 31 32
Wiring Diagrams
C30CNE Electrically Held Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 Remote OFF Auxiliary Contact Remote Auxiliary Contact ON Load ON OFF Pushbutton Pushbutton L1 * Fuse A2 ON * L2 View B Optional Pilot Devices for Electrically Held Contactor * If Used
33 34
Coil
A1
Fuse
35 36
OFF
ON and OFF Pushbuttons
37
ON
View A A1 Optional Auxiliary Contacts Coil A2 Optional Auxiliary Contacts L1 * Fuse Remote Device OFF SS AUTO
38
A1 Fuse * L2
Coil Voltage
A2 Auxiliary Contact
Coil
39 40
CONTROL Refer to View B for Control Connections

OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
OFF
ON L1 * * L2
41
A1 Fuse
Fuse
ON OFF AUTO Remote Device Auxiliary Contact A2
Coil
42 43
OFF
OFF/ON/AUTO or HAND/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
Figure 30.2-5. C30CNM Wiring Diagram


September 2011
Sheet 30 012
22 23 24
C30CNM Mechanically Held Refer to View A for 2-/3-Wire Control Options Load Line 1 2 3 Control Voltage OFF ON
View B Optional Pilot Devices for 2-Wire Control

OFF SS
Electronic-Module ON (AUTO) P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Fuse
* If Used * Coil Voltage *
25 26 27 28
C
Coil A2 A1 OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch

ON
Fuse
4 5 6 View A Electronic-Module P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Not Used A1 Coil A2 Optional NC Aux. Contact Control Voltage OFF ON
Remote ON OFF
Electronic-Module P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Fuse
* Coil Voltage *
Control OFF ON Voltage
AUTO
Remote Device
Coil A2 A1 HAND/OFF/AUTO or ON/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
Fuse
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Optional N/O Aux. Contacts L
View C Optional Pilot Devices for 3-Wire Control NO Remote Auxiliary OFF Electronic-Module P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 OFF
ON
* If Used * Coil Voltage *
Fuse
Coil Voltage
2-WIRE CONTROL Refer to View B for Control Connections Electronic-Module P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
NC Auxiliary
A2
Coil
A1
Fuse
ON & OFF Pushbuttons NO Auxiliary Electronic-Module P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Fuse

OFF
L Optional N/O Aux. Contacts O C A1 Coil A2 Optional NC Aux. Contact
* Coil Voltage *
Coil Voltage 3-WIRE CONTROL Refer to View C for Control Connections
Control Voltage
ON OFF ON
NC Auxiliary
A2
Coil
A1
Fuse
OFF/ON Selector Switch with Spring Return to Center
Figure 30.2-6. C30CNM Wiring Diagram
Dimensions
.35 (9.0) SIDE VIEW Power Pole TOP VIEW 2 NO Aux Contacts 1 NO Aux Contact 6.50 (165.1) 7.39 (187.6) NOTE: 1 Mounting dimensions remain the same for 1 to 12 poles. 2 Line and Load terminals are interchangeable. 3 Up to 2NO and 2NC auxiliary contacts can be added onto the base product. 4 Same power pole can be configured as NO type or NC type in pole positions 1 4; NO type only in positions 5 6. END VIEW
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
.35 (9.0) 3.86 (98.0)
2 NC Aux Contacts 1 NC 3.86 Aux (98.0) Contact
ON ON ON ON ON ON
Optional Power Pole Optional NC Aux Contacts Optional NO Aux Contacts Mounting Holes Accept #10 Screws .22 (5.5)
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
A1
A2
3.75 (95.3) 4.18 (106.2)
.59 (14.9)
Figure 30.2-7. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 013

Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)A202
30.2-9
A202Open (ECL04Enclosed)
Magnetically-held lighting contactors are Eatons Type A202 or approved equal for lighting loads of 30400A. Magnetically-held combination lighting contactors are Type ECL15 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for loads of 30200A when integral short circuit protection is required. These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contacts welding. The contactors are capable of being magnetically held via a magnetic latch design using a permanent
magnet. The contactor shall be operated by a RUN signal and a STOP signal preventing the contactor from switching to OFF during control circuit power failures. Table 30.2-24. RatingsLatched AC Lighting Contactors
Holding Circuit Auxiliary Contact or Pushbutton Station not Included Continuous Amperes (Enclosed) 30 60 100 200 300 400 Number of Poles 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 2, 3 2, 3
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
60 Ampere Size
General Description
AC lighting contactors provide a safe convenient means for local or remote switching of relatively large tungsten, uorescent or mercury arc lamp loads. They are also suitable for low pressure and high pressure sodium lamp loads. These lighting contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten lamp loads without contact welding. They are full rated and do not require derating as do standard motor control contactors.
Table 30.2-25. Non-Combination Lighting Contactors6 to 12 Pole

Continuous Amperes (Enclosed) 30 Number of Poles Pole Conguration Dimensions in Inches (mm) Open Type Wide A 6 8 10 12 6 8 10 12 6 8 10 12 6 8 10 12 3x3 4x4 5x5 4x4x4 3x3 4x4 5x5 5x5x2 3x3 5x3 5x5 5x5x2 3x3 5x3 5x5 5x5x2 7.13 (181.1) 7.13 (181.1) 10.63 (270.0) 12.38 (314.5) 7.13 (181.1) 10.63 (270.0) 10.63 (270.0) 15.00 (381.0) 9.75 (247.7) 12.38 (314.5) 15.00 (381.0) 34.13 (866.9) 9.75 (247.7) 12.38 (314.5) 15.00 (381.0) 34.13 (866.9) High B 4.46 (113.3) 4.46 (113.3) 4.46 (113.3) 6.88 (174.8) 4.46 (113.3) 4.46 (113.3) 4.46 (113.3) 6.88 (174.8) 6.88 (174.8) 6.88 (174.8) 6.88 (174.8) 27.50 (698.5) 6.88 (174.8) 6.88 (174.8) 6.88 (174.8) 27.50 (698.5)
30 31 32 33 34 35
Operation (Magnetic Latch)

A permanent magnet is built into the contactor structure that will maintain the contactor in its energized state indenitely without using control power. When energized, a DC current is applied to the latch coil producing a magnetic eld that reinforces the polarity of the permanent magnet, pulling in the contactor. The current to the coil is disconnected by the coil clearing interlock. In order to drop out the contactor, it is necessary to apply a eld through the STOP coil in the reverse direction to the permanent magnet. This momentarily cancels the magnetic attraction and the contactor drops out.
60
100
200
Connections for Control Stations

Fig. A Momentary Pushbutton 1 Off On 2 3 Fig. B
Fig. 1
Top Auxiliary Contact
Connections for Contactor Front View Diagram

Line When Supplied Red C (Not Supplied)
+
N.C. N.O.
36 37
Red
Enclosures
Open and NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X and 12.
C A
Maintained Pushbutton 1 Off On 3
3 2 Black White
2
M M
On
Off
~ ~
L2 Control Module
38 39 40 41 42 43
Separate Control
Connect separate control lines to the No. 1 terminal on the remote control station and to the L2 terminal on the contactor. Auxiliary Contact (When Used) Auxiliary Contact (When Used)
Specications
Figure 30.2-8. Open Type
Poles to Load
Terminals: All except 30A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al/Cu 30A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Cu only
Elementary Diagram
M M Line M M M Load 1 Control Voltage Lines Black Top On L2 3 N.C. Red M Momentary Red Pushbutton On White M 2 N.O. Off 1
~ ~
Off 1
On
Red
Off
Ballast load 600 Vac, breaking all lines Tungsten lamp loads, maximum volts: Line-to-line. . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Vac Line-to-neutral. . . . . . . . . 277 Vac
Maintained Pushbutton
Figure 30.2-9. Connection Diagram


Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)A202
September 2011
Sheet 30 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 30.2-26. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting ContactorsMagnetically LatchedA202
Ampere Size (Poles) Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 8.5 (3.9) 13 (5.9) 35 (16) 8.7 (3.9) 13.5 (6.1) 40 (18) 40 (18) 85 (39) 100 (45) 46 (21) 95 (43) 110 (50) 115 (52) 125 (57) 12.5 (5.7) 17 (7.7) 39 (18) 12.7 (5.8) 17.5 (7.9) 87 (39) 44 (20) 47 (21) 92 (42) 107 (49) 53 (24) 102 (46) 117 (53) 122 (55) 132 (60)
Table 30.2-27. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Non-combination Lighting Contactors Magnetically LatchedA202
Ampere Size (Poles) Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg) 5 7 8 5 7 8 8 9 10 8 10 10 10 13 (5.9) 21 (10) 46 (21) 14 (6.4) 22 (10) 48 (22) 50 (23) 58 (26) 100 (45) 52 (24) 105 (48) 113 (51) 125 (57) 15 (6.8) 28 (13) 54 (25) 16 (7.3) 29 (13) 55 (25) 57 (26) 65 (30) 112 (51) 59 (27) 120 (54) 132 (60)
Table 30.2-28. Type 1 Combination Lighting Contactors


30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A 200A 200A 300A 400A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A 200A 300A 400A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P,12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (20P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P)
Magnetically LatchedNon-reversing (3P Only) with or without Control Power Transformers

30A 60A 100A 200A 200A 300A 400A A A C with disconnect switch D with thermalE magnetic breaker E E 35 (16) 36 (16) 65 (30) 110 (50) 150 (68) 140 (64) 190 (86)

30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A 200A 200A 200A 300A 400A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A 200A 200A 200A 300A 400A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P) (12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) (20P) (2P, 3P) (2P, 3P) 2 3 4 2 3 4 4 9 9 4 9 9 10 10 2 3 4 2 3 9 4 4 9 9 4 9 9 10 10
Table 30.2-29. NEMA 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination Lighting Contactors


(2P, 3P) 6 (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 (20P) 8 (2P, 3P) 6 (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 (20P) 8 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 (20P) 10 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 (2P, 3P) 10 (2P, 3P) 10
Magnetically LatchedNon-reversing (3P Only) with or without Control Power Transformers

30A 60A 100A 200A 200A 300A 300A 400A 400A A A C with disconnect switch D with thermalE magnetic breaker with disconnect switch with thermalmagnetic breaker with disconnect switch with thermalmagnetic breaker 35 (16) 36 (16) 65 (30) 110 (50) 150 (68)
72 375 (170) E 160 (73) 72 425 (193) E 210 (95)

September 2011
Sheet 30 015
30.2-11
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole OnlyType ECL
Combination Lighting Contactors

Types ECL12, ECL13, ECL14 and ECL15 General Description
Catalog Number ECL12, ECL13, ECL14 and ECL15 combination lighting contactors offer convenient installation of switching and overcurrent protection in a single enclosure. Combination lighting contactors are ideally suited for industrial and commercial lighting applications or where a lighting circuit may have to be disconnected for periodic maintenance. They may also be applied on resistance heating loads.
ECL15 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for loads of 30200A when integral short-circuit protection is required. These contactors are designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contact welding. The contactors are capable of being magnetically held via a magnetic latch design using a permanent magnet. The contactor shall be operated by a RUN signal and a STOP signal preventing the contactor from switching to OFF during control circuit power failures. Electrically held combination lighting contactors are Eaton Type ECL14 (breaker) or ECL12 (fusible) or approved equal for loads of 30400A when integral short-circuit protection is required.
These contactors shall be designed to withstand the large initial inrush currents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well as non-motor (resistive) loads without contact welding. Contactors shall be capable of accepting up to eight auxiliary contactstop and/or side up to 60A and side only up to 400A. Contactors shall be capable of being operated by AC or DC control.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Features
Magnetically latched combination lighting contactors are Eatons Type
Disconnect deviceseither a Series C circuit breaker or a fusible disconnect switch Handle mechanismange mounted UL listed UL service entrance approved for NEMA 3R outdoor enclosure Extra room for modications such as a 24-hour time clock
Catalog Number Selection

Table 30.2-30. Enclosed Lighting Contactor Catalog Numbering System
EC L 12 D 1 A 3 E - X
Design L = CN35 or A202 lighting contactor C = C30CN lighting contactor Class 03 = Non-combination electrically held lighting contactor 04 = Non-combination mechanically held/magnetically latched lighting contactor 12 = Combination electrically held lighting contactor fusible disconnect 13 = Combination magnetically latched lighting contactorfusible disconnect 14 = Combination electrically held lighting contactorthermal-magnetic circuit breaker 15 = Combination magnetically latched lighting contactorthermal-magnetic circuit breaker Ampere Size A = 10A B = 20A C = 30A D = 60A E = 100A F = 200A Enclosure Types 1 = Type 1General purpose 2 = Type 3RRainproof 3 = Type 4Watertight (painted) 4 = Type 4XWatertight (304-grade stainless steel) 6 = Type 7/9Explosion proof 8 = Type 12Dust-tight 9 = Type 4XWatertight (316-grade stainless steel) A = 120/60 110/50 B = 240/60 220/50 C = 480/60 440/50 D = 600/60 550/50 E = 208/60 G = 550/50 H = 277/60 J = 208240/60 G = 300A H = 400A J = 600A Modification Codes (See PG03300001E) Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings A = None B = 30A/250V R C = 30A/600V R D = 60A/250V R E = 30A/600V R F = 100A/250V R G = 100A/600V R H = 200A/250V R A = None D = 20A E = 30A F = 60A G = 100A H = 200A J K L M N P T = 200A/600V R = 400A/250V R = 400A/600V R = 600A/250V R = 600A/600V R = 800A/600V R = By description
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Thermal-Magnetic Breaker Ratings J = 300A K = 400A L = 600A M = 800A T = By description
Number of Poles 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 = Poles required A = 10 Poles B = 12 Poles C = 20 Poles Combination Devices = Three-pole only Coil Voltage K L M P Q R S = 240/50 = 380/50 = 415/50 = 12 Vdc = 24 Vdc = 48 Vdc = 125 Vdc T = 24/60 U = 24/50 V = 32/50 W = 48/60 X = 104120/60 Y = 48/50 Z = By description
For normally closed poles, see PG03300001E. C30CN available in 30A only.
CA08104001E

Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole OnlyType ECL
Table 30.2-31. RatingsLatched ELC15 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Continuous Amperes (Enclosed) 30 60 100 200 Circuit Breaker Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 System Voltage 600 600 600 600 Control transformers: 480 to 120V control transformer 100 VA extra capacity transformer 200 VA extra capacity transformer 240 to 120V control transformer with fuse in holder 208 to 120V control transformer with fuse in holder 415 to 110V control transformer with fuse in holder 277 to 120V control transformer with fuse in holder Lightning arrester Undervoltage relay On-off pushbutton Hand-off-auto selector switch Addition of photoelectric receptacle and relay with photo cell Installed (two-wire circuit) 24-hour time clock, 120V 24-hour time clock with day omission, 120V 7-day time clock, 120V Cover plate for use in place of watertight hub on enclosure top Any Any
September 2011
Sheet 30 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.2-35. Factory Modications

Description Enclosure Used On Standard Combination
Table 30.2-32. ELC13Fusible Disconnect Switch

Continuous Amperes (Enclosed) 30 60 100 200 Fuse Clip Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 System Voltage 250, 600 250, 600 250, 600 250, 600
Table 30.2-33. RatingsElectrically-held ELC14 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect

Continuous Amperes (Enclosed) 30 60 100 200 300 400
Circuit Breaker Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 300 400 System Voltage 600 600 600 600 600 600
UL ballast and resistive ratings only.
Table 30.2-34. ELC12Fusible Disconnect Switch

Continuous Amperes (Enclosed) 30 60 100 200 300 400
Fuse Clip Ampere Rating 30 60 100 200 300 400 System Voltage 250, 600 250, 600 250, 600 250, 600 250, 600 250, 600
UL ballast and resistive ratings only.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 017
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Motor StartersElectromechanical

Freedom LineGeneral Description
30.3-1
NEMA Motor Starters Freedom Series
Features
Freedom NEMA

Standard: Designed to meet or exceed UL, NEMA and CSA UL listed: UL File #E1491, Guide #NLDXOpen; UL File #E176513 Enclosed Combination Motor Controllers; UL File #E19224Enclosed Non-Combination Motor Controllers; UL File #E195239Enclosed Power Conversion Equipment CSA certied: CSA File #LR353, Class #321104 Open and NEMA 1 Enclosed
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
NEMA AN16DN0AB NEMA Size 1
General Description
The Freedom Series starters and contactors listed in this catalog feature a compact, space-saving design and high strength, impact and temperature-resistant insulating materials. Starters and contactors are available in the NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) style. The NEMA devices are sized based on traditional NEMA classications.
Adjustable bimetallic ambient compensated overload relays with interchangeable heater packsavailable in three basic sizes, covering applications up to 900 hpreducing the number of different contactor/overload relay combinations that have to be stocked. Fixed heater overloads are optional Electronic overload relay (C440) available as a stand-alone unit and assembled with a Freedom contactor A full line of snap-on accessories top and side mounted auxiliary contacts, solid-state and pneumatic timers, etc. Straight-through wiringline lugs at top, load lugs at bottom Horizontal or vertical mounting on upright panel for application freedom Screw type power terminals have captive, backed-out self-lifting pressure plates with screws reduced wiring time Accessible terminals for easy wiring. Optional ngerproof shields available to prevent electrical shock Top located coil terminals convenient and readily accessible. 45 mm contactor magnet coils have three terminals, permitting either top or diagonal wiringeasy to replace European or U.S. style starters or contactors without changing wiring layout Designed to meet or exceed NEMA, UL, CSA, VDE, BS and other international standards and listings American engineeringbuilt by Eaton, using the latest in statistical process control methods to produce high quality, reliable products Sized based on standard NEMA classications Easy coil change and inspectable/ replaceable contacts Available in open and NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosures
Certied Type 2 Coordination

Eatons Freedom Series NEMA starters are now UL certied to achieve IEC 947 Type 2 coordination against 100,000A short-circuit fault currents. Any brand of properly selected fuse can be used. Type 2 coordination means that the starter will be suitable for further use following a short-circuit fault.
Short-Circuit Protection
Fuses and inverse-time circuit breakers may be selected per Article 430, Part D of the National Electrical Code to protect motor branch circuits from fault conditions. If higher ratings or settings are required to start the motor, do not exceed the maximum as listed in Exception No. 2, Article 430.52.
CA08104001E
30.3-2 Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Motor StartersElectromechanical

Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA Contactors and Starters
September 2011
Sheet 30 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
NEMA Sizes 00-8

Table 30.3-1. AC Coil Data
NEMA Motor Sizes Voltage 00 200 230 460 575 200 230 460 575 200 230 460 575 200 230 460 575 200 230 460 575 200 230 460 575 200 230 460 575 Maximum P.U. Volts hp Rating Cold Hot 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 3 3 5 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 10 15 25 25 25 30 50 50 40 50 100 100 75 100 200 200 74% 78% P.U. VAR 64 VA 80 Sealed Watts VAR 49 7.1 VA 7.5 D.O. Volts Watts Cold 2.4 45% Hot 46% Maximum Operation P.U. D.O. Rate Operations/Hour Time ms Time ms 12,000 12 12
74%
78%
78
100
65
9.2
10
3.1
45%
46%
12,000
12
12
74%
78%
210
230
95
27
28
7.8
49%
50%
12,000
20
14
74%
78%
210
230
95
27
28
7.8
49%
50%
12,000
20
14
72%
76%
374
390
112
48
49.8
13
50%
52%
7200
14
11
29 30 31 32 33 34
4
73%
76%
1132
1158
240
96
100
27.2
54%
56%
2400
28
14
75%
77%
1132
1158
240
96
100
27.2
63%
64%
2400
25
13
General Coil Data

Coil Offeringtape wound: NEMA Sizes 000 UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B) Coil Offeringencapsulated: NEMA Sizes 13 UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A) Coil Offeringencapsulated: NEMA Sizes 45 UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F) Operational Limits: 85% to 110% of rated voltageAC 80% to 110% of rated voltageDC
Table 30.3-2. Coil Data Notes

Description P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken from closing of the coil circuit to main contact touch. Dropout time is the average time taken from opening of the coil circuit to main contact separation. Coil data with a hot coil.
D.O.
All data is based on a standard contactor with no auxiliary devices and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil. Coil data has a 5% range depending on the application, therefore specic data may vary.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Cold Coil data with a cold coil. Hot
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 019

Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA Contactors and Starters
30.3-3
Table 30.3-3. DC Coil Data

NEMA Sizes 00 and 0 Motor Voltage 12 24 48 120 12 24 48 120 12 24 48 120 24 48 120 240 P.U. Amperes 6.4 3.2 1.6 0.64 15.4 6.2 2.9 1.1 24 12 6.1 2.5 18 9.0 3.3 1.7 Watts 76.8 76.8 76.8 76.8 126 88.4 76.2 67.3 293 288 295 298 400 400 450 440 Sealed Volts (Hot) Amperes 80% 80% 80% 80% 68% 60% 56% 53% 65% 61% 62% 61% 67% 67% 65% 64% 0.28 0.14 0.07 0.028 0.42 0.21 0.11 0.041 0.40 0.20 0.097 0.038 0.22 0.11 0.05 0.02 Watts 3.36 3.36 3.36 3.36 4.98 4.96 5.04 4.87 4.84 4.75 4.67 4.57 5.3 5.2 5.4 4.9 D.O. Volts (Hot) 60% 60% 60% 60% 30% 29% 28% 29% 23% 22% 22% 22% 25% 25% 28% 26% P.U. Time ms 22 22 22 22 21 20 20 20 39 38 37 37 53 49 56 49 D.O. Time ms 17 17 17 17 12 13 14 16 14 14 14 16 14 16 19 21 Maximum Operation Mechanical Rate Operations/Hour Life Millions 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 2400 2400 2400 2400 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
1 and 2
4 and 5
General Coil Data
Table 30.3-4. Coil Data Notes

Description P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken from closing of the coil circuit to main contact touch. Dropout time is the average time taken from opening of the coil circuit to main contact separation. Coil data with a hot coil.
Coil Offeringtape wound: NEMA Sizes 000 UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B) Coil Offeringencapsulated: NEMA Sizes 13 UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A) Coil Offeringencapsulated: NEMA Sizes 45 UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F) Operational Limits: 85% to 110% of rated voltageAC 80% to 110% of rated voltageDC
D.O.
All data is based on a standard contactor with no auxiliary devices and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil. Coil data has a 5% range depending on the application, therefore specic data may vary.
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Cold Coil data with a cold coil. Hot
CA08104001E

Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA
Table 30.3-5. SpecicationsSizes 003
Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size CN15A NEMA Size 00 Conguration Number of poles Auxiliary contacts, standard Add-on auxiliary contacts Frame size Maximum voltage rating Continuous ampere ratings (I) Maximum horsepower (hp) Single-phase 115V 230V Three-phase 200V 230V 460V 575V Coil operating range % of rated voltage Operating temperature Maximum operating altitude in feet (m) Mechanical life Electrical life (480V/60 Hz) AC-3 AC-4 Wire range Power terminals 2, 3, 4 4th pole NO (1) Top (4) or side (4) 45 mm 600 Vac 9A 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 20,000,000 4,000,000 90,000 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 7 CN15B NEMA Size 0 2, 3 Side NO (1) Top (4) or side (3) 45 mm 600 Vac 18A 1 2 3 3 5 5 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 20,000,000 3,000,000 85,000 816 stranded, 1014 solid Cu 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 15 CN15D NEMA Size 1 2, 3, 4, 5 Side NO (1) Top (4) or side (3) 65 mm 600 Vac 27A 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 10,000,000 5,000,000 200,000 814 stranded or solid Cu 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 20 CN15G NEMA Size 2 2, 3, 4, 5 Side NO (1) Top (4) or side (3) 65 mm 600 Vac 45A 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 10,000,000 3,500,000 62,000 214 (upper) and/or 614 (lower) stranded or solid Cu 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 40 (148 AWG) 45 (64 AWG) 50 (3 AWG) CN15K NEMA Size 3
September 2011
Sheet 30 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2, 3 Side NO (1) Left side (4) or right side (3) 90 mm 600 Vac 90A 7-1/2 15 25 30 50 50 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 6,000,000 1,700,000 80,000 1/014 Cu
Control terminals
32 33
1216 stranded 1214 solid Cu 35 (1410 AWG) 40 (8 AWG) 45 (64 AWG) 50 (31/0 AWG)
Power terminal torque Line and loadlb-in
Auxiliary contact rating
A600, P300
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 021

30.3-5
Table 30.3-6. SpecicationsSizes 45

Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size CN15N NEMA Size 4 Conguration Number of poles Auxiliary contacts, standard Add-on auxiliary contacts Frame size Maximum voltage rating Continuous ampere ratings (i) Maximum horsepower (hp) Single-phase 115V 230V Three-phase 200V 230V 460V 575V Coil operating range % of rated voltage Operating temperature Maximum operating altitude in feet (m) Mechanical life Electrical life (480V/60 Hz) AC-3 AC-4 Wire range Power terminals Control terminals Power terminal torque Line and loadlb-in Auxiliary contact rating 2, 3 Side NO (1) Left side (3) or right side (4) 180 mm 600 Vac 135A 40 50 100 100 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 5,000,000 800,000 70,000 Open3/08 Cu; Enclosed250 kcmil6 Cu/Al 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 200 A600, P300 CN15S NEMA Size 5 2, 3 Side NO (1) Left side (3) or right side (4) 180 mm 600 Vac 270A 75 100 200 200 15% to +10% 20 to 65C 6000 (1828) 5,000,000 500,000 34,000 750 kcmil2 or (2) 250 kcmil3/0 Cu/Al 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 550
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Table 30.3-7. 380V, 50 Hz StartersMaximum hp Ratings
Description NEMA Size 1 2 25 3 50 4 75 5 150 6 300
September 2011
Sheet 30 022
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.3-12. Wire (75C) Sizes AWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 002 Open and Enclosed
Terminal Wire Size Catalog Number
Maximum hp
10
Table 30.3-8. Motor FLA Current Ranges

Description NEMA Size 1 1.15 to 1.25 S.F. 1.0 S.F.
Power TerminalsLoadCu Only (Stranded or Solid)

3 4 9.90135.00 5 6 32A 75A 45A
146 AWG 142 AWG 146 AWG
C306DN38 C306GN38 C396A_
0.473.81 3.1527.00 3.1545.00 9.9090.00
38.30270.00 38.30540.00
0.514.14 3.4327.00 3.4345.00 10.8090.00 10.80135.00 41.70270.00 41.70540.00
Minimum per NEC. Maximum wire size: Sizes 000 to 8 AWG and Sizes 12 to 2 AWG.
Size 1 Lower Current Range for motor hp range 1/4 hp to 2 hp at 460V.
Table 30.3-9. Wire (75C) SizesAWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 002Open and Enclosed
NEMA Size Cu Only #12#16 stranded, #12#14 solid #8#16 stranded, #10#14 solid #8#14 stranded or solid #3#14 (upper) and/or #6#14 (lower) stranded or solid
Table 30.3-13. Wire (75C) Sizes AWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 38 Open and Enclosed
NEMA Size 3 4 5 Wire Size 1014 AWG Al Cu Open#8#3/0 Cu Enclosed#6 250 kcmilAl Cu 750 kcmil#2 or (2) #3/0 250 kcmilAl Cu
Power TerminalsLine
00 0 1 2
C306 Power TerminalsLine and Load
Two compartment box lug.
Table 30.3-10. Overload Relay UL/CSA Contact Ratings Control Circuit

AC Volts 120V 30 3 5 15 1.5 2.5 240V 15 1.5 5 7.5 0.75 2.5 480V 7.5 0.75 5 3.375 0.375 2.5 600V 6 0.6 5 3 0.3 2.5
NC Contact B600
Make and break amperes Break amperes Continuous amperes
Table 30.3-14. C306 Control Terminals Cu Only

Description (2) #12#16 stranded (2) #12#14 solid
NO Contact C600
Make and break amperes Break amperes Continuous amperes
DC ratings cover Freedom Series coils only.
Table 30.3-11. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A

Description Specication 45 mm 55 mm
Capacity
Load terminals Terminal capacity Tightening torque 1210 AWG (46 mm2) 86 AWG (616 mm2) 2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm) 2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm) 61 AWG (1650 mm2) 2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals Terminal capacity 2 x (1812) AWG Tightening torque 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm) Voltages Insulation voltage U i (three-phase) Insulation voltage U i (control) Rated impulse withstand voltage Overvoltage category/pollution degree 690 Vac 500 Vac 6000 Vac III/3
2 x (1812) AWG 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm) 690 Vac 500 Vac 6000 Vac III/3
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 023

Freedom LineTechnical Data
30.3-7
Electrical LifeAC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories

Life Load Curves
Eatons Freedom Series NEMA contactors have been designed and manufactured for superior life performance in any worldwide application. All testing has been based on requirements as found in NEMA and UL standards and conducted by Eaton. Actual application life may vary depending on environmental conditions and application duty cycle.
100,000,000
22 23
10,000,000 Operations
24 25
1,000,000 Size 00
Size 2
Size 0
Size 1
Size 3
Size 4
Utilization Categories
AC-1Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, such as resistance furnaces and heating. AC-2Starting of slip-ring motors. AC-3Squirrel cage motors; starting, switching off motors during running.
Size 5
26 27
1000
100,000 1
Break Amperes NEMA AC-3 Load Life, Sizes 00 5, 480 V 60 Hz
9 10
18
27
45
90 135 100
270
28 29
100,000,000
10,000,000 Operations
AC-4Squirrel cage motors; starting, plugging, inching or jogging.

Note: AC-3 tests are conducted at rated device currents and AC-4 tests are conducted at six times rated device currents. All tests have been run at 460V, 60 Hz.
30
1,000,000
31 32
Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
Contactor Choice
Decide what utilization category your application is and choose the appropriate curve Locate the intersection of the life-load curve of the appropriate contactor with the applications operational current (Ie), as found on the horizontal axis Read the estimated contact life along the vertical axis in number of operational cycles
100,000
33
10,000
10,000 1
54 108 153 270 540 822 1620 100 1000 Break Amperes NEMA AC-4 Load Life, Sizes 00 5, 480 V 60 Hz 10
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 30.3-1. AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories
CA08104001E

Freedom LineProduct Selection
September 2011
Sheet 30 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 30.3-15. NEMA Freedom Line Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
E C N 22 2 1 A A F Design N = Freedom NEMA 2 = A200 Class 01 = Non-reversing contactorthree-pole Non-reversing contactortwo-pole Non-reversing contactorfour-pole Non-reversing contactorfive-pole 02 = Reversing contactorthree-pole 05 = Non-combination non-reversing starter 06 = Non-combination reversing starter 07 = Non-combination non-reversing starter with CPT 08 = Non-combination single-phase non-reversing starter 16 = Combination non-reversing starterfusible disconnect Combination non-reversing starternon-fusible disconnect Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter fusible/non-fusible disconnect 17 = Combination reversing starterfusible disconnect Combination reversing starternon-fusible disconnect 18 = Combination reversing starterfusible disconnect with CPT Combination reversing starternon-fusible disconnect with CPT 22 = Combination non-reversing startercircuit breaker Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter circuit breaker 23 = Combination reversing startercircuit breaker 24 = Combination non-reversing startercircuit breaker with CPT NEMA Size A = Size 00 0 = Size 0 1 = Size 1 2 = Size 2 3 = Size 3 4 = Size 4 5 = Size 5 6 = Size 6 7 = Size 7 8 = Size 8 9 = Size 9 Modification Codes (See PG03300001E)
Cover Control Type 1 non-combination All others E22 style combination (Contact Eaton) Contactors 3 = Three-pole Coil Voltage and/or Control Transformers See Table 30.3-16 and Table 30.3-17 Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings A = None B = 30A/250V R C = 30A/600V R D = 60A/250V R E = 60A/600V R F = 100A/250V R A = None B = 3A C = 7A D = 15A E = 30A F = 50A W = 70A G = 100A G = 100A/600V R H = 200A/250V R J = 200A/600V R K = 400A/250V R L = 400A/600V R M = 600A/250V R H J K L M N P Q = 150A = 250A = 400A = 600A = 800A = 1000A = 1200A = 2000A N = 600A/600V R P = 800A/600V L Q = 1200A/600V L R = 1600A/600V L S = 2000A/600V L T = By description R = 3000A T = By description 5 = 3A 6 = 7A 7 = 15A 8 = 30A 9 = 50A I = 100A
HMCP/E or Breaker Ratings
Enclosure Type 1 = Type 1General purpose 2 = Type 3RRainproof 3 = Type 4Watertight (painted steel) 4 = Type 4XWatertight (304-Grade stainless steel) 5 = Type 4XCorrosion (nonmetallic) 6 = Type 7/9Bolted hazardous location 7 = Type 7/9Threaded hazardous location 8 = Type 12Dust-tight 9 = Type 4X316-Grade stainless steel
Use for Sizes 03, HMCP 600V applications only.
Table 30.3-16. Magnetic Coil Codes (System Voltage)

Code A B C D E G H J
Table 30.3-17. Control Power Transformer Codes (System Voltage)

Magnet Coil 24/50 32/50 48/60 104120/60 48/50 By description Code B C D E H L M Q R S T U V W X Y Z Primary 240/480220/440 wired for 240V 240/480220/440 wired for 480V 600/60550/50 208/60 277/60 380/50 415/50 208/60 240/480220/440 wired for 240V 240/480220/440 wired for 480V 600/60 277/60 380/50 415/50 240/480/600 wired for 480V 240/480/600 wired for 480V By description Secondary 120/60110/50 120/60110/50 120/60110/50 120/60 120/60 110/50 110/50 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 120 24
Magnet Coil 120/60 110/50 240/60 220/50 460/60 440/50 575/60 550/50 208/60 550/50 277/60 208240/60
Code K L M P Q R S T
Magnet Coil 240/50 380/50 415/50 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 24/60
Code U V W X Y Z
When control power transformer modication codes (C1C11) are used or when starter class includes CPT (i.e., ECN07, 18) see Table 30.3-17 for system voltage code.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 025

30.3-9

Table 30.3-18. Type 1 Freedom Contactors
NEMA Size (Poles) Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
Table 30.3-19. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Contactors

NEMA Size (Poles) Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
Table 30.3-20. Type 1 Freedom Non-combination Starters

NEMA Size Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 15 (6.8) 3 15 (6.8) 3 16 (7.3) 3 16.2 (7.4) 4 42 (19) 4 54 (25) 10 146 (66) F1E 385 (175) F1E F1E F1E
Non-reversing Contactors without Control Power Transformers

00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 00 (2P, 3P, 4P) with top adders 0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 0 (2P, 3P, 4P) with top adders 0 (5P) 1 (2P, 3P) 1 (2P, 3P) with top adders 1 (4P, 5P) 2 (2P, 3P, 4P 5P) 3 (2P, 3P) 4 (2P, 3P) 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 4 4 10 F1E F1E F1E F1E 5.25 (2.4) 7.3 (3.3) 5.25 (2.4) 7.3 (3.3) 7.3 (3.3) 7.9 (3.6) 11 (5.0) 8.3 (3.8) 8.5 (3.9) 35 (16) 47 (21) 113 (51) 325 (148)

Non-reversing Contactors without Control Power Transformers

00 0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 3 (2P, 3P) 4 (2P, 3P) 5 6 7 8 9 5 5 5 5 8 8 10 F1E F1E F1E F1E 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 15.5 (7.0) 45 (20) 56 (25) 140 (64) 385 (175)

Non-reversing Starters without Control Power Transformers

00 00 0 0 1 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 with top adders/SSOL with top adders/SSOL with top adders/SSOL 1 7 (3.2) 2 10 (4.5) 1 7.1 (3.2) 2 10 (4.5) 1 7.9 (3.6) 3 11.5 (5.2) 2 8.5 (3.9) 4 35 (16) 4 47 (21) 10 139 (63) F1E 360 (163) F1E F1E F1E
Non-reversing Contactors with Control Power Transformers

00 0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 3 (2P, 3P) 4 (2P, 3P) 5 6 7 8 9 5 5 6 6 8 8 10 F1E F1E F1E F1E 18 (8.2) 18 (8.2) 19 (8.6) 19.5 (8.9) 52 (24) 63 (29) 147 (67) 405 (184)

Non-reversing Starters with Control Power Transformers

00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Non-reversing Contactors with Control Power Transformers

00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 00 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) with top adders 0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) with top adders 1 (2P, 3P) 1 (2P, 3P) with top adders 1 (4P, 5P) 2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 3 (2P, 3P) 4 (2P, 3P) 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 4 4 10 F1E F1E F1E F1E 12 (5.4) 15 (6.8) 12 (5.4) 15 (6.8) 12.2 (5.5) 12.5 (5.7) 12.6 (5.7) 12.8 (5.8) 40 (18) 52 (24) 120 (54) 335 (152)

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors with or without Control Power Transformers

00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 6 6 6 8 9 10 F1E F1E F1E F2E
18 (8.2) 18 (8.2) 19 (8.6) 19 (8.6) 47 (21) 69 (31) 170 (77) 495 (225)

Reversing Starters without Control Power Transformers

00 0 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 8 (3.6) 2 8 (3.6) 3 11 (5) 3 13 (5.9) 3 13.4 (6.1) 3 15 (6.8) 4 43 (20) 9 65 (30) 10 165 (75) F1E 450 (204) F1E F2E F2E
with top adders with top adders
Consult factory.
Three-Pole Reversing Contactors without Control Power Transformers

00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.

7.8 (3.5) 8 (3.6) 11 (5.0) 12 (5.4) 67 (30) 154 (70) 170 (77) 425 (193)

Reversing Starters with Control Power Transformers

00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2 3 3 4 4 10 F1E F1E F1E F2E
with top adders with top adders
3 15 (6.8) 3 15 (6.8) 3 17 (7.7) 3 19 (8.6) 4 50 (23) 9 72 (33) 10 172 (78) F1E 495 (225) F1E F2E F2E
Consult factory.
Consult factory.


Table 30.3-21. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Non-combination Starters
NEMA Size / IEC Frame Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
September 2011
Sheet 30 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.3-22. Type 1 Freedom Combination Starters

NEMA Size (Device) Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
Table 30.3-24. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Combination Starters

NEMA Size (Device) Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing Starters without Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 14.3 (6.5) 5 15.3 (6.9) 7 16 (7.3) 8 46 (21) 8 60 (27) 10 150 (68) F1E 415 (188) F1E F1E F1E
Non-reversing with and without Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 37 (17) A 38 (17) A 39 (18) C 72 (33) (HMCP) C 90 (41) (Disconnect switch) D 150 (68) E 180 (82) F1E 435 (197) F2E F2E F2E
Non-reversing with and without Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 A A A C C D E F1E F2E F2E F2E 37 (17) 38 (17) 39 (18) 72 (33) 90 (41) 150 (68) 180 (82) 435 (197)

(HMCP) (Disconnect switch)
Non-reversing Starters with Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 18 (8.2) 6 19 (8.6) 6 20 (9) 8 53 (24) 8 67 (30) 10 157 (71) F1E F1E F1E F1E
Reversing with and without Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B 42 (19) B 43 (20) B 44 (20) C 84 (38) D 173 (79) F1E F1E 550 (250) F2E F2E

Reversing with and without Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B B B C D E F1E F2E F2E
42 (19) 43 (20) 44 (20) 84 (38) 173 (79) 550 (250)

Reversing Starters with or without Control Power Transformers

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Non-reversingOversized
012
Non-reversingOversized
B 44 (20) 012
7 18.5 (8.4) 7 19.5 (8.9) 7 21 (10) 8 48 (22) 9 72 (33) 10 175 (79) F1E 525 (238) F1E F2E F2E Consult factory.
44 (20)
Consult factory.
Consult factory.
Table 30.3-23. Type 1 Freedom Non-reversing Combination StartersNarrow Enclosure

NEMA Size Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 35 (16) 36 (16) 37 (17)
NEMA 1 Enclosed
012 I I I
NEMA 12 Enclosed
012 012
NEMA 12 Enclosed with Safety Door Interlock

September 2011
Sheet 30 027

C441 Motor Insight
30.3-11
C441 Motor Insight
One external remote reset terminal Trip status indicator Thermal overload Jam/stall protection Current level alarming Current imbalance Current phase loss Ground fault Phase reversal
Motor Protection

Provides superior protection of motors and pumps before catastrophic failure occurs Increases protability with greater process uptime and throughput, reduced costs per repair, reduced energy consumption and extended equipment life Adjustments to overload conguration can be made at any time
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Safety
IP 20 rated terminal blocks Terminal blocks are set back from the display to reduce operator shock hazard Remote display (optional) does not require that the operator open the panel to congure the device

C441 Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relay
Load Protection
Undercurrent Low power (kW) High power (kW)
General Description
Eatons C441 Motor Insight, the rst product in the intelligent power control solutions family, is a highly congurable motor, load and line protection device with power monitoring, diagnostics and exible communications, allowing the customer to save energy, optimize their maintenance schedules and congure greater system protection, thus reducing overall costs and downtime. C441 Motor Insight is available in either a line-powered or 120 Vac control powered design, capable of monitoring voltages up to 660 Vac. Each of these units is available in a 19A or a 590A FLA model. With external CTs, C441 Motor Insight can protect motors up to 540A FLA. Available add-on accessories include communication modules for Modbus, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS, all with I/O options. For ease-of-use and operator safety, C441 Motor Insight offers a remote display that mounts easily with two 30 mm knockouts.
Line Protection
Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage imbalance Voltage phase loss
Flexibility

Currentaverage and phase rms Voltageaverage and phase rms Powermotor kW Power factor Frequency Thermal capacity Run hours Ground fault current Current imbalance % Voltage imbalance % Motor starts Motor run hours
Communications modules Offered in a variety of congurations External snap-on modules provide support for multiple communications protocols Advanced power, voltage and current monitoring capabilities Communications modules and remote display can be used simultaneously Highly congurable fault and reset characteristics for numerous applications Fully programmable isolated fault and auxiliary relays
Ease of Use
Bright LED display with easy-tounderstand setting and references Powered from line voltage or 120 Vac control power Remote display powered from base unit Full word descriptions and units on user interface
Options
Type 1, 12 remote display Type 3R remote display kit Communication modules Modbus Modbus with I/O DeviceNet with I/O PROFIBUS with I/O Modbus TCP with I/O (contact product line) EtherNet/IP with I/O (contact product line)

Features
Size/Range
Broad FLA range of 1540A Selectable trip class (530) Four operating voltage options Line-powered from 240 Vac, 480 Vac, 600 Vac Control-powered from 120 Vac

Motor Control
Benets
Reliability and Improved Uptime
Two output relays One B300 Form C fault relay and one B300 ground fault shunt relay Other relay congurations are available, including one Form A and one Form B SPST (fault and auxiliary relays) allowing programmable isolated relay behavior and unique voltages
Advanced diagnostics allows for quick and accurate identication of the root source of a motor, pump or power quality fault; reducing troubleshooting time and the loss of productivity, reducing repeat faults due to misdiagnosis, and increasing process output and protability
cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508 UL 1053 applicable sections for ground fault detection CSA certied (Class 3211-02) CE NEMA IEC EN 60947-4-1 RoHS
CA08104001E

C441 Motor Insight
September 2011
Sheet 30 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Product Selection
Table 30.3-25. C441 Motor Insight
Power Source 240 Vac (170264) 480 Vac (323528) 600 Vac (489660) 120 Vac (93.5132) Monitoring Range 170264 Vac 323528 Vac 489660 Vac 170660 Vac Current Range 19A 590A 19A 590A 19A 590A 19A 590A Catalog Number C441BA C441BB C441CA C441CB C441DA C441DB C4410109NOUI C4410590NOUI
Accessories
Table 30.3-27. Communication Modules
Description I/O Catalog Number C441M C441N C441P C441K C441L C441S C441Q C441R C441T
Modbus
Modbus communication module Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT None 120 Vac 24 Vdc
DeviceNet
DeviceNet communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac 24 Vdc
PROFIBUS
Table 30.3-26. C441 Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule
Catalog Number Motor FLA No. of No. of CT Loops Conductors Multiplier Through Setting CT Primary 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 External CT Kit Catalog Number
PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT
120 Vac 24 Vdc
EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP

Ethernet-based communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac 24 Vdc
Current Range: 590A

C441_B and 522.5A 3 C4410590NOUI 6.6730A 2 1045A 2090A 1 0 1 0
Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside

C441 Motor Insight offers several accessories for the customers ease of use and safety: Types 1 and 12 remote display Type 3R remote display kit Mounting plate adapter

Current Range: 19A

C441_A and 15A C4410109NOUI 29A
60135A 0 120270A 0 240540A 0
150(150:5) C441CTKIT150 300(300:5) C441CTKIT300 600(600:5) C441CTKIT600
Features and Benets

Remote display unit: Same user interface as the overload relay Enhanced operator safetyoperator can congure the overload without opening the enclosure door Type 3R kit mounts with standard 30 mm holes Mounting plate for retrot in existing installations
Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required. Operating Voltage Codes: Code B C D <empty> Voltage 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 120 Vac control power
Table 30.3-28. Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside

Description Remote display Types 1 and 12 (UL 508) Type 3R kit for remote display (UL 508) Conversion plate Catalog Number C4411 C4413 C441CMP1
Any manufacturers CTs may be used.
Communication Cables
The remote display requires a communication cable to connect to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay: Table 30.3-29. Communication Cable Lengths
Length in Inches (meters) 9.8 (0.25) 39.4 (1.0) 78.7 (2.0) 118.1 (3.0) Catalog Number D77E-QPIP25 D77E-QPIP100 D77E-QPIP200 D77E-QPIP300
Table 30.3-30. Current Transformer Kits

Description Three 150:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight Three 300:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight Three 600:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight Catalog Number C441CTKIT150 C441CTKIT300 C441CTKIT600
For more information about technical data and specications as well as dimensions, see Volume 5 Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Section 31.
September 2011
Sheet 30 029

30.3-13
Size/Range
Broad FLA range (0.331500A) Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30) Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and DP contactors Most compact electronic overload in its class
Flexibility

Motor Control
Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault (NC) contacts Test/Trip button

Motor Protection
General Description
Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL) is the most compact, high-featured, economical product in its class. Designed on a global platform, the new EOL covers the entire power control spectrum, including NEMA, IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA and DP versions are offered with the C440 designation while the IEC offering has the XT designation. The electronic design provides reliable, accurate and value-driven protection and communications capabilities in a single compact device. It is the exible choice for any application requiring easy-to-use, reliable protection. Eaton has a long history of innovations and product development in motor control and protection, including both traditional NEMA, as well as IEC control. It was from this experience that the C440 was developed, delivering new solutions to meet todays demands. C440 is a self-powered electronic overload relay available up to 100A as a self-contained unit. With external CTs, C440 can protect motor up to 1500 FLA. Available add-on accessories include remote reset capability and communication modules with I/O for DeviceNet, PROFIBUS and Modbus.
Thermal overload Phase loss Selectable (ON/OFF) phase imbalance Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault

Available with NEMA, IEC and DP contactors Improves return on investment by reducing inventory carrying costs with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and selectable trip class Design incorporates built-in ground fault protection, thus eliminating the need for separate CTs and modules Flexible communication with optional I/O enables easy integration into plant management systems for remote monitoring and control Available as an open component and in enclosed control and motor control center assemblies
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Individual phase currents rms Average three-phase current rms Thermal memory Fault indication (overload, phase loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
User Interface

Large FLA selection dial Trip status indicator Operating mode LED DIP switch selectable trip class, phase imbalance and ground fault Selectable Auto/Manual reset
Safety
IP 20 rated terminal blocks Available in Eatons industry-leading FlashGard MCCs Tested to the highest industry standards, such as UL, CSA, CE and IEC RoHS compliant

Feature Options
Remote reset 120 Vac 24 Vac 24 Vdc Tamper-proof cover Communications modules Modbus RTU RS-485 DeviceNet with I/O PROFIBUS with I/O Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010) EtherNet/IP (planned) Smartwire (planned)

Benets
Reliability and Improved Uptime
C440 provides the users with peace of mind knowing that their assets are protected with the highest level of motor protection and communication capability in its class Extends the life of plant assets with selectable motor protection features such as trip class, phase imbalance and ground fault Protects against unnecessary downtime by discovering changes in your system (line/load) with remote monitoring capabilities Status LED provides added assurance that valuable assets are protected by indicating the overload operational status
UL CSA CE NEMA IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1) RoHS ATEX directive 94/9/EC Equipment Group 2, Category 2
Features

Reliable, accurate, electronic motor protection Easy to select, install and maintain Compact size Flexible, intelligent design Global product offering available with NEMA, IEC and DP power control
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 030
22 23 24 25 26
Product Selection
Table 30.3-31. XT Electronic Overload Relays
For Use with XT Contactor Frame B For Use with Contactor XTCE007B, XTCE009B, XTCE012B, XTCE015B XTCE018C, XTCE025C, XTCE032C Overload Range (Amps) 0.331.65 15 420 0.331.65 15 420 945 D XTCE040D, XTCE050D, XTCE065D, XTCE072D XTCE080F, XTCE095F, XTCE115G, XTCE150G, XTCE170G XTCE007B, XTCE009B, XTCE012B, XTCE015B XTCE018C, XTCE025C, XTCE032C 945 20100 2 4 6 98 96 20100 97 95 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 45 mm 55 mm NO-NC 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 45 mm NO-NC Contact Sequence Frame Size 45 mm Auxiliary Contact Conguration NO-NC Type Catalog Number XTOE1P6BCS XTOE005BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE1P6CCS XTOE005CCS XTOE020CCS XTOE045CCS XTOE045DCS XTOE100DCS
For Direct Mount to XT Contactors

97 95 ZEB12-1,65 ZEB12-5 ZEB12-20 ZEB32-1,65 ZEB32-5 ZEB32-20 ZEB32-45 ZEB65-45 ZEB65-100
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
D B F, G
2 4 6 98 96
With Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors

0.331.65 15 420 0.331.65 15 420 945 XTCE040D, XTCE050D, XTCE065D, XTCE072D XTCE080F, XTCE095F, XTCE115G, XTCE150G, XTCE170G 945 20100 2 4 6 98 96 20100 97 95 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 45 mm 55 mm NO-NC 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 45 mm NO-NC 97 95 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1.65-GF ZEB12-5-GF ZEB12-20-GF ZEB32-1.65-GF ZEB32-5-GF ZEB32-20-GF ZEB32-45-GF ZEB65-45-GF ZEB65-100-GF XTOE1P6BGS XTOE005BGS XTOE020BGS XTOE1P6CGS XTOE005CGS XTOE020CGS XTOE045CGS XTOE045DGS XTOE100DGS
F, G
2 4 6 98 96
Table 30.3-32. XT Electronic Overload Relays for use with Large Frame XT Contactors (LR)
Use CTs and 1-5A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately). XT Contactor Frame L, M For Use with IEC Contactor Ampere Range (AC-3) 185500A CT Range (Amps) Description CT Kit Catalog Number ZEB-XCT300 Terminal Size Overload Relay Catalog Number XTOE005CCSS Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number XTOE005CGSS
60300
300: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated lugs 600: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes 1000: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes 1500: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes
750 kcmil (2) 250 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (2) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (3) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (4) 750 kcmil 1/0 Cu/Al
M, N
300820A
120600
ZEB-XCT600
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
5801000A
2001000
ZEB-XCT1000
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
1600A
3001500
ZEB-XCT1500
XTOE005CCSS
XTOE005CGSS
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 031

30.3-15
Table 30.3-33. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount

Overload Range (Amps) Frame Size 45 mm Contact Sequence Type Overload Relay Catalog Number XTOE1P6CCSS XTOE005CCSS XTOE020CCSS XTOE045CCSS XTOE100GCSS Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number XTOE1P6CGSS XTOE005CGSS XTOE020CGSS XTOE045CGSS XTOE100GGSS
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Overload Relay
0.331.65 15 420 945 20100 55 mm 2 4 6 98 96 1 3 5 97 95 ZEB32-1.65/KK ZEB32-5/KK ZEB32-20/KK ZEB32-45/KK ZEB150-100/KK
Table 30.3-34. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to Freedom Series Contactors
For Use with Freedom NEMA Contactor Size 00 For Use with Contactor CN15AN3_B Overload Range (Amps) 0.331.65 15 420 0 CN15BN3_B 0.331.65 15 420 1 CN15DN3_B 0.331.65 15 420 945 2 CN15GN3_B 15 420 945 3
Standard Feature Set Catalog Number C440A1A1P6SF00 C440A1A005SF00 C440A1A020SF00 C440A1A1P6SF0 C440A1A005SF0 C440A1A020SF0 C440A1A1P6SF1 C440A1A005SF1 C440A1A020SF1 C440A1A045SF1 C440A1A005SF2 C440A1A020SF2 C440A1A045SF2 C440B1A100SF3
Standard Feature Set with Ground Fault Catalog Number C440A2A1P6SF00 C440A2A005SF00 C440A2A020SF00 C440A2A1P6SF0 C440A2A005SF0 C440A2A020SF0 C440A2A1P6SF1 C440A2A005SF1 C440A2A020SF1 C440A2A045SF1 C440A2A005SF2 C440A2A020SF2 C440A2A045SF2 C440B2A100SF3
CN15KN3_
20100
CN15 contactor listed is non-reversing with a 120 Vac coil. For more options, see Volume 5Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 33, Section 33.1.
Table 30.3-35. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Use with NEMA Contactors Sizes 48
Use CTs and 1-5A C440 overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately). For Use with NEMA Contactor Size 4 and 5 CT Range (Amps) 60300 Description 300: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes 600: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes 1000: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes 1500: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass-through holes CT Kit Catalog Number ZEB-XCT300 Terminal Size 750 kcmil (2) 250 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (2) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (3) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al (4) 750 kcmil 1/0 Cu/Al Overload Relay Catalog Number C440A1A005SAX Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number C440A2A005SAX
34 35
120600
ZEB-XCT600
C440A1A005SAX
C440A2A005SAX
36
C440A1A005SAX C440A2A005SAX
2001000
ZEB-XCT1000
37
C440A1A005SAX C440A2A005SAX
3001500
ZEB-XCT1500
38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.3-36. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount

Overload Range 0.331.65 15 420 945 20100 55 mm Frame Size 45 mm Overload Relay Catalog Number C440A1A1P6SAX C440A1A005SAX C440A1A020SAX C440A1A045SAX C440B1A100SAX Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number C440A2A1P6SAX C440A2A005SAX C440A2A020SAX C440A2A045SAX C440B2A100SAX
CA08104001E

Table 30.3-37. Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters Non-Reversing and Reversing
NEMA Size Continuous Ampere Rating Service Limit Current Rating (Amps) Maximum UL Horsepower Single-Phase 115V 1/3 1 2 3 1/3 1 2 3 230V 1 2 3 7-1/2 1 2 3 7-1/2 Three-Phase 208V 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 10 25 40 75 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 10 25 40 75 240V 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 15 30 50 100 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 15 30 50 100 480V 2 5 10 25 50 100 200 2 5 10 25 50 100 200 600V 2 5 10 25 50 100 200 2 5 10 25 50 100 200 Three-Pole Non-Reversing Catalog Number
September 2011
Sheet 30 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Three-Pole Reversing Catalog Number
C440 Electronic Overload Relays

00 0 1 2 3 4 5 00 0 1 2 3 4 5

9 18 27 45 90 135 270 9 18 27 45 90 135 270
11 21 32 52 104 156 311 11 21 32 52 104 156 311
AN19AN0_ 5E _ AN19BN0_ 5E _ AN19DN0_ 5E _ AN19GN0_ 5E _ AN19KN0_ 5E _
AN59AN0_ 5E _ AN59BN0_ 5E _ AN59DN0_ 5E _ AN59GN0_ 5E _ AN59KN0_ 5E _
AN19SN0_ 5E _ AN19AN0_ 5G _ AN19BN0_ 5G _ AN19DN0_ 5G _ AN19GN0_ 5G _ AN19KN0_ 5G _
AN59SN0_ 5E _ AN59AN0_ 5G _ AN59BN0_ 5G _ AN59DN0_ 5G _ AN59GN0_ 5G _ AN59KN0_ 5G _
C440 with Ground Fault Electronic Overload Relays
AN19SN0_ 5G _
AN59SN0_ 5G _
Underscore (_) indicates coils sufx required, see Coil Sufx table below. Underscore (_) indicates OLR designation required, see C440 FLA Range table below. Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) and 15A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX). NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60300A panel-mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 15A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
Table 30.3-38. Coil Sufx Codes

Sufx A B C D E H J K
L N T U V W Y
Table 30.3-39. C440 FLA Range (FVNR and FVR Starters Only)
NEMA Size 00 0 1 2 3 4 5
Coil Volts and Hertz 120/60 or 110/50 240/60 or 220/50 480/60 or 440/50 600/60 or 550/50 208/60 277/60 208240/60 240/50 380415/50 550/50 24/60, 24/50 24/50 32/50 48/60 48/50
OLR Code 1P6 005 1P6 005 1P6 005 005 020 100 300 300
FLA Range 0.331.65A 1.05.0A 0.331.65A 1.05.0A 0.331.65A 1.05.0A 1.05.0A 4.020A 20100A 60300A
OLR Code 020 020 020 045 045
FLA Rating 4.020A 4.020A 4.020A 9.045A 9.045A 60300A
Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) and 15A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 033

30.3-17
Accessories
Table 30.3-40. CT Kits
Communication
The C440 is provided with two levels of communication capability.
Advanced Communication Monitoring and Control

C440 also has the ability to communicate on industrial protocols such as DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP, and Ethernet (planned) while providing control capability using I/O. An expansion module (mentioned earlier) combined with a communication adapter and a communication module allows easy integration onto the customers network.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Safety Cover
Clear Lexan cover that mounts ZEB-XSC on top of the FLA dial and DIP switches when closed
Basic Communication via Expansion ModuleMonitoring Only

Basic communication on the C440 is accomplished using an expansion module. The expansion module plugs into the expansion bay on the C440 overload relay, enabling communications with the overload via their Modbus RTU (RS-485) network. No additional parts are required.
Reset Bar
Assembles to the top of the overload to provide a larger target area for door-mounted reset operators ZEB-XRB
Remote Reset
Remote reset module (24 Vdc) Remote reset module (120 Vac) Remote reset module (24 Vac)
C440-XCOM ZEB-XRR-120 ZEB-XRR-24
Advanced Communication Communication Module

The communication adapter comes standard with four inputs and two outputs (24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while providing the customer with exible mounting options (DIN rail or panel). For more information about technical data and specications as well as dimensions, see Volume 5Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Section 31.
Customer can wire remote-mounted button to reset module (i.e., 22 mm pushbutton, catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10).
Basic CommunicationModbus
Advanced Communication Communication Adapter with Communication Module
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 035
Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Reduced VoltageElectromechanical

General Description
30.4-1
Low Voltage Reduced Voltage

Starter Selection Guide
In general, the application will determine the type of starter required. In cases where more than one type starter will meet the application requirements, reference to the table below will show which starter is best suited for the application. Table 30.4-1. Reduced Voltage Starting Characteristics and Index
Starter Type Starting Characteristics Expressed in % of Rated Starting Values (Approximate) Motor Voltage Autotransformer Class ECA42 80% Tap 65% Tap 50% Tap Part winding Class ECA45 Wye-delta Class ECA48 Class ECA51 Solid-state S801/811 S611 DS6/DS7
22 23 24 25
30.4-2
Remarks
Page
Motor Current
Line Current
Torque
80 65 50 100 100
80 65 50 65 33
67 45 28 65 33
26 27 28 29 30
64 42 25 50 33
The adjustable voltage taps permit wide adjustment of characteristics in the eld. Requires part winding motor. A nine-lead 230/460V dual voltage motor may be used in 230V applications. Closed transition. Requires delta wound motor with wye connections. Ideal for long accelerations. Closed transition is available. 30.4-3 30.4-4
Ramps 0100%
Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Compatible with NEMA Design A, B or C motors. 092% 092% 085% Adjustable ramp up and ramp down.
30.5-1 thru 30.5-49
Includes autotransformer magnetizing current.
General Application
The following factors should be considered when applying reducedvoltage starters to a squirrel cage motor-driven load. 1. The motor characteristics that will satisfy the starting requirements of the load. 2. The source of power and the effect the motor starting current will have on the line voltage. 3. The load characteristics and the effect the motor starting torque will have on the driven parts during acceleration. The starter protection required to protect the load, motor, starter, cables and power source during overload, undervoltage and fault conditions. A typical NEMA B motor started with full voltage will develop as much as 150% full-load torque when started with a starting current of around 600% fullload current. These values may exceed the mechanical limitations of the load or electrical limitations of the source, or both. A reduced-voltage or reduced-inrush starter will reduce both starting current and starting torque. Care must be taken when meeting power company limitations that the motor will produce sufcient torque to accelerate the load to near rated speed. Part-winding starters are suited to low starting torque loads such as fans, blowers and m-g sets. Autotransformer starters should be used with hard to start loads such as reciprocating compressors, grinding mills, and pumps. Wye-delta starters are applicable to high inertia loads with long acceleration times which as centrifugal compressors and centrifuges. All starters, in addition to overload protection, will provide either low voltage release or low voltage protection depending upon the pilot device used with the starter. Low voltage release, where power is applied to the motor after a power failure, can be obtained by using a two-wire pilot device (temperature, switch and so on). Low voltage protection, where power is not applied to the motor after a power failure until restarted by an operator, can be obtained by using three-wire control such as START STOP pushbuttons. Closed transition wye-delta types require adequate ventilation to remove resistor heat. Eaton also offers a line of solid-state reduced-voltage starters known as Easy-start. Solid-state starters are ideally suited for many loads including conveyor applications since they provide controlled acceleration from zero to full load. UL listingCombination E176513, Non-Combination E19224.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
700
700
700 Line Current, % of Full Load

Full Voltage Starting
Line Current, % of Full Load
Line Current, % of Full Load
Full Voltage Starting 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 Autotransformer Starting on 65% Tap Full Load Current Motor Speed Full Load Speed
40 41
KVA
600 500 400 300 200 Full Load Current 100 0

Motor Speed Full Load Speed
600 500 400 300 200 100 0 Torque
Part Winding Starting Wye-Delta Starting (Closed Transition)
42
20 Motor Speed 40 60 80 100 Full Load Speed
43
Figure 30.4-1. Autotransformer Starting
Figure 30.4-2. Wye-Delta or Part Winding Starting

Figure 30.4-3. Solid-State Starter
CA08104001E
30.4-2 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Reduced VoltageElectromechanical

Autotransformer Type
September 2011
Sheet 30 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
Autotransformer type starters are the most widely used reduced-voltage starter because of their efciency and exibility. All power taken from the line, except transformer losses, is transmitted to the motor to accelerate the load. Taps on the transformer allow adjustment of the starting torque and inrush to meet the requirements of most applications. The following characteristics are produced by the three voltage taps: Table 30.4-2. Starting Characteristics
Tap Starting Torque % Locked Torque 25% 42% 64% Line Inrush % Locked Ampere 28% 45% 67%
Table 30.4-3. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines within Autotransformer Starters

Maximum hp NEMA Size Starter Contactor Run Starting (1S) (2S) (3-Pole) (3-Pole)
230V, 60 Hz
15 30 50 100 200 300 450 25 50 100 200 400 600 900
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 3 4 5 6 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
2 3 4 5 6 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
460575V, 60 Hz
(1S). The interlock (1S) closes, energizing the timing relay (TR) and contactor (2S) which seal in through the interlock (2S). With the (1S) and (2S) contactors closed, the motor is connected through the autotransformer for reduced-voltage start. After a preset time interval, the (TRTO) contacts time open, de-energizing contactor (1S) and connecting the autotransformer as a reactor in series with the motor. Interlock (1S) immediately energizes the run contactor (R) which seals in through its interlock (R). The run contacts are now closed, and the motor is running at full voltage. Start contactor (2S) and relay (TR) are de-energized when interlock (R) opens. An overload, opening the STOP pushbutton or other pilot device de-energizes the (R) contactor removing the motor from the line.
50% 65% 80%

Not included 50 hp and below. Includes transformer magnetizing current.
1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.
Other Types
Autotransformer starters are also available in combination and reversing types.
Closed transition is standard on all sizes ensuring a smooth transition from reduced to full voltage. Since the motor is never disconnected from the line there is no interruption of line current which can cause a second inrush during transition. Duty cycle of these starters is as follows: up to 200 hp, 15 seconds on each 4 minutes for 1 hour, repeated after 2 hours. Over 200 hp, three periods of 30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF repeated after 1 hour.
Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram)

Closing the START button or other pilot device energizes the start contactor
R
3C
100%
0%
RVNR AUTOXFMR (3-coil) L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 #1 #2 #3
2S R 5C
1S
OL
3E
1C
T1 T2 T3
CKT BKR or SW & FU
1 100%
80%
65%
0% 0%
1D Stopped
2S R 2S 5D 5E
1S
3D
100%
65%
1S TBX2
1S
10 G Run R On-Delay 1.5 15 Sec. TR 2 7 R 1S
Design Features
Contactors(1S) (2S) (Run)
A three-pole (1S) and a three-pole contactor (2S) connect the motor to the auto-transformer for reduced-voltage starting (see Table 30.4-3 for size). A three-pole contactor (Run) bypasses the autotransformer and connects the motor for full-voltage across-the-line running (see Table 30.4-3 for size).
TB1 TB1 Stop TB2 Start TB3 8 5 51
TB4 95 96 B C
OTT "E" D
"D"
52 A1
A2
Auto-Transformer Overtemp SWa
2S Auto TB1 TB1 Hand Off PS TB3 8 TR T
1S 2S 6 54 1S
53
A1
A2
55
A1
A2
T T
Figure 30.4-4. Typical Schematic Diagram Table 30.4-4. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Size Type 1 Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg) Type 3R, 4X, 12 Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg)
Class 42: AutotransformerNon-combination Class 43: Autotransformerwith Disconnect Class 44: Autotransformerwith HMCP
24 5 6 6 7 8 9

E2 F1E F1E F2E F2E F2E
124 (56) 885 (402) 1220 (554) 1400 (636)

E2 F1E F1E F2E F2E F2E
149 (68) 1010 (459) 1345 (611) 1525 (692)

Non-combination and breaker. Consult factory.

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 037

Part-Winding Type
30.4-3
General Description
Part-winding starting provides convenient, economical one-step acceleration at reduced current where the power company species a maximum or limits the increments of current drawn from the line. These starters can be used with nine-lead dual-voltage motors on the lower voltage and with special part-winding motors designed for any voltage. When used with dualvoltage motors, it should be established that the torque produced by the rst half-winding will accelerate the load sufciently so as not to produce a second undesirable inrush when the second half-winding is connected to the line. Most motors will produce a starting torque equal to between 1/2 to 2/3 of NEMA standard values with half of the winding energized and draw about 2/3 of normal line current inrush.
Overload Relay(OL)
Two three-pole Type B overload relays provide starting and running overcurrent protection.
Timing Relay(TR)
An electrically operated pneumatic relay provides accurate, adjustable start-to-run transfer timing.
(1M) which seals in through its interlock (1M) and energizes the timer (TR). The (1M) contacts connect the rst half-winding of the motor across the line. After a preset time interval, the timer (TRTC) contact closes energizing contactor (2M). The (2M) contact connects the second half-winding of the motor across-the-line. Opening the STOP button or other pilot device de-energizes contactors (1M), (2M) and timer (TR), removing the motor from the line. Table 30.4-6. Contactor Sequence
Contactor 1M 2M Start Run
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Other Types
Part-winding Type ECN45 starters are also available in combination (Type 46 and 47), reversing and three-point (primary resistor) types.

Closing the START button or other pilot device energizes the start contactor
Part Winding L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 CKT BKR or SW & FU #1 #2 #3
1M
OL
T1 T3
Select Overload Heater Packs for 50% of Rated Full Load Motor Current
Design Features
Contactors(1M) (2M)
A three-pole contactor (1M) connects only the rst half-winding of the motor for reduced inrush current on starting (see table below for size). A three-pole contactor (2M) connects the second half-winding of the motor for running (see table below for size). Table 30.4-5. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines within Part Winding Starters
Maximum hp NEMA Size Starter Contactor (1M) (2M) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
2M
OL
T7 T8 T9 TBX2
1M
Stopped 8 G Run R (1M) OL (2M) OL 96 7 A2
31
A2 TB4 A
TB1
TB1
Stop
TB2
Start
TB3
A1 On-Delay 2 A1
1M 1.5 TR E 2M
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Auto TB1 TB1 Off Hand
PS TB3
1M
T.C. = Timed Closing T
Figure 30.4-5. Typical Schematic Diagram Table 30.4-7. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Size Type 1 Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg) 3 9 E F1E F2E F2E 25 (11) 47 (21) 125 (47) 780 (354)

230V, 60 Hz
15 25 50 75 150 300 1 PW 2 PW 3 PW 4 PW 5 PW 6 PW 1 PW 2 PW 3 PW 4 PW 5 PW 6 PW 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Type 3R, 4X, 12 Box Shipping No. Weight Lbs (kg) 7 9 E F1E F2E F2E 75 (34) 95 (43) 180 (82) 880 (400)

Class 45: Part WindingNon-combination

2PW 3PW 4PW 5PW 6PW 7PW 8PW
460575V, 60 Hz
15 40 75 150 350 600
Class 46: Part Windingwith Disconnect Class 47: Part Windingwith Thermal-Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker
2PW 3PW 4PW 5PW 6PW 6PW 7PW 8PW

C D E F1E F1E F2E F2E F2E
68 (31) 162 (74) 230 (104) 440 (200) 440 (200) 515 (234)

C D E F1E F1E F2E F2E F2E
88 (40) 190 (86) 270 (123) 530 (241) 620 (281)

Consult factory. Non-combination and breaker. Fusible.
CA08104001E
30.4-4 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Reduced VoltageElectromechanical

Wye-Delta Type
September 2011
Sheet 30 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
Wye-delta type starters are applied extensively to industrial air conditioning installations because they are particularly suited for starting motors driving high inertia loads with resulting long acceleration times. They are not, however, limited to this application. When six- or 12-lead delta-connected motors are started wye-connected, approximately 58% of line voltage is applied to each winding and the motor develops 33% of full-voltage starting torque and draws 33% of normal locked-rotor current from the line. When the motor is accelerated, it is reconnected for normal data operation.

Closing the START button or other pilot device energizes contactor (1S) whose contacts connect the motor in a wye connection. Interlock (1S) closes, energizing contactor (1M) and timer (TR). The (1M) contacts energize the motor windings in a wye. After a preset time interval, timer (TRTC) contact closes energizing contactor (2S). Interlock (2S) opens, dropping out contactor (1S). The motor is now energized in series with the resistors. Interlock (1S) closes, energizing contactor (2M), bypassing the resistors and energizing the delta connected motor at full voltage.
Interlock opens, de-energizes the timer (TR) opening timer (TRTC) thus energizing contactor (2S). An overload, opening the STOP button or other pilot device de-energizes contactors (1M) and (2M), removing the motor from the line. (TRP) de-energizes and locks out the control circuit if the duty cycle of the transition resistors is exceeded. Wye-delta Class ECN51 closed transition starters are also available in combination types and Class ECN48 open transition non-combination and combination starters.
Design Features
Contactors(1S) (1M) (2S) (2M)
A three-pole contactor (1S) shorts the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during starting to connect motor in wye (see Table 30.4-8 for size). A three-pole contactor (1M) energizes motor leads T1-T2-T3 for both wye and delta connections (see Table 30.4-8 for size). A three-pole contactor (2S) connects resistors in series with the motor windings during the start-to-run transition period (see Table 30.4-8 for size). A three-pole contactor (2M) energizes the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during running to connect the motor in delta (see Table 30.4-8 for size). Table 30.4-8. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines
Max. hp NEMA Size Starter Contactor (1M) (2M) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (1S) 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 (2S) 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Elementary Diagram
Shop Note: Refer to Figure 2. Connect Green Ground Wire to Panel Using Hole Located Adjacent to Transformers Mounting Foot.
Wye-Delta Open Transition
T6
T4
2M 1M OL
1S 1S
1S
T1
T5
T2 T3
L1 L2 L3
L1 Circuit Breaker 1 2 L2 or Switch L3 and Fuse 3
Motor
Select Overload Heater Coils for 58% of Rated Full Load Motor Current 7 2M 8 G R Stopped Run TB4 OL 95 96 TBX2
5 1S Stop TB1 TB1
TB2
Start 1S 1M
TB3
ON-Delay 1.5-15 Seconds 2 51 2M 52 53
8 TR 5 T.O. 1S 1M 8 TR 6 T.C.
TR 7 E A1 1S A2
A1 1M A2 A1 2M A2
TB1 TB1
Auto OFF Hand
PS TB3
54 1S
55
T.O. = Timed Opening T.C. = Timed Closing
Figure 30.4-6. Wye-DeltaOpen Transition
W Closed Transition L1 L2 L3 L2 or L3 SW & FU #2 #3
2M
T6 T4 T5 1S 2S 1S T2B T1B T3B Resistor Resistor Resistor Select Overload Heater Coils for 58% of Rated Full Load Motor Current OL T1A T2A T1 T2 T3 1S
1M
230V, 60 Hz
10 25 50 75 150 300 500 800 15 40 75 150 300 700 1000 1500
Motor
1 YD 2 YD 3 YD 4 YD 5 YD 6 YD 7 YD 8 YD 1 YD 2 YD 3 YD 4 YD 5 YD 6 YD 7 YD 8 YD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1S
2M
Stopped 8 G Run R On-Delay 1.5
TBX2
TB1
TB1
Stop
Start TB2 1S 1M TB3 51
2 2S 52 A1
7 A2 TB4 1 4 . 95 96
460575V, 60 Hz
1 TR 3 Auto TB1 TB1 Hand 8 6 T T.C. Off PS TB3 1S 1M 55 1S T T.C.
53
2 A1
TRP 2S
7 A2 A2
54
A1
56
A1
A2
1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.
Figure 30.4-7. Wye-DeltaClosed Transition
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 039

Wye-Delta Type
30.4-5
Table 30.4-9. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures

Size Type 1 Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) Type 3R, 4X, 12 Box No. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
22 23 24
Classes 48 & 51: Wye-DeltaNon-combination Classes 49 & 52: Wye-Deltawith Disconnect Classes 50 & 53: Wye-Deltawith Thermal Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker
2YD4YD 5YD 6YD 6YD 7YD 8YD

E F1E F1E F2E F2E F2E
185 (84) 605 (275) 635 (288) 715 (325)

E F1E F1E F2E F2E F2E
225 (102) 705 (320) 735 (334) 830 (377)

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Non-combination and breaker. Fusible. Consult factory.
CA08104001E
30.4-6 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 30 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 041
Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Reduced VoltageSolid-State

General DescriptionSolid-State Reduced Voltage
30.5-1
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
Typical Applications

Centrifugal and screw compressors Material handling equipment Fans and blowers Pumps Cranes and hoists Food processing Machinery Rock crushers HVAC industry
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Enclosure Types
Airborne particulate may be detrimental to starter performance and reliability, so caution must be exercised in choosing the enclosure best suited to the environment. The NEMA rating of the enclosure denes its ability to withstand the ingress of foreign particulate as described below:
Reduced Voltage Starters
General Description
Eaton offers a complete line of solidstate reduced voltage devices ranging from fractional horsepower applications to 1000A devices. The line comes in voltages from 200 to 600 Vac and operates on 50 or 60 Hz applications. Units can be ordered as open components or mounted in enclosures (NEMA 1, 3R, 4X and 12). Motor control center (MCC) mounting is also possible with units through 700 hp tting inside of a standard MCC. These soft starters provide reduced voltage starting of AC induction motors. Motor voltage is controlled by means of back-to-back SCRs (silicon controlled rectiers) providing a smooth, stepless start (and stop) of the motor driven load. For more information, please visit the Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com/electrical. Designed to control acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors, products are available from 0.25 to 50A and are suitable for mounting in a variety of enclosures including Type 1, 12, 3R, 4, 4X and 7/9.
Eatons soft starters can be applied in a wide array of customer applications. Typical benets of soft starters include:
NEMA 1
A general purpose, indoor-type enclosure.
NEMA 12
A dust-tight and drip-tight enclosure for indoor industrial applications.
Reduced starting torque stress on mechanical equipment, allowing longer life of belts, gears, pulleys and motor shafts commonly weakened during across-the-line starting Reduction of voltage drop during starting on weak utility systems where the performance of nearby equipment would be negatively affected Reduced inrush current during starting which can result in lower utility bills due to the reduction in peak current demand charges Smooth, stepless starting of a motor, allowing superior exibility over typical electromechanical starting methods Ability to start large loads on backup generators during power outages Elimination of the water-hammer effect in hydraulic systems, which can help to eliminate additional pipe hangers and extend the life of the system, pumps, valves and gaskets
NEMA 3R
Enclosures are intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation.
NEMA 4
A watertight and dust-tight enclosure for either indoor or outdoor use.
NEMA 4X
Identical to NEMA 4, with the additional requirement that the enclosure be corrosion-proof as well.
NEMA 7/9
Enclosures capable of preventing the entrance of dust and withstanding pressure resulting from an internal explosion of specied gas.
CA08104001E
30.5-2 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Reduced VoltageSolid-State

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 30 042
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 30.5-1. Solid-State Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
EC S 90 S 1 C A A
Type S = Solid-state Class 90 = Non-combination reduced voltage soft starterS801 91 = Combination reduced voltage soft starterfusible disconnectS801 92 = Combination reduced voltage soft startercircuit breakerS801 93 = Non-combination reduced voltage soft starterS811 94 = Combination reduced voltage soft starterfusible disconnectS811 95 = Combination reduced voltage soft startercircuit breakerS811 Amperes S801/S811 Q S V W Y = 37 = 66 = 105 = 135 = 180 Z 1 2 3 4 = 240 = 304 = 360 = 420 = 500 5 = 650 6 = 720 7 = 850 8 = 1000 B = 230V C = 460V D = 575V A B C D E = None = 3A = 7A = 15A = 30A Cover Control See Table 30.6-3 for options A B C D E F Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings = None = 30A/250V R = 30A/600V R = 60A/250V R = 60A/600V R = 100A/250V R G = 100A/600V R H = 200A/250V R J = 200A/600V R K = 400A/250V R L = 400A/600V R M = 600A/250V R Breaker F = 50A W = 70A G = 100A H = 150A J = 250A K L P Q = 400A = 600A = 1200A = 1600A N P Q R S T = 600A/600V R = 800A/600V L = 1200A/600V L = 1600A/600V L = 2000A/600V L = By description
Voltage E = 200V Q = 24 Vdc
Enclosure Type 1 = Type 1 2 = Type 3R 3 = Type 4 4 = Type 4X (304-Grade SS) 6 = Type 7/9 8 = Type 12 9 = Type 4X (316-Grade SS)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 043

General Description
30.5-3
Table 30.5-2. Solid-State Product Comparison

Description Maximum current range Start type Operating voltage Operating frequency Control voltage Kick start Ramp time range Initial torque setting Current limit setting Soft stop Pump control option Overtemperature protection Overload Overload setting Trip class setting Phase loss/unbalance Jam Stall Phase reversal Jog Extended start LED status indication LED fault indication S801 Soft Starter 11000A Ramp or current limit 200600 Vac 4763 Hz 24 Vdc 02 seconds adjustable 0.5180 seconds 0%85% 0%550% 060 seconds Yes Yes Yes 30%100% 5, 10, 20 and 30 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes S811 Communicating Soft Starter 11000A Ramp or current limit 200600 Vac 4763 Hz 24 Vdc 02 seconds adjustable 0.5180 seconds 0%85% 0%550% 060 seconds Yes Yes Yes 30%100% 5, 10, 20 and 30 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LCDYes LCDYes
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 30.5-3. Application and Environmental Considerations The installation environment for a solid-state reduced voltage starter is of a prime concern. Conditions such as ambient temperature, altitude and the presence of corrosives or moisture must all be considered when choosing the appropriate starter size and enclosure type.
Description Temperatureoperating (No derating) Current rating (50C) Limited duty cycle (50C) Current rating (60C) Limited duty cycle (60C) Temperaturestorage Altitude (meters) S801 Soft Starter 25C to 40C 100% Fully rated 10% reduction Continuous duty cycle at 90% 40C to 70C 2000 S811 Communicating Soft Starter 30C to 50C 100% Fully rated Consult factory Consult factory 50C to 70C 2000
Note: Consult factory for applications outside of these parameters for additional information and sizing requirements.
CA08104001E

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 30 044
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Multi-Motor Operation
The S801/S811 line can be used to control multiple motors if the following conditions are met:
Starting Torque
The reduced voltage applied to the motor results in reduced inrush current and a soft start. However, it reduces the starting torque of the motor. The relationship is as follows: Torque at reduced current --------------------------------------------------------------------- = Torque at full current Current at reduced voltage ------------------------------------------------------------------------Current at full voltage EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 1800 RPM, 460V NEMA B motor draws six times full load amperes for starting, and starting torque is 150% of full load torque. If the same motor were started with the S801 at 300% current limit, then the available torque would be: 90,000- = 300 = ------------------------------360,000 600 1/4 x 150% full load torque = 37.5% full load torque available
2 2
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
The current rating of the S801/S811 should be equal to or greater than the total of the individual motor full load amperes and the S801/S811 overload must be set for the cumulative full load amperes of the motors Individual motor overcurrent protection is provided by other devices The motors should not be mechanically coupled together, i.e., two motors on same shaft NEC and local code requirements for individual motor protection and branch short circuit protection are met Motors are closely matched in total load and size
EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 480V NEMA B motor has a full load current of 125 amperes. A typical soft start on this motor is 300% current limit for 40 seconds. The heat generation during this time period is: 125 amperes x 300% = 375 watts for 40 seconds At the end of the ramp, the bypass contactor closes and total heat generation is reduced to much lower levels.
NEMA Design C and D Motors, Wound Rotor Motors

These motors are used due to their high starting torque characteristics. When high starting currents and high starting torques are required, it may be necessary to order the extended ramp option and oversize the soft starter to match the application requirements. Consult the factory for application considerations.
Frequent Starting/Stopping
The number of starts and stops allowable depends upon many factors. The most important ones are: 1. Set level of the starting current limit 2. Start time 3. Run time 4. Off time before next start The number of starts per hour is based on the current carrying capacity of the SCRs. A high start/stop duty may require the oversizing of a soft starter. If a high number of multiple starts occur, the starter may trip due to the overload protection for the motor or it may trip on overtemperature of the soft starter. In this situation, it is advisable to wait a period of 10 minutes before restarting to avoid damage to the soft starter and motor and allow the units to cool down. The motor manufacturer should be consulted about the effect of a high number of multiple starts on motor life.
Heat Generation
Due to the voltage drop that occurs across a SCR, there is heat generated in the unit. For sizing an enclosure or box size for the soft starters, it is important to account for this heat generation. The S801/S811 lines use a bypass contactor, so heat generation is minimized. During steady-state conditions, it generates about the same amount of heat as an across-the-line starter of the same size. During start and stopping ramps it will generate three watts of heat per ampere.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 045

General Description
30.5-5
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters

Table 30.5-4. Non-combination Solid-State Reduced Voltage
Rating SSRV Non-combination Box No. 37A 66A 105A 135A 180A 240A 304A 360A 420A 500A 650A 720A 850A 1000A
Table 30.5-5. Combination Solid-State Reduced Voltage

Rating SSRV Comb. with Comb. with Fuses HMCP Box No. 37A 66A 105A 135A 180A 240A 304A 360A 420A 500A 650A 720A 850A 1000A
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Box No. A1 A1 B1 C E E E E E E F1E F1E F1E F1E
S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811
B1 C D D E F1E F1E F1E F1E F1E
S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811
7A 7A 7A B1 C

S801/S811 F1E S801/S811 F1E S801/S811 F1E S801/S811 F1E
10 10 10 10 10 10
Enclosure space will also accommodate for an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays, CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a DNA module or MOV. Contact Eaton for Box Dimensions not shown in PG03300001E.
Enclosure space will also accommodate for an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays, CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a DNA module or MOV. Same as footnote , but CPT is not included. Upsize to B1 enclosure to include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.


S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter
September 2011
Sheet 30 046
22 23 24 25
S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter

Table 30.5-6. S801 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
S 801 N66 N 3 S
S = Soft Starter 801 = Non-combination Soft Starter Ampacity Rating B D L S = Level sensing = Inside the delta = Extended ramp start = Standard soft starter overload W = Without CIM (control interface module) 3 = Three-pole device N = No options P = Pump control V = 690V option
26 27 28
S801 Reduced Voltage Soft Starters
N37 = 37A N66 = 66A R10 = 105A R13 = 135A T18 = 180A T24 = 240A T30 = 304A U36 = 360A U42 = 420A

U50 V36 V42 V50 V65 V72 V85 V10
= 500A = 360A = 420A = 500A = 650A = 720A = 850A = 1000A
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
Eatons S801 line of reduced voltage soft starters is very compact, multifunctional, easy-to-install and easy-to-program. Designed to control acceleration and deceleration of threephase motors, the line is available in current ranges from 12 to1000A and is suitable for mounting in motor control centers or in enclosed control (NEMA 1, 4, 4X and 12) applications. This product line is designed to compete head-to-head with the high-end soft starter market, offering improved performance and dramatically smaller size versus the competition. By having the over-load functionality and bypass contactors built into the unit, it reduces the amount of wiring required during installation and offers huge space savings in the panel or enclosure. The product is also designed to be small enough to replace an existing across-the-line starter (NEMA or IEC) in the existing enclosure. This allows customers to upgrade their existing motor control centers and enclosed control by replacing the starter they have today with a soft starter, gaining the benets of lower utility charges, longer component life and less stress on products and material systems. This size benet allows users to save the expense of replacing the existing structure or adding a new one to house a much larger soft starter.
Not available on U-Frame. U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certication.
that is adjustable from 30% to 100% of rating and can be set for Trip Class 5, 10, 20 or 30. It also provides additional protection for jam, stall, phase reversal, phase loss, overtemperature, undervoltage and so on. Along with the overload, the unit has a built-in run bypass contactor. This device is closed when the soft starter is up to speed providing a low impedance bypass for the SCRs and signicantly reducing the amount of heat that is generated in the soft starter. The S801 is designed to work with three-phase motors in a delta (threelead) conguration. The S801 works with all motors from fractional horsepower up to motors requiring 1000A of steady-state current. The built-in overload (in ranges from 12 to 1000A) and run bypass contactor makes installation and setup quick and easy. The overload also offers some advanced protective functions to give additional motor protection. With the pump control option, it is the number one soft starter available for pumping applications. The unique soft stopping control provides a smooth transition for stopping a motor and eliminating the water-hammer effect that can damage pipes, valves and pumps.
Stall Phase reversal Phase loss/unbalance Shorted SCR detection Overtemperature

Selectable ramp or current limit start. Kick Start: Adjustable from 0%85% initial torque 02.0 seconds adjustment time

Ramp Start: Adjustable from 0%85% initial torque 0.5180 seconds adjustment time Current Limit Start: Adjustable from 0%550% FLA 0.5180 seconds adjustment time Soft Stop: Adjustable from 0%60 seconds
Built-in run bypass contact 24 Vdc control IP20 nger protection Optional pump control


IEC 947 compliant EN 60947-4-2 CE marked CSA certied UL listed

Features
The S801 line uses a total of six SCRs to control the motor (three matched pairs). The unit has a built-in overload
Built-in overload protection: 30%100% adjustment range Trip Class 5, 10, 20 and 30 Jam
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 047

30.5-7
S801 Enclosed Soft Starter
Features and Benets

Longer Life of System Equipment With the impressive list of control and protective functions, this new line of products is designed to signicantly increase the protection it offers to system equipment (e.g., motors, belts, pumps and so on). The benet of increased system equipment protection is longer life and longer system equipment uptime Reduced Power DrawPower control features like Ramp Start, Current Limit Start and Jog Forward provide maximum exibility in selecting start proles, minimizing both mechanical and electrical stress while maximizing motor performance Improved SafetyS801 soft starters offer ngerproof deadfront construction, reducing the chance of electrical shock. With the use of 24 Vdc control power, pilot devices and relays can be operated more safely
Enclosed S801 Soft Starter
General Description
24 Vdc ControlS801 soft starters superiority begins with the control package that features 24 Vdc control running a digital signal processor, or DSP, and using a low impedance run circuit, all of which contribute to the S801 soft starters safety, advanced functionality and compact size. Built-in Overload ProtectionWith most wye-delta starters, many of the advanced features of the S801 are functions that must be added at the expense of cost and space. The S801 soft starter, for example, has built-in overload protection (overloads must be added to wye-delta starters). So, S801 soft starters are more compact, easier to wire and less costly than their wye-delta counterparts. Reduced Power ConsumptionThe S801 soft starter costs less in terms of power consumption. An S801 soft starter also reduces line brown-outs and decreases overall energy usage. For example, an S801 soft starter controls peak power demand while a full-voltage starter can apply 600800% FLA on startup. Lower Starting TorqueSystem cost savings are signicant with an S801 soft starter versus a full voltage starter. With an S801 soft starter, mechanical components can have longer life or be reduced in size because of lower starting torque values (250500% FLA current with SSRV). Fewer Mechanical ProblemsBecause an S801 soft starter reduces stress on a system by eliminating the jolts and violent speed variations that full-voltage starters introduce to a process, fewer mechanical breakdowns occur, improving the quality of the product and process.
System Cost SavingsWith improved reliability, longer life of system equipment, reduced power draw, space savings and improved safety, you enjoy the benet of a signicant improvement in system uptime and a reduction in system downtime resulting in overall system cost saving Time SavingsTime savings in using S801 soft starters are achieved through a quick and easy setup procedure, user-friendly operational design, the longer life of system equipment and improved safety ProductivityOverall, S801 soft starters signicantly improve your productivity by saving you time and money. This is demonstrated by longer product life, longer runs between breakdowns and the ease of installation and operation
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

Enclosed Control
UL 508 IEC 947-4-2 EN 60947.2 CE marked EMC/LV directives CSA22.2

Schematic Diagram
T1 T2 Motor T3
01 02 03
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
34 35 36
IT Soft Start
L1 L2 L3 Power Supply 480 Vac24 Vdc + + ()
37
Applying Voltages Other Than 24 Vdc to Terminals P Thru 4 May Cause Serious Damage to Soft-Start Control Board Terminal Board
38 39 40 41
(+)
MX
1
+
P 1 2 3 4 13 14 95 96 98
Reset
4
24V Inputs DC Only
Run Internal Auxiliary Contacts Fault

24 Vdc or 120 Vac
(+)
Customer Control Device
42 43
MX + (Diode)
96
Figure 30.5-1. Wiring Diagram
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 048
22 23 24 25 26 27

Base Ratings
Table 30.5-8 below is the base ratings for the S801 soft starter. The tables included in this catalog are meant to be a selection table for different applications, but to match a unit to your exact application, consult with your local Eaton representative or visit our Web site at www.eaton.com/electrical. Table 30.5-8. Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
Frame Size Maximum Current Three-Phase Motor kW Rating (50 Hz) 230 Volt N 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000 10 18.5 30 40 51 75 90 110 129 150 110 129 150 200 220 257 315 380400 Volt 18.5 30 55 63 90 110 160 185 220 257 185 220 257 355 400 475 560 440 Volt 18.5 37 59 80 110 147 185 220 257 300 220 257 300 425 450 500 600 hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 1.0SF 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 150 125 150 150 250 1.15SF 10 15 25 30 50 60 75 100 125 150 100 125 150 200

Starting Method vs. Soft start vs. Full voltage vs. Wye-delta vs. 80% RVAT vs. 65% RVAT vs. 50% RVAT Ramp Current % Ramp Time Starts per Ambient of FLA Seconds Hour Temperature 300% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300% 30 10 20 20 20 20. 3 3 3 2 3 4 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C
Catalog Number 230V 1.0SF 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 175 200 150 175 200 250 300 350 400 1.15SF 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 150 125 150 150 200 250 300 350 460V 1.0SF 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 1.15SF 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 250 300 350 250 300 350 450 500 600 700 575V 1.0SF 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 1.15SF 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 300 350 450 500 600 700 800 S801N37N3S S801N66N3S S801R10N3S S801R13N3S S801T18N3S S801T24N3S S801T30N3S S801U36N3S S801U42N3S S801U50N3S S801V36N3S S801V42N3S S801V50N3S S801V65N3S S801V72N3S S801V85N3S S801V10N3S
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
R T
15 sec. start, 300% inrush, 40C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to 290 mm V-Frame, 500A starter. U-Frame 500A does not have IEC Certication.
Severe-Duty Ratings
Motor applications and customer needs come in many different varieties. With the standard and severe duty rating tables, we have attempted to provide guidelines on what the S801 soft starter is capable of. If the application falls under these categories, you can use these charts. For other applications, or when a question arises, contact Eaton Corporation to assist you in selecting the proper soft starter. Table 30.5-10. Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
Frame Size Maximum Current Three-Phase Motor kW Rating (50 Hz) 230 Volt N R T 22 42 65 80 115 150 192 240 305 365 240 305 365 420 480 525 600 5.5 11 15 22 33 45 55 75 90 110 75 90 110 129 147 160 185 380400 Volt 10 18.5 30 40 59 80 100 110 160 185 110 160 185 220 257 280 315 440 Volt 11 22 33 45 63 90 110 147 185 220 147 185 220 257 295 335 375 hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 1.0SF 5 10 15 25 30 50 60 75 100 125 75 100 125 150 150 150 200 1.15SF 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 60 75 100 125 150 150 150

Starting Method vs. Soft start vs. Full voltage vs. Wye-delta vs. 80% RVAT vs. 65% RVAT vs. 50% RVAT Ramp Current % Ramp Time Starts per Ambient of FLA Seconds Hour Temperature 450% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300% 30 10 65 25 40 60 4 10 3 4 4 4 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C
Catalog Number 230V 1.0SF 7-1/2 15 20 30 40 50 75 75 100 150 75 100 150 150 200 200 250 1.15SF 5 10 15 25 30 50 60 75 100 125 75 100 125 150 150 150 200 460V 1.0SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 300 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1.15SF 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 150 200 250 300 350 350 450 575V 1.0SF 20 40 50 75 100 150 200 200 300 350 200 300 350 450 500 500 600 1.15SF 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 200 250 300 200 250 300 350 450 450 500 S801N37N3S S801N66N3S S801R10N3S S801R13N3S S801T18N3S S801T24N3S S801T30N3S S801U36N3S S801U42N3S S801U50N3S S801V36N3S S801V42N3S S801V50N3S S801V65N3S S801V72N3S S801V85N3S S801V10N3S
U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certication.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 049

30.5-9
Features

Benets
Reduced wear on belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts and bearings Allows for controlling the inrush current to the motor and reducing electrical charges due to peak energy demand Reduced inrush current leads to more stable power grid and can lower peak demand charges
Able to t in place of existing starters Smallest unit on the market today Very easy to install, wire and program Reduces initial torque on motor and loads Able to control the maximum inrush current
Elimination of water-hammer, which can reduce installed cost of pipe hangers and extend existing system life Less shock to product on conveyor lines and material handling gear 24 Vdc control enhances personnel and equipment safety
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Table 30.5-11. Technical Data

Soft Starter (Partial Catalog Number) Maximum current capacity S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 S801 N37 N66 R10 R13 T18 T24 T30 U36 U42 U50 V36 V42 V50 V65 V72 V85 V10 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000

Width Height Depth Weight in lbs (kg) 2.60 (66.1) 7.38 (187.4) 6.63 (168.4) 5.80 (2.6) 4.38 (111.3) 7.65 (194.3) 7.92 (201.2) 12.71 (322.8) 7.03 (178.6) 6.69 (169.9) 10.50 (4.8) 48.00 (21.8) with lugs 41.00 (18.6) without lugs 7.73 (196.3) 12.72 (323.1) 7.08 (179.9) 48.00 (21.8) with lugs 41.00 (18.6) without lugs 11.04 (280.4) 16.57 (420.9) 7.69 (195.3) 103.00 (46.0)with lugs 91.00 (41.4)without lugs
General Information
Bypass mechanical lifespan Insulating voltage (Ui) Ramp time range Resistance to vibration Resistance to shock 10M 660V 0.5180 seconds (0.5360 seconds extended ramp) 3g 15g 200600V 4763 Hz 30%100% 5, 10, 20 and 30 1 142 Box lug 1 144/0 Box lug 1 or 2 2/0 to 500 kcmil Add-on lug kit 2, 4 or 6 2/0 to 500 kcmil Add-on lug kit
Electrical Information
Operating voltage Operating frequency Overload setting Trip class
Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)

Number of conductors Wire sizes Type of connectors
34 35 36
Control Wiring (12-Pin)

Wire sizes in AWG Number of conductors (stranded) Torque requirements in lb-in. Solid, stranded or exible maximum size in mm2 2214 2 (or one AWG 12) 3.5 3.31
Control Power Requirements

Voltage range (24 V 10%) Steady state current amperes Inrush current amperes Ripple 21.626.4 1.0 10 1% 240 120 3 30C to 50C (no derating) consult factory for operation >50C 50C to 70C <2000mconsult factory for operation >2000m <95% noncondensing Any 3 4000V 21.626.4 1.4 10 1%
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Relays (1) Class A and C

Voltage ACmaximum Voltage DCmaximum Amperesmaximum
Environment
Temperatureoperating Temperaturestorage Altitude Humidity Operating position Pollution degree (IEC 947-1) Impulse withstand voltage (IEC 947-4-1)
U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certication.
CA08104001E
30.5-10 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Solid-State Starters

September 2011
Sheet 30 050
22 23 24 25 26 27
S811 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starters
stopping a motor and eliminating the water-hammer effect that can damage pipes, valves and pumps. The S811 offers an impressive array of advanced protective features. Not only are the protective features selectable, but many offer variable settings allowing the user to ne-tune the starter to meet specic system requirements. The S811 has an easy to use Digital Interface Module (DIM) that allows the user to congure the device and to read system parameters. The DIM includes an LCD display and keypad to scroll through the various menus. The DIM allows the user to modify control parameters, enable or disable protections, set communication variables, monitor system parameters such as line voltages and currents, and access the fault queue.
communication conguration settings provide the system integrator with powerful tools to facilitate system optimization.
Features and Benets
S811 Soft Starter
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
The S811 from Eaton offers all the popular features of the S801, but adds enhanced functionality with the new DIM (Digital Interface Module) and communications capabilities. The S811 reduced voltage soft starter is very compact, multi-functional, easy to install and easy to program. Designed to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors up to 690V, the line is available from 11A through 1000A. The S811 is designed to be a complete package combining the SCRs, bypass contactor and overload in one, very compact unit. The S811 is available as a component for panel mounting, in motor control centers or in enclosed control (NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 7/9 and 12).
ONLN SS OXFDO1 H STOP Monitoring
PREV
NEXT
ENTER
ESC
Figure 30.5-2. Digital Interface Module (DIM) The DIM can be removed from the S811 and remote mounted. Kits are available to door mount the DIM, enabling users to safely congure, commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical panel without opening the enclosure door. The S811 has built-in communications capabilities that enable the soft starter to be connected to a variety of networks, including DeviceNet, Ethernet, Modbus and PROFIBUS. Multiple control components can be connected to one Eaton gateway that concentrates data from the devices into a single node. Conguration is simplea single press of the gateways Auto Conguration button sets the system up for default operation. This automatically congures the I/O assemblies to the system devices. The data from these devices are then assembled into a single input and output messages. The S811 communication parameters can be congured with the DIM or through the network using CH Studio Component Manager. Advanced
Designed to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors, the S811 soft starter uses silicon controlled rectiers (SCRs) to control the voltage to soft start and soft stop the motor. After the motor is started, internal run bypass contactors close, resulting in the motor running directly across-the-line. The built-in solid-state overload protects the motor from overload conditions with sophisticated algorithms that model true motor heating, resulting in better motor protection and fewer nuisance trips. Advanced protective and diagnostic features reduce downtime. A voltage ramp start or current limit start is available. Kick start is available in either starting mode. The soft stop option allows for a ramp stop time that is longer than the coast to stop time. The pump control option provides a smooth transition for starting and
The DIM provides an intuitive, easy-to-use human interface with powerful conguration capabilities to maximize system performance Door or device mounted DIM enables users to safely congure, commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical panel without opening the enclosure door System operating parameters can be monitored enterprise-wide through a communications network. Increase uptime by providing data for process management and preventive diagnostics Run bypass mode greatly reduces internal heating created by the greater power dissipation in the SCRs. Bypass contactor directly connects the motor to the line and improves system efciency by reducing internal power losses Internal solid-state overload protection provides accurate current measurement and trip settings. Sophisticated algorithms solve a series of differential equations that model true motor heating and cooling, resulting in superior motor overload protection while minimizing nuisance trips. Advanced selectable protective features safeguard the motor and system against a variety of system faults Internal run bypass contactors and overload protection eliminate the need for additional devices, reducing enclosure sizes, minimizing installation and wiring time and reducing overall assembly size and cost Wide range of overload FLA settings (31100% of rated current) and a selectable trip class (530) offers users the exibility to ne-tune the starter to match specic application requirements
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 051
Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Solid-State Starters

30.5-11
Variable ramp times and torque control settings provide unlimited starting congurations, allowing for maximum application exibility Kick-start feature enables soft starting of high friction loads Soft stop control for applications where an abrupt stop of the load is not acceptable Pump control option with sophisticated pump algorithms on both starting and stopping that minimize the pressure surges that cause water hammer. The pump control option will maximize the life of the pump and piping systems while minimizing the downtime caused by system failure Six SCRs control all three motor phases, providing smooth acceleration and deceleration performance Soft acceleration and deceleration reduces wear on belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts and bearings Reduce the peak inrush current stress on the power system Minimize peak starting torque to diminish mechanical system wear and damage 24 Vdc control module enhances personnel and equipment safety. Removable, lockable control terminal block reduces maintenance costs. Also provides the opportunity for OEMs to reduce assembly and test costs by using pre-assembled wire harnesses
damaged by repeated overload trip, reset and re-start cycles. The thermal memory value can be monitored through the DIM or the communications network. The thermal memory value can be of great use in determining an impending overload trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending trip before a trip occurs halting the process. Costly system downtime can be avoided. The trip current is adjusted to match the specic application requirements by entering the motor nameplate full load current rating and trip class. The FLA adjustment includes a 3 to 1 adjustment range. The overload trip class is adjustable from class 5 through class 30. The overload is ambient temperature compensated meaning its trip characteristics will not vary with changes in ambient temperature. The overload protection can be enabled, disabled, or disabled on start.
motor did not get to the rated speed in the dened soft start period. A current greater than 200% FLA at the end of the soft start period will cause the starter to trip on a stall fault.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Pole Over Temperature

High ambient temperatures, extended ramp times and high duty cycle conditions may cause the S811 power pole conductors to reach a temperature that exceeds their thermal rating. The S811 is equipped with sensors that monitor the temperature of the power poles. Over temperature protection occurs if the devices thermal capacity is exceeded. The soft starter will trip in over temperature conditions, preventing device failure. The device pole temperature value can be monitored through the DIM or the communications network. This feature can be of use in determining an impending over temperature trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending trip before a trip occurs, halting the process. Costly system shutdown can be avoided.
Short Circuit
The use of a short-circuit protective device in coordination with the S811 is required in branch motor circuits by most electrical codes. Short-circuit coordination ratings with both fuses and Eatons molded case circuit breakers are available providing customers with design exibility. The S811 has short circuit coordination ratings as an open component, an enclosed starter, and in a motor control center.
Phase Loss
Loss of a phase can cause a signicant increase in the current drawn in the remaining two phases. Phase loss can lead to motor damage before an eventual overload trip occurs. Phase loss is typically an indication of a failure in the electrical distribution system. The S811 will detect a phase loss and trip if any phase current drops below a preset value. The phase loss trip level is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the average of the other two phase levels with an adjustable trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Protective Features
All protective features can be congured, enabled or disabled with the DIM or through the communications network.
Jam
Excessive current and torque up to locked rotor levels can occur in a jam condition. The condition can result in stress and damage to the motor, load, mechanical system, and the electrical distribution system. Jam protection prevents the stress and damage from a jam during normal run. After the motor is started, a current greater than 300% FLA setting will cause the starter to trip on a jam fault.
Motor Overload
The S811 includes electronic overload protection as standard. The overload meets applicable requirements for a motor overload protective device. The overload protects the motor from over heat conditions with the use of sophisticated algorithms that model true motor heating, resulting in superior motor protection and fewer nuisance trips. The S811 calculates a thermal memory value. A 100% value represents the maximum safe temperature of the motor. When the thermal memory value reaches 100%, an overload trip will occur removing power to the motor. Upon trip, the S811 stores the calculated motor heating value and will not allow a motor re-start until the motor has sufciently cooled. This feature ensures the motor will not be
Phase Imbalance
Phase current or voltage imbalance can cause a signicant increase in the current drawn in the remaining two phases. Phase imbalance can lead to motor damage before an eventual overload trip. Phase imbalance is typically an indication of a failure in the electrical distribution system or the motor. The S811 will detect both current and voltage phase imbalances and trip if any phase becomes imbalanced as compared to the average of the other two phases. The phase current imbalance trip level is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the average of the current in the other two phases with an adjustable trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Stall
Excessive current and torque up to locked rotor levels can occur in a stall condition. The condition can lead to an overload trip and result in stress and damage to the motor, load, mechanical system, and the electrical distribution system. Stall protection prevents stress and damage to a motor that has not come up to speed, or stalled after the soft start time. The S811 will trip to protect the system in the event that the
CA08104001E

The phase voltage imbalance trip level is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the average of the voltage in the other two phases with an adjustable trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
September 2011
Sheet 30 052
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
High Voltage
High voltage conditions can result from disturbances in the electrical power distribution system. High voltage conditions can cause malfunctions or failures of electrical equipment. The S811 has high voltage protection that will trip if the average rms voltage is greater than a preset value. The high voltage protection can be programmed as a percent of nominal voltage from 101% to 120% with a trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Average line current as a % FLA

Provides the average rms line current as a percentage of the S811 FLA setting.
Reset Mode
The S811 can be set up for automatic or manual reset on trip. The manual reset mode requires the operator to physically press the RESET button located on the soft starter. The overload can be manually reset through the DIM or through the communications network. The overload can also be electrically reset by energizing a 24 Vdc input on the control terminal block. The automatic reset mode allows the soft starter to be automatically reset as soon as the trip condition is no longer present. With the automatic reset mode, after the fault is no longer present, the motor will be restarted as soon as a valid start signal is present.
Three-Phase Line Currents

Provides three rms phase line currents in amps, accurate to within 2%. Imbalances or changes in the relative phase current to one another can indicate anomalies in the motor or electrical distribution system.
Three-Phase Pole Currents

Provides three rms phase pole currents in amps, accurate to within 2%. The pole current is the current through the soft starter. The line and pole current will be identical in in-line applications, and will differ in insidethe-delta applications.
The S811 has an impressive array of system monitoring capabilities that allow users to access real time process and diagnostic data. This data can be viewed at the device with the DIM or through a communications network. Data over a communications network can provide valuable insight into the condition of the equipment and processes. Maintenance and production personnel can monitor critical operational and maintenance data from a central control station that can be located far away from the production facility. Process data can be monitored to determine system anomalies that may indicate a need for preventive maintenance or an impeding failure. Adjustments made through the communications network can reduce costs by minimizing the time traveling to the location where the motor controls are located. When faults do occur, real time fault data can assist maintenance in troubleshooting and planning repair resources. Remote reset signals can be given to tripped devices without the need for manual intervention by maintenance personnel.
Three-Phase Line Voltages

Provides the individual rms threephase line voltages. Imbalances or changes in the relative phase voltage to one another can indicate anomalies in the motor or electrical distribution system. Voltage can be used to monitor electrical distribution system performance. Warnings, alarms and system actions to low or high voltage conditions can be implemented.
Phase Reversal
The S811 can determine if the proper line phase sequence is present by default. The device will trip if the line phase sequence is something other than A-B-C. The S811 can be congured to operate under reversed phase conditions (A-C-B).
Percent Thermal Memory

Provides the real time calculated thermal memory value. The S811 calculates thermal memory value. A 100% value represents the maximum safe temperature of the motor. When the thermal memory value reaches 100%, an overload trip will occur, removing power to the motor. The thermal memory value can be of great use in determining an impending overload trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending trip before a trip occurs, halting the process. Costly system downtime can be avoided.
Shorted SCR Detection

The S811 monitors the operation of the power poles and will trip under a shorted SCR condition.
Open SCR Detection

The S811 monitors the operation of the power poles and will trip under an open SCR condition.
Low Current
Low current conditions can be a result of a loss of load or a failure in the mechanical system. The S811 has low current protection that will trip if the average rms current falls below a preset value. The low current protection can be programmed as a percent of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.
Average Line Current

Provides the average of the threephase rms line currents in amps, accurate to within 2%. Current data can be used to indicate a need for maintenance. Increased currents in a xed load application can indicate a reduction in system efciencies and performance, signifying system maintenance is due.
DC Control Voltage
Monitors level of the 24 Vdc control voltage. Fluctuations in control voltage can cause component malfunction and failure. System control voltage data can be used to implement warnings, alarms and system actions to low or high voltage conditions.
Low Voltage
Low voltage conditions can result from disturbances in the electrical power distribution system. Low voltage conditions can cause a malfunction and damage to electrical equipment. The S811 has low voltage protection that will trip if the average rms voltage falls below a preset value. The low voltage protection can be programmed as a percent of nominal voltage from 1% to 99% with a trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Average Pole Current

Provides the average of the threephase rms pole currents in amps, accurate to within 2%. The pole current is the current through the soft starter. The line and pole current will be identical in in-line applications, and will differ in inside-the-delta applications.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 053

30.5-13
Pole Temperature
Increases in pole temperature are caused by increases in ambient temperature, start/stop times and start duty cycles. Changes in pole temperatures represent a change in system operating conditions. Identifying unexpected operating conditions or changes can prompt maintenance and aid in process evaluation activities.
Breaker Status
The S811 has provisions to read and display circuit breaker status. Eaton communicating cover control or other communicating protective device is required to take advantage of this feature.
22 23 24
Surge Suppressor
User Manual
A comprehensive user manual is available and can be downloaded free of charge from www.eaton.com/electrical by performing a document search for MN03902002E.
25 26 27 28
Device Temperature
An increase in device temperature is a strong indication of an increase in ambient temperature. High ambient temperature operation can be identied with the device temperature data. Ambient temperature increases can be due to loss of enclosure cooling fans or blocked venting. High ambient temperatures will reduce the life of all electrical equipment in the enclosure.
Accessories
Surge Suppressors
A surge suppressor can mount on either the line or load side of the S811 soft starter. It is designed to clip the line voltage (or load side induced voltage).
Surge Suppressor Mounted on a 200 mm Device
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Start Count
Start count data can be used to monitor system output, schedule preventative maintenance, identify system anomalies and identify changes in system operation.
Table 30.5-12. Surge Suppressors

Description 600V MOV for 65 mm and 110 mm units 600V MOV for 200 mm and 290 mm units 690V MOV for 200 mm and 290 mm units Catalog Number EMS38 EMS39 EMS41
Diagnostics
Fault Queue
Current fault and a fault queue containing the last nine system faults can be read through the DIM or communications network. Fault identication can minimize troubleshooting time and cost. The fault queue can be remotely accessed through a communications network to assist in planning maintenance resources. Thirty different faults can be identied by the S811.

Table 30.5-13. S811 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
S 811 T 30 N 3 S
S = Soft starter 811 = Non-combination Soft Starter Frame Size S = Standard soft starter (configurable for edge or level control) D = Inside-the-delta L = Extended ramp start W = Without DIM 3 = Three-pole device N = No options P = Pump control V = 690V option (Frame T18 through V85)
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Control Status
The S811 provides data that represents system conditions that can be read through the DIM or the communications network. This data identies the status of the system and the control commands the system is requesting of the S811. This can be used for advanced troubleshooting and system integration activities.
N R T U V
= 65 mm = 110 mm = 200 mm = 200 mm = 290 mm
Ampacity Rating 37 66 10 13 18 24 30

= 37A = 66A = 105A = 135A = 180A = 240A = 304A
36 = 360A 42 = 420A 50 = 500A 65 = 650A 72 = 720A 85 = 850A 10 = 1000A
U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certication. Not available in U-Frame.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 054
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Operation
Locked Rotor Torque
Starting and Stopping Modes

The S811 has a variety of starting and stopping methods to provide superior performance in the most demanding applications. The motor can be started in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current Limit Start mode. Kick Start and Soft Stop are available within both starting modes.
100%
Run (FLA) Initial Torque
Time (Seconds)
Voltage Ramp Start

Provides a voltage ramp to the motor resulting in a constant torque increase. The most commonly used form of soft start, this start mode allows you to set the initial torque value and the duration of the ramp to full voltage conditions. Bypass contactors close after ramp time. Adjustable initial torque 085% of locked rotor torque Adjustable ramp time 0.5180 seconds (can be extended with factory modication)
Figure 30.5-3. Starting CharacteristicsRamp Start
Max. Allowed Current Run
100% FLA
Time (Seconds)
Current Limit Start

Limits the maximum current available to the motor during the start phase. This mode of soft starting is used when it becomes necessary to limit the maximum starting current due to long start times or to protect the motor. This start mode allows you to set the maximum starting current as a percentage of locked rotor current and the duration of the current limit. Bypass contactors close after current limit time. Maximum current of 085% locked rotor current Adjustable ramp time 0.5180 seconds (can be extended with factory modication)
Figure 30.5-4. Starting CharacteristicsCurrent Limit Start

100%
Locked Rotor Torque
Run (FLA)
Kick Start
Ramp Time (Seconds)
Kick Start
Selectable feature in both Voltage Ramp Start and Current Limit Start modes. Provides a current and torque kick for 0 to 2.0 seconds. This provides greater initial current to develop additional torque to breakaway a high friction load.

Figure 30.5-5. Starting CharacteristicsKick Start
Run
085% of locked rotor torque 02.0 seconds duration
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of a load. Used when a stop-time that is greater than the coast-to-stop time is desired. Often used with high friction loads where a sudden stop may cause system or load damage.
Ramp Time (Seconds)
Figure 30.5-6. Starting CharacteristicsSoft Stop
Stop time = 060 seconds

September 2011
Sheet 30 055

30.5-15
Product Selection
Motor applications and customer needs come in many different varieties. With the standard and severe duty rating tables, we have attempted to provide guidelines on what the S811 soft Table 30.5-14. Standard-Duty Ratings
Starting Method vs. Soft start vs. Full voltage vs. Wye-delta vs. 80% RVAT vs. 65% RVAT vs. 50% RVAT Ramp Current % of FLA 300% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300%
starter is capable of. If the application falls under these categories, you can use these charts. For other applications, or when a question arises, consult with your local Eaton Representative or call our Technical Resource Center at (877) ETN-CARE.
22 23 24
Ambient Temperature 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C
Ramp Time Seconds 30 sec. 10 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec. 20 sec.
Starts per Hour 3 3 3 2 3 4
25 26 27
Catalog Number
Table 30.5-15. Product SelectionStandard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

Frame Size Max. Current Three-Phase Motor kW Rating (50 Hertz) 230 Volt N R T 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000 10 18.5 30 40 51 75 90 110 120 150 110 129 150 200 220 257 315 380400 Volt 18.5 30 55 63 90 110 160 185 220 257 185 220 257 355 400 475 560 440 Volt 18.5 37 59 80 110 147 185 220 257 300 220 257 300 425 450 500 600 hp Rating (60 Hertz) 200V 1.0SF 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 150 125 150 150 250 1.15SF 10 15 25 30 50 60 75 100 125 150 100 125 150 200 230V 1.0SF 10 20 40 50 60 75 100 150 175 200 150 175 200 250 300 350 400 1.15SF 10 20 30 40 60 75 100 125 150 150 125 150 150 200 250 300 350 460V 1.0SF 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 1.15SF 20 40 60 75 125 150 200 250 300 350 250 300 350 450 500 600 700 575V 1.0SF 30 60 100 125 150 200 300 350 450 500 350 450 500 600 700 900 1000 1.15SF 30 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 450 300 350 450 500 600 700 800 S811N37N3S S811N66N3S S811R10N3S S811R13N3S S811T18N3S S811T24N3S S811T30N3S S811U36N3S S811U42N3S S811U50N3S S811V36N3S S811V42N3S S811V50N3S S811V65N3S S811V72N3S S811V85N3S S811V10N3S
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
500A rating does not have IEC Certication.

Starting Method vs. Soft start vs. Full voltage vs. Wye-delta vs. 80% RVAT vs. 65% RVAT vs. 50% RVAT Ramp Current % of FLA 450% 500% 350% 480% 390% 300% Ramp Time Seconds 30 sec. 10 sec. 65 sec. 25 sec. 40 sec. 60 sec. Starts per Hour 4 10 3 4 4 4 Ambient Temperature 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C 50C
CA08104001E

Table 30.5-17. Product SelectionSevere-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
Frame Size Maximum Three-Phase Motor Current kW Rating (50 Hertz) 230 Volt N R 22 42 65 80 115 150 192 240 305 240 305 365 420 480 525 600 5.5 11 15 22 33 45 55 75 90 75 90 110 129 147 160 185 380400 Volt 10 18.5 30 40 59 80 100 110 160 110 160 185 220 257 280 315 440 Volt 11 22 33 45 63 90 110 147 185 147 185 220 257 295 335 375 hp Rating (60 Hertz) 200V 1.0SF 5 10 15 25 30 50 60 75 100 75 100 125 150 150 150 200 1.15SF 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 60 75 100 125 150 150 150 230V 1.0SF 7-1/2 15 20 30 40 50 75 75 100 75 100 150 150 200 200 250 1.15SF 5 10 15 25 30 50 60 75 100 75 100 125 150 150 150 200 460V 1.0SF 15 30 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1.15SF 10 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 200 150 200 250 300 350 350 450 575V 1.0SF 20 40 50 75 100 150 200 200 300 200 300 350 450 500 500 600 1.15SF 15 30 50 60 100 125 150 200 250 200 250 300 350 450 450 500
September 2011
Sheet 30 056
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Catalog Number
S811N37N3S S811N66N3S S811R10N3S S811R13N3S S811T18N3S S811T24N3S S811T30N3S S811U36N3S S811U42N3S S811V36N3S S811V42N3S S811V50N3S S811V65N3S S811V72N3S S811V85N3S S811V10N3S
U V
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 057

30.5-17

Table 30.5-18. SpecicationsS811 Soft Starter
Soft Starter (Partial Catalog Number) S811 S811 S811 S811 S811 N37 N66 R10 R13 T18 66 20 66 105 32 105 135 42 135 180 56 180 S811 T24 240 75 240 S811 T30 304 95 304 S811 U36 360 112 360 S811 U42 420 131 420 S811 U50 500 156 500 S811 S811 V36 V42 360 420 S811 V50 500 156 500 S811 V65 650 203 650 S811 V72 720 225 720 S811 V85 850 265 580 S811 V10 1000 320 1000
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Add-on lug kit Two, four or six 2/0 to 500 kcmil
Maximum current capacity 37 FLA range 11 37
112 131 360 420
Dimensions
Width in inches (mm) Height in inches (mm) Depth in inches (mm) Weight in lbs (kg) 2.66 (67.6) 7.38 (187.4) 6.48 (164.5) 5.80 (2.6) 4.42 (112.2) 7.92 (201.2) 6.64 (168.7) 10.50 (4.8) 7.67 (194.8) 12.71 (322.9) 6.39 (162.4) 7.73 (196.3) 12.72 (323.1) 7.08 (179.9) 11.05 (280.6) 16.57 (420.8) 7.35 (186.6) 103.00 (46.8) with lugs 91.00 (41.4) without lugs
48.00 (21.8) with lugs 48.00 (21.8) with lugs 41.00 (18.6) without lugs 41.00 (18.6) without lugs 10 million 660V 0.5180 seconds (0.5360 seconds extended ramp) 3g 15g 200600V 4763 Hz 30100% 5, 10, 20 and 30
General Information
Bypass mechanical lifespan Insulating voltage Ui Ramp time range Resistance to vibration Resistance to shock
Operating voltage Operating frequency Overload setting Trip class

Number of conductors Wire sizes Type of connectors One 142 Box lug 2214 Two (or one AWG 12) 3.5 3.31 One 144/0 One or two 4 AWG to 500 kcmil
32 33 34 35 36
Control Wiring (12-Pin)

Wire sizes in AWG Number of conductors (stranded) Torque requirements in lb-in Solid, stranded or exible maximum size in mm2

Voltage range (24V 10%) Steady state current amps Inrush current amps Ripple 1.0 10 1.0 10 1.0 10 21.626.4

1% 240 120 3
1.4 10
37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Environment
Temperatureoperating Temperaturestorage Altitude Humidity Operating position Pollution degree IEC 947-1 Impulse withstand voltage IEC 947-4-1

30 to +50C (no derating) consult factory for operation > +50C 50 to +70C <2000mconsult factory for operation > 2000m <95% noncondensing Any 3 6000V
U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certication. UR Recognized Product.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Designed to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors, the S611 soft starter uses silicon controlled rectiers (SCRs) to control the voltage to soft start and soft stop the motor. After the motor is started, internal run bypass contactors close, resulting in the motor running directly across-the-line. The built-in solid-state overload protects the motor from overload conditions with sophisticated algorithms that model true motor heating, resulting in better motor protection and fewer nuisance trips. Advanced protective and diagnostic features reduce downtime. A voltage ramp start or current limit start is available. Kick start is available in either starting mode. The soft stop option allows for a ramp stop time that is longer than the coast to stop time. The pump control option provides a smooth transition for starting and stopping a motor and for eliminating the water-hammer effect that can damage pipes, valves and pumps. The S611 offers an impressive array of advanced protective features. Not only are the protective features selectable, but many offer variable settings allowing the user to ne-tune the starter to meet specic system requirements. The S611 has an easy-to-use user interface module (UI) that allows the user to congure the device and to read system parameters. The UI includes an LED display and a keypad to scroll through the various parameters. The UI allows the user to modify control parameters, enable or disable protections, set communication variables, monitor system parameters such as line voltages and currents, and access the fault queue.
Figure 30.5-7. User Interface The UI can be removed from the S611 and be remote mounted. Kits are available to door mount the UI, enabling users to safely congure, commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical panel without opening the enclosure door. This will help eliminate the possibility of an arc ash incident.
S611 Solid-State Soft Starter
General Description
Eaton revolutionized the reduced voltage control marketplace with its advanced feature set and user-friendly user interface module to enhance system performance and to reduce commissioning times. The S611 adds enhanced functionality with network communications, metering, monitoring and diagnostics capabilities. The Eaton line of S611 reduced voltage soft starters is multi-functional, easy to install and easy to program. Designed to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors up to 600V, the line is available from 26 to 414A. The S611 is designed to be a complete package, combining the SCRs, bypass contactor and overload in one compact unit.
Communications
The S611 has built-in communication capabilities through two communications ports to connect the soft starter to a variety of networks, including Modbus (native), DeviceNet and PROFIBUS. The S611 communication parameters can be congured with the UI. Advanced communication conguration settings provide the system integrator with powerful tools to facilitate system optimization.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 059

30.5-19
Figure 30.5-8. Control Wiring Diagram Table 30.5-19. Network Communications Reference
Description Modbus communication adapter without I/O Modbus communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O Modbus communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O DeviceNet communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O DeviceNet communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O PROFIBUS communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O PROFIBUS communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O Style Number 3-2372-001A 3-2372-003B 3-2372-004B 3-2372-001B 3-2372-002B 3-2398-001B 3-2398-002B Catalog Number C441M C441N C441P C441K C441L C441S C441Q
Features and Benets

The UI (user interface module) provides an intuitive, easy-to-use human interface with powerful conguration capabilities to maximize system performance Door or device mounted UI enables users to safely congure, commission, monitor and troubleshoot the system at the electrical panel without opening the enclosure door, eliminating the possibility of an arc ash incident System operating parameters can be monitored enterprise-wide through a communications network. Increase uptime by providing data for process management and preventive diagnostics
Run Bypass mode greatly reduces internal heating created by the greater power dissipation in the SCRs. Bypass contactor directly connects the motor to the line and improves system efciency by reducing internal power losses Internal solid-state overload protection provides accurate current measurement and trip settings. Sophisticated algorithms solve a series of differential equations that model true motor heating and cooling, resulting in superior motor overload protection while minimizing nuisance trips. Advanced selectable protective features safeguard the motor and system against a variety of system faults
Internal run bypass contactors and overload protection eliminate the need for additional devices, reducing enclosure sizes, minimizing installation and wiring time, and reducing overall assembly size and cost Wide range of overload FLA settings (50100% of rated frame current) and a selectable trip class (530) offers users the exibility to netune the starter to match specic application requirements Variable ramp times and torque control settings provide unlimited starting congurations, allowing for maximum application exibility Kick-start feature enables soft starting of high friction loads Soft stop control for applications where an abrupt stop of the load is not acceptable Pump control option with sophisticated pump algorithms on both starting and stopping that minimize the pressure surges that cause water hammer. The pump control option will maximize the life of the pump and piping systems while minimizing the downtime caused by system failure Six SCRs control all three motor phases, providing smooth acceleration and deceleration performance Soft acceleration and deceleration reduces wear on belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts and bearings Reduce the peak inrush currents stress on the power system Minimize peak starting torque to diminish mechanical system wear and damage 120 Vac control voltage enhances ease of connections
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Protective Features
All protective features can be congured, enabled or disabled with the UI or through the communications network.
CA08104001E

S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter Motor Overload
The S611 includes electronic overload protection as standard. The overload meets applicable requirements for a motor overload protective device. The overload protects the motor from overheat conditions with the use of sophisticated algorithms that model true motor heating, resulting in superior motor protection and fewer nuisance trips. The S611 calculates a thermal memory value. A 100% value represents the maximum safe temperature of the motor. When the thermal memory value reaches 100%, an overload trip will occur removing power to the motor. Upon trip, the S611 stores the calculated motor heating value and will not allow a motor re-start until the motor has sufciently cooled. This feature ensures the motor will not be damaged by repeated overload trip, reset and re-start cycles. The thermal memory value can be monitored through the UI or the communications network. The thermal memory value can be of great use in determining an impending overload trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending trip before a trip occurs halting the process. Costly system downtime can be avoided. The trip current is adjusted to match the specic application requirements by entering the motor nameplate full load current rating and trip class. The FLA adjustment includes a 2 to 1 adjustment range. The overload trip class is adjustable from class 5 through class 30. The overload is ambient temperature compensated meaning its trip characteristics will not vary with changes in ambient temperature. The overload protection can be enabled, disabled, or disabled on start.
September 2011
Sheet 30 060
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Jam
Excessive current and torque up to locked rotor levels can occur in a jam condition. The condition can result in stress and damage to the motor, load, mechanical system and the electrical distribution system. Jam protection prevents the stress and damage from a jam during normal run. After the motor is started, a current greater than 300% FLA setting will cause the starter to trip on a jam fault.
Phase Loss
Loss of a phase can cause a signicant increase in the current drawn in the remaining two phases. Phase loss can lead to motor damage before an eventual overload trip occurs. Phase loss is typically an indication of a failure in the electrical distribution system. The S611 will detect a phase loss and trip if any phase current drops below a preset value. The phase loss trip level is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the average of the other two phase levels with an adjustable trip delay of 0.160 seconds.
Stall
Excessive current and torque up to locked rotor levels can occur in a stall condition. The condition can lead to an overload trip and can result in stress and damage to the motor, load, mechanical system and the electrical distribution system. Stall protection prevents stress and damage to a motor that has not come up to speed, or stalled after the soft start time. The S611 will trip to protect the system in the event that the motor did not get to the rated speed in the dened soft start period. A current greater than 200% FLA at the end of the soft start period will cause the starter to trip on a stall fault.
Phase Imbalance
Phase current or voltage imbalance can cause a signicant increase in the current drawn in the remaining two phases. Phase imbalance can lead to motor damage before an eventual overload trip. Phase imbalance is typically an indication of a failure in the electrical distribution system or the motor. The S611 will detect both current and voltage phase imbalances and trip if any phase becomes imbalanced as compared to the average of the other two phases. The phase current imbalance trip level is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the average of the current in the other two phases with an adjustable trip delay of 0.160 seconds. The phase voltage imbalance trip level is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the average of the voltage in the other two phases with an adjustable trip delay of 0.160 seconds.
Pole Over Temperature

High ambient temperatures, extended ramp times and high duty cycle conditions may cause the S611 power pole conductors to reach a temperature that exceeds their thermal rating. The S611 is equipped with sensors that monitor the temperature of the power poles. Overtemperature protection occurs if the devices thermal capacity is exceeded. The soft starter will trip in overtemperature conditions, preventing device failure. The device pole temperature value can be monitored through the UI or the communications network. This feature can be of use in determining an impending overtemperature trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending trip before a trip occurs, halting the process. Costly system shutdown can be avoided.
Reset Mode
The S611 can be set up for automatic or manual reset on trip. The manual reset mode requires the operator to physically press the RESET button located on the soft starter. The overload can be manually reset through the UI or through the communications network. The automatic reset mode allows the soft starter to be automatically reset as soon as the trip condition is no longer present. With the automatic reset mode, after the fault is no longer present, the motor will be restarted as soon as a valid start signal is present.
Short Circuit
The use of a short-circuit protective device in coordination with the S611 is required in branch motor circuits by most electrical codes. Short-circuit coordination ratings with both fuses and Eaton molded-case circuit breakers are available providing customers with design exibility. The S611 has shortcircuit coordination ratings as an open component, an enclosed starter, and in a motor control center.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 061

30.5-21
Phase Reversal
The S611 can determine if the proper line phase sequence is present by default. The device will trip if the line phase sequence is something other than A-B-C. The S611 can be congured to operate under reversed phase conditions (A-C-B).
The S611 has an impressive array of system monitoring capabilities that allow users to access real-time process and diagnostic data. This data can be viewed at the device with the UI or through a communications network. Data over a communications network can provide valuable insight into the condition of the equipment and processes. Maintenance and production personnel can monitor critical operational and maintenance data from a central control station that can be located far away from the production facility. Process data can be monitored to determine system anomalies that may indicate a need for preventive maintenance or an impeding failure. Adjustments made through the communications network can reduce costs by minimizing the time traveling to the location where the motor controls are located. When faults do occur, realtime fault data can assist maintenance in troubleshooting and planning repair resources. Remote reset signals can be given to tripped devices without the need for manual intervention by maintenance personnel.
Three-Phase Pole Currents

Provides three rms phase pole currents in amperes, accurate to within 2%. The pole current is the current through the soft starter. The line and pole current will be identical in in-line applications.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Three-Phase Line Voltages

Provides the individual rms threephase line voltages. Imbalances or changes in the relative phase voltage to one another can indicate anomalies in the motor or the electrical distribution system. Voltage can be used to monitor electrical distribution system performance. Warnings, alarms and system actions to low or high voltage conditions can be implemented.
Shorted SCR Detection

The S611 monitors the operation of the power poles and will trip under a shorted SCR condition.
Open SCR Detection

The S611 monitors the operation of the power poles and will trip under an open SCR condition.
Low Current
Low current conditions can be a result of a loss of load or a failure in the mechanical system. The S611 has low current protection that will trip if the average rms current falls below a preset value. The low current protection can be programmed as a percent of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.
Percent Thermal Memory

Provides the real-time calculated thermal memory value. The S611 calculates thermal memory value. A 100% value represents the maximum safe temperature of the motor. When the thermal memory value reaches 100%, an overload trip will occur, removing power to the motor. The thermal memory value can be of great use in determining an impending overload trip condition. Alarms can be implemented in the process monitoring system warning of an impending trip before a trip occurs, halting the process. Costly system downtime can be avoided.
Low Voltage
Low voltage conditions can result from disturbances in the electrical power distribution system. Low voltage conditions can cause a malfunction and damage to electrical equipment. The S611 has low voltage protection that will trip if the average rms voltage falls below a preset value. The low voltage protection can be programmed as a percent of nominal voltage from 1% to 99% with a trip delay of 0.160 seconds.
Average Line Current

Provides the average of the three phase rms line currents in amperes, accurate to within 2%. Current data can be used to indicate a need for maintenance. Increased currents in a xed load application can indicate a reduction in system efciencies and performance, signifying system maintenance is due.
Pole Temperature
Increases in pole temperature are caused by increases in ambient temperature, start/stop times and start duty cycles. Changes in pole temperatures represent a change in system operating conditions. Identifying unexpected operating conditions or changes can prompt maintenance and aid in process evaluation activities.
High Voltage
High voltage conditions can result from disturbances in the electrical power distribution system. High voltage conditions can cause malfunctions or failures of electrical equipment. The S611 has high voltage protection that will trip if the average rms voltage is greater than a preset value. The high voltage protection can be programmed as a percent of nominal voltage from 101% to 120% with a trip delay of 0.160 seconds.
Average Pole Current

Provides the average of the three-phase rms pole currents in amperes, accurate to within 2%. The pole current is the current through the soft starter. The line and pole current will be identical in in-line applications, and will differ in inside-the-delta applications.
Average Line Current as a % FLA

Provides the average rms line current as a percentage of the S611 FLA setting.
Power Monitoring
S611 does monitor the power and it can be displayed on the UI.
Three-Phase Line Currents

Provides three rms phase line currents in amperes, accurate to within 2%. Imbalances or changes in the relative phase current to one another can indicate anomalies in the motor or the electrical distribution system.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 062
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Diagnostics
Fault Queue
Current fault and a fault queue containing the last nine system faults can be read through the UI or the communications network. Fault identication can minimize troubleshooting time and cost, and prevent arc ash incidents. The fault queue can be remotely accessed through a communications network to assist in planning maintenance resources. 30 different faults can be identied by the S611.
Current Limit Start

Limits the maximum current available to the motor during the start phase. This mode of soft starting is used when it becomes necessary to limit the maximum starting current due to long start times or to protect the motor. This start mode allows you to set the maximum starting current as a percentage of locked rotor current and the duration of the current limit. Bypass contactors close after current limit time. Maximum current of 085% locked rotor current Adjustable ramp time 0.5 180 seconds (can be extended with factory modication)
Kick Start
Selectable feature in both Voltage Ramp Start and Current Limit Start modes. Provides a current and torque kick for 02.0 seconds. This provides greater initial current to develop additional torque to breakaway a high friction load.

085% of locked rotor torque 02.0 seconds duration
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of a load. Used when a stop-time that is greater than the coast-to-stop time is desired. Often used with high friction loads where a sudden stop may cause system or load damage.
Control Status
The S611 provides data that represents system conditions that can be read through the UI or the communications network. This data identies the status of the system and the control commands the system is requesting of the S611. This can be used for advanced troubleshooting and system integration activities.
Stop time = 060 seconds
Operation
Starting and Stopping Modes
The S611 has a variety of starting and stopping methods to provide superior performance in the most demanding applications. The motor can be started in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current Limit Start mode. Kick Start and Soft Stop are available within both starting modes.
Figure 30.5-9. Ramp Start
Voltage Ramp Start

Provides a voltage ramp to the motor resulting in a constant torque increase. The most commonly used form of soft start, this start mode allows you to set the initial torque value and the duration of the ramp to full voltage conditions. Bypass contactors close after ramp time. Adjustable initial torque 085% of locked rotor torque Adjustable ramp time 0.5 180 seconds (can be extended with factory modication)
Figure 30.5-10. Current Limit Start
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 063

30.5-23
Edge and Level Sensing Control

Edge or level sensing is selected with the Start Control parameter in the Advanced Conguration Menu. Factory default is level sensing.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Edge Sensing
Edge sensing requires 120 Vac power be momentarily applied to the Start terminal (with the Permissive terminal 120 Vac) to initiate a start under all conditions. After a stop or fault occurs, the 120 Vac must be removed, then reapplied to pin 1 before another start can occur. This control conguration should be used when restarting of the motor after a fault or stop must be supervised manually or as a part of a control scheme. The cycling of 120 Vac power to the Permissive terminal before starting is required regardless of the position of the auto reset parameter.
Figure 30.5-11. Kick Start Graphic
Level Sensing
Figure 30.5-12. Stop Ramp Graphic Level sensing will enable a motor to restart after a fault is cleared without cycling 120 Vac to the Permissive terminal as long as: Permissive terminal is supplied with 120 Vac The auto reset parameter is set to enabled All faults have cleared or have been reset
This control conguration should be used where it is desirable to restart a motor after a fault without additional manual or automatic control. An example of this condition would be on a remote pumping station where it is desirable to automatically restart a pump after a power outage without operator intervention. If the auto reset feature is used, CAUTION must be exercised to ensure that any restart occurs in a safe manner.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 064
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Product Selection
Motor applications and customer needs come in many different varieties. The standard and severeduty rating tables provide guidelines
Maximum Current Amperes 52 65 77 99 125 156 180 242 302 361 414 60 Hz 200V 1.0 SF 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 1.15 SV 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 230V 1.0 SF 15 20 25 30 40 60 60 75 100 150 N/A 1.15 SV 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 460V 1.0 SF 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 1.15 SV 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 250 575600V 1.0 SF 50 60 75 100 125 150 150 250 350 350 450 1.15 SV 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 S611A052N3S S611A065N3S S611A077N3S S611B099N3S S611B125N3S S611C156N3S S611C180N3S S611D242N3S S611E302N3S S611E361N3S S611F414N3S
on what the soft starter is capable of. If the application falls under these categories, use these charts. For other applications, or when a question
arises, consult a local Eaton Representative or call the Eaton Technical Resource Center.
Table 30.5-20. S611 Horsepower Ratings300% FLA at 15 Seconds at 50C

Catalog Number
Options
Pump Control
For pump control option, change the 9th digit in the Catalog Number to P. Table 30.5-21. S611 Horsepower RatingsPump Control Option
Maximum Current Amperes 52 65 77 99 125 156 180 242 302 361 414 60 Hz 200V 1.0 SF 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 1.15 SV 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 230V 1.0 SF 15 20 25 30 40 60 60 75 100 150 N/A 1.15 SV 15 20 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 460V 1.0 SF 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 1.15 SV 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 250 575600V 1.0 SF 50 60 75 100 125 150 150 250 350 350 450 1.15 SV 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 S611A052P3S S611A065P3S S611A077P3S S611B099P3S S611B125P3S S611C156P3S S611C180P3S S611D242P3S S611E302P3S S611E361P3S S611F414P3S Catalog Number

IEC 60947-4-2 UL listed CSA certied (3211 06)

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 065

30.5-25

Table 30.5-22. SpecicationsS611 Solid-State Soft Starter
Soft Starter S611A052 S611A065 S611A072 S611B099 S611B125 S611C156 S611C180 S611D242 (Partial Catalog Number) Maximum current capacity FLA range 52 2652 65 32.565 11.58 (294.1) 19.45 (494.0) 7.46 (189.5) 24 (11) 77 38.577 99 4899 125 62.5125 156 78156 180 90180 242 120242 11.58 (294.1) 20.83 (529.1) 8.37 (212.6) 38 (15) S611E302 S611E361 S611F414 302 151302 361 414
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
One 2600 kcmil Two 2600 kcmil Two 2600 kcmil Two 2600 kcmil
180.5361 207414 17.56 (446.0) 31.15 (791.2) 9.54 (242.3) 102 (46)
DimensionsInches (mm)
Width Height Depth Weight in lbs (kg) 11.58 (294.1) 19.45 (494.0) 7.46 (189.5) 24 (11) 11.58 (294.1) 20.83 (529.1) 8.37 (212.6) 33 (15) 10 million 660V 0.5180 seconds 1g Meets ITSA standards 130600V 4763 Hz 50100% FLA 5, 10, 20 and 30 One 142/0 One 142/0 One 142/0 One 142/0 One 2600 kcmil One 2600 kcmil Lug One 2600 kcmil 17.56 (446.0) 31.15 (791.2) 9.54 (242.3) 86 (39)
General Information
Bypass mechanical lifespan Insulating voltage Ramp time range Resistance to vibration Resistance to shock
Operating voltage Operating frequency Overload setting (frame) Trip class

Number of conductors Wire sizes Type of connectors
32 33
Control Wiring
Wire sizes in AWG Number of conductors Torque requirements Maximum size 2212 Two (or one 1214 AWG) 3.5 lb-in 12 AWG
34 35

Voltage range (24V 10%) Steady-state current amperes Inrush current amperes Ripple 0.375 0.5 0.375 0.5 0.375 0.5 0.375 0.5 0.375 0.5 108132 0.375 0.5 1% 120 24 3 0.375 0.5 0.75 1 0.75 1 0.75 1
36 37 38 39

Environment
Temperatureoperating Temperaturestorage Altitude Humidity Operating position Pollution degree IEC 947-1 Impulse withstand voltage IEC 947-4-1 20 to +50C 40 to +85C <2000m, derate 0.5% per 100m >2000m <95% noncondensing Vertical, line side up 3 6000V
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

DS6 Soft Start Controllers
September 2011
Sheet 30 066
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Operation
Voltage Ramp Start
This start method provides a voltage ramp to the motor, resulting in a constant torque increase. This most commonly used form of soft start mode allows you to set the initial voltage value and the duration of the ramp to full voltage conditions. Bypass contactor(s) close after ramp time has elapsed.
Bypass 100% Speed
Start
Run
Time (Seconds)
Figure 30.5-13. Start Ramp
General Description
Eatons DS6 line of reduced voltage solid-state soft start controllers is very compact, multi-functional, easy to install and easy to commission. Designed to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors, the device is available for current ranges from 40 to 180A.
Adjustable initial voltage 3092% of full voltage Adjustable ramp time 130 seconds
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of load. Used when a stop-time that is greater than the coast-to-stop time is desired. Often used with high friction loads where a sudden stop may cause system or product damage. Setting the soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off this feature.
1 2 3
Run Soft Stop
100% Speed
With its small size, it can easily t in place of existing soft starters, wye-delta starters, or across-the-line NEMA and IEC starters. This feature allows easy upgrades to existing systems. The product is designed to be wired in the three-phase line feeding the three motor input leads as is done for normal across-the-line starting. The starter uses silicon controlled rectiers (SCRs) to ramp the voltage to the motor, providing smooth acceleration and deceleration of the load. After the motor is started, the internal run bypass contactor closes, resulting in the motor running directly across-the-line. Internal run bypass signicantly reduces the heat generated as compared to non-bypass starters. The soft stop option allows for a ramp stop time that may be longer than the coast-to-stop time. An external over-load protection is needed.
Time (Seconds)
Soft stop time = 030 seconds
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed) 2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage) 3 = Soft Stop Time
Figure 30.5-14. Stop Ramp
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 067

30.5-27
Features and Benets
Protective Features

Run Bypass mode greatly reduces internal heating created by the power dissipation across the SCRs. The bypass contactor directly connects the motor to the line and improves system efciency by reducing internal power losses Less heat minimizes enclosure size and cooling requirements, and maximizes the life of all devices in the enclosure LED displays device status and provides fault indication Variable ramp times and voltage control (torque control) settings provide unlimited starting congurations, allowing for maximum application exibility Soft stop control suits applications where an abrupt stop of the load is not acceptable. Soft acceleration and deceleration reduces wear on belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts and bearings Minimizes the peak inrush currents stress on the power system Manages peak starting torque to diminish mechanical system wear and damage 24 Vdc control module enhances personnel and equipment safety
There are two auxiliary relays First relay is a TOR relay that closes when the TOR is achieved (internal bypass relays close) The second relay is a RUN relay that closes when the RUN signal is initiated and opens when RUN signal is removed. It remains closed during stop ramp time, if set to a value greater than 0. The RUN relay will also open if a fault occurs Mains connectionThe mains connection is monitored for an open condition and/or undervoltage Motor connectionThe motor connection is monitored for an open condition SCR faultsSCR performance is monitored during the ramp cycle for proper operation Heat sink over/under temperature High ambient temperatures, extended ramp times and high duty cycle conditions may cause the DS6 to exceed its thermal rating. When temperature goes under 5C, unit will trip as well. The DS6 is equipped with sensors that monitor the temperature of the device. The soft starter will trip in over/under temperature conditions, preventing device failure Bypass relayThe DS6 can detect if the bypass relay fails to close after the ramp start or opens while the motor is running. The DS6 will trip on a bypass dropout fault if either of these conditions occur. The device does not start when bypass relay is closed and start signal is applied 24 Vdc low voltageIf the control voltage falls below 20 Vdc at any time during operation, the unit will fault
IEC 60947-4-2 EN 60947-4-2 UL listed (E251034) CSA certied CE marked C-Tick
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Additional Information
Instruction Leaet IL03901001E
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 068
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Product Selection
DS6 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection. Table 30.5-23. DS6 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Rated Current Amperes 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180

Motor Power (hp) 200V 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 230V 10 20 25 30 30 50 60 75 460V 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
Maximum Allowable Breaker Size HFD3150L HFD3200L HJD3250 HKD3300 HKD3350 HKD3400 HLD3450 HLD3500
Maximum Allowable Fuse Size 150A Class RK5 200A Class RK5 200A Class RK5 300A Class RK5 350A Class RK5 500A Class RK5 500A Class RK5 500A Class RK5
Recommended XTOB Overload XTOB040DC1 XTOB057DC1 XTOB065DC1 XTOB100GC1S XTOB100GC1S XTOB125GC1S XTOB160LC1 XTOB220LC1
Recommended C440 Overload C440A1A045SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440A1A005SAX C440A1A005SAX C440A1A005SAX
Catalog Number DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N
Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1. XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload. XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload. ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
Table 30.5-24. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C

Motor Power (hp) 200V 7.5 10 15 15 20 30 30 40 230V 10 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 460V 20 30 30 40 50 75 75 100
Recommended XTOB Overload XTOB040DC1 XTOB040DC1 XTOB057DC1 XTOB057DC1 XTOB100GC1S XTOB100GC1S XTOB100GC1S XTOB150GC1S
Recommended C440 Overload C440A1A045SAX C440A1A045SAX C440A1A045SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440A1A005SAX
Catalog Number DS6-34DSX041NO-N DS6-34DSX055NO-N DS6-34DSX068NO-N DS6-34DSX081NO-N DS6-34DSX099NO-N DS6-34DSX134NO-N DS6-34DSX161NO-N DS6-34DSX196NO-N
Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1. XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload. ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 069

30.5-29
DS6 Soft Start kW Ratings

Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection. Table 30.5-25. DS6 Soft Start ControllerskW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C

22 23
Catalog Number DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N
Motor Power (kW) 230V 11 15 15 22 30 30 45 55 400V 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
Recommended XTOB Overload XTOB057DC1 XTOB057DC1 XTOB070GC1 XTOB100GC1S XTOB100GC1S XTOB150GC1S XTOB160LC1 XTOB220LC1
Recommended C440 Overload C440A1A045SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440A1A005SAX C440A1A005SAX C440A1A005SAX
24 25 26 27 28
Table 30.5-26. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
Rated Current Amperes 28.8 37.5 46 56 68 90 106 134

Motor Power (kW) 230V 7.5 11 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 400V 11 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Recommended XTOB Overload XTOB040DC1 XTOB040DC1 XTOB057DC1 XTOB065DC1 XTOB100GC1S XTOB100GC1S XTOB160LC1 XTOB160LC1
Recommended C440 Overload C440A1A045SAX C440A1A045SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440B1A100SAX C440A1A005SAX C440A1A005SAX
Catalog Number DS6-34DSX041NO-N DS6-34DSX055NO-N DS6-34DSX068NO-N DS6-34DSX081NO-N DS6-34DSX099NO-N DS6-34DSX134NO-N DS6-34DSX161NO-N DS6-34DSX196NO-N
29 30 31 32 33
Considerations
1. Either XTOB, C306 or C440 series or equivalent overload protection devices may be selected. 2. Contactor is optional for normal applications. It is recommended for mains isolation.
Power Supply
Eatons PSG and ELC power supplies are recommended as a compact and low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices have a wide input voltage range, and robust screw terminals make these power supplies easy to install and use. These power supplies are available in 1A and 2A models.
Table 30.5-27. Power Supply Selection

Description 85264V input and 24V output 380480V input and 24V output Catalog Number ELC-PS01 PSS25F
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
100240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60E 380480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60F
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 070
22 23 24 25 26 27

Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers
Description Unit C DS6-34DSX041N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) 4.00 (1.8) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz DS6-34DSX055N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) 4.00 (1.8) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 kV 52 15 20 40 15 30 52A: AC53a; 35; 7510 DS6-34DSX068N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) 4.00 (1.8) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 kV 65 20 25 50 15 37 65A: AC53a; 35; 7510 DS6-34DSX081N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) 4.00 (1.8) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 kV 77 25 30 60 22 45 77A: AC53a; 35; 7510
General
Standards Certications Ambient temperature (operation)
Ambient temperature (storage) Altitude
Installation
V Hz
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Protection degree Protection against contact Overvoltage category/ pollution degree Shock resistance Vibration resistance according to EN 60721-3-2 Dimensions in inches (mm) (W x H x D) Weight in lbs (kg)
Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage Mains frequency Rated impulse withstand voltage Rated operation current
Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV 50 s Ie hp hp hp kW kW 40 10 10 30 11 22 40A: AC53a; 35; 7510
Motor Power Ratings

200V 230V 460V 230V 400V Overload cycle according to EN 60947-4-2
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 071

30.5-31
Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)

Description Unit DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N
22 23 24 25 26
Wire Specications
Power terminals (box terminals) Single conductor Terminal torque Control signals Single conductor Terminal torque AWG lb-in AWG lb-in 122/0 5380 16 min. 3.5 122/0 5380 16 min. 3.5 4 kV 122/0 5380 16 min. 3.5 4 kV 122/0 5380 16 min. 3.5 4 kV
Power Section
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV 50 s Us Vdc mA
Control Commands
Supply voltage control board Nominal voltage Nominal current ramp, TOR Current peak (closing shorting contactors) Voltage to the control terminals (rated control voltage) DC driven Input current at 24 Vdc +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms
27 28 29
mA V A
+24 Vdc +10%/15% 14 2 (TOR, ready) 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 3A, resistive
Relay Outputs
Number of relays Maximum voltage Maximum current
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Soft Start Functions

Ramp times Start ramp Stop ramp Initial voltage % line voltage s s 130 030 3092% 130 030 3092% 130 030 3092% 130 030 3092%
CA08104001E

Description Unit C DS6-34DSX099N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47 (93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9) 4.00 (1.8) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz DS6-34DSX134N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01 (108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1) 8.16 (3.7) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 kV 124 40 50 100 30 75 124A: AC53a; 35; 7510 DS6-34DSX161N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01 (108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1) 8.16 (3.7) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 kV 156 50 60 125 45 90 156A: AC53a; 35; 7510
September 2011
Sheet 30 072
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
DS6-34DSX196N0-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2 UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celsius to 60C 25 to +55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 1% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01 (108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1) 8.16 (3.7) 200460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 kV 180 60 75 150 55 110 180A: AC53a; 35; 7510
General
Standards Certications/marking Ambient temperature (operation)
Ambient temperature (storage) Altitude
Installation Protection degree Protection against contact Overvoltage category/ pollution degree
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance according to EN 60721-3-2 Dimensions in inches (mm) (W x H x D) Weight in lbs (kg) V Hz
Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage Mains frequency Rated impulse withstand voltage Rated operation current
Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV 50 s Ie hp hp hp kW kW 96 30 30 75 30 55 96A: AC53a; 35; 7510
Motor Power Ratings

200V 230V 460V 230V 400V Overload cycle according to EN 60947-4-2
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 073

30.5-33

Description Unit DS6-34DSX099N0-N DS6-34DSX134N0-N DS6-34DSX161N0-N DS6-34DSX196N0-N
22 23 24 25 26
Wire Specications
Power terminals (box terminals) Single conductor Terminal torque Control signals Single conductor Terminal torque AWG lb-in AWG lb-in 122/0 5380 16 min. 3.5 12 AWG350 kcmil 44123 16 min. 3.5 4 kV 12 AWG350 kcmil 44123 16 min. 3.5 4 kV 12 AWG350 kcmil 44123 16 min. 3.5 4 kV
Power Section
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 1.2/ 4 kV 50 s
Control Commands
Supply voltage control board Us Vdc Nominal voltage mA Nominal current ramp, TOR Current peak (closing shorting contactors) Voltage to the control terminals (rated control voltage) DC driven Input current at 24 Vdc +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms +24 Vdc +10%/15% 65 600 mA/50 ms
27 28 29
mA V A
Relay Outputs
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 074
22 23 24 25 26 27 28

1.18 (30.0) 1.18 (30.0) 0.88 (22.5)
PE
6.34 (161.0) 6.89 (175.0)
5.08 (129.0)
PE E
29 30 31 32 33
0.59 (15.0)
3.66 (93.0)
0.88 (22.5)
1.38 (35.0) 5.47 (139.0)
Figure 30.5-15. 2575 hp Models
1.38 (35.0)
1.38 (35.0) PE
7.87 (200.0)
34 35 36 37 38
Figure 30.5-16. 100150 hp Models
PE (108.0) 0.59 (15.0) 2.07 (52.5) 8.47 6.22 (158.0) (215.0)
7.01 (178.0)
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 075

30.5-35
Operation
Voltage Ramp Start
This start method provides a voltage ramp to the motor, resulting in a constant torque increase. This most commonly used form of soft start mode allows you to set the initial voltage value and the duration of the ramp to full voltage conditions. Adjustable initial voltage 3092% of full voltage (120/230 Vac control voltage) Adjustable initial voltage 30100% of full voltage (24 Vac/Vdc control voltage) Adjustable ramp time 130 seconds Bypass relays close at the end the ramp time (TOR)
Bypass 100% Speed
22 23 24
Start Run
Time (Seconds)
25 26
Figure 30.5-17. Start Ramp
100% Speed
1 2 3
Run Soft Stop
General Description
Eatons DS7 line of reduced voltage solid-state soft start controllers is very compact, multi-functional, easy to install and easy to commission. Designed to control the acceleration and deceleration of three-phase motors, the device is available for current ranges from 432A in four frame sizes.
27 28 29 30
Time (Seconds)
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of load. Used when a stop-time that is greater than the coast-to-stop time is desired. Often used with high friction loads where a sudden stop may cause system or product damage. Setting the soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off this feature.
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed) 2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage) 3 = Soft Stop Time
Figure 30.5-18. Stop Ramp
With its small size, it can easily t in place of existing soft starters, wye-delta starters, or across-the-line NEMA and IEC starters. This feature allows easy upgrades to existing systems. The product is designed to be wired in the three-phase line feeding the three motor input leads as is done for normal across-the-line starting. The starter uses silicon controlled rectiers (SCRs) to ramp the voltage to the motor, providing smooth acceleration and deceleration of the load. After the motor is started, the internal run bypass relay closes, resulting in the motor running directly across-the-line. Internal run bypass signicantly reduces the heat generated as compared to non-bypass starters. The soft stop option allows for a ramp stop time that may be longer than the coast-to-stop time. An external overload protection relay is needed.
Auxiliary Contacts
Auxiliary contacts are provided to indicate soft start controller status.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Soft stop time = 030 seconds
Frame Size 1 (4A to 12A)One Relay

The auxiliary relay indicates when the soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR).
Frame Size 2 (16A to 32A)Two Relays

One auxiliary relay indicates when the soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR). One auxiliary relay indicates that a RUN command is present, including start ramp, bypass and stop ramp times.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 076
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Features and Benets
Protective Features

29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Run bypass mode greatly reduces internal heating created by the power dissipation across the SCRs. The bypass relay directly connects the motor to the line and improves system efciency by reducing internal power losses Less heat minimizes enclosure size and cooling requirements, and maximizes the life of all devices in the enclosure LED displays device status and provides fault indication Variable ramp times and voltage control (torque control) settings provide unlimited starting congurations, allowing for maximum application exibility Soft stop control suits applications where an abrupt stop of the load is not acceptable. Soft acceleration and deceleration reduces wear on belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts and bearings Minimizes the peak inrush currents stress on the power system. Peak starting torque can be managed to diminish mechanical system wear and damage 24 Vac/Vdc control voltage enhances personnel and equipment safety. 120/230 Vac control voltage is also available Auxiliary relays indicate status of the soft start controllers The TOR relay is active until motor stop command is received and/or the soft start controller detects a fault condition RUN relay is active during the start ramp, bypass and stop ramp
Mains connectionThe mains connection is monitored for a phase loss and/or undervoltage during ramp up Motor connectionThe motor connection is monitored for an open condition during the ramp SCR faultsSCR performance is monitored during the ramp cycle for proper operation Heat sink over/under temperature High ambient temperatures, extended ramp times and high duty cycle conditions may cause the DS7 to exceed its thermal rating. When temperature goes under 5C, unit will trip as well. The DS7 is equipped with sensors that monitor the temperature of the device. The soft starter will trip in over/under temperature conditions, preventing device failure Warning is indicated for an overtemperature condition for the next start Bypass relay The DS7 can detect if the bypass relay fails to close after the ramp start or opens while the motor is running The DS7 will also detect a condition whereas the bypass relay is closed when the RUN command is given The DS7 will trip on a bypass dropout fault if either of these conditions occur
IEC 60947-4-2 EN 60947-4-2 UL listed CSA certied CE marked C-Tick
Additional Information
Instruction Leaet IL03901001E
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 077

30.5-37
Product Selection
DS7 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection. Table 30.5-29. DS7 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Rated Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Current 200V 230V 480V Allowable Allowable Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size 3.7 6.9 7.8 11 15.2 22 32

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Connection Kit to MMP Catalog Number
Recommended MMP Recommended XTOE Overload XTOB Overload (Direct Connect) XTOE005BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020CCS XTOE045CCS XTOE045CCS
Connection Kit to MMP
Catalog Number
0.75 1.5 2 3 3 5 7.5
0.75 2 2 3 5 7.5 10
2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
HFD3015 HFD3015 HFD3020 HFD3030 HFD3035 HFD3060 HFD3070
15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1
XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-342SX004NO-N XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-342SX016NO-N XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specic FLA. Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480V. Not to be used with 230V. 24 Vac/Vdc device. 120/230 Vac device.
Table 30.5-30. DS7 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
Rated Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Current 200V 230V 480V Allowable Allowable Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size 3 4.8 6.9 9 11 17.5 22

Recommended Recommended MMP XTOB Overload XTOE Overload (Direct Connect) XTOE005BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020CCS XTOE045CCS XTOE045CCS
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 5 5
0.5 1 2 2 3 5 7.5
1.5 3 3 5 7.5 10 15
XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-342SX004NO-N XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-342SX016NO-N XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
CA08104001E

DS7 Soft Start Controllers DS7 Soft Start kW Ratings
Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection. Table 30.5-31. DS7 Soft Start ControllerskW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2 10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Rated Motor Power (kW) Maximum Maximum Current 230V Allowable Allowable 400V Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size 3.8 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 HFD3015 HFD3015 HFD3020 HFD3030 HFD3035 HFD3060 HFD3070 Recommended Recommended MMP XTOB Overload XTOE Overload (Direct Connect) XTOE005BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020CCS XTOE045CCS XTOE045CCS Connection Kit to MMP
September 2011
Sheet 30 078
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Catalog Number
XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-342SX004NO-N XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-342SX016NO-N XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
7 9 12 16 24 32

Table 30.5-32. DS7 Soft Start ControllerskW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2 10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
Rated Motor Power (kW) Maximum Maximum Current 230V Allowable Allowable 400V Amperes Breaker Size Fuse Size 2.5 3.8 7 9 12 16 24

Recommended Recommended MMP XTOB Overload XTOE Overload (Direct Connect) XTOE005BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020BCS XTOE020CCS XTOE045CCS XTOE045CCS
Connection Kit to MMP
Catalog Number
0.33 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
1 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 11
XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-342SX004NO-N XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-342SX016NO-N XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
Considerations
1. Either XTOB or XTOE or equivalent overload protection devices may be selected. In addition, manual motor protectorsMMP series can also be considered. 2. Isolation contactor is required for mains isolation.
24 Vdc Control Power

Eatons ELC power supplies are recommended as a compact and low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices have a wide input voltage range and robust screw terminals make these power supplies easy to install and use. These power supplies are available in 1A and 2A models.
AC Control Power
24, 120 or 230 Vac may be used for control power in accordance with the model requirements. Table 30.5-33. DC Power Supply Selection
Description 85264V input and 24V output 380480V input and 24V output Catalog Number ELC-PS01 PSS25F
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 079

30.5-39

Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers
Rated Control Circuit Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Voltage 110/230 Vac Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-342SX004NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 0.2 B 45 x 130 x 95 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.35 0.77 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 0.35 B 45 x 130 x 95 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.35 0.77 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 7 DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 0.35 B 45 x 130 x 95 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.35 0.77 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 9 DS7-340SX012NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved Back of hand and ngerproof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 0.6 B 45 x 130 x 95 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.35 0.77 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 12
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
General
Standards
Certications/marking Ambient temperature (operation) Ambient temperature (storage) Altitude
Installation Protection class
Protection class applies to the front and operator control and display elements. Protection type from all sides is IP00. Busbar tag shroud Overvoltage category/ pollution degree Shock resistance
Vibration resistance according to EN 60721-3-2 Mean heat dissipation at rated duty cycle Radio interference Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight W mm in kg lb
Main Circuit
Rated operational voltage V Mains frequency Rated operation current AC 53 Hz Ie
Motor Power Ratings

200V 230V 480V 230V 400V Overload cycle according to EN 60947-4-2 hp hp hp kW kW 0.75 0.75 2 0.75 1.5 4A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 1.5 2 3 1.5 3 7A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 2 2 5 2.2 4 9A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 3 5 10 3 5.5 12A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Rated Control Circuit Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Voltage 110/230 Vac Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N DS7-342SX004NO-N DS7-340SX007NO-N DS7-342SX007NO-N DS7-340SX009NO-N DS7-342SX009NO-N
September 2011
Sheet 30 080
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DS7-340SX012NO-N DS7-342SX012NO-N
Wire Specications
Power terminals Single conductorsolid or stranded Terminal torque Control signals Single conductorsolid or stranded Terminal torque AWG lb-in AWG lb-in 1810 11 1810 11 1810 11 1810 11 4 kV 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 1 (TOR) 250 1A 1810 11 1810 11 4 kV 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 1 (TOR) 250 1A 1810 11 1810 11 4 kV 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 1 (TOR) 250 1A
Power Section
Rated impulse withstand voltage Rated insulation voltage Uimp 4 kV 1.2/ 50 s Vdc mA Vac A 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 1 (TOR) 250 1A
Control CommandsVac/Vdc
Supply voltage control board Us nominal Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc Pickup voltage Dropout voltage
Relay Outputs

Ramp times Start ramp Stop ramp Initial voltage % line voltage s s Vac mA Vac Vac Vac A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 1 (TOR) 250 3A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 1 (TOR) 250 3A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 1 (TOR) 250 3A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 1 (TOR) 250 3A
Control CommandsVac
Relay Outputs

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 081

30.5-41

Rated Control Circuit Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Voltage 110/230 Vac Unit DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-342SX016NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved DS7-340SX032NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N IEC/EN 60947-4-2; GB14048.6; UL508; CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91; CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly by 1% of rated current per Celcius to 60C 25 to 55C 01000m, above 1000m derate linearly by 2.5% of rated current per 100m to a maximum of 2000m Vertical IP20 With optional covers from the NZM range, protection type IP40 from all sides can be achieved
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
General
Standards
Certications/marking Ambient temperature (operation) Ambient temperature (storage) Altitude
Installation Protection class
Protection class applies to the front and operator control and display elements. Protection type from all sides is IP00. Busbar tag shroud Overvoltage category/ pollution degree Shock resistance
Back of hand and nger-proof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 0.8 B 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.4 0.88 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 16
Back of hand and nger-proof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 1.1 B 45 x 150 x 118 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.4 0.88 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 24
Back of hand and nger-proof (from front face) II/2 8g/11 ms 2M2 1.5 B 45 x 150 x 118 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 0.4 0.88 230460 Vac 50/60 Hz 32
Vibration resistance according to EN 60721-3-2 Mean heat dissipation at rated duty cycle Radio interference Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight W in kg lb
mm 45 x 150 x 118
Main Circuit
Rated operational voltage V Mains frequency Rated operation current AC 53 Hz Ie
Motor Power Ratings

200V 230V 480V 230V 400V Overload cycle according to EN 60947-4-2 hp hp hp kW kW 3 5 10 4 7.5 16A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 5 7.5 15 5.5 11 24A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 10 10 25 7.5 15 32A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10
38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Rated Control Circuit Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Voltage 110/230 Vac Unit DS7-340SX016NO-N DS7-342SX016NO-N DS7-340SX024NO-N DS7-342SX024NO-N
September 2011
Sheet 30 082
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DS7-340SX032NO-N DS7-342SX032NO-N
Wire Specications
Power terminals Single conductorsolid or stranded Terminal torque Control Signals Single conductorsolid or stranded Terminal torque AWG lb-in AWG lb-in 186 11 1810 11 186 11 1810 11 4 kV 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 2 (TOR, Ready) 250 1A 186 11 1810 11 4 kV 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 2 (TOR, Ready) 250 1A
Power Section
Rated impulse withstand voltage Rated insulation voltage Uimp 4 kV 1.2/ 50 s Vdc mA Vac A 500 20.426.4 1.6 +17.3 to +27 +3 to 0 2 (TOR, Ready) 250 1A
Control CommandsVac/Vdc
Relay Outputs

Ramp times Start ramp Stop ramp Initial voltage % line voltage s s Vac mA Vac Vac Vac A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 2 (TOR, Run) 250 3A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 2 (TOR, Run) 250 3A 130 030 30100% 102253 4 102230 028 2 (TOR, Run) 250 3A
Control CommandsVac
Supply voltage control board Us nominal Current consumption at 102253 Vac Pickup voltage Dropout voltage
Relay Outputs

Ramp times Start ramp Stop ramp Initial voltage % line voltage s s 130 030 3092% 130 030 3092% 130 030 3092%
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 083

30.5-43
22 23
5.12 (130.0)
4.80 (122.0)
4.92 (125.0)
24 25
M4
3.74 (95.0)
26 27 28
1.78 (45.0)
1.38 (35.0)
Catalog Numbers DS7-340SX004N0-N DS7-340SX007N0-N DS7-340SX009N0-N DS7-340SX012N0-N DS7-342SX004N0-N DS7-342SX007N0-N DS7-342SX009N0-N DS7-342SX012N0-N
29 30
Figure 30.5-19. Frame Size 1
31 32
5.91 (150.0) 5.51 (140.0)
33 34
M4
4.65 (118.0) 1.38 (35.0)
35 36 37
1.78 (45.0)
Catalog Numbers DS7-340SX016N0-N DS7-340SX024N0-N DS7-340SX032N0-N DS7-342SX016N0-N DS7-342SX024N0-N DS7-342SX032N0-N
38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 30.5-20. Frame Size 2
CA08104001E

PSG Series DC Power Supplies
September 2011
Sheet 30 084
22 23 24 25
Product Selection
Table 30.5-35. Power SupplySingle-Phase
Description 85264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output 85264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5A output 85264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/10A output 85264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/20A output Catalog Number PSG60E PSG120E PSG240E PSG480E
26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
PSG Series

General Description
Eatons PSG Series of power supplies is designed to be a high-performance, high-quality line of products covering a majority of 24 Vdc control applications. With global certications, compact size and an impressive operating temperature range, the PSG Series ts a wide variety of applications at a competitive price. Eight models are offered, from 2.5A up to 20A with both single- and threephase input voltage models available.
Universal input voltages: 85264 Vac for single-phase units, 320575 Vac for three-phase units Rugged aluminum housing stands up to harsh environments Current surge (power boost) of 1.5 times nominal current for 1 second allows branch protection and powering of high pickup loads Wide operating temperature range: 20C to +75C (derating above 50C) Adjustable DC voltage output LED indicating light for DC OK simplies troubleshooting Compact size, with common depth and height across all models, allows for common panel depths and family consistency MTBF up to 800,000 hours ensures uptime and reliability Heavy-duty screw terminals with nger-safe protective cover allow use of ring-lug terminals All-metal DIN rail mounting hardware Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location rated
Table 30.5-36. Power SupplyThree-Phase

320575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG60F 320575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5A output PSG120F 320575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/10A output PSG240F 320575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/20A output PSG480F

The PSG Series is a line of generalpurpose power supplies for use in a wide variety of industrial control applications. Applications include communication networks, sensors, PLCs and many other electrical systems. Each model is equipped with a rugged metal housing, heavy-duty screw terminals and a variety of protection features, making the PSG one of the most versatile industrial power supply lines on the market.
UL/cUL listedUL 508 (industrial control equipment) cURusUL 60950-1 IEC EN German safety CSA certied (contact Eaton for certication dates and status) CE marked RoHS compliant
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 085

30.5-45

Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies
Capacity PSG60E 60W 100240 Vac
22
PSG240E 240W 100240 Vac
PSG120E 120W 100240 Vac
PSG480E 480W 100240 Vac
PSG60F 60W 3 x 400500 Vac
PSG120F 120W 3 x 400500 Vac
PSG240F 240W 3 x 400500 Vac
PSG480F 480W 3 x 400500 Vac
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Input
Nominal voltage Voltage range Frequency
4763 Hz (0 Hz at DC input) 1.1A 30A >20 ms <2.5 sec
4763 Hz (0 Hz at DC input) 1.4A <80A >35 ms <1 sec
4763 Hz (0 Hz at DC input) 2.9A N/A >20 ms <1 sec
4763 Hz (0 Hz at DC input) 5.7A N/A >20 ms <1 sec F10H/250V 10A or 16A
4763 Hz (0 Hz at DC input) 0.3A <30A >30 ms <2 sec 3.15AH/500V 3 x circuit breakers 6A, 10A or 16A <3.5 mA 24 Vdc 2% 2228 Vdc 2.5A
4763 Hz (0 Hz at DC input) 0.5A <30A >35 ms <1 sec 3.15AH/500V 3 x circuit breakers 6A, 10A or 16A <3.5 mA 24 Vdc 2% 2228 Vdc 5A
Nominal current Inrush current limitation Mains buffering at nominal load (typ.) Turn-on time Internal fuse External fusing
T3.15 AH/250V T3.15 AH/250V T6.3AH/250V 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 10A or 16A
Leakage current
<1 mA 24 Vdc 2% 2228 Vdc 2.5A Max. 8000 F 10W
<1 mA 24 Vdc 2% 2228 Vdc 5A
<3.5 mA 24 Vdc 2% 2228 Vdc 10A
<1 mA 24 Vdc 2% 2228 Vdc 20A
Output
Nominal output voltage Adjustment range Nominal current Startup with capacitive loads Max. power dissipation idling nominal load approx. Efciency (at 400 Vac and nominal values)
Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F 22.5W 42.5W 72W 9W 18W 36W 72W
>85% typ
>84% typ
>84% typ
>86% typ
>86% at 3 x 400 Vac; >85% at 3 x 500 Vac 3.75A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
>86% at 3 x 400 Vac; >85% at 3 x 500 Vac 7.5A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
>86% at 3 x 400 Vac; >85% at 3 x 500 Vac 15A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
>86% at 3 x 400 Vac; >85% at 3 x 500 Vac 30A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
Current surge (at 24 Vdc) Current surge time/ cycle Residual ripple/peak switching (20 MHz) Parallel operation
3.75A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
7.5A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
15A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
30A 1 sec. (at 10sec. intervals) <50 mV/ <240 mVpp With O-ring Diode 4 kVAC (type test)/3 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/1.5 kVAC (routine test) 1.5 kVAC (type test)/500 Vac (routine test)
Galvanic Isolation
Input/output
38 39 40 41 42 43
Input/ground
Output/ground
Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac. 85264 Vac (DC input range 120375 Vdc). 320575 Vac (DC input range 450800 Vdc).
CA08104001E

Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies (Continued)
Capacity PSG60E 60W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >800,000 hrs 121 mm 32 mm 120 mm 0.37 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C PSG120E 120W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >800,000 hrs 121 mm 50 mm 115 mm 0.54 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C PSG240E 240W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >300,000 hrs 121 mm 85 mm 118.5 mm 1.04 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C PSG480E 480W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >300,000 hrs 121 mm 160 mm 115 mm 1.8 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C PSG60F 60W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >500,000 hrs 121 mm 70 mm 118.5 mm 0.56 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C PSG120F 120W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >500,000 hrs 121 mm 70 mm 118.5 mm 0.72 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C PSG240F 240W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >300,000 hrs 121 mm 85 mm 120.5 mm 0.77 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C
September 2011
Sheet 30 086
22 23 24 25 26 27
PSG480F 480W Aluminum (Al5052) Green LED for DC OK >300,000 hrs 121 mm 160 mm 115 mm 1.71 20C to +75C (>50C derating) 25C to +85C
General/Physical Data
Housing material Signals MTBF Dimensions (L) Dimensions (W) Dimensions (H) Weight (kg) Operating temperature
Storage temperature
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Operating humidity Vibration (operating) Pollution degree Climatic class
<95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, non- <95% RH, noncondensing condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing condensing

3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according 3K3 according to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 to EN 60721 Varistor Varistor Yes Class I with ground connection
Safety and Protection

Transient surge voltage Varistor Yes Class I with ground connection
Varistor Yes Class I with ground connection
Surge voltage protection Yes against internal surge Safety class Class I with ground connection
Shock

10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s/s, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y, Z direction, in acc. with IEC 68-2-6. 30G (300 m/s/s) in all directions according to IEC 68-2-27.
Power Derating Curves

110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10
10 20
30 40 50 60
70 80 85
110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10
10 20
30 40 50 60
70 80 85
110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10
Load (%)
Load (%)
Load (%)
10 20
30 40 50 60
70 80 85
Ambient Temperature (C)
Figure 30.5-21. Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E
Figure 30.5-22. Vertical Mounting Position PSG60F, PSG120E, PSG120F, PSG480E, PSG480F
Figure 30.5-23. Vertical Mounting Position PSG240E, PSG240F
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 087

30.5-47
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
22 23
32.0 0.5
Catalog Number: PSG60E 24V 2.5A
120.5 0.5 105.2 0.5
24
CAUTION HOT SURFACE
25 26
Adjust
121.0 0.5
DC OK
SPEC LABEL
27 28
100-240V~1.5A 50-60Hz
5.0 0.2
29 30
111.4 0.5 96.5 0.5
Figure 30.5-24. PSG60E
31 32
121.0 0.5 SPEC LABEL
33
6.6 0.1
34 35
70.0 0.5
Figure 30.5-25. PSG60F

50.0 0.2
DC 24V 5A
36 37 38 39
121.0 0.2
Adjust DC OK
40 41
AC 100-240V 2A 50-60 Hz
13.0 5.5 115.0 0.6
4.0
42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 088
22 23
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)

111.3 0.5
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
100-240V~5A 50-60Hz
Adjust DC OK
96.4 0.5
121.0 0.5 SPEC LABEL
6.6 0.1
70.0 0.5
118.5 0.5 105.2 0.5
CAUTION HOT SURFACE
24V
10A
Adjust DC OK
121.0 0.5
Catalog Number: PSG240E
SPEC LABEL
5.0 0.2
36 37 38 39 40
24V
85.0 0.5
120.5 0.5 105.2 0.5
CAUTION HOT SURFACE
10A
Adjust DC OK
41 42
121.0 0.5
Catalog Number: PSG240F
SPEC LABEL
5.0 0.2
43
3-Phase 400-500V~0.8A 50-60Hz
85.0 0.5
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 089

30.5-49
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)

22 23
7.1
160.0 0.5
24 25
121.0 0.5
Catalog Number: PSG480E
6.6 0.1
N L
Adjust
26 27
DC OK
100-240V~
7A 50-60Hz
24V
20A
96.6 0.5 111.4 0.5
28 29
160.0 0.5
30
7.1
31
121.0 0.5
Catalog Number: PSG480F
32
6.6 0.1
Adjust
33
24V 20A
DC OK
3-Phase 400-500V~1.4A 50-60Hz
96.6 0.5 111.4 0.5
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
30.5-50 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 30 090
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 091
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Enclosures

General Information
30.6-1
General Information Technical Reference

Enclosure Types
Enclosures provide mechanical and electrical protection for operator and equipment. Brief descriptions of the various types of Eatons enclosures offered by Eaton are given below. See NEMA Standards Publication No. 250 for more comprehensive descriptions, denitions and/or test criteria.
Type 1
Type 4 (Conforms to IP65)for Indoor or Outdoor Use

Provide measure of protection from splashing water, hose-directed water and wind blown dust or rain. Constructed of sheet steel with gasketed cover. Designed to meet tests for hose-down, external icing and corrosion protection. When conduit connections are specied, enclosure has two watertight hubs (power) installed top and bottom or one control hub installed in bottomdepending on size. Cover-mounted pilot device holes are provided and covered with hole plugs.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Type 1 (Conforms to IP40)for Indoor Use

Suitable for most applications where unusual service conditions do not exist and where a measure of protection from accidental contact with enclosed equipment is required. Designed to meet tests for rod entry and rust resistance. Enclosure is sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion. Depending on the size, knockouts are provided on the top, bottom and sometimes on the side.
Type 4X
Type 4X (Conforms to IP65)for Indoor or Outdoor Use

Type 3R
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Type 3R (Conforms to IP52)for Outdoor Use

Primarily intended for applications where falling rain, sleet or external ice formations are present. Gasketed cover. Designed to meet tests for rain, rod entry, external icing and rust resistance. Enclosure is sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion. Depending on the size, a blank cover plate is attached to the top (for a conduit hub) and knockouts are provided on the bottom. Cover-mounted pilot device holes are provided and covered with hole plugs.
Provide measure of protection from splashing water, hose-directed water, wind blown dust, rain and corrosion. Constructed of stainless steel with gasketed cover. Designed to meet same tests as Type 4 except enclosure must pass a 200-hour salt spray corrosion resistance test. Provided as 304-grade stainless steel as standard. Select 316-grade option for improved corrosion resistance.
CA08104001E
30.6-2 Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Enclosures

General Information
September 2011
Sheet 30 092
22 23 24 25 26 27
Type 7 & 9 Bolted
Many Eaton Type 12 enclosures are suitable for use in Class II, Division 2, Group G and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 locations as dened in the National Electrical Code.
Type 12Safety Interlock

The Type 12 enclosure can be ordered with a safety interlock on the door that can be padlocked off. A vault-type door latch system is used. A tapered plate holds the gasketed door tight against the case edge to provide a positive seal. The special door interlock consists of the door handle and a screwdriver operated cover defeater. The cover defeater and the disconnect interlock defeater are both recessed screwdriver operated devices which cannot be manipulated with other types of tools.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Type 7/9for Hazardous Gas Locations

For use in Class I, Group B, C or D; Class II, Groups E, F and Class III indoor locations as dened in the National Electrical Code. Type 7/9 enclosures must withstand the pressure generated by explosion of internally trapped gases and be able to contain the explosion so that gases in the surrounding atmosphere are not ignited. Under normal operation, the surface temperature of the enclosure must be below the point where it could ignite explosive gases present in the surrounding atmosphere. Designed to meet explosion, temperature and hydrostatic design tests.
Type 12
Type 12(Conforms to IP62) for Indoor Use

Provide a degree of protection from dripping liquids (non-corrosive), falling dirt and dust. Designed to meet tests for drip, dust and rust resistance. Constructed of sheet steel. Hole plugs cover pilot device holes. There are no knockouts, hub cover plates or hubs installed. Table 30.6-1. IEC IP Index of Protection Ratings
1st Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description No protection Protection against solid objects greater than 50 mm Protection against solid objects greater than 12 mm Protection against solid objects greater than 2.5 mm Protection against solid objects greater than 1 mm Total protection against dust limited ingress (dust protected) Total protection against dust (dust-tight)
2nd Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Description No protection Protection against vertically falling drops of water Protection against dripping water when tilted up to 15 degrees Protection against spraying water Protection against splashing water Protection against water jets Protection against heavy seas Protection against the effects of immersion Protection against submersion
Table 30.6-2. NEMA Standard to IP Equivalence

Type 1 3R 4 4X 12 IP 40 52 65 65 62
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 093
Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage Enclosures

30.6-3
Table 30.6-3. Enclosure Selection and Reference ChartBox Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Box Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 6A 7 7A 8 9 10 A A A1 A1 B B B1 B1 C C D D E F1E F2E P1 P3 P5 P7 I J K L M NEMA Enclosure Type 1 1 1 1 12, 3R, 4X 12, 3R, 4X 12, 3R, 4X 12, 3R, 4X 12, 3R, 4X 12, 3R, 4X 1, 12, 3R 4X 1, 12, 3R 4X 1 12, 3R, 4X 1 12, 3R, 4X 1 12, 3R, 4X 1 12, 3R, 4X 1 12, 3R, 4X 1 12, 3R, 4X 1, 12, 3R, 4X 1, 12, 3R, 4X 1, 12, 3R, 4X 1 1 1 1 1, 12 1, 12, 3R 1, 12, 3R 1, 12, 3R 1, 12 Width 5.62 (142.7) 7.73 (196.3) 12.65 (321.3) 11.66 (296.2) 9.84 (250.0) 12.01 (305.1) 12.01 (305.1) 12.26 (311.4) 16.26 (413.0) 14.25 (362.0) 25.50 (647.7) 20.00 (508.0) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 10.50 (266.7) 15.50 (393.7) 15.50 (393.7) 15.50 (393.7) 15.50 (393.7) 20.50 (520.7) 20.50 (520.7) 29.50 (749.3) 29.50 (749.3) 28.00 (711.2) 37.00 (940.0) 42.00 (1066.8) 8.50 (215.9) 18.86 (479.0) 21.00 (533.4) 28.80 (731.5) 8.62 (219.0) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 15.87 (403.1) 15.87 (403.1) Height 9.51 (241.6) 12.60 (320.0) 13.85 (351.8) 25.99 (660.1) 13.31 (338.1) 14.39 (365.5) 14.39 (365.5) 14.37 (365.0) 14.37 (365.0) 12.10 (307.3) 29.10 (739.1) 47.85 (1215.4) 27.06 (687.3) 28.98 (736.1) 27.06 (687.3) 28.98 (736.1) 23.06 (585.7) 24.98 (634.5) 23.06 (585.7) 24.98 (634.5) 30.50 (774.7) 32.36 (822.0) 35.00 (889.0) 38.10 (967.7) 61.75 (1568.5) 74.75 (1898.7) 92.90 (2360.0) 32.98 (837.7) 38.40 (975.4) 48.40 (1229.4) 60.58 (1538.7) 27.06 (687.3) 16.50 (419.1) 19.50 (495.3) 16.50 (419.1) 24.50 (622.3) Depth 4.81 (122.2) 5.84 (148.3) 6.40 (162.6) 8.03 (204.0) 6.70 (170.2) 6.70 (170.2) 8.44 (214.4) 6.70 (170.2) 10.90 (276.9) 8.47 (215.1) 8.41 (213.6) 10.48 (266.2) 6.66 (169.2) 6.66 (169.2) 8.49 (215.6) 8.49 (215.6) 6.66 (169.2) 6.66 (169.2) 10.90 (276.9) 10.90 (276.9) 8.44 (214.4) 8.44 (214.4) 8.75 (222.3) 8.75 (222.3) 10.68 (271.3) 19.25 (489.0) 19.25 (489.0) 6.66 (169.2) 8.47 (215.1) 8.97 (227.8) 19.28 (489.7) 6.66 (169.2) 17.23 (437.6) 7.23 (183.6) 7.23 (183.6) 7.23 (183.6)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Note: See Eatons Enclosed Control guide or Web site for further details on enclosures.
Table 30.6-4. Noncombination Solid-State Reduced Voltage Box Dimensions

Ampere SSRV Rating Noncombination Box No. 0.827 37 50 66 105 135 180 240
Table 30.6-5. Combination Solid-State Reduced Voltage Box Dimensions

Ampere SSRV Rating Comb. Comb. Ampere SSRV with with Rating Fuses HMCP Box No. 0.827 37 50 66 105 135 180 240
Ampere SSRV Rating
Noncombination Box No.
Comb. Comb. with with Fuses HMCP Box No. Box No. E E E E F1E F1E F1E F1E
Box No. A1 A1 A1 A1 B1 C E E 304 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811
S752 S801/S811 S752 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811
6A 7A 6A 7A 7A B1 C G1
304 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000
S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811
G1 G1 10 10 10 10 10 10
S752 S801/S811 S752 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811 S801/S811
B1 B1 C C D D E
F1E F1E F1E F1E
S801/S811 F1E S801/S811 F1E S801/S811 F1E S801/S811 F1E
S801/S811 F1E
Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a DNA module or MOV. Same as footnote , but CPT is not included. Upsize to 7A enclosure to include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a DNA module or MOV. Enclosure may be reduced to an A1, with all space for all items as in footnote , excluding relays and CPTs. Same as footnote , but CPT is not included. Upsize to B1 enclosure to include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Note: For enclosure box dimensions, refer to table above.
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 30 094
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 30 095
Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Group Control

Group Control Multi-Pak
30.7-1
Saves space over individually mounted control Can be wall or rack mounted Has exible panel space for auxiliary control items. Barriers can be removed to provide oversized compartments Eliminates square duct or cable entrance box Simplies wiring Permits quick, easy additions and rearrangements UL listedE69852, Guide NITW
In addition to the barrier compartments, the enclosure contains two wiring troughs. The top section is a wireway tted with three power terminal straps, each having terminals for extension to adjoining enclosures and to all four compartments. The incoming line and extension terminals are suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors, from No. 6 to 350 kcmil. At the bottom of the enclosure is another wiring trough for interconnecting wiring and outgoing cables. Hinging of the front doors provides for easy access to each module. The doors are also gasketed with a re-retardant material. Knockouts are provided on the doors for the mounting of pushbuttons and indicating lights. The enclosure and wireway cover plates come in ASA-70 light gray enamel. An identication card retainer is mounted on each compartment door. A dust- and weather-resistant enclosure to house the Type 1 enclosure is also available.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Enclosure Features
Multi-Pak Four Compartment Enclosure Showing Variety of Possible Equipment Module Combinations Available
Eatons Multi-Pak Group Control is designed to save time, space, and expense in installing motor control deviceswhether for residential, commercial, or industrial buildings. The modular assembly allows versatile, on-the-job arrangement of Sizes 1 through 4 combination starters with ambient compensated relays, incoming or feeder circuit breakers or fusible disconnect switches, pushbuttons, control transformers, timers, relays, and fuses. The enclosures and separate, pre-wired modules are eld-stocked and can be ordered individually, permitting eld tailoring to suit the application.
The Type 1 enclosures are partitioned into either four or six compartments, to hold combination starter modules, incoming or feeder circuit breakers, fusible switches, or other auxiliary devices. The barriers can be removed to provide oversized spaces. Each enclosure holds up to four Size 1 or 2 full-voltage, nonreversing combination starter modules; up to two Size 3 or 4 starter modules, or a combination of both size ranges. The compartments have hinged doors, interlocked to prevent opening when the breaker switch is in the ON position. The disconnect operating mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. The Multi-Pak enclosure adapts easily to installation requirements. Multiple units can be arranged to suit the space availablehorizontally on a single line or two-high. Knockouts are provided at the top, bottom and sides of the enclosures for conduit connection. Conduit can be installed and cables pulled as dictated by the construction schedule. Combination starter modules and incoming or feeder devices can be installed days, months or years later.
Typical Six Compartment Multi-Pak After Assembly
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Benets
Enclosures and pre-wired equipment modules are individually available from stock. Each shipping carton contains complete mounting and installation instructions Cuts installation time by 25 percent. The pre-wired modules can be installed easily, using only a screwdriver, at the job site
CA08104001E
30.7-2 Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage Group Control

September 2011
Sheet 30 096
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Combination Starter Modules

Eatons starter modules consist of a Class A200 magnetic line-starter, prewired with a motor circuit protector or a fusible DS disconnect switch on a panel. Full-voltage non-reversing and reversing, combination starters are available. An external reset button is mounted on the starter module door. With its versatile, modular design, the Multi-Pak starter permits a variety of motor control groupings. One module can contain many different arrangements of devices, such as combination linestarter with control transformers, and/or relays, or two feeder circuit breakers, or fusible switches. The contactor design comprises a glass polyester case with silver-cadmium oxide alloy contacts, straight-through wiring, out-front terminals, molded coils, stainless steel kickout springs, U-type magnet, and a shock absorber baseplate. The circuit breakers, equipped with adjustable magnetic trip elements, protect against short circuits. Standard three-pole, inverse-time, and ambient compensated thermal overload relays protect against overload. Fusible switches are equipped to accept either 250V or 600V Class H, K, and R cartridges fuses, with capacities as listed by Underwriters Laboratories for overcurrent protection. ON-OFF operating mechanisms are molded from an ABS re-resistant material. Components of each module have individual printed labels identifying size, voltage, ampere rating and so on. The labels also contain a schematic drawing reference number covering the wiring of the component contained in the module.
Load and control conduits may enter at the top or bottom. Starter wiring diagram and overload heater installation instructions are attached to each starter door.
Dust and weather-resistant enclosures for four or six module units are available. These enclosures are 34.00 inches (863.6 mm) or 50.00 inches (1270.0 mm) wide, 31.00 inches (787.4 mm) high, and 11.75 inches (298.5 mm) deep.
Supply Feed Thru Nipples
Outgoing Conduits May Be All at Top, T All at Bottom or Mixed
26 e at To T (Either End) H-Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each Outgoing Conduits May Be All at To T Supply Feed Thru Nipples One Compartment Used to Feed Supply to Bottom
Incoming Line at T Top or Side (Either End) 52
1, 2 or 3 Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each
Figure 30.7-1. Wiring Arrangements
3.00 (76.2) 7.00 6.13 (177.8) (155.7)
6.38 (162.1)
(8) Knockouts on 2-3/4 Centers (Top T 8 Bottom)
3.00 (76.2) 3.38 (85.9) 0.63 (16.0)
Note: For Six Compartment Enclosure Add 16 Inches to Width.
8.50 (215.9)
(8) 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch Knockouts 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 32.00 (812.8) 28.00 (711.2) 2.00 (50.8) 3.38 (85.9) 3.00 (76.2)
Technical Data
Dimensions and Wiring Arrangements
Four compartment enclosures are 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) wide, 26.00 inches (660.4 mm) high, and 7.00 inches (177.8 mm) deep with provisions for four-bolt wall mounting. Six compartment enclosures are an additional 16.00 (406.4) inches wide. Enclosures may be grouped together by nippling through knockouts provided.
0.25 (6.4) 20.00 (508.0)
18.63 (473.1)
22.00 (558.8) 1.25 (31.8) 3.00 (76.2) (4) Mounting Holes for 5/16 Bolts 2.00 (50.8) (8) 2, 2-1/2 Inch Knockouts
Figure 30.7-2. Type 1 EnclosuresDimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 31 001
31.0-1
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage
Contents
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage Application Guide Motor Application and Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 AC Drive Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2 AC Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3 Motor Load Types and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5 Motor Load Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6 Drive Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 Selections Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7 M-Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1-1 CPX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 CFX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-1 SVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4-1 H-Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-1 H-Max Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-2 H-Max IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-11 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . 1995 2010 Sections 16483A, 16483B, Sections 26 29 23.11, 26 29 23.13, 16483C, 16483D 26 29 23.16, 26 29 23.19
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Adjustable Frequency Drives
CA08104001E
31.0-2 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage Application Guide
September 2011
Sheet 31 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Application and Performance

AFD Output Harmonics
For the purpose of performance evaluation, the non-sinusoidal output waveforms produced by AFDs are represented by their mathematically equivalent component parts. All such waveforms consist of an innite number of sinusoidal components of different amplitudes and frequencies. The fundamental component is the good part of the waveform, which provides power to the motor at the desired operating frequencies. The harmonics are unwanted components, which provide unusable voltages and currents to the motor at frequencies that are multiples of the fundamental. State-of-the-art designs for pulse width modulated AFDs provide a sine weighted modulation strategy with a high switching frequency, and reduced output harmonic content as compared to other types of drives. A motor operating on a PWM drive will have an additional heat loss due to the harmonic content as compared to utility line operation. PWM drives that are comprised of IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor) power devices are also capable of rapid voltage rise times, which can stress the insulation system of the AC motor. For this reason, motors designed for operation on IGBT PWM inverter power incorporating insulation systems rated for rapid voltage rise times and higher operating temperatures are recommended for use with the drives. Standard motors with a 1.15 service factor or energy efcient motors can be used provided that additional drive output ltering is incorporated to limit voltage rise times and to reduce the output harmonic content.
Multiple Motor Operation

Any number of motors can be connected in parallel and controlled on an open loop (frequency control) conguration by a single AFD as long as the total connected load does not exceed the rating of the drive. A closed loop vector controlled drive cannot be used with multiple motors. Although the basic principles of multiple motor operation are not difcult to understand, Application Engineering assistance should be requested to make certain that the application is successful. Because the frequency of the power supplied by the AFD is the same for all motors, the motors will always operate at relatively the same speed. With NEMA design B motors, the speeds will be matched within 3% or less, depending on the load variation among the motors and their rated slip. Exact speed matching between motors is not possible. If an adjustable speed ratio is required between motors, each motor must be connected to its own individual AFD.
Output Current
The full load current ratings of typical AFDs are matched to typical full load motor current ratings as listed in National Electrical Code Table 430.150. Generally, an AFD of a given horsepower rating will be adequate for a motor of the same rating, but the actual motor current required under operating conditions is the determining factor for AFD sizing. If the motor will be run at full load, the AFD output current rating must be equal to or greater than the motor nameplate current. If the motor is oversized to provide a wide speed range, the AFD should be sized to provide the current required by the motor at the maximum operating torque. Motor oversizing should generally be limited to one horsepower size increase.
Motor Protection
Motor overload protection must be provided as required by applicable codes. Direct motor protection is not automatically provided as part of the AC drive. AFDs are equipped with electronic protection circuits with an inverse time or I2t characteristic equivalent to a conventional overload relay. Conventional overload relays are also used with AFDs equipped with bypass. If these current sensing protective devices are used with motors driving constant torque loads, the minimum speed should be adjusted to prevent the motor from running at speeds at which overheating could occur, unless the I2t circuit provides a speed and load calibrated trip. The best means of AC drive motor protection is direct winding overtemperature sensing, such as an overtemperature switch or thermistor imbedded in the motor windings. Overtemperature switches are more convenient because they can normally be connected directly to the AC drive control circuit. Thermistors generally require a special sensing relay. Direct overtemperature protection is preferred over overcurrent sensing protective devices because motor overheating can occur with normal operating current at low operating speeds.
AC Drive Application
Matching the AFD to the Motor
Voltage source AFDs are designed for use with any standard three-phase induction motor. AFD sizing and motor matching are often simply a matter of matching the AFD output voltage, frequency and current ratings to the requirements of the motor. If the load torque exceeds 150% for Constant Torque (CT) drives or 110% for Variable Torque (VT) drives during starting or intermittently while running the drive, oversizing may be required.
Output Voltage and Frequency

For AFDs rated at 480V, motors are connected for 460V at 60 Hz. 380V/50 Hz motors can also be used because the V/Hz ratio, 380/50, is 7.6V/Hz, the same as a 460V/60 Hz motor. 415V motors can be operated if the AFD V/Hz adjustment is reset. With proper V/Hz adjustment, 575V motors can be operated at constant V/Hz up to 80% speed and at constant voltage from 80% to 100% speed. Maximum motor torque and hp for this mode of operation is limited above 80% speed because of the reduced V/Hz levels. For AFDs rated at 240V, the motor will be connected for 230V.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 003
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage Application Guide
31.0-3
Motor short-circuit protection is not required because the AC drive protection circuits nearly always adequately protect the motor in this respect. When a single AFD provides power to multiple motors connected in parallel, special considerations must be given to motor protection. Individual overload protection must be provided for each motor. Short-circuit protection may be required for some applications.
Speed Regulation
The open loop speed regulation of an AC drive is determined by the motor slip. Because NEMA design B motors usually have 3% slip or less, at 60 Hz and rated load the speed regulation of the drive is 3%. AFDs equipped with slip compensation or ux or vector control can provide speed regulation, which is better than the open loop regulation of the motor. Slip compensation and ux or vector control improves speed regulation by increasing and decreasing the operating frequency by a small amount as the load increases and decreases. Further improvement in steady-state speed regulation can be obtained by using a tachometer generator to provide speed feedback to a closed loop speed regulator option, or an external device such as the Durant Strider.
If the output current reaches the current limit setting while the drive is running at set speed, the drive will decelerate to a lower speed. If possible, the speed will decrease to whatever operating speed is required to prevent exceeding the current limit setting. If the output current reaches the current limit setting while the drive is accelerating, the drive will deviate from the programmed acceleration ramp and accelerate at a rate that will prevent the current from exceeding the set limit. If the drive reaches the negative current limit setting (if applicable) while the drive is decelerating, the drive will deviate from the programmed deceleration ramp, and decelerate at a rate that will try to prevent the current from exceeding the limit.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Bearing and DV/DT Protection

The rapid voltage rise times present in todays IGBT PWM drives may cause current to ow in the motor bearings due to shaft voltage caused by capacitive coupling. This current ow can result in minute electrical discharges within the bearing, potentially damaging the bearing over time. Therefore a DV/DT lter should be used where the drive and motor are separated by 100 feet or more. Using an insulated motor shaft bearing and/or setting the inverter carrier frequency to the lowest acceptable level can help minimize the potential for this phenomenon as well.
Regeneration Limit and Braking

Regeneration limit prevents the motor from developing braking torque above a limit that corresponds to the normal losses that are inherent in the motor and controller. When the drive is equipped with dynamic braking, the motor is allowed to develop a higher level of braking torque. The regenerated braking energy is dissipated in the dynamic braking resistors. A fully regenerative drive includes circuitry that returns the regenerated braking energy to the power lines.
Service Deviation
Speed regulation species only that portion of the drive speed change that is directly caused by a change in load. Several other factors can cause unintended changes in the drive operating speed. These factors contribute to the drives service deviation. Table 31.0-1 lists some of these factors and the typical effect that they have on drive speed. Table 31.0-1. Factors Affecting Service Deviation
Inuencing Factor Line voltage variations within rated tolerance. Ambient temperature variations of controller within rated tolerance after warmup. Typical Speed Change 0.0% 0.25%
AC Drive Performance
Operator Control and Interface
Operator controls are often via the drive keypad. In other situations, an operator station or remote control may be desired. If these requirements cannot be achieved by remotely mounting the keypad, terminal blocks with digital and analog interface capability are provided.
IR Compensation
A V/Hz AC drive can provide improved starting torque and low speed overload capability if the lower speed voltage boost is changed automatically to compensate for changing load conditions. This feature is called IR compensation. Without IR compensation, it is difcult to achieve the maximum possible motor torque because the voltage boost required for maximum torque can cause the motor to saturate and draw excessive current when it is lightly loaded. The IR compensation circuit senses the motor load and reduces the voltage boost when the motor is lightly loaded.
Acceleration and Deceleration

AFDs are always equipped with adjustable acceleration and deceleration control. Acceleration and deceleration rates must be adjusted to suit the characteristics of the load to prevent shutdown due to overcurrent or overvoltage. Increasing acceleration or deceleration times will proportionally decrease the torque requirement.
Motor temperature variations. 0.5% Cold to maximum operating temperature.
Current Limit
If an AC drive was not equipped with current limit, the overcurrent trip circuits would shut down the drive should the motor draw excessive current due to an overload or too rapid an acceleration rate. Current limit provides a means of maintaining control of the drive under these conditions.
Speed Range
The characteristics of the motor usually determine the speed range of an AC drive. The AFD output frequency range is usually wider than the range that can be effectively used by the motor.
A ux control AC drive provides a similar result by modifying its instantaneous voltage and frequency to allow the motor to develop the required torque for the load.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 004
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Installation Compatibility
The successful application of an AC drive requires the assurance that the drive will be compatible with the environment in which it will be installed. The following are some of the aspects of compatibility that should be considered.
Efciency
Figure 31.0-1 shows typical efciency curves for an IGBT AFD. The efciency of an AC drive can be accurately determined only for a particular set of operating conditions. The characteristics of the motor and controller are interrelated in such a way that a change in the characteristics of either component will cause a change in the efciency of the other. The efciency of the total AC drive system cannot be accurately determined from just the controller efciency curves and the manufacturers published motor data. Table 31.0-2 provides adjustment factors that can be used to estimate
the total drive system efciency. The adjustment factors take into account efciency variations due to a typical range of different motor characteristics and operating conditions. The factors include data from the controller efciency curves and adjust for motor characteristics at various speed and load points. To calculate total AC drive system efciency, multiply the published motor efciency by the adjustment factors listed in Table 31.0-2. Use the published motor efciency for full load 60 Hz operation only. The adjustment factors account for changes in motor efciency due to changing the speed and load.
Cooling Air
Even though AFDs are very efcient, the heat produced in the controller cabinet can be substantial. The electronic circuitry is subject to immediate failure if its operating temperature limits are exceeded. Junction temperatures of transistors, SCRs and IGBTs typically can only increase 2025C from full load to failure. It is important to remove heat through the usual mechanisms of radiation, conduction (heat sinks) or convection (fans). The enclosure must be located away from direct sunlight and hot surfaces. The room temperature must be kept within the specied limits and adequate cooling air must be allowed to ow around the enclosure. Excessively moist, corrosive or dirty air must be prevented from entering the enclosure.
Isolation Transformers
Drive isolation transformers are sometimes recommended or specied by others for various reasons. Eaton does not require the use of isolation transformers because Eaton drives are designed to operate directly from plant power distribution systems without using isolation transformers. Eaton AFDs are designed to withstand line voltage transients and noise generated by other equipment in a typical installation environment when applied to systems with the required minimum impedance levels. They are also designed to prevent nuisance levels of noise from being reected back to the power lines. Electronic protection circuits fully protect the drives from output short circuits and ground faults regardless of available fault current without requiring isolation or external impedance. Isolation transformers are generally not recommended as a preventative or curative measure for suspected difculties of these types. Figure 31.0-1. Typical AFD Efciency Table 31.0-2. Adjustment Factors for Calculating Total AC Drive System Efciency
Percent Speed Constant Torque Load Load: Percent of Rated Torque 100 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0.9300.950 0.9310.951 0.9300.951 0.9280.949 0.9240.946 0.9100.934 0.8890.915 0.8550.883 0.7930.826 0.6250.675 75 0.9120.932 0.9120.933 0.9120.933 0.9090.931 0.9060.928 0.8920.916 0.8720.897 0.8380.866 0.7660.810 0.6100.660 50 0.8780.899 0.8790.900 0.8780.900 0.8760.898 0.8720.895 0.8590.883 0.8390.864 0.8050.833 0.7460.780 0.5840.634 25 0.8000.820 0.8000.821 0.8000.821 0.7980.820 0.7940.817 0.7820.806 0.7630.788 0.7320.760 0.6750.709 0.5220.572 Variable Torque Load Adjustment Factor 0.9300.950 0.9190.940 0.9000.921 0.8740.895 0.8360.859 0.7820.806 0.6890.714 Percent Torque 100 81 64 49 36 25 16
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 005
31.0-5
Example:
Suppose you wish to estimate AC drive efciency for a 50 hp drive on a centrifugal pump. Efciency is to be estimated for operation at full speed and 70% speed. The motor is nameplated 94.5% NEMA nominal efciency. From the variable torque columns in Table 31.0-2, the adjustment factors for full speed operation range from 0.93 to 0.95 and the adjustment factors for 70% speed range from 0.874 to 0.895.
Power factor correction capacitors should not be connected at the AC drive power input. Correction should be done on a plantwide basis. If capacitors are located too close to the drive, or if drives represent a high percentage of the total plant electrical load, there may be an undesirable interaction between the capacitors and the drives, leading to a failure of either or both. If the capacitors must be located near the drive, a line reactor should be used on the drive input to reduce the possibility of interaction. Note that adding this reactor does not eliminate the potential for harmonic resonance. To be assured of a solution that will improve power factor and avoid resonance, a system study must be performed to determine the optimum selection of capacitance and inductive reactance. Power factor correction capacitors must never, under any circumstances, be connected at the AC drive controller output. They would serve no useful purpose, and they may damage the drive.
Motor Load Types and Characteristics

Introduction
This section of your Application Guide discusses the following topics on motor load types and characteristics:

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor load types Other functional considerations
For 100% speed:
Eff. = 94.5 x 0.93 = 87.9% (low estimate) Eff. = 94.5 x 0.95 = 89.8% (high estimate)
The process of selecting an electrical adjustable speed drive is one where the load is of primary consideration. It is important to understand the speed and torque characteristics as well as horsepower requirements of the type of load to be considered. When considering load characteristics, the following should be evaluated:

For 70% speed:
Eff. = 94.5 x 0.874 = 82.6% (low estimate) Eff. = 94.5 x 0.895 = 84.6% (high estimate)
Power Factor
The power factor typically specied for AFDs is displacement power factor, which is dened as the cosine of the angle between the fundamental voltage and current. Many instruments used for utility billing purposes give readings equivalent to displacement power factor. Another denition and measurement method combines the effects of power and harmonic content to dene total power factor. Newer utility instrumentation is capable of recording total power factor, resulting in potential power factor penalty billing. Displacement power factor for a PWM drive is approximately 0.95 at all operating points. The displacement power factor is not signicantly affected by the motor speed, the motor load or the motor power factor. Total power factor will vary with line voltage, utility feeder size and total system and drive load.
AC Drive Input Harmonics

AFDs use a rectier to convert AC line voltage to the DC levels required by the inverter section. Rectiers are nonlinear devices that cause a current to be drawn from the line, which includes many harmonics. These harmonic currents will cause harmonic voltages to be created in the line, which may affect sensitive devices on the same line. IEEE 519-1992 provides recommendations for the harmonic current levels reected to the utility by any user, where the feeder ties into the utility grid. For difcult installations where the levels of IEEE 519 cannot be met, or those using on-site generated power, a Clean Power rectier can be used. The Clean Power rectier uses phase shifted semiconductors to signicantly reduce harmonics to levels well within the IEEE guidelines. For more specic information, see CPX section on Page 31.2-1.
What type of load is associated with the application? Does the load have a shock component? What is the size of the load? Are large inertial loads involved? What are the motor considerations? Over what speed range are heavy loads encountered? How fast is the load to be accelerated or decelerated?
Motor loads are classied into three main groups, depending on how their torque and horsepower vary with operating speed. The following paragraphs deal with the various motor load types usually found in process, manufacturing, machining and commercial applications.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 006
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Motor Load Types

Constant Torque Load
This type of load is frequently encountered. In this group, the torque demanded by the load is constant throughout the speed range. The load requires the same amount of torque at low speeds as at high speeds. Loads of this type are essentially friction loads. In other words, the constant torque characteristic is needed to overcome friction. Figure 31.0-2 shows the constant torque and variable horsepower demanded by the load. As seen in Figure 31.0-2, torque remains constant while horsepower is directly proportional to speed. A look at the basic horsepower equation also veries this fact: Torque x Speed hp = 5252
Constant Horsepower Load

In this type of load, the horsepower demanded by the load is constant over the speed range. The load requires high torque at low speeds. From the previous formula, you can see that with the horsepower held constant, the torque will decrease as the speed increases. Put another way, the speed and torque are inversely proportional to each other. Figure 31.0-3 shows the constant horsepower and variable torque demanded by the load. Examples of this type of load are center-driven winders and machine tool spindles. A specic example of this application would be a lathe that requires slow speeds for rough cuts where large amounts of material are removed, and high speeds for ne cuts where little material is removed. Usually very high starting torques are required for quick acceleration. Constant horsepower range is usually limited on an AC drive from base speed to 1.52 times base speed.
Variable Torque Load

With this type of load, the torque is directly proportional to some mathematical power of speed, usually speed squared (Speed2). Mathematically:
Operating 2 Speed - Torque = Constant --------------------------- Nameplate Speed

Horsepower is typically proportional to speed cubed (speed3). Figure 31.0-4 shows the variable torque and variable horsepower demanded by the load. Examples of loads that exhibit variable load torque characteristics are centrifugal fans, pumps and blowers. This type of load requires much lower torque at low speeds than at high speeds.
Where:
Torque is measured in lb-ft. Speed is measured in rpm. 5252 is proportionality constant.
Figure 31.0-4. Variable Torque Load
Figure 31.0-2. Constant Torque Load Examples of this type of load are conveyors, extruders and surface winders. Constant torque capability may also be used when shock loads, overloads or high inertia loads require special drive sizing.
Figure 31.0-3. Constant Horsepower Load
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 007
31.0-7
Drive Selection
Introduction
This section discusses the following topics on selecting the appropriate drive:
Torque Requirements
The starting, peak and running torques should be considered when selecting a drive. Starting torque requirements can vary from a small percentage of the full load to a value several times full load torque. The peak torque varies because of a change in load conditions or mechanical nature of the machine. The motor torque available to the driven machine must be more than that required by the machine from start to full speed. The greater the excess torque, the more rapid the acceleration potential.
Selection considerations Selecting a drive for a machine Drive application questions
cycle, which is dened as a xed repetitive load pattern over a given period of time, is expressed as the ratio of on-time to the cycle period. When the operating cycle is such that the drive operates at idle, or a reduced load for more than 25% of the time, the duty cycle becomes a factor in selecting the proper drive.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Heating
The temperature of a motor or controller is a function of ventilation and losses. Operating self-ventilated motors at reduced speeds may cause above normal temperature rises. Derating or forced ventilation may be necessary to achieve the rated motor torque output at reduced speeds.
Selection Considerations
When selecting a drive and associated equipment for an application, the following points should be considered:
Acceleration
The necessary acceleration time should be considered. Acceleration time is directly proportional to the total inertia and inversely proportional to the torque available.
Environment
The environment in which the motor and power conversion equipment operates is of prime concern. Conditions such as ambient temperature, cooling air supply and the presence of gas, moisture and dust should all be considered when choosing a drive, its enclosures and protective features.
Drive Type
Does the application require performance elements such as quick speed response or torque control? These may require the use of a ux vector or closed loop vector drive, instead of a volts per hertz drive.
Duty Cycle
Selecting the proper drive depends on whether the load is steady, varies, follows a repetitive cycle of variation or has pulsating torques. The duty Table 31.0-3. Drive Specications
Description M-Max H-Max SVX CFX CPX hp Range 1/410 10600 3/4800 3/4400 25800
Speed Range
The minimum and maximum motor speeds for the application will determine the drives base speed.
Current Harmonic Distortion 3540% 3540% 3540% 710% 3%
Applications Micro drive HVAC specic6 pulse General use6 pulse General use with passive lters 18 pulse clean power
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Speed Regulation
The allowable amount of speed variation should be considered. Does the application require unvarying speed at all torque values or will variations be tolerated?
CA08104001E
31.0-8 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 31 008
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 009
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage M-Max Series

General Information
31.1-1
M-Max Series

Product
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Complies with EN61800-3 (2004) 61800-5-1 EN60204-1 CE UL cUL IEC RoHS compliant
See unit nameplate for more detailed approvals.
Safety

EMC (At Default Settings)
EMC Category C2, C3 and C4 (Level H): With an internal RFI lter option
M-Max Series Drives for Machinery Applications
I/O Specications
General Description
Eatons M-Max Series sensorless vector adjustable frequency AC drives are the next generation of drives specically engineered for todays machinery applications. These microprocessor-based drives have standard features that can be programmed to tailor the drives performance to suit a wide variety of application requirements. The M-Max product line uses a 32-bit microprocessor and insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) that provide quiet motor operation, high motor efciency and smooth low-speed performance. The size and simplicity of the M-Max make it ideal for hassle-free installation. Models rated at 575V, three-phase, 50/60 Hz are available in sizes ranging from 1 to 7-1/2 hp. Models rated at 480V, three-phase, 50/60 Hz are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 to 10 hp. Models rated at 240V, singleor three-phase, 50/60 Hz are available in sizes ranging from 1/4 to 3 hp. Models rated at 115V, single-phase, 50/60 Hz are available in the 1/4 to 1-1/2 hp size range. The standard drive includes a digital display, and operating and programming keys on a visually appealing, efcient application programming interface. The display provides drive monitoring, as well as adjustment and diagnostic information. The keys are used for digital adjustment and programming of the drive, as well as for operator control. Separate terminal blocks for control and power wiring are provided for customer connections.
Features
Ease of usepreset application macros, startup wizard, diagnostic capabilities Compact, space-saving design Rugged and reliable150% for 1 minute, 50C rated, conformal coated boards DIN rail and screw mountable Side-by-side installation Parameter upload and download without the need for a main power supply Industry-leading efciency delivers energy savings to the customer Integrated EMC lters make the unit suitable for commercial and industrial networks Available in the enclosure class IP20 as standard, options for IP21 and NEMA 1 Brake chopper as standard in three-phase, applications of frames 2 (FS2) and larger Temperature-controlled fan RS-485/Modbus as standard PID controller as standard Several eldbus options
Digital inputs DI1DI6 are freely programmable. The user can assign multiple functions to a single input Digital, relay and analog outputs are freely programmable includes:

Six digital inputs Two analog inputs 420 mA 010V
One analog output One digital output Two relay outputs RS-485 interface

Reliability

Pretested components: standard Computerized testing: standard Final test with full load: standard Conformal-coated boards 50C rated 150% for 1 minute 200% for 2 seconds Eatons Electrical Services & Systems: national network of AF drive specialists
CA08104001E
31.1-2 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage M-Max Series

Product Selection
September 2011
Sheet 31 010
22 23 24

Table 31.1-1. Catalog Numbering System
MMX 1 1 AA 1D1 F 0 0
Description MMX = Base catalog number Phase 1 = Single-phase 3 = Three-phase Enclosure Class 0 = NEMA 0 or IP2 Option 0 = Full version
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Voltage 1 = 120V 2 = 230V 4 = 480V 5 = 575V Software Designation Series AA
EMC Filter F = Filter N = No filter Output Current 1D6 = 1.6A 010 = 10A
Product Selection
Table 31.1-2. M-Max Basic Controller
hp Volts 100% Continuous Current IN (A) 1.7 2.4 2.8 1.7 2.4 2.8 1.3 1.9 2.4 1.7 2.4 2.8 3.7 3.7 4.8 7.0 3.7 4.8 7.0 3.3 4.3 5.6 4.8 9.6 11.0 7.6 9.0 12.0 14.0 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9.0 Nominal Input Current (A) 4.2 5.7 6.6 2.7 3.5 3.8 2.2 2.8 3.2 9.2 11.6 12.4 15.0 8.3 11.2 14.1 4.3 6.8 8.4 4.0 5.6 7.3 16.5 15.8 13.4 9.6 11.5 14.9 18.7 2.0 3.6 5.0 7.6 10.4 Frame Size FS1 FS1 FS1 FS1 FS1 FS1 FS1 FS1 FS1 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 Catalog Number MMX12AA1D7F0-0 MMX12AA2D4F0-0 MMX12AA2D8F0-0 MMX32AA1D7N0-0 MMX32AA2D4N0-0 MMX32AA2D8N0-0 MMX34AA1D3F0-0 MMX34AA1D9F0-0 MMX34AA2D4F0-0 MMX11AA1D7N0-0 MMX11AA2D4N0-0 MMX11AA2D8N0-0 MMX11AA3D7N0-0 MMX12AA3D7F0-0 MMX12AA4D8F0-0 MMX12AA7D0F0-0 MMX32AA3D7N0-0 MMX32AA4D8N0-0 MMX32AA7D0N0-0 MMX34AA3D3F0-0 MMX34AA4D3F0-0 MMX34AA5D6F0-0 MMX11AA4D8N0-0 MMX12AA9D6F0-0 MMX32AA011N0-0 MMX34AA7D6F0-0 MMX34AA9D0F0-0 MMX34AA012F0-0 MMX34AA014F0-0 MMX35AA1D7N0-0 MMX35AA2D7N0-0 MMX35AA3D9N0-0 MMX35AA6D1N0-0 MMX35AA9D0N0-0
1/4 1/2 3/4 1/4 1/2 3/4
200240V single-phase in 230V three-phase out 200240V three-phase in 230V three-phase out 380480V three-phase in 460V three-phase out 100120V single-phase in 230V three-phase out
M-Max
1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1 1-1/2 2 1 1-1/2 2 1-1/2 2 3 1-1/2 3 3 4 5 7-1/2 10 1 2 3 5 7-1/2
200240V single-phase in 230V three-phase out 200240V three-phase in 230V three-phase out 380480V three-phase in 460V three-phase out 100120V single-phase in 230V three-phase out 200240V single-phase in 230V three-phase out 200240V three-phase in 230V three-phase out 380480V three-phase in 460V three-phase out
575V three-phase in 575V three-phase out 575V three-phase in 575V three-phase out
Horsepower ratings are based on the use of a 240V, 460V and 575V NEMA B, four- or six-pole squirrel cage induction motor and are for reference only. Units are to be selected such that the motor current is less than or equal to the MMX rated continuous output current. For 208V, 380V or 415V applications, select the unit such that the motor current is less than or equal to the MMX rated continuous output current. For MMX11_, MMX32_ and MMX35_, there are no options for units with lters.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 011

Technical Data
31.1-3
Accessories
Table 31.1-3. M-Max Copy/Paste Module
Table 31.1-7. Options

Description 3% line reactors 3% line reactors Specication Single-phase Three-phase
22 23 24 25
Module is plugged onto the front of the drive to MMX-COM-PC provide: upload/download of all parameters, direct link to a PC via USB interface for parameter assignment via MaxConnect software, and copying of parameters for a series of devices or when exchanging devices. No PC required.
Specications
Table 31.1-8. M-Max Series Drives
Description Specication +10%/15% (575V units: +15%/15%) Once per minute or less (typical operation)
Input Ratings
Input voltage (Vin) Input frequency (fin) 50/60 Hz (variation up to 4566 Hz)
Table 31.1-4. Optional Communication Modules

Description Communication adapter kit CANopen network card PROFIBUS DP network card with serial connection PROFIBUS DP network card with Sub-D connection DeviceNet network card Catalog Number MMX-NET-XA XMX-NET-CO-A XMX-NET-PS-A XMX-NET-PD-A XMX-NET-DN-A
Connection to power
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Output Ratings
Output voltage Continuous output current Output frequency 0 to Vin Continuous rated current IN at ambient temperature max. 122F (50C), overload 1.5 x IN max. 1 min/10 min 0 to 320 Hz 0.01 Hz Current 2 x IN for 2 seconds in every 20-second period. Torque depends on motor Frequency control (V/Hz) open loop or sensorless vector control 1.5 to 16 kHz; default 6 kHz Analog input: resolution 0.1% (10-bit), accuracy 1% V/Hz. Panel reference: resolution 0.01 Hz 30 to 320 Hz 0 to 3000 sec 0 to 3000 sec DC brake: 30% x Tn (without brake option)

Ratings
Table 31.1-5. M-Max Basic Controller IP20 Standard Ratings
Description Specication Trip limit 4.0 x IH instantaneously 115/230V series: 437 Vdc; 400V series: 874 Vdc; 575V series: 1048 Vdc trip level 115/230V series: 183 Vdc; 400V series: 333 Vdc; 575V series: 460 Vdc trip level Ground fault is tested before every start. In case of ground fault in motor or motor cable, only the frequency converter is protected Yes Yes Yes Yes
Frequency resolution Initial output current (IH)
Control Characteristics
Control method Switching frequency Frequency reference Field weakening point Acceleration time Deceleration time Braking torque 230V Series 400V Series 575V Series
Protections
Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Ground fault protection Overtemperature protection Motor overload protection Motor stall protection Motor underload protection
Brake Resistor (Minimum Values)
FS2 35 ohms and FS3 26 ohms FS2 75 ohms and FS3 54 ohms FS# 103 ohms 14F (10C), no frost to 122F (+50C): Rated loadability IN 40F (40C) to 158F (70C) 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing, non-corrosive, no dripping water Chemical vapors: IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3C2; Mechanical particles: IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3S2 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 3280 ft (1000m); 1% derating for each 328 ft (100m) above 3280 ft (1000m); max. 6560 ft (2000m) EN 60068-2-6; 3 to 150 Hz, displacement amplitude 1 mm (peak) at 3 to 15.8 Hz, max. acceleration amplitude 1G at 15.8 to 150 Hz EN 50178, IEC 68-2-27 UPS Drop test (for applicable UPS weights); storage and shipping: max. 15G, 11 ms (in package) IP20
Ambient Conditions
Ambient operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Air quality
Table 31.1-6. Programmable Parameters

Description Application macros: basic, pump, fan and high load (hoist) Programmable start/stop and reverse signal logic (sinking or sourcing) Reference scaling Programmable start and stop functions DC-brake at start and stop Programmable V/Hz curve Adjustable switching frequency Autorestart function after fault Protections and supervisions (all fully programmable; off, warning, fault) Current signal input fault External fault Fieldbus communication Eight preset speeds Analog input range selection, signal scaling and ltering PID controller Skip frequencies
Altitude
Vibration
Shock
Enclosure class

Exception: 115V single-phase in, 230V three-phase out. Only three-phase FS2 and FS3 drives are equipped with brake chopper circuit.
CA08104001E
31.1-4 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage M-Max Series

Technical Data
September 2011
Sheet 31 012
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Analog OUT AUTOGEN Ref Current
Terminal 1 2 +10V AI1
Signal Ref. output voltage Analog signal in 1
Factory Preset Freq. reference P)
Description Maximum load 10 mA 0+10 V Ri = 200k ohms [min.]
3 6 7 8 9 10 A B 4 5 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 23 24 25 26
GND 24V GND DI1 DI2 DI3 A B AI2 GND GND DI4 DI5 DI6 AO DO RO11 RO12 RO21 RO22 RO23
I/O signal ground 24V output for DIs I/O signal ground Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 RS-485 signal A RS-485 signal B Analog signal in 2 I/O signal ground I/O signal ground Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Analog output Digital signal out Relay out 1
Start forward P) Start reverse P) Preset speed P)
20%, max. load 50 mA 0+30 V Ri = 12k ohms min. 0[4]20 mA, Ri = 200k ohms 0+30 V Ri = 12k ohms min. 0+30 V Ri = 12k ohms min. 0+30 V Ri = 12k ohms min. 0[2]10V, RL = 500 ohms Open collector, max. load 48V/50 mA Max. switching load: 250 Vac/2A or 250 Vdc/0.4A Max. switching load: 250 Vac/2A or 250 Vdc/0.4A
FB communication FB communication PI actual value P) Preset speed B1 P) Fault reset P) Disable PI contr. P)
Output frequency P) Active = READY P) Active = RUN P)
Relay out 2
Active = FAULT P)
Note: P) Parameter-selectable function.
Figure 31.1-1. M-Max I/O Interface
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 013

Dimensions
31.1-5

W2 W3
22
D2
23 24 25
H1
H2
H3
26 27 28
W1
D1
29 30
Figure 31.1-2. M-Max Drives Table 31.1-9. M-Max Drives

Frame Type FS1 FS2 FS3 H1 H2 H3 5.40 (137.3) 6.69 (170.0) 9.50 (241.3) W1 2.58 (65.5) 3.54 (90.0) 3.94 (100.0) W2 1.49 (37.8) 2.46 (62.5) 2.95 (75.0) W3 0.17 (4.5) 0.22 (5.5) 0.22 (5.5) D1 3.88 (98.5) 4.00 (101.5) 4.27 (108.5) D2 0.27 (7.0) 0.27 (7.0) 0.27 (7.0) Weight in Lbs (kg) 1.213 (0.550) 1.543 (0.699) 2.183 (0.990)
31 32 33 34
6.16 (156.5) 5.79 (147.0) 7.68 (195.0) 7.20 (183.0) 10.33 (262.5) 9.93 (252.3)
W3 W2
35 36
37 38 39
W1
40
Figure 31.1-3. NEMA 1/IP21 M-Max Drives and Communication Adapter Kit Table 31.1-10. NEMA 1/IP21 M-Max Drives and Communication Adapter Kit
Frame Type FS1 FS2 FS3 H 8.14 (206.7) 9.90 (251.5) 12.26 (311.5) W1 3.77 (95.7) 4.72 (120.0) 5.12 (130.1) W2 2.99 (75.9) 3.97 (100.8) 4.36 (110.8) W3 3.98 (101.2) 4.94 (125.5) 5.33 (135.3) D 5.41 (137.5) 5.68 (144.2) 6.32 (160.5)
41 42 43
CA08104001E
31.1-6 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage

September 2011
Sheet 31 014
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 015
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage CPX9000

Enclosed Drives
31.2-1
CPX9000 Enclosed Drives
General Description
Eatons CPX9000 Clean Power Drives use advanced 18-pulse, clean power technology that signicantly reduces line harmonics at the drive input terminals, resulting in one of the purest sinusoidal waveforms available. Enhancements to the CPX9000 Clean Power Drives include smaller enclosures and higher temperature ratings than CP9000 for selected drives. The CPX9000 drive also delivers true power factorin addition to reducing harmonic distortion, the CPX9000 drive prevents transformer overheating and overloading of breakers and feeders, which enables the application of adjustable frequency drives on generators and other high impedance power systems.
Features and Benets

CPX9000 Clean Power Drive features include:

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CPX9000 Enclosed Products

Standard enclosedcovers a wide range of the most commonly ordered options. Pre-engineering eliminates the lead time normally associated with customer specic options. Available congurations are listed on Pages 31.2-531.2-18 Modied standard enclosed applies to specic customer requirements that vary from the Standard Enclosed offering, such as the need for an additional indicating light or minor modications to drawings. Contact your local sales ofce for assistance in pricing and lead time Custom engineeredfor those applications with more unique or complex requirements, these are individually engineered to the customers needs. Contact your local sales ofce for pricing and lead time

25150 hp IL drives available in 30-inch enclosure 200 and 250 hp IL drives available in 48-inch enclosure 300400 hp IL drives available in 60-inch enclosure 500600 hp IL drives available in 80-inch enclosure NEMA Type 1, NEMA 12 with gaskets and lters Input voltage: 480V, 208/230V Complete range of control, network and power options Horsepower range: 480V, 25700 hp IH; 25800 hp IL 208/230V, 25100 hp IL; consult factory for details Over 10 years of 18-pulse clean power experience
CPX9000150 hp IL
CA08104001E
31.2-2 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage CPX9000

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 016
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Designed to exceed the IEEE 519-1992 requirements for harmonic distortion, the CPX9000 is the clear choice for applications in the water, wastewater, HVAC, industrial and process industries where harmonics are a concern.
What Causes Harmonics?

Harmonics are the result of nonlinear loads that convert AC line voltage to DC. Examples of equipment that are nonlinear loads are listed below: AC variable frequency drives DC drives Fluorescence lighting, computers, UPS systems Industrial washing machines, punch presses, welders, etc.
What are Harmonics?

Take a perfect wave with a fundamental frequency of 60 Hz, which is close to what is supplied by the power company.
Volts (v) f(x) = sin(x)
How Can Harmonics Due to VFDs Be Diminished?

By purchasing Eatons 18-pulse Eaton drive that is guaranteed to meet IEEE Std. 519-1992 Harmonic Distortion Limits.
What are Linear Loads?

Linear loads are primarily devices that run across the line and do not add harmonics. Motors are prime examples. The downside to having large motor linear loads is that they draw more energy than a VFD, because of their inability to control motor speed. In most applications, there is a turn down valve used with the motor that will reduce the ow of the material, without signicantly reducing the load to the motor. While this provides some measure of speed control, it is extremely inefcient.
Time (t)
Figure 31.2-1. Perfect Wave
Why be Concerned About Harmonics?

1. Installation and utility costs increase. Harmonics cause damage to transformers and lower efciencies due to the IR loss. These losses can become signicant (from 16.621.6%), which can have a dramatic effect on the HVAC systems that are controlling the temperatures of the building where the transformer and drive equipment reside. 2. Downtime and loss of productivity. Telephones and data transmissions links may not be guaranteed to work on the same power grids polluted with harmonics.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Add a second wave that is ve times the fundamental frequency300 Hz (typical of frequency added to the line by a uorescent light).
Volts (v)
f(x) = sin(5x) 5
Time (t)
3. Downtime and nuisance trips of drives and other equipment. Emergency generators have up to three times the impedance that is found in a conventional utility source. Thus the harmonic voltage can be up to three times as large, causing risk of operation problems. 4. Larger motors must be used. Motors running across the line that are connected on polluted power distribution grids can overheat or operate at lower efciency due to harmonics. 5. Higher installation costs. Transformers and power equipment must be oversized to accommodate the loss of efciencies. This is due to the harmonic currents circulating through the distribution without performing useful work.
Figure 31.2-2. Second Wave
Combine the two waves. The result is a 60 Hz supply rich in fth harmonics.
Volts (v) f(x) = sin(x) + sin(5x) 5
How Does a VFD Convert Three-Phase AC to a Variable Output Voltage and Frequency?
The 6-pulse VFD: The majority of all conventional drives that are built consist of a 6-pulse conguration. Figure 31.2-4 represents a 6-diode rectier design that converts three-phase utility power to DC. The inverter section uses IGBTs to convert DC power to a simulated AC sine wave that can vary in frequency from 0400 Hz.
Time (t)
Figure 31.2-3. Resulting Supply

September 2011
Sheet 31 017

Enclosed Drives
31.2-3
6-Pulse Diode Bridge Rectifier Converter Section
Inverter Section
22 23 24
(+) DC
L2A L1A L3A AC Motor
25 26 27
() DC Dynamic Braking Transistor Bus Capacitors Output Transistors IGBT Section
28 29
Figure 31.2-4. 6-Diode Rectier Design The 6-pulse VFD drive creates harmonic current distortion. The harmonic current that is created is energy that can not be used by customers and causes external heat and losses to all components including other drives that are on the same power distribution. Figure 31.2-5 is a 500 hp drive with 167A of damaging harmonic current.

Guidelines of Meeting IEEE Std. 519-1992 Harmonic Distortion Limits
The IEEE 519-1992 Specication is a standard that provides guidelines for commercial and industrial users that are implementing medium and low voltage equipment. Table 31.2-2. Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in % of the Fundamental (120V through 69,000V)
Isc/IL Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics) h<11 <20 20<50 50<100 100<1000 >1000 4.0 7.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 11h<17 2.0 3.5 4.5 5.5 7.0 17h<23 1.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 23h<35 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 35h 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.4 5.0 8.0 12.0 15.0 20.0 TDD
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Current Amps 1000
500
-500
-1000 0.100
0.10625
0.1125 Time in Seconds
0.11875
0.125
The ratio ISC/IL is the ratio of the short-circuit current available at the point of common coupling (PCC), to the maximum fundamental load current. Consequently, as the size of the user load decreases with respect to the size of the system, the percentage of harmonic current that the user is allowed to inject into the utility system increases. Notes: TDD = Total demand distortion is the harmonic current distortion in percent of the maximum demand load current (15 or 30 minute demand). ISC = Maximum short-circuit current at the PCC not counting motor contribution. IL = Maximum demand load current for all of the connected loads (fundamental frequency component) at the PCC. All of the limits are measured at a point of common coupling.
Figure 31.2-5. 6-Pulse Nonproductive Harmonic Current Table 31.2-1. 6-Pulse Nonproductive Harmonic Current
6-Pulse Circuit Current harmonics I1 = 100% I5 = 22.5% I7 = 9.38% Power = 500 hp Harmonic current = 167A I11 = 6.10% I13 = 4.06% I17 = 2.26% I19 = 1.77% I23 = 1.12% I25 = 0.86%
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 018
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Source B Utility Side Transformer ____Volts ____kVA ____Isc ____Impedance Customer Transformer ____Volts ____kVA ____Isc ____Impedance AC Motor AC Motor ____Volts ____Volts PCC Utility Side AC Motor AC Motor ____Volts ____Volts Source A
Customer Generator ____Volts ____kVA ____Isc ____Impedance Generator Set
AC Motor
AC Motor
____AMPS Total Linear Motor Loads Total Nonlinear Drive Loads ____AMPS
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 31.2-6. One-Line Diagram for Harmonic Analysis

The best way to estimate AFD harmonic contribution to an electrical system is to perform a harmonic analysis based on known system characteristics. The one line in this gure would provide the data to complete the calculations.
Terms
PCC (point of common coupling) is dened as the electrical connecting point between the utility and multiple customers per the specications in IEEE 519 POA (point of analysis) is dened as where the harmonic calculations are taken An oscilloscope can make all measurements at the PCC or POA to do an on-site harmonic evaluation
AFD
Motor
Harmonic Reduction Methods to Meet IEEE 519

1. Line Reactor
A line reactor is a three-phase series inductance lter on the line side of an AFD. If a line reactor is applied on all AFDs, it is possible to meet IEEE guidelines where 1025% of system loads are AFDs, depending on the stiffness of the line and the value of line reactance. Line reactors are available in various values of percent impedance, most typically 11.5%, 3% and 5%. (Note: the SVX9000 comes standard with a nominal 3% input impedance.)
Figure 31.2-7. Line Reactor
Advantages
Low cost Can provide moderate reduction in voltage and current harmonics Available in various values of percent impedance Provides increased input protection for AFD and its semiconductors from line transients

Disadvantages
May not reduce harmonic levels to below IEEE 519-1992 guidelines Voltage drop due to IR loss
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 019

Enclosed Drives
31.2-5
2. Clean Power Drives

When the total load is comprised of nonlinear load such as drives and the ratio is Isc/IL, the greatest harmonic mitigation is required. Under these conditions, the currents drawn from the supply need to be sinusoidal and clean such that system interference and additional losses are negligible. The Eaton CPX9000 Clean Power Drive uses a phase-shifting auto transformer with delta-connected winding that carries only the ampere-turns caused by the difference in load currents. This results in nine separate phases. In this type of configuration, the total kVA rating
18-Pulse SCR Bridge Rectifier Converter Section
of the transformer magnetic system was only 48% that of the motor load. A traditional isolated transformer system, with multipulse windings, would require the full kVA rating to be supported, which is more common in a MV stepdown transformer. The integrated 18-pulse clean power drive, with near sine wave input current and low harmonics will meet the requirements of IEEE 519-1992 under all practical operating conditions. The comparisons with 6-pulse and 12-pulse systems are shown in Figures 31.2-5 and 31.2-9.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Inverter Section Pre-Charge Circuit (+) DC
A 9 1 2 3 8 7 C 6 5 N 4 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 () DC AC Motor
29 30 31
Three-Phase AC Input
18-Pulse Phase-Shifting Auto-Transformer
Diode Rectifiers Bus Capacitors
Dynamic Braking Transistor
Output Transistors IGBT Section
32 33
Figure 31.2-8. Basic 18-Pulse Rectier with Differential Delta Transformer
Advantages
Current Amps 1000
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
500
Virtually guarantees compliance with IEEE 519-1992 Provides increased input protection for AFD and its semiconductors from line transients Up to four times the harmonic reduction of 12-pulse methods Smaller transformer than isolation transformer used in 12-pulse converter
Disadvantages
-500
Larger and heavier magnetics than applying a line reactor on SVX or tuned harmonic lter/cap on CFX
-1000 0.100
0.10625
0.1125 Time in Seconds
0.11875
0.125
Figure 31.2-9. 500 hp 480V Drive with 18-Pulse Rectiers Table 31.2-3. 500 hp 480V Drive with 18-Pulse Rectiers
18-Pulse Clean Power Current harmonics I1 = 100% I5 = 0.16% I7 = 0.03% Power = 428.8 kW Hc = 24A I11 = 0.24% I13 = 0.10% I17 = 0.86% I19 = 1.00% I23 = 0.01% I25 = 0.01%
42 43
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 020
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Feature Description CPX9000 Enclosed Products NEMA Type 1 Standard Input voltage base 0500 250% for 2 seconds 150%/110% Optional Standard Optional Optional UL, cUL Standard 200 kA rating Optional Standard FR6FR9 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Feature Description Discrete Outputs Fault alarm Drive running Drive at set speed Optional parameters Dry contacts Open collector outputs Additional discrete outputs Communications RS-232 RS-422/485 DeviceNet Modbus RTU CANopen (slave) PROFIBUS-DP LonWorks Johnson Controls Metasys N2 CPX9000 Enclosed Products NEMA Type 1
Primary Design Features

4566 Hz input frequency Output: AC volts maximum Output frequency range: Hz Initial output current (IH) Overload: 1 minute (IH/IL) Enclosure space heater Oversize enclosure Output contactor Bypass motor starter Listings
Input/Output Interface Features (Continued)

Standard Standard Programmable 14 1 (2 relays Form C) 1 Optional Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Programmable Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 7 Selectable Standard Standard Optional 116 kHz 0 to 50C up to FR9 0 to 40C FR10 and larger, consult factory for 50C rating above FR9 40 to 60C 95% 3300 ft (1000m) +10/15% 4566 Hz >96% 0.99
Protection Features
Incoming line fuses AC input circuit disconnect Phase rotation insensitive EMI lter Input phase loss protection Input overvoltage protection Line surge protection Output short circuit protection Output ground fault protection Output phase protection Overtemperature protection DC overvoltage protection Drive overload protection Motor overload protection Programmer software Local/remote keypad Keypad lockout Fault alarm output Built-in Diagnostics MOV
Performance Features
Sensorless vector control Volts/hertz control IR and slip compensation Electronic reversing Dynamic braking DC braking PID set point controller Critical speed lockout Current (torque) limit Adjustable acceleration/deceleration Linear or S curve accel/decel Jog at preset speed Thread/preset speeds Automatic restart Coasting motor start Coast or ramp stop selection Elapsed time meter Carrier frequency adjustment Maximum operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Humidity (maximum), noncondensing Altitude (maximum without derate) Line voltage variation Line frequency variation Efciency Power factor (displacement)
Input/Output Interface Features

Setup Adjustment Provisions Remote keypad/display Personal computer Operator Control Provisions Drive mounted keypad/display Remote keypad/display Conventional control elements Serial communications 115 Vac control circuit Speed Setting Inputs Keypad 010 Vdc potentiometer/voltage signal 420 mA isolated 420 mA differential 315 psig Analog Outputs Speed/frequency Torque/load/current Motor voltage Kilowatts 010 Vdc signals 420 mA DC signals Isolated signals
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard Standard Congurable Congurable Optional Standard Programmable Programmable Programmable Congurable w/jumpers Standard Optional
Standard Conditions for Application and Service
Table 31.2-5. Standard I/O Specications

Description 6Digital input programmable 2Analog input congurable w/jumpers 2Digital output programmable 1Digital output programmable 1Analog output programmable congurable w/jumper Specication 24 V: 0 10V, 1 18V, Ri > 5 k Voltage: 010V, Ri > 200 k Current: 0 (4)20 mA, Ri = 250 k Form C relays 250 Vac 2A or 30 Vdc 2A resistive Open collector 48 Vdc 50 mA 020 mA, impedance 500 ohms, resolution 106 3%
The EMI lter is optional in FR10 and larger.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 021

Enclosed Drives
31.2-7

Table 31.2-6. CPX9000 Enclosed NEMA Type 1 Drive Catalog Numbering System
Build options alphabetically and numerically.
22 23 24
Enclosed Options K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 KF KO L1 L2 LE P1 PE PF PG PH PI PN RA RB RC RD RG S7 S8 S9
CPX 100 1 4 A A
Product Family CPX = Clean power 18-pulse enclosed drives Horsepower Rating 025 = 25 hp 030 = 30 hp 040 = 40 hp 050 = 50 hp 060 = 60 hp 075 = 75 hp 100 = 100 hp 125 = 125 hp 150 = 150 hp 200 = 200 hp 250 = 250 hp 300 = 300 hp 350 = 350 hp 400 = 400 hp 500 = 500 hp 600 = 600 hp 700 = 700 hp 800 = 800 hp Enclosure Rating 1 = NEMA Type 1 6 = NEMA 12 filtered Voltage Rating 4 = 480V ApplicationTorque/Braking A = IL/no brake chopper B = IL/internal brake chopper D = IH/no brake chopper E = IH/internal brake chopper Enclosed Style A = Enclosed drive Type Control Control Control Control Control Control Addl. bypass Control Light Addl. bypass Light Input Output Output Output Output Output Addl. bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure Door-mounted speed potentiometer Door-mounted speed potentiometer with HOA selector switch 315 psig follower HAND/OFF/AUTO switch (22 mm) MANUAL/AUTO reference switch (22 mm) START/STOP pushbuttons (22 mm) Bypass test switch for RA and RB Standard elapsed time meter Power on and fault pilot lights Bypass pilot lights for RA, RB, bypass options Red RUN light Input disconnect Output contactor Output lter MotoRx (up to 600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT lter Single overload relay Dual overload relays Dual overloads for bypass Manual HOA bypass controller Manual IOB bypass controller Auto transfer HOA bypass controller Auto transfer IOB bypass controller Reduced voltage starter for bypass 10-inch expansion 20-inch expansion Space heater Communication Options C2 C3 C4 C5 = Modbus = PROFIBUS DP = LonWorks = PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) C6 = CANopen (slave) C7 = DeviceNet C8 = Modbus (D9 Type connector) CA = Johnson Controls N2 CI = Modbus TCP CJ = BACnet D3 = RS-232 with D9 connection
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Control Options B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B2 = 1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 Therm B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B5 = 3 RO (NO) B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac Input Engineered Options HT = High temperature rating for 50C (FR10 and above) VB = Varnished boards

Brake chopper is standard in drives up to 30 hp IH or 40 hp IL. It is optional in larger drives. Local/remote keypad is included as the standard control panel and as a digital HOA switch. Some options are voltage and/or horsepower specic. Consult your Eaton representative for details. See Pages 31.2-15 and 31.2-16 for descriptions. Includes local/remote speed reference switch. See Pages 31.2-17 and 31.2-18 for complete descriptions. Consult Eaton for pricing and availability.
42 43
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 022
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Product Selection
DoorMounted Keypad CPX9000 Drive
When Ordering
Select a base catalog number that meets the application requirementsnominal horsepower, voltage and enclosure rating. (The enclosed drives continuous output amp rating should be equal to or greater than the motors full load ampere rating.) The base enclosed package includes a standard drive, door-mounted alphanumeric panel and enclosure The CPX9000 product uses the term High Overload (IH) in place of the term Constant Torque (CT). Likewise, Low Overload (IL) is used in place of the term Variable Torque (VT). The new terms are a more precise description of the rating. The older terms included ambient temperature ratings in addition to overload ratings. In order to minimize enclosure size and offer the highest ambient temperature rating, overload and temperature ratings are now treated separately. Ambient temperature ratings are shown in Table 31.2-7. Consult the factory for 50C ratings of FR10 and above
Input Disconnect (PI Option)
Pre-charge Contactor
18-Pulse Diode Rectier
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
18-Pulse Auto Transformer Input Choke Input Fusing
Table 31.2-7. Ambient Temperature Ratings

Frame Size FR4FR9 FR10 and above IH 50C 40C IL 50C 40C
NEMA Type 1, 25150 hp (30 x 90 x 21.5)
If dynamic brake chopper or Control/Communication option is desired, change the appropriate code in the base catalog number
Note: All of the programming is exactly the same as the standard SVX9000 drive.
Select enclosed options. Add the codes as sufxes to the base catalog number in alphabetical and numeric order
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 023

Enclosed Drives
31.2-9
Table 31.2-8. 480 Vac CPX9000 Base Drive Product Selection

Enclosure Size 7 hp Current (A) 38 46 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 261 300 385 460 520 590 650 730 820 920 1030 38 46 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 245 300 385 460 520 590 650 720 820 840 Chassis Frame FR6 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10 FR11 FR11 FR11 FR12 FR12 FR12 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10 FR11 FR11 FR11 FR12 FR12 FR12 Drawing Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Low Overload DriveIL = Variable Torque

25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 700 800 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 700
8 9
10
11
High Overload DriveIH = Constant Torque

7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4

7 8 9
10
11
See enclosure dimensions in Table 31.2-9. Consult factory.
Table 31.2-9. CPX9000 Enclosure Dimensions

Enclosure Size 7 8 9 10 11

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width 30.00 (762.0) 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 80.00 (2032.0) Height 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) 90.00 (2286.0) Depth 21.50 (546.1) 26.14 (664.0) 25.74 (653.8) 31.75 (806.5)
38 39 40 41 42 43
Enclosure sizes accommodate drive and options, including bypass and disconnect. For other power options, consult your Eaton representative. Consult factory.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 024
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Dimensions
CPX Drawing 1Enclosure Size 7
Exhaust Air For Cable Entry 4.79 (121.7)
20.00 (508.0)
15.00 (381.0)
26.25 (666.8)
Hinged Side Door Clearance 10.00 at 90 (254.0) Top View
2.00 (50.8)
4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required
29 30
Keypad
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
15.50 (393.7) 30.00 (762.0) Front View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Holes (4 Places) 3.50 (88.9) 93.92 (2385.6) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.37 (2143.0)
Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
Key-Locking Handle
Intake Ventilating Slots (Filtered on NEMA 12) Quarter Turn Latch (2 Places)
39 40 41 42 43
21.50 (546.1) Side View
Opening for Bottom Cable Entry
18.75 (476.3) 5.75 (146.1) Construction: NEMA Type 1 Oversize Finish: EnclosureANSI 61 Gray (Light) 1.75 (44.5) Typ. 24.45 (621.0) 28.05 (712.5) Bottom View
8.50 (215.9) 8.00 (203.2)
Figure 31.2-10. 25150 hp IL and 25125 hp IHApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

September 2011
Sheet 31 025

Enclosed Drives
31.2-11

31.00 (787.4)
22
1.25 (31.8) 8.25 (209.6)
23 24
Opening for Top Cable Entry (2 Places)
25 26
Top View 4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required Keypad Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
27 28 29 30
Key-Locking Handle
31 32
93.50 (2374.9) 90.00 (2286.0)
84.37 (2143.0) Intake Ventilating Slots (Filtered on NEMA 12)
33 34
Quarter Turn Latch (2 Places)
35 36
24.00 (609.6) 25.14 (639) Side View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Holes (4 Places)
21.45 (544.8) 21.31 (541.3) 48.00 (1219.2) Front View 9.50 (241.3) Opening for Bottom Cable Entry 12.50 (317.5) 7.73 (196.34) 3.01 (76.45) 37.47 (951.74) 45.22 (1148.59) Bottom View
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
22.47 (570.74) 5.48 (139.19) Construction: NEMA Type 1 Oversize Finish: EnclosureANSI 61 Gray (Light)
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 026
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

1.5 (38.1) 43.5 (1104.9) 9.75 (247.7) 7.46 x 15.00 (189.5 x 381.0) Access in Top 2 Places
27.36 (694.9) 29.05 (737.9)
90 Max. Door Opening
27.06 (687.3)
Top View 4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required
Keypad Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels 93.50 (2374.9) 90.00 (2286.0)
Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified
Key-Locking Handle
Access Plate 4 Places
Quarter Turn Latch (2 Places) Intake Ventilating Slots (Filtered on NEMA 12)
25.00 (635.0) 26.14 (664.0) Side View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Hole 5 Places
60.00 (1524) Front View 32.72 (831.1) 8.50 x 12.00 (215.9 x 304.8) Bottom Access
25.00 (635.0) 18.84 (478.5) 8.20 (208.3) 2.00 (50.8) 22.90 (581.7) 46.30 (1176.0) 54.90 (1394.5) Bottom View 11.93 (303.0)
Finish: Enclosure ANSI 61 Gray (Light) Material: Enclosure and Backplate 12 ga. = .1046 Cold Rolled Steel
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 027

Enclosed Drives
31.2-13

15.63 (397.0) 9.03 (229.4)
22 23 24 25
21.00 x 10.00 (533.4 x 254.0) Access in Top
26
Top View 4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified
27 28 29 30
Key-Locking Handle
Keypad
93.50 (2374.9) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.37 (2143.0)
Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
31 32 33
34 35
Intake Ventilating Slots (Filtered on NEMA 12)
36 37
30.50 (774.7) 31.75 (806.5) Side View 15.64 (397.3)
35.75 (908.1) 80.00 (2032.0) Front View
35.75 (908.1)
38
21.00 x 10.00 (533.4 x 254.0) Bottom Access
39 40
29.04 (737.6) 4.87 (123.7) 17.79 (451.9)
41 42
2.00 (50.8) Finish: Enclosure ANSI 61 Gray (Light) Material: Enclosure and Backplate12 ga. = 0.1046 Cold Rolled Steel 38.00 (965.2) 42.02 (1067.3) 78.02 (1981.7) Bottom View
43


Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 028
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Wiring Diagrams
HMCP
Circuit Breaker Input Fusing I Inverter Input Contactor
Inverter Input I Contactor Input Fusing 18-Pulse Transformer Optional Reduced Voltage Starter (IT T)
18-Pulse Transformer
18-Pulse Diode Bridge
18-Pulse Diode Bridge 9000X Drive
9000X Drive Output M Contactor
Mechanical Interlock L
Bypass Contactor
Motor
Overload
Motor
Figure 31.2-14. Power Diagram 25250 hp IL and 25200 hp IH
Figure 31.2-16. Power Diagram 25250 hp IL and 25200 hp IH with Bypass
HMCP
Circuit Breaker
Inverter Input p Contactor I Fusing
Input Fusing
37 38 39 40
9000X 12-Pulse Drive 18-Pulse Transformer Pre-charge Complete Contactor 6-Pulse Diode Bridge
18-Pulse T Transformer Pre-charge g Complete p Contactor 6-Pulse Diode Bridge
Optional Reduced Voltage Starter V
(IT T)
9000X 12-Pulse Drive e Mechanical Interlock L
41 42
Motor
p Output M Contactor
Bypass yp Contactor
Overload
43
Figure 31.2-15. Power Diagram 300+ hp IL and 250+ hp IH
Motor
Figure 31.2-17. Power Diagram 300+ hp IL/250+ hp IH with Bypass

CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 029

Enclosed Drives
31.2-15
Options
Control/Communication Option Descriptions
Table 31.2-10. Available Control/Communications Options
Option K1 Description Door-Mounted Speed PotentiometerProvides the CPX9000 with the ability to adjust the frequency reference using a doormounted potentiometer. This option uses the 10 Vdc reference to generate a 010V signal at the analog voltage input signal terminal. When the HOA bypass option is added, the speed is controlled when the HOA switch is in the hand position. Without the HOA bypass option, a two-position switch (labeled local/remote) is provided on the keypad to select speed reference from the speed potentiometer or a remote speed signal. Option Type Control
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Control
K2
Door-Mounted Speed Potentiometer with HOA Selector SwitchProvides the CPX9000 with the ability to start/stop and adjust Control the speed reference from door-mounted control devices or remotely from customer supplied inputs. In HAND position, the drive will start and the speed is controlled by the door-mounted speed potentiometer. The drive will be disabled in the OFF position. When AUTO is selected, the run enable and speed reference are controlled from remote inputs. Speed reference can be either 010 Vdc or 420 mA. The drive default is 420 mA, parameter is eld programmable. Run enable is controlled by a dry contact closure. This option requires a customer supplied 115V power source. 315 psig FollowerProvides a pneumatic transducer that converts a 315 psig pneumatic signal to either 08 Vdc or a 19 Vdc signal interface with the CPX9000. The circuit board is mounted on the inside of the front enclosure panel and connects to the users pneumatic control system via 6 ft (1.8m) of exible tubing and a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) brass tube union. HAND/OFF/AUTO Switch for Non-bypass CongurationsProvides a three-position selector switch that allows the user to select either a Hand or Auto mode of operation. Hand mode is defaulted to keypad operation, and Auto mode is defaulted to control from an external terminal source. These modes of operation can be congured via drive programming to allow for alternate combinations of start and speed sources. Start and speed sources include keypad, I/O and Fieldbus. MANUAL/AUTO Speed Reference SwitchProvides door-mounted selector switch for Manual/Auto speed reference. START/STOP PushbuttonsProvides door-mounted START and STOP pushbuttons for either bypass or non-bypass congurations. Control
K3
K4
29
Control Control
K5 K6 KF KO L1 L2
30 31 32 33
Bypass Test Switch for RB and RAAllows the user to energize the AF drive for testing while operating the motor on the bypass Addl. bypass controller. The Test Switch is mounted on the inside of the enclosure door. Standard Elapsed Time MeterProvides a door-mounted elapsed run time meter. Control Power On and Fault Power LightsProvides a white power on light that indicates power to the enclosed cabinet and a red fault Light light that indicates a drive fault has occurred. Bypass Pilot Lights for RB, RA Bypass OptionsA green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. The lights are mounted on the enclosure door, above the switches. RUN Pilot LightProvides a green run light that indicates the drive has been commanded to start. Addl. bypass
LE P1
Light
Input Disconnect Assembly Rated to 100 kAICHigh Interrupting Motor Circuit Protector (HMCP) or circuit breaker that provides Input a means of short-circuit protection for the power cables between it and the CPX9000, and protection from high-level ground faults on the power cable. Allows a convenient means of disconnecting the CPX9000 from the line and the operating mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. This is factory mounted in the enclosure. Output ContactorProvides a means for positive disconnection of the drive output from the motor terminals. The contactor coil Output is controlled by the drives run or permissive logic. NC and NO auxiliary contacts rated at 10A, 600 Vac are provided for customer use. Bypass options RB and RA include an output contactor as standard. This option includes a low VA 115 Vac fused control power transformer and is factory mounted in the enclosure. Output FilterUsed to reduce the transient voltage (DV/DT) at the motor terminals. The output lter is recommended for cable Output lengths exceeding 100 ft (30m) with a drive of 3 hp and above, for cable lengths of 33 ft (10m) with a drive of 2 hp and below, or for a drive rated at 525690V. This option is mounted in the enclosure, and may be used in conjunction with a brake chopper circuit. MotoRx (300600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT FilterUsed to reduce transient voltage (DV/DT) and peak voltages at the motor Output terminals. This option is comprised of a 0.5% line reactor, followed by capacitive ltering and an energy recovery/clamping circuit. Unlike the output lter (see option PF), the MotoRx recovers most of the energy from the voltage peaks, resulting in a lower voltage drop to the motor, and therefore conserving power. This option is used when the distance between a single motor and the drive is 300600 ft (91183m). This option can not be used with the brake chopper circuit. The output lter (option PF) should be investigated as an alternative. Single Overload RelayUses a bimetallic overload relay to provide additional overload current protection to the motor on congurations without bypass options. It is included with the bypass congurations for overload current protection in the bypass mode. The overload relay is mounted within the enclosure, and is manually resettable. Heater pack included. Output
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
PE
PF
PG
PH
PI
Dual Overload RelaysThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors and overload current protec- Output tion is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Heater packs not included. Dual Overloads for BypassThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors in the bypass mode and overload current protection is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Addl. bypass
PN
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
Table 31.2-10. Available Control/Communications Options (Continued)
Option RA Description
September 2011
Sheet 31 030
22 23 24
Option Type
Manual HOA Bypass ControllerThe manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of Bypass bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in the inverter mode. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Manual IOB Bypass ControllerThe manual INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Auto Transfer HOA Bypass ControllerThe manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in either mode. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Door-mounted pilot lights are provided, which indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. WARNING: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the HOA selector switch is turned to the OFF position. Auto Transfer IOB Bypass ControllerThe auto INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Door-mounted pilot lights are provided, which indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is turned to the OFF position. Reduced Voltage Starter for BypassUsed in conjunction with bypass option RA, RB, RC or RD. This option adds S801 or S811 Series reduced voltage soft starter to bypass assembly for soft starting in bypass mode. 10-Inch ExpansionExpansion cabinet allows for special components, customer-supplied components or oversized cables. Note: Enclosure expansion rated NEMA Type 1 only. 20-Inch ExpansionExpansion cabinet allows for special components, customer-supplied components or oversized cables. Note: Enclosure expansion rated NEMA Type 1 only. Space HeaterPrevents condensation from forming in the enclosure when the drive is inactive or in storage. Includes a thermostat for variable temperature control. The 400W heater requires a customer supplied 115V remote supply source. Bypass
RB
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
RG S7 S8 S9 RD RC
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 031

Enclosed Drives
31.2-17
CPX9000 Series Option Board Kits

The CPX9000 Series drives can accommodate a wide selection of expander and adapter option boards to customize the drive for your application needs. The drives control unit is designed to accept a total of ve option boards (see Figure 31.2-18). The CPX9000 Series factory-installed standard board conguration includes an A9 I/O board and an A2 relay output board, which are installed in slots A and B.
22 23 24
DE B C
25 26 27 28
Figure 31.2-18. CPX9000 Series Option Boards Table 31.2-11. Option Board Kits
Option Kit Description Allowed Slot Locations Field Installed Catalog Number OPTA2 OPTA9 Factory Installed Option Designator SVX Ready Programs Basic Local/ Standard Remote MSS PID Multi-P. PFC
29 30 31
Standard I/O Cards (See Figure 31.2-18)

2 RO (NC/NO) 6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1AO, 1 +10 Vdc ref, 2 ext +24 Vdc/ EXT +24 Vdc B A
32 33 34 35 36 37
Extended I/O Card Options

6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc 1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 Therm 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc 3 RO (NO) 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input B, C, D, E B, C, D, E B, C, D, E OPTB1 OPTB2 OPTB4 B1 B2 B4
B, C, D, E B, C, D, E B,C, D, E
OPTB5 OPTB8 OPTB9
B5 B8 B9
Communication Cards
Modbus Modbus TCP BACnet Johnson Controls N2 PROFIBUS DP LonWorks PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) CANopen (slave) DeviceNet Modbus (D9 Type connector) RS-232 with D9 connection

D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E
OPTC2 OPTCI OPTCJ OPTC2 OPTC3 OPTC4 OPTC5 OPTC6 OPTC7 OPTC8 OPTD3
C2 CI CJ CA C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D3
38 39 40 41 42 43
Option card must be installed in one of the slots listed for that card. Slot indicated in Bold is the preferred location. AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output, DI = Digital Input, DO = Digital Output, RO = Relay Output OPTC2 is a multi-protocol option card.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives Modbus RTU Network Communications
The Modbus Network Card OPTC2 is used for connecting the CPX9000 as a slave on a Modbus network. The interface is connected by a 9-pin DSUB connector (female) and the baud rate ranges from 300 to 19200 baud. Other communication parameters include an address range from 1 to 247; a parity of None, Odd or Even; and the stop bit is 1.
September 2011
Sheet 31 032
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CANopen (Slave) Communications

The CANopen (slave) Network Card OPTC6 is used for connecting the CPX9000 to a host system. According to ISO 11898, standard cables to be chosen for CANbus should have a nominal impedance of 120 ohms, and specic line delay of nominal 5 nS/m. 120 ohm line termination resistors required for installation.
DeviceNet Network Communications

The DeviceNet Network Card OPTC7 is used for connecting the CPX9000 on a DeviceNet Network. It includes a 5.08 mm pluggable connector. Transfer method is via CAN using a two-wire twisted shielded cable with two-wire bus power cable and drain. The baud rates used for communication include 125k baud, 250k baud and 500k baud.
Johnson Controls Metasys N2 Network Communications

The OPTC2 eldbus board provides communication between the CPX9000 drive and a Johnson Controls Metasys N2 network. With this connection, the drive can be controlled, monitored and programmed from the Metasys system. The N2 eldbus is available as a factory-installed option and as a eld-installable kit.
Table 31.2-12. I/O Specications for the Control/Communication Options

Description Analog voltage, input Analog current, input Digital Input Auxiliary voltage Reference voltage Analog current, output Analog voltage, output Relay output Max. switching voltage Max. switching load Max. continuous load Thermistor input Specications 010V, Ri 200k ohms 0 (4)20 mA, Ri = 250 ohms 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V, Ri > 5k ohms 24V (20%), maximum 50 mA 10V 3%, maximum 10 mA 0 (4)20 mA, RL = 500 k, resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2% 0 (2)10V, RL 1k ohm, resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2%
PROFIBUS Network Communications

The PROFIBUS Network Card OPTC3 is used for connecting the CPX9000 as a slave on a PROFIBUS-DP network. The interface is connected by a 9-pin DSUB connector (female). The baud rates range from 9.6K baud to 12M baud, and the addresses range from 1 to 127.
300 Vdc, 250 Vac 8A/24 Vdc, 0.4A/300 Vdc, 2 kVA/250 Vac 2A rms Rtrip = 4.7k ohms
LonWorks Network Communications

The LonWorks Network Card OPTC4 is used for connecting the CPX9000 on a LonWorks network. This interface uses Standard Network Variable Types (SNVT) as data types. The channel connection is achieved using a FTT-10A Free Topology transceiver via a single twisted transfer cable. The communication speed with LonWorks is 78 kBits/s.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 033
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage CFX9000 Drives

General Description
31.3-1
CFX9000 Drives
The CFX9000 drive also delivers true power factorin addition to reducing harmonic distortion, the CFX9000 drive prevents transformer overheating and overloading of breakers and feeders, which enables the application of adjustable frequency drives on generators and other high impedance power systems.
Custom engineeredfor those applications with more unique or complex requirements, these are individually engineered to the customers needs. Contact your local sales ofce for assistance in pricing and lead time
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Terms
PCC (point of common coupling) is dened as the electrical connecting point between the utility and multiple customers per the specications in IEEE 519 POA (point of analysis) is dened as where the harmonic calculations are taken
CFX9000 Enclosed Products

Standard enclosedcovers a wide range of the most commonly ordered options. Pre-engineering eliminates the lead time normally associated with customer specic options. Available congurations are listed on Pages 31.3-331.3-8 Modied standard enclosed applies to specic customer requirements that vary from the Standard Enclosed offering, such as the need for an additional indicating light or minor modications to drawings. Contact your local sales ofce for assistance in pricing and lead time
CFX9000 Enclosed Drives
General Description
Eatons CFX9000 Clean Power Drives use tuned passive lters to signicantly reduce line harmonics at the drive input terminals.
An oscilloscope can make all measurements at the PCC or POA to do an on-site harmonic evaluation.
____Volts
____Volts PCC Utility Side
____Volts
____Volts
Source A
34
AC Motor AC Motor
35 36
Utility Side Transformer ____Volts ____kVA ____Isc ____Impedance
Customer Transformer ____Volts ____kVA ____Isc ____Impedance AC Motor AC Motor
37 38 39
AC Motor AC Motor
Customer Generator ____Volts ____kVA ____Isc ____Impedance Generator Set
40 41
Source B
____AMPS Total Linear Motor Loads Total Nonlinear Drive Loads ____AMPS
42 43
The best way to estimate AFD harmonic contribution to an electrical system is to perform a harmonic analysis based on known system characteristics. The one line in this gure would provide the data to complete the calculations.
Figure 31.3-1. One-Line Diagram for Harmonic Analysis
CA08104001E
31.3-2 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage CFX9000 Drives

General Description
September 2011
Sheet 31 034
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Harmonic Reduction Methods to Meet IEEE 519

1. Line Reactor
A line reactor is a three-phase series inductance on the line side of an AFD. If a line reactor is applied on all AFDs, it is possible to meet IEEE guidelines where 1025% of system loads are AFDs, depending on the stiffness of the line and the value of line reactance. Line reactors are available in various values of percent impedance, most typically 11.5%, 3% and 5%.
Note: The 9000X drives come standard with a nominal 3% input impedance.
Table 31.3-1. 100 hp CFX9000 480V Drive with Integrated Passive Filter
Passive Filter
Current harmonics
I1 = 100% I5 = 3.76% I7 = 1.65% Power = 100 hp Hc = 8.6A I11 = 0.24% I13 = 1.1% I17 = 0.80% I19 = 0.50% I23 = 0.55% I25 = 0.80%
Current Amps 200
100 AFD Motor 0
Figure 31.3-2. Line Reactor
100
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Advantages
Low cost Can provide moderate reduction in voltage and current harmonics Available in various values of percent impedance Provides increased input protection for AFD and its semiconductors from line transients

200 Time
Figure 31.3-3. 100 hp CFX9000 480V Drive with Integrated Passive Filter
Advantages
Low cost for smaller horsepower applications More effective harmonic attenuation than 12-pulse drives Provides increased input protection for AFD from line transients

Disadvantages
May not reduce harmonic levels to below IEEE 519-1992 guidelines Voltage drop due to IR loss
Disadvantages
Capacitors age over time, unlike magnetics Not as effective as 18-pulse drives Challenging to retrot with bypass applications

2. Passive Filters
Tuned harmonic lters involve the series connection of an inductor with the shunt connection of an inductor and capacitor to form a low impedance path to ground for a specic range of frequencies. This path presents an alternative to the ow of harmonic currents back into the utility source.
Tuned Harmonic Capacitor Shunt Fusing Tuned Shunt Reactor 6-Pulse Diode Bridge Rectifier Converter Section Inverter Section
(+) DC
1 2 3 AC Input Reactor
L1A L2A L3A AC Motor
() DC Three-Phase Input Dynamic Braking Transistor Bus Capacitors Output Transistors IGBT Section
Figure 31.3-4. CFX9000 Drive with Integrated Passive Filter

September 2011
Sheet 31 035

General Description
31.3-3
Features and Benets

CFX9000 Integrated Filter Clean Power Drive features include (at 480V): UL Type 1, UL Type 12, UL Type 3R and NEMA 12 with gaskets and lters Input voltage: 480V, 230V, 575V Complete range of control, network and power options Horsepower range: 480V, 7-1/2400 hp IL 230V, 7-1/2100 hp IL; consult factory for details 575V, 15400 hp IL; consult factory for details
Product Identication
Door-Mounted Keypad SVX9000 Drive
22 23 24
Input Reactor
25 26
Optional Breaker Disconnect (P1) Shunt Fusing
27 28 29
Single enclosure for both drive and lter reduces eld wiring and enables convenient bypass installation Packaged solution ensures optimal coordination of drive and lter

UL cUL 508C

Tuned Shunt Reactor
30 31
Tuned Harmonic Capacitor
32 33
CFX9000 DriveUL Type 12, 40 hp
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

September 2011
Sheet 31 036
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Table 31.3-2. 208 Vac
hp NEC Current Chassis Frame NEMA 1 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 NEMA 12 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 NEMA 3R Disconnect Only DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 Power Options DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6
Low Overload Drive (Variable Torque)

7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 114.0 143.0 169.0 211.0 273.0 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 114.0 143.0 169.0 211.0 273.0 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9
High Overload Drive (Constant Torque)
Table 31.3-3. 230 Vac

hp NEC Current Chassis Frame NEMA 1 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 NEMA 12 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 NEMA 3R Disconnect Only DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 Power Options DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6

7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 104.0 130.0 154.0 192.0 248.0 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 104.0 130.0 154.0 192.0 248.0 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 037

31.3-5
Table 31.3-4. 480 Vac

hp NEC Current Chassis Frame NEMA 1 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 NEMA 12 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 NEMA 3R Disconnect Only DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6

22
Power Options DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6


7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 96.0 124.0 156.0 180.0 240.0 302.0 361.0 414.0 477.0 11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 96.0 124.0 156.0 180.0 240.0 302.0 361.0 414.0
FR4 FR5 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10 FR4 FR5 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10

DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6

DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6

Consult factory.
CA08104001E

Table 31.3-5. 575 Vac
hp NEC Current Chassis Frame NEMA 1 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DWG-1 DWG-1 DWG-1 DWG-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 NEMA 12 Disconnect Only DWG-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DWG-1 DWG-1 DWG-1 DWG-1 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 Power Options DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-3 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-7 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-8 DRW-9 DRW-9 DRW-9 NEMA 3R Disconnect Only DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6

September 2011
Sheet 31 038
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Power Options DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6


15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300
17.0 22.0 27.0 32.0 41.0 52.0 62.0 77.0 99.0 125.0 144.0 192.0 242.0 289.0 382.0 14.0 17.0 22.0 27.0 32.0 41.0 52.0 62.0 77.0 99.0 125.0 144.0 192.0 242.0 289.0
FR6 FR6 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10 FR6 FR6 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10

DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-2 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6

DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-4 DRW-5 DRW-5 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6 DRW-6

Consult factory.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 039

31.3-7
CFX9000 Drives
Table 31.3-6. Primary Design Features
Description 4566 Hz input frequency Output: AC volts maximum Output frequency range Initial output current (IH) Overload (1 minute [IH/IL]) Enclosure space heater Oversize enclosure Output contactor Bypass motor starter Listings Specication Standard Input Voltage Base 0320 Hz 250% for 2 seconds 150%/110% Optional Standard Optional Optional UL, cUL, 508C
Table 31.3-8. Input/Output Interface Features

Description Specication Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard Standard Congurable Congurable Optional Standard Programmable Programmable Programmable Congurable w/jumpers Standard Optional Standard Standard Programmable 14 2 relays Form C 1 Optional
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Setup Adjustment Provisions

Remote keypad/display Personal computer
Operator Control Provisions

Drive mounted keypad/display Remote keypad/display Conventional control elements Serial communications 115 Vac control circuit
Speed Setting Inputs

Keypad 010 Vdc potentiometer/voltage signal 420 mA isolated 420 mA differential 315 psig
Table 31.3-7. Protection Features

Description Incoming line fuses AC input circuit disconnect Phase rotation insensitive EMI lter Input phase loss protection Input overvoltage protection Line surge protection Output short circuit protection Output ground fault protection Output phase protection Overtemperature protection DC overvoltage protection Drive overload protection Motor overload protection Programmer software Local/remote keypad Keypad lockout Fault alarm output Built-in diagnostics Surge protective device
Specication Optional Optional Standard StandardFR6 thru FR9 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional
Analog Outputs
Speed/frequency Torque/load/current Motor voltage Kilowatts 010 Vdc signals 420 mA DC signals Isolated signals
Discrete Outputs
Fault alarm Drive running Drive at set speed Optional parameters Dry contacts Open collector outputs Additional discrete outputs
Table 31.3-9. Communications

Description RS-232 RS-422/485 DeviceNet Modbus RTU CANopen (slave) PROFIBUS-DP LonWorks Johnson Controls Metasys N2 EtherNet/IP/Modbus TCP BACnet Specication Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
The EMI lter is optional in FR10.
CA08104001E

Table 31.3-10. Performance Features
Description Sensorless vector control Volts/hertz control IR and slip compensation Electronic reversing Dynamic braking DC braking PID setpoint controller Critical speed lockout Current (torque) limit Adjustable acceleration/deceleration Linear or S curve acceleration/deceleration Jog at preset speed Thread/preset speeds Automatic restart Coasting motor start Coast or ramp stop selection Elapsed time meter Specication Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Programmable Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 7 Selectable Standard Standard Optional
September 2011
Sheet 31 040
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Description Specication Sixdigital input programmable 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V,Ri >5 kohms Twoanalog input congurable w/jumpers Twodigital output programmable Onedigital output programmable Oneanalog output programmable congurable w/jumper Voltage: 010V, Ri >200 kohms Current: 0 (4)20 mA, Ri = 250 kohms Form C relays 250 Vac or 30 Vdc 2A resistive Open collector 48 Vdc 50 mA 020 mA, RL max. 500 ohms 10 bits 2%
Table 31.3-13. I/O Specications for Control/Communication Options

Description Analog voltage, input Analog current, input Digital input Auxiliary voltage Reference voltage 50C Analog current, output Analog voltage, output Relay output maximum switching voltage Relay output maximum switching load Relay output maximum continuous load Thermistor input
Specication 010V, Ri 200 kilohms 0 (4)20 mA, Ri = 250 ohms 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V, Ri >5 kilohms 24V (20%), max. 50 mA 10V 3%, max. 10 mA 0 (4)20 mA, RL = 500 kilohms, resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2% 0 (2)10V, RL 1 kohm, resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2% 300 Vdc, 250 Vac 3A/24 Vdc, 300 Vdc, 250 Vac 2A rms
Table 31.3-11. Standard Conditions for Application and Service

Description Maximum operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Humidity (maximum), noncondensing Altitude Specication 0 to 40C, contact factory for 40 to 60C 95% 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 3280 ft (1000m); 1% derating for each 328 ft (100m) above 3280 ft (1000m); max. 9842 ft (3000m) +10/15% 4566 Hz >96% 0.99
Line voltage variation Line frequency variation
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Efciency Power factor (displacement)
Rtrip = 4.7 kohms For applications above 3A, consult instruction manual.
Units FR10 rated 40C.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 041

31.3-9

Table 31.3-14. CFX9000 Enclosed Drives Catalog Numbering System
Build Alphabetically and Numerically
22 23 24
CFX 050 1 4 A A
Product Family CFX = Integrated filter clean power drive Horsepower Rating 007 = 7-1/2 010 = 10 015 = 15 020 = 20 025 = 25 030 = 30 040 = 40 050 = 50 060 = 60 075 = 75 100 = 100 125 = 125 150 = 150 200 = 200 250 = 250 300 = 300 350 = 350 400 = 400
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 KF KO L1 L2 LE P1 P3 P7 P8 PE PF PG PH PI PN RA RB RC RD RG S4 S5 S6 S9
Enclosure Rating 1 = UL Type 1 2 = UL Type 12 3 = UL Type 3R Voltage Rating 208V 230V 480V 575V (575600V)
1 2 4 5
= = = =
ApplicationTorque/Braking A = IL/no brake chopper B = IL/internal brake chopper D = IH/no brake chopper E = IH/internal brake chopper Enclosed Style A = Enclosed drive
Enclosed Options Door-mounted speed potentiometer Door-mounted speed potentiometer with HOA selector switch 315 psig follower HAND/OFF/AUTO switch (22 mm) MANUAL/AUTO reference switch (22 mm) START/STOP pushbuttons (22 mm) Bypass test switch for RA and RB Standard elapsed time meter Power, RUN and fault pilot lights Bypass pilot lights for RA, RB, bypass options Red RUN light Input circuit breaker Input line fuses (200 kAIC) Input power surge protection SPD surge protective device Output contactor Output lter MotoRx (up to 600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT lter Single overload relay Dual overload relays Dual overloads for bypass Manual HOA bypass controller Manual IOB bypass controller Auto transfer HOA bypass controller Auto transfer IOB bypass controller Reduced voltage starter for bypass Floor stand 6.00 inches Floor stand 22.00 inches Floor stand 12.00 inches Space heater Communication Options
Type Control Control Control Control Control Control Addl. bypass Control Light Addl. bypass Light Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Addl. bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
= = = = = =
Modbus PROFIBUS DP LonWorks PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) CANopen (slave) DeviceNet
C8 CA CI CJ D3
= = = = =
Modbus (D9 type connector) Johnson Controls N2 Modbus TCP/EtherNet/IP BACnet RS-232 with D9 connection
Control Options B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B = 1 RO (NC-NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B5 = 3 RO (NO) B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input
Engineered Options HT = High temperature rating for 50C VB = Varnished boards
38 39 40
Brake chopper is standard in 208V, 230V and 480V drives up to FR6; optional in all other drives. Local/remote keypad is included as the standard control panel. Some options are voltage and/or horsepower specic. Consult your Eaton representative for details. See Pages 31.3-12 and 31.3-13 for complete descriptions. Includes local/remote speed reference switch. See Pages 31.3-10 and 31.3-11 for complete descriptions. Consult Eaton for availability.
Table 31.3-15. Ambient Temperature Ratings

Enclosure Size B, C, 9 7, 8
IH 40C 50C
IL 40C 50C
For high temperature rating, select HT option code and contact factory.
If dynamic brake chopper or control/ communication option is desired, change the appropriate code in the base catalog number All of the programming is exactly the same as the standard SVX9000 drive Select enclosed options. Add the codes as sufxes to the base catalog number in alphabetical and numeric order
41 42 43
CA08104001E

Options
September 2011
Sheet 31 042
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Options
CFX9000 Series Option Board Kits
The CFX9000 Series drives can accommodate a wide selection of expander and adapter option boards to customize the drive for your application needs. The drives control unit is designed to accept a total of ve option boards. The CFX9000 Series factory-installed standard board conguration includes an A9 I/O board and an A2 relay output board, which are installed in slots A and B. Table 31.3-16. Option Board Kits
Option Kit Description Allowed Slot Locations Field Installed Catalog Number Factory Installed Option Designator SVX Ready Programs Basic Local/ Remote

DE B C
Figure 31.3-5. Option Boards
Standard
MSS
PID
Multi-P.
PFC
Standard I/O Cards
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2 RO (NC/NO) 6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1AO, 1 +10 Vdc ref, 2 ext +24 Vdc/ext +24 Vdc Extended I/O Cards 6 DI 1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated) 3 RO (NO) 3 Pt100 RTD board 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input Communication Cards Modbus Modbus TCP BACnet EtherNet/IP Johnson Controls N2 PROFIBUS DP LonWorks PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) CANopen (slave) DeviceNet Modbus (D9 type connector) RS-232 with D9 connection

B A
OPTA2 OPTA9
B, C, D, E B, C, D, E B, C, D, E B, C, D, E B, C, D, E B, C, D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E D, E
OPTB1 OPTB2 OPTB4 OPTB5 OPTB8 OPTB9 OPTC2 OPTCI OPTCJ OPTCK OPTC2 OPTC3 OPTC4 OPTC5 OPTC6 OPTC7 OPTC8 OPTD3
B1 B2 B4 B5 B8 B9 C2 CI CJ CK CA C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D3

AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output, DI = Digital Input, DO = Digital Output, RO = Relay Output Option card must be installed in one of the slots listed for that card. Slot indicated in bold is the preferred location. OPTC2 is a multi-protocol option card.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 043

Options
31.3-11
Modbus RTU Network Communications

The Modbus Network Card OPTC2 is used for connecting the 9000X Drive as a slave on a Modbus network. The interface is connected by a 9-pin DSUB connector (female) and the baud rate ranges from 300 to 19,200 baud. Other communication parameters include an address range from 1 to 247; a parity of None, Odd or Even; and the stop bit is 1.
DeviceNet Network Communications

The DeviceNet Network Card OPTC7 is used for connecting the 9000X Drive on a DeviceNet Network. It includes a 5.08 mm pluggable connector. Transfer method is via CAN using a two-wire twisted shielded cable with two-wire bus power cable and drain. The baud rates used for communication include 125K baud, 250K baud and 500K baud.
BACnet Network Communications

The BACnet Network Card OPTCJ is used for connecting the 9000X Drive to BACnet networks. It includes a 5.08 mm pluggable connector. Data transfer is Master-Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP) RS-485. This interface uses a collection of 30 Binary Value Objects (BVOs) and 35 Analog Value Objects (AVOs) to communicate drive parameters. The card supports 9.6, 19.2 and 38.4 Kbaud communication speeds and supports network addresses 1 to 127.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
PROFIBUS Network Communications

The PROFIBUS Network Card OPTC3 is used for connecting the 9000X Drive as a slave on a PROFIBUS-DP network. The interface is connected by a 9-pin DSUB connector (female). The baud rates range from 9.6K baud to 12M baud, and the addresses range from 1 to 127.
Johnson Controls Metasys N2 Network Communications

The OPTC2 eldbus board provides communication between the 9000X Drive and a Johnson Controls Metasys N2 network. With this connection, the drive can be controlled, monitored and programmed from the Metasys system. The N2 eldbus is available as a factory-installed option and as a eld-installable kit.
EtherNet/IP Network Communications

The EtherNet/IP Network Card OPTCK is used for connecting the 9000X Drive to Ethernet/Industrial Protocol networks. It includes an RJ-45 pluggable connector. The interface uses CIP objects to communicate drive parameters (CIP is Common Industrial Protocol, the same protocol used by DeviceNet). The board supports 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps communication speeds. The IP address of the board is congurable by Static, BOOTP and DHCP methods.
LonWorks Network Communications

The LonWorks Network Card OPTC4 is used for connecting the 9000X Drive on a LonWorks network. This interface uses Standard Network Variable Types (SNVT) as data types. The channel connection is achieved using a FTT-10A Free Topology transceiver via a single twisted transfer cable. The communication speed with LonWorks is 78 kBits/s.
Modbus/TCP Network Communications

The Modbus/TCP Network Card OPTCI is used for connecting the 9000X Drive to Ethernet networks using Modbus protocol. It includes an RJ-45 pluggable connector. This interface provides a selection of standard and custom register values to communicate drive parameters. The board supports 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps communication speeds. The IP address of the board is congurable over Ethernet using a supplied software tool.
CANopen (Slave) Communications

The CANopen (Slave) Network Card OPTC6 is used for connecting the 9000X Drive to a host system. According to ISO 11898 standard cables to be chosen for CANbus should have a nominal impedance of 120 ohms, and specic line delay of nominal 5 as/m. 120 ohm line termination resistors required for installation.
CA08104001E

Options
September 2011
Sheet 31 044
22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Option K1 Description Option Type
Door-Mounted Speed PotentiometerProvides the drive with the ability to adjust the frequency reference using a door-mounted Control potentiometer. This option uses the 10 Vdc reference to generate a 010V signal at the analog voltage input signal terminal. When the HOA bypass option is added, the speed is controlled when the HOA switch is in the HAND position. Without the HOA bypass option, a two-position switch (labeled local/remote) is provided on the keypad to select speed reference from the speed potentiometer or a remote speed signal. Door-Mounted Speed Potentiometer with HOA Selector SwitchProvides the drive with the ability to start/stop and adjust the speed Control reference from door-mounted control devices or remotely from customer supplied inputs. In HAND position, the drive will start and the speed is controlled by the door-mounted speed potentiometer. The drive will be disabled in the OFF position. When AUTO is selected, the drive run and speed control commands are via user-supplied dry contact and 420 mA signal. 315 psig FollowerProvides a pneumatic transducer that converts a 315 psig pneumatic signal to either 08 Vdc or a 19 Vdc signal interface with the drive. The circuit board is mounted on the inside of the front enclosure panel and connects to the users pneumatic control system via 6 ft (1.8m) of exible tubing and a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) brass tube union. HAND/OFF/AUTO Switch for Non-Bypass CongurationsProvides a three-position selector switch that allows the user to select either a HAND or AUTO mode of operation. HAND mode is defaulted to keypad operation, and AUTO mode is defaulted to control from an external terminal source. These modes of operation can be congured via drive programming to allow for alternate combinations of start and speed sources. Start and speed sources include keypad, I/O and eldbus. MANUAL/AUTO Speed Reference SwitchProvides door-mounted selector switch for MANUAL/AUTO speed reference. START/STOP PushbuttonsProvide door-mounted START and STOP pushbuttons for either bypass or non-bypass congurations. Bypass Test Switch for RB and RAAllows the user to energize the AF drive for testing while operating the motor on the bypass controller. The Test Switch is mounted on the inside of the enclosure door. Standard Elapsed Time MeterProvides a door-mounted elapsed run time meter. Power On, Run and Fault LightsProvide a white power on light that indicates power to the enclosed cabinets, a green run light and a red fault light that indicates a drive fault has occurred. Bypass Pilot Lights for RB, RA Bypass OptionsA green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. The lights are mounted on the enclosure door, above the switches. Red Run Pilot Light (22 mm)Provides a red run pilot light that indicates the drive is running. Control
K2
K3
K4
Control
K5
Control Control Addl. bypass Control Light Addl. bypass Light
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
K6 KF KO L1 L2 LE P1
Input Circuit BreakerHigh interrupting circuit breaker that provides a means of short-circuit protection for the power cables between Input it and the CPX9000, and protection from high-level ground faults on the power cable. Allows a convenient means of disconnecting the CPX9000 from the line and the operating mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. This is factory mounted in the enclosure. Standard rating is 65 kAIC at 208/480V. 100 kAIC is available as an option. Input Line Fuses Rated to 200 kAICProvide high-level fault protection of the drive input power circuit from the load side of the fuses Input to the input side of the power transistors. This option consists of three 200 kA fuses, which are factory mounted in the enclosure. MOV Surge SuppressorProvides a metal oxide varistor (MOV) connected to the line side terminals and is designed to clip line side transients. SPD Surge Protective Device with 50 kA RatingProvides transient voltage protection, eliminating surges and spikes that can damage the diode bridge of the drive. Capacitor ContactorThis option provides a contactor between the tuned reactor and capacitor to disconnect the capacitor from the circuit when desired, typically at light or no load conditions. This contactor is wired to a programmable relay output. Output ContactorProvides a means for positive disconnection of the drive output from the motor terminals. The contactor coil is controlled by the drives run or permissive logic. NO auxiliary contacts rated at 10A, 600 Vac are provided for customer use. Bypass options RB and RA include an output contactor as standard. This option includes a low VA 115 Vac fused control power transformer and is factory mounted in the enclosure. Input Input Input Output
P3 P7 P8 PC PE
PF
Output FilterUsed to reduce the transient voltage (DV/DT) at the motor terminals. The output lter is recommended for cable lengths Output exceeding 100 ft (30m) or for a drive rated at 525690V. This option is mounted in the enclosure, and may be used in conjunction with a brake chopper circuit. MotoRx (300600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT FilterUsed to reduce transient voltage (DV/DT) and peak voltages at the motor terminals. This Output option is comprised of a 0.5% line reactor, followed by capacitive ltering and an energy recovery/clamping circuit. Unlike the output lter (see option PF), the MotoRx recovers most of the energy from the voltage peaks, resulting in a lower voltage drop to the motor, and therefore conserving power. This option is used when the distance between a single motor and the drive is 300600 ft (91183m). This option cannot be used with the brake chopper circuit. The output lter (option PF) should be investigated as an alternative. Single Overload RelayUses a bimetallic overload relay to provide additional overload current protection to the motor on congurations without bypass options. It is included with the bypass congurations for overload current protection in the bypass mode. The overload relay is mounted within the enclosure, and is manually resettable. Heater pack included. Output
PG
PH
PI
Dual Overload RelaysThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors and overload current protection is Output needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Heater packs not included. Dual Overloads for BypassThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors in the bypass mode and overload current protection is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Addl. bypass
PN
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 045

Options
31.3-13

Option RA Description Option Type
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Manual HOA Bypass ControllerThe manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of Bypass bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of an input HMCP, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in the inverter mode. IEC type input, bypass and input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on Page 31.3-24). Manual IOB Bypass ControllerThe manual INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of an input HMCP, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch. IEC type input, bypass and input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on Page 31.3-24). Bypass
RB
RC
Auto Transfer HOA Bypass Controller The manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of Bypass bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input HMCP, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in either mode. IEC type input, bypass and input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on Page 31.3-24). Door-mounted pilot lights are provided that indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is turned to the OFF position. Auto Transfer IOB Bypass ControllerThe auto INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means Bypass of bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input HMCP, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch. IEC type input, bypass and input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on Page 31.3-24). Door-mounted pilot lights are provided that indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is turned to the OFF position. Reduced Voltage Starter for BypassUsed in conjunction with bypass option RA, RB, RC or RD. This option adds IT. Series reduced Bypass voltage soft starter to bypass assembly for soft starting in bypass mode. Floor Stand 6.00-inchRaises F box off the ground 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Recommended when box is not installed on an appropriate concrete pad. Floor Stand 22.00-inchConverts a Size B or C, normally wall mounted enclosure to a oor standing enclosure with a height of 22.00 inches (558.8 mm). Floor Stand 12.00-inchConverts a Size C or D, normally wall mounted enclosure to a oor standing enclosure with a height of 12.00 inches (304.8 mm). Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure
RD
RG S4 S5 S6 S9
Space HeaterPrevents condensation from forming in the enclosure when the drive is inactive or in storage. Includes a thermostat Enclosure for variable temperature control. Heater requires a customer supplied 115V remote supply source.
Enclosed Drive Options

Table 31.3-18. Conformal (Varnished) Coating
Chassis Frame FR6 FR7 FR8 FR9 FR10 FR11 FR12
Table 31.3-19. Light Options

Description Power on, run, fault LED lights (22 mm) Power on, fault LED lights (22 mm) Green LED run light (22 mm) Green LED stop light (22 mm) Red LED run light (22 mm) Red LED stop light (22 mm) Red LED fault light (22 mm) Power on white LED light (22 mm) Miscellaneous LED light (22 mm) Catalog Number Sufx L1 L3 LA LD LE LF LG LJ LU

Description Door-mounted speed potentiometer Door-mounted speed potentiometer with HOA selector switch 315 psig follower HOA selector switch MANUAL/AUTO reference switch START-STOP pushbuttons Type D2 control relay On-delay relay Off-delay relay Additional terminal blocks per 4 points Catalog Number Sufx K1 K2
Delivery Code FP FP FP FP FP FP FP
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
K3 K4 K5 K6 SD SE SF SD
See catalog number description to order.
CA08104001E

Options
Table 31.3-21. Bypass Control Options
Description Bypass test switch used with RA and RB Inverter/bypass pilot lights Catalog Number Sufx KF L2
September 2011
Sheet 31 046
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 31.3-26. 480 and 575V Power Options, 7-1/2400 hp

Description Input breaker Input line fusing Input line fuses 200 kAIC Output contactor Output lter MotoRx (300600 ft) DV/DT lter Single overload relay Dual overload relays Input MOV 50 kA surge protective device 100 kA surge protective device Catalog Number Sufx P1 P2 P3 PE PF PG PH PI P7 P8 P9
Table 31.3-22. Meter Options

Description Standard elapsed time meter Frequency meter MP-3000 relay with URTD MP-3000 relay with URTD and CTs Catalog Number Sufx KO KS KV KU
Table 31.3-23. Enclosure Options

Enclosure Size Catalog Number Sufx S9 S9 S9 S9 S9 S9 S9 SN S4 S5 S6
Table 31.3-27. 208V Bypass Options, 7-1/2100 hp

Description Manual HOA bypass controller IOB bypass controller Auto transfer HOA bypass controller Auto transfer IOB bypass controller Reduced voltage starter for bypass Dual overloads for bypass Catalog Number Sufx RA RB RC RD RG PN
Space Heater
7 8 9 B C D F
Table 31.3-28. 230V Bypass Options, 7-1/2125 hp

Plastic Nameplate
All
Floor Stand/Enclosure Size

6.00-inch oor stand, size F 22.00-inch oor stand, size B and C 12.00-inch oor stand, size C and D
Requires customer-supplied 115 Vac supply.
Table 31.3-24. 208V Power Options, 7-1/2100 hp

Description Input breaker Input line fusing Input line fuses 200 kAIC Output contactor Single overload relay Dual overload relays MOV 50 kA surge protective device 100 kA surge protective device Catalog Number Sufx P1 P2 P3 PE PH PI P7 P8 P9
Table 31.3-29. 480 and 575V Bypass Options, 7-1/2400 hp

Table 31.3-25. 230V Power Options, 7-1/2125 hp

Description Input breaker Input line fusing Input line fuses 200 kAIC Output contactor Single overload relay Dual overload relays MOV 50 kA surge protective device 100 kA surge protective device Catalog Number Sufx P1 P2 P3 PE PH PI P7 P8 P9
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 047

Dimensions
31.3-15
Dimensions
CFX9000Drawing 1
22 23
4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required 3.00 (76.2) Minimum Air Space Required Both Sides
24 25 26 27 28
H1 H2
29 30 31
0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes (4 Places) D1 D
32 33 34 35 36 37
W1 W
Figure 31.3-6. Enclosure Size BUL Type 12Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 31.3-30. CFX9000 Drive Dimensions
H H1 H2 W W1 D D1 Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) 185 (84) Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 229 (104)
38 39 40 41 42 43
40.00 (1016.0)
38.00 (965.2)
36.35 (923.3)
20.92 (531.4)
19.30 (490.2)
16.76 (425.7)
2.34 (59.4)
CA08104001E

Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 31 048
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
CFX9000Drawing 2
0.44 (11.2) Mounting 4.00 (101.6) Minimum Holes Free Air Space Required (4 Places) 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes (4 Places) W1 4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required
3.00 (76.2) Minimum Air Space Required Both Sides
3.00 (76.2) Minimum Air Space Required Both Sides
H1 H2
H2
H4
H3
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
52.00 (1320.8) 50.00 (1270.0) 48.35 (1228.1) 72.00 (1828.8) 71.19 (1808.2) 30.92 (785.4) 29.30 (744.2) 16.78 (426.2) W D1 D W1 W
D1
Figure 31.3-7. Enclosure Size CUL Type 12Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 31.3-31. CFX9000 Drive Dimensions
H H1 H2 H3 H4 W W1 D D1 Approx. Weight Lbs (kg) Approx. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
2.34 (59.4) 320 (145) 435 (197)
39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 049

Dimensions
31.3-17
CFX9000Drawing 3
W D
22 23 24 25 26 27
H2
H1 H3
28 29 30 31 32
W3
W2 W1 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes (4 Places)
D2
D1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Figure 31.3-8. Enclosure Size BUL Type 3RApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 31.3-32. CFX9000 Drive Dimensions
H H1 H2 H3 W W1 W2 W3 D D1 D2 Approx. Weight Lbs (kg) 235 (107) Approx. Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 290 (132)
40 41 42 43
46.09 (1170.7)
44.45 (1129.0)
42.77 (1086.4)
36.35 (923.3)
26.31 (668.3)
20.92 (531.4)
19.30 (490.2)
2.69 (68.3)
17.74 (450.6)
16.76 (425.7)
3.31 (840.1)
CA08104001E

Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 31 050
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
CFX9000Drawing 4
0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes (4 Places) W D 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes (4 Places) D
W W2
H1 H2 H3 H
H2 H3 H4
H5
W2 W1 W3
D2
D1
W1 D2
D1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Figure 31.3-9. Enclosure Size CUL Type 3RApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 31.3-33. CFX9000 Drive Dimensions
H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 W W1 W2 W3 D D1 D2 Approximate Approximate Weight Shipping Lbs (kg) Weight Lbs (kg) 370 (168) 485 (220)
58.09 56.45 54.77 48.35 78.09 77.64 37.73 (1475.5) (1433.8) (1391.2) (1228.1) (1983.5) (1972.1) (958.3)
30.92 (785.4)
29.30 (744.2)
3.34 (84.8)
17.74 (450.6)
16.77 (426.0)
3.31 (840.1)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 051

Dimensions
31.3-19
CFX9000Drawing 5
W1 W2 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes (two places) D1
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
H H1
30 31 32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39
Figure 31.3-10. Enclosure Size DUL Type 3RApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 31.3-34. CFX9000 Drive Dimensions
H H1 W W1 W2 D D1 Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1000 (454)
40 41 42 43
76.27 (1937.3)
96.00 (2438.4)
30.92 (784.4)
37.73 (958.3)
29.30 (744.2)
16.76 (424.7)
17.74 (450.6)
Note: Shown with optional oor stands.
CA08104001E

Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 31 052
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
CFX9000Drawing 6
W D
H1
29 30 31 32
W1
33 34 35 36 37
Figure 31.3-11. Enclosure Size FApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
D1
38 39 40 41 42 43
Table 31.3-35. CFX9000 Drive Dimensions

H H1 W W1 D D1 Approximate Weight Lbs (kg) 1700 (771) Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1850 (839)
93.58 (2376.9)
69.51 (1765.60)
60.00 (1524.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
37.50 (952.5)
26.00 (660.4)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 053

Dimensions
31.3-21
CFX9000Drawing 7
Exhaust Air For Cable Entry 4.79 (121.7)
22 23 24
20.00 (508.0) 15.00 (381.0)
25 26 27 28 29
26.25 (666.8)
Hinged Side Door Clearance 10.00 at 90 (254.0) Top View
2.00 (50.8)
Keypad Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
30 31 32 33 34 35
93.92 (2385.6) 90.00 (2286.0)
84.37 (2143.0)
Key-Locking Handle
Intake Ventilating Slots (Filtered on NEMA 12) Quarter Turn Latch (2 Places)
36 37 38
15.50 (393.7) 21.50 (546.1) Side View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Holes (4 Places)
30.00 (762.0) Front View 3.50 (88.9)
Opening for Bottom Cable Entry
39 40
18.75 (476.3) 5.75 (146.1) Construction: NEMA Type 1 Oversize Finish: EnclosureANSI 61 Gray (Light) 1.75 (44.5) Typ. 24.45 (621.0) 28.05 (712.5) Bottom View
8.50 (215.9) 8.00 (203.2)
41
Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1000 (454)
42 43
Figure 31.3-12. Enclosure Size 7Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08104001E

Dimensions
September 2011
Sheet 31 054
22 23 24 25 26
CFX9000Drawing 8
31.00 (787.4)
1.25 (31.8) 8.25 (209.6)
Opening for Top Cable Entry (2 Places)
Top View
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Construction: NEMA Type 1 Oversize Finish: EnclosureANSI 61 Gray (Light) 22.47 (570.74) 5.48 (139.19) 24.00 (609.6) 25.14 (639) Side View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Holes (4 Places) 93.50 (2374.9) 90.00 (2286.0) 84.37 (2143.0)
4.00 (101.6) Minimum Free Air Space Required Keypad Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
Key-Locking Handle
21.45 (544.8) 21.31 (541.3) 48.00 (1219.2) Front View 9.50 (241.3) Opening for Bottom Cable Entry 12.50 (317.5) 7.73 (196.34) 3.01 (76.45) 37.47 (951.74) 45.22 (1148.59) Bottom View Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1400 (636)
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 055

Dimensions
31.3-23
CFX9000Drawing 9
43.5 (1104.9)
22
1.5 (38.1)
23
9.75 (247.7)
7.46 x 15.00 (189.5 x 381.0) Access in Top 2 Places
24 25
27.36 (694.9)
26
27.06 (687.3)
29.05 (737.9)
27 28 29 30
Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified
Top View
Keypad
31 32 33
Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
Key-Locking Handle
93.50 (2374.9)
90.00 (2286.0)
34 35
36 37
25.00 (635.0) 26.14 (664.0)

Side View
0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Hole 5 Places
60.00 (1524) Front View

32.72 (831.1)
8.50 x 12.00 (215.9 x 304.8) Bottom Access
38 39
25.00 (635.0)
18.84 (478.5) 8.20 (208.3)
2.00 (50.8)
22.90 (581.7) 46.30 (1176.0) 54.90 (1394.5) Bottom View
40
11.93 (303.0)
Finish: Enclosure ANSI 61 Gray (Light) Material: Enclosure and Backplate 12 ga. = .1046 Cold Rolled Steel
41
Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 1800 (817)
42 43
CA08104001E

Diagrams
September 2011
Sheet 31 056
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Wiring Diagram
Basic Application Default I/O Conguration
Reference potentiometer 110 kohms Terminal Signal Description
OPTA9
1 2 3 +10Vref AI1+ AI1 AI2+ AI2 +24V GND DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 CMA +24V GND DIN4 DIN5 Control voltage output I/O ground Start forward Start reverse External fault input (programmable) Common for DIN 1DIN 3 Control voltage output I/O ground Multi-step speed select 1 Multi-step speed select 2 Voltage for switches, etc. max 0.1A Ground for reference and controls Contact closed = start forward Contact closed = start reverse Contact open = no fault Contact closed = fault Connect to GND or +24V Voltage for switches (see terminal 6) Ground for reference and controls DIN4 Open Closed Open Closed DIN5 Open Open Closed Closed Frequency Ref. Reference output Analog input, voltage range 010 Vdc I/O Ground Analog input, current range 020 mA Voltage for potentiometer, etc. Voltage input frequency reference Ground for reference and controls Current input frequency reference
Remote reference 0(4)20 mA
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
DIN6 CMB AO1+ AO1 DO1
Fault reset Common for DIN4DIN6 Output frequency Analog output Digital output READY Relay output 1 RUN
33 34
READY mA
Ref.Vin Multi-step ref.1 Multi-step ref.2 RefMax Contact open = no action Contact closed = fault reset Connect to GND or +24V Programmable Range 020 mA, RL max. 500 ohms Programmable Open collector, I 50 mA, V 48 Vdc
17 18 19 20
35 36
RUN
OPTA2
21 22 23 24 25 26 RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 Relay output 2 FAULT
37 38 39
Figure 31.3-15. Control Input/Output
40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 057
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage SVX9000

Enclosed Drives
31.4-1
SVX9000 Enclosed Drives

Door-Mounted Keypad (Included as Standard with Bypass Option) SVX9000 Variable Frequency Drive Input Disconnect (HMCP) Option P1 Input Line Fuses Option P3
22 23 24 25
Input Contactor (Included as Standard with Bypass Option)
26 27 28 29
Output Contactor Option PE (Included as Standard with Bypass Option)
Bypass Contactor Option RB Option RA Overload Relay Option PH Option PI Control Relay Customer Control and Signal Connection Terminal Block Bypass Pilot Lights and Selector Switches Option RB Option RA Option L2 Option KF 115V Control Transformer Option KB
30 31 32 33 34
Enclosed 9000X Series Drive
General Description
Standard enclosedcovers a wide range of the most commonly ordered options. Pre-engineering eliminates the lead time normally associated with customer specic options Modied standard enclosed applies to specic customer requirements that vary from the Standard Enclosed offering, such as the need for an additional indicating light or minor modications to drawings. Consult your Eaton representative for assistance in pricing and lead time Custom engineeredfor those applications with more unique or complex requirements, these are individually engineered to the customers needs. Consult your Eaton representative for assistance in pricing and lead time
Features

NEMA Type 1 or Type 12 enclosures Input voltage: 208V, 230V, 480V and 575V Complete range of control, network and power options Horsepower range: 208V3/4 to 100 hp IH; 1 to 100 hp IL 230V3/4 to 100 hp IH; 1 to 100 hp IL 480V1 to 700 hp IH; 1-1/2 to 800 hp IL HMCP padlockable
Input p Power
35
HMCP
36 37
Inverter Input p I Contactor SVX9000 Drive Mechanical Interlock

L
38 39
Bypass yp Contactor
Output p Contactor M
40 41

UL listed cUL listed
Motor
42 43
Figure 31.4-1. Power Diagram for Bypass Options RB and RA
CA08104001E
31.4-2 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage SVX9000

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 058
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

Table 31.4-1. SVX9000 Specications
Description Specication +10%/15% 50/60 Hz (variation up to 4566 Hz) Once per minute or less (typical operation) 100 kAIC Description Specication IEC 61800-2 UL 508C Immunity: fullls all EMC immunity requirements; emissions: EN 61800-3, LEVEL H 0 to 10V, R = 200k ohms (10 to 10V joystick control) resolution 0.1%; accuracy 1% 0(4) to 20 mA; Ri - 250 ohms differential Positive or negative logic; 18 to 30 Vdc +24V 15%, maximum 250 mA +10V +3%, maximum load 10 mA 0(4) to 20 mA; RL max. 500 ohms; resolution 10 bit; accuracy 2% Open collector output, 50 mA/48V Two programmable Form C relay outputs Switching capacity: 24 Vdc/8A, 250 Vac/8A, 125 Vdc/0.4A Trip limit 4.0 x IH instantaneously Yes Yes In case of earth fault in motor or motor cable, only the frequency converter is protected Trips if any of the input phases are missing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (+24V and +10V reference voltages)
Input Ratings
Input voltage (Vin) Input frequency (fin) Connection to power High withstand rating
Standards
Product Safety EMC (at default settings)
Output Ratings
Output voltage Continuous output current Overload current (IH/IL) Output frequency Frequency resolution Initial output current (IH) 0 to Vin IH rated 100% at 122F (50C), FR9 and below IL rated 100% at 104F (40C), FR9 and below IH/IL 100% at 104F (40C), FR10 and above 150% IH, 110% IL for 1 minute 0 to 320 Hz 0.01 Hz 250% for 2 seconds Frequency control (V/f) Open loop: sensorless vector control, Closed loop: SPX9000 drives only Adjustable with parameter 2.6.9 1 to 16 kHz; default 10 kHz 1 to 10 kHz; default 3.6 kHz Analog input: resolution 0.1% (10-bit), accuracy 1% V/Hz Panel reference: resolution 0.01 Hz 30 to 320 Hz 0 to 3000 seconds 0 to 3000 seconds DC brake: 30% x Tn (without brake option) 14F (10C), no frost to 122F (+50C) IH (FR4FR9) 14F (10C), no frost to 104F (+40C) IH (FR10 and up) 14F (10C), no frost to 104F (+40C) IL (all frames) 40F (40C) to 158F (70C) 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing, non-corrosive, no dripping water Chemical vapors: IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, class 3C2; Mechanical particles: IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3S2 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 3280 ft (1000m); 1% derating for each 328 ft (100m) above 3280 ft (1000m); max. 9842 ft (3000m) EN 50178, EN 60068-2-6; 5 to 50 Hz, displacement amplitude 1 mm (peak) at 3 to 15.8 Hz, max. acceleration amplitude 1G at 15.8 to 150 Hz EN 50178, EN 60068-2-27 UPS drop test (for applicable UPS weights) storage and shipping: max. 15G, 11 ms (in package) NEMA 1/IP21 or NEMA 12/IP54, open chassis/IP20
Control Connections
Analog input voltage Analog input current Digital inputs (6) Auxiliary voltage Output reference voltage Analog output Digital outputs Relay outputs
Control method
Switching frequency Frame 46 Frame 712 Frequency reference
Protections
Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Earth fault protection Input phase supervision Overtemperature protection Motor overload protection Motor stall protection Motor underload protection Short circuit protection
Field weakening point Acceleration time Deceleration time Braking torque
Motor phase supervision Trips if any of the output phases are missing
Ambient Conditions
Ambient operating temperature
Storage temperature
36 37
Relative humidity Air quality

Description 6digital input programmable 2analog input congurable w/jumpers 2digital output programmable 1digital output programmable 1analog output programmable congurable w/jumper Specication 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V, Ri > 5k ohms Voltage: 010V, Ri > 200k ohms Current: 0 (4)20 mA, Ri = 250k ohms Form C Relays 250 Vac 2A or 30 Vdc 2A resistive Open collector 48 Vdc 50 mA 020 mA, RL < 500 ohms, resolution 10 bits/0.1%
Altitude
38
Vibration
39 40 41 42 43
Shock
Enclosure class
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 059

Enclosed Drives
31.4-3

Feature Description 9000X Enclosed Products NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12 Standard Input voltage base 0500 250% for 2 seconds 150%/110% Optional Standard Optional Optional UL, cUL Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Feature Description 9000X Enclosed Products NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12
22 23
Primary Design Features

4566 Hz input frequency Output: AC volts maximum Output frequency range: Hz Initial output current (IH) Overload: 1 minute (IH/IL) Enclosure space heater Oversize enclosure Output contactor Bypass motor starter Listings
Input/Output Interface Features (Continued)

Discrete Outputs: Fault alarm Drive running Drive at set speed Optional parameters Dry contacts Open collector outputs Additional discrete outputs Communications: RS-232 RS-422/485 DeviceNet Modbus RTU CANopen (Slave) PROFIBUS-DP LonWorks Johnson Controls Metasys N2 Standard Standard Programmable 14 1 (2 relays Form C) 1 Optional Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Programmable Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 7 Selectable Standard Standard Optional 116 kHz 0 to 40C 40 to 60C 95% 3300 ft (1000m) +10/15% 4566 Hz >96% >0.94
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Protection Features
Incoming line fuses AC input circuit disconnect Line reactors Phase rotation insensitive EMI lter Input phase loss protection Input overvoltage protection Line surge protection Output short circuit protection Output ground fault protection Output phase protection Overtemperature protection DC overvoltage protection Drive overload protection Motor overload protection Programmer software Local/remote keypad Keypad lockout Fault alarm output Built-in diagnostics
Performance Features
Sensorless vector control Volts/hertz control IR and slip compensation Electronic reversing Dynamic braking DC braking PID set point controller Critical speed lockout Current (torque) limit Adjustable acceleration/deceleration Linear or S curve accel/decel Jog at preset speed Thread/preset speeds Automatic restart Coasting motor start Coast or ramp stop selection Elapsed time meter Carrier frequency adjustment Operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Humidity (maximum), noncondensing Altitude (maximum without derate) Line voltage variation Line frequency variation Efciency Power factor (displacement)
Input/Output Interface Features

Setup Adjustment Provisions: Remote keypad/display Personal computer Operator Control Provisions: Drive mounted keypad/display Remote keypad/display Conventional control elements Serial communications 115 Vac control circuit Speed Setting Inputs: Keypad 010 Vdc potentiometer/voltage signal 420 mA isolated 420 mA differential 315 psig Analog Outputs: Speed/frequency Torque/load/current Motor voltage Kilowatts 010 Vdc signals 420 mA DC signals Isolated signals Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard Standard Congurable Congurable Optional Standard Programmable Programmable Programmable Congurable w/jumpers Standard Optional
Standard Conditions for Application and Service
Some horsepower units include dynamic braking chopper as standardrefer to individual drive sections.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 060
22 23 24

Table 31.4-4. SVX9000 Enclosed NEMA Type 1/12 Drive Catalog Numbering System
Build Alphabetically and Numerically
SVX F07 1 4 A A
Product Family Enclosed Options K1 K2 100 = 100 hp 125 = 125 hp 150 = 150 hp 200 = 200 hp 250 = 250 hp 300 = 300 hp 350 = 350 hp 400 = 400 hp 500 = 500 hp 550 = 550 hp 600 = 600 hp 650 = 650 hp 700 = 700 hp K3 K4 K5 K6 KB KF KO L1 L2 LE P1 P2 P3 P7 PE PF PG PH PI PN RA RB RC RD S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 Door-mounted speed potentiometer Door-mounted speed potentiometer with HOA selector switch 315 psig Follower HAND/OFF/AUTO switch (22 mm) MANUAL/AUTO ref switch (22 mm) START/STOP pushbuttons (22 mm) 115V control transformer550 VA Bypass test switch for RA and RB Standard elapsed time meter Power on and fault pilot lights Bypass pilot lights for RA, RB bypass options Red RUN light Input disconnect (HMCP) 100 kAIC Disconnect switch Input line fuses (200 kAIC) Input power surge protection Output contactor Output lter MotoRx (up to 600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT lter Single overload relay Dual overload relays Dual overloads for bypass Manual HOA bypass controller Manual IOB bypass controller Auto transfer HOA bypass controller Auto transfer IOB bypass controller Floor stand 22 inches Floor stand 12 inches 10 inch expansion 20 inch expansion Space heater Communication Options C2 C3 C4 C5 = Modbus = PROFIBUS DP = LonWorks = PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) C6 = CANopen (slave) C7 = DeviceNet C8 = Modbus (D9 Type connector) CA = Johnson Controls N2 CI = Modbus TCP CJ = BACnet D3 = RS-232 with D9 connection Type Control Control Control Control Control Control Control Addl. bypass Control Light Addl. bypass Light Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Addl. bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure SVX = Enclosed drives Horsepower Rating
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
F07 = 3/4 hp 001 = 1 hp F15 = 1-1/2 hp 002 = 2 hp 003 = 3 hp 005 = 5 hp 007 = 7-1/2 hp 010 = 10 hp 015 = 15 hp 020 = 20 hp 025 = 25 hp 030 = 30 hp 040 = 40 hp 050 = 50 hp 060 = 60 hp 075 = 75 hp
Enclosure Rating 1 = NEMA Type 1 2 = NEMA Type 12 6 = NEMA 12 filtered Voltage Rating 1 = 208V 2 = 230V 4 = 480V ApplicationTorque/Braking A = IL/no brake chopper B = IL/internal brake chopper D = IH/no brake chopper E = IH/internal brake chopper Enclosed Style A = Enclosed drive
Control Options B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B2 = 1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 Therm B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B5 = 3 RO (NO) B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input Engineered Options HT = High Temperature rating for 50C (FR10 and above) VB = Varnished Boards Local/remote keypad is included as the standard control panel. Brake chopper is a factory installed option only, see drive option tables on Pages 31.4-831.4-10. Note: External dynamic braking resistors not included. Consult factory.

43
Includes local/remote speed reference switch. Some options are voltage and/or horsepower specic. Consult your Eaton representative for details. See Pages 31.4-5 and 31.4-6 for descriptions.
Applicable only with FR10 and FR11 Freestanding designs. Consult Eaton for pricing and availability.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 061

Enclosed Drives
31.4-5

Option K1 Description Option Type
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Door-Mounted Speed PotentiometerProvides the SVX9000 with the ability to adjust the frequency reference using a doorControl mounted potentiometer. This option uses the 10 Vdc reference to generate a 010V signal at the analog voltage input signal terminal. When the HOA bypass option is added, the speed is controlled when the HOA switch is in the hand position. Without the HOA bypass option, a 2-position switch (labeled local/remote) is provided on the keypad to select speed reference from the Speed Potentiometer or a remote speed signal. Door-Mounted Speed Potentiometer with HOA Selector SwitchProvides the SVX9000 with the ability to start/stop and adjust Control the speed reference from door-mounted control devices or remotely from customer supplied inputs. In HAND position, the drive will start and the speed is controlled by the door-mounted speed potentiometer. The drive will be disabled in the OFF position. When AUTO is selected, the run enable and speed reference are controlled from remote inputs. Speed reference can be either 010 Vdc or 420 mA. The drive default is 420 mA, parameter is eld programmable. Run enable is controlled by a dry contact closure. This option requires a customer supplied 115V power source. 315 psig FollowerProvides a pneumatic transducer that converts a 315 psig pneumatic signal to either 08 Vdc or a Control 19 Vdc signal interface with the SVX9000. The circuit board is mounted on the inside of the front enclosure panel and connects to the users pneumatic control system via 6 ft (1.8m) of exible tubing and a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) brass tube union. HAND/OFF/AUTO Switch for Non-bypass CongurationsProvides a three-position selector switch that allows the user to select either a Hand or Auto mode of operation. Hand mode is defaulted to keypad operation, and Auto mode is defaulted to control from an external terminal source. These modes of operation can be congured via programming to allow for alternate combinations of start and speed sources. Start and speed sources include keypad, I/O and FieldBus. MANUAL/AUTO Speed Reference SwitchProvides a door-mounted selector switch for Manual/Auto speed reference. START/STOP PushbuttonsProvides door-mounted START and STOP pushbuttons for either bypass or non-bypass congurations. 115 V Control Transformer550 VAProvides a fused control power transformer with additional 550 VA at 115V for customer use. Control
K2
K3
K4
K5 K6 KB KF KO L1 L2
Control Control Control
Bypass Test Switch for RB and RAAllows the user to energize the AF drive for testing while operating the motor on the bypass Addl. bypass controller. The Test Switch is mounted on the inside of the enclosure door. Standard Elapsed Time MeterProvides a door-mounted elapsed run time meter. Power On and Fault Pilot LightsProvides a white power on light that indicates power to the enclosed cabinet and a red fault light indicates a drive fault has occurred. Bypass Pilot Lights for RB, RA Bypass OptionsA green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. The lights are mounted on the enclosure door, above the switches. RUN Pilot LightProvides a green run light that indicates the drive has been commanded to start. Control Light Addl. bypass
LE P1
Light
Input Disconnect Assembly Rated to 100 kAICHigh Interrupting Motor Circuit Protector (HMCP) that provides a means of Input short-circuit protection for the power cables between it and the SVX9000, and protection from high-level ground faults on the power cable. Allows a convenient means of disconnecting the SVX9000 from the line and the operating mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. This is factory mounted in the enclosure. Disconnect SwitchDisconnect switch option is applicable only with NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12 Freestanding drives. Allows a convenient means of disconnecting the SVX9000 from the line, and the operating mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. This is factory-mounted in the enclosure. Input
P2
P3
Input Line Fuses Rated to 200 kAICProvides high-level fault protection of the SVX9000 input power circuit from the load side of Input the fuses to the input side of the power transistors. This option consists of three 200 kA fuses, which are factory mounted in the enclosure. MOV Surge SuppressorProvides a metal oxide varistor (MOV) connected to the line side terminals and is designed to clip line Input side transients. Output ContactorProvides a means for positive disconnection of the drive output from the motor terminals. The contactor coil Output is controlled by the drives run or permissive logic. NC and NO auxiliary contacts rated at 10A, 600 Vac are provided for customer use. Bypass Options RB and RA include an Output Contactor as standard. This option includes a low VA 115 Vac fused Control Power Transformer and is factory mounted in the enclosure. Output FilterUsed to reduce the transient voltage (DV/DT) at the motor terminals. The Output Filter is recommended for cable Output lengths exceeding 100 ft (30m) with a drive of 3 hp and above, for cable lengths of 33 ft (10m) with a drive of 2 hp and below, or for a drive rated at 525690V. This option is mounted in the enclosure, and may be used in conjunction with a brake chopper circuit. MotoRx (300600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT FilterUsed to reduce transient voltage (DV/DT) and peak voltages at the motor Output terminals. This option is comprised of a 0.5% line reactor, followed by capacitive ltering and an energy recovery/clamping circuit. Unlike the Output Filter (See option PF), the MotoRx recovers most of the energy from the voltage peaks, resulting in a lower voltage drop to the motor, and therefore conserving power. This option is used when the distance between a single motor and the drive is 300600 ft (91183m). This option can not be used with the Brake Chopper Circuit. The Output Filter (option PF) should be investigated as an alternative. Single Overload RelayUses a bimetallic overload relay to provide additional overload current protection to the motor on congurations without bypass options. It is included with the Bypass Congurations for overload current protection in the bypass mode. The Overload Relay is mounted within the enclosure, and is manually resettable. Heater pack included. Output
P7 PE
PF
PG
PH
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
Option PI Description
September 2011
Sheet 31 062
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Option Type
Dual Overload RelaysThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors and overload current protec- Output tion is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Heater packs not included. Dual Overloads for BypassThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors in the bypass mode and overload current protection is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Addl. bypass
PN
RA
Manual HOA Bypass ControllerThe Manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of Bypass bypassing the SVX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in the inverter mode. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Manual IOB Bypass ControllerThe Manual INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of bypassing the SVX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Bypass
RB
RC
29 30 31 32 33 34
S5 RD
Auto Transfer HOA Bypass ControllerThe Manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means Bypass of bypassing the SVX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in either mode. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Door-mounted pilot lights are provided that indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is turned to the OFF position. Auto Transfer IOB Bypass ControllerThe Auto INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a Bypass means of bypassing the SVX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door mounted IOB selector switch. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Door-mounted pilot lights are provided which indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is turned to the OFF position. Floor Stand 22 InchesConverts a Size 1 or 2, normally wall mounted enclosure to a oor standing enclosure with a height of 22 inches (558.8 mm). Enclosure
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
S6 S7
Floor Stand 12 InchesConverts a Size 2, normally wall mounted enclosure to a oor standing enclosure with a height of 12 inches Enclosure (304.8 mm). 10-Inch ExpansionIn a Size 5 enclosure, the extension allows for bottom cable entry and additional space for customer mounted components. Note: Enclosure expansion rated NEMA Type 1 only. 20-Inch ExpansionIn a Size 5 enclosure, the extension allows for bottom cable entry and additional space for customer mounted components. When the Output Filter (option PF) is selected for a drive using a Size 5 enclosure, this expansion box is required and included in the option pricing. Note: Enclosure expansion rated NEMA Type 1 only. Space HeaterPrevents condensation from forming in the enclosure when the drive is inactive or in storage. Includes a thermostat for variable temperature control. A 200W heater is installed in enclosures 0 and 1, and a 400W heater is installed in enclosures 25. Requires a customer supplied 115V remote supply source. Enclosure
S8
Enclosure
S9
Enclosure
Note: For availability, see base drive voltage required.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 063

Enclosed Drives
31.4-7
Table 31.4-6. Input Molded-Case Breaker Sizes230V Ratings

hp 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 Frame Size FR4 FR4 FR4 FR4 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FLA 4.8 6.6 7.8 11 17.5 25 31 48 61 72 87 Breaker Current 15 15 15 15 20 30 40 60 80 100 100
Table 31.4-8. Input Fuse Sizes230V Ratings

VT hp 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 Frame Size FR4 FR4 FR4 FR4 FR5 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 NEC I (A) 4.2 6 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 I (A) 4.8 6.6 7.8 11 17.5 25 31 48 61 72 87 114 140 170 205 261 Fuse Quantity 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Fuse (A) 10 10 10 15 20 30 40 60 80 100 110 125 175 200 250 300
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Note: Based on a maximum of 104F (40C). A UL listed breaker must be used.
Table 31.4-7. Input Molded-Case Breaker Sizes480V Ratings

hp 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 700 Frame Size FR4 FR4 FR4 FR4 FR5 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10 FR11 FR11 FR11 FR12 FR12 FR12 FLA 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12 16 23 31 38 46 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 261 300 385 460 520 590 650 750 820 920 Breaker Current 15 15 15 15 20 30 30 40 50 60 80 100 100 1 25 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1000 1200
Note: UL recognized type JJS preferred but RK acceptable.
Table 31.4-9. Input Fuse Sizes480V Ratings

VT hp 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 700 800 Frame Size FR4 FR4 FR4 FR4 FR4 FR5 FR5 FR5 FR6 FR6 FR6 FR7 FR7 FR7 FR8 FR8 FR8 FR9 FR9 FR10 FR10 FR10 FR11 FR11 FR11 FR12 FR12 FR12 NEC I (A) 3 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 590 NS NS NS NS NS I (A) 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12 16 23 31 38 46 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 261 300 385 460 520 590 650 730 820 920 1030 Fuse Quantity 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 Fuse (A) 10 10 10 10 15 20 30 35 50 60 80 100 110 125 175 200 250 350 400 450 500 600 350 400 450 500 500 600
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Note: Based on a maximum of 104F (40C). A UL listed breaker must be used.
Note: UL recognized type JJS preferred but RK acceptable.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 064
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Product Selection
When Ordering
Select a base catalog number that meets the application requirementsnominal horsepower, voltage and enclosure rating (the enclosed drives continuous output amp rating should be equal to or greater than the motors full load amp rating). The base enclosed package includes a standard drive, door mounted Local/Remote Keypad and enclosure If dynamic brake chopper or Control/Communication option is desired, change the appropriate code in the base catalog number Select enclosed options. Add the codes as sufxes to the base catalog number in alphabetical and numeric order Read all footnotes
208V Drives
Table 31.4-10. 208 Vac Input Base Drive
Enclosure Size hp Current (A) NEMA Type 1 Frame Size 4 4 FR4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 NEMA Type 12 Frame Size 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 Drawing Number
208V High Overload Drive and EnclosureIH = Constant Torque

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 5

3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
3.7 4.8 6.6 7.8 11 17.5 25 31 48 61 75 88 114 143 170 211 273 4.8 6.6 7.8 11 17.5 25 31 48 61 75 88 114 170
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 14 14 14 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 14 14
208V Low Overload Drive and EnclosureIL = Variable Torque
Enclosure dimensions listed on Pages 31.4-1131.4-19. Includes drive, Local/Remote keypad and enclosure.
Note: Drive heat dissipation calculations listed on Page 31.4-10.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 065

Enclosed Drives
31.4-9
230V Drives
Enclosure Size hp Current (A) NEMA Type 1 Frame Size 4 4 4 FR 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 NEMA Type 12 Frame Size 4 4 4 FR 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 Drawing Number
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
230V High Overload Drive and EnclosureIH = Constant Torque

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 5

3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
3.7 4.8 6.6 7.8 11 17.5 25 31 48 61 75 88 114 140 170 205 261 4.8 6.6 7.8 11 17.5 25 31 48 61 75 88 114 140 170 205 261
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 14 14 14 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 14 14
230V Low Overload Drive and EnclosureIL = Variable Torque
Enclosure dimensions listed on Pages 31.4-1131.4-19. Includes drive, Local/Remote keypad and enclosure.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 066
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
480V Drives
Enclosure Size hp Current (A) NEMA Type 1 Frame Size 4 4 4 FR 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 NEMA Type 12 Frame Size 4 4 4 FR 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 Drawing Number
Drive Heat Dissipation Calculations

The Eaton 9000X drive is a highly efcient electric power converter releasing minimal amounts of waste heat energy into the ambient air. The amount of heat loss from the drive in operation is directly proportional to the load of the connected motor, the drive switching frequency and operating frequency. Based on the drive operating load, the heat dissipation can be calculated at a given operating point. For most cases, the following general formula can be used to estimate the heat dissipation of the power module: Pmotor [kW] x 0.025 = Ploss [kW] Where Pmotor is the operating power of the motor and Ploss is the heat dissipated from the 9000X drive. For example, a 20 hp [15 kW] motor is applied with a 9000X inverter on a pump application. The application has been designed so that maximum motor load will be 95% or 14.3 kW. Using the formula above, the calculated heat dissipation of the drive will be approximately 356 watts/ hour or 1215 BTU/hour at the designed maximum load. 15 kW x 0.95 = 14.3 kW 14.3 kW x 0.025 = 0.356 kW/hour or 356 watts/hour 356 watts/hour x 3.412 = 1215 BTU/hour
Note: This example assumes the default switching frequency has been used.
High Overload Drive and EnclosureIH = Constant Torque

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6, 8 6, 8 6, 8 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9

1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 700 1-1/2 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 600 650 700 800
2.2 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12 16 23 31 38 46 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 245 300 385 460 520 590 650 730 820 920 3.3 4.3 5.6 7.6 12 16 23 31 38 46 61 72 87 105 140 170 205 261 300 385 460 520 590 650 730 820 920 1030
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 15 , 16 15 , 16 15 , 16 16 , 17 16 , 17 16 , 17

Low Overload Drive and EnclosureIL = Variable Torque

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6, 8 6, 8 6, 8 8, 9 8, 9 8, 9

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 , 16 15 , 16 15 , 16 16 , 17 16 , 17 16 , 17

Additional conversion formulas: hp x 0.7457 = kW hp x 745.7 = watts kW x 1000 = watts Watts/hour x 3.412 = BTU/hour
Enclosure dimensions listed on Pages 31.4-1131.4-19. Includes drive, Local/Remote keypad and enclosure. Consult Eaton. The smaller enclosure Size 6 accommodates only power options, input disconnect (P1) and input line fuses (P3). Bypass and other options require Size 8. Adding any standard control option will not require the larger enclosure. The smaller enclosure Size 8 accommodates only power options, input disconnect (P1) and input line fuses (P3). Bypass and other options require Size 9. Adding any standard control option will not require the larger enclosure. For other options, consult factory.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 067

Enclosed Drives
31.4-11
Dimensions
SVX Drawing 9Enclosure Size 0
Table 31.4-13. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping WeightEnclosed Products
Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A 19.90 (504) High B 29.00 (737) Deep C 16.40 (416) Mounting D 18.30 (465) D1 E E1 F 27.40 (695) G G1 25.40 (644) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K 3.00 (76)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
V U L B H F Top View R S T For Cable Entry
Table 31.4-13. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping WeightEnclosed Products (Continued)

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L M N P R Door Clearance S T U V W Maximum Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) 200 (91)
5.00 (127)
6.00 (152)
9.60 (245)
26.40 (669)
1.50 (38)
6.30 (160)
4.30 (108)
5.30 (134)
1.50 (38.1) Lifting Holes 4 Places
K J
For Cable Entry
30 31 32 33 34
D A 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes 4 Places NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 12 NEMA Type 12 Includes Cover Plates Over Louvers Bottom View
P W V
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
For Reference Only, Dimensions Subject to Change.
Figure 31.4-2. Approximate Dimensions
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 068
22 23 24 25 26


Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 1 11.00 (279) M 6.00 (152) N 9.00 (229) P 10.00 (254) R 6.50 (165) Door Clearance S 26.40 (669) T U V W Floor Stand X 1.50 (38) 4.30 (108) 56.00 (1422) Y 4.30 (108) Z 11.10 (281) AA 1.80 (46) BB 0.80 (19) CC 55.20 (1402)
27 28 29
1 Enclosure Size

Dimensions in Inches (mm) Floor Stand DD 26.00 (660) EE 3.50 (90) FF 5.50 (141) GG 3.00 (76) HH 6.00 (152) JJ 2.00 (51) KK 5.40 (136) LL 1.10 (28) MM 8.80 (224) NN 5.40 (137) PP RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 230 (104)
30 31 32 33
B
K J
D AA J K
H F
34 35
C X D A 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes 4 Places NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 12 NEMA Type 12 Includes Cover Plates Over Louvers Y Z C NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 12 with Floor Stand For Cable Entry For Cable Entry P U T Top View Bottom View For Reference Only, Dimensions Subject to Change. R GG HH JJ LL FF 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes 6 Places For Cable Entry EE EE KK U DD A BB CC
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
L For Cable Entry S M
NN For Cable Entry MM
Bottom View NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 12 with Floor Stand

September 2011
Sheet 31 069

Enclosed Drives
31.4-13

22 23 24 25
X Y 4.80 (121) Z 13.60 (344) AA 1.80 (46) BB 0.80 (19) CC 68.20 (1732)

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 2 5.90 (149) M N P R 9.50 (241) Door Clearance S 26.40 (669) T U V W Floor Stand
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
12.40 (315)
1.50 (38)
4.80 (121)
5.90 (151)
69.00 (1753)

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Floor Stand DD 2 26.00 (660) EE 4.80 (121) FF 6.80 (172) GG 3.00 (76) HH 6.00 (152) JJ 2.00 (51) KK 5.00 (127) LL 1.10 (28) MM 11.30 (288) NN 79.00 (2007) PP 78.20 (1986) RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 380 (173)


Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 070
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm) Size Wide High Deep A B C 3 26.40 (671) 77.00 (1956) 19.40 (493) Mounting D 19.50 (495) D1 3.30 (83) E 23.00 (584) E1 1.50 (38) F 11.70 (298) G 5.50 (140.) G1 0.90 (24) 76.40 (1939) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K 3.00 (76)

Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm) Size Cable Entry L 3 5.30 (133) M 23.40 (594) N 10.00 (254) P 1.30 (32) R 12.90 (328) Door Clearance T S 26.40 (669) 1.50 (38) U V W RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 690 (313)
8.00 (203)
4.80 (121)
6.80 (173)
79.50 (2018)
13.40 (340)
0.80 (19)
1.30 (32)
26.00 (660)
0.50 (12.7) Lifting Eyes 2 Places
K M V For Cable Entry U L S T Top View P
H B RR 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes 6 Places R
33 34
F
For Cable Entry
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
SS C TT UU A
G G1 D1 E1 D E VV Bottom View W
NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 12 NEMA Type 12 Includes Cover Plates Over Louvers For Reference Only, Dimensions Subject to Change.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 071

Enclosed Drives
31.4-15

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A 26.40 (671) High B 90.00 (2286) Deep C 19.40 (493) Mounting D 19.50 (495) D1 3.30 (83) E 23.00 (584) E1 1.50 (38) F 11.70 (298) G 5.50 (140) G1 0.90 (24) 89.40 (2270) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K 3.00 (76)
22 23 24 25
W RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 825 (375)

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 4 5.30 (133) M 23.40 (594) N 13.80 (351) P 1.00 (25) R 11.20 (286) Door Clearance S 26.40 (669) T U V
26 27 28
1.50 (38)
8.00 (204)
4.80 (121)
92.50 (2349)
0.80 (19)
1.30 (32)
0.50 (12.7) Lifting Eyes 2 Places
K M V For Cable Entry U L S T P
29 30 31 32 33
For Cable Entry
H B RR
Top View 0.44 (11.2) Mounting Holes 6 Places R
34
N
F G SS TT C A G1 D1 E1 D E Bottom View
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 12 NEMA Type 12 Includes Cover Plates Over Louvers For Reference Only, Dimensions Subject to Change.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 072
22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A 40.00 (1016) High B 90.00 (2286) Deep C 21.30 (541) Mounting D 36.00 (914) D1 2.00 (51) E E1 F 8.00 (203) G 10.80 (273) G1 84.40 (2143) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 5 15.00 (381) M 10.00 (254) N 4.80 (122) P 2.00 (51) R Door Clearance S 36.30 (921) T U V W RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 1275 (579)
20.00 (508)
94.00 (2387)
15.50 (394)
29 30 31 32 33
N Lifting Eyes (2 Places) For Reference Only, Dimensions Subject to Change.
RR
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
SS B
T H S A Front View NEMA Type 1
For Cable Entry
M Top View
0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Holes (4 Places) C Side View D1 D Bottom View
F G
IH hp
IL hp 75 100 200 250
41 42 43
208/230V
60 75 100 150 200
480V
Front View NEMA Type 12
Note: No bottom entry/exit. S7 option required.

September 2011
Sheet 31 073

Enclosed Drives
31.4-17

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A 30.00 (762) High B 90.00 (2286) Deep C 26.00 (660) Mounting D 26.50 (673) D1 1.80 (46) D2 E F 17.30 (438) G 5.50 (140) G1 84.40 (2143) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K
22 23 24 25
RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs.(kg) 1500 (681)

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 6 23.5 (597) M 03.30 (84) N 4.50 (114) P 19.30 (490) R Door Clearance S 26.20 (667) T U V W
26 27 28
24.80 (629)
93.90 (2386)
29 30
Door Clearance Top View
31 32
Keypad Flanged Disconnect Supplied with Circuit Breaker When Specified Operator Elements When Specified, Mounted on These Panels
33 34 35
RR
Key-Locking Handle
36 37
Ventilating Slots
38
Quarter Turn Latch (2 Places) C Side View M IH hp 480V 250 300 350 IL hp 300 350 400 N F P G D1 D Bottom View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Hole (4 Places) A Front View L For Cable Entry
39 40 41 42 43
Note: See Page 31.4-10 notes 4 and 5 for enclosure and option selection.


Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 074
22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A 48.00 (1219) High B 90.00 (2286) Deep C 24.00 (610) Mounting D 42.20 (1072) D1 3.00 (77) D2 E F G 5.50 (139) G1 84.40 (2143) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 8 9.50 (241) M 37.50 (952) N 12.50 (318) P 7.70 (196) R 8.30 (210) S 1.30 (32) T 31.00 (787) 21.50 (545) 21.30 (541) 93.50 (2375) U V W RR SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 2000 (908)
For Top Cable Entry (2 Places)
29
R
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
C U A Front View 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Hole (4 Places) IH hp 480V 250 300 350 400 500 550 IL hp 300 350 400 500 550 600 M L For Bottom Cable Entry V B H RR Top View
40 41 42 43
Note: See Page 31.4-10
notes 4 and 5 for enclosure and option selection.
Side View
G D1 D Bottom View

September 2011
Sheet 31 075

Enclosed Drives
31.4-19

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A 60.00 (1524) High B 90.00 (2286) Deep C 26.10 (664) Mounting D 22.90 (582) D1 2.00 (51) D2 30.00 (762) E 44.30 (1125) F 10.60 (270) G 10.60 (270) G1 8.20 (208) H Minimum Air Space J 4.00 (102) K
22 23 24 25
SS TT UU VV Max. Approx. Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 2500 (1135)

Enclosure Size Dimensions in Inches (mm) Cable Entry L 9 8.50 (216) M 32.70 (831) N 12.00 (305) P 11.90 (303) R 9.80 (249) S 1.50 (38) T 43.50 (1105) U 15.00 (381) V 7.50 (191) 25.00 (635) 93.50 (2375) 27.40 (696) 29.10 (738) 27.10 (687) W RR
26 27 28
U R
Access in Top (2 Places)
29
W
30
SS TT 90 Max. Door Opening 90 Max. Door Opening UU
31 32 33
Drive Circuit Breaker
Top View J
34 35
Key-Locking Handle
36
RR B
37 38
39
C Side View M 0.56 (14.2) Dia. Mounting Hole (5 Places) G IH hp 480V IL hp 500 550 600 G1 D1 D D2 E Bottom View 400 500 550 P A Front View L Bottom Access
40 41 42 43
Note: See Page 31.4-10

notes 4 and 5 for enclosure and option selection.


Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 076
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Control Input/Output
Reference Potentiometer 110 kW Terminal Signal +10 Vref AI1+ AI1AI2+ AI2+24V GND DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 CMA +24V GND DIN4 DIN5 Reference output Analog input, voltage range 010 Vdc I/O ground Analog input, current range 020 mA Control voltage output I/O ground Start forward Start reverse External fault input (programmable) Common for DIN1DIN3 Control voltage output I/O ground Multi-step speed select 1 Multi-step speed select 2 Description Voltage for potentiometer, etc. Voltage input frequency reference Ground for reference and controls Current input frequency reference Voltage for switches, etc. maximum 0.1A Ground for reference and controls Contact closed = start forward Contact closed = start reverse Contact open = no fault Contact closed = fault Connect to GND or +24V Voltage for switches (see terminal 6) Ground for reference and controls DIN4 Open Closed Open Closed DIN5 Open Open Closed Closed Frequency ref. Ref.Vin Multi-step Ref.1 Multi-step Ref.2 RefMax
NXOPTA9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Remote Reference 0(4)20 mA
16 17 mA 18 19 20 READY
DIN6 CMB AO1+ AO1DO1
Fault reset Common for DIN4DIN6 Output frequency Analog output Digital output READY
Contact open = no action Contact closed = fault reset Connect to GND or +24V Programmable Range 020 mA, RL maximum 500 Programmable Open collector, I 50 mA, V 48 Vdc Relay Output 1 RUN
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
NXOPTA2
21 RUN 22 23 24 25 26 RO1 RO1 RO1 RO2 RO2 RO2 Relay Output 2 FAULT
Note: For more information on jumper selections, see the SVX9000 user manual, chapter 4.
Figure 31.4-11. Basic Application Default I/O Conguration
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 077
Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage H-Max Series Drives

Enclosed Drives
31.5-1
H-Max Series Drives
Features
Drives

IntelliPass/IntelliDisconnect
Circuit breaker provides exible drive isolation congurations to meet customers needs Robust steel enclosure for simple installation
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
H-Max Series Drives
General Description
Drives
Eatons H-Max Series VFD is the next generation of drives specically engineered for HVAC, pump and uid control applications. Installation, startup and maintenance are worldclass with a combination of an ultra-efcient power section and a programmable main control board. H-Max Series has an expanded startup wizard for HVAC system conguration, which provides the exibility to meet consultants, OEM and end-user requirements.
IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect Drives

Eatons ultra-reliable IntelliPass/ IntelliDisconnect drives are designed with the latest HVAC software and hardware features. The IntelliPass integrates electronic (XT) bypass with optional manual override switch, which allows the unit to run in bypass without the H-Max Series drive. The IntelliDisconnect uses Eatons world-class (XT) MMP (manual motor protector) with optional output contactor.
Integrated DC link choke standard on drives from FS4FS9 DC bus regulation anti-trip Input surge protection against voltage spikes varistor input HAND/OFF/AUTO and DRIVE/ BYPASS selector on keypad simplies control Additional I/O and communication cards provide plug-and-play functionality Keypadcopy/paste function allows transfer of parameter settings from one drive to the next. Also allows for redundant storage of drive settings in keypad as well as drive for backup Battery backupreal-time clock with PLC functionality Two independent PID functions Multimonitor up to nine values 110% overload for 1 minute once every 10 minutes EMC Category 2 Standard EMI/RFI lter Conformal coated boards Troubleshooting diagnostics Onboard RS-485 (Modbus, N2, FLN, BACnet) Onboard Ethernet-based communications (BACnet/IP, Modbus/TCP Separate conduit plate allows access to control and power connections DB chopper standard frames FS4FS6 for 1.540 hp, 1.130 kW, 3.461A, 480 Vac 0.7520 hp, 0.5515 kW, 3.762A, 200240 Vac UL 508C
IntelliPass

Mechanical, electronic and damper interlocks Fire mode Monitored and controlled by onboard communication Two contactor, mechanically interlocked and fully rated bypass Single keypad with HAND/OFF/ AUTO and DRIVE/BYPASS simplies startups and control Two power sources for control ensure redundancy and provide additional ride-through capability NEMA Type 1 Programmable auto restart and auto bypass while allowing critical damper interlock functionality
CA08104001E
31.5-2 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage H-Max Series Drives

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 078
22 23 24 25
H-Max Drives
Features and Benets


Product
IEC 61800-5-1 CE cUL

26
27
H-Max Drives
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
General Description
Eatons H-Max Series VFD has software and hardware designed specically for the HVAC, pump industry. The ultra-efcient DC capacitor and power structure allows the drive to consume less energy, lowering greenhouse gases.

The I/O conguration is designed with wiring ergonomics in mind by including removable terminal blocks. The main, easily removable, control board used for all drive frames with six digital IN, two analog IN, one analog OUT, three relay OUT accepts two additional I/O or communication board. In addition, the control board has built-in RS-485 and Ethernet communication.
These drives continue the tradition of robust performance, and raise the bar on features and functionality, ensuring the best solution at the right price.
Integrated DC link choke standard on drives from FS4 through FS9 DC bus regulation anti-trip Input surge protection against voltage spikes varistor input EMI/RFI lters standard on all drives from FS4 through FS9 to meet EMC Category 2 HAND/OFF/AUTO and DRIVE/ BYPASS selector on keypad simplies control Additional I/O and communication cards provide plug-and-play functionality Copy/paste function allows transfer of parameter settings from one drive to the next Keypad can display up to nine monitored parameters simultaneously Remote mount keypad kit available NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12 available Real-time clock with PLC functionality Two independent PID functions On-screen troubleshooting diagnostics with embedded manual assistance Onboard RS-485 (Modbus, N2, FLN, BACnet) Onboard Ethernet-based communications (BACnet/IP, Modbus/TCP Standard NEMA Type 12 keypad on all drives Quickstart wizard built into programming of drive ensures a smooth startup I/O connections with simple quick connection terminals Control logic can be powered from an external 24V power supply to simulate internal drive functions and eldbus, if necessary, used for testing and software downloads Standard I/O,6DI, 2AI, 1AO 2 Form C RO (NO/NC), 1 Form A RO (NO) Hard wired external/damper interlock
Safety
UL 508C EN 61800-5-1 CE cUL

Seismic Qualication
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 079

Enclosed Drives
31.5-3

Table 31.5-1. H-Max Series Drives Catalog Numbering System
22 23 24
Extended I/O Options in Slot D and E B1 = 6 x DI /DO, Each digital input can be individually programmed as digital output B2 = 1RO (NC/NO), 1RO (NO), 1 Thermistor B4 = 1 x AI, 2 x AO (isolated) B5 = 3 x RO B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/ext +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B9 = 1RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input Optional Communications in Slot D and E C4 = LonWorks Standard Onboard Communications RS-485 Communications BACnet MS/TP = Master slave/token protocol (Universal BACnet) RS-485 Modbus RTU RS-485, ASCII or RTU, remote terminal unit 32 nodes FLN Siemens APOGEE FLN (P1) ASCII or RTU, remote terminal unit 32 nodes N2 = Johnson Controls Metasys N2 network Onboard Ethernet-Based Communications (port left side of keypad) BACnet/IP Ethernet industrial protocol Modbus/TCP Transmission control protocol (Ethernet-based)
HMX 3 4 A G 3D4 2 1 - B
Product HMX = HVAC drive Phase 3 =Three-phase Voltage 2 = 200240V 4 = 380480V Software Series AZ Keypad G = Graphical panel Braking/Application N = No brake chopper (low overload) B = Internal brake chopper (low overload FS4FS6 included) Enclosure 1 = Open NEMA Type 1 IP21 2 = Open NEMA Type 12 IP54 Input Options Frame and Voltage Specific 2 = EMC C2
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Amperes 200240V 3D7 = 3.7A0.75 hp, 0.55 kW 4D8 = 4.8A1 hp, 0.75 kW 6D6 = 6.6A1.5 hp, 1.1 kW 8D0 = 8A2 hp, 1.5 kW 011 = 11A3 hp, 2.2 kW 012 = 12A4 hp, 3 kW 018 = 18A5 hp, 4 kW 024 = 24A7.5 hp, 5.5 kW 031 = 31A10 hp, 7.5 kW 048 = 48A15 hp, 11 kW 062 = 62A20 hp, 15 kW 075 = 75A25 hp, 18.5 kW 088 = 88A30 hp, 22 kW 105 = 105A40 hp, 30 kW 140 = 140A50 hp, 37 kW 170 = 170A60 hp, 45 kW 205 = 205A75 hp, 55 kW 261 = 261A100 hp, 75 kW 310 = 310A125 hp, 90 kW 3D4 4D8 5D6 8D0 9D6 012 016 023 031 038 046 061 072 087 105 140 170 205 261 310 380480V = 3.4A1.5 hp, 1.1 kW = 4.82 hp, 1.5 kW = 5.6A3 hp, 2.2 kW = 8A4 hp, 3 kW = 9.6A5 hp, 4 kW = 12A7.5 hp, 5.5 kW = 16A10 hp, 7.5 kW = 23A15 hp, 11 kW = 31A20 hp, 15 kW = 38A25 hp, 18.5 kW = 46A30 hp, 22 kW = 61A40 hp, 30 kW = 72A50 hp, 37 kW = 87A60 hp, 45 kW = 105A75 hp, 55 kW = 140A100 hp, 75 kW = 170A125 hp, 90 kW = 205A150 hp, 110 kW = 261A200 hp, 132 kW = 310A250 hp, 160 kW
DB chopper standard frames FS4FS6. 1.540 hp, 3.461A, 480 Vac; 0.7520 hp, 3.762A, 200240 Vac.
Notes:
All boards are varnished (conformed coated). Corrosion resistant. Battery included in all drives for real-time clock. Keypad kit includes HOA bypass. Keypad kit includes HOA, back reset for Europe application. EMI/RFI lters included. DC link choke included.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 080
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Product Selection
Table 31.5-2. H-Max Series Drives230 Vac
FS Frame Size Drive Output Current Low Overload Full Load Amperes at 40C 3.7 4.8 6.6 8.0 11.0 12.5 5 18.0 24.0 31.0 48.0 62.0 75.0 88.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0 310.0 3.7 4.8 6.6 8.0 11.0 12.5 5 18.0 24.0 31.0 48.0 62.0 75.0 88.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0 310.0 For sizing reference. Horsepower Assigned Motor Ratings Drive kW 230 Vac/50 Hz 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 90.0 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 90.0 230 Vac NEC Amperes Low Overload Full Load Amperes at 50C
NEMA Type 1/IP21

4 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 3.2 4.2 6.6 6.8 9.6 N/A 15.2 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 104.0 130.0 154.0 192.0 248.0 N/A 3.2 4.2 6.6 6.8 9.6 N/A 15.2 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 104.0 130.0 154.0 192.0 248.0 N/A 2.6 3.7 4.8 6.6 8.0 11.0 12.5 18.0 24.0 31.0 48.0 62.0 75.0 88.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0 2.6 3.7 4.8 6.6 8.0 11.0 12.0 18.0 24.0 31.0 48.0 62.0 75.0 88.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0
6 7
NEMA Type 12/IP54

4
6 7
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 081

Enclosed Drives
31.5-5
Table 31.5-3. H-Max Series Drives480 Vac

FS Frame Size Drive Output Current Low Overload Full Load Amperes at 40C 3.4 4.8 5.6 8.0 9.6 12.0 5 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0 72.0 87.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0 310.0 3.4 4.8 5.6 8.0 9.6 12.0 5 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0 72.0 87.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0 310.0 For sizing reference. Horsepower Assigned Motor Ratings Drive kW 400 Vac/50 Hz 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 90.0 110.0 132.0 160.0 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 90.0 110.0 132.0 160.0 480 Vac NEC Amperes Low Overload Full Load Amperes at 50C
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
NEMA Type 1/IP21

4 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 2.1 3.4 5.6 N/A 7.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 96.0 124.0 156.0 180.0 240.0 302.0 2.1 3.4 5.6 N/A 7.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 96.0 124.0 156.0 180.0 240.0 302.0 2.6 3.4 4.8 5.6 8.0 9.6 12.0 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0 72.0 87.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0 2.6 3.4 4.8 5.6 8.0 9.6 12.0 16.0 23.0 31.0 38.0 46.0 61.0 72.0 87.0 105.0 140.0 170.0 205.0 261.0
NEMA Type 12/IP54

4
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 082
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Onboard Network Communications

Johnson Controls Metasys N2 H-Max Series provides communication between the drive and a Johnson Controls Metasys N2 network. With this connection, the drive can be controlled, monitored and programmed from the Metasys system. N2 can be selected and programmed by the drive keypad. BACnet H-Max Series provides communication to BACnet networks. Data transfer is master-slave/token passing (MS/TP) RS-485. BACnet IP 100Base-T interface. Modbus TCP Ethernet based protocol. Modbus RTU H-Max Series provides communication to Modbus RTU RS-485 as a slave on a Modbus network. Other communication parameters include an address range from 1 to 247; a parity of None, Odd or Even; and the stop bit is 1. FLN H-Max Series provides communication to Siemens APOGEE FLN (P1) RTU RS-485 as a slave on an FLN network. Other communication parameters include an address range from 1 to 247, a parity of None, Odd or Even and option boards.
H-Max Series Option Board Kits Available for Slots D and E

The H-Max Series drives can accommodate a wide selection of expander and adapter option boards to customize the drive for your application needs. The drives control unit is designed to accept a total of two option boards. The H-Max Series factory-installed standard board conguration includes an I/O board and a relay output board. Table 31.5-4. Option Boards Mounted in Slots D and E
Option Kit Description 6 x DI /DO, each digital input can be individually programmed as digital output 1RO Form C (NO/NC), 1RO Form A (NO), 1 thermistor 1 x AI, 2 x AO (isolated) 3 x RO Form A (NO) 1 ext +24 Vdc/ext +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 1RO Form A (NO), 5DI 42240 Vac input LonWorks Option Kit Catalog Number XMX-IO-B1-A
NEMA Type 1 to NEMA Type 12/ IP54 Conversion Kit

The NEMA Type 12/IP54 option kit is used to convert a NEMA Type 1 to a NEMA Type 12 drive. Kit consists of a drive cover, a fan kit and plugs. Table 31.5-5. NEMA Type 12/IP54 Cover
Option Kit Description FS4-branded N12/IP54 cover with gasket, plastic plug, fans, Eaton logos FS5-branded N12/IP54 cover with gasket, plastic plug, fans, Eaton logos FS6-branded N12/IP54 cover with gasket, plastic plug, fans, Eaton logos Option Kit Catalog Number FS4-N12KIT
FS5-N12KIT
FS6-N12KIT
XMX-IO-B2-A XMX-IO-B4-A XMX-IO-B5-A XMX-IO-B8-A XMX-IO-B9-A XMX-COM-C4-A
Flange Kits
The ange kit is used when the power section heat sink is mounted through the back panel of an enclosure.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 083

Enclosed Drives
31.5-7

Table 31.5-6. H-Max Series Drives
Description Specication 200240 Vac, 380480 Vac, 10%/+10% 50/60 Hz (variation up to 4766 Hz) Once per minute or less (typical operation) 100 kAIC 0 to Vin/Uin line voltage in Ambient temperature max. 104F (40C) 1.1 x IL (1 min./10 min.) 110% (1 min./10 min.) 150% for 2 seconds 0 to 320 Hz 0.01 Hz Frequency control (V/f) open loop sensorless vector control 1310A FS49: default 6 kHz Analog input: Resolution 0.1% (10-bit), accuracy 1% Panel reference: Resolution 0.01 Hz 8 to 320 Hz 0.1 to 3000 seconds 0.1 to 3000 seconds DC brake: 30% x Tn (without brake option) FS4FS9: 14F (10C), no frost to 104F (40C) (Drive can operate at 122F (50C), see Pages 31.5-4 and 31.5-5) 40 to 158F (40 to 70C) 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing, non-corrosive, no dripping water Chemical vapors: IEC 60721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3C2; Mechanical particles: IEC 60721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3S2 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 3280 ft (1000m); 1% derating for each 328 ft (100m) above 3280 ft (1000m); max. 9842 ft (3000m); 380480V FS4FS9: EN 61800-5-1, EN 60068-2-6; 5 to 150 Hz, displacement amplitude 1 mm (peak) at 5 to 15.8 Hz, max. acceleration amplitude 1G at 15.8 to 150 Hz EN 61800-5-1, EN 60068-2-27 UPS Drop test (for applicable UPS weights) Storage and shipping: max. 15G, 11 ms (in package) NEMA Type 1/IP21 or NEMA Type 12/IP54 (keypad required for IP54/Type 12)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Input Ratings
Input voltage (Vin) Input frequency (fin) Connection to power Short-circuit withstand rating
Output Ratings
Output voltage Continuous output current IL overload Overload current Initial output current Output frequency Frequency resolution
Control method Switching frequency Frequency reference Field weakening point Acceleration time Deceleration time Braking torque
Ambient Conditions
Ambient operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Air quality Altitude
Vibration Shock Enclosure class
Standards
EMC Emissions Immunity: Fullls all EMC immunity requirements; Emissions: EN 61800-3, LEVEL H (EMC C2) EMC level dependent+EMC 2: EN61800-3 (2004) Category C2 Delivered with Class C2 EMC ltering as default.
38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
31.5-8 Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage Max Series Drives

Enclosed Drives
Table 31.5-6. H-Max Series Drives (Continued)
Description Specication 0 to 10V, R = 200 kohms differential Resolution 0.1%; Accuracy 1% DIP switch selection (voltage/current) 0(4) to 20 mA; Ri 250 ohms differential Positive or negative logic; 18 to 30 Vdc +24V 10%, max. 250 mA +10V +3%, max. load 10 mA 010V, 0(4) to 20 mA; RL max. 500 ohms; Resolution 10 bit; Accuracy 2% DIP switch selection (voltage/current) 3 programmable, 2 Form C, 1 Form A relay outputs Switching capacity: 24 Vdc/8A, 250 Vac/8A, 125 Vdc/0.4A Between terminal 6 and 10 factory default RS-485 = off A01 = current A12 = current A11 = voltage Yes Yes Yes (accelerates or decelerates the load) Yes
September 2011
Sheet 31 084
22 23 24 25 26
Control Connections
Analog input voltage
Analog input current Digital inputs (6) Auxiliary voltage Output reference voltage Analog output
Relay outputs
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Hard wire jumper DIP switch setting default
Protections
Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection DC bus regulation anti-trip Undervoltage protection Earth fault protection Input phase supervision Motor phase supervision Overtemperature protection Motor overload protection Motor stall protection Motor underload protection Short-circuit protection Surge protection Conformed coated (varnished) boards
Yes (in case of earth fault in motor or motor cable, only the frequency converter is protected) Yes (trips if any of the input phases are missing) Yes (trips if any of the output phases are missing) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (varistor input) Yes (prevents corrosion)
Seismic
OHSPD Special Seismic Certication Pre-Approved
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 085

Enclosed Drives
31.5-9
Wiring Diagram
BACnet/IP Ethernet Industrial Protocol Modbus/TCP Transmission Control Protocol (Ethernet Based)
22
DB R+ Chopper RU (T1) V (T2) W (T3) Motor
Optional Resistor
RJ-45
Optional Circuit Breaker
23 24 25 26 27
ON Current AO1 Current AI2 Current AI1 RS-485 OFF Voltage Voltage Voltage
L1 L2 L3
Reactor Three-Phase Input Input (Single-Phase not available)
5% DC Link
Three-Phase Output
Slot A Terminal
Resistor
Factory Default Signal Reference Output Analog Input Voltage (Range 010 Vdc) (can be programmed to current 420 mA) Analog Output Common (Ground) Analog Input Current (Range 420 mA) (can be programmed to voltage 010 Vdc) PI Setpoint or Feedback Analog Input Common PI Setpoint or Feedback Control Voltage Output (0.1A max.) I/O Ground START/STOP (Contact closed = start) External Fault (Closed = fault) Run Interlock Permissive IP Interlock (Closed = OK) DIN1DIN6 Common Control Voltage Output (0.1A max.) I/O Ground Speed Select 0100% (Preset speed) Fire Mode (Contact closed = fire mode) Force Bypass (Contact closed = bypass) DIN1DIN6 Common Output Frequency (020 mA) Analog Output Common (Ground) Auxiliary Input Voltage Slot D __________________ RS-485 DATARS-485 DATA+ Relay Board 1 Default Signal RO1 Bypass Run Programmable BACnet, Modbus, FLN, N2 Slot B 21
RO1 NC
1 2 3 4
+10V AI1+ Vin AI2+ AI2 24Vout GND DIN1 DIN2
Factory Jumper
5 6 7 8 9
28 29 30 31 32 33
10 DIN3 11 COM 12 24Vout 13 GND 14 DIN4 15 DIN5 16 DIN6 17 CMB 18 AO1+ 19 AO1 Analog 30 24 Vdcin A B 21 22 23 24 25 26 32 33 DATADATA+
Terminal Block Layout
34
22
RO1 COM
23
RO1 NO
24
RO2 NC
25
RO2 COM
26
RO2 NO
32
RO3 COM
33
RO3 NO
Slot E __________________
35 36 37 38 39 40
12
13
14
DI4
15
DI5
16
DI6
17
COM DI16
18
AO1+
19
30
24 Vdc GND out
AO1 24 Vdc RS-485 RS-485 in Data Data+
RO2 Drive Run
24 Vdc/8A 250 Vac/8A 125 Vdc/0.4A
1
+10 Vdc
2
AI1+
3
AI1
4
AI2+
5
AI2
6
24 Vdc out
7
GND
8
DI1
9
DI2
10
DI3
11
COM DI16
RO3 Fault
Factory Jumper External Interlock
Figure 31.5-1. Control Input/Output, PID Application
Standards
Digital inputs D1D6, relay out, analog in/out are freely programmed The user can assign a single input to multiple functions
Includes

Reliability

41 42 43
Six digital input Two analog input One analog output Three relay output RS-485 Ethernet (BACnet and Modbus)
Pretested components Conformal coated (varnished) boards 40C rated 110% overload for one minute Eatons Electrical Services & Systems national network of AF drive specialists
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 086
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

W2
H3
H1
W1
H2
W3
Figure 31.5-2. H-Max Series Frames FS4FS7 Table 31.5-7. FS4FS7 Dimensions and Weights
Voltage hp kW Amperes D H1 Hole Center-to-Center H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 Weight in Lbs (kg)
FS4
230 Vac 480 Vac 0.754 0.553.0 3.712.5 1.57.5 1.15.5 3.412 510 1020 1520 2540 2530 5075 47.5 7.515 1115 18.530 18.530 3755 1831 1631 4862 3861 75105 72105 7.77 (197.3) 7.77 (197.3) 8.73 (221.6) 8.73 (221.6) 9.29 (236.0) 9.29 (236.0) 12.89 (327.5) 12.32 (313.0) 12.89 (327.5) 12.32 (313.0) 16.50 (419.0) 15.98 (406.0) 16.50 (419.0) 15.98 (406.0) 21.93 (557.0) 21.28 (540.5) 21.93 (557.0) 21.28 (540.5) 11.22 (285.0) 5.04 (128.0) 3.94 (100.0) 3.94 (100.0) 13.2 (6) 11.22 (285.0) 5.04 (128.0) 3.94 (100.0) 3.94 (100.0) 13.2 (6) 15.04 (382.0) 5.67 (144.0) 4.53 (115.0) 3.94 (100.0) 22.0 (10) 15.04 (382.0) 5.67 (144.0) 4.53 (115.0) 3.94 (100.0) 22.0 (10) 20.24 (514.0) 7.68 (195.0) 5.83 (148.0) 5.83 (148.0) 44.1 (20) 20.24 (514.0) 7.68 (195.0) 5.83 (148.0) 5.83 (148.0) 44.1 (20) 24.29 (617.0) 9.06 (230.0) 7.48 (190.0) 7.48 (190.0) 82.6 (37.5) 24.29 (617.0) 9.06 (230.0) 7.48 (190.0) 7.48 (190.0) 82.6 (37.5)
FS5
230 Vac 480 Vac
FS6
230 Vac 480 Vac
FS7
230 Vac 480 Vac 10.49 (266.5) 25.98 (660.0) 25.39 (645.0) 10.49 (266.5) 25.98 (660.0) 25.39 (645.0)
W1
W2
W3
H3
H1
H2
Figure 31.5-3. H-Max Series Frames FS8 and FS9 Table 31.5-8. FS8 and FS9 Dimensions and Weights
Voltage hp kW Amperes D H1 Hole H3 Center-to-Center H2 W1 W2 W3 Weight in Lbs (kg)
FS8
230 Vac 5075 3755 480 Vac 100150 75110 140205 140205 13.76 (349.6) 38.02 (965.7) 37.26 (946.4) 13.76 (349.6) 38.02 (965.7) 37.26 (946.4) 14.63 (371.6) 33.09 (890.4) 31.89 (810.0) 14.63 (371.6) 33.09 (890.4) 31.89 (810.0) 37.26 (946.4) 11.42 (290.1) 9.29 (236.0) 37.26 (946.4) 11.42 (290.1) 9.29 (236.0) 1.42 (36.0) 154.3 (70) 1.42 (36.0) 154.3 (70)
FS9
230 Vac 100120 7590 261310 480 Vac 200250 132160 261310 31.89 (810.0) 18.90 (480.0) 15.75 (400.0) 1.57 (40.0) 238.1 (108) 31.89 (810.0) 18.90 (480.0) 15.75 (400.0) 1.57 (40.0) 238.1 (108)
Note: For ange dimension, please reference User Manual.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 087

Enclosed Drives
31.5-11
H-Max IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect Drives
Features and Benets

IntelliPass/IntelliDisconnect
IntelliPass

H-Max IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect Drives
General Description
The IntelliPass electronic bypass is a two or optional three contactor design using a 24 Vdc XT Series contactor with an optional manual override switch that allows the unit to run in bypass without the H-Max Series drive. The IntelliPass software parameters use engineering units common to the HVAC industry. Onboard startup wizard guarantees awless commissioning with plug-and-play screen entry. Available in NEMA Type 1 and 12 with optional pre-engineered operator devices to meet all customized specication requirements. The IntelliPass construction features allow for easy installation, reliable operation and serviceability with additional onboard wire space and removable conduit plates with knockouts.
Circuit breaker provides exible drive isolation congurations to meet customers needs Communication interface enables control of the motor operated by the drive or bypass Plenum rated Designed and tested to UL 508C specications Standard DC link choke for enhanced transient and harmonic distortion protection DC bus regulation anti-trip Input surge protection against voltage spikes varistor input EMI/RFI lters standard on all drives to meet EMC Category 2 Top and bottom conduit entry for installation ease Pass-through I/O capability Additional I/O and communication cards provide plug and play functionality Copy/paste keypad function allows transfer of parameter settings from one drive to the next. Also allows for redundant storage of drive settings in keypad as well as drive for backup Optional fusingfuse rating 200 kAIC Keypad can display up to nine monitored parameters simultaneously OHSPD Special Seismic Certication Pre-Approved Standard NEMA Type 12 keypad on all drives Simplied operating menu allows for typical programming changes Accommodates a wide selection of expander boards and adapter boards Control logic can be powered from an external auxiliary control panel Standard I/O, 6 DI, 2 AI, 1 AO, 2 Form C RO, 1 Form A RO Onboard RS-485 (Modbus, N2, FLN, BACnet) Built-in Ethernet communication (BACnet/IP, Modbus/TCP) DB chopper standard frames FS4FS6 for USA application 1.540 hp, 2.152A, 480 Vac 120 hp, 4.254A, 230 Vac 120 hp, 4.660A, 208 Vac Hard wired external/damper interlock
Fully rated, mechanically interlocked contacts HAND/OFF/AUTO and DRIVE/ BYPASS selector on keypad simplies control Two power sources for control ensure redundancy and provide additional ride-through capability Self-healing power supplies Bypass circuit current interrupting rating up to 65 kAIC without fusing Fully featured mechanically interlocked bypass featuring Eatons XT contactors Pre-engineered options to allow custom congurations (see option P150) Robust steel enclosure for simple installation Programmable auto restart and auto bypass while allowing critical damper interlock functionality
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Product
IEC 61800-5-1 CE cUL

Safety
UL 508C EN 61800-5-1 CE cUL OHSPD Special Seismic Certication Pre-Approved

CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 088
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Table 31.5-9. H-Max Series IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect Drives Catalog Numbering System
HMX 011 3 4 B A
Product HMX = HVAC drive (VT) (low overload) NEC Ampere Ratings 208V 4D6 7D5 011 017 025 031 047 060 075 088 4D2 6D8 9D6 016 022 028 042 054 068 080 2D1 3D4 5D6 7D6 011 014 021 027 034 040 052 065 077 096
Software Series Enclosure Style 3 = IntelliPass NEMA Type 1 A = IntelliDisconnect NEMA Type 1 AZ Braking/Application N = No brake chopper (low overload) B = Internal brake; chopper (low overload FS4FS6 included) Voltage 1 = 208V 2 = 230V 4 = 480V
Extended I/O Options in Slot D and E B1 = 6 x DI /DO, Each digital input can be individually programmed as digital output B2 = 1RO (NC/NO), 1RO (NO), 1 Thermistor B4 = 1 x AI, 2 x AO (isolated) B5 = 3 x RO B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/ext +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B9 = 1RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input Optional Communications in Slot D and E C4 = LonWorks EMC Upgrade Option EMC C2 Standard Keypad Options None available
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
4.6A1 hp 7.5A2 hp 11A3 hp 17A5 hp 25A7.5 hp 31A10 hp 47A15 hp 60A20 hp 75A25 hp 88A30 hp 230V 4.2A1 hp 6.8A2 hp 9.6A3 hp 16A5 hp 22A7.5 hp 28A10 hp 42A15 hp 54A20 hp 68A25 hp 80A30 hp 480V 2.1A1 hp 3.4A2 hp 5.6A3 hp 7.6A5 hp 11A7.5 hp 14A10 hp 21A15 hp 27A20 hp 34A25 hp 40A30 hp 52A40 hp 65A50 hp 77A60 hp 96A75 hp
IntelliDisconnect Options P3 = Fused drive isolation PE = Output contactor SA = Space heater w/transformer (Type 3R only) IntelliPass Bypass Options = Fused drive isolation (can not be used with P6) = Third contactor drive isolation = Output contactor (used for IntelliDisconnect) = Manual bypass switch located on front door = Space heater w/transformer (Type 3R only) = Drive test switch (used only with P6 option) = Power on and fault light (two separate lights) = Bypass pilot light (red) = Manual bypass light (amber) = Drive run light = Auxiliary contacts = Isolation switch
P3 P6 PE M1 SA KF L1 L2 L3 LE K9 IS
Standard Onboard Communications RS-485 Communications BACnet MS/TP = Master slave/token protocol (Universal BACnet) RS-485 Modbus RTU RS-485, ASCII or RTU, remote terminal unit 32 nodes FLN Siemens APOGEE FLN (P1) ASCII or RTU, remote terminal unit 32 nodes N2 = Johnson Controls Metasys N2 network Onboard Ethernet-Based Communications (port left side of keypad) BACnet/IP Ethernet industrial protocol Modbus/TCP Transmission control protocol (Ethernet-based)
DB chopper standard frames FS4FS6 for USA application. 1.540 hp, 2.152A, 480 Vac; 120 hp, 4.254A, 230 Vac; 120 hp, 4.660A, 208 Vac.
39 40 41 42 43
Notes: IntelliPasstwo contactor electronic bypass standard. All boards are varnished. Corrosion resistant. Battery included in all drives for real-time clock. Three year lifetime. Keypad kit includes HOA bypass. EMI/RFI lters included. DC link choke included.
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 089

Enclosed Drives
31.5-13
Product Selection
Table 31.5-10. H-Max Series IntelliPass NEMA Type 1 Two Contactor Bypass Standard
FS Frame Size Horsepower Drive Rated NEC Amperes 4.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.9 88.0 4.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 2.1 3.4 5.6 9.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 96.0 5
22
Table 31.5-11. H-Max Series IntelliDisconnect NEMA Type 1 Main Disconnect Standard
FS Frame Size Horsepower Drive Rated NEC Amperes 4.6 7.5 11.0 17.0 25.0 31.0 47.0 60.0 75.0 88.0 4.2 6.8 9.6 15.2 22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 2.1 3.4 5.6 9.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0 77.0 96.0
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
208 Vac
4 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0
208 Vac
4 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0
6 7
6 7
230 Vac
4
230 Vac
4
6 7
6 7
480 Vac
4
480 Vac
4
Note: For Wiring Diagrams, see Page 31.5-17.
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 090
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Onboard Network Communications

Johnson Controls Metasys N2 H-Max Series provides communication between the drive and a Johnson Controls Metasys N2 network. With this connection, the drive can be controlled, monitored and programmed from the Metasys system. N2 can be selected and programmed by the drive keypad. BACnet H-Max Series provides communication to BACnet networks. Data transfer is master-slave/token passing (MS/TP) RS-485. BACnet/IP 100Base-T interface. Modbus TCP Ethernet based protocol. Modbus RTU H-Max Series provides communication to Modbus RTU RS-485 as a slave on a Modbus network. Other communication parameters include an address range from 1 to 247; a parity of None, Odd or Even; and the stop bit is 1. FLN H-Max Series provides communication to Siemens APOGEE FLN (P1) RTU RS-485 as a slave on an FLN network. Other communication parameters include an address range from 1 to 247, a parity of None, Odd or Even and option boards.
H-Max IntelliPass/IntelliDisconnect
Table 31.5-12. Primary Design Features
Description CB MMP Two-contactor bypass Mechanical interlock Electrical interlock Third contactor (isolation) Isolation switch Top entry (power) Bottom entry (power) Output contactor IntelliPass Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard IntelliDisconnect Standard N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Standard Standard Optional

Table 31.5-13. H-Max Series Drives
Description Specication 208, 230, 480 Vac, 10%/+10% 50/60 Hz (variation up to 4766 Hz) Once per minute or less (typical operation) 65 kAIC combination 0 to Vin/Uin line voltage in Ambient temperature max. 104F (40C) 1.1 x IL (1 min./10 min.) 110% (1 min./10 min.) 150% for 2 seconds 0 to 320 Hz 0.01 Hz Frequency control (V/f) open loop sensorless vector control 1310A; adjustable with parameter 2.6.9 FS4FS7: default 6 kHz Analog input: Resolution 0.1% (10-bit), accuracy 1% Panel reference: Resolution 0.01 Hz 8 to 320 Hz 0.1 to 3000 seconds 0.1 to 3000 seconds DC brake: 30% x Tn (without brake option) FS4FS7: 14F (10C), no frost to 104F (40C) (Drive can operate at 122F (50C) 40 to 158F (40 to 70C) 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing, non-corrosive, no dripping water Chemical vapors: IEC 60721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3C2; Mechanical particles: IEC 60721-3-3, unit in operation, Class 3S2 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 3280 ft (1000m); 1% derating for each 328 ft (100m) above 3280 ft (1000m); max. 9842 ft (3000m); 380480V FS4FS7: EN 61800-5-1, EN 60068-2-6; 5 to 150 Hz, displacement amplitude 1 mm (peak) at 5 to 15.8 Hz, max. acceleration amplitude 1G at 15.8 to 150 Hz EN 61800-5-1, EN 60068-2-27 UPS Drop test (for applicable UPS weights) Storage and shipping: max. 15G, 11 ms (in package) NEMA Type 1/IP21 or NEMA Type 12/IP54 (keypad required for IP54/Type 12)
Input Ratings
Input voltage (Vin) Input frequency (fin) Connection to power Short-circuit withstand rating
Output Ratings
Output voltage Continuous output current IL overload Overload current Initial output current Output frequency Frequency resolution
Control method Switching frequency Frequency reference Field weakening point Acceleration time Deceleration time Braking torque
NEMA Type 12/IP54 Conversion Kit

The NEMA Type 12/IP54 option kit is used to convert a NEMA Type 1 to a NEMA Type 12 drive. Kit consists of a drive cover, a fan kit and plugs.
Ambient Conditions
Ambient operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Air quality Altitude
Vibration
Shock
Enclosure class
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 091

Enclosed Drives
31.5-15
Table 31.5-13. H-Max Series Drives (Continued)

Description Specication Immunity: Fullls all EMC immunity requirements; Emissions: EN 61800-3, LEVEL H (EMC C2) EMC level dependent +EMC 2: EN61800-3 (2004) Category C2 Delivered with Class C2 EMC ltering as default. 0 to 10V, R = 200 kohms differential Resolution 0.1%; Accuracy 1% DIP switch selection (voltage/current) 0(4) to 20 mA; Ri 250 ohms differential Positive or negative logic; 18 to 30 Vdc +24V 10%, max. 250 mA +10V +3%, max. load 10 mA 010V, 0(4) to 20 mA; RL max. 500 ohms; Resolution 10 bit; Accuracy 2%; DIP switch selection (voltage/current) 3 programmable, 2 Form C, 1 Form A relay outputs Switching capacity: 24 Vdc/8A, 250 Vac/8A, 125 Vdc/0.4A Between terminal 6 and 10 factory default RS-485 = off A01 = current A12 = current A11 = voltage Yes Yes Yes (accelerates or decelerates the load) Yes Yes (in case of earth fault in motor or motor cable, only the frequency converter is protected) Yes (trips if any of the input phases are missing) Yes (trips if any of the output phases are missing) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (varistor input) Yes (prevents corrosion)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Standards
EMC Emissions
Control Connections
Analog input voltage
Analog input current Digital inputs (six) Auxiliary voltage Output reference voltage Analog output
Relay outputs Hard wire jumper DIP switch setting default
Protections
Overcurrent protection Overvoltage protection DC bus regulation anti-trip Undervoltage protection Earth fault protection Input phase supervision Motor phase supervision Overtemperature protection Motor overload protection Motor stall protection Motor underload protection Short-circuit protection Surge protection Conformed coated (varnished) board
Seismic
OHSPD Special Seismic Certication Pre-Approved
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 092
22 23
Wiring Diagrams
RJ-45
Optional
BACnet/IP Ethernet Industrial Protocol Modbus/TCP Transmission Control Protocol (Ethernet Based)
DB R+ Chopper RU (T1) V (T2) W (T3)
Optional Resistor
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Circuit Breaker
L1 L2 L3
Reactor Three-Phase Input Input (Single-Phase not available)
5% DC Link
Three-Phase Output
Motor
Slot A Terminal
Resistor
Factory Default Signal Reference Output Analog Input Voltage (Range 010 Vdc) (can be programmed to current 420 mA) Analog Output Common (Ground) Analog Input Current (Range 420 mA) (can be programmed to voltage 010 Vdc) PI Setpoint or Feedback Analog Input Common PI Setpoint or Feedback Control Voltage Output (0.1A max.) I/O Ground START/STOP (Contact closed = start) External Fault (Closed = fault) Run Interlock Permissive IP Interlock (Closed = OK) DIN1DIN6 Common Control Voltage Output (0.1A max.) I/O Ground Speed Select 0100% (Preset speed) Fire Mode (Contact closed = fire mode) Force Bypass (Contact closed = bypass) DIN1DIN6 Common Output Frequency (020 mA) Analog Output Common (Ground) Auxiliary Input Voltage Slot D __________________ RS-485 DATARS-485 DATA+ Relay Board 1 Default Signal RO1 Bypass Run Programmable BACnet, Modbus, FLN, N2 Slot B 21
RO1 NC
1 2 3 4
+10V AI1+ Vin AI2+ AI2 24Vout GND DIN1 DIN2
ON Current AO1 Current AI2 Current
RS-485 OFF Voltage Voltage AI1 Voltage
Factory Jumper
5 6 7 8 9
10 DIN3 11 COM 12 24Vout 13 GND 14 DIN4 15 DIN5 16 DIN6 17 CMB 18 AO1+ 19 AO1 Analog 30 24 Vdcin A B 21 22 23 24 25 26 32 33 DATADATA+
Terminal Block Layout
22
RO1 COM
23
RO1 NO
24
RO2 NC
25
RO2 COM
26
RO2 NO
32
RO3 COM
33
RO3 NO
Slot E __________________
12
13
14
DI4
15
DI5
16
DI6
17
COM DI16
18
AO1+
19
30
24 Vdc GND out
AO1 24 Vdc RS-485 RS-485 in Data Data+
RO2 Drive Run
24 Vdc/8A 250 Vac/8A 125 Vdc/0.4A
1
+10 Vdc
2
AI1+
3
AI1
4
AI2+
5
AI2
6
24 Vdc out
7
GND
8
DI1
9
DI2
10
DI3
11
COM DI16
RO3 Fault
Factory Jumper External Interlock
Figure 31.5-4. Control Input/Output, PID Application
Standards
Digital inputs D1D6, relay out, analog in/out are freely programmed The user can assign a single input to multiple functions
Includes

Reliability
Pretested components Conformal coated (varnished) boards 40C rated 110% overload for one minute Eatons Electrical Services & Systems national network of AF drive specialists

Six digital input Two analog input One analog output Three relay output RS-485 Ethernet
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 31 093

Enclosed Drives
31.5-17
Incoming Power L2 L1 L3 Bypass Circuit Breaker
Incoming Power L2 L1 L3
22 23
Circuit Breaker
24 25
Optional Fuse or Drive Input Contactor L1 L2 L3
Optional Fuse
26
To Drive Input
27 28 29 30 31
To Drive Input
To Drive Output
U(T1) V(T2)W(T3) To Drive Output Optional Output Contactor Bypass Contactor V(T2) U(T1) Motor W(T3)
U(T1) V(T2)W(T3) Output Contactor
32 33
Overload Relay
Figure 31.5-6. H-Max Series IntelliDisconnect Power Wiring
34 35 36
V(T2) U(T1) Motor W(T3)
Figure 31.5-5. H-Max Series IntelliPass
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E

Enclosed Drives
September 2011
Sheet 31 094
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

W1 H3 D1
H4 H1 H2
W2
W3
D3
D2
Figure 31.5-7. H-Max Series IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect Drives

Note: Consult factory or use manual for nal dimensions.
Table 31.5-14. IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect Drive Dimensions and Weights

Frame Size FS4 Voltage 208 230 480 208 230 480 208 230 480 208 230 480 Horsepower (IL) 13 13 17.5 510 510 1020 1520 1520 2540 2530 2530 5075 H1 29.69 (754.1) 37.00 (939.8) 45.08 (1145.0) 58.32 (1481.3) H2 37.12 (942.9) 34.47 (875.5) 40.28 (1023.1) 56.30 (1430.0) H3 0.25 (6.35) 0.25 (6.35) 0.25 (6.35) 0.25 (6.35) H4 31.00 (914.4) 38.31 (973.0) 46.4 (1178.6) 59.46 (1510.3) C 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 4.00 (101.6) 5.00 (127.0) W1 7.88 (200.2) 9.40 (238.8) 10.90 (276.9) 13.98 (355.1) W2 6.33 (160.8) 7.75 (196.9) 9.35 (327.5) 12.35 (313.7) W3 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) D1 11.40 (289.6) 15.30 (388.6) 15.75 (400.0) 15.50 (393.7) D2 9.27 (235.5) 13.17 (334.6) 13.62 (346.0) 13.55 (244.2) Weight in Lbs (kg) 45.0 (20.41) 57.5 (26.10) 98.0 (44.45) 165.0 (74.84)
FS5
FS6
FS7
Note: C distance is spacing required to mount multiple drives.
CA08104001E
Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays & Pilot Devices

September 2011
Sheet 32 001
32.0-1
Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays & Pilot Devices
Contents
Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays & Pilot Devices Pushbuttons, Selector Switches & Indicating Lights M22, C22, 10250T, E34, HT800, E30 Series Pilot Devices Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1 Ground Fault Relays and Monitors Type D64 SeriesDigital Ground Fault Relay System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2-1 EGF Series Ground Fault Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2-8 Current Sensing and Monitoring D65C SeriesOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2-11 Voltage Monitoring Relays D65 SeriesVoltage Monitoring Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-1 D65 SeriesVoltage Band Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-3 D85 SeriesAlternating Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-4 General Purpose Plug-In Relays Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.4-1 Multi-Pole Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.4-4 Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.4-5 Counting and Timing Relays Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 1/32 DIN LCDTimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 Durant E42DIR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-4 Durant E42A24M Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-4 Panel MetersEclipse Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-4 Specications See Eatons Product Specication Guide, available on CD or on the Web. CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 Sections 16902, Sections 26 29 05, 16903 26 09 11
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Control Relays, Pushbuttons and Selector Switches
CA08104001E
32.0-2 Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays & Pilot Devices

September 2011
Sheet 32 002
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 32 003
Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays & Pilot Devices Pushbuttons, Selector Switches & Indicating Lights
M22, C22, 10250T SeriesPi

2011 Consulting Application Guide Contents Eaton

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Consulting Application Guide Contents Eaton

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Sector

15th Edition June 2012

Consulting Application Guide

2011 Consulting Application Guide Contents

Power Management Products Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

Circuit Breakers & Safety Switches

Medium Voltage Equipment

Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide

Unit Substations & Transformers

Low Voltage Distribution Equipment

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

2011 Consulting Application Guide Copyright

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

ANSI Voltage Classications

Terms and Conditions

Technical and Descriptive Publications

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Copyright 2011, Eaton Corporation.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

New Features of the Consulting Application Guide15th Edition

CD and Product Specications

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Delivering the Promise of Power Through the Power of Information

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-2 Alphabetical Index

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-4 Alphabetical Index

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-6 Alphabetical Index

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-8 Alphabetical Index

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-10 Alphabetical Index

PV System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7 31.0-7

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-12 Alphabetical Index

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-14 Alphabetical Index

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

ii-16 Alphabetical Index

This page intentionally left blank.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Power Distribution Systems

Power Distribution Systems

Designing a Distribution System

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Power Distribution Systems

This page intentionally left blank.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Power Distribution Systems System Design

Modern Electric Power Technologies

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Power Distribution Systems System Design

Goals of System Design